[Title 49 CFR ]
[Code of Federal Regulations (annual edition) - October 1, 2002 Edition]
[From the U.S. Government Printing Office]



[[Page i]]



                    49


          Parts 100 to 185

                         Revised as of October 1, 2002

Transportation





          Containing a codification of documents of general 
          applicability and future effect
          As of October 1, 2002
          With Ancillaries
          Published by
          Office of the Federal Register
          National Archives and Records
          Administration

A Special Edition of the Federal Register



[[Page ii]]

                                      




                     U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE
                            WASHINGTON : 2002



  For sale by the Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government Printing 
                                  Office
  Internet: bookstore.gpo.gov Phone: toll free (866) 512-1800; DC area 
                              (202) 512-1800
      Fax: (202) 512-2250 Mail: Stop SSOP, Washington, DC 20402-0001



[[Page iii]]




                            Table of Contents



                                                                    Page
  Explanation.................................................       v

  Title 49:
    Subtitle B--Other Regulations Relating to Transportation
          Chapter I--Research and Special Programs 
          Administration, Department of Transportation               5
  Finding Aids:
      Material Approved for Incorporation by Reference........    1097
      Table of CFR Titles and Chapters........................    1109
      Alphabetical List of Agencies Appearing in the CFR......    1127
      List of CFR Sections Affected...........................    1137



[[Page iv]]


      


                     ----------------------------

                     Cite this Code:  CFR
                     To cite the regulations in 
                       this volume use title, 
                       part and section number. 
                       Thus, 49 CFR 106.1 refers 
                       to title 49, part 106, 
                       section 1.

                     ----------------------------

[[Page v]]



                               EXPLANATION

    The Code of Federal Regulations is a codification of the general and 
permanent rules published in the Federal Register by the Executive 
departments and agencies of the Federal Government. The Code is divided 
into 50 titles which represent broad areas subject to Federal 
regulation. Each title is divided into chapters which usually bear the 
name of the issuing agency. Each chapter is further subdivided into 
parts covering specific regulatory areas.
    Each volume of the Code is revised at least once each calendar year 
and issued on a quarterly basis approximately as follows:

Title 1 through Title 16.................................as of January 1
Title 17 through Title 27..................................as of April 1
Title 28 through Title 41...................................as of July 1
Title 42 through Title 50................................as of October 1

    The appropriate revision date is printed on the cover of each 
volume.

LEGAL STATUS

    The contents of the Federal Register are required to be judicially 
noticed (44 U.S.C. 1507). The Code of Federal Regulations is prima facie 
evidence of the text of the original documents (44 U.S.C. 1510).

HOW TO USE THE CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS

    The Code of Federal Regulations is kept up to date by the individual 
issues of the Federal Register. These two publications must be used 
together to determine the latest version of any given rule.
    To determine whether a Code volume has been amended since its 
revision date (in this case, October 1, 2002), consult the ``List of CFR 
Sections Affected (LSA),'' which is issued monthly, and the ``Cumulative 
List of Parts Affected,'' which appears in the Reader Aids section of 
the daily Federal Register. These two lists will identify the Federal 
Register page number of the latest amendment of any given rule.

EFFECTIVE AND EXPIRATION DATES

    Each volume of the Code contains amendments published in the Federal 
Register since the last revision of that volume of the Code. Source 
citations for the regulations are referred to by volume number and page 
number of the Federal Register and date of publication. Publication 
dates and effective dates are usually not the same and care must be 
exercised by the user in determining the actual effective date. In 
instances where the effective date is beyond the cut-off date for the 
Code a note has been inserted to reflect the future effective date. In 
those instances where a regulation published in the Federal Register 
states a date certain for expiration, an appropriate note will be 
inserted following the text.

OMB CONTROL NUMBERS

    The Paperwork Reduction Act of 1980 (Pub. L. 96-511) requires 
Federal agencies to display an OMB control number with their information 
collection request.

[[Page vi]]

Many agencies have begun publishing numerous OMB control numbers as 
amendments to existing regulations in the CFR. These OMB numbers are 
placed as close as possible to the applicable recordkeeping or reporting 
requirements.

OBSOLETE PROVISIONS

    Provisions that become obsolete before the revision date stated on 
the cover of each volume are not carried. Code users may find the text 
of provisions in effect on a given date in the past by using the 
appropriate numerical list of sections affected. For the period before 
January 1, 2001, consult either the List of CFR Sections Affected, 1949-
1963, 1964-1972, 1973-1985, or 1986-2000, published in 11 separate 
volumes. For the period beginning January 1, 2001, a ``List of CFR 
Sections Affected'' is published at the end of each CFR volume.

INCORPORATION BY REFERENCE

    What is incorporation by reference? Incorporation by reference was 
established by statute and allows Federal agencies to meet the 
requirement to publish regulations in the Federal Register by referring 
to materials already published elsewhere. For an incorporation to be 
valid, the Director of the Federal Register must approve it. The legal 
effect of incorporation by reference is that the material is treated as 
if it were published in full in the Federal Register (5 U.S.C. 552(a)). 
This material, like any other properly issued regulation, has the force 
of law.
    What is a proper incorporation by reference? The Director of the 
Federal Register will approve an incorporation by reference only when 
the requirements of 1 CFR part 51 are met. Some of the elements on which 
approval is based are:
    (a) The incorporation will substantially reduce the volume of 
material published in the Federal Register.
    (b) The matter incorporated is in fact available to the extent 
necessary to afford fairness and uniformity in the administrative 
process.
    (c) The incorporating document is drafted and submitted for 
publication in accordance with 1 CFR part 51.
    Properly approved incorporations by reference in this volume are 
listed in the Finding Aids at the end of this volume.
    What if the material incorporated by reference cannot be found? If 
you have any problem locating or obtaining a copy of material listed in 
the Finding Aids of this volume as an approved incorporation by 
reference, please contact the agency that issued the regulation 
containing that incorporation. If, after contacting the agency, you find 
the material is not available, please notify the Director of the Federal 
Register, National Archives and Records Administration, Washington DC 
20408, or call (202) 523-4534.

CFR INDEXES AND TABULAR GUIDES

    A subject index to the Code of Federal Regulations is contained in a 
separate volume, revised annually as of January 1, entitled CFR Index 
and Finding Aids. This volume contains the Parallel Table of Statutory 
Authorities and Agency Rules (Table I). A list of CFR titles, chapters, 
and parts and an alphabetical list of agencies publishing in the CFR are 
also included in this volume.
    An index to the text of ``Title 3--The President'' is carried within 
that volume.
    The Federal Register Index is issued monthly in cumulative form. 
This index is based on a consolidation of the ``Contents'' entries in 
the daily Federal Register.
    A List of CFR Sections Affected (LSA) is published monthly, keyed to 
the revision dates of the 50 CFR titles.

[[Page vii]]


REPUBLICATION OF MATERIAL

    There are no restrictions on the republication of material appearing 
in the Code of Federal Regulations.

INQUIRIES

    For a legal interpretation or explanation of any regulation in this 
volume, contact the issuing agency. The issuing agency's name appears at 
the top of odd-numbered pages.
    For inquiries concerning CFR reference assistance, call 202-741-6000 
or write to the Director, Office of the Federal Register, National 
Archives and Records Administration, Washington, DC 20408 or e-mail 
[email protected].

SALES

    The Government Printing Office (GPO) processes all sales and 
distribution of the CFR. For payment by credit card, call toll free, 
866-512-1800 or DC area, 202-512-1800, M-F, 8 a.m. to 4 p.m. e.s.t. or 
fax your order to 202-512-2250, 24 hours a day. For payment by check, 
write to the Superintendent of Documents, Attn: New Orders, P.O. Box 
371954, Pittsburgh, PA 15250-7954. For GPO Customer Service call 202-
512-1803.

ELECTRONIC SERVICES

    The full text of the Code of Federal Regulations, The United States 
Government Manual, the Federal Register, Public Laws, Public Papers, 
Weekly Compilation of Presidential Documents and the Privacy Act 
Compilation are available in electronic format at www.access.gpo.gov/
nara (``GPO Access''). For more information, contact Electronic 
Information Dissemination Services, U.S. Government Printing Office. 
Phone 202-512-1530, or 888-293-6498 (toll-free). E-mail, 
[email protected].
    The Office of the Federal Register also offers a free service on the 
National Archives and Records Administration's (NARA) World Wide Web 
site for public law numbers, Federal Register finding aids, and related 
information. Connect to NARA's web site at www.nara.gov/fedreg. The NARA 
site also contains links to GPO Access.

                              Raymond A. Mosley,
                                    Director,
                          Office of the Federal Register.

October 1, 2002.



[[Page ix]]



                               THIS TITLE

    Title 49--Transportation is composed of seven volumes. The parts in 
these volumes are arranged in the following order: Parts 1-99, parts 
100-185, parts 186-199, parts 200-399, parts 400-999, parts 1000-1199, 
part 1200 to End. The first volume (parts 1-99) contains current 
regulations issued under subtitle A--Office of the Secretary of 
Transportation; the second volume (parts 100-185) and the third volume 
(parts 186-199) contain the current regulations issued under chapter I--
Research and Special Programs Administration (DOT); the fourth volume 
(parts 200-399) contains the current regulations issued under chapter 
II--Federal Railroad Administration (DOT), and chapter III--Federal 
Motor Carrier Safety Administration (DOT); the fifth volume (parts 400-
999) contains the current regulations issued under chapter IV--Coast 
Guard (DOT), chapter V--National Highway Traffic Safety Administration 
(DOT), chapter VI--Federal Transit Administration (DOT), chapter VII--
National Railroad Passenger Corporation (AMTRAK), and chapter VIII--
National Transportation Safety Board; the sixth volume (parts 1000-1199) 
contains the current regulations issued under chapter X--Surface 
Transportation Board and the seventh volume (part 1200 to End) contains 
the current regulations issued under chapter X--Surface Transportation 
Board, chapter XI--Bureau of Transportation Statistics, and chapter XII-
-Transportation Security Administration, Department of Transportation. 
The contents of these volumes represent all current regulations codified 
under this title of the CFR as of October 1, 2002.

    In the volume containing parts 100-185, see Sec. 172.101 for the 
Hazardous Materials Table, and Sec. 172.102 for the Optional Hazardous 
Materials Table. The Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards appear in 
part 571.

[[Page x]]





[[Page 1]]



                        TITLE 49--TRANSPORTATION




                  (This book contains parts 100 to 185)

  --------------------------------------------------------------------

        SUBTITLE B--Other Regulations Relating To Transportation

                                                                    Part

chapter i--Research and Special Programs Administration, 
  Department of Transportation..............................         105

[[Page 3]]

        Subtitle B--Other Regulations Relating to Transportation

[[Page 5]]



 CHAPTER I--RESEARCH AND SPECIAL PROGRAMS ADMINISTRATION, DEPARTMENT OF 
                             TRANSPORTATION




  --------------------------------------------------------------------

        SUBCHAPTER A--HAZARDOUS MATERIALS AND OIL TRANSPORTATION
Part                                                                Page
105             Hazardous Materials Program definitions and 
                    general procedures......................           7
106             Rulemaking procedures.......................          12
107             Hazardous materials program procedures......          18
110             Hazardous materials public sector training 
                    and planning grants.....................          60
                    SUBCHAPTER B--OIL TRANSPORTATION
130             Oil spill prevention and response plans.....          68
              SUBCHAPTER C--HAZARDOUS MATERIALS REGULATIONS
171             General information, regulations, and 
                    definitions.............................          71
172             Hazardous materials table, special 
                    provisions, hazardous materials 
                    communications, emergency response 
                    information, and training requirements..         104
173             Shippers--general requirements for shipments 
                    and packagings..........................         399
174             Carriage by rail............................         637
175             Carriage by aircraft........................         660
176             Carriage by vessel..........................         679
177             Carriage by public highway..................         736
178             Specifications for packagings...............         759
179             Specifications for tank cars................         989
180             Continuing qualification and maintenance of 
                    packagings..............................        1045
181-185         [Reserved]

[[Page 7]]



        SUBCHAPTER A--HAZARDOUS MATERIALS AND OIL TRANSPORTATION





PART 105--HAZARDOUS MATERIALS PROGRAM DEFINITIONS AND GENERAL PROCEDURES--Table of Contents




                         Subpart A--Definitions

Sec.
105.5  Definitions.

                      Subpart B--General Procedures

105.15  Defined terms used in this subpart.

                Obtaining Guidance and Public Information

105.20  Guidance and interpretations.
105.25  Reviewing public documents.
105.26  Obtaining records on file with RSPA.
105.30  Information made available to the public and request for 
          confidential treatment.

                            Serving Documents

105.35  Serving documents in RSPA proceedings.
105.40  Designated agents for non-residents.

                                Subpoenas

105.45   Issuing a subpoena.
105.50  Serving a subpoena.
105.55  Refusal to obey a subpoena.

    Authority: 49 U.S.C. 5101-5127; 49 CFR 1.53.

    Source: 67 FR 42951, June 25, 2002, unless otherwise noted.



                         Subpart A--Definitions



Sec. 105.5  Definitions

    (a) This part contains the definitions for certain words and phrases 
used throughout this subchapter (49 CFR parts 105 through 110). At the 
beginning of each subpart, the Research and Special Programs 
Administration (``RSPA'' or ``we'') will identify the defined terms that 
are used within the subpart--by listing them--and refer the reader to 
the definitions in this part. This way, readers will know that RSPA has 
given a term a precise meaning and will know where to look for it.
    (b) Terms used in this part are defined as follows:
    Associate Administrator means Associate Administrator for Hazardous 
Materials Safety, Research and Special Programs Administration.
    Approval means written consent, including a competent authority 
approval, from the Associate Administrator or other designated 
Department official, to perform a function that requires prior consent 
under subchapter C of this chapter (49 CFR parts 171 through 180).
    Competent Authority means a national agency that is responsible, 
under its national law, for the control or regulation of some aspect of 
hazardous materials (dangerous goods) transportation. Another term for 
Competent Authority is ``Appropriate authority'' which is used in the 
International Civil Aviation Organization's (ICAO) Technical 
Instructions for the Safe Transport of Dangerous Goods by Air. The 
Associate Administrator is the United States Competent Authority for 
purposes of 49 CFR part 107.
    Competent Authority Approval means an approval by the competent 
authority that is required under an international standard (for example, 
the ICAO Technical Instructions for the Safe Transport of Dangerous 
Goods by Air and the International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code). Any 
of the following may be considered a competent authority approval if it 
satisfies the requirement of an international standard:
    (1) A specific regulation in subchapter A or C of this chapter.
    (2) An exemption or approval issued under subchapter A or C of this 
chapter.
    (3) A separate document issued to one or more persons by the 
Associate Administrator.
    Exemption means a document issued by the Associate Administrator 
under the authority of 49 U.S.C. 5117. The document permits a person to 
perform a function that is not otherwise permitted under subchapter A or 
C of this chapter, or other regulations issued under 49 U.S.C. 5101 et 
seq. (e.g., Federal Motor Carrier Safety routing requirements.)

[[Page 8]]

    Federal hazardous material transportation law means 49 U.S.C. 5101 
et seq.
    File or Filed means received by the appropriate RSPA or other 
designated office within the time specified in a regulation or 
rulemaking document.
    Hazardous material means a substance or material that the Secretary 
of Transportation has determined is capable of posing an unreasonable 
risk to health, safety, and property when transported in commerce, and 
has designated as hazardous under section 5103 of Federal hazardous 
materials transportation law (49 U.S.C. 5103). The term includes 
hazardous substances, hazardous wastes, marine pollutants, elevated 
temperature materials, materials designated as hazardous in the 
Hazardous Materials Table (see 49 CFR 172.101), and materials that meet 
the defining criteria for hazard classes and divisions in part 173 of 
subchapter C of this chapter.
    Hazardous Materials Regulations or HMR means the regulations at 49 
CFR parts 171 through 180.
    Indian tribe has the same meaning given that term in section 4 of 
the Indian Self-Determination and Education Assistance Act (25 U.S.C. 
450b).
    Person means an individual, firm, copartnership, corporation, 
company, association, or joint-stock association (including any trustee, 
receiver, assignee, or similar representative); or a government or 
Indian tribe (or an agency or instrumentality of any government or 
Indian tribe) that transports a hazardous material to further a 
commercial enterprise or offers a hazardous material for transportation 
in commerce. Person does not include the following:
    (1) The United States Postal Service.
    (2) Any agency or instrumentality of the Federal government, for the 
purposes of 49 U.S.C. 5123 (civil penalties) and 5124 (criminal 
penalties).
    (3) Any government or Indian tribe (or an agency or instrumentality 
of any government or Indian tribe) that transports hazardous material 
for a governmental purpose.
    Political subdivision means a municipality; a public agency or other 
instrumentality of one or more States, municipalities, or other 
political body of a State; or a public corporation, board, or commission 
established under the laws of one or more States.
    Preemption determination means an administrative decision by the 
Associate Administrator that Federal hazardous materials law does or 
does not void a specific State, political subdivision, or Indian tribe 
requirement.
    Regulations issued under Federal hazardous materials transportation 
law means regulations contained in subchapter A of this chapter (49 CFR 
parts 105 through 110) and in subchapter C of this chapter (49 CFR parts 
171 through 180).
    State means a State of the United States, the District of Columbia, 
the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, the Commonwealth of the Northern 
Mariana Islands, the Virgin Islands, American Samoa, Guam, or any other 
territory or possession of the United States designated by the 
Secretary.
    Transports or Transportation means the movement of property and 
loading, unloading, or storage incidental to the movement.
    Waiver of Preemption means a decision by the Associate Administrator 
to forego preemption of a non-Federal requirement--that is, to allow a 
State, political subdivision or Indian tribe requirement to remain in 
effect. The non-Federal requirement must provide at least as much public 
protection as the Federal hazardous materials transportation law and the 
regulations issued under Federal hazardous materials transportation law, 
and may not unreasonably burden commerce.



                      Subpart B--General Procedures



Sec. 105.15  Defined terms used in this subpart.

    The following defined terms (see subpart A of this part) appear in 
this subpart: Approval; Exemption; Federal hazardous material 
transportation law; Hazardous material; Hazardous materials regulations; 
Indian tribe; Preemption determination; State; Transportation; Waiver of 
preemption

[[Page 9]]

                Obtaining Guidance and Public Information



Sec. 105.20  Guidance and interpretations.

    (a) Hazardous materials regulations. You can obtain information and 
answers to your questions on compliance with the hazardous materials 
regulations (49 CFR parts 171 through 180) and interpretations of those 
regulations by contacting RSPA's Office of Hazardous Materials Safety as 
follows:
    (1) Call the Hazardous Materials Information Center at 1-800-467-
4922 (in Washington, DC, call 202-366-4488). The Center is staffed from 
9 a.m. through 5 p.m. Eastern time, Monday through Friday except Federal 
holidays. After hours, you can leave a recorded message and your call 
will be returned by the next business day.
    (2) E-mail the Hazardous Materials Information Center at 
[email protected].
    (3) Access the Office of Hazardous Materials Safety home page via 
the Internet at http://hazmat.dot.gov.
    (4) Send a letter, with your return address and a daytime telephone 
number, to: Office of Hazardous Materials Standards, Research and 
Special Programs Administration, Attn: DHM-10, U.S. Department of 
Transportation, 400 7th Street SW., Washington, DC 20590-0001.
    (b) Federal hazardous materials transportation law and preemption. 
You can obtain information and answers to your questions on Federal 
hazardous materials transportation law, 49 U.S.C. 5101 et seq., and 
Federal preemption of State, local, and Indian tribe hazardous material 
transportation requirements, by contacting RSPA's Office of the Chief 
Counsel as follows:
    (1) Call the office of the Chief Counsel at (202) 366-4400 from 9 
a.m. to 5 p.m. Eastern time, Monday through Friday except Federal 
holidays.
    (2) Access the Office of the Chief Counsel's home page via the 
Internet at http://rspa-atty.dot.gov.
    (3) Send a letter, with your return address and a daytime telephone 
number, to: Office of the Chief Counsel, Research and Special Programs 
Administration, Attn: DCC-10, U.S. Department of Transportation, 
Washington, DC 20590-0001.
    (4) Contact the Office of the Chief Counsel for a copy of 
applications for preemption determinations, waiver of preemption 
determinations, and inconsistency rulings received by RSPA before 
February 1, 1997.



Sec. 105.25  Reviewing public documents.

    RSPA is required by statute to make certain documents and 
information available to the public. You can review and copy publicly 
available documents and information at the locations described in this 
section.
    (a) DOT Docket Management System. Unless a particular document says 
otherwise, the following documents are available for public review and 
copying at the Department of Transportation's Docket Management System, 
Room PL 401, 400 7th Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590-0001, or for 
review and downloading through the Internet at http://dms.dot.gov:
    (1) Rulemaking documents in proceedings started after February 1, 
1997, including notices of proposed rulemaking, advance notices of 
proposed rulemaking, public comments, related Federal Register notices, 
final rules, appeals, and RSPA's decisions in response to appeals.
    (2) Applications for exemption numbered DOT-E 11832 and above. Also 
available are supporting data, memoranda of any informal meetings with 
applicants, related Federal Register notices, public comments, and 
decisions granting or denying exemptions applications.
    (3) Applications for preemption determinations and waiver of 
preemption determinations received by RSPA after February 1, 1997. Also 
available are public comments, Federal Register notices, and RSPA's 
rulings, determinations, decisions on reconsideration, and orders issued 
in response to those applications.
    (b) Office of Hazardous Materials Safety. (1) You may obtain 
documents (e.g., proposed and final rules, notices, letters of 
clarification, safety notices, DOT forms and other documents) by using 
the ``Fax On Demand'' system. To reach the ``Fax On Demand'' system, 
dial 1-800-467-4922 and select Option 2. You may choose documents to be 
faxed to your machine.

[[Page 10]]

    (2) Upon your written request, we will make the following documents 
and information available to you:
    (i) Appeals under 49 CFR part 107 and RSPA's decisions issued in 
response to those appeals.
    (ii) Records of compliance order proceedings and RSPA compliance 
orders.
    (iii) Applications for approvals, including supporting data, 
memoranda of any informal meetings with applicants, and decisions 
granting or denying approvals applications.
    (iv) Applications for exemptions numbered below DOT-E 11832 and 
related background information are available for public review and 
copying at the Office of Hazardous Materials Safety, Office of Hazardous 
Materials Exemptions and Approvals, U.S. Department of Transportation, 
Room 8100, 400 7th Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590-0001.
    (v) Other information about RSPA's hazardous materials program 
required by statute to be made available to the public for review and 
copying and any other information RSPA decides should be available to 
the public.
    (3) Your written request to review documents should include the 
following:
    (i) A detailed description of the documents you wish to review.
    (ii) Your name, address, and telephone number.
    (4) Send your written request to: Associate Administrator for 
Hazardous Materials Safety, Research and Special Programs 
Administration, Attn: DHM-1, U.S. Department of Transportation, 400 7th 
Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590-0001.

[67 FR 42951, June 25, 2002, as amended at 67 FR 61010, Sept. 27, 2002]



Sec. 105.26  Obtaining records on file with RSPA.

    To obtain records on file with RSPA, other than those described in 
Sec. 105.25, you must file a request with RSPA under the Freedom of 
Information Act (FOIA) (5 U.S.C. 552). The procedures for filing a FOIA 
request are contained in 49 CFR part 7.



Sec. 105.30  Information made available to the public and request for confidential treatment.

    When you submit information to RSPA during a rulemaking proceeding, 
as part of your application for exemption or approval, or for any other 
reason, we may make that information publicly available unless you ask 
that we keep the information confidential.
    (a) Asking for confidential treatment. You may ask us to give 
confidential treatment to information you give to the agency by taking 
the following steps:
    (1) Mark ``confidential'' on each page of the original document you 
would like to keep confidential.
    (2) Send us, along with the original document, a second copy of the 
original document with the confidential information deleted.
    (3) Explain why the information you are submitting is confidential 
(for example, it is exempt from mandatory public disclosure under the 
Freedom of Information Act, 5 U.S.C. 552 or it is information referred 
to in 18 U.S.C. 1905).
    (b) RSPA Decision. RSPA will decide whether or not to treat your 
information as confidential. We will notify you, in writing, of a 
decision to grant or deny confidentiality at least five days before the 
information is publicly disclosed, and give you an opportunity to 
respond.

                            Serving Documents



Sec. 105.35  Serving documents in RSPA proceedings.

    (a) Service by RSPA. We may serve the document by one of the 
following methods, except where a different method of service is 
specifically required:
    (1) Registered or certified mail.
    (i) If we serve a document by registered or certified mail, it is 
considered served when mailed.
    (ii) An official United States Postal Service receipt from the 
registered or certified mailing is proof of service.
    (iii) We may serve a person's authorized representative or agent by 
registered or certified mail, or in any other manner authorized by law. 
Service on a person's authorized agent is the same as service on the 
person.

[[Page 11]]

    (2) Personal service.
    (3) Publication in the Federal Register.
    (b) Service by others. If you are required under this subchapter to 
serve a person with a document, serve the document by one of the 
following methods, except where a different method of service is 
specifically required:
    (1) Registered or certified mail.
    (i) If you serve a document by registered or certified mail, it is 
considered served when mailed.
    (ii) An official United States Postal Service receipt from the 
registered or certified mailing is proof of service.
    (iii) You may serve a person's authorized representative or agent by 
registered or certified mail or in any other manner authorized by law. 
Service on a person's authorized agent is the same as service on the 
person.
    (2) Personal service.
    (3) Electronic service.
    (i) In a proceeding under Sec. 107.317 of this subchapter (an 
administrative law judge proceeding), you may electronically serve 
documents on us.
    (ii) Serve documents electronically through the Internet at http://
dms.dot.gov.



Sec. 105.40  Designated agents for non-residents.

    (a) General requirement. If you are not a resident of the United 
States but are required by this subchapter or subchapter C of this 
chapter to designate a permanent resident of the United States to act as 
your agent and receive documents on your behalf, you must prepare a 
designation and file it with us.
    (b) Agents. An agent:
    (1) May be an individual, a firm, or a domestic corporation.
    (2) May represent any number of principals.
    (3) May not reassign responsibilities under a designation to another 
person.
    (c) Preparing a designation. Your designation must be written and 
dated, and it must contain the following information:
    (1) The section in the HMR that requires you to file a designation.
    (2) A certification that the designation is in the correct legal 
form required to make it valid and binding on you under the laws, 
corporate bylaws, and other requirements that apply to designations at 
the time and place you are making the designation.
    (3) Your full legal name, the principal name of your business, and 
your mailing address.
    (4) A statement that your designation will remain in effect until 
you withdraw or replace it.
    (5) The legal name and mailing address of your agent.
    (6) A declaration of acceptance signed by your agent.
    (d) Address. Send your designation to:
    Office of Hazardous Materials Exemptions and Approvals Research and 
Special Programs Administration, Attn: DHM-30, U.S. Department of 
Transportation 400 7th Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590-0001.
    (e) Designations are binding. You are bound by your designation of 
an agent, even if you did not follow all the requirements in this 
section, until we reject your designation.

                                Subpoenas



Sec. 105.45  Issuing a subpoena.

    (a) Subpoenas explained. A subpoena is a document that may require 
you to attend a proceeding, produce documents or other physical evidence 
in your possession or control, or both. RSPA may issue a subpoena either 
on its initiative or at the request of someone participating in a 
proceeding. Anyone who requests that RSPA issue a subpoena must show 
that the subpoena seeks information that will materially advance the 
proceeding.
    (b) Attendance and mileage expenses.
    (1) If you receive a subpoena to attend a proceeding under this 
part, you may receive money to cover attendance and mileage expenses. 
The attendance and mileage fees will be the same as those paid to a 
witness in a proceeding in the district courts of the United States.
    (2) If RSPA issues a subpoena to you based upon a request, the 
requester must serve a copy of the original subpoena on you, as required 
in Sec. 105.50. The requester must also include attendance and mileage 
fees with the subpoena unless the requester asks

[[Page 12]]

RSPA to pay the attendance and mileage fees because of demonstrated 
financial hardship and RSPA agrees to do so.
    (3) If RSPA issues a subpoena at the request of an officer or agency 
of the Federal government, the officer or agency is not required to 
include attendance and mileage fees when serving the subpoena. The 
officer or agency must pay the fees before you leave the hearing at 
which you testify.



Sec. 105.50  Serving a subpoena.

    (a) Personal service. Anyone who is not an interested party and who 
is at least 18 years of age may serve you with a subpoena and fees by 
handing the subpoena and fees to you, by leaving them at your office 
with the individual in charge, or by leaving them at your house with 
someone who lives there and is capable of making sure that you receive 
them. If RSPA issues a subpoena to an entity, rather than an individual, 
personal service is made by delivering the subpoena and fees to the 
entity's registered agent for service of process or to any officer, 
director or agent in charge of any of the entity's offices.
    (b) Service by mail. You may be served with a copy of a subpoena and 
fees by certified or registered mail at your last known address. Service 
of a subpoena and fees may also be made by registered or certified mail 
to your agent for service of process or any of your representatives at 
that person's last known address.
    (c) Other methods. You may be served with a copy of a subpoena by 
any method where you receive actual notice of the subpoena and receive 
the fees before leaving the hearing at which you testify.
    (d) Filing after service. After service is complete, the individual 
who served a copy of a subpoena and fees must file the original subpoena 
and a certificate of service with the RSPA official who is responsible 
for conducting the hearing.



Sec. 105.55  Refusal to obey a subpoena.

    (a) Quashing or modifying a subpoena. If you receive a subpoena, you 
can ask RSPA to overturn (``quash'') or modify the subpoena within 10 
days after the subpoena is served on you. Your request must briefly 
explain the reasons you are asking for the subpoena to be quashed or 
modified. RSPA may then do the following:
    (1) Deny your request.
    (2) Quash or modify the subpoena.
    (3) Grant your request on the condition that you satisfy certain 
specified requirements.
    (b) Failure to obey. If you disobey a subpoena, RSPA may ask the 
Attorney General to seek help from the United States District Court for 
the appropriate District to compel you, after notice, to appear before 
RSPA and give testimony, produce subpoenaed documents or physical 
evidence, or both.



PART 106--RULEMAKING PROCEDURES--Table of Contents




                  Subpart A--RSPA Rulemaking Documents

Sec.
106.5  Defined terms used in this subpart.
106.10  Process for issuing rules.
106.15  Advance notice of proposed rulemaking.
106.20  Notice of proposed rulemaking.
106.25  Revising regulations without first issuing an ANPRM or NPRM.
106.30  Final rule.
106.35  Interim final rule.
106.40  Direct final rule.
106.45  Tracking rulemaking actions.

           Subpart B--Participating in the Rulemaking Process

106.50  Defined terms used in this subpart.
106.55  Public participation in the rulemaking process.

                            Written Comments

106.60  Filing comments.
106.65  Required information for written comments.
106.70  Where and when to file comments.
106.75  Extension of time to file comments.

                  Public Meetings and Other Proceedings

106.80  Public meeting procedures.
106.85  Requesting a public meeting.
106.90  Other rulemaking proceedings.

                        Petitions for Rulemaking

106.95  Requesting a change to the regulations.
106.100  Required information for a petition for rulemaking.
106.105  RSPA response to a petition for rulemaking.

[[Page 13]]

                                 Appeals

106.110  Appealing a RSPA action.
106.115  Required information for an appeal.
106.120  Appeal deadline.
106.125  Filing an appeal.
106.130  RSPA response to an appeal.

    Authority: 49 U.S.C. 5101-5127; 49 CFR 1.53.

    Source: 67 FR 42954, June 25, 2002, unless otherwise noted.



                  Subpart A--RSPA Rulemaking Documents



Sec. 106.5  Defined terms used in this subpart.

    The following defined terms (see part 105, subpart A, of this 
subchapter) appear in this subpart: File; Person; State.



Sec. 106.10  Process for issuing rules.

    (a) RSPA (``we'') uses informal rulemaking procedures under the 
Administrative Procedure Act (5 U.S.C. 553) to add, amend, or delete 
regulations. To propose or adopt changes to a regulation, RSPA may issue 
one or more of the following documents. We publish the following 
rulemaking documents in the Federal Register unless we name and 
personally serve a copy of a rule on every person subject to it:
    (1) An advance notice of proposed rulemaking.
    (2) A notice of proposed rulemaking.
    (3) A final rule.
    (4) An interim final rule.
    (5) A direct final rule.
    (b) Each of the rulemaking documents in paragraph (a) of this 
section generally contains the following information:
    (1) The topic involved in the rulemaking document.
    (2) RSPA's legal authority for issuing the rulemaking document.
    (3) How interested persons may participate in the rulemaking 
proceeding (for example, by filing written comments or making oral 
presentations).
    (4) Whom to call if you have questions about the rulemaking 
document.
    (5) The date, time, and place of any public meetings being held to 
discuss the rulemaking document.
    (6) The docket number and regulation identifier number (RIN) for the 
rulemaking proceeding.



Sec. 106.15  Advance notice of proposed rulemaking.

    An advance notice of proposed rulemaking (ANPRM) tells the public 
that RSPA is considering an area for rulemaking and requests written 
comments on the appropriate scope of the rulemaking or on specific 
topics. An advance notice of proposed rulemaking may or may not include 
the text of potential changes to a regulation.



Sec. 106.20  Notice of proposed rulemaking.

    A notice of proposed rulemaking (NPRM) contains RSPA's specific 
proposed regulatory changes for public comment and contains supporting 
information. It generally includes proposed regulatory text.



Sec. 106.25  Revising regulations without first issuing an ANPRM or NPRM.

    RSPA may add, amend, or delete regulations without first issuing an 
ANPRM or NPRM in the following situations:
    (a) We may go directly to a final rule or interim final rule if, for 
good cause, we find that a notice of proposed rulemaking is 
impracticable, unnecessary, or contrary to the public interest. We must 
place that finding and a brief statement of the reasons for it in the 
final rule or interim final rule.
    (b) We may issue a direct final rule (see Sec. 106.40).



Sec. 106.30  Final rule.

    A final rule sets out new regulatory requirements and their 
effective date. A final rule will also identify issues raised by 
commenters in response to the notice of proposed rulemaking and give the 
agency's response.



Sec. 106.35  Interim final rule.

    An interim final rule is issued without first issuing a notice of 
proposed rulemaking and accepting public comments and sets out new 
regulatory requirements and their effective date. RSPA may issue an 
interim final rule if it finds, for good cause, that notice and public 
procedure are impracticable, unnecessary, or contrary to the public 
interest. RSPA will clearly set out this finding in the interim final 
rule. After receiving and reviewing

[[Page 14]]

public comments, as well as any other relevant documents, RSPA may 
revise the interim final rule and then issue a final rule.



Sec. 106.40  Direct final rule.

    A direct final rule makes regulatory changes and states that the 
regulatory changes will take effect on a specified date unless RSPA 
receives an adverse comment or notice of intent to file an adverse 
comment within the comment period--generally 60 days after the direct 
final rule is published in the Federal Register.
    (a) Actions taken by direct final rule. We may use direct final 
rulemaking procedures to issue rules that do any of the following:
    (1) Make minor substantive changes to regulations.
    (2) Incorporate by reference the latest edition of technical or 
industry standards.
    (3) Extend compliance dates.
    (4) Make noncontroversial changes to regulations. We must determine 
and publish a finding that use of direct final rulemaking, in this 
situation, is in the public interest and unlikely to result in adverse 
comment.
    (b) Adverse comment. An adverse comment explains why a rule would be 
inappropriate, or would be ineffective or unacceptable without a change. 
It may challenge the rule's underlying premise or approach. Under the 
direct final rule process, we do not consider the following types of 
comments to be adverse:
    (1) A comment recommending another rule change, in addition to the 
change in the direct final rule at issue, unless the commenter states 
why the direct final rule would be ineffective without the change.
    (2) A frivolous or irrelevant comment.
    (c) Confirmation of effective date. We will publish a confirmation 
document in the Federal Register, generally within 15 days after the 
comment period closes, if we have not received an adverse comment or 
notice of intent to file an adverse comment. The confirmation document 
tells the public the effective date of the rule--either the date stated 
in the direct final rule or at least 30 days after the publication date 
of the confirmation document, whichever is later.
    (d) Withdrawing a direct final rule. (1) If we receive an adverse 
comment or notice of intent to file an adverse comment, we will publish 
a document in the Federal Register before the effective date of the 
direct final rule advising the public and withdrawing the direct final 
rule in whole or in part.
    (2) If we withdraw a direct final rule because of an adverse 
comment, we may incorporate the adverse comment into a later direct 
final rule or may publish a notice of proposed rulemaking.
    (e) Appeal. You may appeal RSPA's issuance of a direct final rule 
(see Sec. 106.115) only if you have previously filed written comments 
(see Sec. 106.60) to the direct final rule.



Sec. 106.45  Tracking rulemaking actions.

    The following identifying numbers allow you to track RSPA's 
rulemaking activities:
    (a) Docket number. We assign an identifying number, called a docket 
number, to each rulemaking proceeding. Each rulemaking document that 
RSPA issues in a particular rulemaking proceeding will display the same 
docket number. This number allows you to do the following:
    (1) Associate related documents that appear in the Federal Register.
    (2) Search the DOT Docket Management System (``DMS'') for 
information on particular rulemaking proceedings--including notices of 
proposed rulemaking, public comments, petitions for rulemaking, appeals, 
records of additional rulemaking proceedings and final rules. There are 
two ways you can search the DMS:
    (i) Visit the public docket room and review and copy any docketed 
materials during regular business hours. The DOT Docket Management 
System is located at the U.S. Department of Transportation, Plaza Level 
401, 400 7th Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590-0001.
    (ii) View and download docketed materials through the Internet at 
http://dms.dot.gov.
    (b) Regulation identifier number. The Department of Transportation 
publishes a semiannual agenda of all current and projected Department of

[[Page 15]]

Transportation rulemakings, reviews of existing regulations, and 
completed actions. This semiannual agenda appears in the Unified Agenda 
of Federal Regulations that is published in the Federal Register in 
April and October of each year. The semiannual agenda tells the public 
about the Department's--including RSPA's--regulatory activities. The 
Department assigns a regulation identifier number (RIN) to each 
individual rulemaking proceeding in the semiannual agenda. This number 
appears on all rulemaking documents published in the Federal Register 
and makes it easy for you to track those rulemaking proceedings in both 
the Federal Register and the semiannual regulatory agenda itself, as 
well as to locate all documents in the Docket Management System 
pertaining to a particular rulemaking.



           Subpart B--Participating in the Rulemaking Process



Sec. 106.50  Defined terms used in this subpart.

    The following defined terms (see part 105, subpart A, of this 
subchapter) appear in this subpart: File; Person; Political subdivision; 
State.



Sec. 106.55  Public participation in the rulemaking process.

    You may participate in RSPA's rulemaking process by doing any of the 
following:
    (a) File written comments on any rulemaking document that asks for 
comments, including an advance notice of proposed rulemaking, notice of 
proposed rulemaking, interim final rule, or direct final rule.
    (b) Ask that we hold a public meeting in any rulemaking proceeding 
and participate in any public meeting that we hold.
    (c) File a petition for rulemaking that asks us to add, amend, or 
delete a regulation.
    (d) File an appeal that asks us to reexamine our decision to issue 
all or part of a final rule, interim final rule, or direct final rule.

                            Written Comments



Sec. 106.60  Filing comments.

    Anyone may file written comments about proposals made in any 
rulemaking document that requests public comments, including any State 
government agency, any political subdivision of a State, and any 
interested person invited by RSPA to participate in the rulemaking 
process.



Sec. 106.65  Required information for written comments.

    Your comments must be in English and must contain the following:
    (a) The docket number of the rulemaking document you are commenting 
on, clearly set out at the beginning of your comments.
    (b) Information, views, or arguments that follow the instructions 
for participation that appear in the rulemaking document on which you 
are commenting.
    (c) All material that is relevant to any statement of fact in your 
comments.
    (d) The document title and page number of any material that you 
reference in your comments.



Sec. 106.70  Where and when to file comments.

    (a) Unless you are told to do otherwise in the rulemaking document 
on which you are commenting, send your comments to us in either of the 
following ways:
    (1) By mail to: Docket Management System, U.S. Department of 
Transportation, Room PL 401, Washington, DC 20590-0001.
    (2) Through the Internet to http://dms.dot.gov.
    (b) Make sure that your comments reach us by the deadline set out in 
the rulemaking document on you which are commenting. We will consider 
late-filed comments to the extent possible.
    (c) We may reject comments that are not relevant to the rulemaking. 
We may reject comments you file electronically if you do not follow the 
electronic filing instructions at the DOT Web site.

[[Page 16]]



Sec. 106.75  Extension of time to file comments.

    You may ask for more time to file comments on a rulemaking 
proceeding. If RSPA grants your request, it is granted to all persons. 
We will notify the public of the extension by publishing a document in 
the Federal Register. If RSPA denies your request, RSPA will notify you 
of the denial. To ask for more time, you must do the following:
    (a) File a request for extension at least ten days before the end of 
the comment period established in the rulemaking document.
    (b) Show that you have good cause for the extension and that an 
extension is in the public interest.
    (c) Include the docket number of the rulemaking document you are 
seeking additional time to comment on, clearly set out at the beginning 
of your request.
    (d) Send your request to: Docket Management System, U.S. Department 
of Transportation, Room PL 401, 400 7th Street, SW., Washington, DC 
20590-0001.

                  Public Meetings and Other Proceedings



Sec. 106.80  Public meeting procedures.

    A public meeting is a non-adversarial, fact-finding proceeding 
conducted by a RSPA representative. Generally, public meetings are 
announced in the Federal Register. Interested persons are invited to 
attend and to present their views to the agency on specific issues. 
There are no formal pleadings and no adverse parties, and any regulation 
issued afterward is not necessarily based exclusively on the record of 
the meeting. Sections 556 and 557 of the Administrative Procedure Act (5 
U.S.C. 556 and 557) do not apply to public meetings under this part.



Sec. 106.85  Requesting a public meeting.

    (a) You may ask for a public meeting by filing a written request 
with RSPA no later than 20 days before the expiration of the comment 
period specified in the rulemaking document. Send your request for a 
public meeting to: Docket Management System, U.S. Department of 
Transportation, Room PL 401, 400 7th Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590-
0001.
    (b) RSPA will review your request and, if you have shown good cause 
for a public meeting, we will grant it and publish a notice of the 
meeting in the Federal Register.



Sec. 106.90  Other rulemaking proceedings.

    During a rulemaking proceeding, RSPA may invite you to do the 
following:
    (a) Participate in a conference at which minutes are taken.
    (b) Make an oral presentation.
    (c) Participate in any other public proceeding to ensure that RSPA 
makes informed decisions during the rulemaking process and to protect 
the public interest, including a negotiated rulemaking or work group led 
by a facilitator.

                        Petitions for Rulemaking



Sec. 106.95  Requesting a change to the regulations.

    You may ask RSPA to add, amend, or delete a regulation by filing a 
petition for rulemaking as follows:
    (a) For regulations in 49 CFR parts 110, 130, 171 through 180, 
submit the petition to: Office of Hazardous Materials Standards, 
Research and Special Programs Administration, Attn: DHM-10, U.S. 
Department of Transportation, 400 7th Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590-
0001.
    (b) For regulations in 49 CFR parts 105, 106, or 107, submit the 
petition to: Office of the Chief Counsel, Research and Special Programs 
Administration, Attn: DCC-10, U.S. Department of Transportation, 400 7th 
Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590-0001.



Sec. 106.100  Required information for a petition for rulemaking.

    (a) You must include the following information in your petition for 
rulemaking:
    (1) A summary of your proposed action and an explanation of its 
purpose.
    (2) The language you propose for a new or amended rule, or the 
language you would delete from a current rule.
    (3) An explanation of your interest in your proposed action and the 
interest of anyone you may represent.

[[Page 17]]

    (4) Information and arguments that support your proposed action, 
including relevant technical and scientific data available to you.
    (5) Any specific cases that support or demonstrate the need for your 
proposed action.
    (b) If the impact of your proposed action is substantial, and data 
or other information about that impact are available to you, we may ask 
that you provide information about the following:
    (1) The costs and benefits of your proposed action to society in 
general, and identifiable groups within society in particular.
    (2) The direct effects, including preemption effects under section 
5125 of Federal hazardous materials transportation law, of your proposed 
action on States, on the relationship between the Federal government and 
the States, and on the distribution of power and responsibilities among 
the various levels of government. (See 49 CFR part 107, subpart C, 
regarding preemption.)
    (3) The regulatory burden of your proposed action on small 
businesses, small organizations, small governmental jurisdictions, and 
Indian tribes.
    (4) The recordkeeping and reporting burdens of your proposed action 
and whom they would affect.
    (5) The effect of your proposed action on the quality of the natural 
and social environments.



Sec. 106.105  RSPA response to a petition for rulemaking.

    We will review and respond to your petition for rulemaking as 
follows:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                       And if we
    If your petition is . . .     determine that . .      Then . . .
                                           .
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(a) Incomplete..................  ..................  We may return your
                                                       petition with a
                                                       written
                                                       explanation.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(b) Complete....................  Your petition does  We will notify you
                                   not justify a       in writing that
                                   rulemaking action.  we will not start
                                                       a rulemaking
                                                       proceeding.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(c) Complete....................  Your petition does  We will notify you
                                   justify a           in writing that
                                   rulemaking action.  we will start a
                                                       rulemaking
                                                       proceeding.
------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                 Appeals



Sec. 106.110  Appealing a RSPA Action.

    You may appeal the following RSPA actions:
    (a) RSPA's issuance of a final rule or RSPA's withdrawal of a notice 
of proposed rulemaking under the rulemaking procedures in this part. 
However, you may appeal RSPA's issuance of a direct final rule only if 
you previously filed comments to the direct final rule (see 
Sec. 106.40(e)).
    (b) Any RSPA decision on a petition for rulemaking.



Sec. 106.115  Required information for an appeal.

    (a) Appeal of a final rule or withdrawal of a notice of proposed 
rulemaking. If you appeal RSPA's issuance of a final rule or RSPA's 
withdrawal of a notice of proposed rulemaking, your appeal must include 
the following:
    (1) The docket number of the rulemaking you are concerned about, 
clearly set out at the beginning of your appeal.
    (2) A brief statement of your concern about the final rule or the 
withdrawal of notice of proposed rulemaking at issue.
    (3) An explanation of why compliance with the final rule is not 
practical, reasonable, or in the public interest.
    (4) If you want RSPA to consider more facts, the reason why you did 
not present those facts within the time given during the rulemaking 
process for public comment.
    (b) Appeal of a decision. If you appeal RSPA's decision on a 
petition for rulemaking, you must include the following:
    (1) The contested aspects of the decision.
    (2) Any new arguments or information.



Sec. 106.120  Appeal deadline.

    (a) Appeal of a final rule or withdrawal of a notice of proposed 
rulemaking. If you appeal RSPA's issuance of a final rule

[[Page 18]]

or RSPA's withdrawal of a proposed rulemaking, your appeal document must 
reach us no later than 30 days after the date RSPA published the 
regulation or the withdrawal notice in the Federal Register. After that 
time, RSPA will consider your petition to be one for rulemaking under 
Sec. 106.100.
    (b) Appeal of a decision. If you appeal RSPA's decision on a 
petition for rulemaking, your appeal document must reach us no later 
than 30 days from the date RSPA served you with written notice of RSPA's 
decision.



Sec. 106.125  Filing an appeal.

    Send your appeal to: Docket Management System, U.S. Department of 
Transportation, Room PL 401, 400 7th Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590-
0001.



Sec. 106.130  RSPA response to an appeal.

    Unless RSPA provides otherwise, filing an appeal will not keep a 
final rule from becoming effective. We will handle an appeal according 
to the following procedures:
    (a) Appeal of a final rule or withdrawal of a notice of proposed 
rulemaking. (1) We may consolidate your appeal with other appeals of the 
same rule.
    (2) We may grant or deny your appeal, in whole or in part, without 
further rulemaking proceedings, unless granting your appeal would result 
in the issuance of a new final rule.
    (3) If we decide to grant your appeal, we may schedule further 
proceedings and an opportunity to comment.
    (4) RSPA will notify you, in writing, of the action on your appeal 
within 90 days after the date that RSPA published the final rule or 
withdrawal of notice of proposed rulemaking at issue in the Federal 
Register. If we do not issue a decision on your appeal within the 90-day 
period and we anticipate a substantial delay, we will notify you 
directly about the delay and will give you an expected decision date. We 
will also publish a notice of the delay in the Federal Register.
    (b) Appeal of a decision. (1) We will not consider your appeal if it 
merely repeats arguments that RSPA has previously rejected.
    (2) RSPA will notify you, in writing, of the action on your appeal 
within 90 days after the date that RSPA served you with written notice 
of its decision on your petition for rulemaking. If we do not issue a 
decision on your appeal within the 90-day period, and we anticipate a 
substantial delay, we will notify you directly about the delay and will 
give you an expected decision date.



PART 107--HAZARDOUS MATERIALS PROGRAM PROCEDURES--Table of Contents




                         Subpart A--Definitions

Sec.
107.1  Definitions.

                          Subpart B--Exemptions

107.101  Purpose and scope.
107.105  Application for exemption.
107.107  Application for party status.
107.109  Application for renewal.
107.111  Withdrawal.
107.113  Application processing and evaluation.
107.117  Emergency processing.
107.121  Modification, suspension or termination of exemption or grant 
          of party status.
107.123  Reconsideration.
107.125  Appeal.
107.127  Availability of documents for public inspection.

                          Subpart C--Preemption

107.201  Purpose and scope.
107.202  Standards for determining preemption.

                        Preemption Determinations

107.203  Application.
107.205  Notice.
107.207  Processing.
107.209  Determination.
107.211  Petition for reconsideration.
107.213  Judicial review.

                   Waiver of Preemption Determinations

107.215  Application.
107.217  Notice.
107.219  Processing.
107.221  Determination.
107.223  Petition for reconsideration.
107.227  Judicial review.

                         Subpart D--Enforcement

107.301  Delegated authority for enforcement.
107.303  Purpose and scope.
107.305  Investigations.

                  Compliance Orders and Civil Penalties

107.307  General.

[[Page 19]]

107.309  Warning letters.
107.310  Ticketing.
107.311  Notice of probable violation.
107.313  Reply.
107.315  Admission of violations.
107.317  Informal response.
107.319  Request for a hearing.
107.321  Hearing.
107.323  ALJ's decision.
107.325  Appeals.
107.327  Compromise and settlement.
107.329  Maximum penalties.
107.331  Assessment considerations.

                           Criminal Penalties

107.333  Criminal penalties generally.
107.335  Referral for prosecution.
107.336  Limitation on fines and penalties.

                            Injunctive Action

107.337  Injunctions generally.
107.339  Imminent hazards.

Appendix A to Subpart D of Part 107--Guidelines for Civil Penalties

      Subpart E--Designation of Approval and Certification Agencies

107.401  Purpose and scope.
107.402  Application for designation as an approval or certification 
          agency.
107.403  Designation of approval agencies.
107.404  Conditions of designation.
107.405  Termination of designation.

   Subpart F--Registration of Cargo Tank and Cargo Tank Motor Vehicle 
   Manufacturers and Repairers and Cargo Tank Motor Vehicle Assemblers

107.501  Scope.
107.502  General registration requirements.
107.503  Registration statement.
107.504  Period of registration, updates, and record retention.

  Subpart G--Registration of Persons Who Offer or Transport Hazardous 
                                Materials

107.601  Applicability.
107.606  Exceptions.
107.608  General registration requirements.
107.612  Amount of fee.
107.616  Payment procedures.
107.620  Recordkeeping requirements.

           Subpart H--Approvals, Registrations and Submissions

107.701  Purpose and scope.
107.705  Registrations, reports, and applications for approval.
107.709  Processing of an application for approval, including an 
          application for renewal or modification.
107.711  Withdrawal.
107.713  Approval modification, suspension or termination.
107.715  Reconsideration.
107.717  Appeal.

    Subpart I--Approval of Independent Inspection Agencies, Cylinder 
   Requalifiers, and Non-domestic Chemical Analyses and Tests of DOT 
                         Specification Cylinders

107.801  Purpose and scope.
107.803  Approval of independent inspection agency.
107.805  Approval of cylinder requalifiers.
107.807  Approval of non-domestic chemical analyses and tests.

    Authority: 49 U.S.C. 5101-5127, 44701; Sec. 212-213, Pub. L. 104-
121, 110 Stat. 857; 49 CFR 1.45, 1.53.

    Editorial Note: Nomenclature changes to part 107 appear at 67 FR 
61011, Sept. 27, 2002.



                         Subpart A--Definitions



Sec. 107.1  Definitions.

    All terms defined in 49 U.S.C. 5102 are used in their statutory 
meaning. Other terms used in this part are defined as follows:
    Acting knowingly means acting or failing to act while
    (1) Having actual knowledge of the facts giving rise to the 
violation, or
    (2) Having the knowledge that a reasonable person acting in the same 
circumstances and exercising due care would have had.
    Administrator means the Administrator, Research and Special Programs 
Administration.
    Applicant means the person in whose name an exemption, approval, 
registration, a renewed or modified exemption or approval, or party 
status to an exemption is requested to be issued.
    Application means a request under subpart B of this part for an 
exemption, a renewal or modification of an exemption, party status to an 
exemption, or a request under subpart H of this part for an approval, or 
renewal or modification of an approval.
    Approval means written consent, including a competent authority 
approval, from the Associate Administrator or other designated 
Department official, to perform a function that requires prior consent 
under subchapter C of this chapter (49 CFR parts 171 through 180).

[[Page 20]]

    Approval Agency means an organization or a person designated by the 
RSPA to certify packagings as having been designed, manufactured, 
tested, modified, marked or maintained in compliance with applicable DOT 
regulations.
    Associate Administrator means the Associate Administrator for 
Hazardous Materials Safety, Research and Special Programs 
Administration.
    Competent Authority means a national agency that is responsible, 
under its national law, for the control or regulation of some aspect of 
hazardous materials (dangerous goods) transportation. Another term for 
Competent Authority is ``Appropriate authority,'' which is used in the 
International Civil Aviation Organization's (ICAO) Technical 
Instructions for the Safe Transport of Dangerous Goods by Air. The 
Associate Administrator is the United States Competent Authority for 
purposes of this part 107.
    Competent Authority Approval means an approval by the competent 
authority that is required under an international standard (for example, 
the ICAO Technical Instructions for the Safe Transport of Dangerous 
Goods by Air and the International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code). Any 
of the following may be considered a competent authority approval if it 
satisfies the requirement of an international standard:
    (1) A specific regulation in subchapter A or C of this chapter.
    (2) An exemption or approval issued under subchapter A or C of this 
chapter.
    (3) A separate document issued to one or more persons by the 
Associate Administrator.
    DOT or Department means U.S. Department of Transportation.
    Exemption means a document issued by the Associate Administrator 
under the authority of 49 U.S.C. 5117. The document permits a person to 
perform a function that is not otherwise permitted under subchapter A or 
C of this chapter, or other regulations issued under 49 U.S.C. 5101 
through 5127 (e.g., Federal Motor Carrier Safety routing requirements.)
    Federal hazardous material transportation law means 49 U.S.C. 5101 
et seq.
    Filed means received by the appropriate RSPA or other designated 
office within the time specified in a regulation or rulemaking document.
    Holder means the person in whose name an exemption or approval has 
been issued.
    Imminent Hazard means the existence of a condition which presents a 
substantial likelihood that death, serious illness, severe personal 
injury, or substantial endangerment to health, property, or the 
environment may occur before the reasonably foreseeable completion of an 
administrative hearing or other formal proceeding initiated to abate the 
risks of those effects.
    Incident means an event resulting in the unintended and 
unanticipated release of a hazardous material or an event meeting 
incident reporting requirements in Sec. 171.15 or Sec. 171.16 of this 
chapter.
    Indian Tribe has the same meaning given that term in section 4 of 
the Indian Self-Determination and Education Assistance Act (25 U.S.C. 
450b).
    Investigation includes investigations authorized under 49 U.S.C. 
5121 and inspections authorized under 49 U.S.C. 5118 and 5121.
    Manufacturing exemption means an exemption from compliance with 
specified requirements that otherwise must be met before representing, 
marking, certifying (including requalifying, inspecting, and testing), 
selling or offering a packaging or container as meeting the requirements 
of subchapter C of this chapter governing its use in the transportation 
in commerce of a hazardous material. A manufacturing exemption is an 
exemption issued to a manufacturer of packagings who does not offer for 
transportation or transport hazardous materials in packagings subject to 
the exemption.
    Party means a person, other than a holder, authorized to act under 
the terms of an exemption.
    Person means an individual, firm, copartnership, corporation, 
company, association, or joint-stock association (including any trustee, 
receiver, assignee, or similar representative); or a government or 
Indian tribe (or an agency or instrumentality of any government or 
Indian tribe) that transports a hazardous material to further a

[[Page 21]]

commercial enterprise or offers a hazardous material for transportation 
in commerce. Person does not include the following:
    (1) The United States Postal Service.
    (2) Any agency or instrumentality of the Federal government, for the 
purposes of 49 U.S.C. 5123 (civil penalties) and 5124 (criminal 
penalties.)
    (3) Any government or Indian tribe (or an agency or instrumentality 
of any government or Indian tribe) that transports hazardous material 
for a governmental purpose.
    Registration means a written acknowledgment from the Associate 
Administrator that a registrant is authorized to perform a function for 
which registration is required under subchapter C of this chapter (e.g., 
registration in accordance with 49 CFR 178.503 regarding marking of 
packagings). For purposes of subparts A through E, ``registration'' does 
not include registration under subpart F or G of this part.
    Report means information, other than an application, registration or 
part thereof, required to be submitted to the Associate Administrator 
pursuant to this subchapter, subchapter B or subchapter C of this 
chapter.
    Respondent means a person upon whom the RSPA has served a notice of 
probable violation.
    State means a State of the United States, the District of Columbia, 
the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, the Commonwealth of the Northern 
Mariana Islands, the Virgin Islands, American Samoa, Guam, or any other 
territory or possession of the United States designated by the 
Secretary.
    Transports or transportation means the movement of property and 
loading, unloading, or storage incidental to the movement.

[Amdt. 107-3, 41 FR 38170, Sept. 9, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 107-4, 43 
FR 43307, Sept. 25, 1978; Amdt. 107-5, 43 FR 48642, Oct. 19, 1978; Amdt. 
107-8, 46 FR 9888, Jan. 29, 1981; Amdt. 107-12, 48 FR 53711, Nov. 29, 
1983; 50 FR 45730, Nov. 1, 1985; Amdt. 107-24, 56 FR 8621, Feb. 28, 
1991; Amdt. 107-23, 56 FR 66157, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 107-32, 59 FR 
49130, Sept. 26, 1994; Amdt. 107-38, 61 FR 21094, May 9, 1996; 65 FR 
58618, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45377, Aug. 28, 2001. Redesignated and 
amended at 67 FR 42958, June 25, 2002; 67 FR 51639, Aug. 8, 2002]



                          Subpart B--Exemptions

    Source: Amdt. 107-38, 61 FR 21095, May 9, 1996, unless otherwise 
noted.



Sec. 107.101  Purpose and scope.

    This subpart prescribes procedures for the issuance, modification 
and termination of exemptions from requirements of this subchapter, 
subchapter C of this chapter, or regulations issued under chapter 51 of 
49 U.S.C.



Sec. 107.105  Application for exemption.

    (a) General. Each application for an exemption or modification of an 
exemption must be written in English and must--
    (1) Be submitted for timely consideration, at least 120 days before 
the requested effective date, in duplicate to: Associate Administrator 
for Hazardous Materials Safety (Attention: Exemptions, DHM-31), Research 
and Special Programs Administration, U.S. Department of Transportation, 
400 7th Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590-0001. Alternatively, the 
application with any attached supporting documentation submitted in an 
appropriate format may be sent by facsimile (fax) to: (202) 366-3753 or 
(202) 366-3308 or by electronic mail (e-mail) to: 
[email protected];
    (2) State the name, street and mailing addresses, e-mail address 
optional, and telephone number of the applicant; if the applicant is not 
an individual, state the name, street and mailing addresses, e-mail 
address optional, and telephone number of an individual designated as an 
agent of the applicant for all purposes related to the application;
    (3) If the applicant is not a resident of the United States, a 
designation of agent for service in accordance with Sec. 105.40 of this 
part; and
    (4) For a manufacturing exemption, a statement of the name and 
street address of each facility where manufacturing under the exemption 
will occur.
    (b) Confidential treatment. To request confidential treatment for 
information contained in the application, the applicant shall comply 
with Sec. 105.30(a).
    (c) Description of exemption proposal. The application must include 
the following information that is relevant to the exemption proposal:

[[Page 22]]

    (1) A citation of the specific regulation from which the applicant 
seeks relief;
    (2) Specification of the proposed mode or modes of transportation;
    (3) A detailed description of the proposed exemption (e.g., 
alternative packaging, test, procedure or activity) including, as 
appropriate, written descriptions, drawings, flow charts, plans and 
other supporting documents;
    (4) A specification of the proposed duration or schedule of events 
for which the exemption is sought;
    (5) A statement outlining the applicant's basis for seeking relief 
from compliance with the specified regulations and, if the exemption is 
requested for a fixed period, a description of how compliance will be 
achieved at the end of that period;

    (6) If the applicant seeks emergency processing specified in 
Sec. 107.117, a statement of supporting facts and reasons;

    (7) Identification and description of the hazardous materials 
planned for transportation under the exemption;

    (8) Description of each packaging, including specification or 
exemption number, as applicable, to be used in conjunction with the 
requested exemption;

    (9) For alternative packagings, documentation of quality assurance 
controls, package design, manufacture, performance test criteria, in-
service performance and service-life limitations.

    (d) Justification of exemption proposal. The application must 
demonstrate that an exemption achieves a level of safety at least equal 
to that required by regulation, or if a required safety level does not 
exist, is consistent with the public interest. At a minimum, the 
application must provide the following:

    (1) Information describing all relevant shipping and incident 
experience of which the applicant is aware that relates to the 
application;

    (2) A statement identifying any increased risk to safety or property 
that may result if the exemption is granted, and a description of the 
measures to be taken to address that risk; and

    (3) Either--

    (i) Substantiation, with applicable analyses, data or test results, 
that the proposed alternative will achieve a level of safety that is at 
least equal to that required by the regulation from which the exemption 
is sought; or

    (ii) If the regulations do not establish a level of safety, an 
analysis that identifies each hazard, potential failure mode and the 
probability of its occurrence, and how the risks associated with each 
hazard and failure mode are controlled for the duration of an activity 
or life-cycle of a packaging.

[Amdt. 107-38, 61 FR 21095, May 9, 1996, as amended at 62 FR 51556, Oct. 
1, 1997; 65 FR 50457, Aug. 18, 2000; 65 FR 58618, Sept. 29, 2000; 67 FR 
61010-61011, Sept. 27, 2002]



Sec. 107.107  Application for party status.

    (a) Any person eligible to apply for an exemption may apply to be 
made party to an application or an existing exemption, other than a 
manufacturing exemption.

    (b) Each application filed under this section must--

    (1) Be submitted in duplicate to: Associate Administrator for 
Hazardous Materials Safety (Attention: Exemptions, DHM-31), Research and 
Special Programs Administration, U.S. Department of Transportation, 400 
7th Street, SW, Washington, DC 20590-0001. Alternatively, the 
application with any attached supporting documentation submitted in an 
appropriate format may be sent by facsimile (fax) to: (202) 366-3753 or 
(202) 366-3308 or by electronic mail (e-mail) to: 
[email protected];
    (2) Identify by number the exemption application or exemption to 
which the applicant seeks to become a party;
    (3) State the name, street and mailing addresses, e-mail address 
optional, and telephone number of the applicant; if the applicant is not 
an individual, state the name, street and mailing addresses, e-mail 
address optional, and telephone number of an individual designated as 
the applicant's agent for all purposes related to the application; and
    (4) If the applicant is not a resident of the United States, provide 
a designation of agent for service in accordance with Sec. 105.40.
    (c) The Associate Administrator grants or denies an application for

[[Page 23]]

party status in the manner specified in Sec. 107.113(e) and (f) of this 
subpart.
    (d) A party to an exemption is subject to all terms of that 
exemption, including the expiration date. If a party to an exemption 
wishes to renew party status, the exemption renewal procedures set forth 
in Sec. 107.109 apply.

[Amdt. 107-38, 61 FR 21095, May 9, 1996, as amended at 65 FR 50457, Aug. 
18, 2000; 67 FR 61010-61011, Sept. 27, 2002]



Sec. 107.109  Application for renewal.

    (a) Each application for renewal of an exemption or party status to 
an exemption must--
    (1) Be submitted in duplicate to: Associate Administrator for 
Hazardous Materials Safety (Attention: Exemptions, DHM-31), Research and 
Special Programs Administration, U.S. Department of Transportation, 400 
7th Street, SW, Washington, DC 20590-0001. Alternatively, the 
application with any attached supporting documentation submitted in an 
appropriate format may be sent by facsimile (fax) to: (202) 366-3753 or 
(202) 366-3308 or by electronic mail (e-mail) to: 
[email protected];
    (2) Identify by number the exemption for which renewal is requested;
    (3) State the name, street and mailing addresses, e-mail address 
optional, and telephone number of the applicant; if the applicant is not 
an individual, state the name, street and mailing addresses, e-mail 
address optional, and telephone number of an individual designated as an 
agent of the applicant for all purposes related to the application;
    (4) Include either a certification by the applicant that the 
original application, as it may have been updated by any application for 
renewal, remains accurate and complete; or include an amendment to the 
previously submitted application as is necessary to update and assure 
the accuracy and completeness of the application, with certification by 
the applicant that the application as amended is accurate and complete; 
and
    (5) Include a statement describing all relevant shipping and 
incident experience of which the applicant is aware in connection with 
the exemption since its issuance or most recent renewal. If the 
applicant is aware of no incidents, the applicant shall so certify. When 
known to the applicant, the statement should indicate the approximate 
number of shipments made or packages shipped, as the case may be, and 
number of shipments or packages involved in any loss of contents, 
including loss by venting other than as authorized in subchapter C.
    (b) If at least 60 days before an existing exemption expires the 
holder files an application for renewal that is complete and conforms to 
the requirements of this section, the exemption will not expire until 
final administrative action on the application for renewal has been 
taken.

[Amdt. 107-38, 61 FR 21095, May 9, 1996, as amended at 65 FR 50457, Aug. 
18, 2000; 67 FR 61011, Sept. 27, 2002]



Sec. 107.111  Withdrawal.

    An application may be withdrawn at any time before a decision to 
grant or deny it is made. Withdrawal of an application does not 
authorize the removal of any related records from the RSPA dockets or 
files. Applications that are eligible for confidential treatment under 
Sec. 105.30 will remain confidential after the application is withdrawn. 
The duration of this confidential treatment for trade secrets and 
commercial or financial information is indefinite, unless the party 
requesting the confidential treatment of the materials notifies the 
Associate Administrator that the confidential treatment is no longer 
required.

[Amdt. 107-38, 61 FR 21095, May 9, 1996, as amended at 67 FR 61011, 
Sept. 27, 2002]



Sec. 107.113  Application processing and evaluation.

    (a) The Associate Administrator reviews an application for 
exemption, modification of exemption, party to exemption, or renewal of 
an exemption to determine if it is complete and conforms with the 
requirements of this subpart. This determination will be made within 30 
days of receipt of the application for exemption, modification of 
exemption, or party to exemption, and within 15 days of receipt of an 
application for renewal of an exemption. If an application is determined 
to be incomplete, the applicant is informed of the reasons.

[[Page 24]]

    (b) An application, other than a renewal, party to, or emergency 
exemption application, that is determined to be complete is docketed. 
Notice of the application is published in the Federal Register, and an 
opportunity for public comment is provided. All comments received during 
the comment period are considered before final action is taken on the 
application.
    (c) No public hearing or other formal proceeding is required under 
this subpart before the disposition of an application. Unless emergency 
processing under Sec. 107.117 is requested and granted, applications are 
usually processed in the order in which they are filed.
    (d) During the processing and evaluation of an application, the 
Associate Administrator may request additional information from the 
applicant. If the applicant does not respond to a written request for 
additional information within 30 days of the date the request was 
received, the application may be deemed incomplete and denied. However, 
if the applicant responds in writing within the 30-day period requesting 
an additional 30 days within which it will gather the requested 
information, the Associate Administrator may grant the 30-day extension.
    (e) The Associate Administrator may grant or deny an application, in 
whole or in part. In the Associate Administrator's discretion, an 
application may be granted subject to provisions that are appropriate to 
protect health, safety or property. The Associate Administrator may 
impose additional provisions not specified in the application or remove 
conditions in the application that are unnecessary.
    (f) The Associate Administrator may grant an application on finding 
that--
    (1) The application complies with this subpart;
    (2) The application demonstrates that the proposed alternative will 
achieve a level of safety that:
    (i) Is at least equal to that required by the regulation from which 
the exemption is sought, or
    (ii) If the regulations do not establish a level of safety, is 
consistent with the public interest and adequately will protect against 
the risks to life and property inherent in the transportation of 
hazardous materials in commerce;
    (3) The application states all material facts, and contains no 
materially false or materially misleading statement;
    (4) The applicant meets the qualifications required by applicable 
regulations; and
    (5) The applicant is fit to conduct the activity authorized by the 
exemption. This assessment may be based on information in the 
application, prior compliance history of the applicant, and other 
information available to the Associate Administrator.
    (g) An applicant is notified in writing whether the application is 
granted or denied. A denial contains a brief statement of reasons.
    (h) An exemption and any renewal thereof terminates according to its 
terms or, if not otherwise specified, two years after the date of 
issuance. A grant of party status to an exemption, unless otherwise 
stated, terminates on the date that the exemption expires.
    (i) The Associate Administrator, on determining that an application 
concerns a matter of general applicability and future effect and should 
be the subject of rulemaking, may initiate rulemaking under part 106 of 
this chapter in addition to or instead of acting on the application.
    (j) The Associate Administrator publishes in the Federal Register a 
list of all exemption grants, denials, and modifications and all 
exemption applications withdrawn under this section.



Sec. 107.117  Emergency processing.

    (a) An application is granted emergency processing if the Associate 
Administrator, on the basis of the application and any inquiry 
undertaken, finds that--
    (1) Emergency processing is necessary to prevent significant injury 
to persons or property (other than the hazardous material to be 
transported) that could not be prevented if the application were 
processed on a routine basis; or
    (2) Emergency processing is necessary for immediate national 
security purposes or to prevent significant economic loss that could not 
be prevented if the application were processed on a routine basis.

[[Page 25]]

    (b) Where the significant economic loss is to the applicant, or to a 
party in a contractual relationship to the applicant with respect to the 
activity to be undertaken, the Associate Administrator may deny 
emergency processing if timely application could have been made.
    (c) A request for emergency processing on the basis of potential 
economic loss must reasonably describe and estimate the potential loss.
    (d) An application submitted under this section must conform to 
Sec. 107.105 to the extent that the receiving Department official deems 
necessary to process the application. An application on an emergency 
basis must be submitted to the Department modal contact official for the 
initial mode of transportation to be utilized, as follows:
    (1) Certificate-Holding Aircraft: The Federal Aviation 
Administration Civil Aviation Security Office that serves the place 
where the flight will originate or that is responsible for the aircraft 
operator's overall aviation security program. The nearest Civil Aviation 
Security Office may be located by calling the FAA Duty Officer, 202-267-
3333 (any hour).
    (2) Noncertificate-Holding Aircraft (Those Which Operate Under 14 
CFR Part 91): The Federal Aviation Administration Civil Aviation 
Security Office that serves the place where the flight will originate. 
The nearest Civil Aviation Security Office may be located by calling the 
FAA Duty Officer, 202-267-3333 (any hour).
    (3) Motor Vehicle Transportation: Chief, Hazardous Materials 
Division, Federal Motor Carrier Safety Administration, U.S. Department 
of Transportation, Washington, DC 20590-0001, 202-366-6121 (day); 1-800-
424-8802 (night).
    (4) Rail Transportation: Staff Director, Hazardous Materials 
Division, Office of Safety Assurance and Compliance, Federal Railroad 
Administration, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, DC 20590-
0001, 202-493-6248 or 202-493-6244 (day); 1-800-424-8802 (night).
    (5) Water Transportation: Chief, Hazardous Materials Standards 
Division, Office of Operating and Environmental Standards, United States 
Coast Guard, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, DC 20593-
0001, 202-267-1577 (day); 1-800-424-8802 (night).
    (e) On receipt of all information necessary to process the 
application, the receiving Department official transmits to the 
Associate Administrator, by the most rapid available means of 
communication, an evaluation as to whether an emergency exists under 
Sec. 107.117(a) and, if appropriate, recommendations as to the 
conditions to be included in the exemption. If the Associate 
Administrator determines that an emergency exists under Sec. 107.117(a) 
and that, with reference to the criteria of Sec. 107.113(f), granting of 
the application is in the public interest, the Associate Administrator 
grants the application subject to such terms as necessary and 
immediately notifies the applicant. If the Associate Administrator 
determines that an emergency does not exist or that granting of the 
application is not in the public interest, the applicant immediately is 
so notified.
    (f) A determination that an emergency does not exist is not subject 
to reconsideration under Sec. 107.123 of this part.
    (g) Within 90 days following issuance of an emergency exemption, the 
Associate Administrator will publish, in the Federal Register, a notice 
of issuance with a statement of the basis for the finding of emergency 
and the scope and duration of the exemption.

[Amdt. 107-38, 61 FR 21095, May 9, 1996, as amended at 62 FR 51556, Oct. 
1, 1997; 64 FR 51914, Sept. 27, 1999; 65 FR 58618, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 
45377, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 61011, Sept. 27, 2002]



Sec. 107.121  Modification, suspension or termination of exemption or grant of party status.

    (a) The Associate Administrator may modify an exemption or grant of 
party status on finding that--
    (1) Modification is necessary so that an exemption reflects current 
statutes and regulations; or
    (2) Modification is required by changed circumstances to meet the 
standards of Sec. 107.113(f).
    (b) The Associate Administrator may modify, suspend or terminate an 
exemption or grant of party status, as appropriate, on finding that--

[[Page 26]]

    (1) Because of a change in circumstances, the exemption or party 
status no longer is needed or no longer would be granted if applied for;
    (2) The application contained inaccurate or incomplete information, 
and the exemption or party status would not have been granted had the 
application been accurate and complete;
    (3) The application contained deliberately inaccurate or incomplete 
information; or
    (4) The holder or party knowingly has violated the terms of the 
exemption or an applicable requirement of this chapter, in a manner 
demonstrating the holder or party is not fit to conduct the activity 
authorized by the exemption.
    (c) Except as provided in paragraph (d) of this section, before an 
exemption or grant of party status is modified, suspended or terminated, 
the Associate Administrator notifies the holder or party in writing of 
the proposed action and the reasons for it, and provides an opportunity 
to show cause why the proposed action should not be taken.
    (1) The holder or party may file a written response that shows cause 
why the proposed action should not be taken within 30 days of receipt of 
notice of the proposed action.
    (2) After considering the holder's or party's written response, or 
after 30 days have passed without response since receipt of the notice, 
the Associate Administrator notifies the holder or party in writing of 
the final decision with a brief statement of reasons.
    (d) The Associate Administrator, if necessary to avoid a risk of 
significant harm to persons or property, may in the notification declare 
the proposed action immediately effective.



Sec. 107.123  Reconsideration.

    (a) An applicant for exemption, an exemption holder, or an applicant 
for party status to an exemption may request that the Associate 
Administrator reconsider a decision under Sec. 107.113(g), 
Sec. 107.117(e) or Sec. 107.121(c) of this part. The request must--
    (1) Be in writing and filed within 20 days of receipt of the 
decision;
    (2) State in detail any alleged errors of fact and law;
    (3) Enclose any additional information needed to support the request 
to reconsider; and
    (4) State in detail the modification of the final decision sought.
    (b) The Associate Administrator grants or denies, in whole or in 
part, the relief requested and informs the requesting person in writing 
of the decision. If necessary to avoid a risk of significant harm to 
persons or property, the Associate Administrator may, in the 
notification, declare the action immediately effective.



Sec. 107.125  Appeal.

    (a) A person who requested reconsideration under Sec. 107.123 and is 
denied the relief requested may appeal to the Administrator. The appeal 
must--
    (1) Be in writing and filed within 30 days of receipt of the 
Associate Administrator's decision on reconsideration;
    (2) State in detail any alleged errors of fact and law;
    (3) Enclose any additional information needed to support the appeal; 
and
    (4) State in detail the modification of the final decision sought.
    (b) The Administrator, if necessary to avoid a risk of significant 
harm to persons or property, may declare the Associate Administrator's 
action effective pending a decision on appeal.
    (c) The Administrator grants or denies, in whole or in part, the 
relief requested and informs the appellant in writing of the decision. 
The Administrator's decision is the final administrative action.



Sec. 107.127  Availability of documents for public inspection.

    (a) Documents related to an application under this subpart, 
including the application itself, are available for public inspection, 
except as specified in paragraph (b) of this section, at the Office of 
the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety, Research and 
Special Programs Administration, Office of Hazardous Materials 
Exemptions and Approvals, U.S. Department of Transportation, 400 7th 
Street, SW, Washington, DC 20590-0001, Room 8100. Office hours are 8:30 
a.m. to 5:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, except holidays when the 
office is closed. Copies of available documents may be obtained

[[Page 27]]

as provided in part 7 of this title. Documents numbered 11832 and above 
may also be viewed at the internet website address http://dms.dot.gov.
    (b) Documents available for inspection do not include materials 
determined to be withheld from public disclosure under Sec. 105.30 and 
in accordance with the applicable provisions of section 552(b) of title 
5, United States Code, and part 7 of this title.

[Amdt. 107-38, 61 FR 21095, May 9, 1996, as amended at 65 FR 58618, 
Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45377, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 61011, Sept. 27, 2002]



                          Subpart C--Preemption



Sec. 107.201  Purpose and scope.

    (a) This subpart prescribes procedures by which:
    (1) Any person, including a State, political subdivision, or Indian 
tribe, directly affected by any requirement of a State, political 
subdivision, or Indian tribe, may apply for a determination as to 
whether that requirement is preempted under 49 U.S.C. 5125, or 
regulations issued thereunder; and
    (2) A State, political subdivision, or Indian tribe may apply for a 
waiver of preemption with respect to any requirement that the State, 
political subdivision, or Indian tribe acknowledges to be preempted by 
49 U.S.C. 5125, or regulations issued thereunder, or that has been 
determined by a court of competent jurisdiction to be so preempted.
    (b) For purposes of this subpart ``political subdivision'' includes 
a municipality; a public agency or other instrumentality of one or more 
States, municipalities, or other political subdivisions of a State; or a 
public corporation, board, or commission established under the laws of 
one or more States.
    (c) For purposes of this subpart, ``regulations issued under the 
Federal hazardous material transportation law'' means the regulations 
contained in this subchapter and subchapter C of this chapter.
    (d) Unless otherwise ordered by the Associate Administrator, an 
application for a preemption determination which includes an application 
for a waiver of preemption will be treated and processed solely as an 
application for a preemption determination.

[Amdt. 107-3, 41 FR 38171, Sept. 9, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 107-24, 56 
FR 8622, Feb. 28, 1991; Amdt. 107-25, 57 FR 20428, May 13, 1992; Amdt. 
107-32, 59 FR 49130, Sept. 26, 1994; Amdt. 107-35, 60 FR 49108, Sept. 
21, 1995; Amdt. 107-38, 61 FR 21098, May 9, 1996]



Sec. 107.202  Standards for determining preemption.

    (a) Except as provided in Sec. 107.221 and unless otherwise 
authorized by Federal law, any requirement of a State or political 
subdivision thereof or an Indian tribe, that concerns one of the 
following subjects and that is not substantively the same as any 
provision of the Federal hazardous material transportation law, this 
subchapter or subchapter C that concerns that subject, is preempted:
    (1) The designation, description, and classification of hazardous 
material.
    (2) The packing, repacking, handling, labeling, marking, and 
placarding of hazardous material.
    (3) The preparation, execution, and use of shipping documents 
pertaining to hazardous material and requirements related to the number, 
content, and placement of those documents.
    (4) The written notification, recording, and reporting of the 
unintentional release in transportation of hazardous material.
    (5) The design, manufacturing, fabrication, marking, maintenance, 
reconditioning, repairing, or testing of a packaging or a container 
which is represented, marked, certified, or sold as qualified for use in 
the transportation of hazardous material.
    (b) Except as provided in Sec. 107.221 and unless otherwise 
authorized by Federal law, any requirement of a State or political 
subdivision or Indian tribe is preempted if--
    (1) Complying with a requirement of the State, political 
subdivision, or Indian tribe and a requirement under the Federal 
hazardous material transportation law or regulations issued thereunder 
is not possible;
    (2) The requirement of the State, political subdivision, or Indian 
tribe, as applied or enforced, is an obstacle to accomplishing and 
carrying out the

[[Page 28]]

Federal hazardous material transportation law or regulations issued 
thereunder; or
    (3) It is preempted under 49 U.S.C. 5125 (c).
    (c) A State, political subdivision, or Indian tribe may impose a fee 
related to transporting hazardous material only if the fee is fair and 
used for a purpose related to transporting hazardous material, including 
enforcement and planning, developing and maintaining a capability for 
emergency response.
    (d) For purposes of this section, ``substantively the same'' means 
that the non-Federal requirement conforms in every significant respect 
to the Federal requirement. Editorial and other similar de minimis 
changes are permitted.

[Amdt. 107-24, 56 FR 8622, Feb. 28, 1991, as amended by Amdt. 107-25, 57 
FR 20428, May 13, 1992; Amdt. 107-29, 58 FR 51527, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 
107-32, 59 FR 49130, Sept. 26, 1994; Amdt. 107-38, 61 FR 21098, May 9, 
1996; Amdt. 107-39, 61 FR 51337, Oct. 1, 1996]

                        Preemption Determinations



Sec. 107.203  Application.

    (a) With the exception of highway routing matters covered under 49 
U.S.C. 5125(c), any person, including a State or political subdivision 
thereof or an Indian tribe, directly affected by any requirement of a 
State or political subdivision thereof or an Indian tribe, may apply to 
the Associate Administrator for a determination of whether that 
requirement is preempted by Sec. 107.202 (a) or (b).
    (b) Each application filed under this section for a determination 
must:
    (1) Be submitted to Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials 
Safety, Research and Special Programs Administration, U.S. Department of 
Transportation, Washington, DC 20590-0001. Attention: Hazardous 
Materials Preemption Docket;
    (2) Set forth the text of the State or political subdivision or 
Indian tribe requirement for which the determination is sought;
    (3) Specify each requirement of the Federal hazardous material 
transportation law or the regulations issued thereunder with which the 
applicant seeks the State or political subdivision or Indian tribe 
requirement to be compared;
    (4) Explain why the applicant believes the State or political 
subdivision or Indian tribe requirement should or should not be 
preempted under the standards of Sec. 107.202; and
    (5) State how the applicant is affected by the State or political 
subdivision or Indian tribe requirement.
    (c) The filing of an application for a determination under this 
section does not constitute grounds for noncompliance with any 
requirement of the Federal hazardous material transportation law or the 
regulations issued thereunder.
    (d) Once the Associate Administrator has published notice in the 
Federal Register of an application received under paragraph (a) of this 
section, no applicant for such determination may seek relief with 
respect to the same or substantially the same issue in any court until 
final action has been taken on the application or until 180 days after 
filing of the application, whichever occurs first. Nothing in 
Sec. 107.203(a) prohibits a State or political subdivision or Indian 
tribe, or any other person directly affected by any requirement of a 
State or political subdivision thereof or Indian tribe, from seeking a 
determination of preemption in any court of competent jurisdiction in 
lieu of applying to the Associate Administrator under paragraph (a) of 
this section.

[Amdt. 107-24, 56 FR 8622, Feb. 28, 1991, as amended by Amdt. 107-25, 57 
FR 20428, May 13, 1992; Amdt. 107-32, 59 FR 49131, Sept. 26, 1994; Amdt. 
107-38, 61 FR 21098, May 9, 1996]



Sec. 107.205  Notice.

    (a) If the applicant is other than a State, political subdivision, 
or Indian tribe, the applicant shall mail a copy of the application to 
the State, political subdivision, or Indian tribe concerned accompanied 
by a statement that the State, political subdivision, or Indian tribe 
may submit comments regarding the application to the Associate 
Administrator. The application filed with the Associate Administrator 
must include a certification that the applicant has complied with this 
paragraph and must include the names and addresses

[[Page 29]]

of each State, political subdivision, or Indian tribe official to whom a 
copy of the application was sent.
    (b) The Associate Administrator will publish notice of, including an 
opportunity to comment on, an application in the Federal Register and 
may notify in writing any person readily identifiable as affected by the 
outcome of the determination.
    (c) Each person submitting written comments to the Associate 
Administrator with respect to an application filed under this section 
shall send a copy of the comments to the applicant and certify to the 
Associate Administrator that he or she has complied with this 
requirement. The Associate Administrator may notify other persons 
participating in the proceeding of the comments and provide an 
opportunity for those other persons to respond. Late-filed comments are 
considered so far as practicable.

[Amdt. 107-38, 61 FR 21098, May 9, 1996]



Sec. 107.207  Processing.

    (a) The Associate Administrator may initiate an investigation of any 
statement in an application and utilize in his or her evaluation any 
relevant facts obtained by that investigation. The Associate 
Administrator may solicit and accept submissions from third persons 
relevant to an application and will provide the applicant an opportunity 
to respond to all third person submissions. In evaluating an 
application, the Associate Administrator may consider any other source 
of information. The Associate Administrator on his or her own initiative 
may convene a hearing or conference, if he or she considers that a 
hearing or conference will advance his or her evaluation of the 
application.
    (b) The Associate Administrator may dismiss the application without 
prejudice if:
    (1) He or she determines that there is insufficient information upon 
which to base a determination; or
    (2) He or she requests additional information from the applicant and 
it is not submitted.

[Amdt. 107-3, 41 FR 38171, Sept. 9, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 107-24, 56 
FR 8621, 8622, Feb. 28, 1991; Amdt. 107-38, 61 FR 21098, May 9, 1996]



Sec. 107.209  Determination.

    (a) Upon consideration of the application and other relevant 
information received, the Associate Administrator issues a 
determination.
    (b) The determination includes a written statement setting forth the 
relevant facts and the legal basis for the determination, and provides 
that any person aggrieved thereby may file a petition for 
reconsideration with the Associate Administrator.
    (c) The Associate Administrator provides a copy of the determination 
to the applicant and to any other person who substantially participated 
in the proceeding or requested in comments to the docket to be notified 
of the determination. A copy of each determination is placed on file in 
the public docket. The Associate Administrator will publish the 
determination or notice of the determination in the Federal Register.
    (d) A determination issued under this section constitutes an 
administrative determination as to whether a particular requirement of a 
State or political subdivision or Indian tribe is preempted under the 
Federal hazardous material transportation law or regulations issued 
thereunder. The fact that a determination has not been issued under this 
section with respect to a particular requirement of a State or political 
subdivision or Indian tribe carries no implication as to whether the 
requirement is preempted under the Federal hazardous material 
transportation law or regulations issued hereunder.

[Amdt. 107-24, 56 FR 8623, Feb. 28, 1991, as amended by Amdt. 107-25, 57 
FR 20428, May 13, 1992; Amdt. 107-32, 59 FR 49131, Sept. 26, 1994; Amdt. 
107-38, 61 FR 21098, May 9, 1996]



Sec. 107.211  Petition for reconsideration.

    (a) Any person aggrieved by a determination issued under 
Sec. 107.209 may file a petition for reconsideration with the Associate 
Administrator. The petition must be filed within 20 days of publication 
of the determination in the Federal Register.
    (b) The petition must contain a concise statement of the basis for 
seeking review, including any specific factual or legal error alleged. 
If the petition requests consideration of information

[[Page 30]]

that was not previously made available to the Associate Administrator, 
the petition must include the reasons why such information was not 
previously made available.
    (c) The petitioner shall mail a copy of the petition to each person 
who participated, either as an applicant or commenter, in the preemption 
determination proceeding, accompanied by a statement that the person may 
submit comments concerning the petition to the Associate Administrator 
within 20 days. The petition filed with the Associate Administrator must 
contain a certification that the petitioner has complied with this 
paragraph and include the names and addresses of all persons to whom a 
copy of the petition was sent. Late-filed comments are considered so far 
as practicable.
    (d) The Associate Administrator's decision constitutes final agency 
action.

[Amdt. 107-25, 57 FR 20428, May 13, 1992, as amended by Amdt. 107-38, 61 
FR 21099, May 9, 1996]



Sec. 107.213  Judicial review.

    A party to a proceeding under Sec. 107.203(a) may seek review by the 
appropriate district court of the United States of a decision of the 
Associate Administrator by filing a petition with the court within 60 
days after the Associate Administrator's determination becomes final. 
The determination becomes final when it is published in the Federal 
Register.

[Amdt. 107-38, 61 FR 21099, May 9, 1996]

                   Waiver of Preemption Determinations



Sec. 107.215  Application.

    (a) With the exception of requirements preempted under 49 U.S.C. 
5125(c), any State or political subdivision thereof, or Indian tribe may 
apply to the Associate Administrator for a waiver of preemption with 
respect to any requirement that the State or political subdivision 
thereof or an Indian tribe acknowledges to be preempted under the 
Federal hazardous material transportation law or the regulations issued 
thereunder, or that has been determined by a court of competent 
jurisdiction to be so preempted. The Associate Administrator may waive 
preemption with respect to such requirement upon a determination that 
such requirement--
    (1) Affords an equal or greater level of protection to the public 
than is afforded by the requirements of the Federal hazardous material 
transportation law or the regulations issued thereunder, and
    (2) Does not unreasonably burden commerce.
    (b) Each application filed under this section for a waiver of 
preemption determination must:
    (1) Be submitted to the Associate Administrator for Hazardous 
Materials Safety, Research and Special Programs Administration, U.S. 
Department of Transportation, Washington, DC 20590-0001. Attention: 
Hazardous Materials Preemption Docket;
    (2) Set forth the text of the State or political subdivision 
requirement for which the determination is being sought;
    (3) Include a copy of any court order and any ruling issued under 
Sec. 107.209 having a bearing on the application;
    (4) Contain an express acknowledgment by the applicant that the 
State, political subdivision, or Indian tribe requirement is preempted 
under the Federal hazardous material transportation law or the 
regulations issued thereunder, unless it has been so determined by a 
court of competent jurisdiction or in a determination issued under 
Sec. 107.209;
    (5) Specify each requirement of the Federal hazardous material 
transportation law or the regulations issued thereunder that preempts 
the State, political subdivision, or Indian tribe requirement;
    (6) State why the applicant believes the State, political 
subdivision or Indian tribe requirements affords an equal or greater 
level of protection to the public than is afforded by the requirements 
of the Federal hazardous material transportation law or the regulations 
issued thereunder;
    (7) State why the applicant believes the State, political 
subdivision or Indian tribe requirement does not unreasonably burden 
commerce; and
    (8) Specify what steps the State, political subdivision or Indian 
tribe is

[[Page 31]]

taking to administer and enforce effectively its inconsistent 
requirement.

[Amdt. 107-3, 41 FR 38171, Sept. 9, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 107-22, 55 
FR 39978, Oct. 1, 1990; Amdt. 107-24, 56 FR 8621, 8623, Feb. 28, 1991; 
56 FR 15510, Apr. 17, 1991; Amdt. 107-23, 56 FR 66156, Dec. 20, 1991; 
Amdt. 107-25, 57 FR 20428, May 13, 1992; Amdt. 107-32, 59 FR 49131, 
Sept. 26, 1994; Amdt. 107-38, 61 FR 21099, May 9, 1996]



Sec. 107.217  Notice.

    (a) The applicant shall mail a copy of the application and any 
subsequent amendments or other documents relating to the application to 
each person who is reasonably ascertainable by the applicant as a person 
who will be affected by the determination sought. The copy of the 
application must be accompanied by a statement that the person may 
submit comments regarding the application to the Associate Administrator 
within 45 days. The application filed with the Associate Administrator 
must include a certification that the application has complied with this 
paragraph and must include the names and addresses of each person to 
whom the application was sent.
    (b) Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph (a) of this section, 
if the State or political subdivision determines that compliance with 
paragraph (a) of this section would be impracticable, the applicant 
shall:
    (1) Comply with the requirements of paragraph (a) of this section 
with regard to those persons whom it is reasonable and practicable to 
notify; and
    (2) Include with the application filed with the Associate 
Administrator a description of the persons or class or classes of 
persons to whom notice was not sent.
    (c) The Associate Administrator may require the applicant to provide 
notice in addition to that required by paragraphs (a) and (b) of this 
section, or may determine that the notice required by paragraph (a) of 
the section is not impracticable, or that notice should be published in 
the Federal Register. Late-filed comments are considered so far as 
practicable.
    (d) The Associate Administrator may notify any other persons who may 
be affected by the outcome of a determination on the application.
    (e) Any person submitting written comments to the Associate 
Administrator with respect to an application filed under this section 
shall send a copy of the comments to the applicant. The person shall 
certify to the Associate Administrator that he has complied with the 
requirements of this paragraph. The Associate Administrator may notify 
other persons participating in the proceeding of the comments and 
provide an opportunity for those other persons to respond.

[Amdt. 107-3, 41 FR 38171, Sept. 9, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 107-24, 56 
FR 8621, Feb. 28, 1991; Amdt. 107-25, 57 FR 20429, May 13, 1992; Amdt. 
107-38, 61 FR 21099, May 9, 1996]



Sec. 107.219  Processing.

    (a) The Associate Administrator may initiate an investigation of any 
statement in an application and utilize in his or her evaluation any 
relevant facts obtained by that investigation. The Associate 
Administrator may solicit and accept submissions from third persons 
relevant to an application and will provide the applicant an opportunity 
to respond to all third person submissions. In evaluating an 
application, the Associate Administrator on his or her own initiative 
may convene a hearing or conference, if he or she considers that a 
hearing or conference will advance his or her evaluation of the 
application.
    (b) The Associate Administrator may dismiss the application without 
prejudice if:
    (1) He or she determines that there is insufficient information upon 
which to base a determination;
    (2) Upon his or her request, additional information is not submitted 
by the applicant; or
    (3) The applicant fails to provide the notice required by 
Sec. 107.217.
    (c) Except as provided in Sec. 107.201(c), the Associate 
Administrator will only consider an application for a waiver of 
preemption determination if:
    (1) The applicant State or political subdivision thereof or Indian 
tribe expressly acknowledges in its application that the State or 
political subdivision thereof or Indian tribe requirement for which the 
determination is sought is

[[Page 32]]

inconsistent with the requirements of the Federal hazardous material 
transportation law or the regulations issued thereunder; or
    (2) The State or political subdivision thereof or Indian tribe 
requirement has been determined by a court of competent jurisdiction or 
in a ruling issued under Sec. 107.209 to be inconsistent with the 
requirements of the Federal hazardous material transportation law or the 
regulations issued thereunder.
    (d) When the Associate Administrator has received all substantive 
information it considers necessary to process an application for a 
waiver of preemption determination, it serves notice of that fact upon 
the applicant and all other persons who received notice of the 
proceeding pursuant to Sec. 107.217.
    (e) To the extent possible, each application for a waiver of 
preemption determination will be acted upon in a manner consistent with 
the disposition of previous applications for waiver of preemption 
determinations.

[Amdt. 107-3, 41 FR 38171, Sept. 9, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 107-24, 56 
FR 8621, 8623, Feb. 28, 1991; Amdt. 107-32, 59 FR 49131, Sept. 26, 1994; 
Amdt. 107-38, 61 FR 21099, May 9, 1996; 65 FR 58618, Sept. 29, 2000]



Sec. 107.221  Determination.

    (a) After considering the application and other relevant information 
received or obtained during the proceeding, the Associate Administrator 
issues a determination.
    (b) The Associate Administrator may issue a waiver of preemption 
only on finding that the requirement of the State or political 
subdivision thereof or Indian tribe affords the public a level of safety 
at least equal to that afforded by the requirements of the Federal 
hazardous material transportation law or the regulations issued 
thereunder and does not unreasonably burden commerce. In determining if 
the requirement of the State or political subdivision thereof or Indian 
tribe unreasonably burdens commerce, the Associate Administrator 
considers:
    (1) The extent to which increased costs and impairment of efficiency 
result from the requirement of the State or political subdivision 
thereof or Indian tribe.
    (2) Whether the requirement of the State or political subdivision 
thereof or Indian tribe has a rational basis.
    (3) Whether the requirement of the State or political subdivision 
thereof or Indian tribe achieves its stated purpose.
    (4) Whether there is need for uniformity with regard to the subject 
concerned and if so, whether the requirement of the State or political 
subdivision thereof or Indian tribe competes or conflicts with those of 
other States or political subdivisions thereof or Indian tribes.
    (c) The determination includes a written statement setting forth 
relevant facts and legal bases and providing that any person aggrieved 
by the determination may file a petition for reconsideration with the 
Associate Administrator.
    (d) The Associate Administrator provides a copy of the determination 
to the applicant and to any other person who substantially participated 
in the proceeding or requested in comments to the docket to be notified 
of the determination. A copy of the determination is placed on file in 
the public docket. The Associate Administrator will publish the 
determination or notice of the determination in the Federal Register.
    (e) A determination under this section constitutes an administrative 
finding of whether a particular requirement of a State or political 
subdivision thereof or Indian tribe is preempted under the Federal 
hazardous material transportation law or any regulation issued 
thereunder, or whether preemption is waived.

[Amdt. 107-38, 61 FR 21099, May 9, 1996]



Sec. 107.223  Petition for reconsideration.

    (a) Any person aggrieved by a determination under Sec. 107.221 may 
file a petition for reconsideration with the Associate Administrator. 
The petition must be filed within 20 days of publication of the 
determination in the Federal Register.
    (b) The petition must contain a concise statement of the basis for 
seeking review, including any specific factual or legal error alleged. 
If the petition requests consideration of information that was not 
previously made available

[[Page 33]]

to the Associate Administrator, the petition must include the reasons 
why such information was not previously made available.
    (c) The petitioner shall mail a copy of the petition to each person 
who participated, either as an applicant or commenter, in the waiver of 
preemption proceeding, accompanied by a statement that the person may 
submit comments concerning the petition to the Associate Administrator 
within 20 days. The petition filed with the Associate Administrator must 
contain a certification that the petitioner has complied with this 
paragraph and include the names and addresses of all persons to whom a 
copy of the petition was sent. Late-filed comments are considered so far 
as practicable.
    (d) The Associate Administrator's decision constitutes final agency 
action.

[Amdt. 107-25, 57 FR 20429, May 13, 1992, as amended by Amdt. 107-38, 61 
FR 21099, May 9, 1996]



Sec. 107.227  Judicial review.

    A party to a proceeding under Sec. 107.215(a) may seek review by the 
appropriate district court of the United States of a decision of the 
Associate Administrator by filing a petition with the court within 60 
days after the Associate Administrator's determination becomes final. 
The determination becomes final when it is published in the Federal 
Register.

[Amdt. 107-38, 61 FR 21099, May 9, 1996]



                         Subpart D--Enforcement

    Source: Amdt. 107-11, 48 FR 2651, Jan. 20, 1983, unless otherwise 
noted.



Sec. 107.301  Delegated authority for enforcement.

    Under redelegation from the Administrator, Research and Special 
Programs Administration, the Associate Administrator for Hazardous 
Materials Safety and the Office of the Chief Counsel exercise their 
authority for enforcement of the Federal hazardous material 
transportation law, this subchapter, and subchapter C of this 
subchapter, in accordance with Sec. 1.53 of this title.

[Amdt. 107-11, 48 FR 2651, Jan. 20, 1983, as amended by Amdt. 107-24, 56 
FR 8621, Feb. 28, 1991; Amdt. 107-32, 59 FR 49131, Sept. 26, 1994]



Sec. 107.303  Purpose and scope.

    This subchapter describes the various enforcement authorities 
exercised by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety 
and the Office of Chief Counsel and the associated sanctions and 
prescribes the procedures governing the exercise of those authorities 
and the imposition of those sanctions.

[Amdt. 107-11, 48 FR 2651, Jan. 20, 1983, as amended by Amdt. 107-15, 51 
FR 34986, Oct. 1, 1986; Amdt. 107-24, 56 FR 8621, Feb. 28, 1991]



Sec. 107.305  Investigations.

    (a) General. In accordance with its delegated authority under part 1 
of this title, the Associate Administrator may initiate investigations 
relating to compliance by any person with any provisions of this 
subchapter or subchapter C of this chapter, or any exemption, approval, 
or order issued thereunder, or any court decree relating thereto. The 
Associate Administrator encourages voluntary production of documents in 
accordance with and subject to Sec. 105.45, and hearings may be 
conducted, and depositions taken pursuant to 49 U.S.C. 5121(a). The 
Associate Administrator may conduct investigative conferences and 
hearings in the course of any investigation.
    (b) Investigations and Inspections. Investigations under 49 U.S.C. 
5121(a) are conducted by personnel duly authorized for that purpose by 
the Associate Administrator. Inspections under 49 U.S.C. 5121(c) are 
conducted by Hazardous Materials Enforcement Specialists, also known as 
``hazmat inspectors'' or ``inspectors,'' whom the Associate 
Administrator has designated for that purpose.
    (1) An inspector will, on request, present his or her credentials 
for examination, but the credentials may not be reproduced.
    (2) An inspector may administer oaths and receive affirmations in 
any matter under investigation by the Associate Administrator.

[[Page 34]]

    (3) An inspector may gather information by reasonable means 
including, but not limited to, interviews, statements, photocopying, 
photography, and video- and audio-recording.
    (4) With concurrence of the Director, Office of Hazardous Materials 
Enforcement, Research and Special Programs Administration, an inspector 
may issue a subpoena for the production of documentary or other tangible 
evidence if, on the basis of information available to the inspector, the 
documents and evidence materially will advance a determination of 
compliance with this subchapter or subchapter C. Service of a subpoena 
shall be in accordance with Sec. 105.50. A person to whom a subpoena is 
directed may seek review of the subpoena by applying to the Office of 
Chief Counsel in accordance with Sec. 105.55(a). A subpoena issued under 
this paragraph may be enforced in accordance with Sec. 105.55(b).
    (c) Notification. Any person who is the subject of an Associate 
Administrator investigation and who is requested to furnish information 
or documentary evidence is notified as to the general purpose for which 
the information or evidence is sought.
    (d) Termination. When the facts disclosed by an investigation 
indicate that further action is unnecessary or unwarranted at that time, 
the person being investigated is notified and the investigative file is 
closed without prejudice to further investigation by the Associate 
Administrator.
    (e) Confidentiality. Information received in an investigation under 
this section, including the identity of the person investigated and any 
other person who provides information during the investigation, shall 
remain confidential under the investigatory file exception, or other 
appropriate exception, to the public disclosure requirements of 5 U.S.C. 
552.

[Amdt. 107-11, 48 FR 2651, Jan. 20, 1983, as amended by Amdt. 107-24, 56 
FR 8621, Feb. 28, 1991; Amdt. 107-32, 59 FR 49131, Sept. 26, 1994; Amdt. 
107-38, 61 FR 21099, May 9, 1996; 66 FR 45377, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 
61011, Sept. 27, 2002]

                  Compliance Orders and Civil Penalties



Sec. 107.307  General.

    (a) When the Associate Administrator and the Office of the Chief 
Counsel have reason to believe that a person is knowingly engaging or 
has knowingly engaged in conduct which is a violation of the Federal 
hazardous material transportation law or any provision of this 
subchapter or subchapter C of this chapter, or any exemption, or order 
issued thereunder, for which the Associate Administrator or the Office 
of the Chief Counsel exercise enforcement authority, they may--
    (1) Issue a warning letter, as provided in Sec. 107.309;
    (2) Initiate proceedings to assess a civil penalty, as provided in 
either Secs. 107.310 or 107.311;
    (3) Issue an order directing compliance, regardless of whether a 
warning letter has been issued or a civil penalty assessed; and
    (4) Seek any other remedy available under the Federal hazardous 
material transportation law.
    (b) In the case of a proceeding initiated for failure to comply with 
an exemption, the allegation of a violation of a term or condition 
thereof is considered by the Associate Administrator and the Office of 
the Chief Counsel to constitute an allegation that the exemption holder 
or party to the exemption is failing, or has failed to comply with the 
underlying regulations from which relief was granted by the exemption.

[Amdt. 107-11, 48 FR 2651, Jan. 20, 1983, as amended by Amdt. 107-32, 59 
FR 49131, Sept. 26, 1994; Amdt. 107-36, 61 FR 7183, Feb. 26, 1996; 66 FR 
45377, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 107.309  Warning letters.

    (a) The Associate Administrator may issue a warning letter to any 
person whom the Associate Administrator believes to have committed a 
probable violation of the Federal hazardous material transportation law 
or any provision of this subchapter, subchapter C of this chapter, or 
any exemption issued thereunder.

[[Page 35]]

    (b) A warning letter issued under this section includes:
    (1) A statement of the facts upon which the Associate Administrator 
bases its determination that the person has committed a probable 
violation;
    (2) A statement that the recurrence of the probable violations cited 
may subject the person to enforcement action; and
    (3) An opportunity to respond to the warning letter by submitting 
pertinent information or explanations concerning the probable violations 
cited therein.

[Amdt. 107-11, 48 FR 2651, Jan. 20, 1983, as amended by Amdt. 107-15, 51 
FR 34986, Oct. 1, 1986; Amdt. 107-24, 56 FR 8621, Feb. 28, 1991; Amdt. 
107-32, 59 FR 49131, Sept. 26, 1994; Amdt. 107-36, 61 FR 7183, Feb. 26, 
1996; 66 FR 45377, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 107.310  Ticketing.

    (a) For an alleged violation that does not have a direct or 
substantial impact on safety, the Associate Administrator may issue a 
ticket.
    (b) The Associate Administrator issues a ticket by mailing it by 
certified or registered mail to the person alleged to have committed the 
violation. The ticket includes:
    (1) A statement of the facts on which the Associate Administrator 
bases the conclusion that the person has committed the alleged 
violation;
    (2) The maximum penalty provided for by statute, the proposed full 
penalty determined according to RSPA's civil penalty guidelines and the 
statutory criteria for penalty assessment, and the ticket penalty 
amount; and
    (3) A statement that within 45 days of receipt of the ticket, the 
person must pay the penalty in accordance with paragraph (d) of this 
section, make an informal response under Sec. 107.317, or request a 
formal administrative hearing under Sec. 107.319.
    (c) If the person makes an informal response or requests a formal 
administrative hearing, the Associate Administrator forwards the 
inspection report, ticket and response to the Office of the Chief 
Counsel for processing under Secs. 107.307-107.339, except that the 
Office of the Chief Counsel will not issue a Notice of Probable 
Violation under Sec. 107.311. The Office of the Chief Counsel may impose 
a civil penalty that does not exceed the proposed full penalty set forth 
in the ticket.
    (d) Payment of the ticket penalty amount must be made in accordance 
with the instructions on the ticket.
    (e) If within 45 days of receiving the ticket the person does not 
pay the ticket amount, make an informal response, or request a formal 
administrative hearing, the person has waived the right to make an 
informal response or request a hearing, has admitted the violation and 
owes the ticket penalty amount to RSPA.

[Amdt. 107-36, 61 FR 7183, Feb. 26, 1996, as amended at 66 FR 45377, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 107.311  Notice of probable violation.

    (a) The Office of Chief Counsel may serve a notice of probable 
violation on a person alleging the violation of one or more provisions 
of the Federal hazardous material transportation law or any provision of 
this subchapter or subchapter C of this chapter, or any exemption, or 
order issued thereunder.
    (b) A notice of probable violation issued under this section 
includes the following information:
    (1) A citation of the provisions of the Federal hazardous material 
transportation law, an order issued thereunder, this subchapter, 
subchapter C of this chapter, or the terms of any exemption issued 
thereunder which the Office of Chief Counsel believes the respondent is 
violating or has violated.
    (2) A statement of the factual allegations upon which the demand for 
remedial action, a civil penalty, or both, is based.
    (3) A statement of the respondent's right to present written or oral 
explanations, information, and arguments in answer to the allegations 
and in mitigation of the sanction sought in the notice of probable 
violation.
    (4) A statement of the respondent's right to request a hearing and 
the procedures for requesting a hearing.
    (5) In addition, in the case of a notice of probable violation 
proposing a compliance order, a statement of the proposed actions to be 
taken by the respondent to achieve compliance.
    (6) In addition, in the case of a notice of probable violation 
proposing a civil penalty:

[[Page 36]]

    (i) A statement of the maximum civil penalty for which the 
respondent may be liable;
    (ii) The amount of the preliminary civil penalty being sought by the 
Office of Chief Counsel, constitutes the maximum amount the Chief 
Counsel may seek throughout the proceeding; and
    (iii) A description of the manner in which the respondent makes 
payment of any money due the United States as a result of the 
proceeding.
    (c) The Office of Chief Counsel may amend a notice of probable 
violation at any time before issuance of a compliance order or an order 
assessing a civil penalty. If the Office of Chief Counsel alleges any 
new material facts or seeks new or additional remedial action or an 
increase in the amount of the proposed civil penalty, it issues a new 
notice of probable violation under this section.

[Amdt. 107-11, 48 FR 2651, Jan. 20, 1983, as amended at 50 FR 45730, 
Nov. 1, 1985; Amdt. 107-24, 56 FR 8624, Feb. 28, 1991; Amdt. 107-32, 59 
FR 49131, Sept. 26, 1994; Amdt. 107-35, 60 FR 49108, Sept. 21, 1995; 
Amdt. 107-36, 61 FR 7184, Feb. 26, 1996]



Sec. 107.313  Reply.

    (a) Within 30 days of receipt of a notice of probable violation, the 
respondent must either:
    (1) Admit the violation under Sec. 107.315;
    (2) Make an informal response under Sec. 107.317; or
    (3) Request a hearing under Sec. 107.319.
    (b) Failure of the respondent to file a reply as provided in this 
section constitutes a waiver of the respondent's right to appear and 
contest the allegations and authorizes the Chief Counsel, without 
further notice to the respondent, to find the facts to be as alleged in 
the notice of probable violation and issue an order directing compliance 
or assess a civil penalty, or, if proposed in the notice, both. Failure 
to request a hearing under paragraph (a)(3) of this section constitutes 
a waiver of the respondent's right to a hearing.
    (c) Upon the request of the respondent, the Office of Chief Counsel 
may, for good cause shown and filed within the 30 days prescribed in the 
notice of probable violation, extend the 30-day response period.



Sec. 107.315  Admission of violations.

    (a) In responding to a notice of probable violation issued under 
Sec. 107.311, the respondent may admit the alleged violations and agree 
to accept the terms of a proposed compliance order or to pay the amount 
of the preliminarily assessed civil penalty, or, if proposed in the 
notice, both.
    (b) If the respondent agrees to the terms of a proposed compliance 
order, the Chief Counsel issues a final order prescribing the remedial 
action to be taken by the respondent.
    (c) Payment of a civil penalty, when the amount of the penalty 
exceeds $10,000, must be made by wire transfer, through the Federal 
Reserve Communications System (Fedwire), to the account of the U.S. 
Treasury. Detailed instructions on making payments by wire transfer may 
be obtained from the Financial Operations Division (AMZ-320), Federal 
Aviation Administration, Mike Monroney Aeronautical Center, P.O. Box 
25880, Oklahoma City, OK 73125.
    (d) Payment of a civil penalty, when the amount of the penalty is 
$10,000 or less, must be made either by wire transfer, as set forth in 
paragraph (c) of this section, or certified check or money order payable 
to ``U.S. Department of Transportation'' and submitted to the Financial 
Operations Division (AMZ-320), Federal Aviation Administration, Mike 
Monroney Aeronautical Center, P.O. Box 25880, Oklahoma City, OK 73125.

[Amdt. 107-11, 48 FR 265l, Jan. 20, 1983, as amended by Amdt. 107-23, 57 
FR 45453, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 107-29, 58 FR 51527, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 
107-38, 61 FR 21100, May 9, 1996]



Sec. 107.317  Informal response.

    (a) In responding to a notice of probable violation under 
Sec. 107.311, the respondent may submit to the official who issued the 
notice, written explanations, information, or arguments in response to 
the allegations, the terms of a proposed compliance order, or the amount 
of the preliminarily assessed civil penalty.
    (b) The respondent may include in his informal response a request 
for a conference. Upon the request of the respondent, the conference may 
be either in person or by telephone. A request for

[[Page 37]]

a conference must set forth the issues the respondent will raise at the 
conference.
    (c) Upon receipt of a request for a conference under paragraph (b) 
of this section, the Chief Counsel's Office, in consultation with the 
Associate Administrator, arranges for a conference as soon as 
practicable at a time and place of mutual convenience.
    (d) The respondent's written explanations, information, and 
arguments as well as the respondent's presentation at a conference are 
considered by the Chief Counsel in reviewing the notice of probable 
violation. Based upon a review of the proceeding, the Chief Counsel may 
dismiss the notice of probable violation in whole or in part. If he does 
not dismiss it in whole, he issues an order directing compliance or 
assessing a civil penalty, or, if proposed in the notice, both.

[Amdt. 107-11, 48 FR 2651, Jan. 20, 1983, as amended by Amdt. 107-23, 56 
FR 66157, Dec. 20, 1991; 66 FR 45377, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 107.319  Request for a hearing.

    (a) In responding to a notice of probable violation under 
Sec. 107.311, the respondent may request a formal administrative hearing 
on the record before an Administrative Law Judge (ALJ) obtained by the 
Office of the Chief Counsel.
    (b) A request for a hearing under paragraph (a) of this section 
must:
    (1) State the name and address of the respondent and of the person 
submitting the request if different from the respondent;
    (2) State which allegations of violations, if any, are admitted; and
    (3) State generally the issues to be raised by the respondent at the 
hearing. Issues not raised in the request are not barred from 
presentation at the hearing; and
    (4) Be addressed to the official who issued the notice.
    (c) After a request for a hearing that complies with the 
requirements of paragraph (b) of this section, the Chief Counsel obtains 
an ALJ to preside over the hearing and notifies the respondent of this 
fact. Upon assignment of an ALJ, further matters in the proceeding 
generally are conducted by and through the ALJ, except that the Chief 
Counsel and respondent may compromise or settle the case under 
Sec. 107.327 of this subpart without order of the ALJ or voluntarily 
dismiss the case under Rule 41(a)(1) of the Federal Rules of Civil 
Procedure without order of the ALJ; in the event of such a compromise, 
settlement or dismissal, the Chief Counsel expeditiously will notify the 
ALJ thereof.
    (d) At any time after requesting a formal administrative hearing but 
prior to the issuance of a decision and final order by the ALJ, the 
respondent may withdraw such request in writing, thereby terminating the 
jurisdication of the ALJ in the case. Such a withdrawal constitutes an 
irrevocable waiver of respondent's right to such a hearing on the facts, 
allegations, and proposed sanction presented in the notice of probable 
violation to which the request for hearing relates.

[Amdt. 107-11, 48 FR 2651, Jan. 20, 1983, as amended at 48 FR 17094, 
Apr. 21, 1983; Amdt. No. 107-19, 54 FR 22899, May 30, 1989]



Sec. 107.321  Hearing.

    (a) To the extent practicable, the hearing is held in the general 
vicinity of the place where the alleged violation occurred or at a place 
convenient to the respondent. Testimony by witnesses shall be given 
under oath and the hearing shall be recorded verbatim.
    (b) Hearings are conducted in accordance with the Federal Rules of 
Evidence and Federal Rules of Civil Procedure; however, the ALJ may 
modify them as he determines necessary in the interest of a full 
development of the facts. In addition, the ALJ may:
    (1) Administer oaths and affirmations;
    (2) Issue subpoenas as provided by Sec. 105.45;
    (3) Adopt procedures for the submission of motions, evidence, and 
other documents pertinent to the proceeding;
    (4) Take or cause depositions to be taken;
    (5) Rule on offers of proof and receive relevant evidence;
    (6) Examine witnesses at the hearing;
    (7) Convene, recess, reconvene, adjourn and otherwise regulate the 
course of the hearing;

[[Page 38]]

    (8) Hold conferences for settlement, simplification of the issues, 
or any other proper purpose; and
    (9) Take any other action authorized by, or consistent with, the 
provisions of this subpart and permitted by law which may expedite the 
hearing or aid in the disposition of an issue raised therein.
    (c) The official who issued the notice of probable violation, or his 
representative, has the burden of proving the facts alleged therein.
    (d) The respondent may appear and be heard on his own behalf or 
through counsel of his choice. The respondent or his counsel may offer 
relevant information including testimony which he believes should be 
considered in opposition to the allegations or which may bear on the 
sanction being sought and conduct such cross-examination as may be 
required for a full disclosure of the facts.

[Amdt. 107-11, 48 FR 2651, Jan. 20, 1983, as amended at 67 FR 61011, 
Sept. 27, 2002]



Sec. 107.323  ALJ's decision.

    (a) After consideration of all matters of record in the proceeding, 
the ALJ shall issue an order dismissing the notice of probable violation 
in whole or in part or granting the sanction sought by the Office of 
Chief Counsel in the notice. If the ALJ does not dismiss the notice of 
probable violation in whole, he issues an order directing compliance or 
assessing a civil penalty, or, if proposed in the notice, both. The 
order includes a statement of the findings and conclusions, and the 
reasons therefore, on all material issues of fact, law, and discretion.
    (b) If, within 20 days of receipt of an order issued under paragraph 
(a) of this section, the respondent does not submit in writing his 
acceptance of the terms of an order directing compliance, or, where 
appropriate, pay a civil penalty, or file an appeal under Sec. 107.325, 
the case may be referred to the Attorney General with a request that an 
action be brought in the appropriate United States District Court to 
enforce the terms of a compliance order or collect the civil penalty.



Sec. 107.325  Appeals.

    (a) Hearing proceedings. A party aggrieved by an ALJ's decision and 
order issued under Sec. 107.323, may file a written appeal in accordance 
with paragraph (c) of this section with the Administrator, Research and 
Special Programs Administration (RSPA), 400 Seventh Street, SW., 
Washington, DC 20590-0001.
    (b) Non-Hearing proceedings. A respondent aggrieved by an order 
issued under Sec. 107.317, may file a written appeal in accordance with 
paragraph (c) of this section with the Administrator, RSPA, 400 Seventh 
Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590-0001.
    (c) An appeal of an order issued under this subpart must:
    (1) Be filed within 20 days of receipt of the order by the appealing 
party; and
    (2) State with particularity the findings in the order that the 
appealing party challenges, and include all information and arguments 
pertinent thereto.
    (d) If the Administrator, RSPA, affirms the order in whole or in 
part, the respondent must comply with the terms of the decision within 
20 days of the respondent's receipt thereof, or within the time 
prescribed in the order. If the respondent does not comply with the 
terms of the decision within 20 days of receipt, or within the time 
prescribed in the order, the case may be referred to the Attorney 
General for action to enforce the terms of the decision.
    (e) The filing of an appeal stays the effectiveness of an order 
issued under Sec. 107.317 or Sec. 107.323. However, if the 
Administrator, RSPA, determines that it is in the public interest, he 
may keep an order directing compliance in force pending appeal.

[][Amdt. 107-11, 48 FR 2651, Jan. 20, 1983, as amended at 50 FR 45730, 
Nov. 1, 1985; Amdt. 107-22, 55 FR 39978, Oct. 1, 1990]



Sec. 107.327  Compromise and settlement.

    (a) At any time before an order issued under Sec. 107.317 or 
Sec. 107.323 is referred to the Attorney General for enforcement, the 
respondent or the Office of Chief Counsel may propose a compromise as 
follows:

[[Page 39]]

    (1) In civil penalty cases, the respondent or Chief Counsel may 
offer to compromise the amount of the penalty by submitting an offer for 
a specific amount to the other party. An offer of compromise by the 
respondent shall be submitted to the Chief Counsel who may, after 
consultation with the Associate Administrator, accept or reject it.
    (i) A compromise offer stays the running of any response period then 
outstanding.
    (ii) If a compromise is agreed to by the parties, the respondent is 
notified in writing. Upon receipt of payment by Office of Chief Counsel, 
the respondent is notified in writing that acceptance of payment is in 
full satisfaction of the civil penalty proposed or assessed, and Office 
of Chief Counsel closes the case with prejudice to the respondent.
    (iii) If a compromise cannot be agreed to, the respondent is 
notified in writing and is given 10 days or the amount of time remaining 
in the then outstanding response period, whichever is longer, to respond 
to whatever action was taken by the Office of Chief Counsel or the 
Administrator, RSPA.
    (2) In compliance order cases, the respondent may propose a consent 
agreement to the Chief Counsel. If the Chief Counsel accepts the 
agreement, he issues an order in accordance with its terms. If the Chief 
Counsel rejects the agreement, he directs that the proceeding continue. 
An agreement submitted to the Chief Counsel must include:
    (i) A statement of any allegations of fact which the respondent 
challenges;
    (ii) The reasons why the terms of a compliance order or proposed 
compliance order are or would be too burdensome for the respondent, or 
why such terms are not supported by the record in the case;
    (iii) A proposed compliance order suitable for issuance by the Chief 
Counsel;
    (iv) An admission of all jurisdictional facts; and
    (v) An express waiver of further procedural steps and all right to 
seek judicial review or otherwise challenge or contest the validity of 
the order.
    (b) Notwithstanding paragraph (a)(1) of this section, the respondent 
or Office of Chief Counsel may propose to settle the case. If the Chief 
Counsel agrees to a settlement, the respondent is notified and the case 
is closed without prejudice to the respondent.

[Amdt. 107-11, 48 FR 2651, Jan. 20, 1983, as amended at 50 FR 45730, 
Nov. 1, 1985; Amdt. 107-24, 56 FR 8621, Feb. 28, 1991; 56 FR 15510, Apr. 
17, 1991; Amdt. 107-29, 58 FR 51527, Oct. 1, 1993; 66 FR 45377, Aug. 28, 
2001]



Sec. 107.329  Maximum penalties.

    (a) A person who knowingly violates a requirement of the Federal 
hazardous material transportation law, an order issued thereunder, this 
subchapter, subchapter C of this chapter, or an exemption issued under 
this subchapter applicable to the transporting of hazardous materials or 
the causing of them to be transported or shipped is liable for a civil 
penalty of not more than $25,000 ($27,500 for a violation occurring 
after January 21, 1997) and not less than $250 for each violation. When 
the violation is a continuing one, each day of the violation constitutes 
a separate offense.
    (b) A person who knowingly violates a requirement of the Federal 
hazardous material transportation law, an order issued thereunder, this 
subchapter, subchapter C of this chapter, or an exemption issued under 
this subchapter applicable to the manufacture, fabrication, marking, 
maintenance, reconditioning, repair, or testing of a packaging or 
container which is represented, marked, certified or sold by that person 
as being qualified for use in the transportation of hazardous materials 
in commerce is liable for a civil penalty of not more than $25,000 
($27,500 for a violation occurring after January 21, 1997) and not less 
than $250 for each violation.

[Amdt. 107-24, 56 FR 8624, Feb. 28, 1991, as amended by Amdt. 107-32, 59 
FR 49131, Sept. 26, 1994; Amdt. 17-40, 62 FR 2971, Jan. 21, 1997; 65 FR 
58618, Sept. 29, 2000]



Sec. 107.331  Assessment considerations.

    After finding a knowing violation under this subpart, the Office of 
Chief Counsel assesses a civil penalty taking the following into 
account:
    (a) The nature and circumstances of the violation;

[[Page 40]]

    (b) The extent and gravity of the violation;
    (c) The degree of the respondent's culpability;
    (d) The respondent's prior violations;
    (e) The respondent's ability to pay;
    (f) The effect on the respondent's ability to continue in business; 
and
    (g) Such other matters as justice may require.

[Amdt. 107-11, 48 FR 2651, Jan. 20, 1983, as amended by Amdt. 107-30, 58 
FR 50500, Sept. 27, 1993; Amdt. 107-38, 61 FR 21100, May 9, 1996]

                           Criminal Penalties



Sec. 107.333  Criminal penalties generally.

    A person who knowingly violates Sec. 171.2(g) or willfully violates 
a provision of the Federal hazardous material transportation law or an 
order or regulation issued thereunder shall be fined under title 18, 
United States Code, or imprisoned for not more than 5 years, or both.

[Amdt. 107-11, 48 FR 2651, Jan. 20, 1983, as amended by Amdt. 107-32, 59 
FR 49131, Sept. 26, 1994]



Sec. 107.335  Referral for prosecution.

    If the Associate Administrator becomes aware of a possible willful 
violation of the Federal hazardous material transportation law, this 
subchapter, subchapter C of this chapter, or any exemption, or order 
issued thereunder, for which the Associate Administrator exercises 
enforcement responsibility, it shall report it to the Office of the 
Chief Counsel, Research and Special Programs Administration, U.S. 
Department of Transportation, Washington, DC 20590-0001. If appropriate, 
the Chief Counsel refers the report to the Department of Justice for 
criminal prosecution of the offender.

[Amdt. 107-11, 48 FR 2651, Jan. 20, 1983, as amended by Amdt. 107-22, 55 
FR 39978, Oct. 1, 1990; Amdt. 107-24, 56 FR 8621, Feb. 28, 1991; 56 FR 
15510, Apr. 17, 1991; Amdt. 107-32, 59 FR 49131, Sept. 26, 1994; Amdt. 
107-35, 60 FR 49108, Sept. 21, 1995; 66 FR 45377, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 107.336  Limitation on fines and penalties.

    If a State or political subdivision or Indian tribe assesses any 
fine or penalty determined by the Secretary to be appropriate for a 
violation concerning a subject listed in Sec. 107.202(a), no additional 
fine or penalty may be assessed for such violation by any other 
authority.

[Amdt. 107-24, 56 FR 8624, Feb. 28, 1991]

                            Injunctive Action



Sec. 107.337  Injunctions generally.

    Whenever it appears to the Office of Chief Counsel that a person has 
engaged, or is engaged, or is about to engage in any act or practice 
constituting a violation of any provision of the Federal hazardous 
material transportation law, this subchapter, subchapter C of this 
chapter, or any exemption, or order issued thereunder, for which the 
Office of Chief Counsel exercises enforcement responsibility, the 
Administrator, RSPA, or his delegate, may request the Attorney General 
to bring an action in the appropriate United States District Court for 
such relief as is necessary or appropriate, including mandatory or 
prohibitive injunctive relief, interim equitable relief, and punitive 
damages as provided by 49 U.S.C. 5122(a).

[Amdt. 107-11, 48 FR 2651, Jan. 20, 1983, as amended by Amdt. 107-32, 59 
FR 49131, Sept. 26, 1994]



Sec. 107.339  Imminent hazards.

    Whenever it appears to the Office of the Chief Counsel that there is 
a substantial likelihood that death, serious illness, or severe personal 
injury will result from the transportation of a particular hazardous 
material or hazardous materials container, before a compliance order 
proceeding or other administrative hearing or formal proceeding to abate 
the risk of that harm can be completed, the Administrator, RSPA, or his 
delegate, may bring an action under 49 U.S.C. 5122(b) in the appropriate 
United States District Court for an order suspending or restricting the 
transporation of that hazardous material or those containers or for such 
other equitable relief as is necessary or appropriate to ameliorate the 
hazard.

[Amdt. 107-11, 48 FR 2651, Jan. 20, 1983, as amended by Amdt. 107-15, 51 
FR 34987, Oct. 1, 1986; Amdt. 107-32, 59 FR 49131, Sept. 26, 1994]

[[Page 41]]

   Appendix A to Subpart D of Part 107--Guidelines for Civil Penalties

    I. This appendix sets forth the guidelines used by the Office of 
Hazardous Materials Safety (as of January 18, 1995) in making initial 
baseline determinations for recommending civil penalties. The first part 
of these guidelines is a list of baseline amounts or ranges for probable 
violations frequently cited in enforcement reports referred for action. 
Following the list of violations are general guidelines used by OHMS in 
making initial penalty determinations in enforcement cases.

                 II. List of Frequently Cited Violations

------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Violation description        Section or cite     Baseline assessment
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                         PART 107--REQUIREMENTS
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Failure to register as a      107.608.............  $1,000 +, $500 each
 carrier or shipper of                               add'l year.
 hazardous material.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                         PART 171--REQUIREMENTS
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Failure to give immediate     171.15..............  $3,000.
 telephone notice of a
 reportable hazardous
 materials incident.
Failure to file a DOT 5800.1  171.16..............  $500 to $2,500.
 Hazardous Materials
 Incident Report within 30
 days following an
 unintentional release of
 hazardous materials in
 transportation.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                         PART 172--REQUIREMENTS
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Shipping Papers (Sec.
 172.200--172.205):
    Failure to execute a      172.201.............  $3,000 to $6,000.
     shipping paper for a
     shipment of hazardous
     materials.
    Failure to follow one or  172.201(a)(1).......  $1,200.
     more of the three
     approved formats for
     listing hazardous
     materials on a shipping
     paper.
    Failure to include a      172.202.............  $800 to $1,600.
     proper shipping name in
     the shipping
     description or using an
     incorrect proper
     shipping name.
    Failure to include a      172.202.............  $1,000 to $2,000.
     hazard class/division
     number in the shipping
     description.
    Using an incorrect        172.202.............
     hazard class/
     identification number.
        --that does not       ....................  $800
         affect
         compatibility
         requirements.
        --that affects        ....................  $3,000 to $6,000.
         compatibility
         requirements.
    Failure to include an     172.202.............  $1,000 to $2,000.
     identification number
     in the shipping
     description.
    Using an incorrect        172.202.............
     identification number.
        --that does not       ....................  $800,
         change the response
         information.
        --that changes the    ....................  $3,000 to $6,000.
         response
         information.
    Using a shipping          172.202.............  $800.
     description that
     includes additional
     unauthorized
     information (extra or
     incorrect words).
    Using a shipping          172.202.............  $500.
     description not in
     required sequence.
    Using a shipping          172.202.............
     description with two or
     more required elements
     missing or incorrect.
        --such that the       ....................  $3,000.
         material is
         misdescribed.
        --such that the       ....................  $6,000.
         material is
         misclassified.
    Failure to include the    172.202(c)..........  $400.
     total quantity of
     hazardous material
     covered by a shipping
     description.
    The letters ``RQ'' are    172.203(c)(2).......  $500.
     not used in the
     shipping description to
     identify materials that
     are hazardous
     substances.
    Using a shipping          172.203(d)..........  $2,000 to $4,000.
     description for Class 7
     (radioactive) material
     that fails to contain
     the required additional
     entries, or contains
     incorrect information
     for these additional
     entries.
    Failure to include a      172.203(k)..........  $1,000.
     required technical name
     in parentheses for a
     listed generic or
     ``nos'' material.
    Failure to list an        172.203(a)..........  $800.
     exemption number in
     association with the
     shipping description.
    Failure to include the    172.204(a)..........  $1,000.
     required shipper's
     certification on a
     shipping paper.
    Failure to execute the    172.204.............  $800.
     required shipper's
     certification on a
     shipping paper.
Emergency Response
 Information Requirements
 (Sec.  172.600--172.604):
    1. Providing or listing   172.602.............
     incorrect emergency
     response information
     with or on a shipping
     paper.
        a. No significant     ....................  $800.
         difference in
         response.
        b. Ssignificant       ....................  $3,000 to $6,000.
         difference in
         response.
    2. Failure to include an  172.604.............  $2,600.
     emergency response
     telephone number on a
     shipping paper.
    3. Failure to have the    172.604.............  $1,300.
     emergency response
     telephone number
     monitored while a
     hazardous material is
     in transportation or
     listing multiple
     telephone numbers
     (without specifying the
     times for each) that
     are not monitored 24
     hours a day.
    4. Listing an             172.604.............  $2,600 to $4,200.
     unauthorized emergency
     response telephone
     number on a shipping
     paper.

[[Page 42]]

 
    5. Listing an incorrect   172.604.............  $1,300.
     or non-working
     emergency response
     telephone number on a
     shipping paper.
    6. Failure to provide     172.604.............  $1,300.
     required technical
     information when the
     listed emergency
     response telephone
     number is contacted.
Package Marking Requirements
 (Sec.  172.300--172.338):
    Failure to mark the       172.301(a)..........  $800 to $1,600.
     proper shipping name on
     a package or marking an
     incorrect shipping name
     on a package.
    Failure to mark the       172.301(a)..........  $1,000 to $2,000.
     identification number
     on a package.
    Marking a package with    172.301(a)..........
     an incorrect
     identification number.
        --that does not       ....................  $800.
         change the response
         information.
        --that changes the    ....................  $3,000 to $6,000.
         response
         information.
    Failure to mark the       172.301(a)..........  $3,000 to $6,000.
     proper shipping name
     and identification
     number on a package.
    Marking a package with    172.301(a)..........
     an incorrect shipping
     name and identification
     number.
        --that does not       ....................  $1,500 to $3,000.
         change the response
         information.
        --that changes the    ....................  $3,000 to $6,000.
         response
         information.
    Failure to include the    172.301(c)..........  $1,000.
     required technical
     name(s) in parentheses
     for a listed generic or
     ``no'' entry.
    Failure to mark a         172.312.............  $2,500 to $3,500.
     package containing
     liquid hazardous
     materials with required
     orientation marks.
Package Labeling
 Requirements (Sec.  172.400-
 172.450):
    Failure to label a        172.400.............  $5,000.
     package.
    Placing a label that      172.400.............  $5,000.
     represents a hazard
     other than the hazard
     presented by the
     hazardous material in
     the package.
    Placing a label on a      172.401(a)..........  $800.
     package that does not
     contain a hazardous
     material.
    Placing a label on Class  172.403.............  $5,000.
     7 (radioactive)
     material that
     understates the proper
     label category.
    Placing a label on Class  172.403(g)..........  $2,000 to $4,000.
     7 (radioactive)
     material that fails to
     contain, or has
     erroneous, entries for
     the name of the
     radionuclide(s),
     activity, and transport
     index.
    Placing a label not       172.407(c)..........  $800.
     conforming to size
     requirements on a
     package.
    Placing a label on a      172.406(a)..........  $800.
     different surface of
     the package than, or
     far away from, the
     proper shipping name.
    Placing a label that      172.407(d)..........  $600 to $2,500.
     does not meet color
     specification
     requirements on a
     package (depending on
     the variance).
    Failure to place a        172.402.............  $500 to $2,500.
     required subsidiary
     label on a package.
    Failure to provide an     172.411.............  $2,500.
     appropriate class or
     division number on a
     label.
Placarding Requirements
 (Sec.  172.500-172.560):
    Failure to properly       172.504.............  $1,000 to $9,000.
     placard a freight
     container or vehicle
     containing hazardous
     materials when table 1
     is applicable.
    Failure to properly       172.504.............  $800 to $7,500.
     placard a freight
     container or vehicle
     containing hazardous
     materials when table 2
     is applicable.
Training Requirements (Sec.
 172.700-172.704):
    Failure to train hazmat   172.702.............
     employees in the three
     required areas of
     training.
        --more than 10        ....................  $2,400 and up.
         hazmat employees.
        --10 hazmat           ....................  $1,500 and up.
         employees or less.
    Failure to train hazmat   172.702.............
     employees in any one of
     the three required
     areas of training.
        --more than 10        ....................  $800 and up.
         hazmat employees.
        --10 hazmat           ....................  $500 and up.
         employees or less.
    Failure to maintain       172.704.............
     training records.
        --more than 10        ....................  800 and up.
         hazmat employees.
        --10 hazmat           ....................  $500 and up.
         employees or less.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                         PART 173--REQUIREMENTS
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Overpack Requirements (Sec.
 173.25)
    Failure to mark an        173.25(a)(4)........  $3,000.
     overpack with a
     statement indicating
     that the inside
     packages comply with
     prescribed
     specifications when
     specification packaging
     is required.
Reconditioner Requirements
 (Sec.  173.28):
    1. Representing,          173.28(c), (d)......  $6,000 to $10,800.
     marking, or certifying
     a drum as a
     reconditioned UN
     standard packaging,
     when the drum did not
     meet a UN standard.
    2. Marking an incorrect   173.28(b)(2)(ii)....
     registration number on
     a reconditioned
     packaging.
        a. Incorrect number.  ....................  $800.
        b. Use of another     ....................  $7,200.
         reconditioner's
         number.
    3. Failure to properly    173.28(b)(2)(i).....
     conduct alternate
     leakage test.
        a. Improper test....  ....................  $2,000.
        b. No test at all...  ....................  $4,000.
    4. Representing,          173.28(d)...........  $500.
     marking, or certifying
     a drum as altered from
     one standards to
     another, when the drum
     had not actually been
     altered.
    Representing, marking,    173.28(d)...........  $500.
     or certifying a drum as
     altered from one
     standard to another,
     when the drum had not
     actually been altered.

[[Page 43]]

 
Portable and IM Tank
 Requirements (Secs.
 173.32(e), 173.32c,
 173.315)
    Offering hazardous        173.32(a)(1),         $3,500 to $7,000.
     materials for             173.315(a),
     transportation in a DOT   Applicable
     specification or          Exemption.
     exemption portable tank
     which is out of test.
    Offering an IM portable   173.32c(c)..........  $3,500.
     tank for transportation
     that has not been
     hydrostatically tested
     within the last 2\1/2\
     years per 173.32b(a).
    Offering an IM portable   173.32c(c)..........  $3,500.
     tank for transportation
     that has not been
     visually inspected in
     last five years per
     173.32b(b).
    Offering an IM portable   173.32c(c)..........  $7,000.
     tank for transportation
     that has not been
     visually or
     hydrostatically tested
     as required, or failing
     to remove the safety
     relief valves during
     testing.
    Offering a hazardous      173.32c(g)..........
     material for
     transportation in an IM
     portable tank equipped
     with bottom outlets,
     when the material
     contained is prohibited
     from being offered in
     this type of packaging.
        --Packing Group II..  ....................  $7,000.
        --Packing Group III.  ....................  $5,000.
    Failure to provide the    173.32c(k)..........  $6,000 to $12,000.
     required outage for a
     shipment of hazardous
     materials, that results
     in the release of
     hazardous materials.
    Offering a hazardous      173.32(e)(3),         $3,000.
     material for              173.32b(d).
     transportation in an
     DOT, exemption, or IM
     portable tank which
     fails to bear markings
     that it has been
     properly retested.
Cylinder Retesters (Secs.
 173.23, 173.34, and
 173.302):
    Failure to remark as DOT  173.23(c)...........  $600.
     3AL an aluminum
     cylinder manufactured
     under a former
     exemption.
    Certifying or marking as  173.34..............  $800.
     retested a
     nonspecification
     cylinder.
    Marking a cylinder in or  173.34(c)(1)........  $6,000 to $10,800.
     on the sidewall area
     when not permitted by
     the applicable
     specification.
    Failure to maintain       173.34(c)...........  $800.
     legible markings on a
     cylinder.
    Failure to perform        173.34(e)...........  $2,100 to $5,200.
     hydrostatic retesting
     at the minimum of 5/3
     times the service
     pressure, or at the
     minimum specified test
     pressure.
    Failure to conduct a      173.34(e)(3)........  $2,100 to $5,200.
     complete visual
     external and internal
     examination.
    Failure to have a         173.34(e)(2)(i).....  $4,000.
     retester's
     identification number
     (RIN).
    Failure to have current   173.34)(e)(2)(i)....  $2,000.
     authority due to
     failure to renew a
     retester's
     identification number.
    Failure to have a         173.34(e)(2)(i).....  $7,200.
     retester's
     identification number
     and marking another RIN
     on a cylinder.
    Marking a RIN before      173.34(e)(1)(ii)....  $800.
     successfully completing
     a hydrostatic retest.
    Requalifying a DOT        173.34(e)(1)(ii)....  $4,200 to $10,400.
     cylinder without
     performing the visual
     inspection or
     hydrostatic retest.
    Performing hydrostatic    173.34(e)(4)........  $2,100 to $5,200.
     retesting without
     demonstrating the
     accuracy of the testing
     equipment.
    Failure to hold           173.34(e)(4)........  $3,100.
     hydrostatic test
     pressure for 30 seconds
     or sufficiently longer
     to allow for complete
     expansion.
    Failure to perform a      173.34(e)(4)........  $3,100.
     second retest, after
     equipment failure, at a
     pressure of 10% more or
     100 psi more, whichever
     is less (includes
     exceeding 90% of test
     pressure prior to
     conducting a retest).
    Failure to condemn a      173.34(e)(6)........  $10,000.
     cylinder with permanent
     expansion of 10% or
     greater (5% for certain
     exemption cylinders);
     failure to condemn
     cylinders with evidence
     of internal or external
     corrosion, denting,
     bulging, or rough usage.
    Marking an FRP cylinder   Applicable Exemption  $6,000 to $10,800.
     with steel stamps in
     the FRP area of the
     cylinder such that the
     integrity of the
     cylinder is compromised.
    Failure to keep complete
     and accurate records of
     cylinder reinspection
     and retest.
        --No records kept...  ....................  $4,000.
        --Incomplete or       173.34(e)(8)........  $1,000 to $3,000.
         inaccurate records.
    Improper marking of the   173.34(e)(7)........  $800
     RIN or retest date on a
     cylinder.
    Marking a DOT 3HT         173.34(e)(15).......  $6,000 to $10,800.
     cylinder with a steel
     stamp other than a low-
     stress steel stamp.
    Marking a ``+'' sign on   173.302(c)(3).......  $3,000 to $4,000.
     a cylinder without
     determining the average
     or maximum wall stress,
     by calculation or
     reference to CGA
     Pamphlet C-5.
    Representing, marking,    171.2(c), Applicable  $2,000 to $6,000.
     or certifying a           Exemption.
     cylinder as meeting the
     requirements of an
     exemption, when the
     cylinder was not
     maintained or retested
     in accordance with the
     exemption.
Rebuilder Requirements (Sec.
 173.34):
    Representing a DOT-4      173.34(l)...........  $6,000 to $10,800.
     series cylinder as
     meeting the
     requirements of the
     Hazardous Materials
     Regulations without
     being authorized to do
     so by the Associate
     Administrator for
     Hazardous Materials
     Safety.
Offeror Requirements
 (General):
    Offering a hazardous      Various.............
     material for
     transportation in an
     unauthorized non-UN
     standard or
     nonspecification
     packaging (includes the
     failure to comply with
     the terms of an
     exemption authorizing
     the use of a
     nonstandard or
     nonspecification
     packaging).
        --Packing Group I     ....................  $9,000.
         (includes Sec. 172
         504 table 1
         materials).

[[Page 44]]

 
        --Packing Group II..  ....................  $7,000.
        --Packing Group III.  ....................  $5,000.
    Offering a hazardous      178.3(a), 178.503(a)  $3,600.
     material for
     transportation in a
     packaging that has
     successfully been
     tested to an applicable
     UN standard, but is not
     marked with the
     required UN marking.
    Offering a hazardous      173.24(b)...........
     material for
     transportation in a
     packaging that leaks
     during conditions
     normally incident to
     transportation.
        --Packing Group I     ....................  $12,000.
         (includes Sec.
         172.504 table 2
         materials).
        --Packing Group II..  ....................  $9,000.
        --Packing Group III.  ....................  $6,000.
    Overfilling a package so  173.24(b)...........
     that the effectiveness
     is substantially
     reduced.
        --Packing Group I     ....................  $9,000.
         (includes Sec.
         172.504 table 1
         materials).
        --Packing Group II..  ....................  $6,000.
        --Packing Group III.  ....................  $3,000.
    Offering a hazardous      171.14..............
     material for
     transportation after
     October 1, 1996, in an
     unauthorized non-UN
     standard packaging
     marked as manufactured
     to a DOT specification.
        --packaging meets     ....................  $3,000.
         DOT specification.
        --packaging does not  ....................  $5,000 to $9,000.
         meet DOT
         specification.
Offeror Requirements (Class
 1--Explosives):
    Failing to mark the       172.320.............  $1,200.
     ``EX'' approval number
     on a package containing
     an explosive.
    Offering an unapproved    173.54 and 173.56(b)
     explosive for
     transportation.
        --Div 1.3 & 1.4       ....................  $5,0000 to $10,000.
         fireworks meeting
         the chemistry
         requirements (both
         quantity and type)
         of APA Standard 87-
         1.
        --all other           ....................  $10,000 to $27,500.
         explosives
         (including
         forbidden
         explosives).
    Offering a leaking or     173.54(c)...........  $10,000 to $27,500.
     damaged package of
     explosives for
     transportation.
Offeror Requirements (Class
 7--Radioactive Materials):
    1. Offering a DOT         173.415(a), 173.461.
     specification 7A
     packaging without
     maintaining complete
     documentation of tests
     and an engineering
     evaluation or
     comparative data.
        a. Tests and          ....................  $8,400.
         evaluation not
         performed.
        b. Complete records   ....................  $2,000 to $5,000.
         not maintained.
    2. Offering a Type B      173.471(a)..........
     packaging without
     holding a valid NRC
     approval certificate.
        a. Never having       ....................  $2,500.
         obtained one.
        b. Holding an         ....................  $1,000.
         expired certificate.
    3. Offering a limited     173.421(a)(4).......  $5,000 and up.
     quantity of radioactive
     materials without
     marking the inner (or
     single) packaging
     ``Radioactive''.
    4. Offering low specific  173.427(a)(6).......  $800.
     activity (LSA)
     radioactive materials
     consigned as exclusive
     use without providing
     instructions for
     maintenance of
     exclusive use shipment
     controls.
    5. Offering a package     173.441.............  $10,000 and up.
     that exceeds the
     permitted limits for
     surface radiation or
     transport index.
    6. Offering a package     173.443.............  $5,000 and up.
     without determining the
     level of removable
     external contamination,
     or that exceeds the
     limit for removable
     external contamination.
    7. Storing packages of    173.447(a)..........  $5,000 and up.
     radioactive material in
     a group with a total
     transport index more
     than 50.
    8. Offering special form  173.476(a), (b).....  $2,500.
     radioactive materials
     without maintaining a
     complete safety
     analysis or Certificate
     of Competent Authority.
Offeror Requirements
 (Cylinders):
    Offering a compressed     173.301(c)..........  $4,200 to $10,400.
     gas for transportation
     in a cylinder that is
     out of test.
    Failure to check each     173.303(d)..........  $5,000.
     day the pressure of a
     cylinder charged with
     acetylene that is
     representative of that
     day's compression,
     after the cylinder has
     cooled to a settled
     temperature, or failure
     to keep a record of
     this test for at least
     30 days.
    Offering a limited        173.306(a)(3), (h)..  $1,500 to $6,000.
     quantity of a
     compressed gas in a
     metal container for the
     purpose of propelling a
     nonpoisonous material
     and failing to heat the
     cylinder until the
     pressure is equivalent
     to the equilibrium
     pressure at 130  deg.F,
     without evidence of
     leakage, distortion, or
     other defect.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                         PART 178--REQUIREMENTS
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Third-Party Packaging
 Certifiers (General):
    1. Issuing a              171.2(e), 178.2(b),   $500 per item.
     certification that        178.3(a),
     directs the packaging     178.503(a).
     manufacturer to
     improperly mark a
     packaging (e.g., steel
     drum to be marked UN
     4G).
Manufacturers (General):
    1. Failure to insure a    178.601(b)..........
     packaging certified as
     meeting the UN standard
     is capable of passing
     the required
     performance testing.
        a. Packing Group I    ....................  $10,800.
         (includes Section
         172.504 table 1
         materials).
        b. Packing Group II.  ....................  $8,400.

[[Page 45]]

 
        c. Packing Group III  ....................  $6,000.
    2. Certifying a           178.601(d)..........
     packaging as meeting a
     UN standard when design
     qualification testing
     was not performed.
        a. Packing Group I    ....................  $10,800.
         (includes Section
         172 504 table 1
         materials).
        b. Packing Group II.  ....................  $8,400.
        c. Packing Group III  ....................  $6,000.
    3. Failure to conduct     178.601(e)..........  $2,000 to $10,800.
     periodic retesting on
     UN standard packaging
     (depending on length of
     time and Packing Group).
    4. Failure to properly    ....................
     conduct testing for UN
     standard packaging
     (e.g., testing with
     less weight than marked
     on packaging; drop
     testing from lesser
     height than required;
     failing to condition
     fiberboard boxes before
     design test).
        a. Design             178.601(d)..........  $2,000 to $10,800.
         qualification
         testing.
        b. Periodic           178.601(e)..........  $500 to $10,800.
         retesting.
    5. Marking, or causing    178.2(b), 178.3(a),   $7,200.
     the marking of, a         178.503(a)(8).
     packaging with the
     symbol of a
     manufacturer or
     packaging certifier
     other than the company
     that actually
     manufactured or
     certified the packaging.
    6. Failure to maintain    178.601(1)..........
     testing records.
        a. Design             ....................  $1,000 to $5,000.
         qualification
         testing.
        b. Periodic           ....................  $500 to $2,000.
         retesting.
    7. Improper marking of    178.503.............  $500 per item.
     UN certification.
    8. Manufacturing DOT      171.14..............
     specification packaging
     after October 1, 1994
     that is not marked as
     meeting a UN
     performance standard.
        a. If packaging does  ....................  $3,000.
         meet DOT
         specification.
        b. If packaging does  ....................  $6,000 to $10,800.
         not meet DOT
         specification.
Manufacturing Requirements--
 Drums:
    1. Failure to properly
     conduct production
     leakproofness test.
        a. Improper testing.  178.604(b)(1).......  $2,000.
        b. No testing         173.28..............  $2,000 to $10,800.
         performed.
Manufacturing Requirements--
 Cylinders:
    1. Manufacturing,         Various.............  $7,500 to $15,000.
     representing, marking,
     certifying, or selling
     a DOT high-pressure
     cylinder that was not
     inspected and verified
     by an approved
     independent inspection
     agency.
    2. Failure to have a      Various.............  $800.
     registration number or
     failure to mark the
     registration number on
     the cylinder.
    3. Marking another        Various.............  $7,200.
     company's number on a
     cylinder.
    4. Failure to mark the    178.65..............  $3,000.
     date of manufacture or
     lot number on a DOT-39
     cylinder.
    5. Failure to have a      Various.............  $5,000.
     chemical analysis
     performed in the US for
     a material manufactured
     outside the US/failure
     to obtain a chemical
     analysis from the
     foreign manufacturer.
    6. Failure to meet wall   Various.............  $7,500 to $15,000.
     thickness requirements.
    7. Failure to heat treat  Various.............  $5,000 to $15,000.
     cylinders prior to
     testing.
    8. Failure to conduct a   Various.............  $2,500 to $6,200.
     complete visual
     internal examination.
    9. Failure to conduct a   Various.............  $2,500 to $6,200.
     hydrostatic test, or
     conducting a
     hydrostatic test with
     inaccurate test
     equipment.
    10. Failure to conduct a  Various.............  $7,500 to $15,000.
     flattening test.
    11. Failure to conduct a  178.65(f)(2)........  $5,000 to $15,000.
     burst test on a DOT-39
     cylinder.
    12. Failure to have       Various.............  $7,500 to $15,000.
     inspections and
     verifications performed
     by an inspector.
    13. Failure to maintain   Various.............
     a required inspector's
     reports.
        a. No reports at all  ....................  $5,000.
        b. Incomplete or      ....................  $1,000 to $4,000.
         inaccurate reports.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                           Other Requirements
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Carrier Requirements:
    Transporting packages of  177.834(a) & (g)....  $3,000.
     hazardous materials
     that have not been
     secured against
     movement within the
     vehicle.
    Transporting explosives   177.835(i)..........  $5,200.
     in a motor vehicle
     containing metal or
     other articles or
     materials likely to
     damage such explosives
     or any package in which
     they are contained,
     without segregating in
     different parts of the
     load or securing them
     in place in or on the
     motor vehicle and
     separated by bulkheads
     or other suitable means
     to prevent such damage.
    Transporting railway      171.2(b)............  $7,000.
     track torpedoes outside
     of flagging kits, in
     violation of E-7991.
    Transporting Class 7       177.842(a).........  $5,000 and up.
     (radioactive) material
     having a total
     transport index more
     than 50.
    Transporting Class 7       177.842(b).........  $5,000 and up.
     (radioactive) material
     without maintaining the
     required separation
     distance.
    Failing to comply with    171.2(b)............
     requirements of an
     exemption authorizing
     the transportation of
     Class 7 (radioactive)
     material having a total
     transport index more
     than 50.
        --failure to have     ....................  $5,000.
         the radiation
         survey record
         required by
         [para][para] 7(f),
         8(b)(3).

[[Page 46]]

 
        --failure to have     ....................  $500 each.
         other accompanying
         documents required
         by [para] 8(b).
        --other violations    ....................  $5,000 and up.
         of [para][para] 7
         and 8.
Exemptions:
    Offering or transporting  171.2(a), (b), (c),   $1,000 + $500 each
     hazardous materials, or   Various.              add'l year.
     otherwise performing a
     function, covered by an
     exemption after
     expiration of the
     exemption.
------------------------------------------------------------------------

                III. Consideration of Statutory Criteria

    A. These guidelines are used by the Office of Hazardous Materials 
Safety (OHMS) in setting initial proposed penalties for hazmat 
violations. They indicate baseline amounts or ranges for probable 
violations frequently cited in enforcement reports and set forth general 
OHMS policy for considering statutory criteria.
    B. The initial baseline determination partially considers the 
nature, extent, circumstances, and gravity of the alleged violation. 
That determination then is adjusted to consider all other evidence 
concerning the nature, extent, circumstances, and gravity of the alleged 
violation; degree of culpability; history of prior violations; ability 
to pay; effect of the penalty on ability to continue to do business; and 
such other matters as justice may require (a major component of which is 
corrective action taken by a respondent to prevent a recurrence of 
similar violations). In making a penalty recommendation, the baseline or 
range may be increased or decreased on the basis of evidence pertaining 
to these factors.
    C. The following miscellaneous factors are used to implement one or 
more of the statutory assessment criteria.

           IV. Miscellaneous Factors Affecting Penalty Amounts

                          A. Corrective Action

    1. A proposed penalty is mitigated for documented corrective action 
of alleged violations taken by a respondent. Corrective action may 
occur: (1) After an inspection and before a Notice of Probable Violation 
(NOPV) is issued; (2) on receipt of an NOPV; or (3) after receipt of an 
NOPV (possibly after it is solicited by an RSPA attorney). In general, 
corrective action may reduce a penalty up to 25%. Mitigation may be 
taken into account in the referral memo or may be recommended prior to 
issuance of an Order by RSPA's Chief Counsel.
    2. The two primary factors in determining the penalty reduction are 
extent and timing of the corrective action. In other words, mitigation 
will be determined on the basis of how much corrective action was taken 
and when it was taken. Systemic action to prevent future violations is 
given greater consideration than action simply to remedy violations 
identified during the inspection.
    3. Mitigation is applied to individual violations. Thus, in a case 
with two violations, if corrective action for the first violation is 
more extensive than for the second, the penalty for the first will be 
mitigated more than that for the second.

                       B. Respondents That Re-Ship

    A shipper that reships materials received from another company, in 
the same packaging and without opening or altering the package, 
independently is responsible for ensuring that the shipment complies 
with Federal hazmat law, and independently may be subject to enforcement 
action if the package does not comply. Nevertheless, the reshipper is 
considered to have a lesser level of responsibility for compliance in 
those respects in which it reasonably relies on the compliance of the 
package as received. In most cases of this type, OHMS will discount the 
applicable baseline standard by about 25%. The specific knowledge and 
expertise of all parties must be considered in discounting for reliance 
on a prior shipper. This discount is applied before any consideration of 
mitigation based on corrective action.

                C. Penalty Increases for Multiple Counts

    Under the Federal hazmat law, 49 U.S.C. 5213(a), each violation of 
the HMR and each day of a continuing violation (except for violations 
pertaining to packaging manufacture or qualification) is subject to a 
civil penalty of up to $25,000 ($27,500 for a violation occurring after 
January 21, 1997). Absent aggravating factors, OHMS, in its exercise of 
discretion, ordinarily will apply a single penalty for multiple counts 
or days of violation. In a number of cases, particularly those involving 
shippers, an inspector may cite two or more similar packaging violations 
for different hazardous materials. For example, the inspector may cite 
the same marking violation for two or more packages. OHMS usually will 
consider those additional violations as counts of the same violation and 
will not recommend multiples of the same baseline penalty. Rather, OHMS 
usually will recommend the baseline penalty for a single violation, 
increased by 25% for each additional violation.

                       D. Financial Considerations

    1. Mitigation is appropriate when the baseline penalty would (1) 
exceed an amount that the respondent is able to pay, or (2) have an

[[Page 47]]

adverse effect on the respondent's ability to continue in business. 
These criteria relate to a respondent's entire business, and not just 
the product line or part of its operations involved in the violation(s). 
Beyond the overall financial size of the respondent's business, the 
relevant items of information on a respondent's balance sheet include 
the current ratio (current assets to current liabilities), the nature of 
current assets, and net worth (total assets minus total liabilities).
    2. These figures are considered on a case-by-case basis. In general, 
however, a current ratio close to or below 1.0 means that the company 
may have difficulty in paying a large penalty, and may justify reduction 
of the penalty or an installment payment plan. A small amount of cash on 
hand representing limited liquidity, even with substantial other current 
assets (such as accounts receivable or inventory), may warrant a short-
term payment plan. Respondent's income statement also will be reviewed 
to determine whether a payment plan is appropriate.
    3. Many companies are able to continue in business for extended 
periods of time with a small or negative net worth, and many respondents 
have paid substantial civil penalties in installments even though net 
worth was negative. For this reason, negative net worth alone does not 
always warrant reduction of a proposed penalty or even, in the absence 
of factors discussed above, a payment plan.
    4. In general, an installment payment plan may be justified where 
reduction of a proposed penalty is not, but the appropriateness of 
either (or both) will depend on the circumstances of the case. The 
length of a payment plan should be as short as possible, but the plan 
may consider seasonal fluctuations in a company's income if the 
company's business is seasonal (e.g., swimming pool chemical sales, 
fireworks sales) or if the company has documented specific reasons for 
current non-liquidity.
    5. Evidence of financial condition is used only to decrease a 
penalty, and not to increase it.

                E. Penalty Increases for Prior Violations

    1. The baseline penalty presumes an absence of prior violations. If 
prior violations exist, generally they will serve to increase a proposed 
penalty. The general standard for increasing a baseline proposed penalty 
on the basis of prior violations is as follows:

a. One prior case--25% increase over the pre-mitigation recommended 
penalty
b. Two prior cases--50% increase over the pre-mitigation recommended 
penalty
c. Three prior cases--75% increase over the pre-mitigation recommended 
penalty
d. Four or more prior cases--100% increase over the pre-mitigation 
recommended penalty

    2. A case of prior violations closed more than five years previously 
normally will not be considered in determining a proposed penalty.

           F. Penalty Increases for Use of Expired Exemptions

    Adjustments to the base line figures for use of expired exemptions 
can be made depending on how much material has been shipped during the 
period between the expiration date and the renewal date. If the company 
previously has been found to have operated under an expired exemption, 
the penalty is normally doubled. If the company has been previously 
cited for other violations, the penalty generally will be increased by 
about 25%.

[Amdt. 107-33, 60 FR 12141, Mar. 6, 1995, as amended by Amdt. 107-40, 62 
FR 2972, 2977, Jan. 21, 1997; 62 FR 51556, Oct. 1, 1997; 65 FR 58618, 
Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45180, Aug. 28, 2001]



      Subpart E--Designation of Approval and Certification Agencies



Sec. 107.401  Purpose and scope.

    (a) This subpart establishes procedures for the designation of 
agencies to issue approval certificates and certifications for types of 
packagings designed, manufactured, tested, or maintained in conformance 
with the requirements of this subchapter, subchapter C of this chapter, 
and standards set forth in the United Nations (U.N.) Recommendations 
(Transport of Dangerous Goods). Except for certifications of compliance 
with U.N. packaging standards, this subpart does not apply unless made 
applicable by a rule in subchapter C of this chapter.
    (b) The Associate Administrator may issue approval certificates and 
certifications addressed in paragraph (a) of this section.

[Amdt. 107-31, 50 FR 10062, Mar. 13, 1985, as amended by Amdt. 107-23, 
56 FR 66157, Dec. 20, 1991; 66 FR 45377, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 107.402  Application for designation as an approval or certification agency.

    (a) Any organization or person seeking designation as an approval or 
certification agency shall apply in writing to the Associate 
Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety (DHM-32),

[[Page 48]]

Department of Transportation, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington DC 
20590-0001. Alternatively, the application with any attached supporting 
documentation in an appropriate format may be submitted by facsimile 
(fax) to: (202) 366-3753 or (202) 366-3308 or by electronic mail (e-
mail) to: [email protected]. Each application must be signed and 
certified to be correct by the applicant or, if the applicant is an 
organization, by an authorized officer or official representative of the 
organization. Any false statement or representation, or the knowing and 
willful concealment of a material fact, may subject the applicant to 
prosecution under the provisions of 18 U.S.C. 1001, result in the denial 
or termination of a designation.
    (b) Each application for designation must be in English and include 
the following information:
    (1) Name and address of the applicant, including place of 
incorporation if a corporation. In addition, if the applicant is not a 
resident of the United States, the name and address of a permanent 
resident of the United States designated in accordance with Sec. 105.40 
to serve as agent for service of process.
    (2) If the applicant's principal place of business is in a country 
other than the United States, a copy of the designation from the 
Competent Authority of that country delegating to the applicant an 
approval or designated agency authority for the type of packaging for 
which a DOT designation is sought, and a statement that the Competent 
Authority also delegates similar authority to U.S. Citizens or 
organizations having designations under this subpart from the RSPA.
    (3) A listing, by DOT specification (or exemption) number, or U.N. 
designation, of the types of packagings for which approval authority is 
sought.
    (4) A personnel qualifications plan listing the qualifications that 
the applicant will require of each person to be used in the performance 
of each packaging approval or certification function. As a minimum, 
these qualifications must include:
    (i) The ability to review and evaluate design drawings, design and 
stress calculations;
    (ii) A knowledge of the applicable regulations of subchapter C of 
this chapter and, when applicable, U.N. standards; and
    (iii) The ability to conduct or monitor and evaluate test procedures 
and results; and
    (iv) The ability to review and evaluate the qualifications of 
materials and fabrication procedures.
    (5) A statement that the applicant will perform its functions 
independent of the manufacturers and owners of the packagings concerned.
    (6) A statement that the applicant will allow the Associate 
Administrator or his representative to inspect its records and 
facilities in so far as they relate to the approval or certification of 
specification packagings and shall cooperate in the conduct of such 
inspections.
    (c) The applicant shall furnish any additional information relevant 
to the applicant's qualifications, if requested by the Associate 
Administrator.

[Amdt. 107-13, 50 FR 10062, Mar. 13, 1985; 50 FR 16089, Apr. 24, 1985, 
as amended by Amdt. 107-22, 55 FR 39978, Oct. 1, 1990; Amdt. 107-23, 56 
FR 66157, Dec. 20, 1991; 66 FR 45377, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 61011, Sept. 
27, 2002]



Sec. 107.403  Designation of approval agencies.

    (a) If the Associate Administrator determines that an application 
contains all the required information, the applicant is sent a letter of 
designation and assigned an identification code.
    (b) If the Associate Administrator determines that an application 
does not contain all the required information, the application is denied 
and the applicant is sent a written notice containing all the reasons 
for the denial.
    (c) Within 30 days of an initial denial of an application under 
paragraph (b) of this section, the applicant may file an amended 
application. If after considering the amended application, the Associate 
Administrator determines that it should be denied, he notifies the 
applicant, and the denial constitutes the final action of the Associate 
Administrator on the application. Within 60 days of receipt of the final 
denial the applicant may appeal the denial to the Administrator, RSPA, 
setting forth in

[[Page 49]]

writing where the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety 
erred in this determination.

[Amdt. 107-13, 50 FR 10062, Mar. 13, 1985, as amended by Amdt. 107-23, 
56 FR 66157, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 107-32, 59 FR 49131, Sept. 26, 1994; 
66 FR 45377, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 107.404  Conditions of designation.

    (a) Each designation made under this subpart contains the following 
conditions:
    (1) The designated approval or certification agency may use only 
testing equipment that it has determined, through personal inspection, 
to be suitable for the purpose.
    (2) Each approval certificate and certification issued by the 
designated approval agency must contain the name and identification code 
of the approval agency.
    (3) Each approval certificate and certification must be in a format 
acceptable to the Associate Administrator.
    (b) The designated approval agency shall notify the Associate 
Administrator within 20 days after the date there is any change in the 
information submitted under Sec. 107.402.
    (c) The designated approval agency shall comply with all of the 
terms and conditions stated in its letter of designation under the 
subpart.
    (d) Nothing in this part relieves a manufacturer or owner of a 
packaging of responsibility for compliance with any of the applicable 
requirements of this title.

[Amdt. 107-13, 50 FR 10062, Mar. 13, 1985, as amended by Amdt. 107-23, 
56 FR 66157, Dec. 20, 1991; 66 FR 45377, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 107.405  Termination of designation.

    (a) Any designation issued under Sec. 107.403 of this subchapter may 
be suspended or terminated if the Associate Administrator determines 
that:
    (1) The application for designation contained a misrepresentation, 
or the applicant willfully concealed a material fact.
    (2) The approval agency failed to comply with a term or condition 
stated in the agency's letter of designation.
    (3) The Competent Authority of an approval agency of a country 
outside the United States has failed to initiate, maintain or recognize 
a qualified U.S. approval agency.
    (b) Before a designation is suspended or terminated, the Associate 
Administrator shall give to the approval agency:
    (1) Written notice of the facts or conduct believed to warrant 
suspension or termination of the designation.
    (2) Sixty days in which to show in writing why the designation 
should not be suspended or terminated.

[Amdt. 107-13, 50 FR 10062, Mar. 13, 1985, as amended by Amdt. 107-23, 
56 FR 66157, Dec. 20, 1991; 66 FR 45377, Aug. 28, 2001]



   Subpart F--Registration of Cargo Tank and Cargo Tank Motor Vehicle 
   Manufacturers and Repairers and Cargo Tank Motor Vehicle Assemblers



Sec. 107.501  Scope.

    (a) This subpart establishes a registration procedure for persons 
who are engaged in the manufacture, assembly, inspection and testing, 
certification, or repair of a cargo tank or a cargo tank motor vehicle 
manufactured in accordance with a DOT specification under subchapter C 
of this chapter or under terms of an exemption issued under this part.
    (b) Persons engaged in continuing qualification and maintenance of 
cargo tanks and cargo tank motor vehicles must be familiar with the 
requirements set forth in part 180, subpart E, of this chapter.

[Amdt. 107-20, 55 FR 37047, Sept. 7, 1990]



Sec. 107.502  General registration requirements.

    (a) Definitions: For purposes of this subpart--
    (1) Assembly means the assembly of one or more tanks or cargo tanks 
to a motor vehicle or to a motor vehicle suspension component and 
involves no welding on the cargo tank wall.
    (2) The terms Authorized Inspector, Cargo tank, Cargo tank motor 
vehicle, Design Certifying Engineer, Registered Inspector, and Person 
are defined in Sec. 171.8 of this chapter.
    (3) The terms cargo tank wall and manufacturer are defined in 
Sec. 178.320(a),

[[Page 50]]

and repair is defined in Sec. 180.403 of this chapter.
    (b) No person may engage in the manufacture, assembly, 
certification, inspection or repair of a cargo tank or cargo tank motor 
vehicle manufactured under the terms of a DOT specification under 
subchapter C of this chapter or an exemption issued under this part 
unless the person is registered with the Department in accordance with 
the provisions of this subpart. A person employed as an inspector or 
design certifying engineer is considered to be registered if the 
person's employer is registered.
    (c) A person who performs functions which are subject to the 
provisions of this subpart may perform only those functions which have 
been identified to the Department in accordance with the procedures of 
this subpart.
    (d) Registration statements must be in English, contain all of the 
information required by this subpart, and be submitted to: Approvals 
Branch (Attn.: DHM-32), Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials 
Safety, Research and Special Programs Administration, Department of 
Transportation, Washington, DC 20590-0001. Alternatively, a statement 
with any attached supporting documentation in an appropriate format may 
be submitted by facsimile (fax) to: (202) 366-3753 or (202) 366-3308 or 
by electronic mail (e-mail) to: [email protected].
    (e) Upon determination that a registration statement contains all 
the information required by this subpart, the Department will send the 
registrant a letter confirming receipt of the registration application 
and assigning a registration number to that person. A separate 
registration number will be assigned for each cargo tank manufacturing, 
assembly, repair facility or other place of business identified by the 
registrant.

[Amdt. 107-20, 54 FR 25003, June 12, 1989; 55 FR 37047, Sept. 7, 1990, 
as amended by Amdt. 107-22, 55 FR 39978, Oct. 1, 1990; Amdt. 107-23, 56 
FR 66157, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 107-28, 58 FR 46873, Sept. 3, 1993; Amdt. 
107-39, 61 FR 51337, Oct. 1, 1996; 67 FR 61011, Sept. 27, 2002]



Sec. 107.503  Registration statement.

    (a) Each registration statement must be in English and contain the 
following information:
    (1) Name;
    (2) Street address, mailing address and telephone number for each 
facility or place of business;
    (3) A statement signed by the person responsible for compliance with 
the applicable requirements of this chapter, certifying knowledge of 
those requirements and that each employee who is a Registered Inspector 
or Design Certifying Engineer meets the minimum qualification 
requirements set forth in Sec. 171.8 of this chapter for ``Registered 
Inspector'' or ``Design Certifying Engineer''. The following language 
may be used.

    I certify that all Registered Inspectors and Design Certifying 
Engineers used in performance of the prescribed functions meet the 
minimum qualification requirements set forth in 49 CFR 171.8, that I am 
the person responsible for ensuring compliance with the applicable 
requirements of this chapter, and that I have knowledge of the 
requirements applicable to the functions to be performed.

    (4) A description of the specific functions to be performed on cargo 
tanks or cargo tank motor vehicles, e.g.:
    (i) Manufacture,
    (ii) Assembly,
    (iii) Inspection and testing (specify type, e.g., external or 
internal visual inspection, lining inspection, hydrostatic pressure 
test, leakage test, thickness test),
    (iv) Certification,
    (v) Repair, or
    (vi) Equipment manufacture;
    (5) An identification of the types of DOT specification and 
exemption cargo tanks or cargo tank motor vehicles which the registrant 
intends to manufacture, assemble, repair, inspect, test or certify;
    (6) A statement indicating whether the registrant employs Registered 
Inspectors or Design Certifying Engineers to conduct certification, 
inspection or testing functions addressed by this subpart. If the 
registrant engages a person who is not an employee of the registrant to 
perform these functions,

[[Page 51]]

provide the name, address and registration number of that person; and
    (7) If the registrant is not a resident of the United States, the 
name and address of a permanent resident of the United States designated 
in accordance with Sec. 105.40 to serve as agent for service of process.
    (b) In addition to the information required under paragraph (a) of 
this section, each person who manufactures a cargo tank or cargo tank 
motor vehicle must submit a copy of the manufacturer's current ASME 
Certificate of Authorization for the use of the ASME ``U'' stamp.
    (c) In addition to the information required under paragraph (a) of 
this section, each person who repairs a cargo tank or cargo tank motor 
vehicle must submit a copy of the repair facility's current National 
Board Certificate of Authorization for the use of the ``R'' stamp or 
ASME Certificate of Authorization for the use of the ASME ``U'' stamp. 
Any person who repairs MC-series cargo tanks which are not certified to 
the ASME Code must submit a copy of the National Board or ASME 
Certificate of Authorization to RSPA before June 30, 1992.

[Amdt. 107-20, 54 FR 25003, June 12, 1989; 55 FR 37047, Sept. 7, 1990; 
57 FR 365, Jan. 6, 1992; Amdt. 107-32, 59 FR 49131, Sept. 26, 1994; 
Amdt. 107-39, 61 FR 51337, Oct. 1, 1996; 63 FR 52846, Oct. 1, 1998; 67 
FR 61011, Sept. 27, 2002]



Sec. 107.504  Period of registration, updates, and record retention.

    (a) Registration will be for a maximum of six years from the date of 
the original registration.
    (b) Any correspondence with the Department must contain the 
registrant's name and registration number.
    (c) A registration must be renewed every six years or within thirty 
days of reissuance of an ASME or National Board Certification, whichever 
occurs first, by submitting an up-to-date registration statement 
containing the information prescribed by Sec. 107.503. Any person 
initially registered under the provisions of Sec. 107.502 and who is in 
good standing is eligible for renewal.
    (d) A registrant shall provide written notification to the 
Department within thirty days of any of the following occurrences:
    (1) Any change in the registration information submitted under 
Sec. 107.503;
    (2) Replacement of the person responsible for compliance with the 
requirements in Sec. 107.503(a)(3). If this occurs, the registrant shall 
resubmit the required certification;
    (3) Loss of ASME or National Board Certificate of Authorization; or
    (4) A change in function; such as, from assembly to manufacture, an 
addition of a function, or a change to the types of inspections, tests 
or certifications of cargo tanks or cargo tank motor vehicles.
    (e) Each registrant shall maintain a current copy of the 
registration information submitted to the Department and a current copy 
of the registration number identification received from the Department 
at the location identified in Sec. 107.503(a)(2) during such time the 
person is registered with the Department and for two years thereafter.
    (f) The issuance of a registration number under this subpart is not 
an approval or endorsement by the Department of the qualifications of 
any person to perform the specified functions.

[Amdt. 107-20, 54 FR 25003, June 12, 1989; 55 FR 37048, Sept. 7, 1990, 
as amended by Amdt. 107-20, 56 FR 27875, June 17, 1991; Amdt. 107-37, 61 
FR 18931, Apr. 29, 1996]



  Subpart G--Registration of Persons Who Offer or Transport Hazardous 
                                Materials

    Source: Amdt. No. 107-26, 57 FR 30630, July 9, 1992, unless 
otherwise noted.



Sec. 107.601  Applicability.

    (a) The registration and fee requirements of this subpart apply to 
any person who offers for transportation, or transports, in foreign, 
interstate or intrastate commerce--
    (1) A highway route-controlled quantity of a Class 7 (radioactive) 
material, as defined in Sec. 173.403 of this chapter;
    (2) More than 25 kg (55 pounds) of a Division 1.1, 1.2, or 1.3 
(explosive) material (see Sec. 173.50 of this chapter) in a motor 
vehicle, rail car or freight container;
    (3) More than one L (1.06 quarts) per package of a material 
extremely toxic by inhalation (i.e., ``material poisonous

[[Page 52]]

by inhalation,'' as defined in Sec. 171.8 of this chapter, that meets 
the criteria for ``hazard zone A,'' as specified in Secs. 173.116(a) or 
173.133(a) of this chapter);
    (4) A shipment of a quantity of hazardous materials in a bulk 
packaging (see Sec. 171.8 of this chapter) having a capacity equal to or 
greater than 13,248 L (3,500 gallons) for liquids or gases or more than 
13.24 cubic meters (468 cubic feet) for solids;
    (5) A shipment in other than a bulk packaging of 2,268 kg (5,000 
pounds) gross weight or more of one class of hazardous materials for 
which placarding of a vehicle, rail car, or freight container is 
required for that class, under the provisions of subpart F of part 172 
of this chapter; or
    (6) Except as provided in paragraph (b) of this section, a quantity 
of hazardous material that requires placarding, under provisions of 
subpart F of part 172 of this chapter.
    (b) Paragraph (a)(6) of this section does not apply to those 
activities of a farmer, as defined in Sec. 171.8 of this chapter, that 
are in direct support of the farmer's farming operations.
    (c) In this subpart, the term ``shipment'' means the offering or 
loading of hazardous material at one loading facility using one 
transport vehicle, or the transport of that transport vehicle.

[65 FR 7309, Feb. 14, 2000, as amended at 67 FR 61011, Sept. 27, 2002]



Sec. 107.606  Exceptions.

    (a) The following are excepted from the requirements of this 
subpart:
    (1) An agency of the Federal government.
    (2) A State agency.
    (3) An agency of a political subdivision of a State.
    (4) An employee of any of those agencies in paragraphs (a)(1) 
through (a)(3) of this section with respect to the employee's official 
duties.
    (5) A hazmat employee (including, for purposes of this subpart, the 
owner-operator of a motor vehicle that transports in commerce hazardous 
materials, if that vehicle at the time of those activities, is leased to 
a registered motor carrier under a 30-day or longer lease as prescribed 
in 49 CFR part 376 or an equivalent contractual agreement).
    (6) A person domiciled outside the United States, who offers solely 
from a location outside the United States, hazardous materials for 
transportation in commerce, provided that the country of which such a 
person is a domiciliary does not require persons domiciled in the United 
States, who solely offer hazardous materials for transportation to the 
foreign country from places in the United States, to file a registration 
statement or to pay a registration fee.
    (b) Upon making a determination that persons domiciled in the United 
States, who offer hazardous materials for transportation to a foreign 
country solely from places in the United States, must file registration 
statements or pay fees to that foreign country, the U.S. Competent 
Authority will provide notice of such determination directly to the 
Competent Authority of that foreign country and by publication in the 
Federal Register. Persons who offer hazardous materials for 
transportation to the United States from that foreign country must file 
a registration statement and pay the required fee no later than 60 days 
following publication of the determination in the Federal Register.

[Amdt 107-34, 60 FR 27233, May 23, 1995, as amended at 63 FR 52847, Oct. 
1, 1998]



Sec. 107.608  General registration requirements.

    (a) Except as provided in Sec. 107.616(d), each person subject to 
this subpart must submit a complete and accurate registration statement 
on DOT Form F 5800.2 not later than June 30 for each registration year, 
or in time to comply with paragraph (b) of this section, whichever is 
later. Each registration year begins on July 1 and ends on June 30 of 
the following year.
    (b) No person required to file a registration statement may 
transport a hazardous material or cause a hazardous material to be 
transported or shipped, unless such person has on file, in accordance 
with Sec. 107.620, a current Certificate of Registration in accordance 
with the requirements of this subpart.

[[Page 53]]

    (c) A registrant whose name or principal place of business has 
changed during the year of registration must notify RSPA of that change 
by submitting an amended registration statement not later than 30 days 
after the change.
    (d) Copies of DOT Form F 5800.2 and instructions for its completion 
may be obtained from the Hazardous Materials Registration Program, DHM-
60, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, DC 20590-0001, by 
calling 617-494-2545 or 202-366-4109, or via the Internet at ``http://
hazmat.dot.gov''.
    (e) If the registrant is not a resident of the United States, the 
registrant must attach to the registration statement the name and 
address of a permanent resident of the United States, designated in 
accordance with Sec. 105.40, to serve as agent for service of process.

[Amdt. No. 107-26, 57 FR 30630, July 9, 1992, as amended by Amdt. 107-
31, 59 FR 32932, June 27, 1994; 65 FR 7309, Feb. 14, 2000; 67 FR 61011, 
Sept. 27, 2002]



Sec. 107.612  Amount of fee.

    (a) Registration year 1999-2000 and earlier. For all registration 
years through 1999-2000, each person subject to the requirements of 
Sec. 107.601(a)(1)-(5) of this subpart must pay an annual fee of $300 
(which includes a $50 processing fee).
    (b) Registration year 2000-2001 and following. For each registration 
year beginning with 2000-2001, each person subject to the requirements 
of this subpart must pay an annual fee as follows:
    (1) Small business. Each person that qualifies as a small business 
under criteria specified in 13 CFR part 121 applicable to the standard 
industrial classification (SIC) code that describes that person's 
primary commercial activity must pay an annual fee of $275 and the 
processing fee required by paragraph (b)(3) of this section.
    (2) Other than a small business. Each person that does not meet 
criteria specified in paragraph (b)(1) of this section must pay an 
annual fee of $1,975 and the processing fee required by paragraph (b)(3) 
of this section.
    (3) Processing fee. The processing fee is $25 for each registration 
statement filed. A single statement may be filed for one, two, or three 
registration years as provided in Sec. 107.616(c).

[65 FR 7309, Feb. 14, 2000]

    Effective Date Note: At 67 FR 58345, Sept. 16, 2002, Sec. 107.612 
was amended in paragraph (b)(1) by removing the wording ``standard 
industrial classification (SIC)'' and by adding ``North American 
Industry Classification System (NAICS)'' in its place, effective Jan. 6, 
2003.



Sec. 107.616  Payment procedures.

    (a) Except as provided in paragraph (d) of this section, each person 
subject to the requirements of this subpart must mail the registration 
statement and payment in full to the U.S. Department of Transportation, 
Hazardous Materials Registration, P.O. Box 740188, Atlanta, Georgia 
30374-0188. A registrant required to file an amended registration 
statement under Sec. 107.608(c) must mail it to the same address.
    (b) Payment must be made by certified check, cashier's check, 
personal check, or money order in U.S. funds and drawn on a U.S. bank, 
payable to the U.S. Department of Transportation and identified as 
payment for the ``Hazmat Registration Fee'' or by a VISA or MasterCard 
credit card authorization completed and signed on the registration 
statement.
    (c) Payment must correspond to the total fees properly calculated in 
the ``Amount Due'' block of the DOT form F 5800.2. A person may elect to 
register and pay the required fees for up to three registration years by 
filing one complete and accurate registration statement.
    (d) A person may obtain a temporary registration number, valid for 
45 days from the date of issuance, through an expedited registration 
process as follows:
    (1) Contact RSPA by telephone (800-942-6990 or 617-494-2545) and 
provide name, principal place of business, and credit card payment 
information;
    (2) Pay a registration and processing fee of $350 (including a $50 
expedited handling fee). For registration years 2000-2001 and following, 
persons who do not meet the criteria for a small business, as specified 
in Sec. 107.612(b)(1), must enclose an additional payment of $1,700 with 
the expedited follow-up material,

[[Page 54]]

for a total of $2,050 (including a $50 expedited handling fee); and
    (3) Submit a completed registration statement and proof of payment 
to RSPA before the expiration date of the temporary registration number.

[Amdt. 107-26, 57 FR 30630, July 9, 1992, as amended by Amdt. 107-26, 58 
FR 12545, Mar. 5, 1993; 65 FR 7310, Feb. 14, 2000]

    Effective Date Note: At 67 FR 58345, Sept. 16, 2002, Sec. 107.616 
was amended by revising paragraphs (a) and (b), effective Jan. 6, 2003. 
For the convenience of the user, the revised text is set forth as 
follows:

Sec. 107.616  Payment procedures.

    (a) Except as provided in paragraph (d) of this section, each person 
subject to the requirements of this subpart must mail the registration 
statement and payment in full to the U.S. Department of Transportation, 
Hazardous Materials Registration, P.O. Box 740188, Atlanta, Georgia 
30374-0188, or submit the statement and payment electronically through 
the Department's e-Commerce Internet site. Access to this service is 
provided at http://hazmat.dot.gov/register.htm. A registrant required to 
file an amended registration statement under Sec. 107.608(c) must mail 
it to the same address or submit it through the same Internet site.
    (b) Payment must be made by certified check, cashier's check, 
personal check, or money order in U.S. funds and drawn on a U.S. bank, 
payable to the U.S. Department of Transportation and identified as 
payment for the ``Hazmat Registration Fee,'' or by completing an 
authorization for payment by credit card or other electronic means of 
payment acceptable to the Department on the registration statement or as 
part of an Internet registration as provided in paragraph (a) of this 
section.

                                * * * * *



Sec. 107.620  Recordkeeping requirements.

    (a) Each person subject to the requirements of this subpart, or its 
agent designated under Sec. 107.608(e), must maintain at its principal 
place of business for a period of three years from the date of issuance 
of each Certificate of Registration:
    (1) A copy of the registration statement filed with RSPA; and
    (2) The Certificate of Registration issued to the registrant by 
RSPA.
    (b) After January 1, 1993, each motor carrier subject to the 
requirements of this subpart must carry a copy of its current 
Certificate of Registration issued by RSPA or another document bearing 
the registration number identified as the ``U.S. DOT Hazmat Reg. No.'' 
on board each truck and truck tractor (not including trailers and semi-
trailers) used to transport hazardous materials subject to the 
requirements of this subpart. The Certificate of Registration or 
document bearing the registration number must be made available, upon 
request, to enforcement personnel.
    (c) In addition to the requirements of paragraph (a) of this 
section, after January 1, 1995, each person who transports by vessel a 
hazardous material subject to the requirements of this subpart must 
carry on board the vessel a copy of its current Certificate of 
Registration or another document bearing the current registration number 
identified as the ``U.S. DOT Hazmat Reg. No.''
    (d) Each person subject to this subpart must furnish its Certificate 
of Registration (or a copy thereof) and all other records and 
information pertaining to the information contained in the registration 
statement to an authorized representative or special agent of DOT upon 
request.

[Amdt. No. 107-26, 57 FR 30630, July 9, 1992, as amended at 57 FR 37902, 
August 21, 1992; Amdt. 107-26, 58 FR 12545, Mar. 5, 1993; Amdt. 107-31, 
59 FR 32932, June 27, 1994]



           Subpart H--Approvals, Registrations and Submissions

    Source: Amdt. 107-38, 61 FR 21100, May 9, 1996, unless otherwise 
noted.



Sec. 107.701  Purpose and scope.

    (a) This subpart prescribes procedures for the issuance, 
modification and termination of approvals, and the submission of 
registrations and reports, as required by this chapter.
    (b) The procedures of this subpart are in addition to any 
requirements in subchapter C of this chapter applicable to a specific 
approval, registration or report. If compliance with both a specific 
requirement of subchapter C of this chapter and a procedure of this 
subpart is not possible, the specific requirement applies.

[[Page 55]]

    (c) Registration under subpart F or G of this part is not subject to 
the procedures of this subpart.

[Amdt. 107-38, 61 FR 21100, May 9, 1996; Amdt. 107-38, 61 FR 27948, June 
3, 1996]



Sec. 107.705  Registrations, reports, and applications for approval.

    (a) A person filing a registration, report, or application for an 
approval, or a renewal or modification of an approval subject to the 
provisions of this subpart must--
    (1) File the registration, report, or application with the Associate 
Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety (Attention: Approvals, DHM-
32), Research and Special Programs Administration, U.S. Department of 
Transportation, 400 7th Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590-0001. 
Alternatively, the document with any attached supporting documentation 
in an appropriate format may be filed by facsimile (fax) to: (202) 366-
3753 or (202) 366-3308 or by electronic mail (e-mail) to: 
[email protected].
    (2) Identify the section of the chapter under which the 
registration, report, or application is made;
    (3) If a report is required by an approval, a registration or an 
exemption, identify the approval, registration or exemption number;
    (4) Provide the name, street and mailing addresses, e-mail address 
optional, and telephone number of the person on whose behalf the 
registration, report, or application is made and, if different, the 
person making the filing;
    (5) If the person on whose behalf the filing is made is not a 
resident of the United States, provide a designation of agent for 
service in accordance with Sec. 105.40;
    (6) Provide a description of the activity for which the registration 
or report is required; and
    (7) Provide additional information as requested by the Associate 
Administrator, if the Associate Administrator determines that a filing 
lacks pertinent information or otherwise does not comply with applicable 
requirements.
    (b) In addition to the provisions in paragraph (a) for an approval, 
an application for an approval, or an application for modification or 
renewal of an approval, the applicant must provide--
    (1) A description of the activity for which the approval is 
required;
    (2) The proposed duration of the approval;
    (3) The transport mode or modes affected, as applicable;
    (4) Any additional information specified in the section containing 
the approval; and
    (5) For an approval which provides exceptions from regulatory 
requirements or prohibitions--
    (i) Identification of any increased risk to safety or property that 
may result if the approval is granted, and specification of the measures 
that the applicant considers necessary or appropriate to address that 
risk; and
    (ii) Substantiation, with applicable analyses or evaluations, if 
appropriate, demonstrating that the proposed activity will achieve a 
level of safety that is at least equal to that required by the 
regulation.
    (c) For an approval with an expiration date, each application for 
renewal or modification must be filed in the same manner as an original 
application. If a complete and conforming renewal application is filed 
at least 60 days before the expiration date of an approval, the 
Associate Administrator, on written request from the applicant, will 
issue a written extension to permit operation under the terms of the 
expired approval until a final decision on the application for renewal 
has been made. Operation under an expired approval is prohibited absent 
a written extension. This paragraph does not limit the authority of the 
Associate Administrator to modify, suspend or terminate an approval 
under Sec. 107.713.
    (d) To request confidential treatment for information contained in 
the application, the applicant shall comply with Sec. 105.30(a).

[Amdt. 107-38, 61 FR 21100, May 9, 1996, as amended at 65 FR 50457, Aug. 
18, 2000; 67 FR 61011, Sept. 27, 2002]

[[Page 56]]



Sec. 107.709  Processing of an application for approval, including an application for renewal or modification.

    (a) No public hearing or other formal proceeding is required under 
this subpart before the disposition of an application.
    (b) At any time during the processing of an application, the 
Associate Administrator may request additional information from the 
applicant. If the applicant does not respond to a written request for 
additional information within 30 days of the date the request was 
received, the application may be deemed incomplete and denied. However, 
if the applicant responds in writing within the 30-day period requesting 
an additional 30 days within which it will gather the requested 
information, the Associate Administrator may grant the 30-day extension.
    (c) The Associate Administrator may grant or deny an application, in 
whole or in part. At the Associate Administrator's discretion, an 
application may be granted subject to provisions that are appropriate to 
protect health, safety and property. The Associate Administrator may 
impose additional provisions not specified in the application, or delete 
conditions in the application which are unnecessary.
    (d) The Associate Administrator may grant an application on finding 
that--
    (1) The application complies with this subpart;
    (2) The application demonstrates that the proposed activity will 
achieve a level of safety that--
    (i) Is at least equal to that required by the regulation, or
    (ii) If the regulations do not establish a level of safety, is 
consistent with the public interest and adequately will protect against 
the risks to life and property inherent in the transportation of 
hazardous materials in commerce;
    (3) The application states all material facts, and contains no 
materially false or materially misleading statement;
    (4) The applicant meets the qualifications required by applicable 
regulations; and
    (5) The applicant is fit to conduct the activity authorized by the 
approval, or renewal or modification of approval. This assessment may be 
based on information in the application, prior compliance history of the 
applicant, and other information available to the Associate 
Administrator.
    (e) Unless otherwise specified in this chapter or by the Associate 
Administrator, an approval in which a term is not specified does not 
expire.
    (f) The Associate Administrator notifies the applicant in writing of 
the decision on the application. A denial contains a brief statement of 
reasons.



Sec. 107.711  Withdrawal.

    An application may be withdrawn at any time before a decision to 
grant or deny it is made. Withdrawal of an application does not 
authorize the removal of any related records from the RSPA dockets or 
files. Applications that are eligible for confidential treatment under 
Sec. 105.30 will remain confidential after the application is withdrawn. 
The duration of this confidential treatment for trade secrets and 
commercial or financial information is indefinite, unless the party 
requesting the confidential treatment of the materials notifies the 
Associate Administrator that the confidential treatment is no longer 
required.

[Amdt. 107-38, 61 FR 21100, May 9, 1996, as amended at 67 FR 61011, 
Sept. 27, 2002]



Sec. 107.713  Approval modification, suspension or termination.

    (a) The Associate Administrator may modify an approval on finding 
that--
    (1) Modification is necessary to conform an existing approval to 
relevant statutes and regulations as they may be amended from time to 
time; or
    (2) Modification is required by changed circumstances to enable the 
approval to continue to meet the standards of Sec. 107.709(d).
    (b) The Associate Administrator may modify, suspend or terminate an 
approval, as appropriate, on finding that--
    (1) Because of a change in circumstances, the approval no longer is 
needed or no longer would be granted if applied for;
    (2) The application contained inaccurate or incomplete information, 
and the approval would not have been granted had the application been 
accurate and complete;

[[Page 57]]

    (3) The application contained deliberately inaccurate or incomplete 
information; or
    (4) The holder knowingly has violated the terms of the approval or 
an applicable requirement of this chapter in a manner demonstrating lack 
of fitness to conduct the activity for which the approval is required.
    (c) Except as provided in paragraph (d) of this section, before an 
approval is modified, suspended or terminated, the Associate 
Administrator notifies the holder in writing of the proposed action and 
the reasons for it, and provides an opportunity to show cause why the 
proposed action should not be taken.
    (1) The holder may file a written response with the Associate 
Administrator within 30 days of receipt of notice of the proposed 
action.
    (2) After considering the holder's or party's written response, or 
after 30 days have passed without response since receipt of the notice, 
the Associate Administrator notifies the holder in writing of the final 
decision with a brief statement of reasons.
    (d) The Associate Administrator, if necessary to avoid a risk of 
significant harm to persons or property, may in the notification declare 
the proposed action immediately effective.



Sec. 107.715  Reconsideration.

    (a) An applicant or a holder may request that the Associate 
Administrator reconsider a decision under Sec. 107.709(f) or 
Sec. 107.713(c). The request must:
    (1) Be in writing and filed within 20 days of receipt of the 
decision;
    (2) State in detail any alleged errors of fact and law;
    (3) Enclose any additional information needed to support the request 
to reconsider; and
    (4) State in detail the modification of the final decision sought.
    (b) The Associate Administrator considers newly submitted 
information on a showing that the information could not reasonably have 
been submitted during application processing.
    (c) The Associate Administrator grants or denies, in whole or in 
part, the relief requested and informs the requesting person in writing 
of the decision.



Sec. 107.717  Appeal.

    (a) A person who requested reconsideration under Sec. 107.715 may 
appeal to the Administrator the Associate Administrator's decision on 
the request. The appeal must:
    (1) Be in writing and filed within 30 days of receipt of the 
Associate Administrator's decision on reconsideration;
    (2) State in detail any alleged errors of fact and law;
    (3) Enclose any additional information needed to support the appeal; 
and
    (4) State in detail the modification of the final decision sought.
    (b) The Administrator, if necessary to avoid a risk of significant 
harm to persons or property, may declare the Associate Administrator's 
action effective pending a decision on appeal.
    (c) The Administrator grants or denies, in whole or in part, the 
relief requested and informs the appellant in writing of the decision on 
appeal. The Administrator's decision on appeal is the final 
administrative action.



    Subpart I--Approval of Independent Inspection Agencies, Cylinder 
   Requalifiers, and Non-domestic Chemical Analyses and Tests of DOT 
                         Specification Cylinders

    Source: 67 FR 51639, Aug. 8, 2002, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 107.801  Purpose and scope.

    (a) This subpart prescribes procedures for--
    (1) A person who seeks approval to be an independent inspection 
agency to perform cylinder inspections and verifications required by 
parts 178 and 180 of this chapter;
    (2) A person who seeks approval to engage in the requalification 
(e.g., inspection, testing, or certification), rebuilding, or repair of 
a cylinder manufactured in accordance with a DOT specification under 
subchapter C of this chapter or under the terms of an exemption issued 
under this part;
    (3) A person who seeks approval to perform the manufacturing 
chemical analyses and tests of DOT specification or exemption cylinders 
outside the United States.

[[Page 58]]

    (b) No person may engage in a function identified in paragraph (a) 
of this section unless approved by the Associate Administrator in 
accordance with the provisions of this subpart. Each person must comply 
with the applicable requirements in this subpart. In addition, the 
procedural requirements in subpart H of this part apply to the filing, 
processing, and termination of an approval issued under this subpart.



Sec. 107.803  Approval of independent inspection agency.

    (a) General. Prior to performing cylinder inspections and 
verifications required by parts 178 and 180 of this chapter, a person 
must apply to the Associate Administrator for an approval as an 
independent inspection agency. A person approved as an independent 
inspection agency is not an RSPA agent or representative.
    (b) Criteria. No applicant for approval as an independent inspection 
agency may be engaged in the manufacture of cylinders for use in the 
transportation of hazardous materials, or be directly or indirectly 
controlled by, or have a financial involvement with, any entity that 
manufactures cylinders for use in the transportation of hazardous 
materials, except for providing services as an independent inspector.
    (c) Application information. Each applicant must submit an 
application in conformance with Sec. 107.705 containing the information 
prescribed in Sec. 107.705(a). In addition, the application must contain 
the following information:
    (1) Name and address of each facility where tests and inspections 
are to be performed.
    (2) Detailed description of the inspection and testing facilities to 
be used by the applicant.
    (3) Detailed description of the applicant's qualifications and 
ability to perform the inspections and to verify the inspections 
required by part 178 of this chapter or under the terms of an exemption 
issued under this part.
    (4) Name, address, and principal business activity of each person 
having any direct or indirect ownership interest in the applicant 
greater than three percent and any direct or indirect ownership interest 
in each subsidiary or division of the applicant.
    (5) Name of each individual whom the applicant proposes to employ as 
an inspector and who will be responsible for certifying inspection and 
test results, and a statement of that person's qualifications.
    (6) An identification or qualification number assigned to each 
inspector who is supervised by a certifying inspector identified in 
paragraph (c)(3) of this section.
    (7) A statement that the applicant will perform its functions 
independent of the manufacturers and owners of the cylinders.
    (8) The signature of the person certifying the approval application 
and the date on which it was signed.
    (d) Facility inspection. Upon the request of the Associate 
Administrator, the applicant must allow the Associate Administrator or 
the Associate Administrator's designee to inspect the applicant's 
facilities and records. The person seeking approval must bear the cost 
of the inspection.



Sec. 107.805  Approval of cylinder requalifiers.

    (a) General. A person must meet the requirements of this section to 
be approved to inspect, test, certify, repair, or rebuild a cylinder in 
accordance with a DOT specification under subpart C of part 178 or 
subpart C of part 180 of this chapter or under the terms of an exemption 
issued under this part.
    (b) Independent Inspection Agency Review. Each applicant must 
arrange for an independent inspection agency, approved by the Associate 
Administrator pursuant to this subpart, to perform a review of its 
inspection or requalification operation. The person seeking approval 
must bear the cost of the inspection. A list of approved independent 
inspection agencies is available from the Associate Administrator at the 
address listed in Sec. 107.705. Assistance in obtaining an approval is 
available from the same address.
    (c) Application for approval. If the inspection performed by an 
independent inspection agency is completed with satisfactory results, 
the applicant must submit a letter of recommendation from the 
independent inspection

[[Page 59]]

agency, an inspection report, and an application containing the 
information prescribed in Sec. 107.705(a). In addition, the application 
must contain--
    (1) The name of the facility manager;
    (2) The DOT specification/exemption cylinders that will be 
inspected, tested, repaired, or rebuilt at the facility;
    (3) A certification that the facility will operate in compliance 
with the applicable requirements of subchapter C of this chapter; and
    (4) The signature of the person making the certification and the 
date on which it was signed.
    (d) Issuance of requalifier identification number (RIN). The 
Associate Administrator issues a RIN as evidence of approval to 
requalify DOT specification/exemption cylinders if it is determined, 
based on the applicant's submission and other available information, 
that the applicant's qualifications and, when applicable, facility are 
adequate to perform the requested functions in accordance with the 
criteria prescribed in subpart C of Part 180 of this chapter.
    (e) Expiration of RIN. Unless otherwise provided in the issuance 
letter, an approval expires five years from the date of issuance, 
provided the applicant's facility and qualifications are maintained at 
or above the level observed at the time of inspection by the independent 
inspection agency, or at the date of the certification in the 
application for approval for requalifiers only performing inspections 
made under Sec. 180.209(g) of this chapter.
    (f) Exceptions. Notwithstanding the requirements in paragraphs (b) 
and (c) of this section, a person who only performs inspections in 
accordance with Sec. 180.209(g) of this chapter may submit an 
application that, in addition to the information prescribed in 
Sec. 107.705(a), identifies the DOT specification/exemption cylinders to 
be inspected; certifies the requalifier will operate in compliance with 
the applicable requirements of subchapter C of this chapter; certifies 
the persons performing inspections have been trained and have the 
information contained in each applicable CGA pamphlet incorporated by 
reference in Sec. 171.7 of this chapter applicable to the requalifiers' 
activities; and includes the signature of the person making the 
certification and the date on which it was signed. Each person must 
comply with the applicable requirements in this subpart. In addition, 
the procedural requirements in subpart H of this part apply to the 
filing, processing and termination of an approval issued under this 
subpart. After September 30, 2003, no person may requalify a DOT 
specification/exemption cylinder in accordance with Sec. 180.209(g) of 
this chapter unless that person has been issued a RIN as provided in 
paragraph (d) of this section.



Sec. 107.807  Approval of non-domestic chemical analyses and tests.

    (a) General. A person who seeks to manufacture DOT specification or 
exemption cylinders outside the United States must seek an approval from 
the Associate Administrator to perform the chemical analyses and tests 
of those cylinders outside the United States.
    (b) Application for approval. Each applicant must submit an 
application containing the information prescribed in Sec. 107.705(a). In 
addition, the application must contain--
    (1) The name, address, and a description of each facility at which 
cylinders are to be manufactured and chemical analyses and tests are to 
be performed;
    (2) Complete details concerning the dimensions, materials of 
construction, wall thickness, water capacity, shape, type of joints, 
location and size of openings and other pertinent physical 
characteristics of each specification or exemption cylinder for which 
approval is being requested, including calculations for cylinder wall 
stress and wall thickness, which may be shown on a drawing or on 
separate sheets attached to a descriptive drawing;
    (3) The name of the independent inspection agency to be used; and
    (4) The signature of the person making the certification and the 
date on which it was signed.
    (c) Facility inspections. Upon the request of the Associate 
Administrator, the applicant must allow the Associate Administrator or 
the Associate Administrator's designee to inspect the applicant's 
cylinder manufacturing and testing facilities and records, and must 
provide such materials and cylinders for analyses and tests as the 
Associate

[[Page 60]]

Administrator may specify. The applicant or holder must bear the cost of 
the initial and subsequent inspections, analyses, and tests.



PART 110--HAZARDOUS MATERIALS PUBLIC SECTOR TRAINING AND PLANNING GRANTS--Table of Contents




Sec.
110.1  Purpose.
110.5  Scope.
110.7  Control Number under the Paperwork Reduction Act.
110.10  Eligibility.
110.20  Definitions.
110.30  Grant application.
110.40  Activities eligible for funding.
110.50  Disbursement of Federal funds.
110.60  Cost sharing for planning and training.
110.70  Financial administration.
110.80  Procurement.
110.90  Grant monitoring, reports, and records retention.
110.100  Enforcement.
110.110  After-grant requirements.
110.120  Deviation from this part.
110.130  Disputes.

    Authority: 49 U.S.C. 5101-5127; 49 CFR 1.53.

    Source: Amdt. 110-1, 57 FR 43067, Sept. 17, 1992, unless otherwise 
noted.



Sec. 110.1  Purpose.

    This part sets forth procedures for reimbursable grants for public 
sector planning and training in support of the emergency planning and 
training efforts of States, Indian tribes, and local communities to deal 
with hazardous materials emergencies, particularly those involving 
transportation. These grants will enhance the implementation of the 
Emergency Planning and Community Right-to-Know Act of 1986 (42 U.S.C. 
11001).



Sec. 110.5  Scope.

    (a) This part applies to States and Indian tribes and contains the 
program requirements for public sector training and planning grants to 
support hazardous materials emergency planning and training efforts.
    (b) The requirements contained in 49 CFR part 18, ``Uniform 
Administrative Requirements for Grants and Cooperative Agreements to 
State and Local Governments'', apply to grants issued under this part.
    (c) Copies of standard forms and OMB circulars referenced in this 
part are available from the HMTUSA Grants Manager, Research and Special 
Programs Administration, U.S. Department of Transportation, 400 Seventh 
Street, SW., Washington DC 20590-0001.



Sec. 110.7  Control Number under the Paperwork Reduction Act.

    The Office of Management and Budget control number assigned to 
collection of information in Secs. 110.30, 110.70, 110.80, and 110.90 is 
2137-0586.



Sec. 110.10  Eligibility.

    This part applies to States and Indian tribes. States may apply for 
planning and training grants. Federally-recognized Indian tribes may 
apply for training grants.



Sec. 110.20  Definitions.

    Unless defined in this part, all terms defined in 49 U.S.C. 5102 are 
used in their statutory meaning and all terms defined in 49 CFR part 18 
and OMB Circular A-102, with respect to administrative requirements for 
grants, are used as defined therein. Other terms used in this part are 
defined as follows:
    Allowable costs means those costs that are: eligible, reasonable, 
necessary, and allocable to the project permitted by the appropriate 
Federal cost principles, and approved in the grant.
    Associate Administrator means the Associate Administrator for 
Hazardous Materials Safety, Research and Special Programs 
Administration.
    Budget period means the period of time specified in the grant 
agreement during which the project manager may expend or obligate 
project funds.
    Cost review means the review and evaluation of costs to determine 
reasonableness, allocability, and allowability.
    Indian country means Indian country as defined in 18 U.S.C. 1151. 
That section defines Indian country as all land within the limits of any 
reservation under the jurisdiction of the U.S. Government, 
notwithstanding the issuance of any patent, and, including rights-of-way 
running through the reservation; all dependent Indian communities within 
the borders of the United States

[[Page 61]]

whether within the original or subsequently acquired territory thereof, 
and whether within or without the limits of a State; and all Indian 
allotments, the Indian titles to which have not been extinguished, 
including rights-of-way running through the same.
    Indian tribe means a tribe ``Federally-recognized'' by the Secretary 
of the Interior under 25 CFR 272.2.
    Local Emergency Planning Committee (LEPC) means a committee 
appointed by the State Emergency Response Commission under section 
301(c) of the Emergency Planning and Community Right-to-Know Act of 1986 
(42 U.S.C. 11001(c)) that includes at a minimum, representatives from 
each of the following groups or organizations: elected State and local 
officials; law enforcement, firefighting, civil defense, first aid, 
health, local environmental, hospital, and transportation personnel; 
broadcast and print media; community groups; and owners and operators of 
facilities subject to the emergency planning requirements.
    National curriculum means the curriculum required to be developed 
under 49 U.S.C. 5115 and necessary to train public sector emergency 
response and preparedness teams, enabling them to comply with 
performance standards as stated in 49 U.S.C. 5115(c).
    Political subdivision means a county, municipality, city, town, 
township, local public authority (including any public and Indian 
housing agency under the United States Housing Act of 1937 (42 U.S.C. 
1401 et seq.), school district, special district, intrastate district, 
council of governments (whether or not incorporated as a nonprofit 
corporation under State law), any other regional or interstate 
government entity, or any agency or instrumentality of a local 
government.
    Project means the activities and tasks identified in the grant 
agreement.
    Project manager means the State or Indian tribal official designated 
in a grant as the recipient agency's principal program contact with the 
Federal Government.
    Project officer means the Federal official designated in a grant as 
the program contact with the project manager. The project officer is 
responsible for monitoring the project.
    Project period means the length of time specified in a grant for 
completion of all work associated with that project.
    State Emergency Response Commission (SERC) means the State Emergency 
Response Commission appointed by the Governor of each State and 
Territory under the Emergency Planning and Community Right-to-Know Act 
of 1986.
    Statement of Work means that portion of a grant that describes the 
purpose and scope of activities and tasks to be carried out as part of 
the proposed project.

[Amdt. 110-1, 57 FR 43067, Sept. 17, 1992, as amended by Amdt. 110-3, 59 
FR 49132, Sept. 26, 1994; 66 FR 45377, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 110.30  Grant application.

    (a) General. An applicant for a planning or training grant shall use 
only the standard application forms approved by the Office of Management 
and Budget (OMB) (SF-424 and SF-424A) under the Paperwork Reduction Act 
of 1980 (44 U.S.C. 3502). Applicants are required to submit an original 
and two copies of the application package to: Grants Manager, Research 
and Special Programs Administration, U.S. Department of Transportation, 
400 7th Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590-0001. Applications received on 
or before January 1st and July 1st of each year will be considered in 
that cycle of the semi-annual review and award process. An initial round 
of the review and award process will consider applications received on 
or before November 15, 1992. Requests and continuation applications must 
include an original and two copies of the affected pages; previously 
submitted pages with information that is still current do not have to be 
resubmitted. The application must include the following:
    (1) Application for Federal Assistance for non-construction programs 
(SF-424) and Budget sheets (SF-424A). A single application may be used 
for both planning and training if the budgets for each are entered 
separately on all budget sheets.
    (2) For States, a letter from the Governor designating the State 
agency that is authorized to apply for a grant and to provide the 
written certifications required to receive a grant.

[[Page 62]]

    (3) For Indian tribes, a letter from the tribal government, 
governing body, or tribal council to the effect that the applicant is 
authorized to apply for a grant and to provide the written 
certifications required to receive a grant.
    (4) A written statement explaining whether the State or tribe 
assesses and collects fees on the transportation of hazardous materials 
and whether such assessments or fees are used solely to carry out 
purposes related to the transportation of hazardous materials.
    (5) A statement designating a project manager and providing the 
name, position, address and phone number of that individual who will be 
responsible for coordinating the funded activities with other agencies/
organizations.
    (6) A project narrative statement of the goals and objectives of the 
proposed project, project design, and long range plans. The proposed 
grant project and budget periods may be one or more years.
    (7) A statement of work in support of the proposed project that 
describes and sets priorities for the activities and tasks to be 
conducted, the costs associated with each activity, the number and types 
of deliverables and products to be completed, and a schedule for 
implementation.
    (8) A description of the major items of costs needed to implement 
the statement of work and a copy of any cost or price analysis if 
conducted.
    (9) Drug-Free Workplace Certification. The applicant must certify as 
specified in appendix C of 49 CFR part 29 that it will comply with the 
Drug-Free Workplace Act of 1988 (Pub. L. 100-690, title V, subtitle D; 
51 U.S.C. 701 et seq.).
    (10) Anti-Lobbying Certification. The applicant must certify as 
specified in appendix A of 49 CFR part 20 that no Federal funds will be 
expended to pay any person for influencing or attempting to influence an 
officer or employee of any agency, a Member of Congress, an officer or 
employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of Congress (section 
319 of Pub. L. 101-121, 31 U.S.C. 1352).
    (11) Debarment and Suspension Certification. The applicant must 
certify as specified in subpart G of 49 CFR part 29 that it will not 
make an award or permit any award to any party which is debarred or 
suspended or is otherwise excluded from or ineligible for participation 
in Federal assistance programs.
    (b) Planning. In addition to the requirements specified in paragraph 
(a) of this section, eligible State applicants must include the 
following in their application package:
    (1) A written certification that the State is complying with 
sections 301 and 303 of the Emergency Planning and Community Right-to-
Know Act of 1986, including a brief explanation of how compliance has 
been achieved.
    (2) A written statement specifying the aggregate expenditure of 
funds of the State, exclusive of Federal funds, for each of its last two 
fiscal years for developing, improving, and implementing emergency plans 
under the Emergency Planning and Community Right-to-Know Act of 1986, 
including an explanation specifying the sources of these funds. A 
written certification that the State's aggregate expenditures, as 
defined by the State, of funds for this purpose, exclusive of Federal 
funds, will not fall below the average level of its expenditures for its 
last two fiscal years. The applicant may not claim any of these 
expenditures for cost-sharing.
    (3) A written statement agreeing to make at least 75 percent of the 
Federal funds awarded available to LEPCs and an explanation of how the 
applicant intends to make such funds available to them for developing, 
improving, or implementing emergency plans.
    (4) Designation of a project manager to serve as contact for 
coordinating planning funds under this program.
    (5) A project narrative statement of the goals and objectives of 
each proposed project, including the following:
    (i) A background statement describing the applicant's long-term 
goals and objectives with respect to:
    (A) The current abilities and authorities of the applicant's program 
for preparedness planning;
    (B) The need to sustain or increase program capability;
    (C) Current degree of participation in or intention to assess the 
need for a regional hazardous materials emergency response team; and
    (D) The impact that the grant will have on the program.

[[Page 63]]

    (ii) A discussion of whether the applicant's program currently 
knows, or intends to assess, transportation flow patterns of hazardous 
materials within the State and between that State and another State.
    (iii) A schedule for implementing the proposed grant activities.
    (iv) A statement describing the ways in which planning will be 
monitored by the project manager.
    (v) A statement indicating that all members of the State Emergency 
Response Commission were provided the opportunity to review the grant 
application.
    (c) Training. In addition to the requirements specified in paragraph 
(a) of this section, eligible State and Indian tribe applicants must 
include the following in their application package:
    (1) For a State applicant, a written certification explaining how 
the State is complying with sections 301 and 303 of the Emergency 
Planning and Community Right-to-Know Act.
    (2) A written statement specifying the aggregate expenditure of 
funds of the State or Indian tribe, exclusive of Federal funds, for each 
of its last two fiscal years for training public sector employees to 
respond to accidents and incidents involving hazardous materials, 
including an explanation specifying the sources of these funds. A 
written certification that the applicant's aggregate expenditure, as 
defined by the State or tribe, of funds for this purpose, exclusive of 
Federal funds, will not fall below the average level of its expenditures 
for its last two fiscal years. The applicant may not claim any of these 
expenditures for cost-sharing purposes.
    (3) For a State applicant, a written statement agreeing to make at 
least 75 percent of the Federal funds awarded available for the purpose 
of training public sector employees employed or used by political 
subdivisions. A State applicant may elect to pass all or some portion of 
the grant on to political subdivisions for this purpose. The applicant 
must include a specific explanation of how it intends to meet this 
requirement.
    (4) Designation of a primary point of contact for coordinating 
training funded under this program. Identification of a single 
repository for copies of course materials delivered under the grant as 
specified in Sec. 110.90 of this part.
    (5) A project narrative statement of the long-range goals and 
objectives of each proposed project, including the following:
    (i) A background statement describing:
    (A) The current hazardous materials training program(s);
    (B) Training audience, including numbers and levels of training and 
accreditation program for each level or criterion required to advance to 
the next level;
    (C) Estimated total number of persons to be trained under the 
proposed project;
    (D) The ways in which training grants will support the integrated 
delivery of training to meet the needs of individualized geographic and 
resource needs and time considerations of local responders. When 
appropriate, a statement describing how the proposed project will 
accommodate the different training needs for rural versus urban 
environments; and
    (E) The impact that the grant and the National Curriculum will have 
on the program.
    (ii) A statement describing how the National Curriculum will be used 
or modified to train public sector employees at the local level to 
respond to accidents and incidents involving hazardous materials.
    (iii) A statement describing the ways in which effectiveness of 
training will be monitored by the project manager, including, but not 
limited to, examinations, critiques, and instructor evaluations.
    (iv) A schedule for implementing the proposed training grant 
activities.
    (v) A statement indicating that all members of the State or Tribal 
Emergency Response Commission were provided the opportunity to review 
the grant application.

[Amdt. 110-1, 57 FR 43067, Sept. 17, 1992, as amended by Amdt. 110-3, 59 
FR 49132, Sept. 26, 1994]

[[Page 64]]



Sec. 110.40  Activities eligible for funding.

    (a) Planning. Eligible State applicants may receive funding for the 
following activities:
    (1) Development, improvement, and implementation of emergency plans 
required under the Emergency Planning and Community Right-to-Know Act of 
1986, as well as exercises which test the emergency plan. Enhancement of 
emergency plans to include hazard analysis as well as response 
procedures for emergencies involving transportation of hazardous 
materials, including radioactive materials.
    (2) An assessment to determine flow patterns of hazardous materials 
within a State, between a State and another State or Indian country, and 
development and maintenance of a system to keep such information 
current.
    (3) An assessment of the need for regional hazardous materials 
emergency response teams.
    (4) An assessment of local response capabilities.
    (5) Conduct of emergency response drills and exercises associated 
with emergency preparedness plans.
    (6) Provision of technical staff to support the planning effort.
    (7) Additional activities the Associate Administrator deems 
appropriate to implement the scope of work for the proposed project plan 
and approved in the grant.
    (b) Training. Eligible State and Indian tribe applicants may receive 
funding for the following activities:
    (1) An assessment to determine the number of public sector employees 
employed or used by a political subdivision who need the proposed 
training and to select courses consistent with the National Curriculum.
    (2) Delivery of comprehensive preparedness and response training to 
public sector employees. Design and delivery of preparedness and 
response training to meet specialized needs. Financial assistance for 
trainees and for the trainers, if appropriate, such as tuition, travel 
expenses to and from a training facility, and room and board while at 
the training facility.
    (3) Emergency response drills and exercises associated with 
training, a course of study, and tests and evaluation of emergency 
preparedness plans.
    (4) Expenses associated with training by a person (including a 
department, agency, or instrumentality of a State or political 
subdivision thereof or an Indian tribe) and activities necessary to 
monitor such training including, but not limited to examinations, 
critiques and instructor evaluations.
    (5) Provision of staff to manage the training effort designed to 
result in increased benefits, proficiency, and rapid deployment of local 
and regional responders.
    (6) Additional activities the Associate Administrator deems 
appropriate to implement the scope of work for the proposed project and 
approved in the grant.

[Amdt. 110-1, 57 FR 43067, Sept. 17, 1992, as amended by 66 FR 45377, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 110.50  Disbursement of Federal funds.

    (a) Preaward expenditures may not be reimbursed.
    (b) Reimbursement may not be made for a project plan unless approved 
in the grant award.
    (c) If a recipient agency seeks additional funds, the amendment 
request will be evaluated on the basis of needs, performance and 
availability of funds. An existing grant is not a commitment of future 
Federal funding.



Sec. 110.60  Cost sharing for planning and training.

    (a) The recipient agency must provide 20 percent of the direct and 
indirect costs of all activities covered under the grant award program 
with non-Federal funds. Recipients may either use cash (hard-match), in-
kind (soft-match) contributions, or a combination of in-kind plus hard-
match to meet this requirement. In-kind (soft-match) contributions are 
in addition to the maintenance of effort required of recipients of grant 
awards. The types of contributions allowed are as follows:
    (1) Any funds from a State, local, or other non-Federal source used 
for an eligible activity as defined in Sec. 110.40 in this part.
    (2) The dollar equivalent value of an eligible activity as defined 
in Sec. 110.40 of this part provided by a State, local, or other non-
Federal source.

[[Page 65]]

    (3) The value of participants' salary while attending a planning or 
training activity contained in the approved grant application provided 
by a State, local, or other non-Federal source.
    (4) Additional types of in-kind contributions the Associate 
Administrator deems appropriate.
    (b) Funds used for matching purposes under any other Federal grant 
or cooperative agreement may not be used for matching purposes. The 
funds expended by a recipient agency to qualify for the grant may not be 
used for cost-sharing purposes.
    (c) Acceptable contributions for matching and cost sharing purposes 
must conform to 49 CFR part 18.

[Amdt. 110-1, 57 FR 43067, Sept. 17, 1992, as amended by Amdt. 110-3, 59 
FR 49132, Sept. 26, 1994; 66 FR 45377, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 110.70  Financial administration.

    (a) A State must expend and account for grant funds in accordance 
with State laws and procedures for expending and accounting for its own 
funds. Fiscal control and accounting procedures of the State, as well as 
its subgrantees and cost-type contractors, must be sufficient to:
    (1) Permit the preparation of reports required by 49 CFR part 18 and 
this part, including the tracing of funds provided for planning to a 
level of expenditure adequate to establish that at least 75 percent of 
the funds provided were made available to LEPCs for developing, 
improving, and implementing emergency plans; and the tracing of funds 
provided for training to a level of expenditure adequate to establish 
that at least 75 percent of the funds provided were made available for 
the purposes of training public sector employees employed or used by 
political subdivisions.
    (2) Permit the tracing of funds to a level of expenditure adequate 
to establish that such funds have not been used in violation of the 
restrictions and prohibitions of applicable statutes.
    (b) The financial management systems of Indian tribes and any 
subgrantees must meet the standards of 49 CFR 18.20, including the 
ability to trace funds provided for training to a level of expenditure 
adequate to establish that at least 75 percent of the funds provided 
were made available for the purposes of training public sector employees 
employed or used by political subdivisions.
    (c) Advances shall be made to States and Indian tribes consistent 
with 49 CFR part 18 and 31 CFR part 205. The Associate Administrator 
shall base these advances on demonstrated need, which will be determined 
on a case-by-case basis, considering such factors as State/Tribal budget 
constraints and reductions in amounts budgeted for hazardous materials 
activities. To obtain an advance, a State or Indian tribe must comply 
with the following requirements:
    (1) A letter from the Governor or Tribal leader or their designee is 
required specifying the extenuating circumstances requiring the funding 
advance for the grant;
    (2) The maximum advance request may not be more than $25,000 for 
each State or Indian tribe;
    (3) Recipients of advance funding must obligate those funds within 3 
months of receipt;
    (4) Advances including interest will be deducted from the initial 
reimbursement to the State or Indian tribe; and
    (5) The State or Indian tribe will have its allocation of current 
grant funds reduced and will not be permitted to apply for future grant 
funds until the advance is covered by a request for reimbursement. For 
example, if $25,000 is advanced for personnel costs, this advance would 
be deducted from the initial reimbursement in the year the advance was 
made.
    (d) To be allowable, costs must be eligible, reasonable, necessary, 
and allocable to the approved project in accordance with OMB Circular A-
87 and included in the grant award. Costs incurred prior to the award of 
any grant are not allowable. Recipient agencies are responsible for 
obtaining audits in accordance with the Single Audit Act of 1984 (31 
U.S.C. 7501), 49 CFR part 90, and OMB Circular A-128. Audits shall be 
made by an independent auditor in accordance with generally accepted 
government auditing standards covering financial and compliance audits.

[[Page 66]]

The Associate Administrator may audit a recipient agency at any time.

[Amdt. 110-1, 57 FR 43067, Sept. 17, 1992, as amended by 66 FR 45377, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 110.80  Procurement.

    Project managers shall use procurement procedures and practices 
which reflect applicable State laws and regulations and Federal 
requirements as specified in 49 CFR 18.36.



Sec. 110.90  Grant monitoring, reports, and records retention.

    (a) Grant monitoring. Project managers are responsible for managing 
the day-to-day operations of grant, subgrant and contract-supported 
activities. Project managers must monitor performance of supported 
activities to assure compliance with applicable Federal requirements and 
achievement of performance goals. Monitoring must cover each program, 
function, activity, or task covered by the grant. Monitoring and 
reporting requirements for planning and training are contained in this 
part; general grant reporting requirements are specified in 49 CFR 
18.40.
    (b) Reports. (1) The project manager shall submit a performance 
report at the completion of an activity for which reimbursement is being 
requested or with a request to amend the grant. The final performance 
report is due 90 days after the expiration or termination of the grant.
    (2) Project managers shall submit an original and two copies of all 
performance reports. Performance reports for planning and training must 
include comparison of actual accomplishments to the stated goals and 
objectives established for the performance period, and the reasons for 
not achieving those goals and objectives, if applicable.
    (3) Project managers shall report developments or events that occur 
between the required performance reporting dates which have significant 
impact upon the planning and training activity such as:
    (i) Problems, delays, or adverse conditions which will impair the 
ability to meet the objective of the grant; and
    (ii) Favorable developments which enable meeting time schedules and 
objectives sooner or at less cost than anticipated or producing more 
beneficial results than originally planned.
    (4) Financial reporting, except as provided in Sec. 110.70 and 49 
CFR 18.41, shall be supplied quarterly using Standard Form 270, Request 
for Advance or Reimbursement, to report the status of funds. The project 
manager shall report separately on planning and training.
    (c) Records retention. In accordance with 49 CFR 18.42, all 
financial and programmatic records, supporting documents, statistical 
records, training materials, and other documents generated under a grant 
shall be maintained by the project manager for three years from the date 
the project manager submits the final financial status report (SF 269) 
or Request for Advance or Reimbursement (SF 270). The project manager 
shall designate a repository and single-point of contact for planning 
and for training, or both, for these purposes. If any litigation, claim, 
negotiation, audit or other action involving the records has been 
started before the expiration of the 3-year period, the records must be 
retained until completion of the action and resolution of all issues 
which arise from it, or until the end of the regular 3-year period, 
whichever is later.



Sec. 110.100  Enforcement.

    If a recipient agency fails to comply with any term of an award 
(whether stated in a Federal statute or regulation, an assurance, a 
State plan or application, a notice of award, or elsewhere) a 
noncompliance action may be taken as specified in 40 CFR 18.43. The 
recipient agency may appeal any such actions as specified in 49 CFR part 
18. Costs incurred by the recipient agency during a suspension or after 
termination of an award are not allowable unless the Associate 
Administrator authorizes it in writing. Grant awards may be terminated 
in whole or in part with the consent of the recipient at any agreed upon 
effective date, or by the recipient upon written notification.

[Amdt. 110-1, 57 FR 43067, Sept. 17, 1992, as amended by 66 FR 45377, 
Aug. 28, 2001]

[[Page 67]]



Sec. 110.110  After-grant requirements.

    The Associate Administrator will close out the award upon 
determination that all applicable administrative actions and all 
required work of the grant are complete in accordance with subpart D of 
49 CFR part 18. The project manager must submit all financial, 
performance, and other reports required as a condition of the grant, 
within 90 days after the expiration or termination of the grant. This 
time frame may be extended by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous 
Materials Safety for cause.

[Amdt. 110-1, 57 FR 43067, Sept. 17, 1992, as amended by 66 FR 45377, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 110.120  Deviation from this part.

    Recipient agencies may request a deviation from the non-statutory 
provisions of this part. The Associate Administrator will respond to 
such requests in writing. If appropriate, the decision will be included 
in the grant agreement. Request for deviations from part 110 must be 
submitted to: Grants Manager, Research and Special Programs 
Administration, U.S. Department of Transportation, 400 7th Street, SW., 
Washington, DC 20590-0001.

[Amdt. 110-1, 57 FR 43067, Sept. 17, 1992, as amended by Amdt. 110-3, 59 
FR 49132, Sept. 26, 1994; 66 FR 45377, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 110.130  Disputes.

    Disputes should be resolved at the lowest level possible, beginning 
with the project manager and the project officer. If an agreement cannot 
be reached, the Administrator, RSPA, will serve as the dispute 
resolution official, whose decision will be final.

[[Page 68]]



                    SUBCHAPTER B--OIL TRANSPORTATION





PART 130--OIL SPILL PREVENTION AND RESPONSE PLANS--Table of Contents




Sec.
130.1  Purpose.
130.2  Scope.
130.3  General requirements.
130.5  Definitions.
130.11  Communication requirements.
130.21  Packaging requirements.
130.31  Response plans.
130.33  Response plan implementation.

    Authority: 33 U.S.C. 1321.

    Source: Amdt. 130-2, 61 FR 30541, June 17, 1996, unless otherwise 
noted.



Sec. 130.1  Purpose.

    This part prescribes prevention, containment and response planning 
requirements of the Department of Transportation applicable to 
transportation of oil by motor vehicles and rolling stock.



Sec. 130.2  Scope.

    (a) The requirements of this part apply to--
    (1) Any liquid petroleum oil in a packaging having a capacity of 
3,500 gallons or more; and
    (2) Any liquid petroleum or non-petroleum oil in a quantity greater 
than 42,000 gallons per packaging.
    (b) The requirements of this part have no effect on--
    (1) The applicability of the Hazardous Materials Regulations set 
forth in subchapter C of this chapter; and
    (2) The discharge notification requirements of the United States 
Coast Guard (33 CFR part 153) and EPA (40 CFR part 110).
    (c) The requirements of this part do not apply to--
    (1) Any mixture or solution in which oil is in a concentration by 
weight of less than 10 percent.
    (2) Transportation of oil by aircraft or vessel.
    (3) Any petroleum oil carried in a fuel tank for the purpose of 
supplying fuel for propulsion of the transport vehicle to which it is 
attached.
    (4) Oil transport exclusively within the confines of a non-
transportation-related or terminal facility in a vehicle not intended 
for use in interstate or intrastate commerce (see 40 CFR part 112, 
appendix A).
    (d) The requirements in Sec. 130.31(b) of this part do not apply to 
mobile marine transportation-related facilities (see 33 CFR part 154).



Sec. 130.3  General requirements.

    No person may offer or accept for transportation or transport oil 
subject to this part unless that person--
    (a) Complies with this part; and
    (b) Has been instructed on the applicable requirements of this part.



Sec. 130.5  Definitions.

    In this subchapter: Animal fat means a non-petroleum oil, fat, or 
grease derived from animals, not specifically identified elsewhere in 
this part.
    Contract or other means is:
    (1) A written contract with a response contractor identifying and 
ensuring the availability of the necessary personnel or equipment within 
the shortest practicable time;
    (2) A written certification by the owner or operator that the 
necessary personnel or equipment can and will be made available by the 
owner or operator within the shortest practicable time; or
    (3) Documentation of membership in an oil spill response 
organization that ensures the owner's or operator's access to the 
necessary personnel or equipment within the shortest practicable time.
    EPA means the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.
    Liquid means a material that has a vertical flow of over two inches 
(50 mm) within a three-minute period, or a material having one gram or 
more liquid separation, when determined in accordance with the 
procedures specified in ASTM D 4359-84, ``Standard Test Method for 
Determining Whether a Material is a Liquid or a Solid,'' 1990 edition, 
which is incorporated by reference.

    Note: This incorporation by reference has been approved by the 
Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 
1 CFR part 51. A copy may be obtained

[[Page 69]]

from the American Society for Testing and Materials, 1916 Race Street, 
Philadelphia, PA 19103. Copies may be inspected at the Office of 
Hazardous Materials Safety, Office of Hazardous Materials Standards, 
Room 8422, DOT headquarters building, 400 7th St., SW, Washington, DC 
20590, or at the Office of the Federal Register, 800 North Capitol St., 
NW, Room 700, Washington, DC 20002.

    Maximum extent practicable means the limits of available technology 
and the practical and technical limits on an owner or operator of an 
onshore facility in planning the response resources required to provide 
the on-water recovery capability and the shoreline protection and 
cleanup capability to conduct response activities for a worst-case 
discharge of oil in adverse weather.
    Non-petroleum oil means any animal fat, vegetable oil or other non-
petroleum oil.
    Oil means oil of any kind or in any form, including, but not limited 
to, petroleum, fuel oil, sludge, oil refuse, and oil mixed with wastes 
other than dredged spoil.

    Note: This definition does not include hazardous substances (see 40 
CFR part 116).

    Other non-petroleum oil means a non-petroleum oil of any kind that 
is not an animal fat or vegetable oil.
    Packaging means a receptacle and any other components or materials 
necessary for the receptacle to perform its containment function in 
conformance with the packaging requirements of this part. A 
compartmented tank is a single packaging.
    Person means an individual, firm, corporation, partnership, 
association, State, municipality, commission, or political subdivision 
of a State, or any interstate body, as well as a department, agency, or 
instrumentality of the executive, legislative or judicial branch of the 
Federal Government.
    Petroleum oil means any oil extracted or derived from geological 
hydrocarbon deposits, including fractions thereof.
    Qualified individual means an individual familiar with the response 
plan, trained in his or her responsibilities in implementing the plan, 
and authorized, on behalf of the owner or operator, to initiate all 
response activities identified in the plan, to enter into response-
related contracts and obligate funds for such contracts, and to act as a 
liaison with the on-scene coordinator and other responsible officials. 
The qualified individual must be available at all times the owner or 
operator is engaged in transportation subject to part 130 (alone or in 
conjunction with an equally qualified alternate), must be fluent in 
English, and must have in his or her possession documentation of the 
required authority.
    Transports or Transportation means any movement of oil by highway or 
rail, and any loading, unloading, or storage incidental thereto.
    Vegetable oil means a non-petroleum oil or fat derived from plant 
seeds, nuts, kernels or fruits, not specifically identified elsewhere in 
this part.
    Worst-case discharge means ``the largest foreseeable discharge in 
adverse weather conditions,'' as defined at 33 U.S.C. 1321(a)(24). The 
largest foreseeable discharge from a motor vehicle or rail car is the 
capacity of the cargo container. The term ``maximum potential 
discharge,'' used in Sec. 130.31(a), is synonymous with ``worst-case 
discharge.''

[Amdt. 130-2, 61 FR 30541, June 17, 1996, as amended by 66 FR 45378, 
Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 61011, Sept. 27, 2002]



Sec. 130.11  Communication requirements.

    (a) No person may offer oil subject to this part for transportation 
unless that person provides the person accepting the oil for 
transportation a document indicating the shipment contains oil.
    (b) No person may transport oil subject to this part unless a 
readily available document indicating that the shipment contains oil is 
in the possession of the transport vehicle operator during 
transportation.
    (c) A material subject to the requirements of this part need not be 
specifically identified as oil when the shipment document accurately 
describes the material as: aviation fuel, diesel fuel, fuel oil, 
gasoline, jet fuel, kerosene, motor fuel, or petroleum.



Sec. 130.21  Packaging requirements.

    Each packaging used for the transportation of oil subject to this 
part must be designed, constructed, maintained, closed, and loaded so 
that, under conditions normally incident to

[[Page 70]]

transportation, there will be no release of oil to the environment.



Sec. 130.31  Response plans.

    (a) After September 30, 1993, no person may transport oil subject to 
this part unless that person has a current basic written plan that:
    (1) Sets forth the manner of response to discharges that may occur 
during transportation;
    (2) Takes into account the maximum potential discharge of the 
contents from the packaging;
    (3) Identifies private personnel and equipment available to respond 
to a discharge;
    (4) Identifies the appropriate persons and agencies (including their 
telephone numbers) to be contacted in regard to such a discharge and its 
handling, including the National Response Center; and
    (5) For each motor carrier, is retained on file at that person's 
principal place of business and at each location where dispatching of 
motor vehicles occurs; and for each railroad, is retained on file at 
that person's principal place of business and at the dispatcher's 
office.
    (b) After February 18, 1993, no person may transport an oil subject 
to this part in a quantity greater than 1,000 barrels (42,000 gallons) 
unless that person has a current comprehensive written plan that:
    (1) Conforms with all requirements specified in paragraph (a) of 
this section;
    (2) Is consistent with the requirements of the National Contingency 
Plan (40 CFR part 300) and Area Contingency Plans;
    (3) Identifies the qualified individual having full authority to 
implement removal actions, and requires immediate communications between 
that individual and the appropriate Federal official and the persons 
providing spill response personnel and equipment;
    (4) Identifies, and ensures by contract or other means the 
availability of, private personnel (including address and phone number), 
and the equipment necessary to remove, to the maximum extent 
practicable, a worst case discharge (including a discharge resulting 
from fire or explosion) and to mitigate or prevent a substantial threat 
of such a discharge;
    (5) Describes the training, equipment testing, periodic unannounced 
drills, and response actions of facility personnel, to be carried out 
under the plan to ensure the safety of the facility and to mitigate or 
prevent the discharge, or the substantial threat of such a discharge; 
and
    (6) Is submitted, and resubmitted in the event of any significant 
change, to the Federal Railroad Administrator (for tank cars), or to the 
Federal Highway Administrator (for cargo tanks) at 400 Seventh Street 
SW, Washington, DC 20590-0001.

(Approved by the Office of Management and Budget under control number 
2137-0591)



Sec. 130.33  Response plan implementation.

    If, during transportation of oil subject to this part, a discharge 
occurs-- into or on the navigable waters of the United States; on the 
adjoining shorelines to the navigable waters; or that may affect natural 
resources belonging to, appertaining to, or under the exclusive 
management authority of, the United States--the person transporting the 
oil shall implement the plan required by Sec. 130.31, in a manner 
consistent with the National Contingency Plan, 40 CFR part 300, or as 
otherwise directed by the Federal on-scene coordinator.

[[Page 71]]



              SUBCHAPTER C--HAZARDOUS MATERIALS REGULATIONS





PART 171--GENERAL INFORMATION, REGULATIONS, AND DEFINITIONS--Table of Contents




Sec.
171.1  Purpose and scope.
171.2  General requirements.
171.3  Hazardous waste.
171.4  Marine pollutants.
171.6  Control numbers under the Paperwork Reduction Act.
171.7  Reference material.
171.8  Definitions and abbreviations.
171.9  Rules of construction.
171.10  Units of measure.
171.11  Use of ICAO Technical Instructions.
171.12  Import and export shipments.
171.12a  Canadian shipments and packagings.
171.14  Transitional provisions for implementing certain requirements.
171.15  Immediate notice of certain hazardous materials incidents.
171.16  Detailed hazardous materials incident reports.
171.17-171.18  [Reserved]
171.19  Approvals or authorizations issued by the Bureau of Explosives.
171.20  Submission of Examination Reports.
171.21  Assistance in investigations and special studies.

    Authority: 49 U.S.C. 5101-5127; 49 CFR 1.53.



Sec. 171.1  Purpose and scope.

    (a) This subchapter prescribes requirements of the Department 
governing--
    (1) The offering of hazardous materials for transportation and 
transportation of hazardous materials in interstate, intrastate, and 
foreign commerce by rail car, aircraft, motor vehicle, and vessel 
(except as delegated at Sec. 1.46(t) of this title).
    (2) The representation that a hazardous material is present in a 
package, container, rail car, aircraft, motor vehicle, or vessel.
    (3) The manufacture, fabrication, marking, maintenance, 
reconditioning, repairing, or testing of a packaging or container which 
is represented, marked, certified, or sold for use in transportation of 
hazardous materials.
    (4) The use of terms and symbols prescribed in this subchapter for 
the marking, labeling, placarding and description of hazardous materials 
and packagings used in their transport.
    (b) Any person who, under contract with any department, agency, or 
instrumentality of the executive, legislative, or judicial branch of the 
Federal Government, transports, or causes to be transported or shipped, 
a hazardous material or manufactures, fabricates, marks, maintains, 
reconditions, repairs, or tests a package or container which is 
represented, marked, certified, or sold by such person as qualified for 
use in the transportation of a hazardous material shall be subject to 
and comply with all provisions of the Federal hazardous materials 
transportation law, all orders and regulations issued thereunder, and 
all other substantive and procedural requirements of Federal, State, and 
local governments and Indian tribes (except any such requirements that 
have been preempted by the Federal hazardous materials transportation 
law or any other Federal law), in the same manner and to the same extent 
as any person engaged in such activities that are in or affect commerce 
is subject to such provisions, orders, regulations, and requirements.
    (c) Any person who knowingly violates a requirement of the Federal 
hazardous material transportation law, an order issued thereunder, 
subchapter A, an exemption issued under subchapter A, of this 
subchapter, is liable for a civil penalty of not more than $25,000 
($27,500 for a violation that occurs after January 21, 1997) and not 
less than $250 for each violation. When the violation is a continuing 
one and involves the transporting of hazardous materials or the causing 
of them to be transported or shipped, each day of the violation 
constitutes a separate offense. Any person who knowingly violates 
Sec. 171.2(g) of this subchapter or willfully violates a provision of 
the Federal hazardous material transportation law or an order or 
regulation issued thereunder shall be fined under Title 18, United 
States

[[Page 72]]

Code, or imprisoned for not more than 5 years, or both.

[Amdt. 171-150, 62 FR 1215, Jan. 8, 1997, as amended by Amdt. 171-152, 
62 FR 2977, Jan. 21, 1997; Amdt. 171-154, 62 FR 49566, Sept. 22, 1997; 
65 FR 58618, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45378, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 171.2  General requirements.

    (a) No person may offer or accept a hazardous material for 
transportation in commerce unless that person is registered in 
conformance with subpart G of part 107 of this chapter, if applicable, 
and the hazardous material is properly classed, described, packaged, 
marked, labeled, and in condition for shipment as required or authorized 
by applicable requirements of this subchapter, or an exemption, approval 
or registration issued under this subchapter or subchapter A of this 
chapter.
    (b) No person may transport a hazardous material in commerce unless 
that person is registered in conformance with subpart G of part 107 of 
this chapter, if applicable, and the hazardous material is handled and 
transported in accordance with applicable requirements of this 
subchapter, or an exemption, approval or registration issued under this 
subchapter or subchapter A of this chapter.
    (c) No person may represent, mark, certify, sell, or offer a 
packaging or container as meeting the requirements of this subchapter or 
an exemption, approval or registration issued under this subchapter or 
subchapter A of this chapter, governing its use in the transportation in 
commerce of a hazardous material, whether or not it is used or intended 
to be used for the transportation of a hazardous material, unless the 
packaging or container is manufactured, fabricated, marked, maintained, 
reconditioned, repaired and retested, as appropriate, in accordance with 
applicable requirements of this subchapter, or an exemption, approval or 
registration issued under this subchapter or subchapter A of this 
chapter.
    (d) The representations, markings, and certifications subject to the 
prohibitions of paragraph (c) of this section include, but are not 
limited to--
    (1) Specification identifications that include the letters ``ICC,'' 
``DOT,'' ``CTC,'' ``MC,'' or ``UN'';
    (2) Exemption, approval, and registration numbers that include the 
letters ``DOT,'' ``EX,'' ``M,'' or ``R''; and
    (3) Test dates associated with specification, registration, 
approval, retest, exemption, or requalification identification number 
(RIN) markings indicating compliance with a test or retest requirement 
of this subchapter, or an exemption, an approval, or a registration 
issued under this subchapter or subchapter A of this chapter.
    (e) When a person performs a function covered by or having an effect 
on a specification prescribed in part 178, 179 or 180 of this 
subchapter, an approval issued under this subchapter, or an exemption 
issued under subpart B of this chapter, that person must perform the 
function in accordance with that specification, approval, or exemption, 
as appropriate.
    (f) No person shall, by marking or otherwise, represent that--
    (1) A container or package for the transportation of hazardous 
materials is safe, certified, or in compliance with the requirements of 
this title unless it meets the requirements of all applicable 
regulations issued under the Federal hazardous material transportation 
law; or
    (2) A hazardous material is present in a package, container, motor 
vehicle, rail car, aircraft, or vessel, if the hazardous material is not 
present.
    (g) No person shall unlawfully alter, remove, deface, destroy, or 
otherwise tamper with--
    (1) Any marking, label, placard, or description on a document 
required by the Federal hazardous material transportation law, or the 
regulations issued thereunder; or
    (2) Any package, container, motor vehicle, rail car, aircraft, or 
vessel used for the transportation of hazardous materials.
    (h) No person shall--
    (1) Falsify or alter an exemption, approval, registration or other 
grant of authority issued under this subchapter or subchapter A of this 
chapter; or
    (2) Offer a hazardous material for transportation or transport a 
hazardous material in commerce, or represent, mark, certify, or sell a 
packaging or container, under a false or altered exemption, approval, 
registration

[[Page 73]]

or other grant of authority issued under this subchapter or subchapter A 
of this chapter.

[Amdt. 171-70, 48 FR 2655, Jan. 20, 1983, as amended by Amdt. No. 171-
100, 54 FR 25004, June 12, 1989; Amdt. 171-12, 56 FR 8624, Feb. 28, 
1991; Amdt. No. 171-115, 57 FR 30631, July 9, 1992; 57 FR 37902, Aug. 
21, 1992; Amdt. No. 171-120, 58 FR 33305, June 16, 1993; Amdt. 171-2, 59 
FR 49132, Sept. 26, 1994; Amdt. 171-141, 61 FR 21101, May 9, 1996; 64 FR 
10752, Mar. 5, 1999; 67 FR 51640, Aug. 8, 2002]



Sec. 171.3  Hazardous waste.

    (a) No person may offer for transportation or transport a hazardous 
waste (as defined in Sec. 171.8 of this subchapter) in interstate or 
intrastate commerce except in accordance with the requirements of this 
subchapter.
    (b) No person may accept for transportation, transport, or deliver a 
hazardous waste for which a manifest is required unless that person:
    (1) Has marked each motor vehicle used to transport hazardous waste 
in accordance with Sec. 390.21 or Sec. 1058.2 of this title even though 
placards may not be required;
    (2) Complies with the requirements for manifests set forth in 
Sec. 172.205 of this subchapter; and
    (3) Delivers, as designated on the manifest by the generator, the 
entire quantity of the waste received from the generator or a 
transporter to:
    (i) The designated facility or, if not possible, to the designated 
alternate facility;
    (ii) The designated subsequent carrier; or
    (iii) A designated place outside the United States.

    Note: Federal law specifies penalties up to $250,000 fine for an 
individual and $500,000 for a company and 5 years imprisonment for the 
willful discharge of hazardous waste at other than designated 
facilities. 49 U.S.C. 5124.

    (c) If a discharge of hazardous waste or other hazardous material 
occurs during transportation, and an official of a State or local 
government or a Federal agency, acting within the scope of his official 
responsibilities, determines that immediate removal of the waste is 
necessary to prevent further consequence, that official may authorize 
the removal of the waste without the preparation of a manifest. [Note: 
In such cases, EPA does not require carriers to have EPA identification 
numbers.]

    Note 1: EPA requires shippers (generators) and carriers 
(transporters) of hazardous wastes to have identification numbers which 
must be displayed on hazardous waste manifests. See 40 CFR parts 262 and 
263. (Identification number application forms may be obtained from EPA 
regional offices.)
    Note 2: In 40 CFR part 263, the EPA sets forth requirements for the 
cleanup of releases of hazardous wastes.

[Amdt. 171-53, 45 FR 34586, May 22, 1980, as amended by Amdt. 171-53, 45 
FR 74648, Nov. 10, 1980; Amdt. 171-78, 49 FR 10510, Mar. 20, 1984; Amdt. 
171-107, 54 FR 40068, Sept. 29, 1989; Amdt. 171-111, 55 FR 52466, Dec. 
21, 1990; 56 FR 66157, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 171-2, 59 FR 49132, Sept. 
26, 1994; Amdt. 171-141, 61 FR 21102, May 9, 1996]



Sec. 171.4  Marine pollutants.

    (a) Except as provided in paragraph (c) of this section, no person 
may offer for transportation or transport a marine pollutant, as defined 
in Sec. 171.8, in intrastate or interstate commerce except in accordance 
with the requirements of this subchapter.
    (b) The requirements of this subchapter for the transportation of 
marine pollutants are based on the provisions of Annex III of the 1973 
International Convention for Prevention of Pollution from Ships, as 
modified by the Protocol of 1978 (MARPOL 73/78).
    (c) Exceptions. Except when transported aboard vessel, the 
requirements of this subchapter specific to marine pollutants do not 
apply to non-bulk packagings transported by motor vehicles, rail cars or 
aircraft.

[Amdt. 171-116, 57 FR 52934, Nov. 5, 1993, as amended by Amdt. 107-39, 
61 FR 51337, Oct. 1, 1996]



Sec. 171.6  Control numbers under the Paperwork Reduction Act.

    (a) Purpose and scope. This section collects and displays the 
control numbers assigned to the HMR collections of information by the 
Office of Management and Budget (OMB) under the Paperwork Reduction Act 
of 1995. This section complies with the requirements of 5 CFR 1320.7(f), 
1320.12, 1320.13 and 1320.14 (OMB regulations implementing the Paperwork 
Reduction Act of 1995)

[[Page 74]]

for the display of control numbers assigned by OMB to collections of 
information of the HMR.
    (b) OMB control numbers. The table in paragraph (b)(2) of this 
section sets forth the control numbers assigned to collection of 
information in the HMR by the Office of Management and Budget (OMB) 
under the Paperwork Reduction Act of 1995.
    (1) Column 1 lists the OMB control number assigned to the HMR 
collections of information. Column 2 contains the Report Title of the 
approved collection of information. Column 3 lists the part(s) or 
section(s) in 49 CFR identified or described in the collection of 
information.
    (2) Table.

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                    Title 49 CFR part or
                                                       section where
  Current OMB control No.           Title              identified and
                                                         described
------------------------------------------------------------------------
2137-0014.................  Cargo Tank             Secs.  107.503,
                             Specification          107.504, 178.320,
                             Requirements.          178.337, 178.338,
                                                    178.345, 180.407,
                                                    180.409, 180.413,
                                                    180.417.
2137-0018.................  Inspection and         Secs.  173.24,
                             Testing of Portable    173.32, 178.3,
                             Tank and IBC's.        178.245, 178.255,
                                                    178.270, 178.273,
                                                    178.274, 178.703,
                                                    178.801, 180.352,
                                                    180.605.
2137-0022.................  Testing, Inspection,   Secs.  173.302a,
                             and Marking            173.303, 173.304,
                             Requirements for       173.309, 178.2,
                             Cylinders.             178.3, 178.35,
                                                    178.44, 178.45,
                                                    178.46, 178.57,
                                                    178.59, 178.60,
                                                    178.61, 178.68,
                                                    180.205, 180.209,
                                                    180.211, 180.213,
                                                    180.215.
2137-0034.................  Hazardous Materials    Secs.  172.200,
                             Shipping Papers and    172.201, 172.203,
                             Emergency Response     172.204, 172.205,
                             Information.           172.600, 172.602,
                                                    172.604, 172.606,
                                                    173.6, 173.7,
                                                    173.22, 173.56,
                                                    174.24, 174.26,
                                                    174.114, 175.30,
                                                    175.31, 175.33,
                                                    175.35, 176.24,
                                                    176.27, 176.30,
                                                    176.36, 176.89,
                                                    177.817.
2137-0039.................  Hazardous Materials    Secs.  171.15,
                             Incident Report.       171.16.
2137-0051.................  Rulemaking and         Secs.  105.30,
                             Exemptions Petitions.  105.40, 106.95,
                                                    106.110, 107.105,
                                                    107.107, 107.109,
                                                    107.113, 107.117,
                                                    107.121, 107.123,
                                                    107.125, 107.205,
                                                    107.211, 107.215,
                                                    107.217, 107.219,
                                                    107.221, 107.223.
2137-0510.................  RAM Transportation     Part 173, Subpart I,
                             Requirements.          Secs.  173.22,
                                                    173.411, 173.415,
                                                    173.416, 173.417,
                                                    173.457, 173.471,
                                                    173.472, 173.473,
                                                    173.476.
2137-0542.................  Cryogenic Liquids      Secs.  173.318,
                             Requirements.          177.816, 177.840,
                                                    180.405.
2137-0557.................  Approvals for          Secs.  107.402;
                             Hazardous Materials.   107.403; 107.405;
                                                    107.503; 107.705;
                                                    107.713; 107.715;
                                                    107.717; 107.803;
                                                    107.805; 107.807;
                                                    110.30; 172.101;
                                                    172.102, Special
                                                    Provisions 26, 19,
                                                    53, 55, 60, 105,
                                                    118, 121, 125, 129,
                                                    131, 133, 136;
                                                    172.102, Special
                                                    Provisions B45, B55,
                                                    B61, B69, B77, B81,
                                                    N10, N72, Code: T42;
                                                    173.2a; 173.4;
                                                    173.7; 173.21;
                                                    173.22; 173.24;
                                                    173.38; 173.31;
                                                    173.51; 173.56;
                                                    173.58; 173.59;
                                                    173.124; 173.128;
                                                    173.159; 173.166;
                                                    173.171; 173.214;
                                                    173.222; 173.224;
                                                    173.225; 173.245;
                                                    173.301; 173.305;
                                                    173.306; 173.314;
                                                    173.315; 173.316;
                                                    173.318; 173.334;
                                                    173.340; 173.411;
                                                    173.433; 173.457;
                                                    173.471; 173.472;
                                                    173.473; 173.476;
                                                    174.50; 174.63;
                                                    175.10; 175.701;
                                                    176.168; 176.340;
                                                    176.704; 178.3;
                                                    178.35; 178.47;
                                                    178.53; 178.58;
                                                    178.270-3; 178.270-
                                                    13; 178.273;
                                                    178.274; 178.503;
                                                    178.509; 178.605;
                                                    178.606; 178.608;
                                                    178.801; 178.813;
                                                    180.213.

[[Page 75]]

 
2137-0559.................  Rail Carriers and      Secs.  172.102,
                             Tank Car Tank          Special provisions:
                             Requirements.          B45, B46, B55, B61,
                                                    B69, B77, B78, B81;
                                                    173.10, 173.31,
                                                    174.20, 174.50,
                                                    174.63, 174.104,
                                                    174.114, 174.204,
                                                    179.3, 179.4, 179.5,
                                                    179.6, 179.7,
                                                    179.11, 179.18,
                                                    179.22, 179.100-9,
                                                    179.100-12, 179.100-
                                                    13, 179.100-16,
                                                    179.100-17, 179.102-
                                                    4, 179.102-17,
                                                    179.103-1, 179.103-
                                                    2, 179.103-3,
                                                    179.103-5, 179.200-
                                                    10, 179.200-14,
                                                    179.200-15, 179.200-
                                                    16, 179.200-17,
                                                    179.200-19, 179.201-
                                                    3, 179.201-8,
                                                    179.201-9, 179.220-
                                                    4, 179.220-7,
                                                    179.220-8, 179.220-
                                                    13, 179.220-15,
                                                    179.220-17, 179.220-
                                                    18, 179.220-20,
                                                    179.220-22, 179.300-
                                                    3, 179.300-7,
                                                    179.300-9, 179.300-
                                                    12, 179.300-13,
                                                    179.300-15, 179.300-
                                                    20, 179.400-3,
                                                    179.400-4, 179.400-
                                                    11, 179.400-13,
                                                    179.400-16, 179.400-
                                                    17, 179.400-19,
                                                    179.400-20, 179.500-
                                                    5, 179.500-8,
                                                    179.500-12, 179.500-
                                                    18, 180.505,
                                                    180.509, 180.515,
                                                    180.517.
2137-0572.................  Testing Requirements   Secs.  178.2,
                             for Non-Bulk           178.601.
                             Packaging.
2137-0582.................  Container              Secs.  176.27,
                             Certification          176.172.
                             Statement.
2137-0586.................  Hazardous Materials    Part 110.
                             Public Sector
                             Training and
                             Planning Grants.
2137-0595.................  Cargo Tank Motor       Secs.  173.315,
                             Vehicles in            178.337-8, 178.337-
                             Liquefied Compressed   9, 180.405, 180.416.
                             Gas Service.
------------------------------------------------------------------------

[Amdt. 171-111, 56 FR 66157, Dec. 20, 1991, as amended at 57 FR 1877, 
Jan. 16, 1992; Amdt. 171-121, 58 FR 51527, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 171-137, 
61 FR 33254, June 26, 1996; 62 FR 51558, Oct. 1, 1997; 64 FR 51915, 
Sept. 27, 1999; 64 FR 61220, Nov. 10, 1999; 65 FR 58619, Sept. 29, 2000; 
67 FR 61012, Sept. 27, 2002; 67 FR 51640, Aug. 8, 2002]



Sec. 171.7  Reference material.

    (a) Matter incorporated by reference--(1) General. There is 
incorporated, by reference in parts 170-189 of this subchapter, matter 
referred to that is not specifically set forth. This matter is hereby 
made a part of the regulations in parts 170-189 of this subchapter. The 
matter subject to change is incorporated only as it is in effect on the 
date of issuance of the regulation referring to that matter. The 
material listed in paragraph (a)(3) has been approved for incorporation 
by reference by the Director of the Federal Register in accordance with 
5 U.S.C 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. Material is incorporated as it exists 
on the date of the approval and a notice of any change in the material 
will be published in the Federal Register. Matters referenced by 
footnote are included as part of the regulations of this subchapter.
    (2) Accessibility of materials. All incorporated matter is available 
for inspection at:
    (i) The Office of Hazardous Materials Safety, Office of Hazardous 
Materials Standards, Room 8422, NASSIF Building, 400 7th Street, SW., 
Washington, DC 20590; and
    (ii) The Office of the Federal Register, 800 North Capitol Street, 
NW., suite 700, Washington, DC.
    (3) Table of material incorporated by reference. The following table 
sets forth material incorporated by reference. The first column lists 
the name and address of the organization from which the material is 
available and the name of the material. The second column lists the 
section(s) of this subchapter, other than Sec. 171.7, in which the 
matter is referenced. The second column is presented for information 
only and may not be all inclusive.

------------------------------------------------------------------------
           Source and name of material               49 CFR reference
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Air Transport Association of America,
  1301 Pennsylvania Avenue, N.W., Washington, DC
   20004-1707
ATA Specification No. 300 Packaging of Airline    172.102
 Supplies, Revision 19, July 31, 1996.

[[Page 76]]

 
The Aluminum Association,
  420 Lexington Avenue, New York, NY 10017
Aluminum Standards and Data, Seventh Edition,     172.102; 178..46 and
 June 1982.                                        178.65
American National Standards Institute, Inc.,
  25 West 43rd Street, New York, NY 10036
ANSI/ASHRAE 15-94, Safety Code for Mechanical     173.306
 Refrigeration.
ANSI B16.5-77, Steel Pipe Flanges, Flanged        178.345; 178.360
 Fittings.
ANSI N14.1 Uranium Hexafluoride--Packaging for    173.417; 173.420
 Transport, 1971, 1982, 1987, 1990, 1995 and
 2001 Editions..
American Pyrotechnics Association (APA),
  P.O. Box 213, Chestertown, MD 21620
APA Standard 87-1, Standard for Construction and  173.56
 Approval for Transportation of Fireworks,
 Novelties, and Theatrical Pyrotechnics, January
 23, 1998 version.
American Society of Mechanical Engineers,
  ASME International, 22 Law Drive, P.O. Box
   2900, Fairfield, NJ 07007-2900
ASME Code, Sections II (Parts A and B), V, VIII   173.32; 173.306;
 (Division 1), and IX of 1998 Edition of           173.315; 173.318;
 American Society of Mechanical Engineers Boiler   173.420; 178.245;
 and Pressure Vessel Code.                         178.255; 178.270;
                                                   178.271; 178.272;
                                                   178.337; 178.338;
                                                   178.345; 178.346;
                                                   178.347; 178.348;
                                                   179.400; 180.407;
                                                   180.417
ASME Code, Section V (FR Nondestructive           180.407
 Examination), 1977.
ASME Code, Section IX (FR Welding and Brazing     178.245; 178.270;
 Qualification), 1977 and Addendum (1979).         178.337; 178.338
American Society for Testing and Materials,
  100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA
   19428
 
  Noncurrent ASTM Standards are available from:
   Engineering Societies Library, 354 E. 47th
   Street, New York, NY 10017
ASTM A 20/A 20M-93a Standard Specification for    178.337-2; 179.102-4;
 General Requirements for Steel Plates for         179.102-17.
 Pressure Vessels.
ASTM A 47-68  Malleable Iron Castings...........  179.200
ASTM A 240/A 240M-99b Standard Specification for  178.57; 178.358-5;
 Heat-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel       179.100-7; 179.100-
 Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip for        10; 179.102-1;
 Pressure Vessels.                                 179.102-4; 179.102-
                                                   17; 179.200-7;
                                                   179.201-5; 179.220-7;
                                                   179.400-5.
ASTM A 242-81  Standard Specification for High-   179.100
 Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel.
ASTM A 262-93a Standard Practices for Detecting   179.100-7; 179.200-7;
 Susceptibility to Intergranular Attack in         179.201-4.
 Austenitic Stainless Steels.
ASTM A 300-58  Steel Plates for Pressure Vessels  178.337
 for Service at Low Temperatures.
ASTM A 302/A 302M-93 Standard Specification for   179.100-7; 179.200-7;
 Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Manganese-   179.220-7.
 Molybdenum and Manganese-Molybdenum Nickel.
ASTM A 333-67  Seamless and Welded Steel Pipe     178.45
 for Low-Temperature Service.
ASTM A 366/A 366M-91 (1993)e1 Standard            178.601
 Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold-
 Rolled, Commercial Quality.
ASTM A 370-94 Standard Test Methods and           179.102-1; 179.102-4;
 Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel       179.102-17.
 Products.
ASTM A 441-81  Standard Specification for High-   178.338
 Strength Low-Alloy Structural Manganese
 Vanadium Steel.
ASTM A 514-81  Standard Specification for High-   178.338
 Yield Strength Quenched and Tempered Alloy
 Steel Plate, Suitable for Welding.
ASTM A 516/A 516M-90 Standard Specification for   178.337-2; 179.100-7;
 Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for         179.100-20; 179.102-
 Moderate and Lower- Temperature Service.          1; 179.102-2; 179.102-
                                                   4; 179.102-17;
                                                   179.200-7; 179.220-7.

[[Page 77]]

 
ASTM A 537/A 537M-91 Standard Specification for   179.100-7; 179.102-4;
 Pressure Vessel Plates, Heat-Treated, Carbon-     179.102-17.
 Manganese-Silicon Steel.
ASTM A 568/A 568M-95 Standard Specification for   178.601
 Steel, Sheet, Carbon, and High-Strength, Low-
 Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General
 Requirements for.
ASTM A 572-82  Standard Specification for High-   178.338; 179.100
 Strength Low-Alloy Columbian-Vanadium Steels of
 Structural Quality.
ASTM A 588-81  Standard Specification for High-   179.100; 178.338
 Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel with 50 Ksi
 Minimum Yield Point to 4 in. Thick.
ASTM A 606-75  Standard Specification for Steel   178.338
 Sheet and Strip Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled,
 High-Strength, Low-Alloy, with Improved
 Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance, 1975
 (Reapproved 1981).
ASTM A 612-72a  High Strength Steel Plates for    178.337
 Pressure Vessels for Moderate and Lower
 Temperature Service.
ASTM A 633-79a  Standard Specification for        178.338
 Normalized High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural
 Steel, 1979 Edition.
ASTM A 715-81  Standard Specification for Steel   178.338
 Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, High-Strength, Low-
 Alloy with Improved Formability, 1981.
ASTM B 162-93a Standard Specification for Nickel  179.200-7.
 Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
ASTM B 209-93 Standard Specification for          179.100-7; 179.200-7;
 Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.      179.220-7.
ASTM B 557-84 Tension Testing Wrought and Cast    178.46.
 Aluminum and Magnesium-Alloy Products.
ASTM B 580-79 Standard Specification for Anodic   173.316; 173.318;
 Oxide Coatings on Aluminum, (Re-approved 2000).   178.338-17
ASTM D 56-97a  Standard Test Method for Flash     173.120
 Point by Tag Closed Tester.
ASTM D 93-97  Standard Test Methods for Flash     173.120
 Point by Pensky-Martens Closed Cup Tester.
ASTM D 445-88  Kinematic Viscosity of             171.8
 Transparent and Opaque Liquids (and the
 Calculation of Dynamic Viscosity).
ASTM D 1200-88  Viscosity by Ford Viscosity Cup.  171.8
ASTM D 1835-97  Standard Specification for        180.209
 Liquefied Petroleum (LP) Gases.
ASTM D 1838-64  Copper Strip Corrosion by         173.315
 Liquefied Petroleum (LP) Gases.
ASTM D 3278-96  Standard Test Methods for Flash   173.120
 Point of Liquids by Small Scale Closed-Cup
 Apparatus.
ASTM D 3828-97, Standard Test Methods for Flash   173.120.
 Point by Small Scale Closed Tester.
ASTM D 4206-96 Standard Test Method for           173.120.
 Sustained Burning of Liquid Mixtures Using the
 Small Scale Open-Cup Apparatus.
ASTM D 4359-90  Standard Test Method for          171.8
 Determining Whether a Material is a Liquid or a
 Solid.
ASTM E 8-99  Standard Test Methods for Tension    178.36; 178.37;
 Testing of Metallic Materials.                    178.38; 178.39;
                                                   178.44; 178.45;
                                                   178.50; 178.51;
                                                   178.53; 178.55;
                                                   178.56; 178.57;
                                                   178.58; 178.59;
                                                   178.60; 178.61;
                                                   178.68.
ASTM E 23-98  Standard Test Methods for Notched   178.57
 Bar Impact Testing of Metallic Materials.
ASTM E 112-88 Standard Test Methods for           178.44.
 Determining Average Grain Size.
ASTM E 112-96  Standard Test Methods for          178.274
 Determining Average Grain Size, 1996 Edition.
ASTM E 213-98  Standard Practice for Ultrasonic   178.45
 Examination of Metal Pipe and Tubing.
ASTM E 290-92  Standard Test Method for Semi-     178.46.
 Guided Bend Test for Ductility of Metallic
 Materials.
ASTM E 681-85  Standard Test Method for           173.115
 Concentration Limits of Flammability of
 Chemicals.
ASTM G 23-69  Standard Recommended Practice for   172.407; 172.519
 Operating Light-and-Water Exposure Apparatus
 (Carbon-Arc Type) for Exposure of Nonmetallic
 Materials.
ASTM G 26-70  Standard Recommended Practice for   172.407; 172.519
 Operating Light-and-Water Exposure Apparatus
 (Xenon-Arc-Type) for Exposure of Nonmetallic
 Materials.
ASTM G 31-72 (Reapproved 1995) Standard Practice  173.137
 for Laboratory Immersion Corrosion Testing of
 Metals.
American Water Works Association,
  1010 Vermont Avenue, NW., Suite 810,
   Washington, DC 20005
AWWA Standard C207-55, Steel Pipe Flanges, 1955.  178.360
American Welding Society,
  550 N. W. Le Jeune Road, Miami, Florida 33126
AWS Code B 3.0; Standard Qualification            178.356
 Procedure; 1972 (FRB 3.0-41, rev. May 1973).
AWS Code D 1.0; Code for Welding in Building      178.356
 Construction (FR D 1.0-66).
Association of American Railroads,
  American Railroads Building, 50 F Street, NW.,
   Washington, DC 20001
AAR Manual of Standards and Recommended           173.31.
 Practices, Section C--Part III, Specifications
 for Tank Cars, Specification M-1002, September
 1992.

[[Page 78]]

 
AAR Manual of Standards and Recommended           174.63; 179.6; 179.7;
 Practices, Section C--Part III, Specifications    179.12; 179.15;
 for Tank Cars, Specification M-1002, January      179.16; 179.20;
 1996.                                             179.22; 179.100;
                                                   179.101; 179.102;
                                                   179.103; 179.200;
                                                   179.201; 179.220;
                                                   179.300; 179.400;
                                                   180.509; 180.513;
                                                   180.515; 180.517.
AAR Manual of Standards and Recommended           174.55; 174.63.
 Practices, Section I, Specially Equipped
 Freight Car and Intermodal Equipment, 1988.
AAR Specifications for Design, Fabrication and    179.16.
 Construction of Freight Cars, Volume 1, 1988.
Chlorine Institute, Inc.,
  2001 L Street, NW., Suite 506, Washington, DC
   20036
Type 1\1/2\ JQ 225, Dwg, H51970, Revision D,      173.315
 April 5, 1989; or Type 1\1/2\ JQ 225, Dwg.
 H50155, Revision F, April 4, 1989.
Section 3, Pamphlet 57, Emergency Shut-Off        177.840
 Systems for Bulk Transfer of Chlorine, 3rd
 Edition, October 1997.
Standard Chlorine Angle Valve Assembly, Dwg. 104- 178.337-9
 8, July 1993.
Excess Flow Valve with Removable Seat, Dwg. 101-  178.337-8
 7, July 1993.
Excess Flow Valve with Removable Basket, Dwg.     178.337-8
 106-6, July 1993.
Standards for Housing and Manway Covers for       178.337-10
 Steel Cargo Tanks, Dwg. 137-3, September 1,
 1982.
Compressed Gas Association, Inc.,
  4221 Walney Road, 5th Floor, Chantilly,
   Virginia 20151
CGA Pamphlet C-3, Standards for Welding on Thin-  178.47; 178.50;
 Walled Steel Cylinders, 1994.                     178.51; 178.53;
                                                   178.56; 178.57;
                                                   178.58; 178.59;
                                                   178.60; 178.61;
                                                   178.65; 178.68;
                                                   180.211.
CGA Pamphlet C-5, Cylinder Service Life--         173.302a
 Seamless Steel High Pressure Cylinders, 1991.
CGA Pamphlet C-6, Standards for Visual            173.198; 180.205;
 Inspection of Steel Compressed Gas Cylinders,     180.209; 180.211;
 1993.                                             180.519.
CGA Pamphlet C-6.1, Standards for Visual          180.205; 180.209
 Inspection of High Pressure Aluminum Compressed
 Gas Cylinders, 1995.
CGA Pamphlet C-6.2, Guidelines for Visual         180.205
 Inspection and Requalification of Fiber
 Reinforced High Pressure Cylinders, 1988.
CGA Pamphlet C-6.3, Guidelines for Visual         180.205; 180.209
 Inspection and Requalification of Low Pressure
 Aluminum Compressed Gas Cylinders, 1991.
CGA Pamphlet C-7, A Guide for the Preparation of  172.400a
 Precautionary Markings for Compressed Gas
 Containers, appendix A, issued 1992 (6th
 Edition).
CGA Pamphlet C-8, Standard for Requalification    180.205
 of DOT-3HT Cylinder Design, 1985.
CGA Pamphlet C-11, Recommended Practices for      178.35.
 Inspection of Compressed Gas Cylinders at Time
 of Manufacture, 1993.
CGA Pamphlet C-12, Qualification Procedure for    173.301; 173.303;
 Acetylene Cylinder Design, 1994.                  178.59; 178.60.
CGA Pamphlet C-13, Guidelines for Periodic        173.303; 180.205;
 Visual Inspection and Requalification of          180.209.
 Acetylene Cylinders, 1992.
CGA Pamphlet C-14, Procedures for Fire Testing    173.301
 of DOT Cylinder Pressure Relief Device Systems,
 1979.
CGA Pamphlet G-2.2 Tentative Standard Method for  173.315
 Determining Minimum of 0.2% Water in Anhydrous
 Ammonia, 1985.
CGA Pamphlet G-4.1, Cleaning Equipment for        178.338
 Oxygen Service, 1985.
CGA Pamphlet P-20, Standard for the               173.115
 Classification of Toxic Gas Mixtures, 1995.
CGA Pamphlet S-1.1., Pressure Relief Device       173.301; 173.304a.
 Standards--Part 1--Cylinders for Compressed
 Gases, 1994 (with the exception of paragraph
 9.1.1.1).
CGA Pamphlet S-1.2, Safety Relief Device          173.315; 173.318
 Standards Part 2--Cargo and Portable Tanks for
 Compressed Gases, 1980.
CGA Pamphlet S-7, Method for Selecting Pressure   173.301
 Relief Devices for Compressed Gas Mixtures in
 Cylinders, 1996.
CGA Technical Bulletin TB-2, Guidelines for       180.413
 Inspection and Repair of MC-330 and MC-331
 Cargo Tanks, 1980.
Department of Defense (DOD),
  2461 Eisenhower Avenue, Alexandria, VA 22331
DOD TB 700-2; NAVSEAINST 8020.8B; AFTO 11A-1-47;  173.56
 DLAR 8220.1: Explosives Hazard Classification
 Procedures, January 1998.
Department of Energy (USDOE),
  100 Independence Avenue SW., Washington, DC
   20545
    USDOE publications available from:
     Superintendent of Documents, Government
     Printing Office (GPO) or The National
     Technical Information Service (NTIS).

[[Page 79]]

 
USDOE, CAPE-1662, Revision 1, and Supplement 1,   178.356; 178.358
 Civilian Application Program Engineering
 Drawings.
USDOE, Material and Equipment Specification No.   178.356; 178.358
 SP-9, Rev. 1, and Supplement--Fire Resistant
 Phenolic Foam.
USDOE, ORO 651--Uranium Hexafloride; A Manual of  173.417
 Good Practices, Revision 6, 1991 edition.
USDOE, KSS-471, November 30, 1986--Proposal for   178.358
 Modifications to U.S. Department of
 Transportation Specification 21PF-1, Fire and
 Shock Resistant Phenolic Foam--Insulated Metal
 Overpack.
General Services Administration,
  Specification Office, Rm. 6662, 7th and D
   Street, SW., Washington, DC 20407
Federal Specification RR-C-901C, Cylinders,       173.302; 173.336;
 Compressed Gas: High Pressure Steel DOT 3AA,      173.337
 and Aluminum Applications, January 15, 1981
 (Superseding RR-C-901B, August 1, 1967).
Health and Human Services
  Centers for Disease Control and Prevention,
   1600 Clifton Road N.E., Atlanta GA 30333
  Also available from: Superintendent of          173.134
   Documents, Government Printing Office (GPO),
   HHS Publication No. (CDC) 93-8395, Biosafety
   in Microbiological and Biomedical
   Laboratories, 3rd Edition, May 1993, Section
   II
Institute of Makers of Explosives,
  1120 19th Street, Suite 310, Washington, DC
   20036-3605
IME Safety Library Publication No. 22 (IME        173.63, 177.835
 Standard 22), Recommendation for the Safe
 Transportation of Detonators in a Vehicle with
 Certain Other Explosive Materials, May 1993.
International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA),
  P.O. Box 100, Wagramer Strasse 5, A-1400
   Vienna, Austria
 
  Also available from: Bernan Associates, 4611-F
   Assembly Drive, Lanham, MD 20706-4391, USA;
   or Renouf Publishing Company, Ltd., 812
   Proctor Avenue, Ogdensburg, New York 13669,
   USA
IAEA, Regulations for the Safe Transport of       171.12
 Radioactive Material, No. TS-R-1, 1996 Edition
 (Revised), (ST-1, Revised).
IAEA, Regulations for the Safe Transport of       171.12; 173.415;
 Radioactive Material, Safety Series No. 6, 1985   173.416; 173.417;
 Edition (as Amended 1990).                        173.473
International Civil Aviation Organization
 (ICAO),
  P.O. Box 400, Place de l'Aviation
   Internationale, 1000 Sherbrooke Street West,
   Montreal, Quebec, Canada H3A 2R2
 
  ICAO Technical Instructions available from:
   INTEREG, International Regulations,
   Publishing and Distribution Organization,
   P.O. Box 60105, Chicago, IL 60660
Technical Instructions for the Safe Transport of  171.11; 172.202;
 Dangerous Goods by Air (ICAO Technical            172.401; 172.512;
 Instructions), DOC 9284-AN/905, 2001-2002         172.602
 Edition.
International Maritime Organization (IMO),
  4 Albert Embankment, London, SE17SR, United
   Kingdom
 
  or New York Nautical Instrument & Service
   Corporation, 140 W. Broadway, New York, NY
   10013
International Maritime Dangerous Goods (IMDG)     171.12; 172.401;
 Code, 1994 Consolidated Edition, as amended by    172.407; 173.21,
 Amendment 29 (1998) (English edition).            176.2; 176.5; 176.11;
                                                   176.27; 176.30;
                                                   176.720
International Maritime Dangerous Goods (IMDG)     171.12; 172.401;
 Code, 2000 edition, including Amendment 30-00     172.502; 173.21;
 (English edition).                                176.2; 176.5; 176.11;
                                                   176.27; 176.30.
International Organization for Standardization,
  Case Postale 56, CH-1211, Geneve 20,
   Switzerland
  Also available from: ANSI 25 West 43rd Street,
   New York, NY 10036
ISO-82-1974(E)  Steels Tensile Testing..........  178.270-3
ISO 535-1991(E)  Paper and board--Determination   178.516
 of water absorptiveness--Cobb method.
ISO 1496-3  Series 1 freight containers--         178.274
 Specification and testing, Part 3: Tank
 containers for liquids, gases and pressurized
 dry bulk, March 1, 1995, Fourth Edition.
ISO 1496-3-1995(E) - Series 1 Freight Containers- 173.411
 -Specification and Testing--Part 3: Tank
 Containers for Liquids, Gases and Pressurized
 Dry Bulk.
ISO-2431-1984(E)  Standard Cup Method...........  173.121
ISO 2592-1973(E) Petroleum products--             173.120
 Determination of flash and fire points--
 Cleveland open cup method.
ISO 2919-1980(E) - Sealed radioactive sources--   173.469
 Classification.
ISO 3036-1975(E) Board--Determination of          178.708
 puncture resistance.
ISO 3574-1986(E) Cold-reduced carbon steel sheet  178.503
 of commercial and drawing qualities.
ISO 4126-1  Safety valves--Part 1:
    General Requirements, December 15, 1991,      178.274
     First Edition.
ISO/TR 4826-1979(E) - Sealed radioactive sources- 173.469
 -Leak test methods.
ISO 6892  Metallic materials--Tensile testing,    178.274
 July 15, 1984, First Edition.
ISO 8115 Cotton bales--Dimensions and density,    172.102
 1986 Edition.
ISO 9328-1--1991(E) Steel plates and strips for   173.137
 pressure purposes--Technical delivery
 conditions--Part 1: General requirements.

[[Page 80]]

 
National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel
 Inspectors,
  1055 Crupper Avenue, Columbus, Ohio 43229
National Board Inspection Code, A Manual for      180.413
 Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors, NB-23,
 1992 Edition.
National Fire Protection Association,
  Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269
NFPA Pamphlet No. 58--Standard for the Storage    173.315
 and Handling of Liquefied Petroleum Gases, 1979.
National Institute of Standards and Technology,
  Department of Commerce, 5285 Port Royal Road,
   Springfield, VA 22151
USDC, NBS Handbook H-28 (1957), 1957 Handbook of  178.45, 178.46
 Screw-Thread Standards for Federal Services,
 Part II, December 1966 Edition.
National Motor Freight Traffic Association,
 Inc.,
  Agent 1616 P Street, NW., Washington, DC 20036
National Motor Freight Classification NMF 100-I,  177.841
 1982.
Organization for Economic Cooperation and
 Development (OECD)
  OECD Publications and Information Center, 2001
   L Street, Suite 700, Washington, DC 20036
OECD Guideline for Testing of Chemicals, No.404   173.137
 ``Acute Dermal Irritation/Corrosion'', 1992.
Transport Canada,
  TDG Canadian Government Publishing Center,
   Supply and Services, Canada, Ottawa, Ontario,
   Canada K1A 059.
Transportation of Dangerous Goods Regulations, 1  171.12a; 172.401;
 July 1985, SOR/85/77, incorporating the           172.502.
 following Registration Numbers: SOR/85-314, SOR/
 85-585, SOR/85-609, SOR/86-526, SOR/88-635, SOR/
 87-335, SOR/87-186, SOR/89-39, SOR/89-294, SOR/
 90-847, SOR/91-711, SOR/91-712, SOR/92-447, SOR/
 92-600, SOR/93-203, SOR/93-274, SOR/93-525, SOR/
 94-146 and SOR/94-264 (English edition), SOR/95-
 241, and SOR/95-547.
Truck Trailer Manufacturers Association,
  1020 Princess Street, Alexandria, Virginia
   22314
TTMA RP No. 81, Performance of Spring Loaded      178.345-10
 Pressure Relief Valves on MC 306, MC 307, and
 MC 312 Tanks, May 24, 1989 Edition.
TTMA RP No. 61-94, Performance of Manhole and/or  180.405
 Fill Opening Assemblies on MC 306 and DOT 406
 Cargo Tanks, December 28, 1994 Edition..
TTMA TB No. 107, Procedure for Testing            180.405
 Inservice, Unmarked, and/or Uncertified MC 306
 Type Cargo Tank Manhole Covers, May 24, 1989
 Edition.
United Nations,
  United Nations Sales Section, New York, NY
   10017
UN Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous  172.401; 172.407;
 Goods, Eleventh Revised Edition (1999).           172.502; 173.24.
UN Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous  172.102; 173.21;
 Goods, Manual of Tests and Criteria, Third        173.56; 173.57;
 Revised Edition (1999).                           173.124; 173.128;
                                                   173.166; 173.185.
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (b) List of informational materials not requiring incorporation by 
reference. The materials listed in this paragraph do not require 
approval for incorporation by reference and are included for 
informational purposes. These materials may be used as noted in those 
sections in which the material is referenced.

------------------------------------------------------------------------
           Source and name of material               49 CFR reference
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Association of American Railroads,
  American Railroads Building, 50 F Street, NW.,
   Washington, DC 20001
AAR Catalog Nos. SE60CHT; SE60CC; SE60CHTE;       179.14
 SE60CE; SE60DC; SE60DE.
AAR Catalog Nos. SE67CC; SE67CE; SE67BHT;         179.14
 SE67BC; SE67BHTE; SE67BE.
AAR Catalog Nos. SE68BHT; SE68BC; SE68BHTE;       179.14
 SE68BE.
AAR Catalog Nos. SE69AHTE; SE69AE...............  179.14
AAR Catalog Nos. SF70CHT; SF70CC; SF70CHTE;       179.14
 SF70CE.
AAR Catalog Nos. SF73AC; SF73AE; SF73AHT;         179.14
 SF73AHTE.
AAR Catalog Nos. SF79CHT; SF79CC; SF79CHTE;       179.14
 SF79CE.
Bureau of Explosives,
  Hazardous Materials Systems (BOE), Association
   of American Railroads, American Railroads
   Building, 50 F Street, NW., Washington, DC
   20001
Fetterley's Formula (The Determination of the     173.315
 Relief Dimensions for Safety Valves on
 Containers in which Liquefied gas is charged
 and when the exterior surface of the container
 is exposed to a temperature of 1,200  deg.F.).
Pamphlet 6, Illustrating Methods for Loading and  174.55; 174.101;
 Bracing Carload and Less-Than-Carload Shipments   174.112; 174.115;
 of Explosives and Other Dangerous Articles,       174.290
 1962.
Pamphlet 6A (includes appendix No. 1, October     174.101; 174.290
 1944 and appendix 2, December 1945),
 Illustrating Methods for Loading and Bracing
 Carload and Less-Than-Carload Shipments of
 Loaded Projectiles, Loaded Bombs, etc., 1943.

[[Page 81]]

 
Pamphlet 6C, Illustrating Methods for Loading     174.55; 174.63;
 and Bracing Trailers and Less-Than-Trailer        174.101; 174.112;
 Shipments of Explosives and Other Dangerous       174.115
 Articles Via Trailer-on-Flatcar (TOFC) or
 Container-on-Flatcar (COFC), 1985.
Emergency Handling of Hazardous Materials in      171.7
 Surface Transportation, 1989.
National Association of Corrosion Engineers,
  1440 South Creek, Houston, Texas 77084
NACE Standard TM-01-69, Test Method Laboratory    173.136
 Corrosion Testing of Metals for the Process
 Industries, 1969.
Society of Plastics Industries, Inc.,
  Organic Peroxide Producers Safety Division,
   1275 K Street, NW., Suite 400, Washington, DC
   20005
Self Accelerating Decomposition Temperature       173.21
 Test, 1972.
------------------------------------------------------------------------


[Amdt. 171-111, 55 FR 52466, Dec. 21, 1990]

    Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting Sec. 171.7, 
see the List of CFR Sections Affected which appears in the Finding Aids 
section of the printed volume and on GPO Access.

    Effective Date Note: At 67 FR 53132, Aug. 14, 2002, Sec. 171.7 was 
amended in the table in paragraph (a)(3) by adding two new entries in 
alphanumeric sequence under the American Society for Testing and 
Materials and in the table in paragraph (b) by adding three new entries 
in alphabetical order, effective Oct. 1, 2002. At 67 FR 54967, Aug. 27, 
2002, the effective date was corrected to Feb. 14, 2003. For the 
convenience of the user, the added text is set forth as follows:

Sec. 171.7--  Reference material.

    (a) * * *
    (3) Table of material incorporated by reference.

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                   Source and name of material                                    49 CFR reference
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
*                  *                  *                  *                  *                  *
                                                        *
American Society for Testing and Materials * * *
 
*                  *                  *                  *                  *                  *
                                                        *
ASTM D 1709-01 Standard Test Methods for Impact Resistance of                                            173.197
 Plastic Film by the Free-Falling Dart Method....................
 
*                  *                  *                  *                  *                  *
                                                        *
ASTM D 1922-00a Standard Test Method for Propagation Tear                                                173.197
 Resistance of Plastic Film and Thin Sheeting by Pendulum Method.
 
*                  *                  *                  *                  *                  *
                                                        *
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                * * * * *

(b) List of informational materials not requiring incorporation by 
reference. * * *

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                   Source and name of material                                    49 CFR reference
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
American Biological Safety Association 1202 Allanson Road,
 Mundelein, IL 60060
    Risk Group Classification for Infectious Agents, 1998........                                        173.134
 
*                  *                  *                  *                  *                  *
                                                        *
Centers for Disease Control and Prevention 1600 Clifton Road,
 Atlanta, GA 30333
    Biosafety in Microbiological and Biomedical Laboratories,                                            173.134
     Fourth Edition, April 1999..................................
 
*                  *                  *                  *                  *                  *
                                                        *
National Institutes of Health Bethesda, MD 20892
    NIH Guidelines for Research Involving Recombinant DNA                                                173.134
     Molecules (NIH Guidelines), January 2001, Appendix B........
 
*                  *                  *                  *                  *                  *
                                                        *
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


[[Page 82]]



Sec. 171.8  Definitions and abbreviations.

    In this subchapter,
    Aerosol means any non-refillable receptacle containing a gas 
compressed, liquefied or dissolved under pressure, the sole purpose of 
which is to expel a nonpoisonous (other than a Division 6.1 Packing 
Group III material) liquid, paste, or powder and fitted with a self-
closing release device allowing the contents to be ejected by the gas.
    Agricultural product means a hazardous material, other than a 
hazardous waste, whose end use directly supports the production of an 
agricultural commodity including, but not limited to a fertilizer, 
pesticide, soil amendment or fuel. An agricultural product is limited to 
a material in Class 3, 8 or 9, Division 2.1, 2.2, 5.1, or 6.1, or an 
ORM-D material.
    Approval means a written authorization, including a competent 
authority approval, from the Associate Administrator or other designated 
Department official, to perform a function for which prior authorization 
by the Associate Administrator is required under subchapter C of this 
chapter (49 CFR parts 171 through 180.)
    Approved means approval issued or recognized by the Department 
unless otherwise specifically indicated in this subchapter.
    Asphyxiant gas means a gas which dilutes or replaces oxygen normally 
in the atmosphere.
    Associate Administrator means the Associate Administrator for 
Hazardous Materials Safety, Research and Special Programs 
Administration.
    Atmospheric gases means air, nitrogen, oxygen, argon, krypton, neon 
and xenon.
    Authorized Inspection Agency means: (1) A jurisdiction which has 
adopted and administers one or more sections of the ASME Boiler and 
Pressure Vessel Code as a legal requirement and has a representative 
serving as a member of the ASME Conference Committee; or (2) an 
insurance company which has been licensed or registered by the 
appropriate authority of a State of the United States or a Province of 
Canada to underwrite boiler and pressure vessel insurance in such State 
or Province.
    Authorized Inspector means an Inspector who is currently 
commissioned by the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel 
Inspectors and employed as an Inspector by an Authorized Inspection 
Agency.
    Bag means a flexible packaging made of paper, plastic film, 
textiles, woven material or other similar materials.
    Bar means 1 BAR = 100 kPa (14.5 psi).
    Barge means a non-selfpropelled vessel.
    Bottle means an inner packaging having a neck of relatively smaller 
cross section than the body and an opening capable of holding a closure 
for retention of the contents.
    Bottom shell means that portion of a tank car tank surface, 
excluding the head ends of the tank car tank, that lies within two feet, 
measured circumferentially, of the bottom longitudinal center line of 
the tank car tank.
    Box means a packaging with complete rectangular or polygonal faces, 
made of metal, wood, plywood, reconstituted wood, fiberboard, plastic, 
or other suitable material. Holes appropriate to the size and use of the 
packaging, for purposes such as ease of handling or opening, or to meet 
classification requirements, are permitted as long as they do not 
compromise the integrity of the packaging during transportation, and are 
not otherwise prohibited in this subchapter.
    Break-bulk means packages of hazardous materials that are handled 
individually, palletized, or unitized for purposes of transportation as 
opposed to bulk and containerized freight.
    Btu means British thermal unit.
    Bulk packaging means a packaging, other than a vessel or a barge, 
including a transport vehicle or freight container, in which hazardous 
materials are loaded with no intermediate form of containment and which 
has:
    (1) A maximum capacity greater than 450 L (119 gallons) as a 
receptacle for a liquid;
    (2) A maximum net mass greater than 400 kg (882 pounds) and a 
maximum capacity greater than 450 L (119 gallons) as a receptacle for a 
solid; or
    (3) A water capacity greater than 454 kg (1000 pounds) as a 
receptacle for a gas as defined in Sec. 173.115 of this subchapter.

[[Page 83]]

    Bureau of Explosives means the Bureau of Explosives (B of E) of the 
Association of American Railroads.
    C means Celsius or Centigrade.
    Captain of the Port (COTP) means the officer of the Coast Guard, 
under the command of a District Commander, so designated by the 
Commandant for the purpose of giving immediate direction to Coast Guard 
law enforcement activities within an assigned area. As used in this 
subchapter, the term Captain of the Port includes an authorized 
representative of the Captain of the Port.
    Carfloat means a vessel that operates on a short run on an irregular 
basis and serves one or more points in a port area as an extension of a 
rail line or highway over water, and does not operate in ocean, 
coastwise, or ferry service.
    Cargo aircraft only means an aircraft that is used to transport 
cargo and is not engaged in carrying passengers. For purposes of this 
subchapter, the terms cargo aircraft only, cargo-only aircraft and cargo 
aircraft have the same meaning.
    Cargo tank means a bulk packaging which:
    (1) Is a tank intended primarily for the carriage of liquids or 
gases and includes appurtenances, reinforcements, fittings, and closures 
(for tank, see 49 CFR 178.345-1(c), 178.337-1, or 178.338-1, as 
applicable);
    (2) Is permanently attached to or forms a part of a motor vehicle, 
or is not permanently attached to a motor vehicle but which, by reason 
of its size, construction or attachment to a motor vehicle is loaded or 
unloaded without being removed from the motor vehicle; and
    (3) Is not fabricated under a specification for cylinders, portable 
tanks, tank cars, or multi-unit tank car tanks.
    Cargo tank motor vehicle means a motor vehicle with one or more 
cargo tanks permanently attached to or forming an integral part of the 
motor vehicle.
    Cargo vessel means: (1) Any vessel other than a passenger vessel; 
and
    (2) Any ferry being operated under authority of a change of 
character certificate issued by a Coast Guard Officer-in-Charge, Marine 
Inspection.
    Carrier means a person engaged in the transportation of passengers 
or property by:
    (1) Land or water, as a common, contract, or private carrier, or
    (2) Civil aircraft.
    CC means closed-cup.
    Character of vessel means the type of service in which the vessel is 
engaged at the time of carriage of a hazardous material.
    Class means hazard class. See hazard class.
    Class 1. See Sec. 173.50 of this subchapter.
    Class 2. See Sec. 173.115 of this subchapter.
    Class 3. See Sec. 173.120 of this subchapter.
    Class 4. See Sec. 173.124 of this subchapter.
    Class 5. See Sec. 173.128 of this subchapter.
    Class 6. See Sec. 173.132 of this subchapter.
    Class 7. See Sec. 173.403 of this subchapter.
    Class 8. See Sec. 173.136 of this subchapter.
    Class 9. See Sec. 173.140 of this subchapter.
    Closure means a device which closes an opening in a receptacle.
    COFC means container-on-flat-car.
    Combination packaging means a combination of packaging, for 
transport purposes, consisting of one or more inner packagings secured 
in a non-bulk outer packaging. It does not include a composite 
packaging.
    Combustible liquid. See Sec. 173.120 of this subchapter.
    Compatibility group letter means a designated alphabetical letter 
used to categorize different types of explosive substances and articles 
for purposes of stowage and segregation. See Sec. 173.52 of this 
subchapter.
    Competent Authority means a national agency responsible under its 
national law for the control or regulation of a particular aspect of the 
transportation of hazardous materials (dangerous goods). The term 
Appropriate Authority, as used in the ICAO Technical Instructions (see 
Sec. 171.7), has the same meaning as Competent Authority. For purposes 
of this subchapter, the Associate Administrator is the Competent 
Authority for the United States.

[[Page 84]]

    Composite packaging means a packaging consisting of an outer 
packaging and an inner receptacle, so constructed that the inner 
receptacle and the outer packaging form an integral packaging. Once 
assembled it remains thereafter an integrated single unit; it is filled, 
stored, shipped and emptied as such.
    Compressed gas. See Sec. 173.115 of this subchapter.
    Consumer commodity means a material that is packaged and distributed 
in a form intended or suitable for sale through retail sales agencies or 
instrumentalities for consumption by individuals for purposes of 
personal care or household use. This term also includes drugs and 
medicines.
    Containership means a cargo vessel designed and constructed to 
transport, within specifically designed cells, portable tanks and 
freight containers which are lifted on and off with their contents 
intact.
    Corrosive material. See Sec. 173.136 of this subchapter.
    Crate means an outer packaging with incomplete surfaces.
    Crewmember means a person assigned to perform duty in an aircraft 
during flight time.
    Cryogenic liquid. See Sec. 173.115(g) of this subchapter.
    Cylinder means a pressure vessel designed for pressures higher than 
40 psia and having a circular cross section. It does not include a 
portable tank, multi-unit tank car tank, cargo tank, or tank car.
    Dangerous when wet material. See Sec. 173.124 of this subchapter.
    Design Certifying Engineer means a person registered with the 
Department in accordance with subpart F of part 107 of this chapter who 
has the knowledge and ability to perform stress analysis of pressure 
vessels and to otherwise determine whether a cargo tank design and 
construction meets the applicable DOT specification. In addition, Design 
Certifying Engineer means a person who meets, at a minimum, any one of 
the following:
    (1) Has an engineering degree and one year of work experience in 
cargo tank structural or mechanical design.
    (2) Is currently registered as a professional engineer by the 
appropriate authority of a State of the United States or a Province of 
Canada.
    (3) Has at least three years experience in performing the duties of 
a Design Certifying Engineer by September 1, 1991, and was registered 
with the Department by December 31, 1995.
    Designated facility means a hazardous waste treatment, storage, or 
disposal facility that has been designated on the manifest by the 
generator.
    District Commander means the District Commander of the Coast Guard, 
or his authorized representative, who has jurisdiction in the particular 
geographical area.
    Division means a subdivision of a hazard class.
    DOD means the U.S. Department of Defense.
    Domestic transportation means transportation between places within 
the United States other than through a foreign country.
    DOT or Department means U.S. Department of Transportation.
    Drum means a flat-ended or convex-ended cylindrical packaging made 
of metal, fiberboard, plastic, plywood, or other suitable materials. 
This definition also includes packagings of other shapes made of metal 
or plastic (e.g., round taper-necked packagings or pail-shaped 
packagings) but does not include cylinders, jerricans, wooden barrels or 
bulk packagings.
    Elevated temperature material means a material which, when offered 
for transportation or transported in a bulk packaging:
    (1) Is in a liquid phase and at a temperature at or above 100  deg.C 
(212  deg.F);
    (2) Is in a liquid phase with a flash point at or above 37.8  deg.C 
(100  deg.F) that is intentionally heated and offered for transportation 
or transported at or above its flash point; or
    (3) Is in a solid phase and at a temperature at or above 240  deg.C 
(464  deg.F).
    Engine means a locomotive propelled by any form of energy and used 
by a railroad.
    EPA means U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.
    Etiologic agent. See Sec. 173.134 of this subchapter.
    EX number means a number preceded by the prefix ``EX'', assigned by 
the Associate Administrator, to an item that

[[Page 85]]

has been evaluated under the provisions of Sec. 173.56 of this 
subchapter.
    Exemption means a document issued by the Associate Administrator 
under the authority of 49 U.S.C. 5117. The document permits a person to 
perform a function that is not otherwise permitted under subchapter A or 
C of this chapter, or other regulations issued under 49 U.S.C. 5101 
through 5127 (e.g., Federal Motor Carrier Safety routing).
    Explosive. See Sec. 173.50 of this subchapter.
    F means degree Fahrenheit.
    Farmer means a person engaged in the production or raising of crops, 
poultry, or livestock.
    Federal hazardous material transportation law means 49 U.S.C. 5101 
et seq.
    Ferry vessel means a vessel which is limited in its use to the 
carriage of deck passengers or vehicles or both, operates on a short run 
on a frequent schedule between two points over the most direct water 
route, other than in ocean or coastwise service, and is offered as a 
public service of a type normally attributed to a bridge or tunnel.
    Filling density has the following meanings:
    (1) For compressed gases in cylinders, see Sec. 173.304a(a)(2) table 
note 1.
    (2) For compressed gases in tank cars, see Sec. 173.314(c) table 
note 1.
    (3) For compressed gases in cargo tanks and portable tanks, see 
Sec. 173.315(a) table note 1.
    (4) For cryogenic liquids in cylinders, except hydrogen, see 
Sec. 173.316(c)(1).
    (5) For hydrogen, cryogenic liquid in cylinders, see 
Sec. 173.316(c)(3) table note 1.
    (6) For cryogenic liquids in cargo tanks, see Sec. 173.318(f)(1).
    (7) For cryogenic liquids in tank cars, see Sec. 173.319(d)(1).
    Flammable gas. See Sec. 173.115 of this subchapter.
    Flammable liquid. See Sec. 173.120 of this subchapter.
    Flammable solid. See Sec. 173.124 of this subchapter.
    Flash point. See Sec. 173.120 of this subchapter.
    Freight container means a reusable container having a volume of 64 
cubic feet or more, designed and constructed to permit being lifted with 
its contents intact and intended primarily for containment of packages 
(in unit form) during transportation.
    Fuel tank means a tank other than a cargo tank, used to transport 
flammable or combustible liquid, or compressed gas for the purpose of 
supplying fuel for propulsion of the transport vehicle to which it is 
attached, or for the operation of other equipment on the transport 
vehicle.
    Fumigated lading. See Secs. 172.302(g) and 173.9.
    Gas means a material which has a vapor pressure greater than 300 kPa 
(43.5 psia) at 50  deg.C (122  deg.F) or is completely gaseous at 20 
deg.C (68  deg.F) at a standard pressure of 101.3 kPa (14.7 psia).
    Gross weight or Gross mass means the weight of a packaging plus the 
weight of its contents.
    Hazard class means the category of hazard assigned to a hazardous 
material under the definitional criteria of part 173 of this subchapter 
and the provisions of the Sec. 172.101 table. A material may meet the 
defining criteria for more than one hazard class but is assigned to only 
one hazard class.
    Hazard zone means one of four levels of hazard (Hazard Zones A 
through D) assigned to gases, as specified in Sec. 173.116(a) of this 
subchapter, and one of two levels of hazards (Hazard Zones A and B) 
assigned to liquids that are poisonous by inhalation, as specified in 
Sec. 173.133(a) of this subchapter. A hazard zone is based on the LC50 
value for acute inhalation toxicity of gases and vapors, as specified in 
Sec. 173.133(a).
    Hazardous material means a substance or material that the Secretary 
of Transportation has determined is capable of posing an unreasonable 
risk to health, safety, and property when transported in commerce, and 
has designated as hazardous under section 5103 of Federal hazardous 
materials transportation law (49 U.S.C. 5103). The term includes 
hazardous substances, hazardous wastes, marine pollutants, elevated 
temperature materials, materials designated as hazardous in the 
Hazardous Materials Table (see 49 CFR 172.101), and materials that meet 
the defining criteria for hazard classes and divisions in part 173 of 
subchapter C of this chapter.

[[Page 86]]

    Hazardous substance for the purposes of this subchapter, means a 
material, including its mixtures and solutions, that--
    (1) Is listed in the appendix A to Sec. 172.101 of this subchapter;
    (2) Is in a quantity, in one package, which equals or exceeds the 
reportable quantity (RQ) listed in the appendix A to Sec. 172.101 of 
this subchapter; and
    (3) When in a mixture or solution--
    (i) For radionuclides, conforms to paragraph 7 of the appendix A to 
Sec. 172.101.
    (ii) For other than radionuclides, is in a concentration by weight 
which equals or exceeds the concentration corresponding to the RQ of the 
material, as shown in the following table:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                      Concentration by
                                                           weight
               RQ pounds (kilograms)               ---------------------
                                                     Percent      PPM
------------------------------------------------------------------------
5000 (2270).......................................         10    100,000
1000 (454)........................................          2     20,000
100 (45.4)........................................        0.2      2,000
10 (4.54).........................................       0.02        200
1 (0.454).........................................      0.002         20
------------------------------------------------------------------------


    The term does not include petroleum, including crude oil or any 
fraction thereof which is not otherwise specifically listed or 
designated as a hazardous substance in appendix A to Sec. 172.101 of 
this subchapter, and the term does not include natural gas, natural gas 
liquids, liquefied natural gas, or synthetic gas usable for fuel (or 
mixtures of natural gas and such synthetic gas).
    Hazardous waste, for the purposes of this chapter, means any 
material that is subject to the Hazardous Waste Manifest Requirements of 
the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency specified in 40 CFR part 262.
    Hazmat employee means a person who is employed by a hazmat employer 
and who in the course of employment directly affects hazardous materials 
transportation safety. This term includes an owner-operator of a motor 
vehicle which transports hazardous materials in commerce. This term 
includes an individual, including a self-employed individual, employed 
by a hazmat employer who, during the course of employment:
    (1) Loads, unloads, or handles hazardous materials;
    (2) Manufactures, tests, reconditions, repairs, modifies, marks, or 
otherwise represents containers, drums, or packagings as qualified for 
use in the transportation of hazardous materials;
    (3) Prepares hazardous materials for transportation;
    (4) Is responsible for safety of transporting hazardous materials; 
or
    (5) Operates a vehicle used to transport hazardous materials.
    Hazmat employer means a person who uses one or more of its employees 
in connection with: transporting hazardous materials in commerce; 
causing hazardous materials to be transported or shipped in commerce; or 
representing, marking, certifying, selling, offering, manufacturing, 
reconditioning, testing, repairing, or modifying containers, drums, or 
packagings as qualified for use in the transportation of hazardous 
materials. This term includes an owner-operator of a motor vehicle which 
transports hazardous materials in commerce. This term also includes any 
department, agency, or instrumentality of the United States, a State, a 
political subdivision of a State, or an Indian tribe engaged in an 
activity described in the first sentence of this definition.
    Hermetically sealed means closed by fusion, gasketing, crimping, or 
equivalent means so that no gas or vapor can enter or escape.
    IAEA means International Atomic Energy Agency.
    IATA means International Air Transport Association.
    ICAO means International Civil Aviation Organization.
    IMO means International Maritime Organization.
    Infectious substance (etiologic agent). See Sec. 173.134 of this 
subchapter.
    Inner packaging means a packaging for which an outer packaging is 
required for transport. It does not include the inner receptacle of a 
composite packaging.
    Inner receptacle means a receptacle which requires an outer 
packaging in order to perform its containment function. The inner 
receptacle may be an inner packaging of a combination packaging or the 
inner receptacle of a composite packaging.

[[Page 87]]

    Intermediate bulk container or IBC means a rigid or flexible 
portable packaging, other than a cylinder or portable tank, which is 
designed for mechanical handling. Standards for IBCs manufactured in the 
United States are set forth in subparts N and O of part 178 of this 
subchapter.
    Intermediate packaging means a packaging which encloses an inner 
packaging or article and is itself enclosed in an outer packaging.
    Intermodal container means a freight container designed and 
constructed to permit it to be used interchangeably in two or more modes 
of transport.
    Intermodal portable tank or IM portable tank means a specific class 
of portable tanks designed primarily for international intermodal use.
    International transportation means transportation--
    (1) Between any place in the United States and any place in a 
foreign country;
    (2) Between places in the United States through a foreign country; 
or
    (3) Between places in one or more foreign countries through the 
United States.
    Irritating material. See Sec. 173.132(a)(2) of this subchapter.
    Jerrican means a metal or plastic packaging of rectangular or 
polygonal cross-section.
    Large packaging means a packaging that--
    (1) Consists of an outer packaging which contains articles or inner 
packagings;
    (2) Is designated for mechanical handling;
    (3) Exceeds 400 kg net mass or 450 liters (118.9 gallons) capacity;
    (4) Has a volume of not more than 3 m\3\ (see Sec. 178.801(i) of 
this subchapter); and
    (5) Conforms to the requirements for the construction, testing and 
marking of large packagings as specified in the UN Recommendations.
    Limited quantity, when specified as such in a section applicable to 
a particular material, means the maximum amount of a hazardous material 
for which there is a specific labeling or packaging exception.
    Liquid means a material, other than an elevated temperature 
material, with a melting point or initial melting point of 20  deg.C (68 
 deg.F) or lower at a standard pressure of 101.3 kPa (14.7 psia). A 
viscous material for which a specific melting point cannot be determined 
must be subjected to the procedures specified in ASTM D 4359 ``Standard 
Test Method for Determining Whether a Material is Liquid or Solid'' (see 
Sec. 171.7).
    Liquid phase means a material that meets the definition of liquid 
when evaluated at the higher of the temperature at which it is offered 
for transportation or at which it is transported, not at the 37.8  deg.C 
(100  deg.F) temperature specified in ASTM D 4359-84.
    Magazine vessel means a vessel used for the receiving, storing, or 
dispensing of explosives.
    Magnetic material. See Sec. 173.21(d) of this subchapter.
    Marine pollutant, means a material which is listed in appendix B to 
Sec. 172.101 of this subchapter (also see Sec. 171.4) and, when in a 
solution or mixture of one or more marine pollutants, is packaged in a 
concentration which equals or exceeds:
    (1) Ten percent by weight of the solution or mixture for materials 
listed in the appendix; or
    (2) One percent by weight of the solution or mixture for materials 
that are identified as severe marine pollutants in the appendix.
    Marking means a descriptive name, identification number, 
instructions, cautions, weight, specification, or UN marks, or 
combinations thereof, required by this subchapter on outer packagings of 
hazardous materials.
    Material of trade means a hazardous material, other than a hazardous 
waste, that is carried on a motor vehicle--
    (1) For the purpose of protecting the health and safety of the motor 
vehicle operator or passengers;
    (2) For the purpose of supporting the operation or maintenance of a 
motor vehicle (including its auxiliary equipment); or
    (3) By a private motor carrier (including vehicles operated by a 
rail carrier) in direct support of a principal business that is other 
than transportation by motor vehicle.

[[Page 88]]

    Material poisonous by inhalation means:
    (1) A gas meeting the defining criteria in Sec. 173.115(c) of this 
subchapter and assigned to Hazard Zone A, B, C, or D in accordance with 
Sec. 173.116(a) of this subchapter;
    (2) A liquid (other than as a mist) meeting the defining criteria in 
Sec. 173.132(a)(1)(iii) of this subchapter and assigned to Hazard Zone A 
or B in accordance with Sec. 173.133(a) of this subchapter; or
    (3) Any material identified as an inhalation hazard by a special 
provision in column 7 of the Sec. 172.101 table.
    MAWP means maxumum allowable working pressure.
    Maximum capacity means the maximum inner volume of receptacles or 
packagings.
    Maximum net mass means the allowable maximum net mass of contents in 
a single packaging, or as used in subpart M of part 178 of this 
subchapter, the maximum combined mass of inner packaging, and the 
contents thereof.
    Metered delivery service means a cargo tank unloading operation 
conducted at a metered flow rate of 378.5 L (100 gallons) per minute or 
less through an attached delivery hose with a nominal inside diameter of 
3.175 cm (1\1/4\ inches) or less.
    Miscellaneous hazardous material. See Sec. 173.140 of this 
subchapter.
    Mixture means a material composed of more than one chemical compound 
or element.
    Mode means any of the following transportation methods; rail, 
highway, air, or water.
    Motor vehicle includes a vehicle, machine, tractor, trailer, or 
semitrailer, or any combination thereof, propelled or drawn by 
mechanical power and used upon the highways in the transportation of 
passengers or property. It does not include a vehicle, locomotive, or 
car operated exclusively on a rail or rails, or a trolley bus operated 
by electric power derived from a fixed overhead wire, furnishing local 
passenger transportation similar to street-railway service.
    Name of contents means the proper shipping name as specified in 
Sec. 172.101 of this subchapter.
    Navigable waters means, for the purposes of this subchapter, waters 
of the United States, including the territorial seas.
    Non-bulk packaging means a packaging which has:
    (1) A maximum capacity of 450 L (119 gallons) or less as a 
receptacle for a liquid;
    (2) A maximum net mass of 400 kg (882 pounds) or less and a maximum 
capacity of 450 L (119 gallons) or less as a receptacle for a solid; or
    (3) A water capacity of 454 kg (1000 pounds) or less as a receptacle 
for a gas as defined in Sec. 173.115 of this subchapter.
    Nonflammable gas. See Sec. 173.115 of this subchapter.
    N.O.S. means not otherwise specified.
    N.O.S. description means a shipping description from the 
Sec. 172.101 table which includes the abbreviation n.o.s.
    NPT means an American Standard taper pipe thread conforming to 
requirements of Federal Standard H28, part II, section VII. See 
Sec. 171.7.
    NRC (non-reusable container) means a packaging (container) whose 
reuse is restricted in accordance with the provisions of Sec. 173.28 of 
this subchapter.
    Occupied caboose means a rail car being used to transport non-
passenger personnel.
    Officer in Charge, Marine Inspection means a person from the 
civilian or military branch of the Coast Guard designated as such by the 
Commandant and who under the supervision and direction of the Coast 
Guard District Commander is in charge of a designated inspection zone 
for the performance of duties with respect to the enforcement and 
administration of title 52, Revised Statutes, acts amendatory thereof or 
supplemental thereto, rules and regulations thereunder, and the 
inspection required thereby.
    Offshore supply vessel means a cargo vessel of less than 500 gross 
tons that regularly transports goods, supplies or equipment in support 
of exploration or production of offshore mineral or energy resources.
    Operator means a person who controls the use of an aircraft, vessel, 
or vehicle.
    Organic peroxide. See Sec. 173.128 of this subchapter.

[[Page 89]]

    ORM means other regulated material. See Sec. 173.144 of this 
subchapter.
    Outage or ullage means the amount by which a packaging falls short 
of being liquid full, usually expressed in percent by volume.
    Outer packaging means the outermost enclosure of a composite or 
combination packaging together with any absorbent materials, cushioning 
and any other components necessary to contain and protect inner 
receptacles or inner packagings.
    Overpack, except as provided in subpart K of part 178 of this 
subchapter, means an enclosure that is used by a single consignor to 
provide protection or convenience in handling of a package or to 
consolidate two or more packages. Overpack does not include a transport 
vehicle, freight container, or aircraft unit load device. Examples of 
overpacks are one or more packages:
    (1) Placed or stacked onto a load board such as a pallet and secured 
by strapping, shrink wrapping, stretch wrapping, or other suitable 
means; or
    (2) Placed in a protective outer packaging such as a box or crate.
    Oxidizer. See Sec. 173.127 of this subchapter.
    Oxidizing gas means a gas which may, generally by providing oxygen, 
cause or contribute to the combustion of other material more than air 
does.
    Oxygen generator (chemical) means a device containing chemicals that 
upon activation release oxygen as a product of chemical reaction.
    Package or Outside Package means a packaging plus its contents. For 
radioactive materials, see Sec. 173.403 of this subchapter.
    Packaging means a receptacle and any other components or materials 
necessary for the receptacle to perform its containment function in 
conformance with the minimum packing requirements of this subchapter. 
For radioactive materials packaging, see Sec. 173.403 of this 
subchapter.
    Packing group means a grouping according to the degree of danger 
presented by hazardous materials. Packing Group I indicates great 
danger; Packing Group II, medium danger; Packing Group III, minor 
danger. See Sec. 172.101(f) of this subchapter.
    Passenger (With respect to vessels and for the purposes of part 176 
only) means a person being carried on a vessel other than:
    (1) The owner or his representative;
    (2) The operator;
    (3) A bona fide member of the crew engaged in the business of the 
vessel who has contributed no consideration for his carriage and who is 
paid for his services; or
    (4) A guest who has not contributed any consideration directly or 
indirectly for his carriage.
    Passenger-carrying aircraft means an aircraft that carries any 
person other than a crewmember, company employee, an authorized 
representative of the United States, or a person accompanying the 
shipment.
    Passenger vessel means--
    (1) A vessel subject to any of the requirements of the International 
Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1974, which carries more than 
12 passengers;
    (2) A cargo vessel documented under the laws of the United States 
and not subject to that Convention, which carries more than 16 
passengers;
    (3) A cargo vessel of any foreign nation that extends reciprocal 
privileges and is not subject to that Convention and which carries more 
than 16 passengers; and
    (4) A vessel engaged in a ferry operation and which carries 
passengers.
    Person means an individual, firm, copartnership, corporation, 
company, association, or joint-stock association (including any trustee, 
receiver, assignee, or similar representative); or a government or 
Indian tribe (or an agency or instrumentality of any government or 
Indian tribe) that transports a hazardous material to further a 
commercial enterprise or offers a hazardous material for transportation 
in commerce. Person does not include the following:
    (1) The United States Postal Service.
    (2) Any agency or instrumentality of the Federal government, for the 
purposes of 49 U.S.C. 5123 (civil penalties) and 5124 (criminal 
penalties.).
    (3)Any government or Indian tribe (or an agency or instrumentality 
of any government or Indian tribe) that

[[Page 90]]

transports hazardous material for a governmental purpose.
    Placarded car means a rail car which is placarded in accordance with 
the requirements of part 172 of this subchapter.
    Poisonous gas. See Sec. 173.115 of this subchapter.
    Poisonous materials. See Sec. 173.132 of this subchapter.
    Portable tank means a bulk packaging (except a cylinder having a 
water capacity of 1000 pounds or less) designed primarily to be loaded 
onto, or on, or temporarily attached to a transport vehicle or ship and 
equipped with skids, mountings, or accessories to facilitate handling of 
the tank by mechanical means. It does not include a cargo tank, tank 
car, multi-unit tank car tank, or trailer carrying 3AX, 3AAX, or 3T 
cylinders.
    Preferred route or Preferred highway is a highway for shipment of 
highway route controlled quantities of radioactive materials so 
designated by a State routing agency, and any Interstate System highway 
for which an alternative highway has not been designated by such State 
agency as provided by Sec. 397.103 of this title.
    Primary hazard means the hazard class of a material as assigned in 
the Sec. 172.101 table.
    Private track or Private siding means track located outside of a 
carrier's right-of-way, yard, or terminals where the carrier does not 
own the rails, ties, roadbed, or right-of-way and includes track or 
portion of track which is devoted to the purpose of its user either by 
lease or written agreement, in which case the lease or written agreement 
is considered equivalent to ownership.
    Proper shipping name means the name of the hazardous material shown 
in Roman print (not italics) in Sec. 172.101 of this subchapter.
    Psi means pounds per square inch.
    Psia means pounds per square inch absolute.
    Psig means pounds per square inch gauge.
    Public vessel means a vessel owned by and being used in the public 
service of the United States. It does not include a vessel owned by the 
United States and engaged in a trade or commercial service or a vessel 
under contract or charter to the United States.
    Pyrophoric liquid. See Sec. 173.124(b) of this subchapter.
    Radioactive materials. See Sec. 173.403 of this subchapter for 
definitions relating to radioactive materials.
    Rail car means a car designed to carry freight or non-passenger 
personnel by rail, and includes a box car, flat car, gondola car, hopper 
car, tank car, and occupied caboose.
    Railroad means a person engaged in transportation by rail.
    Receptacle means a containment vessel for receiving and holding 
materials, including any means of closing.
    Registered Inspector means a person registered with the Department 
in accordance with subpart F of part 107 of this chapter who has the 
knowledge and ability to determine whether a cargo tank conforms with 
the applicable DOT specification. In addition, Registered Inspector 
means a person who meets, at a minimum, any one of the following:
    (1) Has an engineering degree and one year of work experience.
    (2) Has an associate degree in engineering and two years of work 
experience.
    (3) Has a high school diploma (or General Equivalency Diploma) and 
three years of work experience.
    (4) Has at least three years experience in performing the duties of 
a Registered Inspector by September 1, 1991, and was registered with the 
Department by December 31, 1995.
    Regulated medical waste. See Sec. 173.134 of this subchapter.
    Reportable quantity (RQ) for the purposes of this subchapter means 
the quantity specified in column 2 of the appendix to Sec. 172.101 for 
any material identified in column 1 of the appendix.
    Research means investigation or experimentation aimed at the 
discovery of new theories or laws and the discovery and interpretation 
of facts or revision of accepted theories or laws in the light of new 
facts.
    Residue means the hazardous material remaining in a packaging, 
including a tank car, after its contents have been unloaded to the 
maximum extent practicable and before the packaging is either refilled 
or cleaned of hazardous

[[Page 91]]

material and purged to remove any hazardous vapors.
    RSPA means the Research and Special Programs Administration, U.S. 
Department of Transportation, Washington, DC 20590.
    SADT means self-accelerated decomposition temperature. See 
Sec. 173.21(f) of this subchapter.
    Salvage packaging means a special packaging conforming to Sec. 173.3 
of this subchapter into which damaged, defective or leaking hazardous 
materials packages, or hazardous materials that have spilled or leaked, 
are placed for purposes of transport for recovery or disposal.
    SCF (standard cubic foot) means one cubic foot of gas measured at 60 
 deg.F. and 14.7 psia.
    Self-defense spray means an aerosol or non-pressurized device that:
    (1) Is intended to have an irritating or incapacitating effect on a 
person or animal; and
    (2) Meets no hazard criteria other than for Class 9 (for example, a 
pepper spray; see Sec. 173.140(a) of this subchapter) and, for an 
aerosol, Division 2.1 or 2.2 (see Sec. 173.115 of this subchapter), 
except that it may contain not more than two percent by mass of a tear 
gas substance (e.g., chloroacetophenone (CN) or 0-
chlorobenzylmalonitrile (CS); see Sec. 173.132(a)(2) of this 
subchapter.)
    Sheathing means a covering consisting of a smooth layer of wood 
placed over metal and secured to prevent any movement.
    Shipping paper means a shipping order, bill of lading, manifest or 
other shipping document serving a similar purpose and containing the 
information required by Secs. 172.202, 172.203 and 172.204.
    Siftproof packaging means a packaging impermeable to dry contents, 
including fine solid material produced during transportation.
    Single packaging means a non-bulk packaging other than a combination 
packaging.
    Solid means a material which is not a gas or a liquid.
    Solution means any homogeneous liquid mixture of two or more 
chemical compounds or elements that will not undergo any segregation 
under conditions normal to transportation.
    Specification packaging means a packaging conforming to one of the 
specifications or standards for packagings in part 178 or part 179 of 
this subchapter.
    Spontaneously combustible material. See Sec. 173.124(b) of this 
subchapter.
    Stabilized means that the hazardous material is in a condition that 
precludes uncontrolled reaction. This may be achieved by methods such as 
adding an inhibiting chemical, degassing the hazardous material to 
remove dissolved oxygen and inerting the air space in the package, or 
maintaining the hazardous material under temperature control.
    State means a State of the United States, the District of Columbia, 
the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, the Commonwealth of the Northern 
Mariana Islands, the Virgin Islands, American Samoa, Guam, or any other 
territory or possession of the United States designated by the 
Secretary.
    State-designated route means a preferred route selected in 
accordance with U.S. DOT ``Guidelines for Selecting Preferred Highway 
Routes for Highway Route Controlled Quantities of Radioactive 
Materials'' or an equivalent routing analysis which adequately considers 
overall risk to the public.
    Stowage means the act of placing hazardous materials on board a 
vessel.
    Strong outside container means the outermost enclosure which 
provides protection against the unintentional release of its contents 
under conditions normally incident to transportation.
    Subsidiary hazard means a hazard of a material other than the 
primary hazard. (See primary hazard).
    Table in Sec. 172.101 or Sec. 172.101 table means the Hazardous 
Materials Table in Sec. 172.101 of this subchapter.
    Technical name means a recognized chemical name or microbiological 
name currently used in scientific and technical handbooks, journals, and 
texts. Generic descriptions are authorized for use as technical names 
provided they readily identify the general chemical group, or 
microbiological group. Examples of acceptable generic

[[Page 92]]

chemical descriptions are organic phosphate compounds, petroleum 
aliphatic hydrocarbons and tertiary amines. For proficiency testing 
only, generic microbiological descriptions such as bacteria, 
mycobacteria, fungus, and viral samples may be used. Except for names 
which appear in subpart B of part 172 of this subchapter, trade names 
may not be used as technical names.
    TOFC means trailer-on-flat-car.
    Top shell means the tank car tank surface, excluding the head ends 
and bottom shell of the tank car tank.
    Trailership means a vessel, other than a carfloat, specifically 
equipped to carry motor transport vehicles and fitted with installed 
securing devices to tie down each vehicle. The term trailership includes 
Roll-on/Roll-off (RO/RO) vessels.
    Train means one or more engines coupled with one or more rail cars, 
except during switching operations or where the operation is that of 
classifying and assembling rail cars within a railroad yard for the 
purpose of making or breaking up trains.
    Trainship means a vessel other than a rail car ferry or carfloat, 
specifically equipped to transport railroad vehicles, and fitted with 
installed securing devices to tie down each vehicle.
    Transport vehicle means a cargo-carrying vehicle such as an 
automobile, van, tractor, truck, semitrailer, tank car or rail car used 
for the transportation of cargo by any mode. Each cargo-carrying body 
(trailer, rail car, etc.) is a separate transport vehicle.
    UFC means Uniform Freight Classification.
    UN means United Nations.
    UN portable tank means a intermodal tank having a capacity of more 
than 450 liters (118.9 gallons). It includes a shell fitted with service 
equipment and structural equipment, including stabilizing members 
external to the shell and skids, mountings or accessories to facilitate 
mechanical handling. A UN portable tank must be capable of being filled 
and discharged without the removal of its structural equipment and must 
be capable of being lifted when full. Cargo tanks, rail tank car tanks, 
non-metallic tanks, non-specification tanks, bulk bins, and IBCs and 
packagings made to cylinder specifications are not UN portable tanks.
    UN Recommendations means the UN Recommendations on the Transport of 
Dangerous Goods.
    UN standard packaging means a packaging conforming to standards in 
the UN Recommendations.
    Unit load device means any type of freight container, aircraft 
container, aircraft pallet with a net, or aircraft pallet with a net 
over an igloo.
    United States means a State of the United States, the District of 
Columbia, the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, the Commonwealth of the 
Northern Mariana Islands, the Virgin Islands, American Samoa, Guam, or 
any other territory or possession of the United States designated by the 
Secretary.
    Vessel includes every description of watercraft, used or capable of 
being used as a means of transportation on the water.
    Viscous liquid means a liquid material which has a measured 
viscosity in excess of 2500 centistokes at 25  deg.C. (77  deg.F.) when 
determined in accordance with the procedures specified in ASTM Method D 
445-72 ``Kinematic Viscosity of Transparent and Opaque Liquids (and the 
Calculation of Dynamic Viscosity)'' or ASTM Method D 1200-70 ``Viscosity 
of Paints, Varnishes, and Lacquers by Ford Viscosity Cup.''
    Volatility refers to the relative rate of evaporation of materials 
to assume the vapor state.
    Water reactive material. See Sec. 173.124(c) of this subchapter.
    Water resistant means having a degree of resistance to permeability 
by and damage caused by water in liquid form.
    Wooden barrel means a packaging made of natural wood, of round 
cross-section, having convex walls, consisting of staves and heads and 
fitted with hoops.
    W.T. means watertight.

[Amdt. 171-32, 41 FR 15994, Apr. 15, 1976]

    Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting Sec. 171.8, 
see the List of CFR Sections Affected which appears in the Finding Aids 
section of the printed volume and on GPO Access.

    Effective Date Note: At 67 FR 53133, Aug. 14, 2002, Sec. 171.8 was 
amended by adding definitions in alphabetical order, effective Oct. 1,

[[Page 93]]

2002. At 67 FR 54967, Aug. 27, 2002, the effective date was corrected to 
Feb. 14, 2003. For the convenience of the user, the added text is set 
forth as follows:

Sec. 171.8  Definitions and abbreviations.

                                * * * * *

    Biological product. See Sec. 173.134 of this subchapter.

                                * * * * *

    Cultures and stocks. See Sec. 173.134 of this subchapter.

                                * * * * *

    Diagnostic specimen. See Sec. 173.134 of this subchapter.

                                * * * * *

    Risk group. See Sec. 173.134 of this subchapter.

                                * * * * *

    Sharps. See Sec. 173.134 of this subchapter.

                                * * * * *

    Toxin. See Sec. 173.134 of this subchapter.

                                * * * * *



Sec. 171.9  Rules of construction.

    (a) In this subchapter, unless the context requires otherwise:
    (1) Words imparting the singular include the plural;
    (2) Words imparting the plural include the singular; and
    (3) Words imparting the masculine gender include the feminine;
    (b) In this subchapter, the word: (1) ``Shall'' is used in an 
imperative sense;
    (2) ``Must'' is used in an imperative sense;
    (3) ``Should'' is used in a recommendatory sense;
    (4) ``May'' is used in a permissive sense to state authority or 
permission to do the act described, and the words ``no person may * * 
*'' or ``a person may not * * *'' means that no person is required, 
authorized, or permitted to do the act described; and
    (5) ``Includes'' is used as a word of inclusion not limitation.

[Amdt. 171-32, 41 FR 15996, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 171-32A, 
41 FR 40630, Sept. 20, 1976; Amdt. 171-121, 58 FR 51528, Oct. 1, 1993]



Sec. 171.10  Units of measure.

    (a) General. To ensure compatibility with international 
transportation standards, most units of measure in this subchapter are 
expressed using the International System of Units (``SI'' or metric). 
Where SI units appear, they are the regulatory standard. U.S. standard 
or customary units, which appear in parentheses following the SI units, 
are for information only and are not intended to be the regulatory 
standard.
    (b) Abbreviations for SI units of measure generally used throughout 
this subchapter are as shown in paragraph (c) of this section. Customary 
units shown throughout this subchapter are generally not abbreviated.
    (c) Conversion values. (1) Conversion values are provided in the 
following table and are based on values provided in ASTM E 380-89, 
``Standard for Metric Practice.''
    (2) If an exact conversion is needed, the following conversion table 
should be used.

                                    Table of Conversion Factors for SI Units
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
            Measurement                  SI to U.S. standard                    U.S. standard to SI
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Activity...........................  1 TBq=27 Ci................  1 Ci=0.037 TBq
Length.............................  1 cm=0.3937008 in..........  1 in=2.540000 cm
                                     1 m=3.280840 ft............  1 ft=0.3048000 m
Thickness..........................  1 mm=0.03937008 in.........  1 in=25.40000 mm
Mass (weight)......................  1 kg=2.204622 lb...........  1 lb=0.4535924 kg
                                     1 g=0.03527397 oz..........  1 oz=28.34952 g
Pressure...........................  1 kPa=0.1450377 psi........  1 psi=6.894757 kPa
                                     1 Bar=100 kPa=14.504 psi...  1 psi=0.06895 Bar
                                     1 kPa=7.5 mm Hg............
Radiation level....................  1 Sv/hr=100 rem/hr.........  1 rem/hr=0.01 Sv/hr
Volume (liquid)....................  1 L=0.2641720 gal..........  1 gal=3.785412 L
                                     1 mL=0.03381402 oz.........  1 oz=29.57353 mL
                                     1 m\3\=35.31466 ft\3\......  1 ft\3\=0.02831685 m\3\

[[Page 94]]

 
Density............................  1 kg/m\3\=0.06242797 lb/     1 lb/ft\3\=16.01846 kg/m\3\
                                      ft\3\.
Force..............................  1 Newton = 0.2248 Pound-     1 Pound-force=4.483 N
                                      force.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Abbreviation for units of measure are as follows:
Unit of measure and abbreviation:
(SI): millimeter, mm; centimeter, cm; meter, m; gram, g; kilogram, kg; kiloPascal, kPa; liter, L; milliliter,
  mL; cubic meter, m\3\; Terabecquerel, TBq; Gigabecquerel, GBq; millisievert, mSv; Newton, N;
(U.S.): Inch, in; foot, ft; ounce, oz; pound, lb; psig, psi; gallon, gal; cubic feet, ft \3\; Curie, Ci;
  millicurie, mCi; millirem, mrem.

[Amdt. 171-111, 56 FR 66159, Dec. 20, 1991, as amended by Amdt. 171-136, 
60 FR 49108, Sept. 21, 1995; Amdt. 171-135, 60 FR 50302, Sept. 28, 1995; 
66 FR 33335, June 21, 2001; 66 FR 45378, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 171.11  Use of ICAO Technical Instructions.

    Notwithstanding the requirements of parts 172 and 173 of this 
subchapter, a hazardous material may be transported by aircraft, and by 
motor vehicle either before or after being transported by aircraft, in 
accordance with the ICAO Technical Instructions (incorporated by 
reference, see Sec. 171.7) if the hazardous material:
    (a) Is packaged, marked, labeled, classified, described and 
certified on a shipping paper and otherwise in a condition for shipment 
as required by the ICAO Technical Instructions;
    (b) Is within the quantity limits prescribed for transportation by 
either passenger-carrying or cargo aircraft, as appropriate, as 
specified in the ICAO Technical Instructions;
    (c) Is not a forbidden material or package according to Sec. 173.21 
of this subchapter or column 3 of the Sec. 172.101 table; and
    (d) Fulfills the following additional requirements as applicable:
    (1) For a material that meets the definition of a hazardous 
substance as defined in this subchapter, the shipping paper and package 
markings must conform to the provisions in Secs. 172.203(c) and 172.324, 
respectively, of this subchapter.
    (2) When a hazardous material, which is subject to the requirements 
of the ICAO Technical Instructions, is also a hazardous waste as defined 
in this subchapter:
    (i) The word ``Waste'' must precede the proper shipping name on 
shipping papers and package markings; and
    (ii) It must comply with Sec. 172.205 with respect to the hazardous 
waste manifests.
    (3) When a hazardous material is not subject to the requirements of 
the ICAO Technical Instructions, it must be transported as required by 
this subchapter.
    (4) When a hazardous material that is regulated by this subchapter 
for transportation by highway is transported by motor vehicle on a 
public highway under the provisions of this section, the following 
requirements apply:
    (i) The motor vehicle must be placarded in accordance with subpart F 
of part 172 of this subchapter; and
    (ii) The shipping paper may include an indication that the shipment 
is being made under the provisions of this section or the letters 
``ICAO.''
    (5) Except for a Division 2.2 air bag, air bag module, or seat-belt 
pretensioner, the shipping paper description must conform to the 
requirements of Sec. 173.166(c) of this subchapter.
    (6) For radioactive materials:
    (i) Shipping papers for highway route controlled quantity 
radioactive materials shipments must meet the requirements of 
Sec. 172.203(d)(4) of this subchapter.
    (ii) Competent authority certification and any necessary 
revalidation for Type B, Type B(U), Type B(M), and fissile materials 
packages must be obtained from the appropriate authorities as specifed 
in Secs. 173.471, 173.472 and 173.473 of this subchapter, and all 
requirements of the certificates and revalidations must be met.
    (iii) Except for limited quantities of Class 7 (radioactive) 
material, the provisions of Secs. 172.204(c)(4), 173.448(e), (f) and 
(g)(3) of this subchapter apply.
    (iv) Limited quantities of radioactive materials must meet the 
provisions of

[[Page 95]]

Sec. 173.421, Sec. 173.424 or Sec. 173.426 as appropriate of this 
subchapter.
    (v) Type A package contents shall be limited in accordance with 
Sec. 173.431 of this subchapter.
    (vi) The definition for ``radioactive material'' in Sec. 173.403 of 
this subchapter applies to radioactive materials transported under the 
provisions of this section.
    (7) If a United States variation is indicated in the ICAO Technical 
Instructions for any provision governing the transport of the hazardous 
material, the hazardous material is transported in conformance with that 
variation.
    (8) Abbreviations may not be used in shipping paper entries or 
package markings unless they are specifically authorized by this 
subchapter. ICAO class or division numbers are not considered to be 
abbreviations.
    (9) When a hazardous material, which is subject to the requirements 
of the ICAO Technical Instructions, is a material poisonous by 
inhalation (see Sec. 171.8 of this subchapter)--
    (i) The shipping description must include the words ``Toxic 
Inhalation Hazard'' or ``Poison-Inhalation Hazard'' or ``Inhalation 
Hazard'', as required in Sec. 172.203(m) of this subchapter;
    (ii) The material must be packaged in accordance with the 
requirements of this subchapter; and
    (iii) The package must be marked in accordance with Sec. 172.313 of 
this subchapter and labeled with ``POISON INHALATION HAZARD'' or 
``POISON GAS'', as appropriate, in accordance with subpart E of part 172 
of this subchapter.
    (10) Shipments of hazardous materials under this section must 
conform to the requirements for emergency response information as 
prescribed in subpart G of part 172 of this subchapter.
    (11) Packages of Class 1 (explosive) materials must be marked in 
accordance with Sec. 172.320 of this subchapter.
    (12) If an ammonium nitrate fertilizer or ammonium nitrate mixed 
fertilizer, must not meet the definition and criteria of a Class 1 
(explosive) material.
    (13) Transportation of marine pollutants, as defined in Sec. 171.8 
of this subchapter, in bulk packagings must conform to the requirements 
of Secs. 172.203(l) and 172.322 of this subchapter.
    (14) Except as provided for limited quantities of compressed gases 
in containers of not more than 4 fluid ounces capacity under 
Sec. 173.306(a)(1) of this subchapter, aerosols must meet the definition 
for ``Aerosol'' in Sec. 171.8. In addition, an aerosol must be in a 
metal packaging if the packaging exceeds 7.22 cubic inches.
    (15) A chemical oxygen generator is forbidden for transportation 
aboard a passenger-carrying aircraft and must be approved, classed, 
described and packaged in accordance with the requirements of this 
subchapter for transportation on cargo-only aircraft. A chemical oxygen 
generator (spent) is forbidden for transportation on aircraft.
    (16) A cylinder containing Oxygen, compressed, may not be 
transported on a passenger-carrying aircraft or in an inaccessible cargo 
location aboard a cargo-only aircraft unless it is packaged as required 
by Part 173 and Part 178 of this subchapter and is placed in an overpack 
or outer packaging that satisfies the requirements of Special Provision 
A52 in Sec. 172.102.
    (17) An organic peroxide that is not identified by technical name in 
the Organic Peroxide Table in Sec. 173.225(b) of this subchapter must be 
approved by the Associate Administrator in accordance with the 
requirements of Sec. 173.128(d) of this subchapter.

[Amdt. 171-69, 47 FR 54821, Dec. 6, 1982]

    Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting 
Sec. 171.11, see the List of CFR Sections Affected which appears in the 
Finding Aids section of the printed volume and on GPO Access.



Sec. 171.12  Import and export shipments.

    (a) Importer's responsibility. Except in the case of a shipment from 
Canada conforming to Sec. 171.12a of this subchapter, each person 
importing a hazardous material into the United States shall provide the 
shipper and the forwarding agent at the place of entry into the United 
States timely and complete information as to the requirements of this 
subchapter that will apply to the shipment of the material within the 
United States. The shipper, directly or through the forwarding

[[Page 96]]

agent at the place of entry, shall provide the initial carrier in the 
United States the certificate of compliance required by Sec. 172.204 of 
this subchapter. The carrier may not accept the material for 
transportation unless the required certification is provided. All 
shipping paper information required under paragraph (b) or (d) of this 
section must be in English.
    (b) IMDG Code (see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter). The IMDG Code 
sets forth descriptions, classifications, packagings, labeling and 
vessel stowage requirements. Notwithstanding the provisions of this 
subchapter, a material which is packaged, marked, classed, labeled, 
placarded, described, stowed and segregated, and certified (including a 
container packing certification, if applicable) in accordance with the 
IMDG Code, and otherwise conforms to the requirements of this section, 
may be offered and accepted for transportation and transported within 
the United States. The following conditions and limitations apply:
    (1) The provisions of this paragraph (b) apply only if all or part 
of the transportation is by vessel.
    (2) A number of materials listed in the IMDG Code are not subject to 
the requirements of this subchapter. The provisions of this subchapter 
do not apply to materials listed in the IMDG Code which are not 
designated as hazardous materials under this subchapter. These materials 
may, however, be transported in the U.S. when described, marked and 
labeled in accordance with the IMDG Code.
    (3) A material designated as a hazardous material under this 
subchapter which is not subject to the requirements of the IMDG Code may 
not be transported under the provisions of this section. For example, 
internal combustion engines, and viscous flammable liquids having a 
flash point of 23  deg.C (73.4  deg.F) or greater and less than or equal 
to 60.5  deg.C (140.9  deg.F) as provided in 2.3.2.5 of the IMDG Code 
may not be transported under the provisions of this section and are 
subject to the requirements of this subchapter.
    (4) A forbidden material or package according to Sec. 173.21 of this 
subchapter or column 3 of the Sec. 172.101 table may not be transported 
under the provisions of this section.
    (5) Except for IBCs and UN portable tanks intended for liquids or 
solids, bulk packagings must conform to the requirements of this 
subchapter. For UN portable tanks, Special Provisions TP37, TP38, TP44 
and TP45 must be met when applicable. Except as specified in paragraph 
(b)(8) of this section for a material poisonous (toxic) by inhalation 
(see Sec. 171.8 of this subchapter), the T Codes specified for specific 
hazardous materials in Column 13 of the Dangerous Goods List of the IMDG 
Code may be applied to the transportation of those materials in IM, IMO 
and DOT Specification 51 portable tanks when these portable tanks are 
authorized in accordance with the requirements of this subchapter.
    (6) For export, packagings must conform to the applicable 
requirements in Secs. 173.24, 173.24a and 173.28 of this subchapter.
    (7) A Class 1 material must be classed and approved under the 
procedures in subpart C of part 173 of this subchapter and conform to 
the requirements of Sec. 172.320 and part 176 of this subchapter.
    (8) When a hazardous material, which is subject to the requirements 
of the IMDG Code, is a material poisonous by inhalation (see Sec. 171.8 
of this subchapter)--
    (i) The shipping description must include the words `Toxic 
Inhalation Hazard' or ``Poison-Inhalation Hazard'' or ``Inhalation 
Hazard'', as required in Sec. 172.203(m) of this subchapter;
    (ii) The material must be packaged in accordance with the 
requirements of this subchapter;
    (iii) The package must be marked in accordance with Sec. 172.313 of 
this subchapter;
    (iv) Except as provided in paragraph (b)(8)(v) of this section, the 
package must be labeled or placarded POISON GAS or POISON INHALATION 
HAZARD, as appropriate, in accordance with subparts E and F of this 
subchapter;
    (v) A label or placard that conforms to IMDG Code specifications for 
a ``Class 2.3'' or ``Class 6.1'' label or placard may be substituted for 
the POISON GAS or POISON INHALATION HAZARD label or placard required by

[[Page 97]]

paragraph (b)(8)(iv) of this section on a package transported in a 
closed transport vehicle or freight container. The transport vehicle or 
freight container must be marked with identification numbers for the 
hazardous material, regardless of the total quantity contained in the 
transport vehicle or freight container, in the manner specified in 
Sec. 172.313(c) of this subchapter and placarded as required by subpart 
F of this subchapter;
    (vi) A package, freight container, or transport vehicle may be 
placarded in conformance with IMDG Code placard specifications for 
``Class 2.3'' or ``Class 6.1'', as appropriate, in place of the POISON 
GAS or POISON INHALATION HAZARD placard required by paragraph (b)(8)(iv) 
of this section when moving within a single port area, including 
contiguous harbor.
    (9) Class 7 materials must conform to the provisions of paragraph 
(d) of this section.
    (10) For a hazardous waste, as defined in this subchapter--
    (i) The word ``Waste'' must precede the proper shipping name on 
shipping papers and packages; and
    (ii) The requirements of Sec. 172.205 of this subchapter with 
respect to hazardous waste manifests are applicable.
    (11) A hazardous substance as defined in this subchapter must 
conform to the requirements of Secs. 172.203(c) and 172.324 of this 
subchapter.
    (12) A poisonous material must conform to the requirements of 
Sec. 172.203(m) of this subchapter.
    (13) [Reserved]
    (14) Any ammonium nitrate fertilizer or ammonium nitrate mixed 
fertilizer must not meet the definition and criteria of a Class 1 
(explosive) material.
    (15) Cylinders not manufactured to a DOT specification must conform 
to the requirements of Sec. 173.301(j) through (l) of this subchapter 
or, for Canadian manufactured cylinders, to the requirements of 
Sec. 171.12a(b)(13).
    (16) Shipments of hazardous materials under this section must 
conform to the requirements for emergency response information as 
prescribed in subpart G of part 172 of this subchapter.
    (17) Except as provided for limited quantities of compressed gases 
in containers of not more than 4 fluid ounces capacity under 
Sec. 173.306(a)(1) of this subchapter, aerosols must meet the definition 
for ``Aerosol'' in Sec. 171.8.
    (18) A chemical oxygen generator must be approved in accordance with 
the requirements of this subchapter. A chemical oxygen generator and a 
chemical oxygen generator (spent) must be classed, described and 
packaged in accordance with the requirements of this subchapter.
    (19) Except for Division 2.2, the shipping paper description for an 
air bag, air bag module, or seat-belt pretensioner must conform to the 
requirements of Sec. 173.166(c) of this subchapter.
    (20) An organic peroxide that is not identified by technical name in 
the Organic Peroxide Table in Sec. 173.225(b) of this subchapter must be 
approved by the Associate Administrator in accordance with the 
requirements of Sec. 173.128(d) of this subchapter.
    (c) Use of IMDG Code in port areas. Section 171.2 notwithstanding, a 
hazardous material (other than Division 1.1 or 1.2 or Class 7) being 
imported into or exported from the United States or passing through the 
United States in the course of being shipped between places outside the 
United States may be offered and accepted for transportation and 
transported by motor vehicle within a single port area (including 
contiguous harbors) when packaged, marked, classed, labeled, stowed and 
segregated in accordance with the IMDG Code, if the hazardous material 
is offered and accepted in accordance with the requirements of subparts 
C and F of part 172 of this subchapter pertaining to shipping papers and 
placarding and otherwise conforms to the applicable requirements of part 
176 of this subchapter. The requirement in Sec. 172.201(d) of this 
subchapter for an emergency telephone number does not apply to shipments 
made in accordance with the IMDG Code if the hazardous material:
    (1) Is not offloaded from the vessel;
    (2) Is offloaded between ocean vessels at a U.S. port facility 
without being transported by public highway.

[[Page 98]]

    (d) Use of International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA) regulations for 
Class 7 (radioactive) materials. Class 7 (radioactive) materials being 
imported into or exported from the United States, or passing through the 
United States in the course of being shipped between places outside the 
United States, may be offered and accepted for transportation when 
packaged, marked, labeled, and otherwise prepared for shipment in 
accordance with IAEA ``Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive 
Material,'' Safety Series No. 6 or TS-R-1 (incorporated by reference, 
see Sec. 171.7), if--
    (1) Highway route controlled quantities (see Sec. 173.403 of this 
subchapter) are shipped in accordance with Secs. 172.203(d)(4), 172.507 
and 173.22(c) of this subchapter;
    (2) For fissile materials and Type B packages, the competent 
authority certification and any necessary revalidation is obtained from 
the appropriate competent authorities as specified in Secs. 173.471, 
173.472 and 173.473 of this subchapter and all requirements of the 
certificates and revalidations are met;
    (3) Type A package contents are limited in accordance with 
Sec. 173.431 of this subchapter;
    (4) The country of origin for the shipment has adopted the 
corresponding edition (Safety Series No. 6, 1985 Edition, or TS-R-1, 
1996 Edition) of the IAEA ``Regulations for the Safe Transport of 
Radioactive Material';
    (5) The requirements of Secs. 173.448(e), 173.448(f), and 
173.448(g)(3) of this subchapter are fulfilled, when applicable;
    (6) Shipments comply with the requirements for emergency response 
information prescribed in subpart G of part 172 of this subchapter; and
    (7) The definition for ``radioactive material'' in Sec. 173.403 of 
this subchapter is applied to radioactive materials transported under 
the provisions of this section.
    (e) Shipments to or from Mexico. Unless otherwise excepted, 
hazardous materials shipments from Mexico to the United States or from 
the United States to Mexico must conform to all applicable requirements 
of this subchapter. When a hazardous material that is a material 
poisonous by inhalation (see Sec. 171.8) is transported by highway or 
rail from Mexico to the United States, or from the United States to 
Mexico, the following requirements apply:
    (1) The shipping description must include the words ``Toxic 
Inhalation Hazard'' or ``Poison-Inhalation Hazard'' or ``Inhalation 
Hazard'', as required in Sec. 172.203(m) of this subchapter.
    (2) The material must be packaged in accordance with requirements of 
this subchapter.
    (3) The package must be marked in accordance with Sec. 172.313 of 
this subchapter.
    (4) Except as provided in paragraph (e)(5) of this section, the 
package must be labeled or placarded POISON GAS or POISON INHALATION 
HAZARD, as appropriate, in accordance with subparts E and F of this 
subchapter.
    (5) A label or placard that conforms to the UN Recommendations on 
the Transport of Dangerous Goods specifications for a ``Division 2.3'' 
or ``Division 6.1'' label or placard may be substituted for the POISON 
GAS or POISON INHALATION HAZARD label or placard required by 
Secs. 172.400(a) and 172.504(e) of this subchapter on a package 
transported in a closed transport vehicle or freight container. The 
transport vehicle or freight container must be marked with 
identification numbers for the material, regardless of the total 
quantity contained in the transport vehicle or freight container, in the 
manner specified in Sec. 172.313(c) of this subchapter and placarded as 
required by subpart F of this subchapter.

[Amdt. 171-111, 55 FR 52472, Dec. 21, 1990]

    Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting 
Sec. 171.12, see the List of CFR Sections Affected which appears in the 
Finding Aids section of the printed volume and on GPO Access.



Sec. 171.12a  Canadian shipments and packagings.

    (a) Scope and applicability. This section sets forth provisions for 
the transportation by rail or highway of shipments of hazardous 
materials which conform to the regulations of the Government of Canada 
but which may differ from the requirements of this subchapter with 
regard to hazard communication, classification or packaging. Except as 
provided in paragraph

[[Page 99]]

(b)(5)(iv) of this section, the provisions apply only to shipments which 
originate in Canada and either terminate in the U.S. or transit the U.S. 
to a Canadian or foreign destination, and to the return to Canada of 
empty bulk packages containing residues of hazardous materials which 
originally were imported into the U.S. Reciprocal provisions, applicable 
to exports from the U.S., appear in the regulations of the Government of 
Canada.
    (b) Conditions and limitations. Notwithstanding the requirements of 
parts 172, 173, and 178 of this subchapter, and subject to the 
limitations of paragraph (a) of this section, a hazardous material that 
is classed, marked, labeled, placarded, described on a shipping paper, 
and packaged in accordance with the Transportation of Dangerous Goods 
(TDG) Regulations issued by the Government of Canada may be offered for 
transportation and transported to or through the United States by motor 
vehicle or rail car. Copies of the TDG Regulations may be obtained from 
the Canadian Government Publishing Centre, Ottawa, Ontario K1A 059; 
Telephone (819) 956-4800. The following conditions and limitations 
apply:
    (1) A number of materials listed in the TDG Regulations may not be 
subject to the requirements of this subchapter. The provisions of this 
subchapter do not apply to materials listed in the TDG Regulations which 
are not designated as hazardous materials under this subchapter. These 
materials may, however, be transported in the U.S. when described, 
marked and labeled in accordance with the TDG Regulations.
    (2) A material designated as a hazardous material under this 
subchapter which is not subject to the requirements of the TDG 
Regulations may not be transported under the provisions of this section.
    (3) A forbidden material or package according to Sec. 173.21 of this 
subchapter or column 3 of the Sec. 172.101 table may not be transported 
under the provisions of this section.
    (4) A Class 1 material must be classed and approved under the 
procedures in subpart C of part 173 of this subchapter, and packages of 
Class 1 materials must be marked in accordance with Sec. 172.320 of this 
subchapter.
    (5) When a hazardous material, which is a material poisonous by 
inhalation under the provisions of this subchapter (see Sec. 171.8 of 
this subchapter), is subject to the requirements of the TDG Regulations-
-
    (i) The shipping description must include the words `Toxic 
Inhalation Hazard' or `Poison Inhalation Hazard' or ``Inhalation 
Hazard'', as required in Sec. 172.203(m) of this subchapter;
    (ii) The material must be packaged in accordance with the 
requirements of this subchapter;
    (iii) The package must be marked in accordance with Sec. 172.313 of 
this subchapter;
    (iv) Except as provided in paragraph (b)(5)(v) of this section and 
for a package containing anhydrous ammonia, the package must be labeled 
or placarded POISON GAS or POISON INHALATION HAZARD, as appropriate, in 
accordance with subparts E and F of this subchapter;
    (v) A label or placard that conforms to the specifications in the 
TDG Regulations for a ``Class 2.3'' or ``Class 6.1'' label or placard 
may be substituted for the POISON GAS or POISON INHALATION HAZARD label 
or placard required by paragraph (b)(5)(iv) of this section on a package 
transported in a closed transport vehicle or freight container. The 
transport vehicle or freight container must be marked with 
identification numbers for the material, regardless of quantity, in the 
manner specified in Sec. 172.313(c) of this subchapter and placarded as 
required by subpart F of this subchapter. When moving in the United 
States, the transport vehicle or freight container may also be placarded 
in accordance with the appropriate TDG regulations in addition to the 
POISON GAS or POISON INHALATION HAZARD placards required by paragraph 
(b)(5)(iv) of this section;
    (vi) For shipments of anhydrous ammonia, the shipping paper must 
contain an indication that the markings, labels and placards have been 
applied in conformance with the TDG Regulations and this paragraph 
(b)(5).
    (6) Required shipping descriptions and package markings must be in

[[Page 100]]

English. Abbreviations may not be used unless specifically authorized by 
this subchapter. Identification numbers must be preceded by ``UN'' or 
``NA''. The use of an identification number preceded by ``PIN'' is not 
authorized.
    (7) Shipments must conform to the requirements for emergency 
response information in subpart G of part 172 of this subchapter.
    (8) A Class 7 material must conform to the provisions of 
Sec. 171.12(d) of this subchapter;
    (9) For a hazardous waste as defined in this subchapter--
    (i) The word ``Waste'' must precede the proper shipping name on 
shipping papers and packages; and
    (ii) The requirements of Sec. 172.205 of this subchapter with 
respect to hazardous waste manifests are applicable;
    (10) A hazardous substance as defined in this subchapter must 
conform to the requirements of Secs. 172.203(c) and 172.324 of this 
subchapter; and
    (11) A poisonous material must conform to the requirements of 
Sec. 172.203(m) of this subchapter.
    (12) [Reserved]
    (13) When the provisions of this subchapter require that a DOT 
specification or UN standard packaging must be used for a hazardous 
material, a packaging authorized by the TDG Regulations may be used only 
if it corresponds to the DOT specification or UN packaging authorized by 
this subchapter. Cylinders not manufactured to DOT specifications must 
conform to the requirements of Sec. 173.301(i) and (j) of this 
subchapter.
    (14) Any ammonium nitrate fertilizer or ammonium nitrate mixed 
fertilizer must not meet the definition and criteria of a Class 1 
(explosive) material.
    (15) Transportation of marine pollutants, as defined in Sec. 171.8 
of this subchapter, must conform to the requirements of Secs. 172.203(l) 
and 172.322 of this subchapter.
    (16) Except as provided for limited quantities of compressed gases 
in containers of not more than 4 fluid ounces capacity under 
Sec. 173.306(a)(1) of this subchapter, aerosols must meet the definition 
for ``Aerosol'' in Sec. 171.8.
    (17) A chemical oxygen generator must be approved in accordance with 
the requirements of this subchapter. A chemical oxygen generator and a 
chemical oxygen generator (spent) must be classed, described and 
packaged in accordance with the requirements of this subchapter.
    (18) An organic peroxide that is not identified by technical name in 
the Organic Peroxide Table in Sec. 173.225(b) of this subchapter must be 
approved by the Associate Administrator in accordance with the 
requirements of Sec. 173.128(d) of this subchapter.

[Amdt. 171-111, 55 FR 52473, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66160, 
Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45453, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 171-116, 57 FR 52935, 
Nov. 5, 1992; Amdt. 171-153, 62 FR 24700, May 6, 1997; 62 FR 30770, June 
5, 1997; 64 FR 10753, Mar. 5, 1999; 64 FR 45396, Aug. 19, 1999; 64 FR 
50262, Sept. 16, 1999; 64 FR 51720, Sept. 24, 1999; 64 FR 51915, Sept. 
27, 1999; 66 FR 33336, June 21, 2001; 66 FR 44255, Aug. 22, 2001]



Sec. 171.14  Transitional provisions for implementing certain requirements.

    General. The purpose of the provisions of this section is to provide 
an orderly transition to certain new requirements so as to minimize any 
burdens associated with them.
    (a) Previously filled packages--(1) Packages filled prior to October 
1, 1991. Notwithstanding the marking and labeling provisions of subparts 
D and E, respectively, of part 172, and the packaging provisions of part 
173 and subpart B of part 172 of this subchapter, a package may be 
offered for transportation and transported prior to October 1, 2001, if 
it--
    (i) Conforms to the old requirements of this subchapter in effect on 
September 30, 1991;
    (ii) Was filled with a hazardous material prior to October 1, 1991;
    (iii) Is marked ``Inhalation Hazard'' if appropriate, in accordance 
with Sec. 172.313 of this subchapter or Special Provision 13, as 
assigned in the Sec. 172.101 table; and
    (iv) Is not emptied and refilled on or after October 1, 1991.
    (2) Non-bulk packages filled prior to October 1, 1996. 
Notwithstanding the packaging provisions of subpart B of part 172 and 
the packaging provisions of part 173 of this subchapter with respect to 
UN standard packagings, a non-bulk package other than a cylinder may be

[[Page 101]]

offered for transportation and transported domestically prior to October 
1, 1999, if it--
    (i) Conforms to the requirements of this subchapter in effect on 
September 30, 1996;
    (ii) Was filled with a hazardous material prior to October 1, 1996; 
and
    (iii) Is not emptied and refilled on or after October 1, 1996.
    (b) Transitional placarding provisions. Until October 1, 2001, 
placards which conform to specifications for placards in effect on 
September 30, 1991, or placards specified in the December 21, 1990 final 
rule may be used, for highway transportation only, in place of the 
placards specified in subpart F of part 172 of this subchapter, in 
accordance with the following table:

                       Placard Substitution Table
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                               Current placard    Old (Sept. 30, 1991)
 Hazard class or division No.        name             placard name
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Division 1.1.................  Explosives 1.1.  Explosives A.
Division 1.2.................  Explosives 1.2.  Explosives A.
Division 1.3.................  Explosives 1.3.  Explosives B.
Division 1.4.................  Explosives 1.4.  Dangerous.
Division 1.5.................  Explosives 1.5.  Blasting agents.
Division 1.6.................  Explosives 1.6.  Dangerous.
Division 2.1.................  Flammable gas..  Flammable gas.
Division 2.2.................  Nonflammable     Nonflammable gas.
                                gas.
Division 2.3\1\..............  Poison gas.....  Poison gas.
Class 3......................  Flammable......  Flammable.
Combustible liquid...........  Combustible....  Combustible.
Division 4.1.................  Flammable solid  Flammable solid.
Division 4.2.................  Spontaneously    Flammable solid.
                                combustible.
Division 4.3.................  Dangerous when   Flammable solid W.
                                wet.
Division 5.1.................  Oxidizer.......  Oxidizer.
Division 5.2.................  Organic          Organic peroxide.
                                peroxide.
Division 6.1, (inhalation      Poison           Poison.
 hazard, Zone A or B)\1\.       inhalation
                                hazard.
Division 6.1, PG I (other      Posion.........  Poison.
 than Zone A or B inhalation
 hazard), PG II, or PG III.
Class 7......................  Radioactive....  Radioactive.
Class 8......................  Corrosive......  Corrosive.
Class 9......................  Class 9........  (none required).
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ For materials poisonous by inhalation, by all modes of
  transportation, until October 1, 2001, placards may be used that
  conform to specifications for placards (1) in effect on September 30,
  1991, (2) specified in the December 21, 1990 final rule, or (3)
  specified in the July 22, 1997 final rule.

    (c) Non-specification fiber drums. A non-specification fiber drum 
with a removable head is authorized for a liquid hazardous material in 
Packing Group III that is not poisonous by inhalation for which the 
packaging was authorized under the requirements of part 172 or part 173 
of this subchapter in effect on September 30, 1991. This authorization 
expires on the date on which funds are authorized to be appropriated to 
carry out chapter 51 of title 49, United States Code (related to 
transportation of hazardous materials), for fiscal years beginning after 
September 30, 1997. Information concerning this funding authorization 
date may be obtained by contacting the Office of the Associate 
Administrator.
    (d) A final rule published in the Federal Register on June 21, 2001, 
effective October 1, 2001, resulted in revisions to this subchapter. 
During the transition period, until October 1, 2002, as provided in 
paragraph (d)(1) of this section, a person may elect to comply with 
either the applicable requirements of this subchapter in effect on 
September 30, 2001, or the requirements published in the June 21, 2001 
final rule.
    (1) Transition dates. The effective date of the June 21, 2001 final 
rule is October 1, 2001. A delayed compliance date of October 1, 2002 is 
authorized. On October 1, 2002, all applicable regulatory requirements 
adopted in the June 21, 2001 final rule in effect on October 1, 2001 
must be met.
    (2) Intermixing old and new requirements. Prior to October 1, 2002, 
it is recommended that the hazard communication requirements be 
consistent where practicable. Marking, labeling, placarding, and 
shipping paper descriptions should conform to either the old

[[Page 102]]

requirements of this subchapter in effect on September 30, 2001, or the 
new requirements of this subchapter in the June 21, 2001 final rule 
without intermixing communication elements. However, intermixing is 
permitted, during the applicable transition period, for packaging, 
hazard communication, and handling provisions, as follows:
    (i) If either shipping names or identification numbers are 
identical, a shipping paper may display the old shipping description 
even if the package is marked and labeled under the new shipping 
description;
    (ii) If either shipping names or identification numbers are 
identical, a shipping paper may display the new shipping description 
even if the package is marked and labeled under the old shipping 
description; and
    (iii) Either old or new placards may be used regardless of whether 
old or new shipping descriptions and package markings are used.
    (3) Until October 1, 2003, the KEEP AWAY FROM FOOD labeling and 
placarding requirements in effect on September 30, 1999, may continue to 
be used in place of the new requirements for Division 6.1, Packing Group 
III materials.
    (4) Until January 1, 2010, a hazardous material may be transported 
in an IM or IMO portable tank in accordance with the T Codes (Special 
Provisions) assigned to a hazardous material in Column (7) of the HMT in 
effect on September 30, 2001. (See Sec. 173.32(c) of this subchapter for 
the continued use and manufacture of portable tanks.)
    (5) Until October 1, 2005, proper shipping names that included the 
word ``inhibited'' prior to the June 21, 2001 final rule in effect on 
October 1, 2001, may continue to be shown on packagings in place of 
``stabilized.''

[Amdt. 171-131, 59 FR 67406, Dec. 29, 1994, as amended by Amdt. 171-132, 
60 FR 26799, 26800, May 18, 1995; Amdt. 171-138, 60 FR 48786, Sept. 20, 
1995; Amdt. 171-139, 61 FR 7958, Feb. 29, 1996; Amdt. 171-150, 62 FR 
1227, Jan. 8, 1997; Amdt 171-153, 62 FR 24700, May 6, 1997; 62 FR 29676, 
June 2, 1997; 62 FR 39404, July 22, 1997; 63 FR 52847, Oct. 1, 1998; 64 
FR 10753, Mar. 5, 1999; 64 FR 50263, Sept. 16, 1999; 64 FR 51915, Sept. 
27, 1999; 66 FR 33336, June 21, 2001; 66 FR 45378, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 
15739, Apr. 3, 2002]

    Effective Date Note: At 67 FR 53133, Aug. 14, 2002, Sec. 171.14 was 
amended by adding paragraph (e), effective Oct. 1, 2002. At 67 FR 54967, 
Aug. 27, 2002, the effective date was corrected to Feb. 14, 2003. For 
the convenience of the user, the added text is set forth as follows:

Sec. 171.14  Transitional provisions for implementing certain 
          requirements.

                                * * * * *

    (e) A Division 6.2 label conforming to specifications in 
Sec. 172.432 of this subchapter in effect on September 30, 2002, may be 
used until October 1, 2005.



Sec. 171.15  Immediate notice of certain hazardous materials incidents.

    (a) At the earliest practicable moment, each carrier who transports 
hazardous materials (including hazardous wastes) shall give notice in 
accordance with paragraph (b) of this section after each incident that 
occurs during the course of transportation (including loading, unloading 
and temporary storage) in which--
    (1) As a direct result of hazardous materials--
    (i) A person is killed; or
    (ii) A person receives injuries requiring his or her 
hospitalization; or
    (iii) Estimated carrier or other property damage exceeds $50,000; or
    (iv) An evacuation of the general public occurs lasting one or more 
hours; or
    (v) One or more major transportation arteries or facilities are 
closed or shut down for one hour or more; or
    (vi) The operational flight pattern or routine of an aircraft is 
altered; or
    (2) Fire, breakage, spillage, or suspected radioactive contamination 
occurs involving shipment of radioactive material; or
    (3) Fire, breakage, spillage, or suspected contamination occurs 
involving shipment of infectious substances (etiologic agents); or
    (4) There has been a release of a marine pollutant in a quantity 
exceeding 450 L (119 gallons) for liquids or 400 kg (882 pounds) for 
solids; or
    (5) A situation exists of such a nature (e.g., a continuing danger 
to life exists at the scene of the incident) that, in the judgment of 
the carrier, it should be reported to the National Response Center even 
though it does not meet

[[Page 103]]

the criteria of paragraph (a) (1), (2) or (3) of this section.
    (b) Except for transportation by aircraft, each notice required by 
paragraph (a) of this section shall be given to the National Response 
Center by telephone (toll-free) on 800-424-8802. Notice involving 
shipments transported by aircraft must be given to the nearest FAA Civil 
Aviation Security Office by telephone at the earliest practical moment 
after each incident in place of the notice to the National Response 
Center. Notice involving etiologic agents may be given to the Director, 
Centers for Disease Control, U.S. Public Health Service, Atlanta, Ga. 
(800) 232-0124, in place of the notice to the National Response Center 
or (toll call) on 202-267-2675. Each notice must include the following 
information:
    (1) Name of reporter.
    (2) Name and address of carrier represented by reporter.
    (3) Phone number where reporter can be contacted.
    (4) Date, time, and location of incident.
    (5) The extent of injuries, if any.
    (6) Classification, name, and quantity of hazardous materials 
involved, if such information is available.
    (7) Type of incident and nature of hazardous material involvement 
and whether a continuing danger to life exists at the scene.
    (c) Each carrier making a report under this section shall also make 
the report required by Sec. 171.16.

    Note: Under 40 CFR 302.6 EPA requires persons in charge of 
facilities (including transport vehicles, vessels and aircraft) to 
report any release of a hazardous substance in a quantity equal to or 
greater than its reportable quantity, as soon as that person has 
knowledge of the release, to the U.S. Coast Guard National Response 
Center at (toll free) 800-424-8802 or (toll) 202-267-2675.

[Amdt. 171-7, 35 FR 16837, Oct. 3, 1970]

    Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting 
Sec. 171.15, see the List of CFR Sections Affected which appears in the 
Finding Aids section of the printed volume and on GPO Access.

    Effective Date Note: At 67 FR 53133, Aug. 14, 2002, Sec. 171.15 was 
amended in paragraph (a)(3) by removing the term ``(etiologic agents)'' 
and in paragraph (b) introductory text by removing the term ``etiologic 
agents'' and in its place adding the term ``infectious substances'', and 
by adding the wording ``; however, a written report is still required as 
stated in paragraph (c) of this section'' immediately after the number 
``202-267-2675'', effective Oct. 1, 2002. At 67 FR 54967, Aug. 27, 2002, 
the effective date was corrected to Feb. 14, 2003.



Sec. 171.16  Detailed hazardous materials incident reports.

    (a) Each carrier who transports hazardous materials shall report in 
writing, in duplicate, on DOT Form F 5800.1 (Rev. 6/89) to the 
Department within 30 days of the date of discovery, each incident that 
occurs during the course of transportation (including loading, 
unloading, and temporary storage) in which any of the circumstances set 
forth in Sec. 171.15(a) occurs or there has been an unintentional 
release of hazardous materials from a package (including a tank) or any 
quantity of hazardous waste has been discharged during transportation. 
If a report pertains to a hazardous waste discharge:
    (1) A copy of the hazardous waste manifest for the waste must be 
attached to the report; and
    (2) An estimate of the quantity of the waste removed from the scene, 
the name and address of the facility to which it was taken, and the 
manner of disposition of any removed waste must be entered in Section IX 
of the report form (Form F 5800.1) (Rev. 6/89).
    (b) Each carrier making a report under this section shall send the 
report to the Information Systems Manager, DHM-63, Research and Special 
Programs Administration, Department of Transportation, Washington, DC 
20590-0001; and, for incidents involving transportation by aircraft, a 
copy of the report shall also be sent to the FAA Civil Aviation Security 
Office nearest the location of the incident. A copy of the report shall 
be retained for a period of two years, at the carrier's principal place 
of business, or at other places as authorized and approved in writing by 
an agency of the Department of Transportation.
    (c) Except as provided in paragraph (d) of this section, the 
requirements of paragraph (a) of this section do not apply to incidents 
involving the unintentional release of a hazardous material--

[[Page 104]]

    (1) Transported under one of the following proper shipping names:
    (i) Consumer commodity.
    (ii) Battery, electric storage, wet, filled with acid or alkali.
    (iii) Paint and paint related material when shipped in a packaging 
of five gallons or less.
    (2) Prepared and transported as a limited quantity shipment in 
accordance with this subchapter.
    (d) The exceptions to incident reporting provided in paragraph (c) 
of this section do not apply to:
    (1) Incidents required to be reported under Sec. 171.15(a);
    (2) Incidents involving transportation aboard aircraft;
    (3) Except for consumer commodities, materials in Packing Group I; 
or
    (4) Incidents involving the transportation of hazardous waste.

    Note: A guideline document for assisting in the completion of DOT 
Form F 5800.1 (Rev. 6/89) may be obtained from the Office of Hazardous 
Materials Transportation, DHM-51, U.S. Department of Transportation, 
Washington, DC 20590-0001.

[Amdt. 171-7, 35 FR 16837, Oct. 3, 1970, as amended by Amdt. 171-56, 45 
FR 73683, Nov. 6, 1980; Amdt. No. 171-65, 47 FR 24584, June 7, 1982; 
Amdt. 171-72, 48 FR 17095, Apr. 21, 1983; Amdt. 171-101, 54 FR 25813, 
June 19, 1989; Amdt. 171-109, 55 FR 39978, Oct. 1, 1990; Amdt. 171-140, 
61 FR 18932, Apr. 29, 1996; Amdt. 171-145, 61 FR 27172, May 30, 1996]



Secs. 171.17-171.18  [Reserved]



Sec. 171.19  Approvals or authorizations issued by the Bureau of Explosives.

    Effective December 31, 1998, approvals or authorizations issued by 
the Bureau of Explosives (BOE), other than those issued under part 179 
of this subchapter, are no longer valid.

[63 FR 37459, July 10, 1998]



Sec. 171.20  Submission of Examination Reports.

    (a) When it is required in this subchapter that the issuance of an 
approval by the Associate Administrator be based on an examination by 
the Bureau of Explosives (or any other test facility recognized by 
RSPA), it is the responsibility of the applicant to submit the results 
of the examination to the Associate Administrator.
    (b) Applications for approval submitted under paragraph (a) of this 
section, must be submitted to the Associate Administrator for Hazardous 
Materials Safety, Research and Special Programs Administration, 
Washington, DC 20590-0001.
    (c) Any applicant for an approval aggrieved by an action taken by 
the Associate Administrator, under this subpart may file an appeal with 
the Administrator, RSPA within 30 days of service of notification of a 
denial.

[Amdt. 171-54, 45 FR 32692, May 19, 1980, as amended by Amdt. 171-66, 47 
FR 43064, Sept. 30, 1982; Amdt. 171-109, 55 FR 39978, Oct. 1, 1990; 
Amdt. 171-111, 56 FR 66162, Dec. 20, 1991; 66 FR 45378, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 171.21  Assistance in investigations and special studies.

    (a) A carrier who is responsible for reporting an incident under the 
provisions of Sec. 171.16 shall make all records and information 
pertaining to the incident available to an authorized representative or 
special agent of the Department upon request. The carrier shall give an 
authorized representative or special agent of the Department reasonable 
assistance in the investigation of the incident.
    (b) If the Department makes an inquiry to a carrier of hazardous 
materials in connection with a study of incidents, the carrier shall--
    (1) Respond to the inquiry within 30 days after its receipt or 
within such other time as the inquiry may specify; and
    (2) Provide full, true, and correct answers to any questions 
included in the inquiry.

[Amdt. 171-101, 54 FR 25813, June 19, 1989, as amended at 66 FR 45378, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



PART 172--HAZARDOUS MATERIALS TABLE, SPECIAL PROVISIONS, HAZARDOUS MATERIALS COMMUNICATIONS, EMERGENCY RESPONSE INFORMATION, AND TRAINING REQUIREMENTS--Table of Contents




                           Subpart A--General

Sec.
172.1  Purpose and scope.
172.3  Applicability.

[[Page 105]]

     Subpart B--Table of Hazardous Materials and Special Provisions

172.101  Purpose and use of hazardous materials table.
172.102  Special provisions.

                       Subpart C--Shipping Papers

172.200  Applicability.
172.201  Preparation and retention of shipping papers.
172.202  Description of hazardous material on shipping papers.
172.203  Additional description requirements.
172.204  Shipper's certification.
172.205  Hazardous waste manifest.

                           Subpart D--Marking

172.300  Applicability.
172.301  General marking requirements for non-bulk packagings.
172.302  General marking requirements for bulk packagings.
172.303  Prohibited marking.
172.304  Marking requirements.
172.306  [Reserved]
172.308  Authorized abbreviations.
172.310  Class 7 (radioactive) materials.
172.312  Liquid hazardous materials in non-bulk packagings.
172.313  Poisonous hazardous materials.
172.316  Packagings containing materials classed as ORM-D.
172.320  Explosive hazardous materials.
172.322  Marine pollutants.
172.323  Infectious substances.
172.324  Hazardous substances in non-bulk packagings.
172.325  Elevated temperature materials.
172.326  Portable tanks.
172.328  Cargo tanks.
172.330  Tank cars and multi-unit tank car tanks.
172.331  Bulk packagings other than portable tanks, cargo tanks, tank 
          cars and multi-unit tank car tanks.
172.332  Identification number markings.
172.334  Identification numbers; prohibited display.
172.336  Identification numbers; special provisions.
172.338  Replacement of identification numbers.

                           Subpart E--Labeling

172.400  General labeling requirements.
172.400a  Exceptions from labeling.
172.401  Prohibited labeling.
172.402  Additional labeling requirements.
172.403  Class 7 (radioactive) material.
172.404  Labels for mixed and consolidated packaging.
172.405  Authorized label modifications.
172.406  Placement of labels.
172.407  Label specifications.
172.411  EXPLOSIVE 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5 and 1.6 labels.
172.415  NON-FLAMMABLE GAS label.
172.416  POISON GAS label.
172.417  FLAMMABLE GAS label.
172.419  FLAMMABLE LIQUID label.
172.420  FLAMMABLE SOLID label.
172.422  SPONTANEOUSLY COMBUSTIBLE label.
172.423  DANGEROUS WHEN WET label.
172.426  OXIDIZER label.
172.427  ORGANIC PEROXIDE label.
172.429  POISON INHALATION HAZARD label.
172.430  POISON label.
172.431  [Reserved]
172.432  INFECTIOUS SUBSTANCE label.
172.436  RADIOACTIVE WHITE-I label.
172.438  RADIOACTIVE YELLOW-II label.
172.440  RADIOACTIVE YELLOW-III label.
172.442  CORROSIVE label.
172.444  [Reserved]
172.446  CLASS 9 label.
172.448  CARGO AIRCRAFT ONLY label.
172.450  EMPTY label.

                          Subpart F--Placarding

172.500  Applicability of placarding requirements.
172.502  Prohibited and permissive placarding.
172.503  Identification number display on placards.
172.504  General placarding requirements.
172.505  Placarding for subsidiary hazards.
172.506  Providing and affixing placards: Highway.
172.507  Special placarding provisions: Highway.
172.508  Placarding and affixing placarding: Rail.
172.510  Special placarding provisions: Rail.
172.512  Freight containers and aircraft unit load devices.
172.514  Bulk packagings.
172.516  Visibility and display of placards.
172.519  General specifications for placards.
172.521  DANGEROUS placard.
172.522  EXPLOSIVES 1.1, EXPLOSIVES 1.2 and EXPLOSIVES 1.3 placards.
172.523  EXPLOSIVES 1.4 placard.
172.524  EXPLOSIVES 1.5 placard.
172.525  EXPLOSIVES 1.6 placard.
172.526  [Reserved]
172.527  Background requirements for certain placards.
172.528  NON-FLAMMABLE GAS placard.
172.530  OXYGEN placard.
172.532  FLAMMABLE GAS placard.
172.536  [Reserved]
172.540  POISON GAS placard.
172.542  FLAMMABLE placard.
172.544  COMBUSTIBLE placard.
172.546  FLAMMABLE SOLID placard.
172.547  SPONTANEOUSLY COMBUSTIBLE placard.

[[Page 106]]

172.548  DANGEROUS WHEN WET placard.
172.550  OXIDIZER placard.
172.552  ORGANIC PEROXIDE placard.
172.553  [Reserved]
172.554  POISON placard.
172.555  POISON INHALATION HAZARD placard.
172.556  RADIOACTIVE placard.
172.558  CORROSIVE placard.
172.560  CLASS 9 placard.

                Subpart G--Emergency Response Information

172.600  Applicability and general requirements.
172.602  Emergency response information.
172.604  Emergency response telephone number.
172.606  Carrier information contact.

                           Subpart H--Training

172.700  Purpose and scope.
172.701  Federal-State relationship.
172.702  Applicability and responsibility for training and testing.
172.704  Training requirements.

Appendix A to Part 172--Office of Hazardous Materials Transportation 
          Color Tolerance Charts and Tables
Appendix B to Part 172--Trefoil Symbol
Appendix C to Part 172--Dimensional Specifications for Recommended 
          Placard Holder

    Authority: 49 U.S.C. 5101-5127; 49 CFR 1.53.

    Source: Amdt. 172-29, 41 FR 15996, Apr. 15, 1976, unless otherwise 
noted.



                           Subpart A--General



Sec. 172.1  Purpose and scope.

    This part lists and classifies those materials which the Department 
has designated as hazardous materials for purposes of transportation and 
prescribes the requirements for shipping papers, package marking, 
labeling, and transport vehicle placarding applicable to the shipment 
and transportation of those hazardous materials.

[Amdt. 172-29, 41 FR 15997, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by 66 FR 45379, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 172.3  Applicability.

    (a) This part applies to--
    (1) Each person who offers a hazardous material for transportation, 
and
    (2) Each carrier by air, highway, rail, or water who transports a 
hazardous material.
    (b) When a person, other than one of those provided for in paragraph 
(a) of this section, performs a packaging labeling or marking function 
required by this part, that person shall perform the function in 
accordance with this part.

[Amdt. 172-29, 41 FR 15996, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 172-32, 
41 FR 38179, Sept. 9, 1976]



     Subpart B--Table of Hazardous Materials and Special Provisions



Sec. 172.101  Purpose and use of hazardous materials table.

    (a) The Hazardous Materials Table (Table) in this section designates 
the materials listed therein as hazardous materials for the purpose of 
transportation of those materials. For each listed material, the Table 
identifies the hazard class or specifies that the material is forbidden 
in transportation, and gives the proper shipping name or directs the 
user to the preferred proper shipping name. In addition, the Table 
specifies or references requirements in this subchapter pertaining to 
labeling, packaging, quantity limits aboard aircraft and stowage of 
hazardous materials aboard vessels.
    (b) Column 1: Symbols. Column 1 of the Table contains six symbols 
(``+'', ``A'', ``D'', ``G'', ``I'' and ``W'') as follows:
    (1) The plus (+) sign fixes the proper shipping name, hazard class 
and packing group for that entry without regard to whether the material 
meets the definition of that class, packing group or any other hazard 
class definition. When the plus sign is assigned to a proper shipping 
name in Column (1) of the Sec. 172.101 Table, it means that the material 
is known to pose a risk to humans. When a plus sign is assigned to 
mixtures or solutions containing a material where the hazard to humans 
is significantly different from that of the pure material or where no 
hazard to humans is posed, the material may be described using an 
alternative shipping name that represents the hazards posed by the 
material. An appropriate alternate proper shipping name and hazard class 
may be authorized by the Associate Administrator.
    (2) The letter ``A'' denotes a material that is subject to the 
requirements of this subchapter only when offered or

[[Page 107]]

intended for transportation by aircraft, unless the material is a 
hazardous substance or a hazardous waste. A shipping description entry 
preceded by an ``A'' may be used to describe a material for other modes 
of transportation provided all applicable requirements for the entry are 
met.
    (3) The letter ``D'' identifies proper shipping names which are 
appropriate for describing materials for domestic transportation but may 
be inappropriate for international transportation under the provisions 
of international regulations (e.g., IMO, ICAO). An alternate proper 
shipping name may be selected when either domestic or international 
transportation is involved.
    (4) The letter ``G'' identifies proper shipping names for which one 
or more technical names of the hazardous material must be entered in 
parentheses, in association with the basic description. (See 
Sec. 172.203(k).)
    (5) The letter ``I'' identifies proper shipping names which are 
appropriate for describing materials in international transportation. An 
alternate proper shipping name may be selected when only domestic 
transportation is involved.
    (6) The letter ``W'' denotes a material that is subject to the 
requirements of this subchapter only when offered or intended for 
transportation by vessel, unless the material is a hazardous substance 
or a hazardous waste. A shipping description entry preceded by a ``W'' 
may be used to describe a material for other modes of transportation 
provided all applicable requirements for the entry are met.
    (c) Column 2: Hazardous materials descriptions and proper shipping 
names. Column 2 lists the hazardous materials descriptions and proper 
shipping names of materials designated as hazardous materials. 
Modification of a proper shipping name may otherwise be required or 
authorized by this section. Proper shipping names are limited to those 
shown in Roman type (not italics).
    (1) Proper shipping names may be used in the singular or plural and 
in either capital or lower case letters. Words may be alternatively 
spelled in the same manner as they appear in the ICAO Technical 
Instructions or the IMDG Code. For example ``aluminum'' may be spelled 
``aluminium'' and ``sulfur'' may be spelled ``sulphur''. However, the 
word ``inflammable'' may not be used in place of the word ``flammable''.
    (2) Punctuation marks and words in italics are not part of the 
proper shipping name, but may be used in addition to the proper shipping 
name. The word ``or'' in italics indicates that terms in the sequence 
may be used as the proper shipping name, as appropriate.
    (3) The word ``poison'' or ``poisonous'' may be used interchangeably 
with the word ``toxic'' when only domestic transportation is involved. 
The abbreviation ``n.o.i.'' or ``n.o.i.b.n.'' may be used 
interchangeably with ``n.o.s.''.
    (4) Except for hazardous wastes, when qualifying words are used as 
part of the proper shipping name, their sequence in the package markings 
and shipping paper description is optional. However, the entry in the 
Table reflects the preferred sequence.
    (5) When one entry references another entry by use of the word 
``see'', if both names are in Roman type, either name may be used as the 
proper shipping name (e.g., Ethyl alcohol, see Ethanol).
    (6) When a proper shipping name includes a concentration range as 
part of the shipping description, the actual concentration, if it is 
within the range stated, may be used in place of the concentration 
range. For example, an aqueous solution of hydrogen peroxide containing 
30 percent peroxide may be described as ``Hydrogen peroxide, aqueous 
solution with not less than 20 percent but not more than 40 percent 
hydrogen peroxide'' or ``Hydrogen peroxide, aqueous solution with 30 
percent hydrogen peroxide''.
    (7) Use of the prefix ``mono'' is optional in any shipping name, 
when appropriate. Thus, Iodine monochloride may be used interchangeably 
with Iodine chloride. In ``Glycerol alpha-monochlorohydrin'' the term 
``mono'' is considered a prefix to the term ``chlorohydrin'' and may be 
deleted.
    (8) Use of the word ``liquid'' or ``solid''. The word ``liquid'' or 
``solid'' may be added to a proper shipping name when a hazardous 
material specifically listed by name may, due to

[[Page 108]]

differing physical states, be a liquid or solid. When the packaging 
specified in Column 8 is inappropriate for the physical state of the 
material, the table provided in paragraph (i)(4) of this section should 
be used to determine the appropriate packaging section.
    (9) Hazardous wastes. If the word ``waste'' is not included in the 
hazardous material description in Column 2 of the Table, the proper 
shipping name for a hazardous waste (as defined in Sec. 171.8 of this 
subchapter), shall include the word ``Waste'' preceding the proper 
shipping name of the material. For example: Waste acetone.
    (10) Mixtures and solutions. (i) A mixture or solution not 
identified specifically by name, comprised of a hazardous material 
identified in the Table by technical name and non-hazardous material, 
shall be described using the proper shipping name of the hazardous 
material and the qualifying word ``mixture'' or ``solution'', as 
appropriate, unless--
    (A) Except as provided in Sec. 172.101(i)(4) the packaging specified 
in Column 8 is inappropriate to the physical state of the material;
    (B) The shipping description indicates that the proper shipping name 
applies only to the pure or technically pure hazardous material;
    (C) The hazard class, packing group, or subsidiary hazard of the 
mixture or solution is different from that specified for the entry;
    (D) There is a significant change in the measures to be taken in 
emergencies;
    (E) The material is identified by special provision in Column 7 of 
the Sec. 172.101 Table as a material poisonous by inhalation; however, 
it no longer meets the definition of poisonous by inhalation or it falls 
within a different hazard zone than that specified in the special 
provision; or
    (F) The material can be appropriately described by a shipping name 
that describes its intended application, such as ``Coating solution'', 
``Extracts, flavoring'' or ``Compound, cleaning liquid''.
    (ii) If one or more of the conditions specified in paragraph 
(c)(10)(i) of this section is satisfied, then a proper shipping name 
shall be selected as prescribed in paragraph (c)(12)(ii) of this 
section.
    (iii) A mixture or solution not identified in the Table specifically 
by name, comprised of two or more hazardous materials in the same hazard 
class, shall be described using an appropriate shipping description 
(e.g., ``Flammable liquid, n.o.s.''). The name that most appropriately 
describes the material shall be used; e.g., an alcohol not listed by its 
technical name in the Table shall be described as ``Alcohol, n.o.s.'' 
rather than ``Flammable liquid, n.o.s.''. Some mixtures may be more 
appropriately described according to their application, such as 
``Coating solution'' or ``Extracts, flavoring liquid'' rather than by an 
n.o.s. entry. Under the provisions of subparts C and D of this part, the 
technical names of at least two components most predominately 
contributing to the hazards of the mixture or solution may be required 
in association with the proper shipping name.
    (11) Except for a material subject to or prohibited by Secs. 173.21, 
173.54, 173.56(d), 173.56(e), 173.224(c) or 173.225(c) of this 
subchapter, a material that is considered to be a hazardous waste or a 
sample of a material for which the hazard class is uncertain and must be 
determined by testing may be assigned a tentative proper shipping name, 
hazard class, identification number and packing group, if applicable, 
based on the shipper's tentative determination according to:
    (i) Defining criteria in this subchapter;
    (ii) The hazard precedence prescribed in Sec. 173.2a of this 
subchapter;
    (iii) The shippers knowledge of the material;
    (iv) In addition to paragraphs (c)(11)(i) through (iii) of this 
section, for a sample of a material, other than a waste, the following 
must be met:
    (A) Except when the word ``Sample'' already appears in the proper 
shipping name, the word ``Sample'' must appear as part of the proper 
shipping name or in association with the basic description on the 
shipping paper.
    (B) When the proper shipping description for a sample is assigned a 
``G'' in Column (1) of the Sec. 172.101 Table, and the primary 
constituent(s) for which the tentative classification is based are

[[Page 109]]

not known, the provisions requiring a technical name for the 
constituent(s) do not apply; and
    (C) A sample must be transported in a combination packaging which 
conforms to the requirements of this subchapter that are applicable to 
the tentative packing group assigned, and may not exceed a net mass of 
2.5 kg. (5.5 pounds) per package.
    Note to Paragraph (c)(11): For the transportation of self-reactive, 
organic peroxide and explosive samples, see Secs. 173.224(c)(3), 
173.225(c)(2) and 173.56(d) of this subchapter, respectively.
    (12) Except when the proper shipping name in the Table is preceded 
by a plus (+)--
    (i) If it is specifically determined that a material meets the 
definition of a hazard class, packing group or hazard zone, other than 
the class, packing group or hazard zone shown in association with the 
proper shipping name, or does not meet the defining criteria for a 
subsidiary hazard shown in Column 6 of the Table, the material shall be 
described by an appropriate proper shipping name listed in association 
with the correct hazard class, packing group, hazard zone, or subsidiary 
hazard for the material.
    (ii) Generic or n.o.s. descriptions. If an appropriate technical 
name is not shown in the Table, selection of a proper shipping name 
shall be made from the generic or n.o.s. descriptions corresponding to 
the specific hazard class, packing group, hazard zone, or subsidiary 
hazard, if any, for the material. The name that most appropriately 
describes the material shall be used; e.g., an alcohol not listed by its 
technical name in the Table shall be described as ``Alcohol, n.o.s.'' 
rather than ``Flammable liquid, n.o.s.''. Some mixtures may be more 
appropriately described according to their application, such as 
``Coating solution'' or ``Extracts, flavoring, liquid'', rather than by 
an n.o.s. entry, such as ``Flammable liquid, n.o.s.'' It should be 
noted, however, that an n.o.s. description as a proper shipping name may 
not provide sufficient information for shipping papers and package 
markings. Under the provisions of subparts C and D of this part, the 
technical name of one or more constituents which makes the product a 
hazardous material may be required in association with the proper 
shipping name.
    (iii) Multiple hazard materials. If a material meets the definition 
of more than one hazard class, and is not identified in the Table 
specifically by name (e.g., acetyl chloride), the hazard class of the 
material shall be determined by using the precedence specified in 
Sec. 173.2a of this subchapter, and an appropriate shipping description 
(e.g., ``Flammable liquid, corrosive n.o.s.'') shall be selected as 
described in paragraph (c)(12)(ii) of this section.
    (iv) If it is specifically determined that a material is not a 
forbidden material and does not meet the definition of any hazard class, 
the material is not a hazardous material.
    (13) Self-reactive materials and organic peroxides. A generic proper 
shipping name for a self-reactive material or an organic peroxide, as 
listed in Column 2 of the Table, must be selected based on the 
material's technical name and concentration, in accordance with the 
provisions of Secs. 173.224 or 173.225 of this subchapter, respectively.
    (14) A proper shipping name that describes all isomers of a material 
may be used to identify any isomer of that material if the isomer meets 
criteria for the same hazard class or division, subsidiary risk(s) and 
packing group, unless the isomer is specifically identified in the 
Table.
    (15) Hydrates of inorganic substances may be identified using the 
proper shipping name for the equivalent anhydrous substance if the 
hydrate meets the same hazard class or division, subsidiary risk(s) and 
packing group, unless the hydrate is specifically identified in the 
Table.
    (16) Unless it is already included in the proper shipping name in 
the Sec. 172.101 Table, the qualifying words ``liquid'' or ``solid'' may 
be added in association with the proper shipping name when a hazardous 
material specifically listed by name in the Sec. 172.101 Table may, due 
to the differing physical states of the various isomers of the material, 
be either a liquid or a solid (for example ``Dinitrotoluenes, liquid'' 
and ``Dinitrotoluenes, solid''). Use of the words ``liquid'' or 
``solid'' is subject to the limitations specified for the use of the 
words ``mixture'' or ``solution''

[[Page 110]]

in paragraph (c)(10) of this section. The qualifying word ``molten'' may 
be added in association with the proper shipping name when a hazardous 
material, which is a solid in accordance with the definition in 
Sec. 171.8 of this subchapter, is offered for transportation in the 
molten state (for example, ``Alkylphenols, solid, n.o.s., molten'').
    (d) Column 3: Hazard class or Division. Column 3 contains a 
designation of the hazard class or division corresponding to each proper 
shipping name, or the word ``Forbidden''.
    (1) A material for which the entry in this column is ``Forbidden'' 
may not be offered for transportation or transported. This prohibition 
does not apply if the material is diluted, stabilized or incorporated in 
a device and it is classed in accordance with the definitions of 
hazardous materials contained in part 173 of this subchapter.
    (2) When a reevaluation of test data or new data indicates a need to 
modify the ``Forbidden'' designation or the hazard class or packing 
group specified for a material specifically identified in the Table, 
this data should be submitted to the Associate Administrator.
    (3) A basic description of each hazard class and the section 
reference for class definitions appear in Sec. 173.2 of this subchapter.
    (4) Each reference to a Class 3 material is modified to read 
``Combustible liquid'' when that material is reclassified in accordance 
with Sec. 173.150 (e) or (f) of this subchapter or has a flash point 
above 60.5  deg.C (141  deg.F) but below 93  deg.C (200  deg.F).
    (e) Column 4: Identification number. Column 4 lists the 
identification number assigned to each proper shipping name. Those 
preceded by the letters ``UN'' are associated with proper shipping names 
considered appropriate for international transportation as well as 
domestic transportation. Those preceded by the letters ``NA'' are 
associated with proper shipping names not recognized for international 
transportation, except to and from Canada. Identification numbers in the 
``NA9000'' series are associated with proper shipping names not 
appropriately covered by international hazardous materials (dangerous 
goods) transportation standards, or not appropriately addressed by 
international transportation standards for emergency response 
information purposes, except for transportation between the United 
States and Canada.
    (f) Column 5: Packing group. Column 5 specifies one or more packing 
groups assigned to a material corresponding to the proper shipping name 
and hazard class for that material. Class 2, Class 7, Division 6.2 
(other than regulated medical wastes), and ORM-D materials, do not have 
packing groups. Packing Groups I, II and III indicate the degree of 
danger presented by the material is either great, medium or minor, 
respectively. If more than one packing group is indicated for an entry, 
the packing group for the hazardous material is determined using the 
criteria for assignment of packing groups specified in subpart D of part 
173. When a reevaluation of test data or new data indicates a need to 
modify the specified packing group(s), the data should be submitted to 
the Associate Administrator. Each reference in this column to a material 
which is a hazardous waste or a hazardous substance, and whose proper 
shipping name is preceded in Column 1 of the Table by the letter ``A'' 
or ``W'', is modified to read ``III'' on those occasions when the 
material is offered for transportation or transported by a mode in which 
its transportation is not otherwise subject to requirements of this 
subchapter.
    (g) Column 6: Labels. Column 6 specifies codes which represent the 
hazard warning labels required for a package filled with a material 
conforming to the associated hazard class and proper shipping name, 
unless the package is otherwise excepted from labeling by a provision in 
subpart E of this part, or part 173 of this subchapter. The first code 
is indicative of the primary hazard of the material. Additional label 
codes are indicative of subsidiary hazards. Provisions in Sec. 172.402 
may require that a label other than that specified in Column 6 be 
affixed to the package in addition to that specified in Column 6. No 
label is required for a material classed as a combustible liquid or for 
a Class 3 material that is reclassed as a combustible liquid. For 
``Empty'' label

[[Page 111]]

requirements, see Sec. 173.428 of this subchapter. The codes contained 
in Column 6 are defined according to the following table:

                        Label Substitution Table
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                Label code                           Label name
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.........................................  Explosive
1.1 \1\...................................  Explosive 1.1\1\
1.2 \1\...................................  Explosive 1.2\1\
1.3 \1\...................................  Explosive 1.3\1\
1.4 \1\...................................  Explosive 1.4\1\
1.5 \1\...................................  Explosive 1.5\1\
1.6 \1\...................................  Explosive 1.6\1\
2.1.......................................  Flammable Gas
2.2.......................................  Non-Flammable Gas
2.3.......................................  Poison Gas
3.........................................  Flammable Liquid
4.1.......................................  Flammable Solid
4.2.......................................  Spontaneously Combustible
4.3.......................................  Dangerous When Wet
5.1.......................................  Oxidizer
5.2.......................................  Organic Peroxide
6.1 (inhalation hazard, Zone A or B)......  Poison Inhalation Hazard
6.1 (other than inhalation hazard, Zone A   Poison
 or B) \2\.
6.2.......................................  Infectious substance
7.........................................  Radioactive
8.........................................  Corrosive
9.........................................  Class 9
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Refers to the appropriate compatibility group letter.
\2\ The packing group for a material is indicated in column 5 of the
  table.

    (h) Column 7: Special provisions. Column 7 specifies codes for 
special provisions applicable to hazardous materials. When Column 7 
refers to a special provision for a hazardous material, the meaning and 
requirements of that special provision are as set forth in Sec. 172.102 
of this subpart.
    (i) Column 8: Packaging authorizations. Columns 8A, 8B and 8C 
specify the applicable sections for exceptions, non-bulk packaging 
requirements and bulk packaging requirements, respectively, in part 173 
of this subchapter. Columns 8A, 8B and 8C are completed in a manner 
which indicates that ``Sec. 173.'' precedes the designated numerical 
entry. For example, the entry ``202'' in Column 8B associated with the 
proper shipping name ``Gasoline'' indicates that for this material 
conformance to non-bulk packaging requirements prescribed in 
Sec. 173.202 of this subchapter is required. When packaging requirements 
are specified, they are in addition to the standard requirements for all 
packagings prescribed in Sec. 173.24 of this subchapter and any other 
applicable requirements in subparts A and B of part 173 of this 
subchapter.
    (1) Exceptions. Column 8A contains exceptions from some of the 
requirements of this subchapter. The referenced exceptions are in 
addition to those specified in subpart A of part 173 and elsewhere in 
this subchapter. A ``None'' in this column means no packaging exceptions 
are authorized, except as may be provided by special provisions in 
Column 7.
    (2) Non-bulk packaging. Column 8B references the section in part 173 
of this subchapter which prescribes packaging requirements for non-bulk 
packagings. A ``None'' in this column means non-bulk packagings are not 
authorized, except as may be provided by special provisions in Column 7. 
Each reference in this column to a material which is a hazardous waste 
or a hazardous substance, and whose proper shipping name is preceded in 
Column 1 of the Table by the letter ``A'' or ``W'', is modified to 
include ``Sec. 173.203'' or ``Sec. 173.213'', as appropriate for liquids 
and solids, respectively, on those occasions when the material is 
offered for transportation or transported by a mode in which its 
transportation is not otherwise subject to the requirements of this 
subchapter.
    (3) Bulk packaging. Column 8C specifies the section in part 173 of 
this subchapter which prescribes packaging requirements for bulk 
packagings, subject to the limitations, requirements and additional 
authorizations of Column 7. A ``None'' in this column means bulk 
packagings are not authorized, except as may be provided by special 
provisions in Column 7. Additional authorizations and limitations for 
use of IM portable tanks are set forth in Column 7. For each reference 
in this column to a material which is a hazardous waste or a hazardous 
substance, and whose proper shipping name is preceded in Column 1 of the 
Table by the letter ``A'' or ``W'' and which is offered for 
transportation or transported by a mode in which its transportation is 
not otherwise subject to the requirements of this subchapter:
    (i) The column reference is Sec. 173.240 or Sec. 173.241, as 
appropriate.
    (ii) For a solid material, the exception provided in Special 
provision B54 is applicable.

[[Page 112]]

    (iii) For a Class 9 material which meets the definition of an 
elevated temperature material, the column reference is Sec. 173.247.
    (4) For a hazardous material which is specifically named in the 
Table and whose packaging sections specify packagings not applicable to 
the form of the material (e.g., packaging specified is for solid 
material and the material is being offered for transportation in a 
liquid form) the following table should be used to determine the 
appropriate packaging section:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                 Corresponding packaging
Packaging section reference for solid materials     section for liquid
                                                        materials
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sec.  173.187..................................            Sec.  173.181
Sec.  173.211..................................            Sec.  173.201
Sec.  173.212..................................            Sec.  173.202
Sec.  173.213..................................            Sec.  173.203
Sec.  173.240..................................            Sec.  173.241
Sec.  173.242..................................            Sec.  173.243
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (j) Column 9: Quantity limitations. Columns 9A and 9B specify the 
maximum quantities that may be offered for transportation in one package 
by passenger-carrying aircraft or passenger-carrying rail car (Column 
9A) or by cargo aircraft only (Column 9B), subject to the following:
    (1) ``Forbidden'' means the material may not be offered for 
transportation or transported in the applicable mode of transport.
    (2) The quantity limitation is ``net'' except where otherwise 
specified, such as for ``Consumer commodity'' which specifies ``30 kg 
gross.''
    (3) When articles or devices are specifically listed by name, the 
net quantity limitation applies to the entire article or device (less 
packaging and packaging materials) rather than only to its hazardous 
components.
    (4) A package offered or intended for transportation by aircraft and 
which is filled with a material forbidden on passenger-carrying aircraft 
but permitted on cargo aircraft only, or which exceeds the maximum net 
quantity authorized on passenger-carrying aircraft, shall be labelled 
with the CARGO AIRCRAFT ONLY label specified in Sec. 172.448 of this 
part.
    (5) The total net quantity of hazardous material for an outer non-
bulk packaging that contains more than one hazardous material may not 
exceed the lowest permitted maximum net quantity per package as shown in 
Column 9A or 9B, as appropriate. If one material is a liquid and one is 
a solid, the maximum net quantity must be calculated in kilograms. See 
Sec. 173.24a(c)(1)(iv).
    (k) Column 10: Vessel stowage requirements. Column 10A [Vessel 
stowage] specifies the authorized stowage locations on board cargo and 
passenger vessels. Column 10B [Other provisions] specifies codes for 
stowage requirements for specific hazardous materials. The meaning of 
each code in Column 10B is set forth in Sec. 176.84 of this subchapter. 
Section 176.63 of this subchapter sets forth the physical requirements 
for each of the authorized locations listed in Column 10A. (For bulk 
transportation by vessel, see 46 CFR parts 30 to 40, 70, 98, 148, 151, 
153 and 154.) The authorized stowage locations specified in Column 10A 
are defined as follows:
    (1) Stowage category ``A'' means the material may be stowed ``on 
deck'' or ``under deck'' on a cargo vessel and on a passenger vessel.
    (2) Stowage category ``B'' means--
    (i) The material may be stowed ``on deck'' or ``under deck'' on a 
cargo vessel and on a passenger vessel carrying a number of passengers 
limited to not more than the larger of 25 passengers, or one passenger 
per each 3 m of overall vessel length; and
    (ii) ``On deck only'' on passenger vessels in which the number of 
passengers specified in paragraph (k)(2)(i) of this section is exceeded.
    (3) Stowage category ``C'' means the material must be stowed ``on 
deck only'' on a cargo vessel and on a passenger vessel.
    (4) Stowage category ``D'' means the material must be stowed ``on 
deck only'' on a cargo vessel and on a passenger vessel carrying a 
number of passengers limited to not more than the larger of 25 
passengers or one passenger per each 3 m of overall vessel length, but 
the material is prohibited on passenger vessels in which the limiting 
number of passengers is exceeded.
    (5) Stowage category ``E'' means the material may be stowed ``on 
deck'' or ``under deck'' on a cargo vessel and on a passenger vessel 
carrying a number

[[Page 113]]

of passengers limited to not more than the larger of 25 passengers, or 
one passenger per each 3 m of overall vessel length, but is prohibited 
from carriage on passenger vessels in which the limiting number of 
passengers is exceeded.
    (6) Stowage category ``01'' means the material may be stowed ``on 
deck'' or ``under deck'' on a cargo vessel (up to 12 passengers) and on 
a passenger vessel.
    (7) Stowage category ``02'' means the material may be stowed ``on 
deck'' or ``under deck'' on a cargo vessel (up to 12 passengers) and 
``on deck'' in closed cargo transport units or ``under deck'' in closed 
cargo transport units on a passenger vessel.
    (8) Stowage category ``03'' means the material may be stowed ``on 
deck'' or ``under deck'' on a cargo vessel (up to 12 passengers) and 
``on deck'' in closed cargo transport units on a passenger vessel.
    (9) Stowage category ``04'' means the material may be stowed ``on 
deck'' or ``under deck'' on a cargo vessel (up to 12 passengers) but the 
material is prohibited on a passenger vessel.
    (10) Stowage category ``05'' means the material may be stowed ``on 
deck'' in closed cargo transport units or ``under deck'' on a cargo 
vessel (up to 12 passengers) and on a passenger vessel.
    (11) Stowage category ``06'' means the material may be stowed ``on 
deck'' in closed cargo transport units or ``under deck'' on a cargo 
vessel (up to 12 passengers) and ``on deck'' in closed cargo transport 
units or ``under deck'' in closed cargo transport units on a passenger 
vessel.
    (12) Stowage category ``07'' means the material may be stowed ``on 
deck'' in closed cargo transport units or ``under deck'' on a cargo 
vessel (up to 12 passengers) and ``on deck'' only in closed cargo 
transport units on a passenger vessel.
    (13) Stowage category ``08'' means the material may be stowed ``on 
deck'' in closed cargo transport units or ``under deck'' on a cargo 
vessel (up to 12 passengers) but the material is prohibited on a 
passenger vessel.
    (14) Stowage category ``09'' means the material may be stowed ``on 
deck only'' in closed cargo transport units or ``under deck'' in closed 
cargo transport units on a cargo vessel (up to 12 passengers) and on a 
passenger vessel.
    (15) Stowage category ``10'' means the material may be stowed ``on 
deck'' in closed cargo transport units or ``under deck'' in closed cargo 
transport units on a cargo vessel (up to 12 passengers) and ``on deck'' 
only in closed cargo transport units on a passenger vessel.
    (16) Stowage category ``11'' means the material may be stowed ``on 
deck'' in closed cargo transport units or ``under deck'' in magazine 
stowage type ``c'' on a cargo vessel (up to 12 passengers) and ``on 
deck'' only in closed cargo transport units on a passenger vessel.
    (17) Stowage category ``12'' means the material may be stowed ``on 
deck'' in closed cargo transport units or ``under deck'' in magazine 
stowage type ``c'' on a cargo vessel (up to 12 passengers) but the 
material is prohibited on a passenger vessel.
    (18) Stowage category ``13'' means the material may be stowed ``on 
deck'' in closed cargo transport units or ``under deck'' in magazine 
stowage type ``A'' on a cargo vessel (up to 12 passengers) and ``on 
deck'' only in closed cargo transport units on a passenger vessel.
    (19) Stowage category ``14'' means the material may be stowed ``on 
deck'' in closed cargo transport units on a cargo vessel (up to 12 
passengers) but the material is prohibited on a passenger vessel.
    (20) Stowage category ``15'' means the material may be stowed ``on 
deck'' in closed cargo transport units or ``under deck'' in closed cargo 
transport units on a cargo vessel (up to 12 passengers) but the material 
is prohibited on a passenger vessel.
    (l) Changes to the Table. (1) Unless specifically stated otherwise 
in a rule document published in the Federal Register amending the Table-
-
    (i) Such a change does not apply to the shipment of any package 
filled prior to the effective date of the amendment; and
    (ii) Stocks of preprinted shipping papers and package markings may 
be continued in use, in the manner previously authorized, until depleted 
or for a one-year period, subsequent to the effective date of the 
amendment, whichever is less.

[[Page 114]]

    (2) Except as otherwise provided in this section, any alteration of 
a shipping description or associated entry which is listed in the 
Sec. 172.101 Table must receive prior written approval from the 
Associate Administrator.
    (3) The proper shipping name of a hazardous material changed in the 
May 6, 1997 final rule, in effect on October 1, 1997, only by the 
addition or omission of the word ``compressed,'' ``inhibited,'' 
``liquefied'' or ``solution'' may continue to be used to comply with 
package marking requirements, until January 1, 2003.

[[Page 115]]



                                                                             Sec.  172.101 Hazardous Materials Table
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                                                     (8)            Packaging                   (9)             (10)     Vessel
          Hazardous materials                                                                                       (Sec. 173.***)                 Quantity limitations           stowage
           descriptions and       Hazard      Identification                Label          Special    ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbols     proper shipping      class or         Numbers          PG       Codes    provisions (Sec.                                             Passenger
                 names           Division                                                172.102)        Exceptions      Non-bulk       Bulk      aircraft/    Cargo air-    Location     Other
                                                                                                                                                     rail      craft only
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(1)      (2).................          (3)  (4)                     (5)  (6).......               (7)  (8A)..........  (8B).......  (8C).......         (9A)         (9B)  (10A)           (10B)
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
         Accellerene, see p-   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Nitrosodimethylanil
          ine.
         Accumulators,         ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          electric, see
          Batteries, wet etc.
         Acetal..............            3  UN1088                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  E             .......
         Acetaldehyde........            3  UN1089                    I  3.........     A3, B16, T11,  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden         30 L  E             .......
                                                                                             TP2, TP7
    A    Acetaldehyde ammonia            9  UN1841                  III  9.........          IB8, IP6  155...........  204........  240........       200 kg       200 kg  A                  34
         Acetaldehyde oxime..            3  UN2332                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T4, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Acetic acid, glacial            8  UN2789                   II  8, 3......  A3, A6, A7, A10,  154...........  202........  243........          1 L         30 L  A             .......
          or Acetic acid                                                             B2, IB2, T7, TP2
          solution, with more
          than 80 percent
          acid, by mass.
         Acetic acid                     8  UN2790                   II  8.........  A3, A6, A7, A10,  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  A             .......
          solution, not less                                                         B2, IB2, T7, TP2
          than 50 percent but
          not more than 80
          percent acid, by
          mass.
         Acetic acid                     8  UN2790                  III  8.........      IB3, T4, TP1  154...........  203........  242........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
          solution, with more
          than 10 percent and
          less than 50
          percent acid, by
          mass.
         Acetic anhydride....            8  UN1715                   II  8, 3......  A3, A6, A7, A10,  154...........  202........  243........          1 L         30 L  A                  40
                                                                                     B2, IB2, T7, TP2
         Acetone.............            3  UN1090                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         Acetone cyanohydrin,          6.1  UN1541                    I  6.1.......   2, A3, B9, B14,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             25, 40,
          stabilized.                                                                  B32, B76, B77,                                                                                         49
                                                                                       N34, T20, TP2,
                                                                                     TP13, TP38, TP45
         Acetone oils........            3  UN1091                   II  3.........     IB2, T4, TP1,  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
                                                                                                  TP8
         Acetonitrile........            3  UN1648                   II  3.........      IB2, T7, TP2  150...........  202........  242........           5L         60 L  B                  40
         Acetyl acetone          Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          peroxide with more
          than 9 percent by
          mass active oxygen.
         Acetyl benzoyl          Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          peroxide, solid, or
          with more than 40
          percent in solution.
         Acetyl bromide......            8  UN1716                   II  8.........      B2, IB2, T8,  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  C                  40
                                                                                            TP2, TP12

[[Page 116]]

 
         Acetyl chloride.....            3  UN1717                   II  3, 8......  A3, A6, A7, IB1,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L          5 L  B                  40
                                                                                        N34, T8, TP2,
                                                                                                 TP12
         Acetyl                  Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          cyclohexanesulfonyl
          peroxide, with more
          than 82 percent
          wetted with less
          than 12 percent
          water.
         Acetyl iodide.......            8  UN1898                   II  8.........      B2, IB2, T7,  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  C                  40
                                                                                            TP2, TP13
         Acetyl methyl                   3  UN2621                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
          carbinol.
         Acetyl peroxide,        Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          solid, or with more
          than 25 percent in
          solution.
         Acetylene, dissolved          2.1  UN1001              .......  2.1.......                    None..........  303........  None.......    Forbidden        15 kg  D             25, 40,
                                                                                                                                                                                              57
         Acetylene               Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          (liquefied).
         Acetylene silver        Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          nitrate.
         Acetylene             ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          tetrabromide, see
          Tetrabromoethane.
         Acid butyl            ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          phosphate, see
          Butyl acid
          phosphate.
         Acid, sludge, see     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Sludge acid.
         Acridine............          6.1  UN2713                  III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A             .......
         Acrolein dimer,                 3  UN2607                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A                  40
          stabilized.
         Acrolein, stabilized          6.1  UN1092                    I  6.1, 3....  1, B9, B14, B30,  None..........  226........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
                                                                                       B42, B72, B77,
                                                                                       T22, TP2, TP7,
                                                                                     TP13, TP38, TP44
         Acrylamide..........          6.1  UN2074                  III  6.1.......     IB8, IP3, T4,  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A                  12
                                                                                                  TP1
         Acrylic acid,                   8  UN2218                   II  8, 3......  B2, IB2, T7, TP2  154...........  202........  243........          1 L         30 L  C              25, 40
          stabilized.
         Acrylonitrile,                  3  UN1093                    I  3, 6.1....     B9, T14, TP2,  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden         30 L  E                  40
          stabilized.                                                                            TP13
         Actuating cartridge,  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          explosive, see
          Cartridges, power
          device.
         Adhesives,                      3  UN1133                    I  3.........    B42, T11, TP1,  150...........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  B             .......
          containing a                                                                      TP8, TP27
          flammable liquid.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  3.........     B52, IB2, T4,  150...........  173........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
                                                                                             TP1, TP8

[[Page 117]]

 
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3.........     B1, B52, IB3,  150...........  173........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
                                                                                              T2, TP1
         Adiponitrile........          6.1  UN2205                  III  6.1.......      IB3, T3, TP1  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Aerosols, corrosive,          2.2  UN1950              .......  2.2, 8....               A34  306...........  None.......  None.......        75 kg       150 kg  A             40, 48,
          Packing Group II or                                                                                                                                                                 85
          III, (each not
          exceeding 1 L
          capacity).
         Aerosols, flammable,          2.1  UN1950              .......  2.1.......               N82  306...........  None.......  None.......        75 kg       150 kg  A             40, 48,
          (each not exceeding                                                                                                                                                                 85
          1 L capacity).
         Aerosols, flammable,          2.1  UN1950              .......  2.1.......               N82  306...........  None.......  None.......    Forbidden       150 kg  A             40, 48,
          n.o.s. (engine                                                                                                                                                                      85
          starting fluid)
          (each not exceeding
          1 L capacity).
         Aerosols, non-                2.2  UN1950              .......  2.2.......                    306, 307......  None.......  None.......        75 kg       150 kg  A              48, 85
          flammable, (each
          not exceeding 1 L
          capacity).
         Aerosols, poison,             2.2  UN1950              .......  2.2.......                    306...........  None.......  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  A             40, 48,
          each not exceeding                                                                                                                                                                  85
          1 L capacity.
         Air bag inflators,            2.2  UN3353              .......  2.2.......               133  166...........  166........  166........        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
          compressed gas or
          Air bag modules,
          compressed gas or
          Seat-belt
          pretensioners,
          compressed gas.
         Air bag inflators,           1.4G  UN0503                   II  1.4G......                    166...........  166........  166........    Forbidden        75 kg  02                24E
          pyrotechnic or Air
          bag modules,
          pyrotechnic or Seat-
          belt pretensioner,
          pyrotechnic.
         Air bag inflators,              9  UN3268                  III  9.........                    166...........  166........  166........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          pyrotechnic or Air
          bag modules,
          pyrotechnic or Seat-
          belt pretensioner,
          pyrotechnic.
         Air, compressed.....          2.2  UN1002              .......  2.2.......                78  306...........  302........  302........        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
         Air, refrigerated             2.2  UN1003              .......  2.2, 5.1..    T75, TP5, TP22  320...........  316........  318, 319...    Forbidden       150 kg  D                  51
          liquid, (cryogenic
          liquid).
         Air, refrigerated             2.2  UN1003              .......  2.2, 5.1..    T75, TP5, TP22  320...........  316........  318, 319...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  51
          liquid, (cryogenic
          liquid) non-
          pressurized.
         Aircraft engines      ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          (including
          turbines), see
          Engines, internal
          combustion.
         Aircraft evacuation   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          slides, see Life
          saving appliances
          etc.
         Aircraft hydraulic              3  UN3165                    I  3, 6.1, 8.                    None..........  172........  None.......    Forbidden         42 L  E             .......
          power unit fuel
          tank (containing a
          mixture of
          anhydrous hydrazine
          and monomethyl
          hydrazine) (M86
          fuel).
         Aircraft survival     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          kits, see Life
          saving appliances
          etc.
    G    Alcoholates                     3  UN3274                   II  3, 8......               IB2  None..........  202........  243........          1 L          5 L  B             .......
          solution, n.o.s.,
          in alcohol.
         Alcoholic beverages.            3  UN3065                   II  3.........  24, B1, IB2, T4,  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
                                                                                                  TP1

[[Page 118]]

 
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3.........      24, B1, IB3,  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
                                                                                         N11, T2, TP1
         Alcohols, n.o.s.....            3  UN1987                    I  3.........    T11, TP1, TP8,  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  E             .......
                                                                                                 TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  3.........     IB2, T7, TP1,  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
                                                                                            TP8, TP28
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3.........      B1, IB3, T4,  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
                                                                                            TP1, TP29
    G    Alcohols, flammable,            3  UN1986                    I  3, 6.1....   T14, TP2, TP13,  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden         30 L  E                  40
          toxic, n.o.s..                                                                         TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  3, 6.1....    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                                 TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3, 6.1....      B1, IB3, T7,  None..........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
                                                                                            TP1, TP28
         Aldehydes, n.o.s....            3  UN1989                    I  3.........    T11, TP1, TP27  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  E             .......
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  3.........     IB2, T7, TP1,  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
                                                                                            TP8, TP28
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3.........      B1, IB3, T4,  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
                                                                                            TP1, TP29
    G    Aldehydes,                      3  UN1988                    I  3, 6.1....   T14, TP2, TP13,  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden         30 L  E                  40
          flammable, toxic,                                                                      TP27
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  3, 6.1....    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                                 TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3, 6.1....      B1, IB3, T7,  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
                                                                                            TP1, TP28
         Aldol...............          6.1  UN2839                   II  6.1.......      IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A                  12
    G    Alkali metal                  4.2  UN3206                   II  4.2, 8....      64, IB5, IP2  None..........  212........  242........        15 kg        50 kg  B             .......
          alcoholates, self-
          heating, corrosive,
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.2, 8....      64, IB8, IP3  None..........  213........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  B             .......
         Alkali metal alloys,          4.3  UN1421                    I  4.3.......  A2, A3, B48, N34  None..........  201........  244........    Forbidden          1 L  D             .......
          liquid, n.o.s..
         Alkali metal                  4.3  UN1389                    I  4.3.......       A2, A3, N34  None..........  201........  244........    Forbidden          1 L  D                  40
          amalgam, liquid.
         Alkali metal                  4.3  UN1389                    I  4.3.......     IB4, IP1, N40  None..........  211........  242........    Forbidden        15 kg  D             .......
          amalgam, solid.
         Alkali metal amides.          4.3  UN1390                   II  4.3.......  A6, A7, A8, A19,  151...........  212........  241........        15 kg        50 kg  E                  40
                                                                                        A20, IB7, IP2
         Alkali metal                  4.3  UN1391                    I  4.3.......            A2, A3  None..........  201........  244........    Forbidden          1 L  D             .......
          dispersions, or
          Alkaline earth
          metal dispersions.

[[Page 119]]

 
         Alkaline corrosive    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          liquids, n.o.s.,
          see Caustic alkali
          liquids, n.o.s..
    G    Alkaline earth metal          4.2  UN3205                   II  4.2.......      65, IB6, IP2  None..........  212........  241........        15 kg        50 kg  B             .......
          alcoholates, n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.2.......      65, IB8, IP3  None..........  213........  241........        25 kg       100 kg  B             .......
         Alkaline earth metal          4.3  UN1393                   II  4.3.......     A19, IB7, IP2  151...........  212........  241........        15 kg        50 kg  E             .......
          alloys, n.o.s..
         Alkaline earth metal          4.3  UN1392                    I  4.3.......    A19, IB4, IP1,  None..........  211........  242........    Forbidden        15 kg  D             .......
          amalgams.                                                                          N34, N40
    G    Alkaloids, liquid,            6.1  UN3140                    I  6.1.......     A4, T14, TP2,  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  A             .......
          n.o.s., or Alkaloid                                                                    TP27
          salts, liquid,
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
                                                                                                 TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......     IB3, T7, TP1,  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
                                                                                                 TP28
    G    Alkaloids, solid,             6.1  UN1544                    I  6.1.......          IB7, IP1  None..........  211........  242........         5 kg        50 kg  A             .......
          n.o.s. or Alkaloid
          salts, solid,
          n.o.s. poisonous.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A             .......
         Alkyl sulfonic                  8  UN2584                   II  8.........      B2, IB2, T8,  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  B             .......
          acids, liquid or                                                            TP2, TP12, TP13
          Aryl sulfonic
          acids, liquid with
          more than 5 percent
          free sulfuric acid.
         Alkyl sulfonic                  8  UN2586                  III  8.........      IB3, T4, TP1  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
          acids, liquid or
          Aryl sulfonic
          acids, liquid with
          not more than 5
          percent free
          sulfuric acid.
         Alkyl sulfonic                  8  UN2583                   II  8.........     IB8, IP2, IP4  154...........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  A             .......
          acids, solid or
          Aryl sulfonic
          acids, solid, with
          more than 5 percent
          free sulfuric acid.
         Alkyl sulfonic                  8  UN2585                  III  8.........          IB8, IP3  154...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          acids, solid or
          Aryl sulfonic
          acids, solid with
          not more than 5
          percent free
          sulfuric acid.
         Alkylphenols,                   8  UN3145                    I  8.........          T14, TP2  None..........  201........  243........        0.5 L        2.5 L  B             .......
          liquid, n.o.s.
          (including C2-C12
          homologues).
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  8.........    IB2, T11, TP2,  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  B             .......
                                                                                                 TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  8.........     IB3, T7, TP1,  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
                                                                                                 TP28
         Alkylphenols, solid,            8  UN2430                    I  8.........    IB7, IP1, T10,  None..........  211........  242........         1 kg        25 kg  B             .......
          n.o.s. (including                                                                 TP2, TP28
          C2-C12 homologues).
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  8.........    IB8, IP2, IP4,  154...........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  B             .......
                                                                                              T3, TP2
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  8.........     IB8, IP3, T3,  154...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
                                                                                                  TP1
         Alkylsulfuric acids.            8  UN2571                   II  8.........      B2, IB2, T8,  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  C                  14
                                                                                      TP2, TP12, TP13

[[Page 120]]

 
         Allethrin, see        ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Pesticides, liquid,
          toxic, n.o.s..
         Allyl acetate.......            3  UN2333                   II  3, 6.1....     IB2, T7, TP1,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         60 L  E                  40
                                                                                                 TP13
         Allyl alcohol.......          6.1  UN1098                    I  6.1, 3....  2, B9, B14, B32,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
                                                                                       B74, B77, T20,
                                                                                     TP2, TP13, TP38,
                                                                                                 TP45
         Allyl bromide.......            3  UN1099                    I  3, 6.1....    T14, TP2, TP13  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden         30 L  B                  40
         Allyl chloride......            3  UN1100                    I  3, 6.1....    T14, TP2, TP13  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden         30 L  E                  40
         Allyl                 ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          chlorocarbonate,
          see Allyl
          chloroformate.
         Allyl chloroformate.          6.1  UN1722                    I  6.1, 3, 8.   2, A3, B9, B14,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
                                                                                       B32, B74, N41,
                                                                                      T20, TP2, TP13,
                                                                                           TP38, TP45
         Allyl ethyl ether...            3  UN2335                   II  3, 6.1....     IB2, T7, TP1,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         60 L  E                  40
                                                                                                 TP13
         Allyl formate.......            3  UN2336                    I  3, 6.1....    T14, TP2, TP13  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden         30 L  E                  40
         Allyl glycidyl ether            3  UN2219                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Allyl iodide........            3  UN1723                   II  3, 8......      A3, A6, IB1,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L          5 L  B                  40
                                                                                        N34, T7, TP2,
                                                                                                 TP13
         Allyl                         6.1  UN1545                   II  6.1, 3....  A3, A7, IB2, T7,  None..........  202........  243........    Forbidden         60 L  D                  40
          isothiocyanate,                                                                         TP2
          stabilized.
         Allylamine..........          6.1  UN2334                    I  6.1, 3....  2, B9, B14, B32,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
                                                                                       B74, T20, TP2,
                                                                                     TP13, TP38, TP45
         Allyltrichlorosilane            8  UN1724                   II  8, 3......  A7, B2, B6, IB2,  None..........  202........  243........    Forbidden         30 L  C                  40
          , stabilized.                                                                 N34, T7, TP2,
                                                                                                 TP13
         Aluminum alkyl                4.2  UN3052                    I  4.2, 4.3..     B9, B11, T21,  None..........  181........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             .......
          halides.                                                                           TP2, TP7
         Aluminum alkyl                4.2  UN3076                    I  4.2, 4.3..     B9, B11, T21,  None..........  181........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             .......
          hydrides.                                                                          TP2, TP7
         Aluminum alkyls.....          4.2  UN3051                    I  4.2, 4.3..     B9, B11, T21,  None..........  181........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             .......
                                                                                             TP2, TP7

[[Page 121]]

 
         Aluminum borohydride          4.2  UN2870                    I  4.2, 4.3..               B11  None..........  181........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             .......
          or Aluminum
          borohydride in
          devices.
         Aluminum bromide,               8  UN1725                   II  8.........     IB8, IP2, IP4  154...........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  A                  40
          anhydrous.
         Aluminum bromide,               8  UN2580                  III  8.........      IB3, T4, TP1  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
          solution.
         Aluminum carbide....          4.3  UN1394                   II  4.3.......    A20, IB7, IP2,  151...........  212........  242........        15 kg        50 kg  A             .......
                                                                                                  N41
         Aluminum chloride,              8  UN1726                   II  8.........     IB8, IP2, IP4  154...........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  A                  40
          anhydrous.
         Aluminum chloride,              8  UN2581                  III  8.........      IB3, T4, TP1  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
          solution.
         Aluminum dross, wet     Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          or hot.
         Aluminum                      4.3  UN1395                   II  4.3, 6.1..     A19, IB5, IP2  151...........  212........  242........        15 kg        50 kg  A             40, 85,
          ferrosilicon powder.                                                                                                                                                               103
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.3, 6.1..     A19, A20, IB4  151...........  213........  241........        25 kg       100 kg  A             40, 85,
                                                                                                                                                                                             103
         Aluminum hydride....          4.3  UN2463                    I  4.3.......          A19, N40  None..........  211........  242........    Forbidden        15 kg  E             .......
    D    Aluminum, molten....            9  NA9260                  III  9.........      IB3, T1, TP3  None..........  None.......  247........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             .......
         Aluminum nitrate....          5.1  UN1438                  III  5.1.......     A1, A29, IB8,  152...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
                                                                                                  IP3
         Aluminum phosphate    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          solution, see
          Corrosive liquids,
          etc.
         Aluminum phosphide..          4.3  UN1397                    I  4.3, 6.1..      A8, A19, N40  None..........  211........  242........    Forbidden        15 kg  E              40, 85
         Aluminum phosphide            6.1  UN3048                    I  6.1.......      A8, IB7, IP1  None..........  211........  242........    Forbidden        15 kg  E              40, 85
          pesticides.
         Aluminum powder,              4.1  UN1309                   II  4.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  151...........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  A             13, 39,
          coated.                                                                                                                                                                            101
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.1.......          IB8, IP3  151...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             13, 39,
                                                                                                                                                                                             101
         Aluminum powder,              4.3  UN1396                   II  4.3.......    A19, A20, IB7,  151...........  212........  242........        15 kg        50 kg  A                  39
          uncoated.                                                                               IP2
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.3.......    A19, A20, IB8,  151...........  213........  241........        25 kg       100 kg  A                  39
                                                                                                  IP4
         Aluminum resinate...          4.1  UN2715                  III  4.1.......               IB6  151...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Aluminum silicon              4.3  UN1398                  III  4.3.......     A1, A19, IB8,  151...........  213........  241........        25 kg       100 kg  A             40, 85,
          powder, uncoated.                                                                       IP4                                                                                        103
         Aluminum smelting by-         4.3  UN3170                   II  4.3.......   128, B115, IB7,  None..........  212........  242........        15 kg        50 kg  B             85, 103
          products or                                                                             IP2
          Aluminum remelting
          by-products.
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.3.......   128, B115, IB8,  None..........  213........  241........        25 kg       100 kg  B             85, 103
                                                                                                  IP4
         Amatols, see          ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Explosives,
          blasting, type B.
    G    Amines, flammable,              3  UN2733                    I  3, 8......    T14, TP1, TP27  None..........  201........  243........        0.5 L        2.5 L  D                  40
          corrosive, n.o.s.
          or Polyamines,
          flammable,
          corrosive, n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  3, 8......    IB2, T11, TP1,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L          5 L  B                  40
                                                                                                 TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3, 8......      B1, IB3, T7,  150...........  203........  242........          5 L         60 L  A                  40
                                                                                            TP1, TP28
    G    Amines, liquid,                 8  UN2734                    I  8, 3......      A3, A6, N34,  None..........  201........  243........        0.5 L        2.5 L  A             .......
          corrosive,                                                                   T14, TP2, TP27
          flammable, n.o.s.
          or Polyamines,
          liquid, corrosive,
          flammable, n.o.s..

[[Page 122]]

 
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  8, 3......    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         30 L  A             .......
                                                                                                 TP27
    G    Amines, liquid,                 8  UN2735                    I  8.........      A3, A6, B10,  None..........  201........  243........        0.5 L        2.5 L  A             .......
          corrosive, n.o.s,                                                            N34, T14, TP2,
          or Polyamines,                                                                         TP27
          liquid, corrosive,
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  8.........     B2, IB2, T11,  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  A             .......
                                                                                            TP1, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  8.........     IB3, T7, TP1,  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
                                                                                                 TP28
    G    Amines, solid,                  8  UN3259                    I  8.........          IB7, IP1  None..........  211........  242........         1 kg        25 kg  A             .......
          corrosive, n.o.s.,
          or Polyamines,
          solid, corrosive
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  8.........     IB8, IP2, IP4  154...........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  A             .......
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  8.........          IB8, IP3  154...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         2-Amino-4-                    6.1  UN2673                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          chlorophenol.
         2-Amino-5-                    6.1  UN2946                  III  6.1.......      IB3, T4, TP1  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
          diethylaminopentane.
         2-Amino-4,6-                  4.1  UN3317                    I  4.1.......      23, A8, A19,  None..........  211........  None.......         1 kg        15 kg  E              28, 36
          Dinitrophenol,                                                                     A20, N41
          wetted with not
          less than 20
          percent water by
          mass.
         2-(2-Aminoethoxy)               8  UN3055                  III  8.........      IB3, T4, TP1  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
          ethanol.
         N-                              8  UN2815                  III  8.........      IB3, T4, TP1  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A                  12
          Aminoethylpiperazin
          e.
    +    Aminophenols (o-; m-          6.1  UN2512                  III  6.1.......     IB8, IP3, T4,  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A             .......
          ; p-).                                                                                  TP1
         Aminopropyldiethanol  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          amine, see Amines,
          etc.
         n-                    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Aminopropylmorpholi
          ne, see Amines, etc.
         Aminopyridines (o-;           6.1  UN2671                   II  6.1.......    IB8, IP2, IP4,  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  B              12, 40
          m-; p-).                                                                            T7, TP2
    I    Ammonia, anhydrous..          2.3  UN1005              .......  2.3, 8....            4, T50  None..........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden        25 kg  D              40, 57
    D    Ammonia, anhydrous..          2.2  UN1005              .......  2.2.......           13, T50  None..........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden        25 kg  D              40, 57
    D    Ammonia solution,             2.2  UN3318              .......  2.2.......           13, T50  None..........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden        25 kg  D              40, 57
          relative density
          less than 0.880 at
          15 degrees C in
          water, with more
          than 50 percent
          ammonia.

[[Page 123]]

 
    I    Ammonia solution,             2.3  UN3318              .......  2.3, 8....            4, T50  None..........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden        25 kg  D              40, 57
          relative density
          less than 0.880 at
          15 degrees C in
          water, with more
          than 50 percent
          ammonia.
         Ammonia solutions,              8  UN2672                  III  8.........      IB3, T7, TP1  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A              40, 85
          relative density
          between 0.880 and
          0.957 at 15 degrees
          C in water, with
          more than 10
          percent but not
          more than 35
          percent ammonia.
         Ammonia solutions,            2.2  UN2073              .......  2.2.......                    306...........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden       150 kg  E              40, 57
          relative density
          less than 0.880 at
          15 degrees C in
          water, with more
          than 35 percent but
          not more than 50
          percent ammonia.
         Ammonium arsenate...          6.1  UN1546                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Ammonium azide......    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Ammonium bifluoride,  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          solid, see Ammonium
          hydrogen
          difluoride, solid.
         Ammonium bifluoride   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          solution, see
          Ammonium hydrogen
          difluoride,
          solution.
         Ammonium bromate....    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Ammonium chlorate...    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Ammonium dichromate.          5.1  UN1439                   II  5.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  152...........  212........  242........         5 kg        25 kg  A             .......
         Ammonium dinitro-o-           6.1  UN1843                   II  6.1.......    IB8, IP2, IP4,  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  B             36, 65,
          cresolate.                                                                          T7, TP2                                                                                     66, 77
         Ammonium fluoride...          6.1  UN2505                  III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A                  26
         Ammonium                      6.1  UN2854                  III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A                  26
          fluorosilicate.
         Ammonium fulminate..    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Ammonium hydrogen               8  UN2506                   II  8.........     IB8, IP2, IP4  154...........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  A                  40
          sulfate.
         Ammonium                        8  UN1727                   II  8.........    IB8, IP2, IP4,  154...........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  A             25, 26,
          hydrogendifluoride,                                                                     N34                                                                                         40
          solid.
         Ammonium                        8  UN2817                   II  8, 6.1....     IB2, N34, T8,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
          hydrogendifluoride,                                                         TP2, TP12, TP13
          solution.
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  8, 6.1....     IB3, T4, TP1,  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  B              40, 95
                                                                                           TP12, TP13
         Ammonium              ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          hydrosulfide,
          solution, see
          Ammonium sulfide
          solution.
    D    Ammonium hydroxide,   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Ammonia
          solutions, etc.
         Ammonium                      6.1  UN2859                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          metavanadate.
    D    Ammonium nitrate              5.1  NA2072                  III  5.1.......            7, IB8  152...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  B             48, 59,
          fertilizers.                                                                                                                                                                   60, 117

[[Page 124]]

 
         Ammonium nitrate              5.1  UN2067                  III  5.1.......      52, IB8, IP3  152...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  B             48, 59,
          fertilizers;                                                                                                                                                                   60, 117
          uniform non-
          segregating
          mixtures of
          ammonium nitrate
          with added matter
          which is inorganic
          and chemically
          inert towards
          ammonium nitrate,
          with not less than
          90 percent ammonium
          nitrate and not
          more than 0.2
          percent combustible
          material (including
          organic material
          calculated as
          carbon), or with
          more than 70
          percent but less
          than 90 percent
          ammonium nitrate
          and not more than
          0.4 percent total
          combustible
          material.
  A W    Ammonium nitrate                9  UN2071                  III  9.........          132, IB8  155...........  213........  240........       200 kg       200 kg  A             .......
          fertilizers:
          uniform non-
          segregating
          mixtures of
          nitrogen/phosphate
          or nitrogen/postash
          types or complete
          fertilizers of
          nitrogen/phosphate/
          postash type, with
          not more than 70
          percent ammonium
          nitrate and not
          more than 0.4
          percent total added
          combustible
          material or with
          not more than 45
          percent ammonium
          nitrate with
          unrestricted
          combustible
          material.
    D    Ammonium nitrate-            1.5D  NA0331                   II  1.5D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10                19E
          fuel oil mixture
          containing only
          prilled ammonium
          nitrate and fuel
          oil.
         Ammonium nitrate,             5.1  UN2426              .......  5.1.......            B5, T7  None..........  None.......  243........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D              59, 60
          liquid (hot
          concentrated
          solution).
    D    Ammonium nitrate              5.1  NA2069                  III  5.1.......           10, IB8  152...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  B             48, 59,
          mixed fertlizers.                                                                                                                                                              60, 117

[[Page 125]]

 
         Ammonium nitrate,            1.1D  UN0222                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10                19E
          with more than 0.2
          percent combustible
          substances,
          including any
          organic substance
          calculated as
          carbon, to the
          exclusion of any
          other added
          substance.
         Ammonium nitrate,             5.1  UN1942                  III  5.1.......     A1, A29, IB8,  152...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             48, 59,
          with not more than                                                                      IP3                                                                                    60, 116
          0.2 percent of
          combustible
          substances,
          including any
          organic substance
          calculated as
          carbon, to the
          exclusion of any
          other added
          substance.
         Ammonium nitrite....    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Ammonium perchlorate         1.1D  UN0402                   II  1.1D......               107  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10                19E
         Ammonium perchlorate          5.1  UN1442                   II  5.1.......     107, A9, IB6,  152...........  212........  242........         5 kg        25 kg  E             58, 69,
                                                                                                  IP2                                                                                        106
         Ammonium                Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          permanganate.
         Ammonium persulfate.          5.1  UN1444                  III  5.1.......     A1, A29, IB8,  152...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
                                                                                                  IP3
         Ammonium picrate,            1.1D  UN0004                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            5E, 19E
          dry or wetted with
          less than 10
          percent water, by
          mass.
         Ammonium picrate,             4.1  UN1310                    I  4.1.......       23, A2, N41  None..........  211........  None.......       0.5 kg       0.5 kg  D              28, 36
          wetted with not
          less than 10
          percent water, by
          mass.
         Ammonium                        8  UN2818                   II  8, 6.1....     IB2, T7, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         30 L  B             12, 26,
          polysulfide,                                                                           TP13                                                                                         40
          solution.
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  8, 6.1....     IB3, T4, TP1,  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  B             12, 26,
                                                                                                 TP13                                                                                         40
         Ammonium                      6.1  UN2861                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          polyvanadate.
         Ammonium              ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          silicofluoride, see
          Ammonium
          fluorosilicate.
         Ammonium sulfide                8  UN2683                   II  8, 6.1, 3.     IB1, T7, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         30 L  B             12, 22,
          solution.                                                                              TP13                                                                                    26, 100
         Ammunition, blank,    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Cartridges for
          weapons, blank.
         Ammunition,                  1.2G  UN0171                   II  1.2G......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  03            .......
          illuminating with
          or without burster,
          expelling charge or
          propelling charge.
         Ammunition,                  1.3G  UN0254                   II  1.3G......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  03            .......
          illuminating with
          or without burster,
          expelling charge or
          propelling charge.
         Ammunition,                  1.4G  UN0297                   II  1.4G......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  02            .......
          illuminating with
          or without burster,
          expelling charge or
          propelling charge.
         Ammunition,                  1.3J  UN0247                   II  1.3J......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  04                23E
          incendiary liquid
          or gel, with
          burster, expelling
          charge or
          propelling charge.

[[Page 126]]

 
         Ammunition,           ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          incendiary (water-
          activated
          contrivances) with
          burster, expelling
          charge or
          propelling charge,
          see Contrivances,
          water-activated,
          etc..
         Ammunition,                  1.2H  UN0243                   II  1.2H......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  08                8E,
          incendiary, white                                                                                                                                                                 14E,
          phosphorus, with                                                                                                                                                                  15E,
          burster, expelling                                                                                                                                                                 17E
          charge or
          propelling charge.
         Ammunition,                  1.3H  UN0244                   II  1.3H......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  08                8E,
          incendiary, white                                                                                                                                                                 14E,
          phosphorus, with                                                                                                                                                                  15E,
          burster, expelling                                                                                                                                                                 17E
          charge or
          propelling charge.
         Ammunition,                  1.2G  UN0009                   II  1.2G......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  03            .......
          incendiary with or
          without burster,
          expelling charge,
          or propelling
          charge.
         Ammunition,                  1.3G  UN0010                   II  1.3G......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  03            .......
          incendiary with or
          without burster,
          expelling charge,
          or propelling
          charge.
         Ammunition,                  1.4G  UN0300                   II  1.4G......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  02            .......
          incendiary with or
          without burster,
          expelling charge or
          propelling charge.
         Ammunition, practice         1.4G  UN0362                   II  1.4G......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  02            .......
         Ammunition, practice         1.3G  UN0488                   II  1.3G......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  03            .......
         Ammunition, proof...         1.4G  UN0363                   II  1.4G......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  02            .......
         Ammunition, rocket,   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Warheads,
          rocket etc.
         Ammunition, SA        ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          (small arms), see
          Cartridges for
          weapons, etc.
         Ammunition, smoke     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          (water-activated
          contrivances),
          white phosphorus,
          with burster,
          expelling charge or
          propelling charge,
          see Contrivances,
          water-activated,
          etc. (UN 0248).

[[Page 127]]

 
         Ammunition, smoke     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          (water-activated
          contrivances),
          without white
          phosphorus or
          phosphides, with
          burster, expelling
          charge or
          propelling charge,
          see Contrivances,
          water-activated,
          etc. (UN 0249).
         Ammunition smoke,            1.2H  UN0245                   II  1.2H......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  08                8E,
          white phosphorus                                                                                                                                                                  14E,
          with                                                                                                                                                                              15E,
          burster,expelling                                                                                                                                                                  17E
          charge, or
          propelling charge.
         Ammunition, smoke,           1.3H  UN0246                   II  1.3H......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  08                8E,
          white phosphorus                                                                                                                                                                  14E,
          with burster,                                                                                                                                                                     15E,
          expelling charge,                                                                                                                                                                  17E
          or propelling
          charge.
         Ammunition, smoke            1.2G  UN0015                   II  1.2G, 8...                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  ............      8E,
          with or without                                                                                                                                                                   17E,
          burster, expelling                                                                                                                                                                 20E
          charge or
          propelling charge.
         Ammunition, smoke            1.3G  UN0016                   II  1.3G, 8...                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  ............      8E,
          with or without                                                                                                                                                                   17E,
          burster, expelling                                                                                                                                                                 20E
          charge or
          propelling charge.
         Ammunition, smoke            1.4G  UN0303                   II  1.4G, 8...                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  ............  7E, 8E,
          with or without                                                                                                                                                                   14E,
          burster, expelling                                                                                                                                                                15E,
          charge or                                                                                                                                                                          17E
          propelling charge.
         Ammunition,           ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          sporting, see
          Cartridges for
          weapons, etc. (UN
          0012; UN 0328; UN
          0339).
         Ammunition, tear-             6.1  UN2017                   II  6.1, 8....                    None..........  212........  None.......    Forbidden        50 kg  E              13, 40
          producing, non-
          explosive, without
          burster or
          expelling charge,
          non-fuzed.
         Ammunition, tear-            1.2G  UN0018                   II  1.2G, 8,                       .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  ............      8E,
          producing with                                                  6.1.                                                                                                              17E,
          burster, expelling                                                                                                                                                                 20E
          charge or
          propelling charge.
         Ammunition, tear-            1.3G  UN0019                   II  1.3G, 8,                       .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  ............      8E,
          producing with                                                  6.1.                                                                                                              17E,
          burster, expelling                                                                                                                                                                 20E
          charge or
          propelling charge.
         Ammunition, tear-            1.4G  UN0301                   II  1.4G, 8,                       .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  ............  7E, 8E,
          producing with                                                  6.1.                                                                                                              14E,
          burster, expelling                                                                                                                                                                15E,
          charge or                                                                                                                                                                          17E
          propelling charge.
         Ammunition, toxic,            6.1  UN2016                   II  6.1.......                    None..........  212........  None.......    Forbidden       100 kg  E              13, 40
          non-explosive,
          without burster or
          expelling charge,
          non-fuzed.
         Ammunition, toxic     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          (water-activated
          contrivances), with
          burster, expelling
          charge or
          propelling charge,
          see Contrivances,
          water-activated,
          etc.

[[Page 128]]

 
    G    Ammunition, toxic            1.2K  UN0020                   II  1.2K, 6.1.                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  08                8E,
          with burster,                                                                                                                                                                     14E,
          expelling charge,                                                                                                                                                                 15E,
          or propelling                                                                                                                                                                      17E
          charge.
    G    Ammunition, toxic            1.3K  UN0021                   II  1.3K, 6.1.                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  08                8E,
          with burster,                                                                                                                                                                     14E,
          expelling charge,                                                                                                                                                                 15E,
          or propelling                                                                                                                                                                      17E
          charge.
         Amyl acetates.......            3  UN1104                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Amyl acid phosphate.            8  UN2819                  III  8.........      IB3, T4, TP1  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
         Amyl butyrates......            3  UN2620                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Amyl chlorides......            3  UN1107                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         Amyl formates.......            3  UN1109                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Amyl mercaptans.....            3  UN1111                   II  3.........  A3, IB2, T4, TP1  None..........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             95, 102
         n-Amyl methyl ketone            3  UN1110                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Amyl nitrate........            3  UN1112                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A                  40
         Amyl nitrites.......            3  UN1113                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  E                  40
         Amylamines..........            3  UN1106                   II  3, 8......      IB2, T7, TP1  None..........  202........  243........          1 L          5 L  B             .......
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3, 8......  B1, IB3, T4, TP1  150...........  203........  242........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
         Amyltrichlorosilane.            8  UN1728                   II  8.........  A7, B2, B6, IB2,  None..........  202........  242........    Forbidden         30 L  C                  40
                                                                                        N34, T7, TP2,
                                                                                                 TP13
         Anhydrous ammonia,    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Ammonia,
          anhydrous.
         Anhydrous             ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          hydrofluoric acid,
          see Hydrogen
          fluoride, anhydrous.
    +    Aniline.............          6.1  UN1547                   II  6.1.......      IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A                  40
         Aniline                       6.1  UN1548                  III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A             .......
          hydrochloride.
         Aniline oil, see      ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Aniline.
         Anisidines..........          6.1  UN2431                  III  6.1.......      IB3, T4, TP1  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Anisole.............            3  UN2222                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Anisoyl chloride....            8  UN1729                   II  8.........  B2, IB2, T7, TP2  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  C                  40
         Anti-freeze, liquid,  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Flammable
          liquids, n.o.s..
         Antimonous chloride,  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Antimony
          trichloride.
         Antimony compounds,           6.1  UN3141                  III  6.1.......      35, IB3, T7,  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
          inorganic, liquid,                                                                TP1, TP28
          n.o.s..

[[Page 129]]

 
         Antimony compounds,           6.1  UN1549                  III  6.1.......      35, IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A             .......
          inorganic, solid,
          n.o.s..
         Antimony lactate....          6.1  UN1550                  III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A             .......
         Antimony                        8  UN1730                   II  8.........  B2, IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  C                  40
          pentachloride,
          liquid.
         Antimony                        8  UN1731                   II  8.........  B2, IB2, T7, TP2  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  C                  40
          pentachloride,
          solutions.
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  8.........      IB3, T4, TP1  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  C                  40
         Antimony                        8  UN1732                   II  8, 6.1....  A3, A6, A7, A10,  None..........  202........  243........    Forbidden         30 L  D                  40
          pentafluoride.                                                             IB2, N3, T7, TP2
         Antimony potassium            6.1  UN1551                  III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A             .......
          tartrate.
         Antimony powder.....          6.1  UN2871                  III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A             .......
         Antimony sulfide and    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          a chlorate,
          mixtures of.
         Antimony sulfide,     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          solid, see Antimony
          compounds,
          inorganic, n.o.s..
         Antimony                        8  UN1733                   II  8.........           B2, IB2  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  C                  40
          trichloride, liquid.
         Antimony                        8  UN1733                   II  8.........     IB8, IP2, IP4  154...........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  A                  40
          trichloride, solid.
         Aqua ammonia, see     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Ammonia solution,
          etc.
         Argon, compressed...          2.2  UN1006              .......  2.2.......                    306...........  302........  314, 315...        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
         Argon, refrigerated           2.2  UN1951              .......  2.2.......          T75, TP5  320...........  316........  318........        50 kg       500 kg  B             .......
          liquid (cryogenic
          liquid).
         Arsenic.............          6.1  UN1558                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Arsenic acid, liquid          6.1  UN1553                    I  6.1.......    T20, TP2, TP7,  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  B                  46
                                                                                                 TP13
         Arsenic acid, solid.          6.1  UN1554                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Arsenic bromide.....          6.1  UN1555                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A              12, 40
         Arsenic chloride,     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Arsenic
          trichloride.
         Arsenic compounds,            6.1  UN1556                    I  6.1.......                    None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
          liquid, n.o.s.
          inorganic,
          including
          arsenates, n.o.s.;
          arsenites, n.o.s.;
          arsenic sulfides,
          n.o.s.; and organic
          compounds of
          arsenic, n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......               IB2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......               IB3  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  B                  40
         Arsenic compounds,            6.1  UN1557                    I  6.1.......          IB7, IP1  None..........  211........  242........         5 kg        50 kg  A             .......
          solid, n.o.s.
          inorganic,
          including
          arsenates, n.o.s.;
          arsenites, n.o.s.;
          arsenic sulfides,
          n.o.s.; and organic
          compounds of
          arsenic, n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A             .......
         Arsenic pentoxide...          6.1  UN1559                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Arsenic sulfide and     Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          a chlorate,
          mixtures of.

[[Page 130]]

 
         Arsenic trichloride.          6.1  UN1560                    I  6.1.......  2, B9, B14, B32,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  B                  40
                                                                                       B74, T20, TP2,
                                                                                     TP13, TP38, TP45
         Arsenic trioxide....          6.1  UN1561                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Arsenic, white,       ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          solid, see Arsenic
          trioxide.
         Arsenical dust......          6.1  UN1562                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Arsenical                       3  UN2760                    I  3, 6.1....   T14, TP2, TP13,  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden         30 L  B                  40
          pesticides, liquid,                                                                    TP27
          flammable, toxic,
          flash point less
          than 23 degrees C.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  3, 6.1....    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                           TP13, TP27
         Arsenical                     6.1  UN2994                    I  6.1.......   T14, TP2, TP13,  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
          pesticides, liquid,                                                                    TP27
          toxic.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                           TP13, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......     IB3, T7, TP2,  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A                  40
                                                                                                 TP28
         Arsenical                     6.1  UN2993                    I  6.1, 3....   T14, TP2, TP13,  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
          pesticides, liquid,                                                                    TP27
          toxic, flammable
          flash point not
          less than 23
          degrees C.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1, 3....    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                           TP13, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1, 3....      B1, IB3, T7,  153...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A                  40
                                                                                            TP2, TP28
         Arsenical                     6.1  UN2759                    I  6.1.......          IB7, IP1  None..........  211........  242........         5 kg        50 kg  A                  40
          pesticides, solid,
          toxic.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A                  40
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A                  40
         Arsenious acid,       ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          solid, see Arsenic
          trioxide.
         Arsenious and         ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          mercuric iodide
          solution, see
          Arsenic compounds,
          liquid, n.o.s..
         Arsine..............          2.3  UN2188              .......  2.3, 2.1..                 1  None..........  192........  245........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
         Articles, explosive,         1.6N  UN0486                   II  1.6N......               101  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
          extremely
          insensitive or
          Articles, EEI.
    G    Articles, explosive,         1.4S  UN0349                   II  1.4S......               101  None..........  62.........  None.......        25 kg       100 kg  05            .......
          n.o.s..

[[Page 131]]

 
    G    Articles, explosive,         1.4B  UN0350                   II  1.4B......               101  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  06            .......
          n.o.s..
    G    Articles, explosive,         1.4C  UN0351                   II  1.4C......               101  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  06            .......
          n.o.s..
    G    Articles, explosive,         1.4D  UN0352                   II  1.4D......               101  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  06            .......
          n.o.s..
    G    Articles, explosive,         1.4G  UN0353                   II  1.4G......               101  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  06            .......
          n.o.s..
    G    Articles, explosive,         1.1L  UN0354                   II  1.1L......               101  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  08                8E,
          n.o.s..                                                                                                                                                                           14E,
                                                                                                                                                                                            15E,
                                                                                                                                                                                             17E
    G    Articles, explosive,         1.2L  UN0355                   II  1.2L......               101  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  08                8E,
          n.o.s..                                                                                                                                                                           14E,
                                                                                                                                                                                            15E,
                                                                                                                                                                                             17E
    G    Articles, explosive,         1.3L  UN0356                   II  1.3L......               101  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  08                8E,
          n.o.s..                                                                                                                                                                           14E,
                                                                                                                                                                                            15E,
                                                                                                                                                                                             17E
    G    Articles, explosive,         1.1C  UN0462                   II  1.1C......               101  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
          n.o.s..
    G    Articles, explosive,         1.1D  UN0463                   II  1.1D......               101  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
          n.o.s..
    G    Articles, explosive,         1.1E  UN0464                   II  1.1E......               101  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
          n.o.s..
    G    Articles, explosive,         1.1F  UN0465                   II  1.1F......               101  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  08            .......
          n.o.s..
    G    Articles, explosive,         1.2C  UN0466                   II  1.2C......               101  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
          n.o.s..
    G    Articles, explosive,         1.2D  UN0467                   II  1.2D......               101  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
          n.o.s..
    G    Articles, explosive,         1.2E  UN0468                   II  1.2E......               101  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
          n.o.s..
    G    Articles, explosive,         1.2F  UN0469                   II  1.2F......               101  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  08            .......
          n.o.s..
    G    Articles, explosive,         1.3C  UN0470                   II  1.3C......               101  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
          n.o.s..
    G    Articles, explosive,         1.4E  UN0471                   II  1.4E......               101  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  06            .......
          n.o.s..
    G    Articles, explosive,         1.4F  UN0472                   II  1.4F......               101  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  08            .......
          n.o.s..
         Articles,                     2.2  UN3164              .......  2.2.......                    306...........  302, 304...  None.......     No limit     No limit  A             .......
          pressurized
          pneumatic or
          hydraulic
          containing non-
          flammable gas.
         Articles, pyrophoric         1.2L  UN0380                   II  1.2L......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  08                8E,
                                                                                                                                                                                            14E,
                                                                                                                                                                                            15E,
                                                                                                                                                                                             17E
         Articles,                    1.1G  UN0428                   II  1.1G......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
          pyrotechnic for
          technical purposes.
         Articles,                    1.2G  UN0429                   II  1.2G......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
          pyrotechnic for
          technical purposes.
         Articles,                    1.3G  UN0430                   II  1.3G......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
          pyrotechnic for
          technical purposes.
         Articles,                    1.4G  UN0431                   II  1.4G......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  06            .......
          pyrotechnic for
          technical purposes.
         Articles,                    1.4S  UN0432                   II  1.4S......                    None..........  62.........  None.......        25 kg       100 kg  05            .......
          pyrotechnic for
          technical purposes.
    D    Asbestos............            9  NA2212                  III  9.........     IB8, IP2, IP4  155...........  216........  240........       200 kg       200 kg  A              34, 40
         Ascaridole (organic     Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          peroxide).
    D    Asphalt, at or above            3  NA1999                  III  3.........      IB3, T1, TP3  150...........  203........  247........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             .......
          its flash point.
    D    Asphalt, cut back,    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Tars, liquid,
          etc.

[[Page 132]]

 
         Automobile,           ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          motorcycle,
          tractor, other self-
          propelled vehicle,
          engine, or other
          mechanical
          apparatus, see
          Vehicles or Battery
          etc.
  A G    Aviation regulated              9  UN3334              .......  9.........               A35  155...........  204........   ..........     No limit     No limit  A             .......
          liquid, n.o.s..
  A G    Aviation regulated              9  UN3335              .......  9.........               A35  155...........  204........   ..........     No limit     No limit  A             .......
          solid, n.o.s..
         Azaurolic acid (salt    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          of) (dry).
         Azido guanidine         Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          picrate (dry).
         5-Azido-1-hydroxy       Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          tetrazole.
         Azido hydroxy           Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          tetrazole (mercury
          and silver salts).
         3-Azido-1,2-            Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Propylene glycol
          dinitrate.
         Azidodithiocarbonic     Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          acid.
         Azidoethyl nitrate..    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         1-                    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Aziridinylphosphine
          oxide-(tris), see
          Tris-(1-aziridinyl)
          phosphine oxide,
          solution.
         Azodicarbonamide....          4.1  UN3242                   II  4.1.......           38, IB8  151...........  212........  240........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             12, 61,
                                                                                                                                                                                              74
         Azotetrazole (dry)..    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Barium..............          4.3  UN1400                   II  4.3.......     A19, IB7, IP2  151...........  212........  241........        15 kg        50 kg  E             .......
         Barium alloys,                4.2  UN1854                    I  4.2.......                    None..........  181........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             .......
          pyrophoric.
         Barium azide, dry or         1.1A  UN0224                   II  1.1A, 6.1.          111, 117  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  12            .......
          wetted with less
          than 50 percent
          water, by mass.
         Barium azide, wetted          4.1  UN1571                    I  4.1, 6.1..                A2  None..........  182........  None.......    Forbidden       0.5 kg  D                  28
          with not less than
          50 percent water,
          by mass.
         Barium bromate......          5.1  UN2719                   II  5.1, 6.1..     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........         5 kg        25 kg  A             56, 58,
                                                                                                                                                                                             106
         Barium chlorate.....          5.1  UN1445                   II  5.1, 6.1..     A9, IB6, IP2,  None..........  212........  242........         5 kg        25 kg  A             56, 58,
                                                                                         N34, T4, TP1                                                                                        106
         Barium compounds,             6.1  UN1564                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A             .......
         Barium cyanide......          6.1  UN1565                    I  6.1.......    IB7, IP1, N74,  None..........  211........  242........         5 kg        50 kg  A              26, 40
                                                                                                  N75

[[Page 133]]

 
         Barium hypochlorite           5.1  UN2741                   II  5.1, 6.1..      A7, A9, IB8,  152...........  212........  None.......         5 kg        25 kg  B             56, 58,
          with more than 22                                                             IP2, IP4, N34                                                                                        106
          percent available
          chlorine.
         Barium nitrate......          5.1  UN1446                   II  5.1, 6.1..     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........         5 kg        25 kg  A             .......
         Barium oxide........          6.1  UN1884                  III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A             .......
         Barium perchlorate..          5.1  UN1447                   II  5.1, 6.1..     IB6, IP2, T4,  None..........  212........  242........         5 kg        25 kg  A             56, 58,
                                                                                                  TP1                                                                                        106
         Barium permanganate.          5.1  UN1448                   II  5.1, 6.1..          IB6, IP2  None..........  212........  242........         5 kg        25 kg  D             56, 58,
                                                                                                                                                                                             69,
                                                                                                                                                                                            106,
                                                                                                                                                                                             107
         Barium peroxide.....          5.1  UN1449                   II  5.1, 6.1..          IB6, IP2  None..........  212........  242........         5 kg        25 kg  A             13, 75,
                                                                                                                                                                                             106
         Barium selenate, see  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Selenates or
          Selenites.
         Barium selenite, see  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Selenates or
          Selenites.
         Batteries,                    4.3  UN3292                   II  4.3.......                    189...........  189........  189........    Forbidden     No limit  A             .......
          containing sodium.
         Batteries, dry,                 8  UN3028                  III  8.........                    None..........  213........  None.......  25 kg gross       230 kg  A             .......
          containing                                                                                                                                                gross
          potassium hydroxide
          solid, electric,
          storage.
         Batteries, wet,                 8  UN2794                  III  8.........                    159...........  159........  159........  30 kg gross     No limit  A             .......
          filled with acid,
          electric storage.
         Batteries, wet, non-            8  UN2800                  III  8.........                    159...........  159........  159........     No Limit     No Limit  A             .......
          spillable, electric
          storage.
         Batteries, dry, not   ...........  ..................           ..........               130   .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          subject to the
          requirements of
          this subchapter.
         Batteries, wet,                 8  UN2795                  III  8.........  ................  159...........  159........  159........  30 kg gross     No limit  A
          filled with alkali,
          electric storage.
         Battery fluid, acid.            8  UN2796                   II  8.........  A3, A7, B2, B15,  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  B             .......
                                                                                        IB2, N6, N34,
                                                                                        T8, TP2, TP12
         Battery fluid,                  8  UN2797                   II  8.........  B2, IB2, N6, T7,  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  A             .......
          alkali.                                                                                 TP2
         Battery lithium       ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          type, see Lithium
          batteries etc.
         Battery-powered                 9  UN3171              .......  9.........               134  220...........  220........  None.......     No limit     No limit  ............  .......
          vehicle or Battery-
          powered equipment.
         Battery, wet, filled  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          with acid or alkali
          with vehicle or
          mechanical
          equipment
          containing an
          internal combustion
          engine, see
          Vehicle, etc. or
          Engines, internal
          combustion, etc.
    +    Benzaldehyde........            9  UN1990                  III  9.........      IB3, T2, TP1  155...........  203........  241........        100 L        220 L  A             .......
         Benzene.............            3  UN1114                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
         Benzene diazonium       Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          chloride (dry).

[[Page 134]]

 
         Benzene diazonium       Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          nitrate (dry).
         Benzene phosphorus    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          dichloride, see
          Phenyl phosphorus
          dichloride.
         Benzene phosphorus    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          thiodichloride, see
          Phenyl phosphorus
          thiodichloride.
         Benzene sulfonyl                8  UN2225                  III  8.........      IB3, T4, TP1  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A                  40
          chloride.
         Benzene triozonide..    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Benzenethiol, see     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Phenyl mercaptan.
         Benzidine...........          6.1  UN1885                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Benzol, see Benzene.  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Benzonitrile........          6.1  UN2224                   II  6.1.......      IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A              26, 40
         Benzoquinone........          6.1  UN2587                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Benzotrichloride....            8  UN2226                   II  8.........  B2, IB2, T7, TP2  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  A                  40
         Benzotrifluoride....            3  UN2338                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
         Benzoxidiazoles         Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          (dry).
         Benzoyl azide.......    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Benzoyl chloride....            8  UN1736                   II  8.........      B2, IB2, T8,  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  C                  40
                                                                                      TP2, TP12, TP13
         Benzyl bromide......          6.1  UN1737                   II  6.1, 8....      A3, A7, IB2,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         30 L  D              13, 40
                                                                                        N33, N34, T8,
                                                                                      TP2, TP12, TP13
         Benzyl chloride.....          6.1  UN1738                   II  6.1, 8....      A3, A7, B70,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         30 L  D              13, 40
                                                                                       IB2, N33, N42,
                                                                                       T8, TP2, TP12,
                                                                                                 TP13
         Benzyl chloride               6.1  UN1738                   II  6.1, 8....  A3, A7, B8, B11,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         30 L  D              13, 40
          unstabilized.                                                                IB2, N33, N34,
                                                                                        N43, T8, TP2,
                                                                                           TP12, TP13
         Benzyl chloroformate            8  UN1739                    I  8.........  A3, A6, B4, N41,  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden        2.5 L  D                  40
                                                                                      T10, TP2, TP12,
                                                                                                 TP13
         Benzyl iodide.......          6.1  UN2653                   II  6.1.......      IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  B              12, 40
         Benzyldimethylamine.            8  UN2619                   II  8, 3......  B2, IB2, T7, TP2  154...........  202........  243........          1 L         30 L  A              40, 48
         Benzylidene chloride          6.1  UN1886                   II  6.1.......      IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  D                  40
         Beryllium compounds,          6.1  UN1566                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A             .......

[[Page 135]]

 
         Beryllium nitrate...          5.1  UN2464                   II  5.1, 6.1..     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........         5 kg        25 kg  A             .......
         Beryllium, powder...          6.1  UN1567                   II  6.1, 4.1..     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        15 kg        50 kg  A             .......
         Bicyclo [2,2,1]                 3  UN2251                   II  3.........      IB2, T7, TP2  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  D             .......
          hepta-2,5-diene,
          stabilized or 2,5-
          Norbornadiene,
          stabilized.
         Biphenyl triozonide.    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Bipyridilium                    3  UN2782                    I  3, 6.1....   T14, TP2, TP13,  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden         30 L  E             .......
          pesticides, liquid,                                                                    TP27
          flammable, toxic,
          flash point less
          than 23 degrees C.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  3, 6.1....    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                           TP13, TP27
         Bipyridilium                  6.1  UN3016                    I  6.1.......   T14, TP2, TP13,  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
          pesticides, liquid,                                                                    TP27
          toxic.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                           TP13, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......     IB3, T7, TP2,  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A                  40
                                                                                                 TP28
         Bipyridilium                  6.1  UN3015                    I  6.1, 3....   T14, TP2, TP13,  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  B              21, 40
          pesticides, liquid,                                                                    TP27
          toxic, flammable,
          flash point not
          less than 23
          degrees C.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1, 3....    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  B              21, 40
                                                                                           TP13, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1, 3....      B1, IB3, T7,  153...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A              21, 40
                                                                                            TP2, TP28
         Bipyridilium                  6.1  UN2781                    I  6.1.......          IB7, IP1  None..........  211........  242........         5 kg        50 kg  A                  40
          pesticides, solid,
          toxic.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A                  40
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A                  40
         Bis (Aminopropyl)     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          piperazine, see
          Corrosive liquid,
          n.o.s..
         Bisulfate, aqueous              8  UN2837                   II  8.........      A7, B2, IB2,  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  A             .......
          solution.                                                                      N34, T7, TP2
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  8.........     A7, IB3, N34,  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
                                                                                              T4, TP1
         Bisulfites, aqueous             8  UN2693                  III  8.........     IB3, T7, TP1,  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A              26, 40
          solutions, n.o.s..                                                                     TP28
         Black powder,                1.1D  UN0028                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
          compressed or
          Gunpowder,
          compressed or Black
          powder, in pellets
          or Gunpowder, in
          pellets.
         Black powder or              1.1D  UN0027                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
          Gunpowder, granular
          or as a meal.
    D    Black powder for              4.1  NA0027                    I  4.1.......                70  None..........  170........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  E             .......
          small arms.
         Blasting agent,       ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          n.o.s., see
          Explosives,
          blasting etc.
         Blasting cap          ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          assemblies, see
          Detonator
          assemblies, non-
          electric, for
          blasting.

[[Page 136]]

 
         Blasting caps,        ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          electric, see
          Detonators,
          electric for
          blasting.
         Blasting caps, non-   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          electric, see
          Detonators, non-
          electric, for
          blasting.
         Bleaching powder,     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Calcium
          hypochlorite
          mixtures, etc.
    I    Blue asbestos                   9  UN2212                   II  9.........     IB8, IP2, IP4  155...........  216........  240........    Forbidden    Forbidden  A              34, 40
          (Crocidolite) or
          Brown asbestos
          (amosite, mysorite).
         Bombs, photo-flash..         1.1F  UN0037                   II  1.1F......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  08            .......
         Bombs, photo-flash..         1.1D  UN0038                   II  1.1D......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  03            .......
         Bombs, photo-flash..         1.2G  UN0039                   II  1.2G......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  03            .......
         Bombs, photo-flash..         1.3G  UN0299                   II  1.3G......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  03            .......
         Bombs, smoke, non-              8  UN2028                   II  8.........                    None..........  160........  None.......    Forbidden        50 kg  E                  40
          explosive, with
          corrosive liquid,
          without initiating
          device.
         Bombs, with bursting         1.1F  UN0033                   II  1.1F......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  08            .......
          charge.
         Bombs, with bursting         1.1D  UN0034                   II  1.1D......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  03            .......
          charge.
         Bombs, with bursting         1.2D  UN0035                   II  1.2D......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  03            .......
          charge.
         Bombs, with bursting         1.2F  UN0291                   II  1.2F......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  08            .......
          charge.
         Bombs with flammable         1.1J  UN0399                   II  1.1J......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  04                23E
          liquid, with
          bursting charge.
         Bombs with flammable         1.2J  UN0400                   II  1.2J......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  04                23E
          liquid, with
          bursting charge.
         Boosters with                1.1B  UN0225                   II  1.1B......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  11            .......
          detonator.
         Boosters with                1.2B  UN0268                   II  1.2B......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
          detonator.
         Boosters, without            1.1D  UN0042                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
          detonator.
         Boosters, without            1.2D  UN0283                   II  1.2D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
          detonator.
         Borate and chlorate   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          mixtures, see
          Chlorate and borate
          mixtures.
         Borneol.............          4.1  UN1312                  III  4.1.......      A1, IB8, IP3  None..........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
    +    Boron tribromide....            8  UN2692                    I  8, 6.1....    2, A3, A7, B9,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  C                  12
                                                                                       B14, B32, B74,
                                                                                       N34, T20, TP2,
                                                                                          TP12, TP13,
                                                                                           TP38, TP45
         Boron trichloride...          2.3  UN1741              .......  2.3, 8....        3, B9, B14  None..........  304........  314........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D              25, 40

[[Page 137]]

 
         Boron trifluoride,            2.3  UN1008              .......  2.3.......        2, B9, B14  None..........  302........  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          compressed.
         Boron trifluoride               8  UN1742                   II  8.........  B2, B6, IB2, T8,  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  A             .......
          acetic acid complex.                                                              TP2, TP12
         Boron trifluoride               8  UN2604                    I  8, 3......     A19, T10, TP2  None..........  201........  243........        0.5 L        2.5 L  D                  40
          diethyl etherate.
         Boron trifluoride               8  UN2851                   II  8.........    IB8, IP2, IP4,  154...........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  B             12, 40,
          dihydrate.                                                                          T7, TP2
         Boron trifluoride             4.3  UN2965                    I  4.3, 8, 3.    A19, T10, TP2,  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden          1 L  D             21, 28,
          dimethyl etherate.                                                                      TP7                                                                                    40, 49,
                                                                                                                                                                                             100
         Boron trifluoride               8  UN1743                   II  8.........      B2, IB2, T8,  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  A             .......
          propionic acid                                                                    TP2, TP12
          complex.
         Box toe gum, see      ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Nitrocellulose etc.
         Bromates, inorganic,          5.1  UN3213                   II  5.1.......      IB2, T4, TP1  152...........  202........  242........          1 L          5 L  B             56, 58,
          aqueous solution,                                                                                                                                                                  106
          n.o.s..
         Bromates, inorganic,          5.1  UN1450                   II  5.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  152...........  212........  242........         5 kg        25 kg  A             56, 58,
          n.o.s..                                                                                                                                                                            106
         Bromine azide.......    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
    +    Bromine or Bromine              8  UN1744                    I  8, 6.1....    1, A3, A6, B9,  None..........  226........  249........    Forbidden    Forbidden  ............  12, 40,
          solutions.                                                                   B64, B85, N34,                                                                                    66, 74,
                                                                                       N43, T22, TP2,                                                                                     89, 90
                                                                                     TP10, TP12, TP13
         Bromine chloride....          2.3  UN2901              .......  2.3, 8,           2, B9, B14  None..........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             40, 89,
                                                                          5.1.                                                                                                                90
    +    Bromine                       5.1  UN1745                    I  5.1, 6.1,   1, B9, B14, B30,  None..........  228........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             25, 40,
          pentafluoride.                                                  8.           B72, T22, TP2,                                                                                     66, 90
                                                                                          TP12, TP13,
                                                                                           TP38, TP44
    +    Bromine trifluoride.          5.1  UN1746                    I  5.1, 6.1,   2, B9, B14, B32,  None..........  228........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             25, 40,
                                                                          8.           B74, T22, TP2,                                                                                     66, 90
                                                                                          TP12, TP13,
                                                                                           TP38, TP45
         4-Bromo-1,2-            Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          dinitrobenzene.
         4-Bromo-1,2-            Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          dinitrobenzene
          (unstable at 59
          degrees C.).
         1-Bromo-3-                    6.1  UN2688                  III  6.1.......      IB3, T4, TP1  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
          chloropropane.
         1-Bromo-3-                      3  UN2341                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
          methylbutane.
         1-Bromo-3-              Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          nitrobenzene
          (unstable at 56
          degrees C).
         2-Bromo-2-                    4.1  UN3241                  III  4.1.......      46, IB8, IP3  151...........  213........  None.......        25 kg        50 kg  C             12, 25,
          nitropropane-1,3-                                                                                                                                                                   40
          diol.
         Bromoacetic acid,               8  UN1938                   II  8.........     A7, IB8, IP2,  154...........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  A             .......
          solid.                                                                         IP4, N34, T7
         Bromoacetic acid,               8  UN1938                   II  8.........  B2, IB2, T7, TP2  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  A                  40
          solution.
    +    Bromoacetone........          6.1  UN1569                   II  6.1, 3....      2, T20, TP2,  None..........  193........  245........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
                                                                                                 TP13
         Bromoacetyl bromide.            8  UN2513                   II  8.........      B2, IB2, T8,  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  C                  40
                                                                                            TP2, TP12

[[Page 138]]

 
         Bromobenzene........            3  UN2514                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Bromobenzyl                   6.1  UN1694                    I  6.1.......    T14, TP2, TP13  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden         30 L  D              12, 40
          cyanides, liquid.
         Bromobenzyl                   6.1  UN1694                    I  6.1.......    T14, TP2, TP13  None..........  211........  242........    Forbidden        50 kg  D              12, 40
          cyanides, solid.
         1-Bromobutane.......            3  UN1126                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........           5L         60 L  B                  40
         2-Bromobutane.......            3  UN2339                   II  3.........  B1, IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
         Bromochloromethane..          6.1  UN1887                  III  6.1.......      IB3, T4, TP1  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         2-Bromoethyl ethyl              3  UN2340                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
          ether.
         Bromoform...........          6.1  UN2515                  III  6.1.......      IB3, T4, TP1  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A              12, 40
         Bromomethylpropanes.            3  UN2342                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         2-Bromopentane......            3  UN2343                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         Bromopropanes.......            3  UN2344                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3.........      IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         3-Bromopropyne......            3  UN2345                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  D                  40
         Bromosilane.........    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Bromotoluene-alpha,   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Benzyl bromide.
         Bromotrifluoroethyle          2.1  UN2419              .......  2.1.......                    None..........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden       150 kg  B                  40
          ne.
         Bromotrifluoromethan          2.2  UN1009              .......  2.2.......               T50  306...........  304........  314, 315...        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
          e or Refrigerant
          gas, R 13B1..
         Brucine.............          6.1  UN1570                    I  6.1.......          IB7, IP1  None..........  211........  242........         5 kg        50 kg  A             .......
         Bursters, explosive.         1.1D  UN0043                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
         Butadienes,                   2.1  UN1010              .......  2.1.......               T50  306...........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden       150 kg  B                  40
          stabilized.
         Butane see also               2.1  UN1011              .......  2.1.......           19, T50  306...........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden       150 kg  E                  40
          Petroleum gases,
          liquefied.
         Butane, butane        ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          mixtures and
          mixtures having
          similar properties
          in cartridges each
          not exceeding 500
          grams, see
          Receptacles, etc.
         Butanedione.........            3  UN2346                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         1,2,4-Butanetriol       Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          trinitrate.
         Butanols............            3  UN1120                   II  3.........     IB2, T4, TP1,  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
                                                                                                 TP29
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         tert-Butoxycarbonyl     Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          azide.
         Butyl acetates......            3  UN1123                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......

[[Page 139]]

 
         Butyl acid phosphate            8  UN1718                  III  8.........      IB3, T4, TP1  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
         Butyl acrylates,                3  UN2348                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
          stabilized.
         Butyl alcohols, see   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Butanols.
         Butyl benzenes......            3  UN2709                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         n-Butyl bromide, see  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          1-Bromobutane.
         n-Butyl chloride,     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Chlorobutanes.
    D    sec-Butyl                     6.1  NA2742                    I  6.1, 3, 8.  2, B9, B14, B32,  None..........  227........  244........          1 L         30 L  A             12, 13,
          chloroformate.                                                               B74, T20, TP4,                                                                                    22, 25,
                                                                                          TP12, TP13,                                                                                    40, 48,
                                                                                           TP38, TP45                                                                                        100
         n-Butyl                       6.1  UN2743                    I  6.1, 8, 3.  2, B9, B14, B32,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  A             12, 13,
          chloroformate.                                                               B74, T20, TP2,                                                                                    21, 25,
                                                                                     TP13, TP38, TP45                                                                                    40, 100
         Butyl ethers, see     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Dibutyl ethers.
         Butyl ethyl ether,    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Ethyl butyl
          ether.
         n-Butyl formate.....            3  UN1128                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         tert-Butyl              Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          hydroperoxide, with
          more than 90
          percent with water.
         tert-Butyl                    4.2  UN3255                    I  4.2, 8....                    None..........  211........  243........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             .......
          hypochlorite.
         N-n-Butyl imidazole.          6.1  UN2690                   II  6.1.......      IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
         tert-Butyl                    6.1  UN2484                    I  6.1, 3....   1, A7, B9, B14,  None..........  226........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          isocyanate.                                                                  B30, B72, T22,
                                                                                     TP2, TP13, TP38,
                                                                                                 TP44
         n-Butyl isocyanate..          6.1  UN2485                    I  6.1, 3....   2, A7, B9, B14,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
                                                                                       B32, B74, B77,
                                                                                      T20, TP2, TP13,
                                                                                           TP38, TP45
         Butyl mercaptans....            3  UN2347                   II  3.........  A3, IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  D              26, 95
         n-Butyl                         3  UN2227                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
          methacrylate,
          stabilized.
         Butyl methyl ether..            3  UN2350                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         Butyl nitrites......            3  UN2351                    I  3.........    T11, TP1, TP8,  150...........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  E                  40
                                                                                                 TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A                  40
         tert-Butyl              Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          peroxyacetate, with
          more than 76
          percent in solution.
         n-Butyl                 Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          peroxydicarbonate,
          with more than 52
          percent in solution.
         tert-Butyl              Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          peroxyisobutyrate,
          with more than 77
          percent in solution.

[[Page 140]]

 
         Butyl phosphoric      ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          acid, see Butyl
          acid phosphate.
         Butyl propionates...            3  UN1914                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         5-tert-Butyl-2,4,6-           4.1  UN2956                  III  4.1.......                    None..........  214........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  12
          trinitro-m-xylene
          or Musk xylene.
         Butyl vinyl ether,              3  UN2352                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
          stabilized.
         n-Butylamine........            3  UN1125                   II  3, 8......      IB2, T7, TP1  None..........  202........  242........          1 L          5 L  B                  40
         N-Butylaniline......          6.1  UN2738                   II  6.1.......      IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
         tert-                         6.1  UN2747                  III  6.1.......      IB3, T4, TP1  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A             12, 13,
          Butylcyclohexylchlo                                                                                                                                                                 25
          roformate.
         Butylene see also             2.1  UN1012              .......  2.1.......           19, T50  None..........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden       150 kg  E                  40
          Petroleum gases,
          liquefied.
         1,2-Butylene oxide,             3  UN3022                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B                  49
          stabilized.
         Butyltoluenes.......          6.1  UN2667                  III  6.1.......      IB3, T4, TP1  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Butyltrichlorosilane            8  UN1747                   II  8, 3......  A7, B2, B6, IB2,  None..........  202........  243........    Forbidden         30 L  C                  40
                                                                                        N34, T7, TP2,
                                                                                                 TP13
         1,4-Butynediol......          6.1  UN2716                  III  6.1.......      A1, IB8, IP3  None..........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A              61, 70
         Butyraldehyde.......            3  UN1129                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         Butyraldoxime.......            3  UN2840                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Butyric acid........            8  UN2820                  III  8.........      IB3, T4, TP1  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A                  12
         Butyric anhydride...            8  UN2739                  III  8.........      IB3, T4, TP1  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
         Butyronitrile.......            3  UN2411                   II  3, 6.1....     IB2, T7, TP1,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         60 L  E                  40
                                                                                                 TP13
         Butyryl chloride....            3  UN2353                   II  3, 8......     IB2, T8, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L          5 L  C                  40
                                                                                           TP12, TP13
         Cacodylic acid......          6.1  UN1572                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  E                  26
         Cadmium compounds...          6.1  UN2570                    I  6.1.......          IB7, IP1  None..........  211........  242........         5 kg        50 kg  A             .......
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A             .......
         Caesium hydroxide...            8  UN2682                   II  8.........     IB8, IP2, IP4  154...........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  A             .......
         Caesium hydroxide               8  UN2681                   II  8.........  B2, IB2, T7, TP2  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  A             .......
          solution.
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  8.........      IB3, T4, TP1  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
         Calcium.............          4.3  UN1401                   II  4.3.......          IB7, IP2  151...........  212........  241........        15 kg        50 kg  E             .......
         Calcium arsenate....          6.1  UN1573                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Calcium arsenate and          6.1  UN1574                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          calcium arsenite,
          mixtures, solid.

[[Page 141]]

 
         Calcium bisulfite     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          solution, see
          Bisulfites, aqueous
          solutions, n.o.s..
         Calcium carbide.....          4.3  UN1402                    I  4.3.......      A1, A8, B55,  None..........  211........  242........    Forbidden        15 kg  B             .......
                                                                                       B59, IB4, IP1,
                                                                                                  N34
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  4.3.......      A1, A8, B55,  151...........  212........  241........        15 kg        50 kg  B             .......
                                                                                       B59, IB7, IP2,
                                                                                                  N34
         Calcium chlorate....          5.1  UN1452                   II  5.1.......    IB8, IP2, IP4,  152...........  212........  242........         5 kg        25 kg  A             56, 58,
                                                                                                  N34                                                                                        106
         Calcium chlorate              5.1  UN2429                   II  5.1.......     A2, IB2, N41,  152...........  202........  242........          1 L          5 L  B             56, 58,
          aqueous solution.                                                                   T4, TP1                                                                                        106
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  5.1.......     A2, IB2, N41,  152...........  203........  241........        2.5 L         30 L  B             56, 68,
                                                                                              T4, TP1                                                                                        106
         Calcium chlorite....          5.1  UN1453                   II  5.1.......     A9, IB8, IP2,  152...........  212........  242........         5 kg        25 kg  A             56, 58,
                                                                                             IP4, N34                                                                                        106
         Calcium cyanamide             4.3  UN1403                  III  4.3.......     A1, A19, IB8,  151...........  213........  241........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          with more than 0.1                                                                      IP4
          percent of calcium
          carbide.
         Calcium cyanide.....          6.1  UN1575                    I  6.1.......    IB7, IP1, N79,  None..........  211........  242........         5 kg        50 kg  A              26, 40
                                                                                                  N80
         Calcium dithionite            4.2  UN1923                   II  4.2.......    A19, A20, IB6,  None..........  212........  241........        15 kg        50 kg  E                  13
          or Calcium                                                                              IP2
          hydrosulfite.
         Calcium hydride.....          4.3  UN1404                    I  4.3.......          A19, N40  None..........  211........  242........    Forbidden        15 kg  E             .......
         Calcium               ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          hydrosulfite, see
          Calcium dithionite.
         Calcium                       5.1  UN1748                   II  5.1.......      A7, A9, IB8,  152...........  212........  None.......         5 kg        25 kg  D               4, 5,
          hypochlorite, dry                                                            IP2, IP4, N34,                                                                                    25, 48,
          or Calcium                                                                               W9                                                                                    56, 58,
          hypochlorite                                                                                                                                                                        69
          mixtures dry with
          more than 39
          percent available
          chlorine (8.8
          percent available
          oxygen).
         Calcium                       5.1  UN2880                   II  5.1.......    IB8, IP2, IP4,  152...........  212........  240........         5 kg        25 kg  D               4, 5,
          hypochlorite,                                                                            W9                                                                                    25, 48,
          hydrated or Calcium                                                                                                                                                            56, 58,
          hypochlorite,                                                                                                                                                                       69
          hydrated mixtures,
          with not less than
          5.5 percent but not
          more than 10
          percent water.
         Calcium hypochlorite          5.1  UN2208                  III  5.1.......     A1, A29, IB8,  152...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  D               4, 5,
          mixtures, dry, with                                                            IP3, N34, W9                                                                                    25, 48,
          more than 10                                                                                                                                                                   56, 58,
          percent but not                                                                                                                                                                     69
          more than 39
          percent available
          chlorine.
         Calcium manganese             4.3  UN2844                  III  4.3.......     A1, A19, IB8,  151...........  213........  241........        25 kg       100 kg  A             85, 103
          silicon.                                                                           IP2, IP4
         Calcium nitrate.....          5.1  UN1454                  III  5.1.......      34, IB8, IP3  152...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
    A    Calcium oxide.......            8  UN1910                  III  8.........          IB8, IP3  154...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Calcium perchlorate.          5.1  UN1455                   II  5.1.......          IB6, IP2  152...........  212........  242........         5 kg        25 kg  A             56, 58,
                                                                                                                                                                                             106

[[Page 142]]

 
         Calcium permanganate          5.1  UN1456                   II  5.1.......          IB6, IP2  152...........  212........  242........         5 kg        25 kg  D             56, 58,
                                                                                                                                                                                             69,
                                                                                                                                                                                            106,
                                                                                                                                                                                             107
         Calcium peroxide....          5.1  UN1457                   II  5.1.......          IB6, IP2  152...........  212........  242........         5 kg        25 kg  A             13, 75,
                                                                                                                                                                                             106
         Calcium phosphide...          4.3  UN1360                    I  4.3, 6.1..      A8, A19, N40  None..........  211........  242........    Forbidden        15 kg  E              40, 85
         Calcium, pyrophoric           4.2  UN1855                    I  4.2.......                    None..........  187........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             .......
          or Calcium alloys,
          pyrophoric.
         Calcium resinate....          4.1  UN1313                  III  4.1.......      A1, A19, IB6  None..........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Calcium resinate,             4.1  UN1314                  III  4.1.......      A1, A19, IB4  None..........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          fused.
         Calcium selenate,     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Selenates or
          Selenites.
         Calcium silicide....          4.3  UN1405                   II  4.3.......     A19, IB7, IP2  151...........  212........  241........        15 kg        50 kg  B             85, 103
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.3.......     A1, A19, IB8,  151...........  213........  241........        25 kg       100 kg  B             85, 103
                                                                                                  IP4
         Camphor oil.........            3  UN1130                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Camphor, synthetic..          4.1  UN2717                  III  4.1.......      A1, IB8, IP3  None..........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Cannon primers, see   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Primers, tubular.
         Caproic acid........            8  UN2829                  III  8.........      IB3, T4, TP1  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
         Caps, blasting, see   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Detonators, etc.
         Carbamate                       3  UN2758                    I  3, 6.1....   T14, TP2, TP13,  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden         30 L  B                  40
          pesticides, liquid,                                                                    TP27
          flammable, toxic,
          flash point less
          than 23 degrees C.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  3, 6.1....    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                           TP13, TP27
         Carbamate                     6.1  UN2992                    I  6.1.......   T14, TP2, TP13,  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
          pesticides, liquid,                                                                    TP27
          toxic.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                           TP13, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......     IB3, T7, TP2,  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A                  40
                                                                                                 TP28
         Carbamate                     6.1  UN2991                    I  6.1, 3....   T14, TP2, TP13,  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
          pesticides, liquid,                                                                    TP27
          toxic, flammable,
          flash point not
          less than 23
          degrees C.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1, 3....    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                           TP13, TP27

[[Page 143]]

 
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1, 3....      B1, IB3, T7,  153...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A                  40
                                                                                            TP2, TP28
         Carbamate                     6.1  UN2757                    I  6.1.......          IB7, IP1  None..........  211........  242........         5 kg        50 kg  A                  40
          pesticides, solid,
          toxic.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A                  40
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A                  40
         Carbolic acid, see    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Phenol, solid or
          Phenol, molten.
         Carbolic acid         ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          solutions, see
          Phenol solutions.
    I    Carbon, activated...          4.2  UN1362                  III  4.2.......          IB8, IP3  None..........  213........  241........       0.5 kg       0.5 kg  A                  12
    I    Carbon, animal or             4.2  UN1361                   II  4.2.......               IB6  None..........  212........  242........    Forbidden    Forbidden  A                  12
          vegetable origin.
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.2.......          IB8, IP3  None..........  213........  241........    Forbidden    Forbidden  A                  12
         Carbon bisulfide,     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Carbon
          disulfide.
         Carbon dioxide......          2.2  UN1013              .......  2.2.......                    306...........  302, 304...  302, 314,          75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
                                                                                                                                     315.
         Carbon dioxide and            2.2  UN1015              .......  2.2.......                    306...........  None.......  314, 315...        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
          nitrous oxide
          mixtures.
         Carbon dioxide and            2.2  UN1014              .......  2.2, 5.1..                77  306...........  304........  314, 315...        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
          oxygen mixtures,
          compressed.
         Carbon dioxide,               2.2  UN2187              .......  2.2.......          T75, TP5  306...........  304........  314, 315...        50 kg       500 kg  B             .......
          refrigerated liquid.
  A W    Carbon dioxide,                 9  UN1845                  III  None......                    217...........  217........  240........       200 kg       200 kg  C                  40
          solid or Dry ice.
         Carbon disulfide....            3  UN1131                    I  3, 6.1....    B16, T14, TP2,  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             18, 40,
                                                                                            TP7, TP13                                                                                        115
         Carbon monoxide,              2.3  UN1016              .......  2.3, 2.1..                 4  None..........  302........  314, 315...    Forbidden        25 kg  D                  40
          compressed.
         Carbon monoxide and           2.3  UN2600              .......  2.3, 2.1..                 6  None..........  302........  302........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          hydrogen mixture,
          compressed.
    D    Carbon monoxide,              2.3  NA9202              .......  2.3, 2.1..       4, T75, TP5  None..........  316........  318........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             .......
          refrigerated liquid
          (cryogenic liquid).
         Carbon tetrabromide.          6.1  UN2516                  III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A                  25
         Carbon tetrachloride          6.1  UN1846                   II  6.1.......     IB2, N36, T7,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A                  40
                                                                                                  TP2
         Carbonyl chloride,    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Phosgene.
         Carbonyl fluoride,            2.3  UN2417              .......  2.3, 8....                 2  None..........  302........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          compressed.
         Carbonyl sulfide....          2.3  UN2204              .......  2.3, 2.1..            3, B14  None..........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden        25 kg  D                  40
         Cartridge cases,      ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          empty primed, see
          Cases, cartridge,
          empty, with primer.
         Cartridges,           ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          actuating, for
          aircraft ejector
          seat catapult, fire
          extinguisher,
          canopy removal or
          apparatus, see
          Cartridges, power
          device.

[[Page 144]]

 
         Cartridges,           ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          explosive, see
          Charges, demolition.
         Cartridges, flash...         1.1G  UN0049                   II  1.1G......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
         Cartridges, flash...         1.3G  UN0050                   II  1.3G......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  07            .......
         Cartridges for               1.1C  UN0326                   II  1.1C......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
          weapons, blank.
         Cartridges for               1.2C  UN0413                   II  1.2C......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
          weapons, blank.
         Cartridges for               1.4S  UN0014                   II  None......                    63............  62.........  None.......        25 kg       100 kg  05            .......
          weapons, blank or
          Cartridges, small
          arms, blank.
         Cartridges for               1.3C  UN0327                   II  1.3C......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
          weapons, blank or
          Cartridges, small
          arms, blank.
         Cartridges for               1.4C  UN0338                   II  1.4C......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  06            .......
          weapons, blank or
          Cartridges, small
          arms, blank.
         Cartridges for               1.2C  UN0328                   II  1.2C......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  03            .......
          weapons, inert
          projectile.
         Cartridges for               1.4S  UN0012                   II  None......                    63............  62.........  None.......        25 kg       100 kg  05            .......
          weapons, inert
          projectile or
          Cartridges, small
          arms.
         Cartridges for               1.4C  UN0339                   II  1.4C......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  06            .......
          weapons, inert
          projectile or
          Cartridges, small
          arms.
         Cartridges for               1.3C  UN0417                   II  1.3C......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  06            .......
          weapons, inert
          projectile or
          Cartridges, small
          arms.
         Cartridges for               1.1F  UN0005                   II  1.1F......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  08            .......
          weapons, with
          bursting charge.
         Cartridges for               1.1E  UN0006                   II  1.1E......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  03            .......
          weapons, with
          bursting charge.
         Cartridges for               1.2F  UN0007                   II  1.2F......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  08            .......
          weapons, with
          bursting charge.
         Cartridges for               1.2E  UN0321                   II  1.2E......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  03            .......
          weapons, with
          bursting charge.
         Cartridges for               1.4F  UN0348                   II  1.4F......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  08            .......
          weapons, with
          bursting charge.
         Cartridges for               1.4E  UN0412                   II  1.4E......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  02            .......
          weapons, with
          bursting charge.
         Cartridges, oil well         1.3C  UN0277                   II  1.3C......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
         Cartridges, oil well         1.4C  UN0278                   II  1.4C......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  06            .......
         Cartridges, power            1.3C  UN0275                   II  1.3C......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  07            .......
          device.
         Cartridges, power            1.4C  UN0276                   II  1.4C......               110  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  06            .......
          device.

[[Page 145]]

 
         Cartridges, power            1.4S  UN0323                   II  1.4S......               110  63............  62.........  None.......        25 kg       100 kg  05            .......
          device.
         Cartridges, power            1.2C  UN0381                   II  1.2C......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
          device.
         Cartridges, safety,   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          blank, see
          Cartridges for
          weapons, blank (UN
          0014).
         Cartridges, safety,   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Cartridges for
          weapons, other than
          blank or
          Cartridges, power
          device (UN 0323).
         Cartridges, signal..         1.3G  UN0054                   II  1.3G......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  07            .......
         Cartridges, signal..         1.4G  UN0312                   II  1.4G......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  06            .......
         Cartridges, signal..         1.4S  UN0405                   II  1.4S......                    None..........  62.........  None.......        25 kg       100 kg  05            .......
    D    Cartridges, small           ORM-D  ..................  .......  None......                    63............  None.......  None.......  30 kg gross  30 kg gross  A             .......
          arms.
         Cartridges,           ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          sporting, see
          Cartridges for
          weapons, other than
          blank.
         Cartridges, starter,  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          jet engine, see
          Cartridges, power
          device.
         Cases, cartridge,            1.4S  UN0055                   II  1.4S......                50  None..........  62.........  None.......        25 kg       100 kg  05            .......
          empty with primer.
         Cases, cartridges,           1.4C  UN0379                   II  1.4C......                50  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  06            .......
          empty with primer.
         Cases, combustible,          1.4C  UN0446                   II  1.4C......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  06            .......
          empty, without
          primer.
         Cases, combustible,          1.3C  UN0447                   II  1.3C......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
          empty, without
          primer.
         Casinghead gasoline   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Gasoline.
  A W    Castor beans or                 9  UN2969                   II  None......     IB8, IP2, IP4  155...........  204........  240........     No limit     No limit  E              34, 40
          Castor meal or
          Castor pomace or
          Castor flake.
    G    Caustic alkali                  8  UN1719                   II  8.........     B2, IB2, T11,  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  A             .......
          liquids, n.o.s..                                                                  TP2, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  8.........     IB3, T7, TP1,  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
                                                                                                 TP28
         Caustic potash, see   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Potassium hydroxide
          etc.
         Caustic soda, (etc.)  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Sodium
          hydroxide etc.
         Cells, containing             4.3  UN3292                   II  4.3.......                    189...........  189........  189........  25 kg gross     No limit  A             .......
          sodium.
         Celluloid, in block,          4.1  UN2000                  III  4.1.......                    None..........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          rods, rolls,
          sheets, tubes,
          etc., except scrap.
         Celluloid, scrap....          4.2  UN2002                  III  4.2.......          IB8, IP3  None..........  213........  241........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             .......
         Cement, see           ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Adhesives
          containing
          flammable liquid.
         Cerium, slabs,                4.1  UN1333                   II  4.1.......    IB8, IP2, IP4,  None..........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  A              74, 91
          ingots, or rods.                                                                        N34
         Cerium, turnings or           4.3  UN3078                   II  4.3.......      A1, IB7, IP2  151...........  212........  242........        15 kg        50 kg  E             .......
          gritty powder.

[[Page 146]]

 
         Cesium or Caesium...          4.3  UN1407                    I  4.3.......    A19, IB1, IP1,  None..........  211........  242........    Forbidden        15 kg  D             .......
                                                                                             N34, N40
         Cesium nitrate or             5.1  UN1451                  III  5.1.......     A1, A29, IB8,  152...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          Caesium nitrate.                                                                        IP3
    D    Charcoal briquettes,          4.2  NA1361                  III  4.2.......               IB8  151...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A                  12
          shell, screenings,
          wood, etc..
         Charges, bursting,           1.1D  UN0457                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
          plastics bonded.
         Charges, bursting,           1.2D  UN0458                   II  1.2D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
          plastics bonded.
         Charges, bursting,           1.4D  UN0459                   II  1.4D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  06            .......
          plastics bonded.
         Charges, bursting,           1.4S  UN0460                   II  1.4S......                    None..........  62.........  None.......        25 kg       100 kg  05            .......
          plastics bonded.
         Charges, demolition.         1.1D  UN0048                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  03            .......
         Charges, depth......         1.1D  UN0056                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  03            .......
         Charges, expelling,   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          explosive, for fire
          extinguishers, see
          Cartridges, power
          device.
         Charges, explosive,          1.1D  UN0442                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
          commercial without
          detonator.
         Charges, explosive,          1.2D  UN0443                   II  1.2D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
          commercial without
          detonator.
         Charges, explosive,          1.4D  UN0444                   II  1.4D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  06            .......
          commercial without
          detonator.
         Charges, explosive,          1.4S  UN0445                   II  1.4S......                    None..........  62.........  None.......        25 kg       100 kg  05            .......
          commercial without
          detonator.
         Charges, propelling.         1.1C  UN0271                   II  1.1C......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
         Charges, propelling.         1.3C  UN0272                   II  1.3C......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
         Charges, propelling.         1.2C  UN0415                   II  1.2C......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
         Charges, propelling.         1.4C  UN0491                   II  1.4C......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  06            .......
         Charges, propelling,         1.3C  UN0242                   II  1.3C......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
          for cannon.
         Charges, propelling,         1.1C  UN0279                   II  1.1C......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
          for cannon.
         Charges, propelling,         1.2C  UN0414                   II  1.2C......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
          for cannon.
         Charges, shaped,             1.4D  UN0237                   II  1.4D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  06            .......
          flexible, linear.
         Charges, shaped,             1.1D  UN0288                   II  1.1D......               101  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
          flexible, linear.
         Charges, shaped,             1.1D  UN0059                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
          without detonator.

[[Page 147]]

 
         Charges, shaped,             1.2D  UN0439                   II  1.2D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
          without detonator.
         Charges, shaped,             1.4D  UN0440                   II  1.4D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  06            .......
          without detonator.
         Charges, shaped,             1.4S  UN0441                   II  1.4S......                    None..........  62.........  None.......        25 kg       100 kg  05            .......
          without detonator.
         Charges,                     1.1D  UN0060                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
          supplementary
          explosive.
    D    Chemical kit........            8  NA1760                   II  8.........                    154...........  161........  None.......          1 L         30 L  B                  40
         Chemical kits.......            9  UN3316              .......  9.........                15  None..........  None.......  None.......        10 kg        10 kg  A             .......
         Chloral, anhydrous,           6.1  UN2075                   II  6.1.......      IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  D                  40
          stabilized.
         Chlorate and borate           5.1  UN1458                   II  5.1.......     A9, IB8, IP2,  152...........  212........  240........         5 kg        25 kg  A             56, 58,
          mixtures.                                                                          IP4, N34                                                                                        106
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  5.1.......     A9, IB8, IP3,  152...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             56, 58,
                                                                                                  N34                                                                                        106
         Chlorate and                  5.1  UN1459                   II  5.1.......     A9, IB8, IP2,  152...........  212........  240........         5 kg        25 kg  A             56, 58,
          magnesium chloride                                                            IP4, N34, T4,                                                                                        106
          mixtures.                                                                               TP1
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  5.1.......     A9, IB8, IP3,  152...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             56, 58,
                                                                                         N34, T4, TP1                                                                                        106
         Chlorate of potash,   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Potassium
          chlorate.
         Chlorate of soda,     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Sodium chlorate.
         Chlorates,                    5.1  UN3210                   II  5.1.......      IB2, T4, TP1  152...........  202........  242........          1 L          5 L  B             56, 58,
          inorganic, aqueous                                                                                                                                                                 106
          solution, n.o.s..
         Chlorates,                    5.1  UN1461                   II  5.1.......     A9, IB6, IP2,  152...........  212........  242........         5 kg        25 kg  A             56, 58,
          inorganic, n.o.s..                                                                      N34                                                                                        106
         Chloric acid aqueous          5.1  UN2626                   II  5.1.......               IB2  None..........  229........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             56, 58,
          solution, with not                                                                                                                                                                 106
          more than 10
          percent chloric
          acid.
         Chloride of           ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          phosphorus, see
          Phosphorus
          trichloride.
         Chloride of sulfur,   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Sulfur chloride.
         Chlorinated lime,     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Calcium
          hypochlorite
          mixtures, etc.
         Chlorine............          2.3  UN1017              .......  2.3, 8....  2, B9, B14, T50,  None..........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             40, 51,
                                                                                                 TP19                                                                                    55, 62,
                                                                                                                                                                                         68, 89,
                                                                                                                                                                                              90
         Chlorine azide......    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
    D    Chlorine dioxide,             5.1  NA9191                   II  5.1, 6.1..                    None..........  229........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  E             .......
          hydrate, frozen.
         Chlorine dioxide        Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          (not hydrate).
         Chlorine                      2.3  UN2548              .......  2.3, 5.1,     1, B7, B9, B14  None..........  304........  314........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             40, 89,
          pentafluoride.                                                  8.                                                                                                                  90
         Chlorine trifluoride          2.3  UN1749              .......  2.3, 5.1,     2, B7, B9, B14  None..........  304........  314........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             40, 89,
                                                                          8.                                                                                                                  90

[[Page 148]]

 
         Chlorite solution...            8  UN1908                   II  8.........   A3, A6, A7, B2,  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  B                  26
                                                                                        IB2, N34, T7,
                                                                                            TP2, TP24
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  8.........   A3, A6, A7, B2,  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  B                  26
                                                                                        IB3, N34, T4,
                                                                                            TP2, TP24
         Chlorites,                    5.1  UN1462                   II  5.1.......     A7, IB6, IP2,  152...........  212........  242........         5 kg        25 kg  A             56, 58,
          inorganic, n.o.s..                                                                      N34                                                                                        106
         1-Chloro-1,1-                 2.1  UN2517              .......  2.1.......               T50  306...........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden       150 kg  B                  40
          difluoroethane or
          Refrigerant gas R
          142b.
         3-Chloro-4-                   6.1  UN2236                   II  6.1.......               IB2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
          methylphenyl
          isocyanate.
         1-Chloro-1,2,2,2-             2.2  UN1021              .......  2.2.......               T50  306...........  304........  314, 315...        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
          tetrafluoroethaneor
          Refrigerant gas R
          124.
         4-Chloro-o-toluidine          6.1  UN1579                  III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A             .......
          hydrochloride.
         1-Chloro-2,2,2-               2.2  UN1983              .......  2.2.......               T50  306...........  304........  314, 315...        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
          trifluoroethane or
          Refrigerant gas R
          133a.
         Chloroacetic acid,            6.1  UN3250                   II  6.1, 8....      IB1, T7, TP3  None..........  202........  243........    Forbidden    Forbidden  C                  40
          molten.
         Chloroacetic acid,            6.1  UN1751                   II  6.1, 8....      A3, A7, IB8,  None..........  212........  242........        15 kg        50 kg  A                  40
          solid.                                                                             IP4, N34
         Chloroacetic acid,            6.1  UN1750                   II  6.1, 8....     A7, IB2, N34,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         30 L  C                  40
          solution.                                                                           T7, TP2
         Chloroacetone,                6.1  UN1695                    I  6.1, 3, 8.  2, B9, B14, B32,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             21, 40,
          stabilized.                                                                  B74, N12, N32,                                                                                        100
                                                                                       N34, T20, TP2,
                                                                                     TP13, TP38, TP45
         Chloroacetone           Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          (unstabilized).
    +    Chloroacetonitrile..          6.1  UN2668                   II  6.1, 3....  2, B9, B14, B32,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  A             12, 26,
                                                                                      B74, IB99, T20,                                                                                         40
                                                                                      TP2, TP38, TP45
         Chloroacetophenone            6.1  UN1697                   II  6.1.......     A3, IB2, N12,  None..........  202........  243........    Forbidden         60 L  D              12, 40
          (CN), liquid.                                                                N32, N33, T11,
                                                                                      TP2, TP13, TP27

[[Page 149]]

 
         Chloroacetophenone            6.1  UN1697                   II  6.1.......     A3, IB8, IP2,  None..........  212........  None.......    Forbidden       100 kg  D              12, 40
          (CN), solid.                                                                 IP4, N12, N32,
                                                                                        N33, N34, T7,
                                                                                            TP2, TP13
         Chloroacetyl                  6.1  UN1752                    I  6.1, 8....    2, A3, A6, A7,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          chloride.                                                                  B3, B8, B9, B14,
                                                                                       B32, B74, B77,
                                                                                       N34, N43, T20,
                                                                                     TP2, TP13, TP38,
                                                                                                 TP45
         Chloroanilines,               6.1  UN2019                   II  6.1.......      IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
          liquid.
         Chloroanilines,               6.1  UN2018                   II  6.1.......    IB8, IP2, IP4,  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          solid.                                                                              T7, TP2
         Chloroanisidines....          6.1  UN2233                  III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A             .......
         Chlorobenzene.......            3  UN1134                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Chlorobenzol, see     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Chlorobenzene.
         Chlorobenzotrifluori            3  UN2234                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A                  40
          des.
         Chlorobenzyl                  6.1  UN2235                  III  6.1.......      IB3, T4, TP1  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
          chlorides.
         Chlorobutanes.......            3  UN1127                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         Chlorocresols,                6.1  UN2669                   II  6.1.......      IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A                  12
          liquid.
         Chlorocresols, solid          6.1  UN2669                   II  6.1.......    IB8, IP2, IP3,  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A                  12
                                                                                                   T7
         Chlorodifluorobromom          2.2  UN1974              .......  2.2.......               T50  306...........  304........  314, 315...        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
          ethane or
          Refrigerant gas R
          12B1.
         Chlorodifluoromethan          2.2  UN1973              .......  2.2.......               T50  306...........  304........  314, 315...        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
          e and
          chloropentafluoroet
          hane mixture or
          Refrigerant gas R
          502 with fixed
          boiling point, with
          approximately 49
          percent
          chlorodifluorometha
          ne.
         Chlorodifluoromethan          2.2  UN1018              .......  2.2.......               T50  306...........  304........  314, 315...        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
          e or Refrigerant
          gas R 22.
    +    Chlorodinitrobenzene          6.1  UN1577                   II  6.1.......    IB8, IP2, IP4,  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A                  91
          s.                                                                                  T7, TP2
         2-Chloroethanal.....          6.1  UN2232                    I  6.1.......  2, B9, B14, B32,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
                                                                                       B74, T20, TP2,
                                                                                     TP13, TP38, TP45
         Chloroform..........          6.1  UN1888                  III  6.1.......     IB3, N36, T7,  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A                  40
                                                                                                  TP2
    G    Chloroformates,               6.1  UN2742                   II  6.1, 8, 3.   5, IB1, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         30 L  A             12, 13,
          toxic, corrosive,                                                                                                                                                              21, 25,
          flammable, n.o.s..                                                                                                                                                             40, 100
    G    Chloroformates,               6.1  UN3277                   II  6.1, 8....     IB2, T8, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         30 L  A             12, 13,
          toxic, corrosive,                                                                TP13, TP28                                                                                     25, 40
          n.o.s..
         Chloromethyl                  6.1  UN2745                   II  6.1, 8....     IB2, T7, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         30 L  A             12, 13,
          chloroformate.                                                                         TP13                                                                                    21, 25,
                                                                                                                                                                                         40, 100
         Chloromethyl ethyl              3  UN2354                   II  3, 6.1....     IB2, T7, TP1,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         60 L  E                  40
          ether.                                                                                 TP13

[[Page 150]]

 
         Chloronitroanilines.          6.1  UN2237                  III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A             .......
    +    Chloronitrobenzene,           6.1  UN1578                   II  6.1.......    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
          ortho, liquid.                                                                   TP13, TP27
    +    Chloronitrobenzenes           6.1  UN1578                   II  6.1.......    IB8, IP2, IP4,  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          meta or para, solid.                                                                T7, TP2
         Chloronitrotoluenes,          6.1  UN2433                  III  6.1.......      IB3, T4, TP1  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
          liquid.
         Chloronitrotoluenes,          6.1  UN2433                  III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A             .......
          solid.
         Chloropentafluoroeth          2.2  UN1020              .......  2.2.......               T50  306...........  304........  314, 315...        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
          ane or Refrigerant
          gas R 115.
         Chlorophenolates,               8  UN2904                  III  8.........               IB3  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
          liquid or
          Phenolates, liquid.
         Chlorophenolates,               8  UN2905                  III  8.........          IB8, IP3  154...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          solid or
          Phenolates, solid.
         Chlorophenols,                6.1  UN2021                  III  6.1.......      IB3, T4, TP1  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
          liquid.
         Chlorophenols, solid          6.1  UN2020                  III  6.1.......     IB8, IP3, T4,  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A             .......
                                                                                                  TP1
         Chlorophenyltrichlor            8  UN1753                   II  8.........  A7, B2, B6, IB2,  None..........  202........  242........    Forbidden         30 L  C                  40
          osilane.                                                                       N34, T7, TP2
    +    Chloropicrin........          6.1  UN1580                    I  6.1.......   2, B7, B9, B14,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
                                                                                       B32, B46, B74,
                                                                                      T20, TP2, TP13,
                                                                                           TP38, TP45
         Chloropicrin and              2.3  UN1581              .......  2.3.......   2, B9, B14, T50  None..........  193........  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D              25, 40
          methyl bromide
          mixtures.
         Chloropicrin and              2.3  UN1582              .......  2.3.......            2, T50  None..........  193........  245........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D              25, 40
          methyl chloride
          mixtures.
         Chloropicrin          ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          mixture, flammable
          (pressure not
          exceeding 14.7 psia
          at 115 degrees F
          flash point below
          100 degrees F) see
          Toxic liquids,
          flammable, etc.
         Chloropicrin                  6.1  UN1583                    I  6.1.......                 5  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden    Forbidden  C                  40
          mixtures, n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......               IB2  None..........  202........  243........    Forbidden    Forbidden  C                  40
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......               IB3  153...........  203........  241........    Forbidden    Forbidden  C                  40
    D    Chloropivaloyl                6.1  NA9263                    I  6.1, 8....  2, B9, B14, B32,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  B                  40
          chloride.                                                                    B74, T20, TP4,
                                                                                          TP12, TP13,
                                                                                           TP38, TP45
         Chloroplatinic acid,            8  UN2507                  III  8.........          IB8, IP3  154...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          solid.

[[Page 151]]

 
         Chloroprene,                    3  UN1991                    I  3, 6.1....    B57, T14, TP2,  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden         30 L  D                  40
          stabilized.                                                                            TP13
         Chloroprene,            Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          uninhibited.
         2-Chloropropane.....            3  UN2356                    I  3.........    N36, T11, TP2,  150...........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  E             .......
                                                                                                 TP13
         3-Chloropropanol-1..          6.1  UN2849                  III  6.1.......      IB3, T4, TP1  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         2-Chloropropene.....            3  UN2456                    I  3.........     A3, N36, T11,  150...........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  E             .......
                                                                                                  TP2
         2-Chloropropionic               8  UN2511                  III  8.........      IB3, T4, TP2  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A                   8
          acid.
         2-Chloropyridine....          6.1  UN2822                   II  6.1.......      IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A                  40
         Chlorosilanes,                  8  UN2986                   II  8, 3......    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         30 L  C                  40
          corrosive,                                                                             TP27
          flammable, n.o.s..
         Chlorosilanes,                  8  UN2987                   II  8.........     B2, IB2, T14,  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  C                  40
          corrosive, n.o.s..                                                                TP2, TP27
         Chlorosilanes,                  3  UN2985                   II  3, 8......    IB1, T11, TP2,  None..........  201........  243........          1 L          5 L  B                  40
          flammable,                                                                       TP13, TP27
          corrosive, n.o.s..
         Chlorosilanes, water-         4.3  UN2988                    I  4.3, 3, 8.     A2, T10, TP2,  None..........  201........  244........    Forbidden          1 L  D             21, 28,
          reactive,                                                                         TP7, TP13                                                                                    40, 49,
          flammable,                                                                                                                                                                         100
          corrosive, n.o.s..
    +    Chlorosulfonic acid             8  UN1754                    I  8, 6.1....   2, A3, A6, A10,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  C                  40
          (with or without                                                              B9, B10, B14,
          sulfur trioxide).                                                            B32, B74, T20,
                                                                                     TP2, TP12, TP38,
                                                                                                 TP45
         Chlorotoluenes......            3  UN2238                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Chlorotoluidines              6.1  UN2239                  III  6.1.......     IB3, T7, TP1,  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
          liquid.                                                                                TP28
         Chlorotoluidines              6.1  UN2239                  III  6.1.......     IB8, IP3, T4,  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A             .......
          solid.                                                                                  TP1
         Chlorotrifluorometha          2.2  UN2599              .......  2.2.......                    306...........  304........  314, 315...        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
          ne and
          trifluoromethane
          azeotropic mixture
          or Refrigerant gas
          R 503 with
          approximately 60
          percent
          chlorotrifluorometh
          ane.
         Chlorotrifluorometha          2.2  UN1022              .......  2.2.......                    306...........  304........  314, 315...        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
          ne or Refrigerant
          gas R 13.
         Chromic acid                    8  UN1755                   II  8.........      B2, IB2, T8,  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  C                  40
          solution.                                                                         TP2, TP12
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  8.........     IB3, T4, TP1,  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  C                  40
                                                                                                 TP12
         Chromic anhydride,    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Chromium
          trioxide, anhydrous.
         Chromic fluoride,               8  UN1756                   II  8.........     IB8, IP2, IP4  154...........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  A                  26
          solid.
         Chromic fluoride,               8  UN1757                   II  8.........  B2, IB2, T7, TP2  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  A             .......
          solution.
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  8.........      IB3, T4, TP1  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
         Chromium nitrate....          5.1  UN2720                  III  5.1.......     A1, A29, IB8,  152...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
                                                                                                  IP3
         Chromium oxychloride            8  UN1758                    I  8.........  A3, A6, A7, B10,  None..........  201........  243........        0.5 L        2.5 L  C             40, 66,
                                                                                       N34, T10, TP2,                                                                                    74, 89,
                                                                                                 TP12                                                                                         90
         Chromium trioxide,            5.1  UN1463                   II  5.1, 8....          IB8, IP4  None..........  212........  242........         5 kg        25 kg  A             .......
          anhydrous.

[[Page 152]]

 
         Chromosulfuric acid.            8  UN2240                    I  8.........   A3, A6, A7, B4,  None..........  201........  243........        0.5 L        2.5 L  B             40, 66,
                                                                                        B6, N34, T10,                                                                                    74, 89,
                                                                                      TP2, TP12, TP13                                                                                         90
         Chromyl chloride,     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Chromium
          oxychloride.
         Cigar and cigarette   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          lighters, charged
          with fuel, see
          Lighters for
          cigars, cigarettes,
          etc.
         Coal briquettes, hot    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Coal gas, compressed          2.3  UN1023              .......  2.3, 2.1..                 3  None..........  302........  314, 315...    Forbidden        25 kg  D                  40
         Coal tar                        3  UN1136                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
          distillates,
          flammable.
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3.........      B1, IB3, T4,  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
                                                                                            TP1, TP29
         Coal tar dye,         ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          corrosive, liquid,
          n.o.s, see Dyes,
          liquid or solid,
          n.o.s. or Dye
          intermediates,
          liquid or solid,
          corrosive, n.o.s..
         Coating solution                3  UN1139                    I  3.........    T11, TP1, TP8,  150...........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  E             .......
          (includes surface                                                                      TP27
          treatments or
          coatings used for
          industrial or other
          purposes such as
          vehicle
          undercoating, drum
          or barrel lining).
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  3.........     IB2, T4, TP1,  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
                                                                                                  TP8
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Cobalt naphthenates,          4.1  UN2001                  III  4.1.......     A19, IB8, IP3  151...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          powder.
         Cobalt resinate,              4.1  UN1318                  III  4.1.......      A1, A19, IB6  151...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          precipitated.
         Coke, hot...........    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Collodion, see        ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Nitrocellulose etc.
  D G    Combustible liquid,   Combustible  NA1993                  III  None......   IB3,T1, T4, TP1  150...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
          n.o.s..
    G    Components,                  1.2B  UN0382                   II  1.2B......               101  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  11            .......
          explosive train,
          n.o.s..
    G    Components,                  1.4B  UN0383                   II  1.4B......               101  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  06            .......
          explosive train,
          n.o.s..
    G    Components,                  1.4S  UN0384                   II  1.4S......               101  None..........  62.........  None.......        25 kg       100 kg  05            .......
          explosive train,
          n.o.s..

[[Page 153]]

 
    G    Components,                  1.1B  UN0461                   II  1.1B......               101  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  11            .......
          explosive train,
          n.o.s..
         Composition B, see    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Hexolite, etc.
  D G    Compounds, cleaning             8  NA1760                    I  8.........     A7, B10, T14,  None..........  201........  243........        0.5 L        2.5 L  B                  40
          liquid.                                                                      TP2, TP9, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  8.........     B2, IB2, N37,  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
                                                                                       T11, TP2, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  8.........     IB3, N37, T7,  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A                  40
                                                                                            TP1, TP28
  D G    Compounds, cleaning             3  NA1993                    I  3.........     T11, TP1, TP9  150...........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  E             .......
          liquid.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  3.........     IB2, T7, TP1,  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
                                                                                            TP8, TP28
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3.........     B1, B52, IB3,  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
                                                                                        T4, TP1, TP29
  D G    Compounds, tree                 8  NA1760                    I  8.........     A7, B10, T14,  None..........  201........  243........        0.5 L        2.5 L  B                  40
          killing, liquid or                                                           TP2, TP9, TP27
          Compounds, weed
          killing, liquid.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  8.........     B2, IB2, N37,  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
                                                                                       T11, TP2, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  8.........     IB3, N37, T7,  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A                  40
                                                                                            TP1, TP28
  D G    Compounds, tree                 3  NA1993                    I  3.........     T11, TP1, TP9  150...........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  E             .......
          killing, liquid or
          Compounds, weed
          killing, liquid.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  3.........     IB2, T7, TP1,  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
                                                                                            TP8, TP28
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3.........     B1, B52, IB3,  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
                                                                                        T4, TP1, TP29
  D G    Compounds, tree               6.1  NA2810                    I  6.1.......   T14, TP2, TP13,  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
          killing, liquid or                                                                     TP27
          Compounds, weed
          killing, liquid.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                                 TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......     IB3, T7, TP1,  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A                  40
                                                                                                 TP28
    G    Compressed gas,               2.1  UN1954              .......  2.1.......                    306...........  302, 305...  314, 315...    Forbidden       150 kg  D                  40
          flammable, n.o.s..
    G    Compressed gas,               2.2  UN1956              .......  2.2.......                    306, 307......  302, 305...  314, 315...        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
          n.o.s..
    G    Compressed gas,               2.2  UN3156              .......  2.2, 5.1..                    306...........  302........  314, 315...        75 kg       150 kg  D             .......
          oxidizing, n.o.s..
  G I    Compressed gas,               2.3  UN3304              .......  2.3, 8....                 1  None..........  192........  245........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          toxic, corrosive,
          n.o.s. Inhalation
          Hazard Zone A.
  G I    Compressed gas,               2.3  UN3304              .......  2.3, 8....                 2  None..........  302, 305...  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          toxic, corrosive,
          n.o.s. Inhalation
          Hazard Zone B.
  G I    Compressed gas,               2.3  UN3304              .......  2.3, 8....                 3  None..........  302, 305...  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          toxic, corrosive,
          n.o.s. Inhalation
          Hazard Zone C.

[[Page 154]]

 
  G I    Compressed gas,               2.3  UN3304              .......  2.3, 8....                 4  None..........  302, 305...  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          toxic, corrosive,
          n.o.s. Inhalation
          Hazard Zone D.
  G I    Compressed gas,               2.3  UN3305              .......  2.3, 2.1,                  1  None..........  192........  245........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D              17, 40
          toxic, flammable,                                               8.
          corrosive, n.o.s.
          Inhalation Hazard
          Zone A.
  G I    Compressed gas,               2.3  UN3305              .......  2.3, 2.1,                  2  None..........  302, 305...  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D              17, 40
          toxic, flammable,                                               8.
          corrosive, n.o.s.
          Inhalation Hazard
          Zone B.
  G I    Compressed gas,               2.3  UN3305              .......  2.3, 2.1,                  3  None..........  302, 305...  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D              17, 40
          toxic, flammable,                                               8.
          corrosive, n.o.s.
          Inhalation Hazard
          Zone C.
  G I    Compressed gas,               2.3  UN3305              .......  2.3, 2.1,                  4  None..........  302, 305...  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D              17, 40
          toxic, flammable,                                               8.
          corrosive, n.o.s.
          Inhalation Hazard
          Zone D.
    G    Compressed gas,               2.3  UN1953              .......  2.3, 2.1..                 1  None..........  192........  245........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          toxic, flammable,
          n.o.s. Inhalation
          hazard Zone A.
    G    Compressed gas,               2.3  UN1953              .......  2.3, 2.1..        2, B9, B14  None..........  302, 305...  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          toxic, flammable,
          n.o.s. Inhalation
          hazard Zone B.
    G    Compressed gas,               2.3  UN1953              .......  2.3, 2.1..            3, B14  None..........  302, 305...  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          toxic, flammable,
          n.o.s. Inhalation
          Hazard Zone C.
    G    Compressed gas,               2.3  UN1953              .......  2.3, 2.1..                 4  None..........  302, 305...  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          toxic, flammable,
          n.o.s. Inhalation
          Hazard Zone D.
    G    Compressed gas,               2.3  UN1955              .......  2.3.......                 1  None..........  192........  245........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          toxic, n.o.s.
          Inhalation Hazard
          Zone A.
    G    Compressed gas,               2.3  UN1955              .......  2.3.......        2, B9, B14  None..........  302, 305...  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          toxic, n.o.s.
          Inhalation Hazard
          Zone B.
    G    Compressed gas,               2.3  UN1955              .......  2.3.......            3, B14  None..........  302, 305...  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          toxic, n.o.s.
          Inhalation Hazard
          Zone C.
    G    Compressed gas,               2.3  UN1955              .......  2.3.......                 4  None..........  302, 305...  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          toxic, n.o.s.
          Inhalation Hazard
          Zone D.
  G I    Compressed gas,               2.3  UN3306              .......  2.3, 5.1,                  1  None..........  192........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             40, 89,
          toxic, oxdizing,                                                8.                                                                                                                  90
          corrosive, n.o.s.
          Inhalation Hazard
          Zone A.

[[Page 155]]

 
  G I    Compressed gas,               2.3  UN3306              .......  2.3, 5.1,                  2  None..........  302, 305...  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             40, 89,
          toxic, oxidizing,                                               8.                                                                                                                  90
          corrosive, n.o.s.
          Inhalation Hazard
          Zone B.
  G I    Compressed gas,               2.3  UN3306              .......  2.3, 5.1,                  3  None..........  302, 305...  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             40, 89,
          toxic, oxidizing,                                               8.                                                                                                                  90
          corrosive, n.o.s.
          Inhalation Hazard
          Zone C.
  G I    Compressed gas,               2.3  UN3306              .......  2.3, 5.1,                  4  None..........  302, 305...  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             40, 89,
          toxic, oxidizing,                                               8.                                                                                                                  90
          corrosive, n.o.s.
          Inhalation Hazard
          Zone D.
    G    Compressed gas,               2.3  UN3303              .......  2.3, 5.1..                 1  None..........  192........  245........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          toxic, oxidizing,
          n.o.s. Inhalation
          Hazard Zone A.
    G    Compressed gas,               2.3  UN3303              .......  2.3, 5.1..                 2  None..........  302, 305...  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          toxic, oxidizing,
          n.o.s. Inhalation
          Hazard Zone B.
    G    Compressed gas,               2.3  UN3303              .......  2.3, 5.1..                 3  None..........  302, 305...  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          toxic, oxidizing,
          n.o.s. Inhalation
          Hazard Zone C.
    G    Compressed gas,               2.3  UN3303              .......  2.3, 5.1..                 4  None..........  302, 305...  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          toxic, oxidizing,
          n.o.s. Inhalation
          Hazard Zone D.
    D    Consumer commodity..        ORM-D  ..................  .......  None......                    156, 306......  156, 306...  None.......  30 kg gross  30 kg gross  A             .......
         Contrivances, water-         1.2L  UN0248                   II  1.2L......               101  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  08                8E,
          activated, with                                                                                                                                                                   14E,
          burster, expelling                                                                                                                                                                15E,
          charge or                                                                                                                                                                          17E
          propelling charge.
         Contrivances, water-         1.3L  UN0249                   II  1.3L......               101  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  08                8E,
          activated, with                                                                                                                                                                   14E,
          burster, expelling                                                                                                                                                                15E,
          charge or                                                                                                                                                                          17E
          propelling charge.
         Copper acetoarsenite          6.1  UN1585                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Copper acetylide....    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Copper amine azide..    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Copper arsenite.....          6.1  UN1586                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Copper based                    3  UN2776                    I  3, 6.1....   T14, TP2, TP13,  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden         30 L  B                  40
          pesticides, liquid,                                                                    TP27
          flammable, toxic,
          flash point less
          than 23 degrees C.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  3, 6.1....    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                           TP13, TP27
         Copper based                  6.1  UN3010                    I  6.1.......   T14, TP2, TP13,  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
          pesticides, liquid,                                                                    TP27
          toxic.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                           TP13, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......     IB3, T7, TP2,  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A                  40
                                                                                                 TP28
         Copper based                  6.1  UN3009                    I  6.1, 3....   T14, TP2, TP13,  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
          pesticides, liquid,                                                                    TP27
          toxic, flammable
          flash point not
          less than 23
          degrees C.

[[Page 156]]

 
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1, 3....    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                           TP13, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1, 3....      B1, IB3, T7,  153...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A                  40
                                                                                            TP2, TP28
         Copper based                  6.1  UN2775                    I  6.1.......          IB7, IP1  None..........  211........  242........         5 kg        50 kg  A                  40
          pesticides, solid,
          toxic.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A                  40
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A                  40
         Copper chlorate.....          5.1  UN2721                   II  5.1.......     A1, IB8, IP2,  152...........  212........  242........         5 kg        25 kg  A             56, 58,
                                                                                                  IP4                                                                                        106
         Copper chloride.....            8  UN2802                  III  8.........          IB8, IP3  154...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Copper cyanide......          6.1  UN1587                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  204........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A                  26
         Copper selenate, see  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Selenates or
          Selenites.
         Copper selenite, see  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Selenates or
          Selenites.
         Copper tetramine        Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          nitrate.
  A W    Copra...............          4.2  UN1363                  III  4.2.......     IB8, IP3, IP6  None..........  213........  241........    Forbidden    Forbidden  A             13, 19,
                                                                                                                                                                                         48, 119
         Cord, detonating,            1.1D  UN0065                   II  1.1D......               102  63(a).........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
          flexible.
         Cord, detonating,            1.4D  UN0289                   II  1.4D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  06            .......
          flexible.
         Cord detonating or           1.2D  UN0102                   II  1.2D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
          Fuse detonating
          metal clad.
         Cord, detonating or          1.1D  UN0290                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
          Fuse, detonating
          metal clad.
         Cord, detonating,            1.4D  UN0104                   II  1.4D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  06            .......
          mild effect or
          Fuse, detonating,
          mild effect metal
          clad.
         Cord, igniter.......         1.4G  UN0066                   II  1.4G......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  06            .......
         Cordeau detonant      ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          fuse, see Cord,
          detonating, etc;
          Cord, detonating,
          flexible.
         Cordite, see Powder,  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          smokeless.
    G    Corrosive liquid,               8  UN3264                    I  8.........    B10, T14, TP2,  None..........  201........  243........        0.5 L        2.5 L  B                  40
          acidic, inorganic,                                                                     TP27
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  8.........     B2, IB2, T11,  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
                                                                                            TP2, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  8.........     IB3, T7, TP1,  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A                  40
                                                                                                 TP28

[[Page 157]]

 
    G    Corrosive liquid,               8  UN3265                    I  8.........    B10, T14, TP2,  None..........  201........  243........        0.5 L        2.5 L  B                  40
          acidic, organic,                                                                       TP27
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  8.........     B2, IB2, T11,  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
                                                                                            TP2, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  8.........     IB3, T7, TP1,  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A                  40
                                                                                                 TP28
    G    Corrosive liquid,               8  UN3266                    I  8.........    B10, T14, TP2,  None..........  201........  243........        0.5 L        2.5 L  B                  40
          basic, inorganic,                                                                      TP27
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  8.........     B2, IB2, T11,  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
                                                                                            TP2, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  8.........     IB3, T7, TP1,  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A                  40
                                                                                                 TP28
    G    Corrosive liquid,               8  UN3267                    I  8.........    B10, T14, TP2,  None..........  201........  243........        0.5 L        2.5 L  B                  40
          basic, organic,                                                                        TP27
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  8.........     B2, IB2, T11,  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
                                                                                            TP2, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  8.........     IB3, T7, TP1,  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A                  40
                                                                                                 TP28
    G    Corrosive liquid,               8  UN3301                    I  8, 4.2....               B10  None..........  201........  243........        0.5 L        2.5 L  D             .......
          self-heating,
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  8, 4.2....           B2, IB1  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  D             .......
    G    Corrosive liquids,              8  UN2920                    I  8, 3......    B10, T14, TP2,  None..........  201........  243........        0.5 L        2.5 L  C              25, 40
          flammable, n.o.s..                                                                     TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  8, 3......     B2, IB2, T11,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         30 L  C              25, 40
                                                                                            TP2, TP27
    G    Corrosive liquids,              8  UN1760                    I  8.........     A7, B10, T14,  None..........  201........  243........        0.5 L        2.5 L  B                  40
          n.o.s..                                                                           TP2, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  8.........     B2, IB2, T11,  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
                                                                                            TP2, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  8.........     IB3, T7, TP1,  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A                  40
                                                                                                 TP28
    G    Corrosive liquids,              8  UN3093                    I  8, 5.1....                    None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden        2.5 L  C                  89
          oxidizing, n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  8, 5.1....               IB2  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         30 L  C                  89
    G    Corrosive liquids,              8  UN2922                    I  8, 6.1....     A7, B10, T14,  None..........  201........  243........        0.5 L        2.5 L  B                  40
          toxic, n.o.s..                                                              TP2, TP13, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  8, 6.1....  B3, IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  8, 6.1....     IB3, T7, TP1,  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                                 TP28
    G    Corrosive liquids,              8  UN3094                    I  8, 4.3....                    None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden          1 L  E             .......
          water-reactive,
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  8, 4.3....                    None..........  202........  243........          1 L          5 L  E             .......
    G    Corrosive solid,                8  UN3260                    I  8.........          IB7, IP1  None..........  211........  242........         1 kg        25 kg  B             .......
          acidic, inorganic,
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  8.........     IB8, IP2, IP4  154...........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  B             .......
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  8.........          IB8, IP3  154...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
    G    Corrosive solid,                8  UN3261                    I  8.........          IB7, IP1  None..........  211........  242........         1 kg        25 kg  B             .......
          acidic, organic,
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  8.........     IB8, IP2, IP4  154...........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  B             .......
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  8.........          IB8, IP3  154...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......

[[Page 158]]

 
    G    Corrosive solid,                8  UN3262                    I  8.........          IB7, IP1  None..........  211........  242........         1 kg        25 kg  B             .......
          basic, inorganic,
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  8.........     IB8, IP2, IP4  154...........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  B             .......
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  8.........          IB8, IP3  154...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
    G    Corrosive solid,                8  UN3263                    I  8.........          IB7, IP1  None..........  211........  242........         1 kg        25 kg  B             .......
          basic, organic,
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  8.........     IB8, IP2, IP4  154...........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  B             .......
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  8.........          IB8, IP3  154...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
    G    Corrosive solids,               8  UN2921                    I  8, 4.1....               IB6  None..........  211........  242........         1 kg        25 kg  B              12, 25
          flammable, n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  8, 4.1....     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        15 kg        50 kg  B              12, 25
    G    Corrosive solids,               8  UN1759                    I  8.........          IB7, IP1  None..........  211........  242........         1 kg        25 kg  B             .......
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  8.........    128, IB8, IP2,  154...........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  A             .......
                                                                                                  IP4
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  8.........     128, IB8, IP3  154...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
    G    Corrosive solids,               8  UN3084                    I  8, 5.1....                    None..........  211........  242........         1 kg        25 kg  C             .......
          oxidizing, n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  8, 5.1....          IB6, IP2  None..........  212........  242........        15 kg        50 kg  C             .......
    G    Corrosive solids,               8  UN3095                    I  8, 4.2....                    None..........  211........  243........         1 kg        25 kg  C             .......
          self-heating,
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  8, 4.2....          IB6, IP2  None..........  212........  242........        15 kg        50 kg  C             .......
    G    Corrosive solids,               8  UN2923                    I  8, 6.1....               IB7  None..........  211........  242........         1 kg        25 kg  B                  40
          toxic, n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  8, 6.1....     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  B                  40
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  8, 6.1....          IB8, IP3  154...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  B              40, 95
    G    Corrosive solids,               8  UN3096                    I  8, 4.3....          IB4, IP1  None..........  211........  243........         1 kg        25 kg  D             .......
          water-reactive,
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  8, 4.3....          IB6, IP2  None..........  212........  242........        15 kg        50 kg  D             .......
  D W    Cotton..............            9  NA1365              .......  9.........    137, IB8, IP2,  None..........  None.......  None.......     No limit     No limit  A             .......
                                                                                             IP4, W41
  A W    Cotton waste, oily..          4.2  UN1364                  III  4.2.......          IB8, IP6  None..........  213........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  A                  54
A I W    Cotton, wet.........          4.2  UN1365                  III  4.2.......          IB8, IP6  None..........  204........  241........    Forbidden    Forbidden  A             .......
         Coumarin derivative             3  UN3024                    I  3, 6.1....   T14, TP2, TP13,  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden         30 L  B                  40
          pesticides, liquid,                                                                    TP27
          flammable, toxic,
          flash point less
          than 23 degrees C.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  3, 6.1....    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                           TP13, TP27
         Coumarin derivative           6.1  UN3026                    I  6.1.......   T14, TP2, TP13,  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
          pesticides, liquid,                                                                    TP27
          toxic.

[[Page 159]]

 
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                                 TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......     IB3, T7, TP1,  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A                  40
                                                                                                 TP28
         Coumarin derivative           6.1  UN3025                    I  6.1, 3....   T14, TP2, TP13,  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
          pesticides, liquid,                                                                    TP27
          toxic, flammable
          flash point not
          less than 23
          degrees C.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1, 3....    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                           TP13, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1, 3....      B1, IB3, T7,  153...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A                  40
                                                                                            TP1, TP28
         Coumarin derivative           6.1  UN3027                    I  6.1.......    IB7, IP1, T14,  None..........  211........  242........         5 kg        50 kg  A                  40
          pesticides, solid,                                                                TP2, TP27
          toxic.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......    IB8, IP2, IP4,  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A                  40
                                                                                       T11, TP2, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......     IB8, IP3, T7,  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A                  40
                                                                                            TP1, TP28
         Cresols.............          6.1  UN2076                   II  6.1, 8....    IB8, IP2, IP4,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         30 L  B             .......
                                                                                              T7, TP2
         Cresylic acid.......          6.1  UN2022                   II  6.1, 8....     IB2, T7, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         30 L  B             .......
                                                                                                 TP13
         Crotonaldehyde,               6.1  UN1143                    I  6.1, 3....  2, B9, B14, B32,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  B                  40
          stabilized.                                                                  B74, B77, T20,
                                                                                     TP2, TP13, TP38,
                                                                                                 TP45
         Crotonic acid liquid            8  UN2823                  III  8.........      IB3, T4, TP1  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A                  12
         Crotonic acid, solid            8  UN2823                  III  8.........          IB8, IP3  154...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A                  12
         Crotonylene.........            3  UN1144                    I  3.........          T11, TP2  150...........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  E             .......
         Cupriethylenediamine            8  UN1761                   II  8, 6.1....      IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         30 L  A             .......
          solution.
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  8, 6.1....     IB3, T7, TP1,  154...........  203........  242........          5 L         60 L  A                  95
                                                                                                 TP28
         Cutters, cable,              1.4S  UN0070                   II  1.4S......                    None..........  62.........  None.......        25 kg       100 kg  05            .......
          explosive.
         Cyanide or cyanide    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          mixtures, dry, see
          Cyanides,
          inorganic, solid,
          n.o.s..
         Cyanide solutions,            6.1  UN1935                    I  6.1.......    B37, T14, TP2,  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  B              40, 52
          n.o.s..                                                                          TP13, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A              40, 52
                                                                                           TP13, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......     IB3, T7, TP2,  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A              40, 52
                                                                                           TP13, TP28
         Cyanides, inorganic,          6.1  UN1588                    I  6.1.......    IB7, IP1, N74,  None..........  211........  242........         5 kg        50 kg  A                  52
          solid, n.o.s..                                                                          N75
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......    IB8, IP2, IP4,  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A                  52
                                                                                             N74, N75
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......    IB8, IP3, N74,  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A                  52
                                                                                                  N75
         Cyanogen............          2.3  UN1026              .......  2.3, 2.1..                 2  None..........  304........  245........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40

[[Page 160]]

 
         Cyanogen bromide....          6.1  UN1889                    I  6.1, 8....            A6, A8  None..........  211........  242........         1 kg        15 kg  D                  40
         Cyanogen chloride,            2.3  UN1589              .......  2.3, 8....                 1  None..........  192........  245........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          stabilized.
         Cyanuric chloride...            8  UN2670                   II  8.........     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  A              12, 40
         Cyanuric triazide...    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Cyclobutane.........          2.1  UN2601              .......  2.1.......                    306...........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden       150 kg  B                  40
         Cyclobutyl                    6.1  UN2744                   II  6.1, 8, 3.     IB1, T7, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         30 L  A             12, 13,
          chloroformate.                                                                         TP13                                                                                    21, 25,
                                                                                                                                                                                         40, 100
         1,5,9-                        6.1  UN2518                  III  6.1.......      IB3, T4, TP1  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A                  40
          Cyclododecatriene.
         Cycloheptane........            3  UN2241                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
         Cycloheptatriene....            3  UN2603                   II  3, 6.1....     IB2, T7, TP1,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         60 L  E                  40
                                                                                                 TP13
         Cycloheptene........            3  UN2242                   II  3.........  B1, IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         Cyclohexane.........            3  UN1145                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  E             .......
         Cyclohexanone.......            3  UN1915                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Cyclohexene.........            3  UN2256                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  E             .......
         Cyclohexenyltrichlor            8  UN1762                   II  8.........      A7, B2, IB2,  None..........  202........  242........    Forbidden         30 L  C                  40
          osilane.                                                                      N34, T7, TP2,
                                                                                                 TP13
         Cyclohexyl acetate..            3  UN2243                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Cyclohexyl                    6.1  UN2488                    I  6.1, 3....  2, B9, B14, B32,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          isocyanate.                                                                  B74, B77, T20,
                                                                                     TP2, TP13, TP38,
                                                                                                 TP45
         Cyclohexyl mercaptan            3  UN3054                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A              40, 95
         Cyclohexylamine.....            8  UN2357                   II  8, 3......      IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         30 L  A                  40
         Cyclohexyltrichloros            8  UN1763                   II  8.........      A7, B2, IB2,  None..........  202........  242........    Forbidden         30 L  C                  40
          ilane.                                                                        N34, T7, TP2,
                                                                                                 TP13
         Cyclonite and         ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          cyclotetramethylene
          tetranitramine
          mixtures, wetted or
          desensitized see
          RDX and HMX
          mixtures, wetted or
          desensitized etc.

[[Page 161]]

 
         Cyclonite and HMX     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          mixtures, wetted or
          desensitized see
          RDX and HMX
          mixtures, wetted or
          desensitized etc.
         Cyclonite and         ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          octogen mixtures,
          wetted or
          desensitized see
          RDX and HMX
          mixtures, wetted or
          desensitized etc.
         Cyclonite, see        ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Cyclotrimethylenetr
          initramine, etc.
         Cyclooctadiene        ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          phosphines, see 9-
          Phosphabicyclononan
          es.
         Cyclooctadienes.....            3  UN2520                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Cyclooctatetraene...            3  UN2358                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         Cyclopentane........            3  UN1146                   II  3.........      IB2, T7, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  E             .......
         Cyclopentane,         ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          methyl, see
          Methylcyclopentane.
         Cyclopentanol.......            3  UN2244                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Cyclopentanone......            3  UN2245                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Cyclopentene........            3  UN2246                   II  3.........      IB2, T7, TP2  150...........  202........  242........          5 L          60L  E                  40
         Cyclopropane........          2.1  UN1027              .......  2.1.......               T50  306...........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden       150 kg  E                  40
         Cyclotetramethylene     Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          tetranitramine (dry
          or unphlegmatized)
          (HMX).
         Cyclotetramethylenet         1.1D  UN0484                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
          etranitramine,
          desensitized or
          Octogen,
          desensitized or
          HMX, desensitized.
         Cyclotetramethylenet         1.1D  UN0226                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
          etranitramine,
          wetted or HMX,
          wetted or Octogen,
          wetted with not
          less than 15
          percent water, by
          mass.
         Cyclotrimethylenetri  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          nitramine and
          cyclotetramethylene
          tetranitramine
          mixtures, wetted or
          desensitized see
          RDX and HMX
          mixtures, wetted or
          desensitized etc.
         Cyclotrimethylenenit  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          ramine and octogen,
          mixtures, wetted or
          desensitized see
          RDX and HMX
          mixtures, wetted or
          desensitized etc.

[[Page 162]]

 
         Cyclotrimethylenetri  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          nitramine and HMX
          mixtures, wetted or
          desensitized see
          RDX and HMX
          mixtures, wetted or
          desensitized etc.
         Cyclotrimethylenetri         1.1D  UN0483                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
          nitramine,
          desensitized or
          Cyclonite,
          desensitized or
          Hexogen,
          desensitized or
          RDX, desensitized.
         Cyclotrimethylenetri         1.1D  UN0072                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
          nitramine, wetted
          or Cyclonite,
          wetted or Hexogen,
          wetted or RDX,
          wetted with not
          less than 15
          percent water by
          mass.
         Cymenes.............            3  UN2046                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Dangerous Goods in              9  UN3363              .......  ..........               136  None..........  222........  None.......     No limit     No limit  A             .......
          Machinery or
          Dangerous Goods in
          Apparatus.
         Decaborane..........          4.1  UN1868                   II  4.1, 6.1..    A19, A20, IB6,  None..........  212........  None.......    Forbidden        50 kg  A             .......
                                                                                                  IP2
         Decahydronaphthalene            3  UN1147                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         n-Decane............            3  UN2247                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Deflagrating metal           1.3C  UN0132                   II  1.3C......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10                 5E
          salts of aromatic
          nitroderivatives,
          n.o.s..
         Delay electric        ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          igniter, see
          Igniters.
         Depth charges, see    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Charges, depth.
         Detonating relays,    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Detonators, etc.
         Detonator                    1.1B  UN0360                   II  1.1B......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  11            .......
          assemblies, non-
          electric for
          blasting.
         Detonator                    1.4B  UN0361                   II  1.4B......               103  63(f), 63(g)..  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  06            .......
          assemblies, non-
          electric, for
          blasting.
         Detonator,                   1.4S  UN0500                   II  1.4S......                    63(f), 63(g)..  62.........  None.......        25 kg       100 kg  05            .......
          assemblies, non-
          electric for
          blasting.
         Detonators,                  1.1B  UN0030                   II  1.1B......                    63(f), 63(g)..  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  11            .......
          electric, for
          blasting.

[[Page 163]]

 
         Detonators,                  1.4B  UN0255                   II  1.4B......               103  63(f), 63(g)..  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  06            .......
          electric, for
          blasting.
         Detonators, electric         1.4S  UN0456                   II  1.4S......                    63(f), 63(g)..  62.........  None.......        25 kg       100 kg  05            .......
          for blasting.
         Detonators for               1.1B  UN0073                   II  1.1B......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  11            .......
          ammunition.
         Detonators for               1.2B  UN0364                   II  1.2B......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  11            .......
          ammunition.
         Detonators for               1.4B  UN0365                   II  1.4B......               103  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  06            .......
          ammunition.
         Detonators for               1.4S  UN0366                   II  1.4S......                    None..........  62.........  None.......        25 kg       100 kg  05            .......
          ammunition.
         Detonators, non-             1.1B  UN0029                   II  1.1B......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  11            .......
          electric, for
          blasting.
         Detonators, non-             1.4B  UN0267                   II  1.4B......               103  63(f), 63(g)..  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  06            .......
          electric, for
          blasting.
         Detonators, non-             1.4S  UN0455                   II  1.4S......                    63(f), 63(g)..  62.........  None.......        25 kg       100 kg  5             .......
          electric,for
          blasting.
         Deuterium,                    2.1  UN1957              .......  2.1.......                    306...........  302........  None.......    Forbidden       150 kg  E                  40
          compressed.
         Devices, small,               2.1  UN3150              .......  2.1.......                    306...........  304........  None.......    Forbidden       150 kg  B                  40
          hydrocarbon gas
          powered or
          Hydrocarbon gas
          refills for small
          devices with
          release device.
         Di-n-amylamine......            3  UN2841                  III  3, 6.1....  B1, IB3, T4, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Di-n-butyl              Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          peroxydicarbonate,
          with more than 52
          percent in solution.
         Di-n-butylamine.....            8  UN2248                   II  8, 3......      IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         30 L  A             .......
         2,2-Di-(tert-           Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          butylperoxy)
          butane, with more
          than 55 percent in
          solution.
         Di-(tert-               Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          butylperoxy)
          phthalate, with
          more than 55
          percent in solution.
         2,2-Di-(4,4-di-tert-    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          butylperoxycyclohex
          yl) propane, with
          more than 42
          percent with inert
          solid.
         Di-2,4-                 Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          dichlorobenzoyl
          peroxide, with more
          than 75 percent
          with water.
         1,2-Di-                         3  UN2372                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
          (dimethylamino)etha
          ne.
         Di-2-ethylhexyl       ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          phosphoric acid,
          see Diisooctyl acid
          phosphate.
         Di-(1-                  Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          hydroxytetrazole)
          (dry).
         Di-(1-naphthoyl)        Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          peroxide.
         a,a'-Di-(nitroxy)       Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          methylether.
         Di-(beta-               Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          nitroxyethyl)
          ammonium nitrate.
         Diacetone alcohol...            3  UN1148                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......

[[Page 164]]

 
         Diacetone alcohol       Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          peroxides, with
          more than 57
          percent in solution
          with more than 9
          percent hydrogen
          peroxide, less than
          26 percent
          diacetone alcohol
          and less than 9
          percent water;
          total active oxygen
          content more than 9
          percent by mass.
         Diacetyl, see         ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Butanedione.
         Diacetyl peroxide,      Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          solid, or with more
          than 25 percent in
          solution.
         Diallylamine........            3  UN2359                   II  3, 6.1, 8.      IB2, T7, TP1  None..........  202........  243........          1 L          5 L  B             21, 40,
                                                                                                                                                                                             100
         Diallylether........            3  UN2360                   II  3, 6.1....     IB2, N12, T7,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         60 L  E                  40
                                                                                            TP1, TP13
         4,4'-Diaminodiphenyl          6.1  UN2651                  III  6.1.......     IB8, IP3, T4,  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A             .......
          methane.                                                                                TP1
         p-Diazidobenzene....    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         1,2-Diazidoethane...    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         1,1'-                   Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Diazoaminonaphthale
          ne.
         Diazoaminotetrazole     Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          (dry).
         Diazodinitrophenol      Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          (dry).
         Diazodinitrophenol,          1.1A  UN0074                   II  1.1A......          111, 117  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  12            .......
          wetted with not
          less than 40
          percent water or
          mixture of alcohol
          and water, by mass.
         Diazodiphenylmethane    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Diazonium nitrates      Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          (dry).
         Diazonium               Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          perchlorates (dry).
         1,3-Diazopropane....    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Dibenzyl                Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          peroxydicarbonate,
          with more than 87
          percent with water.
         Dibenzyldichlorosila            8  UN2434                   II  8.........      B2, IB2, T7,  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  C                  40
          ne.                                                                               TP2, TP13
         Diborane, compressed          2.3  UN1911              .......  2.3, 2.1..                 1  None..........  302........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  D              40, 57
    D    Diborane mixtures...          2.1  NA1911              .......  2.1.......                 5  None..........  302........  245........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D              40, 57

[[Page 165]]

 
         Dibromoacetylene....    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         1,2-Dibromobutan-3-           6.1  UN2648                   II  6.1.......               IB2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
          one.
         Dibromochloropropane          6.1  UN2872                  III  6.1.......      IB3, T4, TP1  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
    A    Dibromodifluorometha            9  UN1941                  III  None......          T11, TP2  155...........  203........  241........        100 L        220 L  A                  25
          ne, R12B2.
         1,2-Dibromoethane,    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Ethylene
          dibromide.
         Dibromomethane......          6.1  UN2664                  III  6.1.......      IB3, T4, TP1  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Dibutyl ethers......            3  UN1149                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Dibutylaminoethanol.          6.1  UN2873                  III  6.1.......      IB3, T4, TP1  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         N,N'-                   Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Dichlorazodicarbona
          midine (salts of)
          (dry).
         1,1-Dichloro-1-               6.1  UN2650                   II  6.1.......      IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A              12, 40
          nitroethane.
    D    3,5-Dichloro-2,4,6-           6.1  NA9264                    I  6.1.......  2, B9, B14, B32,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  A                  40
          trifluoropyridine.                                                           B74, T20, TP4,
                                                                                          TP12, TP13,
                                                                                           TP38, TP45
         Dichloroacetic acid.            8  UN1764                   II  8.........   A3, A6, A7, B2,  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  A             .......
                                                                                        IB2, N34, T8,
                                                                                            TP2, TP12
         1,3-Dichloroacetone.          6.1  UN2649                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  B              12, 40
         Dichloroacetyl                  8  UN1765                   II  8.........   A3, A6, A7, B2,  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  D                  40
          chloride.                                                                     B6, IB2, N34,
                                                                                              T7, TP2
         Dichloroacetylene...    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
    +    Dichloroanilines,             6.1  UN1590                   II  6.1.......      IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A                  40
          liquid.
    +    Dichloroanilines,             6.1  UN1590                   II  6.1.......    IB8, IP2, IP4,  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A                  40
          solid.                                                                              T7, TP2
    +    o-Dichlorobenzene...          6.1  UN1591                  III  6.1.......      IB3, T4, TP1  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         2,2'-Dichlorodiethyl          6.1  UN1916                   II  6.1, 3....    IB2, N33, N34,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
          ether.                                                                              T7, TP2
         Dichlorodifluorometh          2.2  UN2602              .......  2.2.......               T50  306...........  304........  314, 315...        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
          ane and
          difluoroethane
          azeotropic mixture
          or Refrigerant gas
          R 500 with
          approximately 74
          percent
          dichlorodifluoromet
          hane.
         Dichlorodifluorometh          2.2  UN1028              .......  2.2.......               T50  306...........  304........  314, 315...        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
          ane or Refrigerant
          gas R 12.
         Dichlorodimethyl              6.1  UN2249                    I  6.1.......                    None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          ether, symmetrical.
         1,1-Dichloroethane..            3  UN2362                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
         1,2-Dichloroethane,   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Ethylene
          dichloride.
         Dichloroethyl           Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          sulfide.
         1,2-Dichloroethylene            3  UN1150                   II  3.........      IB2, T7, TP2  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         Dichlorofluoromethan          2.2  UN1029              .......  2.2.......               T50  306...........  304........  314, 315...        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
          e or Refrigerant
          gas R21.
         Dichloroisocyanuric           5.1  UN2465                   II  5.1.......      28, IB8, IP4  152...........  212........  240........         5 kg        25 kg  A                  13
          acid, dry or
          Dichloroisocyanuric
          acid salts.
         Dichloroisopropyl             6.1  UN2490                   II  6.1.......      IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
          ether.

[[Page 166]]

 
         Dichloromethane.....          6.1  UN1593                  III  6.1.......     IB3, N36, T7,  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A
                                                                                                  TP2
         Dichloropentanes....            3  UN1152                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Dichlorophenyl                6.1  UN2250                   II  6.1.......    IB8, IP2, IP4,  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  B             25, 40,
          isocyanates.                                                                        T7, TP2                                                                                         48
         Dichlorophenyltrichl            8  UN1766                   II  8.........  A7, B2, B6, IB2,  None..........  202........  242........    Forbidden         30 L  C                  40
          orosilane.                                                                    N34, T7, TP2,
                                                                                                 TP13
         1,2-Dichloropropane.            3  UN1279                   II  3.........     IB2, N36, T4,  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
                                                                                                  TP1
         1,3-Dichloropropanol-         6.1  UN2750                   II  6.1.......      IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A              12, 40
          2.
         Dichloropropene and   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          propylene
          dichloride mixture,
          see 1,2-
          Dichloropropane.
         Dichloropropenes....            3  UN2047                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Dichlorosilane......          2.3  UN2189              .......  2.3, 2.1,         2, B9, B14  None..........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D              17, 40
                                                                          8.
         1,2-Dichloro-1,1,2,2-         2.2  UN1958              .......  2.2.......               T50  306...........  304........  314, 315...        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
           tetrafluoroethane
          or Refrigerant gas
          R 114.
         Dichlorovinylchloroa    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          rsine.
         Dicycloheptadiene,    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Bicyclo [2,2,1]
          hepta-2,5-diene,
          stabilized.
         Dicyclohexylamine...            8  UN2565                  III  8.........      IB3, T4, TP1  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
         Dicyclohexylammonium          4.1  UN2687                  III  4.1.......          IB8, IP3  151...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A                  48
          nitrite.
         Dicyclopentadiene...            3  UN2048                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Didymium nitrate....          5.1  UN1465                  III  5.1.......      A1, IB8, IP3  152...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
    D    Diesel fuel.........            3  NA1993                  III  None......      B1, IB3, T4,  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
                                                                                            TP1, TP29
    I    Diesel fuel.........            3  UN1202                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Diethanol               Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          nitrosamine
          dinitrate (dry).
         Diethoxymethane.....            3  UN2373                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  E             .......
         3,3-Diethoxypropene.            3  UN2374                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         Diethyl carbonate...            3  UN2366                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......

[[Page 167]]

 
         Diethyl cellosolve,   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Ethylene glycol
          diethyl ether.
         Diethyl ether or                3  UN1155                    I  3.........          T11, TP2  150...........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  E                  40
          Ethyl ether.
         Diethyl ketone......            3  UN1156                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         Diethyl                 Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          peroxydicarbonate,
          with more than 27
          percent in solution.
         Diethyl sulfate.....          6.1  UN1594                   II  6.1.......      IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  C             .......
         Diethyl sulfide.....            3  UN2375                   II  3.........     IB2, T7, TP1,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  E             .......
                                                                                                 TP13
         Diethylamine........            3  UN1154                   II  3, 8......     IB2, N34, T7,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L          5 L  E                  40
                                                                                                  TP1
         2-                              8  UN2686                   II  8, 3......  B2, IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         30 L  A             .......
          Diethylaminoethanol.
         Diethylaminopropylam            3  UN2684                  III  3, 8......  B1, IB3, T4, TP1  150...........  203........  242........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
          ine.
    +    N, N-Diethylaniline.          6.1  UN2432                  III  6.1.......      IB3, T4, TP1  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Diethylbenzene......            3  UN2049                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Diethyldichlorosilan            8  UN1767                   II  8, 3......      A7, B6, IB2,  None..........  202........  243........    Forbidden         30 L  C                  40
          e.                                                                            N34, T7, TP2,
                                                                                                 TP13
         Diethylene glycol       Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          dinitrate.
         Diethyleneglycol             1.1D  UN0075                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  13                21E
          dinitrate,
          desensitized with
          not less than 25
          percent non-
          volatile water-
          insoluble
          phlegmatizer, by
          mass.
         Diethylenetriamine..            8  UN2079                   II  8.........  B2, IB2, T7, TP2  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  A                  40
         N,N-                            8  UN2685                   II  8, 3......      IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         30 L  A             .......
          Diethylethylenediam
          ine.
         Diethylgold bromide.    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Diethylthiophos-                8  UN2751                   II  8.........  B2, IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  D              12, 40
          phoryl chloride.
         Diethylzinc.........          4.2  UN1366                    I  4.2, 4.3..    B11, T21, TP2,  None..........  181........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  18
                                                                                                  TP7
         Difluorochloroethane  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          s, see 1-Chloro-1,1-
          difluoroethanes.
         1,1-Difluoroethane            2.1  UN1030              .......  2.1.......               T50  306...........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden       150 kg  B                  40
          or Refrigerant gas
          R 152a.
         1,1-Difluoroethylene          2.1  UN1959              .......  2.1.......                    306...........  304........  None.......    Forbidden       150 kg  E                  40
          or Refrigerant gas
          R 1132a.
         Difluoromethane or            2.1  UN3252              .......  2.1.......               T50  306...........  302........  314, 315...    Forbidden       150 kg  D                  40
          Refrigerant gas R
          32.
         Difluorophosphoric              8  UN1768                   II  8.........  A6, A7, B2, IB2,  None..........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  A                  40
          acid, anhydrous.                                                               N5, N34, T8,
                                                                                            TP2, TP12
         2,3-Dihydropyran....            3  UN2376                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         1,8-Dihydroxy-          Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          2,4,5,7-
          tetranitroanthraqui
          none (chrysamminic
          acid).
         Diiodoacetylene.....    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Diisobutyl ketone...            3  UN1157                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Diisobutylamine.....            3  UN2361                  III  3, 8......  B1, IB3, T4, TP1  150...........  203........  242........          5 L         60 L  A             .......

[[Page 168]]

 
         Diisobutylene,                  3  UN2050                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
          isomeric compounds.
         Diisooctyl acid                 8  UN1902                  III  8.........      IB3, T4, TP1  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
          phosphate.
         Diisopropyl ether...            3  UN1159                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  E                  40
         Diisopropylamine....            3  UN1158                   II  3, 8......      IB2, T7, TP1  None..........  202........  243........          1 L          5 L  B             .......
         Diisopropylbenzene      Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          hydroperoxide, with
          more than 72
          percent in solution.
         Diketene, stabilized          6.1  UN2521                    I  6.1, 3....  2, B9, B14, B32,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D              40, 49
                                                                                       B74, T20, TP2,
                                                                                     TP13, TP38, TP45
         1,2-Dimethoxyethane.            3  UN2252                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         1,1-Dimethoxyethane.            3  UN2377                   II  3.........      IB2, T7, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         Dimethyl carbonate..            3  UN1161                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         Dimethyl              ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          chlorothiophosphate
          , see Dimethyl
          thiophosphoryl
          chloride.
         2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-       Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          dihydroperoxy
          hexane, with more
          than 82 percent
          with water.
         Dimethyl disulfide..            3  UN2381                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
         Dimethyl ether......          2.1  UN1033              .......  2.1.......               T50  306...........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden       150 kg  B                  40
         Dimethyl-N-                     3  UN2266                   II  3, 8......     IB2, T7, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L          5 L  B                  40
          propylamine.                                                                           TP13
         Dimethyl sulfate....          6.1  UN1595                    I  6.1, 8....  2, B9, B14, B32,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
                                                                                       B74, B77, T20,
                                                                                     TP2, TP13, TP38,
                                                                                                 TP45
         Dimethyl sulfide....            3  UN1164                   II  3.........      IB1, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  E                  40
         Dimethyl                      6.1  UN2267                   II  6.1, 8....      IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         30 L  B                  25
          thiophosphoryl
          chloride.
         Dimethylamine,                2.1  UN1032              .......  2.1.......               T50  None..........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden       150 kg  D                  40
          anhydrous.
         Dimethylamine                   3  UN1160                   II  3, 8......      IB2, T7, TP1  None..........  202........  243........          1 L          5 L  B             .......
          solution.
         2-                              3  UN2378                   II  3, 6.1....      IB2, T7, TP1  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         60 L  A              26, 40
          Dimethylaminoaceton
          itrile.
         2-                              8  UN2051                   II  8, 3......  B2, IB2, T7, TP2  154...........  202........  243........          1 L         30 L  A             .......
          Dimethylaminoethano
          l.
         2-Dimethylaminoethyl          6.1  UN3302                   II  6.1.......      IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  D                  25
          acrylate.

[[Page 169]]

 
         2-Dimethylaminoethyl          6.1  UN2522                   II  6.1.......      IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
          methacrylate.
         N,N-Dimethylaniline.          6.1  UN2253                   II  6.1.......      IB1, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
         2,3-Dimethylbutane..            3  UN2457                   II  3.........      IB2, T7, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  E             .......
         1,3-                            3  UN2379                   II  3, 8......      IB2, T7, TP1  None..........  202........  243........          1 L          5 L  B             .......
          Dimethylbutylamine.
         Dimethylcarbamoyl               8  UN2262                   II  8.........  B2, IB2, T7, TP2  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  A                  40
          chloride.
         Dimethylcyclohexanes            3  UN2263                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         Dimethylcyclohexylam            8  UN2264                   II  8, 3......  B2, IB2, T7, TP2  154...........  202........  243........          1 L         30 L  A                  40
          ine.
         Dimethyldichlorosila            3  UN1162                   II  3, 8......     B77, IB2, T7,  None..........  202........  243........    Forbidden    Forbidden  B                  40
          ne.                                                                               TP2, TP13
         Dimethyldiethoxysila            3  UN2380                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
          ne.
         Dimethyldioxanes....            3  UN2707                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         N,N-                            3  UN2265                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP2  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
          Dimethylformamide.
         Dimethylhexane          Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          dihydroperoxide
          (dry).
         Dimethylhydrazine,            6.1  UN2382                    I  6.1, 3....   2, A7, B9, B14,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          symmetrical.                                                                 B32, B74, B77,
                                                                                      T20, TP2, TP13,
                                                                                           TP38, TP45
         Dimethylhydrazine,            6.1  UN1163                    I  6.1, 3, 8.   2, B7, B9, B14,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             21, 38,
          unsymmetrical.                                                               B32, B74, T20,                                                                                    40, 100
                                                                                     TP2, TP13, TP38,
                                                                                                 TP45
         2,2-Dimethylpropane.          2.1  UN2044              .......  2.1.......                    306...........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden       150 kg  E                  40
         Dimethylzinc........          4.2  UN1370                    I  4.2, 4.3..    B11, B16, T21,  None..........  181........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  18
                                                                                             TP2, TP7
         Dinitro-o-cresol,             6.1  UN1598                   II  6.1.......    IB8, IP2, IP4,  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          solid.                                                                              T7, TP2
         Dinitro-o-cresol,             6.1  UN1598                   II  6.1.......    IB2, IP2, IP4,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
          solution.                                                                           T7, TP2
         1,3-Dinitro-5,5-        Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          dimethyl hydantoin.
         Dinitro-7,8-            Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          dimethylglycoluril
          (dry).
         1,3-Dinitro-4,5-        Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          dinitrosobenzene.
         1,4-Dinitro-1,1,4,4-    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          tetramethylolbutane
          tetranitrate (dry).
         2,4-Dinitro-1,3,5-      Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          trimethylbenzene.
         Dinitroanilines.....          6.1  UN1596                   II  6.1.......    IB8, IP2, IP4,  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A                  91
                                                                                              T7, TP2
         Dinitrobenzenes,              6.1  UN1597                   II  6.1.......  11, IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A                  91
          liquid.
         Dinitrobenzenes,              6.1  UN1597                   II  6.1.......     11, IB8, IP2,  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A                  91
          solid.                                                                                  IP4
         Dinitrochlorobenzene  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          , see
          Chlorodinitrobenzen
          e.
         1,2-Dinitroethane...    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         1,1-Dinitroethane       Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          (dry).

[[Page 170]]

 
         Dinitrogen tetroxide          2.3  UN1067              .......  2.3, 5.1,   1, B7, B14, B45,  None..........  336........  314........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             40, 89,
                                                                          8.           B46, B61, B66,                                                                                         90
                                                                                       B67, B77, T50,
                                                                                                 TP21
         Dinitroglycoluril or         1.1D  UN0489                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
          Dingu.
         Dinitromethane......    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Dinitrophenol, dry           1.1D  UN0076                   II  1.1D, 6.1.                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10                 5E
          or wetted with less
          than 15 percent
          water, by mass.
         Dinitrophenol                 6.1  UN1599                   II  6.1.......      IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A                  36
          solutions.
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......      IB3, T4, TP1  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A                  36
         Dinitrophenol,                4.1  UN1320                    I  4.1, 6.1..      23, A8, A19,  None..........  211........  None.......         1 kg        15 kg  E              28, 36
          wetted with not                                                                    A20, N41
          less than 15
          percent water, by
          mass.
         Dinitrophenolates            1.3C  UN0077                   II  1.3C, 6.1.                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10                 5E
          alkali metals, dry
          or wetted with less
          than 15 percent
          water, by mass.
         Dinitrophenolates,            4.1  UN1321                    I  4.1, 6.1..      23, A8, A19,  None..........  211........  None.......         1 kg        15 kg  E              28, 36
          wetted with not                                                                    A20, N41
          less than 15
          percent water, by
          mass.
         Dinitropropylene        Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          glycol.
         Dinitroresorcinol,           1.1D  UN0078                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10                 5E
          dry or wetted with
          less than 15
          percent water, by
          mass.
         2,4-                    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Dinitroresorcinol
          (heavy metal salts
          of) (dry).
         4,6-                    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Dinitroresorcinol
          (heavy metal salts
          of) (dry).
         Dinitroresorcinol,            4.1  UN1322                    I  4.1.......      23, A8, A19,  None..........  211........  None.......         1 kg        15 kg  E              28, 36
          wetted with not                                                                    A20, N41
          less than 15
          percent water, by
          mass.
         3,5-Dinitrosalicylic    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          acid (lead salt)
          (dry).
         Dinitrosobenzene....         1.3C  UN0406                   II  1.3C......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
         Dinitrosobenzylamidi    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          ne and salts of
          (dry).
         2,2-Dinitrostilbene.    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Dinitrotoluenes,              6.1  UN2038                   II  6.1.......      IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
          liquid.
         Dinitrotoluenes,              6.1  UN1600                   II  6.1.......           T7, TP3  None..........  202........  243........    Forbidden    Forbidden  C             .......
          molten.

[[Page 171]]

 
         Dinitrotoluenes,              6.1  UN2038                   II  6.1.......    IB8, IP2, IP4,  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          solid.                                                                              T7, TP2
         1,9-Dinitroxy           Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          pentamethylene-2,4,
          6,8-tetramine (dry).
         Dioxane.............            3  UN1165                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         Dioxolane...........            3  UN1166                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
         Dipentene...........            3  UN2052                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Diphenylamine                 6.1  UN1698                    I  6.1.......                    None..........  201........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          chloroarsine.
         Diphenylchloroarsine          6.1  UN1699                    I  6.1.......     A8, B14, B32,  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden         30 L  D                  40
          , liquid.                                                                    N33, N34, T14,
                                                                                      TP2, TP13, TP27
         Diphenylchloroarsine          6.1  UN1699                    I  6.1.......     A8, B14, B32,  None..........  211........  242........    Forbidden        15 kg  D                  40
          , solid.                                                                     IB7, IP1, N33,
                                                                                                  N34
         Diphenyldichlorosila            8  UN1769                   II  8.........      A7, B2, IB2,  None..........  202........  242........    Forbidden         30 L  C                  40
          ne.                                                                           N34, T7, TP2,
                                                                                                 TP13
         Diphenylmethyl                  8  UN1770                   II  8.........     IB8, IP2, IP4  154...........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  D                  40
          bromide.
         Dipicryl sulfide,            1.1D  UN0401                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
          dry or wetted with
          less than 10
          percent water, by
          mass.
         Dipicryl sulfide,             4.1  UN2852                    I  4.1.......           A2, N41  None..........  211........  None.......    Forbidden       0.5 kg  D                  28
          wetted with not
          less than 10
          percent water, by
          mass.
         Dipicrylamine, see    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Hexanitrodiphenylam
          ine.
         Dipropionyl             Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          peroxide, with more
          than 28 percent in
          solution.
         Di-n-propyl ether...            3  UN2384                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         Dipropyl ketone.....            3  UN2710                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Dipropylamine.......            3  UN2383                   II  3, 8......      IB2, T7, TP1  None..........  202........  243........          1 L          5 L  B             .......
    G    Disinfectant,                   8  UN1903                    I  8.........     A7, B10, T14,  None..........  201........  243........        0.5 L        2.5 L  B             .......
          liquid, corrosive,                                                                TP2, TP27
          n.o.s..
    G    Disinfectants,                  8  UN1903                   II  8.........  B2, IB2, T7, TP2  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  B             .......
          liquid, corrosive
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  8.........      IB3, T4, TP1  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
    G    Disinfectants,                6.1  UN3142                    I  6.1.......     A4, T14, TP2,  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  A                  40
          liquid, toxic,                                                                         TP27
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A                  40
                                                                                                 TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......     IB3, T7, TP1,  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A                  40
                                                                                                 TP28
    G    Disinfectants,                6.1  UN1601                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A                  40
          solid, toxic,
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A                  40
         Disodium                        8  UN3253                  III  8.........          IB8, IP3  154...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          trioxosilicate.
    G    Dispersant gases,     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          n.o.s. see
          Refrigerant gases,
          n.o.s..
         Divinyl ether,                  3  UN1167                    I  3.........          T11, TP2  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  E                  40
          stabilized.

[[Page 172]]

 
         Dodecyltrichlorosila            8  UN1771                   II  8.........  A7, B2, B6, IB2,  None..........  202........  242........    Forbidden         30 L  C                  40
          ne.                                                                           N34, T7, TP2,
                                                                                                 TP13
         Dry ice, see Carbon   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          dioxide, solid.
    G    Dyes, liquid,                   8  UN2801                    I  8.........     11, B10, T14,  None..........  201........  243........        0.5 L        2.5 L  A             .......
          corrosive, n.o.s.                                                                 TP2, TP27
          or Dye
          intermediates,
          liquid, corrosive,
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  8.........      11, B2, IB2,  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  A             .......
                                                                                       T11, TP2, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  8.........      11, IB3, T7,  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
                                                                                            TP1, TP28
    G    Dyes, liquid, toxic,          6.1  UN1602                   II  6.1.......               IB2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
          n.o.s. or Dye
          intermediates,
          liquid, toxic,
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......               IB3  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
    G    Dyes, solid,                    8  UN3147                    I  8.........          IB7, IP1  None..........  211........  242........         1 kg        25 kg  A             .......
          corrosive, n.o.s.
          or Dye
          intermediates,
          solid, corrosive,
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  8.........     IB8, IP2, IP4  154...........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  A             .......
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  8.........          IB8, IP3  154...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
    G    Dyes, solid, toxic,           6.1  UN3143                    I  6.1.......     A5, IB7, IP1,  None..........  211........  242........         5 kg        50 kg  A             .......
          n.o.s. or Dye                                                                T14, TP2, TP27
          intermediates,
          solid, toxic,
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A             .......
         Dynamite, see         ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Explosive,
          blasting, type A.
         Electrolyte (acid or  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          alkali) for
          batteries, see
          Battery fluid, acid
          or Battery fluid,
          alkali.
         Elevated temperature            3  UN3256                  III  3.........     IB1, T3, TP3,  None..........  None.......  247........    Forbidden    Forbidden  A             .......
          liquid, flammable,                                                                     TP29
          n.o.s., with flash
          point above 37.8 C,
          at or above its
          flash point.

[[Page 173]]

 
         Elevated temperature            9  UN3257                  III  9.........     IB1, T3, TP3,  None..........  None.......  247........    Forbidden    Forbidden  A                  85
          liquid, n.o.s., at                                                                     TP29
          or above 100 C and
          below its flash
          point (including
          molten metals,
          molten salts, etc.).
         Elevated temperature            9  UN3258                  III  9.........                    247(h) (4)....  None.......  247........    Forbidden    Forbidden  A                  85
          solid, n.o.s., at
          or above 240 C, see
          Sec.  173.247(h)(4).
         Engines, internal               9  UN3166              .......  9.........               135  220...........  220........  220........    Forbidden     No limit  A             .......
          combustion,
          flammable gas
          powered.
         Engines, internal               9  UN3166              .......  9.........               135  220...........  220........  220........     No limit     No limit  A             .......
          combustion,
          flammable liquid
          powered.
    G    Environmentally                 9  UN3082                  III  9.........  8, IB3, T4, TP1,  155...........  203........  241........     No limit     No limit  A             .......
          hazardous                                                                              TP29
          substances, liquid,
          n.o.s..
    G    Environmentally                 9  UN3077                  III  9.........  8, B54, IB8, N20  155...........  213........  240........     No limit     No limit  A             .......
          hazardous
          substances, solid,
          n.o.s..
         Epibromohydrin......          6.1  UN2558                    I  6.1, 3....    T14, TP2, TP13  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
    +    Epichlorohydrin.....          6.1  UN2023                   II  6.1, 3....     IB2, T7, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A                  40
                                                                                                 TP13
         1,2-Epoxy-3-                    3  UN2752                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
          ethoxypropane.
         Esters, n.o.s.......            3  UN3272                   II  3.........     IB2, T7, TP1,  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
                                                                                            TP8, TP28
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3.........      B1, IB3, T4,  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
                                                                                            TP1, TP29
         Etching acid,         ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          liquid, n.o.s., see
          Hydrofluoric acid,
          solution etc.
         Ethane..............          2.1  UN1035              .......  2.1.......                    306...........  304........  302........    Forbidden       150 kg  E                  40
    D    Ethane-Propane                2.1  NA1961              .......  2.1.......          T75, TP5  None..........  316........  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          mixture,
          refrigerated liquid.
         Ethane, refrigerated          2.1  UN1961              .......  2.1.......          T75, TP5  None..........  None.......  315........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          liquid.
         Ethanol amine           Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          dinitrate.
         Ethanol or Ethyl                3  UN1170                   II  3.........  24, IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
          alcohol or Ethanol
          solutions or Ethyl
          alcohol solutions.
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3.........  24, B1, IB3, T2,  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
                                                                                                  TP1
         Ethanolamine or                 8  UN2491                  III  8.........      IB3, T4, TP1  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
          Ethanolamine
          solutions.
         Ether, see Diethyl    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          ether.
         Ethers, n.o.s.......            3  UN3271                   II  3.........     IB2, T7, TP1,  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
                                                                                            TP8, TP28
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3.........      B1, IB3, T4,  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
                                                                                            TP1, TP29
         Ethyl acetate.......            3  UN1173                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         Ethyl acrylate,                 3  UN1917                   II  3.........     IB2, T4, TP1,  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
          stabilized.                                                                            TP13
         Ethyl alcohol, see    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Ethanol.
         Ethyl aldehyde, see   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Acetaldehyde.
         Ethyl amyl ketone...            3  UN2271                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......

[[Page 174]]

 
         N-Ethyl-N-                    6.1  UN2274                  III  6.1.......      IB3, T4, TP1  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
          benzylaniline.
         Ethyl borate........            3  UN1176                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         Ethyl bromide.......          6.1  UN1891                   II  6.1.......     IB2, T7, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  B              40, 85
                                                                                                 TP13
         Ethyl bromoacetate..          6.1  UN1603                   II  6.1, 3....      IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
         Ethyl butyl ether...            3  UN1179                   II  3.........  B1, IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         Ethyl butyrate......            3  UN1180                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Ethyl chloride......          2.1  UN1037              .......  2.1.......          B77, T50  None..........  322........  314, 315...    Forbidden       150 kg  B                  40
         Ethyl chloroacetate.          6.1  UN1181                   II  6.1, 3....      IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
         Ethyl chloroformate.          6.1  UN1182                    I  6.1, 3, 8.    2, A3, A6, A7,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             21, 40,
                                                                                        B9, B14, B32,                                                                                        100
                                                                                       B74, N34, T20,
                                                                                     TP2, TP13, TP38,
                                                                                                 TP45
         Ethyl 2-                        3  UN2935                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
          chloropropionate.
    +    Ethyl                           8  UN2826                   II  8, 6.1, 3.  2, B9, B14, B32,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  A                  40
          chlorothioformate.                                                           B74, T20, TP2,
                                                                                           TP38, TP45
         Ethyl crotonate.....            3  UN1862                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP2  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         Ethyl ether, see      ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Diethyl ether.
         Ethyl fluoride or             2.1  UN2453              .......  2.1.......                    306...........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden       150 kg  E                  40
          Refrigerant gas
          R161.
         Ethyl formate.......            3  UN1190                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  E             .......
         Ethyl hydroperoxide.    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Ethyl isobutyrate...            3  UN2385                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
    +    Ethyl isocyanate....            3  UN2481                    I  3, 6.1....   1, A7, B9, B14,  None..........  226........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
                                                                                       B30, B72, T22,
                                                                                     TP2, TP13, TP38,
                                                                                                 TP44
         Ethyl lactate.......            3  UN1192                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Ethyl mercaptan.....            3  UN2363                    I  3.........    T11, TP2, TP13  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden         30 L  E             95, 102
         Ethyl methacrylate..            3  UN2277                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         Ethyl methyl ether..          2.1  UN1039              .......  2.1.......                    None..........  201........  314, 315...    Forbidden       150 kg  B                  40
         Ethyl methyl ketone             3  UN1193                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
          or Methyl ethyl
          ketone.
         Ethyl nitrite                   3  UN1194                    I  3, 6.1....                    None..........  201........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  E             40, 105
          solutions.
         Ethyl orthoformate..            3  UN2524                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......

[[Page 175]]

 
         Ethyl oxalate.......          6.1  UN2525                  III  6.1.......      IB3, T4, TP1  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Ethyl perchlorate...    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
    D    Ethyl                         6.1  NA2927                    I  6.1, 8....  2, B9, B14, B32,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          phosphonothioic                                                              B74, T20, TP4,
          dichloride,                                                                     TP12, TP13,
          anhydrous.                                                                       TP38, TP45
    D    Ethyl phosphonous             6.1  NA2845                    I  6.1, 4.2..  2, B9, B14, B32,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  18
          dichloride,                                                                  B74, T20, TP4,
          anhydrous                                                                       TP12, TP13,
          pyrophoric liquid.                                                               TP38, TP45
    D    Ethyl                         6.1  NA2927                    I  6.1, 8....  2, B9, B14, B32,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          phosphorodichlorida                                                          B74, T20, TP4,
          te.                                                                             TP12, TP13,
                                                                                           TP38, TP45
         Ethyl propionate....            3  UN1195                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         Ethyl propyl ether..            3  UN2615                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  E             .......
         Ethyl silicate, see   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Tetraethyl silicate.
         Ethylacetylene,               2.1  UN2452              .......  2.1.......                    None..........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden       150 kg  B                  40
          stabilized.
         Ethylamine..........          2.1  UN1036              .......  2.1.......          B77, T50  None..........  321........  314, 315...    Forbidden       150 kg  D                  40
         Ethylamine, aqueous             3  UN2270                   II  3, 8......      IB2, T7, TP1  None..........  202........  243........          1 L          5 L  B                  40
          solution with not
          less than 50
          percent but not
          more than 70
          percent ethylamine.
         N-Ethylaniline......          6.1  UN2272                  III  6.1.......      IB3, T4, TP1  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         2-Ethylaniline......          6.1  UN2273                  III  6.1.......      IB3, T4, TP1  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Ethylbenzene........            3  UN1175                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         N-                            6.1  UN2753                  III  6.1.......      IB3, T7, TP1  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
          Ethylbenzyltoluidin
          es liquid.
         N-                            6.1  UN2753                  III  6.1.......     IB8, IP3, T7,  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A             .......
          Ethylbenzyltoluidin                                                                     TP1
          es solid.
         2-Ethylbutanol......            3  UN2275                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Ethylbutyl acetate..            3  UN1177                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         2-Ethylbutyraldehyde            3  UN1178                   II  3.........  B1, IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         Ethyldichloroarsine.          6.1  UN1892                    I  6.1.......  2, B9, B14, B32,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
                                                                                       B74, T20, TP2,
                                                                                     TP13, TP38, TP45
         Ethyldichlorosilane.          4.3  UN1183                    I  4.3, 8, 3.  A2, A3, A7, N34,  None..........  201........  244........    Forbidden          1 L  D             21, 28,
                                                                                       T10, TP2, TP7,                                                                                    40, 49,
                                                                                                 TP13                                                                                        100
         Ethylene, acetylene           2.1  UN3138              .......  2.1.......          T75, TP5  None..........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          and propylene in
          mixture,
          refrigerated liquid
          with at least 71.5
          percent ethylene
          with not more than
          22.5 percent
          acetylene and not
          more than 6 percent
          propylene.

[[Page 176]]

 
         Ethylene                      6.1  UN1135                    I  6.1, 3....  2, B9, B14, B32,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          chlorohydrin.                                                                B74, T20, TP2,
                                                                                     TP13, TP38, TP45
         Ethylene, compressed          2.1  UN1962              .......  2.1.......                    306...........  304........  302........    Forbidden       150 kg  E                  40
         Ethylene diamine        Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          diperchlorate.
         Ethylene dibromide..          6.1  UN1605                    I  6.1.......  2, B9, B14, B32,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
                                                                                       B74, B77, T20,
                                                                                     TP2, TP13, TP38,
                                                                                                 TP45
         Ethylene dibromide    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          and methyl bromide
          liquid mixtures,
          see Methyl bromide
          and ethylene
          dibromide, liquid
          mixtures.
         Ethylene dichloride.            3  UN1184                   II  3, 6.1....      IB2, T7, TP1  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         60 L  B                  40
         Ethylene glycol                 3  UN1153                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
          diethyl ether.
         Ethylene glycol         Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          dinitrate.
         Ethylene glycol                 3  UN1171                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
          monoethyl ether.
         Ethylene glycol                 3  UN1172                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
          monoethyl ether
          acetate.
         Ethylene glycol                 3  UN1188                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
          monomethyl ether.
         Ethylene glycol                 3  UN1189                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
          monomethyl ether
          acetate.
         Ethylene oxide and            2.3  UN3300              .......  2.3, 2.1..                 4  None..........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          carbon dioxide
          mixture with more
          than 87 percent
          ethylene oxide.
         Ethylene oxide and            2.1  UN1041              .......  2.1.......               T50  306...........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden        25 kg  B                  40
          carbon dioxide
          mixtures with more
          than 9 percent but
          not more than 87
          percent ethylene
          oxide.
         Ethylene oxide and            2.2  UN1952              .......  2.2.......                    306...........  304........  314, 315...        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
          carbon dioxide
          mixtures with not
          more than 9 percent
          ethylene oxide.
         Ethylene oxide and            2.2  UN3297              .......  2.2.......               T50  306...........  304........  314, 315...        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
          chlorotetrafluoroet
          hane mixture with
          not more than 8.8
          percent ethylene
          oxide.

[[Page 177]]

 
         Ethylene oxide and            2.2  UN3070              .......  2.2.......               T50  306...........  304........  314, 315...        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
          dichlorodifluoromet
          hane mixture, with
          not more than 12.5
          percent ethylene
          oxide.
         Ethylene oxide and            2.2  UN3298              .......  2.2.......               T50  306...........  304........  314, 315...        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
          pentafluoroethane
          mixture with not
          more than 7.9
          percent ethylene
          oxide.
         Ethylene oxide and              3  UN2983                    I  3, 6.1....  5, A11, N4, N34,  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden         30 L  E                  40
          propylene oxide                                                              T14, TP2, TP7,
          mixtures, with not                                                                     TP13
          more than 30
          percent ethylene
          oxide.
         Ethylene oxide and            2.2  UN3299              .......  2.2.......               T50  306...........  304........  314, 315...        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
          tetrafluoroethane
          mixture with not
          more than 5.6
          percent ethylene
          oxide.
         Ethylene oxide or             2.3  UN1040              .......  2.3, 2.1..      4, T50, TP20  None..........  323........  323........    Forbidden        25 kg  D                  40
          Ethylene oxide with
          nitrogen up to a
          total pressure of
          1MPa (10 bar) at 50
          degrees C.
         Ethylene,                     2.1  UN1038              .......  2.1.......          T75, TP5  None..........  316........  318, 319...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          refrigerated liquid
          (cryogenic liquid).
         Ethylenediamine.....            8  UN1604                   II  8, 3......      IB2, T7, TP2  154...........  202........  243........          1 L         30 L  A                  40
         Ethyleneimine,                6.1  UN1185                    I  6.1, 3....  1, B9, B14, B30,  None..........  226........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          stabilized.                                                                  B72, B77, N25,
                                                                                       N32, T22, TP2,
                                                                                     TP13, TP38, TP44
         Ethylhexaldehyde,     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Octyl aldehydes
          etc.
         2-Ethylhexyl                  6.1  UN2748                   II  6.1, 8....     IB2, T7, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         30 L  A             12, 13,
          chloroformate.                                                                         TP13                                                                                    21, 25,
                                                                                                                                                                                         40, 100
         2-Ethylhexylamine...            3  UN2276                  III  3, 8......  B1, IB3, T4, TP1  150...........  203........  242........          5 L         60 L  A                  40
         Ethylphenyldichloros            8  UN2435                   II  8.........      A7, B2, IB2,  None..........  202........  242........    Forbidden         30 L  C             .......
          ilane.                                                                        N34, T7, TP2,
                                                                                                 TP13
         1-Ethylpiperidine...            3  UN2386                   II  3, 8......      IB2, T7, TP1  None..........  202........  243........          1 L          5 L  B             .......
         N-Ethyltoluidines...          6.1  UN2754                   II  6.1.......      IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
         Ethyltrichlorosilane            3  UN1196                   II  3, 8......     A7, IB1, N34,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L          5 L  B                  40
                                                                                        T7, TP2, TP13
         Etiologic agent, see  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Infectious
          substances, etc.
         Explosive articles,   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Articles,
          explosive , n.o.s.
          etc.
         Explosive, blasting,         1.1D  UN0081                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10                21E
          type A.
         Explosive, blasting,         1.1D  UN0082                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
          type B.
         Explosive, blasting,         1.5D  UN0331                   II  1.5D......          105, 106  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
          type B or Agent
          blasting, Type B.
         Explosive, blasting,         1.1D  UN0083                   II  1.1D......               123  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10                22E
          type C.

[[Page 178]]

 
         Explosive, blasting,         1.1D  UN0084                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
          type D.
         Explosive, blasting,         1.1D  UN0241                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10                19E
          type E.
         Explosive, blasting,         1.5D  UN0332                   II  1.5D......          105, 106  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
          type E or Agent
          blasting, Type E.
         Explosive,              Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          forbidden. See Sec.
           173.54.
         Explosive             ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          substances, see
          Substances,
          explosive, n.o.s.
          etc.
         Explosives, slurry,   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Explosive,
          blasting, type E.
         Explosives, water     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          gels, see
          Explosive,
          blasting, type E.
         Extracts, aromatic,             3  UN1169                   II  3.........     IB2, T4, TP1,  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
          liquid.                                                                                 TP8
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Extracts, flavoring,            3  UN1197                   II  3.........     IB2, T4, TP1,  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
          liquid.                                                                                 TP8
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Fabric with animal    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          or vegetable oil,
          see Fibers or
          fabrics, etc.
         Ferric arsenate.....          6.1  UN1606                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Ferric arsenite.....          6.1  UN1607                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Ferric chloride,                8  UN1773                  III  8.........          IB8, IP3  154...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          anhydrous.
         Ferric chloride,                8  UN2582                  III  8.........     B15, IB3, T4,  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
          solution.                                                                               TP1
         Ferric nitrate......          5.1  UN1466                  III  5.1.......     A1, A29, IB8,  152...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
                                                                                                  IP3
         Ferrocerium.........          4.1  UN1323                   II  4.1.......     59, A19, IB8,  151...........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  A             .......
                                                                                             IP2, IP4
         Ferrosilicon, with            4.3  UN1408                  III  4.3, 6.1..     A1, A19, IB8,  151...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             13, 40,
          30 percent or more                                                                      IP4                                                                                    85, 103
          but less than 90
          percent silicon.
         Ferrous arsenate....          6.1  UN1608                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
    D    Ferrous chloride,               8  NA1759                   II  8.........     IB8, IP2, IP4  154...........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  A             .......
          solid.
    D    Ferrous chloride,               8  NA1760                   II  8.........     B3, IB2, T11,  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
          solution.                                                                         TP2, TP27

[[Page 179]]

 
         Ferrous metal                 4.2  UN2793                  III  4.2.......     A1, A19, IB8,  None..........  213........  241........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          borings or Ferrous                                                                 IP3, IP6
          metal shavings or
          Ferrous metal
          turnings or Ferrous
          metal cuttings in a
          form liable to self-
          heating.
         Fertilizer                    2.2  UN1043              .......  2.2.......                    306...........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden       150 kg  E                  40
          ammoniating
          solution with free
          ammonia.
  A W    Fibers or Fabrics,            4.2  UN1373                  III  4.2.......     137, IB8, IP3  None..........  213........  241........    Forbidden    Forbidden  A             .......
          animal or vegetable
          or Synthetic,
          n.o.s. with animal
          or vegetable oil.
         Fibers or Fabrics             4.1  UN1353                  III  4.1.......      A1, IB8, IP3  None..........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  D             .......
          impregnated with
          weakly nitrated
          nitrocellulose,
          n.o.s..
         Films,                ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          nitrocellulose
          base, from which
          gelatine has been
          removed; film
          scrap, see
          Celluloid scrap.
         Films,                        4.1  UN1324                  III  4.1.......                    None..........  183........  None.......        25 kg       100 kg  D                  91
          nitrocellulose
          base, gelatine
          coated (except
          scrap).
         Fire extinguisher               8  UN1774                   II  8.........               N41  154...........  202........  None.......          1 L         30 L  A             .......
          charges, corrosive
          liquid.
         Fire extinguisher     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          charges, expelling,
          explosive, see
          Cartridges, power
          device.
         Fire extinguishers            2.2  UN1044              .......  2.2.......           18, 110  309...........  309........  None.......        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
          containing
          compressed or
          liquefied gas.
         Firelighters, solid           4.1  UN2623                  III  4.1.......           A1, A19  None..........  213........  None.......        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          with flammable
          liquid.
         Fireworks...........         1.1G  UN0333                   II  1.1G......               108  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
         Fireworks...........         1.2G  UN0334                   II  1.2G......               108  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
         Fireworks...........         1.3G  UN0335                   II  1.3G......               108  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
         Fireworks...........         1.4G  UN0336                   II  1.4G......               108  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  06            .......
         Fireworks...........         1.4S  UN0337                   II  1.4S......               108  None..........  62.........  None.......        25 kg       100 kg  05            .......
         First aid kits......            9  UN3316              .......  9.........                15  None..........  None.......  None.......        10 kg        10 kg  A             .......
    W    Fish meal,                      9  UN2216                  III  None......               IB8  155...........  218........  218........     No limit     No limit  A                  88
          stabilized or Fish
          scrap, stabilized.
         Fish meal,                    4.2  UN1374                   II  4.2.......     A1, A19, IB8,  None..........  212........  241........        15 kg        50 kg  A                119,
          unstablized or Fish                                                                     IP2                                                                                        120
          scrap, unstabilized.
         Fissile radioactive   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          materials, see
          Radioactive
          material, fissile,
          n.o.s..
         Flammable compressed  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          gas, see Compressed
          or Liquefied gas,
          flammable, etc.
         Flammable compressed  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          gas (small
          receptacles not
          fitted with a
          dispersion device,
          not refillable),
          see Receptacles,
          etc.

[[Page 180]]

 
         Flammable gas in      ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          lighters, see
          Lighters or lighter
          refills,
          cigarettes,
          containing
          flammable gas.
    G    Flammable liquid,               3  UN3286                    I  3, 6.1, 8.   T14, TP2, TP13,  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden        2.5 L  E             21, 40,
          toxic, corrosive,                                                                      TP27                                                                                        100
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  3, 6.1, 8.    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L          5 L  B             21, 40,
                                                                                           TP13, TP27                                                                                        100
    G    Flammable liquids,              3  UN2924                    I  3, 8......          T14, TP2  None..........  201........  243........        0.5 L        2.5 L  E                  40
          corrosive, n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  3, 8......    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L          5 L  B                  40
                                                                                                 TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3, 8......      B1, IB3, T7,  150...........  203........  242........          5 L         60 L  A                  40
                                                                                            TP1, TP28
    G    Flammable liquids,              3  UN1993                    I  3.........          T11, TP1  150...........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  E             .......
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  3.........     IB2, T7, TP1,  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
                                                                                            TP8, TP28
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3.........     B1, B52, IB3,  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
                                                                                        T4, TP1, TP29
    G    Flammable liquids,              3  UN1992                    I  3, 6.1....   T14, TP2, TP13,  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden         30 L  E                  40
          toxic, n.o.s..                                                                         TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  3, 6.1....     IB2, T7, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                                 TP13
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3, 6.1....      B1, IB3, T7,  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
                                                                                            TP1, TP28
    G    Flammable solid,              4.1  UN3180                   II  4.1, 8....      A1, IB6, IP2  151...........  212........  242........        15 kg        50 kg  D                  40
          corrosive,
          inorganic, n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.1, 8....           A1, IB6  151...........  213........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  D                  40
    G    Flammable solid,              4.1  UN3178                   II  4.1.......     A1, IB8, IP2,  151...........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  B             .......
          inorganic, n.o.s..                                                                      IP4
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.1.......      A1, IB8, IP3  151...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  B             .......
    G    Flammable solid,              4.1  UN3176                   II  4.1.......     IB1, T3, TP3,  151...........  212........  240........    Forbidden    Forbidden  C             .......
          organic, molten,                                                                       TP26
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.1.......     IB1, T1, TP3,  151...........  213........  240........    Forbidden    Forbidden  C             .......
                                                                                                 TP26
    G    Flammable solid,              4.1  UN3097                   II  4.1, 5.1..               131  None..........  214........  214........    Forbidden    Forbidden  E                  40
          oxidizing, n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.1, 5.1..               131  None..........  214........  214........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40

[[Page 181]]

 
    G    Flammable solid,              4.1  UN3179                   II  4.1, 6.1..      A1, IB6, IP2  151...........  212........  242........        15 kg        50 kg  B                  40
          toxic, inorganic,
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.1, 6.1..           A1, IB6  151...........  213........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  B                  40
    G    Flammable solids,             4.1  UN2925                   II  4.1, 8....      A1, IB6, IP2  None..........  212........  242........        15 kg        50 kg  D                  40
          corrosive, organic,
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.1, 8....           A1, IB6  151...........  213........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  D                  40
    G    Flammable solids,             4.1  UN1325                   II  4.1.......     A1, IB8, IP2,  151...........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  B             .......
          organic, n.o.s..                                                               IP4, T3, TP1
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.1.......     A1, IB8, IP3,  151...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  B             .......
                                                                                              T1, TP1
    G    Flammable solids,             4.1  UN2926                   II  4.1, 6.1..      A1, IB6, IP2  None..........  212........  242........        15 kg        50 kg  B                  40
          toxic, organic,
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.1, 6.1..           A1, IB6  151...........  213........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  B                  40
         Flares, aerial......         1.3G  UN0093                   II  1.3G......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  07            .......
         Flares, aerial......         1.4G  UN0403                   II  1.4G......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  06            .......
         Flares, aerial......         1.4S  UN0404                   II  1.4S......                    None..........  62.........  None.......        25 kg       100 kg  05            .......
         Flares, aerial......         1.1G  UN0420                   II  1.1G......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
         Flares, aerial......         1.2G  UN0421                   II  1.2G......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
         Flares, airplane,     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Flares, aerial.
         Flares, signal, see   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Cartridges, signal.
         Flares, surface.....         1.3G  UN0092                   II  1.3G......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  07            .......
         Flares, surface.....         1.1G  UN0418                   II  1.1G......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
         Flares, surface.....         1.2G  UN0419                   II  1.2G......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
         Flares, water-        ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          activated, see
          Contrivances, water-
          activated, etc.
         Flash powder........         1.1G  UN0094                   II  1.1G......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  15            .......
         Flash powder........         1.3G  UN0305                   II  1.3G......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  15            .......
         Flue dusts,           ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          poisonous, see
          Arsenical dust.
         Fluoric acid, see     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Hydrofluoric acid,
          etc.
         Fluorine, compressed          2.3  UN1045              .......  2.3, 5.1,                  1  None..........  302........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             40, 89,
                                                                          8.                                                                                                                  90
         Fluoroacetic acid...          6.1  UN2642                    I  6.1.......          IB7, IP1  None..........  211........  242........         1 kg        15 kg  E             .......
         Fluoroanilines......          6.1  UN2941                  III  6.1.......      IB3, T4, TP1  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Fluorobenzene.......            3  UN2387                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         Fluoroboric acid....            8  UN1775                   II  8.........  A6, A7, B2, B15,  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  A             .......
                                                                                        IB2, N3, N34,
                                                                                              T7, TP2
         Fluorophosphoric                8  UN1776                   II  8.........  A6, A7, B2, IB2,  None..........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  A             .......
          acid anhydrous.                                                                N3, N34, T8,
                                                                                            TP2, TP12
         Fluorosilicates,              6.1  UN2856                  III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A                  26
          n.o.s..

[[Page 182]]

 
         Fluorosilicic acid..            8  UN1778                   II  8.........  A6, A7, B2, B15,  None..........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  A             .......
                                                                                        IB2, N3, N34,
                                                                                        T8, TP2, TP12
         Fluorosulfonic acid.            8  UN1777                    I  8.........  A3, A6, A7, A10,  None..........  201........  243........        0.5 L        2.5 L  D                  40
                                                                                         B6, B10, N3,
                                                                                       T10, TP2, TP12
         Fluorotoluenes......            3  UN2388                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
         Forbidden materials.    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          See Sec.  173.21.
         Formaldehyde,                   3  UN1198                  III  3, 8......  B1, IB3, T4, TP1  150...........  203........  242........          5 L         60 L  A                  40
          solutions,
          flammable.
         Formaldehyde,                   8  UN2209                  III  8.........      IB3, T4, TP1  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
          solutions, with not
          less than 25
          percent
          formaldehyde.
         Formalin, see         ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Formaldehyde,
          solutions.
         Formic acid.........            8  UN1779                   II  8.........     B2, B28, IB2,  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  A                  40
                                                                                              T7, TP2
         Fracturing devices,          1.1D  UN0099                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
          explosive, without
          detonators for oil
          wells.
         Fuel, aviation,                 3  UN1863                    I  3.........     T11, TP1, TP8  150...........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  E             .......
          turbine engine.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  3.........     IB2, T4, TP1,  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
                                                                                                  TP8
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
    D    Fuel oil (No. 1, 2,             3  NA1993                  III  3.........      B1, IB3, T4,  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
          4, 5, or 6).                                                                      TP1, TP29
         Fuel system           ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          components
          (including fuel
          control units
          (FCU), carburetors,
          fuel lines, fuel
          pumps) see
          Dangerous Goods in
          Apparatus or
          Dangerous Goods in
          Machinery.
         Fulminate of mercury    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          (dry).
         Fulminate of          ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          mercury, wet, see
          Mercury fulminate,
          etc.
         Fulminating gold....    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Fulminating mercury.    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Fulminating platinum    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Fulminating silver..    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......

[[Page 183]]

 
         Fulminic acid.......    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Fumaryl chloride....            8  UN1780                   II  8.........  B2, IB2, T7, TP2  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  C               8, 40
         Fumigated lading,     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Secs.
          172.302(g), 173.9
          and 176.76(h).
         Fumigated transport   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          vehicle or freight
          container see 173.9.
         Furaldehydes........          6.1  UN1199                   II  6.1, 3....      IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
         Furan...............            3  UN2389                    I  3.........    T12, TP2, TP13  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  E                  40
         Furfuryl alcohol....          6.1  UN2874                  III  6.1.......      IB3, T4, TP1  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A              26, 74
         Furfurylamine.......            3  UN2526                  III  3, 8......  B1, IB3, T4, TP1  150...........  203........  242........          5 L         60 L  A                  40
         Fuse, detonating,     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          metal clad, see
          Cord, detonating,
          metal clad.
         Fuse, detonating,     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          mild effect, metal
          clad, see Cord,
          detonating, mild
          effect, metal clad.
         Fuse, igniter                1.4G  UN0103                   II  1.4G......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  06            .......
          tubular metal clad.
         Fuse, non-detonating         1.3G  UN0101                   II  1.3G......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
          instantaneous or
          quickmatch.
         Fuse, safety........         1.4S  UN0105                   II  1.4S......                    None..........  62.........  None.......        25 kg       100 kg  05            .......
    D    Fusee (railway or             4.1  NA1325                   II  4.1.......                    None..........  184........  None.......        15 kg        50 kg  B             .......
          highway).
         Fusel oil...........            3  UN1201                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Fuses, tracer, see    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Tracers for
          ammunition.
         Fuzes, combination,   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          percussion and
          time, see Fuzes,
          detonating (UN0257,
          UN0367); Fuzes,
          igniting (UN0317,
          UN0368).
         Fuzes, detonating...         1.1B  UN0106                   II  1.1B......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  11            .......
         Fuzes, detonating...         1.2B  UN0107                   II  1.2B......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  11            .......
         Fuzes, detonating...         1.4B  UN0257                   II  1.4B......               116  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  06            .......
         Fuzes, detonating...         1.4S  UN0367                   II  1.4S......               116  None..........  62.........  None.......        25 kg       100 kg  05            .......
         Fuzes, detonating,           1.1D  UN0408                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
          with protective
          features.
         Fuzes, detonating,           1.2D  UN0409                   II  1.2D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
          with protective
          features.
         Fuzes, detonating,           1.4D  UN0410                   II  1.4D......               116  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  06            .......
          with protective
          features.
         Fuzes, igniting.....         1.3G  UN0316                   II  1.3G......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
         Fuzes, igniting.....         1.4G  UN0317                   II  1.4G......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  06            .......
         Fuzes, igniting.....         1.4S  UN0368                   II  1.4S......                    None..........  62.........  None.......        25 kg       100 kg  05            .......
         Galactsan trinitrate    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Gallium.............            8  UN2803                  III  8.........                    None..........  162........  240........        20 kg        20 kg  B                  48
         Gas cartridges,               2.1  UN2037              .......  2.1.......                    306...........  304........  None.......         1 kg        15 kg  B                  40
          (flammable) without
          a release device,
          non-refillable.

[[Page 184]]

 
         Gas generator                 2.2  ..................  .......  2.2.......                    None..........  335........  None.......        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
          assemblies
          (aircraft),
          containing a non-
          flammable non-toxic
          gas and a
          propellant
          cartridge.
    D    Gas identification            2.3  NA9035              .......  2.3.......                 6  None..........  194........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             .......
          set.
         Gas oil.............            3  UN1202                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
    G    Gas, refrigerated             2.1  UN3312              .......  2.1.......          T75, TP5  None..........  316........  318........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          liquid, flammable,
          n.o.s. (cryogenic
          liquid).
    G    Gas, refrigerated             2.2  UN3158              .......  2.2.......          T75, TP5  320...........  316........  318........        50 kg       500 kg  D             .......
          liquid, n.o.s.
          (cryogenic liquid).
    G    Gas, refrigerated             2.2  UN3311              .......  2.2, 5.1..          T75, TP5  320...........  316........  318........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             .......
          liquid, oxidizing,
          n.o.s. (cryogenic
          liquid).
         Gas sample, non-              2.1  UN3167              .......  2.1.......                    306...........  302, 304...  None.......          1 L          5 L  D             .......
          pressurized,
          flammable, n.o.s.,
          not refrigerated
          liquid.
         Gas sample, non-              2.3  UN3168              .......  2.3, 2.1..                    306...........  302........  None.......    Forbidden          1 L  D             .......
          pressurized, toxic,
          flammable, n.o.s.,
          not refrigerated
          liquid.
         Gas sample, non-              2.3  UN3169              .......  2.3.......                    306...........  302, 304...  None.......    Forbidden          1 L  D             .......
          pressurized, toxic,
          n.o.s., not
          refrigerated liquid.
    D    Gasohol gasoline                3  NA1203                   II  3.........                    150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  E             .......
          mixed with ethyl
          alcohol, with not
          more than 20
          percent alcohol.
         Gasoline............            3  UN1203                   II  3.........     B33, IB2, T4,  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  E             .......
                                                                                                  TP1
         Gasoline,             ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          casinghead, see
          Gasoline.
         Gelatine, blasting,   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Explosive,
          blasting, type A.
         Gelatine dynamites,   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Explosive,
          blasting, type A.
         Germane.............          2.3  UN2192              .......  2.3, 2.1..                 2  None..........  302........  245........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
         Glycerol-1,3-           Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          dinitrate.
         Glycerol gluconate      Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          trinitrate.
         Glycerol lactate        Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          trinitrate.
         Glycerol alpha-               6.1  UN2689                  III  6.1.......      IB3, T4, TP1  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
          monochlorohydrin.

[[Page 185]]

 
         Glyceryl trinitrate,  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Nitroglycerin,
          etc.
         Glycidaldehyde......            3  UN2622                   II  3, 6.1....      IB2, T7, TP1  150...........  202........  243........          1 L         60 L  A                  40
         Grenades, hand or            1.1D  UN0284                   II  1.1D......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
          rifle, with
          bursting charge.
         Grenades, hand or            1.2D  UN0285                   II  1.2D......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
          rifle, with
          bursting charge.
         Grenades, hand or            1.1F  UN0292                   II  1.1F......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  08            .......
          rifle, with
          bursting charge.
         Grenades, hand or            1.2F  UN0293                   II  1.2F......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  08            .......
          rifle, with
          bursting charge.
         Grenades,             ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          illuminating, see
          Ammunition,
          illuminating, etc.
         Grenades, practice,          1.4S  UN0110                   II  1.4S......                     .............  62.........  None.......        25 kg       100 kg  05            .......
          hand or rifle.
         Grenades, practice,          1.3G  UN0318                   II  1.3G......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
          hand or rifle.
         Grenades, practice,          1.2G  UN0372                   II  1.2G......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
          hand or rifle.
         Grenades practice            1.4G  UN0452                   II  1.4G......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  06            .......
          Hand or rifle.
         Grenades, smoke, see  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Ammunition, smoke,
          etc.
         Guanidine nitrate...          5.1  UN1467                  III  5.1.......      A1, IB8, IP3  152...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A                  73
         Guanyl                  Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          nitrosaminoguanylid
          ene hydrazine (dry).
         Guanyl                       1.1A  UN0113                   II  1.1A......          111, 117  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  12            .......
          nitrosaminoguanylid
          ene hydrazine,
          wetted with not
          less than 30
          percent water, by
          mass.
         Guanyl                  Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          nitrosaminoguanylte
          trazene (dry).
         Guanyl                       1.1A  UN0114                   II  1.1A......          111, 117  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  12            .......
          nitrosaminoguanylte
          trazene, wetted or
          Tetrazene, wetted
          with not less than
          30 percent water or
          mixture of alcohol
          and water, by mass.
         Gunpowder,            ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          compressed or
          Gunpowder in
          pellets, see Black
          powder (UN 0028).
         Gunpowder, granular   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          or as a meal, see
          Black powder (UN
          0027).
         Hafnium powder, dry.          4.2  UN2545                    I  4.2.......                    None..........  211........  242........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             .......
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  4.2.......    A19, A20, IB6,  None..........  212........  241........        15 kg        50 kg  D             .......
                                                                                             IP2, N34
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.2.......          IB8, IP3  None..........  213........  241........        25 kg       100 kg  D             .......

[[Page 186]]

 
         Hafnium powder,               4.1  UN1326                   II  4.1.......     A6, A19, A20,  None..........  212........  241........        15 kg        50 kg  E             .......
          wetted with not                                                               IB6, IP2, N34
          less than 25
          percent water (a
          visible excess of
          water must be
          present) (a)
          mechanically
          produced, particle
          size less than 53
          microns; (b)
          chemically
          produced, particle
          size less than 840
          microns.
         Hand signal device,   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Signal devices,
          hand.
         Hazardous             ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          substances, liquid
          or solid, n.o.s.,
          see Environmentally
          hazardous
          substances, etc.
  D G    Hazardous waste,                9  NA3082                  III  9.........      IB3, T2, TP1  155...........  203........  241........     No limit     No limit  A             .......
          liquid, n.o.s..
  D G    Hazardous waste,                9  NA3077                  III  9.........     B54, IB8, IP2  155...........  213........  240........     No limit     No limit  A             .......
          solid, n.o.s..
         Heating oil, light..            3  UN1202                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Helium, compressed..          2.2  UN1046              .......  2.2.......                    306...........  302........  302, 314...        75 kg       150 kg  A                  85
         Helium-oxygen         ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          mixture, see Rare
          gases and oxygen
          mixtures.
         Helium, refrigerated          2.2  UN1963              .......  2.2.......          T75, TP5  320...........  316........  318........        50 kg       500 kg  B             .......
          liquid (cryogenic
          liquid).
         Heptafluoropropane            2.2  UN3296              .......  2.2.......               T50  306...........  304........  314, 315...        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
          or Refrigerant gas
          R 227.
         n-Heptaldehyde......            3  UN3056                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Heptanes............            3  UN1206                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         n-Heptene...........            3  UN2278                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         Hexachloroacetone...          6.1  UN2661                  III  6.1.......      IB3, T4, TP1  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  B              12, 40
         Hexachlorobenzene...          6.1  UN2729                  III  6.1.......               IB3  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Hexachlorobutadiene.          6.1  UN2279                  III  6.1.......      IB3, T4, TP1  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Hexachlorocyclopenta          6.1  UN2646                    I  6.1.......  2, B9, B14, B32,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          diene.                                                                       B74, B77, T20,
                                                                                     TP2, TP13, TP38,
                                                                                                 TP45
         Hexachlorophene.....          6.1  UN2875                  III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A             .......
         Hexadecyltrichlorosi            8  UN1781                   II  8.........  A7, B2, B6, IB2,  None..........  202........  242........    Forbidden         30 L  C                  40
          lane.                                                                          N34, T7, TP2

[[Page 187]]

 
         Hexadienes..........            3  UN2458                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  None..........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         Hexaethyl                     2.3  UN1612              .......  2.3.......                 3  None..........  334........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          tetraphosphate and
          compressed gas
          mixtures.
         Hexaethyl                     6.1  UN1611                   II  6.1.......    IB2, IP2, IP4,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  E                  40
          tetraphosphate,                                                                         N76
          liquid.
         Hexaethyl                     6.1  UN1611                   II  6.1.......    IB8, IP2, IP4,  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  E                  40
          tetraphosphate,                                                                         N76
          solid.
         Hexafluoroacetone...          2.3  UN2420              .......  2.3, 8....        2, B9, B14  None..........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
         Hexafluoroacetone             6.1  UN2552                   II  6.1.......      IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
          hydrate.
         Hexafluoroethane,             2.2  UN2193              .......  2.2.......                    306...........  304........  314, 315...        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
          compressed or
          Refrigerant gas R
          116.
         Hexafluorophosphoric            8  UN1782                   II  8.........  A6, A7, B2, IB2,  None..........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  A             .......
          acid.                                                                          N3, N34, T8,
                                                                                            TP2, TP12
         Hexafluoropropylene           2.2  UN1858              .......  2.2.......               T50  306...........  304........  314, 315...        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
          compressed or
          Refrigerant gas R
          1216.
         Hexaldehyde.........            3  UN1207                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Hexamethylene                 6.1  UN2281                   II  6.1.......     IB2, T7, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  C              13, 40
          diisocyanate.                                                                          TP13
         Hexamethylene           Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          triperoxide diamine
          (dry).
         Hexamethylenediamine            8  UN2280                  III  8.........     IB8, IP3, T4,  154...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A                  12
          , solid.                                                                                TP1
         Hexamethylenediamine            8  UN1783                   II  8.........      IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  A             .......
          solution.
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  8.........      IB3, T4, TP1  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
         Hexamethyleneimine..            3  UN2493                   II  3, 8......      IB2, T7, TP1  None..........  202........  243........          1 L          5 L  B                  40
         Hexamethylenetetrami          4.1  UN1328                  III  4.1.......      A1, IB8, IP3  151...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          ne.
         Hexamethylol benzene    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          hexanitrate.
         Hexanes.............            3  UN1208                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  E             .......
         2,2',4,4',6,6'-         Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Hexanitro-3,3'-
          dihydroxyazobenzene
          (dry).
         Hexanitroazoxy          Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          benzene.
         N,N'-                   Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          (hexanitrodiphenyl)
          ethylene
          dinitramine (dry).
         Hexanitrodiphenyl       Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          urea.
         2,2',3',4,4',6-         Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Hexanitrodiphenylam
          ine.
         Hexanitrodiphenylami         1.1D  UN0079                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
          ne or Dipicrylamine
          or Hexyl.
         2,3',4,4',6,6'-         Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Hexanitrodiphenylet
          her.
         Hexanitroethane.....    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Hexanitrooxanilide..    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Hexanitrostilbene...         1.1D  UN0392                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
         Hexanoic acid, see    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Corrosive liquids,
          n.o.s..
         Hexanols............            3  UN2282                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         1-Hexene............            3  UN2370                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  E             .......

[[Page 188]]

 
         Hexogen and           ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          cyclotetramethylene
          tetranitramine
          mixtures, wetted or
          desensitized see
          RDX and HMX
          mixtures, wetted or
          desensitized etc.
         Hexogen and HMX       ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          mixtures, wetted or
          desensitized see
          RDX and HMX
          mixtures, wetted or
          desensitized etc.
         Hexogen and octogen   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          mixtures, wetted or
          desensitized see
          RDX and HMX
          mixtures, wetted or
          desensitized etc.
         Hexogen, see          ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Cyclotrimethylenetr
          initramine, etc.
         Hexolite, or Hexotol         1.1D  UN0118                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
          dry or wetted with
          less than 15
          percent water, by
          mass.
         Hexotonal...........         1.1D  UN0393                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
         Hexyl, see            ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Hexanitrodiphenylam
          ine.
         Hexyltrichlorosilane            8  UN1784                   II  8.........  A7, B2, B6, IB2,  None..........  202........  242........    Forbidden         30 L  C                  40
                                                                                        N34, T7, TP2,
                                                                                                 TP13
         High explosives, see  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          individual
          explosives' entries.
         HMX, see              ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Cyclotetramethylene
          te tranitramine,
          etc.
         Hydrazine, anhydrous            8  UN2029                    I  8, 3, 6.1.  A3, A6, A7, A10,  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden        2.5 L  D             21, 40,
          or Hydrazine                                                                   B7, B16, B53                                                                                    42, 100
          aqueous solutions
          with more than 64
          percent hydrazine,
          by mass.
         Hydrazine, aqueous            6.1  UN3293                  III  6.1.......      IB3, T4, TP1  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
          solution with not
          more than 37
          percent hydrazine,
          by mass.
         Hydrazine azide.....    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Hydrazine chlorate..    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......

[[Page 189]]

 
         Hydrazine dicarbonic    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          acid diazide.
         Hydrazine hydrate or            8  UN2030                   II  8, 6.1....    B16, B53, IB2,  None..........  202........  243........    Forbidden         30 L  D             40, 42,
          Hydrazine aqueous                                                             T7, TP2, TP13                                                                                         82
          solutions, with not
          less than 37
          percent but not
          more than 64
          percent hydrazine,
          by mass.
         Hydrazine               Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          perchlorate.
         Hydrazine selenate..    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Hydriodic acid,       ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          anhydrous, see
          Hydrogen iodide,
          anhydrous.
         Hydriodic acid......            8  UN1787                   II  8.........  A3, A6, B2, IB2,  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  C             .......
                                                                                         N41, T7, TP2
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  8.........      IB3, T4, TP1  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  C                   8
         Hydrobromic acid,     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          anhydrous, see
          Hydrogen bromide,
          anhydrous.
         Hydrobromic acid,               8  UN1788                   II  8.........     B2, B15, IB2,  154...........  202........  242........    Forbidden    Forbidden  C             .......
          with more than 49                                                              N41, T7, TP2
          percent hydrobromic
          acid.
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  8.........      IB3, T4, TP1  154...........  203........  241........    Forbidden    Forbidden  C                   8
         Hydrobromic acid,               8  UN1788                   II  8.........  A3, A6, B2, B15,  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  C             .......
          with not more than                                                            IB2, N41, T7,
          49 percent                                                                              TP2
          hydrobromic acid.
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  8.........      IB3, T4, TP1  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         30 L  C                   8
         Hydrocarbon gas               2.1  UN1964              .......  2.1.......                    306...........  302........  314, 315...    Forbidden       150 kg  E                  40
          mixture,
          compressed, n.o.s..
         Hydrocarbon gas               2.1  UN1965              .......  2.1.......               T50  306...........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden       150 kg  E                  40
          mixture, liquefied,
          n.o.s..
         Hydrocarbons,                   3  UN3295                    I  3.........     T11, TP1, TP8  150...........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  E             .......
          liquid, n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  3.........     IB2, T7, TP1,  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
                                                                                            TP8, TP28
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3.........      B1, IB3, T4,  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
                                                                                            TP1, TP29
         Hydrochloric acid,    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          anhydrous, see
          Hydrogen chloride,
          anhydrous.
         Hydrochloric acid...            8  UN1789                   II  8.........  A3, A6, B3, B15,  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  C             .......
                                                                                        IB2, N41, T8,
                                                                                            TP2, TP12
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  8.........     IB3, T4, TP1,  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  C                   8
                                                                                                 TP12
         Hydrocyanic acid,     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          anhydrous, see
          Hydrogen cyanide
          etc.
         Hydrocyanic acid,             6.1  UN1613                    I  6.1.......      2, B61, B65,  None..........  195........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          aqueous solutions                                                            B77, B82, T20,
          or Hydrogen                                                                       TP2, TP13
          cyanide, aqueous
          solutions with not
          more than 20
          percent hydrogen
          cyanide.

[[Page 190]]

 
    D    Hydrocyanic acid,             6.1  NA1613                   II  6.1.......    IB1, T14, TP2,  None..........  195........  243........    Forbidden          5 L  D                  40
          aqueous solutions                                                                TP13, TP27
          with less than 5
          percent hydrogen
          cyanide.
         Hydrocyanic acid,     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          liquefied, see
          Hydrogen cyanide,
          etc.
         Hydrocyanic acid        Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          (prussic),
          unstabilized.
         Hydrofluoric acid               8  UN1786                    I  8, 6.1....      A6, A7, B15,  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden        2.5 L  D                  40
          and Sulfuric acid                                                             B23, N5, N34,
          mixtures.                                                                   T10, TP2, TP12,
                                                                                                 TP13
         Hydrofluoric acid,    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          anhydrous, see
          Hydrogen fluoride,
          anhydrous.
         Hydrofluoric acid,              8  UN1790                    I  8, 6.1....  A6, A7, B4, B15,  None..........  201........  243........        0.5 L        2.5 L  D              12, 40
          with more than 60                                                             B23, N5, N34,
          percent strength.                                                           T10, TP2, TP12,
                                                                                                 TP13
         Hydrofluoric acid,              8  UN1790                   II  8, 6.1....      A6, A7, B15,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         30 L  D              12, 40
          with not more than                                                            IB2, N5, N34,
          60 percent strength.                                                          T8, TP2, TP12
         Hydrofluoroboric      ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          acid, see
          Fluoroboric acid.
         Hydrofluorosilicic    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          acid, see
          Fluorosilicic acid.
         Hydrogen and Methane          2.1  UN2034              .......  2.1.......                    306...........  302........  302, 314,      Forbidden       150 kg  E                  40
          mixtures,                                                                                                                  315.
          compressed.
         Hydrogen bromide,             2.3  UN1048              .......  2.3, 8....            3, B14  None..........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden        25 kg  D                  40
          anhydrous.
         Hydrogen chloride,            2.3  UN1050              .......  2.3, 8....                 3  None..........  304........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          anhydrous.
         Hydrogen chloride,            2.3  UN2186              .......  2.3, 8....             3, B6  None..........  None.......  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  B                  40
          refrigerated liquid.
         Hydrogen, compressed          2.1  UN1049              .......  2.1.......                    306...........  302........  302, 314...    Forbidden       150 kg  E              40, 57
         Hydrogen cyanide,             6.1  UN3294                    I  6.1, 3....  2, B9, B14, B32,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          solution in alcohol                                                          B74, T20, TP2,
          with not more than                                                         TP13, TP38, TP45
          45 percent hydrogen
          cyanide.

[[Page 191]]

 
         Hydrogen cyanide,             6.1  UN1051                    I  6.1, 3....      1, B35, B61,  None..........  195........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          stabilized with                                                               B65, B77, B82
          less than 3 percent
          water.
         Hydrogen cyanide,             6.1  UN1614                    I  6.1.......                 5  None..........  195........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  D              25, 40
          stabilized, with
          less than 3 percent
          water and absorbed
          in a porous inert
          material.
         Hydrogen fluoride,              8  UN1052                    I  8, 6.1....  3, B7, B46, B71,  None..........  163........  243........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          anhydrous.                                                                    B77, T10, TP2
         Hydrogen iodide,              2.3  UN2197              .......  2.3.......            3, B14  None..........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          anhydrous.
         Hydrogen iodide       ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          solution, see
          Hydriodic acid,
          solution.
         Hydrogen peroxide             5.1  UN3149                   II  5.1, 8....  A2, A3, A6, B53,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L          5 L  D             25, 66,
          and peroxyacetic                                                              IB2, IP5, T7,                                                                                    75, 106
          acid mixtures,                                                               TP2, TP6, TP24
          stabilized with
          acids, water and
          not more than 5
          percent
          peroxyacetic acid.
         Hydrogen peroxide,            5.1  UN2014                   II  5.1, 8....  12, A3, A6, B53,  None..........  202........  243........    Forbidden      Forbid-  D             25, 66,
          aqueous solutions                                                            B80, B81, B85,                                                                 den                75, 106
          with more than 40                                                             IB2, IP5, T7,
          percent but not                                                             TP2, TP6, TP24,
          more than 60                                                                           TP37
          percent hydrogen
          peroxide
          (stabilized as
          necessary).
         Hydrogen peroxide,            5.1  UN2014                   II  5.1, 8....  A2, A3, A6, B53,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L          5 L  D             25, 66,
          aqueous solutions                                                             IB2, IP5, T7,                                                                                    75, 106
          with not less than                                                          TP2, TP6, TP24,
          20 percent but not                                                                     TP37
          more than 40
          percent hydrogen
          peroxide
          (stabilized as
          necessary).
         Hydrogen peroxide,            5.1  UN2984                  III  5.1.......     A1, IB2, IP5,  152...........  203........  241........        2.5 L         30 L  B             25, 75,
          aqueous solutions,                                                            T4, TP1, TP6,                                                                                        106
          with not less than                                                               TP24, TP37
          8 percent but less
          than 20 percent
          hydrogen peroxide,
          (stabilized as
          necessary).
         Hydrogen percent              5.1  UN2015                    I  5.1, 8....  12, A3, A6, B53,  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden      Forbid-  D             25, 66,
          stabilized or                                                                B80, B81, B85,                                                                 den                75, 106
          Hydrogen peroxide                                                            T10, TP2, TP6,
          aqueous solutions,                                                               TP24, TP37
          stabilized with
          more than 60
          percent hydrogen
          peroxide.
         Hydrogen,                     2.1  UN1966              .......  2.1.......          T75, TP5  None..........  316........  318, 319...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          refrigerated liquid
          (cryogenic liquid).
         Hydrogen selenide,            2.3  UN2202              .......  2.3, 2.1..                 1  None..........  192........  245........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          anhydrous.
         Hydrogen sulfate,     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Sulfuric acid.
         Hydrogen sulfide....          2.3  UN1053              .......  2.3, 2.1..        2, B9, B14  None..........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
         Hydrogendifluorides,            8  UN1740                   II  8.........    IB5, IP2, IP4,  None..........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  A             25, 26,
          n.o.s. solid.                                                                       N3, N34                                                                                         40
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  8.........     IB8, IP3, N3,  154...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             25, 26,
                                                                                                  N34                                                                                         40

[[Page 192]]

 
         Hydrogendifluorides,            8  UN1740                   II  8.........      IB2, N3, N34  None..........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  A             25, 26,
          n.o.s. solutions.                                                                                                                                                                   40
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  8.........     IB3, IP3, N3,  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A             25, 26,
                                                                                                  N34                                                                                         40
         Hydroquinone........          6.1  UN2662                  III  6.1.......     IB8, IP3, T4,  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A             .......
                                                                                                  TP1
         Hydrosilicofluoric    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          acid, see
          Fluorosilicic acid.
         Hydroxyl amine          Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          iodide.
         Hydroxylamine                   8  UN2865                  III  8.........          IB8, IP3  154...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          sulfate.
         Hypochlorite                    8  UN1791                   II  8.........      A7, B2, B15,  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  B                  26
          solutions.                                                                   IB2, IP5, N34,
                                                                                        T7, TP2, TP24
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  8.........     IB3, N34, T4,  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  B                  26
                                                                                            TP2, TP24
         Hypochlorites,                5.1  UN3212                   II  5.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  152...........  212........  240........         5 kg        25 kg  D             48, 56,
          inorganic, n.o.s..                                                                                                                                                             58, 69,
                                                                                                                                                                                            106,
                                                                                                                                                                                            116,
                                                                                                                                                                                             118
         Hyponitrous acid....    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Igniter fuse, metal   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          clad, see Fuse,
          igniter, tubular,
          metal clad.
         Igniters............         1.1G  UN0121                   II  1.1G......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
         Igniters............         1.2G  UN0314                   II  1.2G......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
         Igniters............         1.3G  UN0315                   II  1.3G......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
         Igniters............         1.4G  UN0325                   II  1.4G......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  06            .......
         Igniters............         1.4S  UN0454                   II  1.4S......                    None..........  62.........  None.......        25 kg       100 kg  05            .......
         3,3'-                           8  UN2269                  III  8.........      IB3, T4, TP2  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
          Iminodipropylamine.
    G    Infectious                    6.2  UN2900              .......  6.2.......                    134...........  196........  None.......  50 mL or 50  4 L or 4 kg  B             .......
          substances,                                                                                                                                      g
          affecting animals
          only.
    G    Infectious                    6.2  UN2814              .......  6.2.......                    134...........  196........  None.......  50 mL or 50  4 L or 4 kg  B             .......
          substances,                                                                                                                                      g
          affecting humans.
         Inflammable, see      ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Flammable.
         Initiating              Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          explosives (dry).
         Inositol hexanitrate    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          (dry).
    G    Insecticide gases,            2.2  UN1968              .......  2.2.......                    306...........  304........  314, 315...        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
          n.o.s..

[[Page 193]]

 
    G    Insecticide gases,            2.1  UN3354              .......  2.1.......               T50  306...........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden       150 kg  D                  40
          flammable, n.o.s..
    G    Insecticide gases,            2.3  UN3355              .......  2.3, 2.1..                 1  None..........  192........  245........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          toxic, flammable,
          n.o.s. Inhalation
          hazard Zone A.
    G    Insecticide gases,            2.3  UN3355              .......  2.3, 2.1..        2, B9, B14  None..........  302, 305...  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          toxic, flammable,
          n.o.s. Inhalation
          hazard Zone B.
    G    Insecticide gases,            2.3  UN3355              .......  2.3, 2.1..            3, B14  None..........  302, 305...  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             .......
          toxic, flammable,
          n.o.s. Inhalation
          hazard Zone C.
    G    Insecticide gases,            2.3  UN3355              .......  2.3, 2.1..                 4  None..........  302, 305...  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             .......
          toxic, flammable,
          n.o.s. Inhalation
          hazard Zone D.
    G    Insecticide gases,            2.3  UN1967              .......  2.3.......                 3  None..........  193, 334...  245........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          toxic, n.o.s..
         Inulin trinitrate       Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          (dry).
         Iodine azide (dry)..    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Iodine monochloride.            8  UN1792                   II  8.........     B6, IB8, IP2,  None..........  212........  240........    Forbidden        50 kg  D             40, 66,
                                                                                        IP4, N41, T7,                                                                                    74, 89,
                                                                                                  TP2                                                                                         90
         Iodine pentafluoride          5.1  UN2495                    I  5.1, 6.1,                     None..........  205........  243........    Forbidden        2.5 L  D             25, 40,
                                                                          8.                                                                                                              66, 90
         2-Iodobutane........            3  UN2390                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         Iodomethylpropanes..            3  UN2391                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         Iodopropanes........            3  UN2392                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Iodoxy compounds        Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          (dry).
         Iridium                 Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          nitratopentamine
          iridium nitrate.
         Iron chloride, see    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Ferric chloride.
         Iron oxide, spent,            4.2  UN1376                  III  4.2.......     B18, IB8, IP3  None..........  213........  240........    Forbidden    Forbidden  E             .......
          or Iron sponge,
          spent obtained from
          coal gas
          purification.
         Iron penta carbonyl.          6.1  UN1994                    I  6.1, 3....   1,B9, B14, B30,  None..........  226........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
                                                                                       B72, B77, T22,
                                                                                     TP2, TP13, TP38,
                                                                                                 TP44
         Iron sesquichloride,  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Ferric chloride.
         Irritating material,  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Tear gas
          substances, etc.
         Isobutane see also            2.1  UN1969              .......  2.1.......           19, T50  306...........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden       150 kg  E                  40
          Petroleum gases,
          liquefied.
         Isobutanol or                   3  UN1212                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
          Isobutyl alcohol.
         Isobutyl acetate....            3  UN1213                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         Isobutyl acrylate,              3  UN2527                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
          stabilized.
         Isobutyl alcohol,     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Isobutanol.
         Isobutyl aldehyde,    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see
          Isobutyraldehyde.

[[Page 194]]

 
    D    Isobutyl                      6.1  NA2742                    I  6.1, 3, 8.  2, B9, B14, B32,  None..........  227........  244........          1 L         30 L  A             12, 13,
          chloroformate.                                                               B74, T20, TP4,                                                                                    22, 25,
                                                                                          TP12, TP13,                                                                                    40, 48,
                                                                                           TP38, TP45                                                                                        100
         Isobutyl formate....            3  UN2393                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         Isobutyl isobutyrate            3  UN2528                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
    +    Isobutyl isocyanate.            3  UN2486                    I  3, 6.1....  1, B9, B14, B30,  None..........  226........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
                                                                                       B72, T22, TP2,
                                                                                           TP13, TP27
         Isobutyl                        3  UN2283                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
          methacrylate,
          stabilized.
         Isobutyl propionate.            3  UN2394                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  B             .......
         Isobutylamine.......            3  UN1214                   II  3, 8......      IB2, T7, TP1  None..........  202........  243........          1 L          5 L  B                  40
         Isobutylene see also          2.1  UN1055              .......  2.1.......           19, T50  306...........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden       150 kg  E                  40
          Petroleum gases,
          liquefied.
         Isobutyraldehyde or             3  UN2045                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  E                  40
          Isobutyl aldehyde.
         Isobutyric acid.....            3  UN2529                  III  3, 8......  B1, IB3, T4, TP1  150...........  203........  242........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
         Isobutyronitrile....            3  UN2284                   II  3, 6.1....     IB2, T7, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         60 L  E                  40
                                                                                                 TP13
         Isobutyryl chloride.            3  UN2395                   II  3, 8......      IB1, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          1 L          5 L  C                  40
    G    Isocyanates,                    3  UN2478                   II  3, 6.1....   5, A3, A7, IB2,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         60 L  D                  40
          flammable, toxic,                                                           T11, TP2, TP13,
          n.o.s. or                                                                              TP27
          Isocyanate
          solutions,
          flammable, toxic,
          n.o.s. flash point
          less than 23
          degrees C.
    G    Isocyanates, toxic,           6.1  UN3080                   II  6.1, 3....    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  B             25, 40,
          flammable, n.o.s.                                                                TP13, TP27                                                                                         48
          or Isocyanate
          solutions, toxic,
          flammable, n.o.s.,
          flash point not
          less than 23
          degrees C but not
          more than 61
          degrees C and
          boiling point less
          than 300 degrees C.
    G    Isocyanates, toxic,           6.1  UN2206                   II  6.1.......    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  E             25, 40,
          n.o.s. or                                                                        TP13, TP27                                                                                         48
          Isocyanate
          solutions, toxic,
          n.o.s., flash point
          more than 61
          degrees C and
          boiling point less
          than 300 degrees C.
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......     IB3, T7, TP1,  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  E             25, 40,
                                                                                           TP13, TP28                                                                                         48

[[Page 195]]

 
         Isocyanatobenzotrifl          6.1  UN2285                   II  6.1, 3....   5, IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  D             25, 40,
          uorides.                                                                                                                                                                            48
         Isoheptenes.........            3  UN2287                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         Isohexenes..........            3  UN2288                   II  3.........     IB2, T11, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  E
         Isooctane, see        ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Octanes.
         Isooctenes..........            3  UN1216                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         Isopentane, see       ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Pentane.
         Isopentanoic acid,    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Corrosive
          liquids, n.o.s..
         Isopentenes.........            3  UN2371                    I  3.........          T11, TP2  150...........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  E             .......
         Isophorone                    6.1  UN2290                  III  6.1.......      IB3, T4, TP2  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  B                  40
          diisocyanate.
         Isophoronediamine...            8  UN2289                  III  8.........      IB3, T4, TP1  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
         Isoprene, stabilized            3  UN1218                    I  3.........          T11, TP2  150...........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  E             .......
         Isopropanol or                  3  UN1219                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
          Isopropyl alcohol.
         Isopropenyl acetate.            3  UN2403                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         Isopropenylbenzene..            3  UN2303                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Isopropyl acetate...            3  UN1220                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         Isopropyl acid                  8  UN1793                  III  8.........     IB8, IP3, T4,  154...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          phosphate.                                                                              TP1
         Isopropyl alcohol,    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Isopropanol.
         Isopropyl butyrate..            3  UN2405                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Isopropyl                       3  UN2947                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
          chloroacetate.
         Isopropyl                     6.1  UN2407                    I  6.1, 3, 8.  2, B9, B14, B32,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  B                  40
          chloroformate.                                                               B74, B77, T20,
                                                                                     TP2, TP13, TP38,
                                                                                                 TP44
         Isopropyl 2-                    3  UN2934                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
          chloropropionate.
         Isopropyl                       3  UN2406                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
          isobutyrate.
    +    Isopropyl isocyanate            3  UN2483                    I  3, 6.1....  1, B9, B14, B30,  None..........  226........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
                                                                                       B72, T22, TP2,
                                                                                     TP13, TP38, TP44
         Isopropyl mercaptan,  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Propanethiols.
         Isopropyl nitrate...            3  UN1222                   II  3.........          IB2, IP7  150...........  202........  None.......          5 L         60 L  D             .......
         Isopropyl phosphoric  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          acid, see Isopropyl
          acid phosphate.
         Isopropyl propionate            3  UN2409                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         Isopropylamine......            3  UN1221                    I  3, 8......          T11, TP2  None..........  201........  243........        0.5 L        2.5 L  E             .......
         Isopropylbenzene....            3  UN1918                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Isopropylcumyl          Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          hydroperoxide, with
          more than 72
          percent in solution.
         Isosorbide dinitrate          4.1  UN2907                   II  4.1.......          IB6, IP2  None..........  212........  None.......        15 kg        50 kg  E             .......
          mixture with not
          less than 60
          percent lactose,
          mannose, starch or
          calcium hydrogen
          phosphate.
         Isosorbide-5-                 4.1  UN3251                  III  4.1.......           66, IB8  151...........  213........  240........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  12
          mononitrate.
         Isothiocyanic acid..    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......

[[Page 196]]

 
         Jet fuel, see Fuel    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          aviation, turbine
          engine.
    D    Jet perforating              1.1D  NA0124                   II  1.1D......            55, 56  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
          guns, charged oil
          well, with
          detonator.
    D    Jet perforating              1.4D  NA0494                   II  1.4D......            55, 56  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  06            .......
          guns, charged oil
          well, with
          detonator.
         Jet perforating              1.1D  UN0124                   II  1.1D......                55  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
          guns, charged oil
          well, without
          detonator.
         Jet perforating              1.4D  UN0494                   II  1.4D......           55, 114  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden       300 kg  06            .......
          guns, charged, oil
          well, without
          detonator.
         Jet perforators, see  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Charges, shaped,
          etc.
         Jet tappers, without  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          detonator, see
          Charges, shaped,
          etc.
         Jet thrust igniters,  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          for rocket motors
          or Jato, see
          Igniters.
         Jet thrust unit       ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          (Jato), see Rocket
          motors.
         Kerosene............            3  UN1223                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP2  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
    G    Ketones, liquid,                3  UN1224                    I  3.........    T11, TP1, TP8,  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  E             .......
          n.o.s..                                                                                TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  3.........     IB2, T7, TP1,  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
                                                                                            TP8, TP28
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3.........      B1, IB3, T4,  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
                                                                                            TP1, TP29
         Krypton, compressed.          2.2  UN1056              .......  2.2.......                    306...........  302........  None.......        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
         Krypton,                      2.2  UN1970              .......  2.2.......          T75, TP5  320...........  None.......  None.......        50 kg       500 kg  B             .......
          refrigerated liquid
          (cryogenic liquid).
         Lacquer base or       ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          lacquer chips,
          nitrocellulose,
          dry, see
          Nitrocellulose,
          etc. (UN 2557).
         Lacquer base or       ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          lacquer chips,
          plastic, wet with
          alcohol or solvent,
          see Nitrocellulose
          (UN2059, UN2555,
          UN2556, UN2557) or
          Paint etc.(UN1263).
         Lead acetate........          6.1  UN1616                  III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A             .......
         Lead arsenates......          6.1  UN1617                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......

[[Page 197]]

 
         Lead arsenites......          6.1  UN1618                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Lead azide (dry)....    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Lead azide, wetted           1.1A  UN0129                   II  1.1A......          111, 117  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  12            .......
          with not less than
          20 percent water or
          mixture of alcohol
          and water, by mass.
         Lead compounds,               6.1  UN2291                  III  6.1.......     138, IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A             .......
          soluble, n.o.s..
         Lead cyanide........          6.1  UN1620                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A                  26
         Lead dioxide........          5.1  UN1872                  III  5.1.......      A1, IB8, IP3  152...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Lead dross, see Lead  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          sulfate, with more
          than 3 percent free
          acid.
         Lead nitrate........          5.1  UN1469                   II  5.1, 6.1..     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........         5 kg        25 kg  A             .......
         Lead                    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          nitroresorcinate
          (dry).
         Lead perchlorate,             5.1  UN1470                   II  5.1, 6.1..     IB6, IP2, T4,  None..........  212........  242........         5 kg        25 kg  A             56, 58,
          solid.                                                                                  TP1                                                                                        106
         Lead perchlorate,             5.1  UN1470                   II  5.1, 6.1..      IB1, T4, TP1  None..........  202........  243........          1 L          5 L  A             56, 58,
          solution.                                                                                                                                                                          106
         Lead peroxide, see    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Lead dioxide.
         Lead phosphite,               4.1  UN2989                   II  4.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  240........         5 kg        25 kg  B                  34
          dibasic.
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.1.......          IB8, IP3  151...........  213........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  B                  34
         Lead picrate (dry)..    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Lead styphnate (dry)    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Lead styphnate,              1.1A  UN0130                   II  1.1A......          111, 117  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  12            .......
          wetted or Lead
          trinitroresorcinate
          , wetted with not
          less than 20
          percent water or
          mixture of alcohol
          and water, by mass.
         Lead sulfate with               8  UN1794                   II  8.........     IB8, IP2, IP4  154...........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  A             .......
          more than 3 percent
          free acid.
         Lead                  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          trinitroresorcinate
          , see Lead
          styphnate, etc.
         Life-saving                     9  UN3072              .......  None......               143  None..........  219........  None.......     No limit     No limit  A             .......
          appliances, not
          self inflating
          containing
          dangerous goods as
          equipment.
         Life-saving                     9  UN2990              .......  None......                    None..........  219........  None.......     No limit     No limit  A             .......
          appliances, self
          inflating.
         Lighter replacement   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          cartridges
          containing
          liquefied petroleum
          gases (and similar
          devices, each not
          exceeding 65
          grams), see
          Lighters or lighter
          refills etc.
          containing
          flammable gas.
         Lighters, fuse......         1.4S  UN0131                   II  1.4S......                    None..........  62.........  None.......        25 kg       100 kg  05            .......
         Lighters or Lighter           2.1  UN1057              .......  2.1.......               N10  None..........  21, 308....  None.......         1 kg        15 kg  B                  40
          refills cigarettes,
          containing
          flammable gas.

[[Page 198]]

 
         Lime, unslaked, see   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Calcium oxide.
    G    Liquefied gas,                2.1  UN3161              .......  2.1.......               T50  306...........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden       150 kg  D                  40
          flammable, n.o.s..
    G    Liquefied gas,                2.2  UN3163              .......  2.2.......               T50  306...........  304........  314, 315...        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
          n.o.s..
    G    Liquefied gas,                2.2  UN3157              .......  2.2, 5.1..                    306...........  304........  314, 315...        75 kg       150 kg  D             .......
          oxidizing, n.o.s..
  G I    Liquefied gas,                2.3  UN3308              .......  2.3, 8....                 1  None..........  192........  245........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          toxic, corrosive,
          n.o.s. Inhalation
          Hazard Zone A.
  G I    Liquefied gas,                2.3  UN3308              .......  2.3, 8....                 2  None..........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          toxic, corrosive,
          n.o.s. Inhalation
          Hazard Zone B.
  G I    Liquefied gas,                2.3  UN3308              .......  2.3, 8....                 3  None..........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          toxic, corrosive,
          n.o.s. Inhalation
          Hazard Zone C.
  G I    Liquefied gas,                2.3  UN3308              .......  2.3, 8....                 4  None..........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          toxic, corrosive,
          n.o.s. Inhalation
          Hazard Zone D.
  G I    Liquefied gas,                2.3  UN3309              .......  2.3, 2.1,                  1  None..........  192........  245........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D              17, 40
          toxic, flammable,                                               8.
          corrosive, n.o.s.
          Inhalation Hazard
          Zone A.
  G I    Liquefied gas toxic,          2.3  UN3309              .......  2.3, 2.1,                  2  None..........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D              17, 40
          flammable,                                                      8.
          corrosive, n.o.s.
          Inhalation Hazard
          Zone B.
  G I    Liquefied gas,                2.3  UN3309              .......  2.3, 2.1,                  3  None..........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D              17, 40
          toxic, flammable,                                               8.
          corrosive, n.o.s.
          Inhalation Hazard
          Zone C.
  G I    Liquefied gas,                2.3  UN3309              .......  2.3, 2.1,                  4  None..........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D              17, 40
          toxic, flammable,                                               8.
          corrosive, n.o.s.
          Inhalation Hazard
          Zone D.
    G    Liquefied gas,                2.3  UN3160              .......  2.3, 2.1..                 1  None..........  192........  245........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          toxic, flammable,
          n.o.s. Inhalation
          Hazard Zone A.
    G    Liquefied gas,                2.3  UN3160              .......  2.3, 2.1..        2, B9, B14  None..........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          toxic, flammable,
          n.o.s. Inhalation
          Hazard Zone B.

[[Page 199]]

 
    G    Liquefied gas,                2.3  UN3160              .......  2.3, 2.1..            3, B14  None..........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          toxic, flammable,
          n.o.s. Inhalation
          Hazard Zone C.
    G    Liquefied gas,                2.3  UN3160              .......  2.3, 2.1..                 4  None..........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          toxic, flammable,
          n.o.s. Inhalation
          Hazard Zone D.
    G    Liquefied gas,                2.3  UN3162              .......  2.3.......                 1  None..........  192........  245........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          toxic, n.o.s.
          Inhalation Hazard
          Zone A.
    G    Liquefied gas,                2.3  UN3162              .......  2.3.......        2, B9, B14  None..........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          toxic, n.o.s.
          Inhalation Hazard
          Zone B.
    G    Liquefied gas,                2.3  UN3162              .......  2.3.......            3, B14  None..........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          toxic, n.o.s.
          Inhalation Hazard
          Zone C.
    G    Liquefied gas,                2.3  UN3162              .......  2.3.......                 4  None..........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          toxic, n.o.s.
          Inhalation Hazard
          Zone D.
  G I    Liquefied gas,                2.3  UN3310              .......  2.3, 5.1,                  1  None..........  192........  245........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             40, 89,
          toxic, oxidizing,                                               8.                                                                                                                  90
          corrosive, n.o.s.
          Inhalation Hazard
          Zone A.
  G I    Liquefied gas,                2.3  UN3310              .......  2.3, 2.1,                  2  None..........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             40, 89,
          toxic, oxidizing,                                               8.                                                                                                                  90
          corrosive, n.o.s.
          Inhalation Hazard
          Zone B.
  G I    Liquefied gas,                2.3  UN3310              .......  2.3, 2.1,                  3  None..........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             40, 89,
          toxic, oxidizing,                                               8.                                                                                                                  90
          corrosive, n.o.s.
          Inhalation Hazard
          Zone C.
  G I    Liquefied gas,                2.3  UN3310              .......  2.3, 2.1,                  4  None..........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             40, 89,
          toxic, oxidizing,                                               8.                                                                                                                  90
          corrosive, n.o.s.
          Inhalation Hazard
          Zone D.
    G    Liquefied gas,                2.3  UN3307              .......  2.3, 5.1..                 1  None..........  192........  245........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          toxic, oxidizing,
          n.o.s. Inhalation
          Hazard Zone A.
    G    Liquefied gas,                2.3  UN3307              .......  2.3, 5.1..                 2  None..........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          toxic, oxidizing,
          n.o.s. Inhalation
          Hazard Zone B.
    G    Liquefied gas,                2.3  UN3307              .......  2.3, 5.1..                 3  None..........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          toxic, oxidizing,
          n.o.s. Inhalation
          Hazard Zone C.
    G    Liquefied gas,                2.3  UN3307              .......  2.3, 5.1..                 4  None..........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          toxic, oxidizing,
          n.o.s. Inhalation
          Hazard Zone D.
         Liquefied gases, non-         2.2  UN1058              .......  2.2.......                    306...........  304........  None.......        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
          flammable charged
          with nitrogen,
          carbon dioxide or
          air.
         Liquefied             ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          hydrocarbon gas,
          see Hydrocarbon gas
          mixture, liquefied,
          n.o.s..
         Liquefied natural     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          gas, see Methane,
          etc. (UN 1972).
         Liquefied petroleum   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          gas see Petroleum
          gases, liquefied.
         Lithium.............          4.3  UN1415                    I  4.3.......     A7, A19, IB1,  None..........  211........  244........    Forbidden        15 kg  E             .......
                                                                                             IP1, N45

[[Page 200]]

 
         Lithium acetylide     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          ethylenediamine
          complex, see Water
          reactive solid etc.
         Lithium alkyls......          4.2  UN2445                    I  4.2, 4.3..    B11, T21, TP2,  None..........  181........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             .......
                                                                                                  TP7
         Lithium aluminum              4.3  UN1410                    I  4.3.......               A19  None..........  211........  242........    Forbidden        15 kg  E             .......
          hydride.
         Lithium aluminum              4.3  UN1411                    I  4.3, 3....  A2, A3, A11, N34  None..........  201........  244........    Forbidden          1 L  D                  40
          hydride, ethereal.
         Lithium batteries,              9  UN3091                   II  9.........                29  185(i)........  185........  None.......         5 kg         5 kg  A             .......
          contained in
          equipment.
         Lithium batteries               9  UN3091                   II  9.........                29  185...........  185........  None.......   5 kg gross  35 kg gross  A             .......
          packed with
          equipment.
         Lithium battery.....            9  UN3090                   II  9.........                29  185...........  185........  None.......   5 kg gross  35 kg gross  A             .......
         Lithium borohydride.          4.3  UN1413                    I  4.3.......          A19, N40  None..........  211........  242........    Forbidden        15 kg  E             .......
         Lithium ferrosilicon          4.3  UN2830                   II  4.3.......     A19, IB7, IP2  151...........  212........  241........        15 kg        50 kg  E             40, 85,
                                                                                                                                                                                             103
         Lithium hydride.....          4.3  UN1414                    I  4.3.......          A19, N40  None..........  211........  242........    Forbidden        15 kg  E             .......
         Lithium hydride,              4.3  UN2805                   II  4.3.......     A8, A19, A20,  151...........  212........  241........        15 kg        50 kg  E             .......
          fused solid.                                                                            IB4
         Lithium hydroxide,              8  UN2680                   II  8.........     IB8, IP2, IP4  154...........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  A             .......
          monohydrate or
          Lithium hydroxide,
          solid.
         Lithium hydroxide,              8  UN2679                   II  8.........  B2, IB2, T7, TP2  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  A             .......
          solution.
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  8.........      IB3, T4, TP2  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A                  96
         Lithium                       5.1  UN1471                   II  5.1.......     A9, IB8, IP2,  152...........  212........  240........         5 kg        25 kg  A             48, 56,
          hypochlorite, dry                                                                  IP4, N34                                                                                    58, 69,
          with more than 39%                                                                                                                                                                106,
          available chlorine                                                                                                                                                                 116
          (8.8% available
          oxygen) or Lithium
          hypochlorite
          mixtures, dry with
          more than 39%
          available chlorine
          (8.8% available
          oxygen).
         Lithium in            ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          cartridges, see
          Lithium.
         Lithium nitrate.....          5.1  UN2722                  III  5.1.......      A1, IB8, IP3  152...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Lithium nitride.....          4.3  UN2806                    I  4.3.......    A19, IB4, IP1,  None..........  211........  242........    Forbidden        15 kg  E             .......
                                                                                                  N40
         Lithium peroxide....          5.1  UN1472                   II  5.1.......     A9, IB6, IP2,  152...........  212........  None.......         5 kg        25 kg  A             13, 75,
                                                                                                  N34                                                                                        106
         Lithium silicon.....          4.3  UN1417                   II  4.3.......    A19, A20, IB7,  151...........  212........  241........        15 kg        50 kg  A             85, 103
                                                                                                  IP2

[[Page 201]]

 
         LNG, see Methane      ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          etc. (UN 1972).
         London purple.......          6.1  UN1621                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         LPG, see Petroleum    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          gases, liquefied.
         Lye, see Sodium       ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          hydroxide,
          solutions.
         Magnesium alkyls....          4.2  UN3053                    I  4.2, 4.3..    B11, T21, TP2,  None..........  181........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  18
                                                                                                  TP7
         Magnesium aluminum            4.3  UN1419                    I  4.3, 6.1..     A19, N34, N40  None..........  211........  242........    Forbidden        15 kg  E              40, 85
          phosphide.
    +    Magnesium arsenate..          6.1  UN1622                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Magnesium bisulfite   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          solution, see
          Bisulfites, aqueous
          solutions, n.o.s..
         Magnesium bromate...          5.1  UN1473                   II  5.1.......      A1, IB8, IP4  152...........  212........  242........         5 kg        25 kg  A             56, 58,
                                                                                                                                                                                             106
         Magnesium chlorate..          5.1  UN2723                   II  5.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  152...........  212........  242........         5 kg        25 kg  A             56, 58,
                                                                                                                                                                                             106
         Magnesium diamide...          4.2  UN2004                   II  4.2.......     A8, A19, A20,  None..........  212........  241........        15 kg        50 kg  C             .......
                                                                                                  IB6
         Magnesium diphenyl..          4.2  UN2005                    I  4.2.......                    None..........  187........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  C             .......
         Magnesium dross, wet    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          or hot.
         Magnesium                     6.1  UN2853                  III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A                  26
          fluorosilicate.
         Magnesium granules,           4.3  UN2950                  III  4.3.......     A1, A19, IB8,  151...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          coated, particle                                                                        IP4
          size not less than
          149 microns.
         Magnesium hydride...          4.3  UN2010                    I  4.3.......          A19, N40  None..........  211........  242........    Forbidden        15 kg  E             .......
         Magnesium or                  4.1  UN1869                  III  4.1.......      A1, IB8, IP3  151...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A                  39
          Magnesium alloys
          with more than 50
          percent magnesium
          in pellets,
          turnings or ribbons.
         Magnesium nitrate...          5.1  UN1474                  III  5.1.......      A1, IB8, IP3  152...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Magnesium                     5.1  UN1475                   II  5.1.......          IB6, IP2  152...........  212........  242........         5 kg        25 kg  A             56, 58,
          perchlorate.                                                                                                                                                                       106
         Magnesium peroxide..          5.1  UN1476                   II  5.1.......          IB6, IP2  152...........  212........  242........         5 kg        25 kg  A             13, 75,
                                                                                                                                                                                             106
         Magnesium phosphide.          4.3  UN2011                    I  4.3, 6.1..          A19, N40  None..........  211........  None.......    Forbidden        15 kg  E              40, 85
         Magnesium, powder or          4.3  UN1418                    I  4.3, 4.2..          A19, B56  None..........  211........  244........    Forbidden        15 kg  A                  39
          Magnesium alloys,
          powder.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  4.3, 4.2..    A19, B56, IB5,  None..........  212........  241........        15 kg        50 kg  A                  39
                                                                                                  IP2
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.3, 4.2..    A19, B56, IB8,  None..........  213........  241........        25 kg       100 kg  A                  39
                                                                                                  IP4
         Magnesium scrap, see  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Magnesium, etc. (UN
          1869).
         Magnesium silicide..          4.3  UN2624                   II  4.3.......    A19, A20, IB7,  151...........  212........  241........        15 kg        50 kg  B             85, 103
                                                                                                  IP2

[[Page 202]]

 
         Magnetized material,  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Sec.  173.21.
         Maleic anhydride....            8  UN2215                  III  8.........     IB8, IP3, T4,  154...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
                                                                                                  TP1
         Malononitrile.......          6.1  UN2647                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A                  12
         Mancozeb (manganese   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          ethylenebisdithioca
          rbamate complex
          with zinc) see
          Maneb.
         Maneb or Maneb                4.2  UN2210                  III  4.2, 4.3..  57, A1, A19, IB6  None..........  213........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A                  34
          preparations with
          not less than 60
          percent maneb.
         Maneb stabilized or           4.3  UN2968                  III  4.3.......      54, A1, A19,  151...........  213........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  B                  34
          Maneb preparations,                                                                IB8, IP4
          stabilized against
          self-heating.
         Manganese nitrate...          5.1  UN2724                  III  5.1.......      A1, IB8, IP3  152...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Manganese resinate..          4.1  UN1330                  III  4.1.......           A1, IB6  151...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Mannitan                Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          tetranitrate.
         Mannitol hexanitrate    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          (dry).
         Mannitol                     1.1D  UN0133                   II  1.1D......               121  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
          hexanitrate, wetted
          or Nitromannite,
          wetted with not
          less than 40
          percent water, or
          mixture of alcohol
          and water, by mass.
         Marine pollutants,    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          liquid or solid,
          n.o.s., see
          Environmentally
          hazardous
          substances, liquid
          or solid, n.o.s..
         Matches, block, see   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Matches, 'strike
          anywhere'.
         Matches, fusee......          4.1  UN2254                  III  4.1.......                    186...........  186........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  A             .......
         Matches, safety               4.1  UN1944                  III  4.1.......                    186...........  186........  None.......        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          (book, card or
          strike on box).
         Matches, strike               4.1  UN1331                  III  4.1.......                    186...........  186........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  B             .......
          anywhere.
         Matches, wax, Vesta.          4.1  UN1945                  III  4.1.......                    186...........  186........  None.......        25 kg       100 kg  B             .......
         Matting acid, see     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Sulfuric acid.
         Medicine, liquid,               3  UN3248                   II  3, 6.1....           36, IB2  None..........  202........  None.......          1 L          5 L  B                  40
          flammable, toxic,
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3, 6.1....           36, IB3  150...........  203........  None.......          5 L          5 L  A             .......
         Medicine, liquid,             6.1  UN1851                   II  6.1.......                    153...........  202........  243........          5 L          5 L  C                  40
          toxic, n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......                    153...........  203........  241........          5 L          5 L  C                  40

[[Page 203]]

 
         Medicine, solid,              6.1  UN3249                   II  6.1.......                36  153...........  212........  None.......         5 kg         5 kg  C                  40
          toxic, n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......                36  153...........  213........  None.......         5 kg         5 kg  C                  40
         Memtetrahydrophthali  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          c anhydride, see
          Corrosive liquids,
          n.o.s..
         Mercaptans, liquid,             3  UN3336                    I  3.........          T11, TP2  150...........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  E                  95
          flammable, n.o.s.
          or Mercaptan
          mixture, liquid,
          flammable, n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  3.........     IB2, T7, TP1,  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B                  95
                                                                                            TP8, TP28
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3.........     B1, B52, IB3,  150...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  B                  95
                                                                                        T4, TP1, TP29
         Mercaptans, liquid,             3  UN1228                   II  3, 6.1....    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........    Forbidden         60 L  B              40, 95
          flammable, toxic,                                                                      TP27
          n.o.s. or Mercaptan
          mixtures, liquid,
          flammable, toxic,
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3, 6.1....      B1, IB3, T7,  150...........  203........  242........          5 L        220 L  A              40, 95
                                                                                            TP1, TP28
         Mercaptans, liquid,           6.1  UN3071                   II  6.1, 3....    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  C             40, 121
          toxic, flammable,                                                                TP13, TP27
          n.o.s. or Mercaptan
          mixtures, liquid,
          toxic, flammable,
          n.o.s., flash point
          not less than 23
          degrees C.
         5-Mercaptotetrazol-1-        1.4C  UN0448                   II  1.4C......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  09            .......
          acetic acid.
         Mercuric arsenate...          6.1  UN1623                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Mercuric chloride...          6.1  UN1624                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Mercuric compounds,   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Mercury
          compounds, etc.
         Mercuric nitrate....          6.1  UN1625                   II  6.1.......    IB8, IP2, IP4,  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
                                                                                                  N73
    +    Mercuric potassium            6.1  UN1626                    I  6.1.......    IB7, IP1, N74,  None..........  211........  242........         5 kg        50 kg  A                  26
          cyanide.                                                                                N75
         Mercuric              ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          sulfocyanate, see
          Mercury thiocyanate.
         Mercurol, see         ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Mercury nucleate.
         Mercurous azide.....    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Mercurous compounds,  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Mercury
          compounds, etc.
         Mercurous nitrate...          6.1  UN1627                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
  A W    Mercury.............            8  UN2809                  III  8.........                    164...........  164........  240........        35 kg        35 kg  B              40, 97
         Mercury acetate.....          6.1  UN1629                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Mercury acetylide...    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Mercury ammonium              6.1  UN1630                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          chloride.
         Mercury based                   3  UN2778                    I  3, 6.1....   T14, TP2, TP13,  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden         30 L  B                  40
          pesticides, liquid,                                                                    TP27
          flammable, toxic,
          flash point less
          than 23 degrees C.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  3, 6.1....    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                           TP13, TP27
         Mercury based                 6.1  UN3012                    I  6.1.......   T14, TP2, TP13,  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
          pesticides, liquid,                                                                    TP27
          toxic.

[[Page 204]]

 
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                           TP13, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......     IB3, T7, TP2,  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A                  40
                                                                                                 TP28
         Mercury based                 6.1  UN3011                    I  6.1, 3....   T14, TP2, TP13,  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
          pesticides, liquid,                                                                    TP27
          toxic, flammable,
          flash point not
          less than 23
          degrees C.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1, 3....    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                           TP13, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1, 3....     IB3, T7, TP2,  153...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A                  40
                                                                                                 TP28
         Mercury based                 6.1  UN2777                    I  6.1.......          IB7, IP1  None..........  211........  242........         5 kg        50 kg  A                  40
          pesticides, solid,
          toxic.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A                  40
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A                  40
         Mercury benzoate....          6.1  UN1631                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Mercury bromides....          6.1  UN1634                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Mercury compounds,            6.1  UN2024                    I  6.1.......                    None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
          liquid, n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......               IB2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......               IB3  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  B                  40
         Mercury compounds,            6.1  UN2025                    I  6.1.......          IB7, IP1  None..........  211........  242........         5 kg        50 kg  A             .......
          solid, n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A             .......
    A    Mercury contained in            8  UN2809                  III  8.........                    None..........  164........  None.......     No limit     No limit  B              40, 97
          manufactured
          articles.
         Mercury cyanide.....          6.1  UN1636                   II  6.1.......    IB8, IP2, IP4,  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A                  26
                                                                                             N74, N75
         Mercury fulminate,           1.1A  UN0135                   II  1.1A......          111, 117  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  12            .......
          wetted with not
          less than 20
          percent water, or
          mixture of alcohol
          and water, by mass.
         Mercury gluconate...          6.1  UN1637                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Mercury iodide,               6.1  UN1638                   II  6.1.......     IB2, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          solid.
         Mercury iodide          Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          aquabasic
          ammonobasic (Iodide
          of Millon's base).
         Mercury iodide,               6.1  UN1638                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
          solution.

[[Page 205]]

 
         Mercury nitride.....    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Mercury nucleate....          6.1  UN1639                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Mercury oleate......          6.1  UN1640                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Mercury oxide.......          6.1  UN1641                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Mercury oxycyanide..    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Mercury oxycyanide,           6.1  UN1642                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A              26, 91
          desensitized.
         Mercury potassium             6.1  UN1643                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          iodide.
         Mercury salicylate..          6.1  UN1644                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
    +    Mercury sulfates....          6.1  UN1645                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Mercury thiocyanate.          6.1  UN1646                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Mesityl oxide.......            3  UN1229                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  None..........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Metal alkyl halides,          4.2  UN3049                    I  4.2, 4.3..     B9, B11, T21,  None..........  181........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             .......
          water-reactive                                                                     TP2, TP7
          n.o.s. or Metal
          aryl halides, water-
          reactive, n.o.s..
         Metal alkyl                   4.2  UN3050                    I  4.2, 4.3..     B9, B11, T21,  None..........  181........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             .......
          hydrides, water-                                                                   TP2, TP7
          reactive, n.o.s. or
          Metal aryl
          hydrides, water-
          reactive, n.o.s..
         Metal alkyls, water-          4.2  UN2003                    I  4.2, 4.3..    B11, T21, TP2,  None..........  181........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             .......
          reactive, n.o.s. or                                                                     TP7
          Metal aryls, water-
          reactive n.o.s..
         Metal carbonyls,              6.1  UN3281                    I  6.1.......      5, T14, TP2,  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
          n.o.s..                                                                          TP13, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                                 TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......     IB3, T7, TP1,  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A                  40
                                                                                                 TP28
         Metal catalyst, dry.          4.2  UN2881                    I  4.2.......               N34  None..........  187........  None.......    Forbidden      Forbid-  C
                                                                                                                                                                      den
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  4.2.......     IB6, IP2, N34  None..........  187........  242........    Forbidden        50 kg  C             .......
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.2.......     IB8, IP3, N34  None..........  187........  241........        25 kg       100 kg  C             .......
         Metal catalyst,               4.2  UN1378                   II  4.2.......  A2, A8, IB1, N34  None..........  212........  None.......    Forbidden        50 kg  C             .......
          wetted with a
          visible excess of
          liquid.
         Metal hydrides,               4.1  UN3182                   II  4.1.......           A1, IB4  151...........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  E             .......
          flammable, n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.1.......           A1, IB4  151...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  E             .......
         Metal hydrides,               4.3  UN1409                    I  4.3.......     A19, N34, N40  None..........  211........  242........    Forbidden        15 kg  D             .......
          water reactive,
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  4.3.......    A19, IB4, N34,  151...........  212........  242........        15 kg        50 kg  D             .......
                                                                                                  N40
         Metal powder, self-           4.2  UN3189                   II  4.2.......          IB6, IP2  None..........  212........  241........        15 kg        50 kg  C             .......
          heating, n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.2.......          IB8, IP3  None..........  213........  241........        25 kg       100 kg  C             .......
         Metal powders,                4.1  UN3089                   II  4.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  151...........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  B             .......
          flammable, n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.1.......               IB6  151...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  B             .......
         Metal salts of          Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          methyl nitramine
          (dry).
    G    Metal salts of                4.1  UN3181                   II  4.1.......     A1, IB8, IP2,  151...........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  B                  40
          organic compounds,                                                                      IP4
          flammable, n.o.s..

[[Page 206]]

 
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.1.......      A1, IB8, IP3  151...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  B                  40
         Metaldehyde.........          4.1  UN1332                  III  4.1.......      A1, IB8, IP3  151...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
    G    Metallic substance,           4.3  UN3208                    I  4.3.......               IB4  None..........  211........  242........    Forbidden        15 kg  E                  40
          water-reactive,
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  4.3.......          IB7, IP2  151...........  212........  242........        15 kg        50 kg  E                  40
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.3.......          IB8, IP4  151...........  213........  241........        25 kg       100 kg  E                  40
    G    Metallic substance,           4.3  UN3209                    I  4.3, 4.2..                    None..........  211........  242........    Forbidden        15 kg  E                  40
          water-reactive,
          self-heating,
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  4.3, 4.2..          IB5, IP2  None..........  212........  242........        15 kg        50 kg  E                  40
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.3, 4.2..          IB8, IP4  None..........  213........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  E                  40
         Methacrylaldehyde,              3  UN2396                   II  3, 6.1....      45, IB2, T7,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         60 L  E                  40
          stabilized.                                                                       TP1, TP13
         Methacrylic acid,               8  UN2531                   II  8.........     IB3, T4, TP1,  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  A             .......
          stabilized.                                                                            TP18
    +    Methacrylonitrile,              3  UN3079                    I  3, 6.1....  2, B9, B14, B32,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             12, 40,
          stabilized.                                                                  B74, T20, TP2,                                                                                         48
                                                                                     TP13, TP38, TP45
         Methallyl alcohol...            3  UN2614                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Methane and           ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          hydrogen, mixtures,
          see Hydrogen and
          methane, mixtures,
          etc.
         Methane, compressed           2.1  UN1971              .......  2.1.......                    306...........  302........  302........    Forbidden       150 kg  E                  40
          or Natural gas,
          compressed (with
          high methane
          content).
         Methane,                      2.1  UN1972              .......  2.1.......          T75, TP5  None..........  None.......  318........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          refrigerated liquid
          (cryogenic liquid)
          or Natural gas,
          refrigerated liquid
          (cryogenic liquid),
          with high methane
          content).
         Methanesulfonyl               6.1  UN3246                    I  6.1, 8....  2, B9, B14, B32,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          chloride.                                                                    B74, T20, TP2,
                                                                                          TP12, TP13,
                                                                                           TP38, TP45
  + I    Methanol............            3  UN1230                   II  3, 6.1....      IB2, T7, TP2  150...........  202........  242........          1 L         60 L  B                  40
    D    Methanol............            3  UN1230                   II  3.........      IB2, T7, TP2  150...........  202........  242........          1 L         60 L  B                  40
         Methazoic acid......    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......

[[Page 207]]

 
         4-Methoxy-4-                    3  UN2293                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
          methylpentan-2-one.
         1-Methoxy-2-propanol            3  UN3092                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
    +    Methoxymethyl                   3  UN2605                    I  3, 6.1....  1, B9, B14, B30,  None..........  226........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          isocyanate.                                                                  B72, T22, TP2,
                                                                                     TP13, TP38, TP44
         Methyl acetate......            3  UN1231                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         Methyl acetylene and          2.1  UN1060              .......  2.1.......               T50  306...........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden       150 kg  B                  40
          propadiene
          mixtures,
          stabilized.
         Methyl acrylate,                3  UN1919                   II  3.........     IB2, T4, TP1,  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
          stabilized.                                                                            TP13
         Methyl alcohol, see   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Methanol.
         Methyl allyl                    3  UN2554                   II  3.........     IB2, T4, TP1,  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  E             .......
          chloride.                                                                              TP13
         Methyl amyl ketone,   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Amyl methyl
          ketone.
         Methyl bromide......          2.3  UN1062              .......  2.3.......       3, B14, T50  None..........  193........  314, 315...    Forbidden        25 kg  D                  40
         Methyl bromide and    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          chloropicrin
          mixtures with more
          than 2 percent
          chloropicrin, see
          Chloropicrin and
          methyl bromide
          mixtures.
         Methyl bromide and    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          chloropicrin
          mixtures with not
          more than 2 percent
          chloropicrin, see
          Methyl bromide.
         Methyl bromide and            6.1  UN1647                    I  6.1.......  2, B9, B14, B32,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  C                  40
          ethylene dibromide                                                           B74, N65, T20,
          mixtures, liquid.                                                          TP2, TP13, TP38,
                                                                                                 TP44
         Methyl bromoacetate.          6.1  UN2643                   II  6.1.......      IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  D                  40
         2-Methyl-1-butene...            3  UN2459                    I  3.........          T11, TP2  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  E             .......
         2-Methyl-2-butene...            3  UN2460                   II  3.........      IB2, T7, TP1  None..........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  E
         3-Methyl-1-butene...            3  UN2561                    I  3.........          T11, TP2  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  E             .......
         Methyl tert-butyl               3  UN2398                   II  3.........      IB2, T7, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  E             .......
          ether.
         Methyl butyrate.....            3  UN1237                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         Methyl chloride, or           2.1  UN1063              .......  2.1.......               T50  306...........  304........  314, 315...         5 kg       100 kg  D                  40
          Refrigerant gas R
          40.
         Methyl chloride and   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          chloropicrin
          mixtures, see
          Chloropicrin and
          methyl chloride
          mixtures.
         Methyl chloride and           2.1  UN1912              .......  2.1.......               T50  306...........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden       150 kg  D                  40
          methylene chloride
          mixtures.
         Methyl chloroacetate          6.1  UN2295                    I  6.1, 3....    T14, TP2, TP13  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  D             .......
         Methyl                ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          chlorocarbonate,
          see Methyl
          chloroformate.
         Methyl chloroform,    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see 1,1,1-
          Trichloroethane.

[[Page 208]]

 
         Methyl chloroformate          6.1  UN1238                    I  6.1, 3, 8.  1, B9, B14, B30,  None..........  226........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             21, 40,
                                                                                       B72, N34, T22,                                                                                        100
                                                                                     TP2, TP13, TP38,
                                                                                                 TP44
         Methyl chloromethyl           6.1  UN1239                    I  6.1, 3....  1, B9, B14, B30,  None..........  226........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          ether.                                                                       B72, T22, TP2,
                                                                                           TP38, TP44
         Methyl 2-                       3  UN2933                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
          chloropropionate.
         Methyl                        6.1  UN2299                  III  6.1.......      IB3, T4, TP1  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
          dichloroacetate.
         Methyl ethyl ether,   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Ethyl methyl
          ether.
         Methyl ethyl ketone,  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Ethyl methyl
          ketone.
         Methyl ethyl ketone     Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          peroxide, in
          solution with more
          than 9 percent by
          mass active oxygen.
         2-Methyl-5-                   6.1  UN2300                  III  6.1.......      IB3, T4, TP1  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
          ethylpyridine.
         Methyl fluoride, or           2.1  UN2454              .......  2.1.......                    306...........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden       150 kg  E                  40
          Refrigerant gas R
          41.
         Methyl formate......            3  UN1243                    I  3.........          T11, TP2  150...........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  E             .......
         2-Methyl-2-                   6.1  UN3023                    I  6.1, 3....  2, B9, B14, B32,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             40, 102
          heptanethiol.                                                                B74, T20, TP2,
                                                                                     TP13, TP38, TP45
         Methyl iodide.......          6.1  UN2644                    I  6.1.......  2, B9, B14, B32,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  A              12, 40
                                                                                       B74, T20, TP2,
                                                                                     TP13, TP38, TP45
         Methyl isobutyl                 3  UN2053                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
          carbinol.
         Methyl isobutyl                 3  UN1245                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
          ketone.
         Methyl isobutyl         Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          ketone peroxide, in
          solution with more
          than 9 percent by
          mass active oxygen.
         Methyl isocyanate...          6.1  UN2480                    I  6.1, 3....  1, B9, B14, B30,  None..........  226........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D              26, 40
                                                                                       B72, T22, TP2,
                                                                                     TP13, TP38, TP44

[[Page 209]]

 
         Methyl isopropenyl              3  UN1246                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
          ketone, stabilized.
         Methyl                        6.1  UN2477                    I  6.1, 3....  2, B9, B14, B32,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  A             .......
          isothiocyanate.                                                              B74, T20, TP2,
                                                                                     TP13, TP38, TP45
         Methyl isovalerate..            3  UN2400                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         Methyl magnesium              4.3  UN1928                    I  4.3, 3....                    None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden          1 L  D             .......
          bromide, in ethyl
          ether.
         Methyl mercaptan....          2.3  UN1064              .......  2.3, 2.1..   3, B7, B9, B14,  None..........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden        25 kg  D                  40
                                                                                                  T50
         Methyl                ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          mercaptopropionalde
          hyde, see Thia-4-
          pentanal.
         Methyl methacrylate             3  UN1247                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
          monomer, stabilized.
         Methyl nitramine        Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          (dry).
         Methyl nitrate......    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Methyl nitrite......    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Methyl norbornene     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          dicarboxylic
          anhydride, see
          Corrosive liquids,
          n.o.s..
         Methyl orthosilicate          6.1  UN2606                    I  6.1, 3....  2, B9, B14, B32,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  E                  40
                                                                                       B74, T20, TP2,
                                                                                     TP13, TP38, TP45
    D    Methyl phosphonic             6.1  NA9206                    I  6.1, 8....   2, A3, B9, B14,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  C             .......
          dichloride.                                                                  B32, B74, N34,
                                                                                       N43, T20, TP4,
                                                                                          TP12, TP13,
                                                                                           TP38, TP45
         Methyl                ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          phosphonothioic
          dichloride,
          anhydrous, see
          Corrosive liquid,
          n.o.s..
    D    Methyl phosphonous            6.1  NA2845                    I  6.1, 4.2..  2, B9, B14, B16,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  18
          dichloride,                                                                  B32, B74, T20,
          pyrophoric liquid.                                                         TP4, TP12, TP13,
                                                                                           TP38, TP45
         Methyl picric acid      Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          (heavy metal salts
          of).
         Methyl propionate...            3  UN1248                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         Methyl propyl ether.            3  UN2612                   II  3.........      IB2, T7, TP2  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  E                  40
         Methyl propyl ketone            3  UN1249                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         Methyl sulfate, see   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Dimethyl sulfate.
         Methyl sulfide, see   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Dimethyl sulfide.
         Methyl                        6.1  UN2533                  III  6.1.......      IB3, T4, TP1  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
          trichloroacetate.

[[Page 210]]

 
         Methyl trimethylol      Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          methane trinitrate.
         Methyl vinyl ketone,          6.1  UN1251                    I  6.1, 3, 8.  1, B9, B14, B30,  None..........  226........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  B                  40
          stabilized.                                                                  B72, T22, TP2,
                                                                                     TP13, TP38, TP44
         Methylal............            3  UN1234                   II  3.........      IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  E
         Methylamine,                  2.1  UN1061              .......  2.1.......               T50  306...........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden       150 kg  B                  40
          anhydrous.
         Methylamine, aqueous            3  UN1235                   II  3, 8......  B1, IB2, T7, TP1  150...........  202........  243........          1 L          5 L  E                  41
          solution.
         Methylamine             Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          dinitramine and dry
          salts thereof.
         Methylamine             Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          nitroform.
         Methylamine             Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          perchlorate (dry).
         Methylamyl acetate..            3  UN1233                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         N-Methylaniline.....          6.1  UN2294                  III  6.1.......      IB3, T4, TP1  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         alpha-Methylbenzyl            6.1  UN2937                  III  6.1.......      IB3, T4, TP1  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
          alcohol.
         3-Methylbutan-2-one.            3  UN2397                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         N-Methylbutylamine..            3  UN2945                   II  3, 8......      IB2, T7, TP1  None..........  202........  243........          1 L          5 L  B                  40
         Methylchlorosilane..          2.3  UN2534              .......  2.3, 2.1,     2, A2, A3, A7,  None..........  226........  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D              17, 40
                                                                          8.             B9, B14, N34
         Methylcyclohexane...            3  UN2296                   II  3.........  B1, IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         Methylcyclohexanols,            3  UN2617                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
          flammable.
         Methylcyclohexanone.            3  UN2297                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Methylcyclopentane..            3  UN2298                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
    D    Methyldichloroarsine          6.1  NA1556                    I  6.1.......      2, T20, TP4,  None..........  192........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
                                                                                          TP12, TP13,
                                                                                           TP38, TP45
         Methyldichlorosilane          4.3  UN1242                    I  4.3, 8, 3.   A2, A3, A7, B6,  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden          1 L  D             21, 28,
                                                                                       B77, N34, T10,                                                                                    40, 49,
                                                                                       TP2, TP7, TP13                                                                                        100
         Methylene chloride,   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Dichloromethane.
         Methylene glycol        Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          dinitrate.
         2-Methylfuran.......            3  UN2301                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  E             .......
         a-Methylglucoside       Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          tetranitrate.
         a-Methylglycerol        Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          trinitrate.
         5-Methylhexan-2-one.            3  UN2302                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......

[[Page 211]]

 
         Methylhydrazine.....          6.1  UN1244                    I  6.1, 3, 8.   1, B7, B9, B14,  None..........  226........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             21, 40,
                                                                                       B30, B72, B77,                                                                                    49, 100
                                                                                       N34, T22, TP2,
                                                                                     TP13, TP38, TP44
         4-Methylmorpholine              3  UN2535                   II  3, 8......  B6, IB2, T7, TP1  None..........  202........  243........          1 L          5 L  B                  40
          or n-
          methylmorpholine.
         Methylpentadienes...            3  UN2461                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  E             .......
         2-Methylpentan-2-ol.            3  UN2560                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Methylpentanes, see   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Hexanes.
         Methylphenyldichloro            8  UN2437                   II  8.........     IB2, T7, TP2,  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  C                  40
          silane.                                                                                TP13
         1-Methylpiperidine..            3  UN2399                   II  3, 8......      IB2, T7, TP1  None..........  202........  243........          1 L          5 L  B             .......
         Methyltetrahydrofura            3  UN2536                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
          n.
         Methyltrichlorosilan            3  UN1250                    I  3, 8......      A7, B6, B77,  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden        2.5 L  B                  40
          e.                                                                           N34, T11, TP2,
                                                                                                 TP13
         alpha-                          3  UN2367                   II  3.........  B1, IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
          Methylvaleraldehyde.
         Mine rescue           ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          equipment
          containing carbon
          dioxide, see Carbon
          dioxide.
         Mines with bursting          1.1F  UN0136                   II  1.1F......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  08            .......
          charge.
         Mines with bursting          1.1D  UN0137                   II  1.1D......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  03            .......
          charge.
         Mines with bursting          1.2D  UN0138                   II  1.2D......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  03            .......
          charge.
         Mines with bursting          1.2F  UN0294                   II  1.2F......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  08            .......
          charge.
         Mixed acid, see       ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Nitrating acid,
          mixtures etc.
         Mobility aids, see    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Battery powered
          equipment or
          Battery powered
          vehicle'.
    D    Model rocket motor..         1.4C  NA0276                   II  1.4C......                51  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  06            .......
    D    Model rocket motor..         1.4S  NA0323                   II  1.4S......                51  None..........  62.........  None.......        25 kg       100 kg  05            .......
         Molybdenum                      8  UN2508                  III  8.........     IB8, IP3, T4,  154...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  C                  40
          pentachloride.                                                                          TP1
         Monochloroacetone       Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          (unstabilized).
         Monochloroethylene,   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Vinyl chloride,
          stabilized.
         Monoethanolamine,     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Ethanolamine,
          solutions.
         Monoethylamine, see   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Ethylamine.
         Morpholine..........            8  UN2054                    I  8, 3......          T10, TP2  None..........  201........  243........         .5 L        2.5 L  C               25,40
         Morpholine, aqueous,  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          mixture, see
          Corrosive liquids,
          n.o.s..
         Motor fuel anti-      ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          knock compounds see
          Motor fuel anti-
          knock mixtures.
    +    Motor fuel anti-              6.1  UN1649                    I  6.1, 3....      14, B9, B90,  None..........  201........  244........    Forbidden         30 L  D              25, 40
          knock mixtures.                                                              T14, TP2, TP13
         Motor spirit, see     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Gasoline.

[[Page 212]]

 
         Muriatic acid, see    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Hydrochloric acid.
         Musk xylene, see 5-   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          tert-Butyl-2,4,6-
          trinitro-m-xylene.
         Naphtha see           ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Petroleum
          distillates n.o.s..
         Naphthalene, crude            4.1  UN1334                  III  4.1.......      A1, IB8, IP3  151...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          or Naphthalene,
          refined.
         Naphthalene             Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          diozonide.
         beta-Naphthylamine..          6.1  UN1650                   II  6.1.......    IB8, IP2, IP4,  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
                                                                                              T7, TP2
         alpha-Naphthylamine.          6.1  UN2077                  III  6.1.......     IB8, IP3, T3,  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A             .......
                                                                                                  TP1
         Naphthalene, molten.          4.1  UN2304                  III  4.1.......  A1, IB1, T1, TP3  151...........  213........  241........    Forbidden    Forbidden  C             .......
         Naphthylamineperchlo    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          rate.
         Naphthylthiourea....          6.1  UN1651                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Naphthylurea........          6.1  UN1652                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Natural gases (with   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          high methane
          content), see
          Methane, etc. (UN
          1971, UN 1972).
         Neohexane, see        ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Hexanes.
         Neon, compressed....          2.2  UN1065              .......  2.2.......                    306...........  302........  302........        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
         Neon, refrigerated            2.2  UN1913              .......  2.2.......          T75, TP5  320...........  316........  None.......        50 kg       500 kg  B             .......
          liquid (cryogenic
          liquid).
         New explosive or      ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          explosive device,
          see Secs.  173.51
          and 173.56.
         Nickel carbonyl.....          6.1  UN1259                    I  6.1, 3....                 1  None..........  198........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  D              18, 40
         Nickel cyanide......          6.1  UN1653                   II  6.1.......    IB8, IP2, IP4,  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A                  26
                                                                                             N74, N75
         Nickel nitrate......          5.1  UN2725                  III  5.1.......      A1, IB8, IP3  152...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Nickel nitrite......          5.1  UN2726                  III  5.1.......      A1, IB8, IP3  152...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A              56, 58
         Nickel picrate......    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Nicotine............          6.1  UN1654                   II  6.1.......               IB2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
         Nicotine compounds,           6.1  UN3144                    I  6.1.......                A4  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
          liquid, n.o.s. or
          Nicotine
          preparations,
          liquid, n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                                 TP27

[[Page 213]]

 
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......     IB3, T7, TP1,  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  B                  40
                                                                                                 TP28
         Nicotine compounds,           6.1  UN1655                    I  6.1.......          IB7, IP1  None..........  211........  242........         5 kg        50 kg  B             .......
          solid, n.o.s. or
          Nicotine
          preparations,
          solid, n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A             .......
         Nicotine                      6.1  UN1656                   II  6.1.......     IB2, IP2, IP4  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
          hydrochloride or
          Nicotine
          hydrochloride
          solution.
         Nicotine salicylate.          6.1  UN1657                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Nicotine sulfate,             6.1  UN1658                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          solid.
         Nicotine sulfate,             6.1  UN1658                   II  6.1.......      IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
          solution.
         Nicotine tartrate...          6.1  UN1659                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Nitrated paper          Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          (unstable).
         Nitrates, inorganic,          5.1  UN3218                   II  5.1.......  58, IB2, T4, TP1  152...........  202........  242........          1 L          5 L  B                  46
          aqueous solution,
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  5.1.......  58, IB2, T4, TP1  152...........  203........  241........        2.5 L         30 L  B                  46
         Nitrates, inorganic,          5.1  UN1477                   II  5.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  152...........  212........  240........         5 kg        25 kg  A                  46
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  5.1.......          IB8, IP3  152...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A                  46
         Nitrates of             Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          diazonium compounds.
         Nitrating acid                  8  UN1826                    I  8, 5.1....   T10, TP2, TP12,  None..........  158........  243........    Forbidden        2.5 L  D              40, 66
          mixtures, spent                                                                        TP13
          with more than 50
          percent nitric acid.
         Nitrating acid                  8  UN1826                   II  8.........      B2, IB2, T8,  None..........  158........  242........    Forbidden         30 L  D                  40
          mixtures spent with                                                               TP2, TP12
          not more than 50
          percent nitric acid.
         Nitrating acid                  8  UN1796                    I  8, 5.1....   T10, TP2, TP12,  None..........  158........  243........    Forbidden        2.5 L  D              40, 66
          mixtures with more                                                                     TP13
          than 50 percent
          nitric acid.
         Nitrating acid                  8  UN1796                   II  8.........      B2, IB2, T8,  None..........  158........  242........    Forbidden         30 L  D                  40
          mixtures with not                                                           TP2, TP12, TP13
          more than 50
          percent nitric acid.
         Nitric acid other               8  UN2031                    I  8, 5.1....    B47, B53, T10,  None..........  158........  243........    Forbidden        2.5 L  D             44, 66,
          than red fuming,                                                            TP2, TP12, TP13                                                                                    89, 90,
          with more than 70                                                                                                                                                                 110,
          percent nitric acid.                                                                                                                                                               111
         Nitric acid other               8  UN2031                   II  8.........     B2, B47, B53,  None..........  158........  242........    Forbidden         30 L  D             44, 66,
          than red fuming,                                                              IB2, T8, TP2,                                                                                    89, 90,
          with not more than                                                                     TP12                                                                                       110,
          70 percent nitric                                                                                                                                                                  111
          acid.
    +    Nitric acid, red                8  UN2032                    I  8, 5.1,     2, B9, B32, B74,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             40, 66,
          fuming.                                                         6.1.        T20, TP2, TP12,                                                                                    74, 89,
                                                                                     TP13, TP38, TP45                                                                                         90
         Nitric oxide,                 2.3  UN1660              .......  2.3, 5.1,       1, B37, B46,  None..........  337........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             40, 89,
          compressed.                                                     8.            B50, B60, B77                                                                                         90
         Nitric oxide and              2.3  UN1975              .......  2.3, 5.1,    1, B7, B9, B14,  None..........  337........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             40, 89,
          dinitrogen                                                      8.           B45, B46, B61,                                                                                         90
          tetroxide mixtures                                                            B66, B67, B77
          or Nitric oxide and
          nitrogen dioxide
          mixtures.

[[Page 214]]

 
    G    Nitriles, flammable,            3  UN3273                    I  3, 6.1....   T14, TP2, TP13,  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden         30 L  E              40, 52
          toxic, n.o.s..                                                                         TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  3, 6.1....    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         60 L  B              40, 52
                                                                                           TP13, TP27
    G    Nitriles, toxic,              6.1  UN3275                    I  6.1, 3....      5, T14, TP2,  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
          flammable, n.o.s..                                                               TP13, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1, 3....    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                           TP13, TP27
    G    Nitriles, toxic,              6.1  UN3276                    I  6.1.......      5, T14, TP2,  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  B             .......
          n.o.s..                                                                          TP13, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
                                                                                                 TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......     IB3, T7, TP1,  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
                                                                                                 TP28
         Nitrites, inorganic,          5.1  UN3219                   II  5.1.......      IB1, T4, TP1  152...........  202........  242........          1 L          5 L  B             46, 56,
          aqueous solution,                                                                                                                                                                   58
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  5.1.......      IB2, T4, TP1  152...........  203........  241........        2.5 L         30 L  B             46, 56,
                                                                                                                                                                                              58
         Nitrites, inorganic,          5.1  UN2627                   II  5.1.......      33, IB8, IP4  152...........  212........  None.......         5 kg        25 kg  A             46, 56,
          n.o.s..                                                                                                                                                                             58
         3-Nitro-4-                    6.1  UN2307                   II  6.1.......      IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A                  40
          chlorobenzotrifluor
          ide.
         6-Nitro-4-              Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          diazotoluene-3-
          sulfonic acid (dry).
         Nitro isobutane         Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          triol trinitrate.
         N-Nitro-N-              Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          methylglycolamide
          nitrate.
         2-Nitro-2-              Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          methylpropanol
          nitrate.
         Nitro urea..........         1.1D  UN0147                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
         N-Nitroaniline......    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
    +    Nitroanilines (o-; m-         6.1  UN1661                   II  6.1.......    IB8, IP2, IP4,  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          ; p-;).                                                                             T7, TP2
    +    Nitroanisole........          6.1  UN2730                  III  6.1.......     IB8, IP3, T4,  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A             .......
                                                                                                  TP1
    +    Nitrobenzene........          6.1  UN1662                   II  6.1.......      IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A                  40
         m-Nitrobenzene          Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          diazonium
          perchlorate.
         Nitrobenzenesulfonic            8  UN2305                   II  8.........               IB2  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  A             .......
          acid.
         Nitrobenzol, see      ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Nitrobenzene.
         5-Nitrobenzotriazol.         1.1D  UN0385                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
         Nitrobenzotrifluorid          6.1  UN2306                   II  6.1.......      IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A                  40
          es.

[[Page 215]]

 
         Nitrobromobenzenes            6.1  UN2732                  III  6.1.......      IB3, T4, TP1  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
          liquid.
         Nitrobromobenzenes            6.1  UN2732                  III  6.1.......     IB8, IP3, T4,  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A             .......
          solid.                                                                                  TP1
         Nitrocellulose, dry          1.1D  UN0340                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  13                27E
          or wetted with less
          than 25 percent
          water (or alcohol),
          by mass.
         Nitrocellulose                4.1  UN3270                   II  4.1.......            43, A1  151...........  212........  240........         1 kg        15 kg  D             .......
          membrane filters,
          with not more than
          12.6% nitrogen, by
          dry mass.
         Nitrocellulose,              1.3C  UN0343                   II  1.3C......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
          plasticized with
          not less than 18
          percent
          plasticizing
          substance, by mass.
         Nitrocellulose,                 3  UN2059                   II  3.........     IB2, T4, TP1,  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
          solution, flammable                                                                     TP8
          with not more than
          12.6 percent
          nitrogen, by mass,
          and not more than
          55 percent
          nitrocellulose.
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Nitrocellulose,              1.1D  UN0341                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  13                27E
          unmodified or
          plasticized with
          less than 18
          percent
          plasticizing
          substance, by mass.
         Nitrocellulose,              1.3C  UN0342                   II  1.3C......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
          wetted with not
          less than 25
          percent alcohol, by
          mass.
         Nitrocellulose with           4.1  UN2556                   II  4.1.......                    151...........  212........  None.......         1 kg        15 kg  D                  28
          alcohol with not
          less than 25
          percent alcohol by
          mass, and with not
          more than 12.6
          percent nitrogen,
          by dry mass.
         Nitrocellulose, with          4.1  UN2557                   II  4.1.......                44  151...........  212........  None.......         1 kg        15 kg  D                  28
          not more than 12.6
          percent nitrogen,
          by dry mass, or
          Nitrocellulose
          mixture with
          pigment or
          Nitrocellulose
          mixture with
          plasticizer or
          Nitrocellulose
          mixture with
          pigment and
          plasticizer.
         Nitrocellulose with           4.1  UN2555                   II  4.1.......                    151...........  212........  None.......        15 kg        50 kg  E                  28
          water with not less
          than 25 percent
          water, by mass.
         Nitrochlorobenzene,   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see
          Chloronitrobenzenes
          etc.
         Nitrocresols........          6.1  UN2446                  III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A             .......
         Nitroethane.........            3  UN2842                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Nitroethyl nitrate..    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Nitroethylene           Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          polymer.
         Nitrogen, compressed          2.2  UN1066              .......  2.2.......                    306...........  302........  314, 315...        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
         Nitrogen dioxide,     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Dinitrogen
          tetroxide.

[[Page 216]]

 
         Nitrogen fertilizer   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          solution, see
          Fertilizer
          ammoniating
          solution etc.
         Nitrogen, mixtures    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          with rare gases,
          see Rare gases and
          nitrogen mixtures.
         Nitrogen peroxide,    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Dinitrogen
          tetroxide.
         Nitrogen,                     2.2  UN1977              .......  2.2.......          T75, TP5  320...........  316........  318........        50 kg       500 kg  D             .......
          refrigerated liquid
          cryogenic liquid.
         Nitrogen tetroxide    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          and nitric oxide
          mixtures, see
          Nitric oxide and
          nitrogen tetroxide
          mixtures.
         Nitrogen tetroxide,   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Dinitrogen
          tetroxide.
         Nitrogen trichloride    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Nitrogen                      2.2  UN2451              .......  2.2, 5.1..                    None..........  302........  None.......        75 kg       150 kg  D                  40
          trifluoride,
          compressed.
         Nitrogen triiodide..    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Nitrogen triiodide      Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          monoamine.
         Nitrogen trioxide...          2.3  UN2421              .......  2.3, 5.1,                  1  None..........  336........  245........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             40, 89,
                                                                          8.                                                                                                                  90
         Nitroglycerin,               1.1D  UN0143                   II  1.1D, 6.1.               125  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  13                21E
          desensitized with
          not less than 40
          percent non-
          volatile water
          insoluble
          phlegmatizer, by
          mass.
         Nitroglycerin,          Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          liquid, not
          desensitized.
         Nitroglycerin                   3  UN3343              .......  3.........               129  None..........  214........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             .......
          mixture,
          desensitized,
          liquid, flammable,
          n.o.s. with not
          more than 30
          percent
          nitroglycerin, by
          mass.
         Nitroglycerin                   3  UN3357                   II  3.........               142  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  E             .......
          mixture,
          desensitized,
          liquid, n.o.s. with
          not more than 30%
          nitroglycerin, by
          mass.

[[Page 217]]

 
         Nitroglycerin                 4.1  UN3319                   II  4.1.......               118  None..........  None.......  None.......    Forbidden       0.5 kg  E             .......
          mixture,
          desensitized,
          solid, n.o.s. with
          more than 2 percent
          but not more than
          10 percent
          nitroglycerin, by
          mass.
         Nitroglycerin,                  3  UN3064                   II  3.........                N8  None..........  202........  None.......    Forbidden          5 L  E             .......
          solution in
          alcohol, with more
          than 1 percent but
          not more than 5
          percent
          nitroglycerin.
         Nitroglycerin,               1.1D  UN0144                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10                21E
          solution in
          alcohol, with more
          than 1 percent but
          not more than 10
          percent
          nitrogylcerin.
         Nitroglycerin                   3  UN1204                   II  3.........          IB2, N34  None..........  202........  None.......          5 L         60 L  B             .......
          solution in alcohol
          with not more than
          1 percent
          nitroglycerin.
         Nitroguanidine          Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          nitrate.
         Nitroguanidine or            1.1D  UN0282                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
          Picrite, dry or
          wetted with less
          than 20 percent
          water, by mass.
         Nitroguanidine,               4.1  UN1336                    I  4.1.......      23, A8, A19,  None..........  211........  None.......         1 kg        15 kg  E                  28
          wetted or Picrite,                                                                 A20, N41
          wetted with not
          less than 20
          percent water, by
          mass.
         1-Nitrohydantoin....    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Nitrohydrochloric               8  UN1798                    I  8.........     A3, B10, N41,  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden        2.5 L  D             40, 66,
          acid.                                                                       T10, TP2, TP12,                                                                                    74, 89,
                                                                                                 TP13                                                                                         90
         Nitromannite (dry)..    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Nitromannite,         ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          wetted, see
          Mannitol
          hexanitrate, etc.
         Nitromethane........            3  UN1261                   II  3.........  ................  150...........  202........  None.......    Forbidden         60 L  A
         Nitromuriatic acid,   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see
          Nitrohydrochloric
          acid.
         Nitronaphthalene....          4.1  UN2538                  III  4.1.......      A1, IB8, IP3  151...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
    +    Nitrophenols (o-; m-          6.1  UN1663                  III  6.1.......     IB8, IP3, T4,  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A             .......
          ; p-;).                                                                                 TP3
         m-Nitrophenyldinitro    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          methane.
         Nitropropanes.......            3  UN2608                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         p-                            4.2  UN1369                   II  4.2.......    A19, A20, IB6,  None..........  212........  241........        15 kg        50 kg  D                  34
          Nitrosodimethylanil                                                                IP2, N34
          ine.
         Nitrostarch, dry or          1.1D  UN0146                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
          wetted with less
          than 20 percent
          water, by mass.
         Nitrostarch, wetted           4.1  UN1337                    I  4.1.......      23, A8, A19,  None..........  211........  None.......         1 kg        15 kg  D                  28
          with not less than                                                                 A20, N41
          20 percent water,
          by mass.
         Nitrosugars (dry)...    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Nitrosyl chloride...          2.3  UN1069              .......  2.3, 8....            3, B14  None..........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40

[[Page 218]]

 
         Nitrosylsulfuric                8  UN2308                   II  8.........   A3, A6, A7, B2,  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  D             40, 66,
          acid.                                                                         IB2, N34, T8,                                                                                    74, 89,
                                                                                            TP2, TP12                                                                                         90
         Nitrotoluenes,                6.1  UN1664                   II  6.1.......    IB2, IP2, IP4,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
          liquid o-; m-; p-;.                                                                 T7, TP2
         Nitrotoluenes, solid          6.1  UN1664                   II  6.1.......    IB8, IP2, IP4,  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          m-, or p-.                                                                          T7, TP2
         Nitrotoluidines               6.1  UN2660                  III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A             .......
          (mono).
         Nitrotriazolone or           1.1D  UN0490                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
          NTO.
         Nitrous oxide and     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          carbon dioxide
          mixtures, see
          Carbon dioxide and
          nitrous oxide
          mixtures.
         Nitrous oxide.......          2.2  UN1070              .......  2.2, 5.1..                    306...........  304........  314, 315...        75 kg       150 kg  A                  40
         Nitrous oxide,                2.2  UN2201              .......  2.2, 5.1..     B6, T75, TP5,  None..........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  B                  40
          refrigerated liquid.                                                                   TP22
         Nitroxylenes, (o-; m-         6.1  UN1665                   II  6.1.......    IB2, IP2, IP4,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
          ; p-).                                                                              T7, TP2
         Nitroxylol, see       ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Nitroxylenes.
         Nonanes.............            3  UN1920                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Non-flammable gas,    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          n.o.s., see
          Compressed gas,
          etc. or Liquefied
          gas, etc.
         Nonliquefied gases,   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Compressed
          gases, etc.
         Nonliquefied          ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          hydrocarbon gas,
          see Hydrocarbon gas
          mixture,
          compressed, n.o.s..
         Nonyltrichlorosilane            8  UN1799                   II  8.........  A7, B2, B6, IB2,  None..........  202........  242........    Forbidden         30 L  C                  40
                                                                                        N34, T7, TP2,
                                                                                                 TP13
         Nordhausen acid, see  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Sulfuric acid,
          fuming etc.
         2,5-Norbornadiene,    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          stabilized, see
          Bicyclo 2,2,1 hepta-
          2,5-diene,
          stabilized.

[[Page 219]]

 
         Octadecyltrichlorosi            8  UN1800                   II  8.........  A7, B2, B6, IB2,  None..........  202........  242........    Forbidden         30 L  C                  40
          lane.                                                                         N34, T7, TP2,
                                                                                                 TP13
         Octadiene...........            3  UN2309                   II  3.........  B1, IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         1,7-Octadine-3,5-       Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          diyne-1,8-dimethoxy-
          9-octadecynoic acid.
         Octafluorobut-2-ene           2.2  UN2422              .......  2.2.......                    None..........  304........  314, 315...        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
          or Refrigerant gas
          R 1318.
         Octafluorocyclobutan          2.2  UN1976              .......  2.2.......               T50  None..........  304........  314, 315...        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
          e, or Refrigerant
          gas RC 318.
         Octafluoropropaneor           2.2  UN2424              .......  2.2.......               T50  None..........  304........  314, 315...        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
          Refrigerant gas R
          218.
         Octanes.............            3  UN1262                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         Octogen, etc. see     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Cyclotetramethylene
          tetranitramine,
          etc..
         Octolite or Octol,           1.1D  UN0266                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
          dry or wetted with
          less than 15
          percent water, by
          mass.
         Octonal.............         1.1D  UN0496              .......  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
         Octyl aldehydes.....            3  UN1191                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Octyltrichlorosilane            8  UN1801                   II  8.........  A7, B2, B6, IB2,  None..........  202........  242........    Forbidden         30 L  C                  40
                                                                                        N34, T7, TP2,
                                                                                                 TP13
         Oil gas, compressed.          2.3  UN1071              .......  2.3, 2.1..                 6  None..........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden        25 kg  D                  40
         Oleum, see Sulfuric   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          acid, fuming.
         Organic peroxide        Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          type A, liquid or
          solid.
    G    Organic peroxide              5.2  UN3101                   II  5.2, 1....                53  152...........  225........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  D              12, 40
          type B, liquid.
    G    Organic peroxide              5.2  UN3111                   II  5.2, 1....                53  None..........  225........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  D               2, 40
          type B, liquid,
          temperature
          controlled.
    G    Organic peroxide              5.2  UN3102                   II  5.2, 1....                53  152...........  225........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  D              12, 40
          type B, solid.
    G    Organic peroxide              5.2  UN3112                   II  5.2, 1....                53  None..........  225........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  D               2, 40
          type B, solid,
          temperature
          controlled.
    G    Organic peroxide              5.2  UN3103                   II  5.2.......                    152...........  225........  None.......          5 L         10 L  D              12, 40
          type C, liquid.
    G    Organic peroxide              5.2  UN3113                   II  5.2.......                    None..........  225........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  D               2, 40
          type C, liquid,
          temperature
          controlled.
    G    Organic peroxide              5.2  UN3104                   II  5.2.......                    152...........  225........  None.......         5 kg        10 kg  D              12, 40
          type C, solid.
    G    Organic peroxide              5.2  UN3114                   II  5.2.......                    None..........  225........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  D               2, 40
          type C, solid,
          temperature
          controlled.
    G    Organic peroxide              5.2  UN3105                   II  5.2.......                    152...........  225........  None.......          5 L         10 L  D              12, 40
          type D, liquid.
    G    Organic peroxide              5.2  UN3115                   II  5.2.......                    None..........  225........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  D               2, 40
          type D, liquid,
          temperature
          controlled.
    G    Organic peroxide              5.2  UN3106                   II  5.2.......                    152...........  225........  None.......         5 kg        10 kg  D              12, 40
          type D, solid.
    G    Organic peroxide              5.2  UN3116                   II  5.2.......                    None..........  225........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  D               2, 40
          type D, solid,
          temperature
          controlled.
    G    Organic peroxide              5.2  UN3107                   II  5.2.......                    152...........  225........  None.......         10 L         25 L  D              12, 40
          type E, liquid.

[[Page 220]]

 
    G    Organic peroxide              5.2  UN3117                   II  5.2.......                    None..........  225........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  D               2, 40
          type E, liquid,
          temperature
          controlled.
    G    Organic peroxide              5.2  UN3108                   II  5.2.......                    152...........  225........  None.......        10 kg        25 kg  D              12, 40
          type E, solid.
    G    Organic peroxide              5.2  UN3118                   II  5.2.......                    None..........  225........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  D               2, 40
          type E, solid,
          temperature
          controlled.
    G    Organic peroxide              5.2  UN3109                   II  5.2.......    IB52, IP5, T23  152...........  225........  225........         10 L         25 L  D              12, 40
          type F, liquid.
    G    Organic peroxide              5.2  UN3119                   II  5.2.......    IB52, IP5, T23  None..........  225........  225........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D               2, 40
          type F, liquid,
          temperature
          controlled.
    G    Organic peroxide              5.2  UN3110                   II  5.2.......         IB52, T23  152...........  225........  225........        10 kg        25 kg  D              12, 40
          type F, solid.
    G    Organic peroxide              5.2  UN3120                   II  5.2.......               T23  None..........  225........  225........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D               2, 40
          type F, solid,
          temperature
          controlled.
    D    Organic phosphate,            2.3  NA1955              .......  2.3.......                 3  None..........  334........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          mixed with
          compressed gas or
          Organic phosphate
          compound, mixed
          with compressed gas
          or Organic
          phosphorus
          compound, mixed
          with compressed gas.
         Organic pigments,             4.2  UN3313                   II  4.2.......          IB8, IP4  None..........  212........  241........        15 kg        50 kg  C             .......
          self-heating.
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.2.......          IB8, IP3  None..........  213........  241........        25 kg       100 kg  C             .......
         Organoarsenic                 6.1  UN3280                    I  6.1.......      5, IB7, IP1,  None..........  211........  242........         5 kg        50 kg  B             .......
          compound, n.o.s..                                                            T14, TP2, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......    IB8, IP2, IP4,  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  B             .......
                                                                                       T11, TP2, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......     IB8, IP3, T7,  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A             .......
                                                                                            TP1, TP28
         Organochlorine                  3  UN2762                    I  3, 6.1....   T14, TP2, TP13,  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden         30 L  B                  40
          pesticides liquid,                                                                     TP27
          flammable, toxic,
          flash point less
          than 23 degrees C.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  3, 6.1....    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                           TP13, TP27
         Organochlorine                6.1  UN2996                    I  6.1.......   T14, TP2, TP13,  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
          pesticides, liquid,                                                                    TP27
          toxic.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                           TP13, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......     IB3, T7, TP2,  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A                  40
                                                                                                 TP28

[[Page 221]]

 
         Organochlorine                6.1  UN2995                    I  6.1, 3....   T14, TP2, TP13,  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
          pesticides, liquid,                                                                    TP27
          toxic, flammable,
          flash point not
          less than 23
          degrees C.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1, 3....    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                           TP13, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......      B1, IB3, T7,  153...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A                  40
                                                                                            TP2, TP28
         Organochlorine,               6.1  UN2761                    I  6.1.......          IB7, IP1  None..........  211........  242........         5 kg        50 kg  A                  40
          pesticides, solid,
          toxic.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A                  40
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A                  40
    G    Organometallic                4.3  UN3207                    I  4.3, 3....     T13, TP2, TP7  None..........  201........  244........    Forbidden          1 L  E                  40
          compound or
          Compound solution
          or Compound
          dispersion, water-
          reactive,
          flammable, n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  4.3, 3....     IB1, IP2, T7,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L          5 L  E                  40
                                                                                             TP2, TP7
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.3, 3....     IB2, IP4, T7,  None..........  203........  242........          5 L         60 L  E                  40
                                                                                             TP2, TP7
    G    Organometallic                6.1  UN3282                    I  6.1.......    IB7, IP1, T14,  None..........  211........  242........         5 kg        50 kg  B             .......
          compound, toxic                                                                   TP2, TP27
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......    IB8, IP2, IP4,  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  B             .......
                                                                                       T11, TP2, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......     IB8, IP3, T7,  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A             .......
                                                                                            TP1, TP28
         Organophosphorus              6.1  UN3279                    I  6.1, 3....      5, T14, TP2,  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
          compound, toxic,                                                                       TP13
          flammable, n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1, 3....    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                           TP13, TP27
         Organophosphorus              6.1  UN3278                    I  6.1.......      5, IB7, T14,  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  B             .......
          compound, toxic                                                             TP2, TP13, TP27
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
                                                                                                 TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......     IB3, T7, TP1,  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
                                                                                                 TP28
         Organophosphorus                3  UN2784                    I  3, 6.1....   T14, TP2, TP13,  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden         30 L  B                  40
          pesticides, liquid,                                                                    TP27
          flammable, toxic,
          flash point less
          than 23 degrees C.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  3, 6.1....    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                           TP13, TP27
         Organophosphorus              6.1  UN3018                    I  6.1.......    N76, T14, TP2,  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
          pesticides, liquid,                                                              TP13, TP27
          toxic.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......    IB2, N76, T11,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                      TP2, TP13, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......     IB3, N76, T7,  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A                  40
                                                                                            TP2, TP28

[[Page 222]]

 
         Organophosphorus              6.1  UN3017                    I  6.1, 3....    N76, T14, TP2,  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
          pesticides, liquid,                                                              TP13, TP27
          toxic, flammable,
          flash point not
          less than 23
          degrees C.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1, 3....    IB2, N76, T11,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                      TP2, TP13, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1, 3....     B1, IB3, N76,  153...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A                  40
                                                                                        T7, TP2, TP28
         Organophosphorus              6.1  UN2783                    I  6.1.......     IB7, IP1, N77  None..........  211........  242........         5 kg        50 kg  A                  40
          pesticides, solid,
          toxic.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......    IB8, IP2, IP4,  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A                  40
                                                                                                  N77
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......     IB8, IP3, N77  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A                  40
         Organotin compounds,          6.1  UN2788                    I  6.1.......     A3, N33, N34,  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
          liquid, n.o.s..                                                             T14, TP2, TP13,
                                                                                                 TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......     A3, IB2, N33,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A                  40
                                                                                       N34, T11, TP2,
                                                                                           TP13, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......     IB3, T7, TP2,  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A                  40
                                                                                                 TP28
         Organotin compounds,          6.1  UN3146                    I  6.1.......      A5, IB7, IP1  None..........  211........  242........         5 kg        50 kg  B                  40
          solid, n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A                  40
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A                  40
         Organotin                       3  UN2787                    I  3, 6.1....   T14, TP2, TP13,  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden         30 L  B                  40
          pesticides, liquid,                                                                    TP27
          flammable, toxic,
          flash point less
          than 23 degrees C.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  3, 6.1....    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                           TP13, TP27
         Organotin                     6.1  UN3020                    I  6.1.......   T14, TP2, TP13,  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
          pesticides, liquid,                                                                    TP27
          toxic.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                           TP13, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......     IB3, T7, TP2,  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A                  40
                                                                                                 TP28
         Organotin                     6.1  UN3019                    I  6.1, 3....   T14, TP2, TP13,  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
          pesticides, liquid,                                                                    TP27
          toxic, flammable,
          flash point not
          less than 23
          degrees C.

[[Page 223]]

 
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1, 3....    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                           TP13, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1, 3....      B1, IB3, T7,  153...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A                  40
                                                                                            TP2, TP28
         Organotin                     6.1  UN2786                    I  6.1.......          IB7, IP1  None..........  211........  242........         5 kg        50 kg  A                  40
          pesticides, solid,
          toxic.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A                  40
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A                  40
         Orthonitroaniline,    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Nitroanilines
          etc.
         Osmium tetroxide....          6.1  UN2471                    I  6.1.......     A8, IB7, IP1,  None..........  211........  242........         5 kg        50 kg  B                  40
                                                                                             N33, N34
  D G    Other regulated                 9  NA3082                  III  9.........      IB3, T2, TP1  155...........  203........  241........     No limit     No limit  A             .......
          substances, liquid,
          n.o.s..
  D G    Other regulated                 9  NA3077                  III  9.........     B54, IB8, IP2  155...........  213........  240........     No limit     No limit  A             .......
          substances, solid,
          n.o.s..
    G    Oxidizing liquid,             5.1  UN3098                    I  5.1, 8....                    None..........  201........  244........    Forbidden        2.5 L  D             13, 56,
          corrosive, n.o.s..                                                                                                                                                             58, 69,
                                                                                                                                                                                             106
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  5.1, 8....               IB1  None..........  202........  243........          1 L          5 L  B             34, 56,
                                                                                                                                                                                         58, 69,
                                                                                                                                                                                             106
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  5.1, 8....               IB2  152...........  203........  242........        2.5 L         30 L  B             34, 56,
                                                                                                                                                                                         58, 69,
                                                                                                                                                                                             106
    G    Oxidizing liquid,             5.1  UN3139                    I  5.1.......           127, A2  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden        2.5 L  D             56, 58,
          n.o.s..                                                                                                                                                                        69, 106
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  5.1.......      127, A2, IB2  152...........  202........  242........          1 L          5 L  B             56, 58,
                                                                                                                                                                                         69, 106
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  5.1.......      127, A2, IB2  152...........  203........  241........        2.5 L         30 L  B             56, 58,
                                                                                                                                                                                         69, 106
    G    Oxidizing liquid,             5.1  UN3099                    I  5.1, 6.1..                    None..........  201........  244........    Forbidden        2.5 L  D             56, 58,
          toxic, n.o.s..                                                                                                                                                                 69, 106
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  5.1, 6.1..               IB1  None..........  202........  243........          1 L          5 L  B             56, 58,
                                                                                                                                                                                         95, 106
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  5.1, 6.1..               IB2  152...........  203........  242........        2.5 L         30 L  B             56, 58,
                                                                                                                                                                                         95, 106
    G    Oxidizing solid,              5.1  UN3085                    I  5.1, 8....                    None..........  211........  242........         1 kg        15 kg  D             13, 56,
          corrosive, n.o.s..                                                                                                                                                             58, 69,
                                                                                                                                                                                             106
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  5.1, 8....          IB6, IP2  None..........  212........  242........         5 kg        25 kg  B             13, 34,
                                                                                                                                                                                         56, 58,
                                                                                                                                                                                         69, 106
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  5.1, 8....          IB8, IP3  152...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  B             13, 34,
                                                                                                                                                                                         56, 58,
                                                                                                                                                                                         69, 106
    G    Oxidizing solid,              5.1  UN3137                    I  5.1, 4.1..                    None..........  214........  214........    Forbidden    Forbidden  ............  .......
          flammable, n.o.s..
    G    Oxidizing solid,              5.1  UN1479                    I  5.1.......          IB6, IP1  None..........  211........  242........         1 kg        15 kg  D             56, 58,
          n.o.s..                                                                                                                                                                        69, 106

[[Page 224]]

 
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  5.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  152...........  212........  240........         5 kg        25 kg  B             56, 58,
                                                                                                                                                                                         69, 106
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  5.1.......          IB8, IP3  152...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  B             56, 58,
                                                                                                                                                                                         69, 106
    G    Oxidizing solid,              5.1  UN3100                   II  5.1, 4.2..                    None..........  214........  214........    Forbidden    Forbidden  ............  .......
          self-heating,
          n.o.s..
    G    Oxidizing solid,              5.1  UN3087                    I  5.1, 6.1..                    None..........  211........  242........         1 kg        15 kg  D             56, 58,
          toxic, n.o.s..                                                                                                                                                                 69, 106
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  5.1, 6.1..          IB6, IP2  None..........  212........  242........         5 kg        25 kg  B             56, 58,
                                                                                                                                                                                         69, 95,
                                                                                                                                                                                             106
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  5.1, 6.1..          IB8, IP3  152...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  B             56, 58,
                                                                                                                                                                                         69, 95,
                                                                                                                                                                                             106
    G    Oxidizing solid,              5.1  UN3121              .......  5.1, 4.3..                    None..........  214........  214........    Forbidden    Forbidden  ............  .......
          water-reactive,
          n.o.s..
         Oxygen and carbon     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          dioxide mixtures,
          see Carbon dioxide
          and oxygen mixtures.
         Oxygen, compressed..          2.2  UN1072              .......  2.2, 5.1..               A52  306...........  302........  314, 315...        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
         Oxygen difluoride,            2.3  UN2190              .......  2.3, 5.1,                  1  None..........  304........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             13, 40,
          compressed.                                                     8.                                                                                                              89, 90
         Oxygen generator,             5.1  UN3356                   II  5.1.......           60, A51  None..........  212........  None.......    Forbidden  25 kg gross  D             56, 58,
          chemical (including                                                                                                                                                            69, 106
          when contained in
          associated
          equipment, e.g.,
          passenger service
          units (PSUs),
          portable breathing
          equipment (PBE),
          etc)..
    +    Oxygen generator,               9  NA3356                  III  9.........                61  None..........  213........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  A             .......
          chemical, spent.
         Oxygen, mixtures      ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          with rare gases,
          see Rare gases and
          oxygen mixtures.
         Oxygen, refrigerated          2.2  UN1073              .......  2.2, 5.1..    T75, TP5, TP22  320...........  316........  318........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             .......
          liquid (cryogenic
          liquid).

[[Page 225]]

 
         Paint including                 3  UN1263                    I  3.........     T11, TP1, TP8  150...........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  E             .......
          paint, lacquer,
          enamel, stain,
          shellac solutions,
          varnish, polish,
          liquid filler, and
          liquid lacquer base.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  3.........     B52, IB2, T4,  150...........  173........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
                                                                                             TP1, TP8
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3.........     B1, B52, IB3,  150...........  173........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
                                                                                              T2, TP1
         Paint or Paint                  8  UN3066                   II  8.........  B2, IB2, T7, TP2  154...........  173........  242........          1 L         30 L  A             .......
          related material.
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  8.........     B52, IB3, T4,  154...........  173........  241........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
                                                                                                  TP1
         Paint related                   3  UN1263                    I  3.........     T11, TP1, TP8  150...........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  E             .......
          material including
          paint thinning,
          drying, removing,
          or reducing
          compound.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  3.........     B52, IB2, T4,  150...........  173........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
                                                                                             TP1, TP8
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3.........     B1, B52, IB3,  150...........  173........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
                                                                                              T2, TP1
         Paper, unsaturated            4.2  UN1379                  III  4.2.......          IB8, IP3  None..........  213........  241........    Forbidden    Forbidden  A             .......
          oil treated
          incompletely dried
          (including carbon
          paper).
         Paraformaldehyde....          4.1  UN2213                  III  4.1.......      A1, IB8, IP3  151...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Paraldehyde.........            3  UN1264                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Paranitroaniline,     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          solid, see
          Nitroanilines etc.
    D    Parathion and                 2.3  NA1967              .......  2.3.......                 3  None..........  334........  245........    Forbidden    Forbidden  E                  40
          compressed gas
          mixture.
         Paris green, solid,   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Copper
          acetoarsenite.
  A W    PCB, see              ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Polychlorinated
          biphenyls.
    +    Pentaborane.........          4.2  UN1380                    I  4.2, 6.1..                 1  None..........  205........  245........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             .......
         Pentachloroethane...          6.1  UN1669                   II  6.1.......      IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A                  40
         Pentachlorophenol...          6.1  UN3155                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Pentaerythrite          Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          tetranitrate (dry).
         Pentaerythrite                4.1  UN3344                   II  4.1.......               118  None..........  214........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  E                  40
          tetranitrate
          mixture,
          desensitized,
          solid, n.o.s. with
          more than 10
          percent but not
          more than 20
          percent PETN, by
          mass.
         Pentaerythrite               1.1D  UN0411                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
          tetranitrate or
          Pentaerythritol
          tetranitrate or
          PETN, with not less
          than 7 percent wax
          by mass.

[[Page 226]]

 
         Pentaerythrite               1.1D  UN0150                   II  1.1D......               121  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
          tetranitrate,
          wetted or
          Pentaerythritol
          tetranitrate,
          wetted, or PETN,
          wetted with not
          less than 25
          percent water, by
          mass, or
          Pentaerythrite
          tetranitrate, or
          Pentaerythritol
          tetranitrate or
          PETN, desensitized
          with not less than
          15 percent
          phlegmatizer by
          mass.
         Pentaerythritol       ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          tetranitrate, see
          Pentaerythrite
          tetranitrate, etc.
         Pentafluoroethane or          2.2  UN3220              .......  2.2.......               T50  306...........  304........  314, 315...        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
          Refrigerant gas R
          125.
         Pentamethylheptane..            3  UN2286                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Pentane-2,4-dione...            3  UN2310                  III  3, 6.1....  B1, IB3, T4, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         [PG II only]........
         Pentanes............            3  UN1265                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  E
         Pentanitroaniline       Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          (dry).
         Pentanols...........            3  UN1105                   II  3.........     IB2, T4, TP1,  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
                                                                                                 TP29
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3.........  B1, B3, IB3, T2,  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
                                                                                                  TP1
         1-Pentene (n-                   3  UN1108                    I  3.........          T11, TP2  150...........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  E             .......
          amylene).
         1-Pentol............            8  UN2705                   II  8.........  B2, IB2, T7, TP2  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  B                  38
         Pentolite, dry or            1.1D  UN0151                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
          wetted with less
          than 15 percent
          water, by mass.
         Perchlorates,                 5.1  UN3211                   II  5.1.......      IB2, T4, TP1  152...........  202........  242........          1 L          5 L  B             46, 56,
          inorganic, aqueous                                                                                                                                                                  58
          solution, n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  5.1.......      IB2, T4, TP1  152...........  202........  241........        2.5 L         30 L  B             56, 58,
                                                                                                                                                                                         69, 106
         Pepper spray, see     ...........  ..................      III  5.1.......                    152...........  203........  241........        2.5 L         30 L  B             56, 58,
          Aerosols, etc. or                                                                                                                                                              69, 106
          Self-defense spray,
          non-pressurized.
         Perchlorates,                 5.1  UN1481                   II  5.1.......          IB6, IP2  152...........  212........  242........         5 kg        25 kg  A              46, 56
          inorganic, n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  5.1.......          IB8, IP3  152...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A              46, 56
         Perchloric acid,        Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          with more than 72
          percent acid by
          mass.

[[Page 227]]

 
         Perchloric acid with          5.1  UN1873                    I  5.1, 8....      A2, A3, N41,  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden        2.5 L  D                  66
          more than 50                                                                 T10, TP1, TP12
          percent but not
          more than 72
          percent acid, by
          mass.
         Perchloric acid with            8  UN1802                   II  8, 5.1....     IB2, N41, T7,  None..........  202........  243........    Forbidden         30 L  C                  66
          not more than 50                                                                        TP2
          percent acid by
          mass.
         Perchloroethylene,    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see
          Tetrachloroethylene.
         Perchloromethyl               6.1  UN1670                    I  6.1.......    2, A3, A7, B9,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          mercaptan.                                                                   B14, B32, B74,
                                                                                       N34, T20, TP2,
                                                                                     TP13, TP38, TP45
         Perchloryl fluoride.          2.3  UN3083              .......  2.3, 5.1..        2, B9, B14  None..........  302........  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
         Percussion caps, see  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Primers, cap type.
         Perfluoro-2-butene,   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Octafluorobut-2-
          ene.
         Perfluoro(ethyl               2.1  UN3154              .......  2.1.......                    306...........  302, 304,    314, 315...    Forbidden       150 kg  E                  40
          vinyl ether).                                                                                                 305.
         Perfluoro(methyl              2.1  UN3153              .......  2.1.......               T50  306...........  302, 304,    314, 315...    Forbidden       150 kg  E                  40
          vinyl ether).                                                                                                 305.
         Perfumery products              3  UN1266                   II  3.........     IB2, T4, TP1,  150...........  202........  242........         15 L         60 L  B             .......
          with flammable                                                                          TP8
          solvents.
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Permanganates,                5.1  UN3214                   II  5.1.......  26, IB2, T4, TP1  152...........  202........  242........          1 L          5 L  D             56, 58,
          inorganic, aqueous                                                                                                                                                                 69,
          solution, n.o.s..                                                                                                                                                                 106,
                                                                                                                                                                                             107
         Permanganates,                5.1  UN1482                   II  5.1.......     26, A30, IB6,  152...........  212........  242........         5 kg        25 kg  D             56, 58,
          inorganic, n.o.s..                                                                      IP2                                                                                        69,
                                                                                                                                                                                            106,
                                                                                                                                                                                             107
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  5.1.......     26, A30, IB8,  152...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  D             56, 58,
                                                                                                  IP3                                                                                        69,
                                                                                                                                                                                            106,
                                                                                                                                                                                             107
         Peroxides,                    5.1  UN1483                   II  5.1.......     A7, A20, IB6,  None..........  212........  242........         5 kg        25 kg  A             13, 75,
          inorganic, n.o.s..                                                                 IP2, N34                                                                                        106
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  5.1.......     A7, A20, IB8,  152...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             13, 75,
                                                                                             IP3, N34                                                                                        106
         Peroxyacetic acid,      Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          with more than 43
          percent and with
          more than 6 percent
          hydrogen peroxide.
         Persulfates,                  5.1  UN3216                  III  5.1.......     IB2, T4, TP1,  152...........  203........  241........        2.5 L         30 L  A             .......
          inorganic, aqueous                                                                     TP29
          solution, n.o.s..
         Persulfates,                  5.1  UN3215                  III  5.1.......          IB8, IP3  152...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          inorganic, n.o.s..

[[Page 228]]

 
    G    Pesticides, liquid,             3  UN3021                    I  3, 6.1....     B5, T14, TP2,  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden         30 L  B             .......
          flammable, toxic,                                                                TP13, TP27
          flash point less
          than 23 degrees C.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  3, 6.1....    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         60 L  B             .......
                                                                                           TP13, TP27
    G    Pesticides, liquid,           6.1  UN2903                    I  6.1, 3....   T14, TP2, TP13,  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
          toxic, flammable,                                                                      TP27
          n.o.s. flash point
          not less than 23
          degrees C.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1, 3....    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                           TP13, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1, 3....  B1, IB3, T7, TP2  153...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A                  40
    G    Pesticides, liquid,           6.1  UN2902                    I  6.1.......   T14, TP2, TP13,  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
          toxic, n.o.s..                                                                         TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                           TP13, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......     IB3, T7, TP2,  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A                  40
                                                                                                 TP28
    G    Pesticides, solid,            6.1  UN2588                    I  6.1.......               IB7  None..........  211........  242........         5 kg        50 kg  A                  40
          toxic, n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A                  40
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A                  40
         PETN, see             ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Pentaerythrite
          tetranitrate.
         PETN/TNT, see         ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Pentolite, etc.
         Petrol, see Gasoline  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Petroleum crude oil.            3  UN1267                    I  3.........     T11, TP1, TP8  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  E             .......
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  3.........     IB2, T4, TP1,  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
                                                                                                  TP8
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Petroleum                       3  UN1268                    I  3.........     T11, TP1, TP8  150...........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  E             .......
          distillates, n.o.s.
          or Petroleum
          products, n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  3.........     IB2, T7, TP1,  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
                                                                                            TP8, TP28
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3.........      B1, IB3, T4,  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
                                                                                            TP1, TP29
         Petroleum gases,              2.1  UN1075              .......  2.1.......               T50  306...........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden       150 kg  E                  40
          liquefied or
          Liquefied petroleum
          gas.
    D    Petroleum oil.......            3  NA1270                    I  3.........     T11, TP1, TP9  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  E             .......
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  3.........     IB2, T7, TP1,  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
                                                                                            TP8, TP28

[[Page 229]]

 
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3.........      B1, IB3, T4,  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
                                                                                            TP1, TP29
         Phenacyl bromide....          6.1  UN2645                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  B                  40
    +    Phenetidines........          6.1  UN2311                  III  6.1.......      IB3, T4, TP1  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Phenol, molten......          6.1  UN2312                   II  6.1.......      B14, T7, TP3  None..........  202........  243........    Forbidden    Forbidden  B                  40
    +    Phenol, solid.......          6.1  UN1671                   II  6.1.......    IB8, IP2, IP4,  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
                                                                                         N78, T6, TP2
         Phenol solutions....          6.1  UN2821                   II  6.1.......      IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......      IB3, T4, TP1  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Phenolsulfonic acid,            8  UN1803                   II  8.........     B2, IB2, N41,  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  C                  14
          liquid.                                                                             T7, TP2
         Phenoxyacetic acid              3  UN3346                    I  3, 6.1....   T14, TP2, TP13,  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden         30 L  B                  40
          derivative                                                                             TP27
          pesticide, liquid,
          flammable, toxic
          flash point less
          than 23 degrees C..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  3, 6.1....    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                           TP13, TP27
         Phenoxyacetic acid            6.1  UN3348                    I  6.1.......   T14, TP2, TP13,  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
          derivative                                                                             TP27
          pesticide, liquid,
          toxic.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......    IB2, T11, TP2,  153...........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                                 TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......     IB3, T7, TP2,  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A                  40
                                                                                                 TP28
         Phenoxyacetic acid            6.1  UN3347                    I  6.1, 3....   T14, TP2, TP13,  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
          derivative                                                                             TP27
          pesticide, liquid,
          toxic, flammable,
          flash point not
          less than 23
          degrees C.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1, 3....    IB2, T11, TP2,  153...........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                           TP13, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1, 3....     IB3, T7, TP2,  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A                  40
                                                                                                 TP28
         Phenoxyacetic acid            6.1  UN3345                    I  6.1.......          IB7, IP1  None..........  211........  242........         5 kg        50 kg  A                  40
          derivative
          pesticide, solid,
          toxic.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  153...........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A                  40
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A                  40
         Phenyl chloroformate          6.1  UN2746                   II  6.1, 8....     IB2, T7, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         30 L  A             12, 13,
                                                                                                 TP13                                                                                    21, 25,
                                                                                                                                                                                         40, 100
         Phenyl isocyanate...          6.1  UN2487                    I  6.1, 3....  2, B9, B14, B32,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
                                                                                       B74, B77, N33,
                                                                                       N34, T20, TP2,
                                                                                     TP13, TP38, TP45
         Phenyl mercaptan....          6.1  UN2337                    I  6.1, 3....  2, B9, B14, B32,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  B              26, 40
                                                                                       B74, B77, T20,
                                                                                     TP2, TP13, TP38,
                                                                                                 TP45
         Phenyl phosphorus               8  UN2798                   II  8.........     B2, B15, IB2,  154...........  202........  242........    Forbidden         30 L  B                  40
          dichloride.                                                                         T7, TP2

[[Page 230]]

 
         Phenyl phosphorus               8  UN2799                   II  8.........     B2, B15, IB2,  154...........  202........  242........    Forbidden         30 L  B                  40
          thiodichloride.                                                                     T7, TP2
         Phenyl urea                   6.1  UN3002                    I  6.1.......    T14, TP2, TP27  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
          pesticides, liquid,
          toxic.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......           T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......           T4, TP1  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A                  40
         Phenylacetonitrile,           6.1  UN2470                  III  6.1.......      IB3, T4, TP1  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A                  26
          liquid.
         Phenylacetyl                    8  UN2577                   II  8.........  B2, IB2, T7, TP2  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  C                  40
          chloride.
         Phenylcarbylamine             6.1  UN1672                    I  6.1.......  2, B9, B14, B32,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          chloride.                                                                    B74, T20, TP2,
                                                                                     TP13, TP38, TP45
         m-Phenylene             Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          diaminediperchlorat
          e (dry).
    +    Phenylenediamines (o-         6.1  UN1673                  III  6.1.......     IB8, IP3, T7,  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A             .......
          , m-, p-).                                                                              TP1
         Phenylhydrazine.....          6.1  UN2572                   II  6.1.......      IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A                  40
         Phenylmercuric                6.1  UN1674                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          acetate.
         Phenylmercuric                6.1  UN2026                    I  6.1.......          IB7, IP1  None..........  211........  242........         5 kg        50 kg  A             .......
          compounds, n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A             .......
         Phenylmercuric                6.1  UN1894                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          hydroxide.
         Phenylmercuric                6.1  UN1895                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          nitrate.
         Phenyltrichlorosilan            8  UN1804                   II  8.........      A7, B6, IB2,  None..........  202........  242........    Forbidden         30 L  C                  40
          e.                                                                             N34, T7, TP2
         Phosgene............          2.3  UN1076              .......  2.3, 8....        1, B7, B46  None..........  192........  314........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
         9-                            4.2  UN2940                   II  4.2.......     A19, IB6, IP2  None..........  212........  241........        15 kg        50 kg  A             .......
          Phosphabicyclononan
          es or
          Cyclooctadiene
          phosphines.
         Phosphine...........          2.3  UN2199              .......  2.3, 2.1..                 1  None..........  192........  245........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
         Phosphoric acid,                8  UN1805                  III  8.........     A7, IB3, IP3,  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A
          liquid or solid.                                                               N34, T4, TP1
         Phosphoric acid       ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          triethyleneimine,
          see Tris-(1-
          aziridiyl)phosphine
          oxide, solution.
         Phosphoric            ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          anhydride, see
          Phosphorus
          pentoxide.
         Phosphorous acid....            8  UN2834                  III  8.........     IB8, IP3, T3,  154...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A                  48
                                                                                                  TP1

[[Page 231]]

 
         Phosphorus,                   4.1  UN1338                  III  4.1.......  A1, A19, B1, B9,  None..........  213........  243........        25 kg       100 kg  A                  74
          amorphous.                                                                    B26, IB8, IP3
         Phosphorus bromide,   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Phosphorus
          tribromide.
         Phosphorus chloride,  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Phosphorus
          trichloride.
         Phosphorus                    4.1  UN1339                   II  4.1.......     A20, IB4, N34  None..........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  B                  74
          heptasulfide, free
          from yellow or
          white phosphorus.
         Phosphorus                      8  UN1939                   II  8.........     B8, IB8, IP2,  None..........  212........  240........    Forbidden        50 kg  C              12, 40
          oxybromide.                                                                  IP4, N41, N43,
                                                                                              T7, TP2
         Phosphorus                      8  UN2576                   II  8.........      B2, B8, IB1,  None..........  202........  242........    Forbidden    Forbidden  C                  40
          oxybromide, molten.                                                           N41, N43, T7,
                                                                                            TP3, TP13
    +    Phosphorus                      8  UN1810                   II  8, 6.1....   2, A7, B9, B14,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  C                  40
          oxychloride.                                                                 B32, B74, B77,
                                                                                       N34, T20, TP2,
                                                                                           TP38, TP45
         Phosphorus                      8  UN2691                   II  8.........     A7, IB8, IP2,  154...........  212........  240........    Forbidden        50 kg  B              12, 40
          pentabromide.                                                                      IP4, N34
         Phosphorus                      8  UN1806                   II  8.........     A7, IB8, IP2,  None..........  212........  240........    Forbidden        50 kg  C                  40
          pentachloride.                                                                     IP4, N34
         Phosphorus                    2.3  UN2198              .......  2.3, 8....        2, B9, B14  None..........  302, 304...  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          pentafluoride,
          compressed.
         Phosphorus                    4.3  UN1340                   II  4.3, 4.1..     A20, B59, IB4  151...........  212........  242........        15 kg        50 kg  B                  74
          pentasulfide, free
          from yellow or
          white phosphorus.
         Phosphorus pentoxide            8  UN1807                   II  8.........     A7, IB8, IP2,  154...........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  A             .......
                                                                                             IP4, N34
         Phosphorus                    4.1  UN1341                   II  4.1.......     A20, IB4, N34  None..........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  B                  74
          sesquisulfide, free
          from yellow or
          white phosphorus.
         Phosphorus                      8  UN1808                   II  8.........   A3, A6, A7, B2,  None..........  202........  242........    Forbidden         30 L  C                  40
          tribromide.                                                                  B25, IB2, N34,
                                                                                         N43, T7, TP2
         Phosphorus                    6.1  UN1809                    I  6.1, 8....  2, B9, B14, B15,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  C                  40
          trichloride.                                                                 B32, B74, B77,
                                                                                       N34, T20, TP2,
                                                                                     TP13, TP38, TP45
         Phosphorus trioxide.            8  UN2578                  III  8.........          IB8, IP3  154...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A                  12
         Phosphorus                    4.1  UN1343                   II  4.1.......     A20, IB4, N34  None..........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  B                  74
          trisulfide, free
          from yellow or
          white phosphorus.

[[Page 232]]

 
         Phosphorus, white             4.2  UN1381                    I  4.2, 6.1..     B9, B26, N34,  None..........  188........  243........    Forbidden    Forbidden  E             .......
          dry or Phosphorus,                                                                  T9, TP3
          white, under water
          or Phosphorus
          white, in solution
          or Phosphorus,
          yellow dry or
          Phosphorus, yellow,
          under water or
          Phosphorus, yellow,
          in solution.
         Phosphorus white,             4.2  UN2447                    I  4.2, 6.1..     B9, B26, N34,  None..........  188........  243........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             .......
          molten.                                                                      T21, TP3, TP7,
                                                                                                 TP26
         Phosphorus (white or    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          red) and a
          chlorate, mixtures
          of.
         Phosphoryl chloride,  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Phosphorus
          oxychloride.
         Phthalic anhydride              8  UN2214                  III  8.........     IB8, IP3, T4,  154...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          with more than .05                                                                      TP3
          percent maleic
          anhydride.
         Picolines...........            3  UN2313                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T4, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A                  40
         Picric acid, see      ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Trinitrophenol, etc.
         Picrite, see          ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Nitroguanidine, etc.
         Picryl chloride, see  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Trinitrochlorobenze
          ne.
         Pine oil............            3  UN1272                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         alpha-Pinene........            3  UN2368                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Piperazine..........            8  UN2579                  III  8.........     IB8, IP3, T4,  154...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A                  12
                                                                                                  TP1
         Piperidine..........            8  UN2401                    I  8, 3......          T10, TP2  None..........  201........  243........        0.5 L        2.5 L  B             .......
         Pivaloyl chloride,    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Trimethylacetyl
          chloride.
         Plastic molding                 9  UN3314                  III  9.........      32, IB8, IP6  155...........  221........  221........       100 kg       200 kg  A              85, 87
          compound in dough,
          sheet or extruded
          rope form evolving
          flammable vapor.
         Plastic solvent,      ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          n.o.s., see
          Flammable liquids,
          n.o.s..
         Plastics,                     4.2  UN2006                  III  4.2.......                    None..........  213........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  C             .......
          nitrocellulose-
          based, self-
          heating, n.o.s..

[[Page 233]]

 
         Poisonous gases,      ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          n.o.s., see
          Compressed or
          liquefied gases,
          flammable or toxic,
          n.o.s..
         Polyalkylamines,      ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          n.o.s., see Amines,
          etc.
         Polychlorinated                 9  UN2315                   II  9.........  9, 81, 140, IB3,  155...........  202........  241........        100 L        220 L  A                  95
          biphenyls, liquid.                                                                  T4, TP1
         Polychlorinated                 9  UN2315                   II  9.........   9, 81, 140, IB7  155...........  212........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A                  95
          biphenyls, solid.
         Polyester resin kit.            3  UN3269              .......  3.........                40  152...........  225........  None.......         5 kg         5 kg  B             .......
         Polyhalogenated                 9  UN3151                   II  9.........               IB3  155...........  204........  241........        100 L        220 L  A                  95
          biphenyls, liquid
          or Polyhalogenated
          terphenyls liquid.
         Polyhalogenated                 9  UN3152                   II  9.........     IB8, IP2, IP4  155...........  204........  241........       100 kg       200 kg  A                  95
          biphenyls, solid or
          Polyhalogenated
          terphenyls, solid.
         Polymeric beads,                9  UN2211                  III  9.........     32, IB8, IP6,  155...........  221........  221........        100kg        200kg  A              85, 87
          expandable,                                                                             IP7
          evolving flammable
          vapor.
         Potassium...........          4.3  UN2257                    I  4.3.......    A19, A20, B27,  None..........  211........  244........    Forbidden        15 kg  D             .......
                                                                                        IB1, IP1, N6,
                                                                                        N34, T9, TP3,
                                                                                                  TP7
         Potassium arsenate..          6.1  UN1677                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Potassium arsenite..          6.1  UN1678                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Potassium bisulfite   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          solution, see
          Bisulfites, aqueous
          solutions, n.o.s..
         Potassium                     4.3  UN1870                    I  4.3.......          A19, N40  None..........  211........  242........    Forbidden        15 kg  E             .......
          borohydride.
         Potassium bromate...          5.1  UN1484                   II  5.1.......          IB8, IP4  152...........  212........  242........         5 kg        25 kg  A             56, 58,
                                                                                                                                                                                             106
         Potassium carbonyl..    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Potassium chlorate..          5.1  UN1485                   II  5.1.......     A9, IB8, IP4,  152...........  212........  242........         5 kg        25 kg  A             56, 58,
                                                                                                  N34                                                                                        106
         Potassium chlorate,           5.1  UN2427                   II  5.1.......  A2, IB2, T4, TP1  152...........  202........  241........          1 L          5 L  B             56, 58,
          aqueous solution.                                                                                                                                                                  106
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  5.1.......  A2, IB2, T4, TP1  152...........  203........  241........        2.5 L         30 L  B             56, 58,
                                                                                                                                                                                         69, 106
         Potassium chlorate    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          mixed with mineral
          oil, see Explosive,
          blasting, type C.
         Potassium                     6.1  UN1679                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A                  26
          cuprocyanide.
         Potassium cyanide...          6.1  UN1680                    I  6.1.......    B69, B77, IB7,  None..........  211........  242........         5 kg        50 kg  B                  52
                                                                                       IP1, N74, N75,
                                                                                       T14, TP2, TP13
         Potassium dichloro    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          isocyanurate or
          Potassium dichloro-
          s-triazinetrione,
          see
          Dichloroisocyanuric
          acid, dry or
          Dichloroisocyanuric
          acid salts etc.

[[Page 234]]

 
         Potassium dithionite          4.2  UN1929                   II  4.2.......     A8, A19, A20,  None..........  212........  241........        15 kg        50 kg  E                  13
          or Potassium                                                                       IB6, IP2
          hydrosulfite.
         Potassium fluoride..          6.1  UN1812                  III  6.1.......     IB8, IP3, T4,  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A                  26
                                                                                                  TP1
         Potassium                     6.1  UN2628                    I  6.1.......          IB7, IP1  None..........  211........  242........         5 kg        50 kg  E             .......
          fluoroacetate.
         Potassium                     6.1  UN2655                  III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A                  26
          fluorosilicate.
         Potassium hydrate,    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Potassium
          hydroxide, solid.
         Potassium hydrogen    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          fluoride, see
          Potassium hydrogen
          difluoride.
         Potassium hydrogen    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          fluoride solution,
          see Corrosive
          liquid, n.o.s..
         Potassium hydrogen              8  UN2509                   II  8.........     A7, IB8, IP2,  154...........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  A             .......
          sulfate.                                                                           IP4, N34
         Potassium                       8  UN1811                   II  8, 6.1....    IB8, IP2, IP4,  154...........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  A             25, 26,
          hydrogendifluoride,                                                        N3, N34, T7, TP2                                                                                         40
          solid.
         Potassium                       8  UN1811                   II  8, 6.1....    IB8, IP2, IP4,  154...........  202........  243........          1 L         30 L  A             25, 26,
          hydrogendifluoride,                                                        N3, N34, T7, TP2                                                                                         40
          solution.
         Potassium             ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          hydrosulfite, see
          Potassium
          dithionite.
         Potassium hydroxide,  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          liquid, see
          Potassium hydroxide
          solution.
         Potassium hydroxide,            8  UN1813                   II  8.........     IB8, IP2, IP4  154...........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  A             .......
          solid.
         Potassium hydroxide,            8  UN1814                   II  8.........  B2, IB2, T7, TP2  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  A             .......
          solution.
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  8.........      IB3, T4, TP1  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
         Potassium             ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          hypochlorite,
          solution, see
          Hypochlorite
          solutions, etc.
         Potassium, metal              4.3  UN1420                    I  4.3.......    A19, A20, B27,  None..........  211........  244........    Forbidden        15 kg  D             .......
          alloys.                                                                            IB4, IP1
         Potassium metal,      ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          liquid alloy, see
          Alkali metal
          alloys, liquid,
          n.o.s..
         Potassium                     6.1  UN2864                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          metavanadate.
         Potassium monoxide..            8  UN2033                   II  8.........     IB8, IP2, IP4  154...........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  A             .......
         Potassium nitrate...          5.1  UN1486                  III  5.1.......     A1, A29, IB8,  152...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
                                                                                                  IP3

[[Page 235]]

 
         Potassium nitrate             5.1  UN1487                   II  5.1.......     B78, IB8, IP4  152...........  212........  240........         5 kg        25 kg  A              56, 58
          and sodium nitrite
          mixtures.
         Potassium nitrite...          5.1  UN1488                   II  5.1.......          IB8, IP4  152...........  212........  242........         5 kg        25 kg  A              56, 58
         Potassium                     5.1  UN1489                   II  5.1.......          IB6, IP2  152...........  212........  242........         5 kg        25 kg  A             56, 58,
          perchlorate, solid.                                                                                                                                                                106
         Potassium                     5.1  UN1489                   II  5.1.......      IB2, T4, TP1  152...........  202........  242........          1 L          5 L  A             56, 58,
          perchlorate,                                                                                                                                                                       106
          solution.
         Potassium                     5.1  UN1490                   II  5.1.......          IB8, IP4  152...........  212........  240........         5 kg        25 kg  D             56, 58,
          permanganate.                                                                                                                                                                      69,
                                                                                                                                                                                            106,
                                                                                                                                                                                             107
         Potassium peroxide..          5.1  UN1491                    I  5.1.......    A20, IB6, IP1,  None..........  211........  None.......    Forbidden        15 kg  B             13, 75,
                                                                                                  N34                                                                                        106
         Potassium persulfate          5.1  UN1492                  III  5.1.......     A1, A29, IB8,  152...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
                                                                                                  IP3
         Potassium phosphide.          4.3  UN2012                    I  4.3, 6.1..          A19, N40  None..........  211........  None.......    Forbidden        15 kg  E              40, 85
         Potassium selenate,   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Selenates or
          Selenites.
         Potassium selenite,   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Selenates or
          Selenites.
         Potassium sodium              4.3  UN1422                    I  4.3.......    A19, B27, IB4,  None..........  211........  244........    Forbidden        15 kg  D             .......
          alloys.                                                                      IP1, N34, N40,
                                                                                         T9, TP3, TP7
         Potassium sulfide,            4.2  UN1382                   II  4.2.......    A19, A20, B16,  None..........  212........  241........        15 kg        50 kg  A             .......
          anhydrous or                                                                  IB6, IP2, N34
          Potassium sulfide
          with less than 30
          percent water of
          crystallization.
         Potassium sulfide,              8  UN1847                   II  8.........     IB8, IP2, IP4  154...........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  A                  26
          hydrated with not
          less than 30
          percent water of
          crystallization.
         Potassium superoxide          5.1  UN2466                    I  5.1.......     A20, IB6, IP1  None..........  211........  None.......    Forbidden        15 kg  B             13, 75,
                                                                                                                                                                                             106
         Powder cake, wetted          1.1C  UN0433                   II  1.1C......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
          or Powder paste,
          wetted with not
          less than 17
          percent alcohol by
          mass.
         Powder cake, wetted          1.3C  UN0159                   II  1.3C......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
          or Powder paste,
          wetted with not
          less than 25
          percent water, by
          mass.
         Powder paste, see     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Powder cake, etc.
         Powder, smokeless...         1.1C  UN0160                   II  1.1C......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  ............      26E
         Powder, smokeless...         1.3C  UN0161                   II  1.3C......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  ............      26E
         Power device,         ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          explosive, see
          Cartridges, power
          device.
         Primers, cap type...         1.4S  UN0044                   II  None......                    None..........  62.........  None.......        25 kg       100 kg  05            .......
         Primers, cap type...         1.1B  UN0377                   II  1.1B......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  11            .......
         Primers, cap type...         1.4B  UN0378                   II  1.4B......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  06            .......

[[Page 236]]

 
         Primers, small arms,  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Primers, cap
          type.
         Primers, tubular....         1.3G  UN0319                   II  1.3G......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
         Primers, tubular....         1.4G  UN0320                   II  1.4G......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  06            .......
         Primers, tubular....         1.4S  UN0376                   II  None......                    None..........  62.........  None.......        25 kg       100 kg  05            .......
         Printing ink,                   3  UN1210                    I  3.........     T11, TP1, TP8  150...........  173........  243........          1 L         30 L  E             .......
          flammable or
          Printing ink
          related material
          (including printing
          ink thinning or
          reducing compound),
          flammable.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  3.........     IB2, T4, TP1,  150...........  173........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
                                                                                                  TP8
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  173........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Projectiles,          ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          illuminating, see
          Ammunition,
          illuminating, etc.
         Projectiles, inert           1.4S  UN0345                   II  1.4S......                     .............  62.........  None.......        25 kg       100 kg  01            .......
          with tracer.
         Projectiles, inert,          1.3G  UN0424                   II  1.3G......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  03            .......
          with tracer.
         Projectiles, inert,          1.4G  UN0425                   II  1.4G......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  02            .......
          with tracer.
         Projectiles, with            1.2D  UN0346                   II  1.2D......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  03            .......
          burster or
          expelling charge.
         Projectiles, with            1.4D  UN0347                   II  1.4D......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  02            .......
          burster or
          expelling charge.
         Projectiles, with            1.2F  UN0426                   II  1.2F......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  08            .......
          burster or
          expelling charge.
         Projectiles, with            1.4F  UN0427                   II  1.4F......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  08            .......
          burster or
          expelling charge.
         Projectiles, with            1.2G  UN0434                   II  1.2G......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  03            .......
          burster or
          expelling charge.
         Projectiles, with            1.4G  UN0435                   II  1.4G......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  02            .......
          burster or
          expelling charge.
         Projectiles, with            1.1F  UN0167                   II  1.1F......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  08            .......
          bursting charge.
         Projectiles, with            1.1D  UN0168                   II  1.1D......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  03            .......
          bursting charge.
         Projectiles, with            1.2D  UN0169                   II  1.2D......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  03            .......
          bursting charge.
         Projectiles, with            1.2F  UN0324                   II  1.2F......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  08            .......
          bursting charge.
         Projectiles, with            1.4D  UN0344                   II  1.4D......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  02            .......
          bursting charge.
         Propadiene,                   2.1  UN2200              .......  2.1.......                    None..........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden       150 kg  B                  40
          stabilized.

[[Page 237]]

 
         Propadiene mixed      ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          with methyl
          acetylene, see
          Methyl acetylene
          and propadiene
          mixtures,
          stabilized.
         Propane see also              2.1  UN1978              .......  2.1.......           19, T50  306...........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden       150 kg  E                  40
          Petroleum gases,
          liquefied.
         Propanethiols.......            3  UN2402                   II  3.........     IB2, T4, TP1,  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  E             95, 102
                                                                                                 TP13
         n-Propanol or Propyl            3  UN1274                   II  3.........  B1, IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
          alcohol, normal.
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Propellant, liquid..         1.3C  UN0495                   II  1.3C......                37  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
         Propellant, liquid..         1.1C  UN0497                   II  1.1C......                37  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
         Propellant, solid...         1.1C  UN0498                   II  1.1C......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  ............      26E
         Propellant, solid...         1.3C  UN0499                   II  1.3C......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  ............      26E
         Propellant, solid...         1.4C  UN0501              .......  1.4C......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  A                 24E
         Propionaldehyde.....            3  UN1275                   II  3.........      IB2, T7, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  E             .......
         Propionic acid......            8  UN1848                  III  8.........      IB3, T4, TP1  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
         Propionic anhydride.            8  UN2496                  III  8.........      IB3, T4, TP1  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
         Propionitrile.......            3  UN2404                   II  3, 6.1....     IB2, T7, TP1,  None..........  202........  243........    Forbidden         60 L  E                  40
                                                                                                 TP13
         Propionyl chloride..            3  UN1815                   II  3, 8......      IB1, T7, TP1  None..........  202........  243........          1 L          5 L  B                  40
         n-Propyl acetate....            3  UN1276                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         Propyl alcohol, see   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Propanol.
         n-Propyl benzene....            3  UN2364                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Propyl chloride.....            3  UN1278                   II  3.........     IB2, N34, T7,  None..........  202........  242........    Forbidden         60 L  E
                                                                                                  TP2
         n-Propyl                      6.1  UN2740                    I  6.1, 3, 8.    2, A3, A6, A7,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  B             21, 40,
          chloroformate.                                                                B9, B14, B32,                                                                                        100
                                                                                       B74, B77, N34,
                                                                                      T20, TP2, TP13,
                                                                                           TP38, TP44
         Propyl formates.....            3  UN1281                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         n-Propyl isocyanate.          6.1  UN2482                    I  6.1, 3....  1, B9, B14, B30,  None..........  226........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
                                                                                       B72, T22, TP2,
                                                                                     TP13, TP38, TP44
         Propyl mercaptan,     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Propanethiols.
         n-Propyl nitrate....            3  UN1865                   II  3.........          IB2, IP7  150...........  202........  None.......          5 L         60 L  D             .......
         Propylamine.........            3  UN1277                   II  3, 8......     IB2, N34, T7,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L          5 L  E                  40
                                                                                                  TP1
         Propylene see also            2.1  UN1077              .......  2.1.......           19, T50  306...........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden       150 kg  E                  40
          Petroleum gases,
          liquefied.
         Propylene                     6.1  UN2611                   II  6.1, 3....     IB2, T7, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A             12, 40,
          chlorohydrin.                                                                          TP13                                                                                         48
         Propylene oxide.....            3  UN1280                    I  3.........     A3, N34, T11,  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  E                  40
                                                                                             TP2, TP7
         Propylene tetramer..            3  UN2850                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......

[[Page 238]]

 
         1,2-Propylenediamine            8  UN2258                   II  8, 3......      A3, A6, IB2,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         30 L  A                  40
                                                                                         N34, T7, TP2
         Propyleneimine,                 3  UN1921                    I  3, 6.1....     A3, N34, T14,  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
          stabilized.                                                                       TP2, TP13
         Propyltrichlorosilan            8  UN1816                   II  8, 3......  A7, B2, B6, IB2,  None..........  202........  243........    Forbidden         30 L  C                  40
          e.                                                                            N34, T7, TP2,
                                                                                                 TP13
         Prussic acid, see     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Hydrogen cyanide.
         Pyrethroid                      3  UN3350                    I  3, 6.1....   T14, TP2, TP13,  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden         30 L  B                  40
          pesticide, liquid,                                                                     TP27
          flammable, toxic,
          flash point less
          than 23 degrees C.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  3, 6.1....    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                           TP13, TP27
         Pyrethroid                    6.1  UN3352                    I  6.1.......   T14, TP2, TP13,  None..........  211........  242........          1 L         30 L  A                  40
          pesticide, liquid                                                                      TP27
          toxic.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......    IB2, T11, TP2,  153...........  212........  242........          5 L         60 L  A                  40
                                                                                                 TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......     IB3, T7, TP2,  153...........  213........  240........         60 L        220 L  A                  40
                                                                                                 TP28
         Pyrethroid                    6.1  UN3351                    I  6.1, 3....   T14, TP2, TP13,  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
          pesticide, liquid,                                                                     TP27
          toxic, flammable,
          flash point not
          less than 23
          degrees C.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1, 3....    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                           TP13, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1, 3....     IB3, T7, TP2,  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  B                  40
                                                                                                 TP28
         Pyrethroid                    6.1  UN3349                    I  6.1.......          IB7, IP1  None..........  211........  242........         5 kg        50 kg  A                  40
          pesticide, solid,
          toxic.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  153...........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A                  40
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A                  40
         Pyridine............            3  UN1282                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP2  None..........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             21, 100
         Pyridine perchlorate    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
    G    Pyrophoric liquid,            4.2  UN3194                    I  4.2.......                    None..........  181........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  18
          inorganic, n.o.s..
    G    Pyrophoric liquids,           4.2  UN2845                    I  4.2.......    B11, T22, TP2,  None..........  181........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  18
          organic, n.o.s..                                                                        TP7
    G    Pyrophoric metals,            4.2  UN1383                    I  4.2.......               B11  None..........  187........  242........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             .......
          n.o.s., or
          Pyrophoric alloys,
          n.o.s..

[[Page 239]]

 
    G    Pyrophoric                    4.2  UN3203                    I  4.2, 4.3..     T21, TP2, TP7  None..........  187........  242........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  18
          organometallic
          compound, water-
          reactive, n.o.s..
    G    Pyrophoric solid,             4.2  UN3200                    I  4.2.......                    None..........  187........  242........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             .......
          inorganic, n.o.s..
    G    Pyrophoric solids,            4.2  UN2846                    I  4.2.......                    None..........  187........  242........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             .......
          organic, n.o.s..
         Pyrosulfuryl                    8  UN1817                   II  8.........      B2, IB2, T8,  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  C                  40
          chloride.                                                                         TP2, TP12
         Pyroxylin solution    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          or solvent, see
          Nitrocellulose.
         Pyrrolidine.........            3  UN1922                   II  3, 8......      IB2, T7, TP1  None..........  202........  243........          1 L          5 L  B                  40
         Quebrachitol            Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          pentanitrate.
         Quicklime, see        ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Calcium oxide.
         Quinoline...........          6.1  UN2656                  III  6.1.......      IB3, T4, TP1  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A                  12
         R 12, see             ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Dichlorodifluoromet
          hane.
         R 12B1, see           ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Chlorodifluorobromo
          methane.
         R 13, see             ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Chlorotrifluorometh
          ane.
         R 13B1, see           ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Bromotrifluorometha
          ne.
         R 14, see             ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Tetrafluoromethane.
         R 21, see             ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Dichlorofluorometha
          ne.
         R 22, see             ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Chlorodifluorometha
          ne.
         R 114, see            ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Dichlorotetrafluoro
          ethane.
         R 115, see            ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Chloropentafluoroet
          hane.
         R 116, see            ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Hexafluoroethane.
         R 124, see            ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Chlorotetrafluoroet
          hane.
         R 133a, see           ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Chlorotrifluoroetha
          ne.
         R 152a, see           ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Difluoroethane.
         R 500, see            ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Dichlorodifluoromet
          hane and
          difluorethane, etc.
         R 502, see            ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Chlorodifluorometha
          ne and
          chloropentafluoroet
          hane mixture, etc.
         R 503, see            ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Chlorotrifluorometh
          ane and
          trifluoromethane,
          etc.
    D    Radioactive                     7  UN2910              .......  None......                    422, 426......  422, 426...  422, 426...  ...........  ...........  A             .......
          material, excepted
          package-articles
          manufactured from
          natural or depleted
          uranium or natural
          thorium.

[[Page 240]]

 
    I    Radioactive                     7  UN2909              .......  None......                    422, 426......  422, 426...  422, 426...  ...........  ...........  A             .......
          material, excepted
          package-articles
          manufactured from
          natural uranium or
          depleted uranium or
          natural thorium.
    D    Radioactive                     7  UN2910              .......  Empty.....                    428...........  428........  428........  ...........  ...........  A             .......
          material, excepted
          package-empty
          package or empty
          packaging.
    I    Radioactive                     7  UN2908              .......  Empty.....                    422, 428......  422, 428...  422, 428...  ...........  ...........  A             .......
          material, excepted
          package-empty
          packaging.
    D    Radioactive                     7  UN2910              .......  None......                    422, 424......  422, 424...  422, 424...  ...........  ...........  A             .......
          material, excepted
          package-instruments
          or articles.
    I    Radioactive                     7  UN2911              .......  None......                    422, 424......  422, 424...  422, 424...  ...........  ...........  A             .......
          material, excepted
          package-instruments
          or articles.
         Radioactive                     7  UN2910              .......  None......                    421, 422......  421, 422...  421, 422...  ...........  ...........  A             .......
          material, excepted
          package-limited
          quantity of
          material.
    D    Radioactive                     7  UN2918              .......  7.........                    453...........  417........  417........  ...........  ...........  A              40, 95
          material, fissile,
          n.o.s..
    I    Radioactive                     7  UN2912              .......  7.........       T5, TP4, W7  421, 422, 428.  427........  427........  ...........  ...........  A                  95
          material, low
          specific activity
          (LSA-I) non fissile
          or fissile-excepted.
    I    Radioactive                     7  UN3321              .......  7.........       T5, TP4, W7  421, 422, 428.  427........  427........  ...........  ...........  A                  95
          material, low
          specific activity
          (LSA-II) non
          fissile or fissile-
          excepted.
    I    Radioactive                     7  UN3322              .......  7.........       T5, TP4, W7  421, 422, 428.  427........  427........  ...........  ...........  A                  95
          material, low
          specific activity
          (LSA-III) non
          fissile or fissile
          excepted.
    D    Radioactive                     7  UN2912              .......  7.........           T5, TP4  421, 428......  427........  427........  ...........  ...........  A                  95
          material, low
          specific activity,
          n.o.s. or
          Radioactive
          material, LSA,
          n.o.s..
    D    Radioactive                     7  UN2982              .......  7.........                    421, 428......  415, 416...  415, 416...  ...........  ...........  A              40, 95
          material, n.o.s..
    D    Radioactive                     7  UN2974              .......  7.........  ................  421, 424......  415, 416...  415, 416...  ...........  ...........  A                  95
          material, special
          form, n.o.s..

[[Page 241]]

 
    D    Radioactive                     7  UN2913              .......  7.........  ................  421, 424, 426.  427........  427........  ...........  ...........  A                  95
          material, surface
          contaminated object
          or Radioactive
          material, SCO.
    I    Radioactive                     7  UN2913              .......  7.........                    421, 422, 428.  427........  427........  ...........  ...........  A                  95
          material, surface
          contaminated
          objects (SCO-I or
          SCO-II) non fissile
          or fissile-excepted.
    I    Radioactive                     7  UN2919              .......  7.........               139   .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          material,
          transported under
          special
          arrangement, non
          fissile or fissile
          excepted.
    I    Radioactive                     7  UN3331              .......  7.........               139   .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          material,
          transported under
          special
          arrangement,
          fissile.
    I    Radioactive                     7  UN3327              .......  7.........            W7, W8  453...........  417........  417........  ...........  ...........  A                  95
          material, Type A
          package, fissile
          non-special form.
    I    Radioactive                     7  UN2915              .......  7.........            W7, W8   .............  415........  415........  ...........  ...........  A                  95
          material, Type A
          package non-special
          form, non fissile
          or fissile-excepted.
    I    Radioactive                     7  UN3332              .......  7.........            W7, W8   .............  415, 476...  415, 476...  ...........  ...........  A                  95
          material, Type A
          package, special
          form non fissile or
          fissile-excepted.
    I    Radioactive                     7  UN3333              .......  7.........            W7, W8  453...........  417, 476...  417, 476...  ...........  ...........  A             .......
          material, Type A
          package, special
          form, fissile.
    I    Radioactive                     7  UN3329              .......  7.........                    453...........  417........  417........  ...........  ...........  A             .......
          material, Type B(M)
          package, fissile.
    I    Radioactive                     7  UN2917              .......  7.........                     .............  416........  416........  ...........  ...........  A                  95
          material, Type B(M)
          package non fissile
          or fissile-excepted.
    I    Radioactive                     7  UN3328              .......  7.........                    453...........  417........  417........  ...........  ...........  A             .......
          material, Type B(U)
          package, fissile.
    I    Radioactive                     7  UN2916              .......  7.........                     .............  416........  416........  ...........  ...........  A                  95
          material, Type B(U)
          package non fissile
          or fissile-excepted.
    I    Radioactive                     7  UN2978              .......  7, 8......                    423...........  420, 427...  420, 427...  ...........  ...........  A                  95
          material, uranium
          hexafluoride non
          fissile or fissile-
          excepted.
    I    Radioactive                     7  UN2977              .......  7, 8......                    453...........  417, 420...  417, 420...  ...........  ...........  A             .......
          material, uranium
          hexafluoride,
          fissile.
         Railway torpedo, see  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Signals, railway
          track, explosive.
         Rare gases and                2.2  UN1981              .......  2.2.......                    306...........  302........  None.......        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
          nitrogen mixtures,
          compressed.
         Rare gases and                2.2  UN1980              .......  2.2.......                79  306...........  302........  None.......        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
          oxygen mixtures,
          compressed.
         Rare gases mixtures,          2.2  UN1979              .......  2.2.......                    306...........  302........  None.......        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
          compressed.
         RC 318, see           ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Octafluorocyclobuta
          ne.

[[Page 242]]

 
         RDX and               ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          cyclotetramethylene
          tetranitramine,
          wetted or
          desensitized see
          RDX and HMX
          mixtures, wetted or
          desensitized.
         RDX and HMX                  1.1D  UN0391                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
          mixtures, wetted
          with not less than
          15 percent water by
          mass or RDX and HMX
          mixtures,
          desensitized with
          not less than 10
          percent
          phlegmatizer by
          mass.
         RDX and Octogen       ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          mixtures, wetted or
          desensitized see
          RDX and HMX
          mixtures, wetted or
          desensitized etc.
         RDX, see              ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Cyclotrimethylene
          trinitramine, etc.
         Receptacles, small,           2.1  UN2037              .......  2.1.......                    306...........  304........  None.......         1 kg        15 kg  B                  40
          containing gas (gas
          cartridges)
          flammable, without
          release device, not
          refillable and not
          exceeding 1 L
          capacity.
         Receptacles, small,           2.2  UN2037              .......  2.2.......                    306...........  304........  None.......         1 kg        15 kg  B                  40
          containing gas (gas
          cartridges) non-
          flammable, without
          release device, not
          refillable and not
          exceeding 1 L
          capacity.
         Red phosphorus, see   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Phosphorus,
          amorphous.
         Refrigerant gas R             2.2  UN3337              .......  2.2.......               T50  306...........  304........  314, 315...        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
          404A.
         Refrigerant gas R             2.2  UN3338              .......  2.2.......               T50  306...........  304........  314, 315...        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
          407A.
         Refrigerant gas R             2.2  UN3339              .......  2.2.......               T50  306...........  304........  314, 315...        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
          407B.
         Refrigerant gas R             2.2  UN3340              .......  2.2.......               T50  306...........  304........  314, 315...        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
          407C.
    G    Refrigerant gases,            2.2  UN1078              .......  2.2.......               T50  306...........  304........  314, 315...        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
          n.o.s..

[[Page 243]]

 
    D    Refrigerant gases,            2.1  NA1954              .......  2.1.......               T50  306...........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden       150 kg  D                  40
          n.o.s. or
          Dispersant gases,
          n.o.s..
         Refrigerating                 2.1  UN3358              .......  2.1.......                    306...........  306........  306........    Forbidden    Forbidden  C                  40
          machines,
          containing
          flammable, non-
          toxic, liquefied
          gas.
         Refrigerating                 2.2  UN2857              .......  2.2.......               A53  306, 307......  306........  306, 307...       450 kg       450 kg  A             .......
          machines,
          containing non-
          flammable, non-
          toxic, liquefied
          gas or ammonia
          solution (UN2672).
         Regulated medical             6.2  UN3291                   II  6.2.......          A13, A14  134...........  197........  None.......     No limit     No limit  E             .......
          waste.
         Release devices,             1.4S  UN0173                   II  1.4S......                    None..........  62.........  None.......        25 kg       100 kg  05            .......
          explosive.
         Resin solution,                 3  UN1866                    I  3.........    B52, T11, TP1,  150...........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  E             .......
          flammable.                                                                              TP8
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  3.........     B52, IB2, T4,  150...........  173........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
                                                                                             TP1, TP8
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3.........     B1, B52, IB3,  150...........  173........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
                                                                                              T2, TP1
         Resorcinol..........          6.1  UN2876                  III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A             .......
         Rifle grenade, see    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Grenades, hand or
          rifle, etc.
         Rifle powder, see     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Powder, smokeless
          (UN 0160).
         Rivets, explosive...         1.4S  UN0174                   II  1.4S......                    None..........  62.........  None.......        25 kg       100 kg  05            .......
         Road asphalt or tar   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          liquid, see Tars,
          liquid, etc.
         Rocket motors.......         1.3C  UN0186                   II  1.3C......               109  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden       220 kg  03            .......
         Rocket motors.......         1.1C  UN0280                   II  1.1C......               109  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  03            .......
         Rocket motors.......         1.2C  UN0281                   II  1.2C......               109  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  03            .......
         Rocket motors,               1.2J  UN0395                   II  1.2J......               109  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  04                23E
          liquid fueled.
         Rocket motors,               1.3J  UN0396                   II  1.3J......               109  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  04                23E
          liquid fueled.
         Rocket motors with           1.3L  UN0250                   II  1.3L......               109  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  08                8E,
          hypergolic liquids                                                                                                                                                                14E,
          with or without an                                                                                                                                                                 15E
          expelling charge.
         Rocket motors with           1.2L  UN0322                   II  1.2L......               109  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  08                8E,
          hypergolic liquids                                                                                                                                                                14E,
          with or without an                                                                                                                                                                 15E
          expelling charge.
         Rockets, line-               1.2G  UN0238                   II  1.2G......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
          throwing.
         Rockets, line-               1.3G  UN0240                   II  1.3G......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  07            .......
          throwing.
         Rockets, line-               1.4G  UN0453                   II  1.4G......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  06            .......
          throwing.
         Rockets, liquid              1.1J  UN0397                   II  1.1J......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  04                23E
          fueled with
          bursting charge.
         Rockets, liquid              1.2J  UN0398                   II  1.2J......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  04                23E
          fueled with
          bursting charge.
         Rockets, with                1.1F  UN0180                   II  1.1F......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  08            .......
          bursting charge.
         Rockets, with                1.1E  UN0181                   II  1.1E......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  03            .......
          bursting charge.
         Rockets, with                1.2E  UN0182                   II  1.2E......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  03            .......
          bursting charge.
         Rockets, with                1.2F  UN0295                   II  1.2F......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  08            .......
          bursting charge.
         Rockets, with                1.2C  UN0436                   II  1.2C......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  03            .......
          expelling charge.
         Rockets, with                1.3C  UN0437                   II  1.3C......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  03            .......
          expelling charge.
         Rockets, with                1.4C  UN0438                   II  1.4C......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  02            .......
          expelling charge.

[[Page 244]]

 
         Rockets, with inert          1.3C  UN0183                   II  1.3C......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  03            .......
          head.
         Rockets, with inert          1.2C  UN0502              .......  1.2C......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  B              1E, 5E
          head.
         Rosin oil...........            3  UN1286                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Rubber solution.....            3  UN1287                   II  3.........     IB2, T4, TP1,  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
                                                                                                  TP8
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Rubidium............          4.3  UN1423                    I  4.3.......      22, A7, A19,  None..........  211........  242........    Forbidden        15 kg  D             .......
                                                                                       IB1, IP1, N34,
                                                                                             N40, N45
         Rubidium hydroxide..            8  UN2678                   II  8.........    IB8, IP2, IP4,  154...........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  A             .......
                                                                                              T7, TP2
         Rubidium hydroxide              8  UN2677                   II  8.........  B2, IB2, T7, TP2  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  A             .......
          solution.
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  8.........      IB3, T4, TP1  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
         Safety fuse, see      ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Fuse, safety.
    G    Samples, explosive,                UN0190                   II    ........               113  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden      Forbid-  14                12E
          other than                                                                                                                                                  den
          initiating
          explosives..
         Sand acid, see        ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Fluorosilicic acid.
         Seed cake,                    4.2  UN1386                  III  None......    IB8, IP3, IP6,  None..........  213........  241........    Forbidden    Forbidden  A                  13
          containing                                                                               N7
          vegetable oil
          solvent extractions
          and expelled seeds,
          with not more than
          10 percent of oil
          and when the amount
          of moisture is
          higher than 11
          percent, with not
          more than 20
          percent of oil and
          moisture combined.
    I    Seed cake with more           4.2  UN1386                  III  None......    IB8, IP3, IP6,  None..........  213........  241........    Forbidden    Forbidden  E                  13
          than 1.5 percent                                                                         N7
          oil and not more
          than 11 percent
          moisture.
    I    Seed cake with not            4.2  UN2217                  III  None......    IB8, IP3, IP6,  None..........  213........  241........    Forbidden    Forbidden  A                  13
          more than 1.5                                                                            N7
          percent oil and not
          more than 11
          percent moisture.
         Selenates or                  6.1  UN2630                    I  6.1.......          IB7, IP1  None..........  211........  242........         5 kg        50 kg  E             .......
          Selenites.
         Selenic acid........            8  UN1905                    I  8.........     IB7, IP1, N34  None..........  211........  242........    Forbidden        25 kg  A             .......
         Selenium compound,            6.1  UN3283                    I  6.1.......    IB7, IP1, T14,  None..........  211........  242........         5 kg        50 kg  B             .......
          n.o.s..                                                                           TP2, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......    IB8, IP2, IP4,  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  B             .......
                                                                                       T11, TP2, TP27

[[Page 245]]

 
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......     IB8, IP3, T7,  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A             .......
                                                                                            TP1, TP28
         Selenium disulfide..          6.1  UN2657                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Selenium                      2.3  UN2194              .......  2.3, 8....                 1  None..........  302........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          hexafluoride.
         Selenium nitride....    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Selenium oxychloride            8  UN2879                    I  8, 6.1....  A3, A6, A7, N34,  None..........  201........  243........        0.5 L        2.5 L  E                  40
                                                                                      T10, TP2, TP12,
                                                                                                 TP13
         Self-defense spray,   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          aerosol, see
          Aerosols, etc.
+ A D    Self-defense spray,             9  NA3334                  III  9.........               A37  155...........  203........  None.......     No limit     No limit  A             .......
          non-pressurized.
    G    Self-heating liquid,          4.2  UN3188                   II  4.2, 8....               IB2  None..........  202........  243........          1 L          5 L  C             .......
          corrosive,
          inorganic, n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.2, 8....               IB2  None..........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  C             .......
    G    Self-heating liquid,          4.2  UN3185                   II  4.2, 8....               IB2  None..........  202........  243........          1 L          5 L  C             .......
          corrosive, organic,
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.2, 8....               IB2  None..........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  C             .......
    G    Self-heating liquid,          4.2  UN3186                   II  4.2.......               IB2  None..........  202........  242........          1 L          5 L  C             .......
          inorganic, n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.2.......               IB2  None..........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  C             .......
    G    Self-heating liquid,          4.2  UN3183                   II  4.2.......               IB2  None..........  202........  242........          1 L          5 L  C             .......
          organic, n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.2.......               IB2  None..........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  C             .......
    G    Self-heating liquid,          4.2  UN3187                   II  4.2, 6.1..               IB2  None..........  202........  243........          1 L          5 L  C             .......
          toxic, inorganic,
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.2, 6.1..               IB2  None..........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  C             .......
    G    Self-heating liquid,          4.2  UN3184                   II  4.2, 6.1..               IB2  None..........  202........  243........          1 L          5 L  C             .......
          toxic, organic,
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.2, 6.1..               IB2  None..........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  C             .......
    G    Self-heating solid,           4.2  UN3192                   II  4.2, 8....          IB5, IP2  None..........  212........  242........        15 kg        50 kg  C             .......
          corrosive,
          inorganic, n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.2, 8....          IB8, IP3  None..........  213........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  C             .......
    G    Self-heating, solid,          4.2  UN3126                   II  4.2, 8....          IB5, IP2  None..........  212........  242........        15 kg        50 kg  C             .......
          corrosive, organic,
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.2, 8....          IB8, IP3  None..........  213........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  C             .......
    G    Self-heating solid,           4.2  UN3190                   II  4.2.......          IB6, IP2  None..........  212........  241........        15 kg        50 kg  C             .......
          inorganic, n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.2.......          IB8, IP3  None..........  213........  241........        25 kg       100 kg  C             .......
    G    Self-heating, solid,          4.2  UN3088                   II  4.2.......          IB6, IP2  None..........  212........  241........        15 kg        50 kg  C             .......
          organic, n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.2.......          IB8, IP3  None..........  213........  241........        25 kg       100 kg  C             .......
    G    Self-heating, solid,          4.2  UN3127              .......  4.2, 5.1..                    None..........  214........  214........    Forbidden    Forbidden  ............  .......
          oxidizing, n.o.s..
    G    Self-heating solid,           4.2  UN3191                   II  4.2, 6.1..          IB5, IP2  None..........  212........  242........        15 kg        50 kg  C             .......
          toxic, inorganic,
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.2, 6.1..          IB8, IP3  None..........  213........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  C             .......

[[Page 246]]

 
    G    Self-heating, solid,          4.2  UN3128                   II  4.2, 6.1..          IB5, IP2  None..........  212........  242........        15 kg        50 kg  C             .......
          toxic, organic,
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.2, 6.1..          IB8, IP3  None..........  213........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  C             .......
         Self-propelled        ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          vehicle, see
          Engines or
          Batteries etc.
    G    Self-reactive liquid          4.1  UN3221                   II  4.1.......                53  None..........  224........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  61
          type B.
    G    Self-reactive liquid          4.1  UN3231                   II  4.1.......                53  None..........  224........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  D               2, 61
          type B, temperature
          controlled.
    G    Self-reactive liquid          4.1  UN3223                   II  4.1.......                    None..........  224........  None.......          5 L         10 L  D                  61
          type C.
    G    Self-reactive liquid          4.1  UN3233                   II  4.1.......                    None..........  224........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  D               2, 61
          type C, temperature
          controlled.
    G    Self-reactive liquid          4.1  UN3225                   II  4.1.......                    None..........  224........  None.......          5 L         10 L  D                  61
          type D.
    G    Self-reactive liquid          4.1  UN3235                   II  4.1.......                    None..........  224........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  D               2, 61
          type D, temperature
          controlled.
    G    Self-reactive liquid          4.1  UN3227                   II  4.1.......                    None..........  224........  None.......         10 L         25 L  D                  61
          type E.
    G    Self-reactive liquid          4.1  UN3237                   II  4.1.......                    None..........  224........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  D               2, 61
          type E, temperature
          controlled.
    G    Self-reactive liquid          4.1  UN3229                   II  4.1.......                    None..........  224........  None.......         10 L         25 L  D                  61
          type F.
    G    Self-reactive liquid          4.1  UN3239                   II  4.1.......                    None..........  224........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  D               2, 61
          type F, temperature
          controlled.
    G    Self-reactive solid           4.1  UN3222                   II  4.1.......                53  None..........  224........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  61
          type B.
    G    Self-reactive solid           4.1  UN3232                   II  4.1.......                53  None..........  224........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  D               2, 61
          type B, temperature
          controlled.
    G    Self-reactive solid           4.1  UN3224                   II  4.1.......                    None..........  224........  None.......         5 kg        10 kg  D                  61
          type C.
    G    Self-reactive solid           4.1  UN3234                   II  4.1.......                    None..........  224........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  D               2, 61
          type C, temperature
          controlled.
    G    Self-reactive solid           4.1  UN3226                   II  4.1.......                    None..........  224........  None.......         5 kg        10 kg  D                  61
          type D.
    G    Self-reactive solid           4.1  UN3236                   II  4.1.......                    None..........  224........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  D               2, 61
          type D, temperature
          controlled.
    G    Self-reactive solid           4.1  UN3228                   II  4.1.......                    None..........  224........  None.......        10 kg        25 kg  D                  61
          type E.
    G    Self-reactive solid           4.1  UN3238                   II  4.1.......                    None..........  224........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  D               2, 61
          type E, temperature
          controlled.
    G    Self-reactive solid           4.1  UN3230                   II  4.1.......                    None..........  224........  None.......        10 kg        25 kg  D                  61
          type F.
    G    Self-reactive solid           4.1  UN3240                   II  4.1.......                    None..........  224........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  D               2, 61
          type F, temperature
          controlled.
         Shale oil...........            3  UN1288                    I  3.........    T11, TP1, TP8,  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  B             .......
                                                                                                 TP27

[[Page 247]]

 
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  3.........     IB2, T4, TP1,  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
                                                                                                  TP8
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Shaped charges, see   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Charges, shaped,
          etc.
         Signal devices, hand         1.4G  UN0191                   II  1.4G......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  06            .......
         Signal devices, hand         1.4S  UN0373                   II  1.4S......                    None..........  62.........  None.......        25 kg       100 kg  05            .......
         Signals, distress,           1.1G  UN0194                   II  1.1G......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
          ship.
         Signals, distress,           1.3G  UN0195                   II  1.3G......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  07            .......
          ship.
         Signals, highway,     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Signal devices,
          hand.
         Signals, railway             1.1G  UN0192                   II  1.1G......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
          track, explosive.
         Signals, railway             1.4S  UN0193                   II  1.4S......                    None..........  62.........  None.......        25 kg       100 kg  05            .......
          track, explosive.
         Signals, railway             1.3G  UN0492              .......  1.3G......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
          track, explosive.
         Signals, railway             1.4G  UN0493              .......  1.4G......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  06            .......
          track, explosive.
         Signals, ship         ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          distress, water-
          activated, see
          Contrivances, water-
          activated, etc.
         Signals, smoke......         1.1G  UN0196                   II  1.1G......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
         Signals, smoke......         1.4G  UN0197                   II  1.4G......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  06            .......
         Signals, smoke......         1.2G  UN0313                   II  1.2G......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
         Signals, smoke......         1.3G  UN0487                   II  1.3G......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
         Silane, compressed..          2.1  UN2203              .......  2.1.......                    None..........  302........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  E             40, 57,
                                                                                                                                                                                             104
         Silicofluoric acid,   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Fluorosilicic
          acid.
         Silicon chloride,     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Silicon
          tetrachloride.
         Silicon powder,               4.1  UN1346                  III  4.1.......      A1, IB8, IP3  None..........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          amorphous.
         Silicon                         8  UN1818                   II  8.........   A3, A6, B2, B6,  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  C                  40
          tetrachloride.                                                                IB2, T7, TP2,
                                                                                                  TP7
         Silicon                       2.3  UN1859              .......  2.3, 8....                 2  None..........  302........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          tetrafluoride,
          compressed.
         Silver acetylide        Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          (dry).
         Silver arsenite.....          6.1  UN1683                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Silver azide (dry)..    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Silver chlorite         Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          (dry).
         Silver cyanide......          6.1  UN1684                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A              26, 40
         Silver fulminate        Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          (dry).
         Silver nitrate......          5.1  UN1493                   II  5.1.......          IB8, IP4  152...........  212........  242........         5 kg        25 kg  A             .......
         Silver oxalate (dry)    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Silver picrate (dry)    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Silver picrate,               4.1  UN1347                    I  4.1.......                    None..........  211........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  D              28, 36
          wetted with not
          less than 30
          percent water, by
          mass.
         Sludge, acid........            8  UN1906                   II  8.........  A3, A7, B2, IB2,  None..........  202........  242........    Forbidden         30 L  C                  14
                                                                                        N34, T8, TP2,
                                                                                                 TP12
    D    Smokeless powder for          4.1  NA3178                    I  4.1.......                16  None..........  171........  None.......    Forbidden       7.3 kg  A             .......
          small arms (100
          pounds or less).

[[Page 248]]

 
         Soda lime with more             8  UN1907                  III  8.........          IB8, IP3  154...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          than 4 percent
          sodium hydroxide.
         Sodium..............          4.3  UN1428                    I  4.3.......      A7, A8, A19,  None..........  211........  244........    Forbidden        15 kg  D             .......
                                                                                        A20, B9, B48,
                                                                                       B68, IB4, IP1,
                                                                                        N34, T9, TP3,
                                                                                            TP7, TP46
         Sodium aluminate,               8  UN2812                  III  8.........          IB8, IP3  154...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          solid.
         Sodium aluminate,               8  UN1819                   II  8.........  B2, IB2, T7, TP2  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  A             .......
          solution.
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  8.........      IB3, T4, TP1  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
         Sodium aluminum               4.3  UN2835                   II  4.3.......     A8, A19, A20,  151...........  212........  242........    Forbidden        50 kg  E             .......
          hydride.                                                                                IB1
         Sodium ammonium               6.1  UN2863                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          vanadate.
         Sodium arsanilate...          6.1  UN2473                  III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A             .......
         Sodium arsenate.....          6.1  UN1685                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Sodium arsenite,              6.1  UN1686                   II  6.1.......      IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
          aqueous solutions.
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......      IB3, T4, TP2  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Sodium arsenite,              6.1  UN2027                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          solid.
         Sodium azide........          6.1  UN1687                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             36, 52,
                                                                                                                                                                                              91
         Sodium bifluoride,    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Sodium
          hydrogendifluoride.
         Sodium bisulfite,     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          solution, see
          Bisulfites, aqueous
          solutions, n.o.s..
         Sodium borohydride..          4.3  UN1426                    I  4.3.......               N40  None..........  211........  242........    Forbidden        15 kg  E             .......
         Sodium borohydride              8  UN3320                   II  8.........     B2, IB2, N34,  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  A                  26
          and sodium                                                                          T7, TP2
          hydroxide solution,
          with not more than
          12 percent sodium
          borohydride and not
          more than 40
          percent sodium
          hydroxide by mass.
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  8.........     B2, IB3, N34,  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
                                                                                              T4, TP2
         Sodium bromate......          5.1  UN1494                   II  5.1.......          IB8, IP4  152...........  212........  242........         5 kg        25 kg  A             56, 58,
                                                                                                                                                                                             106
         Sodium cacodylate...          6.1  UN1688                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A                  26

[[Page 249]]

 
         Sodium chlorate.....          5.1  UN1495                   II  5.1.......     A9, IB8, IP4,  152...........  212........  240........         5 kg        25 kg  A             56, 58,
                                                                                         N34, T4, TP1                                                                                        106
         Sodium chlorate,              5.1  UN2428                   II  5.1.......  A2, IB2, T4, TP1  152...........  202........  241........          1 L          5 L  B             56, 58,
          aqueous solution.                                                                                                                                                                  106
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  5.1.......  A2, IB2, T4, TP1  152...........  203........  241........        2.5 L         30 L  B             56, 58,
                                                                                                                                                                                         69, 106
         Sodium chlorate       ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          mixed with
          dinitrotoluene, see
          Explosive blasting,
          type C.
         Sodium chlorite.....          5.1  UN1496                   II  5.1.......     A9, IB8, IP2,  None..........  212........  242........         5 kg        25 kg  A             56, 58,
                                                                                        IP4, N34, T4,                                                                                        106
                                                                                                  TP1
         Sodium chloroacetate          6.1  UN2659                  III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A             .......
         Sodium cuprocyanide,          6.1  UN2316                    I  6.1.......          IB7, IP1  None..........  211........  242........         5 kg        50 kg  A                  26
          solid.
         Sodium cuprocyanide,          6.1  UN2317                    I  6.1.......    T14, TP2, TP13  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  B              26, 40
          solution.
         Sodium cyanide......          6.1  UN1689                    I  6.1.......    B69, B77, IB7,  None..........  211........  242........         5 kg        50 kg  B                  52
                                                                                       IP1, N74, N75,
                                                                                       T14, TP2, TP13
         Sodium                ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          dichloroisocyanurat
          e or Sodium
          dichloro-s-
          triazinetrione, see
          Dichloroisocyanuric
          acid etc.
         Sodium dinitro-o-            1.3C  UN0234                   II  1.3C......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10                 5E
          cresolate, dry or
          wetted with less
          than 15 percent
          water, by mass.
         Sodium dinitro-o-             4.1  UN1348                    I  4.1, 6.1..      23, A8, A19,  None..........  211........  None.......         1 kg        15 kg  E              28, 36
          cresolate, wetted                                                                  A20, N41
          with not less than
          15 percent water,
          by mass.
         Sodium dithionite or          4.2  UN1384                   II  4.2.......    A19, A20, IB6,  None..........  212........  241........        15 kg        50 kg  E                  13
          Sodium hydrosulfite.                                                                    IP2
         Sodium fluoride.....          6.1  UN1690                  III  6.1.......     IB8, IP3, T4,  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A                  26
                                                                                                  TP1
         Sodium fluoroacetate          6.1  UN2629                    I  6.1.......          IB7, IP1  None..........  211........  242........         5 kg        50 kg  E             .......
         Sodium                        6.1  UN2674                  III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A                  26
          fluorosilicate.
         Sodium hydrate, see   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Sodium hydroxide,
          solid.
         Sodium hydride......          4.3  UN1427                    I  4.3.......          A19, N40  None..........  211........  242........    Forbidden        15 kg  E             .......
         Sodium                          8  UN2439                   II  8.........    IB8, IP2, IP4,  154...........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  A             12, 25,
          hydrogendifluoride,                                                                 N3, N34                                                                                     26, 40
          solid.
         Sodium                          8  UN2439                   II  8.........    IB8, IP2, IP4,  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  A             12, 25,
          hydrogendifluoride                                                                  N3, N34                                                                                     26, 40
          solution.
         Sodium hydrosulfide,          4.2  UN2318                   II  4.2.......     A7, A19, A20,  None..........  212........  241........        15 kg        50 kg  A             .......
          with less than 25                                                                  IB6, IP2
          percent water of
          crystallization.
         Sodium hydrosulfide             8  UN2949                   II  8.........     A7, IB8, IP2,  154...........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  A                  26
          with not less than                                                             IP4, T7, TP2
          25 percent water of
          crystallization.
         Sodium hydrosulfite,  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Sodium
          dithionite.
         Sodium hydroxide,               8  UN1823                   II  8.........     IB8, IP2, IP4  154...........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  A             .......
          solid.
         Sodium hydroxide                8  UN1824                   II  8.........     B2, IB2, N34,  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  A             .......
          solution.                                                                           T7, TP2

[[Page 250]]

 
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  8.........     IB3, N34, T4,  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
                                                                                                  TP1
         Sodium hypochlorite,  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          solution, see
          Hypochlorite
          solutions etc.
         Sodium metal, liquid  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          alloy, see Alkali
          metal alloys,
          liquid, n.o.s..
         Sodium methylate....          4.2  UN1431                   II  4.2, 8....     A19, IB5, IP2  None..........  212........  242........        15 kg        50 kg  B             .......
         Sodium methylate                3  UN1289                   II  3, 8......     IB2, T7, TP1,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L          5 L  B             .......
          solutions in                                                                            TP8
          alcohol.
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3, 8......  B1, IB3, T4, TP1  150...........  203........  242........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
         Sodium monoxide.....            8  UN1825                   II  8.........     IB8, IP2, IP4  154...........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  A             .......
         Sodium nitrate......          5.1  UN1498                  III  5.1.......     A1, A29, IB8,  152...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
                                                                                                  IP3
         Sodium nitrate and            5.1  UN1499                  III  5.1.......     A1, A29, IB8,  152...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          potassium nitrate                                                                       IP3
          mixtures.
         Sodium nitrite......          5.1  UN1500                  III  5.1, 6.1..     A1, A29, IB8,  152...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A              56, 58
                                                                                                  IP3
         Sodium                        6.1  UN2567                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          pentachlorophenate.
         Sodium perchlorate..          5.1  UN1502                   II  5.1.......          IB6, IP2  152...........  212........  242........         5 kg        25 kg  A             56, 58,
                                                                                                                                                                                             106
         Sodium permanganate.          5.1  UN1503                   II  5.1.......          IB6, IP2  152...........  212........  242........         5 kg        25 kg  D             56, 58,
                                                                                                                                                                                             69,
                                                                                                                                                                                            106,
                                                                                                                                                                                             107
         Sodium peroxide.....          5.1  UN1504                    I  5.1.......    A20, IB6, IP1,  None..........  211........  None.......    Forbidden        15 kg  B             13, 75,
                                                                                                  N34                                                                                        106
         Sodium peroxoborate,          5.1  UN3247                   II  5.1.......          IB8, IP4  152...........  212........  240........         5 kg        25 kg  A             13, 25,
          anhydrous.                                                                                                                                                                         106
         Sodium persulfate...          5.1  UN1505                  III  5.1.......      A1, IB8, IP3  152...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Sodium phosphide....          4.3  UN1432                    I  4.3, 6.1..          A19, N40  None..........  211........  None.......    Forbidden        15 kg  E              40, 85
         Sodium picramate,            1.3C  UN0235                   II  1.3C......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10                 5E
          dry or wetted with
          less than 20
          percent water, by
          mass.
         Sodium picramate,             4.1  UN1349                    I  4.1.......  23, A8, A19, N41  None..........  211........  None.......    Forbidden        15 kg  E              28, 36
          wetted with not
          less than 20
          percent water, by
          mass.
         Sodium picryl           Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          peroxide.

[[Page 251]]

 
         Sodium potassium      ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          alloys, see
          Potassium sodium
          alloys.
         Sodium selenate, see  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Selenates or
          Selenites.
         Sodium sulfide,               4.2  UN1385                   II  4.2.......    A19, A20, IB6,  None..........  212........  241........        15 kg        50 kg  A             .......
          anhydrous or Sodium                                                                IP2, N34
          sulfide with less
          than 30 percent
          water of
          crystallization.
         Sodium sulfide,                 8  UN1849                   II  8.........    IB8, IP2, IP4,  154...........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  A                  26
          hydrated with not                                                                   T7, TP2
          less than30 percent
          water.
         Sodium superoxide...          5.1  UN2547                    I  5.1.......    A20, IB6, IP1,  None..........  211........  None.......    Forbidden        15 kg  E             13, 75,
                                                                                                  N34                                                                                        106
         Sodium tetranitride.    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
    G    Solids containing               8  UN3244                   II  8.........           49, IB5  154...........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  B                  40
          corrosive liquid,
          n.o.s..
    G    Solids containing             4.1  UN3175                   II  4.1.......      47, IB6, IP2  151...........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  B             .......
          flammable liquid,
          n.o.s..
    G    Solids containing             6.1  UN3243                   II  6.1.......           48, IB2  None..........  212........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  B                  40
          toxic liquid,
          n.o.s..
         Sounding devices,            1.2F  UN0204                   II  1.2F......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  08            .......
          explosive.
         Sounding devices,            1.1F  UN0296                   II  1.1F......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  08            .......
          explosive.
         Sounding devices,            1.1D  UN0374                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
          explosive.
         Sounding devices,            1.2D  UN0375                   II  1.2D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
          explosive.
         Spirits of salt, see  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Hydrochloric acid.
         Squibs, see Igniters  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          etc.
         Stannic chloride,               8  UN1827                   II  8.........  B2, IB2, T7, TP2  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  C             .......
          anhydrous.
         Stannic chloride                8  UN2440                  III  8.........          IB8, IP3  154...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          pentahydrate.
         Stannic phosphide...          4.3  UN1433                    I  4.3, 6.1..          A19, N40  None..........  211........  242........    Forbidden        15 kg  E              40, 85
         Steel swarf, see      ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Ferrous metal
          borings, etc.
         Stibine.............          2.3  UN2676              .......  2.3, 2.1..                 1  None..........  304........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
         Storage batteries,    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          wet, see Batteries,
          wet etc.
         Strontium arsenite..          6.1  UN1691                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Strontium chlorate..          5.1  UN1506                   II  5.1.......      A1, A9, IB8,  152...........  212........  242........         5 kg        25 kg  A             56, 58,
                                                                                        IP2, IP4, N34                                                                                        106
         Strontium nitrate...          5.1  UN1507                  III  5.1.......     A1, A29, IB8,  152...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
                                                                                                  IP3
         Strontium                     5.1  UN1508                   II  5.1.......          IB6, IP2  152...........  212........  242........         5 kg        25 kg  A             56, 58,
          perchlorate.                                                                                                                                                                       106
         Strontium peroxide..          5.1  UN1509                   II  5.1.......          IB6, IP2  152...........  212........  242........         5 kg        25 kg  A             13, 75,
                                                                                                                                                                                             106
         Strontium phosphide.          4.3  UN2013                    I  4.3, 6.1..          A19, N40  None..........  211........  None.......    Forbidden        15 kg  E              40, 85
         Strychnine or                 6.1  UN1692                    I  6.1.......          IB7, IP1  None..........  211........  242........         5 kg        50 kg  A                  40
          Strychnine salts.
         Styphnic acid, see    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Trinitroresorcinol,
          etc.
         Styrene monomer,                3  UN2055                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
          stabilized.

[[Page 252]]

 
    G    Substances,                  1.1L  UN0357                   II  1.1L......               101  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  ............      8E,
          explosive, n.o.s..                                                                                                                                                                14E,
                                                                                                                                                                                            15E,
                                                                                                                                                                                             17E
    G    Substances,                  1.2L  UN0358                   II  1.2L......               101  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  ............      8E,
          explosive, n.o.s..                                                                                                                                                                14E,
                                                                                                                                                                                            15E,
                                                                                                                                                                                             17E
    G    Substances,                  1.3L  UN0359                   II  1.3L......               101  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  ............      8E,
          explosive, n.o.s..                                                                                                                                                                14E,
                                                                                                                                                                                            15E,
                                                                                                                                                                                             17E
    G    Substances,                  1.1A  UN0473                   II  1.1A......          101, 111  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  12            .......
          explosive, n.o.s..
    G    Substances,                  1.1C  UN0474                   II  1.1C......               101  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
          explosive, n.o.s..
    G    Substances,                  1.1D  UN0475                   II  1.1D......               101  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
          explosive, n.o.s..
    G    Substances,                  1.1G  UN0476                   II  1.1G......               101  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  08            .......
          explosive, n.o.s..
    G    Substances,                  1.3C  UN0477                   II  1.3C......               101  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
          explosive, n.o.s..
    G    Substances,                  1.3G  UN0478                   II  1.3G......               101  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  08            .......
          explosive, n.o.s..
    G    Substances,                  1.4C  UN0479                   II  1.4C......               101  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  09            .......
          explosive, n.o.s..
    G    Substances,                  1.4D  UN0480                   II  1.4D......               101  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  09
          explosive, n.o.s..
    G    Substances,                  1.4S  UN0481                   II  1.4S......               101  None..........  62.........  None.......        25 kg        75 kg  05            .......
          explosive, n.o.s..
    G    Substances,                  1.4G  UN0485                   II  1.4G......               101  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  08            .......
          explosive, n.o.s..
    G    Substances,                  1.5D  UN0482                   II  1.5D......               101  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
          explosive, very
          insensitive,
          n.o.s., or
          Substances, EVI,
          n.o.s..
         Substituted                     3  UN2780                    I  3, 6.1....   T14, TP2, TP13,  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden         30 L  B                  40
          nitrophenol                                                                            TP27
          pesticides, liquid,
          flammable, toxic,
          flash point less
          than 23 degrees C.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  3, 6.1....    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                           TP13, TP27
         Substituted                   6.1  UN3014                    I  6.1.......   T14, TP2, TP13,  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
          nitrophenol                                                                            TP27
          pesticides, liquid,
          toxic.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                           TP13, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......     IB3, T7, TP2,  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A                  40
                                                                                                 TP28

[[Page 253]]

 
         Substituted                   6.1  UN3013                    I  6.1, 3....   T14, TP2, TP13,  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
          nitrophenol                                                                            TP27
          pesticides, liquid,
          toxic, flammable
          flash point not
          less than 23
          degrees C.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1, 3....    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                           TP13, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1, 3....      B1, IB3, T7,  153...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A                  40
                                                                                            TP2, TP28
         Substituted                   6.1  UN2779                    I  6.1.......          IB7, IP1  None..........  211........  242........         5 kg        50 kg  A                  40
          nitrophenol
          pesticides, solid,
          toxic.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A                  40
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A                  40
         Sucrose octanitrate     Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          (dry).
         Sulfamic acid.......            8  UN2967                  III  8.........          IB8, IP3  154...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
    D    Sulfur..............            9  NA1350                  III  9.........      30, IB8, IP2  None..........  None.......  240........     No limit     No limit  A              19, 74
    I    Sulfur..............          4.1  UN1350                  III  4.1.......     30, IB8, IP3,  None..........  None.......  240........     No limit     No limit  A              19, 74
                                                                                              T1, TP1
         Sulfur and chlorate,    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          loose mixtures of.
         Sulfur chlorides....            8  UN1828                    I  8.........  5, A3, B10, B77,  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden        2.5 L  C                  40
                                                                                       N34, T20, TP2,
                                                                                                 TP12
         Sulfur dichloride,    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Sulfur
          chlorides.
         Sulfur dioxide......          2.3  UN1079              .......  2.3, 8....      3, B14, T50,  None..........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden        25 kg  D                  40
                                                                                                 TP19
         Sulfur dioxide        ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          solution, see
          Sulfurous acid.
         Sulfur hexafluoride.          2.2  UN1080              .......  2.2.......                    306...........  304........  314, 315...        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
    D    Sulfur, molten......            9  NA2448                  III  9.........      IB3, T1, TP3  None..........  213........  247........    Forbidden    Forbidden  C                  61
    I    Sulfur, molten......          4.1  UN2448                  III  4.1.......      IB1, T1, TP3  None..........  213........  247........    Forbidden    Forbidden  C                  61
         Sulfur tetrafluoride          2.3  UN2418              .......  2.3, 8....                 1  None..........  302........  245........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
    +    Sulfur trioxide,                8  UN1829                    I  8, 6.1....   2, A7, B9, B14,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  A                  40
          stabilized.                                                                  B32, B49, B74,
                                                                                       B77, N34, T20,
                                                                                     TP4, TP12, TP13,
                                                                                          TP25, TP26,
                                                                                           TP38, TP45
         Sulfuretted           ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          hydrogen, see
          Hydrogen sulfide.
         Sulfuric acid,                  8  UN1831                    I  8.........      A3, A7, B84,  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden        2.5 L  C              14, 40
          fuming with less                                                             N34, T20, TP2,
          than 30 percent                                                                  TP12, TP13
          free sulfur
          trioxide.
    +    Sulfuric acid,                  8  UN1831                    I  8, 6.1....    2, A3, A6, A7,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  C              14, 40
          fuming with 30                                                                B9, B14, B32,
          percent or more                                                              B74, B77, B84,
          free sulfur                                                                  N34, T20, TP2,
          trioxide.                                                                        TP12, TP13

[[Page 254]]

 
         Sulfuric acid, spent            8  UN1832                   II  8.........  A3, A7, B2, B83,  None..........  202........  242........    Forbidden         30 L  C                  14
                                                                                       B84, IB2, N34,
                                                                                        T8, TP2, TP12
         Sulfuric acid with              8  UN1830                   II  8.........  A3, A7, B3, B83,  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  C                  14
          more than 51                                                                 B84, IB2, N34,
          percent acid.                                                                 T8, TP2, TP12
         Sulfuric acid with              8  UN2796                   II  8.........  A3, A7, B2, B15,  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  B             .......
          not more than 51%                                                             IB2, N6, N34,
          acid.                                                                         T8, TP2, TP12
         Sulfuric and          ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          hydrofluoric acid
          mixtures, see
          Hydrofluoric and
          sulfuric acid
          mixtures.
         Sulfuric anhydride,   ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Sulfur
          trioxide,
          stabilized.
         Sulfurous acid......            8  UN1833                   II  8.........  B3, IB2, T7, TP2  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
    +    Sulfuryl chloride...            8  UN1834                    I  8, 6.1....    1, A3, B6, B9,  None..........  226........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  C                  40
                                                                                       B10, B14, B30,
                                                                                       B74, B77, N34,
                                                                                      T22, TP2, TP12,
                                                                                           TP38, TP44
         Sulfuryl fluoride...          2.3  UN2191              .......  2.3.......                 4  None..........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden        25 kg  D                  40
         Tars, liquid                    3  UN1999                   II  3.........     B13, IB2, T3,  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
          including road                                                                    TP3, TP29
          asphalt and oils,
          bitumen and cut
          backs.
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3.........     B1, B13, IB3,  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
                                                                                              T1, TP3
         Tear gas candles....          6.1  UN1700                   II  6.1, 4.1..                    None..........  340........  None.......    Forbidden        50 kg  D                  40
         Tear gas cartridges,  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Ammunition,
          tear-producing, etc.
    D    Tear gas devices              6.1  NA1693                    I  6.1.......                    None..........  340........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          with more than 2
          percent tear gas
          substances, by mass.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......                    None..........  340........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
         Tear gas devices,     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          with not more than
          2 percent tear gas
          substances, by
          mass, see Aerosols,
          etc.

[[Page 255]]

 
         Tear gas grenades,    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Tear gas
          candles.
    G    Tear gas substances,          6.1  UN1693                    I  6.1.......                    None..........  201........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          liquid, n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......               IB2  None..........  202........  None.......    Forbidden          5 L  D                  40
    G    Tear gas substances,          6.1  UN1693                    I  6.1.......                    None..........  211........  None.......    Forbidden        15 kg  D                  40
          solid, n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  None.......    Forbidden        25 kg  D                  40
         Tellurium compound,           6.1  UN3284                    I  6.1.......    IB7, IP1, T14,  None..........  211........  242........         5 kg        50 kg  B             .......
          n.o.s..                                                                           TP2, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......    IB8, IP2, IP4,  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  B             .......
                                                                                       T11, TP2, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......     IB8, IP3, T7,  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A             .......
                                                                                            TP1, TP28
         Tellurium                     2.3  UN2195              .......  2.3, 8....                 1  None..........  302........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          hexafluoride.
         Terpene                         3  UN2319                  III  3.........      B1, IB3, T4,  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
          hydrocarbons,                                                                     TP1, TP29
          n.o.s..
         Terpinolene.........            3  UN2541                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Tetraazido benzene      Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          quinone.
         Tetrabromoethane....          6.1  UN2504                  III  6.1.......      IB3, T4, TP1  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Tetrachloroethane...          6.1  UN1702                   II  6.1.......     IB2, N36, T7,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A                  40
                                                                                                  TP2
         Tetrachloroethylene.          6.1  UN1897                  III  6.1.......     IB3, N36, T4,  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A                  40
                                                                                                  TP1
         Tetraethyl                    6.1  UN1704                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  D                  40
          dithiopyrophosphate.
         Tetraethyl silicate.            3  UN1292                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Tetraethylammonium      Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          perchlorate (dry).
         Tetraethylenepentami            8  UN2320                  III  8.........      IB3, T4, TP1  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
          ne.
         1,1,1,2-                      2.2  UN3159              .......  2.2.......               T50  306...........  304........  314, 315...        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
          Tetrafluoroethane
          or Refrigerant gas
          R 134a.
         Tetrafluoroethylene,          2.1  UN1081              .......  2.1.......                    306...........  304........  None.......    Forbidden       150 kg  E                  40
          stabilized.
         Tetrafluoromethane,           2.2  UN1982              .......  2.2.......                    None..........  302........  None.......        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
          compressed or
          Refrigerant gas R
          14.
         1,2,3,6-                        3  UN2498                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
          Tetrahydrobenzaldeh
          yde.
         Tetrahydrofuran.....            3  UN2056                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  None..........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         Tetrahydrofurfurylam            3  UN2943                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
          ine.
         Tetrahydrophthalic              8  UN2698                  III  8.........          IB8, IP3  154...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          anhydrides with
          more than 0.05
          percent of maleic
          anhydride.
         1,2,3,6-                        3  UN2410                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
          Tetrahydropyridine.
         Tetrahydrothiophene.            3  UN2412                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         Tetramethylammonium             8  UN1835                   II  8.........  B2, IB2, T7, TP2  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  A             .......
          hydroxide.
         Tetramethylene          Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          diperoxide
          dicarbamide.
         Tetramethylsilane...            3  UN2749                    I  3.........          T14, TP2  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden         30 L  D             .......
         Tetranitro              Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          diglycerin.
         Tetranitroaniline...         1.1D  UN0207                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......

[[Page 256]]

 
    +    Tetranitromethane...          5.1  UN1510                    I  5.1, 6.1..  2, B9, B14, B32,  None..........  227........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             40, 66,
                                                                                       B74, T20, TP2,                                                                                        106
                                                                                     TP13, TP38, TP44
         2,3,4,6-                Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Tetranitrophenol.
         2,3,4,6-                Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Tetranitrophenyl
          methyl nitramine.
         2,3,4,6-                Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Tetranitrophenylnit
          ramine.
         Tetranitroresorcinol    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          (dry).
         2,3,5,6-Tetranitroso-   Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          1,4-dinitrobenzene.
         2,3,5,6-Tetranitroso    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          nitrobenzene (dry).
         Tetrapropylorthotita            3  UN2413                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T4, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
          nate.
         Tetrazene, see        ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Guanyl
          nitrosaminoguanylte
          trazene.
         Tetrazine (dry).....    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Tetrazol-1-acetic            1.4C  UN0407                   II  1.4C......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  09            .......
          acid.
         1H-Tetrazole........         1.1D  UN0504              .......  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  B              1E, 5E
         Tetrazolyl azide        Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          (dry).
         Tetryl, see           ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Trinitrophenylmethy
          lnitramine.
         Thallium chlorate...          5.1  UN2573                   II  5.1, 6.1..          IB6, IP2  None..........  212........  242........         5 kg        25 kg  A             56, 58,
                                                                                                                                                                                             106
         Thallium compounds,           6.1  UN1707                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          n.o.s..
         Thallium nitrate....          6.1  UN2727                   II  6.1, 5.1..          IB6, IP2  None..........  212........  242........         5 kg        25 kg  A             .......
         4-Thiapentanal......          6.1  UN2785                  III  6.1.......      IB3, T4, TP1  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  D              25, 49
         Thioacetic acid.....            3  UN2436                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         Thiocarbamate                   3  UN2772                    I  3, 6.1....   T14, TP2, TP13,  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden         30 L  B                  40
          pesticide, liquid,                                                                     TP27
          flammable, toxic,
          flash point less
          than 23 degrees C.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  3, 6.1....   IB2, T11, TP13,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                                 TP27
         Thiocarbamate                 6.1  UN3005                    I  6.1, 3....    T14, TP2, TP13  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
          pesticide, liquid,
          toxic, flammable,
          flash point not
          less than 23
          degrees C.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1, 3....    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                           TP13, TP27

[[Page 257]]

 
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1, 3....     IB3, T7, TP2,  153...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A                  40
                                                                                                 TP28
         Thiocarbamate                 6.1  UN3006                    I  6.1.......    T14, TP2, TP13  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
          pesticide, liquid,
          toxic.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                           TP13, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......     IB3, T7, TP2,  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A                  40
                                                                                                 TP28
         Thiocarbamate                 6.1  UN2771                    I  6.1.......          IB7, IP1  None..........  211........  242........         5 kg        50 kg  A                  40
          pesticides, solid,
          toxic.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A                  40
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A                  40
         Thiocarbonylchloride  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          , see Thiophosgene.
         Thioglycol..........          6.1  UN2966                   II  6.1.......      IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
         Thioglycolic acid...            8  UN1940                   II  8.........      A7, B2, IB2,  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  A             .......
                                                                                         N34, T7, TP2
         Thiolactic acid.....          6.1  UN2936                   II  6.1.......      IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
         Thionyl chloride....            8  UN1836                    I  8.........      A7, B6, B10,  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden    Forbidden  C                  40
                                                                                       N34, T10, TP2,
                                                                                           TP12, TP13
         Thiophene...........            3  UN2414                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
    +    Thiophosgene........          6.1  UN2474                   II  6.1.......   2, A7, B9, B14,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  B              26, 40
                                                                                       B32, B74, N33,
                                                                                       N34, T20, TP2,
                                                                                           TP38, TP45
         Thiophosphoryl                  8  UN1837                   II  8.........   A3, A7, B2, B8,  None..........  202........  242........    Forbidden         30 L  C                  40
          chloride.                                                                    B25, IB2, N34,
                                                                                              T7, TP2
         Thiourea dioxide....          4.2  UN3341                   II  4.2.......          IB6, IP2  None..........  212........  241........        15 kg        50 kg  D             .......
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.2.......          IB8, IP3  None..........  213........  241........        25 kg       100 kg  D             .......
    D    Thorium metal,                  7  UN2975              .......  7, 4.2....  ................  None..........  418........  None.......    Forbidden      Forbid-  D                  95
          pyrophoric.                                                                                                                                                 den
    D    Thorium nitrate,                7  UN2976              .......  7, 5.1....  ................  None..........  419........  None.......    Forbidden        15 kg  A                  95
          solid.
         Tin chloride,         ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          fuming, see Stannic
          chloride, anhydrous.
         Tin perchloride or    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Tin tetrachloride,
          see Stannic
          chloride, anhydrous.
         Tinctures, medicinal            3  UN1293                   II  3.........     IB2, T4, TP1,  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
                                                                                                  TP8
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Tinning flux, see     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Zinc chloride.
         Titanium disulphide.          4.2  UN3174                  III  4.2.......          IB8, IP3  None..........  213........  241........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Titanium hydride....          4.1  UN1871                   II  4.1.......    A19, A20, IB4,  None..........  212........  241........        15 kg        50 kg  E             .......
                                                                                                  N34
         Titanium powder, dry          4.2  UN2546                    I  4.2.......                    None..........  211........  242........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             .......
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  4.2.......    A19, A20, IB6,  None..........  212........  241........        15 kg        50 kg  D             .......
                                                                                         IP2, N5, N34
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.2.......          IB8, IP3  None..........  213........  241........        25 kg       100 kg  D             .......

[[Page 258]]

 
         Titanium powder,              4.1  UN1352                   II  4.1.......    A19, A20, IB6,  None..........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  E             .......
          wetted with not                                                                    IP2, N34
          less than 25
          percent water (a
          visible excess of
          water must be
          present) (a)
          mechanically
          produced, particle
          size less than 53
          microns; (b)
          chemically
          produced, particle
          size less than 840
          microns.
         Titanium sponge               4.1  UN2878                  III  4.1.......      A1, IB8, IP3  None..........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  D             .......
          granules or
          Titanium sponge
          powders.
    +    Titanium                        8  UN1838                   II  8, 6.1....    2, A3, A6, B7,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  C                  40
          tetrachloride.                                                                B9, B14, B32,
                                                                                       B74, B77, T20,
                                                                                     TP2, TP13, TP38,
                                                                                                 TP45
         Titanium trichloride            8  UN2869                   II  8.........     A7, IB8, IP2,  154...........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  A                  40
          mixtures.                                                                          IP4, N34
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  8.........     A7, IB8, IP3,  154...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A                  40
                                                                                                  N34
         Titanium                      4.2  UN2441                    I  4.2, 8....      A7, A8, A19,  None..........  181........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          trichloride,                                                                       A20, N34
          pyrophoric or
          Titanium
          trichloride
          mixtures,
          pyrophoric.
         TNT mixed with        ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          aluminum, see
          Tritonal.
         TNT, see              ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Trinitrotoluene,
          etc.
         Toluene.............            3  UN1294                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
    +    Toluene diisocyanate          6.1  UN2078                   II  6.1.......     IB2, T7, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  D              25, 40
                                                                                                 TP13
         Toluene sulfonic      ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          acid, see Alkyl, or
          Aryl sulfonic acid
          etc.
    +    Toluidines liquid...          6.1  UN1708                   II  6.1.......      IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
    +    Toluidines solid....          6.1  UN1708                   II  6.1.......    IB8, IP2, IP4,  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
                                                                                              T7, TP2
         2,4-Toluylenediamine          6.1  UN1709                  III  6.1.......     IB8, IP3, T4,  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A             .......
          or 2,4-                                                                                 TP1
          Toluenediamine.
         Torpedoes, liquid            1.3J  UN0450                   II  1.3J......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  04                23E
          fueled, with inert
          head.
         Torpedoes, liquid            1.1J  UN0449                   II  1.1J......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  04                23E
          fueled, with or
          without bursting
          charge.

[[Page 259]]

 
         Torpedoes with               1.1E  UN0329                   II  1.1E......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  03            .......
          bursting charge.
         Torpedoes with               1.1F  UN0330                   II  1.1F......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  08            .......
          bursting charge.
         Torpedoes with               1.1D  UN0451                   II  1.1D......                     .............  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  03            .......
          bursting charge.
    G    Toxic liquid,                 6.1  UN3289                    I  6.1, 8....   T14, TP2, TP13,  None..........  201........  243........        0.5 L        2.5 L  A             .......
          corrosive,                                                                             TP27
          inorganic, n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1, 8....    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         30 L  A             .......
                                                                                                 TP27
    G    Toxic liquid,                 6.1  UN3289                    I  6.1, 8....  1, B9, B14, B30,  None..........  226........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  B                  40
          corrosive,                                                                   B72, T22, TP2,
          inorganic, n.o.s.                                                               TP13, TP27,
          Inhalation Hazard,                                                               TP38, TP44
          Packing Group I,
          Zone A.
    G    Toxic liquid,                 6.1  UN3289                    I  6.1, 8....  2, B9, B14, B32,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  B                  40
          corrosive,                                                                   B74, T20, TP2,
          inorganic, n.o.s.                                                               TP13, TP27,
          Inhalation Hazard,                                                               TP38, TP45
          Packing Group I,
          Zone B.
    G    Toxic liquid,                 6.1  UN3287                    I  6.1.......   T14, TP2, TP13,  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  A             .......
          inorganic, n.o.s..                                                                     TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
                                                                                                 TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......     IB3, T7, TP1,  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
                                                                                                 TP28
    G    Toxic liquid,                 6.1  UN3287                    I  6.1.......  1, B9, B14, B30,  None..........  226........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  B                  40
          inorganic, n.o.s.                                                            B72, T22, TP2,
          Inhalation Hazard,                                                              TP13, TP27,
          Packing Group I,                                                                 TP38, TP44
          Zone A.
    G    Toxic liquid,                 6.1  UN3287                    I  6.1.......  2, B9, B14, B32,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  B                  40
          inorganic, n.o.s.                                                            B74, T20, TP2,
          Inhalation Hazard,                                                              TP13, TP27,
          Packing Group I,                                                                 TP38, TP45
          Zone B.
    G    Toxic liquids,                6.1  UN2927                    I  6.1, 8....   T14, TP2, TP13,  None..........  201........  243........        0.5 L        2.5 L  B                  40
          corrosive, organic,                                                                    TP27
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1, 8....    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
                                                                                                 TP27
    G    Toxic liquids,                6.1  UN2927                    I  6.1, 8....  1, B9, B14, B30,  None..........  226........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          corrosive, organic,                                                          B72, T22, TP2,
          n.o.s., inhalation                                                              TP13, TP27,
          hazard, Packing                                                                  TP38, TP44
          Group I, Zone A.
    G    Toxic liquids,                6.1  UN2927                    I  6.1, 8....  2, B9, B14, B32,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          corrosive, organic,                                                          B74, T20, TP2,
          n.o.s., inhalation                                                              TP13, TP27,
          hazard, Packing                                                                  TP38, TP45
          Group I, Zone B.
    G    Toxic liquids,                6.1  UN2929                    I  6.1, 3....   T14, TP2, TP13,  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
          flammable, organic,                                                                    TP27
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1, 3....    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                           TP13, TP27
    G    Toxic liquids,                6.1  UN2929                    I  6.1, 3....  1, B9, B14, B30,  None..........  226........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          flammable, organic,                                                          B72, T22, TP2,
          n.o.s., inhalation                                                              TP13, TP27,
          hazard, Packing                                                                  TP38, TP44
          Group I, Zone A.

[[Page 260]]

 
    G    Toxic liquids,                6.1  UN2929                    I  6.1, 3....  2, B9, B14, B32,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          flammable, organic,                                                          B74, T20, TP2,
          n.o.s., inhalation                                                              TP13, TP27,
          hazard, Packing                                                                  TP38, TP45
          Group I, Zone B.
    G    Toxic, liquids,               6.1  UN2810                    I  6.1.......   T14, TP2, TP13,  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
          organic, n.o.s..                                                                       TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                           TP13, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......     IB3, T7, TP1,  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A                  40
                                                                                                 TP28
    G    Toxic, liquids,               6.1  UN2810                    I  6.1.......  1, B9, B14, B30,  None..........  226........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          organic, n.o.s.                                                              B72, T22, TP2,
          Inhalation hazard,                                                              TP13, TP27,
          Packing Group I,                                                                 TP38, TP44
          Zone A.
    G    Toxic, liquids,               6.1  UN2810                    I  6.1.......  2, B9, B14, B32,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          organic, n.o.s.                                                              B74, T20, TP2,
          Inhalation hazard,                                                              TP13, TP27,
          Packing Group I,                                                                 TP38, TP45
          Zone B.
    G    Toxic liquids,                6.1  UN3122                    I  6.1, 5.1..                A4  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden        2.5 L  C             .......
          oxidizing, n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1, 5.1..               IB2  None..........  202........  243........          1 L          5 L  C             .......
    G    Toxic liquids,                6.1  UN3122                    I  6.1, 5.1..  1, B9, B14, B30,  None..........  226........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  C             .......
          oxidizing, n.o.s.                                                            B72, T22, TP2,
          Inhalation hazard,                                                         TP13, TP38, TP44
          Packing Group I,
          Zone A.
    G    Toxic liquids,                6.1  UN3122                    I  6.1, 5.1..  2, B9, B14, B32,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  C             .......
          oxidizing, n.o.s.                                                           T20, TP2, TP13,
          Inhalation Hazard,                                                               TP38, TP44
          Packing Group I,
          Zone B.
    G    Toxic liquids, water-         6.1  UN3123                    I  6.1, 4.3..                A4  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden          1 L  E                  40
          reactive, n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1, 4.3..               IB2  None..........  202........  243........          1 L          5 L  E                  40
    G    Toxic liquids, water-         6.1  UN3123                    I  6.1, 4.3..  1, B9, B14, B30,  None..........  226........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  E                  40
          reactive, n.o.s.                                                             B72, T22, TP2,
          Inhalation hazard,                                                         TP13, TP38, TP44
          packing group I,
          Zone A.

[[Page 261]]

 
    G    Toxic liquids, water-         6.1  UN3123                    I  6.1, 4.3..  2, B9, B14, B32,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  E                  40
          reactive, n.o.s.                                                             B74, T20, TP2,
          Inhalation hazard,                                                         TP13, TP38, TP44
          packing group I,
          Zone B.
    G    Toxic solid,                  6.1  UN3290                    I  6.1, 8....               IB7  None..........  211........  242........         1 kg        25 kg  A             .......
          corrosive,
          inorganic, n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1, 8....          IB6, IP2  None..........  212........  242........        15 kg        50 kg  A             .......
    G    Toxic solid,                  6.1  UN3288                    I  6.1.......               IB7  None..........  211........  242........         5 kg        50 kg  A             .......
          inorganic, n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A             .......
    G    Toxic solids,                 6.1  UN2928                    I  6.1, 8....               IB7  None..........  211........  242........         1 kg        25 kg  B                  40
          corrosive, organic,
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1, 8....          IB6, IP2  None..........  212........  242........        15 kg        50 kg  B                  40
    G    Toxic solids,                 6.1  UN2930                    I  6.1, 4.1..               IB6  None..........  211........  242........         1 kg        15 kg  B             .......
          flammable, organic,
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1, 4.1..     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        15 kg        50 kg  B             .......
    G    Toxic solids,                 6.1  UN2811                    I  6.1.......               IB7  None..........  211........  242........         5 kg        50 kg  B             .......
          organic, n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  B             .......
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A             .......
    G    Toxic solids,                 6.1  UN3086                    I  6.1, 5.1..                    None..........  211........  242........         1 kg        15 kg  C             .......
          oxidizing, n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1, 5.1..          IB6, IP2  None..........  212........  242........        15 kg        50 kg  C             .......
    G    Toxic solids, self-           6.1  UN3124                    I  6.1, 4.2..                A5  None..........  211........  242........         5 kg        15 kg  D                  40
          heating, n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1, 4.2..          IB6, IP2  None..........  212........  242........        15 kg        50 kg  D                  40
    G    Toxic solids, water-          6.1  UN3125                    I  6.1, 4.3..                A5  None..........  211........  242........         5 kg        15 kg  D                  40
          reactive, n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1, 4.3..          IB6, IP2  None..........  212........  242........        15 kg        50 kg  D                  40
    D    Toy Caps............         1.4S  NA0337                   II  1.4S......                    None..........  62.........  None.......        25 kg       100 kg  05            .......
         Tracers for                  1.3G  UN0212                   II  1.3G......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  07            .......
          ammunition.
         Tracers for                  1.4G  UN0306                   II  1.4G......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  06            .......
          ammunition.
         Tractors, see         ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Vehicle, etc.
         Tri-(b-nitroxyethyl)    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          ammonium nitrate.
         Triallyl borate.....          6.1  UN2609                  III  6.1.......               IB3  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A                  13
         Triallylamine.......            3  UN2610                  III  3, 8......  B1, IB3, T4, TP1  None..........  203........  242........          5 L         60 L  A                  40
         Triazine pesticides,            3  UN2764                    I  3, 6.1....   T14, TP2, TP13,  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden         30 L  B                  40
          liquid, flammable,                                                                     TP27
          toxic, flash point
          less than 23
          degrees C.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  3, 6.1....    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                           TP13, TP27
         Triazine pesticides,          6.1  UN2998                    I  6.1.......   T14, TP2, TP13,  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
          liquid, toxic.                                                                         TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                           TP13, TP27

[[Page 262]]

 
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......     IB3, T7, TP2,  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A                  40
                                                                                                 TP28
         Triazine pesticides,          6.1  UN2997                    I  6.1, 3....   T14, TP2, TP13,  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
          liquid, toxic,                                                                         TP27
          flammable, flash
          point not less than
          23 degrees C.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1, 3....    IB2, T11, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
                                                                                           TP13, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1, 3....     IB3, T7, TP2,  153...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A                  40
                                                                                                 TP28
         Triazine pesticides,          6.1  UN2763                    I  6.1.......          IB7, IP1  None..........  211........  242........         5 kg        50 kg  A                  40
          solid, toxic.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A                  40
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A                  40
         Tributylamine.......          6.1  UN2542                   II  6.1.......      IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
         Tributylphosphane...          4.2  UN3254                    I  4.2.......                    None..........  211........  242........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             .......
         Trichloro-s-          ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          triazinetrione dry,
          with more than 39
          percent available
          chlorine, see
          Trichloroisocyanuri
          c acid, dry.
         Trichloroacetic acid            8  UN1839                   II  8.........     A7, IB8, IP2,  154...........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  A             .......
                                                                                             IP4, N34
         Trichloroacetic                 8  UN2564                   II  8.........   A3, A6, A7, B2,  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  B             .......
          acid, solution.                                                               IB2, N34, T7,
                                                                                                  TP2
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  8.........  A3, A6, A7, IB3,  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  B                   8
                                                                                         N34, T4, TP1
    +    Trichloroacetyl                 8  UN2442                   II  8, 6.1....    2, A3, A7, B9,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          chloride.                                                                    B14, B32, B74,
                                                                                       N34, T20, TP2,
                                                                                           TP38, TP45
         Trichlorobenzenes,            6.1  UN2321                  III  6.1.......      IB3, T4, TP1  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
          liquid.
         Trichlorobutene.....          6.1  UN2322                   II  6.1.......      IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A              25, 40
         1,1,1-                        6.1  UN2831                  III  6.1.......     IB3, N36, T4,  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A                  40
          Trichloroethane.                                                                        TP1
         Trichloroethylene...          6.1  UN1710                  III  6.1.......     IB3, N36, T4,  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A                  40
                                                                                                  TP1
         Trichloroisocyanuric          5.1  UN2468                   II  5.1.......          IB8, IP4  152...........  212........  240........         5 kg        25 kg  A                  13
          acid, dry.
         Trichloromethyl         Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          perchlorate.

[[Page 263]]

 
         Trichlorosilane.....          4.3  UN1295                    I  4.3, 3, 8.     A7, N34, T14,  None..........  201........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             21, 28,
                                                                                       TP2, TP7, TP13                                                                                    40, 49,
                                                                                                                                                                                             100
         Tricresyl phosphate           6.1  UN2574                   II  6.1.......     A3, IB2, N33,  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
          with more than 3                                                               N34, T7, TP2
          percent ortho
          isomer.
         Triethyl phosphite..            3  UN2323                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Triethylamine.......            3  UN1296                   II  3, 8......      IB2, T7, TP1  None..........  202........  243........          1 L          5 L  B                  40
         Triethylenetetramine            8  UN2259                   II  8.........  B2, IB2, T7, TP2  154...........  202........  242........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
         Trifluoroacetic acid            8  UN2699                    I  8.........   A3, A6, A7, B4,  None..........  201........  243........        0.5 L        2.5 L  B              12, 40
                                                                                        N3, N34, T10,
                                                                                            TP2, TP12
         Trifluoroacetyl               2.3  UN3057              .......  2.3, 8....   2, B7, B9, B14,  None..........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          chloride.                                                                         T50, TP21
         Trifluorochloroethyl          2.3  UN1082              .......  2.3, 2.1..       3, B14, T50  None..........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          ene, stabilized.
         1,1,1-                        2.1  UN2035              .......  2.1.......               T50  306...........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden       150 kg  B                  40
          Trifluoroethane,
          compressed or
          Refrigerant gas R
          143a.
         Trifluoromethane or           2.2  UN1984              .......  2.2.......                    306...........  304........  314, 315...        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
          Refrigerant gas R
          23.
         Trifluoromethane,             2.2  UN3136              .......  2.2.......          T75, TP5  306...........  None.......  314, 315...        50 kg       500 kg  D             .......
          refrigerated liquid.
         2-                            6.1  UN2942                  III  6.1.......               IB3  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
          Trifluoromethylanil
          ine.
         3-                            6.1  UN2948                   II  6.1.......      IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A                  40
          Trifluoromethylanil
          ine.
         Triformoxime            Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          trinitrate.
         Triisobutylene......            3  UN2324                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T4, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Triisopropyl borate.            3  UN2616                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
    D    Trimethoxysilane....          6.1  NA9269                    I  6.1, 3....  2, B9, B14, B32,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  E                  40
                                                                                       B74, T20, TP4,
                                                                                          TP12, TP13,
                                                                                           TP38, TP45
         Trimethyl borate....            3  UN2416                   II  3.........      IB2, T7, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         Trimethyl phosphite.            3  UN2329                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         1,3,5-Trimethyl-        Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          2,4,6-
          trinitrobenzene.
         Trimethylacetyl               6.1  UN2438                    I  6.1, 8, 3.    2, A3, A6, A7,  None..........  227........  244........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D              25, 40
          chloride.                                                                      B3, B9, B14,
                                                                                       B32, B74, N34,
                                                                                      T20, TP2, TP13,
                                                                                           TP38, TP45
         Trimethylamine,               2.1  UN1083              .......  2.1.......               T50  306...........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden       150 kg  B                  40
          anhydrous.
         Trimethylamine,                 3  UN1297                    I  3, 8......          T11, TP1  None..........  201........  243........        0.5 L        2.5 L  D              40, 41
          aqueous solutions
          with not more than
          50 percent
          trimethylamine by
          mass.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  3, 8......  B1, IB2, T7, TP1  None..........  202........  243........          1 L          5 L  B              40, 41
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3, 8......  B1, IB3, T7, TP1  150...........  203........  242........          5 L         60 L  A              40, 41
         1,3,5-                          3  UN2325                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  None..........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
          Trimethylbenzene.

[[Page 264]]

 
         Trimethylchlorosilan            3  UN1298                   II  3, 8......      A3, A7, B77,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L          5 L  E                  40
          e.                                                                            IB2, N34, T7,
                                                                                            TP2, TP13
         Trimethylcyclohexyla            8  UN2326                  III  8.........      IB3, T4, TP1  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
          mine.
         Trimethylene glycol     Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          diperchlorate.
         Trimethylhexamethyle          6.1  UN2328                  III  6.1.......     IB3, T4, TP2,  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  B             .......
          ne diisocyanate.                                                                       TP13
         Trimethylhexame                 8  UN2327                  III  8.........      IB3, T4, TP1  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
          thylenediamines.
         Trimethylol             Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          nitromethane
          trinitrate.
         Trinitro-meta-cresol         1.1D  UN0216                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10                 5E
         2,4,6-Trinitro-1,3-     Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          diazobenzene.
         2,4,6-Trinitro-1,3,5-   Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          triazido benzene
          (dry).
         Trinitroacetic acid.    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Trinitroacetonitrile    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Trinitroamine cobalt    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Trinitroaniline or           1.1D  UN0153                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
          Picramide.
         Trinitroanisole.....         1.1D  UN0213                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
         Trinitrobenzene, dry         1.1D  UN0214                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
          or wetted with less
          than 30 percent
          water, by mass.
         Trinitrobenzene,              4.1  UN1354                    I  4.1.......  23, A2, A8, A19,  None..........  211........  None.......       0.5 kg       0.5 kg  E                  28
          wetted with not                                                                         N41
          less than 30
          percent water, by
          mass.
         Trinitrobenzenesulfo         1.1D  UN0386                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10                 5E
          nic acid.
         Trinitrobenzoic              1.1D  UN0215                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
          acid, dry or wetted
          with less than 30
          percent water, by
          mass.
         Trinitrobenzoic               4.1  UN1355                    I  4.1.......  23, A2, A8, A19,  None..........  211........  None.......       0.5 kg       0.5 kg  E                  28
          acid, wetted with                                                                       N41
          not less than 30
          percent water, by
          mass.
         Trinitrochlorobenzen         1.1D  UN0155                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
          e or Picryl
          chloride.
         Trinitroethanol.....    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Trinitroethylnitrate    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Trinitrofluorenone..         1.1D  UN0387                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......

[[Page 265]]

 
         Trinitromethane.....    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         1,3,5-                  Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Trinitronaphthalene.
         Trinitronaphthalene.         1.1D  UN0217                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
         Trinitrophenetole...         1.1D  UN0218                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
         Trinitrophenol or            1.1D  UN0154                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10                 5E
          Picric acid, dry or
          wetted with less
          than 30 percent
          water, by mass.
         Trinitrophenol,               4.1  UN1344                    I  4.1.......  23, A8, A19, N41  None..........  211........  None.......         1 kg        15 kg  E              28, 36
          wetted with not
          less than 30
          percent water, by
          mass.
         2,4,6-Trinitrophenyl    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          guanidine (dry).
         2,4,6-Trinitrophenyl    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          nitramine.
         2,4,6-Trinitrophenyl    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          trimethylol methyl
          nitramine
          trinitrate (dry).
         Trinitrophenylmethyl         1.1D  UN0208                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
          nitramine or Tetryl.
         Trinitroresorcinol           1.1D  UN0219                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10                 5E
          or Styphnic acid,
          dry or wetted with
          less than 20
          percent water, or
          mixture of alcohol
          and water, by mass.
         Trinitroresorcinol,          1.1D  UN0394                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10                 5E
          wetted or Styphnic
          acid, wetted with
          not less than 20
          percent water, or
          mixture of alcohol
          and water by mass.
         2,4,6-Trinitroso-3-     Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          methyl
          nitraminoanisole.
         Trinitrotetramine       Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          cobalt nitrate.
         Trinitrotoluene and          1.1D  UN0388                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
          Trinitrobenzene
          mixtures or TNT and
          trinitrobenzene
          mixtures or TNT and
          hexanitrostilbene
          mixtures or
          Trinitrotoluene and
          hexanitrostilnene
          mixtures.
         Trinitrotoluene              1.1D  UN0389                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
          mixtures containing
          Trinitrobenzene and
          Hexanitrostilbene
          or TNT mixtures
          containing
          trinitrobenzene and
          hexanitrostilbene.
         Trinitrotoluene or           1.1D  UN0209                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
          TNT, dry or wetted
          with less than 30
          percent water, by
          mass.
         Trinitrotoluene,              4.1  UN1356                    I  4.1.......  23, A2, A8, A19,  None..........  211........  None.......       0.5 kg       0.5 kg  E                  28
          wetted with not                                                                         N41
          less than 30
          percent water, by
          mass.
         Tripropylamine......            3  UN2260                  III  3, 8......  B1, IB3, T4, TP1  150...........  203........  242........          5 L         60 L  A                  40

[[Page 266]]

 
         Tripropylene........            3  UN2057                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Tris-(1-                      6.1  UN2501                   II  6.1.......      IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
          aziridinyl)phosphin
          e oxide, solution.
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......      IB3, T4, TP1  153...........  203........  241........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Tris, bis-              Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          bifluoroamino
          diethoxy propane
          (TVOPA).
         Tritonal............         1.1D  UN0390                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
         Tungsten                      2.3  UN2196              .......  2.3, 8....                 2  None..........  338........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  D                  40
          hexafluoride.
         Turpentine..........            3  UN1299                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Turpentine                      3  UN1300                    I  3.........    T11, TP1, TP8,  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  B             .......
          substitute.                                                                            TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Undecane............            3  UN2330                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
    D    Uranium                         7  UN2978              .......  7, 8......                    423...........  420, 427...  420, 427...  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          hexafluoride,
          fissile excepted or
          non-fissile.
    D    Uranium                         7  UN2977              .......  7, 8......  ................  453...........  417, 420...  417, 420...  ...........  ...........  A                  95
          hexafluoride,
          fissile (with more
          than 1 percent U-
          235).
    D    Uranium metal,                  7  UN2979              .......  7, 4.2....  ................  None..........  418........  None.......  ...........  ...........  D                  95
          pyrophoric.
    D    Uranium nitrate                 7  UN2980              .......  7, 8......  ................  421, 427......  415, 416,    415, 416,    ...........  ...........  D                  95
          hexahydrate                                                                                                   417.         417.
          solution.
    D    Uranyl nitrate,                 7  UN2981              .......  7, 5.1....  ................  None..........  419........  None.......    Forbidden        15 kg  A                  95
          solid.
         Urea hydrogen                 5.1  UN1511                  III  5.1, 8....      A1, A7, A29,  152...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A                  13
          peroxide.                                                                          IB8, IP3
         Urea nitrate, dry or         1.1D  UN0220                   II  1.1D......               119  None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10            .......
          wetted with less
          than 20 percent
          water, by mass.
         Urea nitrate, wetted          4.1  UN1357                    I  4.1.......  39, A8, A19, N41  None..........  211........  None.......         1 kg        15 kg  A                  28
          with not less than
          20 percent water,
          by mass.
         Urea peroxide, see    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Urea hydrogen
          peroxide.
         Valeraldehyde.......            3  UN2058                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         Valeric acid, see     ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Corrosive liquids,
          n.o.s..

[[Page 267]]

 
         Valeryl chloride....            8  UN2502                   II  8, 3......   A3, A6, A7, B2,  154...........  202........  243........          1 L         30 L  C                  40
                                                                                        IB2, N34, T7,
                                                                                                  TP2
         Vanadium compound,            6.1  UN3285                    I  6.1.......    IB7, IP1, T14,  None..........  211........  242........         5 kg        50 kg  B             .......
          n.o.s..                                                                           TP2, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  6.1.......    IB8, IP2, IP4,  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  B             .......
                                                                                       T11, TP2, TP27
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  6.1.......     IB8, IP3, T7,  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A             .......
                                                                                            TP1, TP28
         Vanadium                        8  UN2443                   II  8.........   A3, A6, A7, B2,  154...........  202........  242........    Forbidden         30 L  C                  40
          oxytrichloride.                                                              B16, IB2, N34,
                                                                                              T7, TP2
         Vanadium pentoxide,           6.1  UN2862                  III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A                  40
          non-fused form.
         Vanadium                        8  UN2444                    I  8.........   A3, A6, A7, B4,  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden        2.5 L  C                  40
          tetrachloride.                                                                N34, T10, TP2
         Vanadium trichloride            8  UN2475                  III  8.........          IB8, IP3  154...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A                  40
         Vanadyl sulfate.....          6.1  UN2931                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Vehicle, flammable              9  UN3166              .......  9.........               135  220...........  220........  220........    Forbidden     No limit  A             .......
          gas powered.
         Vehicle, flammable              9  UN3166              .......  9.........               135  220...........  220........  220........     No limit     No limit  A             .......
          liquid powered.
         Very signal           ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          cartridge, see
          Cartridges, signal.
         Vinyl acetate,                  3  UN1301                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
          stabilized.
         Vinyl bromide,                2.1  UN1085              .......  2.1.......               T50  306...........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden       150 kg  B                  40
          stabilized.
         Vinyl butyrate,                 3  UN2838                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
          stabilized.
         Vinyl chloride,               2.1  UN1086              .......  2.1.......      21, B44, T50  306...........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden       150 kg  B                  40
          stabilized.
         Vinyl chloroacetate.          6.1  UN2589                   II  6.1, 3....      IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
         Vinyl ethyl ether,              3  UN1302                    I  3.........      A3, T11, TP2  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  D             .......
          stabilized.
         Vinyl fluoride,               2.1  UN1860              .......  2.1.......                    306...........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden       150 kg  E                  40
          stabilized.
         Vinyl isobutyl                  3  UN1304                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
          ether, stabilized.
         Vinyl methyl ether,           2.1  UN1087              .......  2.1.......          B44, T50  306...........  304........  314, 315...    Forbidden       150 kg  B                  40
          stabilized.
         Vinyl nitrate           Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          polymer.
         Vinylidene chloride,            3  UN1303                    I  3.........     T12, TP2, TP7  150...........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  E                  40
          stabilized.
         Vinylpyridines,               6.1  UN3073                   II  6.1, 3, 8.     IB1, T7, TP2,  None..........  202........  243........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
          stabilized.                                                                            TP13
         Vinyltoluenes,                  3  UN2618                  III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
          stabilized.
         Vinyltrichlorosilane            3  UN1305                    I  3, 8......  A3, A7, B6, N34,  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden        2.5 L  B                  40
          , stabilized.                                                                T11, TP2, TP13
         Warheads, rocket             1.4D  UN0370                   II  1.4D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden        75 kg  02            .......
          with burster or
          expelling charge.
         Warheads, rocket             1.4F  UN0371                   II  1.4F......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  08            .......
          with burster or
          expelling charge.
         Warheads, rocket             1.1D  UN0286                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  03            .......
          with bursting
          charge.

[[Page 268]]

 
         Warheads, rocket             1.2D  UN0287                   II  1.2D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  03            .......
          with bursting
          charge.
         Warheads, rocket             1.1F  UN0369                   II  1.1F......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  08            .......
          with bursting
          charge.
         Warheads, torpedo            1.1D  UN0221                   II  1.1D......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  03            .......
          with bursting
          charge.
    G    Water-reactive                4.3  UN3129                    I  4.3, 8....                    None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden          1 L  D             .......
          liquid, corrosive,
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  4.3, 8....               IB1  None..........  202........  243........          1 L          5 L  E                  85
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.3, 8....               IB2  None..........  203........  242........          5 L         60 L  E             .......
    G    Water-reactive                4.3  UN3148                    I  4.3.......                    None..........  201........  244........    Forbidden          1 L  E                  40
          liquid, n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  4.3.......               IB1  None..........  202........  243........          1 L          5 L  E                  40
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.3.......               IB2  None..........  203........  242........          5 L         60 L  E                  40
    G    Water-reactive                4.3  UN3130                    I  4.3, 6.1..                A4  None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden          1 L  D             .......
          liquid, toxic,
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  4.3, 6.1..               IB1  None..........  202........  243........          1 L          5 L  E                  85
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.3, 6.1..               IB2  None..........  203........  242........          5 L         60 L  E                  85
    G    Water-reactive                4.3  UN3131                    I  4.3, 8....     IB4, IP1, N40  None..........  211........  242........    Forbidden        15 kg  D             .......
          solid, corrosive,
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  4.3, 8....          IB6, IP2  151...........  212........  242........        15 kg        50 kg  E                  85
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.3, 8....          IB8, IP4  151...........  213........  241........        25 kg       100 kg  E                  85
    G    Water-reactive                4.3  UN3132                    I  4.3, 4.1..          IB4, N40  None..........  211........  242........    Forbidden        15 kg  D             .......
          solid, flammable,
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  4.3, 4.1..               IB4  151...........  212........  242........        15 kg        50 kg  E             .......
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.3, 4.1..               IB6  151...........  213........  241........        25 kg       100 kg  E             .......
    G    Water-reactive                4.3  UN2813                    I  4.3.......          IB4, N40  None..........  211........  242........    Forbidden        15 kg  E                  40
          solid, n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  4.3.......          IB7, IP2  151...........  212........  242........        15 kg        50 kg  E                  40
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.3.......          IB8, IP4  151...........  213........  241........        25 kg       100 kg  E                  40
    G    Water-reactive,               4.3  UN3133                   II  4.3, 5.1..                    None..........  214........  214........    Forbidden    Forbidden  E                  40
          solid, oxidizing,
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.3, 5.1..                    None..........  214........  214........    Forbidden    Forbidden  E                  40
    G    Water-reactive                4.3  UN3135                    I  4.3, 4.2..               N40  None..........  211........  242........    Forbidden        15 kg  E             .......
          solid, self-
          heating, n.o.s..

[[Page 269]]

 
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  4.3, 4.2..          IB5, IP2  None..........  212........  242........        15 kg        50 kg  E             .......
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.3, 4.2..          IB8, IP4  None..........  213........  241........        25 kg       100 kg  E             .......
    G    Water-reactive                4.3  UN3134                    I  4.3, 6.1..     A8, IB4, IP1,  None..........  211........  242........    Forbidden        15 kg  D             .......
          solid, toxic,                                                                           N40
          n.o.s..
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  4.3, 6.1..          IB5, IP2  151...........  212........  242........        15 kg        50 kg  E                  85
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.3, 6.1..          IB8, IP4  151...........  213........  241........        25 kg       100 kg  E                  85
         Wheel chair,          ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          electric, see
          Battery powered
          vehicle or Battery
          powered equipment.
         White acid, see       ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Hydrofluoric acid.
    I    White asbestos                  9  UN2590                  III  9.........     IB8, IP2, IP3  155...........  216........  240........       200 kg       200 kg  A              34, 40
          (chrysotile,
          actinolite,
          anthophyllite,
          tremolite).
         Wood preservatives,             3  UN1306                   II  3.........     IB2, T4, TP1,  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
          liquid.                                                                                 TP8
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A                  40
         Xanthates...........          4.2  UN3342                   II  4.2.......          IB6, IP2  None..........  212........  241........        15 kg        50 kg  D                  40
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.2.......          IB8, IP3  None..........  213........  241........        25 kg       100 kg  D                  40
         Xenon, compressed...          2.2  UN2036              .......  2.2.......                    306...........  302........  None.......        75 kg       150 kg  A             .......
         Xenon, refrigerated           2.2  UN2591              .......  2.2.......          T75, TP5  320...........  None.......  None.......        50 kg       500 kg  B             .......
          liquid (cryogenic
          liquids).
         Xylenes.............            3  UN1307                   II  3.........      IB2, T4, TP1  150...........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3.........  B1, IB3, T2, TP1  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  A             .......
         Xylenols............          6.1  UN2261                   II  6.1.......    IB8, IP2, IP4,  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
                                                                                              T7, TP2
         Xylidines, solid....          6.1  UN1711                   II  6.1.......    IB8, IP2, IP4,  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
                                                                                              T7, TP2
         Xylidines, solution.          6.1  UN1711                   II  6.1.......      IB2, T7, TP2  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
         Xylyl bromide.......          6.1  UN1701                   II  6.1.......  A3, A6, A7, IB2,  None..........  340........  None.......    Forbidden         60 L  D                  40
                                                                                        N33, T7, TP2,
                                                                                                 TP13
         p-Xylyl diazide.....    Forbidden  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
         Zinc ammonium                 5.1  UN1512                   II  5.1.......          IB8, IP4  None..........  212........  242........         5 kg        25 kg  E             .......
          nitrite.
         Zinc arsenate or              6.1  UN1712                   II  6.1.......     IB8, IP2, IP4  None..........  212........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          Zinc arsenite or
          Zinc arsenate and
          zinc arsenite
          mixtures.
         Zinc ashes..........          4.3  UN1435                  III  4.3.......     A1, A19, IB8,  151...........  213........  241........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
                                                                                                  IP4
         Zinc bisulfite        ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          solution, see
          Bisulfites, aqueous
          solutions, n.o.s..
         Zinc bromate........          5.1  UN2469                  III  5.1.......     A1, A29, IB8,  152...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             56, 58,
                                                                                                  IP3                                                                                        106
         Zinc chlorate.......          5.1  UN1513                   II  5.1.......     A9, IB8, IP2,  152...........  212........  242........         5 kg        25 kg  A             56, 58,
                                                                                             IP4, N34                                                                                        106
         Zinc chloride,                  8  UN2331                  III  8.........          IB8, IP3  None..........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          anhydrous.

[[Page 270]]

 
         Zinc chloride,                  8  UN1840                  III  8.........      IB3, T4, TP1  154...........  203........  241........          5 L         60 L  A             .......
          solution.
         Zinc cyanide........          6.1  UN1713                    I  6.1.......          IB7, IP1  None..........  211........  242........         5 kg        50 kg  A                  26
         Zinc dithionite or              9  UN1931                  III  None......               IB8  155...........  204........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A                  49
          Zinc hydrosulfite.
         Zinc ethyl, see       ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Diethylzinc.
         Zinc fluorosilicate.          6.1  UN2855                  III  6.1.......          IB8, IP3  153...........  213........  240........       100 kg       200 kg  A                  26
         Zinc hydrosulfite,    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Zinc dithionite.
         Zinc muriate          ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          solution, see Zinc
          chloride, solution.
         Zinc nitrate........          5.1  UN1514                   II  5.1.......          IB8, IP4  152...........  212........  240........         5 kg        25 kg  A             .......
         Zinc permanganate...          5.1  UN1515                   II  5.1.......          IB6, IP2  152...........  212........  242........         5 kg        25 kg  D             56, 58,
                                                                                                                                                                                             69,
                                                                                                                                                                                            106,
                                                                                                                                                                                             107
         Zinc peroxide.......          5.1  UN1516                   II  5.1.......          IB6, IP2  152...........  212........  242........         5 kg        25 kg  A             13, 75,
                                                                                                                                                                                             106
         Zinc phosphide......          4.3  UN1714                    I  4.3, 6.1..          A19, N40  None..........  211........  None.......    Forbidden        15 kg  E              40, 85
         Zinc powder or Zinc           4.3  UN1436                    I  4.3, 4.2..    A19, IB4, IP1,  None..........  211........  242........    Forbidden        15 kg  A             .......
          dust.                                                                                   N40
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  4.3, 4.2..     A19, IB7, IP2  None..........  212........  242........        15 kg        50 kg  A             .......
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.3, 4.2..          IB8, IP4  None..........  213........  242........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Zinc resinate.......          4.1  UN2714                  III  4.1.......           A1, IB6  151...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
         Zinc selenate, see    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Selenates or
          Selenites.
         Zinc selenite, see    ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          Selenates or
          Selenites.
         Zinc silicofluoride,  ...........  ..................           ..........                     .............   ..........   ..........  ...........  ...........  ............  .......
          see Zinc
          fluorosilicate.
         Zirconium, dry,               4.1  UN2858                  III  4.1.......           A1, IB8  151...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          coiled wire,
          finished metal
          sheets, strip
          (thinner than 254
          microns but not
          thinner than 18
          microns).
         Zirconium, dry,               4.2  UN2009                  III  4.2.......      A1, A19, IB8  None..........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  D             .......
          finished sheets,
          strip or coiled
          wire.

[[Page 271]]

 
         Zirconium hydride...          4.1  UN1437                   II  4.1.......    A19, A20, IB4,  None..........  212........  240........        15 kg        50 kg  E             .......
                                                                                                  N34
         Zirconium nitrate...          5.1  UN2728                  III  5.1.......     A1, A29, IB8,  152...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
                                                                                                  IP3
         Zirconium picramate,         1.3C  UN0236                   II  1.3C......                    None..........  62.........  None.......    Forbidden    Forbidden  10                 5E
          dry or wetted with
          less than 20
          percent water, by
          mass.
         Zirconium picramate,          4.1  UN1517                    I  4.1.......           23, N41  None..........  211........  None.......         1 kg        15 kg  D              28, 36
          wetted with not
          less than 20
          percent water, by
          mass.
         Zirconium powder,             4.2  UN2008                    I  4.2.......                    None..........  211........  242........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             .......
          dry.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  4.2.......    A19, A20, IB6,  None..........  212........  241........        15 kg        50 kg  D             .......
                                                                                         IP2, N5, N34
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  4.2.......          IB8, IP3  None..........  213........  241........        25 kg       100 kg  D             .......
         Zirconium powder,             4.1  UN1358                   II  4.1.......    A19, A20, IB6,  None..........  212........  241........        15 kg        50 kg  E             .......
          wetted with not                                                                    IP2, N34
          less than 25
          percent water (a
          visible excess of
          water must be
          present) (a)
          mechanically
          produced, particle
          size less than 53
          microns; (b)
          chemically
          produced, particle
          size less than 840
          microns.
         Zirconium scrap.....          4.2  UN1932                  III  4.2.......     IB8, IP3, N34  None..........  213........  240........    Forbidden    Forbidden  D             .......
         Zirconium suspended             3  UN1308                    I  3.........                    None..........  201........  243........    Forbidden    Forbidden  B             .......
          in a liquid.
         ....................  ...........  ..................       II  3.........               IB2  None..........  202........  242........          5 L         60 L  B             .......
         ....................  ...........  ..................      III  3.........           B1, IB2  150...........  203........  242........         60 L        220 L  B             .......
         Zirconium                       8  UN2503                  III  8.........          IB8, IP3  154...........  213........  240........        25 kg       100 kg  A             .......
          tetrachloride.


[[Page 272]]


    Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting 
Sec. 172.101, see the List of CFR Sections Affected in the Finding Aids 
section of this volume.

    Effective Date Note: At 67 FR 53133, Aug. 14, 2002, as corrected at 
67 FR 57635, Sept. 11, 2002, Sec. 172.101 was amended by adding and 
revising proper shipping names in the Hazardous Materials Table, 
effective Oct. 1, 2002. At 67 FR 54967, Aug. 27, 2002, the effective 
date was corrected to Feb. 14, 2003. For the convenience of the user, 
the added and revised text is set forth as follows:

Sec. 172.101  Purpose and use of hazardous materials table.

                                * * * * *

[[Page 273]]



                                                                             Sec.  172.101 Hazardous Materials Table
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                                                     (8)            Packaging                   (9)             (10)     Vessel
          Hazardous materials                                                                                       (Sec. 173.***)                 Quantity limitations           stowage
           descriptions and       Hazard      Identification                Label          Special    ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Symbols     proper shipping      class or         Numbers          PG       Codes    provisions (Sec.                                             Passenger
                 names           Division                                                172.102)        Exceptions      Non-bulk       Bulk      aircraft/    Cargo air-    Location     Other
                                                                                                                                                     rail      craft only
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(1)      (2).................          (3)  (4)                     (5)  (6).......               (7)  (8A)..........  (8B).......  (8C).......         (9A)         (9B)  (10A)           (10B)
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
         [Add]...............
                                       *                  *                  *                  *                  *                  *                  *
         Diagnostic specimen.          6.2  ..................  .......  ..........               A82  134...........  199........  None.......   4 L or 4kg   4L or 4 kg  A                  40
                                       *                  *                  *                  *                  *                  *                  *
    G    Toxins, from living           6.1  UN3172                    I  6.1.......               141  None..........  201........  243........          1 L         30 L  B                  40
          sources, liquid,                                           II                           141  None..........  202........  243........          5 L         60 L  B                  40
          n.o.s..                                                   III                           141  153...........  203........  241........         60 L         220L  A                  40
    G    Toxins, from living           6.1  UN3172                    I  6.1.......               141  None..........  211........  243........         5 kg        50 kg  B
          sources, solid,                                            II                           141  None..........  212........  243........        25 kg       100 kg  B
          n.o.s..                                                   III                           141  153...........  213........  241........       100 kg       200 kg  A
                                       *                  *                  *                  *                  *                  *                  *
         [Revise]............
    G    Infectious                    6.2  UN2900              .......  6.2.......          A81, A82  134...........  196........  None.......  50 mL or 50  4 L or 4 kg  B                  40
          substances,                                                                                                                                      g
          affecting animals
          only.
    G    Infectious                    6.2  UN2814              .......  6.2.......          A81, A82  134...........  196........  None.......  50 mL or 50  4 L or 4 kg  B                  40
          substances,                                                                                                                                      g
          affecting humans.
                                       *                  *                  *                  *                  *                  *                  *
         Regulated medical             6.2  UN3291                   II  6.2.......               A13  134, 197......  197........  197........     No Limit     No Limit  A                  40
          waste.
                                       *                  *                  *                  *                  *                  *                  *


[[Page 274]]

Appendix A to Sec. 172.101--List of Hazardous Substances and Reportable 
                               Quantities

    1. This appendix lists materials and their corresponding reportable 
quantities (RQ's) that are listed or designated as ``hazardous 
substances'' under section 101(14) of the Comprehensive Environmental 
Response, Compensation, and Liability Act, 42 U.S.C. 9601(14) (CERCLA; 
42 U.S.C. 9601 et seq). This listing fulfills the requirement of CERCLA, 
42 U.S.C. 9656(a), that all ``hazardous substances,'' as defined in 42 
U.S.C. 9601(14), be listed and regulated as hazardous materials under 49 
U.S.C. 5101-5127. That definition includes substances listed under 
sections 311(b)(2)(A) and 307(a) of the Federal Water Pollution Control 
Act, 33 U.S.C. 1321(b)(2)(A) and 1317(a), section 3001 of the Solid 
Waste Disposal Act, 42 U.S.C. 6921, and section 112 of the Clean Air 
Act, 42 U.S.C. 7412. In addition, this list contains materials that the 
Administrator of the Environmental Protection Agency has determined to 
be hazardous substances in accordance with section 102 of CERCLA, 42 
U.S.C. 9602. It should be noted that 42 U.S.C. 9656(b) provides that 
common and contract carriers may be held liable under laws other than 
CERCLA for the release of a hazardous substance as defined in that Act, 
during transportation that commenced before the effective date of the 
listing and regulating of that substance as a hazardous material under 
49 U.S.C. 5101-5127.
    2. This appendix is divided into two TABLES which are entitled 
``TABLE 1--HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES OTHER THAN RADIONUCLIDES'' and ``TABLE 
2--RADIONUCLIDES.'' A material listed in this appendix is regulated as a 
hazardous material and a hazardous substance under this subchapter if it 
meets the definition of a hazardous substance in Sec. 171.8 of this 
subchapter.
    3. The procedure for selecting a proper shipping name for a 
hazardous substance is set forth in Sec. 172.101(c).
    4. Column 1 of TABLE 1, entitled ``Hazardous substance'', contains 
the names of those elements and compounds that are hazardous substances. 
Following the listing of elements and compounds is a listing of waste 
streams. These waste streams appear on the list in numerical sequence 
and are referenced by the appropriate ``D'', ``F'', or ``K'' numbers. 
Column 2 of TABLE 1, entitled ``Reportable quantity (RQ)'', contains the 
reportable quantity (RQ), in pounds and kilograms, for each hazardous 
substance listed in Column 1 of TABLE 1.
    5. A series of notes is used throughout TABLE 1 and TABLE 2 to 
provide additional information concerning certain hazardous substances. 
These notes are explained at the end of each TABLE.
    6. TABLE 2 lists radionuclides that are hazardous substances and 
their corresponding RQ's. The RQ's in table 2 for radionuclides are 
expressed in units of curies and terabecquerels, whereas those in table 
1 are expressed in units of pounds and kilograms. If a material is 
listed in both table 1 and table 2, the lower RQ shall apply. 
Radionuclides are listed in alphabetical order. The RQ's for 
radionuclides are given in the radiological unit of measure of curie, 
abbreviated ``Ci'', followed, in parentheses, by an equivalent unit 
measured in terabecquerels, abbreviated ``TBq''.
    7. For mixtures of radionuclides, the following requirements shall 
be used in determining if a package contains an RQ of a hazardous 
substance: (i) if the identity and quantity (in curies or 
terabecquerels) of each radionuclide in a mixture or solution is known, 
the ratio between the quantity per package (in curies or terabecquerels) 
and the RQ for the radionuclide must be determined for each 
radionuclide. A package contains an RQ of a hazardous substance when the 
sum of the ratios for the radionuclides in the mixture or solution is 
equal to or greater than one; (ii) if the identity of each radionuclide 
in a mixture or solution is known but the quantity per package (in 
curies or terabecquerels) of one or more of the radionuclides is 
unknown, an RQ of a hazardous substance is present in a package when the 
total quantity (in curies or terabecquerels) of the mixture or solution 
is equal to or greater than the lowest RQ of any individual radionuclide 
in the mixture or solution; and (iii) if the identity of one or more 
radionuclides in a mixture or solution is unknown (or if the identity of 
a radionuclide by itself is unknown), an RQ of a hazardous substance is 
present when the total quantity (in curies or terabecquerels) in a 
package is equal to or greater than either one curie or the lowest RQ of 
any known individual radionuclide in the mixture or solution, whichever 
is lower.

  Table 1 to Appendix A--Hazardous Substances Other Than Radionuclides
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                            Reportable
                                                           quantity (RQ)
                   Hazardous substance                        pounds
                                                            (kilograms)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Acenaphthene............................................      100 (45.4)
Acenaphthylene..........................................     5000 (2270)
Acetaldehyde............................................      1000 (454)
Acetaldehyde, chloro-...................................      1000 (454)
Acetaldehyde, trichloro-................................     5000 (2270)

[[Page 275]]

 
Acetamide...............................................      100 (45.4)
Acetamide, N-(aminothioxomethyl)-.......................      1000 (454)
Acetamide, N-(4-ethoxyphenyl)-..........................      100 (45.4)
Acetamide, N-fluoren-2-yl-..............................       1 (0.454)
Acetamide, 2-fluoro-....................................      100 (45.4)
Acetic acid.............................................     5000 (2270)
Acetic acid (2,4-dichlorophenoxy)-......................      100 (45.4)
Acetic acid, ethyl ester................................     5000 (2270)
Acetic acid, fluoro-, sodium salt.......................       10 (4.54)
Acetic acid, lead (2+) salt.............................       10 (4.54)
Acetic acid, thallium(I+) salt..........................      1000 (454)
Acetic anhydride........................................     5000 (2270)
Acetone.................................................     5000 (2270)
Acetone cyanohydrin.....................................       10 (4.54)
Acetonitrile............................................     5000 (2270)
Acetophenone............................................     5000 (2270)
2-Acetylaminofluorene...................................       1 (0.454)
Acetyl bromide..........................................     5000 (2270)
Acetyl chloride.........................................     5000 (2270)
1-Acetyl-2-thiourea.....................................       1 (0.454)
Acrolein................................................        1(0.454)
Acrylamide..............................................     5000 (2270)
Acrylic acid............................................     5000 (2270)
Acrylonitrile...........................................      100 (45.4)
Adipic acid.............................................     5000 (2270)
AldicarbD1 (0.454)......................................
Aldrin..................................................       1 (0.454)
Allyl alcohol...........................................      100 (45.4)
Allyl chloride..........................................      1000 (454)
Aluminum phosphide......................................      100 (45.4)
Aluminum sulfate........................................     5000 (2270)
4-Aminobiphenyl.........................................       1 (0.454)
5-(Aminomethyl)-3-isoxazolol............................      1000 (454)
4-Aminopyridine.........................................      1000 (454)
Amitrole................................................       10 (4.54)
Ammonia.................................................      100 (45.4)
Ammonium acetate........................................     5000 (2270)
Ammonium benzoate.......................................     5000 (2270)
Ammonium bicarbonate....................................     5000 (2270)
Ammonium bichromate.....................................       10 (4.54)
Ammonium bifluoride.....................................      100 (45.4)
Ammonium bisulfite......................................     5000 (2270)
Ammonium carbamate......................................     5000 (2270)
Ammonium carbonate......................................     5000 (2270)
Ammonium chloride.......................................     5000 (2270)
Ammonium chromate.......................................       10 (4.54)
Ammonium citrate, dibasic...............................     5000 (2270)
Ammonium dichromate @...................................       10 (4.54)
Ammonium fluoborate.....................................     5000 (2270)
Ammonium fluoride.......................................      100 (45.4)
Ammonium hydroxide......................................      1000 (454)
Ammonium oxalate........................................     5000 (2270)
Ammonium picrate........................................       10 (4.54)
Ammonium silicofluoride.................................      1000 (454)
Ammonium sulfamate......................................     5000 (2270)
Ammonium sulfide........................................      100 (45.4)
Ammonium sulfite........................................     5000 (2270)
Ammonium tartrate.......................................     5000 (2270)
Ammonium thiocyanate....................................     5000 (2270)
Ammonium vanadate.......................................      1000 (454)
Amyl acetate............................................     5000 (2270)
    iso-Amyl acetate....................................  ..............
    sec-Amyl acetate....................................  ..............
    tert-Amyl acetate...................................  ..............
Aniline.................................................     5000 (2270)
o-Anisidine.............................................      100 (45.4)
Anthracene..............................................     5000 (2270)
Antimony [cent].........................................     5000 (2270)
Antimony pentachloride..................................      1000 (454)
Antimony potassium tartrate.............................      100 (45.4)

[[Page 276]]

 
Antimony tribromide.....................................      1000 (454)
Antimony trichloride....................................      1000 (454)
Antimony trifluoride....................................      1000 (454)
Antimony trioxide.......................................      1000 (454)
Argentate(1-), bis(cyano-C)-, potassium.................       1 (0.454)
Aroclor 1016............................................       1 (0.454)
Aroclor 1221............................................       1 (0.454)
Aroclor 1232............................................       1 (0.454)
Aroclor 1242............................................       1 (0.454)
Aroclor 1248............................................       1 (0.454)
Aroclor 1254............................................       1 (0.454)
Aroclor 1260............................................       1 (0.454)
Arsenic [cent]..........................................       1 (0.454)
Arsenic acid............................................       1 (0.454)
Arsenic acid H3AsO4.....................................       1 (0.454)
Arsenic disulfide.......................................       1 (0.454)
Arsenic oxide As203.....................................       1 (0.454)
Arsenic oxide As205.....................................       1 (0.454)
Arsenic pentoxide.......................................       1 (0.454)
Arsenic trichloride.....................................       1 (0.454)
Arsenic trioxide........................................       1 (0.454)
Arsenic trisulfide......................................       1 (0.454)
Arsine, diethyl-........................................       1 (0.454)
Arsinic acid, dimethyl-.................................       1 (0.454)
Arsonous dichloride, phenyl-............................       1 (0.454)
Asbestos [cent][cent]...................................       1 (0.454)
Auramine100 (45.4)......................................
Azaserine...............................................       1 (0.454)
Aziridine...............................................       1 (0.454)
Aziridine, 2-methyl-....................................       1 (0.454)
Azirino[2',3':3,4]pyrrolo(1,2-a)indole-4,7-dione,6-            10 (4.54)
 amino-8-[[(aminocarbonyl)oxy] methyl]-1,1a,2,8,8a, 8b-
 hexahydro-8a-methoxy-5-methyl-, [1aS-
 [aalpha,8beta,8aalpha,8balpha)]-.......................
Barium cyanide..........................................       10 (4.54)
Benz[j]aceanthrylene, 1,2-dihydro-3-methyl-.............       10 (4.54)
Benz[c]acridine.........................................      100 (45.4)
3,4-Benzacridine........................................      100 (45.4)
Benzal chloride.........................................     5000 (2270)
Benzamide, 3,5-dichloro-N-(1,1-dimethyl-2-propynyl).....     5000 (2270)
Benz[a]anthracene.......................................       10 (4.54)
1,2-Benzanthracene......................................       10 (4.54)
Benz[a]anthracene, 7,12-dimethyl-.......................       1 (0.454)
Benzenamine.............................................     5000 (2270)
Benzenamine, 4,4'-carbonimidoylbis (N,N-dimethyl-.......      100 (45.4)
Benzenamine, 4-chloro-..................................      1000 (454)
Benzenamine, 4-chloro-2-methyl-, hydrochloride..........      100 (45.4)
Benzenamine, N,N-dimethyl-4-(phenylazo)-................       10 (4.54)
Benzenamine, 2-methyl-..................................      100 (45.4)
Benzenamine, 4-methyl-..................................      100 (45.4)
Benzenamine, 4,4'-methylenebis(2-chloro-................       10 (4.54)
Benzenamine, 2-methyl-, hydrochloride...................      100 (45.4)
Benzenamine, 2-methyl-5-nitro-..........................      100 (45.4)
Benzenamine, 4-nitro-...................................     5000 (2270)
Benzene.................................................       10 (4.54)
Benzene, 1-bromo-4-phenoxy-.............................      100 (45.4)
Benzene, chloro-........................................      100 (45.4)
Benzene, chloromethyl-..................................      100 (45.4)
Benzene, 1,2-dichloro-..................................      100 (45.4)
Benzene, 1,3-dichloro-..................................      100 (45.4)
Benzene, 1,4-dichloro-..................................      100 (45.4)
Benzene, 1,1'-(2,2-dichloroethylidene)bis[4-chloro......       1 (0.454)
Benzene, dichloromethyl-................................     5000 (2270)
Benzene, 1,3-diisocyanatomethyl.........................      100 (45.4)
Benzene, dimethyl-......................................      100 (45.4)
Benzene, m-dimethyl-....................................      1000 (454)
Benzene, o-dimethyl-....................................      1000 (454)
Benzene, p-dimethyl-....................................      100 (45.4)
Benzene, hexachloro-....................................       10 (4.54)
Benzene, hexahydro-.....................................      1000 (454)
Benzene, hydroxy-.......................................      1000 (454)
Benzene, methyl-........................................      1000 (454)

[[Page 277]]

 
Benzene, 1-methyl-2,4-dinitro-..........................       10 (4.54)
Benzene, 2-methyl-1,3-dinitro-..........................      100 (45.4)
Benzene, 1-methylethyl-.................................     5000 (2270)
Benzene, nitro-.........................................      1000 (454)
Benzene, pentachloro-...................................       10 (4.54)
Benzene, pentachloronitro-..............................      100 (45.4)
Benzene, 1,2,4,5-tetrachloro-...........................     5000 (2270)
Benzene, 1,1'-(2,2,2-trichloroethylidene)bis[4-chloro-..       1 (0.454)
Benzene, 1,1'-(2,2,2-trichloroethylidene)bis[4-methoxy)-       1 (0.454)
Benzene, (trichloromethyl)..............................       10 (4.54)
Benzene, 1,3,5-trinitro-................................       10 (4.54)
Benzeneacetic acid, 4-chloro-alpha-(4-chlorophenyl)-           10 (4.54)
 alpha-hydroxy-, ethyl ester............................
Benzenebutanoic acid, 4-[bis(2-chloroethyl)amino]-......       10 (4.54)
Benzenediamine, ar-methyl-..............................       10 (4.54)
1,2-Benzenedicarboxylic acid, [bis(2-ethylhexyl)] ester.      100 (45.4)
1,2-Benzenedicarboxylic acid, dibutyl ester.............       10 (4.54)
1,2-Benzenedicarboxylic acid, diethyl ester.............      1000 (454)
1,2-Benzenedicarboxylic acid, dimethyl ester............     5000 (2270)
1,2-Benzenedicarboxylic acid, dioctyl ester.............     5000 (2270)
1,3-Benzenediol.........................................     5000 (2270)
1,2-Benzenediol,4-[1-hydroxy-2-(methylamino)ethyl]-.....      1000 (454)
Benzeneethanamine, alpha,alpha-dimethyl-................     5000 (2270)
Benzenesulfonic acid chloride...........................      100 (45.4)
Benzenesulfonyl chloride................................      100 (45.4)
Benzenethiol............................................      100 (45.4)
Benzidine...............................................       1 (0.454)
1,2-Benzisothiazol-3(2H)-one,1,1-dioxide................      100 (45.4)
Benzo[a]anthracene......................................       10 (4.54)
1,3-Benzodioxole, 5-(2-propenyl)-.......................      100 (45.4)
1,3-Benzodioxole, 5-(1-propenyl)-.......................      100 (45.4)
1,3-Benzodioxole, 5-propyl-.............................       10 (4.54)
Benzo[b]fluoranthene....................................       1 (0.454)
Benzo[k]fluoranthene....................................     5000 (2270)
Benzo[j,k]fluorene......................................      100 (45.4)
Benzoic acid............................................     5000 (2270)
Benzonitrile............................................     5000 (2270)
Benzo[g,h,i]perylene....................................     5000 (2270)
2H-1-Benzopyran-2-one, 4-hydroxy-3-(3-oxo-1-phenyl-           100 (45.4)
 butyl)-, & salts, when present at concentrations
 greater than 0.3%......................................
Benzo[a]pyrene..........................................       1 (0.454)
3,4-Benzopyrene.........................................       1 (0.454)
p-Benzoquinone..........................................       10 (4.54)
Benzo [rst]pentaphene...................................       10 (4.54)
Benzotrichloride........................................       10 (4.54)
Benzoyl chloride........................................      1000 (454)
1,2-Benzphenanthrene....................................      100 (45.4)
Benzyl chloride.........................................      100 (45.4)
Beryllium [cent]........................................       10 (4.54)
Beryllium chloride......................................       1 (0.454)
Beryllium dust [cent]...................................       10 (4.54)
Beryllium fluoride......................................       1 (0.454)
Beryllium nitrate.......................................       1 (0.454)
alpha - BHC.............................................       10 (4.54)
beta - BHC..............................................       1 (0.454)
delta - BHC.............................................       1 (0.454)
gamma - BHC.............................................       1 (0.454)
2,2'Bioxirane...........................................       10 (4.54)
Biphenyl................................................      100 (45.4)
(1,1'-Biphenyl)-4,4'-diamine............................       1 (0.454)
(1,1'-Biphenyl)-4,4'-diamine,3,3'-dichloro-.............       1 (0.454)
(1,1'-Biphenyl)-4,4'-diamine,3,3'-dimethoxy-............       10 (4.54)
(1,1'-Biphenyl)-4,4'-diamine,3,3'-dimethyl-.............       10 (4.54)
Bis(2-chloroethoxy) methane.............................      1000 (454)
Bis(2-chloroethyl) ether................................       10 (4.54)
Bis(2-ethylhexyl)phthalate..............................      100 (45.4)
Bromoacetone............................................      1000 (454)
Bromoform...............................................      100 (45.4)
4-Bromophenyl phenyl ether..............................      100 (45.4)
Brucine.................................................      100 (45.4)
1,3-Butadiene...........................................       10 (4.54)

[[Page 278]]

 
1,3-Butadiene, 1,1,2,3,4,4-hexachloro-..................       1 (0.454)
1-Butanamine, N-butyl-N-nitroso-........................       10 (4.54)
1-Butanol...............................................     5000 (2270)
2-Butanone..............................................     5000 (2270)
2-Butanone, 3,3-dimethyl-1-(methylthio)-,O-                   100 (45.4)
 [(methylamino)carbonyl] oxime..........................
2-Butanone peroxide.....................................       10 (4.54)
2-Butenal...............................................      100 (45.4)
2-Butene, 1,4-dichloro-.................................       1 (0.454)
2-Butenoic acid, 2-methyl-,7[[2,3-dihydroxy-2-(1-              10 (4.54)
 methoxyethyl)-3-methyl-1-oxobutoxy]methyl]-2,3,5,7a-
 tetrahydro-1H-pyrrolizin-1-yl ester, [1S-
 [1alpha(Z),7(2S*, 3R*), 7alpha]]-......................
Butyl acetate...........................................     5000 (2270)
    iso-Butyl acetate...................................  ..............
    sec-Butyl acetate...................................  ..............
    tert-Butyl acetate..................................  ..............
n-Butyl alcohol.........................................     5000 (2270)
Butylamine..............................................      1000 (454)
    iso-Butylamine......................................  ..............
    sec-Butylamine......................................  ..............
    tert-Butylamine.....................................  ..............
Butyl benzyl phthalate..................................      100 (45.4)
n-Butyl phthalate.......................................       10 (4.54)
Butyric acid............................................     5000 (2270)
    iso-Butyric acid....................................  ..............
Cacodylic acid..........................................       1 (0.454)
Cadmium [cent]..........................................       10 (4.54)
Cadmium acetate.........................................       10 (4.54)
Cadmium bromide.........................................       10 (4.54)
Cadmium chloride........................................       10 (4.54)
Calcium arsenate........................................       1 (0.454)
Calcium arsenite........................................       1 (0.454)
Calcium carbide.........................................       10 (4.54)
Calcium chromate........................................       10 (4.54)
Calcium cyanamide.......................................      1000 (454)
Calcium cyanide.........................................       10 (4.54)
Calcium cyanide Ca(CN)2.................................       10 (4.54)
Calcium dodecylbenzene sulfonate........................      1000 (454)
Calcium hypochlorite....................................       10 (4.54)
Camphene, octachloro-...................................       1 (0.454)
Captan..................................................       10 (4.54)
Carbamic acid, ethyl ester..............................      100 (45.4)
Carbamic acid, methylnitroso-, ethyl ester..............       1 (0.454)
Carbamic chloride, dimethyl-............................       1 (0.454)
Carbamide, thio-........................................       10 (4.54)
Carbamimidoselenoic acid................................      1000 (454)
Carbamothioic acid, bis (1-methylethyl)-, S-(2,3-             100 (45.4)
 dichloro-2-propenyl) ester.............................
Carbaryl................................................      100 (45.4)
Carbofuran..............................................       10 (4.54)
Carbon bisulfide........................................      100 (45.4)
Carbon disulfide........................................      100 (45.4)
Carbonic acid, dithallium (I+)..........................      100 (45.4)
Carbonic dichloride.....................................       10 (4.54)
Carbonic difluoride.....................................      1000 (454)
Carbonochloridic acid, methyl ester.....................      1000 (454)
Carbon oxyfluoride......................................      1000 (454)
Carbon tetrachloride....................................       10 (4.54)
Carbonyl sulfide........................................      100 (45.4)
Catechol................................................      100 (45.4)
Chloral.................................................      5000(2270)
Chloramben..............................................      100 (45.4)
Chlorambucil............................................       10 (4.54)
Chlordane...............................................       1 (0.454)
Chlordane, alpha & gamma isomers........................       1 (0.454)
Chlordane, technical....................................       1 (0.454)
Chlorine................................................       10 (4.54)
Chlornaphazine..........................................      100 (45.4)
Chloroacetaldehyde......................................      1000 (454)
Chloroacetic acid.......................................      100 (45.4)
2-Chloroacetophenone....................................      100 (45.4)
p-Chloroaniline.........................................      1000 (454)
Chlorobenzene...........................................      100 (45.4)

[[Page 279]]

 
Chlorobenzilate.........................................       10 (4.54)
4-Chloro-m-cresol.......................................     5000 (2270)
p-Chloro-m-cresol.......................................     5000 (2270)
Chlorodibromomethane....................................      100 (45.4)
Chloroethane............................................      100 (45.4)
2-Chloroethyl vinyl ether...............................      1000 (454)
Chloroform..............................................       10 (4.54)
Chloromethane...........................................      100 (45.4)
Chloromethyl methyl ether...............................       10 (4.54)
beta-Chloronaphthalene..................................     5000 (2270)
2-Chloronaphthalene.....................................     5000 (2270)
2-Chlorophenol..........................................      100 (45.4)
o-Chlorophenol..........................................      100 (45.4)
4-Chlorophenyl phenyl ether.............................     5000 (2270)
1-(o-Chlorophenyl)thiourea..............................      100 (45.4)
Chloroprene.............................................      100 (45.4)
3-Chloropropionitrile...................................      1000 (454)
Chlorosulfonic acid.....................................      1000 (454)
4-Chloro-o-toluidine, hydrochloride.....................      100 (45.4)
Chlorpyrifos............................................       1 (0.454)
Chromic acetate.........................................      1000 (454)
Chromic acid............................................       10 (4.54)
Chromic acid H2CrO4, calcium salt.......................       10 (4.54)
Chromic sulfate.........................................      1000 (454)
Chromium [cent].........................................     5000 (2270)
Chromous chloride.......................................      1000 (454)
Chrysene................................................      100 (45.4)
Cobaltous bromide.......................................      1000 (454)
Cobaltous formate.......................................      1000 (454)
Cobaltous sulfamate.....................................      1000 (454)
Coke Oven Emissions.....................................       1 (0.454)
Copper [cent]...........................................     5000 (2270)
Copper chloride @.......................................       10 (4.54)
Copper cyanide..........................................       10 (4.54)
Copper cyanide CuCN.....................................       10 (4.54)
Coumaphos...............................................       10 (4.54)
Creosote................................................       1 (0.454)
Cresols (isomers and mixture)...........................      100 (45.4)
m-Cresol................................................      100 (45.4)
o-Cresolo...............................................      100 (45.4)
p-Cresol................................................      100 (45.4)
Cresylic acid (isomers and mixture).....................      100 (45.4)
m-Cresylic acid.........................................      100 (45.4)
o-Cresylic acid.........................................      100 (45.4)
p-Cresylic acid.........................................      100 (45.4)
Crotonaldehyde..........................................      100 (45.4)
Cumene..................................................     5000 (2270)
Cupric acetate..........................................      100 (45.4)
Cupric acetoarsenite....................................       1 (0.454)
Cupric chloride.........................................       10 (4.54)
Cupric nitrate..........................................      100 (45.4)
Cupric oxalate..........................................      100 (45.4)
Cupric sulfate..........................................       10 (4.54)
Cupric sulfate ammoniated...............................      100 (45.4)
Cupric tartrate.........................................      100 (45.4)
Cyanides (soluble salts and complexes) not otherwise           10 (4.54)
 specified..............................................
Cyanogen................................................      100 (45.4)
Cyanogen bromide........................................      1000 (454)
Cyanogen bromide (CN)Br.................................      1000 (454)
Cyanogen chloride.......................................       10 (4.54)
Cyanogen chloride (CN)Cl................................       10 (4.54)
2,5-Cyclohexadiene-1,4-dione............................       10 (4.54)
Cyclohexane.............................................      1000 (454)
Cyclohexane, 1,2,3,4,5,6-hexachloro-,                          1 (0.454)
 (1alpha,2alpha,3beta,4alpha,5alpha,6beta)-.............
Cyclohexanone...........................................     5000 (2270)
2-Cyclohexyl-4,6-dinitrophenol..........................      100 (45.4)
1,3-Cyclopentadiene, 1,2,3,4,5,5-hexachloro-............       10 (4.54)
Cyclophosphamide........................................       10 (4.54)
2,4-D Acid..............................................      100 (45.4)
2,4-D Ester.............................................      100 (45.4)

[[Page 280]]

 
Daunomycin..............................................       10 (4.54)
DDD.....................................................       1 (0.454)
4,4'-DDD................................................       1 (0.454)
DDE.....................................................       1 (0.454)
4,4'-DDE................................................       1 (0.454)
DDT.....................................................       1 (0.454)
4,4'-DDT................................................       1 (0.454)
Diallate................................................      100 (45.4)
Diamine.................................................       1 (0.454)
Diazinon................................................       1 (0.454)
Diazomethane............................................      100 (45.4)
Dibenz[a,h]anthracene...................................       1 (0.454)
1,2:5,6-Dibenzanthracene................................       1 (0.454)
Dibenzo[a,h]anthracene..................................       1 (0.454)
Dibenzofuran............................................      100 (45.4)
Dibenz[a,i]pyrene.......................................       10 (4.54)
1,2-Dibromo-3-chloropropane.............................       1 (0.454)
Dibutyl phthalate.......................................       10 (4.54)
Di-n-butyl phthalate....................................       10 (4.54)
Dicamba.................................................      1000 (454)
Dichlobenil.............................................      100 (45.4)
Dichlone................................................       1 (0.454)
Dichlorobenzene.........................................      100 (45.4)
1,2-Dichlorobenzene.....................................      100 (45.4)
1,3-Dichlorobenzene.....................................      100 (45.4)
1,4-Dichlorobenzene.....................................      100 (45.4)
m-Dichlorobenzene.......................................      100 (45.4)
o-Dichlorobenzene.......................................      100 (45.4)
p-Dichlorobenzene.......................................      100 (45.4)
3,3'-Dichlorobenzidine..................................       1 (0.454)
Dichlorobromomethane....................................     5000 (2270)
1,4-Dichloro-2-butene...................................       1 (0.454)
Dichlorodifluoromethane.................................     5000 (2270)
1,1-Dichloroethane......................................      1000 (454)
1,2-Dichloroethane......................................      100 (45.4)
1,1-Dichloroethylene....................................      100 (45.4)
1,2-Dichloroethylene....................................      1000 (454)
Dichloroethyl ether.....................................       10 (4.54)
Dichloroisopropyl--ether................................      1000 (454)
Dichloromethane @.......................................      1000 (454)
Dichloromethoxy ethane..................................      1000 (454)
Dicholormethyl ether....................................       10 (4.54)
2,4-Dichlorophenol......................................      100 (45.4)
2,6-Dichlorophenol......................................      100 (45.4)
Dichlorophenylarsine....................................       1 (0.454)
Dichloropropane.........................................      1000 (454)
    1,1-Dichloropropane.................................  ..............
    1,3-Dichloropropane.................................  ..............
1,2-Dichloropropane.....................................      1000 (454)
Dichloropropane - Dichloropropene (mixture).............      100 (45.4)
Dichloropropene.........................................      100 (45.4)
    2,3-Dichloropropene.................................  ..............
1,3-Dichloropropene.....................................      100 (45.4)
2,2-Dichloropropionic acid..............................     5000 (2270)
Dichlorvos..............................................       10 (4.54)
Dicofol.................................................       10 (4.54)
Dieldrin................................................       1 (0.454)
1,2:3,4-Diepoxybutane...................................       10 (4.54)
Diethanolamine..........................................      100 (45.4)
Diethylamine............................................      1000 (454)
N,N-diethylaniline......................................      1000 (454)
Diethylarsine...........................................       1 (0.454)
1,4-Diethylenedioxide...................................      100 (45.4)
Diethylhexyl phthalate..................................      100 (45.4)
N,N'-Diethylhydrazine...................................       10 (4.54)
O,O-Diethyl S-methyl dithiophosphate....................     5000 (2270)
Diethyl-p-nitrophenyl phosphate.........................      100 (45.4)
Diethyl phthalate.......................................       1000(454)
O,O-Diethyl O-pyrazinyl phosphorothioate................      100 (45.4)
Diethylstilbestrol......................................       1 (0.454)

[[Page 281]]

 
Diethyl sulfate.........................................       10 (4.54)
Dihydrosafrole..........................................       10 (4.54)
Diisopropyl fluorophosphate.............................      100 (45.4)
1,4,5,8-Dimethanonaphthalene............................       1 (0.454)
1,2,3,4,10,10-hexachloro-1,4,4a,5,8,8a-hexahydro,
 (1alpha,4alpha,4abeta,5abeta,8beta,8abeta)-............
1,4,5,8-Dimethanonaphthalene,1,2,3,4,10,10-10-hexachloro-      1 (0.454)
 1,4,4a,5,8,8a-hexahydro-
 ,(1alpha,4alpha,4abeta,5alpha,8alpha,8abeta)-..........
2,7:3,6-Dimethanonaphth[2,3-b]oxirene, 3,4,5,6,9,9-            1 (0.454)
 hexachloro-1a,2,2a,3,6,6a,7,7a-........................
  octahydro-,(1aalpha,2beta,2abeta,3alpha,6alpha,6abeta,
  7beta,7aalpha)-.......................................
2,7:3,6-Dimethanonaphth[2,3-b]oxirene, 3,4,5,6,9,9-            1 (0.454)
 hexachloro-1a,2,2a,3,6,6a,7,7a-........................
  octahydro-,(1aalpha,2beta,2aalpha,3beta,6beta,6aalpha,
  7beta,7aalpha)-.......................................
Dimethoate..............................................       10 (4.54)
3,3'-Dimethoxybenzidine.................................       10 (4.54)
Dimethylamine...........................................      1000 (454)
p-Dimethylaminoazobenzene...............................       10 (4.54)
N,N-dimethylaniline.....................................      100 (45.4)
7,12-Dimethylbenz[a]anthracene..........................       1 (0.454)
3,3'-Dimethylbenzidine..................................       10 (4.54)
alpha,alpha-Dimethylbenzylhydroperoxide.................       10 (4.54)
Dimethylcarbamoyl chloride..............................       1 (0.454)
Dimethylformamide.......................................      100 (45.4)
1,1-Dimethylhydrazine...................................       10 (4.54)
1,2-Dimethylhydrazine...................................       1 (0.454)
Dimethylhydrazine, unsymmetrical @......................       10 (4.54)
alpha,alpha-Dimethylphenethylamine......................     5000 (2270)
12,4-Dimethylphenol.....................................      100 (45.4)
Dimethyl phthalate......................................     5000 (2270)
Dimethyl sulfate........................................      100 (45.4)
Dinitrobenzene (mixed)..................................      100 (45.4)
    m-Dinitrobenzene....................................  ..............
    o-Dinitrobenzene....................................  ..............
    p-Dinitrobenzene....................................
4,6-Dinitro-o-cresol and salts..........................       10 (4.54)
Dinitrogen tetroxide @..................................       10 (4.54)
Dinitrophenol...........................................       10 (4.54)
    2,5-Dinitrophenol...................................  ..............
2,4-Dinitrophenol.......................................       10 (4.54)
Dinitrotoluene..........................................       10 (4.54)
    3,4-Dinitrotoluene..................................  ..............
2,4-Dinitrotoluene......................................       10 (4.54)
2,6-Dinitrotoluene......................................      100 (45.4)
Dinoseb.................................................      1000 (454)
Di-n-octyl phthalate....................................     5000 (2270)
1,4-Dioxane.............................................      100 (45.4)
1,2-Diphenylhydrazine...................................       10 (4.54)
Diphosphoramide, octamethyl-............................      100 (45.4)
Diphosphoric acid, tetraethyl ester.....................       10 (4.54)
Dipropylamine...........................................     5000 (2270)
Di-n-propylnitrosamine..................................       10 (4.54)
Diquat..................................................      1000 (454)
Disulfoton..............................................       1 (0.454)
Dithiobiuret............................................      100 (45.4)
Diuron..................................................      100 (45.4)
Dodecylbenzenesulfonic acid.............................      1000 (454)
2,4-D, salts and esters.................................      100 (45.4)
Endosulfan..............................................       1 (0.454)
alpha-Endosulfan........................................       1 (0.454)
beta-Endosulfan.........................................       1 (0.454)
Endosulfan sulfate......................................       1 (0.454)
Endothall...............................................      1000 (454)
Endrin..................................................       1 (0.454)
Endrin, & metabolites...................................       1 (0.454)
Endrin aldehyde.........................................       1 (0.454)
Epichlorohydrin.........................................      100 (45.4)
Epinephrine.............................................      1000 (454)
1,2-Epoxybutane.........................................      100 (45.4)
Ethanal.................................................      1000 (454)
Ethanamine, N-ethyl-N-nitroso-..........................       1 (0.454)

[[Page 282]]

 
Ethane, 1,2-dibromo-....................................       1 (0.454)
Ethane, 1,1-dichloro-...................................      1000 (454)
Ethane, 1,2-dichloro-...................................      100 (45.4)
Ethane, hexachloro-.....................................      100 (45.4)
Ethane, 1,1'-[methylenebis(oxy)]bis(2-chloro-...........      1000 (454)
Ethane, 1,1'-oxybis-....................................      100 (45.4)
Ethane, 1,1'-oxybis(2-chloro-...........................       10 (4.54)
Ethane, pentachloro-....................................       10 (4.54)
Ethane, 1,1,1,2-tetrachloro-............................      100 (45.4)
Ethane, 1,1,2,2-tetrachloro-............................      100 (45.4)
Ethane, 1,1,2-trichloro-................................      100 (45.4)
Ethane, 1,1,1-trichloro-................................      1000 (454)
1,2-Ethanediamine, N,N-dimethyl-N'-2-pyridinyl-N'-(2-        5000 (2270)
 thienyl-methyl)-.......................................
Ethanedinitrile.........................................      100 (45.4)
Ethanenitrile...........................................     5000 (2270)
Ethanethioamide.........................................       10 (4.54)
Ethanimidothioic acid, N-[[(methylamino)carbonyl] oxy]-,      100 (45.4)
 methyl ester...........................................
Ethanol, 2-ethoxy-......................................      1000 (454)
Ethanol, 2,2'-(nitrosoimino)bis-........................       1 (0.454)
Ethanone, 1-phenyl-.....................................     5000 (2270)
Ethanoyl chloride.......................................     5000 (2270)
Ethene, chloro-.........................................       1 (0.454)
Ethene, 2-chloroethoxy-.................................      1000 (454)
Ethene, 1,1-dichloro-...................................      100 (45.4)
Ethene, 1,2-dichloro- (E)...............................      1000 (454)
Ethene, tetrachloro-....................................      100 (45.4)
Ethene, trichloro-......................................      100 (45.4)
Ethion..................................................       10 (4.54)
Ethyl acetate...........................................     5000 (2270)
Ethyl acrylate..........................................      1000 (454)
Ethylbenzene............................................      1000 (454)
Ethyl carbamate (Urethan)...............................      100 (45.4)
Ethyl chloride @........................................      100 (45.4)
Ethyl cyanide...........................................       10 (4.54)
Ethylene dibromide......................................       1 (0.454)
Ethylene dichloride.....................................      100 (45.4)
Ethylene glycol.........................................     5000 (2270)
Ethylene glycol monoethyl ether.........................      1000 (454)
Ethylene oxide..........................................       10 (4.54)
Ethylenebisdithiocarbamic acid..........................     5000 (2270)
Ethylenebisdithiocarbamic acid, salts and esters........     5000 (2270)
Ethylenediamine.........................................     5000 (2270)
Ethylenediamine tetraacetic acid (EDTA).................     5000 (2270)
Ethylenethiourea........................................       10 (4.54)
Ethylenimine............................................       1 (0.454)
Ethyl ether.............................................      100 (45.4)
Ethylidene dichloride...................................      1000 (454)
Ethyl methacrylate......................................      1000 (454)
Ethyl methanesulfonate..................................       1 (0.454)
Ethyl methyl ketone @...................................     5000 (2270)
Famphurdimethylester....................................      1000 (454)
Ferric ammonium citrate.................................      1000 (454)
Ferric ammonium oxalate.................................      1000 (454)
Ferric chloride.........................................      1000 (454)
Ferric fluoride.........................................      100 (45.4)
Ferric nitrate..........................................      1000 (454)
Ferric sulfate..........................................      1000 (454)
Ferrous ammonium sulfate................................      1000 (454)
Ferrous chloride........................................      100 (45.4)
Ferrous sulfate.........................................      1000 (454)
Fluoranthene............................................      100 (45.4)
Fluorene................................................     5000 (2270)
Fluorine................................................       10 (4.54)
Fluoroacetamide.........................................      100 (45.4)
Fluoroacetic acid, sodium salt..........................       10 (4.54)
Formaldehyde............................................      100 (45.4)
Formic acid.............................................     5000 (2270)
Fulminic acid, mercury(2+)salt..........................       10 (4.54)
Fumaric acid............................................     5000 (2270)
Furan...................................................      100 (45.4)

[[Page 283]]

 
Furan, tetrahydro-......................................      1000 (454)
2-Furancarboxaldehyde...................................     5000 (2270)
2,5-Furandione..........................................     5000 (2270)
Furfural................................................     5000 (2270)
Furfuran................................................      100 (45.4)
Glucopyranose, 2-deoxy-2-(3-methyl-3-nitrosoureido)-....       1 (0.454)
D-Glucose, 2-deoxy-2-[[methylnitrosoamino)-                    1 (0.454)
 carbonyl]amino]-.......................................
Glycidylaldehyde........................................       10 (4.54)
Guanidine, N-methyl-N'-nitro-N-nitroso-.................       10 (4.54)
Guthion.................................................       1 (0.454)
Heptachlor..............................................       1 (0.454)
Heptachlor epoxide......................................       1 (0.454)
Hexachlorobenzene.......................................       10 (4.54)
Hexachlorobutadiene.....................................       1 (0.454)
Hexachlorocyclohexane (gamma isomer)....................       1 (0.454)
Hexachlorocyclopentadiene...............................       10 (4.54)
Hexachloroethane........................................      100 (45.4)
1,2,3,4,10-10-Hexachloro-1,4,4a,5,8,8a-hexahydro-1,4:5,8-      1 (0.454)
 endo,exo-dimethanonaphthalene..........................
Hexachlorophene.........................................      100 (45.4)
Hexachloropropene.......................................      1000 (454)
Hexaethyl tetraphosphate................................      100 (45.4)
Hexamethylene-1,6-diisocyanate..........................      100 (45.4)
Hexamethylphosphoramide.................................       1 (0.454)
Hexane..................................................     5000 (2270)
Hydrazine...............................................       1 (0.454)
Hydrazine, 1,2-diethyl-.................................       10 (4.54)
Hydrazine, 1,1-dimethyl-................................       10 (4.54)
Hydrazine, 1,2-dimethyl-................................       1 (0.454)
Hydrazine, 1,2-diphenyl-................................       10 (4.54)
Hydrazine, methyl-......................................       10 (4.54)
Hydrazinecarbothioamide.................................      100 (45.4)
Hydrochloric acid.......................................     5000 (2270)
Hydrocyanic acid........................................       10 (4.54)
Hydrofluoric acid.......................................      100 (45.4)
Hydrogen chloride.......................................     5000 (2270)
Hydrogen cyanide........................................       10 (4.54)
Hydrogen fluoride.......................................      100 (45.4)
Hydrogen phosphide......................................      100 (45.4)
Hydrogen sulfide........................................      100 (45.4)
Hydrogen sulfide H2S....................................      100 (45.4)
Hydroperoxide, 1-methyl-1-phenylethyl-..................       10 (4.54)
Hydroquinone............................................      100 (45.4)
2-Imidazolidinethione...................................       10 (4.54)
Indeno(1,2,3-cd)pyrene..................................      100 (45.4)
1,3-Isobenzofurandione..................................     5000 (2270)
Isobutyl alcohol........................................     5000 (2270)
Isodrin.................................................       1 (0.454)
Isophorone..............................................     5000 (2270)
Isoprene................................................      100 (45.4)
Isopropanolamine dodecylbenzene sulfonate...............      1000 (454)
Isosafrole..............................................      100 (45.4)
3(2H)-Isoxazolone, 5-(aminomethyl)-.....................      1000 (454)
Keponedecachloroc-tahydro-..............................       1 (0.454)
Lasiocarpine............................................       10 (4.54)
Lead [cent].............................................       10 (4.54)
Lead acetate............................................       10 (4.54)
Lead arsenate...........................................       1 (0.454)
Lead, bis(acetato-O)tetrahydroxytri.....................       10 (4.54)
Lead chloride...........................................       10 (4.54)
Lead fluoborate.........................................       10 (4.54)
Lead fluoride...........................................       10 (4.54)
Lead iodide.............................................       10 (4.54)
Lead nitrate............................................       10 (4.54)
Lead phosphate..........................................       10 (4.54)
Lead stearate...........................................       10 (4.54)
Lead subacetate.........................................       10 (4.54)
Lead sulfate............................................       10 (4.54)
Lead sulfide............................................       10 (4.54)
Lead thiocyanate........................................       10 (4.54)
Lindane.................................................       1 (0.454)

[[Page 284]]

 
Lithium chromate........................................       10 (4.54)
Malathion...............................................      100 (45.4)
Maleic acid.............................................     5000 (2270)
Maleic anhydride........................................     5000 (2270)
Maleic hydrazide........................................     5000 (2270)
Malononitrile...........................................      1000 (454)
MDI.....................................................     5000 (2270)
Melphalan...............................................       1 (0.454)
Mercaptodimethur........................................       10 (4.54)
Mercuric cyanide........................................       1 (0.454)
Mercuric nitrate........................................       10 (4.54)
Mercuric sulfate........................................       10 (4.54)
Mercuric thiocyanate....................................       10 (4.54)
Mercurous nitrate.......................................       10 (4.54)
Mercury.................................................       1 (0.454)
Mercury, (acetato-O)phenyl-.............................      100 (45.4)
Mercury fulminate.......................................       10 (4.54)
Methacrylonitrile.......................................      1000 (454)
Methanamine, N-methyl-..................................      1000 (454)
Methanamine, N-methyl-N-nitroso.........................       10 (4.54)
Methane, bromo-.........................................      1000 (454)
Methane, chloro-........................................      100 (45.4)
Methane, chloromethoxy-.................................       10 (4.54)
Methane, dibromo-.......................................      1000 (454)
Methane, dichloro-......................................      1000 (454)
Methane, dichlorodifluoro-..............................     5000 (2270)
Methane, iodo-..........................................      100 (45.4)
Methane, isocyanato-....................................       10 (4.54)
Methane, oxybis(chloro-.................................       10 (4.54)
Methane, tetrachloro-...................................       10 (4.54)
Methane, tetranitro-....................................       10 (4.54)
Methane, tribromo-......................................      100 (45.4)
Methane, trichloro-.....................................       10 (4.54)
Methane, trichlorofluoro-...............................     5000 (2270)
Methanesulfenyl chloride, trichloro-....................      100 (45.4)
Methanesulfonic acid, ethyl ester.......................       1 (0.454)
Methanethiol............................................      100 (45.4)
6,9-Methano-2,4,3-benzodioxathiepin, 6,7,8,9,10,10-            1 (0.454)
 hexachloro-1,5,5a,6,9,9a-hexahydro-, 3-oxide...........
Methanoic acid..........................................     5000 (2270)
4,7-Methano-1H-indene, 1,4,5,6,7,8,8-heptachloro-              1 (0.454)
 a,4,7,7a-tetrahydro-...................................
4,7-Methano-1H-indene, 1,4,5,6,7,8,8-octachloro-               1 (0.454)
 2,3,3a,4,7,7a-hexahydro-...............................
Methanol................................................     5000 (2270)
Methapyrilene...........................................     5000 (2270)
1,3,4-Metheno-2H-cyclobutal[cd]-pentalen-2-one,                1 (0.454)
 1,1a,3,3a,4,5,5,5a,5b,6-decachloroctahydro-............
Methomyl................................................      100 (45.4)
Methoxychlor............................................       1 (0.454)
Methyl alcohol..........................................     5000 (2270)
Methylamine @...........................................      100 (45.4)
Methyl bromide..........................................      1000 (454)
1-Methylbutadiene.......................................      100 (45.4)
Methyl chloride.........................................      100 (45.4)
Methyl chlorocarbonate..................................      1000 (454)
Methyl chloroform.......................................      1000 (454)
Methyl chloroformate....................................      1000 (454)
Methylchloromethyl ether @..............................       1 (0.454)
3-Methylcholanthrene....................................       10 (4.54)
4,4'-Methylenebis(2-chloroaniline)......................       10 (4.54)
Methylene bromide.......................................      1000 (454)
Methylene chloride......................................      1000 (454)
4,4'-Methylenedianiline.................................       10 (4.54)
Methylene diphenyl diisocyanate.........................     5000 (2270)
Methylene oxide.........................................      100 (45.4)
Methyl ethyl ketone (MEK)...............................     5000 (2270)
Methyl ethyl ketone peroxide............................       10 (4.54)
Methyl hydrazine........................................       10 (4.54)
Methyl iodide...........................................      100 (45.4)
Methyl isobutyl ketone..................................     5000 (2270)
Methyl isocyanate.......................................       10 (4.54)
2-Methyllactonitrile....................................       10 (4.54)
Methyl mercaptan........................................      100 (45.4)

[[Page 285]]

 
Methyl methacrylate.....................................      1000 (454)
Methyl parathion........................................      100 (45.4)
4-Methyl-2-pentanone....................................     5000 (2270)
Methyl tert-butyl ether.................................      1000 (454)
Methylthiouracil........................................       10 (4.54)
Mevinphos...............................................       10 (4.54)
Mexacarbate.............................................      1000 (454)
Mitomycin C.............................................       10 (4.54)
MNNG....................................................       10 (4.54)
Monoethylamine..........................................      100 (45.4)
Monomethylamine.........................................      100 (45.4)
Muscimol................................................      1000 (454)
Naled...................................................       10 (4.54)
5,12-Naphthacenedione, 8-acetyl-10-[3-amino-2,3,6-             10 (4.54)
 trideoxy-alpha-L-lyxo-hexopyranosyl) oxy]-7,8,9,10-
 tetrahydro-6,8,11-trihydroxy-1-methoxy-, (8S-cis)-.....
Naphthalenamine, N,N-bis(2-chloroethyl)-................      100 (45.4)
Naphthalene.............................................      100 (45.4)
Naphthalene, 2-chloro-..................................     5000 (2270)
1,4-Naphthalenedione....................................     5000 (2270)
2,7-Naphthalenedisulfonic acid, 3,3'-[(3,3'- dimethyl-         10 (4.54)
 (l,1'-biphenyl)-4,4'-diyl)-bis(azo)]bis(5-amino-4-
 hydroxy)-tetrasodium salt..............................
Naphthenic acid.........................................      100 (45.4)
1,4-Naphthoquinone......................................     5000 (2270)
alpha-Naphthylamine.....................................      100 (45.4)
beta-Naphthylamine......................................       1 (0.454)
1-Naphthylamine.........................................      100 (45.4)
2-Naphthylamine.........................................       1 (0.454)
alpha-Naphthylthiourea..................................      100 (45.4)
Nickel [cent]...........................................      100 (45.4)
Nickel ammonium sulfate.................................      100 (45.4)
Nickel carbonyl.........................................       10 (4.54)
Nickel carbonyl Ni(CO)4,(T-4)-..........................       10 (4.54)
Nickel chloride.........................................      100 (45.4)
Nickel cyanide..........................................       10 (4.54)
Nickel cyanide Ni(CN)2..................................       10 (4.54)
Nickel hydroxide........................................       10 (4.54)
Nickel nitrate..........................................      100 (45.4)
Nickel sulfate..........................................      100 (45.4)
Nicotine and salts......................................      100 (45.4)
Nitric acid.............................................      1000 (454)
Nitric acid, thallium(1+) salt..........................      100 (45.4)
Nitric oxide............................................       10 (4.54)
p-Nitroaniline..........................................     5000 (2270)
Nitrobenzene............................................      1000 (454)
4-nitrobiphenyl.........................................       10 (4.54)
Nitrogen dioxide........................................       10 (4.54)
Nitrogen oxide NO.......................................       10 (4.54)
Nitrogen oxide NO2......................................       10 (4.54)
Nitroglycerine..........................................       10 (4.54)
Nitrophenol (mixed).....................................      100 (45.4)
    m-..................................................  ..............
    o-..................................................  ..............
    p-..................................................  ..............
o-Nitrophenol...........................................      100 (45.4)
p-Nitrophenol...........................................      100 (45.4)
2-Nitrophenol...........................................      100 (45.4)
4-Nitrophenol...........................................      100 (45.4)
2-Nitropropane..........................................       10 (4.54)
N-Nitrosodi-n-butylamine................................       10 (4.54)
N-Nitrosodiethanolamine.................................       1 (0.454)
N-Nitrosodiethylamine...................................       1 (0.454)
N-Nitrosodimethylamine..................................       10 (4.54)
N-Nitrosodiphenylamine..................................      100 (45.4)
N-Nitroso-N-ethylurea...................................       1 (0.454)
N-Nitroso-N-methylurea..................................       1 (0.454)
N-Nitroso-N-methylurethane..............................       1 (0.454)
N-Nitrosomethylvinylamine...............................       10 (4.54)
n-Nitrosomorpholine.....................................       1 (0.454)
N-Nitrosopiperidine.....................................       10 (4.54)
N-Nitrosopyrrolidine....................................       1 (0.454)

[[Page 286]]

 
Nitrotoluene............................................      1000 (454)
    m-Nitrotoluene......................................  ..............
    o-Nitrotoluene......................................  ..............
    p-Nitrotoluene......................................  ..............
5-Nitro-o-toluidine.....................................      100 (45.4)
Octamethylpyrophosphoramide.............................      100 (45.4)
Osmium oxide OsO4 (T-4)-................................      1000 (454)
Osmium tetroxide........................................      1000 (454)
7-Oxabicyclo[2.2.1]heptane-2,3-dicarboxylic acid........      1000 (454)
1,2-Oxathiolane, 2,2-dioxide............................       10 (4.54)
2H-1,3,2-Oxazaphosphorin-2-amine, N,N-bis(2-                   10 (4.54)
 chloroethyl)tetrahydro-, 2-oxide.......................
Oxirane.................................................       10 (4.54)
Oxiranecarboxyaldehyde..................................       10 (4.54)
Oxirane, (chloromethyl)-................................      100 (45.4)
Paraformaldehyde........................................      1000 (454)
Paraldehyde.............................................      1000 (454)
Parathion...............................................       10 (4.54)
Pentachlorobenzene......................................       10 (4.54)
Pentachloroethane.......................................       10 (4.54)
Pentachloronitrobenzene (PCNB)..........................      100 (45.4)
Pentachlorophenol.......................................       10 (4.54)
1,3-Pentadiene..........................................      100 (45.4)
Perchloroethylene.......................................      100 (45.4)
Perchloromethyl mercaptan @.............................      100 (45.4)
Phenacetin..............................................      100 (45.4)
Phenanthrene............................................     5000 (2270)
Phenol..................................................      1000 (454)
Phenol, 2-chloro-.......................................      100 (45.4)
Phenol, 4-chloro-3-methyl-..............................     5000 (2270)
Phenol, 2-cyclohexyl-4,6-dinitro-.......................      100 (45.4)
Phenol, 2,4-dichloro-...................................      100 (45.4)
Phenol, 2,6-dichloro-...................................      100 (45.4)
Phenol, 4,4'-(1,2-diethyl-1,2-ethenediyl)bis-, (E)......       1 (0.454)
Phenol, 2,4-dimethyl-...................................      100 (45.4)
Phenol, 2,4-dinitro-....................................       10 (4.54)
Phenol, methyl-.........................................      100 (45.4)
Phenol, 2-methyl-4,6-dinitro-...........................       10 (4.54)
Phenol, 2,2'-methylenebis[3,4,6-trichloro-..............      100 (45.4)
Phenol, 2-(1-methylpropyl)-4,6-dinitro..................      1000 (454)
Phenol, 4-nitro-........................................      100 (45.4)
Phenol, pentachloro-....................................       10 (4.54)
Phenol, 2,3,4,6-tetrachloro-............................       10 (4.54)
Phenol, 2,4,5-trichloro-................................       10 (4.54)
Phenol, 2,4,6-trichloro-................................       10 (4.54)
Phenol, 2,4,6-trinitro-, ammonium salt..................       10 (4.54)
L-Phenylalanine, 4-[bis(2-chloroethyl)aminol]...........       1 (0.454)
p-Phenylenediamine......................................     5000 (2270)
1,10-(1,2-Phenylene)pyrene..............................      100 (45.4)
Phenyl mercaptan @......................................      100 (45.4)
Phenylmercuric acetate..................................      100 (45.4)
Phenylthiourea..........................................      100 (45.4)
Phorate.................................................       10 (4.54)
Phosgene................................................       10 (4.54)
Phosphine...............................................      100 (45.4)
Phosphoric acid.........................................     5000 (2270)
Phosphoric acid, diethyl 4-nitrophenyl ester............      100 (45.4)
Phosphoric acid, lead(2+) salt (2:3)....................       10 (4.54)
Phosphorodithioic acid, O,O-diethyl S-[2-                      1 (0.454)
 (ethylthio)ethyl]ester.................................
Phosphorodithioic acid, O,O-diethyl S-(ethylthio),             10 (4.54)
 methyl ester...........................................
Phosphorodithioic acid, O,O-diethyl S-methyl ester......     5000 (2270)
Phosphorodithioic acid, O,O-dimethyl S-[2 (methylamino)-       10 (4.54)
 2-oxoethyl] ester......................................
Phosphorofluoridic acid, bis(1-methylethyl) ester.......      100 (45.4)
Phosphorothioic acid, O,O-diethyl O-(4-nitrophenyl)            10 (4.54)
 ester..................................................
Phosphorothioic acid, O,O-diethyl O-pyrazinyl ester.....      100 (45.4)
Phosphorothioic acid, O,O-dimethyl O-(4-nitrophenyl)          100 (45.4)
 ester..................................................
Phosphorothioic acid, O,[4-[(dimethylamino)sulfonyl]          1000 (454)
 phenyl] O,O-dimethyl ester.............................
Phosphorus..............................................       1 (0.454)
Phosphorus oxychloride..................................      1000 (454)
Phosphorus pentasulfide.................................      100 (45.4)
Phosphorus sulfide......................................      100 (45.4)

[[Page 287]]

 
Phosphorus trichloride..................................      1000 (454)
Phthalic anhydride......................................     5000 (2270)
2-Picoline..............................................     5000 (2270)
Piperidine, 1-nitroso-..................................       10 (4.54)
Plumbane, tetraethyl-...................................       10 (4.54)
POLYCHLORINATED BIPHENYLS (PCBs)........................       1 (0.454)
Potassium arsenate......................................       1 (0.454)
Potassium arsenite......................................       1 (0.454)
Potassium bichromate....................................       10 (4.54)
Potassium chromate......................................       10 (4.54)
Potassium cyanide.......................................       10 (4.54)
Potassium cyanide K(CN).................................       10 (4.54)
Potassium hydroxide.....................................      1000 (454)
Potassium permanganate..................................      100 (45.4)
Potassium silver cyanide................................       1 (0.454)
Pronamide...............................................     5000 (2270)
Propanal, 2-methyl-2-(methylthio)-,O-                          1 (0.454)
 [(methylamino)carbonyl]oxime...........................
1-Propanamine...........................................     5000 (2270)
1-Propanamine, N-nitroso-N-propyl-......................       10 (4.54)
1-Propanamine, N-propyl-................................     5000 (2270)
Propane, 1,2-dibromo-3-chloro-..........................       1 (0.454)
Propane, 1,2-dichloro-..................................      1000 (454)
Propane, 2-nitro-.......................................       10 (4.54)
Propane, 2,2'-oxybis [2-chloro-.........................      1000 (454)
1,3-Propane sultone.....................................       10 (4.54)
Propanedinitrile........................................      1000 (454)
Propanenitrile..........................................       10 (4.54)
Propanenitrile, 3-chloro-...............................      1000 (454)
Propanenitrile, 2-hydroxy-2-methyl-.....................       10 (4.54)
1,2,3-Propanetriol, trinitrate-.........................       10 (4.54)
1-Propanol, 2,3-dibromo-, phosphate (3:1)...............       10 (4.54)
1-Propanol, 2-methyl-...................................     5000 (2270)
2-Propanone.............................................     5000 (2270)
2-Propanone, 1-bromo-...................................      1000 (454)
Propargite..............................................       10 (4.54)
Propargyl alcohol.......................................      1000 (454)
2-Propenal..............................................       1 (0.454)
2-Propenamide...........................................     5000 (2270)
1-Propene, 1,3-dichloro-................................      100 (45.4)
1-Propene, 1,1,2,3,3,3-hexachloro-......................      1000 (454)
2-Propenenitrile........................................      100 (45.4)
2-Propenenitrile, 2-methyl-.............................      1000 (454)
2-Propenoic acid........................................     5000 (2270)
2-Propenoic acid, ethyl ester...........................      1000 (454)
2-Propenoic acid, 2-methyl-, ethyl ester................      1000 (454)
2-Propenoic acid, 2-methyl-, methyl ester...............      1000 (454)
2-Propen-1-ol...........................................      100 (45.4)
beta-Propioaldehyde.....................................      1000 (454)
Propionic acid..........................................     5000 (2270)
Propionic acid, 2-(2,4,5-trichlorophenoxy)-.............      100 (45.4)
Propionic anhydride.....................................     5000 (2270)
Propoxur (baygon).......................................      100 (45.4)
n-Propylamine...........................................     5000 (2270)
Propylene dichloride....................................      1000 (454)
Propylene oxide.........................................      100 (45.4)
1,2-Propylenimine.......................................       1 (0.454)
2-Propyn-1-ol...........................................      1000 (454)
Pyrene..................................................     5000 (2270)
Pyrethrins..............................................       1 (0.454)
3,6-Pyridazinedione, 1,2-dihydro-.......................     5000 (2270)
4-Pyridinamine..........................................      1000 (454)
Pyridine................................................      1000 (454)
Pyridine, 2-methyl-.....................................     5000 (2270)
Pyridine, 3-(1-methyl-2-pyrrolidinyl)-, (S).............      100 (45.4)
2,4-(1H,3H)-Pyrimidinedione, 5-[bis(2-chloroethyl)amino]-      10 (4.54)
 .......................................................
4(1H)-Pyrimidinone, 2,3-dihydro-6-methyl-2-thioxo-......       10 (4.54)
Pyrrolidine, 1-nitroso-.................................       1 (0.454)
Quinoline...............................................     5000 (2270)
RADIONUCLIDES...........................................     See table 2
Reserpine...............................................     5000 (2270)

[[Page 288]]

 
Resorcinol..............................................     5000 (2270)
Saccharin and salts.....................................      100 (45.4)
Safrole.................................................      100 (45.4)
Selenious acid..........................................       10 (4.54)
Selenious acid, dithallium(1+) salt.....................      1000 (454)
Selenium [cent].........................................      100 (45.4)
Selenium dioxide........................................       10 (4.54)
Selenium oxide..........................................       10 (4.54)
Selenium sulfide........................................       10 (4.54)
Selenium sulfide SeS2...................................       10 (4.54)
Selenourea..............................................      1000 (454)
L-Serine, diazoacetate (ester)..........................       1 (0.454)
Silver [cent]...........................................      1000 (454)
Silver cyanide..........................................       1 (0.454)
Silver cyanide Ag(CN)...................................       1 (0.454)
Silver nitrate..........................................       1 (0.454)
Silvex(2,4,5-TP)........................................      100 (45.4)
Sodium..................................................       10 (4.54)
Sodium arsenate.........................................       1 (0.454)
Sodium arsenite.........................................       1 (0.454)
Sodium azide............................................      1000 (454)
Sodium bichromate.......................................       10 (4.54)
Sodium bifluoride.......................................      100 (45.4)
Sodium bisulfite........................................     5000 (2270)
Sodium chromate.........................................       10 (4.54)
Sodium cyanide..........................................       10 (4.54)
Sodium cyanide Na(CN)...................................       10 (4.54)
Sodium dodecylbenzene sulfonate.........................      1000 (454)
Sodium fluoride.........................................      1000 (454)
Sodium hydrosulfide.....................................     5000 (2270)
Sodium hydroxide........................................      1000 (454)
Sodium hypochlorite.....................................      100 (45.4)
Sodium methylate........................................      1000 (454)
Sodium nitrite..........................................      100 (45.4)
Sodium phosphate, dibasic...............................     5000 (2270)
Sodium phosphate, tribasic..............................     5000 (2270)
Sodium selenite.........................................      100 (45.4)
Streptozotocin..........................................       1 (0.454)
Strontium chromate......................................       10 (4.54)
Strychnidin-10-one......................................       10 (4.54)
Strychnidin-10-one, 2,3-dimethoxy-......................      100 (45.4)
Strychnine and salts....................................       10 (4.54)
Styrene.................................................      1000 (454)
Styrene oxide...........................................      100 (45.4)
Sulfur chloride @.......................................      1000 (454)
Sulfur monochloride.....................................      1000 (454)
Sulfur phosphide........................................      100 (45.4)
Sulfuric acid...........................................      1000 (454)
Sulfuric acid, dimethyl ester...........................      100 (45.4)
Sulfuric acid, dithallium(I+) salt......................      100 (45.4)
2,4,5-T.................................................      1000 (454)
2,4,5-T acid............................................      1000 (454)
2,4,5-T amines..........................................     5000 (2270)
2,4,5-T esters..........................................      1000 (454)
2,4,5-T salts...........................................      1000 (454)
TDE.....................................................       1 (0.454)
1,2,4,5-Tetrachlorobenzene..............................     5000 (2270)
2,3,7,8-Tetrachlorodibenzo-p-dioxin (TCDD)..............       1 (0.454)
1,1,1,2-Tetrachloroethane...............................      100 (45.4)
1,1,2,2-Tetrachloroethane...............................      100 (45.4)
Tetrachloroethane @.....................................      100 (45.4)
Tetrachloroethene.......................................      100 (45.4)
Tetrachloroethylene.....................................      100 (45.4)
2,3,4,6-Tetrachlorophenol...............................       10 (4.54)
Tetraethyl lead.........................................       10 (4.54)
Tetraethyl pyrophosphate................................       10 (4.54)
Tetraethyldithiopyrophosphate...........................      100 (45.4)
Tetrahydrofuran.........................................      1000 (454)
Tetranitromethane.......................................       10 (4.54)
Tetraphosphoric acid, hexaethyl ester...................      100 (45.4)

[[Page 289]]

 
Thallic oxide...........................................      100 (45.4)
Thallium [cent].........................................      1000 (454)
Thallium(I) acetate.....................................      100 (45.4)
Thallium(I) carbonate...................................      100 (45.4)
Thallium(I) chloride....................................      100 (45.4)
Thallium chloride TlCl..................................      100 (45.4)
Thallium(I) nitrate.....................................      100 (45.4)
Thallium oxide T1203....................................      100 (45.4)
Thallium selenite.......................................      1000 (454)
Thallium(I) sulfate.....................................      100 (45.4)
Thioacetamide...........................................       10 (4.54)
Thiodiphosphoric acid, tetraethyl ester.................      100 (45.4)
Thiofanox...............................................      100 (45.4)
Thioimidodicarbonic diamide [(H2N)C(S)]2NH..............      100 (45.4)
Thiomethanol............................................      100 (45.4)
Thioperoxydicarbonic diamide [(H2N)C(S)]2S2, tetramethyl-      10 (4.54)
 .......................................................
Thiophenol..............................................      100 (45.4)
Thiosemicarbazide.......................................      100 (45.4)
Thiourea................................................       10 (4.54)
Thiourea, (2-chlorophenyl)-.............................      100 (45.4)
Thiourea, 1-naphthalenyl-...............................      100 (45.4)
Thiourea, phenyl-.......................................      100 (45.4)
Thiram..................................................       10 (4.54)
Titanium tetrachloride..................................      1000 (454)
Toluene.................................................      1000 (454)
Toluenediamine..........................................       10 (4.54)
Toluene diisocyanate....................................      100 (45.4)
o-Toluidine.............................................      100 (45.4)
p-Toluidine.............................................      100 (45.4)
o-Toluidine hydrochloride...............................      100 (45.4)
Toxaphene...............................................       1 (0.454)
2,4,5-TP acid...........................................      100 (45.4)
2,4,5-TP acid esters....................................      100 (45.4)
1H-1,2,4-Triazol-3-amine................................       10 (4.54)
Trichlorfon.............................................      100 (45.4)
1,2,4-Trichlorobenzene..................................      100 (45.4)
1,1,1-Trichloroethane...................................      1000 (454)
1,1,2-Trichloroethane...................................      100 (45.4)
Trichloroethene.........................................      100 (45.4)
Trichloroethylene.......................................      100 (45.4)
Trichloromethanesulfenyl chloride.......................      100 (45.4)
Trichloromonofluoromethane..............................     5000 (2270)
Trichlorophenol.........................................       10 (4.54)
    2,3,4-Trichlorophenol...............................  ..............
    2,3,5-Trichlorophenol...............................
    2,3,6-Trichlorophenol...............................  ..............
    2,4,5-Trichlorophenol...............................  ..............
    2,4,6-Trichlorophenol...............................  ..............
    3,4,5-Trichlorophenol...............................  ..............
2,4,5-Trichlorophenol...................................       10 (4.54)
2,4,6-Trichlorophenol...................................       10 (4.54)
Triethanolamine dodecylbenzene sulfonate................      1000 (454)
Triethylamine...........................................     5000 (2270)
Trifluralin.............................................       10 (4.54)
Trimethylamine..........................................      100 (45.4)
2,2,4-Trimethylpentane..................................      1000 (454)
1,3,5-Trinitrobenzene...................................       10 (4.54)
1,3,5-Trioxane, 2,4,6-trimethyl-........................      1000 (454)
Tris(2,3-dibromopropyl) phosphate.......................       10 (4.54)
Trypan blue.............................................       10 (4.54)
Uracil mustard..........................................       10 (4.54)
Uranyl acetate..........................................      100 (45.4)
Uranyl nitrate..........................................      100 (45.4)
Urea, N-ethyl-N-nitroso-................................       1 (0.454)
Urea, N-methyl-N-nitroso-...............................       1 (0.454)
Vanadic acid, ammonium salt.............................      1000 (454)
Vanadium oxide V205.....................................      1000 (454)
Vanadium pentoxide......................................      1000 (454)
Vanadyl sulfate.........................................      1000 (454)
Vinyl acetate...........................................     5000 (2270)

[[Page 290]]

 
Vinyl acetate monomer...................................     5000 (2270)
Vinylamine, N-methyl-N-nitroso-.........................       10 (4.54)
Vinyl bromide...........................................      100 (45.4)
Vinyl chloride..........................................       1 (0.454)
Vinylidene chloride.....................................      100 (45.4)
Warfarin, & salts, when present at concentrations             100 (45.4)
 greater than 0.3%......................................
Xylene..................................................      100 (45.4)
m-Xylene................................................      1000 (454)
o-Xylene................................................      1000 (454)
p-Xylene................................................      100 (45.4)
Xylene (mixed)..........................................      100 (45.4)
Xylenes (isomers and mixture)...........................      100 (45.4)
Xylenol.................................................      1000 (454)
Yohimban-16-carboxylic acid,11,17-dimethoxy-18-[(3,4,5-      5000 (2270)
 trimethoxybenzoyl)oxy]-,...............................
methyl ester (3beta,16beta,17alpha,18beta,20alpha)-.....
Zinc [cent].............................................      1000 (454)
Zinc acetate............................................      1000 (454)
Zinc ammonium chloride..................................      1000 (454)
Zinc borate.............................................      1000 (454)
Zinc bromide............................................      1000 (454)
Zinc carbonate..........................................      1000 (454)
Zinc chloride...........................................      1000 (454)
Zinc cyanide............................................       10 (4.54)
Zinc cyanide Zn(CN)2....................................       10 (4.54)
Zinc fluoride...........................................      1000 (454)
Zinc formate............................................      1000 (454)
Zinc hydrosulfite.......................................      1000 (454)
Zinc nitrate............................................      1000 (454)
Zinc phenolsulfonate....................................     5000 (2270)
Zinc phosphide..........................................      100 (45.4)
Zinc phosphide Zn3P2, when present at concentrations          100 (45.4)
 greater than 10%.......................................
Zinc silicofluoride.....................................     5000 (2270)
Zinc sulfate............................................      1000 (454)
Zirconium nitrate.......................................     5000 (2270)
Zirconium potassium fluoride............................      1000 (454)
Zirconium sulfate.......................................     5000 (2270)
Zirconium tetrachloride.................................     5000 (2270)
D001 Unlisted Hazardous Wastes Characteristic of              100 (45.4)
 Ignitability...........................................
D002 Unlisted Hazardous Wastes Characteristic of              100 (45.4)
 Corrosivity............................................
D003 Unlisted Hazardous Wastes Characteristic of              100 (45.4)
 Reactivity.............................................
D004-D043 Unlisted Hazardous Wastes Characteristic of     ..............
 Toxicity...............................................
    D004 Arsenic........................................       1 (0.454)
    D005 Barium.........................................      1000 (454)
    D006 Cadmium........................................       10 (4.54)
    D007 Chromium.......................................       10 (4.54)
    D008 Lead...........................................       10 (4.54)
    D009 Mercury........................................       1 (0.454)
    D010 Selenium.......................................       10 (4.54)
    D011 Silver.........................................       1 (0.454)
    D012 Endrin.........................................       1 (0.454)
    D013 Lindane........................................       1 (0.454)
    D014 Methoxychlor...................................       1 (0.454)
    D015 Toxaphene......................................       1 (0.454)
    D016 2,4-D..........................................      100 (45.4)
    D017 2,4,5-TP.......................................      100 (45.4)
    D018 Benzene........................................       10 (4.54)
    D019 Carbon tetrachloride...........................       10 (4.54)
    D020 Chlordane......................................       1 (0.454)
    D021 Chlorobenzene..................................      100 (45.4)
    D022 Chloroform.....................................       10 (4.54)
D023 o-Cresol...........................................      100 (45.4)
D024 m-Cresol...........................................      100 (45.4)
D025 p-Cresol...........................................      100 (45.4)
D026 Cresol.............................................      100 (45.4)
    D027 1,4-Dichlorobenzene............................      100 (45.4)
    D028 1,2-Dichloroethane.............................      100 (45.4)
    D029 1,1-Dichloroethylene...........................      100 (45.4)
    D030 2,4-Dinitrotoluene.............................       10 (4.54)
    D031 Heptachlor (and hydroxide).....................       1 (0.454)
    D032 Hexachlorobenzene..............................       10 (4.54)

[[Page 291]]

 
    D033 Hexachlorobutadiene............................       1 (0.454)
    D034 Hexachloroethane...............................      100 (45.4)
    D035 Methyl ethyl ketone............................     5000 (2270)
    D036 Nitrobenzene...................................      1000 (454)
    D037 Pentachlorophenol..............................       10 (4.54)
    D038 Pyridine.......................................      1000 (454)
    D039 Tetrachloroethylene............................      100 (45.4)
    D040 Tricholorethylene..............................      100 (45.4)
    D041 2,4,5-Trichlorophenol..........................       10 (4.54)
    D042 2,4,6-Trichlorophenol..........................       10 (4.54)
    D043 Vinyl chloride.................................       1 (0.454)
F001....................................................       10 (4.54)
The following spent halogenated solvents used in
 degreasing; all spent solvent mixtures/blends used in
 degreasing containing, before use, a total of ten
 percent or more (by volume) of one or more of the below
 listed halogenated solvents or those solvents listed in
 F002, F004 and F005; and still bottoms from the
 recovery of these spent solvents and spent solvent
 mixtures...............................................
    (a) Tetrachloroethylene.............................      100 (45.4)
    (b) Trichloroethylene...............................      100 (45.4)
    (c) Methylene chloride..............................      1000 (454)
    (d) 1,1,1-Trichloroethane...........................      1000 (454)
    (e) Carbon tetrachloride............................       10 (4.54)
    (f) Chlorinated fluorocarbons.......................     5000 (2270)
F002....................................................       10 (4.54)
The following spent halogenated solvents; all spent
 solvent mixtures/blends containing, before use, a total
 of ten percent or more (by volume) of one or more of
 the below listed halogenated solvents or those listed
 in F001, F004, F005; and still bottoms from the
 recovery of these spent solvents and spent solvent
 mixtures...............................................
    (a) Tetrachloroethylene.............................      100 (45.4)
    (b) Methylene chloride..............................      1000 (454)
    (c) Trichloroethylene...............................      100 (45.4)
    (d) 1,1,1-Trichloroethane...........................      1000 (454)
    (e) Chlorobenzene...................................      100 (45.4)
    (f) 1,1,2-Trichloro-1,2,2-trifluoroethane...........     5000 (2270)
    (g) o-Dichlorobenzene...............................      100 (45.4)
    (h) Trichlorofluoromethane..........................     5000 (2270)
    (i) 1,1,2 Trichloroethane...........................      100 (45.4)
F003....................................................      100 (45.4)
The following spent non-halogenated solvents and
 solvents:..............................................
    (a) Xylene..........................................      1000 (454)
    (b) Acetone.........................................     5000 (2270)
    (c) Ethyl acetate...................................     5000 (2270)
    (d) Ethylbenzene....................................      1000 (454)
    (e) Ethyl ether.....................................      100 (45.4)
    (f) Methyl isobutyl ketone..........................     5000 (2270)
    (g) n-Butyl alcohol.................................     5000 (2270)
    (h) Cyclohexanone...................................     5000 (2270)
    (i) Methanol........................................     5000 (2270)
F004....................................................      100 (45.4)
The following spent non-halogenated solvents and the
 still bottoms from the recovery of these solvents:.....
    (a) Cresols/Cresylic acid...........................      1000 (454)
    (b) Nitrobenzene....................................      100 (45.4)
F005....................................................      100 (45.4)
The following spent non-halogenated solvents and the
 still bottoms from the recovery of these solvents:.....
    (a) Toluene.........................................      1000 (454)
    (b) Methyl ethyl ketone.............................     5000 (2270)
    (c) Carbon disulfide................................      100 (45.4)
    (d) Isobutanol......................................     5000 (2270)
    (e) Pyridine........................................      1000 (454)
F006....................................................       10 (4.54)
Wastewater treatment sludges from electroplating
 operations except from the following processes: (1)
 sulfuric acid anodizing of aluminum, (2) tin plating on
 carbon steel, (3) zinc plating (segregated basis) on
 carbonsteel, (4) aluminum or zinc-aluminum plating on
 carbon steel, (5) cleaning/stripping associated with
 tin, zinc and aluminum plating on carbon steel, and (6)
 chemical etching and milling of aluminum...............
F007....................................................       10 (4.54)
Spent cyanide plating bath solutions from electroplating
 operations.............................................
F008....................................................       10 (4.54)
Plating bath residues from the bottom of plating baths
 from electroplating operations where cyanides are used
 in the process.........................................
F009....................................................       10 (4.54)
Spent stripping and cleaning bath solutions from
 electroplating operations where cyanides are used in
 the process............................................

[[Page 292]]

 
F010....................................................       10 (4.54)
Quenching bath residues from oil baths from metal heat
 treating operations where cyanides are used in the
 process................................................
F011....................................................       10 (4.54)
Spent cyanide solutions from salt bath pot cleaning from
 metal heat treating operations (except for precious
 metals heat treating spent cyanide solutions from salt
 bath pot cleaning).....................................
F012....................................................       10 (4.54)
Quenching wastewater treatment sludges from metal heat
 treating operations where cyanides are used in the
 process................................................
F019....................................................       10 (4.54)
Wastewater treatment sludges from the chemical
 conversion coating of aluminum--except from zirconium
 phosphating in aluminum can washing when such
 phosphating is an exclusive conversion coating process.
F020....................................................       1 (0.454)
Wastes (except wastewater and spent carbon from hydrogen
 chloride purification) from the production or
 manufacturing use (as a reactant, chemical
 intermediate, or component in a formulating process) of
 tri- or tetrachlorophenol, or of intermediates used to
 produce their pesticide derivatives. (This listing does
 not include wastes from the production of
 hexachlorophene from highly purified 2,4,5-
 trichlorophenol.)......................................
F021....................................................       1 (0.454)
Wastes (except wastewater and spent carbon from hydrogen
 chloride purification) from the production or
 manufacturing use (as a reactant, chemical
 intermediate, or component in a formulating process) of
 pentachlorophenol, or of intermediates used to produce
 its derivatives........................................
F022....................................................       1 (0.454)
Wastes (except wastewater and spent carbon from hydrogen
 chloride purification) from the manufacturing use (as a
 reactant, chemical intermediate, or component in a
 formulating process) of tetra-, penta-, or
 hexachlorobenzenes under alkaline conditions...........
F023....................................................       1 (0.454)
Wastes (except wastewater and spent carbon from hydrogen
 chloride purification) from the production of materials
 on equipment previously used for the production or
 manufacturing use (as a reactant, chemical
 intermediate, or component in a formulating process) of
 tri- and tetrachlorophenols. (This listing does not
 include wastes from equipment used only for the
 production or use of hexachlorophene from highly
 purified 2,4,5-trichlorophenol.).......................
F024....................................................       1 (0.454)
Wastes, including but not limited to distillation
 residues, heavy ends, tars, and reactor cleanout
 wastes, from the production of chlorinated
 aliphatichydrocarbons, having carbon content from one
 to five, utilizing free radical catalyzed processes.
 (This listing does not include light ends, spent
 filters and filter aids, spent dessicants(sic),
 wastewater, wastewater treatment sludges, spent
 catalysts, and wastes listed in 40 CFR 261.32.)........
F025....................................................       1 (0.454)
Condensed light ends, spent filters and filter aids, and
 spent desiccant wastes from the production of certain
 chlorinated aliphatic hydrocarbons, by free radical
 catalyzed processes. These chlorinated aliphatic
 hydrocarbons are those having carbon chain lengths
 ranging from one to and including five, with varying
 amounts and positions of chlorine substitution.........
F026....................................................       1 (0.454)
Wastes (except wastewater and spent carbon from hydrogen
 chloride purification) from the production of materials
 on equipment previously used for the manufacturing use
 (as a reactant, chemical intermediate, or component in
 a formulating process) of tetra-, penta-, or
 hexachlorobenzene under alkaline conditions............
F027....................................................       1 (0.454)
Discarded unused formulations containing tri-, tetra-,
 or pentachlorophenol or discarded unused formulations
 containing compounds derived from these chlorophenols.
 (This listing does not include formulations containing
 hexachlorophene synthesized from prepurified 2,4,5-
 trichlorophenol as the sole component.)................
F028....................................................       1 (0.454)
Residues resulting from the incineration or thermal
 treatment of soil contaminated with EPA Hazardous Waste
 Nos. F020, F021, F022, F023, F026, and F027............
F032....................................................       1 (0.454)
F034....................................................       1 (0.454)
F035....................................................       1 (0.454)
F037....................................................       1 (0.454)
F038....................................................       1 (0.454)
F039....................................................       1 (0.454)
Multi source leachate...................................
K001....................................................       1 (0.454)
Bottom sediment sludge from the treatment of wastewaters
 from wood preserving processes that use creosote and/or
 pentachlorophenol......................................
K002....................................................       10 (4.54)
Wastewater treatment sludge from the production of
 chrome yellow and orange pigments......................
K003....................................................       10 (4.54)
Wastewater treatment sludge from the production of
 molybdate orange pigments..............................
K004....................................................       10 (4.54)
Wastewater treatment sludge from the production of zinc
 yellow pigments........................................

[[Page 293]]

 
K005....................................................       10 (4.54)
Wastewater treatment sludge from the production of
 chrome green pigments..................................
K006....................................................       10 (4.54)
Wastewater treatment sludge from the production of
 chrome oxide green pigments (anhydrous and hydrated)...
K007....................................................       10 (4.54)
Wastewater treatment sludge from the production of iron
 blue pigments..........................................
K008....................................................       10 (4.54)
Oven residue from the production of chrome oxide green
 pigments...............................................
K009....................................................       10 (4.54)
Distillation bottoms from the production of acetaldehyde
 from ethylene..........................................
K010....................................................       10 (4.54)
Distillation side cuts from the production of
 acetaldehyde from ethylene.............................
K011....................................................       10 (4.54)
Bottom stream from the wastewater stripper in the
 production of acrylonitrile............................
K013....................................................       10 (4.54)
Bottom stream from the acetonitrile column in the
 production of acrylonitrile............................
K014....................................................     5000 (2270)
Bottoms from the acetonitrile purification column in the
 production of acrylonitrile............................
K015....................................................       10 (4.54)
Still bottoms from the distillation of benzyl chloride..
K016....................................................       1 (0.454)
Heavy ends or distillation residues from the production
 of carbon tetrachloride................................
K017....................................................       10 (4.54)
Heavy ends (still bottoms) from the purification column
 in the production of epichlorohydrin...................
K018....................................................       1 (0.454)
Heavy ends from the fractionation column in ethyl
 chloride production....................................
K019....................................................       1 (0.454)
Heavy ends from the distillation of ethylene dichloride
 in ethylene dichloride production......................
K020....................................................       1 (0.454)
Heavy ends from the distillation of vinyl chloride in
 vinyl chloride monomer production......................
K021....................................................       10 (4.54)
Aqueous spent antimony catalyst waste from
 fluoromethanes production..............................
K022....................................................       1 (0.454)
Distillation bottom tars from the production of phenol/
 acetone from cumene....................................
K023....................................................     5000 (2270)
Distillation light ends from the production of phthalic
 anhydride from naphthalene.............................
K024....................................................     5000 (2270)
Distillation bottoms from the production of phthalic
 anhydride from naphthalene.............................
K025....................................................       10 (4.54)
Distillation bottoms from the production of nitrobenzene
 by the nitration of benzene............................
K026....................................................      1000 (454)
Stripping still tails from the production of methyl
 ethyl pyridines........................................
K027....................................................       10 (4.54)
Centrifuge and distillation residues from toluene
 diisocyanate production................................
K028....................................................       1 (0.454)
Spent catalyst from the hydrochlorinator reactor in the
 production of 1,1,1-trichloroethane....................
K029....................................................       1 (0.454)
Waste from the product steam stripper in the production
 of 1,1,1-trichloroethane...............................
K030....................................................       1 (0.454)
Column bottoms or heavy ends from the combined
 production of trichloroethylene and perchloroethylene..
K031....................................................       1 (0.454)
By-product salts generated in the production of MSMA and
 cacodylic acid.........................................
K032....................................................       10 (4.54)
Wastewater treatment sludge from the production of
 chlordane..............................................
K033....................................................       10 (4.54)
Wastewater and scrub water from the chlorination of
 cyclopentadiene in the production of chlordane.........
K034....................................................       10 (4.54)
Filter solids from the filtration of
 hexachlorocyclopentadiene in the production of
 chlordane..............................................
K035....................................................       1 (0.454)
Wastewater treatment sludges generated in the production
 of creosote............................................
K036....................................................       1 (0.454)
Still bottoms from toluene reclamation distillation in
 the production of disulfoton...........................
K037....................................................       1 (0.454)
Wastewater treatment sludges from the production of
 disulfoton.............................................
K038....................................................       10 (4.54)
Wastewater from the washing and stripping of phorate
 production.............................................
K039....................................................       10 (4.54)
Filter cake from the filtration of
 diethylphosphorodithioic acid in the production of
 phorate................................................
K040....................................................       10 (4.54)
Wastewater treatment sludge from the production of
 phorate................................................

[[Page 294]]

 
K041....................................................       1 (0.454)
Wastewater treatment sludge from the production of
 toxaphene..............................................
K042....................................................       10 (4.54)
Heavy ends or distillation residues from the
 distillation of tetrachlorobenzene in the production of
 2,4,5-T................................................
K043....................................................       10 (4.54)
2,6-dichlorophenol waste from the production of 2,4-D...
K044....................................................       10 (4.54)
Wastewater treatment sludges from the manufacturing and
 processing of explosives...............................
K045....................................................       10 (4.54)
Spent carbon from the treatment of wastewater containing
 explosives.............................................
K046....................................................       10 (4.54)
Wastewater treatment sludges from the manufacturing,
 formulation and loading of lead-based initiating
 compounds..............................................
K047....................................................       10 (4.54)
Pink/red water from TNT operations......................
K048....................................................       10 (4.54)
Dissolved air flotation (DAF) float from the petroleum
 refining industry......................................
K049....................................................       10 (4.54)
Slop oil emulsion solids from the petroleum refining
 industry...............................................
K050....................................................       10 (4.54)
Heat exchanger bundle cleaning sludge from the petroleum
 refining industry......................................
K051....................................................       10 (4.54)
API separator sludge from the petroleum refining
 industry...............................................
K052....................................................       10 (4.54)
Tank bottoms (leaded) from the petroleum refining
 industry...............................................
K060....................................................       1 (0.454)
Ammonia still lime sludge from coking operations........
K061....................................................       10 (4.54)
Emission control dust/sludge from the primary production
 of steel in electric furnaces..........................
K062....................................................       10 (4.54)
Spent pickle liquor generated by steel finishing
 operations of facilities within the iron and steel
 industry...............................................
K064....................................................       10 (4.54)
Acid plant blowdown slurry/sludge resulting from
 thickening of blowdown slurry from primary copper
 production.............................................
K065....................................................       10 (4.54)
Surface impoundment solids contained in and dredged from
 surface impoundments at primary lead smelting
 facilities.............................................
K066....................................................       10 (4.54)
Sludge from treatment of process wastewater and /or acid
 plant blowdown from primary zinc production............
K069....................................................       10 (4.54)
Emission control dust/sludge from secondary lead
 smelting...............................................
K071....................................................       1 (0.454)
Brine purification muds from the mercury cell process in
 chlorine production, where separately prepurified brine
 is not used............................................
K073....................................................       10 (4.54)
Chlorinated hydrocarbon waste from the purification step
 of the diaphragm cell process using graphite anodes in
 chlorine production....................................
K083....................................................      100 (45.4)
Distillation bottoms from aniline extraction............
K084....................................................       1 (0.454)
Wastewater treatment sludges generated during the
 production of veterinary pharmaceuticals from arsenic
 or organo-arsenic compounds............................
K085....................................................       10 (4.54)
Distillation or fractionation column bottoms from the
 production of chlorobenzenes...........................
K086....................................................       10 (4.54)
Solvent washes and sludges, caustic washes and sludges,
 or water washes and sludges from cleaning tubs and
 equipment used in the formulation of ink from pigments,
 driers, soaps, and stabilizers containing chromium and
 lead...................................................
K087....................................................      100 (45.4)
Decanter tank tar sludge from coking operations.........
K088....................................................       10 (4.54)
Spent potliners from primary aluminum reduction.........
K090....................................................       10 (4.54)
Emission control dust or sludge from
 ferrochromiumsilicon production........................
K091....................................................       10 (4.54)
Emission control dust or sludge from ferrochromium
 production.............................................
K093....................................................     5000 (2270)
Distillation light ends from the production of phthalic
 anhydride from ortho-xylene............................
K094....................................................     5000 (2270)
Distillation bottoms from the production of phthalic
 anhydride from ortho-xylene............................

[[Page 295]]

 
K095....................................................      100 (45.4)
Distillation bottoms from the production of 1,1,1-
 trichloroethane........................................
K096....................................................      100 (45.4)
Heavy ends from the heavy ends column from the
 production of 1,1,1-trichloroethane....................
K097....................................................       1 (0.454)
Vacuum stripper discharge from the chlordane chlorinator
 in the production of chlordane.........................
K098....................................................       1 (0.454)
Untreated process wastewater from the production of
 toxaphene..............................................
K099....................................................       10 (4.54)
Untreated wastewater from the production of 2,4-D.......
K100....................................................       10 (4.54)
Waste leaching solution from acid leaching of emission
 control dust/sludge from secondary lead smelting.......
K101....................................................       1 (0.454)
Distillation tar residues from the distillation of
 aniline-based compounds in the production of veterinary
 pharmaceuticals from arsenic or organo-arsenic
 compounds..............................................
K102....................................................       1 (0.454)
Residue from the use of activated carbon for
 decolorization in the production of veterinary
 pharmaceuticals from arsenic or organo-arsenic
 compounds..............................................
K103....................................................      100 (45.4)
Process residues from aniline extraction from the
 production of aniline..................................
K104....................................................       10 (4.54)
Combined wastewater streams generated from nitrobenzene/
 aniline chlorobenzenes.................................
K105....................................................       10 (4.54)
Separated aqueous stream from the reactor product
 washing step in the production of chlorobenzenes.......
K106....................................................       1 (0.454)
Wastewater treatment sludge from the mercury cell
 process in chlorine production.........................
K107....................................................       10 (4.54)
 Column bottoms from product seperation from the
 production of 1,1-dimethylhydrazine (UDMH) from
 carboxylic acid hydrazines.............................
K108....................................................       10 (4.54)
 Condensed column overheads from product seperation and
 condensed reactor vent gases from the production of 1,1-
 dimethylhydrazine (UDMH) from carboxylic acid
 hydrazides.............................................
K109....................................................       10 (4.54)
Spent filter cartidges from product purification from
 the production of 1,1-dimethylhydrazine (UDMH) from
 carboxylic acid hydazides..............................
K110....................................................       10 (4.54)
Condensed column overheads from intermediate separation
 from the production of 1,1-dimethylhydrazines (UDMH)
 from carboxylic acid hydrazides........................
K111....................................................       10 (4.54)
Product washwaters from the production of dinitrotoluene
 via nitration of toluene...............................
K112....................................................       10 (4.54)
Reaction by-product water from the drying column in the
 production of toluenediamine via hydrogenation of
 dinitrotoluene.........................................
K113....................................................       10 (4.54)
Condensed liquid light ends from the purification of
 toluenediamine in the production of toluenediamine via
 hydrogenation of dinitrotoluene........................
K114....................................................       10 (4.54)
Vicinals from the purification of toluenediamine in the
 production of toluenediamine via hydrogenation of
 dinitrotoluene.........................................
K115....................................................       10 (4.54)
Heavy ends from the purification of toluenediamine in
 the production of toluenediamine via hydrogenation of
 dinitrotoluene.........................................
K116....................................................       10 (4.54)
Organic condensate from the solvent recovery column in
 the production of toluene diisocyanate via phosgenation
 of toluenediamine......................................
K117....................................................       1 (0.454)
Wastewater from the reaction vent gas scrubber in the
 production of ethylene bromide via bromination of
 ethene.................................................
K118....................................................       1 (0.454)
Spent absorbent solids from purification of ethylene
 dibromide in the production of ethylene dibromide......
K123....................................................       10 (4.54)
Process wastewater (including supernates, filtrates, and
 washwaters) from the production of
 ethylenebisdithiocarbamic acid and its salts...........
K124....................................................       10 (4.54)
Reactor vent scrubber water from the production of
 ethylenebisdithiocarbamic acid and its salts...........
K125....................................................       10 (4.54)
Filtration, evaporation, and centrifugation solids from
 the production of ethylenebisdithiocarbamic acid and
 its salts..............................................

[[Page 296]]

 
K126....................................................       10 (4.54)
Baghouse dust and floor sweepings in milling and
 packaging operations from the production or formulation
 of ethylenebisdithiocarbamic acid and its salts........
K131....................................................      100 (45.4)
Waste water from the reactor and spent sulfuric acid
 from the acid dryer in the production of methyl bromide
K132....................................................      1000 (454)
Spent absorbent and wastewater solids from the
 production of methyl bromide...........................
K136....................................................       1 (0.454)
Still bottoms from the purification of ethylene
 dibromide in the production of ethylene dibromide via
 bromination of ethene..................................
K141....................................................       1 (0.454)
K142....................................................       1 (0.454)
K143....................................................       1 (0.454)
K144....................................................       1 (0.454)
K145....................................................       1 (0.454)
K147....................................................       1 (0.454)
K148....................................................       1 (0.454)
K149....................................................       10 (4.54)
K150....................................................       10 (4.54)
K151....................................................       10 (4.54)
K156....................................................       1 (0.454)
K157....................................................       1 (0.454)
K158....................................................       1 (0.454)
K169....................................................       10 (4.54)
K170....................................................       1 (0.454)
K171....................................................       1 (0.454)
K172....................................................       1 (0.454)
K174....................................................       1 (0.454)
K175....................................................       1 (0.454)
K176....................................................       1 (0.454)
K177....................................................     5000 (2270)
K178....................................................       1 (0.454)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Footnotes:
[cent] The RQ for these hazardous substances is limited to those pieces
  of the metal having a diameter smaller than 100 micrometers (0.004
  inches)
[cent][cent] The RQ for asbestos is limited to friable forms only
@ Indicates that the name was added by RSPA because (1) the name is a
  synonym for a specific hazardous substance and (2) the name appears in
  the Hazardous Materials Table as a proper shipping name.

         List of Hazardous Substances and Reportable Quantities

                  Table 2 to Appendix A--Radionuclides
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                (2)--    (3)--Reportable
              (1)--Radionuclide                 Atomic  Quantity (RQ) Ci
                                                Number        (TBq)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Actinium-224 ................................       89         100 (3.7)
Actinium-225 ................................       89          1 (.037)
Actinium-226 ................................       89          10 (.37)
Actinium-227 ................................       89   0.001 (.000037)
Actinium-228 ................................       89          10 (.37)
Aluminum-26 .................................       13          10 (.37)
Americium-237 ...............................       95         1000 (37)
Americium-238 ...............................       95         100 (3.7)
Americium-239 ...............................       95         100 (3.7)
Americium-240 ...............................       95          10 (.37)
Americium-241 ...............................       95     0.01 (.00037)
Americium-242 ...............................       95         100 (3.7)
Americium-242m ..............................       95     0.01 (.00037)
Americium-243 ...............................       95     0.01 (.00037)
Americium-244 ...............................       95          10 (.37)
Americium-244m ..............................       95         1000 (37)
Americium-245 ...............................       95         1000 (37)
Americium-246 ...............................       95         1000 (37)
Americium-246m ..............................       95         1000 (37)
Antimony-115 ................................       51         1000 (37)
Antimony-116 ................................       51         1000 (37)
Antimony-116m ...............................       51         100 (3.7)
Antimony-117 ................................       51         1000 (37)
Antimony-118m ...............................       51          10 (.37)
Antimony-119 ................................       51         1000 (37)
Antimony-120 (16 min) .......................       51         1000 (37)
Antimony-120 (5.76 day) .....................       51          10 (.37)
Antimony-122 ................................       51          10 (.37)
Antimony-124 ................................       51          10 (.37)
Antimony-124m ...............................       51         1000 (37)
Antimony-125 ................................       51          10 (.37)
Antimony-126 ................................       51          10 (.37)
Antimony-126m ...............................       51         1000 (37)
Antimony-127 ................................       51          10 (.37)
Antimony-128 (10.4 min) .....................       51         1000 (37)
Antimony-128 (9.01 hr) ......................       51          10 (.37)
Antimony-129 ................................       51         100 (3.7)
Antimony-130 ................................       51         100 (3.7)
Antimony-131 ................................       51         1000 (37)

[[Page 297]]

 
Argon-39 ....................................       18         1000 (37)
Argon-41 ....................................       18          10 (.37)
Arsenic-69 ..................................       33         1000 (37)
Arsenic-70 ..................................       33         100 (3.7)
Arsenic-71 ..................................       33         100 (3.7)
Arsenic-72 ..................................       33          10 (.37)
Arsenic-73 ..................................       33         100 (3.7)
Arsenic-74 ..................................       33          10 (.37)
Arsenic-76 ..................................       33         100 (3.7)
Arsenic-77 ..................................       33         1000 (37)
Arsenic-78 ..................................       33         100 (3.7)
Astatine-207 ................................       85         100 (3.7)
Astatine-211 ................................       85         100 (3.7)
Barium-126 ..................................       56         1000 (37)
Barium-128 ..................................       56          10 (.37)
Barium-131 ..................................       56          10 (.37)
Barium-131m .................................       56         1000 (37)
Barium-133 ..................................       56          10 (.37)
Barium-133m .................................       56         100 (3.7)
Barium-135m .................................       56         1000 (37)
Barium-139 ..................................       56         1000 (37)
Barium-140 ..................................       56          10 (.37)
Barium-141 ..................................       56         1000 (37)
Barium-142 ..................................       56         1000 (37)
Berkelium-245 ...............................       97         100 (3.7)
Berkelium-246 ...............................       97          10 (.37)
Berkelium-247 ...............................       97     0.01 (.00037)
Berkelium-249 ...............................       97          1 (.037)
Berkelium-250 ...............................       97         100 (3.7)
Beryllium-10 ................................        4          1 (.037)
Beryllium-7 .................................        4         100 (3.7)
Bismuth-200 .................................       83         100 (3.7)
Bismuth-201 .................................       83         100 (3.7)
Bismuth-202 .................................       83         1000 (37)
Bismuth-203 .................................       83          10 (.37)
Bismuth-205 .................................       83          10 (.37)
Bismuth-206 .................................       83          10 (.37)
Bismuth-207 .................................       83          10 (.37)
Bismuth-210 .................................       83          10 (.37)
Bismuth-210m ................................       83       0.1 (.0037)
Bismuth-212 .................................       83         100 (3.7)
Bismuth-213 .................................       83         100 (3.7)
Bismuth-214 .................................       83         100 (3.7)
Bromine-74 ..................................       35         100 (3.7)
Bromine-74m .................................       35         100 (3.7)
Bromine-75 ..................................       35         100 (3.7)
Bromine-76 ..................................       35          10 (.37)
Bromine-77 ..................................       35         100 (3.7)
Bromine-80 ..................................       35         1000 (37)
Bromine-80m .................................       35         1000 (37)
Bromine-82 ..................................       35          10 (.37)
Bromine-83 ..................................       35         1000 (37)
Bromine-84 ..................................       35         100 (3.7)
Cadmium-104 .................................       48         1000 (37)
Cadmium-107 .................................       48         1000 (37)
Cadmium-109 .................................       48          1 (.037)
Cadmium-113 .................................       48       0.1 (.0037)
Cadmium-113m ................................       48       0.1 (.0037)
Cadmium-115 .................................       48         100 (3.7)
Cadmium-115m ................................       48          10 (.37)
Cadmium-117 .................................       48         100 (3.7)
Cadmium-117m ................................       48          10 (.37)
Calcium-41 ..................................       20          10 (.37)
Calcium-45 ..................................       20          10 (.37)
Calcium-47 ..................................       20          10 (.37)
Californium-244 .............................       98         1000 (37)
Californium-246 .............................       98          10 (.37)
Californium-248 .............................       98       0.1 (.0037)
Californium-249 .............................       98     0.01 (.00037)
Californium-250 .............................       98     0.01 (.00037)
Californium-251 .............................       98     0.01 (.00037)
Californium-252 .............................       98       0.1 (.0037)
Californium-253 .............................       98          10 (.37)
Californium-254 .............................       98       0.1 (.0037)
Carbon-11 ...................................        6         1000 (37)
Carbon-14 ...................................        6          10 (.37)
Cerium-134 ..................................       58          10 (.37)
Cerium-135 ..................................       58          10 (.37)
Cerium-137 ..................................       58         1000 (37)
Cerium-137m .................................       58         100 (3.7)
Cerium-139 ..................................       58         100 (3.7)
Cerium-141 ..................................       58          10 (.37)
Cerium-143 ..................................       58         100 (3.7)
Cerium-144 ..................................       58          1 (.037)
Cesium-125 ..................................       55         1000 (37)
Cesium-127 ..................................       55         100 (3.7)
Cesium-129 ..................................       55         100 (3.7)
Cesium-130 ..................................       55         1000 (37)
Cesium-131 ..................................       55         1000 (37)
Cesium-132 ..................................       55          10 (.37)
Cesium-134 ..................................       55          1 (.037)
Cesium-134m .................................       55         1000 (37)
Cesium-135 ..................................       55          10 (.37)
Cesium-135m .................................       55         100 (3.7)
Cesium-136 ..................................       55          10 (.37)
Cesium-137 ..................................       55          1 (.037)
Cesium-138 ..................................       55         100 (3.7)
Chlorine-36 .................................       17          10 (.37)
Chlorine-38 .................................       17         100 (3.7)
Chlorine-39 .................................       17         100 (3.7)
Chromium-48 .................................       24         100 (3.7)
Chromium-49 .................................       24         1000 (37)
Chromium-51 .................................       24         1000 (37)
Cobalt-55 ...................................       27          10 (.37)
Cobalt-56 ...................................       27          10 (.37)
Cobalt-57 ...................................       27         100 (3.7)
Cobalt-58 ...................................       27          10 (.37)
Cobalt-58m ..................................       27         1000 (37)
Cobalt-60 ...................................       27          10 (.37)
Cobalt-60m ..................................       27         1000 (37)
Cobalt-61 ...................................       27         1000 (37)
Cobalt-62m ..................................       27         1000 (37)
Copper-60 ...................................       29         100 (3.7)
Copper-61 ...................................       29         100 (3.7)
Copper-64 ...................................       29         1000 (37)
Copper-67 ...................................       29         100 (3.7)
Curium-238 ..................................       96         1000 (37)
Curium-240 ..................................       96          1 (.037)
Curium-241 ..................................       96          10 (.37)
Curium-242 ..................................       96          1 (.037)
Curium-243 ..................................       96     0.01 (.00037)
Curium-244 ..................................       96     0.01 (.00037)
Curium-245 ..................................       96     0.01 (.00037)
Curium-246 ..................................       96     0.01 (.00037)
Curium-247 ..................................       96     0.01 (.00037)
Curium-248 ..................................       96   0.001 (.000037)
Curium-249 ..................................       96         1000 (37)
Dysprosium-155 ..............................       66         100 (3.7)
Dysprosium-157 ..............................       66         100 (3.7)
Dysprosium-159 ..............................       66         100 (3.7)
Dysprosium-165 ..............................       66         1000 (37)
Dysprosium-166 ..............................       66          10 (.37)
Einsteinium-250 .............................       99          10 (.37)
Einsteinium-251 .............................       99         1000 (37)
Einsteinium-253 .............................       99          10 (.37)
Einsteinium-254 .............................       99       0.1 (.0037)

[[Page 298]]

 
Einsteinium-254m ............................       99          1 (.037)
Erbium-161 ..................................       68         100 (3.7)
Erbium-165 ..................................       68         1000 (37)
Erbium-169 ..................................       68         100 (3.7)
Erbium-171 ..................................       68         100 (3.7)
Erbium-172 ..................................       68          10 (.37)
Europium-145 ................................       63          10 (.37)
Europium-146 ................................       63          10 (.37)
Europium-147 ................................       63          10 (.37)
Europium-148 ................................       63          10 (.37)
Europium-149 ................................       63         100 (3.7)
Europium-150 (12.6 hr) ......................       63         1000 (37)
Europium-150 (34.2 yr) ......................       63          10 (.37)
Europium-152 ................................       63          10 (.37)
Europium-152m ...............................       63         100 (3.7)
Europium-154 ................................       63          10 (.37)
Europium-155 ................................       63          10 (.37)
Europium-156 ................................       63          10 (.37)
Europium-157 ................................       63          10 (.37)
Europium-158 ................................       63         1000 (37)
Fermium-252 .................................      100          10 (.37)
Fermium-253 .................................      100          10 (.37)
Fermium-254 .................................      100         100 (3.7)
Fermium-255 .................................      100         100 (3.7)
Fermium-257 .................................      100          1 (.037)
Fluorine-18 .................................        9         1000 (37)
Francium-222 ................................       87         100 (3.7)
Francium-223 ................................       87         100 (3.7)
Gadolinium-145 ..............................       64         100 (3.7)
Gadolinium-146 ..............................       64          10 (.37)
Gadolinium-147 ..............................       64          10 (.37)
Gadolinium-148 ..............................       64   0.001 (.000037)
Gadolinium-149 ..............................       64         100 (3.7)
Gadolinium-151 ..............................       64         100 (3.7)
Gadolinium-152 ..............................       64   0.001 (.000037)
Gadolinium-153 ..............................       64          10 (.37)
Gadolinium-159 ..............................       64         1000 (37)
Gallium-65 ..................................       31         1000 (37)
Gallium-66 ..................................       31          10 (.37)
Gallium-67 ..................................       31         100 (3.7)
Gallium-68 ..................................       31         1000 (37)
Gallium-70 ..................................       31         1000 (37)
Gallium-72 ..................................       31          10 (.37)
Gallium-73 ..................................       31         100 (3.7)
Germanium-66 ................................       32         100 (3.7)
Germanium-67 ................................       32         1000 (37)
Germanium-68 ................................       32          10 (.37)
Germanium-69 ................................       32          10 (.37)
Germanium-71 ................................       32         1000 (37)
Germanium-75 ................................       32         1000 (37)
Germanium-77 ................................       32          10 (.37)
Germanium-78 ................................       32         1000 (37)
Gold-193 ....................................       79         100 (3.7)
Gold-194 ....................................       79          10 (.37)
Gold-195 ....................................       79         100 (3.7)
Gold-198 ....................................       79         100 (3.7)
Gold-198m ...................................       79          10 (.37)
Gold-199 ....................................       79         100 (3.7)
Gold-200 ....................................       79         1000 (37)
Gold-200m ...................................       79          10 (.37)
Gold-201 ....................................       79         1000 (37)
Hafnium-170 .................................       72         100 (3.7)
Hafnium-172 .................................       72          1 (.037)
Hafnium-173 .................................       72         100 (3.7)
Hafnium-175 .................................       72         100 (3.7)
Hafnium-177m ................................       72         1000 (37)
Hafnium-178m ................................       72       0.1 (.0037)
Hafnium-179m ................................       72         100 (3.7)
Hafnium-180m ................................       72         100 (3.7)
Hafnium-181 .................................       72          10 (.37)
Hafnium-182 .................................       72       0.1 (.0037)
Hafnium-182m ................................       72         100 (3.7)
Hafnium-183 .................................       72         100 (3.7)
Hafnium-184 .................................       72         100 (3.7)
Holmium-155 .................................       67         1000 (37)
Holmium-157 .................................       67         1000 (37)
Holmium-159 .................................       67         1000 (37)
Holmium-161 .................................       67         1000 (37)
Holmium-162 .................................       67         1000 (37)
Holmium-162m ................................       67         1000 (37)
Holmium-164 .................................       67         1000 (37)
Holmium-164m ................................       67         1000 (37)
Holmium-166 .................................       67         100 (3.7)
Holmium-166m ................................       67          1 (.037)
Holmium-167 .................................       67         100 (3.7)
Hydrogen-3 ..................................        1         100 (3.7)
Indium-109 ..................................       49         100 (3.7)
Indium-110 (4.9 hr) .........................       49          10 (.37)
Indium-110 (69.1 min) .......................       49         100 (3.7)
Indium-111 ..................................       49         100 (3.7)
Indium-112 ..................................       49         1000 (37)
Indium-113m .................................       49         1000 (37)
Indium-114m .................................       49          10 (.37)
Indium-115 ..................................       49       0.1 (.0037)
Indium-115m .................................       49         100 (3.7)
Indium-116m .................................       49         100 (3.7)
Indium-117 ..................................       49         1000 (37)
Indium-117m .................................       49         100 (3.7)
Indium-119m .................................       49         1000 (37)
Iodine-120 ..................................       53          10 (.37)
Iodine-120m .................................       53         100 (3.7)
Iodine-121 ..................................       53         100 (3.7)
Iodine-123 ..................................       53          10 (.37)
Iodine-124 ..................................       53       0.1 (.0037)
Iodine-125 ..................................       53     0.01 (.00037)
Iodine-126 ..................................       53     0.01 (.00037)
Iodine-128 ..................................       53         1000 (37)
Iodine-129 ..................................       53   0.001 (.000037)
Iodine-130 ..................................       53          1 (.037)
Iodine-131 ..................................       53     0.01 (.00037)
Iodine-132 ..................................       53          10 (.37)
Iodine-132m .................................       53          10 (.37)
Iodine-133 ..................................       53       0.1 (.0037)
Iodine-134 ..................................       53         100 (3.7)
Iodine-135 ..................................       53          10 (.37)
Iridium-182 .................................       77         1000 (37)
Iridium-184 .................................       77         100 (3.7)
Iridium-185 .................................       77         100 (3.7)
Iridium-186 .................................       77          10 (.37)
Iridium-187 .................................       77         100 (3.7)
Iridium-188 .................................       77          10 (.37)
Iridium-189 .................................       77         100 (3.7)
Iridium-190 .................................       77          10 (.37)
Iridium-190m ................................       77         1000 (37)
Iridium-192 .................................       77          10 (.37)
Iridium-192m ................................       77         100 (3.7)
Iridium-194 .................................       77         100 (3.7)
Iridium-194m ................................       77          10 (.37)
Iridium-195 .................................       77         1000 (37)
Iridium-195m ................................       77         100 (3.7)
Iron-52 .....................................       26         100 (3.7)
Iron-55 .....................................       26         100 (3.7)
Iron-59 .....................................       26          10 (.37)
Iron-60 .....................................       26       0.1 (.0037)
Krypton-74 ..................................       36          10 (.37)
Krypton-76 ..................................       36          10 (.37)

[[Page 299]]

 
Krypton-77 ..................................       36          10 (.37)
Krypton-79 ..................................       36         100 (3.7)
Krypton-81 ..................................       36         1000 (37)
Krypton-83m .................................       36         1000 (37)
Krypton-85 ..................................       36         1000 (37)
Krypton-85m .................................       36         100 (3.7)
Krypton-87 ..................................       36          10 (.37)
Krypton-88 ..................................       36          10 (.37)
Lanthanum-131 ...............................       57         1000 (37)
Lanthanum-132 ...............................       57         100 (3.7)
Lanthanum-135 ...............................       57         1000 (37)
Lanthanum-137 ...............................       57          10 (.37)
Lanthanum-138 ...............................       57          1 (.037)
Lanthanum-140 ...............................       57          10 (.37)
Lanthanum-141 ...............................       57         1000 (37)
Lanthanum-142 ...............................       57         100 (3.7)
Lanthanum-143 ...............................       57         1000 (37)
Lead-195m ...................................       82         1000 (37)
Lead-198 ....................................       82         100 (3.7)
Lead-199 ....................................       82         100 (3.7)
Lead-200 ....................................       82         100 (3.7)
Lead-201 ....................................       82         100 (3.7)
Lead-202 ....................................       82          1 (.037)
Lead-202m ...................................       82          10 (.37)
Lead-203 ....................................       82         100 (3.7)
Lead-205 ....................................       82         100 (3.7)
Lead-209 ....................................       82         1000 (37)
Lead-210 ....................................       82     0.01 (.00037)
Lead-211 ....................................       82         100 (3.7)
Lead-212 ....................................       82          10 (.37)
Lead-214 ....................................       82         100 (3.7)
Lutetium-169 ................................       71          10 (.37)
Lutetium-170 ................................       71          10 (.37)
Lutetium-171 ................................       71          10 (.37)
Lutetium-172 ................................       71          10 (.37)
Lutetium-173 ................................       71         100 (3.7)
Lutetium-174 ................................       71          10 (.37)
Lutetium-174m ...............................       71          10 (.37)
Lutetium-176 ................................       71          1 (.037)
Lutetium-176m ...............................       71         1000 (37)
Lutetium-177 ................................       71         100 (3.7)
Lutetium-177m ...............................       71          10 (.37)
Lutetium-178 ................................       71         1000 (37)
Lutetium-178m ...............................       71         1000 (37)
Lutetium-179 ................................       71         1000 (37)
Magnesium-28 ................................       12          10 (.37)
Manganese-51 ................................       25         1000 (37)
Manganese-52 ................................       25          10 (.37)
Manganese-52m ...............................       25         1000 (37)
Manganese-53 ................................       25         1000 (37)
Manganese-54 ................................       25          10 (.37)
Manganese-56 ................................       25         100 (3.7)
Mendelevium-257 .............................      101         100 (3.7)
Mendelevium-258 .............................      101          1 (.037)
Mercury-193 .................................       80         100 (3.7)
Mercury-193m ................................       80          10 (.37)
Mercury-194 .................................       80       0.1 (.0037)
Mercury-195 .................................       80         100 (3.7)
Mercury-195m ................................       80         100 (3.7)
Mercury-197 .................................       80         1000 (37)
Mercury-197m ................................       80         1000 (37)
Mercury-199m ................................       80         1000 (37)
Mercury-203 .................................       80          10 (.37)
Molybdenum-101 ..............................       42         1000 (37)
Molybdenum-90 ...............................       42         100 (3.7)
Molybdenum-93 ...............................       42         100 (3.7)
Molybdenum-93m ..............................       42          10 (.37)
Molybdenum-99 ...............................       42         100 (3.7)
Neodymium-136 ...............................       60         1000 (37)
Neodymium-138 ...............................       60         1000 (37)
Neodymium-139 ...............................       60         1000 (37)
Neodymium-139m ..............................       60         100 (3.7)
Neodymium-141 ...............................       60         1000 (37)
Neodymium-147 ...............................       60          10 (.37)
Neodymium-149 ...............................       60         100 (3.7)
Neodymium-151 ...............................       60         1000 (37)
Neptunium-232 ...............................       93         1000 (37)
Neptunium-233 ...............................       93         1000 (37)
Neptunium-234 ...............................       93          10 (.37)
Neptunium-235 ...............................       93         1000 (37)
Neptunium-236 (1.2 E 5 yr) ..................       93       0.1 (.0037)
Neptunium-236 (22.5 hr) .....................       93         100 (3.7)
Neptunium-237 ...............................       93     0.01 (.00037)
Neptunium-238 ...............................       93          10 (.37)
Neptunium-239 ...............................       93         100 (3.7)
Neptunium-240 ...............................       93         100 (3.7)
Nickel-56 ...................................       28          10 (.37)
Nickel-57 ...................................       28          10 (.37)
Nickel-59 ...................................       28         100 (3.7)
Nickel-63 ...................................       28         100 (3.7)
Nickel-65 ...................................       28         100 (3.7)
Nickel-66 ...................................       28          10 (.37)
Niobium-88 ..................................       41         100 (3.7)
Niobium-89 (122 min) ........................       41         100 (3.7)
Niobium-89 (66 min) .........................       41         100 (3.7)
Niobium-90 ..................................       41          10 (.37)
Niobium-93m .................................       41         100 (3.7)
Niobium-94 ..................................       41          10 (.37)
Niobium-95 ..................................       41          10 (.37)
Niobium-95m .................................       41         100 (3.7)
Niobium-96 ..................................       41          10 (.37)
Niobium-97 ..................................       41         100 (3.7)
Niobium-98 ..................................       41         1000 (37)
Osmium-180 ..................................       76         1000 (37)
Osmium-181 ..................................       76         100 (3.7)
Osmium-182 ..................................       76         100 (3.7)
Osmium-185 ..................................       76          10 (.37)
Osmium-189m .................................       76         1000 (37)
Osmium-191 ..................................       76         100 (3.7)
Osmium-191m .................................       76         1000 (37)
Osmium-193 ..................................       76         100 (3.7)
Osmium-194 ..................................       76          1 (.037)
Palladium-100 ...............................       46         100 (3.7)
Palladium-101 ...............................       46         100 (3.7)
Palladium-103 ...............................       46         100 (3.7)
Palladium-107 ...............................       46         100 (3.7)
Palladium-109 ...............................       46         1000 (37)
Phosphorus-32 ...............................       15       0.1 (.0037)
Phosphorus-33 ...............................       15          1 (.037)
Platinum-186 ................................       78         100 (3.7)
Platinum-188 ................................       78         100 (3.7)
Platinum-189 ................................       78         100 (3.7)
Platinum-191 ................................       78         100 (3.7)
Platinum-193 ................................       78         1000 (37)
Platinum-193m ...............................       78         100 (3.7)
Platinum-195m ...............................       78         100 (3.7)
Platinum-197 ................................       78         1000 (37)
Platinum-197m ...............................       78         1000 (37)
Platinum-199 ................................       78         1000 (37)
Platinum-200 ................................       78         100 (3.7)
Plutonium-234 ...............................       94         1000 (37)
Plutonium-235 ...............................       94         1000 (37)
Plutonium-236 ...............................       94       0.1 (.0037)
Plutonium-237 ...............................       94         1000 (37)
Plutonium-238 ...............................       94     0.01 (.00037)
Plutonium-239 ...............................       94     0.01 (.00037)

[[Page 300]]

 
Plutonium-240 ...............................       94     0.01 (.00037)
Plutonium-241 ...............................       94          1 (.037)
Plutonium-242 ...............................       94     0.01 (.00037)
Plutonium-243 ...............................       94         1000 (37)
Plutonium-244 ...............................       94     0.01 (.00037)
Plutonium-245 ...............................       94         100 (3.7)
Polonium-203 ................................       84         100 (3.7)
Polonium-205 ................................       84         100 (3.7)
Polonium-207 ................................       84          10 (.37)
Polonium-210 ................................       84     0.01 (.00037)
Potassium-40 ................................       19          1 (.037)
Potassium-42 ................................       19         100 (3.7)
Potassium-43 ................................       19          10 (.37)
Potassium-44 ................................       19         100 (3.7)
Potassium-45 ................................       19         1000 (37)
Praseodymium-136 ............................       59         1000 (37)
Praseodymium-137 ............................       59         1000 (37)
Praseodymium-138m ...........................       59         100 (3.7)
Praseodymium-139 ............................       59         1000 (37)
Praseodymium-142 ............................       59         100 (3.7)
Praseodymium-142m ...........................       59         1000 (37)
Praseodymium-143 ............................       59          10 (.37)
Praseodymium-144 ............................       59         1000 (37)
Praseodymium-145 ............................       59         1000 (37)
Praseodymium-147 ............................       59         1000 (37)
Promethium-141 ..............................       61         1000 (37)
Promethium-143 ..............................       61         100 (3.7)
Promethium-144 ..............................       61          10 (.37)
Promethium-145 ..............................       61         100 (3.7)
Promethium-146 ..............................       61          10 (.37)
Promethium-147 ..............................       61          10 (.37)
Promethium-148 ..............................       61          10 (.37)
Promethium-148m .............................       61          10 (.37)
Promethium-149 ..............................       61         100 (3.7)
Promethium-150 ..............................       61         100 (3.7)
Promethium-151 ..............................       61         100 (3.7)
Protactinium-227 ............................       91         100 (3.7)
Protactinium-228 ............................       91          10 (.37)
Protactinium-230 ............................       91          10 (.37)
Protactinium-231 ............................       91     0.01 (.00037)
Protactinium-232 ............................       91          10 (.37)
Protactinium-233 ............................       91         100 (3.7)
Protactinium-234 ............................       91          10 (.37)
RADIONUCLIDES $[dagger] .....................                   1 (.037)
Radium-223 ..................................       88          1 (.037)
Radium-224 ..................................       88          10 (.37)
Radium-225 ..................................       88          1 (.037)
Radium-226 ** ...............................       88       0.1 (.0037)
Radium-227 ..................................       88         1000 (37)
Radium-228 ..................................       88       0.1 (.0037)
Radon-220 ...................................       86       0.1 (.0037)
Radon-222 ...................................       86       0.1 (.0037)
Rhenium-177 .................................       75         1000 (37)
Rhenium-178 .................................       75         1000 (37)
Rhenium-181 .................................       75         100 (3.7)
Rhenium-182 (12.7 hr) .......................       75          10 (.37)
Rhenium-182 (64.0 hr) .......................       75          10 (.37)
Rhenium-184 .................................       75          10 (.37)
Rhenium-184m ................................       75          10 (.37)
Rhenium-186 .................................       75         100 (3.7)
Rhenium-186m ................................       75          10 (.37)
Rhenium-187 .................................       75         1000 (37)
Rhenium-188 .................................       75         1000 (37)
Rhenium-188m ................................       75         1000 (37)
Rhenium-189 .................................       75         1000 (37)
Rhodium-100 .................................       45          10 (.37)
Rhodium-101 .................................       45          10 (.37)
Rhodium-101m ................................       45         100 (3.7)
Rhodium-102 .................................       45          10 (.37)
Rhodium-102m ................................       45          10 (.37)
Rhodium-103m ................................       45         1000 (37)
Rhodium-105 .................................       45         100 (3.7)
Rhodium-106m ................................       45          10 (.37)
Rhodium-107 .................................       45         1000 (37)
Rhodium-99 ..................................       45          10 (.37)
Rhodium-99m .................................       45         100 (3.7)
Rubidium-79 .................................       37         1000 (37)
Rubidium-81 .................................       37         100 (3.7)
Rubidium-81m ................................       37         1000 (37)
Rubidium-82m ................................       37          10 (.37)
Rubidium-83 .................................       37          10 (.37)
Rubidium-84 .................................       37          10 (.37)
Rubidium-86 .................................       37          10 (.37)
Rubidium-87 .................................       37          10 (.37)
Rubidium-88 .................................       37         1000 (37)
Rubidium-89 .................................       37         1000 (37)
Ruthenium-103 ...............................       44          10 (.37)
Ruthenium-105 ...............................       44         100 (3.7)
Ruthenium-106 ...............................       44          1 (.037)
Ruthenium-94 ................................       44         1000 (37)
Ruthenium-97 ................................       44         100 (3.7)
Samarium-141 ................................       62         1000 (37)
Samarium-141m ...............................       62         1000 (37)
Samarium-142 ................................       62         1000 (37)
Samarium-145 ................................       62         100 (3.7)
Samarium-146 ................................       62     0.01 (.00037)
Samarium-147 ................................       62     0.01 (.00037)
Samarium-151 ................................       62          10 (.37)
Samarium-153 ................................       62         100 (3.7)
Samarium-155 ................................       62         1000 (37)
Samarium-156 ................................       62         100 (3.7)
Scandium-43 .................................       21         1000 (37)
Scandium-44 .................................       21         100 (3.7)
Scandium-44m ................................       21          10 (.37)
Scandium-46 .................................       21          10 (.37)
Scandium-47 .................................       21         100 (3.7)
Scandium-48 .................................       21          10 (.37)
Scandium-49 .................................       21         1000 (37)
Selenium-70 .................................       34         1000 (37)
Selenium-73 .................................       34          10 (.37)
Selenium-73m ................................       34         100 (3.7)
Selenium-75 .................................       34          10 (.37)
Selenium-79 .................................       34          10 (.37)
Selenium-81 .................................       34         1000 (37)
Selenium-81m ................................       34         1000 (37)
Selenium-83 .................................       34         1000 (37)
Silicon-31 ..................................       14         1000 (37)
Silicon-32 ..................................       14          1 (.037)
Silver-102 ..................................       47         100 (3.7)
Silver-103 ..................................       47         1000 (37)
Silver-104 ..................................       47         1000 (37)
Silver-104m .................................       47         1000 (37)
Silver-105 ..................................       47          10 (.37)
Silver-106 ..................................       47         1000 (37)
Silver-106m .................................       47          10 (.37)
Silver-108m .................................       47          10 (.37)
Silver-110m .................................       47          10 (.37)
Silver-111 ..................................       47          10 (.37)
Silver-112 ..................................       47         100 (3.7)
Silver-115 ..................................       47         1000 (37)
Sodium-22 ...................................       11          10 (.37)
Sodium-24 ...................................       11          10 (.37)
Strontium-80 ................................       38         100 (3.7)
Strontium-81 ................................       38         1000 (37)
Strontium-83 ................................       38         100 (3.7)
Strontium-85 ................................       38          10 (.37)

[[Page 301]]

 
Strontium-85m ...............................       38         1000 (37)
Strontium-87m ...............................       38         100 (3.7)
Strontium-89 ................................       38          10 (.37)
Strontium-90 ................................       38       0.1 (.0037)
Strontium-91 ................................       38          10 (.37)
Strontium-92 ................................       38         100 (3.7)
Sulfur-35 ...................................       16          1 (.037)
Tantalum-172 ................................       73         100 (3.7)
Tantalum-173 ................................       73         100 (3.7)
Tantalum-174 ................................       73         100 (3.7)
Tantalum-175 ................................       73         100 (3.7)
Tantalum-176 ................................       73          10 (.37)
Tantalum-177 ................................       73         1000 (37)
Tantalum-178 ................................       73         1000 (37)
Tantalum-179 ................................       73         1000 (37)
Tantalum-180 ................................       73         100 (3.7)
Tantalum-180m ...............................       73         1000 (37)
Tantalum-182 ................................       73          10 (.37)
Tantalum-182m ...............................       73         1000 (37)
Tantalum-183 ................................       73         100 (3.7)
Tantalum-184 ................................       73          10 (.37)
Tantalum-185 ................................       73         1000 (37)
Tantalum-186 ................................       73         1000 (37)
Technetium-101 ..............................       43         1000 (37)
Technetium-104 ..............................       43         1000 (37)
Technetium-93 ...............................       43         100 (3.7)
Technetium-93m ..............................       43         1000 (37)
Technetium-94 ...............................       43          10 (.37)
Technetium-94m ..............................       43         100 (3.7)
Technetium-96 ...............................       43          10 (.37)
Technetium-96m ..............................       43         1000 (37)
Technetium-97 ...............................       43         100 (3.7)
Technetium-97m ..............................       43         100 (3.7)
Technetium-98 ...............................       43          10 (.37)
Technetium-99 ...............................       43          10 (.37)
Technetium-99m ..............................       43         100 (3.7)
Tellurium-116 ...............................       52         1000 (37)
Tellurium-121 ...............................       52          10 (.37)
Tellurium-121m ..............................       52          10 (.37)
Tellurium-123 ...............................       52          10 (.37)
Tellurium-123m ..............................       52          10 (.37)
Tellurium-125m ..............................       52          10 (.37)
Tellurium-127 ...............................       52         1000 (37)
Tellurium-127m ..............................       52          10 (.37)
Tellurium-129 ...............................       52         1000 (37)
Tellurium-129m ..............................       52          10 (.37)
Tellurium-131 ...............................       52         1000 (37)
Tellurium-131m ..............................       52          10 (.37)
Tellurium-132 ...............................       52          10 (.37)
Tellurium-133 ...............................       52         1000 (37)
Tellurium-133m ..............................       52         1000 (37)
Tellurium-134 ...............................       52         1000 (37)
Terbium-147 .................................       65         100 (3.7)
Terbium-149 .................................       65         100 (3.7)
Terbium-150 .................................       65         100 (3.7)
Terbium-151 .................................       65          10 (.37)
Terbium-153 .................................       65         100 (3.7)
Terbium-154 .................................       65          10 (.37)
Terbium-155 .................................       65         100 (3.7)
Terbium-156 .................................       65          10 (.37)
Terbium-156m (24.4 hr) ......................       65         1000 (37)
Terbium-156m (5.0 hr) .......................       65         1000 (37)
Terbium-157 .................................       65         100 (3.7)
Terbium-158 .................................       65          10 (.37)
Terbium-160 .................................       65          10 (.37)
Terbium-161 .................................       65         100 (3.7)
Thallium-194 ................................       81         1000 (37)
Thallium-194m ...............................       81         100 (3.7)
Thallium-195 ................................       81         100 (3.7)
Thallium-197 ................................       81         100 (3.7)
Thallium-198 ................................       81          10 (.37)
Thallium-198m ...............................       81         100 (3.7)
Thallium-199 ................................       81         100 (3.7)
Thallium-200 ................................       81          10 (.37)
Thallium-201 ................................       81         1000 (37)
Thallium-202 ................................       81          10 (.37)
Thallium-204 ................................       81          10 (.37)
Thorium (Irradiated) ........................       90               ***
Thorium (Natural) ...........................       90                **
Thorium-226 .................................       90         100 (3.7)
Thorium-227 .................................       90          1 (.037)
Thorium-228 .................................       90     0.01 (.00037)
Thorium-229 .................................       90   0.001 (.000037)
Thorium-230 .................................       90     0.01 (.00037)
Thorium-231 .................................       90         100 (3.7)
Thorium-232 ** ..............................       90   0.001 (.000037)
Thorium-234 .................................       90         100 (3.7)
Thulium-162 .................................       69         1000 (37)
Thulium-166 .................................       69          10 (.37)
Thulium-167 .................................       69         100 (3.7)
Thulium-170 .................................       69          10 (.37)
Thulium-171 .................................       69         100 (3.7)
Thulium-172 .................................       69         100 (3.7)
Thulium-173 .................................       69         100 (3.7)
Thulium-175 .................................       69         1000 (37)
Tin-110 .....................................       50         100 (3.7)
Tin-111 .....................................       50         1000 (37)
Tin-113 .....................................       50          10 (.37)
Tin-117m ....................................       50         100 (3.7)
Tin-119m ....................................       50          10 (.37)
Tin-121 .....................................       50         1000 (37)
Tin-121m ....................................       50          10 (.37)
Tin-123 .....................................       50          10 (.37)
Tin-123m ....................................       50         1000 (37)
Tin-125 .....................................       50          10 (.37)
Tin-126 .....................................       50          1 (.037)
Tin-127 .....................................       50         100 (3.7)
Tin-128 .....................................       50         1000 (37)
Titanium-44 .................................       22          1 (.037)
Titanium-45 .................................       22         1000 (37)
Tungsten-176 ................................       74         1000 (37)
Tungsten-177 ................................       74         100 (3.7)
Tungsten-178 ................................       74         100 (3.7)
Tungsten-179 ................................       74         1000 (37)
Tungsten-181 ................................       74         100 (3.7)
Tungsten-185 ................................       74          10 (.37)
Tungsten-187 ................................       74         100 (3.7)
Tungsten-188 ................................       74          10 (.37)
Uranium (Depleted) ..........................       92               ***
Uranium (Irradiated) ........................       92               ***
Uranium (Natural) ...........................       92                **
Uranium Enriched 20% or greater .............       92               ***
Uranium Enriched less than 20% ..............       92               ***
Uranium-230 .................................       92          1 (.037)
Uranium-231 .................................       92         1000 (37)
Uranium-232 .................................       92     0.01 (.00037)
Uranium-233 .................................       92       0.1 (.0037)
Uranium-234 ** ..............................       92       0.1 (.0037)
Uranium-235 ** ..............................       92       0.1 (.0037)
Uranium-236 .................................       92       0.1 (.0037)
Uranium-237 .................................       92         100 (3.7)
Uranium-238 ** ..............................       92       0.1 (.0037)
Uranium-239 .................................       92         1000 (37)
Uranium-240 .................................       92         1000 (37)

[[Page 302]]

 
Vanadium-47 .................................       23         1000 (37)
Vanadium-48 .................................       23          10 (.37)
Vanadium-49 .................................       23         1000 (37)
Xenon-120 ...................................       54         100 (3.7)
Xenon-121 ...................................       54          10 (.37)
Xenon-122 ...................................       54         100 (3.7)
Xenon-123 ...................................       54          10 (.37)
Xenon-125 ...................................       54         100 (3.7)
Xenon-127 ...................................       54         100 (3.7)
Xenon-129m ..................................       54         1000 (37)
Xenon-131m ..................................       54         1000 (37)
Xenon-133 ...................................       54         1000 (37)
Xenon-133m ..................................       54         1000 (37)
Xenon-135 ...................................       54         100 (3.7)
Xenon-135m ..................................       54          10 (.37)
Xenon-138 ...................................       54          10 (.37)
Ytterbium-162 ...............................       70         1000 (37)
Ytterbium-166 ...............................       70          10 (.37)
Ytterbium-167 ...............................       70         1000 (37)
Ytterbium-169 ...............................       70          10 (.37)
Ytterbium-175 ...............................       70         100 (3.7)
Ytterbium-177 ...............................       70         1000 (37)
Ytterbium-178 ...............................       70         1000 (37)
Yttrium-86 ..................................       39          10 (.37)
Yttrium-86m .................................       39         1000 (37)
Yttrium-87 ..................................       39          10 (.37)
Yttrium-88 ..................................       39          10 (.37)
Yttrium-90 ..................................       39          10 (.37)
Yttrium-90m .................................       39         100 (3.7)
Yttrium-91 ..................................       39          10 (.37)
Yttrium-91m .................................       39         1000 (37)
Yttrium-92 ..................................       39         100 (3.7)
Yttrium-93 ..................................       39         100 (3.7)
Yttrium-94 ..................................       39         1000 (37)
Yttrium-95 ..................................       39         1000 (37)
Zinc-62 .....................................       30         100 (3.7)
Zinc-63 .....................................       30         1000 (37)
Zinc-65 .....................................       30          10 (.37)
Zinc-69 .....................................       30         1000 (37)
Zinc-69m ....................................       30         100 (3.7)
Zinc-71m ....................................       30         100 (3.7)
Zinc-72 .....................................       30         100 (3.7)
Zirconium-86 ................................       40         100 (3.7)
Zirconium-88 ................................       40          10 (.37)
Zirconium-89 ................................       40         100 (3.7)
Zirconium-93 ................................       40          1 (.037)
Zirconium-95 ................................       40          10 (.37)
Zirconium-97 ................................       40          10 (.37)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
$ The RQs for all radionuclides apply to chemical compounds containing
  the radionuclides and elemental forms regardless of the diameter of
  pieces of solid material.
[a] The RQ of one curie applies to
  all radionuclides not otherwise listed. Whenever the RQs in TABLE 1--
  HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES OTHER THAN RADIONUCLIDES and this table conflict,
  the lowest RQ shall apply. For example, uranyl acetate and uranyl
  nitrate have RQs shown in TABLE 1 of 100 pounds, equivalent to about
  one-tenth the RQ level for uranium-238 in this table.
** The method to determine the RQs for mixtures or solutions of
  radionuclides can be found in paragraph 7 of the note preceding TABLE
  1 of this appendix. RQs for the following four common radionuclide
  mixtures are provided: radium-226 in secular equilibrium with its
  daughters (0.053 curie); natural uranium (0.1 curie); natural uranium
  in secular equilibrium with its daughters (0.052 curie); and natural
  thorium in secular equilibrium with its daughters (0.011 curie).
*** Indicates that the name was added by RSPA because it appears in the
  list of radionuclides in 49 CFR 173.435. The reportable quantity (RQ),
  if not specifically listed elsewhere in this appendix, shall be
  determined in accordance with the procedures in paragraph 7 of this
  appendix.


[Amdt. 172-122, 55 FR 46798, Nov. 7, 1990]

    Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting appendix A 
to Sec. 172.101, see the List of CFR Sections Affected which appears in 
the Finding Aids section of the printed volume and on GPO Access.

          Appendix B to Sec. 172.101--List of Marine Pollutants

    1. See Sec. 171.4 of this subchapter for applicability to marine 
pollutants. This appendix lists potential marine pollutants as defined 
in Sec. 171.8 of this subchapter.
    2. Marine pollutants listed in this appendix are not necessarily 
listed by name in the Sec. 172.101 Table. If a marine pollutant not 
listed by name or by synonym in the Sec. 172.101 Table meets the 
definition of any hazard Class 1 through 8, then you must determine the 
class and division of the material in accordance with Sec. 173.2a of 
this subchapter. You must also select the most appropriate hazardous 
material description and proper shipping name. If a marine pollutant not 
listed by name or by synonym in the Sec. 172.101 Table does not meet the 
definition of any Class 1 through 8, then you must offer it for 
transportation under the most appropriate of the following two Class 9 
entries: ``Environmentally hazardous substances, liquid, n.o.s.,'' 
UN3082, or ``Environmentally hazardous substances, solid, n.o.s.'' 
UN3077.
    3. This appendix contains two columns. The first column, entitled 
``S.M.P.'' (for severe marine pollutants), identifies whether a material 
is a severe marine pollutant. If the letters ``PP'' appear in this 
column for a material, the material is a severe marine pollutant, 
otherwise it is not. The second column, entitled ``Marine Pollutant'' , 
lists the marine pollutants.
    4. If a material not listed in this appendix meets the criteria for 
a marine pollutant, as provided in the General Introduction of the IMDG 
Code, Guidelines for the Identification of Harmful Substances in 
Packaged Form, the material may be transported as a marine pollutant in 
accordance with the applicable requirements of this subchapter.
    5. If approved by the Associate Administrator, a material listed in 
this appendix which does not meet the criteria for a marine pollutant, 
as provided in the General Introduction of the IMDG Code, Guidelines for 
the Identification of Harmful Substances in Packaged Form, is excepted 
from the requirements of this subchapter as a marine pollutant.

                        List of Marine Pollutants
------------------------------------------------------------------------
          S.M.P.  (1)                     Marine pollutant  (2)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                 Acetone cyanohydrin, stabilized
                                 Acetylene tetrabromide
                                 Acetylene tetrachloride

[[Page 303]]

 
                                 Acraldehyde, inhibited
                                 Acrolein, inhibited
                                 Acrolein, stabilized
                                 Acrylic aldehyde, inhibited
                                 Alcohol C-12 - C-16 poly(1-6)
                                  ethoxylate
                                 Alcohol C-13 - C-15 poly(1-6)
                                  ethoxylate
                                 Alcohol C-6 - C-17 (secondary)poly(3-6)
                                  ethoxylate
                                 Aldicarb
PP                               Aldrin
                                 Alkyl (c12-c14) dimethylamine
                                 Alkyl (c7-c9) nitrates
                                 Alkylbenzenesulphonates, branched and
                                  straight chain
                                 Alkylphenols, liquid, n.o.s. (including
                                  C2-C12 homologues)
                                 Alkylphenols, solid, n.o.s. (including
                                  C2-C12 homologues)
                                 Allyl bromide
                                 ortho-Aminoanisole
                                 Aminocarb
                                 Ammonium dinitro-o-cresolate
                                 n-Amylbenzene
PP                               Azinphos-ethyl
PP                               Azinphos-methyl
                                 Barium cyanide
                                 Bendiocarb
                                 Benomyl
                                 Benquinox
                                 Benzyl chlorocarbonate
                                 Benzyl chloroformate
PP                               Binapacryl
                                 N,N-Bis (2-hydroxyethyl) oleamide (LOA)
PP                               Brodifacoum
                                 Bromine cyanide
                                 Bromoacetone
                                 Bromoallylene
                                 Bromobenzene
                                 ortho-Bromobenzyl cyanide
                                 Bromocyane
                                 Bromoform
PP                               Bromophos-ethyl
                                 3-Bromopropene
                                 Bromoxynil
                                 Butanedione
                                 2-Butenal, stabilized
                                 Butyl benzyl phthalate
                                 N-tert-butyl-N-cyclopropyl-6-methylthio-
                                  1,3,5-triazine-2,4-diamine
                                 2,4-Di-tert-butylphenol
                                 2,6-Di-tert-butylphenol
                                 para-tertiary-butyltoluene
PP                               Cadmium compounds
                                 Cadmium sulphide
                                 Calcium arsenate
                                 Calcium arsenate and calcium arsenite,
                                  mixtures, solid
                                 Calcium cyanide
PP                               Camphechlor
                                 Carbaryl
                                 Carbendazim
                                 Carbofuran
                                 Carbon tetrabromide
                                 Carbon tetrachloride
PP                               Carbophenothion
                                 Cartap hydrochloride
PP                               Chlordane
                                 Chlorfenvinphos
PP                               Chlorinated paraffins (C-10 - C-13)
PP                               Chlorinated paraffins (C14-C17), with
                                  more than 1% shorter chain length
                                 Chlorine
                                 Chlorine cyanide, inhibited
                                 Chlormephos
                                 Chloroacetone, stabilized
                                 1-Chloro-2,3-Epoxypropane
                                 2-Chloro-6-nitrotoluene
                                 4-Chloro-2-nitrotoluene
                                 Chloro-ortho-nitrotoluene
                                 2-Chloro-5-trifluoromethylnitrobenzene
                                 para-Chlorobenzyl chloride, liquid or
                                  solid
                                 Chlorodinitrobenzenes, liquid or solid
                                 1-Chloroheptane
                                 1-Chlorohexane
                                 Chloronitroanilines
                                 Chloronitrotoluenes, liquid
                                 Chloronitrotoluenes, solid
                                 1-Chlorooctane
PP                               Chlorophenolates, liquid
PP                               Chlorophenolates, solid
                                 Chlorophenols, liquid
                                 Chlorophenols, solid
                                 Chlorophenyltrichlorosilane
                                 alpha-Chloropropylene
                                 Chlorotoluenes (meta-;para-)
PP                               Chlorpyriphos
PP                               Chlorthiophos
                                 Cocculus
                                 Coconitrile
                                 Copper acetoarsenite
                                 Copper arsenite
                                 Copper chloride
PP                               Copper chloride solution
PP                               Copper cyanide
PP                               Copper metal powder
PP                               Copper sulphate, anhydrous, hydrates
                                 Coumachlor
PP                               Coumaphos
PP                               Cresyl diphenyl phosphate
                                 Crotonaldehyde, stabilized
                                 Crotonic aldehyde, stabilized
                                 Crotoxyphos
                                 Cupric arsenite
PP                               Cupric chloride
PP                               Cupric cyanide
PP                               Cupric sulfate
                                 Cupriethylenediamine solution
PP                               Cuprous chloride
                                 Cyanide mixtures
                                 Cyanide solutions
                                 Cyanides, inorganic, n.o.s.
                                 Cyanogen bromide
                                 Cyanogen chloride, inhibited
                                 Cyanogen chloride, stabilized
                                 Cyanophos
PP                               1,5,9-Cyclododecatriene
PP                               Cyhexatin
PP                               Cymenes (o-;m-;p-)
PP                               Cypermethrin
PP                               DDT
                                 Decycloxytetrahydrothiophene dioxide
                                 DEF
                                 Desmedipham
                                 Di-allate
                                 Di-n-Butyl phthalate
PP                               Dialifos
                                 4,4'-Diaminodiphenylmethane
PP                               Diazinon
                                 1,3-Dibromobenzene
PP                               Dichlofenthion
                                 Dichloroanilines
                                 1,3-Dichlorobenzene
                                 1,2-Dichlorobenzene

[[Page 304]]

 
                                 1,4-Dichlorobenzene
                                 Dichlorobenzene (meta-; para-)
                                 2,2-Dichlorodiethyl ether
                                 Dichlorodimethyl ether, symmetrical
                                 Di-(2-chloroethyl) ether
                                 1,1-Dichloroethylene, inhibited
                                 1,6-Dichlorohexane
                                 Dichlorophenyltrichlorosilane
PP                               Dichlorvos
PP                               Diclofop-methyl
                                 Dicrotophos
PP                               Dieldrin
                                 Diisopropylbenzenes
                                 Diisopropylnaphthalenes, mixed isomers
PP                               Dimethoate
PP                               N,N-Dimethyldodecylamine
                                 Dimethylhydrazine, symmetrical
                                 Dimethylhydrazine, unsymmetrical
                                 Dinitro-o-cresol, solid
                                 Dinitro-o-cresol, solution
                                 Dinitrochlorobenzenes, liquid or solid
                                 Dinitrophenol, dry or wetted with less
                                  than 15 per cent water, by mass
                                 Dinitrophenol solutions
                                 Dinitrophenol, wetted with not less
                                  than 15 per cent water, by mass
                                 Dinitrophenolates alkali metals, dry or
                                  wetted with less than 15 per cent
                                  water, by mass
                                 Dinitrophenolates, wetted with not less
                                  than 15 per cent water, by mass
                                 Dinobuton
                                 Dinoseb
                                 Dinoseb acetate
                                 Dioxacarb
                                 Dioxathion
                                 Dipentene
                                 Diphacinone
                                 Diphenyl
                                 Diphenyl oxide and biphenyl phenyl
                                  ether mixtures
PP                               Diphenylamine chloroarsine
PP                               Diphenylchloroarsine, solid or liquid
                                 Disulfoton
                                 1,4-Di-tert-butylbenzene
                                 DNOC
                                 DNOC (pesticide)
                                 Dodecyl diphenyl oxide disulphonate
PP                               Dodecyl hydroxypropyl sulfide
                                 1-Dodecylamine
PP                               Dodecylphenol
                                 Drazoxolon
                                 Edifenphos
PP                               Endosulfan
PP                               Endrin
                                 Epibromohydrin
                                 Epichlorohydrin
PP                               EPN
PP                               Esfenvalerate
PP                               Ethion
                                 Ethoprophos
                                 Ethyl fluid
                                 Ethyl mercaptan
                                 2-Ethylhexyl nitrate
                                 5-Ethyl-2-picoline
                                 Ethyl propenoate, inhibited
                                 2-Ethyl-3-propylacrolein
                                 Ethyl tetraphosphate
                                 Ethyldichloroarsine
                                 Ethylene dibromide and methyl bromide
                                  mixtures, liquid
                                 2-Ethylhexaldehyde
                                 Fenamiphos
PP                               Fenbutatin oxide
PP                               Fenchlorazole-ethyl
PP                               Fenitrothion
PP                               Fenoxapro-ethyl
PP                               Fenoxaprop-P-ethyl
PP                               Fenpropathrin
                                 Fensulfothion
PP                               Fenthion
PP                               Fentin acetate
PP                               Fentin hydroxide
                                 Ferric arsenate
                                 Ferric arsenite
                                 Ferrous arsenate
PP                               Fonofos
                                 Formetanate
PP                               Furathiocarb (ISO)
PP                               gamma-BHC
                                 Gasoline, leaded
PP                               Heptachlor
                                 Heptenophos
                                 n-Heptaldehyde
                                 n-Heptylbenzene
                                 normal-Heptyl chloride
PP                               Hexachlorobutadiene
PP                               1,3-Hexachlorobutadiene
                                 Hexaethyl tetraphosphate liquid
                                 Hexaethyl tetraphosphate, solid
                                 normal-Hexyl chloride
                                 n-Hexylbenzene
                                 Hydrocyanic acid, anhydrous,
                                  stabilized, containing less than 3%
                                  water
                                 Hydrocyanic acid, anhydrous,
                                  stabilized, containing less than 3%
                                  water and absorbed in a porous inert
                                  material
                                 Hydrocyanic acid, aqueous solutions not
                                  more than 20% hydrocyanic acid
                                 Hydrogen cyanide solution in alcohol,
                                  with notmore than 45% hydrogen cyanide
                                 Hydrogen cyanide, stabilized with less
                                  than 3% water
                                 Hydrogen cyanide, stabilized with less
                                  than 3% water and absorbed in a porous
                                  inert material
                                 Hydroxydimethylbenzenes, liquid or
                                  solid
                                 Ioxynil
                                 Isoamyl mercaptan
                                 Isobenzan
                                 Isobutyl butyrate
                                 Isobutylbenzene
                                 Isodecyl acrylate
                                 Isodecyl diphenyl phosphate
                                 Isofenphos
                                 Isooctyl nitrate
                                 Isoprocarb
                                 Isopropenylbenzene
                                 Isotetramethylbenzene
PP                               Isoxathion
                                 Lead acetate
                                 Lead arsenates
                                 Lead arsenites
                                 Lead compounds, soluble, n.o.s.
                                 Lead cyanide
                                 Lead nitrate
                                 Lead perchlorate, solid or solution
                                 Lead tetraethyl
                                 Lead tetramethyl
PP                               Lindane
                                 Linuron
                                 London Purple
                                 Magnesium arsenate
                                 Malathion
                                 Mancozeb (ISO)

[[Page 305]]

 
                                 Maneb
                                 Maneb preparations with not less than
                                  60% maneb
                                 Maneb preparation, stabilized against
                                  self-heating
                                 Maneb stabilized or Maneb preparations,
                                  stabilized against self-heating
                                 Manganese ethylene-1,2-bis
                                  dithiocarbamate
                                 Manganese ethylene-1,2-bis-
                                  dithiocarbamate, stabilized against
                                  self-heating
                                 Mecarbam
                                 Mephosfolan
                                 Mercaptodimethur
PP                               Mercuric acetate
PP                               Mercuric ammonium chloride
PP                               Mercuric arsenate
PP                               Mercuric benzoate
PP                               Mercuric bisulphate
PP                               Mercuric bromide
PP                               Mercuric chloride
PP                               Mercuric cyanide
PP                               Mercuric gluconate
                                 Mercuric iodide
PP                               Mercuric nitrate
PP                               Mercuric oleate
PP                               Mercuric oxide
PP                               Mercuric oxycyanide, desensitized
PP                               Mercuric potassium cyanide
PP                               Mercuric Sulphate
PP                               Mercuric thiocyanate
PP                               Mercurol
PP                               Mercurous acetate
PP                               Mercurous bisulphate
PP                               Mercurous bromide
PP                               Mercurous chloride
PP                               Mercurous nitrate
PP                               Mercurous salicylate
PP                               Mercurous sulphate
PP                               Mercury acetates
PP                               Mercury ammonium chloride
PP                               Mercury based pesticide, liquid,
                                  flammable, toxic
PP                               Mercury based pesticides, liquid,
                                  toxic, flammable
PP                               Mercury based pesticides, liquid, toxic
PP                               Mercury based pesticides, solid, toxic
PP                               Mercury benzoate
PP                               Mercury bichloride
PP                               Mercury bisulphates
PP                               Mercury bromides
PP                               Mercury compounds, liquid, n.o.s.
PP                               Mercury compounds, solid, n.o.s.
PP                               Mercury cyanide
PP                               Mercury gluconate
PP                               Mercury (I) (mercurous) compounds
                                  (pesticides)
PP                               Mercury (II) (mercuric) compounds
                                  (pesticides)
                                 Mercury iodide
PP                               Mercury nucleate
PP                               Mercury oleate
PP                               Mercury oxide
PP                               Mercury oxycyanide, desensitized
PP                               Mercury potassium cyanide
PP                               Mercury potassium iodide
PP                               Mercury salicylate
PP                               Mercury sulfates
PP                               Mercury thiocyanate
                                 Metam-sodium
                                 Methamidophos
                                 Methanethiol
                                 Methidathion
                                 Methomyl
                                 ortho-Methoxyaniline
                                 Methyl bromide and ethylene dibromide
                                  mixtures, liquid
                                 Methyl mercaptan
                                 3-Methylacroleine, stabilized
                                 Methylchlorobenzenes
                                 Methylnitrophenols
                                 3-Methylpyradine
                                 Methyltrithion
                                 Methylvinylbenzenes, inhibited
PP                               Mevinphos
                                 Mexacarbate
                                 Mirex
                                 Monocrotophos
                                 Motor fuel anti-knock mixtures
                                 Motor fuel anti-knock mixtures or
                                  compounds
                                 Nabam
                                 Naled
PP                               Nickel carbonyl
PP                               Nickel cyanide
PP                               Nickel tetracarbonyl
                                 3-Nitro-4-chlorobenzotrifluoride
                                 Nitrobenzene
                                 Nitrobenzotrifluorides, liquid or solid
                                 Nonylphenol
                                 normal-Octaldehyde
                                 Oleylamine
PP                               Organotin compounds, liquid, n.o.s.
PP                               Organotin compounds (pesticides)
PP                               Organotin compounds, solid, n.o.s.
PP                               Organotin pesticides, liquid,
                                  flammable, toxic, n.o.s., flash point
                                  less than 23deg C
PP                               Organotin pesticides, liquid, toxic,
                                  flammable, n.o.s.
PP                               Organotin pesticides, liquid, toxic,
                                  n.o.s.
PP                               Organotin pesticides, solid, toxic,
                                  n.o.s.
                                 Orthoarsenic acid
PP                               Osmium tetroxide
                                 Oxamyl
                                 Oxydisulfoton
                                 Paraoxon
PP                               Parathion
PP                               Parathion-methyl
PP                               PCBs.
                                 Pentachloroethane
PP                               Pentachlorophenol
                                 Pentalin
                                 Pentanethiols
                                 n-Pentylbenzene
                                 Perchloroethylene
                                 Perchloromethylmercaptan
                                 Petrol, leaded
PP                               Phenarsazine chloride
                                 d-Phenothrin
PP                               Phenthoate
                                 1-Phenylbutane
                                 2-Phenylbutane
                                 Phenylcyclohexane
PP                               Phenylmercuric acetate
PP                               Phenylmercuric compounds, n.o.s.
PP                               Phenylmercuric hydroxide
PP                               Phenylmercuric nitrate
                                 2-Phenylpropene
PP                               Phorate
PP                               Phosalone
                                 Phosmet
PP                               Phosphamidon
PP                               Phosphorus, white, molten
PP                               Phosphorus, white or yellow dry or
                                  under water or in solution
PP                               Phosphorus white, or yellow, molten
PP                               Phosphorus, yellow, molten
                                 Pindone (and salts of)
                                 Pirimicarb
PP                               Pirimiphos-ethyl
PP                               Polychlorinated biphenyls

[[Page 306]]

 
PP                               Polyhalogenated biphenyls, liquid or
                                  Terphenyls liquid
PP                               Polyhalogenated biphenyls, solid or
                                  Terphenyls, solid
PP                               Potassium cuprocyanide
                                 Potassium cyanide, solid
                                 Potassium cyanide, solution
PP                               Potassium cyanocuprate (I)
PP                               Potassium cyanomercurate
PP                               Potassium mercuric iodide
                                 Promecarb
                                 Propachlor
                                 Propaphos
                                 Propenal, inhibited
                                 Propoxur
                                 Prothoate
                                 Prussic acid, anhydrous, stabilized
                                 Prussic acid, anhydrous, stabilized,
                                  absorbed in a porous inert material
PP                               Pyrazophos
                                 Quinalphos
PP                               Quizalofop
PP                               Quizalofop-p-ethyl
                                 Rotenone
                                 Salithion
PP                               Silafluofen
                                 Silver arsenite
                                 Silver cyanide
                                 Silver orthoarsenite
PP                               Sodium copper cyanide, solid
PP                               Sodium copper cyanide solution
PP                               Sodium cuprocyanide, solid
PP                               Sodium cuprocyanide, solution
                                 Sodium cyanide, solid
                                 Sodium cyanide, solution
                                 Sodium dinitro-o-cresolate, dry or
                                  wetted with less than 15 per cent
                                  water, by mass
                                 Sodium dinitro-ortho-cresolate, wetted
                                  with not less than 15 per cent water,
                                  by mass
PP                               Sodium pentachlorophenate
                                 Strychnine or Strychnine salts
                                 Sulfotep
PP                               Sulprophos
                                 Tallow nitrile
                                 Temephos
                                 TEPP
PP                               Terbufos
                                 Tetrabromoethane
                                 Tetrabromomethane
                                 1,1,2,2-Tetrachloroethane
                                 Tetrachloroethylene
                                 Tetrachloromethane
                                 Tetrachlorophenol
                                 Tetraethyl dithiopyrophosphate
PP                               Tetraethyl lead, liquid
                                 Tetramethrin
                                 Tetramethyllead
                                 Thallium chlorate
                                 Thallium compounds, n.o.s.
                                 Thallium compounds (pesticides)
                                 Thallium nitrate
                                 Thallium sulfate
                                 Thallous chlorate
                                 Thiocarbonyl tetrachloride
                                 Triaryl phosphates, isopropylated
PP                               Triaryl phosphates, n.o.s.
                                 Triazophos
                                 Tribromomethane
PP                               Tributyltin compounds
                                 Trichlorfon
PP                               1,2,3--Trichlorobenzene
                                 Trichlorobenzenes, liquid
                                 Trichlorobutene
                                 Trichlorobutylene
                                 Trichloromethane sulphuryl chloride
                                 Trichloromethyl sulphochloride
                                 Trichloronat
                                 Tricresyl phosphate (less than 1% ortho-
                                  isomer)
PP                               Tricresyl phosphate, not less than 1%
                                  ortho-isomer but not more than 3%
                                  orthoisomer
PP                               Tricresyl phosphate with more than 3
                                  per cent ortho isomer
                                 Triethylbenzene
                                 Triisopropylated phenyl phosphates
                                 Trimethylene dichloride
PP                               Triphenylphosphate
                                 Triphenyl phosphate/tert-butylated
                                  triphenyl phosphates mixtures
                                  containing 5% to 10% triphenyl
                                  phosphates
PP                               Triphenyl phosphate/tert-butylated
                                  triphenyl phosphates mixtures
                                  containing 10% to 48% triphenyl
                                  phosphates
PP                               Triphenyltin compounds
                                 Tritolyl phosphate (less than 1% ortho-
                                  isomer)
PP                               Tritolyl phosphate (not less than 1%
                                  ortho-isomer)
                                 Trixylenyl phosphate
                                 Vinylidene chloride, stabilized
                                 Warfarin (and salts of)
PP                               White phosphorus, dry
PP                               White phosphorus, wet
                                 White spirit, low (15-20%) aromatic
PP                               Yellow phosphorus, dry
PP                               Yellow phosphorus, wet
                                 Zinc bromide
                                 Zinc cyanide
------------------------------------------------------------------------


[Amdt. 172-127, 57 FR 52935, Nov. 5, 1992]

    Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting appendix B 
to Sec. 172.101, see the List of CFR Sections Affected which appears in 
the Finding Aids section of the printed volume and on GPO Access.



Sec. 172.102  Special provisions.

    (a) General. When column 7 of the Sec. 172.101 table refers to a 
special provision for a hazardous material, the meaning and requirements 
of that provision are as set forth in this section. When a special 
provision specifies packaging or packaging requirements--
    (1) The special provision is in addition to the standard 
requirements for all packagings prescribed in Sec. 173.24 of this 
subchapter and any other applicable packaging requirements in subparts A 
and B of part 173 of this subchapter; and
    (2) To the extent a special provision imposes limitations or 
additional requirements on the packaging provisions set forth in column 
8 of the

[[Page 307]]

Sec. 172.101 table, packagings must conform to the requirements of the 
special provision.
    (b) Description of codes for special provisions. Special provisions 
contain packaging provisions, prohibitions, exceptions from requirements 
for particular quantities or forms of materials and requirements or 
prohibitions applicable to specific modes of transportation, as follows:
    (1) A code consisting only of numbers (for example, ``11'') is 
multi-modal in application and may apply to bulk and non-bulk 
packagings.
    (2) A code containing the letter ``A'' refers to a special provision 
which applies only to transportation by aircraft.
    (3) A code containing the letter ``B'' refers to a special provision 
which applies only to bulk packaging requirements. Unless otherwise 
provided in this subchapter, these special provisions do not apply to IM 
portable tanks.
    (4) A code containing the letter ``H'' refers to a special provision 
which applies only to transportation by highway.
    (5) A code containing the letter ``N'' refers to a special provision 
which applies only to non-bulk packaging requirements.
    (6) A code containing the letter ``R'' refers to a special provision 
which applies only to transportation by rail.
    (7) A code containing the letter ``T'' refers to a special provision 
which applies only to transportation in IM portable tanks.
    (8) A code containing the letter ``W'' refers to a special provision 
which applies only to transportation by water.
    (c) Tables of special provisions. The following tables list, and set 
forth the requirements of, the special provisions referred to in column 
7 of the Sec. 172.101 table.
    (1) Numeric provisions. These provisions are multi-modal and apply 
to bulk and non-bulk packagings:

                         Code/Special Provisions

1  This material is poisonous by inhalation (see Sec. 171.8 of this 
subchapter) in Hazard Zone A (see Sec. 173.116(a) or Sec. 173.133(a) of 
this subchapter), and must be described as an inhalation hazard under 
the provisions of this subchapter.
2  This material is poisonous by inhalation (see Sec. 171.8 of this 
subchapter) in Hazard Zone B (see Sec. 173.116(a) or Sec. 173.133(a) of 
this subchapter), and must be described as an inhalation hazard under 
the provisions of this subchapter.
3  This material is poisonous by inhalation (see Sec. 171.8 of this 
subchapter) in Hazard Zone C (see Sec. 173.116(a) of this subchapter), 
and must be described as an inhalation hazard under the provisions of 
this subchapter.
4  This material is poisonous by inhalation (see Sec. 171.8 of this 
subchapter) in Hazard Zone D (see Sec. 173.116(a) of this subchapter), 
and must be described as an inhalation hazard under the provisions of 
this subchapter.
5  If this material meets the definition for a material poisonous by 
inhalation (see Sec. 171.8 of this subchapter), a shipping name must be 
selected which identifies the inhalation hazard, in Division 2.3 or 
Division 6.1, as appropriate.
6  This material is poisonous-by-inhalation and must be described as an 
inhalation hazard under the provisions of this subchapter.
7  An ammonium nitrate fertilizer is a fertilizer formulation, 
containing 90% or more ammonium nitrate and no more than 0.2% organic 
combustible material (calculated as carbon), which does not meet the 
definition and criteria of a Class 1 (explosive) material (See 
Sec. 173.50 of this subchapter).
8  A hazardous substance that is not a hazardous waste may be shipped 
under the shipping description ``Other regulated substances, liquid or 
solid, n.o.s.'', as appropriate. In addition, for solid materials, 
special provision B54 applies.
9  Packaging for certain PCBs for disposal and storage is prescribed by 
EPA in 40 CFR 761.60 and 761.65.
10  An ammonium nitrate mixed fertilizer is a fertilizer formulation, 
containing less than 90% ammonium nitrate and other ingredients, which 
does not meet the definition and criteria of a Class 1 (explosive) 
material (See Sec. 173.50 of this subchapter).
11  The hazardous material must be packaged as either a liquid or a 
solid, as appropriate, depending on its physical form at 55  deg.C (131 
deg.F) at atmospheric pressure.
12  In concentrations greater than 40 percent, this material has strong 
oxidizing properties and is capable of starting fires in contact with 
combustible materials. If appropriate, a package containing this 
material must conform to the additional labeling requirements of 
Sec. 172.402 of this subchapter.
13  The words ``Inhalation Hazard'' shall be entered on each shipping 
paper in association with the shipping description, shall be

[[Page 308]]

marked on each non-bulk package in association with the proper shipping 
name and identification number, and shall be marked on two opposing 
sides of each bulk package. Size of marking on bulk package must conform 
to Sec. 172.302(b) of this subchapter. The requirements of 
Secs. 172.203(m) and 172.505 of this subchapter do not apply.
14  Motor fuel antiknock mixtures are:
    a. Mixtures of one or more organic lead mixtures (such as tetraethyl 
lead, triethylmethyl lead, diethyldimethyl lead, ethyltrimethyl lead, 
and tetramethyl lead) with one or more halogen compounds (such as 
ethylene dibromide and ethylene dichloride), hydrocarbon solvents or 
other equally efficient stabilizers; or
    b. tetraethyl lead.
15   Chemical kits and first aid kits are boxes, cases, etc., containing 
small amounts of various compatible dangerous goods which are used for 
medical, analytical, or testing purposes and for which exceptions are 
provided in this subchapter. For transportation by aircraft, any 
hazardous materials forbidden in passenger aircraft may not be included 
in these kits. Inner packagings may not exceed 250 mL for liquids or 250 
g for solids and must be protected from other materials in the kit. The 
total quantity of hazardous materials in any one kit may not exceed 
either 1 L or 1 kg. The packing group assigned to the kit as a whole 
must be the most stringent packing group assigned to any individual 
substance contained in the kit. Kits must be packed in wooden boxes 
(4C1, 4C2), plywood boxes (4D), reconstituted wood boxes (4F), 
fiberboard boxes (4G) or plastic boxes (4H1, 4H2); these packagings must 
meet the requirements appropriate to the packing group assigned to the 
kit as a whole. The total quantity of hazardous materials in any one 
package may not exceed either 10 L or 10 kg. Kits which are carried on 
board transport vehicles for first-aid or operating purposes are not 
subject to the requirements of this subchapter.
16  This description applies to smokeless powder and other solid 
propellants that are used as powder for small arms and have been classed 
as Division 1.3 and 4.1 in accordance with Sec. 173.56 of this 
subchapter.
18 This description is authorized only for fire extinguishers listed in 
Sec. 173.309(b) of this subchapter meeting the following conditions:
    a. Each fire extinguisher may only have extinguishing contents that 
are nonflammable, non-poisonous, non-corrosive and commercially free 
from corroding components.
    b. Each fire extinguisher must be charged with a nonflammable, non-
poisonous, dry gas that has a dew-point at or below minus 46.7  deg.C 
(minus 52  deg.F) at 101 kPa (1 atmosphere) and is free of corroding 
components, to not more than the service pressure of the cylinder.
    c. A fire extinguisher may not contain more than 30% carbon dioxide 
by volume or any other corrosive extinguishing agent.
    d. Each fire extinguisher must be protected externally by suitable 
corrosion-resisting coating.
19  For domestic transportation only, the identification number 
``UN1075'' may be used in place of the identification number specified 
in column (4) of the Sec. 172.101 table. The identification number used 
must be consistent on package markings, shipping papers and emergency 
response information.
21  This material must be stabilized by appropriate means (e.g., 
addition of chemical inhibitor, purging to remove oxygen) to prevent 
dangerous polymerization (see Sec. 173.21(f) of this subchapter).
22  If the hazardous material is in dispersion in organic liquid, the 
organic liquid must have a flash point above 50  deg.C (122  deg.F).
23  This material may be transported under the provisions of Division 
4.1 only if it is so packed that the percentage of diluent will not fall 
below that stated in the shipping description at any time during 
transport. Quantities of not more than 500 g per package with not less 
than 10 percent water by mass may also be classed in Division 4.1, 
provided a negative test result is obtained when tested in accordance 
with test series 6(c) of the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria (see 
Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).
24  Alcoholic beverages containing more than 70 percent alcohol by 
volume must be transported as materials in Packing Group II. Alcoholic 
beverages containing more than 24 percent but not more than 70 percent 
alcohol by volume must be transported as materials in Packing Group III.
26  This entry does not include ammonium permanganate, the transport of 
which is prohibited except when approved by the Associate Administrator.
28  The dihydrated sodium salt of dichloroisocyanuric acid is not 
subject to the requirements of this subchapter.
29  Lithium cells and batteries and equipment containing or packed with 
lithium cells and batteries which do not comply with the provisions of 
Sec. 173.185 of this subchapter may be transported only if they are 
approved by the Associate Administrator.
30  Sulfur is not subject to the requirements of this subchapter if 
transported in a non-bulk packaging or if formed to a specific shape 
(e.g., prills, granules, pellets, pastilles, or flakes).
31  Materials which have undergone sufficient heat treatment to render 
them non-

[[Page 309]]

hazardous are not subject to the requirements of this subchapter.
32  Polymeric beads and molding compounds may be made from polystyrene, 
poly(methyl methacrylate) or other polymeric material.
33  Ammonium nitrites and mixtures of an inorganic nitrite with an 
ammonium salt are prohibited.
34  The commercial grade of calcium nitrate fertilizer, when consisting 
mainly of a double salt (calcium nitrate and ammonium nitrate) 
containing not more than 10 percent ammonium nitrate and at least 12 
percent water of crystallization, is not subject to the requirements of 
this subchapter.
35  Antimony sulphides and oxides which do not contain more than 0.5 
percent of arsenic calculated on the total mass do not meet the 
definition of Division 6.1.
36  The maximum net quantity per package is 5 L (1 gallon) or 5 kg (11 
pounds).
37  Unless it can be demonstrated by testing that the sensitivity of the 
substance in its frozen state is no greater than in its liquid state, 
the substance must remain liquid during normal transport conditions. It 
must not freeze at temperatures above -15  deg.C (5  deg.F).
38  If this material shows a violent effect in laboratory tests 
involving heating under confinement, the labeling requirements of 
Special Provision 53 apply, and the material must be packaged in 
accordance with packing method OP6 in Sec. 173.225 of this subchapter. 
If the SADT of the technically pure substance is higher than 75  deg.C, 
the technically pure substance and formulations derived from it are not 
self-reactive materials and, if not meeting any other hazard class, are 
not subject to the requirements of this subchapter.
39  This substance may be carried under provisions other than those of 
Class 1 only if it is so packed that the percentage of water will not 
fall below that stated at any time during transport. When phlegmatized 
with water and inorganic inert material, the content of urea nitrate 
must not exceed 75 percent by mass and the mixture should not be capable 
of being detonated by test 1(a)(i) or test 1(a) (ii) in the UN 
Recommendations Tests and Criteria (see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).
40  Polyester resin kits consist of two components: a base material 
(Class 3, Packing Group II or III) and an activator (organic peroxide), 
each separately packed in an inner packaging. The organic peroxide must 
be type D, E, or F, not requiring temperature control, and be limited to 
a quantity of 125 mL (4.22 ounces) per inner packaging if liquid, and 
500 g (1 pound) if solid. The components may be placed in the same outer 
packaging provided they will not interact dangerously in the event of 
leakage. Packing group will be II or III, according to the criteria for 
Class 3, applied to the base material.
43  The membrane filters, including paper separators and coating or 
backing materials, that are present in transport, must not be able to 
propagate a detonation as tested by one of the tests described in the UN 
Manual of Tests and Criteria, Part I, Test series 1(a) (see Sec. 171.7 
of this subchapter). On the basis of the results of suitable burning 
rate tests, and taking into account the standard tests in the UN Manual 
of Tests and Criteria, Part III, subsection 33.2.1 (see Sec. 171.7 of 
this subchapter), nitrocellulose membrane filters in the form in which 
they are to be transported that do not meet the criteria for a Division 
4.1 material are not subject to the requirements of this subchapter. 
Packagings must be so constructed that explosion is not possible by 
reason of increased internal pressure. Nitrocellulose membrane filters 
covered by this entry, each with a mass not exceeding 0.5 g, are not 
subject to the requirements of this subchapter when contained 
individually in an article or a sealed packet.
44  The formulation must be prepared so that it remains homogeneous and 
does not separate during transport. Formulations with low nitrocellulose 
contents and neither showing dangerous properties when tested for their 
ability to detonate, deflagrate or explode when heated under defined 
confinement by the appropriate test methods and criteria in the UN 
Recommendations, Tests and Criteria, not classed as a Division 4.1 
(flammable solid) when tested in accordance with the procedures 
specified in Sec. 173.124 of this subchapter (chips, if necessary, 
crushed and sieved to a particle size of less than 1.25 mm) are not 
subject to the requirements of this subchapter.
45  Temperature should be maintained between 18  deg.C (64.4  deg.F) and 
40  deg.C (104  deg.F). Tanks containing solidified methacrylic acid 
must not be reheated during transport.
46  This material must be packed in accordance with packing method OP6 
(see Sec. 173.225 of this subchapter). During transport, it must be 
protected from direct sunshine and stored (or kept) in a cool and well-
ventilated place, away from all sources of heat.
47  Mixtures of solids which are not subject to this subchapter and 
flammable liquids may be transported under this entry without first 
applying the classification criteria of Division 4.1, provided there is 
no free liquid visible at the time the material is loaded or at the time 
the packaging or transport unit is closed. Each packaging must 
correspond to a design type that has passed a leakproofness test at the 
Packing Group II level. Small inner packagings

[[Page 310]]

consisting of sealed packets containing less than 10 mL of a Class 3 
liquid in Packing Group II or III absorbed onto a solid material are not 
subject to this subchapter provided there is no free liquid in the 
packet.
48  Mixtures of solids which are not subject to this subchapter and 
toxic liquids may be transported under this entry without first applying 
the classification criteria of Division 6.1, provided there is no free 
liquid visible at the time the material is loaded or at the time the 
packaging or transport unit is closed. Each packaging must correspond to 
a design type that has passed a leakproofness test at the Packing Group 
II level. This entry may not be used for solids containing a Packing 
Group I liquid.
49  Mixtures of solids which are not subject to this subchapter and 
corrosive liquids may be transported under this entry without first 
applying the classification criteria of Class 8, provided there is no 
free liquid visible at the time the material is loaded or at the time 
the packaging or transport unit is closed. Each packaging must 
correspond to a design type that has passed a leakproofness test at the 
Packing Group II level.
50  Cases, cartridge, empty with primer which are made of metallic or 
plastic casings and meeting the classification criteria of Division 1.4 
are not regulated for domestic transportation.
51  This description applies to items previously described as ``Toy 
propellant devices, Class C'' and includes reloadable kits. Model rocket 
motors containing 30 grams or less propellant are classed as Division 
1.4S and items containing more than 30 grams of propellant but not more 
than 62.5 grams of propellant are classed as Division 1.4C.
52  Ammonium nitrate fertilizers may not meet the definition and 
criteria of Class 1 (explosive) material (see Sec. 173.50 of this 
subchapter).
53  Packages of these materials must bear the subsidiary risk label, 
``EXPLOSIVE'', unless otherwise provided in this subchapter or through 
an approval issued by the Associate Administrator, or the competent 
authority of the country of origin. A copy of the approval shall 
accompany the shipping papers.
54  Maneb or maneb preparations not meeting the definition of Division 
4.3 or any other hazard class are not subject to the requirements of 
this subchapter when transported by motor vehicle, rail car, or 
aircraft.
55  This device must be approved in accordance with Sec. 173.56 of this 
subchapter by the Associate Administrator.
56  A means to interrupt and prevent detonation of the detonator from 
initiating the detonating cord must be installed between each electric 
detonator and the detonating cord ends of the jet perforating guns 
before the charged jet perforating guns are offered for transportation.
57  Maneb or Maneb preparations stabilized against self-heating need not 
be classified in Division 4.2 when it can be demonstrated by testing 
that a volume of 1 m3 of substance does not self-ignite and 
that the temperature at the center of the sample does not exceed 200 
deg.C, when the sample is maintained at a temperature of not less than 
75  deg.C  2  deg.C for a period of 24 hours, in accordance 
with procedures set forth for testing self-heating materials in the UN 
Manual of Tests and Criteria (see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).
58  Aqueous solutions of Division 5.1 inorganic solid nitrate substances 
are considered as not meeting the criteria of Division 5.1 if the 
concentration of the substances in solution at the minimum temperature 
encountered in transport is not greater than 80% of the saturation 
limit.
59  Ferrocerium, stabilized against corrosion, with a minimum iron 
content of 10 percent is not subject to the requirements of this 
subchapter.
60  After September 30, 1997, an oxygen generator, chemical, that is 
shipped with its means of initiation attached must incorporate at least 
two positive means of preventing unintentional actuation of the 
generator, and be classed and approved by the Associate Administrator. 
The procedures for approval of a chemical oxygen generator that contains 
an explosive means of initiation (e.g., a primer or electric match) are 
specified in Sec. 173.56 of this subchapter. Each person who offers a 
chemical oxygen generator for transportation after September 30, 1997, 
shall: (1) ensure that it is offered in conformance with the conditions 
of the approval; (2) maintain a copy of the approval at each facility 
where the chemical oxygen generator is packaged; and (3) mark the 
approval number on the outside of the package.
61  A chemical oxygen generator is spent if its means of ignition and 
all or a part of its chemical contents have been expended.
64  The group of alkali metals includes lithium, sodium, potassium, 
rubidium, and caesium.
65  The group of alkaline earth metals includes magnesium, calcium, 
strontium, and barium.
66  Formulations of these substances containing not less than 30 percent 
non-volatile, non-flammable phlegmatizer are not subject to this 
subchapter.
70  Black powder that has been classed in accordance with the 
requirements of Sec. 173.56

[[Page 311]]

of this subchapter may be reclassed and offered for domestic 
transportation as a Division 4.1 material if it is offered for 
transportation and transported in accordance with the limitations and 
packaging requirements of Sec. 173.170 of this subchapter.
74  During transport, this material must be protected from direct 
sunshine and stored or kept in a cool and well-ventilated place, away 
from all sources of heat.
77  For domestic transportation, a Division 5.1 subsidiary risk label is 
required only if a carbon dioxide and oxygen mixture contains more than 
23.5% oxygen.
78  This entry may not be used to describe compressed air which contains 
more than 23.5 percent oxygen. An oxidizer label is not required for any 
oxygen concentration of 23.5 percent or less.
79  This entry may not be used for mixtures that meet the definition for 
oxidizing gas.
81  Polychlorinated biphenyl items, as defined in 40 CFR 761.3, for 
which specification packagings are impractical, may be packaged in non-
specification packagings meeting the general packaging requirements of 
subparts A and B of part 173 of this subchapter. Alternatively, the item 
itself may be used as a packaging if it meets the general packaging 
requirements of subparts A and B of part 173 of this subchapter.
101  The name of the particular substance or article must be specified.
102  The ends of the detonating cord must be tied fast so that the 
explosive cannot escape.The articles may be transported as in Division 
1.4 Compatibility Group D (1.4D) if all of the conditions specified in 
Sec. 173.63(a) of this subchapter are met.
103  Detonators which will not mass detonate and undergo only limited 
propagation in the shipping package may be assigned to 1.4B 
classification code. Mass detonate means that more than 90 percent of 
the devices tested in a package explode practically simultaneously. 
Limited propagation means that if one detonator near the center of a 
shipping package is exploded, the aggregate weight of explosives, 
excluding ignition and delay charges, in this and all additional 
detonators in the outside packaging that explode may not exceed 25 
grams.
105  The word ``Agents'' may be used instead of ``Explosives'' when 
approved by the Associate Administrator.
106  The recognized name of the particular explosive may be specified in 
addition to the type.
107  The classification of the substance is expected to vary especially 
with the particle size and packaging but the border lines have not been 
experimentally determined; appropriate classifications should be 
verified following the test procedures in Secs. 173.57 and 173.58 of 
this subchapter.
108  Fireworks must be so constructed and packaged that loose 
pyrotechnic composition will not be present in packages during 
transportation.
109  Rocket motors must be nonpropulsive in transportation unless 
approved in accordance with Sec. 173.56 of this subchapter. A rocket 
motor to be considered ``nonpropulsive'' must be capable of unrestrained 
burning and must not appreciably move in any direction when ignited by 
any means.
110  Fire extinguishers transported under UN1044 may include installed 
actuating cartridges (cartridges, power device of Division 1.4C or 
1.4S), without changing the classification of Division 2.2, provided the 
aggregate quantity of deflagrating (propellant) explosives does not 
exceed 3.2 grams per extinguishing unit.
111  Explosive substances of Division 1.1 Compatibility Group A (1.1A) 
are forbidden for transportation if dry or not desensitized, unless 
incorporated in a device.
113  The sample must be given a tentative approval by an agency or 
laboratory in accordance with Sec. 173.56 of this subchapter.
114  Jet perforating guns, charged, oil well, without detonator may be 
reclassed to Division 1.4 Compatibility Group D (1.4D) if the following 
conditions are met:
a. The total weight of the explosive contents of the shaped charges 
assembled in the guns does not exceed 90.5 kg (200 pounds) per vehicle; 
and
b. The guns are packaged in accordance with Packing Method US 1 as 
specified in Sec. 173.62 of this subchapter.
115  Boosters with detonator, detonator assemblies and boosters with 
detonators in which the total explosive charge per unit does not exceed 
25 g, and which will not mass detonate and undergo only limited 
propagation in the shipping package may be assigned to 1.4B 
classification code. Mass detonate means more than 90 percent of the 
devices tested in a package explode practically simultaneously. Limited 
propagation means that if one booster near the center of the package is 
exploded, the aggregate weight of explosives, excluding ignition and 
delay charges, in this and all additional boosters in the outside 
packaging that explode may not exceed 25 g.
116  Fuzes, detonating may be classed in Division 1.4 if the fuzes do 
not contain more than 25 g of explosive per fuze and are made and 
packaged so that they will not cause functioning of other fuzes, 
explosives or other explosive devices if one of the fuzes detonates in a 
shipping packaging or in adjacent packages.
117  If shipment of the explosive substance is to take place at a time 
that freezing weather is anticipated, the water contained in the 
explosive substance must be mixed with denatured alcohol so that 
freezing will not occur.

[[Page 312]]

118  This substance may not be transported under the provisions of 
Division 4.1 unless specifically authorized by the Associate 
Administrator.
119  This substance, when in quantities of not more than 11.5 kg (25.3 
pounds), with not less than 10 percent water, by mass, also may be 
classed in Division 4.1, provided a negative test result is obtained 
when tested in accordance with test series 6(c) of the UN Manual of 
Tests and Criteria.
120  The phlegmatized substance must be significantly less sensitive 
than dry PETN.
121  This substance, when containing less alcohol, water or phlegmatizer 
than specified, may not be transported unless approved by the Associate 
Administrator.
123  Any explosives, blasting, type C containing chlorates must be 
segregated from explosives containing ammonium nitrate or other ammonium 
salts.
125  Lactose or glucose or similar materials may be used as a 
phlegmatizer provided that the substance contains not less than 90%, by 
mass, of phlegmatizer. These mixtures may be classified in Division 4.1 
when tested in accordance with test series 6(c) of the UN Manual of 
Tests and Criteria (see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter) and approved by 
the Associate Administrator. Testing must be conducted on at least three 
packages as prepared for transport. Mixtures containing at least 98%, by 
mass, of phlegmatizer are not subject to the requirements of this 
subchapter. Packages containing mixtures with not less than 90% by mass, 
of phlegmatizer need not bear a POISON subsidiary risk label.
127  Mixtures containing oxidizing and organic materials transported 
under this entry may not meet the definition and criteria of a Class 1 
material. (See Sec. 173.50 of this subchapter.)
128  Regardless of the provisions of Sec. 172.101(c)(12), aluminum 
smelting by-products and aluminum remelting by-products described under 
this entry, meeting the definition of Class 8, Packing Group II and III 
may be classed as a Division 4.3 material and transported under this 
entry. The presence of a Class 8 hazard must be communicated as required 
by this Part for subsidiary hazards.
129  These materials may not be classified and transported unless 
authorized by the Associate Administrator on the basis of results from 
Series 2 Test and a Series 6(c) Test from the UN Manual of Tests and 
Criteria (see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter) on packages as prepared for 
transport. The packing group assignment and packaging must be approved 
by the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety on the 
basis of the criteria in Sec. 173.21 of this subchapter and the package 
type used for the Series 6(c) test.
130  Batteries, dry are not subject to the requirements of this 
subchapter only when they are offered for transportation in a manner 
that prevents the dangerous evolution of heat (for example, by the 
effective insulation of exposed terminals).
131  This material may not be offered for transportation unless approved 
by the Associate Administrator.
132  Ammonium nitrate fertilizers of this composition are not subject to 
the requirements of this subchapter if shown by a trough test (see 
United Nations Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods, 
Manual Tests and Criteria, Part III, sub-section 38.2) (see Sec. 171.7 
of this subchapter) not to be liable to self-sustaining decomposition 
and provided that they do not contain an excess of nitrate greater than 
10% by mass (calculated as potassium nitrate).
133  This description applies to articles which are used as life-saving 
vehicle air bag inflators or air bag modules or seat-belt pretensioners, 
containing a gas or a mixture of compressed gases classified under 
Division 2.2, and with or without small quantities of pyrotechnic 
material. For units with pyrotechnic material, initiated explosive 
effects must be contained within the pressure vessel (cylinder) such 
that the unit may be excluded from Class 1 in accordance with paragraphs 
1.11(b) and 16.6.1.4.7(a)(ii) of the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria, 
Part 1 (see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter). In addition, units must be 
designed or packaged for transport so that when engulfed in a fire there 
will be no fragmentation of the pressure vessel or projection hazard. 
This may be determined by analysis or test. The pressure vessel must be 
in conformance with the requirements of this subchapter for the gas(es) 
contained in the pressure vessel or as specifically authorized by the 
Associate Administrator.
134  This entry only applies to vehicles, machinery and equipment which 
are powered by wet batteries or sodium batteries and which are 
transported with these batteries installed. Examples of such items are 
electrically-powered cars, lawn mowers, wheelchairs and other mobility 
aids. Self-propelled vehicles which also contain an internal combustion 
engine must be consigned under the entry ``Vehicle, flammable gas 
powered'' or ``Vehicle, flammable liquid powered'', as appropriate.
135  The entries ``Vehicle, flammable gas powered'' or ``Vehicle, 
flammable liquid powered'', as appropriate, must be used when internal 
combustion engines are installed in a vehicle.

[[Page 313]]

136  This entry only applies to machinery and apparatus containing 
hazardous materials as in integral element of the machinery or 
apparatus. It may not be used to describe machinery or apparatus for 
which a proper shipping name exists in the Sec. 172.101 Table. Except 
when approved by the Associate Administrator, machinery or apparatus may 
only contain hazardous materials for which exceptions are referenced in 
Column (8) of the Sec. 172.101 Table and are provided in part 173, 
subpart D, of this subchapter. Hazardous materials shipped under this 
entry are excepted from the labeling requirements of this subchapter 
unless offered for transportation or transported by aircraft and are not 
subject to the placarding requirements of part 172, subpart F, of this 
subchapter. Orientation markings as described in Sec. 172.312 (a)(2) are 
required when liquid hazardous materials may escape due to incorrect 
orientation. The machinery or apparatus, if unpackaged, or the packaging 
in which it is contained shall be marked ``Dangerous goods in 
machinery'' or ``Dangerous goods in apparatus'', as appropriate, with 
the identification number UN3363. For transportation by aircraft, 
machinery or apparatus may not contain any material forbidden for 
transportation by passenger or cargo aircraft. The Associate 
Administrator may except from the requirements of this subchapter, 
equipment, machinery and apparatus provided:
    a. It is shown that it does not pose a significant risk in 
transportation;
    b. The quantities of hazardous materials do not exceed those 
specified in Sec. 173.4 of this subchapter; and
    c. The equipment, machinery or apparatus conforms with Sec. 173.222 
of this subchapter.
137  Cotton, dry is not subject to the requirements of this subchapter 
when it is baled in accordance with ISO 8115, ``Cotton Bales--Dimensions 
and Density'' to a density of at least 360 kg/m\3\ (22.4lb/ft\3\) and it 
is transported in a freight container or closed transport vehicle.
138  Lead compounds which, when mixed in a ratio of 1:1000 with 0.07M 
(Molar concentration) hydrochloric acid and stirred for one hour at a 
temperature of 23  deg.C 2  deg.C, exhibit a solubility of 
5% or less are considered insoluble.
139  Use of the ``special arrangement'' proper shipping names for 
international shipments must be made under an IAEA Certificate of 
Competent Authority issued by the Associate Administrator in accordance 
with the requirements in Sec. 173.471, Sec. 173.472, or Sec. 173.473 of 
this subchapter. Use of these proper shipping names for domestic 
shipments may be made only under a DOT exemption, as defined in, and in 
accordance with the requirements of subpart B of part 107 of this 
subchapter.
140  This material is regulated only when it meets the defining criteria 
for a hazardous substance or a marine pollutant. In addition, the column 
5 reference is modified to read ``III'' on those occasions when this 
material is offered for transportation or transported by highway or 
rail.
142  These hazardous materials may not be classified and transported 
unless authorized by the Associate Administrator. The Associate 
Administrator will base the authorization on results from Series 2 tests 
and a Series 6(c) test from the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria (see 
Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter) on packages as prepared for transport in 
accordance with the requirements of this subchapter.
143  These articles may contain:
    a. Division 2.2 compressed gases, including oxygen;
    b. Signal devices (Class 1) which may include smoke and illumination 
signal flares. Signal devices must be packed in plastic or fiberboard 
inner packagings;
    c. Electric storage batteries;
    d. First aid kits; or
    e. Strike anywhere matches.

    (2) ``A'' codes. These provisions apply only to transportation by 
aircraft:

                         Code/Special Provisions

A1  Single packagings are not permitted on passenger aircraft.
A2  Single packagings are not permitted on aircraft.
A3  For combination packagings, if glass inner packagings (including 
ampoules) are used, they must be packed with absorbent material in 
tightly closed metal receptacles before packing in outer packagings.
A4  Liquids having an inhalation toxicity of Packing Group I are not 
permitted on aircraft.
A5  Solids having an inhalation toxicity of Packing Group I are not 
permitted on passenger aircraft and may not exceed a maximum net 
quantity per package of 15 kg (33 pounds) on cargo aircraft.
A6  For combination packagings, if plastic inner packagings are used, 
they must be packed in tightly closed metal receptacles before packing 
in outer packagings.
A7  Steel packagings must be corrosion-resistant or have protection 
against corrosion.
A8  For combination packagings, if glass inner packagings (including 
ampoules) are used, they must be packed with cushioning material in 
tightly closed metal receptacles before packing in outer packagings.
A9  For combination packagings, if plastic bags are used, they must be 
packed in tightly closed metal receptacles before packing in outer 
packagings.

[[Page 314]]

A10  When aluminum or aluminum alloy construction materials are used, 
they must be resistant to corrosion.
A11  For combination packagings, when metal inner packagings are 
permitted, only specification cylinders constructed of metals which are 
compatible with the hazardous material may be used.
A13  Non-bulk packagings conforming to Sec. 173.197 of this subchapter 
not exceeding 16 kg (35 pounds) gross mass containing only used sharps 
are permitted for transportation by aircraft. Maximum liquid content in 
each inner packaging may not exceed 50 mL (1.7 ounces).
A14  Non-bulk packagings of regulated medical waste conforming to 
Sec. 173.197 of this subchapter not exceeding 16 kg (35 pounds) gross 
mass for solid waste or 12 L (3 gallons) total volume for liquid waste 
may be transported by passenger and cargo aircraft when means of 
transportation other than air are impracticable or not available.
A19  Combination packagings consisting of outer fiber drums or plywood 
drums, with inner plastic packagings, are not authorized for 
transportation by aircraft.
A20  Plastic bags as inner receptacles of combination packagings are not 
authorized for transportation by aircraft.
A29  Combination packagings consisting of outer expanded plastic boxes 
with inner plastic bags are not authorized for transportation by 
aircraft.
A30  Ammonium permanganate is not authorized for transportation on 
aircraft.
A34  Aerosols containing a corrosive liquid in Packing Group II charged 
with a gas are not permitted for transportation by aircraft.
A35  This includes any material which is not covered by any of the other 
classes but which has an anesthetic, narcotic, noxious or other similar 
properties such that, in the event of spillage or leakage on an 
aircraft, extreme annoyance or discomfort could be caused to crew 
members so as to prevent the correct performance of assigned duties.
A37  This entry applies only to a material meeting the definition in 
Sec. 171.8 of this subchapter for self-defense spray.
A51  When transported by cargo-only aircraft, an oxygen generator must 
conform to the provisions of an approval issued under Special Provision 
60 and be contained in a packaging prepared and originally offered for 
transportation by the approval holder.
A52  A cylinder containing Oxygen, compressed, may not be loaded into a 
passenger-carrying aircraft or in an inaccessible cargo location on a 
cargo-only aircraft unless it is placed in an overpack or outer 
packaging that conforms to the performance criteria of Air Transport 
Association (ATA) Specification 300 for Category I shipping containers.
A53  Refrigerating machines and refrigerating machine components are not 
subject to the requirements of this subchapter when containing less than 
12 kg (26.4 pounds) of a non-flammable gas or when containing 12 L (3 
gallons) or less of ammonia solution (UN2672) (see Sec. 173.307 of this 
subchapter).

    (3) ``B'' codes. These provisions apply only to bulk packagings, 
other than IBCs:

                         Code/Special Provisions

B1  If the material has a flash point at or above 38  deg.C (100  deg.F) 
and below 93  deg.C (200  deg.F), then the bulk packaging requirements 
of Sec. 173.241 of this subchapter are applicable. If the material has a 
flash point of less than 38  deg.C (100  deg.F), then the bulk packaging 
requirements of Sec. 173.242 of this subchapter are applicable.
B2  MC 300, MC 301, MC 302, MC 303, MC 305, and MC 306 and DOT 406 cargo 
tanks are not authorized.
B3  MC 300, MC 301, MC 302, MC 303, MC 305, and MC 306 and DOT 406 cargo 
tanks and DOT 57 portable tanks are not authorized.
B4  MC 300, MC 301, MC 302, MC 303, MC 305, and MC 306 and DOT 406 cargo 
tanks are not authorized.
B5  Only ammonium nitrate solutions with 35 percent or less water that 
will remain completely in solution under all conditions of transport at 
a maximum lading temperature of 116  deg.C (240  deg.F) are authorized 
for transport in the following bulk packagings: MC 307, MC 312, DOT 407 
and DOT 412 cargo tanks with at least 172 kPa (25 psig) design pressure. 
The packaging shall be designed for a working temperature of at least 
121  deg.C (250  deg.F). Only Specifications MC 304, MC 307 or DOT 407 
cargo tank motor vehicles are authorized for transportation by vessel.
B6  Packagings shall be made of steel.
B7  Safety relief devices are not authorized on multi-unit tank car 
tanks. Openings for safety relief devices on multi-unit tank car tanks 
shall be plugged or blank flanged.
B8  Packagings shall be made of nickel, stainless steel, or steel with 
nickel, stainless steel, lead or other suitable corrosion resistant 
metallic lining.
B9  Bottom outlets are not authorized.
B10  MC 300, MC 301, MC 302, MC 303, MC 305, and MC 306 and DOT 406 
cargo tanks, and DOT 57 portable tanks are not authorized.
B11  Tank car tanks must have a test pressure of at least 2,068.5 kPa 
(300 psig). Cargo and portable tanks must have a design pressure of at 
least 1,207 kPa (175 psig).

[[Page 315]]

B13  A nonspecification cargo tank motor vehicle authorized in 
Sec. 173.247 of this subchapter must be at least equivalent in design 
and in construction to a DOT 406 cargo tank or MC 306 cargo tank (if 
constructed before August 31, 1995), except as follows:
    a. Packagings equivalent to MC 306 cargo tanks are excepted from the 
certification, venting, and emergency flow requirements of the MC 306 
specification.
    b. Packagings equivalent to DOT 406 cargo tanks are excepted from 
Secs. 178.345-7(d)(5), circumferential reinforcements; 178.345-10, 
pressure relief; 178.345-11, outlets; 178.345-14, marking, and 178.345-
15, certification.
    c. Packagings are excepted from the design stress limits at elevated 
temperatures, as described in the ASME Code. However, the design stress 
limits may not exceed 25 percent of the stress, as specified in the 
Aluminum Association's ``Aluminum Standards and Data'' (7th Edition June 
1982), for 0 temper at the maximum design temperature of the cargo tank.
B14  Each bulk packaging, except a tank car or a multi-unit-tank car 
tank, must be insulated with an insulating material so that the overall 
thermal conductance at 15.5  deg.C (60  deg.F) is no more than 1.5333 
kilojoules per hour per square meter per degree Celsius (0.075 Btu per 
hour per square foot per degree Fahrenheit) temperature differential. 
Insulating materials must not promote corrosion to steel when wet.
B15  Packagings must be protected with non-metallic linings impervious 
to the lading or have a suitable corrosion allowance.
B16  The lading must be completely covered with nitrogen, inert gas or 
other inert materials.
B18  Open steel hoppers or bins are authorized.
B23  Tanks must be made of steel that is rubber lined or unlined. 
Unlined tanks must be passivated before being placed in service. If 
unlined tanks are washed out with water, they must be repassivated prior 
to return to service. Lading in unlined tanks must be inhibited so that 
the corrosive effect on steel is not greater than that of hydrofluoric 
acid of 65 percent concentration.
    B25  Packagings must be made from monel or nickel or monel-lined or 
nickel-lined steel.
    B26  Tanks must be insulated. Insulation must be at least 100 mm 
(3.9 inches) except that the insulation thickness may be reduced to 51 
mm (2 inches) over the exterior heater coils. Interior heating coils are 
not authorized. The packaging may not be loaded with a material outside 
of the packaging's design temperature range. In addition, the material 
also must be covered with an inert gas or the container must be filled 
with water to the tank's capacity. After unloading, the residual 
material also must be covered with an inert gas or the container must be 
filled with water to the tank's capacity.
B27  Tanks must have a service pressure of 1,034 kPa (150 psig). Tank 
car tanks must have a test pressure rating of 1,379 kPa (200 psig). 
Lading must be blanketed at all times with a dry inert gas at a pressure 
not to exceed 103 kPa (15 psig).
B28  Packagings must be made of stainless steel.
B30  MC 312, MC 330, MC 331 and DOT 412 cargo tanks and DOT 51 portable 
tanks must be made of stainless steel, except that steel other than 
stainless steel may be used in accordance with the provisions of 
Sec. 173.24b(b) of this subchapter. Thickness of stainless steel for 
tank shell and heads for cargo tanks and portable tanks must be the 
greater of 7.62 mm (0.300 inch) or the thickness required for a tank 
with a design pressure at least equal to 1.5 times the vapor pressure of 
the lading at 46  deg.C (115  deg.F). In addition, MC 312 and DOT 412 
cargo tank motor vehicles must:
    a. Be ASME Code (U) stamped for 100% radiography of all pressure-
retaining welds;
    b. Have accident damage protection which conforms with Sec. 178.345-
8 of this subchapter;
    c. Have a MAWP or design pressure of at least 87 psig: and
    d. Have a bolted manway cover.
B32  MC 312, MC 330, MC 331, DOT 412 cargo tanks and DOT 51 portable 
tanks must be made of stainless steel, except that steel other than 
stainless steel may be used in accordance with the provisions of 
Sec. 173.24b(b) of this subchapter. Thickness of stainless steel for 
tank shell and heads for cargo tanks and portable tanks must be the 
greater of 6.35 mm (0.250 inch) or the thickness required for a tank 
with a design pressure at least equal to 1.3 times the vapor pressure of 
the lading at 46  deg.C (115  deg.F). In addition, MC 312 and DOT 412 
cargo tank motor vehicles must:
a. Be ASME Code (U) stamped for 100% radiography of all pressure-
retaining welds;
b. Have accident damage protection which conforms with Sec. 178.345-8 of 
this subchapter;
c. Have a MAWP or design pressure of at least 87 psig; and
d. Have a bolted manway cover.
B33  MC 300, MC 301, MC 302, MC 303, MC 305, MC 306, and DOT 406 cargo 
tanks equipped with a 1 psig normal vent used to transport gasoline must 
conform to table 1 of this Special Provision. Based on the volatility 
class determined by using ASTM D439 and the Reid vapor pressure (RVP) of 
the particular gasoline, the maximum lading pressure and maximum ambient 
temperature

[[Page 316]]

permitted during the loading of gasoline may not exceed that listed in 
table I.

             Table I--Maximum Ambient Temperature--Gasoline
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                            Maximum lading and ambient
       ASTM D439 volatility class            temperature (see note 1)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
A......................................  131  deg.F
(RVP<=9.0 psia)
B......................................  124  deg.F
(RVP<=10.0 psia)
C......................................  116  deg.F
(RVP<=11.5 psia)
D......................................  107  deg.F
(RVP<=13.5 psia)
E......................................  100  deg.F
(RVP<=15.0 psia)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Note 1: Based on maximum lading pressure of 1 psig at top of cargo
  tank.

B35  Tank cars containing hydrogen cyanide may be alternatively marked 
``Hydrocyanic acid, liquefied'' if otherwise conforming to marking 
requirements in subpart D of this part. Tank cars marked ``HYDROCYANIC 
ACID'' prior to October 1, 1991 do not need to be remarked.
B37  The amount of nitric oxide charged into any tank car tank may not 
exceed 1,379 kPa (200 psig) at 21  deg.C (70  deg.F).
B42  Tank cars must have a test pressure of 34.47 Bar (500 psig) or 
greater and conform to Class 105J. Each tank car must have a reclosing 
pressure relief device having a start-to-discharge pressure of 10.34 Bar 
(150 psig). The tank car specification may be marked to indicate a test 
pressure of 13.79 Bar (200 psig).
B44  All parts of valves and safety relief devices in contact with 
lading must be of a material which will not cause formation of 
acetylides.
B45  Each tank must have a reclosing combination pressure relief device 
equipped with stainless steel or platinum rupture discs approved by the 
AAR Tank Car Committee.
B46  The detachable protective housing for the loading and unloading 
valves of multi-unit tank car tanks must withstand tank test pressure 
and must be approved by the Associate Administrator.
B47  Each tank may have a reclosing pressure relief device having a 
start-to-discharge pressure setting of 310 kPa (45 psig).
B48  Portable tanks in sodium metal service may be visually inspected at 
least once every 5 years instead of being retested hydrostatically. Date 
of the visual inspection must be stenciled on the tank near the other 
required markings.
B49  Tanks equipped with interior heater coils are not authorized. 
Single unit tank car tanks must have a reclosing pressure relief device 
having a start-to-discharge pressure set at no more than 1551 kPa (225 
psig).
B50  Each valve outlet of a multi-unit tank car tank must be sealed by a 
threaded solid plug or a threaded cap with inert luting or gasket 
material. Valves must be of stainless steel and the caps, plugs, and 
valve seats must be of a material that will not deteriorate as a result 
of contact with the lading.
B52  Notwithstanding the provisions of Sec. 173.24b of this subchapter, 
non-reclosing pressure relief devices are authorized on DOT 57 portable 
tanks.
B53  Packagings must be made of either aluminum or steel.
B54  Open-top, sift-proof rail cars are also authorized.
B55  Water-tight, sift-proof, closed-top, metal-covered hopper cars, 
equipped with a venting arrangement (including flame arrestors) approved 
by the Associate Administrator are also authorized.
B56  Water-tight, sift-proof, closed-top, metal-covered hopper cars are 
also authorized if the particle size of the hazardous material is not 
less than 149 microns.
B57  Class 115A tank car tanks used to transport chloroprene must be 
equipped with a non-reclosing pressure relief device of a diameter not 
less than 305 mm (12 inches) with a maximum rupture disc pressure of 310 
kPa (45 psig).
B59  Water-tight, sift-proof, closed-top, metal-covered hopper cars are 
also authorized provided that the lading is covered with a nitrogen 
blanket.
B60  DOT Specification 106A500X multi-unit tank car tanks that are not 
equipped with a pressure relief device of any type are authorized. For 
the transportation of phosgene, the outage must be sufficient to prevent 
tanks from becoming liquid full at 55  deg.C (130  deg.F).
B61  Written procedures covering details of tank car appurtenances, dome 
fittings, safety devices, and marking, loading, handling, inspection, 
and testing practices must be approved by the Associate Administrator 
before any single unit tank car tank is offered for transportation.
B64  Each single unit tank car tank built after December 31, 1990 must 
be equipped with a tank head puncture resistance system that conforms to 
Sec. 179.16 of this subchapter.
B65  Tank cars must have a test pressure of 34.47 Bar (500 psig) or 
greater and conform to Class 105A. Each tank car must have a pressure 
relief device having a start-to-discharge pressure of 15.51 Bar (225 
psig). The tank car specification may be marked to indicate a test 
pressure of 20.68 Bar (300 psig).
B66  Each tank must be equipped with gas tight valve protection caps. 
Outage must

[[Page 317]]

be sufficient to prevent tanks from becoming liquid full at 55  deg.C 
(130  deg.F). Specification 110A500W tanks must be stainless steel.
B67  All valves and fittings must be protected by a securely attached 
cover made of metal not subject to deterioration by the lading, and all 
valve openings, except safety valve, must be fitted with screw plugs or 
caps to prevent leakage in the event of valve failure.
B68  Sodium must be in a molten condition when loaded and allowed to 
solidify before shipment. Outage must be at least 5 percent at 98  deg.C 
(208  deg.F). Bulk packagings must have exterior heating coils fusion 
welded to the tank shell which have been properly stress relieved. The 
only tank car tanks authorized are Class DOT 105 tank cars having a test 
pressure of 2,069 kPa (300 psig) or greater.
B69  Dry sodium cyanide or potassium cyanide may be shipped in sift-
proof weather-resistant metal covered hopper cars, covered motor 
vehicles, portable tanks or non-specification bins. Siftproof, water-
resistant, fiberboard IBCs are permitted when transported in closed 
freight containers or transport vehicles. Bins must be approved by the 
Associate Administrator.
B70  If DOT 103ANW tank car tank is used: All cast metal in contact with 
the lading must have 96.7 percent nickel content; and the lading must be 
anhydrous and free from any impurities.
B71  Tank cars must have a test pressure of 20.68 Bar (300 psig) or 
greater and conform to Class 105, 112, 114 or 120.
B72  Tank cars must have a test pressure of 34.47 Bar (500 psig) or 
greater and conform to Class 105J, 106, or 110.
B74  Tank cars must have a test pressure of 20.68 Bar (300 psig) or 
greater and conform to Class 105S, 106, 110, 112J, 114J or 120S.
B76  Tank cars must have a test pressure of 20.68 Bar (300 psig) or 
greater and conform to Class 105S, 112J, 114J or 120S. Each tank car 
must have a reclosing pressure relief device having a start-to-discharge 
pressure of 10.34 Bar (150 psig). The tank car specification may be 
marked to indicate a test pressure of 13.79 Bar (200 psig).
B77  Other packaging are authorized when approved by the Associate 
Administrator.
B78  Tank cars must have a test pressure of 4.14 Bar (60 psig) or 
greater and conform to Class 103, 104, 105, 109, 111, 112, 114 or 120. 
Heater pipes must be of welded construction designed for a test pressure 
of 500 psig. A 25 mm (1 inch) woven lining of asbestos or other approved 
material must be placed between the bolster slabbing and the bottom of 
the tank. If a tank car tank is equipped with a non-reclosing pressure 
relief device, the rupture disc must be perforated with a 3.2 mm (0.13 
inch) diameter hole. If a tank car tank is equipped with a reclosing 
pressure relief valve, the tank must also be equipped with a vacuum 
relief valve.
B80  Each cargo tank must have a minimum design pressure of 276 kPa (40 
psig).
B81  Venting and pressure relief devices for tank car tanks and cargo 
tanks must be approved by the Associate Administrator.
B82  Cargo tanks and portable tanks are not authorized.
B83  Bottom outlets are prohibited on tank car tanks transporting 
sulfuric acid in concentrations over 65.25 percent.
B84  Packagings must be protected with non-metallic linings impervious 
to the lading or have a suitable corrosion allowance for sulfuric acid 
or spent sulfuric acid in concentration up to 65.25 percent.
B85  Cargo tanks must be marked with the name of the lading in 
accordance with the requirements of Sec. 172.302(b).
B90  Steel tanks conforming or equivalent to ASME specifications which 
contain solid or semisolid residual motor fuel antiknock mixture 
(including rust, scale, or other contaminants) may be shipped by rail 
freight or highway. The tank must have been designed and constructed to 
be capable of withstanding full vacuum. All openings must be closed with 
gasketed blank flanges or vapor tight threaded closures.
B115  Rail cars, highway trailers, roll-on/roll-off bins, or other non-
specification bulk packagings are authorized. Packagings must be sift-
proof, prevent liquid water from reaching the hazardous material, and be 
provided with sufficient venting to preclude dangerous accumulation of 
flammable, corrosive, or toxic gaseous emissions such as methane, 
hydrogen, and ammonia. The material must be loaded dry.

    (4) Table 1, Table 2, and Table 3-IB Codes, Organic Peroxide IBC 
Code, and IP Special IBC Packing Provisions. These provisions apply only 
to transportation in IBCs. IBCs may be used for the transportation of 
hazardous materials when no IBC code is assigned in the Sec. 172.101 
Table for the specific material only when approved by the Associate 
Administrator. The letter ``Z'' shown in the marking code for composite 
IBCs must be replaced with a capital code letter designation found in 
Sec. 178.702(a)(2) of this subchapter to specify the material used for 
the outer packaging. Tables 1, 2, and 3 follow:

[[Page 318]]



                     Table 1.--IB Codes (IBC Codes)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
        IBC Code                         Authorized IBCs
------------------------------------------------------------------------
IB1....................  Authorized IBCs: Metal (31A, 31B and 31N).
                         Additional Requirement: Only liquids with a
                          vapor pressure less than or equal to 110 kPa
                          at 50  deg.C (1.1 bar at 122  deg.F), or 130
                          kPa at55  deg.C (1.3 bar at 131  deg.F) are
                          authorized.
IB2....................  Authorized IBCs: Metal (31A, 31B and 31N);
                          Rigid plastics (31H1 and 31H2); Composite
                          (31HZ1).
                         Additional Requirement: Only liquids with a
                          vapor pressure less than or equal to 110 kPa
                          at 50  deg.C (1.1 bar at 122  deg.F), or
                          130kPa at 55  deg.C (1.3 bar at 131  deg.F)
                          are authorized.
IB3....................  Authorized IBCs: Metal (31A, 31B and 31N);
                          Rigid plastics (31H1 and 31H2); Composite
                          (31HZ1 and 31HA2, 31HB2, 31HN2, 31HD2 and
                          31HH2).
                         Additional Requirement: Only liquids with a
                          vapor pressure less than or equal to 110 kPa
                          at 50  deg.C (1.1 bar at 122  deg.F), or 130
                          kPa at 55  deg.C (1.3 bar at 131  deg.F) are
                          authorized.
IB4....................  Authorized IBCs: Metal (11A, 11B, 11N, 21A,
                          21B, 21N, 31A, 31B and 31N).
IB5....................  Authorized IBCs: Metal (11A, 11B, 11N, 21A,
                          21B, 21N, 31A, 31B and 31N); Rigid plastics
                          (11H1, 11H2, 21H1, 21H2, 31H1 and 31H2);
                          Composite (11HZ1, 21HZ1 and 31HZ1).
IB6....................  Authorized IBCs: Metal (11A, 11B, 11N, 21A,
                          21B, 21N, 31A, 31B and 31N); Rigid plastics
                          (11H1, 11H2, 21H1, 21H2, 31H1 and 31H2);
                          Composite (11HZ1, 11HZ2, 21HZ1, 21HZ2, 31HZ1
                          and 31HZ2).
                         Additional Requirement: Composite IBCs 11HZ2
                          and 21HZ2 may not be used when the hazardous
                          materials being transported may become liquid
                          during transport.
IB7....................  Authorized IBCs: Metal (11A, 11B, 11N, 21A,
                          21B, 21N, 31A, 31B and 31N); Rigid plastics
                          (11H1, 11H2, 21H1, 21H2, 31H1 and 31H2);
                          Composite (11HZ1, 11HZ2, 21HZ1, 21HZ2, 31HZ1
                          and 31HZ2); Wooden (11C, 11D and 11F).
                         Additional Requirement: Liners of wooden IBCs
                          must be sift-proof.
IB8....................   Authorized IBCs: Metal (11A, 11B, 11N, 21A,
                          21B, 21N, 31A, 31B and 31N); Rigid plastics
                          (11H1, 11H2, 21H1, 21H2, 31H1 and 31H2);
                          Composite (11HZ1, 11HZ2, 21HZ1, 21HZ2, 31HZ1
                          and 31HZ2); Fiberboard (11G); Wooden (11C, 11D
                          and 11F); Flexible (13H1, 13H2, 13H3, 13H4,
                          13H5, 13L1, 13L2, 13L3, 13L4, 13M1 or 13M2).
IB99...................  IBCs are only authorized if approved by the
                          Associate Administrator.
------------------------------------------------------------------------


                                   Table 2.--Organic Peroxide IBC Code (IB52)
[This IBC Code applies to organic peroxides of type F. For formulations not listed in this table, only IBCs that
                            are approved by the Associate Administrator may be used.]
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                              Maximum
       UN No.          Organic peroxide     Type of IBC      quantity           Control            Emergency
                                                             (liters)         temperature         temperature
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3109...............  ORGANIC PEROXIDE,
                      TYPE F, LIQUID
                     tert-Butyl           31A             1250
                      hydroperoxide, not
                      more than 72% with
                      water.
                     tert-Butyl           31A             1250
                      peroxyacetate, not  31HA1           1000
                      more than 32% in
                      diluent type A.
                     tert-Butyl peroxy-   31A             1250
                      3,5,5-              31HA1           1000
                      trimethylhexanoate
                      , not more than
                      32% in diluent
                      type A.
                     Cumyl                31HA1           1250
                      hydroperoxide, not
                      more than 90% in
                      diluent type A.
                     Dibenzoyl peroxide,  31H1            1000
                      not more than 42%
                      as a stable
                      dispersion.
                     Di-tert-butyl        31A             1250
                      peroxide, not more  31HA1           1000
                      than 52% in
                      diluent type A.
                     1,1-Di-(tert-        31H1            1000
                      butylperoxy)
                      cyclohexane, not
                      more than 42% in
                      diluent type A.
                     Dilauroyl peroxide,  31HA1           1000
                      not more than 42%,
                      stable dispersion,
                      in water.
                     Isopropyl cumyl      31HA1           1250
                      hydroperoxide, not
                      more than 72% in
                      diluent type A.
                     p-Menthyl            31HA1           1250
                      hydroperoxide, not
                      more than 72% in
                      diluent type A.
                     Peroxyacetic acid,   31H1            1500
                      stabilized, not     31HA1           1500
                      more than 17%.      31A             1500
3110...............  Organic peroxide     31A
                      type F, solid.      31H1
                                          31HA1
                     Dicumyl peroxide...  31A
                                          31H1
                                          31HA1
3119...............  ORGANIC PEROXIDE,
                      TYPE F, LIQUID,
                      TEMPERATURE
                      CONTROLLED
                     tert-Butyl peroxy-2- 31HA1           1000            +30  deg.C          +35  deg.C
                      ethylhexanoate,     31A             1250            +30  deg.C          +35  deg.C
                      not more than 32%
                      in diluent type B.
                     tert-Butyl           31A             1250            0  deg.C            +10  deg.C
                      peroxyneodecanoate
                      , not more than
                      32% in diluent
                      type A.

[[Page 319]]

 
                     tert-Butyl           31A             1250            -5  deg.C           +5  deg.C
                      peroxyneodecanoate
                      , not more than
                      42% stable
                      dispersion, in
                      water.
                     tert-Butyl           31HA1           1000            +10  deg.C          +15  deg.C
                      peroxypivalate,     31A             1250            +10  deg.C          +15  deg.C
                      not more than 27%
                      in diluent type B.
                     Cumyl                31A             1250            -15  deg.C          -5  deg.C
                      peroxyneodecanoate
                      , not more than
                      52%, stable
                      dispersion, in
                      water.
                     Di-(4-tert-          31HA1           1000            +30  deg.C          +35  deg.C
                      butylcyclohexyl)
                      peroxydicarbonate,
                      not more than 42%,
                      stable dispersion,
                      in water.
                     Dicetyl              31HA1           1000            +30  deg.C          +35  deg.C
                      peroxydicarbonate,
                      not more than 42%,
                      stable dispersion,
                      in water.
                     Di-(2-ethylhexyl)    31A             1250            -20  deg.C          -10  deg.C
                      peroxydicarbonate,
                      not more than 52%,
                      stable dispersion,
                      in water.
                     Dimyristyl           31HA1           1000            +15  deg.C          +20  deg.C
                      peroxydicarbonate,
                      not more than 42%,
                      stable dispersion,
                      in water.
                     Di-(3,5,5-           31HA1           1000            +10  deg.C          +15  deg.C
                      trimethylhexanoyl)  31A             1250            +10  deg.C          +15  deg.C
                      peroxide, not more
                      than 38% in
                      diluent type A.
                     Di-(3,5,5-           31A             1250            +10  deg.C          +15  deg.C
                      trimethylhexanoyl)
                      peroxide, not more
                      than 52%, stable
                      dispersion, in
                      water.
                     1,1,3,3-             31A             1250            -5  deg.C           +5  deg.C
                      Tetramethylbutyl
                      peroxyneodecanoate
                      , not more than
                      52%, stable
                      dispersion, in
                      water.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


                           Table 3.--IP Codes
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
IP1  IBCs must be packed in closed freight containers or a closed
 transport vehicle.
IP2  When IBCs other than metal or rigid plastics IBCs are used, they
 must be offered for transportation in a closed freight container or a
 closed transport vehicle.
IP3  Flexible IBCs must be sift-proof and water-resistant or must be
 fitted with a sift-proof and water-resistant liner.
IP4  Flexible, fiberboard or wooden IBCs must be sift-proof and water-
 resistant or be fitted with a sift-proof and water-resistant liner.
IP5  IBCs must have a device to allow venting. The inlet to the venting
 device must be located in the vapor space of the IBC under maximum
 filling conditions.
IP6  Non-specification bulk bins are authorized.
IP7  For UN identification numbers 1327, 1363, 1364, 1365, 1386, 1841,
 2211, 2217, 2793 and 3314, IBCs are not required to meet the IBC
 performance tests specified in part 178, subpart N of this subchapter.
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (5) ``N'' codes. These provisions apply only to non-bulk packagings:

                         Code/Special Provisions

N3  Glass inner packagings are permitted in combination or composite 
packagings only if the hazardous material is free from hydrofluoric 
acid.
N4  For combination or composite packagings, glass inner packagings, 
other than ampoules, are not permitted.
N5  Glass materials of construction are not authorized for any part of a 
packaging which is normally in contact with the hazardous material.
N6  Battery fluid packaged with electric storage batteries, wet or dry, 
must conform to the packaging provisions of Sec. 173.159 (g) or (h) of 
this subchapter.
N7  The hazard class or division number of the material must be marked 
on the package in accordance with Sec. 172.302 of this subchapter. 
However, the hazard label corresponding to the hazard class or division 
may be substituted for the marking.
N8  Nitroglycerin solution in alcohol may be transported under this 
entry only when the solution is packed in metal cans of not more than 1 
L capacity each, overpacked in a wooden box containing not more than

[[Page 320]]

5 L. Metal cans must be completely surrounded with absorbent cushioning 
material. Wooden boxes must be completely lined with a suitable material 
impervious to water and nitroglycerin.
N10  Lighters and their inner packagings, which have been approved by 
the Associate Administrator (see Sec. 173.21(i) of this subchapter), 
must be packaged in one of the following outer packagings at the Packing 
Group II level: 4C1 or 4C2 wooden boxes; 4D plywood boxes; 4F 
reconstituted wood boxes; 4G fiberboard boxes; or 4H1 or 4H2 plastic 
boxes. The approval number (e.g., T-* * *) must be marked on each outer 
package and on the shipping paper.
N11  This material is excepted for the specification packaging 
requirements of this subchapter if the material is packaged in strong, 
tight non-bulk packaging meeting the requirements of subparts A and B of 
part 173 of this subchapter.
N12  Plastic packagings are not authorized.
N20  A 5M1 multi-wall paper bag is authorized if transported in a closed 
transport vehicle.
N25  Steel single packagings are not authorized.
N32  Aluminum materials of construction are not authorized for single 
packagings.
N33  Aluminum drums are not authorized.
N34  Aluminum construction materials are not authorized for any part of 
a packaging which is normally in contact with the hazardous material.
N36  Aluminum or aluminum alloy construction materials are permitted 
only for halogenated hydrocarbons that will not react with aluminum.
N37  This material may be shipped in an integrally-lined fiber drum (1G) 
which meets the general packaging requirements of subpart B of part 173 
of this subchapter, the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at 
the packing group assigned for the material and to any other special 
provisions of column 7 of the Sec. 172.101 table.
N40  This material is not authorized in the following packagings:
    a. A combination packaging consisting of a 4G fiberboard box with 
inner receptacles of glass or earthenware;
    b. A single packaging of a 4C2 sift-proof, natural wood box; or
    c. A composite packaging 6PG2 (glass, porcelain or stoneware 
receptacles within a fiberboard box).
N41  Metal construction materials are not authorized for any part of a 
packaging which is normally in contact with the hazardous material.
N42  1A1 drums made of carbon steel with thickness of body and heads of 
not less than 1.3 mm (0.050 inch) and with a corrosion-resistant 
phenolic lining are authorized for stabilized benzyl chloride if tested 
and certified to the Packing Group I performance level at a specific 
gravity of not less than 1.8.
N43  Metal drums are permitted as single packagings only if constructed 
of nickel or monel.
N45  Copper cartridges are authorized as inner packagings if the 
hazardous material is not in dispersion.
N65  Outage must be sufficient to prevent cylinders or spheres from 
becoming liquid full at 55  deg.C (130  deg.F). The vacant space 
(outage) may be charged with a nonflammable nonliquefied compressed gas 
if the pressure in the cylinder or sphere at 55  deg.C (130  deg.F) does 
not exceed 125 percent of the marked service pressure.
N72  Packagings must be examined by the Bureau of Explosives and 
approved by the Associate Administrator.
N73  Packagings consisting of outer wooden or fiberboard boxes with 
inner glass, metal or other strong containers; metal or fiber drums; 
kegs or barrels; or strong metal cans are authorized and need not 
conform to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter.
N74  Packages consisting of tightly closed inner containers of glass, 
earthenware, metal or polyethylene, capacity not over 0.5 kg (1.1 
pounds) securely cushioned and packed in outer wooden barrels or wooden 
or fiberboard boxes, not over 15 kg (33 pounds) net weight, are 
authorized and need not conform to the requirements of part 178 of this 
subchapter.
N75  Packages consisting of tightly closed inner packagings of glass, 
earthenware or metal, securely cushioned and packed in outer wooden 
barrels or wooden or fiberboard boxes, capacity not over 2.5 kg (5.5 
pounds) net weight, are authorized and need not conform to the 
requirements of part 178 of this subchapter.
N76  For materials of not more than 25 percent active ingredient by 
weight, packages consisting of inner metal packagings not greater than 
250 mL (8 ounces) capacity each, packed in strong outer packagings 
together with sufficient absorbent material to completely absorb the 
liquid contents are authorized and need not conform to the requirements 
of part 178 of this subchapter.
N77  For materials of not more than two percent active ingredients by 
weight, packagings need not conform to the requirements of part 178 of 
this subchapter, if liquid contents are absorbed in an inert material.
N78  Packages consisting of inner glass, earthenware, or polyethylene or 
other nonfragile plastic bottles or jars not over 0.5 kg (1.1 pounds) 
capacity each, or metal cans not over five pounds capacity each, packed 
in outer wooden boxes, barrels or kegs, or fiberboard boxes are 
authorized and need not conform to the requirements

[[Page 321]]

of part 178 of this subchapter. Net weight of contents in fiberboard 
boxes may not exceed 29 kg (64 pounds). Net weight of contents in wooden 
boxes, barrels or kegs may not exceed 45 kg (99 pounds).
N79  Packages consisting of tightly closed metal inner packagings not 
over 0.5 kg (1.1 pounds) capacity each, packed in outer wooden or 
fiberboard boxes, or wooden barrels, are authorized and need not conform 
to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter. Net weight of 
contents may not exceed 15 kg (33 pounds).
N80  Packages consisting of one inner metal can, not over 2.5 kg (5.5 
pounds) capacity, packed in an outer wooden or fiberboard box, or a 
wooden barrel, are authorized and need not conform to the requirements 
of part 178 of this subchapter.
N82  See Sec. 173.306 of this subchapter for classification criteria for 
flammable aerosols.

    (6) ``R'' codes. These provisions apply only to transportation by 
rail. [Reserved]
    (7) ``T'' codes. (i) These provisions apply to the transportation of 
hazardous materials in UN and IM Specification portable tanks. Portable 
tank instructions specify the requirements applicable to a portable tank 
when used for the transportation of a specific hazardous material. These 
requirements must be met in addition to the design and construction 
specifications in part 178 of this subchapter. Portable tank 
instructions T1 through T22 specify the applicable minimum test 
pressure, the minimum shell thickness (in reference steel), bottom 
opening requirements and pressure relief requirements. In T23, the 
organic peroxides and self-reactive substances which are authorized to 
be transported in portable tanks are listed along with the applicable 
control and emergency temperatures. Liquefied compressed gases are 
assigned to portable tank instruction T50. T50 provides the maximum 
allowable working pressures, bottom opening requirements, pressure 
relief requirements and degree of filling requirements for liquefied 
compressed gases permitted for transport in portable tanks. Refrigerated 
liquefied gases which are authorized to be transported in portable tanks 
are specified in tank instruction T75.
    (ii) The following table specifies the portable tank requirements 
applicable to T Codes T1 through T22. Column 1 specifies the T Code. 
Column 2 specifies the minimum test pressure, in bar (1 bar = 14.5 
psig), at which the periodic hydrostatic testing required by 
Sec. 180.605 of this subchapter must be conducted. Column 3 specifies 
the section reference for minimum shell thickness or, alternatively, the 
minimum shell thickness value. Column 4 specifies the applicability of 
Sec. 178.275(g)(3) of this subchapter for the pressure relief devices. 
When the word ``Normal'' is indicated, Sec. 178.275(g)(3) of this 
subchapter does not apply. Column 5 references the applicable 
requirements for bottom openings in part 178 of this subchapter or 
references ``Prohibited'' which means bottom openings are prohibited. 
The table follows:

                                      Table of Portable Tank T Coder T1-T22
    [Portable tank code T1-T22 apply to liquid and solid hazardous materials of Classes 3 through 9 which are
                                         transported in portable tanks.]
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                       Minimum test    Minimum shell thickness    Pressure-relief           Bottom opening
   Portable  tank        pressure      (in mm-reference steel)   requirements  (See    requirements  (See Sec.
     instruction           (bar)       (See Sec.  178.274(d))    Sec.  178.275(g))           178.275(d))
(1)                           (2)     (3)                       (4)................  (5)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
T1..................            1.5   Sec.  178.274(d)(2)       Normal.............  Sec.  178.275(d)(2).
T2..................            1.5   Sec.  178.274(d)(2)       Normal.............  Sec.  178.275(d)(3).
T3..................            2.65  Sec.  178.274(d)(2)       Normal.............  Sec.  178.275(d)(2).
T4..................            2.65  Sec.  178.274(d)(2)       Normal.............  Sec.  178.275(d)(3).
T5..................            2.65  Sec.  178.274(d)(2)       Sec.  178.275(g)(3)  Prohibited.
T6..................            4     Sec.  178.274(d)(2)       Normal.............  Sec.  178.275(d)(2).
T7..................            4     Sec.  178.274(d)(2)       Normal.............  Sec.  178.275(d)(3).
T8..................            4     Sec.  178.274(d)(2)       Normal.............  Prohibited.
T9..................            4     6 mm                      Normal.............  Prohibited.
T10.................            4     6 mm                      Sec.  178.275(g)(3)  Prohibited.
T11.................            6     Sec.  178.274(d)(2)       Normal.............  Sec.  178.275(d)(3).
T12.................            6     Sec.  178.274(d)(2)       Sec.  178.275(g)(3)  Sec.  178.275(d)(3).
T13.................            6     6 mm                      Normal.............  Prohibited.
T14.................            6     6 mm                      Sec.  178.275(g)(3)  Prohibited.
T15.................           10     Sec.  178.274(d)(2)       Normal.............  Sec.  178.275(d)(3).
T16.................           10     Sec.  178.274(d)(2)       Sec.  178.275(g)(3)  Sec.  178.275(d)(3).

[[Page 322]]

 
T17.................           10     6 mm                      Normal.............  Sec.  178.275(d)(3).
T18.................           10     6 mm                      Sec.  178.275(g)(3)  Sec.  178.275(d)(3).
T19.................           10     6 mm                      Sec.  178.275(g)(3)  Prohibited.
T20.................           10     8 mm                      Sec.  178.275(g)(3)  Prohibited.
T21.................           10     10 mm                     Normal.............  Prohibited.
T22.................           10     10 mm                     Sec.  178.275(g)(3)  Prohibited.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (iii) The following table specifies the portable tank requirements 
applicable to T23 for self-reactive substances of Division 4.1 and 
organic peroxides of Division 5.2 which are authorized to be transported 
in portable tanks:

[[Page 323]]



                                                                 Portable Tank Code T23
                   [Portable tank code T23 applies to self-reactive substances of Division 4.1 and organic peroxides of Division 5.2.]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                 Minimum     Minimum shell
                Hazardous         test       thickness (mm-     Bottom opening    Pressure-relief                          Control          Emergency
  UN No.         material       pressure    reference steel)  requirements  See  requirements  See   Filling limits     tempereature       temperature
                                  (bar)        See . . .            . . .              . . .
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3109        Organic peroxide,           4  Sec.  178.274(d)(  Sec.  178.275(d)(  Sec.  178.275(g)(  Not more than
             Type F, liquid                 2)                 3)                 1)                 90% at 59
                                                                                                     deg.F (15
                                                                                                     deg.C)
            tert-Butyl                  4  Sec.  178.274(d)(  Sec.  178.275(d)(  Sec.  178.275(g)(  Not more than
             hydroperoxide,                 2)                 3)                 1)                 90% at 59
             not more than                                                                           deg.F (15
             72% with water.                                                                         deg.C)
             *Provided that
             steps have been
             taken to achieve
             the safety
             equivalence of
             65% tert-Butyl
             hydroperoxide
             and 35% water
            Cumyl hydro-                4  Sec.  178.274(d)(  Sec.  178.275(d)(  Sec.  178.275(g)(  Not more than
             peroxide, not                  2)                 3)                 1)                 90% at 59
             more than 90% in                                                                        deg.F (15
             diluent type A                                                                          deg.C)
            Di-tert-butyl               4  Sec.  178.274(d)(  Sec.  178.275(d)(  Sec.  178.275(g)(  Not more than
             peroxide, not                  2)                 3)                 1)                 90% at 59
             more than 32% in                                                                        deg.F (15
             diluent type A                                                                          deg.C)
            Isopropyl cumyl             4  Sec.  178.274(d)(  Sec.  178.275(d)(  Sec.  178.275(g)(  Not more than
             hydro-peroxide,                2)                 3)                 1)                 90% at 59
             not more than                                                                           deg.F (15
             72% in diluent                                                                          deg.C)
             type A
            p-Menthyl hydro-            4  Sec.  178.274(d)(  Sec.  178.275(d)(  Sec.  178.275(g)(  Not more than
             peroxide, not                  2)                 3)                 1)                 90% at 59
             more than 72% in                                                                        deg.F (15
             diluent type A                                                                          deg.C)
            Pinanyl hydro-              4  Sec.  178.274(d)(  Sec.  178.275(d)(  Sec.  178.275(g)(  Not more than
             peroxide, not                  2)                 3)                 1)                 90% at 59
             more than 50% in                                                                        deg.F (15
             diluent type A                                                                          deg.C)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3110        Organic peroxide,           4  Sec.  178.274(d)(  Sec.  178.275(d)(  Sec.  178.275(g)(  Not more than
             Type F, solid                  2)                 3)                 1)                 90% at 59
                                                                                                     deg.F (15
                                                                                                     deg.C)
            Dicumyl peroxide.
             *Maximum
             quantity per
             portable tank
             2,000 kg
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

[[Page 324]]

 
3119        Organic peroxide,           4  Sec.  178.274(d)(  Sec.  178.275(d)(  Sec.  178.275(g)(  Not more than     As approved by    As approved by
             Type F, liquid,                2)                 3)                 1)                 90% at 59         Assoc. Admin.     Assoc. Admin.
             temperature                                                                             deg.F (15
             controlled                                                                              deg.C)
            tert-Butyl                  4  Sec.  178.274(d)(  Sec.  178.275(d)(  Sec.  178.275(g)(  Not more than     +30  deg.C        +35  deg.C
             peroxyacetate,                 2)                 3)                 1)                 90% at 59
             not more than                                                                           deg.F (15
             32% in diluent                                                                          deg.C)
             tyupe B
            tert-Butyl peroxy-          4  Sec.  178.274(d)(  Sec.  178.275(d)(  Sec.  178.275(g)(  Not more than     +15  deg.C        +20  deg.C
             2-                             2)                 3)                 1)                 90% at 59
             ethylhexanoate,                                                                         deg.F (15
             not more than                                                                           deg.C)
             32% in diluent
             type B
            tert-Butyl                  4  Sec.  178.274(d)(  Sec.  178.275(d)(  Sec.  178.275(g)(  Not more than     -5  deg.C         +10  deg.C
             peroxypivalate,                2)                 3)                 1)                 90% at 59
             not more than                                                                           deg.F (15
             27% in diluent                                                                          deg.C)
             type B
            tert-Butyl peroxy-          4  Sec.  178.274(d)(  Sec.  178.275(d)(  Sec.  178.275(g)(  Not more than     +35  deg.C        +40  deg.C
             3,5,5-trimethyl-               2)                 3)                 1)                 90% at 59
             hexanoate, not                                                                          deg.F (15
             more than 32% in                                                                        deg.C)
             dileunt type B
            Di-(3,5,5-                  4  Sec.  178.274(d)(  Sec.  178.275(d)(  Sec.  178.275(g)(  Not more than     0  deg.C          +5  deg.C
             trimethyl-                     2)                 3)                 1)                 90% at 59
             hexanoyl)                                                                               deg.F (15
             peroxide, not                                                                           deg.C)
             more htan 38% in
             diluent type A
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3120        Organix peroxide,           4  Sec.  178.274(d)(  Sec.  178.275(d)(  Sec.  178.275(g)(  Not more than     As approved by    As approved by
             Type F, solid,                 2)                 3)                 1)                 90% at 59         Assoc. Admin.     Assoc. Admin.
             temperature                                                                             deg.F (15
             controlled                                                                              deg.C)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3229        Self-reactive               4  Sec.  178.274(d)(  Sec.  178.275(d)(  Sec.  178.275(g)(  Not more than
             liquid Type F                  2)                 3)                 1)                 90% at 59
                                                                                                     deg.F (15
                                                                                                     deg.C)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3230        Self-reactive               4  Sec.  178.274(d)(  Sec.  178.275(d)(  Sec.  178.275(g)(  Not more than
             solid Type F                   2)                 3)                 1)                 90% at 59
                                                                                                     deg.F (15
                                                                                                     deg.C)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3239        Self-reactive               4  Sec.  178.274(d)(  Sec.  178.275(d)(  Sec.  178.275(g)(  Not more than     As approved by    As approved by
             liquid Type F,                 2)                 3)                 1)                 90% at 59         Assoc. Admin.     Assoc. Admin.
             temperature                                                                             deg.F (15
             controlled                                                                              deg.C)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

[[Page 325]]

 
3240        Self-reactive               4  Sec.  178.274(d)(  Sec.  178.275(d)(  Sec.  178.275(g)(  Not more than     As approved by    As approved by
             solid Type F,                  2)                 3)                 1)                 90% at 59         Assoc. Admin.     Assoc. Admin.
             temperature                                                                             deg.F (15
             controlled                                                                              deg.C)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


[[Page 326]]

    (iv) The following portable tank instruction applies to portable 
tanks used for the transportation of liquefied compressed gases. The T50 
table provides the UN identification number and proper shipping name for 
each liquefied compressed gas authorized to be transported in a T50 
portable tank. The table provides maximum allowable working pressures, 
bottom opening requirements, pressure relief device requirements and 
degree of filling requirements for each liquefied compressed gases 
permitted for transportation in a T50 portable tank. In the minimum test 
pressure column, ``small'' means a portable tank with a diameter of 1.5 
meters or less when measured at the widest part of the shell, 
``sunshield'' means a portable tank with a shield covering at least the 
upper third of the shell, ``bare'' means no sunshield or insulation is 
provided, and ``insulated'' means a complete cladding of sufficient 
thickness of insulating material necessary to provide a minimum 
conductance of not more than 0.67 w/m2/k. In the pressure 
relief requirements column, the word ``Normal'' denotes that a frangible 
disc as specified in Sec. 178.276(e)(3) of this subchapter is not 
required. The T50 table follows:

[[Page 327]]



                                                                 Portable Tank Code T50
                                             [Portable tank code T50 applies to liquefied compressed gases.]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                      Non-refrigerated      Max. allowable working                                      Pressure relief
       UN No.             liquefied      pressure (bar) small; bare;     Openings below liquid      requirements (see Sec.     Maximum  filling  density
                      compressed gases       sunshield; insulated                level                    178.27(e))                    (kg/l)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1005...............  Ammonia, anhydrous  29.0.......................  Allowed...................  Sec.  178.276(e)(3).......  0.53
                                         25.7.......................
                                         22.0.......................
                                         19.7.......................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1009...............  Bromotrifluorometh  38.0.......................  Allowed...................  Normal....................  1.13
                      ane or             34.0.......................
                      Refrigerant gas R  30.0.......................
                      13B1.              27.5.......................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1010...............  Butadienes,         7.5........................  Allowed...................  Normal....................  0.55
                      stabilized.        7.0........................
                                         7.0........................
                                         7.0........................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1011...............  Butane............  7.0........................  Allowed...................  Normal....................  0.51
                                         7.0........................
                                         7.0........................
                                         7.0........................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1012...............  Butylene..........  8.0........................  Allowed...................  Normal....................  0.53
                                         7.0........................
                                         7.0........................
                                         7.0........................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1017...............  Chlorine..........  19.0.......................  Not Allowed...............  Sec.  178.276(e)(3).......  1.25
                                         17.0.......................
                                         15.0.......................
                                         13.5.......................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1018...............  Chlorodifluorometh  26.0.......................  Allowed...................  Normal....................  1.03
                      ane or             24.0.......................
                      Refrigerant gas R  21.0.......................
                      22.                19.0.......................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1020...............  Chloropentafluoroe  23.0.......................  Allowed...................  Normal....................  1.06
                      thane or           20.0.......................
                      Refrigerant gas R  18.0.......................
                      115.               16.0.......................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

[[Page 328]]

 
1021...............  1-Chloro-1,2,2,2-   10.3.......................  Allowed...................  Normal....................  1.2
                      tetrafluoroethane  9.8........................
                      or Refrigerant     7.9........................
                      gas R 124.         7.0........................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1027...............  Cyclopropane......  18.0.......................  Allowed...................  Normal....................  0.53
                                         16.0.......................
                                         14.5.......................
                                         13.0.......................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1028...............  Dichlorodifluorome  16.0.......................  Allowed...................  Normal....................  1.15
                      thane or           15.0.......................
                      Refrigerant gas R  13.0.......................
                      12.                11.5.......................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1029...............  Dichlorofluorometh  7.0........................  Allowed...................  Normal....................  1.23
                      ane or             7.0........................
                      Refrigerant gas R  7.0........................
                      21.                7.0........................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1030...............  1,1-Difluoroethane  16.0.......................  Allowed...................  Normal....................  0.79
                      or Refrigerant     14.0.......................
                      gas R 152a.        12.4.......................
                                         11.0.......................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1032...............  Dimethylamine,      7.0........................  Allowed...................  Normal....................  0.59
                      anhydrous.         7.0........................
                                         7.0........................
                                         7.0........................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1033...............  Dimethyl ether....  15.5.......................  Allowed...................  Normal....................  0.58
                                         13.8.......................
                                         12.0.......................
                                         10.6.......................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1036...............  Ethylamine........  7.0........................  Allowed...................  Normal....................  0.61
                                         7.0........................
                                         7.0........................
                                         7.0........................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

[[Page 329]]

 
1037...............  Ethyl chloride....  7.0........................  Allowed...................  Normal....................  0.8
                                         7.0........................
                                         7.0........................
                                         7.0........................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1040...............  Ethylene oxide      Only authorized in 10 bar    Not allowed...............  Sec.  178.276(e)(3).......  0.78
                      with nitrogen up    insulatedportable tanks.
                      to a total
                      pressure of 1MPa
                      (10 bar) at 50
                      deg.C.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1041...............  Ethylene oxide and  See MAWP defination in Sec.  Allowed...................  Normal....................  See Sec.  173.32(f)
                      carbon dioxide       178.276(a).
                      mixture with more
                      than 9% butnot
                      more than 87%
                      ethylene oxide.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1055...............  Isobutylene.......  8.1........................  Allowed...................  Normal....................  0.52
                                         7.0........................
                                         7.0........................
                                         7.0........................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1060...............  Methyl acetylene    28.0.......................  Allowed...................  Normal....................  0.43
                      and propadiene     24.5.......................
                      mixture,           22.0.......................
                      stabilized.        20.0.......................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1061...............  Methylamine,        10.8.......................  Allowed...................  Normal....................  0.58
                      anhydrous.         9.6........................
                                         7.8........................
                                         7.0........................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1062...............  Methyl bromide....  7.0........................  Not allowed...............  Sec.  178.276(e)(3).......  1.51
                                         7.0........................
                                         7.0........................
                                         7.0........................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1063...............  Methyl chloride or  14.5.......................  Allowed...................  Normal....................  0.81
                      Refrigerant gas R  12.7.......................
                      40.                11.3.......................
                                         10.0.......................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1064...............  Methyl mercaptan..  7.0........................  Not allowed...............  Sec.  178.276(e)(3).......  0.78
                                         7.0........................
                                         7.0........................
                                         7.0........................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1067...............  Dinitrogen          7.0........................  Not allowed...............  Sec.  178.276(e)(3).......  1.3
                      tetroxide.         7.0........................
                                         7.0........................
                                         7.0........................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1075...............  Petroleum gas,      See MAWP definition in Sec.  Allowed...................  Normal....................  See Sec.  173.32(f)
                      liquefied.           178.276(a).
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

[[Page 330]]

 
1077...............  Propylene.........  28.0.......................  Allowed...................  Normal....................  0.43
                                         24.5.......................
                                         22.0.......................
                                         20.0.......................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1078...............  Refrigerant gas,    See MAWP definition in Sec.  Allowed...................  Normal....................  See Sec.  173.32(f)
                      n.o.s..              178.276(a).
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1079...............  Sulphur dioxide...  11.6.......................  Not allowed...............  Sec.  178.276(e)(3).......  1.23
                                         10.3.......................
                                         8.5........................
                                         7.6........................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1082...............  Trifluorochloroeth  17.0.......................  Not allowed...............  Sec.  178.276(e)(3).......  1.13
                      ylene, stabilized  15.0.......................
                      or Refrigerant     13.1.......................
                      gas R 1113.        11.6.......................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1083...............  Trimethylamine,     7.0........................  Allowed...................  Normal....................  0.56
                      anhydrous.         7.0........................
                                         7.0........................
                                         7.0........................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1085...............  Vinyl bromide,      7.0........................  Allowed...................  Normal....................  1.37
                      stabilized.        7.0........................
                                         7.0........................
                                         7.0........................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1086...............  Vinyl chloride,     10.6.......................  Allowed...................  Normal....................  0.81
                      stabilized.        9.3........................
                                         8.0........................
                                         7.0........................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1087...............  Vinyl methyl        7.0........................  Allowed...................  Normal....................  0.67
                      ether, stabilized. 7.0........................
                                         7.0........................
                                         7.0........................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

[[Page 331]]

 
1581...............  Chloropicrin and    7.0........................  Not Allowed...............  Sec.  178.276(e)(3).......  1.51
                      methyl bromide     7.0........................
                      mixture.           7.0........................
                                         7.0........................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1582...............  Chloropicrin and    19.2.......................  Not allowed...............  Sec.  178.276(e)(3).......  0.81
                      methyl chloride    16.9.......................
                      mixture.           15.1.......................
                                         13.1.......................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1858...............  Hexafluoropropylen  19.2.......................  Allowed...................  Normal....................  1.11
                      e compressed or    16.9.......................
                      Refrigerant gas R  15.1.......................
                      1216.              13.1.......................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1912...............  Methyl chloride     15.2, 13.0, 11.6, 10.1.....  Allowed...................  Normal....................  0.81
                      and methylene
                      chloride mixture.
NA 1954............  Insecticide gases,  See MAWP definition in Sec.  Allowed...................  Normal....................  Sec.  173.32(f)
                      flammable, n.o.s..   178.276(a).
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1958...............  1,2-Dichloro-       7.0........................  Allowed...................  Normal....................  1.3
                      1,1,2,2-           7.0........................
                      tetrafluoroethane  7.0........................
                      or Refrigerant     7.0........................
                      gas R 114.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1965...............  Hydrocarbon gas,    See MAWP definition in       Allowed...................  Normal....................  See Sec.  173.32(f)
                      mixture             178.276(a).
                      liquefied, n.o.s..
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1969...............  Isobutane.........  8.5........................  Allowed...................  Normal....................  0.49
                                         7.5........................
                                         7.0........................
                                         7.0........................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1973...............  Chlorodifluorometh  28.3.......................  Allowed...................  Normal....................  1.05
                      ane and            25.3.......................
                      chloropentafluoro  22.8.......................
                      ethane mixture     20.3.......................
                      with fixed
                      boiling point,
                      withapproximately
                      49%
                      chlorodifluoromet
                      hane or
                      Refrigerant gas
                      R502.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1974...............  Chlorodifluorobrom  7.4........................  Allowed...................  Normal....................  1.61
                      omethane or        7.0........................
                      Refrigerant gas R  7.0........................
                      12B1.              7.0........................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1976...............  Octafluorocyclobut  8.8........................  Allowed...................  Normal....................  1.34
                      ane or             7.8........................
                      Refrigerant gas    7.0........................
                      RC 318.            7.0........................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

[[Page 332]]

 
1978...............  Propane...........  22.5.......................  Allowed...................  Normal....................  0.42
                                         20.4.......................
                                         18.0.......................
                                         16.5.......................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1983...............  1-Chloro-2,2,2-     7.0........................  Allowed...................  Normal....................  1.18
                      trifluoroethane    7.0........................
                      or Refrigerant     7.0........................
                      gas R 133a.        7.0........................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2035...............  1,1,1-              31.0.......................  Allowed...................  Normal....................  0.76
                      Trifluoroethane    27.5.......................
                      compressed or      24.2.......................
                      Refrigerant gas R  21.8.......................
                      143a.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2424...............  Octafluoropropane   23.1.......................  Allowed...................  Normal....................  1.07
                      or Refrigerant     20.8.......................
                      gas R 218.         18.6.......................
                                         16.6.......................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2517...............  1-Chloro-1,1-       8.9........................  Allowed...................  Normal....................  0.99
                      difluoroethane or  7.8........................
                      Refrigerant gas R  7.0........................
                      142b.              7.0........................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2602...............  Dichlorodifluorome  20.0.......................  Allowed...................  Normal....................  1.01
                      thane and          18.0.......................
                      difluoroethane     16.0.......................
                      azeotropic         14.5.......................
                      mixture with
                      approximately 74%
                      dichlorodifluorom
                      ethane or
                      Refrigerant gas R
                      500.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3057...............  Trifluoroacetyl     14.6.......................  Not allowed...............  Sec.  178.276(e)(3).......  1.17
                      chloride.          12.9.......................
                                         11.3.......................
                                         9.9........................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3070...............  Ethylene oxide and  14.0.......................  Allowed...................  Sec.  178.276(e)(3).......  1.09
                      dichlorodifluorom  12.0.......................
                      ethane mixture     11.0.......................
                      with not more      9.0........................
                      than 12.5%
                      ethylene oxide.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

[[Page 333]]

 
3153...............  Perfluoro (methyl   14.3.......................  Allowed...................  Normal....................  1.14
                      vinyl ether).      13.4.......................
                                         11.2.......................
                                         10.2.......................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3159...............  1,1,1,2-            17.7.......................  Allowed...................  Normal....................  1.04
                      Tetrafluoroethane  15.7.......................
                      or Refrigerant     13.8.......................
                      gas R 134a.        12.1.......................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3161...............  Liquefied gas,      See MAWP definition in Sec.  Allowed...................  Normal....................  Sec.  173.32(f)
                      flammable, n.o.s..   178.276(a).
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3163...............  Liquefied gas,      See MAWP definition in Sec.  Allowed...................  Normal....................  Sec.  173.32(f)
                      n.o.s..              178.276(a).
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3220...............  Pentafluoroethane   34.4.......................  Allowed...................  Normal....................  0.95
                      or Refrigerant     30.8.......................
                      gas R 125.         27.5.......................
                                         24.5.......................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3252...............  Difluoromethane or  43.0.......................  Allowed...................  Normal....................  0.78
                      Refrigerant gas R  39.0.......................
                      32.                34.4.......................
                                         30.5.......................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3296...............  Heptafluoropropane  16.0.......................  Allowed...................  Normal....................  1.2
                      or Refrigerant     14.0.......................
                      gas R 227.         12.5.......................
                                         11.0.......................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3297...............  Ethylene oxide and  8.1........................  Allowed...................  Normal....................  1.16
                      chlorotetrafluoro  7.0........................
                      ethane mixture,    7.0........................
                      with not more      7.0........................
                      than 8.8%
                      ethylene oxide.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3298...............  Ethylene oxide and  25.9.......................  Allowed...................  Normal....................  1.02
                      pentafluoroethane  23.4.......................
                      mixture, with not  20.9.......................
                      more than 7.9%     18.6.......................
                      ethylene oxide.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3299...............  Ethylene oxide and  16.7.......................  Allowed...................  Normal....................  1.03
                      tetrafluoroethane  14.7.......................
                      mixture, with not  12.9.......................
                      more than 5.6%     11.2.......................
                      ethylene oxide.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3318...............  Ammonia solution,   See MAWP definition in       Allowed...................  Sec.  178.276(e)(3).......  Sec.  173.32(f)
                      relative density    178.276(a).
                      less than 0.880
                      at 15  deg.C in
                      water, with more
                      than 50% ammonia.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

[[Page 334]]

 
3337...............  Refrigerant gas R   31.6.......................  Allowed...................  Normal....................  0.84
                      404A.              28.3.......................
                                         25.3.......................
                                         22.5.......................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3338...............  Refrigerant gas R   31.3.......................  Allowed...................  Normal....................  0.95
                      407A.              28.1.......................
                                         25.1.......................
                                         22.4.......................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3339...............  Refrigerant gas R   33.0.......................  Allowed...................  Normal....................  0.95
                      407B.              29.6.......................
                                         26.5.......................
                                         23.6.......................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3340...............  Refrigerant gas R   29.9.......................  Allowed...................  Normal....................  0.95
                      407C.              26.8.......................
                                         23.9.......................
                                         21.3.......................
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


[[Page 335]]

    (v) When portable tank instruction T75 is referenced in Column (7) 
of the Sec. 172.101 Table, the applicable refrigerated liquefied gases 
are authorized to be transported in portable tanks in accordance with 
the requirements of Sec. 178.277 of this subchapter.
    (vi) UN and IM portable tank codes/special provisions. When a 
specific portable tank instruction is specified by a T Code in Column 
(7) of the Sec. 172.101 Table for a specific hazardous material, a 
Specification portable tank conforming to an alternative tank 
instruction may be used if:
    (A) the alternative portable tank has a higher or equivalent test 
pressure (for example, 4 bar when 2.65 bar is specified);
    (B) the alternative portable tank has greater or equivalent wall 
thickness (for example, 10 mm when 6 mm is specified);
    (C) the alternative portable tank has a pressure relief device as 
specified in the T Code. If a frangible disc is required in series with 
the reclosing pressure relief device for the specified portable tank, 
the alternative portable tank must be fitted with a frangible disc in 
series with the reclosing pressure relief device; and
    (D) With regard to bottom openings--
    (1) When two effective means are specified, the alternative portable 
tank is fitted with bottom openings having two or three effective means 
of closure or no bottom openings; or
    (2) When three effective means are specified, the portable tank has 
no bottom openings or three effective means of closure; or
    (3) When no bottom openings are authorized, the alternative portable 
tank must ot have bottom openings.
    (vii) When a hazardous material is not assigned a portable tank T 
Code or TP 9 is referenced in Column (7) of the Sec. 172.101 Table, the 
hazardous material may only be transported in a portable tank if 
approved by the Associate Administrator.
    (viii) Portable tank special provisions are assigned to certain 
hazardous materials to specify requirements that are in addition to 
those provided by the portable tank instructions or the requirements in 
part 178 of this subchapter. Portable tank special provisions are 
designated with the abbreviation TP (tank provision) and are assigned to 
specific hazardous materials in Column (7) of the Sec. 172.101 Table. 
The following is a list of the portable tank special provisions:

                         Code/Special Provisions

    TP1  The maximum degree of filling must not exceed the degree of 
filling determined by the following:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TN21JN01.000

Where:

tr is the maximum mean bulk temperature during transport, and 
          tf is the temperature in degrees celsius of the 
          liquid during filling.

    TP2  a. The maximum degree of filling must not exceed the degree of 
filling determined by the following:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TN21JN01.001

Where:

tr is the maximum mean bulk temperature during transport,
tf is the temperature in degrees celsius of the liquid during 
          filling, and
[alpha] is the mean coefficient of cubical expansion of the liquid 
          between the mean temperature of the liquid during filling 
          (tf) and the maximum mean bulk temperature during 
          transportation (tr) both in degrees celsius.

    b. For liquids transported under ambient conditions [alpha] may be 
calculated using the formula:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TN21JN01.009

Where:

d15 and d50 are the densities (in units of mass 
          per unit volume) of the liquid at 15  deg.C (59  deg.F) and 50 
           deg.C (122  deg.F), respectively.

    TP3  For liquids transported under elevated temperature, the maximum 
degree of filling is determined by the following:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TN21JN01.002

Where:

dt is the density of the material at the maximum mean bulk 
          temperature during transport; and

[[Page 336]]

df is the density of the material at the temperature in 
          degrees celsius of the liquid during filling; and
df is the density of the liquid at the mean temperature of 
          the liquid during filling, and dt is the maximum 
          mean bulk temperature during transport.

    TP4  The maximum degree of filling for portable tanks must not 
exceed 90%.
    TP5  For a portable tank used for the transport of flammable 
refrigerated liquefied gases or refrigerated liquefied oxygen, the 
maximum rate at which the portable tank may be filled must not exceed 
the liquid flow capacity of the primary pressure relief system rated at 
a pressure not exceeding 120 percent of the portable tank's design 
pressure. For portable tanks used for the transport of refrigerated 
liquefied helium and refrigerated liquefied atmospheric gas (except 
oxygen), the maximum rate at which the tank is filled must not exceed 
the liquid flow capacity of the pressure relief device rated at 130 
percent of the portable tank's design pressure. Except for a portable 
tank containing refrigerated liquefied helium, a portable tank shall 
have an outage of at least two percent below the inlet of the pressure 
relief device or pressure control valve, under conditions of incipient 
opening, with the portable tank in a level attitude. No outage is 
required for helium.
    TP6  To prevent the tank from bursting in an event, including fire 
engulfment (the conditions prescribed in CGA pamphlet S-1.2 (see 
Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter) may be used to consider the fire 
engulfment condition), it must be equipped with pressure relief devices 
that are adequate in relation to the capacity of the tank and the nature 
of the hazardous material transported.
    TP7  The vapor space must be purged of air by nitrogen or other 
means.
    TP8  A portable tank having a minimum test pressure of 1.5 bar (150 
kPa) may be used when the flash point of the hazardous material 
transported is greater than 0  deg.C (32  deg.F).
    TP9  A hazardous material assigned to special provision TP9 in 
Column (7) of the Sec. 172.101 Table may only be transported in a 
portable tank if approved by the Associate Administrator.
    TP10  The portable tank must be fitted with a lead lining at least 5 
mm (0.2 inches) thick. The lead lining must be tested annually to ensure 
that it is intact and functional. Another suitable lining material may 
be used if approved by the Associate Administrator.
    TP12  This material is considered highly corrosive to steel.
    TP13  Self-contained breathing apparatus must be provided when this 
hazardous material is transported by sea.
    TP16  The portable tank must be protected against over and under 
pressurization which may be experienced during transportation. The means 
of protection must be approved by the approval agency designated to 
approve the portable tank in accordance with the procedures in part 107, 
subpart E, of this subchapter. The pressure relief device must be 
preceded by a frangible disk in accordance with the requirements in 
Sec. 178.275(g)(3) of this subchapter to prevent crystallization of the 
product in the pressure relief device.
    TP17  Only inorganic non-combustible materials may be used for 
thermal insulation of the tank.
    TP18  The temperature of this material must be maintained between 18 
 deg.C (64.4  deg.F) and 40  deg.C (104  deg.F) while in transportation. 
Portable tanks containing solidified methacrylic acid must not be 
reheated during transportation.
    TP19  The calculated wall thickness must be increased by 3 mm at the 
time of construction. Wall thickness must be verified ultrasonically at 
intervals midway between periodic hydraulic tests (every 2.5 years). The 
portable tank must not be used if the wall thickness is less than that 
prescribed by the applicable T code in Column (7) of the Table for this 
material.
    TP20  This hazardous material must only be transported in insulated 
tanks under a nitrogen blanket.
    TP21  The wall thickness must not be less than 8 mm. Portable tanks 
must be hydraulically tested and internally inspected at intervals not 
exceeding 2.5 years.
    TP22  Lubricants for portable tank fittings (for example, gaskets, 
shut-off valves, flanges) must be oxygen compatible.
    TP24  The portable tank may be fitted with a device to prevent the 
build up of excess pressure due to the slow decomposition of the 
hazardous material being transported. The device must be in the vapor 
space when the tank is filled under maximum filling conditions. This 
device must also prevent an unacceptable amount of leakage of liquid in 
the case of overturning.
    TP25  Sulphur trioxide 99.95% pure and above may be transported in 
tanks without an inhibitor provided that it is maintained at a 
temperature equal to or above 32.5  deg.C (90.5  deg.F).
    TP26  The heating device must be exterior to the shell. For UN 3176, 
this requirement only applies when the hazardous material reacts 
dangerously with water.
    TP27  A portable tank having a minimum test pressure of 4 bar (400 
kPa) may be used provided the calculated test pressure is 4 bar or less 
based on the MAWP of the hazardous material, as defined in Sec. 178.275 
of this subchapter, where the test pressure is 1.5 times the MAWP.
    TP28  A portable tank having a minimum test pressure of 2.65 bar 
(265 kPa) may be used provided the calculated test pressure is 2.65 bar 
or less based on the MAWP of the

[[Page 337]]

hazardous material, as defined in Sec. 178.275 of this subchapter, where 
the test pressure is 1.5 times the MAWP.
    TP29  A portable tank having a minimum test pressure of 1.5 bar 
(150.0 kPa) may be used provided the calculated test pressure is 1.5 bar 
or less based on the MAWP of the hazardous materials, as defined in 
Sec. 178.275 of this subchapter, where the test pressure is 1.5 times 
the MAWP.
    TP30  This hazardous material may only be transported in insulated 
tanks.
    TP31  This hazardous material may only be transported in tanks in 
the solid state.
    TP37  IM portable tanks are only authorized for the shipment of 
hydrogen peroxide solutions in water containing 72% or less hydrogen 
peroxide by weight. Pressure relief devices shall be designed to prevent 
the entry of foreign matter, the leakage of liquid and the development 
of any dangerous excess pressure. In addition, the portable tank must be 
designed so that internal surfaces may be effectively cleaned and 
passivated. Each tank must be equipped with pressure relief devices 
conforming to the following requirements:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
       Concentration of hydrogen per peroxide solution         Total \1\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
52% or less..................................................         11
Over 52%, but not greater than 60%...........................         22
Over 60%, but not greater than 72%...........................         32
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Total venting capacity in standard cubic feet hour (S.C.F.H.) per
  pound of hydrogen peroxide solution.

    TP38  Each portable tank must be insulated with an insulating 
material so that the overall thermal conductance at 15.5  deg.C (60 
deg.F) is no more than 1.5333 kilojoules per hour per square meter per 
degree Celsius (0.075 Btu per hour per square foot per degree 
Fahrenheit) temperature differential. Insulating materials may not 
promote corrosion to steel when wet.
    TP44  Each portable tank must be made of stainless steel, except 
that steel other than stainless steel may be used in accordance with the 
provisions of Sec. 173.24b(b) of this subchapter. Thickness of stainless 
steel for tank shell and heads must be the greater of 7.62 mm (0.300 
inch) or the thickness required for a portable tank with a design 
pressure at least equal to 1.5 times the vapor pressure of the hazardous 
material at 46  deg.C (115  deg.F).
    TP45  Each portable tank must be made of stainless steel, except 
that steel other than stainless steel may be used in accordance with the 
provisions of 173.24b(b) of this subchapter. Thickness of stainless 
steel for portable tank shells and heads must be the greater of 6.35 mm 
(0.250 inch) or the thickness required for a portable tank with a design 
pressure at least equal to 1.3 times the vapor pressure of the hazardous 
material at 46  deg.C (115  deg.F).
    TP46  Portable tanks in sodium metal service are not required to be 
hydrostatically retested.

    (8) ``W'' codes. These provisions apply only to transportation by 
water:

                         Code/Special Provisions

W7  Vessel stowage category for uranyl nitrate hexahydrate solution is 
``D'' as defined in Sec. 172.101(k)(4).
W8  Vessel stowage category for pyrophoric thorium metal or pyrophoric 
uranium metal is ``D'' as defined in Sec. 172.101(k)(4).
W9  When offered for transportation by water, the following 
Specification packagings are not authorized unless approved by the 
Associate Administrator: woven plastic bags, plastic film bags, textile 
bags, paper bags, IBCs and bulk packagings.
W41  When offered for transportation by water, this material must be 
packaged in bales and be securely and tightly bound with rope, wire or 
similar means.

[Amdt. 172-123, 55 FR 52582, Dec. 21, 1990]

    Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting 
Sec. 172.102, see the List of CFR Sections Affected which appears in the 
Finding Aids section of the printed volume and on GPO Access.

    Effective Date Note: At 67 FR 53135, Aug. 14, 2002, Sec. 172.102 was 
amended in paragraph (c)(1) by adding Special provision 141, in 
paragraph (c)(2) by revising Special Provision A13, removing Special 
provision A14, and adding Special Provisions A81 and A82 in alphanumeric 
order, effective Oct. 1, 2002. At 67 FR 54967, Aug. 27, 2002, the 
effective date was corrected to Feb. 14, 2003. For the convenience of 
the user, the revised and added text is set forth as follows:

Sec. 172.102  Special provisions.

                                * * * * *

    (c) * * *
    (1) * * *

                         Code/Special Provisions

                                * * * * *

141  A toxin obtained from a plant, animal, or bacterial source 
containing an infectious substance, or a toxin contained in an 
infectious substance, must be classed as Division 6.2, described as an 
infectious substance, and assigned to UN 2814 or UN 2900, as 
appropriate.

                                * * * * *

    (2) * * *

[[Page 338]]

                         Code/Special Provisions

                                * * * * *

A13  Bulk packagings are not authorized for transportation by aircraft.

                                * * * * *

A81  The quantity limits in columns (9A) and (9B) do not apply to body 
fluids known to contain or suspected of containing an infectious 
substance when transported in primary receptacles not exceeding 1,000 mL 
(34 ounces) and in outer packagings not exceeding 4 L (1 gallon) and 
packaged in accordance with Sec. 173.196 of this subchapter.
A82  The quantity limits in columns (9A) and (9B) do not apply to human 
or animal body parts, whole organs or whole bodies known to contain or 
suspected of containing an infectious substance.

                                * * * * *



                       Subpart C--Shipping Papers



Sec. 172.200  Applicability.

    (a) Description of hazardous materials required. Except as otherwise 
provided in this subpart, each person who offers a hazardous material 
for transportation shall describe the hazardous material on the shipping 
paper in the manner required by this subpart.
    (b) This subpart does not apply to any material, other than a 
hazardous substance, hazardous waste or marine pollutant, that is--
    (1) Identified by the letter ``A'' in column 1 of the Sec. 172.101 
table, except when the material is offered or intended for 
transportation by air; or
    (2) Identified by the letter ``W'' in column 1 of the Sec. 172.101 
table, except when the material is offered or intended for 
transportation by water; or
    (3) An ORM-D, except when the material is offered or intended for 
transportation by air.

[Amdt. 172-29A, 41 FR 40677, Sept. 20, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 172-58, 
45 FR 34697, May 22, 1980; Amdt. 172-74, 47 FR 43065, Sept. 30, 1982; 
Amdt. 172-112, 53 FR 17160, May 13, 1988; Amdt. 172-127, 57 FR 52938, 
Nov. 5, 1992]



Sec. 172.201  Preparation and retention of shipping papers.

    (a) Contents. When a description of hazardous material is required 
to be included on a shipping paper, that description must conform to the 
following requirements:
    (1) When a hazardous material and a material not subject to the 
requirements of this subchapter are described on the same shipping 
paper, the hazardous material description entries required by 
Sec. 172.202 and those additional entries that may be required by 
Sec. 172.203:
    (i) Must be entered first, or
    (ii) Must be entered in a color that clearly contrasts with any 
description on the shipping paper of a material not subject to the 
requirements of this subchapter, except that a description on a 
reproduction of a shipping paper may be highlighted, rather than 
printed, in a contrasting color (the provisions of this paragraph apply 
only to the basic description required by Sec. 172.202(a)(1), (2), (3), 
and (4)), or
    (iii) Must be identified by the entry of an ``X'' placed before the 
proper shipping name in a column captioned ``HM.'' (The ``X'' may be 
replaced by ``RQ,'' if appropriate.)
    (2) The required shipping description on a shipping paper and all 
copies thereof used for transportation purposes, must be legible and 
printed (manually or mechanically) in English.
    (3) Unless it is specifically authorized or required in this 
subchapter, the required shipping description may not contain any code 
or abbreviation.
    (4) A shipping paper may contain additional information concerning 
the material provided the information is not inconsistent with the 
required description. Unless otherwise permitted or required by this 
subpart, additional information must be placed after the basic 
description required by Sec. 172.202(a).
    (b) [Reserved]
    (c) Continuation page. A shipping paper may consist of more than one 
page, if each page is consecutively numbered and the first page bears a 
notation specifying the total number of pages included in the shipping 
paper. For example, ``Page 1 of 4 pages.''
    (d) Emergency response telephone number. Except as provided in 
Sec. 172.604(c), a shipping paper must contain an emergency response 
telephone number, as prescribed in subpart G of this part.

[[Page 339]]

    (e) Each person who provides the shipping paper must retain a copy 
of the shipping paper required by Sec. 172.200(a), or an electronic 
image thereof, that is accessible at or through its principal place of 
business and must make the shipping paper immediately available, upon 
request, to an authorized official of a Federal, State, or local 
government agency at reasonable times and locations. For a hazardous 
waste, the shipping paper copy must be retained for three years after 
the material is accepted by the initial carrier. For all other hazardous 
materials, the shipping paper copy must be retained for 375 days after 
the material is accepted by the initial carrier. Each shipping paper 
copy must include the date of acceptance by the initial carrier, except 
that, for rail shipments, the date on the shipment waybill or bill of 
lading may be used in place of the date of acceptance by the initial 
carrier. A motor carrier (as defined in Sec. 390.5 of Subchapter B of 
Chapter III of Subtitle B) that uses a shipping paper without change for 
multiple shipments of a single hazardous material (i.e., one having the 
same shipping name and identification number) may retain a single copy 
of the shipping paper, instead of a copy for each shipment made, if the 
carrier also retains a record of each shipment made, to include shipping 
name, identification number, quantity transported, and date of shipment.

[Amdt. 172-29A, 41 FR 40677, Sept. 20, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 172-
29B, 41 FR 57067, Dec. 30, 1976; Amdt. 172-58, 45 FR 34697, May 22, 
1980; Amdt. 172-58, 45 FR 74664, Nov. 10, 1980; Amdt. 172-90, 49 FR 
10510, Mar. 20, 1984; Amdt. 172-116, 54 FR 27144, June 27, 1989; Amdt. 
172-123, 55 FR 52589, Dec. 21, 1990; Amdt. 172-147, 61 FR 18932, Apr. 
29, 1996; Amdt. 172-149, 61 FR 27172, May 30, 1996; 65 FR 50459, Aug. 
18, 2000; 67 FR 46127, July 12, 2002]



Sec. 172.202  Description of hazardous material on shipping papers.

    (a) The shipping description of a hazardous material on the shipping 
paper must include:
    (1) The proper shipping name prescribed for the material in column 2 
of the Sec. 172.101 table;
    (2) The hazard class or division prescribed for the material as 
shown in column 3 of the Sec. 172.101 table (class names or subsidiary 
hazard class or division number may be entered following the numerical 
hazard class, or following the basic description). The hazard class need 
not be included for the entry ``Combustible liquid, n.o.s.'';
    (3) The identification number prescribed for the material as shown 
in column 4 of the Sec. 172.101 table;
    (4) The packing group in Roman numerals, as designated for the 
hazardous material in Column 5 of the Sec. 172.101 Table. Class 1 
(explosives) materials, self-reactive substances, organic peroxides and 
entries that are not assigned a packing group are excepted from this 
requirement. The packing group may be preceded by the letters ``PG'' 
(for example, ``PG II''); and
    (5) Except for empty packagings (see Sec. 173.29 of this 
subchapter), cylinders for Class 2 (compressed gases) materials, and 
bulk packagings, the total quantity (by net or gross mass, capacity, or 
as otherwise appropriate), including the unit of measurement, of the 
hazardous material covered by the description (e.g., ``800 lbs'', ``55 
gal.'', ``3629 kg'', or ``208 L''). For cylinders for Class 2 
(compressed gases) materials and bulk packagings, some indication of 
total quantity must be shown (e.g., ``10 cylinders'' or ``1 cargo 
tank'').
    (b) Except as provided in this subpart, the basic description 
specified in paragraphs (a) (1), (2), (3) and (4) of this section must 
be shown in sequence with no additional information interspersed. For 
example: ``Gasoline, 3, UN 1203, PG II''.
    (c) The total quantity of the material covered by one description 
must appear before or after, or both before and after, the description 
required and authorized by this subpart. The type of packaging and 
destination marks may be entered in any appropriate manner before or 
after the basic description. Abbreviations may be used to express units 
of measurement and types of packagings.
    (d) Technical and chemical group names may be entered in parentheses 
between the proper shipping name and hazard class or following the basic 
description. An appropriate modifier, such as ``contains'' or 
``containing,'' and/or the percentage of the technical

[[Page 340]]

constituent may also be used. For example: ``Flammable liquids, n.o.s. 
(contains Xylene and Benzene), 3, UN 1993, II''.
    (e) Except for those materials in the UN Recommendations, the ICAO 
Technical Instructions, or the IMDG Code (see Sec. 171.7 of this 
subchapter), a material that is not a hazardous material according to 
this subchapter may not be offered for transportation or transported 
when its description on a shipping paper includes a hazard class or an 
identification number specified in the Sec. 172.101 Table.

[Amdt. 172-101, 45 FR 74665, Nov. 10, 1980, as amended by Amdt. 172-103, 
51 FR 5970, Feb. 18, 1986; Amdt. 172-123, 55 FR 52589, Dec. 21, 1990; 56 
FR 66252, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 172-127, 57 FR 52938, Nov. 5, 1992; Amdt. 
172-130, 58 FR 51531, Oct. 1, 1993; 66 FR 33425, June 21, 2001]



Sec. 172.203  Additional description requirements.

    (a) Exemptions. Each shipping paper issued in connection with a 
shipment made under an exemption must bear the notation ``DOT-E'' 
followed by the exemption number assigned and so located that the 
notation is clearly associated with the description to which the 
exemption applies.
    (b) Limited quantities. The description for a material offered for 
transportation as ``limited quantity,'' as authorized by this 
subchapter, must include the words ``Limited Quantity'' or ``Ltd Qty'' 
following the basic description.
    (c) Hazardous substances. (1) Except for Class 7 (radioactive) 
materials described in accordance with paragraph (d) of this section, if 
the proper shipping name for a material that is a hazardous substance 
does not identify the hazardous substance by name, the name of the 
hazardous substance must be entered in parentheses in association with 
the basic description. If the material contains two or more hazardous 
substances, at least two hazardous substances, including the two with 
the lowest reportable quantities (RQs), must be identified. For a 
hazardous waste, the waste code (e.g., D001), if appropriate, may be 
used to identify the hazardous substance.
    (2) The letters ``RQ'' shall be entered on the shipping paper either 
before or after, the basic description required by Sec. 172.202 for each 
hazardous substance (see definition in Sec. 171.8 of this subchapter). 
For example: ``RQ, Allyl alcohol, 6.1, UN 1098, I''; or 
``Environmentally hazardous substance, solid, n.o.s., 9, UN 3077, III, 
RQ (Adipic acid)''.
    (d) Radioactive material. The description for a shipment of a Class 
7 (radioactive) material must include the following additional entries 
as appropriate:
    (1) The words ``RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL'' unless these words are 
contained in the proper shipping name.
    (2) The name of each radionuclide in the Class 7 (radioactive) 
material that is listed in Sec. 173.435 of this subchapter. For mixtures 
of radionuclides, the radionuclides that must be shown must be 
determined in accordance with Sec. 173.433(f) of this subchapter. 
Abbreviations, e.g., ``99 Mo'', are authorized.
    (3) A description of the physical and chemical form of the material, 
if the material is not in special form (generic chemical description is 
acceptable for chemical form).
    (4) The activity contained in each package of the shipment in terms 
of the appropriate SI units (e.g., Becquerel, Terabecquerel, etc.) or in 
terms of the appropriate SI units followed by the customary units (e.g., 
Curies, millicuries, etc.). Abbreviations are authorized. Except for 
plutonium-238, plutonium-239, and plutonium-241, the weight in grams or 
kilograms of fissile radionuclides may be inserted instead of activity 
units. For plutonium-238, plutonium-239, and plutonium-241 the weight in 
grams or kilograms of fissile radionuclides may be inserted in addition 
to the activity units. For the shipment of a package containing a 
highway route controlled quantity of Class 7 (radioactive) materials 
(see Sec. 173.403 of this subchapter) the words ``Highway route 
controlled quantity'' must be entered in association with the basic 
description.
    (5) The category of label applied to each package in the shipment. 
For example: ``RADIOACTIVE WHITE-I.''
    (6) The transport index assigned to each package in the shipment 
bearing RADIOACTIVE YELLOW-II or RADIOACTIVE YELLOW-III labels.

[[Page 341]]

    (7) For a shipment of fissile Class 7 (radioactive) materials:
    (i) The words ``Fissile Excepted'' if the package is excepted 
pursuant to Sec. 173.453 of this subchapter;
    (ii) For a fissile material, controlled shipment, the additional 
notation: ``Warning--Fissile material, controlled shipment. Do not load 
more than * * * packages per vehicle.'' (Asterisks to be replaced by 
appropriate number.) ``In loading and storage areas, keep at least 6 m 
(20 feet) from other packages bearing radioactive labels''; and
    (iii) If a fissile material, controlled shipment is to be 
transported by water, the supplementary notation must also include the 
following statement: ``For shipment by water, only one fissile material, 
controlled shipment is permitted in each hold.''
    (8) For a package approved by the U.S. Department of Energy (DOE) or 
U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission (USNRC), a notation of the package 
identification marking as prescribed in the applicable DOE or USNRC 
approval. (See Sec. 173.471 of the subchapter.)
    (9) For an export shipment or a shipment in a foreign made package, 
a notation of the package identification marking as prescribed in the 
applicable International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA) Certificate of 
Competent Authority which has been issued for the package. (See 
Sec. 173.473 of the subchapter.)
    (10) For a shipment required by this subchapter to be consigned as 
exclusive use:
    (i) An indication that the shipment is consigned as exclusive use; 
or
    (ii) If all the descriptions on the shipping paper are consigned as 
exclusive use, then the statement ``Exclusive Use Shipment'' may be 
entered only once on the shipping paper in a clearly visible location.
    (11) For a shipment of low specific activity material or surface 
contaminated objects, the appropriate group notation of LSA-I, LSA-II, 
LSA-III, SCO-I, or SCO-II, unless the group notation is contained in the 
proper shipping name as described in the Sec. 172.101 Table.
    (e) Empty packagings. (1) The description on the shipping paper for 
a packaging containing the residue of a hazardous material may include 
the words ``RESIDUE: Last Contained * * *'' in association with the 
basic description of the hazardous material last contained in the 
packaging.
    (2) The description on the shipping paper for a tank car containing 
the residue of a hazardous material must include the phrase, ``RESIDUE: 
LAST CONTAINED * * *'' before the basic description.
    (f) Transportation by air. When a package containing a hazardous 
material is offered for transportation by air and this subchapter 
prohibits its transportation aboard passenger-carrying aircraft, the 
words ``Cargo aircraft only'' must be entered after the basic 
description.
    (g) Transportation by rail. (1) A shipping paper prepared by a rail 
carrier for a rail car, freight container, transport vehicle or portable 
tank that contains hazardous materials must include the reporting mark 
and number when displayed on the rail car, freight container, transport 
vehicle or portable tank.
    (2) The shipping paper for each DOT-113 tank car containing a 
Division 2.1 material or its residue must contain an appropriate 
notation, such as ``DOT 113'', and the statement ``Do not hump or cut 
off car while in motion.''
    (3) When shipments of elevated temperature materials are transported 
under the exception permitted in Sec. 173.247(h)(3) of this subchapter, 
the shipping paper must contain an appropriate notation, such as 
``Maximum operating speed 15 mph.''.
    (h) Transportation by highway. Following the basic description for a 
hazardous material in a Specification MC 330 or MC 331 cargo tank, there 
must be entered for--
    (1) Anhydrous ammonia. (i) The words ``0.2 PERCENT WATER'' to 
indicate the suitability for shipping anhydrous ammonia in a cargo tank 
made of quenched and tempered steel as authorized by Sec. 173.315(a), 
Note 14 of this subchapter, or
    (ii) The words ``NOT FOR Q and T TANKS'' when the anhydrous ammonia 
does not contain 0.2 percent or more water by weight.
    (2) Liquefied petroleum gas. (i) The word ``NONCORROSIVE'' or

[[Page 342]]

``NONCOR'' to indicate the suitability for shipping ``Noncorrosive'' 
liquefied petroleum gas in a cargo tank made of quenched and tempered 
steel as authorized by Sec. 173.315(a), Note 15 of this subchapter, or
    (ii) The words ``NOT FOR Q and T TANKS'' for grades of liquefied 
petroleum gas other than ``Noncorrosive''.
    (i) Transportation by water. Each shipment by water must have the 
following additional shipping paper entries:
    (1) Identification of the type of packagings such as barrels, drums, 
cylinders, and boxes.
    (2) The number of each type of package including those in a freight 
container or on a pallet.
    (3) The gross mass of each type of package or the individual gross 
mass of each package.
    (4) The name of the shipper.
    (5) Minimum flash point if 61  deg.C or below (in  deg.C closed cup 
(c.c.) in association with the basic description.
    (6) Subsidiary hazards not communicated in the proper shipping name 
shown either following the hazard class or division in parentheses, or 
in association with the basic description.
    (j)[Reserved]
    (k) Technical names for ``n.o.s.'' and other generic descriptions. 
Unless otherwise excepted, if a material is described on a shipping 
paper by one of the proper shipping names identified by the letter ``G'' 
in column (1) of the Sec. 172.101 Table, the technical name of the 
hazardous material must be entered in parentheses in association with 
the basic description. For example ``Corrosive liquid, n.o.s., (Octanoyl 
chloride), 8, UN 1760, II'', or ``Corrosive liquid, n.o.s., 8, UN 1760, 
II (contains Octanoyl chloride)''. The word ``contains'' may be used in 
association with the technical name, if appropriate. For organic 
peroxides which may qualify for more than one generic listing depending 
on concentration, the technical name must include the actual 
concentration being shipped or the concentration range for the 
appropriate generic listing. For example, ``Organic peroxide type B, 
solid, 5.2, UN 3102 (dibenzoyl peroxide, 52-100%)'' or ``Organic 
peroxide type E, solid, 5.2, UN 3108 (dibenzoyl peroxide, paste, 
<52%)''. Shipping descriptions for toxic materials that meet the 
criteria of Division 6.1, PG I or II (as specified in Sec. 173.132(a) of 
this subchapter) or Division 2.3 (as specified in Sec. 173.115(c) of 
this subchapter) and are identified by the letter ``G'' in column (1) of 
the Sec. 172.101 Table, must have the technical name of the toxic 
constituent entered in parentheses in association with the basic 
description.
    (1) If a hazardous material is a mixture or solution of two or more 
hazardous materials, the technical names of at least two components most 
predominately contributing to the hazards of the mixture or solution 
must be entered on the shipping paper as required by paragraph (k) of 
this section. For example, ``Flammable liquid, corrosive, n.o.s., 3, UN 
2924, II (contains Methanol, Potassium hydroxide)''.
    (2) The provisions of this paragraph do not apply--
    (i) To a material that is a hazardous waste and described using the 
proper shipping name ``Hazardous waste, liquid or solid, n.o.s.'', 
classed as a miscellaneous Class 9, provided the EPA hazardous waste 
number is included on the shipping paper in association with the basic 
description, or provided the material is described in accordance with 
the provisions of Sec. 172.203(c) of this part.
    (ii) To a material for which the hazard class is to be determined by 
testing under the criteria in Sec. 172.101(c)(11).
    (iii) If the n.o.s. description for the material (other than a 
mixture of hazardous materials of different classes meeting the 
definitions of more than one hazard class) contains the name of the 
chemical element or group which is primarily responsible for the 
material being included in the hazard class indicated.
    (iv) If the n.o.s. description for the material (which is a mixture 
of hazardous materials of different classes meeting the definition of 
more than one hazard class) contains the name of the chemical element or 
group responsible for the material meeting the definition of one of 
these classes. In such cases, only the technical name of the component 
that is not appropriately identified in the n.o.s. description shall be 
entered in parentheses.

[[Page 343]]

    (l) Marine pollutants. (1) If the proper shipping name for a 
material which is a marine pollutant does not identify by name the 
component which makes the material a marine pollutant, the name of that 
component must appear in parentheses in association with the basic 
description. Where two or more components which make a material a marine 
pollutant are present, the names of at least two of the components most 
predominantly contributing to the marine pollutant designation must 
appear in parentheses in association with the basic description.
    (2) The words ``Marine Pollutant'' shall be entered in association 
with the basic description for a material which is a marine pollutant.
    (3) Except for transportation by vessel, marine pollutants subject 
to the provisions of 49 CFR 130.11 are excepted from the requirements of 
paragraph (l) of this section if a phrase indicating the material is an 
oil is placed in association with the basic description.
    (m) Poisonous materials. Notwithstanding the hazard class to which a 
material is assigned--
    (1) If a liquid or solid material in a package meets the definition 
of a Division 6.1, Packing Group I or II, according to this subchapter, 
and the fact that it is a poison is not disclosed in the shipping name 
or class entry, the word ```Poison' or `Toxic''' shall be entered on the 
shipping paper in association with the shipping description.
    (2) For materials which are poisonous by inhalation (see Sec. 171.8 
of this subchapter), the words ``Poison-Inhalation Hazard''or ``Toxic-
Inhalation Hazard'' and the words ``Zone A'', ``Zone B'', ``Zone C'', or 
``Zone D'', for gases or ``Zone A'' or ``Zone B'' for liquids, as 
appropriate, shall be entered on the shipping paper immediately 
following the shipping description. The word ``Poison''or ``Toxic'' need 
not be repeated if it otherwise appears in the shipping description.
    (n) Elevated temperature materials. If a liquid material in a 
package meets the definition of an elevated temperature material in 
Sec. 171.8 of this subchapter, and the fact that it is an elevated 
temperature material is not disclosed in the proper shipping name (for 
example, when the words ``Molten'' or ``Elevated temperature'' are part 
of the proper shipping name), the word ``HOT'' must immediately precede 
the proper shipping name of the material on the shipping paper.
    (o) Organic peroxides and self-reactive materials. The description 
on a shipping paper for a Division 4.1 (self-reactive) material or a 
Division 5.2 (organic peroxide) material must include the following 
additional information, as appropriate:
    (1) If notification or competent authority approval is required, the 
shipping paper must contain a statement of approval of the 
classification and conditions of transport.
    (2) For Division 4.1 (self-reactive) and Division 5.2 (organic 
peroxide) materials that require temperature control during transport, 
the control and emergency temperature must be included on the shipping 
paper.
    (3) The word ``SAMPLE'' must be included in association with the 
basic description when a sample of a Division 4.1 (self-reactive) 
material (see Sec. 173.224(c)(3) of this subchapter) or Division 5.2 
(organic peroxide) material (see Sec. 173.225(c)(2) of this subchapter) 
is offered for transportation or transported.

[Amdt. 172-29A, 41 FR 40677, Sept. 20, 1976]

    Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting 
Sec. 172.203, see the List of CFR Sections Affected which appears in the 
Finding Aids section of the printed volume and on GPO Access.



Sec. 172.204  Shipper's certification.

    (a) General. Except as provided in paragraphs (b) and (c) of this 
section, each person who offers a hazardous material for transportation 
shall certify that the material is offered for transportation in 
accordance with this subchapter by printing (manually or mechanically) 
on the shipping paper containing the required shipping description the 
certification contained in paragraph (a)(1) of this section or the 
certification (declaration) containing the language contained in 
paragraph (a)(2) of this section.
    (1) ``This is to certify that the above-named materials are properly 
classified, described, packaged, marked and labeled, and are in proper 
condition for

[[Page 344]]

transportation according to the applicable regulations of the Department 
of Transportation.''

    Note: In line one of the certification the words ``herein-named'' 
may be substituted for the words ``above-named''.

    (2) ``I hereby declare that the contents of this consignment are 
fully and accurately described above by the proper shipping name, and 
are classified, packaged, marked and labelled/placarded, and are in all 
respects in proper condition for transport according to applicable 
international and national governmental regulations.''
    (b) Exceptions. (1) Except for a hazardous waste, no certification 
is required for a hazardous material offered for transportation by motor 
vehicle and transported:
    (i) In a cargo tank supplied by the carrier, or
    (ii) By the shipper as a private carrier except for a hazardous 
material that is to be reshipped or transferred from one carrier to 
another.
    (2) No certification is required for the return of an empty tank car 
which previously contained a hazardous material and which has not been 
cleaned or purged.
    (c) Transportation by air--(1) General. Certification containing the 
following language may be used in place of the certification required by 
paragraph (a) of this section:

    I hereby certify that the contents of this consignment are fully and 
accurately described above by proper shipping name and are classified, 
packaged, marked and labeled, and in proper condition for carriage by 
air according to applicable national governmental regulations.

    Note to Paragraph (c)(1): In the certification, the word ``packed'' 
may be used instead of the word ``packaged'' until October 1, 2010.
    (2) Certificate in duplicate. Each person who offers a hazardous 
material to an aircraft operator for transportation by air shall provide 
two copies of the certification required in this section. (See 
Sec. 175.30 of this subchapter.)
    (3) Passenger and cargo aircraft. Each person who offers for 
transportation by air a hazardous material authorized for air 
transportation shall add to the certification required in this section 
the following statement:

    This shipment is within the limitations prescribed for passenger 
aircraft/cargo aircraft only (delete nonapplicable).

    (4) Radioactive material. Each person who offers any radioactive 
material for transportation aboard a passenger-carrying aircraft shall 
sign (mechanically or manually) a printed certificate stating that the 
shipment contains radioactive material intended for use in, or incident 
to, research, or medical diagnosis or treatment.
    (d) Signature. The certifications required by paragraph (a) or (c) 
of this section:
    (1) Must be legibly signed by a principal, officer, partner, or 
employee of the shipper or his agent; and
    (2) May be legibly signed manually, by typewriter, or by other 
mechanical means.

[Amdt. 172-29A, 41 FR 40677, Sept. 20, 1976]

    Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting 
Sec. 172.204, see the List of CFR Sections Affected which appears in the 
Finding Aids section of the printed volume and on GPO Access.



Sec. 172.205  Hazardous waste manifest.

    (a) No person may offer, transport, transfer, or deliver a hazardous 
waste (waste) unless an EPA Form 8700-22 and 8700-22A (when necessary) 
hazardous waste manifest (manifest) is prepared in accordance with 40 
CFR 262.20 and is signed, carried, and given as required of that person 
by this section.
    (b) The shipper (generator) shall prepare the manifest in accordance 
with 40 CFR part 262.
    (c) The original copy of the manifest must be dated by, and bear the 
handwritten signature of, the person representing:
    (1) The shipper (generator) of the waste at the time it is offered 
for transportation, and
    (2) The initial carrier accepting the waste for transportation.
    (d) A copy of the manifest must be dated by, and bear the 
handwritten signature of the person representing:
    (1) Each subsequent carrier accepting the waste for transportation, 
at the time of acceptance, and
    (2) The designated facility receiving the waste, upon receipt.

[[Page 345]]

    (e) A copy of the manifest bearing all required dates and signatures 
must be:
    (1) Given to a person representing each carrier accepting the waste 
for transportation,
    (2) Carried during transportation in the same manner as required by 
this subchapter for shipping papers,
    (3) Given to a person representing the designated facility receiving 
the waste,
    (4) Returned to the shipper (generator) by the carrier that 
transported the waste from the United States to a foreign destination 
with a notation of the date of departure from the United States, and
    (5) Retained by the shipper (generator) and by the initial and each 
subsequent carrier for three years from the date the waste was accepted 
by the initial carrier. Each retained copy must bear all required 
signatures and dates up to and including those entered by the next 
person who received the waste.
    (f) Transportation by rail. Notwithstanding the requirements of 
paragraphs (d) and (e) of this section, the following requirements 
apply:
    (1) When accepting hazardous waste from a non-rail transporter, the 
initial rail transporter must:
    (i) Sign and date the manifest acknowledging acceptance of the 
hazardous waste;
    (ii) Return a signed copy of the manifest to the non-rail 
transporter;
    (iii) Forward at least three copies of the manifest to:
    (A) The next non-rail transporter, if any;
    (B) The designated facility, if the shipment is delivered to that 
facility by rail; or
    (C) The last rail transporter designated to handle the waste in the 
United States; and
    (iv) Retain one copy of the manifest and rail shipping paper in 
accordance with 40 CFR 263.22.
    (2) Rail transporters must ensure that a shipping paper containing 
all the information required on the manifest (excluding the EPA 
identification numbers, generator certification and signatures) and, for 
exports, an EPA Acknowledgment of Consent accompanies the hazardous 
waste at all times. Intermediate rail transporters are not required to 
sign either the manifest or shipping paper.
    (3) When delivering hazardous waste to the designated facility, a 
rail transporter must:
    (i) Obtain the date of delivery and handwritten signature of the 
owner or operator of the designated facility on the manifest or the 
shipping paper (if the manifest has not been received by the facility); 
and
    (ii) Retain a copy of the manifest or signed shipping paper in 
accordance with 40 CFR 263.22.
    (4) When delivering hazardous waste to a non-rail transporter, a 
rail transporter must:
    (i) Obtain the date of delivery and the handwritten signature of the 
next non-rail transporter on the manifest; and
    (ii) Retain a copy of the manifest in accordance with 40 CFR 263.22.
    (5) Before accepting hazardous waste from a rail transporter, a non-
rail transporter must sign and date the manifest and provide a copy to 
the rail transporter.
    (g) The person delivering a hazardous waste to an initial rail 
carrier shall send a copy of the manifest, dated and signed by a 
representative of the rail carrier, to the person representing the 
designated facility.
    (h) A hazardous waste manifest required by 40 CFR part 262, 
containing all of the information required by this subpart, may be used 
as the shipping paper required by this subpart.

[Amdt. 172-58, 45 FR 34698, May 22, 1980, as amended by Amdt. 172-90, 49 
FR 10510, Mar. 20, 1984; 49 FR 11184, Mar. 26, 1984; Amdt. 172-248, 61 
FR 28675, June 5, 1996]



                           Subpart D--Marking



Sec. 172.300  Applicability.

    (a) Each person who offers a hazardous material for transportation 
shall mark each package, freight container, and transport vehicle 
containing the hazardous material in the manner required by this 
subpart.
    (b) When assigned the function by this subpart, each carrier that 
transports a hazardous material shall mark each package, freight 
container, and

[[Page 346]]

transport vehicle containing the hazardous material in the manner 
required by this subpart.

[Amdt. 172-101, 45 FR 74666, Nov. 10, 1980]



Sec. 172.301  General marking requirements for non-bulk packagings.

    (a) Proper shipping name and identification number. (1) Except as 
otherwise provided by this subchapter, each person who offers for 
transportation a hazardous material in a non-bulk packaging shall mark 
the package with the proper shipping name and identification number 
(preceded by ``UN'' or ``NA'', as appropriate) for the material as shown 
in the Sec. 172.101 table. Identification numbers are not required on 
packages which contain only limited quantities, as defined in Sec. 171.8 
of this subchapter, or ORM-D materials.
    (2) The proper shipping name for a hazardous waste (as defined in 
Sec. 171.8 of this subchapter) is not required to include the word 
``waste'' if the package bears the EPA marking prescribed by 40 CFR 
262.32.
    (3) Large quantities of a single hazardous material in non-bulk 
packages. A transport vehicle or freight container containing only a 
single hazardous material in non-bulk packages must be marked, on each 
side and each end as specified in the Sec. 172.332 or Sec. 172.336, with 
the identification number specified for the hazardous material in the 
Sec. 172.101 Table, subject to the following provisions and limitations:
    (i) Each package is marked with the same proper shipping name and 
identification number;
    (ii) The aggregate gross weight of the hazardous material is 4,000 
kg (8,820 pounds) or more;
    (iii) All of the hazardous material is loaded at one loading 
facility;
    (iv) The transport vehicle or freight container contains no other 
material, hazardous or otherwise; and
    (v) The identification number marking requirement of this paragraph 
(a)(3) does not apply to Class 1, Class 7, or to non-bulk packagings for 
which identification numbers are not required.
    (b) Technical names. In addition to the marking required by 
paragraph (a) of this section, each non-bulk packaging containing 
hazardous materials subject to the provisions of Sec. 172.203(k) of this 
part shall be marked with the technical name in parentheses in 
association with the proper shipping name in accordance with the 
requirements and exceptions specified for display of technical 
descriptions on shipping papers in Sec. 172.203(k) of this part.
    (c) Exemption packagings. The outside of each package authorized by 
an exemption shall be plainly and durably marked ``DOT-E'' followed by 
the exemption number assigned.
    (d) Consignee's or consignor's name and address. Each person who 
offers for transportation a hazardous material in a non-bulk package 
shall mark that package with the name and address of the consignor or 
consignee except when the package is--
    (1) Transported by highway only and will not be transferred from one 
motor carrier to another; or
    (2) Part of a carload lot, truckload lot or freight container load, 
and the entire contents of the rail car, truck or freight container are 
shipped from one consignor to one consignee.
    (e) Previously marked packagings. A package which has been 
previously marked as required for the material it contains and on which 
the marking remains legible, need not be remarked. (For empty 
packagings, see Sec. 173.29 of this subchapter.)

[Amdt. 172-123, 55 FR 52590, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 172-151, 
62 FR 1227, Jan. 8, 1997; 62 FR 39404, July 22, 1997; 63 FR 16075, Apr. 
1, 1998; 66 FR 45182, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 172.302  General marking requirements for bulk packagings.

    (a) Identification numbers. Except as otherwise provided in this 
subpart, no person may offer for transportation or transport a hazardous 
material in a bulk packaging unless the packaging is marked as required 
by Sec. 172.332 with the identification number specified for the 
material in the Sec. 172.101 table--
    (1) On each side and each end, if the packaging has a capacity of 
3,785 L (1,000 gallons) or more;
    (2) On two opposing sides, if the packaging has a capacity of less 
than 3,785 L (1,000 gallons); or
    (3) For cylinders permanently installed on a tube trailer motor 
vehicle, on each side and each end of the motor vehicle.

[[Page 347]]

    (b) Size of markings. Except as otherwise provided, markings 
required by this subpart on bulk packagings must--
    (1) Have a width of at least 6.0 mm (0.24 inch) and a height of at 
least 100 mm (3.9 inches) for rail cars;
    (2) Have a width of at least 4.0 mm (0.16 inch) and a height of at 
least 25 mm (one inch) for portable tanks with capacities of less than 
3,785 L (1,000 gallons) and IBCs; and
    (3) Have a width of at least 6.0 mm (0.24 inch) and a height of at 
least 50 mm (2.0 inches) for cargo tanks and other bulk packagings.
    (c) Exemption packagings. The outside of each bulk package used 
under the terms of an exemption shall be plainly and durably marked 
``DOT-E'' followed by the exemption number assigned.
    (d) Each bulk packaging marked with a proper shipping name, common 
name or identification number as required by this subpart must remain 
marked when it is emptied unless it is--
    (1) Sufficiently cleaned of residue and purged of vapors to remove 
any potential hazard; or
    (2) Refilled, with a material requiring different markings or no 
markings, to such an extent that any residue remaining in the packaging 
is no longer hazardous.
    (e) Additional requirements for marking portable tanks, cargo tanks, 
tank cars, multi-unit tank car tanks, and other bulk packagings are 
prescribed in Secs. 172.326, 172.328, 172.330, and 172.331, 
respectively, of this subpart.
    (f) A bulk packaging marked prior to October 1, 1991, in conformance 
to the regulations of this subchapter in effect on September 30, 1991, 
need not be remarked if the key words of the proper shipping name are 
identical to those currently specified in the Sec. 172.101 table. For 
example, a tank car marked ``ANHYDROUS AMMONIA'' need not be remarked 
``ANHYDROUS AMMONIA, LIQUEFIED''.
    (g) A rail car, freight container, truck body or trailer in which 
the lading has been fumigated with any hazardous material, or is 
undergoing fumigation, must be marked as specified in Sec. 173.9 of this 
subchapter.

[Amdt. 172-123, 55 FR 52591, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66254, 
Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 172-150, 61 FR 50624, Sept. 26, 1996; Amdt. 172-
151, 62 FR 1228, Jan. 8, 1997; 62 FR 39398, July 22, 1997; 66 FR 45379, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 172.303  Prohibited marking.

    (a) No person may offer for transportation or transport a package 
which is marked with the proper shipping name or identification number 
of a hazardous material unless the package contains the identified 
hazardous material or its residue.
    (b) This section does not apply to--
    (1) Transportation of a package in a transport vehicle or freight 
container if the package is not visible during transportation and is 
loaded by the shipper and unloaded by the shipper or consignee.
    (2) Markings on a package which are securely covered in 
transportation.
    (3) The marking of a shipping name on a package when the name 
describes a material not regulated under this subchapter.

[Amdt. 172-123, 55 FR 52591, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66254, 
Dec. 20, 1991]



Sec. 172.304  Marking requirements.

    (a) The marking required in this subpart--
    (1) Must be durable, in English and printed on or affixed to the 
surface of a package or on a label, tag, or sign.
    (2) Must be displayed on a background of sharply contrasting color;
    (3) Must be unobscured by labels or attachments; and
    (4) Must be located away from any other marking (such as 
advertising) that could substantially reduce its effectiveness.
    (b) [Reserved]

[Amdt. 172-29, 41 FR 15996, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 172-29B, 
41 FR 57067, Dec. 30, 1976]



Sec. 172.306  [Reserved]



Sec. 172.308  Authorized abbreviations.

    (a) Abbreviations may not be used in a proper shipping name marking 
except as authorized in this section.

[[Page 348]]

    (b) The abbreviation ``ORM'' may be used in place of the words 
``Other Regulated Material.''
    (c) Abbreviations which appear as authorized descriptions in column 
2 of the Sec. 172.101 table (e.g., ``TNT'' and ``PCB'') are authorized.

[Amdt. 172-123, 55 FR 52591, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 172-145, 
60 FR 49110, Sept. 21, 1995]



Sec. 172.310  Class 7 (radioactive) materials.

    In addition to any other markings required by this subpart, each 
package containing Class 7 (radioactive) materials must be marked as 
follows:
    (a) Each package with a gross mass greater than 50 kg (110 pounds) 
must have its gross mass marked on the outside of the package.
    (b) Each packaging must be marked on the outside of the package, in 
letters at least 13 mm (0.5 inch) high, with the words ``TYPE A'' or 
``TYPE B'' as appropriate. A packaging which does not conform to Type A 
or Type B requirements may not be so marked.
    (c) Each Type B, Type B(U) or Type B(M) packaging must be marked on 
the outside of the package with a radiation symbol that conforms to the 
requirements of appendix B to part 172.
    (d) Each package destined for export shipment must also be marked 
``USA'' in conjunction with the specification marking, or other package 
certificate identification. (See Secs. 173.471, 173.472, and 173.473 of 
this subchapter).

[Amdt 172-143, 60 FR 50304, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended by 172-143, 61 FR 
20749, May 8, 1996; 65 FR 58626, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45379, Aug. 28, 
2001]



Sec. 172.312  Liquid hazardous materials in non-bulk packagings.

    (a) Except as provided in this section, each non-bulk combination 
package having inner packagings containing liquid hazardous materials 
must be:
    (1) Packed with closures upward, and
    (2) Legibly marked, with package orientation markings that conform 
pictorially to the illustration shown in this paragraph, on two opposite 
vertical sides of the package with the arrows pointing in the correct 
upright direction. Depicting a rectangular border around the arrows is 
optional.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.011

    (b) Arrows for purposes other than indicating proper package 
orientation may not be displayed on a package containing a liquid 
hazardous material.
    (c) The requirements of paragraph (a) of this section do not apply 
to--
    (1) A non-bulk package with inner packagings which are cylinders.
    (2) Except when offered or intended for transportation by aircraft, 
packages containing flammable liquids in inner packagings of 1 L or less 
prepared in accordance with Sec. 173.150 (b) or (c) of this subchapter.
    (3) When offered or intended for transportation by aircraft, 
packages containing flammable liquids in inner packagings of 120 mL (4 
fluid oz.) or less prepared in accordance with Sec. 173.150 (b) or (c) 
of this subchapter when packed with sufficient absorption material 
between the inner and outer packagings to completely absorb the liquid 
contents.
    (4) Liquids contained in manufactured articles (e.g., alcohol or 
mercury in thermometers) which are leak-tight in all orientations.
    (5) A non-bulk package with hermetically-sealed inner packagings.

[Amdt. 172-123, 55 FR 52591, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66254, 
Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45458, Oct. 1, 1992; 64 FR 51918, Sept. 27, 1999; 
66 FR 45379, Aug. 28, 2001]

[[Page 349]]



Sec. 172.313  Poisonous hazardous materials.

    In addition to any other markings required by this subpart:
    (a) A material poisonous by inhalation (see Sec. 171.8 of this 
subchapter) shall be marked ``Inhalation Hazard'' in association with 
the required labels or placards, as appropriate, and shipping name when 
required. The marking must be on two opposing sides of a bulk packaging. 
(See Sec. 172.302(b) of this subpart for size of markings on bulk 
packages.) When the words ``Inhalation Hazard'' appear on the label, as 
prescribed in Secs. 172.416 and 172.429, or placard, as prescribed in 
Secs. 172.540 and 172.555, the ``Inhalation Hazard'' marking is not 
required on the package.
    (b) Each non-bulk plastic outer packaging used as a single or 
composite packaging for materials meeting the definition of Division 6.1 
(in Sec. 173.132 of this subchapter) shall be permanently marked, by 
embossment or other durable means, with the word ``POISON'' in letters 
at least 6.3 mm (0.25 inch) in height. Additional text or symbols 
related to hazard warning may be included in the marking. The marking 
shall be located within 150 mm (6 inches) of the closure of the 
packaging.
    (c) A transport vehicle or freight container containing a material 
poisonous by inhalation in non-bulk packages shall be marked, on each 
side and each end as specified in Sec. 172.332 or Sec. 172.336, with the 
identification number specified for the hazardous material in the 
Sec. 172.101 table, subject to the following provisions and limitations:
    (1) The material is in Hazard Zone A or B;
    (2) The transport vehicle or freight container is loaded at one 
facility with 1,000 kg (2,205 pounds) or more aggregate gross weight of 
the material in non-bulk packages marked with the same proper shipping 
name and identification number; and
    (3) If the transport vehicle or freight container contains more than 
one material meeting the provisions of this paragraph (c), it shall be 
marked with the identification number for one material, determined as 
follows:
    (i) For different materials in the same hazard zone, with the 
identification number of the material having the greatest aggregate 
gross weight; and
    (ii) For different materials in both Hazard Zones A and B, with the 
identification number for the Hazard Zone A material.
    (d) For a packaging containing a Division 6.1 PG III material, ``PG 
III'' may be marked adjacent to the POISON label. (See Sec. 172.405(c).)

[Amdt. 172-123, 55 FR 52592, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 57 FR 46624, 
Oct. 9, 1992; Amdt. 172-151, 62 FR 1228, Jan. 8, 1997; 62 FR 39398, 
39405, July 22, 1997; 63 FR 16075, Apr. 1, 1998; 64 FR 10776, Mar. 5, 
1999]



Sec. 172.316  Packagings containing materials classed as ORM-D.

    (a) Each non-bulk packaging containing a material classed as ORM-D 
must be marked on at least one side or end with the ORM-D designation 
immediately following or below the proper shipping name of the material. 
The ORM designation must be placed within a rectangle that is 
approximately 6.3 mm (0.25 inches) larger on each side than the 
designation. The designation for ORM-D must be:
    (1) ORM-D-AIR for an ORM-D that is prepared for air shipment and 
packaged in accordance with the provisions of Sec. 173.27 of this 
subchapter.
    (2) ORM-D for an ORM-D other than as described in paragraph (a)(1) 
of this section.
    (b) When the ORM-D marking including the proper shipping name can 
not be affixed on the package surface, it may be on an attached tag.
    (c) The marking ORM-D is the certification by the person offering 
the packaging for transportation that the material is properly 
described, classed, packaged, marked and labeled (when appropriate) and 
in proper condition for transportation according to the applicable 
regulations of this subchapter. This form of certification does not 
preclude the requirement for a certificate on a shipping paper when 
required by subpart C of this part.

[Amdt. 172-29, 41 FR 15996, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 172-123, 
55 FR 52592, Dec. 21, 1990; 56 FR 66254, Dec. 20, 1991]

[[Page 350]]



Sec. 172.320  Explosive hazardous materials.

    (a) Except as otherwise provided in paragraphs (b), (c), (d) and (e) 
of this section, each package containing a Class 1 material must be 
marked with the EX-number for each substance, article or device 
contained therein.
    (b) Except for fireworks approved in accordance with Sec. 173.56(j) 
of this subchapter, a package of Class 1 materials may be marked, in 
lieu of the EX-number required by paragraph (a) of this section, with a 
national stock number issued by the Department of Defense or identifying 
information, such as a product code required by regulations for 
commercial explosives specified in 27 CFR part 55, if the national stock 
number or identifying information can be specifically associated with 
the EX-number assigned.
    (c) When more than five different Class 1 materials are packed in 
the same package, the package may be marked with only five of the EX-
numbers, national stock numbers, product codes, or combination thereof.
    (d) The requirements of this section do not apply if the EX-number, 
product code or national stock number of each explosive item described 
under a proper shipping description is shown in association with the 
shipping description required by Sec. 172.202(a) of this part. Product 
codes and national stock numbers must be traceable to the specific EX-
number assigned by the Associate Administrator.
    (e) The requirements of this section do not apply to the following 
Class 1 materials:
    (1) Those being shipped to a testing agency in accordance with 
Sec. 173.56(d) of this subchapter;
    (2) Those being shipped in accordance with Sec. 173.56(e) of this 
subchapter, for the purposes of developmental testing;
    (3) Those which meet the requirements of Sec. 173.56(h) of this 
subchapter and therefore are not subject to the approval process of 
Sec. 173.56 of this subchapter;
    (4) Until October 1, 1993, those which are shipped under Sec. 171.19 
of this subchapter; and
    (5) Those that are transported in accordance with Sec. 173.56(c)(2) 
of this subchapter and, therefore, are covered by a national security 
classification currently in effect.

[Amdt. 172-123, 56 FR 66254, Dec. 20, 1991, as amended by Amdt. 172-139, 
59 FR 67487, Dec. 29, 1994; 66 FR 45379, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 172.322  Marine pollutants.

    (a) For vessel transportation of each non-bulk packaging that 
contains a marine pollutant--
    (1) If the proper shipping name for a material which is a marine 
pollutant does not identify by name the component which makes the 
material a marine pollutant, the name of that component must be marked 
on the package in parentheses in association with the marked proper 
shipping name. Where two or more components which make a material a 
marine pollutant are present, the names of at least two of the 
components most predominantly contributing to the marine pollutant 
designation must appear in parentheses in association with the marked 
proper shipping name; and
    (2) The MARINE POLLUTANT mark shall be placed in association with 
the hazard warning labels required by subpart E of this part or, in the 
absence of any labels, in association with the marked proper shipping 
name.
    (b) A bulk packaging that contains a marine pollutant must--
    (1) Be marked with the MARINE POLLUTANT mark on at least two 
opposing sides or two ends other than the bottom if the packaging has a 
capacity of less than 3,785 L (1,000 gallons). The mark must be visible 
from the direction it faces. The mark may be displayed in black 
lettering on a square-on-point configuration having the same outside 
dimensions as a placard; or
    (2) Be marked on each end and each side with the MARINE POLLUTANT 
mark if the packaging has a capacity of 3,785 L (1,000 gallons) or more. 
The mark must be visible from the direction it faces. The mark may be 
displayed in black lettering on a square-on-point configuration having 
the same outside dimensions as a placard.
    (c) A transport vehicle or freight container that contains a package 
subject to the marking requirements of paragraph (a) or (b) of this 
section must be marked with the MARINE POLLUTANT mark. The mark must 
appear on

[[Page 351]]

each side and each end of the transport vehicle or freight container, 
and must be visible from the direction it faces. This requirement may be 
met by the marking displayed on a freight container or portable tank 
loaded on a motor vehicle or rail car. This mark may be displayed in 
black lettering on a white square-on-point configuration having the same 
outside dimensions as a placard.
    (d) The MARINE POLLUTANT mark is not required--
    (1) On a combination package containing a severe marine pollutant 
(see appendix B to Sec. 172.101), in inner packagings each of which 
contains:
    (i) 0.5 L (17 ounces) or less net capacity for liquids; or
    (ii) 500 g (17.6 ounces) or less net capacity for solids.
    (2) On a combination packaging containing a marine pollutant, other 
than a severe marine pollutant, in inner packagings each of which 
contains:
    (i) 5 L (1.3 gallons) or less net capacity for liquids; or
    (ii) 5 kg (11 pounds) or less net capacity for solids.
    (3) Except for transportation by vessel, on a bulk packaging, 
freight container or transport vehicle that bears a label or placard 
specified in subparts E or F of this part.
    (e) MARINE POLLUTANT mark. The MARINE POLLUTANT mark must conform to 
the following:
    (1) Except for size, the MARINE POLLUTANT mark must appear as 
follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.012

    (2) The symbol, letters and border must be black and the background 
white, or the symbol, letters, border and background must be of 
contrasting color to the surface to which the mark is affixed. Each side 
of the mark must be--
    (i) At least 100 mm (3.9 inches) for marks applied to:
    (A) Non-bulk packagings, except in the case of packagings which, 
because of their size, can only bear smaller marks; or
    (B) Bulk packagings with a capacity of less than 3785 L (1,000 
gallons); or

[[Page 352]]

    (ii) At least 250 mm (9.8 inches) for marks applied to all other 
bulk packagings.

[Amdt. 172-127, 57 FR 52938, Nov. 5, 1992, as amended by Amdt. 172-136, 
59 FR 38064, July 26, 1994; Amdt. 172-145, 60 FR 49110, Sept. 21, 1995; 
66 FR 45379, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 172.323  Infectious substances.

    (a) In addition to other requirements of this subpart, after 
September 30, 2003, a bulk packaging containing a regulated medical 
waste, as defined in Sec. 173.134(a)(5) of this subchapter, must be 
marked with a BIOHAZARD marking conforming to 29 CFR 1910.1030(g)(1)(i)-
-
    (1) On two opposing sides or two ends other than the bottom if the 
packaging has a capacity of less than 3,785 L (1,000 gallons). The 
BIOHAZARD marking must measure at least 152.4 mm (6 inches) on each side 
and must be visible from the direction it faces.
    (2) On each end and each side if the packaging has a capacity of 
3,785 L (1,000 gallons) or more. The BIOHAZARD marking must measure at 
least 152.4 mm (6 inches) on each side and must be visible from the 
direction it faces.
    (b) For a bulk packaging contained in or on a transport vehicle or 
freight container, if the BIOHAZARD marking on the bulk packaging is not 
visible, the transport vehicle or freight container must be marked as 
required by paragraph (a) of this section on each side and each end.
    (c) The background color for the BIOHAZARD marking required by 
paragraph (a) of this section must be orange and the symbol and letters 
must be black. Except for size the BIOHAZARD marking must appear as 
follows:

[[Page 353]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14AU02.005

    (d) The BIOHAZARD marking required by paragraph (a) of this section 
must be displayed on a background of contrasting color. It may be 
displayed on a plain white square-on-point configuration having the same 
outside dimensions as a placard, as specified in Sec. 172.519(c) of this 
part.

[67 FR 53135, Aug. 14, 2002]

    Effective Date Note: At 67 FR 53135, Aug. 14, 2002, Sec. 172.323 was 
added, effective Oct. 1, 2002. At 67 FR 54967, Aug. 27, 2002, the 
effective date was corrected to Feb. 14, 2003.



Sec. 172.324  Hazardous substances in non-bulk packagings.

    For each non-bulk package that contains a hazardous substance--
    (a) Except for packages of radioactive material labeled in 
accordance with Sec. 172.403, if the proper shipping name of a material 
that is a hazardous

[[Page 354]]

substance does not identify the hazardous substance by name, the name of 
the hazardous substance must be marked on the package, in parentheses, 
in association with the proper shipping name. If the material contains 
two or more hazardous substances, at least two hazardous substances, 
including the two with the lowest reportable quantities (RQs), must be 
identified. For a hazardous waste, the waste code (e.g., D001), if 
appropriate, may be used to identify the hazardous substance.
    (b) The letters ``RQ'' shall be marked on the package in association 
with the proper shipping name.

[Amdt. 172-108, 52 FR 4843, Feb. 17, 1987, as amended by Amdt. 172-119, 
54 FR 39505, Sept. 26, 1989; Amdt. 172-122, 55 FR 46825, Nov. 7, 1990; 
Amdt. 172-123, 55 FR 52592, Dec. 21, 1990; Amdt. 172-127, 57 FR 52939, 
Nov. 5, 1992; Amdt. 172-149, 61 FR 27172, May 30, 1996]



Sec. 172.325  Elevated temperature materials.

    (a) Except as provided in paragraph (b) of this section, a bulk 
packaging containing an elevated temperature material must be marked on 
two opposing sides with the word ``HOT'' in black or white Gothic 
lettering on a contrasting background. The marking must be displayed on 
the packaging itself or in black lettering on a plain white square-on-
point configuration having the same outside dimensions as a placard. 
(See Sec. 172.302(b) for size of markings on bulk packagings.)
    (b) Bulk packagings containing molten aluminum or molten sulfur must 
be marked ``MOLTEN ALUMINUM'' or ``MOLTEN SULFUR'', respectively, in the 
same manner as prescribed in paragraph (a) of this section.
    (c) If the identification number is displayed on a white-square-on-
point display configuration, as prescribed in Sec. 172.336(b), the word 
``HOT'' may be displayed in the upper corner of the same white-square-
on-point display configuration. The word ``HOT'' must be in black 
letters having a height of at least 50 mm (2.0 inches). Except for size, 
these markings shall be as illustrated for an Elevated temperature 
material, liquid, n.o.s.:

[[Page 355]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR29DE94.000

[Amdt. 172-125, 58 FR 3348, Jan. 8, 1993, as amended by Amdt. 172-139, 
59 FR 67487, Dec. 29, 1994]



Sec. 172.326  Portable tanks.

    (a) Shipping name. No person may offer for transportation or 
transport a portable tank containing a hazardous material unless it is 
legibly marked on two opposing sides with the proper shipping name 
specified for the material in the Sec. 172.101 table.
    (b) Owner's name. The name of the owner or of the lessee, if 
applicable, must be displayed on a portable tank that contains a 
hazardous material.
    (c) Identification numbers. (1) If the identification number 
markings required by Sec. 172.302(a) are not visible, a transport 
vehicle or freight container used to transport a portable tank 
containing a hazardous material must be marked on each side and each end 
as required by Sec. 172.332 with the identification number specified for 
the material in the Sec. 172.101 table.
    (2) Each person who offers a portable tank containing a hazardous 
material to a motor carrier, for transportation in a transport vehicle 
or freight container, shall provide the motor carrier with the required 
identification numbers on placards, orange panels, or the white square-
on-point configuration, as appropriate, for each side and each end

[[Page 356]]

of the transport vehicle or freight container from which identification 
numbers on the portable tank are not visible.

[Amdt. 172-123, 55 FR 52592, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66255, 
Dec. 20, 1991]



Sec. 172.328  Cargo tanks.

    (a) Providing and affixing identification numbers. Unless a cargo 
tank is already marked with the identification numbers required by this 
subpart, the identification numbers must be provided or affixed as 
follows:
    (1) A person who offers a hazardous material to a motor carrier for 
transportation in a cargo tank shall provide the motor carrier the 
identification numbers on placards or shall affix orange panels 
containing the required identification numbers, prior to or at the time 
the material is offered for transportation.
    (2) A person who offers a cargo tank containing a hazardous material 
for transportation shall affix the required identification numbers on 
panels or placards prior to or at the time the cargo tank is offered for 
transportation.
    (3) For a cargo tank transported on or in a transport vehicle or 
freight container, if the identification number marking on the cargo 
tank required by Sec. 172.302(a) would not normally be visible during 
transportation--
    (i) The transport vehicle or freight container must be marked as 
required by Sec. 172.332 on each side and each end with the 
identification number specified for the material in the Sec. 172.101 
table; and
    (ii) When the cargo tank is permanently installed within an enclosed 
cargo body of the transport vehicle or freight container, the 
identification number marking required by Sec. 172.302(a) need only be 
displayed on each side and end of a cargo tank that is visible when the 
cargo tank is accessed.
    (b) Required markings: Gases. Except for certain nurse tanks which 
must be marked as specified in Sec. 173.315(m) of this subchapter, each 
cargo tank transporting a Class 2 material subject to this subchapter 
must be marked, in lettering no less than 50 mm (2.0 inches), on each 
side and each end with--
    (1) The proper shipping name specified for the gas in the 
Sec. 172.101 table; or
    (2) An appropriate common name for the material (e.g., ``Refrigerant 
Gas'').
    (c) QT/NQT markings. Each MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tank must be 
marked near the specification plate, in letters no less than 50 mm (2.0 
inches) in height, with--
    (1) ``QT'', if the cargo tank is constructed of quenched and 
tempered steel; or
    (2) ``NQT'', if the cargo tank is constructed of other than quenched 
and tempered steel.

[Amdt. 172-123, 55 FR 52592, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66255, 
Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 172-151, 62 FR 1228, Jan. 8, 1997; 62 FR 39045, 
July 22, 1997]



Sec. 172.330  Tank cars and multi-unit tank car tanks.

    (a) Shipping name and identification number. No person may offer for 
transportation or transport a hazardous material--
    (1) In a tank car unless the following conditions are met:
    (i) The tank car must be marked on each side and each end as 
required by Sec. 172.302 with the identification number specified for 
the material in the Sec. 172.101 table; and
    (ii) A tank car containing any of the following materials must be 
marked on each side with the key words of the proper shipping name 
specified for the material in the Sec. 172.101 table, or with a common 
name authorized for the material in this subchapter (e.g., ``Refrigerant 
Gas''):

Acrolein, stabilized
Ammonia, anhydrous, liquefied
Ammonia solutions (more than 50% ammonia)
Bromine or Bromine solutions
Bromine chloride
Chloroprene, stabilized
Dispersant gas or Refrigerant gas (as defined in Sec. 173.115 of this 
subchapter)
Division 2.1 materials
Division 2.2 materials (in Class DOT 107 tank cars only)
Division 2.3 materials
Formic acid
Hydrocyanic acid, aqueous solutions
Hydrofluoric acid, solution
Hydrogen cyanide, stabilized (less than 3% water)
Hydrogen fluoride, anhydrous

[[Page 357]]

Hydrogen peroxide, aqueous solutions (greater than 20% hydrogen 
peroxide)
Hydrogen peroxide, stabilized
Hydrogen peroxide and peroxyacetic acid mixtures
Nitric acid (other than red fuming)
Phosphorus, amorphous
Phosphorus, white dry or Phosphorus, white, under water or Phosphorus 
white, in solution, or Phosphorus, yellow dry or Phosphorus, yellow, 
under water or Phosphorus, yellow, in solution
Phosphorus white, molten
Potassium nitrate and sodium nitrate mixtures
Potassium permanganate
Sulfur trioxide, stabilized
Sulfur trioxide, uninhibited

    (2) In a multi-unit tank car tank, unless the tank is marked on two 
opposing sides, in letters and numerals no less than 50 mm (2.0 inches) 
high--
    (i) With the proper shipping name specified for the material in the 
Sec. 172.101 table or with a common name authorized for the material in 
this subchapter (e.g., ``Refrigerant Gas''); and
    (ii) With the identification number specified for the material in 
the Sec. 172.101 table, unless marked in accordance with 
Secs. 172.302(a) and 172.332 of this subpart.
    (b) A motor vehicle or rail car used to transport a multi-unit tank 
car tank containing a hazardous material must be marked on each side and 
each end, as required by Sec. 172.332, with the identification number 
specified for the material in the Sec. 172.101 table.

[Amdt. 172-123, 55 FR 52593, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66255, 
Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45458, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 172-148, 61 FR 28676, 
June 5, 1996; Amdt. 172-148, 61 FR 50254, Sept. 25, 1996; 66 FR 33425, 
June 21, 2001]



Sec. 172.331  Bulk packagings other than portable tanks, cargo tanks, tank cars and multi-unit tank car tanks.

    (a) Each person who offers a hazardous material to a motor carrier 
for transportation in a bulk packaging shall provide the motor carrier 
with the required identification numbers on placards or plain white 
square-on-point display configurations, as authorized, or shall affix 
orange panels containing the required identification numbers to the 
packaging prior to or at the time the material is offered for 
transportation, unless the packaging is already marked with the 
identification number as required by this subchapter.
    (b) Each person who offers a bulk packaging containing a hazardous 
material for transportation shall affix to the packaging the required 
identification numbers on orange panels, square-on-point configurations 
or placards, as appropriate, prior to, or at the time the packaging is 
offered for transportation unless it is already marked with 
identification numbers as required by this subchapter.
    (c) For a bulk packaging contained in or on a transport vehicle or 
freight container, if the identification number marking on the bulk 
packaging (e.g., an IBC) required by Sec. 172.302(a) is not visible, the 
transport vehicle or freight container must be marked as required by 
Sec. 172.332 on each side and each end with the identification number 
specified for the material in the Sec. 172.101 table.

[Amdt. 172-123, 55 FR 52593, Dec. 21, 1994, as amended by Amdt. 172-151, 
62 FR 1228, Jan. 8, 1997; 62 FR 39398, July 22, 1997]



Sec. 172.332  Identification number markings.

    (a) General. When required by Sec. 172.301, Sec. 172.302, 
Sec. 172.313, Sec. 172.326, Sec. 172.328, Sec. 172.330, or Sec. 172.331, 
identification number markings must be displayed on orange panels or 
placards as specified in this section, or on white square-on-point 
configurations as prescribed in Sec. 172.336(b).
    (b) Orange panels. Display of an identification number on an orange 
panel shall be in conformance with the following:
    (1) The orange panel must be 160 mm (6.3 inches) high by 400 mm 
(15.7 inches) wide with a 15 mm (0.6 inches) black outer border. The 
identification number shall be displayed in 100 mm (3.9 inches) black 
Helvetica Medium numerals on the orange panel. Measurements may vary 
from those specified plus or minus 5 mm (0.2 inches).
    (2) The orange panel may be made of any durable material prescribed 
for placards in Sec. 172.519, and shall be of the orange color specified 
for labels or placards in appendix A to this part.
    (3) The name and hazard class of a material may be shown in the 
upper

[[Page 358]]

left border of the orange panel in letters not more than 18 points high.
    (4) Except for size and color, the orange panel and identification 
numbers shall be as illustrated for Liquefied petroleum gas:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.013

    (c) Placards. Display of an identification number on a hazard 
warning placard shall be in conformance with the following:
    (1) The identification number shall be displayed across the center 
area of the placard in 88 mm (3.5 inches) black Alpine Gothic or 
Alternate Gothic No. 3 numerals on a white background 100 mm (3.9 
inches) high and approximately 215 mm (8.5 inches) wide and may be 
outlined with a solid or dotted line border.
    (2) The top of the 100 mm (3.9 inches) high white background shall 
be approximately 40 mm (1.6 inches) above the placard horizontal center 
line.
    (3) An identification number may be displayed only on a placard 
corresponding to the primary hazard class of the hazardous material.
    (4) For a COMBUSTIBLE placard used to display an identification 
number, the entire background below the white background for the 
identification number must be white during transportation by rail and 
may be white during transportation by highway.
    (5) The name of the hazardous material and the hazard class may be 
shown in letters not more than 18 points high immediately within the 
upper border of the space on the placard bearing the identification 
number of the material.
    (6) If an identification number is placed over the word(s) on a 
placard, the word(s) should be substantially covered to maximize the 
effectiveness of the identification number.
    (d) Except for size and color, the display of an identification 
number on a placard shall be as illustrated for Acetone:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.014


[Amdt. 172-101, 45 FR 74667, Nov. 10, 1980, as amended by Amdt. 172-81, 
48 FR 28099, June 20, 1983; Amdt. 172-110, 52 FR 29527, Aug. 10, 1987; 
Amdt. 172-123, 55 FR 52593, Dec. 21, 1990; 56 FR 66255, Dec. 20, 1991; 
Amdt. 172-151, 62 FR 1228, Jan. 8, 1997; 65 FR 50459, Aug. 18, 2000]



Sec. 172.334  Identification numbers; prohibited display.

    (a) No person may display an identification number on a RADIOACTIVE, 
EXPLOSIVES 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5 or 1.6, DANGEROUS, or subsidiary 
hazard placard.
    (b) No person may display an identification number on a placard, 
orange panel or white square-on-point display configuration unless--
    (1) The identification number is specified for the material in 
Sec. 172.101;
    (2) The identification number is displayed on the placard, orange 
panel or white square-on-point configuration authorized by Sec. 172.332 
or Sec. 172.336(b), as appropriate, and any placard used for display of 
the identification number corresponds to the hazard class of the 
material specified in Sec. 172.504;
    (3) Except as provided under Sec. 172.336 (c)(4) or (c)(5), the 
package, freight container, or transport vehicle on which the number is 
displayed contains the hazardous material associated with that 
identification number in Sec. 172.101.
    (c) Except as required by Sec. 172.332(c)(4) for a combustible 
liquid, the identification number of a material may be displayed only on 
the placards required by the tables in Sec. 172.504.
    (d) Except as provided in Sec. 172.336, a placard bearing an 
identification number may not be used to meet the requirements of 
subpart F of this part

[[Page 359]]

unless it is the correct identification number for all hazardous 
materials of the same class in the transport vehicle or freight 
container on which it is displayed.
    (e) Except as specified in Sec. 172.338, an identification number 
may not be displayed on an orange panel on a cargo tank unless affixed 
to the cargo tank by the person offering the hazardous material for 
transportation in the cargo tank.
    (f) If a placard is required by Sec. 172.504, an identification 
number may not be displayed on an orange panel unless it is displayed in 
proximity to the placard.
    (g) No person shall add any color, number, letter, symbol, or word 
other than as specified in this subchapter, to any identification number 
marking display which is required or authorized by this subchapter.

[Amdt. 172-101, 45 FR 74667, Nov. 10, 1980, as amended by Amdt. 172-104, 
51 FR 23078, June 25, 1986; Amdt. 172-110, 52 FR 29528, Aug. 10, 1987; 
Amdt. 172-123, 55 FR 52593, Dec. 21, 1990; 56 FR 66255, Dec. 20, 1991; 
Amdt. 172-127, 59 FR 49133, Sept. 26, 1994]



Sec. 172.336  Identification numbers; special provisions.

    (a) When not required or prohibited by this subpart, identification 
numbers may be displayed on a transport vehicle or a freight container 
in the manner prescribed by this subpart.
    (b) Identification numbers, when required, must be displayed on 
either orange panels (see Sec. 172.332(b)) or on a plain white square-
on-point display configuration having the same outside dimensions as a 
placard. In addition, for materials in hazard classes for which placards 
are specified and identification number displays are required, but for 
which identification numbers may not be displayed on the placards 
authorized for the material (see Sec. 172.334(a)), identification 
numbers must be displayed on orange panels or on the plain white square-
on-point display configuration in association with the required 
placards. An identification number displayed on a white square-on-point 
display configuration is not considered to be a placard.
    (1) The 100 mm (3.9 inch) by 215 mm (8.5 inches) area containing the 
identification number shall be located as prescribed by Sec. 172.332 
(c)(1) and (c)(2) and may be outlined with a solid or dotted line 
border.
    (2) [Reserved]
    (c) Identification numbers are not required:
    (1) On the ends of a portable tank, cargo tank or tank car having 
more than one compartment if hazardous materials having different 
identification numbers are being transported therein. In such a 
circumstance, the identification numbers on the sides of the tank shall 
be displayed in the same sequence as the compartments containing the 
materials they identify.
    (2) On a cargo tank containing only gasoline, if the cargo tank is 
marked ``Gasoline'' on each side and rear in letters no less than 50 mm 
(2 inches) high, or is placarded in accordance with Sec. 172.542(c).
    (3) On a cargo tank containing only fuel oil, if the cargo tank is 
marked ``Fuel Oil'' on each side and rear in letters no less than 50 mm 
(2 inches) high, or is placarded in accordance with Sec. 172.544(c).
    (4) For each of the different liquid petroleum distillate fuels, 
including gasoline and gasohol in a compartmented cargo tank or tank 
car, if the identification number is displayed for the distillate fuel 
having the lowest flash point.
    (5) For each of the different liquid petroleum distillate fuels, 
including gasoline and gasohol transported in a cargo tank, if the 
identification number is displayed for the liquid petroleum distillate 
fuel having the lowest flash point.
    (6) On nurse tanks meeting the provisions of Sec. 173.315(m) of this 
subchapter.

[Amdt. 172-101, 45 FR 74667, Nov. 10, 1980, as amended by Amdt. 172-74, 
47 FR 40365, Sept. 30, 1982; Amdt. 172-109, 52 FR 13038, Apr. 20, 1987; 
Amdt. 172-110, 52 FR 29528, Aug. 10, 1987; Amdt. 172-123, 55 FR 52593, 
Dec. 21, 1990; 56 FR 66255, Dec. 20, 1991; 65 FR 50459, Aug. 18, 2000]



Sec. 172.338  Replacement of identification numbers.

    If more than one of the identification number markings on placards, 
orange panels, or white square-on-point display configurations that are 
required

[[Page 360]]

to be displayed are lost, damaged or destroyed during transportation, 
the carrier shall replace all the missing or damaged identification 
numbers as soon as practicable. However, in such a case, the numbers may 
be entered by hand on the appropriate placard, orange panel or white 
square-on-point display configuration providing the correct 
identification numbers are entered legibly using an indelible marking 
material. When entered by hand, the identification numbers must be 
located in the white display area specified in Sec. 172.332. This 
section does not preclude required compliance with the placarding 
requirements of subpart F of this subchapter.

[Amdt. 172-110, 52 FR 29528, Aug. 10, 1987]



                           Subpart E--Labeling



Sec. 172.400  General labeling requirements.

    (a) Except as specified in Sec. 172.400a, each person who offers for 
transportation or transports a hazardous material in any of the 
following packages or containment devices, shall label the package or 
containment device with labels specified for the material in the 
Sec. 172.101 table and in this subpart:
    (1) A non-bulk package;
    (2) A bulk packaging, other than a cargo tank, portable tank, or 
tank car, with a volumetric capacity of less than 18 m3 (640 
cubic feet), unless placarded in accordance with subpart F of this part;
    (3) A portable tank of less than 3785 L (1000 gallons) capacity, 
unless placarded in accordance with subpart F of this part;
    (4) A DOT Specification 106 or 110 multi-unit tank car tank, unless 
placarded in accordance with subpart F of this part; and
    (5) An overpack, freight container or unit load device, of less than 
18 m3 (640 cubic feet), which contains a package for which 
labels are required, unless placarded or marked in accordance with 
Sec. 172.512 of this part.
    (b) Labeling is required for a hazardous material which meets one or 
more hazard class definitions, in accordance with column 6 of the 
Sec. 172.101 table and the following table:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                Label
                                                              design or
     Hazard class or division             Label name           section
                                                              reference
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.1..............................  EXPLOSIVES 1.1..........      172.411
1.2..............................  EXPLOSIVES 1.2..........      172.411
1.3..............................  EXPLOSIVES 1.3..........      172.411
1.4..............................  EXPLOSIVES 1.4..........      172.411
1.5..............................  EXPLOSIVES 1.5..........      172.411
1.6..............................  EXPLOSIVES 1.6..........      172.411
2.1..............................  FLAMMABLE GAS...........      172.417
2.2..............................  NONFLAMMABLE GAS........      172.415
2.3..............................  POISON GAS..............      172.416
3 (flammable liquid) Combustible   FLAMMABLE LIQUID (none).      172.419
 liquid.
4.1..............................  FLAMMABLE SOLID.........      172.420
4.2..............................  SPONTANEOUSLY                 172.422
                                    COMBUSTIBLE.
4.3..............................  DANGEROUS WHEN WET......      172.423
5.1..............................  OXIDIZER................      172.426
5.2..............................  ORGANIC PEROXIDE........      172.427
6.1 (inhalation hazard, Zone A or  POISON INHALATION HAZARD      172.429
 B).
6.1 (other than inhalation         POISON..................      172.430
 hazard, Zone A or B).
6.2..............................  INFECTIOUS SUBSTANCE \1\      172.432
7 (see Sec.  172.403)............  RADIOACTIVE WHITE-I.....      172.436
7................................  RADIOACTIVE YELLOW-II...      172.438
7................................  RADIOACTIVE YELLOW-III..      172.440
7 (empty packages, see Sec.        EMPTY...................      172.450
 173.428 of this subchapter).
8................................  CORROSIVE...............      172.442
9................................  CLASS 9.................      172.446
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ The ETIOLOGIC AGENT label specified in regulations of the Department
  of Health and Human Services at 42 CFR 72.3 may apply to packages of
  infectious substances.


[[Page 361]]


[Amdt. 172-123, 55 FR 52593, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66255, 
Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 172-151, 62 FR 1228, Jan. 8, 1997; 64 FR 10776, 
Mar. 5, 1999; 64 FR 51918, Sept. 27, 1999]



Sec. 172.400a  Exceptions from labeling.

    (a) Notwithstanding the provisions of Sec. 172.400, a label is not 
required on--
    (1) A cylinder, or a Dewar flask conforming to Sec. 173.320 of this 
subchapter containing a Division 2.1 or Division 2.2 gas that is--
    (i) Not poisonous;
    (ii) Carried by a private or contract motor carrier;
    (iii) Not overpacked; and
    (iv) Durably and legibly marked in accordance with CGA Pamphlet C-7, 
appendix A.
    (2) A package or unit of military explosives (including ammunition) 
shipped by or on behalf of the DOD when in--
    (i) Freight containerload, carload or truckload shipments, if loaded 
and unloaded by the shipper or DOD; or
    (ii) Unitized or palletized break-bulk shipments by cargo vessel 
under charter to DOD if at least one required label is displayed on each 
unitized or palletized load.
    (3) A package containing a hazardous material other than ammunition 
that is--
    (i) Loaded and unloaded under the supervision of DOD personnel, and
    (ii) Escorted by DOD personnel in a separate vehicle.
    (4) A compressed gas cylinder permanently mounted in or on a 
transport vehicle.
    (5) A freight container, aircraft unit load device or portable tank, 
which--
    (i) Is placarded in accordance with subpart F of this part, or
    (ii) Conforms to paragraph (a)(3) or (b)(3) of Sec. 172.512.
    (6) An overpack or unit load device in or on which labels 
representative of each hazardous material in the overpack or unit load 
device are visible.
    (7) A package of low specific activity radioactive material and 
surface contaminated objects, when transported under 
Sec. 173.427(a)(6)(vi) of this subchapter.
    (b) Certain exceptions to labeling requirements are provided for 
small quantities and limited quantities in applicable sections in part 
173 of this subchapter.
    (c) Notwithstanding the provisions of Sec. 172.402(a), a subsidiary 
hazard label is not required on a package containing a Class 8 
(corrosive) material which has a subsidiary hazard of Division 6.1 
(poisonous) if the toxicity of the material is based solely on the 
corrosive destruction of tissue rather than systemic poisoning.
    (d) A package containing a material poisonous by inhalation (see 
Sec. 171.8 of this subchapter) in a closed transport vehicle or freight 
container may be excepted from the POISON INHALATION HAZARD or POISON 
GAS label or placard, under the conditions set forth in Secs. 171.12 and 
171.12a of this subchapter.

[Amdt. 172-123, 55 FR 52594, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 172-132, 
58 FR 50501, Sept. 27, 1993; 172-130, 58 FR 51531, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 
172-139, 59 FR 67490, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 172-145, 60 FR 49110, Sept. 
21, 1995; 63 FR 52849, Oct. 1, 1998; 64 FR 10776, Mar. 5, 1999; 65 FR 
58626, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 44255, Aug. 22, 2001]



Sec. 172.401  Prohibited labeling.

    (a) Except as otherwise provided in this section, no person may 
offer for transportation and no carrier may transport a package bearing 
a label specified in this subpart unless:
    (1) The package contains a material that is a hazardous material, 
and
    (2) The label represents a hazard of the hazardous material in the 
package.
    (b) No person may offer for transportation and no carrier may 
transport a package bearing any marking or label which by its color, 
design, or shape could be confused with or conflict with a label 
prescribed by this part.
    (c) The restrictions in paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section, do 
not apply to packages labeled in conformance with:
    (1) The UN Recommendations (see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter);
    (2) The IMDG Code (see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter);
    (3) The ICAO Technical Instructions (see Sec. 171.7 of this 
subchapter);
    (4) The TDG Regulations (see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).
    (d) The provisions of paragraph (a) of this section do not apply to 
a packaging bearing a label if that packaging is:

[[Page 362]]

    (1) Unused or cleaned and purged of all residue;
    (2) Transported in a transport vehicle or freight container in such 
a manner that the packaging is not visible during transportation; and
    (3) Loaded by the shipper and unloaded by the shipper or consignee.

[Amdt. 172-9, 41 FR 15996, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 172-75, 47 
FR 44471, Oct. 7, 1982; Amdt. 172-77, 47 FR 54822, Dec. 6, 1982; Amdt. 
172-94, 49 FR 38134, Sept. 27, 1984; Amdt. 172-100, 50 FR 41521, Oct. 
11, 1985; Amdt. 172-123, 55 FR 52594, Dec. 21, 1990; Amdt. 172-132, 58 
FR 50501, Sept. 27, 1993; 66 FR 8647, Feb. 1, 2001; 66 FR 45379, Aug. 
28, 2001]



Sec. 172.402  Additional labeling requirements.

    (a) Subsidiary hazard labels. Each package containing a hazardous 
material--
    (1) Shall be labeled with primary and subsidiary hazard labels as 
specified in column 6 of the Sec. 172.101 table (unless excepted in 
paragraph (a)(2) of this section); and
    (2)For other than Class 1 or Class 2 materials (for subsidiary 
labeling requirements for Class 1 or Class 2 materials see paragraph (e) 
or paragraphs (f) and (g), respectively, of this section), if not 
already labeled under paragraph (a)(1) of this section, shall be labeled 
with subsidiary hazard labels in accordance with the following table:

                        Subsidiary Hazard Labels
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                  Subsidiary Hazard (Class or Division)
    Subsidiary hazard level    -----------------------------------------
        (packing group)           3    4.1   4.2   4.3   5.1   6.1    8
------------------------------------------------------------------------
I.............................  X     ***   ***   X     X     X     X
II............................  X     X     X     X     X     X     X
III...........................  *     X     X     X     X     X     X
------------------------------------------------------------------------
X--Required for all modes.
*--Required for all modes, except for a material with a flash point at
  or above 38  deg.C (100  deg.F) transported by rail or highway.
**--Reserved
***--Impossible as subsidiary hazard.

    (b) Display of hazard class on labels. The appropriate hazard class 
or division number must be displayed in the lower corner of a primary 
hazard label and a subsidiary hazard label. A subsidiary label meeting 
the specifications of this section which were in effect on September 30, 
2001, such as, a label without the hazard class or division number 
displayed in the lower corner of the label) may continue to be used as a 
subsidiary label in domestic transportation by rail or highway until 
October 1, 2005, provided the color tolerances are maintained and are in 
accordance with the display requirements in this subchapter.
    (c) Cargo Aircraft Only label. Each person who offers for 
transportation or transports by aircraft a package containing a 
hazardous material which is authorized on cargo aircraft only shall 
label the package with a CARGO AIRCRAFT ONLY label specified in 
Sec. 172.448 of this subpart.
    (d) Class 7 (Radioactive) Materials. Except as otherwise provided in 
this paragraph, each package containing a Class 7 material that also 
meets the definition of one or more additional hazard classes must be 
labeled as a Class 7 material as required by Sec. 172.403 of this 
subpart and for each additional hazard. A subsidiary hazard label is not 
required on a package containing a Class 7 material that conforms to 
criteria specified in Sec. 173.4 of this subchapter, except 
Sec. 173.4(a)(1)(iv) of this subchapter.
    (e) Class 1 (explosive) Materials. In addition to the label 
specified in column 6 of the Sec. 172.101 table, each package of Class 1 
material that also meets the definition for:
    (1) Division 6.1, Packing Groups I or II, shall be labeled POISON or 
POISON INHALATION HAZARD, as appropriate.
    (2) Class 7, shall be labeled in accordance with Sec. 172.403 of 
this subpart.
    (f) Division 2.2 materials. In addition to the label specified in 
column 6 of the Sec. 172.101 table, each package of Division 2.2 
material that also meets the definition for an oxidizing gas (see 
Sec. 171.8 of this subchapter) must be labeled OXIDIZER.
    (g) Division 2.3 materials. In addition to the label specified in 
column 6 of the Sec. 172.101 table, each package of Division 2.3 
material that also meets the definition for:
    (1) Division 2.1, must be labeled Flammable Gas;
    (2) Division 5.1, must be labeled Oxidizer; and

[[Page 363]]

    (3) Class 8, must be labeled Corrosive.

[Amdt. 172-123, 55 FR 52594, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66255, 
Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 172-139, 59 FR 67490, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 172-140, 
60 FR 26805, May 18, 1995; Amdt. 172-149, 61 FR 27173, May 30, 1996; 62 
FR 39405, July 22, 1997; 66 FR 33425, June 21, 2001]



Sec. 172.403  Class 7 (radioactive) material.

    (a) Unless excepted from labeling by Secs. 173.421 through 173.427 
of this subchapter, each package of radioactive material must be labeled 
as provided in this section.
    (b) The proper label to affix to a package of Class 7 (radioactive) 
material is based on the radiation level at the surface of the package 
and the transport index. The proper category of label must be determined 
in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section. The label to be 
applied must be the highest category required for any of the two 
determining conditions for the package. RADIOACTIVE WHITE-I is the 
lowest category and RADIOACTIVE YELLOW-III is the highest. For example, 
a package with a transport index of 0.8 and a maximum surface radiation 
level of 0.6 millisievert (60 millirems) per hour must bear a 
RADIOACTIVE YELLOW-III label.
    (c) Category of label to be applied to Class 7 (radioactive) 
materials packages:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                 Maximum radiation
                                 level at any point
        Transport index           on the external      Label category1
                                      surface
------------------------------------------------------------------------
02............................  Less than or equal   WHITE-I.
                                 to 0.005 mSv/h
                                 (0.5 mrem/h).
More than 0 but not more than   Greater than 0.005   YELLOW-II.
 1.                              mSv/h (0.5 mrem/h)
                                 but less than or
                                 equal to 0.5 mSv/h
                                 (50 mrem/h).
More than 1 but not more than   Greater than 0.5     YELLOW-III.
 10.                             mSv/h (50 mrem/h)
                                 but less than or
                                 equal to 2 mSv/h
                                 (200 mrem/h).
More than 10..................  Greater than 2 mSv/  YELLOW-III (Must be
                                 h (200 mrem/h) but   shipped under
                                 less than or equal   exclusive use
                                 to 10 mSv/h (1,000   provisions; see
                                 mrem/h).             173.441(b) of this
                                                      subchapter).
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Any package containing a ``highway route controlled quantity'' (Sec.
  173.403 of this subchapter) must be labelled as RADIOACTIVE YELLOW-
  III.
2 If the measured TI is not greater than 0.05, the value may be
  considered to be zero.

    (d) EMPTY label. See Sec. 173.428(d) of this subchapter for EMPTY 
labeling requirements.
    (e) [Reserved]
    (f) Each package required by this section to be labeled with a 
RADIOACTIVE label must have two of these labels, affixed to opposite 
sides of the package. (See Sec. 172.406(e)(3) for freight container 
label requirements).
    (g) The following applicable items of information must be entered in 
the blank spaces on the RADIOACTIVE label by legible printing (manual or 
mechanical), using a durable weather resistant means of marking:
    (1) Contents. The name of the radionuclides as taken from the 
listing of radionuclides in Sec. 173.435 of this subchapter (symbols 
which conform to established radiation protection terminology are 
authorized, i.e., \99\Mo, \60\Co, etc.). For mixtures of radionuclides, 
with consideration of space available on the label, the radionuclides 
that must be shown must be determined in accordance with Sec. 173.433(f) 
of this subchapter.
    (2) Activity. Activity units must be expressed in appropriate SI 
units (e.g., Becquerels (Bq), Terabecquerels (Tbq), etc.) or in both 
appropriate SI units and appropriate customary units (Curies (Ci), 
MilliCuries (mCi) microCuries (uCi), etc.). Abbreviations are 
authorized. Except for plutonium-238, plutonium-239, and plutonium-241, 
the weight in grams or kilograms of fissile radionuclides may be 
inserted instead of activity units. For plutonium-238, plutonium-239, 
and plutonium-241, the weight in grams or kilograms of fissile 
radionuclides may be inserted in addition to the activity units.

[[Page 364]]

    (3) Transport index. (See Sec. 173.403 of this subchapter.)

[Amdt. 172-29, 41 FR 15996, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 172-29A, 
41 FR 40679, Sept. 20, 1976; Amdt. 172-78, 48 FR 10226, Mar. 10, 1983; 
48 FR 13431, Mar. 31, 1983; 48 FR 31217, July 7, 1983; Amdt. 172-85, 48 
FR 50459, Nov. 1, 1983; Amdt. 172-114, 53 FR 38274, Sept. 29, 1988; 
Amdt. 172-123, 55 FR 52594, Dec. 21, 1990; Amdt. 172-143, 60 FR 50305, 
Sept. 28, 1995; Amdt. 172-143, 61 FR 20750, May 8, 1996; 65 FR 58626, 
Sept. 29, 2000; 65 FR 60383, Oct. 11, 2000]



Sec. 172.404  Labels for mixed and consolidated packaging.

    (a) Mixed packaging. When hazardous materials having different 
hazard classes are packed within the same packaging, or within the same 
outside container or overpack as described in Sec. 173.25 and authorized 
by Sec. 173.21 of this subchapter, the packaging, outside container or 
overpack must be labeled as required for each class of hazardous 
material contained therein.
    (b) Consolidated packaging. When two or more packages containing 
compatible hazardous material (see Sec. 173.21 of this subchapter) are 
placed within the same outside container or overpack, the outside 
container or overpack must be labeled as required for each class of 
hazardous material contained therein.



Sec. 172.405  Authorized label modifications.

    (a) For Classes 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 8, text indicating a hazard 
(for example FLAMMABLE LIQUID) is not required on a primary or 
subsidiary label.
    (b) For a package containing Oxygen, compressed, or Oxygen, 
refrigerated liquid, the OXIDIZER label specified in Sec. 172.426 of 
this subpart, modified to display the word ``OXYGEN'' instead of 
``OXIDIZER'', and the class number ``2'' instead of ``5.1'', may be used 
in place of the NON-FLAMMABLE GAS and OXIDIZER labels. Notwithstanding 
the provisions of paragraph (a) of this section, the word ``OXYGEN'' 
must appear on the label.
    (c) For a package containing a Division 6.1, Packing Group III 
material, the POISON label specified in Sec. 172.430 may be modified to 
display the text ``PG III'' instead of ``POISON'' or ``TOXIC'' below the 
mid line of the label. Also see Sec. 172.313(d).

[Amdt. 172-123, 55 FR 52594, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66255, 
Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45458, Oct. 1, 1992; 64 FR 10776, Mar. 5, 1999; 66 
FR 33425, June 21, 2001]



Sec. 172.406  Placement of labels.

    (a) General. (1) Except as provided in paragraphs (b) and (e) of 
this section, each label required by this subpart must--
    (i) Be printed on or affixed to a surface (other than the bottom) of 
the package or containment device containing the hazardous material; and
    (ii) Be located on the same surface of the package and near the 
proper shipping name marking, if the package dimensions are adequate.
    (2) Except as provided in paragraph (e) of this section, duplicate 
labeling is not required on a package or containment device (such as to 
satisfy redundant labeling requirements).
    (b) Exceptions. A label may be printed on or placed on a securely 
affixed tag, or may be affixed by other suitable means to:
    (1) A package that contains no radioactive material and which has 
dimensions less than those of the required label;
    (2) A cylinder; and
    (3) A package which has such an irregular surface that a label 
cannot be satisfactorily affixed.
    (c) Placement of multiple labels. When primary and subsidiary hazard 
labels are required, they must be displayed next to each other. 
Placement conforms to this requirement if labels are within 150 mm (6 
inches) of one another.
    (d) Contrast with background. Each label must be printed on or 
affixed to a background of contrasting color, or must have a dotted or 
solid line outer border.
    (e) Duplicate labeling. Generally, only one of each different 
required label must be displayed on a package. However, duplicate labels 
must be displayed on at least two sides or two ends (other than the 
bottom) of--
    (1) Each package or overpack having a volume of 1.8 m \3\ (64 cubic 
feet) or more;

[[Page 365]]

    (2) Each non-bulk package containing a radioactive material;
    (3) Each DOT 106 or 110 multi-unit tank car tank. Labels must be 
displayed on each end;
    (4) Each portable tank of less than 3,785 L (1000 gallons) capacity; 
and
    (5) Each freight container or aircraft unit load device having a 
volume of 1.8 m \3\ (64 cubic feet) or more, but less than 18 m \3\ (640 
cubic feet). One of each required label must be displayed on or near the 
closure.
    (f) Visibility. A label must be clearly visible and may not be 
obscured by markings or attachments.

[Amdt. 172-123, 55 FR 52594, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66255, 
Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 172-130, 58 FR 51531, Oct. 1, 1993]



Sec. 172.407  Label specifications.

    (a) Durability. Each label, whether printed on or affixed to a 
package, must be durable and weather resistant. A label on a package 
must be able to withstand, without deterioration or a substantial change 
in color, a 30-day exposure to conditions incident to transportation 
that reasonably could be expected to be encountered by the labeled 
package.
    (b) Design. (1) Except for size and color, the printing, inner 
border, and symbol on each label must be as shown in Secs. 172.411 
through 172.448 of this subpart, as appropriate.
    (2) The dotted line border shown on each label is not part of the 
label specification, except when used as an alternative for the solid 
line outer border to meet the requirements of Sec. 172.406(d) of this 
subpart.
    (c) Size. (1) Each diamond (square-on-point) label prescribed in 
this subpart must be at least 100 mm (3.9 inches) on each side with each 
side having a solid line inner border 5.0 to 6.3 mm (0.2 to 0.25 inches) 
from the edge.
    (2) The CARGO AIRCRAFT ONLY label must be a rectangle measuring at 
least 110 mm (4.3 inches) in height by 120 mm (4.7 inches) in width. The 
word ``DANGER'' must be shown in letters measuring at least 12.7 mm (0.5 
inches) in height.
    (3) Except as otherwise provided in this subpart, the hazard class 
number, or division number, as appropriate, must be at least 6.3 mm 
(0.25 inches) and not greater than 12.7 mm (0.5 inches).
    (4) When text indicating a hazard is displayed on a label, the label 
name must be shown in letters measuring at least 7.6 mm (0.3 inches) in 
height. For SPONTANEOUSLY COMBUSTIBLE or DANGEROUS WHEN WET labels, the 
words ``Spontaneously'' and ``When Wet'' must be shown in letters 
measuring at least 5.1 mm (0.2 inches) in height.
    (5) The symbol on each label must be proportionate in size to that 
shown in the appropriate section of this subpart.
    (d) Color. (1) The background color on each label must be as 
prescribed in Secs. 172.411 through 172.448 of this subpart, as 
appropriate.
    (2) The symbol, text, numbers, and border must be shown in black on 
a label except that--
    (i) White may be used on a label with a one color background of 
green, red or blue; and
    (ii) White must be used for the text and class number for the 
CORROSIVE label.
    (3) Black and any color on a label must be able to withstand, 
without substantial change, a 72-hour fadeometer test (for a description 
of equipment designed for this purpose, see ASTM G 23-69 (1975) or ASTM 
G 26-70).
    (4) (i) A color on a label, upon visual examination, must fall 
within the color tolerances--
    (A) Displayed on color charts conforming to the technical 
specifications for charts set forth in table 1 or 2 in appendix A to 
this part; or
    (B) For labels printed on packaging surfaces, specified in table 3 
in appendix A to this part.
    (ii) Color charts conforming to appendix A to this part are on 
display in Office of Hazardous Materials Safety, Office of Hazardous 
Materials Standards, Room 8422, Nassif Building, 400 Seventh Street, 
SW., Washington DC 20590-0001.
    (5) The specified label color must extend to the edge of the label 
in the area designated on each label except the CORROSIVE, RADIOACTIVE 
YELLOW-II AND RADIOACTIVE YELLOW-III labels on which the color must 
extend only to the inner border.

[[Page 366]]

    (e) Form identification. A label may contain form identification 
information, including the name of its maker, provided that information 
is printed outside the solid line inner border in no larger than 10-
point type.
    (f) Exceptions. Except for materials poisonous by inhalation (See 
Sec. 171.8 of this subchapter), a label conforming to specifications in 
the UN Recommendations may be used in place of a corresponding label 
that conforms to the requirements of this subpart.
    (g) Trefoil symbol. The trefoil symbol on the RADIOACTIVE WHITE-I, 
RADIOACTIVE YELLOW-II, and RADIOACTIVE YELLOW-III labels must meet the 
appropriate specifications in appendix B of this part.

[Amdt. 172-123, 55 FR 52595, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66256, 
Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 172-143, 60 FR 50305, Sept. 28, 1995; 64 FR 10776, 
Mar. 5, 1999; 66 FR 8647, Feb. 1, 2001; 66 FR 44255, Aug. 22, 2001; 67 
FR 61013, Sept. 27, 2002]



Sec. 172.411  EXPLOSIVE 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5 and 1.6 labels.

    (a) Except for size and color, the EXPLOSIVE 1.1, EXPLOSIVE 1.2 and 
EXPLOSIVE 1.3 labels must be as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.015

    (b) In addition to complying with Sec. 172.407, the background color 
on the EXPLOSIVE 1.1, EXPLOSIVE 1.2 and EXPLOSIVE 1.3 labels must be 
orange. The ``**'' shall be replaced with the appropriate division 
number and compatibility group. The compatibility group letter must be 
the same size as the division number and must be shown as a capitalized 
Roman letter.
    (c) Except for size and color, the EXPLOSIVE 1.4, EXPLOSIVE 1.5 and 
EXPLOSIVE 1.6 labels must be as follows:

                             EXPLOSIVE 1.4:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.016

                             EXPLOSIVE 1.5:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.017


[[Page 367]]



                             EXPLOSIVE 1.6:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.018

    (d) In addition to complying with Sec. 172.407, the background color 
on the EXPLOSIVE 1.4, EXPLOSIVE 1.5, EXPLOSIVE 1.6 and EXPLOSIVE 
subsidiary label must be orange. The ``*'' shall be replaced with the 
appropriate compatibility group. The compatibility group letter must be 
shown as a capitalized Roman letter. Division numerals must measure at 
least 30 mm (1.2 inches) in height and at least 5 mm (0.2 inches) in 
width.

[Amdt. 172-123, 56 FR 66256, Dec. 20, 1991, as amended by Amdt. 172-139, 
59 FR 67490, Dec. 29, 1994; 66 FR 33425, June 21, 2001]



Sec. 172.415  NON-FLAMMABLE GAS label.

    (a) Except for size and color, the NON-FLAMMABLE GAS label must be 
as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.020

    (b) In addition to complying with Sec. 172.407, the background color 
on the NON-FLAMMABLE GAS label must be green.

[Amdt. 172-123, 56 66256, Dec. 20, 1991]



Sec. 172.416  POISON GAS label.

    (a) Except for size and color, the POISON GAS label must be as 
follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR22JY97.022

    (b) In addition to complying with Sec. 172.407, the background on 
the POISON GAS label and the symbol must be white. The background of the 
upper diamond must be black and the lower point of the upper diamond 
must be 14 mm (0.54 inches) above the horizontal center line.

[62 FR 39405, July 22, 1997]

[[Page 368]]



Sec. 172.417  FLAMMABLE GAS label.

    (a) Except for size and color, the FLAMMABLE GAS label must be as 
follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.022

    (b) In addition to complying with Sec. 172.407, the background color 
on the FLAMMABLE GAS label must be red.

[Amdt. 172-123, 56 FR 66257, Dec. 20, 1991]



Sec. 172.419  FLAMMABLE LIQUID label.

    (a) Except for size and color the FLAMMABLE LIQUID label must be as 
follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.023

    (b) In addition to complying with Sec. 172.407, the background color 
on the FLAMMABLE LIQUID label must be red.

[Amdt. 172-123, 56 FR 66257, Dec. 20, 1991]



Sec. 172.420  FLAMMABLE SOLID label.

    (a) Except for size and color, the FLAMMABLE SOLID label must be as 
follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.024

    (b) In addition to complying with Sec. 172.407, the background on 
the FLAMMABLE SOLID label must be white with vertical red stripes 
equally spaced on each side of a red stripe placed in the center of the 
label. The red vertical stripes must be spaced so that, visually, they 
appear equal in width to the white spaces between them. The symbol 
(flame) and text (when used) must be overprinted. The text ``FLAMMABLE 
SOLID'' may be placed in a white rectangle.

[Amdt. 172-123, 56 FR 66257, Dec. 20, 1991]



Sec. 172.422  SPONTANEOUSLY COMBUSTIBLE label.

    (a) Except for size and color, the SPONTANEOUSLY COMBUSTIBLE label 
must be as follows:

[[Page 369]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.025

    (b) In addition to complying with Sec. 172.407, the background color 
on the lower half of the SPONTANEOUSLY COMBUSTIBLE label must be red and 
the upper half must be white.

[Amdt. 172-123, 56 FR 66257, Dec. 20, 1991, as amended at 57 FR 45458, 
Oct. 1, 1992]



Sec. 172.423  DANGEROUS WHEN WET label.

    (a) Except for size and color, the DANGEROUS WHEN WET label must be 
as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.026

    (b) In addition to complying with Sec. 172.407, the background color 
on the DANGEROUS WHEN WET label must be blue.

[Amdt. 172-123, 56 FR 66257, Dec. 20, 1991]



Sec. 172.426  OXIDIZER label.

    (a) Except for size and color, the OXIDIZER label must be as 
follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.027

    (b) In addition to complying with Sec. 172.407, the background color 
on the OXIDIZER label must be yellow.

[Amdt. 172-123, 56 FR 66257, Dec. 20, 1991]



Sec. 172.427  ORGANIC PEROXIDE label.

    (a) Except for size and color, the ORGANIC PEROXIDE label must be as 
follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.028

    (b) In addition to complying with Sec. 172.407, the background color 
on the ORGANIC PEROXIDE label must be yellow.

[Amdt. 172-123, 56 FR 66258, Dec. 20, 1991]

[[Page 370]]



Sec. 172.429  POISON INHALATION HAZARD label.

    (a) Except for size and color, the POISON INHALATION HAZARD label 
must be as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR22JY97.023

    (b) In addition to complying with Sec. 172.407, the background on 
the POISON INHALATION HAZARD label and the symbol must be white. The 
background of the upper diamond must be black and the lower point of the 
upper diamond must be 14 mm (0.54 inches) above the horizontal center 
line.

[62 FR 39406, July 22, 1997]



Sec. 172.430  POISON label.

    (a) Except for size and color, the POISON label must be as follows:
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.029
    
    (b) In addition to complying with Sec. 172.407, the background on 
the POISON label must be white. The word ``TOXIC'' may be used in lieu 
of the word ``POISON''.

[Amdt. 172-123, 56 FR 66258, Dec. 20, 1991, as amended by Amdt. 172-139, 
59 FR 67490, Dec. 29, 1994]



Sec. 172.431  [Reserved]



Sec. 172.432  INFECTIOUS SUBSTANCE label.

    (a) Except for size and color, the INFECTIOUS SUBSTANCE label must 
be as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.031

    (b) In addition to complying with Sec. 172.407, the background on 
the INFECTIOUS SUBSTANCE label must be white.

[Amdt. 172-123, 56 FR 66258, Dec. 20, 1991]

    Effective Date Note: At 67 FR 53136, Aug. 14, 2002, Sec. 172.432 was 
amended by revising the illustration in paragraph (a), effective Oct. 1, 
2002. At 67 FR 54967, Aug. 27, 2002, the effective date was corrected to 
Feb. 14, 2003. For the convenience of the user, the revised illustration 
is set forth as follows:

Sec. 172.432  INFECTIOUS SUBSTANCE label.

    (a) * * *

[[Page 371]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR14AU02.006

                                * * * * *



Sec. 172.436  RADIOACTIVE WHITE-I label.

    (a) Except for size and color, the RADIOACTIVE WHITE-I label must be 
as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.032

    (b) In addition to complying with Sec. 172.407, the background on 
the RADIOACTIVE WHITE-I label must be white.

[[Page 372]]

The printing and symbol must be black, except for the ``I'' which must 
be red.

[Amdt. 172-123, 56 FR 66259, Dec. 20, 1991]



Sec. 172.438  RADIOACTIVE YELLOW-II label.

    (a) Except for size and color, the RADIOACTIVE YELLOW-II must be as 
follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.033

    (b) In addition to complying with Sec. 172.407, the background color 
on the RADIOACTIVE YELLOW-II label must be yellow in the top half and 
white in the lower half. The printing and symbol must be black, except 
for the ``II'' which must be red.

[Amdt. 172-123, 56 FR 66259, Dec. 20, 1991]



Sec. 172.440  RADIOACTIVE YELLOW-III label.

    (a) Except for size and color, the RADIOACTIVE YELLOW-III label must 
be as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.034

    (b) In addition to complying with Sec. 172.407, the background color 
on the RADIOACTIVE YELLOW-III label must be yellow in the top half and 
white in the lower half. The printing and symbol must be black, except 
for the ``III'' which must be red.

[Amdt. 172-123, 56 FR 66259, Dec. 20, 1991]



Sec. 172.442  CORROSIVE label.

    (a) Except for size and color, the CORROSIVE label must be as 
follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.035

    (b) In addition to complying with Sec. 172.407, the background on 
the CORROSIVE label must be white in the top half and black in the lower 
half.

[Amdt. 172-123, 56 FR 66259, Dec. 20, 1991]

[[Page 373]]



Sec. 172.444  [Reserved]



Sec. 172.446  CLASS 9 label.

    (a) Except for size and color, the ``CLASS 9'' (miscellaneous 
hazardous materials) label must be as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.036

    (b) In addition to complying with Sec. 172.407, the background on 
the CLASS 9 label must be white with seven black vertical stripes on the 
top half. The black vertical stripes must be spaced, so that, visually, 
they appear equal in width to the six white spaces between them. The 
lower half of the label must be white with the class number ``9'' 
underlined and centered at the bottom.

[Amdt. 172-123, 56 FR 66259, Dec. 20, 1991]



Sec. 172.448  CARGO AIRCRAFT ONLY label.

    (a) Except for size and color, the CARGO AIRCRAFT ONLY label must be 
as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.037

    (b) The CARGO AIRCRAFT ONLY label must be black on an orange 
background.

[Amdt. 172-123, 56 FR 66259, Dec. 20, 1991]



Sec. 172.450  EMPTY label.

    (a) Each EMPTY label, except for size, must be as follows:
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.038
    
    (1) Each side must be at least 6 inches (152 mm.) with each letter 
at least 1 inch (25.4 mm.) in height.
    (2) The label must be white with black printing.
    (b) [Reserved]



                          Subpart F--Placarding



Sec. 172.500  Applicability of placarding requirements.

    (a) Each person who offers for transportation or transports any 
hazardous

[[Page 374]]

material subject to this subchapter shall comply with the applicable 
placarding requirements of this subpart.
    (b) This subpart does not apply to--
    (1) Infectious substances;
    (2) Hazardous materials classed as ORM-D;
    (3) Hazardous materials authorized by this subchapter to be offered 
for transportation as Limited Quantities when identified as such on 
shipping papers in accordance with Sec. 172.203(b);
    (4) Hazardous materials prepared in accordance with Sec. 173.13 of 
this subchapter;
    (5) Hazardous materials which are packaged as small quantities under 
the provisions of Sec. 173.4 of this subchapter; and
    (6) Combustible liquids in non-bulk packagings.

[Amdt. 172-123, 55 FR 52599, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 172-149, 
61 FR 27173, May 30, 1996]



Sec. 172.502  Prohibited and permissive placarding.

    (a) Prohibited placarding. Except as provided in paragraph (b) of 
this section, no person may affix or display on a packaging, freight 
container, unit load device, motor vehicle or rail car--
    (1) Any placard described in this subpart unless--
    (i) The material being offered or transported is a hazardous 
material;
    (ii) The placard represents a hazard of the hazardous material being 
offered or transported; and
    (iii) Any placarding conforms to the requirements of this subpart.
    (2) Any sign, advertisement, slogan (such as ``Drive Safely''), or 
device that, by its color, design, shape or content, could be confused 
with any placard prescribed in this subpart.
    (b) Exceptions. (1) The restrictions in paragraph (a) of this 
section do not apply to a bulk packaging, freight container, unit load 
device, transport vehicle or rail car which is placarded in conformance 
with TDG Regulations, the IMDG Code or the UN Recommendations (see 
Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).
    (2) The restrictions of paragraph (a) of this section do not apply 
to the display of an identification number on a white square-on-point 
configuration in accordance with Sec. 172.336(b) of this part.
    (3) The restrictions in paragraph (a)(2) of this section do not 
apply until October 1, 2001 to a safety sign or safety slogan (e.g., 
``Drive Safely'' or ``Drive Carefully''), which was permanently marked 
on a transport vehicle, bulk packaging, or freight container on or 
before August 21, 1997.
    (c) Permissive placarding. Placards may be displayed for a hazardous 
material, even when not required, if the placarding otherwise conforms 
to the requirements of this subpart.

[Amdt. 172-123, 55 FR 52599, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66259, 
Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 172-151, 62 FR 1230, Jan. 8, 1997; 62 FR 39389 and 
39407, July 22, 1997; 66 FR 8647, Feb. 1, 2001; 66 FR 33426, June 21, 
2001]

    Effective Date Note: At 67 FR 53137, Aug. 14, 2002, Sec. 172.502 was 
amended by revising paragraph (b)(2), effective Oct. 1, 2002. At 67 FR 
54967, the effective date was corrected to Feb. 14, 2003. For the 
convenience of the user, the revised text is set forth as follows:

Sec. 172.502  Prohibited and permissive placarding.

                                * * * * *

    (b) * * *
    (2) The restrictions of paragraph (a) of this section do not apply 
to the display of a BIOHHAZARD marking, a ``HOT'' marking, or an 
identification number on a white square-on-point configuration in 
accordance with Secs. 172.323(c), 172.325(c), or 172.336(b) of this 
part, respectively.

                                * * * * *



Sec. 172.503  Identification number display on placards.

    For procedures and limitations pertaining to the display of 
identification numbers on placards, see Sec. 172.334.

[Amdt. 172-58, 45 FR 34701, May 22, 1980]



Sec. 172.504  General placarding requirements.

    (a) General. Except as otherwise provided in this subchapter, each 
bulk packaging, freight container, unit load device, transport vehicle 
or rail car containing any quantity of a hazardous material must be 
placarded on each side and each end with the type of placards specified 
in tables 1 and 2 of this section and in accordance with other

[[Page 375]]

placarding requirements of this subpart, including the specifications 
for the placards named in the tables and described in detail in 
Secs. 172.519 through 172.560.
    (b) DANGEROUS placard. A freight container, unit load device, 
transport vehicle, or rail car which contains non-bulk packages with two 
or more categories of hazardous materials that require different 
placards specified in table 2 of paragraph (e) of this section may be 
placarded with a DANGEROUS placard instead of the separate placarding 
specified for each of the materials in table 2 of paragraph (e) of this 
section. However, when 1,000 kg (2,205 pounds) aggregate gross weight or 
more of one category of material is loaded therein at one loading 
facility on a freight container, unit load device, transport vehicle, or 
rail car, the placard specified in table 2 of paragraph (e) of this 
section for that category must be applied.
    (c) Exception for less than 454 kg (1,001 pounds). Except for bulk 
packagings and hazardous materials subject to Sec. 172.505, when 
hazardous materials covered by table 2 of this section are transported 
by highway or rail, placards are not required on--
    (1) A transport vehicle or freight container which contains less 
than 454 kg (1001 pounds) aggregate gross weight of hazardous materials 
covered by table 2 of paragraph (e) of this section; or
    (2) A rail car loaded with transport vehicles or freight containers, 
none of which is required to be placarded.

The exceptions provided in paragraph (c) of this section do not prohibit 
the display of placards in the manner prescribed in this subpart, if not 
otherwise prohibited (see Sec. 172.502), on transport vehicles or 
freight containers which are not required to be placarded.
    (d) Exception for empty non-bulk packages. A non-bulk packaging that 
contains only the residue of a hazardous material covered by table 2 of 
paragraph (e) of this section need not be included in determining 
placarding requirements.
    (e) Placarding tables. Placards are specified for hazardous 
materials in accordance with the following tables:

                                 Table 1
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                               Placard
   Category of material (Hazard                                 design
   class or division number and          Placard name          section
    additional description, as                                reference
           appropriate)                                        (Sec.  )
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.1..............................  EXPLOSIVES 1.1..........      172.522
1.2..............................  EXPLOSIVES 1.2..........      172.522
1.3..............................  EXPLOSIVES 1.3..........      172.522
2.3..............................  POISON GAS..............      172.540
4.3..............................  DANGEROUS WHEN WET......      172.548
5.2 (Organic peroxide, Type B,     ORGANIC PEROXIDE........      172.552
 liquid or solid, temperature
 controlled).
6.1 (inhalation hazard, Zone A or  POISON INHALATION HAZARD      172.555
 B).
7 (Radioactive Yellow III label    RADIOACTIVE \1\.........      172.556
 only).
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ RADIOACTIVE placard also required for exclusive use shipments of low
  specific activity material and surface contaminated objects
  transported in accordance with Sec.  173.427(a) of this subchapter.


                                 Table 2
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                               Placard
   Category of material (Hazard                                 design
   class or division number and          Placard name          section
    additional description, as                                reference
           appropriate)                                        (Sec.  )
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.4..............................  EXPLOSIVES 1.4..........      172.523
1.5..............................  EXPLOSIVES 1.5..........      172.524
1.6..............................  EXPLOSIVES 1.6..........      172.525
2.1..............................  FLAMMABLE GAS...........      172.532
2.2..............................  NON-FLAMMABLE GAS.......      172.528
3................................  FLAMMABLE...............      172.542
Combustible liquid...............  COMBUSTIBLE.............      172.544
4.1..............................  FLAMMABLE SOLID.........      172.546
4.2..............................  SPONTANEOUSLY                 172.547
                                    COMBUSTIBLE.
5.1..............................  OXIDIZER................      172.550
5.2 (Other than organic peroxide,  ORGANIC PEROXIDE........      172.552
 Type B, liquid or solid,
 temperature controlled).

[[Page 376]]

 
6.1 (other than inhalation         POISON..................      172.554
 hazard, Zone A or B).
6.2..............................  (None)..................  ...........
8................................  CORROSIVE...............      172.558
9................................  Class 9 (see Sec.             172.560
                                    172.504(f)(9)).
ORM-D............................  (None)..................  ...........
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (f) Additional placarding exceptions. (1) When more than one 
division placard is required for Class 1 materials on a transport 
vehicle, rail car, freight container or unit load device, only the 
placard representing the lowest division number must be displayed.
    (2) A FLAMMABLE placard may be used in place of a COMBUSTIBLE 
placard on--
    (i) A cargo tank or portable tank.
    (ii) A compartmented tank car which contains both flammable and 
combustible liquids.
    (3) A NON-FLAMMABLE GAS placard is not required on a transport 
vehicle which contains non-flammable gas if the transport vehicle also 
contains flammable gas or oxygen and it is placarded with FLAMMABLE GAS 
or OXYGEN placards, as required.
    (4) OXIDIZER placards are not required for Division 5.1 materials on 
freight containers, unit load devices, transport vehicles or rail cars 
which also contain Division 1.1 or 1.2 materials and which are placarded 
with EXPLOSIVES 1.1 or 1.2 placards, as required.
    (5) For transportation by transport vehicle or rail car only, an 
OXIDIZER placard is not required for Division 5.1 materials on a 
transport vehicle, rail car or freight container which also contains 
Division 1.5 explosives and is placarded with EXPLOSIVES 1.5 placards, 
as required.
    (6) The EXPLOSIVE 1.4 placard is not required for those Division 1.4 
Compatibility Group S (1.4S) materials that are not required to be 
labeled 1.4S.
    (7) For domestic transportation of oxygen, compressed or oxygen, 
refrigerated liquid, the OXYGEN placard in Sec. 172.530 of this subpart 
may be used in place of a NON-FLAMMABLE GAS placard.
    (8) For domestic transportation, a POISON INHALATION HAZARD placard 
is not required on a transport vehicle or freight container that is 
already placarded with the POISON GAS placard.
    (9) For domestic transportation, a Class 9 placard is not required. 
A bulk packaging containing a Class 9 material must be marked with the 
appropriate identification number displayed on a Class 9 placard, an 
orange panel or a white-square-on-point display configuration as 
required by subpart D of this part.
    (10) For Division 6.1, PG III materials, a POISON placard may be 
modified to display the text ``PG III'' below the mid line of the 
placard.
    (11) For domestic transportation, a POISON placard is not required 
on a transport vehicle or freight container required to display a POISON 
INHALATION HAZARD or POISON GAS placard.
    (g) For shipments of Class 1 (explosive) materials by aircraft or 
vessel, the applicable compatibility group letter must be displayed on 
the placards required by this section. When more than one compatibility 
group placard is required for Class 1 materials, only one placard is 
required to be displayed as follows:
    (1) Explosive articles of compatibility groups C, D or E may be 
placarded displaying compatibility group E.
    (2) Explosive articles of compatibility groups C, D, E or N may be 
placarded displaying compatibility group D.
    (3) Explosive substances of compatibility groups C and D may be 
placarded displaying compatibility group D.
    (4) Explosive articles of compatibility groups C, D, E or G, except 
for

[[Page 377]]

fireworks, may be placarded displaying compatibility group E.

[Amdt. 172-123, 55 FR 52600, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66260, 
Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45460, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 172-123, 57 FR 59310, 
Dec. 15, 1992; Amdt. 172-143, 60 FR 50305, Sept. 28, 1995; Amdt. 172-
150, 61 FR 50624, Sept. 26, 1996; Amdt. 172-151, 62 FR 1230, Jan. 8, 
1997; 62 FR 39398 and 39407, July 22, 1997; 63 FR 16076, Apr. 1, 1998; 
63 FR 52849, Oct. 1, 1998; 64 FR 10776, Mar. 5, 1999; 65 FR 50460, Aug. 
18, 2000; 66 FR 33426, June 21, 2001]



Sec. 172.505  Placarding for subsidiary hazards.

    (a) Each transport vehicle, freight container, portable tank, unit 
load device, or rail car that contains a poisonous material subject to 
the ``Poison Inhalation Hazard'' shipping description of 
Sec. 172.203(m)(2) must be placarded with a POISON INHALATION HAZARD or 
POISON GAS placard, as appropriate, on each side and each end, in 
addition to any other placard required for that material in 
Sec. 172.504. Duplication of the POISON INHALATION HAZARD or POISON GAS 
placard is not required.
    (b) In addition to the RADIOACTIVE placard which may be required by 
Sec. 172.504(e) of this subpart, each transport vehicle, portable tank 
or freight container that contains 454 kg (1001 pounds) or more gross 
weight of fissile or low specific activity uranium hexafluoride shall be 
placarded with a CORROSIVE placard on each side and each end.
    (c) Each transport vehicle, portable tank, freight container or unit 
load device that contains a material which has a subsidiary hazard of 
being dangerous when wet, as defined in Sec. 173.124 of this subchapter, 
shall be placarded with DANGEROUS WHEN WET placards, on each side and 
each end, in addition to the placards required by Sec. 172.504.
    (d) Hazardous materials that possess secondary hazards may exhibit 
subsidiary placards that correspond to the placards described in this 
part, even when not required by this part (see also Sec. 172.519(b) (4) 
of this subpart).

[Amdt. 172-123, 55 FR 52601, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66260, 
Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45460, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 172-127, 59 FR 49133, 
Sept. 26, 1994; Amdt. 172-151, 62 FR 1231, Jan. 8, 1997; 62 FR 39398, 
July 22, 1997; 65 FR 58626, Sept. 29, 2000]



Sec. 172.506  Providing and affixing placards: Highway.

    (a) Each person offering a motor carrier a hazardous material for 
transportation by highway shall provide to the motor carrier the 
required placards for the material being offered prior to or at the same 
time the material is offered for transportation, unless the carrier's 
motor vehicle is already placarded for the material as required by this 
subpart.
    (1) No motor carrier may transport a hazardous material in a motor 
vehicle, unless the placards required for the hazardous material are 
affixed thereto as required by this subpart.
    (2) [Reserved]
    (b) [Reserved]

[Amdt. 172-29, 41 FR 15996, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 172-29A, 
41 FR 40679, Sept. 20, 1976]



Sec. 172.507  Special placarding provisions: Highway.

    (a) Each motor vehicle used to transport a package of highway route 
controlled quantity Class 7 (radioactive) materials (see Sec. 173.403 of 
this subchapter) must have the required RADIOACTIVE warning placard 
placed on a square background as described in Sec. 172.527.
    (b) A nurse tank, meeting the provisions of Sec. 173.315(m) of this 
subchapter, is not required to be placarded on an end containing valves, 
fittings, regulators or gauges when those appurtenances prevent the 
markings and placard from being properly placed and visible.

[Amdt. 172-103, 51 FR 5971, Feb. 18, 1986, as amended by Amdt. 172-143, 
60 FR 50305, Sept. 28, 1995]

[[Page 378]]



Sec. 172.508  Placarding and affixing placards: Rail.

    (a) Each person offering a hazardous material for transportation by 
rail shall affix to the rail car containing the material, the placards 
specified by this subpart. Placards displayed on motor vehicles, 
transport containers, or portable tanks may be used to satisfy this 
requirement, if the placards otherwise conform to the provisions of this 
subpart.
    (b) No rail carrier may accept a rail car containing a hazardous 
material for transportation unless the placards for the hazardous 
material are affixed thereto as required by this subpart.

[Amdt. 172-29, 41 FR 15996, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 172-123, 
55 FR 52601, Dec. 21, 1990]



Sec. 172.510  Special placarding provisions: Rail.

    (a) White square background. The following must have the specified 
placards placed on a white square background, as described in 
Sec. 172.527:
    (1) Division 1.1 and 1.2 (explosive) materials which require 
EXPLOSIVES 1.1 or EXPLOSIVES 1.2 placards affixed to the rail car;
    (2) Materials classed in Division 2.3 Hazard Zone A or 6.1 Packing 
Group I Hazard Zone A which require POISON GAS or POISON placards 
affixed to the rail car, including tank cars containing only a residue 
of the material; and
    (3) Class DOT 113 tank cars used to transport a Division 2.1 
(flammable gas) material, including tank cars containing only a residue 
of the material.
    (b) Chemical ammunition. Each rail car containing Division 1.1 or 
1.2 (explosive) ammunition which also meets the definition of a material 
poisonous by inhalation (see Sec. 171.8 of this subchapter) must be 
placarded EXPLOSIVES 1.1 or EXPLOSIVES 1.2 and POISON GAS or POISON 
INHALATION HAZARD.

[Amdt. 172-29, 41 FR 15996, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 172-103, 
51 FR 5971, Feb. 18, 1986; Amdt. 172-110, 52 FR 29528, Aug. 10, 1987; 
Amdt. 172-111, 52 FR 36671, Sept. 30, 1987; Amdt. 172-123, 55 FR 52601, 
Dec. 21, 1990; 56 FR 66260, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45460, Oct. 1, 1992; 
Amdt. 172-248, 61 FR 28676, June 5, 1996; Amdt. 172-151, 62 FR 1231, 
Jan. 8, 1997; 62 FR 39398, July 22, 1997]



Sec. 172.512  Freight containers and aircraft unit load devices.

    (a) Capacity of 640 cubic feet or more. Each person who offers for 
transportation, and each person who loads and transports, a hazardous 
material in a freight container or aircraft unit load device having a 
capacity of 640 cubic feet or more shall affix to the freight container 
or aircraft unit load device the placards specified for the material in 
accordance with Sec. 172.504. However:
    (1) The placarding exception provided in Sec. 172.504(c) applies to 
motor vehicles transporting freight containers and aircraft unit load 
devices,
    (2) The placarding exception provided in Sec. 172.504(c) applies to 
each freight container and aircraft unit load device being transported 
for delivery to a consignee immediately following an air or water 
shipment, and,
    (3) Placarding is not required on a freight container or aircraft 
unit load device if it is only transported by air and is identified as 
containing a hazardous material in the manner provided in part 5, 
chapter 2, section 2.7, of the ICAO Technical Instructions (see 
Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).
    (b) Capacity less than 18 m3 (640 cubic feet). Each 
person who offers for transportation by air, and each person who loads 
and transports by air, a hazardous material in a freight container or 
aircraft unit load device having a capacity of less than 18 m\3\ (640 
cubic feet) shall affix one placard of the type specified by paragraph 
(a) of this section unless the freight container or aircraft unit load 
device:
    (1) Is labeled in accordance with subpart E of this part, including 
Sec. 172.406(e);
    (2) Contains radioactive materials requiring the Radioactive Yellow 
III label and is placarded with one Radioactive placard and is labeled 
in accordance with subpart E of this part, including Sec. 172.406(e); 
or,
    (3) Is identified as containing a hazardous material in the manner 
provided in part 5, chapter 2, section 2.7, of the ICAO Technical 
Instructions.

When hazardous materials are offered for transportation, not involving 
air transportation, in a freight container having a capacity of less 
than 640 cubic feet the freight container need not be

[[Page 379]]

placarded. However, if not placarded it must be labeled in accordance 
with subpart E of this part.
    (c) Notwithstanding paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section, packages 
containing hazardous materials, other than ORM-D, offered for 
transportation by air in freight containers are subject to the 
inspection requirements of Sec. 175.30 of this chapter.

[Amdt. 172-29, 41 FR 15996, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 172-29A, 
41 FR 40680, Sept. 20, 1976; Amdt. 172-87, 48 FR 53712, Nov. 29, 1983; 
48 FR 55469, Dec. 13, 1983; Amdt. 172-103, 51 FR 5971, Feb. 18, 1986; 
Amdt. 172-111, 52 FR 36671, Sept. 30, 1987; Amdt. 172-123, 55 FR 52601, 
Dec. 21, 1990; 66 FR 33426, June 21, 2001; 66 FR 45182, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 172.514  Bulk packagings.

    (a) Except as provided in paragraph (c) of this section, each person 
who offers for transportation a bulk packaging which contains a 
hazardous material, shall affix the placards specified for the material 
in Secs. 172.504 and 172.505.
    (b) Each bulk packaging that is required to be placarded when it 
contains a hazardous material, must remain placarded when it is emptied, 
unless it is--
    (1) Sufficiently cleaned of residue and purged of vapors to remove 
any potential hazard; or
    (2) Refilled, with a material requiring different placards or no 
placards, to such an extent that any residue remaining in the packaging 
is no longer hazardous.
    (c) Exceptions. The following packagings may be placarded on only 
two opposite sides or, alternatively, may be labeled instead of 
placarded in accordance with subpart E of this part:
    (1) A portable tank having a capacity of less than 3,785 L (1000 
gallons);
    (2) A DOT 106 or 110 multi-unit tank car tank;
    (3) A bulk packaging other than a portable tank, cargo tank, or tank 
car (e.g., a bulk bag or box) with a volumetric capacity of less than 18 
m\3\ (640 cubic feet); and
    (4) An IBC.

[Amdt. 172-136, 59 FR 38064, July 26, 1994; Amdt. 172-148, 61 FR 50255, 
Sept. 25, 1996, as amended by 66 FR 45379, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 172.516  Visibility and display of placards.

    (a) Each placard on a motor vehicle and each placard on a rail car 
must be clearly visible from the direction it faces, except from the 
direction of another transport vehicle or rail car to which the motor 
vehicle or rail car is coupled. This requirement may be met by the 
placards displayed on the freight containers or portable tanks loaded on 
a motor vehicle or rail car.
    (b) The required placarding of the front of a motor vehicle may be 
on the front of a truck-tractor instead of or in addition to the 
placarding on the front of the cargo body to which a truck-tractor is 
attached.
    (c) Each placard on a transport vehicle, bulk packaging, freight 
container or aircraft unit load device must--
    (1) Be securely attached or affixed thereto or placed in a holder 
thereon. (See appendix C to this part.);
    (2) Be located clear of appurtenances and devices such as ladders, 
pipes, doors, and tarpaulins;
    (3) So far as practicable, be located so that dirt or water is not 
directed to it from the wheels of the transport vehicle;
    (4) Be located away from any marking (such as advertising) that 
could substantially reduce its effectiveness, and in any case at least 3 
inches (76.0 mm.) away from such marking;
    (5) Have the words or identification number (when authorized) 
printed on it displayed horizontally, reading from left to right;
    (6) Be maintained by the carrier in a condition so that the format, 
legibility, color, and visibility of the placard will not be 
substantially reduced due to damage, deterioration, or obscurement by 
dirt or other matter;
    (7) Be affixed to a background of contrasting color, or must have a 
dotted or solid line outer border which contrasts with the background 
color.
    (d) Recommended specifications for a placard holder are set forth in 
appendix C of this part. Except for a placard holder similar to that 
contained in appendix C to this part, the means used to attach a placard 
may not obscure any part of its surface other than the borders.

[[Page 380]]

    (e) A placard or placard holder may be hinged provided the required 
format, color, and legibility of the placard are maintained.

[Amdt. 172-29, 41 FR 15996, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 172-101, 
45 FR 74668, Nov. 10, 1980; Amdt. 172-123, 55 FR 52601, Dec. 21, 1990; 
65 FR 50460, Aug. 18, 2000]



Sec. 172.519  General specifications for placards.

    (a) Strength and durability. Placards must conform to the following:
    (1) A placard may be made of any plastic, metal or other material 
capable of withstanding, without deterioration or a substantial 
reduction in effectiveness, a 30-day exposure to open weather 
conditions.
    (2) A placard made of tagboard must be at least equal to that 
designated commercially as white tagboard. Tagboard must have a weight 
of at least 80 kg (176 pounds) per ream of 610 by 910 mm (24 by 36-inch) 
sheets, waterproofing materials included. In addition, each placard made 
of tagboard must be able to pass a 414 kPa (60 p.s.i.) Mullen test.
    (3) Reflective or retroreflective materials may be used on a placard 
if the prescribed colors, strength and durability are maintained.
    (b) Design. (1) Except as provided in Sec. 172.332 of this part, 
each placard must be as described in this subpart, and except for size 
and color, the printing, inner border and symbol must be as shown in 
Secs. 172.521 through 172.560 of this subpart, as appropriate.
    (2) The dotted line border shown on each placard is not part of the 
placard specification. However, a dotted or solid line outer border may 
be used when needed to indicate the full size of a placard that is part 
of a larger format or is on a background of a non-contrasting color.
    (3) For other than Class 7 or the DANGEROUS placard, text indicating 
a hazard (for example, ``FLAMMABLE'') is not required. Text may be 
omitted from the OXYGEN placard only if the specific identification 
number is displayed on the placard.
    (4) For a placard corresponding to the primary or subsidiary hazard 
class of a material, the hazard class or division number must be 
displayed in the lower corner of the placard. However, a permanently 
affixed subsidiary placard meeting the specifications of this section 
which were in effect on October 1, 2001, (such as, a placard without the 
hazard class or division number displayed in the lower corner of the 
placard) and which was installed prior to September 30, 2001, may 
continue to be used as a subsidiary placard in domestic transportation 
by rail or highway, provided the color tolerances are maintained and are 
in accordance with the display requirements in this subchapter. Stocks 
of non-permanently affixed subsidiary placards in compliance with the 
requirements in effect on September 30, 2001, may continue to be used in 
domestic transportation by rail or highway until October 1, 2005, or 
until current stocks are depleted, whichever occurs first.
    (c) Size. (1) Each placard prescribed in this subpart must measure 
at least 273 mm (10.8 inches) on each side and must have a solid line 
inner border approximately 12.7 mm (0.5 inches) from each edge.
    (2) Except as otherwise provided in this subpart, the hazard class 
or division number, as appropriate, must be shown in numerals measuring 
at least 41 mm (1.6 inches) in height.
    (3) Except as otherwise provided in this subpart, when text 
indicating a hazard is displayed on a placard, the printing must be in 
letters measuring at least 41 mm (1.6 inches) in height.
    (d) Color. (1) The background color, symbol, text, numerals and 
inner border on a placard must be as specified in Secs. 172.521 through 
172.560 of this subpart, as appropriate.
    (2) Black and any color on a placard must be able to withstand, 
without substantial change--
    (i) A 72-hour fadeometer test (for a description of equipment 
designed for this purpose, see ASTM G 23-69 or ASTM G 26-70); and
    (ii) A 30-day exposure to open weather.
    (3) Upon visual examination, a color on a placard must fall within 
the color tolerances displayed on the appropriate Hazardous Materials 
Label and Placard Color Tolerance Chart (see Sec. 172.407(d) (4)).

[[Page 381]]

    (4) The placard color must extend to the inner border and may extend 
to the edge of the placard in the area designated on each placard except 
the color on the CORROSIVE and RADIOACTIVE placards (black and yellow, 
respectively) must extend only to the inner border.
    (e) Form identification. A placard may contain form identification 
information, including the name of its maker, provided that information 
is printed outside of the solid line inner border in no larger than 10-
point type.
    (f) Exceptions. When hazardous materials are offered for 
transportation or transported under the provisions of Secs. 171.11, 
171.12, or 171.12a of this subchapter, a placard conforming to the 
specifications in the ICAO Technical Instructions, the IMDG Code, or the 
TDG Regulations, respectively, may be used in place of a corresponding 
placard that conforms to the requirements of this subpart, except that a 
bulk packaging, transport vehicle, or freight container containing a 
material poisonous by inhalation (see Sec. 171.8 of this subchapter) 
must be placarded in accordance with this subpart (see 
Secs. 171.12(b)(8), 171.12(e) and 171.12a(b)(5) of this subchapter).
    (g) Trefoil symbol. The trefoil symbol on the RADIOACTIVE placard 
must meet the appropriate specification in appendix B of this part.

[Amdt. 172-123, 55 FR 52601, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66260, 
Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45460, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 172-143, 60 FR 50305, 
Sept. 28, 1995; 65 FR 50460, Aug. 18, 2000; 66 FR 33426, June 21, 2001; 
66 FR 44255, Aug. 22, 2001; 67 FR 15743, Apr. 3, 2002]



Sec. 172.521  DANGEROUS placard.

    (a) Except for size and color, the DANGEROUS placard must be as 
follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.039

    (b) In addition to meeting the requirements of Sec. 172.519, and 
appendix B to this part, the DANGEROUS placard must have a red upper and 
lower triangle. The placard center area and \1/2\-inch (12.7 mm.) border 
must be white. The inscription must be black with the \1/8\-inch (3.2 
mm.) border marker in the white area at each end of the inscription red.

[Amdt. 172-29, 41 FR 15996, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 172-29A, 
41 FR 40680, Sept. 20, 1976]



Sec. 172.522  EXPLOSIVES 1.1, EXPLOSIVES 1.2 and EXPLOSIVES 1.3 placards.

    (a) Except for size and color, the EXPLOSIVES 1.1, EXPLOSIVES 1.2 
and EXPLOSIVES 1.3 placards must be as follows:

[[Page 382]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.040

    (b) In addition to complying with Sec. 172.519 of this subpart, the 
background color on the EXPLOSIVES 1.1, EXPLOSIVES 1.2, and EXPLOSIVES 
1.3 placards must be orange. The ``*'' shall be replaced with the 
appropriate division number and, when required, appropriate 
compatibility group letter. The symbol, text, numerals and inner border 
must be black.

[Amdt. 172-123, 55 FR 52602, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66260, 
Dec. 20, 1991]



Sec. 172.523  EXPLOSIVES 1.4 placard.

    (a) Except for size and color, the EXPLOSIVES 1.4 placard must be as 
follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.041

    (b) In addition to complying with Sec. 172.519 of this subpart, the 
background color on the EXPLOSIVES 1.4 placard must be orange. The ``*'' 
shall be replaced, when required, with the appropriate compatibility 
group letter. The division numeral, 1.4, must measure at least 64 mm 
(2.5 inches) in height. The text, numerals and inner border must be 
black.

[Amdt. 172-123, 55 FR 52602, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66261, 
Dec. 20, 1991]



Sec. 172.524  EXPLOSIVES 1.5 placard.

    (a) Except for size and color, the EXPLOSIVES 1.5 placard must be as 
follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.042

    (b) In addition to complying with the Sec. 172.519 of this subpart, 
the background color on EXPLOSIVES 1.5 placard must be orange. The ``*'' 
shall be replaced, when required, with the appropriate compatibility 
group letter. The division numeral, 1.5, must measure at least 64 mm 
(2.5 inches) in height. The text, numerals and inner border must be 
black.

[Amdt. 172-123, 55 FR 52602, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66261, 
Dec. 20, 1991]



Sec. 172.525  EXPLOSIVES 1.6 placard.

    (a) Except for size and color the EXPLOSIVES 1.6 placard must be as 
follows:

[[Page 383]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.043

    (b) In addition to complying with Sec. 172.519 of this subpart, the 
background color on the EXPLOSIVES 1.6 placard must be orange. The ``*'' 
shall be replaced, when required, with the appropriate compatibility 
group letter. The division numeral, 1.6, must measure at least 64 mm 
(2.5 inches) in height. The text, numerals and inner border must be 
black.

[Amdt. 172-123, 55 FR 52603, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66261, 
Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 172-130, 58 FR 51531, Oct. 1, 1993]



Sec. 172.526  [Reserved]



Sec. 172.527  Background requirements for certain placards.

    (a) Except for size and color, the square background required by 
Sec. 172.510(a) for certain placards on rail cars, and Sec. 172.507 for 
placards on motor vehicles containing a package of highway route 
controlled quantity radioactive materials, must be as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.044

    (b) In addition to meeting the requirements of Sec. 172.519 for 
minimum durability and strength, the square background must consist of a 
white square measuring 14\1/4\ inches (362.0 mm.) on each side 
surrounded by a black border extending to 15\1/4\ inches (387.0 mm.) on 
each side.

[Amdt. 172-29, 41 FR 15996, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 172-64, 
46 FR 5316, Jan. 19, 1981; Amdt. 172-78, 48 FR 10226, Mar. 10, 1983]



Sec. 172.528  NON-FLAMMABLE GAS placard.

    (a) Except for size and color, the NON-FLAMMABLE GAS placard must be 
as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.045

    (b) In addition to complying with Sec. 172.519, the background color 
on the NON-FLAMMABLE GAS placard must be green. The letters in both 
words must be at least 38 mm (1.5 inches)

[[Page 384]]

high. The symbol, text, class number and inner border must be white.

[Amdt. 172-123, 56 FR 66261, Dec. 20, 1991]



Sec. 172.530  OXYGEN placard.

    (a) Except for size and color, the OXYGEN placard must be as 
follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.046

    (b) In addition to complying with Sec. 172.519 of this subpart, the 
background color on the OXYGEN placard must be yellow. The symbol, text, 
class number and inner border must be black.

[Amdt. 172-123, 56 FR 66262, Dec. 20, 1991]



Sec. 172.532  FLAMMABLE GAS placard.

    (a) Except for size and color, the FLAMMABLE GAS placard must be as 
follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.047

    (b) In addition to complying with Sec. 172.519, the background color 
on the FLAMMABLE GAS placard must be red. The symbol, text, class number 
and inner border must be white.

[Amdt. 172-123, 56 FR 66262, Dec. 20, 1991]



Sec. 172.536  [Reserved]



Sec. 172.540  POISON GAS placard.

    (a) Except for size and color, the POISON GAS placard must be as 
follows:

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR22JY97.024


    (b) In addition to complying with Sec. 172.519, the background on 
the POISON GAS placard and the symbol must be white. The background of 
the upper diamond must be black and the lower point of the upper diamond 
must be 65 mm (2\5/8\ inches) above the horizontal center line. The 
text, class number, and inner border must be black.

[62 FR 39408, July 22, 1997]



Sec. 172.542  FLAMMABLE placard.

    (a) Except for size and color, the FLAMMABLE placard must be as 
follows:

[[Page 385]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.049

    (b) In addition to complying with Sec. 172.519, the background color 
on the FLAMMABLE placard must be red. The symbol, text, class number and 
inner border must be white.
    (c) The word ``GASOLINE'' may be used in place of the word 
``FLAMMABLE'' on a placard that is displayed on a cargo tank or a 
portable tank being used to transport gasoline by highway. The word 
``GASOLINE'' must be shown in white.

[Amdt. 172-123, 56 FR 66262, Dec. 20, 1991]



Sec. 172.544  COMBUSTIBLE placard.

    (a) Except for size and color, the COMBUSTIBLE placard must be as 
follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.050

    (b) In addition to complying with Sec. 172.519, the background color 
on the COMBUSTIBLE placard must be red. The symbol, text, class number 
and inner border must be white. On a COMBUSTIBLE placard with a white 
bottom as prescribed by Sec. 172.332(c)(4), the class number must be red 
or black.
    (c) The words ``FUEL OIL'' may be used in place of the word 
``COMBUSTIBLE'' on a placard that is displayed on a cargo tank or 
portable tank being used to transport by highway fuel oil that is not 
classed as a flammable liquid. The words ``FUEL OIL'' must be white.

[Amdt. 172-123, 56 FR 66262, Dec. 20, 1991]



Sec. 172.546  FLAMMABLE SOLID placard.

    (a) Except for size and color, the FLAMMABLE SOLID placard must be 
as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.051

    (b) In addition to complying with Sec. 172.519, the background on 
the FLAMMABLE SOLID placard must be white with seven vertical red 
stripes. The stripes must be equally spaced, with one red stripe placed 
in the center of the label. Each red stripe and each white space between 
two red stripes must be 25 mm (1.0 inches) wide. The letters in the word 
``SOLID'' must be at least 38.1 mm (1.5 inches) high. The symbol, text, 
class number and inner border must be black.

[Amdt. 172-123, 56 FR 66263, Dec. 20, 1991]



Sec. 172.547  SPONTANEOUSLY COMBUSTIBLE placard.

    (a) Except for size and color, the SPONTANEOUSLY COMBUSTIBLE placard 
must be as follows:

[[Page 386]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.052

    (b) In addition to complying with Sec. 172.519, the background color 
on the SPONTANEOUSLY COMBUSTIBLE placard must be red in the lower half 
and white in upper half. The letters in the word ``SPONTANEOUSLY'' must 
be at least 12 mm (0.5 inch) high. The symbol, text, class number and 
inner border must be black.

[Amdt. 172-123, 56 FR 66263, Dec. 20, 1991, as amended by Amdt. 172-139, 
59 FR 67490, Dec. 29, 1994]



Sec. 172.548  DANGEROUS WHEN WET placard.

    (a) Except for size and color, the DANGEROUS WHEN WET placard must 
be as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.053

    (b) In addition to complying with Sec. 172.519, the background color 
on the DANGEROUS WHEN WET placard must be blue. The letters in the words 
``WHEN WET'' must be at least 25 mm (1.0 inches) high. The symbol, text, 
class number and inner border must be white.

[Amdt. 172-123, 56 FR 66263, Dec. 20, 1991]



Sec. 172.550  OXIDIZER placard.

    (a) Except for size and color, the OXIDIZER placard must be as 
follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.054


[[Page 387]]


    (b) In addition to complying with Sec. 172.519, the background color 
on the OXIDIZER placard must be yellow. The symbol, text, division 
number and inner border must be black.

[Amdt. 172-123, 56 FR 66263, Dec. 20, 1991]



Sec. 172.552  ORGANIC PEROXIDE placard.

    (a) Except for size and color, the ORGANIC PEROXIDE placard must be 
as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.055

    (b) In addition to complying with Sec. 172.519, the background color 
on the ORGANIC PEROXIDE placard must be yellow. The symbol, text, 
division number and inner border must be black.

[Amdt. 172-123, 56 FR 66263, Dec. 20, 1991]



Sec. 172.553  [Reserved]



Sec. 172.554  POISON placard.

    (a) Except for size and color, the POISON placard must be as 
follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.057

    (b) In addition to complying with Sec. 172.519, the background on 
the POISON placard must be white. The symbol, text, class number and 
inner border must be black. The word ``TOXIC'' may be used in lieu of 
the word ``POISON''.

[Amdt. 172-123, 56 FR 66264, Dec. 20, 1991, as amended by Amdt. 172-139, 
59 FR 67490, Dec. 29, 1994]



Sec. 172.555  POISON INHALATION HAZARD placard.

    (a) Except for size and color, the POISON INHALATION HAZARD placard 
must be as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR22JY97.025

    (b) In addition to complying with Sec. 172.519, the background on 
the POISON INHALATION HAZARD placard and the symbol must be white. The 
background of the upper diamond must be black and the lower point of the

[[Page 388]]

upper diamond must be 65 mm (2\5/8\ inches) above the horizontal center 
line. The text, class number, and inner border must be black.

[62 FR 39409, July 22, 1997]



Sec. 172.556  RADIOACTIVE placard.

    (a) Except for size and color, the RADIOACTIVE placard must be as 
follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR29SE00.001

    (b) In addition to complying with Sec. 172.519, the background color 
on the RADIOACTIVE placard must be white in the lower portion with a 
yellow triangle in the upper portion. The base of the yellow triangle 
must be 29 mm  5 mm (1.1 inches 0.2 inches) 
above the placard horizontal center line. The symbol, text, class number 
and inner border must be black.

[Amdt. 172-123, 56 FR 66264, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 172-130, 58 FR 51531, 
Oct. 1, 1993; 65 FR 58627, Sept. 29, 2000]



Sec. 172.558  CORROSIVE placard.

    (a) Except for size and color, the CORROSIVE placard must be as 
follows:

[[Page 389]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR29SE00.002

    (b) In addition to complying with Sec. 172.519, the background color 
on the CORROSIVE placard must be black in the lower portion with a white 
triangle in the upper portion. The base of the white triangle must be 38 
mm  5 mm (1.5 inches  0.2 inches) above the 
placard horizontal center line. The text and class number must be white. 
The symbol and inner border must be black.

[Amdt. 172-123, 56 FR 66264, Dec. 20, 1991, as amended at 65 FR 58627, 
Sept. 29, 2000]



Sec. 172.560  CLASS 9 placard.

    (a) Except for size and color the CLASS 9 (miscellaneous hazardous 
materials) placard must be as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.060


[[Page 390]]


    (b) In addition to conformance with Sec. 172.519, the background on 
the CLASS 9 placard must be white with seven black vertical stripes on 
the top half extending from the top of the placard to one inch above the 
horizontal centerline. The black vertical stripes must be spaced so 
that, visually, they appear equal in width to the six white spaces 
between them. The space below the vertical lines must be white with the 
class number 9 underlined and centered at the bottom.

[Amdt. 172-123, 56 FR 66264, Dec. 20, 1991, as amended at 57 FR 45460, 
Oct. 1, 1992]



                Subpart G--Emergency Response Information



Sec. 172.600  Applicability and general requirements.

    (a) Scope. Except as provided in paragraph (d) of this section, this 
subpart prescribes requirements for providing and maintaining emergency 
response information during transportation and at facilities where 
hazardous materials are loaded for transportation, stored incidental to 
transportation or otherwise handled during any phase of transportation.
    (b) Applicability. This subpart applies to persons who offer for 
transportation, accept for transportation, transfer or otherwise handle 
hazardous materials during transportation.
    (c) General requirements. No person to whom this subpart applies may 
offer for transportation, accept for transportation, transfer, store or 
otherwise handle during transportation a hazardous material unless:
    (1) Emergency response information conforming to this subpart is 
immediately available for use at all times the hazardous material is 
present; and
    (2) Emergency response information, including the emergency response 
telephone number, required by this subpart is immediately available to 
any person who, as a representative of a Federal, State or local 
government agency, responds to an incident involving a hazardous 
material, or is conducting an investigation which involves a hazardous 
material.
    (d) Exceptions. The requirements of this subpart do not apply to 
hazardous material which is excepted from the shipping paper 
requirements of this subchapter or a material properly classified as an 
ORM-D.

[Amdt. 172-116, 54 FR 27145, June 27, 1989; 54 FR 28750, July 5, 1989, 
as amended at 55 FR 33712, Aug. 17, 1990; 172-127, 59 FR 49133, Sept. 
26, 1994; Amdt. 172-149, 61 FR 27173, May 30, 1996]



Sec. 172.602  Emergency response information.

    (a) Information required. For purposes of this subpart, the term 
``emergency response information'' means information that can be used in 
the mitigation of an incident involving hazardous materials and, as a 
minimum, must contain the following information:
    (1) The basic description and technical name of the hazardous 
material as required by Secs. 172.202 and 172.203(k), the ICAO Technical 
Instructions, the IMDG Code, or the TDG Regulations, as appropriate (see 
Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter);
    (2) Immediate hazards to health;
    (3) Risks of fire or explosion;
    (4) Immediate precautions to be taken in the event of an accident or 
incident;
    (5) Immediate methods for handling fires;
    (6) Initial methods for handling spills or leaks in the absence of 
fire; and
    (7) Preliminary first aid measures.
    (b) Form of information. The information required for a hazardous 
material by paragraph (a) of this section must be:
    (1) Printed legibly in English;
    (2) Available for use away from the package containing the hazardous 
material; and
    (3) Presented--
    (i) On a shipping paper;
    (ii) In a document, other than a shipping paper, that includes both 
the basic description and technical name of the hazardous material as 
required by Secs. 172.202 and 172.203(k), the ICAO Technical 
Instructions, the IMDG Code, or the TDG Regulations, as appropriate, and 
the emergency response information required by this subpart (e.g., a 
material safety data sheet); or
    (iii) Related to the information on a shipping paper, a written 
notification to pilot-in-command, or a dangerous cargo manifest, in a 
separate document

[[Page 391]]

(e.g., an emergency response guidance document), in a manner that cross-
references the description of the hazardous material on the shipping 
paper with the emergency response information contained in the document. 
Aboard aircraft, the ICAO ``Emergency Response Guidance for Aircraft 
Incidents Involving Dangerous Goods'' and, aboard vessels, the IMO 
``Emergency Procedures for Ships Carrying Dangerous Goods'', or 
equivalent documents, may be used to satisfy the requirements of this 
section for a separate document.
    (c) Maintenance of information. Emergency response information shall 
be maintained as follows:
    (1) Carriers. Each carrier who transports a hazardous material shall 
maintain the information specified in paragraph (a) of this section and 
Sec. 172.606 of this part in the same manner as prescribed for shipping 
papers, except that the information must be maintained in the same 
manner aboard aircraft as the notification of pilot-in-command, and 
aboard vessels in the same manner as the dangerous cargo manifest. This 
information must be immediately accessible to train crew personnel, 
drivers of motor vehicles, flight crew members, and bridge personnel on 
vessels for use in the event of incidents involving hazardous materials.
    (2) Facility operators. Each operator of a facility where a 
hazardous material is received, stored or handled during transportation, 
shall maintain the information required by paragraph (a) of this section 
whenever the hazardous material is present. This information must be in 
a location that is immediately accessible to facility personnel in the 
event of an incident involving the hazardous material.

[Amdt. 172-116, 54 FR 27146, June 27, 1989; 54 FR 28750, July 5, 1989, 
as amended by Amdt. 172-116, 55 FR 875, Jan. 10, 1990; Amdt. 172-151, 62 
FR 1234, Jan. 8, 1997; 66 FR 45379, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 172.604  Emergency response telephone number.

    (a) A person who offers a hazardous material for transportation must 
provide an emergency response telephone number, including the area code 
or international access code, for use in the event of an emergency 
involving the hazardous material. The telephone number must be--
    (1) Monitored at all times the hazardous material is in 
transportation, including storage incidental to transportation;
    (2) The number of a person who is either knowledgeable of the 
hazardous material being shipped and has comprehensive emergency 
response and incident mitigation information for that material, or has 
immediate access to a person who possesses such knowledge and 
information; and
    (3) Entered on a shipping paper, as follows:
    (i) Immediately following the description of the hazardous material 
required by subpart C of this part; or
    (ii) Entered once on the shipping paper in a clearly visible 
location. This provision may be used only if the telephone number 
applies to each hazardous material entered on the shipping paper, and if 
it is indicated that the telephone number is for emergency response 
information (for example: ``EMERGENCY CONTACT: * * *).
    (b) The telephone number required by paragraph (a) of this section 
must be the number of the person offering the hazardous material for 
transportation or the number of an agency or organization capable of, 
and accepting responsibility for, providing the detailed information 
concerning the hazardous material. A person offering a hazardous 
material for transportation who lists the telephone number of an agency 
or organization shall ensure that agency or organization has received 
current information on the material, as required by paragraph (a)(2) of 
this section before it is offered for transportation.
    (c) The requirements of this section do not apply to--
    (1) Hazardous materials that are offered for transportation under 
the provisions applicable to limited quantities; and
    (2) Materials properly described under the following shipping names:

Battery powered equipment
Battery powered vehicle
Carbon dioxide, solid
Castor bean
Castor flake

[[Page 392]]

Castor meal
Castor pomace
Consumer commodity
Dry ice
Engines, internal combustion
Fish meal, stabilized
Fish scrap, stabilized
Refrigerating machine
Vehicle, flammable gas powered
Vehicle, flammable liquid powered
Wheelchair, electric


[Amdt. 172-116, 54 FR 27145, June 27, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 33713, 
Aug. 17, 1990; Amdt. 172-127, 59 FR 49133, Sept. 26, 1994; Amdt. 172-
149, 61 FR 27173, May 30, 1996; 65 FR 50460, Aug. 18, 2000; 65 FR 58628, 
Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45182, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 172.606  Carrier information contact.

    (a) Each carrier who transports or accepts for transportation a 
hazardous material for which a shipping paper is required shall instruct 
the operator of a motor vehicle, train, aircraft, or vessel to contact 
the carrier (e.g., by telephone or mobile radio) in the event of an 
incident involving the hazardous material.
    (b) For transportation by highway, if a transport vehicle, (e.g., a 
semi-trailer or freight container-on-chassis) contains hazardous 
material for which a shipping paper is required and the vehicle is 
separated from its motive power and parked at a location other than a 
facility operated by the consignor or consignee or a facility (e.g., a 
carrier's terminal or a marine terminal) subject to the provisions of 
Sec. 172.602(c)(2), the carrier shall--
    (1) Mark the transport vehicle with the telephone number of the 
motor carrier on the front exterior near the brake hose and electrical 
connections or on a label, tag, or sign attached to the vehicle at the 
brake hose or electrical connection; or
    (2) Have the shipping paper and emergency response information 
readily available on the transport vehicle.
    (c) The requirements specified in paragraph (b) of this section do 
not apply to an unattended motor vehicle separated from its motive power 
when the motor vehicle is marked on an orange panel, a placard, or a 
plain white square-on-point configuration with the identification number 
of each hazardous material loaded therein, and the marking or placard is 
visible on the outside of the motor vehicle.

[Amdt. 172-151, 62 FR 1234, Jan. 8, 1997, as amended at 62 FR 39398 and 
39409, July 22, 1997; 63 FR 16076, Apr. 1, 1998]



                           Subpart H--Training

    Source: Amdt. 172-126, 57 FR 20952, May 15, 1992, unless otherwise 
noted.



Sec. 172.700  Purpose and scope.

    (a) Purpose. This subpart prescribes requirements for training 
hazmat employees.
    (b) Scope. Training as used in this subpart means a systematic 
program that ensures a hazmat employee has familiarity with the general 
provisions of this subchapter, is able to recognize and identify 
hazardous materials, has knowledge of specific requirements of this 
subchapter applicable to functions performed by the employee, and has 
knowledge of emergency response information, self-protection measures 
and accident prevention methods and procedures (see Sec. 172.704).
    (c) Modal-specific training requirements. Additional training 
requirements for the individual modes of transportation are prescribed 
in parts 174, 175, 176, and 177 of this subchapter.



Sec. 172.701  Federal-State relationship.

    This subpart and the parts referenced in Sec. 172.700(c) prescribe 
minimum training requirements for the transportation of hazardous 
materials. For motor vehicle drivers, however, a State may impose more 
stringent training requirements only if those requirements--
    (a) Do not conflict with the training requirements in this subpart 
and in part 177 of this subchapter; and
    (b) Apply only to drivers domiciled in that State.



Sec. 172.702  Applicability and responsibility for training and testing.

    (a) A hazmat employer shall ensure that each of its hazmat employees 
is trained in accordance with the requirements prescribed in this 
subpart.
    (b) Except as provided in Sec. 172.704(c)(1), a hazmat employee who 
performs any function subject to the

[[Page 393]]

requirements of this subchapter may not perform that function unless 
instructed in the requirements of this subchapter that apply to that 
function. It is the duty of each hazmat employer to comply with the 
applicable requirements of this subchapter and to thoroughly instruct 
each hazmat employee in relation thereto.
    (c) Training may be provided by the hazmat employer or other public 
or private sources.
    (d) A hazmat employer shall ensure that each of its hazmat employees 
is tested by appropriate means on the training subjects covered in 
Sec. 172.704.

[Amdt. 172-126, 57 FR 20952, May 15, 1992; 57 FR 22182, May 27, 1992, as 
amended by Amdt. 172-149, 61 FR 27173, May 30, 1996]



Sec. 172.704  Training requirements.

    (a) Hazmat employee training shall include the following:
    (1) General awareness/familiarization training. Each hazmat employee 
shall be provided general awareness/familiarization training designed to 
provide familiarity with the requirements of this subchapter, and to 
enable the employee to recognize and identify hazardous materials 
consistent with the hazard communication standards of this subchapter.
    (2) Function-specific training. (i) Each hazmat employee shall be 
provided function-specific training concerning requirements of this 
subchapter, or exemptions issued under subchapter A of this chapter, 
which are specifically applicable to the functions the employee 
performs.
    (ii) As an alternative to function-specific training on the 
requirements of this subchapter, training relating to the requirements 
of the ICAO Technical Instructions and the IMDG Code may be provided to 
the extent such training addresses functions authorized by Secs. 171.11 
and 171.12 of this subchapter.
    (3) Safety training. Each hazmat employee shall receive safety 
training concerning--
    (i) Emergency response information required by subpart G of part 
172;
    (ii) Measures to protect the employee from the hazards associated 
with hazardous materials to which they may be exposed in the work place, 
including specific measures the hazmat employer has implemented to 
protect employees from exposure; and
    (iii) Methods and procedures for avoiding accidents, such as the 
proper procedures for handling packages containing hazardous materials.
    (b) OSHA or EPA Training. Training conducted by employers to comply 
with the hazard communication programs required by the Occupational 
Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) of the Department of Labor (29 
CFR 1910.120 or 1910.1200) or the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) 
(40 CFR 311.1), to the extent that training addresses the training 
specified in paragraph (a) of this section, may be used to satisfy the 
training requirements in paragraph (a) of this section, in order to 
avoid unnecessary duplication of training.
    (c) Initial and recurrent training--(1) Initial training. A new 
hazmat employee, or a hazmat employee who changes job functions may 
perform those functions prior to the completion of training provided--
    (i) The employee performs those functions under the direct 
supervision of a properly trained and knowledgeable hazmat employee; and
    (ii) The training is completed within 90 days after employment or a 
change in job function.
    (2) Recurrent training. A hazmat employee shall receive the training 
required by this subpart at least once every three years.
    (3) Relevant Training. Relevant training received from a previous 
employer or other source may be used to satisfy the requirements of this 
subpart provided a current record of training is obtained from hazmat 
employees' previous employer.
    (4) Compliance. Each hazmat employer is responsible for compliance 
with the requirements of this subchapter regardless of whether the 
training required by this subpart has been completed.
    (d) Recordkeeping. A record of current training, inclusive of the 
preceding three years, in accordance with this section shall be created 
and retained by each hazmat employer for as long as that employee is 
employed by that employer as a hazmat employee and for 90

[[Page 394]]

days thereafter. The record shall include:
    (1) The hazmat employee's name;
    (2) The most recent training completion date of the hazmat 
employee's training;
    (3) A description, copy, or the location of the training materials 
used to meet the requirements in paragraph (a) of this section;
    (4) The name and address of the person providing the training; and
    (5) Certification that the hazmat employee has been trained and 
tested, as required by this subpart.
    (e) Limitation. A hazmat employee who repairs, modifies, 
reconditions, or tests packagings as qualified for use in the 
transportation of hazardous materials, and who does not perform any 
other function subject to the requirements of this subchapter, is not 
subject to the safety training requirement of paragraph (a)(3) of this 
section.

[Amdt. 172-126, 57 FR 20952, May 15, 1992, as amended by Amdt. 172-126, 
58 FR 5851, Jan. 22, 1993; Amdt. 172-145, 60 FR 49110, Sept. 21, 1995; 
Amdt. 172-149, 61 FR 27173, May 30, 1996; 65 FR 50460, Aug. 18, 2000]

  Appendix A to Part 172--Office of Hazardous Materials Transportation 
                    Color Tolerance Charts and Tables

    The following are Munsell notations and Commission Internationale de 
L'Eclairage (CIE) coordinates which describe the Office of Hazardous 
Materials Transportation Label and Placard Color Tolerance Charts in 
tables 1 and 2, and the CIE coordinates for the color tolerances 
specified in table 3. Central colors and tolerances described in table 2 
approximate those described in table 1 while allowing for differences in 
production methods and materials used to manufacture labels and placards 
surfaced with printing inks. Primarily, the color charts based on table 
1 are for label or placard colors applied as opaque coatings such as 
paint, enamel or plastic, whereas color charts based on table 2 are 
intended for use with labels and placards surfaced only with inks.
    For labels printed directly on packaging surfaces, table 3 may be 
used, although compliance with either table 1 or table 2 is sufficient. 
However, if visual reference indicates that the colors of labels printed 
directly on package surfaces are outside the table 1 or 2 tolerances, a 
spectrophotometer or other instrumentation may be required to insure 
compliance with table 3.

    Table 1--Specifications for Color Tolerance Charts for Use With Labels and Placards Surfaced With Paint,
                           Lacquer, Enamel, Plastic, Other Opaque Coatings, or Ink \1\
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                        CIE data for source C
                     Color                               Munsell notations         -----------------------------
                                                                                        Y         x         y
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Red:
  Central color...............................  7.5R 4.0/14.......................     12.00     .5959     .3269
  Orange......................................  8.5R 4.0/14.......................     12.00     .6037     .3389
  Purple and vivid............................  6.5R 4.0/14.......................     12.00     .5869     .3184
  Grayish.....................................  7.5R 4.0/12.......................     12.00     .5603     .3321
  Vivid.......................................  7.5R 4.0/16.......................     12.00     .6260     .3192
  Light.......................................  7.5R 4.5/14.......................     15.57     .5775     .3320
  Dark........................................  7. 5R 3.5/14......................     09.00     .6226     .3141
Orange:
  Central color...............................  5.OYR 6.0/15......................     30.05     .5510     .4214
  Yellow and Grayish..........................  6.25YR 6.0/15.....................     30.05     .5452     .4329
  Red and vivid...............................  3.75YR 6.0/15.....................     30.05     .5552     .4091
  Grayish.....................................  5.OYR 6.0/13......................     30.05     .5311     .4154
  Vivid.......................................  5.OYR 6.0/16......................     30.05     .5597     .4239
  Light.......................................  5.OYR 6.5/15......................     36.20     .5427     .4206
  Dark........................................  5.OYR 5.5/15......................     24.58     .5606     .4218
Yellow:
  Central color...............................  5.OY 8.0/12.......................     59.10     .4562     .4788
  Green.......................................  6.5Y 8.0/12.......................     59.10     .4498     .4865
  Orange and vivid............................  3.5Y 8.0/12.......................     59.10     .4632     .4669
  Grayish.....................................  5.OY 8.0/10.......................     59.10     .4376     .4601
  Vivid.......................................  5.OY 8.0/14.......................     59.10     .4699     .4920
  Light.......................................  5.OY 8.5/12.......................     68.40     .4508     .4754
  Dark........................................  5.OY 7.5/12.......................     50.68     .4620     .4823
Green:
  Central color...............................  7.5G 4.0/9........................     12.00     .2111     .4121
  Bluish......................................  0.5BG 4.0/9.......................     12.00     .1974     .3809
  Green-yellow................................  5.0G 4.0/9........................     12.00     .2237     .4399
  Grayish A...................................  7.5G 4.0/7........................     12.00     .2350     .3922
  Grayish B \2\...............................  7.5G 4.0/6........................     12.00     .2467     .3822
  Vivid.......................................  7.5G 4.0/11.......................     12.00     .1848     .4319

[[Page 395]]

 
  Light.......................................  7.5G 4.5/9........................     15.57     .2204     .4060
  Dark........................................  7.5G 3.5/9........................     09.00     .2027     .4163
Blue:
  Central color...............................  2.5PB 3.5/10......................     09.00     .1691     .1744
  Purple......................................  4.5PB 3.5/10......................     09.00     .1796     .1711
  Green and vivid.............................  10.0B 3.5/10......................     09.00     .1557     .1815
  Grayish.....................................  2.5PB 3.5/8.......................     09.00     .1888     .1964
  Vivid.......................................  2.5PB 3.5/12......................     09.00     .1516     .1547
  Light.......................................  2.5PB 4.0/10......................     12.00     .1805     .1888
  Dark........................................  2.5PB 3.0/10......................     06.55     .1576     .1600
Purple:
  Central color...............................  10.0P 4.5/10......................     15.57     .3307     .2245
  Reddish purple..............................  2.5RP 4.5/10......................     15.57     .3584     .2377
  Blue purple.................................  7.5P 4.5/10.......................     15.57     .3068     .2145
  Reddish gray................................  10.0P 4.5/8.......................     15.57     .3280     .2391
  Gray \2\....................................  10.0P 4.5/6.5.....................     15.57     .3254     .2519
  Vivid.......................................  10.0P 4.5/12......................     15.57     .3333     .2101
  Light.......................................  10.0P 5.0/10......................     19.77     .3308     .2328
  Dark........................................  10.0P 4.0/10......................     12.00     .3306     .2162
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Maximum chroma is not limited.
\2\ For the colors green and purple, the minimum saturation (chroma) limits for porcelain enamel on metal are
  lower than for most other surface coatings. Therefore, the minimum chroma limits of these two colors as
  displayed on the Charts for comparison to porcelain enamel on metal is low, as shown for green (grayish B) and
  purple (gray).
Note: CIE=Commission Internationale de L'Eclairage.


      Table 2--Specifications for Color Tolerance Charts for Use With Labels and Placards Surfaced With Ink
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                        CIE data for source C
                 Color/series                            Munsell notation          -----------------------------
                                                                                        Y         x         y
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Red:
Central series:
  Central color...............................  6.8R 4.47/12.8....................     15.34     .5510     .3286
  Grayish.....................................  7.2R 4.72/12.2....................     17.37     .5368     .3348
  Purple......................................  6.4R 4.49/12.7....................     15.52     .5442     .3258
  Purple and vivid............................  6.1R 4.33/13.1....................     14.25     .5529     .3209
  Vivid.......................................  6.7R 4.29/13.2....................     13.99     .5617     .3253
  Orange......................................  7.3R 4.47/12.8....................     15.34     .5572     .3331
  Orange and grayish..........................  7.65R 4.70/12.4...................     17.20     .5438     .3382
Light series:
  Light.......................................  7.0R 4.72/13.2....................     17.32     .5511     .3322
  Light and orange............................  7.4R 4.96/12.6....................     19.38     .5365     .3382
  Light and purple............................  6.6R 4.79/12.9....................     17.94     .5397     .3289
Dark series:
  Dark A......................................  6.7R 4.19/12.5....................     13.30     .5566     .3265
  Dark B......................................  7.0R 4.25/12.35...................     13.72     .5522     .3294
  Dark and purple.............................  7.5R 4.23/12.4....................     13.58     .5577     .3329
Orange:
  Central series:
    Central color.............................  5.0YR 6.10/12.15..................     31.27     .5193     .4117
    Yellow and grayish A......................  5.8YR 6.22/11.7...................     32.69     .5114     .4155
    Yellow and grayish B......................  6.1YR 6.26/11.85..................     33.20     .5109     .4190
    Vivid.....................................  5.1YR 6.07/12.3...................     30.86     .5226     .4134
    Red and vivid A...........................  3.9YR 5.87/12.75..................     28.53     .5318     .4038
    Red and vivid B...........................  3.6YR 5.91/12.6...................     29.05     .5291     .4021
    Grayish...................................  4.9YR 6.10/11.9...................     31.22     .5170     .4089
Light series:
  Light and vivid A...........................  5.8YR 6.78/12.7...................     39.94     .5120     .4177
  Light and yellow............................  6.0YR 6.80/12.8...................     40.20     .5135     .4198
  Light and vivid B...........................  4.9YR 6.60/12.9...................     37.47     .5216     .4126
Dark series:
  Dark and yellow.............................  5.8YR 5.98/11.0...................     29.87     .5052     .4132
  Dark A......................................  5.1YR 5.80/11.1...................     27.80     .5127     .4094
  Dark B......................................  5.0YR 5.80/11.0...................     27.67     .5109     .4068

[[Page 396]]

 
Yellow:
  Central series:
    Central color.............................  4.3Y 7.87/10.3....................     56.81     .4445     .4589
    Vivid A...................................  4.5Y 7.82/10.8....................     55.92     .4503     .4658
    Vivid B...................................  3.3Y 7.72/11.35...................     54.24     .4612     .4624
    Vivid and orange..........................  3.2Y 7.72/10.8....................     54.25     .4576     .4572
    Grayish A.................................  4.1Y 7.95/9.7.....................     58.18     .4380     .4516
    Grayish B.................................  5.1Y 8.06/9.05....................     60.12     .4272     .4508
    Green-yellow..............................  5.2Y 7.97/9.9.....................     58.53     .4356     .4605
Light series:
  Light.......................................  5.4Y 8.59/10.5....................     70.19     .4351     .4628
  Light and green-yellow......................  5.4Y 8.56/11.2....................     69.59     .4414     .4692
  Light and vivid.............................  4.4Y 8.45/11.4....................     67.42     .4490     .4662
Dark series:
  Dark and green-yellow.......................  4.4Y 7.57/9.7.....................     51.82     .4423     .4562
  Dark and orange A...........................  3.4Y 7.39/10.4....................     48.86     .4584     .4590
  Dark and orange B...........................  3.5Y 7.41/10.0....................     49.20     .4517     .4544
Green:
  Central series:
    Central color.............................  9.75G 4.26/7.75...................     13.80     .2214     .3791
    Grayish...................................  10G 4.46/7.5......................     15.25     .2263     .3742
    Blue A....................................  1.4BG 4.20/7.4....................     13.36     .2151     .3625
    Blue B....................................  1.0BG 4.09/7.75...................     12.60     .2109     .3685
    Vivid.....................................  8.4G 4.09/8.05....................     12.59     .2183     .3954
    Vivid green-yellow........................  7.0G 4.23/8.0.....................     13.54     .2292     .4045
    Green-yellow..............................  7.85G 4.46/7.7....................     15.23     .2313     .3914
Light series:
  Light and vivid.............................  9.5G 4.45/8.8.....................     15.21     .2141     .3863
  Light and blue..............................  0.2BG 4.31/8.8....................     14.12     .2069     .3814
  Light and green-yellow......................  8.3G 4.29/9.05....................     14.01     .2119     .4006
Dark series:
  Dark and green-yellow.......................  7.1G 4.08/7.1.....................     12.55     .2354     .3972
  Dark and grayish............................  9.5G 4.11/6.9.....................     12.70     .2282     .3764
  Dark........................................  8.5G 3.97/7.2.....................     11.78     .2269     .3874
Blue:
  Central series:
    Central color.............................  3.5PB 3.94/9.7....................     11.58     .1885     .1911
    Green and grayish A.......................  2.0PB 4.35/8.7....................     14.41     .1962     .2099
    Green and grayish B.......................  1.7PB 4.22/9.0....................     13.50     .1898     .2053
    Vivid.....................................  2.9PB 3.81/9.7....................     10.78     .1814     .1852
    Purple and vivid A........................  4.7PB 3.53/10.0...................      9.15     .1817     .1727
    Purple and vivid B........................  5.0PB 3.71/9.9....................     10.20     .1888     .1788
    Grayish...................................  3.75PB 4.03/9.1...................     12.17     .1943     .1961
Light series:
  Light and green A...........................  1.7PB 4.32/9.2....................     14.22     .1904     .2056
  Light and green B...........................  1.5PB 4.11/9.6....................     12.72     .1815     .1971
  Light and vivid.............................  3.2PB 3.95/10.05..................     11.70     .1831     .1868
Dark series:
  Dark and grayish............................  3.9PB 4.01/8.7....................     12.04     .1982     .1992
  Dark and purple A...........................  4.8PB 3.67/9.3....................      9.95     .1918     .1831
  Dark and purple B...........................  5.2PB 3.80/9.05...................     10.76     .1985     .1885
Purple:
  Central series:
    Central color.............................  9.5P 4.71/11.3....................     17.25     .3274     .2165
    Red.......................................  1.0RP 5.31/10.8...................     22.70     .3404     .2354
    Red and vivid A...........................  1.4RP 5.00/11.9...................     19.78     .3500     .2274
    Red and vivid B...........................  0.2RP 4.39/12.5...................     14.70     .3365     .2059
    Vivid.....................................  8.0P 4.04/12.0....................     12.23     .3098     .1916
    Blue......................................  7.0P 4.39/10.8....................     14.71     .3007     .2037
    Grayish...................................  8.8P 5.00/10.3....................     19.73     .3191     .2251
Light series:
  Light and red A.............................  0.85RP 5.56/11.1..................     25.18     .3387     .2356
  Light and red B.............................  1.1RP 5.27/12.3...................     22.27     .3460     .2276
  Light and vivid.............................  9.2P 4.94/11.95...................     19.24     .3247     .2163
Dark series:
  Dark and grayish............................  9.6P 4.70/10.9....................     17.19     .3283     .2204
  Dark and vivid..............................  8.4P 4.05/11.6....................     12.35     .3144     .1970
  Dark and blue...............................  7.5P 4.32/10.5....................     14.19     .3059     .2078
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


[[Page 397]]


              Table 3--Specification for Colors for Use With Labels Printed on Packagings Surfaces
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                CIE data for source C                    Red     Orange    Yellow     Green     Blue     Purple
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
x...................................................      .424      .460      .417      .228      .200      .377
y...................................................      .306      .370      .392      .354      .175      .205
x...................................................      .571      .543      .490      .310      .255      .377
y...................................................      .306      .400      .442      .354      .250      .284
x...................................................      .424      .445      .390      .228      .177      .342
y...................................................      .350      .395      .430      .403      .194      .205
x...................................................      .571      .504      .440      .310      .230      .342
y...................................................      .350      .430      .492      .403      .267      .284
 
Y (high)............................................      23.0      41.6      72.6      20.6      15.9      21.2
Y (low).............................................       7.7      19.5      29.1       7.4       6.5       8.2
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

[Amdt. 172-50, 44 FR 9757, Feb. 15, 1979; Amdt. 172-50, 44 FR 10984, 
Feb. 26, 1979, as amended by Amdt. 172-50, 44 FR 22467, Apr. 16, 1979; 
50 FR 45731, Nov. 1, 1985; Amdt. 172-127, 59 FR 49133, Sept. 26, 1994]

                 Appendix B to Part 172--Trefoil Symbol

    Source: 60 FR 50306, Sept. 28, 1995, unless otherwise noted.
    1. Except as provided in paragraph 2 of this appendix, the trefoil 
symbol required for RADIOACTIVE labels and placards and required to be 
marked on certain packages of Class 7 materials must conform to the 
design and size requirements of this appendix.
    2. RADIOACTIVE labels and placards that were printed prior to April 
1, 1996, in conformance with the requirements of this subchapter in 
effect on March 30, 1996, may continue to be used.

[[Page 398]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR28SE95.005

1=Radius of Circle--
    Minimum dimensions
    4 mm (0.16 inch) for markings and labels
    12.5 mm (0.5 inch) for placards
2=1\1/2\ Radii
3=5 radii for markings and labels
    4\1/2\ radii for placards.

[60 FR 50306, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended by 172-143, 61 FR 20750, May 8, 
1996]

[[Page 399]]

         Appendix C to Part 172--Dimensional Specifications for 
                      Recommended Placard Holder
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.061
    


PART 173--SHIPPERS--GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SHIPMENTS AND PACKAGINGS--Table of Contents




                           Subpart A--General

Sec.
173.1  Purpose and scope.
173.2  Hazardous materials classes and index to hazard class 
          definitions.
173.2a  Classification of a material having more than one hazard.
173.3  Packaging and exceptions.
173.4  Small quantity exceptions.
173.5  Agricultural operations.
173.5a  Oilfield service vehicles.
173.6  Materials of trade exceptions.

[[Page 400]]

173.7  U.S. Government material.
173.8  Exceptions for non-specification packagings used in intrastate 
          transportation.
173.9  Transport vehicles or freight containers containing lading which 
          has been fumigated.
173.10  Tank car shipments.
173.12  Exceptions for shipment of waste materials.
173.13  Exceptions for Class 3, Divisions 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 5.1, 6.1, and 
          Classes 8 and 9 materials.

    Subpart B--Preparation of Hazardous Materials for Transportation

173.21  Forbidden materials and packages.
173.22  Shipper's responsibility.
173.22a  Use of packagings authorized under exemptions.
173.23  Previously authorized packaging.
173.24  General requirements for packagings and packages.
173.24a  Additional general requirements for non-bulk packagings and 
          packages.
173.24b  Additional general requirements for bulk packagings.
173.25  Authorized packagings and overpacks.
173.26  Quantity limitations.
173.27  General requirements for transportation by aircraft.
173.28  Reuse, reconditioning and remanufacture of packagings.
173.29  Empty packagings.
173.30  Loading and unloading of transport vehicles.
173.31  Use of tank cars.
173.32  Requirements for the use of portable tanks.
173.33  Hazardous materials in cargo tank motor vehicles.
173.34  [Reserved]
173.35  Hazardous materials in intermediate bulk containers (IBCs).
173.40  General packaging requirements for toxic materials packaged in 
          cylinders.

    Subpart C--Definitions, Classification and Packaging for Class 1

173.50  Class 1--Definitions.
173.51  Authorization to offer and transport explosives.
173.52  Classification codes and compatibility groups of explosives.
173.53  Provisions for using old classifications of explosives.
173.54  Forbidden explosives.
173.55  [Reserved]
173.56  New explosives--Definition and procedures for classification and 
          approval.
173.57  Acceptance criteria for new explosives.
173.58  Assignment of class and division for new explosives.
173.59  Description of terms for explosives.
173.60  General packaging requirements for explosives.
173.61  Mixed packaging requirements.
173.62  Specific packaging requirements for explosives.
173.63  Packaging exceptions.

 Subpart D--Definitions, Classification, Packing Group Assignments and 
    Exceptions for Hazardous Material Other Than Class 1 and Class 7

173.115  Class 2, Divisions 2.1, 2.2, and 2.3--Definitions.
173.116  Class 2--Assignment of hazard zone.
173.117-173.119  [Reserved]
173.120  Class 3--Definitions.
173.121  Class 3--Assignment of packing group.
173.124  Class 4, Divisions 4.1, 4.2 and 4.3--Definitions.
173.125  Class 4--Assignment of packing group.
173.127  Class 5, Division 5.1--Definition and assignment of packing 
          groups.
173.128  Class 5, Division 5.2--Definitions and types.
173.129  Class 5, Division 5.2--Assignment of packing group.
173.132  Class 6, Division 6.1--Definitions.
173.133  Assignment of packing group and hazard zones for Division 6.1 
          materials.
173.134  Class 6, Division 6.2--Definitions, exceptions and packing 
          group assignments.
173.136  Class 8--Definitions.
173.137  Class 8--Assignment of packing group.
173.140  Class 9--Definitions.
173.141  Class 9--Assignment of packing group.
173.144  Other Regulated Materials (ORM)--Definitions.
173.145  Other Regulated Materials--Assignment of packing group.
173.150  Exceptions for Class 3 (flammable) and combustible liquids.
173.151  Exceptions for Class 4.
173.152  Exceptions for Division 5.1 (oxidizers) and Division 5.2 
          (organic peroxides).
173.153  Exceptions for Division 6.1 (poisonous materials).
173.154  Exceptions for Class 8 (corrosive materials).
173.155  Exceptions for Class 9 (miscellaneous hazardous materials).
173.156  Exceptions for ORM materials.

Subpart E--Non-bulk Packaging for Hazardous Materials Other Than Class 1 
                               and Class 7

173.158  Nitric acid.
173.159  Batteries, wet.
173.160  Bombs, smoke, non-explosive (corrosive).
173.161  Chemical kits.

[[Page 401]]

173.162  Gallium.
173.163  Hydrogen fluoride.
173.164  Mercury (metallic and articles containing mercury).
173.166  Air bag inflators, air bag modules and seat-belt pretensioners.
173.170  Black powder for small arms.
173.171  Smokeless powder for small arms.
173.172  Aircraft hydraulic power unit fuel tank.
173.173  Paint, paint-related material, adhesives and ink and resins.
173.174  Refrigerating machines.
173.181  Pyrophoric materials (liquids).
173.182  Barium azide--50 percent or more water wet.
173.183  Nitrocellulose base film.
173.184  Highway or rail fusee.
173.185  Lithium batteries and cells.
173.186  Matches.
173.187  Pyrophoric solids, metals or alloys, n.o.s.
173.188  White or yellow phosphorous.
173.189  Batteries containing sodium or cells containing sodium.
173.192  Packaging for certain toxic gases in Hazard Zone A.
173.193  Bromoacetone, methyl bromide, chloropicrin and methyl bromide 
          or methyl chloride mixtures, etc.
173.194  Gas identification sets.
173.195  Hydrogen cyanide, anhydrous, stabilized (hydrocyanic acid, 
          aqueous solution).
173.196  Infectious substances (etiologic agents).
173.197  Regulated medical waste.
173.198  Nickel carbonyl.
173.199  Diagnostic specimens and used health care products.
173.201  Non-bulk packagings for liquid hazardous materials in Packing 
          Group I.
173.202  Non-bulk packagings for liquid hazardous materials in Packing 
          Group II.
173.203  Non-bulk packagings for liquid hazardous materials in Packing 
          Group III.
173.204  Non-bulk, non-specification packagings for certain hazardous 
          materials.
173.205  Specification cylinders for liquid hazardous materials.
173.211  Non-bulk packagings for solid hazardous materials in Packing 
          Group I.
173.212  Non-bulk packagings for solid hazardous materials in Packing 
          Group II.
173.213  Non-bulk packagings for solid hazardous materials in Packing 
          Group III.
173.214  Packagings which require approval by the Associate 
          Administrator.
173.216  Asbestos, blue, brown, or white.
173.217  Carbon dioxide, solid (dry ice).
173.218  Fish meal or fish scrap.
173.219  Life-saving appliances.
173.220  Internal combustion engines, self-propelled vehicles, 
          mechanical equipment containing internal combustion engines, 
          and battery powered vehicles or equipment.
173.221  Polymeric beads, expandable and Plastic molding compound.
173.222  Dangerous good in equipment, machinery or apparatus.
173.224  Packaging and control and emergency temperatures for self-
          reactive materials.
173.225  Packaging requirements and other provisions for organic 
          peroxides.
173.226  Materials poisonous by inhalation, Division 6.1, Packing Group 
          I, Hazard Zone A.
173.227  Materials poisonous by inhalation, Division 6.1, Packing Group 
          I, Hazard Zone B.
173.228  Bromine pentaflouride or bromine trifluoride.
173.229  Chloric acid solution or chlorine dioxide hydrate, frozen.

Subpart F--Bulk Packaging for Hazardous Materials Other Than Class 1 and 
                                 Class 7

173.240  Bulk packaging for certain low hazard solid materials.
173.241  Bulk packagings for certain low hazard liquid and solid 
          materials.
173.242  Bulk packagings for certain medium hazard liquids and solids, 
          including solids with dual hazards.
173.243  Bulk packaging for certain high hazard liquids and dual hazard 
          materials which pose a moderate hazard.
173.244  Bulk packaging for certain pyrophoric liquids (Division 4.2), 
          dangerous when wet (Division 4.3) materials, and poisonous 
          liquids with inhalation hazards (Division 6.1).
173.245  Bulk packaging for extremely hazardous materials such as 
          poisonous gases (Division 2.3).
173.247  Bulk packaging for certain elevated temperature materials.
173.249  Bromine.

               Subpart G--Gases; Preparation and Packaging

173.300  [Reserved]
173.301  General requirements for shipment of compressed gases in 
          cylinders and spherical pressure vessels.
173.301a  Additional general requirements for shipment of specification 
          cylinders.
173.301b  [Reserved]
173.302  Filling of cylinders with nonliquefied (permanent) compressed 
          gases.
173.302a  Additional requirements for shipment nonliquefied (permanent) 
          compressed gases in specification cylinders.
173.302b  [Reserved]
173.303  Charging of cylinders with compressed gas in solution 
          (acetylene).
173.304  Filling of cylinders with liquefied compressed gases.

[[Page 402]]

173.304a  Additional requirements for shipment of liquefied compressed 
          gases in specification cylinders.
173.304b  [Reserved]
173.305  Charging of cylinders with a mixture of compressed gas and 
          other material.
173.306  Limited quantities of compressed gases.
173.307  Exceptions for compressed gases.
173.308  Cigarette lighter or other similar device charged with fuel.
173.309  Fire extinguishers.
173.314  Compressed gases in tank cars and multi-unit tank cars.
173.315  Compressed gases in cargo tanks and portable tanks.
173.316  Cryogenic liquids in cylinders.
173.318  Cryogenic liquids in cargo tanks.
173.319  Cryogenic liquids in tank cars.
173.320  Cryogenic liquids; exceptions.
173.321  Ethylamine.
173.322  Ethyl chloride.
173.323  Ethylene oxide.
173.334  Organic phosphates mixed with compressed gas.
173.335  Gas generator assemblies.
173.336  Nitrogen dioxide, liquefied, or dinitrogen tetroxide, 
          liquefied.
173.337  Nitric oxide.
173.338  Tungsten hexafluoride.
173.340  Tear gas devices.

Subpart H [Reserved]

                Subpart I-Class 7 (Radioactive) Materials

173.401   Scope.
173.403   Definitions.
173.410   General design requirements.
173.411   Industrial packagings.
173.412   Additional design requirements for Type A packages.
173.413   Requirements for Type B packages.
173.415   Authorized Type A packages.
173.416   Authorized Type B packages.
173.417   Authorized fissile materials packages.
173.418   Authorized packages--pyrophoric Class 7 (radioactive) 
          materials.
173.419   Authorized packages--oxidizing Class 7 (radioactive) 
          materials.
173.420   Uranium hexafluoride (fissile, fissile excepted and non-
          fissile).
173.421   Excepted packages for limited quantities of Class 7 
          (radioactive) materials.
173.422   Additional requirements for excepted packages containing Class 
          7 (radioactive) materials.
173.423   Requirements for multiple hazard limited quantity Class 7 
          (radioactive) materials.
173.424   Excepted packages for radioactive instruments and articles.
173.425   Table of activity limits--excepted quantities and articles.
173.426   Excepted packages for articles containing natural uranium or 
          thorium.
173.427   Transport requirements for low specific activity (LSA) Class 7 
          (radioactive) materials and surface contaminated objects 
          (SCO).
173.428   Empty Class 7 (radioactive) materials packaging.
173.431   Activity limits for Type A and Type B packages.
173.433   Requirements for determining A1 and A2 
          values for radionuclides and for the listing of radionuclides 
          on shipping papers and labels.
173.434   Activity-mass relationships for uranium and natural thorium.
173.435   Table of A1 and A2 values for 
          radionuclides.
173.441   Radiation level limitations.
173.442   Thermal limitations.
173.443   Contamination control.
173.447   Storage incident to transportation--general requirements.
173.448   General transportation requirements.
173.453   Fissile materials--exceptions.
173.457   Transportation of fissile material, controlled shipments--
          specific requirements.
173.459   Mixing of fissile material packages.
173.461   Demonstration of compliance with tests.
173.462   Preparation of specimens for testing.
173.465   Type A packaging tests.
173.466   Additional tests for Type A packagings designed for liquids 
          and gases.
173.467   Tests for demonstrating the ability of Type B and fissile 
          materials packagings to withstand accident conditions in 
          transportation.
173.468   Test for LSA-III material.
173.469   Tests for special form Class 7 (radioactive) materials.
173.471   Requirements for U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission approved 
          packages.
173.472   Requirements for exporting DOT Specification Type B and 
          fissile packages.
173.473   Requirements for foreign-made packages.
173.474   Quality control for construction of packaging.
173.475   Quality control requirements prior to each shipment of Class 7 
          (radioactive) materials.
173.476   Approval of special form Class 7 (radioactive) materials.

Subparts J-O [Reserved]

Appendix A to Part 173 [Reserved]
Appendix B to Part 173--Procedure for Testing Chemical Compatibility and 
          Rate of Permeation in Plastic Packaging and Receptacles

[[Page 403]]

Appendix C to Part 173--Procedure for Base-level Vibration Testing
Appendix D to Part 173--Test Methods for Dynamite (Explosive, Blasting, 
          Type A)
Appendixes E-G to Part 173 [Reserved]
Appendix H to Part 173--Method of Testing for Sustained Combustibility

    Authority: 49 U.S.C. 5101-5127, 44701; 49 CFR 1.45, 1.53.



                           Subpart A--General



Sec. 173.1  Purpose and scope.

    (a) This part includes:
    (1) Definitions of hazardous materials for transportation purposes;
    (2) Requirements to be observed in preparing hazardous materials for 
shipment by air, highway, rail, or water, or any combination thereof; 
and
    (3) Inspection, testing, and retesting responsibilities for persons 
who retest, recondition, maintain, repair and rebuild containers used or 
intended for use in the transportation of hazardous materials.
    (b) A shipment of hazardous materials that is not prepared in 
accordance with this subchapter may not be offered for transportation by 
air, highway, rail, or water. It is the responsibility of each hazmat 
employer subject to the requirements of this subchapter to ensure that 
each hazmat employee is trained in accordance with the requirements 
prescribed in this subchapter. It is the duty of each person who offers 
hazardous materials for transportation to instruct each of his officers, 
agents, and employees having any responsibility for preparing hazardous 
materials for shipment as to applicable regulations in this subchapter.
    (c) When a person other than the person preparing a hazardous 
material for shipment performs a function required by this part, that 
person shall perform the function in accordance with this part.
    (d) In general, the Hazardous Materials Regulations (HMR) contained 
in this subchapter are based on the UN Recommendations and are 
consistent with international regulations issued by the International 
Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO Technical Instructions) and the 
International Maritime Organization (IMDG Code). However, the HMR are 
not consistent in all respects with the UN Recommendations, the ICAO 
Technical Instructions or the IMDG Code, and compliance with the HMR 
will not guarantee acceptance by regulatory bodies outside of the United 
States.

[Amdt. 173-94, 41 FR 16062, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 173-100, 
41 FR 40476, Sept. 20, 1976; Amdt. 173-161, 48 FR 2655, Jan. 20, 1983; 
Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52606, Dec. 21, 1990; Amdt. 173-231, 57 FR 20953, 
May 15, 1992; 64 FR 10776, Mar. 5, 1999]



Sec. 173.2  Hazardous materials classes and index to hazard class definitions.

    The hazard class of a hazardous material is indicated either by its 
class (or division) number, its class name, or by the letters ``ORM-D''. 
The following table lists class numbers, division numbers, class or 
division names and those sections of this subchapter which contain 
definitions for classifying hazardous materials, including forbidden 
materials.

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                49 CFR
                   Division                                   reference
   Class No.       No. (if      Name of class or division        for
                     any)                                    definitions
------------------------------------------------------------------------
None             ...........  Forbidden materials..........       173.21
None             ...........  Forbidden explosives.........       173.54
1                        1.1  Explosives (with a mass             173.50
                               explosion hazard).
1                        1.2  Explosives (with a projection       173.50
                               hazard).
1                        1.3  Explosives (with                    173.50
                               predominately a fire hazard).
1                        1.4  Explosives (with no                 173.50
                               significant blast hazard).
1                        1.5  Very insensitive explosives;        173.50
                               blasting agents.
1                        1.6  Extremely insensitive               173.50
                               detonating substances.
2                        2.1  Flammable gas................      173.115
2                        2.2  Non-flammable compressed gas.      173.115
2                        2.3  Poisonous gas................      173.115
3                ...........  Flammable and combustible          173.120
                               liquid.
4                        4.1  Flammable solid..............      173.124
4                        4.2  Spontaneously combustible          173.124
                               material.
4                        4.3  Dangerous when wet material..      173.124
5                        5.1  Oxidizer.....................      173.127

[[Page 404]]

 
5                        5.2  Organic peroxide.............      173.128
6                        6.1  Poisonous materials..........      173.132
6                        6.2  Infectious substance               173.134
                               (Etiologic agent).
7                ...........  Radioactive material.........      173.403
8                ...........  Corrosive material...........      173.136
9                ...........  Miscellaneous hazardous            173.140
                               material.
None             ...........  Other regulated material: ORM-     173.144
                               D.
------------------------------------------------------------------------


[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52606, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 57 FR 45460, 
Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 173-234, 58 FR 51531, Oct. 1, 1993]



Sec. 173.2a  Classification of a material having more than one hazard.

    (a) Classification of a material having more than one hazard. Except 
as provided in paragraph (c) of this section, a material not 
specifically listed in the Sec. 172.101 table that meets the definition 
of more than one hazard class or division as defined in this part, shall 
be classed according to the highest applicable hazard class of the 
following hazard classes, which are listed in descending order of 
hazard:
    (1) Class 7 (radioactive materials, other than limited quantities).
    (2) Division 2.3 (poisonous gases).
    (3) Division 2.1 (flammable gases).
    (4) Division 2.2 (nonflammable gases).
    (5) Division 6.1 (poisonous liquids), Packing Group I, poisonous-by-
inhalation only.
    (6) A material that meets the definition of a pyrophoric material in 
Sec. 173.124(b)(1) of this subchapter (Division 4.2).
    (7) A material that meets the definition of a self-reactive material 
in Sec. 173.124(a)(2) of this subchapter (Division 4.1).
    (8) Class 3 (flammable liquids), Class 8 (corrosive materials), 
Division 4.1 (flammable solids), Division 4.2 (spontaneously combustible 
materials), Division 4.3 (dangerous when wet materials), Division 5.1 
(oxidizers) or Division 6.1 (poisonous liquids or solids other than 
Packing Group I, poisonous-by-inhalation). The hazard class and packing 
group for a material meeting more than one of these hazards shall be 
determined using the precedence table in paragraph (b) of this section.
    (9) Combustible liquids.
    (10) Class 9 (miscellaneous hazardous materials).
    (b) Precedence of hazard table for Classes 3 and 8 and Divisions 
4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 5.1 and 6.1. The following table ranks those materials 
that meet the definition of Classes 3 and 8 and Divisions 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 
5.1 and 6.1:

                                                               Precedence of Hazard Table
                                                            [Hazard class and packing group]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                            6.1,                                                     8,
                                                 4.2  4.3  5.1 I  5.1 II  5.1 III   6.1, I    I   6.1   6.1   8, I    8, I   8, II  8, II  8, III   III
                                                            \1\     \1\     \1\     dermal  oral   II   III  liquid  solid  liquid  solid  liquid  solid
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3    I(\2\)....................................  ...  ...  .....  ......  .......      3     3    3     3       3    (\3\)     3    (\3\)     3    (\3\)
3    II(\2\)...................................  ...  ...  .....  ......  .......      3     3    3     3       8    (\3\)     3    (\3\)     3    (\3\)
3    III(\2\)..................................  ...  ...  .....  ......  .......      6.1   6.1  6.1  34       8    (\3\)     8    (\3\)     3    (\3\)
4.1  II \2\....................................  4.2  4.3   5.1     4.1     4.1        6.1   6.1  4.1   4.1  (\3\)     8    (\3\)     4.1  (\3\)     4.1
4.1  III \2\...................................  4.2  4.3   5.1     4.1     4.1        6.1   6.1  6.1   4.1  (\3\)     8    (\3\)     8    (\3\)     4.1
4.2  II........................................  ...  4.3   5.1     4.2     4.2        6.1   6.1  4.2   4.2     8      8       4.2    4.2     4.2    4.2
4.2  III.......................................  ...  4.3   5.1     5.1     4.2        6.1   6.1  6.1   4.2     8      8       8      8       4.2    4.2
4.3  I.........................................  ...  ...   5.1     4.3     4.3        6.1   4.3  4.3   4.3     4.3    4.3     4.3    4.3     4.3    4.3
4.3  II........................................  ...  ...   5.1     4.3     4.3        6.1   4.3  4.3   4.3     8      8       4.3    4.3     4.3    4.3
4.3  III.......................................  ...  ...   5.1     5.1     4.3        6.1   6.1  6.1   4.3     8      8       8      8       4.3    4.3
5.1  I \1\.....................................  ...  ...  .....  ......  .......      5.1   5.1  5.1   5.1     5.1    5.1     5.1    5.1     5.1    5.1
5.1  II \1\....................................  ...  ...  .....  ......  .......      6.1   5.1  5.1   5.1     8      8       5.1    5.1     5.1    5.1
5.1  III \1\...................................  ...  ...  .....  ......  .......      6.1   6.1  6.1   5.1     8      8       8      8       5.1    5.1
6.1  I, Dermal.................................  ...  ...  .....  ......  .......  .......  ....  ...  ....     8      6.1     6.1    6.1     6.1    6.1
6.1  I, Oral...................................  ...  ...  .....  ......  .......  .......  ....  ...  ....     8      6.1     6.1    6.1     6.1    6.1
6.1  II, Inhalation............................  ...  ...  .....  ......  .......  .......  ....  ...  ....     8      6.1     6.1    6.1     6.1    6.1
6.1  II, Dermal................................  ...  ...  .....  ......  .......  .......  ....  ...  ....     8      6.1     8      6.1     6.1    6.1
6.1  II, Oral..................................  ...  ...  .....  ......  .......  .......  ....  ...  ....     8      8       8      6.1     6.1    6.1

[[Page 405]]

 
6.1  III.......................................  ...  ...  .....  ......  .......  .......  ....  ...  ....     8      8       8      8       8      8
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ See Sec.  173.127.
\2\ Materials of Division 4.1 other than self-reactive substances and solid desensitized explosives, and materials of Class 3 other than liquid
  desensitized explosives.
\3\ Denotes an impossible combination.
\4\ For pesticides only, where a material has the hazards of Class 3, Packing Group III, and Division 6.1, Packing Group III, the primary hazard is
  Division 6.1, Packing Group III.

    Note 1: The most stringent packing group assigned to a hazard of the 
material takes precedence over other packing groups; for example, a 
material meeting Class 3 PG II and Division 6.1 PG I (oral toxicity) is 
classified as Class 3 PG I.
    Note 2: A material which meets the definition of Class 8 and has an 
inhalation toxicity by dusts and mists which meets criteria for Packing 
Group I specified in Sec. 173.133(a)(1) must be classed as Division 6.1 
if the oral or dermal toxicity meets criteria for Packing Group I or II. 
If the oral or dermal toxicity meets criteria for Packing Group III or 
less, the material must be classed as Class 8.

    (c) The following materials are not subject to the provisions of 
paragraph (a) of this section because of their unique properties:
    (1) A Class 1 (explosive) material that meets any other hazard class 
or division as defined in this part shall be assigned a division in 
Class 1. Class 1 materials shall be classed and approved in accordance 
with Sec. 173.56 of this part;
    (2) A Division 5.2 (organic peroxide) material that meets the 
definition of any other hazard class or division as defined in this 
part, shall be classed as Division 5.2;
    (3) A Division 6.2 (infectious substance) material that also meets 
the definition of another hazard class or division, other than Class 7, 
or that also is a limited quantity Class 7 material, shall be classed as 
Division 6.2;
    (4) A material that meets the definition of a wetted explosive in 
Sec. 173.124(a)(1) of this subchapter (Division 4.1). Wetted explosives 
are either specifically listed in the Sec. 172.101 table or are approved 
by the Associate Administrator (see Sec. 173.124(a)(1) of this 
subchapter); and
    (5) A limited quantity of a Class 7 (radioactive) material that 
meets the definition for more than one hazard class or division shall be 
classed in accordance with Sec. 173.423.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52606, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66264, 
Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-241, 59 FR 67490, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173-247, 
60 FR 48787, Sept. 20, 1995; Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995; 
64 FR 10776, Mar. 5, 1999; 66 FR 33426, June 21, 2001; 66 FR 45182, 
45379, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.3  Packaging and exceptions.

    (a) The packaging of hazardous materials for transportation by air, 
highway, rail, or water must be as specified in this part. Methods of 
manufacture, packing, and storage of hazardous materials, that affect 
safety in transportation, must be open to inspection by a duly 
authorized representative of the initial carrier or of the Department. 
Methods of manufacture and related functions necessary for completion of 
a DOT specification or U.N. standard packaging must be open to 
inspection by a representative of the Department.
    (b) The regulations setting forth packaging requirements for a 
specific material apply to all modes of transportation unless otherwise 
stated, or unless exceptions from packaging requirements are authorized.
    (c) Salvage drums. Packages of hazardous materials that are damaged, 
defective, or found leaking and hazardous materials that have spilled or 
leaked may be placed in a metal or plastic removable head salvage drum 
that is compatible with the lading and shipped for repackaging or 
disposal under the following conditions:
    (1) Except as provided in paragraph (c)(7) of this section, the drum 
must be a UN 1A2, 1B2, 1N2 or 1H2 tested and marked for Packing Group 
III or higher performance standards for liquids or solids and a 
leakproofness test of 20 kPa (3 psig). Alternatively, a drum

[[Page 406]]

manufactured and marked prior to October 1, 1993 as a salvage drum, in 
accordance with the provisions of this section in effect on September 
30, 1991, is authorized. Capacity of the drum may not exceed 450 L (119 
gallons).
    (2) Each drum shall be provided when necessary with sufficient 
cushioning and absorption material to prevent excessive movement of the 
damaged package and to eliminate the presence of any free liquid at the 
time the salvage drum is closed. All cushioning and absorbent material 
used in the drum must be compatible with the hazardous material.
    (3) Each salvage packaging must be marked with the proper shipping 
name of the hazardous material inside the packaging and the name and 
address of the consignee. In addition, the packaging must be marked 
``SALVAGE'' or ``SALVAGE DRUM''.
    (4) Each drum shall be labeled as prescribed for the respective 
material.
    (5) The shipper shall prepare shipping papers in accordance with 
subpart C of part 172 of this subchapter.
    (6) The overpack requirements of Sec. 173.25 do not apply to drums 
used in accordance with this paragraph.
    (7) A salvage packaging marked ``T'' in accordance with applicable 
provisions in the UN Recommendations may be used.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52607, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66265, 
Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-234, 58 FR 51531, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 173-261, 
62 FR 24719, May 6, 1997; 66 FR 45380, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.4  Small quantity exceptions.

    (a) Small quantities of Class 3, Division 4.1, Division 4.2 (PG II 
and III), Division 4.3 (PG II and III), Division 5.1, Division 5.2, 
Division 6.1, Class 7, Class 8, and Class 9 materials that also meet the 
definition of one or more of these hazard classes, are not subject to 
any other requirements of this subchapter when--
    (1) The maximum quantity of material per inner receptacle or article 
is limited to--
    (i) Thirty (30) mL (1 ounce) for authorized liquids, other than 
Division 6.1, Packing Group I, Hazard Zone A or B materials;
    (ii) Thirty (30) g (1 ounce) for authorized solid materials;
    (iii) One (1) g (0.04 ounce) for authorized materials meeting the 
definition of a Division 6.1, Packing Group I, Hazard Zone A or B 
material; and
    (iv) An activity level not exceeding that specified in 
Secs. 173.421, 173.424, 173.425 or 173.426, as appropriate, for a 
package containing a Class 7 (radioactive) material.
    (2) With the exception of temperature sensing devices, each inner 
receptacle:
    (i) Is not liquid-full at 55  deg.C (131  deg.F), and
    (ii) Is constructed of plastic having a minimum thickness of no less 
than 0.2 mm (0.008 inch), or earthenware, glass, or metal;
    (3) Each inner receptacle with a removable closure has its closure 
held securely in place with wire, tape, or other positive means;
    (4) Unless equivalent cushioning and absorbent material surrounds 
the inside packaging, each inner receptacle is securely packed in an 
inside packaging with cushioning and absorbent material that:
    (i) Will not react chemically with the material, and
    (ii) Is capable of absorbing the entire contents (if a liquid) of 
the receptacle;
    (5) The inside packaging is securely packed in a strong outside 
packaging;
    (6) The completed package, as demonstrated by prototype testing, is 
capable of sustaining--
    (i) Each of the following free drops made from a height of 1.8 m 
(5.9 feet) directly onto a solid unyielding surface without breakage or 
leakage from any inner receptacle and without a substantial reduction in 
the effectiveness of the package:
    (A) One drop flat on bottom;
    (B) One drop flat on top;
    (C) One drop flat on the long side;
    (D) One drop flat on the short side; and
    (E) One drop on a corner at the junction of three intersecting 
edges; and
    (ii) A compressive load as specified in Sec. 178.606(c) of this 
subchapter.

    Note to Paragraph (a)(6):
    Each of the tests in paragraph (a)(6) of this section may be 
performed on a different but identical package; i.e., all tests need not 
be performed on the same package.


[[Page 407]]


    (7) Placement of the material in the package or packing different 
materials in the package does not result in a violation of Sec. 173.21;
    (8) The gross mass of the completed package does not exceed 29 kg 
(64 pounds);
    (9) The package is not opened or otherwise altered until it is no 
longer in commerce; and
    (10) The shipper certifies conformance with this section by marking 
the outside of the package with the statement ``This package conforms to 
49 CFR 173.4'' or, alternatively, until October 1, 2001, with the 
statement ``This package conforms to the conditions and limitations 
specified in 49 CFR 173.4.''
    (b) A package containing a Class 7 (radioactive) material also must 
conform to the requirements of Sec. 173.421(a)(1) through (a)(5) or 
Sec. 173.424(a) through (g), as appropriate.
    (c) Packages which contain a Class 2, Division 4.2 (PG I), or 
Division 4.3 (PG I) material conforming to paragraphs (a)(1) through 
(a)(10) of this section may be offered for transportation or transported 
if specifically approved by the Associate Administrator.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52608, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66265, 
Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-234, 58 FR 51531, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 173-244, 
60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995; Amdt. 173-253, 61 FR 27173, May 30, 1996; 
65 FR 50460, Aug. 18, 2000; 65 FR 58628, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 33426, 
June 21, 2001; 66 FR 45183, 45379, 45381, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 61013, 
Sept. 27, 2002]



Sec. 173.5  Agricultural operations.

    (a) For other than a Class 2 material, the transportation of an 
agricultural product over local roads between fields of the same farm is 
excepted from the requirements of this subchapter. A Class 2 material 
transported over local roads between fields of the same farm is excepted 
from subparts G and H of part 172 of this subchapter. In either 
instance, transportation of the hazardous material is subject to the 
following conditions:
    (1) It is transported by a farmer who is an intrastate private motor 
carrier; and
    (2) The movement of the agricultural product conforms to 
requirements of the State in which it is transported and is specifically 
authorized by a State statute or regulation in effect before October 1, 
1998.
    (b) The transportation of an agricultural product to or from a farm, 
within 150 miles of the farm, is excepted from the requirements in 
subparts G and H of part 172 of this subchapter and from the specific 
packaging requirements of this subchapter when:
    (1) It is transported by a farmer who is an intrastate private motor 
carrier;
    (2) The total amount of agricultural product being transported on a 
single vehicle does not exceed:
    (i) 7,300 kg (16,094 lbs.) of ammonium nitrate fertilizer properly 
classed as Division 5.1, PG III, in a bulk packaging, or
    (ii) 1900 L (502 gallons) for liquids or gases, or 2,300 kg (5,070 
lbs.) for solids, of any other agricultural product;
    (3) The movement and packaging of the agricultural product conform 
to the requirements of the State in which it is transported and are 
specifically authorized by a State statute or regulation in effect 
before October 1, 1998; and
    (4) Each person having any responsibility for transporting the 
agricultural product or preparing the agricultural product for shipment 
has been instructed in the applicable requirements of this subchapter.
    (c) Formulated liquid agricultural products in specification 
packagings of 220 L (58 gallons) capacity, or less, with closures 
manifolded to a closed mixing system and equipped with positive dry 
disconnect devices may be transported by a private motor carrier between 
a final distribution point and an ultimate point of application or for 
loading aboard an airplane for aerial application.
    (d) See Sec. 173.315(m) pertaining to nurse tanks of anhydrous 
ammonia.
    (e) See Sec. 173.6 pertaining to materials of trade.

[Amdt. 173-259, 62 FR 1215, Jan. 8, 1997, as amended by Amdt. 173-262, 
62 FR 49566, Sept. 22, 1997; Amdt. 173-259, 63 FR 8142, Feb. 18, 1998; 
65 FR 50460, Aug. 18, 2000]



Sec. 173.5a  Oilfield service vehicles.

    Notwithstanding Sec. 173.29 of this subchapter, a cargo tank mounted 
on a

[[Page 408]]

transport vehicle used in oilfield servicing operations is not subject 
to the specification requirements of this subchapter if--
    (a) The cargo tank and equipment contains only residual amounts 
(i.e., it is emptied so far as practicable) of a flammable liquid alone 
or in combination with water,
    (b) No flame producing device is operated during transportation, and
    (c) The proper shipping name is preceded by ``Residual'' on the 
shipping paper for each movement on a public highway.

[Amdt. 173-196, 51 FR 5971, Feb. 18, 1986]



Sec. 173.6  Materials of trade exceptions.

    When transported by motor vehicle in conformance with this section, 
a material of trade (see Sec. 171.8 of this subchapter) is not subject 
to any other requirements of this subchapter besides those set forth or 
referenced in this section.
    (a) Materials and amounts. A material of trade is limited to the 
following:
    (1) A Class 3, 8, 9, Division 4.1, 5.1, 5.2, 6.1, or ORM-D material 
contained in a packaging having a gross mass or capacity not over--
    (i) 0.5 kg (1 pound) or 0.5 L (1 pint) for a Packing Group I 
material;
    (ii) 30 kg (66 pounds) or 30 L (8 gallons) for a Packing Group II, 
Packing Group III, or ORM-D material;
    (iii) 1500 L (400 gallons) for a diluted mixture, not to exceed 2 
percent concentration, of a Class 9 material.
    (2) A Division 2.1 or 2.2 material in a cylinder with a gross weight 
not over 100 kg (220 pounds), or a permanently mounted tank manufactured 
to ASME standards of not more than 70 gallon water capacity for a non-
liquefied Division 2.2 material with no subsidiary hazard.
    (3) A Division 4.3 material in Packing Group II or III contained in 
a packaging having a gross capacity not exceeding 30 mL (1 ounce).
    (4) This section does not apply to a hazardous material that is 
self-reactive (see Sec. 173.124), poisonous by inhalation (see 
Sec. 173.133), or a hazardous waste.
    (b) Packaging. (1) Packagings must be leak tight for liquids and 
gases, sift proof for solids, and be securely closed, secured against 
movement, and protected against damage.
    (2) Each material must be packaged in the manufacturer's original 
packaging, or a packaging of equal or greater strength and integrity.
    (3) Outer packagings are not required for receptacles (e.g., cans 
and bottles) that are secured against movement in cages, carts, bins, 
boxes or compartments.
    (4) For gasoline, a packaging must be made of metal or plastic and 
conform to the requirements of this subchapter or to the requirements of 
the Occupational Safety and Health Administration of the Department of 
Labor contained in 29 CFR 1910.106(d)(2) or 1926.152(a)(1).
    (5) A cylinder or other pressure vessel containing a Division 2.1 or 
2.2 material must conform to packaging, qualification, maintenance, and 
use requirements of this subchapter, except that outer packagings are 
not required. Manifolding of cylinders is authorized provided all valves 
are tightly closed.
    (c) Hazard communication. (1) A non-bulk packaging other than a 
cylinder (including a receptacle transported without an outer packaging) 
must be marked with a common name or proper shipping name to identify 
the material it contains, including the letters ``RQ'' if it contains a 
reportable quantity of a hazardous substance.
    (2) A bulk packaging containing a diluted mixture of a Class 9 
material must be marked on two opposing sides with the four-digit 
identification number of the material. The identification number must be 
displayed on placards, orange panels or, alternatively, a white square-
on-point configuration having the same outside dimensions as a placard 
(at least 273 mm (10.8 inches) on a side), in the manner specified in 
Sec. 172.332 (b) and (c) of this subchapter.
    (3) A DOT specification cylinder (except DOT specification 39) must 
be marked and labeled as prescribed in this subchapter. Each DOT-39 
cylinder must display the markings specified in 178.65(i).
    (4) The operator of a motor vehicle that contains a material of 
trade must be informed of the presence of the hazardous material 
(including whether the

[[Page 409]]

package contains a reportable quantity) and must be informed of the 
requirements of this section.
    (d) Aggregate gross weight. Except for a material of trade 
authorized by paragraph (a)(1)(iii) of this section, the aggregate gross 
weight of all materials of trade on a motor vehicle may not exceed 200 
kg (440 pounds).
    (e) Other exceptions. A material of trade may be transported on a 
motor vehicle under the provisions of this section with other hazardous 
materials without affecting its eligibility for exceptions provided by 
this section.

[Amdt. 173-259, 62 FR 1216, Jan. 8, 1997, as amended by Amdt. 173-262, 
62 FR 49566, Sept. 22, 1997; 62 FR 51560, Oct. 1, 1997; Amdt. 173-259, 
63 FR 8142, Feb. 18, 1998; 63 FR 52849, Oct. 1, 1998; 66 FR 45381, Aug. 
28, 2001]

    Effective Date Note: At 67 FR 53137, Aug. 14, 2002, Sec. 173.6 was 
amended by redesignating paragraph (a)(4) as (a)(5) and by adding a new 
paragraph (a)(4), effective Oct. 1, 2002. At 67 FR 54967, the effective 
date was corrected to Feb. 14, 2003. For the convenience of the user, 
the added text is set forth as follows:

Sec. 173.6  Materials of trade exceptions.

                                * * * * *

    (a) * * *
    (4) A Division 6.2 material, other than a Risk Group 4 material, 
that is a diagnostic specimen, biological product, or regulated medical 
waste. The material must be contained in a combination packaging. For 
liquids, the inner packaging must be leak tight, and the outer packaging 
must contain sufficient absorbent material to absorb the entire contents 
of the inner packaging. For sharps, the inner packaging must be 
constructed of a rigid material resistant to punctures and leaks. For 
all Division 6.2 materials, the outer packaging must be a strong, tight 
packaging securely closed and secured against movement.
    (i) For a diagnostic specimen or biological product, combination 
packagings must conform to the following capacity limitations:
    (A) One or more inner packagings where the gross mass or capacity of 
each inner packaging does not exceed 0.5 kg (1.1 pound), or 0.5 L (17 
ounces), and an outer packaging having a gross mass or capacity not 
exceeding 4 kg (8.8 pounds) or 4 L (1 gallon); or
    (B) A single inner packaging with a gross mass or capacity not 
exceeding 16 kg (35.2 pounds) or 16 L (4.2 gallons) in a single outer 
packaging.
    (ii) For a regulated medical waste, a combination packaging must 
consist of one or more inner packagings having a gross mass or capacity 
not exceeding 4 kg (8.8 pounds) or 4 L (1 gallon), and an outer 
packaging having a gross mass or capacity not exceeding 16 kg (35.2 
pounds) or 16 L (4.2 gallons).

                                * * * * *



Sec. 173.7  U.S. Government material.

    (a) Hazardous materials offered for transportation by, for, or to 
the Department of Defense (DOD) of the U.S. Government, including 
commercial shipments pursuant to a DOD contract, must be packaged in 
accordance with the regulations in this subchapter or in packagings of 
equal or greater strength and efficiency as certified by DOD in 
accordance with the procedures prescribed by ``Performance Oriented 
Packaging of Hazardous Material, DLAR 4145.41/AR 700-143/AFR 71-5/
NAVSUPINST 4030.55/MCO 4030.40.'' Hazardous materials offered for 
transportation by DOD under this provision may be reshipped by any 
shipper to any consignee provided the original packaging has not been 
damaged or altered in any manner.
    (1) Hazardous materials sold by the DOD in packagings that are not 
marked in accordance with the requirements of this subchapter may be 
shipped from DOD installations if the DOD certifies in writing that the 
packagings are equal to or greater in strength and efficiency than the 
packaging prescribed in this subchapter. The shipper shall obtain such a 
certification in duplicate for each shipment. He shall give one copy to 
the originating carrier and retain the other for no less than 1 year.
    (2) [Reserved]
    (b) Shipments of hazardous materials, made by or under the direction 
or supervision of the U.S. Department of Energy (DOE) or the Department 
of Defense (DOD), for the purpose of national security, and which are 
escorted by personnel specifically designated by or under the authority 
of those agencies, are not subject to the requirements of this 
subchapter. For transportation by a motor vehicle or a rail car, the 
escorts must be in a separate transport vehicle from the transport 
vehicle carrying the hazardous materials that are excepted by this 
paragraph. A document certifying that the shipment is

[[Page 410]]

for the purpose of national security must be in the possession of the 
person in charge of providing security during transportation.
    (c) Shipments of explosive samples, not exceeding 1 g net weight, 
offered by and consigned to the Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco and Firearms 
(ATF) of the Department of the Treasury are not otherwise subject to the 
regulations in parts 110-189 of this subchapter when placed in a 
specifically designed multi-unit assembly packed in a strong outside 
packaging. The packaging must be of a type accepted by ATF as capable of 
precluding a propagation of any explosion outside the packaging. The 
second component from the outside of the packaging must be marked or 
tagged to indicate the presence of an explosive.
    (d) Notwithstanding the requirements of Secs. 173.416 and 173.417 of 
this subchapter, packagings made by or under the direction of the U.S. 
Department of Energy may be used for the transportation of Class 7 
materials when evaluated, approved, and certified by the Department of 
Energy against packaging standards equivalent to those specified in 10 
CFR part 71. Packages shipped in accordance with this paragraph shall be 
marked and otherwise prepared for shipment in a manner equivalent to 
that required by this subchapter for packagings approved by the Nuclear 
Regulatory Commission.
    (e) Class 1 (explosive) materials owned by the Department of Defense 
and packaged prior to January 1, 1990, in accordance with the 
requirements of this subchapter in effect at that time, are excepted 
from the marking and labeling requirements of part 172 of this 
subchapter and the packaging and package marking requirements of part 
178 of this subchapter, provided the packagings have maintained their 
integrity and the explosive material is declared as ``government-owned 
goods packaged prior to January 1, 1990'' on the shipping papers. In 
addition, packages of these materials owned by the Department of Defense 
that are marked and labeled in conformance with the requirements of the 
HMR that were in effect at the time they were originally marked and 
labeled are excepted from the current marking and labeling requirements.

[29 FR 18671, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967]

    Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting Sec. 173.7, 
see the List of CFR Sections Affected which appears in the Finding Aids 
section of the printed volume and on GPO Access.



Sec. 173.8  Exceptions for non-specification packagings used in intrastate transportation.

    (a) Non-specification bulk packagings. Notwithstanding requirements 
for specification packagings in subpart F of this part and parts 178 and 
180 of this subchapter, a non-specification bulk packaging may be used 
for transportation of a hazardous material by an intrastate motor 
carrier until July 1, 2000, in accordance with the provisions of 
paragraph (d) of this section.
    (b) Non-specification cargo tanks for petroleum products. 
Notwithstanding requirements for specification packagings in subpart F 
of this part and parts 178 and 180 of this subchapter, a non-
specification cargo tank motor vehicle having a capacity of less than 
13,250 L (3,500 gallons) may be used by an intrastate motor carrier for 
transportation of a flammable liquid petroleum product in accordance 
with the provisions of paragraph (d) of this section.
    (c) Permanently secured non-bulk tanks for petroleum products. 
Notwithstanding requirements for specification packagings in subpart F 
of this part 173 and parts 178 and 180 of this subchapter, a non-
specification metal tank permanently secured to a transport vehicle and 
protected against leakage or damage in the event of a turnover, having a 
capacity of less than 450 L (119 gallons), may be used by an intrastate 
motor carrier for transportation of a flammable liquid petroleum product 
in accordance with the provisions of paragraph (d) of this section.
    (d) Additional requirements. A packaging used under the provisions 
of paragraphs (a), (b) or (c) of this section must--
    (1) Be operated by an intrastate motor carrier and in use as a 
packaging for hazardous material before October 1, 1998;

[[Page 411]]

    (2) Be operated in conformance with the requirements of the State in 
which it is authorized;
    (3) Be specifically authorized by a State statute or regulation in 
effect before October 1, 1998, for use as a packaging for the hazardous 
material being transported;
    (4) Be offered for transportation and transported in conformance 
with all other applicable requirements of this subchapter;
    (5) Not be used to transport a flammable cryogenic liquid, hazardous 
substance, hazardous waste, or a marine pollutant (except for gasoline); 
and
    (6) On and after July 1, 2000, for a tank authorized under paragraph 
(b) or (c) of this section, conform to all requirements in part 180 
(except for Sec. 180.405(g)) of this subchapter in the same manner as 
required for a DOT specification MC 306 cargo tank motor vehicle.

[Amdt. 173-259, 62 FR 1216, Jan. 8, 1997, as amended by Amdt. 172-262, 
62 FR 49567, Sept. 22, 1997; Amdt. 173-259, 63 FR 8142, Feb. 18, 1998; 
66 FR 45380, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.9  Transport vehicles or freight containers containing lading which has been fumigated.

    (a) For the purpose of this section, not including 49 CFR part 387, 
a rail car, freight container, truck body, or trailer in which the 
lading has been fumigated with any material, or is undergoing 
fumigation, is a package containing a hazardous material, unless the 
transport vehicle or freight container has been sufficiently aerated so 
that it does not pose an unreasonable risk to health and safety.
    (b) No person may offer for transportation or transport a rail car, 
freight container, truck body, or trailer in which the lading has been 
fumigated or treated with any material, or is undergoing fumigation, 
unless the FUMIGANT marking specified in paragraph (c) of this section 
is prominently displayed so that it can be seen by any person attempting 
to enter the interior of the transport vehicle or freight container. For 
domestic transportation, a hazard warning label authorized by EPA under 
40 CFR part 156 may be used as an alternative to the FUMIGANT marking.
    (c) FUMIGANT marking. (1) The FUMIGANT marking must consist of red 
letters on a white background that is at least 30 cm (11.8 inches) wide 
and at least 25 cm (9.8 inches) high. Except for size and color, the 
FUMIGANT marking must be as follows:


[[Page 412]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR08JA97.004


    (2) The ``*'' shall be replaced with the technical name of the 
fumigant.
    (d) No person may affix or display on a rail car, freight container, 
truck body, or trailer (a package) the FUMIGANT marking specified in 
paragraph (c) of this section, unless the lading has been fumigated or 
is undergoing fumigation.
    (e) The FUMIGANT marking required by paragraph (b) of this section 
must

[[Page 413]]

remain on the rail car, freight container, truck body, or trailer until:
    (1) The fumigated lading is unloaded; and
    (2) The transport vehicle or freight container has undergone 
sufficient aeration to assure that it does not pose an unreasonable risk 
to health and safety.
    (f) For international shipments, transport documents must indicate 
the date of fumigation, type and amount of fumigant used, and 
instructions for disposal of any residual fumigant, including fumigation 
devices.
    (g) Any person subject to the requirements of this section, solely 
due to the fumigated lading, must be informed of the requirements of 
this section and the safety precautions necessary to protect themselves 
and others in the event of an incident or accident involving the 
fumigated lading.
    (h) Any person who offers for transportation or transports a rail 
car, freight container, truck body or trailer that is subject to this 
subchapter solely because of the hazardous materials designation 
specified in paragraph (a) of this section is not subject to any other 
requirements of this subchapter.

[Amdt. 173-260, 62 FR 1234, Jan. 8, 1997]



Sec. 173.10  Tank car shipments.

    (a) Tank cars containing any 2.1 material (including a cryogenic 
liquid) or Class 3 material with a flash point below 38  deg.C (100 
deg.F), except liquid road asphalt or tar, may not be offered for 
transportation unless originally consigned or subsequently reconsigned 
to parties having private-siding (see Note 1 of this section) or to 
parties using railroad siding facilities which have been equipped for 
piping the liquid from tank cars to permanent storage tanks of 
sufficient capacity to receive contents of car.
    (b) A tank car containing any Class 2 material must not be offered 
for transportation unless the car is consigned for delivery (see 
paragraph (c) of this section) and unloading on a private track (see 
Note 1 of this section) except that where no private track is available, 
delivery and unloading on carrier tracks is permitted provided the 
following conditions are complied with:
    (1) Any tank car of DOT-106A or 110A type (see Secs. 179.300 and 
179.301 of this subchapter) may be offered for transportation and the 
loaded unit tanks may be removed from car frame on carrier tracks, 
provided the shipper has obtained from the delivering carrier and filed 
with originating carrier, written permission (see Note 2 of this 
section) for such removal. The consignee must furnish adequately safe 
mechanical hoist, obtained from the carrier if desirable, by which the 
tanks shall be lifted from the car and deposited directly upon vehicles 
furnished by the consignee for immediate removal from carrier property 
or tanks must be lifted by adequately safe mechanical hoist from car 
directly to vessels for further transportation.
    (c) Any tank car of other than DOT-106A or 110A type (see 
Secs. 179.300 and 179.301 of this subchapter), containing anhydrous 
ammonia, liquefied hydrocarbon or liquefied petroleum gas, and having 
interior pipes of liquid and gas discharge valves equipped with check 
valves, may be consigned for delivery and unloading on carrier tracks, 
if the lading is piped directly from the car to permanent storage tanks 
of sufficient capacity to receive the entire contents of the car. Such 
cars may also be consigned for storage on a private track or on a 
carrier track when designated by the carrier for such storage.
    (d) For cars of the DOT-106A or 110A type (see Secs. 179.300 and 
179.301 of this subchapter), the tanks must be placed in position and 
attached to the car structure by the shipper.
    (e) Class 3 materials with a flash point below 38  deg.C (100 
deg.F) and Division 2.1 materials (including a cryogenic liquid) may not 
be loaded into tank cars on carrier property from tank trucks or drums.

    Note 1: For this purpose, a private track is a track outside of 
carrier's right-of-way, yard, and terminals, and of which the carrier 
does not own either the rails, ties, roadbed or right-of-way; or a track 
or portion of a track which is devoted to the purpose of its user, 
either by lease or written agreement; in which case the lease or written 
agreement will be considered as equivalent to ownership.
    Note 2: Carriers should give permission for the unloading of these 
containers on carrier tracks only where no private siding is available 
within reasonable trucking distance of final destination. The danger 
involved is the

[[Page 414]]

release of compressed gases due to accidental damage to container in 
handling. The exposure to this danger decreases directly with the 
isolation of the unloading point.

[29 FR 18773, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, 
and by Amdt. 173-162, 48 FR 10226, Mar. 10, 1983, and amended by Amdt. 
173-180, 49 FR 42735, Oct. 24, 1984; Amdt. 173-207, 53 FR 38274, Sept. 
29, 1988; Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52608, Dec. 21, 1990; 56 FR 66265, Dec. 
20, 1991; Amdt. 173-234, 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; 67 FR 61013, Sept. 
27, 2002]



Sec. 173.12  Exceptions for shipment of waste materials.

    (a) Open head drums. If a hazardous material that is a hazardous 
waste is required by this subchapter to be shipped in a closed head drum 
(i.e., a drum with a 7.0 cm (3 inches) or less bung opening) and the 
hazardous waste contains solids or semisolids that make its placement in 
a closed head drum impracticable, an equivalent (except for closure) 
open head drum may be used for the hazardous waste.
    (b) Lab packs. (1) Waste materials classed as Class or Division 3, 
4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 5.1, 6.1, 8, or 9 are excepted from the specification 
packaging requirements of this subchapter for combination packagings if 
packaged in accordance with this paragraph and transported for disposal 
or recovery by highway only. In addition, a generic description from the 
Sec. 172.101 table may be used in place of specific chemical names, when 
two or more chemically compatible waste materials in the same hazard 
class are packaged in the same outside packaging.
    (2) Additional packaging requirements are as follows:
    (i) The outer packaging must be a UN 1A2 or UN 1B2 metal drum, a UN 
1D plywood drum, a UN 1G fiber drum or a UN 1H2 plastic drum tested and 
marked at least for the Packing Group III performance level for liquids 
or solids;
    (ii) The inner packagings must be either glass, not exceeding 4 L (1 
gallon) rated capacity, or metal or plastic, not exceeding 20 L (5.3 
gallons) rated capacity;
    (iii) Each outer packaging may contain only one class of hazardous 
material;
    (iv) Inner packagings containing liquid must be surrounded by a 
chemically compatible absorbent material in sufficient quantity to 
absorb the total liquid contents; and
    (v) Gross weight of the complete package may not exceed 205 kg (452 
lbs).
    (3) Prohibited materials. The following materials may not be 
packaged or described under the provisions of this paragraph (b): a 
material poisonous by inhalation, a Division 6.1 Packing Group I 
material, a Division 4.2 Packing Group I material, chloric acid and 
oleum (fuming sulfuric acid).
    (c) Reuse of packagings. A previously used packaging may be reused 
for the shipment of hazardous waste to designated facilities, not 
subject to the reconditioning and reuse provisions contained in 
Sec. 173.28 and part 178 of this subchapter, under the following 
conditions:
    (1) Except as authorized by this paragraph, the waste must be 
packaged in accordance with this part and offered for transportation in 
accordance with the requirements of this subchapter.
    (2) Transportation is performed by highway only.
    (3) A package is not offered for transportation less than 24 hours 
after it is finally closed for transportation, and each package is 
inspected for leakage and is found to be free from leaks immediately 
prior to being offered for transportation.
    (4) Each package is loaded by the shipper and unloaded by the 
consignee, unless the motor carrier is a private or contract carrier.
    (5) The packaging may be used only once under this paragraph and may 
not be used again for shipment of hazardous materials except in 
accordance with Sec. 173.28.
    (d) Technical names for n.o.s. descriptions. The requirements for 
the inclusion of technical names for n.o.s. descriptions on shipping 
papers and package markings, Secs. 172.203 and 172.301 of this 
subchapter, respectively, do not apply to packages prepared in 
accordance with paragraph (b) of this section, except that packages 
containing materials meeting the definition of a hazardous substance 
must be described as required in Sec. 172.203 of this subchapter

[[Page 415]]

and marked as required in Sec. 172.324 of this subchapter.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52609, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66265, 
Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-231, 57 FR 52939, Nov. 5, 1992; Amdt. 173-138, 
59 FR 49133, Sept. 26, 1994; 65 FR 50460, Aug. 18, 2000; 65 FR 58629, 
Sept. 29, 2000]



Sec. 173.13  Exceptions for Class 3, Divisions 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 5.1, 6.1, and Classes 8 and 9 materials.

    (a) A Class 3, 8 or 9, or Division 4.1, 4.2, 4.3, 5.1, or 6.1 
material is excepted from the labeling (except for the CARGO AIRCRAFT 
ONLY label) and placarding requirements of this subchapter if prepared 
for transportation in accordance with the requirements of this section. 
A material that meets the definition of a material poisonous by 
inhalation may not be offered for transportation or transported under 
provisions of this section.
    (b) A hazardous material conforming to requirements of this section 
may be transported by motor vehicle, rail car, or cargo-only aircraft. 
Only hazardous materials permitted to be transported aboard a cargo-only 
aircraft by column (9B) of the Hazardous Materials Table in Sec. 172.101 
of this subchapter are authorized for transport aboard cargo-only 
aircraft pursuant to the provisions of this section.
    (c) A hazardous material permitted by paragraph (a) of this section 
must be packaged as follows:
    (1) For liquids:
    (i) The hazardous material must be placed in a tightly closed glass, 
plastic or metal inner packaging with a maximum capacity not exceeding 
1.2 L. Sufficient outage must be provided such that the inner packaging 
will not become liquid full at 55  deg.C (130  deg.F). The net quantity 
(measured at 20  deg.C (68  deg.F)) of liquid in any inner packaging may 
not exceed 1 L.
    (ii) The inner packaging must be placed in a hermetically-sealed 
barrier bag which is impervious to the lading, and then wrapped in a 
non-reactive absorbent material in sufficient quantity to completely 
absorb the contents of the inner packaging, and placed in a snugly 
fitting, metal can.
    (iii) The metal can must be securely closed. For liquids that are in 
Division 4.2 or 4.3, the metal can must be hermetically sealed. For 
Division 4.2 materials in Packing Group I, the metal can must be tested 
in accordance with part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group I 
performance level.
    (iv) The metal can must be placed in a fiberboard box that is placed 
in a hermetically-sealed barrier bag which is impervious to the lading.
    (v) The intermediate packaging must be placed inside a securely 
closed, outer packaging conforming to Sec. 173.201.
    (vi) Not more than four intermediate packagings are permitted in an 
outer packaging.
    (2) For solids:
    (i) The hazardous material must be placed in a tightly closed glass, 
plastic or metal inner packaging. The net quantity of material in any 
inner packaging may not exceed 2.85 kg (6.25 pounds).
    (ii) The inner packaging must be placed in a hermetically-sealed 
barrier bag which is impervious to the lading.
    (iii) The barrier bag and its contents must be placed in a 
fiberboard box that is placed in a hermetically-sealed barrier bag which 
is impervious to the lading.
    (iv) The intermediate packaging must be placed inside an outer 
packaging conforming to Sec. 173.211.
    (v) Not more than four intermediate packagings are permitted in an 
outer packaging.
    (d) The outside of the package must be marked, in association with 
the proper shipping name, with the statement: ``This package conforms to 
49 CFR 173.13.''

[Amdt. 173-253, 61 FR 27173, May 30, 1996, as amended at 65 FR 50460, 
Aug. 18, 2000; 66 FR 45381, Aug. 28, 2001]



    Subpart B--Preparation of Hazardous Materials for Transportation



Sec. 173.21  Forbidden materials and packages.

    Unless otherwise provided in this subchapter, the offering for 
transportation or transportation of the following is forbidden:
    (a) Materials that are designated ``Forbidden'' in Column 3 of the 
Sec. 172.101 table.

[[Page 416]]

    (b) Forbidden explosives as defined in Sec. 173.54 of this part.
    (c) Electrical devices which are likely to create sparks or generate 
a dangerous quantity of heat, unless packaged in a manner which 
precludes such an occurrence.
    (d) For carriage by aircraft, any package which has a magnetic field 
of more than 0.00525 gauss measured at 4.5 m (15 feet) from any surface 
of the package.
    (e) A material in the same packaging, freight container, or overpack 
with another material, the mixing of which is likely to cause a 
dangerous evolution of heat, or flammable or poisonous gases or vapors, 
or to produce corrosive materials.
    (f) A package containing a material which is likely to decompose 
with a self-accelerated decomposition temperature (SADT) of 50  deg.C 
(122  deg.F) or less, or polymerize at a temperature of 54  deg.C (130 
deg.F) or less with an evolution of a dangerous quantity of heat or gas 
when decomposing or polymerizing, unless the material is stabilized or 
inhibited in a manner to preclude such evolution. The SADT may be 
determined by any of the test methods described in Part II of the UN 
Manual of Tests and Criteria (see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).
    (1) A package meeting the criteria of paragraph (f) of this section 
may be required to be shipped under controlled temperature conditions. 
The control temperature and emergency temperature for a package shall be 
as specified in the table in this paragraph based upon the SADT of the 
material. The control temperature is the temperature above which a 
package of the material may not be offered for transportation or 
transported. The emergency temperature is the temperature at which, due 
to imminent danger, emergency measures must be initiated.

     Sec.  173.21 Table: Method of Determining Control and Emergency
                              Temperature.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                        Control            Emergency
             SADT 1                  temperatures         temperature
------------------------------------------------------------------------
SADT [le] 20  deg.C (68  deg.F).  20  deg.C (36       10  deg.C (18
                                   deg.F) below SADT.  deg.F) below
                                                       SADT.
---------------------------------
20  deg.C (68  deg.F) < SADT      15  deg.C (27       10  deg.C (18
 [le] 35  deg.C (95  deg.F).       deg.F) below SADT.  deg.F) below
                                                       SADT.
---------------------------------
35  deg.C (95  deg.F) < SADT      10  deg.C (18       5  deg.C (9
 [le] 50  deg.C (122  deg.F).      deg.F) below SADT.  deg.F) below
                                                       SADT.
---------------------------------
50  deg.C (122  deg.F) < SADT...  (\2\)               (\2\)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Self-accelerating decomposition temperature.
2 Temperature control not required.

    (2) For self-reactive materials listed in Sec. 173.224(b) table 
control and emergency temperatures, where required are shown in Columns 
5 and 6, respectively. For organic peroxides listed in The Organic 
Peroxides Table in Sec. 173.225 control and emergency temperatures, 
where required, are shown in Columns 7a and 7b, respectively.
    (3) Refrigeration may be used as a means of stabilization only when 
approved by the Associate Administrator. For status of approvals 
previously issued by the Bureau of Explosives, see Sec. 171.19 of this 
subchapter. Methods of stabilization approved by the Associate 
Administrator are as follows:
    (i) For highway transportation:
    (A) A material meeting the criteria of this paragraph (f) may be 
transported only in a transport vehicle, freight container, or motor 
vehicle equipped with a mechanical refrigeration unit, or loaded with a 
consumable refrigerant, capable of maintaining the inside temperature of 
the hazardous material at or below the control temperature required for 
the material during transportation.
    (B) Each package containing a material meeting the criteria of this 
paragraph (f) must be loaded and maintained at or below the control 
temperature required for the material. The temperature of the material 
must be determined by appropriate means and entered on a written record 
at the time the packaging is loaded.
    (C) The vehicle operator shall monitor the inside temperature of the 
transport vehicle, freight container, or motor vehicle and enter that 
temperature on a written record at the time the package is loaded and 
thereafter at intervals not exceeding two hours. Alternatively, a 
transport vehicle, freight

[[Page 417]]

container, or motor vehicle may be equipped with a visible or audible 
warning device that activates when the inside temperature of the 
transport vehicle, freight container, or motor vehicle exceeds the 
control temperature required for the material. The warning device must 
be readily visible or audible, as appropriate, from the vehicle 
operator's seat in the vehicle.
    (D) The carrier shall advise the vehicle operator of the emergency 
temperature for the material, and provide the vehicle operator with 
written procedures that must be followed to assure maintenance of the 
control temperature inside the transport vehicle, freight container, or 
motor vehicle. The written procedures must include instructions for the 
vehicle operator on actions to take if the inside temperature exceeds 
the control temperature and approaches or reaches the emergency 
temperature for the material. In addition, the written temperature-
control procedures must identify enroute points where the consumable 
refrigerant may be procured, or where repairs to, or replacement of, the 
mechanical refrigeration unit may be accomplished.
    (E) The vehicle operator shall maintain the written temperature-
control procedures, and the written record of temperature measurements 
specified in paragraph (f)(3)(i)(C) of this section, if applicable, in 
the same manner as specified in Sec. 177.817 of this subchapter for 
shipping papers.
    (F) If the control temperature is maintained by use of a consumable 
refrigerant (e.g., dry ice or liquid nitrogen), the quantity of 
consumable refrigerant must be sufficient to maintain the control 
temperature for twice the average transit time under normal conditions 
of transportation.
    (G) A material that has a control temperature of 40  deg.C (104 
deg.F) or higher may be transported by common carrier. A material that 
has a control temperature below 40  deg.C (104  deg.F) must be 
transported by a private or contract carrier.
    (ii) For transportation by vessel, shipments are authorized in 
accordance with the control-temperature requirements of Section 21 of 
the General Introduction of the IMDG Code (see Sec. 171.7 of this 
subchapter).
    (g) Packages which give off a flammable gas or vapor, released from 
a material not otherwise subject to this subchapter, likely to create a 
flammable mixture with air in a transport vehicle.
    (h) Packages containing materials (other than those classed as 
explosive) which will detonate in a fire.
    (1) For purposes of this paragraph, ``detonate'' means an explosion 
in which the shock wave travels through the material at a speed greater 
than the speed of sound.
    (2) When tests are required to evaluate the performance of a package 
under the provisions of this paragraph, the testing must be done or 
approved by one of the agencies specified in Sec. 173.56.
    (i) A package containing a cigarette lighter, or other similar 
device, equipped with an ignition element and containing fuel; except 
that a cigarette lighter or similar device subject to this paragraph may 
be shipped if the design of the device and its inner packaging has been 
examined by the Bureau of Explosives and specifically approved by the 
Associate Administrator. The examination of cigarette lighters and 
similar devices containing gaseous fuel will include scrutiny for 
compliance with Sec. 173.308 of this part. For the status of approvals 
previously issued by the Bureau of Explosives, see Sec. 171.19 of this 
subchapter.
    (j) An organic peroxide of the ``ketone peroxide'' category which 
contains more than 9 percent available oxygen as calculated using the 
equation in Sec. 173.128(a)(4)(ii). The category, ketone peroxide, 
includes, but is not limited to:

Acetyl acetone peroxide
Cyclohexanone peroxide(s)
Diacetone alcohol peroxides
Methylcyclohexanone peroxide(s)
Methyl ethyl ketone peroxide(s)
Methyl isobutyl ketone peroxide(s)

    (k) Notwithstanding any other provision of this subchapter, 
including Secs. 171.11 and 175.10(a)(2) of this subchapter, an oxygen 
generator (chemical) as cargo on a passenger-carrying aircraft. This 
prohibition does not apply to an oxygen generator for medical or 
personal use of a passenger that

[[Page 418]]

meets the requirements of Sec. 175.10(a)(7) of this subchapter.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52609, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66265, 
Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-234, 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 173-241, 
59 FR 67490, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173-254, 61 FR 26419, May 24, 1996; 
Amdt. 173-253, 61 FR 27174, May 30, 1996; Amdt. 173-254, 61 FR 68954, 
Dec. 30, 1996; Amdt. 173-261, 62 FR 24719, May 6, 1997; 66 FR 8647, Feb. 
1, 2001; 66 FR 45379, 81, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 61013, Sept. 27, 2002]



Sec. 173.22  Shipper's responsibility.

    (a) Except as otherwise provided in this part, a person may offer a 
hazardous material for transportation in a packaging or container 
required by this part only in accordance with the following:
    (1) The person shall class and describe the hazardous material in 
accordance with parts 172 and 173 of this subchapter, and
    (2) The person shall determine that the packaging or container is an 
authorized packaging, including part 173 requirements, and that it has 
been manufactured, assembled, and marked in accordance with:
    (i) Section 173.7(a) and parts 173, 178, or 179 of this subchapter;
    (ii) A specification of the Department in effect at the date of 
manufacture of the packaging or container;
    (iii) National or international regulations based on the UN 
Recommendations, as authorized in Sec. 173.24(d)(2);
    (iv) An approval issued under this subchapter; or
    (v) An exemption issued under subchapter A of this chapter.
    (3) In making the determination under paragraph (a)(2) of this 
section, the person may accept:
    (i) Except for the marking on the bottom of a metal or plastic drum 
with a capacity over 100 L which has been reconditioned, remanufactured 
or otherwise converted, the manufacturer's certification, specification, 
approval, or exemption marking (see Secs. 178.2 and 179.1 of this 
subchapter); or
    (ii) With respect to cargo tanks provided by a carrier, the 
manufacturer's identification plate or a written certification of 
specification or exemption provided by the carrier.
    (4) For a DOT specification or UN standard packaging subject to the 
requirements of part 178 of this subchapter, a person shall perform all 
functions necessary to bring that package into compliance with part 178 
of this subchapter, as identified by the packaging manufacturer or 
subsequent distributor, in accordance with Sec. 178.2 of this 
subchapter.
    (b) [Reserved]
    (c) Prior to each shipment of fissile radioactive materials, and 
Type B or highway route controlled quantity packages of radioactive 
materials (see Sec. 173.403), the shipper shall notify the consignee of 
the dates of shipment and expected arrival. The shipper shall also 
notify each consignee of any special loading/unloading instructions 
prior to his first shipment. For any shipment of irradiated reactor 
fuel, the shipper shall provide physical protection in compliance with a 
plan established under:
    (1) Requirements prescribed by the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory 
Commission, or
    (2) Equivalent requirements approved by the Associate Administrator, 
RSPA.

[Amdt. 173-100, 42 FR 2689, Jan. 13, 1977]

    Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting 
Sec. 173.22, see the List of CFR Sections Affected which appears in the 
Finding Aids section of the printed volume and on GPO Access.



Sec. 173.22a  Use of packagings authorized under exemptions.

    (a) Except as provided in paragraph (b) of this section, no person 
may offer a hazardous material for transportation in a packaging the use 
of which is dependent upon an exemption issued under subpart B of part 
107 of this title, unless that person is the holder of or a party to the 
exemption.
    (b) If an exemption authorizes the use of a packaging for the 
shipment or transportation of a hazardous material by any person or 
class of persons other than or in addition to the holder of the 
exemption, that person or a member of that class of persons may use the 
packaging for the purposes authorized in the exemption subject to the 
terms specified therein. However, no person may use a packaging under 
the authority of this paragraph unless he maintains a copy of the 
exemption at each facility where the packaging is being

[[Page 419]]

used in connection with the shipment or transportation of the hazardous 
material concerned. Copies of exemptions may be obtained from the 
Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety, U.S. Department 
of Transportation, Washington, DC 20590-0001, Attention: RSPA Records 
Center.
    (c) When an exemption issued to a person who offers a hazardous 
material contains requirements that apply to a carrier of the hazardous 
material, the offeror shall furnish a copy of the exemption to the 
carrier before or at the time a shipment is tendered.

[Amdt. 173-93, 41 FR 3478, Jan. 23, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 173-121, 
43 FR 48643, Oct. 19, 1978; Amdt. 173-223, 55 FR 39981, Oct. 1, 1990; 
Amdt. 173-224, 56 FR 66279, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-233, 58 FR 33305, 
June 16, 1993; Amdt. 173.249, 61 FR 21102, May 9, 1996; Amdt.173-249, 61 
FR 51242, Oct. 1, 1996; 66 FR 45381, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.23  Previously authorized packaging.

    (a) When the regulations specify a packaging with a specification 
marking prefix of ``DOT,'' a packaging marked prior to January 1, 1970, 
with the prefix of ``ICC'' may be used in its place if the packaging 
otherwise conforms to applicable specification requirements.
    (b) [Reserved]
    (c) After July 2, 1982, a seamless aluminum cylinder manufactured in 
conformance with and for use under DOT special permit (SP) or exemption 
(E) 6498, 7042, 8107, 8364 or 8422 may be continued in use if marked 
before or at the time of the next retest with either the specification 
identification ``3AL'' immediately above the special permit or exemption 
number, or the DOT mark (e.g., DOT 3AL 1800) in proximity to the special 
permit or exemption marking.
    (d) Cylinders (spheres) manufactured and marked under DOT special 
permit (SP) or exemption (E) 6616 prior to January 1, 1983, may be 
continued in use if marked before or at the time of the next retest with 
the specification identification ``4BA'' near the special permit or 
exemption marking.
    (e) After October 1, 1984, cylinders manufactured for use under 
special permit (SP) or exemption (E) 6668 or 8404 may be continued in 
use, and must be marked ``DOT-4LXXXYY'' (XXX to be replaced by the 
service pressure, YY to be replaced by the letters ``AL'', if 
applicable) in compliance with Specification 4L (Sec. 178.57 of this 
subchapter) on or before January 1, 1986. The ``DOT-4LXXXYY'' must 
appear in proximity to other required special permit or exemption 
markings.
    (f) An MC 331 cargo tank motor vehicle must conform to structural 
integrity requirements in Sec. 178.337-3 or to corresponding 
requirements in effect at the time of manufacture.
    (g) A non-bulk packaging manufactured, tested, marked, and certified 
on or before September 30, 1996, in accordance with the applicable 
provisions of subparts L and M of part 178 of this subchapter in effect 
on September 30, 1995, may be used as authorized by this subchapter if 
the packaging conforms to all requirements applicable at the time of 
manufacture. In addition, such a packaging may be reused as authorized 
by Sec. 173.28 without a nominal thickness marking, if it conforms to 
the minimum thickness criteria prescribed in Sec. 173.28(b)(4).

[Amdt. 173-3, 33 FR 14921, Oct. 4, 1968]

    Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting 
Sec. 173.23, see the List of CFR Sections Affected which appears in the 
Finding Aids section of the printed volume and on GPO Access.



Sec. 173.24  General requirements for packagings and packages.

    (a) Applicability. Except as otherwise provided in this subchapter, 
the provisions of this section apply to--
    (1) Bulk and non-bulk packagings;
    (2) New packagings and packagings which are reused; and
    (3) Specification and non-specification packagings.
    (b) Each package used for the shipment of hazardous materials under 
this subchapter shall be designed, constructed, maintained, filled, its 
contents so limited, and closed, so that under conditions normally 
incident to transportation--
    (1) Except as otherwise provided in this subchapter, there will be 
no identifiable (without the use of instruments) release of hazardous 
materials to the environment;

[[Page 420]]

    (2) The effectiveness of the package will not be substantially 
reduced; for example, impact resistance, strength, packaging 
compatibility, etc. must be maintained for the minimum and maximum 
temperatures encountered during transportation;
    (3) There will be no mixture of gases or vapors in the package which 
could, through any credible spontaneous increase of heat or pressure, 
significantly reduce the effectiveness of the packaging.
    (c) Authorized packagings. A packaging is authorized for a hazardous 
material only if--
    (1) The packaging is prescribed or permitted for the hazardous 
material in a packaging section specified for that material in Column 8 
of the Sec. 172.101 table and conforms to applicable requirements in the 
special provisions of Column 7 of the Sec. 172.101 table and, for 
specification packagings (but not including UN standard packagings 
manufactured outside the United States), the specification requirements 
in parts 178 and 179 of this subchapter; or
    (2) The packaging is permitted under, and conforms to, provisions 
contained in Secs. 171.11, 171.12, 171.12a, 173.3, 173.4, 173.5, 173.7, 
173.27, or 176.11 of this subchapter.
    (d) Specification packagings and UN standard packagings manufactured 
outside the U.S.--(1) Specification packagings. A specification 
packaging, including a UN standard packaging manufactured in the United 
States, must conform in all details to the applicable specification or 
standard in part 178 or part 179 of this subchapter.
    (2) UN standard packagings manufactured outside the United States. A 
UN standard packaging manufactured outside the United States, in 
accordance with national or international regulations based on the UN 
Recommendations (see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter), may be imported and 
used and is considered to be an authorized packaging under the 
provisions of paragraph (c)(1) of this section, subject to the following 
conditions and limitations:
    (i) The packaging fully conforms to applicable provisions in the UN 
Recommendations and the requirements of this subpart, including reuse 
provisions;
    (ii) The packaging is capable of passing the prescribed tests in 
part 178 of this subchapter applicable to that standard; and
    (iii) The competent authority of the country of manufacture provides 
reciprocal treatment for UN standard packagings manufactured in the U.S.
    (e) Compatibility. (1) Even though certain packagings are specified 
in this part, it is, nevertheless, the responsibility of the person 
offering a hazardous material for transportation to ensure that such 
packagings are compatible with their lading. This particularly applies 
to corrosivity, permeability, softening, premature aging and 
embrittlement.
    (2) Packaging materials and contents must be such that there will be 
no significant chemical or galvanic reaction between the materials and 
contents of the package.
    (3) Plastic packagings and receptacles. (i) Plastic used in 
packagings and receptacles must be of a type compatible with the lading 
and may not be permeable to an extent that a hazardous condition is 
likely to occur during transportation, handling or refilling.
    (ii) Each plastic packaging or receptacle which is used for liquid 
hazardous materials must be capable of withstanding without failure the 
procedure specified in appendix B of this part (``Procedure for Testing 
Chemical Compatibility and Rate of Permeation in Plastic Packagings and 
Receptacles''). The procedure specified in appendix B of this part must 
be performed on each plastic packaging or receptacle used for Packing 
Group I materials. The maximum rate of permeation of hazardous lading 
through or into the plastic packaging or receptacles may not exceed 0.5 
percent for materials meeting the definition of a Division 6.1 material 
according to Sec. 173.132 and 2.0 percent for other hazardous materials, 
when subjected to a temperature no lower than--
    (A) 18  deg.C (64  deg.F) for 180 days in accordance with Test 
Method 1 in appendix B of this part;

[[Page 421]]

    (B) 50  deg.C (122  deg.F) for 28 days in accordance with Test 
Method 2 in appendix B of this part; or
    (C) 60  deg.C (140  deg.F) for 14 days in accordance with Test 
Method 3 in appendix B of this part.
    (iii) Alternative procedures or rates of permeation are permitted if 
they yield a level of safety equivalent to or greater than that provided 
by paragraph (e)(3)(ii) of this section and are specifically approved by 
the Associate Administrator.
    (4) Mixed contents. Hazardous materials may not be packed or mixed 
together in the same outer packaging with other hazardous or 
nonhazardous materials if such materials are capable of reacting 
dangerously with each other and causing--
    (i) Combustion or dangerous evolution of heat;
    (ii) Evolution of flammable, poisonous, or asphyxiant gases; or
    (iii) Formation of unstable or corrosive materials.
    (5) Packagings used for solids, which may become liquid at 
temperatures likely to be encountered during transportation, must be 
capable of containing the hazardous material in the liquid state.
    (f) Closures. (1) Closures on packagings shall be so designed and 
closed that under conditions (including the effects of temperature and 
vibration) normally incident to transportation--
    (i) Except as provided in paragraph (g) of this section, there is no 
identifiable release of hazardous materials to the environment from the 
opening to which the closure is applied; and
    (ii) The closure is secure and leakproof.
    (2) Except as otherwise provided in this subchapter, a closure 
(including gaskets or other closure components, if any) used on a 
specification packaging must conform to all applicable requirements of 
the specification.
    (g) Venting. Venting of packagings, to reduce internal pressure 
which may develop by the evolution of gas from the contents, is 
permitted only when--
    (1) Transportation by aircraft is not involved;
    (2) Except as otherwise provided in this subchapter, the evolved 
gases are not poisonous, likely to create a flammable mixture with air 
or be an asphyxiant under normal conditions of transportation;
    (3) The packaging is designed so as to preclude an unintentional 
release of hazardous materials from the receptacle; and
    (4) For shipments in bulk packagings, venting is authorized for the 
specific hazardous material by a special provision in the Sec. 172.101 
table or by the applicable bulk packaging specification in part 178 of 
this subchapter.
    (h) Outage and filling limits--(1) General. When filling packagings 
and receptacles for liquids, sufficient ullage (outage) must be left to 
ensure that neither leakage nor permanent distortion of the packaging or 
receptacle will occur as a result of an expansion of the liquid caused 
by temperatures likely to be encountered during transportation. 
Requirements for outage and filling limits for non-bulk and bulk 
packagings are specified in Secs. 173.24a(d) and 173.24b(a), 
respectively.
    (2) Compressed gases and cryogenic liquids. Filling limits for 
compressed gases and cryogenic liquids are specified in Secs. 173.301 
through 173.306 for cylinders and Secs. 173.314 through 173.319 for bulk 
packagings.
    (i) Air transportation. Packages offered or intended for 
transportation by aircraft must conform to the general requirements for 
transportation by aircraft in Sec. 173.27, except as provided in 
Sec. 171.11 of this subchapter.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52610, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 173-227, 
56 FR 49989, Oct. 2, 1991; 56 FR 66265, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-238, 59 
FR 38064, July 26, 1994; Amdt. 173-241, 59 FR 67491, Dec. 29, 1994; 
Amdt. 173-242, 60 FR 26805, May 18, 1995; 66 FR 8647, Feb. 1, 2001; 66 
FR 45379, 81, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.24a  Additional general requirements for non-bulk packagings and packages.

    (a) Packaging design. Except as provided in Sec. 172.312 of this 
subchapter:
    (1) Inner packaging closures. A combination packaging containing 
liquid hazardous materials must be packed so that closures on inner 
packagings are upright.
    (2) Friction. The nature and thickness of the outer packaging must 
be such that friction during transportation is not likely to generate an 
amount of

[[Page 422]]

heat sufficient to alter dangerously the chemical stability of the 
contents.
    (3) Securing and cushioning. Inner packagings of combination 
packagings must be so packed, secured and cushioned to prevent their 
breakage or leakage and to control their movement within the outer 
packaging under conditions normally incident to transportation. 
Cushioning material must not be capable of reacting dangerously with the 
contents of the inner packagings or having its protective properties 
significantly weakened in the event of leakage.
    (4) Metallic devices. Nails, staples and other metallic devices 
shall not protrude into the interior of the outer packaging in such a 
manner as to be likely to damage inner packagings or receptacles.
    (5) Vibration. Each non-bulk package must be capable of 
withstanding, without rupture or leakage, the vibration test procedure 
specified in Sec. 178.608 of this subchapter.
    (b) Non-bulk packaging filling limits. (1) A single or composite 
non-bulk packaging may be filled with a liquid hazardous material only 
when the specific gravity of the material does not exceed that marked on 
the packaging, or a specific gravity of 1.2 if not marked, except as 
follows:
    (i) A Packing Group I packaging may be used for a Packing Group II 
material with a specific gravity not exceeding the greater of 1.8, or 
1.5 times the specific gravity marked on the packaging, provided all the 
performance criteria can still be met with the higher specific gravity 
material;
    (ii) A Packing Group I packaging may be used for a Packing Group III 
material with a specific gravity not exceeding the greater of 2.7, or 
2.25 times the specific gravity marked on the packaging, provided all 
the performance criteria can still be met with the higher specific 
gravity material; and
    (iii) A Packing Group II packaging may be used for a Packing Group 
III material with a specific gravity not exceeding the greater of 1.8, 
or 1.5 times the specific gravity marked on the packaging, provided all 
the performance criteria can still be met with the higher specific 
gravity material.
    (2) Except as otherwise provided in this section, a non-bulk 
packaging may not be filled with a hazardous material to a gross mass 
greater than the maximum gross mass marked on the packaging.
    (3) A single or composite non-bulk packaging which is tested and 
marked for liquid hazardous materials may be filled with a solid 
hazardous material to a gross mass, in kilograms, not exceeding the 
rated capacity of the packaging in liters, multiplied by the specific 
gravity marked on the packaging, or 1.2 if not marked. In addition:
    (i) A single or composite non-bulk packaging which is tested and 
marked for Packing Group I liquid hazardous materials may be filled with 
a solid Packing Group II hazardous material to a gross mass, in 
kilograms, not exceeding the rated capacity of the packaging in liters, 
multiplied by 1.5, multiplied by the specific gravity marked on the 
packaging, or 1.2 if not marked.
    (ii) A single or composite non-bulk packaging which is tested and 
marked for Packing Group I liquid hazardous materials may be filled with 
a solid Packing Group III hazardous material to a gross mass, in 
kilograms, not exceeding the rated capacity of the packaging in liters, 
multiplied by 2.25, multiplied by the specific gravity marked on the 
packaging, or 1.2 if not marked.
    (iii) A single or composite non-bulk packaging which is tested and 
marked for Packing Group II liquid hazardous materials may be filled 
with a solid Packing Group III hazardous material to a gross mass, in 
kilograms, not exceeding the rated capacity of the packaging in liters, 
multiplied by 1.5, multiplied by the specific gravity marked on the 
packaging, or 1.2 if not marked.
    (4) Packagings tested as prescribed in Sec. 178.605 of this 
subchapter and marked with the hydrostatic test pressure as prescribed 
in Sec. 178.503(a)(5) of this subchapter may be used for liquids only 
when the vapor pressure of the liquid conforms to one of the following:
    (i) The vapor pressure must be such that the total pressure in the 
packaging (i.e., the vapor pressure of the liquid plus the partial 
pressure of air or other inert gases, less 100 kPa (15 psia)) at 55 
deg.C (131  deg.F), determined on the basis of a maximum degree of 
filling in

[[Page 423]]

accordance with paragraph (d) of this section and a filling temperature 
of 15  deg.C (59  deg.F)), will not exceed two-thirds of the marked test 
pressure;
    (ii) The vapor pressure at 50  deg.C (122  deg.F) must be less than 
four-sevenths of the sum of the marked test pressure plus 100 kPa (15 
psia); or
    (iii) The vapor pressure at 55  deg.C (131  deg.F) must be less than 
two-thirds of the sum of the marked test pressure plus 100 kPa (15 
psia).
    (5) No hazardous material may remain on the outside of a package 
after filling.
    (c) Mixed contents. (1) An outer non-bulk packaging may contain more 
than one hazardous material only when--
    (i) The inner and outer packagings used for each hazardous material 
conform to the relevant packaging sections of this part applicable to 
that hazardous material;
    (ii) The package as prepared for shipment meets the performance 
tests prescribed in part 178 of this subchapter for the packing group 
indicating the highest order of hazard for the hazardous materials 
contained in the package;
    (iii) Corrosive materials (except ORM-D) in bottles are further 
packed in securely closed inner receptacles before packing in outer 
packagings; and
    (iv) For transportation by aircraft, the total net quantity does not 
exceed the lowest permitted maximum net quantity per package as shown in 
Column 9a or 9b, as appropriate, of the Sec. 172.101 table. The 
permitted maximum net quantity must be calculated in kilograms if a 
package contains both a liquid and a solid.
    (2) A packaging containing inner packagings of Division 6.2 
materials may not contain other hazardous materials, except dry ice.
    (d) Liquids must not completely fill a receptacle at a temperature 
of 55  deg.C (131  deg.F) or less.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52611, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66265, 
Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45460, Oct. 1, 1992; 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; 
Amdt. 173-255, 61 FR 50624, Sept. 26, 1996; 66 FR 45380, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.24b  Additional general requirements for bulk packagings.

    (a) Outage and filling limits. (1) Except as otherwise provided in 
this subchapter, liquids and liquefied gases must be so loaded that the 
outage is at least five percent for materials poisonous by inhalation, 
or at least one percent for all other materials, of the total capacity 
of a cargo tank, portable tank, tank car (including dome capacity), 
multi-unit tank car tank, or any compartment thereof, at the following 
reference temperatures--
    (i) 46  deg.C (115  deg.F) for a noninsulated tank;
    (ii) 43  deg.C (110  deg.F) for a tank car having a thermal 
protection system, incorporating a metal jacket that provides an overall 
thermal conductance at 15.5  deg.C (60  deg.F) of no more than 10.22 
kilojoules per hour per square meter per degree Celsius (0.5 Btu per 
hour/per square foot/ per degree F) temperature differential; or
    (iii) 41  deg.C (105  deg.F) for an insulated tank.
    (2) Hazardous materials may not be loaded into the dome of a tank 
car. If the dome of the tank car does not provide sufficient outage, 
vacant space must be left in the shell to provide the required outage.
    (b) Equivalent steel. For the purposes of this section, the 
reference stainless steel is stainless steel with a guaranteed minimum 
tensile strength of 51.7 deka newtons per square millimeter (75,000 psi) 
and a guaranteed elongation of 40 percent or greater. Where the 
regulations permit steel other than stainless steel to be used in place 
of a specified stainless steel (for example, as in Sec. 172.102 of this 
subchapter, special provision B30), the minimum thickness for the steel 
must be obtained from one of the following formulas, as appropriate:

                        Formula for metric units

e1 = (12.74e0) / (Rm1 A1)\1/
    3\

                      Formula for non-metric units

e1 = (144.2e0) / (Rm1 A1)\1/
    3\

where:

e0 = Required thickness of the reference stainless steel in 
mm or inches respectively;

[[Page 424]]

e1 = Equivalent thickness of the steel used in mm or inches 
respectively;
Rm1 = Specified minimum tensile strength of the steel used in 
deka-newtons per square millimeter or pounds per square inch 
respectively; and
A1 = Specified minimum percentage elongation of the steel 
used multiplied by 100 (for example, 20 percent times 100 equals 20). 
Elongation values used must be determined from a 50 mm or 2 inch test 
specimen.

    (c) Air pressure in excess of ambient atmospheric pressure may not 
be used to load or unload any lading which may create an air-enriched 
mixture within the flammability range of the lading in the vapor space 
of the tank.
    (d) A bulk packaging may not be loaded with a hazardous material 
that:
    (1) Is at a temperature outside of the packaging's design 
temperature range; or
    (2) Except as otherwise provided in this subchapter, exceeds the 
maximum weight of lading marked on the specification plate.
    (e) UN portable tanks. (1) A UN portable tank manufactured in the 
United States must conform in all details to the applicable requirements 
in parts 172, 173, 178 and 180 of this subchapter.
    (2) UN portable tanks manufactured outside the United States. A UN 
portable tank manufactured outside the United States, in accordance with 
national or international regulations based on the UN Recommendations on 
the Transport of Dangerous Goods which is an authorized packaging under 
Sec. 173.24 of this subchapter, may be filled, offered and transported 
in the United States, if the Sec. 172.101 Table of this subchapter 
authorizes the hazardous material for transportation in the UN portable 
tank and it conforms to the applicable T codes, and tank provision 
codes, or other special provisions assigned to the hazardous material in 
Column (7) of the Table when manufactured in a country other than the 
United States. In addition, the portable tank must--
    (i) Conform to applicable provisions in the UN Recommendations on 
the Transport of Dangerous Goods (see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter) and 
the requirements of this subpart;
    (ii) Be capable of passing the prescribed tests and inspections in 
part 180 of this subchapter applicable to the UN portable tank 
specification;
    (iii) Be designed and manufactured according to the ASME Code (see 
Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter) or a pressure vessel design code approved 
by the Associate Administrator;
    (iv) Be approved by the Associate Administrator when the portable 
tank is designed and constructed under the provisions of an alternative 
arrangement (see Sec. 178.274(a)(2) of this subchapter); and
    (v) The competent authority of the country of manufacture must 
provide reciprocal treatment for UN portable tanks manufactured in the 
United States.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52612, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66266, 
Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-234, 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 173-243, 
60 FR 40038, Aug. 4, 1995; Amdt. 173-252, 61 FR 28676, June 5, 1996; 
Amdt. 173-255, 61 FR 50624, Sept. 26, 1996; 66 FR 33426, June 21, 2001; 
67 15743, Apr. 3, 2002]



Sec. 173.25  Authorized packagings and overpacks.

    (a) Authorized packages containing hazardous materials may be 
offered for transportation in an overpack as defined in Sec. 171.8 of 
this subchapter, if all of the following conditions are met:
    (1) The package meets the requirements of Secs. 173.21 and 173.24 of 
this subchapter.
    (2) The overpack is marked with the proper shipping name and 
identification number, and labeled as required by this subchapter for 
each hazardous material contained therein unless markings and labels 
representative of each hazardous material in the overpack are visible.
    (3) Each package subject to the orientation marking requirements of 
Sec. 172.312 of this subchapter is packed in the overpack with its 
filling holes up and the overpack is marked with package orientation 
marking arrows on two opposite vertical sides of the overpack with the 
arrows pointing in the correct direction of orientation.
    (4) The overpack is marked with a statement indicating that the 
inside (inner) packages comply with prescribed specifications when 
specification packagings are required, unless

[[Page 425]]

specification markings on the inside packages are visible.
    (5) Packages containing Class 8 (corrosive) materials in Packing 
Group I or Division 5.1 (oxidizing) materials in Packing Group I may not 
be overpacked with any other materials.
    (b) Shrink-wrapped or stretch-wrapped trays may be used as outer 
packagings for inner packagings prepared in accordance with the limited 
quantity provisions or consumer commodity provisions of this subchapter, 
provided that--
    (1) Inner packagings are not fragile, liable to break or be easily 
punctured, such as those made of glass, porcelain, stoneware or certain 
plastics; and
    (2) Each complete package does not exceed 20 kg (44 lbs) gross 
weight.
    (c) Hazardous materials which are required to be labeled POISON may 
be transported in the same motor vehicle with material that is marked or 
known to be foodstuffs, feed or any edible material intended for 
consumption by humans or animals provided the hazardous material is 
marked, labeled, and packaged in accordance with this subchapter, 
conforms to the requirements of paragraph (a) of this section and is 
overpacked as specified in Sec. 177.841(e) of this subchapter or in an 
overpack which is a UN 1A2, 1B2, or 1N2 drum tested and marked for a 
Packing Group II or higher performance level.

[Amdt. 173-165, 48 FR 28099, June 20, 1983, as amended by Amdt. 173-224, 
55 FR 52612 Dec. 21, 1990; 56 FR 66266, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-234, 58 
FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 173-214, 59 FR 67491, Dec. 29, 1994; 64 FR 
10776, Mar. 5, 1999]



Sec. 173.26  Quantity limitations.

    When quantity limitations do not appear in the packaging 
requirements of this subchapter, the permitted gross weight or capacity 
authorized for a packaging is as shown in the packaging specification or 
standard in part 178 or 179, as applicable, of this subchapter.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52612, Dec. 21, 1990]



Sec. 173.27  General requirements for transportation by aircraft.

    (a) The requirements of this section are in addition to the 
requirements in Sec. 173.24 and apply to packages offered or intended 
for transportation aboard aircraft. Notwithstanding any Packing Group 
III performance level specified in Column 5 of the Sec. 172.101 table, 
the required performance level for packages containing Class 4, 5, or 8 
materials, when offered or intended for transportation aboard aircraft, 
is at the Packing Group II performance level, unless otherwise excepted 
from performance requirements in subpart E of this part.
    (b) Packages authorized on board aircraft. (1) When Column 9a of the 
Sec. 172.101 table indicates that a material is ``Forbidden'', that 
material may not be offered for transportation or transported aboard 
passenger-carrying aircraft.
    (2) When Column 9b of the Sec. 172.101 table indicates that a 
material is ``Forbidden'', that material may not be offered for 
transportation or transported aboard aircraft.
    (3) The maximum quantity of hazardous material in a package that may 
be offered for transportation or transported aboard a passenger-carrying 
aircraft or cargo aircraft may not exceed that quantity prescribed for 
the material in Column 9a or 9b, respectively, of the Sec. 172.101 
table.
    (4) A package containing a hazardous material which is authorized 
aboard cargo aircraft but not aboard passenger aircraft must be labeled 
with the CARGO AIRCRAFT ONLY label required by Sec. 172.402(c) of this 
subchapter and may not be offered for transportation or transported 
aboard passenger-carrying aircraft.
    (c) Pressure requirements. (1) Packagings must be designed and 
constructed to prevent leakage that may be caused by changes in altitude 
and temperature during transportation aboard aircraft.
    (2) Packagings for which retention of liquid is a basic function 
must be capable of withstanding without leakage the greater of--
    (i) An internal pressure which produces a gauge pressure of not less 
than 75 kPa (11 psig) for liquids in Packing Group III of Class 3 or 
Division 6.1; or 95 kPa (14 psig) for other liquids; or
    (ii) A pressure related to the vapor pressure of the liquid to be 
conveyed, determined by one of the following:

[[Page 426]]

    (A) The total gauge pressure measured in the receptacle (i.e., the 
vapor pressure of the material and the partial pressure of air or other 
inert gases, less 100 kPa (15 psia)) at 55  deg.C (131  deg.F), 
multiplied by a safety factor of 1.5; determined on the basis of a 
filling temperature of 15  deg.C (59  deg.F) and a degree of filling 
such that the receptacle is not completely liquid full at a temperature 
of 55  deg.C (131  deg.F) or less;
    (B) 1.75 times the vapor pressure at 50  deg.C (122  deg.F) less 100 
kPa (15 psia); or
    (C) 1.5 times the vapor pressure at 55  deg.C (131  deg.) less 100 
kPa (15 psia).
    (3) Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph (c)(2) of this 
section--
    (i) Hazardous materials may be contained in an inner packaging which 
does not itself meet the pressure requirement provided that the inner 
packaging is packed within a supplementary packaging which does meet the 
pressure requirement and other applicable packaging requirements of this 
subchapter.
    (ii) Packagings which are subject to the hydrostatic pressure test 
and marking requirements of Secs. 178.605 and 178.503(a)(5), 
respectively, of this subchapter must have a marked test pressure of not 
less than 250 kPa (36 psig) for liquids in Packing Group I, 80 kPa (12 
psig) for liquids in Packing Group III of Class 3 or Division 6.1, and 
100 kPa (15 psig) for other liquids.
    (d) Closures. Stoppers, corks or other such friction-type closures 
must be held securely, tightly and effectively in place by positive 
means. Each screw-type closure on any packaging must be secured to 
prevent closure from loosening due to vibration or substantial change in 
temperature.
    (e) Absorbent materials. Except as otherwise provided in this 
subchapter, liquids in Packing Group I or II of Class 3, 4, 5, 6, or 8, 
when in glass or earthenware inner packagings, must be packaged using 
material capable of absorbing and not likely to react dangerously with 
the liquid. Absorbent material is not required if the inner packagings 
are so protected that breakage of them and leakage of their contents 
from the outer packaging is not likely to occur under normal conditions 
of transportation and is not required for packagings containing liquids 
in Packing Group II for transport aboard cargo aircraft only. Where 
absorbent material is required and an outer packaging is not liquid-
tight, a means of containing the liquid in the event of leakage must be 
used in the form of a leakproof liner, plastic bag or other equally 
efficient means of containment. Where absorbent material is required, 
the quantity and disposition of it in each outer packaging must be as 
follows:
    (1) For packagings containing liquids in Packing Group I offered for 
transportation or transported aboard passenger-carrying aircraft, each 
packaging must contain sufficient absorbent material to absorb the 
contents of all inner packagings containing such liquids;
    (2) For packagings containing liquids in Packing Group I offered for 
transportation or transported aboard cargo aircraft only and packagings 
containing liquids in Packing Group II offered for transportation or 
transported aboard passenger aircraft, each package must contain 
sufficient absorbent material to absorb the contents of any one of the 
inner packagings containing such liquids and, where they are of 
different sizes and quantities, sufficient absorbent material to absorb 
the contents of the inner packaging containing the greatest quantity of 
liquid.
    (f) Combination packagings. Unless otherwise specified in this part, 
or in Sec. 171.11 of this subchapter, when combination packagings are 
offered for transportation aboard aircraft, inner packagings must 
conform to the quantity limitations set forth in table 1 of this 
paragraph for transport aboard passenger-carrying aircraft and table 2 
of this paragraph for transport aboard cargo aircraft only, as follows:

[[Page 427]]



       Table 1--Maximum Net Capacity of Inner Packaging for Transportation on Passenger-Carrying Aircraft
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                 Maximum authorized net capacity of each inner packaging
 Maximum net quantity per package from  ------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Column 9a of the Sec.  172.101 table    Glass, earthenware or fiber inner
                                                      packagings               Metal or plastic inner packagings
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Liquids:
    Not greater than 0.5L..............  0.5L...............................  0.5L.
    Greater than 0.5L. not greater than  0.5L...............................  lL.
     lL.
    Greater than 1L, not greater than    1L.................................  5L.
     5L.
    Greater than 5L, not greater than    2.5L...............................  10L.
     60L.
    Greater than 60L, not greater than   5L.................................  25L.
     220L.
    Greater than 220L..................  No limit...........................  No limit.
Solids:
    Not greater than 5 kg..............  0.5 kg.............................  1 kg.
    Greater than 5 kg, not greater than  1 kg...............................  2.5 kg.
     25 kg.
    Greater than 25 kg, not greater      5 kg...............................  10 kg.
     than 200 kg.
    Greater than 200 kg................  No limit...........................  No limit.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


              Table 2--Maximum Net Capacity of Inner Packaging for Transportation on Cargo Aircraft
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                 Maximum authorized net capacity of each inner packaging
 Maximum net quantity per package from  ------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Column 9b of the Sec.  172.101 table    Glass, earthenware or fiber inner
                                                      packagings               Metal or plastic inner packagings
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Liquids:
    Not greater than 2.5L..............  1L.................................  1L.
    Greater than 2.5L, not greater than  2.5L...............................  2.5L.
     30L.
    Greater than 30L, not greater than   5L.................................  10L.
     60L.
    Greater than 60L, not greater than   5L.................................  25L.
     220L.
    Greater than 220L..................  No limit...........................  No limit.
Solids:
    Not greater than 15 kg.............  1 kg...............................  2.5 kg.
    Greater than 15 kg, not greater      2.5 kg.............................  5 kg.
     than 50 kg.
    Greater than 50 kg, not greater      5 kg...............................  10 kg.
     than 200 kg.
    Greater than 200 kg................  No limit...........................  No limit.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (g) Cylinders. For any cylinder containing hazardous materials and 
incorporating valves, sufficient protection must be provided to prevent 
operation of, and damage to, the valves during transportation, by one of 
the following methods:
    (1) By equipping each cylinder with securely attached valve caps or 
protective headrings; or
    (2) By boxing or crating the cylinder.
    (h) Tank cars and cargo tanks. Any tank car or cargo tank containing 
a hazardous material may not be transported aboard aircraft.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52612, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66266, 
Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-138, 59 FR 49133, Sept. 26, 1994; 65 FR 58629, 
Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45380, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.28  Reuse, reconditioning and remanufacture of packagings.

    (a) General. Packagings and receptacles used more than once must be 
in such condition, including closure devices and cushioning materials, 
that they conform in all respects to the prescribed requirements of this 
subchapter. Before reuse, each packaging must be inspected and may not 
be reused unless free from incompatible residue, rupture, or other 
damage which reduces its structural integrity.
    (b) Reuse of non-bulk packaging. A non-bulk packaging used more than 
once must conform to the following provisions and limitations:
    (1) A non-bulk packaging which, upon inspection, shows evidence of a 
reduction in integrity may not be reused unless it is reconditioned in 
accordance with paragraph (c) of this section.

[[Page 428]]

    (2) Before reuse, packagings subject to the leakproofness test with 
air prescribed in Sec. 178.604 of this subchapter shall be--
    (i) Retested without failure in accordance with Sec. 178.604 of this 
subchapter using an internal air pressure (gauge) of at least 48 kPa 
(7.0 psig) for Packing Group I and 20 kPa (3.0 psig) for Packing Group 
II and Packing Group III; and
    (ii) Marked with the letter ``L'', with the name and address or 
symbol of the person conducting the test, and the last two digits of the 
year the test was conducted. Symbols, if used, must be registered with 
the Associate Administrator.
    (3) Packagings made of paper, plastic film, or textile are not 
authorized for reuse;
    (4) Metal and plastic drums and jerricans used as single packagings 
or the outer packagings of composite packagings are authorized for reuse 
only when they are marked in a permanent manner (e.g., embossed) in mm 
with the nominal (for metal packagings) or minimum (for plastic 
packagings) thickness of the packaging material, as required by 
Sec. 178.503(a)(9) of this subchapter, and--
    (i) Except as provided in paragraph (b)(4)(ii) of this section, 
conform to the following minimum thickness criteria:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                            Minimum thickness of packaging material
 Maximum capacity not --------------------------------------------------
         over                                        Plastic drum or
                        Metal drum or jerrican           jerrican
------------------------------------------------------------------------
20 L.................  0.63 mm (0.025 inch)....  1.1 mm (0.043 inch).
30 L.................  0.73 mm (0.029 inch)....  1.1 mm (0.043 inch).
40 L.................  0.73 mm (0.029 inch)....  1.8 mm (0.071 inch).
60 L.................  0.92 mm (0.036 inch)....  1.8 mm (0.071 inch).
120 L................  0.92 mm (0.036 inch)....  2.2 mm (0.087 inch).
220 L................  0.92 mm (0.036 inch) 1..  2.2 mm (0.087 inch).
450 L................  1.77 mm (0.070 inch)....  5.0 mm (0.197 inch).
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \1\ Metal drums or jerricans with a minimum thickness of 0.82 mm 
body and 1.09 mm heads which are manufactured and marked prior to 
January 1, 1997 may be reused. Metal drums or jerricans manufactured and 
marked on or after January 1, 1997, and intended for reuse, must be 
constructed with a minimum thickness of 0.82 mm body and 1.11 mm heads.
    (ii) For stainless steel drums and jerricans, conform to a minimum 
wall thickness as determined by the following equivalence formula:

                        Formula for Metric Units
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TP26JN96.000

                     Formula for U.S. Standard Units
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TP26JN96.001

where:

e1 = required equivalent wall thickness of the metal to be 
used (in mm or, for U.S. Standard units, use inches).
e0 = required minimum wall thickness for the reference steel 
(in mm or, for U.S. Standard units, use inches).
Rm1 = guaranteed minimum tensile strength of the metal to be 
used (in N/mm2 or for U.S. Standard units, use psi).
A1 = guaranteed minimum elongation (as a percentage) of the 
metal to be used on fracture under tensile stress (see paragraph (c)(1) 
of this section).

    (5) Plastic inner receptacles of composite packagings must have a 
minimum thickness of 1.0 mm (0.039 inch).
    (6) A previously used non-bulk packaging may be reused for the 
shipment of hazardous waste, not subject to the reconditioning and reuse 
provisions of this section, in accordance with Sec. 173.12(c).
    (7) Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph (b)(2) of this 
section, a packaging otherwise authorized for reuse may be reused 
without being leakproofness tested with air provided the packaging--
    (i) Is refilled with a material which is compatible with the 
previous lading:
    (ii) Is refilled and offered for transportation by the original 
filler;
    (iii) Is transported in a transport vehicle or freight container 
under the exclusive use of the refiller of the packaging; and
    (iv) Is constructed of--
    (A) Stainless steel, monel or nickel with a thickness not less than 
one and one-half times the minimum thickness prescribed in paragraph 
(b)(4) of this section;
    (B) Plastic, provided the packaging is not refilled for reuse on a 
date more

[[Page 429]]

than five years from the date of manufacture marked on the packaging in 
accordance with Sec. 178.503(a)(6) of this subchapter; or
    (C) Another material or thickness when approved under the conditions 
established by the Associate Administrator for reuse without retesting.
    (c) Reconditioning of non-bulk packaging. (1) For the purpose of 
this subchapter, reconditioning of metal drums is:
    (i) Cleaning to base material of construction, with all former 
contents, internal and external corrosion, and any external coatings and 
labels removed;
    (ii) Restoring to original shape and contour, with chimes (if any) 
straightened and sealed, and all non-integral gaskets replaced: and
    (iii) Inspecting after cleaning but before painting, Packagings that 
have visible pitting, significant reduction in material thickness, metal 
fatigue, damaged threads or closures, or other significant defects, must 
be rejected.
    (2) For the purpose of this subchapter, reconditioning of a non-bulk 
packaging other than a metal drum or a UN 1H1 plastic drum includes:
    (i) Removal of all former contents, external coatings and labels, 
and cleaning to the original materials of construction;
    (ii) Inspection after cleaning with rejection of packagings with 
visible damage such as tears, creases or cracks, or damaged threads or 
closures, or other significant defects;
    (iii) Replacement of all non-integral gaskets and closure devices 
with new or refurbished parts, and cushioning and cushioning materials; 
and components including gaskets, closure devices and cushioning and 
cushioning material. (For a UN 1H1 plastic drum, replacing a removable 
gasket or closure device with another of the same design and material 
that provides equivalent performance does not constitute 
reconditioning); and
    (iv) Ensuring that the packagings are restored to a condition that 
conforms in all respects with the prescribed requirements of this 
subchapter.
    (3) A person who reconditions a packaging manufactured and marked 
under the provisions of subpart L of part 178 of this subchapter, shall 
mark that packaging as required by Sec. 178.503(c) and (d) of this 
subchapter. The marking is the certification of the reconditioner that 
the packaging conforms to the standard for which it is marked and that 
all functions performed by the reconditioner which are prescribed by 
this subchapter have been performed in compliance with this subchapter.
    (4) The markings applied by the reconditioner may be different from 
those applied by the manufacturer at the time of original manufacture, 
but may not identify a greater performance capability than that for 
which the original design type had been tested (for example, the 
reconditioner may mark a drum which was originally marked as 1A1/Y1.8 as 
1A1/Y1.2 or 1A1/Z2.0).
    (5) Packagings which have significant defects which cannot be 
repaired may not be reused.
    (d) Remanufacture of non-bulk packagings. For the purpose of this 
subchapter, remanufacture is the conversion of a non-specification, non-
bulk packaging to a DOT specification or U.N. standard, the conversion 
of a packaging meeting one specification or standard to another 
specification or standard (for example, conversion of 1A1 non-removable 
head drums to 1A2 removable head drums) or the replacement of integral 
structural packaging components (such as non-removable heads on drums). 
A person who remanufactures a non-bulk packaging to conform to a 
specification or standard in part 178 of this subchapter is subject to 
the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter as a manufacturer.
    (e) Non-reusable containers. A packaging marked as NRC according to 
the DOT specification or UN standard requirements of part 178 of this 
subchapter may be reused for the shipment of any material not required 
by this subchapter to be shipped in a DOT

[[Page 430]]

specification or UN standard packaging.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52614, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66266, 
Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45460, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 173-241, 59 FR 67491, 
67492, Dec. 29, 1994; 60 FR 7627, Feb. 8, 1995; Amdt. 173-241, 60 FR 
26805, 26806, May 18, 1995 Amdt. 173-255, 61 FR 50624, 50265, Sept. 26, 
1996; 61 FR 51495, Oct. 2, 1996; Amdt. 173-254, 62 FR 14338, Mar. 26, 
1997; 64 FR 10776, Mar. 5, 1999; 64 FR 44428, Aug. 16, 1999; 66 FR 
45183, 45379, 45380, Aug. 28, 2001]

    Effective Date Note: At 67 FR 53138, Aug. 14, 2002, Sec. 173.28 was 
amended by adding paragraph (f), effective Oct. 1, 2002. At 67 FR 54967, 
the effective date was corrected to Feb. 14, 2003. For the convenience 
of the user, the added text is set forth as follows:

Sec. 173.28  Reuse, reconditioning and remanufacture of packagings.

                                * * * * *

    (f) A Division 6.2 packaging to be reused must be disinfected prior 
to reuse by any means effective for neutralizing the infectious 
substance the packaging previously contained. A secondary packaging or 
outer packaging conforming to the requirements of Sec. 173.196 or 
Sec. 173.199 need not be disinfected prior to reuse if no leakage from 
the primary receptacle has occurred.



Sec. 173.29  Empty packagings.

    (a) General. Except as otherwise provided in this section, an empty 
packaging containing only the residue of a hazardous material shall be 
offered for transportation and transported in the same manner as when it 
previously contained a greater quantity of that hazardous material.
    (b) Notwithstanding the requirements of paragraph (a) of this 
section, an empty packaging is not subject to any other requirements of 
this subchapter if it conforms to the following provisions:
    (1) Any hazardous material shipping name and identification number 
markings, any hazard warning labels or placards, and any other markings 
indicating that the material is hazardous (e.g., RQ, INHALATION HAZARD) 
are removed, obliterated, or securely covered in transportation. This 
provision does not apply to transportation in a transport vehicle or a 
freight container if the packaging is not visible in transportation and 
the packaging is loaded by the shipper and unloaded by the shipper or 
consignee;
    (2) The packaging--
    (i) Is unused;
    (ii) Is sufficiently cleaned of residue and purged of vapors to 
remove any potential hazard;
    (iii) Is refilled with a material which is not hazardous to such an 
extent that any residue remaining in the packaging no longer poses a 
hazard; or
    (iv) Contains only the residue of--
    (A) An ORM-D material; or
    (B) A Division 2.2 non-flammable gas, other than ammonia, anhydrous, 
and with no subsidiary hazard, at an absolute pressure less than 280 kPa 
(40.6 psia); at 20  deg.C (68  deg.F); and
    (3) Any material contained in the packaging does not meet the 
definitions in Sec. 171.8 of this subchapter for a hazardous substance, 
a hazardous waste, or a marine pollutant.
    (c) A non-bulk packaging containing only the residue of a hazardous 
material covered by table 2 of Sec. 172.504 of this subchapter--
    (1) Does not have to be included in determining the applicability of 
the placarding requirements of subpart F of part 172 of this subchapter; 
and
    (2) Is not subject to the shipping paper requirements of this 
subchapter when collected and transported by a contract or private 
carrier for reconditioning, remanufacture or reuse.
    (d) Notwithstanding the stowage requirements in Column 10a of the 
Sec. 172.101 table for transportation by vessel, an empty drum or 
cylinder may be stowed on deck or under deck.
    (e) Specific provisions for describing an empty packaging on a 
shipping paper appear in Sec. 172.203(e) of this subchapter.
    (f) [Reserved]
    (g) A package which contains a residue of an elevated temperature 
material may remain marked in the same manner as when it contained a 
greater quantity of the material even though it no longer meets the 
definition in Sec. 171.8

[[Page 431]]

of this subchapter for an elevated temperature material.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52614, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 173-227, 
56 FR 49989, Oct. 2, 1991; Amdt. 173-231, 57 FR 52939, Nov. 5, 1992; 
Amdt. 173-251, 61 FR 28676, June 5, 1996; Amdt. 173-260, 62 FR 1236, 
Jan. 8, 1997; 64 FR 10776, Mar. 5, 1999]



Sec. 173.30  Loading and unloading of transport vehicles.

    A person who loads or unloads hazardous materials into or from a 
transport vehicle or vessel shall comply with the applicable loading and 
unloading requirements of parts 174, 175, 176, and 177 of this 
subchapter.

[Amdt. 173-94, 41 FR 16064, Apr. 15, 1976]



Sec. 173.31  Use of tank cars.

    (a) General. (1) No person may offer a hazardous material for 
transportation in a tank car unless the tank car meets the applicable 
specification and packaging requirements of this subchapter or, when 
this subchapter authorizes the use of an non-DOT specification tank car, 
the applicable specification to which the tank was constructed.
    (2) Tank cars and appurtenances may be used for the transportation 
of any commodity for which they are authorized in this part and 
specified on the certificate of construction (AAR Form 4-2 or by 
addendum on Form R-1). See Sec. 179.5 of this subchapter. Transfer of a 
tank car from one specified service on its certificate of construction 
to another may be made only by the owner or with the owner's 
authorization. A tank car proposed for a commodity service other than 
specified on its certificate of construction must be approved for such 
service by the AAR's Tank Car Committee.
    (3) No person may fill a tank car overdue for periodic inspection 
with a hazardous material and then offer it for transportation. Any tank 
car marked as meeting a DOT specification and any non-specification tank 
car transporting a hazardous material must have a periodic inspection 
and test conforming to subpart F of part 180 of this subchapter.
    (4) No railroad tank car, regardless of its construction date, may 
be used for the transportation in commerce of any hazardous material 
unless the air brake equipment support attachments of such tank car 
conform to the standards for attachments set forth in Secs. 179.100-16 
and 179.200-19 of this subchapter.
    (5) No railroad tank car, regardless of its construction date, may 
be used for the transportation in commerce of any hazardous material 
with a self-energized manway located below the liquid level of the 
lading.
    (6) Unless otherwise specifically provided in this part:
    (i) When the tank car delimiter is an ``A,'' offerors may also use 
tank cars with a delimiter ``S,'' ``J'' or ``T''.
    (ii) When the tank car delimiter is an ``S,'' offerors may also use 
tank cars with a delimiter ``J'' or ``T''.
    (iii) When a tank car delimiter is a ``T'' offerors may also use 
tank cars with a delimiter of ``J''.
    (iv) When a tank car delimiter is a ``J'', offerors may not use a 
tank car with any other delimiter.
    (b) Safety systems--(1) Coupler vertical restraint. Each tank car 
conforming to a DOT specification and any other tank car used for 
transportation of a hazardous material must be equipped with a coupler 
vertical restraint system that meets the requirements of Sec. 179.14 of 
this subchapter.
    (2) Pressure relief devices. (i) Pressure relief devices on tank 
cars must conform to part 179 of this subchapter.
    (ii) Except for shipments of chloroprene, stabilized, in class DOT 
115 tank cars, single-unit tank cars used for materials meeting the 
definition for Division 6.1 liquid, Packing Group I or II, Class 2 
materials, or Class 3 or 4 liquids, must have reclosing pressure relief 
devices. However, a tank car built before January 1, 1991, and equipped 
with a non-closing pressure relief device may be used to transport a 
Division 6.1 or Class 4 liquid if the liquid is not poisonous by 
inhalation. Unless otherwise specifically provided in this subchapter, 
rupture discs may not have any perforated holes to allow for venting.
    (3) Tank-head puncture-resistance requirements. The following tank 
cars

[[Page 432]]

must have a tank-head puncture-resistance system that conforms to the 
requirements in Sec. 179.16 of this subchapter, or to the corresponding 
requirements in effect at the time of installation:
    (i) Tank cars transporting a Class 2 material.
    (ii) Tank cars constructed from aluminum or nickel plate that are 
used to transport hazardous material.
    (iii) Except as provided in paragraph (b)(3)(iv) of this section, 
those tank cars specified in paragraphs (b)(3)(i) and (ii) of this 
section not requiring a tank-head puncture resistance system prior to 
July 1, 1996, must have a tank-head puncture resistance system installed 
no later than July 1, 2006.
    (iv) Class DOT 105A tank cars built prior to September 1, 1981, 
having a tank capacity less than 70 kl (18,500 gallons), and used to 
transport a Division 2.1 (flammable gas) material, must have a tank-head 
puncture-resistant system installed no later than July 1, 2001.
    (4) Thermal protection requirements. The following tank cars must 
have thermal protection that conforms to the requirements of Sec. 179.18 
of this subchapter:
    (i) Tank cars transporting a Class 2 material, except for a class 
106, 107A, 110, and 113 tank car. A tank car equipped with a thermal 
protection system conforming to Sec. 179.18 of this subchapter, or that 
has an insulation system having an overall thermal conductance of no 
more than 0.613 kilojoules per hour, per square meter, per degree 
Celsius temperature differential (0.03 B.t.u. per square foot, per hour, 
per degree Fahrenheit temperature differential), conforms to this 
requirement.
    (ii) A tank car transporting a Class 2 material that was not 
required to have thermal protection prior to July 1, 1996, must be 
equipped with thermal protection no later than July 1, 2006.
    (5) Bottom-discontinuity protection requirements. No person may 
offer for transportation a hazardous material in a tank car with bottom 
discontinuity protection unless the tank car has bottom-discontinuity 
protection that conforms to the requirements of E9.00 and E10.00 of the 
AAR Specifications for Tank Cars. Tank cars not requiring bottom-
discontinuity protection under the terms of appendix Y of the AAR 
Specifications for Tank Cars as of July 1, 1996, must conform to these 
requirements no later than July 1, 2006. Tank cars modified before July 
1, 1996, may conform to the bottom-discontinuity protection requirements 
of appendix Y of the 1992 edition of the AAR Specifications for Tank 
Cars.
    (6) Scheduling of modifications and progress reporting. The date of 
conformance for the continued use of tank cars subject to paragraphs 
(b)(3), (b)(4), (b)(5), (e)(2), and (f) of this section and 
Secs. 173.314(j) and 173.323(c)(1) is subject to the following 
conditions and limitations.
    (i) Each tank car owner shall modify, reassign, retire, or remove at 
least 50 percent of their in-service tank car fleet within the first 
half of the compliance period and the remainder of their in-service tank 
car fleet during the second half of the compliance period.
    (ii) By October 1 of each year, each owner of a tank car subject to 
this paragraph (b)(6) shall submit to the Federal Railroad 
Administration, Hazardous Materials Division, Office of Safety Assurance 
and Compliance, 1120 Vermont Avenue, Mail Stop 25, Washington, DC 20590, 
a progress report that shows the total number of in-service tank cars 
that need head protection, thermal protection, or bottom-discontinuity 
protection; the number of new or different tank cars acquired to replace 
those tank cars required to be upgraded to a higher service pressure; 
and the total number of tank cars modified, reassigned, acquired, 
retired, or removed from service the previous year.
    (c) Tank car test pressure. A tank car used for the transportation 
of a hazardous material must have a tank test pressure equal to or 
greater than the greatest of the following:
    (1) Except for shipments of carbon dioxide, anhydrous hydrogen 
chloride, vinyl fluoride, ethylene, or hydrogen, 133 percent of the sum 
of lading vapor pressure at the reference temperature of 46  deg.C (115 
deg.F) for non-insulated tank cars or 41  deg.C (105  deg.F) for 
insulated tank cars plus static head, plus gas padding

[[Page 433]]

pressure in the vacant space of a tank car;
    (2) 133 percent of the maximum loading or unloading pressure, 
whichever is greater;
    (3) 20.7 Bar (300 psig) for materials that are poisonous by 
inhalation (see Sec. 173.31(e)(2)(ii) for compliance dates);
    (4) The minimum pressure prescribed by the specification in part 179 
of this subchapter; or
    (5) The minimum test pressure prescribed for the specific hazardous 
material in the applicable packaging section in subpart F or G of this 
part.
    (d) Examination before shipping. (1) No person may offer for 
transportation a tank car containing a hazardous material or a residue 
of a hazardous material unless that person determines that the tank car 
is in proper condition and safe for transportation. As a minimum, each 
person offering a tank car for transportation must perform an external 
visual inspection that includes:
    (i) Except where insulation or a thermal protection system precludes 
an inspection, the tank shell and heads for abrasion, corrosion, cracks, 
dents, distortions, defects in welds, or any other condition that makes 
the tank car unsafe for transportation;
    (ii) The piping, valves, fittings, and gaskets for corrosion, 
damage, or any other condition that makes the tank car unsafe for 
transportation;
    (iii) For missing or loose bolts, nuts, or elements that make the 
tank car unsafe for transportation;
    (iv) All closures on tank cars and determine that the closures and 
all fastenings securing them are properly tightened in place by the use 
of a bar, wrench, or other suitable tool;
    (v) Protective housings for proper securement;
    (vi) The pressure relief device, including a careful inspection of 
the rupture disc in non-reclosing pressure relief devices, for corrosion 
or damage that may alter the intended operation of the device;
    (vii) Each tell-tale indicator after filling and prior to 
transportation to ensure the integrity of the rupture disc;
    (viii) The external thermal protection system, tank-head puncture 
resistance system, coupler vertical restraint system, and bottom 
discontinuity protection for conditions that make the tank car unsafe 
for transportation;
    (ix) The required markings on the tank car for legibility; and
    (x) The periodic inspection date markings to ensure that the 
inspection and test intervals are within the prescribed intervals.
    (2) Closures on tank cars are required, in accordance with this 
subchapter, to be designed and closed so that under conditions normally 
incident to transportation, including the effects of temperature and 
vibration, there will be no identifiable release of a hazardous material 
to the environment. ln any action brought to enforce this section, the 
lack of securement of any closure to a tool-tight condition, detected at 
any point, will establish a rebuttable presumption that a proper 
inspection was not performed by the offeror of the car. That presumption 
may be rebutted by any evidence indicating that the lack of securement 
resulted from a specific cause not within the control of the offeror.
    (e) Special requirements for materials poisonous by inhalation--(1) 
Interior heater coils. Tank cars used for materials poisonous by 
inhalation may not have interior heater coils.
    (2) Tank car specifications. A tank car used for a material 
poisonous by inhalation must have a tank test pressure of 20.7 Bar (300 
psig) or greater, head protection, and a metal jacket (e.g., DOT 
105S300W), except that--
    (i) A higher test pressure is required if otherwise specified in 
this subchapter; and
    (ii) Other than as provided in paragraph (b)(6) of this section, a 
tank car which does not conform to the requirements of this paragraph 
(e)(2), and was authorized for the material poisonous by inhalation 
under the regulations in effect on June 30, 1996, may continue in use 
until July 1, 2006.
    (f) Special requirements for hazardous substances. (1) A tank car 
used for a hazardous substance listed in paragraph (f)(2) of this 
section must have a tank test pressure of at least 13.8 Bar (200 psig), 
head protection and a metal jacket, except that--
    (i) No metal jacket is required if--

[[Page 434]]

    (A) The tank test pressure is 23.4 Bar (340 psig) or higher; or
    (B) The tank shell and heads are manufactured from AAR steel 
specification TC-128, normalized;
    (ii) A higher test pressure is required if otherwise specified in 
this subchapter; and
    (iii) Other than as provided in paragraph (b)(6) of this section, a 
tank car which does not conform to the requirements of this paragraph 
(f)(1), and was authorized for a hazardous substance under the 
regulations in effect on June 30, 1996, may continue in use until July 
1, 2006.
    (2) List of hazardous substances. Hazardous substances for which the 
provisions of this paragraph (f) apply are as follows:

Aldrin
Allyl chloride
alpha-BHC
beta-BHC
delta-BHC
gamma-BHC
Bis(2-chloroethyl) ether
Bromoform
Carbon tetrachloride
Chlordane
p-Chloroaniline
Chlorobenzene
Chlorobenzilate
p-Chloro-m-cresol
2-Chloroethyl vinyl ether
Chloroform
2-Chloronapthalene
o-Chlorophenol
3-Chloropropionitrile
DDE
DDT
1,2-Dibromo-3-chloropropane
m-Dichlorobenzene
o-Dichlorobenzene
p-Dichlorobenzene
3,3'-Dichlorobenzidine
1,4-Dichloro-2-butene
1,1-Dichloroethane
1,2-Dichloroethane
1,1-Dichloroethylene
Dichloroisopropyl ether
Dichloromethane @
2,4-Dichlorophenol
2,6-Dichlorophenol
1,2-Dichloropropane
1,3-Dichloropropene
Dieldrin
alpha-Endosulfan
beta-Endosulfan
Endrin
Endrin aldehyde
Heptachlor
Heptachlor epoxide
Hexachlorobenzene
Hexachlorobutadiene
Hexachloroethane
Hexachlorophene
Hexachloropropene
Isodrin
Kepone
Methoxychlor
4,4'-Methylenebis(2-chloroaniline)
Methylene bromide
Pentachlorobenzene
Pentachloroethane
Pentachloronitrobenzene (PCNB)
Pentachlorophenol
Polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs)
Pronamide
Silvex (2,4,5-TP)
2,4,5-T
TDE
1,2,4,5-Tetrachlorobenzene
2,3,7,8-Tetrachlorodibenzo-p-dioxin (TCDD)
Tetrachloroethane
Tetrachloroethylene
2,3,4,6-Tetrachlorophenol
Toxaphene
1,2,4-Trichlorobenzene
1,1,1-Trichloroethane
1,1,2-Trichloroethane
Trichloroethylene
2,4,5-Trichlorophenol
2,4,6-Trichlorophenol
Tris(2,3-dibromopropyl) phosphate

[Amdt. 173-245, 60 FR 49072, Sept. 21, 1995, as amended by Amdt. 173-
245, 61 FR 33254, June 26, 1996; Amdt. 173-256, 61 FR 51338, Oct. 1, 
1996; 65 FR 58629, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 33427, June 21, 2001; 66 FR 
45379, 45381, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.32  Requirements for the use of portable tanks.

    (a) General requirements. No person may offer a hazardous material 
for transportation in a portable tank except as authorized by this 
subchapter.
    (1) Except as otherwise provided in this subpart, no person may use 
a portable tank for the transportation of a hazardous material unless it 
meets the requirements of this subchapter.
    (2) No person may fill and offer for transportation a portable tank 
when the prescribed periodic test or inspection under subpart G of part 
180 of this subchapter has become due until the test or inspection has 
been successfully completed. This requirement does not apply to any 
portable tank filled prior to the test or inspection due date.
    (3) When a portable tank is used as a cargo tank motor vehicle, it 
must conform to all the requirements prescribed for cargo tank motor 
vehicles. (See Sec. 173.33.)

[[Page 435]]

    (b) Substitute packagings. A particular Specification portable tank 
may be substituted for another portable tank as follows:
    (1) An IM or UN portable tank may be used whenever an IM or UN 
portable tank having less stringent requirements is authorized provided 
the portable tank meets or exceeds the requirements for pressure-relief 
devices, bottom outlets and any other special provisions specified in 
Sec. 172.102(c)(7)(vi) of this subchapter.
    (2) Where a Specification IM101 or IM102 portable tank is 
prescribed, a UN portable tank or Specification 51 portable tank 
otherwise conforming to the special commodity requirements of 
Sec. 172.102(c)(7) of this subchapter for the material to be transported 
may be used.
    (3) A DOT Specification 51 portable tank may be used whenever a DOT 
Specification 56, 57, or 60 portable tank is authorized. A DOT 
Specification 60 portable tank may be used whenever a DOT Specification 
56 or 57 portable tank is authorized. A higher integrity tank used 
instead of a specified portable tank must meet the same design profile; 
for example, a DOT Specification 51 portable tank must be lined if used 
instead of a lined DOT Specification 60 portable tank.
    (c) Grandfather provisions for portable tanks--(1) Continued use of 
Specification 56 and 57 portable tanks. Continued use of an existing 
portable tank constructed to DOT Specification 56 or 57 is authorized 
only for a portable tank constructed before October 1, 1996. A stainless 
steel portable tank internally lined with polyethylene that was 
constructed on or before October 1, 1996, and that meets all 
requirements of DOT Specification 57 except for being equipped with a 
polypropylene discharge ball valve and polypropylene secondary discharge 
opening closure, may be marked as a Specification 57 portable tank and 
used in accordance with the provisions of this section.
    (2) A DOT Specification 51, IM 101, or IM 102 portable tank may not 
be manufactured after January 1, 2003; however, such tanks may continue 
to be used for the transportation of a hazardous material provided they 
meet the requirements of this subchapter, including the specification 
requirements and the requirements of this subchapter for the 
transportation of the particular hazardous material according to the T 
codes in effect on September 30, 2001 or the new T codes in 
Sec. 172.102(c)(7)(i) (see Sec. 171.14(d)(4) for transitional provisions 
applicable to T codes), and provided it conforms to the periodic 
inspection and tests specified for the particular portable tank in 
subpart G of part 180 of this subchapter. After January 1, 2003, all 
newly manufactured portable tanks must conform to the requirements for 
the design, construction and approval of UN portable tanks as specified 
in Secs. 178.273, 178.274, 178.275, 178.276, 178.277 and part 180, 
subpart G, of this subchapter.
    (3) A DOT Specification portable tank manufactured prior to January 
1, 1992 that is equipped with a non-reclosing pressure relief device may 
continue in service for the hazardous materials for which it is 
authorized. Except for a DOT Specification 56 or 57 portable tank, a DOT 
Specification portable tank manufactured after January 1, 1992, used for 
materials meeting the definition for Division 6.1 liquids, Packing Group 
I or II, Class 2 gases, or Class 3 or 4 liquids, must be equipped with a 
reclosing pressure relief valve having adequately sized venting capacity 
unless otherwise specified in this subchapter (see Secs. 178.275(f)(4) 
and 178.277 of this subchapter).
    (4) Any portable tank container constructed prior to May 15, 1950, 
complying with the requirements of either the ASME Code for Unfired 
Pressure Vessels, 1946 Edition, or the API ASME Code for Unfired 
Pressure Vessels, 1943 Edition (see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter), may 
be used for the transportation of liquefied compressed gas, provided it 
fulfills all the requirements of the part and specifications for the 
particular gas or gases to be transported. Such portable tanks must be 
marked ``ICC Specification 51X'' on the plate required by the 
specification, except as modified by any or all of the following:
    (i) Portable tanks designed and constructed in accordance with Pars. 
U-68, U-69, or U-201 of the ASME Code (see Sec. 171.7 of this 
subchapter) may be used. Portable tanks designed and constructed in 
accordance with Par. U-68

[[Page 436]]

or Par. U-69 may be re-rated at a working pressure 25 percent in excess 
of the design pressure for which the portable tank was originally 
constructed. If the portable tank is re-rated, the re-rated pressure 
must be marked on the plate as follows: ``Re-rated working pressure--
psig''.
    Note to Paragraph (c)(4)(i): For purposes of setting safety relief 
valves, pressure control valves, establishing retest pressure and 
maximum and minimum design pressures, the re-rated working pressure must 
be considered as the equivalent of the design pressure as defined in the 
specification.
    (ii) Loading and unloading accessories, valves, piping, fittings, 
safety and gauging devices, do not have to comply with the requirements 
for the particular location on the portable tank.
    (5) Any ICC Specification 50 portable tank fulfilling the 
requirements of that specification may be continued in service for 
transportation of a liquefied petroleum gas if it is retested every five 
years in accordance with the requirements in Sec. 180.605 of this 
subchapter. Use of existing portable tanks is authorized. New 
construction is not authorized.
    (d) Determination of an authorized portable tank. Prior to filling 
and offering a portable tank for transportation, the shipper must ensure 
that the portable tank conforms to the authorized specification and 
meets the applicable requirements in this subchapter for the hazardous 
material. The shipper must ensure that the MAWP, design pressure or test 
pressure of the portable tank, as applicable, is appropriate for the 
hazardous material being transported. Determination of the applicable 
pressure must take into account the maximum pressure used to load or 
unload the hazardous material, the vapor pressure, static head and surge 
pressures of the hazardous material and the temperatures that the 
hazardous material will experience during transportation.
    (e) External inspection prior to filling. Each portable tank must be 
given a complete external inspection prior to filling. Any unsafe 
condition must be corrected prior to its being filled and offered for 
transportation. The external inspection shall include a visual 
inspection of:
    (1) The shell, piping, valves and other appurtenances for corroded 
areas, dents, defects in welds and other defects such as missing, 
damaged, or leaking gaskets;
    (2) All flanged connections or blank flanges for missing or loose 
nuts and bolts;
    (3) All emergency devices for corrosion, distortion, or any damage 
or defect that could prevent their normal operation;
    (4) All required markings on the tank for legibility; and
    (5) Any device for tightening manhole covers to ensure such devices 
are operative and adequate to prevent leakage at the manhole cover.
    (f) Loading requirements. (1) A hazardous material may not be loaded 
into a portable tank if the hazardous material would:
    (i) Damage the portable tank;
    (ii) React with the portable tank; or
    (iii) Otherwise compromise its product retention capability.
    (2) A hazardous material may not be loaded in a DOT Specification 
51, DOT Specification 60, an IM or UN portable tank unless the portable 
tank has a pressure relief device that provides total relieving capacity 
meeting the requirements of this subchapter.
    (3) Except during a pressure test, a portable tank may not be 
subjected to a pressure greater than its marked maximum allowable 
working pressure or, when appropriate, its marked design pressure.
    (4) A portable tank may not be loaded to a gross mass greater than 
the maximum allowable gross mass specified on its identification plate.
    (5) Except for a non-flowable solid or a liquid with a viscosity of 
2,680 centistokes (millimeters squared per second) or greater at 20 
deg.C (68  deg.F), an IM or UN portable tank, or compartment thereof, 
having a volume greater than 7,500 L (1,980 gallons) may not be loaded 
to a filling density of more than 20% and less than 80% by volume. This 
filling restriction does not apply if a portable tank is divided by 
partitions or surge plates into compartments of not more than 7,500 L 
(1,980 gallons) capacity; this portable tank must not be offered for 
transportation in an ullage

[[Page 437]]

condition liable to produce an unacceptable hydraulic force due to 
surge.
    (6) The outage for a portable tank may not be less than 2% at a 
temperature of 50  deg.C (122  deg.F) unless otherwise specified in this 
subchapter. For UN portable tanks, the applicable maximum filling limits 
apply as specified according to the assigned TP codes in Column (7) of 
the Sec. 172.101 Table of this subchapter except when transported 
domestically.
    (7) Each tell-tale indicator or pressure gauge located in the space 
between a frangible disc and a safety relief valve mounted in series 
must be checked after the tank is filled and prior to transportation to 
ensure that the frangible disc is leak free. Any leakage through the 
frangible disc must be corrected prior to offering the tank for 
transportation.
    (8) During filling, the temperature of the hazardous materials shall 
not exceed the limits of the design temperature range of the portable 
tank.
    (9) The maximum mass of liquefied compressed gas per liter (gallon) 
of shell capacity (kg/L or lbs./gal.) may not exceed the density of the 
liquefied compressed gas at 50  deg.C (122  deg.F). The portable tank 
must not be liquid full at 60  deg.C (140  deg.F).
    (g) Additional requirements for specific modal transport. In 
addition to other applicable requirements, the following apply:
    (1) A portable tank containing a hazardous material may not be 
loaded on to a highway or rail transport vehicle unless loaded entirely 
within the horizontal outline thereof, without overhang or projection of 
any part of the tank assembly. In addition, for unloading a portable 
tank, see Sec. 177.834(i)(2) of this subchapter.
    (2) An IM or UN portable tank used for the transportation of 
flammable liquids by rail may not be fitted with non-reclosing pressure 
relief devices except in series with reclosing pressure relief valves.
    (3) A portable tank or Specification 106A or 110A multi-unit tank 
car containing a hazardous material may not be offered for 
transportation aboard a passenger vessel unless:
    (i) The vessel is operating under a change to its character of 
vessel certification as defined in Sec. 171.8 of this subchapter; and
    (ii) The material is permitted to be transported aboard a passenger 
vessel in the Sec. 172.101 Table of this subchapter.
    (h) Additional general commodity-specific requirements. In addition 
to other applicable requirements, the following requirements apply:
    (1) Each uninsulated portable tank used for the transportation of a 
liquefied compressed gas must have an exterior surface finish that is 
significantly reflective, such as a light-reflecting color if painted, 
or a bright reflective metal or other material if unpainted.
    (2) If a hazardous material is being transported in a molten state, 
the portable tank must be thermally insulated with suitable insulation 
material of sufficient thickness that the overall thermal conductance is 
not more than 0.080 Btu per hour per square foot per degree Fahrenheit 
differential.
    (i) Additional requirements for portable tanks other than IM 
specification and UN portable tanks. (1) The bursting strength of any 
piping and fittings must be at least four times the design pressure of 
the tank, and at least four times the pressure to which, in any 
instance, it may be subjected in service by the action of a pump or 
other device (not including safety relief valves) that may subject 
piping to pressures greater than the design pressure of the tank.
    (2) Pipe joints must be threaded, welded or flanged. If threaded 
pipe is used, the pipe and pipe fittings must not be lighter than 
Schedule 80 weight. Where copper tubing is permitted, joints must be 
brazed or be of equally strong metal union type. The melting point of 
brazing material may not be lower than 1,000  deg.F (537.8  deg.C). The 
method of joining tubing must not decrease the strength of the tubing 
such as by the cutting of threads.
    (3) Non-malleable metals may not be used in the construction of 
valves or fittings.
    (4) Suitable provision must be made in every case to allow for 
expansion, contraction, jarring and vibration of all pipe. Slip joints 
may not be used for this purpose.
    (5) Piping and fittings must be grouped in the smallest practicable

[[Page 438]]

space and must be protected from damage as required by the 
specification.
    (6) All piping, valves and fittings on every portable tank must be 
leakage tested with gas or air after installation and proved tight at 
not less than the design pressure of the portable tank on which they are 
used. In the event of replacement, all such piping, valves, or fittings 
must be tested in accordance with the requirements of this section 
before the portable tank is returned to transportation service. The 
requirements of this section apply to all hoses used on portable tanks, 
except that hoses may be tested either before or after installation on 
the portable tank.
    (7) All materials used in the construction of portable tanks and 
their appurtenances may not be subject to destructive attack by the 
contents of the portable tank.
    (8) No aluminum, copper, silver, zinc nor their alloys may be used. 
Brazed joints may not be used. All parts of a portable tank and its 
appurtenances used for anhydrous ammonia must be steel.
    (9) Each outlet of a portable tank used for the transportation of 
non-refrigerated liquefied compressed gases, except carbon dioxide, must 
be provided with a suitable automatic excess-flow valve (see definition 
in Sec. 178.337-1(g) of this subchapter). The valve must be located 
inside the portable tank or at a point outside the portable tank where 
the line enters or leaves the portable tank. The valve seat must be 
located inside the portable tank or may be located within a welded 
flange or its companion flange, or within a nozzle or within a coupling. 
The installation must be made in such a manner as to reasonably assure 
that any undue strain which causes failure requiring functioning of the 
valve shall cause failure in such a manner that it will not impair the 
operation of the valve.
    (i) A safety device connection or liquid level gauging device that 
is constructed so that the outward flow of the tank contents will not 
exceed that passed by an opening of 0.1397 cm (0.0550 inches) is not 
required to be equipped with excess-flow valves.
    (ii) An excess-flow valve must close automatically if the flow 
reaches the rated flow of gas or liquid specified by the original valve 
manufacturer when piping mounted directly on the valve is sheared off 
before the first valve, pump, or fitting downstream from the excess flow 
valve.
    (iii) An excess-flow valve may be designed with a by-pass, not to 
exceed a 0.1016 cm (0.040 inches) diameter opening to allow equalization 
of pressure.
    (iv) Filling and discharge lines must be provided with manually 
operated shut-off valves located as close to the tank as practical. 
Unless this valve is manually operable at the valve, the line must also 
have a manual shut-off valve. The use of ``Stop-Check'' valves to 
satisfy with one valve the requirements of this section is forbidden. 
For portable tanks used for refrigerated liquefied gases, a ``stop 
check'' valve may be used on the vapor side of the pressure buildup 
circuit.
    (10) Each portable tank used for carbon dioxide or nitrous oxide 
must be lagged with a suitable insulation material of such thickness 
that the overall thermal conductance is not more than 0.08 Btu per 
square foot per degree Fahrenheit differential in temperature per hour. 
The conductance must be determined at 60  deg.Fahrenheit. Insulation 
material used on portable tanks for nitrous oxide must be 
noncombustible.
    (11) Refrigerating or heating coils must be installed in portable 
tanks used for carbon dioxide and nitrous oxide. Such coils must be 
tested externally to at least the same pressure as the test pressure of 
the portable tank. The coils must also be tested internally to at least 
twice the working pressure of the heating or refrigerating system to be 
used, but in no case less than the test pressure of the portable tank. 
Such coils must be securely anchored. In the event of leakage, the 
refrigerant or heating medium to be circulated through the coil or coils 
must have no adverse chemical reaction with the portable tank or its 
contents.
    (12) Excess flow valves are not required for portable tanks used for 
the transport of refrigerated liquefied gases.

[66 FR 33427, June 21, 2001, as amended at 67 FR 15743, Apr. 3, 2002]

[[Page 439]]



Sec. 173.33  Hazardous materials in cargo tank motor vehicles.

    (a) General requirements. (1) No person may offer or accept a 
hazardous material for transportation in a cargo tank motor vehicle 
except as authorized by this subchapter.
    (2) Two or more materials may not be loaded or accepted for 
transportation in the same cargo tank motor vehicle if, as a result of 
any mixture of the materials, an unsafe condition would occur, such as 
an explosion, fire, excessive increase in pressure or heat, or the 
release of toxic vapors.
    (3) No person may fill and offer for transportation a specification 
cargo tank motor vehicle for which the prescribed periodic retest or 
reinspection under subpart E of part 180 of this subchapter is past due 
until the retest or inspection has been successfully completed. This 
requirement does not apply to a cargo tank supplied by a motor carrier 
who is other than the person offering the hazardous material for 
transportation (see Sec. 180.407(a)(1) of this subchapter), or to any 
cargo tank filled prior to the retest or inspection due date.
    (b) Loading requirements. (1) A hazardous material may not be loaded 
in a cargo tank if during transportation any part of the tank in contact 
with the hazardous material lading would have a dangerous reaction with 
the hazardous material.
    (2) A cargo tank may not be loaded with a hazardous material that 
will have an adverse effect on the tank's integrity or--
    (i) May combine chemically with any residue or contaminants in the 
tank to produce an explosion, fire, excessive increase in pressure, 
release of toxic vapors or other unsafe condition.
    (ii)-(iii) [Reserved]
    (iv) May severely corrode or react with the tank material at any 
concentration and temperature that will exist during transportation.
    (v) Is prohibited by Sec. 173.21 or Sec. 173.24 of this subchapter.
    (3) Air pressure in excess of ambient atmospheric pressure may not 
be used to load or unload any lading which may create an air-enriched 
mixture within the flammability range of the lading in the vapor space 
of the tank.
    (4) To prevent cargo tank rupture in a loading or unloading 
accident, the loading or unloading rate used must be less than or equal 
to that indicated on the cargo tank specification plate, except as 
specified in Sec. 173.318(b)(6). If no loading or unloading rate is 
marked on the specification plate, the loading or unloading rate and 
pressure used must be limited such that the pressure in the tank may not 
exceed 130% of the MAWP.
    (c) Maximum Lading Pressure. (1) Prior to loading and offering a 
cargo tank motor vehicle for transportation with material that requires 
the use of a specification cargo tank, the person must confirm that the 
cargo tank motor vehicle conforms to the specification required for the 
lading and that the MAWP of the cargo tank is greater than or equal to 
the largest pressure obtained under the following conditions:
    (i) For compressed gases and certain refrigerated liquids that are 
not cryogenic liquids, the pressure prescribed in Sec. 173.315 of this 
subchapter.
    (ii) For cryogenic liquids, the pressure prescribed in Sec. 173.318 
of this subchapter.
    (iii) For liquid hazardous materials loaded in DOT specification 
cargo tanks equipped with a 1 psig normal vent, the sum of the tank 
static head plus 1 psig. In addition, for hazardous materials loaded in 
these cargo tanks, the vapor pressure of the lading at 115  deg.F must 
be not greater than 1 psig, except for gasoline transported in 
accordance with Special Provision B33 in Sec. 172.102(c)(3) of this 
subchapter.
    (iv) For liquid hazardous materials not covered in paragraph 
(c)(1)(i), (ii), or (iii) of this section, the sum of the vapor pressure 
of the lading at 115  deg.F, plus the tank static head exerted by the 
lading, plus any pressure exerted by the gas padding, including air in 
the ullage space or dome.
    (v) The pressure prescribed in subpart B, D, E, F, G, or H of this 
part, as applicable.
    (vi) The maximum pressure in the tank during loading or unloading.
    (2) Any Specification MC 300, MC 301, MC 302, MC 303, MC 305, MC 306 
or MC 312, cargo tank motor vehicle with no marked design pressure or 
marked with

[[Page 440]]

a design pressure of 3 psig or less may be used for an authorized lading 
where the pressure derived from Sec. 173.33(c)(1) is less than or equal 
to 3 psig. After December 31, 1990, a cargo tank may not be loaded and 
offered for transportation unless marked or remarked with an MAWP or 
design pressure in accordance with 49 CFR 180.405(k).
    (3) Any Specification MC 310 or MC 311 cargo tank motor vehicle may 
be used for an authorized lading where the pressure derived from 
Sec. 173.33(c)(1) is less than or equal to the MAWP or MWP, 
respectively, as marked on the specification plate.
    (4) Any cargo tank marked or certified before August 31, 1995, 
marked with a design pressure rather than an MAWP may be used for an 
authorized lading where the largest pressure derived from 
Sec. 173.33(c)(1) is less than or equal to the design pressure marked on 
the cargo tank.
    (5) Any material that meets the definition of a Division 6.1, 
Packing Group I or II (poisonous liquid) material must be loaded in a 
cargo tank motor vehicle having a MAWP of 25 psig or greater.
    (d) Relief system. (1) Non-reclosing pressure relief devices are not 
authorized in any cargo tank except when in series with a reclosing 
pressure relief device. However, a cargo tank marked or certified before 
August 31, 1995 which is fitted with non-reclosing pressure relief 
devices may continue to be used in any hazardous material service for 
which it is authorized. The requirements in this paragraph do not apply 
to MC 330, MC 331 and MC 338 cargo tanks.
    (2) Each cargo tank motor vehicle used to transport a liquid 
hazardous material with a gas pad must have a pressure relief system 
that provides the venting capacity prescribed in Sec. 178.345-10(e) of 
this subchapter. The requirements in this paragraph do not apply to MC 
330, MC 331 and MC 338 cargo tanks.
    (3) A cargo tank motor vehicle made to a specification listed in 
column 1 may have pressure relief devices or outlets conforming to the 
applicable specification to which the tank was constructed, or the 
pressure relief devices or outlets may be modified to meet the 
applicable requirement for the specification listed in column 2 without 
changing the markings on the tank specification plate. The venting 
capacity requirements of the original DOT cargo tank specification must 
be met whenever a pressure relief valve is modified.

------------------------------------------------------------------------
              Column 1                             Column 2
------------------------------------------------------------------------
MC 300, MC 301, MC 302, MC 303, MC    MC 306 or DOT 406.
 305.
MC 306..............................  DOT 406.
MC 304..............................  MC 307 or DOT 407.
MC 307..............................  DOT 407.
MC 310, MC 311......................  MC 312 or DOT 412.
MC 312..............................  DOT 412.
MC 330..............................  MC 331.
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (e) Retention of hazardous materials in product piping during 
transportation. DOT specification cargo tanks used for the 
transportation of any material that is a Division 6.1 (poisonous liquid) 
material, oxidizer liquid, liquid organic peroxide or corrosive liquid 
(corrosive to skin only) may not be transported with hazardous materials 
lading retained in the piping, unless the cargo tank motor vehicle is 
equipped with bottom damage protection devices meeting the requirements 
of Sec. 178.337-10 or Sec. 178.345-8(b) of this subchapter, or the 
accident damage protection requirements of the specification under which 
it was manufactured. This requirement does not apply to a residue which 
remains after the piping is drained. A sacrificial device (see 
Sec. 178.345-1 of this subchapter) may not be used to satisfy the 
accident damage protection requirements of this paragraph.
    (f) An MC 331 type cargo tank may be used where MC 306, MC 307, MC 
312, DOT 406, DOT 407 or DOT 412 type cargo tanks are authorized. An MC 
307, MC 312, DOT 407 or DOT 412 type cargo tank may be used where MC 306 
or DOT 406 type cargo tanks are authorized. A higher integrity tank used 
instead of a specified tank must meet the same design profile (for 
example, an MC 331 cargo tank must be lined if used in place of a lined 
MC 312 cargo tank.)
    (g) Unless otherwise specified, where MC 307, MC 312, DOT 407 or DOT 
412 cargo tanks are authorized, minimum tank design pressure is 172.4 
kPa (25

[[Page 441]]

psig) for any Packing Group I or Packing Group II liquid lading that 
meets more than one hazard class definition.
    (h) Each liquid or vapor discharge opening in an MC 330 or MC 331 
cargo tank and each liquid filling and liquid discharge line in an MC 
338 cargo tank must be provided with a remotely controlled internal 
self-closing stop valve, except when an MC 330 or MC 331 cargo tank is 
marked and used exclusively to transport carbon dioxide, or except when 
an MC 338 is used to transport argon, carbon dioxide, helium, krypton, 
neon, nitrogen, and xenon. However, if the cargo tank motor vehicle was 
certified before January 1, 1995, this requirement is applicable only 
when an MC 330 or MC 331 cargo tank is used to transport a flammable 
liquid, flammable gas, hydrogen chloride (refrigerated liquid), or 
anhydrous ammonia; or when an MC 338 cargo tank is used to transport 
flammable ladings.

[Amdt. 173-212, 54 FR 25005, June 12, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 37048, 
Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52616 Dec. 21, 1990; Amdt. 173-212, 
56 FR 27875, June 17, 1991; 57 FR 45461, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 173-212, 58 
FR 12905, Mar. 8, 1993; Amdt. 173-212, 59 FR 1786, Jan. 12, 1994; Amdt. 
173-138, 59 FR 49133, Sept. 26, 1994; Amdt. 173-240, 59 FR 55172, Nov. 
3, 1994; Amdt. 173-241, 59 FR 67492, Dec. 29, 1994; 63 FR 52849, Oct. 1, 
1998; 66 FR 45183, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.34  [Reserved]



Sec. 173.35  Hazardous materials in IBCs.

    (a) No person may offer or accept a hazardous material for 
transportation in an IBC except as authorized by this subchapter. Each 
IBC used for the transportation of hazardous materials must conform to 
the requirements of its specification and regulations for the 
transportation of the particular commodity. A specification IBC, for 
which the prescribed periodic retest or inspection under subpart D of 
part 180 of this subchapter is past due, may not be filled and offered 
for transportation until the retest or inspection have been successfully 
completed. This requirement does not apply to any IBC filled prior to 
the retest or inspection due date.
    (b) Initial use and reuse of IBCs. An IBC other than a multiwall 
paper IBC (13M1 and 13M2) may be reused. If an inner liner is required, 
the inner liner must be replaced before each reuse. Before an IBC is 
filled and offered for transportation, the IBC and its service equipment 
must be given an external visual inspection, by the person filling the 
IBC, to ensure that:
    (1) The IBC is free from corrosion, contamination, cracks, cuts, or 
other damage which would render it unable to pass the prescribed design 
type test to which it is certified and marked; and
    (2) The IBC is marked in accordance with requirements in 
Sec. 178.703 of this subchapter. Additional marking allowed for each 
design type may be present. Required markings that are missing, damaged 
or difficult to read must be restored or returned to original condition.
    (c) A metal IBC, or a part thereof, subject to thinning by 
mechanical abrasion or corrosion due to the lading, must be protected by 
providing a suitable increase in thickness of material, a lining or some 
other suitable method of protection. Increased thickness for corrosion 
or abrasion protection must be added to the wall thickness specified in 
Sec. 178.705(c)(1)(iv) of this subchapter.
    (d) Notwithstanding requirements in Sec. 173.24b of this subpart, 
when filling an IBC with liquids, sufficient ullage must be left to 
ensure that, at the mean bulk temperature of 50  deg.C (122  deg.F), the 
IBC is not filled to more than 98 percent of its water capacity.
    (e) Where two or more closure systems are fitted in series, the 
system nearest to the hazardous material being carried must be closed 
first.
    (f) During transportation--
    (1) No hazardous material may remain on the outside of the IBC; and
    (2) Each IBC must be securely fastened to or contained within the 
transport unit.
    (g) Each IBC used for transportation of solids which may become 
liquid at temperatures likely to be encountered during transportation 
must also be capable of containing the substance in the liquid state.
    (h) Liquid hazardous materials may only be offered for 
transportation in a metal, rigid plastic, or composite IBC that is 
appropriately resistant to an increase of internal pressure likely to 
develop during transportation.

[[Page 442]]

    (1) A rigid plastic or composite IBC may only be filled with a 
liquid having a vapor pressure less than or equal to the greater of the 
following two values: the first value is determined from any of the 
methods in paragraphs (h)(1) (i), (ii) or (iii) of this section. The 
second value is determined by the method in paragraph (h)(1)(iv) of this 
section.
    (i) The gauge pressure (pressure in the IBC above ambient 
atmospheric pressure) measured in the IBC at 55  deg.C (131  deg.F). 
This gauge pressure must not exceed two-thirds of the marked test 
pressure and must be determined after the IBC was filled and closed at 
15  deg.C (60  deg.F) to less than or equal to 98 percent of its 
capacity.
    (ii) The absolute pressure (vapor pressure of the hazardous material 
plus atmospheric pressure) in the IBC at 50  deg.C (122  deg.F). This 
absolute pressure must not exceed four-sevenths of the sum of the marked 
test pressure and 100 kPa (14.5 psia).
    (iii) The absolute pressure (vapor pressure of the hazardous 
material plus atmospheric pressure) in the IBC at 55  deg.C (131 
deg.F). This absolute pressure must not exceed two-thirds of the sum of 
the marked test pressure and 100 kPa (14.5 psia).
    (iv) Twice the static pressure of the substance, measured at the 
bottom of the IBC. This value must not be less than twice the static 
pressure of water.
    (2) Gauge pressure (pressure in the IBC above ambient atmospheric 
pressure) in metal IBC must not exceed 110 kPa (16 psig) at 50  deg.C 
(122  deg.F) or 130 kPa (18.9 psig) at 55  deg.C (131  deg.F).
    (i) The requirements in this section do not apply to DOT-56 or -57 
portable tanks.
    (j) No IBC may be filled with a Packing Group I liquid. Rigid 
plastic, composite, flexible, wooden or fiberboard IBC used to transport 
Packing Group I solid materials may not exceed 1.5 cubic meters (53 
cubic feet) capacity. For Packing Group I solids, a metal IBC may not 
exceed 3 cubic meters (106 cubic feet) capacity.
    (k) When an IBC is used for the transportation of liquids with a 
flash point of 60.5  deg.C (141  deg.F) (closed cup) or lower, or 
powders with the potential for dust explosion, measures must be taken 
during product loading and unloading to prevent a dangerous 
electrostatic discharge.
    (l) IBC filling limits. (1) Except as provided in this section, an 
IBC may not be filled with a hazardous material in excess of the maximum 
gross mass marked on that container.
    (2) An IBC which is tested and marked for Packing Group II liquid 
materials may be filled with a Packing Group III liquid material to a 
gross mass not exceeding 1.5 times the maximum gross mass marked on that 
container, if all the performance criteria can still be met at the 
higher gross mass.
    (3) An IBC which is tested and marked for liquid hazardous materials 
may be filled with a solid hazardous material to a gross mass not 
exceeding the maximum gross mass marked on that container. In addition, 
an IBC intended for the transport of liquids which is tested and marked 
for Packing Group II liquid materials may be filled with a Packing Group 
III solid hazardous material to a gross mass not exceeding the marked 
maximum gross mass multiplied by 1.5 if all the performance criteria can 
still be met at the higher gross mass.
    (4) An IBC which is tested and marked for Packing Group I solid 
materials may be filled with a Packing Group II solid material to a 
gross mass not exceeding the maximum gross mass marked on that 
container, multiplied by 1.5, if all the performance criteria can be met 
at the higher gross mass; or a Packing Group III solid material to a 
gross mass not exceeding the maximum gross mass marked on the IBC, 
multiplied by 2.25, if all the performance criteria can be met at the 
higher gross mass. An IBC which is tested and marked for Packing Group 
II solid materials may be filled with a Packing Group III solid material 
to a gross mass not exceeding the maximum gross mass marked on the IBC, 
multiplied by 1.5.

[Amdt. 173-238, 59 FR 38064, July 26, 1994, as amended by Amdt. 173-243, 
60 FR 40038, Aug. 4, 1995; 64 FR 10777, Mar. 5, 1999; 66 FR 45380, 
45381, Aug. 28, 2001]

[[Page 443]]



Sec. 173.40  General packaging requirements for toxic materials packaged in cylinders.

    When this section is referenced for a Hazard Zone A or B hazardous 
material elsewhere in this subchapter, the requirements in this section 
are applicable to cylinders used for that material.
    (a) Authorized cylinders. (1) A cylinder must conform to one of the 
specifications for cylinders in subpart C of part 178 of this 
subchapter, except that specification 8, 8AL, and 39 cylinders are not 
authorized.
    (2) After September 30, 2002, DOT 3AL cylinders made of aluminum 
alloy 6351-T6 may not be filled and offered for transportation or 
transported with a Division 2.3 Hazard Zone A material, a Division 6.1 
Hazard Zone A material, or any liquid meeting the definition of Division 
6.1 and the criteria for Packing Group I Hazard Zone A, as specified in 
Sec. 173.133. If it is otherwise serviceable and conforms to the 
regulations in effect on September 30, 2002, a DOT 3AL cylinder made of 
aluminum alloy 6351-T6 and filled before October 1, 2002, may be 
transported for reprocessing or disposal of the cylinder's contents 
until April 1, 2003.
    (b) Outage and pressure requirements. For Hazard Zone A and, after 
May 30, 2003, Hazard Zone B materials, the pressure of the hazardous 
material at 55  deg.C (131  deg.F) may not exceed the service pressure 
of the cylinder. Sufficient outage must be provided so that the cylinder 
will not be liquid full at 55  deg.C (131  deg.F).
    (c) Closures. Each cylinder containing a Hazard Zone A material must 
be closed with a plug or valve conforming to the following:
    (1) Each plug or valve must have a taper-threaded connection 
directly to the cylinder and be capable of withstanding the test 
pressure of the cylinder without damage or leakage.
    (2) Each valve must be of the packless type with non-perforated 
diaphragm, except that, for corrosive materials, a valve may be of the 
packed type with an assembly made gas-tight by means of a seal cap with 
gasketed joint attached to the valve body or the cylinder to prevent 
loss of material through or past the packing.
    (3) Each valve outlet must be sealed by a threaded cap or threaded 
solid plug and inert gasketing material.
    (4) The materials of construction for the cylinder, valves, plugs, 
outlet caps, luting, and gaskets must be compatible with each other and 
with the lading.
    (d) Additional handling protection. Each cylinder or cylinder 
overpack combination offered for transportation containing a Division 
2.3 or 6.1 Hazard Zone A or B material must conform to the valve damage 
protection performance requirements of this section. In addition to the 
requirements of this section, overpacks must conform to the overpack 
provisions of Sec. 173.25.
    (1) Each cylinder with a wall thickness at any point of less than 
2.03 mm (0.08 inch) and each cylinder that does not have fitted valve 
protection must be overpacked in a box. The box must conform to overpack 
provisions in Sec. 173.25. Box and valve protection must be of 
sufficient strength to protect all parts of the cylinder and valve, if 
any, from deformation and breakage resulting from a drop of 2.0 m (7 ft) 
or more onto a non-yielding surface, such as concrete or steel, 
impacting at an orientation most likely to cause damage. ``Deformation'' 
means a cylinder or valve that is bent, distorted, mangled, misshapen, 
twisted, warped, or in a similar condition.
    (2) Each cylinder with a valve must be equipped with a protective 
metal cap, other valve protection device, or an overpack sufficient to 
protect the valve from deformation, breakage or leakage resulting from a 
drop of 2.0 m (7 ft) onto a non-yielding surface, such as concrete or 
steel. Impact must be at an orientation most likely to cause damage.
    (e) Interconnection. Cylinders may not be manifolded or 
interconnected.

[67 FR 51642, Aug. 8, 2002, as amended at 67 FR 61289, Sept. 30, 2002]



    Subpart C--Definitions, Classification and Packaging for Class 1

    Source: Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52617, Dec. 21, 1990, unless otherwise 
noted.

[[Page 444]]



Sec. 173.50  Class 1--Definitions.

    (a) Explosive. For the purpose of this subchapter, an explosive 
means any substance or article, including a device, which is designed to 
function by explosion (i.e., an extremely rapid release of gas and heat) 
or which, by chemical reaction within itself, is able to function in a 
similar manner even if not designed to function by explosion, unless the 
substance or article is otherwise classed under the provision of this 
subchapter.
    (b) Explosives in Class 1 are divided into six divisions as follows:
    (1) Division 1.1 consists of explosives that have a mass explosion 
hazard. A mass explosion is one which affects almost the entire load 
instantaneously.
    (2) Division 1.2 consists of explosives that have a projection 
hazard but not a mass explosion hazard.
    (3) Division 1.3 consists of explosives that have a fire hazard and 
either a minor blast hazard or a minor projection hazard or both, but 
not a mass explosion hazard.
    (4) Division 1.4 consists of explosives that present a minor 
explosion hazard. The explosive effects are largely confined to the 
package and no projection of fragments of appreciable size or range is 
to be expected. An external fire must not cause virtually instantaneous 
explosion of almost the entire contents of the package.
    (5) Division 1.5 \1\ consists of very insensitive explosives. This 
division is comprised of substances which have a mass explosion hazard 
but are so insensitive that there is very little probability of 
initiation or of transition from burning to detonation under normal 
conditions of transport.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \1\ The probability of transition from burning to detonation is 
greater when large quantities are transported in a vessel.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (6) Division 1.6 \2\ consists of extremely insensitive articles 
which do not have a mass explosive hazard. This division is comprised of 
articles which contain only extremely insensitive detonating substances 
and which demonstrate a negligible probability of accidental initiation 
or propagation.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \2\ The risk from articles of Division 1.6 is limited to the 
explosion of a single article.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52617 Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66267, 
Dec. 20, 1991; 66 FR 45183, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.51  Authorization to offer and transport explosives.

    (a) Unless otherwise provided in this subpart, no person may offer 
for transportation or transport an explosive, unless it has been tested 
and classed and approved by the Associate Administrator (Sec. 173.56).
    (b) Reports of explosives approved by the Department of Defense or 
the Department of Energy must be filed with, and receive acknowledgement 
in writing by, the Associate Administrator prior to such explosives 
being offered for transportation.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52617, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by 66 FR 45379, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.52  Classification codes and compatibility groups of explosives.

    (a) The classification code for an explosive, which is assigned by 
the Associate Administrator in accordance with this subpart, consists of 
the division number followed by the compatibility group letter. 
Compatibility group letters are used to specify the controls for the 
transportation, and storage related thereto, of explosives and to 
prevent an increase in hazard that might result if certain types of 
explosives were stored or transported together. Transportation 
compatibility requirements for carriers are prescribed in Secs. 174.81, 
175.78. 176.83 and 177.848 of this subchapter for transportation by 
rail, air, vessel, and public highway, respectively, and storage 
incidental thereto.
    (b) Compatibility groups and classification codes for the various 
types of explosives are set forth in the following tables. Table 1 sets 
forth compatibility groups and classification codes for substances and 
articles described in the first column of table 1. Table 2 shows the 
number of classification codes that are possible within each explosive 
division. Altogether, there are 35 possible classification codes for 
explosives.

[[Page 445]]



                      Table 1--Classification Codes
------------------------------------------------------------------------
   Description of substances or       Compatibility      Classification
     article to be classified             group               code
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Primary explosive substance.......          A          1.1A
Article containing a primary                B          1.1B
 explosive substance and not                           1.2B
 containing two or more effective                      1.4B
 protective features. Some
 articles, such as detonators for
 blasting, detonator assemblies
 for blasting and primers, cap-
 type, are included, even though
 they do not contain primary
 explosives..
Propellant explosive substance or           C          1.1C
 other deflagrating explosive                          1.2C
 substance or article containing                       1.3C
 such explosive substance.                             1.4C
Secondary detonating explosive              D          1.1D
 substance or black powder or                          1.2D
 article containing a secondary                        1.4D
 detonating explosive substance,                       1.5D
 in each case without means of
 initiation and without a
 propelling charge, or article
 containing a primary explosive
 substance and containing two or
 more effective protective
 features.
Article containing a secondary              E          1.1E
 detonating explosive substance,                       1.2E
 without means of initiation, with                     1.4E
 a propelling charge (other than
 one containing flammable liquid
 or gel or hypergolic liquid).
Article containing a secondary              F          1.1F
 detonating explosive substance                        1.2F
 with its means of initiation,                         1.3F
 with a propelling charge (other                       1.4F
 than one containing flammable
 liquid or gel or hypergolic
 liquid) or without a propelling
 charge.
Pyrotechnic substance or article            G          1.1G
 containing a pyrotechnic                              1.2G
 substance, or article containing                      1.3G
 both an explosive substance and                       1.4G
 an illuminating, incendiary, tear-
 producing or smoke-producing
 substance (other than a water-
 activated article or one
 containing white phosphorus,
 phosphide or flammable liquid or
 gel or hypergolic liquid).
Article containing both an                  H          1.2H
 explosive substance and white                         1.3H
 phosphorus.
Article containing both an                  J          1.1J
 explosive substance and flammable                     1.2J
 liquid or gel.                                        1.3J
Article containing both an                  K          1.2K
 explosive substance and a toxic                       1.3K
 chemical agent.
Explosive substance or article              L          1.1L
 containing an explosive substance                     1.2L
 and presenting a special risk                         1.3L
 (e.g., due to water-activation or
 presence of hybergolic liquids,
 phosphides or pyrophoric
 substances) needing isolation of
 each type.
Articles containing only extremely          N          1.6N
 insensitive detonating
 substances..
Substance or article so packed or           S          1.4S
 designed that any hazardous
 effects arising from accidental
 functioning are limited to the
 extent that they do not
 significantly hinder or prohibit
 fire fighting or other emergency
 response efforts in the immediate
 vicinity of the package.
------------------------------------------------------------------------


    Table 2--Scheme of Classification of Explosives, Combination of Hazard division With Compatibility Group
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                     Compatibility group
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
              Hazard division                A    B    C    D    E    F    G    H    J    K    L    N    S   A-S
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.1                                         1.1  1.1  1.1  1.1  1.1  1.1  1.1  ...  1.1  ...  1.1  ...  ...    9
                                              A    B    C    D    E    F    G         J         L
1.2                                         ...  1.2  1.2  1.2  1.2  1.2  1.2  1.2  1.2  1.2  1.2  ...  ...   10
                                                   B    C    D    E    F    G    H    J    K    L
1.3                                         ...  ...  1.3  ...  ...  1.3  1.3  1.3  1.3  1.3  1.3  ...  ...    7
                                                        C              F    G    H    J    K    L
1.4                                         ...  1.4  1.4  1.4  1.4  1.4  1.4  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  1.4    7
                                                   B    C    D    E    F    G                             S
1.5                                         ...  ...  ...  1.5  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...    1
                                                             D
1.6                                         ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  ...  1.6  ...    1
                                                                                                     N
                                           ---------------------------------------------------------------------
1.6                                           1    3    4    4    3    4    4    2    3    2    3    1    1   35
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52617, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 173-241, 
59 FR 67492, Dec. 29, 1994; 64 FR 51918, Sept. 27, 1999; 66 FR 45379, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.53  Provisions for using old classifications of explosives.

    Where the classification system in effect prior to January 1, 1991, 
is referenced in State or local laws, ordinances or regulations not 
pertaining to the transportation of hazardous materials, the following 
table may be used to compare old and new hazard class names:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                            Class name prior to Jan. 1,
         Current classification                        1991
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Division 1.1............................  Class A explosives.
Division 1.2............................  Class A or Class B explosives.

[[Page 446]]

 
Division 1 3............................  Class B explosive.
Division 1.4............................  Class C explosives.
Division 1.5............................  Blasting agents.
Division 1.6............................  No applicable hazard class.
------------------------------------------------------------------------



Sec. 173.54  Forbidden explosives.

    Unless otherwise provided in this subchapter, the following 
explosives shall not be offered for transportation or transported:
    (a) An explosive that has not been approved in accordance with 
Sec. 173.56 of this subpart.
    (b) An explosive mixture or device containing a chlorate and also 
containing:
    (1) An ammonium salt, including a substituted ammonium or quaternary 
ammonium salt; or
    (2) An acidic substance, including a salt of a weak base and a 
strong acid.
    (c) A leaking or damaged package of explosives.
    (d) Propellants that are unstable, condemned or deteriorated.
    (e) Nitroglycerin, diethylene glycol dinitrate, or any other liquid 
explosives not specifically authorized by this subchapter.
    (f) A loaded firearm (except as provided in 49 CFR 1544.219).
    (g) Fireworks that combine an explosive and a detonator.
    (h) Fireworks containing yellow or white phosphorus.
    (i) A toy torpedo, the maximum outside dimension of which exceeds 23 
mm (0.906 inch), or a toy torpedo containing a mixture of potassium 
chlorate, black antimony (antimony sulfide), and sulfur, if the weight 
of the explosive material in the device exceeds 0.26 g (0.01 ounce).
    (j) Explosives specifically forbidden in the Sec. 172.101 table of 
this subchapter.
    (k) Explosives not meeting the acceptance criteria specified in 
Sec. 173.57 of this subchapter.
    (l) An explosive article with its means of initiation or ignition 
installed, unless approved in accordance with Sec. 173.56.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52617 Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66267, 
Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-236, 58 FR 50236, Sept. 24, 1993; 67 FR 61013, 
Sept. 27, 2002]



Sec. 173.55  [Reserved]



Sec. 173.56  New explosives--definition and procedures for classification and approval.

    (a) Definition of new explosive. For the purposes of this subchapter 
a new explosive means an explosive produced by a person who:
    (1) Has not previously produced that explosive; or
    (2) Has previously produced that explosive but has made a change in 
the formulation, design or process so as to alter any of the properties 
of the explosive. An explosive will not be considered a ``new 
explosive'' if an agency listed in paragraph (b) of this section has 
determined, and confirmed in writing to the Associate Administrator, 
that there are no significant differences in hazard characteristics from 
the explosive previously approved.
    (b) Examination, classing and approval. Except as provided in 
paragraph (j) of this section, no person may offer a new explosive for 
transportation unless that person has specified to the examining agency 
the ranges of composition of ingredients and compounds, showing the 
intended manufacturing tolerances in the composition of substances or 
design of articles which will be allowed in that material or device, and 
unless it has been examined, classed and approved as follows:
    (1) Except for an explosive made by or under the direction or 
supervision of the Department of Defense (DOD) or the Department of 
Energy (DOE), a new explosive must be examined and assigned a 
recommended shipping description, division and compatibility group, 
based on the tests and criteria prescribed in Secs. 173.52, 173.57 and 
173.58. The person requesting approval of the new explosive must submit 
to the Associate Administrator a report of the examination and 
assignment of a recommended shipping description, division, and 
compatibility group. If the Associate Administrator finds the approval 
request meets the regulatory criteria, the new explosive will be 
approved in writing and assigned an EX number. The examination must be 
performed by a person who is approved by the Associate Administrator 
under the

[[Page 447]]

provisions of subpart H of part 107 of this chapter and who--
    (i) Has (directly, or through an employee involved in the 
examination) at least ten years of experience in the examination, 
testing and evaluation of explosives;
    (ii) Does not manufacture or market explosives, and is not 
controlled by or financially dependent on any entity that manufactures 
or markets explosives, and whose work with respect to explosives is 
limited to examination, testing and evaluation; and
    (iii) Is a resident of the United States.
    (2) A new explosive made by or under the direction or supervision of 
a component of the DOD may be examined, classed, and concurred in by:
    (i) U.S. Army Technical Center for Explosives Safety (SMCAC-EST), 
Naval Sea Systems Command (SEA-9934), or Air Force Safety Agency (SEW), 
when approved by the Chairman, DOD Explosives Board, in accordance with 
the Department of Defense Explosives Hazard Classification Procedures 
(TB 700-2); or
    (ii) The agencies and procedures specified in paragraph (b)(1) of 
this section.
    (3) A new explosive made by or under the direction or supervision of 
the Department of Energy (DOE) may be--
    (i) Examined by the DOE in accordance with the Explosives Hazard 
Classification Procedures (TB 700-2), and must be classed and approved 
by DOE; or
    (ii) Examined, classed, and approved in accordance with paragraph 
(b)(1) of this section.
    (4) For a material shipped under the description of ``ammonium 
nitrate-fuel oil mixture (ANFO)'', the only test required for 
classification purposes is the Cap Sensitivity Test (Test Method 5(a) 
prescribed in the Explosive Test Manual). The test must be performed by 
an agency listed in paragraph (b)(1), (b)(2), or (b)(3) of this section, 
the manufacturer, or the shipper. A copy of the test report must be 
submitted to the Associate Administrator before the material is offered 
for transportation, and a copy of the test report must be retained by 
the shipper for as long as that material is shipped. At a minimum, the 
test report must contain the name and address of the person or 
organization conducting the test, date of the test, quantitative 
description of the mixture. including prill size and porosity, and a 
description of the test results.
    (c) Filing DOD or DOE approval report. DOD or DOE must file a copy 
of each approval, accompanied by supporting laboratory data, with the 
Associate Administrator and receive acknowledgement in writing before 
offering the new explosive for transportation, unless the new explosive 
is:
    (1) Being transported under paragraph (d) or (e) of this section; or
    (2) Covered by a national security classification currently in 
effect.
    (d) Transportation of explosive samples for examination. 
Notwithstanding the requirements of paragraph (b) of this section with 
regard to the transportation of a new explosive that has not been 
approved, a person may offer a sample of a new explosive for 
transportation, by railroad, highway, or vessel from the place where it 
was produced to an agency identified in paragraph (b) of this section, 
for examination if--
    (1) The new explosive has been assigned a tentative shipping 
description and class in writing by the testing agency;
    (2) The new explosive is packaged as required by this part according 
to the tentative description and class assigned, unless otherwise 
specified in writing by the testing agency; and,
    (3) The package is labeled as required by this subchapter and the 
following is marked on the package:
    (i) The words ``SAMPLE FOR LABORATORY EXAMINATION'';
    (ii) The net weight of the new explosive; and
    (iii) The tentative shipping name and identification number.
    (e) Transportation of unapproved explosives for developmental 
testing. Notwithstanding the requirements of paragraph (b) of this 
section, the owner of a new explosive that has not been examined or 
approved may transport that new explosive from the place where it was 
produced to an explosives testing range if--

[[Page 448]]

    (1) It is not a primary (a 1.1A initiating) explosive or a forbidden 
explosive according to this subchapter;
    (2) It is described as a Division 1.1 explosive (substance or 
article) and is packed, marked, labeled, described on shipping papers 
and is otherwise offered for transportation in conformance with the 
requirements of this subchapter applicable to Division 1.1;
    (3) It is transported in a motor vehicle operated by the owner of 
the explosive; and
    (4) It is accompanied by a person, in addition to the operator of 
the motor vehicle, who is qualified by training and experience to handle 
the explosive.
    (f) Notwithstanding the requirements of paragraphs (b) and (d) of 
this section, the Associate Administrator may approve a new explosive on 
the basis of an approval issued for the explosive by the competent 
authority of a foreign government, or when examination of the explosive 
by a person approved by the Associate Administrator is impracticable, on 
the basis of reports of tests conducted by disinterested third parties, 
or may approve the transportation of an explosives sample for the 
purpose of examination by a person approved by the Associate 
Administrator.
    (g) Notwithstanding the requirements of paragraph (b) of this 
section, an explosive may be transported under Secs. 171.11, 171.12, 
171.12a or 176.11 of this subchapter without the approval of the 
Associate Administrator if the Associate Administrator has acknowledged, 
in writing, the acceptability of an approval issued by the competent 
authority of a foreign government pursuant to the provisions of the UN 
Recommendations, the ICAO Technical Instructions, the IMDG Code, or 
other national or international regulations based on the UN 
Recommendations. In such a case, a copy of the foreign competent 
authority approval, and a copy of the written acknowledgement of its 
acceptance must accompany each shipment of that explosive.
    (h) The requirements of this section do not apply to cartridges, 
small arms which are:
    (1) Not a forbidden explosive under Sec. 173.54 of this subchapter;
    (2) Ammunition for rifle, pistol, or shotgun;
    (3) Ammunition with inert projectile or blank ammunition; and
    (4) Ammunition not exceeding 50 caliber for rifle or pistol 
cartridges or 8 gauge for shotgun shells.

Cartridges, small arms meeting the criteria of this paragraph (h) may be 
assigned a classification code of 1.4S by the manufacturer.
    (i) If experience or other data indicate that the hazard of a 
material or a device containing an explosive composition is greater or 
less than indicated according to the definition and criteria specified 
in Secs. 173.50, 173.56, and 173.58 of this subchapter, the Associate 
Administrator may specify a classification or except the material or 
device from the requirements of this subchapter.
    (j) Fireworks. Notwithstanding the requirements of paragraph (b) of 
this section, Division 1.3 and 1.4 fireworks may be classed and approved 
by the Associate Administrator without prior examination and offered for 
transportation if the following conditions are met:
    (1) The fireworks are manufactured in accordance with the applicable 
requirements in APA Standard 87-1;
    (2) A thermal stability test is conducted on the device by the BOE, 
the BOM, or the manufacturer. The test must be performed by maintaining 
the device, or a representative prototype of a large device such as a 
display shell, at a temperature of 75  deg.C (167  deg.F) for 48 
consecutive hours. When a device contains more than one component, those 
components which could be in physical contact with each other in the 
finished device must be placed in contact with each other during the 
thermal stability test; and
    (3) The manufacturer applies in writing to the Associate 
Administrator following the applicable requirements in APA Standard 87-
1, and is notified in writing by the Associate Administrator that the 
fireworks have been classed, approved, and assigned an EX-number. Each 
application must be complete, including all relevant background data and 
copies of all applicable drawings, test results, and any other pertinent 
information on each device for which approval is being requested. The 
manufacturer must sign the application and

[[Page 449]]

certify that the device for which approval is requested conforms to APA 
Standard 87-1 and that the descriptions and technical information 
contained in the application are complete and accurate. If the 
application is denied, the manufacturer will be notified in writing of 
the reasons for the denial. The Associate Administrator may require that 
the fireworks be examined by an agency listed in paragraph (b)(1) of 
this section.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52617 Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66267, 
Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-234, 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; 62 FR 51560, 
Oct. 1, 1997; 63 FR 37461, July 10, 1998; 64 FR 10777, Mar. 5, 1999; 66 
FR 45379, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.57  Acceptance criteria for new explosives.

    (a) Unless otherwise excepted, an explosive substance must be 
subjected to the Drop Weight Impact Sensitivity Test (Test Method 
3(a)(i)), the Friction Sensitivity Test (Test Method 3(b)(iii)), the 
Thermal Stability Test (Test Method 3(c)) at 75  deg.C (167  deg.F) and 
the Small-Scale Burning Test (Test Method 3(d)(i)), each as described in 
the Explosive Test Manual (UN Recommendations on the Transport of 
Dangerous Goods, Manual of Tests and Criteria (see Sec. 171.7 of this 
subchapter)). A substance is forbidden for transportation if any one of 
the following occurs:
    (1) For a liquid, failure to pass the test criteria when tested in 
the Drop Weight Impact Sensitivity Test apparatus for liquids;
    (2) For a solid, failure to pass the test criteria when tested in 
the Drop Weight Impact Sensitivity Test apparatus for solids;
    (3) The substance has a friction sensitiveness equal to or greater 
than that of dry pentaerythrite tetranitrate (PETN) when tested in the 
Friction Sensitivity Test;
    (4) The substance fails to pass the test criteria specified in the 
Thermal Stability Test at 75  deg.C (167  deg.F); or
    (5) Explosion occurs when tested in the Small-Scale Burning Test.
    (b) An explosive article, packaged or unpackaged, or a packaged 
explosive substance must be subjected to the Thermal Stability Test for 
Articles and Packaged Articles (Test method 4(a)(i)) and the Twelve 
Meter Drop Test (Test Method 4(b)(ii)), when appropriate, in the 
Explosive Test Manual. An article or packaged substance is forbidden for 
transportation if evidence of thermal instability or excessive impact 
sensitivity is found in those tests according to the criteria and 
methods of assessing results prescribed therein.
    (c) Dynamite (explosive, blasting, type A) is forbidden for 
transportation if any of the following occurs:
    (1) It does not have uniformly mixed with the absorbent material a 
satisfactory antacid in a quantity sufficient to have the acid 
neutralizing power of an amount of magnesium carbonate equal to one 
percent of the nitroglycerin or other liquid explosive ingredient;
    (2) During the centrifuge test (Test Method D-2, in appendix D to 
this part) or the compression test (Test Method D-3 in appendix D to 
this part), a non-gelatin dynamite loses more than 3 percent by weight 
of the liquid explosive or a gelatin dynamite loses more than 10 percent 
by weight of the liquid explosive; or
    (3) During the leakage test (Test Method D-1 in appendix D to this 
part), there is any loss of liquid.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52617 Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 58 FR 51532, 
Oct. 1, 1993; 64 FR 51918, Sept. 27, 1999]



Sec. 173.58  Assignment of class and division for new explosives.

    (a) Division 1.1., 1.2., 1.3., and 1.4 explosives. In addition to 
the test prescribed in Sec. 173.57 of this subchapter, a substance or 
article in these divisions must be subjected to Test Methods 6(a), 6(b), 
and 6(c), as described in the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria, for 
assignment to an appropriate division. The criteria for assignment of 
class and division are as follows:
    (1) Division 1.1 if the major hazard is mass explosion;
    (2) Division 1.2 if the major hazard is dangerous projections;
    (3) Division 1.3 if the major hazard is radiant heat or violent 
burning, or both, but there is no blast or projection hazard;
    (4) Division 1.4 if there is a small hazard with no mass explosion 
and no projection of fragments of appreciable size or range;

[[Page 450]]

    (5) Division 1.4 Compatibility Group S (1.4S) if the hazardous 
effects are confined within the package or the blast and projection 
effects do not significantly hinder emergency response efforts; or
    (6) Not in the explosive class if the substance or article does not 
have significant explosive hazard or if the effects of explosion are 
completely confined within the article.
    (b) Division 1.5 explosive. Except for ANFO, a substance that has 
been examined in accordance with the provisions Sec. 173.57(a) of this 
subchapter, must be subjected to the following additional tests: Cap 
Sensitivity Test, Princess Incendiary Spark Test, DDT Test, and External 
Fire Test, each as described in the Explosive Test Manual. A material 
may not be classed as a Division 1.5 explosive if any of the following 
occurs:
    (1) Detonation occurs in the Cap Sensitivity Test (Test Method 
5(a));
    (2) Detonation occurs in the DDT Test (Test Method 5(b)(ii));
    (3) An explosion, evidenced by a loud noise and projection of 
fragments, occurs in the External Fire Test (Test Method 5(c), or
    (4) Ignition or explosion occurs in the Princess Incendiary Spark 
Test (Test Method 5(d)).
    (c) Division 1.6 explosive. (1) In order to be classed as a 1.6 
explosive, an article must pass all of the following tests, as 
prescribed in the Explosive Test Manual:
    (i) The 1.6 Article External Fire Test;
    (ii) The 1.6 Article Slow Cook-off Test;
    (iii) The 1.6 Article Propagation Test; and
    (iv) The 1.6 Article Bullet Impact Test.
    (2) A substance intended for use as the explosive load in an article 
of Division 1.6 must be an extremely insensitive detonating substance 
(EIDS). In order to determine if a substance is an EIDS, it must be 
subjected to the tests in paragraphs (c)(2)(i) through (c)(2)(x) of this 
section, which are described in the Explosive Test Manual. The substance 
must be tested in the form (i.e., composition, granulation, density, 
etc.) in which it is to be used in the article. A substance is not an 
EIDS if it fails any of the following tests:
    (i) The Drop Weight Impact Sensitivity Test;
    (ii) The Friction Sensitivity Test;
    (iii) The Thermal Sensitivity Test at 75  deg.C (167  deg.F);
    (iv) The Small Scale Burning Test;
    (v) The EIDS Cap Test;
    (vi) The EIDS Gap Test;
    (vii) The Susan Test;
    (viii) The EIDS Bullet Impact Test;
    (ix) The EIDS External Fire Test; and
    (x) The EIDS Slow Cook-off Test.

    (d) The Associate Administrator may waive or modify certain test(s) 
identified in Secs. 173.57 and 173.58 of this subchapter, or require 
additional testing, if appropriate. In addition, the Associate 
Administrator may limit the quantity of explosive in a device.
    (e) Each explosive is assigned a compatibility group letter by the 
Associate Administrator based on the criteria prescribed in 
Sec. 173.52(b) of this subchapter.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52617 Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66267, 
Dec. 20, 1991; 63 FR 52849, Oct. 1, 1998; 66 FR 45379, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.59  Description of terms for explosives.

    For the purpose of this subchapter, a description of the following 
terms is provided for information only. They must not be used for 
purposes of classification or to replace proper shipping names 
prescribed in Sec. 172.101 of this subchapter.
    Ammonium-nitrate--fuel oil mixture (ANFO). A blasting explosive 
containing no essential ingredients other than prilled ammonium nitrate 
and fuel oil.
    Ammunition. Generic term related mainly to articles of military 
application consisting of all types of bombs, grenades, rockets, mines, 
projectiles and other similar devices or contrivances.
    Ammunition, illuminating, with or without burster, expelling charge 
or propelling charge. Ammunition designed to produce a single source of 
intense light for lighting up an area. The term includes illuminating 
cartridges, grenades and projectiles, and illuminating and target 
identification bombs. The

[[Page 451]]

term excludes the following articles which are listed separately: 
cartridges, signal; signal devices; hand signals; distress flares, 
aerial and flares, surface.
    Ammunition, incendiary. Ammunition containing an incendiary 
substance which may be a solid, liquid or gel including white 
phosphorus. Except when the composition is an explosive per se, it also 
contains one or more of the following: a propelling charge with primer 
and igniter charge, or a fuze with burster or expelling charge. The term 
includes: Ammunition, incendiary, liquid or gel, with burster, expelling 
charge or propelling charge; Ammunition, incendiary with or without 
burster, expelling charge or propelling charge; and Ammunition, 
incendiary, white phosphorus, with burster, expelling charge or 
propelling charge.
    Ammunition, practice. Ammunition without a main bursting charge, 
containing a burster or expelling charge. Normally it also contains a 
fuze and propelling charge. The term excludes the following article 
which is listed separately: Grenades, practice.
    Ammunition, proof. Ammunition containing pyrotechnic substance, used 
to test the performance or strength of new ammunition, weapon component 
or assemblies.
    Ammunition, smoke. Ammunition containing a smoke-producing substance 
such as chlorosulphonic acid mixture (CSAM), titanium tetrachloride 
(FM), white phosphorus, or smoke-producing substance whose composition 
is based on hexachlorothannol (HC) or red phosphorus. Except when the 
substance is an explosive per se, the ammunition also contains one or 
more of the following: a propelling charge with primer and igniter 
charge, or a fuze with burster or expelling charge. The term includes: 
Ammunition, smoke, with or without burster, expelling charge or 
propelling charge; Ammunition, smoke, white phosphorus with burster, 
expelling charge or propelling charge.
    Ammunition, tear-producing with burster, expelling charge or 
propelling charge. Ammunition containing tear-producing substance. It 
may also contain one or more of the following: a pyrotechnic substance, 
a propelling charge with primer and igniter charge, or a fuze with 
burster or expelling charge.
    Ammunition, toxic. Ammunition containing toxic agent. It may also 
contain one or more of the following: a pyrotechnic substance, a 
propelling charge with primer and igniter charge, or a fuze with burster 
or expelling charge.
    Articles, explosive, extremely insensitive (Articles, EEI). Articles 
that contain only extremely insensitive detonating substances and which 
demonstrate a negligible probability of accidental initiation or 
propagation under normal conditions of transport and which have passed 
Test Series 7.
    Articles, pyrophoric. Articles which contain a pyrophoric substance 
(capable of spontaneous ignition when exposed to air) and an explosive 
substance or component. The term excludes articles containing white 
phosphorus.
    Articles, pyrotechnic for technical purposes. Articles which contain 
pyrotechnic substances and are used for technical purposes, such as heat 
generation, gas generation, theatrical effects, etc. The term excludes 
the following articles which are listed separately: all ammunition; 
cartridges, signal; cutters, cable, explosive; fireworks; flares, 
aerial; flares, surface; release devices, explosives; rivets, explosive; 
signal devices, hand; signals, distress; signals, railway track, 
explosive; and signals, smoke.
    Black powder (gunpowder). Substance consisting of an intimate 
mixture of charcoal or other carbon and either potassium or sodium 
nitrate, and sulphur. It may be meal, granular, compressed, or 
pelletized.
    Bombs. Explosive articles which are dropped from aircraft. They may 
contain a flammable liquid with bursting charge, a photo-flash 
composition or bursting charge. The term excludes torpedoes (aerial) and 
includes bombs, photo-flash; bombs with bursting charge; bombs with 
flammable liquids, with bursting charge.
    Boosters. Articles consisting of a charge of detonating explosive 
without means of initiation. They are used to increase the initiating 
power of detonators or detonating cord.
    Bursters, explosive. Articles consisting of a small charge of 
explosive to open

[[Page 452]]

projectiles or other ammunition in order to disperse their contents.
    Cartridges, blank. Articles which consist of a cartridge case with a 
center or rim fire primer and a confined charge of smokeless or black 
powder, but no projectile. Used in training, saluting, or in starter 
pistols, etc.
    Cartridges, flash. Articles consisting of a casing, a primer and 
flash powder, all assembled in one piece for firing.
    Cartridges for weapons. (1) Fixed (assembled) or semi-fixed 
(partially assembled) ammunition designed to be fired from weapons. Each 
cartridge includes all the components necessary to function the weapon 
once. The name and description should be used for military small arms 
cartridges that cannot be described as cartridges, small arms. Separate 
loading ammunition is included under this name and description when the 
propelling charge and projectile are packed together (see also 
Cartridges, blank).
    (2) Incendiary, smoke, toxic, and tear-producing cartridges are 
described under ammunition, incendiary, etc.
    Cartridges for weapons, inert projectile. Ammunition consisting of a 
casing with propelling charge and a solid or empty projectile.
    Cartridges, oil well. Articles consisting of a casing of thin fiber, 
metal or other material containing only propellant explosive. The term 
excludes charges, shaped, commercial.
    Cartridges, power device. Articles designed to accomplish mechanical 
actions. They consist of a casing with a charge of deflagrating 
explosive and a means of ignition. The gaseous products of the 
deflagration produce inflation, linear or rotary motion; activate 
diaphragms, valves or switches, or project fastening devices or 
extinguishing agents.
    Cartridges, signal. Articles designed to fire colored flares or 
other signals from signal pistols or devices.
    Cartridges, small arms. Ammunition consisting of a cartridge case 
fitted with a center or rim fire primer and containing both a propelling 
charge and solid projectile(s). They are designed to be fired in weapons 
of caliber not larger than 19.1 mm. Shotgun cartridges of any caliber 
are included in this description. The term excludes: Cartridges, small 
arms, blank, and some military small arms cartridges listed under 
Cartridges for weapons, inert projectile.
    Cases, cartridge, empty with primer. Articles consisting of a 
cartridge case made from metal, plastics or other non-flammable 
materials, in which only the explosive component is the primer.
    Cases, combustible, empty, without primer. Articles consisting of 
cartridge cases made partly or entirely from nitrocellulose.
    Charges, bursting. Articles consisting of a charge of detonating 
explosive such as hexolite, octolite, or plastics-bonded explosive 
designed to produce effect by blast or fragmentation.
    Charges, demolition. Articles consisting of a charge of detonating 
explosive in a casing of fiberboard, plastics, metal or other material. 
The term excludes articles identified as bombs, mines, etc.
    Charges, depth. Articles consisting of a charge of detonating 
explosive contained in a drum or projectile. They are designed to 
detonate under water.
    Charges, expelling. A charge of deflagrating explosive designed to 
eject the payload from the parent article without damage.
    Charges, explosive, without detonator. Articles consisting of a 
charge of detonating explosive without means of initiation, used for 
explosive welding, joining, forming, and other processes.
    Charges, propelling. Articles consisting of propellant charge in any 
physical form, with or without a casing, for use in cannon or for 
reducing drag for projectiles or as a component of rocket motors.
    Charges, propelling for cannon. Articles consisting of a propellant 
charge in any physical form, with or without a casing, for use in a 
cannon.
    Charges, shaped, without detonator. Articles consisting of a casing 
containing a charge of detonating explosive with a cavity lined with 
rigid material, without means of initiation. They are designed to 
produce a powerful, penetrating jet effect.
    Charges, shaped, flexible, linear. Articles consisting of a V-shaped 
core of a detonating explosive clad by a flexible metal sheath.

[[Page 453]]

    Charges, supplementary, explosive. Articles consisting of a small 
removable booster used in the cavity of a projectile between the fuze 
and the bursting charge.
    Components, explosive train, n.o.s. Articles containing an explosive 
designed to transmit a detonation or deflagration within an explosive 
train.
    Contrivance, water-activated with burster, expelling charge or 
propelling charge. Articles whose functioning depends of physico-
chemical reaction of their contents with water.
    Cord, detonating, flexible. Articles consisting of a core of 
detonating explosive enclosed in spun fabric with plastics or other 
covering.
    Cord (fuse) detonating, metal clad. Articles consisting of a core of 
detonating explosive clad by a soft metal tube with or without 
protective covering. When the core contains a sufficiently small 
quantity of explosive, the words ``mild effect'' are added.
    Cord igniter. Articles consisting of textile yarns covered with 
black powder or another fast-burning pyrotechnic composition and a 
flexible protective covering, or consisting of a core of black powder 
surrounded by a flexible woven fabric. It burns progressively along its 
length with an external flame and is used to transmit ignition from a 
device to a charge or primer.
    Cutters, cable, explosive. Articles consisting of a knife-edged 
device which is driven by a small charge of deflagrating explosive into 
an anvil.
    Detonator assemblies, non-electric, for blasting. Non-electric 
detonators assembled with and activated by such means as safety fuse, 
shock tube, flash tube, or detonating cord. They may be of instantaneous 
design or incorporate delay elements. Detonating relays incorporating 
detonating cord are included. Other detonating relays are included in 
Detonators, nonelectric.
    Detonators. Articles consisting of a small metal or plastic tube 
containing explosives such as lead azide, PETN, or combinations of 
explosives. They are designed to start a detonation train. They may be 
constructed to detonate instantaneously, or may contain a delay element. 
They may contain no more than 10 g of total explosives weight, excluding 
ignition and delay charges, per unit. The term includes: detonators for 
ammunition; detonators for blasting, both electric and non-electric; and 
detonating relays without flexible detonating cord.
    Dynamite. A detonating explosive containing a liquid explosive 
ingredient (generally nitroglycerin, similar organic nitrate esters, or 
both) that is uniformly mixed with an absorbent material, such as wood 
pulp, and usually contains materials such as nitrocellulose, sodium and 
ammonium nitrate.
    Entire load and total contents. The phrase means such a substantial 
portion of the material explodes that the practical hazard should be 
assessed by assuming simultaneous explosion of the whole of the 
explosive content of the load or package.
    Explode. The term indicates those explosive effects capable of 
endangering life and property through blast, heat, and projection of 
missiles. It encompasses both deflagration and detonation.
    Explosion of the total contents. The phrase is used in testing a 
single article or package or a small stack of articles or packages.
    Explosive, blasting. Detonating explosive substances used in mining, 
construction, and similar tasks. Blasting explosives are assigned to one 
of five types. In addition to the ingredients listed below for each 
type, blasting explosives may also contain inert components, such as 
kieselguhr, and other minor ingredients, such as coloring agents and 
stabilizers.
    Explosive, blasting, type A. Substances consisting of liquid organic 
nitrates, such as nitroglycerin, or a mixture of such ingredients with 
one or more of the following: nitrocellulose, ammonium nitrate or other 
inorganic nitrates, aromatic nitro-derivatives, or combustible 
materials, such as wood-meal and aluminum powder. Such explosives must 
be in powdery, gelatinous, plastic or elastic form. The term includes 
dynamite, blasting gelatine and gelatine dynamites.
    Explosive, blasting, type B. Substances consisting of a mixture of 
ammonium nitrate or other inorganic nitrates

[[Page 454]]

with an explosive, such as trinitrotoluene, with or without other 
substances, such as wood-meal or aluminum powder, or a mixture of 
ammonium nitrate or other inorganic nitrates with other combustible 
substances which are not explosive ingredients. Such explosives may not 
contain nitroglycerin, similar liquid organic nitrates, or chlorates.
    Explosive, blasting, type C. Substances consisting of a mixture of 
either potassium or sodium chlorate or potassium, sodium or ammonium 
perchlorate with organic nitro-derivatives or combustible materials, 
such as wood-meal or aluminum powder, or a hydrocarbon. Such explosives 
must not contain nitroglycerin or any similar liquid organic nitrate.
    Explosive, blasting, type D. Substances consisting of a mixture of 
organic nitrate compounds and combustible materials, such as 
hydrocarbons and aluminum powder. Such explosives must not contain 
nitroglycerin, any similar liquid organic nitrate, chlorate or ammonium-
nitrate. The term generally includes plastic explosives.
    Explosive, blasting, type E. Substances consisting of water as an 
essential ingredient and high proportions of ammonium nitrate or other 
oxidizer, some or all of which are in solution. The other constituents 
may include nitro-derivatives, such as trinitrotoluene, hydrocarbons or 
aluminum powder. The term includes: explosives, emulsion; explosives, 
slurry; and explosives, watergel.
    Explosive, deflagrating. A substance, e.g., propellant, which reacts 
by deflagration rather than detonation when ignited and used in its 
normal manner.
    Explosive, detonating. A substance which reacts by detonation rather 
than deflagration when initiated and used in its normal manner.
    Explosive, extremely insensitive detonating substance (EIDS). A 
substance which, although capable of sustaining a detonation, has 
demonstrated through tests that it is so insensitive that there is very 
little probability of accidental initiation.
    Explosive, primary. Explosive substance which is manufactured with a 
view to producing a practical effect by explosion, is very sensitive to 
heat, impact, or friction, and even in very small quantities, detonates. 
The major primary explosives are mercury fulminate, lead azide, and lead 
styphnate.
    Explosive, secondary. An explosive substance which is relatively 
insensitive (when compared to primary explosives) and is usually 
initiated by primary explosives with or without the aid of boosters or 
supplementary charges. Such an explosive may react as a deflagrating or 
as a detonating explosive.
    Fireworks. Pyrotechnic articles designed for entertainment.
    Flares. Articles containing pyrotechnic substances which are 
designed to illuminate, identify, signal, or warn. The term includes: 
flares, aerial and flares, surface.
    Flash powder. Pyrotechnic substance which, when ignited, produces an 
intense light.
    Fracturing devices, explosive, for oil wells, without detonators. 
Articles consisting of a charge of detonating explosive contained in a 
casing without the means of initiation. They are used to fracture the 
rock around a drill shaft to assist the flow of crude oil from the rock.
    Fuse/Fuze. Although these two words have a common origin (French 
fusee, fusil) and are sometimes considered to be different spellings, it 
is useful to maintain the convention that fuse refers to a cord-like 
igniting device, whereas fuze refers to a device used in ammunition 
which incorporates mechanical, electrical, chemical, or hydrostatic 
components to initiate a train by deflagration or detonation.
    Fuse, igniter. Articles consisting of a metal tube with a core of 
deflagrating explosives.
    Fuse, instantaneous, non-detonating (Quickmatch). Article consisting 
of cotton yarns impregnated with fine black powder. It burns with an 
external flame and is used in ignition trains for fireworks, etc.
    Fuse, safety. Article consisting of a core of fine-grained black 
powder surrounded by a flexible woven fabric with one or more protective 
outer coverings. When ignited, it burns at a predetermined rate without 
any explosive effect.

[[Page 455]]

    Fuzes. Articles designed to start a detonation or deflagration in 
ammunition. They incorporate mechanical, electrical, chemical, or 
hydrostatic components and generally protective features. The term 
includes: Fuzes, detonating; fuzes detonating with protective features; 
and fuzes igniting.
    Grenades, hand or rifle. Articles which are designed to be thrown by 
hand or to be projected by rifle. The term includes: grenades, hand or 
rifle, with bursting charge; and grenades, practice, hand or rifle. The 
term excludes: grenades, smoke.
    Igniters. Articles containing one or more explosive substance used 
to start deflagration of an explosive train. They may be actuated 
chemically, electrically, or mechanically. The term excludes: cord, 
igniter; fuse, igniter; fuse, instantaneous, non-detonating; fuze, 
igniting; lighters, fuse, instantaneous, non-detonating; fuzes, 
igniting; lighters, fuse; primers, cap type; and primers, tubular.
    Ignition, means of. A general term used in connection with the 
method employed to ignite a deflagrating train of explosive or 
pyrotechnic substances (for example: a primer for propelling charge, an 
igniter for a rocket motor or an igniting fuze).
    Initiation, means of. (1) A device intended to cause the detonation 
of an explosive (for example: detonator, detonator for ammunition, or 
detonating fuze).
    (2) The term with its own means of initiation means that the 
contrivance has its normal initiating device assembled to it and this 
device is considered to present a significant risk during transport but 
not one great enough to be unacceptable. The term does not apply, 
however, to a contrivance packed together with its means of initiation, 
provided the device is packaged so as to eliminate the risk of causing 
detonation of the contrivance in the event of functioning of the 
initiating device. The initiating device can even be assembled in the 
contrivance provided there are protective features ensuring that the 
device is very unlikely to cause detonation of the contrivance under 
conditions which are associated with transport.
    (3) For the purposes of classification, any means of initiation 
without two effective protective features should be regarded as 
Compatibility Group B; an article with its own means of initiation, 
without two effective protective features, is Compatibility Group F. A 
means of initiation which itself possesses two effective protective 
features is Compatibility Group D, and an article with its own means of 
initiation which possesses two effective features is Compatibility Group 
D or E. A means of initiation, adjudged as having two effective 
protective features, must be approved by the Associate Administrator. A 
common and effective way of achieving the necessary degree of protection 
is to use a means of initiation which incorporates two or more 
independent safety features.
    Jet perforating guns, charged, oil well, without detonator. Articles 
consisting of a steel tube or metallic strip, into which are inserted 
shaped charges connected by detonating cord, without means of 
initiation.
    Lighters, fuse. Articles of various design actuated by friction, 
percussion, or electricity and used to ignite safety fuse.
    Mass explosion. Explosion which affects almost the entire load 
virtually instantaneously.
    Mines. Articles consisting normally of metal or composition 
receptacles and bursting charge. They are designed to be operated by the 
passage of ships, vehicles, or personnel. The term includes Bangalore 
torpedoes.
    Powder cake (powder paste). Substance consisting of nitrocellulose 
impregnated with not more than 60 percent of nitroglycerin or other 
liquid organic nitrates or a mixture of these.
    Powder, smokeless. Substance based on nitrocellulose used as 
propellant. The term includes propellants with a single base 
(nitrocellulose (NC) alone), those with a double base (such as NC and 
nitroglycerin (NG)) and those with a triple base (such as NC/NG/
nitroguanidine). Cast pressed or bag-charges of smokeless powder are 
listed under charges, propelling and charges, propelling for cannon.
    Primers, cap type. Articles consisting of a metal or plastic cap 
containing a small amount of primary explosive

[[Page 456]]

mixture that is readily ignited by impact. They serve as igniting 
elements in small arms cartridges and in percussion primers for 
propelling charges.
    Primers, tubular. Articles consisting of a primer for ignition and 
an auxiliary charge of deflagrating explosive, such as black powder, 
used to ignite the propelling charge in a cartridge case for cannon, 
etc.
    Projectiles. Articles, such as a shell or bullet, which are 
projected from a cannon or other artillery gun, rifle, or other small 
arm. They may be inert, with or without tracer, or may contain a 
burster, expelling charge or bursting charge. The term includes: 
projectiles, inert, with tracer; projectiles, with burster or expelling 
charge; and projectiles, with bursting charge.
    Propellant, liquid. Substances consisting of a deflagrating liquid 
explosive, used for propulsion.
    Propellant, solid. Substances consisting of a deflagrating solid 
explosive, used for propulsion.
    Propellants. Deflagrating explosives used for propulsion or for 
reducing the drag of projectiles.
    Release devices, explosive. Articles consisting of a small charge of 
explosive with means of initiation. They sever rods or links to release 
equipment quickly.
    Rocket motors. Articles consisting of a solid, liquid, or hypergolic 
propellant contained in a cylinder fitted with one or more nozzles. They 
are designed to propel a rocket or guided missile. The term includes: 
rocket motors; rocket motors with hypergolic liquids with or without an 
expelling charge; and rocket motors, liquid fuelled.
    Rockets. Articles containing a rocket motor and a payload which may 
be an explosive warhead or other device. The term includes: guided 
missiles; rockets, line-throwing; rockets, liquid fuelled, with bursting 
charge; rockets, with bursting charge; rockets, with expelling charge; 
and rockets, with inert head.
    Signals. Articles consisting of pyrotechnic substances designed to 
produce signals by means of sound, flame, or smoke or any combination 
thereof. The term includes: signal devices, hand; signals, distress 
ship; signals, railway track, explosive; signals, smoke.
    Sounding devices, explosive. Articles consisting of a charge of 
detonating explosive. They are dropped from ships and function when they 
reach a predetermined depth or the sea bed.
    Substance, explosive, very insensitive (Substance, EVI) N.O.S. 
Substances which present a mass explosive hazard but which are so 
insensitive that there is very little probability of initiation, or of 
transition from burning to detonation under normal conditions of 
transport and which have passed test series 5.
    Torpedoes. Articles containing an explosive or non-explosive 
propulsion system and designed to be propelled through water. They may 
contain an inert head or warhead. The term includes: torpedoes, liquid 
fuelled, with inert head; torpedoes, liquid fuelled, with or without 
bursting charge; and torpedoes, with bursting charge.
    Tracers for ammunition. Sealed articles containing pyrotechnic 
substances, designed to reveal the trajectory of a projectile.
    Warheads. Articles containing detonating explosives, designed to be 
fitted to a rocket, guided missile, or torpedo. They may contain a 
burster or expelling charge or bursting charge. The term includes: 
warhead rocket with bursting charge; and warheads, torpedo, with 
bursting charge.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52617 Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66267, 
Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-241, 59 FR 67492, Dec. 29, 1994; 64 FR 10777, 
Mar. 5, 1999; 66 FR 45379, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.60  General packaging requirements for explosives.

    (a) Unless otherwise provided in this subpart and in Sec. 173.7(a), 
packaging used for Class 1 (explosives) materials must meet Packing 
Group II requirements. Each packaging used for an explosive must be 
capable of meeting the test requirements of subpart M of part 178 of 
this subchapter, at the specified level of performance, and the 
applicable general packaging requirements of paragraph (b) of this 
section.
    (b) The general requirements for packaging of explosives are as 
follows:
    (1) Nails, staples, and other closure devices, made of metal, having 
no protective covering may not penetrate to

[[Page 457]]

the inside of the outer packaging unless the inner packaging adequately 
protects the explosive against contact with the metal.
    (2) The closure device of containers for liquid explosives must 
provide double protection against leakage, such as a screw cap secured 
in place with tape.
    (3) Inner packagings, fittings, and cushioning materials, and the 
placing of explosive substances or articles in packages, must be such 
that the explosive substance is prevented from becoming loose in the 
outer packaging during transportation. Metallic components of articles 
must be prevented from making contact with metal packagings. Articles 
containing explosive substances not enclosed in an outer casing must be 
separated from each other in order to prevent friction and impact. 
Padding, trays, partitioning in the inner or outer packaging, molded 
plastics or receptacles may be used for this purpose.
    (4) When the packaging includes water that could freeze during 
transportation, a sufficient amount of anti-freeze, such as denatured 
ethyl alcohol, must be added to the water to prevent freezing. If the 
anti-freeze creates a fire hazard, it may not be used. When a percentage 
of water in the substance is specified, the combined weight of water and 
anti-freeze may be substituted.
    (5) If an article is fitted with its own means of ignition or 
initiation, it must be effectively protected from accidental actuation 
during normal conditions of transportation.
    (6) The entry of explosive substances into the recesses of double-
seamed metal packagings must be prevented.
    (7) The closure device of a metal drum must include a suitable 
gasket; if the closure device includes metal-to-metal screw-threads, the 
ingress of explosive substances into the threading must be prevented.
    (8) Whenever loose explosive substances or the explosive substance 
of an uncased or partly cased article may come into contact with the 
inner surface of metal packagings (1A2, 1B2, 4A, 4B and metal 
receptacles), the metal packaging should be provided with an inner liner 
or coating.
    (9) Packagings must be made of materials compatible with, and 
impermeable to, the explosives contained in the package, so that neither 
interaction between the explosives and the packaging materials, nor 
leakage, causes the explosive to become unsafe in transportation, or the 
hazard division or compatibility group to change (see 
Sec. 173.24(e)(2)).
    (10) An explosive article containing an electrical means of 
initiation that is sensitive to external electromagnetic radiation, must 
have its means of initiation effectively protected from electromagnetic 
radiation sources (for example, radar or radio transmitters) through 
either design of the packaging or of the article, or both.
    (11) Plastic packagings may not be able to generate or accumulate 
sufficient static electricity to cause the packaged explosive substances 
or articles to initiate, ignite or inadvertently function. Metal 
packagings must be compatible with the explosive substance they contain.
    (12) Explosive substances may not be packed in inner or outer 
packagings where the differences in internal and external pressures, due 
to thermal or other effects, could cause an explosion or rupture of the 
package.
    (13) Packagings for water soluble substances must be water 
resistant. Packagings for desensitized or phlegmatized substances must 
be closed to prevent changes in concentration during transport. When 
containing less alcohol, water, or phlegmatizer than specified in its 
proper shipping description, the substance is a ``forbidden'' material.
    (14) Large and robust explosives articles, normally intended for 
military use, without their means of initiation or with their means of 
initiation containing at least two effective protective features, may be 
carried unpackaged provided that a negative result was obtained in Test 
Series 4 of the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria on an unpackaged 
article. When such articles have propelling charges or are self-
propelled, their ignition systems shall be protected against stimuli 
encountered during normal conditions of transport. Such unpackaged 
articles may be fixed to cradles or contained in crates or other 
suitable handling, storage or launching devices in such a way

[[Page 458]]

that they will not become loose during normal conditions of transport 
and are in accordance with DOD-approved procedures.

[Amdt. 173-260, 62 FR 24719, May 6, 1997, as amended at 65 FR 50461, 
Aug. 18, 2000]



Sec. 173.61  Mixed packaging requirements.

    (a) An explosive may not be packed in the same outside packaging 
with any other material that could, under normal conditions of 
transportation, adversely affect the explosive or its packaging unless 
packaged by DOD or DOE in accordance with Sec. 173.7(a).
    (b) Hardware necessary for assembly of explosive articles at the 
point-of-use may be packed in the same outside packaging with the 
explosive articles. The hardware must be securely packed in a separate 
inside packaging. Sufficient cushioning materials must be used to ensure 
that all inside packagings are securely packed in the outside packaging.
    (c) The following explosives may not be packed together with other 
Class 1 explosives: UN 0029, UN 0030, UN 0073, UN 0106, UN 0107, UN 
0255, UN 0257, UN 0267, UN 0360, UN 0361, UN 0364, UN 0365, UN 0366, UN 
0367, UN 0408, UN 0409, UN 0410, UN 0455, UN 0456, and NA 0350. These 
explosives may be mix-packed with each other in accordance with the 
compatibility requirements prescribed in paragraph (e).
    (d) Division 1.1 and 1.2 explosives may not be packed with the 
following explosives: UN 0333, UN 0334, UN 0335, UN 0336, and UN 0337.
    (e) Except as prescribed in paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section, 
different explosives may be packed in one outside packaging in 
accordance with the following compatibility requirements:
    (1) Explosives of the same compatibility group and same division 
number may be packed together.
    (2) Explosives of the same compatibility group or authorized 
combination of compatibility group but different division number may be 
packed together, provided that the whole package is treated as though 
its entire contents were comprised of the lower division number. For 
example, a mixed package of Division 1.2 explosives and Division 1.4 
explosives, compatibility group D, must be treated as 1.2D explosives. 
However, when 1.5D explosives are packed together with 1.2D explosives, 
the whole package must be treated as 1.1D explosives.
    (3) Explosives of compatibility group S may be packaged together 
with explosives of any other compatibility group except A or L, and the 
combined package may be treated as belonging to any of the packaged 
compatibility groups except S.
    (4) Explosives of compatibility group L shall only be packed with an 
identical explosive.
    (5) Explosives articles of compatibility groups C, D, or E may be 
packed together and the entire package shall be treated as belonging to 
compatibility group E.
    (6) Explosives articles of compatibility groups C, D, E, or N may be 
packed together and the entire package shall be treated as belonging to 
compatibility group D.
    (7) Explosives substances of compatibility groups C and D may be 
packaged together and the entire package shall be treated as belonging 
to compatibility group D.
    (8) Explosive articles of compatibility group G, except for 
fireworks and articles requiring special packaging, may be packaged 
together with explosive articles of compatibility groups C, D or E and 
the combined package shall be treated as belonging to compatibility 
group E.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52617 Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66267, 
Dec. 20, 1991; 65 FR 50461, Aug. 18, 2000; 66 FR 33429, June 21, 2001; 
66 FR 45381, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.62  Specific packaging requirements for explosives.

    (a) Except as provided in Sec. 173.7 of this subchapter, when the 
Sec. 172.101 Table specifies that an explosive must be packaged in 
accordance with this section, only packagings which conform to the 
provisions of paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section or Sec. 173.7(e) of 
this subchapter and the applicable requirements in Secs. 173.60 and 
173.61 may be used unless otherwise approved by the Associate 
Administrator.

[[Page 459]]

    (b) Explosives Table. The Explosives Table specifies the Packing 
Instructions assigned to each explosive. Explosives are identified in 
the first column in numerical sequence by their identification number 
(ID ), which is listed in column 4 of the Sec. 172.101 table, 
of this subchapter. The second column of the Explosives Table specifies 
the Packing Instruction (PI) which must be used for packaging the 
explosive. The Explosives Packing Method Table in paragraph (c) of this 
section defines the methods of packaging. The Packing Instructions are 
identified using a 3 digit designation. The Packing Instruction prefixed 
by the letters ``US'' is particular to the United States and not found 
in applicable international regulations.

                            Explosives Table
------------------------------------------------------------------------
             ID                              PI
------------------------------------------------------------------------
UN0004..............................  112
UN0005..............................  130
UN0006..............................  130
UN0007..............................  130
UN0009..............................  130
UN0010..............................  130
UN0012..............................  130
UN0014..............................  130
UN0015..............................  130
UN0016..............................  130
UN0018..............................  130
UN0019..............................  130
UN0020..............................  101
UN0021..............................  101
UN0027..............................  113
UN0028..............................  113
UN0029..............................  131
UN0030..............................  131
UN0033..............................  130
UN0034..............................  130
UN0035..............................  130
UN0037..............................  130
UN0038..............................  130
UN0039..............................  130
UN0042..............................  132
UN0043..............................  133
UN0044..............................  133
UN0048..............................  130
UN0049..............................  135
UN0050..............................  135
UN0054..............................  135
UN0055..............................  136
UN0056..............................  130
UN0059..............................  137
UN0060..............................  132
UN0065..............................  139
UN0066..............................  140
UN0070..............................  134
UN0072..............................  112(a)
UN0073..............................  133
UN0074..............................  110(a) or 110(b)
UN0075..............................  115
UN0076..............................  112
UN0077..............................  114(a) or 114(b)
UN0078..............................  112
UN0079..............................  112(b) or 112(c)
UN0081..............................  116
UN0082..............................  116 or 117
UN0083..............................  116
UN0084..............................  116
UN0092..............................  135
UN0093..............................  135
UN0094..............................  113
UN0099..............................  134
UN0101..............................  140
UN0102..............................  139
UN0103..............................  140
UN0104..............................  139
UN0105..............................  140
UN0106..............................  141
UN0107..............................  141
UN0110..............................  141
UN0113..............................  110(a) or 110(b)
UN0114..............................  110(a) or 110(b)
UN0118..............................  112
UN0121..............................  142
UN0124..............................  US1
UN0129..............................  110(a) or 110(b)
UN0130..............................  110(a) or 110(b)
UN0131..............................  142
UN0132..............................  114(b)
UN0133..............................  112(a)
UN0135..............................  110(a) or 110(b)
UN0136..............................  130
UN0137..............................  130
UN0138..............................  130
UN0143..............................  115
UN0144..............................  115
UN0146..............................  112
UN0147..............................  112(b)
UN0150..............................  112(a) or 112(b)
UN0151..............................  112
UN0153..............................  112(b) or 112(c)
UN0154..............................  112
UN0155..............................  112(b) or 112(c)
UN0159..............................  111
UN0160..............................  114(b)
UN0161..............................  114(b)
UN0167..............................  130
UN0168..............................  130
UN0169..............................  130
UN0171..............................  130
UN0173..............................  134
UN0174..............................  134
UN0180..............................  130
UN0181..............................  130
UN0182..............................  130
UN0183..............................  130
UN0186..............................  130
UN0190..............................  101
UN0191..............................  135
UN0192..............................  135
UN0193..............................  135
UN0194..............................  135
UN0195..............................  135
UN0196..............................  135
UN0197..............................  135
UN0204..............................  134
UN0207..............................  112(b) or 112(c)
UN0208..............................  112(b) or 112(c)
UN0209..............................  112
UN0212..............................  133
UN0213..............................  112(b) or 112(c)
UN0214..............................  112
UN0215..............................  112
UN0216..............................  112(b) or 112(c)
UN0217..............................  112(b) or 112(c)

[[Page 460]]

 
UN0218..............................  112(b) or 112(c)
UN0219..............................  112
UN0220..............................  112
UN0221..............................  130
UN0222..............................  112(b) or 112(c)
UN0224..............................  110(a) or 110(b)
UN0225..............................  133
UN0226..............................  112(a)
UN0234..............................  114(a) or 114(b)
UN0235..............................  114(a) or 114(b)
UN0236..............................  114(a) or 114(b)
UN0237..............................  138
UN0238..............................  130
UN0240..............................  130
UN0241..............................  116 or 117
UN0242..............................  130
UN0243..............................  130
UN0244..............................  130
UN0245..............................  130
UN0246..............................  130
UN0247..............................  101
UN0248..............................  144
UN0249..............................  144
UN0250..............................  101
UN0254..............................  130
UN0255..............................  131
UN0257..............................  141
UN0266..............................  112
UN0267..............................  131
UN0268..............................  133
UN0271..............................  143
UN0272..............................  143
UN0275..............................  134
UN0276..............................  134
UN0277..............................  134
UN0278..............................  134
UN0279..............................  130
UN0280..............................  130
UN0281..............................  130
UN0282..............................  112
UN0283..............................  132
UN0284..............................  141
UN0285..............................  141
UN0286..............................  130
UN0287..............................  130
UN0288..............................  138
UN0289..............................  139
UN0290..............................  139
UN0291..............................  130
UN0292..............................  141
UN0293..............................  141
UN0294..............................  130
UN0295..............................  130
UN0296..............................  134
UN0297..............................  130
UN0299..............................  130
UN0300..............................  130
UN0301..............................  130
UN0303..............................  130
UN0305..............................  113
UN0306..............................  133
UN0312..............................  135
UN0313..............................  135
UN0314..............................  142
UN0315..............................  142
UN0316..............................  141
UN0317..............................  141
UN0318..............................  141
UN0319..............................  133
UN0320..............................  133
UN0321..............................  130
UN0322..............................  101
UN0323..............................  134
UN0324..............................  130
UN0325..............................  142
UN0326..............................  130
UN0327..............................  130
UN0328..............................  130
UN0329..............................  130
UN0330..............................  130
UN0331..............................  116 or 117
UN0332..............................  116 or 117
UN0333..............................  135
UN0334..............................  135
UN0335..............................  135
UN0336..............................  135
UN0337..............................  135
UN0338..............................  130
UN0339..............................  130
UN0340..............................  112(a) or 112(b)
UN0341..............................  112(b)
UN0342..............................  114(a)
UN0343..............................  111
UN0344..............................  130
UN0345..............................  130
UN0346..............................  130
UN0347..............................  130
UN0348..............................  130
UN0349..............................  101
UN0350..............................  101
UN0351..............................  101
UN0352..............................  101
UN0353..............................  101
UN0354..............................  101
UN0355..............................  101
UN0356..............................  101
UN0357..............................  101
UN0358..............................  101
UN0359..............................  101
UN0360..............................  131
UN0361..............................  131
UN0362..............................  130
UN0363..............................  130
UN0364..............................  133
UN0365..............................  133
UN0366..............................  133
UN0367..............................  141
UN0368..............................  141
UN0369..............................  130
UN0370..............................  130
UN0371..............................  130
UN0372..............................  141
UN0373..............................  135
UN0374..............................  134
UN0375..............................  134
UN0376..............................  133
UN0377..............................  133
UN0378..............................  133
UN0379..............................  136
UN0380..............................  101
UN0381..............................  134
UN0382..............................  101
UN0383..............................  101
UN0384..............................  101
UN0385..............................  112(b) or 112(c)
UN0386..............................  112(b) or 112(c)
UN0387..............................  112(b) or 112(c)
UN0388..............................  112(b) or 112(c)
UN0389..............................  112(b) or 112(c)
UN0390..............................  112(b) or 112(c)
UN0391..............................  112(a)
UN0392..............................  112(b) or 112(c)
UN0393..............................  112(b)
UN0394..............................  112(a)

[[Page 461]]

 
UN0395..............................  101
UN0396..............................  101
UN0397..............................  101
UN0398..............................  101
UN0399..............................  101
UN0400..............................  101
UN0401..............................  112
UN0402..............................  112(b) or 112(c)
UN0403..............................  135
UN0404..............................  135
UN0405..............................  135
UN0406..............................  114(b)
UN0407..............................  114(b)
UN0408..............................  141
UN0409..............................  141
UN0410..............................  141
UN0411..............................  112(b) or 112(c)
UN0412..............................  130
UN0413..............................  130
UN0414..............................  130
UN0415..............................  143
UN0417..............................  130
UN0418..............................  135
UN0419..............................  135
UN0420..............................  135
UN0421..............................  135
UN0424..............................  130
UN0425..............................  130
UN0426..............................  130
UN0427..............................  130
UN0428..............................  135
UN0429..............................  135
UN0430..............................  135
UN0431..............................  135
UN0432..............................  135
UN0433..............................  111
UN0434..............................  130
UN0435..............................  130
UN0436..............................  130
UN0437..............................  130
UN0438..............................  130
UN0439..............................  137
UN0440..............................  137
UN0441..............................  137
UN0442..............................  137
UN0443..............................  137
UN0444..............................  137
UN0445..............................  137
UN0446..............................  136
UN0447..............................  136
UN0448..............................  114(b)
UN0449..............................  101
UN0450..............................  101
UN0451..............................  130
UN0452..............................  141
UN0453..............................  130
UN0454..............................  142
UN0455..............................  131
UN0456..............................  131
UN0457..............................  130
UN0458..............................  130
UN0459..............................  130
UN0460..............................  130
UN0461..............................  101
UN0462..............................  101
UN0463..............................  101
UN0464..............................  101
UN0465..............................  101
UN0466..............................  101
UN0467..............................  101
UN0468..............................  101
UN0469..............................  101
UN0470..............................  101
UN0471..............................  101
UN0472..............................  101
UN0473..............................  101
UN0474..............................  101
UN0475..............................  101
UN0476..............................  101
UN0477..............................  101
UN0478..............................  101
UN0479..............................  101
UN0480..............................  101
UN0481..............................  101
UN0482..............................  101
UN0483..............................  112(b) or 112(c)
UN0484..............................  112(b) or 112(c)
UN0486..............................  101
UN0487..............................  135
UN0488..............................  130
UN0489..............................  112(b) or 112(c)
UN0490..............................  112(b) or 112(c)
UN0491..............................  143
UN0492..............................  135
UN0493..............................  135
UN0494..............................  US1
UN0495..............................  115
UN0496..............................  112(b) or 112(c)
UN0497..............................  115
UN0498..............................  114(b)
UN0499..............................  114(b)
UN0500..............................  131
UN0502..............................  130
UN0504..............................  112(c)
NA0124..............................  US1
NA0276..............................  134
NA0323..............................  134
NA0331..............................  116 or 117
NA0337..............................  135
NA0349..............................  133
NA0494..............................  US1
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (c) Explosives Packing Instruction Table. Explosives must be 
packaged in accordance with the following table:
    (1) The first column lists, in alphanumeric sequence, the packing 
methods prescribed for explosives in the Explosives Table of paragraph 
(b) of this section.
    (2) The second column specifies the inner packagings that are 
required. If inner packagings are not required, a notation of ``Not 
necessary'' appears in the column. The term ``Not necessary'' means that 
a suitable inner packaging may be used but is not required.
    (3) The third column specifies the intermediate packagings that are 
required. If intermediate packagings are not required, a notation of 
``Not necessary'' appears in the column. The term ``Not necessary'' 
means that a suitable intermediate packaging may be used but is not 
required.
    (4) The fourth column specifies the outer packagings which are 
required. If

[[Page 462]]

inner packagings and/or intermediate packagings are specified in the 
second and third columns, then the packaging specified in the fourth 
column must be used as the outer packaging of a combination packaging; 
otherwise it may be used as a single packaging.
    (5) Packing Instruction 101 may be used for any explosive substance 
or article if an equivalent level of safety is shown to be maintained 
subject to the approval of the Associate Administrator.

[[Page 463]]



                                                                Table of Packing Methods
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
       Packing instruction                    Inner packagings                     Intermediate packagings                    Outer packagings
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
101..............................  This Packing Instruction may be used as an alternative to a specifically assigned packing method with the approval of
                                      the Associate Administrator prior to transportation. When this packing instruction is used, the following must be
                                                                              marked on the shipping documents:
                                                  ``Packaging approved by the competent authority of the United States of America (USA)''.
PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS
 OR EXCEPTIONS:
1. Samples of new or existing
 explosive substances or articles
 may be transported as directed
 by the Associate Administrator
 for purposes including: testing,
 classification, research and
 development, quality control, or
 as a commercial sample.
 Explosive samples which are
 wetted or desensitized must be
 limited to 25 kg. Explosive
 samples which are not wetted or
 desensitized must be limited to
 10 kg in small packages as
 specified by the Associate
 Administrator for Hazardous
 Materials Safety
110(a)...........................  Bags..................................  Bags..................................  Drums.
 PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS     plastics............................    plastics............................    steel, removable head (1A2).
 OR EXCEPTIONS:                    textile, plastic coated or lined......  textile, plastic coated or lined......  plastics, removable head (1H2)
1. The Intermediate packagings     rubber................................  rubber................................
 must be filled with water         textile, rubberized...................  textile, rubberized...................
 saturated material such as an     textile...............................  Receptacles...........................
 anti-freeze solution or wetted                                            plastics..............................
 cushioning                                                                metal.................................
2. Outer packagings must be
 filled with water saturated
 material such as an anti-freeze
 solution or wetted cushioning.
 Outer packagings must be
 constructed and sealed to
 prevent evaporation of the
 wetting solution, except when
 0224 is being carried dry
110(b)...........................  Bags..................................  Dividing partitions...................  Boxes.
PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS      rubber, conductive..................    metal...............................    natural wood, sift-proof wall
 OR EXCEPTIONS                     plastics, conductive..................  wood..................................     (4C2).
For UN 0074, 0113, 0114, 0129,     Receptacles...........................  plastics..............................  plywood (4D).
 0130, 0135 and 0224, the          metal.................................  fibreboard............................  reconstituted wood (4F).
 following conditions must be      wood..................................
 satisfied:                        rubber, conductive....................
a. inner packagings must not       plastics, conductive..................
 contain more than 50 g of
 explosive substance (quantity
 corresponding to dry substance);
b. each inner packaging must be
 separated from other inner
 packagings by dividing
 partitions; and
c. the outer packaging must not
 be partitioned with more than 25
 compartments
111..............................  Bags..................................  Not necessary.........................  Boxes.
PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS    paper, waterproofed...................                                          steel (4A).
 OR EXCEPTIONS:.                   plastics..............................                                          aluminium (4B).
For UN 0159, inner packagings are  textile, rubberized...................                                          natural wood, ordinary (4C1).
 not required when metal (1A2 or   Sheets................................                                          natural wood, sift proof (4C2).
 1B2) or plastics (1H2) drums are  plastics..............................                                          plywood (4D).
 used as outer packagings.         textile, rubberized...................                                          reconstituted wood (4F).
                                                                                                                   fibreboard (4G).
                                                                                                                   plastics, expanded (4H1).
                                                                                                                   plastics, solid (4H2).
                                                                                                                   Drums
                                                                                                                   steel, removable head (1A2).
                                                                                                                   aluminum, removable head (1B2).
                                                                                                                   plywood (1D).
                                                                                                                   fibreboard (1G).
                                                                                                                   plastics, removable head (1H2).
112(a) This packing instruction    Bags..................................  Bags..................................  Boxes.
 applies to wetted solids.

[[Page 464]]

 
PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS      paper, multiwall, water resistant...    plastics............................    steel (4A).
 OR EXCEPTIONS:                    plastics..............................  textile, plastic coated or lined......  aluminium (4B).
1. For UN Nos. 0004, 0076, 0078,   textile...............................  Receptacles...........................  natural wood, ordinary (4C1).
 0154, 0219 and 0394, packagings   textile, rubberized...................  metal.................................  natural wood, sift proof (4C2).
 must be lead free                 woven plastics........................  plastics..............................  plywood (4D).
2. Intermediate packagings are     Receptacles...........................                                          reconstituted wood (4F).
 not required if leakproof drums   metal.................................                                          fibreboard (4G).
 are used as the outer packaging   plastics..............................                                          plastics, expanded (4H1).
3. For UN 0072 and UN 0226,                                                                                        plastics, solid (4H2).
 intermediate packagings are not                                                                                   Drums
 required                                                                                                          steel, removable head (1A2).
                                                                                                                   aluminium, removable head (1B2).
                                                                                                                   Plywood (1D).
                                                                                                                   fibre (1G).
                                                                                                                   plastics, removable head (1H2).
112(b) This packing instruction    Bags..................................  Bags (for UN 0150 only)...............  Bags.
 applies to dry solids other than  paper, Kraft..........................  plastics..............................  woven plastics sift-proof (5H2/3).
 powders.                          paper, multiwall, water resistant.....  textile, plastic coated or lined......  plastics, film (5H4).
PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS    plastics..............................                                          textile, sift-proof (5L2).
 OR EXCEPTIONS:.                   textile...............................                                          textile, water resistant (5L3).
1. For UN 0004, 0076, 0078, 0154,  textile, rubberized plastics..........                                          paper, multiwall, water resistant
 0216, 0219 and 0386, packagings   woven plastics........................                                           (5M2).
 must be lead free.                                                                                                Boxes
2. For UN 0209, bags, sift-proof                                                                                   steel (4A).
 (5H2) are recommended for flake                                                                                   aluminium (4B).
 or prilled TNT in the dry state                                                                                   natural wood, ordinary (4C1).
 and a maximum net mass of 30 kg..                                                                                 natural wood, sift proof (4C2).
3. For UN 0222 and UN 0223, inner                                                                                  plywood (4D)
 packagings are not required.                                                                                      reconstituted wood (4F).
                                                                                                                   fibreboard (4G).
                                                                                                                   plastics, expanded (4H1).
                                                                                                                   plastics, solid (4H2).
                                                                                                                   Drums
                                                                                                                   steel, removable head (1A2).
                                                                                                                   aluminium, removable head (1B2).
                                                                                                                   Plywood (1D).
                                                                                                                   fibre (1G).
                                                                                                                   plastics, removable head (1H2).
112(c)  This packing instruction   Bags..................................  Bags..................................  Boxes.
 applies to solid dry powders.

[[Page 465]]

 
PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS      paper, multiwall, water resistant...    paper, multiwall, water resistant       steel (4A).
 OR EXCEPTIONS:                    plastics..............................     with inner lining.                   natural wood,
1. For UN 0004, 0076, 0078, 0154,  woven plastics........................  plastics..............................  aluminum (4B).
 0216, 0219 and 0386, packagings   Receptacles...........................  Receptacles...........................  ordinary (4C1).
 must be lead free                 fibreboard............................  metal.................................  natural wood,
2. For UN 0209, bags, sift-proof   metal.................................  plastics..............................  sift proof (4C2).
 (5H2) are recommended for flake   plastics..............................                                          plywood (4D).
 or prilled TNT in the dry state.  wood..................................                                          reconstituted wood (4F).
 Bags must not exceed a maximum                                                                                    fibreboard (4G).
 net mass of 30 kg.                                                                                                plastics, solid (4H2).
3. Inner packagings are not                                                                                        Drums.
 required if drums are used as                                                                                     plastics, removable head (1H2).
 the outer packaging.                                                                                              steel, removable head (1A2).
4. At least one of the packagings                                                                                  aluminium, removable head (1B2).
 must be sift-proof                                                                                                Plywood (1D).
                                                                                                                   fibre (1G).
113..............................  Bags..................................  Not necessary.........................  Boxes.
PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS      paper...............................  ......................................    steel (4A).
 OR EXCEPTIONS:                    plastics..............................                                          aluminum (4B).
1. For UN 0094 and UN 0305, no     textile, rubberized...................                                          natural wood, ordinary (4C1).
 more than 50 g of substance must  Receptacles...........................                                          natural wood, sift-proof walls (4C2).
 be packed in an inner packaging   fibreboard............................                                          plywood (4D).
2. For UN 0027, inner packagings   metal.................................                                          reconstituted wood (4F).
 are not necessary when drums are  plastics..............................                                          fibreboard (4G).
 used as the outer packaging       wood..................................                                          plastics, solid (4H2).
3. At least one of the packagings  Sheets................................                                          Drums
 must be sift- proof               paper, kraft..........................                                          plastics, removable head (1H2).
4. Sheets must only be used for    paper, waxed..........................                                          steel, removable head (1A2).
 UN 0028                                                                                                           aluminium, removable head (1B2).
                                                                                                                   Plywood (1D).
                                                                                                                   fibre (1G).
114(a) This packing instruction    Bags..................................  Bags..................................  Boxes.
 applies to wetted solids.         plastics..............................  plastics..............................  steel (4A).
PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS    textile...............................  textile, plastic coated or lined......  natural wood, ordinary (4C1).
 OR EXCEPTIONS:.                   woven plastics........................  Receptacles...........................  natural wood, sift proof walls (4C2).
1. For UN 0077, 0234, 0235 and     Receptacles...........................  metal.................................  plywood (4D).
 0236, packagings must be lead     metal.................................  plastics..............................  reconstituted wood (4F).
 free.                             plastics..............................                                          fibreboard (4G).
2. For UN 0342, inner packagings                                                                                   plastics, solid (4H2).
 are not required when metal (1A2                                                                                  Drums.
 or 1B2) or plastics (1H2) drums                                                                                   steel, removable head (1A2).
 are used as outer packagings.                                                                                     aluminium, removable head (1B2).
3. Intermediate packagings are                                                                                     plywood (1D).
 not required if leakproof                                                                                         fibre (1G).
 removable head drums are used as                                                                                  plastics,
 the outer packaging.                                                                                              removable head (1H2).
114(b) This packing instruction    Bags..................................  Not necessary.........................  Boxes.
 applies to dry solids.

[[Page 466]]

 
PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS      paper, kraft........................  ......................................    natural wood, ordinary (4C1).
 OR EXCEPTIONS:                    plastics..............................                                          natural wood, sift proof walls (4C2)
1. For UN 0077, 0132, 0234, 0235   textile, sift-proof...................                                          plywood (4D).
 and 0236, packagings must be      woven plastics, sift-proof............                                          reconstituted wood (4F).
 lead free                         Receptacles...........................                                          fibreboard (4G).
2. For UN 0160 and UN 0161, when   fibreboard............................                                          Drums.
 metal drums (1A2 or 1B2) are      metal.................................                                          steel, removable head (1A2).
 used as the outer packaging,      paper.................................                                          aluminium, removable head (1B2)
 metal packagings must be so       plastics..............................                                          plywood (1D).
 constructed that the risk of      woven plastics, sift-proof............                                          fibre (1G).
 explosion, by reason of                                                                                           plastics, removable head (1H2)
 increased internal pressure from
 internal or external causes is
 prevented
3. For UN 0160 and UN 0161, inner
 packagings are not required if
 drums are used as the outer
 packaging
115..............................  Receptacles...........................  Bags..................................  Boxes.
PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS    metal.................................  plastics in metal receptacles.........    natural wood, ordinary (4C1).
 OR EXCEPTIONS:                    plastics..............................  Drums.................................  natural wood, sift proof walls (4C2).
1. For liquid explosives, inner                                            metal.................................  plywood (4D).
 packagings must be surrounded                                                                                     reconstituted wood (4F).
 with non-combustible absorbent                                                                                    fibreboard (4G).
 cushioning material in                                                                                            Drums.
 sufficient quantity to absorb                                                                                     plastics, removable head (1H2).
 the entire liquid content. Metal                                                                                  steel, removable head (1A2).
 receptacles should be cushioned                                                                                   aluminium, removable head (1B2).
 from each other. The net mass of                                                                                  plywood (1D).
 explosive per package may not                                                                                     fibre (1G).
 exceed 30 kg when boxes are used                                                                                  Specification MC-200 containers may
 as outer packaging. The net                                                                                        be used for transport by motor
 volume of explosive in each                                                                                        vehicle.
 package other than boxes must
 not exceed 120 litres
2. For UN 0075, 0143, 0495 and
 0497 when boxes are used as the
 outer packaging, inner
 packagings must have taped screw
 cap closures and be not more
 than 5 litres capacity each. A
 composite packaging consisting
 of a plastic receptacle in a
 metal drum (6HA1) may be used in
 lieu of combination packagings.
 Liquid substances must not
 freeze at temperatures above -15
  deg.C (+5  deg.F)
3. For UN 0144, intermediate
 packagings are not necessary.
116..............................  Bags..................................  Not necessary.........................  Bags.

[[Page 467]]

 
PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS    paper, water and oil..................  ......................................    woven plastics (5H1/2/3).
 OR EXCEPTIONS:                    resistant.............................                                          paper, mulitwall, water resistant
1. For UN 0082, 0241, 0331 and     plastics..............................                                           (5M2).
 0332, inner packagings are not    texitile, plasic coated or............                                          plastics, film (5H4).
 necessary if leakproof removable  lined.................................                                          textile, sift-proof (5L2).
 head drums are used as the outer  woven plasics, sift-proof.............                                          textile, water resistant (5L3).
 packaging                         Receptacles...........................                                          Boxes.
2. For UN 0082, 0241, 0331 and     fibreboard, water resistant...........                                          steel (4A).
 0332, inner packagings are not    metal.................................                                          aluminium (4B).
 required when the explosive is    plastics..............................                                          wood, natural, ordinary (4C1).
 contained in a material           wood, sift-proof......................                                          natural wood, sift proof walls (4C2).
 impervious to liquid              Sheets................................                                          plywood (4D).
3. For UN 0081, inner packagings   paper, water resistant................                                          reconstituted wood (4F).
 are not required when contained   paper, waxed..........................                                          fibreboard (4G).
 in rigid plastic which is         plastics..............................                                          plastics, solid (4H2).
 impervious to nitric esters                                                                                       Drums.
4. For UN 0331, inner packagings                                                                                   steel, removable head (1A2).
 are not required when bags                                                                                        aluminium, removable head (1B2).
 (5H2), (5H3) or (5H4) are used                                                                                    Plywood (1D).
 as outer packagings                                                                                               fibre (1G).
5. Bags (5H2 or 5H3) must be used                                                                                  plastics, removable head (1H2).
 only for UN 0082, 0241, 0331 and                                                                                  Jerricans.
 0332                                                                                                              steel, removable head (3A2).
6. For UN 0081, bags must not be                                                                                   plastics, removable head (3H2).
 used as outer packagings
117..............................  Not necessary.........................  Not necessary.........................  IBCs.
PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS    ......................................  ......................................    metal (11A), (11B), (11N), (21A),
 OR EXCEPTIONS:                                                                                                       (21B), (21N), (31A), (31B), (31N).
1. This packing instruction may                                                                                    flexible (13H2), (13H3), (13H4),
 only be used for explosives of                                                                                     (13L2), (13L3), (13L4), (13M2).
 0082 when they are mixtures of                                                                                    rigid plastics (11H1), (11H2),
 ammonium nitrate or other                                                                                          (21H1), (21H2), (31H1), (31H2).
 inorganic nitrates with other                                                                                     composite (11HZ1), (11HZ2), (21HZ1),
 combustible substances which are                                                                                   (21HZ2), (31HZ1), (31HZ2).
 not explosive ingredients. Such
 explosives must not contain
 nitroglycerin, similar liquid
 organic nitrates, liquid or
 solid nitrocarbons, or
 chlorates.
2. This packing instruction may
 only be used for explosives of
 UN 0241 which consist of water
 as an essential ingredient and
 high proportions of ammonium
 nitrate or other oxidizers, some
 or all of which are in solution.
 The other constituents may
 include hydrocarbons or
 aluminium powder, but must not
 include nitro-derivatives such
 as trinitrotoluene.
3. Metal IBCs must not be used
 for UN 0082 and 0241.
4. Flexible IBCs may only be used
 for solids.
130..............................  Not necessary.........................  Not necessary.........................  Boxes.

[[Page 468]]

 
PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS    ......................................  ......................................    steel (4A).
 OR EXCEPTIONS:                                                                                                    aluminium (4B).
1. The following applies to UN                                                                                     wood natural, ordinary (4C1).
 0006, 0009, 0010, 0015, 0016,                                                                                     natural wood, sift proof walls (4C2).
 0018, 0019, 0034, 0035, 0038,                                                                                     plywood (4D).
 0039, 0048, 0056, 0137, 0138,                                                                                     reconstituted wood (4F).
 0168, 0169, 0171, 0181, 0182,                                                                                     fibreboard (4G).
 0183, 0186, 0221, 0238, 0243,                                                                                     plastics, expanded (4H1).
 0244, 0245, 0246, 0254, 0280,                                                                                     plastics, solid (4H2).
 0281, 0286, 0287, 0297, 0299,                                                                                     Drums.
 0300, 0301, 0303, 0321, 0328,                                                                                     steel, removable head (1A2).
 0329, 0344, 0345 0346, 0347,                                                                                      aluminium, removable head (1B2).
 0362, 0363, 0370, 0412, 0424,                                                                                     Plywood (1D).
 0425, 0434, 0435, 0436, 0437,                                                                                     fibre (1G).
 0438, 0451, 0459 and 0488. Large                                                                                  plastics, removable head (1H2).
 and robust explosives articles,
 normally intended for military
 use, without their means of
 initiation or with their means
 of initiation containing at
 least two effective protective
 features, may be carried
 unpackaged. When such articles
 have propelling charges or are
 self-propelled, their ignition
 systems must be protected
 against stimuli encountered
 during normal conditions of
 transport. A negative result in
 Test Series 4 on an unpackaged
 article indicates that the
 article can be considered for
 transport unpackaged. Such
 unpackaged articles may be fixed
 to cradles or contained in
 crates or other suitable
 handling devices.
131..............................  Bags..................................  Not necessary.........................  Boxes.
PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS    ......................................  ......................................    steel (4A).
 OR EXCEPTIONS:                    paper.................................                                          aluminium (4B).
1. For UN 0029, 0267 and 0455,     plastics..............................                                          wood, natural, ordinary (4C1).
 bags and reels may not be used    Receptacles...........................                                          natural wood, sift proof walls (4C2).
 as inner packagings               fibreboard............................                                          plywood (4D).
2. For UN 0030, 0255 and 0456,     metal.................................                                          reconstituted wood (4F).
 inner packagings are not          plastics..............................                                          fibreboard (4G).
 required when detonators are      wood..................................                                          Drums.
 packed in pasteboard tubes, or    Reels.................................                                          steel, removable head (1A2).
 when their leg wires are wound                                                                                    aluminium, removable head (1B2).
 on spools with the caps either                                                                                    Plywood (1D).
 placed inside the spool or                                                                                        fibre (1G).
 securely taped to the wire on                                                                                     plastics, removable head (1H2).
 the spool, so as to restrict
 freedom of movement of the caps
 and to protect them from impact
 forces
3. For UN 0360, 0361 and 0500,
 detonators are not required to
 be attached to the safety fuse,
 metal-clad mild detonating cord,
 detonating cord, or shock tube.
 Inner packagings are not
 required if the packing
 configuration restricts freedom
 of movement of the caps and
 protects them from impact forces
132(a)...........................  Not necessary.........................  Not necessary.........................  Boxes.
                                                                                                                   steel (4A).
                                                                                                                   aluminium (4B).
                                                                                                                   wood, natural, ordinary (4C1).
                                                                                                                   wood, natural, sift proof walls
                                                                                                                    (4C2).
                                                                                                                   plywood (4D).
                                                                                                                   reconstituted wood (4F).
                                                                                                                   fibreboard (4G).
                                                                                                                   plastics, solid (4H2).

[[Page 469]]

 
132(b)...........................  Receptacles...........................  Not necessary.........................  Boxes.
                                   fibreboard............................                                          steel (4A).
                                   metal.................................                                          aluminium (4B).
                                   plastics..............................                                          wood, natural, ordinary (4C1).
                                   Sheets................................                                          wood, natural, sift proof walls
                                   paper.................................                                           (4C2).
                                   plastics..............................                                          plywood (4D).
                                                                                                                   reconstituted wood (4F).
                                                                                                                   fibreboard (4G).
                                                                                                                   plastics, solid (4H2).
133..............................  Receptacles...........................  Receptacles...........................  Boxes.
PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS    Intermediate packagings are only          fibreboard..........................    steel (4A).
 OR EXCEPTIONS:                     required when trays are used as inner  metal.................................  aluminium (4B).
1. For UN 0043, 0212, 0225, 0268    packagings.                            plastics..............................  wood, natural, ordinary (4C1).
 and 0306 trays are not            fibreboard............................  wood..................................  wood, natural, sift proof walls
 authorized as inner packagings    metal.................................                                           (4C2).
                                   plastics..............................                                          plywood (4D).
                                   wood..................................                                          reconstituted wood (4F).
                                   Trays, fitted with dividing...........                                          fibreboard (4G).
                                   partitions............................                                          plastics, solid (4H2).
                                   fibreboard............................
                                   plastics..............................
                                   wood..................................
134..............................  Bags..................................  Not necessary.........................  Boxes.
                                   water resistant.......................                                          steel (4A).
                                   Receptacles...........................                                          aluminium (4B).
                                   fibreboard............................                                          wood, natural, ordinary (4C1).
                                   metal.................................                                          wood, natural, sift proof walls
                                   plastics..............................                                           (4C2).
                                   wood..................................                                          plywood (4D).
                                   Sheets................................                                          reconstituted wood (4F).
                                   fibreboard, corrugated................                                          fibreboard (4G).
                                   Tubes.................................                                          plastics, solid (4H2).
                                   fibreboard............................                                          Drums.
                                                                                                                   fiberboard (1G).
                                                                                                                   plastics, removable head (1H2).
                                                                                                                   steel, removable head (1A2).
                                                                                                                   aluminium, removable head (1B2).
                                                                                                                   Plywood (1D).

[[Page 470]]

 
135..............................  Bags..................................  Not necessary.........................  Boxes.
                                   paper.................................                                          steel (4A).
                                   plastics..............................                                          aluminium (4B).
                                   Receptacles...........................                                          wood, natural, ordinary (4C1).
                                   fibreboard............................                                          wood, natural, sift proof walls
                                   metal.................................                                           (4C2).
                                   plastics..............................                                          plywood (4D).
                                   wood..................................                                          reconstituted wood (4F).
                                   Sheets................................                                          fibreboard (4G).
                                   paper.................................                                          plastics, expanded (4H1).
                                   plastics..............................                                          plastics, solid (4H2).
                                                                                                                   Drums.
                                                                                                                   steel, removable head (1A2).
                                                                                                                   aluminium, removable head (1B2).
                                                                                                                   Plywood (1D).
                                                                                                                   fibre (1G).
                                                                                                                   plastics, removable head (1H2).
136..............................  Bags..................................  Not necessary.........................  Boxes.
                                   plastics..............................                                          steel (4A).
                                   textile...............................                                          aluminium (4B)
                                   Boxes.................................                                          wood, natural, ordinary (4C1).
                                   fibreboard............................                                          wood, natural, sift proof walls
                                   plastics..............................                                           (4C2).
                                   wood..................................                                          plywood (4D).
                                   Dividing partitions in the............                                          reconstituted wood (4F).
                                   outer packagings......................                                          fibreboard (4G).
                                                                                                                   plastics, solid (4H2).
                                                                                                                   Drums.
                                                                                                                   steel, removable head (1A2).
                                                                                                                   aluminium, removable head (1B2).
                                                                                                                   Plywood (1D).
                                                                                                                   fibre (1G).
                                                                                                                   plastics, removable head (1H2).
137  PARTICULAR PACKING            Bags..................................  Not necessary.........................  Boxes.
 REQUIREMENTS OR EXCEPTIONS: For   plastics..............................                                          steel (4A).
 UN 0059, 0439, 0440 and 0441,     Boxes.................................                                          aluminium (4B).
 when the shaped charges are       fibreboard............................                                          wood, natural, ordinary (4C1).
 packed singly, the conical        Tubes.................................                                          wood, natural, sift proof walls
 cavity must face downwards and    fibreboard............................                                           (4C2).
 the package marked ``THIS SIDE    metal.................................                                          plywood (4D).
 UP''. When the shaped charges     plastics..............................                                          reconstituted wood (4F).
 are packed in pairs, the conical  Dividing partitions in the outer                                                fibreboard (4G).
 cavities must face inwards to      packagings.
 minimize the jetting effect in
 the event of accidental
 initiation.
138..............................  Bags..................................  Not necessary.........................  Boxes.

[[Page 471]]

 
PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS      plastics............................  ......................................    steel (4A).
 OR EXCEPTIONS:                                                                                                    aluminium (4B).
If the ends of the articles are                                                                                    wood, natural, ordinary (4C1).
 sealed, inner packagings are not                                                                                  wood, natural, sift proof walls
 necessary                                                                                                          (4C2).
                                                                                                                   plywood (4D).
                                                                                                                   reconstituted wood (4F).
                                                                                                                   fibreboard (4G).
                                                                                                                   plastics, solid (4H2).
                                                                                                                   Drums.
                                                                                                                   fiberboard (1G).
                                                                                                                   plastics, removable head (1H2).
                                                                                                                   steel, removable head (1A2).
                                                                                                                   aluminium, removable head (1B2).
139..............................  Bags..................................  Not necessary.........................  Boxes.
PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS      plastics............................  ......................................    steel (4A).
 OR EXCEPTIONS:                    Receptacles...........................                                          aluminium (4B).
1. For UN 0065, 0102, 0104, 0289   fibreboard............................                                          wood, natural, ordinary (4C1).
 and 0290, the ends of the         metal.................................                                          wood, natural, sift proof walls
 detonating cord must be sealed,   plastics..............................                                           (4C2).
 for example, by a plug firmly     wood..................................                                          plywood (4D).
 fixed so that the explosive       Reels.................................                                          reconstituted wood (4F).
 cannot escape. The ends of CORD     ....................................                                          fibreboard (4G).
 DETONATING flexible must be       Sheets................................                                          plastics, solid (4H2).
 fastened securely                 paper.................................                                          Drums.
2. For UN 0065 and UN 0289, inner  plastics..............................                                          steel, removable head (1A2).
 packagings are not required when                                                                                  aluminium, removable head (1B2).
 they are fastened securely in                                                                                     plywood (1D).
 coils                                                                                                             fibre (1G).
                                                                                                                   plastics, removable head (1H2).
140..............................  Bags..................................  Not necessary.........................  Boxes.
PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS      plastics............................  ......................................    steel (4A).
 OR EXCEPTIONS:                    Reels.................................                                          aluminium (4B).
1. If the ends of UN 0105 are      Sheets................................                                          wood, natural, ordinary (4C1).
 sealed, no inner packagings are   paper, kraft..........................                                          wood, natural, sift proof walls
 required                          plastics..............................                                           (4C2).
2. For UN 0101, the packaging                                                                                      plywood (4D).
 must be sift-proof except when                                                                                    reconstituted wood (4F).
 the fuse is covered by a paper                                                                                    fibreboard (4G).
 tube and both ends of the tube                                                                                    plastics, solid (4H2).
 are covered with removable caps                                                                                   Drums.
3. For UN 0101, steel or                                                                                           plastics, removable head (1H2).
 aluminium boxes or drums must                                                                                     steel, removable head (1A2).
 not be used                                                                                                       aluminium, removable head (1B2).
                                                                                                                   Plywood (1D).
                                                                                                                   fibre (1G).

[[Page 472]]

 
141..............................  Receptacles...........................  Not necessary.........................  Boxes.
                                   fibreboard............................                                          steel (4A).
                                   metal.................................                                          aluminium (4B).
                                   plastics..............................                                          wood, natural, ordinary (4C1).
                                   wood..................................                                          wood, natural, sift proof walls
                                     ....................................                                           (4C2).
                                   Trays, fitted with dividing partitions                                          plywood (4D).
                                   plastics..............................                                          reconstituted wood (4F).
                                   wood..................................                                          fibreboard (4G).
                                   Dividing partitions in the outer                                                plastics, solid (4H2).
                                    packagings.                                                                    Drums.
                                                                                                                   steel, removable head (1A2).
                                                                                                                   aluminium, removable head (1B2).
                                                                                                                   Plywood (1D).
                                                                                                                   fibre (1G).
                                                                                                                   plastics, removable head (1H2).
142..............................  Bags..................................  Not necessary.........................  Boxes.
                                   paper.................................                                          steel (4A).
                                   plastics..............................                                          aluminium (4B).
                                   Receptacles...........................                                          wood, natural, ordinary (4C1).
                                   fibreboard............................                                          wood, natural, sift proof walls
                                   metal.................................                                           (4C2).
                                   plastics..............................                                          plywood (4D).
                                   wood..................................                                          reconstituted wood (4F).
                                   Sheets................................                                          fibreboard (4G).
                                   paper.................................                                          plastics, solid (4H2).
                                   Trays, fitted with dividing partitions                                          Drums.
                                   plastics..............................                                          steel, removable head (1A2).
                                                                                                                   aluminium, removable head (1B2).
                                                                                                                   Plywood (1D).
                                                                                                                   fibre (1G).
                                                                                                                   plastics, removable head (1H2).
143..............................  Bag...................................  Not necessary.........................  Boxes.

[[Page 473]]

 
PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS      paper, kraft........................  ......................................    steel (4A).
 OR EXCEPTIONS:                    plastics..............................                                          aluminum (4B).
1. For UN 0271, 0272, 0415 and     textile...............................                                          wood, natural, ordinary (4C1).
 0491 when metal packagings are    textile, rubberized...................                                          wood, natural, sift proof walls
 used, metal packagings must be    Receptacles...........................                                           (4C2).
 so constructed that the risk of   fibreboard............................                                          plywood (4D).
 explosion, by reason of increase  metal.................................                                          reconstituted wood (4F).
 in internal pressure from         plastics..............................                                          fibreboard (4G).
 internal or external causes is    Trays, fitted with dividing partitions                                          plastics, solid (4H2).
 prevented                         plastics..............................                                          Drums.
2. Composite packagings (6HH2)     wood..................................                                          steel, removable head (1A2).
 (plastic receptacle with outer                                                                                    aluminium, removable head (1B2).
 solid box) may be used in lieu                                                                                    plywood (1D).
 of combination packagings                                                                                         fibre (1G).
                                                                                                                   plastics, removable head (1H2).
144..............................  Receptacles...........................  Not necessary.........................  Boxes.
                                                                                                                   Drums.
                                                                                                                   steel, removable head (1A2).
                                                                                                                   aluminium, removable head (1B2).
                                                                                                                   plastics, removable head (1H2).
                                                                                                                   Plywood (1D).
PARTICULAR PACKING REQUIREMENTS      fibreboard..........................  ......................................    2steel (4A).
 OR EXCEPTIONS:                    metal.................................                                          aluminum (4B).
For UN 0248 and UN 0249,           plastics..............................                                          wood, natural, ordinary (4C1) with
 packagings must be protected      Dividing partitions in the outer                                                 metal liner.
 against the ingress of water.      packagings.                                                                    plywood (4D) with metal liner.
 When CONTRIVANCES, WATER                                                                                          reconstituted wood (4F) with metal
 ACTIVATED are transported                                                                                          liner.
 unpackaged, they must be                                                                                          plastics, expanded (4H1).
 provided with at least two                                                                                        plastics, solid (4H2).
 independent protective features
 which prevent the ingress of
 water
US 1
  1. A jet perforating gun, charged, oil well may be transported under the following conditions:........................................................
  a. Initiation devices carried on the same motor vehicle or offshore supply vessel must be segregated; each kind from every other kind, and from any
   gun, tool or other supplies, unless approved in accordance with Sec.  173.56. Segregated initiation devices must be carried in a container having
   individual pockets for each such device or in a fully enclosed steel container lined with a non-sparking material. No more than two segregated
   initiation devices per gun may be carried on the same motor vehicle..
  b. Each shaped charge affixed to the gun may not contain more than 112 g (4 ounces) of explosives.....................................................
  c. Each shaped charge if not completely enclosed in glass or metal, must be fully protected by a metal cover after installation in the gun............
  d. A jet perforating gun classed as 1.1D or 1.4D may be transported by highway by private or contract carriers engaged in oil well operations.........
  (i) A motor vehicle transporting a gun must have specially built racks or carrying cases designed and constructed so that the gun is securely held in
   place during transportation and is not subject to damage by contact, one to the other or any other article or material carried in the vehicle; and.
  (ii) The assembled gun packed on the vehicle may not extend beyond the body of the motor vehicle......................................................
  e. A jet perforating gun classed as 1.4D may be transported by a private offshore supply vessel only when the gun is carried in a motor vehicle as
   specified in paragraph (d) of this packing method or on offshore well tool pallets provided that:.
  (i) All the conditions specified in paragraphs (a), (b), and (c) of this packing method are met;......................................................
  (ii) The total explosive contents do not exceed 90.8 kg (200 pounds) per tool pallet;.................................................................
  (iii) Each cargo vessel compartment may contain up to 90.8 kg (200 pounds) of explosive content if the segregation requirements in Sec.  176.83(b) of
   this subchapter are met; and.
  (iv) When more than one vehicle or tool pallet is stowed ``on deck'' a minimum horizontal separation of 3 m (9.8 feet) must be provided...............
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


[[Page 474]]


[Amdt. 173-260, 62 FR 24720, May 6, 1997; 62 FR 45702, Aug. 28, 1997; 62 
FR 51560, Oct. 1, 1997; 63 FR 1884, Jan. 12, 1998; 63 FR 52849, Oct. 1, 
1998; 64 FR 51918, Sept. 27, 1999; 65 FR 50461, Aug. 18, 2000; 65 FR 
58629, Sept. 29, 2000; 65 FR 60383, Oct. 11, 2000; 66 FR 33429, 33430, 
June 21, 2001; 66 FR 45183, 45379, 45382, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.63  Packaging exceptions.

    (a) Cord, detonating (UN 0065), having an explosive content not 
exceeding 6.5 g (0.23 ounces) per 30 centimeter length (one linear foot) 
may be offered for transportation domestically and transported as Cord, 
detonating (UN 0289), Division 1.4 Compatibility Group D (1.4D) 
explosives, if the gross weight of all packages containing Cord, 
detonating (UN 0065), does not exceed 45 kg (99 pounds) per:
    (1) Transport vehicle, freight container, or cargo-only aircraft;
    (2) Off-shore down-hole tool pallet carried on an off-shore supply 
vessel;
    (3) Cargo compartment of a cargo vessel; or
    (4) Passenger-carrying aircraft used to transport personnel to 
remote work sites, such as offshore drilling units.
    (b) Cartridges, small arms, and cartridges power devices. (1) 
Cartridges, small arms, and cartridges power devices (which are used to 
project fastening devices) which have been classed as a Division 1.4S 
explosive may be reclassed, offered for transportation, and transported 
as ORM-D material when packaged in accordance with paragraph (b)(2) of 
this section; such transportation is excepted from the requirements of 
subparts E (Labeling) and F (Placarding) of part 172 of this subchapter. 
Cartridges, small arms, and cartridges power devices that may be shipped 
as ORM-D material is limited to:
    (i) Ammunition for rifle, pistol or shotgun;
    (ii) Ammunition with inert projectiles or blank ammunition;
    (iii) Ammunition having no tear gas, incendiary, or detonating 
explosive projectiles;
    (iv) Ammunition not exceeding 12.7 mm (50 caliber or 0.5 inch) for 
rifle or pistol, cartridges or 8 gauge for shotshells; and
    (v) Cartridges, power devices which are used to project fastening 
devices.
    (2) Packaging for cartridges, small arms, and cartridges power 
devices as ORM-D material must be as follows:
    (i) Ammunition must be packed in inside boxes, or in partitions 
which fit snugly in the outside packaging, or in metal clips;
    (ii) Primers must be protected from accidental initiation;
    (iii) Inside boxes, partitions or metal clips must be packed in 
securely-closed strong outside packagings;
    (iv) Maximum gross weight is limited to 30 kg (66 pounds) per 
package; and
    (v) Cartridges, power devices which are used to project fastening 
devices and 22 caliber rim-fire cartridges may be packaged loose in 
strong outside packagings.
    (c)-(e) [Reserved]
    (f) Detonators containing no more than 1 g explosive (excluding 
ignition and delay charges) that are electric blasting caps with leg 
wires 4 feet long or longer, delay connectors in plastic sheaths, or 
blasting caps with empty plastic tubing 12 feet long or longer may be 
packed as follows in which case they are excepted from the packaging 
requirements of Sec. 173.62:
    (1) No more than 50 detonators in one inner packaging;
    (2) IME Standard 22 container or compartment is used as the outer 
packaging;
    (3) No more than 1000 detonators in one outer packaging; and
    (4) No material may be loaded on top of the IME Standard 22 
container and no material may be loaded against the outside door of the 
IME Standard 22 compartment.
    (g) Detonators that are classed as 1.4B or 1.4S and contain no more 
than 1 g of explosive (excluding ignition and delay charges) may be 
packed as follows in which case they are excepted from the packaging 
requirements of Sec. 173.62:
    (1) No more than 50 detonators in one inner packaging;
    (2) IME Standard 22 container is used as the outer packaging;
    (3) No more than 1000 detonators in one outer packaging; and

[[Page 475]]

    (4) Each inner packaging is marked ``l.4B Detonators'' or ``1.4S 
Detonators'', as appropriate.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52617, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66268, 
Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-236, 58 FR 50536, Sept. 24, 1993; Amdt. 173-
253, 61 FR 27175, May 30, 1996]



  Subpart D--Definitions Classification, Packing Group Assignments and 
    Exceptions for Hazardous Materials Other Than Class 1 and Class 7

    Source: Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52634 Dec. 21, 1990, unless otherwise 
noted.



Sec. 173.115  Class 2, Divisions 2.1, 2.2, and 2.3--Definitions.

    (a) Division 2.1 (Flammable gas). For the purpose of this 
subchapter, a flammable gas (Division 2.1) means any material which is a 
gas at 20  deg.C (68  deg.F) or less and 101.3 kPa (14.7 psia) of 
pressure (a material which has a boiling point of 20  deg.C (68  deg.F) 
or less at 101.3 kPa (14.7 psia)) which--
    (1) Is ignitable at 101.3 kPa (14.7 psia) when in a mixture of 13 
percent or less by volume with air; or
    (2) Has a flammable range at 101.3 kPa (14.7 psia) with air of at 
least 12 percent regardless of the lower limit.

Except for aerosols, the limits specified in paragraphs (a)(1) and 
(a)(2) of this section shall be determined at 101.3 kPa (14.7 psi) of 
pressure and a temperature of 20  deg.C (68  deg.F) in accordance with 
ASTM E681-85, Standard Test Method for Concentration Limits of 
Flammability of Chemicals or other equivalent method approved by the 
Associate Administrator. The flammability of aerosols is determined by 
the tests specified in Sec. 173.306(i) of this part.
    (b) Division 2.2 (non-flammable, nonpoisonous compressed gas--
including compressed gas, liquefied gas, pressurized cryogenic gas, 
compressed gas in solution, asphyxiant gas and oxidizing gas). For the 
purpose of this subchapter, a non-flammable, nonpoisonous compressed gas 
(Division 2.2) means any material (or mixture) which--
    (1) Exerts in the packaging an absolute pressure of 280 kPa (40.6 
psia) or greater at 20  deg.C (68  deg.F), and
    (2) Does not meet the definition of Division 2.1 or 2.3.
    (c) Division 2.3 (Gas poisonous by inhalation). For the purpose of 
this subchapter, a gas poisonous by inhalation (Division 2.3) means a 
material which is a gas at 20  deg.C (68  deg.F) or less and a pressure 
of 101.3 kPa (14.7 psia) (a material which has a boiling point of 20 
deg.C (68  deg.F) or less at 101.3 kPa (14.7 psia)) and which--
    (1) Is known to be so toxic to humans as to pose a hazard to health 
during transportation, or
    (2) In the absence of adequate data on human toxicity, is presumed 
to be toxic to humans because when tested on laboratory animals it has 
an LC50 value of not more than 5000 mL/m\3\ (see 
Sec. 173.116(a) of this subpart for assignment of Hazard Zones A, B, C 
or D). LC50 values for mixtures may be determined using the formula in 
Sec. 173.133(b)(1)(i) or CGA Pamphlet P-20 (incorporated by reference; 
see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).
    (d) Non-liquefied compressed gas. A non-liquefied compressed gas 
means a gas, other than in solution, which in a packaging under the 
charged pressure is entirely gaseous at a temperature of 20  deg.C (68 
deg.F).
    (e) Liquefied compressed gas. A liquefied compressed gas means a gas 
which in a packaging under the charged pressure, is partially liquid at 
a temperature of 20  deg.C (68  deg.F).
    (f) Compressed gas in solution. A compressed gas in solution is a 
non-liquefied compressed gas which is dissolved in a solvent.
    (g) Cryogenic liquid. A cryogenic liquid means a refrigerated 
liquefied gas having a boiling point colder than -90  deg.C (-130 
deg.F) at 101.3 kPa (14.7 psia) absolute. A material meeting this 
definition is subject to requirements of this subchapter without regard 
to whether it meets the definition of a non-flammable, non-poisonous 
compressed gas in paragraph (b) of this section.
    (h) Flammable range. The term flammable range means the difference 
between the minimum and maximum volume percentages of the material in 
air that forms a flammable mixture.
    (i) Service pressure. The term service pressure means the authorized 
pressure

[[Page 476]]

marking on the packaging. For example, for a cylinder marked ``DOT 
3A1800'', the service pressure is 12410 kPa (1800 psig).
    (j) Refrigerant gas or Dispersant gas. The terms Refrigerant gas and 
Dispersant gas apply to all nonpoisonous refrigerant gases; dispersant 
gases (fluorocarbons) listed in Sec. 172.101 of this subchapter and 
Secs. 173.304, 173.314(c), 173.315(a), and 173.315(h) and mixtures 
thereof; and any other compressed gas having a vapor pressure not 
exceeding 260 psia at 54  deg.C(130  deg.F), used only as a refrigerant, 
dispersant, or blowing agent.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66268, 
Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45461, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 173-236, 58 FR 50236, 
Sept. 24, 1993; Amdt. 173-234, 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 173-241, 
59 FR 67506, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173-255, 61 FR 50625, Sept. 26, 1996; 
66 FR 45379, 45380, 45382, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51642, Aug. 8, 2002; 67 
FR 16013, Sept. 27, 2002]



Sec. 173.116  Class 2--Assignment of hazard zone.

    (a) The hazard zone of a Class 2, Division 2.3 material is assigned 
in column 7 of the Sec. 172.101 table. There are no hazard zones for 
Divisions 2.1 and 2.2. When the Sec. 172.101 table provides more than 
one hazard zone for a Division 2.3 material, or indicates that the 
hazard zone be determined on the basis of the grouping criteria for 
Division 2.3, the hazard zone shall be determined by applying the 
following criteria:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
           Hazard zone                      Inhalation toxicity
------------------------------------------------------------------------
A................................  LC50 less than or equal to 200 ppm.
B................................  LC50 greater than 200 ppm and less
                                    than or equal to 1000 ppm.
C................................  LC50 greater than 1000 ppm and less
                                    than or equal to 3000 ppm.
D................................  LC50 greater than 3000 ppm or less
                                    than or equal to 5000 ppm.
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (b) The criteria specified in paragraph (a) of this section are 
represented graphically in Sec. 173.133, Figure 1.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66268, 
Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-138, 59 FR 49133, Sept. 26, 1994; 67 FR 61013, 
Sept. 27, 2002]



Secs. 173.117-173.119  [Reserved]



Sec. 173.120  Class 3--Definitions.

    (a) Flammable liquid. For the purpose of this subchapter, a 
flammable liquid (Class 3) means a liquid having a flash point of not 
more than 60.5  deg.C (141  deg.F), or any material in a liquid phase 
with a flash point at or above 37.8  deg.C (100  deg.F) that is 
intentionally heated and offered for transportation or transported at or 
above its flash point in a bulk packaging, with the following 
exceptions:
    (1) Any liquid meeting one of the definitions specified in 
Sec. 173.115.
    (2) Any mixture having one or more components with a flash point of 
60.5  deg.C (141  deg.F) or higher, that make up at least 99 percent of 
the total volume of the mixture, if the mixture is not offered for 
transportation or transported at or above its flash point.
    (3) Any liquid with a flash point greater than 35  deg.C (95  deg.F) 
which does not sustain combustion according to ASTM 4206 or the 
procedure in appendix H of this part.
    (4) Any liquid with a flash point greater than 35  deg.C (95  deg.F) 
and with a fire point greater than 100  deg.C (212  deg.F) according to 
ISO 2592.
    (5) Any liquid with a flash point greater than 35  deg.C (95  deg.F) 
which is in a water-miscible solution with a water content of more than 
90 percent by mass.
    (b) Combustible liquid. (1) For the purpose of this subchapter, a 
combustible liquid means any liquid that does not meet the definition of 
any other hazard class specified in this subchapter and has a flash 
point above 60.5  deg.C (141  deg.F) and below 93  deg.C (200  deg.F).
    (2) A flammable liquid with a flash point at or above 38  deg.C (100 
 deg.F) that does not meet the definition of any other hazard class may 
be reclassed as a combustible liquid. This provision does not apply to 
transportation by vessel or aircraft, except where other means of 
transportation is impracticable. An elevated temperature material that 
meets the definition of a Class 3 material because it is intentionally 
heated and offered for transportation or transported at or above its 
flash point may not be reclassed as a combustible liquid.

[[Page 477]]

    (3) A combustible liquid which does not sustain combustion is not 
subject to the requirements of this subchapter as a combustible liquid. 
Either the test method specified in ASTM 4206 or the procedure in 
appendix H of this part may be used to determine if a material sustains 
combustion when heated under test conditions and exposed to an external 
source of flame.
    (c) Flash point. (1) Flash point means the minimum temperature at 
which a liquid gives off vapor within a test vessel in sufficient 
concentration to form an ignitable mixture with air near the surface of 
the liquid. It shall be determined as follows:
    (i) For a homogeneous, single-phase, liquid having a viscosity less 
than 45 S.U.S. at 38  deg.C (100  deg.F) that does not form a surface 
film while under test, one of the following test procedures shall be 
used:
    (A) Standard Method of Test for Flash Point by Tag Closed Tester, 
(ASTM D 56);
    (B) Standard Methods of Test for Flash Point of Liquids by Setaflash 
Closed Tester, (ASTM D 3278); or
    (C) Standard Test Methods for Flash Point by Small Scale Closed 
Tester, (ASTM D 3828).
    (ii) For a liquid other than one meeting all of the criteria of 
paragraph (c)(1)(i) of this section, one of the following test 
procedures shall be used:
    (A) Standard Method of Test for Flash Point by Pensky--Martens 
Closed Tester, (ASTM D 93). For cutback asphalt, use Method B of ASTM D 
93 or alternate tests authorized in this standard; or
    (B) Standard Methods of Test for Flash Point of Liquids by Setaflash 
Closed Tester (ASTM D 3278).
    (2) For a liquid that is a mixture of compounds that have different 
volatility and flash points, its flash point shall be determined as 
specified in paragraph (c)(1) of this section, on the material in the 
form in which it is to be shipped. If it is determined by this test that 
the flash point is higher than -7  deg.C (20  deg.F) a second test shall 
be made as follows: a portion of the mixture shall be placed in an open 
beaker (or similar container) of such dimensions that the height of the 
liquid can be adjusted so that the ratio of the volume of the liquid to 
the exposed surface area is 6 to one. The liquid shall be allowed to 
evaporate under ambient pressure and temperature (20 to 25  deg.C (68 to 
77  deg.F)) for a period of 4 hours or until 10 percent by volume has 
evaporated, whichever comes first. A flash point is then run on a 
portion of the liquid remaining in the evaporation container and the 
lower of the two flash points shall be the flash point of the material.
    (3) For flash point determinations by Setaflash closed tester, the 
glass syringe specified need not be used as the method of measurement of 
the test sample if a minimum quantity of 2 mL (0.1 ounce) is assured in 
the test cup.
    (d) If experience or other data indicate that the hazard of a 
material is greater or less than indicated by the criteria specified in 
paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section, the Associate Administrator may 
revise the classification or make the material subject or not subject to 
the requirements of parts 170-189 of this subchapter.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52634 Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 173-227, 
56 FR 49989, Oct. 2, 1991; 56 FR 66268, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45461, Oct. 
1, 1992; Amdt. 173-241, 59 FR 67506, 67507, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173-
255, 61 FR 50625, Sept. 26, 1996; Amdt. 173-261, 62 FR 24731, May 6, 
1997; 66 FR 45379, 45381, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.121  Class 3--Assignment of packing group.

    (a) The packing group of a Class 3 material is as assigned in column 
5 of the Sec. 172.101 table. When the Sec. 172.101 table provides more 
than one packing group for a hazardous material, the packing group shall 
be determined by applying the following criteria:

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
             Packing group                     Flash point (closed-cup)              Initial boiling point
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
I.....................................  .....................................  [le]35 deg.C (95 deg.F)
II....................................  <23 deg.C (73 deg.F).................  35 deg.C (95 deg.F)
III...................................  [ge]23 deg.C, [le]60.5 deg.C ([ge]73   35 deg.C (95 deg.F)
                                         deg.F, [le]141 deg.F).
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


[[Page 478]]

    (b) Criteria for inclusion of viscous Class 3 materials in Packing 
Group III. (1) Viscous Class 3 materials in Packing Group II with a 
flash point of less than 23  deg.C (73  deg.F) may be grouped in Packing 
Group III provided that--
    (i) Less than 3 percent of the clear solvent layer separates in the 
solvent separation test;
    (ii) The mixture does not contain any substances with a primary or a 
subsidiary risk of Division 6.1 or Class 8;
    (iii) The capacity of the packaging is not more than 30 L (7.9 
gallons); and
    (iv) The viscosity and flash point are in accordance with the 
following table:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                          Jet
        Flow time t in seconds         diameter      Flash point c.c.
                                         in mm
------------------------------------------------------------------------
20
Sec. 173.124  Class 4, Divisions 4.1, 4.2 and 4.3--Definitions.

    (a) Division 4.1 (Flammable Solid). For the purposes of this 
subchapter, flammable solid (Division 4.1) means any of the following 
three types of materials:
    (1) Desensitized explosives that--
    (i) When dry are Explosives of Class 1 other than those of 
compatibility group A, which are wetted with sufficient water, alcohol, 
or plasticizer to suppress explosive properties; and
    (ii) Are specifically authorized by name either in the 
Sec. 172.101Table or have been assigned a shipping name and hazard class 
by the Associate Administrator under the provisions of--
    (A) An exemption issued under subchapter A of this chapter; or
    (B) An approval issued under Sec. 173.56(i) of this part.
    (2)(i) Self-reactive materials are materials that are thermally 
unstable and that can undergo a strongly exothermic decomposition even 
without participation of oxygen (air). A material is excluded from this 
definition if any of the following applies:
    (A) The material meets the definition of an explosive as prescribed 
in subpart C of this part, in which case it must be classed as an 
explosive;
    (B) The material is forbidden from being offered for transportation 
according to Sec. 172.101 of this subchapter or Sec. 173.21;
    (C) The material meets the definition of an oxidizer or organic 
peroxide as prescribed in subpart D of this part, in which case it must 
be so classed;
    (D) The material meets one of the following conditions:
    (1) Its heat of decomposition is less than 300 J/g; or
    (2) Its self-accelerating decomposition temperature (SADT) is 
greater than 75  deg.C (167  deg.F) for a 50 kg package; or

[[Page 479]]

    (E) The Associate Administrator has determined that the material 
does not present a hazard which is associated with a Division 4.1 
material.
    (ii) Generic types. Division 4.1 self-reactive materials are 
assigned to a generic system consisting of seven types. A self-reactive 
substance identified by technical name in the Self-Reactive Materials 
Table in Sec. 173.224 is assigned to a generic type in accordance with 
that table. Self-reactive materials not identified in the Self-Reactive 
Materials Table in Sec. 173.224 are assigned to generic types under the 
procedures of paragraph (a)(2)(iii) of this section.
    (A) Type A. Self-reactive material type A is a self-reactive 
material which, as packaged for transportation, can detonate or 
deflagrate rapidly. Transportation of type A self-reactive material is 
forbidden.
    (B) Type B. Self-reactive material type B is a self-reactive 
material which, as packaged for transportation, neither detonates nor 
deflagrates rapidly, but is liable to undergo a thermal explosion in a 
package.
    (C) Type C. Self-reactive material type C is a self-reactive 
material which, as packaged for transportation, neither detonates nor 
deflagrates rapidly and cannot undergo a thermal explosion.
    (D) Type D. Self-reactive material type D is a self-reactive 
material which--
    (1) Detonates partially, does not deflagrate rapidly and shows no 
violent effect when heated under confinement;
    (2) Does not detonate at all, deflagrates slowly and shows no 
violent effect when heated under confinement; or
    (3) Does not detonate or deflagrate at all and shows a medium effect 
when heated under confinement.
    (E) Type E. Self-reactive material type E is a self-reactive 
material which, in laboratory testing, neither detonates nor deflagrates 
at all and shows only a low or no effect when heated under confinement.
    (F) Type F. Self-reactive material type F is a self-reactive 
material which, in laboratory testing, neither detonates in the 
cavitated state nor deflagrates at all and shows only a low or no effect 
when heated under confinement as well as low or no explosive power.
    (G) Type G. Self-reactive material type G is a self-reactive 
material which, in laboratory testing, does not detonate in the 
cavitated state, will not deflagrate at all, shows no effect when heated 
under confinement, nor shows any explosive power. A type G self-reactive 
material is not subject to the requirements of this subchapter for self-
reactive material of Division 4.1 provided that it is thermally stable 
(self-accelerating decomposition temperature is 50  deg.C (122  deg.F) 
or higher for a 50 kg (110 pounds) package). A self-reactive material 
meeting all characteristics of type G except thermal stability is 
classed as a type F self-reactive, temperature control material.
    (iii) Procedures for assigning a self-reactive material to a generic 
type. A self-reactive material must be assigned to a generic type based 
on--
    (A) Its physical state (i.e. liquid or solid), in accordance with 
the definition of liquid and solid in Sec. 171.8 of this subchapter;
    (B) A determination as to its control temperature and emergency 
temperature, if any, under the provisions of Sec. 173.21(f);
    (C) Performance of the self-reactive material under the test 
procedures specified in the UN Recommendations on the Transport of 
Dangerous Goods, Tests and Criteria (see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter) 
and the provisions of paragraph (a)(2)(iii) of this section; and
    (D) Except for a self-reactive material which is identified by 
technical name in the Self-Reactive Materials Table in Sec. 173.224(b) 
or a self-reactive material which may be shipped as a sample under the 
provisions of Sec. 173.224, the self-reactive material is approved in 
writing by the Associate Administrator. The person requesting approval 
shall submit to the Associate Administrator the tentative shipping 
description and generic type and--
    (1) All relevant data concerning physical state, temperature 
controls, and tests results; or
    (2) An approval issued for the self-reactive material by the 
competent authority of a foreign government.
    (iv) Tests. The generic type for a self-reactive material must be 
determined

[[Page 480]]

using the testing protocol from Figure 14.2 (Flow Chart for Assigning 
Self-Reactive Substances to Division 4.1) from the UN Recommendations on 
the Transport of Dangerous Goods, Tests and Criteria.
    (3) Readily combustible solids are materials that--
    (i) Are solids which may cause a fire through friction, such as 
matches;
    (ii) Show a burning rate faster than 2.2 mm (0.087 inches) per 
second when tested in accordance with UN Manual of Tests and Criteria; 
or
    (iii) Any metal powders that can be ignited and react over the whole 
length of a sample in 10 minutes or less, when tested in accordance with 
UN Manual of Tests and Criteria.
    (b) Division 4.2 (Spontaneously Combustible Material). For the 
purposes of this subchapter, spontaneously combustible material 
(Division 4.2) means--
    (1) A pyrophoric material. A pyrophoric material is a liquid or 
solid that, even in small quantities and without an external ignition 
source, can ignite within five (5) minutes after coming in contact with 
air when tested according to UN Manual of Tests and Criteria.
    (2) A self-heating material. A self-heating material is a material 
that, when in contact with air and without an energy supply, is liable 
to self-heat. A material of this type which exhibits spontaneous 
ignition or if the temperature of the sample exceeds 200  deg.C (392 
deg.F) during the 24-hour test period when tested in accordance with UN 
Manual of Tests and Criteria, is classed as a Division 4.2 material.
    (c) Division 4.3 (Dangerous when wet material). For the purposes of 
this chapter, dangerous when wet material (Division 4.3) means a 
material that, by contact with water, is liable to become spontaneously 
flammable or to give off flammable or toxic gas at a rate greater than 1 
L per kilogram of the material, per hour, when tested in accordance with 
UN Manual of Tests and Criteria.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66268, 
Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45461, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 173-233, 58 FR 33305, 
June 16, 1993; Amdt. 173-234, 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 173-241, 
59 FR 67507, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173-261, 62 FR 24731, May 6, 1997; 66 
FR 8647, Feb. 1, 2001; 66 FR 45379, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.125  Class 4--Assignment of packing group.

    (a) The packing group of a Class 4 material is assigned in column 
(5) of the Sec. 172.101 table. When the Sec. 172.101 table provides more 
than one packing group for a hazardous material, the packing group shall 
be determined on the basis of test results following test methods given 
in the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria and by applying the appropriate 
criteria given in this section.
    (b) Packing group criteria for readily combustible materials of 
Division 4.1 are as follows:
    (1) Powdered, granular or pasty materials must be classified in 
Division 4.1 when the time of burning of one or more of the test runs, 
in accordance with the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria, is less than 45 
seconds or the rate of burning is more than 2.2 mm/s. Powders of metals 
or metal alloys must be classified in Division 4.1 when they can be 
ignited and the reaction spreads over the whole length of the sample in 
10 minutes or less.
    (2) Packing group criteria for readily combustible materials of 
Division 4.1 are assigned as follows:
    (i) For readily combustible solids (other than metal powders), 
Packing Group II if the burning time is less than 45 seconds and the 
flame passes the wetted zone. Packing Group II must be assigned to 
powders of metal or metal alloys if the zone of reaction spreads over 
the whole length of the sample in 5 minutes or less.
    (ii) For readily combustible solids (other than metal powders), 
Packing

[[Page 481]]

Group III must be assigned if the burning rate time is less than 45 
seconds and the wetted zone stops the flame propagation for at least 4 
minutes. Packing Group III must be assigned to metal powders if the 
reaction spreads over the whole length of the sample in more than 5 
minutes but not more than 10 minutes.
    (c) Packing group criteria for Division 4.2 materials is as follows:
    (1) Pyrophoric liquids and solids of Division 4.2 are assigned to 
Packing Group I.
    (2) A self-heating material is assigned to--
    (i) Packing Group II, if the material gives a positive test result 
when tested with a 25 mm cube size sample at 140  deg.C; or
    (ii) Packing Group III, if--
    (A) A positive test result is obtained in a test using a 100 mm 
sample cube at 140  deg.C and a negative test result is obtained in a 
test using a 25 mm sample cube at 140  deg.C and the substance is 
transported in packagings with a volume of more than 3 cubic meters; or
    (B) A positive test result is obtained in a test using a 100 mm 
sample cube at 120  deg.C and a negative result is obtained in a test 
using a 25 mm sample cube at 140  deg.C and the substance is transported 
in packagings with a volume of more than 450 L; or
    (C) A positive result is obtained in a test using a 100 mm sample 
cube at 100  deg.C and a negative result is obtained in a test using a 
25 mm sample cube at 140  deg.C and the substance is transported in 
packagings with a volume of less than 450 L.
    (d) A Division 4.3 dangerous when wet material is assigned to--
    (1) Packing Group I, if the material reacts vigorously with water at 
ambient temperatures and demonstrates a tendency for the gas produced to 
ignite spontaneously, or which reacts readily with water at ambient 
temperatures such that the rate of evolution of flammable gases is equal 
or greater than 10 L per kilogram of material over any one minute;
    (2) Packing Group II, if the material reacts readily with water at 
ambient temperatures such that the maximum rate of evolution of 
flammable gases is equal to or greater than 20 L per kilogram of 
material per hour, and which does not meet the criteria for Packing 
Group I; or
    (3) Packing Group III, if the material reacts slowly with water at 
ambient temperatures such that the maximum rate of evolution of 
flammable gases is greater than 1 L per kilogram of material per hour, 
and which does not meet the criteria for Packing Group I or II.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52634 Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 173-255, 
61 FR 50625, Sept. 26, 1996; Amdt. 173-261, 62 FR 24731, May 6, 1997; 62 
FR 51560, Oct. 1, 1997; 66 FR 45380, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.127  Class 5, Division 5.1--Definition and assignment of packing groups.

    (a) Definition. For the purpose of this subchapter, oxidizer 
(Division 5.1) means a material that may, generally by yielding oxygen, 
cause or enhance the combustion of other materials.
    (1) A solid material is classed as a Division 5.1 material if, when 
tested in accordance with the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria, its mean 
burning time is less than or equal to the burning time of a 3:7 
potassium bromate/cellulose mixture.
    (2) A liquid material is classed as a Division 5.1 material if, when 
tested in accordance with the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria, it 
spontaneously ignites or its mean time for a pressure rise from 690 kPa 
to 2070 kPa gauge is less then the time of a 1:1 nitric acid (65 
percent)/cellulose mixture.
    (b) Assignment of packing groups. (1) The packing group of a 
Division 5.1 material which is a solid shall be assigned using the 
following criteria:
    (i) Packing Group I, for any material which, in either concentration 
tested, exhibits a mean burning time less than the mean burning time of 
a 3:2 potassium bromate/cellulose mixture.
    (ii) Packing Group II, for any material which, in either 
concentration tested, exhibits a mean burning time less than or equal to 
the mean burning time of a 2:3 potassium bromate/cellulose mixture and 
the criteria for Packing Group I are not met.
    (iii) Packing Group III for any material which, in either 
concentration tested, exhibits a mean burning time less than or equal to 
the mean burning

[[Page 482]]

time of a 3:7 potassium bromate/cellulose mixture and the criteria for 
Packing Group I and II are not met.
    (2) The packing group of a Division 5.1 material which is a liquid 
shall be assigned using the following criteria:
    (i) Packing Group I for:
    (A) Any material which spontaneously ignites when mixed with 
cellulose in a 1:1 ratio; or
    (B) Any material which exhibits a mean pressure rise time less than 
the pressure rise time of a 1:1 perchloric acid (50 percent)/cellulose 
mixture.
    (ii) Packing Group II, any material which exhibits a mean pressure 
rise time less than or equal to the pressure rise time of a 1:1 aqueous 
sodium chlorate solution (40 percent)/cellulose mixture and the criteria 
for Packing Group I are not met.
    (iii) Packing Group III, any material which exhibits a mean pressure 
rise time less than or equal to the pressure rise time of a 1:1 nitric 
acid (65 percent)/cellulose mixture and the criteria for Packing Group I 
and II are not met.

[Amdt. 173-261, 62 FR 24732, May 6, 1997]



Sec. 173.128  Class 5, Division 5.2--Definitions and types.

    (a) Definitions. For the purposes of this subchapter, organic 
peroxide (Division 5.2) means any organic compound containing oxygen (O) 
in the bivalent -O-O- structure and which may be considered a derivative 
of hydrogen peroxide, where one or more of the hydrogen atoms have been 
replaced by organic radicals, unless any of the following paragraphs 
applies:
    (1) The material meets the definition of an explosive as prescribed 
in subpart C of this part, in which case it must be classed as an 
explosive;
    (2) The material is forbidden from being offered for transportation 
according to Sec. 172.101 of this subchapter or Sec. 173.21;
    (3) The Associate Administrator has determined that the material 
does not present a hazard which is associated with a Division 5.2 
material; or
    (4) The material meets one of the following conditions:
    (i) For materials containing no more than 1.0 percent hydrogen 
peroxide, the available oxygen, as calculated using the equation in 
paragraph (a)(4)(ii) of this section, is not more than 1.0 percent, or
    (ii) For materials containing more than 1.0 percent but not more 
than 7.0 percent hydrogen peroxide, the available oxygen, content 
(Oa) is not more than 0.5 percent, when determined using the 
equation:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC13NO91.031

where, for a material containing k species of organic peroxides:

ni = number of -O-O- groups per molecule of the i th species
ci = concentration (mass percent) of the i th species
mi = molecular mass of the i th species

    (b) Generic types. Division 5.2 organic peroxides are assigned to a 
generic system which consists of seven types. An organic peroxide 
identified by technical name in the Organic Peroxides Table in 
Sec. 173.225 is assigned to a generic type in accordance with that 
table. Organic peroxides not identified in the Organic Peroxides table 
are assigned to generic types under the procedures of paragraph (c) of 
this section.
    (1) Type A. Organic peroxide type A is an organic peroxide which can 
detonate or deflagrate rapidly as packaged for transport. Transportation 
of type A organic peroxides is forbidden.
    (2) Type B. Organic peroxide type B is an organic peroxide which, as 
packaged for transport, neither detonates nor deflagrates rapidly, but 
can undergo a thermal explosion.
    (3) Type C. Organic peroxide type C is an organic peroxide which, as 
packaged for transport, neither detonates nor deflagrates rapidly and 
cannot undergo a thermal explosion.
    (4) Type D. Organic peroxide type D is an organic peroxide which--
    (i) Detonates only partially, but does not deflagrate rapidly and is 
not affected by heat when confined;
    (ii) Does not detonate, deflagrates slowly, and shows no violent 
effect if heated when confined; or
    (iii) Does not detonate or deflagrate, and shows a medium effect 
when heated under confinement.
    (5) Type E. Organic peroxide type E is an organic peroxide which 
neither detonates nor deflagrates and shows low,

[[Page 483]]

or no, effect when heated under confinement.
    (6) Type F. Organic peroxide type F is an organic peroxide which 
will not detonate in a cavitated state, does not deflagrate, shows only 
a low, or no, effect if heated when confined, and has low, or no, 
explosive power.
    (7) Type G. Organic peroxide type G is an organic peroxide which 
will not detonate in a cavitated state, will not deflagrate at all, 
shows no effect when heated under confinement, and shows no explosive 
power. A type G organic peroxide is not subject to the requirements of 
this subchapter for organic peroxides of Division 5.2 provided that it 
is thermally stable (self-accelerating decomposition temperature is 50 
deg.C (122  deg.F) or higher for a 50 kg (110 pounds) package). An 
organic peroxide meeting all characteristics of type G except thermal 
stability and requiring temperature control is classed as a type F, 
temperature control organic peroxide.
    (c) Procedure for assigning an organic peroxide to a generic type. 
An organic peroxide shall be assigned to a generic type based on--
    (1) Its physical state (i.e., liquid or solid), in accordance with 
the definitions for liquid and solid in Sec. 171.8 of this subchapter;
    (2) A determination as to its control temperature and emergency 
temperature, if any, under the provisions of Sec. 173.21(f); and
    (3) Performance of the organic peroxide under the test procedures 
specified in the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria, and the provisions of 
paragraph (d) of this section.
    (d) Approvals. (1) An organic peroxide must be approved, in writing, 
by the Associate Administrator, before being offered for transportation 
or transported, including assignment of a generic type and shipping 
description, except for--
    (i) An organic peroxide which is identified by technical name in the 
Organic Peroxides Table in Sec. 173.225(b);
    (ii) A mixture of organic peroxides prepared according to 
Sec. 173.225(c); or
    (iii) An organic peroxide which may be shipped as a sample under the 
provisions of Sec. 173.225(c).
    (2) A person applying for an approval must submit all relevant data 
concerning physical state, temperature controls, and tests results or an 
approval issued for the organic peroxide by the competent authority of a 
foreign government.
    (e) Tests. The generic type for an organic peroxide shall be 
determined using the testing protocol from Figure 20.1(a) 
(Classification and Flow Chart Scheme for Organic Peroxides) from the UN 
Manual of Tests and Criteria (see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66268, 
Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-234, 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 173-241, 
59 FR 67508, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173-261, 62 FR 24732, May 6, 1997; 65 
FR 58629, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 8647, Feb. 1, 2001; 66 FR 45379, Aug. 
28, 2001]



Sec. 173.129  Class 5, Division 5.2--Assignment of packing group.

    All Division 5.2 materials are assigned to Packing Group II in 
column 5 of the Sec. 172.101 table.



Sec. 173.132  Class 6, Division 6.1--Definitions.

    (a) For the purpose of this subchapter, poisonous material (Division 
6.1) means a material, other than a gas, which is known to be so toxic 
to humans as to afford a hazard to health during transportation, or 
which, in the absence of adequate data on human toxicity:
    (1) Is presumed to be toxic to humans because it falls within any 
one of the following categories when tested on laboratory animals 
(whenever possible, animal test data that has been reported in the 
chemical literature should be used):
    (i) Oral Toxicity. A liquid with an LD50 for acute oral 
toxicity of not more than 500 mg/kg or a solid with an LD50 
for acute oral toxicity of not more than 200 mg/kg.
    (ii) Dermal Toxicity. A material with an LD50 for acute 
dermal toxicity of not more than 1000 mg/kg.
    (iii) Inhalation Toxicity. (A) A dust or mist with an 
LC50 for acute toxicity on inhalation of not more than 10 mg/
L; or
    (B) A material with a saturated vapor concentration in air at 
20 deg.C (68 deg.F) greater than or equal to one-fifth of the 
LC50 for acute toxicity on inhalation of vapors and with an 
LC50 for

[[Page 484]]

acute toxicity on inhalation of vapors of not more than 5000 mL/mm\3\; 
or
    (2) Is an irritating material, with properties similar to tear gas, 
which causes extreme irritation, especially in confined spaces.
    (b) For the purposes of this subchapter--
    (1) LD50 for acute oral toxicity means that dose of the 
material administered to both male and female young adult albino rats 
which causes death within 14 days in half the animals tested. The number 
of animals tested must be sufficient to give statistically valid results 
and be in conformity with good pharmacological practices. The result is 
expressed in mg/kg body mass.
    (2) LD50 for acute dermal toxicity means that dose of the 
material which, administered by continuous contact for 24 hours with the 
shaved intact skin (avoiding abrading) of an albino rabbit, causes death 
within 14 days in half of the animals tested. The number of animals 
tested must be sufficient to give statistically valid results and be in 
conformity with good pharmacological practices. The result is expressed 
in mg/kg body mass.
    (3) LC50 for acute toxicity on inhalation means that 
concentration of vapor, mist, or dust which, administered by continuous 
inhalation for one hour to both male and female young adult albino rats, 
causes death within 14 days in half of the animals tested. If the 
material is administered to the animals as a dust or mist, more than 90 
percent of the particles available for inhalation in the test must have 
a diameter of 10 microns or less if it is reasonably foreseeable that 
such concentrations could be encountered by a human during transport. 
The result is expressed in mg/L of air for dusts and mists or in mL/m\3\ 
of air (parts per million) for vapors. See Sec. 173.133(b) for 
LC50 determination for mixtures and for limit tests.
    (i) When provisions of this subchapter require the use of the 
LC50 for acute toxicity on inhalation of dusts and mists 
based on a one-hour exposure and such data is not available, the 
LC50 for acute toxicity on inhalation based on a four-hour 
exposure may be multiplied by four and the product substituted for the 
one-hour LC50 for acute toxicity on inhalation.
    (ii) When the provisions of this subchapter require the use of the 
LC50 for acute toxicity on inhalation of vapors based on a 
one-hour exposure and such data is not available, the LC50 
for acute toxicity on inhalation based on a four-hour exposure may be 
multiplied by two and the product substituted for the one-hour 
LC50 for acute toxicity on inhalation.
    (iii) A solid substance should be tested if at least 10 percent of 
its total mass is likely to be dust in a respirable range, e.g. the 
aerodynamic diameter of that particle-fraction is 10 microns or less. A 
liquid substance should be tested if a mist is likely to be generated in 
a leakage of the transport containment. In carrying out the test both 
for solid and liquid substances, more than 90% (by mass) of a specimen 
prepared for inhalation toxicity testing must be in the respirable range 
as defined in this paragraph (b)(3)(iii).
    (c) For purposes of classifying and assigning packing groups to 
mixtures possessing oral or dermal toxicity hazards according to the 
criteria in Sec. 173.133(a)(1), it is necessary to determine the acute 
LD50 of the mixture. If a mixture contains more than one 
active constituent, one of the following methods may be used to 
determine the oral or dermal LD50 of the mixture:
    (1) Obtain reliable acute oral and dermal toxicity data on the 
actual mixture to be transported;
    (2) If reliable, accurate data is not available, classify the 
formulation according to the most hazardous constituent of the mixture 
as if that constituent were present in the same concentration as the 
total concentration of all active constituents; or
    (3) If reliable, accurate data is not available, apply the formula:
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR06MY97.000
    
where:

C = the % concentration of constituent A, B ... Z in the mixture;
T = the oral LD50 values of constituent A, B ... Z;
TM = the oral LD50 value of the mixture.


[[Page 485]]


    Note to formula in paragraph (c)(3): This formula also may be used 
for dermal toxicities provided that this information is available on the 
same species for all constituents. The use of this formula does not take 
into account any potentiation or protective phenomena.

    (d) The foregoing categories shall not apply if the Associate 
Administrator has determined that the physical characteristics of the 
material or its probable hazards to humans as shown by documented 
experience indicate that the material will not cause serious sickness or 
death.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66268, 
Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-234, 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 173-261, 
62 FR 24732, May 6, 1997; 62 FR 45702, August 28, 1997; 65 FR 58629, 
Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45379, 45382, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.133  Assignment of packing group and hazard zones for Division 6.1 materials.

    (a) The packing group of Division 6.1 materials shall be as assigned 
in column 5 of the Sec. 172.101 table. When the Sec. 172.101 table 
provides more than one packing group or hazard zone for a hazardous 
material, the packing group and hazard zone shall be determined by 
applying the following criteria:
    (1) The packing group assignment for routes of administration other 
than inhalation of vapors shall be in accordance with the following 
table:

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                 Oral toxicity LD50                                 Inhalation toxicity by dusts
         Packing Group                 (mg/kg)        Dermal toxicity LD50 (mg/kg)      and mists LC50 (mg/L)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
I..............................  [le] 5............  [le] 40                        [le] 0.5
II.............................   5,       40, [le] 200        0.5, [le]2
                                  [le] 50.
III............................  solids:  200, [le] 1000      2, [le] 10
                                  eq> 50, [le] 200;
                                  liquids:  50, [le] 500.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (2)(i) The packing group and hazard zone assignments for liquids 
(see Sec. 173.115(c) of this subpart for gases) based on inhalation of 
vapors shall be in accordance with the following table:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
            Packing Group               Vapor concentration and toxicity
------------------------------------------------------------------------
I (Hazard Zone A)....................  V [ge] 500 LC50 and LC50 [le] 200
                                        mL/M\3\.
I (Hazard Zone B)....................  V [ge] 10 LC50; LC50 [le] 1000 mL/
                                        m\3\; and the criteria for
                                        Packing Group I, Hazard Zone A
                                        are not met.
II...................................  V [ge] LC50; LC50 [le] 3000 mL/
                                        m\3\; and the criteria for
                                        Packing Group I, are not met.
III..................................  V [ge] .2 LC50; LC50 [le] 5000 mL/
                                        m\3\; and the criteria for
                                        Packing Groups I and II, are not
                                        met.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note 1: V is the saturated vapor concentration in air of the material in
  mL/m\3\ at 20C\ and standard atmospheric pressure.
Note 2: A liquid in Division 6.1 meeting criteria for Packing Group I,
  Hazard Zones A or B stated in paragraph (a)(2) of this section is a
  material poisonous by inhalation subject to the additional hazard
  communication requirements in Secs.  172.203(m)(2), 172.313 and table
  1 of Sec.  172.504(e) of this subchapter.

    (ii) These criteria are represented graphically in Figure 1:

[[Page 486]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.063

    (3) When the packing group determined by applying these criteria is 
different for two or more (oral, dermal or inhalation) routes of 
administration, the packing group assigned to the material shall be that 
indicated for the highest degree of toxicity for any of the routes of 
administration.

[[Page 487]]

    (4) Notwithstanding the provisions of this paragraph, the packing 
group and hazard zone of a tear gas substance is as assigned in column 5 
of the Sec. 172.101 table.
    (b) The packing group and hazard zone for Division 6.1 mixtures that 
are poisonous (toxic) by inhalation may be determined by one of the 
following methods:
    (1) Where LC50 data is available on each of the poisonous 
(toxic) substances comprising the mixture--
    (i) The LC50 of the mixture is estimated using the 
formula:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.064

where

fi = mole fraction of the ith component substance 
of the liquid.
LC50i = mean lethal concentration of the 
ith component substance in mL/m3

    (ii) The volatility of each component substance is estimated using 
the formula:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR28SE01.023

where:

Pi = partial pressure of the ith component substance in kPa 
at 20  deg.C and one atmospheric pressure. Pi may be calculated 
according to Raoult's Law using appropriate activity coefficients. Where 
activity coefficients are not available, the coefficient may be assumed 
to be 1.0.

    (iii) The ratio of the volatility to the LC50 is 
calculated using the formula:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.066

    (iv) Using the calculated values LC50 (mixture) and R, 
the packing group for the mixture is determined as follows:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
     Packaging group (hazard zone)         Ratio of volatility and LC50
------------------------------------------------------------------------
I (Hazard Zone A)......................  R [ge] 500 and LC50 (mixture)
                                          [le] 200 mL/m\3\.
I (Hazard Zone B)......................  R [ge] 10 and LC50 (mixture)
                                          [le] 1000 ml/m\3\; and the
                                          criteria for Packing Group I,
                                          Hazard Zone A, are not met.
II.....................................  R [ge] 1 and LC50 (mixture)
                                          [le] 3000 ml/m\3\; and the
                                          criteria for Packing Group I,
                                          Hazard Zones A and B are not
                                          met.
III....................................  R [ge] 1/5 and LC50 (mixture)
                                          [le] 5000 mL/m\3\; and the
                                          criteria for Packing Group I,
                                          Hazard Zones A and B, and
                                          Packing Group II are not met.
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (2) In the absence of LC50 data on the poisonous (toxic) 
constituent substances, the mixture may be assigned a packing group and 
hazard zone based on the following simplified threshold toxicity tests. 
When these threshold tests are used, the most restrictive packing group 
and hazard zone must be determined and used for the transportation of 
the mixture.
    (i) A mixture is assigned to Packing Group I, Hazard Zone A only if 
both the following criteria are met:
    (A) A sample of the liquid mixture is vaporized and diluted with air 
to create a test atmosphere of 200 mL/m\3\ vaporized mixture in air. Ten 
albino rats (five male and five female) are exposed to the test 
atmosphere as determined by an analytical method appropriate for the 
material being classified for one hour and observed for fourteen days. 
If five or more of the animals die within the fourteen-day observation 
period, the mixture is presumed to have an LC50 equal to or 
less than 200 mL/m\3\.
    (B) A sample of the vapor in equilibrium with the liquid mixture is 
diluted with 499 equal volumes of air to form a test atmosphere. Ten 
albino rats (five male and five female) are exposed to the test 
atmosphere for one hour and observed for fourteen days. If five or more 
of the animals die within the fourteen-day observation period, the 
mixture is presumed to have a volatility equal to or greater than 500 
times the mixture LC50.
    (ii) A mixture is assigned to Packing Group I, Hazard Zone B only if 
both the following criteria are met, and the mixture does not meet the 
criteria for Packing Group I, Hazard Zone A:
    (A) A sample of the liquid mixture is vaporized and diluted with air 
to create a test atmosphere of 1000 mL/m\3\ vaporized mixture in air. 
Ten albino rats (five male and five female) are exposed to the test 
atmosphere for one hour and observed for fourteen days. If five

[[Page 488]]

or more of the animals die within the fourteen-day observation period, 
the mixture is presumed to have an LC50 equal to or less than 
1000 mL/m\3\.
    (B) A sample of the vapor in equilibrium with the liquid mixture is 
diluted with 9 equal volumes of air to form a test atmosphere. Ten 
albino rats (five male and five female) are exposed to the test 
atmosphere for one hour and observed for fourteen days. If five or more 
of the animals die within the fourteen-day observation period, the 
mixture is presumed to have a volatility equal to or greater than 10 
times the mixture LC50.
    (iii) A mixture is assigned to Packing Group II only if both the 
following criteria are met, and the mixture does not meet the criteria 
for Packing Group I (Hazard Zones A or B):
    (A) A sample of the liquid mixture is vaporized and diluted with air 
to create a test atmosphere of 3000 mL/m\3\ vaporized mixture in air. 
Ten albino rats (five male and five female) are exposed to the test 
atmosphere for one hour and observed for fourteen days. If five or more 
of the animals die within the fourteen-day observation period, the 
mixture is presumed to have an LC50 equal to or less than 
3000 mL/m\3\.
    (B) A sample of the vapor in equilibrium with the liquid mixture is 
used to form a test atmosphere. Ten albino rats (five male and five 
female) are exposed to the test atmosphere for one hour and observed for 
fourteen days. If five or more of the animals die within the fourteen-
day observation period, the mixture is presumed to have a volatility 
equal to or greater than the mixture LC50.
    (iv) A mixture is assigned to Packing Group III only if both the 
following criteria are met, and the mixture does not meet the criteria 
for Packing Groups I (Hazard Zones A or B) or Packing Group II (Hazard 
Zone C):
    (A) A sample of the liquid mixture is vaporized and diluted with air 
to create a test atmosphere of 5000 mL/m\3\ vaporized mixture in air. 
Ten albino rats (five male and five female) are exposed to the test 
atmosphere for one hour and observed for fourteen days. If five or more 
of the animals die within the fourteen-day observation period, the 
mixture is presumed to have an LC50 equal to or less than 
5000 mL/m\3\.
    (B) The vapor pressure of the liquid mixture is measured and if the 
vapor concentration is equal to or greater than 1000 mL/m\3\, the 
mixture is presumed to have a volatility equal to or greater than \1/5\ 
the mixture LC50.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66268-
66270, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45461-45463, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 173-234, 58 
FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 173-138, 59 FR 49133, Sept. 26, 1994; 
Amdt. 173-255, 61 FR 50626, Sept. 26, 1996; 66 FR 45183, 45380, Aug. 28, 
2001; 66 FR 49556, Sept. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.134  Class 6, Division 6.2--Definitions, exceptions and packing group assignments.

    (a) Definitions. For the purposes of this subchapter, the categories 
of materials that constitute Division 6.2 are defined as follows:
    (1) An infectious substance means a viable microorganism, or its 
toxin, that causes or may cause disease in humans or animals, and 
includes those agents listed in 42 CFR 72.3 of the regulations of the 
Department of Health and Human Services and any other agent that causes 
or may cause severe, disabling or fatal disease. The terms infectious 
substance and etiologic agent are synonymous.
    (2) A diagnostic specimen means any human or animal material 
including, but not limited to, excreta, secreta, blood, blood 
components, tissue, and tissue fluids, being shipped for purposes of 
diagnosis.
    (3) A biological product means a material that is prepared and 
manufactured in accordance with the provisions of 9 CFR part 102 
(Licenses for biological products), 9 CFR part 103 (Experimental 
products, distribution, and evaluation of biological products prior to 
licensing), 9 CFR part 104 (Permits for biological products), 21 CFR 
part 312 (Investigational new drug application), or 21 CFR parts 600 to 
680 (Biologics).
    (4) A regulated medical waste means a waste or reusable material, 
other than a culture or stock of an infectious substance, that contains 
an infectious substance and is generated in--
    (i) The diagnosis, treatment or immunization of human beings or 
animals;

[[Page 489]]

    (ii) Research pertaining to the diagnosis, treatment or immunization 
of human beings or animals; or
    (iii) The production or testing of biological products.
    (b) Exceptions. (1) The following are not subject to any 
requirements of this subchapter if the items as packaged do not contain 
any material otherwise subject to the requirements of this subchapter:
    (i) Biological products;
    (ii) Diagnostic specimens;
    (iii) Laundry or medical equipment that conforms to 29 CFR 1910.1030 
of the regulations of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration 
of the Department of Labor;
    (iv) A material, including waste, that previously contained an 
infectious substance and has been treated by steam sterilization, 
chemical disinfection, or other appropriate method, so that it no longer 
poses the hazard of an infectious substance;
    (v) Any waste material, including garbage, trash and sanitary waste 
in septic tanks, derived from households, including but not limited to 
single and multiple residences, hotels and motels;
    (vi) Corpses, remains and anatomical parts that are intended for 
ceremonial interment or cremation; and
    (vii) Animal waste generated in animal husbandry or food production.
    (2) A hazardous waste is not subject to regulation as a regulated 
medical waste.
    (3) A regulated medical waste that is transported by a private or 
contract carrier is excepted from--
    (i) The requirement of an ``INFECTIOUS SUBSTANCE'' label if the 
outer packaging is marked with a ``BIOHAZARD'' marking in accordance 
with 29 CFR 1910.1030; and
    (ii) For other than a waste culture or stock of an infectious 
substance, the specific packaging requirements of Sec. 173.197, if 
packaged in a rigid non-bulk packaging conforming to--
    (A) The general packaging requirements of Secs. 173.24 and 173.24a; 
and
    (B) Packaging requirements specified in 29 CFR 1910.1030.
    (4) A waste culture or stock of infectious substances may be offered 
for transportation and transported as a regulated medical waste when the 
culture or stock--
    (i) Conforms to Biosafety Level 1, 2 or 3, as defined in HHS 
Publication No. (CDC) 93-8395, Biosafety in Microbiological and 
Biomedical Laboratories. 3rd Edition, May 1993, Section II;
    (ii) Is packaged in accordance with requirements specified in 
Sec. 173.197; and
    (iii) Is transported by a private or contract carrier using a 
vehicle dedicated to the transportation of medical waste.
    (c) Assignment of packing groups and applicable packaging sections. 
(1) Division 6.2 materials, other than regulated medical waste, are not 
assigned a packing group. Packaging requirements for these materials are 
prescribed in Sec. 173.196.
    (2) Except as otherwise provided, regulated medical waste is 
assigned to Packing Group II and must be packaged as specified in 
Sec. 173.197.

[Amdt. 173-247, 60 FR 48787, Sept. 20, 1995, as amended by Amdt. 173-
255, 61 FR 50626, Sept. 26, 1996]

    Effective Date Note: At 67 FR 53138, Aug. 14, 2002, Sec. 173.134 was 
revised, effective Oct. 1, 2002. At 67 FR 54967, Aug. 27, 2002, the 
effective date was corrected to Feb. 14, 2003. For the convenience of 
the user, the revised text is set forth as follows:

Sec. 173.134  Class 6, Division 6.2--Definitions and exceptions.

    (a) Definitions and classification criteria. For purposes of this 
subchapter, the following definitions and classification criteria apply:
    (1) Division 6.2 (infectious substance) means a material known to 
contain or suspected of containing a pathogen. A pathogen is a virus or 
micro-organism (including its viruses, plasmids, or other genetic 
elements, if any) or a proteinaceous infectious particle (prion) that 
has the potential to cause disease in humans or animals. A Division 6.2 
material must be assigned to a risk group in accordance with this 
paragraph (a). Assignment to a risk group is based on known medical 
condition and history of the source patient or animal, endemic local 
conditions, symptoms of the source patient or animal, or professional 
judgement concerning individual circumstances of the source patient or 
animal. Infectious substances are subject to applicable requirements in 
42 CFR Part 72--Interstate Shipment of Etiologic Agents.
    (2) Biological product means a virus, therapeutic serum, toxin, 
antitoxin, vaccine, blood, blood component or derivative, allergenic 
product, or analogous product used in the prevention, diagnosis, 
treatment, or cure

[[Page 490]]

of diseases in humans or animals. A biological product includes a 
material manufactured and distributed in accordance with one of the 
following provisions: 9 CFR part 102 (Licenses for Biological Products); 
9 CFR part 103 (Experimental Products, Distribution, and Evaluation of 
Biological Products Prior to Licensing); 9 CFR part 104 (Permits for 
Biological Products); 21 CFR part 312 (Investigational New Drug 
Application); 21 CFR part 314 (Applications for FDA Approval to Market a 
New Drug); 21 CFR parts 600 to 680 (Biologics); or 21 CFR part 812 
(Investigational Device Exemptions). A biological product known to 
contain or suspected of containing a pathogen in Risk Group 2, 3, or 4 
must be classed as Division 6.2, described as an infectious substance, 
and assigned to UN 2814 or UN 2900, as appropriate, unless otherwise 
excepted.
    (3) Cultures and stocks means a material prepared and maintained for 
growth and storage and containing a Risk Group 2, 3 or 4 infectious 
substance.
    (4) Diagnostic specimen means any human or animal material, 
including excreta, secreta, blood and its components, tissue, and tissue 
fluids being transported for diagnostic or investigational purposes, but 
excluding live infected humans or animals. A diagnostic specimen is not 
assigned a UN identification number unless the source patient or animal 
has or may have a serious human or animal disease from a Risk Group 4 
pathogen, in which case it must be classed as Division 6.2, described as 
an infectious substance, and assigned to UN 2814 or UN 2900, as 
appropriate. Assignment to UN 2814 or UN 2900 is based on known medical 
condition and history of the patient or animal, endemic local 
conditions, symptoms of the source patient or animal, or professional 
judgement concerning individual circumstances of the source patient or 
animal.
    (5) Regulated medical waste means a waste or reusable material known 
to contain or suspected of containing an infectious substance in Risk 
Group 2 or 3 and generated in the diagnosis, treatment, or immunization 
of human beings or animals; research on the diagnosis, treatment or 
immunization of human beings or animals; or the production or testing of 
biological products. Regulated medical waste containing an infectious 
substance in Risk Group 4 must be classed as Division 6.2, described as 
an infectious substance, and assigned to UN 2814 or UN 2900, as 
appropriate.
    (6) Risk group means a ranking of a micro-organism's ability to 
cause injury through disease. A risk group is defined by criteria 
developed by the World Health Organization (WHO) based on the severity 
of the disease caused by the organism, the mode and relative ease of 
transmission, the degree of risk to both an individual and a community, 
and the reversibility of the disease through the availability of known 
and effective preventative agents and treatment. There is no 
relationship between a risk group and a packing group. The criteria for 
each risk group according to the level of risk are as follows:

                            Risk Group Table
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                            Risk to        Risk to the
   Risk group           Pathogen          individuals       community
------------------------------------------------------------------------
4...............  A pathogen that       High...........  High.
                   usually causes
                   serious human or
                   animal disease and
                   that can be readily
                   transmitted from
                   one individual to
                   another, directly
                   or indirectly, and
                   for which effective
                   treatments and
                   preventive measures
                   are not usually
                   available.
3...............  A pathogen that       High...........  Low.
                   usually causes
                   serious human or
                   animal disease but
                   does not ordinarily
                   spread from one
                   infected individual
                   to another, and for
                   which effective
                   treatments and
                   preventive measures
                   are available.
2...............  A pathogen that can   Moderate.......  Low.
                   cause human or
                   animal disease but
                   is unlikely to be a
                   serious hazard,
                   and, while capable
                   of causing serious
                   infection on
                   exposure, for which
                   there are effective
                   treatments and
                   preventive measures
                   available and the
                   risk of spread of
                   infection is
                   limited.
1...............  A micro-organism      None or very     None or very
                   that is unlikely to   low.             low.
                   cause human or
                   animal disease. A
                   material containing
                   only such micro-
                   organisms is not
                   subject to the
                   requirements of
                   this subchapter.
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (7) Sharps means any object contaminated with a pathogen or that may 
become contaminated with a pathogen through handling or during 
transportation and also capable of cutting or penetrating skin or a 
packaging material. Sharps includes needles, syringes, scalpels, broken 
glass, culture slides, culture dishes, broken capillary tubes, broken 
rigid plastic, and exposed ends of dental wires.

[[Page 491]]

    (8) Toxin means a Division 6.1 material from a plant, animal, or 
bacterial source. A toxin containing an infectious substance or a toxin 
contained in an infectious substance must be classed as Division 6.2, 
described as an infectious substance, and assigned to UN 2814 or UN 
2900, as appropriate.
    (9) Used health care product means a medical, diagnostic, or 
research device or piece of equipment, or a personal care product used 
by consumers, medical professionals, or pharmaceutical providers that 
does not meet the definition of a diagnostic specimen, biological 
product, or regulated medical waste, is contaminated with potentially 
infectious body fluids or materials, and is not decontaminated or 
disinfected to remove or mitigate the infectious hazard prior to 
transportation.
    (b) Exceptions. The following are not subject to the requirements of 
this subchapter as Division 6.2 materials:
    (1) A biological product known to contain or suspected of containing 
a micro-organism in Risk Group 1, or that does not contain a pathogen.
    (2) A diagnostic specimen known to contain or suspected of 
containing a micro-organism in Risk Group 1, or that does not contain a 
pathogen, or a diagnostic specimen in which the pathogen has been 
neutralized or inactivated so it cannot cause disease when exposure to 
it occurs.
    (3) A biological product, including an experimental product or 
component of a product, subject to Federal approval, permit, or 
licensing requirements, such as those required by the Food and Drug 
Administration of the Department of Health and Human Services or the 
U.S. Department of Agriculture.
    (4) Blood collected for the purpose of blood transfusion or the 
preparation of blood products; blood products; tissues or organs 
intended for use in transplant operations; and human cell, tissues, and 
cellular and tissue-based products regulated under authority of the 
Public Health Service Act and/or the Food, Drug, and Cosmetic Act.
    (5) Blood collected for the purpose of blood transfusion or the 
preparation of blood products and sent for testing as part of the 
collection process, except where the person collecting the blood has 
reason to believe it contains an infectious substance, in which case the 
test sample must be shipped in accordance with Sec. 173.199.
    (6) A diagnostic specimen or biological product when transported by 
a private or contract carrier in a motor vehicle used exclusively to 
transport diagnostic specimens or biological products. Medical or 
clinical equipment and laboratory products may be transported aboard the 
same vehicle provided they are properly packaged and secured against 
exposure or contamination. If a diagnostic specimen or biological 
product meets the definition of regulated medical waste in paragraph 
(a)(5) of this section, it must be offered for transportation and 
transported in conformance with the appropriate requirements for 
regulated medical waste.
    (7) Laundry or medical equipment conforming to the regulations of 
the Occupational Safety and Health Administration of the Department of 
Labor in 29 CFR 1910.1030. This exception includes medical equipment 
intended for use, cleaning, or refurbishment, such as reusable surgical 
equipment, or equipment used for testing where the components within 
which the equipment is contained essentially function as packaging. This 
exception does not apply to medical equipment being transported for 
disposal.
    (8) A material, including waste, that previously contained an 
infectious substance that has been treated by steam sterilization, 
chemical disinfection, or other appropriate method, so it no longer 
meets the definition of an infectious substance.
    (9) A living person.
    (10) Any waste or recyclable material, other than regulated medical 
waste, including--
    (i) Garbage and trash derived from hotels, motels, and households, 
including but not limited to single and multiple residences;
    (ii) Sanitary waste or sewage;
    (iii) Sewage sludge or compost;
    (iv) Animal waste generated in animal husbandry or food production; 
or
    (v) Medical waste generated from households and transported in 
accordance with applicable state, local, or tribal requirements.
    (11) Corpses, remains, and anatomical parts intended for interment, 
cremation, or medical research at a college, hospital, or laboratory.
    (12) Forensic material transported on behalf of a U.S. Government, 
state, local or Indian tribal government agency, except that--
    (i) Forensic material known or suspected to contain a Risk Group 2 
or 3 infectious substance must be shipped in a packaging conforming to 
the provisions of Sec. 173.24.
    (ii) Forensic material known or suspected to contain a Risk Group 4 
infectious substance or an infectious substance listed as a select agent 
in 42 CFR Part 72 must be transported in packaging capable of meeting 
the test standards in Sec. 178.609 of this subchapter. The secondary 
packaging must be marked with a BIOHAZARD symbol conforming to 
specifications in 29 CFR 1910.1030(g)(1)(i). An itemized list of 
contents must be enclosed between the secondary packaging and the outer 
packaging.
    (13) Environmental microbiological samples, such as a sample of dust 
from a ventilation system or mold from a wallboard, collected to 
evaluate occupational and residential exposure risks.

[[Page 492]]

    (14) Agricultural products and food as defined in the Federal Food, 
Drug, and Cosmetics Act.
    (c) Exceptions for regulated medical waste. The following provisions 
apply to the transportation of regulated medical waste:
    (1) A regulated medical waste transported by a private or contract 
carrier is excepted from--
    (i) The requirement for an ``INFECTIOUS SUBSTANCE'' label if the 
outer packaging is marked with a ``BIOHAZARD'' marking in accordance 
with 29 CFR 1910.1030; and
    (ii) For other than a waste culture or stock of an infectious 
substance, the specific packaging requirements of this section if 
packaged in a rigid non-bulk packaging conforming to the general 
packaging requirements of Secs. 173.24 and 173.24a and packaging 
requirements specified in 29 CFR 1910.1030.
    (2) A waste culture or stock of a Risk Group 2 or 3 infectious 
substance may be offered for transportation and transported as a 
regulated medical waste when it is packaged in a rigid non-bulk 
packaging conforming to the general packaging requirements of 
Secs. 173.24 and 173.24a and packaging requirements specified in 29 CFR 
1910.1030 and transported by a private or contract carrier using a 
vehicle dedicated to the transportation of regulated medical waste. 
Medical or clinical equipment and laboratory products may be transported 
aboard the same vehicle provided they are properly packaged and secured 
against exposure or contamination.
    (d) If an item listed in paragraph (b) or (c) of this section meets 
the definition of another hazard class or if it is a hazardous 
substance, hazardous waste, or marine pollutant, it must be offered for 
transportation and transported in accordance with applicable 
requirements of this subchapter.



Sec. 173.136  Class 8--Definitions.

    (a) For the purpose of this subchapter, ``corrosive material'' 
(Class 8) means a liquid or solid that causes full thickness destruction 
of human skin at the site of contact within a specified period of time. 
A liquid that has a severe corrosion rate on steel or aluminum based on 
the criteria in Sec. 173.137(c)(2) is also a corrosive material.
    (b) If human experience or other data indicate that the hazard of a 
material is greater or less than indicated by the results of the tests 
specified in paragraph (a) of this section, RSPA may revise its 
classification or make the determination that the material is not 
subject to the requirements of this subchapter.
    (c) Skin corrosion test data produced no later than September 30, 
1995, using the procedures of part 173, appendix A, in effect on 
September 30, 1995 (see 49 CFR part 173, appendix A, revised as of 
October 1, 1994) for appropriate exposure times may be used for 
classification and assignment of packing group for Class 8 materials 
corrosive to skin.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66270, 
Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-234, 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 173-241, 
59 FR 67508, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173-261, 62 FR 24732, May 6, 1997]



Sec. 173.137  Class 8--Assignment of packing group.

    The packing group of Class 8 material is indicated in column 5 of 
the Sec. 172.101 table. When the Sec. 172.101 table provides more than 
one packing group for a Class 8 material, the packing group must be 
determined using data obtained from tests conducted in accordance with 
the 1992 OECD Guideline for Testing of Chemicals, Number 404 ``Acute 
Dermal Irritation/Corrosion'' as follows:
    (a) Packing Group I. Materials that cause full thickness destruction 
of intact skin tissue within an observation period of up to 60 minutes 
starting after the exposure time of three minutes or less.
    (b) Packing Group II. Materials other than those meeting Packing 
Group I criteria that cause full thickness destruction of intact skin 
tissue within an observation period of up to 14 days starting after the 
exposure time of more than three minutes but not more than 60 minutes.
    (c) Packing Group III. Materials, other than those meeting Packing 
Group I or II criteria--
    (1) That cause full thickness destruction of intact skin tissue 
within an observation period of up to 14 days starting after the 
exposure time of more than 60 minutes but not more than 4 hours; or
    (2) That do not cause full thickness destruction of intact skin 
tissue but exhibit a corrosion rate on steel or aluminum surfaces 
exceeding 6.25 mm (0.25 inch) a year at a test temperature of 55  deg.C 
(130  deg.F). For the purpose of testing steel P3 (ISO 9328-1) or a 
similar type, and for testing aluminum, non-clad

[[Page 493]]

types 7075-T6 or AZ5GU-T6 should be used. An acceptable test is 
described in ASTM G 31-72 (Reapproved 1995).

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66270, 
Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-241, 59 FR 67508, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173-261, 
62 FR 24733, May 6, 1997]



Sec. 173.140  Class 9--Definitions.

    For the purposes of this subchapter, miscellaneous hazardous 
material (Class 9) means a material which presents a hazard during 
transportation but which does not meet the definition of any other 
hazard class. This class includes:
    (a) Any material which has an anesthetic, noxious or other similar 
property which could cause extreme annoyance or discomfort to a flight 
crew member so as to prevent the correct performance of assigned duties; 
or
    (b) Any material that meets the definition in Sec. 171.8 of this 
subchapter for an elevated temperature material, a hazardous substance, 
a hazardous waste, or a marine pollutant.

[Amdt. 173-224, 57 FR 45463, Oct. 1, 1992, as amended by Amdt. 173-231, 
57 FR 52939, Nov. 5, 1992; Amdt. 173-233, 58 FR 33305, June 16, 1993]



Sec. 173.141  Class 9--Assignment of packing group.

    The packing group of a Class 9 material is as indicated in column 5 
of the Sec. 172.101 table.



Sec. 173.144  Other Regulated Materials (ORM)--Definitions.

    For the purpose of this subchapter, ``ORM-D material'' means a 
material such as a consumer commodity, which, although otherwise subject 
to the regulations of this subchapter, presents a limited hazard during 
transportation due to its form, quantity and packaging. It must be a 
material for which exceptions are provided in the Sec. 172.101 table. 
Each ORM-D material and category of ORM-D material is listed in the 
Sec. 172.101 table.



Sec. 173.145  Other Regulated Materials--Assignment of packing group.

    Packing groups are not assigned to ORM-D materials.



Sec. 173.150  Exceptions for Class 3 (flammable) and combustible liquids.

    (a) General. Exceptions for hazardous materials shipments in the 
following paragraphs are permitted only if this section is referenced 
for the specific hazardous material in the Sec. 172.101 table of this 
subchapter and the material does not meet the definition of another 
hazard class except Division 6.1, Packing Group III or Class 8, Packing 
Group III.
    (b) Limited quantities. Limited quantities of flammable liquids 
(Class 3) and combustible liquids are excepted from labeling 
requirements, unless offered for transportation or transported by 
aircraft, and the specification packaging requirements of this 
subchapter when packaged in combination packagings according to this 
paragraph. In addition, shipments of limited quantities are not subject 
to subpart F (Placarding) of part 172 of this subchapter. Each package 
must conform to the packaging requirements of subpart B of this part and 
may not exceed 30 kg (66 pounds) gross weight. The following combination 
packagings are authorized:
    (1) For flammable liquids in Packing Group I, inner packagings not 
over 0.5 L (0.1 gallon) net capacity each, packed in strong outer 
packagings;
    (2) For flammable liquids in Packing Group II, inner packagings not 
over 1.0 L (0.3 gallon) net capacity each, packed in strong outer 
packaging; and
    (3) For flammable liquids in Packing Group III and combustible 
liquids, inner packagings not over 5.0 L (1.3 gallons) net capacity 
each, packed in strong outer packagings.
    (c) Consumer commodities. A limited quantity which conforms to the 
provisions of paragraph (b) of this section and is a ``consumer 
commodity'' as defined in Sec. 171.8 of this subchapter, may be renamed 
``Consumer commodity'' and reclassed as ORM-D material. In addition to 
the exceptions provided by paragraph (b) of this section, shipments of 
ORM-D materials are not subject to the shipping paper requirements of 
subpart C of part 172 of this subchapter, unless the material meets the 
definition of a hazardous substance, hazardous waste, marine pollutant, 
or are offered for transportation and

[[Page 494]]

transported by aircraft, and are eligible for the exceptions provided in 
Sec. 173.156.
    (d) Alcoholic beverages. An alcoholic beverage (wine and distilled 
spirits as defined in 27 CFR 4.10 and 5.11) is not subject to the 
requirements of this subchapter if it--
    (1) Contains 24 percent or less alcohol by volume;
    (2) Is in an inner packaging of 5 L (1.3 gallons) or less, and for 
transportation on passenger-carrying aircraft conforms to 
Sec. 175.10(a)(17) of this subchapter as checked or carry-on baggage; or
    (3) Is a Packing Group III alcoholic beverage in a packaging of 250 
L (66 gallons) or less, unless transported by air.
    (e) Aqueous solutions of alcohol. An aqueous solution containing 24 
percent or less alcohol by volume and no other hazardous material--
    (1) May be reclassed as a combustible liquid.
    (2) Is not subject to the requirements of this subchapter if it 
contains no less than 50 percent water.
    (f) Combustible liquids. (1) A flammable liquid with a flash point 
at or above 38  deg.C (100  deg.F) that does not meet the definition of 
any other hazard class may be reclassed as a combustible liquid. This 
provision does not apply to transportation by vessel or aircraft, except 
where other means of transportation is impracticable.
    (2) The requirements in this subchapter do not apply to a material 
classed as a combustible liquid in a non-bulk packaging unless the 
combustible liquid is a hazardous substance, a hazardous waste, or a 
marine pollutant.
    (3) A combustible liquid that is in a bulk packaging or a 
combustible liquid that is a hazardous substance, a hazardous waste, or 
a marine pollutant is not subject to the requirements of this subchapter 
except those pertaining to:
    (i) Shipping papers, waybills, switching orders, and hazardous waste 
manifests;
    (ii) Marking of packages;
    (iii) Display of identification numbers on bulk packages;
    (iv) For bulk packagings only, placarding requirements of subpart F 
of part 172 of this subchapter;
    (v) Carriage aboard aircraft and vessels (for packaging requirements 
for transport by vessel, see Sec. 176.340 of this subchapter);
    (vi) Reporting incidents as prescribed by Secs. 171.15 and 171.16 of 
this subchapter;
    (vii) Packaging requirements of subpart B of this part and, in 
addition, non-bulk packagings must conform with requirements of 
Sec. 173.203; and
    (viii) The requirements of Secs. 173.1, 173.21, 173.24, 173.24a, 
173.24b, 174.1, 177.804, 177.817, 177.834(j), and 177.837(d) of this 
subchapter.
    (4) A combustible liquid that is not a hazardous substance, a 
hazardous waste, or a marine pollutant is not subject to the 
requirements of this subchapter if it is a mixture of one or more 
components that--
    (i) Has a flash point at or above 93  deg.C (200  deg.F),
    (ii) Comprises at least 99 percent of the volume of the mixture, and
    (iii) Is not offered for transportation or transported as a liquid 
at a temperature at or above its flash point.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66270, 
Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45463, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 173-231, 57 FR 52939, 
Nov. 5, 1992; Amdt. 173-233, 58 FR 33305, June 16, 1993; Amdt. 173-241, 
59 FR 67508, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173-242, 60 FR 26806, May 18, 1995; 
Amdt. 173-246, 60 FR 49110, Sept. 21, 1995; 64 FR 51919, Sept. 27, 1999; 
65 FR 50461, Aug. 18, 2000; 66 FR 33430, June 21, 2001; 66 FR 45382, 
Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 15743, Apr. 3, 2002; 67 FR 61013, Sept. 27, 2002]



Sec. 173.151  Exceptions for Class 4.

    (a) General. Exceptions for hazardous materials shipments in the 
following paragraphs are permitted only if this section is referenced 
for the specific hazardous material in the Sec. 172.101 table of this 
subchapter.
    (b) Limited quantities of Division 4.1 flammable solids. Limited 
quantities of flammable solids (Division 4.1) in Packing Groups II and 
III are excepted from labeling, unless offered for transportation or 
transported by aircraft, and the specification packaging requirements of 
this subchapter when packaged in combination packagings according to 
this paragraph. In addition,

[[Page 495]]

shipments of limited quantities are not subject to subpart F 
(Placarding) of part 172 of this subchapter. Each package must conform 
to the packaging requirements of subpart B of this part and may not 
exceed 30 kg (66 pounds) gross weight. The following combination 
packagings are authorized:
    (1) For flammable solids in Packing Group II, inner packagings not 
over 1.0 kg (2.2 pounds) net capacity each, packed in strong outer 
packagings; and
    (2) For flammable solids in Packing Group III, inner packagings not 
over 5.0 kg (11 pounds) net capacity each, packed in strong outer 
packagings.
    (c) Consumer commodities. A limited quantity which conforms to the 
provisions of paragraph (b) of this section, and charcoal briquettes in 
packagings not exceeding 30 kg (66 pounds) gross weight, may be renamed 
``Consumer commodity'' and reclassed as ORM-D material, if the material 
is a ``consumer commodity'' as defined in Sec. 171.8 of this subchapter. 
In addition to the exceptions provided by paragraph (b) of this section, 
shipments are not subject to the shipping paper requirements of subpart 
C of part 172 of this subchapter, unless the material meets the 
definition of a hazardous substance, a hazardous waste, or a marine 
pollutant or unless offered for transportation or transported by 
aircraft, and are eligible for the exceptions provided in Sec. 173.156.
    (d) Limited quantities of Division 4.3 (dangerous when wet) 
material. Limited quantities of Division 4.3 (dangerous when wet) solids 
in Packing Groups II and III are excepted from labeling, unless offered 
for transportation or transported by aircraft, and the specification 
packaging requirements of this subchapter when packaged in combination 
packagings according to this paragraph. In addition, shipments of 
limited quantities are not subject to subpart F (Placarding) of part 172 
of this subchapter. Each package must conform to the packaging 
requirements of subpart B of this part and may not exceed 30 kg (66 
pounds) gross weight. The following combination packagings are 
authorized:
    (1) For Division 4.3 solids in Packing Group II, inner packagings 
not over 0.5 kg (1.1 pound) net capacity each, packed in strong outer 
packagings; and
    (2) For Division 4.3 solids in Packing Group III, inner packagings 
not over 1 kg (2.2 pounds) net capacity each, packed in strong outer 
packagings.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 173-231, 
57 FR 52940, Nov. 5, 1992; Amdt. 173-234, 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; 
Amdt. 173-255, 61 FR 50626, Sept. 26, 1996]



Sec. 173.152  Exceptions for Division 5.1 (oxidizers) and Division 5.2 (organic peroxides).

    (a) General. Exceptions for hazardous materials shipments in the 
following paragraphs are permitted only if this section is referenced 
for the specific hazardous material in the Sec. 172.101 table of this 
subchapter.
    (b) Limited quantities. Limited quantities of oxidizers (Division 
5.1) in Packing Groups II and III and organic peroxides (Division 5.2) 
are excepted from labeling, unless offered or intended for 
transportation by aircraft, and the specification packaging requirements 
of this subchapter when packaged in combination packagings according to 
this paragraph. In addition, shipments of these limited quantities are 
not subject to subpart F of part 172 (Placarding) of this subchapter. 
Each package must conform to the packaging requirements of subpart B of 
this part and may not exceed 30 kg (66 pounds) gross weight. The 
following combination packagings are authorized:
    (1) For oxidizers in Packing Group II, inner packagings not over 1.0 
L (0.3 gallon) net capacity each for liquids or not over 1.0 kg (2.2 
pounds) net capacity each for solids, packed in strong outer packagings.
    (2) For oxidizers in Packing Group III, inner packagings not over 
4.0 L (1 gallon) net capacity each for liquids or not over 5.0 kg (11 
pounds) net capacity each for solids, packed in strong outer packagings.
    (3) For organic peroxides which do not require temperature control 
during transportation--
    (i) For Type D, E, or F organic peroxides, inner packagings not over 
125 mL (4.22 ounces) net capacity each for liquids or 500 g (17.64 
ounces) net capacity

[[Page 496]]

for solids, packed in strong outer packagings.
    (ii) For Type B or C organic peroxides, inner packagings not over 25 
mL (0.845 ounces) net capacity each for liquids or 100 g (3.528 ounces) 
net capacity for solids, packed in strong outer packagings.
    (4) For polyester resin kits consisting of a base material component 
(Class 3, Packing Group II or III) and an activator component (Type C, 
D, E, or F organic peroxide which does not require temperature control)-
-
    (i) The organic peroxide component must be packed in inner 
packagings not over 125 mL (4.22 ounces) net capacity each for liquids 
or 500 g (17.64 ounces) net capacity each for solids;
    (ii) The flammable liquid component must be packed in inner 
packagings not over 1.0 L (0.3 gallons) net capacity each for Packing 
Group II liquids or 5.0 L (1.3 gallons) net capacity each for Packing 
Group III liquids; and
    (iii) The flammable liquid component and the organic peroxide 
component may be packed in the same strong outer packaging provided they 
will not interact dangerously in the event of leakage.
    (c) Consumer commodities. A limited quantity which conforms to the 
provisions of paragraph (b) of this section and is a ``consumer 
commodity'' as defined in Sec. 171.8 of this subchapter, may be renamed 
``Consumer commodity'' and reclassed as ORM-D material. In addition to 
the exceptions provided by paragraph (b) of this section, shipments are 
not subject to the shipping paper requirements of subpart C of part 172 
of this subchapter, unless the material meets the definition of a 
hazardous substance, a hazardous waste, or a marine pollutant or unless 
offered for transportation or transported by aircraft, and are eligible 
for the exceptions provided in Sec. 173.156.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 173-231, 
57 FR 52940, Nov. 5, 1992; Amdt. 173-241, 59 FR 67508, Dec. 29, 1994; 
Amdt. 173-261, 62 FR 24733, May 6, 1997; 66 FR 45381, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.153  Exceptions for Division 6.1 (poisonous materials).

    (a) General. Exceptions for hazardous materials shipments in the 
following paragraphs are permitted only if this section is referenced 
for the specific hazardous material in the Sec. 172.101 table of this 
subchapter.
    (b) Limited quantities of Division 6.1 materials. Limited quantities 
of poisonous materials (Division 6.1) in Packing Group III are excepted 
from the specification packaging requirements of this subchapter when 
packaged in combination packagings according to this paragraph. In 
addition, shipments of these limited quantities are not subject to 
subpart F of part 172 (Placarding) of this subchapter. Each package must 
conform to the packaging requirements of subpart B of this part and may 
not exceed 30 kg (66 pounds) gross weight. The following combination 
packagings are authorized:
    (1) For poisonous liquids, inner packagings not over 4.0 L (1 
gallon) net capacity each, packed in strong outer packagings; and
    (2) For poisonous solids, inner packagings not over 5.0 kg (11 
pounds) net capacity each, packed in strong outer packagings.
    (c) Consumer commodities. The following provisions apply to consumer 
commodities:
    (1) A limited quantity which conforms to the provisions of paragraph 
(b) of this section and is a ``consumer commodity'' as defined in 
Sec. 171.8 of this subchapter, may be renamed ``Consumer commodity'' and 
reclassed as ORM-D material.
    (2) A poisonous material which is a drug or medicine and is a 
``consumer commodity'' as defined in Sec. 171.8 of this subchapter, may 
be renamed ``Consumer commodity'' and reclassed as ORM-D material if 
packaged in a combination packaging not exceeding 30 kg (66 pounds) with 
inner packagings not over 250 mL (8 ounces) net capacity for liquids or 
250 g (8.8 ounces) net capacity for solids packed in strong outer 
packagings. Each package must conform to the packaging requirements of 
subpart B of this part.
    (3) Packages of ORM-D material are excepted from the specification 
packaging requirements of this subchapter and from the labeling 
requirements of subpart E of part 172 of this subchapter. Shipments of 
ORM-D material

[[Page 497]]

are eligible for the exceptions provided in Sec. 173.156 and in 
paragraph (b) of this section and are not subject to the shipping paper 
requirements of subpart C of part 172 of this subchapter, unless the 
material meets the definition of a hazardous substance, a hazardous 
waste, or a marine pollutant or unless offered for transportation or 
transported by aircraft.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 173-231, 
57 FR 52940, Nov. 5, 1992; 66 FR 45381, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.154  Exceptions for Class 8 (corrosive materials).

    (a) General. Exceptions for hazardous materials shipments in the 
following paragraphs are permitted only if this section is referenced 
for the specific hazardous material in the Sec. 172.101 table of this 
subchapter.
    (b) Limited quantities. Limited quantities of corrosive materials 
(Class 8) in Packing Groups II and III are excepted from labeling, 
unless offered or intended for transportation by aircraft, and the 
specification packaging requirements of this subchapter when packaged in 
combination packagings according to this paragraph. In addition, 
shipments of these limited quantities are not subject to subpart F 
(Placarding) of part 172 of this subchapter. Each package must conform 
to the packaging requirements of subpart B of this part and may not 
exceed 30 kg (66 pounds) gross weight. The following combination 
packagings are authorized:
    (1) For corrosive materials in Packing Group II, in inner packagings 
not over 1.0 L (0.3 gallon) net capacity each for liquids or not over 
1.0 kg (2.2 pounds) net capacity each for solids, packed in strong outer 
packagings.
    (2) For corrosive materials in Packing Group III, in inner 
packagings not over 4.0 L (1 gallon) net capacity each for liquids or 
not over 5.0 kg (11 pounds) net capacity each for solids, packed in 
strong outer packagings.
    (c) Consumer commodities. A limited quantity which conforms to the 
provisions of paragraph (b) of this section and is a ``consumer 
commodity'' as defined in Sec. 171.8 of this subchapter may be renamed 
``Consumer commodity'' and reclassed as ORM-D material. In addition to 
the exceptions provided by paragraph (b) of this section, shipments of 
ORM-D materials are not subject to the shipping paper requirements of 
subpart C of part 172 of this subchapter, unless the material meets the 
definition of a hazardous substance, a hazardous waste, or a marine 
pollutant or unless offered or intended for transportation by aircraft, 
and are eligible for the exceptions provided in Sec. 173.156.
    (d) Materials corrosive to aluminum or steel only. Except for a 
hazardous substance, a hazardous waste, or a marine pollutant, a 
material classed as a Class 8, Packing Group III, material solely 
because of its corrosive effect--
    (1) On aluminum is not subject to any other requirements of this 
subchapter when transported by motor vehicle or rail car in a packaging 
constructed of materials that will not react dangerously with or be 
degraded by the corrosive material; or
    (2) On steel is not subject to any other requirements of this 
subchapter when transported by motor vehicle or rail car in a bulk 
packaging constructed of materials that will not react dangerously with 
or be degraded by the corrosive material.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66270, 
Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45463, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 173-231, 57 FR 52940, 
Nov. 5, 1992]



Sec. 173.155  Exceptions for Class 9 (miscellaneous hazardous materials).

    (a) General. Exceptions for hazardous materials shipments in the 
following paragraphs are permitted only if this section is referenced 
for the specific hazardous material in the Sec. 172.101 table of this 
subchapter.
    (b) Limited quantities. Limited quantities of miscellaneous 
hazardous materials (Class 9) are excepted from labeling, unless offered 
or intended for transportation by aircraft, and the specification 
packaging requirements of this subchapter when packaged in combination 
packagings according to this paragraph. In addition, shipments of these 
limited quantities are not subject to subpart F (Placarding) of part 172 
of this subchapter. Each package must conform to the packaging 
requirements of subpart B of this part and may not exceed 30 kg (66 
pounds)

[[Page 498]]

gross weight. The following combination packagings are authorized:
    (1) For liquids, inner packagings not over 5.0 L (1.3 gallons) net 
capacity each. packed in strong outer packagings.
    (2) For solids, inner packagings not over 5.0 kg (11 pounds) net 
capacity each, packed in strong outer packagings.
    (c) Consumer commodities. A limited quantity which conforms to the 
provisions of paragraph (b) of this section and is a ``consumer 
commodity'' as defined in Sec. 171.8 of this subchapter, may be renamed 
``Consumer commodity'' and reclassed as ORM-D material. In addition to 
the exceptions provided by paragraph (b) of this section, shipments of 
ORM-D materials are not subject to the shipping paper requirements of 
subpart C of part 172 of this subchapter, unless the material meets the 
definition of a hazardous substance, a hazardous waste, or a marine 
pollutant or unless offered for transportation or transported by 
aircraft, and are eligible for the exceptions provided in Sec. 173.156.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66270, 
Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-231, 57 FR 52940, Nov. 5, 1992; Amdt. 173-253, 
61 FR 27174, May 30, 1996]



Sec. 173.156  Exceptions for ORM materials.

    (a) Exceptions for hazardous materials shipments in the following 
paragraphs are permitted only if this section is referenced for the 
specific hazardous material in the Sec. 172.101 table or in a packaging 
section in this part.
    (b) ORM-D. Packagings for ORM-D materials are specified according to 
hazard class in Secs. 173.150 through 173.155 and in Sec. 173.306. In 
addition to other exceptions specified for ORM-D materials in this part:
    (1) Strong outer packagings as specified in this part, marking 
requirements specified in subpart D of part 172 of this subchapter, and 
the 30 kg (66 pounds) gross weight limitation are not required for 
materials classed as ORM-D when--
    (i) Unitized in cages, carts, boxes or similar overpacks;
    (ii) Offered for transportation or transported by:
    (A) Rail;
    (B) Private or contract motor carrier; or
    (C) Common carrier in a vehicle under exclusive use for such 
service; and
    (iii) Transported to or from a manufacturer, a distribution center, 
or a retail outlet, or transported to a disposal facility from one 
offeror.
    (2) The 30 kg (66 pounds) gross weight limitation does not apply to 
materials classed as ORM-D when offered for transportation, or 
transported, by highway or rail between a manufacturer, a distribution 
center, and a retail outlet provided--
    (i) Inner packagings conform to the quantity limits for inner 
packagings specified in Secs. 173.150(b), 173.152(b), 173.154(b), 
173.155(b) and 173.306 (a) and (b), as appropriate;
    (ii) The inner packagings are packed into corrugated fiberboard 
trays to prevent them from moving freely;
    (iii) The trays are placed in a fiberboard box which is banded and 
secured to a wooden pallet by metal, fabric, or plastic straps, to form 
a single palletized unit;
    (iv) The package conforms to the general packaging requirements of 
subpart B of this part;
    (v) The maximum net quantity of hazardous material permitted on one 
palletized unit is 250 kg (550 pounds); and
    (vi) The package is properly marked in accordance with Sec. 172.316 
of this subchapter.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66270, 
Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45463, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 173-255, 61 FR 50626, 
Sept. 26, 1996; 63 FR 37461, July 10, 1998]



Subpart E--Non-bulk Packaging for Hazardous Materials Other Than Class 1 
                               and Class 7

    Source: Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, unless otherwise 
noted.



Sec. 173.158  Nitric acid.

    (a) Nitric acid exceeding 40 percent concentration may not be 
packaged with any other material.
    (b) Nitric acid in any concentration which does not contain sulfuric 
acid or hydrochloric acid as impurities, when

[[Page 499]]

offered for transportation or transported by rail, highway, or water 
shall be packaged in specification containers as follows:
    (1) 1A1 stainless steel drums are authorized, subject to the 
following limitations:
    (i) Stainless steel used in drums must conform to the following 
thicknesses:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
   Nominal (marked) capacity (in         Minimum thickness (in mm) of
        liters) of 1A1 drum                    stainless steel
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                 55                                  0.9
                115                                  1.2
                210                                  1.5
                450                                  2.0
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (ii) Drums weighing less than 85 percent of their original tare 
weight may not be used.
    (iii) Type 304 or other grades of equivalent corrosion-resistant 
steels in the as-welded condition are permissible for nitric acid 
concentrations up to and including 78 percent.
    (iv) For all concentrations of nitric acid, the following are 
permissible:
    (A) Type 304 heat-treated (quenched in water at 1040  deg.C (1900 
deg.F)),
    (B) Stabilized Type 347 in the as-welded condition,
    (C) Stabilized Type 347 stress-relieved (845-900  deg.C (1550-1650 
deg.F)),
    (D) Stabilized Type 347 heat-treated (quenched in water at 1040 
deg.C (1900  deg.F)), or
    (E) Other grades of equivalent corrosion resistance.
    (v) All parts of drum exposed to lading must be capable of 
withstanding the corrosive effect of nitric acid to the extent that 65 
percent boiling nitric acid does not penetrate the metal more than 
0.0381 mm (0.002 inches) per month. (ASTM A 262-68 may be used for a 
suitable corrosion test procedure.)
    (vi) In addition to marking required by Sec. 178.503 of this 
subchapter, the following marks, in lettering of at least 12.7 mm (0.5 
inch) height, must be placed on drums used to transport nitric acid:
    (A) The type of steel used in body and head sheets as identified by 
American Iron and Steel Institute type number, and, in addition, the 
letters ``HT'' following the steel designation on containers subject to 
stress relieving or heat treatment during manufacture.
    (B) The thickness in mm of metal in thinnest part. When the 
thickness of metal in the body differs from that in the head, both must 
be indicated with slanting line between and with the gauge of the body 
indicated first.
    (C) Original tare weight in kilograms, preceded by the letters 
``TW.''

An example of the markings required by paragraphs (b)(1)(vi) (A), (B), 
and (C) of this section is ``304HT/1.9/2.7/TW55.''
    (2) 4H1 expanded plastics outer packagings with glass inner 
receptacles of not greater than 2.5 L (0.66 gallon) capacity each. No 
more than four 2.5 L (0.66 gallon) inner receptacles may be packed in 
one outer packaging.
    (c) Nitric acid of 80 percent or greater concentration which does 
not contain sulfuric acid or hydrochloric acid as impurities, when 
offered for transportation or transported by rail, highway, or water may 
be packaged in 1B1 aluminum drums.
    (d) Nitric acid of 90 percent or greater concentration, when offered 
for transportation or transported by rail, highway, or water may be 
packaged as follows:
    (1) In 4C1, 4C2, 4D or 4F wooden boxes with inner packagings 
consisting of glass bottles further individually overpacked in tightly 
closed metal packagings. Glass bottles must be of 2.5 L (0.66 gallon) or 
less capacity and cushioned with a non-reactive, absorbent material 
within the metal packagings.
    (2) In combination packagings with 1A2, 1B2, 1D, 1G, 1H2, 3H2 or 4G 
outer packagings with inner glass packagings of 2.5 L (0.66 gallons) or 
less capacity cushioned with a non-reactive, absorbent material and 
packed within a tightly closed intermediate packaging of metal or 
plastic.
    (e) Nitric acid of less than 90 percent concentration, when offered 
for transportation or transported by rail, highway, or water may be 
packaged in 4G fiberboard boxes or 4C1, 4C2, 4D or 4F wooden boxes with 
inside glass packagings of not over 2.5 L (0.66 gallon) capacity each.
    (f) Nitric acid of 70 percent or less concentration, when offered 
for transportation or transported by rail, highway, or water, may be 
packaged as follows:

[[Page 500]]

    (1) In composite packagings 6PA1, 6PA2, 6PB1, 6PB2, 6PC, 6PD1, 6PH1, 
or 6PH2. 6HH1 and 6HA1 composite packaging with plastic inner 
receptacles meeting the compatibility requirements Sec. 173.24(e) (e.g., 
PFA Teflon) are authorized.
    (2) In 4H1 expanded plastic boxes with inner glass packagings of not 
over 2.5 L (0.66 gallon) each.
    (3) In combination packagings with 1A2, 1B2, 1D, 1G, 1H2, 3H2, 4C1, 
4C2, 4D, 4F or 4G outer packagings and plastic inner packagings not over 
2.5 L (0.66 gallon) capacity further individually overpacked in tightly 
closed metal packagings.
    (g) Nitric acid of more than 70 percent concentration, when offered 
for transportation or transported by cargo aircraft only, must be 
packaged in combination packagings with 1A2, 1B2, 1D, 1G, 1H2, 3H2, 4C1, 
4C2, 4D, 4F or 4G outer packagings with glass or earthenware inner 
packagings of not over 1 L (0.3 gallon) or glass ampoules of not over 
0.5 L (0.1 gallon).
    (h) Nitric acid of less than 70 percent concentration, when offered 
for transportation in cargo aircraft only must be packaged in 
combination packagings with 1A2, 1B2, 1D, 1G, 1H2, 3H2, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F 
or 4G outer packagings with inner packagings of--
    (1) Glass or earthenware not over 2.5 L (0.66 gallon) capacity;
    (2) Plastic not over 2.5 L (0.66 gallon) capacity further 
individually overpacked in tightly closed metal packagings; or
    (3) Glass ampoule not over 0.5 L (0.1 gallon) capacity.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66270, 
Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-241, 59 FR 67509, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173-255, 
61 FR 50626, Sept. 26, 1996]



Sec. 173.159  Batteries, wet.

    (a) Electric storage batteries, containing electrolyte acid or 
alkaline corrosive battery fluid, must be completely protected so that 
short circuits will be prevented; they may not be packed with other 
materials except as provided in paragraphs (g) and (h) of this section 
and in Secs. 173.220 and 173.222.
    (b) The following specification packagings are authorized for 
batteries packed without other materials:
    (1) 4C1, 4C2, 4D, or 4F wooden boxes.
    (2) 4G fiberboard boxes.
    (3) 1D plywood drums.
    (4) 1G fiber drums.
    (5) 1H2 and 3H2 plastic drums and jerricans.
    (6) 4H2 plastic boxes.
    (c) The following non-specification packagings are authorized for 
batteries packed without other materials:
    (1) Electric storage batteries protected against short circuits and 
firmly secured to skids or pallets capable of withstanding the shocks 
normally incident to transportation, are authorized for transportation 
by rail, highway, or water. The height of the completed unit must not 
exceed 1\1/2\ times the width of the skid or pallet. The unit must be 
capable of withstanding, without damage, a superimposed weight equal to 
two times the weight of the unit or, if the weight of the unit exceeds 
907 kg (2000 pounds), a superimposed weight of 1814 kg (4000 pounds). 
Battery terminals must not be relied upon to support any part of the 
superimposed weight.
    (2) Electric storage batteries weighing 225 kg (500 pounds) or more, 
consisting of carriers' equipment, may be shipped by rail when mounted 
on suitable skids and protected against short circuits. Such shipments 
may not be offered in interchange service.
    (3) One to three batteries not over 11.3 kg (25 pounds) each, packed 
in outer boxes. The maximum authorized gross weight is 34 kg (75 
pounds).
    (4) Not more than four batteries not over 7 kg (15 pounds) each, 
packed in strong outer fiberboard or wooden boxes. Batteries must be 
securely cushioned and packed to prevent short circuits. The maximum 
authorized gross weight is 30 kg (65 pounds).
    (5) Not more than five batteries not over 4.5 kg (10 pounds) each, 
packed in strong outer fiberboard or wooden boxes. Batteries must be 
securely cushioned and packed to prevent short circuits. The maximum 
authorized gross weight is 30 kg (65 pounds).
    (6) Single batteries not exceeding 34 kg (75 pounds) each, packed in 
5-sided slip covers or in completely closed fiberboard boxes. Slip 
covers and boxes must be of solid or double-faced corrugated fiberboard 
of at least 91 kg (200

[[Page 501]]

pounds) Mullen test strength. The slip cover or fiberboard box must fit 
snugly and provide inside top clearance of at least 1.3 cm (0.5 inch) 
above battery terminals and filler caps with reinforcement in place. 
Assembled for shipment, the bottom edges of the slipcover must come to 
within 2.5 cm (1 inch) of the bottom of the battery. The completed 
package (battery and box or slip cover) must be capable of withstanding 
a top-to-bottom compression test of at least 225 kg (500 pounds) without 
damage to battery terminals, cell covers or filler caps.
    (7) Single batteries exceeding 34 kg (75 pounds) each may be packed 
in completely closed fiberboard boxes. Boxes must be of double-wall 
corrugated fiberboard of at least 181 kg (400 pounds) test, or solid 
fiberboard testing at least 181 kg (400 pounds); a box may have hand 
holes in its ends provided that the handholes will not materially weaken 
the box. Sides and ends of the box must have cushioning between the 
battery and walls of the box; combined thickness of cushioning material 
and walls of the box must not be less than 1.3 cm (0.5 inch); and 
cushioning must be excelsior pads, corrugated fiberboard, or other 
suitable cushioning material. The bottom of the battery must be 
protected by a minimum of one excelsior or double-wall corrugated 
fiberboard pad. The top of the battery must be protected by a wood 
frame, corrugated trays or scored sheets of corrugated fiberboard having 
minimum test of 91 kg (200 pounds), or other equally effective 
cushioning material. Top protection must bear evenly on connectors and/
or edges of the battery cover to facilitate stacking of batteries. No 
more than one battery may be placed in one box. The maximum authorized 
gross weight is 91 kg (200 pounds).
    (d) A nonspillable wet electric storage battery is excepted from all 
other requirements of this subchapter under the following conditions:
    (1) The battery must be protected against short circuits and 
securely packaged;
    (2) For batteries manufactured after September 30, 1995, the battery 
and the outer packaging must be plainly and durably marked 
``NONSPILLABLE'' or ``NONSPILLABLE BATTERY''; and
    (3) The battery must be capable of withstanding the following two 
tests, without leakage of battery fluid from the battery:
    (i) Vibration test. The battery must be rigidly clamped to the 
platform of a vibration machine, and a simple harmonic motion having an 
amplitude of 0.8 mm (0.03 inches), with a 1.6 mm (0.063 inches) maximum 
total excursion must be applied. The frequency must be varied at the 
rate of 1 Hz/min between the limits of 10 Hz to 55 Hz. The entire range 
of frequencies and return must be traversed in 955 minutes 
for each mounting position (direction of vibrator) of the battery. The 
battery must be tested in three mutually perpendicular positions (to 
include testing with fill openings and vents, if any, in an inverted 
position) for equal time periods.
    (ii) Pressure differential test. Following the vibration test, the 
battery must be stored for six hours at 24  deg.C4  deg.C 
(75  deg.F7  deg.F) while subjected to a pressure 
differential of at least 88 kPa (13 psig). The battery must be tested in 
three mutually perpendicular positions (to include testing with fill 
openings and vents, if any, in an inverted position) for at least six 
hours in each position.
    (e) Electric storage batteries containing electrolyte or corrosive 
battery fluid are not subject to the requirements of this subchapter for 
transportation by highway or rail if all of the following requirements 
are met:
    (1) No other hazardous materials may be transported in the same 
vehicle;
    (2) The batteries must be loaded or braced so as to prevent damage 
and short circuits in transit;
    (3) Any other material loaded in the same vehicle must be blocked, 
braced, or otherwise secured to prevent contact with or damage to the 
batteries; and
    (4) The transport vehicle may not carry material shipped by any 
person other than the shipper of the batteries.
    (f) Electric storage batteries, containing electrolyte or corrosive 
battery fluid in a coil from which it is injected into the battery cells 
by a gas generator and initiator assembled with the battery, and which 
are nonspillable under the criteria of paragraph (d) of

[[Page 502]]

this section, are excepted from other requirements of this subchapter 
when examined by the Bureau of Explosives and approved by the Associate 
Administrator.
    (g) Electrolyte, acid, or alkaline corrosive battery fluid, packed 
with storage batteries wet or dry, must be packed in one of the 
following specification packagings:
    (1) In 4C1, 4C2, 4D, or 4F wooden boxes with inner receptacles of 
glass, not over 4.0 L (1 gallon) each with not over 8.0 L (2 gallons) 
total in each outside container. Inside containers must be well-
cushioned and separated from batteries by a strong solid wooden 
partition. The completed package must conform to Packing Group III 
requirements.
    (2) Electrolyte, acid, or alkaline corrosive battery fluid included 
with storage batteries and filling kits may be packed in strong rigid 
outer packagings when shipments are made by, for, or to the Departments 
of the Army, Navy, or Air Force of the United States. Packagings must 
conform to military specifications. The electrolyte, acid, or alkaline 
corrosive battery fluid must be packed in polyethylene bottles of not 
over 1.0 L (0.3 gallon) capacity each. Not more than 24 bottles, 
securely separated from storage batteries and kits, may be offered for 
transportation or transported in each package.
    (3) In 4G fiberboard boxes with not more than 12 inside packagings 
of polyethylene or other material resistant to the lading, each not over 
2.0 L (0.5 gallon) capacity each. Completed packages must conform to 
Packing Group III requirements. Inner packagings must be adequately 
separated from the storage battery. The maximum authorized gross weight 
is 29 kg (64 pounds). These packages are not authorized for 
transportation by aircraft.
    (h) Dry storage batteries or battery charger devices may be packaged 
in 4G fiberboard boxes with inner receptacles containing battery fluid. 
Completed packagings must conform to Packing Group III requirements. Not 
more than 12 inner receptacles may be packed in one outer box. The 
maximum authorized gross weight is 34 kg (75 pounds).

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66270, 
Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45463, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 173-235, 58 FR 50502, 
Sept. 27, 1993; Amdt. 173-234, 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 173-246, 
60 FR 49110, Sept. 21, 1995; 64 FR 10777, Mar. 5, 1999; 65 FR 58629, 
Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45379, 45380, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.160  Bombs, smoke, non-explosive (corrosive).

    Bombs, smoke, non-explosive may be shipped provided they are without 
ignition elements, bursting charges, detonating fuses or other explosive 
components. They must be packaged in wooden (4C1, 4C2), plywood (4D) or 
reconstituted wood (4F) boxes, or plywood drums (1D), which meet Packing 
Group II requirements.



Sec. 173.161  Chemical kits.

    (a) Except as otherwise provided, chemical kits must be packed, 
marked, and labeled as prescribed by this subchapter for the specific 
corrosive materials contained therein.
    (b) Chemical kits containing limited quantities of corrosive liquids 
in inner receptacles of not over 177 mL (6 fluid ounces) capacity each 
are excepted from labeling (except when offered for transportation or 
transported by air) and the specification packaging requirements of this 
subchapter if all of the following requirements are met:
    (1) The kit may contain only corrosive liquids for which packaging 
exceptions are provided in the Sec. 172.101 table.
    (2) This kit must be a strong wooden or metal outer packaging, or 
must be packed in a strong wooden or metal packaging.
    (3) The corrosive liquids must be cushioned with sufficient 
absorbent material to completely absorb the contents of the individual 
containers, and must be protected from damage by other materials in the 
kit.
    (4) The contents of the kit must be of a nature and packed so there 
will be no possibility of the mixture of contents causing dangerous 
evolution of heat or gas.

In addition, chemical kits meeting these requirements are not subject to 
subpart F of part 172 of this subchapter (Placarding), to part 174 
(Carriage by

[[Page 503]]

rail) of this subchapter except Sec. 174.24 (Shipping papers), and to 
part 177 (Carriage by highway) of this subchapter except Sec. 177.817 
(Shipping papers).
    (c) Except as provided in paragraph (b) of this section, chemical 
kits must be packed in 4G fiberboard boxes with inner glass receptacles 
of not over 1 L (0.3 gallon) capacity each, securely cushioned and 
separated from other inside containers. The contents of the kit must be 
of such a nature and so packed that there will be no possibility of the 
mixture of contents causing dangerous evolution of heat or gas.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by 66 FR 45381, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.162  Gallium.

    (a) Except when packaged in cylinders or steel flasks, gallium must 
be packaged in packagings which meet the requirements of part 178 of 
this subchapter at the Packing Group I performance level for 
transportation by aircraft, and at the Packing Group III performance 
level for transport by highway, rail or vessel, as follows:
    (1) In combination packagings intended to contain liquids consisting 
of glass, earthenware or rigid plastic inner packagings with a maximum 
net mass of 15 kg (33 pounds) each. The inner packagings must be packed 
in wood boxes (4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F), fiberboard boxes (4G), plastic boxes 
(4H1, 4H2), fiber drums (1G) or removable head steel and plastic drums 
or jerricans (1A2, 1H2, 3A2 or 3H2) with sufficient cushioning materials 
to prevent breakage. Either the inner packagings or the outer packagings 
must have an inner liner that is leakproof or bags of strong leakproof 
and puncture-resistant material impervious to the contents and 
completely surrounding the contents to prevent it from escaping from the 
package, irrespective of its position.
    (2) In packagings intended to contain liquids consisting of semi-
rigid plastic inner packagings of not more than 2.5 kg (5.5 pounds) net 
capacity each, individually enclosed in a sealed, leak-tight bag of 
strong puncture-resistant material. The sealed bags must be packed in 
wooden (4C1, 4C2), plywood (4D), reconstituted wood (4F), fiberboard 
(4G) or plastic (4H1, 4H2) boxes or in fiber (1G) or steel (1A2) drums, 
which are lined with leak-tight, puncture-resistant material. Bags and 
liner material must be chemically resistant to gallium.
    (3) Cylinders and steel flasks with vaulted bottoms are also 
authorized.
    (b) When it is necessary to transport gallium at low temperatures in 
order to maintain it in a completely solid state, the above packagings 
may be overpacked in a strong, water-resistant outer packaging which 
contains dry ice or other means of refrigeration. If a refrigerant is 
used, all of the above materials used in the packaging of gallium must 
be chemically and physically resistant to the refrigerant and must have 
impact resistance at the low temperatures of the refrigerant employed. 
If dry ice is used, the outer packaging must permit the release of 
carbon dioxide gas.
    (c) Manufactured articles or apparatuses, each containing not more 
than 100 mg (0.0035 ounce) of gallium and packaged so that the quantity 
of gallium per package does not exceed 1 g (0.35 ounce) are not subject 
to the requirements of this subchapter.

[64 FR 10777, Mar. 5, 1999; as amemded at 66 FR 33430, June 21, 2001]



Sec. 173.163  Hydrogen fluoride.

    Hydrogen fluoride (hydrofluoric acid, anhydrous) must be packaged in 
a specification 3, 3A, 3AA, 3B, 3BN, 3E, or 4A cylinder; or a 
specification 4B, 4BA, or 4BW cylinder, if the cylinder is not brazed. 
Filling density may not exceed 85 percent of the cylinder's water weight 
capacity. In place of the periodic hydrostatic retest, cylinders used in 
exclusive service may be given a complete external visual inspection in 
conformance with part 180, subpart C, of this subchapter, at the time 
such retest becomes due. Cylinders removed from hydrogen fluoride 
service must be condemned in accordance with Sec. 180.205 of this 
subchapter or, at the direction of the owner, rendered incapable of 
holding pressure.

[67 FR 51643, Aug. 8, 2002]

[[Page 504]]



Sec. 173.164  Mercury (metallic and articles containing mercury).

    (a) For transportation by aircraft, mercury must be packaged in 
packagings which meet the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at 
the Packing Group I performance level, as follows:
    (1) In inner packagings of earthenware, glass or plastic containing 
not more than 3.5 kg (7.7 pounds) of mercury, or inner packagings which 
are glass ampoules containing not more than 0.5 kg (1.1 pounds) of 
mercury, or iron or steel quicksilver flasks containing not more than 35 
kg (77 pounds) of mercury. The inner packagings or flasks must be packed 
in steel drums (1A2), steel jerricans (3A2), wooden boxes (4C1), (4C2), 
plywood boxes (4D), reconstituted wood boxes (4F), fiberboard boxes 
(4G), plastic boxes (4H2), plywood drums (1D) or fiber drums (1G).
    (2) Packagings must meet the requirements of Part 178 of this 
subchapter at the Packing Group I performance level.
    (3) When inner packagings of earthenware, glass or plastic are used, 
they must be packed in the outer packaging with sufficient cushioning 
material to prevent breakage.
    (4) Either the inner packagings or the outer packagings must have 
inner linings or bags of strong leakproof and puncture-resistant 
material impervious to mercury, completely surrounding the contents, so 
that the escape of mercury will be prevented irrespective of the 
position of the package.
    (b) Manufactured articles or apparatuses, each containing not more 
than 100 mg (0.0035 ounce) of mercury and packaged so that the quantity 
of mercury per package does not exceed 1 g (0.035 ounce) are not subject 
to the requirements of this subchapter.
    (c) Manufactured articles or apparatuses containing mercury are 
excepted from the specification packaging requirements of this 
subchapter when packaged as follows:
    (1) Manufactured articles or apparatuses of which metallic mercury 
is a component part, such as manometers, pumps, thermometers, switches, 
etc. (for electron tubes, mercury vapor tubes and similar tubes, see 
paragraph (c)(3) of this section), must be in strong outer packagings, 
having sealed inner liners or bags of strong leakproof and puncture-
resistant material impervious to mercury, which will prevent the escape 
of mercury from the package irrespective of its position. Mercury 
switches and relays are excepted from these packaging requirements, if 
they are totally enclosed, leakproof and in sealed metal or plastic 
units.
    (2) Thermometers, switches and relays, each containing a total 
quantity of not more than 15 g (0.53 ounces) of mercury, are excepted 
from the requirements of this subchapter if installed as an integral 
part of a machine or apparatus and so fitted that shock of impact 
damage, leading to leakage of mercury, is unlikely to occur under 
conditions normally incident to transport.
    (3) Electron tubes, mercury vapor tubes and similar tubes must be 
packaged as follows:
    (i) Tubes which are packed in strong outer packagings with all seams 
and joints sealed with self-adhesive, pressure-sensitive tape which will 
prevent the escape of mercury from the package, are authorized up to a 
total net quantity of 450 g (15.9 ounces) of mercury per package;
    (ii) Tubes with more than 450 g (15.9 ounces) of mercury are 
authorized only when packed in strong outer packagings, having sealed 
inner liners or bags of strong leakproof and puncture-resistant material 
impervious to mercury which will prevent escape of mercury from the 
package irrespective of its position;
    (iii) Tubes which do not contain more than 5 g (0.2 ounce) of 
mercury each and which are packed in the manufacturer's original 
packagings, are authorized up to a total net quantity of 30 g (1.1 
ounces) of mercury per package;
    (iv) Tubes which are completely jacketed in sealed leakproof metal 
cases are authorized in the manufacturer's original packagings.
    (4) A person offering for transportation electron tubes, mercury 
vapor tubes, and similar tubes shall indicate the quantity of mercury 
therein on the shipping paper.

[[Page 505]]

    (5) Mercurial barometers conforming to paragraph (c)(1) of this 
section, which are loaded and unloaded from an aircraft under the 
supervision of, and accompanied in flight by, a National Weather Service 
official or similar United States agency official, are excepted from any 
other requirements of this subchapter.
    (d) For transportation by other than aircraft, mercury must be 
packaged--
    (1) In any packaging which meets the requirements of part 178 of 
this subchapter at the Packing Group III performance level; or
    (2) In non-specification reusable metal packagings.
    (e) Except for a hazardous substance or a hazardous waste or for 
transportation by aircraft or vessel, packages containing less than 0.45 
kg (1.0 pound) net weight of mercury are not subject to the requirements 
of this subchapter.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66270, 
Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-241, 59 FR 67509, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173-246, 
60 FR 49110, Sept. 21, 1995; 64 FR 10777, 10778, Mar. 5, 1999]



Sec. 173.166  Air bag inflators, air bag modules and seat-belt pretensioners.

    (a) Definitions. An air bag inflator (consisting of a casing 
containing an igniter, a booster material, a gas generant and, in some 
cases, a pressure vessel (cylinder)) is a gas generator used to inflate 
an air bag in a supplemental restraint system in a motor vehicle. An air 
bag module is the air bag inflator plus an inflatable bag assembly. A 
seat-belt pre-tensioner contains similar hazardous materials and is used 
in the operation of a seat-belt restraining system in a motor vehicle.
    (b) Classification. An air bag inflator, air bag module, or seat-
belt pre-tensioner may be classed as Class 9 (UN3268) or Division 2.2 
(UN3353) if it meets the following requirements--
    (1) The manufacturer has submitted each design type air bag inflator 
or seat-belt pre-tensioner to a person approved by the Associate 
Administrator for examination and testing. The submission must contain a 
detailed description of the inflator or pre-tensioner (or, if more than 
a single inflator or pre-tensioner is involved, the maximum parameters 
of each particular inflator or pre-tensioner design type for which 
approval is sought) and details on the complete package.
    (2) Samples of the inflator or pre-tensioner, packaged as for 
transport, have been subjected to test series 6(c) of the UN 
Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods, Manual of Tests and 
Criteria (see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter), with no explosion of the 
device, no fragmentation of device casings, and no projection hazard or 
thermal effect which would significantly hinder fire-fighting or other 
emergency response efforts in the immediate vicinity.
    (3) The manufacturer submits an application, including--
    (i) The test results and report recommending the shipping 
description and classification for each device or design type; or
    (ii) An approved classification issued by the competent authority of 
a foreign government, to the Associate Administrator, and is notified in 
writing by the Associate Administrator that the device has been classed 
as Class 9 or Division 2.2 and approved for transportation.
    (4) No approval applications are required for air bag modules 
containing an approved air bag inflator.
    (5) Air bag inflators or seat belt pre-tensioners previously 
reclassed from Class 1 to Division 4.1 under the terms of an exemption 
may be reclassed as Class 9 materials without further testing.
    (c) EX numbers. When offered for transportation, the shipping paper 
must contain the EX number or product code for each approved inflator or 
pre-tensioner in association with the basic description required by 
Sec. 172.202(a) of this subchapter. Product codes must be traceable to 
the specific EX number assigned to the inflator, module or pre-tensioner 
by the Associate Administrator. Marking the EX number or product code on 
the outside package is not required. This paragraph (c) does not apply 
to a device classed as Division 2.2.
    (d) Exceptions. (1) An air bag module or seat-belt pretensioner that 
has been

[[Page 506]]

approved by the Associate Administrator and is installed in a motor 
vehicle or in completed vehicle components, such as steering columns or 
door panels, is not subject to the requirements of this subchapter.
    (2) An air bag module, containing an inflator that has previously 
been examined and approved for transportation as a Division 4.1 
material, is not required to be submitted for examination or approval.
    (3) Shipments for recycling. When offered for domestic 
transportation by highway, rail freight, cargo vessel or cargo aircraft 
only, a serviceable air bag module or seat-belt pretensioner removed 
from a motor vehicle that was manufactured as required for use in the 
United States may be offered for transportation and transported without 
compliance with the shipping paper requirement prescribed in paragraph 
(c) of this section. However, the word ``Recycled'' must be entered on 
the shipping paper immediately after the basic description prescribed in 
Sec. 172.202 of this subchapter. No more than one device is authorized 
in the packaging prescribed in paragraph (e)(1), (2) or (3) of this 
section. The device must be cushioned and secured within the package to 
prevent movement during transportation.
    (e) Packagings. The following packagings at the Packing Group III 
performance level are authorized for Class 9 devices:
    (1) 1A2, 1B2, 1G or 1H2 drums.
    (2) 3A2 or 3H2 jerricans.
    (3) 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2 boxes.
    (4) Reusable high strength plastic or metal containers or dedicated 
handling devices are authorized for shipment of air bag inflators, air 
bag modules, and seat-belt pretensioners from a manufacturing facility 
to the assembly facility, subject to the following conditions:
    (i) The gross weight of the container or handling device may not 
exceed 1000 kg (2205 pounds). The container or handling device structure 
must provide adequate support to allow them to be stacked at least three 
high with no damage to the containers or devices.
    (ii) If not completely enclosed by design, the container or handling 
device must be covered with plastic, fiberboard, or metal. The covering 
must be secured to the container by banding or other comparable methods.
    (iii) Internal dunnage must be sufficient to prevent movement of the 
devices within the container.
    (f) Labeling. Notwithstanding the provisions of Sec. 172.402 of this 
subchapter, each package or handling device must display a CLASS 9 or 
NON-FLAMMABLE GAS label. Additional labeling is not required when the 
package contains no hazardous materials other than the devices.

[Amdt. 173-230, 57 FR 1878, Jan. 16, 1992, as amended by Amdt. 173-241, 
59 FR 67509, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173-261, 62 FR 24733, May 6, 1997; 62 
FR 51560, Oct. 1, 1997; 64 FR 10778, Mar. 5, 1999; 65 FR 50461, Aug. 18, 
2000; 65 FR 58629, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 8647, Feb. 1, 2001; 66 FR 
45183, 45379, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.170  Black powder for small arms.

    Black powder for small arms that has been classed in Division 1.1 
may be reclassed as a Division 4.1 material, for domestic transportation 
by motor vehicle, rail freight, and cargo vessel only, subject to the 
following conditions:
    (a) The powder must be examined and approved for Division 1.1 and 
Division 4.1 classification in accordance with Secs. 173.56 and 173.58;
    (b) The total quantity of black powder in one motor vehicle, rail 
car, or freight container may not exceed 45.4 kg (100 pounds) net mass, 
and no more than four freight containers may be on board one cargo 
vessel;
    (c) The black powder must be packed in inner metal or heavy wall 
conductive plastic receptacles not over 454 g (16 ounces) net capacity 
each, with no more than 25 cans in one outer UN 4G fiberboard box. The 
inner packagings must be arranged and protected so as to prevent 
simultaneous ignition of the contents. The complete package must be of 
the same type which has been examined as required in Sec. 173.56;
    (d) Each completed package must be marked ``BLACK POWDER FOR SMALL 
ARMS'' and ``NA 0027''; and
    (e) Each package must bear the FLAMMABLE SOLID label.

[Amdt. 173-255, 61 FR 50626, Sept. 26, 1996, as amended at Amdt. 173-
255, 62 FR 14338, Mar. 26, 1997]

[[Page 507]]



Sec. 173.171  Smokeless powder for small arms.

    Smokeless powder for small arms which has been classed in Division 
1.3 may be reclassed in Division 4.1, for transportation by motor 
vehicle, rail car, vessel, or cargo-only aircraft, subject to the 
following conditions:
    (a) The powder must be examined and approved for a Division 1.3 and 
Division 4.1 classification in accordance with Secs. 173.56 and 173.58 
of this part.
    (b) The total quantity of smokeless powder may not exceed 45.4 kg 
(100 pounds) net mass in:
    (1) One rail car, motor vehicle, or cargo-only aircraft; or
    (2) One freight container on a vessel, not to exceed four freight 
containers per vessel.
    (c) Only combination packagings with inner packagings not exceeding 
3.6 kg (8 pounds) net mass are authorized. Inner packagings must be 
arranged and protected so as to prevent simultaneous ignition of the 
contents. The complete package must be of the same type which has been 
examined as required in Sec. 173.56 of this part.
    (d) Inside packages that have been examined and approved by the 
Associate Administrator may be packaged in UN 4G fiberboard boxes 
meeting the Packing Group I performance level, provided all inside 
containers are packed to prevent movement and the net weight of 
smokeless powder in any one box does not exceed 7.3 kg (16 pounds).

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66270, 
Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-241, 59 FR 67509, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173-253, 
61 FR 27174, May 30, 1996; 66 FR 45379, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.172  Aircraft hydraulic power unit fuel tank.

    Aircraft hydraulic power unit fuel tanks containing a mixture of 
anhydrous hydrazine and monomethyl hydrazine (M86 fuel) and designed for 
installation as complete units in aircraft are excepted from the 
specification packaging requirements of this subchapter when they 
conform to either of the following conditions:
    (a) The unit must consist of an aluminum pressure vessel made from 
tubing and having welded heads. Primary containment of the fuel within 
this vessel must consist of a welded aluminum bladder having a maximum 
internal volume of 46 L (12 gallons). The outer vessel must have a 
minimum design gauge pressure of 1,275 kPa (185 psig) and a minimum 
burst gauge pressure of 2,755 kPa (400 psig). Each vessel must be leak-
checked during manufacture and before shipment and must be found 
leakproof. The complete inner unit must be securely packed in non-
combustible cushioning material, such as vermiculite, in a strong outer 
tightly closed metal packaging which will adequately protect all 
fittings. Maximum quantity of fuel per unit and package is 42 L (11 
gallons); or
    (b) The unit must consist of an aluminum pressure vessel. Primary 
containment of the fuel within this vessel must consist of a welded 
hermetically sealed fuel compartment with an elastomeric bladder having 
a maximum internal volume of 46 L (12 gallons). The pressure vessel must 
have a minimum design gauge pressure of 5,170 kPa (750 psig). Each 
vessel must be leak-checked during manufacture and before shipment and 
must be securely packed in non-combustible cushioning material, such as 
vermiculite, in a strong outer tightly closed metal packaging which will 
adequately protect all fittings. Maximum quantity of fuel per unit and 
package is 42 L (11 gallons).

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by 66 FR 45380]



Sec. 173.173  Paint, paint-related material, adhesives, ink and resins.

    (a) When the Sec. 172.101 table specifies that a hazardous material 
be packaged under this section, the following requirements apply. Except 
as otherwise provided in this part, the description ``Paint'' is the 
proper shipping name for paint, lacquer, enamel, stain, shellac, 
varnish, liquid aluminum, liquid bronze, liquid gold, liquid wood 
filler, and liquid lacquer base. The description ``Paint-related 
material'' is the proper shipping name for a paint thinning, drying, 
reducing or removing compound. However, if a more specific description 
is listed in the Sec. 172.101 table of this subchapter, that description 
must be used.

[[Page 508]]

    (b) Paint, paint-related material, adhesives, ink and resins must be 
packaged as follows:
    (1) As prescribed in Sec. 173.202 of this part if it is a Packing 
Group II material or Sec. 173.203 of this part if it is a Packing Group 
III material; or
    (2) In inner glass packagings of not over 1 L (0.3 gallon) capacity 
each or inner metal packagings of not over 5 L (1 gallon) each, packed 
in a strong outer packaging. Packages must conform to the packaging 
requirements of subpart B of this part but need not conform to the 
requirements of part 178 of this subchapter.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66270, 
Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-241, 59 FR 67509, Dec. 29, 1994]



Sec. 173.174  Refrigerating machines.

    A refrigerating machine assembled for shipment and containing 7 kg 
(15 pounds) or less of a flammable liquid for its operation in a strong, 
tight receptacle is excepted from labeling (except when offered for 
transportation or transported by air) and the specification packaging 
requirements of this subchapter. In addition. shipments are not subject 
to subpart F of part 172 of this subchapter (Placarding), to part 174 of 
this subchapter (Carriage by rail) except Sec. 174.24 (Shipping papers) 
and to part 177 (Carriage by highway) of this subchapter except 
Sec. 177.817 (Shipping papers).



Sec. 173.181  Pyrophoric materials (liquids).

    When the Sec. 172.101 table specifies that a hazardous material be 
packaged under this section, only the following non-bulk packagings are 
authorized:
    (a) Specification steel or nickel cylinders prescribed for any 
compressed gas except acetylene having a minimum design pressure of 1206 
kPa (175 psig). Cylinders with valves must be:
    (1) Equipped with steel valve protection caps or collars, unless 
overpacked; or
    (2) Overpacked in a wooden box (4C1, 4C2, 4D or 4F); fiberboard box 
(4G), or plastic box (4H1 or 4H2). Cylinders must be secured to prevent 
movement in the box and, when offered for transportation or transported, 
must be so loaded that pressure relief devices remain in the vapor space 
of the cylinder. (See Secs. 173.34(d)(6) and 177.838(h) of this 
subchapter.)
    (b) Wooden boxes (4C1, 4C2, 4D, or 4F) or fiberboard boxes (4G) 
enclosing not more than four strong, tight metal cans with inner 
receptacles of glass or metal, not over 1 L (0.3 gallon) capacity each, 
having positive screwcap closures adequately gasketed. Inner packagings 
must be cushioned on all sides with dry, absorbent, incombustible 
material in a quantity sufficient to absorb the entire contents. The 
strong, tight metal cans must be closed by positive means, not by 
friction.
    (c) Steel drums (1A2) or fiber drums (1G) not exceeding 220 L (58 
gallons) capacity each with strong tight inner metal cans not over 4.0 L 
(1 gallon) capacity each, closed by positive means, not friction.
    (1) Inner packagings must have no opening exceeding 25 mm (1 inch) 
diameter and must be surrounded with noncombustible cushioning material.
    (2) Net quantity of pyrophoric liquids may not exceed two-thirds of 
the rated capacity of the outer drum. For example, a 220 L (58 gallons) 
outer drum may contain no more than 147 L (39 gallons) of pyrophoric 
liquids.
    (3) Each layer of inner containers must be separated by a metal 
plate separator in addition to cushioning material.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66270, 
Dec. 20, 1991; 65 FR 58629, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45183, 45380, Aug. 28, 
2001]



Sec. 173.182  Barium azide--50 percent or more water wet.

    Barium azide--50 percent or more water wet, must be packed in wooden 
boxes (4C1, 4C2, 4D, or 4F) or fiber drums (1G) with inner glass 
packagings not over 0.5 kg (1.1 pounds) capacity each. Packagings must 
have rubber stoppers wire tied for securement. If transportation is to 
take place when and where freezing weather is possible, a suitable 
antifreeze solution must be used to prevent freezing. Each packaging 
must conform to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the 
Packing Group I performance level.

[[Page 509]]



Sec. 173.183  Nitrocellulose base film.

    Films, nitrocellulose base, must be packaged in packagings 
conforming to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the 
Packing Group III performance level, as follows:
    (a) In steel drums (1A2), aluminum drums (1B2), steel jerricans 
(3A2), wooden (4C1, 4C2), plywood (4D) or reconstituted wood (4F) boxes 
or plywood drums (1D) with each reel in a tightly closed metal can, 
polypropylene canister, or strong cardboard or fiberboard inner 
packaging with cover held in place by adhesive tape or paper; or
    (b) In fiberboard (4G) boxes or fiber drums (1G) with a single 
tightly closed metal can, polypropylene canister, or strong cardboard or 
fiberboard inner packaging with cover held in place by adhesive tape or 
paper; authorized only for not over 600 m (1969 feet) of film.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52643 Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 173-255, 
61 FR 50627, Sept. 26, 1996]



Sec. 173.184  Highway or rail fusee.

    (a) A fusee is a device designed to burn at a controlled rate and to 
produce visual effects for signaling purposes. The composition of the 
fusee must be such that the fusee will not ignite spontaneously or 
undergo marked decomposition when subjected to a temperature of 75 
deg.C (167  deg.F) for 48 consecutive hours.
    (b) Fusees (highway and railway) must be packaged in steel drums 
(1A2), steel jerricans (3A2), wooden (4C1, 4C2), plywood (4D) or 
reconstituted wood (4F) boxes or in fiberboard boxes (4G), plywood (1D) 
or fiber (1G) drums. If the fusees are equipped with spikes packagings 
must have reinforced ends to prevent penetration of spikes through the 
outer packagings; packages must be capable of passing drop test 
requirements (Sec. 178.603 of this subchapter), including at least one 
drop with spike in a downward position, and other requirements of part 
178 of this subchapter, at the Packing Group II performance level.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 66 FR 45379]



Sec. 173.185  Lithium batteries and cells.

    (a) Except as otherwise provided in this subpart, a lithium cell or 
battery is authorized for transportation only if it conforms to the 
provisions of this section. For the purposes of this subchapter, 
``lithium content'' means the mass of lithium in the anode of a lithium 
metal or lithium alloy cell, except in the case of a lithium ion cell 
where the ``equivalent lithium content'' in grams is calculated to be 
0.3 times the rated capacity in ampere-hours. The lithium-equivalent 
content of a battery equals the sum of the grams of lithium-equivalent 
content contained in the component cells of the battery.
    (b) Exceptions. Cells and batteries are not subject to the 
requirements of this subchapter if they meet the following requirements:
    (1) Each cell with a liquid cathode may contain not more than 0.5 g 
of lithium content. Each cell with a solid cathode may contain not more 
than 1.0 g of lithium content. Each lithium ion cell may contain not 
more than 1.5 g of equivalent lithium content;
    (2) Each battery with a liquid cathode may contain an aggregate 
quantity of not more than 1.0 g of lithium content. Each battery with a 
solid cathode may contain an aggregate quantity of not more than 2.0 g 
of lithium content. Each lithium-ion battery may contain an aggregate 
quantity of not more than 8.0 grams of equivalent lithium content;
    (3) Each cell or battery containing a liquid cathode must be 
hermetically sealed;
    (4) Cells and batteries must be packed in such a way so as to 
prevent short circuits and must be packed in strong packagings, except 
when installed in equipment; and
    (5) If when fully charged, the aggregate lithium content of the 
anodes in a liquid cathode battery is more than 0.5 g, or the aggregate 
lithium content of the anodes in a solid cathode battery is more than 
1.0 g, then the battery may not contain a liquid or gas that is a 
hazardous material according to this subchapter unless the liquid or 
gas, if free, would be completely absorbed or neutralized by other 
materials in the battery.

[[Page 510]]

    (c) Additional exceptions. Cells and batteries also are not subject 
to this subchapter if they meet the following requirements:
    (1) The lithium content of the anode of each cell, when fully 
charged, is not more than 5 g;
    (2) The aggregate lithium content of the anodes of each battery, 
when fully charged, is not more than 25 g;
    (3) Each cell or battery is of the type proven to be non-dangerous 
by testing in accordance with tests in the UN Manual of Tests and 
Criteria (see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter). Such testing must be 
carried out on each type of cell or battery prior to the initial 
transport of that type; and
    (4) Cells and batteries are designed or packed in such a way as to 
prevent short circuits under conditions normally encountered in 
transportation.
    (d) Cells and batteries and equipment containing cells and batteries 
which were first transported prior to January 1, 1995, and were assigned 
to Class 9 on the basis of the requirements of this subchapter in effect 
on October 1, 1993, may continue to be transported in accordance with 
the applicable requirements in effect on October 1, 1993.
    (e) Cells and batteries may be transported as items of Class 9 if 
they meet the requirements in paragraphs (e)(1) through (e)(7) of this 
section:
    (1) Each cell and battery must be equipped with an effective means 
of preventing external short circuits.
    (2) Each cell and battery must incorporate a safety venting device 
or be designed in a manner that will preclude a violent rupture under 
conditions normally incidental to transportation.
    (3) Batteries containing cells or series of cells connected in 
parallel must be equipped with effective means, (such as diodes, fuses, 
etc.) as necessary to prevent dangerous reverse current flow.
    (4) Cells and batteries must be packed in inner packagings in such a 
manner as to effectively prevent short circuits and to prevent movement 
which could lead to short circuits.
    (5) Cells and batteries must be packaged in packagings conforming to 
the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group II 
performance level: Inner packagings must be packed within metal boxes 
(4A or 4B), wooden boxes (4C1, 4C2, 4D or 4F), fiberboard boxes (4G), 
solid plastic boxes (4H2), fiber drums (1G), metal drums (1A2 or 1B2), 
plywood drums (1D), plastic jerricans (3H2), or metal jerricans (3A2 or 
3B2).
    (6) Each cell or battery must be of the type proven to meet the 
lithium battery requirements in the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria (see 
Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).
    (7) Except as provided in paragraph (h) of this section, cells or 
batteries may not be offered for transportation or transported if any 
cell has been discharged to the extent that the open circuit voltage is 
less than two volts or is less than \2/3\ of the voltage of the fully 
charged cell, whichever is less.
    (f) Equipment containing or packed with cells and batteries meeting 
the requirements of paragraph (b) or (c) of this section is excepted 
from all other requirements of this subchapter.
    (g) Equipment containing or packed with cells and batteries may be 
transported as items of Class 9 if the batteries and cells meet all 
requirements of paragraph (e) of this section and are packaged as 
follows:
    (1) Equipment containing cells and batteries must be packed in a 
strong outer packaging that is waterproof or has a waterproof liner, 
unless the equipment is made waterproof by nature of its construction. 
The equipment must be secured within the outer packaging and be packed 
as to effectively prevent movement, short circuits, and accidental 
operation during transport; and
    (2) Cells and batteries packed with equipment must be packed in 
inner packagings conforming to (e)(5) of this section in such a manner 
as to effectively prevent movement and short circuits.
    (h) Cells and batteries, for disposal, may be offered for 
transportation or transported to a permitted storage facility and 
disposal site by motor vehicle when they meet the following 
requirements:
    (1) Be equipped with an effective means of preventing external short 
circuits; and
    (2) Be packed in a strong outer packaging conforming to the 
requirements

[[Page 511]]

of Secs. 173.24 and 173.24a. The packaging need not conform to 
performance requirements of part 178 of this subchapter.
    (i) Cells and batteries and equipment containing or packed with 
cells and batteries which do not comply with the provisions of this 
section may be transported only if they are approved by the Associate 
Administrator.
    (j) For testing purposes, when not contained in equipment, cells and 
batteries may be offered for transportation or transported by highway as 
items of Class 9. Packaging must conform with paragraph (e)(5) of this 
section.

[66 FR 8647, Feb. 1, 2001; 66 FR 33430, June 21, 2001, as amended at 66 
FR 45379, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 15743, Apr. 3, 2002]



Sec. 173.186  Matches.

    (a) Matches must be of a type which will not ignite spontaneously or 
undergo marked decomposition when subjected for 8 consecutive hours to a 
temperature of 93  deg.C (200  deg.F).
    (b) Definitions. (1) Fusee matches are matches the heads of which 
are prepared with a friction-sensitive igniter composition and a 
pyrotechnic composition which burns with little or no flame, but with 
intense heat.
    (2) Safety matches are matches combined with or attached to the box, 
book or card that can be ignited by friction only on a prepared surface.
    (3) Strike anywhere matches are matches that can be ignited by 
friction on a solid surface.
    (4) Wax ``Vesta'' matches are matches that can be ignited by 
friction either on a prepared surface or on a solid surface.
    (c) Safety matches and wax ``Vesta'' matches must be tightly packed 
in securely closed inner packagings to prevent accidental ignition under 
conditions normally incident to transportation, and further packed in 
outer fiberboard, wooden, or other equivalent-type packagings. These 
matches in outer packagings not exceeding 23 kg (50 pounds) gross weight 
are not subject to any other requirement (except marking) of this 
subchapter. These matches may be packed in the same outer packaging with 
materials not subject to this subchapter.
    (d) Strike-anywhere matches may not be packed in the same outer 
packaging with any material other than safety matches or wax ``Vesta'' 
matches, which must be packed in separate inner packagings.
    (e) Packagings. Strike-anywhere matches must be tightly packed in 
securely closed chipboard, fiberboard, wooden, or metal inner packagings 
to prevent accidental ignition under conditions normally incident to 
transportation. Each inner packaging may contain no more than 700 
strike-anywhere matches and must be packed in outer steel drums (1A2), 
aluminum drums (1B2), steel jerricans (3A2), wooden (4C1, 4C2), plywood 
(4D), reconstituted wood (4F) or fiberboard (4G) boxes, plywood (1D) or 
fiber (1G) drums. Gross weight of fiberboard boxes (4G) must not exceed 
27 kg (60 pounds). Gross weight of other outer packagings must not 
exceed 45 kg (100 pounds).



Sec. 173.187  Pyrophoric solids, metals or alloys, n.o.s.

    Packagings for pyrophoric solids, metals, or alloys, n.o.s. must 
conform to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the 
packing group performance level specified in the Sec. 172.101 table. 
These materials must be packaged as follows:
    (a) In wooden boxes (4C1, 4C2, 4D, or 4F) with inner metal 
receptacles which have a positive (not friction) means of closure and 
contain not more than 15 kg (33 pounds) each.
    (b) In steel drums (1A1 or 1A2) with a gross mass not exceeding 150 
kg (331 pounds) per drum.
    (c) In fiberboard boxes (4G) with inner metal receptacles which have 
a positive (not friction) means of closure and contain not more than 7.5 
kg (17 pounds) each.
    (d) In fiber drums (1G) with inner metal receptacles which have a 
positive (not friction) means of closure and contain not more than 15 kg 
(33 pounds) each.
    (e) In plywood drums (1D) with inner metal receptacles which have a 
positive (not friction) means of closure and contain not more than 15 kg 
(33 pounds) each.

[[Page 512]]



Sec. 173.188  White or yellow phosphorus.

    Phosphorus, white or yellow, when offered for transportation or 
transported by rail, highway, or water, must be packaged in water or dry 
in packagings conforming to the requirements of part 178 of this 
subchapter at the Packing Group I performance level, as follows:
    (a) When placed in water, it must be packaged in specification 
packagings as follows:
    (1) Wooden boxes (4C1, 4C2, 4D, or 4F) with:
    (i) Inner hermetically sealed (soldered) metal cans, enclosed in 
other hermetically sealed (soldered) metal cans, or
    (ii) Inner water-tight metal cans containing not over 0.5 kg (1 
pound) of phosphorus with screw-top closures; or
    (2) Steel drums (1A1) not over 250 L (66 gallons) capacity each or 
steel drums (1A2) not over 115 L (30 gallons) capacity each.
    (b) When dry, it must be cast solid and shipped in packagings as 
follows:
    (1) Steel drums (1A2) not over 115 L (30 gallons) capacity each, or
    (2) In projectiles or bombs when shipped by, for, or to the 
Departments of the Army, Navy, or Air Force of the United States 
Government, without bursting elements.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66271, 
Dec. 20, 1991]



Sec. 173.189  Batteries containing sodium or cells containing sodium.

    (a) Batteries and cells may not contain any hazardous material other 
than sodium, sulfur or polysulfides. Cells not forming a component of a 
completed battery may not be offered for transportation at a temperature 
at which any liquid sodium is present in the cell. Batteries may only be 
offered for transportation, or transported, at a temperature at which 
any liquid sodium present in the battery conforms to the conditions 
prescribed in paragraph (d) of this section.
    (b) Cells must consist of hermetically sealed metal casings which 
fully enclose the hazardous materials and which are so constructed and 
closed as to prevent the release of the hazardous materials under normal 
conditions of transport. Cells must be placed in suitable outer 
packagings with sufficient cushioning material to prevent contact 
between cells and between cells and the internal surfaces of the outer 
packaging, and to ensure that no dangerous movement of the cells within 
the outer packaging occurs in transport. Cells must be packaged in 1A2, 
1B2, 1D, 1G, 1H2, 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G or 4H2 outer packagings which 
meet the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing 
Group II performance level.
    (c) Batteries must consist of cells secured within, and fully 
enclosed by a metal casing so constructed and closed as to prevent the 
release of the hazardous materials under normal conditions of transport. 
Batteries may be offered for transportation, and transported, unpacked 
or in protective packagings that are not subject to the requirements of 
part 178 of this subchapter.
    (d) Batteries containing any liquid sodium may not be offered for 
transportation, or transported, by aircraft. Batteries containing liquid 
sodium may be transported by motor vehicle, rail car or vessel under the 
following conditions:
    (1) Batteries must be equipped with an effective means of preventing 
external short circuits, such as by providing complete electrical 
insulation of battery terminals or other external electrical connectors. 
Battery terminals or other electrical connectors penetrating the heat 
insulation fitted in battery casings must be provided with thermal 
insulation sufficient to prevent the temperature of the exposed surfaces 
of such devices from exceeding 55  deg.C (130  deg.F).
    (2) No battery may be offered for transportation if the temperature 
at any point on the external surface of the battery exceeds 55  deg.C 
(130  deg.F).
    (3) If any external source of heating is used during transportation 
to maintain sodium in batteries in a molten state, means must be 
provided to ensure that the internal temperature of the battery does not 
reach or exceed 400  deg.C (752  deg.F).
    (4) When loaded in a transport vehicle or freight container:
    (i) Batteries must be secured so as to prevent significant movement 
within

[[Page 513]]

the transport vehicle or freight container under conditions normally 
incident to transportation;
    (ii) Adequate ventilation and/or separation between batteries must 
be provided to ensure that the temperature at any point on the external 
surface of the battery casing will not exceed 240  deg.C (464  deg.F) 
during transportation; and
    (iii) No other hazardous materials, with the exception of cells 
containing sodium, may be loaded in the same transport vehicle or 
freight container. Batteries must be separated from all other freight by 
a distance of not less than 0.5 m (1.6 feet).
    (e) Batteries containing sodium or cells containing sodium, when 
installed as part of a motor vehicle, are not subject to the 
requirements of this subchapter.

[Amdt. 173-241, 59 FR 67511, Dec. 29, 1994, as amended by Amdt. 173-256, 
61 FR 51338, Oct. 1, 1996; 66 FR 45380, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.192  Packaging for certain toxic gases in Hazard Zone A.

    When Sec. 172.101 of this subchapter specifies a toxic material must 
be packaged under this section, only specification cylinders are 
authorized, as follows:
    (a) Specification 3A1800, 3AA1800, 3AL1800, or 3E1800 cylinders, 
under the following conditions:
    (1) Specification 3A, 3AA, or 3AL cylinders may not exceed 57 kg 
(125 lb) water capacity (nominal).
    (2) Specification 3AL cylinders may only be offered for 
transportation or transported by highway and rail.
    (b) Packagings must conform to the requirements of Sec. 173.40.
    (c) For cylinders used for phosgene:
    (1) The filling density may not exceed 125 percent;
    (2) A cylinder may not contain more than 68 kg (150 lb) of phosgene; 
and
    (3) Each cylinder containing phosgene must be tested for leakage 
before it is offered for transportation or transported and must show no 
leakage. The leakage test must consist of immersing the cylinder and 
valve, without the protective cap attached, in a bath of water at a 
temperature of approximately 66  deg.C (150  deg.F) for at least 30 
minutes, during which time frequent examinations must be made to note 
any escape of gas. The valve of the cylinder may not be loosened after 
this test. Suitable safeguards must be provided to protect personnel and 
facilities should failure occur during the test. As an alternative, each 
cylinder containing phosgene may be tested for leakage by a method 
approved in writing by the Associate Administrator.

[67 FR 51643, Aug. 8, 2002]



Sec. 173.193  Bromoacetone, methyl bromide, chloropicrin and methyl bromide or methyl chloride mixtures, etc.

    (a) Bromoacetone must be packaged as follows in wooden boxes (4C1, 
4C2, 4D or 4F) with inner glass receptacles or tubes in hermetically 
sealed metal receptacles in corrugated fiberboard cartons. Bottles may 
not contain over 500 g (17.6 ounces) of liquid each and must be 
cushioned in cans with at least 12.7 mm (0.5 inch) of absorbent 
material. Total amount of liquid in the outer box must not exceed 11 kg 
(24 pounds). Packagings must conform to the requirements of part 178 of 
this subchapter at the Packing Group I performance level.
    (b) Bromoacetone, methyl bromide, chloropicrin and methyl bromide 
mixtures, chloropicrin and methyl chloride mixtures, and chloropicrin 
mixtures charged with non-flammable, non-liquefied compressed gas must 
be packed in Specification 3A, 3AA, 3B, 3C, 3E, 4A, 4B, 4BA, 4BW, or 4C 
cylinders having not over 113 kg (250 pounds) water capacity (nominal). 
This capacity does not apply to shipments of methyl bromide.
    (c) Methyl bromide mixtures containing up to 2% chloropicrin must be 
packaged in 4G fiberboard boxes with inside metal cans containing not 
over one pound each, or inside metal cans with a minimum wall thickness 
of 0.007 inch containing not over 1\3/4\ pounds each. The one-pound can 
must be capable of withstanding an internal pressure of 130 psig without 
leakage or permanent distortion. Vapor pressure of the contents must not 
exceed 130 psig at 55  deg.C (130  deg.F). The 1\3/4\-pound can must be 
capable of withstanding an internal pressure of 140 psig without leakage 
or permanent distortion. Vapor pressure of the contents must

[[Page 514]]

not exceed 140 psig at 55  deg.C (130  deg.F). Cans must not be liquid 
full at 130  deg.F. Cans must be constructed of tinplate or lined with 
suitable material and must have concave or pressure ends.
    (d) Cylinders, except those containing methyl bromide, must conform 
to Sec. 173.40 of this part.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66271, 
Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45463, Oct. 1, 1992]



Sec. 173.194  Gas identification sets.

    Gas identification sets containing poisonous material must be 
packaged in packagings conforming to the requirements of part 178 of 
this subchapter at the Packing Group I performance level, as follows:
    (a) In glass inner receptacles, hermetically sealed, of not over 40 
mL (1.4 fluid ounces) each. Each glass inner receptacle must in turn be 
placed in a sealed fiberboard receptacle, cushioned with absorbent 
material. Not more than 12 fiberboard receptacles must in turn be placed 
in a 4G fiberboard box. No more than four boxes, well-cushioned, may in 
turn be placed in a steel cylinder. The cylinder must have a wall 
thickness of at least 3.7 mm (0.146 inch) and must have a hermetically 
sealed steel closure.
    (b) When the poisonous material is absorbed in a medium such as 
activated charcoal or silical gel, gas identification sets may be 
shipped as follows:
    (1) If the poisonous material does not exceed 5 mL (0.2 fluid ounce) 
if a liquid or 5 g (0.2 ounce) if a solid, it may be packed in glass 
inner receptacles of not over 120 mL (4.1 fluid ounces) each. Each glass 
receptacle, cushioned with absorbent material must be packed in a 
hermetically sealed metal can of not less than 0.30 mm (0.012 inch) wall 
thickness. Metal cans, surrounded on all sides by at least 25 mm (1 
inch) of dry sawdust, must be packed in 4C1, 4C2, 4D or 4F wooden boxes. 
Not more than 100 mL (3.4 fluid ounces) or 100 g (3.5 ounces) of 
poisonous materials may be packed in one outer wooden box.
    (2) If the poisonous material does not exceed 5 mL (0.2 fluid ounce) 
if a liquid or 20 g (0.7 ounce) if a solid, it may be packed in glass 
inner receptacles with screw-top closures of not less than 60 mL (2 
ounces), hermetically sealed. Twelve bottles containing poisonous 
material, not to exceed 100 mL (3.4 ounces) or 100 g (3.5 ounces), or 
both, may be placed in a plastic carrying case, each glass receptacle 
surrounded by absorbent cushioning and each separated from the other by 
sponge rubber partitions. The plastic carrying case must be placed in a 
tightly fitting fiberboard box which in turn must be placed in a tightly 
fitting 4C1, 4C2, 4D or 4F wooden box.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 66 FR 45183, 
45381, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.195  Hydrogen cyanide, anhydrous, stabilized (hydrocyanic acid, aqueous solution).

    (a) Hydrogen cyanide, anhydrous, stabilized, must be packed in 
specification cylinders as follows:
    (1) As prescribed in Sec. 173.192, or
    (2) Specification 3A480, 3A480X, 3AA480, or 3A1800 metal cylinders 
of not over 126 kg (278 pounds) water capacity (nominal). Shipments in 
3AL cylinders are authorized only when transported by highway and rail.
    (b) Cylinders may not be charged with more than 0.27 kg (0.6 pound) 
of liquid per 0.45 kg (1 pound) water capacity of cylinder. Each filled 
cylinder must be tested for leakage before being offered for 
transportation or transported and must show absolutely no leakage; this 
test must consist of passing a piece of Guignard's sodium picrate paper 
over the closure of the cylinder, without the protection cap attached, 
to detect any escape of hydrogen cyanide from the cylinder. Other 
equally efficient test methods may be used in place of sodium picrate 
paper.
    (c) Packagings for hydrogen cyanide must conform to Sec. 173.40.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66271, 
Dec. 20, 1991]



Sec. 173.196  Infectious substances (etiologic agents).

    (a) Authorized packagings and components are as follows:
    (1) Inner packagings comprising:
    (i) A watertight primary receptacle;
    (ii) A watertight secondary packaging; and
    (iii) When the primary receptacle contains liquids, an absorbent 
material

[[Page 515]]

must be placed between the primary receptacle and the secondary 
packaging. If multiple-primary receptacles are placed in a single 
secondary packaging they must be wrapped individually to ensure that 
contact between them is prevented. The absorbent material, such as 
cotton wool, must be sufficient to absorb the entire contents of all 
primary receptacles.
    (2) An outer packaging must be of adequate strength for its 
capacity, mass and intended use.
    (b) Each package for infectious substances must be capable of 
passing the tests specified in Sec. 178.609 of this subchapter.
    (c) Packages consigned as freight must be at least 100 mm (3.9 
inches) in the smallest overall external dimensions.
    (d) For all packages containing infectious substances, an itemized 
list of contents must be enclosed between the secondary packaging and 
the outer packaging.
    (e) Although exceptional cases, such as whole organs, may require 
special packaging, the great majority of infectious substances can and 
must be packaged according to the following guidelines.
    (1) Lypholized substances. Primary receptacles include flame-sealed 
glass ampoules or rubber-stopped glass vials fitted with metal seals.
    (2) Liquid or solid substances--(i) Substances shipped at ambient 
temperatures or higher. Primary receptacles include those of glass, 
metal or plastic. Positive means of ensuring a leakproof seal, such as 
heat seal, skirted stopper or metal crimp seal must be provided. If 
screw caps are used, they must be reinforced with adhesive tape.
    (ii) Substances shipped refrigerated or frozen (ice, pre-frozen 
packs, dry ice). Ice or dry ice must be placed outside the secondary 
packagings. Interior supports must be provided to secure the secondary 
packagings in the original position after the ice or dry ice has 
dissipated. If ice is used, the packaging must be leakproof. If dry ice 
is used, the outer packaging must permit the release of carbon dioxide 
gas.
    (iii) Substances shipped in liquid nitrogen. Plastic primary 
receptacles capable of withstanding very low temperatures must be used. 
Secondary packaging must also withstand very low temperatures and in 
most cases will need to be fitted over individual primary receptacles. 
Requirements for shipment of liquid nitrogen must also be observed.
    (f) Whatever the intended temperature of shipment, the primary 
receptacle or secondary packaging used for infectious substances must be 
capable of withstanding, without leakage, an internal pressure which 
produces a pressure differential of not less than 95 kPa (14 psig) and 
temperatures in the range of -40  deg.C to +55  deg.C (-40  deg.F to 
+131  deg.F).
    (g) The requirements of this section supplement the requirements of 
the Department of Health and Human Services contained in 42 CFR part 72.
    (h) Exceptions. The following substances are not subject to any 
requirements of this subchapter if the items as packaged do not contain 
any material otherwise subject to the requirements of this subchapter.
    (1) Diagnostic specimens.
    (2) Biological products.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 173-241, 
59 FR 67511, Dec. 29, 1994; 64 FR 10778, Mar. 5, 1999; 66 FR 45379, Aug. 
28, 2001]

    Effective Date Note: At 67 FR 53140, Aug. 14, 2002, Sec. 173.196 was 
revised, effective Oct. 1, 2002. At 67 FR 54967, Aug. 27, 2002, the 
effective date was corrected to Feb. 14, 2003. For the convenience of 
the user, the revised text is set forth as follows:

Sec. 173.196  Infectious substances.

    (a) Division 6.2 packaging. A Division 6.2 packaging must meet the 
test standards of Sec. 178.609 of this subchapter and must be marked in 
conformance with Sec. 178.503(f) of this subchapter. Division 6.2 
packaging is a triple packaging consisting of the following components:
    (1) A watertight primary receptacle.
    (2) A watertight secondary packaging. If multiple fragile primary 
receptacles are placed in a single secondary packaging, they must be 
wrapped individually to prevent contact between them.
    (3) An outer packaging of adequate strength for its capacity, mass 
and intended use. The outer packaging must measure at least 100 mm (3.9 
inches) at its smallest overall external dimension.
    (4) For a liquid infectious substance, an absorbent material placed 
between the primary receptacle and the secondary packaging. The

[[Page 516]]

absorbent material must be sufficient to absorb the entire contents of 
all primary receptacles.
    (5) An itemized list of contents enclosed between the secondary 
packaging and the outer packaging.
    (6) The primary receptacle or secondary packaging used for 
infectious substances must be capable of withstanding, without leakage, 
an internal pressure producing a pressure differential of not less than 
95 kPa (0.95 bar, 14 psi).
    (7) The primary receptacle or secondary packaging used for 
infectious substances must be capable of withstanding without leakage 
temperatures in the range of -40  deg.C to +55  deg.C (-40  deg.F to 
+131  deg.F).
    (b) Additional requirements for packaging infectious substances. 
Infectious substances must be packaged according to the following 
requirements depending on the physical state and other characteristics 
of the material:
    (1) Infectious lyophilized (freeze-dried) substances. Primary 
receptacles must be flame-sealed glass ampules or rubber-stopped glass 
vials fitted with metal seals.
    (2) Liquid or solid infectious substances--
    (i) Infectious substances shipped at ambient temperatures or higher. 
Authorized primary receptacles are those of glass, metal, or plastic. 
Positive means of ensuring a leakproof seal must be provided, such as 
heat seal, skirted stopper, or metal crimp seal. If screw caps are used, 
they must be secured by positive means, such as with adhesive tape.
    (ii) Infectious substances shipped refrigerated or frozen (ice, pre-
frozen packs, dry ice). Ice or dry ice must be placed outside the 
secondary packagings or in an overpack with one or more complete 
packages marked in accordance with Sec. 178.503 of this subchapter. 
Interior supports must be provided to secure the secondary packagings in 
the original position after the ice or dry ice has dissipated. If ice is 
used, the outside packaging must be leakproof. If dry ice is used, the 
outside packaging must permit the release of carbon dioxide gas and 
otherwise meet the provisions in Sec. 173.217. The primary receptacle 
and the secondary packaging must maintain their integrity at the 
temperature of the refrigerant used as well as the temperatures and 
pressures of air transport to which they could be subjected if 
refrigeration were lost.
    (iii) Infectious substances shipped in liquid nitrogen. Primary 
receptacles capable of withstanding very low temperatures must be used. 
Secondary packaging must withstand very low temperatures and in most 
cases will need to be fitted over individual primary receptacles. The 
primary receptacle and the secondary packaging must maintain their 
integrity at the temperature of the liquid nitrogen as well as the 
temperatures and pressures of air transport to which they could be 
subjected if refrigeration were to be lost. Refrigerated liquid nitrogen 
packagings must be metal vacuum insulated vessels or flasks (also called 
``dry shippers'') vented to the atmosphere to prevent any increase in 
pressure within the packaging. The use of safety relief valves, check 
valves, frangible discs, or similar devices in the vent lines is 
prohibited. Fill and discharge openings must be protected against the 
entry of foreign materials that might cause an increase in the internal 
pressure. The package orientation markings specified in Sec. 172.312(a) 
of this subchapter must be marked on the packaging. The packaging must 
be designed to prevent the release of any refrigerated liquid nitrogen 
irrespective of the packaging orientation.
    (c) Live animals may not be used to transport infectious substances 
unless such substances cannot be sent by any other means. An animal 
containing or contaminated with an infectious substance must be 
transported under terms and conditions approved by the Associate 
Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety.
    (d) Body parts, organs or whole bodies meeting the definition of 
Division 6.2 material must be packaged as follows:
    (1) In Division 6.2 packaging, as specified in paragraphs (a) and 
(b) of this section; or
    (2) In packaging meeting the requirements of Sec. 173.197.



Sec. 173.197  Regulated medical waste.

    Regulated medical waste must be packaged in packagings conforming to 
the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group II 
performance level. The packagings must be:
    (a) Rigid;
    (b) Leak resistant;
    (c) Impervious to moisture;
    (d) Of sufficient strength to prevent tearing or bursting under 
normal conditions of use and handling;
    (e) Sealed to prevent leakage during transport;
    (f) Puncture resistant for sharps and sharps with residual fluids; 
and
    (g) Break-resistant and tightly lidded or stoppered for fluids in 
quantities greater than 20 cubic cm.

[Amdt. 173-224, 56 FR 66271, Dec. 20, 1991, as amended at 64 FR 51919, 
Sept. 27, 1999; 66 FR 45380, Sept. 28, 2001]

    Effective Date Note: At 67 FR 53140, Aug. 14, 2002, Sec. 173.197 was 
revised, effective Oct. 1, 2002. At 67 FR 54967, Aug. 27, 2002, the 
effective date was corrected to Feb. 14, 2003. For the convenience of 
the user, the revised text is set forth as follows:

[[Page 517]]

Sec. 173.197  Regulated medical waste.

    (a) General provisions. Non-bulk packagings, large packagings, and 
bulk outer packagings used for the transportation of regulated medical 
waste must be rigid containers meeting the provisions of subpart B of 
this part.
    (b) Non-bulk packagings. Except as otherwise provided in 
Sec. 173.134 of this subpart, non-bulk packagings for regulated medical 
waste must be DOT specification packagings conforming to the 
requirements of Part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group II 
performance level. A non-bulk packaging must be puncture-resistant for 
sharps and sharps with residual fluid as demonstrated by conducting the 
performance tests in Part 178, Subpart M, of this subchapter on 
packagings containing materials representative of the sharps and fluids 
(such as sterile sharps) intended to be transported in the packagings.
    (c) Large Packagings. Large Packagings constructed, tested, and 
marked in accordance with the requirements of the UN Recommendations and 
conforming to other requirements of this paragraph (c) may be used for 
the transportation of regulated medical waste, provided the waste is 
contained in inner packagings conforming to the requirements of 
paragraph (e) of this section. Each Large Packaging design must be 
capable of meeting the vibration test specified in Sec. 178.819 of this 
subchapter. Each Large Packaging is subject to the periodic design 
requalification requirements for intermediate bulk containers in 
Sec. 178.801(e) of this subchapter and to the proof of compliance 
requirements of Sec. 178.801(j) and record retention requirements of 
Sec. 178.801(l) of this subchapter. Inner packagings used for liquids 
must be rigid.
    (1) Authorized packagings. Only the following Large Packagings are 
authorized for the transportation of liquid or solid regulated medical 
waste:
    (i) Metal: 50A, 50B, or 50N.
    (ii) Rigid plastic: 50H.
    (2) Additional requirements. Each Large Packaging used to transport 
liquid regulated medical waste must contain absorbent material in 
sufficient quantity and appropriate location to absorb the entire amount 
of liquid present in the event of an unintentional release of contents. 
Each Large Packaging design intended for the transportation of sharps 
containers must be puncture resistant and capable of retaining liquids. 
The design must also be tested and certified as meeting the performance 
tests specified for intermediate bulk containers intended for the 
transportation of liquids in subpart O of part 178 of this subchapter.
    (d) Non-specification bulk packaging. A wheeled cart (Cart) or bulk 
outer packaging (BOP) is authorized as an outer packaging for the 
transportation of regulated medical waste in accordance with the 
provisions of this paragraph (d).
    (1) General requirements. The following requirements apply to the 
transportation of regulated medical waste in Carts or BOPs:
    (i) Regulated medical waste in each Cart or BOP must be contained in 
non-bulk inner packagings conforming to paragraph (e) of this section.
    (ii) Each Cart or BOP must have smooth, non-porous interior surfaces 
free of cracks, crevices, and other defects that could damage plastic 
film inner packagings or impede disinfection operations.
    (iii) Except as otherwise provided in this paragraph (d), each Cart 
or BOP must be used exclusively for the transportation of regulated 
medical waste. Prior to reuse, each Cart or BOP must be disinfected by 
any means effective for neutralizing the infectious substance the 
packaging previously contained.
    (iv) Untreated cultures and stocks of infectious substances 
containing Risk Group 4 materials may not be transported in a Cart or 
BOP.
    (v) Division 6.1 toxic waste or Class 7 radioactive waste, with the 
exception of chemotherapeutic waste, may not be transported in a Cart or 
BOP.
    (vi) Division 6.1 or Class 7 chemotherapeutic waste; untreated 
stocks and cultures of infectious substances containing Risk Group 2 or 
3 pathogenic organisms; unabsorbed liquids; and sharps containers may be 
transported in a Cart or BOP only if packaged in rigid non-bulk 
packagings conforming to paragraph (a) of this section.
    (2) Wheeled cart (Cart). A Cart is authorized as an outer packaging 
for the transportation of regulated medical waste if it conforms to the 
following requirements:
    (i) Each Cart must consist of a solid, one-piece body with a nominal 
volume not exceeding 1,655 L (437 gallons).
    (ii) Each Cart must be constructed of metal, rigid plastic, or 
fiberglass fitted with a lid to prevent leakage during transport.
    (iii) Each Cart must be capable of meeting the requirements of 
Sec. 178.603 (drop test), as specified for solids at the Packing Group 
II performance level.
    (iv) Inner packagings must be placed into a Cart and restrained in 
such a manner as to minimize the risk of breakage.
    (3) Bulk outer packaging (BOP). A BOP is authorized as an outer 
packaging for regulated medical waste if it conforms to the following 
requirements:
    (i) Each BOP must be constructed of metal or fiberglass and have a 
capacity of at least 3.5 cubic meters (123.6 cubic feet) and not more 
than 45 cubic meters (1,590 cubic feet).

[[Page 518]]

    (ii) Each BOP must have bottom and side joints of fully welded or 
seamless construction and a rigid, weatherproof top to prevent the 
intrusion of water (e.g., rain or snow).
    (iii) Each opening in a BOP must be fitted with a closure to prevent 
the intrusion of water or the release of any liquid during all loading, 
unloading, and transportation operations.
    (iv) In the upright position, each BOP must be leakproof and able to 
contain a liquid quantity of at least 300 liters (79.2 gallons) with 
closures open.
    (v) Inner packagings must be placed in a BOP in such a manner as to 
minimize the risk of breakage. Rigid inner packagings may not be placed 
in the same BOP with plastic film bag inner packagings unless separated 
from each other by rigid barriers or dividers to prevent damage to the 
packagings caused by load shifting during normal conditions of 
transportation.
    (vi) Division 6.1 or Class 7 chemotherapeutic waste, untreated 
cultures and stocks of infectious substances containing Risk Group 2 or 
3 pathogenic organisms, unabsorbed liquids, and sharps may be 
transported in a BOP only if separated and secured as provided by 
paragraph (d)(3)(v) of this section.
    (e) Inner packagings authorized for Large Packagings, Carts, and 
BOPs. After September 30, 2003, inner packagings must be durably marked 
or tagged with the name and location (city and state) of the offeror, 
except when the entire contents of the Large Packaging, Cart, or BOP 
originates at a single location and is delivered to a single location.
    (1) Solids. A plastic film bag is authorized as an inner packaging 
for solid regulated medical waste transported in a Cart, Large 
Packaging, or BOP. Waste material containing absorbed liquid may be 
packaged as a solid in a plastic film bag if the bag contains sufficient 
absorbent material to absorb and retain all liquid during 
transportation.
    (i) The film bag may not exceed a volume of 175 L (46 gallons). The 
film bag must be marked and certified by its manufacturer as having 
passed the tests prescribed for tear resistance in ASTM D 1709-01, 
Standard Test Methods for Impact Resistance of Plastic Film by the Free-
Falling Dart Method (see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter), and for impact 
resistance in ASTM D 1922-00a, Standard Test Method for Propagation Tear 
Resistance of Plastic Film and Thin Sheeting by Pendulum Method (see 
Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter). The film bag must meet an impact 
resistance of 165 grams and a tearing resistance of 480 grams in both 
the parallel and perpendicular planes with respect to the length of the 
bag.
    (ii) The plastic film bag must be closed with a minimum of entrapped 
air to prevent leakage in transportation. The bag must be capable of 
being held in an inverted position with the closed end at the bottom for 
a period of 5 minutes without leakage.
    (iii) When used as an inner packaging for Carts or BOPs, a plastic 
film bag may not weigh more than 10 kg (22 lbs.) when filled.
    (2) Liquids. Liquid regulated medical waste transported in a Large 
Packaging, Cart, or BOP must be packaged in a rigid inner packaging 
conforming to the requirements of paragraph (a) of this section. Liquid 
materials are not authorized for transportation in inner packagings 
having a capacity greater than 19 L (5 gallons).
    (3) Sharps. Sharps transported in a Large Packaging, Cart, or BOP 
must be packaged in a puncture-resistant inner packaging (sharps 
container). Each sharps container exceeding 76 L (20 gallons) in volume 
must be capable of passing the performance tests in Sec. 178.601 of this 
subchapter at the Packing Group II performance level. A sharps container 
may be reused only if it conforms to the following criteria:
    (i) The sharps container is specifically approved and certified by 
the U.S. Food and Drug Administration as a medical device for reuse.
    (ii) The sharps container must be permanently marked for reuse.
    (iii) The sharps container must be disinfected prior to reuse by any 
means effective for the infectious substance the container previously 
contained.
    (iv) The sharps container must have a capacity greater than 7.57 L 
(2 gallons) and not greater than 151.42 L (40 gallons) in volume.



Sec. 173.198  Nickel carbonyl.

    (a) Nickel carbonyl must be packed in specification steel or nickel 
cylinders as prescribed for any compressed gas except acetylene. A 
cylinder used exclusively for nickel carbonyl may be given a complete 
external visual inspection instead of the pressure test required by 
Sec. 180.205 of this subchapter. Visual inspection must be in accordance 
with CGA Pamphlet C-6 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this 
subchapter).
    (b) Packagings for nickel carbonyl must conform to Sec. 173.40.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52643, Dec 21, 1990, as amended at 67 FR 51643, 
Aug. 8, 2002]



Sec. 173.199  Diagnostic specimens and used health care products.

    (a) Diagnostic specimens. Except as provided in this paragraph (a), 
diagnostic specimens are excepted from all other requirements of this 
subchapter when offered for transportation or transported in accordance 
with this

[[Page 519]]

section. Diagnostic specimens offered for transportation or transported 
by aircraft under the provisions of this section are subject to the 
incident reporting requirements in Secs. 171.15 and 171.16 of this 
subchapter. A diagnostic specimen meeting the definition of a hazard 
class other than Division 6.2 must be offered for transportation or 
transported in accordance with applicable requirements of this 
subchapter.
    (1) Diagnostic specimens must be packaged in a triple packaging, 
consisting of a primary receptacle, a secondary packaging, and an outer 
packaging.
    (2) Primary receptacles must be packed in secondary packaging in 
such a way that, under normal conditions of transport, they cannot 
break, be punctured, or leak their contents into the secondary 
packaging.
    (3) Secondary packagings must be secured in outer packagings with 
suitable cushioning material such that any leakage of the contents will 
not impair the protective properties of the cushioning material or the 
outer packaging.
    (4) The completed package must be capable of successfully passing 
the drop test in Sec. 178.603 of this subchapter at a drop height of at 
least 1.2 meters (3.9 feet). The outer packaging must be clearly and 
durably marked with the words ``Diagnostic Specimen.''
    (b) Liquid diagnostic specimens. Liquid diagnostic specimens must be 
packaged in conformance with the following provisions:
    (1) The primary receptacle must be leakproof with a volumetric 
capacity of not more than 500 mL (16.9 ounces).
    (2) Absorbent material must be placed between the primary receptacle 
and secondary packaging. If several fragile primary receptacles are 
placed in a single secondary packaging, they must be individually 
wrapped or separated so as to prevent contact between them. The 
absorbent material must be of sufficient quantity to absorb the entire 
contents of the primary receptacles.
    (3) The secondary packaging must be leakproof.
    (4) For shipments by aircraft, the primary receptacle or the 
secondary packaging must be capable of withstanding without leakage an 
internal pressure producing a pressure differential of not less than 95 
kPa (0.95 bar, 14 psi).
    (5) The outer packaging may not exceed 4 L (1 gallon) capacity.
    (c) Solid diagnostic specimens. Solid diagnostic specimens must be 
packaged in a triple packaging, consisting of a primary receptacle, 
secondary packaging, and outer packaging, conforming to the following 
provisions:
    (1) The primary receptacle must be siftproof with a capacity of not 
more than 500 g (1.1 pounds).
    (2) If several fragile primary receptacles are placed in a single 
secondary packaging, they must be individually wrapped or separated so 
as to prevent contact between them.
    (3) The secondary packaging must be leakproof.
    (4) The outer packaging may not exceed 4 kg (8.8 pounds) capacity.
    (d) Used health care products. A used health care product being 
returned to the manufacturer or the manufacturer's designee is excepted 
from the requirements of this subchapter when offered for transportation 
or transported in accordance with this section. For purposes of this 
section, a health care product is used when it has been removed from its 
original inner packaging. Used health care products contaminated with or 
suspected of contamination with a Risk Group 4 infectious substance may 
not be transported under the provisions of this section.
    (1) Each used health care product must be drained of free liquid to 
the extent practicable and placed in a watertight primary container 
designed and constructed to assure that it remains intact under 
conditions normally incident to transportation. For a used health care 
product capable of cutting or penetrating skin or packaging material, 
the primary container must be capable of retaining the product without 
puncture of the packaging under normal conditions of transport. Each 
primary container must be marked with a BIOHAZARD marking conforming to 
29 CFR 1910.1030(g)(1)(i).
    (2) Each primary container must be placed inside a watertight 
secondary container designed and constructed to assure that it remains 
intact under

[[Page 520]]

conditions normally incident to transportation. The secondary container 
must be marked with a BIOHAZARD marking conforming to 29 CFR 
1910.1030(g)(1)(i).
    (3) The secondary container must be placed inside an outer packaging 
with sufficient cushioning material to prevent movement between the 
secondary container and the outer packaging. An itemized list of the 
contents of the primary container and information concerning possible 
contamination with a Division 6.2 material, including its possible 
location on the product, must be placed between the secondary container 
and the outside packaging.
    (e) Training. Each person who offers or transports a diagnostic 
specimen or used health care product under the provisions of this 
section must know about the requirements of this section.

[67 FR 53240, Aug. 14, 2002]

    Effective Date Note: At 67 FR 53140, Aug. 14, 2002, Sec. 173.199 was 
added, effective Oct. 1, 2002. At 67 FR 54967, Aug. 27, 2002, the 
effective date was corrected to Feb. 14, 2003.



Sec. 173.201  Non-bulk packagings for liquid hazardous materials in Packing Group I.

    (a) When Sec. 172.101 of this subchapter specifies that a liquid 
hazardous material be packaged under this section, only non-bulk 
packagings prescribed in this section may be used for its 
transportation. Each packaging must conform to the general packaging 
requirements of subpart B of part 173, to the requirements of part 178 
of this subchapter at the Packing Group I performance level, and to the 
requirements of the special provisions of column 7 of the Sec. 172.101 
table.
    (b) The following combination packagings are authorized:

Outer packagings:

Steel drum: 1A1 or 1A2
Aluminum drum: 1B1 or 1B2
Metal drum other than steel or aluminum: 1N1 or 1N2
Plywood drum: 1D
Fiber drum: 1G
Plastic drum: 1H1 or 1H2
Steel jerrican: 3A1 or 3A2
Plastic jerrican: 3H1 or 3H2
Aluminum jerrican: 3B1 or 3B2
Steel box: 4A
Aluminum box: 4B
Natural wood box: 4C1 or 4C2
Plywood box: 4D
Reconstituted wood box: 4F
Fiberboard box: 4G
Expanded plastic box: 4H1
Solid plastic box: 4H2

Inner packagings:
Glass or earthenware receptacles
Plastic receptacles
Metal receptacles
Glass ampoules

    (c) Except for transportation by passenger aircraft, the following 
single packagings are authorized:

Steel drum: 1A1 or 1A2
Aluminum drum: 1B1 or 1B2
Metal drum other than steel, or aluminum: 1N1 or 1N2
Plastic drum: 1H1 or 1H2
Steel jerrican: 3A1 or 3A2
Plastic jerrican: 3H1 or 3H2
Aluminum jerrican: 3B1 or 3B2
Plastic receptacle in steel, aluminum, fiber or plastic drum: 6HA1, 
6HB1, 6HG1, 6HH1
Plastic receptacle in steel, aluminum, wooden, plywood or fiberboard 
box: 6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2 or 6HG2
Glass, porcelain or stoneware in steel, aluminum or fiber drum: 6PA1, 
6PB1 or 6PG1
Glass, porcelain or stoneware in steel, aluminum, wooden or fiberboard 
box: 6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC or 6PG2
Glass, porcelain or stoneware in solid or expanded plastic packaging: 
6PH1 or 6PH2
Cylinders, specification, as prescribed for any compressed gas, except 
for Specifications 8 and 3HT

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 173-241, 
59 FR 67518, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173-261, 62 FR 24734, May 6, 1997]



Sec. 173.202  Non-bulk packagings for liquid hazardous materials in Packing Group II.

    (a) When Sec. 172.101 of this subchapter specifies that a liquid 
hazardous material be packaged under this section, only non-bulk 
packagings prescribed in this section may be used for its 
transportation. Each packaging must conform to the general packaging 
requirements of subpart B of part 173, to the requirements of part 178 
of this subchapter at the Packing Group I or II performance level 
(unless otherwise excepted), and to the particular requirements of the 
special provisions of column 7 of the Sec. 172.101 table.
    (b) The following combination packagings are authorized:

Outer packagings:

[[Page 521]]

Steel drum: 1A1 or 1A2
Aluminum drum: 1B1 or 1B2
Metal drum other than steel or aluminum: 1N1 or 1N2
Plywood drum: 1D
Fiber drum: 1G
Plastic drum: 1H1 or 1H2
Wooden barrel: 2C2
Steel jerrican: 3A1 or 3A2
Plastic jerrican: 3H1 or 3H2
Aluminum jerrican: 3B1 or 3B2
Steel box: 4A
Aluminum box: 4B
Natural wood box: 4C1 or 4C2
Plywood box: 4D
Reconstituted wood box: 4F
Fiberboard box: 4G
Expanded plastic box: 4H1
Solid plastic box: 4H2

Inner packagings:
Glass or earthenware receptacles
Plastic receptacles
Metal receptacles
Glass ampoules

    (c) Except for transportation by passenger aircraft, the following 
single packagings are authorized:

Steel drum: 1A1 or 1A2
Aluminum drum: 1B1 or 1B2
Metal drum other than steel or aluminum: 1N1 or 1N2
Plastic drum: 1H1 or 1H2
Fiber drum: 1G (with liner)
Wooden barrel: 2C1
Steel jerrican: 3A1 or 3A2
Plastic jerrican: 3H1 or 3H2
Aluminum jerrican: 3B1 or 3B2
Plastic receptacle in steel, aluminum, fiber or plastic drum: 6HA1, 
6HB1, 6HG1 or 6HH1
Plastic receptacle in steel, aluminum, wooden, plywood or fiberboard 
box: 6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2 or 6HG2
Glass, porcelain or stoneware in steel, aluminum or fiber drum: 6PA1, 
6PB1 or 6PG1
Glass, porcelain or stoneware in steel, aluminum, wooden or fiberboard 
box: 6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC or 6PG2
Glass, porcelain or stoneware in solid or expanded plastic packaging: 
6PH1 or 6PH2
Plastic receptacle in plywood drum: 6HD1
Glass, porcelain or stoneware in plywood drum or wickerwork hamper: 6PDl 
or 6PD2
Cylinders, specification, as prescribed for any compressed gas, except 
for Specifications 8 and 3HT

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66271, 
Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt 173-241, 59 FR 67518, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173-261, 
62 FR 24734, May 6, 1997; 62 FR 51560, Oct. 1, 1997]



Sec. 173.203  Non-bulk packagings for liquid hazardous materials in Packing Group III.

    (a) When Sec. 172.101 of this subchapter specifies that a liquid 
hazardous material be packaged under this section, only non-bulk 
packagings prescribed in this section may be used for its 
transportation. Each packaging must conform to the general packaging 
requirements of subpart B of part 173, to the requirements of part 178 
of this subchapter at the Packing Group I, II or III performance level, 
and to the requirements of the special provisions of column 7 of the 
Sec. 172.101 table.
    (b) The following combination packagings are authorized:

Outer packagings:
Steel drum: 1A1 or 1A2
Aluminum drum: 1B1 or 1B2
Metal drum other than steel or aluminum: 1N1 or 1N2
Plywood drum: 1D
Fiber drum: 1G
Plastic drum: 1H1 or 1H2
Wooden barrel: 2C2
Steel jerrican: 3A1 or 3A2
Plastic jerrican: 3H1 or 3H2
Aluminum jerrican: 3B1 or 3B2
Steel box: 4A
Aluminum box: 4B
Natural wood box: 4C1 or 4C2
Plywood box: 4D
Reconstituted wood box: 4F
Fiberboard box: 4G
Expanded plastic box: 4H1
Solid plastic box: 4H2

Inner packagings:
Glass or earthenware receptacles
Plastic receptacles
Metal receptacles
Glass ampoules

    (c) The following single packagings are authorized:

Steel drum: 1A1 or 1A2
Aluminum drum: 1B1 or 1B2
Metal drum other than steel or aluminum: 1N1
Plastic drum: 1H1 or 1H2
Fiber drum: 1G (with liner)
Wooden barrel: 2C1
Steel jerrican: 3A1 or 3A2
Plastic jerrican: 3H1 or 3H2
Aluminum jerrican: 3B1 or 3B2
Plastic receptacle in steel, aluminum, fiber or plastic drum: 6HA1, 
6HB1, 6HG1 or 6HH1
Plastic receptacle in steel, aluminum, wooden, plywood or fiberboard 
box: 6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2 or 6HG2
Glass, porcelain or stoneware in steel, aluminum or fiber drum: 6PA1, 
6PB1, or 6PG1

[[Page 522]]

Glass, porcelain or stoneware in steel, aluminum, wooden or fiberboard 
box: 6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC or 6PG2
Glass, porcelain or stoneware in solid or expanded plastic packaging: 
6PH1 or 6PH2
Plastic receptacle in plywood drum: 6HD1
Glass, porcelain or stoneware in plywood drum or wickerwork hamper: 6PD1 
or 6PD2
Cylinders, as prescribed for any compressed gas, except for 
Specifications 8 and 3HT

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66271, 
Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-241, 59 FR 67518, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173-261, 
62 FR 24734, May 6, 1997]



Sec. 173.204  Non-bulk, non-specification packagings for certain hazardous materials.

    When Sec. 172.101 of this subchapter specifies that a liquid or 
solid hazardous material be packaged under this section, any appropriate 
non-bulk packaging which conforms to the general packaging requirements 
of subpart B of part 173 may be used for its transportation. Packagings 
need not conform to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter.



Sec. 173.205  Specification cylinders for liquid hazardous materials.

    When Sec. 172.101 of this subchapter specifies that a hazardous 
material be packaged under this section, any specification cylinder, 
except those specified for acetylene, is authorized. Cylinders used for 
poisonous materials (Division 6.1 or 2.3) must conform to the 
requirements of Sec. 173.40.



Sec. 173.211  Non-bulk packagings for solid hazardous materials in Packing Group I.

    (a) When Sec. 172.101 of this subchapter specifies that a solid 
hazardous material be packaged under this section, only non-bulk 
packagings prescribed in this section may be used for its 
transportation. Each package must conform to the general packaging 
requirements of subpart B of part 173, to the requirements of part 178 
of this subchapter at the Packing Group I performance level, and to the 
requirements of the special provisions of column 7 of the Sec. 172.101 
table.
    (b) The following combination packagings are authorized:

Outer packagings:
Steel drum: 1A1 or 1A2
Aluminum drum: 1B1 or 1B2
Metal drum other than steel or aluminum: 1N1 or 1N2
Plywood drum: 1D
Fiber drum: 1G
Plastic drum: 1H1 or 1H2
Wooden barrel: 2C2
Steel jerrican: 3A1 or 3A2
Plastic jerrican: 3H1 or 3H2
Aluminum jerrican: 3B1 or 3B2
Steel box: 4A
Aluminum box: 4B
Natural wood box: 4C1 or 4C2
Plywood box: 4D
Reconstituted wood box: 4F
Fiberboard box: 4G
Solid plastic box: 4H2

Inner packagings:
Glass or earthenware receptacles
Plastic receptacles
Metal receptacles
Glass ampoules

    (c) Except for transportation by passenger aircraft, the following 
single packagings are authorized:

Steel drum: 1A1 or 1A2
Aluminum drum: 1B1 or 1B2
Metal drum other than steel or aluminum: 1N1 or 1N2
Plastic drum: 1H1 or 1H2
Fiber drum: 1G
Steel jerrican: 3A1 or 3A2
Plastic jerrican: 3H1 or 3H2
Aluminum jerrican: 3B1 or 3B2
Steel box with liner: 4A
Aluminum box with liner: 4B
Natural wood box, sift proof: 4C2
Plastic receptacle in steel, aluminum, plywood, fiber or plastic drum: 
6HA1, 6HB1, 6HD1, 6HG1 or 6HH1
Plastic receptacle in steel, aluminum, wooden, plywood or fiberboard 
box: 6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2 or 6HG2
Glass, porcelain or stoneware in steel, aluminum, plywood or fiber drum: 
6PA1, 6PB1, 6PD1 or 6PG1
Glass, porcelain or stoneware in steel, aluminum, wooden or fiberboard 
box: 6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC or 6PG2
Glass, porcelain or stoneware in expanded or solid plastic packaging: 
6PH1 or 6PH2

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66271, 
Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45463, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 173-241, 59 FR 67511, 
67518, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173-261, 62 FR 24734, May 6, 1997]



Sec. 173.212  Non-bulk packagings for solid hazardous materials in Packing Group II.

    (a) When Sec. 172.101 of this subchapter specifies that a solid 
hazardous material be packaged under this section, only non-bulk 
packagings prescribed in

[[Page 523]]

this section may be used for its transportation. Each package must 
conform to the general packaging requirements of subpart B of part 173, 
to the requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group 
I or II performance level, and to the requirements of the special 
provisions of column 7 of the Sec. 172.101 table.
    (b) The following combination packagings are authorized:

Outer packagings:
Steel drum: 1A1 or 1A2
Aluminum drum: 1B1 or 1B2
Metal drum other than steel or aluminum: 1N1 or 1N2
Plywood drum: 1D
Fiber drum: 1G
Plastic drum: 1H1 or 1H2
Wooden barrel: 2C2
Steel jerrican: 3A1 or 3A2
Plastic jerrican: 3H1 or 3H2
Aluminum jerrican: 3B1 or 3B2
Steel box: 4A
Aluminum box: 4B
Natural wood box: 4C1 or 4C2
Plywood box: 4D
Reconstituted wood box: 4F
Fiberboard box: 4G
Solid plastic box: 4H2

Inner packagings:
Glass or earthenware receptacles
Plastic receptacles
Metal receptacles
Glass ampoules

    (c) Except for transportation by passenger aircraft, the following 
single packagings are authorized:

Steel drum: 1A1 or 1A2
Aluminum drum: 1B1 or 1B2
Plywood drum: 1D
Plastic drum: 1H1 or 1H2
Fiber drum: 1G
Metal drum other than steel or aluminum: 1N1 or 1N2
Wooden barrel: 2C1 or 2C2
Steel jerrican: 3A1 or 3A2
Plastic jerrican: 3H1 or 3H2
Aluminum jerrican: 3B1 or 3B2
Steel box: 4A
Steel box with liner: 4A
Aluminum box: 4B
Aluminum box with liner: 4B
Natural wood box: 4C1
Natural wood box, sift proof: 4C2
Plywood box: 4D
Reconstituted wood box: 4F
Fiberboard box: 4G
Expanded plastic box: 4H1
Solid plastic box: 4H2
Bag, woven plastic: 5H1, 5H2 or 5H3
Bag, plastic film: 5H4
Bag, textile: 5L1, 5L2 or 5L3
Bag, paper, multiwall, water resistant: 5M2
Plastic receptacle in steel, aluminum, plywood, fiber or plastic drum: 
6HA1, 6HB1, 6HD1, 6HG1 or 6HH1
Plastic receptacle in steel aluminum, wood, plywood or fiberboard box: 
6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2 or 6HG2
Glass, porcelain or stoneware in steel, aluminum, plywood or fiber drum: 
6PA1, 6PB1, 6PD1 or 6PG1
Glass, porcelain or stoneware in steel, aluminum, wooden or fiberboard 
box: 6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC or 6PG2
Glass, porcelain or stoneware in expanded or solid plastic packaging: 
6PH1 or 6PH2

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52634, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 173-241, 
59 FR 67511, 67518, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173-261, 62 FR 24734, May 6, 
1997]



Sec. 173.213  Non-bulk packagings for solid hazardous materials in Packing Group III.

    (a) When Sec. 172.101 of this subchapter specifies that a solid 
hazardous material be packaged under this section, only non-bulk 
packagings prescribed in this section may be used for its 
transportation. Each package must conform to the general packaging 
requirements of subpart B of part 173, to the requirements of part 178 
of this subchapter at the Packing Group I, II or III performance level, 
and to the requirements of the special provisions of column 7 of the 
Sec. 172.101 table.
    (b) The following combination packagings are authorized:

Outer packagings:
Steel drum: 1A1 or 1A2
Aluminum drum: 1B1 or 1B2
Metal drum other than steel or aluminum: 1N1 or 1N2
Plywood drum: 1D
Fiber drum: 1G
Plastic drum: 1H1 or 1H2
Wooden barrel: 2C2
Steel jerrican: 3A1 or 3A2
Plastic jerrican: 3H1 or 3H2
Aluminum jerrican: 3B1 or 3B2
Steel box: 4A
Aluminum box: 4B
Natural wood box: 4C1 or 4C2
Plywood box: 4D
Reconstituted wood box: 4F
Fiberboard box: 4G
Solid plastic box: 4H2

Inner packagings:
Glass or earthenware receptacles
Plastic receptacles
Metal receptacles
Glass ampoules


[[Page 524]]


    (c) The following single packagings are authorized:

Steel drum: 1A1 or 1A2
Aluminum drum: 1B1 or 1B2
Plywood drum: 1D
Fiber drum: 1G
Plastic drum: 1H1 or 1H2
Metal drum other than steel or aluminum: 1N1 or 1N2
Wooden barrel: 2C1 or 2C2
Steel jerrican: 3A1 or 3A2
Plastic jerrican: 3H1 or 3H2
Aluminum jerrican: 3B1 or 3B2
Steel box with liner: 4A
Steel box: 4A
Aluminum box with liner: 4B
Natural wood box: 4C1
Natural wood box, sift proof: 4C2
Plywood box: 4D
Reconstituted wood box: 4F
Fiberboard box: 4G
Expanded plastic box: 4H1
Solid plastic box: 4H2
Bag, woven plastic: 5H1, 5H2 or 5H3
Bag, plastic film: 5H4
Bag, textile: 5L1, 5L2 or 5L3
Bag, paper, multiwall, water resistant: 5M2
Plastic receptacle in steel, aluminum, plywood, fiber or plastic drum: 
6HA1, 6HB1, 6HD1, 6HG1 or 6HH1
Plastic receptacle in steel, aluminum, wooden, plywood or fiberboard 
box: 6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2 or 6HG2
Glass, porcelain or stoneware in steel, aluminum, plywood or fiber drum: 
6PA1, 6PB1, 6PD1 or 6PG1
Glass, porcelain or stoneware in steel, aluminum, wooden or fiberboard 
box: 6PA2, 6PB2, 6PC or 6PG2
Glass, porcelain or stoneware in expanded or solid plastic packaging: 
6PH1 or 6PH2

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 173-241, 
59 FR 67511, 67518, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 173-261, 62 FR 24734, May 6, 
1997]



Sec. 173.214  Packagings which require approval by the Associate Administrator.

    When Sec. 172.101 of this subchapter specifies that a hazardous 
material be packaged under this section, packagings and method of 
shipment must be approved by the Associate Administrator prior to the 
first shipment.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 66 FR 45379, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.216  Asbestos, blue, brown or white.

    (a) Asbestos, blue, brown or white, includes each of the following 
hydrated mineral silicates: chrysolite, crocidolite, amosite, 
anthophyllite asbestos, tremolite asbestos, actinolite asbestos, and 
every product containing any of these materials.
    (b) Asbestos which is immersed or fixed in a natural or artificial 
binder material (such as cement, plastic, asphalt, resins or mineral 
ore), and manufactured products containing asbestos are not subject to 
the requirements of this subchapter.
    (c) Packagings for asbestos must conform to the general packaging 
requirements of subpart B of this part but need not conform to the 
requirements of part 178 of this subchapter. Asbestos must be offered 
for transportation and transported in--
    (1) Rigid, leaktight packagings, such as metal, plastic or fiber 
drums, portable tanks, hopper-type rail cars, or hopper-type motor 
vehicles;
    (2) Bags or other non-rigid packagings in closed freight containers, 
motor vehicles, or rail cars that are loaded by and for the exclusive 
use of the consignor and unloaded by the consignee;
    (3) Bags or other non-rigid packagings which are dust and sift-
proof. When transported by other than private carrier by highway, such 
packagings containing asbestos must be palletized and unitized by 
methods such as shrink-wrapping in plastic film or wrapping in 
fiberboard secured by strapping. Pallets need not be used during 
transportation by vessel for loads with slings that are unitized by 
methods such as shrink-wrapping, if the slings adequately and evenly 
support the loads and the unitizing method prevents shifting of the bags 
or other non-rigid packagings during conditions normally incident to 
transportation; or
    (4) Bags or other non-rigid packagings which are dust and sift-proof 
in strong outside fiberboard or wooden boxes.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by 66 FR 45379, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.217  Carbon dioxide, solid (dry ice).

    (a) Carbon dioxide, solid (dry ice), when offered for transportation 
or transported by aircraft or water, must be packed in packagings 
designed and constructed to permit the release of

[[Page 525]]

carbon dioxide gas to prevent a build-up of pressure that could rupture 
the packagings. Packagings must conform to the general packaging 
requirements of subpart B of this part but need not conform to the 
requirements of part 178 of this subchapter. For each shipment by air 
exceeding 2.3 kg (5 lbs) per package, advance arrangements must be made 
between the shipper and each carrier.
    (b) Railroad cars and motor vehicles containing solid carbon 
dioxide, when accepted for transportation on board ocean vessels, must 
be conspicuously marked on two sides ``WARNING CO2 SOLID (DRY 
ICE).''
    (c) Other packagings containing solid carbon dioxide, when offered 
or accepted for transportation on board ocean vessels, must be marked 
``CARBON DIOXIDE, SOLID--DO NOT STOW BELOW DECKS.''
    (d) Not more than 200 kg (441 pounds) of solid carbon dioxide may be 
transported in any one cargo compartment or bin on any aircraft except 
by specific and special written arrangement between the shipper and the 
aircraft operator.
    (e) Carbon dioxide, solid (dry ice) is excepted from the shipping 
paper and certification requirements of this subchapter if the 
requirements of paragraphs (a) and (d) of this section are complied with 
and the package is marked ``Carbon dioxide, solid'' or ``Dry ice'' and 
marked with an indication that the material being refrigerated is used 
for diagnostic or treatment purposes (e.g., frozen medical specimens).

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 173-138, 
59 FR 49133, Sept. 26, 1994]



Sec. 173.218  Fish meal or fish scrap.

    (a) Except as provided in paragraph (b) of this section, fish meal 
or fish scrap, containing at least 6 percent but not more than 12 
percent water, is authorized for transportation by water only when 
packaged as follows:
    (1) Burlap (jute) bag;
    (2) Multi-wall paper bag;
    (3) Polyethylene-lined burlap or paper bag;
    (4) Cargo tank;
    (5) Portable tank;
    (6) Rail car; or
    (7) Freight container.
    (b) Fish meal or fish scrap may not be offered for transportation if 
the temperature of the material exceeds 49  deg.C (120  deg.F).
    (c) When fish scrap or fish meal is offered for transportation by 
vessel in bulk in freight containers, the fish meal must contain at 
least 100 ppm of anti-oxident (ethoxyquin) at the time of shipment.



Sec. 173.219  Life-saving appliances.

    (a) A life-saving appliance, self-inflating or non-self-inflating, 
containing small quantities of hazardous materials which are required as 
part of the life-saving appliance must conform to the requirements of 
this section. Packagings must conform to the general packaging 
requirements of subpart B of this part but need not conform to the 
requirements of part 178 of this subchapter.
    (b) Hazardous materials therein must be packaged as follows:
    (1) Nonflammable compressed gases must be packaged in cylinders in 
accordance with the requirements of this subchapter;
    (2) Smoke and illumination signal flares must be in plastic or 
fiberboard receptacles;
    (3) Strike-anywhere matches must be cushioned to prevent movement or 
friction in a cylindrical metal or composition receptacle with a screw-
type closure;
    (4) Flammable liquids must be in strong inner packagings in a repair 
kit; and
    (5) Limited quantities of other hazardous materials are permitted if 
packaged in accordance with the requirements of this subchapter.
    (c) Materials therein not subject to the requirements of this 
subchapter which are an integral part of the life-saving appliance must 
be packaged in a strong fiberglass kit case which is overpacked in a 
waterproof fiberboard packaging, or be packaged in other strong outer 
packagings.

[[Page 526]]



Sec. 173.220  Internal combustion engines, self-propelled vehicles, mechanical equipment containing internal combustion engines, and battery powered vehicles or 
          equipment.

    (a) Applicability. An internal combustion engine, self-propelled 
vehicle, mechanized equipment containing an internal combustion engine, 
or a battery powered vehicle or equipment is subject to the requirements 
of this subchapter when transported as cargo on a transport vehicle, 
vessel, or aircraft if--
    (1) The engine or fuel tank contains a liquid or gaseous fuel. An 
engine may be considered as not containing fuel when the fuel tank, 
engine components, and fuel lines have been completely drained, 
sufficiently cleaned of residue, and purged of vapors to remove any 
potential hazard and the engine when held in any orientation will not 
release any liquid fuel;
    (2) It is equipped with a wet electric storage battery other than a 
non-spillable battery; or
    (3) Except as provided in paragraph (d)(1) of this section, it 
contains other hazardous materials subject to the requirements of this 
subchapter.
    (b) Requirements. Unless otherwise excepted in paragraph (b)(4) of 
this section, vehicles, engines and equipment are subject to the 
following requirements:
    (1) Flammable liquid fuel. A fuel tank containing a flammable liquid 
fuel must be drained and securely closed, except that up to 500 mL (17 
ounces) of residual fuel may remain in the tank, engine components, or 
fuel lines provided they are securely closed to prevent leakage of fuel 
during transportation. Self-propelled vehicles containing diesel fuel 
are excepted from the requirement to drain the fuel tanks, provided that 
sufficient ullage space has been left inside the tank to allow fuel 
expansion without leakage, and the tank caps are securely closed.
    (2) Flammable liquefied or compressed gas fuel. Fuel tanks and fuel 
systems containing flammable liquefied or compressed gas fuel must be 
securely closed. For transportation by water, the requirements of 
Secs. 176.78(k) and 176.905 of this subchapter apply. For transportation 
by air, the fuel tank and fuel system must be emptied and securely 
closed or must be removed, packaged and transported in accordance the 
requirements of this subchapter.
    (3) Truck bodies or trailers on flat cars--flammable liquid or gas 
powered. Truck bodies or trailers with automatic heating or 
refrigerating equipment of the flammable liquid type may be shipped with 
fuel tanks filled and equipment operating or inoperative, when used for 
the transportation of other freight and loaded on flat cars as part of a 
joint rail and highway movement, provided the equipment and fuel supply 
conform to the requirements of Sec. 177.834(l) of this subchapter.
    (4) Modal exceptions. Quantities of flammable liquid fuel greater 
than 500 mL (17 ounces) may remain in self-propelled vehicles and 
mechanical equipment only under the following conditions:
    (i) For transportation by motor vehicle or rail car, the fuel tanks 
must be securely closed.
    (ii) For transportation by vessel, the shipment must conform to 
Sec. 176.905 of this subchapter.
    (iii) For transportation by aircraft designed or modified for 
vehicle ferry operations, the shipment must conform to Sec. 175.305 of 
this subchapter.
    (c) Wet battery powered or installed. Wet batteries must be securely 
installed and fastened in an upright position. Batteries must be 
protected against short circuits and leakage or removed and packaged 
separately under Sec. 173.159. Battery powered vehicles, machinery or 
equipment including battery powered wheelchairs and mobility aids are 
excepted from the requirements of this subchapter when transported by 
rail, highway or vessel.
    (d) Other hazardous materials. (1) Items of equipment containing 
hazardous materials, fire extinguishers, compressed gas accumulators, 
safety devices and other hazardous materials which are integral 
components of the motor vehicle, engine or mechanical equipment and are 
necessary for the operation of the vehicle, engine or equipment, or for 
the safety of its operator or passengers must be securely installed in 
the motor vehicle, engine or mechanical equipment. Such items are

[[Page 527]]

not otherwise subject to the requirements of this subchapter.
    (2) Other hazardous materials must be packaged and transported in 
accordance with the requirements of this subchapter.
    (e) Exceptions. Except as provided in paragraph (d)(2) of this 
section, shipments made under the provisions of this section--
    (1) Are not subject to any other requirements of this subchapter, 
for transportation by motor vehicle or rail car; and
    (2) Are not subject to the requirements of subparts D, E and F 
(marking, labeling and placarding, respectively) of part 172 of this 
subchapter or Sec. 172.604 of this subchapter (emergency response 
telephone number) for transportation by vessel or aircraft. For 
transportation by aircraft, all other applicable requirements of this 
subchapter, including shipping papers, emergency response information, 
notification of pilot-in-command, general packaging requirements, and 
the requirements specified in Sec. 173.27 must be met. For 
transportation by vessel, additional exceptions are specified in 
Sec. 176.905 of this subchapter.

[64 FR 10778, Mar. 5, 1999, as amended at 66 45381, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.221  Polymeric beads, expandable and Plastic molding compound.

    (a) Non-bulk shipments of Polymeric beads (or granules), expandable, 
evolving flammable vapor and Plastic molding compound in dough, sheet or 
extruded rope form, evolving flammable vapor must be packed in: wooden 
(4C1 or 4C2), plywood (4D), fiberboard (4G), reconstituted wood (4F) 
boxes, plywood drums (1D) or fiber drums (1G) with sealed inner plastic 
liners; in vapor tight metal or plastic drums (1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1H1 
or 1H2); or packed in non-specification packagings when transported in 
dedicated vehicles or freight containers. The packagings need not 
conform to the requirements for package testing in part 178 of this 
subchapter, but must be capable of containing any evolving gases from 
the contents during normal conditions of transportation.
    (b) Bulk shipments of Polymeric beads (or granules), expandable, 
evolving flammable vapor or Plastic molding compounds in dough, sheet or 
extruded rope, evolving flammable vapor may be packed in non-
specification bulk packagings. Except for transportation by highway and 
rail, bulk packagings must be capable of containing any gases evolving 
from the contents during normal conditions of transportation.

[64 FR 10779, Mar. 5, 1999]



Sec. 173.222  Dangerous goods in equipment, machinery or apparatus.

    Hazardous materials in machinery or apparatus are excepted from the 
specification packaging requirements of this subchapter when packaged 
according to this section. Hazardous materials in machinery or apparatus 
must be packaged in strong outer packagings, unless the receptacles 
containing the hazardous materials are afforded adequate protection by 
the construction of the machinery or apparatus. Each package must 
conform to the packaging requirements of subpart B of this part, except 
for the requirements in Secs. 173.24(a)(1) and 173.27(e), and the 
following requirements:
    (a) If the equipment, machinery or apparatus contains more than one 
hazardous material, the materials must not be capable of reacting 
dangerously together.
    (b) The nature of the containment must be as follows--
    (1) Damage to the receptacles containing the hazardous materials 
during transport is unlikely. However, in the event of damage to the 
receptacles containing the hazardous materials, no leakage of the 
hazardous materials from the equipment, machinery or apparatus is 
possible. A leakproof liner may be used to satisfy this requirement.
    (2) Receptacles containing hazardous materials must be secured and 
cushioned so as to prevent their breakage or leakage and so as to 
control their movement within the equipment, machinery or apparatus 
during normal conditions of transportation. Cushioning material must not 
react dangerously with the content of the receptacles. Any leakage of 
the contents

[[Page 528]]

must not substantially impair the protective properties of the 
cushioning material.
    (3) Receptacles for gases, their contents and filling densities must 
conform to the applicable requirements of this subchapter, unless 
otherwise approved by the Associate Administrator.
    (c) The total net quantity of hazardous materials contained in one 
item of equipment, machinery or apparatus must not exceed the following:
    (1) 1 kg (2.2 pounds) in the case of solids;
    (2) 0.5 L (0.3 gallons) in the case of liquids;
    (3) 0.5 kg (1.1 pounds) in the case of Division 2.2 gases; and
    (4) A total quantity of not more than the aggregate of that 
permitted in paragraphs (c)(1) through (c)(3) of this section, for each 
category of material in the package, when a package contains hazardous 
materials in two or more of the categories in paragraphs (c)(1) through 
(c)(3) of this section.
    (d) When a package contains hazardous materials in two or more of 
the categories listed in paragraphs (c)(1) through (c)(3) of this 
section, the total quantity required by Sec. 172.202(c) of this 
subchapter to be entered on the shipping paper, must be the aggregate 
quantity of all hazardous materials, expressed as net mass.

[64 FR 10779, Mar. 5, 1999, as amended at 64 FR 44428, Aug. 16, 1999; 66 
FR 45379, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.224  Packaging and control and emergency temperatures for self-reactive materials.

    (a) General. When the Sec. 172.101 table of this subchapter 
specifies that a Division 4.1 material be packaged in accordance with 
this section, only packagings which conform to the provisions of this 
section may be used. Each packaging must conform to the general 
packaging requirements of subpart B of this part and the applicable 
requirements of part 178 of this subchapter. Non-bulk packagings must 
meet Packing Group II performance levels. To avoid unnecessary 
confinement, metallic non-bulk packagings meeting Packing Group I are 
not authorized. Self-reactive materials which require temperature 
control are subject to the provisions of Sec. 173.21(f). Packagings 
required to bear a Class 1 subsidiary label must conform to Secs. 173.60 
through 173.62.
    (b) Self-Reactive Materials Table. The Self-Reactive Materials Table 
specifies, by technical name, those self-reactive materials that are 
authorized for transportation and not subject to the approval provisions 
of Sec. 173.124(a)(2)(iii). A self-reactive material identified by 
technical name in the following table is authorized for transportation 
only if it conforms to all applicable provisions of the table. The 
column headings of the Self-Reactive Materials Table are as follows:
    (1) Technical name. Column 1 specifies the technical name.
    (2) ID number. Column 2 specifies the identification number which is 
used to identify the proper shipping name in the Sec. 172.101 table.
    (3) Concentration of self-reactive material. Column 3 specifies the 
concentration (percent) limitations, if any, in mixtures or solutions 
for the self-reactive material. Limitations are given as minimums, 
maximums, or a range, as appropriate. A range includes the lower and 
upper limits (i.e., ``53-100'' means from, and including, 53 percent to, 
and including 100 percent).
    (4) Packing method. Column 4 specifies the highest packing method 
which is authorized for the self-reactive material. A packing method 
corresponding to a smaller package size may be used, but a packing 
method corresponding to a larger package size may not be used. The Table 
of Packing Methods in Sec. 173.225(d) defines the packing methods. Bulk 
packagings are authorized as specified in Sec. 173.225(d) for Type F 
self-reactive substances. Additional bulk packagings are authorized if 
approved by the Associate Administrator.
    (5) Control temperature. Column 5 specifies the control temperature 
in  deg.C. Temperatures are specified only when temperature controls are 
required (see Sec. 173.21(f)).
    (6) Emergency temperature. Column 6 specifies the emergency 
temperature in  deg.C. Temperatures are specified only when temperature 
controls are required (see Sec. 173.21(f)).

[[Page 529]]

    (7) Notes. Column 7 specifies other applicable provisions, as set 
forth in notes following the table.

                                          Self-Reactive Materials Table
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                              Control
   Self-reactive substance     Identification  Concentration--   Packing   temperature--    Emergency     Notes
                                     No.             (%)         method      (  deg.C)     temperature
(1)                                    (2)     (3)...........  (4)         (5)..........  (6)..........      (7)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Azodicarbonamide formulation          3232     <100..........  OP5         .............  .............        1
 type B, temperature
 controlled.
Azodicarbonamide formulation          3224     <100..........  OP6         .............  .............  .......
 type C.
Azodicarbonamide formulation          3234     <100..........  OP6         .............  .............        1
 type C, temperature
 controlled.
Azodicarbonamide formulation          3226     <100..........  OP7         .............  .............  .......
 type D.
Azodicarbonamide formulation          3236     <100..........  OP7         .............  .............        1
 type D, temperature
 controlled.
2,2'-Azodi(2,4-dimethyl-4-            3236     100...........  OP7         -5...........  +5...........  .......
 methoxyvaleronitrile).
2,2'-Azodi(2,4-                       3236     100...........  OP7         +10..........  +15..........  .......
 dimethylvaleronitrile).
2,2'-Azodi(ethyl 2-                   3235     100...........  OP7         +20..........  +25..........  .......
 methylpropionate).
1,1-                                  3226     100...........  OP7         .............  .............  .......
 Azodi(hexahydrobenzonitrile).
2,2-Azodi(isobutyronitrile)..         3234     100...........  OP6         +40..........  +45..........  .......
2,2'-Azodi(isobutyronitrile)   ..............  3224..........  ..........  [le]50%......  OP6..........  .......
 as a water based paste.
 
2,2-Azodi(2-                          3236     100...........  OP7         +35..........  +40..........  .......
 methylbutyronitrile).
Benzene-1,3-                          3226     52............  OP7         .............  .............  .......
 disulphohydrazide, as a
 paste.
Benzene sulphohydrazide......         3226     100...........  OP7         .............  .............  .......
4-(Benzyl(ethyl)amino)-3-             3226     100...........  OP7         .............  .............  .......
 ethoxybenzenediazonium zinc
 chloride.
4-(Benzyl(methyl)amino)-3-            3236     100...........  OP7         +40..........  +45..........  .......
 ethoxybenzenediazonium zinc
 chloride.
3-Chloro-4-                           3226     100...........  OP7         .............  .............  .......
 diethylaminobenzenediazonium
 zinc chloride.
2-Diazo-1-Naphthol-4-                 3222     100...........  OP5         .............  .............  .......
 sulphochloride.
2-Diazo-1-Naphthol-5-                 3222     100...........  OP5         .............  .............  .......
 sulphochloride.
2,5-Diethoxy-4-                       3236     67-100........  OP7         +35..........  +40..........  .......
 morpholinobenzenediazonium
 zinc chloride.
2,5-Diethoxy-4-                       3236     66............  OP7         +40..........  +45..........  .......
 morpholinobenzenediazonium
 zinc chloride.
2,5-Diethoxy-4-                       3236     100...........  OP7         +30..........  +35..........  .......
 morpholinobenzenediazonium
 tetrafluoroborate.
2,5-Diethoxy-4-                       3236     67............  OP7         +40..........  +45..........  .......
 (phenylsulphonyl)benzenediaz
 onium zinc chloride.
Diethylene glycol bis(allyl           3237     [ge]88+[le]12.  OP8         -10..........  0............  .......
 carbonate) +
 Diisopropylperoxydicarbonate.
2,5-Dimethoxy-4-(4-                   3236     79............  OP7         +40..........  +45..........  .......
 methylphenylsulphony)benzene
 diazonium zinc chloride.
4-Dimethylamino-6-(2-                 3236     100...........  OP7         +40..........  +45..........  .......
 dimethylaminoethoxy)toluene-
 2-diazonium zinc chloride.
N,N'-Dinitroso-N, N'-dimethyl-        3224     72............  OP6         .............  .............  .......
 terephthalamide, as a paste.
N,N'-                                 3224     82............  OP6         .............  .............        2
 Dinitrosopentamethylenetetra
 mine.
Diphenyloxide-4,4'-                   3226     100...........  OP7         .............  .............  .......
 disulphohydrazide.
4-                                    3226     100...........  OP7         .............  .............  .......
 Dipropylaminobenzenediazoniu
 m zinc chloride.
2-(N,N-                               3236     63-92.........  OP7         +40..........  +45..........  .......
 Ethoxycarbonylphenylamino)-3-
 methoxy-4-(N-methyl-N-
 cyclohexylamino)benzenediazo
 nium zinc chloride.
2-(N,N-                               3236     62............  OP7         +35..........  +40..........  .......
 Ethoxycarbonylphenylamino)-3-
 methoxy-4-(N-methyl-N-
 cyclohexylamino)benzenediazo
 nium zinc chloride.

[[Page 530]]

 
N-Formyl-2-(nitromethylene)-          3236     100...........  OP7         +45..........  +50..........  .......
 1,3-perhydrothiazine.
2-(2-Hydroxyethoxy)-1-                3236     100...........  OP7         +45..........  +50..........  .......
 (pyrrolidin-1-yl)benzene-4-
 diazonium zinc chloride.
3-(2-Hydroxyethoxy)-4-                3236     100...........  OP7         +40..........  +45..........  .......
 (pyrrolidin-1-
 yl)benzenediazonium zinc
 chloride.
2-(N,N-                               3236     96............  OP7         +45..........  +50..........  .......
 Methylaminoethylcarbonyl)-4-
 (3,4-dimethyl-
 phenylsulphonyl)benzene
 diazonium zinc chloride.
4-                                    3226     100...........  OP7         .............  .............  .......
 Methylbenzenesulphonylhydraz
 ide.
3-Methyl-4-(pyrrolidin-1-             3234     95............  OP6         +45..........  +50..........  .......
 yl)benzenediazonium
 tetrafluoroborate.
4-Nitrosophenol..............         3236     100...........  OP7         +35..........  +40..........  .......
Self-reactive liquid, sample.         3223     ..............  OP2         .............  .............        3
Self-reactive liquid, sample,         3233     ..............  OP2         .............  .............        3
 temperature control.
Self-reactive solid, sample..         3224     ..............  OP2         .............  .............        3
  Self-reactive solid,                3234     ..............  OP2         .............  .............        3
   sample, temperature
   control.
Sodium 2-diazo-1-naphthol-4-          3226     100...........  OP7         .............  .............  .......
 sulphonate.
Sodium 2-diazo-1-naphthol-5-          3226     100...........  OP7         .............  .............  .......
 sulphonate.
Tetramine palladium (II)              3234     100...........  OP6         +30..........  +35..........  .......
 nitrate.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Notes:
1. The emergency and control temperatures must be determined in accordance with Sec.  173.21(f).
2. With a compatible diluent having a boiling point of not less than 150  deg.C.
3. Samples may only be offered for transportation under the provisions of paragraph(c)(3) of this section.

    (c) New self-reactive materials, formulations and samples. (1) 
Except as provided for samples in paragraph (c)(3) of this section, no 
person may offer, accept for transportation, or transport a self-
reactive material which is not identified by technical name in the Self-
Reactive Materials Table of this section, or a formulation of one or 
more self-reactive materials which are identified by technical name in 
the table, unless the self-reactive material is assigned a generic type 
and shipping description and is approved by the Associate Administrator 
under the provisions of Sec. 173.124(a)(2)(iii).
    (2) Except as provided by an approval issued under 
Sec. 173.124(a)(2)(iii), intermediate bulk and bulk packagings are not 
authorized.
    (3) Samples. Samples of new self-reactive materials or new 
formulations of self-reactive materials identified in the Self-Reactive 
Materials Table in paragraph (b) of this section, for which complete 
test data are not available, and which are to be transported for further 
testing or product evaluation, may be assigned an appropriate shipping 
description for Self-reactive materials Type C, packaged and offered for 
transportation under the following conditions:
    (i) Data available to the person offering the material for 
transportation must indicate that the sample would pose a level of 
hazard no greater than that of a self-reactive material Type B and that 
the control temperature, if any, is sufficiently low to prevent any 
dangerous decomposition and sufficiently high to prevent any dangerous 
phase separation;
    (ii) The sample must be packaged in accordance with packing method 
OP2;
    (iii) Packages of the self-reactive material may be offered for 
transportation and transported in a quantity not to exceed 10 kg (22 
pounds) per transport vehicle; and
    (iv) One of the following shipping descriptions must be assigned:
    (A) Self-reactive, liquid, type C, 4.1, UN3223.
    (B) Self-reactive, solid, type C, 4.1, UN3224.
    (C) Self-reactive, liquid, type C, temperature controlled, 4.1, 
UN3233.

[[Page 531]]

    (D) Self-reactive, solid, type C, temperature controlled, 4.1, 
UN3234.

[Amdt. 173-241, 59 FR 67511, Dec. 29, 1994, as amended by Amdt. 173-242, 
60 FR 26806, May 18, 1995; Amdt. 173-246, 60 FR 49110, Sept. 21, 1995; 
Amdt. 173-256, 61 FR 51338, Oct. 1, 1996; Amdt. 173-261, 62 FR 24734, 
24735, May 6, 1997; 62 FR 45702, Aug. 28, 1997; 64 FR 10779, Mar. 5, 
1999; 65 FR 58630, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 33431, June 21, 2001; 66 FR 
45379, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.225  Packaging requirements and other provisions for organic peroxides.

    (a) General. When the Sec. 172.101 table specifies that an organic 
peroxide be packaged under this section, the organic peroxide must be 
packaged and offered for transportation in accordance with the 
provisions of this section. Each packaging must conform to the general 
requirements of subpart B of part 173 and to the applicable requirements 
of part 178 of this subchapter. Non-bulk packagings must meet Packing 
Group II performance levels. To avoid unnecessary confinement, metallic 
non-bulk packagings meeting Packing Group I are not authorized. No used 
material, other than production residues or regrind from the same 
production process, may be used in plastic packagings. Organic peroxides 
which require temperature control are subject to the provisions of 
Sec. 173.21(f).
    (b) Organic peroxides table. The following Organic Peroxides Table 
specifies, by technical name, those organic peroxides that are 
authorized for transportation and not subject to the approval provisions 
of Sec. 173.128 of this part. An organic peroxide identified by 
technical name in the following table is authorized for transportation 
only if it conforms to all applicable provisions of the table. For an 
organic peroxide not identified in the table by technical name or a 
formulation of identified organic peroxides, the provisions of paragraph 
(c) of Sec. 173.128 apply. The column headings of the Organic Peroxides 
Table are as follows:
    (1) Technical name. The first column specifies the technical name.
    (2) ID number. The second column specifies the identification (ID) 
number which is used to identify the proper shipping name in the 
Sec. 172.101 table. The word ``EXEMPT'' appearing in the column denotes 
that the material is not regulated as an organic peroxide.
    (3) Concentration of organic peroxide. The third column specifies 
concentration (mass percent) limitations, if any, in mixtures or 
solutions for the organic peroxide. Limitations are given as minimums, 
maximums, or a range, as appropriate. A range includes the lower and 
upper limits (i.e., ``53-100'' means from, and including, 53 percent to, 
and including 100 percent). See introductory paragraph of 
Sec. 172.203(k) of this subchapter for additional description 
requirements for an organic peroxide that may qualify for more than one 
generic listing, depending on its concentration.
    (4) Concentration of diluents. The fourth column specifies the type 
and concentration (mass percent) of diluent or inert solid, when 
required. Other types and concentrations of diluents may be authorized 
if approved by the Associate Administrator.
    (i) The required mass percent of ``Diluent type A'' is specified in 
column 4a. A diluent type A is an organic liquid that does not 
detrimentally affect the thermal stability or increase the hazard of the 
organic peroxide and with a boiling point not less than 150  deg.C at 
atmospheric pressure. Type A diluents may be used for desensitizing all 
organic peroxides.
    (ii) The required mass percent of ``Diluent type B'' is specified in 
column 4b. A diluent type B is an organic liquid which is compatible 
with the organic peroxide and which has a boiling point, at atmospheric 
pressure, of less than 150  deg.C (302  deg.F) but at least 60  deg.C 
(140  deg.F), and a flash point greater than 5  deg.C (41  deg.F). Type 
B diluents may be used for desensitizing all organic peroxides provided 
that the boiling point is at least 60  deg.C (140  deg.F) above the SADT 
of the peroxide in a 50 kg (110 lbs) package. A type A diluent may be 
used to replace a type B diluent in equal concentration.
    (iii) The required mass percent of ``Inert solid'' is specified in 
column 4c. An inert solid is a solid that does not detrimentally affect 
the thermal stability or increase the hazard of the organic peroxide.

[[Page 532]]

    (5) Concentration of water. Column 5 specifies, in mass percent, the 
minimum amount of water, if any, which must be in formulation.
    (6) Packing method. Column 6 specifies the highest packing method 
(largest packaging capacity) authorized for the organic peroxide. Lower 
numbered packing methods (smaller packaging capacities) are also 
authorized. For example, if OP3 is specified, then OP2 and OP1 are also 
authorized. When an IBC or bulk packaging is authorized and meets the 
requirements of paragraph (e) of this section, lower control 
temperatures than those specified for non-bulk packagings are required. 
The Table of Packing Methods in paragraph (d) of this section defines 
the non-bulk packing methods.
    (7) Temperatures. Column 7a specifies the control temperature. 
Column 7b specifies the emergency temperature. Temperatures are 
specified only when temperature controls are required. (See 
Sec. 173.21(f)).
    (8) Notes. Column 8 specifies other applicable provisions, as set 
forth in notes following the table.

[[Page 533]]



                                                                 Organic Peroxide Table
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                    Diluent (mass %)                                  Temperature ( deg.C)
        Technical name            ID number     Concentration ---------------------------  Water (mass     Packing   ----------------------     Notes
                                                  (mass %)        A        B        I          %)          method      Control   Emergency
(1)                             (2)..........  (3)...........  (4a)...  (4b)...  (4c)...  (5).........  (6).........  (7a)....  (7b)......  (8)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Acetyl acetone peroxide.......  UN3105.......  [le]42........  [ge]48.  .......  .......  [ge]8.......  OP7.........  ........  ..........  2
Acetyl acetone peroxide [as a   UN3106.......  [le]32........  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP7.........  ........  ..........  21
 paste].
Acetyl benzoyl peroxide.......  UN3105.......  [le]45........  [ge]55.  .......  .......  ............  OP7
Acetyl cyclohexanesulfonyl      UN3112.......  [le]82........  .......  .......  .......  [ge]12......  OP4.........  -10.....  0
 peroxide.
Acetyl cyclohexanesulfonyl      UN3115.......  [le]32........  .......  [ge]68.  .......  ............  OP7.........  -10.....  0
 peroxide.
tert-Amyl hydroperoxide.......  UN3107.......  [le]88........  [ge]6..  .......  .......  [ge]6.......  OP8
tert-Amyl peroxyacetate.......  UN3107.......  [le]62........  [ge]38.  .......  .......  ............  OP8
    tert-Amyl peroxybenzoate..  UN3103.......  [le]100.......  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP5.........  ........
tert-Amyl peroxy-2-             UN3115.......  [le]100.......  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP7.........  +20.....  +25
 ethylhexanoate.
tert-Amyl peroxy-2-ethylhexyl   UN3105.......  [le]100.......  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP7
 carbonate.
tert-Amyl peroxyneodecanoate..  UN3115.......  [le]77........  .......  [ge]23.  .......  ............  OP7.........  0.......  +10
tert-Amyl peroxypivalate......  UN3113.......  [le]77........  .......  [ge]23.  .......  ............  OP5.........  +10.....  +15
tert-Amylperoxy-3,5,5-          UN3101.......  [le]100.......  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP5
 trimethylhexanoate.
tert-Butyl cumyl peroxide.....  UN3105.......  42-  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP7.........  ........  ..........  1, 9
                                                100.
tert-Butyl cumyl peroxide.....  UN3106.......  [le]42........  .......  .......  [ge]58.  ............  OP7.........  ........  ..........  1, 9
n-Butyl-4,4-di-(tert-           UN3103.......  52-  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP5
 butylperoxy)valerate.                          100.
n-Butyl-4,4-di-(tert-           UN3106.......  [le]52........  .......  .......  [ge]48.  ............  OP7
 butylperoxy)valerate.
n-Butyl-4,4-di-(tert-           UN3108.......  [le]42........  .......  .......  [ge]58.  ............  OP8
 butylperoxy)valerate.
tert-Butyl hydroperoxide......  UN3103.......  79-  .......  .......  .......  [ge]10......  OP5.........  ........  ..........  13
                                                90.
tert-Butyl hydroperoxide......  UN3105.......  [le]80........  [ge]20.  .......  .......  ............  OP7.........  ........              4, 13
tert-Butyl hydroperoxide......  UN3107.......  [le]79........  .......  .......  .......  1  OP8.........  ........  ..........  13, 16
                                                                                           4.
tert-Butyl hydroperoxide......  UN3109.......  [le]72........  .......  .......  .......  [ge]28......  OP8.........  ........  ..........  13
tert-Butyl hydroperoxide [and]  UN3103.......  <82+9.
tert-Butyl monoperoxymaleate..  UN3102.......  52-  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP5
                                                100.
tert-Butyl monoperoxymaleate..  UN3103.......  [le]52........  [ge]48.  .......  .......  ............  OP6
tert-Butyl monoperoxymaleate..  UN3108.......  [le]52........  .......  .......  [ge]48.  ............  OP8
tert-Butyl monoperoxymaleate    UN3108.......  [le]52........  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP8
 [as a paste].
tert-Butyl monoperoxymaleate    UN3110.......  [le]42........  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP8.........  ........  ..........  ............
 [as a paste].
tert-Butyl monoperoxyphthalate  UN3102.......  [le]100.......  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP5
tert-Butyl peroxyacetate......  UN3101.......  52-  [ge]23.  .......  .......  ............  OP5
                                                77.
tert-Butyl peroxyacetate......  UN3103.......  32-  [ge]48.  .......  .......  ............  OP6
                                                52.
tert-Butyl peroxyacetate......  UN3109.......  [le]32........  [ge]68.  .......  .......  ............  OP8.........  ........  ..........  ............
tert-Butyl peroxyacetate......  UN3119.......  [le]32........  .......  [ge]68.  .......  ............  Bulk........  +30.....  +35         ............
tert-Butyl peroxyacetate......  UN3109.......  [le]22........  .......  [ge]78.  .......  ............  OP8.........  ........  ..........  14
tert-Butyl peroxybenzoate.....  UN3103.......  77-  [le]23.  .......  .......  ............  OP5
                                                100.
tert-Butyl peroxybenzoate.....  UN3105.......  52-  [ge]23.  .......  .......  ............  OP7.........  ........  ..........  1
                                                77.
tert-Butyl peroxybenzoate.....  UN3106.......  [le]52........  .......  .......  [le]48.  ............  OP7
tert-Butyl peroxybutyl          UN3105.......  [le]52........  [ge]48.  .......  .......  ............  OP7
 fumarate.
tert-Butyl peroxycrotonate....  UN3105.......  [le]77........  [ge]23.  .......  .......  ............  OP7
tert-Butyl                      UN3113.......  [le]100.......  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP5.........  +20.....  +25
 peroxydiethylacetate.
tert-Butyl                      UN3105.......  [le]33+[le]33.  [ge]33.  .......  .......  ............  OP7
 peroxydiethylacetate [and]
 tert-Butyl peroxybenzoate.

[[Page 534]]

 
tert-Butyl peroxy-2-            UN3113.......  52-  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP6.........  +20.....  +25
 ethylhexanoate.                                100.
tert-Butyl peroxy-2-            UN3117.......  32-  .......  [ge]48.  .......  ............  OP8.........  +30.....  +35
 ethylhexanoate.                                52.
tert-Butyl peroxy-2-            UN3118.......  [le]52........  .......  .......  [ge]48.  ............  OP8.........  +20.....  +25
 ethylhexanoate.
tert-Butyl peroxy-2-            UN3119.......  [le]32........  .......  [ge]68.  .......  ............  OP8.........  +40.....  +45
 ethylhexanoate.
tert-Butyl peroxy-2-            UN3119.......  [le]32........  .......  [ge]68.  .......  ............  IBC.........  +30.....  +35.......  ............
 ethylhexanoate.
    tert-Butyl peroxy-2-        UN3119.......  [le]32........  .......  [ge]68.  .......  ............  Bulk........  +15.....  +20.......  14
     ethylhexanoate.
    tert-Butyl                  UN3117.......  [le]52........  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP8.........  0.......  +10.......  ............
     peroxyneodecanoate [as a
     stable dispersion in
     water].
    tert-Butyl                  UN3119.......  [le]42........  .......  .......  .......  ............  IBC.........  -5......  +5........  ............
     peroxyneodecanoate [as a
     stable dispersion in
     water].
tert-Butyl peroxy-2-            UN3115.......  [le]31+[le]36.  .......  [ge]33.  .......  ............  OP7.........  +35.....  +40
 ethylhexanoate [and] 2,2-di-
 (tert-Butylperoxy)butane.
tert-Butyl peroxy-2-            UN3106.......  [le]12+[le]14.  [ge]14.  .......  [ge]60.  ............  OP7
 ethylhexanoate [and] 2,2-di-
 (tert-Butylperoxy)butane.
tert-Butyl peroxy-2-            UN3105.......  [le]100.......  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP7
 ethylhexylcarbonate.
tert-Butyl peroxyisobutyrate..  UN3111.......  52-  .......  [ge]23.  .......  ............  OP5.........  +15.....  +20
                                                77.
tert-Butyl peroxyisobutyrate..  UN3115.......  [le]52........  .......  [ge]48.  .......  ............  OP7.........  +15.....  +20
tert-Butylperoxy                UN3103.......  [le]77........  [ge]23.  .......  .......  ............  OP5
 isopropylcarbonate.
1-(2-.........................
tert-Butylperoxy isopropyl)-3-  UN3105.......  [le]77........  [ge]23.  .......  .......  ............  OP7
 isopropenylbenzene.
1-(2-.........................
tert-Butylperoxy isopropyl)-3-  UN3108.......  [le]42........  .......  .......  [ge]58.  ............  OP8
 isopropenylbenzene.
tert-Butyl peroxy-2-            UN3103.......  [le]100.......  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP5
 methylbenzoate.
tert-Butyl peroxyneodecanoate.  UN3115.......  77-  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP7.........  -5......  +5
                                                100.
tert-Butyl peroxyneodecanoate.  UN3115.......  [le]77........  .......  [ge]23.  .......  ............  OP7.........  0.......  +10
tert-Butyl peroxyneodecanoate   UN3118.......  [le]42........  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP8.........  0.......  +10
 [as a stable dispersion in
 water (frozen)].
    tert-Butyl                  UN3119.......  [le]32........  [ge]68.  .......  .......  ............  IBC.........  0.......  +10.......  ............
     peroxyneodecanoate.
    tert-Butyl                  UN3115.......  [le]77........  [ge]23.  .......  .......  ............  OP7.........  0.......  +10.......  ............
     peroxyneoheptanoate.
3-tert-Butylperoxy-3-           UN3106.......  [le]100.......  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP7
 phenylphthalide.
tert-Butyl peroxypivalate.....  UN3113.......  67-  [ge]23.  .......  .......  ............  OP5.........  0.......  +10
                                                77.
tert-Butyl peroxypivalate.....  UN3115.......  [le]67........  .......  [ge]33.  .......  ............  OP7.........  0.......  +10
    tert-Butyl peroxypivalate.  UN3119.......  [le]27........  .......  [ge]73.  .......  ............  Bulk........  +5......  +10.......  14
tert-Butyl peroxypivalate.....  UN3119.......  [le]27........  .......  [ge]73.  .......  ............  OP8.........  +30.....  +35
tert-Butyl peroxypivalate.....  UN3119.......  [le]27........  .......  [ge]73.  .......  ............  IBC.........  +10.....  +15.......
tert-Butylperoxy                UN3106.......  [le]100.......  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP7
 stearylcarbonate.
tert-Butyl peroxy-3,5,5-        UN3105.......  32-  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP7
 trimethylhexanoate.                            100.
tert-Butyl peroxy-3,5,5-        UN3109.......  [le]32........  [ge]68.  .......  .......  ............  OP8.........  ........  ..........  ............
 trimethylhexanoate.
tert-Butyl peroxy-3,5,5-        UN3119.......  [le]32........  .......  [ge]68.  .......  ............  Bulk........  +35.....  +40.......  14
 trimethylhexanoate.
3-Chloroperoxybenzoic acid....  UN3102.......  57-  .......  .......  [ge]14.  ............  OP1
                                                86.
3-Chloroperoxybenzoic acid....  UN3106.......  [le]77........  .......  .......  [ge]6..  [ge]17......  OP7

[[Page 535]]

 
3-Chloroperoxybenzoic acid....  UN3106.......  [le]57........  .......  .......  [ge]3..  [ge]40......  OP7
Cumyl hydroperoxide...........  UN3107.......  90-  [le]10.  .......  .......  ............  OP8.........  ........  ..........  13
                                                98.
Cumyl hydroperoxide...........  UN3109.......  [le]90........  [ge]10.  .......  .......  ............  OP8.........  ........  ..........  13, 15
Cumyl peroxyneodecanoate......  UN3115.......  [le]77........  .......  [ge]23.  .......  ............  OP7.........  -10.....  0
    Cumyl peroxyneoheptanoate.  UN3115.......  [le]77........  [ge]23.  .......  .......  ............  OP7.........  -10.....  0.........  ............
Cumyl peroxyneodecanoate [as a  UN3119.......  [le]52........  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP8.........  -10.....  0
 stable dispersion in water].
    Cumyl peroxyneodecanoate    UN3119.......  [le]52........  .......  .......  .......  ............  IBC.........  -15.....  -5........  ............
     [as a stable dispersion
     in water].
Cumyl peroxypivalate..........  UN3115.......  [le]77........  .......  [ge]23.  .......  ............  OP7.........  -5......  +5
Cyclohexanone peroxide(s).....  UN3104.......  [le]91........  .......  .......  .......  [ge]9.......  OP6.........  ........  ..........  13
    Cyclohexanone peroxide(s).  UN3105.......  [le]72........  [ge]28.  .......  .......  ............  OP7.........  ........  ..........  5
Cyclohexanone peroxide(s) [as   UN3106.......  [le]72........  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP7.........  ........  ..........  5, 21
 a paste].
Cyclohexanone peroxide(s).....  Exempt.......  [le]32........  .......  .......  [ge]68.  ............  Exempt......
Diacetone alcohol peroxides...  UN3115.......  [le]57........  .......  [ge]26.  .......  [ge]8.......  OP7.........  +40.....  +45.......  5
Diacetyl peroxide.............  UN3115.......  [le]27........  .......  [ge]73.  .......  ............  OP7.........  +20.....  +25.......  8,13
Di-tert-amyl peroxide.........  UN3107.......  [le]100.......  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP8
1,1-Di-(tert-                   UN3103.......  [le]82........  [ge]18.  .......  .......  ............  OP6           ........
 amylperoxy)cyclohexane.
Dibenzoyl peroxide............  UN3102.......  51-  .......  .......  [le]48.                OP2.........  ........  ..........  3
                                                100.
Dibenzoyl peroxide............  UN3102.......  77-  .......  .......  .......  [ge]6         OP4.........  ........  ..........  3
                                                94.
Dibenzoyl peroxide............  UN3104.......  [le]77........  .......  .......  .......  [ge]23        OP6
Dibenzoyl peroxide............  UN3106.......  [le]62........  .......  .......  [ge]28.  [ge]10        OP7           ........
Dibenzoyl peroxide [as a        UN3106.......  52-  .......  .......  .......                OP7.........  ........  ..........  21
 paste].                                        62.
Dibenzoyl peroxide [as a        UN3108.......  [le]56.5......  .......  .......           [ge]15        OP8
 paste].
Dibenzoyl peroxide............  UN3106.......  35-  .......  .......  [ge]48.                OP7
                                                52.
Dibenzoyl peroxide [as a        UN3108.......  [le]52........  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP8.........  ........  ..........  21
 paste].
Dibenzoyl peroxide............  UN3107.......  36-  [ge]18.  .......  .......  [le]40        OP8
                                                42.
Dibenzoyl peroxide............  UN3107.......  36-  [ge]58.  .......  .......                OP8
                                                42.
Dibenzoyl peroxide [as a        UN3109.......  [le]42........  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP8.........  ........  ..........  ............
 stable dispersion in water].
Dibenzoyl peroxide............  Exempt.......  [le]35........  .......  .......  [ge]65.                Exempt
Dibenzyl peroxydicarbonate....  UN3112.......  [le]87........  .......  .......  .......  [ge]13......  OP5.........  +25.....  +30
Di-(4-tert-                     UN3114.......  [le]100.......  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP6.........  +30.....  +35
 butylcyclohexyl)peroxydicarbo
 nate.
Di-(4-tert-                     UN3119.......  [le]42........  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP8.........  +30.....  +35.......  ............
 butylcyclohexyl)peroxydicarbo
 nate [as a stable dispersion
 in water].
Di-tert-butyl peroxide........  UN3107.......  32-  .......  .......  .......                OP8
                                                100.
Di-tert-butyl peroxide........  UN3109.......  [le]52........  .......  [ge]48.  .......  ............  OP8.........  ........  ..........  24
Di-tert-butyl peroxyazelate...  UN3105.......  [le]52........  [ge]48.  .......  .......                OP7
2,2-Di-(tert-                   UN3103.......  [le]52........  [ge]48.  .......  .......                OP6
 butylperoxy)butane.
1,1-Di-(tert-                   UN3101.......  80-  .......  .......  .......                OP5
 butylperoxy)cyclohexane.                       100.
1,1-Di-(tert-                   UN3103.......  52-  [ge]20.  .......  .......                OP5
 butylperoxy)cyclohexane.                       80.
1,1-Di-(tert-                   UN3105.......  [le]52........  [ge]48.  .......  .......                OP7
 butylperoxy)cyclohexane.
1,1-Di-(tert-                   UN3106.......  [le]42........  [ge]13.  .......  [ge]45.                OP7
 butylperoxy)cyclohexane.
1,1-Di-(tert-                   UN3109.......  [le]42........  [ge]58.  .......  .......  ............  OP8.........  ........  ..........  ............
 butylperoxy)cyclohexane.
1,1-Di-(tert-                   UN3107.......  [le]27........  [ge]36.  .......  .......  ............  OP8.........  ........  ..........  22
 butylperoxy)cyclohexane.
1,1-Di-(tert-                   UN3109.......  [le]25........  [ge]25.  [ge]50.  .......  ............  OP8.........  ........  ..........  ............
 butylperoxy)cyclohexane.
1,1-Di-(tert-                   UN3109.......  [le]13........  [ge]13.  [ge]74.  .......  ............  OP8.........  ........  ..........  ............
 butylperoxy)cyclohexane.
Di-n-butyl peroxydicarbonate..  UN3115.......  27-  .......  [ge]48.  .......  ............  OP7.........  -15.....  -5........
                                                52.
Di-n-butyl peroxydicarbonate    UN3118.......  [le]42........  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP8.........  -15.....  -5........
 [as a stable dispersion in
 water (frozen)].
Di-n-butyl peroxydicarbonate..  UN3117.......  [le]27........  .......  [ge]73.  .......  ............  OP8.........  -10.....  0.........
Di-sec-butyl peroxydicarbonate  UN3113.......  52-  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP4.........  -20.....  -10.......  6
                                                100.

[[Page 536]]

 
Di-sec-butyl peroxydicarbonate  UN3115.......  [le]52........  .......  [ge]48.  .......  ............  OP7.........  -15.....  -5........
Di-(2-tert-                     UN3106.......  42-  .......  .......  [le]57.  ............  OP7.........  ........  ..........  1, 9
 butylperoxyisopropyl)benzene(                  100.
 s).
Di-(2-tert-                     Exempt.......  [le]42........  .......  .......  [ge]58.                Exempt
 butylperoxyisopropyl)benzene(
 s).
Di-(tert-butylperoxy)phthalate  UN3105.......  42-  [ge]48.  .......  .......                OP7           ........
                                                52.
Di-(tert-butylperoxy)phthalate  UN3106.......  [le]52........  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP7.........  ........  ..........  21
 [as a paste].
Di-(tert-butylperoxy)phthalate  UN3107.......  [le]42........  [ge]58.  .......  .......                OP8
2,2-Di-(tert-                   UN3105.......  [le]52........  [ge]48.  .......  .......                OP7
 butylperoxy)propane.
2,2-Di-(tert-                   UN3106.......  [le]42........  [ge]13.  .......  [ge]45.                OP7
 butylperoxy)propane.
    1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)-  UN3101.......  90-  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP5.........  ........  ..........  ............
     3,3,5-                                     100.
     trimethylcyclohexane.
    1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)-  UN3103.......  57-  [ge]10.  .......  .......  ............  OP5.........  ........  ..........  ............
     3,3,5-                                     90.
     trimethylcyclohexane.
    1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)-  UN3105.......  [le]77........  .......  [ge]23.  .......  ............  OP7.........  ........  ..........  ............
     3,3,5-
     trimethylcyclohexane.
    1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)-  UN3106.......  [le]57........  .......  .......  [ge]43.  ............  OP7.........  ........  ..........  ............
     3,3,5-
     trimethylcyclohexane.
    1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)-  UN3107.......  [le]57........  [ge]43.  .......  .......  ............  OP8.........  ........  ..........  ............
     3,3,5-
     trimethylcyclohexane.
    1,1-Di-(tert-butylperoxy)-  UN3107.......  [le]32........  [ge]26.  [ge]42.  .......  ............  OP8.........  ........  ..........  ............
     3,3,5-
     trimethylcyclohexane.
Dicetyl peroxydicarbonate.....  UN3116.......  [le]100.......  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP7.........  +30.....  +35
Dicetyl peroxydicarbonate [as   UN3119.......  [le]42........  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP8.........  +30.....  +35.......  ............
 a stable dispersion in water].
Di-4-chlorobenzoyl peroxide...  UN3102.......  [le]77........  .......  .......  .......  [ge]23        OP5
Di-4-chlorobenzoyl peroxide     UN3106.......  [le]52........  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP7.........  ........  ..........  21
 [as a paste].
Di-4-chlorobenzoyl peroxide...  Exempt.......  [le]32........  .......  .......  [ge]68.                Exempt
Dicumyl peroxide..............  UN3109.......  52-  .......  [le]48.  .......  ............  OP8.........  ........  ..........  9, 11
                                                100.
Dicumyl peroxide..............  UN3110.......  52-  .......  .......  [le]48.  ............  OP8.........  ........  ..........  9, 11
                                                100.
Dicumyl peroxide..............  Exempt.......  [le]52........  [ge]48.  .......  .......                Exempt
Dicumyl peroxide..............  Exempt.......  [le]52........  .......  .......  [ge]48.  ............  Exempt......
Dicyclohexyl peroxydicarbonate  UN3112.......  91-  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP3.........  +5......  +10
                                                100.
Dicyclohexyl peroxydicarbonate  UN3114.......  [le]91........  .......  .......  .......  [ge]9.......  OP5.........  +5......  +10.......
Didecanoyl peroxide...........  UN3114.......  [le]100.......  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP6.........  +30.....  +35
2,2-Di-(4,4-di(tert-            UN3106.......  [le]42........  .......  .......  [ge]58.  ............  OP7.........
 butylperoxy)cyclohexyl)propan
 e.
2,2-Di-(4,4-di(tert-            UN3107.......  [le]25........  .......  [ge]75.  .......  ............  OP8.........
 butylperoxy)cyclohexyl)propan
 e.
Di-2,4-dichlorobenzoyl          UN3102.......  [le]77........  .......  .......  .......  [ge]23......  OP5.........
 peroxide.
Di-2,4-dichlorobenzoyl          UN3106.......  [le]52........  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP7.........
 peroxide [as a paste with
 silicone oil].
Di-(2-ethylhexyl)               UN3113.......  77-  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP5.........  -20.....  -10.......
 peroxydicarbonate.                             100.
    2,2-Di-(4,4-di-(tert-       UN3107.......  [le]22........  .......  [ge]78.  .......  ............  OP8.........  ........  ..........  ............
     butylperoxy cyclohexyl)
     propane.
    Di-(2-ethylhexyl)           UN3119.......  [le]52........  .......  .......  .......  ............  IBC.........  -20.....  -10.......  ............
     peroydicarbonate [as a
     stable dispersion in
     water].
    Di-(2-ethoxyethyl)          UN3115.......  [le]52........  .......  [ge]48.  .......  ............  OP7.........  -10.....  0.........  ............
     peroxydicarbonate.
    Di-(2-ethylhexyl)           UN3115.......  [le]77........  .......  [ge]23.  .......  ............  OP7.........  -15.....  -5........  ............
     peroxydicarbonate.
    Di-(2-ethylhexyl)           UN3117.......  [le]62........  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP8.........  -15.....  -5........  ............
     peroxydicarbonate [as a
     stable dispersion in
     water].
Di-(2-ethylhexyl)               UN3119.......  [le]52........  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP8.........  -15.....  -5
 peroxydicarbonate [as a
 stable dispersion in water].
Di-(2-ethylhexyl)               UN3118.......  [le]42........  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP8.........  -15.....  -5
 peroxydicarbonate [as a
 stable dispersion in water
 (frozen)].

[[Page 537]]

 
Diethyl peroxydicarbonate.....  UN3115.......  [le]27........  [ge]73.  .......  .......  ............  OP7.........  -10.....  0.........
2,2-Dihydroperoxypropane......  UN3102.......  [le]27........  .......  .......  [ge]73.                OP5
Di-(1-                          UN3106.......  [le]100.......  .......  .......  .......                OP7
 hydroxycyclohexyl)peroxide.
Diisobutyryl peroxide.........  UN3111.......  32-  .......  [ge]48.  .......  ............  OP5.........  -20.....  -10.......
                                                52.
Diisobutyryl peroxide.........  UN3115.......  [le]32........  .......  [ge]68.  .......  ............  OP7.........  -20.....  -10.......
Diisopropylbenzene              UN3106.......  [le]82........  [ge]5..  .......  .......  [ge]5.......  OP7.........  ........  ..........  17
 dihydroperoxide.
Diisopropyl peroxydicarbonate.  UN3112.......  52-  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP2.........  -15.....  -5
                                                100.
    Diisopropyl                 UN3115.......  [le]52........  .......  [ge]48.  .......  ............  OP7.........  -20.....  -10.......  ............
     peroxydicarbonate.
Diisotridecyl                   UN3115.......  [le]100.......  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP7           -10.....  0
 peroxydicarbonate.
Dilauroyl peroxide............  UN3106.......  [le]100.......  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP7
Dilauroyl peroxide [as a        UN3109.......  [le]42........  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP8.........  ........  ..........  ............
 stable dispersion in water].
Di-(2-methylbenzoyl)peroxide..  UN3112.......  [le]87........  .......  .......  .......  [ge]13......  OP5.........  +30.....  +35.......
    Di-(3-methoxybutyl)         UN3115.......  [le]52........  .......  [ge]48.  .......  ............  OP7.........  -5......  +5........  ............
     peroxydicarbonate.
    Di-(3-methylbenzoyl)        UN3115.......  [le]20........  .......  [ge]58.  .......  ............  OP7.........  +35.....  +40.......  ............
     peroxide + Benzoyl (3-                    +[le]18.......
     methylbenzoyl) peroxide                   +[le] 4.......
     +Dibenzoyl peroxide.
Di-(4-methylbenzoyl)peroxide    UN3106.......  [le]52........  .......  .......  .......                OP7
 [as a paste with silicone
 oil].
2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di-            UN3102.......  82-  .......  .......  .......                OP5
 (benzoylperoxy)hexane.                         100.
2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di-            UN3104.......  [le]82........  .......  .......  .......  [ge]18......  OP5
 (benzoylperoxy)hexane.
2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di-            UN3106.......  [le]82........  .......  .......  [ge]18.  ............  OP7
 (benzoylperoxy)hexane.
2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di-(tert-      UN3105.......  52-  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP7
 butylperoxy)hexane.                            100.
2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di-(tert-      UN3101.......  87-  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP5
 butylperoxy)hexyne-3.                          100.
2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di-(tert-      UN3103.......  52-  [ge]14.  .......  .......  ............  OP5
 butylperoxy)hexyne-3.                          86.
2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di-(tert-      UN3106.......  [le]52........  .......  .......  [ge]48.  ............  OP7
 butylperoxy)hexane.
2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di-(tert-      UN3109.......  [le]52........  [ge]48.  .......  .......  ............  OP8.........  ........  ..........  ............
 butylperoxy)hexane.
2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di-(tert-      UN3106.......  [le]52........  .......  .......  [ge]48.  ............  OP7
 butylperoxy)hexyne-3.
2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di-(tert-      UN3108.......  [le]47........  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP8
 butylperoxy)hexane [as a
 paste].
    2,5 Dimethyl 2,5 di-2-      UN3113.......  [le]100.......  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP5.........  +20.....  +25.......  ............
     ethylhexanoylperoxy
     hexane.
    2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di-(tert-  UN3108.......  [le]77........  .......  .......  [ge]23.  ............  OP8.........  ........  ..........  ............
     butylperoxy)hexane.
    2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di-(tert-  UN3101.......  86-  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP5.........  ........  ..........  ............
     butylperoxy)hexyne-3.                      100.
2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-               UN3104.......  [le]82........  .......  .......  .......  [ge]18......  OP7
 dihydroperoxyhexane.
2,5-Dimethyl-2,5-di-(3,5,5-     UN3105.......  [le]77........  [ge]23.  .......  .......  ............  OP7
 trimethylhexanoylperoxy)hexan
 e.
1,1-Dimethyl-3-                 UN3117.......  [le]52........  [ge]48;  .......  .......  ............  OP8.........  +0......  +10.......
 hydroxybutylperoxyneoheptanoa
 te.
Dimyristyl peroxydicarbonate..  UN3116.......  [le]100.......  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP7.........  +20.....  +25.......
Dimyristyl peroxydicarbonate    UN3119.......  [le]42........  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP8.........  +20.....  +25
 [as a stable dispersion in
 water].
    Dimyristyl                  UN3119.......  [le]42........  .......  .......  .......  ............  IBC.........  +15.....  +20.......  ............
     peroxydicarbonate [as a
     stable dispersion in
     water].
Di-(2-                          UN3115.......  [le]52........  [ge]48.  .......  .......  ............  OP7.........  -10.....  0
 neodecanoylperoxyisopropyl)be
 nzene.
Di-n-nonanoyl peroxide........  UN3116.......  [le]100.......  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP7.........  0.......  +10
Di-n-octanoyl peroxide........  UN3114.......  [le]100.......  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP5.........  +10.....  +15
Diperoxy azelaic acid.........  UN3116.......  [le]27........  .......  .......  [ge]73.  ............  OP7.........  +35.....  +40
Diperoxy dodecane diacid......  UN3116.......  13-  .......  .......  [ge]58.  ............  OP7.........  +40.....  +45
                                                42.
Diperoxy dodecane diacid......  Exempt.......  [le]13........  .......  .......  [ge]87.                Exempt......
Di-(2-                          UN3102.......  85-  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP5
 phenoxyethyl)peroxydicarbonat                  100.
 e.
Di-(2-                          UN3106.......  [le]85........  .......  .......  .......  [ge]15......  OP7
 phenoxyethyl)peroxydicarbonat
 e.
Dipropionyl peroxide..........  UN3117.......  [le]27........  .......  [ge]73.  .......  ............  OP8.........  +15.....  +20
    Di-n-propyl                 UN3113.......  [le]100.......  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP3.........  -25.....  -15.......  ............
     peroxydicarbonate.
    Di-n-propyl                 UN3113.......  [le]77........  .......  [ge]23.  .......  ............  OP5.........  -20.....  -10.......  ............
     peroxydicarbonate.
Distearyl peroxydicarbonate...  UN3106.......  [le]87........  .......  .......  [ge]13.  ............  OP7
Disuccinic acid peroxide......  UN3102.......  72-  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP4.........  ........  ..........  18
                                                100.

[[Page 538]]

 
Disuccinic acid peroxide......  UN3116.......  [le]72........  .......  .......  .......  [ge]28......  OP7.........  +10.....  +15
Di-(3,5,5-trimethyl-1,2-        UN3116.......  [le]52........  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP7.........  +30.....  +35.......  21
 dioxolanyl- 3)peroxide [as a
 paste].
Di-(3,5,5-                      UN3115.......  38-  [ge]18.  .......  .......  ............  OP7.........  0.......  +10
 trimethylhexanoyl)peroxide.                    82.
Di-(3,5,5-                      UN3117.......  [le]52........  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP8.........  +10.....  +15
 trimethylhexanoyl)peroxide
 [as a stable dispersion in
 water].
Di-(3,5,5-                      UN3119.......  [le]38........  [ge]62.  .......  .......  ............  OP8.........  +20.....  +25
 trimethylhexanoyl)peroxide.
Di-(3,5,5-                      UN3119.......  [le]38........  [ge]62.  .......  .......  ............  IBC.........  +10.....  +15.......  ............
 trimethylhexanoyl)peroxide.
Ethyl 3,3-di-(tert-             UN3105.......  [le]67........  [ge]33.  .......  .......  ............  OP7
 amylperoxy)butyrate.
Ethyl 3,3-di-(tert-             UN3103.......  77 - .......  .......  .......  ............  OP5
 butylperoxy)butyrate.                           100.
Ethyl 3,3-di-(tert-             UN3105.......  [le]77........  [ge]23.  .......  .......  ............  OP7
 butylperoxy)butyrate.
Ethyl 3,3-di-(tert-             UN3106.......  [le]52........  .......  .......  [ge]48.  ............  OP7
 butylperoxy)butyrate.
3,3,6,6,9,9-Hexamethyl-1,2,4,5- UN3102.......  52 - .......  .......  .......  ............  OP4
  tetraoxacyclononane.                           100.
3,3,6,6,9,9-Hexamethyl-1,2,4,5- UN3105.......  [le]52........  [ge]48.  .......  .......  ............  OP7
  tetraoxacyclononane.
3,3,6,6,9,9-Hexamethyl-1,2,4,5- UN3106.......  [le]52........  .......  .......  [ge]48.  ............  OP7
  tetraoxacyclononane.
    tert-Hexyl                  UN3115.......  [le]71........  [ge]29.  .......  .......  ............  OP7.........  0.......  +10.......  ............
     peroxyneodecanoate.
    tert-Hexyl peroxypivalate.  UN3115.......  [le]72........  .......  [ge]28.  .......  ............  OP7.........  +10.....  +15.......  ............
Isopropylcumyl hydroperoxide..  UN3109.......  [le]72........  [ge]28.  .......  .......  ............  OP8.........  ........  ..........  13ROW 72  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP7.........  ........  ..........  13
                                                - 100.
p-Menthyl hydroperoxide.......  UN3109.......  [le]72........  [ge]28.  .......  .......  ............  OP8.........  ........  ..........  25
Methylcyclohexanone             UN3115.......  [le]67........  .......  [ge]33.  .......  ............  OP7.........  +35.....  +40
 peroxide(s).
Methyl ethyl ketone             UN3101.......  [le]52........  [ge]48.  .......  .......  ............  OP5.........  ........  ..........  5, 13
 peroxide(s).
Methyl ethyl ketone             UN3105.......  [le]45........  [ge]55.  .......  .......  ............  OP7.........  ........  ..........  5
 peroxide(s).
    Methyl ethyl ketone         UN3105.......  [le]37........  [ge]55.  .......  .......  [ge]8.......  OP7.........  ........  ..........  5
     peroxide(s).
Methyl ethyl ketone             UN3107.......  [le]40........  [ge]60.  .......  .......  ............  OP8.........  ........  ..........  5
 peroxide(s).
Methyl isobutyl ketone          UN3105.......  [le]62........  [ge]19.  .......  .......  ............  OP7.........  ........  ..........  5, 23
 peroxide(s).
Organic peroxide, liquid,       UN3103.......  ..............  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP2.........  ........  ..........  12
 sample.
Organic peroxide, liquid,       UN3113.......  ..............  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP2.........  ........  ..........  12
 sample, temperature
 controlled.
Organic peroxide, solid,        UN3104.......  ..............  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP2.........  ........  ..........  12
 sample.
Organic peroxide, solid,        UN3114.......  ..............  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP2.........  ........  ..........  12
 sample, temperature
 controlled.
Peracetic acid with not more    Exempt         [le]6.........  .......  .......  .......  [ge]60......  Exempt......
 than 20% hydrogen peroxide.
Peracetic acid with not more    UN3109.......  [le]17........  .......  .......  .......  [ge]27......  OP8.........  ........  ..........  13
 than 26% hydrogen peroxide.
Peracetic acid with 7%          UN3107.......  [le]36........  .......  .......  .......  [ge]15......  OP8.........  ........  ..........  13
 hydrogen peroxide.
Peroxyacetic acid, type D,      UN3105.......  [le]43........  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP7.........  ........  ..........  13, 20
 stabilized.
Peroxyacetic acid, type E,      UN3107.......  [le]43........  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP8.........  ........  ..........  13, 20
 stabilized.
Peroxyacetic acid, type F,      UN3109.......  [le]43........  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP8.........  ........  ..........  13, 20
 stabilized.
Pinanyl hydroperoxide.........  UN3105.......  56-100........  .......  .......  .......  ............  OP7.........  ........  ..........  13
Pinanyl hydroperoxide.........  UN3109.......  <56...........  36 percent, by mass, ethylbenzene.
23. With 19 percent, by mass, methyl isobutyl ketone.
24. Diluent type b with boiling point 100 C.
25. No ``Corrosive'' subsidiary risk label is required for concentrations below 56%.
26. Available oxygen must be [le] 7.6%.


[[Page 540]]

    (c) New organic peroxides, formulations and samples. (1) Except as 
provided for samples in paragraph (c)(2) of this section, no person may 
offer for transportation an organic peroxide which is not identified by 
technical name in the Organic Peroxides Table of this section, or a 
formulation of one or more organic peroxides which are identified by 
technical name in that table, unless the organic peroxide is assigned a 
generic type and shipping description and is approved by the Associate 
Administrator under the provisions of Sec. 173.128(c) of this 
subchapter.
    (2) Samples. Samples of new organic peroxides or new formulations of 
organic peroxides identified in the Organic Peroxides Table in paragraph 
(b) of this section, for which complete test data are not available, and 
which are to be transported for further testing or product evaluation, 
may be assigned an appropriate shipping description for organic peroxide 
Type C, packaged and offered for transportation, under the following 
conditions:
    (i) Data available to the person offering the material for 
transportation must indicate that the sample would pose a level of 
hazard no greater than that of an organic peroxide Type B and that the 
control temperature, if any, is sufficiently low to prevent any 
dangerous decomposition and sufficiently high to prevent any dangerous 
phase separation;
    (ii) The sample must be packaged in accordance with packing method 
OP2, for a liquid or solid, respectively;
    (iii) Packages of the organic peroxide may be offered for 
transportation and transported in a quantity not to exceed 10 kg (22 
pounds) per transport vehicle; and
    (iv) One of the following shipping descriptions must be assigned:
    (A) Organic peroxide Type C, liquid, 5.2, UN 3103;
    (B) Organic peroxide Type C, solid, 5.2, UN 3104;
    (C) Organic peroxide Type C, liquid, temperature controlled, 5.2, UN 
3113; or
    (D) Organic peroxide Type C, solid, temperature controlled, 5.2, UN 
3114.
    (3) Mixtures. Mixtures of organic peroxides individually identified 
in the Organic Peroxides Table in paragraph (b) of this section may be 
classified as the same type of organic peroxide as that of the most 
dangerous component and be transported under the conditions for 
transportation given for this type. If the stable components form a 
thermally less stable mixture, the SADT of the mixture must be 
determined and the new control and emergency temperature derived under 
the provisions of Sec. 173.21(f).
    (d) Packing Method Table. Packagings for organic peroxides and self-
reactive substances are listed in the Maximum Quantity per Packing 
Method Table. The packing methods are designated OP1 to OP8. The 
quantities specified for each packing method represent the maximum that 
is authorized.
    (1) The following types of packagings are authorized:
    (i) Drums: 1A1, 1A2, 1B1, 1B2, 1D, 1G, 1H1, 1H2;
    (ii) Jerricans: 3A1, 3A2, 3B1, 3B2, 3H1, 3H2;
    (iii) Boxes: 4C1, 4C2, 4D, 4F, 4G, 4H1, 4H2, 4A, 4B; or
    (iv) Composite packagings with a plastic inner receptacle: 6HA1, 
6HA2, 6HB1, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD1, 6HD2, 6HG1, 6HG2, 6HH1, 6HH2.
    (2) Metal packaging (including inner packagings of combination 
packagings and outer packagings of combination or composite packagings) 
are used only for packing methods OP7 and OP8.
    (3) In combination packagings, glass receptacles are used only as 
inner packagings with a maximum content of 0.5 kg or 0.5 L.
    (4) The maximum quantity per packaging or package for Packing 
Methods OP1-OP8 must be as follows:

                      Maximum Quantity Per Packaging/Package for Packing Methods OP1 to OP8
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                      Packing method
            Maximum quantity             -----------------------------------------------------------------------
                                            OP1     OP2\1\    OP3     OP4\1\    OP5      OP6      OP7      OP8
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Solids and combination packagings             0.5   0.5/10        5     5/25       25       50       50   \2\200
 (liquid and solid) (kg)................

[[Page 541]]

 
Liquids (L).............................      0.5  .......        5  .......       30       60       60   \3\225
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ If two values are given, the first applies to the maximum net mass per inner packaging and the second to the
  maximum net mass of the complete package.
\2\ 60 kg for jerricans and 100 kg for boxes.
\3\ 60 L for jerricans.

    (e) Bulk packagings for organic peroxides. The following bulk 
packagings are authorized:
    (1) Rail cars. Class DOT 103, 104, 105, 109, 111, 112, 114, 115, or 
120 fusion-weld tank car tank are authorized. DOT 103W, 111A60F1 and 
111A60W1 tank car tanks must have bottom outlets effectively sealed from 
inside. Gauging devices are required on DOT 103W tank car tanks. Riveted 
tank car tanks are not authorized.
    (2) Cargo tanks. Specification MC 307, MC 310, MC 311, MC 312, DOT 
407, and DOT 412 cargo tank motor vehicles with a tank design pressure 
of at least 172 kPa (25 psig) are authorized.
    (3) Portable tanks. The following requirements apply to portable 
tanks intended for the transport of Type F organic peroxides or Type F 
self-reactive substances. DOT 51, 57, IM 101 portable tanks, and UN 
portable tanks that conform to the requirements of T23 (see 
Sec. 172.102(c)(7) of this subchapter), when T23 is specified in Column 
(7) of the Sec. 171.101 Table of this subchapter for the Type F organic 
peroxide or Type F self-reactive substance. Type F organic peroxide or 
self-reactive substance formulations other than those indicated in T23 
may be transported in portable tanks if approved by the Associate 
Administrator. The following conditions also apply:
    (i) The portable tank must be designed for a test pressure of at 
least 0.4 MPa (4 bar).
    (ii) Portable tanks must be fitted with temperature-sensing devices.
    (iii) Portable tanks must be fitted with pressure relief devices and 
emergency-relief devices. Vacuum-relief devices may also be used. 
Pressure relief devices must operate at pressures determined according 
to both the properties of the hazardous material and the construction 
characteristics of the portable tank. Fusible elements are not allowed 
in the shell.
    (iv) The pressure relief devices must consist of reclosing devices 
fitted to prevent significant build-up within the portable tank of the 
decomposition products and vapors released at a temperature of 50  deg.C 
(122  deg.F). The capacity and start-to-discharge pressure of the relief 
devices must be in accordance with the applicable requirements of this 
subchapter specified for the portable tank. The start-to-discharge 
pressure must in no case be such that liquid would escape from the 
pressure relief devices if the portable tank were overturned.
    (v)(A) The emergency-relief devices may be of the reclosing or 
frangible types, or a combination of the two, designed to vent all the 
decomposition products and vapors evolved during a period of not less 
than one hour of complete fire engulfment as calculated by the following 
formula:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TN21JN01.003

Where:
    q = heat absorption (W)
    A = wetted area (m\2\)
    F = insulation factor (-)

    (B) Insulation factor (F) in the formula in paragraph (e)(3)(v)(A) 
of this section equals 1 for non-insulated vessels and for insulated 
vessels F is calculated using the following formula:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TN21JN01.004

Where:
    U = K/L = heat transfer coefficient of the insulation 
(W[middot]m-\2\[middot]K-\1\); where K = heat 
conductivity of insulation layer 
(W[middot]m-\1\[middot]K-\1\), and L = thickness 
of insulation layer (m).
    TPO = temperature of material at relieving conditions 
(K).


[[Page 542]]


    (vi) The start-to-discharge pressure of emergency-relief devices 
must be higher than that specified for the pressure relief devices in 
paragraph (e)(3)(iv) of this section. The emergency-relief devices must 
be sized and designed in such a way that the maximum pressure in the 
shell never exceeds the test pressure of the portable tank.
    Note to Paragraph (e)(3)(vi):
    An example of a method to determine the size of emergency-relief 
devices is given in Appendix 5 of the UN Manual of Tests and Criteria 
(incorporated by reference, see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).
    (vii) For insulated portable tanks, the capacity and setting of 
emergency-relief devices must be determined assuming a loss of 
insulation from 1 percent of the surface area.
    (viii) Vacuum-relief devices and reclosing devices on portable tanks 
used for flammable hazardous materials must be provided with flame 
arresters. Any reduction of the relief capacity caused by the flame 
arrester must be taken into account and the appropriate relief capacity 
must be provided.
    (ix) Service equipment such as devices and external piping must be 
designed and constructed so that no hazardous material remains in them 
after filling the portable tank.
    (x) Portable tanks may be either insulated or protected by a sun-
shield. If the SADT of the hazardous material in the portable tank is 55 
 deg.C (131  deg.F) or less, the portable tank must be completely 
insulated. The outer surface must be finished in white or bright metal.
    (xi) The degree of filling must not exceed 90% at 15  deg.C (59 
deg.F).
    (xii) DOT 57 metal portable tanks are authorized only for tert-butyl 
cumyl peroxide, di-(2-tert-butylperoxyisopropyl-benzene(s), dicumyl 
peroxide and mixtures of two or more of these peroxides. DOT 57 portable 
tanks must conform to the venting requirements of paragraph (e)(5) of 
this section. These portable tanks are not subject to the requirements 
of paragraphs (e)(3)(ii) and (e)(3)(iv) of this section.
    (4) For tertiary butyl hydroperoxide (TBHP), each tank car, cargo 
tank or portable tank must contain 7.6 cm (3.0 inches) low density 
polyethylene (PE) saddles having a melt index of at least 0.2 grams per 
10 minutes (ASTM D1238, condition E) as part of the lading, with a ratio 
of PE to TBHP over a range of 0.008 to 0.012 by mass. Alternatively, 
plastic or metal containers equipped with fusible plugs having a melting 
point between 69  deg.C (156  deg.F) and 71  deg.C (160  deg.F) and 
filled with a sufficient quantity of water to dilute the TBHP to 65 
percent or less by mass may be used. The PE saddles must be visually 
inspected after each trip and, at a minimum, once every 12 months, and 
replaced when discoloration, fracture, severe deformation, or other 
indication of change is noted.
    (5) IBCs. IBCs are authorized subject to the conditions and 
limitations of this section provided the IBC type is authorized 
according to IB52 (see Sec. 172.102(c)(4) of this subchapter), as 
applicable, and the IBC conforms to the requirements in subpart O of 
part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group II performance level. 
The following additional requirements also apply:
    (i) IBCs shall be provided with a device to allow venting during 
transportation. The inlet to the pressure relief device shall be sited 
in the vapor space of the IBC under maximum filling conditions during 
transportation.
    (ii) To prevent explosive rupture of metal IBCs or composite IBCs 
with complete metal casing, the emergency-relief devices shall be 
designed to vent all the decomposition products and vapors evolved 
during self-accelerating decomposition or during a period of not less 
than one hour of complete fire-engulfment as calculated by the formula 
in paragraph (e)(3)(v) of this section. The control and emergency 
temperatures specified in IB52 are based on a non-insulated IBC.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990]

    Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting 
Sec. 173.225, see the List of CFR Sections Affected which appears in the 
Finding Aids section of the printed volume and on GPO Access.



Sec. 173.226  Materials poisonous by inhalation, Division 6.1, Packing Group I, Hazard Zone A.

    Division 6.1, Packing Group I, materials that are poisonous by 
inhalation and that fall within the boundaries of

[[Page 543]]

Hazard Zone A in the graph found in Sec. 173.133 must be packed in non-
bulk packagings in accordance with the following paragraphs:
    (a) In seamless specification cylinders conforming to the 
requirements of Sec. 173.40. However, a welded cylinder filled before 
October 1, 2002, may be transported for reprocessing or disposal of the 
cylinder's contents until April 1, 2003.
    (b) In 1A1, 1B1, 1H1, 1N1, or 6HA1 drums further packed in a 1A2 or 
1H2 drum. Both inner and outer drums must conform to the performance 
test requirements of subpart M of part 178 of this subchapter at the 
Packing Group I performance level. The outer drum must have a minimum 
thickness of 1.35 mm (0.053 inch) for a 1A2 outer drum or 6.30 mm (0.248 
inch) for a 1H2 outer drum. Outer 1A2 and 1H2 drums must withstand a 
hydrostatic test pressure of 100 kPa (15 psig). Capacity of the inner 
drum may not exceed 220 L (58 gallons). In addition, the inner drum 
must--
    (1) Be capable of satisfactorily withstanding the hydrostatic 
pressure test in Sec. 178.605 of this subchapter at a test pressure of 
550 kPa (80 psig);
    (2) Satisfactorily withstand the leakproofness test in Sec. 178.604 
of this subchapter using an internal air pressure of at least twice the 
vapor pressure at 55  deg.C (131  deg.F) of the material to be packaged;
    (3) Have screw-type closures that are--
    (i) Closed and tightened to a torque prescribed by the closure 
manufacturer, using a device that is capable of measuring torque;
    (ii) Physically held in place by any means capable of preventing 
back-off or loosening of the closure by impact or vibration during 
transportation; and
    (iii) Provided with a cap seal that is properly applied in 
accordance with the cap seal manufacturer's recommendations and is 
capable of withstanding an internal pressure of at least 100 kPa (15 
psig).
    (4) Have a minimum thickness as follows:
    (i) If the capacity of the inner drum is less than or equal to 120 L 
(32 gallons), the minimum thickness of the inner drum is--
    (A) For a 1A1 or 1N1 drum, 1.3 mm (0.051 inch);
    (B) For a 1B1 drum, 3.9 mm (0.154 inch);
    (C) For a 1H1 drum, 3.16 mm (0.124 inch); and
    (D) For a 6HA1 drum, the plastic inner container shall be 1.58 mm 
(0.0622 inch) and the outer steel drum shall be 0.96 mm (0.0378 inch).
    (ii) If the capacity of the inner drum is greater than 120 L (32 
gallons), the thickness of the inner drum is--
    (A) For a 1A1 or 1N1 drum, 1.7 mm (0.067 inch);
    (B) For a 1B1 drum, 4.7 mm (0.185 inch);
    (C) For a 1H1 drum, 3.16 mm (0.124 inch); and
    (D) For a 6HA1 drum, the plastic inner container shall be 1.58 mm 
(0.0622 inch) and the outer steel drum shall be 1.08 mm (0.043 inch); 
and
    (5) Be isolated from the outer drum by a shock-mitigating, non-
reactive material.
    (c) In combination packagings, consisting of an inner packaging 
system and an outer packaging, as follows:
    (1) Outer packagings:

Steel drum: 1A2
Aluminum drum: 1B2
Metal drum, other than steel or aluminum: 1N2
Plywood drum: 1D
Fiber drum: 1G
Plastic drum: 1H2
Wooden barrel: 2C2
Steel jerrican: 3A2
Plastic jerrican: 3H2
Aluminum jerrican: 3B2
Steel box: 4A
Aluminum box: 4B
Natural wood box: 4C1 or 4C2
Plywood box: 4D
Reconstituted wood box: 4F
Fiberboard box: 4G
Expanded plastic box: 4H2
Solid plastic box: 4H2

    (2) Inner packaging system. The inner packaging system consists of 
two packagings: an impact-resistant receptacle of glass, earthenware, 
plastic or metal securely cushioned with a non-reactive, absorbent 
material and packed within a leak-tight packaging of metal or plastic. 
This combination packaging in turn is packed within the outer packaging. 
Capacity of each inner receptacle may not exceed 4 L (1 gallon). An 
inner receptacle that has a closure

[[Page 544]]

must have a closure which is physically held in place by any means 
capable of preventing back-off or loosening of the closure by impact or 
vibration during transportation. Both the inner packaging system and the 
outer packaging must conform to the performance test requirements of 
subpart M of part 178 of this subchapter, at the Packaging Group I 
performance level. The inner packaging system must meet these tests 
without the benefit of the outer packaging. The total amount of liquid 
contained in the outer packaging may not exceed 16 L (4 gallons).

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66274, 
Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-236, 58 FR 50236, Sept. 24, 1993; Amdt. 173-
138, 59 FR 49134, Sept. 26, 1994; Amdt. 173-241, 59 FR 67517, Dec. 29, 
1994; Amdt 173-261, 62 FR 24741, May 6, 1997; 66 FR 45380, Aug. 28, 
2001; 67 FR 61289, Sept. 30, 2002]



Sec. 173.227  Materials poisonous by inhalation, Division 6.1, Packing Group I, Hazard Zone B.

    Division 6.1, Packing Group I, materials that are poisonous by 
inhalation and that fall within the boundaries of Hazard Zone B in the 
graph found in Sec. 173.133 shall be packed in non-bulk packagings which 
conform to the performance test requirements of subpart M of part 178 of 
this subchapter, at the Packing Group I performance level. The following 
packagings are authorized:
    (a) In packagings as authorized in Sec. 173.226 and seamless and 
welded specification cylinders conforming to the requirements of 
Sec. 173.40.
    (b) 1A1, 1B1, 1N1 or 1H1 drum or 6HA1 composite further packed in a 
1A2 or 1H2 drum. Both the inner and outer drums must conform to the 
performance test requirements of subpart M of part 178 of this 
subchapter at the Packing Group I performance level. The outer drum must 
have a minimum thickness of 1.35 mm (0.053 inches) for a 1A2 outer drum 
or 6.30 mm (0.248 inches) for a 1H2 outer drum. Outer 1A2 and 1H2 drums 
must withstand a hydrostatic test pressure of 100 kPa (15 psig). In 
addition, the inner drum must--
    (1) Satisfactorily withstand the leakproofness test in Sec. 178.604 
of this subchapter using an internal air pressure of at least two times 
the vapor pressure at 55  deg.C (131  deg.F) of the material to be 
packaged;
    (2) Have screw closures that are--
    (i) Closed and tightened to a torque prescribed by the closure 
manufacturer, using a device that is capable of measuring torque;
    (ii) Physically held in place by any means capable of preventing 
back-off or loosening of the closure by impact or vibration during 
transportation; and
    (iii) Provided with a cap seal that is properly applied in 
accordance with the cap seal manufacturer's recommendations and is 
capable of withstanding an internal pressure of at least 100 kPa (15 
psig).
    (3) Have a minimum thickness as follows:
    (i) If the capacity of the inner drum is less than or equal to 30 L 
(7.9 gallons), the minimum thickness of the inner drum is:
    (A) For a 1A1 drum, 0.69 mm (0.027 inch);
    (B) For a 1B1 drum, 2.79 mm (0.110 inch);
    (C) For a 1H1 drum, 1.14 mm (0.045 inch); and
    (D) For a 6HA1 drum, the plastic inner container shall be 1.58 mm 
(0.0625 inch), the outer steel drum shall be 0.70 mm (0.027 inch).
    (ii) If the capacity of the inner drum is greater than 30 L (7.9 
gallons) but less than or equal to 120 L (32 gallons), the minimum 
thickness of the inner drum is--
    (A) For a 1A1 drum, 1.08 mm (.043 inch);
    (B) For a 1B1 drum, 3.9 mm (0.154 inch);
    (C) For a 1H1 drum, 3.16 mm (0.124 inch); and
    (D) For a 6HA1 drum, the plastic inner container shall be 1.58 mm 
(0.0625 inch) and the outer steel drum shall be 0.96 mm (0.0378 inches).
    (iii) If the capacity of the inner drum is greater than 120 L (31.7 
gallons), the thickness of the inner drum is--
    (A) For a 1A1 or 1N1 drum, 1.35 mm (0.053 inches);
    (B) For a 1B1 drum, 4.7 mm (0.185 inches);
    (C) For a 1H1 drum, 3.16 mm (0.124 inches); and
    (D) For a 6HA1 drum, the plastic inner container shall be 1.58 mm 
(0.0625

[[Page 545]]

inch) and the outer steel drum shall be 1.08 mm (0.043 inch).
    (4) Be isolated from the outer drum by a shock-mitigating, non-
reactive material; and
    (5) Have a capacity not greater than 220 L (58 gallons).
    (c) 1A1, 1B1, 1H1, 1N1 or 6HA1 drums described in paragraph (b) of 
this section may be used without being further packed in a 1A2 or 1H2 
drum if the shipper loads the material, blocks and braces the drums 
within the transport vehicle and seals the transport vehicle used. Drums 
may not be stacked (double decked) within the transport vehicle. 
Shipments must be from one origin to one destination only without any 
intermediate pickup or delivery.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52643, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66274, 
Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45463, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 173-236, 58 FR 50236, 
Sept. 24, 1993; Amdt. 173-138, 59 FR 49134, Sept. 26, 1994; 66 FR 45380, 
Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51643, Aug. 8, 2002]



Sec. 173.228  Bromine pentafluoride or bromine trifluoride.

    The following packagings are authorized for bromine pentafluoride 
and bromine trifluoride:
    (a) Specification 3A150, 3AA150, 3B240, 3BN150, 4B240, 4BA240, 
4BW240 and 3E1800 cylinders. No cylinder may be equipped with a pressure 
relief device.
    (b) A material in Hazard Zone A must be transported in a seamless 
specification cylinder conforming to the requirements of Sec. 173.40. 
However, a welded cylinder filled before October 1, 2002, may be 
transported for reprocessing or disposal of the cylinder's contents 
until April 1, 2003. No cylinder may be equipped with a pressure relief 
device.

[67 FR 51643, Aug. 8, 2002, as amended at 67 FR 61289, Sept. 30, 2002]



Sec. 173.229  Chloric acid solution or chlorine dioxide hydrate, frozen.

    When the Sec. 172.101 table specifies that a hazardous material be 
packaged in accordance with this section, only 4G fiberboard boxes, with 
inner packagings of polyethylene or other suitable material, are 
authorized. Fiberboard boxes must be reinforced and insulated and 
sufficient dry ice must be used to maintain the hydrate or acid in a 
frozen state during transportation. Each packaging must conform to the 
general packaging requirements of subpart B of part 173, and to the 
requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group I 
performance level. Transportation is authorized only by private or 
contract carrier by motor vehicle.



Subpart F--Bulk Packaging for Hazardous Materials Other Than Class 1 and 
                                 Class 7



Sec. 173.240  Bulk packaging for certain low hazard solid materials.

    When Sec. 172.101 of this subchapter specifies that a hazardous 
material be packaged under this section, only the following bulk 
packagings are authorized, subject to the requirements of subparts A and 
B of part 173 of this subchapter and the special provisions specified in 
column 7 of the Sec. 172.101 table.
    (a) Rail cars: Class DOT 103, 104, 105, 109, 111, 112, 114, 115, or 
120 tank car tanks; Class 106 or 110 multi-unit tank car tanks; and 
metal non-DOT specification, sift-proof tank car tanks and sift-proof 
closed cars.
    (b) Motor vehicles: Specification MC 300, MC 301, MC 302, MC 303, MC 
304, MC 305, MC 306, MC 307, MC 310, MC 311, MC 312, MC 330, MC 331, DOT 
406, DOT 407, and DOT 412 cargo tank motor vehicles; non-DOT 
specification, sift-proof cargo tank motor vehicles; and sift-proof 
closed vehicles.
    (c) Portable tanks and closed bulk bins. DOT 51, 56, 57 and 60 
portable tanks; IMO type 1, 2 and 5, and IM 101 and IM 102 portable 
tanks; UN portable tanks; marine portable tanks conforming to 46 CFR 
part 64; and sift-proof non-DOT Specification portable tanks and closed 
bulk bins are authorized.
    (d) IBCs. IBCs are authorized subject to the conditions and 
limitations of this section provided the IBC type is authorized 
according to the IBC packaging code specified for the specific hazardous 
material in Column (7) of the Sec. 172.101 Table of this subchapter and 
the IBC conforms to the requirements in subpart O of part 178 of this 
subchapter at the Packing Group performance level as specified in Column

[[Page 546]]

(5) of the Sec. 172.101 Table of this subchapter for the material being 
transported.
    (1) IBCs may not be used for the following hazardous materials:
    (i) Packing Group I liquids; and
    (ii) Packing Group I solids that may become liquid during 
transportation.
    (2) The following IBCs may not be used for Packing Group II and III 
solids that may become liquid during transportation:
    (i) Wooden: 11C, 11D and 11F;
    (ii) Fiberboard: 11G;
    (iii) Flexible: 13H1, 13H2, 13H3, 13H4, 13H5, 13L1, 13L2, 13L3, 
13L4, 13M1 and 13M2; and
    (iv) Composite: 11HZ2 and 21HZ2.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52663, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66274, 
Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-238, 59 FR 38067, July 26, 1994; Amdt. 173-252, 
61 FR 28676, June 5, 1996; 66 FR 33435, June 21, 2001]

    Editorial Note: At 66 FR 33435, June 21, 2001, Sec. 173.240(d) was 
revised. Amendments published at 66 FR 45380, Aug. 28, 2001, could not 
be incorporated because of inaccurate amendatory instruction.



Sec. 173.241  Bulk packagings for certain low hazard liquid and solid materials.

    When Sec. 172.101 of this subchapter specifies that a hazardous 
material be packaged under this section, only the following bulk 
packagings are authorized, subject to the requirements of subparts A and 
B of part 173 of this subchapter and the special provisions specified in 
column 7 of the Sec. 172.101 table.
    (a) Rail cars: Class DOT 103, 104, 105, 109, 111, 112, 114, 115, or 
120 tank car tanks; Class 106 or 110 multi-unit tank car tanks and AAR 
Class 203W, 206W, and 211W tank car tanks.
    (b) Cargo tanks: DOT specification MC 300, MC 301, MC 302, MC 303, 
MC 304, MC 305, MC 306, MC 307, MC 310, MC 311, MC 312, MC 330, MC 331, 
DOT 406, DOT 407, and DOT 412 cargo tank motor vehicles; and non-DOT 
specification cargo tank motor vehicles suitable for transport of 
liquids.
    (c) Portable tanks. DOT Specification 51, 56, 57 and 60 portable 
tanks; IMO type 1, 2 and 5, and IM 101 and IM 102 portable tanks; UN 
portable tanks; marine portable tanks conforming to 46 CFR part 64; and 
non-DOT Specification portable tanks suitable for transport of liquids 
are authorized.
    (d) IBCs. IBCs are authorized subject to the conditions and 
limitations of this section provided the IBC type is authorized 
according to the IBC packaging code specified for the specific hazardous 
material in Column (7) of the Sec. 172.101 Table of this subchapter and 
the IBC conforms to the requirements in subpart O of part 178 of this 
subchapter at the Packing Group performance level as specified in Column 
(5) of the Sec. 172.101 Table for the material being transported.
    (1) IBCs may not be used for the following hazardous materials:
    (i) Packing Group I liquids; and
    (ii) Packing Group I solids that may become liquid during 
transportation.
    (2) The following IBCs may not be used for Packing Group II and III 
solids that may become liquid during transportation:
    (i) Wooden: 11C, 11D and 11F;
    (ii) Fiberboard: 11G;
    (iii) Flexible: 13H1, 13H2, 13H3, 13H4, 13H5, 13L1, 13L2, 13L3, 
13L4, 13M1 and 13M2; and
    (iv) Composite: 11HZ2 and 21HZ2.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52663, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66275, 
Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-238, 59 FR 38067, July 26, 1994; Amdt. 173-252, 
61 FR 28676, June 5, 1996; 66 FR 33435, June 21, 2001]

    Editorial Note: At 66 FR 33435, June 21, 2001, Sec. 173.241(d) was 
revised. Amendments published at 66 FR 45380, Aug. 28, 2001, could not 
be incorporated because of inaccurate amendatory instruction.



Sec. 173.242  Bulk packagings for certain medium hazard liquids and solids, including solids with dual hazards.

    When Sec. 172.101 of this subchapter specifies that a hazardous 
material be packaged under this section, only the following bulk 
packagings are authorized, subject to the requirements of subparts A and 
B of part 173 of this subchapter and the special provisions specified in 
column 7 of the Sec. 172.101 table.
    (a) Rail cars: Class DOT 103, 104, 105, 109, 111, 112, 114, 115, or 
120 tank car tanks; Class 106 or 110 multi-unit tank car tanks and AAR 
Class 206W tank car tanks.
    (b) Cargo tanks: Specification MC 300, MC 301, MC 302, MC 303, MC 
304, MC 305, MC 306, MC 307, MC 310, MC 311, MC 312,

[[Page 547]]

MC 330, MC 331, DOT 406, DOT 407, and DOT 412 cargo tank motor vehicles. 
Cargo tanks used to transport Class 3, Packing Group I or II, or Packing 
Group III with a flash point of less than 38  deg.C (100  deg.F); Class 
6, Packing Group I or II; and Class 8, Packing Group I or II materials 
must conform to the following special requirements:
    (1) Pressure relief system: Except as provided by Sec. 173.33(d), 
each cargo tank must be equipped with a pressure relief system meeting 
the requirements of Sec. 178.346-3 or Sec. 178.347-4 of this subchapter. 
However, pressure relief devices on MC 310, MC 311 and MC 312 cargo 
tanks must meet the requirements for a Specification MC 307 cargo tank 
(except for Class 8, Packing Group I and II). Pressure relief devices on 
MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tanks must meet the requirement in Sec. 178.337-
9 of this subchapter.
    (2) Bottom outlets: DOT 406, DOT 407 and DOT 412 must be equipped 
with stop-valves meeting the requirements of Sec. 178.345-11 of this 
subchapter; MC 304, MC 307, MC 310, MC 311, and MC 312 cargo tanks must 
be equipped with stop-valves capable of being remotely closed within 30 
seconds of actuation by manual or mechanic means and (except for Class 
8, Packing Group I and II) by a closure activated at a temperature not 
over 121  deg.C (250  deg.F); MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tanks must be 
equipped with internal self-closing stop-valves meeting the requirements 
in Sec. 178.337-11 of this subchapter.
    (c) Portable tanks. DOT Specification 51, 56, 57 and 60 portable 
tanks; Specification IM 101, IM 102, and UN portable tanks when a T Code 
is specified in Column (7) of the Sec. 172.101 Hazardous Materials Table 
for a specific hazardous material; and marine portable tanks conforming 
to 46 CFR part 64 are authorized. DOT Specification 57 portable tanks 
used for the transport by vessel of Class 3, Packaging Group II 
materials must conform to the following:
    (1) Minimum design pressure. Each tank must have a minimum design 
pressure of 62 kPa (9 psig);
    (2) Pressure relief devices. Each tank must be equipped with at 
least one pressure relief device, such as a spring-loaded valve or 
fusible plug, conforming to the following:
    (i) Each pressure relief device must communicate with the vapor 
space of the tank when the tank is in a normal transportation attitude. 
Shutoff valves may not be installed between the tank opening and any 
pressure relief device. Pressure relief devices must be mounted, 
shielded, or drained to prevent the accumulation of any material that 
could impair the operation or discharge capability of the device;
    (ii) Frangible devices are not authorized;
    (iii) No pressure relief device may open at less than 34.4 kPa (5 
psig);
    (iv) If a fusible device is used for relieving pressure, the device 
must have a minimum area of 1.25 square inches. The device must function 
at a temperature between 104  deg.C. and 149  deg.C. (220  deg.F. and 
300  deg.F.) and at a pressure less than the design test pressure of the 
tank, unless this latter function is accomplished by a separate device; 
and
    (v) No relief device may be used which would release flammable 
vapors under normal conditions of transportation (temperature up to and 
including 54  deg.C. (130  deg.F.).); and
    (3) Venting capacity. The minimum venting capacity for pressure 
activated vents must be 6,000 cubic feet of free air per hour (measured 
at 101.3 kPa (14.7 psi) and 15.6  deg.C. (60  deg.F.)) at not more than 
34.4 kPa (5 psi). The total emergency venting capacity (cu. ft./hr.) of 
each portable tank must be at least that determined from the following 
table:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                            Cubic feet
         Total surface area square feet \1\ \2\            free air per
                                                               hour
------------------------------------------------------------------------
20......................................................          15,800
30......................................................          23,700
40......................................................          31,600
50......................................................          39,500
60......................................................          47,400
70......................................................          55,300
80......................................................          63,300
90......................................................          71,200
100.....................................................          79,100
120.....................................................          94,900
140.....................................................         110,700
160.....................................................         126,500
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Interpolate for intermediate sizes.
\2\ Surface area excludes area of legs.

    (d) IBCs. IBCs are authorized subject to the conditions and 
limitations of this section provided the IBC type is

[[Page 548]]

authorized according to the IBC packaging code specified for the 
specific hazardous material in Column (7) of the Sec. 172.101 Table of 
this subchapter and the IBC conforms to the requirements in subpart O of 
part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group performance level as 
specified in Column (5) of the Sec. 172.101 Table of this subchapter for 
the material being transported.
    (1) IBCs may not be used for the following hazardous materials:
    (i) Packing Group I liquids; and
    (ii) Packing Group I solids that may become liquid during 
transportation.
    (2) The following IBCs may not be used for Packing Group II and III 
solids that may become liquid during transportation:
    (i) Wooden: 11C, 11D and 11F;
    (ii) Fiberboard: 11G;
    (iii) Flexible: 13H1, 13H2, 13H3, 13H4, 13H5, 13L1, 13L2, 13L3, 
13L4, 13M1 and 13M2; and
    (iv) Composite: 11HZ2 and 21HZ2.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52663, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66275, 
Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-238, 59 FR 38067, July 26, 1994; Amdt. 173-243, 
60 FR 40038, Aug. 4, 1995; Amdt. 173-246, 60 FR 49110, Sept. 21, 1995; 
Amdt. 173-252, 61 FR 28676, June 5, 1996; 62 FR 51560, Oct. 1, 1997; 65 
FR 50461, Aug. 18, 2000; 66 FR 33435, June 21, 2001; 67 FR 15743, Apr. 
3, 2002]

    Editorial Note: At 66 FR 33435, June 21, 2001, Sec. 173.242(d) was 
revised. Amendments published at 66 FR 45380, Aug. 28, 2001, could not 
be incorporated because of inaccurate amendatory instruction.



Sec. 173.243  Bulk packaging for certain high hazard liquids and dual hazard materials which pose a moderate hazard.

    When Sec. 172.101 of this subchapter specifies that a hazardous 
material be packaged under this section, only the following bulk 
packagings are authorized, subject to the requirements of subparts A and 
B of part 173 of this subchapter and the special provisions specified in 
column 7 of the Sec. 172.101 table.
    (a) Rail cars: Class DOT 103, 104, 105, 109, 111, 112, 114, 115, or 
120 fusion-welded tank car tanks; and Class 106 or 110 multi-unit tank 
car tanks.
    (b) Cargo tanks. Specification MC 304, MC 307, MC 330, MC 331 cargo 
tank motor vehicles; and MC 310, MC 311, MC 312, DOT 407, and DOT 412 
cargo tank motor vehicles with tank design pressure of at least 172.4 
kPa (25 psig). Cargo tanks used to transport Class 3 or Division 6.1 
materials, or Class 8, Packing Group I or II materials must conform to 
the following special requirements:
    (1) Pressure relief system: Except as provided by Sec. 173.33(d), 
each cargo tank must be equipped with a pressure relief system meeting 
the requirements of Sec. 178.346-3 or 178.347-4 of this subchapter. 
However, pressure relief devices on MC 310, MC 311 and MC 312 cargo 
tanks must meet the requirements for a Specification MC 307 cargo tank 
(except for Class 8, Packing Group I and II). Pressure relief devices on 
MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tanks must meet the requirement in Sec. 178.337-
9 of this subchapter.
    (2) Bottom outlets: DOT 407 and DOT 412 cargo tanks must be equipped 
with stop-valves meeting the requirements of Sec. 178.345-11 of this 
subchapter; MC 304, MC 307, MC 310, MC 311, and MC 312 cargo tanks must 
be equipped with stop-valves capable of being remotely closed within 30 
seconds of actuation by manual or mechanic means and (except for Class 
8, Packing Group I and II) by a closure activated at a temperature not 
over 121  deg.C (250  deg.F); MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tanks must be 
equipped with internal self-closing stop-valves meeting the requirements 
in Sec. 178.337-11 of this subchapter.
    (c) Portable tanks. DOT Specification 51 and 60 portable tanks; UN 
portable tanks and IM 101 and IM 102 portable tanks when a T code is 
specified in Column (7) of the Sec. 172.101 Table of this subchapter for 
a specific hazardous material; and marine portable tanks conforming to 
46 CFR part 64 with design pressure of at least 172.4 kPa (25 psig) are 
authorized.
    (d) IBCs. IBCs are authorized subject to the conditions and 
limitations of this section provided the IBC type is authorized 
according to the IBC packaging code specified for the specific hazardous 
material in Column (7) of the Sec. 172.101 Table of this subchapter and 
the IBC conforms to the requirements in subpart O of part 178 of this 
subchapter at the Packing Group performance level as specified in Column

[[Page 549]]

(5) of the Sec. 172.101 Table of this subchapter for the material being 
transported.
    (1) IBCs may not be used for the following hazardous materials:
    (i) Packing Group I liquids; and
    (ii) Packing Group I solids that may become liquid during 
transportation.
    (2) The following IBCs may not be used for Packing Group II and III 
solids that may become liquid during transportation:
    (i) Wooden: 11C, 11D and 11F;
    (ii) Fiberboard: 11G;
    (iii) Flexible: 13H1, 13H2, 13H3, 13H4, 13H5, 13L1, 13L2, 13L3, 
13L4, 13M1 and 13M2; and
    (iv) Composite: 11HZ2 and 21HZ2.
    (e) A dual hazard material may be packaged in accordance with 
Sec. 173.242 if:
    (1) The subsidiary hazard is Class 3 with a flash point greater than 
38  deg.C (100  deg.F); or
    (2) The subsidiary hazard is Division 6.1, Packing Group III; or
    (3) The subsidiary hazard is Class 8, Packaging Group, III.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52663, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66275, 
Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-138, 59 FR 49134, Sept. 26, 1994; Amdt. 173-
238, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994; Amdt. 173-243, 60 FR 40038, Aug. 4, 
1995; Amdt. 173-246, 60 FR 49110, Sept. 21, 1995; Amdt. 173-252, 61 FR 
28676, June 5, 1996; 62 FR 51560, Oct. 1, 1997; 64 FR 10780, Mar. 5, 
1999; 66 FR 33435, June 21, 2001; 67 FR 15743, Apr. 3, 2002]

    Editorial Note: At 66 FR 33435, June 21, 2001, Sec. 173.243(d) was 
revised. Amendments published at 66 FR 45380, Aug. 28, 2001, could not 
be incorporated because of inaccurate amendatory instruction.



Sec. 173.244  Bulk packaging for certain pyrophoric liquids (Division 4.2), dangerous when wet (Division 4.3) materials, and poisonous liquids with inhalation 
          hazards (Division 6.1).

    When Sec. 172.101 of this subchapter specifies that a hazardous 
material be packaged under this section, only the following bulk 
packagings are authorized, subject to the requirements of subparts A and 
B of part 173 of this subchapter and the special provisions specified in 
column 7 of the Sec. 172.101 table.
    (a) Rail cars: Class DOT 105, 109, 112, 114, or 120 fusion-welded 
tank car tanks; and Class 106 or 110 multi-unit tank car tanks.
    (b) Cargo tanks: Specifications MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tank motor 
vehicles and, except for Division 4.2 materials, MC 312 and DOT 412 
cargo tank motor vehicles.
    (c) Portable tanks: DOT 51 portable tanks.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52663, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66275, 
Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45463, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 173-252, 61 FR 28676, 
June 5, 1996]



Sec. 173.245  Bulk packaging for extremely hazardous materials such as poisonous gases (Division 2.3).

    When Sec. 172.101 of this subchapter specifies that a hazardous 
material be packaged under this section, only the following bulk 
packagings are authorized, subject to the requirements of subparts A and 
B of part 173 of this subchapter and the special provisions specified in 
column 7 of the Sec. 172.101 table.
    (a) Tank car tanks and multi-unit tank car tanks, when approved by 
the Associate Administrator.
    (b) Cargo tank motor vehicles and portable tanks, when approved by 
the Associate Administrator.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52663, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66275, 
Dec. 20, 1991; 66 FR 45379, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.247  Bulk packaging for certain elevated temperature materials.

    When Sec. 172.101 of this subchapter specifies that a hazardous 
material be packaged under this section, only the following bulk 
packagings are authorized, subject to the requirements of subparts A and 
B of part 173 of this subchapter and the special provisions in column 7 
of the Sec. 172.101 table. On or after October 1, 1993, authorized 
packagings must meet all requirements in paragraph (g) of this section, 
unless otherwise excepted.
    (a) Rail cars: Class DOT 103, 104, 105, 109, 111, 112, 114, 115, or 
120 tank car tanks; Class DOT 106, 110 multi-unit tank car tanks; AAR 
Class 203W, 206W, 211W tank car tanks; and non-DOT specification tank 
car tanks equivalent in structural design and accident damage resistance 
to specification packagings.
    (b) Cargo tanks: Specification MC 300, MC 301, MC 302, MC 303, MC 
304, MC 305, MC 306, MC 307, MC 310, MC 311, MC 312,

[[Page 550]]

MC 330, MC 331 cargo tank motor vehicles; DOT 406, DOT 407, DOT 412 
cargo tank motor vehicles; and non-DOT specification cargo tank motor 
vehicles equivalent in structural design and accident damage resistance 
to specification packagings. A non-DOT specification cargo tank motor 
vehicle constructed of carbon steel which is in elevated temperature 
material service is excepted from Sec. 178.345-7(d)(5) of this 
subchapter.
    (c) Portable tanks. DOT Specification 51, 56, 57 and 60 portable 
tanks; IM 101 and IM 102 portable tanks; UN portable tanks; marine 
portable tanks conforming to 46 CFR part 64; metal IBCs and non-
specification portable tanks equivalent in structural design and 
accident damage resistance to specification packagings are authorized.
    (d) Crucibles: Nonspecification crucibles designed and constructed 
such that the stress in the packaging does not exceed one fourth (0.25) 
of the ultimate strength of the packaging material at any temperature 
within the design temperature range. Stress is determined under a load 
equal to the sum of the static or working pressure in combination with 
the loads developed from accelerations and decelerations incident to 
normal transportation. For highway transportation, these forces are 
assumed to be ``1.7g'' vertical, ``0.75g'' longitudinal, and ``0.4g'' 
transverse, in reference to the axes of the transport vehicle. Each 
accelerative or decelerative load may be considered separately.
    (e) Kettles: A kettle, for the purpose of this section, is a bulk 
packaging (portable tank or cargo tank) having a capacity not greater 
than 5678 L (1500 gallons) with an integral heating apparatus used for 
melting various bituminous products such as asphalt. Kettles used for 
the transport of asphalt or bitumen are subject to the following 
requirements:
    (1) Low stability kettles. Kettles with a ratio of track-width to 
fully loaded center of gravity (CG) height less than 2.5 must meet all 
requirements of paragraph (g) of this section (track-width is the 
distance measured between the outer edge of the kettle tires; CG height 
is measured perpendicular from the road surface).
    (2) High stability kettles. (i) Kettles with a total capacity of 
less than 2650 L (700 gallons) and a ratio of track-width to fully 
loaded CG height of 2.5 or more are excepted from all requirements of 
paragraph (g)(2) of this section and the rollover protection 
requirements of paragraph (g)(6) of this section, if closures meet the 
requirements of paragraph (e)(2)(iii) of this section.
    (ii) Kettles with a total capacity of 2650 L (700 gallons) or more 
and a ratio of track-width to fully loaded CG height of 2.5 or more are 
excepted from the ``substantially leak tight'' requirements of paragraph 
(g)(2) of this section and the rollover protection requirements of 
paragraph (g)(6) of this section if closures meet the requirements of 
paragraph (e)(2)(iii) of this section.
    (iii) Closures must be securely closed during transportation. 
Closures also must be designed to prevent opening and the expulsion of 
lading in a rollover accident.
    (f) Other bulk packagings: Bulk packagings, other than those 
specified in paragraphs (a) through (e) of this section, which are used 
for the transport of elevated temperature materials, must conform to all 
requirements of paragraph (g) of this section on or after October 1, 
1993.
    (g) General requirements. Bulk packagings authorized or used for 
transport of elevated temperature materials must conform to the 
following requirements:
    (1) Pressure and vacuum control equipment. When pressure or vacuum 
control equipment is required on a packaging authorized in this section, 
such equipment must be of a self-reclosing design, must prevent package 
rupture or collapse due to pressure, must prevent significant release of 
lading due to packaging overturn or splashing or surging during normal 
transport conditions, and may be external to the packaging.
    (i) Pressure control equipment is not required if pressure in the 
packaging would increase less than 10 percent as a result of heating the 
lading from the lowest design operating temperature to a temperature 
likely to be encountered if the packaging were engulfed in a fire. When 
pressure control equipment

[[Page 551]]

is required, it must prevent rupture of the packaging from heating, 
including fire engulfment.
    (ii) Vacuum control equipment is not required if the packaging is 
designed to withstand an external pressure of 100 kPa (14.5 psig) or if 
pressure in the packaging would decrease less than 10 percent as a 
result of the lading cooling from the highest design operating 
temperature to the lowest temperature incurred in transport. When vacuum 
control equipment is required, it must prevent collapse of the packaging 
from a cooling-induced pressure differential.
    (iii) When the regulations require a reclosing pressure relief 
device, the lading must not render the devices inoperable (i.e. from 
clogging, freezing, or fouling). If the lading affects the proper 
operation of the device, the packaging must have:
    (A) A safety relief device incorporating a frangible disc or a 
permanent opening, each having a maximum effective area of 22 cm\2\ (3.4 
in.\2\), for transportation by highway;
    (B) For transportation of asphalt by highway, a safety relief device 
incorporating a frangible disc or a permanent opening, each having a 
maximum effective area of 48 cm \2\ (7.4 in \2\); or
    (C) For transportation by rail, a non-reclosing pressure relief 
device incorporating a rupture disc conforming to the requirements of 
Sec. 179.15 of this subchapter.
    (iv) Reclosing pressure relief devices, rupture discs or permanent 
openings must not allow the release of lading during normal 
transportation conditions (i.e., due to splashing or surging).
    (2) Closures. All openings, except permanent vent openings 
authorized in paragraph (g)(1)(iii) of this section, must be securely 
closed during transportation. Packagings must be substantially leak-
tight so as not to allow any more than dripping or trickling of a non-
continuous flow when overturned. Closures must be designed and 
constructed to withstand, without exceeding the yield strength of the 
packaging, twice the static loading produced by the lading in any 
packaging orientation and at all operating temperatures.
    (3) Strength. Each packaging must be designed and constructed to 
withstand, without exceeding the yield strength of the packaging, twice 
the static loading produced by the lading in any orientation and at all 
operating temperatures.
    (4) Compatibility. The packaging and lading must be compatible over 
the entire operating temperature range.
    (5) Markings. In addition to any other markings required by this 
subchapter, each packaging must be durably marked in a place readily 
accessible for inspection in characters at least 4.8 mm (3/16 inch) with 
the manufacturer's name, date of manufacture, design temperature range, 
and maximum product weight (or ``load limit'' for tank cars) or 
volumetric capacity.
    (6) Accident damage protection. For transportation by highway, 
external loading and unloading valves and closures must be protected 
from impact damage resulting from collision or overturn. Spraying 
equipment and the road oil application portion of a packaging are 
excepted from this requirement.
    (7) New construction. Specification packagings that are being 
manufactured for the transport of elevated temperature materials must be 
authorized for current construction.
    (h) Exceptions--(1) General. Packagings manufactured for elevated 
temperature materials service prior to October 1, 1993, which are not in 
full compliance with the requirements in paragraph (g) of this section, 
may continue in service if they meet the applicable requirements of 
subparts A and B of this part and meet the closure requirements in 
paragraph (g)(2) of this section by March 30, 1995.
    (2) Kettles. Kettles in service prior to October 1, 1993, which are 
used to transport asphalt or bitumen, are excepted from specific 
provisions of this section as follows:
    (i) Kettles with a total capacity of less than 2650 L (700 gallons), 
which are not in full compliance with the requirements of paragraph (g) 
of this section, may continue in elevated temperature material service 
if they meet the applicable requirements of subparts A and B of this 
part and if, after March 30, 1995, closures are secured during transport 
to resist opening in an overturn.

[[Page 552]]

    (ii) Kettles with a total capacity of 2650 L (700 gallons) or more, 
which are not in full compliance with the requirements of paragraph (g) 
of this section, may continue in elevated temperature material service 
if they meet the applicable requirements of subparts A and B of this 
part and if, after March 30, 1995, closures are secured during transport 
to resist opening in an overturn and no opening exceeds 46 cm\2\ (7.1 
in\2\).
    (3) Molten metals and molten glass. This section does not apply to 
packagings used for transportation of molten metals and molten glass by 
rail when movement is restricted to operating speeds less than 15 miles 
per hour. (See Sec. 172.203(g)(3) of this subchapter for shipping paper 
requirements.)
    (4) Solid elevated temperature materials. A material which meets the 
definition of a solid elevated temperature material is excepted from all 
requirements of this subchapter except Sec. 172.325 of this subchapter.

[Amdt. 173-227, 58 FR 3349, Jan. 8, 1993, as amended by Amdt. 173-234, 
58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; 173-237, 59 FR 28493, June 2, 1994; 62 FR 
51560, Oct. 1, 1997; 63 FR 52849, Oct. 1, 1998; 65 FR 50461, Aug. 18, 
2000; 66 FR 33436, June 21, 2001; 66 FR 45382, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 
61013, Sept. 27, 2002]



Sec. 173.249  Bromine.

    When Sec. 172.101 of this subchapter specifies that a hazardous 
material be packaged under this section, only the following bulk 
packagings are authorized, subject to the requirements of subparts A and 
B of part 173 of this subchapter and the special provisions specified in 
column 7 of the Sec. 172.101 table.
    (a) Class DOT 105A300W or 105A500W tank cars. Class 105A500W tank 
cars may be equipped with manway cover plates, pressure relief valves, 
vent valves, and loading/unloading valves that are required on Class 
105A-300W tank cars. Tank cars must conform with paragraphs (d) through 
(f) of this section.
    (b) Specification MC 310, MC 311, MC 312 or DOT 412 cargo tank motor 
vehicles conforming with paragraphs (d) through (f) of this section. The 
total quantity in one tank may not be less than 88 percent nor more than 
96 percent of the volume of the tank. Cargo tanks in bromine service 
built prior to August 31, 1991 may continue in service under the 
requirements contained in Sec. 173.252(a)(4) of this part in effect on 
September 30, 1991.
    (c) Specification IM 101 portable tanks conforming with paragraphs 
(d) through (f) of this section. The total quantity in one tank may not 
be less than 88 percent nor more than 92 percent of the volume of the 
tank.
    (d) The tank must be made from nickel-clad or lead-lined steel 
plate. Nickel cladding or lead lining must be on the inside of the tank. 
Nickel cladding must comprise at least 20 percent of the required 
minimum total thickness. Nickel cladding must conform to ASTM 
Specification B162-69. Lead lining must be at least 4.763 mm (0.188 
inch) thick. All tank equipment and appurtenances in contact with the 
lading must be lined or made from metal not subject to deterioration by 
contact with lading.
    (e) Maximum filling density is 300 percent of the tank's water 
capacity. Minimum filling density is 287 percent of the tank's water 
capacity. Maximum water capacity is 9,253 kg (20,400 pounds) for DOT 
105A300W tank cars. Maximum quantity of lading in DOT 105A300W tank cars 
is 27,216 kg (60,000 pounds). Maximum water capacity is 16,964 kg 
(37,400 pounds) for DOT 105A500W tank cars and DOT 105A500W tank cars 
equipped as described in paragraph (a) of this section. Maximum quantity 
of lading in DOT 105A500W tank cars is 49,895 kg (110,000 pounds).
    (f) Tank shell and head thickness for cargo tank motor vehicles and 
portable tanks must be at least 9.5 mm (0.375 inch) excluding lead 
lining.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52663, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66275, 
Dec. 20, 1991]



               Subpart G--Gases; Preparation and Packaging



Sec. 173.300  [Reserved]



Sec. 173.301  General requirements for shipment of compressed gases in cylinders and spherical pressure vessels.

    (a) General qualifications for use of cylinders. As used in this 
subpart, filled or

[[Page 553]]

charged means an introduction or presence of a hazardous material in a 
cylinder. A Class 2 material (gas) offered for transportation in a 
cylinder must be prepared in accordance with this section and 
Secs. 173.302 through 173.305, as applicable.
    (1) Compressed gases must be in metal cylinders and containers built 
in accordance with the DOT and ICC specifications, as shown in this 
paragraph (a)(1), in effect at the time of manufacture, and requalified 
and marked as required by the specification and the regulation for 
requalification, if applicable:

                               Packagings

2P
2Q
ICC-3\1\
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

    \1\ Use of existing cylinders is authorized. New construction is not 
authorized.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

3A
3AA
3AL
3AX
3A480X
3AAX
3B
3BN
3E
3HT
3T
4AA480
4B
4B240ET
4BA
4BW
4D
4DA
4DS
4E
4L
8
8AL
39

    (2) A cylinder must be filled in accordance with this part. Before 
each filling of a cylinder, the person filling the cylinder must 
visually inspect the outside of the cylinder. A cylinder that has a 
crack or leak, is bulged, has a defective valve or a leaking or 
defective pressure relief device, or bears evidence of physical abuse, 
fire or heat damage, or detrimental rusting or corrosion, may not be 
filled and offered for transportation. A cylinder may be repaired and 
requalified only as prescribed in subpart C of part 180 of this 
subchapter.
    (3) Pressure relief devices must be tested for leaks before the 
charged cylinder is shipped from the cylinder filling plant. It is 
expressly forbidden to repair a leaking fuse plug device, where the leak 
is through the fusible metal or between the fusible metal and the 
opening in the plug body, except by removal of the device and 
replacement of the fusible metal.
    (4) A cylinder that previously contained a Class 8 material must be 
requalified in accordance with Sec. 180.205(e) of this subchapter.
    (5) When a cylinder with a marked pressure limit is prescribed, 
another cylinder made under the same specification but with a higher 
marked pressure limit is authorized. For example, a cylinder marked 
``DOT-4B500'' may be used when ``DOT-4B300'' is specified.
    (6) No person may fill a cylinder overdue for periodic 
requalification with a hazardous material and then offer it for 
transportation. The prohibition against offering a cylinder for 
transportation that is overdue for periodic requalification does not 
apply to a cylinder filled prior to the requalification due date.
    (7) A cylinder with an authorized service life may not be offered 
for transportation in commerce after its authorized service life has 
expired. However, a cylinder in transportation or a cylinder filled 
prior to the expiration of its authorized service life may be 
transported for reprocessing or disposal of the cylinder's contents. 
After emptying, the cylinder must be condemned in accordance with 
Sec. 180.205 of this subchapter.
    (8) The pressure of the hazardous material at 55  deg.C (131  deg.F) 
may not exceed 5/4 of the service pressure of the cylinder. Sufficient 
outage must be provided so the cylinder will not be liquid full at 55 
deg.C (131  deg.F).
    (9) Specification 2P, 2Q, 3E, 3HT, spherical 4BA, 4D, 4DA, 4DS, and 
39 cylinders must be shipped in strong outer packagings. The strong 
outer packaging must conform to paragraph (h) of this section and to 
Sec. 173.25.
    (b) Cylinder markings. Required markings on a cylinder must be 
legible and must meet the applicable requirements of subpart C of part 
180 of this subchapter. Additional information may

[[Page 554]]

be marked on the cylinder provided it does not affect the required 
markings prescribed in the applicable cylinder specification.
    (c) Toxic gases and mixtures. Cylinders containing toxic gases and 
toxic gas mixtures meeting the criteria of Division 2.3 Hazard Zone A or 
B must conform to the requirements of Sec. 173.40 and CGA Pamphlets S-
1.1 and S-7 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this 
subchapter). A DOT 39 cylinder may not be used for toxic gases or toxic 
gas mixtures meeting the criteria for Division 2.3, Hazard Zone A or B.
    (d) Gases capable of combining chemically. A filled cylinder may not 
contain any gas or material capable of combining chemically with the 
cylinder's contents or with the cylinder's material of construction, so 
as to endanger the cylinder's serviceability. After September 30, 2002, 
DOT 3AL cylinders made of aluminum alloy 6351-T6 may not be filled and 
offered for transportation with pyrophoric gases; however, if it is 
otherwise serviceable and conforms to the regulations in effect on 
September 30, 2002, a DOT 3AL cylinder made of aluminum alloy 6351-T6 
and filled before October 1, 2002, may be transported for reprocessing 
or disposal of the cylinder's contents until April 1, 2003.
    (e) Ownership of cylinder. A cylinder filled with a hazardous 
material may not be offered for transportation unless it was filled by 
the owner of the cylinder or with the owner's consent.
    (f) Pressure relief device systems. (1) Except as provided in 
paragraphs (f)(5) and (f)(6) of this section, a cylinder filled with a 
gas and offered for transportation must be equipped with one or more 
pressure relief devices sized and selected as to type, location, and 
quantity, and tested in accordance with CGA Pamphlets S-1.1 
(incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter; 
compliance with paragraph 9.1.1.1 of CGA Pamphlet S-1.1 is not required) 
and S-7 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter). 
The pressure relief device must be capable of preventing rupture of the 
normally filled cylinder when subjected to a fire test conducted in 
accordance with CGA Pamphlet C-14 (incorporated by reference; see 
Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter), or, in the case of an acetylene 
cylinder, CGA Pamphlet C-12 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 
of this subchapter).
    (2) After May 30, 2003, when a pressure relief device is installed, 
the inlet port to the relief channel must be in the vapor space of the 
cylinder.
    (3) For a DOT 3, 3A, 3AA, 3AL, 3AX, 3AXX, 3B or 3BN cylinder, from 
the first requalification due after May 30, 2003, the set pressure of 
the pressure relief device must be at test pressure with a tolerance of 
-10% to +0.
    (4) A pressure relief device is required on a DOT 39 cylinder 
regardless of cylinder size or filled pressure. A DOT 39 cylinder used 
for liquefied Division 2.1 materials must be equipped with a metal 
pressure relief device. Fusible pressure relief devices are not 
authorized on a DOT 39 cylinder containing a liquefied gas.
    (5) A pressure relief device is not required on--
    (i) A cylinder 305 mm (12 inches) or less in length, exclusive of 
neck, and 114 mm (4.5 inches) or less in outside diameter, except when 
the cylinder is filled with a liquefied gas for which this part requires 
a service pressure of 1800 psig or higher or a nonliquefied gas to a 
pressure of 1800 psig or higher at 21  deg.C (70  deg.F);
    (ii) A cylinder with a water capacity of less than 454 kg (1000 lbs) 
filled with a nonliquefied gas to a pressure of 300 psig or less at 21 
deg.C (70  deg.F), except for a DOT 39 cylinder or a cylinder used for 
acetylene in solution; or
    (iii) A cylinder containing a Class 3 or a Class 8 material without 
pressurization, unless otherwise specified for the hazardous material.
    (6) A pressure relief device is prohibited on a cylinder filled with 
a Division 2.3 or 6.1 material in Hazard Zone A.
    (g) Manifolding cylinders in transportation. (1) Cylinder 
manifolding is authorized only under conditions prescribed in this 
paragraph (g). Manifolded cylinders must be supported and held together 
as a unit by structurally adequate means. Except for Division 2.2 
materials, each cylinder must be equipped with an individual shutoff 
valve that must be tightly closed while in transit. Manifold branch 
lines must be sufficiently flexible to prevent damage to the

[[Page 555]]

valves that otherwise might result from the use of rigid branch lines. 
Each cylinder must be individually equipped with a pressure relief 
device as required in paragraph (f) of this section. Pressure relief 
devices on manifolded horizontal cylinders filled with a compressed gas 
must be arranged to discharge unobstructed to the open air in such a 
manner as to prevent any escaping gas from contacting personnel or any 
adjacent cylinders. Pressure relief devices on manifolded horizontal 
cylinders filled with a flammable compressed gas must be arranged to 
discharge upward to prevent any escaping gas from contacting any 
adjacent cylinders. Valves and pressure relief devices on manifolded 
cylinders filled with a compressed gas must be protected from damage by 
framing, a cabinet, or other method. Manifolding is authorized for 
cylinders containing the following gases:
    (i) Nonliquefied (permanent) compressed gases authorized by 
Sec. 173.302.
    (ii) Liquefied compressed gases authorized by Sec. 173.304. Each 
manifolded cylinder containing a liquefied compressed gas must be 
separately filled and means must be provided to ensure no interchange of 
cylinder contents can occur during transportation.
    (iii) Acetylene as authorized by Sec. 173.303.
    (2) For the checking of tare weights or replacing solvent, the 
cylinder must be removed from the manifold. This requirement is not 
intended to prohibit filling acetylene cylinders while manifolded.
    (h) Cylinder valve protection. (1) A cylinder used to transport a 
hazardous material must meet the requirements specified in this 
paragraph (h). The following cylinders are not subject to the cylinder 
valve protection requirements in this paragraph (h):
    (i) A cylinder containing only a Division 2.2 material without a 
Division 5.1 subsidiary hazard;
    (ii) A cylinder containing a Class 8 liquid corrosive only to metal;
    (iii) A cylinder with a water capacity of 4.8 liters (293 in \3\) or 
less containing oxygen, compressed;
    (iv) A cylinder containing oxygen, refrigerated liquid (cryogenic 
liquid);
    (v) A Medical E cylinder with a water capacity of 4.9 liters (300 in 
\3\) or less;
    (vi) A fire extinguisher; or
    (vii) A ``B'' style cylinder with a capacity of 40 ft \3\ (1.13 
m\3\) or an ``MC'' style cylinder with a capacity of 10 ft \3\ 
(0.28m\3\) containing acetylene.
    (2) For cylinders manufactured before October 1, 2007, a cylinder 
must have its valves protected by one of the following methods:
    (i) By equipping the cylinder with securely attached metal caps of 
sufficient strength to protect valves from damage during transportation;
    (ii) By boxing or crating the cylinders so as to protect valves from 
damage during transportation;
    (iii) By constructing the cylinder so that the valve is recessed 
into the cylinder or otherwise protected to the extent that it will not 
be subjected to a blow when the container is dropped onto a flat 
surface; or
    (iv) Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph (h)(2) introductory 
text of this section, until May 30, 2003, by loading the cylinders in an 
upright position and securely bracing the cylinders in cars or motor 
vehicles, when loaded by the consignor and unloaded by the consignee.
    (3) For cylinders manufactured after October 1, 2007, each cylinder 
valve assembly must be of sufficient strength or protected such that no 
leakage occurs when a cylinder with the valve installed is dropped 1.8 m 
(6 ft.) or more onto a non-yielding surface, such as concrete or steel, 
impacting the valve assembly or protection device at an orientation most 
likely to cause damage. The cylinder valve assembly protection may be 
provided by any method meeting the performance requirement in this 
paragraph (h)(3). Examples include:
    (i) Equipping the cylinder with a securely attached metal cap.
    (ii) Packaging the cylinder in a box, crate, or other strong outside 
packaging conforming to the requirements of Sec. 173.25.
    (iii) Constructing the cylinder such that the valve is recessed into 
the cylinder or otherwise protected.
    (i) Cylinders mounted on motor vehicles or in frames. Seamless DOT 
specification cylinders longer than 2 m (6.5 feet)

[[Page 556]]

are authorized for transportation only when horizontally mounted on a 
motor vehicle or in an ISO framework or other framework of equivalent 
structural integrity. Cylinders may not be transported by rail in 
container on freight car (COFC) or trailer on flat car (TOFC) service 
except under conditions approved by the Associate Administrator for 
Safety, Federal Railroad Administration. The cylinder must be configured 
as follows:
    (1) Each cylinder must be fixed at one end of the vehicle or 
framework with provision for thermal expansion at the opposite end 
attachment;
    (2) The valve and pressure relief device protective structure must 
be sufficiently strong to withstand a force equal to twice the weight of 
the cylinder and framework assembly with a safety factor of four, based 
on the ultimate strength of the material used; and
    (3) Discharge from a pressure relief device must be arranged in such 
a manner as to prevent any escaping gas from contacting personnel or any 
adjacent cylinders.
    (j) Non-specification cylinders in domestic use. Except as provided 
in paragraphs (k) and (l) of this section, a filled non-DOT 
specification cylinder, other than a DOT exemption cylinder or a 
cylinder used as a fire extinguisher in conformance with Sec. 173.309, 
may not be offered for transportation or transported to, from, or within 
the United States.
    (k) Importation of foreign cylinders for discharge within a single 
port area. A cylinder manufactured to other than a DOT specification and 
certified as being in conformance with the transportation regulations of 
another country may be authorized, upon written request to and approval 
by the Associate Administrator, for transportation within a single port 
area, provided--
    (1) The cylinder is transported in a closed freight container;
    (2) The cylinder is certified by the importer to provide a level of 
safety at least equivalent to that required by the regulations in this 
subchapter for a comparable DOT specification cylinder; and
    (3) The cylinder is not refilled for export unless in compliance 
with paragraph (l) of this section.
    (l) Filling of foreign cylinders for export. A cylinder not 
manufactured, inspected, tested and marked in accordance with part 178 
of this subchapter, or a cylinder manufactured to other than a DOT 
specification or exemption, may be filled with a gas in the United 
States and offered for transportation and transported for export, if the 
following conditions are met:
    (1) The cylinder has been requalified and marked with the month and 
year of requalification in accordance with subpart C of part 180 of this 
subchapter, or has been requalified as authorized by the Associate 
Administrator.
    (2) The maximum filling density and service pressure for each 
cylinder conform to the requirements of this part for the gas involved.
    (3) The bill of lading or other shipping paper identifies the 
cylinder and includes the following certification: ``This cylinder has 
(These cylinders have) been qualified, as required, and filled in 
accordance with the DOT requirements for export.''.
    (m) Metal attachments. Metal attachments to cylinders must have 
rounded or chamfered corners, or be otherwise protected, so as to 
prevent the likelihood of causing puncture or damage to other hazardous 
materials packages. This requirement applies to anything temporarily or 
permanently attached to the cylinder, such as metal skids.

[67 FR 51643, Aug. 8, 2002, as amended at 67 FR 61289, Sept. 30, 2002]



Sec. 173.301a  Additional general requirements for shipment of specification cylinders.

    (a) General. The requirements in this section are in addition to the 
requirements in Sec. 173.301 and apply to the shipment of gases in 
specification cylinders.
    (b) Authorized cylinders not marked with a service pressure. For 
authorized cylinders not marked with a service pressure, the service 
pressure is designated as follows:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                               Service
                   Specification marking                       Pressure
                                                                 psig
------------------------------------------------------------------------
3..........................................................         1800

[[Page 557]]

 
3E.........................................................         1800
8..........................................................          250
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (c) Cylinder pressure at 21  deg.C (70  deg.F). The pressure in a 
cylinder at 21  deg.C (70  deg.F) may not exceed the service pressure 
for which the cylinder is marked or designated, except as provided in 
Sec. 173.302a(b). For certain liquefied gases, the pressure at 21  deg.C 
(70  deg.F) must be lower than the marked service pressure to avoid 
having a pressure at a temperature of 55  deg.C (131  deg.F) that is 
greater than permitted.
    (d) Cylinder pressure at 55  deg.C (131  deg.F). The pressure in a 
cylinder at 55  deg.C (131  deg.F) may not exceed 5/4 times the service 
pressure, except:
    (1) For a cylinder filled with acetylene, liquefied nitrous oxide, 
or carbon dioxide.
    (2) For a cylinder filled in accordance with Sec. 173.302a(b), the 
pressure in the cylinder at 55  deg.C (131  deg.F) may not exceed 5/4 
times the filling pressure.
    (3) After May 30, 2003, for toxic materials the pressure in the 
cylinder at 55  deg.C (131  deg.F) may not exceed the service pressure 
of the cylinder.
    (e) Grandfather clause. A cylinder in domestic use prior to the date 
on which the specification for the cylinder was first made effective may 
be used if the cylinder has been properly tested and otherwise conforms 
to the requirements applicable to the gas with which it is charged.

[67 FR 51645, Aug. 8, 2002, as amended at 67 FR 61289, Sept. 30, 2002]



Sec. 173.301b  [Reserved]



Sec. 173.302  Filling of cylinders with nonliquefied (permanent) compressed gases.

    (a) General requirements. A cylinder filled with a nonliquefied 
compressed gas (except gas in solution) must be offered for 
transportation in accordance with the requirements of this section and 
Secs. 173.301, 173.301a, 173.302a, and 173.305, as applicable. Where 
more than one section applies to a cylinder, the most restrictive 
requirements must be followed.
    (b) Aluminum cylinders in oxygen service. Each aluminum cylinder 
filled with oxygen must meet all of the following conditions:
    (1) Metallic portions of a valve that may come into contact with the 
oxygen in the cylinder must be constructed of brass or stainless steel.
    (2) Each cylinder opening must be configured with straight threads 
only.
    (3) Each cylinder must be cleaned in accordance with the 
requirements of Federal Specification RR-C-901C, paragraphs 3.3.1 and 
3.3.2 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter). 
Cleaning agents equivalent to those specified in RR-C-901C may be used 
provided they do not react with oxygen. One cylinder selected at random 
from a group of 200 or fewer and cleaned at the same time must be tested 
for oil contamination in accordance with Specification RR-C-901C, 
paragraph 4.4.2.2 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this 
subchapter), and meet the specified standard of cleanliness.
    (4) The pressure in each cylinder may not exceed 3000 psig at 21 
deg.C (70  deg.F).
    (c) Notwithstanding the provisions of Sec. 173.24(b)(1), an 
authorized cylinder containing oxygen continuously fed to tanks 
containing live fish may be offered for transportation and transported.
    (d) Shipment of Division 2.1 materials in aluminum cylinders is 
authorized for transportation only by motor vehicle, rail car, or cargo-
only aircraft.

[67 FR 51646, Aug. 8, 2002, as amended at 67 FR 61289, Sept. 30, 2002]



Sec. 173.302a  Additional requirements for shipment of nonliquefied (permanent) compressed gases in specification cylinders.

    (a) Detailed filling requirements. Nonliquefied compressed gases 
(except gas in solution) for which filling requirements are not 
specifically prescribed in Sec. 173.304a must be shipped subject to the 
requirements in this section and Secs. 173.301, 173.301a, 173.302, and 
173.305 in specification cylinders, as follows:
    (1) DOT 3, 3A, 3AA, 3AL, 3B, 3E, 4B, 4BA and 4BW cylinders.
    (2) DOT 3HT cylinders. These cylinders are authorized for aircraft 
use only and only for nonflammable gases. They have a maximum service 
life of 24 years from the date of manufacture. The cylinders must be 
equipped with

[[Page 558]]

frangible disc type pressure relief devices that meet the requirements 
of Sec. 173.301(f). Each frangible disc must have a rated bursting 
pressure not exceeding 90 percent of the minimum required test pressure 
of the cylinder. Discs with fusible metal backing are not permitted. 
Specification 3HT cylinders may be offered for transportation only when 
packed in strong outer packagings conforming to the requirements of 
Sec. 173.25.
    (3) For a DOT 39 cylinder filled with a Division 2.1 material, the 
internal volume of the cylinder may not exceed 1.23 L (75 in \3\).
    (4) DOT 3AX, 3AAX, and 3T cylinders are authorized for Division 2.1 
and 2.2 materials and for carbon monoxide. DOT 3T cylinders are not 
authorized for hydrogen. When used in methane service, the methane must 
be a nonliquefied gas with a minimum purity of 98.0 percent methane and 
commercially free of corroding components.
    (5) Aluminum cylinders manufactured in conformance with 
specifications DOT 39 and 3AL are authorized for oxygen only under the 
conditions specified in Sec. 173.302(b).
    (b) Special filling limits for DOT 3A, 3AX, 3AA, 3AAX, and 3T 
cylinders. A DOT 3A, 3AX, 3AA, 3AAX, and 3T cylinder may be filled with 
a compressed gas, other than a liquefied, dissolved, Division 2.1, or 
Division 2.3 gas, to a pressure 10 percent in excess of its marked 
service pressure, provided:
    (1) The cylinder is equipped with a frangible disc pressure relief 
device (without fusible metal backing) having a bursting pressure not 
exceeding the minimum prescribed test pressure.
    (2) The cylinder's elastic expansion was determined at the time of 
the last test or retest by the water jacket method.
    (3) Either the average wall stress or the maximum wall stress does 
not exceed the wall stress limitation shown in the following table:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                           Average wall    Maximum wall
              Type of steel                   stress          stress
                                            limitation      limitation
------------------------------------------------------------------------
I. Plain carbon steels over 0.35 carbon           53,000          58,000
 and medium manganese steels............
II. Steels of analysis and heat                   67,000          73,000
 treatment specified in spec. 3AA.......
III. Steels of analysis and heat                  87,000          94,000
 treatment specified in spec. DOT-3T....
IV. Plain carbon steels less than 0.35            45,000          48,000
 carbon made prior to 1920..............
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (i)(A) The average wall stress must be computed from the elastic 
expansion data using the following formula:


S = 1.7EE / KV-0.4P


Where:

S = wall stress, pounds per square inch;
EE = elastic expansion (total less permanent) in cubic centimeters;
K = factor x 10-\7\ experimentally determined for the 
particular type of cylinder being tested or derived in accordance with 
CGA Pamphlet C-5;
V = internal volume in cubic centimeter (1 cubic inch = 16.387 cubic 
centimeters);
P = test pressure, pounds per square inch.

    (B) The formula in paragraph (b)(3)(i)(A) of this section is derived 
from the formula in paragraph (b)(3)(ii) of this section and the 
following:


EE = (PKVD2) / (D2-d2)

    (ii) The maximum wall stress must be computed from the formula:

S = (P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)) / (D2-
d2)

Where:

S = wall stress, pounds per square inch;
P = test pressure, pounds per square inch;
D = outside diameter, inches;
d = D-2t, where t=minimum wall thickness determined by a suitable 
method.

    (iii) Compliance with average wall stress limitation may be 
determined by computing the elastic expansion rejection limit in 
accordance with CGA Pamphlet C-5 (incorporated by reference; see 
Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter), by reference to data tabulated in CGA 
Pamphlet C-5, or by the manufacturer's marked elastic expansion 
rejection limit (REE) on the cylinder.

[[Page 559]]

    (4) An external and internal visual examination made at the time of 
test or retest shows the cylinder to be free from excessive corrosion, 
pitting, or dangerous defects.
    (5) A plus sign (+) is added following the test date marking on the 
cylinder to indicate compliance with paragraphs (b) (2), (b)(3), and 
(b)(4) of this section.
    (c) Carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide must be offered in a DOT 3, 3A, 
3AX, 3AA, 3AAX, 3AL, 3E, or 3T cylinder having a minimum service 
pressure of 1800 psig. The pressure in a steel cylinder may not exceed 
1000 psig at 21  deg.C (70  deg.F), except that if the gas is dry and 
sulfur free, the cylinder may be filled to 5/6 of the cylinder's service 
pressure or 2000 psig, whichever is less. A DOT 3AL cylinder may be 
filled to its marked service pressure. A DOT 3AL cylinder is authorized 
only when transported by motor vehicle, rail car, or cargo-only 
aircraft.
    (d) Diborane and diborane mixtures. Diborane and diborane mixed with 
compatible compressed gas must be offered in a DOT 3AA1800 cylinder. The 
maximum filling density of the diborane may not exceed 7 percent. 
Diborane mixed with compatible compressed gas may not have a pressure 
exceeding the service pressure of the cylinder if complete decomposition 
of the diborane occurs. Cylinder valve assemblies must be protected in 
accordance with Sec. 173.301(h).

[67 FR 51646, Aug. 8, 2002]



173.302b  [Reserved]



Sec. 173.303  Charging of cylinders with compressed gas in solution (acetylene).

    (a) Cylinder, filler and solvent requirements. (Refer to applicable 
parts of Specification 8 and 8AL). Acetylene gas must be shipped in 
Specification 8 or 8AL (Sec. 178.59 or Sec. 178.60 of this subchapter) 
cylinders. The cylinders shall consist of metal shells filled with a 
porous material, and this material must be charged with a suitable 
solvent. The cylinders containing the porous material and solvent, shall 
be tested with satisfactory results in accordance with CGA Pamphlet C-
12. Representative samples of cylinders charged with acetylene shall be 
tested with satisfactory results in accordance with CGA Pamphlet C-12.
    (1) The specific gravity of acetone solvent in acetylene cylinders 
must be 0.796 or over at 15.5  deg.C. (59.9  deg.F.).
    (2) The amount of solvent added in the refilling operation must not 
cause the tare weight of the cylinder to exceed its marked tare weight. 
The tare weight includes the weight of the cylinder shell, porous 
filling, valve, safety relief devices and solvent, but without removable 
cap.
    (b) Filling limits. The pressure in cylinders containing acetylene 
gas must not exceed 250 psig at 70  deg.F., and in case the cylinders 
are marked for a lower allowable charging pressure, at 70  deg.F., then 
that pressure must not be exceeded.
    (c) Data requirements on filler and solvent. Cylinders containing 
acetylene gas must not be shipped unless they were charged by or with 
the consent of the owner, and by a person, firm, or company having 
possession of complete information as to the nature of the porous 
filling, the kind and quantity of solvent in the cylinders, and the 
meaning of such markings on the cylinders as are prescribed by the 
Department's regulations and specifications applying to containers for 
the transportation of acetylene gas.
    (d) Verification of container pressure. (1) Each day, the pressure 
in a container representative of that day's compression must be checked 
by the charging plant after the container has cooled to a settled 
temperature and a record of this test kept for at least 30 days.
    (e) Prefill requirements. Before each filling of an acetylene 
cylinder, the person filling the cylinder must visually inspect the 
outside of the cylinder in accordance with the prefill requirements 
contained in CGA Pamphlet C-13, Section 3.

[29 FR 18743, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967]

    Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting 
Sec. 173.303, see the List of CFR Sections Affected which appears in the 
Finding Aids section of the printed volume and on GPO Access.

[[Page 560]]



Sec. 173.304  Filling of cylinders with liquefied compressed gases.

    (a) General requirements. Liquefied compressed gases (except gas in 
solution) must be shipped in accordance with the requirements in this 
section and in Secs. 173.301, 173.301a, 173.304a, and 173.305.
    (1) A DOT 3AL cylinder may not be used for any material with a 
primary or subsidiary hazard of Class 8.
    (2) Shipments of Division 2.1 materials in aluminum cylinders are 
authorized only when transported by motor vehicle, rail car, or cargo-
only aircraft.
    (b) Filling limits. Except for carbon dioxide; 1,1-Difluoroethylene 
(R-1132A); nitrous oxide; and vinyl fluoride, inhibited, the liquid 
portion of a liquefied gas may not completely fill the packaging at any 
temperature up to and including 54  deg.C (130  deg.F). The liquid 
portion of vinyl fluoride, inhibited, may completely fill the cylinder 
at 54  deg.C (130  deg.F) provided the pressure at the critical 
temperature does not exceed 1.25 times the service pressure of the 
cylinder.
    (c) Mixture of compressed gas and other material. A mixture of 
compressed gas must be shipped in accordance with Sec. 173.305.
    (d) Refrigerant and dispersant gases. Nontoxic and nonflammable 
refrigerant or dispersant gases must be offered for transportation in 
cylinders prescribed in Sec. 173.304a, or in DOT 2P and 2Q containers 
(Secs. 178.33, 178.33a of this subchapter). DOT 2P and 2Q containers 
must be packaged in a strong wooden or fiberboard box of such design as 
to protect valves from damage or accidental functioning under conditions 
incident to transportation. Pressure in the inside metal containers may 
not exceed 87 psia at 21  deg.C (70  deg.F). Each completed metal 
container filled for shipment must be heated until its contents reach a 
minimum temperature of 54  deg.C (130  deg.F) without evidence of 
leakage, distortion, or other defect. Each outside package must be 
plainly marked ``INSIDE CONTAINERS COMPLY WITH PRESCRIBED 
SPECIFICATIONS''.
    (e) Engine starting fluid. Engine starting fluid containing a 
flammable compressed gas or gases must be shipped in a cylinder as 
prescribed in Sec. 173.304a or as follows:
    (1) Inside non-refillable metal containers having a capacity not 
greater than 500 mL (32 in \3\). The containers must be packaged in 
strong, tight outer packagings. The pressure in the container may not 
exceed 145 psia at 54  deg.C (130  deg.F). If the pressure exceeds 145 
psia at 54  deg.C (130  deg.F), a DOT 2P container must be used. In 
either case, the metal container must be capable of withstanding, 
without bursting, a pressure of 1.5 times the pressure of the contents 
at 54  deg.C (130  deg.F). The liquid content of the material and gas 
may not completely fill the container at 54  deg.C (130  deg.F). Each 
container filled for shipment must have been heated until its contents 
reach a minimum temperature of 54  deg.C (130  deg.F), without evidence 
of leakage, distortion, or other defect. Each outside shipping container 
must be plainly marked, ``INSIDE CONTAINERS COMPLY WITH PRESCRIBED 
SPECIFICATIONS''.
    (2) [Reserved]

[67 FR 51647, Aug. 8, 2002]



Sec. 173.304a  Additional requirements for shipment of liquefied compressed gases in specification cylinders.

    (a) Detailed filling requirements. Liquefied gases (except gas in 
solution) must be offered for transportation, subject to the 
requirements in this section and Secs. 173.301 and 173.304, in 
specification cylinders, as follows:
    (1) DOT 3, 3A, 3AA, 3AL, 3B, 3BN, 3E, 4B, 4BA, 4B240ET, 4BW, 4E, 39, 
except that no DOT 4E or 39 packaging may be filled and shipped with a 
mixture containing a pyrophoric liquid, carbon bisulfide (disulfide), 
ethyl chloride, ethylene oxide, nickel carbonyl, spirits of 
nitroglycerin, or toxic material (Division 6.1 or 2.3), unless 
specifically authorized in this part.
    (2) For the gases named, the following requirements apply (for 
cryogenic liquids, see Sec. 173.316):

[[Page 561]]



------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                    Packagings marked as
                                                    shown in this column
                                                    or of the same type
                                Maximum permitted   with higher service
                                 filling density   pressure must be used
          Kind of gas            (percent)  (see   except as provided in
                                     Note 1)           173.301(a)(1),
                                                    173.301(a)(4)  (see
                                                      notes following
                                                           table)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Anhydrous ammonia.............  54...............  DOT-4; DOT-3A480; DOT-
                                                    3AA480; DOT-3A480X;
                                                    DOT-4A480; DOT-
                                                    4AA480; DOT-3; DOT-
                                                    3E1800; DOT-3AL480.
Bromotrifluoromethane (R-13B1   124..............  DOT-3A400; DOT-
 or H-1301).                                        3AA400; DOT-3B400;
                                                    DOT-4A400; DOT-
                                                    4AA480; DOT-4B400;
                                                    DOT-4BA400; DOT-
                                                    4BW400; DOT-3E1800;
                                                    DOT-39; DOT-3AL40.
Carbon dioxide (see Notes 4,    68...............  DOT-3A1800; DOT-
 7, and 8).                                         3AX1800; DOT-
                                                    3AA1800; DOT-
                                                    3AAX1800; DOT-3; DOT-
                                                    3E1800; DOT-3T1800;
                                                    DOT-3HT2000; DOT-39;
                                                    DOT-3AL1800.
Carbon dioxide, refrigerated    .................  DOT-4L.
 liquid (see paragraph (e) of
 this section).
Chlorine (see Note 2).........  125..............  DOT-3A480; DOT-
                                                    3AA480; DOT-3; DOT-
                                                    3BN480; DOT-3E1800.
Chlorodifluroethane or 1-       100..............  DOT-3A150; DOT-
 Chloro-1, 1-difluoroethane (R-                     3AA150; DOT-3B150;
 142b).                                             DOT-4B150; DOT-
                                                    4BA225; DOT-4BW225;
                                                    DOT-3E1800; DOT-39;
                                                    DOT-3AL150.
Chlorodifluoromethane (R-22)    105..............  DOT-3A240; DOT-
 (see Note 8).                                      3AA240; DOT-3B240;
                                                    DOT-4B240; DOT-
                                                    4BA240; DOT-4BW240;
                                                    DOT-4B240ET; DOT-
                                                    4E240; DOT-39; DOT-
                                                    41; DOT-3E1800; DOT-
                                                    3AL240.
Chloropentafluorethane (R-115)  110..............  DOT-3A225; DOT-
                                                    3AA225; DOT-3B225;
                                                    DOT-4A225; DOT-
                                                    4BA225; DOT-4B225;
                                                    DOT-4BW225; DOT-
                                                    3E1800; DOT-39; DOT-
                                                    3AL225.
Chlorotrifluoromethane (R-13)   100..............  DOT-3A1800; DOT-
 (see Note 8).                                      3AA1800; DOT-3; DOT-
                                                    3E1800; DOT-39; DOT-
                                                    3AL1800.
Cyclopropane (see Note 8).....  55...............  DOT-3A225; DOT-
                                                    3A480X; DOT-3AA225;
                                                    DOT-3B225; DOT-
                                                    4A225; DOT-4AA480;
                                                    DOT4B225; DOT-
                                                    4BA225; DOT-4BW225;
                                                    DOT-4B240ET; DOT-3;
                                                    DOT-3E1800; DOT-39;
                                                    DOT-3AL225.
Dichlorodifluoromethane (R-12)  119..............  DOT-3A225; DOT-
 (see Note 8).                                      3AA225; DOT-3B225;
                                                    DOT-4A225; DOT-
                                                    4B225; DOT-4BA225;
                                                    DOT-4BW225; DOT-
                                                    4B240ET; DOT-4E225;
                                                    DOT-9; DOT-39; DOT-
                                                    41; DOT-3E1800; DOT-
                                                    3AL225.
Dichlorodifluoromethane and     Not liquid full    DOT-3A240; DOT-
 difluoroethane mixture          at 130  deg.F.     3AA240; DOT-3B240;
 (constant boiling mixture) (R-                     DOT-3E1800; DOT-
 500) (see Note 8).                                 4A240; DOT-4B240;
                                                    DOT-4BA240; DOT-
                                                    4BW240; DOT-4E240;
                                                    DOT-9; DOT-39.
1,1-Difluoroethane (R-152a)     79...............  DOT-3A150; DOT-
 (see note 8).                                      3AA150; DOT-3B150;
                                                    DOT-4B150; DOT-
                                                    4BA225; DOT-4BW225;
                                                    DOT-3E1800; DOT-
                                                    3AL150.
1,1-Difluoroethylene (R-1132A)  73...............  DOT-3A2200; DOT-
                                                    3AA2200; DOT-
                                                    3AX2200; DOT-
                                                    3AAX2200; DOT-
                                                    3T2200; DOT-39.
Dimethylamine, anhydrous......  59...............  DOT-3A150; DOT-
                                                    3AA150; DOT-3B150;
                                                    DOT-4B150; DOT-
                                                    4BA225; DOT-4BW225;
                                                    ICC-3E1800.
Ethane (see Note 8)...........  35.8.............  DOT-3A1800; DOT-
                                                    3AX1800; DOT-
                                                    3AA1800; DOT-
                                                    3AAX1800; DOT-3; DOT-
                                                    3E1800; DOT-3T1800;
                                                    DOT-39; DOT-3AL1800.
Ethane (see Note 8)...........  36.8.............  DOT-3A2000; DOT-
                                                    3AX2000; DOT-
                                                    3AA2000; DOT-
                                                    3AAX2000; DOT-
                                                    3T2000; DOT-39; DOT-
                                                    3AL2000.
Ethylene (see Note 8).........  31.0.............  DOT-3A1800; DOT-
                                                    3AX1800; DOT-
                                                    3AA1800; DOT-
                                                    3AAX1800; DOT-3; DOT-
                                                    3E1800; DOT-3T1800;
                                                    DOT-39; DOT-3AL1800.
Ethylene (see Note 8).........  32.5.............  DOT-3A2000; DOT-
                                                    3AX2000; DOT-
                                                    3AA2000; DOT-
                                                    3AAX2000; DOT-
                                                    3T2000; DOT-39; DOT-
                                                    3AL2000.
Ethylene (see Note 8).........  35.5.............  DOT-3A2400; DOT-
                                                    3AX2400; DOT-
                                                    3AA2400; DOT-
                                                    3AAX2400; DOT-
                                                    3T2400; DOT-39; DOT-
                                                    3AL2400.
Hydrogen chloride, anhydrous..  65...............  DOT-3A1800; DOT-
                                                    3AA1800; DOT-
                                                    3AX1800; DOT-
                                                    3AAX1800; DOT-3; DOT-
                                                    3T1800; DOT-3E1800.

[[Page 562]]

 
Hydrogen sulfide (see Note 10)  62.5.............  DOT-3A480; DOT-
                                                    3AA480; DOT-3B480;
                                                    DOT-4A480; DOT-
                                                    4B480; DOT-4BA480;
                                                    DOT-4BW480.; DOT-
                                                    3E1800; DOT-3AL480.
Insecticide, gases liquefied    Not liquid full    DOT-3A300; DOT-
 (see Notes 8 and 12).           at 130  deg.F.     3AA300; DOT-3B300;
                                                    DOT-4B300; DOT-
                                                    4BA300; DOT-4BW300;
                                                    DOT-9; DOT-40; DOT-
                                                    41; DOT-3E1800.
Liquefied nonflammable gases,   Not liquid full    Specification
 other than classified           at 130  deg.F.     packaging authorized
 flammable, corrosive, toxic &                      in paragraph (a)(1)
 mixtures or solution thereof                       of this section and
 filled w/nitrogen, carbon                          DOT-3HT; DOT 4D; DOT-
 dioxide, or air (see Notes 7                       4DA; DOT-4DS.
 and 8)..
Methyl acetylene-propadiene,    Not liquid at 130  DOT-4B240 without
 mixtures, stabilized DOT-        deg.F.            brazed seams; DOT-
 3A240; (see Note 5)..                              4BA240 without
                                                    brazed seams; DOT-
                                                    3A240; DOT-3AA240;
                                                    DOT-3B240; DOT-
                                                    3E1800; DOT-4BW240;
                                                    DOT-4E240; DOT-
                                                    4B240ET; DOT-4; DOT-
                                                    41; DOT-3AL240.
Methyl chloride...............  84...............  DOT-3A225; DOT-
                                                    3AA225; DOT-3B225;
                                                    DOT-4A225; DOT-
                                                    4B225; DOT-4BA225;
                                                    DOT-4BW225; DOT-3;
                                                    DOT-4; DOT-38; DOT-
                                                    3E1800; DOT-4B240ET.
                                                    Cylinders complying
                                                    with DOT-3A150; DOT-
                                                    3B150; DOT-4A150;
                                                    and DOT-4B150
                                                    manufactured prior
                                                    to Dec. 7, 1936 are
                                                    also authorized.
Methyl mercaptan..............  80...............  DOT-3A240; DOT-
                                                    3AA240; DOT-3B240;
                                                    DOT-4B240; DOT-
                                                    4B240ET; DOT-3E1800;
                                                    DOT-4BA240; DOT-
                                                    4BW240.
Nitrosyl chloride.............  110..............  DOT-3BN400 only.
Nitrous oxide (see Notes 7, 8,  68...............  DOT-3A1800; DOT-
 and 11).                                           3AX1800; DOT-
                                                    3AA1800; DOT-
                                                    3AAX1800; DOT-3; DOT-
                                                    3E1800; DOT-3T1800;
                                                    DOT-3HT2000; DOT-39;
                                                    DOT- 3AL1800.
Nitrous oxide, refrigerated     .................  DOT-4L.
 liquid (see paragraph (e) of
 this section.).
Refrigerant gas, n.o.s. or      Not liquid full    DOT-3A240; DOT-
 Dispersant gas, n.o.s. (see     at 130  deg.F.     3AA240; DOT-3B240;
 Notes 8 and 13).                                   DOT-3E1800; DOT-
                                                    4A240; DOT-4B240;
                                                    DOT-4BA240; DOT-
                                                    4BW240; DOT-4E240;
                                                    DOT-9; DOT-39; DOT-
                                                    3AL240.
Sulfur dioxide (see note 8)...  125..............  DOT-3A225; DOT-
                                                    3AA225; DOT-3B225;
                                                    DOT-4A225; DOT-
                                                    4B225; DOT-4BA225;
                                                    DOT-4BW225; DOT-
                                                    4B240ET; DOT-3; DOT-
                                                    4; DOT-38; DOT-39;
                                                    DOT-3E1800; DOT-
                                                    3AL225.
Sulfur hexafluoride...........  120..............  DOT-3A1000; DOT-
                                                    3AA1000; DOT-
                                                    AAX2400; DOT-3; DOT-
                                                    3AL1000; DOT-3E1800;
                                                    DOT-3T1800.
Sulfuryl fluoride.............  106..............  DOT-3A480; DOT-
                                                    3AA480; DOT-3E1800;
                                                    DOT-4B480; DOT-
                                                    4BA480; DOT-4BW480.
Tetrafluoroethylene/inhibit...  90...............  DOT-3A1200; DOT-
                                                    3AA1200; DOT-3E1800.
Trifluorochloroethylene,        115..............  DOT-3A300; DOT-
 inhibited.                                         3AA300; DOT-3B300;
                                                    DOT-4A300; DOT-
                                                    4B300; DOT-4BA300;
                                                    DOT-4BW300; DOT-
                                                    3E1800.
Trimethylamine, anhydrous.....  57...............  DOT-3A150; DOT-
                                                    3AA150; DOT-3B150;
                                                    DOT-4B150; DOT-
                                                    4BA225; DOT-4BW225;
                                                    DOT-3E1800.
Vinyl chloride (see Note 5)...  84...............  DOT-4B150 without
                                                    brazed seams; DOT-
                                                    4BA225 without
                                                    brazed seams; DOT-
                                                    4BW225; DOT-3A150;
                                                    DOT-3AA150; DOT-
                                                    3E1800; DOT-3AL150.
Vinyl fluoride, inhibited.....  62...............  DOT-3A1800; DOT-
                                                    3AA1800; DOT-3E1800;
                                                    DOT-3AL1800.
Vinyl methyl ether, inhibited   68...............  DOT-4B150, without
 (see Note 5).                                      brazed seams; DOT-
                                                    4BA225 without
                                                    brazed seams; DOT-
                                                    4BW225; DOT-3A150;
                                                    DOT-3AA150; DOT-
                                                    3B1800; DOT-3E1800.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note 1: ``Filling density'' means the percent ratio of the weight of gas
  in a packaging to the weight of water that the container will hold at
  16  deg.C (60  deg.F). (1 lb of water=27.737 in \3\ at 60  deg.F.).
Note 2: Cylinders purchased after Oct. 1, 1944, for the transportation
  of chlorine must contain no aperture other than that provided in the
  neck of the cylinder for attachment of a valve equipped with an
  approved pressure relief device. Cylinders purchased after Nov. 1,
  1935, and filled with chlorine may not contain over 68.04 kg (150 lb)
  of gas.
Note 3: [Reserved]

[[Page 563]]

 
Note 4: Special carbon dioxide mining devices containing a heating
  element and filled with not over 2.72 kg (6 lb) of carbon dioxide may
  be filled to a density of not over 85 percent, provided the cylinder
  is made of steel with a calculated bursting pressure in excess of
  39000 psig, fitted with a frangible disc that will operate at not over
  57 percent of that pressure, and is able to withstand a drop of 10
  feet when striking crosswise on a steel rail while under a pressure of
  at least 3000 psig. Such devices must be shipped in strong boxes or
  must be wrapped in heavy burlap and bound by 12-gauge wire with the
  wire completely covered by friction tape. Wrapping must be applied so
  as not to interfere with the functioning of the frangible disc
  pressure relief device. Shipments must be described as ``liquefied
  carbon dioxide gas (mining device)'' and marked, labeled, and
  certified as prescribed for liquefied carbon dioxide.
Note 5: All parts of valve and pressure relief devices in contact with
  contents of cylinders must be of a metal or other material, suitably
  treated if necessary, that will not cause formation of any acetylides.
 
Note 6: [Reserved]
Note 7: Specification 3HT cylinders for aircraft use only, having a
  maximum service life of 24 years. Authorized only for nonflammable
  gases. Cylinders must be equipped with pressure relief devices of the
  frangible disc type that meet the requirements of Sec.  173.301(f).
  Each frangible disc must have a rated bursting pressure that does not
  exceed 90 percent of the minimum required test pressure of the
  cylinder. Discs with fusible metal backing are not permitted.
  Cylinders may be shipped only when packed in strong outside
  packagings.
Note 8: See Sec.  173.301(a)(8).
Note 9: [Reserved]
Note 10: Each valve outlet must be sealed by a threaded cap or a
  threaded solid plug.
Note 11: Must meet the valve and cleaning requirements in Sec.
  173.302(b).
Note 12: For an insecticide gas that is nontoxic and nonflammable, see
  Sec.  173.305(c).
Note 13: For a refrigerant or dispersant gas that is nontoxic and
  nonflammable, see Sec.  173.304(d).

    (b) [Reserved]
    (c) Verification of content in cylinder. Except as noted in 
paragraph (d)(4) of this section, the amount of liquefied gas filled 
into a cylinder must be by weight or, when the gas is lower in pressure 
than required for liquefaction, a pressure-temperature chart for the 
specific gas may be used to ensure that the service pressure at 54 
deg.C (130  deg.F) will not exceed 5/4 of the service pressure at 21 
deg.C (70  deg.F). The weight of liquefied gas filled into the cylinder 
also must be checked, after disconnecting the cylinder from the filling 
line, by the use of an accurate scale.
    (d) Requirements for liquefied petroleum gas. (1) Filling density 
limits are as follows:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                        Maximum the filling density in
 Minimum specific gravity of liquid       percent of the water-weight
        material at 60  deg.F              capacity of the cylinder
------------------------------------------------------------------------
0.271 to 0.289......................  26
0.290 to 0.306......................  27
0.307 to 0.322......................  28
0.323 to 0.338......................  29
0.339 to 0.354......................  30
0.355 to 0.371......................  31
0.372 to 0.398......................  32
0.399 to 0.425......................  33
0.426 to 0.440......................  34
0.441 to 0.452......................  35
0.453 to 0.462......................  36
0.463 to 0.472......................  37
0.473 to 0.480......................  38
0.481 to 0.488......................  39
0.489 to 0.495......................  40
0.496 to 0.503......................  41
0.504 to 0.510......................  42
0.511 to 0.519......................  43
0.520 to 0.527......................  44
0.528 to 0.536......................  45
0.537 to 0.544......................  46
0.545 to 0.552......................  47
0.553 to 0.560......................  48
0.561 to 0.568......................  49
0.569 to 0.576......................  50
0.577 to 0.584......................  51
0.585 to 0.592......................  52
0.593 to 0.600......................  53
0.601 to 0.608......................  54
0.609 to 0.617......................  55
0.618 to 0.626......................  56
0.627 to 0.634......................  57
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (2) Subject to Sec. 173.301a(d), any filling density percentage 
prescribed in this section is authorized to be increased by a factor of 
2 for liquefied petroleum gas in DOT 3 cylinders or in DOT 3A cylinders 
marked for 1800 psig, or higher, service pressure.
    (3) Liquefied petroleum gas must be shipped in specification 
cylinders as follows:
    (i) DOT 3, 3A, 3AA, 3B, 3E, 3AL, 4B, 4BA, 4B240ET, 4BW, 4E, or 39 
cylinders. Shipments of flammable gases in DOT 3AL cylinders are 
authorized only when transported by motor vehicle, rail car, or cargo-
only aircraft.
    (ii) Additional containers may be used within the limits of quantity 
and pressure as follows:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                     Maximum
                                     capacity   Maximum filling pressure
        Type of container             (cubic              (psig)
                                     inches)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
DOT-2P or DOT-2Q (see Note 1)....        31.83  45 psig at 70  deg.F and
                                                 105 psig at 130  deg.F
                                                 (see Note 2).

[[Page 564]]

 
DOT-2P or DOT-2Q (see Note 1)....        31.83  35 psig at 70  deg.F and
                                                 100 psig at 130  deg.F.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note 1: Containers must be packed in strong wooden or fiber boxes of
  such design as to protect valves from damage or accidental functioning
  under conditions normally incident to transportation. Each completed
  container filled for shipment must have been heated until its contents
  reach a temperature of 54  deg.C (130  deg.F), without evidence of
  leakage, distortion, or other defect. Each outside shipping container
  must be plainly marked ``INSIDE CONTAINERS COMPLY WITH PRESCRIBED
  SPECIFICATIONS'.
Note 2: A container must be equipped with a pressure relief device that
  will prevent rupture of the container and dangerous projection of a
  closing device when exposed to fire.

    (4) Verification of content. A cylinder with a water capacity of 
90.72 kg (200 lb) or more and for use with a liquefied petroleum gas 
with a specific gravity of 9.504 or greater at 16  deg.C (60  deg.F) may 
have the quantity of its contents determined by using a fixed length dip 
tube gauging device. The length of the dip tube must be such that when a 
liquefied petroleum gas, with a specific volume of 0.03051 cu. ft./lb. 
at a temperature of 40  deg.F, is filled into the container, the liquid 
just reaches the bottom of the tube. The weight of this liquid may not 
exceed 42 percent of the water capacity of the container, which must be 
stamped on the cylinder. The length of the dip tube, expressed in inches 
carried out to one decimal place and prefixed with the letters ``DT'', 
must be stamped on the container and on the exterior of removable type 
dip tube. For the purpose of this requirement, the marked length must be 
expressed as the distance measured along the axis of a straight tube 
from the top of the boss through which the tube is inserted to the 
proper level of the liquid in the container. The length of each dip tube 
must be checked when installed by weighing each container after filling 
except when installed in groups of substantially identical containers, 
in which case one of each 25 containers must be weighed. The quantity of 
liquefied gas in each container must be checked by means of the dip tube 
after disconnecting from the filling line. The outlet from the dip tube 
may not be larger than 0.1016 centimeters (0.040 inch; No. 54 drill bit 
size orifice). A container representative of each day's filling at each 
filling plant must have its contents checked by weighing after 
disconnecting from the filling line.
    (e) Carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid or nitrous oxide, 
refrigerated liquid. (1) The following provisions apply to carbon 
dioxide, refrigerated liquid, and nitrous oxide, refrigerated liquid:
    (i) DOT 4L cylinders conforming to the provisions of this paragraph 
are authorized.
    (ii) Each cylinder must be protected with at least one pressure 
relief device and at least one frangible disc conforming to 
Sec. 173.301(f) and paragraph (a)(2) of this section. The relieving 
capacity of the pressure relief device system must be equal to or 
greater than that calculated by the applicable formula in paragraph 5.9 
of CGA Pamphlet S-1.1 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this 
subchapter).
    (iii) The temperature and pressure of the gas at the time the 
shipment is offered for transportation may not exceed -18  deg.C (0 
deg.F) and 290 psig for carbon dioxide and -15.6  deg.C (+4  deg.F) and 
290 psig for nitrous oxide. Maximum time in transit may not exceed 120 
hours.
    (2) The following pressure relief device settings, design service 
temperatures and filling densities apply:

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                  Maximum permitted filling density  (percent by weight)
 Pressure relief device setting maximum  -----------------------------------------------------------------------
  start--to discharge gauge pressure in      Carbon dioxide, refrigerated
                  psig                                  liquid                Nitrous oxide, refrigerated liquid
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
105 psig................................  108                                 104
170 psig................................  105                                 101
230 psig................................  104                                 99
295 psig................................  102                                 97
360 psig................................  100                                 95
450 psig................................  98                                  83

[[Page 565]]

 
540 psig................................  92                                  87
625 psig................................  86                                  80
Design service temperature  deg.C(        -196  deg.C(-320  deg.F)            -196  deg.C(-320  deg.F)
 deg.F).
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


[67 FR 51647, Aug. 8, 2002]



173.304b  [Reserved]



Sec. 173.305  Charging of cylinders with a mixture of compressed gas and other material.

    (a) Detailed requirements. A mixture of a compressed gas and any 
other material must be shipped as a compressed gas if the mixture is a 
compressed gas as designated in Sec. 173.115 and when not in violation 
of Sec. 173.301(a).
    (b) Filling limits. (See Sec. 173.301.) For mixtures, the liquid 
portion of the liquefied compressed gas at 130  deg.F. plus any 
additional liquid or solid must not completely fill the container.
    (c) Nonpoisonous and nonflammable mixtures. Mixtures containing 
compressed gas or gases including insecticides, which mixtures are 
nonpoisonous and nonflammable under this part must be shipped in 
cylinders as prescribed in Sec. 173.304(a) or as follows:
    (1) Specification 2P (Sec. 178.33 of this subchapter). Inside metal 
containers equipped with safety relief devices of a type examined by the 
Bureau of Explosives and approved by the Associate Administrator, and 
packed in strong wooden or fiber boxes of such design as to protect 
valves from damage or accidental functioning under conditions incident 
to transportation. Pressure in the container may not exceed 85 psia at 
70  deg.F. Each completed metal container filled for shipment must be 
heated until content reaches a minimum temperature of 130  deg.F., 
without evidence of leakage, distortion or other defect. Each outside 
shipping container must be plainly marked ``INSIDE CONTAINERS COMPLY 
WITH PRESCRIBED SPECIFICATIONS.''
    (2) [Reserved]
    (d) Poisonous mixtures. A mixture containing any poisonous material 
(Division 6.1 or 2.3) in such proportions that the mixture would be 
classed as poisonous under Sec. 173.115 or Sec. 173.132 must be shipped 
in packagings as authorized for these poisonous materials.

[29 FR 18743, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, 
and amended by Amdt. 173-70, 38 FR 5309, Feb. 27, 1973, Amdt. 173-94, 41 
FR 16079, Apr. 15, 1976; 45 FR 32697, May 19, 1980; Amdt. 173-224, 56 FR 
66275, 66279, Dec. 20, 1991; 66 FR 45379, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 61013, 
Sept. 27, 2002; 67 FR 51651, Aug. 8, 2002; 67 FR 61013, Sept. 27, 2002]



Sec. 173.306  Limited quantities of compressed gases.

    (a) Limited quantities of compressed gases for which exceptions are 
permitted as noted by reference to this section in Sec. 172.101 of this 
subchapter are excepted from labeling (except when offered for 
transportation by air) and, unless required as a condition of the 
exception, specification packaging requirements of this subchapter when 
packed in accordance with the following paragraphs. In addition, 
shipments are not subject to subpart F of part 172 of this subchapter, 
to part 174 of this subchapter except Sec. 174.24 and to part 177 of 
this subchapter except Sec. 177.817. Each package may not exceed 30 kg 
(66 pounds) gross weight.
    (1) When in containers of not more than 4 fluid ounces capacity 
(7.22 cubic inches or less) except cigarette lighters. Special 
exceptions for shipment of certain compressed gases in the ORM-D class 
are provided in paragraph (h) of this section.
    (2) When in metal containers filled with a material that is not 
classed as a hazardous material to not more than 90 percent of capacity 
at 70  deg.F. and then charged with nonflammable, nonliquefied gas. Each 
container must be tested to three times the pressure at 70  deg.F. and, 
when refilled, be retested to three times the pressure of the gas at 70 
deg.F. Also, one of the following conditions must be met:

[[Page 566]]

    (i) Container is not over 1 quart capacity and charged to not more 
than 170 psig at 70  deg.F. and must be packed in a strong outside 
packaging, or
    (ii) Container is not over 30 gallons capacity and charged to not 
more than 75 psig at 70  deg.F.
    (3) When in a metal container for the sole purpose of expelling a 
nonpoisonous (other than a Division 6.1 Packing Group III material) 
liquid, paste or powder, provided all of the following conditions are 
met. Special exceptions for shipment of aerosols in the ORM-D class are 
provided in paragraph (h) of this section.
    (i) Capacity must not exceed 1 L(61.0 cubic inches).
    (ii) Pressure in the container must not exceed 180 psig at 130 
deg.F. If the pressure exceeds 140 psig at 130  deg.F., but does not 
exceed 160 psig at 130  deg.F., a specification DOT 2P (Sec. 178.33 of 
this subchapter) inside metal container must be used; if the pressure 
exceeds 160 psig at 130  deg.F., a specification DOT 2Q (Sec. 178.33a of 
this subchapter) inside metal container must be used. In any event, the 
metal container must be capable of withstanding without bursting a 
pressure of one and one-half times the equilibrium pressure of the 
content at 130  deg.F.
    (iii) Liquid content of the material and gas must not completely 
fill the container at 130  deg.F.
    (iv) The container must be packed in strong outside packagings.
    (v) Each container must be subjected to a test performed in a hot 
water bath; the temperature of the bath and the duration of the test 
must be such that the internal pressure reaches that which would be 
reached at 55  deg.C (131  deg.F) (50  deg.C (122  deg.F) if the liquid 
phase does not exceed 95% of the capacity of the container at 50  deg.C 
(122  deg.F)). If the contents are sensitive to heat, the temperature of 
the bath must be set at between 20  deg.C (68  deg.F) and 30  deg.C (86 
deg.F) but, in addition, one container in 2,000 must be tested at the 
higher temperature. No leakage or permanent deformation of a container 
may occur.
    (vi) Each outside packaging must be marked ``INSIDE CONTAINERS 
COMPLY WITH PRESCRIBED REGULATIONS.''
    (4) Gas samples must be transported under the following conditions:
    (i) A gas sample may only be transported as non-pressurized gas when 
its pressure corresponding to ambient atmospheric pressure in the 
container is not more than 105 kPa absolute (15.22 psia).
    (ii) Non-pressurized gases, toxic (or toxic and flammable) must be 
packed in hermetically sealed glass or metal inner packagings of not 
more than one L (0.3 gallons) overpacked in a strong outer packaging.
    (iii) Non-pressurized gases, flammable must be packed in 
hermetically-sealed glass or metal inner packagings of not more than 5 L 
(1.3 gallons) and overpacked in a strong outer packaging.
    (b) Exceptions for foodstuffs, soap, biologicals, electronic tubes, 
and audible fire alarm systems. Limited quantities of compressed gases, 
(except Division 2.3 gases) for which exceptions are provided as 
indicated by reference to this section in Sec. 172.101 of this 
subchapter, when in accordance with one of the following paragraphs are 
excepted from labeling (except when offered for transportation by air) 
and the specification packaging requirements of this subchapter. In 
addition, shipments are not subject to subpart F of part 172 of this 
subchapter, to part 174 of this subchapter except Sec. 174.24 and to 
part 177 of this subchapter, except Sec. 177.817. Special exceptions for 
shipment of certain compressed gases in the ORM-D class are provided in 
paragraph (h) of this section.
    (1) Foodstuffs or soaps in a nonrefillable metal container not 
exceeding 1 L (61.0 cubic inches), with soluble or emulsified compressed 
gas, provided the pressure in the container does not exceed 140 p.s.i.g. 
at 130  deg.F. The metal container must be capable of withstanding 
without bursting a pressure of one and one-half times the equilibrium 
pressure of the content at 130  deg.F.
    (i) Containers must be packed in strong outside packagings.
    (ii) Liquid content of the material and the gas must not completely 
fill the container at 130  deg.F.

[[Page 567]]

    (iii) Each outside packaging must be marked ``INSIDE CONTAINERS 
COMPLY WITH PRESCRIBED REGULATIONS.''
    (2) Cream in refillable metal receptacles with soluble or emulsified 
compressed gas. Containers must be of such design that they will hold 
pressure without permanent deformation up to 375 psig and must be 
equipped with a device designed so as to release pressure without 
bursting of the container or dangerous projection of its parts at higher 
pressures. This exception applies to shipments offered for 
transportation by refrigerated motor vehicles only.
    (3) Nonrefillable metal containers charged with a Division 6.1 
Packing Group III or nonflammable solution containing biological 
products or a medical preparation which could be deteriorated by heat, 
and compressed gas or gases. The capacity of each container may not 
exceed 35 cubic inches (19.3 fluid ounces). The pressure in the 
container may not exceed 140 psig at 130  deg.F., and the liquid content 
of the product and gas must not completely fill the containers at 130 
deg.F. One completed container out of each lot of 500 or less, filled 
for shipment, must be heated, until the pressure in the container is 
equivalent to equilibrium pressure of the content at 130  deg.F. There 
must be no evidence of leakage, distortion, or other defect. Container 
must be packed in strong outside packagings.
    (4) Electronic tubes, each having a volume of not more than 30 cubic 
inches and charged with gas to a pressure of not more than 35 psig and 
packed in strong outside packagings.
    (5) Audible fire alarm systems powered by a compressed gas contained 
in an inside metal container when shipped under the following 
conditions:
    (i) Each inside container must have contents which are not 
flammable, poisonous, or corrosive as defined under this part,
    (ii) Each inside container may not have a capacity exceeding 35 
cubic inches (19.3 fluid ounces),
    (iii) Each inside container may not have a pressure exceeding 70 
psig at 70  deg.F. and the liquid portion of the gas may not completely 
fill the inside container at 130  deg.F., and
    (iv) Each nonrefillable inside container must be designed and 
fabricated with a burst pressure of not less than four times its charged 
pressure at 130  deg.F. Each refillable inside container must be 
designed and fabricated with a burst pressure of not less than five 
times its charged pressure at 130  deg.F.
    (c)-(d) [Reserved]
    (e) Refrigerating machines. (1) New (unused) refrigerating machines 
or components thereof are excepted from the specification packaging 
requirements of this part if they meet the following conditions. In 
addition, shipments are not subject to subpart F of part 172 of this 
subchapter, to part 174 of this subchapter except Sec. 174.24 and to 
part 177 of this subchapter except Sec. 177.817.
    (i) Each pressure vessel may not contain more than 5,000 pounds of 
Group A1 refrigerant as classified in ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15 or not 
more than 50 pounds of refrigerant other than Group A1.
    (ii) Machines or components having two or more charged vessels may 
not contain an aggregate of more than 2,000 pounds of Group I 
refrigerant or more than 100 pounds of refrigerant other than Group I.
    (iii) Each pressure vessel must be equipped with a safety device 
meeting the requirements of ANSI/ASHRAE 15.
    (iv) Each pressure vessel must be equipped with a shut-off valve at 
each opening except openings used for safety devices and with no other 
connection. These valves must be closed prior to and during 
transportation.
    (v) Pressure vessels must be manufactured, inspected and tested in 
accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 15, or when over 6 inches internal diameter, 
in accordance with the ASME Code.
    (vi) All parts subject to refrigerant pressure during shipment must 
be tested in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 15.
    (vii) The liquid portion of the refrigerant, if any, may not 
completely fill any pressure vessel at 130  deg.F.
    (viii) The amount of refrigerant, if liquefied, may not exceed the 
filling density prescribed in Sec. 173.304.

[[Page 568]]

    (f) Accumulators. The following applies to accumulators, which are 
hydraulic accumulators containing nonliquefied, nonflammable gas, and 
nonflammable liquids or pneumatic accumulators containing nonliquefied, 
nonflammable gas, fabricated from materials which will not fragment upon 
rupture.
    (1) Accumulators installed in motor vehicles, construction 
equipment, and assembled machinery and designed and fabricated with a 
burst pressure of not less than five times their charged pressure at 70 
deg.F., when shipped, are not subject to the requirements of this 
subchapter.
    (2) Accumulators charged with limited quantities of compressed gas 
to not more than 200 p.s.i.g. at 70  deg.F. are excepted from labeling 
(except when offered for transportation by air) and the specification 
packaging requirements of this subchapter when shipped under the 
following conditions. In addition, shipments are not subject to subpart 
F of part 172 of this subchapter, to part 174 of this subchapter except 
Sec. 174.24 and to part 177 of this subchapter except Sec. 177.817.
    (i) Each accumulator must be shipped as an inside packaging,
    (ii) Each accumulator may not have a gas space exceeding 2,500 cubic 
inches under stored pressure, and
    (iii) Each accumulator must be tested, without evidence of failure 
or damage, to at least three times its charged pressure of 70  deg.F., 
but not less than 120 p.s.i. before initial shipment and before each 
refilling and reshipment.
    (3) Accumulators with a charging pressure exceeding 200 p.s.i.g. at 
70  deg.F. are excepted from labeling (except when offered for 
transportation by air) and the specification packaging requirements of 
this subchapter when shipped under the following conditions:
    (i) Each accumulator must be in compliance with the requirements 
stated in paragraph (f)(2), (i), (ii), and (iii) of this section, and
    (ii) Each accumulator must be designed and fabricated with a burst 
pressure of not less than five times its charged pressure at 70  deg.F. 
when shipped.
    (4) Accumulators intended to function as shock absorbers, struts, 
gas springs, pneumatic springs or other impact or energy-absorbing 
devices are not subject to the requirements of this subchapter provided 
each:
    (i) Has a gas space capacity not exceeding 1.6 L and a charge 
pressure not exceeding 280 bar, where the product of the capacity 
expressed in liters and charge pressure expressed in bars does not 
exceed 80 (for example, 0.5 L gas space and 160 bar charge pressure);
    (ii) Has a minimum burst pressure of 4 times the charge pressure at 
20 deg.C for products not exceeding 0.5 L gas space capacity and 5 times 
the charge pressure for products greater than 0.5 L gas space capacity;
    (iii) Design type has been subjected to a fire test demonstrating 
that the article relieves its pressure by means of a fire degradable 
seal or other pressure relief device, such that the article will not 
fragment and that the article does not rocket; and
    (iv) Accumulators must be manufactured under a written quality 
assurance program which monitors parameters controlling burst strength, 
burst mode and performance in a fire situation as specified in 
paragraphs (f)(4)(i) through (f)(4)(iii) of this section. A copy of the 
quality assurance program must be maintained at each facility at which 
the accumulators are manufactured.
    (5) Accumulators not conforming to the provisions of paragraphs 
(f)(1) through (f) (4) of this section, may only be transported subject 
to the approval of the Associate Administrator.
    (g) Water pump system tank. Water pump system tanks charged with 
compressed air or limited quantities of nitrogen to not over 40 psig for 
single-trip shipment to installation sites are excepted from labeling 
(transportation by air not authorized) and the specification packaging 
requirements of this subchapter when shipped under the following 
conditions. In addition, shipments are not subject to subpart F of this 
subchapter, to part 174 of this subchapter except Sec. 174.24 and part 
177 except Sec. 177.817.
    (1) The tank must be of steel, welded with heads concave to 
pressure, having a rated water capacity not exceeding 120 gallons and 
with outside diameter

[[Page 569]]

not exceeding 24 inches. Safety relief devices not required.
    (2) The tank must be pneumatically tested to 100 psig. Test pressure 
must be permanently marked on the tank.
    (3) The stress at prescribed pressure must not exceed 20,000 psi 
using formula:


S = Pd / 2t

where:

S = wall stress in psi:
P = prescribed pressure for the tank of at least 3 times charged 
pressure at 70  deg.F or 100 psig, whichever is greater;
d = inside diameter in inches;
t = minimum wall thickness, in inches.

    (4) The burst pressure must be at least 6 times the charge pressure 
at 70  deg.F.
    (5) Each tank must be overpacked in a strong outside container in 
accordance with Sec. 173.301(a)(8).
    (h) A limited quantity which conforms to the provisions of paragraph 
(a)(1), (a)(3), or (b) of this section and is a ``consumer commodity'' 
as defined in Sec. 171.8 of this subchapter, may be renamed ``consumer 
commodity'' and reclassed as ORM-D material. Each package may not exceed 
30 kg (66 pounds) gross weight. In addition to the exceptions provided 
by paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section--
    (1) Outside packagings are not required to be marked ``INSIDE 
CONTAINERS COMPLY WITH PRESCRIBED REGULATIONS'';
    (2) Shipments of ORM-D materials are not subject to the shipping 
paper requirements of subpart C of part 172 of this subchapter, unless 
the material meets the definition of a hazardous substance, a hazardous 
waste, or a marine pollutant or unless offered for transportation or 
transported by aircraft; and
    (3) Shipments of ORM-D materials are eligible for the exceptions 
provided in Sec. 173.156.
    (i) An aerosol is flammable if a positive test result is obtained 
using any of the following test methods:
    (1) Using the Bureau of Explosives' Flame Projection Apparatus, the 
flame projects more than 18 inches beyond the ignition source with valve 
opened fully, or the flame flashes back and burns at the valve with any 
degree of valve opening.
    (2) Using the Bureau of Explosives' Open Drum Apparatus, there is 
any significant propagation of flame away from the ignition source.
    (3) Using the Bureau of Explosives' Closed Drum Apparatus, there is 
any explosion of the vapor-air mixture in the drum.

[Amdt. 173-94, 41 FR 16079, Apr. 15, 1976]

    Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting 
Sec. 173.306, see the List of CFR Sections Affected which appears in the 
Finding Aids section of the printed volume and on GPO Access.



Sec. 173.307  Exceptions for compressed gases.

    (a) The following materials are not subject to the requirements of 
this subchapter:
    (1) Carbonated beverages.
    (2) Except as provided in Sec. 175.10(a)(2) of this subchapter, 
tires when inflated to pressures not greater than their rated inflation 
pressures.
    (3) Balls used for sports.
    (4) Refrigerating machines, including dehumidifiers and air 
conditioners, and components thereof, such as precharged tubing 
containing:
    (i) 12 kg (25 pounds) or less of a non-flammable, non-toxic gas;
    (ii) 12 L (3 gallons) or less of ammonia solution (UN2672);
    (iii) Except when offered or transported by air, 12 kg (25 pounds) 
or less of a flammable, non-toxic gas;
    (iv) Except when offered or transported by air or vessel, 20 kg (44 
pounds) or less of a Group A1 refrigerant specified in ANSI/ASHRAE 
Standard 15; or
    (v) 100 g (4 ounces) or less of a flammable, non-toxic liquefied 
gas.
    (b) [Reserved]

[Amdt. 173-94, 41 FR 16081, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 173-135, 
45 FR 13090, Feb. 28, 1980; 65 FR 50462, Aug. 18, 2000]



Sec. 173.308  Cigarette lighter or other similar device charged with fuel.

    (a) In addition to the requirements of Sec. 173.21(i), a cigarette 
lighter or other similar device charged with a flammable gas must be 
shipped as follows:

[[Page 570]]

    (1) No more than 70 mL (2.3 fluid ounces) of liquefied gas may be 
loaded into each device;
    (2) The liquid portion of the gas may not exceed 85 percent of the 
volumetric capacity of each fluid chamber at 15  deg.C (59  deg.F);
    (3) Each device, including closures, must be capable of withstanding 
without leakage or rupture an internal pressure of at least two times 
the vapor pressure of the fuel at 55  deg.C (131  deg.F); and
    (4) Devices must be overpacked in packaging that is designed or 
arranged to prevent movement of the device itself.
    (b) When no more than 1,500 devices covered by this section are 
transported in one motor vehicle by highway, the requirements of 
subparts C through H of part 172 of this subchapter, and part 177 of 
this subchapter do not apply. However, no person may offer for 
transportation or transport the devices or prepare the devices for 
shipment unless that person has been specifically informed of the 
requirements of this section. The outer packaging, as specified in 
Special Provision N10 of Sec. 172.102(c)(5) of this subchapter, must be 
plainly and durably marked with the required proper shipping name 
specified in Sec. 172.101 of this subchapter, or the words ``CIGARETTE 
LIGHTERS'' and the number of devices contained in the package.
    (c) For transportation by water in a closed transport vehicle or a 
closed freight container, the following warning must be affixed to the 
access doors:

    WARNING--MAY CONTAIN EXPLOSIVE MIXTURES WITH AIR--KEEP IGNITION 
SOURCES AWAY WHEN OPENING.


The warning must be on a contrasting background and must be readily 
legible from a distance of 8 m (26 feet).

[Amdt. 173-94, 41 FR 16081, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 173-94A, 
41 FR 40683, Sept. 20, 1976; Amdt. 173-120, 43 FR 39792, Sept. 7, 1978; 
Amdt. 173-165, 48 FR 28101, June 20, 1983; Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52665 
Dec. 21, 1990; 56 FR 66276, Dec. 20, 1991; 63 FR 37461, July 10, 1998; 
66 FR 45381, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.309  Fire extinguishers.

    (a) Fire extinguishers charged with a limited quantity of compressed 
gas to not more than 1660 kPa (241 psig) at 21   deg.C (70  deg.F) are 
excepted from labeling (except when offered for transportation by air) 
and the specification packaging requirements of this subchapter when 
shipped under the following conditions. In addition, shipments are not 
subject to subpart F of part 172 of this subchapter, to part 174 of this 
subchapter except Sec. 174.24 or to part 177 of this subchapter except 
Sec. 177.817.
    (1) Each fire extinguisher must have contents which are 
nonflammable, non-poisonous, and noncorrosive as defined under this 
subchapter.
    (2) Each fire extinguisher must be shipped as an inner packaging.
    (3) Nonspecification cylinders are authorized subject to the 
following conditions:
    (i) The internal volume of each cylinder may not exceed 18 L (1,100 
cubic inches). For fire extinguishers not exceeding 900 mL (55 cubic 
inches) capacity, the liquid portion of the gas plus any additional 
liquid or solid must not completely fill the container at 55  deg.C (130 
 deg.F). Fire extinguishers exceeding 900 mL (55 cubic inches) capacity 
may not contain any liquefied compressed gas;
    (ii) Each fire extinguisher manufactured on and after January 1, 
1976, must be designed and fabricated with a burst pressure of not less 
than six times its charged pressure at 21  deg.C (70  deg.F) when 
shipped;
    (iii) Each fire extinguisher must be tested, without evidence of 
failure or damage, to at least three times its charged pressure at 21 
deg.C (70  deg.F) but not less than 825 kPa (120 psig) before initial 
shipment, and must be marked to indicate the year of the test (within 90 
days of the actual date of the original test) and with the words ``MEETS 
DOT REQUIREMENTS.'' This marking is considered a certification that the 
fire extinguisher is manufactured in accordance with the requirements of 
this section. The words ``This extinguisher meets all requirements of 49 
CFR 173.306'' may be displayed on fire extinguishers manufactured prior 
to January 1, 1976; and
    (iv) For any subsequent shipment, each fire extinguisher must be in 
compliance with the retest requirements of the Occupational Safety and 
Health

[[Page 571]]

Administration Regulations of the Department of Labor, 29 CFR 
1910.157(e).
    (4) Specification 2P or 2Q (Secs. 178.33 and 178.33a of this 
subchapter) inner nonrefillable metal packagings are authorized for use 
as fire extinguishers subject to the following conditions:
    (i) The liquid portion of the gas plus any additional liquid or 
solid may not completely fill the packaging at 55  deg.C (130  deg.F);
    (ii) Pressure in the packaging shall not exceed 1250 kPa (181 psig) 
at 55  deg.C (130  deg.F). If the pressure exceeds 920 kPa (141 psig) at 
55  deg.C (130  deg.F), but does not exceed 1100 kPa (160 psig) at 55 
deg.C (130  deg.F), a specification DOT 2P inner metal packaging must be 
used; if the pressure exceeds 1100 kPa (160 psig) at 55  deg.C (130 
deg.F), a specification DOT 2Q inner metal packaging must be used. The 
metal packaging must be capable of withstanding, without bursting, a 
pressure of one and one-half times the equilibrium pressure of the 
contents at 55  deg.C (130  deg.F); and
    (iii) Each completed inner packaging filled for shipment must have 
been heated until the pressure in the container is equivalent to the 
equilibrium pressure of the contents at 55  deg.C (130  deg.F) without 
evidence of leakage, distortion, or other defect.
    (b) Specification 3A, 3AA, 3E, 3AL, 4B, 4BA, 4B240ET or 4BW 
(Secs. 178.36, 178.37, 178.42, 178.46, 178.50, 178.51, 178.55 and 178.61 
of this subchapter) cylinders are authorized for use as fire 
extinguishers.

[Amdt. 173-235, 58 FR 50503, Sept. 27, 1993, as amended by Amdt. 173-
138, 59 FR 49134, Sept. 26, 1994; Amdt. 173-258, 61 FR 51240, Oct. 1, 
1996; 66 FR 45380, 45381, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.314  Compressed gases in tank cars and multi-unit tank cars.

    (a) Definitions. For definitions of compressed gases, see 
Sec. 173.115.
    (b) General requirements. (1) Tank car tanks containing compressed 
gases must not be shipped unless they were loaded by or with the consent 
of the owner thereof.
    (2) Tank car tanks must not contain gases capable of combining 
chemically and must not be loaded with any gas which combines chemically 
with the gas previously loaded therein, until all residue has been 
removed and interior of tank thoroughly cleaned.
    (3) For tanks of the DOT-106A and 110A class, the tanks must be 
placed in position and attached to car structure by the shipper.
    (4) Wherever the word ``approved'' is used in this part of the 
regulations, it means approval by the Association of American Railroads 
Committee on Tank Cars as prescribed in Sec. 179.3 of this subchapter.
    (5) Each tank car used for the transportation of anhydrous ammonia 
or any material that meets the criteria of Division 2.1 or 2.3 must have 
gaskets for manway cover plates and for mounting of fittings designed 
(for temperature, application, media, pressure, and size) to create a 
positive seal so that, under conditions normally incident to 
transportation, there will not be an identifiable release of the 
material to the environment. The use of sealants to install gaskets is 
prohibited.
    (c) Authorized gases, filling limits for tank cars. A compressed gas 
in a tank car or a multi-unit tank car must be offered for 
transportation in accordance with Sec. 173.31 and this section. The 
named gases must be loaded and offered for transportation in accordance 
with the following table:

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                         Outage and filling limits
         Proper shipping name                   (see note 1)                   Authorized tank car class
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ammonia, anhydrous, or ammonia         Notes 2, 10..................  105, 112, 114, 120.
 solutions  50 percent
 ammonia.
                                       Note 3.......................  106.
Ammonia solutions with  35  Note 3.......................  105, 109, 112, 114, 120.
 percent, but [le] 50 percent ammonia
 by mass.
Argon, compressed....................  Note 4.......................  107.
Boron trichloride....................  Note 3.......................  105, 106.
Carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid..  Note 5.......................  105.
Chlorine.............................  Note 6.......................  105.
                                       125..........................  106.
Chlorine trifluoride.................  Note 3.......................  106, 110.

[[Page 572]]

 
Chlorine pentafluoride...............  Note 3.......................  106, 110.
Dimethyl ether.......................  Note 3.......................  105, 106, 110, 112, 114, 120.
Dimethylamine, anhydrous.............  Note 3.......................  105, 106, 112.
Dinitrogen tetroxide, inhibited......  Note 3.......................  105, 106, 110.
Division 2.1 materials not             Notes 9, 10..................  105, 106, 110, 112, 114, 120.
 specifically identified in this
 table.
Division 2.2 materials not             Note 3.......................  105, 106, 109, 110, 112, 114, 120.
 specifically identified in this
 table.
Division 2.3 Zone A materials not      None.........................  See Sec.  173.245.
 specifically identified in this
 table.
Division 2.3 Zone B materials not      Note 3.......................  105, 106, 110, 112, 114, 120.
 specifically identified in this
 table.
Division 2.3 Zone C materials not      Note 3.......................  105, 106, 110, 112, 114, 120.
 specifically identified in this
 table.
Division 2.3 Zone D materials not      Note 3.......................  105, 106, 109, 110, 112, 114, 120.
 specifically identified in this
 table.
Ethylamine...........................  Note 3.......................  105, 106, 110, 112, 114, 120.
Helium, compressed...................  Note 4.......................  107.
Hydrogen.............................  Note 4.......................  107.
Hydrogen chloride, refrigerated        Note 7.......................  105.
 liquid.
Hydrogen sulphide, liquified.........  68...........................  106.
Methyl bromide.......................  Note 3.......................  105, 106.
Methyl chloride......................  Note 3.......................  105, 106, 112.
Methyl mercaptan.....................  Note 3.......................  105, 106.
Methylamine, anhydrous...............  Note 3.......................  105, 106, 112.
Nitrogen, compressed.................  Note 4.......................  107.
Nitrosyl chloride....................  124..........................  105.
                                       110..........................  106.
Nitrous oxide, refrigerated liquid...  Note 5.......................  105.
Oxygen, compressed...................  Note 4.......................  107.
Phosgene.............................  Note 3.......................  106.
Sulfur dioxide, liquified............  125..........................  105, 106, 110.
Sulfuryl fluoride....................  120..........................  105.
Vinyl fluoride, stabilized...........  Note 8.......................  105.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Notes:
1. The percent filling density for liquefied gases is hereby defined as the percent ratio of the mass of gas in
  the tank to the mass of water that the tank will hold. For determining the water capacity of the tank in
  kilograms, the mass of 1 L of water at 15.5  deg.C in air is 1 kg. (the mass of one gallon of water at 60
  deg.F in air is 8.32828 pounds).
2. The liquefied gas must be loaded so that the outage is at least two percent of the total capacity of the tank
  at the reference temperature of 46  deg.C (115  deg.F) for a noninsulated tank; 43  deg.C (110  deg.F) for a
  tank having a thermal protection system incorporating a metal jacket that provides an overall thermal
  conductance at 15.5  deg.C (60  deg.F) of no more than 10.22 kilojoules per hour per square meter per degree
  Celsius (0.5 Btu per hour/per square foot/per degree F) temperature differential; and 41  deg.C (105  deg.F)
  for an insulated tank having an insulation system incorporating a metal jacket that provides an overall
  thermal conductance at 15.5  deg.C (60  deg.F) of no more than 1.5333 kilojoules per hour per square meter per
  degree Celsius (0.075 Btu per hour/per square foot/per degree F) temperature differential.
3. The requirements of Sec.  173.24b(a) apply.
4. The gas pressure at 54.44  deg.C (130  deg.F.) in any non-insulated tank car may not exceed 7/10 of the
  marked test pressure, except that a tank may be charged with helium to a pressure 10 percent in excess of the
  marked maximum gas pressure at 54.44  deg.C (130  deg.F.) of each tank.
5. The liquid portion of the gas at -17.77  deg.C (0  deg.F.) must not completely fill the tank.
6. The maximum permitted filling density is 125 percent. The quantity of chlorine loaded into a single unit-tank
  car may not be loaded in excess of the normal lading weights nor in excess of 81.65 Mg (90 tons).
7. 89 percent maximum to 80.1 percent minimum at a test pressure of 6.2 Bar (90 psig).
8. 59.6 percent maximum to 53.6 percent minimum at a test pressure of 7.2 Bar (105 psig).
9. For a liquefied petroleum gas, the liquefied gas must be loaded so that the outage is at least one percent of
  the total capacity of the tank at the reference temperature of 46  deg.C (115  deg.F) for a noninsulated tank;
  43  deg.C (110  deg.F) for a tank having a thermal protection system incorporating a metal jacket that
  provides an overall thermal conductance at 15.5  deg.C (60  deg.F) of no more than 10.22 kilojoules per hour
  per square meter per degree Celsius (0.5 Btu per hour/per square foot/per degree F) temperature differential;
  and 41  deg.C (105  deg.F) for an insulated tank having an insulation system incorporating a metal jacket that
  provides an overall thermal conductance at 15.5  deg.C (60  deg.F) of no more than 1.5333 kilojoules per hour
  per square meter per degree Celsius (0.075 Btu per hour/per square foot/per degree F) temperature
  differential.
10. For liquefied petroleum gas and anhydrous ammonia, during the months of November through March (winter), the
  following reference temperatures may be used: 38  deg.C (100  deg.F) for a noninsulated tank; 32  deg.C (90
  deg.F) for a tank having a thermal protection system incorporating a metal jacket that provides an overall
  thermal conductance at 15.5  deg.C (60  deg.F) of no more than 10.22 kilojoules per hour per square meter per
  degree Celsius (0.5 Btu per hour/per square foot/per degree F) temperature differential; and 29  deg.C (85
  deg.F) for an insulated tank having an insulation system incorporating a metal jacket and insulation that
  provides an overall thermal conductance at 15.5  deg.C (60  deg.F) of no more than 1.5333 kilojoules per hour
  per square meter per degree Celsius (0.075 Btu per hour/per square foot/per degree F) temperature
  differential. The winter reference temperatures may only be used for a tank car shipped directly to a consumer
  for unloading and not stored in transit. The offeror of the tank must inform each customer that the tank car
  was filled based on winter reference temperatures. The tank must be unloaded as soon as possible after March
  in order to retain the specified outage and to prevent a release of hazardous material which might occur due
  to the tank car becoming liquid full at higher temperatures.

    (d) [Reserved]
    (e) Verification of content. The amount of liquefied gas loaded into 
each tank may be determined either by measurement or calculation of the 
weight. If by measurement, the weight must be

[[Page 573]]

checked after disconnecting the loading line by the use of proper 
scales. If by calculation, the weight of liquefied petroleum gas, 
methylacetylene propadiene, stabilized, dimethylamine, methylamine 
anhydrous, or trimethylamine may be calculated using the outage tables 
supplied by the tank car owners and the specific gravities as determined 
at the plant, and this computation must be checked by determination of 
specific gravity of product after loading. Carriers may verify 
calculated weights by use of proper scales. The use of a fixed tube 
gauge device is authorized for determining the weight of methyl 
mercaptan in Specification 105A300W tanks instead of weighing.
    (f) [Reserved]
    (g) Special requirements for hydrogen chloride, refrigerated liquid, 
and vinyl fluoride,stabilized.
    (1) The shipper shall notify the Bureau of Explosives whenever a car 
is not received by the consignee within 20 days from the date of 
shipment.
    (2) A tank car containing hydrogen chloride, refrigerated liquid 
must have the auxiliary valve on the pressure relief device closed 
during transportation.
    (3) See Sec. 179.102-17 of this subchapter for additional 
requirements.
    (4) Tank cars containing hydrogen chloride, refrigerated liquid, 
must be unloaded to such an extent that any residue remaining in the 
tank at a reference temperature of 32  deg.C (90  deg.F) will not 
actuate the reclosing pressure relief device.
    (h)-(i) [Reserved]
    (j) Special requirements for materials having a primary or secondary 
Division 2.1 (flammable gas) hazard. For single unit tank cars, interior 
pipes of loading and unloading valves, sampling devices, and gauging 
devices with an opening for the passage of the lading exceeding 1.52 mm 
(0.060 inch) diameter must be equipped with excess flow valves. For 
single unit tank cars constructed before January 1, 1972, gauging 
devices must conform to this paragraph by no later than July 1, 2006. 
The protective housing cover must be provided with an opening, with a 
weatherproof cover, above each pressure relief valve that is concentric 
with the discharge of the pressure relief valve and that has an area at 
least equal to the valve outlet area. Class DOT 109 tank cars and tank 
cars manufactured from aluminum or nickel plate are not authorized.
    (k) Special requirements for chlorine. Tank cars built after 
September 30, 1991, must have an insulation system consisting of 5.08 cm 
(2 inches) glass fiber placed over 5.08 cm (2 inches) of ceramic fiber. 
Tank cars must have excess flow valves on the interior pipes of liquid 
discharge valves. Tank cars constructed to a DOT 105A500W specification 
may be marked as a DOT 105A300W specification with the size and type of 
safety relief valves required by the marked specification.
    (l) Special requirements for hydrogen sulphide. Each multi-unit tank 
car must be equipped with adequate pressure relief devices of the 
fusible plug type having a yield temperature not over 76.66  deg.C (170 
deg.F.), and not less than 69.44  deg.C (157  deg.F.). Each device must 
be resistant to extrusion of the fusible alloy and leak tight at 55 
deg.C (130  deg.F.). A threaded solid plug must seal each valve outlet. 
In addition, a metal cover must protect all valves.
    (m) Special requirements for nitrosyl chloride. Single unit tank 
cars and their associated service equipment, such as venting, loading 
and unloading valves, and safety relief valves, must be made of metal or 
clad with a material that is not subject to rapid deterioration by the 
lading. Multi-unit tank car tanks must be nickel-clad and have safety 
relief devices incorporating a fusible plug having a yield temperature 
of 79.44  deg.C (175  deg.F.). Safety relief devices must be vapor tight 
at 54.44  deg.C (130  deg.F.).
    (n) Special requirements for hydrogen. Each tank car must be 
equipped with one or more pressure relief devices. The discharge outlet 
for each pressure relief device must be connected to a manifold having a 
non-obstructed discharge area of at least 1.5 times the total discharge 
area of the pressure relief devices connected to the manifold. All 
manifolds must be connected to a single common header having a non-
obstructed discharge pointing upward and extending above the top of the 
car. The header and the header outlet must each

[[Page 574]]

have a non-obstructed discharge area at least equal to the total 
discharge area of the manifolds connected to the header. The header 
outlet must be equipped with an ignition device that will instantly 
ignite any hydrogen discharged through the pressure relief device.
    (o) Special requirements for carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid and 
nitrous oxide, refrigerated liquid. Each tank car must have an 
insulation system so that the thermal conductance is not more than 0.613 
kilojoules per hour, per square meter, per degree Celsius (0.03 B.t.u. 
per square foot per hour, per degree Fahrenheit) temperature 
differential. Each tank car must be equipped with one reclosing pressure 
relief valve having a start-to-discharge pressure not to exceed 75 
percent of the tank test pressure and one non-reclosing pressure relief 
valve having a rupture disc design to burst at a pressure less than the 
tank test pressure. The discharge capacity of each pressure relief 
device must be sufficient to prevent building up of pressure in the tank 
in excess of 82.5 percent of the test pressure of the tank. Tanks must 
be equipped with two regulating valves set to open at a pressure not to 
exceed 24.1 Bar (350 psi) on DOT 105A500W tanks and at a pressure not to 
exceed 27.6 Bar (400 psi) on DOT 105A600W tanks. Each regulating valve 
and pressure relief device must have its final discharge piped to the 
outside of the protective housing.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52665, Dec. 21, 1990]

    Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting 
Sec. 173.314, see the List of CFR Sections Affected which appears in the 
Finding Aids section of the printed volume and on GPO Access.



Sec. 173.315  Compressed gases in cargo tanks and portable tanks.

    (a) Liquefied compressed gases that are transported in UN portable 
tanks must be loaded and offered for transportation in accordance with 
portable tank provision T50 in Sec. 172.102 of this subchapter. A 
liquefied compressed gas offered for transportation in a cargo tank 
motor vehicle or a portable tank must be prepared in accordance with 
this section, Sec. 173.32, Sec. 173.33 and subpart E or subpart G of 
part 180 of this subchapter, as applicable. For cryogenic liquids, see 
Sec. 173.318. For marking requirements, see Secs. 172.326 and 172.328 of 
this subchapter. Except for UN portable tanks, a liquefied compressed 
gas must be loaded and offered for transportation in accordance with the 
following table:

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                     Maximum permitted filling density       Specification container required
                                 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
           Kind of gas                                 Percent by volume
                                   Percent by weight   (see par. (f) of    Type (see Note 2)    Minimum design
                                     (see Note 1)        this section)                          pressure (psig)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ammonia, anhydrous or Ammonia     56................  82, See Note 5....  DOT-51, MC-330, MC- 265; See Note 17.
 solutions with greater than 50                                            331; See Notes 12
 percent ammonia (see Notes 14                                             and 17.
 and 17).
Ammonia solutions with more than  See par. (c) of     See Note 7........  DOT-51, MC-330, MC- 100; See par. (c)
 35 percent but not more than 50   this section.                           331; see Note 12.   of this section.
 percent ammonia.
Bromotrifluoromethane (R-13B1 or  133...............  See Note 7........  DOT-51, MC-330, MC- 365.
 H-1301); (See Note 9).                                                    331.
Butadiene, stabilized...........  See par. (b) of     See par. (b) of     DOT-51, MC-330, MC- 100.
                                   this section.       this section.       331.
Carbon dioxide, refrigerated      See par. (c)(1) of  95................  ......do..........  200; see Note 3.
 liquid.                           this section.
Chlorine........................  125...............  See Note 7........  DOT-51, MC-330, MC- 225; See Notes 4
                                                                           331.                and 8.
Chlorodifluoroethane (R-142b) (1- 100...............  See Note 7........  DOT-51, MC-330, MC- 100.
 Chloro 1,1-difluoroethane);                                               331.
 (See Note 9).
Chlorodifluoromethane (R-22);     105...............  See Note 7........  DOT-51, MC-330, MC- 250.
 (See Note 9).                                                             331.
Chloropentafluoroethane (R-115);  See par. (c) of     See Note 7........  DOT-51, MC-330, MC- See par. (c) of
 (See Note 9).                     this section.                           331.                this section.
Chlorotrifluoromethane (R-13);    See par. (c) of     See Note 7........  DOT-51, MC-330, MC- See par. (c) of
 (See Note 9).                     this section.                           331.                this section.
Dichlorodifluoromethane (R-12);   119...............  See Note 7........  DOT-51, MC-330, MC- 150.
 (See Note 9).                                                             331.

[[Page 575]]

 
Difluoroethane (R-152a); (See     79................  See Note 7........  DOT-51, MC-330, MC- 150.
 Note 9).                                                                  331.
Dimethyl ether (see Note 16)....  59................  ......do..........  ......do..........  200.
Dimethylamine, anhydrous........  59................  See Note 7........  DOT-51, MC-330, MC- 150.
                                                                           331.
Division 2.1, materials not       See par. (c) of     See Note 7........  DOT-51, MC-330, MC- See Note 18.
 specifically provided for in      this section.                           331.
 this table.
Division 2.2, materials not       See par. (c) of     See Note 7........  DOT-51, MC-330, MC- See Note 19.
 specifically provided for in      this section.                           331.
 this table.
Division 2.3, Hazard Zone A,      See par. (c) of     See Note 7........  DOT-51, MC-330, MC- See Note 20.
 materials not specifically        this section.                           331; See Note 23.
 provided for in this table.
Division 2.3, Hazard Zone B,      See par. (c) of     See Note 7........  DOT-51, MC-330, MC- See Note 20.
 materials not specifically        this section.                           331; See Note 23.
 provided for in this table.
Division 2.3, Hazard Zone C,      See par. (c) of     See Note 7........  DOT-51, MC-330, MC- See Note 21.
 materials not specifically        this section.                           331; See Note 24.
 provided for in this table.
Division 2.3, Hazard Zone D,      See par. (c) of     See Note 7........  DOT-51, MC-330, MC- See Note 22.
 materials not specifically        this section.                           331; See Note 25.
 provided for in this table.
Ethane, refrigerated liquid.....  ..................  See par. (c) of     MC-331, MC-338....  100; see Note 11.
                                                       this section.
Ethane-propane mixture,           ..................  See par. (c) of     MC-331, MC-338....  275; see Note 11.
 refrigerated liquid.                                  this section.
Hexafluoropropylene.............  110...............  See Note 7........  DOT-51, MC-330, MC- 250.
                                                                           331.
Hydrogen chloride, refrigerated   103.0.............  See Note 7........  MC-331, MC-338....  100; see Note 11.
 liquid.
                                  91.6..............  ......do..........  ......do..........  300; see Note 11.
                                  86.7..............  ......do..........  ......do..........  450; see Note 11.
Liquefied petroleum gas (see      See par. (b) of     See par. (b) of     DOT-51, MC-330, MC- See par. (c) of
 Note 15).                         this section.       this section.       331; See Note 26.   this section.
Methylacetylene-propadiene,       53................  90................  DOT 51, MC 330, MC  200.
 stabilized (see Note 13).                                                 331.
Methylamine, anhydrous..........  60................  See Note 7........  DOT-51, MC-330, MC- ..................
                                                                           331..
Methyl chloride.................  84................  88.5..............  ......do..........  150.
Methyl chloride (optional         ......do..........  See Note 6........  DOT-51............  225.
 portable tank 2,000 pounds
 water capacity, fusible plug).
Methyl mercaptan................  80................  90................  DOT-51, MC-330, MC- 100.
                                                                           331; See Note 23.
Nitrous oxide, refrigerated       See par. (c)(1) of  95................  DOT-51, MC-330, MC- 200; See Note 3.
 liquid.                           this section.                           331.
Refrigerant gas, n.o.s. or        See par. (c) of     See Note 7........  DOT-51, MC-330, MC- See par. (c) of
 Dispersant gas, n.o.s. (See       this section.                           331.                this section.
 Note 9).
Sulfur dioxide (tanks not over    125...............  87.5..............  DOT-51, MC-330, MC- 150; See Note 4.
 1,200 gallons water capacity).                                            331; See Note 24.
Sulfur dioxide (tanks over 1,200  125...............  87.5..............  DOT-51, MC-330, MC- 125; See Note 4.
 gallons water capacity).                                                  331; See Note 24.
Sulfur dioxide (optional          125...............  See Note 6........  DOT-51; See Note    225.
 portable tank 1,000-2,000                                                 24.
 pounds water capacity, fusible
 plug).
Trimethylamine, anhydrous.......  57................  See Note 7........  DOT-51, MC-330, MC- 150.
                                                                           331.
Vinyl chloride..................  84 (see Note 13)..  See Note 7........  MC-330, MC-331....  150.
Vinyl fluoride, stabilized......  66................  ......do..........  ......do..........  250; see Note 11.
Vinyl methyl ether..............  68................  See Notes 7 and 13  ......do..........  100.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note 1: Maximum filling density for liquefied gases is hereby defined as the percent ratio of the weight of gas
  in the tank to the weight of water that the tank will hold. For determining the water capacity of the tank in
  pounds, the weight of a gallon (231 cubic inches) of water at 60  deg.F. in air shall be 8.32828 pounds.
Note 2: See Sec.  173.32 for authority to use other portable tanks and for manifolding cargo tanks, see
  paragraph (q) of this section. Specifications MC 330 cargo tanks may be painted as specified for MC 331 cargo
  tanks.
Note 3: If cargo tanks and portable tank containers for carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid and nitrous oxide,
  refrigerated liquid are designed to conform to the requirements of the ASME Code for Low Temperature
  Operation, the design pressure may be reduced to 100 p.s.i.g. or the controlled pressure, whichever is
  greater.

[[Page 576]]

 
Note 4: Material must be steel. Packagings must have a corrosion allowance of 20 percent or 0.10 inch, whichever
  is less, added to the metal thickness. The minimum wall thickness for chlorine packagings is 0.300 inch for
  stainless steel or 0.625 inch for carbon steel, including corrosion allowance.
Note 5: Unlagged cargo tanks and portable tank containers for liquid anhydrous ammonia may be filled to 87.5
  percent by volume provided the temperature of the anhydrous ammonia being loaded into such tanks is determined
  to be not lower than 30  deg.F. or provided the filling of such tanks is stopped at the first indication of
  frost or ice formation on the outside surface of the tank and is not resumed until such frost or ice has
  disappeared.
Note 6: Tanks equipped with fusible plugs must be filled by weight.
Note 7: Tanks must be filled by weight.
Note 8: Chlorine packagings may be shipped only if the contents are to be unloaded at one unloading point.
Note 9: This gas may be transported in authorized cargo tanks and portable tanks marked ``dispersant gas,'' or
  ``refrigerant gas.''
Note 10: [Reserved]
Note 11: MC-330, MC-331 and MC-338 cargo tanks must be insulated. Cargo tanks must meet all the following
  requirements. Each tank must have a design service temperature of minus 100  deg.F., or no warmer than the
  boiling point at one atmosphere of the hazardous material to be shipped therein, whichever is colder, and must
  conform to the low-temperature requirements of the ASME Code. When the normal travel time is 24 hours or less,
  the tank's holding time as loaded must be at least twice the normal travel time. When the normal travel time
  exceeds 24 hours, the tank's holding time as loaded must be at least 24 hours greater than the normal travel
  time. The holding time is the elapsed time from loading until venting occurs under equilibrium conditions. The
  cargo tank must have an outer jacket made of steel when the cargo tank is used to transport a flammable gas.
Note 12: No aluminum, copper, silver, zinc or an alloy of any of these metals shall be used in packaging
  construction where it comes into contact with the lading.
Note 13: All parts of valves and safety devices in contact with contents of tank must be of a metal or other
  material suitably treated if necessary, which will not cause formation of any acetylides.
Note 14: Specifications MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tanks constructed of other than quenched and tempered steel
  ``(NQT)'' are authorized for all grades of anhydrous ammonia. Specifications MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tanks
  constructed of quenched and tempered steel ``(QT)'' (see marking requirements of Sec.  172.328(c) of this
  subchapter) are authorized for anhydrous ammonia having a minimum water content of 0.2 percent by weight. Any
  tank being placed in anhydrous ammonia service or a tank which has been in other service or has been opened
  for inspection, test, or repair, must be cleaned of the previous product and must be purged of air before
  loading. See Sec.  172.203(h) of this subchapter for special shipping paper requirements.
Note 15: Specifications MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tanks constructed of other than quenched and tempered steel
  (NQT) are authorized for all grades of liquefied petroleum gases. Only grades of liquefied petroleum gases
  determined to be ``noncorrosive'' are authorized in Specification MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tanks constructed of
  quenched and tempered steel (QT). ``Noncorrosive'' means the corrosiveness of the gas does not exceed the
  limitations for classification 1 of the ASTM Copper Strip Classifications when tested in accordance with ASTM
  D1838-64, ``Copper Strip Corrosion by Liquefied Petroleum (LP) Gases.'' (For (QT) and (NQT) marking
  requirements see Sec.  172.328(c) of this subchapter. For special shipping paper requirements, see Sec.
  172.203(h) of this subchapter.)
Note 16: Openings, inlets, and outlets on MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tanks must conform to Sec.  178.337-8(a) of
  this subchapter. MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tanks must be equipped with emergency discharge control equipment as
  specified in Sec.  178.337-11(a) of this subchapter.
Note 17: A Specification MC-330 or MC-331 cargo tank or a nonspecification cargo tank meeting, and marked in
  conformance with, the edition of the ASME Code in effect when it was fabricated, may be used for the
  transportation of anhydrous ammonia if it:
(1) Has a minimum design pressure not lower than 250 psig;
(2) Was manufactured in conformance with the ASME Code prior to January 1, 1981, according to its ASME name
  plate and manufacturer's data report;
(3) Is painted white or aluminum;
(4) Complies with Note 12 of this paragraph;
(5) Has been inspected and tested in accordance with subpart E of part 180 of this subchapter as specified for
  MC 331 cargo tanks.
(6) Was used to transport anhydrous ammonia prior to January 1, 1981;
(7) Is operated exclusively in intrastate commerce (including its operation by a motor carrier otherwise engaged
  in interstate commerce) in a state where its operation was permitted by the laws of that State (not including
  the incorporation of this subchapter) prior to January 1, 1981; and
(8) Is operated in conformance with all other requirements of this subchapter.
Note 18: The minimum packaging design pressure must not be less than the vapor pressure at the reference
  temperature of the lading plus one percent or 173.4 kPa (25 psig), whichever is less.
Note 19: The minimum packaging design pressure must not be less than the vapor pressure at the reference
  temperature of the lading.
Note 20: The minimum packaging design pressure must not be less than 1.5 times the vapor pressure of the lading
  at 46  deg.C (115  deg.F).
Note 21: The minimum packaging design pressure must not be less than 1.3 times the vapor pressure of the lading
  at 46  deg.C (115  deg.F).
Note 22: The minimum packaging design pressure must not be less than 1.1 times the vapor pressure of the lading
  at 46  deg.C (115  deg.F).
Note 23: Packagings must be made of stainless steel except that steel other than stainless steel may be used in
  accordance with the provisions of Sec.  173.24b(b) of this part. Thickness of stainless steel for shell and
  heads must be the greater of 7.62 mm (0.300 inch) or the thickness required for the packaging at its minimum
  design pressure.
Note 24: Packagings must be made of stainless steel except that steel other than stainless steel may be used in
  accordance with the provisions of Sec.  173.24b(b) of this part. Thickness of stainless steel for shell and
  heads must be the greater of 6.35 mm (0.250 inch) or the thickness required for the packaging at its minimum
  design pressure. For sulphur dioxide, this Note does not apply until October 1, 1994.
Note 25: Packagings must be made of stainless steel except that steel other than stainless steel may be used in
  accordance with the provisions of Sec.  173.24b(b) of this part. Thickness for shell and heads must be as
  calculated for the packaging at its minimum design pressure.
Note 26: Non-specification cargo tanks may be used for the transportation of liquefied petroleum gas, subject to
  the conditions prescribed in paragraph (k) of this section.


[[Page 577]]

    (b) Maximum permitted filling densities for cargo and portable tank 
containers for transportation of butadiene, stabilized, and liquefied 
petroleum gas are as follows:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                     Maximum permitted
                                                    filling density in
                                                   percent of the water-
                                                  weight capacity of the
 Maximum specific gravity of the liquid material    tanks (percent) See
                  at 60  deg.F.                           Note 1
                                                 -----------------------
                                                     1200
                                                  gallons or   Over 1200
                                                     less       gallons
------------------------------------------------------------------------
0.473 to 0.480..................................          38          41
0.481 to 0.488..................................          39          42
0.489 to 0.495..................................          40          43
0.496 to 0.503..................................          41          44
0.504 to 0.510..................................          42          45
0.511 to 0.519..................................          43          46
0.520 to 0.527..................................          44          47
0.528 to 0.536..................................          45          48
0.537 to 0.544..................................          46          49
0.545 to 0.552..................................          47          50
0.553 to 0.560..................................          48          51
0.561 to 0.568..................................          49          52
0.569 to 0.576..................................          50          53
0.577 to 0.584..................................          51          54
0.585 to 0.592..................................          52          55
0.593 to 0.600..................................          53          56
0.601 to 0.608..................................          54          57
0.609 to 0.617..................................          55          58
0.618 to 0.626..................................          56          59
0.627 and over..................................          57          60
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note 1: Filling is permitted by volume provided the same filling density
  is used as permitted by weight, except when using fixed length dip
  tube or other fixed maximum liquid level indicators (paragraph (f) of
  this section), in which case the maximum permitted filling density
  shall not exceed 97 percent of the maximum permitted filling density
  by weight contained in the table.

    (1) Odorization. All liquefied petroleum gas shall be effectively 
odorized as required in Note 2 of this paragraph to indicate positively, 
by a distinctive odor, the presence of gas down to a concentration in 
air of not over one-fifth the lower limit of combustibility: Provided, 
however, That odorization is not required if harmful in the use or 
further processing of the liquefied petroleum gas, or if odorization 
will serve no useful purpose as a warning agent in such use or further 
processing.

    Note 1: The lower limits of combustibility of the more commonly used 
liquefied petroleum gases are: Propane, 2.15 percent; butane, 1.55 
percent. These figures represent volumetric percentages of gas-air 
mixtures in each case.
    Note 2: The use of 1.0 pound of ethyl mercaptan, 1.0 pound of 
thiophane, or 1.4 pounds of amyl mercaptan per 10,000 gallons of 
liquefied petroleum gas shall be considered sufficient to meet the 
requirements of Sec. 173.315(b)(1). This note does not exclude the use 
of any other odorant in sufficient quantity to meet the requirements of 
Sec. 173.315(b)(1).

    (c) Except as otherwise provided, the loading of a liquefied gas 
into a cargo tank or portable tank shall be determined by weight or by a 
suitable liquid level gauging device. The vapor pressure (psig) at 115 
deg.F. must not exceed the design pressure of the cargo tank or portable 
tank container. The outage and filling limits for liquefied gases must 
be as prescribed in Sec. 173.24b of this part, except that this 
requirement does not apply to:
    (1) A tank containing carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid or nitrous 
oxide, refrigerated liquid. Such tank is required to be equipped with 
suitable pressure control valves and may not be filled to a level 
exceeding 95 percent of the volumetric capacity of the tank.
    (2) A tank containing ethane, refrigerated liquid; ethane-propane 
mixture, refrigerated liquid; or hydrogen chloride, refrigerated liquid. 
Such tank must be filled to allow at least two percent outage below the 
inlet of the pressure relief valve or pressure control valve under 
conditions of incipient opening, with the tank in a level attitude.
    (d) If the loading of cargo tanks and portable tank containers with 
liquefied gases is to be determined by weight, the gross weight shall be 
checked after the filling line is disconnected in each instance. The 
gross weight shall be calculated from the tank capacity and tare weight 
set forth on the metal plate required by the specification, and the 
maximum filling density permitted for the material being loaded into the 
tank as set forth in the table, paragraph (a) of this section.
    (e) If the loading of cargo tanks and portable tank containers with 
liquefied gases is to be determined by adjustable liquid level device, 
each tank and each compartment thereof shall have a thermometer well, so 
that the internal liquid temperature can easily be determined, and the 
amount of liquid in the tank shall be corrected to a 60  deg.F. basis. 
Liquid levels shall not exceed a level corresponding to the maximum 
filling density permitted for the material being loaded into the tank as 
set forth in the table in paragraph (a) of this section.

[[Page 578]]

    (f) When the loading of cargo tanks and portable tank containers 
with liquefied gases is determined only by fixed length dip tube or 
other fixed maximum liquid level indicator, the device shall be arranged 
to function at a level not to exceed the maximum permitted volume 
prescribed by the table, paragraph (a) of this section. Loading shall be 
stopped when the device functions.
    (g) Containers, the liquid level of which has been determined by 
means of a fixed length dip tube gauging device, shall not be acceptable 
for stowage as cargo on vessels in commerce subject to the jurisdiction 
of the United States Coast Guard. Nothing contained in this section 
shall be so construed as to prohibit the transportation on car floats or 
car ferries of motor vehicles laden with containers nor cargo tanks the 
liquid level of either of which has been determined by means of fixed 
length dip tube devices.
    (h) Each cargo tank and portable tank, except a tank filled by 
weight, must be equipped with one or more of the gauging devices 
described in the following table which indicate accurately the maximum 
permitted liquid level. Additional gauging devices may be installed but 
may not be used as primary controls for filling of cargo tanks and 
portable tanks. Gauge glasses are not permitted on any cargo tank or 
portable tank. Primary gauging devices used on cargo tanks of less than 
3500 gallons water capacity are exempt from the longitudinal location 
requirements specified in paragraphs (h)(2) and (3) of this section 
provided: The tank length does not exceed three times the tank diameter; 
and the cargo tank is unloaded within 24 hours after each filling of the 
tank.

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                             Gaging device permitted for
                Kind of gas                       filling purposes
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Anhydrous ammonia.........................  Rotary tube; adjustable slip
                                             tube; fixed length dip
                                             tube.
Anhydrous dimethylamine...................  None.
Anhydrous monomethylamine.................      Do.
Anhydrous trimethylamine..................      Do.
Aqua ammonia solution containing anhydrous  Rotary tube; adjustable slip
 ammonia.                                    tube; fixed length dip
                                             tube.
Butadiene, stabilized.....................      Do.
Carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid.......      Do.
Chlorine..................................  None.
Dichlorodifluoromethane...................      Do.
Difluoroethane............................      Do.
Difluoromonochloroethane..................      Do.
Dimethyl ether............................      Do.
Ethane, refrigerated liquid...............  Rotary tube; adjustable slip
                                             tube; fixed length dip
                                             tube.
Ethane-propane mixture, refrigerated            Do.
 liquid.
Hexafluoropropylene.......................  None.
Hydrogen chloride, refrigerated liquid....      Do.
Liquefied petroleum gases.................  Rotary tube; adjustable slip
                                             tube; fixed length dip
                                             tube.
Methyl chloride...........................  Fixed length dip tube.
Methyl mercaptan..........................  Rotary tube; adjustable slip
                                             tube; fixed length dip
                                             tube.
Monochlorodifluoromethane.................  None.
Nitrous oxide, refrigerated liquid........  Rotary tube; adjustable slip
                                             tube; fixed length dip
                                             tube.
Methylacetylenepropadiene, stabilized.....      Do.
Refrigerant gas, n.o.s. or Dispersant gas,  None.
 n.o.s.
Sulfur dioxide............................  Fixed length dip tube.
Vinyl chloride............................  None.
Vinyl fluoride, inhibited.................      Do.
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (1) The design pressure of the liquid level gauging devices shall be 
at least equal to the design pressure of the tank.
    (2) If the primary gauging device is adjustable, it must be capable 
of adjustment so that the end of the tube will be in the location 
specified in paragraph (h)(3) of this section for at least one of the 
ladings to be transported, at the filling level corresponding to an 
average loading temperature. Exterior means must be provided to indicate 
this adjustment. The gauging device must be legibly and permanently 
marked in increments not exceeding 20 Fahrenheit degrees (or not 
exceeding 25 p.s.i.g. on tanks for carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid 
or nitrous oxide, refrigerated liquid), to indicate the maximum levels 
to which the tank may be filled with liquid at temperatures above 20 
deg.F. However, if it is not practicable to so mark the gauging device, 
this information must be legibly and permanently marked on a plate 
affixed to the tank adjacent to the gauging device.
    (3) A dip tube gauging device consists of a pipe or tube with a 
valve at its outer end with its intake limited by an orifice not larger 
than 0.060 inch in diameter. If a fixed length dip tube is

[[Page 579]]

used, the intake must be located midway of the tank both longitudinally 
and laterally and at maximum permitted filling level. In tanks for 
liquefied petroleum gases, the intake must be located at the level 
reached by the lading when the tank is loaded to maximum filling density 
at 40  deg.F.
    (4) Except on a tank used exclusively for the transportation of 
carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid or nitrous oxide, refrigerated 
liquid, each opening for a pressure gauge must be restricted at or 
inside the tank by an orifice no larger than 0.060 inch in diameter. For 
carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid or nitrous oxide, refrigerated 
liquid service, the pressure gauge need only be used during the filling 
operation.
    (i) Each tank must be provided with one or more pressure relief 
devices which, unless otherwise specified in this part, must be of the 
spring-loaded type. Each valve must be arranged to discharge upward and 
unobstructed to the outside of the protective housing to prevent any 
impingement of escaping gas upon the tank. For each chlorine tank the 
protective housing must be in compliance with the requirements set forth 
in the applicable specification.
    (1) The safety relief valves on each tank must meet the following 
conditions:
    (i) The total relieving capacity, as determined by the flow formulas 
contained in Section 5 of CGA Pamphlet S-1.2, must be sufficient to 
prevent a maximum pressure in the tank of more than 120 percent of the 
design pressure;
    (ii) The flow capacity rating, testing and marking must be in 
accordance with Sections 5, 6 and 7 of CGA Pamphlet S-1.2.
    (iii) For an insulated tank, the required relieving capacity of the 
relief devices must be the same as for an uninsulated tank, unless the 
insulation will remain in place and will be effective under fire 
conditions. In this case, except for UN portable tanks, each insulated 
tank must be covered by a sheet metal jacket of not less than 16 gauge 
thickness. For UN portable tanks where the relieving capacity of the 
valves has been reduced on the basis of the insulation system, the 
insulation system must remain effective at all temperatures less than 
649  deg.C (1200.2  deg.F) and be jacketed with a material having a 
melting point of 700  deg.C (1292.0  deg.F) or greater.
    (iv) An MC 330 cargo tank that has relief valves sized by Fetterly's 
formula dated November 27, 1928, may be continued in service.
    (2) Each safety relief valve must be arranged to minimize the 
possibility of tampering. If the pressure setting or adjustment is 
external to the valve, the safety relief valve must be provided with 
means for sealing the adjustment and it must be sealed.
    (3) Each safety relief valve on a portable tank, other than a UN 
portable tank, must be set to start-to-discharge at pressure no higher 
than 110% of the tank design pressure and no lower than the design 
pressure specified in paragraph (a) of this section for the gas 
transported. For UN portable tanks used for liquefied compressed gases 
and constructed in accordance with the requirements of Sec. 178.276 of 
this subchapter, the pressure relief device(s) must conform to 
Sec. 178.276(e) of this subchapter.
    (4) Except for UN portable tanks, each safety relief valve must be 
plainly and permanently marked with the pressure in p.s.i.g. at which it 
is set to discharge, with the actual rate of discharge of the device in 
cubic feet per minute of the gas or of air at 60  deg.F (15.6  deg.C) 
and 14.7 p.s.i.a., and with the manufacturer's name or trade name and 
catalog number. The start-to-discharge valve marking must be visible 
after the valve is installed. The rated discharge capacity of the device 
must be determined at a pressure of 120% of the design pressure of the 
tank. For UN portable tanks, each pressure relief device must be clearly 
and permanently marked as specified in Sec. 178.274(f)(1) of this 
subchapter.
    (5) Each safety relief valve must have direct communication with the 
vapor space in the tank.
    (6) Each connection to a safety relief valve must be of sufficient 
size to provide the required rate of discharge through the safety relief 
valve.
    (7) [RESERVED]
    (9) On tanks for carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid or nitrous 
oxide, refrigerated liquid each safety relief device must be installed 
and located so

[[Page 580]]

that the cooling effect of the contents will not prevent the effective 
operation of the device. In addition to the required safety relief 
valves, these tanks may be equipped with one or more pressure 
controlling devices.
    (10) Each tank for carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid also may be 
equipped with one or more non-reclosing pressure relief devices set to 
function at a pressure not over two times nor less than 1.5 times the 
design pressure of the tank.
    (11) Each portion of connected liquid piping or hose that can be 
closed at both ends must be provided with a safety relief valve without 
an intervening shut-off valve to prevent excessive hydrostatic pressure 
that could burst the piping or hose.
    (12) Subject to conditions of paragraph (a) of this section for the 
methyl chloride and sulfur dioxide optional portable tanks, one or more 
fusible plugs examined by the Bureau of Explosives and approved by the 
Associate Administrator may be used on these tanks in place of safety 
relief valves of the spring-loaded type. The fusible plug or plugs must 
be in accordance with CGA Pamphlet S-1.2, to prevent a pressure rise in 
the tank of more than 120 percent of the design pressure. If the tank is 
over 30 inches long, each end must have the total specified safety 
discharge area.
    (13) A safety relief valve on a chlorine cargo tank must conform to 
one of the following standards of The Chlorine Institute, Inc.: Type 
1\1/2\ JQ225, Dwg. H51970, dated October 7, 1968; or Type 1\1/2\ JQ225, 
Dwg. H50155, Revision A, dated April 28, 1969.
    (j) Storage containers for liquefied petroleum gas for permanent 
installation on consumer premises may be shipped by private motor 
carrier only under the following conditions:
    (1) Each container must be constructed in compliance with the 
requirements of the ASME Code (containers built in compliance with 
earlier editions starting with 1943 are authorized) and must be marked 
to indicate compliance in the manner specified by the respective Code.
    (2) Each container must be equipped with safety devices in 
compliance with the requirements for safety devices on containers as 
specified in NFPA Pamphlet No. 58.
    (3) The containers shall be so braced or otherwise secured on the 
vehicle as to prevent relative motion while in transit. Valves or other 
fittings shall be adequately protected against damage during 
transportation. (See Sec. 177.834(g) of this subchapter.)
    (4) Except as provided in paragraph (j)(5) of this section, 
containers shall not be shipped when charged with liquefied petroleum 
gas to more than 5 percent of their water capacity.
    (5) Storage containers of less than 1,042 pounds water capacity (125 
gallons) may be shipped when charged with liquefied petroleum gas in 
compliance with DOT filling density.
    (k) A nonspecification cargo tank meeting, and marked in conformance 
with, the edition of the ASME Code in effect when it was fabricated may 
be used for the transportation of liquefied petroleum gas provided it 
meets all of the following conditions:
    (1) It must have a minimum design pressure no lower than 250 psig.
    (2) It must have a capacity of 13,247.5 L (3,500 water gallons) or 
less.
    (3) It must have been manufactured in conformance with the ASME Code 
prior to January 1, 1981, according to its ASME name plate and 
manufacturer's data report.
    (4) It must conform to applicable provisions of NFPA Pamphlet 58, 
except to the extent that provisions of Pamphlet 58 are inconsistent 
with requirements in parts 178 and 180 of this subchapter.
    (5) It must be inspected, tested, and equipped in accordance with 
subpart E of part 180 of this subchapter as specified for MC 331 cargo 
tank motor vehicles.
    (6) Except as provided in this paragraph (k), it must be operated 
exclusively in intrastate commerce, including its operation by a motor 
carrier otherwise engaged in interstate commerce, in a state where its 
operation was permitted by law (not including the incorporation of this 
subchapter) prior to January 1, 1981. A cargo tank motor vehicle 
operating under authority of this section may cross state lines to 
travel to and from a qualified assembly, repair, maintenance, or 
requalification facility. The cargo tank need

[[Page 581]]

not be cleaned and purged, but it may not contain liquefied petroleum 
gas in excess of five percent of the water capacity of the cargo tank. 
If the vehicle engine is supplied fuel from the cargo tank, enough fuel 
in excess of five percent of the cargo tank's water capacity may be 
carried for the trip to or from the facility.
    (7) It must have been used to transport liquefied petroleum gas 
prior to January 1, 1981.
    (8) It must be operated in conformance with all other requirements 
of this subchapter.
    (l) Anhydrous ammonia must not be offered for transportation or 
transported in specification MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tanks constructed 
of quenched and tempered (``QT'') steel except as provided in this 
paragraph.
    (1) The ammonia must have a minimum water content of 0.2 percent by 
weight. Any addition of water must be made using steam condensate, 
deionized, or distilled water.
    (2) Except as otherwise provided in this paragraph, each person 
offering for transportation or transporting anhydrous ammonia shall 
perform a periodic analysis for prescribed water content in the ammonia. 
The analysis must be performed:
    (i) From a sample of the ammonia in storage taken at least once 
every 7 days, or each time ammonia is added to the storage tanks, 
whichever is less frequent; or
    (ii) At the time the cargo tanks are loaded, then a sample of the 
ammonia taken from at least one loaded cargo tank out of each 10 loads, 
or from one cargo tank every 24 hours, whichever is less frequent; or
    (iii) At the same frequency as described in paragraph (l)(2)(ii) of 
this section, from a sample taken from the loading line to the cargo 
tank.
    (3) If water is added at the time of loading:
    (i) The sample for analysis must be taken from a point in the 
loading line between the water injection equipment and the cargo tank; 
and
    (ii) Positive provisions must be made to assure water injection 
equipment is operating.
    (4) If water injection equipment becomes inoperative, suitable 
corrective maintenance must be performed after which a sample from the 
first loaded cargo tank must be analyzed for prescribed water content.
    (5) The analysis method for water content must be as prescribed in 
CGA Pamphlet G-2.2, titled ``Tentative Standard Method for Determining 
Minimum of 0.2 per cent water in Anhydrous Ammonia,'' 1975 edition.
    (6) Records indicating the results of the analysis taken, as 
required by this paragraph, must be retained for 2 years and must be 
open to inspection by a representative of the Department.
    (7) Each person receiving anhydrous ammonia containing 0.2 per cent 
water by weight may offer for transportation or transport that ammonia 
without performing the prescribed analysis for water content provided:
    (i) The ammonia received was certified as containing 0.2 percent 
water as prescribed in Secs. 172.203(h)(l)(i) and 177.817(a) of this 
subchapter; and
    (ii) The amount of water in the ammonia has not been reduced by any 
means.
    (m) A cargo tank (commonly known as a nurse tank and considered an 
implement of husbandry) transporting anhydrous ammonia, and operated by 
a private carrier exclusively for agricultural purposes does not have to 
meet the specification requirements of part 178 of this subchapter if 
it:
    (1) Has a minimum design pressure of 250 psig and meets the 
requirements of the edition of the ASME code in effect at the time it 
was manufactured and is marked accordingly;
    (2) Is equipped with safety relief valves meeting the requirements 
of CGA pamphlet S1.2;
    (3) Is painted white or aluminum;
    (4) Has capacity of 3,000 gallons or less;
    (5) Is loaded to a filling density no greater than 56 percent;
    (6) Is securely mounted on a farm wagon; and
    (7) Is in conformance with the requirements of part 172 of this 
subchapter except that shipping papers are not required; and it need not 
be marked or placarded on one end if that end contains valves, fittings, 
regulators or gauges when those appurtenances prevent the markings and

[[Page 582]]

placard from being properly placed and visible.
    (n) Emergency discharge control for cargo tank motor vehicles in 
liquefied compressed gas service.--(1) Required emergency discharge 
control equipment. Each cargo tank motor vehicle in liquefied compressed 
gas service must have an emergency discharge control capability as 
specified in the following table:

[[Page 583]]



--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                                                Required emergency discharge control
     Sec.  173.315(n)(1)(*)                          Material                        Delivery service                        capability
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(i).............................  Division 2.2 materials with no subsidiary      All.....................  None.
                                   hazard, excluding anhydrous ammonia.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(ii)............................  Division 2.3 materials.......................  All.....................  Paragraph (n)(2) of this section.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(iii)...........................  Division 2.2 materials with a subsidiary       Other than metered        Paragraph (n)(2) of this section.
                                   hazard, Division 2.1 materials, and            delivery service.
                                   anhydrous ammonia.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(iv)............................  Division 2.2 materials with a subsidiary       Metered delivery service  Paragraph (n)(3) of this section.
                                   hazard, Division 2.1 materials, and
                                   anhydrous ammonia in a cargo tank motor
                                   vehicle with a capacity of 13,247.5 L (3,500
                                   water gallons) or less.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(v).............................  Division 2.2 materials with a subsidiary       Metered delivery service  Paragraph (n)(3) of this section, and, for
                                   hazard, Division 2.1 materials, and                                      obstructed view deliveries where permitted
                                   anhydrous ammonia in a cargo tank motor                                  by Sec.  177.840(p) of this subchapter,
                                   vehicle with a capacity greater than                                     paragraph (n)(2) or (n)(4) of this section.
                                   13,247.5 L (3,500 water gallons).
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


[[Page 584]]

    (2) Cargo tank motor vehicles in other than metered delivery 
service. A cargo tank motor vehicle in other than metered delivery 
service must have a means to automatically shut off the flow of product 
without the need for human intervention within 20 seconds of an 
unintentional release caused by a complete separation of a liquid 
delivery hose (passive shut-down capability).
    (i) Designed flow of product through a bypass in the valve is 
acceptable when authorized by this subchapter.
    (ii) The design for the means to automatically shut off product flow 
must be certified by a Design Certifying Engineer. The certification 
must consider any specifications of the original component manufacturer 
and must explain how the passive means to shut off the flow of product 
operates. It must also outline the parameters (e.g., temperature, 
pressure, types of product) within which the passive means to shut off 
the flow of product is designed to operate. All components of the 
discharge system that are integral to the design must be included in the 
certification. A copy of the design certification must be provided to 
the owner of the cargo tank motor vehicle on which the equipment will be 
installed.
    (iii) Installation must be performed under the supervision of a 
Registered Inspector unless the equipment is installed and removed as 
part of regular operation (e.g., a hose). The Registered Inspector must 
certify that the equipment is installed and tested, if it is possible to 
do so without damaging the equipment, in accordance with the Design 
Certifying Engineer's certification. The Registered Inspector must 
provide the certification to the owner of the cargo tank motor vehicle.
    (3) Cargo tank motor vehicles in metered delivery service. When 
required by the table in paragraph (n)(1) of this section, a cargo tank 
motor vehicle must have an off-truck remote means to close the internal 
self-closing stop valve and shut off all motive and auxiliary power 
equipment upon activation by a qualified person attending the unloading 
of the cargo tank motor vehicle (off-truck remote shut-off). It must 
function reliably at a distance of 45.72 m (150 feet). The off-truck 
remote shut-off activation device must not be capable of reopening the 
internal self-closing stop valve after emergency activation.
    (i) The emergency discharge control equipment must be installed 
under the supervision of a Registered Inspector. Each wireless 
transmitter/receiver must be tested to demonstrate that it will close 
the internal self-closing stop valve and shut off all motive and 
auxiliary power equipment at a distance of 91.44 m (300 feet) under 
optimum conditions. Emergency discharge control equipment that does not 
employ a wireless transmitter/receiver must be tested to demonstrate its 
functioning at the maximum length of the delivery hose.
    (ii) The Registered Inspector must certify that the remote control 
equipment is installed in accordance with the original component 
manufacturer's specifications and is tested in accordance with paragraph 
(n)(3)(i) of this section. The Registered Inspector must provide the 
owner of the cargo tank motor vehicle with this certification.
    (4) Query systems. When a transmitter/receiver system is used to 
satisfy the requirements of paragraph (n)(1)(v) of this section, it must 
close the internal self-closing stop valve and shut off all motive and 
auxiliary power equipment unless the qualified person attending the 
unloading operation prevents it from doing so at least once every five 
minutes. Testing and certification must be as specified in paragraph 
(n)(3) of this section.
    (5) Compliance dates. (i) Each specification MC 331 cargo tank motor 
vehicle with a certificate of construction issued two or more years 
after July 1, 1999, must have an appropriate emergency discharge control 
capability as specified in this paragraph (n).
    (ii) No MC 330, MC 331, or nonspecification cargo tank motor vehicle 
authorized under paragraph (k) of this section may be operated unless it 
has an appropriate emergency discharge control capability as specified 
in this paragraph (n) no later than the date of its first scheduled 
pressure retest required after July 1, 2001. No MC 330, MC 331 or 
nonspecification cargo tank

[[Page 585]]

motor vehicle authorized under paragraph (k) of this section may be 
operated after July 1, 2006, unless it has been equipped with emergency 
discharge control equipment as specified in this paragraph (n).
    (iii) No MC 330 or MC 331 cargo tank motor vehicle with a capacity 
over 13,247 L (3,500 gallons) used in metered delivery service may be 
operated unless it has an appropriate discharge control capability as 
specified in this paragraph (n) no later than July 1, 2003, or the date 
of its first scheduled pressure retest required after July 1, 2001, 
whichever is earlier.
    (o) Chlorine cargo tank motor vehicles. Each cargo tank motor 
vehicle used for the transportation of chlorine must meet the 
requirements in the following:
    (1) Any hose, piping, or tubing used for loading or unloading that 
is mounted or carried on the motor vehicle may not be attached to any 
valve and must be capped at all ends to prevent the entry of moisture, 
except at the time of loading or unloading. Except at the time of 
loading and unloading, the pipe connection of each angle valve must be 
closed with a screw plug which is chained or otherwise fastened to 
prevent misplacement.
    (2) Each chlorine cargo tank motor vehicle angle valve must be 
tested to be leak free at not less than 225 psig using dry air or inert 
gas before installation and thereafter every 2 years when performing the 
required periodic retest in Sec. 180.407(c) of this subchapter. Prior to 
each loading, the cargo tank motor vehicle must be inspected and the 
angle valves and gasketed joints must be examined and tested at a 
pressure of not less than 50 psig to determine that they are not leaking 
and are in proper condition for transportation. Any leaks must be 
corrected before the cargo tank motor vehicle is offered for 
transportation.
    (3) Excess flow valves on the cargo tank motor vehicle must meet the 
requirements of paragraph (n) of this section.
    (p) Fusible elements. Each MC 330, MC 331, or nonspecification cargo 
tank authorized under paragraph (k) of this section must have a thermal 
means of closure for each internal self-closing stop valve as specified 
in Sec. 178.337-8(a)(4) of this subchapter.
    (q) Manifolding is authorized for cargo tanks containing anhydrous 
ammonia provided each individual cargo tank is equipped with a pressure 
relief device or valves and gauging devices as required by paragraphs 
(h) and (i) of this section. Each valve must be tightly closed while the 
cargo tank is in transit. Each cargo tank must be filled separately.

[29 FR 18743, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967]

    Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting 
Sec. 173.315, see the List of CFR Sections Affected which appears in the 
Finding Aids section of the printed volume and on GPO Access.



Sec. 173.316  Cryogenic liquids in cylinders.

    (a) General requirements. (1) A cylinder may not be loaded with a 
cryogenic liquid colder than the design service temperature of the 
packaging.
    (2) A cylinder may not be loaded with any material which may combine 
chemically with any residue in the packaging to produce an unsafe 
condition.
    (3) The jacket covering the insulation on a cylinder used to 
transport any flammable cryogenic liquid must be made of steel.
    (4) A valve or fitting made of aluminum with internal rubbing or 
abrading aluminum parts that may come in contact with oxygen in the 
cryogenic liquid form may not be installed on any cylinder used to 
transport oxygen, cryogenic liquid unless the parts are anodized in 
accordance with ASTM Standard B 580 (incorporated by reference, see 
Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).
    (5) An aluminum valve, pipe or fitting may not be installed on any 
cylinder used to transport any flammable cryogenic liquid.
    (6) Each cylinder must be provided with one or more pressure relief 
devices, which must be installed and maintained in compliance with the 
requirements of this subchapter.
    (7) Each pressure relief device must be installed and located so 
that the cooling effect of the contents during venting will not prevent 
effective operation of the device.

[[Page 586]]

    (8) The maximum weight of the contents in a cylinder with a design 
service temperature colder than -320  deg.F. may not exceed the design 
weight marked on the cylinder (see Sec. 178.35 of this subchapter).
    (b) Pressure control systems. Each cylinder containing a cryogenic 
liquid must have a pressure control system that conforms to 
Sec. 173.34(d) and is designed and installed so that it will prevent the 
cylinder from becoming liquid full.
    (c) Specification cylinder requirements and filling limits. 
Specification DOT-4L cylinders (Sec. 178.57 of this subchapter) are 
authorized for the transportation of cryogenic liquids when carried in 
the vertical position as follows:
    (1) For purposes of this section, ``filling density,'' except for 
hydrogen, is defined as the percent ratio of the weight of lading in the 
packaging to the weight of water that the packaging will hold at 60 
deg.F. (1 lb. of water = 27.737 cubic inches at 60  deg.F.).
    (2) The cryogenic liquids of argon, nitrogen, oxygen, helium and 
neon must be loaded and shipped in accordance with the following table:

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                   Maximum permitted filling density (percent by weight)
 Pressure control valve setting (maximum -----------------------------------------------------------------------
    start-to-discharge pressure psig)         Air        Argon     Nitrogen     Oxygen      Helium       Neon
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
45......................................        82.5         133          76         108        12.5         109
75......................................        80.3         130          74         105        12.5         104
105.....................................        78.4         127          72         103        12.5         100
170.....................................        76.2         122          70         100        12.5          92
230.....................................        75.1         119          69          98        12.5          85
295.....................................        73.3         115          68          96        12.5          77
360.....................................        70.7         113          65          93        12.5  ..........
450.....................................        65.9         111          61          91        12.5  ..........
540.....................................        62.9         107          58          88        12.5  ..........
625.....................................        60.1         104          55          86        12.5  ..........
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Design service temperature (  deg.F.)...        -320        -320        -320        -320        -452        -411
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (3) Hydrogen (minimum 95 percent parahydrogen) must be loaded and 
shipped as follows:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                 Column 1                             Column 2
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Design service temperature...............  Minus 423  deg.F. or colder.
Maximum permitted filling density, based   6.7 percent.
 on cylinder capacity at minus 423  deg.F
 (see Note 1).
The pressure control valve must be         17 psig.
 designed and set to limit the pressure
 in the cylinder to not more than.
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    Note 1: The filling density for hydrogen, cryogenic liquid is 
defined as the percent ratio of the weight of lading in a packaging to 
the weight of water that the packaging will hold at minus 423  deg.F. 
The volume of the packaging at minus 423  deg.F is determined in cubic 
inches. The volume is converted to pounds of water (1 lb. of water = 
27.737 cubic inches).

    (i) Each cylinder must be constructed, insulated and maintained so 
that during transportation the total rate of venting shall not exceed 30 
SCF of hydrogen per hour.
    (ii) In addition to the marking requirements in Sec. 178.35 of this 
subchapter, the total rate of venting in SCF per hour (SCFH) shall be 
marked on the top head or valve protection band in letters at least one-
half inch high as follows: ``VENT RATE**SCFH'' (with the asterisks 
replaced by the number representing the total rate of venting, in SCF 
per hour).
    (iii) Carriage by highway is subject to the conditions specified in 
Sec. 177.840(a) of this subchapter.
    (d) Mixtures of cryogenic liquid. Where charging requirements are 
not specifically prescribed in paragraph (c) of this section, the 
cryogenic liquid must be shipped in packagings and under conditions 
approved by the Associate Administrator.

[Amdt. 173-166, 48 FR 27695, June 16, 1983, as amended by Amdt. 173-166, 
49 FR 24314, June 12, 1984; Amdt. 173-180, 49 FR 42735, Oct. 24, 1984; 
Amdt. 173-201, 52 FR 13041, Apr. 20, 1987: Amdt. 173-250, 61 FR 25942, 
May 23, 1996; Amdt. 173-261, 62 FR 24741, May 6, 1997; 66 FR 45379, Aug. 
28, 2001; 67 FR 16013, Sept. 27, 2002]

[[Page 587]]



Sec. 173.318  Cryogenic liquids in cargo tanks.

    (a) General requirements. (1) A cargo tank may not be loaded with a 
cryogenic liquid colder than the design service temperature of the 
packaging.
    (2) A cargo tank may not be loaded with any material that may 
combine chemically with any residue in the packaging to produce an 
unsafe condition (see Sec. 178.338-15).
    (3) The jacket covering the insulation on a tank used to transport a 
cryogenic liquid must be made of steel if the cryogenic liquid:
    (i) Is to be transported by vessel (see Sec. 176.76(g) of this 
subchapter); or
    (ii) Is oxygen or a flammable material.
    (4) A valve or fitting made of aluminum with internal rubbing or 
abrading aluminum parts that may come in contact with oxygen in the 
cryogenic liquid form may not be installed on any cargo tank used to 
transport oxygen, cryogenic liquid unless the parts are anodized in 
accordance with ASTM Standard B 580 (incorporated by reference, see 
Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).
    (5) An aluminum valve, pipe or fitting, external to the jacket that 
retains lading during transportation may not be installed on any cargo 
tank used to transport oxygen, cryogenic liquid or any flammable 
cryogenic liquid.
    (6) A cargo tank used to transport oxygen, cryogenic liquid must be 
provided with a manhole (see Sec. 178.338-6 of this subchapter).
    (b) Pressure relief systems and pressure control valves--(1) Types 
of pressure relief systems--(i) Tanks in oxygen and flammable cryogenic 
liquid service. Except as otherwise provided in this paragraph, each 
tank in oxygen and flammable cryogenic liquid service must be protected 
by two independent pressure relief systems which are not connected in 
series, namely:
    (A) A primary system of one or more pressure relief valves; and
    (B) A secondary system of one of more frangible discs or pressure 
relief valves. For a tank in carbon monoxide service, the secondary 
system must be pressure relief valves only.
    (ii) Tanks in helium and atmospheric gas (except oxygen) cryogenic 
liquid service. For a tank used in helium and atmospheric gas (except 
oxygen) cryogenic liquid service, the tank must be protected by at least 
one pressure relief system consisting of:
    (A) One or more pressure relief valves; or
    (B) A combination of one or more pressure relief valves and one or 
more frangible discs.
    (2) Capacities of pressure relief systems--(i) Tanks in oxygen or 
flammable cryogenic liquid service. For tanks in oxygen or flammable 
cryogenic liquid service, the primary system and the secondary system of 
pressure relief devices must each have a flow capacity equal to or 
greater than that calculated by the applicable formula in paragraph 
5.3.2 or paragraph 5.3.3 of CGA Pamphlet S-1.2. In addition:
    (A) The primary pressure relief system must have a total flow 
capacity at a pressure not exceeding 120 percent of the tank's design 
pressure.
    (B) The secondary pressure relief system must have a total flow 
capacity at a pressure not exceeding 150 percent of the tank's design 
pressure.
    (C) The flow capacity and rating must be verified and marked by the 
manufacturer of the device in accordance with CGA Pamphlet S-1.2.
    (ii) Tanks in helium and atmospheric gas (except oxygen) cryogenic 
liquid service. For tanks in helium and atmospheric gas (except oxygen) 
cryogenic liquid service, the pressure relief system must have a flow 
capacity equal to or greater than that calculated by the applicable 
formula in paragraphs 5.3.2 or 5.3.3 of CGA Pamphlet S-1.2. If the 
pressure relief system consists of a combination of pressure relief 
valves and frangible discs, the pressure relief valves must have a total 
venting capacity equal to or greater than that calculated by the 
applicable formula in paragraph 4.1.10.1.1 of CGA Pamphlet S-1.2. The 
pressure relief system must have this total flow capacity at a pressure 
not exceeding 150 percent of the tank's design pressure. The flow 
capacity and rating must be verified and marked by the manufacturer of 
the device in accordance with CGA Pamphlet S-1.2.
    (3) Type and construction of pressure relief devices. (i) Each 
pressure relief device must be designed and constructed

[[Page 588]]

for a pressure equal to or exceeding the tank's design pressure at the 
coldest temperature reasonably expected to be encountered.
    (ii) Pressure relief devices must be either spring-loaded pressure 
relief valves or frangible discs. Pressure relief valves must be of a 
type that automatically open and close at predetermined pressures.
    (4) Setting of pressure relief devices. (i) On a tank used in oxygen 
or flammable cryogenic liquid service, the pressure relief devices must 
perform as follows.
    (A) Each pressure relief valve in the primary relief system must be 
set-to-discharge at a pressure no higher than 110 percent of the tank's 
design pressure.
    (B) Each pressure relief device in the secondary pressure relief 
system must be designed to commence functioning at a pressure no lower 
than 130 percent and no higher than 150 percent of the tank's design 
pressure.
    (ii) On a tank used in helium and atmospheric gas (except oxygen) 
cryogenic liquid service, the pressure relief devices in the pressure 
relief system must be designed to commence functioning at no higher than 
150 percent of the tank's design pressure.
    (5) Optional pressure relief devices and pressure control valves. In 
addition to the required pressure relief devices, a cargo tank in 
cryogenic liquid (except carbon monoxide) service may be equipped with 
one or both of the following:
    (i) One or more pressure control valves set at a pressure below the 
tank's design pressure.
    (ii) One or more frangible discs set to function at a pressure not 
less than one and one-half times or more than two times the tank's 
design pressure.
    (6) Maximum filling rate. (i) For a tank used in oxygen and 
flammable cryogenic liquid service, the maximum rate at which the tank 
is filled must not exceed the liquid flow capacity of the primary 
pressure relief system rated at a pressure not exceeding 120 percent of 
the tank's design pressure.
    (ii) On a tank used in helium and atmospheric gas (except oxygen) 
cryogenic liquid service, the maximum rate at which the tank is filled 
must not exceed the liquid flow capacity of the pressure relief valves 
rated at 150 percent of the tank's design pressure.
    (7) Arrangement and location of pressure relief devices. (i) The 
discharge from any pressure relief system must be directed upward and be 
unobstructed to the outside of the protective housing in such a manner 
as to prevent impingement of gas upon the jacket or any structural part 
of the vehicle.
    (ii) Each pressure relief valve must be arranged or protected to 
prevent the accumulation of foreign material between the relief valve 
and the atmospheric discharge opening in any relief piping. The 
arrangement must not impede flow through the device.
    (iii) Each pressure relief valve must be designed and located to 
minimize the possibility of tampering. If the pressure setting or 
adjustment is external to the valve, the valve adjustment must be 
sealed.
    (iv) Each pressure relief device must have direct communication with 
the vapor space of the tank at the midlength of the top centerline.
    (v) Each pressure relief device must be installed and located so 
that the cooling effect of the contents during venting will not prevent 
the effective operation of the device.
    (8) Connections. (i) Each connection to a pressure relief device 
must be of sufficient size to allow the required rate of discharge 
through the pressure relief device. The inlet connection must be not 
less than one-half inch nominal pipe size.
    (ii) A shut-off valve may be installed in a pressure relief system 
only when the required relief capacity is provided at all times.
    (9) Pressure relief devices for piping hose and vacuum-insulated 
jackets. (i) Each portion of connected liquid piping or hose that can be 
closed at both ends must be provided with either a hydrostatic pressure 
relief valve without an intervening shut-off valve, or a check valve 
permitting flow from the pipe or hose into the tank. If used, the relief 
valve must be located so as to prevent its discharge from impinging on 
the tank, piping, or operating personnel.
    (ii) On a vacuum-insulated cargo tank the jacket must be protected 
by a

[[Page 589]]

suitable relief device to release internal pressure. The discharge area 
of this device must be at least 0.00024 square inch per pound of water 
capacity of the tank. This relief device must function at a pressure not 
exceeding the internal design pressure of the jacket, calculated in 
accordance with the ASME Code, or 25 psig, whichever is less.
    (10) Tank inlet, outlet, pressure relief device and pressure control 
valve markings. (i) Each tank inlet and outlet, except pressure relief 
devices and pressure control valves, must be permanently marked to 
indicate whether it communicates with ``vapor'' or ``liquid'' when the 
tank is filled to the maximum permitted filling density.
    (ii) Each pressure relief valve must be plainly and permanently 
marked with the pressure, in psig, at which it is set-to-discharge, the 
discharge rate of the device in SCF per minute (SCFM) of free air, and 
the manufacturer's name or trade name and catalog number. The marked 
set-to-discharge pressure valve must be visible with the valve in its 
installed position. The rated discharge capacity of the device must be 
determined at a pressure of 120 percent of the design pressure of the 
tank.
    (iii) Each pressure control valve must be plainly and permanently 
marked with the pressure, in psig, at which it is set-to-discharge.
    (c) Weight of lading requirements. The weight of a cryogenic liquid 
in the tank must be determined by weighing or by the use of a liquid 
level gauging device authorized in Sec. 178.338-14(a) of this 
subchapter, and may not exceed the lesser of:
    (1) The weight of lading in the tank, based on the water capacity 
stamped on the nameplate (Sec. 178.338-18(a)(4) of this subchapter) and 
the appropriate maximum permitted filling density specified in paragraph 
(f) of this section; or
    (2) The maximum weight of lading for which the cargo tank was 
designed, as marked on the specification plate (see Sec. 178.338-18(b) 
of this subchapter).
    (d) Outage. Except for a cargo tank containing helium, cryogenic 
liquid, a cargo tank offered for transportation must have an outage of 
at least two percent below the inlet of the pressure relief device or 
pressure control valve, under conditions of incipient opening, with the 
tank in a level attitude.
    (e) Temperature. A flammable cryogenic liquid in a cargo tank at the 
start of travel must be at a temperature sufficiently cold that the 
pressure setting of the pressure control valve or the required pressure 
relief valve, whichever is lower, will not be reached in less time than 
the marked rated holding time for the cryogenic liquid (see paragraph 
(g)(3) of this section and Sec. 178.338-9(b) of this subchapter).
    (f) Specification MC-338 (Sec. 178.338 of this subchapter) cargo 
tanks are authorized for the shipment of the following cryogenic liquids 
subject to the following additional requirements:
    (1) For purposes of this section, ``filling density'' is defined as 
the percent ratio of the weight of lading in the tank to the weight of 
water that the tank will hold at the design service temperature (one 
pound of water=27.737 cubic inches at 60  deg.F., or one gallon of water 
= 231 cubic inches at 60  deg.F. and weighs 8.32828 pounds).
    (2) Air, argon, helium, nitrogen, and oxygen, cryogenic liquids must 
be loaded and shipped in accordance with the following table:

                                                 Pressure Control Valve Setting or Relief Valve Setting
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                    Maximum permitted filling density (percent by weight)
 Maximum set-to-discharge pressure  --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
               (psig)                          Air                    Argon                  Helium                Nitrogen                Oxygen
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
26.................................  ......................  ......................  12.5.................  .....................  .....................
30.................................  80.3..................  129...................  12.5.................  74...................  105
40.................................  79.2..................  ......................  12.5.................  .....................  .....................
50.................................  78.0..................  ......................  12.5.................  .....................  .....................
55.................................  77.3..................  125...................  12.5.................  71...................  102
60.................................  76.9..................  ......................  12.5.................  .....................  .....................
80.................................  75.3..................  ......................  12.5.................  .....................  .....................
85.................................  75.1..................  121...................  12.5.................  .....................  99
100................................  73.0..................  ......................  12.5.................  .....................  .....................
105................................  73.7..................  ......................  12.5.................  67...................  .....................
120................................  72.2..................  ......................  12.5.................  .....................  .....................

[[Page 590]]

 
140................................  71.4..................  ......................  12.5.................  .....................  .....................
145................................  70.9..................  115...................  12.5.................  64...................  94
180................................  68.3..................  ......................  12.5.................  .....................  .....................
200................................  67.3..................  110...................  12.5.................  61...................  91
250................................  63.3..................  106...................  12.5.................  57...................  87
275................................  62.3..................  105...................  12.5.................  56...................  86
325................................  59.4..................  101...................  .....................  53...................  83
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Design service temperature.........  -320  deg.F...........  -320  deg.F...........  -452  deg.F..........  -320  deg.F..........  -320  deg.F
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (3) Carbon monoxide, hydrogen (minimum 95 percent para-hydrogen), 
ethylene, and methane or natural gas, cryogenic liquids must be loaded 
and shipped in accordance with the following table:

                             Pressure Control Valve Setting or Relief Valve Setting
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                               Maximum permitted filling density (percent by weight)
    Maximum set-to-discharge     -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
         pressure (psig)                                                                      Methane or natural
                                    Carbon monoxide        Ethylene            Hydrogen               gas
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
13..............................  ..................  ..................  6.6...............  ..................
15..............................  75.0..............  ..................  6.6...............  40.5
17..............................  74.0..............  ..................  6.6...............  ..................
20..............................  ..................  53.5..............  ..................  40.0
25..............................  73.0..............  ..................  ..................  ..................
30..............................  72.0..............  52.7..............  6.3...............  39.1
35..............................  ..................  ..................  ..................  ..................
40..............................  ..................  52.0..............  ..................  38.6
45..............................  71.5..............  ..................  ..................  ..................
50..............................  ..................  51.4..............  6.0...............  38.2
55..............................  ..................  ..................  ..................  ..................
60..............................  ..................  50.8..............  ..................  ..................
70..............................  ..................  50.2..............  5.7...............  37.5
90..............................  ..................  49.2..............  ..................  ..................
95..............................  ..................  ..................  ..................  ..................
100.............................  ..................  48.4..............  5.4...............  36.6
115.............................  ..................  48.2..............  ..................  ..................
125.............................  ..................  ..................  5.0...............  ..................
150.............................  ..................  ..................  4.5...............  ..................
175.............................  62.5..............  45.8..............  ..................  ..................
285.............................  56.0..............  ..................  ..................  ..................
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Design service temperature......  -320  deg.F.......  -155  deg.F.......  -423  deg.F.......  -260  deg.F
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (4) Mixtures of cryogenic liquid. Where charging requirements are 
not specifically prescribed in this paragraph (f), the cryogenic liquid 
must be shipped in packagings and under conditions approved by the 
Associate Administrator.
    (g) One-way travel time; marking. The jacket of a cargo tank to be 
used to transport a flammable cryogenic liquid must be marked on its 
right side near the front, in letters and numbers at least two inches 
high, ``One-Way-Travel-Time ---- hrs.'', with the blank filled in with a 
number indicating the one-way travel time (OWTT), in hours, of the cargo 
tank for the flammable cryogenic liquid to be transported. A cargo tank 
that is partially unloaded at one or more locations must have additional 
marking ``One-Way-Travel-Time ---- hrs. ---- psig to ---- psig at ---- 
percent filling density,'' with the second blank filled in with the 
pressure existing after partial unloading and the third blank filled in 
with the set-to-discharge pressure of the control valve or pressure 
relief valve, and the fourth blank with the filling density following 
partial unloading. Multiple OWTT markings for different pressure levels

[[Page 591]]

are permitted. The abbreviation ``OWTT'' may be used in place of the 
words ``One-way-travel-time'' in the marking required by this paragraph.
    (1) OWTT is based on the marked rated holding time (MRHT) of the 
cargo tank for the cryogenic liquid to be transported in the cargo tank. 
If the MRHT for the flammable cryogenic liquid is not displayed on or 
adjacent to the specification plate, this MRHT may be derived.
    (2) The MRHT is converted to OWTT, in hours, as follows:
    (i) For a tank with an MRHT of 72 hours or less,


OWTT = (MRHT - 24) / 2

    (ii) For a tank with an MRHT greater than 72 hours,


OWTT = MRHT - 48

    (3) Each cargo tank motor vehicle used to transport a flammable 
cryogenic liquid must be examined after each shipment to determine its 
actual holding time. The record required by Sec. 177.840(h) of this 
subchapter may be used for this determination. If the examination 
indicates that the actual holding time of the cargo tank, after 
adjustment to reflect an average ambient temperature of 85  deg.F, is 
less than 90 percent of the marked rated holding time (MRHT) for the 
cryogenic liquid marked on the specification plate or adjacent thereto 
(see Sec. 178.338-18(b) of this subchapter), the tank may not be 
refilled with any flammable cryogenic liquid until it is restored to its 
marked rated holding time value or it is re-marked with the actual 
marked rated holding time determined by this examination. If the name of 
the flammable cryogenic liquid that was transported and its marked rated 
holding time is not displayed on or adjacent to the specification plate, 
this requirement may be met by deriving the MRHT of the cargo tank for 
that flammable cryogenic liquid and comparing that derived MRHT with the 
actual holding time after adjustment.

[Amdt. 173-166, 48 FR 27696, June 16, 1983]

    Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting 
Sec. 173.318, see the List of CFR Sections Affected which appears in the 
Finding Aids section of the printed volume and on GPO Access.



Sec. 173.319  Cryogenic liquids in tank cars.

    (a) General requirements. (1) A tank car containing a flammable 
cryogenic liquid may not be shipped unless it was loaded by, or with the 
consent of, the owner of the tank car.
    (2) The amount of flammable cryogenic liquid loaded into a tank car 
must be determined, either by direct measurement or by calculation based 
on weight, to verify that the tank has not been filled to a level in 
excess of the limits specified in paragraph (d)(2) of this section. The 
weight of any flammable cryogenic liquid loaded, except hydrogen, must 
be checked by use of scales after disconnecting the loading line.
    (3) Whenever a tank car containing any flammable cryogenic lading is 
not received by the consignee within 20 days from the date of shipment, 
the shipper of the lading shall notify the Bureau of Explosives.
    (4) A tank car may not be loaded with any flammable cryogenic 
liquid:
    (i) That may combine chemically with any residue in the tank to 
produce an unsafe condition,
    (ii) That is colder than the design service temperature of the tank,
    (iii) If the average daily pressure rise in the tank exceeded 3 psig 
during the prior shipment,
    (iv) Unless it is marked with the name of contents, in accordance 
with Sec. 172.330 of this subchapter.
    (b) When a tank car containing a flammable cryogenic liquid is 
offered for transportation:
    (1) At least 0.5 percent outage must be provided below the inlet of 
the pressure relief or pressure control valve at the start-to-discharge 
pressure setting of the valve, with the tank car in a level attitude, 
and
    (2) The absolute pressure in the annular space must be less than 75 
microns of mercury.
    (c) Temperature. A flammable cryogenic liquid must be loaded into a 
tank car at such a temperature that the average daily pressure rise 
during transportation will not exceed 3 psig (see paragraph (a)(4)(iii) 
of this section).

[[Page 592]]

    (d) A Class DOT-113 tank car is authorized for the shipment of the 
following cryogenic liquids subject to the following additional 
requirements:
    (1) For purposes of this section, ``filling density'' is defined as 
the percent ratio of the weight of lading in the tank to the weight of 
water that the tank will hold at the design service temperature (one 
pound of water = 27.737 cubic inches at 60  deg.F., or one gallon of 
water = 231 cubic inches at 60  deg.F. and weighs 8.32828 pounds).
    (2) Ethylene, and hydrogen (minimum 95 percent parahydrogen), 
cryogenic liquids must be loaded and shipped in accordance with the 
following table:

                             Pressure Control Valve Setting or Relief Valve Setting
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                               Maximum permitted filling density (percent by weight)
   Maximum start-to-discharge    -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
         pressure (psig)               Ethylene            Ethylene            Ethlyene            Hydrogen
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
17..............................  ..................  ..................  ..................  6.60.
45..............................  52.8..............  ..................  ..................  ..................
75..............................  ..................  51.1..............  51.1..............  ..................
Maximum pressure when offered     10 psig...........  10 psig...........  20 psig...........  ..................
 for transportation.
Design service temperature......  Minus 260  deg.F..  Minus 260  deg.F..  Minus 155  deg.F..  Minus 423  deg.F.
Specification (see Sec.           113D60W...........  113C120W..........  113D120W..........  113A175W.
 180.507(b)(3) of this            113C60W...........                                          113A60W.
 subchapter).
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (e) Special requirements for class DOT 113 tank cars--(1) A class 
DOT-113 tank car need not be periodically pressure tested; however, each 
shipment must be monitored to determine the average daily pressure rise 
in the tank car. If the average daily pressure rise during any shipment 
exceeds 0.2 Bar (3 psig) per day, the tank must be tested for thermal 
integrity prior to any subsequent shipment.
    (2) Thermal integrity test. When required by paragraph (e)(1) of 
this section, either of the following thermal integrity tests may be 
used:
    (i) Pressure rise test. The pressure rise in the tank may not exceed 
0.34 Bar (5 psig) in 24 hours. When the pressure rise test is performed, 
the absolute pressure in the annular space of the loaded tank car may 
not exceed 75 microns of mercury at the beginning of the test and may 
not increase more than 25 microns during the 24-hour period; or
    (ii) Calculated heat transfer rate test. The insulation system must 
be performance tested as prescribed in Sec. 179.400-4 of this 
subchapter. When the calculated heat transfer rate test is performed, 
the absolute pressure in the annular space of the loaded tank car may 
not exceed 75 microns of mercury at the beginning of the test and may 
not increase more than 25 microns during the 24-hour period. The 
calculated heat transfer rate in 24 hours may not exceed:
    (A) 120 percent of the appropriate standard heat transfer rate 
specified in Sec. 179.401-1 of this subchapter, for DOT-113A60W and DOT-
113C120W tank cars;
    (B) 122.808 joules (0.1164 Btu/day/lb.) of inner tank car water 
capacity, for DOT-113A175W tank cars;
    (C) 345.215 joules (0.3272 Btu/day/lb.) of inner tank car water 
capacity, for DOT-113C60W and 113D60W tank cars; or
    (D) 500.09 joules (0.4740 Btu/day/lb.) of inner tank car water 
capacity, for DOT-113D120W tank cars.
    (3) A tank car that fails a test prescribed in paragraph (e)(2) of 
this section must be removed from hazardous materials service. A tank 
car removed from hazardous materials service because it failed a test 
prescribed in paragraph (e)(2) of this section may not be used to 
transport a hazardous material unless the tank car conforms to all 
applicable requirements of this subchapter.
    (4) Each rupture disc must be replaced every 12 months, and the 
replacement date must be marked on the car near the pressure relief 
valve information.
    (5) Pressure relief valves and alternate pressure relief valves must 
be tested every five years. The start-to-discharge pressure and vapor 
tight

[[Page 593]]

pressure requirements for the pressure relief valves must be as 
specified in Sec. 179.401-1 of this subchapter. The alternate pressure 
relief device values specified in Sec. 179.401-1 of this subchapter for 
a DOT-113C120W tank car apply to a DOT-113D120W tank car.

(49 U.S.C. 1803, 1804, 1808; 49 CFR 1.53, app. A to part 1)

[Amdt. 173-166, 48 FR 27698, June 16, 1983, as amended by Amdt. 173-245, 
Sept. 21, 1995; 65 FR 58630, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45184, 45379, 45383, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.320  Cryogenic liquids; exceptions.

    (a) Atmospheric gases and helium, cryogenic liquids, in Dewar 
flasks, insulated cylinders, insulated portable tanks, insulated cargo 
tanks, and insulated tank cars, designed and constructed so that the 
pressure in such packagings will not exceed 25.3 psig under ambient 
temperature conditions during transportation are not subject to the 
requirements of this subchapter when transported by motor vehicle or 
railcar except as specified in paragraphs (a)(1), (a)(2), and (a)(3) of 
this section.
    (1) Sections 171.15 and 171.16 of this subchapter pertaining to the 
reporting of incidents, not including a release that is the result of 
venting through a pressure control valve, or the neck of the Dewar 
flask.
    (2) Subparts A, B, C, and D of part 172, (Secs. 174.24 for rail and 
177.817 for highway) and in addition, part 172 in its entirety for 
oxygen.
    (3) Subparts A and B of part 173, and Secs. 174.1 and 177.800, 
177.804, and 177.823 of this subchapter.
    (b) The requirements of this subchapter do not apply to atmospheric 
gases and helium:
    (1) During loading and unloading operations (pressure rises may 
exceed 25.3 psig); or
    (2) When used in operation of a process system; such as a 
refrigeration system (pressure may exceed 25.3 psig).
    (c) For transportation aboard aircraft, see the ICAO Technical 
Instructions, Packing Instruction 202 and the packaging specifications 
in part 6, Chapter 5. (See Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter for ICAO 
Technical Instructions.)

[Amdt. 173-201, 52 FR 13043, Apr. 20, 1987, as amended at 62 FR 51561, 
Oct. 1, 1997; 66 FR 33436, June 21, 2001; 67 FR 61014, Sept. 27, 2002]



Sec. 173.321  Ethylamine.

    Ethylamine must be packaged as follows:
    (a) In 1A1 drums which meet Packing Group I performance level 
requirements.
    (b) In specification cylinders as prescribed for any compressed gas 
except acetylene.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52667, Dec. 21, 1990]



Sec. 173.322  Ethyl chloride.

    Ethyl chloride must be packaged in any of the following single or 
combination non-bulk packagings which meet Packing Group I performance 
level requirements:
    (a) In 4C1, 4C2, 4D or 4F wooden boxes with glass, earthenware, or 
metal inner receptacles not over 500 g (17.6 ounces) capacity each;
    (b) In 4G fiberboard boxes with glass, earthenware, or metal inner 
receptacles not over 500 g (17.6 ounces) capacity each. Outer packagings 
may not exceed 30 kg (66 pounds) gross weight;
    (c) In 1A1 drums of not over 100 L (26 gallons) capacity each; or
    (d) In specification cylinders as prescribed for any compressed gas 
except acetylene.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52667, Dec. 21, 1990]



Sec. 173.323  Ethylene oxide.

    (a) For packaging ethylene oxide in non-bulk packagings, silver 
mercury or any of its alloys or copper may not be used in any part of a 
packaging, valve, or other packaging appurtenance if that part, during 
normal conditions of transportation, may come in contact with ethylene 
oxide liquid or vapor. Copper alloys may be used only where gas mixtures 
do not contain free acetylene at any concentration that will form copper 
acetylene. All packaging and gaskets must be constructed of materials 
which are compatible with ethylene oxide and do not lower the auto-
ignition temperature of ethylene oxide.

[[Page 594]]

    (b) Ethylene oxide must be packaged in one of the following:
    (1) In 4G fiberboard boxes with inner glass ampoules or vials. Total 
quantity of ethylene oxide may not exceed 100 grams (3.5 ounces) per 
package. The completed package must be capable of passing Packing Group 
I performance tests.
    (2) In 4G fiberboard boxes constructed with top and bottom pads and 
perimeter liner. Inner packagings must be aluminum receptacles of no 
more than 135 g (4.8 ounces) capacity cushioned with incombustible 
material. No more than 12 receptacles may be packed in one box, and no 
more than 10 boxes may be overpacked under the provisions of Sec. 173.25 
of this part. Each completed package must be capable of passing Packing 
Group I performance tests.
    (3) In 4C1, 4C2, 4D or 4F wooden boxes or 4G fiberboard boxes with 
inner metal receptacles of no more than 340 g (12 ounces) capacity. The 
metal receptacle must be capable of withstanding no less than a 1241.1 
kPa (180 psig) burst pressure. No more than 12 receptacles may be packed 
in one box, and each receptacle may not be liquid full below 82  deg.C 
(180  deg.F). Each inner receptacle must be insulated and equipped with 
a relief device of the fusible plug type with yield temperature of 69 
deg.C to 77  deg.C (156  deg.F to 171  deg.F). The capacity of relief 
device and insulation must be such that the charged receptacle will not 
explode when tested by the method described in CGA Pamphlet C-14 or 
other equivalent method. Each completed package must be capable of 
passing all Packing Group I performance tests.
    (4) In specification cylinders, as authorized for any compressed gas 
except acetylene. Pressurizing valves and insulation are required for 
cylinders over 4 L (1 gallon) capacity. Eductor tubes must be provided 
for cylinders over 19 L (5 gallons) capacity. Cylinders must be seamless 
or welded steel (not brazed) with a nominal capacity of no more than 115 
L (30 gallons) and may not be liquid full below 82  deg.C (180  deg.F). 
Before each refilling, each cylinder must be tested for leakage at no 
less than 103.4 kPa (15 psig) pressure. In addition, each cylinder must 
be equipped with a fusible type relief device with yield temperature of 
69  deg.C to 77  deg.C (157  deg.F to 170  deg.F). The capacity of the 
relief device and the effectiveness of the insulation must be such that 
the charged cylinder will not explode when tested by the method 
described in CGA Pamphlet C-14 or other equivalent method.
    (5) In 1A1 steel drums of no more than 231 L (61 gallons) and 
meeting Packing Group I performance standards. The drum must be lagged, 
of all welded construction with the inner shell having a minimum 
thickness of 1.7 mm (0.068 inches) and the outer shell having a minimum 
thickness of 2.4 mm (0.095 inches). Drums must be capable of 
withstanding a hydrostatic test pressure of 690 kPa (100 psig). Lagging 
must be of sufficient thickness so that the drum, when filled with 
ethylene oxide and equipped with the required pressure relief device, 
will not rupture when exposed to fire. The drum may not be liquid full 
below 85  deg.C (185  deg.F), and must be marked ``THIS END UP'' on the 
top head. Before each refilling, each drum must be tested for leakage at 
no less than 103 kPa (15 psig) pressure. Each drum must be equipped with 
a fusible type relief device with yield temperature of 69  deg.C to 77 
deg.C (157  deg.F to 170  deg.F), and the capacity of the relief device 
must be such that the filled drum is capable of passing, without 
rupture, the test method described in CGA Pamphlet C-14 or other 
equivalent method.
    (c) When Sec. 172.101 of this subchapter specifies that a hazardous 
material be packaged under this section, only the following bulk 
packagings are authorized, subject to the requirements of subparts A and 
B of this part, the special provisions specified in column 7 of the 
Sec. 172.101 table, and paragraphs (d) through (j) of this section:
    (1) Tank cars. Class DOT 105J tank cars: Notwithstanding the 
requirements of Sec. 173.31(c), each tank car must have a tank test 
pressure of at least 20.7 Bar (300 psig) no later than July 1, 2006.
    (2) Cargo tanks. Specification MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tank motor 
vehicles.
    (3) Portable tanks. DOT 51 portable tanks.
    (d) The pressure relief devices must be set to function at 517 kPa 
(75 psig).

[[Page 595]]

Portable tanks fitted with non-reclosing devices made and in use prior 
to December 31, 1987, may continue to be used in ethylene oxide service.
    (e) In determining outage, consideration must be given to the lading 
temperature and solubility of inert gas padding in ethylene oxide as 
well as the partial pressure exerted by the gas padding.
    (f) Each tank, loaded or empty, must be padded with dry nitrogen or 
other suitable inert gas of sufficient quantity to render the vapor 
space of the tank nonflammable up to 41  deg.C (105  deg.F). The gas 
used for padding must be free of impurities which may cause the ethylene 
oxide to polymerize, decompose or undergo other violent chemical 
reaction.
    (g) Copper, silver, mercury, magnesium or their alloys may not be 
used in any part of the tank or appurtenances that are normally in 
contact with the lading.
    (h) Neoprene, natural rubber and asbestos gaskets are prohibited. 
All packing and gaskets must be made of materials which do not react 
with or lower the autoignition temperature of the lading.
    (i) Each tank must be insulated with cork (at least 10 cm (4 inches) 
thick), or mineral wool, fiberglass or other suitable insulation 
material of sufficient thickness so that the thermal conductance at 16 
deg.C (60  deg.F) is not more than 0.075 Btu per hour per square foot 
per degree F. temperature differential. Portable tanks made and in use 
prior to December 31, 1987 equipped with fusible plugs instead of a 
pressure relief valve or rupture disc, must have sufficient insulation 
so that the tank as filled for shipment will not rupture in a fire. The 
insulation on portable tanks or cargo tank motor vehicles must be 
protected with a steel jacket at least 2.54 mm (0.100 inch) thick, or as 
required by the specification.
    (j) Tank car tanks built after December 30, 1971 must be equipped 
with a thermometer well.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52667, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66279, 
Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-236, 58 FR 50237, Sept. 24, 1993; Amdt. 173-
234, 58 FR 51532, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 173-145, 60 FR 49076, Sept. 21, 
1995; 66 FR 45380, 45383, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.334  Organic phosphates mixed with compressed gas.

    Hexaethyl tetraphosphate, parathion, tetraethyl dithio 
pyrophosphate, tetraethyl pyrophosphate, or other Division 6.1 organic 
phosphates (including a compound or mixture), may be mixed with a non-
flammable compressed gas. This mixture may not contain more than 20 
percent by weight of organic phosphate and must be packaged in DOT 
3A240, 3AA240, 3B240, 4A240, 4B240, 4BA240, or 4BW240 cylinders meeting 
all of the following requirements:
    (a) Each cylinder may be filled with not more than 5 kg (11.0 lb) of 
the mixture, to a maximum filling density of not more than 80 percent of 
the water capacity.
    (b) No cylinder may be equipped with an education tube or a fusible 
plug.
    (c) No cylinder may be equipped with any valve unless the valve is a 
type approved by the Associate Administrator.
    (d) Cylinders must be overpacked in a box, crate, or other strong 
outside packaging conforming to the requirements of Sec. 173.25 and 
arranged to protect each valve or other closing device from damage. 
Except as provided in paragraph (e) of this section, no more than four 
cylinders may be packed in a strong outside packaging. Each strong 
outside packaging with its closing device protection must be 
sufficiently strong to protect all parts of each cylinder from 
deformation or leakage if the completed package is dropped 1.8 m (6 
feet) onto a non-yielding surface, such as concrete or steel, impacting 
at the packaging's weakest point.
    (e) Cylinders may be packed in strong wooden boxes with valves or 
other closing devices protected from damage, with not more than twelve 
cylinders in one outside wooden box. An outer fiberboard box may be used 
when not more than four such cylinders are to be shipped in one 
packaging. Valves must be adequately protected. Box and valve protection 
must be of sufficient strength to protect all parts of inner packagings 
and valves from deformation or breakage resulting from a drop of at 
least 1.8 m (6 feet) onto a non-yielding surface, such as concrete or 
steel, impacting at the weakest point.

[67 FR 51651, Aug. 8, 2002]

[[Page 596]]


    Editorial Note: At 67 FR 61014, Sept. 27, 2002, Sec. 173.334(f) was 
amended, however, paragraph (f) does not exist in this section.



Sec. 173.335  Gas generator assemblies.

    Gas generator assemblies (aircraft) containing liquefied non-
flammable, non-toxic gas and a solid propellant cartridge must be 
packaged as follows:
    (a) The gas must be packaged in specification steel cylinders 
authorized for any compressed gas except acetylene not exceeding 10.5 L 
(2.8 gallons) internal volume and having a minimum design burst pressure 
of 19,700 kPa (2,857 psig);
    (b) Fittings must be protected against damage under conditions 
normal incident to transport, any trigger must be fitted with a safety 
locking pin, and a non-propulsive plug must be installed on the 
discharge tube; and
    (c) Each complete unit must be individually and tightly packed to 
prevent movement in wooden boxes (4C1 or 4C2), plywood boxes (4D), 
reconstituted wood boxes (4F), fiberboard boxes (4G), or plastic boxes, 
(4H1and 4H2) of Packing Group II performance level, or in the original 
manufacturer's transit box.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52669, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 66 FR 45380, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.336  Nitrogen dioxide, liquefied, or dinitrogen tetroxide, liquefied.

    Nitrogen dioxide, liquefied, or dinitrogen tetroxide, liquefied, 
must be packaged in specification cylinders as prescribed in 
Sec. 173.192. Specification cylinders prescribed in Sec. 173.192 with 
valve removed are authorized. Each valve opening must be closed by means 
of a solid metal plug with tapered thread properly luted to prevent 
leakage. Transportation in DOT 3AL cylinders is authorized only by 
highway or rail. Each cylinder must be cleaned in compliance with the 
requirements of Federal Specification RR-C-901C, paragraphs 3.3.1 and 
3.3.2 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter). 
Cleaning agents equivalent to those specified in RR-C-901C may be used; 
however, any cleaning agent must not be capable of reacting with oxygen. 
One cylinder selected at random from a group of 200 or fewer and cleaned 
at the same time must be tested for oil contamination in accordance with 
Specification RR-C-901C, paragraphs 4.4.2.2 (incorporated by reference; 
see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter) and meet the standard of cleanliness 
specified therein.

[67 FR 51651, Aug. 8, 2002]



Sec. 173.337  Nitric oxide.

    Nitric oxide must be packed in DOT 3A1800, 3AA1800, 3E1800, or 
3AL1800 cylinders conforming to the requirements of Sec. 173.40. 
Cylinders must be equipped with a stainless steel valve and valve seat 
that will not deteriorate if in contact with nitric oxide or nitrogen 
dioxide. Cylinders or valves may not be equipped with pressure relief 
devices of any type. In addition--
    (a) Transportation in DOT 3AL or 3ALM cylinders is authorized only 
by highway or rail.
    (b) Each cylinder must be cleaned in compliance with the 
requirements of Federal Specification RR-C-901C, paragraphs 3.3.1 and 
3.3.2 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter). 
Cleaning agents equivalent to those specified in Federal Specification 
RR-C-901C may be used; however, any cleaning agent must not be capable 
of reacting with oxygen. One cylinder selected at random from a group of 
200 or fewer and cleaned at the same time must be tested for oil 
contamination in accordance with Federal Specification RR-C-901C 
paragraph 4.4.2.2 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this 
subchapter) and meet the standard of cleanliness specified therein.

[67 FR 51651, Aug. 8, 2002]

    Editorial Note: At 67 FR 61014, Sept. 27, 2002, Sec. 173.337(a) and 
(b) were amended, however, the amendment could not be incorporated 
because text does not exist.



Sec. 173.338  Tungsten hexafluoride.

    Tungsten hexafluoride must be packed in specification 3A, 3AA, 3BN, 
or 3E (Secs. 178.36, 178.37, 178.39, 178.42 of this subchapter) 
cylinders. Cylinders must be equipped with a valve protection cap or be 
packed in a strong outside container complying with the provisions of 
Sec. 173.40. Outlets of any valves must be capped or plugged. As an 
alternative, the cylinder opening may be

[[Page 597]]

closed by the use of a metal plug. Specification 3E cylinders must be 
shipped in an overpack that complies with the provisions of Sec. 173.40.

][Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52669, Dec. 21, 1990]



Sec. 173.340  Tear gas devices.

    (a) Packagings for tear gas devices must be approved prior to 
initial transportation by the Associate Administrator.
    (b) Tear gas devices may not be assembled with, or packed in the 
same packaging with, mechanically- or manually-operated firing, 
igniting, bursting, or other functioning elements unless of a type and 
design which has been approved by the Associate Administrator.
    (c) Tear gas grenades, tear gas candles, and similar devices must be 
packaged in one of the following packagings conforming to the 
requirements of part 178 of this subchapter at the Packing Group II 
performance level:
    (1) In UN 4C1, 4C2, 4D, or 4F metal-strapped wooden boxes. 
Functioning elements not assembled in grenades or devices must be in a 
separate compartment of these boxes, or in inner or separate outer 
boxes, UN 4C1, 4C2, 4D, or 4F, and must be so packed and cushioned that 
they may not come in contact with each other or with the walls of the 
box during transportation. Not more than 50 tear gas devices and 50 
functioning elements must be packed in one box, and the gross weight of 
the outer box may not exceed 35 kg (77 pounds).
    (2) In a UN 1A2 metal drum. Functioning elements must be packed in a 
separate inner packaging or compartment. Not more than 24 tear gas 
devices and 24 functioning elements must be packed in one outer drum, 
and the gross weight of the drum may not exceed 35 kg (77 pounds).
    (3) In a UN 4G fiberboard box with inside tear gas devices meeting 
Specifications 2P or 2Q. Each inside packaging must be placed in 
fiberboard tubes fitted with metal ends or a fiber box with suitable 
padding. Not more than 30 inner packagings must be packed in one outer 
box, and the gross weight of the outer box may not exceed 16 kg (35 
pounds).
    (4) In other packagings of a type or design which has been approved 
by the Associate Administrator.
    (d) Tear gas devices may be shipped completely assembled when 
offered by or consigned to the U.S. Department of Defense, provided the 
functioning elements are so packed that they cannot accidentally 
function. Outer packagings must be UN 4C1, 4C2, 4D, or 4F metal-strapped 
wooden boxes.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52669, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended 66 FR 45379, Aug. 
28, 2001]

Subpart H [Reserved]



               Subpart I--Class 7 (Radioactive) Materials

    Source: Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, unless otherwise 
noted.



Sec. 173.401  Scope.

    (a) This subpart sets forth requirements for the packaging and 
transportation of Class 7 (radioactive) materials by offerors and 
carriers subject to this subchapter. The requirements prescribed in this 
subpart are in addition to, not in place of, other requirements set 
forth in this subchapter for Class 7 (radioactive) materials and those 
of the Nuclear Regulatory Commission in 10 CFR part 71.
    (b) This subpart does not apply to:
    (1) Class 7 (radioactive) materials produced, used, transported, or 
stored within an establishment other than during the course of 
transportation, including storage in transportation.
    (2) Class 7 (radioactive) materials contained in a medical device, 
such as a heart pacemaker, which is implanted in a human being or live 
animal.
    (3) Class 7 (radioactive) materials that have been injected into, 
ingested by, or are otherwise placed into, and are still in, human 
beings or live animals.



Sec. 173.403  Definitions.

    For purposes of this subpart--
    A1 means the maximum activity of special form Class 7 
(radioactive) material permitted in a Type A package.
    A2 means the maximum activity of Class 7 (radioactive) 
material, other

[[Page 598]]

than special form, LSA or SCO, permitted in a Type A package. These 
values are either listed in Sec. 173.435 or derived in accordance with 
the procedure prescribed in Sec. 173.433.
    Class 7 (radioactive) material. See the definition of Radioactive 
material in this section.
    Closed transport vehicle means a transport vehicle or conveyance 
equipped with a securely attached exterior enclosure that during normal 
transportation restricts the access of unauthorized persons to the cargo 
space containing the Class 7 (radioactive) materials. The enclosure may 
be either temporary or permanent, and in the case of packaged materials 
may be of the ``see-through'' type, and must limit access from top, 
sides, and bottom.
    Containment system means the assembly of components of the packaging 
intended to retain the radioactive contents during transportation.
    Conveyance means:
    (1) For transport by public highway or rail: any transport vehicle 
or large freight container;
    (2) For transport by water: any vessel, or any hold, compartment, or 
defined deck area of a vessel including any transport vehicle on board 
the vessel; and
    (3) For transport by aircraft, any aircraft.
    Design means the description of a special form Class 7 (radioactive) 
material, a package, packaging, or LSA-III, that enables those items to 
be fully identified. The description may include specifications, 
engineering drawings, reports showing compliance with regulatory 
requirements, and other relevant documentation.
    Exclusive use (also referred to in other regulations as ``sole use'' 
or ``full load'') means sole use by a single consignor of a conveyance 
for which all initial, intermediate, and final loading and unloading are 
carried out in accordance with the direction of the consignor or 
consignee. The consignor and the carrier must ensure that any loading or 
unloading is performed by personnel having radiological training and 
resources appropriate for safe handling of the consignment. The 
consignor must issue specific instructions in writing, for maintenance 
of exclusive use shipment controls, and include them with the shipping 
paper information provided to the carrier by the consignor.
    Fissile material means plutonium-238, plutonium-239, plutonium-241, 
uranium-233, uranium-235, or any combination of these radionuclides. The 
definition does not apply to unirradiated natural uranium and depleted 
uranium, and natural uranium or depleted uranium that has been 
irradiated in a thermal reactor. Certain additional exceptions are 
provided in Sec. 173.453.
    Fissile material, controlled shipment means any shipment that 
contains one or more packages that have been assigned, in accordance 
with Sec. 173.457, nuclear criticality control transport indices greater 
than 10.
    Freight container means a reusable container having a volume of 1.81 
cubic meters (64 cubic feet) or more, designed and constructed to permit 
its being lifted with its contents intact and intended primarily for 
containment of packages in unit form during transportation. A ``small 
freight container'' is one which has either one outer dimension less 
than 1.5 m (4.9 feet) or an internal volume of not more than 3.0 cubic 
meters (106 cubic feet). All other freight containers are designated as 
``large freight containers.''
    Highway route controlled quantity means a quantity within a single 
package which exceeds:
    (1) 3,000 times the A1 value of the radionuclides as 
specified in Sec. 173.435 for special form Class 7 (radioactive) 
material;
    (2) 3,000 times the A2 value of the radionuclides as 
specified in Sec. 173.435 for normal form Class 7 (radioactive) 
material; or
    (3) 1,000 TBq (27,000 Ci), whichever is least.
    Limited quantity of Class 7 (radioactive) material means a quantity 
of Class 7 (radioactive) material not exceeding the materials package 
limits specified in Sec. 173.425 and conforming with requirements 
specified in Sec. 173.421.
    Low Specific Activity (LSA) material means Class 7 (radioactive) 
material with limited specific activity which satisfies the descriptions 
and limits set forth below. Shielding materials surrounding the LSA 
material may not be

[[Page 599]]

considered in determining the estimated average specific activity of the 
package contents. LSA material must be in one of three groups:
    (1) LSA-I.
    (i) Ores containing only naturally occurring radionuclides (e.g., 
uranium, thorium) and uranium or thorium concentrates of such ores; or
    (ii) Solid unirradiated natural uranium or depleted uranium or 
natural thorium or their solid or liquid compounds or mixtures; or
    (iii) Class 7 (radioactive) material, other than fissile material, 
for which the A2 value is unlimited; or
    (iv) Mill tailings, contaminated earth, concrete, rubble, other 
debris, and activated material in which the Class 7 (radioactive) 
material is essentially uniformly distributed and the average specific 
activity does not exceed 10-\6\A2/g.
    (2) LSA-II.
    (i) Water with tritium concentration up to 0.8 TBq/L (20.0 Ci/
liter); or
    (ii) Material in which the Class 7 (radioactive) material is 
distributed throughout and the average specific activity does not exceed 
10-\4\A2/g for solids and gases, and 
10-\5\A2/g for liquids.
    (3) LSA-III. Solids (e.g., consolidated wastes, activated materials) 
that meet the requirements of Sec. 173.468 and which:
    (i) The Class 7 (radioactive) material is distributed throughout a 
solid or a collection of solid objects, or is essentially uniformly 
distributed in a solid compact binding agent (such as concrete, bitumen, 
ceramic, etc.); and
    (ii) The Class 7 (radioactive) material is relatively insoluble, or 
it is intrinsically contained in a relatively insoluble material, so 
that, even under loss of packaging, the loss of Class 7 (radioactive) 
material per package by leaching when placed in water for seven days 
would not exceed 0.1 A2; and
    (iii) The average specific activity of the solid does not exceed 
2x10-\3\A2/g.
    Low toxicity alpha emitters are:
    (1) Natural uranium, depleted uranium, and natural thorium;
    (2) Ores, concentrates or tailings containing uranium-235, uranium-
238, thorium-232, thorium-228 and thorium-230; or
    (3) Alpha emitters with a half-life of less than 10 days.
    Maximum normal operating pressure means the maximum gauge pressure 
that would develop in a receptacle in a period of one year, in the 
absence of venting or cooling, under the heat conditions specified in 10 
CFR 71.71(c)(1).
    Multilateral approval means approval of a package or shipment by the 
relevant competent authority of the country of origin and of each 
country through or into which the package or shipment is to be 
transported. This definition does not include approval from a country 
over which Class 7 (radioactive) materials are carried in aircraft, if 
there is no scheduled stop in that country.
    Natural thorium means thorium with the naturally occurring 
distribution of thorium isotopes (essentially 100 percent by weight of 
thorium-232).
    Non-fixed radioactive contamination means radioactive contamination 
that can be readily removed from a surface by wiping with an absorbent 
material. Non-fixed (removable) radioactive contamination is not 
significant if it does not exceed the limits specified in Sec. 173.443.
    Normal form Class 7 (radioactive) material means Class 7 
(radioactive) material which has not been demonstrated to qualify as 
``special form Class 7 (radioactive) material.''
    Package means, for Class 7 (radioactive) materials, the packaging 
together with its radioactive contents as presented for transport.
    (1) ``Excepted package'' means a packaging together with its 
excepted Class 7 (radioactive) materials as specified in Secs. 173.421-
173.426 and 173.428.
    (2) ``Type A package'' means a packaging that, together with its 
radioactive contents limited to A1 or A2 as 
appropriate, meets the requirements of Secs. 173.410 and 173.412 and is 
designed to retain the integrity of containment and shielding required 
by this part under normal conditions of transport as demonstrated by the 
tests set forth in Sec. 173.465 or Sec. 173.466, as appropriate. A Type 
A package does not require Competent Authority Approval.
    (3) ``Type B package'' means a Type B packaging that, together with 
its radioactive contents, is designed to retain the integrity of 
containment and shielding required by this part when

[[Page 600]]

subjected to the normal conditions of transport and hypothetical 
accident test conditions set forth in 10 CFR part 71.
    (i) ``Type B(U) package'' means a Type B packaging that, together 
with its radioactive contents, for international shipments requires 
unilateral approval only of the package design and of any stowage 
provisions that may be necessary for heat dissipation.
    (ii) ``Type B(M) package'' means a Type B packaging, together with 
its radioactive contents, that for international shipments requires 
multilateral approval of the package design, and may require approval of 
the conditions of shipment. Type B(M) packages are those Type B package 
designs which have a maximum normal operating pressure of more than 700 
kilopascals per square centimeter (100 pounds per square inch) gauge or 
a relief device which would allow the release of Class 7 (radioactive) 
material to the environment under the hypothetical accident conditions 
specified in 10 CFR part 71.
    (4) ``Industrial package'' means a packaging that, together with its 
low specific activity (LSA) material or surface contaminated object 
(SCO) contents, meets the requirements of Secs. 173.410 and 173.411. 
Industrial packages are categorized in Sec. 173.411 as either:
    (i) ``Industrial package Type 1 (IP-1)'';
    (ii) ``Industrial package Type 2 (IP-2)''; or
    (iii) ``Industrial package Type 3 (IP-3)''.
    Packaging means, for Class 7 (radioactive) materials, the assembly 
of components necessary to ensure compliance with the packaging 
requirements of this subpart. It may consist of one or more receptacles, 
absorbent materials, spacing structures, thermal insulation, radiation 
shielding, service equipment for filling, emptying, venting and pressure 
relief, and devices for cooling or absorbing mechanical shocks. The 
conveyance, tie-down system, and auxiliary equipment may sometimes be 
designated as part of the packaging.
    Radiation level means the radiation dose-equivalent rate expressed 
in millisievert(s) per hour or mSv/h (millirem(s) per hour or mrem/h). 
Neutron flux densities may be converted into radiation levels according 
to table 1:

    Table 1--Neutron Fluence Rates To Be Regarded as Equivalent to a
              Radiation Level of 0.01 mSv/h (1 mrem/h) \1\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                 Flux
                                                               density
                                                              equivalent
                                                             to 0.01 mSv/
                                                              h (1 mrem/
                     Energy of neutron                       h) neutrons
                                                              per square
                                                              centimeter
                                                              per second
                                                             (n/cm\2\/s)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Thermal (2.510E-8)MeV......................................        272.0
1 keV......................................................        272.0
10 keV.....................................................        281.0
100 keV....................................................         47.0
500 keV....................................................         11.0
1 MeV......................................................          7.5
5 MeV......................................................          6.4
10 MeV.....................................................          6.7
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Flux densities equivalent for energies between those listed in this
  table may be obtained by linear interpolation.

    Radioactive contents means a Class 7 (radioactive) material, 
together with any contaminated liquids or gases within the package.
    Radioactive instrument or article means any manufactured instrument 
or article such as an instrument, clock, electronic tube or apparatus, 
or similar instrument or article having Class 7 (radioactive) material 
in gaseous or non-dispersible solid form as a component part.
    Radioactive material means any material having a specific activity 
greater than 70 Bq per gram (0.002 microcurie per gram) (see definition 
of ``specific activity'').
    Special form Class 7 (radioactive) material means Class 7 
(radioactive) material which satisfies the following conditions:
    (1) It is either a single solid piece or is contained in a sealed 
capsule that can be opened only by destroying the capsule;
    (2) The piece or capsule has at least one dimension not less than 5 
mm (0.2 inch); and
    (3) It satisfies the test requirements of Sec. 173.469. Special form 
encapsulations designed in accordance with the requirements of 
Sec. 173.389(g) in effect on

[[Page 601]]

June 30, 1983 (see 49 CFR part 173, revised as of October 1, 1982), and 
constructed prior to July 1, 1985 and special form encapsulations 
designed in accordance with the requirements of Sec. 173.403 in effect 
on March 31, 1996 (see 49 CFR part 173, revised as of October 1, 1995), 
and constructed prior to April 1, 1997, may continue to be used. Any 
other special form encapsulation must meet the requirements of this 
paragraph.
    Specific activity of a radionuclide means the activity of the 
radionuclide per unit mass of that nuclide. The specific activity of a 
material in which the radionuclide is essentially uniformly distributed 
is the activity per unit mass of the material.
    Surface Contaminated Object (SCO) means a solid object which is not 
itself radioactive but which has Class 7 (radioactive) material 
distributed on any of its surfaces. SCO must be in one of two groups 
with surface activity not exceeding the following limits:
    (1) SCO-I: A solid object on which:
    (i) The non-fixed contamination on the accessible surface averaged 
over 300 cm2 (or the area of the surface if less than 300 
cm2) does not exceed 4 Bq/cm2 (10-4 
microcurie/cm2) for beta and gamma and low toxicity alpha 
emitters, or 0.4 Bq/cm2 (10-5 microcurie/
cm2) for alpha emitters;
    (ii) The fixed contamination on the accessible surface averaged over 
300 cm2 (or the area of the surface if less than 300 
cm2) does not exceed 4 x 104 Bq/cm2 
(1.0 microcurie/cm2) for beta and gamma and low toxicity 
alpha emitters, or 4 x 103 Bq/cm2 (0.1 microcurie/
cm2) for all other alpha emitters; and
    (iii) The non-fixed contamination plus the fixed contamination on 
the inaccessible surface averaged over 300 cm2 (or the area 
of the surface if less than 300 cm2) does not exceed 4 x 
104 Bq/cm2 (1 microcurie/cm2) for beta 
and gamma and low toxicity alpha emitters, or 4 x 103 Bq/
cm2 (0.1 microcurie/cm2) for all other alpha 
emitters.
    (2) SCO-II: A solid object on which the limits for SCO-I are 
exceeded and on which:
    (i) The non-fixed contamination on the accessible surface averaged 
over 300 cm2 (or the area of the surface if less than 300 
cm2) does not exceed 400 Bq/cm2 (10-2 
microcurie/cm2) for beta and gamma and low toxicity alpha 
emitters or 40 Bq/cm2 (10-3 microcurie/
cm2) for all other alpha emitters;
    (ii) The fixed contamination on the accessible surface averaged over 
300 cm2 (or the area of the surface if less than 300 
cm2) does not exceed 8 x 105 Bq/cm2 (20 
microcurie/cm2) for beta and gamma and low toxicity alpha 
emitters, or 8 x 104 Bq/cm2 (2 microcuries/
cm2) for all other alpha emitters; and
    (iii) The non-fixed contamination plus the fixed contamination on 
the inaccessible surface averaged over 300 cm2 (or the area 
of the surface if less than 300 cm2) does not exceed 8 x 
105 Bq/cm2 (20 microcuries/cm2) for 
beta and gamma and low toxicity alpha emitters, or 8 x 104 
Bq/cm2 (2 microcuries/cm2) for all other alpha 
emitters.
    Transport index (TI) means the dimensionless number (rounded up to 
the next tenth) placed on the label of a package to designate the degree 
of control to be exercised by the carrier during transportation. The 
transport index is determined as follows:
    (1) For nonfissile material packages, the number determined by 
multiplying the maximum radiation level in milliSievert(s) per hour at 1 
m (3.3 feet) from the external surface of the package by 100 (equivalent 
to the maximum radiation level in millirem per hour at 1 m (3.3 feet)); 
or
    (2) For fissile material packages, the number determined by 
multiplying the maximum radiation level in milliSievert per hour at 1 m 
(3.3 feet) from any external surface of the package by 100 (equivalent 
to the maximum radiation level in millirem per hour at 1 m (3.3 feet)) 
or, for criticality control purposes, the number obtained by dividing 50 
by the allowable number of packages which may be transported together, 
whichever number is larger.
    Type A quantity means a quantity of Class 7 (radioactive) material, 
the aggregate radioactivity which does not exceed A1 for 
special form Class 7 (radioactive) material or A2 for normal 
form Class 7 (radioactive) material, where A1 and 
A2 values are given in

[[Page 602]]

Sec. 173.435 or are determined in accordance with Sec. 173.433.
    Type B quantity means a quantity of material greater than a Type A 
quantity.
    Unilateral approval means approval of a package solely by the 
competent authority of the country of origin.
    Unirradiated thorium means thorium containing not more than 
10-7 grams uranium-233 per gram of thorium-232.
    Unirradiated uranium means uranium containing not more than 
10-6 grams plutonium per gram of uranium-235 and a fission 
product activity of not more than 9 MBq (0.24 millicuries) of fission 
products per gram of uranium-235.
    Uranium--natural, depleted or enriched means the following:
    (1) ``Natural uranium'' means uranium with the naturally occurring 
distribution of uranium isotopes (approximately 0.711 weight percent 
uranium-235, and the remainder essentially uranium-238).
    (2) ``Depleted uranium'' means uranium containing less uranium-235 
than the naturally occurring distribution of uranium isotopes.
    (3) ``Enriched uranium'' means uranium containing more uranium-235 
than the naturally occurring distribution of uranium isotopes.

[Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended by Amdt. 173-
244, 61 FR 20750, May 8, 1996; 63 FR 52849, Oct. 1, 1998; 65 FR 58630, 
Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45380, 45383, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.410  General design requirements.

    In addition to the requirements of subparts A and B of this part, 
each package used for the shipment of Class 7 (radioactive) materials 
must be designed so that--
    (a) The package can be easily handled and properly secured in or on 
a conveyance during transport.
    (b) Each lifting attachment that is a structural part of the package 
must be designed with a minimum safety factor of three against yielding 
when used to lift the package in the intended manner, and it must be 
designed so that failure of any lifting attachment under excessive load 
would not impair the ability of the package to meet other requirements 
of this subpart. Any other structural part of the package which could be 
used to lift the package must be capable of being rendered inoperable 
for lifting the package during transport or must be designed with 
strength equivalent to that required for lifting attachments.
    (c) The external surface, as far as practicable, will be free from 
protruding features and will be easily decontaminated.
    (d) The outer layer of packaging will avoid, as far as practicable, 
pockets or crevices where water might collect.
    (e) Each feature that is added to the package will not reduce the 
safety of the package.
    (f) The package will be capable of withstanding the effects of any 
acceleration, vibration or vibration resonance that may arise under 
normal conditions of transport without any deterioration in the 
effectiveness of the closing devices on the various receptacles or in 
the integrity of the package as a whole and without loosening or 
unintentionally releasing the nuts, bolts, or other securing devices 
even after repeated use (see Secs. 173.24, 173.24a, and 173.24b).
    (g) The materials of construction of the packaging and any 
components or structure will be physically and chemically compatible 
with each other and with the package contents. The behavior of the 
packaging and the package contents under irradiation will be taken into 
account.
    (h) All valves through which the package contents could escape will 
be protected against unauthorized operation.
    (i) For transport by air--
    (1) The temperature of the accessible surfaces of the package will 
not exceed 50  deg.C (122  deg.F) at an ambient temperature of 38  deg.C 
(100  deg.F) with no account taken for insulation;
    (2) The integrity of containment will not be impaired if the package 
is exposed to ambient temperatures ranging from -40  deg.C (-40  deg.F) 
to +55  deg.C (131  deg.F); and
    (3) Packages containing liquid contents will be capable of 
withstanding, without leakage, an internal pressure that produces a 
pressure differential of not less than 95 kPa (13.8 lb/in\2\).

[Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended by Amdt. 173-
244, 61 FR 20750, May 8, 1996; 64 FR 51919, Sept. 27, 1999]

[[Page 603]]



Sec. 173.411  Industrial packagings.

    (a) General. Each industrial packaging must comply with the 
requirements of this section which specifies packaging tests, and record 
retention applicable to Industrial Packaging Type 1 (IP-1), Industrial 
Packaging Type 2 (IP-2), and Industrial Packaging Type 3 (IP-3).
    (b) Industrial packaging certification and tests. (1) Each IP-1 must 
meet the general design requirements prescribed in Sec. 173.410.
    (2) Each IP-2 must meet the general design requirements prescribed 
in Sec. 173.410 and when subjected to the tests specified in 
Sec. 173.465 (c) and (d) or evaluated against these tests by any of the 
methods authorized by Sec. 173.461(a), must prevent:
    (i) Loss or dispersal of the radioactive contents; and
    (ii) A significant increase in the radiation levels recorded or 
calculated at the external surfaces for the condition before the test.
    (3) Each IP-3 packaging must meet the requirements for an IP-1 and 
an IP-2, and must meet the requirements specified in Sec. 173.412(a) 
through Sec. 173.412(j).
    (4) Each specification IM 101 or IM 102 portable tank 
(Secs. 178.270, 178.271, 178.272 of this subchapter) that is certified 
as meeting the requirements for an IP-2 or IP-3 must:
    (i) Satisfy the requirements for IP-2 or IP-3, respectively;
    (ii) Be capable of withstanding a test pressure of 265 kPa (37.1 
psig) gauge;
    (iii) Be designed so that any added shielding is capable of 
withstanding the static and dynamic stresses resulting from normal 
handling and normal conditions of transport; and
    (iv) Be designed so that loss of shielding will not result in a 
significant increase in the radiation levels recorded at the external 
surfaces.
    (5) Each freight container that is certified as meeting the 
requirements of IP-2 or IP-3, must--
    (i) Satisfy the requirements for IP-2 or IP-3, respectively;
    (ii) Be designed to conform to the requirements of ISO 1496-3-
1995(E), ``Series 1 Freight Containers--Specifications and Testing--Part 
3: Tank Containers for Liquids, Gases and Pressurized Dry Bulk'';
    (iii) Be designed so that loss of shielding will not result in a 
significant increase in the radiation levels recorded at the external 
surfaces if they are subjected to the tests specified in ISO 1496/1-
1995(E); and
    (iv) For international transportation, have a safety approval plate 
in conformance with 49 CFR 451.21 through 451.25.
    (c) Except for IP-1 packagings, each offeror of an industrial 
package must maintain on file for at least one year after the latest 
shipment, and shall provide to the Associate Administrator on request, 
complete documentation of tests and an engineering evaluation or 
comparative data showing that the construction methods, packaging 
design, and materials of construction comply with that specification.

[Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended by Amdt. 173-
244, 61 FR 20750, May 8, 1996; 66 FR 45379, 45383, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.412  Additional design requirements for Type A packages.

    In addition to meeting the general design requirements prescribed in 
Sec. 173.410, each Type A packaging must be designed so that--
    (a) The outside of the packaging incorporates a feature, such as a 
seal, that is not readily breakable, and that, while intact, is evidence 
that the package has not been opened. In the case of packages shipped in 
closed transport vehicles in exclusive use, the cargo compartment, 
instead of the individual packages, may be sealed.
    (b) The smallest external dimension of the package is not less than 
10 cm (4 inches).
    (c) Containment and shielding is maintained during transportation 
and storage in a temperature range of -40  deg.C (-40  deg.F) to 70 
deg.C (158  deg.F). Special attention shall be given to liquid contents 
and to the potential degradation of the packaging materials within the 
temperature range.
    (d) The packaging must include a containment system securely closed 
by a positive fastening device that cannot be opened unintentionally or 
by pressure that may arise within the package during normal transport. 
Special form

[[Page 604]]

Class 7 (radioactive) material, as demonstrated in accordance with 
Sec. 173.469, may be considered as a component of the containment 
system. If the containment system forms a separate unit of the package, 
it must be securely closed by a positive fastening device that is 
independent of any other part of the package.
    (e) For each component of the containment system account is taken, 
where applicable, of radiolytic decomposition of materials and the 
generation of gas by chemical reaction and radiolysis.
    (f) The containment system will retain its radioactive contents 
under the reduction of ambient pressure to 25 kPa (3.6 psi).
    (g) Each valve, other than a pressure relief device, is provided 
with an enclosure to retain any leakage.
    (h) Any radiation shield that encloses a component of the packaging 
specified as part of the containment system will prevent the 
unintentional escape of that component from the shield.
    (i) Failure of any tie-down attachment that is a structural part of 
the packaging, under both normal and accident conditions, must not 
impair the ability of the package to meet other requirements of this 
subpart.
    (j) When evaluated against the performance requirements of this 
section and the tests specified in Sec. 173.465 or using any of the 
methods authorized by Sec. 173.461(a), the packaging will prevent--
    (1) Loss or dispersal of the radioactive contents; and
    (2) A significant increase in the radiation levels recorded or 
calculated at the external surfaces for the condition before the test.
    (k) Each packaging designed for liquids will--
    (1) Be designed to provide for ullage to accommodate variations in 
temperature of the contents, dynamic effects and filling dynamics;
    (2) Meet the conditions prescribed in paragraph (j) of this section 
when subjected to the tests specified in Sec. 173.466 or evaluated 
against these tests by any of the methods authorized by Sec. 173.461(a); 
and
    (3) Either--
    (i) Have sufficient suitable absorbent material to absorb twice the 
volume of the liquid contents. The absorbent material must be compatible 
with the package contents and suitably positioned to contact the liquid 
in the event of leakage; or
    (ii) Have a containment system composed of primary inner and 
secondary outer containment components designed to assure retention of 
the liquid contents within the secondary outer component in the event 
that the primary inner component leaks.
    (l) Each package designed for gases, other than tritium not 
exceeding 40 TBq (1000Ci) or noble gases not exceeding the A2 
value appropriate for the noble gas, will be able to prevent loss or 
dispersal of contents when the package is subjected to the tests 
prescribed in Sec. 173.466 or evaluated against these tests by any of 
the methods authorized by Sec. 173.461(a).

[Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended by 66 FR 45379, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.413  Requirements for Type B packages.

    Except as provided in Sec. 173.416, each Type B(U) or Type B(M) 
package must be designed and constructed to meet the applicable 
requirements specified in 10 CFR part 71.



Sec. 173.415  Authorized Type A packages.

    The following packages are authorized for shipment if they do not 
contain quantities exceeding A1 or A2 as 
appropriate:
    (a) DOT Specification 7A (Sec. 178.350 of this subchapter) Type A 
general packaging. Each offeror of a Specification 7A package must 
maintain on file for at least one year after the latest shipment, and 
shall provide to DOT on request, complete documentation of tests and an 
engineering evaluation or comparative data showing that the construction 
methods, packaging design, and materials of construction comply with 
that specification. Use of Specification 7A packagings designed in 
accordance with the requirements of Sec. 178.350 of this subchapter in 
effect on June 30, 1983 (see 49 CFR part 178 revised as of October 1, 
1982), is not authorized after April 1, 1997.

[[Page 605]]

    (b) Any other Type A packaging that also meets the applicable 
standards for fissile materials in 10 CFR part 71 and is used in 
accordance with Sec. 173.471.
    (c) Any Type B, B(U) or B(M) packaging authorized pursuant to 
Sec. 173.416.
    (d) Any foreign-made packaging that meets the standards in IAEA 
``Safety Series No. 6'' (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 171.7 of 
this subchapter) and bears the marking ``Type A'' and was used for the 
import of Class 7 (radioactive) materials. Such packagings may be 
subsequently used for domestic and export shipments of Class 7 
(radioactive) materials provided the offeror obtains the applicable 
documentation of tests and engineering evaluations and maintains the 
documentation on file in accordance with paragraph (a) of this section. 
These packagings must conform with requirements of the country of origin 
(as indicated by the packaging marking) and the IAEA regulations 
applicable to Type A packagings.

[Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended at 67 FR 61014, 
Sept. 27, 2002]



Sec. 173.416  Authorized Type B packages.

    Each of the following packages is authorized for shipment of 
quantities exceeding A1 or A2, as appropriate:
    (a) Any Type B, Type B(U) or Type B(M) packaging that meets the 
applicable requirements of 10 CFR part 71 and that has been approved by 
the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission may be shipped pursuant to 
Sec. 173.471.
    (b) Any Type B, B(U) or B(M) packaging that meets the applicable 
requirements of the regulations of the International Atomic Energy 
Agency (IAEA) in its ``Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive 
Material, Safety Series No. 6'' (incorporated by reference, see 
Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter) and for which the foreign competent 
authority certificate has been revalidated by DOT pursuant to 
Sec. 173.473. These packagings are authorized only for export and import 
shipments.
    (c) DOT Specification 6M (Sec. 178.354 of this subchapter) metal 
packaging, only for solid or gaseous Class 7 (radioactive) materials 
that will not undergo pressure-generating decomposition at temperatures 
up to 121  deg.C (250  deg.F) and that do not generate more than 10 
watts of radioactive decay heat.
    (d) For contents in other than special form; DOT Specification 20WC 
(Sec. 178.362 of this subchapter), wooden protective jacket, when used 
with a single, snug-fitting inner DOT Specification 2R (Sec. 178.360 of 
this subchapter). For liquid contents, the inner packaging must conform 
to Sec. 173.412(j) and (k).
    (e) For contents in special form only; DOT Specification 20WC 
(Sec. 178.362 of this subchapter), wooden protective jacket, with a 
single snug-fitting inner Type A packaging that has a metal outer wall 
and conforms to Sec. 178.350 of this subchapter. Radioactive decay heat 
may not exceed 100 watts.
    (f) For contents in special form only; DOT Specification 21WC 
(Sec. 178.364 of this subchapter), wooden protective overpack, with a 
single inner DOT Specification 2R (Sec. 178.360 of this subchapter). 
Contents must be loaded within the inner packaging in such a manner as 
to prevent loose movement during transportation. The inner packaging 
must be securely positioned and centered within the overpack so that 
there will be no significant displacement of the inner packaging if the 
overpack containing it is subjected to the 9 m (30 feet) drop test 
described in 10 CFR part 71.

[Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended by 63 FR 52849, 
Oct. 1, 1998; 66 FR 45380, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 61014, Sept. 27, 2002]



Sec. 173.417  Authorized fissile materials packages.

    (a) Except as provided in Sec. 173.453, fissile materials containing 
not more than A1 or A2 as appropriate, must be 
packaged in one of the following packagings:
    (1) DOT Specification 6L (Sec. 178.352 of this subchapter), metal 
packaging, for materials prescribed in paragraph (b)(1) of this section.
    (2) DOT Specification 6M (Sec. 178.354 of this subchapter), metal 
packaging, for materials prescribed in paragraph (b)(2) of this section.
    (3) Any packaging listed in Sec. 173.415, limited to the Class 7 
(radioactive) materials specified in 10 CFR part 71, subpart C.
    (4) Any other Type A or Type B, Type B(U), or Type B(M) packaging 
for

[[Page 606]]

fissile Class 7 (radioactive) materials that also meets the applicable 
standards for fissile materials in 10 CFR part 71.
    (5) Any other Type A or Type B, Type B(U), or Type B(M) packaging 
that also meets the applicable requirements for fissile material 
packaging in Section V of the International Atomic Energy Agency 
``Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material, Safety 
Series No. 6,'' (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 171.7 of this 
subchapter), and for which the foreign competent authority certificate 
has been revalidated by the U.S. Competent Authority, in accordance with 
Sec. 173.473. These packages are authorized only for export and import 
shipments.
    (6) A 55-gallon 1A2 steel drum, meeting the applicable packaging 
testing requirements of subpart M of part 178 of this subchapter at the 
packing group I performance level, subject to the following conditions:
    (i) The quantity may not exceed 350 grams of uranium-235 in any non-
pyrophoric form, enriched to any degree in the uranium-235 isotope;
    (ii) Each drum must have a minimum 18 gauge body and bottom head and 
16 gauge removable top head with one or more corrugations in the cover 
near the periphery;
    (iii) Closure must conform to Sec. 178.352 of this subchapter;
    (iv) At least four equally spaced 12 mm (0.5 inch) diameter vent 
holes must be provided on the sides of the drum near the top, each 
covered with weatherproof tape; or equivalent device;
    (v) Appropriate primary, inner containment of the contents and 
sufficient packaging material, such as plastic or metal jars or cans, 
must be provided such that Specification 7A (Sec. 178.350 of this 
subchapter) provisions are satisfied by the inner packaging;
    (vi) Each inner container must be capable of venting if subjected to 
the thermal test described in 10 CFR part 71;
    (vii) Liquid contents must be packaged in accordance with 
Sec. 173.412 (j) and (k); and
    (viii) The maximum weight of contents, including internal packaging, 
may not exceed 91 kg (200 pounds) with fissile material content limited 
as shown in table 2:

                     Table 2--Fissile Material Content and Transport Index for UN1A2 Package
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
               Maximum quantity and minimum transport index                  Maximum No. of packages transported
---------------------------------------------------------------------------   as a fissile material controlled
      U-235 per package (grams)        Minimum transport index per package                shipment
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                          350                                   1.8                                    72
                          300                                   1.0                                   129
                          250                                   0.5                                   256
                          200                                   0.3                                   500
                          150                                   0.1                                   500
                          100                                   0.1                                   500
                           50                                 (\1\)                                 (\2\)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Transport index is limited by the external radiation levels.
\2\ Maximum number is limited by the total transport index.

    (7) Any metal cylinder that meets the requirements of Sec. 173.415 
and Sec. 178.350 of this subchapter for Specification 7A Type A 
packaging may be used for the transport of residual ``heels'' of 
enriched solid uranium hexafluoride without a protective overpack in 
accordance with table 3, as follows:

[[Page 607]]



        Table 3--Allowable Content of Uranium Hexafluoride (UF6) ``Heels'' in a Specification 7A Cylinder
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Maximum cylinder          Cylinder volume         Maximum          Maximum ``Heel'' weight per cylinder
        diameter         -------------------------  uranium-235 ------------------------------------------------
-------------------------                           enrichment             UF6                  Uranium-235
                            Liters     Cubic feet     (weight   ------------------------------------------------
     Cm         Inches                               percent)         kg          lb          kg          lb
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
      12.7            5         8.8        0.311        100.0         0.045         0.1       0.031        0.07
      20.3            8        39.0        1.359         12.5         0.227         0.5       0.019        0.04
      30.5           12        68.0        2.410          5.0         0.454         1.0       0.015        0.03
      76.0           30       725.0       25.64           5.0        11.3          25.0       0.383        0.84
     122.0           48     3,084.0     1108.9            4.5        22.7          50.0       0.690        1.52
     122.0           48     4,041.0     2142.7            4.5        22.7          50.0       0.690        1.52
 
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ 10 ton.
\2\ 14 ton.

    (8) DOT Specification 20PF-1, 20PF-2, or 20PF-3 (Sec. 178.356 of 
this subchapter), or Specification 21PF-1A, 21PF-1B, or 21PF-2 
(Sec. 178.358 of this subchapter) phenolic-foam insulated overpack with 
snug fitting inner metal cylinders, meeting all requirements of 
Secs. 173.24, 173.410, 173.412, and 173.420 and the following:
    (i) Handling procedures and packaging criteria must be in accordance 
with DOE Report ORO-651 or ANSI N14.1 (incorporated by reference, see 
Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).
    (ii) Quantities of uranium hexafluoride are authorized as shown in 
table 6 of this section, with each package assigned a minimum transport 
index as also shown.
    (b) Fissile Class 7 (radioactive) materials with radioactive content 
exceeding A1 or A2 must be packaged in one of the 
following packagings:
    (1) DOT Specification 6L (Sec. 178.352 of this subchapter), metal 
packaging. These packages may contain only uranium-235, plutonium-239, 
or plutonium-241, as metal, oxide, or compounds that do not decompose at 
temperatures up to 149  deg.C (300  deg.F). Radioactive decay heat 
output may not exceed 5 watts. Class 7 (radioactive) materials in normal 
form must be packaged in one or more tightly sealed metal or 
polyethylene bottles within a DOT Specification 2R (Sec. 178.360 of this 
subchapter) containment vessel. Authorized contents are limited in 
accordance with table 4, as follows:

           Table 4--Authorized Contents in Kilograms (kg) and Conditions for Specification 6L Packages
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                            Uranium-235                             Plutonium (Plutonium             Maximum No.
-------------------------------------------------------------------   solutions are not              of packages
                                                                         authorized)       Minimum   transported
                                                                   ----------------------  fissile       as a
                                                            3 H/                          transport    fissile
                      H/X[le]3\1\                         X[le]10              10 [le] H/   index      material
                                                                    H/X[le]10  X [le] 20               control
                                                                                                       shipment
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
14.....................................................    \2\ 3.6  .........  .........        1.3          80
                                                         .........        2.5        2.4        1.8          50
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ H/X is the ratio of hydrogen to fissile atoms in their inner containment with all sources of hydrogen in the
  containment considered.
\2\ Volume not to exceed 3.6 L.

    (2) DOT Specification 6M (Sec. 178.354 of this subchapter), metal 
packaging. These packages must contain only solid Class 7 (radioactive) 
materials that will not decompose at temperatures up to 121  deg.C (250  
deg.F). Radioactive decay heat output may not exceed 10 watts. Class 7 
(radioactive) materials in other than special form must be packaged in 
one or more tightly sealed metal cans or polyethylene bottles

[[Page 608]]

within a DOT Specification 2R (Sec. 178.360 of this subchapter) 
containment vessel.
    (i) For fissile material with a criticality TI equal to 0.0, 
packages are limited to the following amounts of fissile Class 7 
(radioactive) materials: 1.6 kg of uranium-235; 0.9 kg of plutonium 
(except that due to the 10-watt thermal decay heat limitation, the limit 
for plutonium-238 is 0.02 kg); and 0.5 kg of uranium-233. The maximum 
ratio of hydrogen to fissile material may not exceed three, including 
all of the sources of hydrogen within the DOT Specification 2R 
containment vessel.
    (ii) Maximum quantities of fissile material and other restrictions 
for materials with a criticality TI of greater than 0.0 are given in 
table 5. The minimum transport index to be assigned per package and, for 
fissile material, controlled shipments, the allowable number of similar 
packages per conveyance and per transport vehicle are shown in table 5. 
Where a maximum ratio of hydrogen to fissile material is specified in 
table 5, only the hydrogen interspersed with the fissile material must 
be considered. For a uranium-233 shipment, the maximum inside diameter 
of the inner containment vessel may not exceed 12.1 cm (4.75 inches). 
Where necessary, a tight-fitting steel insert must be used to reduce a 
larger diameter inner containment vessel specified in Sec. 178.354 of 
this subchapter to the 12.1 cm (4.75 inch) limit. Table 5 is as follows:

                          Table 5--Authorized Contents for Specification 6M Packages\1\
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
       Uranium-233\5\              Uranium-235\4\,\7\           Plutonium\2\,\3\,\4\                 Maximum no.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------               pkgs.
Metal or       Compounds      Metal or       Compounds      Metal or       Compounds                 transported
  alloy  --------------------   alloy  --------------------   alloy  --------------------  Minimum       as a
---------                    ----------                    ----------                     transport    fissile
                                                                                            index      material
H/X=0\8\    H/X=0   H/X[le]3    H/X=0     H/X=0   H/X[le]3    H/X=0     H/X=0   H/X[le]3               control
                                                                                                       shipment
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
     0.5       0.5       0.5       1.6       1.6       1.6    \9\0.9    \9\0.9    \9\0.9          0         N/A
     3.6       4.4       2.9       7.2       7.6       5.3       3.1       4.1       3.4        0.1       1,250
  \6\4.2       5.2       3.5       8.7       9.6       6.4       3.4       4.5       4.1        0.2         625
  \6\5.2       6.8       4.5      11.2      13.9       8.3       4.2                 4.5        0.5         250
                                  13.5      16.0      10.1       4.5                            1.0         125
                                            26.0      16.1                                      5.0          25
                                            32.0      19.5                                     10.0          12
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Quantity in kg.
\2\ Minimum percentage of plutonium-240 is 5 weight percent.
\3\ 4.5 kg limitation of plutonium due to watt decay heat limitation.
\4\ For a mixture of uranium-235 and plutonium an equal amount of uranium-235 may be substituted for any portion
  of the plutonium authorized.
\5\ Maximum inside diameter of specification 2R containment vessel not to exceed 12.1 cm (4.75 inches) (see
  paragraph (b)(2)(ii) of this section).
\6\ Granulated or powdered metal with any particle less than 6.4 mm (0.25 inch) in the smallest dimension is not
  authorized.
7 Except for material with a criticality TI of 0.0, the maximum permitted uranium-235 enrichment is 93.5
  percent.
\8\ H/X is the ratio of hydrogen to fissile atoms in the inner containment.
\9\ For Pu-238, the limit is 0.02 kg because of the 10 watt thermal decay heat limitation.

    (3) Type B, or Type B(U), or B(M) packaging that meets the standards 
for packaging of fissile materials in 10 CFR part 71, and is approved by 
the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission and used in accordance with 
Sec. 173.471.
    (4) Type B, B(U), or B(M) packaging that meets the applicable 
requirements for fissile Class 7 (radioactive) materials in Section V of 
the IAEA ``Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material, 
Safety Series No. 6'' (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 171.7 of this 
subchapter), and for which the foreign competent authority certificate 
has been revalidated by the U.S. Competent Authority in accordance with 
Sec. 173.473. These packagings are authorized only for import and export 
shipments.
    (5) DOT Specifications 20PF-1, 20PF-2, or 20PF-3 (Sec. 178.356 of 
this subchapter), or DOT Specifications 21PF-1A or 21PF-1B (Sec. 178.358 
of this subchapter) phenolic-foam insulated overpack with snug fitting 
inner metal cylinders, meeting all requirements of Secs. 173.24, 
173.410, and 173.412, and the following:

[[Page 609]]

    (i) Handling procedures and packaging criteria must be in accordance 
with DOE Report ORO-651 or ANSI N14.1; and
    (ii) Quantities of uranium hexafluoride are authorized as shown in 
table 6, with each package assigned a minimum transport index as also 
shown:

                             Table 6--Authorized Quantities of Uranium Hexafluoride
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                   Maximum inner       Maximum weight of   Maximum U-
                                                 cylinder diameter       UF6 contents          235      Minimum
   Protective overpack specification number   -------------------------------------------- enrichment  transport
                                                                                            (weight/     index
                                                   Cm       Inches   Kilograms    Pounds    percent)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
20PF-1.......................................       12.7          5         25         55       100.0        0.1
20PF-2.......................................       20.3          8        116        255        12.5        0.4
20PF-3.......................................       30.5         12        209        460         5.0        1.1
21PF-1A 1 or 21PF-1B 1.......................     2 76.0       2 30      2,250      4,950         5.0        5.0
21PF-1A 1 or 21PF-1B 1.......................      376.0        330      2,282      5,020         5.0        5.0
21PF-2 1.....................................     2 76.0       2 30      2,250      4,950         5.0        5.0
21PF-2 1.....................................     3 76.0       3 30      2,282      5,020         5.0        5.0
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ For 76 cm (30 in) cylinders, the maximum H/U atomic ratio is 0.088.
\2\ Model 30A inner cylinder (reference ORO-651).
\3\ Model 30B inner cylinder (reference ORO-651).


[Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended by Amdt. 173-
244, 61 FR 20750, May 8, 1996; 65 FR 58630, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45380, 
Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 61014, Sept. 27, 2002]



Sec. 173.418  Authorized packages--pyrophoric Class 7 (radioactive) materials.

    Pyrophoric Class 7 (radioactive) materials, as referenced in the 
Sec. 172.101 table of this subchapter, in quantities not exceeding 
A2 per package must be transported in DOT Specification 7A 
packagings constructed of materials that will not react with, nor be 
decomposed by, the contents. Contents of the package must be--
    (a) In solid form and must not be fissile unless excepted by 
Sec. 173.453;
    (b) Contained in sealed and corrosion resistant receptacles with 
positive closures (friction or slip-fit covers or stoppers are not 
authorized);
    (c) Free of water and contaminants that would increase the 
reactivity of the material; and
    (d) Inerted to prevent self-ignition during transport by either--
    (1) Mixing with large volumes of inerting materials, such as 
graphite, dry sand, or other suitable inerting material, or blended into 
a matrix of hardened concrete; or
    (2) Filling the innermost receptacle with an appropriate inert gas 
or liquid.



Sec. 173.419  Authorized packages--oxidizing Class 7 (radioactive) materials.

    (a) An oxidizing Class 7 (radioactive) material, as referenced in 
the Sec. 172.101 table of this subchapter, is authorized in quantities 
not exceeding an A2 per package, in a DOT Specification 7A 
package provided that--
    (1) The contents are:
    (i) Not fissile;
    (ii) Packed in inside packagings of glass, metal or compatible 
plastic; and
    (iii) Cushioned with a material that will not react with the 
contents; and
    (2) The outside packaging is made of wood, metal, or plastic.
    (b) The package must be capable of meeting the applicable test 
requirements of Sec. 173.465 without leakage of contents.
    (c) For shipment by air, the maximum quantity in any package may not 
exceed 11.3 kg (25 pounds).

[Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended at 66 FR 45380, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.420  Uranium hexafluoride (fissile, fissile excepted and non-fissile).

    (a) In addition to any other applicable requirements of this 
subchapter, uranium hexafluoride, fissile, fissile excepted or non-
fissile, must be offered for transportation as follows:

[[Page 610]]

    (1) Before initial filling and during periodic inspection and test, 
packagings must be cleaned in accordance with American National Standard 
N14.1.
    (2) Packagings must be designed, fabricated, inspected, tested and 
marked in accordance with--
    (i) American National Standard N14.1 (2001, 1995, 1990, 1987, 1982, 
1971) (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter) in 
effect at the time the packaging was manufactured;
    (ii) Specifications for Class DOT-106A multi-unit tank car tanks 
(Secs. 179.300 and 179.301 of this subchapter); or
    (iii) Section VIII, Division I of the ASME Code (incorporated by 
reference, see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter), provided the packaging --
    (A) Was manufactured on or before June 30, 1987;
    (B) Conforms to the edition of the ASME Code in effect at the time 
the packaging was manufactured;
    (C) Is used within its original design limitations; and
    (D) Has shell and head thicknesses that have not decreased below the 
minimum value specified in the following table:
     

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                          Minimum thickness; millimeters
             Packaging model                         (inches)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1S, 2S..................................   1.58 (0.062)
5A, 5B, 8A..............................   3.17 (0.125)
12A, 12B................................   4.76 (0.187)
30B.....................................   7.93 (0.312)
48A, F, X, and Y........................   12.70 (0.500)
48T, O, OM, OM Allied, HX, H, AND G.....   6.35 (0.250)
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (3) Uranium hexafluoride must be in solid form.
    (4) The volume of solid uranium hexafluoride, except solid depleted 
uranium hexafluoride, at 20  deg.C (68  deg.F) may not exceed 61% of the 
certified volumetric capacity of the packaging. The volume of solid 
depleted uranium hexafluoride at 20  deg.C (68  deg.F) may not exceed 
62% of the certified volumetric capacity of the packaging.
    (5) The pressure in the package at 20  deg.C (68  deg.F) must be 
less than 101.3 kPa (14.8 psia).
    (b) Packagings for uranium hexafluoride must be periodically 
inspected, tested, marked and otherwise conform with the latest 
incorporated edition of ANSI N14.1 (incorporated by reference, see 
Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).
    (c) Each repair to a packaging for uranium hexafluoride must be 
performed in accordance with the latest incorporated edition of ANSI 
N14.1 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).

[Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended at 67 FR 61014, 
Sept. 27, 2002]



Sec. 173.421  Excepted packages for limited quantities of Class 7 (radioactive) materials.

    (a) A Class 7 (radioactive) material whose activity per package does 
not exceed the limits specified in Sec. 173.425 and its packaging are 
excepted from the specification packaging, marking, labeling and, if not 
a hazardous substance or hazardous waste, the shipping paper and 
certification requirements of this subchapter and requirements of this 
subpart if:
    (1) Each package meets the general design requirements of 
Sec. 173.410;
    (2) The radiation level at any point on the external surface of the 
package does not exceed 0.005 mSv/hour (0.5 mrem/ hour);
    (3) The nonfixed (removable) radioactive surface contamination on 
the external surface of the package does not exceed the limits specified 
in Sec. 173.443(a);
    (4) The outside of the inner packaging or, if there is no inner 
packaging, the outside of the packaging itself bears the marking 
``Radioactive'';
    (5) Except as provided in Sec. 173.426, the package does not contain 
more than 15 grams of uranium-235; and
    (6) The material is otherwise prepared for shipment as specified in 
accordance with Sec. 173.422.
    (b) A limited quantity of Class 7 (radioactive) material that is a 
hazardous substance or a hazardous waste, is not subject to the 
provisions in Sec. 172.203(d) or Sec. 172.204(c)(4) of this subchapter.



Sec. 173.422  Additional requirements for excepted packages containing Class 7 (radioactive) materials.

    (a) Except for materials subject to the shipping paper requirements 
of subpart C of part 172 of this subchapter,

[[Page 611]]

excepted packages prepared for shipment under the provisions of 
Sec. 173.421, Sec. 173.424, Sec. 173.426, or Sec. 173.428 must be 
certified as being acceptable for transportation by having a notice 
enclosed in or on the package, included with the packing list, or 
otherwise forwarded with the package. This notice must include the name 
of the consignor or consignee and one of the following statements, as 
appropriate:
    (1) ``This package conforms to the conditions and limitations 
specified in 49 CFR 173.421 for radioactive material, excepted package-
limited quantity of material, UN2910'';
    (2) ``This package conforms to the conditions and limitations 
specified in 49 CFR 173.424 for radioactive material, excepted package-
instruments or articles, UN2910'';
    (3) ``This package conforms to the conditions and limitations 
specified in 49 CFR 173.426 for radioactive material, excepted package-
articles manufactured from natural or depleted uranium, or natural 
thorium, UN2910''; or
    (4) ``This package conforms to the conditions and limitations 
specified in 49 CFR 173.428 for radioactive material, excepted package-
empty package, UN2910.''
    (b) An excepted package of Class 7 (radioactive) material that is 
classed as Class 7 and is prepared for shipment under the provisions of 
Sec. 173.421, Sec. 173.423, Sec. 173.424, Sec. 173.426, or Sec. 173.428 
is not subject to the requirements of this subchapter, except for--
    (1) Sections 171.15, 171.16, 174.750 and 176.710 of this subchapter, 
pertaining to the reporting of incidents and decontamination, when 
transported by a mode other than air;
    (2) Sections 171.15, 171.16, and 175.700(b) of this subchapter 
pertaining to the reporting of incidents and decontamination when 
transported by aircraft; and
    (3) The training requirements of subpart H of part 172 of this 
subchapter and, for materials that meet the definition of a hazardous 
substance or a hazardous waste, the shipping paper requirements of 
subpart C of part 172 of this subchapter.

[Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended by Amdt. 173-
244, 61 FR 20751, May 8, 1996; 62 FR 51561, Oct. 1, 1997; 63 FR 52849, 
Oct. 1, 1998]



Sec. 173.423  Requirements for multiple hazard limited quantity Class 7 (radioactive) materials.

    (a) Except as provided in Sec. 173.4, when a limited quantity 
radioactive material meets the definition of another hazard class or 
division, it must be--
    (1) Classed for the additional hazard;
    (2) Packaged to conform with the requirements specified in 
Sec. 173.421(a)(1) through (a)(5) or Sec. 173.424(a) through (g), as 
appropriate; and
    (3) Offered for transportation in accordance with the requirements 
applicable to the hazard for which it is classed.
    (b) A limited quantity Class 7 (radioactive) material which is 
classed other than Class 7 in accordance with this subchapter is 
excepted from the requirements of Secs. 173.422(a), 172.203(d), and 
172.204(c)(4) of this subchapter if the entry ``Limited quantity 
radioactive material'' appears on the shipping paper in association with 
the basic description.



Sec. 173.424  Excepted packages for radioactive instruments and articles.

    A radioactive instrument or article and its packaging is excepted 
from the specification packaging, shipping paper and certification, 
marking and labeling requirements of this subchapter and requirements of 
this subpart, if:
    (a) Each package meets the general design requirements of 
Sec. 173.410;
    (b) The activity of the instrument or article does not exceed the 
relevant limit listed in table 7 in Sec. 173.425;
    (c) The total activity per package does not exceed the relevant 
limit listed in table 7 in Sec. 173.425;
    (d) The radiation level at 10 cm (4 in) from any point on the 
external surface of any unpackaged instrument or article does not exceed 
0.1 mSv/hour (10 mrem/hour);
    (e) The radiation level at any point on the external surface of a 
package

[[Page 612]]

bearing the article or instrument does not exceed 0.005 mSv/hour (0.5 
mrem/hour), or, for exclusive use domestic shipments, 0.02 mSv (2 mrem/
hour);
    (f) The nonfixed (removable) radioactive surface contamination on 
the external surface of the package does not exceed the limits specified 
in Sec. 173.443(a);
    (g) Except as provided in Sec. 173.426, the package does not contain 
more than 15 grams of uranium-235; and
    (h) The package is otherwise prepared for shipment as specified in 
Sec. 173.422.



Sec. 173.425  Table of activity limits--excepted quantities and articles.

    The limits applicable to instruments, articles, and limited 
quantities subject to exceptions under Secs. 173.421 and 173.424 are set 
forth in table 7 as follows:

                   Table 7--Activity Limits for Limited Quantities, Instruments, and Articles
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                           Instruments and articles
                                ---------------------------------------------
       Nature of contents            Limits for each                            Limited quantity package limits
                                  instrument or article   Package limits \1\                  \1\
                                           \1\
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Solids:
    Special form...............  10-2 A1                  A1                  10-3 A1
    Normal form................  10-2 A2                  A2                  10-3 A2
Liquids:
    Tritiated water:
        <0.0037 TBq/L (0.1 Ci/                                                37 TBq (1,000 Ci)
         L).
        0.0037 TBq to 0.037 TBq/                                              3.7 TBq (100 Ci)
         L (0.1 Ci to 1.0 Ci/L).
        0.037 TBq/L                                                0.037 TBq (1.0 Ci)
         (1.0 Ci/L).
    Other Liquids..............  10-3 A2                  10-1 A2             10-4 A2
Gases:
    Tritium \2\................  2 x 10-2 A2              2 x 10-1 A2         2 x 10-2 A2
    Special form...............  10-3 A1                  10-2 A1             10-3 A1
    Normal form................  10-3 A2                  10-2 A2             10-3 A2
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ For mixtures of radionuclides see Sec.  173.433(d).
\2\ These values also apply to tritium in activated luminous paint and tritium adsorbed on solid carriers.


[Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended by Amdt. 173-
244, 61 FR 20751, May 8, 1996; 63 FR 52849, Oct. 1, 1998; 65 FR 58630, 
Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45383, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.426  Excepted packages for articles containing natural uranium or thorium.

    A manufactured article in which the sole Class 7 (radioactive) 
material content is natural or unirradiated depleted uranium or natural 
thorium and its packaging is excepted from the specification packaging, 
shipping paper and certification, marking, and labeling requirements of 
this subchapter and requirements of this subpart if:
    (a) Each package meets the general design requirements of 
Sec. 173.410;
    (b) The outer surface of the uranium or thorium is enclosed in an 
inactive sheath made of metal or other durable protective material;
    (c) The conditions specified in Sec. 173.421(a) (2), (3) and (4) are 
met; and
    (d) The article is otherwise prepared for shipment as specified in 
Sec. 173.422.

[Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended by Amdt. 173-
244, 61 FR 20752, May 8, 1996]



Sec. 173.427  Transport requirements for low specific activity (LSA) Class 7 (radioactive) materials and surface contaminated objects (SCO).

    (a) In addition to other applicable requirements specified in this 
subchapter, low specific activity (LSA) materials and surface 
contaminated objects (SCO), unless excepted by paragraph (d) of this 
section, must be packaged in accordance with paragraph (b) or (c) of 
this section and must be transported in accordance with the following 
conditions:
    (1) The external dose rate must not exceed an external radiation 
level of 10 mSv/h (1 rem/h) at 3 m from the unshielded material;
    (2) The quantity of LSA and SCO material in any single conveyance 
must

[[Page 613]]

not exceed the limits specified in table 9;
    (3) LSA material and SCO that are or contain fissile material must 
meet the applicable requirements of Secs. 173.453, 173.457, 173.459 and 
173.467;
    (4) Packages must meet the contamination control limits specified in 
Sec. 173.443;
    (5) External radiation levels must comply with Sec. 173.441; and
    (6) For LSA material and SCO required by this section to be 
consigned as exclusive use:
    (i) Shipments must be loaded by the consignor and unloaded by the 
consignee from the conveyance or freight container in which originally 
loaded;
    (ii) There must be no loose Class 7 (radioactive) material in the 
conveyance, however, when the conveyance is the packaging there must be 
no leakage of Class 7 (radioactive) material from the conveyance;
    (iii) Packages must be braced so as to prevent shifting of lading 
under conditions normally incident to transportation;
    (iv) Specific instructions for maintenance of exclusive use shipment 
controls must be provided by the offeror to the carrier. Such 
instructions must be included with the shipping paper information;
    (v) Except for shipments of unconcentrated uranium or thorium ores, 
the transport vehicle must be placarded in accordance with subpart F of 
part 172 of this subchapter;
    (vi) For domestic transportation only, packages are excepted from 
the marking and labeling requirements of this subchapter. However, the 
exterior of each nonbulk package must be stenciled or otherwise marked 
``Radioactive--LSA'' or ``Radioactive--SCO'', as appropriate, and 
nonbulk packages that contain a hazardous substance must also be 
stenciled or otherwise marked with the letters ``RQ'' in association 
with the above description; and
    (vii) Except when transported in an industrial package in accordance 
with table 8, transportation by aircraft is prohibited.
    (b) Except as provided in paragraph (c) of this section, LSA 
material and SCO must be packaged as follows:
    (1) In an industrial package (IP-1, IP-2 or IP-3; Sec. 173.411), 
subject to the limitations of table 8;
    (2) For domestic transportation only, in a DOT Specification 7A 
(Sec. 178.350 of this subchapter) Type A package. The requirements of 
Sec. 173.412 (a), (b), (c) and (k) do not apply;
    (3) For domestic transportation only, in a strong, tight package 
that prevents leakage of the radioactive content under normal conditions 
of transport. In addition to the requirements of paragraph (a) of this 
section, the following requirements must be met:
    (i) The shipment must be exclusive use;
    (ii) The quantity of Class 7 (radioactive) material in each 
packaging may not exceed an A2 quantity;
    (4) For domestic transportation only, in a packaging that complies 
with the provisions of 10 CFR 71.52, and is transported in exclusive 
use; or
    (5) Any Type B, B(U) or B(M) packaging authorized pursuant to 
Sec. 173.416.
    (c) LSA-I and SCO-I (see Sec. 173.403), unless packaged in 
accordance with paragraph (b) of this section, must be packaged in bulk 
packagings in accordance with this paragraph. The shipment must be, in 
addition to complying with the applicable requirements of paragraph (a) 
of this section, exclusive use:
    (1) Solids. Packages must be strong tight packagings, meeting the 
requirements of subpart B of this part. The requirements of Sec. 173.410 
do not apply.
    (2) Liquids. Liquids must be transported in the following 
packagings:
    (i) Specification 103CW, 111A60W7 (Secs. 179.200 and 179.201 of this 
subchapter) tank cars. Bottom openings in tanks are prohibited; or
    (ii) Specification MC 310, MC 311, MC 312, MC 331 or DOT 412 
(Sec. 178.348 or Sec. 178.337 of this subchapter) cargo tank motor 
vehicles. Bottom outlets are not authorized. Trailer-on-flat-car service 
is not authorized.
    (d) Except for transportation by aircraft, LSA material and SCO that 
conform to the provisions specified in 10 CFR 20.2005 are excepted from 
all requirements of this subchapter pertaining to Class 7 (radioactive) 
materials when offered for transportation for disposal or recovery. A 
material

[[Page 614]]

which meets the definition of another hazard class is subject to the 
provisions of this subchapter relating to that hazard class.
    (e) LSA and SCO that exceed the packaging limits in this section 
must be packaged in accordance with 10 CFR part 71.
    (f) Tables 8 and 9 are as follows:

 Table 8--Industrial Package Integrity Requirements for LSA Material and
                                   SCO
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                          Industrial packaging type
                                    ------------------------------------
              Contents                Exclusive use    Nonexclusive use
                                         shipment          shipment
------------------------------------------------------------------------
LSA-I:
    Solid..........................  IP-1             IP-1
    Liquid.........................  IP-1             IP-2
LSA-II:
    Solid..........................  IP-2             IP-2
    Liquid and gas.................  IP-2             IP-3
LSA-III............................  IP-2             IP-3
SCO-I..............................  IP-1             IP-1
SCO-II.............................  IP-2             IP-2
------------------------------------------------------------------------


      Table 9--Conveyance Activity Limits for LSA Material and SCO
------------------------------------------------------------------------
           Nature of material             Activity limit for conveyances
------------------------------------------------------------------------
LSA-I..................................  No limit.
LSA-II and LSA-III; noncombustible       No limit.
 solids.
LSA-II and LSA-III; Combustible solids   100 A2
 and all liquids and gases.
SCO....................................  100 A2
------------------------------------------------------------------------


[Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended by Amdt. 173-
244, 61 FR 20752, May 8, 1996; 63 FR 52849, Oct. 1, 1998; 65 FR 58630, 
Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45380, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.428  Empty Class 7 (radioactive) materials packaging.

    A packaging which previously contained Class 7 (radioactive) 
materials and has been emptied of contents as far as practical, is 
excepted from the shipping paper, certification, and marking 
requirements of this subchapter, and from requirements of this chapter, 
provided that--
    (a) The packaging meets the requirements of Sec. 173.421(a) (2), 
(3), and (5) of this subpart;
    (b) The packaging is in unimpaired condition and is securely closed 
so that there will be no leakage of Class 7 (radioactive) material under 
conditions normally incident to transportation;
    (c) Internal contamination does not exceed 100 times the limits in 
Sec. 173.443(a);
    (d) Any labels previously applied in conformance with subpart E of 
part 172 of this subchapter are removed, obliterated, or covered and the 
``Empty'' label prescribed in Sec. 172.450 of this subchapter is affixed 
to the packaging; and
    (e) The packaging is prepared for shipment as specified in 
Sec. 173.422.

[Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended by Amdt. 173-
244, 61 FR 20752, May 8, 1996; 64 FR 51919, Sept. 27, 1999]



Sec. 173.431  Activity limits for Type A and Type B packages.

    (a) Except for LSA material and SCO, a Type A package may not 
contain a quantity of Class 7 (radioactive) materials greater than 
A1 for special form Class 7 (radioactive) material or 
A2 for normal form Class 7 (radioactive) material as listed 
in Sec. 173.435, or, for Class 7 (radioactive) materials not listed in 
Sec. 173.435, as determined in accordance with Sec. 173.433.
    (b) The limits on activity contained in a Type B, Type B(U), or Type 
B(M) package are those prescribed in Secs. 173.416 and 173.417, or in 
the applicable approval certificate under Secs. 173.471, 173.472 or 
173.473.



Sec. 173.433  Requirements for determining A1 and A2 values for radionuclides and for the listing of radionuclides on shipping papers and 
          labels.

    (a) Values of A1 and A2 for individual 
radionuclides that are the basis for many activity limits elsewhere in 
this subchapter are given in the table in Sec. 173.435.
    (b) For individual radionuclides whose identities are known, but 
which are not listed in the table in Sec. 173.435, the determination of 
the values of A1 and A2 requires approval from the 
Associate Administrator except that the values of A1 and 
A2 in table 10 may be used without obtaining approval from 
Associate Administrator.
    (c) In calculating A1 and A2 values for a 
radionuclide not listed in the table in Sec. 173.435, a single 
radioactive decay chain in which the radionuclides are

[[Page 615]]

present in their naturally-occurring proportions, and in which no 
daughter nuclide has a half life either longer than 10 days or longer 
than that of the parent nuclide, will be considered as a single 
radionuclide, and the activity to be taken into account and the 
A1 or A2 value to be applied will be those 
corresponding to the parent nuclide of that chain. Otherwise, the parent 
and daughter nuclides will be considered as a mixture of different 
nuclides.
    (d) Mixtures of radionuclides whose identities and respective 
activities are known, must conform to the following conditions:
    (1) For special form Class 7 (radioactive) material:
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR28SE95.006
    
Where B(i) is the activity of radionuclide i and A1 (i) is 
the A1 value for radionuclide i;

    or
    (2) For other forms of Class 7 (radioactive) material, either--
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR28SE95.007
    
Where B(i) is the activity of radionuclide i and A2(i) is the 
A2 value for radionuclide i;

    or
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR28SE95.008
    
where f(i) is the fraction of activity of nuclide i in the mixture and 
A2(i) is the appropriate A2 value for nuclide i.

    (e) When the identity of each nuclide is known but the individual 
activities of some of the radionuclides are not known, the radionuclides 
may be grouped and the lowest A1 or A2 value, as 
appropriate, for the radionuclides in each group may be used in applying 
the formulas in paragraph (d) of this section. Groups may be based on 
the total alpha activity and the total beta/gamma activity when these 
are known, using the lowest A1 or A2 values for 
the alpha emitters or beta/gamma emitters, respectively.
    (f) Shipping papers and labeling. (1) For mixtures of radionuclides, 
the radionuclides (n) that must be shown on shipping papers and labels 
in accordance with Secs. 172.203 and 172.403 of this subchapter, 
respectively, must be determined on the basis of the following formula:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR28SE95.009

Where n + m represents all the radionuclides in the mixture, m are the 
radionuclides that do not need to be considered, ai is the 
activity of radionuclide i in the mixture, and Ai is the 
A1 or A2 value, as appropriate for radionuclide i.

    (g) Table 10 is as follows:

                                     Table 10--General Values for A1 and A2
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                     A1                         A2
                         Contents                          -----------------------------------------------------
                                                              (TBq)       (Ci)         (TBq)           (Ci)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Only beta or gamma emitting nuclides are known to be              0.2          5            0.02             0.5
 present..................................................
Alpha emitting nuclides are known to be present or no            0.10       2.70          2x10-5       5.41x10-4
 relevant data are available..............................
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

[Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended at 63 FR 52849, 
Oct. 1, 1998; 66 FR 45184, 45379, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.434  Activity-mass relationships for uranium and natural thorium.

    The table of activity-mass relationships for uranium and natural 
thorium are as follows:

[[Page 616]]



----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                               Specific activity
     Thorium and uranium enrichment1(Wt% 235 U present)      ---------------------------------------------------
                                                                TBq/gram    Grams/Tbq     Ci/gram      Grams/Ci
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0.45 (depleted).............................................     1.9x10-8      5.4x107     5.0x10-7      2.0x106
0.72 (natural)..............................................     2.6x10-8      3.8x107     7.1x10-7      1.4x106
1.0.........................................................     2.8x10-8      3.6x107     7.6x10-7      1.3x106
1.5.........................................................     3.7x10-8      2.7x107     1.0x10-6      1.0x106
5.0.........................................................     1.0x10-7      1.0x107     2.7x10-6      3.7x105
10.0........................................................     1.8x10-7      5.6x106     4.8x10-6      2.1x105
20.0........................................................     3.7x10-7      2.7x106     1.0x10-5      1.0x105
35.0........................................................     7.4x10-7      1.4x106     2.0x10-5      5.0x104
50.0........................................................     9.3x10-7      1.1x106     2.5x10-5      4.0x104
90.0........................................................     2.1x10-6      4.7x105     5.8x10-5      1.7x104
93.0........................................................     2.6x10-6      3.9x105     7.0x10-5      1.4x104
95.0........................................................     3.4x10-6      3.0x105     9.1x10-5      1.1x104
Natural thorium.............................................     8.1x10-9      1.2x108     2.2x10-7      4.6x106
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ The figures for uranium include representative values for the activity of uranium-234 which is concentrated
  during the enrichment process. The activity for thorium includes the equilibrium concentration of thorium-228.

[Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended by 63 FR 52849, 
Oct. 1, 1998]



Sec. 173.435  Table of A1 and A2 values for radionuclides.

    The table of A1 and A2 values for 
radionuclides is as follows:

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                                                               Specific activity
     Symbol of radionuclide      Element and atomic     A1 (TBq)         A1 (Ci)         A2 (TBq)          A2 (Ci)    ----------------------------------
                                       number                                                                               (TBq/g)           (Ci/g)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ac-225.........................  Actinium(89)......  0.6             16.2            1x10-2            0.270           2.1x103           5.8x104
Ac-227.........................                      40              1080            2x10-5            5.41x10-4       2.7               7.2x101
Ac-228.........................                      0.6             16.2            0.4               10.8            8.4x104           2.2x106
Ag-105.........................  Silver(47)........  2               54.1            2                 54.1            1.1x103           3.0x104
Ag-108m........................                      0.6             16.2            0.6               16.2            9.7x10-1          2.6x101
Ag-110m........................  ..................  0.4             10.8            0.4               10.8            1.8x102           4.7x103
Ag-111.........................                      0.6             16.2            0.5               13.5            5.8x103           1.6x105
Al-26..........................  Aluminum(13)......  0.4             10.8            0.4               10.8            7.0x10-4          1.9x10-2
Am-241.........................  Americium(95).....  2               54.1            2x10-4            5.41x10-3       1.3x10-1          3.4
Am-242m........................  ..................  2               54.1            2x10-4            5.41x10-3       3.6x10-1          1.0x101
Am-243.........................                      2               54.1            2x10-4            5.41x10-3       7.4x10-3          2.0x10-1
Ar-37..........................  Argon(18).........  40              1080            40                1080            3.7x103           9.9x104
Ar-39..........................  ..................  20              541             20                541             1.3               3.4x101
Ar-41..........................                      0.6             16.2            0.6               16.2            1.5x106           4.2x107
Ar-42..........................                      0.2             5.41            0.2               5.41            9.6               2.6x102
As-72..........................  Arsenic(33).......  0.2             5.41            0.2               5.41            6.2x104           1.7x106
As-73..........................                      40              1080            40                1080            8.2x102           2.2x104
As-74..........................                      1               27.0            0.5               13.5            3.7x103           9.9x104
As-76..........................                      0.2             5.41            0.2               5.41            5.8x104           1.6x106
As-77..........................                      20              541             0.5               13.5            3.9x104           1.0x106
At-211.........................  Astatine(85)......  30              811             2                 54.1            7.6x104           2.1x106
Au-193.........................  Gold(79)..........  6               162             6                 162             3.4x104           9.2x105
Au-194.........................                      1               27.0            1                 27.0            1.5x104           4.1x105
Au-195.........................                      10              270             10                270             1.4x102           3.7x103
Au-196.........................                      2               54.1            2                 54.1            4.0x103           1.1x105
Au-198.........................                      3               81.1            0.5               13.5            9.0x103           2.4x105
Au-199.........................                      10              270             0.9               24.3            7.7x103           2.1x105
Ba-131.........................  Barium(56)........  2               54.1            2                 54.1            3.1x103           8.4x104
Ba-133m........................                      10              270             0.9               24.3            2.2x104           6.1x105
Ba-133.........................                      3               81.1            3                 81.1            9.4               2.6x102
Ba-140.........................                      0.4             10.8            0.4               10.8            2.7x103           7.3x104
Be-7...........................  Beryllium(4)......  20              541             20                541             1.3x104           3.5x105
Be-10..........................                      20              541             0.5               13.5            8.3x10-4          2.2x10-2
Bi-205.........................  Bismuth(83).......  0.6             16.2            0.6               16.2            1.5x103           4.2x104
Bi-206.........................                      0.3             8.11            0.3               8.11            3.8x103           1.0x105
Bi-207.........................                      0.7             18.9            0.7               18.9            1.9               5.2x101
Bi-210m........................                      0.3             8.11            3x10-2            0.811           2.1x10-5          5.7x10-4
Bi-210.........................                      0.6             16.2            0.5               13.5            4.6x103           1.2x105
Bi-212.........................                      0.3             8.11            0.3               8.11            5.4x105           1.5x107
Bk-247.........................  Berkelium(97).....  2               54.1            2x10-4            5.41x10-3       3.8x10-2          1.0
Bk-249.........................                      40              1080            8x10-2            2.16            6.1x101           1.6x103
Br-76..........................  Bromine(35).......  0.3             8.11            0.3               8.11            9.4x104           2.5x106
Br-77..........................                      3               81.1            3                 81.1            2.6x104           7.1x105

[[Page 617]]

 
Br-82..........................  ..................  0.4             10.8            0.4               10.8            4.0x104           1.1x106
C-11...........................  Carbon(6).........  1               27              0.5               13.5            3.1x107           8.4x108
C-14...........................                      40              1080            2                 54.1            1.6x10-1          4.5
Ca-41..........................  Calcium(20).......  40              1080            40                1080            3.1x10-3          8.5x10-2
Ca-45..........................                      40              1080            0.9               24.3            6.6x102           1.8x104
Ca-47..........................                      0.9             24.3            0.5               13.5            2.3x104           6.1x105
Cd-109.........................  Cadmium(48).......  40              1080            1                 27.0            9.6x101           2.6x103
Cd-113m........................                      20              541             9x10-2            2.43            8.3x104           2.2x102
Cd-115m........................                      0.3             8.11            0.3               8.11            9.4x102           2.5x104
Cd-115.........................                      4               108             0.5               13.5            1.9x104           5.1x105
Ce-139.........................  Cerium(58)........  6               162             6                 162             2.5x1026          .8x103
Ce-141.........................                      10              270             0.5               13.5            1.1x103           2.8x104
Ce-143.........................                      0.6             16.2            0.5               13.5            2.5x104           6.6x105
Ce-144.........................                      0.2             5.41            0.2               5.41            1.2x102           3.2x103
Cf-248.........................  Californium (98)..  30              811             3x10-3            8.11x10-2       5.8x101           1.6x103
Cf-249.........................                      2               54.1            2x10-4            5.41x10-3       1.5x10-1          4.1
Cf-250.........................                      5               135             5x10-4            1.35x10-2       4.0               1.1x102
Cf-251.........................                      2               54.1            2x10-4            5.41x10-3       5.9x10-2          1.6
Cf-252.........................                      0.1             2.70            1x10-3            2.70x10-2       2.0x101           5.4x102
Cf-253.........................                      40              1080            6x10-2            1.62            1.1x103           2.9x104
Cf-254.........................                      3x10-3          8.11x10-2       6x10-4            1.62x10-2       3.1x102           8.5x103
Cl-36..........................  Chlorine (17).....  20              541             0.5               13.5            1.2x10-3          3.3x10-2
Cl-38..........................                      0.2             5.41            0.2               5.41            4.9x106           1.3x108
Cm-240.........................  Curium(96)........  40              1080            2x10-2            0.541           7.5x102           2.0x104
Cm-241.........................                      2               54.1            0.9               24.3            6.1x102           1.7x104
Cm-242.........................                      40              1080            1x10-2            0.270           1.2x102           3.3x103
Cm-243.........................                      3               81.1            3x10-4            8.11x10-3       1.9               5.2x101
Cm-244.........................  ..................  4               108             4x10-4            1.08x10-2       3.0               8.1x101
Cm-245.........................                      2               54.1            2x10-4            5.41x10-3       6.4x10-3          1.7x10-1
Cm-246.........................                      2               54.1            2x10-4            5.41x10-3       1.1x10-2          3.1x10-1
Cm-247.........................                      2               54.1            2x10-4            5.41x10-3       3.4x10-6          9.3x10-5
Cm-248.........................                      4x10-2          1.08            5x10-5            1.35x10-3       1.6x10-4          4.2x10-3
Co-55..........................  Cobalt(27)........  0.5             13.5            0.5               13.5            1.1x105           3.1x106
Co-56..........................                      0.3             8.11            0.3               8.11            1.1x103           3.0x104
Co-57..........................                      8               216             8                 216             3.1x102           8.4x103
Co-58m.........................                      40              1080            40                1080            2.2x105           5.9x106
Co-58..........................                      1               27.0            1                 27.0            1.2x103           3.2x104
Co-60..........................                      0.4             10.8            0.4               10.8            4.2x101           1.1x103
Cr-51..........................  Chromium(24)......  30              811             30                811             3.4x103           9.2x104
Cs-129.........................  Cesium(55)........  4               108             4                 108             2.8x104           7.6x105
Cs-131.........................                      40              1080            40                1080            3.8x103           1.0x105
Cs-132.........................                      1               27.0            1                 27.0            5.7x103           1.5x105
Cs-134m........................                      40              1080            9                 243             3.0x105           8.0x106
Cs-134.........................                      0.6             16.2            0.5               13.5            4.8x101           1.3x103
Cs-135.........................                      40              1080            0.9               24.3            4.3x10-5          1.2x10-3
Cs-136.........................                      0.5             13.5            0.5               13.5            2.7x103           7.3x104
Cs-137.........................                      2               54.1            0.5               13.5            3.2               8.7x101
Cu-64..........................  Copper(29)........  5               135             0.9               24.3            1.4x105           3.9x106
Cu-67..........................                      9               243             0.9               24.3            2.8x104           7.6x105
Dy-159.........................  Dysprosium(66)....  20              541             20                541             2.1x102           5.7x103
Dy-165.........................                      0.6             16.2            0.5               13.5            3.0x105           8.2x106
Dy-166.........................                      0.3             8.11            0.3               8.11            8.6x103           2.3x105
Er-169.........................  Erbium(68)........  40              1080            0.9               24.3            3.1x103           8.3x104
Er-171.........................                      0.6             16.2            0.5               13.5            9.0x104           2.4x106
Es-253.........................  Einsteinium(99)a..  200             5400            2.1x10-2          5.4x100-1       ................  ...............
Es-254.........................                      30              811             3x10-3            8.11x10-2                         ...............
Es-254m........................                      0.6             16.2            0.4               10.8                              ...............
Es-255.........................                      ..............                  ................                  ................  ...............
Eu-147.........................  Europium(63)......  2               54.1            2                 54.1            1.4x103           3.7x104
Eu-148.........................                      0.5             13.5            0.5               13.5            6.0x102           1.6x104
Eu-149.........................                      20              541             20                541             3.5x102           9.4x103
Eu-150.........................  ..................  0.7             18.9            0.7               18.9            6.1x104           1.6x106
Eu-152m........................                      0.6             16.2            0.5               13.5            8.2x104           2.2x106
Eu-152.........................                      0.9             24.3            0.9               24.3            6.5               1.8x102
Eu-154.........................                      0.8             21.6            0.5               13.5            9.8               2.6x102
Eu-155.........................  ..................  20              541             2                 54.1            1.8x101           4.9x102
Eu-156.........................                      0.6             16.2            0.5               13.5            2.0x103           5.5x104
F-18...........................  Fluorine(9).......  1               27.0            0.5               13.5            3.5x106           9.5x107
Fe-52..........................  Iron(26)..........  0.2             5.41            0.2               5.41            2.7x105           7.3x106
Fe-55..........................                      40              1080            40                1080            8.8x101           2.4x103
Fe-59..........................  ..................  0.8             21.6            0.8               21.6            1.8x103           5.0x104
Fe-60..........................                      40              1080            0.2               5.41            7.4x10-4          2.0x10-2

[[Page 618]]

 
Fm-255.........................  Fermium(100)b.....  40              1080            0.8               21.6                              ...............
Fm-257.........................  ..................  10              270             8x10-3            21.6x10-1       ................  ...............
Ga-67..........................  Gallium(31).......  6               162             6                 162             2.2x104           6.0x105
Ga-68..........................                      0.3             8.11            0.3               8.11            1.5x106           4.1x107
Ga-72..........................                      0.4             10.8            0.4               10.8            1.1x105           3.1x106
Gd-146.........................  Gadolinium(64)....  0.4             10.8            0.4               10.8            6.9x102           1.9x104
Gd-148.........................  ..................  3               81.1            3x10-4            8.11x10-3       1.2               3.2x101
Gd-153.........................                      10              270             5                 135             1.3x102           3.5x103
Gd-159.........................                      4               108             0.5               13.5            3.9x104           1.1x106
Ge-68..........................  Germanium(32).....  0.3             8.11            0.3               8.11            2.6x102           7.1x103
Ge-71..........................                      40              1080            40                1080            5.8x103           1.6x105
Ge-77..........................                      0.3             8.11            0.3               8.11            1.3x105           3.6x106
H-3............................  Hydrogen(1) SeeT-                   ..............                    ..............                    ...............
                                  Tritium.
Hf-172.........................  Hafnium(72).......  0.5             13.5            0.3               8.11            4.1x101           1.1x103
Hf-175.........................                      3               81.1            3                 81.1            3.9x102           1.1x104
Hf-181.........................                      2               54.1            0.9               24.3            6.3x102           1.7x104
Hf-182.........................                      4               108             3x10-2            0.811           8.1x10-6          2.2x10-4
Hg-194.........................  Mercury(80).......  1               27.0            1                 27.0            1.3x10-1          3.5
Hg-195m........................                      5               135             5                 135             1.5x104           4.0x105
Hg-197m........................                      10              270             0.9               24.3            2.5x104           6.7x105
Hg-197.........................                      10              270             10                270             9.2x103           2.5x105
Hg-203.........................                      4               108             0.9               24.3            5.1x102           1.4x104
Ho-163.........................  Holmium(67).......  40              1080            40                1080            2.7               7.6x101
Ho-166m........................                      0.6             16.2            0.3               8.11            6.6x10-2          1.8
Ho-166.........................                      0.3             8.11            0.3               8.11            2.6x104           7.0x105
I-123..........................  Iodine(53)........  6               162             6                 162             7.1x104           1.9x106
I-124..........................                      0.9             24.3            0.9               24.3            9.3x103           2.5x105
I-125..........................                      20              541             2                 54.1            6.4x102           1.7x104
I-126..........................                      2               54.1            0.9               24.3            2.9x103           8.0x104
I-129..........................                      Unlimited       Unlimited       Unlimited         Unlimited       6.5x10-6          1.8x10-4
I-131..........................                      3               81.1            0.5               13.5            4.6x103           1.2x105
I-132..........................                      0.4             10.8            0.4               10.8            3.8x105           1.0x107
I-133..........................                      0.6             16.2            0.5               13.5            4.2x104           1.1x106
I-134..........................                      0.3             8.11            0.3               8.11            9.9x105           2.7x107
I-135..........................                      0.6             16.2            0.5               13.5            1.3x105           3.5x106
In-111.........................  Indium(49)........  2               54.1            2                 54.1            1.5x104           4.2x105
In-113m........................                      4               108             4                 108             6.2x105           1.7x107
In-114m........................                      0.3             8.11            0.3               8.11            8.6x102           2.3x104
In-115m........................                      6               162             0.9               24.3            2.2x105           6.1x106
Ir-189.........................  Iridium(77).......  10              270             10                270             1.9x103           5.2x104
Ir-190.........................                      0.7             18.9            0.7               18.9            2.3x103           6.2x104
Ir-192.........................                      1               27.0            0.5               13.5            3.4x102           9.2x103
Ir-193m........................                      10              270             10                270             2.4x103           6.4x104
Ir-194.........................                      0.2             5.41            0.2               5.41            3.1x104           8.4x105
K-40...........................  Potassium(19).....  0.6             16.2            0.6               16.2            2.4x10-7          6.4x10-6
K-42...........................                      0.2             5.41            0.2               5.41            2.2x105           6.0x106
K-43...........................                      1.0             27.0            0.5               13.5            1.2x105           3.3x106
Kr-81..........................  Krypton(36).......  40              1080            40                1080            7.8x10-4          2.1x10-2
Kr-85m.........................                      6               162             6                 162             3.0x105           8.2x106
Kr-85..........................                      20              541             10                270             1.5x101           3.9x102
Kr-87..........................                      0.2             5.41            0.2               5.41            1.0x106           2.8x107
La-137.........................  Lanthanum(57).....  40              1080            2                 54.1            1.6x10-3          4.4x10-2
La-140.........................                      0.4             10.8            0.4               10.8            2.1x104           5.6x105
Lu-172.........................  Lutetium(71)......  0.5             13.5            0.5               13.5            4.2x103           1.1x105
Lu-173.........................                      8               216             8                 216             5.6x101           1.5x103
Lu-174m........................                      20              541             8                 216             2.0x102           5.3x103
Lu-74..........................                      8               216             4                 108             2.3x101           6.2x102
Lu-177.........................                      30              811             0.9               24.3            4.1x103           1.1x105
MFP............................  ..................  (see Sec.       ..............  (see Sec.         ..............  ................  ...............
                                                      173.433)                        173.433)
Mg-28..........................  Magnesium(12).....  0.2             5.41            0.2               5.41            2.0x105           5.4x106
Mn-52..........................  Manganese(25).....  0.3             8.11            0.3               8.11            1.6x104           4.4x105
Mn-53..........................                      Unlimited       Unlimited       Unlimited         Unlimited       6.8x10-5          1.8x10-3
Mn-54..........................                      1               27.0            1                 27.0            2.9x102           7.7x103
Mn-56..........................                      0.2             5.41            0.2               5.41            8.0x105           2.2x107
Mo-93..........................  Molybdenum(42)....  40              1080            7                 189             4.1x10-2          1.1
Mo-99..........................                      0.6             16.2            0.5               13.5c           1.8x104           4.8x105
N-13...........................  Nitrogen(7).......  0.6             16.2            0.5               13.5            5.4x107           1.5x109
Na-22..........................  Sodium(11)........  0.5             13.5            0.5               13.5            2.3x102           6.3x103
Na-24..........................                      0.2             5.41            0.2               5.41            3.2x105           8.7x106
Nb-92m.........................  Niobium(41).......  0.7             18.9            0.7               18.9            5.2x103           1.4x105

[[Page 619]]

 
Nb-93m.........................                      40              1080            6                 162             8.8               2.4x102
Nb-94..........................                      0.6             16.2            0.6               16.2            6.9x10-3          1.9x10-1
Nb-95..........................                      1               27.0            1                 27.0            1.5x103           3.9x104
Nb-97..........................                      0.6             16.2            0.5               13.5            9.9x105           2.7x107
Nd-147.........................  Neodymium(60).....  4               108             0.5               13.5            3.0x103           8.1x104
Nd-149.........................                      0.6             16.2            0.5               13.5            4.5x105           1.2x107
Ni-59..........................  Nickel(28)........  40              1080            40                1080            3.0x10-3          8.0x10-2
Ni-63..........................                      40              1080            30                811             2.1               5.7x101
Ni-65..........................                      0.3             8.11            0.3               8.11            7.1x105           1.9x107
Np-235.........................  Neptunium(93).....  40              1080            40                1080            5.2x101           1.4x103
Np-236.........................                      7               189             1x10-3            2.70x10-2       4.7x10-4          1.3x10-2
Np-237.........................                      2               54.1            2x10-4            5.41x10-3       2.6x10-5          7.1x10-4
Np-239.........................                      6               162             0.5               13.5            8.6x103           2.3x105
Os-185.........................  Osmium(76)........  1               27.0            1                 27.0            2.8x102           7.5x103
Os-191m........................                      40              1080            40                1080            4.6x104           1.3x106
Os-191.........................                      10              270             0.9               24.3            1.6x103           4.4x104
Os-193.........................                      0.6             16.2            0.5               13.5            2.0x104           5.3x105
Os-194.........................                      0.2             5.41            0.2               5.41            1.1x101           3.1x102
P-32...........................  Phosphorus(15)....  0.3             8.11            0.3               8.11            1.1x104           2.9x105
P-33...........................                      40              1080            0.9               24.3            5.8x103           1.6x105
Pa-230.........................  Protactinium(91)..  2               54.1            0.1               2.70            1.2x103           3.3x104
Pa-231.........................                      0.6             16.2            6x10-5            1.62x10-3       1.7x10-3          4.7x10-2
Pa-233.........................                      5               135             0.9               24.3            7.7x102           2.1x104
Pb-201.........................  Lead(82)..........  1               27.0            1                 27.0            6.2x104           1.7x106
Pb-202.........................                      40              1080            2                 54.1            1.2x10-4          3.4x10-3
Pb-203.........................                      3               81.1            3                 81.1            1.1x104           3.0x105
Pb-205.........................                      Unlimited       Unlimited       Unlimited         Unlimited       4.5x10-6          1.2x10-4
Pb-210.........................                      0.6             16.2            9x10-3            0.243           2.8               7.6x101
Pb-212.........................                      0.3             8.11            0.3               8.11            5.1x104           1.4x106
Pd-103.........................  Palladium(46).....  40              1080            40                1080            2.8x103           7.5x104
Pd-107.........................  ..................  Unlimited       Unlimited       Unlimited         Unlimited       1.9x10-5          5.1x10-4
Pd-109.........................                      0.6             16.2            0.5               13.5            7.9x104           2.1x106
Pm-143.........................  Promethium(61)....  3               81.1            3                 81.1            1.3x102           3.4x103
Pm-144.........................                      0.6             16.2            0.6               16.2            9.2x101           2.5x103
Pm-145.........................                      30              811             7                 189             5.2               1.4x102
Pm-147.........................                      40              1080            0.9               24.3            3.4x101           9.3x102
Pm-148m........................                      0.5             13.5            0.5               13.5            7.9x102           2.1x104
Pm-149.........................                      0.6             16.2            0.5               13.5            1.5x104           4.0x105
Pm-151.........................                      3               81.1            0.5               13.5            2.7x104           7.3x105
Po-208.........................  Polonium(84)......  40              1080            2x10-2            0.541           2.2x101           5.9x102
Po-209.........................                      40              1080            2x10-2            0.541           6.2x10-1          1.7x101
Po-210.........................                      40              1080            2x10-2            0.541           1.7x102           4.5x103
Pr-142.........................  Praseodymium (59).  0.2             5.41            0.2               5.41            4.3x104           1.2x106
Pr-143.........................                      4               108             0.5               13.5            2.5x103           6.7x104
Pt-188.........................  Platinum(78)......  0.6             16.2            0.6               16.2            2.5x103           6.8x104
Pt-191.........................  ..................  3               81.1            3                 81.1            8.7x103           2.4x105
Pt-193m........................  ..................  40              1080            9                 243             5.8x103           1.6x105
Pt-193.........................  ..................  40              1080            40                1080            1.4               3.7x101
Pt-195m........................  ..................  10              270             2                 54.1            6.2x103           1.7x105
Pt-197m........................  ..................  10              270             0.9               24.3            3.7x105           1.0x107
Pt-197.........................  ..................  20              541             0.5               13.5            3.2x104           8.7x105
Pu-236.........................  Plutonium(94).....  7               189             7x10-4            1.89x10-2       2.0x101           5.3x102
Pu-237.........................  ..................  20              541             20                541             4.5x102           1.2x104
Pu-238.........................  ..................  2               54.1            2x10-4            5.41x10-3       6.3x10-1          1.7x101
Pu-239.........................  ..................  2               54.1            2x10-4            5.41x10-3       2.3x10-3          6.2x10-2
Pu-240.........................  ..................  2               54.1            2x10-4            5.41x10-3       8.4x10-3          2.3x10-1
Pu-241.........................  ..................  40              1080            1x10-2            0.270           3.8               1.0x102
Pu-242.........................  ..................  2               54.1            2x10-4            5.41x10-3       1.5x10-4          3.9x10-3
Pu-244.........................  ..................  0.3             8.11            2x10-4            5.41x10-3       6.7x10-7          1.8x10-5
Ra-223.........................  Radium(88)........  0.6             16.2            3x10-2            0.811           1.9x103           5.1x104
Ra-224.........................  ..................  0.3             8.11            6x10-2            1.62            5.9x103           1.6x105
Ra-225.........................  ..................  0.6             16.2            2x10-2            0.541           1.5x103           3.9x104
Ra-226.........................  ..................  0.3             8.11            2x10-2            0.541           3.7x10-2          1.0
Ra-228.........................  ..................  0.6             16.2            4x10-2            1.08            1.0x101           2.7x102
Rb-81..........................  Rubidium(37)......  2               54.1            0.9               24.3            3.1x105           8.4x106
Rb-83..........................  ..................  2               54.1            2                 54.1            6.8x102           1.8x104
Rb-84..........................  ..................  1               27.0            0.9               24.3            1.8x103           4.7x104
Rb-86..........................  ..................  0.3             8.11            0.3               8.11            3.0x103           8.1x104
Rb-87..........................  ..................  Unlimited       Unlimited       Unlimited         Unlimited       3.2x10-9          8.6x10-8
Rb (natural)...................  ..................  Unlimited       Unlimited       Unlimited         Unlimited       6.7x106           1.8x108

[[Page 620]]

 
Re-183.........................  Rhenium(75).......  5               135             5                 135             3.8x102           1.0x104
Re-184m........................  ..................  3               81.1            3                 81.1            1.6x102           4.3x103
Re-184.........................  ..................  1               27.0            1                 27.0            6.9x102           1.9x104
Re-186.........................  ..................  4               108             0.5               13.5            6.9x103           1.9x105
Re-187.........................  ..................  Unlimited       Unlimited       Unlimited         Unlimited       1.4x10-9          3.8x10-8
Re-188.........................  ..................  0.2             5.41            0.2               5.41            3.6x104           9.8x105
Re-189.........................  ..................  4               108             0.5               13.5            2.5x104           6.8x105
Re (natural)...................  ..................  Unlimited       Unlimited       Unlimited         Unlimited       ----              2.4x108
Rh-99..........................  Rhodium(45).......  2               54.1            2                 54.1            3.0x103           8.2x104
Rh-101.........................  ..................  4               108             4                 108             4.1x101           1.1x103
Rh-102m........................  ..................  2               54.1            0.9               24.3            2.3x102           6.2x103
Rh-102.........................  ..................  0.5             13.5            0.5               13.5            4.5x101           1.2x103
Rh-103m........................  ..................  40              1080            40                1080            1.2x106           3.3x107
Rh-105.........................  ..................  10              270             0.9               24.3            3.1x104           8.4x105
Rn-222.........................  Radon(86).........  0.2             5.41            4x10-3            0.108           5.7x103           1.5x105
Ru-97..........................  Ruthenium(44).....  4               108             4                 108             1.7x104           4.6x105
Ru-103.........................  ..................  2               54.1            0.9               24.3            1.2x103           3.2x104
Ru-105.........................  ..................  0.6             16.2            0.5               13.5            2.5x105           6.7x106
Ru-106.........................  ..................  0.2             5.41            0.2               5.41            1.2x102           3.3x103
S-35...........................  Sulfur(16)........  40              1080            2                 54.1            1.6x103           4.3x104
Sb-122.........................  Antimony(51)......  0.3             8.11            0.3               8.11            1.5x104           4.0x105
Sb-124.........................  ..................  0.6             16.2            0.5               13.5            6.5x102           1.7x104
Sb-125.........................  ..................  2               54.1            0.9               24.3            3.9x101           1.0x103
Sb-126.........................  ..................  0.4             10.8            0.4               10.8            3.1x103           8.4x104
Sc-44..........................  Scandium(21)......  0.5             13.5            0.5               13.5            6.7x105           1.8x107
Sc-46..........................  ..................  0.5             13.5            0.5               13.5            1.3x103           3.4x104
Sc-47..........................  ..................  9               243             0.9               24.3            3.1x104           8.3x105
Sc-48..........................  ..................  0.3             8.11            0.3               8.11            5.5x104           1.5x106
Se-75..........................  Selenium(34)......  3               81.1            3                 81.1            5.4x102           1.5x104
Se-79..........................  ..................  40              1080            2                 54.1            2.6x10-3          7.0x10-2
Si-31..........................  Silicon(14).......  0.6             16.2            0.5               13.5            1.4x106           3.9x107
Si-32..........................  ..................  40              1080            0.2               5.41            3.9               1.1x102
Sm-145.........................  Samarium(62)......  20              541             20                541             9.8x101           2.610 3
Sm-147.........................  ..................  Unlimited       Unlimited       Unlimited         Unlimited       8.5x10-10         2.3x10-8
Sm-151.........................  ..................  40              1080            4                 108             9.7x10-1          2.6x101
Sm-153.........................  ..................  4               108             0.5               13.5            1.6x104           4.4x105
Sn-113.........................  Tin(50)...........  4               108             4                 108             3.7x102           1.0x104
Sn-117m........................  ..................  6               162             2                 54.1            3.0x103           8.2x104
Sn-119m........................  ..................  40              1080            40                1080            1.4x102           3.7x103
Sn-121m........................  ..................  40              1080            0.9               24.3            2.0               5.4x101
Sn-123.........................  ..................  0.6             16.2            0.5               13.5            3.0x102           8.2x103
Sn-125.........................  ..................  0.2             5.41            0.2               5.41            4.0x103           1.1x105
Sn-126.........................  ..................  0.3             8.11            0.3               8.11            1.0x10-3          2.8x10-2
Sr-82..........................  Strontium(38).....  0.2             5.41            0.2               5.41            2.3x103           6.2x104
Sr-85m.........................  ..................  5               135             5                 135             1.2x106           3.3x107
Sr-85..........................  ..................  2               54.1            2                 54.1            8.8x102           2.4x104
Sr-87m.........................  ..................  3               81.1            3                 81.1            4.8x105           1.3x107
Sr-89..........................  ..................  0.6             16.2            0.5               13.5            1.1x103           2.9x104
Sr-90..........................  ..................  0.2             5.41            0.1               2.70            5.1               1.4x102
Sr-91..........................  ..................  0.3             8.11            0.3               8.11            1.3x105           3.6x106
Sr-92..........................  ..................  0.8             21.6            0.5               13.5            4.7x105           1.3x107
T..............................  Tritium(1)........  40              1080            40                1080            3.6x102           9.7x103
Ta-178.........................  Tantalum(73)......  1               27.0            1                 27.0            4.2x106           1.1x108
Ta-179.........................  ..................  30              811             30                811             4.1x101           1.1x103
Ta-182.........................  ..................  0.8             21.6            0.5               13.5            2.3x102           6.2x103
Tb-157.........................  Terbium(65).......  40              1080            10                270             5.6x10-1          1.5x101
Tb-158.........................  ..................  1               27.0            0.7               18.9            5.6x10-1          1.5x101
Tb-160.........................  ..................  0.9             24.3            0.5               13.5            4.2x102           1.1x104
Tc-95m.........................  Technetium(43)....  2               54.1            2                 54.1            8.3x102           2.2x104
Tc-96m.........................  ..................  0.4             10.8            0.4               10.8            1.4x106           3.8x107
Tc-96..........................  ..................  0.4             10.8            0.4               10.8            1.2x104           3.2x105
Tc-97m.........................  ..................  40              1080            40                1080            5.6x102           1.5x104
Tc-97..........................  ..................  Unlimited       Unlimited       Unlimited         Unlimited       5.2x10-5          1.4x10-3
Tc-98..........................  ..................  0.7             18.9            0.7               18.9            3.2x10-5          8.7x10-4
Tc-99m.........................  ..................  8               216             8                 216             1.9x105           5.3x106
Tc-99..........................  ..................  40              1080            0.9               24.3            6.3x10-4          1.7x10-2
Te-118.........................  Tellurium(52).....  0.2             5.41            0.2               5.41            6.8x103           1.8x105
Te-121m........................  ..................  5               135             5                 135             2.6x102           7.0x103
Te-121.........................  ..................  2               54.1            2                 54.1            2.4x103           6.4x104
Te-123m........................  ..................  7               189             7                 189             3.3x102           8.9x103
Te-125m........................  ..................  30              811             9                 243             6.7x102           1.8x104

[[Page 621]]

 
Te-127m........................  ..................  20              541             0.5               13.5            3.5x102           9.4x103
Te-127.........................  ..................  20              541             0.5               13.5            9.8x104           2.6x106
Te-129m........................  ..................  0.6             16.2            0.5               13.5            1.1x103           3.0x104
Te-129.........................  ..................  0.6             16.2            0.5               13.5            7.7x105           2.1x107
Te-131m........................  ..................  0.7             18.9            0.5               13.5            3.0x104           8.0x105
Te-132.........................  ..................  0.4             10.8            0.4               10.8            1.1x104           3.0x105
Th-227.........................  Thorium(90).......  9               243             1x10-2            0.270           1.1x103           3.1x104
Th-228.........................  ..................  0.3             8.11            4x10-4            1.08x10-2       3.0x101           8.2x102
Th-229.........................  ..................  0.3             8.11            3x10-5            8.11x10-4       7.9x10-3          2.1x10-1
Th-230.........................  ..................  2               54.1            2x10-4            5.41x10-3       7.6x10-4          2.1x10-2
Th-231.........................  ..................  40              1080            0.9               24.3            2.0x104           5.3x105
Th-232.........................  ..................  Unlimited       Unlimited       Unlimited         Unlimited       4.0x10-9          1.1x10-7
Th-234.........................  ..................  0.2             5.41            0.2               5.41            8.6x102           2.3x104
Th (natural)...................  ..................  Unlimited       Unlimited       Unlimited         Unlimited       8.1x10-9          2.2x10-7
Ti-44..........................  Titanium(22)......  0.5             13.5            0.2               5.41            6.4               1.7x102
Tl-200.........................  Thallium(81.1)....  0.8             21.6            0.8               21.6            2.2x104           6.0x105
Tl-201.........................  ..................  10              270             10                270             7.9x103           2.1x105
Tl-202.........................                      2               54.1            2                 54.1            2.0x103           5.3x104
Tl-204.........................                      4               108             0.5               13.5            1.7x101           4.6x102
Tm-167.........................  Thulium(69).......  7               189             7                 189             3.1x103           8.5x104
Tm-168.........................                      0.8             21.6            0.8               21.6            3.1x102           8.3x103
Tm-170.........................                      4               108             0.5               13.5            2.2x102           6.0x103
Tm-171.........................                      40              1080            10                270             4.0x101           1.1x103
U-230..........................  Uranium(92).......  40              1080            1x10-2            0.270           1.0x103           2.7x104
U-232..........................                      3               81.1            3x10-4            8.11x10-3       8.3x10-1          2.2x101
U-233..........................                      10              270             1x10-3            2.70x10-2       3.6x10-4          9.7x10-3
U-234..........................                      10              270             1x10-3            2.70x10-2       2.3x10-4          6.2x10-3
U-235..........................                      Unlimited       Unlimited       Unlimited         Unlimited       8.0x10-8          2.2x10-6
U-236..........................                      10              270             1x10-3            2.70x10-2       2.4x10-6          6.5x10-5
U-238..........................                      Unlimited       Unlimited       Unlimited         Unlimited       1.2x10-8          3.4x10-7
U (natural)....................                      Unlimited       Unlimited       Unlimited         Unlimited       2.6x10-8          7.1x10-7
U (enriched 5% or less)........                      Unlimited       Unlimited       Unlimited         Unlimited       ------            (see Sec.
                                                                                                                                          173.434)
U (enriched more than 5%)......                      10              270             1x10-3            2.70x10-2       ----              (see Sec.
                                                                                                                                          173.434)
U (depleted)...................                      Unlimited       Unlimited       Unlimited         Unlimited       ----              (see Sec.
                                                                                                                                          173.434)
V-48...........................  Vanadium(23)......  0.3             8.11            0.3               8.11            6.3x103           1.7x105
V-49...........................                      40              1080            40                1080            3.0x102           8.1x103
W-178..........................  Tungsten(74)......  1               27.0            1                 27.0            1.3x10-3          3.4x104
W-181..........................                      30              811             30                811             2.2x102           6.0x103
W-185..........................                      40              1080            0.9               24.3            3.5x102           9.4x103
W-187..........................                      2               54.1            0.5               13.5            2.6x104           7.0x105
W-188..........................                      0.2             5.41            0.2               5.41            3.7x102           1.0x104
Xe-122.........................  Xenon(54).........  0.2             5.41            0.2               5.41            4.8x104           1.3x106
Xe-123.........................                      0.2             5.41            0.2               5.41            4.4x105           1.2x107
Xe-127.........................                      4               108             4                 108             1.0x103           2.8x104
Xe-131m........................                      40              1080            40                1080            3.1x103           8.4x104
Xe-133.........................                      20              541             20                541             6.9x103           1.9x105
Xe-135.........................                      4               108             4                 108             9.5x104           2.6x106
Y-87...........................  Yttrium(39).......  2               54.1            2                 54.1            1.7x104           4.5x105
Y-88...........................                      0.4             10.8            0.4               10.8            5.2x102           1.4x104
Y-90...........................                      0.2             5.41            0.2               5.41            2.0x104           5.4x105
Y-91m..........................                      2               54.1            2                 54.1            1.5x106           4.2x107
Y-91...........................                      0.3             8.11            0.3               8.11            9.1x102           2.5x104
Y-92...........................                      0.2             5.41            0.2               5.41            3.6x105           9.6x106
Y-93...........................                      0.2             5.41            0.2               5.41            1.2x105           3.3x106
Yb-169.........................  Ytterbium(70).....  3               81.1            3                 81.1            8.9x102           2.4x104
Yb-175.........................                      30              811             0.9               24.3            6.6x103           1.8x105
Zn-65..........................  Zinc(30)..........  2               54.1            2                 54.1            3.0x102           8.2x103
Zn-69m.........................                      2               54.1            0.5               13.5            1.2x105           3.3x106
Zn-69..........................                      4               108             0.5               13.5            1.8x106           4.9x107
Zr-88..........................  Zirconium(40).....  3               81.1            3                 81.1            6.6x102           1.8x104
Zr-93..........................                      40              1080            0.2               5.41            9.3x10-5          2.5x10-3
Zr-95..........................                      1               27.0            0.9               24.3            7.9x102           2.1x104
Zr-97..........................                      0.3             8.11            0.3               8.11            7.1x104           1.9x106
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
a International shipments of Einsteinium require multilateral approval of A1 and A2 values.

[[Page 622]]

 
b International shipments of Fermium require multilateral approval of A1 and A2 values.
c 20 Ci for Mo99 for domestic use.
MFP: For mixed fission products, use formula for mixtures or table 10 in Sec.  173.433.
Note: The activity per gram of radionuclide quantities are technical information that might not provide a direct relationship between the activity and
  total mass of material contained in a package.

[Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended by Amdt. 173-
244, 61 FR 20752, May 8, 1996; Amdt. 173-253, 61 FR 27175, May 30, 1996; 
65 FR 58630, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45184, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.441  Radiation level limitations.

    (a) Except as provided in paragraph (b) of this section, each 
package of Class 7 (radioactive) materials offered for transportation 
must be designed and prepared for shipment, so that under conditions 
normally incident to transportation, the radiation level does not exceed 
2 mSv/hour (200 mrem/hour) at any point on the external surface of the 
package, and the transport index does not exceed 10.
    (b) A package which exceeds the radiation level limits specified in 
paragraph (a) of this section must be transported by exclusive use 
shipment, and the radiation levels for such shipment may not exceed the 
following during transportation:
    (1) 2 mSv/h (200 mrem/h) on the external surface of the package 
unless the following conditions are met, in which case the limit is 10 
mSv/h (1000 mrem/h):
    (i) The shipment is made in a closed transport vehicle;
    (ii) The package is secured within the vehicle so that its position 
remains fixed during transportation; and
    (iii) There are no loading or unloading operations between the 
beginning and end of the transportation;
    (2) 2 mSv/h (200 mrem/h) at any point on the outer surfaces of the 
vehicle, including the top and underside of the vehicle; or in the case 
of a flat-bed style vehicle, at any point on the vertical planes 
projected from the outer edges of the vehicle, on the upper surface of 
the load or enclosure if used, and on the lower external surface of the 
vehicle;
    (3) 0.1 mSv/h (10 mrem/h) at any point 2 m (6.6 feet) from the outer 
lateral surfaces of the vehicle (excluding the top and underside of the 
vehicle); or in the case of a flat-bed style vehicle, at any point 2 m 
(6.6 feet) from the vertical planes projected by the outer edges of the 
vehicle (excluding the top and underside of the vehicle); and
    (4) 0.02 mSv/h (2mrem/h) in any normally occupied space, except that 
this provision does not apply to carriers if they operate under the 
provisions of a State or federally regulated radiation protection 
program and if personnel under their control who are in such an occupied 
space wear radiation dosimetry devices.
    (c) For shipments made under the provisions of paragraph (b) of this 
section, the offeror shall provide specific written instructions for 
maintenance of the exclusive use shipment controls to the carrier. The 
instructions must be included with the shipping paper information. The 
instructions must be sufficient so that, when followed, they will cause 
the carrier to avoid actions that will unnecessarily delay delivery or 
unnecessarily result in increased radiation levels or radiation 
exposures to transport workers or members of the general public.
    (d) Packages exceeding the radiation level or transport index 
prescribed in paragraph (a) of this section may not be transported by 
aircraft.

[Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended at 63 FR 48568, 
Sept. 10, 1998; 66 FR 45380, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.442  Thermal limitations.

    A package of Class 7 (radioactive) material must be designed, 
constructed, and loaded so that--
    (a) The heat generated within the package by the radioactive 
contents will not, during conditions normally incident to transport, 
affect the integrity of the package; and
    (b) The temperature of the accessible external surfaces of the 
loaded package will not, assuming still air in the shade at an ambient 
temperature of 38  deg.C (100  deg.F), exceed either--
    (1) 50  deg.C (122  deg.F) in other than an exclusive use shipment; 
or

[[Page 623]]

    (2) 85  deg.C (185  deg.F) in an exclusive use shipment.



Sec. 173.443  Contamination control.

    (a) The level of non-fixed (removable) radioactive contamination on 
the external surfaces of each package offered for transport must be kept 
as low as reasonably achievable. The level of non-fixed radioactive 
contamination may not exceed the limits set forth in table 11 and must 
be determined by either:
    (1) Wiping an area of 300 square cm of the surface concerned with an 
absorbent material, using moderate pressure, and measuring the activity 
on the wiping material. Sufficient measurements must be taken in the 
most appropriate locations to yield a representative assessment of the 
non-fixed contamination levels. The amount of radioactivity measured on 
any single wiping material, when averaged over the surface wiped, may 
not exceed the limits set forth in table 11 at any time during 
transport; or
    (2) Using other methods of assessment of equal or greater 
efficiency, in which case the efficiency of the method used must be 
taken into account and the non-fixed contamination on the external 
surfaces of the package may not exceed ten times the limits set forth in 
table 11, as follows:

   Table 11--Non-Fixed External Radioactive Contamination-Wipe Limits
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                            Maximum permissible limits
               Contaminant               -------------------------------
                                            Bq/cm2    uCi/cm2   dpm/cm2
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Beta and gamma emitters and low toxicity       0.4       10-5       22
 alpha emitters.........................
All other alpha emitting radionuclides..       0.04      10-6        2.2
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (b) Except as provided in paragraph (d) of this section, in the case 
of packages transported as exclusive use shipments by rail or public 
highway only, the removable (non-fixed) radioactive contamination on any 
package at any time during transport may not exceed ten times the levels 
prescribed in paragraph (a) of this section. The levels at the beginning 
of transport may not exceed the levels prescribed in paragraph (a) of 
this section.
    (c) Except as provided in paragraph (d) of this section, each 
transport vehicle used for transporting Class 7 (radioactive) materials 
as an exclusive use shipment that utilizes the provisions of paragraph 
(b) of this section must be surveyed with appropriate radiation 
detection instruments after each use. A vehicle may not be returned to 
service until the radiation dose rate at each accessible surface is 
0.005 mSv per hour (0.5 mrem per hour) or less, and there is no 
significant removable (non-fixed) radioactive surface contamination as 
specified in paragraph (a) of this section.
    (d) Paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section do not apply to any 
closed transport vehicle used solely for the transportation by highway 
or rail of Class 7 (radioactive) material packages with contamination 
levels that do not exceed 10 times the levels prescribed in paragraph 
(a) of this section if--
    (1) A survey of the interior surfaces of the empty vehicle shows 
that the radiation dose rate at any point does not exceed 0.1 mSv per 
hour (10 mrem per hour) at the surface or 0.02 mSv per hour (2 mrem per 
hour) at 1 m (3.3 feet) from the surface;
    (2) Each vehicle is stenciled with the words ``For Radioactive 
Materials Use Only'' in letters at least 76 millimeters (3 inches) high 
in a conspicuous place on both sides of the exterior of the vehicle; and
    (3) Each vehicle is kept closed except for loading or unloading.

[Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended by Amdt. 173-
244, 61 FR 20753, May 8, 1996; 66 FR 45380, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.447  Storage incident to transportation--general requirements.

    The following requirements apply to temporary storage during the 
course of transportation but not to Nuclear Regulatory Commission or 
Agreement State-licensed facilities or U.S. Government-owned or 
contracted facilities.
    (a) The number of packages bearing RADIOACTIVE YELLOW-II or 
RADIOACTIVE YELLOW-III labels stored in any one storage area, such as a 
transit area, terminal building, storeroom, waterfront pier, or assembly 
yard, must

[[Page 624]]

be limited so that the sum of the transport indexes in any individual 
group of packages does not exceed 50. Groups of these packages must be 
stored so as to maintain a spacing of at least 6 m (20 feet) from other 
groups of packages containing Class 7 (radioactive) materials.
    (b) Mixing of different kinds of Class 7 (radioactive) materials 
packages that include fissile materials packages is authorized only in 
accordance with Sec. 173.459.

[Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended by 66 FR 45380, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.448  General transportation requirements.

    (a) Each shipment of Class 7 (radioactive) materials must be secured 
to prevent shifting during normal transportation conditions.
    (b) Except as provided in Secs. 174.81, 176.83, and 177.848 of this 
subchapter, or as otherwise required by the competent authority in the 
applicable certificate, a package of Class 7 (radioactive) materials may 
be carried among packaged general cargo without special stowage 
provisions, if--
    (1) The heat output in watts does not exceed 0.1 times the minimum 
package dimension in cm; or
    (2) The average surface heat flux of the package does not exceed 15 
watts per square meter and the immediately surrounding cargo is not in 
sacks or bags or otherwise in a form that would seriously impede air 
circulation for heat removal.
    (c) Packages bearing labels prescribed in Sec. 172.403 of this 
subchapter may not be carried in compartments occupied by passengers, 
except in those compartments exclusively reserved for couriers 
accompanying those packages.
    (d) Mixing of different kinds of packages that include fissile 
packages is authorized only in accordance with Sec. 173.459.
    (e) No person shall offer for transportation or transport aboard a 
passenger-carrying aircraft any single package with a transport index 
greater than 3.0 or an overpack with a transport index greater than 3.0.
    (f) No person shall offer for transportation or transport aboard a 
passenger-carrying aircraft any Class 7 (radioactive) material unless 
that material is intended for use in, or incident to, research, medical 
diagnosis or treatment.
    (g) If an overpack is used to consolidate individual packages of 
Class 7 (radioactive) materials, the packages must comply with the 
packaging, marking, and labeling requirements of this subchapter, and 
the following:
    (1) The overpack must be labeled as prescribed in Sec. 172.403 of 
this subchapter, except as follows:
    (i) The ``contents'' entry on the label may state ``mixed'' unless 
each inside package contains the same radionuclide(s);
    (ii) The ``activity'' entry on the label must be determined by 
adding together the number of Becquerels (curies) of the Class 7 
(radioactive) materials packages contained therein;
    (iii) For a non-rigid overpack, the required label together with 
required package markings must be affixed to the overpack by means of a 
securely attached, durable tag. The transport index must be determined 
by adding together the transport indexes of the Class 7 (radioactive) 
materials packages contained therein; and
    (iv) For a rigid overpack, the transport index must be determined 
by:
    (A) Adding together the transport indexes of the Class 7 
(radioactive) materials packages contained in the overpack; or
    (B) Except for fissile Class 7 (radioactive) materials, direct 
measurements as prescribed in Sec. 173.403 for transport index, taken by 
the person initially offering the packages contained within the overpack 
for shipment.
    (2) The overpack must be marked as prescribed in subpart D of part 
172 of this subchapter and Sec. 173.25(a).
    (3) The transport index of the overpack may not exceed 3.0 for 
passenger-carrying aircraft shipments, or 10.0 for cargo-aircraft only 
shipments.



Sec. 173.453  Fissile materials--exceptions.

    The requirements of Secs. 173.457 and 173.459 do not apply to:
    (a) A package containing 15 g or less of fissile radionuclides. If 
the material is transported in bulk, the quantity limitation applies to 
the conveyance.
    (b) A package containing homogeneous solutions or mixtures where:

[[Page 625]]

    (1) The minimum ratio of the number of hydrogen atoms to the number 
of atoms of fissile radionuclides (H/X) is 5200;
    (2) The maximum concentration of fissile radionuclides is 5 g per 
liter; and
    (3) The maximum mass of fissile radionuclides in the package is 500 
g, except that for a mixture in which the total mass of plutonium and 
uranium-233 does not exceed 1% of the mass of uranium-235, the limit is 
800 g of uranium-235. If the material is transported in bulk, the 
quantity limitations apply to the conveyance.
    (c) A package containing uranium enriched in uranium-235 to a 
maximum of 1% by mass, and mixed with a total plutonium and uranium-233 
content of up to 1% of the mass of uranium-235, if the fissile 
radionuclides are distributed homogeneously throughout the package 
contents, and do not form a lattice arrangement within the package.
    (d) A package containing not more than 5 g of fissile radionuclides 
in any 10 L volume, provided that the material is contained in packages 
that will maintain the limitation on fissile radionuclide distribution 
during normal conditions of transport.
    (e) A package containing 1 kg or less of plutonium of which 20% or 
less by mass may consist of plutonium-239, plutonium-241, or any 
combination of those radionuclides.
    (f) A package containing liquid solutions of uranyl nitrate enriched 
in uranium-235 to a maximum of 2% by mass, with total plutonium and 
uranium-233 content not exceeding 0.1% of the mass of uranium-235 with a 
nitrogen-to-uranium atomic ratio (N/U) of 2.

[Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended by Amdt. 173-
248, 61 FR 18933, Apr. 29, 1996; 66 FR 45380, 45383, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.457  Transportation of fissile material, controlled shipments--specific requirements.

    Shipments of fissile material packages that have been assigned a 
transport index of greater than 10 for criticality control purposes in 
accordance with 10 CFR 71.59 must meet the requirements of this section 
and Sec. 173.441(a) or (b).
    (a) For fissile material, controlled shipments, the offeror or 
carrier, as appropriate, must incorporate transportation controls which:
    (1) Provide nuclear criticality safety;
    (2) Protect against loading, storing, or transporting that shipment 
with any other fissile material; and
    (3) Include in the shipping papers the description required by 
Sec. 172.203(d) of this subchapter.
    (b) Fissile material, controlled shipments must be transported:
    (1) In an exclusive use conveyance;
    (2) Except for shipments by aircraft, in a conveyance with an escort 
having the capability, equipment, authority, and instructions to provide 
administrative controls necessary to assure compliance with this 
section;
    (3) In a conveyance containing no other packages of any Class 7 
(radioactive) material required to bear one of the labels prescribed in 
Sec. 172.403 of this subchapter. Specific arrangements must be made 
between the offeror and the carrier, with instructions to that effect 
issued with the shipping papers; or
    (4) Under any other procedure approved by the Associate 
Administrator in accordance with part 107 of this subchapter.

[Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended by 66 FR 45379, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.459  Mixing of fissile material packages.

    (a) Mixing of fissile material packages with other types of Class 7 
(radioactive) materials is authorized only if the transport index of any 
single package does not exceed 10 and the total transport index in any 
conveyance or storage location does not exceed 50.
    (b) Fissile packages may be shipped with an external radiation level 
greater than 0.1 mSv/hr (10 mrem per hour) at 1 m (3.3 feet), and 
combined with other packages of the same or different designs in a 
fissile material, controlled shipment, under the conditions prescribed 
in Sec. 173.457, if:
    (1) Each package in the shipment has been assigned a transport index 
for criticality control purposes in accordance with the 10 CFR 71.59;
    (2) The nuclear criticality control transport index does not exceed 
10 for any single package;

[[Page 626]]

    (3) The total nuclear criticality control transport index does not 
exceed 100 for all packages in the shipment; and
    (4) Except as provided in Sec. 176.704(e) of this subchapter, the 
shipment is not transported by vessel.
    (c) A fissile material, controlled shipment of packages may be 
combined with other packages of the same or different design when each 
package has been assigned a nuclear criticality control transport index 
in accordance with 10 CFR 71.59, and may be combined with other fissile 
packages into a fissile material, controlled shipment under the 
conditions prescribed in Sec. 173.457, if:
    (1) The nuclear criticality control transport index which has been 
assigned in the package approval does not exceed 50 for any single 
package;
    (2) The total nuclear criticality control transport index for all 
packages in the shipment does not exceed 100; and
    (3) Except as provided in Sec. 176.704(e) of this subchapter, the 
shipment is not transported by vessel.

[Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended at 66 FR 45380, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.461  Demonstration of compliance with tests.

    (a) Compliance with the design requirements in Sec. 173.412 and the 
test requirements in Secs. 173.465 through 173.469 must be shown by any 
of the methods prescribed in this paragraph, or by a combination of 
these methods appropriate for the particular feature being evaluated:
    (1) Performance of tests with prototypes or samples of the specimens 
representing LSA-III, special form Class 7 (radioactive) material, or 
packaging, in which case the contents of the packaging for the test must 
simulate as closely as practicable the expected range of physical 
properties of the radioactive contents or packaging to be tested, must 
be prepared as normally presented for transport. The use of non-
radioactive substitute contents is encouraged provided that the results 
of the testing take into account the radioactive characteristics of the 
contents for which the package is being tested;
    (2) Reference to a previous, satisfactory demonstration of 
compliance of a sufficiently similar nature;
    (3) Performance of tests with models of appropriate scale 
incorporating those features that are significant with respect to the 
item under investigation, when engineering experience has shown results 
of those tests to be suitable for design purposes. When a scale model is 
used, the need for adjusting certain test parameters, such as the 
penetrator diameter or the compressive load, must be taken into account; 
or
    (4) Calculations or reasoned evaluation, using reliable and 
conservative procedures and parameters.
    (b) With respect to the initial conditions for the tests under 
Secs. 173.465 through 173.469, except for the water immersion tests, 
compliance must be based upon the assumption that the package is in 
equilibrium at an ambient temperature of 38  deg.C (100  deg.F).

[Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended by 63 FR 52850, 
Oct. 1, 1998]



Sec. 173.462  Preparation of specimens for testing.

    (a) Each specimen (i.e., sample, prototype or scale model) must be 
examined before testing to identify and record faults or damage, 
including:
    (1) Divergence from the specifications or drawings;
    (2) Defects in construction;
    (3) Corrosion or other deterioration; and
    (4) Distortion of features.
    (b) Any deviation found under paragraph (a) of this section from the 
specified design must be corrected or appropriately taken into account 
in the subsequent evaluation.
    (c) The containment system of the packaging must be clearly 
specified.
    (d) The external features of the specimen must be clearly identified 
so that reference may be made to any part of it.



Sec. 173.465  Type A packaging tests.

    (a) The packaging, with contents, must be capable of withstanding 
the water spray, free drop, stacking and penetration tests prescribed in 
this section. One prototype may be used for all

[[Page 627]]

tests if the requirements of paragraph (b) of this section are met.
    (b) Water spray test. The water spray test must precede each test or 
test sequence prescribed in this section. The water spray test must 
simulate exposure to rainfall of approximately 5 cm (2 inches) per hour 
for at least one hour. The time interval between the end of the water 
spray test and the beginning of the next test must be such that the 
water has soaked in to the maximum extent without appreciable drying of 
the exterior of the specimen. In the absence of evidence to the 
contrary, this interval may be assumed to be two hours if the water 
spray is applied from four different directions simultaneously. However, 
no time interval may elapse if the water spray is applied from each of 
the four directions consecutively.
    (c) Free drop test. The specimen must drop onto the target so as to 
suffer maximum damage to the safety features being tested, and:
    (1) The height of the drop measured from the lowest point of the 
specimen to the upper surface of the target may not be less than the 
distance specified in table 12, for the applicable package mass. The 
target must be as specified in Sec. 173.465(c)(5). Table 12 is as 
follows:

 Table 12--Free Drop Distance for Testing Packages to Normal Conditions
                              of Transport
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                   Packaging mass                     Free drop distance
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                 Kilograms (pounds)                    Meters    (Feet)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
< Mass 5000 (11,000)................................       1.2       (4)
5,000 (11,000) Mass to 10,000 (22,000)..............       0.9       (3)
10,000 (22,000) Mass to 15,000 (33,000).............       0.6       (2)
 15,000 (33,000) Mass....................       0.3       (1)
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (2) For packages containing fissile material, the free drop test 
specified in paragraph (c)(1) of this section must be preceded by a free 
drop from a height of 0.3 m (1 foot) on each corner, or in the case of 
cylindrical packages, onto each of the quarters of each rim.
    (3) For fiberboard or wood rectangular packages with a mass of 50 kg 
(110 pounds) or less, a separate specimen must be subjected to a free 
drop onto each corner from a height of 0.3 m (1 foot).
    (4) For cylindrical fiberboard packages with a mass of 100 kg (220 
pounds) or less, a separate specimen must be subjected to a free drop 
onto each of the quarters of each rim from a height of 0.3 m (1 foot).
    (5) The target for the free drop test must be a flat, horizontal 
surface of such mass and rigidity that any increase in its resistance to 
displacement or deformation upon impact by the specimen would not 
significantly increase the damage to the specimen.
    (d) Stacking test. (1) The specimen must be subjected for a period 
of at least 24 hours to a compressive load equivalent to the greater of 
the following:
    (i) Five times the mass of the actual package; or
    (ii) The equivalent of 13 kilopascals (1.9 psi) multiplied by the 
vertically projected area of the package.
    (2) The compressive load must be applied uniformly to two opposite 
sides of the specimen, one of which must be the base on which the 
package would normally rest.
    (e) Penetration test. For the penetration test, the specimen must be 
placed on a rigid, flat, horizontal surface that will not move 
significantly while the test is being performed.
    (1) A bar of 3.2 cm (1.25 inches) in diameter with a hemispherical 
end and a mass of 6 kg (13.2 pounds) must be dropped and directed to 
fall with its longitudinal axis vertical, onto the center of the weakest 
part of the specimen, so that, if it penetrates far enough, it will hit 
the containment system. The bar may not be significantly deformed by the 
test; and
    (2) The height of the drop of the bar measured from its lower end to 
the intended point of impact on the upper surface of the specimen must 
be 1 m (3.3 feet) or greater.

[Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended by Amdt. 173-
244, 61 FR 20753, May 8, 1996; 66 FR 45380, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.466  Additional tests for Type A packagings designed for liquids and gases.

    (a) In addition to the tests prescribed in Sec. 173.465, Type A 
packagings designed for liquids and gases must be capable of 
withstanding the following tests:

[[Page 628]]

    (1) Free drop test. The packaging specimen must drop onto the target 
so as to suffer the maximum damage to its containment. The height of the 
drop measured from the lowest part of the packaging specimen to the 
upper surface of the target must be 9 m (30 feet) or greater. The target 
must be as specified in Sec. 173.465(c)(5).
    (2) Penetration test. The specimen must be subjected to the test 
specified in Sec. 173.465(e) except that the height of the drop must be 
1.7 m (5.5 feet).
    (b) [Reserved]

[Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended at 66 FR 45380, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.467  Tests for demonstrating the ability of Type B and fissile materials packagings to withstand accident conditions in transportation.

    Each Type B packaging or packaging for fissile material must meet 
the test requirements prescribed in 10 CFR part 71 for ability to 
withstand accident conditions in transportation.



Sec. 173.468  Test for LSA-III material.

    (a) LSA-III Class 7 (radioactive) material must meet the test 
requirement of paragraph (b) of this section. Any differences between 
the material to be transported and the test material must be taken into 
account in determining whether the test requirements have been met.
    (b) Test method. (1) The specimen representing no less than the 
entire contents of the package must be immersed for 7 days in water at 
ambient temperature.
    (2) The volume of water to be used in the test must be sufficient to 
ensure that at the end of the test period the free volume of the 
unabsorbed and unreacted water remaining will be at least 10% of the 
volume of the specimen itself.
    (3) The water must have an initial pH of 6-8 and a maximum 
conductivity of 10 micromho/cm at 20  deg.C (68  deg.F).
    (4) The total activity of the free volume of water must be measured 
following the 7 day immersion test and must not exceed 0.1 
A2.



Sec. 173.469  Tests for special form Class 7 (radioactive) materials.

    (a) Special form Class 7 (radioactive) materials must meet the test 
requirements of paragraph (b) of this section. Each solid Class 7 
(radioactive) material or capsule specimen to be tested must be 
manufactured or fabricated so that it is representative of the actual 
solid material or capsule that will be transported with the proposed 
radioactive content duplicated as closely as practicable. Any 
differences between the material to be transported and the test 
material, such as the use of non-radioactive contents, must be taken 
into account in determining whether the test requirements have been met. 
The following additional conditions apply:
    (1) A different specimen may be used for each of the tests;
    (2) The specimen may not break or shatter when subjected to the 
impact, percussion, or bending tests;
    (3) The specimen may not melt or disperse when subjected to the heat 
test; and
    (4) After each test, leaktightness or indispersibility of the 
specimen must be determined by--
    (i) A method no less sensitive than the leaching assessment 
prescribed in paragraph (c) of this section. For a capsule resistant to 
corrosion by water, and which has an internal void volume greater than 
0.1 milliliter, an alternative to the leaching assessment is a 
demonstration of leaktightness of 10-4 torr-1/s (1.3 x 
10-4 atm-cm3/s) based on air at 25  deg.C (77 
deg.F) and one atmosphere differential pressure for solid radioactive 
content, or 10-6 torr-1/s (1.3 x 10-6 atm-
cm3/s) for liquid or gaseous radioactive content; or
    (ii) A specimen that comprises or simulates Class 7 (radioactive) 
material contained in a sealed capsule need not be subjected to the 
leaktightness procedure specified in this section provided it is 
alternatively subjected to any of the tests prescribed in ISO/TR4826-
1979(E), ``Sealed Radioactive Sources Leak Test Methods.''
    (b) Test methods.--(1) Impact Test. The specimen must fall onto the 
target from a height of 9 m (30 feet) or greater. The target must be as 
specified in Sec. 173.465(c)(5).

[[Page 629]]

    (2) Percussion Test. (i) The specimen must be placed on a sheet of 
lead that is supported by a smooth solid surface, and struck by the flat 
face of a steel billet so as to produce an impact equivalent to that 
resulting from a free drop of 1.4 kg (3 pounds) through 1 m (3.3 feet).
    (ii) The flat face of the billet must be 2.5 cm (1 inch) in diameter 
with the edges rounded off to a radius of 3 mm 0.3 mm (0.12 
inch 0.012 inch).
    (iii) The lead must be of hardness number 3.5 to 4.5 on the Vickers 
scale and thickness 2.5 cm (1 inch) or greater, and must cover an area 
greater than that covered by the specimen.
    (iv) A fresh surface of lead must be used for each impact.
    (v) The billet must strike the specimen so as to cause maximum 
damage.
    (3) Bending test. (i) This test applies only to long, slender 
sources with a length of 10 cm (4 inches) or greater and a length to 
width ratio of 10 or greater.
    (ii) The specimen must be rigidly clamped in a horizontal position 
so that one half of its length protrudes from the face of the clamp.
    (iii) The orientation of the specimen must be such that the specimen 
will suffer maximum damage when its free end is struck by the flat face 
of a steel billet.
    (iv) The billet must strike the specimen so as to produce an impact 
equivalent to that resulting from a free vertical drop of 1.4 kg (3 
pounds) through 1 m (3.3 feet).
    (v) The flat face of the billet must be 2.5 cm (1 inch) in diameter 
with the edges rounded off to a radius of 3 mm 0.3 mm (.12 
inch 0.012 inch).
    (4) Heat test. The specimen must be heated in air to a temperature 
of not less than 800  deg.C (1475  deg.F), held at that temperature for 
a period of 10 minutes, and then allowed to cool.
    (c) Leaching assessment methods. (1) For indispersible solid 
material--
    (i) The specimen must be immersed for seven days in water at ambient 
temperature. The water must have a pH range of 6 to 8 and a maximum 
conductivity of 10 micromho per centimeter at 20  deg.C (68  deg.F).
    (ii) The water with specimen must then be heated to a temperature of 
50  deg.C 5 deg. (122  deg.F 9 deg.) and 
maintained at this temperature for four hours.
    (iii) The activity of the water must then be determined.
    (iv) The specimen must then be stored for at least seven days in 
still air of relative humidity not less than 90 percent at 30  deg.C (86 
 deg.F).
    (v) The specimen must then be immersed in water under the same 
conditions as in paragraph (c)(1)(i) of this section, and the water with 
specimen must be heated to 50 C 5 deg. (122  deg.F 
9 deg.) and maintained at that temperature for four hours.
    (vi) The activity of the water must then be determined. The 
activities determined in paragraph (c)(1)(iii) of this section and this 
paragraph, (c)(1)(vi), may not exceed 2 kilobecquerels (0.05 
microcurie).
    (2) For encapsulated material--
    (i) The specimen must be immersed in water at ambient temperature. 
The water must have a pH of 6-8 and a maximum conductivity of 10 
micromho per centimeter.
    (ii) The water and specimen must be heated to a temperature of 50 
deg.C 5 deg. (122  deg.F 9 deg.) and maintained 
at this temperature for four hours.
    (iii) The activity of the water must then be determined.
    (iv) The specimen must then be stored for at least seven days in 
still air at a temperature of 30  deg.C (86  deg.F) or greater.
    (v) The process in paragraphs (c)(2)(i), (c)(2)(ii), and (c)(2)(iii) 
of this section must be repeated.
    (vi) The activity determined in paragraph (c)(2)(iii) of this 
section may not exceed 2 kilobecquerels (0.05 microcurie).
    (d) A specimen that comprises or simulates Class 7 (radioactive) 
material contained in a sealed capsule need not be subjected to--
    (1) The impact test and the percussion test of this section provided 
that the specimen is alternatively subjected to the Class 4 impact test 
prescribed in ISO 2919-1980(e), ``Sealed Radioactive Sources-
Classification'' (see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter); and
    (2) The heat test of this section, provided the specimen is 
alternatively subjected to the Class 6 temperature

[[Page 630]]

test specified in the International Organization for Standardization 
document ISO 2919-1980(e), ``Sealed Radioactive Sources-
Classification.'' (see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter)

[Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended at 63 FR 37461, 
July 10, 1998; 64 FR 51919, Sept. 27, 1999; 66 FR 45184, 45380, 45381, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 173.471  Requirements for U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission approved packages.

    In addition to the applicable requirements of the U.S. Nuclear 
Regulatory Commission (USNRC) and other requirements of this subchapter, 
any offeror of a Type B, Type B(U), Type B(M), or fissile material 
package that has been approved by the USNRC in accordance with 10 CFR 
part 71 must also comply with the following requirements:
    (a) The offeror shall be registered with the USNRC as a party to the 
packaging approval, and make the shipment in compliance with the terms 
of the packaging approval;
    (b) The outside of each package must be durably and legibly marked 
with the package identification marking indicated in the USNRC packaging 
approval;
    (c) Each shipping paper related to the shipment of the package must 
bear the package identification marking indicated in the USNRC packaging 
approval;
    (d) Before export shipment of the package, the offeror shall obtain 
a U.S. Competent Authority Certificate for that package design, or if 
one has already been issued, the offeror shall register in writing 
(including a description of the quality assurance program required by 10 
CFR part 71) with the U.S. Competent Authority as a user of the 
certificate. (Note: The person who originally applies for a U.S. 
Competent Authority Certificate will be registered automatically.) The 
registration request must be sent to the Associate Administrator for 
Hazardous Materials Safety (DHM-23), Department of Transportation, 400 
Seventh Street, SW., Washington DC 20590-0001. Alternatively, the 
application with any attached supporting documentation in an appropriate 
format may be submitted by facsimile (fax) to (202) 366-3753 or (202) 
366-3650, or by electronic mail (e-mail) to ``[email protected].'' 
Upon registration, the offeror will be furnished with a copy of the 
certificate. The offeror shall then submit a copy of the U.S. Competent 
Authority Certificate applying to that package design to the national 
competent authority of each country into or through which the package 
will be transported, unless the offeror has documentary evidence that a 
copy has already been furnished; and
    (e) Each request for a U.S. Competent Authority Certificate as 
required by the IAEA regulations must be submitted in writing to the 
Associate Administrator. The request must be in triplicate and include 
copies of the applicable USNRC packaging approval, USNRC Quality 
Assurance Program approval number, and a reproducible 22 cm x 30 cm 
(8.5' x 11') drawing showing the make-up of the package. The request and 
accompanying documentation must be sent to the Associate Administrator 
for Hazardous Materials Safety (DHM-23), Department of Transportation, 
400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington DC 20590-0001. Alternatively, the 
application with any attached supporting documentation in an appropriate 
format may be submitted by facsimile (fax) to (202) 366-3753 or (202) 
366-3650, or by electronic mail (e-mail) to ``[email protected].'' 
Each request is considered in the order in which it is received. To 
allow sufficient time for consideration, requests must be received at 
least 90 days before the requested effective date.

[Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended at 66 FR 45379, 
Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 61014, Sept. 27, 2002]



Sec. 173.472  Requirements for exporting DOT Specification Type B and fissile packages.

    (a) Any offeror who exports a DOT Specification Type B or fissile 
material package authorized by Sec. 173.416 or Sec. 173.417 shall comply 
with paragraphs (b) through (f) of this section.
    (b) The shipment must be made in accordance with the conditions of 
the U.S. Certificate of Competent Authority.
    (c) The outside of each package must be durably and legibly marked 
with the

[[Page 631]]

package identification marking indicated in the U.S. Competent Authority 
Certificate.
    (d) Each shipping paper related to the shipment of the package must 
bear the package identification marking indicated in the U.S. Competent 
Authority Certificate.
    (e) Before export of the package, the offeror shall obtain a U.S. 
Competent Authority Certificate for that package design, or if one has 
already been issued, the offeror shall register in writing (including a 
description of the quality assurance program required by 10 CFR part 71, 
subpart H, or 49 CFR 173.474 and 173.475) with the U.S. Competent 
Authority as a user of the certificate. Upon registration, the offeror 
will be furnished with a copy of the certificate. The offeror shall then 
submit a copy of the U.S. Competent Authority Certificate applying to 
that package design to the national competent authority of each country 
into or through which the package will be transported, unless the 
offeror has documentary evidence that a copy has already been furnished.
    (f) Each request for a U.S. Competent Authority Certificate as 
required by the IAEA regulations must be submitted in writing to the 
Associate Administrator. The request must be in triplicate and must 
include a description of the quality assurance program required by 10 
CFR part 71, subpart H, or 49 CFR 173.474 and 173.475, and a 
reproducible 22 cm x 30 cm (8.5' x 11') drawing showing the make-up of 
the package. A copy of the USNRC quality assurance program approval will 
satisfy the requirement for describing the quality assurance program. 
The request and accompanying documentation may be sent by mail or other 
delivery service. Alternatively, the request with any attached 
supporting documentation submitted in an appropriate format may be sent 
by facsimile (fax) to (202) 366-3753 or (202) 366-3650, or by electronic 
mail (e-mail) to ``[email protected].'' Each request is considered in 
the order in which it is received. To allow sufficient time for 
consideration, requests must be received at least 90 days before the 
requested effective date.

[Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended at 66 FR 45379, 
Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 61014, Sept. 27, 2002]



Sec. 173.473  Requirements for foreign-made packages.

    In addition to other applicable requirements of this subchapter, 
each offeror of a foreign-made Type B, Type B(U), Type B(M), or fissile 
material package for which a Competent Authority Certificate is required 
by IAEA's ``Regulations for the Safe Transport of Radioactive Materials, 
Safety Series No. 6,'' shall also comply with the following 
requirements:
    (a) Prior to the shipment of such a package of Class 7 (radioactive) 
materials into or from the U.S., the offeror shall--
    (1) Have the foreign competent authority certificate revalidated by 
the U.S. Competent Authority, unless this has been done previously. Each 
request for revalidation must be submitted to the Associate 
Administrator. The request must be in triplicate, contain all the 
information required by Section VII of the IAEA regulations in Safety 
Series No. 6 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 171.7 of this 
subchapter), and include a copy in English of the foreign competent 
authority certificate. Alternatively, the request with any attached 
supporting documentation submitted in an appropriate format may be sent 
by facsimile (fax) to (202) 366-3753 or (202) 366-3650, or by electronic 
mail to ``[email protected].'' Each request is considered in the 
order in which it is received.
    To allow sufficient time for consideration, requests must be 
received at least 90 days before the requested effective date;
    (2) Register in writing with the U.S. Competent Authority as a user 
of the package covered by the foreign competent authority certificate 
and its U.S. revalidation. Alternatively, the registration request with 
any attached supporting documentation submitted in an appropriate format 
may be sent by facsimile (fax) to (202) 366-3753 or (202) 366-3650, or 
by electronic mail (e-mail) to ``[email protected].'' If the

[[Page 632]]

offeror is requesting the revalidation, registration is automatic; and
    (3) Supply to the carrier, upon request, the applicable competent 
authority certificates. However, the competent authority certificates 
are not required to accompany the packages to which they apply.
    (b) The outside of each package must be durably and legibly marked 
with the competent authority identification marking indicated on the 
Competent Authority Certificate and revalidation.
    (c) Each shipping paper for a shipment of Class 7 (radioactive) 
materials must bear a notation of the package identification marking 
indicated on the competent authority certificate or revalidation.
    (d) All requirements of the foreign competent authority certificate 
and the U.S. Competent Authority revalidation must be fulfilled.

[Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended at 66 FR 45379, 
Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 16015, Sept. 27, 2002]



Sec. 173.474  Quality control for construction of packaging.

    Prior to the first use of any packaging for the shipment of Class 7 
(radioactive) material, the offeror shall determine that--
    (a) The packaging meets the quality of design and construction 
requirements as specified in this subchapter; and
    (b) The effectiveness of the shielding, containment and, when 
required, the heat transfer characteristics of the package, are within 
the limits specified for the package design.



Sec. 173.475  Quality control requirements prior to each shipment of Class 7 (radioactive) materials.

    Before each shipment of any Class 7 (radioactive) materials package, 
the offeror must ensure, by examination or appropriate tests, that--
    (a) The packaging is proper for the contents to be shipped;
    (b) The packaging is in unimpaired physical condition, except for 
superficial marks;
    (c) Each closure device of the packaging, including any required 
gasket, is properly installed, secured, and free of defects;
    (d) For fissile material, each moderator and neutron absorber, if 
required, is present and in proper condition;
    (e) Each special instruction for filling, closing, and preparation 
of the packaging for shipment has been followed;
    (f) Each closure, valve, or other opening of the containment system 
through which the radioactive content might escape is properly closed 
and sealed;
    (g) Each packaging containing liquid in excess of an A2 
quantity and intended for air shipment has been tested to show that it 
will not leak under an ambient atmospheric pressure of not more than 25 
kPa, absolute (3.6 psia). The test must be conducted on the entire 
containment system, or on any receptacle or vessel within the 
containment system, to determine compliance with this requirement;
    (h) The internal pressure of the containment system will not exceed 
the design pressure during transportation; and
    (i) External radiation and contamination levels are within the 
allowable limits specified in this subchapter.



Sec. 173.476  Approval of special form Class 7 (radioactive) materials.

    (a) Each offeror of special form Class 7 (radioactive) materials 
must maintain on file for at least one year after the latest shipment, 
and provide to the Associate Administrator on request, a complete safety 
analysis, including documentation of any tests, demonstrating that the 
special form material meets the requirements of Sec. 173.469. An IAEA 
Certificate of Competent Authority issued for the special form material 
may be used to satisfy this requirement.
    (b) Prior to the first export shipment of a special form Class 7 
(radioactive) material from the United States, each offeror shall obtain 
a U.S. Competent Authority Certificate for the specific material. For 
special form material manufactured outside the United States, an IAEA 
Certificate of Competent Authority from the country of origin may be 
used to meet this requirement.
    (c) Each request for a U.S. Competent Authority Certificate as 
required by

[[Page 633]]

the IAEA regulations must be submitted in writing, in triplicate, by 
mail or other delivery service to the Associate Administrator. 
Alternatively, the request with any attached supporting documentation 
submitted in an appropriate format may be sent by facsimile (fax) to 
(202) 366-3753 or (202) 366-3650, or by electronic mail (e-mail) to 
``[email protected]''. Each request is considered in the order in 
which it is received. To allow sufficient time for consideration, 
requests must be received at least 90 days before the requested 
effective date. Each petition for a U.S. Competent Authority Certificate 
must include the following information:
    (1) A detailed description of the material, or if a capsule, a 
detailed description of the contents. Particular reference must be made 
to both physical and chemical states;
    (2) A detailed statement of the capsule design and dimensions, 
including complete engineering drawings [22cm x 30cm (8\1/2\ inches x 11 
inches)] and schedules of material, and methods of construction;
    (3) A statement of the tests that have been made and their results; 
or evidence based on calculative methods to show that the material is 
able to pass the tests; or other evidence that the special form Class 7 
(radioactive) material complies with Sec. 173.469; and
    (4) For the original request for a Competent Authority Certificate, 
evidence of a quality assurance program.
    (d) Paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section do not apply in those 
cases where A1 equals A2 and the material is not 
required to be described on the shipping papers as ``Radioactive 
Material, Special Form, n.o.s.''

[Amdt. 173-244, 60 FR 50307, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended at 66 FR 45379, 
Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 61015, Sept. 27, 2002]

Subparts J-O [Reserved]

                    Appendix A to Part 173 [Reserved]

Appendix B to Part 173--Procedure for Testing Chemical Compatibility and 
         Rate of Permeation in Plastic Packaging and Receptacles

    1. The purpose of this procedure is to determine the chemical 
compatibility and permeability of liquid hazardous materials packaged in 
plastic packaging and receptacles. Alternatives for this procedure are 
permitted as specified in Sec. 173.24(e)(3)(iii) of this subchapter.
    2. Compatibility and rate of permeation are determined by subjecting 
full size plastic containers (or smaller containers as permitted in 
paragraph 4 of this appendix) and hazardous material lading to one of 
the following combinations of time and temperature:
    a. Test Method 1: 180 days at a temperature no lower than 18  deg.C. 
(64  deg.F.)
    b. Test Method 2: 28 days at a temperature no lower than 50  deg.C. 
(122  deg.F.)
    c. Test Method 3: 14 days at a temperature no lower than 60  deg.C. 
(140  deg.F.)
    3. Regardless of which test method is used, at least three sample 
containers shall be tested for each combination of hazardous material 
and size and design of container. Fill containers to rated capacity with 
the specific hazardous material (at the concentration to be transported) 
and close as for shipment. For the first and last 24 hours of storage 
under the selected test method, place the containers with closures 
downward, except that containers fitted with a vent are so placed on 
each occasion for five minutes only.
    4. For testing under Test Method 2 or 3 in those instances where it 
is not practicable to use full size containers, smaller containers may 
be used. The small container shall be manufactured by the same process 
as the larger container (for example, using the same method of molding 
and processing temperatures) and be made of identical resins, pigments 
and additives.
    5. Determine filled container weight or net weight of contents both 
before and after storage under the selected test method. Rate of 
permeation is determined from loss of hazardous materials contents, 
during the conduct of the test, expressed as a percentage of the 
original weight.
    6. After storage under the selected test method, the container shall 
be drained, rinsed, filled to rated capacity with water

[[Page 634]]

and, with filled container at ambient temperature, dropped from a height 
determined in accordance with Sec. 178.603(e) of this subchapter onto a 
rigid non-resilient, flat and horizontal surface.
    7. Each of the following constitute test failure:
    a. Visible evidence of permanent deformation due to vapor pressure 
build-up or collapse of walls, deterioration, swelling, crazing, 
cracking, excessive corrosion, oxidization, embrittlement, leakage, 
rupture or other defects likely to cause premature failure or a 
hazardous condition.
    b. For materials meeting the definition of a poison according to 
this subchapter, a rate of permeation in excess of 0.5% determined over 
the test period. For all other hazardous materials, a rate of permeation 
in excess of 2.0% determined over the test period.

[Amdt. 173-176, 49 FR 24691, June 14, 1984, as amended by Amdt. 173-224, 
55 FR 52670 Dec. 21, 1990; 56 FR 66279, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 173-234, 58 
FR 51533, Oct. 1, 1993; 66 FR 45379, Aug. 28, 2001]

   Appendix C to Part 173--Procedure for Base-level Vibration Testing

    Base-level vibration testing shall be conducted as follows:
    1. Three sample packagings, selected at random, must be filled and 
closed as for shipment. A non-hazardous material may be used in place of 
the hazardous material if it has essentially the same physical 
characteristics.
    2. The three packages must be placed on a vibrating platform that 
has a vertical double-amplitude (peak-to-peak displacement) of one inch. 
The packages should be constrained horizontally to prevent them from 
falling off the platform, but must be left free to move vertically, 
bounce and rotate.
    3. The test must be performed continuously for one hour at a 
frequency that causes each package to be raised from the vibrating 
platform to such a degree that a piece of material of approximately 1.6 
mm (0.063 inch) thickness (such as steel strapping or paperboard) can be 
passed between the bottom of any package and the platform.
    4. Immediately following the period of vibration, each package shall 
be removed from the platform, turned on its side and observed for any 
evidence of leakage.
    5. Rupture or leakage from any of the packages constitutes failure 
of the test.

[Amdt. 173-224, 55 FR 52671, Dec. 21, 1990]

Appendix D to Part 173--Test Methods for Dynamite (Explosive, Blasting, 
                                 Type A)

                    1. Test method D-1--Leakage Test

    A wooden stick, 114 mm (4.5 inches) long and 4.8 mm (0.2 inch) inch 
in diameter, with a sharpened end is used to punch 5 holes in one end of 
the wrapper of a dynamite cartridge. A cork stopper is placed on the 
bottom of a glass volumetric cylinder. The dynamite cartridge is placed, 
perforated end down, resting on the cork stopper in the cylinder. The 
entire assembly is placed in an oven at 38  deg.C (100  deg.F) for 48 
hours and then examined visually for evidence of leakage.

             2. Test method D-2--Centrifugal Exudation Test

    The test apparatus consists of a glass tube, 135 mm (5.3 inches) 
long and one inch in diameter, with both ends open, and is assembled in 
the following manner:
    (a) Close the bottom with a plastic plug of diameter equal to the 
inner diameter of the glass tube;
    (b) Place a small amount of absorbent cotton on top of the plug;
    (c) Place a plastic disk that matches the inner diameter to the 
glass tube and has seven small perforations on top of the cotton; and
    (d) Place 10 g (0.35 ounce) of the dynamite sample on top of the 
disk.

The assembled glass tube is then placed in a hand-operated centrifuge 
and spun for one minute at 600 rpm (revolutions per minute). The 
dynamite sample is then removed from the glass tube and weighed to 
determine the percent of weight loss.

             3. Test method D-3--Compression Exudation Test

    The entire apparatus for this test is shown in Figure 1 of this 
appendix. The test is conducted using the following procedures:
    (a) A glass tube, 135 mm (5.3 inches) long and one inch in diameter, 
is held on a wooden base;
    (b) A small amount of absorbent cotton is placed into the bottom of 
the glass tube;
    (c) Ten g (0.35 ounce) of dynamite sample are placed on top of the 
cotton in the glass tube;
    (d) A small amount of absorbent cotton is placed on top of the 
dynamite sample;
    (e) A plastic disk that matches the inner diameter of the glass tube 
and has seven small perforations is placed on top of the cotton;

[[Page 635]]

    (f) A plastic plug matching the inner diameter of the glass tube is 
then placed on top of the disk;
    (g) The glass tube assembly is placed under the compression rod, and 
compression is applied by means of the weight on the metal lever rod. 
The sample is compressed for one minute; and
    (h) The dynamite sample is then removed from the glass tube and 
weighed to determine the percent of weight loss.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.067

                  Appendixes E-G to Part 173 [Reserved]

 Appendix H to Part 173--Method of Testing for Sustained Combustibility

                                1. Method

    The method describes a procedure for determining if the material 
when heated under the test conditions and exposed to an external source 
of flame applied in a standard manner sustains combustion.

                       2. Principle of the method

    A metal block with a concave depression (test portion well) is 
heated to a specified temperature. A specified volume of the material 
under test is transferred to the well, and its ability to sustain 
combustion is noted after application and subsequent removal of a 
standard flame under specified conditions.

                              3. Apparatus

    A combustibility tester consisting of a block of aluminum alloy or 
other corrosion-resistant metal of high thermal conductivity is used. 
The block has a concave well and a pocket drilled to take a thermometer. 
A small gas jet assembly on a swivel is attached to the block. The 
handle and gas inlet for the gas jet may be fitted at any convenient 
angle to the gas jet. A suitable apparatus is shown in Figure 5.1 of the 
UN Recommendations, and the essential dimensions are given in Figures 
5.1 and 5.2 of the UN Recommendations. The following equipment is 
needed:
    (a) Gauge, for checking that the height of the center of the gas jet 
above the top of the test portion well is 2.2 mm (see Figure 5.1);
    (b) Thermometer, mercury in glass, for horizontal operation, with a 
sensitivity not less than 1 mm/  deg.C, or other measuring device of 
equivalent sensitivity permitting reading at 0.5  deg.C intervals. When 
in position in the

[[Page 636]]

block, the thermometer bulb must be surrounded with thermally conducting 
thermoplastic compound;
    (c) Hotplate, fitted with a temperature-control device. (Other types 
of apparatus with suitable temperature-control facilities may be 
employed to heat the metal block);
    (d) Stopwatch, or other suitable timing device;
    (e) Syringe, capable of delivering 2 mL to an accuracy of 
0.1 mL; and
    (f) Fuel source, butane test fuel.

                               4. Sampling

    The sample must be representative of the material to be tested and 
must be supplied and kept in a tightly closed container prior to test. 
Because of the possibility of loss of volatile constituents, the sample 
must receive only the minimum treatment necessary to ensure its 
homogeneity. After removing each test portion, the sample container must 
be immediately closed tightly to ensure that no volatile components 
escape from the container; if this closure is incomplete, an entirely 
new sample must be taken.

                              5. Procedure

    Carry out the determination in triplicate.
    WARNING--Do not carry out the test in a small confined area (for 
example a glove box) because of the hazard of explosions.
    (a) It is essential that the apparatus be set up in a completely 
draft-free area (see warning) and in the absence of strong light to 
facilitate observation of flash, flame, etc.
    (b) Place the metal block on the hotplate or heat the metal block by 
other suitable means so that its temperature, as indicated by the 
thermometer placed in the metal block, is maintained at the specified 
temperature within a tolerance of 1  deg.C. For the 
appropriate test temperature, see paragraph 5.(h) of this appendix. 
Correct this temperature for the difference in barometric pressure from 
the standard atmospheric pressure (101.3 kPa) by raising the test 
temperature for a higher pressure or lowering the test temperature for a 
lower pressure by 1.0  deg.C for each 4 kPa difference. Ensure that the 
top of the metal block is exactly horizontal. Use the gauge to check 
that the jet is 2.2 mm above the top of the well when in the test 
position.
    (c) Light the butane test fuel with the jet away from the test 
position (i.e. in the ``off'' position, away from the well). Adjust the 
size of the flame so that it is 8 mm to 9 mm high and approximately 5 mm 
wide.
    (d) Using the syringe, take from the sample container at least 2 mL 
of the sample and rapidly transfer a test portion of 2 mL 
0.1 mL to the well of the combustibility tester and 
immediately start the timing device.
    (e) After a heating time of 60 seconds (s), by which time the test 
portion is deemed to have reached its equilibrium temperature, and if 
the test fluid has not ignited, swing the test flame into the test 
position over the edge of the pool of liquid. Maintain it in this 
position for 15 s and then return it to the ``off'' position while 
observing the behavior of the test portion. The test flame must remain 
lighted throughout the test.
    (f) For each test observe and record:
    (i) whether there is ignition and sustained combustion or flashing, 
or neither, of the test portion before the test flame is moved into the 
test position;
    (ii) whether the test portion ignites while the test flame is in the 
test position, and, if so, how long combustion is sustained after the 
test flame is returned to the ``off'' position.
    (g) If sustained combustion interpreted in accordance with paragraph 
6. of this appendix is not found, repeat the complete procedure with new 
test portions, but with a heating time of 30 s.
    (h) If sustained combustion interpreted in accordance with paragraph 
6. of this appendix is not found at a test temperature of 60.5  deg.C 
(141  deg.F), repeat the complete procedure with new test portions, but 
at a test temperature of 75  deg.C (167  deg.F). In the case of a 
material which has a flash point above 60.5  deg.C (141  deg.F) and 
below 93  deg.C (200  deg.F), if sustained combustion interpreted in 
accordance with paragraph 6. of this appendix is not found at a test 
temperature of 5  deg.C (9  deg.F) above its flash point, repeat the 
complete procedure with new test portions, but at a test temperature of 
20  deg.C (36  deg.F) above its flash point.

                    6. Interpretation of observations

    The material must be assessed either as not sustaining combustion or 
as sustaining combustion. Sustained combustion must be reported at 
either of the heating times if one of the following occurs with either 
of the test portions:
    (a) When the test flame is in the ``off'' position, the test portion 
ignites and sustains combustion;
    (b) The test portion ignites while the test flame is in the test 
position for 15 s, and sustains combustion for more than 15 s after the 
test flame has been returned to the ``off'' position.

    Note to paragraph 6 of this appendix: Intermittent flashing may not 
be interpreted as sustained combustion. Normally, at the end of 15 s, 
the combustion has either clearly ceased or continues. In cases of 
doubt, the material must be deemed to sustain combustion.

[Amdt. 173-241, 59 FR 67517, Dec. 29, 1994, as amended by Amdt. 173-255, 
61 FR 50627, Sept. 26, 1996; 66 FR 45381, Aug. 28, 2001]

[[Page 637]]



PART 174--CARRIAGE BY RAIL--Table of Contents




                     Subpart A--General Requirements

Sec.
174.1  Purpose and scope.
174.3  Unacceptable hazardous materials shipments.
174.5  Carrier's materials and supplies.
174.9  Inspection and acceptance.
174.14  Movements to be expedited.
174.16  Removal and disposition of hazardous materials at destination.
174.20  Local or carrier restrictions.

                Subpart B--General Operating Requirements

174.24  Shipping papers.
174.26  Notice to train crews.
174.50  Nonconforming or leaking packages.

          Subpart C--General Handling and Loading Requirements

174.55  General requirements.
174.57  Cleaning cars.
174.59  Marking and placarding of rail cars.
174.61  Transport vehicles and freight containers on flat cars.
174.63  Portable tanks, IM portable tanks, IBCs, cargo tanks, and multi-
          unit tank car tanks.
174.67  Tank car unloading.
174.81  Segregation of hazardous materials.

   Subpart D--Handling of Placarded Rail Cars, Transport Vehicles and 
                           Freight Containers

174.82  General requirements for the handling of placarded rail cars, 
          transport vehicles, freight containers, and bulk packages.
174.83  Switching placarded rail cars, transport vehicles, freight 
          containers, and bulk packagings.
174.84  Position in train of loaded placarded rail cars, transport 
          vehicles, freight containers or bulk packagings when 
          accompanied by guards or technical escorts.
174.85  Position in train of placarded cars, transport vehicles, freight 
          containers, and bulk packagings.
174.86  Maximum allowable operating speed.

                Subpart E--Class I (Explosive) Materials

174.101  Loading Class 1 (explosive) materials.
174.102  Forbidden mixed loading and storage.
174.103  Disposition of damaged or astray shipments.
174.104  Division 1.1 or 1.2 (explosive) materials; car selection, 
          preparation, inspection, and certification.
174.105  Routing shipments, Division 1.1 or 1.2 (explosive) materials.
174.106  ``Order-Notify'' or ``C.O.D.'' shipments, Division 1.1 or 1.2 
          (explosive) materials.
174.110  Car magazine.
174.112  Loading Division 1.3 and Division 1.2 (explosive) materials 
          (Also see Sec. 174.101).
174.114  Record to be made of change of seals on ``Cars loaded with 
          Division 1.1 or 1.2 (explosive) materials''.
174.115  Loading Division 1.4 (explosive) materials.

     Subpart F--Detailed Requirements for Class 2 (Gases) Materials

174.200  Special handling requirements.
174.201  Class 2 (gases) material cylinders.
174.204  Tank car delivery of gases, including cryogenic liquids.
174.290  Materials extremely poisonous by inhalation shipped by, for, or 
          to the Department of Defense.

    Subpart G--Detailed Requirements for Class 3 (Flammable Liquid) 
                                Materials

174.300  Special handling requirements.
174.304  Class 3 (flammable liquid) materials in tank cars.

Subparts H-I [Reserved]

 Subpart J--Detailed Requirements for Division 6.1 (Poisonous) Materials

174.600  Special handling requirements for materials extremely poisonous 
          by inhalation.
174.615  Cleaning cars.
174.680  Division 6.1 (poisonous) materials with foodstuffs.

  Subpart K--Detailed Requirements for Class 7 (Radioactive) Materials

174.700  Special handling requirements for Class 7 (radioactive) 
          materials.
174.715  Cleanliness of transport vehicles after use.
174.750  Incidents involving leakage.

    Authority: 49 U.S.C. 5101-5127; 49 CFR 1.53.



                     Subpart A--General Requirements



Sec. 174.1  Purpose and scope.

    This part prescribes requirements in addition to those contained in 
parts 171, 172, 173, and 179 of this subchapter, to be observed with 
respect to the

[[Page 638]]

transportation of hazardous materials in or on rail cars.

[Amdt. 174-26, 41 FR 16092, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 174-26A, 
41 FR 40685, Sept. 20, 1976; Amdt. 174-74, 58 FR 51533, Oct. 1, 1993]



Sec. 174.3  Unacceptable hazardous materials shipments.

    No person may accept for transportation or transport by rail any 
shipment of hazardous material that is not in conformance with the 
requirements of this subchapter.

[Amdt. 174-83, 61 FR 28677, June 5, 1996]



Sec. 174.5  Carrier's materials and supplies.

    This subchapter applies to the transportation of a carrier's 
materials and supplies moving by rail, except that the shipper's 
certification is not required when these materials and supplies are 
being transported by the carrier who owns them. The requirements of this 
subchapter do not apply to railway torpedoes or fusees when carried in 
engines or rail cars. Railway torpedoes must be in closed metal boxes 
when not in use.

[Amdt. 174-26B, 41 FR 57071, Dec. 30, 1976]



Sec. 174.9  Inspection and acceptance.

    At each location where a hazardous material is accepted for 
transportation or placed in a train, the carrier shall inspect each rail 
car containing the hazardous material, at ground level, for required 
markings, labels, placards, securement of closures and leakage. This 
inspection may be performed in conjunction with inspections required 
under parts 215 and 232 of this title.

[Amdt. 174-83, 61 FR 28677, June 5, 1996]



Sec. 174.14  Movements to be expedited.

    (a) A carrier must forward each shipment of hazardous materials 
promptly and within 48 hours (Saturdays, Sundays, and holidays 
excluded), after acceptance at the originating point or receipt at any 
yard, transfer station, or interchange point, except that where biweekly 
or weekly service only is performed, a shipment of hazardous materials 
must be forwarded on the first available train.
    (b) A tank car loaded with any Division 2.1 (flammable gas), 
Division 2.3 (poisonous gas) or Class 3 (flammable liquid) material, may 
not be received and held at any point, subject to forwarding orders, so 
as to defeat the purpose of this section or of Sec. 174.204 of this 
subchapter.

[Amdt. 174-26, 41 FR 16092, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 174-68, 
55 FR 52677, Dec. 21, 1990]



Sec. 174.16  Removal and disposition of hazardous materials at destination.

    (a) Delivery at non-agency stations. A shipment of Class 1 
(explosive) materials may not be unloaded at non-agency stations unless 
the consignee is there to receive it or unless properly locked and 
secure storage facilities are provided at that point for its protection. 
If delivery cannot be so made, the shipment must be taken to next or 
nearest agency station for delivery.
    (b) Delivery at agency stations. A carrier shall require the 
consignee of each shipment of hazardous materials to remove the shipment 
from carrier's property within 48 hours (exclusive of Saturdays, 
Sundays, and holidays) after notice of arrival has been sent or given. 
If not so removed, the carrier shall immediately dispose of the 
shipments as follows:
    (1) Division 1.1 or 1.2 (explosive) materials: If safe storage is 
available, by storage at the owner's expense; if safe storage is not 
available, by return to the shipper, sale, or destruction under 
supervision of a competent person; or if safety requires, by destruction 
under supervision of a competent person.
    (2) Hazardous materials, except Division 1.1 or 1.2 (explosive) 
materials, in carload shipments: By storage on the carrier's property; 
by storage on other than the carrier's property, if safe storage on the 
carrier's property is not available; or by sale at expiration of 15 
calendar days after notice of arrival has been sent or given to the 
consignee, provided the consignor has been notified of the non-delivery 
at the expiration of a 48-hour period and orders for disposition have 
not been received.
    (3) Hazardous materials, except Division 1.1 or 1.2 (Class A 
explosive) materials, in less-than-carload shipments: By return to the 
shipper if notice of non-delivery

[[Page 639]]

was requested and given the consignor as prescribed by the carrier's 
tariff, and orders for return to shipper have been received; by storage 
on the carrier's property; by storage on other than the carrier's 
property, if safe storage on carrier's property is not available; or by 
sale at expiration of 15 calendar days after notice of arrival has been 
sent or given to the consignee, provided the consignor has been notified 
of non-delivery at expiration of a 48-hour period and orders for 
disposition have not been received.

[Amdt. 174-26, 41 FR 16092, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 174-68, 
55 FR 52677, Dec. 21, 1990; 66 FR 45383, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 174.20  Local or carrier restrictions.

    (a) When local conditions make the acceptance, transportation, or 
delivery of hazardous materials unusually hazardous, local restrictions 
may be imposed by the carrier.
    (b) Each carrier must report to the Bureau of Explosives for 
publication the full information as to any restrictions which it imposes 
against the acceptance, delivery, or transportation of hazardous 
materials, over any portion of its lines under this section.

[Amdt. 174-26, 41 FR 16092, Apr. 15, 1976]



                Subpart B--General Operating Requirements



Sec. 174.24  Shipping papers.

    (a) A person may not accept a hazardous material for transportation 
or transport a hazardous material by rail unless that person receives a 
shipping paper prepared in accordance with part 172 of this subchapter, 
unless the material is excepted from shipping paper requirements under 
this subchapter. Only an initial carrier within the United States must 
receive and retain a copy of the shipper's certification as required by 
Sec. 172.204 of this subchapter. This section does not apply to a 
material that is excepted from shipping paper requirements by this 
subchapter.
    (b) Each person receiving a shipping paper required by this section 
must retain a copy or an electronic image thereof, that is accessible at 
or through its principal place of business and must make the shipping 
paper immediately available, upon request, to an authorized official of 
a Federal, State, or local government agency at reasonable times and 
locations. For a hazardous waste, each shipping paper copy must be 
retained for three years after the material is accepted by the initial 
carrier. For all other hazardous materials, each shipping paper copy 
must be retained for 375 days after the material is accepted by the 
initial carrier. Each shipping paper copy must include the date of 
acceptance by the initial carrier. The date on the shipping paper may be 
the date a shipper notifies the rail carrier that a shipment is ready 
for transportation, as indicated on the waybill or bill of lading, as an 
alternative to the date the shipment is picked up, or accepted, by the 
carrier.

[67 FR 46128, July 12, 2002]



Sec. 174.26  Notice to train crews.

    (a) The train crew must have a document that reflects the current 
position in the train of each rail car containing a hazardous material. 
The train crew must update the document to indicate changes in the 
placement of a rail car within the train. For example, the train crew 
may update the document by handwriting on it or by appending or 
attaching another document to it.
    (b) A member of the crew of a train transporting a hazardous 
material must have a copy of a document for the hazardous material being 
transported showing the information required by part 172 of this 
subchapter.

[Amdt. 174-84, 62 FR 1236, Jan. 8, 1997]



Sec. 174.50  Nonconforming or leaking packages.

    A leaking non-bulk package may not be forwarded until repaired, 
reconditioned, or overpacked in accordance with Sec. 173.3 of this 
subchapter. Except as otherwise provided in this section, a bulk 
packaging that no longer conforms to this subchapter may not be 
forwarded by rail unless repaired or approved for movement by the 
Associate Administrator for Safety, Federal Railroad Administration. 
Notification and approval must be in writing, or through telephonic or 
electronic means, with subsequent written confirmation provided within 
two weeks.

[[Page 640]]

For the applicable address and telephone number, see Sec. 107.117(d)(4) 
of this chapter. A leaking bulk package containing a hazardous material 
may be moved without repair or approval only so far as necessary to 
reduce or to eliminate an immediate threat or harm to human health or to 
the environment when it is determined its movement would provide greater 
safety than allowing the package to remain in place. In the case of a 
liquid leak, measures must be taken to prevent the spread of liquid.

[65 FR 50462, Aug. 18, 2000]



          Subpart C--General Handling and Loading Requirements



Sec. 174.55  General requirements.

    (a) Each package containing a hazardous material being transported 
by rail in a freight container or transport vehicle must be loaded so 
that it cannot fall or slide and must be safeguarded in such a manner 
that other freight cannot fall onto or slide into it under conditions 
normally incident to transportation. When this protection cannot be 
provided by using other freight, it must be provided by blocking and 
bracing. For examples of blocking and bracing in freight containers and 
transport vehicles, see Bureau of Explosives Pamphlet Nos. 6 and 6C.
    (b) Each package containing a hazardous material bearing package 
orientation markings prescribed in Sec. 172.312 of this subchapter must 
be loaded within a transport vehicle or freight container to remain in 
the correct position indicated by those markings during transportation.
    (c) The doors of a freight container or transport vehicle may not be 
used to secure a load that includes a package containing a hazardous 
material unless the doors meet the design strength requirements of 
Specification M-930 (for freight containers) and M-931 (for trailers) in 
the AAR's Manual of Standards and Recommended Practices and the load is 
also within the limits of the design strength requirements for the 
doors.

[Amdt. 174-83, 61 FR 28677, June 5, 1996]



Sec. 174.57  Cleaning cars.

    All hazardous material which has leaked from a package in any rail 
car or on other railroad property must be carefully removed.



Sec. 174.59  Marking and placarding of rail cars.

    No person may transport a rail car carrying hazardous materials 
unless it is marked and placarded as required by this subchapter. 
Placards and car certificates lost in transit must be replaced at the 
next inspection point, and those not required must be removed at the 
next terminal where the train is classified. For Canadian shipments, 
required placards lost in transit, must be replaced either by those 
required by part 172 of this subchapter or by those authorized under 
Sec. 171.12a.

[Amdt. 174-26, 41 FR 16092, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 174-48, 
50 FR 41521, Oct. 11, 1985]



Sec. 174.61  Transport vehicles and freight containers on flat cars.

    (a) A transport vehicle, freight container, or package containing a 
hazardous material must be designed and loaded so that it will not 
become damaged to an extent that would affect its integrity under 
conditions normally incident to transportation. Each unit must be 
secured on a flatcar so that it cannot permanently change position 
during transit. Packages of hazardous materials contained therein must 
be loaded and braced as provided by Secs. 174.101, 174.112, 174.115 and 
174.55. Placards must be applied when prescribed by part 172 of this 
subchapter and part 174.
    (b) Except as specified in Sec. 173.21, a truck body, trailer, or 
freight container equipped with heating or refrigerating equipment which 
has fuel or any article classed as a hazardous material may be loaded 
and transported on a flat car as part of a joint rail highway movement. 
The heating or refrigerating equipment is considered to be a part of the 
truck body or trailer and is not subject to any other requirements of 
this subchapter. The truck body,

[[Page 641]]

trailer, or freight container must be secured on the flatcar so that it 
cannot change position during transit.

[Amdt. 174-26, 41 FR 16092, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 174-26A, 
41 FR 40685, Sept. 20, 1976; Amdt. 174-38, 45 FR 32698, May 19, 1980; 
Amdt. 174-39, 45 FR 81572, Dec. 11, 1980; Amdt. 174-59, 51 FR 5974, Feb. 
18, 1986; Amdt. 174-68, 57 FR 45464, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 174-79, 59 FR 
64744, Dec. 15, 1994]



Sec. 174.63  Portable tanks, IM portable tanks, IBCs, cargo tanks, and multi-unit tank car tanks.

    (a) A carrier may not transport a bulk packaging (e.g., portable 
tank, IM portable tank, IBC, cargo tank, or multi-unit tank car tank) 
containing a hazardous material in container-on-flatcar (COFC) or 
trailer-on-flatcar (TOFC) service except as authorized by this section 
or unless approved for transportation by the Associate Administrator for 
Safety, FRA.
    (b) A bulk packaging containing a hazardous material (including IM 
101 and IM 102 when appropriate according to dimensions and weight 
distribution) may be transported inside a fully closed transport vehicle 
or fully closed freight container provided it is properly secured with a 
restraint system that will prevent it from changing position, sliding 
into other packages, or contacting the side or end walls (including 
doors) under conditions normally incident to transportation.
    (c) When not transported in conformance with and subject to 
paragraph (b) of this section, a bulk packaging may be transported in 
COFC service or TOFC service subject to the following conditions as 
applicable:
    (1) The bulk packaging contains a material packaged in accordance 
with Sec. 173.240, 173.241, 173.242, or 173.243 of this subchapter;
    (2) The tank and flatcar conform to requirements in AAR 600 of the 
AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, Specification M-1002, entitled 
``Specifications for Acceptability of Tank Containers'';
    (3) For TOFC service, the trailer chassis conforms to requirements 
in paragraphs 3, 4, 5, and 6 of AAR Specification M-943 ``Container 
Chassis For TOFC Service'' of the AAR specification for ``Specially 
Equipped Freight Car and Intermodal Equipment'';
    (4) For COFC service, the container support and securement systems 
conform to requirements in Specification M-952 ``Intermodal Container 
Support and Securement Systems for Freight Cars'', of the AAR 
specification for ``Specially Equipped Freight Car and Intermodal 
Equipment'';
    (5) If transported in a well car--
    (i) The tank is not in a double-stacked configuration (i.e., no 
freight container or portable tank is placed above or below the tank); 
and
    (ii) The tank is transported in the well with its outlet valve 
facing outward towards the end of the well and away from any adjacent 
tank or container; and
    (6) All securement fittings shall be fully engaged and in the locked 
position, provided; however, if the tank is transported in a well car, 
it must be loaded into a well appropriate for the length of the 
container and any void filling device present must be secured in its 
designed appropriate position.
    (d) An approval in effect on February 28, 1991 for the 
transportation of portable tanks or IM portable tanks in TOFC or COFC 
service expires on the date stated in the approval letter or June 15, 
1995, whichever is later.
    (e) A carrier may not transport a cargo tank or multi-unit tank car 
tank containing a hazardous material in TOFC or COFC service unless 
approved for such service by the Associate Administrator for Safety, 
FRA. However, in the event of an accident or incident, no such approval 
is necessary for the transportation of a cargo tank containing a 
hazardous material in TOFC service under the following condition(s):
    (1) There is an emergency need for the cargo tank in order to 
mitigate the consequences of an incident; and
    (2) Movement of the cargo tank is limited to transportation 
necessary for emergency purposes.

[Amdt. 174-79, 59 FR 64744, Dec. 15, 1994, as amended by 66 FR 45383, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 174.67  Tank car unloading.

    (a) In unloading tank cars, the following rules must be observed 
(see subpart F of this part for gases):

[[Page 642]]

    (1) Unloading operations must be performed only by reliable persons 
properly instructed in unloading hazardous materials and made 
responsible for careful compliance with this part.
    (2) Brakes must be set and wheels blocked on all cars being 
unloaded.
    (3) Caution signs must be so placed on the track or cars to give 
necessary warning to persons approaching the cars from the open end of a 
siding and must be left up until after the cars are unloaded and 
disconnected from the discharge connection. The signs must be of metal 
or other comparable material, at least 30 cm (12 inches) high by 38 cm 
(15 inches) wide in size, and bear the words, ``STOP--Tank Car 
Connected'', or ``STOP--Men at Work'', the word ``STOP'' being in 
letters at least 10 cm (3.9 inches) high and the other words in letters 
at least 5 cm (2 inches) high. The letters must be white on a blue 
background.
    (4) Before a manhole cover or outlet valve cap is removed from a 
tank car, the car must be relieved of all interior pressure by cooling 
the tank with water or by venting the tank by raising the safety valve 
or opening the dome vent at short intervals. However, if venting to 
relieve pressure will cause a dangerous amount of vapor to collect 
outside the car, venting and unloading must be deferred until the 
pressure is reduced by allowing the car to stand overnight or otherwise 
cooling the contents. These precautions are not necessary when the car 
is equipped with a manhole cover which hinges inward or with an inner 
manhole cover which does not have to be removed to unload the car, and 
when pressure is relieved by piping vapor into a condenser or storage 
tank.
    (b) After the pressure is released, the seal must be broken and the 
manhole cover removed as follows:
    (1) Screw type. The cover must be loosened by placing a bar between 
the manhole cover lug and knob. After two complete turns, so that vent 
openings are exposed, the operation must be stopped, and if there is any 
sound of escaping vapor, the cover must be screwed down tightly and the 
interior pressure relieved as prescribed in paragraph (a)(4) of this 
section, before again attempting to remove the cover.
    (2) Hinged and bolted type. All nuts must be unscrewed one complete 
turn, after which same precautions as prescribed for screw type cover 
must be observed.
    (3) Interior type. All dirt and cinders must be carefully removed 
from around the cover before the yoke is unscrewed.
    (c) When the car is unloaded through a bottom outlet valve, the 
manhole cover must be adjusted as follows:
    (1) Screw type. The cover must be put in place, but not entirely 
screwed down, so that air may enter the tank through the vent holes in 
threaded flange of the cover.
    (2) Hinged and bolted type. A non-metallic block must be placed 
under one edge of the cover.
    (3) Interior type. The screw must be tightened up in the yoke so 
that the cover is brought up within one-half inch of the closed 
position.
    (d) When unloading through the bottom outlet of a car equipped with 
an interior manhole type cover, and in each case where unloading is done 
through the manhole (unless a special cover with a safety vent opening 
and a tight connection for the discharge outlet is used), the manhole 
must be protected by asbestos or metal covers against the entrance of 
sparks or other sources of ignition of vapor, or by being covered and 
surrounded with wet burlap or similar cloth material. The burlap or 
other cloth must be kept damp by the replacement or the application of 
water as needed.
    (e) Seals or other substances must not be thrown into the tank and 
the contents may not be spilled over the car or tank.
    (f) The valve rod handle or control in the dome must be operated 
several times to see that outlet valve in bottom of tank is on its seat 
before valve cap is removed.
    (g) The valve cap, or the reducer when a large outlet is to be used, 
must be removed with a suitable wrench after the set screws are loosened 
and a pail must be placed in position to catch any liquid that may be in 
the outlet chamber. If the valve cap or reducer does not unscrew easily, 
it may be tapped lightly with a mallet or wooden block in an upward 
direction. If leakage shows upon starting the removal,

[[Page 643]]

the cap or reducer may not be entirely unscrewed. Sufficient threads 
must be left engaged and sufficient time allowed to permit controlled 
escape of any accumulation of liquid in the outlet chamber. If the 
leakage stops or the rate of leakage diminishes materially, the cap or 
reducer may be entirely removed. If the initial rate of leakage 
continues, further efforts must be made to seat the outlet valve (see 
paragraph (f) of this section). If this fails, the cap or reducer must 
be screwed up tight and the tank must be unloaded through the dome. If 
upon removal of the outlet cap the outlet chamber is found to be blocked 
with frozen liquid or any other matter, the cap must be replaced 
immediately and a careful examination must be made to determine whether 
the outlet casting has been cracked. If the obstruction is not frozen 
liquid, the car must be unloaded through the dome. If the obstruction is 
frozen liquid and no crack has been found in the outlet casting, the car 
may, if circumstances require it, be unloaded from the bottom by 
removing the cap and attaching unloading connections immediately. Before 
opening the valve inside the tank car, steam must be applied to the 
outside of the outlet casting or wrap casting with burlap or other rags 
and hot water must be applied to melt the frozen liquid.
    (h) Unloading connections must be securely attached to unloading 
pipes on the dome or to the bottom discharge outlets before any 
discharge valves are opened.
    (i) Tank cars may not be allowed to stand with unloading connections 
attached after unloading is completed. Throughout the entire period of 
unloading, and while car is connected to unloading device, the car must 
be attended by the unloader.
    (j) If necessary to discontinue unloading a tank car for any reason, 
all unloading connections must be disconnected. All valves must first be 
tightly closed, and the closures of all other openings securely applied.
    (k) As soon as a tank car is completely unloaded, all valves must be 
made tight by the use of a bar, wrench or other suitable tool, the 
unloading connections must be removed and all other closures made tight.
    (l) Railroad defect cards may not be removed.
    (m) If oil or gasoline has been spilled on the ground around 
connections, it must be covered with fresh, dry sand or dirt.
    (n) All tools and implements used in connection with unloading must 
be kept free of oil, dirt, and grit.

[Amdt. 174-26, 41 FR 16092, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 174-26A, 
41 FR 40685, Sept. 20, 1976; Amdt. 174-43, 48 FR 27699, June 16, 1983; 
Amdt. 174-68, 55 FR 52678, Dec. 21, 1990; 56 FR 66280, Dec. 20, 1991; 
Amdt. 174-81, 60 FR 49111, Sept. 21, 1995; Amdt. 174-83, 61 FR 28678, 
June 5, 1996]



Sec. 174.81  Segregation of hazardous materials.

    (a) This section applies to materials which meet one or more of the 
hazard classes defined in this subchapter and are in packages which are 
required to be labeled or placarded under the provisions of part 172 of 
this subchapter.
    (b) When a rail car is to be transported by vessel, other than a 
ferry vessel, hazardous materials on or within that rail car must be 
stowed and segregated in accordance with Sec. 176.83(b) of this 
subchapter.
    (c) In addition to the provisions of paragraph (d) of this section, 
cyanides or cyanide mixtures may not be loaded or stored with acids.
    (d) Hazardous materials may not be loaded, transported, or stored 
together, except as provided in this section, and in accordance with the 
following table:

[[Page 644]]



                                                                            Segregation Table for Hazardous Materials
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                                                                                                        6.1
                                                     1.1,                                             2.3 gas    2.3 gas                                              liquids          8 liquids
       Class or Division                   Notes     1.2    1.3    1.4    1.5    1.6    2.1    2.2     Zone A     Zone B     3     4.1    4.2    4.3    5.1    5.2   PG I Zone    7       only
                                                                                                                                                                         A
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Explosives....................  1.1 and  A          *      *      *      *      *      X      X      X          X          X      X      X      X      X      X      X          X      X
                                    1.2
Explosives....................      1.3  .........  *      *      *      *      *      X      .....  X          X          X      .....  X      X      X      X      X          .....  X
Explosives....................      1.4  .........  *      *      *      *      *      O      .....  O          O          O      .....  O      .....  .....  .....  O          .....  O
Very insensitive explosives...      1.5  A          *      *      *      *      *      X      X      X          X          X      X      X      X      X      X      X          X      X
Extremely insensitive               1.6  .........  *      *      *      *      *      .....  .....  .........  .........  .....  .....  .....  .....  .....  .....  .........  .....  .........
 explosives.
Flammable gases...............      2.1  .........  X      X      O      X      .....  .....  .....  X          O          .....  .....  .....  .....  .....  .....  O          O      .........
Non-toxic, non-flammable gases      2.2  .........  X      .....  .....  X      .....  .....  .....  .........  .........  .....  .....  .....  .....  .....  .....  .........  .....  .........
Poisonous gas Zone A..........      2.3  .........  X      X      O      X      .....  X      .....  .........  .........  X      X      X      X      X      X      .........  .....  X
Poisonous gas Zone B..........      2.3  .........  X      X      O      X      .....  O      .....  .........  .........  O      O      O      O      O      O      .........  .....  O
Flammable liquids.............        3  .........  X      X      O      X      .....  .....  .....  X          O          .....  .....  .....  .....  O      .....  X          .....  .........
Flammable solids..............      4.1  .........  X      .....  .....  X      .....  .....  .....  X          O          .....  .....  .....  .....  .....  .....  X          .....  O
Spontaneously combustible           4.2  .........  X      X      O      X      .....  .....  .....  X          O          .....  .....  .....  .....  .....  .....  X          .....  X
 materials.
Dangerous when wet materials..      4.3  .........  X      X      .....  X      .....  .....  .....  X          O          .....  .....  .....  .....  .....  .....  X          .....  O
Oxidizers.....................      5.1  A          X      X      .....  X      .....  .....  .....  X          O          O      .....  .....  .....  .....  .....  X          .....  O
Organic peroxides.............      5.2  .........  X      X      .....  X      .....  .....  .....  X          O          .....  .....  .....  .....  .....  .....  X          .....  O
Poisonous liquids PG I Zone A.      6.1  .........  X      X      O      X      .....  O      .....  .........  .........  X      X      X      X      X      X      .........  .....  X
Radioactive materials.........        7  .........  X      .....  .....  X      .....  O      .....  .........  .........  .....  .....  .....  .....  .....  .....  .........  .....  .........
Corrosive liquids.............        8  .........  X      X      O      X      .....  .....  .....  X          O          .....  O      X      O      O      O      X          .....  .........
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


[[Page 645]]

    (e) Instructions for using the segregation table for hazardous 
materials in paragraph (d) of this section are as follows:
    (1) The absence of any hazard class or division, or a blank space in 
the table indicates that no restrictions apply.
    (2) The letter ``X'' in the table indicates that these materials may 
not be loaded, transported, or stored together in the same rail car or 
storage facility during the course of transportation.
    (3) The letter ``O'' in the table indicates that these materials may 
not be loaded, transported, or stored together in the same rail car or 
storage facility during the course of transportation unless separated in 
a manner that, in the event of leakage from packages under conditions 
normally incident to transportation, commingling of hazardous materials 
would not occur. Notwithstanding the methods of separation employed, 
Class 8 (corrosive) liquids may not be loaded above or adjacent to Class 
4 (flammable) or Class 5 (oxidizing) materials; except that shippers may 
load carload shipments of such materials together when it is known that 
the mixture of contents would not cause a fire or a dangerous evolution 
of heat or gas.
    (4) The ``*'' in the table indicates that segregation among 
different Class 1 (explosive) materials is governed by the compatibility 
table in paragraph (f) of this section.
    (5) The note ``A'' in the second column of the table means that, 
notwithstanding the requirements of the letter ``X'', ammonium nitrate 
fertilizer may be loaded or stored with Division 1.1 (explosive) or 
Division 1.5 materials.
    (6) When the Sec. 172.101 table or Sec. 172.402 of this subchapter 
requires a package to bear a subsidiary hazard label, segregation 
appropriate to the subsidiary hazard must be applied when that 
segregation is more restrictive than that required by the primary 
hazard. However, hazardous materials of the same class may be loaded and 
transported together without regard to segregation required by any 
secondary hazard if the materials are not capable of reacting 
dangerously with each other and causing combustion or dangerous 
evolution of heat, evolution of flammable, poisonous, or asphyxiant 
gases, or formation of corrosive or unstable materials.
    (f) Class 1 (explosive) materials may not be loaded, transported, or 
stored together, except as provided in this section, and in accordance 
with the following table:

                              Compatibility Table For Class 1 (Explosive) Materials
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
              Compatibility group                 A    B    C    D    E    F    G    H    J    K    L    N    S
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A..............................................         X    X    X    X    X    X    X    X    X    X    X    X
B..............................................    X         X    4    X    X    X    X    X    X    X    X  4/5
C..............................................    X    X         2    2    X    6    X    X    X    X    3  4/5
D..............................................    X    4    2         2    X    6    X    X    X    X    3  4/5
E..............................................    X    X    2    2         X    6    X    X    X    X    3  4/5
F..............................................    X    X    X    X    X         X    X    X    X    X    X  4/5
G..............................................    X    X    6    6    6    X         X    X    X    X    X  4/5
H..............................................    X    X    X    X    X    X    X         X    X    X    X  4/5
J..............................................    X    X    X    X    X    X    X    X         X    X    X  4/5
K..............................................    X    X    X    X    X    X    X    X    X         X    X  4/5
L..............................................    X    X    X    X    X    X    X    X    X    X    1    X    X
N..............................................    X    X    3    3    3    X    X    X    X    X    X       4/5
S..............................................    X  4/5  4/5  4/5  4/5  4/5  4/5  4/5  4/5  4/5    X  4/5
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (g) Instructions for using the compatibility table for Class 1 
(explosive) materials in paragraph (f) of this section are as follows:
    (1) A blank space in the table indicates that no restrictions apply.
    (2) The letter ``X'' in the table indicates that explosives of 
different compatibility groups may not be carried on the same rail car, 
unless packed in separate freight containers (e.g., two or more freight 
containers mounted upon the same rail car).
    (3) The numbers in the table mean the following:
    (i) ``1'' means explosives from compatibility group L may only be 
carried

[[Page 646]]

on the same rail car with an identical explosive.
    (ii) ``2'' means any combination of explosives from compatibility 
group C, D, or E is assigned to compatibility group E.
    (iii) ``3'' means any combination of explosives from compatibility 
group C, D, or E with those in compatibility group N is assigned to 
compatibility group D.
    (iv) ``4'' means detonators and detonating primers, Division 1.4S 
(explosives), may not be loaded in the same car with Division 1.1 and 
1.2 (explosive) materials.
    (v) ``5'' means Division 1.4S fireworks may not be loaded in the 
same car with Division 1.1 or 1.2 (explosive) materials.
    (vi) ``6'' means explosive articles in compatibility group G, other 
than fireworks and those requiring special stowage, may be loaded and 
transported with articles of compatibility groups C, D and E, provided 
no explosive substances are carried in the same rail car.
    (h) Except as provided in paragraph (i) of this section, explosives 
of the same compatibility group but of different divisions may be 
transported together provided that the whole shipment is transported as 
though its entire contents were of the lower numerical division (i.e., 
Division 1.1 being lower than Division 1.2). For example, a mixed 
shipment of Division 1.2 (explosive) materials and Division 1.4 
(explosive) materials, compatibility group D, must be transported as 
Division 1.2 (explosive) materials.
    (i) When Division 1.5 materials, compatibility group D are 
transported in the same freight container as Division 1.2 (explosive) 
materials, compatibility group D, the shipment must be transported as 
Division 1.1 (explosive) materials, compatibility group D.

[Amdt. 174-68, 55 FR 52678, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66280-
66281, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45464, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 174-68, 57 FR 
59310, Dec. 15, 1992; Amdt. 174-75, 58 FR 50237, Sept. 24, 1993; Amdt. 
174-83, 61 FR 51339, Oct. 1, 1996; 64 FR 10781, Mar. 5, 1999; 66 FR 
45383, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 15743, Apr. 3, 2002]



   Subpart D--Handling of Placarded Rail Cars, Transport Vehicles and 
                           Freight Containers



Sec. 174.82  General requirements for the handling of placarded rail cars, transport vehicles, freight containers, and bulk packages.

    (a) Unless otherwise specified, this subpart does not apply to the 
handling of rail cars, transport vehicles, freight containers, or bulk 
packagings, which contain Division 1.6, combustible liquids, Division 
6.1 PG III materials, Class 9 materials, or ORM-D materials.
    (b) A placarded rail car, transport vehicle, freight container, or 
bulk package may not be transported in a passenger train.

[Amdt. 174-68, 55 FR 52680, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66281, 
Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45464, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 174-74, 58 FR 51533, 
Oct. 1, 1993]



Sec. 174.83  Switching placarded rail cars, transport vehicles, freight containers, and bulk packagings.

    (a) In switching operations where the use of hand brakes is 
necessary--
    (1) It must be determined by trial whether a loaded, placarded car, 
or a car occupied by a rider in a draft containing a placarded car, has 
its hand brakes in proper working condition before it is cut off;
    (2) A loaded, placarded tank car or a draft which includes a loaded 
placarded tank car may not be cut off until the preceeding rail car 
clears the ladder track; and
    (3) A loaded, placarded tank car or a draft which includes a loaded 
placarded tank car must clear the ladder track before another rail car 
is allowed to follow.
    (b) Any loaded rail car placarded for a Division 1.1 or Division 1.2 
explosive, a Division 2.3 Hazard Zone A gas or a Division 6.1 PG I 
Hazard Zone A material, or a Class DOT 113 tank car displaying a 
Division 2.1 (flammable gas) placard, including a Class DOT 113 tank car 
containing only a residue of a Division 2.1 material, may not be:
    (1) Cut off while in motion;
    (2) Coupled into with more force than is necessary to complete the 
coupling; or

[[Page 647]]

    (3) Struck by any car moving under its own momentum.
    (c) A placarded flatcar, or a flatcar carrying a placarded transport 
vehicle, freight container, or bulk packaging under this subchapter may 
not be cut off while in motion.
    (d) No rail car moving under its own momentum may be permitted to 
strike any placarded flatcar or any flatcar carrying a placarded 
transport vehicle, freight container, or bulk packaging.
    (e) No placarded flatcar or any flatcar carrying a placarded 
transport vehicle, freight container, or bulk packaging may be coupled 
into with more force than is necessary to complete the coupling.
    (f) When transporting a rail car, transport vehicle, or freight 
container placarded for Division 1.1 or 1.2 (explosive) materials in a 
terminal, yard, or on a side track or siding, the placarded rail car 
must be separated from the engine by at least one non-placarded rail car 
and must be placed in a location so that it will be safe from danger of 
fire. A rail car, transport vehicle, or freight container placarded for 
Division 1.1 or 1.2 (explosive) materials may not be placed under a 
bridge or overhead crossing, or in or alongside a passenger shed or 
station, except during transfer operations.

[Amdt. 174-68, 55 FR 52680, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66281, 
Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 174-75, 58 FR 50237, Sept. 24, 1993; Amdt. 174-77, 
59 FR 48549, Sept. 21, 1994; Amdt. 174-83, 61 FR 51339, Oct. 1, 1996; 66 
FR 45383, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 174.84  Position in train of loaded placarded rail cars, transport vehicles, freight containers or bulk packagings when accompanied by guards or technical 
          escorts.

    A rail car placarded in Division 1.1 or 1.2 (explosive); Division 
2.3 (Hazard Zone A; poisonous gas); or Division 6.1 (PG I, Hazard Zone 
A; poisonous liquid) in a moving or standing train must be next to and 
ahead of any car occupied by the guards or technical escorts 
accompanying the placarded rail car. However, if a rail car occupied by 
the guards or technical escorts has temperature control equipment in 
operation, it must be the fourth car behind any car requiring Division 
1.1 or 1.2 (explosive) placards.

[Amdt. 174-68, 55 FR 52680, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66281, 
Dec. 20, 1991; 66 FR 45383, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 174.85  Position in train of placarded cars, transport vehicles, freight containers, and bulk packagings.

    (a) Except as provided in paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section, 
the position in a train of each loaded placarded car, transport vehicle, 
freight container, and bulk packaging must conform to the provisions of 
this section.
    (b) A car placarded ``RADIOACTIVE'' must comply with train 
positioning requirements of paragraph (d) of this section and must be 
separated from a locomotive, occupied caboose, or carload of undeveloped 
film by at least one non-placarded car.
    (c) A tank car containing the residue of a hazardous material must 
be separated from a locomotive or occupied caboose by at least one rail 
car other than a placarded tank car.
    (d) Position of rail cars in a train. In the following table:

                      Position in Train of Placarded Cars Transporting Hazardous Materials
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                   Placard Group       Placard Group 2          Placard Group 3        Placard
                                         1       --------------------------------------------------    Group 4
           RESTRICTIONS           ---------------                                                  -------------
                                      Rail Car      Tank Car     Rail Car    Tank Car    Rail Car     Rail Car
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. When train length permits,      X              X                         X
 placarded car may not be nearer
 than the sixth car from the
 engine or occupied caboose.
2. When train length does not      X              X                         X
 permit, placarded car must be
 placed near the middle of the
 train, but not nearer than the
 second car from an engine or
 occupied caboose.
3. A placarded car may not be      X              X                         X
 placed next to an open-top car
 when any of the lading in the
 open top car protrudes beyond
 the car ends, or if the lading
 shifted, would protrude beyond
 the car ends..

[[Page 648]]

 
4. A placarded car may not be      X              X                         X
 placed next to a loaded flat
 car, except closed TOFC/COFC
 equipment, auto carriers, and
 other specially equipped cars
 with tie-down devices for
 securing vehicles. Permanent
 bulk head flat cars are
 considered the same as open-top
 cars.
5. A placarded car may not be      X              X                         X
 placed next to any transport
 vehicle or freight container
 having an internal combustion
 engine or an open-flame device
 in operation..
6. Placarded cars may not be
 placed next to each other based
 on the following:
    Placard Group 1..............                 X            X            X           X           X
    Placard Group 2..............  X                                        X           X           X
    Placard Group 3..............  X              X            X                                    X
    Placard Group 4..............  X              X            X            X           X
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PLACARD GROUP:
Group 1--Divisions 1.1 and 1.2 (explosive) materials.
Group 2--Divisions 1.3, 1.4, 1.5 (explosive), Class 2 (compressed gas; other than Div 2.3, PG I, Zone A), Class
  3 (flammable liquid), Class 4 (flammable solid), Class 5 (oxidizing), Class 6 (poisonous liquid; other than
  Div 6.1, PG I, Zone A), and Class 8 (corrosive) materials.
Group 3--Divisions 2.3 (Zone A; poisonous gas) and 6.1 (PG I, Zone A; poisonous liquid) materials.
Group 4--Class 7 (radioactive) materials.

    (1) Where an ``X'' appears at the intersection of a Placard Group 
column and a Restriction row, the corresponding restriction applies.
    (2) ``Rail Car'' means a car other than a tank car.
    (3) For purposes of this subpart, each unit of an articulated 
intermodal rail car shall be considered as one car.

[Amdt. 174-68, 55 FR 52680, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 57 FR 45464, 
Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 174-83, 61 FR 28678, June 5, 1996; Amdt.174-83, 61 
FR 50255, Sept. 25, 1996; Amdt. 174-83, 61 FR 51339, Oct. 1, 1996; 64 FR 
51919, Sept. 27, 1999; 66 FR 45383, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 174.86  Maximum allowable operating speed.

    For molten metals and molten glass shipped in packagings other than 
those prescribed in Sec. 173.247 of this subchapter, the maximum 
allowable operating speed may not exceed 15 mph for shipments by rail.

[Amdt. 174-69, 56 FR 49990, Oct. 2, 1991]



                Subpart E--Class I (Explosive) Materials



Sec. 174.101  Loading Class 1 (explosive) materials.

    (a) Boxes containing Division 1.1 or 1.2 (explosive) materials must 
be loaded so that the ends of wooden boxes will not bear against sides 
of any fiberboard boxes and so that the ends of any box will not cause a 
pressure point on a small area of another box.
    (b) Explosive bombs, unfuzed projectiles, rocket ammunition and 
rocket motors, Division 1.1, 1.2, or 1.3 (explosive) materials, which 
are not packed in wooden boxes, or large metal packages of incendiary 
bombs, each weighing 226 kg (500 pounds) or more, may be loaded in stock 
cars or in flat bottom gondola cars only if they are adequately braced. 
Boxed bombs, rocket ammunition and rocket motors, Division 1.1, 1.2, or 
1.3 (explosive) materials, which due to their size cannot be loaded in 
closed cars, may be loaded in open-top cars or on flatcars, provided 
they are protected from the weather and accidental ignition.
    (c) Boxes of Division 1.1 or 1.2 (explosive) materials packed in 
long cartridges, bags, or sift-proof liners, and containing no liquid 
explosive ingredient, may be loaded on their sides or ends.
    (d) Division 1.1 or 1.2 (explosive) materials may not be loaded 
higher than any permanent car lining unless additional lining is 
provided as high as the lading.
    (e) When the lading of a car includes any Class 1 (explosive) 
materials, the

[[Page 649]]

weight of the lading must be distributed insofar as possible to equalize 
the weight on each side of the car and over the trucks.
    (f) Except when boxed, metal kegs containing Class 1 (explosive) 
materials must be loaded on their sides with their ends toward the ends 
of the car. Packages of Class 1 (explosive) materials may not be placed 
in the space opposite the doors unless the doorways are boarded on the 
inside as high as the lading. This paragraph does not apply to 
palletized packages if they are braced so they cannot fall or slide into 
the doorways during transportation.
    (g) Wooden kegs, fiber kegs, barrels, and drums must be loaded on 
their sides or ends, to best suit the conditions.
    (h) Packages containing any Division 1.1 or 1.2 (explosive) 
materials for (see Sec. 174.104), detonators, detonator assemblies, or 
boosters with detonators must be securely blocked and braced to prevent 
the packages from changing position, falling to the floor, or sliding 
into each other, under conditions normally incident to transportation. 
Class 1 (explosive) materials must be loaded so as to avoid transfer at 
stations. For recommended methods of blocking and bracing, see Bureau of 
Explosives Pamphlets No. 6 and 6A. Heavy packages or containers must be 
trucked, rolled, or moved by skids, fork trucks, or other handling 
devices and may not be dropped from trucks, platforms, or cars. Planks 
for rolling trucks from platforms to cars must have beveled ends. 
Loading platforms and the shoes of each workman must be free from grit. 
All possible precautions must be taken against fire. Class 1 (explosive) 
materials must be kept in a safe place and inaccessible to unauthorized 
persons while being held by a carrier for loading or delivery.
    (i) To prevent delays of local freight trains, when there are 
shipments of Class 1 (explosive) materials for different destinations 
loaded in a ``peddler car'' or ``way car'' the shipment for each 
destination must be stayed separately.
    (j) Forwarding and transfer stations for Class 1 (explosive) 
materials must be provided with the necessary materials for staying.
    (k) Shippers must furnish the material for staying packages of Class 
1 (explosive) materials loaded by them.
    (l) Division 1.1 or 1.2 (explosive) materials may not be loaded, 
transported, or stored in a rail car equipped with any type of lighted 
heater or open-flame device, or electric devices having exposed heating 
coils, or in a rail car equipped with any apparatus or mechanism 
utilizing an internal combustion engine in its operation.
    (m) [Reserved]
    (n) A container car or freight container on a flatcar or a gondola 
car other than a drop-bottom car, when properly loaded, blocked, and 
braced to prevent change of position under conditions normally incident 
to transportation, may be used to transport any Division 1.1 or 1.2 
(explosive) material except black powder packed in metal containers. A 
freight container must be designed, constructed, and maintained so as to 
be weather tight and capable of preventing the entrance of sparks. In 
addition:
    (1) A freight container must be of such design and so braced as to 
show no evidence of failure of the container or the bracing when 
subjected to impact from each end of at least 13 km (8.1 miles) per 
hour. Its efficiency shall be determined by actual test, using dummy 
loads equal in weight and general character to material to be shipped.
    (2) A container car or car which is loaded with freight containers 
must be placarded with the Class 1 (explosive) materials placards as 
required by subpart F of part 172 of this subchapter and with properly 
executed car certificates as required by Sec. 174.104.
    (3) Lading must be so loaded, blocked, and braced within the freight 
container that it will not change position under impact from each end of 
at least 13 km (8.1 miles) per hour.
    (o) Division 1.1, 1.2, or 1.3 (explosive) materials may be loaded 
and transported in a tight closed truck body or trailer on a flatcar. 
Wooden boxed bombs, rocket ammunition, and rocket motors, Division 1.1, 
1.2, or 1.3 (explosive) materials, which due to their size cannot be 
loaded in tight, closed truck bodies or trailers, may be loaded in or on 
open-top truck bodies or trailers.

[[Page 650]]

However, they must be protected against accidental ignition. In 
addition:
    (1) Each truck body or trailer must meet the requirements of part 
177 of this subchapter, applicable to shipments of Class 1 (explosive) 
materials by motor vehicle.
    (2) Each truck body or trailer must be so secured on the rail car so 
that it will not permanently change position or show evidence of failure 
or impending failure of the method of securing the truck body or trailer 
under impact from each end of at least 13 km (8.1 miles) per hour. Its 
efficiency shall be determined by actual test, using dummy loads equal 
in weight and general character to the material to be shipped. For 
recommended methods of blocking and bracing, see Bureau of Explosives 
Pamphlet 6C.
    (3) Lading must be so loaded, blocked, and braced within or on the 
truck body or trailer that it will not change position under impact from 
each end of at least 13 km (8.1 miles) per hour. For recommended methods 
of blocking and bracing see Bureau of Explosives Pamphlet 6C.
    (4) Each rail car containing Class 1 (explosive) materials and each 
rail car loaded with truck bodies, trailers or containers containing 
Class 1 (explosive) materials must be placarded with Class 1 (explosive) 
materials placards as required by subpart F of part 172 of this 
subchapter and with properly executed car certificates as required by 
Sec. 174.104.
    (5) Each fuel tank of a heater or refrigerating machinery on the 
truck bodies or trailers must be drained and all automatic heating or 
refrigerating machinery must be made inoperative by disconnection of the 
automatic controls or the source of power for their operations.

[Amdt. 174-26, 41 FR 16092, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 174-26A, 
41 FR 40685, Sept. 20, 1976; Amdt. 174-26B, 41 FR 57071, Dec. 30, 1976; 
Amdt. 174-36, 44 FR 70732, Dec. 10, 1979; Amdt. 174-59, 51 FR 5974, Feb. 
18, 1986; Amdt. 174-68, 55 FR 52681, Dec. 21, 1990; Amdt. 174-83, 61 FR 
51339, Oct. 1, 1996; 66 FR 45383, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 174.102  Forbidden mixed loading and storage.

    (a) Division 1.1 or 1.2 (explosive) materials and initiating or 
priming explosives may not be transported together in the same rail car. 
Additionally, they may not be transported or loaded in the same rail car 
or stored on carrier property with charged electric storage batteries or 
with any hazardous material for which a NONFLAMMABLE GAS, FLAMMABLE GAS, 
FLAMMABLE LIQUID, FLAMMABLE SOLID, OXIDIZER, ORGANIC PEROXIDE, 
RADIOACTIVE or CORROSIVE label is required.
    (b) Class 1 (explosive) materials may not be loaded together or with 
other hazardous materials, except as provided in Sec. 174.81. See 
Sec. 174.104 for loading shipments of Class 1 (explosive) materials or 
any other material in a placarded and certified car containing a 
shipment of Division 1.1 or 1.2 (explosive) materials.

[Amdt. 174-26, 41 FR 16092, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 174-68, 
55 FR 52681, Dec. 21, 1990; 66 FR 45383, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 174.103  Disposition of damaged or astray shipments.

    (a) Packages of Class 1 (explosive) materials found damaged or 
broken in transit may be repaired when practicable and not dangerous. A 
broken box of Division 1.1 or 1.2 (explosive) materials that cannot be 
repaired must be reinforced by stout wrapping paper and twine, placed in 
another strong box and surrounded by dry, fine sawdust or dry and clean 
cotton waste or elastic wads made from dry newspapers. A ruptured can or 
keg must be sealed and enclosed in a strong cloth bag of good quality 
and boxed. Damaged packages thus protected and properly marked may be 
forwarded. The box and waybill must be marked to indicate that it has 
been repacked.
    (b) Care must be exercised in repacking damaged containers so that 
no spark is produced by contact of metal or other hard surfaces which 
could ignite loose particles of explosive compositions that may be 
strewn on car floors or freight. In addition, the car floors must be 
thoroughly swept, and washed with a plentiful supply of

[[Page 651]]

water. Iron-wheel trucks, metal hammers, or other metal tools that may 
produce sparks may not be used. Metal tools must be limited to those 
made of brass, bronze, or copper.
    (c) Each package of Class 1 (explosive) materials showing evidence 
of leakage of liquid ingredients must:
    (1) Be refused if leakage is discovered before acceptance;
    (2) Be disposed of to a person who is competent and willing to 
remove them from the carrier's property, if the leakage is discovered 
while the shipment is in transit; or
    (3) Be removed immediately by consignee, if the leakage is 
discovered at the shipment's destination.
    (d) When the disposition required by paragraph (c) of this section 
cannot be made, the leaking package must be packed in other boxes large 
enough to permit enclosure and the leaking boxes must be surrounded by 
at least 5 cm (2 inches) of dry, fine sawdust or dry and clean cotton 
waste, and be stored in a station magazine or other safe place until the 
arrival of an inspector of the Bureau of Explosives, or other authorized 
person, to superintend the destruction or disposition of the condemned 
material.
    (e) If careful inspection shows that an astray shipment of Class 1 
(explosive) materials is in proper condition for safe transportation, it 
must be forwarded immediately to its destination if known, or returned 
to the shipper by the most practicable route.
    (f) When a package in an astray shipment is not in proper condition 
for safe transportation (see paragraphs (a), (c), and (d) of this 
section), or when the name and address of the consignee and the shipper 
are unknown, disposition must be made as prescribed by paragraphs (c) 
and (d) of this section.

[Amdt. 174-26, 41 FR 16092, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 174-68, 
55 FR 52681, Dec. 21, 1990; 66 FR 45383, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 174.104  Division 1.1 or 1.2 (explosive) materials; car selection, preparation, inspection, and certification.

    (a) Except as provided in Sec. 174.101 (b), (n), and (o), Division 
1.1 or 1.2 (explosive) materials being transported by rail may be 
transported only in a certified and properly placarded closed car of not 
less than 36,300 kg (80,028 pounds) capacity, with steel underframes and 
friction draft gear or cushioned underframe, except that on a narrow-
gauge railroad they may be transported in a car of less capacity as long 
as the car of greatest capacity and strength available is used.
    (b) Each rail car used for transporting Division 1.1 or 1.2 
(explosive) materials must meet the following requirements as 
applicable:
    (1) The car must be equipped with air brakes, hand brakes, and 
roller bearings which are in condition for service.
    (2) The car may not have any holes or cracks in the roof, sides, 
ends, or doors through which sparks may enter, or unprotected decayed 
spots which may hold sparks and start a fire.
    (3) The roof of the car must be carefully inspected from the outside 
for decayed spots, especially under or near the running board, and such 
spots must be covered or repaired to prevent their holding fire from 
sparks. A car with a roof generally decayed, even if tight, may not be 
used.
    (4) The doors must close tightly so that sparks cannot get in at the 
joints, and, if necessary to achieve this degree of tightness, the doors 
must be stripped. The stripping should be placed on the inside and 
fastened to the door frames where it will form a shoulder against which 
the closed doors are pressed by means of wedges or cleats in door shoes 
or keepers. The openings under the doors should be similarly closed. The 
hasp fastenings must be examined with the doors closed and fastened, and 
the doors must be cleated when necessary to prevent them from shifting. 
When the car is opened for any reason, the wedges or cleats must be 
replaced before car containing Class 1 (explosive) materials is 
permitted to proceed.
    (5) The roller bearings and the trucks must be carefully examined 
and put in such condition as to reduce to a minimum the danger of 
hotboxes or other failure necessitating the setting out of the car 
before reaching its destination.
    (6) The car must be carefully swept out before it is loaded. For 
less-than-carload shipments the space in which the packages are to be 
loaded must be

[[Page 652]]

carefully swept. If evidence of a potential hazardous residue is 
apparent after the floor has been swept, the carrier must either 
decontaminate the car or provide a suitable substitute car.
    (7) Any holes in the floor or lining must be repaired and special 
care taken that there are no projecting nails or bolts or exposed pieces 
of metal which may work loose or produce holes in packages of Class 1 
(explosive) materials during transit. Protruding nails in the floor or 
lining which have worked loose must be drawn, and if necessary for the 
purpose of fastening the floor or lining, new nails must be driven 
through other parts thereof.
    (8) Metal floor plates must be completely covered with wood, 
plywood, or fiber or composition sheets of adequate thickness and 
strength to prevent contact of the floor plates with the packages of 
Class 1 (explosive) materials under conditions incident to 
transportation, except that the covering of metal floor plates is not 
necessary for carload shipments loaded by the Department of Defense 
provided the Class 1 (explosive) materials are of such nature that they 
are not liable to leakage of dust, powder, or vapor which might become 
the cause of an explosion.
    (9) If the car is equipped with automobile loading devices, it may 
not be used unless the loading device is securely attached to the roof 
of the car with fastenings supplementing those already provided and so 
fixed that it cannot fall.
    (10) The car must be equipped with high-friction composition brake 
shoes (except metal deck flat cars used for COFC/TOFC service may be 
equipped with high phosphorus cast iron brakeshoes) and brake rigging 
designed for this type of brake shoe. Each brake shoe on the car must be 
at least 1 cm (0.4 inch) thick, and in safe and suitable condition for 
service.
    (11) The car must have either a metal subfloor with no combustible 
material exposed beneath the car, or metal spark shields extending from 
center sill to side sills and from end sills to at least 30 cm (12 
inches) beyond the extreme treads of the inside wheels of each truck, 
which are tightly fitted against the subfloor so that there is no vacant 
space or combustible material exposed. The metal subfloor or spark 
shields may not have an accumulation of oil, grease, or other debris 
which could support combustion.
    (c) Before Division 1.1 or 1.2 (explosive) materials may be loaded 
into a rail car, the car must have been inspected and certified to be in 
compliance with the requirements of paragraph (b) of this section by a 
qualified person designated under Sec. 215.11 of this title. The 
certification shall be made in Car Certificate No. 1 on the form 
prescribed in paragraph (f) of this section.
    (d) If the carrier furnishes the car to a shipper for loading 
Division 1.1 or 1.2 (explosive) materials, the shipper or his authorized 
employee shall, before commencing the loading of the car, inspect the 
interior thereof, and after loading certify to the proper condition of 
the car and the loading. This certification shall be made on the first 
signature line in Car Certificate No. 2 on the form prescribed in 
paragraph (f) of this section. In addition, the finished load must be 
inspected and certified to be in compliance with the requirements of 
this part by a qualified person designated under Sec. 215.11 of this 
title before the car goes forward. This certification shall be made on 
the second signature line in Car Certificate No. 2 on the form 
prescribed in paragraph (f) of this section. If the loading is performed 
by the carrier, Car Certificate No. 2 may only be signed by a qualified 
person designated under Sec. 215.11 of this title.
    (e) If a trailer or container containing Division 1.1 or 1.2 
(explosive) materials is loaded on a flatcar, the loading and securing 
of the load on the car must be supervised by a representative of the 
shipper or carrier. The certification shall be made in Car Certificate 
No. 3 on the form prescribed in paragraph (f) of this section.
    (f) Each car certificate for use in connection with the inspection 
of rail cars for the carriage of Division 1.1 or 1.2 (explosive) 
materials shall be printed on strong tag board measuring 18 by 18 cm 
(7.1 by 7.1 inches) or 15 by 20 cm (5.9 by 7.9 inches). It must be duly 
executed in triplicate by the carrier, and by the shipper if he loads 
the shipments. The original must be filed by the carrier at

[[Page 653]]

the forwarding station in a separate file and the other two must be 
attached to the car, one to each outer side on a fixed placard board or 
as otherwise provided.
--------------------------------Railroad

                             CAR CERTIFICATE

No. 1 -------------- Station____________________________________________
19--.
    I hereby certify that I have this day personally examined Car Number 
------ and that the car is in condition for service and complies with 
the FRA Freight Car Safety Standards (49 CFR part 215) and with the 
requirements for freight cars used to transport explosives prescribed by 
the DOT Hazardous Materials Regulation (49 CFR part 174).

    Qualified Person Designated Under
              49 CFR 215.11
No. 2 -------------- Station____________________________________________
19--.
    I have this day personally examined the above car and hereby certify 
that the explosives in or on this car, or in or on vehicles or in 
containers have been loaded and braced; that placards have been applied, 
according to the regulations prescribed by the Department of 
Transportation; and that the doors of cars so equipped fit or have been 
stripped so that sparks cannot enter.

      Shipper or his authorized agent

    Qualified Person Designated Under
              49 CFR 215.11
No. 3 -------------- Station____________________________________________
19--.
    I hereby certify that I have this day personally supervised the 
loading of the vehicles or containers on and their securement to the 
above car.

  Shipper or railway employee inspecting
          loading and securement

    Note 1: A shipper must decline to use a car not in proper condition.
    Note 2: All certificates, where applicable, must be signed.
    Note 3: Car certificates remaining on hand as of the effective date 
of these regulations may be used until stocks are exhausted but not 
after July 1, 1977.

[Amdt. 174-26, 41 FR 16092, Apr. 15, 1976]

    Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting 
Sec. 174.104, see the List of CFR Sections Affected which appears in the 
Finding Aids section of the printed volume and on GPO Access.



Sec. 174.105  Routing shipments, Division 1.1 or 1.2 (explosive) materials.

    Before a shipment of Division 1.1 or 1.2 (explosive) materials 
destined to a point beyond the lines of the initial carrier is accepted 
from the shipper, the initial carrier shall ascertain that the shipment 
can go forward by the route designated. To avoid delays en route, the 
initial carrier must be in possession of full rate information before 
forwarding the shipment.

[Amdt. 174-26, 41 FR 16092, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 174-68, 
55 FR 52682, Dec. 21, 1990; 66 FR 45383, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 174.106  ``Order-Notify'' or ``C.O.D.'' shipments, Division 1.1 or 1.2 (explosive) materials.

    (a) A carrier may not accept for transportation Division 1.1 or 1.2 
(explosive) materials, detonators, or detonating primers in any quantity 
when consigned to ``order-notify'' or ``C.O.D.'', except on a through 
bill of lading to a place outside the United States.
    (b) A carrier may not accept for transportation Division 1.1 or 1.2 
(explosive) materials, detonators, or detonating primers which the 
shipper consigns to himself unless the shipper has a resident 
representative to receive them at the delivery point.
    (c) A carrier may not accept Division 1.1 or 1.2 (explosive) 
materials for transportation subject to ``stop-off privileges en route 
for partial loading or unloading.''

[Amdt. 174-26, 41 FR 16092, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 174-36, 
44 FR 70732, Dec. 10, 1979; Amdt. 174-68, 55 FR 52682, Dec. 21, 1990; 66 
FR 45383, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 174.110  Car magazine.

    When specially authorized by the carrier, Division 1.1 or 1.2 
(explosive) materials in quantity not exceeding 68 kg (150 pounds) may 
be carried in construction or repair cars if the packages of Class 1 
(explosive) materials are placed in a ``magazine'' box made of sound 
lumber not less than 2.5 cm (0.98 inch) thick, covered on the exterior 
with metal, and provided with strong handles. The box must be plainly 
stenciled on the top, sides, and ends, in letters not less than 5 cm (2 
inches) high,

[[Page 654]]

``EXPLOSIVES--DANGEROUS--HANDLE CAREFULLY''. The box must be provided 
with strong hinges and with a lock for keeping it securely closed. 
Vacant space in the box must be filled with a cushioning material such 
as sawdust or excelsior, and the box must be properly stayed to prevent 
movement within the car. The car must be placarded with EXPLOSIVES 1.1 
or 1.2 (EXPLOSIVES A) placards when the magazine contains Division 1.1 
or 1.2 (explosive) materials.

[Amdt. 174-26, 41 FR 16092, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 174-26A, 
41 FR 40685, Sept. 20, 1976; Amdt. 174-68, 55 FR 52682, Dec. 21, 1990; 
66 FR 45383, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 174.112  Loading Division 1.3 materials and Division 1.2 (explosive) materials (Also see Sec. 174.101).

    (a) Division 1.3 materials and Division 1.2 (explosive) materials 
may not be loaded, transported or stored in a rail car equipped with any 
type of lighted heater or open-flame device, or in a rail car equipped 
with any apparatus or mechanism utilizing an internal combustion engine 
in its operation.
    (b) Except as provided in Sec. 174.101(b), (n), or (o) Division 1.3 
materials and Division 1.2 (explosive) materials must be transported in 
a closed car or container car which is in good condition, and into which 
sparks cannot enter. The car does not require the car certificates 
prescribed in Sec. 174.104(c) through (f). If the doors are not tight, 
they must be stripped to prevent the entrance of sparks. Wood floored 
cars must be equipped with spark shields (see Sec. 174.104). Packages of 
Division 1.3 materials and Division 1.2 (explosive) materials must be 
blocked and braced to prevent their movement and possible damage due to 
movement of other freight during transportation. For recommended methods 
of blocking and bracing see Bureau of Explosives Pamphlet No. 6.
    (c) Division 1.3 materials and Division 1.2 (explosive) materials 
may not be transported in a truck body, trailer, or container on a 
flatcar unless:
    (1) The truck body, trailer, or container is closed and tight;
    (2) All automatic heating or refrigerating machinery with which the 
truck body, trailer, or container is equipped is inoperative; and
    (3) Packages of Division 1.3 materials and Division 1.2 (explosive) 
materials are blocked and braced within the truck body, trailer, or 
container to prevent their movement and possible damage due to movement 
of other freight during transportation (ends, sidewalls, or doors of the 
truck body, trailer, or container may not be relied on to prevent the 
shifting of heavy loads). For recommended methods of blocking and 
bracing see Bureau of Explosives Pamphlet No. 6C. See Sec. 174.101(o).

[Amdt. 174-26, 41 FR 16092, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 174-26B, 
41 FR 57072, Dec. 30, 1976; Amdt. 174-68, 55 FR 52682, Dec. 21, 1990; 
Amdt. 174-83, 61 FR 51339, Oct. 1, 1996; 66 FR 45383, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 174.114  Record to be made of change of seals on ``Cars loaded with Division 1.1 or 1.2 (explosive) materials''.

    When a car seal is changed on a car requiring ``EXPLOSIVES 1.1 or 
EXPLOSIVES 1.2 (EXPLOSIVES A) placards'' while en route or before 
delivery to a consignee, a record of the change showing the following 
information must be made on or attached to the waybill or other form of 
memorandum which must accompany the car to its destination:

        Railroad    Place    Date

      Car Initials      Car Number Number or description of seal broken

Number or description of seal used to reseal car________________________

Reasons for opening car_________________________________________________

Condition of load_______________________________________________________

Name and occupation of person opening car_______________________________


[Amdt. 174-26, 41 FR 16092, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 174-26A, 
41 FR 40685, Sept. 20, 1976; Amdt. 174-68, 55 FR 52682, Dec. 21, 1990]

[[Page 655]]



Sec. 174.115  Loading Division 1.4 (explosive) materials.

    (a) Division 1.4 (explosive) materials may be loaded into any closed 
car in good condition, or into any container car in good condition. Car 
certificates are not required. Packages of Division 1.4 (explosive) 
materials must be blocked and braced to prevent their movement and 
possible damage due to movement of other freight during transportation. 
For methods of recommended loading and bracing see Bureau of Explosives 
Pamphlet No. 6.
    (b) Division 1.4 (explosive) materials may not be transported in a 
truck body, trailer, or container on a flatcar unless:
    (1) The truck body, trailer, or container is closed and tight;
    (2) All automatic heating or refrigerating machinery with which the 
truck body, trailer, or container is equipped is inoperative; and
    (3) Packages of Division 1.4 (explosive) materials are blocked and 
braced within the truck body, trailer, or container to prevent their 
movement and possible damage due to movement of other freight during 
transportation. Ends, side walls, or doors of the truck body, trailer, 
or container may not be relied on to prevent shifting of heavy loads. 
For recommended methods of blocking and bracing see Bureau of Explosives 
Pamphlet No. 6C.

[Amdt. 174-26, 41 FR 16092, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 174-36, 
44 FR 70732, Dec. 10, 1979; Amdt. 174-68, 55 FR 52682, Dec. 21, 1990; 66 
FR 45383, Aug. 28, 2001]



     Subpart F--Detailed Requirements for Class 2 (Gases) Materials



Sec. 174.200  Special handling requirements.

    (a) Division 2.1 (flammable gas) materials may not be loaded, 
transported, or stored in a rail car equipped with any type of lighted 
heater or open-flame device, or in a rail car equipped with any 
apparatus or mechanism utilizing an internal combustion engine in its 
operation.
    (b) Division 2.1 (flammable gas) materials may not be loaded in a 
truck body or trailer equipped with any type of lighted heater or any 
automatic heating or refrigerating apparatus when such truck bodies or 
trailers are loaded on flatcars except as provided in paragraph (c) of 
this section.
    (c) Heating or refrigeration apparatus may be operated on a motor 
vehicle loaded on a flatcar when the motor vehicle is loaded with 
Division 2.1 (flammable gas) materials only if:
    (1) The lading space is not equipped with any electrical apparatus 
that is not non-sparking or explosion-proof;
    (2) There is no combustion apparatus in the lading space;
    (3) There is no connection for the return of air from the lading 
space to any combustion apparatus; and
    (4) The heating system conforms to Sec. 393.77 of this title and 
does not heat any part of the lading over 54  deg.C (129  deg.F).

[Amdt. 174-26, 41 FR 16092, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 174-68, 
55 FR 52682, Dec. 21, 1990; 56 FR 66281, Dec. 20, 1991]



Sec. 174.201  Class 2 (gases) material cylinders.

    (a) Except as provided in paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section, 
cylinders containing Class 2 (gases) materials being transported in a 
rail car must be:
    (1) Securely lashed in an upright position so as to prevent their 
overturning;
    (2) Loaded into racks securely attached to the car;
    (3) Packed in boxes or crates of such dimensions as to prevent their 
overturning; or
    (4) Loaded in a horizontal position.
    (b) Specification DOT-4L (Sec. 178.57 of this subchapter) cylinders 
being transported in a rail car must be loaded in an upright position 
and be securely braced.
    (c) Cylinders containing Class 2 (gases) materials may be 
transported in stock cars, gondola cars and flat cars. However, they may 
not be transported in hopper bottom cars.

[Amdt. 174-26, 41 FR 16092, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 174-26A, 
41 FR 40685, Sept. 20, 1976; Amdt. 174-32, 43 FR 48644, Oct. 19, 1978; 
Amdt. 174-68, 55 FR 52682, Dec. 21, 1990]



Sec. 174.204  Tank car delivery of gases, including cryogenic liquids.

    (a) A tank car containing Class 2 (gases) material may not be 
unloaded

[[Page 656]]

unless it is consigned for delivery and unloaded on a private track (see 
Sec. 171.8 of this subchapter). However, if a private track is not 
available, it may be delivered and unloaded on carrier tracks subject to 
the following conditions:
    (1) A tank car of DOT-106A or 110A type (Sec. 179.300 or 
Sec. 179.301 of this subchapter) may not be delivered and the loaded 
unit tanks may not be removed from the car frame on carrier tracks. 
However, a carrier may give permission for the unloading of these 
containers on carrier tracks only if a private siding is not available 
within a reasonable trucking distance of the final destination. In 
addition, before the car is accepted for transportation, the shipper 
must obtain from the delivering carrier and file with the originating 
carrier, written permission for the removal and the consignee must 
furnish an adequately strong mechanical hoist by which the tanks can be 
lifted from the car and deposited directly upon vehicles furnished by 
the consignee for immediate removal from carrier property.
    (2) The following tank cars may not be delivered and unloaded on 
carrier tracks unless the lading is piped directly from the car to 
permanent storage tanks of sufficient capacity to receive the entire 
contents of the car; however, such cars may be stored on a private track 
(see Sec. 171.8 of this subchapter) or on carrier tracks designated by 
the carrier for such storage:
    (i) A tank car containing Division 2.1 (flammable gas) material that 
is a cryogenic liquid; or
    (ii) A tank car, except for a DOT-106A or 110A multi-unit tank car 
tank (Sec. 179.300 or Sec. 179.301 of this subchapter), containing 
anhydrous ammonia; hydrogen chloride, refrigerated liquid; hydrocarbon 
gas, liquefied; or liquefied petroleum gas; and having interior pipes 
for liquid and gas discharge valves equipped with check valves.
    (b) [Reserved]

[Amdt. 174-26, 41 FR 16092, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 174-26A, 
41 FR 40685, Sept. 20, 1976; Amdt. 174-32, 43 FR 48644, Oct. 19, 1978; 
Amdt. 174-43, 48 FR 27699, June 16, 1983; 48 FR 50440, 50441, Nov. 1, 
1983; Amdt. 174-68, 55 FR 52682, Dec. 21, 1990]



Sec. 174.290  Materials extremely poisonous by inhalation shipped by, for, or to the Department of Defense.

    (a) General. The provisions of this section apply only to materials 
extremely poisonous by inhalation which are Division 2.3 materials in 
Hazard Zone A and Division 6.1 materials in Hazard Zone A, as defined in 
Sec. 173.133(a)(2) of this subchapter. Such materials when shipped by, 
for, or to the Department of Defense may be transported by rail only if 
loaded and handled in accordance with the requirements of this section.
    (b) A Division 2.3 Hazard Zone A or a Division 6.1 Hazard Zone A 
material extremely poisonous by inhalation may be transported in:
    (1) UN 1N1 or UN 1N2 metal drums or equivalent military 
specification metal drums, by boxcar, gondola car (flat bottom), or 
stock car in carload lots. See Secs. 174.55 and 174.600 for blocking, 
bracing, and stowage requirements;
    (2) Tanks which are authorized under this subchapter for a Hazard 
Zone A material extremely poisonous by inhalation, Specification DOT 
106A (Secs. 179.300 and 179.301 of this subchapter), mounted on or 
secured to a multi-unit car or gondola car (flat bottom) in carload lots 
only;
    (3) Bombs, by boxcar, or gondola car (flat bottom) in carload lots 
only; or
    (4) Projectiles or ammunition for cannon with gas filled 
projectiles, by boxcar in carload or less-than-carload lots.
    (c) Each shipment of one or more carloads of a material extremely 
poisonous by inhalation, as described in paragraph (b) of this section, 
must be accompanied by a Department of Defense qualified escort supplied 
with equipment to handle leaks and other packaging failures which could 
result in escape of the material. The escort shall remain with the 
shipment during the entire time that it is in the custody of the carrier 
and in the event of leakage or escape of material, shall make repairs 
and perform decontamination as necessary.
    (d) When a material extremely poisonous by inhalation is transported 
in a tank, the tank must be securely

[[Page 657]]

mounted on a rail car especially provided for it or on a gondola car 
prepared with substantial wooden frames and blocks.
    (e) Bombs, projectiles, and cannon ammunition being transported by 
rail must be loaded, blocked and braced as shown in Bureau of Explosives 
Pamphlet No. 6A, or Department of Defense specifications. When a 
shipment is loaded in a gondola car it must be securely blocked and 
braced and not loaded higher than the sides of the car.
    (f) When a material extremely poisonous by inhalation is transported 
in drums with filling holes in the heads, they must be loaded on their 
bottoms. They may be loaded in rows, lengthwise of the car and any space 
between the sides of the car and the nearest row of drums must be 
``filled in'' with wooden boards or lumber nailed to sides of the car 
sufficient in length and width to contact both hoops of drums, or they 
may be loaded across the car in staggered stacks of which the number of 
drums in alternate stacks is reduced by one drum. All drums in stacks 
following the first stack loaded in the end of the car must be placed 
tightly into the angle of the space formed by the sidewalls of the drum 
in the preceding stack. Any space between the sides of the car and the 
drums in stacks having the greater number of drums must be filled in 
with wooden boards or lumber nailed to sides of the car sufficient in 
length and width to contact both hoops of the drums.
    (g) When a material extremely poisonous by inhalation is transported 
in drums with filling holes in the sides, they must be loaded on their 
sides with the filling holes up. They must be loaded lengthwise of the 
car in rows and any space between the sides of the car and the nearest 
row of drums must be filled in with wooden boards or lumber nailed to 
sides of the car sufficient in length and width to contact both hoops of 
the drums.
    (h) When a material extremely poisonous by inhalation is transported 
in drums in a boxcar, they must be loaded from ends of the car toward 
the space between the car doors, and there braced by center gates and 
wedges. See Sketch 1, Bureau of Explosives Pamphlet No. 6.
    (i) The doorways of a boxcar in which a material poisonous by 
inhalation is being transported must be protected by one of the methods 
prescribed in Sketch 1, Bureau of Explosives Pamphlet No. 6A.

[Amdt. 174-68, 55 FR 52683, Dec. 21, 1990; Amdt. 174-74, 58 FR 51533, 
Oct. 1, 1993; 65 FR 58630, Sept. 29, 2000]



    Subpart G--Detailed Requirements for Class 3 (Flammable Liquid) 
                                Materials



Sec. 174.300  Special handling requirements.

    (a) Class 3 (flammable liquid) materials may not be loaded, 
transported, or stored in a rail car equipped with any type of lighted 
heater or open-flame device, or in a rail car equipped with any 
apparatus or mechanism utilizing an internal combustion engine in its 
operation.
    (b) A truck body or trailer which is loaded with a Class 3 
(flammable liquid) materials and equipped with a lighted heater or any 
automatic heating or refrigerating apparatus may not be loaded on a 
flatcar except as provided in paragraph (c) of this section.
    (c) Heating or refrigeration apparatus on a motor vehicle loaded 
with Class 3 (flammable liquid) materials may be operated while the 
motor vehicle is loaded on a flatcar only if:
    (1) The lading space is not equipped with any electrical apparatus 
that is not non-sparking or explosion-proof;
    (2) There is no combustion apparatus in the lading space;
    (3) There is no connection for the return of air from the lading 
space to any combustion apparatus; and
    (4) The heating system conforms to Sec. 393.77 of this title and 
does not heat any part of the lading over 54  deg.C (129  deg.F).
    (d) Metal barrels or drums containing Class 3 (flammable liquid) 
materials may be transported in a steel gondola or flatcar or in a stock 
car. However, they may not be transported in a hopper bottom car.

[Amdt. 174-26, 41 FR 16092, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 174-31, 
43 FR 31143, July 20, 1978; Amdt. 174-68, 55 FR 52683, Dec. 21, 1990]

[[Page 658]]



Sec. 174.304  Class 3 (flammable liquid) materials in tank cars.

    A tank car containing a Class 3 (flammable liquid) material, other 
than liquid road asphalt or tar, may not be transported by rail unless 
it is originally consigned or subsequently reconsigned to a party having 
a private track on which it is to be delivered and unloaded (see 
Sec. 171.8 of this subchapter) or to a party using railroad siding 
facilities which are equipped for piping the liquid from the tank car to 
permanent storage tanks of sufficient capacity to receive the entire 
contents of the car.

[Amdt. 174-26, 41 FR 16092, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 174-32, 
43 FR 48644, Oct. 19, 1978; Amdt. 174-68, 55 FR 52683, Dec. 21, 1990]

Subparts H-I [Reserved]



 Subpart J--Detailed Requirements for Division 6.1 (Poisonous) Materials



Sec. 174.600  Special handling requirements for materials extremely poisonous by inhalation.

    A tank car containing a material extremely poisonous by inhalation 
which is a Division 2.3 material in Hazard Zone A or a Division 6.1 
material in Hazard Zone A, as defined in Sec. 173.133(a)(2) of this 
subchapter, may not be transported by rail unless it is originally 
consigned or subsequently reconsigned to a party having a private track 
on which it is to be delivered and unloaded (see Sec. 171.8 of this 
subchapter) or to a party using railroad siding facilities which are 
equipped for piping the liquid or gas from the tank car to permanent 
storage tanks or sufficient capacity to receive the entire contents of 
the car. See the requirements in Sec. 174.290 for materials extremely 
poisonous by inhalation which are shipped by, for, or to the Department 
of Defense.

[Amdt. 174-68, 55 FR 52684, Dec. 21, 1990]



Sec. 174.615  Cleaning cars.

    (a) [Reserved]
    (b) After Division 6.1 (poisonous) materials are unloaded from a 
rail car, that car must be thoroughly cleaned unless the car is used 
exclusively in the carriage of Division 6.1 (poisonous) materials.

[Amdt. 174-26, 41 FR 16092, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 174-68, 
55 FR 52684, Dec. 21, 1990; Amdt. 174-82, 61 FR 18933, Apr. 29, 1996]



Sec. 174.680  Division 6.1 (poisonous) materials with foodstuffs.

    (a) Except as provided in paragraph (b) of this section, a carrier 
may not transport any package bearing a POISON or POISON INHALATION 
HAZARD label in the same car with any material marked as, or known to 
be, a foodstuff, feed or any other edible material intended for 
consumption by humans or animals.
    (b) A carrier must separate any package bearing a POISON label 
displaying the text ``PG III,'' or bearing a ``PG III'' mark adjacent to 
the POISON label, from materials marked as or known to be foodstuffs, 
feed or any other edible materials intended for consumption by humans or 
animals, as required in Sec. 174.81(e)(3) for classes identified with 
the letter ``O'' in the Segregation Table for Hazardous Materials.

[64 FR 10781, Mar. 5, 1999]



  Subpart K--Detailed Requirements for Class 7 (Radioactive) Materials



Sec. 174.700  Special handling requirements for Class 7 (radioactive) materials.

    (a) Each rail shipment of low specific activity materials or surface 
contaminated objects as defined in Sec. 173.403 of this subchapter must 
be loaded so as to avoid spillage and scattering of loose material. 
Loading restrictions are prescribed in Sec. 173.427 of this subchapter.
    (b) The number of packages of Class 7 (radioactive) materials that 
may be transported by rail car or stored at any single location is 
limited to a total transport index number (as defined in Sec. 173.403 of 
this subchapter) of not more than 50. This provision does not apply to 
exclusive use shipments as described in Secs. 173.403, 173.427, 173.441, 
and 173.457 of this subchapter.

[[Page 659]]

    (c) Each package of Class 7 (radioactive) material bearing 
RADIOACTIVE YELLOW-II or RADIOACTIVE YELLOW-III labels may not be placed 
closer than 0.9 m (3 feet) to an area (or dividing partition between 
areas) which may be continuously occupied by any passenger, rail 
employee, or shipment of one or more animals, nor closer than 4.5 m (15 
feet) to any package containing undeveloped film (if so marked). If more 
than one package of Class 7 (radioactive) materials is present, the 
distance must be computed from the table below on the basis of the total 
transport index number (determined by adding together the transport 
index numbers on the labels of the individual packages) of packages in 
the rail car or storage area:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                         Minimum        Minimum distance
                                        separation         to area of
                                       distance to         persons or
                                         nearest        minimum distance
       Total transport index         undeveloped film    from dividing
                                   -------------------   partition of a
                                                        combination car
                                     Meters     Feet  ------------------
                                                        Meters     Feet
------------------------------------------------------------------------
None..............................       0          0       0          0
0.1 to 10.0.......................       4.5       15       0.9        3
10.1 to 20.0......................       6.7       22       1.2        4
20.1 to 30.0......................       7.7       29       1.5        5
30.1 to 40.0......................      10         33       1.8        6
40.1 to 50.0......................      10.9       36       2.1        7
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note: The distance in this table must be measured from the nearest point
  on the nearest packages of Class 7 (radioactive) materials.

    (d) Each fissile material, controlled shipment must be transported 
in accordance with one of the methods prescribed in Sec. 173.457 of this 
subchapter. The transport controls must be adequate to assure that no 
fissile material, controlled shipment is transported in the same 
transport vehicle with any other fissile Class 7 (radioactive) material 
shipment. In loading and storage areas, each fissile material, 
controlled shipment must be segregated by a distance of at least 6 m (20 
feet) from other packages required to bear one of the ``radioactive'' 
labels described in part 172 of this subchapter.
    (e) A person shall not remain unnecessarily in, on or near a 
transport vehicle containing Class 7 (radioactive) materials.
    (f) In the case of packages shipped under the exclusive use 
provisions of Sec. 173.441(b) of this subchapter for packages with 
external radiation levels in excess of 2 mSv per hour (200 mrem per 
hour) at the package surface--
    (1) The transport vehicle must meet the requirements for a closed 
transport vehicle (Sec. 173.403 of this subchapter);
    (2) Each package must be secured so that its position within the 
transport vehicle remains fixed under conditions normally incident to 
transportation; and
    (3) The radiation level may not exceed 0.02 mSv per hour (2 mrem per 
hour) in any normally occupied position in the transport vehicle or 
adjacent rail car.

[Amdt. 174-80, 60 FR 50331, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended by Amdt. 174-80, 
61 FR 20753, May 8, 1996; 66 FR 45383, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 174.715  Cleanliness of transport vehicles after use.

    (a) Each transport vehicle used for transporting Class 7 
(radioactive) materials as exclusive use, as defined in Sec. 173.403 of 
this subchapter, must be surveyed with appropriate radiation detection 
instruments after each use. A transport vehicle may not be returned to 
service until the radiation dose rate at any accessible surface is 0.005 
mSv per hour (0.5 mrem per hour) or less, and there is no significant 
removable radioactive surface contamination, as defined in Sec. 173.443 
of this subchapter.
    (b) This section does not apply to any transport vehicle used solely 
for transporting Class 7 (radioactive) materials if a survey of the 
interior surface shows that the radiation dose rate does not exceed 0.1 
mSv per hour (10 mrem per hour) at the interior surface or 0.02 mSv per 
hour (2 mrem per hour) at 1 m (3.3 feet) from any interior surface. The 
transport vehicle must be stenciled with the words ``FOR RADIOACTIVE 
MATERIALS USE ONLY'' in lettering at least 7.6 cm (3 inches) high in a 
conspicuous place on both sides of the exterior of the transport 
vehicle, and it must be kept closed at all times other than during 
loading and unloading.

[Amdt. 174-80, 60 FR 50332, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended by 66 FR 45383, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 174.750  Incidents involving leakage.

    (a) In addition to the incident reporting requirements of 
Secs. 171.15 and 171.16 of this subchapter, the carrier shall also 
notify the offeror at the earliest

[[Page 660]]

practicable moment following any incident in which there has been 
breakage, spillage, or suspected radioactive contamination involving 
Class 7 (radioactive) materials shipments. Transport vehicles, 
buildings, areas, or equipment in which Class 7 (radioactive) materials 
have been spilled may not be again placed in service or routinely 
occupied until the radiation dose rate at every accessible surface is 
less than 0.005 mSv per hour (0.5 mrem per hour) and there is no 
significant removable radioactive surface contamination (see 
Sec. 173.443 of this subchapter).
    (b) The package or materials should be segregated as far as 
practicable from personnel contact. If radiological advice or assistance 
is needed, the U.S. Department of Energy (DOE) should also be notified. 
In case of obvious leakage, or if it appears likely that the inside 
container may have been damaged, care should be taken to avoid 
inhalation, ingestion, or contact with the Class 7 (radioactive) 
material. Any loose Class 7 (radioactive) materials should be left in a 
segregated area and held pending disposal instructions, from qualified 
persons.

[Amdt. 174-26, 41 FR 16092, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 174-42, 
48 FR 10245, Mar. 10, 1983; Amdt. 174-61, 51 FR 34987, Oct. 1, 1986; 
Amdt. 174-65, 53 FR 38274, Sept. 29, 1988; Amdt. 174-68, 55 FR 52684, 
Dec. 21, 1990; Amdt. 174-80, 60 FR 50332, Sept. 28, 1995]



PART 175--CARRIAGE BY AIRCRAFT--Table of Contents




             Subpart A--General Information and Regulations

Sec.
175.1  Purpose and scope.
175.3  Unacceptable hazardous materials shipments.
175.5  Applicability.
175.10  Exceptions.
175.20  Compliance and training.
175.25  Notification at air passenger facilities of hazardous materials 
          restrictions.
175.26  Notification at cargo facilities of hazardous materials 
          requirements.
175.30  Accepting and inspecting shipments.
175.31  Reports of discrepancies.
175.33  Notification of pilot-in-command.
175.35  Shipping papers aboard aircraft.
175.40  Keeping and replacement of labels.

               Subpart B--Loading, Unloading and Handling

175.75  Quantity limitations aboard aircraft.
175.78  Stowage compatibility of cargo.
175.79  Orientation of cargo.
175.81  Securing of packages containing hazardous materials.
175.85  Cargo location.
175.88  Inspection of unit load devices.
175.90  Damaged shipments.

 Subpart C--Specific Regulations Applicable According to Classification 
                               of Material

175.305  Self-propelled vehicles.
175.310  Transportation of flammable liquid fuel in small, passenger-
          carrying aircraft.
175.320  Cargo aircraft only; only means of transportation.
175.630  Special requirements for Division 6.1 (poisonous) material and 
          Division 6.2 (infectious substance) material.
175.700  Special limitations and requirements for Class 7 (radioactive) 
          materials.
175.701  Separation distance requirements for packages containing Class 
          7 (radioactive) materials in passenger-carrying aircraft.
175.702  Requirements for carriage of packages containing Class 7 
          (radioactive) materials in a cargo aircraft only.
175.703  Other special requirements for the acceptance and carriage of 
          packages containing Class 7 (radioactive) materials.
175.704  Plutonium shipments.
175.705  Inspection of aircraft for contamination by Class 7 
          (radioactive) materials.

    Authority: 49 U.S.C. 5101-5127; 49 CFR 1.53.

    Source: Amdt. 175-1, 41 FR 16106, Apr. 15, 1976, unless otherwise 
noted.



             Subpart A--General Information and Regulations



Sec. 175.1  Purpose and scope.

    This part prescribes requirements, in addition to those contained in 
parts 171, 172 and 173 of this subchapter, applicable to aircraft 
operators transporting hazardous materials aboard (including attached to 
or suspended from) aircraft.

[Amdt. 175-15, 45 FR 35332, May 27, 1980]



Sec. 175.3  Unacceptable hazardous materials shipments.

    Hazardous materials that are not prepared for shipment in accordance

[[Page 661]]

with this subchapter may not be accepted for transportation or 
transported aboard an aircraft.

[Amdt. 175-25, 47 FR 54822, Dec. 6, 1982]



Sec. 175.5  Applicability.

    (a) This part applies to the acceptance for transportation, loading 
and transportation of hazardous materials in any aircraft in the United 
States and in aircraft of United States registry anywhere in air 
commerce. This part does not apply to:
    (1) Aircraft owned and operated by a government when not engaged in 
carrying persons or property for commercial purposes;
    (2) Aircraft which are not owned by a government nor engaged in 
carrying persons or property for commercial purposes but which are under 
the exclusive direction and control of a government for a period of not 
less than 90 days as specified in a written contract or lease. An 
aircraft is under the exclusive direction and control of a government 
when the government exercises responsibility for:
    (i) Approving crew members and determining that they are qualified 
to operate the aircraft;
    (ii) Determining the airworthiness and directing maintenance of the 
aircraft; and
    (iii) Dispatching the aircraft, including the times of departure, 
airports to be used, and type and amount of cargo to be carried;
    (3) Aircraft of United States registry under lease to and operated 
by foreign nationals outside the United States if:
    (i) Hazardous materials forbidden aboard aircraft by Sec. 172.101 of 
this subchapter are not carried on the aircraft; and
    (ii) Other hazardous materials are carried in accordance with the 
regulations of the State (nation) of the aircraft operator.

[Amdt. 175-15, 45 FR 35332, May 27, 1980]



Sec. 175.10  Exceptions.

    (a) This subchapter does not apply to:
    (1) Aviation fuel and oil in tanks that are in compliance with the 
installation provisions of 14 CFR, chapter 1.
    (2) Hazardous materials required aboard an aircraft in accordance 
with the applicable airworthiness requirements and operating 
regulations. Unless otherwise approved by the Associate Administrator, 
items of replacement for such hazardous materials must be transported in 
accordance with this subchapter except that--
    (i) In place of the required packagings, packagings specially 
designed for the transport of aircraft spares and supplies may be used, 
provided such packagings provide at least an equivalent level of 
protection to those that would be required by this subchapter;
    (ii) Aircraft batteries are not subject to quantity limitations such 
as those provided in Sec. 172.101 or Sec. 175.75(a) of this subchapter; 
and,
    (iii) A tire assembly with a serviceable tire is not subject to the 
provisions of this subchapter provided the tire is not inflated to a 
gauge pressure exceeding the maximum rated pressure for that tire.
    (3) Hazardous materials loaded and carried in hoppers or tanks of 
aircraft certificated for use in aerial seeding, dusting, spraying, 
fertilizing, crop improvement, or pest control, to be dispensed during 
such an operation.
    (4) The following hazardous materials when carried by a passenger or 
crew member for personal use in conformance with the following 
conditions:
    (i) Non-radioactive medicinal and toilet articles (including 
aerosols) may be carried in checked or carry-on baggage;
    (ii) One self-defense spray (see Sec. 171.8 of this subchapter), not 
exceeding 118 mL(4 fluid ounces) by volume, that incorporates a positive 
means to prevent accidental discharge may be carried in checked baggage 
only;
    (iii) Other aerosols in Division 2.2 with no subsidiary risk may be 
carried in checked baggage only; and
    (iv) The aggregate quantity of hazardous materials carried by the 
person may not exceed 2 kg (70 ounces) by mass or 2 L (68 fluid ounces) 
by volume and the capacity of each container may not exceed 0.5 kg (18 
ounces) by mass or 470 mL (16 fluid ounces) by volume.
    (5) Small-arms ammunition for personal use carried by a crewmember 
or passenger in his baggage (excluding carry-on baggage) if securely 
packed in fiber, wood or metal boxes, or other

[[Page 662]]

packagings specifically designed to carry small amounts of ammunition. 
This paragraph does not apply to persons traveling under the provisions 
of 49 CFR 1544.219.
    (6) [Reserved]
    (7) Oxygen, or any hazardous material used for the generation of 
oxygen, for medical use by a passenger, which is furnished by the 
aircraft operator in accordance with 14 CFR 121.574 or 135.91. For 
purposes of this paragraph, an aircraft operator that is not a 
certificate holder under 14 CFR part 121 or part 135, may apply this 
exception in conformance with 14 CFR 121.574 or 135.91 in the same 
manner as required for a certificate holder.
    (8) Human beings and animals with an implanted medical device, such 
as a heart pacemaker, that contains Class 7 (radioactive) materials or 
with radio-pharmaceuticals that have been injected or ingested.
    (9) Smoke grenades, flares, or similar devices carried only for use 
during a sport parachute jumping activity.
    (10) Safety matches or a lighter intended for use by an individual 
when carried on one's person. However, lighters containing unabsorbed 
liquid fuel (other than liquefied gas), lighter fuel, and lighter 
refills are not permitted on one's person or in checked or carry-on 
baggage.
    (11) Smoke grenades, flares, and pyrotechnic devices affixed to 
aircraft carrying no person other than a required flight crewmember 
during any flight conducted at and as a part of a scheduled air show or 
exhibition of aeronautical skill. The affixed installation accommodating 
the smoke grenades, flares, or pyrotechnic devices on the aircraft must 
be approved by the FAA for its intended use.
    (12) Hazardous materials which are loaded and carried on or in cargo 
aircraft only, and which are to be dispensed or expended during flight 
for weather control, enviromental restoration or protection, forest 
preservation and protection, flood control, avalanche control purposes, 
or routine quality control testing of special fireworks manufactured for 
the Department of Defense, when the following requirements are met:
    (i) Operations may not be conducted over densely populated areas, in 
a congested airway, or near any airport where air carrier passenger 
operations are conducted.
    (ii) Each operator shall prepare and keep current a manual 
containing operational guidelines and handling procedures, for the use 
and guidance of flight, maintenance, and ground personnel concerned in 
the dispensing or expending of hazardous materials. The manual must be 
approved by the FAA Civil Aviation Security Office responsible for the 
operator's overall aviation security program or the FAA Civil Aviation 
Security Office in the region where the operator is located. The manual 
must be approved by the FAA Civil Aviation Security Field Office 
responsible for reviewing the operator's hazardous materials program or 
the FAA Civil Aviation Security Field Office in the region where the 
operator is located. Each operation must be conducted in accordance with 
the manual.
    (iii) No person other than a required flight crewmember, FAA 
inspector, or person necessary for handling or dispensing the hazardous 
material may be carried on the aircraft.
    (iv) The operator of the aircraft must have advance permission from 
the owner of any airport to be used for the dispensing or expending 
operation.
    (v) When dynamite and blasting caps are carried for avalanche 
control flights, the explosives must be handled by, and at all times be 
under the control of, a qualified blaster. When required by State or 
local authority, the blaster must be licensed and the State or local 
authority must be identified in writing to the FAA Civil Aviation 
Security Field Office responsible for reviewing the operator's hazardous 
materials program or the FAA Civil Aviation Security Field Office in the 
region where the operator is located.
    (vi) When special fireworks aerial illuminating flares, manufactured 
specifically for the DOD, are carried for in-flight routine quality 
control testing, the fireworks must be handled by, and at all times be 
under the control of, a qualified person who has been trained in 
accordance with a program approved by the local FAA Civil Aviation 
Security Field Office. The aircraft

[[Page 663]]

must be specially modified to conduct the testing operation and must be 
specifically approved for such operations by the local FAA Civil 
Aviation Security Field Office before the flight.
    (13) Carbon dioxide, solid (dry ice) when:
    (i) In quantities not exceeding 2.3 kg (5.07 pounds) per package 
packed as prescribed by Sec. 173.217 of this subchapter and used as a 
refrigerant for the contents of the package. The package must be marked 
with the name of the contents being cooled, the net weight of the dry 
ice or an indication that the net weight is 2.3 kg (5.07 pounds) or 
less, and also marked ``Carbon Dioxide, Solid'' or ``Dry Ice'';
    (ii) Intended for use in food and beverage service aboard aircraft; 
or
    (iii) In quantities not exceeding 2 kg (4.4 pounds) per passenger 
when used to pack perishables in carry-on baggage provided the package 
permits the release of carbon dioxide gas.
    (14) A transport incubator unit necessary to protect life or an 
organ preservation unit necessary to protect human organs provided:
    (i) The compressed gas used to operate the unit is in an authorized 
DOT specification cylinder and is marked, labeled, filled and maintained 
as prescribed by this subchapter;
    (ii) Each battery used in the operation of the unit is of the 
nonspillable type;
    (iii) The unit is constructed so that valves, fittings, and gauges 
are protected from damage;
    (iv) The pilot in command is advised when the unit is on board, and 
when it is intended for use;
    (v) The unit is accompanied by a person qualified to operate it;
    (vi) The unit is secured in the aircraft in a manner so as not to 
restrict access to or use of any required emergency or regular exit or 
of the aisle in the passenger compartment; and,
    (vii) Smoking within 3 m (10 feet) of the unit is prohibited.
    (15) Alcoholic beverages, perfumes, colognes, and liquefied gas 
lighters that have been examined by the Bureau of Explosives (B of E) 
and approved by the Associate Administrator, carried aboard a passenger-
carrying aircraft by the operator for use or sale on the aircraft.
    (16) Perfumes and colognes, purchased through duty-free sales, 
carried by passengers or crew in carry-on baggage.
    (17) Alcoholic beverages containing:
    (i) Not more than 24% alcohol by volume; or
    (ii) More than 24% and not more than 70% alcohol by volume when in 
retail packagings not exceeding 5 liters (1.3 gallons) carried by a crew 
member or passenger in checked or carry-on baggage, with a total net 
quantity per person of 5 liters (1.3 gallons) for such beverages.
    (18) Carbon dioxide gas cylinders worn by passengers for the 
operation of mechanical limbs and spare cylinders of a similar size for 
the same purpose in sufficient quantities to ensure an adequate supply 
for the duration of the journey.
    (19) A wheelchair or other battery-powered mobility aid equipped 
with a nonspillable battery, when carried as checked baggage, provided 
that--
    (i) The battery meets the provisions of Sec. 173.159(d) for 
nonspillable batteries;
    (ii) Visual inspection including, where necessary, removal of the 
battery, reveals no obvious defects (however, removal of the battery 
from the housing should be performed by qualified airline personnel 
only);
    (iii) The battery is disconnected and terminals are insulated to 
prevent short circuits; and
    (iv) The battery is securely attached to the wheelchair or mobility 
aid, is removed and placed in a strong, rigid packaging that is marked 
``NONSPILLABLE BATTERY'' (unless fully enclosed in a rigid housing that 
is properly marked), or is handled in accordance with paragraph 
(a)(20)(iv) of this section.
    (20) A wheelchair or other battery-powered mobility aid equipped 
with a spillable battery, when carried as checked baggage, provided 
that--
    (i) Visual inspection including, where necessary, removal of the 
battery, reveals no obvious defects (however, removal of the battery 
from the housing should be performed by qualified airline personnel 
only);

[[Page 664]]

    (ii) The battery is disconnected and terminals are insulated to 
prevent short circuits;
    (iii) The pilot-in-command is advised, either orally or in writing, 
prior to departure, as to the location of the battery aboard the 
aircraft; and
    (iv) The wheelchair or mobility aid is loaded, stowed, secured and 
unloaded in an upright position or the battery is removed, the 
wheelchair or mobility aid is carried as checked baggage without further 
restriction, and the removed battery is carried in a strong, rigid 
packaging under the following conditions:
    (A) The packaging must be leak-tight and impervious to battery 
fluid. An inner liner may be used to satisfy this requirement if there 
is absorbent material placed inside of the liner and the liner has a 
leakproof closure;
    (B) The battery must be protected against short circuits, secured 
upright in the packaging, and be packaged with enough compatible 
absorbent material to completely absorb liquid contents in the event of 
rupture of the battery; and
    (C) The packaging must be labeled with a CORROSIVE label, marked to 
indicate proper orientation, and marked with the words ``Battery, wet, 
with wheelchair.''
    (21) Hair curlers containing hydrocarbon gas, no more than one per 
passenger or crew member, provided that the safety cover is securely 
fitted over the heating element. Gas refills for such curlers are not 
permitted in checked or carry-on baggage.
    (22) A mercurial barometer or thermometer carried as carry-on-
baggage only, by a representative of a government weather bureau or 
similar official agency, provided that individual advises the operator 
of the presence of the barometer or thermometer in his baggage. The 
barometer or thermometer must be packaged in a strong outer packaging 
having sealed inner liner or bag of strong, leak proof and puncture-
resistant material impervious to mercury, which will prevent the escape 
of mercury from the package irrespective of its position. The pilot-in-
command must be informed of the presence of any such barometer or 
thermometer by the operator of the aircraft.
    (23) With the approval of the operator of the aircraft and as carry-
on baggage, electrically powered heat-producing articles (e.g., battery-
operated equipment, such as underwater torches and soldering equipment), 
which, if accidentally activated, will generate extreme heat and can 
cause fire. The heat-producing component, or the energy source, must be 
removed so as to prevent unintentional functioning during transport.
    (24) [Reserved]
    (25) With approval of the aircraft operator, one small carbon 
dioxide cylinder fitted into a self-inflating life-jacket, plus one 
spare cartridge, may be carried by a passenger or crew member in checked 
or carry-on baggage.
    (26) A small medical or clinical mercury thermometer for personal 
use, when carried in protective cases by passengers or crew members.
    (b) A cylinder containing medical-use compressed oxygen, owned or 
leased by an aircraft operator or offered for transportation by a 
passenger needing it for personal medical use at destination, may be 
carried in the cabin of a passenger-carrying aircraft in accordance with 
the following provisions:
    (1) No more than six cylinders belonging to the aircraft operator 
and, in addition, no more than one cylinder per passenger needing the 
oxygen at destination, may be transported in the cabin of the aircraft 
under the provisions of this paragraph (b);
    (2) The rated capacity of each cylinder may not exceed 850 L(30 
cubic feet);
    (3) Each cylinder and its overpack or outer packaging (see Special 
Provision A52 in Sec. 172.102 of this subchapter) must conform to the 
provisions of this subchapter;
    (4) The aircraft operator shall securely stow the cylinder in its 
overpack or outer packaging in the cabin of the aircraft and shall 
notify the pilot-in-command as specified in Sec. 175.33 of this part; 
and
    (5) Shipments under this paragraph (b) are not subject to--
    (i) Subpart C and, for passengers only, subpart H of part 172 of 
this subchapter;
    (ii) Section 173.25(a)(4) of this subchapter.

[[Page 665]]

    (iii) Section 175.85(i).

[Amdt. 175-1, 41 FR 16106, Apr. 15, 1976]

    Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting 
Sec. 175.10, see the List of CFR Sections Affected which appears in the 
Finding Aids section of the printed volume and on GPO Access.



Sec. 175.20  Compliance and training.

    (a) Unless this subchapter specifically provides that another person 
shall perform a particular duty, each operator shall comply with all 
applicable requirements in parts 106, 171, 172, and 175 of this chapter 
and shall ensure each of its hazmat employees receive training in 
relation thereto. (See also 14 CFR 121.135, 121.401, 121.433a, 135.323, 
135.327 and 135.333.)
    (b) A carrier may not transport a hazardous material by aircraft 
unless each of its hazmat employees involved in that transportation is 
trained as required by subpart H of part 172 of this subchapter.

[Amdt. 175-48, 57 FR 20953, May 15, 1992]



Sec. 175.25  Notification at air passenger facilities of hazardous materials restrictions.

    (a) Each aircraft operator who engages in for-hire transportation of 
passengers shall display notices of the requirements applicable to the 
carriage of hazardous materials aboard aircraft, and the penalties for 
failure to comply with those requirements. Each notice must be legible, 
and be prominently displayed so that it can be seen by passengers in 
locations where the aircraft operator issues tickets, checks baggage, 
and maintains aircraft boarding areas.
    (1) At a minimum, each notice must communicate the following 
information:

    Federal law forbids the carriage of hazardous materials aboard 
aircraft in your luggage or on your person.
    A violation can result in five years' imprisonment and penalties of 
$250,000 or more (49 U.S.C. 5124).
    Hazardous materials include explosives, compressed gases, flammable 
liquids and solids, oxidizers, poisons, corrosives and radioactive 
materials.
    Examples: Paints, lighter fluid, fireworks, tear gases, oxygen 
bottles, and radio-pharmaceuticals.
    There are special exceptions for small quantities (up to 70 ounces 
total) of medicinal and toilet articles carried in your luggage and 
certain smoking materials carried on your person.
    For further information contact your airline representative.

    (2) The information contained in paragraph (a)(1) of this section 
must be printed:
    (i) In legible English and may, in addition to English, be displayed 
in other languages; and
    (ii) In lettering of at least 1 cm (0.4 inch) in height for the 
first paragraph and 4.0 mm (0.16 inch) in height for the other 
paragraphs; and
    (iii) On a background of contrasting color.
    (3) Size and color of the notice are optional. Additional 
information, examples, or illustrations, if not inconsistent with the 
required information, may be included.
    (4) Notwithstanding the requirements of paragraph (a)(1) of this 
section, a notice with the wording ``A violation can result in penalties 
of up to $25,000 and five years' imprisonment. (49 U.S.C. 1809)'' may be 
used through December 31, 2001.
    (b) [Reserved]

[Amdt. 175-12, 45 FR 13091, Feb. 28, 1980, as amended by 175-23, 47 FR 
43066, Sept. 30, 1982; Amdt. 175-47, 55 FR 52685, Dec. 21, 1990; Amdt. 
175-50, 58 FR 50505, Sept. 27, 1993; 63 FR 37462, July 10, 1998; 65 FR 
50462, Aug. 18, 2000]



Sec. 175.26  Notification at cargo facilities of hazardous materials requirements.

    (a) After September 30, 1994, each person who engages in the 
acceptance or transport of cargo for transportation by aircraft shall 
display notices, at each facility where cargo is accepted, to persons 
offering such cargo of the requirements applicable to the carriage of 
hazardous materials aboard aircraft, and the penalties for failure to 
comply with those requirements. Each notice must be legible, and be 
prominently displayed so that it can be seen. At a minimum, each notice 
must communicate the following information:
    (1) Cargo containing hazardous materials (dangerous goods) for 
transportation by aircraft must be offered in accordance with the 
Federal Hazardous

[[Page 666]]

Materials Regulations (49 CFR parts 171-180).
    (2) A violation can result in five years' imprisonment and penalties 
of $250,000 or more (49 U.S.C. 5124).
    (3) Hazardous materials (dangerous goods) include explosives, 
compressed gases, flammable liquids and solids, oxidizers, poisons, 
corrosives and radioactive materials.
    (4) Notwithstanding the requirements of paragraph (a)(2) of this 
section, a notice with the wording ``A violation can result in penalties 
of up to $25,000 and five years' imprisonment (49 U.S.C. 1809)'' may be 
used through December 31, 2001.
    (b) The information contained in paragraph (a) of this section must 
be printed:
    (1) Legibly in English, and, where cargo is accepted outside of the 
United States, in the language of the host country; and
    (2) On a background of contrasting color.
    (c) Size and color of the notice are optional. Additional 
information, examples, or illustrations, if not inconsistent with 
required information, may be included.
    (d) Exceptions: Display of a notice required by paragraph (a) of 
this section is not required at:
    (1) An unattended location (e.g., a drop box) provided a general 
notice advising customers of a prohibition on shipments of hazardous 
materials through that location is prominently displayed; or
    (2) A customer's facility where hazardous materials packages are 
accepted by a carrier.

[Amdt. 175-50, 58 FR 50505, Sept. 27, 1993, as amended at 63 FR 37462, 
July 10, 1998]



Sec. 175.30  Accepting and inspecting shipments.

    (a) No person may accept a hazardous material for transportation 
aboard an aircraft unless the hazardous material is:
    (1) Authorized, and is within the quantity limitations specified for 
carriage aboard aircraft according to Sec. 172.101 of this subchapter or 
as otherwise specifically provided by this subchapter.
    (2) Described and certified on a shipping paper prepared in 
duplicate in accordance with part 172 of this subchapter or as 
authorized by Sec. 171.11 of this subchapter. Each person receiving a 
shipping paper required by this section must retain a copy or an 
electronic image thereof, that is accessible at or through its principal 
place of business and must make the shipping paper immediately 
available, upon request, to an authorized official of a federal, state, 
or local government agency at reasonable times and locations. For a 
hazardous waste, each shipping paper copy must be retained for three 
years after the material is accepted by the initial carrier. For all 
other hazardous materials, each shipping paper copy must be retained for 
375 days after the material is accepted by the carrier. Each shipping 
paper copy must include the date of acceptance by the carrier. Only an 
initial carrier must receive and retain a copy of the shipper's 
certification as required by Sec. 172.204 of this subchapter.
    (3) Labeled and marked in accordance with subparts D and E of part 
172 or as authorized in Sec. 171.11 of this subchapter, and placarded 
(when required) in accordance with subpart F of part 172 of this 
subchapter; and,
    (4) Labeled with a ``CARGO AIRCRAFT ONLY'' label (see Sec. 172.448 
of this subchapter) if the material as presented is not permitted aboard 
passenger-carrying aircraft.
    (b) Except as provided in paragraph (d) of this section, no person 
may carry a hazardous material in a package, outside container, or 
overpack aboard an aircraft unless the package, outside container, or 
overpack is inspected by the operator of the aircraft immediately before 
placing it:
    (1) Aboard the aircraft; or,
    (2) In a unit load device or on a pallet prior to loading aboard the 
aircraft.
    (c) A hazardous material may only be carried aboard an aircraft if, 
based on the inspection prescribed in paragraph (b) of this section, the 
operator determines that the package, outside container, or overpack 
containing the hazardous material:
    (1) Has no holes, leakage or other indication that its integrity has 
been compromised; and

[[Page 667]]

    (2) For Class 7 (radioactive) materials, does not have a broken 
seal, except that packages contained in overpacks need not be inspected 
for seal integrity.
    (d) The requirements of paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section do 
not apply to:
    (1) An ORM-D material packed in a freight container and offered for 
transportation by one consignor; or
    (2) Dry ice (carbon dioxide, solid).
    (e) An overpack containing packages of hazardous materials may be 
accepted only if the operator has taken all reasonable steps to 
establish that:
    (1) The overpack does not contain a package bearing the ``CARGO 
AIRCRAFT ONLY'' label unless--
    (i) The overpack affords clear visibility of and easy access to the 
package; or
    (ii) The package contains a material which may be carried 
inaccessibly under the provisions of Sec. 175.85(c)(1); or
    (iii) Not more than one package is overpacked.
    (2) The proper shipping names, identification numbers, labels and 
special handling instructions appearing on the inside packages are 
clearly visible or reproduced on the outside of the overpack, and
    (3) Has determined that a statement to the effect that the inside 
packages comply with the prescribed specifications appears on the 
outside of the overpack, when specification packagings are prescribed.

[Amdt. 175-1, 41 FR 16106, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 175-12, 45 
FR 13091, Feb. 28, 1980; Amdt. 175-17, 45 FR 68654, Oct. 11, 1980; Amdt. 
175-25, 47 FR 54822, Dec. 6, 1982; Amdt. 175-34, 50 FR 48420, Nov. 25, 
1985; Amdt. 175-37, 51 FR 5974, Feb. 18, 1986; Amdt. 175-39, 51 FR 
44791, Dec. 12, 1986; Amdt. 175-47, 55 FR 52685, Dec. 21, 1990; 66 FR 
45184, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 46128, July 12, 2002]



Sec. 175.31  Reports of discrepancies.

    (a) Each person who discovers a discrepancy, as defined in paragraph 
(b) of this section, relative to the shipment of a hazardous material 
following its acceptance for transportation aboard an aircraft shall, as 
soon as practicable, notify the nearest FAA Civil Aviation Security 
Office by telephone and shall provide the following information:
    (1) Name and telephone number of the person reporting the 
discrepancy.
    (2) Name of the aircraft operator.
    (3) Specific location of the shipment concerned.
    (4) Name of the shipper.
    (5) Nature of discrepancy.
    (b) Discrepancies which must be reported under paragraph (a) of this 
section are those involving hazardous materials which are improperly 
described, certified, labeled, marked, or packaged, in a manner not 
ascertainable when accepted under the provisions of Sec. 175.30(a) of 
this subchapter, including:
    (1) Package which are found to contain hazardous materials:
    (i) Other than as described or certified on shipping papers;
    (ii) In quantities exceeding authorized limits;
    (iii) In inside containers which are not authorized or have improper 
closures;
    (iv) In inside containers not oriented as shown by package markings;
    (v) With insufficient or improper absorption materials, when 
required; or
    (2) Packages or baggage which are found to contain hazardous 
materials subsequent to their being offered and accepted as other than 
hazardous materials.

[Amdt. 175-15, 45 FR 35332, May 27, 1980, as amended by Amdt. 175-41, 52 
FR 36672, Sept. 30, 1987; 66 FR 45184, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 175.33  Notification of pilot-in-command.

    (a) Except as provided in Sec. 175.10, when a hazardous material 
subject to the provisions of this subchapter is carried in an aircraft, 
the operator of the aircraft must provide the pilot-in-command with 
accurate and legible written information as early as practicable before 
departure of the aircraft, which specifies at least the following:
    (1) The proper shipping name, hazard class and identification number 
of the material as specified in Sec. 172.101 of this subchapter or the 
ICAO Technical Instructions. In the case of Class 1 material, the 
compatibility group letter also must be shown. If a hazardous material 
is described by the proper shipping name, hazard class, and 
identification number appearing in:

[[Page 668]]

    (i) Section 172.101 of this subchapter, any additional description 
requirements provided in Secs. 172.202 and 172.203 of this subchapter 
must also be shown in the notification.
    (ii) The ICAO Technical Instructions, any additional information 
required to be shown on shipping papers by Sec. 171.11 of this 
subchapter must also be shown in the notification.
    (2) The total number of packages;
    (3) The net quantity or gross weight, as applicable, for each 
package except those containing Class 7 (radioactive) materials and 
those for which there is no limit imposed on the maximum net quantity 
per package;
    (4) The location of the packages aboard the aircraft;
    (5) Confirmation that no damaged or leaking packages have been 
loaded on the aircraft;
    (6) For Class 7 (radioactive) materials, the number of packages, 
overpacks or freight containers their category, transport index (if 
applicable), and their location aboard the aircraft;
    (7) Confirmation that the package must be carried on cargo aircraft 
only if its transportation aboard passenger-carrying aircraft is 
forbidden; and
    (8) An indication, when applicable, that a hazardous material is 
being carried under terms of an exemption.
    (b) A copy of the written notification to pilot-in-command shall be 
readily available to the pilot-in-command during flight. Emergency 
response information required by subpart G of part 172 of this 
subchapter must be maintained in the same manner as the written 
notification to pilot-in-command during transport of the hazardous 
material aboard the aircraft.

[Amdt. 175-25, 47 FR 54823, Dec. 6, 1982, as amended by Amdt. 175-30, 48 
FR 53713, Nov. 29, 1983; Amdt. 175-32, 49 FR 45750, Nov. 20, 1984; Amdt. 
175-35, 50 FR 49394, Dec. 2, 1985; Amdt. 175-45, 55 FR 875, Jan. 10, 
1990; Amdt. 175-47, 55 FR 52685, Dec. 21, 1990; Amdt. 175-52, 59 FR 
67518, Dec. 29, 1994; 66 FR 33437, June 21, 2001]



Sec. 175.35  Shipping papers aboard aircraft.

    (a) A copy of the shipping papers required by Sec. 175.30(a)(2) must 
accompany the shipment it covers during transportation aboard an 
aircraft.
    (b) The documents required by paragraph (a) of this section and 
Sec. 175.33 may be combined into one document if it is given to the 
pilot-in-command before departure of the aircraft.



Sec. 175.40  Keeping and replacement of labels.

    (a) Aircraft operators who engage in the transportation of hazardous 
materials must keep an adequate supply of the labels specified in 
subpart E of part 172 of this subchapter, on hand at each location where 
shipments are loaded aboard aircraft.
    (b) Lost or detached labels for packages of hazardous materials must 
be replaced in accordance with the information provided on the shipping 
papers.



               Subpart B--Loading, Unloading and Handling



Sec. 175.75  Quantity limitations aboard aircraft.

    (a) Except as provided in Sec. 175.85(c)(3), no person may carry on 
an aircraft:
    (1) A hazardous material except as permitted by this subchapter;
    (2) More than 25 kg (55 pounds) net weight of hazardous material 
(and in addition thereto, 75 kg (165 pounds) net weight of Division 2.2 
(non-flammable compressed gas) materials permitted to be carried aboard 
passenger-carrying aircraft:
    (i) In an inaccessible cargo compartment,
    (ii) In any freight container within an accessible cargo 
compartment, or
    (iii) In any accessible cargo compartment in a cargo aircraft only 
in a manner that makes it inaccessible unless in a freight container;
    (3) Packages containing Class 7 (radioactive) materials when their 
combined transport index number (determined by adding together the 
transport index numbers shown on the labels of the individual packages 
and/or overpacks):
    (i) In passenger carrying aircraft, exceeds 50.0 or, for any single 
package, exceeds 3.0, or
    (ii) In cargo aircraft only, exceeds 200.00 (for fissile Class 7 
(radioactive) materials, see Sec. 175.702(b)(2)(iv)) or, for any single 
package, exceeds 10.0.

[[Page 669]]

    (b) No limitation applies to the number of packages of Class 9 
(miscellaneous hazardous) materials, or ORM-D materials aboard an 
aircraft.

[Amdt. 175-1A, 41 FR 40686, Sept. 20, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 175-13, 
45 FR 20101, Mar. 27, 1980; Amdt. 175-25, 47 FR 54823, Dec. 6, 1982; 
Amdt. 175-29, 48 FR 50461, Nov. 1, 1983; Amdt. 175-47, 55 FR 52685, Dec. 
21, 1990; 66 FR 45184, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 175.78  Stowage compatibility of cargo.

    (a) For stowage on an aircraft, in a cargo facility, or in any other 
area at an airport designated for the stowage of hazardous materials, 
packages containing hazardous materials which might react dangerously 
with one another may not be placed next to each other or in a position 
that would allow a dangerous interaction in the event of leakage.
    (b) As a minimum, the segregation instructions prescribed in the 
following Segregation Table must be followed to maintain acceptable 
segregation between packages containing hazardous materials with 
different hazards. The Segregation Table instructions apply whether or 
not the class or division is the primary or subsidiary risk. The 
Segregation Table follows:

                                                                    Segregation Table
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                         Class or division
               Hazard label               --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                 1             2             3            4.2           4.3           5.1           5.2           8
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1........................................       Note 1        Note 2        Note 2        Note 2        Note 2        Note 2        Note 2        Note 2
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2........................................       Note 2   ............  ............  ............  ............  ............  ............  ...........
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
3........................................       Note 2   ............  ............  ............  ............            X   ............  ...........
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.2......................................       Note 2   ............  ............  ............  ............            X   ............  ...........
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4.3......................................       Note 2   ............  ............  ............  ............  ............  ............            X
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
51.......................................       Note 2   ............            X             X   ............  ............  ............  ...........
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5.2......................................       Note 2   ............  ............  ............  ............  ............  ............  ...........
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8........................................       Note 2   ............  ............  ............            X   ............  ............  ...........
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (c) Instructions for using the Segregation Table are as follows:
    (1) The dots at the intersection of a row and column indicate that 
no restrictions apply.
    (2) The letter ``X'' at the intersection of a row and column 
indicates that packages containing these classes of hazardous materials 
may not be stowed next to or in contact with each other, or in a 
position which would allow interaction in the event of leakage of the 
contents.
    (3) Note 1. ``Note 1'' at the intersection of a row and column means 
the following:
    (i) For explosives in compatibility groups A through K and N --
    (A) Packages bearing the same compatibility group letter and the 
same division number may be stowed together.
    (B) Explosives of the same compatibility group, but different 
divisions may be stowed together provided the whole shipment is treated 
as belonging to the division having the smaller number. However, when 
explosives of Division 1.5 Compatibility Group D are stowed together 
with explosives of Division 1.2 Compatibility Group D, the whole 
shipment must be treated as Division 1.1, Compatibility Group D.
    (C) Packages bearing different compatibility group letters may not 
be stowed together whether or not they belong to the same division, 
except as provided in paragraphs (c)(3)(ii) and (iii) of this section.
    (ii) Explosives in Compatibility Group L may not be stowed with 
explosives in other compatibility groups. They may only be stowed with 
the

[[Page 670]]

same type of explosives in Compatibility Group L.
    (iii) Explosives of Division 1.4, Compatibility Group S, may be 
stowed with explosives of all compatibility groups except for 
Compatibility Groups A and L.
    (iv) Other than explosives of Division 1.4, Compatibility Group S 
(see paragraph (c)(3)(iii) of this section), and Compatibility Groups C, 
D and E that may be stowed together, explosives that do not belong in 
the same compatibility group may not be stowed together.
    (A) Any combination of substances in Compatibility Groups C and D 
must be assigned to the most appropriate compatibility group shown in 
the Sec. 172.101 Table of this subchapter.
    (B) Explosives in Compatibility Group N may be stowed together with 
explosives in Compatibility Groups C, D or E when the combination is 
assigned Compatibility Group D.
    (4) Note 2. ``Note 2'' at the intersection of a row and column means 
that other than explosives of Division 1.4, Compatibility Group S, 
explosives may not be stowed together with that class.
    (5) Packages containing hazardous materials with multiple hazards in 
the class or divisions, which require segregation in accordance with the 
Segregation Table need not be segregated from other packages bearing the 
same UN number.
    (6) A package labeled ``BLASTING AGENT'' may not be stowed next to 
or in a position that will allow contact with a package of special 
fireworks or railway torpedoes.

[66 FR 33437, June 21, 2001]



Sec. 175.79  Orientation of cargo.

    (a) A package containing hazardous materials marked ``THIS SIDE UP'' 
or ``THIS END UP'', or with arrows to indicate the proper orientation of 
the package, must be stored and loaded aboard an aircraft in accordance 
with such markings.
    (b) A package containing liquid hazardous materials not marked as 
indicated in paragraph (a) of this section, must be stored and loaded 
with closures up (other than side closures in addition to top closures).

[Amdt. 175-25, 47 FR 54823, Dec. 6, 1982]



Sec. 175.81  Securing of packages containing hazardous materials.

    (a) Packages containing hazardous materials must be secured in an 
aircraft in a manner that will prevent any movement in flight which 
would result in damage to or change in the orientation of the packages.
    (b) Packages containing Class 7 (radioactive) materials must be 
secured in a manner that insures that the separation requirements of 
Secs. 175.701 and 175.702 will be maintained at all times during flight.

[Amdt. 175-25, 47 FR 54823, Dec. 6, 1982, as amended by Amdt. 175-47, 55 
FR 52685, Dec. 21, 1990]



Sec. 175.85  Cargo location.

    (a) Except as provided in Sec. 175.10, no person may carry a 
hazardous material subject to the requirements of this subchapter in the 
cabin of a passenger-carrying aircraft or on the flight deck of any 
aircraft. Hazardous materials may be carried in a main deck cargo 
compartment of a passenger aircraft provided that the compartment is 
inaccessible to passengers and that it meets all certification 
requirements for a Class B aircraft cargo compartment in 14 CFR 
25.857(b) or for a Class C aircraft cargo compartment in 14 CFR 
25.857(c).
    (b) Each package containing a hazardous material acceptable only for 
cargo aircraft must be loaded in such a manner that a crew member or 
other authorized person can see, handle and when size and weight permit, 
separate such packages from other cargo during flight.
    (c) Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph (b) of this section:
    (1) When packages of the following hazardous materials are carried 
on cargo aircraft only, they may be carried in a location which is 
inaccessible to a crewmember during flight and are not subject to the 
weight limitation specified in paragraph (a)(2) of Sec. 175.75 of this 
subchapter.
    (i) Class 7 (radioactive) materials,

[[Page 671]]

    (ii) Division 6.1 (poisonous) materials (except those labeled 
FLAMMABLE),
    (iii) Materials in Division 6.2 (etiologic or infectious 
substances),
    (iv) Class 3 (flammable liquid) materials with a flash point above 
23  deg.C (73  deg.F) that do not meet the definition of another 
hazardous class,
    (v) Class 9 (miscellaneous hazardous) materials, and ORM-D 
materials.
    (2) When packages of hazardous materials acceptable for cargo-only 
or passenger-carrying aircraft are carried on cargo aircraft only where 
other means of transportation are impracticable or not available, 
packages may be carried in accordance with procedures approved in 
writing by the FAA Air Transportation Security Field Office responsible 
for the operator's overall aviation security program or the FAA Air 
Transportation Security Division in the region where the operator is 
located.
    (3) When packages of hazardous materials acceptable for cargo-only 
or passenger-carrying aircraft are carried on small, single pilot, cargo 
aircraft only being used where other means of transportation are 
impracticable or not available, they may be carried without quantity 
limitation as specified in Sec. 175.75 in a location that is not 
accessible to the pilot if:
    (i) No person other than the pilot, an FAA inspector, the shipper or 
consignee of the material or a representative of the shipper or 
consignee so designated in writing, or a person necessary for handling 
the material is carried on the aircraft;
    (ii) The pilot is provided with written instructions on 
characteristics and proper handling of the materials; and
    (iii) Whenever a change of pilots occurs while the material is on 
board, the new pilot is briefed under a hand-to-hand signature service 
provided by the operator of the aircraft.
    (d) [Reserved]
    (e) No person may carry a material subject to the requirements of 
this subchapter that is acceptable for carriage in a passenger-carrying 
aircraft (other than magnetized materials) unless it is located in the 
aircraft in a place that is inaccessible to persons other than crew-
members.
    (f) Paragraphs (a) and (e) of this section do not apply to a person 
operating an aircraft under Sec. 175.310 which, because of its size and 
configuration, makes it impossible for that person to comply.
    (g) No person may load magnetized material (which might cause an 
erroneous magnetic compass reading) on an aircraft, in the vicinity of a 
magnetic compass, or compass master unit, that is a part of the 
instrument equipment of the aircraft, in a manner that affects its 
operation. If this requirement cannot be met, a special aircraft swing 
and compass calibration may be made.
    (h) Compressed oxygen, when properly labeled Oxidizer or Oxygen, may 
be loaded and transported as provided in paragraph (i) of this section. 
No person may load or transport any other package containing a hazardous 
material for which an OXIDIZER label is required under this subchapter 
in an inaccessible cargo compartment that does not have a fire or smoke 
detection system and a fire suppression system.
    (i) In addition to the quantity limitations prescribed in 
Sec. 175.75, cylinders of compressed oxygen must be stowed in accordance 
with the following:
    (1) No more than a combined total of six cylinders of compressed 
oxygen may be stowed on an aircraft in the inaccessible aircraft cargo 
compartment(s) that do not have fire or smoke detection systems and fire 
suppression systems.
    (2) When loaded into a passenger-carrying aircraft or in an 
inaccessible cargo location on a cargo-only aircraft, cylinders of 
compressed oxygen must be stowed horizontally on the floor or as close 
as practicable to the floor of the cargo compartment or unit load 
device. This provision does not apply to cylinders stowed in the cabin 
of the aircraft in accordance with Sec. 175.10(b).
    (3) When transported in a Class B aircraft cargo compartment (see 14 
CFR 25.857(b)) or its equivalent (i.e., an accessible cargo compartment 
equipped with a fire or smoke detection system but not a fire 
suppression system), cylinders of compressed oxygen must be loaded in a 
manner that a crew member can see, handle and, when size and weight 
permit, separate the cylinders from other cargo during flight. No

[[Page 672]]

more than six cylinders of compressed oxygen and, in addition, one 
cylinder of medical-use compressed oxygen per passenger needing oxygen 
at destination--with a rated capacity of 850 L (30 cubic feet) or less 
of oxygen--may be carried in a Class B aircraft cargo compartment or its 
equivalent.

[Amdt. 175-1, 41 FR 16106, Apr. 15, 1976]

    Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting 
Sec. 175.85, see the List of CFR Sections Affected which appears in the 
Finding Aids section of the printed volume and on GPO Access.



Sec. 175.88  Inspection of unit load devices.

    A unit load device may not be loaded on an aircraft unless the 
device has been inspected and found to be free from any evidence of 
leakage from, or damage to, any package containing hazardous materials.

[Amdt. 175-25, 47 FR 54824, Dec. 6, 1982]



Sec. 175.90  Damaged shipments.

    (a) Packages or overpacks containing hazardous materials must be 
inspected for damage or leakage after being unloaded from an aircraft. 
When packages or overpacks containing hazardous materials are carried in 
a unit load device, the area where the unit load device was stowed must 
be inspected for evidence of leakage or contamination immediately upon 
removal of the unit load device from the aircraft, and the packages or 
overpacks inspected for evidence of damage or leakage when the unit load 
device is unloaded. In the event of leakage or suspected leakage, the 
compartment in which the package, overpack, or unit load device was 
carried must be inspected for contamination and any dangerous level of 
contamination removed.
    (b) Except as provided for in Sec. 175.700, the operator of an 
aircraft shall remove from the aircraft any package subject to this 
subchapter that appears to be damaged or leaking. In the case of a 
package which appears to be leaking, the operator must insure that the 
remainder of the packages in the same shipment are in proper condition 
for transport aboard the aircraft and that no other package has been 
contaminated.
    (c) No person shall place a package that is damaged or appears to be 
damaged or leaking aboard an aircraft subject to this part.
    (d) If a package containing a material in Division 6.2 (etiologic or 
infectious substance) is found to be damaged or leaking, the person 
finding the package shall:
    (1) Avoid handling the package or keep handling to a minimum;
    (2) Inspect packages adjacent to the leaking package for 
contamination and withhold from further transportation any contaminated 
packages until it is ascertained that they can be safely transported;
    (3) Comply with the reporting requirement of Sec. 171.15 of this 
subchapter; and
    (4) Notify the consignor or consignee.

[Amdt. 175-25, 47 FR 54824, Dec. 6, 1982, as amended by Amdt. 175-47, 55 
FR 52685, Dec. 21, 1990; 66 FR 45184, Aug. 28, 2001]



 Subpart C--Specific Regulations Applicable According to Classification 
                               of Material



Sec. 175.305  Self-propelled vehicles.

    (a) Self-propelled vehicles are exempt from the drainage 
requirements of Sec. 173.220 of this subchapter when carried in aircraft 
designed or modified for vehicle ferry operations and when all of the 
following conditions are met:
    (1) Authorization for this type operation has been given by the 
appropriate authority in the government of the country in which the 
aircraft is registered;
    (2) Each vehicle is secured in an upright position;
    (3) Each fuel tank is filled in a manner and only to a degree that 
will preclude spillage of fuel during loading, unloading, and 
transportation; and
    (4) Each area or compartment in which a self-propelled vehicle is 
being transported is suitably ventilated to prevent the accumulation of 
fuel vapors.

[[Page 673]]

    (b) [Reserved]

[Amdt. 175-1, 41 FR 16106, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 175-12, 45 
FR 13091, Feb. 28, 1980; Amdt. 175-25, 47 FR 54824, Dec. 6, 1982; Amdt. 
175-47, 55 FR 52685, Dec. 21, 1990]



Sec. 175.310  Transportation of flammable liquid fuel in small, passenger-carrying aircraft.

    A small aircraft or helicopter operated entirely within the State of 
Alaska or into a remote area elsewhere in the United States may carry, 
in other than scheduled passenger operations, not more than 76 L(20 
gallons) of flammable liquid fuel, if:
    (a) Transportation by air is the only practical means of providing 
suitable fuel;
    (b) The flight is necessary to meet the needs of a passenger;
    (c) The fuel is carried in metal containers that are either:
    (1) In strong tight metal containers of not more than 20 L (5.3 
gallons) capacity, each packed inside a UN 4G fiberboard box or each 
packed inside a UN 4C1 wooden box, or in the case of a small aircraft in 
Alaska, each packed inside a wooden box of at least 1.3 cm (0.51 inch) 
thickness;
    (2) Airtight, leakproof, inside containers of not more than 40 L (11 
gallons) capacity and of at least 28-gauge metal, each packed inside a 
UN 4C1 wooden box or, in the case of a small aircraft in Alaska, each 
packed inside a wooden box of at least 1.3 cm (0. 51 inch) thickness;
    (3) UN 1A1 steel drums of not more than 20 L (5.3 gallons) capacity; 
or
    (4) Fuel tanks attached to flammable liquid fuel powered equipment 
under the following conditions:
    (i) Each piece of equipment is secured in an upright position;
    (ii) Each fuel tank is filled in a manner that will preclude 
spillage of fuel during loading, unloading, and transportation; and
    (d) In the case of a helicopter, the fuel is carried on external 
cargo racks;
    (e) Each area or compartment in which the fuel is loaded is suitably 
ventilated to prevent the accumulation of fuel vapors;
    (f) Before each flight, the pilot-in-command:
    (1) Informs each passenger of the location of the fuel and the 
hazards involved; and
    (2) Prohibits smoking, lighting matches, the carrying of any lighted 
cigar, pipe, cigarette or flame, and the use of anything that might 
cause an open flame or spark, while loading or unloading or in flight; 
and
    (g) Fuel is transferred to the fuel tanks only while the aircraft is 
on the surface.

[Amdt. 175-1, 41 FR 16106, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 175-1A, 41 
FR 40686, Sept. 20, 1976; Amdt. 175-12, 45 FR 13091, Feb. 28, 1980; 
Amdt. 175-21, 46 FR 58696, Dec. 3, 1981; Amdt. 175-47, 55 FR 52686, Dec. 
21, 1990; 66 FR 45383, 45384, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 175.320  Cargo aircraft only; only means of transportation.

    (a) Notwithstanding Sec. 172.101 of this subchapter, when means of 
transportation other than air are impracticable or not available, 
hazardous materials listed in the following table may be carried on a 
cargo aircraft only, subject to the conditions stated in the table and 
in paragraph (b) of this section and, when appropriate, paragraph (c) of 
this section:

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                Material                             Class                             Conditions
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Detonators, detonator assemblies and      Division 1.1 or 1.2          Permitted only when no other hazardous
 boosters with detonators.                 explosives.                  material is aboard the aircraft.
Detonators, detonator assemblies and      Division 1.4 explosives....  With the exception of Division 1.1 or 1.2
 boosters with detonators.                                              Detonators, detonator assemblies and
                                                                        boosters with detonators, permitted only
                                                                        when there are no Division 1.1 or 1.2
                                                                        (Class A) explosives aboard aircraft.
Fuel, aviation, turbine engine; methyl    Class 3 (flammable liquid).  Permitted in metal drums authorized for
 alcohol; or toluene.                                                   Packing Group I or II liquid hazardous
                                                                        materials having rated capacities of 220
                                                                        L (58.1 gallons) or less. May not be
                                                                        transported in the same aircraft with
                                                                        Class 1 (explosives), Class 5
                                                                        (oxidizer), or Class 8 (corrosive)
                                                                        materials. Permitted in installed tanks
                                                                        each having a capacity of more than 450
                                                                        L (118.9 gallons) subject to the
                                                                        conditions specified in paragraph (c) of
                                                                        this section.

[[Page 674]]

 
Gasoline................................  Class 3 (flammable liquid).  Permitted in metal drum having rated
                                                                        capacities of 220 L(58.1 gallons) or
                                                                        less. May not be transported in the same
                                                                        aircraft with materials classed as Class
                                                                        1 (explosive), Class 5 (oxidizer), or
                                                                        Class 8 (corrosive) materials. Permitted
                                                                        in installed tanks each having a
                                                                        capacity of 450 L (118.9 gallons).
                                                                        Subject to the conditions specified in
                                                                        paragraph (c) of this section.
High explosives.........................  Class 1 (explosive)          Limited to Class 1 (explosive) materials
                                           materials.                   to be used for blasting. Permitted only
                                                                        when no other cargo is aboard the
                                                                        aircraft or when being transported in
                                                                        the same aircraft with an authorized
                                                                        shipment of any one or more of any of
                                                                        the following materials to be used for
                                                                        blasting:
                                                                       Ammonium nitrate-fuel oil mixtures.
                                                                        Explosive, blasting, TYPE A,B,C,D,and E
                                                                        (Div. 1.1D or 1.5D), or Agent, blasting,
                                                                        TYPE B (Div. 1.5D); Substances,
                                                                        explosive, very insensitive, n.o.s., or
                                                                        Substances, EVI, n.o.s. (Div. 1.5D);
                                                                        Articles, explosive, extremely
                                                                        insensitive or Articles, EEI (Div.1.6N).
                                                                       Detonating cord.
                                                                       Propellant explosive (solid) (Division
                                                                        1.3) (water gels only)
                                                                       Propellant explosive (liquid) (Division
                                                                        1.3) (water gels only)
Oil n.o.s.; petroleum oil or petroleum    Class 3 (flammable liquid).  Permitted in metal drums having rated
 oil, n.o.s.                                                            capacities of 220 L (58.1 gallons) or
                                                                        less. May not be transported in the same
                                                                        aircraft with materials classed as Class
                                                                        1 (explosive), Class 5 (oxidizer), or
                                                                        Class 8 (corrosive) materials. Permitted
                                                                        in installed tanks each having a
                                                                        capacity of 450 L (118.9 gallons).
                                                                        Subject to the conditions specified in
                                                                        paragraph (c) of this section.
Combustible liquid n.o.s................  Class 3 (combustible         Permitted in installed tanks each having
                                           liquid).                     a capacity of more than 450 L (118.9
                                                                        gallons) subject to the conditions
                                                                        specified in paragraph (c) of this
                                                                        section.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (b) The following conditions apply to the carriage of hazardous 
materials performed under the authority of this section:
    (1) No person other than a required flight crewmember, an FAA 
inspector, the shipper or consignee of the material or a representative 
of the shipper or consignee so designated in writing, or a person 
necessary for handling the material may be carried on the aircraft.
    (2) The operator of the aircraft must have advance permission from 
the owner or operator of each manned airport where the material is to be 
loaded or unloaded or where the aircraft is to land while the material 
is on board. When the destination is changed after departure because of 
weather or other unforeseen circumstances, permission from the owner or 
operator of the alternate airport should be obtained as soon as 
practicable before landing.
    (3) At any airport where the airport owner or operator or authorized 
representative thereof has designated a location for loading or 
unloading the material concerned, the material may not be loaded or 
unloaded at any other location.
    (4) If the material concerned can create destructive forces or have 
lethal or injurious effects over an appreciable area as a result of an 
accident involving the aircraft or the material, the loading and 
unloading of the aircraft and its operation in takeoff, en route, and in 
landing must be conducted at a safe distance from heavily populated 
areas and from any place of human abode or assembly.
    (5) If the aircraft is being operated by a holder of a certificate 
issued under 14 CFR part 121, part 133 or part 135, operations must be 
conducted in accordance with conditions and limitations specified in the 
certificate holder's operations specifications or operations manual 
accepted by the FAA. If the aircraft is being operated under 14 CFR part 
91, operations must be conducted in accordance with an operations plan 
accepted and acknowledged in writing by the Civil Aviation Security 
Office serving the operator's location or the place where the material 
is to be loaded.
    (6) Each pilot of the aircraft must be provided written instructions 
stating the conditions and limitations of the operation being conducted 
and the

[[Page 675]]

name of the airport official[s] granting the advance permission required 
by the first sentence of paragraph (b)(2) of this section.
    (7) The aircraft and the loading arrangement to be used must be 
approved for safe carriage of the particular materials concerned by the 
FAA Civil Aviation Security Office responsible for the operator's 
overall aviation security program or the appropriate FAA Civil Aviation 
Security Office serving the place where the material is to be loaded.
    (8) When Division 1.1 or 1.2 (explosive) materials are carried 
aboard cargo aircraft only under the provisions of this section, the 
aircraft operator shall take all possible action to insure that routes 
over heavily populated areas are avoided commensurate with 
considerations of flight safety. During the approach and landing phase, 
the aircraft operator shall request appropriate vectors when under radar 
control to avoid heavily populated areas.
    (9) During loading and unloading, no person may smoke, carry a 
lighted cigarette, cigar, or pipe, or operate any device capable of 
causing an open flame or spark within 15 m (50 feet) of the aircraft.
    (10) If the movement involves international transportation, 
permission for the shipment may also be required from the appropriate 
authorities of the countries of origin, destination, transit and 
overflight prior to departure.
    (c) The following additional conditions apply to the carriage of 
Class 3 (flammable) and combustible liquid materials in tanks each 
having a capacity of more than 420 liters (111 gallons) under the 
authority of this section:
    (1) The tanks and their associated piping and equipment and the 
installation thereof must have been approved for the material to be 
transported by the appropriate FAA Regional Office.
    (2) In the case of an aircraft being operated by a certificate 
holder, the operator shall list the aircraft and the approval 
information in its operating specifications. If the aircraft is being 
operated by other than a certificate holder, a copy of the FAA Regional 
Office approval required by this section must be carried on the 
aircraft.
    (3) The crew of the aircraft must be thoroughly briefed on the 
operation of the particular bulk tank system being used.
    (4) During loading and unloading and thereafter until any remaining 
fumes within the aircraft are dissipated:
    (i) Only those electrically operated bulk tank shutoff valves that 
have been approved under a supplemental type certificate may be 
electrically operated.
    (ii) No engine or electrical equipment, avionic equipment, or 
auxiliary power units may be operated, except position lights in the 
steady position and equipment required by approved loading or unloading 
procedures, as set forth in the operator's operations manual, or for 
operators that are not certificate holders, as set forth in a written 
statement.
    (iii) No person may fill a container, other than an approved bulk 
tank, with a Class 3 (flammable and combustible liquid) materials or 
discharge a Class 3 (flammable and combustible liquid) materials from a 
container, other than an approved bulk tank, while that container is 
inside or within 15 m (50 feet) of the aircraft.
    (iv) When filling an approved bulk tank by hose from inside the 
aircraft, the doors and hatches must be fully open to insure proper 
ventilation.
    (v) Static ground wires must be connected between the storage tank 
or fueler and the aircraft, and between the aircraft and a positive 
ground device.

[Amdt. 175-1, 41 FR 16106, Apr. 15, 1976]

    Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting 
Sec. 175.320, see the List of CFR Sections Affected which appears in the 
Finding Aids section of the printed volume and on GPO Access.



Sec. 175.630  Special requirements for Division 6.1 (poisonous) material and Division 6.2 (infectious substance) material.

    (a) A hazardous material bearing a POISON, POISON INHALATION HAZARD, 
or INFECTIOUS SUBSTANCE label may not be carried in the same compartment 
of an aircraft with material which is marked as or known to be a 
foodstuff, feed, or any other edible

[[Page 676]]

material intended for consumption by humans or animals unless either the 
Division 6.1 (poisonous) material or material in Division 6.2 
(infectious substance) and the foodstuff, feed, or other edible material 
are loaded in separate unit load devices which, when stowed on the 
aircraft, are not adjacent to each other, or the Division 6.1 
(poisonous) material or material in Division 6.2 (infectious substance) 
are loaded in one closed unit load device and the foodstuff, feed or 
other material is loaded in another closed unit load device.
    (b) No person may operate an aircraft that has been used to 
transport any package bearing a POISON or POISON INHALATION HAZARD label 
unless, upon removal of such package, the area in the aircraft in which 
it was carried is visually inspected for evidence of leakage, spillage, 
or other contamination. All contamination discovered must be either 
isolated or removed from the aircraft. The operation of an aircraft 
contaminated with such Division 6.1 (poisonous) materials is considered 
to be the carriage of poisonous materials under paragraph (a) of this 
section.

[Amdt. 175-85, 62 FR 1236, Jan. 8, 1997, as amended at 64 FR 10781, Mar. 
5, 1999]



Sec. 175.700  Special limitations and requirements for Class 7 (radioactive) materials.

    (a) In addition to other requirements, no person may carry in a 
passenger-carrying aircraft any package required to be labeled in 
accordance with Sec. 172.403 of this subchapter with a Radioactive 
Yellow-II or Radioactive Yellow-III label unless:
    (1) For a package required to be labeled Radioactive Yellow-III, the 
transport index does not exceed 3.0;
    (2) The package is carried on the floor of the cargo compartment, or 
freight container; and
    (3) The package is carried in the aircraft in accordance with 
Secs. 175.701 and 175.703(c).
    (b) In addition to the reporting requirements of Sec. 171.15 of this 
subchapter, the carrier shall also notify the offeror at the earliest 
practicable moment following any incident in which there has been 
breakage, spillage, or suspected radioactive contamination involving 
Class 7 (radioactive) materials shipments. Aircraft in which Class 7 
(radioactive) materials have been spilled may not again be placed in 
service or routinely occupied until the radiation dose rate at every 
accessible surface is less than 0.005 mSv per hour (0.5 mrem per hour) 
and there is no significant removable radioactive surface contamination 
as determined in accordance with Sec. 173.443 of this subchapter. When 
contamination is present or suspected, the package and/or materials it 
has touched must be segregated as far as practicable from personnel 
contact until appropriate radiological advice or assistance is obtained. 
The Regional Office of the U.S. Department of Energy or appropriate 
State or local radiological authorities can provide advice or 
assistance, and should be notified in cases of obvious leakage, or if it 
appears likely that the inside container may have been damaged. For 
personnel safety, the carrier shall take care to avoid possible 
inhalation, ingestion, or contact by any person with Class 7 
(radioactive) materials that may have leaked or spilled from its 
package. Any loose Class 7 (radioactive) materials and associated 
packaging materials must be left in a segregated area pending disposal 
instructions from responsible radiological authorities.
    (c) Except as provided in Secs. 173.4, 173.422 and 173.423 of this 
subchapter, no person shall carry any Class 7 (radioactive) materials 
aboard a passenger carrying aircraft unless that material is intended 
for use in, or incident to research, medical diagnosis or treatment.
    (d) Type B(M) packages may not be offered or accepted for 
transportation, nor transported, on passenger-carrying aircraft.

[Amdt. 175-13, 45 FR 20101, Mar. 27, 1980, as amended by Amdt. 175-19, 
46 FR 24185, Apr. 30, 1981; Amdt. 175-26, 48 FR 10245, Mar. 10, 1983; 
Amdt. 175-31, 49 FR 38134, Sept. 27, 1984; 50 FR 18668, May 2, 1985; 
Amdt. 175-47, 55 FR 52687, Dec. 21, 1990; Amdt. 175-50, 58 FR 50505, 
Sept. 27, 1993; Amdt. 175-51, 59 FR 49134, Sept. 26, 1994; Amdt. 175-53, 
60 FR 50333, Sept. 28, 1995; 62 FR 51561, Oct. 1, 1997; 63 FR 52850, 
Oct. 1, 1998; 64 FR 51919, Sept. 27, 1999]

[[Page 677]]



Sec. 175.701  Separation distance requirements for packages containing Class 7 (radioactive) materials in passenger-carrying aircraft.

    (a) General. No person may carry in a passenger-carrying aircraft 
any package required by Sec. 172.403 of this subchapter to be labeled 
Radioactive Yellow-II, or Radioactive Yellow-III unless the package is 
placed in the aircraft in accordance with the minimum separation 
distances prescribed in paragraph (b) or (c) of this section.
    (b) Separation distances. (1) Except as provided in paragraph (c) of 
this section, the minimum separation distances prescribed in paragraphs 
(b)(2) and (b)(3) of this section are determined by measuring the 
shortest distance between the surfaces of the Class 7 (radioactive) 
materials package and the surfaces bounding the space occupied by 
passengers or animals. If more than one package of Class 7 (radioactive) 
materials is placed in a passenger-carrying aircraft, the minimum 
separation distance for these packages shall be determined in accordance 
with paragraphs (b)(2) and (b)(3) of this section on the basis of the 
sum of the transport index numbers of the individual packages or 
overpacks.
    (2) The following table prescribes minimum separation distances that 
must be maintained in passenger-carrying aircraft between Class 7 
(radioactive) materials labeled Radioactive Yellow-II or Radioactive 
Yellow-III and passengers and crew:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                    Minimum separation
 Transport index or sum of transport indexes of         distances
 all packages in the aircraft or predesignated  ------------------------
                      area                       Centimeters    Inches
------------------------------------------------------------------------
0.1 to 1.0.....................................           30          12
1.1 to 2.0.....................................           50          20
2.1 to 3.0.....................................           70          28
3.1 to 4.0.....................................           85          34
4.1 to 5.0.....................................          100          40
5.1 to 6.0.....................................          115          46
6.1 to 7.0.....................................          130          52
7.1 to 8.0.....................................          145          57
8.1 to 9.0.....................................          155          61
9.1 to 10.0....................................          165          65
10.1 to 11.0...................................          175          69
11.1 to 12.0...................................          185          73
12.1 to 13.0...................................          195          77
13.1 to 14.0...................................          205          81
14.1 to 15.0...................................          215          85
15.1 to 16.0...................................          225          89
16.1 to 17.0...................................          235          93
17.1 to 18.0...................................          245          97
18.1 to 20.0...................................          260         102
20.1 to 25.0...................................          290         114
25.1 to 30.0...................................          320         126
30.1 to 35.0...................................          350         138
35.1 to 40.0...................................          375         148
40.1 to 45.0...................................          400         157
45.1 to 50.0...................................          425         167
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (3) Class 7 (radioactive) materials in packages, overpacks or 
freight containers labeled Radioactive Yellow-II or Radioactive Yellow-
III must be separated from live animals by a distance of at least 0.5 m 
(20 inches) for journeys not exceeding 24 hours, and by a distance of at 
least 1.0 m (39 inches) for journeys longer than 24 hours.
    (c) Predesignated areas. A package required by Sec. 172.403 of this 
subchapter to be labeled Radioactive Yellow-II or Radioactive Yellow-III 
may be carried in a passenger-carrying aircraft in accordance with a 
system of predesignated areas established by the aircraft operator. Each 
aircraft operator that elects to use a system of predesignated areas 
shall submit a detailed description of the proposed system to the 
Associate Administrator for approval prior to implementation of the 
system. A proposed system of predesignated areas is approved if the 
Associate Administrator determines that it is designed to assure that:
    (1) The packages can be placed in each predesignated area in 
accordance with the minimum separation distances prescribed in paragraph 
(b)(2) of this section; and
    (2) The predesignated areas are separated from each other by minimum 
distance equal to at least four times the distances required by 
paragraphs (b)(1) and (b)(2) of this section for the predesignated area 
containing packages with the largest sum of transport indexes.

[Amdt. 175-13, 45 FR 20102, Mar. 27, 1980, as amended by Amdt. 175-23, 
47 FR 43066, Sept. 30, 1982; Amdt. 175-25, 47 FR 54824, Dec. 6, 1982; 
Amdt. 175-47, 55 FR 52687, Dec. 21, 1990; 56 FR 66281, Dec. 20, 1991; 
Amdt. 175-49, 58 FR 50494, Sept. 27, 1993; 66 FR 45383, Aug. 28, 2001]

[[Page 678]]



Sec. 175.702  Requirements for carriage of packages containing Class 7 (radioactive) materials in a cargo aircraft only.

    (a) As used in this section, the term ``group of packages'' means 
packages that are separated from each other in an aircraft by a distance 
of 6 m (20 feet) or less.
    (b) No person may carry in a cargo aircraft only any package 
required by Sec. 172.403 of this subchapter to be labeled Radioactive 
Yellow-II or Radioactive Yellow-III unless:
    (1) The total transport index for all of the packages does not 
exceed 50.0 and the package is carried in accordance with 
Sec. 175.701(a); or
    (2) The total transport index for all of the packages exceeds 50.0 
and:
    (i) The separation distance between the surfaces of the Class 7 
(radioactive) materials packages, overpacks or freight containers and 
any space occupied by--
    (A) Humans is at least 9 m (30 feet); and
    (B) Live animals is at least 0.5 m (20 inches) for journeys not 
exceeding 24 hours and at least 1.0 m (39 inches) for journeys longer 
than 24 hours;
    (ii) The transport index for any group of packages does not exceed 
50.0; and
    (iii) Each group of packages is separated from every other group in 
the aircraft by not less than 6 m (20 feet), measured from the outer 
surface of each group; and
    (iv) The total transport index for all packages containing fissile 
Class 7 (radioactive) materials does not exceed 50.0.

[Amdt. 175-13, 45 FR 20102, Mar. 27, 1980, as amended by Amdt. 175-29, 
48 FR 50461, Nov. 1, 1983; Amdt. 175-47, 55 FR 52687, Dec. 21, 1990; 
Amdt. 175-49, 58 FR 50494, Sept. 27, 1993; 66 FR 45383, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 175.703  Other special requirements for the acceptance and carriage of packages containing Class 7 (radioactive) materials.

    (a) No person may carry in an aircraft any package of Class 7 
(radioactive) materials required by Sec. 172.403 of this subchapter to 
be labeled Radioactive Yellow-II or Radioactive Yellow-III closer than 
the distances shown in the following table to any package marked as 
containing undeveloped film:

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                  Minimum separation distance to nearest undeveloped film for various times of transit
                                                               -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                        Transport index                           Up to 2 hours     2 to 4 hours      4 to 8 hours      8 to 12 hours     Over 12 hours
                                                               -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                 Meters    Feet    Meters    Feet    Meters    Feet    Meters    Feet    Meters    Feet
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0.1 to 1.0....................................................      0.3        1      0.6        2      0.9        3      1.2        4      1.5        5
1.1 to 5.0....................................................      0.9        3      1.2        4      1.8        6      2.4        8      3.3       11
5.1 to 10.0...................................................      1.2        4      1.8        6      2.7        9      3.3       11      4.5       15
10.1 to 20.0..................................................      1.5        5      2.4        8      3.6       12      4.8       16      6.6       22
20.1 to 30.0..................................................      2.1        7      3.0       10      4.5       15      6.0       20      8.7       29
30.1 to 40.0..................................................      2.4        8      3.3       11      5.1       17      6.6       22      9.9       33
40.1 to 50.0..................................................      2.7        9      3.6       12      5.7       19      7.2       24    10. 8       36
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (b) No person may accept for carriage in an aircraft packages of 
Class 7 (radioactive) materials, other than limited quantities, 
contained in a rigid or non-rigid overpack, including a fiberboard box 
or plastic bag, unless they have been prepared for shipment in 
accordance with Sec. 173.448(g) of this subchapter.
    (c) No person shall carry in an aircraft a fissile material 
controlled shipment (as defined in Sec. 173.403 of this subchapter), 
except--
    (1) In a cargo aircraft only which has been assigned for the 
exclusive use of the shipper for the specific shipment of fissile Class 
7 (radioactive) material. Instructions for the exclusive use must be 
developed by the shipper and carrier, and the instructions issued with 
the shipping papers; or
    (2) In an aircraft in which there are no other packages required to 
bear a radioactive label as prescribed in Sec. 172.403 of this 
subchapter. Specific arrangements must be made between the shipper and 
carrier, with instructions to that effect issued with the shipping 
papers.

[[Page 679]]

    (d) No person shall offer or accept for transportation, or 
transport, by air--
    (1) Vented Type B(M) packages, packages which require external 
cooling by an ancillary cooling system or packages subject to 
operational controls during transport; or
    (2) Liquid pyrophoric Class 7 (radioactive) materials.
    (e) Packages with radiation levels at the package surface or a 
transport index in excess of the limits specified in Sec. 173.441(a) of 
this subchapter may not be transported by aircraft except under special 
arrangements approved by RSPA.

[Amdt. 175-13, 45 FR 20102, Mar. 27, 1980, as amended by Amdt. 175-26, 
48 FR 10245, Mar. 10, 1983; Amdt. 175-26, 48 FR 31220, July 7, 1983; 
Amdt. 175-29, 48 FR 50461, Nov. 1, 1983; Amdt. 175-47, 55 FR 52687, Dec. 
21, 1990; Amdt. 175-53, 60 FR 50333, Sept. 28, 1995]



Sec. 175.704  Plutonium shipments.

    Shipments of plutonium by air which are subject to 10 CFR 
71.88(a)(4) must comply with the following:
    (a) A plutonium package weighing less than 40 kg (88 lbs) and having 
its height and diameter both less than 50 cm (19.7 in), must be stowed 
aboard the aircraft on the main deck or the lower cargo compartment in 
the aft-most location that is possible for cargo of its size and weight. 
No other type of cargo may be stowed aft of a plutonium package.
    (b) A plutonium package must be secured and restrained to prevent 
shifting under normal transport. A plutonium package weighing 40 kg (88 
lbs) or more must be securely cradled and tied down to the main deck of 
the aircraft such that the tied down system is capable of providing 
package restraint against the following inertial forces acting 
separately relative to the deck of the aircraft: Upward, 2g; Forward, 
9g; Sideward, 1.5g; Downward, 4.5g.
    (c) A plutonium package weighing less than 40 kg (88 lbs), and 
having its height and diameter both less than 50 cm (19.7 in), may not 
be transported aboard an aircraft carrying other cargo required to bear 
an ``Explosive A'' or an ``Explosive 1.1'' label. Any other plutonium 
package may not be transported aboard an aircraft carrying other cargo 
bearing any of the following hazardous material labels: Explosive A; 
Explosive B; Explosive C; Explosive 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5 or 1.6; 
Spontaneously Combustible; Dangerous When Wet; Organic Peroxide; Non-
Flammable Gas; Flammable Liquid; Flammable Solid; Flammable Gas; 
Oxidizer; or Corrosive.

[Amdt. 175-53, 60 FR 50333, Sept. 28, 1995]



Sec. 175.705  Inspection of aircraft for contamination by Class 7 (radioactive) materials.

    (a) Aircraft used routinely for the carriage of Class 7 
(radioactive) materials shall be periodically checked for radioactive 
contamination. The frequency of checks shall be related to the 
likelihood of contamination and the extent to which Class 7 
(radioactive) materials are carried.
    (b) An aircraft must be taken out of service if the level of 
contamination exceeds that provided in Sec. 175.700(b).

[Amdt. 175-25, 47 FR 54824, Dec. 6, 1982, as amended by Amdt. 175-47, 55 
FR 52687, Dec. 21, 1990]



PART 176--CARRIAGE BY VESSEL--Table of Contents




                           Subpart A--General

Sec.
176.1  Purpose and scope.
176.2  Definitions.
176.3  Unacceptable hazardous materials shipments.
176.4  Port security and safety regulations.
176.5  Application to vessels.
176.9  ``Order-Notify'' or ``C.O.D.'' shipments.
176.11  Exceptions.
176.13  Responsibility for compliance and training.
176.15  Enforcement.
176.18  Assignment and certification.

                Subpart B--General Operating Requirements

176.24  Shipping papers.
176.27  Certificate.
176.30  Dangerous cargo manifest.
176.31  Exemptions.
176.36  Preservation of records.
176.39  Inspection of cargo.
176.45  Emergency situations.
176.48  Situation requiring report.
176.50  Acceptance of damaged or leaking packages.
176.52  Rejections of shipments in violation.
176.54  Repairs involving welding, burning, and power-actuated tools and 
          appliances.

[[Page 680]]

                 Subpart C--General Handling and Stowage

176.57  Supervision of handling and stowage.
176.58  Preparation of the vessel.
176.60  ``No Smoking'' signs.
176.63  Stowage locations.
176.65  Alternative stowage procedures.
176.69  General stowage requirements for hazardous materials.
176.70  Stowage requirements for marine pollutants.
176.72  Handling of break-bulk hazardous materials.
176.74  On deck stowage of break-bulk hazardous materials.
176.76  Transport vehicles, freight containers, and portable tanks 
          containing hazardous materials.
176.77  Stowage of barges containing hazardous materials on board barge-
          carrying vessels.
176.78  Use of power-operated industrial trucks on board vessels.

               Subpart D--General Segregation Requirements

176.80  Applicability.
176.83  Segregation.
176.84  Other requirements for stowage and segregation for cargo vessels 
          and passenger vessels.

   Subpart E--Special Requirements for Transport Vehicles Loaded With 
       Hazardous Materials and Transported on Board Ferry Vessels

176.88  Applicability.
176.89  Control of transport vehicles.
176.90  Private automobiles.
176.91  Motorboats.
176.92  Cylinders laden in vehicles.
176.93  Vehicles having refrigerating or heating equipment.

               Subpart F--Special Requirements for Barges

176.95  Applicability.
176.96  Materials of construction.
176.97  Prohibition of dump scows.
176.98  Stowage of hazardous materials on board barges.
176.99  Permit requirements for certain hazardous materials.

   Subpart G--Detailed Requirements for Class 1 (Explosive) Materials

176.100  Permit for Divisions 1.1 and 1.2 (explosive) materials.
176.102  Supervisory detail.
176.104  Loading and unloading Class 1 (explosive) materials.
176.108  Supervision of Class 1 (explosive) materials during loading, 
          unloading, handling and stowage.

                                 Stowage

176.112  Applicability.
176.116  General stowage conditions for Class 1 (explosive) materials.
176.118  Electrical requirement.
176.120  Lightning protection.
176.122  Stowage arrangements under deck.
176.124  Ordinary stowage.
176.128  Magazine stowage, general.
176.130  Magazine stowage Type A.
176.132  Magazine stowage Type B.
176.133  Magazine stowage Type C.
176.134  Vehicles.
176.136  Special stowage.
176.137  Portable magazine.
176.138  Deck stowage.

                               Segregation

176.140  Segregation from other classes of hazardous materials.
176.142  Hazardous materials of extreme flammability.
176.144  Segregation of Class 1 (explosive) materials.
176.145  Segregation in single hold vessels.
176.146  Segregation from non-hazardous materials.

                Precautions During Loading and Unloading

176.148  Artificial lighting.
176.150  Radio and radar.
176.154  Fueling (bunkering).
176.156  Defective packages.
176.160  Protection against weather.
176.162  Security.
176.164  Fire precautions and firefighting.

                            Passenger Vessels

176.166  Transport of Class 1 (explosive) materials on passenger 
          vessels.

                  Transport Units and Shipborne Barges

176.168  Transport of Class 1 (explosive) materials in vehicle spaces.
176.170  Transport of Class 1 (explosive) materials in freight 
          containers.
176.172  Structural serviceability of freight containers and vehicles 
          carrying Class 1 (explosive) materials on ships.
176.174  Transport of Class 1 (explosive) materials in shipborne barges.

             Handling Class 1 (Explosive) Materials in Port

176.176  Signals.
176.178  Mooring lines.
176.180  Watchkeeping.
176.182  Conditions for handling on board ship.
176.184  Class 1 (explosive) materials of Compatibility Group L.

[[Page 681]]

176.190  Departure of vessel.
176.192  Cargo handling equipment for freight containers carrying Class 
          1 (explosive) materials.

                            Magazine Vessels

176.194  Stowage of Class 1 (explosive) materials on magazine vessels.

 Subpart H--Detailed Requirements for Class 2 (Compressed Gas) Materials

176.200  General stowage requirements.
176.205  Under deck stowage requirements.
176.210  On deck stowage requirements.
176.220  Smoking or open flame and posting of warning signs.
176.225  Stowage of chlorine.
176.230  Stowage of Division 2.1 (flammable gas) materials.

Subpart I--Detailed Requirements for Class 3 (Flammable) and Combustible 
                            Liquid Materials

176.305  General stowage requirements.
176.315  Fire protection requirements.
176.320  Use of hand flashlights.
176.325  Smoking or open flame and posting of warning signs.
176.340  Combustible liquids in portable tanks.

Subpart J--Detailed Requirements for Class 4 (Flammable Solids), Class 5 
      (Oxidizers and Organic Peroxides), and Division 1.5 Materials

176.400  Stowage of Division 1.5, Class 4 (flammable solids) and Class 5 
          (oxidizers and organic peroxides) materials.
176.405  Stowage of charcoal.
176.410  Division 1.5 materials, ammonium nitrate and ammonium nitrate 
          mixtures.
176.415  Permit requirements for Division 1.5, ammonium nitrates, and 
          certain ammonium nitrate fertilizers.

Subpart K [Reserved]

 Subpart L--Detailed Requirements for Division 2.3 (Poisonous Gas) and 
                   Division 6.1 (Poisonous) Materials

176.600  General stowage requirements.
176.605  Care following leakage or sifting of Division 2.3 (poisonous 
          gas) and Division 6.1 (poisonous) materials.

       Subpart M--Detailed Requirements for Radioactive Materials

176.700  General stowage requirements.
176.704  Requirements relating to transport indexes.
176.708  Segregation distance table.
176.710  Care following leakage or sifting of radioactive materials.
176.715  Contamination control.
176.720  Requirements for carriage of INF cargo in international 
          transportation.

   Subpart N--Detailed Requirements for Class 8 (Corrosive Materials) 
                                Materials

176.800  General stowage requirements.
176.805  On deck stowage.

Subpart O--Detailed Requirements for Cotton and Vegetable Fibers, Motor 
                         Vehicles, and Asbestos

176.900  Packaging and stowage of cotton and vegetable fibers; general.
176.901  Stowage of cotton or vegetable fibers with rosin or pitch.
176.903  Stowage of cotton or vegetable fibers with coal.
176.905  Motor vehicles or mechanical equipment powered by internal 
          combustion engines.

    Authority: 49 U.S.C. 5101-5127; 49 CFR 1.53.



                           Subpart A--General



Sec. 176.1  Purpose and scope.

    This part prescribes requirements in addition to those contained in 
parts 171, 172, and 173 of this subchapter to be observed with respect 
to the transportation of hazardous materials by vessel.



Sec. 176.2  Definitions.

    As used in this part--

    Cantline means the v-shaped groove between two abutting, parallel 
horizontal cylinders.

    Cargo net means a net made of fiber or wire used to provide 
convenience in handling loose or packaged cargo to and from a vessel.

    Clear of living quarters means that the hazardous material must be 
located so that in the event of release of the material, leakage or 
vapors will not penetrate accommodations, machinery spaces or other work 
areas by means of entrances or other openings in bulkheads or 
ventilation ducts.

    Closed freight container means a freight container which totally 
encloses its contents by permanent structures. A freight container 
formed partly by a tarpaulin, plastic sheet, or similar material is not 
a closed freight container.


[[Page 682]]


    Commandant (G-MSO), USCG means the Chief, Office of Operating and 
Environmental Standards, United States Coast Guard, Washington, DC 
20593-0001.

    Compartment means any space on a vessel that is enclosed by the 
vessel's decks and its sides or permanent steel bulkheads.

    CSC safety approval plate means the safety approval plate specified 
in Annex I of the International Convention for Safe Containers (1972) 
and conforming to the specifications in 49 CFR 451.23 and 451.25. The 
plate is evidence that a freight container was designed, constructed, 
and tested under international rules incorporated into U.S. regulations 
in 49 CFR parts 450 through 453. The plate is found in the door area of 
the container.

    Deck structure means a structure of substantial weight and size 
located on the weather deck of a vessel and integral with the deck. This 
term includes superstructures, deck houses, mast houses, and bridge 
structures.

    Draft means a load or combination of loads capable of being hoisted 
into or out of a vessel in a single lift.

    Dunnage means lumber of not less than 25 mm (0.98 inch) commercial 
thickness or equivalent material laid over or against structures such as 
tank tops, decks, bulkheads, frames, plating, or ladders, or used for 
filling voids or fitting around cargo, to prevent damage during 
transportation.

    Explosives anchorage means an anchorage so designated under 33 CFR 
part 110, subpart B.

    Explosive article means an article or device which contains one or 
more explosive substances. Individual explosive articles are identified 
in the schedules for Class I (explosive) articles found in the IMDG Code 
(see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).

    Explosives handling facility means--

    (1) A ``designated waterfront facility'' designated under 33 CFR 
part 126 when loading, handling, and unloading Class 1 (explosives) 
materials; or

    (2) A facility for loading, unloading, and handling military Class 1 
(explosives) materials which is operated or controlled by an agency of 
the Department of Defense.

    Explosive substance means a solid or liquid material, or a mixture 
of materials, which is in itself capable by chemical reaction of 
producing gas at such a temperature and pressure and at such a speed as 
to cause damage to its surroundings. Individual explosive substances are 
identified in the schedules for Class 1 (explosive) substances in the 
IMDG Code.

    Handling means the operation of loading and unloading a vessel; 
transfer to, from, or within a vessel, and any ancillary operations.

    Hold means a compartment below deck that is used exclusively for the 
carriage of cargo.

    In containers or the like means in any clean, substantial, 
weatherproof box structure which can be secured to the vessel's 
structure, including a portable magazine or a closed transport unit. 
Whenever this stowage is specified, stowage in deckhouses, mast lockers 
and oversized weatherproof packages (overpacks) is also acceptable.
    Incompatible materials means two materials whose stowage together 
may result in undue hazards in the case of leakage, spillage, or other 
accident.
    INF cargo means packaged irradiated nuclear fuel, plutonium or high-
level radioactive wastes as those terms are defined in the 
``International Code for the Safe Carriage of Packaged Irradiated 
Nuclear Fuel, Plutonium and High-Level Radioactive Wastes on Board 
Ships' (INF Code) (contained in IMDG Code, incorporated by reference, 
see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).
    Landing mat means a shock absorbing pad used in loading Class 1 
(explosive) materials on vessels.
    Machinery Spaces of Category A are those spaces, and trunks to such 
spaces, which contain:
    (1) Internal combustion machinery used for main propulsion:
    (2) Internal combustion machinery used for purposes other than main 
propulsion where such machinery has in the aggregate a total power 
output of not less than 375 kw; or
    (3) any oil-fired boiler or fuel unit.
    Magazine means an enclosure designed to protect certain goods of 
Class 1 (explosive) materials from damage by other cargo and adverse 
weather conditions during loading, unloading, and

[[Page 683]]

when in transit; and to prevent unauthorized access. A magazine may be a 
fixed structure in the vessel, a closed freight container, a closed 
transport vehicle, or a portable magazine.
    Master of the Vessel, as used in this part, includes the person in 
charge of an unmanned vessel or barge.
    Open freight container means a freight container that does not 
totally enclose its contents by permanent structures.
    Overstowed means a package or container is stowed directly on top of 
another. However, with regard to Class 1 (explosive) stowage, such goods 
may themselves be stacked to a safe level but other goods should not be 
stowed directly on top of them.
    Pallet means a portable platform for stowing, handling, and moving 
cargo.
    Palletized unit means packages or unpackaged objects stacked on a 
pallet, banded and secured to the pallet by metal, fabric, or plastic 
straps for the purpose of handling as a single unit.
    Pie plate means a round, oval, or hexagonal pallet without 
sideboards, used in conjunction with a cargo net to handle loose cargo 
on board a vessel.
    Portable magazine means a strong, closed, prefabricated, steel or 
wooden, closed box or container, other than a freight container, 
designed and used to handle Class 1 (explosive) materials either by hand 
or mechanical means.
    Readily combustible material means a material which may or may not 
be classed as a hazardous material but which is easily ignited and 
supports combustion. Examples of readily combustible materials include 
wood, paper, straw, vegetable fibers, products made from such materials, 
coal, lubricants, and oils. This definition does not apply to packaging 
material or dunnage.
    Responsible person means a person empowered by the master of the 
vessel to make all decisions relating to his or her specific task, and 
having the necessary knowledge and experience for that purpose.
    Safe working load means the maximum gross weight that cargo handling 
equipment is approved to lift.
    Skilled person means a person having the knowledge and experience to 
perform a certain duty.
    Skipboard means a square or rectangular pallet without sideboards, 
usually used in conjunction with a cargo net to handle loose cargo on 
board a vessel.
    Splice as used in Sec. 176.172 of this part, means any repair of a 
freight container main structural member which replaces material, other 
than complete replacement of the member.
    Transport unit means a transport vehicle or a freight container. A 
closed transport unit means a transport unit in which the contents are 
totally enclosed by permanent structures. An open transport unit means a 
transport unit which is not a closed transport unit. Transport units 
with fabric sides or tops are not closed transport units for the 
purposes of this part.
    Tray means a type of pallet constructed to specific dimensions for 
handling a particular load.

[Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52687, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 66 FR 8647, 
Feb. 1, 2001; 66 FR 33438, June 21, 2001; 66 FR 45184, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 
FR 61015, Sept. 27, 2002]



Sec. 176.3  Unacceptable hazardous materials shipments.

    (a) A carrier may not transport by vessel any shipment of a 
hazardous material that is not prepared for transportation in accordance 
with parts 172 and 173 of this subchapter.
    (b) A carrier may not transport by vessel any explosive or explosive 
composition described in Sec. 173.54 of this subchapter.

[Amdt. 176-1, 41 FR 16110, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 176-30, 55 
FR 52688, Dec. 21, 1990]



Sec. 176.4  Port security and safety regulations.

    (a) Each carrier, master, agent, and charterer of a vessel and all 
other persons engaged in handling hazardous materials on board vessels 
shall comply with the applicable provisions of 33 CFR parts 6, 109, 110, 
125, 126, and 160.
    (b) Division 1.1 and 1.2 (explosive) materials may only be loaded on 
and unloaded from a vessel at--
    (1) A facility of particular hazard as defined in 33 CFR 126.05(b);
    (2) An explosives anchorage listed in 33 CFR part 110; or
    (3) A facility operated or controlled by the Department of Defense.

[[Page 684]]

    (c) With the concurrence of the COTP, Division 1.1 and 1.2 
(explosive) materials may be loaded on or unloaded from a vessel in any 
location acceptable to the COTP.

[Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52688, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 66 FR 45384, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 176.5  Application to vessels.

    (a) Except as provided in paragraph (b) of this section, this 
subchapter applies to each domestic or foreign vessel when in the 
navigable waters of the United States, regardless of its character, 
tonnage, size, or service, and whether self-propelled or not, whether 
arriving or departing, underway, moored, anchored, aground, or while in 
dry dock.
    (b) This subchapter does not apply to:
    (1) A public vessel not engaged in commercial service;
    (2) A vessel constructed or converted for the principal purpose of 
carrying flammable or combustible liquid cargo in bulk in its own tanks, 
when only carrying these liquid cargoes;
    (3) A vessel of 15 gross tons or smaller when not engaged in 
carrying passengers for hire;
    (4) A vessel used exclusively for pleasure;
    (5) A vessel of 500 gross tons or smaller when engaged in fisheries;
    (6) A tug or towing vessel, except when towing another vessel having 
Class 1 (explosive) materials, Class 3 (flammable liquids), or Division 
2.1 (flammable gas) materials, in which case the owner/operator of the 
tug or towing vessel shall make such provisions to guard against and 
extinguish fire as the Coast Guard may prescribe;
    (7) A cable vessel, dredge, elevator vessel, fireboat, icebreaker, 
pile driver, pilot boat, welding vessel, salvage vessel, or wrecking 
vessel; or
    (8) A foreign vessel transiting the territorial sea of the United 
States without entering the internal waters of the United States, if all 
hazardous materials being carried on board are being carried in 
accordance with the requirements of the IMDG Code (see Sec. 171.7 of 
this subchapter).
    (c) [Reserved]
    (d) Except for transportation in bulk packagings (as defined in 
Sec. 171.8 of this subchapter), the bulk carriage of hazardous materials 
by water is governed by 46 CFR chapter I, subchapters D, I, N and O.

[Amdt. 176-1, 41 FR 16110, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 176-1A, 41 
FR 40687, Sept. 20, 1976; Amdt. 176-14, 47 FR 44471, Oct. 7, 1982; Amdt. 
176-24, 51 FR 5974, Feb. 18, 1986; Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52688, Dec. 21, 
1990; 56 FR 66281, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 176-34, 58 FR 51533, Oct. 1, 
1993; 66 FR 8647, Feb. 1, 2001]



Sec. 176.9  ``Order-Notify'' or ``C.O.D.'' shipments.

    A carrier may not transport Division 1.1 or 1.2 (explosive) 
materials, detonators, or boosters with detonators which are:
    (a) Consigned to ``order-notify'' or ``C.O.D.'', except on a through 
bill of lading to a place outside the United States; or
    (b) Consigned by the shipper to himself unless he has a resident 
representative to receive the shipment at the port of discharge.

[Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52688, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 66 FR 45384, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 176.11  Exceptions.

    (a) A hazardous material may be offered and accepted for transport 
by vessel when in conformance with the IMDG Code (see Sec. 171.7 of this 
subchapter), subject to the conditions and limitations set forth in 
Sec. 171.12 of this subchapter. The requirements of Secs. 176.83, 
176.84, and 176.112 through 176.174 are not applicable to shipments of 
Class 1 (explosive) materials made in accordance with the IMDG Code. A 
hazardous material which conforms to the provisions of this paragraph 
(a) is not subject to the requirement specified in Sec. 172.201(d) of 
this subchapter for an emergency response telephone number, when 
transportation of the hazardous material originates and terminates 
outside the United States and the hazardous material--
    (1) Is not offloaded from the vessel; or
    (2) Is offloaded between ocean vessels at a U.S. port facility 
without being transported by public highway.
    (b) Canadian shipments and packages may be transported by vessel if 
they are transported in accordance with this subchapter. (See 
Sec. 171.12a of this subchapter.)

[[Page 685]]

    (c) The requirements of this subchapter governing the transportation 
of combustible liquids do not apply to the transportation of combustible 
liquids in non-bulk (see definitions in Sec. 171.8 of this subchapter) 
packages on board vessels.
    (d) Transport vehicles, containing hazardous materials loaded in 
accordance with specific requirements of this subchapter applicable to 
such vehicles, may be transported on board a ferry vessel or carfloat, 
subject to the applicable requirements specified in Secs. 176.76, 
176.100, and subpart E of this part.
    (e) Hazardous materials classed and shipped as ORM-D are not subject 
to the requirements of this part unless they are offered for 
transporation as hazardous wastes.
    (f) Paragraph (a) of this section does not apply to hazardous 
materials, including certain hazardous wastes and hazardous substances 
as defined in Sec. 171.8 of this subchapter, which are not subject to 
the requirements of the IMDG Code.
    (g) The requirements of this subchapter do not apply to atmospheric 
gases used in a refrigeration system.

[Amdt. 176-1, 41 FR 16110, Apr. 15, 1976]

    Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting 
Sec. 176.11, see the List of CFR Sections Affected which appears in the 
Finding Aids section of the printed volume and on GPO Access.



Sec. 176.13  Responsibility for compliance and training.

    (a) Unless this subchapter specifically provides that another person 
shall perform a particular duty, each carrier shall perform the duties 
specified and comply with all applicable requirements in this part and 
shall ensure its hazmat employees receive training in relation thereto.
    (b) A carrier may not transport a hazardous material by vessel 
unless each of its hazmat employees involved in that transportation is 
trained as required by subpart H of part 172 of this subchapter.
    (c) The record of training required by Sec. 172.704(d) of this 
subchapter for a crewmember who is a hazmat employee subject to the 
training requirements of this subchapter must be kept on board the 
vessel while the crewmember is in service on board the vessel.

[Amdt. 176-31, 57 FR 20954, May 15, 1992, as amended by Amdt. 176-35, 59 
FR 49134, Sept. 26, 1994]



Sec. 176.15  Enforcement.

    (a) An enforcement officer of the U.S. Coast Guard may at any time 
and at any place, within the jurisdiction of the United States, board 
any vessel for the purpose of enforcement of this subchapter and inspect 
any shipment of hazardous materials as defined in this subchapter.
    (b) [Reserved]

[Amdt. 176-1, 41 FR 16110, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 176-1A, 41 
FR 40687, Sept. 20, 1976; Amdt. 176-24, 51 FR 5974, Feb. 18, 1986]



Sec. 176.18  Assignment and certification.

    (a) The National Cargo Bureau, Inc., is authorized to assist the 
Coast Guard in administering this subchapter with respect to the 
following:
    (1) Inspection of vessels for suitability for loading hazardous 
materials;
    (2) Examination of stowage of hazardous materials;
    (3) Making recommendations for stowage requirements of hazardous 
materials cargo; and
    (4) Issuance of certificates of loading setting forth that the 
stowage of hazardous materials is in accordance with the requirements of 
this subchapter.
    (b) A certificate of loading issued by the National Cargo Bureau, 
Inc., may be accepted by the Coast Guard as prima facie evidence that 
the cargo is stowed in conformity with the requirements of this 
subchapter.

[Amdt. 176-1, 41 FR 16110, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 176-24, 51 
FR 5974, Feb. 18, 1986]



                Subpart B--General Operating Requirements



Sec. 176.24  Shipping papers

    (a) A person may not accept a hazardous material for transportation 
or transport a hazardous material by vessel unless that person has 
received a shipping paper prepared in accordance with part 172 of this 
subchapter, unless

[[Page 686]]

the material is excepted from shipping paper requirements under this 
subchapter.
    (b) Each person receiving a shipping paper required by this section 
must retain a copy or an electronic image thereof, that is accessible at 
or through its principal place of business and must make the shipping 
paper immediately available, upon request, to an authorized official of 
a Federal, State, or local government agency at reasonable times and 
locations. For a hazardous waste, each shipping paper copy must be 
retained for three years after the material is accepted by the initial 
carrier. For all other hazardous materials, each shipping paper copy 
must be retained for 375 days after the material is accepted by the 
carrier. Each shipping paper copy must include the date of acceptance by 
the carrier.

[67 FR 46128, July 12, 2002]



Sec. 176.27  Certificate.

    (a) A carrier may not transport a hazardous material by vessel 
unless he has received a certificate prepared in accordance with 
Sec. 172.204 of this subchapter.
    (b) In the case of an import or export shipment of hazardous 
materials which will not be transported by rail, highway, or air, the 
shipper may certify on the bill of lading or other shipping paper that 
the hazardous material is properly classed, described, marked, packaged, 
and labeled according to part 172 of this subchapter or in accordance 
with the requirements of the IMDG Code (see Sec. 171.7 of this 
subchapter). See Sec. 171.12 of this subchapter.
    (c)(1) A person responsible for packing or loading a freight 
container or transport vehicle containing hazardous materials for 
transportation by a manned vessel in ocean or coastwise service, must 
provide the vessel operator, at the time the shipment is offered for 
transportation by vessel, with a signed container packing certificate 
stating, at a minimum, that--
    (i) The freight container or transport unit is serviceable for the 
materials loaded therein, contains no incompatible goods, and is 
properly marked, labeled or placarded, as applicable; and
    (ii) When the freight container or transport unit contains packages, 
those packages have been inspected prior to loading, are properly 
marked, labeled or placarded, as applicable; are not damaged; and are 
properly secured.
    (2) The certification may appear on a shipping paper or on a 
separate document as a statement such as ``It is declared that the 
packing of the container has been carried out in accordance with the 
provisions of 49 CFR 176.27(c)''.

[Amdt. 176-1, 41 FR 16110, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 176-1A, 41 
FR 40687, Sept. 20, 1976; Amdt. 176-12, 45 FR 81572, Dec. 11, 1980; 
Amdt. 176-14, 47 FR 44471, Oct. 7, 1982; Amdt. 176-36, 59 FR 67518, Dec. 
29, 1994; 66 FR 8647, Feb. 1, 2001]



Sec. 176.30  Dangerous cargo manifest.

    (a) The carrier, its agents, and any person designated for this 
purpose by the carrier or agents shall prepare a dangerous cargo 
manifest, list, or stowage plan. This document may not include a 
material which is not subject to the requirements of 49 CFR or the IMDG 
Code (see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter). This document must be kept in 
a designated holder on or near the vessel's bridge. It must contain the 
following information:
    (1) Name of vessel and official number. (If the vessel has no 
official number, the international radio call sign must be 
substituted.);
    (2) Nationality of vessel;
    (3) Shipping name and identification number of each hazardous 
material on board as listed in Sec. 172.101 of this subchapter or as 
listed in the IMDG Code and an emergency response telephone number as 
prescribed in subpart G of part 172 of this subchapter.
    (4) The number and description of packages (barrels, drums, 
cylinders, boxes, etc.) and gross weight for each type of packaging;
    (5) Classification of the hazardous material in accordance with 
either:
    (i) The Hazardous Materials Table, the Sec. 172.101 table; or
    (ii) The IMDG Code.
    (6) Any additional description required by Sec. 172.203 of this 
subchapter.
    (7) Stowage location of the hazardous material on board the vessel.

[[Page 687]]

    (8) In the case of a vessel used for the storage of explosives or 
other hazardous materials, the following additional information is 
required:
    (i) Name and address of vessel's owner;
    (ii) Location of vessel's mooring;
    (iii) Name of person in charge of vessel;
    (iv) Name and address of the owner of the cargo; and
    (v) A complete record, by time intervals of one week, of all 
receipts and disbursements of hazardous materials. The name and address 
of the consignor must be shown against all receipts and the name and 
address of the consignee against all deliveries.
    (b) The hazardous material information on the dangerous cargo 
manifest must be the same as the information furnished by the shipper on 
the shipping order or other shipping paper, except that the IMO 
``correct technical name'' and the IMO class may be indicated on the 
manifest as provided in paragraphs (a)(3) and (a)(5) of this section. 
The person who supervises the preparation of the manifest, list, or 
stowage plan shall ensure that the information is correctly transcribed, 
and shall certify to the truth and accuracy of this information to the 
best of his knowledge and belief by his signature and notation of the 
date prepared.
    (c) The carrier and its agents shall insure that the master, or a 
licensed deck officer designated by the master and attached to the 
vessel, or in the case of a barge, the person in charge of the barge, 
acknowledges the correctness of the dangerous cargo manifest, list or 
stowage plan by his signature.
    (d) For barges, manned or unmanned, the requirements of this section 
apply except for the following:
    (1) In the case of a manned barge, the person in charge of the barge 
shall prepare the dangerous cargo manifest.
    (2) In the case of an unmanned barge, the person responsible for 
loading the barge is responsible for the preparation of a dangerous 
cargo manifest, list, or stowage plan and must designate an individual 
for that purpose.
    (3) For all barges, manned or unmanned, the dangerous cargo manifest 
must be on board the barge in a readily accessible location and a copy 
must be furnished to the person in charge of the towing vessel.
    (e) Each carrier who transports or stores hazardous materials on a 
vessel shall retain a copy of the dangerous cargo manifest, list, or 
stowage plan for at least one year, and shall make that document 
available for inspection in accordance with Sec. 176.36(b) of this 
subchapter.

[Amdt. 176-1, 41 FR 16110, Apr. 15, 1976]

    Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting 
Sec. 176.30, see the List of CFR Sections Affected which appears in the 
Finding Aids section of the printed volume and on GPO Access.



Sec. 176.31  Exemptions.

    If a hazardous material is being transported by vessel under the 
authority of an exemption and a copy of the exemption is required to be 
on board the vessel, it must be kept with the dangerous cargo manifest.



Sec. 176.36  Preservation of records.

    (a) When this part requires shipping orders, manifest, cargo lists, 
stowage plans, reports, or any other papers, documents or similar 
records to be prepared, the carrier shall preserve them or copies of 
them in his place of business or office in the United States for a 
period of one year after their preparation.
    (b) Any record required to be preserved must be made available upon 
request to an authorized representative of the Department.

[Amdt. 176-1, 41 FR 16110, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended at 66 FR 45384, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 176.39  Inspection of cargo.

    (a) Manned vessels. The carrier, its agents, and any person 
designated for this purpose by the carrier or agents shall cause an 
inspection of each hold or compartment containing hazardous materials to 
be made after stowage is complete, and at least once every 24 hours 
thereafter, weather permitting, in order to ensure that the cargo is in 
a safe condition and that no damage caused by shifting, spontaneous 
heating, leaking, sifting, wetting, or other cause has been sustained by 
the vessel or its cargo since loading and stowage.

[[Page 688]]

However, freight containers or individual barges need not be opened. A 
vessel's holds equipped with smoke or fire detecting systems having an 
automatic monitoring capability need not be inspected except after 
stowage is complete and after periods of heavy weather. The carrier, its 
agents, and any person designated for this purpose by the carrier or 
agents shall cause an entry to be made in the vessel's deck log book for 
each inspection of the stowage of hazardous materials performed.
    (b) Unmanned and magazine vessels. An inspection of the cargo must 
be made after stowage has been completed to ensure that stowage has been 
accomplished properly and that there are no visible signs of damage to 
any packages or evidence of heating, leaking, or sifting. This 
inspection must be made by the individual who is responsible to the 
carrier and who is in charge of loading and stowing the cargo on the 
unmanned vessels or the individual in charge in the case of a magazine 
vessel.
    (c) The carrier, its agents, and any person designated for this 
purpose by the carrier or agents of each ocean-going vessel carrying 
hazardous material shall, immediately prior to entering a port in the 
United States, cause an inspection of that cargo to be made.
    (d) When inspecting a cargo of hazardous materials capable of 
evolving flammable vapors, any artificial means of illumination must be 
of an explosion-proof type.

[Amdt. 176-1, 41 FR 16110, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 176-8, 44 
FR 23228, Apr. 19, 1979; Amdt. 176-9, 44 FR 49458, Aug. 23, 1979]



Sec. 176.45  Emergency situations.

    (a) When an accident occurs on board a vessel involving hazardous 
materials, and the safety of the vessel, its passengers or crew are 
endangered, the master shall adopt such procedures as will, in his 
judgment, provide maximum safety for the vessel, its passengers, and its 
crew. When the accident results in damaged packages or the emergency use 
of unauthorized packagings, these packages may not be offered to any 
forwarding carrier for transportation. The master shall notify the 
nearest Captain of the Port, U.S. Coast Guard, and request instructions 
for disposition of the packages.
    (b) Hazardous materials may be jettisoned only if the master 
believes this action necessary to prevent or substantially reduce a 
hazard to human life or reduce a substantial hazard to property.

[Amdt. 176-1, 41 FR 16110, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 176-1B, 41 
FR 57072, Dec. 30, 1976]



Sec. 176.48  Situation requiring report.

    (a) When a fire or other hazardous condition exists on a vessel 
transporting hazardous materials, the master shall notify the nearest 
Captain of the Port as soon as possible and shall comply with any 
instructions given by the Captain of the Port.
    (b) When an incident occurs during transportation in which a 
hazardous material is involved, a report may be required (see 
Secs. 171.15 and 171.16 of this subchapter).
    (c) If a package, portable tank, freight container, highway or 
railroad vehicle containing hazardous materials is jettisoned or lost, 
the master shall notify the nearest Captain of the Port as soon as 
possible of the location, quantity, and type of the material.

[Amdt. 176-1, 41 FR 16110, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 176-1A, 41 
FR 40687, Sept. 20, 1976; Amdt. 176-1B, 41 FR 57072, Dec. 30, 1976; 
Amdt. 176-24, 51 FR 5974, Feb. 18, 1986; Amdt. 176-25, 52 FR 8592, Mar. 
19, 1987]



Sec. 176.50  Acceptance of damaged or leaking packages.

    A carrier may not transport by vessel any package that is so damaged 
as to permit the escape of its contents, that appears to have leaked, or 
that gives evidence of failure to properly contain the contents unless 
it is restored or repaired to the satisfaction of the master of the 
vessel. A package containing radioactive materials (other than low 
specific activity materials) may not be repaired or restored.

[Amdt. 176-1, 41 FR 16110, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 176-1A, 41 
FR 40687, Sept. 20, 1976]

[[Page 689]]



Sec. 176.52  Rejections of shipments in violation.

    (a) A carrier may not knowingly transport by vessel any hazardous 
material offered under a false or deceptive name, marking, invoice, 
shipping paper or other declaration, or without the shipper furnishing 
written information about the true nature of the material at the time of 
delivery.
    (b) If a shipment in violation is found in transit, the master of 
the vessel shall adopt procedures which in his judgment provide maximum 
safety to the vessel, its passengers and its crew and which are in 
compliance with Sec. 176.45. If the vessel is in port, the material may 
not be delivered to any party, and the master shall immediately notify 
the nearest Captain of the Port and request instructions for disposition 
of the material.

[Amdt. 176-1, 41 FR 16110, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 176-1B, 41 
FR 57072, Dec. 30, 1976]



Sec. 176.54  Repairs involving welding, burning, and power-actuated tools and appliances.

    (a) Except as provided in paragraph (b) of this section, repairs or 
work involving welding or burning, or the use of power-actuated tools or 
appliances which may produce intense heat may not be undertaken on any 
vessel having on board explosives or other hazardous materials as cargo.
    (b) Paragraph (a) of this section does not apply if:
    (1) The repairs or work are approved by the COTP under 33 CFR 
126.15(c); or
    (2) Emergency repairs to the vessel's main propelling or boiler 
plant or auxiliaries are necessary for the safety of the vessel. If such 
repairs are performed, the master of the vessel must immediately notify 
the nearest COTP.

[Amdt. 176-1, 41 FR 16110, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 176-30, 55 
FR 52689, Dec. 21, 1990]



                 Subpart C--General Handling and Stowage



Sec. 176.57  Supervision of handling and stowage.

    (a) Hazardous materials may be handled or stowed on board a vessel 
only under the direction and observation of a responsible person 
assigned this duty.
    (b) For a vessel engaged in coastwise voyages, or on rivers, bays, 
sounds or lakes, including the Great Lakes when the voyage is not 
foreign-going, the responsible person may be an employee of the carrier 
and assigned this duty by the carrier, or a licensed officer attached to 
the vessel and assigned by the master of the vessel.
    (c) For a domestic vessel engaged in a foreign-going or intercoastal 
voyage, the responsible person must be an officer possessing an 
unexpired license issued by the USCG and assigned this duty by the 
master of the vessel.
    (d) For a foreign vessel, the responsible person must be an officer 
of the vessel assigned this duty by the master of the vessel.

[Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52689, Dec. 21, 1990]



Sec. 176.58  Preparation of the vessel.

    (a) Each hold or compartment in which hazardous materials are to be 
stowed must be free of all debris before the hazardous materials are 
stowed. Bilges must be examined and all residue of previous cargo 
removed.
    (b) All decks, gangways, hatches, and cargo ports over or through 
which hazardous materials must be passed or handled in loading or 
unloading must be free of all loose materials before cargo handling 
operations begin.
    (c) No debris that creates a fire hazard or a hazardous condition 
for persons engaged in handling hazardous materials may be on the 
weather deck of a vessel during loading or unloading operations.
    (d) Hatch beams and hatch covers may not be stowed in a location 
that would interfere with cargo handling.

[Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52689, Dec. 21, 1990]



Sec. 176.60  ``No Smoking'' signs.

    When smoking is prohibited during the loading, stowing, storing, 
transportation, or unloading of hazardous materials by this part, the 
carrier and the master of the vessel are jointly responsible for posting 
``NO SMOKING'' signs in conspicuous locations.

[[Page 690]]



Sec. 176.63  Stowage locations.

    (a) The table in Sec. 172.101 of this subchapter specifies generally 
the locations authorized for stowage of the various hazardous materials 
on board vessels. This part prescribes additional requirements with 
respect to the stowage of specific hazardous materials in addition to 
those authorized in Sec. 172.101 of this subchapter. This section sets 
forth the basic physical requirements for the authorized locations.
    (b) To qualify as ``on deck'' stowage, the location must be on the 
weather deck. If it is in a house on the weather deck, it must have a 
permanent structural opening to the atmosphere, such as a door, hatch, 
companionway or manhole, and must be vented to the atmosphere. It may 
not have any structural opening to any living quarters, cargo, or other 
compartment unless the opening has means for being closed off and 
secured. Any deck house containing living quarters, a steering engine, a 
refrigerating unit, a refrigerated stowage box, or a heating unit may 
not be used unless that area is isolated from the cargo stowage area by 
a permanent, and tight metallic bulkhead. Stowage in a shelter or 'tween 
deck is not considered to be ``on deck''. A barge which is vented to the 
atmosphere and is stowed on deck on a barge-carrying ship is considered 
to be ``on deck''. When an entry in Sec. 172.101 of this subchapter 
requires ``on-deck'' stowage and is qualified by the requirement ``shade 
from radiant heat'', the stowage must be protected from the direct rays 
of the sun by means of structural erections or awnings except that such 
protection is not required for shipment in portable tanks.
    (c) To qualify as ``under deck'' stowage, the location must be in a 
hold or compartment below the weather deck capable of being ventilated 
and allotted entirely to the carriage of cargo. It must be bounded by 
permanent steel decks and bulkheads or the shell of the vessel. The deck 
openings must have means for effectively closing the hold or compartment 
against the weather, and in the case of superimposed holds, for 
effectively closing off each hold. A hold or compartment containing a 
crew passage formed by battens or by mesh or wire screen bulkhead may 
not be used for the stowage of any hazardous material unless a watchman 
is provided for this area.
    (d) To qualify as ``under deck away from heat'', the location must 
be under deck and have built-in means for ventilation. If it is subject 
to heat from any artificial source, it only qualifies for the stowage of 
those hazardous materials for which ``under deck'' stowage is 
authorized.
    (e) Closed cargo transport unit, for the purpose of stowage of Class 
1 (explosive) materials on board a vessel, means a clean, substantial, 
weatherproof box structure which can be secured to the ship's structure 
and includes a closed freight container, a closed vehicle, a closed rail 
wagon or a portable magazine. When this stowage is specified, stowage in 
small compartments such as deckhouses and mast lockers or oversized 
weatherproof packages (overpacks) are acceptable alternatives. The floor 
of any closed cargo transport unit or compartment shall be constructed 
of wood, close boarded or arranged so that goods are stowed on sparred 
gratings, wooden pallets or dunnage. Provided that the necessary 
additional specifications are met, a closed cargo transport unit may be 
used for Class 1 (explosive) magazine stowage type ``A,'' ``B'' or 
``C,'' but not as a portable magazine.

[Amdt. 176-1, 41 FR 16110, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 176-1A, 41 
FR 40687, Sept. 20, 1976; Amdt. 176-1B, 41 FR 57072, Dec. 30, 1976; 
Amdt. 176-12, 45 FR 81572, Dec. 11, 1980; 66 FR 33438, June 21, 2001; 66 
FR 45184, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 176.65  Alternative stowage procedures.

    When a hazardous material is to be loaded on board a vessel and it 
is shown to the satisfaction of the Coast Guard Captain of the Port for 
the place where the vessel is being loaded that it is impracticable to 
comply with a stowage location requirement specified in the Sec. 172.101 
table of this subchapter or a segregation, handling or stowage 
requirement specified in this part, the Captain of the Port may 
authorize in writing the use of an alternative stowage location or 
method of segregation, handling or stowage subject to such conditions as 
he finds will insure a

[[Page 691]]

level of safety at least equal to that afforded by the regulatory 
requirement concerned.

[Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52689, Dec. 21, 1990]



Sec. 176.69  General stowage requirements for hazardous materials.

    (a) Hazardous materials (except as provided in paragraph (c) of this 
section and Class 9 (miscellaneous hazardous) materials) must be stowed 
in a manner that will facilitate inspection during the voyage, their 
removal from a potentially dangerous situation, and the removal of 
packages in case of fire.
    (b) Each package marked in accordance with Sec. 172.312(a)(2) of 
this subchapter must be stowed as to remain in the position indicated 
during transportation.
    (c) If a vessel designed for and carrying hazardous materials in 
freight containers or a vessel designed for and carrying hazardous 
materials in barges is equipped with a fixed fire extinguishing and fire 
detection system, the freight containers or barges need not be stowed in 
the manner required by paragraph (a) of this section. When freight 
containers or barges containing hazardous materials are stowed on deck, 
they need not be stowed in the manner required by paragraph (a) of this 
section if fire fighting equipment capable of reaching and piercing the 
freight container or barge is on board the vessel.
    (d) Packages of hazardous materials must be secured and dunnaged to 
prevent movement in any direction. Vertical restraints are not required 
if the shape of the package and the stuffing pattern preclude shifting 
of the load.
    (e) Packages of hazardous materials must be braced and dunnaged so 
that they are not likely to be pierced by the dunnage or crushed by a 
superimposed load.

[Amdt. 176-1, 41 FR 16110, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 176-1A, 41 
FR 40687, Sept. 20, 1976; Amdt. 176-12, 45 FR 81573, Dec. 11, 1980; 
Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52689, Dec. 21, 1990; 56 FR 66282, Dec. 20, 1991]



Sec. 176.70  Stowage requirements for marine pollutants.

    (a) Marine pollutants must be properly stowed and secured to 
minimize the hazards to the marine environment without impairing the 
safety of the ship and the persons on board.
    (b) Where stowage is permitted ``on deck or under deck'', under deck 
stowage is preferred except when a weather deck provides equivalent 
protection.
    (c) Where stowage ``on deck only'' is required, preference should be 
given to stowage on well-protected decks or to stowage inboard in 
sheltered areas of exposed decks.

[Amdt. 176-31, 57 FR 52940, Nov. 5, 1992]



Sec. 176.72  Handling of break-bulk hazardous materials.

    (a) A metal bale hook may not be used for handling any package of 
hazardous materials.
    (b) The use of equipment designed to lift or move cargo by means of 
pressure exerted on the packages may not be used for handling any 
package of hazardous materials if the device can damage the package or 
the package is not designed to be moved in that manner.
    (c) Pallets, slings, cargo nets and other related equipment used in 
loading packages of hazardous materials must give adequate support to 
the packages. The packages must be contained so that they are not able 
to fall during loading.



Sec. 176.74  On deck stowage of break-bulk hazardous materials.

    (a) Packages containing hazardous materials must be secured by 
enclosing in boxes, cribs or cradles and proper lashing by use of wire 
rope, strapping or other means, including shoring and bracing, or both. 
Lashing of deck cargo is permitted if eye pads are used to attach the 
lashings. Lashings may not be secured to guard rails. Bulky articles 
must be shored.
    (b) A packaging susceptible to weather or water damage must be 
protected so that it will not be exposed to the weather or to sea water.
    (c) Not more than fifty percent of the total open deck area should 
be used for stowage of hazardous materials (except Class 9 
(miscellaneous hazardous material).
    (d) Fireplugs, hoses, sounding pipes, and access to these must be 
free and clear of all cargo.

[[Page 692]]

    (e) Crew and passenger spaces and areas set aside for the crew's use 
may not be used to stow any hazardous material.
    (f) A hazardous material may not be stowed within a horizontal 
distance of 25 feet of an operating or embarkation point of a lifeboat.
    (g) Hazardous materials must be stowed to permit safe access to the 
crew's quarters and to all parts of the deck required in navigation and 
necessary working of the vessel.
    (h) When runways for use of the crew are built over stowed hazardous 
materials, they must be constructed and fitted with rails and lifelines 
so as to afford complete protection to the crew when in use.

[Amdt. 176-1, 41 FR 16110, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 176-1B, 41 
FR 57072, Dec. 30, 1976; Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52689, Dec. 21, 1990; 56 FR 
66282, Dec. 20, 1991; 66 FR 45181, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 176.76  Transport vehicles, freight containers, and portable tanks containing hazardous materials.

    (a) Except as provided in paragraphs (b) through (f) of this 
section, hazardous materials authorized to be transported by vessel may 
be carried on board a vessel in a transport vehicle or freight 
container, subject to the following conditions (see additional 
requirements concerning the transport of Class 1 (explosive) materials 
in Secs. 176.168 through 176.172 of this subchapter):
    (1) The material must be in proper condition for transportation 
according to the requirements of this subchapter;
    (2) All packages in the transport vehicle or freight container must 
be secured to prevent movement in any direction. Vertical restraint is 
not required if the shape of the packages, loading pattern, and 
horizontal restraint preclude vertical movement of the load within the 
freight container or transport vehicle;
    (3) Bulkheads made of dunnage which extend to the level of the cargo 
must be provided unless the packages are stowed flush with the sides or 
ends;
    (4) Dunnage must be secured to the floor when the cargo consists of 
dense materials or heavy packages;
    (5) Each package marked in accordance with Sec. 172.312(a)(2) of 
this subchapter must be stowed as marked;
    (6) Any slack spaces between packages must be filled with dunnage;
    (7) The weight in a container must be distributed throughout as 
evenly as possible and the maximum permissible weight must not be 
exceeded;
    (8) Adjacent levels of baggaged and baled cargo must be stowed in 
alternate directions so that each tier binds the tier above and below 
it;
    (9) [Reserved]
    (10) The lading must be contained entirely within the freight 
container or vehicle body without overhang or projection except that 
oversized machinery such as tractors or vehicles with batteries attached 
may overhang or project outside the intermodal container provided all of 
that portion of the lading that consists of hazardous materials is 
contained entirely within the freight container. No open-bed container 
or vehicle is permitted to carry hazardous materials unless it is 
equipped with a means of properly securing the lading.
    (b) A transport vehicle containing hazardous materials may be 
carried only on board a trailership, trainship, ferry vessel or car 
float.
    (c) [Reserved]
    (d) A transport vehicle or freight container equipped with heating 
or refrigeration equipment may be operated on board a vessel. However, 
the equipment may not be operated in any hold or compartment in which 
any flammable liquid or gas is stowed. Any heating or air conditioning 
equipment having a fuel tank containing a flammable liquid or gas may be 
stowed only ``on deck''. Equipment electrically powered and designed to 
operate within an environment containing flammable vapors may be 
operated below deck in a hold or compartment containing a flammable 
liquid or gas.
    (e) A transport vehicle, loaded with any hazardous material which is 
required to be stowed ``on deck'' by Sec. 172.101 of this subchapter, 
may be stowed one deck below the weather deck when transported on a 
trainship or trailership which is unable to provide ``on deck'' stowage 
because of the

[[Page 693]]

vessel's design. Otherwise, the transport vehicle or container must be 
transported ``on deck.''
    (f) A hazardous material may be carried on board a vessel in a 
portable tank subject to the following conditions:
    (1) Small passenger vessels of 100 gross tons, or less, may carry a 
hazardous material in a portable tank only when 16 or less passengers 
are on board and only when specifically authorized by the Officer-in-
Charge, Marine Inspection, by endorsement of the vessel's Certificate of 
Inspection.
    (2) Portable tanks containing flammable liquids or gases, 
combustible liquids with flashpoints below 141  deg.F. that are 
insoluble in water, or organic peroxides, spontaneously combustible 
materials, or water reactive materials must be stowed on deck 
irrespective of the stowage authorized in Sec. 172.101 of this 
subchapter. Portable tanks containing hazardous materials not restricted 
to on deck stowage by the previous sentence must be stowed in accordance 
with the requirements specified in Sec. 172.101 of this subchapter.
    (3) Aluminum, magnesium, and their alloys are specifically 
prohibited as materials of construction of portable tanks.
    (g) Cryogenic liquids. For shipment of cryogenic liquids on board a 
vessel the packaging must be designed and filled so that:
    (1) Any cryogenic liquid being transported in a cargo tank, 
regardless of the pressure in the package, must be contained in a steel 
jacketed Specification MC-338 (Sec. 178.338 of this subchapter) 
insulated cargo tank.
    (2) Any valve or fitting with moving or abrading parts that may come 
in contact with any cryogenic liquid may not be made of aluminum.
    (3) For a flammable cryogenic liquid being transported in a cargo 
tank, the elapsed time between the loading of the cargo tank and the 
subsequent unloading of the cargo tank at its final destination may not 
exceed the marked rated holding time (MRHT) of the cargo tank for the 
cryogenic liquid being transported, which must be displayed on or 
adjacent to the specification plate.
    (4) Portable tanks, cargo tanks, and tank cars containing cryogenic 
liquids must be stowed ``on deck'' regardless of the stowage authorized 
in Sec. 172.101 of this subchapter. Cargo tanks or tank cars containing 
cryogenic liquids may be stowed one deck below the weather deck when 
transported on a trailership or trainship that is unable to provide ``on 
deck'' stowage because of the vessel's design. Tank cars must be Class 
DOT-113 or AAR-204W tank cars.
    (h) A fumigated transport unit may only be transported on board a 
vessel subject to the following conditions and limitations:
    (1) The fumigated transport unit may be placed on board a vessel 
only if at least 24 hours have elapsed since the unit was last 
fumigated;
    (2) The fumigated transport unit is accompanied by a document 
showing the date of fumigation and the type and amount of fumigant used;
    (3) Prior to loading, the master is informed of the intended 
placement of the fumigated transport unit on board the vessel and the 
information provided on the accompanying document;
    (4) Equipment that is capable of detecting the fumigant and 
instructions for the equipment's use is provided on the vessel;
    (5) The fumigated transport unit must be stowed at least five m from 
any opening to accommodation spaces;
    (6) Fumigated transport units may only be transported on deck on 
vessels carrying more than 25 passengers; and
    (7) Fumigants may not be added to transport units while on board a 
vessel.
    (i) Containers packed or loaded with flammable gases or liquids 
having a flash point of 23 deg. C or less and carried on deck must be 
stowed ``away from'' possible sources of ignition.

[Amdt. 176-1, 41 FR 16110, Apr. 15, 1976]

    Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting 
Sec. 176.76, see the List of CFR Sections Affected which appears in the 
Finding Aids section of the printed volume and on GPO Access.



Sec. 176.77  Stowage of barges containing hazardous materials on board barge-carrying vessels.

    (a) A barge which contains hazardous materials may be transported on 
board a barge-carrying vessel if it is stowed

[[Page 694]]

in accordance with the requirements of this section.
    (b) A barge which contains hazardous materials for which only ``on 
deck'' stowage is authorized must be stowed above the weather deck and 
be vented to the atmosphere.
    (c) A barge which contains hazardous materials for which both ``on 
deck'' and ``below deck'' storage is authorized may be stowed above or 
below the weather deck.



Sec. 176.78  Use of power-operated industrial trucks on board vessels.

    (a) Power Operated trucks. A power-operated truck (including a 
power-operated tractor, forklift, or other specialized truck used for 
cargo handling) may not be used on board a vessel in a space containing 
a hazardous material unless the truck conforms to the requirements of 
this section. The COTP may suspend or prohibit the use of cargo handling 
vehicles or equipment when that use constitutes a safety hazard.
    (b) Each truck must have a specific designation of Underwriter's 
Laboratories or Factory Mutual Laboratories. Any repair or alteration to 
a truck must be equivalent to that required on the original designation.
    (c) Description of designations. The recognized testing laboratory 
type designations are as follows:
    (1) An ``E'' designated unit is an electrically-powered unit that 
has minimum acceptable safeguards against inherent fire hazards.
    (2) An ``EE'' designated unit is an electrically-powered unit that 
has, in addition to all the requirements for the ``E'' unit, the 
electric motor and all other electrical equipment completely enclosed.
    (3) An ``EX'' designated unit is an electrically-powered unit that 
differs from the ``E'' and ``EE'' unit in that the electrical fittings 
and equipment are so designed, constructed, and assembled that the unit 
may be used in certain atmospheres containing flammable vapors or dusts.
    (4) A ``G'' designated unit is a gasoline-powered unit having 
minimum acceptable safeguards against inherent fire hazards.
    (5) A ``GS'' designated unit is a gasoline-powered unit that is 
provided with additional safeguards to the exhaust, fuel, and electrical 
systems.
    (6) An ``LP'' designated unit is similar to a ``G'' unit except that 
it is powered by liquefied petroleum gas instead of gasoline.
    (7) An ``LPS'' designated unit is a unit similar to a ``GS'' unit 
except that liquefied petroleum gas is used for fuel instead of 
gasoline.
    (8) A ``D'' designated unit is a unit similar to a ``G'' unit except 
that it is powered by a diesel engine instead of a gasoline engine.
    (9) A ``DS'' designated unit is a unit powered by a diesel engine 
provided with additional safeguards to the exhaust, fuel, and electrical 
systems.
    (d) Class 1 (explosive) materials. No power-operated truck may be 
used to handle Class 1 (explosive) materials or other cargo in an area 
near Class 1 (explosive) materials on board a vessel except:
    (1) A power-operated truck designated EE or EX.
    (2) A power-operated truck designated LPS, GS, D, or DS may be used 
under conditions acceptable to the COTP.
    (e) Other hazardous materials. (1) Only an ``EX'', ``EE'', ``GS'', 
``LPA'', or ``DS'' truck may be used in a hold or compartment containing 
Division 2.1 (flammable gas) materials, Class 3 (flammable liquids), 
Class 4 (flammable solids) materials, or Class 5 (oxidizers or organic 
peroxides) materials, cottons or other vegetable fibers, or bulk sulfur.
    (2) Only a designated truck may be used to handle any other 
hazardous material not covered in paragraph (d) or (e)(1) of this 
section.
    (f) Minimum safety features. In addition to the construction and 
design safety features required, each truck must have at least the 
following minimum safety features:
    (1) The truck must be equipped with a warning horn, whistle, gong, 
or other device that may be heard clearly above normal shipboard noises.
    (2) When the truck operation may expose the operator to danger from 
a falling object, the truck must be equipped with a driver's overhead 
guard. When

[[Page 695]]

the overall height of the truck with forks in the lowered position is 
limited by head room the overhead guard may be omitted. This overhead 
guard is only intended to offer protection from impact of small 
packages, boxes, bagged material, or similar hazards.
    (3) A forklift truck used to handle small objects or unstable loads 
must be equipped with a load backrest extension having height, width, 
and strength sufficient to prevent any load, or part of it, from falling 
toward the mast when the mast is in a position of maximum backward tilt. 
The load backrest extension must be constructed in a manner that does 
not interfere with good visibility.
    (4) The forks on a fork lift truck must be secured to the carriage 
so as to prevent any unintentional lifting of the toe which could create 
a hazard. The forks may not display permanent deformation when subjected 
to a test load of three times the rated capacity.
    (5) Each fork extension or other attachment must be secured to 
prevent unintentional lifting or displacement on primary forks.
    (6) Tires extending beyond the confines of the truck shall be 
provided with a guard to prevent the tires from throwing particles at 
the operator.
    (7) Unless the steering mechanism is a type that prevents road 
reactions from causing the steering handwheel to spin, a mushroom type 
steering knob must be used to engage the palm of the operator's hand, or 
the steering mechanism must be arranged in some other manner to prevent 
injury. The knob must be mounted within the perimeter of the wheel.
    (8) All steering controls must be confined within the clearnace of 
the truck or guarded so that movement of the controls will not result in 
injury to the operator when passing stanchions, obstructions or other.
    (g) Special operating conditions. (1) A truck may not be used on 
board a vessel unless prior notification of its use is given to the 
master or senior deck officer on board.
    (2) Before a truck is operated on board a vessel, it must be in a 
safe operating condition as determined by the master or senior deck 
officer on board.
    (3) Any truck that emits sparks or flames from the exhaust system 
must immediately be removed from service and may not be returned to 
service until the cause of these sparks or flames has been eliminated.
    (4)-(5) [Reserved]
    (6) All truck motors must be shut off immediately when a breakage or 
leakage of packages containing flammable liquids or gases, flammable 
solids, oxidizers, or organic peroxides occurs or is discovered.
    (7) The rated capacity of the truck must be posted on the truck at 
all times in a conspicuous place. This capacity may not be exceeded.
    (8) At least one Coast Guard approved marine type size 1 Type B, or 
UL approved 5BC portable fire extinguisher, or its approved equivalent, 
must be affixed to the truck in a readily accessible position or must be 
kept in close proximity, available for immediate use.
    (9) The vessel's fire fighting equipment, both fixed (where 
installed) and portable, must be kept ready for immediate use in the 
vicinity of the space being worked.
    (h) Refueling. (1) A truck using gasoline as fuel may not be 
refueled in the hold or on the weather deck of a vessel unless a 
portable non-spilling fuel handling system of not over five gallons 
capacity is used. Gasoline may not be transferred to a portable non-
spilling fuel handling device on board the vessel.
    (2) A truck using liquefied petroleum gas as fuel may not be 
refueled in the hold or on the weather deck of a vessel unless it is 
fitted with a removable tank and the hand-operated shutoff valve of the 
depleted tank is closed. In addition, the motor must be run until it 
stalls from lack of fuel and then the hand-operated shut off valve 
closed before the quick disconnect fitting to the fuel tank is 
disconnected.
    (3) A truck using diesel oil as fuel may not be refueled on the 
weather deck or in the hold of a vessel unless a portable container of 
not over a five gallon capacity is used. A truck may be refueled or a 
portable container may be refilled from a larger container of diesel 
fuel on the weather deck of a vessel

[[Page 696]]

if a suitable pump is used for the transfer operation and a drip pan of 
adequate size is used to prevent any dripping of fuel on the deck.
    (4) Refueling must be performed under the direct supervision of an 
experienced and responsible person specifically designated for this duty 
by the person in charge of the loading or unloading of the vessel.
    (5) Refueling may not be undertaken with less than two persons 
specifically assigned and present for the complete operation, at least 
one of whom must be experienced in using the portable fire extinguishers 
required in the fuel area.
    (6) At least one Coast Guard approved marine type size 1 Type B or 
UL approved 5BC portable fire extinguisher or its approved equivalent, 
must be provided in the fueling area. This is in addition to the 
extinguisher required by paragraph (g)(8) of this section.
    (7) The location for refueling trucks must be designated by the 
master or senior deck officer on board the vessel. ``NO SMOKING'' signs 
must be conspicuously posted in the area.
    (8) The location designated for refueling must be adequately 
ventilated to insure against accumulation of any hazardous concentration 
of vapors.
    (9) Before any truck in a hold is refueled or before any fuel 
handling device or unmounted liquefied petroleum gas cylinder is placed 
in a hold, the motors of all trucks in the same hold must be stopped.
    (10) All fuel handling devices and unmounted liquefied petroleum gas 
containers must be removed from a hold before any truck motor is started 
and the trucks are placed in operation in that hold.
    (i) Replacing batteries. Batteries for electrically powered trucks 
and for the ignition systems of internal combustion powered trucks may 
be changed in the hold of a vessel subject to the following conditions:
    (1) Only suitable handling equipment may be employed.
    (2) Adequate precautions must be taken to avoid damage to the 
battery, short circuiting of the battery, and spillage of the 
electrolyte.
    (j) Charging of batteries. Batteries of industrial trucks may be 
recharged in a hold of a vessel subject to the following conditions:
    (1) The batteries must be housed in a suitable, ventilated, portable 
metal container with a suitable outlet at the top for connection of a 
portable air hose, or must be placed directly beneath a suitable outlet 
at the top for connection of a portable air hose. The air hose must be 
permanently connected to an exhaust duct leading to the open deck and 
terminate in a gooseneck or other suitable weather head. If natural 
ventilation is not practicable or adequate, mechanical means of exhaust 
must be employed in conjunction with the duct. The air outlet on the 
battery container must be equipped with an interlock switch so arranged 
that the charging of the battery cannot take place unless the air hose 
is properly connected to the box.
    (2) If mechanical ventilation is used, an additional interlock must 
be provided between the fan and the charging circuit so that the fan 
must be in operation in order to complete the charging circuit for 
operation. It is preferable that this interlock switch be of a 
centrifugal type driven by the fan shaft.
    (3) The hold may not contain any hazardous materials.
    (4) The charging facilities may be part of the truck equipment or 
may be separate from the truck and located inside or outside the cargo 
hold. The power supply or charging circuit (whichever method is used) 
must be connected to the truck by a portable plug connection of the 
break-away type. This portable plug must be so engaged with the truck 
battery charging outlet that any movement of the truck away from the 
charging station will break the connection between the plug and 
receptacle without exposing any live parts to contact with a conducting 
surface or object and without the plug falling to the deck where it may 
become subject to damage.
    (5) All unmounted batteries must be suitably protected or removed 
from an area in the hold of the vessel before any truck is operated in 
that area.
    (k) Stowage of power-operated industrial trucks on board a vessel. 
Trucks stowed on board a vessel must meet vessel stowage requirements in 
Sec. 176.905.

[[Page 697]]

    (l) Packaging and stowage of fuel on board a vessel. Division 2.1 
(flammable gas) materials and flammable liquids used as fuel for 
industrial trucks must be packaged and stowed as authorized in 46 CFR 
147.60 or 46 CFR 147.45, respectively.

[Amdt. 176-1, 41 FR 16110, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 176-1A, 41 
FR 40687, Sept. 20, 1976; Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52689, Dec. 21, 1990; 
Amdt. 176-39, 61 FR 18933, Apr. 29, 1996; Amdt. 176-43, 62 FR 24741, May 
6, 1997; 65 FR 58630, Sept. 29, 2000]



               Subpart D--General Segregation Requirements



Sec. 176.80  Applicability.

    (a) This subpart sets forth segregation requirements in addition to 
any segregation requirements set forth elsewhere in this subchapter.
    (b) Hazardous materials in limited quantities when loaded in 
transport vehicles and freight containers, are excepted from the 
segregation requirements of this subpart and any additional segregation 
specified in this subchapter for transportation by vessel.

[Amdt. 176-1, 41 FR 16110, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 176-3, 42 
FR 57967, Nov. 7, 1977]



Sec. 176.83  Segregation.

    (a) General. (1) The requirements of this section apply to all cargo 
spaces on deck or under deck of all types of vessels, and to all cargo 
transport units.
    (2) Segregation is obtained by maintaining certain distances between 
incompatible hazardous materials or by requiring the presence of one or 
more steel bulkheads or decks between them or a combination thereof. 
Intervening spaces between such hazardous materials may be filled with 
other cargo which is not incompatible with the hazardous materials.
    (3) The general requirements for segregation between the various 
classes of dangerous goods are shown in the segregation table. In 
addition to these general requirements, there may be a need to segregate 
a particular material from other materials which would contribute to its 
hazard. Such segregation requirements are indicated by code numbers in 
Column 10B of the Sec. 172.101 Table.
    (4) Segregation is not required between hazardous materials of 
different classes which comprise the same substance but vary only in 
their water content (e.g., sodium sulphide in Division 4.2 or Class 8).
    (5) Whenever hazardous materials are stowed together, whether or not 
in a transport unit, the segregation of such hazardous materials from 
others must always be in accordance with the most restrictive 
requirements for any of the hazardous materials concerned.
    (6) When the Sec. 172.101 Table or Sec. 172.402 requires packages to 
bear a subsidiary hazard label or labels, the segregation appropriate to 
the subsidiary hazards must be applied when that segregation is more 
restrictive than that required by the primary hazard. For the purposes 
of this paragraph, the segregation requirements corresponding to an 
explosive subsidiary hazard are--except for organic peroxides which are 
those corresponding to Division 1.3--those for Division 1.4 (explosive) 
materials.
    (7) Where, for the purposes of segregation, terms such as ``away 
from'' a particular hazard class are used in the Sec. 172.101 Table, the 
segregation requirement applies to:
    (i) All hazardous materials within the hazard class; and
    (ii) All hazardous materials for which a secondary hazard label of 
that class is required.
    (8) Notwithstanding the requirements of paragraphs (a)(6) and (a)(7) 
of this section, hazardous materials of the same class may be stowed 
together without regard to segregation required by secondary hazards 
(subsidiary risk label(s)), provided the substances do not react 
dangerously with each other and cause:
    (i) Combustion and/or evolution of considerable heat;
    (ii) Evolution of flammable, toxic or asphyxiant gases;
    (iii) The formation of corrosive substances; or
    (iv) The formation of unstable substances.
    (9) Stowage in a shelter-'tween deck cargo space is not considered 
to be ``on deck'' stowage.

[[Page 698]]

    (10) Where the code in column (10B) of the Sec. 172.101 Table 
specifies that ``Segregation as for. . .'' applies, the segregation 
requirements applicable to that class in the Sec. 176.83(b) General 
Segregation Table must be applied. However, for the purposes of 
paragraph (a)(8) of this section, which permits substances of the same 
class to be stowed together provided they do not react dangerously with 
each other, the segregation requirements of the class as represented by 
the primary hazard class in the Sec. 172.101 Table entry must be 
applied.
    (b) General Segregation Table. The following table sets forth the 
general requirements for segregation between the various classes of 
hazardous materials. The properties of materials within each class may 
vary greatly and may require greater segregation than is reflected in 
this table. If the Sec. 172.101 Table sets forth particular requirements 
for segregation, they take precedence over these general requirements.

                                        Table 176.83(b)--General Segregation Requirements for Hazardous Materials
                [Segregation must also take account of a single secondary hazard label, as required by paragraph (a)(6) of this section.]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                     1.1
                               Class                                 1.2  1.3  1.4  2.1  2.2  2.3   3   4.1  4.2  4.3  5.1  5.2  6.1  6.2   7    8    9
                                                                     1.5       1.6
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Explosives, 1.1, 1.2, 1.5..........................................  (*)  (*)  (*)    4    2    2    4    4    4    4    4    4    2    4    2    4    X
Explosives, 1.3....................................................  (*)  (*)  (*)    4    2    2    4    3    3    4    4    4    2    4    2    2    X
Explosives, 1.4, 1.6...............................................  (*)  (*)  (*)    2    1    1    2    2    2    2    2    2    X    4    2    2    X
Flammable gases 2.1................................................    4    4    2    X    X    X    2    1    2    X    2    2    X    4    2    1    X
Non-toxic, non-flammable gases 2.2.................................    2    2    1    X    X    X    1    X    1    X    X    1    X    2    1    X    X
Poisonous gases 2.3................................................    2    2    1    X    X    X    2    X    2    X    X    2    X    2    1    X    X
Flammable liquids 3................................................    4    4    2    2    1    2    X    X    2    1    2    2    X    3    2    X    X
Flammable solids 4.1...............................................    4    3    2    1    X    X    X    X    1    X    1    2    X    3    2    1    X
Spontaneously combustible substances 4.2...........................    4    3    2    2    1    2    2    1    X    1    2    2    1    3    2    1    X
Substances which are dangerous when wet 4.3........................    4    4    2    X    X    X    1    X    1    X    2    2    X    2    2    1    X
Oxidizing substances 5.1...........................................    4    4    2    2    X    X    2    1    2    2    X    2    1    3    1    2    X
Organic peroxides 5.2..............................................    4    4    2    2    1    2    2    2    2    2    2    X    1    3    2    2    X
Poisons 6.1........................................................    2    2    X    X    X    X    X    X    1    X    1    1    X    1    X    X    X
Infectious substances 6.2..........................................    4    4    4    4    2    2    3    3    3    2    3    3    1    X    3    3    X
Radioactive materials 7............................................    2    2    2    2    1    1    2    2    2    2    1    2    X    3    X    2    X
Corrosives 8.......................................................    4    2    2    1    X    X    X    1    1    1    2    2    X    3    2    X    X
Miscellaneous dangerous substances 9...............................    X    X    X    X    X    X    X    X    X    X    X    X    X    X    X    X    X
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Numbers and symbols relate to the following terms as defined in this section:
    1--``Away from.''
    2--``Separated from.''
    3--``Separated by a complete compartment or hold from.''
    4--``Separated longitudinally by an intervening complete compartment or hold from.''
    X--The segregation, if any, is shown in the Sec.  172.101 table.
    *--See Sec.  176.144 of this part for segregation within Class 1.


[[Page 699]]

    (c) Segregation requirements for breakbulk cargo. (1) The 
requirements of this paragraph apply to the segregation of packages 
containing hazardous materials and stowed as breakbulk cargo;
    (2) Definition of the segregation terms:
    (i) Legend:
    (A) Package containing incompatible goods.
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.070
    
    (B) Reference package.
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.071
    
    (C) Deck resistant to fire and liquid.
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.072
    
    Note: Full vertical lines represent transverse bulkheads between 
compartments or holds resistant to fire and liquid.

    (ii) ``Away from'': Effectively segregated so that the incompatible 
materials cannot interact dangerously in the event of an accident but 
may be carried in the same compartment or hold or on deck provided a 
minimum horizontal separation of 3 m (10 feet) projected vertically is 
obtained.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.073

    (iii) ``Separated From'': In different compartments or holds when 
stowed under deck. If the intervening deck is resistant to fire and 
liquid, a vertical separation (i.e., in different compartments) is 
acceptable as equivalent to this segregation. For ``on deck'' stowage, 
this segregation means a separation by a distance of at least 6 m (20 
feet) horizontally.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.091

    (iv) ``Separated by a complete compartment or hold from'': Either a 
vertical or horizontal separation. If the intervening decks are not 
resistant to fire and liquid, then only a longitudinal separation (i.e., 
by a intervening complete compartment or hold) is acceptable. For ``on 
deck'' stowage, this segregation means a separation by a distance of at 
least 12 m (39 feet) horizontally. The same distance must be applied if 
one package is stowed ``on deck'', and the other one in an upper 
compartment.

[[Page 700]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.074

    Note: One of the two decks must be resistant to fire and liquid.

    (v) ``Separated longitudinally by an intervening complete 
compartment or hold from'': Vertical separation alone does not meet this 
requirement. Between a package ``under deck'' and one ``on deck'' a 
minimum distance of 24 m (79 feet) including a complete compartment must 
be maintained longitudinally. For ``on deck'' stowage, this segregation 
means a separation by a distance of at least 24 m (79 feet) 
longitudinally.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.075

    (d) Segregation in transport units: Two hazardous materials for 
which any segregation is required may not be stowed in the same 
transport unit.
    (e) Segregation of hazardous materials stowed as breakbulk cargo 
from those packed in transport units: (1) Hazardous materials stowed as 
breakbulk cargo must be segregated from materials packed in open 
transport units in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section.
    (2) Hazardous materials stowed as breakbulk cargo must be segregated 
from materials packed in closed transport units in accordance with 
paragraph (c) of this section, except that:
    (i) Where ``away from'' is required, no segregation between packages 
and the closed transport units is required; and
    (ii) Where ``separated from'' is required, the segregation between 
the packages and the closed transport units may be the same as for 
``away from''.

[[Page 701]]

    (f) Segregation of containers on board container vessels: (1) This 
paragraph applies to the segregation of freight containers which are 
carried on board container vessels, or on other types of vessels 
provided these cargo spaces are properly fitted for permanent stowage of 
freight containers during transport.
    (2) For container vessels which have cargo spaces used for breakbulk 
cargo or any other method of stowage, the appropriate paragraph of this 
section applies to the relevant cargo space.
    (3) Segregation Table: Table Sec. 176.83(f) sets forth the general 
requirements for segregation between freight containers on board 
container vessels.
    (4) In table Sec. 176.83(f), a container space means a distance of 
not less than 6 m (20 feet) fore and aft or not less than 2.5 m (8 feet) 
athwartship.

[[Page 702]]



                                                                                   Table 176.83(f)--Segregation of Containers on Board Container Ships
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                           Vertical                                                                                           Horizontal
                                 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
     Segregation requirement                                                                                               Closed versus closed                     Closed versus open                       Open versus open
                                     Closed versus    Closed versus open   Open versus open                      -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                        closed                                                                          On deck           Under deck            On deck           Under deck            On deck           Under deck
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. ``Away from''................  One on top of the   Open on top of      Not in the same     Fore and aft......  No restriction....  No restriction....  No restriction....  No restriction....  One container       One container
                                   other permitted.    closed permitted.   vertical line        ................    ................    ................    ................    ................   space.              space or one
                                                        ................   unless segregated    ................    ................    ................    ................    ................    ................   bulkhead.
                                                        ................   by a deck.           ................    ................    ................    ................    ................  One container       One container
                                                      Otherwise as for                        Athwartships......  No restriction....  No restriction....  No restriction....  No restriction....   space.              space.
                                                       open versus open.                                                                                                        ................
                                                                                                                                                                                ................
                                                                                                                                                                                ................
2. ``Separated from''...........  Not in the same     As for open versus  Not in the same     Fore and aft......  One container       One container       One container       One container       One container       One bulkhead.
                                   vertical line       open.               vertical line        ................   space.              space or one        space.              space or one        space..
                                   unless segregated                       unless segregated    ................    ................   bulkhead.            ................   bulkhead.            ................
                                   by a deck.                              by a deck.           ................  One container       One container       One container       Two container       Two container       One bulkhead.
                                                                                              Athwartships......   space.              space.              space.              spaces.             spaces..
3. ``Separated by a complete      Not in the same     As for open versus  Not in the same     Fore and aft......  One container       One bulkhead......  One container       One bulkhead......  Two container       Two bulkheads.
 compartment or hold from''.       vertical line       open.               vertical line        ................   space.               ................   space.               ................   spaces.
                                   unless segregated                       unless segregated    ................  Two container         ................  Two container         ................  Three container     Two bulkheads.
                                   by a deck.                              by a deck.         Athwartships......   spaces.            One bulkhead......   spaces.            One bulkhead......   spaces.
                                                                                                ................
4. ``Separated longitudinally by  Prohibited........  ..................  ..................  Fore and aft......  Four container      One bulkhead and    Four container      Two bulkheads.....  Four container      Two bulkheads.
 an intervening complete                                                                        ................   spaces.             four container      spaces.              ................   spaces.
 compartment or hold from''.                                                                    ................    ................   spaces*.             ................    ................    ................
                                                                                                ................  Prohibited........  Prohibited........  Prohibited........  Prohibited........  Prohibited........  Prohibited.
                                                                                              Athwartships......
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
* Containers not less than 6 m (20 feet) from intervening bulkhead.
 
Note: All bulkheads and decks must be resistant to fire and liquid.


[[Page 703]]

    (g) Segregation of transport units on board trailerships: (1) The 
requirements of this paragraph apply to the segregation of transport 
units which are carried on board trailerships or in ``roll-on/roll-off'' 
cargo spaces.
    (2) For trailerships which have spaces suitable for breakbulk cargo, 
containers, or any other method of stowage, the appropriate paragraph of 
this section applies to the relevant cargo space.
    (3) Segregation Table. Table Sec. 176.83(g) sets forth the general 
requirements for segregation between transport units on board 
trailerships.

                                  Table 176.83(g)--Segregation of Transport Units on Board Trailerships and Trainships.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
                              --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
   Segregation requirement                              Closed versus closed                 Closed versus open                 Open versus open
                                                --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                      On deck         Under deck          On deck         Under deck        On deck         Under deck
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. ``Away From''.............  Fore and aft....  No restriction..  No restriction..  No restriction..  No restriction.  At least 3 m...  At least 3 m.
                               Athwartships....  No restriction..  No restriction..  No restriction..  No restriction.  At least 3 m...  At least 3 m.
2. ``Separated from''........  Fore and aft....  At least 6 m....  At least 6 m or   At least 6 m....  At least 6 m or  At least 6 m...  At least 12 m
                                 ..............    ..............   one bulkhead.      ..............   one bulkhead.   At least 6 m...   or one
                                 ..............  At least 3 m....  At least 3 m or   At least 3 m....  At least 6 m or                    bulkhead
                               Athwartships....                     one bulkhead.                       one bulkhead.                    At least 12 m
                                                                                                                                          or one
                                                                                                                                          bulkhead
3. ``Separated by a complete   Fore and aft....  At least 12 m...  At least 24 m +   At least 24 m...  At least 24 m +  At least 36 m..  Two decks or
 compartment or hold from''.     ..............    ..............   deck.              ..............   deck.             .............   two bulkheads.
                                 ..............  At least 12 m...    ..............  At least 24 m...    .............  At least 36 m..
                               Athwartships....                    At least 24 m +                     At least 24 m +                   Prohibited.
                                                                    deck.                               deck.
4. ``Separated longitudinally  Fore and aft....  At least 36 m...  Two bulkheads or  At least 36 m...  At least 48 m    At least 48 m..  Prohibited.
 by an intervening complete      ..............    ..............   at least 36 m +    ..............   including two     .............
 compartment or hold from''.     ..............    ..............   two decks.         ..............   bulkheads.        .............
                                 ..............  Prohibited......  Prohibited......  Prohibited......  Prohibited.....  Prohibited.....
                               Athwartships....                                                                                          Prohibited.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note: All bulkheads and decks must be resistant to fire and liquid.

    (h) Segregation on board barge carrying vessels: (1) The 
requirements of this section apply to the segregation in shipborne 
barges as well as to the segregation between shipborne barges carried on 
board vessels specially designed and equipped to carry such barges.
    (2) On barge-carrying vessels which incorporate other stowage spaces 
or any other method of stowage, barges containing hazardous materials 
must be segregated from hazardous materials not stowed in barges as 
prescribed in paragraphs (b) and (j) of this section.
    (i) Segregation in shipborne barges: Hazardous materials transported 
in shipborne barges must be segregated as prescribed in paragraphs (a), 
(b), and (c) of this section.
    (j) Segregation between shipborne barges on barge-carrying vessels: 
(1) When a shipborne barge is loaded with two or more hazardous 
materials with different requirements for segregation, the most 
stringent applicable segregation requirement must be applied.
    (2) ``Away from'' and ``separated from'' require no segregation 
between shipborne barges.
    (3) For barge-carrying vessels with vertical holds, ``Separated by a 
complete compartment or hold from'' means that separate holds are 
required. On barge-carrying vessels having horizontal barge levels, 
separate barge levels are required and the barges may not be in the same 
vertical line.
    (4) ``Separated longitudinally by an intervening complete 
compartment or

[[Page 704]]

hold from'' means, for barge-carrying vessels with vertical holds, that 
separation by an intervening hold or engine room is required. On barge-
carrying vessels having horizontal barge levels, separate barge levels 
and a longitudinal separation by at least two intervening barge spaces 
are required.
    (k) Segregation requirements for ferry vessels: A ferry vessel (when 
operating either as a passenger or cargo vessel) that cannot provide the 
separation required in this section may carry incompatible hazardous 
materials in separate transport vehicles if they are stowed to give the 
maximum possible separation.

[Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52690, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66282, 
Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45465, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 176-34, 58 FR 51533, 
Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 176-38, 60 FR 49111, Sept. 21, 1995; 64 FR 10781, 
10782, Mar. 5, 1999; 66 FR 45184, 45384, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 176.84  Other requirements for stowage and segregation for cargo vessels and passenger vessels.

    (a) General. When column 10B of the Sec. 172.101 Table refers to a 
numbered or alpha-numeric stowage provision for water shipments, the 
meaning and requirements of that provision are as set forth in this 
section. Terms in quotation marks are defined in Sec. 176.83.
    (b) Table of provisions:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
              Code                              Provisions
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1...............................  [Reserved]
2...............................  Temperature controlled material.
3...............................  Do not stow with high explosives.
4...............................  Stow ``Separated from'' liquid organic
                                   materials.
5...............................  Stow ``Separated from'' powdered
                                   metals and their compounds.
6...............................  Emergency temperature material.
7...............................  [Reserved]
8...............................  Glass carboys not permitted on
                                   passenger vessels.
9...............................  Glass carboys not permitted under
                                   deck.
10..............................  Glass bottles not permitted under
                                   deck.
11..............................  Keep away from heat and open flame.
12..............................  Keep as cool as reasonably
                                   practicable.
13..............................  Keep as dry as reasonably practicable.
14..............................  For metal drums, stowage permitted
                                   under deck on cargo vessels.
15..............................  May be stowed in portable magazine or
                                   metal locker.
16..............................  No other cargo may be stowed in the
                                   same hold with this material.
17..............................  Segregation same as for flammable
                                   gases but ``away from'' dangerous
                                   when wet.
18..............................  Prohibited on any vessel carrying
                                   explosives (except explosives in
                                   Division 1.4, Compatibility group S).
19..............................  Protect from sparks and open flames.
20..............................  Segregation same as for corrosives.
21..............................  Segregation same as for flammable
                                   liquids.
22..............................  Segregation same as for flammable
                                   liquids if flash point below 61
                                   deg.C (142  deg.F).
23..............................  Segregation same as for flammable
                                   liquids if flash point between 23
                                   deg.C (73  deg.F) and 61  deg.C (142
                                   deg.F).
24..............................  Segregation same as for flammable
                                   solids.
25..............................  Shade from radiant heat.
26..............................  Stow ``away from'' acids.
27..............................  Stow ``away from'' alkaline compounds.
28..............................  Stow ``away from'' flammable liquids.
29..............................  Stow ``away from'' ammonium compounds.
30..............................  Stow ``away from'' animal or vegetable
                                   oils.
31..............................  Stow ``away from'' combustible
                                   materials.
32..............................  Stow ``away from'' copper, its alloys
                                   and its salts.
33..............................  Stow ``away from'' fluorides.
34..............................  Stow ``away from'' foodstuffs.
35..............................  Stow ``away from'' all odor-absorbing
                                   cargo.
36..............................  Stow ``away from'' heavy metals and
                                   their compounds.
37..............................  Stow ``away from'' hydrazine.
38..............................  Stow ``away from'' all other
                                   corrosives.
39..............................  Stow ``away from'' liquid halogenated
                                   hydrocarbons.
40..............................  Stow ``clear of living quarters''.
41..............................  Stow ``away from'' mercury and its
                                   compounds.
42..............................  Stow ``away from'' nitric acids and
                                   perchloric acids not exceeding 50
                                   percent acid by weight.
43..............................  Stow ``away from'' organic materials.
44..............................  Stow ``away from'' oxidizers.
45..............................  Stow ``away from'' permanganates.
46..............................  Stow ``away from'' powdered metals.
47..............................  Stow ``away from'' sodium compounds.
48..............................  Stow ``away from'' sources of heat.
49..............................  Stow ``away from'' corrosives.
50..............................  Stow ``away from'' sources of heat
                                   where temperatures in excess of 55
                                   deg.C (131  deg.F) for a period of 24
                                   hours or more will be encountered.
51..............................  Stow ``separated from'' acetylene.
52..............................  Stow ``separated from'' acids.
53..............................  Stow ``separated from'' alkaline
                                   compounds.
54..............................  Stow ``separated from'' animal or
                                   vegetable oils.
55..............................  Stow ``separated from'' ammonia.
56..............................  Stow ``separated from'' ammonium
                                   compounds.
57..............................  Stow ``separated from'' chlorine.
58..............................  Stow ``separated from'' cyanides.
59..............................  Stow ``separated from'' combustible
                                   materials.
60..............................  Stow ``separated from'' chlorates,
                                   chlorites, hypochlorites, nitrites,
                                   perchlorates, permanganates, and
                                   metallic powders.
61..............................  Stow ``separated from'' corrosive
                                   materials.
62..............................  Stow ``separated from'' diborane.
63..............................  Stow ``separated from'' diethylene
                                   triamine.
64..............................  Stow ``separated from'' explosives.
65..............................  Stow ``separated from'' flammable
                                   substances.
66..............................  Stow ``separated from'' flammable
                                   solids.
67..............................  Stow ``separated from'' halides.
68..............................  Stow ``separated from'' hydrogen.
69..............................  Stow ``separated from'' hydrogen
                                   peroxide.
70..............................  Stow ``separated from'' mercury salts.
71..............................  Stow ``separated from'' nitric acid.
72..............................  Stow ``separated from'' nitrogen
                                   compounds.
73..............................  Stow ``separated from'' chlorates.
74..............................  Stow ``separated from'' oxidizers.
75..............................  Stow ``separated from'' permanganates.
76..............................  Stow ``separated by a complete
                                   compartment or hold from'' organic
                                   peroxides.

[[Page 705]]

 
77..............................  Stow ``separated longitudinally by a
                                   complete compartment or hold from''
                                   explosives.
78..............................  Stow ``separated longitudinally by an
                                   intervening complete compartment or
                                   hold from'' explosives.
79..............................  The maximum net quantity in one
                                   package for this material shipped
                                   aboard a passenger vessel is limited
                                   to 22.7 kg (50 pounds).
80..............................  Toy torpedoes must not be packed with
                                   other special fireworks.
81..............................  Under deck stowage permitted only if
                                   an indicating substance such as
                                   chloropicrin has been added.
82..............................  Under deck stowage is permitted only
                                   if containing not more than 36
                                   percent by weight of hydrazine.
83..............................  [Reserved]
84..............................  Under deck stowage must be in well-
                                   ventilated space.
85..............................  Under deck stowage must be in
                                   mechanically ventilated space.
86..............................  Stow ``separated by a complete
                                   compartment or hold from'' explosives
                                   Division 1.3.
87..............................  Stow ``separated from'' Class 1
                                   (explosives) except Division 1.4.
88..............................  Stow ``separated by a complete
                                   compartment or hold from'' Class 1
                                   (explosives) except Division 1.4.
89..............................  Segregation same as for oxidizers.
90..............................  Stow ``separated from'' radioactive
                                   materials.
91..............................  Stow ``separated from'' flammable
                                   liquids.
92..............................  Stow ``separated from'' powdered
                                   materials.
93..............................  Stow not accessible to unauthorized
                                   persons on passenger vessels.
94..............................  Plastic jerricans and plastic drums
                                   not permitted under deck.
95..............................  Stow ``separated from'' foodstuffs.
96..............................  Glass carboys not permitted under deck
                                   on passenger vessels.
97..............................  Stow ``away from'' azides.
98..............................  Stow ``away from'' all flammable
                                   materials.
99..............................  Only new metal drums permitted on
                                   passenger vessels.
100.............................  Stow ``away from'' flammable solids.
101.............................  Stow ``separated from'' iron oxide.
102.............................  Stow ``separated from'' all odor
                                   absorbing cargoes.
103.............................  Only to be loaded under dry weather
                                   conditions.
104.............................  Stow ``separated from'' bromine.
105.............................  As approved by the Competent Authority
                                   of the country concerned.
106.............................  Stow ``separated from'' powdered
                                   metal.
107.............................  Stow ``separated from'' peroxides and
                                   superoxides.
108.............................  The transport temperature should be
                                   indicated on the tank.
109.............................  Label as a flammable liquid if flash
                                   point is 61  deg.C (142  deg.F) or
                                   below.
110.............................  Packaging Group II if concentration
                                   does not exceed 70 percent acid.
111.............................  If concentration exceeds 50 percent
                                   acid, notes 66, 74, 89, and 90 apply.
112.............................  Packaging Group II for concentrations
                                   not less that 50 percent and
                                   Packaging Group III for
                                   concentrations less than 50 percent.
113.............................  Packaging Group II if concentrations
                                   does not exceed 60 percent acid.
114.............................  Corrosive subsidiary risk label
                                   required unless concentration is less
                                   than 80 percent.
115.............................  If packaged in glass or earthenware
                                   inner packagings in wooden or
                                   fiberboard outer packagings, the
                                   maximum quantity on any vessel is 500
                                   kg (equivalent to 450 L).
116.............................  In a cargo space capable of being
                                   opened up in an emergency. The
                                   possible need to open hatches in case
                                   of fire to provide maximum
                                   ventilation and to apply water in an
                                   emergency and the consequent risk to
                                   the stability of the ship through
                                   flooding of the cargo space should be
                                   considered before loading.
117.............................  In a clean cargo space capable of
                                   being opened up in an emergency. In
                                   the case of bagged fertilizer in
                                   freight containers, it is sufficient
                                   if in the case of an emergency, the
                                   cargo is accessible through free
                                   approaches (hatch entries) and
                                   mechanical ventilation enables the
                                   master to exhaust any gases or fumes
                                   resulting from decomposition. The
                                   possible need to open hatches in case
                                   of fire to provide maximum
                                   ventilation and to apply water in an
                                   emergency and the consequent risk to
                                   the stability of the ship through
                                   flooding of the cargo space should be
                                   considered before loading.
118.............................  Stowage--Category D, Category E
                                   freight containers and pallet boxes
                                   only. Ventilation may be required.
                                   The possible need to open hatches in
                                   a case of fire to provide maximum
                                   ventilation and to supply water in an
                                   emergency, and the consequent risk to
                                   the stability of the ship through
                                   flooding of the cargo space, should
                                   be considered before loading.
119.............................  Double strip stowage recommended.
120.............................  Provide good surface and through
                                   ventilation.
121.............................  Packaging group III when the flash
                                   point of the flammable liquid is 23
                                   deg.C (73  deg.F) or above.
122.............................  Stow ``separated from'' infectious
                                   substances.
123.............................  Stow ``away from'' infectious
                                   substances.
M1--M6..........................  [Reserved]
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (c) Provisions for the stowage of Class 1 (explosive) materials: (1) 
Explosive substances and explosive articles must be stowed in accordance 
with Column (10A) and Column (10B) of the 172.101 Table of this 
subchapter.
    (2) The following notes in column 10B of the Sec. 172.101 Table 
apply to the transport of Class 1 (explosive) materials by vessel:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
              Notes                             Provisions
------------------------------------------------------------------------
5E..............................  Stow ``away from'' lead and its
                                   compounds.
7E..............................  Stowage category ``04'' for
                                   projectiles or cartridges for guns,
                                   cannons or mortars; Stowage category
                                   ``08'' for other types.
8E..............................  When under deck, special stowage is
                                   required.
14E.............................  On deck, cargo transport unit must be
                                   steel.
15E.............................  On deck, cargo transport unit must be
                                   leakproof.
17E.............................  On deck stowage is recommended.

[[Page 706]]

 
19E.............................  Stow ``away from'' Explosive,
                                   blasting, type C, UN0083 which
                                   contain chlorates or perchlorates.
20E.............................  Stowage category ``03'' for
                                   projectiles or cartridges for guns,
                                   cannons or mortars; Stowage category
                                   ``07'' for other types; magazines
                                   must be of steel construction that
                                   prevents leakage.
21E.............................  Cargo space ventilation must be
                                   carefully controlled to avoid
                                   excessive condensation.
22E.............................  When containing chlorates or
                                   perchlorates, stow ``away from''
                                   explosives containing ammonium
                                   nitrate or other ammonium salts.
23E.............................  Segregate from other Class 1
                                   (explosive) materials in the same
                                   manner as is required for flammable
                                   liquids.
26E.............................  Stowage category ``13'' and, for on
                                   deck stowage, non-metallic lining of
                                   closed cargo transport unit is
                                   required when not in effectively
                                   sealed, sift-proof packages; Stowage
                                   category ``10'' permitted when in
                                   effectively sealed, sift-proof
                                   packages.
27E.............................  For closed cargo transport units, a
                                   non-metallic lining is required.
------------------------------------------------------------------------


[Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52693, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66282, 
Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 176-43, 62 FR 24742, May 6, 1997; 66 FR 33438, June 
21, 2001; 66 FR 45185, 45384, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 15744, Apr. 3, 2002]



   Subpart E--Special Requirements for Transport Vehicles Loaded With 
       Hazardous Materials and Transported on Board Ferry Vessels



Sec. 176.88  Applicability.

    The requirements in this subpart are applicable to transport 
vehicles containing hazardous materials being transported on board ferry 
vessels and are in addition to any prescribed elsewhere in this 
subchapter. Vessels in a service similar to a ferry service, but not 
over a designated ferry route, may be treated as a ferry vessel for the 
purpose of this subpart if approved in writing by the District 
Commander.

[Amdt. 176-1, 41 FR 16110, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 176-1A, 41 
FR 40690, Sept. 20, 1976]



Sec. 176.89  Control of transport vehicles.

    (a) A transport vehicle containing hazardous materials may be 
transported on board a ferry vessel, subject to the following 
conditions:
    (1) The operator or person in charge of the vehicle shall deliver to 
the vessel's representative a copy of the shipping papers and 
certificate required by Secs. 176.24 and 176.27;
    (2) The vehicle shall be placed at the location indicated by the 
vessel's representative;
    (3) The parking brakes of the vehicle shall be set securely to 
prevent movement;
    (4) The motor of a highway vehicle shall be shut off and not 
restarted until the vessel has completed its voyage and docked;
    (5) All vehicle lights shall be cut off and not relighted until the 
vessel has completed its voyage and docked;
    (6) The operator of a highway vehicle shall remain with the vehicle;
    (7) No repairs or adjustments must be made to the vehicle while it 
is on the vessel;
    (8) No hazardous materials are to be released from the vehicle; and
    (9) Any instructions given by the vessel's representative during the 
voyage, and during ``roll on'' and ``roll off'' operations must be 
observed.
    (b) Smoking by any person in or around a vehicle is prohibited.



Sec. 176.90  Private automobiles.

    A private automobile which is carrying any Class 1 (explosive) 
material (except permitted fireworks or small arms ammunition) may not 
be transported on a passenger-carrying ferry vessel unless the Class 1 
(explosive) material is in compliance with packaging, labeling, marking, 
and certification requirements of this subchapter. Permitted fireworks 
and small arms ammunition may be carried without the required packaging, 
labeling, marking, or certification if they are in tight containers.

[Amdt. 176-1, 41 FR 16110, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 176-30, 55 
FR 52695, Dec. 21, 1990]



Sec. 176.91  Motorboats.

    A motorboat may be transported on board a ferry vessel with gasoline 
in the tank and two other containers not exceeding 23 L (six gallons) 
capacity each if they are in the motorboat, closed, and in good 
condition.

[Amdt. 176-1, 41 FR 16110, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 176-30, 55 
FR 52695, Dec. 21, 1990]

[[Page 707]]



Sec. 176.92  Cylinders laden in vehicles.

    Any cylinder of Class 2 (compressed gas) material which is required 
to have a valve protection cap fitted in place may be transported on 
board a ferry vessel without having the valve protection cap in place 
when it is laden in a transport vehicle and is not removed from the 
vehicle while on the vessel.

[Amdt. 176-1, 41 FR 16110, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 176-30, 55 
FR 52695, Dec. 21, 1990]



Sec. 176.93  Vehicles having refrigerating or heating equipment.

    (a) A transport vehicle fitted with refrigerating or heating 
equipment using a flammable liquid or Division 2.1 (flammable gas) 
material, or diesel oil as fuel, may be transported on a ferry vessel. 
However, the refrigerating or heating equipment may not be operated 
while the vehicle is on the vessel, unless the equipment complies with 
the following requirements:
    (1) The installation is rigidly mounted and free of any movement 
other than normal vibration in operation;
    (2) An easily accessible shutoff control is fitted to the fuel and 
electrical supply of the refrigerating or heating equipment; and
    (3) The fuel storage tank, the fuel lines, the carburetor and any 
other fuel devices are tight and show no signs of leakage.
    (b) If the vehicle operator desires to operate the refrigerating or 
heating equipment while on the vessel and the equipment is not fitted 
with automatic starting and stopping devices, it must be started before 
the vehicle is taken on board. It may continue in operation while the 
vehicle is on the vessel, but if the motor stops it may not be 
restarted.
    (c) In the case of a ferry vessel on a voyage exceeding 30 minutes' 
duration, stowage must be provided for transport vehicles having 
refrigerating or heating equipment operated by internal combustion 
engines which will permit ready diffusion of exhaust gases to the open 
air. Passenger vehicles may not be stowed in a position adjacent to 
vehicles operating internal combustion motors which expose the occupants 
of the passenger vehicles to excessive concentrations of exhaust fumes 
from such motors.
    (d) A transport vehicle containing solid carbon dioxide as a 
refrigerant may be transported on a ferry vessel only if it is stowed in 
a well ventilated location.

[Amdt. 176-1, 41 FR 16110, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 176-30, 55 
FR 52695, Dec. 21, 1990]



               Subpart F--Special Requirements for Barges

    Source: Amdt. 176-8, 44 FR 23228, Apr. 19, 1979, unless otherwise 
noted.



Sec. 176.95  Applicability.

    The requirements prescribed in this subpart are applicable to the 
transportation of packaged hazardous materials on board barges. The 
requirements prescribed elsewhere in this subchapter for vessels 
similarly apply, except as provided in this subpart, to the 
transportation of packaged hazardous materials on board barges.



Sec. 176.96  Materials of construction.

    Barges used to transport hazardous materials must be constructed of 
steel.

[Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52695, Dec. 21, 1990]



Sec. 176.97  Prohibition of dump scows.

    Dump scows are barges having cargo carrying compartments of the 
hopper type and fitted with a bottom dump or a side dump. This type of 
barge is prohibited from the carriage of any class of hazardous 
material.



Sec. 176.98  Stowage of hazardous materials on board barges.

    A material for which ``on deck'' stowage only is required by column 
(10) of the Hazardous Materials Table (Sec. 172.101 of this subchapter) 
may be stowed ``under deck'' on unmanned barges.

[Amdt. 176-8, 44 FR 23228, Apr. 19, 1979, as amended by Amdt. 176-30, 55 
FR 52695, Dec. 21, 1990]



Sec. 176.99  Permit requirements for certain hazardous materials.

    The permits required by Secs. 176.100 and 176.415 for loading, 
unloading, and handling Divisions 1.1 and 1.2 (explosives)

[[Page 708]]

materials, Division 1.5 materials, ammonium nitrate and certain ammonium 
nitrate mixtures and fertilizers must be obtained before these materials 
may be loaded on, unloaded from, or handled on board a barge or barge-
carrying vessel. However, a barge loaded with these materials being 
placed on, removed from, or handled on board a barge-carrying vessel is 
not subject to these permit requirements.

[Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52695, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66282, 
Dec. 20, 1991; 66 FR 45384, Aug. 28, 2001]



   Subpart G--Detailed Requirements for Class 1 (Explosive) Materials

    Source: Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52696, Dec. 21, 1990, unless otherwise 
noted.



Sec. 176.100  Permit for Divisions 1.1 and 1.2 (explosive) materials.

    Before Divisions 1.1 and 1.2 (explosive) materials may be discharged 
from, loaded on, handled or restowed on board a vessel at any place in 
the United States, the carrier must obtain a permit from the COTP in 
accordance with the procedures in 33 CFR 126.19. Exceptions to this 
permit requirement may be authorized by the COTP.

[Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52696, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 176-34, 
58 FR 51533, Oct. 1, 1993; 66 FR 45385, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 176.102  Supervisory detail.

    (a) Except as provided in paragraph (c) of this section, the COTP 
may assign a USCG supervisory detail to any vessel to supervise the 
loading, handling or unloading of Class 1 (explosive) materials.
    (b) The owner, agent, charterer, master or person in charge of the 
vessel, and all persons engaged in the handling, loading, unloading, and 
stowage of Class 1 (explosive) materials shall obey all orders that are 
given by the officer in charge of the supervisory detail.
    (c) If Class 1 (explosive) materials are loaded onto or unloaded 
from a vessel at a facility operated or controlled by the Department of 
Defense, the Commanding Officer of that facility may decline the USCG 
supervisory detail. Whenever the supervisory detail is declined, the 
Commanding Officer of the facility shall ensure compliance with the 
regulations in this part.



Sec. 176.104  Loading and unloading Class 1 (explosive) materials.

    (a) Packages of Class 1 (explosive) materials may not be thrown, 
dropped, rolled, dragged, or slid over each other or over a deck.
    (b) When Class 1 (explosive) materials are stowed in a hold below 
one in which any cargo is being handled, the hatch in the deck dividing 
the two holds must have all covers securely in place.
    (c) Drafts of Class 1 (explosive) materials must be handled in 
accordance with the following:
    (1) A draft may not be raised, lowered, or stopped by sudden 
application of power or brake.
    (2) A draft may not be released by tripping or freeing one side of 
the cargo-handling equipment and tumbling the Class 1 (explosive) 
materials off.
    (3) All drafts, beams, shackles, bridles, slings, and hoods must be 
manually freed before the winch takes control.
    (4) Slings may not be dragged from under a draft by winching except 
for the topmost layer in the hold when power removal is the only 
practical method and when the cargo cannot be toppled.
    (5) Handles or brackets on packages in a draft may not be used for 
slinging purposes.
    (d) A combination woven rope and wire sling or a sling that is 
formed by use of an open hook may not be used in handling Class 1 
(explosive) materials.
    (e) Only a safety hook or a hook that has been closed by wire may be 
used in handling drafts of Class 1 (explosive) materials.
    (f) Wire rope or wire rope assemblies, including splices and 
fittings, used in handling Class 1 (explosive) materials must be 
unpainted and kept bare to permit inspection of their safe working 
condition. A mechanical end fitting (pressed fitting) may be used in 
place of a eye splice, if the efficiency of the mechanical end fitting 
is at least equal

[[Page 709]]

to the efficiency of an eye splice prepared as prescribed in 29 CFR 
1918.51(c)(1).
    (g) Packages of Division 1.1 and 1.2 materials that are not part of 
a palletized unit must be loaded and unloaded from a vessel using a 
chute, conveyor or a mechanical hoist and a pallet, skipboard, tray or 
pie plate fitted with a cargo net or sideboards.
    (h) Packages of Division 1.1 and 1.2 (explosive) materials must be 
loaded or unloaded in accordance with the following:
    (1) A cargo net with a pallet, skipboard, tray, or pie plate, must 
be loaded so that no more than a minimum displacement of packages occurs 
when it is lifted.
    (2) A cargo net must completely encompass the bottom and sides of 
the draft. The mesh of the cargo net must be of a size and strength that 
will prevent a package in the draft from passing through the net.
    (3) When a tray is used in handling packages, no package may extend 
more than one-third its vertical dimension above the sideboard of the 
tray.
    (i) A landing mat must be used when a draft of nonpalletized 
Division 1.1 or 1.2 (explosive) materials is deposited on deck. The 
landing mat must have dimensions of at least l m (3 feet) wide, 2 m (7 
feet) long, and 10 cm (3.9 inches) thick, and be made of woven hemp, 
sisal, or similar fiber, or foam rubber, polyurethane or similar 
resilient material.
    (j) In addition to the other requirements of this section, packages 
of Division 1.1 and 1.2 (explosive) materials must be handled in 
accordance with the following:
    (1) Packages may not be loaded or unloaded through a hatch at the 
same time that other cargo is being handled in any hold served by that 
hatch.
    (2) Packages may not be loaded or unloaded from the same hatch by 
using two pieces of cargo equipment unless the equipment is positioned 
at the forward and aft ends of the hatch.
    (3) Packages may not be lifted over any hazardous materials.
    (4) The height of any structure, equipment, or load on a deck over 
which packages must be lifted may not be higher than the hatch coaming 
or bulwark, or 1 m (3 feet), whichever is greater.
    (k) Unpackaged explosive devices may not be handled by their lifting 
lugs or suspension lugs.
    (l) A chute may not be used when loading or unloading Class 1 
(explosive) materials in compatibility group A or B.

[Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52696, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 176-40, 
61 FR 27175, May 30, 1996; 65 FR 58630, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45384, 
45385, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 176.108  Supervision of Class 1 (explosive) materials during loading, unloading, handling and stowage.

    (a) During the loading, unloading, handling and stowage of Class 1 
(explosive) materials, a responsible person shall be in constant 
attendance during the entire operation to direct the loading, unloading, 
handling and stowage of Class 1 (explosive) materials, including the 
preparation of the holds. The responsible person must be aware of the 
hazards involved and the steps to be taken in an emergency, and must 
maintain sufficient contact with the master to ensure proper steps are 
taken in an emergency.
    (b) Each person involved in the handling of Class 1 (explosive) 
materials on a vessel shall obey the orders of the responsible person.
    (c) The responsible person must inspect all cargo-handling equipment 
to determine that it is in safe operating condition before it is used to 
handle Class 1 (explosive) materials.

                                 Stowage



Sec. 176.112  Applicability.

    The provisions of Secs. 176.116(e), 176,118, and 176.120 of this 
subpart do not apply to Division 1.4 (explosive) materials, 
compatibility group S. Such materials may be stowed together with all 
other Class 1 (explosive) materials except those of compatibility group 
A or L. They must be segregated from other hazardous materials in 
accordance with table 176.83(b) of this part.

[Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52696, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 66 FR 45384, 
Aug. 28, 2001]

[[Page 710]]



Sec. 176.116  General stowage conditions for Class 1 (explosive) materials.

    (a) Heat and sources of ignition: (1) Class 1 (explosive) materials 
must be stowed in a cool part of the ship and must be kept as cool as 
practicable while on board. Stowage must be well away from all sources 
of heat, including steam pipes, heating coils, sparks, and flame.
    (2) Except where the consignment of Class 1 (explosive) materials 
consists only of explosive articles, the wearing of shoes or boots with 
unprotected metal nails, heels, or tips of any kind is prohibited.
    (b) Wetness: (1) Spaces where Class 1 (explosive) materials are 
stowed below deck must be dry. In the event of the contents of packages 
being affected by water when on board immediate advice must be sought 
from the shippers; pending this advice handling of the packages must be 
avoided.
    (2) Bilges and bilge sections must be examined and any residue of 
previous cargo removed before Class 1 materials (explosive) are loaded 
onto the vessel.
    (c) Security: All compartments, magazines, and transport units 
containing Class 1 (explosive) materials must be locked or suitably 
secured in order to prevent unauthorized access.
    (d) Secure stowage: Class 1 (explosive) materials must be securely 
stowed to prevent movement in transit; where necessary, precautions must 
be taken to prevent cargo sliding down between the frames at the ship's 
sides.
    (e) Separation from accommodation spaces and machinery spaces: (1) 
Class 1 (explosive) materials must be stowed as far away as practicable 
from any accommodation spaces or any machinery space and may not be 
stowed directly above or below such a space. The requirements in 
paragraphs (e)(2) through (e)(4) of this section are minimum 
requirements in addition to the applicable requirements of 46 CFR 
chapter I. Where the requirements of this subpart are less stringent 
than those of 46 CFR chapter I, the 46 CFR chapter I requirements must 
be satisfied for ships to which they are applicable.
    (2) There must be a permanent A Class steel bulkhead between any 
accommodation space and any compartment containing Class 1 (explosive) 
materials. Division 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, or 1.5 materials may not be stowed 
within 3 m (10 feet) of this bulkhead; in the decks immediately above or 
below an accommodation space they must be stowed at least 3 m (10 feet) 
from the line of this bulkhead projected vertically.
    (3) There must be a permanent A Class steel bulkhead between a 
compartment containing Class 1 (explosive) materials and any machinery 
space. Class 1 (explosive) materials, except those in Division 1.4 
(explosive), may not be stowed within 3 m (10 feet) of this bulkhead; 
and in the decks above or below the machinery space they must be stowed 
at least 3 m (10 feet) from the line of this bulkhead projected 
vertically. In addition to this separation, there must be insulation to 
Class A60 standard as defined in 46 CFR 72.05-10(a)(1) if the machinery 
space is one of Category `A' unless the only Class 1 (explosive) 
materials carried are in Division 1.4S (explosive).
    (4) Where Class 1 (explosive) materials are stowed away from 
bulkheads bounding any accommodation space or machinery space, the 
intervening space may be filled with cargo that is not readily 
combustible.

[Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52696, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 66 FR 45384, 
45385, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 176.118  Electrical requirement.

    (a) Electrical equipment and cables installed in compartments in 
which Class 1 (explosive) materials are stowed which do not need to be 
energized during the voyage must be isolated from the supply so that no 
part of the circuit within the compartment is energized. The method of 
isolation may be by withdrawal of fuses, opening of switches or circuit 
breakers, or disconnection from bus bars. The means, or access to the 
means, of disconnection/reconnection must be secured by a locked padlock 
under the control of a responsible person.
    (b) Electrical equipment and cables in a cargo space in which Class 
1 (explosive) materials are stowed which are energized during the voyage 
for the safe operation of the ship must meet the requirements of 
subchapter J of 46

[[Page 711]]

CFR chapter I. Before Class 1 (explosive) materials are loaded aboard a 
vessel, all cables must be tested by a skilled person to ensure that 
they are safe and to determine satisfactory grounding, insulation 
resistance, and continuity of the cable cores, metal sheathing or 
armoring.
    (c) All Class 1 (explosive) materials must be stowed in a safe 
position relative to electrical equipment and cables. Additional 
physical protection must be provided where necessary to minimize 
possible damage to the electrical equipment or cables, especially during 
loading and unloading.
    (d) Cable joints in the compartments must be enclosed in metal-clad 
junction boxes.
    (e) All lighting equipment and cables must be of the fixed type, and 
must meet the relevant inspection, test, and installation standards of 
46 CFR chapter I, subchapter J.

[Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52696, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 176-34, 
58 FR 51533, Oct. 1, 1993]



Sec. 176.120  Lightning protection.

    A lightning conductor grounded to the sea must be provided on any 
mast or similar structure on a vessel on which Class 1 (explosive) 
materials are stowed unless effective electrical bonding is provided 
between the sea and the mast or structure from its extremity and 
throughout to the main body of the hull structure. (Steel masts in ships 
of all welded construction comply with this requirement).



Sec. 176.122  Stowage arrangements under deck.

    When stowed under deck, Class 1 (explosive) materials must be in 
conformance with one of the stowage arrangements described in 
Secs. 176.124 through 176.136 of this subpart.



Sec. 176.124  Ordinary stowage.

    (a) Ordinary stowage is authorized for most explosive articles 
carried by vessel. The exceptions are those for which this subpart 
prescribes ``magazine'' or ``special'' stowage.
    (b) Class 1 (explosive) materials requiring ordinary stowage must be 
stowed in accordance with Sec. 176.116 of this subpart.



Sec. 176.128  Magazine stowage, general.

    (a) Magazine stowage is sub-divided into three different types of 
magazines designated by the letters A, B, and C. A magazine may be a 
fixed structure in the vessel, a closed freight container, or a portable 
magazine unit. Freight containers, portable magazines, and vehicles must 
be properly secured in position. Magazines may be positioned in any part 
of the vessel conforming to the general stowage conditions for Class 1 
(explosive) materials, except magazines which are fixed structures must 
be constructed in a location in which their doors, where fitted, are 
easily accessible.
    (b) Magazine stowage is required for all explosive substances, 
except ``Explosive Substances, n.o.s.'' in compatibility groups G, L, or 
S. Magazine stowage type A is required for those substances which must 
be kept clear of steelwork. All other explosive substances must be given 
magazine stowage type B, except those in compatibility group A for which 
magazine stowage type C is prescribed.
    (c) Magazine stowage type B is required for Charges, propelling, for 
cannon, UN 0279, UN 0414, and UN 0242; and Charges, supplementary, 
explosive, UN 0600, in compatibility group C or D. Magazine stowage type 
C is required for detonators and similar articles in divisions and 
compatibility group 1.1B and 1.2B (explosive).

[Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52696, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 66 FR 33438, 
June 21, 2001; 66 FR 45384, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 61015, Sept. 27, 2002]



Sec. 176.130  Magazine stowage Type A.

    (a) In addition to protecting the Class 1 (explosive) materials and 
preventing unauthorized access, magazine stowage type A guards against 
friction between any spilled contents of packages and the vessel's sides 
and bulkheads.
    (b) Class 1 (explosive) materials requiring magazine stowage type A 
must be stowed in a magazine which is tightly sheathed with wood on its 
inner sides and floor.
    (c) When utilized as part of the magazine structure, the vessel's 
sides and bulkheads must be clean, free from

[[Page 712]]

rust or scale, and protected by battening or sweatboards spaced not more 
than 150 mm (6 inches) apart. All stanchions and other unprotected 
structural members must be similarly clean and battened. The underside 
of the deck above the magazine must be clean and free of rust and scale, 
but need not be battened.
    (d) The top of the stow within the magazine must be at least 30 cm 
(12 inches) from the underside of the deck above.
    (e) A type A magazine constructed in the square of a cargo space may 
not be loaded from the top.
    (f) When other Class 1 (explosive) materials are stowed with Class 1 
(explosive) materials for which magazine stowage type A is required, 
they or their packagings may have no exposed external parts made of 
ferrous metal or aluminum alloy.



Sec. 176.132  Magazine stowage Type B.

    (a) Magazine stowage type B is the same as magazine stowage type A 
as prescribed in Sec. 176.130 of this part, except:
    (1) The floor need not be tightly sheathed with wood but must be 
sparred or protected by wooden pallets or dunnage; and
    (2) Battening of the vessel's sides, bulkheads, and stanchions is 
not required.
    (b) A compartment may be used for magazine stowage type B without a 
magazine structure provided that:
    (1) The Class 1 (explosive) materials are stowed on wooden gratings, 
pallets, or dunnage, directly on the deck and not on other cargo;
    (2) Other cargo stowed in the same compartment is not readily 
combustible material; and
    (3) The position of the stowage is such that there is direct access 
to the hatchway.
    (c) Class 1 (explosive) materials and other cargo in the same 
compartment must be secured to eliminate the possibility of significant 
movement. Where an entire deck is used as a magazine, the stowage must 
be so arranged that the Class 1 (explosive) materials stowed therein 
will be removed from the ship before working any cargo in any decks 
above or below the space in the same hatch.

[Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52696, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66282, 
Dec. 20, 1991]



Sec. 176.133  Magazine stowage Type C.

    The construction requirements for magazine stowage type C are the 
same as for magazine stowage Type B as prescribed in Sec. 176.132 of 
this part, except that the magazine must be located as near as 
practicable to the centerline of the vessel and must not be closer to 
the vessel's side than a distance equal to one-eighth of the vessel's 
beam or 2.5 m (8.2 feet), whichever is less.

[Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52696, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 66 FR 45185, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 176.134  Vehicles.

    Closed vehicles may be used to transport Class 1 (explosive) 
materials requiring magazine stowage when carried by vessel if they meet 
the requirements of the appropriate magazine stowage type. See 
Sec. 176.168 of this subpart for additional requirements relating to the 
transport of Class 1 (explosive) materials in vehicles.



Sec. 176.136  Special stowage.

    (a) Special stowage is required for certain articles presenting both 
explosive and chemical hazards, such as smoke or lachrymatory 
(compatibility group G or H), toxic (compatibility group K), or 
substances and articles which present a special risk (compatibility 
group L). Except as permitted in paragraph (c) of this section, Class 1 
(explosive) materials requiring special stowage must be stowed on deck 
unless such stowage is impracticable and the COTP authorizes special 
stowage below deck.
    (b) Class 1 (explosive) materials for which special stowage is 
required must be stowed as far away as practicable from living 
accommodation, and working areas, and may not be overstowed. Steel 
portable magazines and freight containers in which such Class 1 
(explosive) materials are stowed may not be located closer to the 
vessel's side than a distance equal to one-eighth of the vessel's beam 
or 2.5 m (8.2 feet), whichever is less.

[[Page 713]]

    (c) Explosive articles having UN number, UN 0015, UN 0016, UN 0018, 
UN 0019, UN 0301, or UN 0303 may be given ordinary stowage in a lower 
hold or 'tween deck. Other Class 1 (explosive) materials in 
compatibility groups G and H may be in open stowage out to the ship's 
side on a floodable lower hold or deep tank in such a position that 
other cargo cannot be contaminated by leakage; in all other cases such 
Class 1 (explosive) materials must be stowed in steel portable magazines 
or in freight containers. If a freight container is used for this 
purpose, the floor of the freight container must be leakproof; for 
example, an all-metal container may be used and a fillet of cement or 
other material worked across the bottom of the door opening.
    (d) Class 1 (explosive) materials stowed in one compartment may not 
be of more than one compatibility group, except the COTP may allow Class 
1 (explosive) materials of compatibility groups G and H in separate 
steel portable magazines to be stowed in the same compartment, not less 
than 3 m (10 feet) apart.
    (e) Class 1 (explosive) materials in compatibility groups K and L 
must be stowed in a steel magazine regardless of the stowage position in 
the vessel.

[Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52696, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66282, 
Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 176-38, 60 FR 49111, Sept. 21, 1995; 66 FR 33438, 
June 21, 2001; 66 FR 45185, AUg. 28, 2001]



Sec. 176.137  Portable magazine.

    (a) Each portable magazine used for the stowage of Class 1 
(explosive) materials on board vessels must meet the following 
requirements:
    (1) It must be weather-tight, constructed of wood or metal lined 
with wood at least 2 cm (0.787 inch) thick, and with a capacity of no 
more than 3.1 cubic m (110 cubic feet).
    (2) All inner surfaces must be smooth and free of any protruding 
nails, screws or other projections.
    (3) If constructed of wood, a portable magazine must be framed of 
nominal 5 cm x 10 cm (2x4 inch) lumber, and sheathed with nominal 20 mm 
(0.787 inch) thick boards or plywood.
    (4) When constructed of metal, the metal must be not less than 3.2 
mm (0.126 inch) thick.
    (5) Runners, bearers, or skids must be provided to elevate the 
magazine at least 10 cm (3.9 inches) from the deck. Padeyes, ring bolts, 
or other suitable means must be provided for securing.
    (6) If the portable magazine has a door or hinged cover, the door or 
cover must have a strong hasp and padlock or equally effective means of 
securing.
    (7) The portable magazine must be marked on its top and four sides, 
in letters at least 8 cm (3 inches) high, as follows:

    EXPLOSIVES--HANDLE CAREFULLY--KEEP LIGHTS AND FIRE AWAY.

    (b) A portable magazine which meets the requirements for a type 2 or 
type 3 magazine under 27 CFR part 55 subpart K may be used for the 
stowage of Class 1 (explosive) materials on board vessels.
    (c) A portable magazine with a capacity exceeding 3.1 m\3\ (110 
cubic feet) may be used for the stowage of Class 1 (explosive) materials 
under such construction, handling, and stowage requirements as the COTP 
approves.

[Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52696, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 66 FR 45185, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 176.138  Deck stowage.

    (a) Class 1 (explosive) materials stowed on deck must be carried as 
close to the vessel's centerline as practicable.
    (b) Class 1 (explosive) materials may not be stowed within a 
horizontal distance of 6 m (20 feet) from any fire, machinery exhaust, 
galley uptake, locker used for combustible stores, or other potential 
sources of ignition. They must be clear of walkways and cargo working 
areas, fire hydrants, steam pipes, and means of access; away from all 
other facilities necessary for the safe working of the vessel, and not 
less than a horizontal distance of 8 m (26 feet) from the bridge, 
accommodation areas, and lifesaving appliances.
    (c) Where vessels are fitted with container fastening arrangements, 
freight containers containing Class 1 (explosive) materials may be 
overstowed by containers of compatible Class 1 (explosive) materials or 
non-hazardous cargo. Where vessels are not fitted with container 
fastening arrangements, freight

[[Page 714]]

containers loaded with Class 1 (explosive) materials may be stowed only 
on the bottom tier of the stowage.

                               Segregation



Sec. 176.140  Segregation from other classes of hazardous materials.

    (a) Class 1 (explosive) materials must be segregated from other 
packaged hazardous materials in accordance with Sec. 176.83.
    (b) Class 1 (explosive) materials must be segregated from bulk solid 
dangerous cargoes in accordance with the General Introduction to the 
IMDG Code. Notwithstanding Sec. 176.83(b), ammonium nitrate and sodium 
nitrate may be stowed together with blasting explosives, except those 
containing chlorates, provided the mixed stowage is treated as blasting 
explosives (see Sec. 176.410(e)).



Sec. 176.142  Hazardous materials of extreme flammability.

    (a) Except as allowed by paragraph (b) of this section, certain 
hazardous materials of extreme flammability may not be transported in a 
vessel carrying Class 1 (explosive) materials. This prohibition applies 
to the following liquid hazardous materials:


Carbon disulfide.................  UN1131.........  Class 3
Diethylzinc......................  UN1366.........  Division 4.2
Dimethylzinc.....................  UN1370.........  Division 4.2
Magnesium alkyls.................  UN3053.........  Division 4.2
Methyl phosphonous dichloride,     NA2845.........  Division 6.1
 pyrophoric liquid.
Nickel carbonyl..................  UN1259.........  Division 6.1
Pyrophoric liquid, inorganic,      UN3194.........  Division 4.2
 n.o.s..
Pyrophoric liquids, organic,       UN2845.........  Division 4.2
 n.o.s..
Pyrophoric organometallic          UN3203.........  Division 4.2
 compound, water-reactive, n.o.s..
 

    (b) The hazardous materials listed in paragraph (a) of this section 
may be transported in a vessel carrying the following Class 1 
(explosive) materials as cargo:
    (1) Division 1.4 (explosive) materials, compatibility group S.
    (2) Explosive articles having the following proper shipping names 
and identification numbers (see column (4) of the Sec. 172.101 table) if 
designed for lifesaving purposes and their total net explosive mass 
(weight) does not exceed 50 kg (110 lbs) per vessel:
    (i) ARTICLES, PYROTECHNIC: UN Nos. 0428, 0429, 0430, 0431.
    (ii) CARTRIDGES, FLASH: UN Nos. 0049, 0050.
    (iii) CARTRIDGES, SIGNAL: UN Nos. 0054, 0312.
    (iv) SIGNAL DEVICES, HAND: UN No. 0191.
    (v) SIGNALS, DISTRESS: UN Nos. 0194, 0195.
    (vi) SIGNALS, SMOKE: UN Nos. 0196, 0197, 0313.
    (3) Class 1 (explosive) materials in compatibility groups C, D, and 
E if the total net explosive mass (weight) does not exceed 10 kg (22 
pounds) per vessel.
    (4) Explosive articles in compatibility group G, except fireworks 
and Class 1 (explosive) materials requiring special stowage if the total 
net explosive mass (weight) does not exceed 10 kg (22 pounds) per 
vessel.
    (c) When a vessel carrying Class 1 (explosive) materials allowed 
under paragraph (b) of this section also carries a hazardous material of 
extreme flammability, that hazardous material must be stowed in a part 
of the vessel as remote as practicable from the Class 1 (explosive) 
materials.

[Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52696, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 66 FR 33438, 
June 21, 2001; 66 FR 45384, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 176.144  Segregation of Class 1 (explosive) materials.

    (a) Except as provided in Sec. 176.145 of this subpart, Class 1 
(explosive) materials may be stowed within the same compartment, 
magazine, portable magazine, or transport unit as indicated in table 
176.144(a).

[[Page 715]]



        Table 176.144(a)--Authorized Mixed Stowage for Explosives
 [An ``X'' indicates that explosives in the two different compatibility
 groups reflected by the location of the ``X'' may not be stowed in the
         same compartment, portable magazine, or transport unit]
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Compatibility
     groups       A    B    C    D    E    F   G   H   J   K   L   N   S
------------------------------------------------------------------------
A                     X    X    X    X    X   X   X   X   X   X   X   X
B                X         X    X    X    X   X   X   X   X   X   X
C                X    X                   X   1   X   X   X   X
D                X    X                   X   1   X   X   X   X
E                X    X                   X   1   X   X   X   X
F                X    X    X    X    X        X   X   X   X   X   X
G                X    X    1    1    1    X       X   X   X   X   X
H                X    X    X    X    X    X   X       X   X   X   X
J                X    X    X    X    X    X   X   X       X   X   X
K                X    X    X    X    X    X   X   X   X       X   X
L                X    X    X    X    X    X   X   X   X   X   2   X   X
N                X    X                   X   X   X   X   X   X
S                X                                            X
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Notes: 1. Explosive articles in compatibility group G, other than
  fireworks and those requiring special stowage, may be stowed with
  articles of compatibility groups C, D, and E, provided no explosive
  substances are carried in the same compartment, portable magazine or
  transport unit.
2. Explosives in compatibility group L may only be stowed in the same
  compartment, magazine or transport unit with identical explosives
  within compatibility group L.

    (b) Where Class 1 (explosive) materials of different compatibility 
groups are allowed to be stowed in the same compartment, magazine, 
portable magazine, or transport unit, the stowage arrangements must 
conform to the most stringent requirements for the entire load.
    (c) Where a mixed load of Class 1 (explosive) materials of different 
hazard divisions and/or stowage arrangements is carried within a 
compartment, magazine, or transport unit, the entire load must be 
treated as belonging to the hazard division having the greatest hazard. 
(For example, if a load of Division 1.1 (explosive) materials is mixed 
with Division 1.3 (explosive) materials, the load is treated as a 
Division 1.1 (explosive) material as defined in Sec. 173.50(b) of this 
subchapter and the stowage must conform to the most stringent 
requirements for the entire load).
    (d) If some of the Class 1 (explosive) materials in a stowage 
mixture require magazine stowage, Class 1 (explosive) materials 
requiring ordinary stowage may be stowed in the same magazine. When the 
magazine is used for substances requiring Type A stowage, the other 
Class 1 (explosive) materials stowed therein must have no exposed parts 
of any ferrous metal or aluminum alloy, unless separated by a partition.
    (e) Segregation on deck: When Class 1 (explosive) materials in 
different compatibility groups are carried on deck, they must be stored 
not less than 6 m (20 feet) apart unless they are allowed under table 
176.144(a) to be stowed in the same compartment, magazine, or transport 
unit.
    (f) On a barge used to transfer class 1 (explosive) materials from a 
waterfront facility to a vessel at an explosives anchorage (or from the 
vessel to the water front facility), if compliance with paragraph (e) of 
this section is not practicable, a sandbag barrier at least 0.6 m (2 
feet) in thickness may be substituted for the 6 m (20 feet) separation.

[Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52696, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 66 FR 45384, 
45385, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 176.145  Segregation in single hold vessels.

    (a) On board a vessel having a single cargo hold, Class 1 
(explosive) materials in hazard division/compatibility group 1.1B and 
1.2B may be stowed in the same compartment with substances of 
compatibility group D, provided:
    (1) The net explosive weight of the compatibility group B explosive 
does not exceed 50 kg (110 pounds); and
    (2) The compatibility group B explosive materials are stowed in a 
steel portable magazine that is stowed at least 6 m (20 feet) from the 
compatibility group D substances.
    (b) Division/compatibility group 1.4B (explosive) materials may be 
stowed in the same compartment with substances

[[Page 716]]

of compatibility group D provided the Class 1 (explosive) materials of 
different compatibility groups are separated by either a distance of at 
least 6 m (20 feet) or by a steel partition.

[Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52696, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 66 FR 45384, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 176.146  Segregation from non-hazardous materials.

    (a) Except as required by paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section, 
Class 1 (explosive) materials need not be segregated from other cargo of 
a non-dangerous nature.
    (b) Mail, baggage, and personal and household effects may not be 
stowed in the same compartment as, or in compartments immediately above 
or below, Class 1 (explosive) materials other than those in 
compatibility group S.
    (c) Where Class 1 (explosive) materials are stowed against an 
intervening bulkhead, any mail on the other side of the bulkhead must be 
stowed away from it.
    (d) In order to avoid contamination:
    (1) An explosive substance or article which has a secondary POISON 
hazard label must be stowed ``separated from'' all foodstuffs, except 
when such materials are stowed in separate closed transport units, the 
requirements for ``away from'' segregation apply.
    (2) An explosive substance or article which has a secondary 
CORROSIVE hazard label must be stowed ``away from'' foodstuffs.

[Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52696, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66282, 
Dec. 20, 1991]

                Precautions During Loading and Unloading



Sec. 176.148  Artificial lighting.

    Electric lights, except arc lights, are the only form of artificial 
lighting permitted when loading and unloading Class 1 (explosive) 
materials.



Sec. 176.150  Radio and radar.

    (a) Except as provided in paragraph (b) of this section, when Class 
1 (explosive) materials (other than explosive articles in Division 1.4 
[explosive] or any explosive substance) are loaded, unloaded, or 
handled, the responsible person must ensure that all sources of 
electromagnetic radiation such as radio and radar transmitters are 
deenergized by opening the main switches controlling the sources and 
tagging them to warn that the devices are not to be energized until 
loading or unloading has ceased.
    (b) During the loading or unloading of all explosive articles 
(except those in Division 1.4 [explosive]), no radio or radar 
transmitter may be used within 50 m (164 feet) of such articles except 
for VHF transmitters the power output of which does not exceed 25 watts 
and of which no part of the antenna system is within 2 m (7 feet) of the 
Class 1 (explosive) materials.
    (c) Explosive articles which are sensitive to electromagnetic 
radiation from external sources must be stowed at a safe distance from 
the vessel's radio cabin, receiving and transmitting apparatus radio 
antenna or lead-in, and radar installation, with due regard to the 
character of the vessel and the degree of screening-off of the explosive 
articles.

[Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52696, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 66 FR 45384, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 176.154  Fueling (bunkering).

    (a) Class 1 (explosive) materials, except those in compatibility 
group S, may not be loaded or unloaded when fueling (bunkering) is in 
progress except with the prior authorization of the COTP, and under 
conditions prescribed by that officer.
    (b) Vessels containing Class 1 (explosive) materials may not be 
fueled (bunkered) with the hatches open unless authorized by the COTP.



Sec. 176.156  Defective packages.

    (a) No leaking, broken, or otherwise defective package containing 
Class 1 (explosive) materials, including packages which have been 
adversely affected by moisture, may be accepted for shipment. The master 
or person in charge of a vessel on which there is a defective package 
containing Class 1 (explosive) materials must seek advice from the 
shipper concerning withdrawal, repair, or replacement. No repair of 
damaged or defective package containing Class 1 (explosive) materials 
may be performed on board a vessel.

[[Page 717]]

    (b) No Class 1 (explosive) material, which for any reason has 
deteriorated or undergone a change of condition that increases the 
hazard attendant upon its conveyance or handling, may be moved in the 
port area, except as directed by the COTP.
    (c) If any package of Class 1 (explosive) materials, or seal of a 
package of Class 1 (explosive) materials, appears to be damaged, that 
package must be set aside for examination and repair or otherwise 
legally disposed of as directed by the shipper.
    (d) If any Class 1 (explosive) materials are spilled or released 
from a package, the responsible person must ensure that an appropriate 
emergency response is undertaken in accordance with the emergency 
response information required under Sec. 172.602 of this subchapter. The 
master of the vessel must report each incident involving spillage or 
release of Class 1 (explosive) materials to the COTP as soon as 
practicable.

[Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52696, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66282, 
Dec. 20, 1991]



Sec. 176.160  Protection against weather.

    Any person loading or unloading packages containing Class 1 
(explosive) materials shall take adequate measures to prevent these 
packages from becoming wet.



Sec. 176.162  Security.

    A responsible person must be present at all times when the hatches 
of spaces containing Class 1 (explosive) materials are open. No 
unauthorized person may be permitted to access spaces in which Class 1 
(explosive) materials are stowed. Magazines must be secured against 
unauthorized entry when loading has been completed, or when loading or 
unloading is stopped. Packages containing Class 1 (explosive) materials 
may not be opened on board ship.



Sec. 176.164  Fire precautions and firefighting.

    (a) Matches, lighters, fire, and other ignition sources are 
prohibited on and near any vessel on which Class 1 (explosive) materials 
are being loaded, unloaded, or handled except in places designated by 
the master or the COTP.
    (b) A fire hose of sufficient length to reach every part of the 
loading area with an effective stream of water must be laid and 
connected to the water main, ready for immediate use.
    (c) No repair work may be carried out in a cargo space containing 
Class 1 (explosive) materials other than those of Division 1.4 
(explosive). No welding, burning, cutting, or riveting operations 
involving the use of fire, flame, spark, or arc-producing equipment may 
be conducted on board except in an emergency; and, if in port, with the 
consent of the COTP.
    (d) Each compartment, including a closed vehicle deck space, which 
contains Class 1 (explosive) materials must be provided with a fixed 
fire extinguishing system. Each adjacent cargo compartment either must 
be protected by a fixed fire extinguishing installation or must be 
accessible for firefighting operations.
    (e) A vessel must have two sets of breathing apparatus and a power-
operated fire pump, which, together with its source of power and sea 
connections, must be located outside the machinery space.

[Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52696, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 66 FR 45384, 
Aug. 28, 2001]

                            Passenger Vessels



Sec. 176.166  Transport of Class 1 (explosive) materials on passenger vessels.

    (a) Only the following Class 1 (explosive) materials may be 
transported as cargo on passenger vessels:
    (1) Division 1.4 (explosive) materials, compatibility group S.
    (2) Explosive articles designed for lifesaving purposes as 
identified in Sec. 176.142(b)(2), if the total net explosive mass 
(weight) does not exceed 50 kg (110 pounds).
    (3) Class 1 (explosive) materials in compatibility groups C, D, and 
E, if the total net explosive mass (weight) does not exceed 10 kg (22 
pounds) per vessel.
    (4) Articles in compatibility group G other than those requiring 
special stowage, if the total net explosive mass (weight) does not 
exceed 10 kg (22 pounds) per vessel.

[[Page 718]]

    (5) Articles in compatibility group B, if the total net explosive 
mass (weight) does not exceed 5 kg (11 pounds).
    (b) Class 1 (explosive) materials which may be carried on passenger 
vessels are identified in column (10) of the Sec. 172.101 table. They 
must be stowed in accordance with table 176.166(b).

                                               Table 176.166(b)--Stowage Arrangements in Passenger Vessels
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                       Goods shipped under a specific proper shipping name
                                                                        --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
         Class/Division          Samples, explosive     Goods, N.O.S.                                  Compatibility group
                                                           Class 1      --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                           A      B      C      D     E     F     G     H     J     K     L     N     S
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.1............................  d.................  d.................  c....  e....  e....  e...  e...  c...  e...  --..  c...  --..  c...  --..  --
1.2............................  d.................  d.................  --...  e....  e....  e...  e...  c...  e...  c...  c...  c...  c...  --..  --
1.3............................  d.................  d.................  --...  --...  e....  e...  --..  c...  e...  c...  c...  c...  c...  --..  --
1.4............................  d.................  d.................  --...  b....  b....  b...  b...  c...  b...  --..  --..  --..  --..  --..  a
1.5............................  d.................  d.................  --...  --...  --...  e...  --..  --..  --..  --..  --..  --..  --..  --..  --
1.6............................  d.................  d.................  --...  --...  --...  --..  --..  --..  --..  --..  --..  --..  --..  e...  --
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
a--As for cargo ships, on deck or under deck.
b--As for cargo ships, on deck or under deck, in portable magazines only.
c--Prohibited.
d--As specified by the Associate Administrator, or the competent authority of the country in which the Class 1 (explosive) materials are loaded on the
  vessel.
e--In containers or the like, on deck only.

    (c) Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph (a) of this section, 
a combination of the substances and articles listed in paragraphs (a)(1) 
through (a)(5) of this section may be transported on the same passenger 
vessel provided the total net explosive mass (weight) of the combination 
of Class 1 (explosive) materials carried does not exceed the smallest 
quantity specified for any one of the substances or articles in the 
combination.

[Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52696, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 65 FR 58630, 
Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45384, 45385, Aug. 28, 2001].

                  Transport Units and Shipborne Barges



Sec. 176.168  Transport of Class 1 (explosive) materials in vehicle spaces.

    (a) All transport vehicles and cargo must be properly secured.
    (b) All transport vehicles used for the carriage of Class 1 
(explosive) materials must be structurally serviceable as defined in 
Sec. 176.172(a)(2).
    (c) Vehicles used to transport Class 1 (explosive) materials must 
conform to the requirements in Secs. 177.834 and 177.835 of this 
subchapter.
    (d) Class 1 (explosive) materials which require special stowage must 
be transported in transport vehicles approved for the purpose by the 
Associate Administrator except that Class 1 (explosive) materials in 
compatibility group G or H may be carried in steel portable magazines or 
freight containers. Closed transport vehicles may be used as magazines; 
transport vehicles of other types may be used to transport Class 1 
(explosive) materials which require ordinary stowage.
    (e) Class 1 (explosive) materials of different compatibility groups 
may not be stowed in the same vehicle except as allowed in Sec. 176.144 
of this subpart.
    (f) Vehicles containing different Class 1 (explosive) materials 
require no segregation from each other, except that these materials may 
be carried together under the provisions of Sec. 176.144 of this 
subchapter. In all other instances, the vehicles must be ``separated 
from'' one another.
    (g) All transport vehicles used for the transport of Class 1 
(explosive) materials must have lashing arrangements for securing the 
vehicle on the ship and preventing the movement of the vehicle on its 
springs during the sea passage.
    (h) Where a portable magazine or closed freight container is carried 
on a chassis, twist locks or other suitable securing arrangements must 
be provided and made secure.

[Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52696, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 66 FR 45384, 
Aug. 28, 2001]

[[Page 719]]



Sec. 176.170  Transport of Class 1 (explosive) materials in freight containers.

    (a) When Class 1 (explosive) materials are stowed in a freight 
container, the freight container, for the purposes of this subpart, may 
be regarded as a magazine but not as a separate compartment.
    (b) Freight containers exceeding 6 m (20 feet) in length may not 
carry more than 5000 kg (11,023 pounds) net explosive weight of 
explosive substances, except explosive substances in Division 1.4.
    (c) Freight containers used to transport Class 1 (explosive) 
materials for which magazine stowage type A is required must have a 
floor consisting of tightly fitted wooden boards, plywood or equivalent 
non-metallic material, and a non-metallic lining.
    (d) Class 1 (explosive) materials of different compatibility groups 
may not be stowed within the same freight container except as allowed in 
Sec. 176.144 of this subpart.
    (e) On vessels, other than specially fitted container ships, freight 
containers containing Class 1 (explosive) materials must be stowed only 
in the lowest tier.
    (f) Freight containers carrying different Class 1 (explosive) 
materials require no segregation from each other, if the provisions of 
Sec. 176.144 of this subpart allow the Class 1 (explosive) materials to 
be carried together in the same compartment. In all other instances, the 
containers must be ``separated from'' one another in accordance with 
Sec. 176.83(f) of this part.
    (g) Freight containers carrying Class 1 (explosive) materials may 
not be handled on board a vessel with fork lift trucks unless approved 
by the COTP. This does not preclude the use of front-loading trucks 
using side-frame lifting equipment.

[Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52696, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66282, 
Dec. 20, 1991]



Sec. 176.172  Structural serviceability of freight containers and vehicles carrying Class 1 (explosive) materials on ships.

    (a) A freight container may not be offered for the carriage of Class 
1 (explosive) materials unless the container is structurally serviceable 
as evidenced by a current CSC (International Convention for Safe 
Containers) approval plate and verified by a detailed visual examination 
as follows:
    (1) Before a freight container or transport vehicle is packed with 
Class 1 (explosive) materials, it must be visually examined by the 
shipper to ensure it is structurally serviceable, free of any residue of 
previous cargo, and its interior walls and floors are free from 
protrusions.
    (2) Structurally serviceable means the freight container or the 
vehicle cannot have major defects in its structural components, such as 
top and bottom side rails, top and bottom end rails, door sill and 
header, floor cross members, corner posts, and corner fittings in a 
freight container. Major defects include--
    (i) Dents or bends in the structural members greater than 19 mm 
(0.75 inch) in depth, regardless of length;
    (ii) Cracks or breaks in structural members;
    (iii) More than one splice or an improper splice (such as a lapped 
splice) in top or bottom end rails or door headers;
    (iv) More than two splices in any one top or bottom side rail;
    (v) Any splice in a door sill or corner post;
    (vi) Door hinges and hardware that are seized, twisted, broken, 
missing, or otherwise inoperative;
    (vii) Gaskets and seals that do not seal; or
    (viii) For freight containers, any distortion of the overall 
configuration great enough to prevent proper alignment of handling 
equipment, mounting and securing chassis or vehicle, or insertion into 
ships' cells.
    (3) In addition, deterioration of any component of the freight 
container or vehicle, regardless of the material of construction, such 
as rusted-out metal in sidewalls or disintegrated fiberglass, is 
prohibited. Normal wear, however, including oxidation (rust), slight 
dents and scratches, and other damage that does not affect 
serviceability or the weather-tight integrity of the units, is not 
prohibited.
    (b) As used in paragraph (a) of this section, splice means any 
repair of a

[[Page 720]]

freight container main structural member which replaces material, except 
complete replacement of the member.
    (c) All shipments of Class 1 (explosive) materials except those in 
Division 1.4 (explosive) must be accompanied by a statement, which may 
appear on the shipping paper, certifying that the freight container or 
the vehicle is structurally serviceable as defined in paragraph (a)(2) 
of this section.

[Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52696, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 66 FR 45384, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 176.174  Transport of Class 1 (explosive) materials in shipborne barges.

    (a) Fixed magazines may be built within a shipboard barge. Portable 
magazines and freight containers may be used as magazines with a barge.
    (b) Shipborne barges may be used for the carriage of all types of 
Class 1 (explosive) materials. When carrying Class 1 (explosive) 
materials requiring special stowage, the following requirements apply:
    (1) Class 1 (explosive) materials in compatibility group G or H must 
be stowed in steel portable magazines or freight containers.
    (2) Class 1 (explosive) materials in compatibility group K or L must 
be stowed in steel portable magazines.
    (c) Class 1 (explosive) materials of different compatibility groups 
may not be stowed within the same shipborne barge unless under 
Sec. 176.144(b) of this subpart they are authorized to be stowed in the 
same compartment.

             Handling Class 1 (Explosive) Materials in Port



Sec. 176.176  Signals.

    When Class 1 (explosive) materials are being loaded, handled, or 
unloaded on a vessel, the vessel must exhibit the following signals:
    (a) By day, flag ``B'' (Bravo) of the international code of signals; 
and
    (b) By night, an all-round fixed red light.



Sec. 176.178  Mooring lines.

    (a) All lines used in mooring the vessel must be of sufficient 
strength, type, and number for the size of the vessel and local 
conditions.
    (b) While the vessel is moored or anchored in a port area, towing 
wires of adequate size and length must be properly secured to mooring 
bits at the bow and stern ready for immediate use with the towing eyes 
passed outboard and kept at about water level.
    (c) The mooring arrangements must be such that the vessel can be 
released quickly in an emergency.



Sec. 176.180  Watchkeeping.

    Whenever Class 1 (explosive) materials are on board a vessel in 
port, there must be sufficient crew on board to maintain a proper watch 
and to operate the propulsion and firefighting equipment in case of an 
emergency.



Sec. 176.182  Conditions for handling on board ship.

    (a) Weather conditions. Class 1 (explosive) materials may not be 
handled in weather conditions which may seriously increase the hazards 
presented by the Class 1 (explosive) materials. During electrical 
storms, cargo operations must be halted and all hatches containing Class 
1 (explosive) materials must be closed.
    (b) Darkness. Class 1 (explosive) materials may not be handled on 
board a vessel during the hours of darkness unless prior consent has 
been obtained from the COTP.
    (c) Lighting. The area where Class 1 (explosive) materials are 
handled, or where preparations are being made to handle Class 1 
(explosive) materials, must be illuminated with lighting that is 
sufficient to safely perform the handling operation.
    (d) Protective equipment. (1) A sufficient quantity of appropriate 
protective equipment must be provided for the personnel involved in 
handling Class 1 (explosive) materials.
    (2) The protective equipment must provide adequate protection 
against the hazards specific to the Class 1 (explosive) materials 
handled.
    (e) Intoxicated persons. No person under the influence of alcohol or 
drugs to such an extent that the person's judgment or behavior is 
impaired may participate in any operation involving the handling of 
Class 1 (explosive) materials. The master of the vessel must keep any 
such person clear of any areas

[[Page 721]]

where Class 1 (explosive) materials are being handled.
    (f) Smoking. (1) Smoking is prohibited on the vessel while Class 1 
(explosive) materials are being handled or stowed except in places 
designated by the master of the vessel.
    (2) Conspicuous notices prohibiting smoking must be posted and 
clearly visible at all locations where Class 1 (explosive) materials are 
handled or stored.
    (g) All hatches and cargo ports opening into a compartment in which 
Class 1 (explosive) materials are stowed must be kept closed except 
during loading and unloading of the compartment. After loading, hatches 
must be securely closed.



Sec. 176.184  Class 1 (explosive) materials of Compatibility Group L.

    Class 1 (explosive) materials in compatibility group L may not be 
handled in a port area without the special permission of, and subject to 
any special precautions required by, the COTP.



Sec. 176.190  Departure of vessel.

    When loading of Class 1 (explosive) materials is completed, the 
vessel must depart from the port area as soon as is reasonably 
practicable.



Sec. 176.192  Cargo handling equipment for freight containers carrying Class 1 (explosive) materials.

    (a) Except in an emergency, only cargo handling equipment that has 
been specifically designed or modified for the handling of freight 
containers may be used to load, unload, or handle freight containers 
containing Division 1.1 or 1.2 (explosive) materials.
    (b) The gross weight of a freight container containing Class 1 
(explosive) materials may not exceed the safe working load of the cargo 
handling equipment by which it is handled.

[Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52696, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 66 FR 45384, 
Aug. 28, 2001]

                            Magazine Vessels



Sec. 176.194  Stowage of Class 1 (explosive) materials on magazine vessels.

    (a) General. The requirements of this section are applicable to 
magazine vessels and are in addition to any other requirements in this 
subchapter.
    (b) Type vessel authorized. A single deck vessel with or without a 
house on deck is the only type vessel that may be used as a magazine 
vessel. A magazine vessel may not be moved while Class 1 (explosive) 
materials are on board.
    (c) Location of explosives. Division 1.1, 1.2, or 1.3 (explosive) 
materials, in excess of 2268 kg (5000 pounds), stored in any magazine 
vessel must be stowed below deck. No Class 1 (explosive) materials may 
be stowed on deck unless the vessel is fitted with a deck house having a 
stowage area which meets the requirements in this subpart for the 
stowage of Class 1 (explosive) materials. Detonators, detonator 
assemblies and boosters with detonators, Division 1.1 (explosive) may 
not be stored on the same magazine vessel with other Division 1.1, 1.2. 
and 1.3 (explosive) materials.
    (d) Class 1 (explosive) materials storage spaces. Any compartment on 
a magazine vessel used for the stowage of Class 1 (explosive) materials 
must be completely sealed with wood so as to provide a smooth interior 
surface. Each metal stanchion in the compartment must be boxed in the 
same manner. An overhead ceiling is not required when the overdeck is 
weather tight. All nail and bolt heads must be countersunk and any 
exposed metal must be covered with wood.
    (e) Initiating explosives, detonators and boosters with detonators. 
No explosive substance in Division 1.1, compatibility group A may be 
stowed in the same compartment with any other Class 1 (explosive) 
materials when there are explosive substances in Division 1.1 or 1.2 
(explosive) on the same magazine vessel. Detonators, detonator 
assemblies and boosters with detonators must be stowed at least 8 m (26 
feet) from any bulkhead forming a boundary of a compartment containing 
any other Class 1 (explosive) materials.
    (f) Dry storage spaces. A magazine vessel having a dry storage space 
capable of being used for any purpose whatsoever must have a cofferdam 
at least 61 cm (24 inches) wide fitted between the dry storage space and 
each adjacent

[[Page 722]]

compartment containing Class 1 (explosive) materials. The cofferdam must 
be constructed of wood or steel, formed by two tight athwartship 
bulkheads extending from the skin of the vessel to the overdeck. If the 
cofferdam extends to the weather deck, a watertight hatch must be fitted 
in the deck to provide access to the cofferdam.
    (g) Lighting. Non-sparking, battery-powered, self-contained electric 
lanterns or non-sparking hand flashlights are the only means of 
artificial light authorized.
    (h) Living quarters. Living quarters must be fitted on the inside 
with a non-combustible material approved by the Commandant, USCG. 
Bracketed ship's lamps are the only lighting fixtures authorized to be 
used in the living quarters. Any stove used for heating or cooking must 
be securely fastened and may not be mounted closer than 15 cm (5.9 
inches) to the deck or sides of the house. Any smoke pipe for the stove 
which passes through the roof of the house must be kept at least 8 cm (3 
inches) away from any woodwork. Each smoke pipe must be protected by a 
layer of non-combustible material approved by the Commandant, USCG, an 
air space of at least 2.54 cm (1 inch), and a metal collar of at least 
1.5 mm (0.059 inch) sheet secured only on the weather side of the roof. 
There may be no opening from any living quarters into any stowage 
compartment.
    (i) Storage of other hazardous materials. Magazine vessels having 
Class 1 (explosive) materials on board may not be used for the storage 
of any other hazardous material.
    (j) Magazine vessel's stores. Hazardous materials used as stores on 
board any magazine vessel must comply with the requirements of 46 CFR 
part 147.
    (k) Matches. Safety matches requiring a prepared surface for 
ignition are the only type of matches authorized to be possessed or used 
on board a magazine vessel. They must be kept in a metal box or can with 
a metal cover and stored in the custodian's living quarters.
    (l) Firearms. Firearms and ammunition (other than cargo) are not 
permitted on board a magazine vessel.
    (m) Fire extinguishing equipment. No Class 1 (explosive) materials 
may be loaded or stowed in, unloaded from, or handled on any magazine 
vessel unless four fire extinguishers that meet the requirements for 
Type A Size II or Type B Size III in 46 CFR part 95, subpart 95.50 are 
near and accessible to the magazines.
    (n) Supervision. A magazine vessel containing Class 1 (explosive) 
materials must be continuously attended by a custodian employed for that 
purpose by the vessel's owner.
    (o) Unauthorized persons on magazine vessels. The custodian of a 
magazine vessel shall prevent unauthorized persons from coming on board 
unless it is necessary to abate a hazard to human life or a substantial 
hazard to property.
    (p) Repacking of Class 1 (explosive) materials on board. No Class 1 
(explosive) materials may be repacked on board a magazine vessel. Broken 
or damaged packages must be handled in accordance with the requirements 
of Sec. 176.156. Packages requiring an emergency response must be 
handled in accordance with the emergency response information required 
under Sec. 172.602 of this subchapter.
    (q) Work boat. Each magazine vessel must be equipped with a work 
boat.
    (r) Life preservers. One approved personal flotation device must be 
available for each person employed on a magazine vessel.
    (s) Fenders. Each magazine vessel must be fitted with fenders in 
sufficient number and size to prevent any vessel tieing up alongside 
from coming in contact with the hull.

[Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52696, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 176-41, 
61 FR 51339, Oct. 1, 1996; 66 FR 45185, 45384, 45385, Aug. 28, 2001]



 Subpart H--Detailed Requirements for Class 2 (Compressed Gas) Materials

    Source: Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52704, Dec. 21, 1990, unless otherwise 
noted.



Sec. 176.200  General stowage requirements.

    (a) Each package of Class 2 (compressed gas) material being 
transported by vessel must be prevented from making direct contact with 
the vessel's

[[Page 723]]

deck, side, or bulwark by dunnage, shoring, or other effective means.
    (b) When cylinders of Class 2 (compressed gas) materials being 
transported by vessel are stowed in a horizontal position, each tier 
must be stowed in the cantlines of the tier below it, and the valves on 
cylinders in adjacent tiers must be at alternate ends of the stow. Each 
tier may be stepped back and the ends alternated in order to clear the 
flange. Lashing must be provided to prevent any movement.
    (c) When cylinders of Class 2 (compressed gas) materials being 
transported by vessel are stowed in a vertical position they must be 
stowed upright in a block and cribbed or boxed in with suitable dunnage. 
The box or crib must be dunnaged at least 10 cm (3.9 inches) off any 
metal deck. The cylinders in the box or crib must be braced to prevent 
any movement. The box or crib must be securely chocked and lashed to 
prevent any movement.
    (d) Any package containing Division 2.3 (poison gas) materials must 
be stowed separate from all foodstuffs.
    (e) Class 2 (compressed gas) materials may not be stowed ``on deck'' 
over a hold or compartment containing coal.
    (f) Class 2 (compressed gas) material must be kept as cool as 
practicable and be stowed away from all sources of heat and ignition.



Sec. 176.205  Under deck stowage requirements.

    (a) When a Class 2 (compressed gas) material is stowed below deck, 
it must be stowed in a mechanically ventilated cargo space with no 
source of artificial heat and clear of living quarters. No bulkhead or 
deck of that hold or compartment may be a common boundary with any 
boiler room, engine room, coal bunker, galley or boiler room uptake.
    (b) When Division 2.1 (flammable gas) materials are stowed below 
deck, they must be stowed in a hold or compartment which complies with 
paragraph (a) of this section and the following requirements:
    (1) Each hold or compartment must be ventilated.
    (2) Each hold or compartment must be equipped with an overhead water 
sprinkler system or fixed fire extinguishing system.
    (3) Each electrical power line in the hold or compartment must be 
protected by a strong metal covering to prevent crushing by cargo being 
stowed against it.
    (4) Except when fitted with electrical fixtures of the explosion-
proof type, each electrical circuit serving the hold or compartment must 
be disconnected from all sources of power. No circuit may be energized 
until the Division 2.1 (flammable gas) cargo and any vapors have been 
removed from the hold or compartment. Explosion-proof portable lighting 
may be used if the source of power is from electrical outlets outside 
the hold or compartment and above the weather deck.
    (5) Any opening in a common bulkhead of an adjacent hold or 
compartment must be securely closed off and made gas-tight, unless the 
adjacent hold or compartment is also used for the stowage of Division 
2.1 (flammable gas) materials.
    (6) Full and efficient hatch covers must be used. Tarpaulins, if 
fitted, must be protected by dunnaging before overstowing with any 
cargo. Each tarpaulin must be in one piece and free of rents, tears, and 
holes.
    (7) A fire screen must be fitted at the weather end of each vent 
duct leading from the hold or compartment. The fire screen must 
completely cover the open area. It must consist of two layers of 
corrosion-resistant metal wire of 20x20 mesh or finer, spaced not less 
than 1 cm (0.4 inch) or more than 4 cm (1.6 inches) apart. The screen 
may be removable if means for securing it in place when in service are 
provided.
    (8) The hold or compartment may not be fitted with any gooseneck 
type vent trunk head.
    (9) Any electrical apparatus located in the hold or compartment must 
be capable of being disconnected from its power source by a positive 
means located outside the hold or compartment.

[Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52704, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66282, 
Dec. 20, 1991]



Sec. 176.210  On deck stowage requirements.

    Cylinders of Class 2 (compressed gas) materials being transported by 
vessel

[[Page 724]]

must be protected from radiant heat, including the direct rays of the 
sun, by structural erections or awnings. A tarpaulin covering the 
cylinders is not acceptable if it comes in contact with them.

[Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52704, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 66 FR 45185, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 176.220  Smoking or open flame and posting of warning signs.

    (a) Smoking or the use of open flame is prohibited in any hold or 
compartment containing a Division 2.1 (flammable gas) material, near any 
Division 2.1 (flammable gas) material stowed on deck, or near any 
ventilator leading to a hold containing this material.
    (b) A sign carrying the legend:

 
 
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
                            FLAMMABLE VAPORS
                        KEEP LIGHTS AND FIRE AWAY
                               NO SMOKING
------------------------------------------------------------------------


must be conspicuously posted at each approach to an ``on deck'' Division 
2.1 (flammable gas) material stowage area and near each cargo hold 
ventilator leading to a hold containing this material. The sign must be 
painted on a white background using red letters. The letters may not be 
less than 8 cm (3 inches) high.



Sec. 176.225  Stowage of chlorine.

    Chlorine (UN 1017) must be stowed separate from copper or brass leaf 
sheets and from finely divided organic material.



Sec. 176.230  Stowage of Division 2.1 (flammable gas) materials.

    Division 2.1 (flammable gas) materials transported in Specification 
106A or 110A multi-unit car tanks must be stowed on deck only, and must 
be shaded from radiant heat.



Subpart I--Detailed Requirements for Class 3 (Flammable) and Combustible 
                            Liquid Materials

    Source: Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52705, Dec. 21, 1990, unless otherwise 
noted.



Sec. 176.305  General stowage requirements.

    (a) A Class 3 (flammable) or combustible liquid must be kept as cool 
as reasonably practicable and be stowed away from all sources of heat 
and ignition.
    (b) Except as otherwise provided in Sec. 176.76(g), a package 
containing a Class 3 (flammable) liquid and equipped with a vent or 
safety relief device must be stowed ``on deck'' only.
    (c) The following requirements apply to each hold or compartment in 
which any Class 3 (flammable) or combustible liquids are being 
transported:
    (1) The hold or compartment must be ventilated except that the 
stowage of non-bulk packages of Class 3 (flammable) liquids with a flash 
point above 23  deg.C (73  deg.F) (see 49 CFR 171.8 definitions) may be 
in non-ventilated holds.
    (2) Stowage of a Class 3 (flammable) or combustible liquid within 6 
m (20 feet) of a bulkhead which forms a boundary or deck of a boiler 
room, engine room, coal bunker, galley, or boiler room uptake is not 
permitted. If the amount of the liquid to be stowed in a hold will not 
permit compliance with the requirement for a 6 m (20 foot) separation, 
less separation distance is authorized if at least one of the following 
conditions exists:
    (i) The bulkhead or deck is covered with at least 8 cm (3 inches) of 
insulation on the entire area subject to heat;
    (ii) A temporary wooden bulkhead at least 5 cm (2 inches) thick is 
constructed in the hold at least 8 cm (3 inches) off an engine room or 
15 cm (5.9 inches) off a boiler room bulkhead, covering the entire area 
of the bulkhead that is subject to heat, and the space between the 
permanent bulkhead and the temporary wooden bulkhead is filled with 
mineral wool or equivalent bulk noncombustible insulating material; or
    (iii) A temporary wooden bulkhead is constructed of at least 2.5 cm 
(1 inch) thick tongue and groove sheathing, located 1 m (3 feet) from 
the boiler room or engine room bulkhead, and filled with sand to a 
height of 2 m (7 feet) above the tank top, or, if the cargo compartment 
is located between decks, 1 m (3 feet) of sand.

[[Page 725]]

    (3) Combustible liquids may not be stowed in a hold within 6 m (20 
feet) of a common bulkhead with the engine room unless the means of 
vessel propulsion is internal combustion engines.
    (4) Each cargo opening in a bulkhead of an adjacent hold must be 
securely closed off and made gas-tight, unless the adjacent hold is also 
used for the stowage of a Class 3 (flammable) or combustible liquid.
    (d) In addition to the requirements specified in paragraph (b) of 
this section, the following requirements apply to each hold or 
compartment in which a Class 3 (flammable) liquid is transported:
    (1) Full and effective hatch covers must be used. Tarpaulins, if 
fitted, must be protected by dunnaging before overstowing with any 
cargo. Each tarpaulin must be in one piece and free of rents, tears, and 
holes;
    (2) If Class 3 (flammable) liquids in excess of 1016 kg (2240 
pounds) are stowed under deck in any one hold or compartment, a fire 
screen must be fitted at the weather end of each vent duct leading from 
that hold or compartment. The fire screen must completely cover the open 
area. It must consist of two layers of corrosion-resistant metal wire of 
20x20 mesh or finer, spaced not less than 1 cm (0.4 inch) or more than 4 
cm (1.6 inches) apart. The screen may be removable only if means for 
securing it in place when in service are provided;
    (3) Each electrical power line in the hold or compartment must be 
protected by a strong metal covering to prevent crushing by cargo being 
stowed against it;
    (4) Except when fitted with explosion-proof type electrical 
fixtures, each electrical circuit serving the hold or compartment must 
be disconnected from all sources of power from a point outside the hold 
or compartment containing flammable liquids. No circuit may be energized 
until the flammable liquids and any vapors have been removed from the 
hold or compartment. Explosion-proof type portable lighting may be used 
if the source of power is from electrical outlets outside the hold or 
compartment and above the weather deck; and
    (5) A Class 3 (flammable) liquid in excess of 1016 kg (2240 pounds) 
may not be transported in any hold or compartment that is fitted with a 
gooseneck type of vent head.
    (e) On a passenger vessel, each hold or compartment used to 
transport a Class 3 (flammable) liquid must be equipped with an overhead 
water sprinkler system or fixed fire-extinguishing system.
    (f) On a passenger vessel, each hold or compartment used to 
transport Class 3 (flammable) liquids under a passenger space must have 
an overdeck of an A-60 type construction (see 46 CFR 72.05-10(c)(1)) or 
equivalent or have its underside covered with at least 8 cm (3 inches) 
of noncombustible insulation.
    (g) No Class 3 (flammable) liquid in a drum or wooden case, having 
inside packagings of more than 1 L (0.3 gallon) capacity each, may be 
stowed as a beam filler. A wooden barrel, a wooden box or a fiberboard 
box, with any Class 3 (flammable) liquid material in inside packagings 
of not more than 1 L (0.3 gallon) capacity each, may only be stowed as a 
beam filler if it is possible to stow and observe any ``THIS SIDE UP'' 
marking.

[Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52705, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66282, 
Dec. 20, 1991]



Sec. 176.315  Fire protection requirements.

    (a) For each 79,500 L (21,000 U.S. gallons) or part thereof of any 
Class 3 (flammable) or combustible liquid being transported on board a 
vessel in a portable tank, rail tank car, or a motor vehicle cargo tank, 
there must be provided at least one B-V semiportable foam (152 L/40 
gallon capacity) (see 46 CFR 95.50), dry chemical (45.4 kg (100 pounds) 
minimum capacity) or equivalent fire extinguisher, or a fire hose fitted 
with an approved portable mechanical foam nozzle with pick-up tube and 
two 19 L (5 gallon) cans of foam liquid concentrate. Each foam system 
must be suitable for use with each Class 3 (flammable) or combustible 
liquid for which it is required. Each fire extinguisher must be 
accessible to the tank it is intended to cover.
    (b) The fire hose at each fire hydrant in the vicinity of Class 3 
(flammable) and combustible liquids stowage areas

[[Page 726]]

must be fitted with an approved combination solid stream and water spray 
nozzle.
    (c) The pressure must be maintained in the vessel's fire mains 
during the loading and unloading of any Class 3 (flammable) or 
combustible liquids.
    (d) Two 7 kg (15-pound) capacity hand portable dry chemical or two 
portable 10 L (2.6 gallons) foam-type extinguishers must be accessible 
to any packaged Class 3 (flammable) or combustible liquid and suitable 
for use with the lading.
    (e) The requirements of this section do not apply to portable tanks 
and their contents authorized under 46 CFR part 98 or 46 CFR part 64.

[Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52705, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66282, 
Dec. 20, 1991; 66 FR 45384, 45385, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 176.320  Use of hand flashlights.

    Each hand flashlight used on deck near or in any hold or compartment 
containing a Class 3 (flammable) liquid, must be suitable for use in 
hazardous locations where fire or explosion hazards may exist.



Sec. 176.325  Smoking or open flame and posting of warning signs.

    (a) Smoking or the use of open flame is prohibited in any hold or 
compartment containing a Class 3 (flammable) or combustible liquid, near 
any Class 3 (flammable) or combustible liquid stowed on deck, or near 
any ventilator leading to a hold containing such material.
    (b) A sign carrying the legend:

 
 
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
                            FLAMMABLE VAPORS
                        KEEP LIGHTS AND FIRE AWAY
                               NO SMOKING
------------------------------------------------------------------------


must be conspicuously posted at each approach to a Class 3 (flammable) 
or combustible liquid stowed ``on deck'' and near each cargo hold 
ventilator leading to a hold or compartment containing this material. 
This sign must be painted on a white background using red letters. The 
letters may not be less than 8 cm (3 inches) high.



Sec. 176.340  Combustible liquids in portable tanks.

    Combustible liquids, having a flash point of 38  deg.C (100  deg.F) 
or higher, may be transported by vessel only in one of the portable 
tanks as specified below:
    (a) Portable tanks authorized in Sec. 173.241 of this subchapter.
    (b) In nonspecification portable tanks, subject to the following 
conditions:
    (1) Each portable tank must conform to a DOT specification 57 
portable tank, except as otherwise provided in this paragraph;
    (2) The rated capacity of the tank may not exceed 4,542 L (1,200 
gallons), and the rated gross weight may not exceed 13,608 kg (30,000 
pounds);
    (3) The vibration test need not be performed;
    (4) When the total surface area of the tank exceeds 14.9 square 
meters (160 square feet), the total emergency venting capacity must be 
determined in accordance with table I in Sec. 178.345-10 of this 
subchapter;
    (5) ln place of a specification identification marking, the tank 
must be marked, on two sides in letters at least 5 cm (2 inches) high on 
contrasting background: ``FOR COMBUSTIBLE LIQUIDS ONLY'' and ``49 CFR 
176.340''. This latter marking constitutes certification by the person 
offering the combustible liquid materials for transportation that the 
portable tank conforms to this paragraph;
    (6) Each tank must be made of steel;
    (7) The design pressure of the tank must be not less than 62 kPa (9 
psig);
    (8) No pressure relief device may open at less than 34.4 kPa (5 
psig);
    (9) Each tank must be retested and marked at least once every 2 
years in accordance with the requirements applicable to a DOT 
specification 57 portable tank in Sec. 180.605 of this subchapter; and
    (10) Each tank must conform to the provisions of Sec. 173.24 of this 
subchapter and Sec. 180.605(b) and (j) of this subchapter.
    (c) Portable tanks approved by the Commandant (G-MSO), USCG.

[Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52705, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 176-41, 
61 FR 51339, Oct. 1, 1996; 62 FR 51561, Oct. 1, 1997; 66 FR 45185, 
45384, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 61015, Sept. 27, 2002]

[[Page 727]]



Subpart J--Detailed Requirements for Class 4 (Flammable Solids), Class 5 
      (Oxidizers and Organic Peroxides), and Division 1.5 Materials

    Source: Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52706, Dec. 21, 1990, unless otherwise 
noted.



Sec. 176.400  Stowage of Division 1.5, Class 4 (flammable solids) and Class 5 (oxidizers and organic peroxides) materials.

    (a) Class 4 (flammable solid) material and Division 5.2 (organic 
peroxide) material must be kept as cool as reasonably practicable and be 
stowed away from all sources of heat and ignition.
    (b) Division 5.2 (organic peroxide) material must be stowed away 
from living quarters or access to them. Division 5.2 (organic peroxide) 
material not requiring temperature control should be protected from 
radiant heat, which includes direct rays of the sun, and stowed in a 
cool, well-ventilated area.
    (c) No Division 1.5 or Class 5 (oxidizers and organic peroxides) 
material being transported by vessel may be stowed in the same hold or 
compartment with any readily combustible material such as a combustible 
liquid, a textile product, or with a finely divided substance, such as 
an organic powder.
    (d) No Division 1.5 or Class 5 (oxidizers and organic peroxides) 
material being transported by vessel may be stowed in a hold or 
compartment containing sulfur in bulk, or in any hold or compartment 
above, below, or adjacent to one containing sulfur in bulk.

[Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52706, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 66 FR 45384, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 176.405  Stowage of charcoal.

    (a) Before stowing charcoal Division 4.2 (flammable solid), UN 1361, 
NA 1361, or UN 1362 on a vessel for transportation, the hold or 
compartment in which it is to be stowed must be swept as clean as 
practicable. All residue of any former cargo, including especially a 
petroleum product, a vegetable or animal oil, nitrate, or sulfur, must 
be removed.
    (b) Charcoal packed in bags and offered for transportation on board 
a vessel in a quantity over 1016 kg (2240 pounds) must be loaded so that 
the bags are laid horizontally and stacked with space for efficient air 
circulation. If the bags are not compactly filled and closed to avoid 
free space within, vertical and horizontal dunnage strips must be laid 
between the bags. Space for ventilating must be maintained near 
bulkheads, the shell of the vessel, the deck, and the overhead. No more 
than 40,600 kg (89,508 pounds) of charcoal may be stowed in a hold or 
compartment when other stowage space is available. If the unavailability 
of hold or compartment space requires the stowage of a larger amount, 
the arrangement of the stow for ventilation must be adjusted to ensure a 
sufficient venting effect.
    (c) Any loose material from bags broken during loading must be 
removed. Broken bags may be repacked or have the closures repaired and 
the repaired bags restowed.
    (d) Charcoal ``screenings'' packed in bags must be stowed to provide 
spaces for air circulation between tiers regardless of the quantity 
stowed.



Sec. 176.410  Division 1.5 materials, ammonium nitrate and ammonium nitrate mixtures.

    (a) This section prescribes requirements to be observed with respect 
to transportation of each of the following hazardous materials by 
vessel:
    (1) Explosives, blasting, type E, and Explosives, blasting, type B, 
Division 1.5 compatibility group D, UN 0331 and UN 0332.
    (2) Ammonium nitrate fertilizer, Division 5.1 (oxidizer), UN 1942.
    (3) Ammonium nitrate fertilizer, Division 5.1 (oxidizer), UN 2068.
    (4) Ammonium nitrate fertilizer, Division 5.1 (oxidizer), UN 2067.
    (5) Ammonium nitrate fertilizer, Division 5.1 (oxidizer), UN 2069 or 
NA 2072.
    (6) Ammonium nitrate fertilizer, Division 5.1 (oxidizer), UN 2070.
    (b) This section does not apply to Ammonium nitrate fertilizer, 
Class 9, UN 2071 or to any non-acidic ammonium nitrate mixed fertilizer 
containing 13 percent or less ammonium nitrate, less than 5 percent 
organic material, and no other oxidizing material, and which does not 
meet the criteria

[[Page 728]]

for any other hazard set forth in part 173 of this subchapter.
    (c) When Division 1.5 compatibility group D materials, ammonium 
nitrate, or any of the ammonium nitrate fertilizers listed in paragraph 
(a) of this section are transported by vessel:
    (1) They must be stowed well away from any steam pipe, electric 
circuit, or other source of heat;
    (2) Smoking is prohibited except in designated areas away from the 
material and ``No-Smoking'' signs must be posted in accordance with 
Sec. 176.60;
    (3) Fire hoses must be connected, laid out, and tested before 
loading or unloading commences; and
    (4) A fire watch must be posted in the hold or compartment where the 
material is being loaded or unloaded.
    (d) When any of the hazardous materials listed in paragraph (a) of 
this section is transported in bags by vessel:
    (1) The requirements specified in paragraph (c) of this section must 
be complied with;
    (2) The temperature of the bagged material may not exceed 54  deg.C 
(130  deg.F);
    (3) Minimum dunnage and sweatboards must be used to prevent any 
friction or abrasion of bags, and to allow for the circulation of air 
and access of water in the event of fire;
    (4) The bags must be stowed from side to side, out to the 
sweatboards;
    (5) A space of 46 cm (18 inches) must be provided between any 
transverse bulkhead and the bags;
    (6) The bags must be stowed so as to provide a 46 cm (18 inch) 
athwartship trench along the centerline of the compartment, continuous 
from top to bottom;
    (7) The bags must be stowed so as to provide a 46 cm (18 inch) 
amidship trench running fore and aft from bulkhead to bulkhead;
    (8) The bags may not be stowed less than 46 cm (18 inches) from any 
overhead deck beam;
    (9) The bags must be stowed so as to provide vent flues 36 cm (14 
inches) square at each corner of the hatch continuous from top to 
bottom;
    (10) Trenching must be accomplished by alternating the direction of 
the bags in each tier (bulkheading); and
    (11) The bags must be blocked and braced as necessary to prevent 
shifting of the bagged cargo adjacent to any trench area.
    (e) Notwithstanding Sec. 176.83(b) of this part, ammonium nitrate 
and ammonium nitrate fertilizers classed as Division 5.1 (oxidizers) 
materials, may be stowed in the same hold, compartment, magazine, or 
freight container with Class 1 materials (explosive), except those 
containing chlorates, in accordance with the segregation and separation 
requirements of Sec. 176.144 of this part applying to Explosives, 
blasting, type B, and Explosives, blasting, type E, Division 1.5 
compatibility group D.
    (f) No mixture containing ammonium nitrate and any ingredient which 
would accelerate the decomposition of ammonium nitrate under conditions 
incident to transportation may be transported by vessel.

[Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52706, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66282, 
Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 176-34, 58 FR 51533, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 176-38, 60 
FR 49111, Sept. 21, 1995; 65 FR 58630, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45384, Aug. 
28, 2001]



Sec. 176.415  Permit requirements for Division 1.5, ammonium nitrates, and certain ammonium nitrate fertilizers.

    (a) Except as provided in paragraph (b) of this section, before any 
of the following material is loaded on or unloaded from a vessel at any 
waterfront facility, the owner/operator must obtain written permission 
from the nearest COTP:
    (1) Ammonium nitrate UN 1942, ammonium nitrate fertilizers 
containing more than 60 percent ammonium nitrate, ammonium nitrate 
fertilizer, Division 5.1 (oxidizer) UN 2070, or Division 1.5 
compatibility group D materials packaged in a paper bag, burlap bag, or 
other nonrigid combustible packaging, or any rigid packaging with 
combustible inside packagings.
    (2) Any other ammonium nitrate or ammonium nitrate fertilizer not 
listed in Sec. 176.410 (a) or (b) except ammonium nitrate fertilizer, 
Class 9, UN 2071.
    (b) Any of the following may be loaded on or unloaded from a vessel 
at any waterfront facility without a permit:
    (1) Ammonium nitrate fertilizer, Division 5.1 (oxidizer) UN 1942, in 
a rigid packaging with noncombustible inside packaging.

[[Page 729]]

    (2) Ammonium nitrate fertilizer, Division 5.1 (oxidizer) UN 2067, if 
the nearest COTP is notified at least 24 hours in advance of any loading 
or unloading in excess of 454 kg (1,000 pounds).
    (3) Ammonium nitrate fertilizer, n.o.s., Division 5.1 (oxidizer) NA 
2072, containing 40 percent or more fine calcium carbonate or dolomite.
    (4) Non-acidic ammonium nitrate fertilizer, n.o.s., Division 5.1 
(oxidizer) UN 2072, containing less than 5 percent organic material and 
60 percent or less ammonium nitrate.
    (5) Division 1.5 compatibility group D material in a rigid packaging 
with non-combustible inside packaging.
    (6) Ammonium nitrate fertilizer, Class 9, UN 2071.
    (c) Before a permit may be issued, the following requirements must 
be met in addition to any others the COTP may impose:
    (1) If the material is ammonium nitrate fertilizer, Division 5.1 
(oxidizer), UN2070; or Explosives, blasting, type E, Division 1.5 
compatibility group D, UN0332 in combustible packaging or in a rigid 
packaging with combustible inside packaging, it must be loaded or 
unloaded at a facility remote from populous areas or high value or high 
hazard industrial facilities so that in the event of fire or explosion 
loss of lives and property may be minimized;
    (2) If the material is an ammonium nitrate fertilizer, Division 5.1 
(oxidizer), UN2070, containing more than 60 percent ammonium nitrate; or 
ammonium nitrate fertilizer, Division 5.1 (oxidizer), UN2070 in rigid 
packagings with combustible inside packagings, it must be loaded or 
unloaded at a facility removed from congested areas or high value or 
high hazard industrial facilities;
    (3) Each facility at which the material is to be loaded or unloaded 
must conform with the requirements of the port security and local 
regulations and must have an abundance of water readily available for 
fire fighting;
    (4) Each facility at which the material is to be loaded or unloaded 
must be located so that each vessel to be loaded or unloaded has an 
unrestricted passage to open water. Each vessel must be moored bow to 
seaward, and must be maintained in a mobile status during loading, 
unloading, or handling operations by the presence of tugs or the 
readiness of engines. Each vessel must have two wire towing hawsers, 
each having an eye splice, lowered to the water's edge, one at the bow 
and the other at the stern; and
    (5) If the material is ammonium nitrate fertilizer, Division 5.1 
(oxidizer), UN2070; an ammonium nitrate fertilizer, Division 5.1 
(oxidizer) containing more than 60 percent ammonium nitrate; or a 
Division 1.5 compatibility group D material in non-rigid combustible 
packaging and loaded in freight containers or transport vehicles, it may 
be loaded or unloaded at a non-isolated facility provided that facility 
is approved by the COTP.

[Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52706, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66282, 
Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 176-35, 59 FR 49134, Sept. 26, 1994; 65 FR 58630, 
Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45185, 45384, 45385, Aug. 28, 2001]

Subpart K [Reserved]



 Subpart L--Detailed Requirements for Division 2.3 (Poisonous Gas) and 
                   Division 6.1 (Poisonous) Materials

    Source: Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52708, Dec. 21, 1990, unless otherwise 
noted.



Sec. 176.600  General stowage requirements.

    (a) Each package required to have a POISON GAS, POISON INHALATION 
HAZARD, or POISON label, being transported on a vessel, must be stowed 
clear of living quarters and any ventilation ducts serving living 
quarters and separated from foodstuffs, except when the hazardous 
materials and the foodstuffs are in different closed transport units.
    (b) Each package required to have both a POISON GAS label and a 
FLAMMABLE GAS label thereon must be segregated as a Division 2.1 
(flammable gas) material.
    (c) Each package bearing a POISON label displaying the text ``PG 
III'' or bearing a ``PG III'' mark adjacent to the poison label must be 
stowed away from foodstuffs.

[[Page 730]]

    (d) Each package of Division 2.3 (poisonous gas) material or 
Division 6.1 (poison) material which also bears a FLAMMABLE LIQUID or 
FLAMMABLE GAS label must be stowed in a mechanically ventilated space, 
kept as cool as reasonably practicable, and be stowed away from all 
sources of heat and ignition.

[Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52708, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 57 FR 45465, 
Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 176-35, 59 FR 49134, Sept. 26, 1994; Amdt. 176-42, 
62 FR 1236, Jan. 8, 1997; 64 FR 10782, Mar. 5, 1999]



Sec. 176.605  Care following leakage or sifting of Division 2.3 (poisonous gas) and Division 6.1 (poisonous) materials.

    A hold or compartment containing a package of a Division 2.3 
(poisonous gas) or Division 6.1 (poisonous) material which has leaked or 
sifted must be thoroughly cleaned and decontaminated after the cargo is 
unloaded and before the hold or compartment is used for the stowage of 
any other cargo.



       Subpart M--Detailed Requirements for Radioactive Materials

    Source: Amdt. 176-15, 48 FR 10245, Mar. 10, 1983, unless otherwise 
noted.



Sec. 176.700  General stowage requirements.

    (a) [Reserved]
    (b) A package of radioactive materials which in still air has a 
surface temperature more than 5  deg.C (9  deg.F) above the ambient air 
may not be overstowed with any other cargo. If the package is stowed 
under deck, the hold or compartment in which it is stowed must be 
ventilated.
    (c) Each fissile material, controlled shipment must be stowed in a 
separate hold, compartment, or defined deck area and be separated by a 
distance of at least 6 m (20 feet) from all other RADIOACTIVE YELLOW-II 
or YELLOW-III labeled packages.
    (d) For a shipment of radioactive materials requiring supplemental 
operational procedures, the shipper must furnish the master or person in 
charge of the vessel a copy of the necessary operational instructions.
    (e) A person may not remain unnecessarily in a hold, or compartment, 
or in the immediate vicinity of any package on deck, containing 
radioactive materials.

(The information collection requirements in paragraph (d) were approved 
by the Office of Management and Budget under control numbers 2137-0534, 
2137-0535 and 2137-0536)

[Amdt. 176-15, 48 FR 10245, Mar. 10, 1983, as amended by Amdt. 176-15, 
48 FR 31220, July 7, 1983; Amdt. 176-23, 50 FR 41523, Oct. 11, 1985; 
Amdt. 176-37, 60 FR 50333, Sept. 28, 1995; 66 FR 45385, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 176.704  Requirements relating to transport indexes.

    (a) The sum of the transport indexes for all packages of Class 7 
(radioactive) materials on board a vessel may not exceed the limits 
specified in table III.
    (b) For packages in freight containers, the radiation level may not 
exceed 2 mSv per hour (200 mrem per hour) at any point on the surface 
and 0.1 mSv per hour (10 mrem per hour) at 2 m (6.6 feet) from the 
outside surface of the freight container.
    (c) The limitations specified in table III do not apply to 
consignments of LSA materials if the packages are marked ``RADIOACTIVE 
LSA'' and no fissile Class 7 (radioactive) materials are included in the 
shipment.
    (d) Each group of fissile packages must be separated from other 
Class 7 (radioactive) material by a distance of at least 6 m (20 feet) 
at all times.
    (e) The limitations specified in paragraphs (a) through (c) of this 
section do not apply when the entire vessel is reserved or chartered for 
use by a single offeror under exclusive use conditions if--
    (1) The number of fissile packages of Class 7 (radioactive) 
materials aboard the vessel does not exceed the amount authorized in 
Secs. 173.457 and 173.459 of this subchapter; and
    (2) The entire shipment operation is approved by the Associate 
Administrator in advance.
    (f) Table III is as follows:

[[Page 731]]



                           Table III--TI Limits for Freight Containers and Conveyances
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                       Limit on total sum of transport indexes in a single freight container or
                                                                 aboard a conveyance
                                    ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Type of freight container or            Not under exclusive use                 Under exclusive use
             conveyance             ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                        Non-fissile                           Non-fissile      Fissile material
                                          material       Fissile material       material              \a\
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Freight container--Small...........  50...............  50...............  N/A..............  N/A.
Freight container--Large...........  50...............  50...............  No limit.........  100. \b\
Vessel: \c\
1. Hold, compartment or defined
 deck area:
    Packages, overpacks, small       50...............  50...............  No limit.........  100.\b\
     freight containers.
    Large freight containers.......  200\d\...........  50...............  No limit.........  100.\b\
2. Total vessel:
    Packages, etc..................  200 \d\..........  200 \d\..........  No limit. \e\....  200. \e\
    Large freight containers.......  No limit \d\.....  No limit \d\.....  No limit.........  No limit. \d.\
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
a Provided that transport is direct from the consignor to the consignee without any intermediate in-transit
  storage, where the total TI exceed 50.
b In cases in which the total TI is greater than 50, the consignment must be so handled and stowed so that it is
  always separated from any package, overpack, portable tank or freight container carrying Class 7 (radioactive)
  materials by at least 6 m (20 feet).
c For vessels the requirements given in 1 and 2 must be fulfilled.
d Provided that the packages, overpacks, portable tanks or freight containers, as applicable, are stowed so that
  the total sum of the TI's in any group does not exceed 50, and that each group is handled and stowed so that
  the groups are separate from each other by at least 6 m (20 feet).
e Packages or overpacks carried in or on a transport vehicle which are offered for transport under the
  provisions of Sec.  173.441(b) of this subchapter may be transported by vessel provided that they are not
  removed from the vehicle at anytime while on board the vessel.

[Amdt. 176-37, 60 FR 50333, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended by 176-37, 61 FR 
20753, May 8, 1996; 63 FR 52850, Oct. 1, 1998; 66 FR 45384, 45385, Aug. 
28, 2001]



Sec. 176.708  Segregation distance table.

    (a) Table IV applies to the stowage of packages of Class 7 
(radioactive) materials on board a vessel with regard to transport index 
numbers which are shown on the labels of individual packages.
    (b) RADIOACTIVE YELLOW-II or YELLOW-III labeled packages may not be 
stowed any closer to living accommodations, regularly occupied working 
spaces, spaces that may be continually occupied by any person (except 
those spaces exclusively reserved for couriers specifically authorized 
to accompany such packages), or undeveloped film than the distances 
specified in TABLE IV.
    (c) Where only one consignment of a Class 7 (radioactive) material 
is to be loaded on board a vessel under exclusive use conditions, the 
appropriate segregation distance may be established by demonstrating 
that the direct measurement of the radiation level at regularly occupied 
working spaces and living quarters is less than 7.5 microsieverts per 
hour (0.75 mrem per hour).
    (d) More than one consignment may be loaded on board a vessel with 
the appropriate segregation distance established by demonstrating that 
direct measurement of the radiation level at regularly occupied working 
spaces and living quarters is less than 7.5 microSieverts per hour (0.75 
mrem per hour), provided that:
    (1) The vessel has been chartered for the exclusive use of a 
competent person specialized in the carriage of Class 7 (radioactive) 
material; and
    (2) Stowage arrangements have been predetermined for the entire 
voyage, including any Class 7 (radioactive) material to be loaded at 
ports of call enroute.
    (e) The radiation level must be measured by a responsible person 
skilled in the use of monitoring instruments.
    (f) Table IV is as follows:

[[Page 732]]



                                                                                            Table IV
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                              Minimum                                    Minimum distance in feet from undeveloped film and plates
                                                            distance in  -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                             feet from     1 day voyage   2 day voyage   4 day voyage  10 day voyage  20 day voyage  30 day voyage  40 day voyage  50 day voyage
                                                              living     -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                           accommodation
        Sum of transport indexes of the packages           or regularly
                                                             occupied
                                                           working space
                                                         ----------------
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                                          Cargo thickness in feet (unit density)
 
                                                         ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
  ......................................................     Nil       3  Nil    3    6  Nil    3    6  Nil    3    6  Nil    3    6  Nil    3    6  Nil    3    6  Nil    3    6  Nil    3    6
0.1 to 0.5..............................................       5       X    6    X    X    8    X    X   11    X    X   17    4    X   25    6    X   30    7    X   35    8    X   39    9    X
0.6 to 1................................................       6       X    8    X    X   11    X    X   16    4    X   25    6    X   35    8    X   42   10    X   50   12    X   55   13    X
1.1 to 2................................................       9       X   11    X    X   16    4    X   22    5    X   35    8    X   50   12    X   61   14    X   70   17    X   78   19    X
2.1 to 3................................................      10       X   14    X    X   19    5    X   27    6    X   42   10    X   61   14    X   74   18    X   86   20    X   96   23    X
3.1 to 5................................................      13       X   17    4    X   25    6    X   35    8    X   55   13    X   78   19    X   96   23    X  110   26    X  124   29    7
5.1 to 10...............................................      19       4   25    6    X   35    8    X   50   12    X   78   19    X  110   26    X  135   33    8  155   37    9  175   42   10
10.1 to 20..............................................      26       6   35    8    X   50   12    X   69   17    X  110   26    X  155   37    9  190   46   11  220   53   13  250   59   14
20.1 to 30..............................................      32       8   43   10    X   61   14    X   85   20    X  135   32    8  190   45   11  235   56   13  270   65   16  305   72   17
30.1 to 50..............................................      42      10   55   13    X   78   19    X  110   26    X  175   42   10  245   58   14  300   73   17  350   84   20  390   94   22
50.1 to 100.............................................      59      14   78   19    X  110   26    X  155   37    9  245   59   14  350   82   20  430  105   24  515  118   28  550  130   32
100.1 to 150............................................      72      17   96   23    X  135   32    8  190   46   11  300   72   17  425  100   24  525  125   30  600  145   35  (\7  165   39
                                                                                                                                                                                   \ )
150.1 to 200............................................      84      20  110   26    X  155   37    9  200   53   13  350   84   20  490  115   28  600  140   35  (\7  165   40  (\7  190   45
                                                                                                                                                                    \ )            \ )
================================================================================================================================================================================================
200.1 to 300............................................     105      24  135   32    X  190   46   11  270   64   15  425  105   25  600  145   35  (\7  180   42  (\7  205   49  (\7  230   55
                                                                                                                                                     \ )            \ )            \ )
300.1 to 400............................................     120      28  160   37    9  220   53   13  310   75   18  500  120   28  (\7  165   40  (\7  205   49  (\7  235   57  (\7  265   63
                                                                                                                                      \ )            \ )            \ )            \ )
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note:
(1) X--indicates that thickness of screening cargo is sufficient without any additional segregation distance.
(2) By using 6 feet of intervening unit density cargo for persons and 10 feet for film and plates, no distance shielding is necessary for any length of voyage specified.
(3) Using 1 steel bulkhead or steel deck--multiply segregation distance by 0.8. Using 2 steel bulkheads or steel decks--multiply segregation distance by 0.64.
(4) ``Cargo of Unit Density'' means cargo stowed at a density of 1 ton (long) per 36 cubic feet; where the density is less than this the depth of cargo specified must be increased in
  proportion.
(5) ``Minimum distance'' means the least in any direction whether vertical or horizontal from the outer surface of the nearest package.
(6) The total consignment on board at any time must not exceed transport indexes totalling 200 except if carried under the provisions of Sec.  176.704(f). The figures below the double line of
  the table should be used in such a contingency.
(7) Not to be carried unless screening by other cargo and bulkheads can be arranged in accordance with the other columns.

[Amdt. 176-15, 48 FR 10245, Mar. 10, 1983, as amended by Amdt. 176-37, 
60 FR 50334, Sept. 28, 1995]

[[Page 733]]



Sec. 176.710  Care following leakage or sifting of radioactive materials.

    (a) In case of fire, collision, or breakage involving any shipment 
of radioactive materials, other than materials of low specific activity, 
the radioactive materials must be segregated from unnecessary contact 
with personnel. In case of obvious leakage, or if the inside container 
appears to be damaged, the stowage area (hold, compartment, or deck 
area) containing this cargo must be isolated as much as possible to 
prevent radioactive material from entering any person's body through 
contact, inhalation, or ingestion. No person may handle the material or 
remain in the vicinity unless supervised by a qualified person.
    (b) A hold or compartment in which leakage of radioactive materials 
has occurred may not be used for other cargo until it is decontaminated 
in accordance with the requirements of Sec. 176.715.
    (c) For reporting requirements, see Sec. 171.15 of this subchapter.



Sec. 176.715  Contamination control.

    Each hold, compartment, or deck area used for the transportation of 
low specific activity or surface contaminated object Class 7 
(radioactive) materials under exclusive use conditions must be surveyed 
with appropriate radiation detection instruments after each use. Such 
holds, compartments, and deck areas may not be used again until the 
radiation dose rate at every accessible surface is less than 5 
microSieverts per hour (0.5 mrem per hour), and the removable (non-
fixed) radioactive surface contamination is not greater than the limits 
prescribed in Sec. 173.443 of this subchapter.

[Amdt. 176-37, 60 FR 50334, Sept. 28, 1995]



Sec. 176.720  Requirements for carriage of INF cargo in international transportation.

    A vessel carrying INF cargo (see Sec. 176.2, under INF cargo 
definition) in international transportation must meet the requirements 
of the INF Code (contained in IMDG Code, 2000 edition, see Sec. 171.7 of 
this subchapter) in addition to all other applicable requirements of 
this subchapter.

[66 FR 33439, June 21, 2001]



   Subpart N--Detailed Requirements for Class 8 (Corrosive Materials) 
                                Materials

    Source: Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52708, Dec. 21, 1990, unless otherwise 
noted.



Sec. 176.800  General stowage requirements.

    (a) Each package required to have a Class 8 (corrosive) label 
thereon being transported on a vessel must be stowed clear of living 
quarters, and away from foodstuffs and cargo of an organic nature.
    (b) A package of Class 8 (corrosive material) material may not be 
stowed over any readily combustible material.
    (c) Glass carboys containing Class 8 (corrosive material) material 
may not be stowed on board any vessel, other than a barge, more than two 
tiers high unless each carboy is boxed or crated with neck protection 
extending to the sides of the carboy box. This protective construction 
must be strong enough to permit stacking one on top of the other.
    (d) A Class 8 (corrosive material) material may not be stowed over a 
hold or compartment containing cotton unless the deck is of steel and 
the hatch is fitted with a tight coaming. In addition, the deck must be 
tight against leakage and the Class 8 (corrosive material) material may 
not be stowed over the square of the hatch.
    (e) Each package of Class 8 (corrosive material) which also bears a 
FLAMMABLE LIQUID label must be stowed away from all sources of heat and 
ignition.

[Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52708, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 176-39, 
61 FR 18933, Apr. 29, 1996]



Sec. 176.805  On deck stowage.

    When break bulk Class 8 (corrosive materials) materials being 
transported on a vessel are stowed on deck:
    (a) Provisions must be made for leakage from any package to drain 
away from other cargo into an overboard scupper or freeing port. The 
drainage

[[Page 734]]

may not enter an enclosed drainage system other than a direct overboard 
scupper. If this stowage is not practical, sufficient clean dry sand 
must be placed under and around the lower tier of packages to absorb any 
leakage.
    (b) Dunnage must be provided on the deck and arranged so that any 
leakage will be apparent.
    (c) Any leakage that occurs must be washed down, using liberal 
quantities of water.



Subpart O--Detailed Requirements for Cotton and Vegetable Fibers, Motor 
                         Vehicles, and Asbestos

    Source: Amdt. 176-30, 55 FR 52708, Dec. 21, 1990, unless otherwise 
noted.



Sec. 176.900  Packaging and stowage of cotton and vegetable fibers; general.

    (a) Cotton, Class 9, NA 1365, Cotton, wet, Division 4.2, UN 1365, 
and other vegetable fibers, Division 4.1, being transported on a vessel 
must be securely baled and bound. Each bale of cotton or vegetable 
fibers must be covered with bagging on at least three-fourths of its 
surface, including both ends. Cut cotton linters may be accepted for 
transportation by vessel when baled and covered with bagging on the soft 
sides only if the bale is compressed to a density of at least 512 kg/m 
\3\ (32 pounds per cubic foot) and it is bound with at least six bands 
per bale. Any poorly compressed bale or any bale having damaged bindings 
may not be transported by vessel.
    (b) Each bale of Cotton, wet, Division 4.2, UN 1365 must be stowed 
separately from any bales of dry cotton or vegetable fibers, in a 'tween 
deck space, and not overstowed. Any bale of cotton or vegetable fibers 
which is saturated with water may not be transported by vessel.
    (c) Bales of cotton or vegetable fibers showing contact with oil or 
grease may not be accepted for transportation by vessel.
    (d) Cotton or vegetable fibers must be stowed in a hold or 
compartment in accordance with the following requirements:
    (1) All traces of oil or residue in the hold or compartment must be 
removed;
    (2) A recently painted hold or compartment may not be used unless it 
is thoroughly dry;
    (3) Each ventilation cowl serving the hold or compartment must be 
fitted with a spark screen;
    (4) When a bulkhead of the hold or compartment is common with a 
boiler room, engine room, coal bunker, or galley and subjected to heat, 
a wooden bulkhead must be erected between the bulkhead and any cotton or 
vegetable fibers. This wooden bulkhead must be at least 15 cm (6 inches) 
from a boiler room bulkhead, and at least 5 cm (2 inches) from an engine 
room, coal bunker, or galley bulkhead;
    (5) Each 'tween deck hatch must be closed with hatch covers, 
tarpaulins, and dunnage; however, metal hatch covers which are sealed by 
other means to provide equivalent protection may be used;
    (6) Each hold or compartment must be equipped with a carbon dioxide 
or overhead water sprinkler system or other approved fixed extinguishing 
system. Before loading, the extinguishing system must be examined to 
ensure that it is in good working condition; and
    (7) Each hold or compartment must be clear of all debris and swept 
as clean as practicable before loading.
    (e) Naked lights or any fire likely to produce sparks are not 
permitted on the vessel, dock area, or on any lighters alongside a 
vessel during loading or unloading of cotton or vegetable fibers.
    (f) Upon completion of stowage, each opening must be completely 
closed. Where required, tarpaulins must be fitted and secured in place 
to provide a tight hold. During a period of temporary stoppage of 
loading or unloading, a hatch may be left open. However, during that 
period, a fire watch, designated by the master or officer-in-charge, 
must be stationed in the hold or compartment in which the cotton or 
vegetable fibers are stowed.
    (g) At least one fire hose must be connected while cotton or 
vegetable fibers are being loaded or unloaded. Each fire pump must be 
operated before any loading or unloading. Pressure must be maintained on 
each fire main during

[[Page 735]]

the loading and the fire hose laid out ready for immediate use. Portable 
fire extinguishers must be placed to be readily available. The fire 
hose, fire pumps, and fire extinguishers may be the vessel's equipment 
or shore equipment.
    (h) Smoking is not permitted on a vessel during the loading or 
unloading of cotton or vegetable fibers except at those times and in 
those places designated by the master. ``NO SMOKING'' signs must be 
conspicuously posted in appropriate places, and the responsible person 
in charge of the loading or unloading (see Sec. 176.57 of this part) 
must ensure that they are observed.
    (i) Cotton or vegetable fibers may be stowed in the same hold over 
bulk sulfur if the sulfur has been trimmed and leveled and the hold is 
thoroughly cleaned of sulfur dust. A tight floor of two layers of 2.54 
cm (1 inch) crossed clean dunnage boards must be laid on the sulfur 
before cotton or vegetable fibers are stowed. These substances may be 
stowed alongside each other in the same hold if they are separated by a 
tight dustproof wood bulkhead.
    (j) Cotton or vegetable fibers may not be stowed in a 'tween deck 
hold over bulk sulfur in a lower hold unless the 'tween deck hold has 
been thoroughly cleaned of all sulfur dust and the 'tween deck hatch 
covers are in place and covered with tarpaulins and dunnage.



Sec. 176.901  Stowage of cotton or vegetable fibers with rosin or pitch.

    (a) Unless impracticable, cotton or vegetable fibers being 
transported on a vessel may not be stowed in the same hold or 
compartment with rosin or pitch being transported on the same vessel.
    (b) When separate stowage is impracticable, the cotton or vegetable 
fibers may be stowed in the same hold or compartment with rosin or pitch 
if they are separated by clean dunnage or a cargo of a non-combustible 
nature. When such stowage within the same hold or compartment involves 
large amounts of cotton or fibers or of rosin or pitch, the rosin or 
pitch must be floored off with at least two layers of 2.54 cm (1 inch) 
dunnaging and the cotton or vegetable fibers stowed above.



Sec. 176.903  Stowage of cotton or vegetable fibers with coal.

    Cotton or vegetable fibers being transported on a vessel may not be 
stowed in the same hold with coal. They may be stowed in adjacent holds 
if the holds are separated by a tight steel bulkhead and the cotton or 
vegetable fibers are dunnaged at least 5 cm (2 inches) off the bulkhead. 
Cotton or vegetable fibers may be stowed in a hold above or below one in 
which coal is stowed if there is a tight steel intervening deck and all 
hatch covers are in place and covered with tarpaulins.



Sec. 176.905  Motor vehicles or mechanical equipment powered by internal combustion engines.

    (a) A motor vehicle or any mechanized equipment powered by an 
internal combustion engine is subject to the following requirements when 
carried as cargo on a vessel:
    (1) Before being loaded on a vessel, each motor vehicle or 
mechanical equipment must be inspected for fuel leaks and identifiable 
faults in the electrical system that could result in short circuit or 
other unintended electrical source of ignition. A motor vehicle or 
mechanical equipment showing any signs of leakage or electrical fault 
may not be transported.
    (2) The fuel tank of a motor vehicle or mechanical equipment powered 
by liquid fuel may not be more than one-fourth full.
    (3) Whenever possible, each vehicle or mechanical equipment must be 
stowed to allow for its inspection during transit.
    (4) Motor vehicles or mechanical equipment may be refueled when 
necessary in the hold of a vessel in accordance with Sec. 176.78.
    (5) When a motor vehicle or mechanical equipment with fuel in its 
tanks is stowed in a closed freight container, a warning, displayed on a 
contrasting background and readily legible from a distance of 8 m (26 
feet), must be affixed to the access doors to read as follows:

[[Page 736]]

 WARNING-MAY CONTAIN EXPLOSIVE MIXTURES WITH AIR--KEEP IGNITION SOURCES 
                            AWAY WHEN OPENING

    (6) A motor vehicle or mechanical equipment's ignition key may not 
be in the ignition while the vehicle or mechanical equipment is stowed 
aboard a vessel.
    (b) All equipment used for handling vehicles or mechanical equipment 
must be designed so that the fuel tank and fuel system of the vehicle or 
mechanical equipment are protected from stress that might cause rupture 
or other damage incident to handling.
    (c) Two hand-held, portable, dry chemical fire extinguishers of at 
least 4.5 kg (10 pounds) capacity each must be separately located in an 
accessible location in each hold or compartment in which any motor 
vehicle or mechanical equipment is stowed.
    (d) ``NO SMOKING'' signs must be conspicuously posted at each access 
opening to the hold or compartment.
    (e) Each portable electrical light, including a flashlight, used in 
the stowage area must be an approved, explosion-proof type. All 
electrical connections for any portable light must be made to outlets 
outside the space in which any vehicle or mechanical equipment is 
stowed.
    (f) Each hold or compartment must be ventilated and fitted with an 
overhead water sprinkler system or fixed fire extinguishing system.
    (g) Each hold or compartment must be equipped with a smoke or fire 
detection system capable of alerting personnel on the bridge.
    (h) All electrical equipment in the hold or compartment other than 
fixed explosion-proof lighting must be disconnected from its power 
source at a location outside the hold or compartment during the handling 
and transportation of any vehicle or mechanical equipment. Where the 
disconnecting means is a switch or circuit breaker, it must be locked in 
the open position until all vehicles have been removed.
    (i) Exceptions. A motor vehicle or mechanical equipment is excepted 
from the requirements of this subchapter if the following requirements 
are met:
    (1) The motor vehicle or mechanical equipment has an internal 
combustion engine using liquid fuel that has a flash point less than 38 
deg.C (100  deg.F), the fuel tank is empty, and the engine is run until 
it stalls for lack of fuel;
    (2) The motor vehicle or mechanical equipment has an internal 
combustion engine using liquid fuel that has a flash point of 38  deg.C 
(100  deg.F) or higher, the fuel tank contains 418 L (110 gallons) of 
fuel or less, and there are no fuel leaks in any portion of the fuel 
system;
    (3) The motor vehicle or mechanical equipment is stowed in a hold or 
compartment designated by the administration of the country in which the 
vessel is registered to be specially suited for vehicles. See 46 CFR 
70.10-44 and 90.10-38 for U.S. vessels;
    (4) The motor vehicle or mechanical equipment is electrically 
powered by wet electric storage batteries; or
    (5) The motor vehicle or mechanical equipment is equipped with 
liquefied petroleum gas or other compressed gas fuel tanks, the tanks 
are completely emptied of liquid and the positive pressure in the tank 
does not exceed 2 bar (29 psig), the line from the fuel tank to the 
regulator and the regulator itself is drained of all trace of (liquid) 
gas, and the fuel shut-off valve is closed.
    (j) Except as provided in Sec. 173.220(d) of this subchapter, the 
provisions of this subchapter do not apply to items of equipment such as 
fire extinguishers, compressed gas accumulators, airbag inflators and 
the like which are installed in the motor vehicle or mechanical 
equipment if they are necessary for the operation of the vehicle or 
equipment, or for the safety of its operator or passengers.

[Amdt. 176-43, 62 FR 24742, May 6, 1997, as amended at 65 FR 58630, 
Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45384, 45385, Aug. 28, 2001]



PART 177--CARRIAGE BY PUBLIC HIGHWAY--Table of Contents




             Subpart A--General Information and Regulations

Sec.
177.800  Purpose and scope of this part and responsibility for 
          compliance and training.
177.801  Unacceptable hazardous materials shipments.
177.802  Inspection.

[[Page 737]]

177.804  Compliance with Federal Motor Carrier Safety Regulations.
177.810  Vehicular tunnels.
177.816  Driver training.
177.817  Shipping papers.
177.823  Movement of motor vehicles in emergency situations.

                    Subpart B--Loading and Unloading

177.834  General requirements.
177.835  Class 1 (explosive) materials.
177.837  Class 3 (flammable liquid) materials.
177.838  Class 4 (flammable solid) materials, Class 5 (oxidizing) 
          materials, and Division 4.2 (pyroforic liquid) materials.
177.839  Class 8 (corrosive) materials.
177.840  Class 2 (gases) materials.
177.841  Division 6.1 (poisonous) and Division 2.3 (poisonous gas) 
          materials.
177.842  Class 7 (radioactive) material.
177.843  Contamination of vehicles.

   Subpart C--Segregation and Separation Chart of Hazardous Materials

177.848  Segregation of hazardous materials.

         Subpart D--Vehicles and Shipments in Transit; Accidents

177.854  Disabled vehicles and broken or leaking packages; repairs.

Subpart E--Regulations Applying to Hazardous Material on Motor Vehicles 
                      Carrying Passengers for Hire

177.870  Regulations for passenger carrying vehicles.

    Authority: 49 U.S.C. 5101-5127; 49 CFR 1.53.



             Subpart A--General Information and Regulations



Sec. 177.800  Purpose and scope of this part and responsibility for compliance and training.

    (a) Purpose and scope. This part prescribes requirements, in 
addition to those contained in parts 171, 172, 173, 178 and 180 of this 
subchapter, that are applicable to the acceptance and transportation of 
hazardous materials by private, common, or contract carriers by motor 
vehicle.
    (b) Responsibility for compliance. Unless this subchapter 
specifically provides that another person shall perform a particular 
duty, each carrier, including a connecting carrier, shall perform the 
duties specified and comply with all applicable requirements in this 
part and shall ensure its hazmat employees receive training in relation 
thereto.
    (c) Responsibility for training. A carrier may not transport a 
hazardous material by motor vehicle unless each of its hazmat employees 
involved in that transportation is trained as required by this part and 
subpart H of part 172 of this subchapter.
    (d) No unnecessary delay in movement of shipments. All shipments of 
hazardous materials must be transported without unnecessary delay, from 
and including the time of commencement of the loading of the hazardous 
material until its final unloading at destination.

[Amdt. 177-79, 57 FR 20954, May 15, 1992, as amended by Amdt.177-86, 61 
FR 18933, Apr. 29, 1996]



Sec. 177.801  Unacceptable hazardous materials shipments.

    No person may accept for transportation or transport by motor 
vehicle a forbidden material or hazardous material that is not prepared 
in accordance with the requirements of this subchapter.

[Amdt. 177-87, 61 FR 27175, May 30. 1996]



Sec. 177.802  Inspection.

    Records, equipment, packagings and containers under the control of a 
motor carrier, insofar as they affect safety in transportation of 
hazardous materials by motor vehicle, must be made available for 
examination and inspection by a duly authorized representative of the 
Department.

[Amdt. 177-71, 54 FR 25015, June 12, 1989]



Sec. 177.804  Compliance with Federal Motor Carrier Safety Regulations.

    Motor carriers and other persons subject to this part shall comply 
with 49 CFR parts 390 through 397 (excluding Secs. 397.3 and 397.9) to 
the extent those regulations apply.

[Amdt. 177-81, 58 FR 50505, Sept. 27, 1993]



Sec. 177.810  Vehicular tunnels.

    Except as regards Class 7 (radioactive) materials, nothing contained 
in parts 170-189 of this subchapter shall be so construed as to nullify 
or supersede regulations established and published

[[Page 738]]

under authority of State statute or municipal ordinance regarding the 
kind, character, or quantity of any hazardous material permitted by such 
regulations to be transported through any urban vehicular tunnel used 
for mass transportation.

[Amdt. 177-52, 46 FR 5316, Jan. 19, 1981, as amended by Amdt. 177-78, 55 
FR 52710, Dec. 21, 1990; 62 FR 51561, Oct. 1, 1997]



Sec. 177.816  Driver training.

    (a) In addition to the training requirements of Sec. 177.800, no 
carrier may transport, or cause to be transported, a hazardous material 
unless each hazmat employee who will operate a motor vehicle has been 
trained in the applicable requirements of 49 CFR parts 390 through 397 
and the procedures necessary for the safe operation of that motor 
vehicle. Driver training shall include the following subjects:
    (1) Pre-trip safety inspection;
    (2) Use of vehicle controls and equipment, including operation of 
emergency equipment;
    (3) Operation of vehicle, including turning, backing, braking, 
parking, handling, and vehicle characteristics including those that 
affect vehicle stability, such as effects of braking and curves, effects 
of speed on vehicle control, dangers associated with maneuvering through 
curves, dangers associated with weather or road conditions that a driver 
may experience (e.g., blizzards, mountainous terrain, high winds), and 
high center of gravity;
    (4) Procedures for maneuvering tunnels, bridges, and railroad 
crossings;
    (5) Requirements pertaining to attendance of vehicles, parking, 
smoking, routing, and incident reporting; and
    (6) Loading and unloading of materials, including--
    (i) Compatibility and segregation of cargo in a mixed load;
    (ii) Package handling methods; and
    (iii) Load securement.
    (b) Specialized requirements for cargo tanks and portable tanks. In 
addition to the training requirement of paragraph (a) of this section, 
each person who operates a cargo tank or a vehicle with a portable tank 
with a capacity of 1,000 gallons or more must receive training 
applicable to the requirements of this subchapter and have the 
appropriate State-issued commercial driver's license required by 49 CFR 
part 383. Specialized training shall include the following:
    (1) Operation of emergency control features of the cargo tank or 
portable tank;
    (2) Special vehicle handling characteristics, including: high center 
of gravity, fluid-load subject to surge, effects of fluid-load surge on 
braking, characteristic differences in stability among baffled, 
unbaffled, and multi-compartmented tanks; and effects of partial loads 
on vehicle stability;
    (3) Loading and unloading procedures;
    (4) The properties and hazards of the material transported; and
    (5) Retest and inspection requirements for cargo tanks.
    (c) The training required by paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section 
may be satisfied by compliance with the current requirements for a 
Commercial Driver's License (CDL) with a tank vehicle or hazardous 
materials endorsement.
    (d) Training required by paragraph (b) of this section must conform 
to the requirements of Sec. 172.704 of this subchapter with respect to 
frequency and recordkeeping.

[Amdt. 177-79, 57 FR 20954, May 15, 1992, as amended by Amdt. 177-79, 58 
FR 5852, Jan. 22, 1993]



Sec. 177.817  Shipping papers.

    (a) General requirements. A person may not accept a hazardous 
material for transportation or transport a hazardous material by highway 
unless that person has received a shipping paper prepared in accordance 
with part 172 of this subchapter, unless the material is excepted from 
shipping paper requirements under this subchapter. A carrier may not 
transport a hazardous material unless it is accompanied by a shipping 
paper prepared in accordance with part 172 of this subchapter.
    (b) Shipper certification. An initial carrier may not accept a 
hazardous material offered for transportation unless the shipping paper 
describing the material includes a shipper's certification which meets 
the requirements in Sec. 172.204 of this subchapter. Except

[[Page 739]]

for a hazardous waste, the certification is not required for shipments 
to be transported entirely by private carriage and for bulk shipments to 
be transported in a cargo tank supplied by the carrier.
    (c) Requirements when interlining with carriers by rail. A motor 
carrier shall mark on the shipping paper required by this section, if it 
offers or delivers a freight container or transport vehicle to a rail 
carrier for further transportation:
    (1) A description of the freight container or transport vehicle; and
    (2) The kind of placard affixed to the freight container or 
transport vehicle.
    (d) This subpart does not apply to a material that is excepted from 
shipping paper requirements as specified in Sec. 172.200 of this 
subchapter.
    (e) Shipping paper accessibility--accident or inspection. A driver 
of a motor vehicle containing hazardous material, and each carrier using 
such a vehicle, shall ensure that the shipping paper required by this 
section is readily available to, and recognizable by, authorities in the 
event of accident or inspection. Specifically, the driver and the 
carrier shall:
    (1) Clearly distinguish the shipping paper, if it is carried with 
other shipping papers or other papers of any kind, by either 
distinctively tabbing it or by having it appear first; and
    (2) Store the shipping paper as follows:
    (i) When the driver is at the vehicle's controls, the shipping paper 
shall be: (A) Within his immediate reach while he is restrained by the 
lap belt; and (B) either readily visible to a person entering the 
driver's compartment or in a holder which is mounted to the inside of 
the door on the driver's side of the vehicle.
    (ii) When the driver is not at the vehicle's controls, the shipping 
paper shall be: (A) In a holder which is mounted to the inside of the 
door on the driver's side of the vehicle; or (B) on the driver's seat in 
the vehicle.
    (f) Retention of shipping papers. Each person receiving a shipping 
paper required by this section must retain a copy or an electronic image 
thereof, that is accessible at or through its principal place of 
business and must make the shipping paper immediately available, upon 
request, to an authorized official of a Federal, State, or local 
government agency at reasonable times and locations. For a hazardous 
waste, the shipping paper copy must be retained for three years after 
the material is accepted by the initial carrier. For all other hazardous 
materials, the shipping paper copy must be retained for 375 days after 
the material is accepted by the carrier. Each shipping paper copy must 
include the date of acceptance by the carrier. A motor carrier (as 
defined in Sec. 390.5 of Subchapter B of Chapter III of Subtitle B) that 
uses a shipping paper without change for multiple shipments of a single 
hazardous material (i.e., one having the same shipping name and 
identification number) may retain a single copy of the shipping paper, 
instead of a copy for each shipment made, if the carrier also retains a 
record of each shipment made, to include shipping name, identification 
number, quantity transported, and date of shipment.

[Amdt. 177-35, 41 FR 16130, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 177-35A, 
41 FR 40691, Sept. 20, 1976; Amdt. 177-48, 45 FR 47670, Nov. 10, 1980; 
Amdt. 177-65, 50 FR 11055, Mar. 19, 1985; Amdt. 177-72, 53 FR 17160, May 
13, 1988; 67 FR 46128, July 12, 2002]



Sec. 177.823  Movement of motor vehicles in emergency situations.

    (a) A carrier may not move a transport vehicle containing a 
hazardous material unless the vehicle is marked and placarded in 
accordance with part 172 or as authorized in Sec. 171.12a of this 
subchapter, or unless, in an emergency:
    (1) The vehicle is escorted by a representative of a state or local 
government;
    (2) The carrier has permission from the Department; or
    (3) Movement of the transport vehicle is necessary to protect life 
or property.
    (b) Disposition of contents of cargo tank when unsafe to continue. 
In the event of a leak in a cargo tank of such a character as to make 
further transportation unsafe, the leaking vehicle should be removed 
from the traveled portion of the highway and every available means 
employed for the safe disposal of the leaking material by preventing, so 
far as practicable, its

[[Page 740]]

spread over a wide area, such as by digging trenches to drain to a hole 
or depression in the ground, diverting the liquid away from streams or 
sewers if possible, or catching the liquid in containers if practicable. 
Smoking, and any other source of ignition, in the vicinity of a leaking 
cargo tank is not permitted.
    (c) Movement of leaking cargo tanks. A leaking cargo tank may be 
transported only the minimum distance necessary to reach a place where 
the contents of the tank or compartment may be disposed of safely. Every 
available means must be utilized to prevent the leakage or spillage of 
the liquid upon the highway.

[Amdt. 177-35, 41 FR 16130, Apr. 15, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 177-67, 
50 FR 41521, Oct. 11, 1985; Amdt. 177-86, 61 FR 18933, Apr. 29, 1996]



                    Subpart B--Loading and Unloading

    Note: For prohibited loading and storage of hazardous materials, see 
Sec. 177.848.



Sec. 177.834  General requirements.

    (a) Packages secured in a vehicle. Any tank, barrel, drum, cylinder, 
or other packaging, not permanently attached to a motor vehicle, which 
contains any Class 3 (flammable liquid), Class 2 (gases), Class 8 
(corrosive), Division 6.1 (poisonous), or Class 7 (radioactive) material 
must be secured against movement within the vehicle on which it is being 
transported, under conditions normally incident to transportation.
    (b) [Reserved]
    (c) No smoking while loading or unloading. Smoking on or about any 
motor vehicle while loading or unloading any Class 1 (explosive), Class 
3 (flammable liquid), Class 4 (flammable solid), Class 5 (oxidizing), or 
Division 2.1 (flammable gas) materials is forbidden.
    (d) Keep fire away, loading and unloading. Extreme care shall be 
taken in the loading or unloading of any Class 1 (explosive), Class 3 
(flammable liquid), Class 4 (flammable solid), Class 5 (oxidizing), or 
Division 2.1 (flammable gas) materials into or from any motor vehicle to 
keep fire away and to prevent persons in the vicinity from smoking, 
lighting matches, or carrying any flame or lighted cigar, pipe, or 
cigarette.
    (e) Handbrake set while loading and unloading. No hazardous material 
shall be loaded into or on, or unloaded from, any motor vehicle unless 
the handbrake be securely set and all other reasonable precautions be 
taken to prevent motion of the motor vehicle during such loading or 
unloading process.
    (f) Use of tools, loading and unloading. No tools which are likely 
to damage the effectiveness of the closure of any package or other 
container, or likely adversely to affect such package or container, 
shall be used for the loading or unloading of any Class 1 (explosive) 
material or other dangerous article.
    (g) Prevent relative motion between containers. Containers of Class 
1 (explosive), Class 3 (flammable liquid), Class 4 (flammable solid), 
Class 5 (oxidizing), Class 8 (corrosive), Class 2 (gases) and Division 
6.1 (poisonous) materials, must be so braced as to prevent motion 
thereof relative to the vehicle while in transit. Containers having 
valves or other fittings must be so loaded that there will be the 
minimum likelihood of damage thereto during transportation.
    (h) Precautions concerning containers in transit; fueling road 
units. Reasonable care should be taken to prevent undue rise in 
temperature of containers and their contents during transit. There must 
be no tampering with such container or the contents thereof nor any 
discharge of the contents of any container between point of origin and 
point of billed destination. Discharge of contents of any container, 
other than a cargo tank or IM portable tank, must not be made prior to 
removal from the motor vehicle. Nothing contained in this paragraph 
shall be so construed as to prohibit the fueling of machinery or 
vehicles used in road construction or maintenance.
    (i) Attendance requirements. (1) Loading. A cargo tank must be 
attended by a qualified person at all times when it is being loaded. The 
person who is responsible for loading the cargo tank is also responsible 
for ensuring that it is so attended.
    (2) Unloading. A motor carrier who transports hazardous materials by 
a

[[Page 741]]

cargo tank must ensure that the cargo tank is attended by a qualified 
person at all times during unloading. However, the carrier's obligation 
to ensure attendance during unloading ceases when:
    (i) The carrier's obligation for transporting the materials is 
fulfilled;
    (ii) The cargo tank has been placed upon the consignee's premises; 
and
    (iii) The motive power has been removed from the cargo tank and 
removed from the premises.
    (3) Except for unloading operations subject to Secs. 177.837(d), 
177.840(p), and 177.840(q), a qualified person ``attends'' the loading 
or unloading of a cargo tank if, throughout the process, he is alert and 
is within 7.62 m (25 feet) of the cargo tank. The qualified person 
attending the unloading of a cargo tank must have an unobstructed view 
of the cargo tank and delivery hose to the maximum extent practicable 
during the unloading operation.
    (4) A person is ``qualified'' if he has been made aware of the 
nature of the hazardous material which is to be loaded or unloaded, he 
has been instructed on the procedures to be followed in emergencies, he 
is authorized to move the cargo tank, and he has the means to do so.
    (j) Manholes and valves closed. A person may not drive a cargo tank 
and a motor carrier may not permit a person to drive a cargo tank motor 
vehicle containing a hazardous material regardless of quantity unless:
    (1) All manhole closures are closed and secured; and
    (2) All valves and other closures in liquid discharge systems are 
closed and free of leaks.
    (k) [Reserved]
    (l) Use of cargo heaters when transporting certain hazardous 
material. Transportation includes loading, carrying, and unloading.
    (1) When transporting Class 1 (explosive) materials. A motor vehicle 
equipped with a cargo heater of any type may transport Class 1 
(explosive) materials only if the cargo heater is rendered inoperable 
by: (i) Draining or removing the cargo heater fuel tank; and (ii) 
disconnecting the heater's power source.
    (2) When transporting certain flammable material--(i) Use of 
combustion cargo heaters. A motor vehicle equipped with a combustion 
cargo heater may be used to transport Class 3 (flammable liquid) or 
Division 2.1 (flammable gas) materials only if each of the following 
requirements are met:
    (A) It is a catalytic heater.
    (B) The heater's surface temperature cannot exceed 54  deg.C (130 
deg.F)--either on a thermostatically controlled heater or on a heater 
without thermostatic control when the outside or ambient temperature is 
16  deg.C (61  deg.F) or less.
    (C) The heater is not ignited in a loaded vehicle.
    (D) There is no flame, either on the catalyst or anywhere in the 
heater.
    (E) The manufacturer has certified that the heater meets the 
requirements under paragraph (l)(2)(i) of this section by permanently 
marking the heater ``MEETS DOT REQUIREMENTS FOR CATALYTIC HEATERS USED 
WITH FLAMMABLE LIQUID AND GAS.''
    (F) The heater is also marked ``DO NOT LOAD INTO OR USE IN CARGO 
COMPARTMENTS CONTAINING FLAMMABLE LIQUID OR GAS IF FLAME IS VISIBLE ON 
CATALYST OR IN HEATER.''
    (G) Heater requirements under Sec. 393.77 of this title are complied 
with.
    (ii) Effective date for combustion heater requirements. The 
requirements under paragraph (l)(2)(i) of this section govern as 
follows:
    (A) Use of a heater manufactured after November 14, 1975, is 
governed by every requirement under (l)(2)(i) of this section;
    (B) Use of a heater manufactured before November 15, 1975, is 
governed only by the requirements under (l)(2)(i) (A), (C), (D), (F) and 
(G) of this section until October 1, 1976; and
    (C) Use of any heater after September 30, 1976, is governed by every 
requirement under paragraph (l)(2)(i) of this section.
    (iii) Restrictions on automatic cargo-space-heating temperature 
control devices. Restrictions on these devices have two dimensions: 
Restrictions upon use and restrictions which apply when the device must 
not be used.

[[Page 742]]

    (A) Use restrictions. An automatic cargo-space-heating temperature 
control device may be used when transporting Class 3 (flammable liquid) 
or Division 2.1 (flammable gas) materials only if each of the following 
requirements is met:
    (1) Electrical apparatus in the cargo compartment is nonsparking or 
explosion proof.
    (2) There is no combustion apparatus in the cargo compartment.
    (3) There is no connection for return of air from the cargo 
compartment to the combustion apparatus.
    (4) The heating system will not heat any part of the cargo to more 
than 54  deg.C (129  deg.F).
    (5) Heater requirements under Sec. 393.77 of this title are complied 
with.
    (B) Protection against use. Class 3 (flammable liquid) or Division 
2.1 (flammable gas) materials may be transported by a vehicle, which is 
equipped with an automatic cargo-space-heating temperature control 
device that does not meet each requirement of paragraph (l)(2)(iii)(A) 
of this section, only if the device is first rendered inoperable, as 
follows:
    (1) Each cargo heater fuel tank, if other than LPG, must be emptied 
or removed.
    (2) Each LPG fuel tank for automatic temperature control equipment 
must have its discharge valve closed and its fuel feed line 
disconnected.
    (m) Tanks constructed and maintained in compliance with Spec. 106A 
or 110A (Secs. 179.300, 179.301 of this subchapter) that are authorized 
for the shipment of hazardous materials by highway in part 173 of this 
subchapter must be carried in accordance with the following 
requirements:
    (1) Tanks must be securely chocked or clamped on vehicles to prevent 
any shifting.
    (2) Equipment suitable for handling a tank must be provided at any 
point where a tank is to be loaded upon or removed from a vehicle.
    (3) No more than two cargo carrying vehicles may be in the same 
combination of vehicles.
    (4) Compliance with Secs. 174.200 and 174.204 of this subchapter for 
combination rail freight, highway shipments and for trailer-on-flat-car 
service is required.
    (n) Specification 56, 57, IM 101, and IM 102 portable tanks, when 
loaded, may not be stacked on each other nor placed under other freight 
during transportation by motor vehicle.
    (o) Unloading of IM portable tanks. An IM portable tank may be 
unloaded while remaining on a transport vehicle with the power unit 
attached if the tank meets the outlet requirements in Sec. 178.345-11 of 
this subchapter and the tank is attended by a qualified person during 
the unloading in accordance with the requirements in paragraph (i) of 
this section.

[29 FR 18795, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967]

    Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting 
Sec. 177.834, see the List of CFR Sections Affected which appears in the 
Finding Aids section of the printed volume and on GPO Access.

    Effective Date Note: At 67 FR 53142, Aug. 14, 2002, Sec. 177.834 was 
amended by revising paragraphs (a) and (g), effective Oct. 1, 2002. At 
67 FR 54967, Aug. 27, 2002, the effective date was corrected to Feb. 14, 
2003. For the convenience of the user, the revised text is set forth as 
follows:

Sec. 177.834  General requirements.

    (a) Packages secured in a vehicle. Any tank, barrel, drum, cylinder, 
or other packaging not permanently attached to a motor vehicle and 
containing any Class 2 (gases), Class 3 (flammable liquid), Division 6.1 
(poisonous), Division 6.2 (infectious substance), Class 7 (radioactive), 
or Class 8 (corrosive) material must be secured against movement within 
the vehicle on which it is being transported, under conditions normally 
incident to transportation.

                                * * * * *

    (g) Prevent relative motion between containers. Containers of Class 
1 (explosive), Class 2 (gases), Class 3 (flammable liquid), Class 4 
(flammable solid), Class 5 (oxidizing), Division 6.1 (poisonous), 
Division 6.2 (infectious substance), or Class 8 (corrosive) materials 
must be so braced as to prevent motion thereof relative to the vehicle 
while in transit. Containers having valves or other fittings must be 
loaded to minimize the likelihood of damage thereto during 
transportation.

                                * * * * *

[[Page 743]]



Sec. 177.835  Class 1 (explosive) materials.

    (See also Sec. 177.834 (a) to (j).)
    (a) Engine stopped. No Class 1 (explosive) materials shall be loaded 
into or on or be unloaded from any motor vehicle with the engine 
running.
    (b) Care in loading, unloading, or other handling of Class 1 
(explosive) materials. No bale hooks or other metal tools shall be used 
for the loading, unloading, or other handling of Class 1 (explosive) 
materials, nor shall any package or other container of Class 1 
(explosive) materials, except barrels or kegs, be rolled. No packages of 
Class 1 (explosive) materials shall be thrown or dropped during process 
of loading or unloading or handling of Class 1 (explosive) materials. 
Special care shall be exercised to the end that packages or other 
containers containing Class 1 (explosive) materials shall not catch fire 
from sparks or hot gases from the exhaust tailpipe.
    (1) Whenever tarpaulins are used for covering Class 1 (explosive) 
materials, they shall be secured by means of rope, wire, or other 
equally efficient tie downs. Class 1 (explosive) materials placards or 
markings required by Sec. 177.823 shall be secured, in the appropriate 
locations, directly to the equipment transporting the Class 1 
(explosive) materials. If the vehicle is provided with placard boards, 
the placards must be applied to these boards.
    (2) [Reserved]
    (c) Class 1 (explosive) materials on vehicles in combination. 
Division 1.1 or 1.2 (explosive) materials may not be loaded into or 
carried on any vehicle or a combination of vehicles if:
    (1) More than two cargo carrying vehicles are in the combination;
    (2) Any full trailer in the combination has a wheel base of less 
than 184 inches;
    (3) Any vehicle in the combination is a cargo tank which is required 
to be marked or placarded under Sec. 177.823; or
    (4) The other vehicle in the combination contains any:
    (i) Substances, explosive, n.o.s., Division 1.1A (explosive) 
material (Initiating explosive),
    (ii) Packages of Class 7 (radioactive) materials bearing ``Yellow 
III'' labels,
    (iii) Division 2.3 (poisonous gas) or Division 6.1 (poisonous) 
materials, or
    (iv) Hazardous materials in a portable tank or a DOT specification 
106A or 110A tank.
    (d) [Reserved]
    (e) No sharp projections inside body of vehicles. No motor vehicle 
transporting any kind of Class 1 (explosive) material shall have on the 
interior of the body in which the Class 1 (explosive) materials are 
contained, any inwardly projecting bolts, screws, nails, or other 
inwardly projecting parts likely to produce damage to any package or 
container of Class 1 (explosive) materials during the loading or 
unloading process or in transit.
    (f) Class 1 (explosive) materials vehicles, floors tight and lined. 
Motor vehicles transporting Division 1.1, 1.2, or 1.3 (explosive) 
materials shall have tight floors; shall have that portion of the 
interior in contact with the load lined with either non-metallic 
material or non-ferrous metals, except that the lining is not required 
for truck load shipments loaded by the Departments of the Army, Navy or 
Air Force of the United States Government provided the Class 1 
(explosive) materials are of such nature that they are not liable to 
leakage of dust, powder, or vapor which might become the cause of an 
explosion. The interior of the cargo space must be in good condition so 
that there will not be any likelihood of containers being damaged by 
exposed bolts, nuts, broken side panels or floor boards, or any similar 
projections.
    (g) No detonator assembly or booster with detonator may be 
transported on the same motor vehicle with any Division 1.1, 1.2 or 1.3 
material (except other detonator assemblies, boosters with detonators or 
detonators), detonating cord Division 1.4 material or Division 1.5 
material. No detonator may be transported on the same motor vehicle with 
any Division 1.1, 1.2 or 1.3 material (except other detonators, 
detonator assemblies or boosters with detonators), detonating cord 
Division 1.4 material or Division 1.5 material unless--
    (1) It is packed in a specification MC 201 (Sec. 178.318 of this 
subchapter) container; or
    (2) The package conforms with requirements prescribed in Sec. 173.63 
of this

[[Page 744]]

subchapter, and its use is restricted to instances when--
    (i) There is no Division 1.1, 1.2, 1.3 or 1.5 material loaded on the 
motor vehicle; and
    (ii) A separation of 61 cm (24 inches) is maintained between each 
package of detonators and each package of detonating cord; or
    (3) It is packed and loaded in accordance with a method approved by 
the Department. One method approved by the Department requires that--
    (i) The detonators are in packagings as prescribed in Sec. 173.63 of 
this subchapter which in turn are loaded into suitable containers or 
separate compartments; and
    (ii) That both the detonators and the container or compartment meet 
the requirements of the Institute of Makers of Explosives' Safety 
Library Publication No. 22 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 171.7 of 
this subchapter).
    (h) Lading within body or covered tailgate closed. Except as 
provided in paragraph (g) of this section, dealing with the 
transportation of liquid nitroglycerin, desensitized liquid 
nitroglycerin or diethylene glycol dinitrate, all of that portion of the 
lading of any motor vehicle which consists of Class 1 (explosive) 
materials shall be contained entirely within the body of the motor 
vehicle or within the horizontal outline thereof, without overhang or 
projection of any part of the load and if such motor vehicle has a 
tailboard or tailgate, it shall be closed and secured in place during 
such transportation. Every motor vehicle transporting Class 1 
(explosive) materials must either have a closed body or have the body 
thereof covered with a tarpaulin, and in either event care must be taken 
to protect the load from moisture and sparks, except that subject to 
other provisions of these regulations, Class 1 (explosive) materials 
other than black powder may be transported on flat-bed vehicles if the 
explosive portion of the load on each vehicle is packed in fire and 
water resistant containers or covered with a fire and water resistant 
tarpaulin.
    (i) Class 1 (explosive) materials to be protected against damage by 
other lading. No motor vehicle transporting any Class 1 (explosive) 
material may transport as a part of its load any metal or other articles 
or materials likely to damage such Class 1 (explosive) material or any 
package in which it is contained, unless the different parts of such 
load be so segregated or secured in place in or on the motor vehicle and 
separated by bulkheads or other suitable means as to prevent such 
damage.
    (j) Transfer of Class 1 (explosive) materials en route. No Division 
1.1, 1.2, or 1.3 (explosive) material shall be transferred from one 
container to another, or from one motor vehicle to another vehicle, or 
from another vehicle to a motor vehicle, on any public highway, street, 
or road, except in case of emergency. In such cases red electric 
lanterns, red emergency reflectors or red flags shall be set out in the 
manner prescribed for disabled or stopped motor vehicles. (See Motor 
Carrier Safety Regulations, part 392 of this title.) In any event, all 
practicable means, in addition to these hereinbefore prescribed, shall 
be taken to protect and warn other users of the highway against the 
hazard involved in any such transfer or against the hazard occasioned by 
the emergency making such transfer necessary.

[29 FR 18795, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967]

    Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting 
Sec. 177.835, see the List of CFR Sections Affected which appears in the 
Finding Aids section of the printed volume and on GPO Access.



Sec. 177.837  Class 3 (flammable liquid) materials.

    (See also Sec. 177.834 (a) to (j).)
    (a) Engine stopped. Unless the engine of a cargo tank motor vehicle 
is to be used for the operation of a pump, no Class 3 material shall be 
loaded into, or on, or unloaded from any cargo tank motor vehicle while 
the engine is running.
    (b) Bonding and grounding containers other than cargo tanks prior to 
and during transfer of lading. For containers which are not in metallic 
contact with each other, either metallic bonds or ground conductors 
shall be provided for the neutralization of possible static charges 
prior to and during transfers of Class 3 (flammable liquid) materials 
between such containers. Such bonding

[[Page 745]]

shall be made by first connecting an electric conductor to the container 
to be filled and subsequently connecting the conductor to the container 
from which the liquid is to come, and not in any other order. To provide 
against ignition of vapors by discharge of static electricity, the 
latter connection shall be made at a point well removed from the opening 
from which the Class 3 (flammable liquid) material is to be discharged.
    (c) Bonding and grounding cargo tanks before and during transfer of 
lading. (1) When a cargo tank is loaded through an open filling hole, 
one end of a bond wire shall be connected to the stationary system 
piping or integrally connected steel framing, and the other end to the 
shell of the cargo tank to provide a continuous electrical connection. 
(If bonding is to the framing, it is essential that piping and framing 
be electrically interconnected.) This connection must be made before any 
filling hole is opened, and must remain in place until after the last 
filling hole has been closed. Additional bond wires are not needed 
around All-Metal flexible or swivel joints, but are required for 
nonmetallic flexible connections in the stationary system piping. When a 
cargo tank is unloaded by a suction-piping system through an open 
filling hole of the cargo tank, electrical continuity shall be 
maintained from cargo tank to receiving tank.
    (2) When a cargo tank is loaded or unloaded through a vapor-tight 
(not open hole) top or bottom connection, so that there is no release of 
vapor at a point where a spark could occur, bonding or grounding is not 
required. Contact of the closed connection must be made before flow 
starts and must not be broken until after the flow is completed.
    (3) Bonding or grounding is not required when a cargo tank is 
unloaded through a nonvapor-tight connection into a stationary tank 
provided the metallic filling connection is maintained in contact with 
the filling hole.
    (d) Unloading combustible liquids. For a cargo tank unloading a 
material meeting the definition for combustible liquid in 
Sec. 173.150(f) of this subchapter, the qualified person attending the 
unloading operation must remain within 45.72 meters (150 feet) of the 
cargo tank and 7.62 meters (25 feet) of the delivery hose and must 
observe both the cargo tank and the receiving container at least once 
every five minutes during unloading operations that take more than five 
minutes to complete.

[29 FR 18795, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967]

    Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting 
Sec. 177.837, see the List of CFR Sections Affected which appears in the 
Finding Aids section of the printed volume and on GPO Access.



Sec. 177.838  Class 4 (flammable solid) materials, Class 5 (oxidizing) materials, and Division 4.2 (pyroforic liquid) materials.

    (See also Sec. 177.834 (a) to (j).)
    (a) Lading within body or covered; tailgate closed; pick-up and 
delivery. All of that portion of the lading of any motor vehicle 
transporting Class 4 (flammable solid) or Class 5 (oxidizing) materials 
shall be contained entirely within the body of the motor vehicle and 
shall be covered by such body, by tarpaulins, or other suitable means, 
and if such motor vehicle has a tailboard or tailgate, it shall be 
closed and secured in place during such transportation: Provided, 
however, That the provisions of this paragraph need not apply to ``pick-
up and delivery'' motor vehicles when such motor vehicles are used in no 
other transportation than in and about cities, towns, or villages. 
Shipment in water-tight bulk containers need not be covered by a 
tarpaulin or other means.
    (b) Articles to be kept dry. Special care shall be taken in the 
loading of any motor vehicle with Class 4 (flammable solid) or Class 5 
(oxidizing) materials which are likely to become hazardous to transport 
when wet, to keep them from being wetted during the loading process and 
to keep them dry during transit. Special care shall also be taken in the 
loading of any motor vehicle with Class 4 (flammable solid) or Class 5 
(oxidizing) materials, which are likely to become more hazardous to 
transport by wetting, to keep them from being wetted during the loading 
process and to keep them dry during transit. Examples of such dangerous 
materials are charcoal screenings,

[[Page 746]]

ground, crushed, or pulverized charcoal, and lump charcoal.
    (c) Lading ventilation, precautions against spontaneous combustion. 
Whenever a motor carrier has knowledge concerning the hazards of 
spontaneous combustion or heating of any article to be loaded on a motor 
vehicle, such article shall be so loaded as to afford sufficient 
ventilation of the load to provide reasonable assurance against fire 
from this cause; and in such a case the motor vehicle shall be unloaded 
as soon as practicable after reaching its destination. Charcoal 
screenings, or ground, crushed, granulated, or pulverized charcoal, in 
bags, shall be so loaded that the bags are laid horizontally in the 
motor vehicle, and so piled that there will be spaces for effective air 
circulation, which spaces shall not be less than 10 cm (3.9 inches) 
wide; and air spaces shall be maintained between rows of bags. Bags 
shall not be piled closer than 15 cm (5.9 inches) from the top of any 
motor vehicle with a closed body.
    (d)-(e) [Reserved]
    (f) Nitrates, except ammonium nitrate having organic coating, must 
be loaded in closed or open type motor vehicles, which must be swept 
clean and be free of any projections capable of injuring bags when so 
packaged. When shipped in open type motor vehicles, the lading must be 
suitably covered. Ammonium nitrate having organic coating must not be 
loaded in all-metal vehicles, other than those made of aluminum or 
aluminum alloys of the closed type.
    (g) A motor vehicle may only contain 45.4 kg (100 pounds) or less 
net mass of material described as ``Smokeless powder for small arms, 
Division 4.1''.
    (h) Division 4.2 (pyrophoric liquid) materials in cylinders. 
Cylinders containing Division 4.2 (pyrophoric liquid) materials, unless 
packed in a strong box or case and secured therein to protect valves, 
must be loaded with all valves and safety relief devices in the vapor 
space. All cylinders must be secured so that no shifting occurs in 
transit.

[29 FR 18795, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967]

    Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting 
Sec. 177.838, see the List of CFR Sections Affected which appears in the 
Finding Aids section of the printed volume and on GPO Access.



Sec. 177.839  Class 8 (corrosive) materials.

    (See also Sec. 177.834(a) through (j).)
    (a) Nitric acid. No packaging of nitric acid of 50 percent or 
greater concentration may be loaded above any packaging containing any 
other kind of material.
    (b) Storage batteries. All storage batteries containing any 
electrolyte must be so loaded, if loaded with other lading, that all 
such batteries will be protected against other lading falling onto or 
against them, and adequate means must be provided in all cases for the 
protection and insulation of battery terminals against short circuits.

[Amdt. 177-87, 61 FR 27175, May 30, 1996]



Sec. 177.840  Class 2 (gases) materials.

    (See also Sec. 177.834 (a) to (j).)
    (a) Floors or platforms essentially flat. Cylinders containing Class 
2 (gases) materials shall not be loaded onto any part of the floor or 
platform of any motor vehicle which is not essentially flat; cylinders 
containing Class 2 (gases) materials may be loaded onto any motor 
vehicle not having a floor or platform only if such motor vehicle be 
equipped with suitable racks having adequate means for securing such 
cylinders in place therein. Nothing contained in this section shall be 
so construed as to prohibit the loading of such cylinders on any motor 
vehicle having a floor or platform and racks as hereinbefore described.
    (1) Cylinders. Cylinders containing Class 2 (gases) materials must 
be securely restrained in an upright position, loaded in racks, or 
packed in boxes or crates and securely attached to the motor vehicle to 
prevent the cylinders from being shifted, overturned or ejected from the 
vehicle under normal transportation conditions. After May 30,2003, a 
cylinder containing a Class 2 material may be loaded in a horizontal 
position when the cylinder is designed so that the inlet port to the 
relief channel of the pressure relief device is located in the vapor 
space of the cylinder.
    (2) Cylinders for hydrogen, cryogenic liquid. A Specification DOT-4L 
cylinder containing hydrogen, cryogenic liquid

[[Page 747]]

may only be transported on a motor vehicle as follows:
    (i) The vehicle must have an open body equipped with a suitable rack 
or support having a means to hold the cylinder upright when subjected to 
an acceleration of 2 ``g'' in any horizontal direction;
    (ii) The combined total of the hydrogen venting rates, as marked, on 
the cylinders transported on one motor vehicle may not exceed 60 SCF per 
hour;
    (iii) The vehicle may not enter a tunnel; and
    (iv) Highway transportation is limited to private and contract 
carriage and to direct movement from point of origin to destination.
    (b) Portable tank containers containing Class 2 (gases) materials 
shall be loaded on motor vehicles only as follows:
    (1) Onto a flat floor or platform of a motor vehicle.
    (2) Onto a suitable frame of a motor vehicle.
    (3) In either such case, such containers shall be safely and 
securely blocked or held down to prevent movement relative to each other 
or to the supporting structure when in transit, particularly during 
sudden starts and stops and changes of direction of the vehicle.
    (4) Requirements of paragraphs (1) and (2) of this paragraph (b) 
shall not be construed as prohibiting stacking of containers provided 
the provisions of paragraph (3) of this paragraph (b) are fully complied 
with.
    (c) [Reserved]
    (d) Engine to be stopped in cargo tank motor vehicles, except for 
transfer pump. No Division 2.1 (flammable gas) material shall be loaded 
into or on or unloaded from any cargo tank motor vehicles with the 
engine running unless the engine is used for the operation of the 
transfer pump of the vehicle. Unless the delivery hose is equipped with 
a shut-off valve at its discharge end, the engine of the motor vehicle 
shall be stopped at the finish of such loading or unloading operation 
while the filling or discharge connections are disconnected.
    (e) Chlorine cargo tank motor vehicles shall be shipped only when 
equipped:
    (1) With a gas mask of a type approved by the The National Institute 
of Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) Pittsburgh Research Center, 
U.S. Department of Health and Human Services for chlorine service; and
    (2) With an emergency kit for controlling leaks in fittings on the 
dome cover plate.
    (f) A cargo tank motor vehicle used for transportation of chlorine 
may not be moved, coupled or uncoupled, when any loading or unloading 
connections are attached to the vehicle, nor may it be left without the 
power unit attached unless the vehicle is chocked or equivalent means 
are provided to prevent motion. For additional requirements, see 
Sec. 173.315(o) of this subchapter.
    (g) Each liquid discharge valve on a cargo tank motor vehicle, other 
than an engine fuel line valve, must be closed during transportation 
except during loading and unloading.
    (h) The driver of a motor vehicle transporting a Division 2.1 
(flammable gas) material that is a cryogenic liquid in a package 
exceeding 450 L (119 gallons) of water capacity shall avoid unnecessary 
delays during transportation. If unforeseen conditions cause an 
excessive pressure rise, the driver shall manually vent the tank at a 
remote and safe location. For each shipment, the driver shall make a 
written record of the cargo tank pressure and ambient (outside) 
temperature:
    (1) At the start of each trip,
    (2) Immediately before and after any manual venting,
    (3) At least once every five hours, and
    (4) At the destination point.
    (i) No person may transport a Division 2.1 (flammable gas) material 
that is a cryogenic liquid in a cargo tank motor vehicle unless the 
pressure of the lading is equal to or less than that used to determine 
the marked rated holding time (MRHT) and the one-way travel time (OWTT), 
marked on the cargo tank in conformance with Sec. 173.318(g) of this 
subchapter, is equal to or greater than the elapsed time between the 
start and termination of travel. This prohibition does not apply if, 
prior to expiration of the OWTT, the cargo tank is brought to full 
equilibration as specified in paragraph (j) of this section.

[[Page 748]]

    (j) Full equilibration of a cargo tank transporting a Division 2.1 
(flammable gas) material that is a cryogenic liquid may only be done at 
a facility that loads or unloads a Division 2.1 (flammable gas) material 
that is a cryogenic liquid and must be performed and verified as 
follows:
    (1) The temperature and pressure of the liquid must be reduced by a 
manually controlled release of vapor; and
    (2) The pressure in the cargo tank must be measured at least ten 
minutes after the manual release is terminated.
    (k) A carrier of carbon monoxide, cryogenic liquid must provide each 
driver with a self-contained air breathing apparatus that is approved by 
the National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health; for example, 
Mine Safety Appliance Co., Model 401, catalog number 461704.
    (l) Operating procedure. Each operator of a cargo tank motor vehicle 
that is subject to the emergency discharge control requirements in 
Sec. 173.315(n) of this subchapter must carry on or within the cargo 
tank motor vehicle written emergency discharge control procedures for 
all delivery operations. The procedures must describe the cargo tank 
motor vehicle's emergency discharge control features and, for a passive 
shut-down capability, the parameters within which they are designed to 
function. The procedures must describe the process to be followed if a 
facility-provided hose is used for unloading when the cargo tank motor 
vehicle has a specially equipped delivery hose assembly to meet the 
requirements of Sec. 173.315(n)(2) of this subchapter.
    (m) Cargo tank motor vehicle safety check. Before unloading from a 
cargo tank motor vehicle containing a liquefied compressed gas, the 
qualified person performing the function must check those components of 
the discharge system, including delivery hose assemblies and piping, 
that are readily observed during the normal course of unloading to 
assure that they are of sound quality, without obvious defects 
detectable through visual observation and audio awareness, and that 
connections are secure. This check must be made after the pressure in 
the discharge system has reached at least equilibrium with the pressure 
in the cargo tank. Operators need not use instruments or take 
extraordinary actions to check components not readily visible. No 
operator may unload liquefied compressed gases from a cargo tank motor 
vehicle with a delivery hose assembly found to have any condition 
identified in Sec. 180.416(g)(1) of this subchapter or with piping 
systems found to have any condition identified in Sec. 180.416(g)(2) of 
this subchapter.
    (n) Emergency shut down. If there is an unintentional release of 
product to the environment during unloading of a liquefied compressed 
gas, the qualified person unloading the cargo tank motor vehicle must 
promptly shut the internal self-closing stop valve or other primary 
means of closure and shut down all motive and auxiliary power equipment.
    (o) Daily test of off-truck remote shut-off activation device. For a 
cargo tank motor vehicle equipped with an off-truck remote means to 
close the internal self-closing stop valve and shut off all motive and 
auxiliary power equipment, an operator must successfully test the 
activation device within 18 hours prior to the first delivery of each 
day. For a wireless transmitter/receiver, the person conducting the test 
must be at least 45.72 m (150 feet) from the cargo tank and may have the 
cargo tank in his line of sight.
    (p) Unloading procedures for liquefied petroleum gas and anhydrous 
ammonia in metered delivery service. An operator must use the following 
procedures for unloading liquefied petroleum gas or anhydrous ammonia 
from a cargo tank motor vehicle in metered delivery service:
    (1) For a cargo tank with a capacity of 13,247.5 L (3,500 water 
gallons) or less, excluding delivery hose and piping, the qualified 
person attending the unloading operation must remain within 45.72 meters 
(150 feet) of the cargo tank and 7.62 meters (25 feet) of the delivery 
hose and must observe both the cargo tank and the receiving container at 
least once every five minutes when the internal self-closing stop valve 
is open during unloading operations that take more than five minutes to 
complete.

[[Page 749]]

    (2) For a cargo tank with a capacity greater than 13,247.5 L (3,500 
water gallons), excluding delivery hose and piping, the qualified person 
attending the unloading operation must remain within 45.72 m (150 feet) 
of the cargo tank and 7.62 m (25 feet) of the delivery hose when the 
internal self-closing stop valve is open.
    (i) Except as provided in paragraph (p)(2)(ii) of this section, the 
qualified person attending the unloading operation must have an 
unobstructed view of the cargo tank and delivery hose to the maximum 
extent practicable, except during short periods when it is necessary to 
activate controls or monitor the receiving container.
    (ii) For deliveries where the qualified person attending the 
unloading operation cannot maintain an unobstructed view of the cargo 
tank, when the internal self-closing stop valve is open, the qualified 
person must observe both the cargo tank and the receiving container at 
least once every five minutes during unloading operations that take more 
than five minutes to complete. In addition, by the compliance dates 
specified in Secs. 173.315(n)(5) and 180.405(m)(3) of this subchapter, 
the cargo tank motor vehicle must have an emergency discharge control 
capability that meets the requirements of Sec. 173.315(n)(2) or 
Sec. 173.315(n)(4) of this subchapter.
    (q) Unloading procedures for liquefied petroleum gas and anhydrous 
ammonia in other than metered delivery service. An operator must use the 
following procedures for unloading liquefied petroleum gas or anhydrous 
ammonia from a cargo tank motor vehicle in other than metered delivery 
service:
    (1) The qualified person attending the unloading operation must 
remain within 7.62 m (25 feet) of the cargo tank when the internal self-
closing stop valve is open.
    (2) The qualified person attending the unloading operation must have 
an unobstructed view of the cargo tank and delivery hose to the maximum 
extent practicable, except during short periods when it is necessary to 
activate controls or monitor the receiving container.
    (r) Unloading using facility-provided hoses. A cargo tank motor 
vehicle equipped with a specially designed delivery hose assembly to 
meet the requirements of Sec. 173.315(n)(2) of this subchapter may be 
unloaded using a delivery hose assembly provided by the receiving 
facility under the following conditions:
    (1) The qualified person monitoring unloading must visually examine 
the facility hose assembly for obvious defects prior to its use in the 
unloading operation.
    (2) The qualified person monitoring unloading must remain within 
arm's reach of the mechanical means of closure for the internal self-
closing stop valve when the internal self-closing stop valve is open 
except for short periods when it is necessary to activate controls or 
monitor the receiving container. For chlorine cargo tank motor vehicles, 
the qualified person must remain within arm's reach of a means to stop 
the flow of product except for short periods when it is necessary to 
activate controls or monitor the receiving container.
    (3) If the facility hose is equipped with a passive means to shut 
off the flow of product that conforms to and is maintained to the 
performance standard in Sec. 173.315(n)(2) of this subchapter, the 
qualified person may attend the unloading operation in accordance with 
the attendance requirements prescribed for the material being unloaded 
in Sec. 177.834 of this section.
    (s) Off-truck remote shut-off activation device. For a cargo tank 
motor vehicle with an off-truck remote control shut-off capability as 
required by Secs. 173.315(n)(3) or (n)(4) of this subchapter, the 
qualified person attending the unloading operation must be in possession 
of the activation device at all times during the unloading process. This 
requirement does not apply if the activation device is part of a system 
that will shut off the unloading operation without human intervention in 
the event of a leak or separation in the hose.
    (t) Unloading without appropriate emergency discharge control 
equipment. Until a cargo tank motor vehicle is equipped with emergency 
discharge control equipment in conformance with Secs. 173.315(n)(2) and 
180.405(m)(1) of this subchapter, the qualified person attending the 
unloading operation must

[[Page 750]]

remain within arm's reach of a means to close the internal self-closing 
stop valve when the internal self-closing stop valve is open except 
during short periods when the qualified person must activate controls or 
monitor the receiving container. For chlorine cargo tank motor vehicles 
unloaded after December 31, 1999, the qualified person must remain 
within arm's reach of a means to stop the flow of product except for 
short periods when it is necessary to activate controls or monitor the 
receiving container.
    (u) Unloading of chlorine cargo tank motor vehicles. After July 1, 
2001, unloading of chlorine from a cargo tank motor vehicle must be 
performed in compliance with Section 3 of Pamphlet 57, Emergency Shut-
off Systems for Bulk Transfer of Chlorine, of the Chlorine Institute.

(Approved by the Office of Management and Budget under control number 
2137-0542)

[29 FR 18795, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967]

    Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting 
Sec. 177.840, see the List of CFR Sections Affected which appears in the 
Finding Aids section of the printed volume and on GPO Access.



Sec. 177.841  Division 6.1 (poisonous) and Division 2.3 (poisonous gas) materials.

    (See also Sec. 177.834 (a) to (j).)
    (a) Arsenical compounds in bulk. Care shall be exercised in the 
loading and unloading of ``arsenical dust'', ``arsenic trioxide'', and 
``sodium arsenate'', allowable to be loaded into sift-proof, steel 
hopper-type or dump-type motor-vehicle bodies equipped with water-proof, 
dust-proof covers well secured in place on all openings, to accomplish 
such loading with the minimum spread of such compounds into the 
atmosphere by all means that are practicable; and no such loading or 
unloading shall be done near or adjacent to any place where there are or 
are likely to be, during the loading or unloading process assemblages of 
persons other than those engaged in the loading or unloading process, or 
upon any public highway or in any public place. Before any motor vehicle 
may be used for transporting any other articles, all detectable traces 
of arsenical materials must be removed therefrom by flushing with water, 
or by other appropriate method, and the marking removed.
    (b) [Reserved]
    (c) Division 2.3 (poisonous gas) or Division 6.1 (poisonous) 
materials. The transportation of a Division 2.3 (poisonous gas) or 
Division 6.1 (poisonous) material is not permitted if there is any 
interconnection between packagings.
    (d) [Reserved]
    (e) A motor carrier may not transport a package:
    (1) Except as provided in paragraph (e)(3) of this section, bearing 
or required to bear a POISON or POISON INHALATION HAZARD label in the 
same motor vehicle with material that is marked as or known to be a 
foodstuffs, feed or edible material intended for consumption by humans 
or animals unless the poisonous material is packaged in accordance with 
this subchapter and is:
    (i) Overpacked in a metal drum as specified in Sec. 173.25(c) of 
this subchapter; or
    (ii) Loaded into a closed unit load device and the foodstuffs, feed, 
or other edible material are loaded into another closed unit load 
device;
    (2) Bearing or required to bear a POISON, POISON GAS or POISON 
INHALATION HAZARD label in the driver's compartment (including a sleeper 
berth) of a motor vehicle; or
    (3) Bearing a POISON label displaying the text ``PG III,'' or 
bearing a ``PG III'' mark adjacent to the POISON label, with materials 
marked as, or known to be, foodstuffs, feed or any other edible material 
intended for consumption by humans or animals, unless the package 
containing the Division 6.1, Packing Group III material is separated in 
a manner that, in the event of leakage from packages under conditions 
normally incident to transportation, commingling of hazardous materials 
with foodstuffs, feed or any other edible material would not occur.

[29 FR 18795, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, 
as amended by Amdt. 177-89, 62 FR 1236, Jan. 8, 1997; 64 FR 10782, Mar. 
5, 1999]

    Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting 
Sec. 177.841, see the List of CFR

[[Page 751]]

Sections Affected which appears in the Finding Aids section of the 
printed volume and on GPO Access.



Sec. 177.842  Class 7 (radioactive) material.

    (a) The number of packages of Class 7 (radioactive) materials in any 
transport vehicle or in any single group in any storage location must be 
limited so that the total transport index number does not exceed 50. The 
total transport index of a group of packages and overpacks is determined 
by adding together the transport index number on the labels on the 
individual packages and overpacks in the group. This provision does not 
apply to exclusive use shipments described in Secs. 173.441(b), 173.457, 
and 173.427 of this subchapter.
    (b) Packages of Class 7 (radioactive) material bearing ``RADIOACTIVE 
YELLOW-II'' or ``RADIOACTIVE YELLOW-III'' labels may not be placed in a 
transport vehicle, storage location or in any other place closer than 
the distances shown in the following table to any area which may be 
continuously occupied by any passenger, employee, or animal, nor closer 
than the distances shown in the table to any package containing 
undeveloped film (if so marked), and must conform to the following 
conditions:
    (1) If more than one of these packages is present, the distance must 
be computed from the following table on the basis of the total transport 
index number determined by adding together the transport index number on 
the labels on the individual packages and overpacks in the vehicle or 
storeroom.
    (2) Where more than one group of packages is present in any single 
storage location, a single group may not have a total transport index 
greater than 50. Each group of packages must be handled and stowed not 
closer than 6 m (20 feet) (measured edge to edge) to any other group. 
The following table is to be used in accordance with the provisions of 
paragraph (b) of this section:

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                    Minimum separation distance in meters (feet) to nearest          Minimum
                                         undeveloped film in various times of transit              distance in
                              ------------------------------------------------------------------  meters (feet)
                                                                                                    to area of
                                                                                                   persons, or
                                                                                                     minimum
    Total transport index                                                                          distance in
                                  Up to 2     2-4 hours    4-8 hours    8-12 hours    Over 12     meters (feet)
                                   hours                                               hours      from dividing
                                                                                                   partition of
                                                                                                      cargo
                                                                                                   compartments
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
None.........................  0.0 (0)       0.0 (0)      0.0 (0)      0.0 (0)       0.0 (0)     0.0 (0)
0.1 to 1.0...................  0.3 (1)       0.6 (2)      0.9 (3)      1.2 (4)       1.5 (5)     0.3 (1)
1.1 to 5.0...................  0.9 (3)       1.2 (4)      1.8 (6)      2.4 (8)       3.4 (11)    0.6 (2)
5.1 to 10.0..................  1.2 (4)       1.8 (6)      2.7 (9)      3.4 (11)      4.6 (15)    0.9 (3)
10.1 to 20.0.................  1.5 (5)       2.4 (8)      3.7 (12)     4.9 (16)      6.7 (22)    1.2 (4)
20.1 to 30.0.................  2.1 (7)       3.0 (10)     4.6 (15)     6.1 (20)      8.8 (29)    1.5 (5)
30.1 to 40.0.................  2.4 (8)       3.4 (11)     5.2 (17)     6.7 (22)     10.1 (33)    1.8 (6)
40.1 to 50.0.................  2.7 (9)       3.7 (12)     5.8 (19)     7.3 (24)     11.0 (36)    2.1 (7)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note: The distance in this table must be measured from the nearest point on the nearest packages of Class 7
  (radioactive) material.

    (c) Shipments of low specific activity materials and surface 
contaminated objects, as defined in Sec. 173.403 of this subchapter, 
must be loaded so as to avoid spillage and scattering of loose 
materials. Loading restrictions are set forth in Sec. 173.427 of this 
subchapter.
    (d) Packages must be so blocked and braced that they cannot change 
position during conditions normally incident to transportation.
    (e) Persons should not remain unnecessarily in a vehicle containing 
Class 7 (radioactive) materials.
    (f) Each fissile material, controlled shipment (as defined in 
Sec. 173.403 of this subchapter) must be transported in accordance with 
one of the methods prescribed in Sec. 173.457 of this subchapter. The 
transport controls must be adequate to assure that no fissile material, 
controlled shipment is transported in the same transport vehicle with 
any other fissile Class 7 (radioactive) material shipment. In loading 
and storage areas each fissile material, controlled shipment must be 
segregated by a distance of at least 6 m (20 feet) from any other 
package required to bear one of

[[Page 752]]

the ``Radioactive'' labels described in Sec. 172.403 of this subchapter.
    (g) For shipments transported under exclusive use conditions the 
radiation dose rate may not exceed 0.02 mSv per hour (2 mrem per hour) 
in any position normally occupied in the motor vehicle. For shipments 
transported as exclusive use under the provisions of Sec. 173.441(b) of 
this subchapter for packages with external radiation levels in excess of 
2 mSv (200 mrem per hour) at the package surface, the motor vehicle must 
meet the requirements of a closed transport vehicle (Sec. 173.403 of 
this subchapter). The total transport index for packages containing 
fissile material may not exceed 100.

[Amdt. 177-85, 60 FR 50334, Sept. 28, 1995, as amended at 63 FR 52850, 
Oct. 1, 1998; 66 FR 45385, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 177.843  Contamination of vehicles.

    (a) Each motor vehicle used for transporting Class 7 (radioactive) 
materials under exclusive use conditions in accordance with 
Sec. 173.427(b)(3) or (c) or Sec. 173.443(c) of this subchapter must be 
surveyed with radiation detection instruments after each use. A vehicle 
may not be returned to service until the radiation dose rate at every 
accessible surface is 0.005 mSv per hour (0.5 mrem per hour) or less and 
the removable (non-fixed) radioactive surface contamination is not 
greater than the level prescribed in Sec. 173.443(a) of this subchapter.
    (b) This section does not apply to any vehicle used solely for 
transporting Class 7 (radioactive) material if a survey of the interior 
surface shows that the radiation dose rate does not exceed 0.1 mSv per 
hour (10 mrem per hour) at the interior surface or 0.02 mSv per hour (2 
mrem per hour) at 1 meter (3.3 feet) from any interior surface. These 
vehicles must be stenciled with the words ``For Radioactive Materials 
Use Only'' in lettering at least 7.6 cm (3 inches) high in a conspicuous 
place, on both sides of the exterior of the vehicle. These vehicles must 
be kept closed at all times other than loading and unloading.
    (c) In case of fire, accident, breakage, or unusual delay involving 
shipments of Class 7 (radioactive) material, see Secs. 171.15, 171.16 
and 177.854 of this subchapter.

[Amdt. 177-3, 33 FR 14933, Oct. 4, 1968, as amended by Amdt. 177-35, 41 
FR 16131, Apr. 15, 1976; Amdt. 177-57, 48 FR 10247, Mar. 10, 1983; Amdt. 
177-78, 55 FR 52712, Dec. 21, 1990; Amdt. 177-85, 60 FR 50335, Sept. 28, 
1995; 63 FR 52850, Oct. 1, 1998; 65 FR 58631, Sept. 29, 2000]

    Effective Date Note: At 67 FR 53142, Aug. 14, 2002, Sec. 177.843 was 
amended by adding paragraph (d), effective Oct. 1, 2002. At 67 FR 54967, 
Aug. 27, 2002, the effective date was corrected to Feb. 14, 2003. For 
the convenience of the user, the added text is set forth as follows:

Sec. 177.843  Contamination of vehicles.

                                * * * * *

    (d) Each transport vehicle used to transport Division 6.2 materials 
must be disinfected prior to reuse if a Division 6.2 material is 
released from its packaging during transportation. Disinfection may be 
by any means effective for neutralizing the material released.

[[Page 753]]



   Subpart C--Segregation and Separation Chart of Hazardous Materials



Sec. 177.848  Segregation of hazardous materials.

    (a) This section applies to materials which meet one or more of the 
hazard classes defined in this subchapter and are:
    (1) In packages which require labels in accordance with part 172 of 
this subchapter;
    (2) In a compartment within a multi-compartmented cargo tank subject 
to the restrictions in Sec. 173.33 of this subchapter; or
    (3) In a portable tank loaded in a transport vehicle or freight 
container.
    (b) When a transport vehicle is to be transported by vessel, other 
than a ferry vessel, hazardous materials on or within that vehicle must 
be stowed and segregated in accordance with Sec. 176.83(b) of this 
subchapter.
    (c) In addition to the provisions of paragraph (d) of this section, 
cyanides or cyanide mixtures may not be loaded or stored with acids if a 
mixture of the materials would generate hydrogen cyanide. (d) Hazardous 
materials may not be loaded, transported, or stored together, except as 
provided in this section, and in accordance with the following table:

[[Page 754]]



                                                                            Segregation Table for Hazardous Materials
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                                                                                                        6.1
                                                     1.1                                              2.3 gas    2.3 gas                                              liquids          8 liquids
       Class or division                   Notes     1.2    1.3    1.4    1.5    1.6    2.1    2.2     zone A     Zone B     3     4.1    4.2    4.3    5.1    5.2   PG I zone    7       only
                                                                                                                                                                         A
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Explosives....................  1.1 and  A          *      *      *      *      *      X      X      X          X          X      X      X      X      X      X      X          X      X
                                    1.2
Explosives....................      1.3  .........  *      *      *      *      *      X      .....  X          X          X      .....  X      X      X      X      X          .....  X
Explosives....................      1.4  .........  *      *      *      *      *      O      .....  O          O          O      .....  O      .....  .....  .....  O          .....  O
Very insensitive explosives...      1.5  A          *      *      *      *      *      X      X      X          X          X      X      X      X      X      X      X          X      X
Extremely insensitive               1.6  .........  *      *      *      *      *      .....  .....  .........  .........  .....  .....  .....  .....  .....  .....  .........  .....  .........
 explosives.
Flammable gases...............      2.1  .........  X      X      O      X      .....  .....  .....  X          O          .....  .....  .....  .....  .....  .....  O          O      .........
Non-toxic, non-flammable gases      2.2  .........  X      .....  .....  X      .....  .....  .....  .........  .........  .....  .....  .....  .....  .....  .....  .........  .....  .........
Poisonous gas Zone A..........      2.3  .........  X      X      O      X      .....  X      .....  .........  .........  X      X      X      X      X      X      .........  .....  X
Poisonous gas Zone B..........      2.3  .........  X      X      O      X      .....  O      .....  .........  .........  O      O      O      O      O      O      .........  .....  O
Flammable liquids.............        3  .........  X      X      O      X      .....  .....  .....  X          O          .....  .....  .....  .....  O      .....  X          .....  .........
Flammable solids..............      4.1  .........  X      .....  .....  X      .....  .....  .....  X          O          .....  .....  .....  .....  .....  .....  X          .....  O
Spontaneously combustible           4.2  .........  X      X      O      X      .....  .....  .....  X          O          .....  .....  .....  .....  .....  .....  X          .....  X
 materials.
Dangerous when wet materials..      4.3  .........  X      X      .....  X      .....  .....  .....  X          O          .....  .....  .....  .....  .....  .....  X          .....  O
Oxidizers.....................      5.1  A          X      X      .....  X      .....  .....  .....  X          O          O      .....  .....  .....  .....  .....  X          .....  O
Organic peroxides.............      5.2  .........  X      X      .....  X      .....  .....  .....  X          O          .....  .....  .....  .....  .....  .....  X          .....  O
Poisonous liquids PG I Zone A.      6.1  .........  X      X      O      X      .....  O      .....  .........  .........  X      X      X      X      X      X      .........  .....  X
Radioactive materials.........        7  .........  X      .....  .....  X      .....  O      .....  .........  .........  .....  .....  .....  .....  .....  .....  .........  .....  .........
Corrosive liquids.............        8  .........  X      X      O      X      .....  .....  .....  X          O          .....  O      X      O      O      O      X          .....  .........
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


[[Page 755]]

    (e) lnstructions for using the segregation table for hazardous 
materials are as follows:
    (1) The absence of any hazard class or division or a blank space in 
the table indicates that no restrictions apply.
    (2) The letter ``X'' in the table indicates that these materials may 
not be loaded, transported, or stored together in the same transport 
vehicle or storage facility during the course of transportation.
    (3) The letter ``O'' in the table indicates that these materials may 
not be loaded, transported, or stored together in the same transport 
vehicle or storage facility during the course of transportation unless 
separated in a manner that, in the event of leakage from packages under 
conditions normally incident to transportation, commingling of hazardous 
materials would not occur. Notwithstanding the methods of separation 
employed, Class 8 (corrosive) liquids may not be loaded above or 
adjacent to Class 4 (flammable) or Class 5 (oxidizing) materials; except 
that shippers may load truckload shipments of such materials together 
when it is known that the mixture of contents would not cause a fire or 
a dangerous evolution of heat or gas.
    (4) The ``*'' in the table indicates that segregation among 
different Class 1 (explosive) materials is governed by the compatibility 
table in paragraph (f) of this section.
    (5) The note ``A'' in the second column of the table means that, 
notwithstanding the requirements of the letter ``X'', ammonium nitrate 
(UN 1942) and ammonium nitrate fertilizer may be loaded or stored with 
Division 1.1 (explosive) or Division 1.5 materials.
    (6) When the Sec. 172.101 table or Sec. 172.402 of this subchapter 
requires a package to bear a subsidiary hazard label, segregation 
appropriate to the subsidiary hazard must be applied when that 
segregation is more restrictive than that required by the primary 
hazard. However, hazardous materials of the same class may be stowed 
together without regard to segregation required for any secondary hazard 
if the materials are not capable of reacting dangerously with each other 
and causing combustion or dangerous evolution of heat, evolution of 
flammable, poisonous, or asphyxiant gases, or formation of corrosive or 
unstable materials.
    (f) Class 1 (explosive) materials shall not be loaded, transported, 
or stored together, except as provided in this section, and in 
accordance with the following table:

                                                  Compatibility Table For Class 1 (Explosive) Materials
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                     Compatibility group                         A      B      C      D      E      F      G      H      J      K      L      N      S
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A............................................................             X      X      X      X      X      X      X      X      X      X      X      X
B............................................................      X             X   X(4)      X      X      X      X      X      X      X      X    4/5
C............................................................      X      X             2      2      X      6      X      X      X      X      3    4/5
D............................................................      X   X(4)      2             2      X      6      X      X      X      X      3    4/5
E............................................................      X      X      2      2             X      6      X      X      X      X      3    4/5
F............................................................      X      X      X      X      X             X      X      X      X      X      X    4/5
G............................................................      X      X      6      6      6      X             X      X      X      X      X    4/5
H............................................................      X      X      X      X      X      X      X             X      X      X      X    4/5
J............................................................      X      X      X      X      X      X      X      X             X      X      X    4/5
K............................................................      X      X      X      X      X      X      X      X      X             X      X    4/5
L............................................................      X      X      X      X      X      X      X      X      X      X      1      X      X
N............................................................      X      X      3      3      3      X      X      X      X      X      X           4/5
S............................................................      X    4/5    4/5    4/5    4/5    4/5    4/5    4/5    4/5    4/5      X    4/5
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (g) Instructions for using the compatibility table for Class 1 
(explosive) materials are as follows:
    (1) A blank space in the table indicates that no restrictions apply.
    (2) The letter ``X'' in the table indicates that explosives of 
different compatibility groups may not be carried on the same transport 
vehicle.
    (3) The numbers in the table mean the following:
    (i) ``1'' means an explosive from compatibility group L shall only 
be carried on the same transport vehicle with an identical explosive.
    (ii) ``2'' means any combination of explosives from compatibility 
groups C,

[[Page 756]]

D, or E is assigned to compatibility group E.
    (iii) ``3'' means any combination of explosives from compatibility 
groups C, D, or E with those in compatibility group N is assigned to 
compatibility group D.
    (iv) ``4'' means see Sec. 177.835(g) when transporting detonators.
    (v) ``5'' means Division 1.4S fireworks may not be loaded on the 
same transport vehicle with Division 1.1 or 1.2 (explosive) materials.
    (vi) ``6'' means explosive articles in compatibility group G, other 
than fireworks and those requiring special handling, may be loaded, 
transported and stored with other explosive articles of compatibility 
groups C, D and E, provided that explosive substances (such as those not 
contained in articles) are not carried in the same vehicle.
    (h) Except as provided in paragraph (i) of this section, explosives 
of the same compatibility group but of different divisions may be 
transported together provided that the whole shipment is transported as 
though its entire contents were of the lower numerical division (i.e., 
Division 1.1 being lower than Division 1.2). For example, a mixed 
shipment of Division 1.2 (explosive) materials and Division 1.4 
(explosive) materials, both of compatibility group D, must be 
transported as Division 1.2 (explosive) materials.
    (i) When Division 1.5 materials, compatibility group D, are 
transported in the same freight container as Division 1.2 (explosive) 
materials, compatibility group D, the shipment must be transported as 
Division 1.1 (explosive) materials, compatibility group D.

[Amdt. 177-78, 55 FR 52712, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66283, 
Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45465, Oct. 1, 1992; 57 FR 47513, Oct. 16, 1992; 
Amdt. 177-78, 57 FR 59310, Dec. 15, 1992; Amdt. 177-82, 58 FR 50237, 
Sept. 24, 1993; Amdt. 177-83, 59 FR 49134, Sept. 26, 1994; Amdt. 177-87, 
61 FR 27175, May 30, 1996; 63 FR 37462, July 10, 1998; 64 FR 10782, Mar. 
5, 1999; 65 FR 50462, Aug. 18, 2000; 66 FR 33439, June 21, 2001; 66 FR 
45185, 45385, Aug. 28, 2001]



         Subpart D--Vehicles and Shipments in Transit; Accidents



Sec. 177.854  Disabled vehicles and broken or leaking packages; repairs.

    (a) Care of lading, hazardous materials. Whenever for any cause 
other than necessary traffic stops any motor vehicle transporting any 
hazardous material is stopped upon the traveled portion of any highway 
or shoulder thereof, special care shall be taken to guard the vehicle 
and its load or to take such steps as may be necessary to provide 
against hazard. Special effort shall be made to remove the motor vehicle 
to a place where the hazards of the materials being transported may be 
provided against. See Secs. 392.22, 392.24, and 392.25 of this title for 
warning devices required to be displayed on the highway.
    (b) Disposition of containers found broken or leaking in transit. 
When leaks occur in packages or containers during the course of 
transportation, subsequent to initial loading, disposition of such 
package or container shall be made by the safest practical means 
afforded under paragraphs (c), (d), and (e) of this section.
    (c) Repairing or overpacking packages. (1) Packages may be repaired 
when safe and practicable, such repairing to be in accordance with the 
best and safest practice known and available.
    (2) Packages of hazardous materials that are damaged or found 
leaking during transportation, and hazardous materials that have spilled 
or leaked during transportation, may be forwarded to destination or 
returned to the shipper in a salvage drum in accordance with the 
requirements of Sec. 173.3(c) of this subchapter.
    (d) Transportation of repaired packages. Any package repaired in 
accordance with the requirements of paragraph (c)(1) of this section may 
be transported to the nearest place at which it may safely be disposed 
of only in compliance with the following requirements:
    (1) The package must be safe for transportation.

[[Page 757]]

    (2) The repair of the package must be adequate to prevent 
contamination of or hazardous admixture with other lading transported on 
the same motor vehicle therewith.
    (3) If the carrier is not himself the shipper, the consignee's name 
and address must be plainly marked on the repaired package.
    (e) Disposition of unsafe broken packages. In the event any leaking 
package or container cannot be safely and adequately repaired for 
transportation or transported, it shall be stored pending proper 
disposition in the safest and most expeditious manner possible.
    (f) Stopped vehicles; other dangerous articles. Whenever any motor 
vehicle transporting Class 3 (flammable liquid), Class 4 (flammable 
solid), Class 5 (oxidizing), Class 8 (corrosive), Class 2 (gases), or 
Division 6.1 (poisonous) materials, is stopped for any cause other than 
necessary traffic stops upon the traveled portion of any highway, or a 
shoulder next thereto, the following requirements shall be complied with 
during the period of such stop:
    (1) For motor vehicles other than cargo tank motyor vehicles used 
for the transportation of Class 3 (flammable liquid) or Division 2.1 
(flammable gas) materials and not transporting Division 1.1, 1.2, or 1.3 
(explosive) materials, warning devices must be set out in the manner 
prescribed by Sec. 392.22 of this title.
    (2) For cargo tanks used for the transportation of Class 3 
(flammable liquid) or Division 2.1 (flammable gas) materials, whether 
loaded or empty, and vehicles transporting Division 1.1, 1.2, or 1.3 
(explosive) materials, warning devices must be set out in the manner 
prescribed by Sec. 392.25 of this title.
    (g) Repair and maintenance of vehicles containing certain hazardous 
materials--(1) General. No person may use heat, flame or spark producing 
devices to repair or maintain the cargo or fuel containment system of a 
motor vehicle required to be placarded, other than COMBUSTIBLE, in 
accordance with subpart F of part 172 of this subchapter. As used in 
this section, ``containment system'' includes all vehicle components 
intended physically to contain cargo or fuel during loading or filling, 
transport, or unloading.
    (2) Repair and maintenance inside a building. No person may perform 
repair or maintenance on a motor vehicle subject to paragraph (g)(1) of 
this section inside a building unless:
    (i) The motor vehicle's cargo and fuel containment systems are 
closed (except as necessary to maintain or repair the vehicle's motor) 
and do not show any indication of leakage;
    (ii) A means is provided, and a person capable to operate the motor 
vehicle is available, to immediately remove the motor vehicle if 
necessary in an emergency;
    (iii) The motor vehicle is removed from the enclosed area upon 
completion of repair or maintenance work; and
    (iv) For motor vehicles loaded with Division 1.1, 1.2, or 1.3 
(explosive), Class 3 (flammable liquid), or Division 2.1 (flammable gas) 
materials, all sources of spark, flame or glowing heat within the area 
of enclosure (including any heating system drawing air therefrom) are 
extinguished, made inoperable or rendered explosion-proof by a suitable 
method. Exception: Electrical equipment on the vehicle, necessary to 
accomplish the maintenance function, may remain operational.
    (h) No repair with flame unless gas-free. No repair of a cargo tank 
used for the transportation of any Class 3 (flammable liquid) or 
Division 6.1 (poisonous liquid) material, or any compartment thereof, or 
of any container for fuel of whatever nature, may be repaired by any 
method employing a flame, arc, or other means of welding, unless the 
tank or compartment shall first have been made gas-free.

[29 FR 18795, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967]

    Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting 
Sec. 177.854, see the List of CFR Sections Affected which appears in the 
Finding Aids section of the printed volume and on GPO Access.

[[Page 758]]



Subpart E--Regulations Applying to Hazardous Material on Motor Vehicles 
                      Carrying Passengers for Hire



Sec. 177.870  Regulations for passenger carrying vehicles.

    (a) Vehicles transporting passengers and property. In addition to 
the regulations in parts 170-189 of this subchapter the following 
requirements shall apply to vehicles transporting passengers and 
property.
    (b) No Class 1 (explosive) materials or other hazardous materials on 
passenger-carrying vehicles, exceptions. No hazardous materials except 
small-arms ammunition, emergency shipments of drugs, chemicals and 
hospital supplies, and the accompanying munitions of war of the 
Departments of the Army, Navy, and Air Force of the United States 
Government, are authorized by parts 170-189 of this subchapter to be 
transported on motor vehicles carrying passengers for hire where other 
practicable means of transportation is available.
    (c) Class 1 (explosive) materials in passenger-carrying space 
forbidden. No Class 1 (explosive) material, except small-arms 
ammunition, may be carried in the passenger-carrying space of any motor 
vehicle transporting passengers for hire.
    (d) Hazardous materials on passenger carrying vehicles; quantity. 
Where no other practicable means of transportation is available the 
following articles in the quantities as shown may be transported in 
motor vehicles carrying passengers for hire in a space other than that 
provided for passengers: Not to exceed 45 kg (99 pounds) gross weight of 
any or all of the kinds of Class 1 (explosive) materials permitted to be 
transported by passenger-carrying aircraft or rail car may be 
transported on a motor vehicle transporting passengers: Provided, 
however, That samples of Class 1 (explosive) materials for laboratory 
examination, not to exceed two samples, or a total of no more than 100 
detonators, Division 1.4 (explosive) materials at one time in a single 
motor vehicle, may be transported in a motor vehicle transporting 
passengers.
    (e) Articles other than Class 1 (explosive) materials on passenger-
carrying vehicles. The gross weight of any given class of hazardous 
material other than Class 1 (explosive) materials shall not exceed 45 kg 
(99 pounds), and the aggregate weight of all such other dangerous 
articles shall not exceed 225 kg (496 pounds). This provision does not 
apply to nontoxic, nonflammable refrigerants, when such refrigerant is 
for servicing operations of a motor carrier on whose motor vehicles the 
refrigerant is used. A cylinder secured against movement while in 
transit and not exceeding 113 kg (250 pounds) gross weight may be 
transported.
    (f) Division 6.1 (poisonous) or Division 2.3 (poisonous gas) 
materials on passenger-carrying vehicles. No motor carrier may transport 
any extremely dangerous Division 6.1 (poisonous) or Division 2.3 
(poisonous gas) material, or any paranitroaniline, in any amount, in or 
on any bus while engaged in the transportation of passengers; or any 
less dangerous Division 6.1 (poisonous) material, which is other than a 
liquid, in any amount exceeding an aggregate of 45 kg (99 pounds) gross 
weight in or on any such bus.
    (g) Class 7 (radioactive) materials. In addition to the limitations 
prescribed in paragraphs (b) and (e) of this section, no person may 
transport any Class 7 (radioactive) material requiring labels under 
Secs. 172.436, 172.438, and 172.440 of this subchapter in or on any 
motor vehicle carrying passengers for hire except where no other 
practicable means of transportation is available. Packages of Class 7 
(radioactive) materials must be stored only in the trunk or baggage 
compartment of the vehicle, and must not be stored in any compartment 
occupied by persons. Packages of Class 7 (radioactive) materials must be 
handled and placed in the vehicle as prescribed in Sec. 177.842.

[29 FR 18795, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967]

    Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting 
Sec. 177.870 see the List of CFR Sections Affected which appears in the 
Finding Aids section of the printed volume and on GPO Access.

[[Page 759]]



PART 178--SPECIFICATIONS FOR PACKAGINGS--Table of Contents




Sec.
178.1  Purpose and scope.
178.2  Applicability and responsibility.
178.3  Marking of packagings.

Subpart A [Reserved]

      Subpart B--Specifications for Inside Containers, and Linings

178.33  Specification 2P; inner nonrefillable metal receptacles.
178.33-1  Compliance.
178.33-2  Type and size.
178.33-3  Inspection.
178.33-4  Duties of inspector.
178.33-5  Material.
178.33-6  Manufacture.
178.33-7  Wall thickness.
178.33-8  Tests.
178.33-9  Marking.
178.33a  Specification 2Q; inner nonrefillable metal receptacles.
178.33a-1  Compliance.
178.33a-2  Type and size.
178.33a-3  Inspection.
178.33a-4  Duties of inspector.
178.33a-5  Material.
178.33a-6  Manufacture.
178.33a-7  Wall thickness.
178.33a-8  Tests.
178.33a-9  Marking.

                 Subpart C--Specifications for Cylinders

178.35  General requirements for specification cylinders.
178.36  Specification 3A and 3AX seamless steel cylinders.
178.37  Specification 3AA and 3AAX seamless steel cylinders.
178.38  Specification 3B seamless steel cylinders.
178.39  Specification 3BN seamless nickel cylinders.
178.42  Specification 3E seamless steel cylinders.
178.44  Specification 3HT seamless steel cylinders for aircraft use.
178.45  Specification 3T seamless steel cylinders.
178.46  Specification 3AL seamless aluminum cylinders.
178.47  Specification 4DS welded stainless steel cylinders for aircraft 
          use.
178.50  Specification 4B welded or brazed steel cylinders.
178.51  Specification 4BA welded or brazed steel cylinders.
178.53  Specification 4D welded steel cylinders for aircraft use.
178.55  Specification 4B240ET welded or brazed cylinders.
178.56  Specification 4AA480 welded steel cylinders.
178.57  Specification 4L welded insulated cylinders.
178.58  Specification 4DA welded steel cylinders for aircraft use.
178.59  Specification 8 steel cylinders with porous fillings for 
          acetylene.
178.60  Specification 8AL steel cylinders with porous fillings for 
          acetylene.
178.61  Specification 4BW welded steel cylinders with electric-arc 
          welded longitudinal seam.
178.65  Specification 39 non-reusable (non-refillable) cylinders.
178.68  Specification 4E welded aluminum cylinders.

Appendix A to Subpart C of Part 178-Illustrations: Cylinder Tensile 
          Sample

Subparts D-G [Reserved]

              Subpart H--Specifications for Portable Tanks

178.245  Specification 51; steel portable tanks.
178.245-1  Requirements for design and construction.
178.245-2  Material.
178.245-3  Design pressure.
178.245-4  Tank mountings.
178.245-5  Protection of valves and accessories.
178.245-6  Name plate.
178.245-7  Report.
178.251--178.253-5  [Reserved]
178.255  Specification 60; steel portable tanks.
178.255-1  General requirements.
178.255-2  Material.
178.255-3  Expansion domes.
178.255-4  Closures for manholes and domes.
178.255-5  Bottom discharge outlets.
178.255-6  Loading and unloading accessories.
178.255-7  Protection of valves and accessories.
178.255-8  Safety devices.
178.255-9  Compartments.
178.255-10  Lining.
178.255-11  Tank mountings.
178.255-12  Pressure test.
178.255-13  Repair of tanks.
178.255-14  Marking.
178.255-15  Report.
178.270  Specification IM 101 and IM 102 steel portable tanks; general 
          design and construction requirements.
178.270-1  Specification requirements for IM 101 and IM 102 steel 
          portable tanks.
178.270-2  General.
178.270-3  Materials of construction.
178.270-4  Structural integrity.
178.270-5  Minimum thickness of shells and heads.
178.270-6  Tank supports, frameworks and lifting attachments.

[[Page 760]]

178.270-7  Joints in tank shells.
178.270-8  Protection of valves and accessories.
178.270-9  Inspection openings.
178.270-10  External design pressure.
178.270-11  Pressure and vacuum relief devices.
178.270-12  Valves, nozzles, piping, and gauging devices.
178.270-13  Testing.
178.270-14  Marking of tanks.
178.271  Specification IM 101 steel portable tanks.
178.271-1  General requirements.
178.272  Specification IM 102 steel portable tanks.
178.272-1  General requirements.
178.272-2  Minimum thickness of shells and heads.
178.273  Approval of Specification IM portable tanks and UN portable 
          tanks.
178.274  Specification for UN portable tanks.
178.275  Specification for UN Portable Tanks intended for the 
          transportation of liquid and solid hazardous materials.
178.276  Requirements for the design, construction, inspection and 
          testing of portable tanks intended for the transportation of 
          non-refrigerated liquefied compressed gases.
178.277  Requirements for the design, construction, inspection and 
          testing of portable tanks intended for the transportation of 
          refrigerated liquefied gases.

Subpart I [Reserved]

       Subpart J--Specifications for Containers for Motor Vehicle 
                             Transportation

178.318  Specification MC 201; container for detonators and percussion 
          caps.
178.318-1  Scope.
178.318-2  Container.
178.318-3  Marking.
178.320  General requirements applicable to all DOT specification cargo 
          tank motor vehicles.
178.337  Specification MC 331; cargo tank motor vehicle primarily for 
          transportation of compressed gases as defined in subpart G of 
          part 173 of this subchapter.
178.337-1  General requirements.
178.337-2  Material.
178.337-3  Structural integrity.
178.337-4  Joints.
178.337-5  Bulkheads, baffles and ring stiffeners.
178.337-6  Closure for manhole.
178.337-7  Overturn protection.
178.337-8  Openings, inlets and outlets.
178.337-9  Pressure relief devices, piping, valves, hoses, and fittings.
178.337-10  Protection of fittings.
178.337-11  Emergency discharge control.
178.337-12  Shear section.
178.337-13  Supporting and anchoring.
178.337-14  Gauging devices.
178.337-15  Pumps and compressors.
178.337-16  Testing.
178.337-17  Marking.
178.337-18  Certification.
178.338  Specification MC-338; insulated cargo tank motor vehicle.
178.338-1  General requirements.
178.338-2  Material.
178.338-3  Structural integrity.
178.338-4  Joints.
178.338-5  Stiffening rings.
178.338-6  Manholes.
178.338-7  Openings.
178.338-8  Pressure relief devices, piping, valves, and fittings.
178.338-9  Holding time.
178.338-10  Collision damage protection.
178.338-11  Discharge control devices.
178.338-12  Shear section.
178.338-13  Supports and anchoring.
178.338-14  Gauging devices.
178.338-15  Cleanliness.
178.338-16  Inspection and testing.
178.338-17  Pumps and compressors.
178.338-18  Marking.
178.338-19  Certification.
178.340-178.343  [Reserved]
178.345  General design and construction requirements applicable to 
          Specification DOT 406 (Sec. 178.346), DOT 407 (Sec. 178.347), 
          and DOT 412 (Sec. 178.348) cargo tank motor vehicles.
178.345-1  General requirements.
178.345-2  Material and material thickness.
178.345-3  Structural integrity.
178.345-4  Joints.
178.345-5  Manhole assemblies.
178.345-6  Supports and anchoring.
178.345-7  Circumferential reinforcements.
178.345-8  Accident damage protection.
178.345-9  Pumps, piping, hoses and connections.
178.345-10  Pressure relief.
178.345-11  Tank outlets.
178.345-12  Gauging devices.
178.345-13  Pressure and leakage tests.
178.345-14  Marking.
178.345-15  Certification.
178.346  Specification DOT 406; cargo tank motor vehicle.
178.346-1  General requirements.
178.346-2  Material and thickness of material.
178.346-3  Pressure relief.
178.346-4  Outlets.
178.346-5  Pressure and leakage tests.
178.347  Specification DOT 407; cargo tank motor vehicle.
178.347-1  General requirements.
178.347-2  Material and thickness of material.
178.347-3  Manhole assemblies.
178.347-4  Pressure relief.
178.347-5  Pressure and leakage test.
178.348  Specification DOT 412; cargo tank motor vehicle.

[[Page 761]]

178.348-1  General requirements.
178.348-2  Material and thickness of material.
178.348-3  Pumps, piping, hoses and connections.
178.348-4  Pressure relief.
178.348-5  Pressure and leakage test.

   Subpart K--Specifications for Packagings for Class 7 (Radioactive) 
                                Materials

178.350  Specification 7A; general packaging, Type A.
178.352  Specification 6L; metal packaging.
178.352-1  General requirements.
178.352-2  Rated capacity.
178.352-3  General construction requirements.
178.352-4  Welding.
178.352-5  Closure.
178.352-6  Markings.
178.354  Specification 6M; metal packaging.
178.354-1  General requirements.
178.354-2  Rated capacity.
178.354-3  General construction requirements.
178.354-4  Closure.
178.354-5  Markings.
178.356  Specification 20PF phenolic-foam insulated, metal overpack.
178.356-1  General requirements.
178.356-2  Materials of construction and other requirements.
178.356-3  Tests.
178.356-4  Required markings.
178.356-5  Typical assembly detail.
178.358  Specification 21PF fire and shock resistant, phenolic-foam 
          insulated, metal overpack.
178.358-1  General requirements.
178.358-2  Materials of construction and other requirements.
178.358-3  Modification of Specification 21PF-1 overpacks.
178.358-4  Construction of Specification 21PF-1B overpacks.
178.358-5  Required markings.
178.358-6  Typical assembly detail.
178.360  Specification 2R; inside containment vessel.
178.360-1  General requirements.
178.360-2  Manufacture.
178.360-3  Dimensions.
178.360-4  Closure devices.
178.362  Specification 20WC wooden protective jacket.
178.362-1  General requirements.
178.362-2  Materials of construction.
178.362-3  Closure.
178.362-4  Tests.
178.362-5  Painting.
178.362-6  Marking.
178.362-7  Typical assembly sketches.
178.364  Specification 21WC wooden-steel protective overpack.
178.364-1  General requirements.
178.364-2  Materials of construction and other requirements.
178.364-3  Closure.
178.364-4  Tests.
178.364-5  Required marking.
178.364-6  Typical assembly detail.

      Subpart L--Non-bulk Performance-Oriented Packaging Standards

Sec.
178.500  Purpose, scope and definitions.
178.502  Identification codes for packagings.
178.503  Marking of packagings.
178.504  Standards for steel drums.
178.505  Standards for aluminum drums.
178.506  Standards for metal drums other than steel or aluminum.
178.507  Standards for plywood drums.
178.508  Standards for fiber drums.
178.509  Standards for plastic drums and jerricans.
178.510  Standards for wooden barrels.
178.511  Standards for aluminum and steel jerricans.
178.512  Standards for steel or aluminum boxes.
178.513  Standards for boxes of natural wood.
178.514  Standards for plywood boxes.
178.515  Standards for reconstituted wood boxes.
178.516  Standards for fiberboard boxes.
178.517  Standards for plastic boxes.
178.518  Standards for woven plastic bags.
178.519  Standards for plastic film bags.
178.520  Standards for textile bags.
178.521  Standards for paper bags.
178.522  Standards for composite packagings with inner plastic 
          receptacles.
178.523  Standards for composite packagings with inner glass, porcelain, 
          or stoneware receptacles.

         Subpart M--Testing of Non-bulk Packagings and Packages

178.600  Purpose and scope.
178.601  General requirements.
178.602  Preparation of packagings and packages for testing.
178.603  Drop test.
178.604  Leakproofness test.
178.605  Hydrostatic pressure test.
178.606  Stacking test.
178.607  Cooperage test for bung-type wooden barrels.
178.608  Vibration standard.
178.609  Test requirements for packagings for infectious substances 
          (etiologic agents).

              Subpart N--IBC Performance-Oriented Standards

178.700  Purpose, scope and definitions.
178.702  IBC codes.
178.703  Marking of IBCs.
178.704  General IBC standards.

[[Page 762]]

178.705  Standards for metal IBCs.
178.706  Standards for rigid plastic IBCs.
178.707  Standards for composite IBCs.
178.708  Standards for fiberboard IBCs.
178.709  Standards for wooden IBCs.
178.710  Standards for flexible intermediate bulk containers.

                       Subpart O--Testing of IBCs

178.800  Purpose and scope.
178.801  General requirements.
178.802  Preparation of fiberboard IBCs for testing.
178.803  Testing and certification of IBCs.
178.810  Drop test.
178.811  Bottom lift test.
178.812  Top lift test.
178.813  Leakproofness test.
178.814  Hydrostatic pressure test.
178.815  Stacking test.
178.816  Topple test.
178.817  Righting test.
178.818  Tear test.
178.819  Vibration test.

Appendix A to Part 178--Specifications for Steel
Appendix B to Part 178--Alternative Leakproofness Test Methods
Appendix C to Part 178--Nominal and Minimum Thicknesses of Steel Drums 
          and Jerricans

    Authority: 49 U.S.C. 5101-5127; 49 CFR 1.53.



Sec. 178.1  Purpose and scope.

    This part prescribes the manufacturing and testing specifications 
for packaging and containers used for the transportation of hazardous 
materials in commerce.

[Amdt. 178-40, 42 FR 2689, Jan. 13, 1977. Redesignated by Amdt. 178-97, 
55 FR 52715, Dec. 21, 1990]



Sec. 178.2  Applicability and responsibility.

    (a) Applicability. (1) The requirements of this part apply to 
packagings manufactured--
    (i) To a DOT specification, regardless of country of manufacture; or
    (ii) To a UN standard, for packagings manufactured within the United 
States. For UN standard packagings manufactured outside the United 
States, see Sec. 173.24(d)(2) of this subchapter. For UN standard 
packagings for which standards are not prescribed in this part, see 
Sec. 178.3(b).
    (2) A manufacturer of a packaging subject to the requirements of 
this part is primarily responsible for compliance with the requirements 
of this part. However, any person who performs a function prescribed in 
this part shall perform that function in accordance with this part.
    (b) Specification markings. When this part requires that a packaging 
be marked with a DOT specification or UN standard marking, marking of 
the packaging with the appropriate DOT or UN markings is the 
certification that--
    (1) Except as otherwise provided in this section, all requirements 
of the DOT specification or UN standard, including performance tests, 
are met; and
    (2) All functions performed by, or on behalf of, the person whose 
name or symbol appears as part of the marking conform to requirements 
specified in this part.
    (c) Notification. Except as specifically provided in Secs. 178.337-
18 and 178.345-10 of this part, the manufacturer or other person 
certifying compliance with the requirements of this part, and each 
subsequent distributor of that packaging shall--
    (1) Notify in writing each person to whom that packaging is 
transferred--
    (i) Of all requirements in this part not met at the time of 
transfer, and
    (ii) Of the type and dimensions of any closures, including gaskets, 
needed to satisfy performance test requirements.
    (2) Retain copies of each written notification for at least one year 
from date of issuance; and
    (3) Make copies of all written notifications available for 
inspection by a representative of the Department.
    (d) Except as provided in paragraph (c) of this section, a packaging 
not conforming to the applicable specifications or standards in this 
part may not be marked to indicate such conformance.
    (e) Definitions. For the purpose of this part--
    Manufacturer means the person whose name and address or symbol 
appears as part of the specification markings required by this part or, 
for a packaging marked with the symbol of an approval agency, the person 
on whose behalf the approval agency certifies the packaging.
    Specification markings mean the packaging identification markings 
required

[[Page 763]]

by this part including, where applicable, the name and address or symbol 
of the packaging manufacturer or approval agency.
    (f) No packaging may be manufactured or marked to a packaging 
specification that was in effect on September 30, 1991, and that was 
removed from this part 178 by a rule published in the Federal Register 
on December 21, 1990 and effective October 1, 1991.

[Amdt. 178-97, 55 FR 52715, Dec. 21, 1990; 56 FR 66284, Dec. 20, 1991, 
as amended by Amdt. No. 178-106, 59 FR 67519, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 178-
117, 62 FR 14338, Mar. 26, 1997]



Sec. 178.3  Marking of packagings.

    (a) Each packaging represented as manufactured to a DOT 
specification or a UN standard must be marked on a non-removable 
component of the packaging with specification markings conforming to the 
applicable specification, and with the following:
    (1) In an unobstructed area, with letters, and numerals identifying 
the standards or specification (e.g. UN 1A1, DOT 4B240ET, etc.).
    (2) Unless otherwise specified in this part, with the name and 
address or symbol of the packaging manufacturer or, where specifically 
authorized, the symbol of the approval agency certifying compliance with 
a UN standard. Symbols, if used, must be registered with the Associate 
Administrator. Duplicative symbols are not authorized.
    (3) The markings must be stamped, embossed, burned, printed or 
otherwise marked on the packaging to provide adequate accessibility, 
permanency, contrast, and legibility so as to be readily apparent and 
understood.
    (4) Unless otherwise specified, letters and numerals must be at 
least 12.0 mm (0.47 inches) in height except that for packagings of less 
than or equal to 30 L (7.9 gallons) capacity for liquids or 30 kg (66 
pounds) capacity for solids the height must be at least 6.0 mm (0.2 
inches). For packagings having a capacity of 5 L (1 gallon) or 5 kg (11 
pounds) or less, letters and numerals must be of an appropriate size.
    (5) For packages with a gross mass of more than 30 kg (66 pounds), 
the markings or a duplicate thereof must appear on the top or on a side 
of the packaging.
    (b) A UN standard packaging for which the UN standard is set forth 
in this part may be marked with the United Nations symbol and other 
specification markings only if it fully conforms to the requirements of 
this part. A UN standard packaging for which the UN standard is not set 
forth in this part may be marked with the United Nations symbol and 
other specification markings for that standard as provided in the ICAO 
Technical Instructions or the IMDG Code subject to the following 
conditions:
    (1) The U.S. manufacturer must establish that the packaging conforms 
to the applicable provisions of the ICAO Technical Instructions or the 
IMDG Code, respectively.
    (2) If an indication of the name of the manufacturer or other 
identification of the packaging as specified by the competent authority 
is required, the name and address or symbol of the manufacturer or the 
approval agency certifying compliance with the UN standard must be 
entered. Symbols, if used, must be registered with the Associate 
Administrator.
    (3) The letters ``USA'' must be used to indicate the State 
authorizing the allocation of the specification marks if the packaging 
is manufactured in the United States.
    (c) Where a packaging conforms to more than one UN standard or DOT 
specification, the packaging may bear more than one marking, provided 
the packaging meets all the requirements of each standard or 
specification. Where more than one marking appears on a packaging, each 
marking must appear in its entirety.
    (d) No person may mark or otherwise certify a packaging or container 
as meeting the requirements of a manufacturing exemption unless that 
person is the holder of or a party to that exemption, an agent of the 
holder or party for the purpose of marking or certification, or a third 
party tester.

[Amdt. 178-97, 55 FR 52716, Dec. 21, 1990; 56 FR 66284, Dec. 20, 1991, 
as amended by Amdt. No. 178-106, 59 FR 67519, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 178-
113, 61 FR 21102, May 9, 1996; 65 FR 50462, Aug. 18, 2000; 66 FR 45386, 
Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 61015, Sept. 27, 2002]

Subpart A [Reserved]

[[Page 764]]



      Subpart B--Specifications for Inside Containers, and Linings

    Source: 29 FR 18823, Dec. 29, 1964, unless otherwise noted. 
Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967.



Sec. 178.33  Specification 2P; inner nonrefillable metal receptacles.



Sec. 178.33-1  Compliance.

    (a) Required in all details.
    (b) [Reserved]



Sec. 178.33-2  Type and size.

    (a) Single-trip inside containers. Must be seamless, or with seams, 
welded, soldered, brazed, double seamed, or swedged.
    (b) The maximum capacity of containers in this class shall not 
exceed one liter (61.0 cubic inches). The maximum inside diameter shall 
not exceed 3 inches.

[29 FR 18813, Dec. 29, 1964, as amended by Order 71, 31 FR 9074, July 1, 
1966. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt. 
178-101, 58 FR 50237, Sept. 24, 1993; 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.33-3  Inspection.

    (a) By competent inspector.
    (b) [Reserved]



Sec. 178.33-4  Duties of inspector.

    (a) To inspect material and completed containers and witness tests, 
and to reject defective materials or containers.
    (b) [Reserved]



Sec. 178.33-5  Material.

    (a) Uniform quality steel plate such as black plate, electro-tin 
plate, hot dipped tin plate, tern plate or other commercially accepted 
can making plate; or nonferrous metal of uniform drawing quality.
    (b) Material with seams, cracks, laminations or other injurious 
defects not authorized.



Sec. 178.33-6  Manufacture.

    (a) By appliances and methods that will assure uniformity of 
completed containers; dirt and scale to be removed as necessary; no 
defect acceptable that is likely to weaken the finished container 
appreciably; reasonably smooth and uniform surface finish required.
    (b) Seams when used must be as follows:
    (1) Circumferential seams: By welding, swedging, brazing, soldering, 
or double seaming.
    (2) Side seams: By welding, brazing, or soldering.
    (c) Ends: The ends shall be of pressure design.

[29 FR 18823, Dec. 29, 1964, as amended by Order 71, 31 FR 9074, July 1, 
1966. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967]



Sec. 178.33-7  Wall thickness.

    (a) The minimum wall thickness for any container shall be 0.007 
inch.
    (b) [Reserved]

[Order 71, 31 FR 9074, July 1, 1966. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 
1967]



Sec. 178.33-8  Tests.

    (a) One out of each lot of 25,000 containers or less, successively 
produced per day shall be pressure tested to destruction and must not 
burst below 240 psig gauge pressure. The container tested shall be 
complete with end assembled.
    (b) Each such 25,000 containers or less, successively produced per 
day, shall constitute a lot and if the test container shall fail, the 
lot shall be rejected or ten additional containers may be selected at 
random and subjected to the test under which failure occurred. These 
containers shall be complete with ends assembled. Should any of the ten 
containers thus tested fail, the entire lot must be rejected. All 
containers constituting a lot shall be of like material, size, design 
construction, finish, and quality.

[Order 71, 31 FR 9074, July 1, 1966. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 
1967, as amended by 66 FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.33-9  Marking.

    (a) By means of printing, lithographing, embossing, or stamping, 
each container must be marked to show:
    (1) DOT-2P.
    (2) Name or symbol of person making the mark specified in paragraph 
(a)(1) of this section. Symbol, if used, must

[[Page 765]]

be registered with the Associate Administrator.
    (b) [Reserved]

[Amdt. 178-40, 41 FR 38181, Sept. 9, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 178-97, 
56 FR 66287, Dec. 20, 1991; 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.33a  Specification 2Q; inner nonrefillable metal receptacles.



Sec. 178.33a-1  Compliance.

    (a) Required in all details.
    (b) [Reserved]

[Order 71, 31 FR 9074, July 1, 1966. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 
1967]



Sec. 178.33a-2  Type and size.

    (a) Single-trip inside containers. Must be seamless, or with seams 
welded, soldered, brazed, double seamed, or swedged.
    (b) The maximum capacity of containers in this class shall not 
exceed 1 L (61.0 cubic inches). The maximum inside diameter shall not 
exceed 3 inches.

[Order 71, 31 FR 9074, July 1, 1966. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 
1967, and amended by Amdt. 178-43, 42 FR 42208, Aug. 22, 1977; Amdt. 
178-101, 58 FR 50237, Sept. 24, 1993; 66 FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.33a-3  Inspection.

    (a) By competent inspector.
    (b) [Reserved]

[Order 71, 31 FR 9074, July 1, 1966. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 
1967]



Sec. 178.33a-4  Duties of inspector.

    (a) To inspect material and completed containers and witness tests, 
and to reject defective materials or containers.
    (b) [Reserved]

[Order 71, 31 FR 9074, July 1, 1966. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 
1967]



Sec. 178.33a-5  Material.

    (a) Uniform quality steel plate such as black plate, electrotin 
plate, hot dipped tinplate, ternplate or other commercially accepted can 
making plate; or nonferrous metal of uniform drawing quality.
    (b) Material with seams, cracks, laminations or other injurious 
defects not authorized.

[Order 71, 31 FR 9074, July 1, 1966. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 
1967]



Sec. 178.33a-6  Manufacture.

    (a) By appliances and methods that will assure uniformity of 
completed containers; dirt and scale to be removed as necessary; no 
defect acceptable that is likely to weaken the finished container 
appreciably; reasonably smooth and uniform surface finish required.
    (b) Seams when used must be as follows:
    (1) Circumferential seams. By welding, swedging, brazing, soldering, 
or double seaming.
    (2) Side seams. By welding, brazing or soldering.
    (c) Ends. The ends shall be of pressure design.

[Order 71, 31 FR 9074, July 1, 1966. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 
1967]



Sec. 178.33a-7  Wall thickness.

    (a) The minimum wall thickness for any container shall be 0.008 
inch.
    (b) [Reserved]

[Order 71, 31 FR 9074, July 1, 1966. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 
1967]



Sec. 178.33a-8  Tests.

    (a) One out of each lot of 25,000 containers or less, successively 
produced per day, shall be pressure tested to destruction and must not 
burst below 270 psig gauge pressure. The container tested shall be 
complete with end assembled.
    (b) Each such 25,000 containers or less, successively produced per 
day, shall constitute a lot and if the test container shall fail, the 
lot shall be rejected or ten additional containers may be selected at 
random and subjected to the test under which failure occurred. These 
containers shall be complete with ends assembled. Should any of the ten 
containers thus tested fail, the entire lot must be rejected. All 
containers constituting a lot shall be of like material, size, design, 
construction, finish and quality.

[Order 71, 31 FR 9074, July 1, 1966. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 
1967, as amended by 66 FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.33a-9  Marking.

    (a) By means of printing, lithographing, embossing, or stamping,

[[Page 766]]

each container must be marked to show:
    (1) DOT-2Q.
    (2) Name or symbol of person making the mark specified in paragraph 
(a)(1) of this section. Symbol, if used, must be registered with the 
Associate Administrator.
    (b) [Reserved]

[Amdt. 178-40, 41 FR 38181, Sept. 9, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 178-97, 
56 FR 66287, Dec. 20, 1991; 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001]



                 Subpart C--Specifications for Cylinders

    Source: Amdt. 178-114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, unless otherwise 
noted.



Sec. 178.35  General requirements for specification cylinders.

    (a) Compliance. Compliance with the requirements of this subpart is 
required in all details.
    (b) Inspections and analyses. Chemical analyses and tests required 
by this subchapter must be made within the United States, unless 
otherwise approved in writing by the Associate Administrator, in 
accordance with subpart I of part 107 of this chapter. Inspections and 
verification must be performed by--
    (1) An independent inspection agency approved in writing by the 
Associate Administrator, in accordance with subpart I of part 107 of 
this chapter; or
    (2) For DOT Specifications 3B, 3BN, 3E, 4B, 4BA, 4D (water capacity 
less than 1,100 cubic inches), 4B240ET, 4AA480, 4L, 8, 8AL, 4BW, 39 
(marked service pressure 900 p.s.i.g. or lower) and 4E manufactured in 
the United States, a competent inspector of the manufacturer.
    (c) Duties of inspector. The inspector shall determine that each 
cylinder made is in conformance with the applicable specification. 
Except as otherwise specified in the applicable specification, the 
inspector shall perform the following:
    (1) Inspect all material and reject any not meeting applicable 
requirements. For cylinders made by the billet-piercing process, billets 
must be inspected and shown to be free from pipe, cracks, excessive 
segregation and other injurious defects after parting or, when 
applicable, after nick and cold break.
    (2) Verify the material of construction meets the requirements of 
the applicable specification by--
    (i) Making a chemical analysis of each heat of material;
    (ii) Obtaining a certified chemical analysis from the material 
manufacturer for each heat of material (a ladle analysis is acceptable); 
or
    (iii) If an analysis is not provided for each heat of material by 
the material manufacturer, by making a check analysis of a sample from 
each coil, sheet, or tube.
    (3) Verify compliance of cylinders with the applicable specification 
by--
    (i) Verifying identification of material is proper;
    (ii) Inspecting the inside of the cylinder before closing in ends;
    (iii) Verifying that the heat treatment is proper;
    (iv) Obtaining samples for all tests and check chemical analyses 
(Note: Recommended locations for test specimens taken from welded 
cylinders are depicted in Figures 1 through 5 in Appendix C to this 
subpart for the specific construction design.);
    (v) Witnessing all tests;
    (vi) Verify threads by gauge;
    (vii) Reporting volumetric capacity and tare weight (see report 
form) and minimum thickness of wall noted; and
    (viii) Verifying that each cylinder is marked in accordance with the 
applicable specification.
    (4) Furnish complete test reports required by this subpart to the 
maker of the cylinder and, upon request, to the purchaser. The test 
report must be retained by the inspector for fifteen years from the 
original test date of the cylinder.
    (d) Defects and attachments. Cylinders must conform to the 
following:
    (1) A cylinder may not be constructed of material with seams, cracks 
or laminations, or other injurious defects.
    (2) Metal attachments to cylinders must have rounded or chamfered 
corners or must be protected in such a manner as to prevent the 
likelihood of causing puncture or damage to other

[[Page 767]]

hazardous materials packages. This requirement applies to anything 
temporarily or permanently attached to the cylinder, such as metal 
skids.
    (e) Safety devices. Pressure relief devices and protection for 
valves, safety devices, and other connections, if applied, must be as 
required or authorized by the appropriate specification, and as required 
in Sec. 173.301 of this subchapter.
    (f) Markings. Markings on a DOT Specification cylinder must conform 
to applicable requirements.
    (1) Each cylinder must be marked with the following information:
    (i) The DOT specification marking must appear first, followed 
immediately by the service pressure. For example, DOT-3A1800.
    (ii) The serial number must be placed just below or immediately 
following the DOT specification marking.
    (iii) A symbol (letters) must be placed just below, immediately 
before or following the serial number. Other variations in sequence of 
markings are authorized only when necessitated by a lack of space. The 
symbol and numbers must be those of the manufacturer. The symbol must be 
registered with the Associate Administrator; duplications are not 
authorized.
    (iv) The inspector's official mark and date of test (such as 5-95 
for May 1995) must be placed near the serial number. This information 
must be placed so that dates of subsequent tests can be easily added. An 
example of the markings prescribed in this paragraph (f)(1) is as 
follows:

DOT-3A1800
1234
XY
AB 5-95

    Or;

DOT-3A1800-1234-XY
AB 5-95

Where:

DOT-3A = specification number
1800 = service pressure
1234 = serial number
XY = symbol of manufacturer
AB = inspector's mark
5-95 = date of test

    (2) Additional required marking must be applied to the cylinder as 
follows:
    (i) The word ``spun'' or ``plug'' must be placed near the DOT 
specification marking when an end closure in the finished cylinder has 
been welded by the spinning process, or effected by plugging.
    (ii) As prescribed in specification 3HT (Sec. 178.44) or 3T 
(Sec. 178.45), if applicable.
    (3) Marking exceptions. A DOT 3E cylinder is not required to be 
marked with an inspector's mark or a serial number.
    (4) Unless otherwise specified in the applicable specification, the 
markings on each cylinder must be stamped plainly and permanently on the 
shoulder, top head, or neck.
    (5) The size of each marking must be at least 0.25 inch or as space 
permits.
    (6) Other markings are authorized provided they are made in low 
stress areas other than the side wall and are not of a size and depth 
that will create harmful stress concentrations. Such marks may not 
conflict with any DOT required markings.
    (g) Inspector's report. Each inspector shall prepare a report 
containing, at a minimum, the applicable information listed in CGA 
Pamphlet C-11 or, until October 1, 1997, in accordance with the 
applicable test report requirements of this subchapter in effect on 
September 30, 1996. Any additional information or markings that are 
required by the applicable specification must be shown on the test 
report. The signature of the inspector on the reports certifies that the 
processes of manufacture and heat treatment of cylinders were observed 
and found satisfactory.
    (h) Report retention. The manufacturer of the cylinders shall retain 
the reports required by this subpart for 15 years from the original test 
date of the cylinder.

[Amdt. 178-114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as amended at 66 FR 45185, 
Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51652, Aug. 8, 2002]



Sec. 178.36  Specification 3A and 3AX seamless steel cylinders.

    (a) Type size and service pressure. In addition to the requirements 
of Sec. 178.35, cylinders must conform to the following:
    (1) A DOT-3A cylinder is a seamless steel cylinder with a water 
capacity (nominal) not over 1,000 pounds and a service pressure of at 
least 150 psig.
    (2) A DOT-3AX is a seamless stainless steel cylinder with a water 
capacity

[[Page 768]]

not less than 1,000 pounds and a service pressure of at least 500 psig, 
conforming to the following requirements:
    (i) Assuming the cylinder is to be supported horizontally at its two 
ends only and to be uniformly loaded over its entire length consisting 
of the weight per unit of length of the straight cylindrical portion 
filled with water and compressed to the specified test pressure; the sum 
of two times the maximum tensile stress in the bottom fibers due to 
bending, plus that in the same fibers (longitudinal stress), due to 
hydrostatic test may not exceed 80 percent of the minimum yield strength 
of the steel at such maximum stress. Wall thickness must be increased 
when necessary to meet the requirement.
    (ii) To calculate the maximum longitudinal tensile stress due to 
bending, the following formula must be used:

S=Mc/I

    (iii) To calculate the maximum longitudinal tensile stress due to 
hydrostatic test pressure, the following formula must be used:

S = A1 P/A2

where:

S = tensile stress--p.s.i.;
M = bending moment-inch pounds--(wl2)/8;
w = weight per inch of cylinder filled with water;
l = length of cylinder-inches;
c = radius (D)/(2) of cylinder-inches;
I = moment of inertia--0.04909 (D4-d4) inches 
fourth;
D = outside diameter-inches;
d = inside diameter-inches;
A1 = internal area in cross section of cylinder-square 
inches;
A2 = area of metal in cross section of cylinder-square 
inches;
P=hydrostatic test pressure-psig.

    (b) Steel. Open-hearth or electric steel of uniform quality must be 
used. Content percent may not exceed the following: Carbon, 0.55; 
phosphorous, 0.045; sulphur, 0.050.
    (c) Identification of material. Material must be identified by any 
suitable method, except that plates and billets for hot-drawn cylinders 
must be marked with the heat number.
    (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be manufactured using equipment and 
processes adequate to ensure that each cylinder produced conforms to the 
requirements of this subpart. No fissure or other defect is permitted 
that is likely to weaken the finished cylinder appreciably. A reasonably 
smooth and uniform surface finish is required. If not originally free 
from such defects, the surface may be machined or otherwise treated to 
eliminate these defects. The thickness of the bottoms of cylinders 
welded or formed by spinning is, under no condition, to be less than two 
times the minimum wall thickness of the cylindrical shell; such bottom 
thicknesses must be measured within an area bounded by a line 
representing the points of contact between the cylinder and floor when 
the cylinder is in a vertical position.
    (e) Welding or brazing. Welding or brazing for any purpose 
whatsoever is prohibited except as follows:
    (1) Welding or brazing is authorized for the attachment of neckrings 
and footrings which are non-pressure parts and only to the tops and 
bottoms of cylinders having a service pressure of 500 psig or less. 
Cylinders, neckrings, and footrings must be made of weldable steel, the 
carbon content of which may not exceed 0.25 percent except in the case 
of 4130X steel which may be used with proper welding procedures.
    (2) As permitted in paragraph (d) of this section.
    (3) Cylinders used solely in anhydrous ammonia service may have a 
\1/2\ inch diameter bar welded within their concave bottoms.
    (f) Wall thickness. For cylinders with service pressure less than 
900 pounds, the wall stress may not exceed 24,000 psig. A minimum wall 
thickness of 0.100 inch is required for any cylinder over 5 inches 
outside diameter. Wall stress calculation must be made by using the 
following formula:

S = [P(1.3D2+0.4d2)]/(D2-d2)

Where:

S = wall stress in psi;
P = minimum test pressure prescribed for water jacket test or 450 psig 
whichever is the greater;
D = outside diameter in inches;
d = inside diameter in inches.

    (g) Heat treatment. The completed cylinder must be uniformly and 
properly heat-treated prior to tests.
    (h) Openings in cylinders and connections (valves, fuse plugs, etc.) 
for those

[[Page 769]]

openings. Threads are required on openings.
    (1) Threads must be clean cut, even, without checks, and to gauge.
    (2) Taper threads, when used, must be of length not less than as 
specified for American Standard taper pipe threads.
    (3) Straight threads having at least 6 engaged threads are 
authorized. Straight threads must have a tight fit and calculated shear 
strength of at least 10 times the test pressure of the cylinder. 
Gaskets, adequate to prevent leakage, are required.
    (i) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder must successfully withstand a 
hydrostatic test, as follows:
    (1) The test must be by water-jacket, or other suitable methods, 
operated so as to obtain accurate data. The pressure gauge must permit 
reading to an accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion gauge must permit 
reading of total expansion to an accuracy of either 1 percent or 0.1 
cubic centimeter.
    (2) Pressure must be maintained for at least 30 seconds and 
sufficiently longer to ensure complete expansion. Any internal pressure 
applied after heat-treatment and previous to the official test may not 
exceed 90 percent of the test pressure. If, due to failure of the test 
apparatus the test pressure cannot be maintained the test may be 
repeated at a pressure increased by 10 percent or 100 psig, whichever is 
the lower.
    (3) Permanent, volumetric expansion may not exceed 10 percent of the 
total volumetric expansion at test pressure.
    (4) Each cylinder must be tested to at least \5/3\ times service 
pressure.
    (j) Flattening test. A flattening test must be performed on one 
cylinder taken at random out of each lot of 200 or less, by placing the 
cylinder between wedge shaped knife edges having a 60 deg. included 
angle, rounded to \1/2\-inch radius. The longitudinal axis of the 
cylinder must be at a 90-degree angle to knife edges during the test. 
For lots of 30 or less, flattening tests are authorized to be made on a 
ring at least 8 inches long cut from each cylinder and subjected to same 
heat treatment as the finished cylinder.
    (k) Physical test. A physical test must be conducted to determine 
yield strength, tensile strength, elongation, and reduction of area of 
material as follows:
    (1) The test is required on 2 specimens cut from 1 cylinder taken at 
random out of each lot of 200 or less. For lots of 30 or less, physical 
tests are authorized to be made on a ring at least 8 inches long cut 
from each cylinder and subjected to same heat treatment as the finished 
cylinder.
    (2) Specimens must conform to the following:
    (i) Gauge length of 8 inches with a width of not over 1\1/2\ inches, 
a gauge length of 2 inches with a width of not over 1\1/2\ inches, or a 
gauge length of at least 24 times thickness with width not over 6 times 
thickness is authorized when cylinder wall is not over \3/16\ inch 
thick.
    (ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip ends, may not be flattened. 
Grip ends may be flattened to within 1 inch of each end of the reduced 
section.
    (iii) When size of cylinder does not permit securing straight 
specimens, the specimens may be taken in any location or direction and 
may be straightened or flattened cold, by pressure only, not by blows. 
When specimens are so taken and prepared, the inspector's report must 
show in connection with record of physical tests detailed information in 
regard to such specimens.
    (iv) Heating of a specimen for any purpose is not authorized.
    (3) The yield strength in tension must be the stress corresponding 
to a permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the gauge length. The following 
conditions apply:
    (i) The yield strength must be determined by either the ``offset'' 
method or the ``extension under load'' method as prescribed in ASTM E 8 
(incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).
    (ii) In using the ``extension under load'' method, the total strain 
(or ``extension under load'') corresponding to the stress at which the 
0.2-percent permanent strain occurs may be determined with sufficient 
accuracy by calculating the elastic extension of the gauge length under 
appropriate load and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the gauge length. 
Elastic extension calculations must be based on an elastic

[[Page 770]]

modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of controversy the entire stress-
strain diagram must be plotted and the yield strength determined from 
the 0.2 percent offset.
    (iii) For the purpose of strain measurement, the initial strain must 
be set while the specimen is under a stress of 12,000 psig and the 
strain indicator reading must be set at the calculated corresponding 
strain.
    (iv) Cross-head speed of the testing machine may not exceed \1/8\ 
inch per minute during yield strength determination.
    (l) Acceptable results for physical and flattening tests. Either of 
the following is an acceptable result:
    (1) An elongation at least 40 percent for a 2-inch gauge length or 
at least 20 percent in other cases and yield strength not over 73 
percent of tensile strength. In this instance, the flattening test is 
not required.
    (2) An elongation at least 20 percent for a 2-inch gauge length or 
10 percent in other cases and a yield strength not over 73 percent of 
tensile strength. In this instance, the flattening test is required, 
without cracking, to 6 times the wall thickness.
    (m) Leakage test. All spun cylinders and plugged cylinders must be 
tested for leakage by gas or air pressure after the bottom has been 
cleaned and is free from all moisture subject to the following 
conditions and limitations:
    (1) Pressure, approximately the same as but no less than service 
pressure, must be applied to one side of the finished bottom over an 
area of at least \1/16\ of the total area of the bottom but not less 
than \3/4\ inch in diameter, including the closure, for at least 1 
minute, during which time the other side of the bottom exposed to 
pressure must be covered with water and closely examined for indications 
of leakage. Except as provided in paragraph (n) of this section, a 
cylinder that is leaking must be rejected.
    (2) A spun cylinder is one in which an end closure in the finished 
cylinder has been welded by the spinning process.
    (3) A plugged cylinder is one in which a permanent closure in the 
bottom of a finished cylinder has been effected by a plug.
    (4) As a safety precaution, if the manufacturer elects to make this 
test before the hydrostatic test, the manufacturer should design the 
test apparatus so that the pressure is applied to the smallest area 
practicable, around the point of closure, and so as to use the smallest 
possible volume of air or gas.
    (n) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treatment is authorized for rejected 
cylinders. Subsequent thereto, cylinders must pass all prescribed tests 
to be acceptable. Repair by welding or spinning is not authorized. Spun 
cylinders rejected under the provisions of paragraph (m) of this section 
may be removed from the spun cylinder category by drilling to remove 
defective material, tapping and plugging.

[Amdt. 178-114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as amended at 62 FR 51561, 
Oct. 1, 1997; 66 FR 45185, 45386-45387, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51652, Aug. 
8, 2002]



Sec. 178.37  Specification 3AA and 3AAX seamless steel cylinders.

    (a) Type, size and service pressure. In addition to the requirements 
of Sec. 178.35, cylinders must conform to the following:
    (1) A DOT-3AA cylinder is a seamless steel cylinder with a water 
capacity (nominal) of not over 1,000 pounds and a service pressure of at 
least 150 psig.
    (2) A DOT-3AAX cylinder is a seamless steel cylinder with a water 
capacity of not less than 1,000 pounds and a service pressure of at 
least 500 psig, conforming to the following requirements:
    (i) Assuming the cylinder is to be supported horizontally at its two 
ends only and to be uniformly loaded over its entire length consisting 
of the weight per unit of length of the straight cylindrical portion 
filled with water and compressed to the specified test pressure; the sum 
of two times the maximum tensile stress in the bottom fibers due to 
bending, plus that in the same fibers (longitudinal stress), due to 
hydrostatic test pressure may not exceed 80 percent of the minimum yield 
strength of the steel at such maximum stress. Wall thickness must be 
increased when necessary to meet the requirement.

[[Page 771]]

    (ii) To calculate the maximum tensile stress due to bending, the 
following formula must be used:

S = Mc/I

    (iii) To calculate the maximum longitudinal tensile stress due to 
hydrostatic test pressure, the following formula must be used:

S = A\1\P/A\2\

Where:

S = tensile stress-p.s.i.;
M = bending moment-inch pounds (wl\2\)/8;
w = weight per inch of cylinder filled with water;
l = length of cylinder-inches;
c = radius (D)/(2) of cylinder-inches;
I = moment of inertia-0.04909 (D\4\-d\4\) inches fourth;
D = outside diameter-inches;
d = inside diameter-inches;
A\1\ = internal area in cross section of cylinder-square inches;
A\2\ = area of metal in cross section of cylinder-square inches;
P = hydrostatic test pressure-psig.

    (b) Authorized steel. Open-hearth, basic oxygen, or electric steel 
of uniform quality must be used. A heat of steel made under the 
specifications in table 1 of this paragraph (b), check chemical analysis 
of which is slightly out of the specified range, is acceptable, if 
satisfactory in all other respects, provided the tolerances shown in 
table 2 of this paragraph (b) are not exceeded. When a carbon-boron 
steel is used, a hardenability test must be performed on the first and 
last ingot of each heat of steel. The results of this test must be 
recorded on the Record of Chemical Analysis of Material for Cylinders 
required by Sec. 178.35. This hardness test must be made \5/16\-inch 
from the quenched end of the Jominy quench bar and the hardness must be 
at least Rc 33 and no more than Rc 53. The following chemical analyses 
are authorized:

                                                              Table 1--Authorized Materials
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                                                                        Inter- mediate
           Designation              4130X (percent)    NE-8630 (percent)    9115 (percent)      9125 (percent)       Carbon-boron          manganese
                                     (see Note 1)        (see Note 1)        (see Note 1)        (see Note 1)          (percent)           (percent)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Carbon..........................  0.25/0.35.........  0.28/0.33.........  0.10/0.20.........  0.20/0.30.........  0.27-0.37.........  0.40 max.
Manganese.......................  0.40/0.90.........  0.70/0.90.........  0.50/0.75.........  0.50/0.75.........  0.80-1.40.........  1.35/1.65.
Phosphorus......................  0.04 max..........  0.04 max..........  0.04 max..........  0.04 max..........  0.035 max.........  0.04 max.
Sulfur..........................  0.05 max..........  0.04 max..........  0.04 max..........  0.04 max..........  0.045 max.........  0.05 max.
Silicon.........................  0.15/0.35.........  0.20/0.35.........  0.60/0.90.........  0.60/0.90.........  0.3 max...........  0.10/0.30.
Chromium........................  0.80/1.10.........  0.40/0.60.........  0.50/0.65.........  0.50/0.65.
Molybdenum......................  0.15/0.25.........  0.15/0.25
Zirconium.......................  ..................  ..................  0.05/0.15.........  0.05/0.15
Nickel..........................  ..................  0.40/0.70.........
Boron...........................  ..................  ..................  ..................  ..................  0.0005/0.003.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note 1: This designation may not be restrictive and the commercial steel is limited in analysis as shown in this table.


                                       Table 2--Check Analysis Tolerances
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                        Tolerance (percent) over
                                                                                          the maximum limit or
                                                                                         under the minimum limit
                    Element                      Limit or maximum specified (percent)  -------------------------
                                                                                           Under         Over
                                                                                          minimum      maximum
                                                                                           limit        limit
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Carbon........................................  To 0.15 incl..........................         0.02         0.03
                                                Over 0.15 to 0.40 incl................          .03          .04
Manganese.....................................  To 0.60 incl..........................          .03          .03
                                                Over 0.60 to 1.15 incl................         0.04         0.04
                                                Over 1.15 to 2.50 incl................         0.05         0.05
Phosphorus\1\.................................  All ranges............................  ...........          .01
Sulphur.......................................  All ranges............................  ...........          .01
Silicon.......................................  To 0.30 incl..........................          .02          .03
                                                Over 0.30 to 1.00 incl................          .05          .05
Nickel........................................  To 1.00 incl..........................          .03          .03
Chromium......................................  To 0.90 incl..........................          .03          .03
                                                0.90 to 2.90 incl.....................          .05          .05
Molybdenum....................................  To 0.20 incl..........................          .01          .01
                                                Over 0.20 to 0.40.....................          .02          .02
Zirconium.....................................  All ranges............................          .01          .05
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Rephosphorized steels not subject to check analysis for phosphorus.


[[Page 772]]

    (c) Identification of material. Material must be identified by any 
suitable method except that plates and billets for hot-drawn cylinders 
must be marked with the heat number.
    (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be manufactured using equipment and 
processes adequate to ensure that each cylinder produced conforms to the 
requirements of this subpart. No fissure or other defects is permitted 
that is likely to weaken the finished cylinder appreciably. A reasonably 
smooth and uniform surface finish is required. If not originally free 
from such defects, the surface may be machined or otherwise treated to 
eliminate these defects. The thickness of the bottoms of cylinders 
welded or formed by spinning is, under no condition, to be less than two 
times the minimum wall thickness of the cylindrical shell; such bottom 
thicknesses must be measured within an area bounded by a line 
representing the points of contact between the cylinder and floor when 
the cylinder is in a vertical position.
    (e) Welding or brazing. Welding or brazing for any purpose 
whatsoever is prohibited except as follows:
    (1) Welding or brazing is authorized for the attachment of neckrings 
and footrings which are non-pressure parts, and only to the tops and 
bottoms of cylinders having a service pressure of 500 psig or less. 
Cylinders, neckrings, and footrings must be made of weldable steel, the 
carbon content of which may not exceed 0.25 percent except in the case 
of 4130X steel which may be used with proper welding procedure.
    (2) As permitted in paragraph (d) of this section.
    (f) Wall thickness. The thickness of each cylinder must conform to 
the following:
    (1) For cylinders with a service pressure of less than 900 psig, the 
wall stress may not exceed 24,000 psi. A minimum wall thickness of 0.100 
inch is required for any cylinder with an outside diameter of over 5 
inches.
    (2) For cylinders with service pressure of 900 psig or more the 
minimum wall must be such that the wall stress at the minimum specified 
test pressure may not exceed 67 percent of the minimum tensile strength 
of the steel as determined from the physical tests required in 
paragraphs (k) and (l) of this section and must be not over 70,000 psi.
    (3) Calculation must be made by the formula:

S = [P(1.3D2+0.4d2)]/(D2-d2)

Where:

S = wall stress in psi;
P = minimum test pressure prescribed for water jacket test or 450 psig 
whichever is the greater;
D = outside diameter in inches;
d = inside diameter in inches.

    (g) Heat treatment. The completed cylinders must be uniformly and 
properly heat treated prior to tests. Heat treatment of cylinders of the 
authorized analyses must be as follows:
    (1) All cylinders must be quenched by oil, or other suitable medium 
except as provided in paragraph (g)(5) of this section.
    (2) The steel temperature on quenching must be that recommended for 
the steel analysis, but may not exceed 1750  deg.F.
    (3) All steels must be tempered at a temperature most suitable for 
that steel.
    (4) The minimum tempering temperature may not be less than 1000 
deg.F except as noted in paragraph (g)(6) of this section.
    (5) Steel 4130X may be normalized at a temperature of 1650  deg.F 
instead of being quenched and cylinders so normalized need not be 
tempered.
    (6) Intermediate manganese steels may be tempered at temperatures 
not less than 1150  deg.F., and after heat treating each cylinder must 
be submitted to a magnetic test to detect the presence of quenching 
cracks. Cracked cylinders must be rejected and destroyed.
    (7) Except as otherwise provided in paragraph (g)(6) of this 
section, all cylinders, if water quenched or quenched with a liquid 
producing a cooling rate in excess of 80 percent of the cooling rate of 
water, must be inspected by the magnetic particle, dye penetrant or 
ultrasonic method to detect the presence of quenching cracks. Any 
cylinder designed to the requirements for specification 3AA and found to 
have a quenching crack must be rejected and may not be requalified. 
Cylinders designed to the requirements for specification 3AAX and found 
to have

[[Page 773]]

cracks must have cracks removed to sound metal by mechanical means. Such 
specification 3AAX cylinders will be acceptable if the repaired area is 
subsequently examined to assure no defect, and it is determined that 
design thickness requirements are met.
    (h) Openings in cylinders and connections (valves, fuse plugs, etc.) 
for those openings. Threads are required on openings.
    (1) Threads must be clean cut, even, without checks, and to gauge.
    (2) Taper threads, when used, must be of a length not less than as 
specified for American Standard taper pipe threads.
    (3) Straight threads having at least 6 engaged threads are 
authorized. Straight threads must have a tight fit and a calculated 
shear strength of at least 10 times the test pressure of the cylinder. 
Gaskets, adequate to prevent leakage, are required.
    (i) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder must successfully withstand a 
hydrostatic test as follows:
    (1) The test must be by water-jacket, or other suitable method, 
operated so as to obtain accurate data. The pressure gauge must permit 
reading to an accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion gauge must permit 
reading of total expansion to an accuracy of either 1 percent or 0.1 
cubic centimeter.
    (2) Pressure must be maintained for at least 30 seconds and 
sufficiently longer to ensure complete expansion. Any internal pressure 
applied after heat-treatment and previous to the official test may not 
exceed 90 percent of the test pressure. If, due to failure of the test 
apparatus, the test pressure cannot be maintained, the test may be 
repeated at a pressure increased by 10 percent or 100 psig, whichever is 
the lower.
    (3) Permanent volumetric expansion may not exceed 10 percent of 
total volumetric expansion at test pressure.
    (4) Each cylinder must be tested to at least \5/3\ times the service 
pressure.
    (j) Flattening test. A flattening test must be performed on one 
cylinder taken at random out of each lot of 200 or less, by placing the 
cylinder between wedge shaped knife edges having a 60 deg. included 
angle, rounded to \1/2\-inch radius. The longitudinal axis of the 
cylinder must be at a 90-degree angle to knife edges during the test. 
For lots of 30 or less, flattening tests are authorized to be made on a 
ring at least 8 inches long cut from each cylinder and subjected to same 
heat treatment as the finished cylinder.
    (k) Physical test. A physical test must be conducted to determine 
yield strength, tensile strength, elongation, and reduction of area of 
material as follows:
    (1) The test is required on 2 specimens cut from 1 cylinder taken at 
random out of each lot of 200 or less. For lots of 30 or less, physical 
tests are authorized to be made on a ring at least 8 inches long cut 
from each cylinder and subjected to the same heat treatment as the 
finished cylinder.
    (2) Specimens must conform to the following:
    (i) Gauge length of 8 inches with a width of not over 1\1/2\ inches, 
a gauge length of 2 inches with a width of not over 1\1/2\ inches, or a 
gauge length of at least 24 times the thickness with width not over 6 
times thickness when the thickness of the cylinder wall is not over \3/
16\ inch.
    (ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip ends, may not be flattened. 
Grip ends may be flattened to within 1 inch of each end of the reduced 
section.
    (iii) When size of cylinder does not permit securing straight 
specimens, the specimens may be taken in any location or direction and 
may be straightened or flattened cold, by pressure only, not by blows. 
When specimens are so taken and prepared, the inspector's report must 
show in connection with record of physical tests detailed information in 
regard to such specimens.
    (iv) Heating of a specimen for any purpose is not authorized.
    (3) The yield strength in tension must be the stress corresponding 
to a permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the gauge length. The following 
conditions apply:
    (i) The yield strength must be determined by either the ``offset'' 
method or the ``extension under load'' method as prescribed in ASTM E 8 
(incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).

[[Page 774]]

    (ii) In using the ``extension under load'' method, the total strain 
(or ``extension under load'') corresponding to the stress at which the 
0.2 percent permanent strain occurs may be determined with sufficient 
accuracy by calculating the elastic extension of the gauge length under 
appropriate load and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the gauge length. 
Elastic extension calculations must be based on an elastic modulus of 
30,000,000. In the event of controversy, the entire stress-strain 
diagram must be plotted and the yield strength determined from the 0.2 
percent offset.
    (iii) For the purpose of strain measurement, the initial strain must 
be set while the specimen is under a stress of 12,000 psi, the strain 
indicator reading being set at the calculated corresponding strain.
    (iv) Cross-head speed of the testing machine may not exceed \1/8\ 
inch per minute during yield strength determination.
    (l) Acceptable results for physical and flattening tests. An 
acceptable result for physical and flattening tests is elongation at 
least 20 percent for 2 inches of gauge length or at least 10 percent in 
other cases. Flattening is required, without cracking, to 6 times the 
wall thickness of the cylinder.
    (m) Leakage test. All spun cylinders and plugged cylinders must be 
tested for leakage by gas or air pressure after the bottom has been 
cleaned and is free from all moisture. Pressure, approximately the same 
as but no less than the service pressure, must be applied to one side of 
the finished bottom over an area of at least \1/16\ of the total area of 
the bottom but not less than \3/4\ inch in diameter, including the 
closure, for at least one minute, during which time the other side of 
the bottom exposed to pressure must be covered with water and closely 
examined for indications of leakage. Except as provided in paragraph (n) 
of this section, a cylinder must be rejected if there is any leaking.
    (1) A spun cylinder is one in which an end closure in the finished 
cylinder has been welded by the spinning process.
    (2) A plugged cylinder is one in which a permanent closure in the 
bottom of a finished cylinder has been effected by a plug.
    (3) As a safety precaution, if the manufacturer elects to make this 
test before the hydrostatic test, the manufacturer should design the 
test apparatus so that the pressure is applied to the smallest area 
practicable, around the point of closure, and so as to use the smallest 
possible volume of air or gas.
    (n) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treatment is authorized for rejected 
cylinders. Subsequent thereto, cylinders must pass all prescribed tests 
to be acceptable. Repair by welding or spinning is not authorized. Spun 
cylinders rejected under the provision of paragraph (m) of this section 
may be removed from the spun cylinder category by drilling to remove 
defective material, tapping and plugging.

[Amdt. 178-114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as amended at 65 FR 58631, 
Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45386-45387, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51652, Aug. 8, 
2002]



Sec. 178.38  Specification 3B seamless steel cylinders.

    (a) Type, size, and service pressure. A DOT 3B cylinder is seamless 
steel cylinder with a water capacity (nominal) of not over 1,000 pounds 
and a service pressure of at least 150 to not over 500 psig.
    (b) Steel. Open-hearth or electric steel of uniform quality must be 
used. Content percent may not exceed the following: carbon, 0.55; 
phosphorus, 0.045; sulphur, 0.050.
    (c) Identification of material. Material must be identified by any 
suitable method except that plates and billets for hot-drawn cylinders 
must be marked with the heat number.
    (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be manufactured using equipment and 
processes adequate to ensure that each cylinder produced conforms to the 
requirements of this subpart. No fissure or other defect is permitted 
that is likely to weaken the finished cylinder appreciably. A reasonably 
smooth and uniform surface finish is required. If not originally free 
from such defects, the surface may be machined or otherwise treated to 
eliminate these defects. The thickness of the bottoms of cylinders 
welded or formed by spinning is,

[[Page 775]]

under no condition, to be less than two times the minimum wall thickness 
of the cylindrical shell; such bottom thicknesses to be measured within 
an area bounded by a line representing the points of contact between the 
cylinder and floor when the cylinder is in a vertical position.
    (e) Welding or brazing. Welding or brazing for any purpose 
whatsoever is prohibited except as follows:
    (1) Welding or brazing is authorized for the attachment of neckrings 
and footrings which are non-pressure parts, and only to the tops and 
bottoms of cylinders having a service pressure of 500 psig or less. 
Cylinders, neckrings, and footrings must be made of weldable steel, 
carbon content of which may not exceed 0.25 percent except in the case 
of 4130X steel which may be used with proper welding procedure.
    (2) As permitted in paragraph (d) of this section.
    (f) Wall thickness. The wall stress may not exceed 24,000 psi. The 
minimum wall thickness is 0.090 inch for any cylinder with an outside 
diameter of 6 inches. Calculation must be made by the following formula:

S = [P(1.3D\2\+0.4d\2\)]/(D\2\-d\2\)

Where:

S = wall stress in psi;
P = at least two times service pressure or 450 psig, whichever is the 
greater;
D = outside diameter in inches;
d = inside diameter in inches.

    (g) Heat treatment. The completed cylinders must be uniformly and 
properly heat-treated prior to tests.
    (h) Openings in cylinders and connections (valves, fuse plugs, etc.) 
for those openings. Threads, conforming to the following, are required 
on all openings:
    (1) Threads must be clean cut, even, without checks, and to gauge.
    (2) Taper threads when used, must be of a length not less than as 
specified for American Standard taper pipe threads.
    (3) Straight threads having at least 4 engaged threads are 
authorized. Straight threads must have a tight fit, and calculated shear 
strength at least 10 times the test pressure of the cylinder. Gaskets, 
adequate to prevent leakage, are required.
    (i) Hydrostatic test. Cylinders must successfully withstand a 
hydrostatic test, as follows:
    (1) The test must be by water-jacket, or other suitable method, 
operated so as to obtain accurate data. The pressure gauge must permit 
reading to an accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion gauge must permit 
reading of total expansion to an accuracy either of 1 percent or 0.1 
cubic centimeter.
    (2) Pressure must be maintained for at least 30 seconds and 
sufficiently longer to insure complete expansion. Any internal pressure 
applied after heat-treatment and previous to the official test may not 
exceed 90 percent of the test pressure. If, due to failure of the test 
apparatus, the test pressure cannot be maintained, the test may be 
repeated at a pressure increased by 10 percent or 100 psig, whichever is 
the lower.
    (3) Permanent volumetric expansion may not exceed 10 percent of 
total volumetric expansion at test pressure.
    (4) Cylinders must be tested as follows:
    (i) Each cylinder; to at least 2 times service pressure; or
    (ii) 1 cylinder out of each lot of 200 or less; to at least 3 times 
service pressure. Others must be examined under pressure of 2 times 
service pressure and show no defect.
    (j) Flattening test. A flattening test must be performed on one 
cylinder taken at random out of each lot of 200 or less, by placing the 
cylinder between wedge shaped knife edges having a 60 deg. included 
angle, rounded to \1/2\-inch radius. The longitudinal axis of the 
cylinder must be at a 90-degree angle to knife edges during the test. 
For lots of 30 or less, flattening tests are authorized to be made on a 
ring at least 8 inches long cut from each cylinder and subjected to same 
heat treatment as the finished cylinder.
    (k) Physical test. A physical test must be conducted to determine 
yield strength, tensile strength, elongation, and reduction of area of 
material, as follows:
    (1) The test is required on 2 specimens cut from 1 cylinder taken at 
random out of each lot of 200 or less. For lots of 30 or less, physical 
tests are authorized to be made on a ring at least

[[Page 776]]

8 inches long cut from each cylinder and subjected to same heat 
treatment as the finished cylinder.
    (2) Specimens must conform to the following:
    (i) Gauge length of 8 inches with a width of not over 1\1/2\ inches; 
or a gauge length of 2 inches with a width of not over 1\1/2\ inches; or 
a gauge length at least 24 times the thickness with a width not over 6 
times thickness is authorized when a cylinder wall is not over \3/16\ 
inch thick.
    (ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip ends, may not be flattened. 
Grip ends may be flattened to within one inch of each end of the reduced 
section.
    (iii) When size of cylinder does not permit securing straight 
specimens, the specimens may be taken in any location or direction and 
may be straightened or flattened cold, by pressure only, not by blows. 
When specimens are so taken and prepared, the inspector's report must 
show in connection with record of physical tests detailed information in 
regard to such specimens.
    (iv) Heating of a specimen for any purpose is not authorized.
    (3) The yield strength in tension must be the stress corresponding 
to a permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the gauge length. The following 
conditions apply:
    (i) The yield strength must be determined by either the ``offset'' 
method or the ``extension under load'' method as prescribed in ASTM E 8 
(incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).
    (ii) In using the ``extension under load'' method, the total strain 
(or ``extension under load'') corresponding to the stress at which the 
0.2 percent permanent strain occurs may be determined with sufficient 
accuracy by calculating the elastic extension of the gauge length under 
appropriate load and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the gauge length. 
Elastic extension calculations must be based on an elastic modulus of 
30,000,000. In the event of controversy, the entire stress-strain 
diagram must be plotted and the yield strength determined from the 0.2 
percent offset.
    (iii) For the purpose of strain measurement, the initial strain must 
be set while the specimen is under a stress of 12,000 psi, and the 
strain indicator reading being set at the calculated corresponding 
strain.
    (iv) Cross-head speed of the testing machine may not exceed \1/8\ 
inch per minute during yield strength determination.
    (l) Acceptable results for physical and flattening tests. Either of 
the following is an acceptable result:
    (1) An elongation of at least 40 percent for a 2-inch gauge length 
or at least 20 percent in other cases and yield strength not over 73 
percent of tensile strength. In this instance, the flattening test is 
not required.
    (2) An elongation of at least 20 percent for a 2-inch gauge length 
or 10 percent in other cases and yield strength not over 73 percent of 
tensile strength. Flattening is required, without cracking, to 6 times 
the wall thickness.
    (m) Leakage test. All spun cylinders and plugged cylinders must be 
tested for leakage by gas or air pressure after the bottom has been 
cleaned and is free from all moisture, subject to the following 
conditions and limitations:
    (1) Pressure, approximately the same as but no less than service 
pressure, must be applied to one side of the finished bottom over an 
area of at least \1/16\ of the total area of the bottom but not less 
than \3/4\ inch in diameter, including the closure, for at least one 
minute, during which time the other side of the bottom exposed to 
pressure must be covered with water and closely examined for indications 
of leakage. Except as provided in paragraph (n) of this section, a 
cylinder must be rejected if there is any leaking.
    (2) A spun cylinder is one in which an end closure in the finished 
cylinder has been welded by the spinning process.
    (3) A plugged cylinder is one in which a permanent closure in the 
bottom of a finished cylinder has been effected by a plug.
    (4) As a safety precaution, if the manufacturer elects to make this 
test before the hydrostatic test, he should design his apparatus so that 
the pressure is applied to the smallest area practicable, around the 
point of closure, and so as to use the smallest possible volume of air 
or gas.

[[Page 777]]

    (n) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treatment of rejected cylinders is 
authorized. Subsequent thereto, cylinders must pass all prescribed tests 
to be acceptable. Repair by welding or spinning is not authorized. Spun 
cylinders rejected under the provisions of paragraph (m) of this section 
may be removed from the spun cylinder category by drilling to remove 
defective material, tapping and plugging.
    (o) Marking. Markings may be stamped into the sidewalls of cylinders 
having a service pressure of 150 psig if all of the following conditions 
are met:
    (1) Wall stress at test pressure may not exceed 24,000 psi.
    (2) Minimum wall thickness must be not less than 0.090 inch.
    (3) Depth of stamping must be no greater than 15 percent of the 
minimum wall thickness, but may not exceed 0.015 inch.
    (4) Maximum outside diameter of cylinder may not exceed 5 inches.
    (5) Carbon content of cylinder may not exceed 0.25 percent. If the 
carbon content exceeds 0.25 percent, the complete cylinder must be 
normalized after stamping.
    (6) Stamping must be adjacent to the top head.

[Amdt. 178-114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as amended by 66 FR 45185, 
45386-45388, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51652, Aug. 8, 2002]



Sec. 178.39  Specification 3BN seamless nickel cylinders.

    (a) Type, size and service pressure. A DOT 3BN cylinder is a 
seamless nickel cylinder with a water capacity (nominal) not over 125 
pounds water capacity (nominal) and a service pressure at least 150 to 
not over 500 psig.
    (b) Nickel. The percentage of nickel plus cobalt must be at least 
99.0 percent.
    (c) Identification of material. The material must be identified by 
any suitable method except that plates and billets for hot-drawn 
cylinders must be marked with the heat number.
    (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be manufactured using equipment and 
processes adequate to ensure that each cylinder produced conforms to the 
requirements of this subpart. No defect is permitted that is likely to 
weaken the finished cylinder appreciably. A reasonably smooth and 
uniform surface finish is required. Cylinders closed in by spinning 
process are not authorized.
    (e) Welding or brazing. Welding or brazing for any purpose 
whatsoever is prohibited except that welding is authorized for the 
attachment of neckrings and footrings which are nonpressure parts, and 
only to the tops and bottoms of cylinders. Neckrings and footrings must 
be of weldable material, the carbon content of which may not exceed 0.25 
percent. Nickel welding rod must be used.
    (f) Wall thickness. The wall stress may not exceed 15,000 psi. A 
minimum wall thickness of 0.100 inch is required for any cylinder over 5 
inches in outside diameter. Wall stress calculation must be made by 
using the following formula:

S = [P(1.3D\2\ + 0.4d\2\)] / (D\2\ - d\2\)

Where:

S = wall stress in psi;
P = minimum test pressure prescribed for water jacket test or 450 psig 
whichever is the greater;
D = outside diameter in inches;
d = inside diameter in inches.

    (g) Heat treatment. The completed cylinders must be uniformly and 
properly heat-treated prior to tests.
    (h) Openings in cylinders and connections (valves, fuse plugs, etc.) 
for those openings. Threads conforming to the following are required on 
openings:
    (1) Threads must be clean cut, even, without checks, and to gauge.
    (2) Taper threads, when used, to be of length not less than as 
specified for American Standard taper pipe threads.
    (3) Straight threads having at least 6 engaged threads are 
authorized. Straight threads must have a tight fit and a calculated 
shear strength of at least 10 times the test pressure of the cylinder. 
Gaskets, adequate to prevent leakage, are required.
    (i) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder must successfully withstand a 
hydrostatic test, as follows:
    (1) The test must be by water-jacket, or other suitable method, 
operated so as to obtain accurate data. The pressure gauge must permit 
reading to an accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion

[[Page 778]]

gauge must permit reading of total expansion to an accuracy either of 1 
percent or 0.1 cubic centimeter.
    (2) Pressure must be maintained for at least 30 seconds and 
sufficiently longer to ensure complete expansion. Any internal pressure 
applied after heat-treatment and previous to the official test may not 
exceed 90 percent of the test pressure. If, due to failure of the test 
apparatus, the test pressure cannot be maintained, the test may be 
repeated at a pressure increased by 10 percent or 100 psig, whichever is 
the lower.
    (3) Permanent volumetric expansion may not exceed 10 percent of 
total volumetric expansion at test pressure.
    (4) Each cylinder must be tested to at least 2 times service 
pressure.
    (j) Flattening test. A flattening test must be performed on one 
cylinder taken at random out of each lot of 200 or less, by placing the 
cylinder between wedge shaped knife edges having a 60 deg. included 
angle, rounded to \1/2\-inch radius. The longitudinal axis of the 
cylinder must be at a 90-degree angle to knife edges during the test. 
For lots of 30 or less, flattening tests are authorized to be made on a 
ring at least 8 inches long cut from each cylinder and subjected to same 
heat treatment as the finished cylinder.
    (k) Physical test. A physical test must be conducted to determine 
yield strength, tensile strength, elongation, and reduction of area of 
material, as follows:
    (1) The test is required on 2 specimens cut from 1 cylinder taken at 
random out of each lot of 200 or less. For lots of 30 or less, physical 
tests are authorized to be made on a ring at least 8 inches long cut 
from each cylinder and subjected to same heat treatment as the finished 
cylinder.
    (2) Specimens must conform to the following:
    (i) A gauge length of 8 inches with a width of not over 1\1/2\ 
inches, a gauge length of 2 inches with a width of not over 1\1/2\ 
inches, or a gauge length of at least 24 times the thickness with a 
width not over 6 times thickness is authorized when a cylinder wall is 
not over \3/16\ inch thick.
    (ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip ends, may not be flattened. 
Grip ends may be flattened to within one inch of each end of the reduced 
section.
    (iii) When size of cylinder does not permit securing straight 
specimens, the specimens may be taken in any location or direction and 
may be straightened or flattened cold, by pressure only, not by blows. 
When specimens are so taken and prepared, the inspector's report must 
show in connection with record of physical tests detailed information in 
regard to such specimens.
    (iv) Heating of a specimen for any purpose is not authorized.
    (3) The yield strength in tension must be the stress corresponding 
to a permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the gauge length. The following 
conditions apply:
    (i) The yield strength must be determined by either the ``offset'' 
method or the ``extension under load'' method as prescribed in ASTM E 8 
(incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).
    (ii) In using the ``extension under load'' method, the total strain 
(or ``extension under load'') corresponding to the stress at which the 
0.2 percent permanent strain occurs may be determined with sufficient 
accuracy by calculating the elastic extension of the gauge length under 
appropriate load and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the gauge length. 
Elastic extension calculations must be based on an elastic modulus of 
30,000,000. In the event of controversy, the entire stress-strain 
diagram must be plotted and the yield strength determined from the 0.2 
percent offset.
    (iii) For the purpose of strain measurement, the initial strain must 
be set while the specimen is under a stress of 12,000 psi, and the 
strain indicator reading must be set at the calculated corresponding 
strain.
    (iv) Cross-head speed of the testing machine may not exceed \1/8\ 
inch per minute during yield strength determination.
    (l) Acceptable results for physical and flattening tests. Either of 
the following is an acceptable result:
    (1) An elongation of at least 40 percent for a 2 inch gauge length 
or at least 20 percent in other cases and

[[Page 779]]

yield point not over 50 percent of tensile strength. In this instance, 
the flattening test is not required.
    (2) An elongation of at least 20 percent for a 2 inch gauge length 
or 10 percent in other cases and a yield point not over 50 percent of 
tensile strength. Flattening is required, without cracking, to 6 times 
the wall thickness.
    (m) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treatment is authorized for rejected 
cylinders. Subsequent thereto, cylinders must pass all prescribed tests 
to be acceptable. Repair by welding is not authorized.

[Amdt. 178-114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as amended by 66 FR 45185, 
45386, 45388, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51652, Aug. 8, 2002]



Sec. 178.42  Specification 3E seamless steel cylinders.

    (a) Type, size, and service pressure. A DOT 3E cylinder is a 
seamless steel cylinder with an outside diameter not greater than 2 
inches nominal, a length less than 2 feet and a service pressure of 
1,800 psig.
    (b) Steel. Open-hearth or electric steel of uniform quality must be 
used. Content percent may not exceed the following: Carbon, 0.55; 
phosphorus, 0.045; sulphur, 0.050.
    (c) Identification of steel. Materials must be identified by any 
suitable method.
    (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be manufactured by best appliances 
and methods. No defect is permitted that is likely to weaken the 
finished cylinder appreciably. A reasonably smooth and uniform surface 
finish is required. The thickness of the spun bottom is, under no 
condition, to be less than two times the minimum wall thickness of the 
cylindrical shell; such bottom thickness must be measured within an area 
bounded by a line representing the points of contact between the 
cylinder and floor when the cylinder is in a vertical position.
    (e) Openings in cylinders and connections (valves, fuse plugs, etc.) 
for those openings. Threads conforming to the following are required on 
openings.
    (1) Threads must be clean cut, even, without checks, and to gauge.
    (2) Taper threads, when used, must be of length not less than as 
specified for American Standard taper pipe threads.
    (3) Straight threads having at least 4 engaged threads are 
authorized. Straight threads must have a tight fit and a calculated 
shear strength of at least 10 times the test pressure of the cylinder. 
Gaskets, adequate to prevent leakage, are required.
    (f) Hydrostatic test. Cylinders must be tested as follows:
    (1) One cylinder out of each lot of 500 or less must be subjected to 
a hydrostatic pressure of 6,000 psig or higher.
    (2) The cylinder referred to in paragraph (f)(1) of this section 
must burst at a pressure higher than 6,000 psig without fragmenting or 
otherwise showing lack of ductility, or must hold a pressure of 12,000 
psig for 30 seconds without bursting. In which case, it must be 
subjected to a flattening test without cracking to six times wall 
thickness between knife edges, wedge shaped 60 degree angle, rounded out 
to a \1/2\ inch radius. The inspector's report must be suitably changed 
to show results of latter alternate and flattening test.
    (3) Other cylinders must be examined under pressure of at least 
3,000 psig and not to exceed 4,500 psig and show no defect. Cylinders 
tested at a pressure in excess of 3,600 psig must burst at a pressure 
higher than 7,500 psig when tested as specified in paragraph (f)(2) of 
this section. The pressure must be maintained for at least 30 seconds 
and sufficiently longer to ensure complete examination.
    (g) Leakage test. All spun cylinders and plugged cylinders must be 
tested for leakage by gas or air pressure after the bottom has been 
cleaned and is free from all moisture subject to the following 
conditions and limitations:
    (1) A pressure, approximately the same as but not less than the 
service pressure, must be applied to one side of the finished bottom 
over an area of at least \1/16\ of the total area of the bottom but not 
less than \3/4\ inch in diameter, including the closure, for at least 
one minute, during which time the other side of the bottom exposed to 
pressure must be covered with water and closely examined for indications 
of leakage. Accept as provided in paragraph (h) of this section, a 
cylinder must be rejected if there is any leakage.

[[Page 780]]

    (2) A spun cylinder is one in which an end closure in the finished 
cylinder has been welded by the spinning process.
    (3) A plugged cylinder is one in which a permanent closure in the 
bottom of a finished cylinder has been effected by a plug.
    (4) As a safety precaution, if the manufacturer elects to make this 
test before the hydrostatic test, the manufacturer shall design the test 
apparatus so that the pressure is applied to the smallest area 
practicable, around the point of closure, and so as to use the smallest 
possible volume of air or gas.
    (h) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treatment is authorized for rejected 
cylinders. Subsequent thereto, cylinders must pass all prescribed tests 
to be acceptable. Repair by welding or spinning is not authorized. Spun 
cylinders rejected under the provisions of paragraph (g) of this section 
may be removed from the spun cylinder category by drilling to remove 
defective material, tapping and plugging.
    (i) Marking. Markings required by Sec. 178.35 must be stamped 
plainly and permanently on the shoulder, top head, neck or sidewall of 
each cylinder.

[Amdt. 178-114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as amended by 66 FR 45386, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.44  Specification 3HT seamless steel cylinders for aircraft use.

    (a) Type, size and service pressure. A DOT 3HT cylinder is a 
seamless steel cylinder with a water capacity (nominal) of not over 150 
pounds and a service pressure of at least 900 psig.
    (b) Authorized steel. Open hearth or electric furnace steel of 
uniform quality must be used. A heat of steel made under the 
specifications listed in table 1 in this paragraph (b), check chemical 
analysis of which is slightly out of the specified range, is acceptable, 
if satisfactory in all other respects, provided the tolerances shown in 
table 2 in this paragraph (b) are not exceeded. Grain size 6 or finer 
according to ASTM E 112. Steel of the following chemical analysis is 
authorized:

                      Table 1--Authorized Materials
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                 Designation                      AISI 4130 (percent)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Carbon.......................................  0.28/0.33
Manganese....................................  0.40/0.60
Phosphorus...................................  0.040 maximum
Sulfur.......................................  0.040 maximum
Silicon......................................  0.15/0.35
Chromium.....................................  0.80/1.10
Molybdenum...................................  0.15/0.25
------------------------------------------------------------------------


                                       Table 2--Check Analysis Tolerances
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                        Tolerance (percent) over
                                                                                          the maximum limit or
                                                                                         under the minimum limit
            Element                       Limit or maximum specified (percent)         -------------------------
                                                                                           Under         Over
                                                                                          minimum      maximum
                                                                                           limit        limit
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Carbon.........................  Over 0.15 to 0.40 incl...............................          .03          .04
Manganese......................  To 0.60 incl.........................................          .03          .03
Phosphorus\1\..................  All ranges...........................................  ...........          .01
Sulphur........................  All ranges...........................................  ...........          .01
Silicon........................  To 0.30 incl.........................................          .02          .03
                                 Over 0.30 to 1.00 incl...............................          .05          .05
Chromium.......................  To 0.90 incl.........................................          .03          .03
                                 Over 0.90 to 2.10 incl...............................          .05          .05
Molybdenum.....................  To 0.20 incl.........................................          .01          .01
                                 Over 0.20 to 0.40 incl...............................          .02          .02
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Rephosphorized steels not subject to check analysis for phosphorus.

    (c) Identification of material. Material must be identified by any 
suitable method. Steel stamping of heat identifications may not be made 
in any area

[[Page 781]]

which will eventually become the side wall of the cylinder. Depth of 
stamping may not encroach upon the minimum prescribed wall thickness of 
the cylinder.
    (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be manufactured using equipment and 
processes adequate to ensure that each cylinder produced conforms to the 
requirements of this subpart. No fissure or other defect is permitted 
that is likely to weaken the finished container appreciably. The general 
surface finish may not exceed a roughness of 250 RMS. Individual 
irregularities such as draw marks, scratches, pits, etc., should be held 
to a minimum consistent with good high stress pressure vessel 
manufacturing practices. If the cylinder is not originally free of such 
defects or does not meet the finish requirements, the surface may be 
machined or otherwise treated to eliminate these defects. The point of 
closure of cylinders closed by spinning may not be less than two times 
the prescribed wall thickness of the cylindrical shell. The cylinder end 
contour must be hemispherical or ellipsoidal with a ratio of major-to-
minor axis not exceeding two to one and with the concave side to 
pressure.
    (e) Welding or brazing. Welding or brazing for any purpose 
whatsoever is prohibited, except that welding by spinning is permitted 
to close the bottom of spun cylinders. Machining or grinding to produce 
proper surface finish at point of closure is required.
    (f) Wall thickness. (1) Minimum wall thickness for any cylinder must 
be 0.050 inch. The minimum wall thickness must be such that the wall 
stress at the minimum specified test pressure may not exceed 75 percent 
of the minimum tensile strength of the steel as determined from the 
physical tests required in paragraph (m) of this section and may not be 
over 105,000 psi.
    (2) Calculations must be made by the formula:

S = [P(1.3D\2\ + 0.4d\2\)] / (D\2\ - d\2\)

Where:

S = Wall stress in psi;
P = Minimum test pressure prescribed for water jacket test;
D = Outside diameter in inches;
d = Inside diameter in inches.

    (3) Wall thickness of hemispherical bottoms only permitted to 90 
percent of minimum wall thickness of cylinder sidewall but may not be 
less than 0.050 inch. In all other cases, thickness to be no less than 
prescribed minimum wall.
    (g) Heat treatment. The completed cylinders must be uniformly and 
properly heated prior to tests. Heat treatment of the cylinders of the 
authorized analysis must be as follows:
    (1) All cylinders must be quenched by oil, or other suitable medium.
    (2) The steel temperature on quenching must be that recommended for 
the steel analysis, but may not exceed 1750  deg.F.
    (3) The steel must be tempered at a temperature most suitable for 
the particular steel analysis but not less than 850  deg.F.
    (4) All cylinders must be inspected by the magnetic particle or dye 
penetrant method to detect the presence of quenching cracks. Any 
cylinder found to have a quenching crack must be rejected and may not be 
requalified.
    (h) Openings in cylinders and connections (valves, fuse plugs, etc.) 
for those openings. Threads conforming to the following are required on 
openings:
    (1) Threads must be clean cut, even, without cracks, and to gauge.
    (2) Taper threads, when used, must be of length not less than as 
specified for National Gas Tapered Thread (NGT) as required by American 
Standard Compressed Gas Cylinder Valve Outlet and Inlet Connections.
    (3) Straight threads having at least 6 engaged threads are 
authorized. Straight threads must have a tight fit and a calculated 
shear stress of at least 10 times the test pressure of the cylinder. 
Gaskets, adequate to prevent leakage, are required.
    (i) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder must withstand a hydrostatic 
test, as follows:
    (1) The test must be by water-jacket, or other suitable method, 
operated so as to obtain accurate data. Pressure gauge must permit 
reading to an accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion gauge must permit 
reading of total expansion to an accuracy either of 1 percent of 0.1 
cubic centimeter.
    (2) Pressure must be maintained for at least 30 seconds and 
sufficiently

[[Page 782]]

longer to ensure complete expansion. Any internal pressure applied after 
heat treatment and previous to the official test may not exceed 90 
percent of the test pressure. If, due to failure of the test apparatus, 
the test pressure cannot be maintained, the test may be repeated at a 
pressure increased by 10 percent or 100 psig, which ever is the lower.
    (3) Permanent volumetric expansion may not exceed 10 percent of 
total volumetric expansion at test pressure.
    (4) Each cylinder must be tested to at least \5/3\ times service 
pressure.
    (j) Cycling tests. Prior to the initial shipment of any specific 
cylinder design, cyclic pressurization tests must have been performed on 
at least three representative samples without failure as follows:
    (1) Pressurization must be performed hydrostatically between 
approximately zero psig and the service pressure at a rate not in excess 
of 10 cycles per minute. Adequate recording instrumentation must be 
provided if equipment is to be left unattended for periods of time.
    (2) Tests prescribed in paragraph (j)(1) of this section must be 
repeated on one random sample out of each lot of cylinders. The cylinder 
may then be subjected to a burst test.
    (3) A lot is defined as a group of cylinders fabricated from the 
same heat of steel, manufactured by the same process and heat treated in 
the same equipment under the same conditions of time, temperature, and 
atmosphere, and may not exceed a quantity of 200 cylinders.
    (4) All cylinders used in cycling tests must be destroyed.
    (k) Burst test. One cylinder taken at random out of each lot of 
cylinders must be hydrostatically tested to destruction.
    (l) Flattening test. A flattening test must be performed on one 
cylinder taken at random out of each lot of 200 or less, by placing the 
cylinder between wedge shaped knife edges having a 60 deg. included 
angle, rounded to \1/2\-inch radius. The longitudinal axis of the 
cylinder must be at a 90-degree angle to knife edges during the test. 
For lots of 30 or less, flattening tests are authorized to be made on a 
ring at least 8 inches long cut from each cylinder and subjected to same 
heat treatment as the finished cylinder.
    (m) Physical tests. A physical test must be conducted to determine 
yield strength, tensile strength, elongation, and reduction of area of 
material, as follows:
    (1) Test is required on 2 specimens cut from 1 cylinder taken at 
random out of each lot of cylinders.
    (2) Specimens must conform to the following:
    (i) A gauge length of at least 24 times the thickness with a width 
not over six times the thickness. The specimen, exclusive of grip ends, 
may not be flattened. Grip ends may be flattened to within one inch of 
each end of the reduced section. When size of cylinder does not permit 
securing straight specimens, the specimens may be taken in any location 
or direction and may be straightened or flattened cold by pressure only, 
not by blows. When specimens are so taken and prepared, the inspector's 
report must show in connection with the record of physical tests 
detailed information in regard to such specimens.
    (ii) Heating of a specimen for any purpose is not authorized.
    (3) The yield strength in tension must be the stress corresponding 
to a permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the gauge length.
    (i) The yield strength must be determined by either the ``offset'' 
method or the ``extension under load'' method as prescribed in ASTM E 8 
(incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).
    (ii) In using the ``extension under load'' method, the total strain 
(or ``extension under load'') corresponding to the stress at which the 
0.2 percent permanent strain occurs may be determined with sufficient 
accuracy by calculating the elastic extension of the gauge length under 
appropriate load and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the gauge length. 
Elastic extension calculations must be based on an elastic modulus of 
30,000,000. In the event of controversy, the entire stress-strain 
diagram must be plotted and the yield strength determined from the 0.2 
percent offset.

[[Page 783]]

    (iii) For the purpose of strain measurement, the initial strain must 
be set while the specimen is under a stress of 12,000 psi, the strain 
indicator reading being set at the calculated corresponding strain.
    (iv) Cross-head speed of the testing machine may not exceed \1/8\ 
inch per minute during yield strength determination.
    (n) Magnetic particle inspection. Inspection must be performed on 
the inside of each container before closing and externally on each 
finished container after heat treatment. Evidence of discontinuities, 
which in the opinion of a qualified inspector may appreciably weaken or 
decrease the durability of the cylinder, must be cause for rejection.
    (o) Leakage test. All spun cylinders and plugged cylinders must be 
tested for leakage by dry gas or dry air pressure after the bottom has 
been cleaned and is free from all moisture, subject to the following 
conditions and limitations:
    (1) Pressure, approximately the same as but not less than service 
pressure, must be applied to one side of the finished bottom over an 
area of at least \1/16\ of the total area of the bottom but not less 
than \3/4\ inch in diameter, including the closure, for at least one 
minute, during which time the other side of the bottom exposed to 
pressure must be covered with water and closely examined for indications 
of leakage. Except as provided in paragraph (q) of this section, a 
cylinder must be rejected if there is leakage.
    (2) A spun cylinder is one in which an end closure in the finished 
cylinder has been welded by the spinning process.
    (3) A plugged cylinder is one in which a permanent closure in the 
bottom of a finished cylinder has been effected by a plug.
    (4) As a safety precaution, if the manufacturer elects to make this 
test before the hydrostatic test, the manufacturer should design the 
test apparatus so that the pressure is applied to the smallest area 
practicable, around the point of closure, and so as to use the smallest 
possible volume of air or gas.
    (p) Acceptable results of tests. Results of the flattening test, 
physical tests, burst test, and cycling test must conform to the 
following:
    (1) Flattening required without cracking to ten times the wall 
thickness of the cylinder.
    (2) Physical tests:
    (i) An elongation of at least 6 percent for a gauge length of 24 
times the wall thickness.
    (ii) The tensile strength may not exceed 165,000 p.s.i.
    (3) The burst pressure must be at least \4/3\ times the test 
pressure.
    (4) Cycling-at least 10,000 pressurizations.
    (q) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treatment is authorized for rejected 
cylinders. Subsequent thereto, cylinders must pass all prescribed tests 
to be acceptable. Repair by welding or spinning is not authorized. For 
each cylinder subjected to reheat treatment during original manufacture, 
sidewall measurements must be made to verify that the minimum sidewall 
thickness meets specification requirements after the final heat 
treatment.
    (r) Marking. (1) Cylinders must be marked by low stress type steel 
stamping in an area and to a depth which will insure that the wall 
thickness measured from the root of the stamping to the interior surface 
is equal to or greater than the minimum prescribed wall thickness. 
Stamping must be permanent and legible. Stamping on side wall not 
authorized.
    (2) The rejection elastic expansion (REE), in cubic cm (cc), must be 
marked on the cylinder near the date of test. The REE for a cylinder is 
1.05 times its original elastic expansion.
    (3) Name plates are authorized, provided that they can be 
permanently and securely attached to the cylinder. Attachment by either 
brazing or welding is not permitted. Attachment by soldering is 
permitted provided steel temperature does not exceed 500  deg.F.
    (s) Inspector's report. In addition to the requirements of 
Sec. 178.35, the inspector's report must indicate the rejection elastic 
expansion (REE), in cubic cm (cc).

[Amdt. 178-114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as amended at 62 FR 51561, 
Oct. 1, 1997; 65 FR 58631, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45385, Aug. 28, 2001; 
67 FR 51652, Aug. 8, 2002]

[[Page 784]]



Sec. 178.45  Specification 3T seamless steel cylinder.

    (a) Type, size, and service pressure. A DOT 3T cylinder is a 
seamless steel cylinder with a minimum water capacity of 1,000 pounds 
and a minimum service pressure of 1,800 psig. Each cylinder must have 
integrally formed heads concave to pressure at both ends. The inside 
head shape must be hemispherical, ellipsoidal in which the major axis is 
two times the minor axis, or a dished shape falling within these two 
limits. Permanent closures formed by spinning are prohibited.
    (b) Material, steel. Only open hearth, basic oxygen, or electric 
furnace process steel of uniform quality is authorized. The steel 
analysis must conform to the following:

                           Analysis Tolerances
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                         Check Analysis
             Element                  Ladle analysis   -----------------
                                                         Under     Over
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Carbon...........................  0.35 to 0.50.......     0.03     0.04
Manganese........................  0.75 to 1.05.......     0.04     0.04
Phosphorus (max).................  0.035..............  .......     0.01
Sulphur (max)....................  0.04...............  .......     0.01
Silicon..........................  0.15 to 0.35.......     0.02     0.03
Chromium.........................  0.80 to 1.15.......     0.05     0.05
Molybdenum.......................  0.15 to 0.25.......     0.02     0.02
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (1) A heat of steel made under the specifications in the table in 
this paragraph (b), the ladle analysis of which is slightly out of the 
specified range, is acceptable if satisfactory in all other aspects. 
However, the check analysis tolerances shown in the table in this 
paragraph (b) may not be exceeded except as approved by the Department.
    (2) Material with seams, cracks, laminations, or other injurious 
defects is not permitted.
    (3) Material used must be identified by any suitable method.
    (c) Manufacture. General manufacturing requirements are as follows:
    (1) Surface finish must be uniform and reasonably smooth.
    (2) Inside surfaces must be clean, dry, and free of loose particles.
    (3) No defect of any kind is permitted if it is likely to weaken a 
finished cylinder.
    (4) If the cylinder surface is not originally free from the defects, 
the surface may be machined or otherwise treated to eliminate these 
defects provided the minimum wall thickness is maintained.
    (5) Welding or brazing on a cylinder is not permitted.
    (d) Wall thickness. The minimum wall thickness must be such that the 
wall stress at the minimum specified test pressure does not exceed 67 
percent of the minimum tensile strength of the steel as determined by 
the physical tests required in paragraphs (j) and (k) of this section. A 
wall stress of more than 90,500 p.s.i. is not permitted. The minimum 
wall thickness for any cylinder may not be less than 0.225 inch.
    (1) Calculation of the stress for cylinders must be made by the 
following formula:

S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 - 
    d2)

Where:

S = Wall stress in psi;
P = Minimum test pressure, at least \5/3\ service pressure;
D = Outside diameter in inches;
d = Inside diameter in inches.

    (2) Each cylinder must meet the following additional requirement 
which assumes a cylinder horizontally supported at its two ends and 
uniformly loaded over its entire length. This load consists of the 
weight per inch of length of the straight cylindrical portion filled 
with water compressed to the specified test pressure. The wall thickness 
must be increased when necessary to meet this additional requirement:
    (i) The sum of two times the maximum tensile stress in the bottom 
fibers due to bending (see paragraph (d)(2)(ii) of this section), plus 
the maximum tensile stress in the same fibers due to hydrostatic testing 
(see paragraph (d)(2)(iii) of this section) may not exceed 80 percent of 
the minimum yield strength of the steel at this maximum stress.
    (ii) The following formula must be used to calculate the maximum 
tensile stress due to bending:

S = Mc / I

Where:

S = Tensile stress in psi;
M = Bending moment in inch-pounds (wl2/8);
I = Moment of inertia--0.04909 (D4-d4) in inches 
fourth;
c = Radius (D/2) of cylinder in inches;

[[Page 785]]

w = Weight per inch of cylinder filled with water;
l = Length of cylinder in inches;
D = Outside diameter in inches;
d = Inside diameter in inches.

    (iii) The following formula must be used to calculate the maximum 
longitudinal tensile stress due to hydrostatic test pressure:

S = A1 P / A2

Where:

S = Tensile stress in psi;
A1 = Internal area in cross section of cylinder in square 
inches;
P = Hydrostatic test pressure-psig;
A2 = Area of metal in cross section of cylinder in square 
inches.

    (e) Heat treatment. Each completed cylinder must be uniformly and 
properly heat treated prior to testing, as follows:
    (1) Each cylinder must be heated and held at the proper temperature 
for at least one hour per inch of thickness based on the maximum 
thickness of the cylinder and then quenched in a suitable liquid medium 
having a cooling rate not in excess of 80 percent of water. The steel 
temperature on quenching must be that recommended for the steel 
analysis, but it must never exceed 1750  deg.F.
    (2) After quenching, each cylinder must be reheated to a temperature 
below the transformation range but not less than 1050  deg.F., and must 
be held at this temperature for at least one hour per inch of thickness 
based on the maximum thickness of the cylinder. Each cylinder must then 
be cooled under conditions recommended for the steel.
    (f) Openings. Openings in cylinders must comply with the following:
    (1) Openings are permitted on heads only.
    (2) The size of any centered opening in a head may not exceed one 
half the outside diameter of the cylinder.
    (3) Openings in a head must have ligaments between openings of at 
least three times the average of their hole diameter. No off-center 
opening may exceed 2.625 inches in diameter.
    (4) All openings must be circular.
    (5) All openings must be threaded. Threads must be in compliance 
with the following:
    (i) Each thread must be clean cut, even, without any checks, and to 
gauge.
    (ii) Taper threads, when used, must be the American Standard Pipe 
thread (NPT) type and must be in compliance with the requirements of NBS 
Handbook H-28, Part II, Section VII.
    (iii) Taper threads conforming to National Gas Taper thread (NGT) 
standards must be in compliance with the requirements of NBS Handbook H-
28, Part II, Sections VII and IX.
    (iv) Straight threads conforming with National Gas Straight thread 
(NGS) standards are authorized. These threads must be in compliance with 
the requirements of NBS Handbook H-28, Part II, Sections VII and IX.
    (g) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder must be tested at an internal 
pressure by the water jacket method or other suitable method, conforming 
to the following requirements:
    (1) The testing apparatus must be operated in a manner that will 
obtain accurate data. Any pressure gauge used must permit reading to an 
accuracy of one percent. Any expansion gauge used must permit reading of 
the total expansion to an accuracy of one percent.
    (2) Any internal pressure applied to the cylinder after heat 
treatment and before the official test may not exceed 90 percent of the 
test pressure.
    (3) The pressure must be maintained sufficiently long to assure 
complete expansion of the cylinder. In no case may the pressure be held 
less than 30 seconds.
    (4) If, due to failure of the test apparatus, the required test 
pressure cannot be maintained, the test must be repeated at a pressure 
increased by 10 percent or 100 psig, whichever is lower or, the cylinder 
must be reheat treated.
    (5) Permanent volumetric expansion of the cylinder may not exceed 10 
percent of its total volumetric expansion at the required test pressure.
    (6) Each cylinder must be tested to at least \5/3\ times its service 
pressure.
    (h) Ultrasonic examination. After the hydrostatic test, the 
cylindrical section of each vessel must be examined in accordance with 
ASTM Standard E 213 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this 
subchapter). The equipment used must be calibrated to detect a notch

[[Page 786]]

equal to five percent of the design minimum wall thickness. Any 
discontinuity indication greater than that produced by the five percent 
notch must be cause for rejection of the cylinder, unless the 
discontinuity is repaired within the requirements of this specification.
    (i) Basic requirements for tension and Charpy impact tests. 
Cylinders must be subjected to a tension and Charpy impact as follows:
    (1) When the cylinders are heat treated in a batch furnace, two 
tension specimens and three Charpy impact specimens must be tested from 
one of the cylinders or a test ring from each batch. The lot size 
represented by these tests may not exceed 200 cylinders.
    (2) When the cylinders are heat treated in a continuous furnace, two 
tension specimens and three Charpy impact specimens must be tested from 
one of the cylinders or a test ring from each four hours or less of 
production. However, in no case may a test lot based on this production 
period exceed 200 cylinders.
    (3) Each specimen for the tension and Charpy impact tests must be 
taken from the side wall of a cylinder or from a ring which has been 
heat treated with the finished cylinders of which the specimens must be 
representative. The axis of the specimens must be parallel to the axis 
of the cylinder. Each cylinder or ring specimen for test must be of the 
same diameter, thickness, and metal as the finished cylinders they 
represent. A test ring must be at least 24 inches long with ends covered 
during the heat treatment process so as to simulate the heat treatment 
process of the finished cylinders it represents.
    (4) A test cylinder or test ring need represent only one of the 
heats in a furnace batch provided the other heats in the batch have 
previously been tested and have passed the tests and that such tests do 
not represent more than 200 cylinders from any one heat.
    (5) The test results must conform to the requirements specified in 
paragraphs (j) and (k) of this section.
    (6) When the test results do not conform to the requirements 
specified, the cylinders represented by the tests may be reheat treated 
and the tests repeated. Paragraph (i)(5) of this section applies to any 
retesting.
    (j) Basic conditions for acceptable physical testing. The following 
criteria must be followed to obtain acceptable physical test results:
    (1) Each tension specimen must have a gauge length of two inches 
with a width not exceeding one and one-half inches. Except for the grip 
ends, the specimen may not be flattened. The grip ends may be flattened 
to within one inch of each end of the reduced section.
    (2) A specimen may not be heated after heat treatment specified in 
paragraph (d) of this section.
    (3) The yield strength in tension must be the stress corresponding 
to a permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the gage length.
    (i) This yield strength must be determined by the ``offset'' method 
or the ``extension under load'' method described in ASTM E 8 
(incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).
    (ii) For the ``extension under load'' method, the total strain (or 
extension under load) corresponding to the stress at which the 0.2 
percent permanent strain occurs may be determined with sufficient 
accuracy by calculating the elastic extension of the gage length under 
appropriate load and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the gage length. 
Elastic extension calculations must be based on an elastic modulus of 
30,000,000. However, when the degree of accuracy of this method is 
questionable the entire stress-strain diagram must be plotted and the 
yield strength determined from the 0.2 percent offset.
    (iii) For the purpose of strain measurement, the initial strain must 
be set with the specimen under a stress of 12,000 p.s.i. and the strain 
indicator reading set at the calculated corresponding strain.
    (iv) The cross-head speed of the testing machine may not exceed \1/
8\ inch per minute during the determination of yield strength.
    (4) Each impact specimen must be Charpy V-notch type size 10 mm x 10 
mm taken in accordance with paragraph 11 of ASTM Standard A-333-67. When 
a reduced size specimen is used, it must be the largest size obtainable.

[[Page 787]]

    (k) Acceptable physical test results. Results of physical tests must 
conform to the following:
    (1) The tensile strength may not exceed 155,000 p.s.i.
    (2) The elongation must be at least 16 percent for a two-inch gage 
length.
    (3) The Charpy V-notch impact properties for the three impact 
specimens which must be tested at 0  deg.F may not be less than the 
values shown as follows:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                Average value for     Minimum value (1
    Size of specimen (mm)         acceptance (3     specimen only of the
                                   specimens)                3)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.0x10.0...................  25.0 ft. lbs........  20.0 ft. lbs.
10.0x7.5....................  21.0 ft. lbs........  17.0 ft. lbs.
10.0x5.0....................  17.0 ft. lbs........  14.0 ft. lbs.
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (4) After the final heat treatment, each vessel must be hardness 
tested on the cylindrical section. The tensile strength equivalent of 
the hardness number obtained may not be more than 165,000 p.s.i. (Rc 
36). When the result of a hardness test exceeds the maximum permitted, 
two or more retests may be made; however, the hardness number obtained 
in each retest may not exceed the maximum permitted.
    (l) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treatment is authorized for rejected 
cylinders. However, each reheat treated cylinder must subsequently pass 
all the prescribed tests. Repair by welding is not authorized.
    (m) Markings. Marking must be done by stamping into the metal of the 
cylinder. All markings must be legible and located on a shoulder.
    (n) Inspector's report. In addition to the requirements of 
Sec. 178.35, the inspector's report for the physical test report, must 
indicate the average value for three specimens and the minimum value for 
one specimen for each lot number.

[Amdt. 178-114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as amended at 66 FR 45385, 
43588, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51652, Aug. 8, 2002]



Sec. 178.46  Specification 3AL seamless aluminum cylinders.

    (a) Size and service pressure. A DOT 3AL cylinder is a seamless 
aluminum cylinder with a maximum water capacity of 1000 pounds and 
minimum service pressure of 150 psig.
    (b) Authorized material and identification of material. The material 
of construction must meet the following conditions:
    (1) Starting stock must be cast stock or traceable to cast stock.
    (2) Material with seams, cracks, laminations, or other defects 
likely to weaken the finished cylinder may not be used.
    (3) Material must be identified by a suitable method that will 
identify the alloy, the aluminum producer's cast number, the solution 
heat treat batch number and the lot number.
    (4) The material must be of uniform quality. Only the following heat 
treatable aluminum alloys in table 1 and 2 are permitted as follows:

[[Page 788]]



                             Table 1.--Heat or Cast Analysis for Aluminum; Similar to ``Aluminum Association''\1\ Alloy 6061
                                                        [CHEMICAL ANALYSIS IN WEIGHT PERCENT\2\]
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                                                        Other
 Si  min/              Cu  min/              Mg  min/                                                          ----------------------
   max      Fe  max      max      Mn  max      max     Cr  min/max   Zn  max    Ti  max    Pb  max    Bi  max                total            A1
                                                                                                                each  max     max
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 0.4/0.8        0.7   0.15/0.4       0.15    0.8/1.2    0.04/0.35       0.25       0.15      0.005      0.005       0.05       0.15   Bal.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ The ``Aluminum Association'' refers to ``Aluminum Standards and Data 1993'', published by the Aluminum Association Inc.
\2\ Except for ``Pb'' and ``Bi'', the chemical composition corresponds with that of Table 1 of ASTM B221 for Aluminum Association alloy 6061.


[[Page 789]]


                                       Table 2--Mechanical Property Limits
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                              Tensile strength--PSI          Elongation--percent
                                                    ----------------------------------------  minimum for 2'' or
                  Alloy and temper                                                               4D \1\ size
                                                      Ultimate--minimum    Yield--minimum          specimen
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6061-T6............................................              38,000              35,000                \2\14
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ ``D'' represents specimen diameters. When the cylinder wall is greater than \3/16\ inch thick, a retest
  without reheat treatment using the 4D size specimen is authorized if the test using the 2 inch size specimen
  fails to meet elongation requirements.
\2\ When cylinder wall is not over \3/16\-inch thick, 10 percent elongation is authorized when using a 24tx6t
  size test specimen.

    (5) All starting stock must be 100 percent ultrasonically inspected, 
along the length at right angles to the central axis from two positions 
at 90 deg. to one another. The equipment and continuous scanning 
procedure must be capable of detecting and rejecting internal defects 
such as cracks which have an ultrasonic response greater than that of a 
calibration block with a \5/64\-inch diameter flat bottomed hole.
    (6) Cast stock must have uniform equiaxed grain structure not to 
exceed 500 microns maximum.
    (7) Any starting stock not complying with the provisions of 
paragraphs (b)(1) through (b)(6) of this section must be rejected.
    (c) Manufacture. Cylinders must be manufactured in accordance with 
the following requirements:
    (1) Cylinder shells must be manufactured by the backward extrusion 
method and have a cleanliness level adequate to ensure proper 
inspection. No fissure or other defect is acceptable that is likely to 
weaken the finished cylinder below the design strength requirements. A 
reasonably smooth and uniform surface finish is required. If not 
originally free from such defects, the surface may be machined or 
otherwise conditioned to eliminate these defects.
    (2) Thickness of the cylinder base may not be less than the 
prescribed minimum wall thickness of the cylindrical shell. The cylinder 
base must have a basic torispherical, hemispherical, or ellipsoidal 
interior base configuration where the dish radius is no greater than 1.2 
times the inside diameter of the shell. The knuckle radius may not be 
less than 12 percent of the inside diameter of the shell. The interior 
base contour may deviate from the true torispherical, hemispherical or 
ellipsoidal configuration provided that--
    (i) Any areas of deviation are accompanied by an increase in base 
thickness;
    (ii) All radii of merging surfaces are equal to or greater than the 
knuckle radius;
    (iii) Each design has been qualified by successfully passing the 
cycling tests in this paragraph (c); and
    (iv) Detailed specifications of the base design are available to the 
inspector.
    (3) For free standing cylinders, the base thickness must be at least 
two times the minimum wall thickness along the line of contact between 
the cylinder base and the floor when the cylinders are in the vertical 
position.
    (4) Welding or brazing is prohibited.
    (5) Each new design and any significant change to any acceptable 
design must be qualified for production by testing prototype samples as 
follows:
    (i) Three samples must be subjected to 100,000 pressure reversal 
cycles between zero and service pressure or 10,000 pressure reversal 
cycles between zero and test pressure, at a rate not in excess of 10 
cycles per minute without failure.
    (ii) Three samples must be pressurized to destruction and failure 
may not occur at less than 2.5 times the marked cylinder service 
pressure. Each cylinder must remain in one piece. Failure must initiate 
in the cylinder sidewall in a longitudinal direction. Rate of 
pressurization may not exceed 200 psig per second.
    (6) In this specification ``significant change'' means a 10 percent 
or greater change in cylinder wall thickness, service pressure, or 
diameter; a 30 percent or greater change in water capacity or base 
thickness; any change in material; over 100 percent increase in size of 
openings; or any change in the number of openings.

[[Page 790]]

    (d) Wall thickness. The minimum wall thickness must be such that the 
wall stress at the minimum specified test pressure will not exceed 80 
percent of the minimum yield strength nor exceed 67 percent of the 
minimum ultimate tensile strength as verified by physical tests in 
paragraph (i) of this section. The minimum wall thickness for any 
cylinder with an outside diameter greater than 5 inches must be 0.125 
inch. Calculations must be made by the following formula:

S = [P(1.3D\2\ + 0.4d\2\)] / (D\2\ - d\2\)

Where:

S = Wall stress in psi;
P = Prescribed minimum test pressure in psig (see paragraph (g) of this 
section);
D = Outside diameter in inches; and
d = Inside diameter in inches.

    (e) Openings. Openings must comply with the following requirements:
    (1) Openings are permitted in heads only.
    (2) The size of any centered opening in a head may not exceed one-
half the outside diameter of the cylinder.
    (3) Other openings are permitted in the head of a cylinder if:
    (i) Each opening does not exceed 2.625 inches in diameter, or one-
half the outside diameter of the cylinder; whichever is less;
    (ii) Each opening is separated from each other by a ligament; and
    (iii) Each ligament which separates two openings must be at least 
three times the average of the diameters of the two openings.
    (4) All openings must be circular.
    (5) All openings must be threaded. Threads must comply with the 
following:
    (i) Each thread must be clean cut, even, without checks, and to 
gauge.
    (ii) Taper threads, when used, must conform to one of the following:
    (A) American Standard Pipe Thread (NPT) type, conforming to the 
requirements of Federal Standard H-28, Section 7;
    (B) National Gas Taper Thread (NGT) type, conforming to the 
requirements of Federal Standard H-28, Sections 7 and 9; or
    (C) Other taper threads conforming to other standards may be used 
provided the length is not less than that specified for NPT threads.
    (iii) Straight threads, when used, must conform to one of the 
following:
    (A) National Gas Straight Thread (NGS) type, conforming to the 
requirements of Federal Standard H-28, Sections 7 and 9;
    (B) Unified Thread (UN) type, conforming to the requirements of 
Federal Standard H-28, Section 2;
    (C) Controlled Radius Root Thread (UN) type, conforming to the 
requirements of Federal Standard H-28, Section 4; or
    (D) Other straight threads conforming to other recognized standards 
may be used provided that the requirements in paragraph (e)(5)(iv) of 
this section are met.
    (iv) All straight threads must have at least 6 engaged threads, a 
tight fit, and a factor of safety in shear of at least 10 at the test 
pressure of the cylinder. Shear stress must be calculated by using the 
appropriate thread shear area in accordance with Federal Standard H-28, 
Appendix A5, Section 3.
    (f) Heat treatment. Prior to any test, all cylinders must be 
subjected to a solution heat treatment and aging treatment appropriate 
for the aluminum alloy used.
    (g) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder must be subjected to an internal 
test pressure using the water jacket equipment and method or other 
suitable equipment and method and comply with the following 
requirements:
    (1) The testing apparatus must be operated in a manner so as to 
obtain accurate data. The pressure gauge used must permit reading to an 
accuracy of one percent. The expansion gauge must permit reading the 
total expansion to an accuracy of either one percent or 0.1 cubic 
centimeter.
    (2) The test pressure must be maintained for a sufficient period of 
time to assure complete expansion of the cylinder. In no case may the 
pressure be held less than 30 seconds. If, due to failure of the test 
apparatus, the required test pressure cannot be maintained, the test may 
be repeated at a pressure increased by 10 percent or 100 psig, whichever 
is lower. If the test apparatus again fails to maintain the test 
pressure, the cylinder being tested

[[Page 791]]

must be rejected. Any internal pressure applied to the cylinder before 
any official test may not exceed 90 percent of the test pressure.
    (3) The minimum test pressure is the greatest of the following:
    (i) 450 psig regardless of service pressure;
    (ii) Two times the service pressure for cylinders having service 
pressure less than 500 psig; or
    (iii) Five-thirds times the service pressure for cylinders having a 
service pressure of at least 500 psig.
    (4) Permanent volumetric expansion may not exceed 10 percent of 
total volumetric expansion at test pressure.
    (h) Flattening test. One cylinder taken at random out of each lot 
must be subjected to a flattening test as follows:
    (1) The test must be between knife edges, wedge shaped, having a 
60 deg. included angle, and rounded in accordance with the following 
table. The longitudinal axis of the cylinder must be at an angle 90 deg. 
to the knife edges during the test. The flattening test table is as 
follows:

                     Table 3--Flattening Test Table
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                 Radius
               Cylinder wall thickness in inches                   in
                                                                 inches
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Under .150....................................................      .500
.150 to .249..................................................      .875
.250 to .349..................................................     1.500
.350 to .449..................................................     2.125
.450 to .549..................................................     2.750
.550 to .649..................................................     3.500
.650 to .749..................................................     4.125
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (2) An alternate bend test in accordance with ASTM E 290 using a 
mandrel diameter not more than 6 times the wall thickness is authorized 
to qualify lots that fail the flattening test of this section without 
reheat treatment. If used, this test must be performed on two samples 
from one cylinder taken at random out of each lot of 200 cylinders or 
less.
    (3) Each test cylinder must withstand flattening to nine times the 
wall thickness without cracking. When the alternate bend test is used, 
the test specimens must remain uncracked when bent inward around a 
mandrel in the direction of curvature of the cylinder wall until the 
interior edges are at a distance apart not greater than the diameter of 
the mandrel.
    (i) Mechanical properties test. Two test specimens cut from one 
cylinder representing each lot of 200 cylinders or less must be 
subjected to the mechanical properties test, as follows:
    (1) The results of the test must conform to at least the minimum 
acceptable mechanical property limits for aluminum alloys as specified 
in paragraph (b) of this section.
    (2) Specimens must be 4D bar or gauge length 2 inches with width not 
over 1\1/2\ inch taken in the direction of extrusion approximately 
180 deg. from each other; provided that gauge length at least 24 times 
thickness with width not over 6 times thickness is authorized, when 
cylinder wall is not over \3/16\ inch thick. The specimen, exclusive of 
grip ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends may be flattened to within 
one inch of each end of the reduced section. When the size of the 
cylinder does not permit securing straight specimens, the specimens may 
be taken in any location or direction and may be straightened or 
flattened cold by pressure only, not by blows. When such specimens are 
used, the inspector's report must show that the specimens were so taken 
and prepared. Heating of specimens for any purpose is forbidden.
    (3) The yield strength in tension must be the stress corresponding 
to a permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the gauge length.
    (i) The yield strength must be determined by either the ``offset'' 
method or the ``extension under load'' method as prescribed in ASTM 
Standard B-557.
    (ii) In using the ``extension under load'' method, the total strain 
(or ``extension under load'') corresponding to the stress at which the 
0.2 percent permanent strain occurs may be determined with sufficient 
accuracy by calculating the elastic extension of the gauge length under 
appropriate load and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the gauge length. 
Elastic extension calculations must be based on an elastic modulus of 
10,000,000 psi. In the event of controversy, the entire stress-strain 
diagram must be plotted and the yield strength determined from the 0.2 
percent offset.
    (iii) For the purpose of strain measurement, the initial strain must 
be set while the specimen is under a stress of

[[Page 792]]

6,000 psi, the strain indicator reading being set at the calculated 
corresponding strain.
    (iv) Cross-head speed of the testing machine may not exceed \1/8\ 
inch per minute during yield strength determination.
    (j) Rejected cylinder. Reheat treatment of rejected cylinders is 
authorized one time. Subsequent thereto, cylinders must pass all 
prescribed tests to be acceptable.
    (k) Duties of inspector. In addition to the requirements of 
Sec. 178.35, the inspector shall:
    (1) Verify compliance with the provisions of paragraph (b) of this 
section by:
    (i) Performing or witnessing the performance of the chemical 
analyses on each melt or cast lot or other unit of starting material; or
    (ii) Obtaining a certified chemical analysis from the material or 
cylinder manufacturer for each melt, or cast of material; or
    (iii) Obtaining a certified check analysis on one cylinder out of 
each lot of 200 cylinders or less, if a certificate containing data to 
indicate compliance with the material specification is obtained.
    (2) The inspector shall verify ultrasonic inspection of all material 
by inspection or by obtaining the material producer's certificate of 
ultrasonic inspection. Ultrasonic inspection must be performed or 
verified as having been performed in accordance with paragraph (c) of 
this section.
    (3) The inspector must also determine that each cylinder complies 
with this specification by:
    (i) Selecting the samples for check analyses performed by other than 
the material producer;
    (ii) Verifying that the prescribed minimum thickness was met by 
measuring or witnessing the measurement of the wall thickness; and
    (iii) Verifying that the identification of material is proper.
    (4) Prior to initial production of any design or design change, 
verify that the design qualification tests prescribed in paragraph 
(c)(6) of this section have been performed with acceptable results.
    (l) Definitions. (1) In this specification, a ``lot'' means a group 
of cylinders successively produced having the same:
    (i) Size and configuration;
    (ii) Specified material of construction;
    (iii) Process of manufacture and heat treatment;
    (iv) Equipment of manufacture and heat treatment; and
    (v) Conditions of time, temperature and atmosphere during heat 
treatment.
    (2) In no case may the lot size exceed 200 cylinders, but any 
cylinder processed for use in the required destructive physical testing 
need not be counted as being one of the 200.
    (m) Inspector's report. In addition to the information required by 
Sec. 178.35, the record of chemical analyses must also include the alloy 
designation, and applicable information on iron, titanium, zinc, 
magnesium and any other applicable element used in the construction of 
the cylinder.

[Amdt. 178-114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as amended at 66 FR 45386-
45388, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51652, Aug. 8, 2002]



Sec. 178.47  Specification 4DS welded stainless steel cylinders for aircraft use.

    (a) Type, size, and service pressure. A DOT 4DS cylinder is either a 
welded stainless steel sphere (two seamless hemispheres) or 
circumferentially welded cylinder both with a water capacity of not over 
100 pounds and a service pressure of at least 500 but not over 900 psig.
    (b) Steel. Types 304, 321 and 347 stainless steel are authorized 
with proper welding procedure. A heat of steel made under the 
specifications in table 1 in this paragraph (b), check chemical analysis 
of which is slightly out of the specified range, is acceptable, if 
satisfactory in all other respects, provided the tolerances shown in 
table 2 in this paragraph (b) are not exceeded, except as approved by 
Associate Administrator. The following chemical analyses are authorized:

[[Page 793]]



                                          Table 1--Authorized Materials
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                   Stainless steels
                                    ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                            304 (percent)               321 (percent)           347 (percent)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Carbon (max).......................  0.08                        0.08                        0.08
Manganese (max)....................  2.00                        2.00                        2.00
Phosphorus (max)...................  .030                        .030                        .030
Sulphur (max)......................  .030                        .030                        .030
Silicon (max)......................  .75                         .75                         .75
Nickel.............................  8.0/11.0                    9.0/13.0                    9.0/13.0
Chromium...........................  18.0/20.0                   17.0/20.0                   17.0/20.0
Molybdenum
Titanium...........................  ..........................  (\1\)
Columbium..........................  ..........................  ..........................  (\2\)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Titanium may not be more than 5C and not more than 0.60%.
\2\ Columbium may not be less than 10C and not more than 1.0%.


                                       Table 2--Check Analysis Tolerances
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                        Tolerance (percent) over
                                                                                          the maximum limit or
                                                                                         under the minimum limit
            Element                       Limit or maximum specified (percent)         -------------------------
                                                                                           Under         Over
                                                                                          minimum      maximum
                                                                                           limit        limit
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Carbon.........................  To 0.15 incl.........................................         0.01         0.01
Manganese......................  Over 1.15 to 2.50 incl...............................         0.05         0.05
Phosphorus\1\..................  All ranges...........................................  ...........          .01
Sulphur........................  All ranges...........................................  ...........          .01
Silicon........................  Over 0.30 to 1.00 incl...............................          .05          .05
Nickel.........................  Over 5.30 to 10.00 incl..............................          .10          .10
                                 Over 10.00 to 14.00 incl.............................          .15          .15
Chromium.......................  Over 15.00 to 20.00 incl.............................          .20          .20
Titanium.......................  All ranges...........................................          .05          .05
Columbium......................  All ranges...........................................          .05          .05
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\Rephosphorized steels not subject to check analysis for phosphorus.

    (c) Identification of material. Materials must be identified by any 
suitable method.
    (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be manufactured using equipment and 
processes adequate to ensure that each cylinder produced conforms to the 
requirements of this subpart. No defect is permitted that is likely to 
weaken the finished cylinder appreciably, a reasonably smooth and 
uniform surface finish is required. No abrupt change in wall thickness 
is permitted. Welding procedures and operators must be qualified in 
accordance with CGA Pamphlet C-3 (incorporated by reference; see 
Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter). All seams of the sphere or cylinder must 
be fusion welded. Seams must be of the butt type and means must be 
provided for accomplishing complete penetration of the joint.
    (e) Attachments. Attachments to the container are authorized by 
fusion welding provided that such attachments are made of weldable 
stainless steel in accordance with paragraph (b) of this section.
    (f) Wall thickness. The minimum wall thickness must be such that the 
wall stress at the minimum specified test pressure may not be over 
60,000 psig. A minimum wall thickness of 0.040 inch is required for any 
diameter container. Calculations must be made by the following formulas:
    (1) Calculation for sphere must be made by the formula:


S = PD / 4tE

Where:

S = Wall stress in psi;
P = Test pressure prescribed for water jacket test, i.e., at least two 
times service pressure, in psig;
D = Outside diameter in inches;
t = Minimum wall thickness in inches;
E = 0.85 (provides 85 percent weld efficiency factor which must be 
applied in the girth weld area and heat zones which zone must extend a 
distance of 6 times wall thickness from center of weld);
E = 1.0 (for all other areas).


[[Page 794]]


    (2) Calculation for a cylinder must be made by the formula:

S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 - 
    d2)

Where:

S = Wall stress in psi;
P = Test pressure prescribed for water jacket test, i.e., at least two 
times service pressure, in psig;
D = Outside diameter in inches;
d = Inside diameter in inches.

    (g) Heat treatment. The seamless hemispheres and cylinders may be 
stress relieved or annealed for forming. Welded container must be stress 
relieved at a temperature of 775  deg.F  25 deg. after 
process treatment and before hydrostatic test.
    (h) Openings in container. Openings must comply with the following:
    (1) Each opening in the container must be provided with a fitting, 
boss or pad of weldable stainless steel securely attached to the 
container by fusion welding.
    (2) Attachments to a fitting, boss, or pad must be adequate to 
prevent leakage. Threads must comply with the following:
    (i) Threads must be clean cut, even, without checks, and tapped to 
gauge.
    (ii) Taper threads to be of length not less than as specified for 
American Standard taper pipe threads.
    (iii) Straight threads having at least 4 engaged threads, to have 
tight fit and calculated shear strength at least 10 times the test 
pressure of the container; gaskets required, adequate to prevent 
leakage.
    (i) Process treatment. Each container must be hydraulically 
pressurized in a water jacket to at least 100 percent, but not more than 
110 percent, of the test pressure and maintained at this pressure for a 
minimum of 3 minutes. Total and permanent expansion must be recorded and 
included in the inspector's report.
    (j) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder must successfully withstand a 
hydrostatic test as follows:
    (1) The test must be by water-jacket, operated so as to obtain 
accurate data. The pressure gauge must permit reading to an accuracy of 
1 percent. The expansion gauge must permit reading of total expansion to 
an accuracy either of 1 percent or 0.1 cubic centimeter.
    (2) Pressure must be maintained for at least 30 seconds and 
sufficiently longer to ensure complete expansion. If, due to failure of 
the test apparatus, the test pressure cannot be maintained, the test may 
be repeated at a pressure increased by 10 percent or 100 psig, whichever 
is the lower.
    (3) Permanent volumetric expansion may not exceed 10 percent of 
total volumetric expansion at test pressure.
    (4) Each container must be tested to at least 2 times service 
pressure.
    (5) Container must then be inspected. Any wall thickness lower than 
that required by paragraph (f) of this section must be cause for 
rejection. Bulges and cracks must be cause for rejection. Welded joint 
defects exceeding requirements of paragraph (k) of this section must be 
cause for rejection.
    (k) Radiographic inspection. Radiographic inspection is required on 
all welded joints which are subjected to internal pressure, except that 
at the discretion of the disinterested inspector, openings less than 25 
percent of the container diameter need not be subjected to radiographic 
inspection. Evidence of any defects likely to seriously weaken the 
container is cause for rejection. Radiographic inspection must be 
performed subsequent to the hydrostatic test.
    (l) Burst test. One container taken at random out of 200 or less 
must be hydrostatically tested to destruction. Rupture pressure must be 
included as part of the inspector's report.
    (m) Flattening test. A flattening test must be performed as follows:
    (1) For spheres the test must be at the weld between parallel steel 
plates on a press with welded seam at right angles to the plates. Test 
one sphere taken at random out of each lot of 200 or less after the 
hydrostatic test. Any projecting appurtenances may be cut off (by 
mechanical means only) prior to crushing.
    (2) For cylinders the test must be between knife edges, wedge 
shaped, 60 deg. angle, rounded to \1/2\-inch radius. Test one cylinder 
taken at random out of each lot of 200 or less, after the hydrostatic 
test.
    (n) Acceptable results for flattening and burst tests. Acceptable 
results for flattening and burst tests are as follows:

[[Page 795]]

    (1) Flattening required to 50 percent of the original outside 
diameter without cracking.
    (2) Burst pressure must be at least 3 times the service pressure.
    (o) Rejected containers. Repair of welded seams by welding prior to 
process treatment is authorized. Subsequent thereto, containers must be 
heat treated and pass all prescribed tests.
    (p) Duties of inspector. In addition to the requirements of 
Sec. 178.35, the inspector must verify that all tests are conducted at 
temperatures between 60  deg.F and 90  deg.F.
    (q) Marking. Markings must be stamped plainly and permanently on a 
permanent attachment or on a metal nameplate permanently secured to the 
container by means other than soft solder.

[Amdt. 178-114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as amended at 66 FR 45386, 
45388, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51653, Aug. 8, 2002]



Sec. 178.50  Specification 4B welded or brazed steel cylinders.

    (a) Type, size, and service pressure. A DOT 4B is a welded or brazed 
steel cylinder with longitudinal seams that are forged lap-welded or 
brazed and with water capacity (nominal) not over 1,000 pounds and a 
service pressure of at least 150 but not over 500 psig. Cylinders closed 
in by spinning process are not authorized.
    (b) Steel. Open-hearth, electric or basic oxygen process steel of 
uniform quality must be used. Content percent may not exceed the 
following: Carbon, 0.25; phosphorus, 0.045; sulphur, 0.050.
    (c) Identification of material. Material must be identified by any 
suitable method except that plates and billets for hotdrawn cylinders 
must be marked with the heat number.
    (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be manufactured using equipment and 
processes adequate to ensure that each cylinder produced conforms to the 
requirements of this subpart. No defect is permitted that is likely to 
weaken the finished cylinder appreciably. A reasonably smooth and 
uniform surface finish is required. Exposed bottom welds on cylinders 
over 18 inches long must be protected by footrings. Welding procedures 
and operators must be qualified in accordance with CGA Pamphlet C-3 
(incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter). Seams 
must be made as follows:
    (1) Welded or brazed circumferential seams. Heads attached by 
brazing must have a driving fit with the shell, unless the shell is 
crimped, swedged, or curled over the skirt or flange of the head, and be 
thoroughly brazed until complete penetration by the brazing material of 
the brazed joint is secured. Depth of brazing from end of shell must be 
at least four times the thickness of shell metal.
    (2) Longitudinal seams in shells. Longitudinal seams must be forged 
lap welded, by copper brazing, by copper alloy brazing, or by silver 
alloy brazing. Copper alloy composition must be: Copper, 95 percent 
minimum; Silicon, 1.5 percent to 3.85 percent; Manganese, 0.25 percent 
to 1.10 percent. The melting point of the silver alloy brazing material 
must be in excess of 1000  deg.F. When brazed, the plate edge must be 
lapped at least eight times the thickness of plate, laps being held in 
position, substantially metal to metal, by riveting or electric spot-
welding; brazing must be done by using a suitable flux and by placing 
brazing material on one side of seam and applying heat until this 
material shows uniformly along the seam of the other side.
    (e) Welding or brazing. Only the attachment of neckrings, footrings, 
handles, bosses, pads, and valve protection rings to the tops and 
bottoms of cylinders by welding or brazing is authorized. Such 
attachments and the portion of the container to which they are attached 
must be made of weldable steel, the carbon content of which may not 
exceed 0.25 percent except in the case of 4130X steel which may be used 
with proper welding procedure.
    (f) Wall thickness. The wall thickness of the cylinder must comply 
with the following requirements:
    (1) For cylinders with outside diameters over 6 inches the minimum 
wall thickness must be 0.090 inch. In any case, the minimum wall 
thickness must be such that calculated wall stress at minimum test 
pressure (paragraph (i)(4) of this section) may not exceed the following 
values:
    (i) 24,000 psi for cylinders without longitudinal seam.

[[Page 796]]

    (ii) 22,800 psig for cylinders having copper brazed or silver alloy 
brazed longitudinal seam.
    (iii) 18,000 psi for cylinders having forged lapped welded 
longitudinal seam.
    (2) Calculation must be made by the formula:

S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 - 
    d2)

Where:

S = wall stress in psi;
P = minimum test pressure prescribed for water jacket test or 450 psig 
whichever is the greater;
D = outside diameter in inches;
d = inside diameter in inches.

    (g) Heat treatment. Cylinder body and heads, formed by drawing or 
pressing, must be uniformly and properly heat treated prior to tests.
    (h) Opening in cylinders. Openings in cylinders must conform to the 
following:
    (1) Each opening in cylinders, except those for safety devices, must 
be provided with a fitting, boss, or pad, securely attached to cylinder 
by brazing or by welding or by threads. Fitting, boss, or pad must be of 
steel suitable for the method of attachment employed, and which need not 
be identified or verified as to analysis except that if attachment is by 
welding, carbon content may not exceed 0.25 percent. If threads are 
used, they must comply with the following:
    (i) Threads must be clean cut, even without checks, and tapped to 
gauge.
    (ii) Taper threads to be of length not less than as specified for 
American Standard taper pipe threads.
    (iii) Straight threads, having at least 4 engaged threads, to have 
tight fit and calculated shear strength at least 10 times the test 
pressure of the cylinder; gaskets required, adequate to prevent leakage.
    (iv) A brass fitting may be brazed to the steel boss or flange on 
cylinders used as component parts of hand fire extinguishers.
    (2) The closure of a fitting, boss, or pad must be adequate to 
prevent leakage.
    (i) Hydrostatic test. Cylinders must withstand a hydrostatic test as 
follows:
    (1) The test must be by water-jacket, or other suitable method, 
operated so as to obtain accurate data. The pressure gauge must permit 
reading to an accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion gauge must permit 
reading of total expansion to an accuracy either of 1 percent or 0.1 
cubic centimeter.
    (2) Pressure must be maintained for at least 30 seconds and 
sufficiently longer to ensure complete expansion. Any internal pressure 
applied after heat-treatment and previous to the official test may not 
exceed 90 percent of the test pressure. If, due to failure of the test 
apparatus, the test pressure cannot be maintained, the test may be 
repeated at a pressure increased by 10 percent or 100 psig, whichever is 
the lower.
    (3) Permanent volumetric expansion may not exceed 10 percent of 
total volumetric expansion at test pressure.
    (4) Cylinders must be tested as follows:
    (i) At least one cylinder selected at random out of each lot of 200 
or less must be tested as outlined in paragraphs (i)(1), (i)(2), and 
(i)(3) of this section to at least two times service pressure.
    (ii) All cylinders not tested as outlined in paragraph (i)(4)(i) of 
this section must be examined under pressure of at least two times 
service pressure and show no defect.
    (j) Flattening test. After the hydrostatic test, a flattening test 
must be performed on one cylinder taken at random out or each lot of 200 
or less, by placing the cylinder between wedge shaped knife edges having 
a 60 deg. included angle, rounded to \1/2\-inch radius. The longitudinal 
axis of the cylinder must be at a 90-degree angle to knife edges during 
the test. For lots of 30 or less, flattening tests are authorized to be 
made on a ring at least 8 inches long cut from each cylinder and 
subjected to same heat treatment as the finished cylinder.
    (k) Physical test. A physical test must be conducted to determine 
yield strength, tensile strength, elongation, and reduction of area of 
material as follows:
    (1) The test is required on 2 specimens cut from 1 cylinder, or part 
thereof heat-treated as required, taken at random out of each lot of 200 
or less. For lots of 30 or less, physical tests are

[[Page 797]]

authorized to be made on a ring at least 8 inches long cut from each 
cylinder and subjected to same heat treatment as the finished cylinder.
    (2) Specimens must conform to the following:
    (i) A gauge length of 8 inches with a width of not over 1\1/2\ 
inches, a gauge length of 2 inches with a width of not over 1\1/2\ 
inches, or a gauge length at least 24 times the thickness with a width 
not over 6 times the thickness is authorized when a cylinder wall is not 
over \3/16\ inch thick.
    (ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip ends, may not be flattened. 
Grip ends may be flattened to within one inch of each end of the reduced 
section.
    (iii) When size of cylinder does not permit securing straight 
specimens, the specimens may be taken in any location or direction and 
may be straightened or flattened cold, by pressure only, not by blows. 
When specimens are so taken and prepared, the inspector's report must 
show in connection with record of physical tests detailed information in 
regard to such specimens.
    (iv) Heating of a specimen for any purpose is not authorized.
    (3) The yield strength in tension must be the stress corresponding 
to a permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the gauge length. The following 
conditions apply:
    (i) The yield strength must be determined by either the ``offset'' 
method or the ``extension under load'' method as prescribed in ASTM E 8 
(incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).
    (ii) In using the ``extension under load'' method, the total strain 
(or ``extension under load'') corresponding to the stress at which the 
0.2 percent permanent strain occurs may be determined with sufficient 
accuracy by calculating the elastic extension of the gauge length under 
appropriate load and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the gauge length. 
Elastic extension calculations must be based on an elastic modulus of 
30,000,000. In the event of controversy, the entire stress-strain 
diagram must be plotted and the yield strength determined from the 0.2 
percent offset.
    (iii) For the purpose of strain measurement, the initial strain must 
be set while the specimen is under a stress of 12,000 psi, and strain 
indicator reading must be set at the calculated corresponding strain.
    (iv) Cross-head speed of the testing machine may not exceed \1/8\ 
inch per minute during yield strength determination.
    (l) Acceptable results for physical and flattening tests. Either of 
the following is an acceptable result:
    (1) An elongation of at least 40 percent for a 2-inch gauge length 
or at least 20 percent in other cases and yield strength not over 73 
percent of tensile strength. In this instance, a flattening test is not 
required.
    (2) When cylinders are constructed of lap welded pipe, flattening 
test is required, without cracking, to 6 times the wall thickness. In 
such case, the rings (crop ends) cut from each end of pipe, must be 
tested with the weld 45 deg. or less from the point of greatest stress. 
If a ring fails, another from the same end of pipe may be tested.
    (m) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treatment is authorized for rejected 
cylinder. Subsequent thereto, cylinders must pass all prescribed tests 
to be acceptable. Repair of brazed seams by brazing and welded seams by 
welding is authorized.
    (n) Markings. Markings must be stamped plainly and permanently in 
any of the following locations on the cylinder:
    (1) On shoulders and top heads when they are not less than 0.087-
inch thick.
    (2) On side wall adjacent to top head for side walls which are not 
less than 0.090 inch thick.
    (3) On a cylindrical portion of the shell which extends beyond the 
recessed bottom of the cylinder, constituting an integral and non-
pressure part of the cylinder.
    (4) On a metal plate attached to the top of the cylinder or 
permanent part thereof; sufficient space must be left on the plate to 
provide for stamping at least six retest dates; the plate must be at 
least \1/16\-inch thick and must be attached by welding, or by brazing. 
The brazing rod must melt at a temperature of 1100  deg.F. Welding or 
brazing

[[Page 798]]

must be along all the edges of the plate.
    (5) On the neck, neckring, valve boss, valve protection sleeve, or 
similar part permanently attached to the top of the cylinder.
    (6) On the footring permanently attached to the cylinder, provided 
the water capacity of the cylinder does not exceed 25 pounds.

[Amdt. 178-114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as amended at 62 FR 51561, 
Oct. 1, 1997; 66 FR 45385, 45388, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51653, Aug. 8, 
2002]



Sec. 178.51  Specification 4BA welded or brazed steel cylinders.

    (a) Type, size, and service pressure. A DOT 4BA cylinder is a 
cylinder, either spherical or cylindrical in shape, with a water 
capacity of 1,000 pounds or less and a service pressure of at least 225 
and not over 500 psig. Closures made by the spinning process are not 
authorized.
    (1) Spherical type cylinders must be made from two seamless 
hemispheres joined by the welding of one circumferential seam.
    (2) Cylindrical type cylinders must be of circumferentially welded 
or brazed construction.
    (b) Steel. The steel used in the construction of the cylinder must 
be as specified in table 1 of appendix A to this part.
    (c) Identification of material. Material must be identified by any 
suitable method except that plates and billets for hotdrawn cylinders 
must be marked with the heat number.
    (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be manufactured using equipment and 
processes adequate to ensure that each cylinder produced conforms to the 
requirements of this subpart. No defect is permitted that is likely to 
weaken the finished cylinder appreciably. A reasonably smooth and 
uniform surface finish is required. Exposed bottom welds on cylinders 
over 18 inches long must be protected by footrings.
    (1) Seams must be made as follows:
    (i) Minimum thickness of heads and bottoms must be not less than 90 
percent of the required thickness of the side wall.
    (ii) Circumferential seams must be made by welding or by brazing. 
Heads must be attached by brazing and must have a driving fit with the 
shell, unless the shell is crimped, swedged or curled over the skirt or 
flange of the head and must be thoroughly brazed until complete 
penetration by the brazing material of the brazed joint is secured. 
Depth of brazing from end of the shell must be at least four times the 
thickness of shell metal.
    (iii) Longitudinal seams in shells must be made by copper brazing, 
copper alloy brazing, or by silver alloy brazing. Copper alloy 
composition must be: Copper 95 percent minimum, Silicon 1.5 percent to 
3.85 percent, Manganese 0.25 percent to 1.10 percent. The melting point 
of the silver alloy brazing material must be in excess of 1,000  deg.F. 
The plate edge must be lapped at least eight times the thickness of 
plate, laps being held in position, substantially metal to metal, by 
riveting or by electric spot-welding. Brazing must be done by using a 
suitable flux and by placing brazing material on one side of seam and 
applying heat until this material shows uniformly along the seam of the 
other side. Strength of longitudinal seam: Copper brazed longitudinal 
seam must have strength at least \3/2\ times the strength of the steel 
wall.
    (2) Welding procedures and operators must be qualified in accordance 
with CGA Pamphlet C-3 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this 
subchapter).
    (e) Welding and brazing. Only the welding or brazing of neckrings, 
footrings, handles, bosses, pads, and valve protection rings to the tops 
and bottoms of cylinders is authorized. Provided that such attachments 
and the portion of the container to which they are attached are made of 
weldable steel, the carbon content of which may not exceed 0.25 percent 
except in the case of 4130x steel which may be used with proper welding 
procedure.
    (f) Wall thickness. The minimum wall thickness of the cylinder must 
meet the following conditions:
    (1) For any cylinder with an outside diameter of greater than 6 
inches, the minimum wall thickness is 0.078 inch. In any case the 
minimum wall thickness must be such that the calculated

[[Page 799]]

wall stress at the minimum test pressure may not exceed the lesser value 
of any of the following:
    (i) The value shown in table 1 of appendix A to this part, for the 
particular material under consideration;
    (ii) One-half of the minimum tensile strength of the material 
determined as required in paragraph (j) of this section;
    (iii) 35,000 psi; or
    (iv) Further provided that wall stress for cylinders having copper 
brazed longitudinal seams may not exceed 95 percent of any of the above 
values. Measured wall thickness may not include galvanizing or other 
protective coating.
    (2) Cylinders that are cylindrical in shape must have the wall 
stress calculated by the formula:

S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 - 
    d2)

Where:

S = wall stress in psi;
P = minimum test pressure prescribed for water jacket test;
D = outside diameter in inches;
d = inside diameter in inches.

    (3) Cylinders that are spherical in shape must have the wall stress 
calculated by the formula:

S = PD / 4tE

Where:

S = wall stress in psi;
P = minimum test pressure prescribed for water jacket test;
D = outside diameter in inches;
t = minimum wall thickness in inches;
E = 0.85 (provides 85 percent weld efficiency factor which must be 
applied in the girth weld area and heat affected zones which zone must 
extend a distance of 6 times wall thickness from center line of weld);
E = 1.0 (for all other areas).

    (4) For a cylinder with a wall thickness less than 0.100 inch, the 
ratio of tangential length to outside diameter may not exceed 4.1.
    (g) Heat treatment. Cylinders must be heat treated in accordance 
with the following requirements:
    (1) Each cylinder must be uniformly and properly heat treated prior 
to test by the applicable method shown in table 1 of appendix A to this 
part. Heat treatment must be accomplished after all forming and welding 
operations, except that when brazed joints are used, heat treatment must 
follow any forming and welding operations, but may be done before, 
during or after the brazing operations.
    (2) Heat treatment is not required after the welding or brazing of 
weldable low carbon parts to attachments of similar material which have 
been previously welded or brazed to the top or bottom of cylinders and 
properly heat treated, provided such subsequent welding or brazing does 
not produce a temperature in excess of 400  deg.F in any part of the top 
or bottom material.
    (h) Openings in cylinders. Openings in cylinders must comply with 
the following requirements:
    (1) Any opening must be placed on other than a cylindrical surface.
    (2) Each opening in a spherical type cylinder must be provided with 
a fitting, boss, or pad of weldable steel securely attached to the 
container by fusion welding.
    (3) Each opening in a cylindrical type cylinder must be provided 
with a fitting, boss, or pad, securely attached to container by brazing 
or by welding.
    (4) If threads are used, they must comply with the following:
    (i) Threads must be clean-cut, even, without checks and tapped to 
gauge.
    (ii) Taper threads must be of a length not less than that specified 
for American Standard taper pipe threads.
    (iii) Straight threads, having at least 4 engaged threads, must have 
a tight fit and a calculated shear strength of at least 10 times the 
test pressure of the cylinder. Gaskets, adequate to prevent leakage, are 
required.
    (i) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder must successfully withstand a 
hydrostatic test, as follows:
    (1) The test must be by water jacket, or other suitable method, 
operated so as to obtain accurate data. A pressure gauge must permit 
reading to an accuracy of 1 percent. An expansion gauge must permit 
reading of total expansion to an accuracy of either 1 percent or 0.1 
cubic centimeter.
    (2) Pressure must be maintained for at least 30 seconds and 
sufficiently longer to ensure complete expansion. Any internal pressure 
applied after heat treatment and previous to the official test may not 
exceed 90 percent of the test pressure.

[[Page 800]]

    (3) Permanent volumetric expansion may not exceed 10 percent of the 
total volumetric expansion at test pressure.
    (4) Cylinders must be tested as follows:
    (i) At least one cylinder selected at random out of each lot of 200 
or less must be tested as outlined in paragraphs (i)(1), (i)(2), and 
(i)(3) of this section to at least two times service pressure.
    (ii) All cylinders not tested as outlined in paragraph (i)(4)(i) of 
this section must be examined under pressure of at least two times 
service pressure and show no defect.
    (j) Physical test. A physical test must be conducted to determine 
yield strength, tensile strength, elongation, and reduction of area of 
material, as follows:
    (1) The test is required on 2 specimens cut from one cylinder or 
part thereof having passed the hydrostatic test and heat-treated as 
required, taken at random out of each lot of 200 or less. Physical tests 
for spheres are required on 2 specimens cut from flat representative 
sample plates of the same heat taken at random from the steel used to 
produce the spheres. This flat steel from which 2 specimens are to be 
cut must receive the same heat treatment as the spheres themselves. 
Sample plates must be taken from each lot of 200 or less spheres.
    (2) Specimens must conform to the following:
    (i) A gauge length of 8 inches with a width not over 1\1/2\ inches, 
or a gauge length of 2 inches with a width not over 1\1/2\ inches, or a 
gauge length at least 24 times the thickness with a width not over 6 
times the thickness is authorized when a cylinder wall is not over \3/
16\ inch thick.
    (ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip ends, may not be flattened. 
Grip ends may be flattened to within one inch of each end of the reduced 
section.
    (iii) When size of the cylinder does not permit securing straight 
specimens, the specimens may be taken in any location or direction and 
may be straightened or flattened cold, by pressure only, not by blows. 
When specimens are so taken and prepared, the inspector's report must 
show in connection with record of physical tests detailed information in 
regard to such specimens.
    (iv) Heating of a specimen for any purpose is not authorized.
    (3) The yield strength in tension must be the stress corresponding 
to a permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the gauge length. The following 
conditions apply:
    (i) The yield strength must be determined by either the ``offset'' 
method or the ``extension under load'' method as prescribed in ASTM E 8 
(incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).
    (ii) In using the ``extension under load'' method, the total strain 
(or ``extension under load''), corresponding to the stress at which the 
0.2 percent permanent strain occurs may be determined with sufficient 
accuracy by calculating the elastic extension of the gauge length under 
appropriate load and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the gauge length. 
Elastic extension calculations must be based on an elastic modulus of 
30,000,000. In the event of controversy, the entire stress-strain 
diagram must be plotted and the yield strength determined from the 0.2 
percent offset.
    (iii) For the purpose of strain measurement, the initial strain 
reference must be set while the specimen is under a stress of 12,000 
psi, and the strain indicator reading must be set at the calculated 
corresponding strain.
    (iv) Cross-head speed of the testing machine may not exceed \1/8\ 
inch per minute during yield strength determination.
    (k) Elongation. Physical test specimens must show at least a 40 
percent elongation for a 2-inch gauge length or at least 20 percent in 
other cases. Except that these elongation percentages may be reduced 
numerically by 2 for 2-inch specimens, and by 1 in other cases, for each 
7,500 psi increment of tensile strength above 50,000 psi to a maximum of 
four such increments.
    (l) Tests of welds. Except for brazed seams, welds must be tested as 
follows:
    (1) Tensile test. A specimen must be cut from one cylinder of each 
lot of 200 or less, or welded test plate. The welded test plate must be 
of one of the heats in the lot of 200 or less which it represents, in 
the same condition and

[[Page 801]]

approximately the same thickness as the cylinder wall except that in no 
case must it be of a lesser thickness than that required for a quarter 
size Charpy impact specimen. The weld must be made by the same 
procedures and subjected to the same heat treatment as the major weld on 
the cylinder. The specimen must be taken from across the major seam and 
must be prepared and tested in accordance with and must meet the 
requirements of CGA Pamphlet C-3 (incorporated by reference; see 
Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter). Should this specimen fail to meet the 
requirements, specimens may be taken from two additional cylinders or 
welded test plates from the same lot and tested. If either of the latter 
specimens fail to meet the requirements, the entire lot represented must 
be rejected.
    (2) Guided bend test. A root bend test specimen must be cut from the 
cylinder or welded test plate, used for the tensile test specified in 
paragraph (l)(1) of this section. Specimens must be taken from across 
the major seam and must be prepared and tested in accordance with and 
must meet the requirements of CGA Pamphlet C-3 (incorporated by 
reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).
    (3) Alternate guided-bend test. This test may be used and must be as 
required by CGA Pamphlet C-3 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 
of this subchapter). The specimen must be bent until the elongation at 
the outer surface, adjacent to the root of the weld, between the lightly 
scribed gage lines a to b, must be at least 20 percent, except that this 
percentage may be reduced for steels having a tensile strength in excess 
of 50,000 psig, as provided in paragraph (k) of this section.
    (m) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treatment is authorized for rejected 
cylinders. Subsequent thereto, cylinders must pass all prescribed tests 
to be acceptable. Repair of brazed seams by brazing and welded seams by 
welding is authorized.
    (n) Markings. Markings must be stamped plainly and permanently in 
one of the following locations on the cylinder:
    (1) On shoulders and top heads not less than 0.087 inch thick.
    (2) On side wall adjacent to top head for side walls not less than 
0.090 inch thick.
    (3) On a cylindrical portion of the shell which extends beyond the 
recessed bottom of the cylinder constituting an integral and non-
pressure part of the cylinder.
    (4) On a plate attached to the top of the cylinder or permanent part 
thereof; sufficient space must be left on the plate to provide for 
stamping at least six retest dates; the plate must be at least \1/16\ 
inch thick and must be attached by welding, or by brazing at a 
temperature of at least 1100  deg.F., throughout all edges of the plate.
    (5) On the neck, neckring, valve boss, valve protection sleeve, or 
similar part permanently attached to the top of the cylinder.
    (6) On the footring permanently attached to the cylinder, provided 
the water capacity of the cylinder does not exceed 25 pounds.

[Amdt. 178-114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as amended at 66 FR 4535, 
Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 16015, Sept. 27, 2002; 67 FR 51653, Aug. 8, 2002]



Sec. 178.53  Specification 4D welded steel cylinders for aircraft use.

    (a) Type, size, and service pressure. A DOT 4D cylinder is a welded 
steel sphere (two seamless hemispheres) or circumferentially welded 
cylinder (two seamless drawn shells) with a water capacity not over 100 
pounds and a service pressure of at least 300 but not over 500 psig. 
Cylinders closed in by spinning process are not authorized.
    (b) Steel. Open-hearth or electric steel of uniform and weldable 
quality must be used. Content may not exceed the following: Carbon, 
0.25; phosphorus, 0.045; sulphur, 0.050, except that the following 
steels commercially known as 4130X and Type 304, 316, 321, and 347 
stainless steels may be used with proper welding procedure. A heat of 
steel made under table 1 in this paragraph (b), check chemical analysis 
of which is slightly out of the specified range, is acceptable, if 
satisfactory in all other respects, provided the tolerances shown in 
table 2 in this paragraph (b) are not exceeded, except as approved by 
the Associate Administrator. The following chemical analyses are 
authorized:

[[Page 802]]



                          Table 1--4130X Steel
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                   4130X                               Percent
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Carbon.....................................  0.25/0.35.
Manganese..................................  0.40/0.60.
Phosphorus.................................  0.04 max.
Sulphur....................................  0.05 max
Silicon....................................  0.15/0.35.
Chromium...................................  0.80/1.10.
Molybdenum.................................  0.15/0.25.
Zirconium..................................  None.
Nickel.....................................  None.
------------------------------------------------------------------------


                                      Table 2--Authorized Stainless Steels
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                         Stainless steels
                                                 ---------------------------------------------------------------
                                                   304 (percent)   316 (percent)   321 (percent)   347 (percent)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Carbon (max)....................................            0.08            0.08            0.08            0.08
Manganese (max).................................            2.00            2.00            2.00            2.00
Phosphorus (max)................................            .030            .045            .030            .030
Sulphur (max)...................................            .030            .030            .030            .030
Silicon (max)...................................             .75            1.00             .75             .75
Nickel..........................................        8.0/11.0       10.0/14.0        9.0/13.0        9.0/13.0
Chromium........................................       18.0/20.0       16.0/18.0       17.0/20.0       17.0/20.0
Molybdenum......................................  ..............         2.0/3.0  ..............  ..............
Titanium........................................  ..............  ..............           (\1\)  ..............
Columbium.......................................  ..............  ..............  ..............           (\2\)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Titanium may not be less than 5C and not more than 0.60%.
\2\ Columbium may not be less than 10C and not more than 1.0%.


                                       Table 3--Check Analysis Tolerances
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                        Tolerance (percent) over
                                                                                          the maximum limit or
                                                                                         under the minimum limit
            Element                       Limit or maximum specified (percent)         -------------------------
                                                                                           Under         Over
                                                                                          minimum      maximum
                                                                                           limit        limit
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Carbon.........................  To 0.15 incl.........................................         0.01         0.01
                                 Over 0.15 to 0.40 incl...............................          .03          .04
Manganese......................  To 0.60 incl.........................................          .03          .03
                                 Over 1.15 to 2.50 incl...............................          .05          .05
Phosphorus \1\.................  All ranges...........................................  ...........          .01
Sulphur........................  All ranges...........................................  ...........          .01
Silicon........................  To 0.30 incl.........................................          .02          .03
                                 Over 0.30 to 1.00 incl...............................          .05          .05
Nickel.........................  Over 5.30 to 10.00 incl..............................          .10          .10
                                 Over 10.00 to 14.00 incl.............................          .15          .15
Chromium.......................  To 0.90 incl.........................................          .03          .03
                                 Over 0.90 to 2.10 incl...............................          .05          .05
                                 Over 15.00 to 20.00 incl.............................          .20          .20
Molybdenum.....................  To 0.20 incl.........................................          .01          .01
                                 Over 0.20 to 0.40 incl...............................          .02          .02
                                 Over 1.75 to 3.0 incl................................          .10          .10
Titanium.......................  All ranges...........................................          .05          .05
Columbium......................  All ranges...........................................          .05          .05
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Rephosphorized steels not subject to check analysis for phosphorus.

    (c) Identification of material. Material must be identified by any 
suitable method except that plates and billets for hotdrawn cylinders 
must be marked with the heat number.
    (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be manufactured using equipment and 
processes adequate to ensure that each cylinder produced conforms to the 
requirements of this subpart. No defect is permitted that is likely to 
weaken the finished container appreciably. A reasonably smooth and 
uniform surface finish is required. Welding procedures and operators 
must be qualified in accordance with CGA Pamphlet C-3 (incorporated by 
reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).
    (e) Wall thickness. The wall stress at the minimum test pressure may 
not exceed 24,000 psi, except where steels commercially known as 4130X, 
types

[[Page 803]]

304, 316, 321, and 347 stainless steels are used, stress at the test 
pressures may not exceed 37,000 psi. The minimum wall thickness for any 
container having a capacity of 1,100 cubic inches or less is 0.04 inch. 
The minimum wall thickness for any container having a capacity in excess 
of 1,100 cubic inches is 0.095 inch. Calculations must be done by the 
following:
    (1) Calculation for a ``sphere'' must be made by the formula:

S = PD / 4tE

Where:

S = wall stress in psi;
P = test pressure prescribed for water jacket test, i.e., at least two 
times service pressure, in psig;
D = outside diameter in inches;
t = minimum wall thickness in inches;
E = 0.85 (provides 85 percent weld efficiency factor which must be 
applied in the girth weld area and heat affected zones which zone must 
extend a distance of 6 times wall thickness from center line of weld);
E = 1.0 (for all other areas).

    (2) Calculation for a cylinder must be made by the formula:

S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 - 
    dT12)

Where:

S = wall stress in psi;
P = test pressure prescribed for water jacket test, i.e., at least two 
times service pressure, in psig;
D = outside diameter in inches;
d = inside diameter in inches.

    (f) Heat treatment. The completed cylinders must be uniformly and 
properly heat-treated prior to tests.
    (g) Openings in container. Openings in cylinders must comply with 
the following:
    (1) Each opening in the container, except those for safety devices, 
must be provided with a fitting, boss, or pad, securely attached to the 
container by brazing or by welding or by threads. If threads are used, 
they must comply with the following:
    (i) Threads must be clean cut, even, without checks, and tapped to 
gauge.
    (ii) Taper threads must be of a length not less than that specified 
for American Standard taper pipe threads.
    (iii) Straight threads, having at least 4 engaged threads, must have 
a tight fit and calculated shear strength of at least 10 times the test 
pressure of the container. Gaskets, adequate to prevent leakage, are 
required.
    (2) Closure of a fitting, boss, or pad must be adequate to prevent 
leakage.
    (h) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder must successfully withstand a 
hydrostatic test, as follows:
    (1) The test must be by water-jacket, or other suitable method, 
operated so as to obtain accurate data. A pressure gauge must permit a 
reading to an accuracy of 1 percent. An expansion gauge must permit 
reading of total expansion to an accuracy of either 1 percent or 0.1 
cubic centimeter.
    (2) Pressure must be maintained for at least 30 seconds and 
sufficiently longer to ensure complete expansion. Any internal pressure 
applied after heat-treatment and previous to the official test may not 
exceed 90 percent of the test pressure. If, due to failure of the test 
apparatus, the test pressure cannot be maintained, the test may be 
repeated at a pressure increased by 10 percent or 100 psig, whichever is 
the lower.
    (3) Permanent volumetric expansion may not exceed 10 percent of the 
total volumetric expansion at test pressure.
    (4) Containers must be tested as follows:
    (i) Each container to at least 2 times service pressure; or
    (ii) One container out of each lot of 200 or less to at least 3 
times service pressure. Others must be examined under pressure of 2 
times service pressure and show no defects.
    (i) Flattening test for spheres and cylinders. Spheres and cylinders 
must be subjected to a flattening test as follows:
    (1) One sphere taken at random out of each lot of 200 or less must 
be subjected to a flattening test as follows:
    (i) The test must be performed after the hydrostatic test.
    (ii) The test must be between parallel steel plates on a press with 
a welded seam at right angles to the plates. Any projecting 
appurtenances may be cut off (by mechanical means only) prior to 
crushing.
    (2) One cylinder taken at random out of each lot of 200 or less must 
be subjected to a flattening test, as follows:
    (i) The test must be performed after the hydrostatic test.

[[Page 804]]

    (ii) The test must be between knife edges, wedge shaped, 60 deg. 
angle, rounded to \1/2\ inch radius. For lots of 30 or less, physical 
tests are authorized to be made on a ring at least 8 inches long cut 
from each cylinder and subjected to the same heat treatment as the 
finished cylinder.
    (j) Physical test and specimens for spheres and cylinders. Spheres 
and cylinders must be subjected to a physical test as follows:
    (1) Physical test for spheres are required on 2 specimens cut from a 
flat representative sample plate of the same heat taken at random from 
the steel used to produce the sphere. This flat steel from which the 2 
specimens are to be cut must receive the same heat-treatment as the 
spheres themselves. Sample plates must be taken for each lot of 200 or 
less spheres.
    (2) Specimens for spheres must have a gauge length 2 inches with a 
width not over 1\1/2\ inches, or a gauge length at least 24 times the 
thickness with a width not over 6 times the thickness is authorized when 
a wall is not over \3/16\ inch thick.
    (3) Physical test for cylinders is required on 2 specimens cut from 
1 cylinder taken at random out of each lot of 200 or less. For lots of 
30 or less, physical tests are authorized to be made on a ring at least 
8 inches long cut from each cylinder and subjected to the same heat 
treatment as the finished cylinder.
    (4) Specimens for cylinders must conform to the following:
    (i) A gauge length of 8 inches with a width not over 1\1/2\ inches, 
or a gauge length of 2 inches with a width not over 1\1/2\ inches, or a 
gauge length at least 24 times the thickness with a width not over 6 
times the thickness is authorized when a cylinder wall is not over \3/
16\ inch thick.
    (ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip ends, may not be flattened. 
Grip ends may be flattened to within 1 inch of each end of the reduced 
section. Heating of the specimen for any purpose is not authorized.
    (5) The yield strength in tension must be the stress corresponding 
to a permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the gauge length. The following 
conditions apply:
    (i) The yield strength must be determined by either the ``offset'' 
method or the ``extension under load'' method as prescribed in ASTM E 8 
(incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).
    (ii) In using the ``extension under load'' method, the total strain 
(or ``extension under load'') corresponding to the stress at which the 
0.2 percent permanent strain occurs may be determined with sufficient 
accuracy by calculating the elastic extension of the gauge length under 
appropriate load and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the gauge length. 
Elastic extension calculations must be based on an elastic modulus of 
30,000,000. In the event of controversy, the entire stress-strain 
diagram must be plotted and the yield strength determined from the 0.2 
percent offset.
    (iii) For the purpose of strain measurement, the initial strain must 
be set while the specimen is under a stress of 12,000 psi and the strain 
indicator reading being set at the calculated corresponding strain.
    (iv) Cross-head speed of the testing machine may not exceed \1/8\ 
inch per minute during yield strength determination.
    (k) Acceptable results for physical and flattening tests. Either of 
the following is an acceptable result:
    (1) An elongation of at least 40 percent for a 2 inch gauge length 
or at least 20 percent in other cases and yield strength not over 73 
percent of tensile strength. In this instance, the flattening test is 
not required.
    (2) An elongation of at least 20 percent for a 2 inch gauge length 
or 10 percent in other cases. Flattening is required to 50 percent of 
the original outside diameter without cracking.
    (l) Rejected cylinders. Reheat-treatment is authorized for rejected 
cylinders. Subsequent thereto, containers must pass all prescribed tests 
to be acceptable. Repair of welded seams by welding prior to reheat-
treatment is authorized.
    (m) Marking. Marking on each container by stamping plainly and 
permanently are only authorized where the metal is at least 0.09 inch 
thick, or on a metal nameplate permanently secured to the container by 
means other

[[Page 805]]

than soft solder, or by means that would not reduce the wall thickness.

[Amdt. 178-114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as amended at 66 FR 45386, 
45388, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51653, Aug. 8, 2002]



Sec. 178.55  Specification 4B240ET welded or brazed cylinders.

    (a) Type, spinning process, size and service pressure. A DOT 4B240ET 
cylinder is a brazed type cylinder made from electric resistance welded 
tubing. The maximum water capacity of this cylinder is 12 pounds or 333 
cubic inches and the service must be 240 psig. The maximum outside 
diameter of the shell must be five inches and maximum length of the 
shell is 21 inches. Cylinders closed in by a spinning process are 
authorized.
    (b) Steel. Open-hearth, basic oxygen, or electric steel of uniform 
quality must be used. Plain carbon steel content may not exceed the 
following: Carbon, 0.25; phosphorus, 0.045; sulfur, 0.050. The addition 
of other elements for alloying effect is prohibited.
    (c) Identification of material. Material must be identified by any 
suitable method.
    (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be manufactured using equipment and 
processes adequate to ensure that each cylinder produced conforms to the 
requirements of this subpart. No defect is permitted that is likely to 
weaken the finished cylinder appreciably. A reasonably smooth and 
uniform surface finish is required. Heads may be attached to shells by 
lap brazing or may be formed integrally. The thickness of the bottom of 
cylinders welded or formed by spinning is, under no condition, to be 
less than two times the minimum wall thickness of the cylindrical shell. 
Such bottom thicknesses must be measured within an area bounded by a 
line representing the points of contact between the cylinder and the 
floor when the cylinder is in a vertical position. Seams must conform to 
the following:
    (1) Circumferential seams must be by brazing only. Heads must be 
attached to shells by the lap brazing method and must overlap not less 
than four times the wall thickness. Brazing material must have a melting 
point of not less than 1000  deg.F. Heads must have a driving fit with 
the shell unless the shell is crimped, swedged, or curled over the skirt 
or flange of the head and be thoroughly brazed until complete 
penetration of the joint by the brazing material is secured. Brazed 
joints may be repaired by brazing.
    (2) Longitudinal seams in shell must be by electric resistance 
welded joints only. No repairs to longitudinal joints is permitted.
    (3) Welding procedures and operators must be qualified in accordance 
with CGA Pamphlet C-3.
    (e) Welding or brazing. Only the attachment, by welding or brazing, 
to the tops and bottoms of cylinders of neckrings, footrings, handles, 
bosses, pads, and valve protection rings is authorized. Provided that 
such attachments and the portion of the container to which they are 
attached are made of weldable steel, the carbon content of which may not 
exceed 0.25 percent.
    (f) Wall thickness. The wall stress must be at least two times the 
service pressure and may not exceed 18,000 psi. The minimum wall 
thickness is 0.044 inch. Calculation must be made by the following 
formula:

S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 - 
    d2)

Where:

S = wall stress in psig;
P = 2 times service pressure;
D = outside diameter in inches;
d = inside diameter in inches.

    (g) Heat treatment. Heads formed by drawing or pressing must be 
uniformly and properly heat treated prior to tests. Cylinders with 
integral formed heads or bases must be subjected to a normalizing 
operation. Normalizing and brazing operations may be combined, provided 
the operation is carried out at a temperature in excess of the upper 
critical temperature of the steel.
    (h) Openings in cylinders. Openings in cylinders must comply with 
the following:
    (1) Each opening in cylinders, except those for safety devices, must 
be provided with a fitting, boss, or pad, securely attached to the 
cylinder by brazing or by welding or by threads. A fitting, boss, or pad 
must be of steel suitable for the method of attachment employed, and 
which need not be identified or verified as to analysis, except

[[Page 806]]

that if attachment is by welding, carbon content may not exceed 0.25 
percent. If threads are used, they must comply with the following:
    (i) Threads must be clean cut, even without checks, and tapped to 
gauge.
    (ii) Taper threads to be of length not less than as specified for 
American Standard taper pipe threads.
    (iii) Straight threads, having at least 4 engaged threads, to have 
tight fit and calculated shear strength at least 10 times the test 
pressure of the cylinder; gaskets required, adequate to prevent leakage.
    (2) Closure of a fitting, boss, or pad must be adequate to prevent 
leakage.
    (i) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder must successfully withstand a 
hydrostatic test as follows:
    (1) The test must be by water-jacket, or other suitable method, 
operated so as to obtain accurate data. The pressure gauge must permit 
reading to an accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion gauge must permit 
reading of total expansion to an accuracy of either 1 percent or 0.1 
cubic centimeter.
    (2) Pressure must be maintained for at least 30 seconds and 
sufficiently longer to ensure complete expansion. Any internal pressure 
applied after heat-treatment and previous to the official test may not 
exceed 90 percent of the test pressure. If, due to failure of the test 
apparatus, the test pressure cannot be maintained, the test may be 
repeated at a pressure increased by 10 percent or 100 psig, whichever is 
the lower.
    (3) Permanent volumetric expansion may not exceed 10 percent of 
total volumetric expansion at test pressure.
    (4) Cylinders must be tested as follows:
    (i) At least one cylinder selected at random out of each lot of 200 
or less must be tested as outlined in paragraphs (i)(1), (i)(2), and 
(i)(3) of this section to at least two times service pressure.
    (ii) All cylinders not tested as outlined in paragraph (i)(4)(i) of 
this section must be examined under pressure of at least two times 
service pressure and show no defect.
    (5) Each 1000 cylinders or less successively produced each day must 
constitute a lot. One cylinder must be selected from each lot and 
hydrostatically tested to destruction. If this cylinder bursts below 
five times the service pressure, then two additional cylinders must be 
selected and subjected to this test. If either of these cylinders fails 
by bursting below five times the service pressure then the entire lot 
must be rejected. All cylinders constituting a lot must be of identical 
size, construction heat-treatment, finish, and quality.
    (j) Flattening test. Following the hydrostatic test, one cylinder 
taken at random out of each lot of 200 or less, must be subjected to a 
flattening test that is between knife edges, wedge shaped, 60 deg. 
angle, rounded to \1/2\ inch radius.
    (k) Physical test. A physical test must be conducted to determine 
yield strength, tensile strength, elongation, and reduction of area of 
material, as follows:
    (1) The test is required on 2 specimens cut from 1 cylinder, or part 
thereof heat-treated as required, taken at random out of each lot of 200 
or less in the case of cylinders of capacity greater than 86 cubic 
inches and out of each lot of 500 or less for cylinders having a 
capacity of 86 cubic inches or less.
    (2) Specimens must conform to the following:
    (i) A gauge length of 8 inches with a width not over 1\1/2\ inches, 
a gauge length of 2 inches with a width not over 1\1/2\ inches, or a 
gauge length at least 24 times the thickness with a width not over 6 
times the thickness is authorized when a cylinder wall is not over \3/
16\ inch thick.
    (ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip ends, may not be flattened. 
Grip ends may be flattened to within one inch of each end of the reduced 
section.
    (iii) When size of cylinder does not permit securing straight 
specimens, the specimens may be taken in any location or direction and 
may be straightened or flattened cold by pressure only, not by blows. 
When specimens are so taken and prepared, the inspector's report must 
show in connection with record of physical tests detailed information in 
regard to such specimens.

[[Page 807]]

    (iv) Heating of a specimen for any purpose is not authorized.
    (3) The yield strength in tension must be the stress corresponding 
to a permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the gauge length. The following 
conditions apply:
    (i) The yield strength must be determined by either the ``offset'' 
method or the ``extension under load'' method as prescribed in ASTM E 8 
(incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).
    (ii) In using the ``extension under load'' method, the total strain 
(or ``extension under load'') corresponding to the stress at which the 
0.2 percent permanent strain occurs may be determined with sufficient 
accuracy by calculating the elastic extension of the gauge length under 
appropriate load and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the gauge length. 
Elastic extension calculations must be based on an elastic modulus of 
30,000,000. In the event of controversy, the entire stress-strain 
diagram must be plotted and the yield strength determined from the 0.2 
percent offset.
    (iii) For the purpose of strain measurement, the initial strain must 
be set while the specimen is under a stress of 12,000 psi and the strain 
indicator reading being set at the calculated corresponding strain.
    (iv) Cross-head speed of the testing machine may not exceed \1/8\ 
inch per minute during yield strength determination.
    (l) Acceptable results for physical and flattening tests. Acceptable 
results for the physical and flattening tests are an elongation of at 
least 40 percent for a 2 inch gauge length or at least 20 percent in 
other cases and a yield strength not over 73 percent of tensile 
strength. In this instance the flattening test is required, without 
cracking, to six times the wall thickness with a weld 90 deg. from the 
direction of the applied load. Two rings cut from the ends of length of 
pipe used in production of a lot may be used for the flattening test 
provided the rings accompany the lot which they represent in all thermal 
processing operations. At least one of the rings must pass the 
flattening test.
    (m) Leakage test. All spun cylinders and plugged cylinders must be 
tested for leakage by gas or air pressure after the bottom has been 
cleaned and is free from all moisture, subject to the following 
conditions:
    (1) Pressure, approximately the same as but no less than service 
pressure, must be applied to one side of the finished bottom over an 
area of at least \1/16\ of the total area of the bottom but not less 
than \3/4\ inch in diameter, including the closure, for at least 1 
minute, during which time the other side of the bottom exposed to 
pressure must be covered with water and closely examined for indications 
of leakage. Except as provided in paragraph (n) of this section, 
cylinders which are leaking must be rejected.
    (2) A spun cylinder is one in which an end closure in the finished 
cylinder has been welded by the spinning process.
    (3) A plugged cylinder is one in which a permanent closure in the 
bottom of a finished cylinder has been effected by a plug.
    (4) As a safety precaution, if the manufacturer elects to make this 
test before the hydrostatic test, he should design his apparatus so that 
the pressure is applied to the smallest area practicable, around the 
point of closure, and so as to use the smallest possible volume of air 
or gas.
    (n) Rejected cylinders. Repairs of rejected cylinders is authorized. 
Cylinders that are leaking must be rejected, except that:
    (1) Spun cylinders rejected under the provisions of paragraph (m) of 
this section may be removed from the spun cylinder category by drilling 
to remove defective material, tapping, and plugging.
    (2) Brazed joints may be rebrazed.
    (3) Subsequent to the operations noted in paragraphs (n)(1) and 
(n)(2) of this section, acceptable cylinders must pass all prescribed 
tests.
    (o) Marking. Markings on each cylinder must be by stamping plainly 
and permanently on shoulder, top head, neck or valve protection collar 
which is permanently attached to the cylinders and forming an integral 
part thereof, provided that cylinders not less than 0.090 inch thick may 
be

[[Page 808]]

stamped on the side wall adjacent to top head.

[Amdt. 178-114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as amended at 66 FR 45386, 
Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51653, Aug. 8, 2002]



Sec. 178.56  Specification 4AA480 welded steel cylinders.

    (a) Type, size, and service pressure. A DOT 4AA480 cylinder is a 
welded steel cylinder having a water capacity (nominal) not over 1,000 
pounds water capacity and a service pressure of 480 psig. Closures 
welded by spinning process not permitted.
    (b) Steel. The limiting chemical composition of steel authorized by 
this specification must be as shown in table I of appendix A to this 
part.
    (c) Identification of material. Material must be identified by any 
suitable method except that plates and billets for hotdrawn cylinders 
must be marked with the heat number.
    (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be manufactured using equipment and 
processes adequate to ensure that each cylinder produced conforms to the 
requirements of this subpart. No defect is permitted that is likely to 
weaken the finished cylinder appreciably. A reasonably smooth and 
uniform surface finish is required. Exposed bottom welds on cylinders 
over 18 inches long must be protected by footrings. Minimum thickness of 
heads and bottoms may not be less than 90 percent of the required 
thickness of the side wall. Seams must be made as follows:
    (1) Circumferential seams must be welded. Brazing is not authorized.
    (2) Longitudinal seams are not permitted.
    (3) Welding procedures and operators must be qualified in accordance 
with CGA Pamphlet C-3.
    (e) Welding. Only the welding of neckrings, footrings, bosses, pads, 
and valve protection rings to the tops and bottoms of cylinders is 
authorized. Provided that such attachments are made of weldable steel, 
the carbon content of which does not exceed 0.25 percent.
    (f) Wall thickness. The wall thickness of the cylinder must conform 
to the following:
    (1) For cylinders with an outside diameter over 5 inches, the 
minimum wall thickness is 0.078 inch. In any case, the minimum wall 
thickness must be such that the calculated wall stress at the minimum 
test pressure (in paragraph (i) of this section) may not exceed the 
lesser value of either of the following:
    (i) One-half of the minimum tensile strength of the material 
determined as required in paragraph (j) of this section; or
    (ii) 35,000 psi.
    (2) Calculation must be made by the formula:

S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 - 
    d2)

Where:

S = wall stress in psi;
P = minimum test pressure prescribed for water jacket test;
D = outside diameter in inches;
d = inside diameter in inches.

    (3) The ratio of tangential length to outside diameter may not 
exceed 4.0 for cylinders with a wall thickness less than 0.100 inch.
    (g) Heat treatment. Each cylinder must be uniformly and properly 
heat treated prior to tests. Any suitable heat treatment in excess of 
1100  deg.F is authorized except that liquid quenching is not permitted. 
Heat treatment must be accomplished after all forming and welding 
operations. Heat treatment is not required after welding weldable low 
carbon parts to attachments of similar material which have been 
previously welded to the top or bottom of cylinders and properly heat 
treated, provided such subsequent welding does not produce a temperature 
in excess of 400  deg.F., in any part of the top or bottom material.
    (h) Openings in cylinders. Openings in cylinders must conform to the 
following:
    (1) All openings must be in the heads or bases.
    (2) Each opening in the cylinder, except those for safety devices, 
must be provided with a fitting boss, or pad, securely attached to the 
cylinder by welding or by threads. If threads are used they must comply 
with the following:
    (i) Threads must be clean-cut, even without checks and cut to gauge.

[[Page 809]]

    (ii) Taper threads to be of length not less than as specified for 
American Standard taper pipe threads.
    (iii) Straight threads having at least 6 engaged threads, must have 
a tight fit and a calculated shear strength at least 10 times the test 
pressure of the cylinder. Gaskets, adequate to prevent leakage, are 
required.
    (3) Closure of a fitting, boss or pad must be adequate to prevent 
leakage.
    (i) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder must successfully withstand a 
hydrostatic test as follows:
    (1) The test must be by water jacket, or other suitable method, 
operated so as to obtain accurate data. The pressure gauge must permit 
reading to an accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion gauge must permit 
reading of total expansion to an accuracy of either 1 percent or 0.1 
cubic centimeter.
    (2) Pressure must be maintained for at least 30 seconds or 
sufficiently longer to assure complete expansion. Any internal pressure 
applied after heat-treatment and before the official test may not exceed 
90 percent of the test pressure. If, due to failure of test apparatus, 
the test pressure cannot be maintained, the test may be repeated at a 
pressure increased by 10 percent or 100 psig, whichever is lower.
    (3) Permanent volumetric expansion may not exceed 10 percent of the 
total volumetric expansion at test pressure.
    (4) Cylinders must be tested as follows:
    (i) At least one cylinder selected at random out of each lot of 200 
or less must be tested as described in paragraphs (i)(1), (i)(2), and 
(i)(3) of this section, to at least two times service pressure. If a 
selected cylinder fails, then two additional specimens must be selected 
at random from the same lot and subjected to the prescribed test. If 
either of these fails the test, then each cylinder in that lot must be 
so tested; and
    (ii) Each cylinder not tested as prescribed in paragraph (i)(4)(i) 
of this section must be examined under pressure of at least two times 
service pressure and must show no defect. A cylinder showing a defect 
must be rejected unless it may be requalified under paragraph (m) of 
this section.
    (j) Physical test. A physical test must be conducted to determine 
yield strength, tensile strength, elongation, and reduction of area of 
material, as follows:
    (1) The test is required on 2 specimens cut from one cylinder having 
passed the hydrostatic test, or part thereof heat-treated as required, 
taken at random out of each lot of 200 or less.
    (2) Specimens must conform to the following:
    (i) A gauge length of 8 inches with a width not over 1\1/2\ inches, 
a gauge length of 2 inches with a width not over 1\1/2\ inches, or a 
gauge length at least 24 times the thickness with a width not over 6 
times thickness is authorized when the cylinder wall is not over \3/16\ 
inch thick.
    (ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip ends, may not be flattened. 
Grip ends may be flattened to within one inch of each end of the reduced 
section.
    (iii) When size of cylinder does not permit securing straight 
specimens, the specimens may be taken in any location or direction and 
may be straightened or flattened cold, by pressure only, not by blows. 
When specimens are so taken and prepared, the inspector's report must 
show in connection with record of physical tests detailed information in 
regard to such specimens.
    (iv) Heating of a specimen for any purpose is not authorized.
    (3) The yield strength in tension must be the stress corresponding 
to a permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the gauge length. The following 
conditions apply:
    (i) The yield strength must be determined by either the ``offset'' 
method or the ``extension under load'' method as prescribed in ASTM E 8 
(incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).
    (ii) In using the ``extension under load'' method, the total strain 
(or ``extension under load''), corresponding to the stress at which the 
0.2 percent permanent strain occurs may be determined with sufficient 
accuracy by calculating the elastic extension of the gauge length under 
appropriate load and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the gauge length. 
Elastic extension calculations must be based on an elastic

[[Page 810]]

modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of controversy, the entire stress-
strain diagram must be plotted and the yield strength determined from 
the 0.2 percent offset.
    (iii) For the purpose of strain measurement, the initial strain 
reference must be set while the specimen is under a stress of 12,000 psi 
and the strain indicator reading being set at the calculated 
corresponding strain.
    (iv) Cross-head speed of the testing machine may not exceed \1/8\ 
inch per minute during yield strength determination.
    (k) Elongation. Physical test specimens must show at least a 40 
percent elongation for 2-inch gauge lengths or at least a 20 percent 
elongation in other cases. Except that these elongation percentages may 
be reduced numerically by 2 for 2-inch specimens and by 1 in other cases 
for each 7,500 psi increment of tensile strength above 50,000 psi to a 
maximum of four such increments.
    (l) Tests of welds. Welds must be tested as follows:
    (1) Tensile test. A specimen must be cut from one cylinder of each 
lot of 200 or less, or a welded test plate. The welded test plate must 
be of one of the heats in the lot of 200 or less which it represents, in 
the same condition and approximately the same thickness as the cylinder 
wall except that it may not be of a lesser thickness than that required 
for a quarter size Charpy impact specimen. The weld must be made by the 
same procedures and subjected to the same heat treatment as the major 
weld on the cylinder. The specimens must be taken across the major seam 
and must be prepared and tested in accordance with and must meet the 
requirements of CGA Pamphlet C-3 (incorporated by reference; see 
Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter). Should this specimen fail to meet the 
requirements, specimens may be taken from two additional cylinders or 
welded test plates from the same lot and tested. If either of the latter 
specimens fail to meet the requirements, the entire lot represented must 
be rejected.
    (2) Guided bend test. A root bend test specimen must be cut from the 
cylinder or a welded test plate, used for the tensile test specified in 
paragraph (l)(1) of this section. Specimens must be taken from across 
the major seam and must be prepared and tested in accordance with and 
must meet the requirements of CGA Pamphlet C-3 (incorporated by 
reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).
    (3) Alternate guided-bend test. This test may be used and must be as 
required by CGA Pamphlet C-3 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 
of this subchapter). The specimen must be bent until the elongation at 
the outer surface, adjacent to the root of the weld, between the lightly 
scribed gage lines-a to b, is at least 20 percent, except that this 
percentage may be reduced for steels having a tensile strength in excess 
of 50,000 psi, as provided in paragraph (k) of this section.
    (m) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treatment of rejected cylinders is 
authorized. Subsequent thereto, cylinders must pass all prescribed tests 
to be acceptable. Repair of welded seams by welding is authorized.
    (n) Markings. Markings must be stamped plainly and permanently in 
one of the following locations on the cylinder:
    (1) On shoulders and top heads not less than 0.087 inch thick.
    (2) On neck, valve boss, valve protection sleeve, or similar part 
permanently attached to top end of cylinder.
    (3) On a plate attached to the top of the cylinder or permanent part 
thereof: sufficient space must be left on the plate to provide for 
stamping at least six retest dates: the plate must be at least \1/16\ 
inch thick and must be attached by welding or by brazing at a 
temperature of at least 1100  deg.F, throughout all edges of the plate.
    (4) Variations in location of markings authorized only when 
necessitated by lack of space.

[Amdt. 178-114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as amended at 66 FR 45386, 
Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51653, Aug. 8, 2002]



Sec. 178.57  Specification 4L welded insulated cylinders.

    (a) Type, size, service pressure, and design service temperature. A 
DOT 4L cylinder is a fusion welded insulated cylinder with a water 
capacity (nominal) not over 1,000 pounds water capacity and a service 
pressure of at least 40 but

[[Page 811]]

not greater than 500 psig conforming to the following requirements:
    (1) For liquefied hydrogen service, the cylinders must be designed 
to stand on end, with the axis of the cylindrical portion vertical.
    (2) The design service temperature is the coldest temperature for 
which a cylinder is suitable. The required design service temperatures 
for each cryogenic liquid is as follows:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
             Cryogenic liquid                Design service temperature
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Argon.....................................  Minus 320  deg.F or colder.
Helium....................................  Minus 452  deg.F or colder.
Hydrogen..................................  Minus 42 3  deg.F or colder.
Neon......................................  Minus 411  deg.F or colder.
Nitrogen..................................  Minus 320  deg.F or colder.
Oxygen....................................  Minus 320  deg.F or colder.
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (b) Material. Material use in the construction of this specification 
must conform to the following:
    (1) Inner containment vessel (cylinder). Designations and limiting 
chemical compositions of steel authorized by this specification must be 
as shown in table 1 in paragraph (o) of this section.
    (2) Outer jacket. Steel or aluminum may be used subject to the 
requirements of paragraph (o)(2) of this section.
    (c) Identification of material. Material must be identified by any 
suitable method.
    (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be manufactured using equipment and 
processes adequate to ensure that each cylinder produced conforms to the 
requirements of this subpart and to the following requirements:
    (1) No defect is permitted that is likely to weaken the finished 
cylinder appreciably. A reasonably smooth and uniform surface finish is 
required. The shell portion must be a reasonably true cylinder.
    (2) The heads must be seamless, concave side to the pressure, 
hemispherical or ellipsoidal in shape with the major diameter not more 
than twice the minor diameter. Minimum thickness of heads may not be 
less than 90 percent of the required thickness of the sidewall. The 
heads must be reasonably true to shape, have no abrupt shape changes, 
and the skirts must be reasonably true to round.
    (3) The surface of the cylinder must be insulated. The insulating 
material must be fire resistant. The insulation on non-evacuated jackets 
must be covered with a steel jacket not less than 0.060-inch thick or an 
aluminum jacket not less than 0.070 inch thick, so constructed that 
moisture cannot come in contact with the insulating material. If a 
vacuum is maintained in the insulation space, the evacuated jacket must 
be designed for a minimum collapsing pressure of 30 psig differential 
whether made of steel or aluminum. The construction must be such that 
the total heat transfer, from the atmosphere at ambient temperature to 
the contents of the cylinder, will not exceed 0.0005 Btu per hour, per 
Fahrenheit degree differential in temperature, per pound of water 
capacity of the cylinder. For hydrogen, cryogenic liquid service, the 
total heat transfer, with a temperature differential of 520 Fahrenheit 
degrees, may not exceed that required to vent 30 SCF of hydrogen gas per 
hour.
    (4) For a cylinder having a design service temperature colder than 
minus 320  deg.F, a calculation of the maximum weight of contents must 
be made and that weight must be marked on the cylinder as prescribed in 
Sec. 178.35.
    (5) Welding procedures and operations must be qualified in 
accordance with CGA Pamphlet C-3 (incorporated by reference; see 
Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter). In addition, an impact test of the weld 
must be performed in accordance with paragraph (l) of this section as 
part of the qualification of each welding procedure and operator.
    (e) Welding. Welding of the cylinder must be as follows:
    (1) All seams of the cylinder must be fusion welded. A means must be 
provided for accomplishing complete penetration of the joint. Only butt 
or joggle butt joints for the cylinder seams are authorized. All joints 
in the cylinder must have reasonably true alignment.
    (2) All attachments to the sidewalls and heads of the cylinder must 
be by fusion welding and must be of a weldable material complying with 
the impact requirements of paragraph (l) of this section.
    (3) For welding the cylinder, each procedure and operator must be 
qualified in accordance with the sections of CGA Pamphlet C-3 
(incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter)

[[Page 812]]

that apply. In addition, impact tests of the weld must be performed in 
accordance with paragraph (l) of this section as part of the 
qualification of each welding procedure and operator.
    (4) Brazing, soldering and threading are permitted only for joints 
not made directly to the cylinder body. Threads must comply with the 
requirements of paragraph (h) of this section.
    (f) Wall thickness. The minimum wall thickness of the cylinder must 
be such that the calculated wall stress at the minimum required test 
pressure may not exceed the least value of the following:
    (1) 45,000 psi.
    (2) One-half of the minimum tensile strength across the welded seam 
determined in paragraph (l) of this section.
    (3) One-half of the minimum tensile strength of the base metal 
determined as required in paragraph (j) of this section.
    (4) The yield strength of the base metal determined as required in 
paragraph (l) of this section.
    (5) Further provided that wall stress for cylinders having 
longitudinal seams may not exceed 85 percent of the above value, 
whichever applies.
    (6) Calculation must be made by the following formula:

S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 - 
    d2)

where:

S = wall stress in pounds psi;
P = minimum test pressure prescribed for pressure test in psig;
D = outside diameter in inches;
d = inside diameter in inches.

    (g) Heat treatment. Heat treatment is not permitted.
    (h) Openings in cylinder. Openings in cylinders must conform to the 
following:
    (1) Openings are permitted in heads only. They must be circular and 
may not exceed 3 inches in diameter or one third of the cylinder 
diameter, whichever is less. Each opening in the cylinder must be 
provided with a fitting, boss or pad, either integral with, or securely 
attached to, the cylinder body by fusion welding. Attachments to a 
fitting, boss or pad may be made by welding, brazing, mechanical 
attachment, or threading.
    (2) Threads must comply with the following:
    (i) Threads must be clean-cut, even, without checks and cut to 
gauge.
    (ii) Taper threads to be of a length not less than that specified 
for NPT.
    (iii) Straight threads must have at least 4 engaged threads, tight 
fit and calculated shear strength at least 10 times the test pressure of 
the cylinder. Gaskets, which prevent leakage and are inert to the 
hazardous material, are required.
    (i) Pressure test. Each cylinder, before insulating and jacketing, 
must be examined under a pressure of at least 2 times the service 
pressure maintained for at least 30 seconds without evidence of leakage, 
visible distortion or other defect. The pressure gauge must permit 
reading to an accuracy of 1 percent.
    (j) Physical test. A physical test must be conducted to determine 
yield strength, tensile strength, and elongation as follows:
    (1) The test is required on 2 specimens selected from material of 
each heat and in the same condition as that in the completed cylinder.
    (2) Specimens must conform to the following:
    (i) A gauge length of 8 inches with a width not over 1\1/2\ inches, 
a gauge length of 2 inches with width not over 1\1/2\ inches, or a gauge 
length at least 24 times thickness with a width not over 6 times 
thickness (authorized when cylinder wall is not over \1/16\ inch thick).
    (ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip ends, may not be flattened. 
Grip ends may be flattened to within one inch of each end of the reduced 
section.
    (iii) When size of the cylinder does not permit securing straight 
specimens, the specimens may be taken in any location or direction and 
may be straightened or flattened cold by pressure only, not by blows. 
When specimens are so taken and prepared, the inspector's report must 
show in connection with record of physical tests detailed information in 
regard to such specimens.
    (iv) Heating of a specimen for any purpose is not authorized.
    (3) The yield strength in tension must be the stress corresponding 
to a permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the gauge length. The following 
conditions apply:

[[Page 813]]

    (i) The yield strength must be determined by either the ``offset'' 
method or the ``extension under load'' method as prescribed in ASTM E 8 
(incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).
    (ii) In using the ``extension under load'' method, the total strain 
(or ``extension under load''), corresponding to the stress at which the 
0.2 percent permanent strain occurs may be determined with sufficient 
accuracy by calculating the elastic expansion of the gauge length under 
appropriate load and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the gauge length. 
Elastic extension calculations must be based on the elastic modulus of 
the material used. In the event of controversy, the entire stress-strain 
diagram must be plotted and the yield strength determined from the 0.2 
percent offset.
    (iii) For the purpose of strain measurement, the initial strain 
reference must be set while the specimen is under a stress of 12,000 psi 
and the strain indicator reading being set at the calculated 
corresponding strain.
    (iv) Cross-head speed of the testing machine may not exceed \1/8\ 
inch per minute during yield strength determination.
    (k) Acceptable results for physical tests. Physical properties must 
meet the limits specified in paragraph (o)(1), table 1, of this section, 
for the particular steel in the annealed condition. The specimens must 
show at least a 20 percent elongation for a 2-inch gage length. Except 
that the percentage may be reduced numerically by 2 for each 7,500 psi 
increment of tensile strength above 100,000 psi to a maximum of 5 such 
increments. Yield strength and tensile strength must meet the 
requirements of paragraph (o)(1), table 1, of this section.
    (l) Tests of welds. Welds must be tested as follows:
    (1) Tensile test. A specimen must be cut from one cylinder of each 
lot of 200 or less, or welded test plate. The welded test plate must be 
of one of the heats in the lot of 200 or less which it represents, in 
the same condition and approximately the same thickness as the cylinder 
wall except that it may not be of a lesser thickness than that required 
for a quarter size Charpy impact specimen. The weld must be made by the 
same procedures and subjected to the same heat treatment as the major 
weld on the cylinder. The specimen must be taken across the major seam 
and must be prepared in accordance with and must meet the requirements 
of CGA Pamphlet C-3 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this 
subchapter). Should this specimen fail to meet the requirements, 
specimens may be taken from two additional cylinders or welded test 
plates from the same lot and tested. If either of the latter specimens 
fails to meet the requirements, the entire lot represented must be 
rejected.
    (2) Guided bend test. A ``root'' bend test specimen must be cut from 
the cylinder or welded test plate, used for the tensile test specified 
in paragraph (l)(1) of this section and from any other seam or 
equivalent welded test plate if the seam is welded by a procedure 
different from that used for the major seam. Specimens must be taken 
across the particular seam being tested and must be prepared and tested 
in accordance with and must meet the requirements of CGA Pamphlet C-3 
(incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).
    (3) Alternate guided-bend test. This test may be used and must be as 
specified in CGA Pamphlet C-3 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 
of this subchapter). The specimen must be bent until the elongation at 
the outer surface, adjacent to the root of the weld, between the lightly 
scribed gage lines a to b, is at least 20 percent, except that this 
percentage may be reduced for steels having a tensile strength in excess 
of 100,000 psig, as provided in paragraph (c) of this section.
    (4) Impact tests. One set of three impact test specimens (for each 
test) must be prepared and tested for determining the impact properties 
of the deposited weld metal--
    (i) As part of the qualification of the welding procedure.
    (ii) As part of the qualification of the operators.
    (iii) For each ``heat'' of welding rodor wire used.

[[Page 814]]

    (iv) For each 1,000 feet of weld made with the same heat of welding 
rod or wire.
    (v) All impact test specimens must be of the charpy type, keyhole or 
milled U-notch, and must conform in all respects to ASTM E 23 
(incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter). Each set 
of impact specimens must be taken across the weld and have the notch 
located in the weld metal. When the cylinder material thickness is 2.5 
mm or thicker, impact specimens must be cut from a cylinder or welded 
test plate used for the tensile or bend test specimens. The dimension 
along the axis of the notch must be reduced to the largest possible of 
10 mm, 7.5 mm, 5 mm or 2.5 mm, depending upon cylinder thickness. When 
the material in the cylinder or welded test plate is not of sufficient 
thickness to prepare 2.5 mm impact test specimens, 2.5 mm specimens must 
be prepared from a welded test plate made from \1/8\ inch thick material 
meeting the requirements specified in paragraph (o)(1), table 1, of this 
section and having a carbon analysis of .05 minimum, but not necessarily 
from one of the heats used in the lot of cylinders. The test piece must 
be welded by the same welding procedure as used on the particular 
cylinder seam being qualified and must be subjected to the same heat 
treatment.
    (vi) Impact test specimens must be cooled to the design service 
temperature. The apparatus for testing the specimens must conform to 
requirements of ASTM Standard E 23 (incorporated by reference; see 
Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter). The test piece, as well as the handling 
tongs, must be cooled for a length of time sufficient to reach the 
service temperature. The temperature of the cooling device must be 
maintained within a range of plus or minus 3  deg.F. The specimen must 
be quickly transferred from the cooling device to the anvil of the 
testing machine and broken within a time lapse of not more than six 
seconds.
    (vii) The impact properties of each set of impact specimens may not 
be less than the values in the following table:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                     Minimum
                                                      impact    Minimum
                                                      value      impact
                                                     required    value
                                                     for avg.  permitted
                 Size of specimen                    of each     on one
                                                      set of   only of a
                                                      three      set of
                                                    specimens    three
                                                    (ft.-lb.)  (ft.-lb.)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
10 mmx10 mm.......................................       15         10
10 mmx7.5 mm......................................       12.5        8.5
10 mmx5 mm........................................       10          7.0
10 mmx2.5 mm......................................        5          3.5
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (viii) When the average value of the three specimens equals or 
exceeds the minimum value permitted for a single specimen and the value 
for more than one specimen is below the required average value, or when 
the value for one specimen is below the minimum value permitted for a 
single specimen, a retest of three additional specimens must be made. 
The value of each of these retest specimens must equal or exceed the 
required average value. When an erratic result is caused by a defective 
specimen, or there is uncertainty in test procedure, a retest is 
authorized.
    (m) Radiographic examination. Cylinders must be subject to a 
radiographic examination as follows:
    (1) The techniques and acceptability of radiographic inspection must 
conform to the standards set forth in CGA Pamphlet C-3 (incorporated by 
reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).
    (2) One finished longitudinal seam must be selected at random from 
each lot of 100 or less successively produced and be radiographed 
throughout its entire length. Should the radiographic examination fail 
to meet the requirements of paragraph (m)(1) of this section, two 
additional seams of the same lot must be examined, and if either of 
these fail to meet the requirements of (m)(1) of this section, only 
those passing are acceptable.
    (n) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treatment of rejected cylinders is 
authorized. Subsequent thereto, cylinders must pass all prescribed tests 
to be acceptable. Welds may be repaired by suitable methods of fusion 
welding.
    (o) Authorized materials of construction. Authorized materials of 
construction are as follows:

[[Page 815]]

    (1) Inner containment vessel (cylinder). Electric furnace steel of 
uniform quality must be used. Chemical analysis must conform to ASTM A 
240/A 240M (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this 
subchapter), Type 304 stainless steel. Chemical analysis must conform to 
ASTM A240, Type 304 Stainless Steel. A heat of steel made under table 1 
and table 2 in this paragraph (o)(1) is acceptable, even though its 
check chemical analysis is slightly out of the specified range, if it is 
satisfactory in all other respects, provided the tolerances shown in 
table 3 in this paragraph (o)(1) are not exceeded. The following 
chemical analyses and physical properties are authorized:

                      Table 1--Authorized Materials
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                           Chemical analysis, limits in
              Designation                            percent
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Carbon \1\.............................  0.08 max.
Manganese..............................  2.00 max.
Phosphorus.............................  0.045 max.
Sulphur................................  0.030 max.
Silicon................................  1.00 max.
Nickel.................................  8.00-10.50.
Chromium...............................  18.00-20.00.
Molybdenum.............................  None.
Titanium...............................  None.
Columbium..............................  None.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ The carbon analysis must be reported to the nearest hundredth of one
  percent.


                      Table 2--Physical Properties
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                               Physical
                                                              properties
                                                              (annealed)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Tensile strength, p.s.i. (minimum)..........................    75,000
Yield strength, p.s.i. (minimum)............................    30,000
Elongation in 2 inches (minimum) percent....................        30.0
Elongation other permissible gauge lengths (minimum) percent        15.0
------------------------------------------------------------------------


                                       Table 3--Check Analysis Tolerances
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                                      Tolerance
                                                                                                      over the
                                                                                                       maximum
               Elements                             Limit or specified range (percent)                limit or
                                                                                                      under the
                                                                                                       minimum
                                                                                                        limit
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Carbon...............................  To 0.030, incl.............................................         0.005
                                       Over 0.30 to 0.20, incl....................................         0.01
Manganese............................  To 1.00 incl...............................................          .03
                                       Over 1.00 to 3.00, incl....................................         0.04
Phosphorus \1\.......................  To 0.040, incl.............................................         0.005
                                       Over 0.040 to 0.020 incl...................................         0.010
Sulphur..............................  To .40 incl................................................         0.005
Silicon..............................  To 1.00, incl..............................................         0.05
Nickel...............................  Over 5.00 to 10.00, incl...................................         0.10
                                       Over 10.00 to 20.00, incl..................................         0.15
Chromium.............................  Over 15.00 to 20.00, incl..................................         0.20
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Rephosphorized steels not subject to check analysis for phosphorus.

    (2) Outer jacket. (i) Nonflammable cryogenic liquids. Cylinders 
intended for use in the transportation of nonflammable cryogenic liquid 
must have an outer jacket made of steel or aluminum.
    (ii) Flammable cryogenic liquids. Cylinders intended for use in the 
transportation of flammable cryogenic liquid must have an outer jacket 
made of steel.
    (p) Markings. (1) Markings must be stamped plainly and permanently 
on shoulder or top head of jacket or on a permanently attached plate or 
head protective ring.
    (2) The letters ``ST'', followed by the design service temperature 
(for example, ST-423F), must be marked on cylinders having a design 
service temperature of colder than minus 320  deg.F only. Location to be 
just below the DOT mark.
    (3) The maximum weight of contents, in pounds (for example, ``Max. 
Content 51 ''), must be marked on cylinders having a design 
service temperature colder than minus 320  deg.F only. Location to be 
near symbol.
    (4) Special orientation instructions must be marked on the cylinder 
(for example, THIS END UP), if the cylinder is used in an orientation 
other

[[Page 816]]

than vertical with openings at the top of the cylinder.
    (5) If the jacket of the cylinder is constructed of aluminum, the 
letters ``AL'' must be marked after the service pressure marking. 
Example: DOT-4L150 AL.
    (6) Except for serial number and jacket material designation, each 
marking prescribed in this paragraph (p) must be duplicated on each 
cylinder by any suitable means.
    (q) Inspector's report. In addition to the information required by 
Sec. 178.35, the inspector's reports must contain information on:
    (1) The jacket material and insulation type;
    (2) The design service temperature

(  deg.F); and
    (3) The impact test results, on a lot basis.

[Amdt. 178-114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as amended at 66 FR 45386-
45388, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51653, Aug. 8, 2002]



Sec. 178.58  Specification 4DA welded steel cylinders for aircraft use.

    (a) Type, size, and service pressure. A DOT 4DA is a welded steel 
sphere (two seamless hemispheres) or a circumferentially welded cylinder 
(two seamless drawn shells) with a water capacity not over 100 pounds 
and a service pressure of at least 500 but not over 900 psig.
    (b) Steel. Open-hearth or electric steel of uniform quality must be 
used. A heat of steel made under table 1 in this paragraph (b), check 
chemical analysis of which is slightly out of the specified range, is 
acceptable, if satisfactory in all other respects, provided the 
tolerances shown in table 2 in this paragraph (b) are not exceeded 
except as approved by the Associate Administrator. The following 
chemical analyses are authorized:

                      Table 1--Authorized Materials
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                      4130                               Percent
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Carbon.........................................  0.28/0.33.
Manganese......................................  0.40/0.60.
Phosphorus.....................................  0.040 max.
Sulfur.........................................  0.040 max.
Silicon........................................  0.15/0.35.
Chromium.......................................  0.80/1.10.
Molybdenum.....................................  0.15/0.25.
------------------------------------------------------------------------


                                       Table 2--Check Analysis Tolerances
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                        Tolerance (percent) over
                                                                                          the maximum limit or
                                                                                         under the minimum limit
            Element                       Limit or maximum specified (percent)         -------------------------
                                                                                           Under         Over
                                                                                          minimum      maximum
                                                                                           limit        limit
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Carbon.........................  Over 0.15 to 0.40 incl...............................          .03          .04
Manganese......................  To 0.60 incl.........................................          .03          .03
Phosphorus\1\..................  All ranges...........................................  ...........          .01
Sulphur........................  All ranges...........................................  ...........          .01
Silicon........................  To 0.30 incl.........................................          .02          .03
                                 Over 0.30 to 1.00 incl...............................          .05          .05
Chromium.......................  To 0.90 incl.........................................          .03          .03
                                 Over 0.90 to 2.10 incl...............................          .05          .05
Molybdenum.....................  To 0.20 incl.........................................          .01          .01
                                 Over 0.20 to 0.40, incl..............................          .02          .02
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Rephosphorized steels not subject to check analysis for phosphorus.

    (c) Identification of material. Materials must be identified by any 
suitable method except that plates and billets for hot-drawn containers 
must be marked with the heat number.
    (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be manufactured in accordance with 
the following requirements:
    (1) By best appliances and methods. No defect is acceptable that is 
likely to

[[Page 817]]

weaken the finished container appreciably. A reasonably smooth and 
uniform surface finish is required. No abrupt change in wall thickness 
is permitted. Welding procedures and operators must be qualified in 
accordance with CGA Pamphlet C-3 (incorporated by reference; see 
Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).
    (2) All seams of the sphere or cylinders must be fusion welded. 
Seams must be of the butt or joggle butt type and means must be provided 
for accomplishing complete penetration of the joint.
    (e) Welding. Attachments to the container are authorized by fusion 
welding provided that such attachments are made of weldable steel, the 
carbon content of which may not exceed 0.25 percent except in the case 
of 4130 steel.
    (f) Wall thickness. The minimum wall thickness must be such that the 
wall stress at the minimum specified test pressure may not exceed 67 
percent of the minimum tensile strength of the steel as determined from 
the physical and burst tests required and may not be over 70,000 p.s.i. 
For any diameter container, the minimum wall thickness is 0.040 inch. 
Calculations must be made by the formulas in (f)(1) or (f)(2) of this 
section:
    (1) Calculation for a sphere must be made by the following formula:

S = PD / 4tE

Where:

S = wall stress in pounds psi;
P = test pressure prescribed for water jacket test, i.e., at least 2 
times service pressure, in psig;
D = outside diameter in inches;
t = minimum wall thickness in inches;
E = 0.85 (provides 85 percent weld efficiency factor which must be 
applied in the girth weld area and heat affected zones which zone must 
extend a distance of 6 times wall thickness from center line of weld);
E = 1.0 (for all other areas).

    (2) Calculation for a cylinder must be made by the following 
formula:

S = [P(1.3D 2 + 0.4d 2)] / (D 2 - d 
    2)

Where:

S = wall stress in pounds psi;
P = test pressure prescribed for water jacket test, i.e., at least 2 
times service pressure, in psig;
D = outside diameter in inches;
d = inside diameter in inches.

    (g) Heat treatment. The completed containers must be uniformly and 
properly heat-treated prior to tests. Heat-treatment of containers of 
the authorized analysis must be as follows:
    (1) All containers must be quenched by oil, or other suitable medium 
except as provided in paragraph (g)(4) of this section.
    (2) The steel temperature on quenching must be that recommended for 
the steel analysis, but may not exceed 1,750  deg.F.
    (3) The steel must be tempered at the temperature most suitable for 
the analysis except that in no case shall the tempering temperature be 
less than 1,000  deg.F.
    (4) The steel may be normalized at a temperature of 1,650  deg.F 
instead of being quenched, and containers so normalized need not be 
tempered.
    (5) All cylinders, if water quenched or quenched with a liquid 
producing a cooling rate in excess of 80 percent of the cooling rate of 
water, must be inspected by the magnetic particle or dye penetrant 
method to detect the presence of quenching cracks. Any cylinder found to 
have a quench crack must be rejected and may not be requalified.
    (h) Openings in container. Openings in the container must comply 
with the following requirements:
    (1) Each opening in the container must be provided with a fitting, 
boss, or pad of weldable steel securely attached to the container by 
fusion welding.
    (2) Attachments to a fitting, boss, or pad must be adequate to 
prevent leakage. Threads must comply with the following:
    (i) Threads must be clean cut, even, without checks, and tapped to 
gauge.
    (ii) Taper threads to be of length not less than as specified for 
American Standard taper pipe threads.
    (iii) Straight threads, having at least 4 engaged threads, to have 
tight fit and calculated shear strength at least 10 times the test 
pressure of the container; gaskets required, adequate to prevent 
leakage.
    (i) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder must successfully withstand a 
hydrostatic test as follows:
    (1) The test must be by water-jacket, or other suitable method, 
operated so

[[Page 818]]

as to obtain accurate data. The pressure gauge must permit reading to an 
accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion gauge must permit reading of total 
expansion to accuracy either of 1 percent or 0.1 cubic centimeter.
    (2) Pressure must be maintained for at least 30 seconds and 
sufficiently longer to ensure complete expansion. Any internal pressure 
applied after heat-treatment and previous to the official test may not 
exceed 90 percent of the test pressure. If, due to failure of the test 
apparatus, the test pressure cannot be maintained, the test may be 
repeated at a pressure increased by 10 percent or 100 psig, whichever is 
the lower.
    (3) Permanent volumetric expansion may not exceed 10 percent of 
total volumetric expansion at test pressure.
    (4) Each container must be tested to at least 2 times service 
pressure.
    (j) Burst test. One container taken at random out of 200 or less 
must be hydrostatically tested to destruction. The rupture pressure must 
be included as part of the inspector's report.
    (k) Flattening test. Spheres and cylinders must be subjected to a 
flattening test as follows:
    (1) Flattening test for spheres. One sphere taken at random out of 
each lot of 200 or less must be subjected to a flattening test as 
follows:
    (i) The test must be performed after the hydrostatic test.
    (ii) The test must be at the weld between the parallel steel plates 
on a press with a welded seam, at right angles to the plates. Any 
projecting appurtenances may be cut off (by mechanical means only) prior 
to crushing.
    (2) Flattening test for cylinders. One cylinder taken at random out 
of each lot of 200 or less, must be subjected to a flattening test as 
follows:
    (i) The test must be performed after the hydrostatic test.
    (ii) The test cylinder must be placed between wedge-shaped knife 
edges having a 60 deg. angle, rounded to a \1/2\-inch radius.
    (l) Radiographic inspection. Radiographic examinations is required 
on all welded joints which are subjected to internal pressure, except 
that at the discretion of the disinterested inspector, openings less 
than 25 percent of the sphere diameter need not be subjected to 
radiographic inspection. Evidence of any defects likely to seriously 
weaken the container must be cause for rejection.
    (m) Physical test and specimens for spheres and cylinders. Spheres 
and cylinders must be subjected to a physical test as follows:
    (1) A physical test for a sphere is required on 2 specimens cut from 
a flat representative sample plate of the same heat taken at random from 
the steel used to produce the sphere. This flat steel from which the 2 
specimens are to be cut must receive the same heat-treatment as the 
spheres themselves. Sample plates to be taken for each lot of 200 or 
less spheres.
    (2) Specimens for spheres have a gauge length of 2 inches with a 
width not over 1\1/2\ inches, or a gauge length at least 24 times 
thickness with a width not over 6 times thickness is authorized when 
wall of sphere is not over \3/16\ inch thick.
    (3) A physical test for cylinders is required on 2 specimens cut 
from 1 cylinder taken at random out of each lot of 200 or less.
    (4) Specimens for cylinder must conform to the following:
    (i) A gauge length of 8 inches with a width not over 1\1/2\ inches, 
a gauge length of 2 inches with a width not over 1\1/2\ inches, a gauge 
length at least 24 times thickness with a width not over 6 times 
thickness is authorized when a cylinder wall is not over \3/16\ inch 
thick.
    (ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip ends, may not be flattened. 
Grip ends may be flattened to within 1 inch of each end of the reduced 
section.
    (iii) Heating of a specimen for any purpose is not authorized.
    (5) The yield strength in tension must be the stress corresponding 
to a permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the gauge length. The following 
conditions apply:
    (i) The yield strength must be determined by either the ``offset'' 
method or the ``extension under load'' method as prescribed in ASTM E 8 
(incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).

[[Page 819]]

    (ii) In using the ``extension under load'' method, the total strain 
(or ``extension under load'') corresponding to the stress at which the 
0.2 percent permanent strain occurs may be determined with sufficient 
accuracy by calculating the elastic extension of the gauge length under 
appropriate load and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the gauge length. 
Elastic extension calculations must be based on an elastic modulus of 
30,000,000. In the event of controversy, the entire stress-strain 
diagram must be plotted and the yield strength determined from the 0.2 
percent offset.
    (iii) For the purpose of strain measurement, the initial strain must 
be set while the specimen is under a stress of 12,000 psi and the strain 
indicator reading being set at the calculated corresponding strain.
    (iv) Cross-head speed of the testing machine may not exceed \1/8\ 
inch per minute during yield strength determination.
    (n) Acceptable results for physical, flattening, and burst tests. 
The following are acceptable results of the physical, flattening and 
burst test:
    (1) Elongation must be at least 20 percent for a 2-inch gauge length 
or 10 percent in other cases.
    (2) Flattening is required to 50 percent of the original outside 
diameter without cracking.
    (3) Burst pressure must be at least 3 times service pressure.
    (o) Rejected containers. Reheat-treatment of rejected cylinders is 
authorized. Subsequent thereto, containers must pass all prescribed 
tests to be acceptable. Repair of welded seams by welding prior to 
reheat-treatment is authorized.
    (p) Marking. Markings on each container must be stamped plainly and 
permanently on a permanent attachment or on a metal nameplate 
permanently secured to the container by means other than soft solder.

[Amdt. 178-114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as amended at 66 FR 45386, 
45388, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51654, Aug. 8, 2002; 67 FR 16015, Sept. 27, 
2002]



Sec. 178.59  Specification 8 steel cylinders with porous fillings for acetylene.

    (a) Type and service pressure. A DOT 8 cylinder is a seamless 
cylinder with a service pressure of 250 psig. The following steel is 
authorized:
    (1) A longitudinal seam if forge lap welded;
    (2) Attachment of heads by welding or by brazing by dipping process; 
or
    (3) A welded circumferential body seam if the cylinder has no 
longitudinal seam.
    (b) Steel. Open-hearth, electric or basic oxygen process steel of 
uniform quality must be used. Content percent may not exceed the 
following: Carbon, 0.25; phosphorus, 0.045; sulphur, 0.050.
    (c) Identification of steel. Materials must be identified by any 
suitable method except that plates and billets for hot-drawn cylinders 
must be marked with the heat number.
    (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be manufactured using equipment and 
processes adequate to ensure that each cylinder produced conforms to the 
requirements of this subpart. No defect is acceptable that is likely to 
weaken the finished cylinder appreciably. A reasonably smooth and 
uniform surface finish is required. Welding procedures and operators 
must be qualified in accordance with CGA Pamphlet C-3 (incorporated by 
reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).
    (e) Exposed bottom welds. Exposed bottom welds on cylinders over 18 
inches long must be protected by footrings.
    (f) Heat treatment. Body and heads formed by drawing or pressing 
must be uniformly and properly heat treated prior to tests.
    (g) Openings. Openings in the cylinders must comply with the 
following:
    (1) Standard taper pipe threads are required;
    (2) Length may not be less than as specified for American Standard 
pipe threads; tapped to gauge; clean cut, even, and without checks.
    (h) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder must successfully withstand a 
hydrostatic test as follows:
    (1) The test must be by water-jacket, or other suitable method, 
operated so as to obtain accurate data. The pressure gauge must permit 
reading to an accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion

[[Page 820]]

gauge must permit reading of total expansion to an accuracy of either 1 
percent or 0.1 cubic centimeter.
    (2) Pressure must be maintained for at least 30 seconds and 
sufficiently longer to ensure complete expansion. Any internal pressure 
applied after heat-treatment and previous to the official test may not 
exceed 90 percent of the test pressure.
    (3) Permanent volumetric expansion may not exceed 10 percent of 
total volumetric expansion at test pressure.
    (4) One cylinder out of each lot of 200 or less must be 
hydrostatically tested to at least 750 psig. Cylinders not so tested 
must be examined under pressure of between 500 and 600 psig and show no 
defect. If hydrostatically tested cylinder fails, each cylinder in the 
lot may be hydrostatically tested and those passing are acceptable.
    (i) Leakage test. Cylinders with bottoms closed in by spinning must 
be subjected to a leakage test by setting the interior air or gas 
pressure to not less than the service pressure. Cylinders which leak 
must be rejected.
    (j) Physical test. A physical test must be conducted as follows:
    (1) The test is required on 2 specimens cut longitudinally from 1 
cylinder or part thereof taken at random out of each lot of 200 or less, 
after heat treatment.
    (2) Specimens must conform to a gauge length of 8 inches with a 
width not over 1\1/2\ inches, a gauge length of 2 inches with width not 
over 1\1/2\, or a gauge length at least 24 times thickness with a width 
not over 6 times thickness is authorized when a cylinder wall is not 
over \3/16\ inch thick.
    (3) The yield strength in tension must be the stress corresponding 
to a permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the gauge length. The following 
conditions apply:
    (i) The yield strength must be determined by either the ``offset'' 
method or the ``extension under load'' method as prescribed in ASTM E 8 
(incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).
    (ii) In using the ``extension under load'' method, the total strain 
(or ``extension under load'') corresponding to the stress at which the 
0.2 percent permanent strain occurs may be determined with sufficient 
accuracy by calculating the elastic extension of the gauge length under 
appropriate load and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the gauge length. 
Elastic extension calculations must be based on an elastic modulus of 
30,000,000. In the event of controversy, the entire stress-strain 
diagram must be plotted and the yield strength determined from the 0.2 
offset.
    (iii) For the purpose of strain measurement, the initial strain must 
be set while the specimen is under a stress of 12,000 psi and the strain 
indicator reading being set at the calculated corresponding strain.
    (iv) Cross-head speed of the testing machine may not exceed \1/8\ 
inch per minute during yield strength determination.
    (4) Yield strength may not exceed 73 percent of tensile strength. 
Elongation must be at least 40 percent in 2 inch or 20 percent in other 
cases.
    (k) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treatment of rejected cylinder is 
authorized. Subsequent thereto, cylinders must pass all prescribed tests 
to be acceptable. Repair by welding is authorized.
    (l) Porous filling. (1) Cylinders must be filled with a porous 
material in accordance with the following:
    (i) The porous material may not disintegrate or sag when wet with 
solvent or when subjected to normal service;
    (ii) The porous filling material must be uniform in quality and free 
of voids, except that a well drilled into the filling material beneath 
the valve is authorized if the well is filled with a material of such 
type that the functions of the filling material are not impaired;
    (iii) Overall shrinkage of the filling material is authorized if the 
total clearance between the cylinder shell and filling material, after 
solvent has been added, does not exceed \1/2\ of 1 percent of the 
respective diameter or length, but not to exceed \1/8\ inch, measured 
diametrically and longitudinally;
    (iv) The clearance may not impair the functions of the filling 
material;
    (v) The installed filling material must meet the requirements of CGA 
Pamphlet C-12; and

[[Page 821]]

    (vi) Porosity of filling material may not exceed 80 percent except 
that filling material with a porosity of up to 92 percent may be used 
when tested with satisfactory results in accordance with CGA Pamphlet C-
12.
    (2) When the porosity of each cylinder is not known, a cylinder 
taken at random from a lot of 200 or less must be tested for porosity. 
If the test cylinder fails, each cylinder in the lot may be tested 
individually and those cylinders that pass the test are acceptable.
    (3) For filling that is molded and dried before insertion in 
cylinders, porosity test may be made on a sample block taken at random 
from material to be used.
    (4) The porosity of the filling material must be determined. The 
amount of solvent at 70  deg.F for a cylinder:
    (i) Having shell volumetric capacity above 20 pounds water capacity 
(nominal) may not exceed the following:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                               Maximum
                                                               acetone
                                                               solvent
                 Percent porosity of filler                    percent
                                                                shell
                                                             capacity by
                                                                volume
------------------------------------------------------------------------
90 to 92...................................................         43.4
87 to 90...................................................         42.0
83 to 87...................................................         40.0
80 to 83...................................................         38.6
75 to 80...................................................         36.2
70 to 75...................................................         33.8
65 to 70...................................................         31.4
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (ii) Having volumetric capacity of 20 pounds or less water capacity 
(nominal), may not exceed the following:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                               Maximum
                                                               acetone
                                                               solvent
                 Percent porosity of filler                    percent
                                                                shell
                                                             capacity by
                                                                volume
------------------------------------------------------------------------
90 to 92...................................................         41.8
83 to 90...................................................         38.5
80 to 83...................................................         37.1
75 to 80...................................................         34.8
70 to 75...................................................         32.5
65 to 70...................................................         30.2
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (m) Tare weight. The tare weight is the combined weight of the 
cylinder proper, porous filling, valve, and solvent, without removable 
cap.
    (n) Duties of inspector. In addition to the requirements of 
Sec. 178.35, the inspector is required to--
    (1) Certify chemical analyses of steel used, signed by manufacturer 
thereof; also verify by, check analyses of samples taken from each heat 
or from 1 out of each lot of 200 or less, plates, shells, or tubes used.
    (2) Verify compliance of cylinder shells with all shell 
requirements; inspect inside before closing in both ends; verify heat 
treatment as proper; obtain all samples for all tests and for check 
analyses; witness all tests; verify threads by gauge; report volumetric 
capacity and minimum thickness of wall noted.
    (3) Prepare report on manufacture of steel shells in form prescribed 
in Sec. 178.35. Furnish one copy to manufacturer and three copies to the 
company that is to complete the cylinders.
    (4) Determine porosity of filling and tare weights; verify 
compliance of marking with prescribed requirements; obtain necessary 
copies of steel shell reports; and furnish complete reports required by 
this specification to the person who has completed the manufacture of 
the cylinders and, upon request, to the purchaser. The test reports must 
be retained by the inspector for fifteen years from the original test 
date of the cylinder.
    (o) Marking. (1) Marking on each cylinder must be stamped plainly 
and permanently on or near the shoulder, top head, neck or valve 
protection collar which is permanently attached to the cylinder and 
forming integral part thereof.
    (2) Tare weight of cylinder, in pounds and ounces, must be marked on 
the cylinder.
    (3) Cylinders, not completed, when delivered must each be marked for 
identification of each lot of 200 or less.

[Amdt. 178-114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as amended at 66 FR 45386, 
Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51654, Aug. 8, 2002; 67 FR 61016, Sept. 27, 2002]



Sec. 178.60  Specification 8AL steel cylinders with porous fillings for acetylene.

    (a) Type and service pressure. A DOT 8AL cylinder is a seamless 
steel cylinder with a service pressure of 250 psig. However, the 
attachment of heads by welding or by brazing by dipping process and a 
welded circumferential

[[Page 822]]

body seam is authorized. Longitudinal seams are not authorized.
    (b) Authorized steel. The authorized steel is as specified in table 
I of appendix A to this part.
    (c) Identification of steel. Material must be identified by any 
suitable method except that plates and billets for hot-drawn cylinders 
must be marked with heat number.
    (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be manufactured using equipment and 
processes adequate to ensure that each cylinder produced conforms to the 
requirements of this subpart. No defect is permitted that is likely to 
weaken the finished cylinder appreciably. A reasonably smooth and 
uniform surface finish is required. Welding procedures and operators 
must be qualified in accordance with CGA Pamphlet C-3 (incorporated by 
reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).
    (e) Footrings. Exposed bottom welds on cylinders over 18 inches long 
must be protected by footrings.
    (f) Welding or brazing. Welding or brazing for any purpose 
whatsoever is prohibited except as follows:
    (1) The attachment to the tops or bottoms of cylinders of neckrings, 
footrings, handlers, bosses, pads, and valve protecting rings is 
authorized provided that such attachments and the portion of the 
container to which they are attached are made of weldable steel, the 
carbon content of which may not exceed 0.25 percent.
    (2) Heat treatment is not required after welding or brazing weldable 
low carbon parts to attachments, specified in paragraph (f)(1) of this 
section, of similar material which have been previously welded or brazed 
to the top or bottom of cylinders and properly heat treated, provided 
such subsequent welding or brazing does not produce a temperature in 
excess of 400  deg.F in any part of the top or bottom material.
    (g) Wall thickness; wall stress. The wall thickness/wall stress of 
the cylinder must conform to the following:
    (1) The calculated wall stress at 750 psi may not exceed 35,000 psi, 
or one-half of the minimum ultimate strength of the steel as determined 
in paragraph (l) of this section, whichever value is the smaller. The 
measured wall thickness may not include galvanizing or other protective 
coating.
    (i) Calculation of wall stress must be made by the formula:

S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 - 
    d2)

Where:

S = wall stress in pounds psi;
P = 750 psig (minimum test pressure);
D = outside diameter in inches;
d = inside diameter in inches.

    (ii) Either D or d must be calculated from the relation D = d + 2t, 
where t = minimum wall thickness.
    (2) Cylinders with a wall thickness less than 0.100 inch, the ratio 
of straight side wall length to outside diameter may not exceed 3.5.
    (3) For cylinders having outside diameter over 5 inches, the minimum 
wall thickness must be 0.087 inch.
    (h) Heat treatment. Each cylinder must be uniformly and properly 
heat treated, prior to tests, by any suitable method in excess of 1100 
deg.F. Heat treatment must be accomplished after all forming and welding 
operations, except that when brazed joints are used, heat treatment must 
follow any forming and welding operations but may be done before, 
during, or after the brazing operations. Liquid quenching is not 
authorized.
    (i) Openings. Standard taper pipe threads required in all openings. 
The length of the opening may not be less than as specified for American 
Standard pipe threads; tapped to gauge; clean cut, even, and without 
checks.
    (j) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder must successfully withstand a 
hydrostatic test as follows:
    (1) The test must be by water-jacket, or other suitable method, 
operated so as to obtain accurate data. The pressure gauge must permit 
reading to an accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion gauge must permit 
reading of total expansion to an accuracy of either 1 percent or 0.1 
cubic centimeter.
    (2) Pressure must be maintained for at least 30 seconds and 
sufficiently longer to ensure complete expansion. Any internal pressure 
applied after heat-treatment and previous to the official test may not 
exceed 90 percent of the test pressure.

[[Page 823]]

    (3) Permanent volumetric expansion may not exceed 10 percent of 
total volumetric expansion at test pressure.
    (4) One cylinder out of each lot of 200 or less must be 
hydrostatically tested to at least 750 psig. Cylinders not so tested 
must be examined under pressure of between 500 and 600 psig and show no 
defect. If a hydrostatically tested cylinder fails, each cylinder in the 
lot may be hydrostatically tested and those passing are acceptable.
    (k) Leakage test. Cylinders with bottoms closed in by spinning must 
be leakage tested by setting the interior air or gas pressure at not 
less than the service pressure. Any cylinder that leaks must be 
rejected.
    (l) Physical test. A physical test must be conducted as follows;
    (1) The test is required on 2 specimens cut longitudinally from 1 
cylinder or part thereof taken at random out of each lot of 200 or less, 
after heat treatment.
    (2) Specimens must conform to a gauge length of 8 inches with a 
width not over 1\1/2\ inches, a gauge length 2 inches with a width not 
over 1\1/2\ inches, or a gauge length at least 24 times thickness with a 
width not over 6 times thickness is authorized when a cylinder wall is 
not over \3/16\ inch thick.
    (3) The yield strength in tension must be the stress corresponding 
to a permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the gauge length. The following 
conditions apply:
    (i) The yield strength must be determined by either the ``offset'' 
method or the ``extension under load'' method as prescribed in ASTM E 8 
(incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).
    (ii) In using the ``extension under load'' method, the total strain 
(or ``extension under load'') corresponding to the stress at which the 
0.2 percent permanent strain occurs may be determined with sufficient 
accuracy by calculating the elastic extension of the gauge length under 
appropriate load and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the gauge length. 
Elastic extension calculations must be based on an elastic modulus of 
30,000,000. In the event of controversy, the entire stress-strain 
diagram must be plotted and the yield strength determined from the 0.2 
offset.
    (iii) For the purpose of strain measurement, the initial strain must 
be set while the specimen is under a stress of 12,000 psi, the strain 
indicator reading being set at the calculated corresponding strain.
    (iv) Cross-head speed of the testing machine may not exceed \1/8\ 
inch per minute during yield strength determination.
    (m) Elongation. Physical test specimens must show at least a 40 
percent elongation for a 2 inch gauge length or at least a 20 percent 
elongation in other cases. Except that these elongation percentages may 
be reduced numerically by 2 for 2 inch specimens and 1 in other cases 
for each 7,500 psi increment of tensile strength above 50,000 psi to a 
maximum of four such increments.
    (n) Weld tests. Specimens taken across the circumferentially welded 
seam must be cut from one cylinder taken at random from each lot of 200 
or less cylinders after heat treatment and must pass satisfactorily the 
following tests:
    (1) Tensile test. A specimen must be cut from one cylinder of each 
lot of 200 or less, or welded test plate. The specimen must be taken 
from across the major seam and must be prepared and tested in accordance 
with and must meet the requirements of CGA Pamphlet C-3 (incorporated by 
reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter). Should this specimen fail 
to meet the requirements, specimens may be taken from two additional 
cylinders or welded test plates from the same lot and tested. If either 
of the latter specimens fail to meet the requirements, the entire lot 
represented must be rejected.
    (2) Guided bend test. A root bend test specimen must be cut from the 
cylinder or welded test plate, used for the tensile test specified in 
paragraph (n)(1) of this section. Specimens must be prepared and tested 
in accordance with and must meet the requirements of CGA Pamphlet C-3 
(incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).
    (3) Alternate guided-bend test. This test may be used and must be as 
required by CGA Pamphlet C-3 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 
of this

[[Page 824]]

subchapter). The specimen must be bent until the elongation at the outer 
surface, adjacent to the root of the weld, between the lightly scribed 
gage lines-a to b, must be at least 20 percent, except that this 
percentage may be reduced for steels having a tensile strength in excess 
of 50,000 psi, as provided in paragraph (m) of this section.
    (o) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treatment of rejected cylinders is 
authorized. Subsequent thereto, cylinders must pass all prescribed tests 
to be acceptable. Repair by welding is authorized.
    (p) Porous filling. (1) Cylinders must be filled with a porous 
material in accordance with the following:
    (i) The porous material may not disintegrate or sag when wet with 
solvent or when subjected to normal service;
    (ii) The filling material must be uniform in quality and free of 
voids, except that a well drilled into the filling material beneath the 
valve is authorized if the well is filled with a material of such type 
that the functions of the filling material are not impaired;
    (iii) Overall shrinkage of the filling material is authorized if the 
total clearance between the cylinder shell and filling material, after 
solvent has been added, does not exceed \1/2\ of 1 percent of the 
respective diameter or length but not to exceed \1/8\ inch, measured 
diametrically and longitudinally;
    (iv) The clearance may not impair the functions of the filling 
material;
    (v) The installed filling material must meet the requirements of CGA 
Pamphlet C-12; and
    (vi) Porosity of filling material may not exceed 80 percent except 
that filling material with a porosity of up to 92 percent may be used 
when tested with satisfactory results in accordance with CGA Pamphlet C-
12.
    (2) When the porosity of each cylinder is not known, a cylinder 
taken at random from a lot of 200 or less must be tested for porosity. 
If the test cylinder fails, each cylinder in the lot may be tested 
individually and those cylinders that pass the test are acceptable.
    (3) For filling that is molded and dried before insertion in 
cylinders, porosity test may be made on sample block taken at random 
from material to be used.
    (4) The porosity of the filling material must be determined; the 
amount of solvent at 70  deg.F for a cylinder:
    (i) Having shell volumetric capacity above 20 pounds water capacity 
(nominal) may not exceed the following:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                 Maximum
                                                                 acetone
                                                                 solvent
                                                                 percent
                  Percent porosity of filler                      shell
                                                                capacity
                                                                   by
                                                                 volume
------------------------------------------------------------------------
90 to 92......................................................      43.4
87 to 90......................................................      42.0
83 to 87......................................................      40.0
80 to 83......................................................      38.6
75 to 80......................................................      36.2
70 to 75......................................................      33.8
65 to 70......................................................      31.4
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (ii) Having volumetric capacity of 20 pounds or less water capacity 
(nominal), may not exceed the following:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                 Maximum
                                                                 acetone
                                                                 solvent
                                                                 percent
                  Percent porosity of filler                      shell
                                                                capacity
                                                                   by
                                                                 volume
------------------------------------------------------------------------
90 to 92......................................................      41.8
83 to 90......................................................      38.5
80 to 83......................................................      37.1
75 to 80......................................................      34.8
70 to 75......................................................      32.5
65 to 70......................................................      30.2
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (q) Tare weight. The tare weight is the combined weight of the 
cylinder proper, porous filling, valve, and solvent, but without 
removable cap.
    (r) Duties of inspector. In addition to the requirements of 
Sec. 178.35, the inspector shall--
    (1) Certify chemical analyses of steel used, signed by manufacturer 
thereof; also verify by check analyses, of samples taken from each heat 
or from 1 out of each lot of 200 or less plates, shells, or tubes used.
    (2) Verify compliance of cylinder shells with all shell 
requirements, inspect inside before closing in both ends, verify heat 
treatment as proper; obtain all samples for all tests and for check 
analyses, witness all tests; verify

[[Page 825]]

threads by gauge, report volumetric capacity and minimum thickness of 
wall noted.
    (3) Report percentage of each specified alloying element in the 
steel. Prepare report on manufacture of steel shells in form prescribed 
in Sec. 178.35. Furnish one copy to manufacturer and three copies to the 
company that is to complete the cylinders.
    (4) Determine porosity of filling and tare weights; verify 
compliance of marking with prescribed requirements; obtain necessary 
copies of steel shell reports prescribed in paragraph (b) of this 
section; and furnish complete test reports required by this 
specification to the person who has completed the manufacturer of the 
cylinders and, upon request, to the purchaser. The test reports must be 
retained by the inspector for fifteen years from the original test date 
of the cylinder.
    (s) Marking. (1) Tare weight of cylinder, in pounds and ounces, must 
be marked on the cylinder.
    (2) Cylinders, not completed, when delivered must each be marked for 
identification of each lot of 200 or less.
    (3) Markings must be stamped plainly and permanently in locations in 
accordance with the following:
    (i) On shoulders and top heads not less than 0.087 inch thick; or
    (ii) On neck, valve boss, valve protection sleeve, or similar part 
permanently attached to the top end of cylinder; or
    (iii) On a plate of ferrous material attached to the top of the 
cylinder or permanent part thereof; the plate must be at least \1/16\ 
inch thick, and must be attached by welding, or by brazing at a 
temperature of at least 1,100  deg.F throughout all edges of the plate. 
Sufficient space must be left on the plate to provide for stamping at 
least four (4) retest dates.

[Amdt. 178-114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as amended at 66 FR 45386, 
45388, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51654, Aug. 8, 2002]



Sec. 178.61  Specification 4BW welded steel cylinders with electric-arc welded longitudinal seam.

    (a) Type, size and service pressure. A DOT 4BW cylinder is a welded 
type steel cylinder with a longitudinal electric-arc welded seam, a 
water capacity (nominal) not over 1,000 pounds and a service pressure at 
least 225 and not over 500 psig gauge. Cylinders closed in by spinning 
process are not authorized.
    (b) Authorized steel. Steel used in the construction of the cylinder 
must conform to the following:
    (1) The body of the cylinder must be constructed of steel conforming 
to the limits specified in table 1 of appendix A to this part.
    (2) Material for heads must meet the requirements of paragraph (a) 
of this section or be open hearth, electric or basic oxygen carbon steel 
of uniform quality. Content percent may not exceed the following: Carbon 
0.25, Manganese 0.60, Phosphorus 0.045, Sulfur 0.050. Heads must be 
hemispherical or ellipsoidal in shape with a maximum ratio of 2.1. If 
low carbon steel is used, the thickness of such heads must be determined 
by using a maximum wall stress of 24,000 p.s.i. in the formula described 
in paragraph (f)(4) of this section.
    (c) Identification of material. Material must be identified by any 
suitable method.
    (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be manufactured using equipment and 
processes adequate to ensure that each cylinder produced conforms to the 
requirements of this subpart and the following:
    (1) No defect is permitted that is likely to weaken the finished 
cylinder appreciably. A reasonably smooth and uniform surface is 
required. Exposed bottom welds on cylinders over 18 inches long must be 
protected by footrings. Minimum thickness of heads may not be less than 
90 percent of the required thickness of the sidewall. Heads must be 
concave to pressure.
    (2) Circumferential seams must be by electric-arc welding. Joints 
must be butt with one member offset (joggle butt) or lap with minimum 
overlap of at least four times nominal sheet thickness.
    (3) Longitudinal seams in shells must conform to the following:
    (i) Longitudinal electric-arc welded seams must be of the butt 
welded type. Welds must be made by a machine process including automatic 
feed and welding guidance mechanisms. Longitudinal seams must have 
complete

[[Page 826]]

joint penetration, and must be free from undercuts, overlaps or abrupt 
ridges or valleys. Misalignment of mating butt edges may not exceed \1/
6\ of nominal sheet thickness or \1/32\ inch whichever is less. All 
joints with nominal sheet thickness up to and including \1/8\ inch must 
be tightly butted. When nominal sheet thickness is greater than \1/8\ 
inch, the joint must be gapped with maximum distance equal to one-half 
the nominal sheet thickness or \1/32\ inch whichever is less. Joint 
design, preparation and fit-up must be such that requirements of this 
paragraph (d) are satisfied.
    (ii) Maximum joint efficiency must be 1.0 when each seam is 
radiographed completely. Maximum joint efficiency must be 0.90 when one 
cylinder from each lot of 50 consecutively welded cylinders is spot 
radiographed. In addition, one out of the first five cylinders welded 
following a shut down of welding operations exceeding four hours must be 
spot radiographed. Spot radiographs, when required, must be made of a 
finished welded cylinder and must include the girth weld for 2 inches in 
both directions from the intersection of the longitudinal and girth 
welds and include at least 6 inches of the longitudinal weld. Maximum 
joint efficacy of 0.75 must be permissible without radiography.
    (4) Welding procedures and operators must be qualified in accordance 
with CGA Pamphlet C-3 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this 
subchapter).
    (e) Welding of attachments. The attachment to the tops and bottoms 
only of cylinders by welding of neckrings, footrings, handles, bosses, 
pads and valve protection rings is authorized provided that such 
attachments and the portion of the container to which they are attached 
are made of weldable steel, the carbon content of which may not exceed 
0.25 percent.
    (f) Wall thickness. For outside diameters over 6 inches the minimum 
wall thickness must be 0.078 inch. For a cylinder with a wall thickness 
less than 0.100 inch, the ratio of tangential length to outside diameter 
may not exceed 4 to1 (4:1). In any case the minimum wall thickness must 
be such that the wall stress calculated by the formula listed in 
paragraph (f)(4) of this section may not exceed the lesser value of any 
of the following:
    (1) The value referenced in paragraph (b) of this section for the 
particular material under consideration.
    (2) One-half of the minimum tensile strength of the material 
determined as required in paragraph (j) of this section.
    (3) 35,000 psi.
    (4) Stress must be calculated by the following formula:

S = [2P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / [E(D2 - 
    d2)]

where:

S = wall stress, psi;
P = service pressure, psig;
D = outside diameter, inches;
d = inside diameter, inches;
E = joint efficiency of the longitudinal seam (from paragraph (d) of 
this section).

    (g) Heat treatment. Each cylinder must be uniformly and properly 
heat treated prior to test by the applicable method referenced in 
paragraph (b) of this section. Heat treatment must be accomplished after 
all forming and welding operations. Heat treatment is not required after 
welding or brazing of weldable low carbon parts to attachments of 
similar material which have been previously welded to the top or bottom 
of cylinders and properly heat treated, provided such subsequent welding 
or brazing does not produce a temperature in excess of 400  deg.F in any 
part of the top or bottom material.
    (h) Openings in cylinders. Openings in the cylinder must conform to 
the following:
    (1) All openings must be in the heads or bases.
    (2) Openings in cylinders must be provided with adequate fittings, 
bosses, or pads, integral with or securely attached to the cylinder by 
welding.
    (3) Threads must comply with the following:
    (i) Threads must be clean cut and to gauge.
    (ii) Taper threads must be of length not less than as specified for 
American Standard Taper Pipe threads.
    (iii) Straight threads, having at least 4 engaged threads, to have 
tight fit and calculated shear strength at least 10 times the test 
pressure of the cylinder; gaskets required, adequate to prevent leakage.

[[Page 827]]

    (4) Closure of fittings, boss or pads must be adequate to prevent 
leakage.
    (i) Hydrostatic test. Cylinders must withstand a hydrostatic test, 
as follows:
    (1) The test must be by water-jacket, or other suitable method, 
operated so as to obtain accurate data. The pressure gauge must permit 
readings to an accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion gauge must permit 
readings of total volumetric expansion to an accuracy either of 1 
percent or 0.1 cubic centimeter.
    (2) Pressure must be maintained for at least 30 seconds and 
sufficiently longer to ensure complete expansion. Any internal pressure 
applied after heat treatment and previous to the official test may not 
exceed 90 percent of the test pressure.
    (3) Permanent volumetric expansion may not exceed 10 percent of the 
total volumetric expansion at test pressure.
    (4) Cylinders must be tested as follows:
    (i) At least 1 cylinder selected at random out of each lot of 200 or 
less must be tested as outlined in paragraphs (i)(1), (i)(2), and (i)(3) 
of this section to at least two times service pressure.
    (ii) All cylinders not tested as outlined in paragraph (i)(4)(i) of 
this section must be examined under pressure of at least two times 
service pressure and show no defect.
    (5) One finished cylinder selected at random out of each lot of 500 
or less successively produced must be hydrostatically tested to 4 times 
service pressure without bursting.
    (j) Physical tests. Cylinders must be subjected to a physical test 
as follows:
    (1) Specimens must be taken from one cylinder after heat treatment 
and chosen at random from each lot of 200 or less, as follows:
    (i) Body specimen. One specimen must be taken longitudinally from 
the body section at least 90 degrees away from the weld.
    (ii) Head specimen. One specimen must be taken from either head on a 
cylinder when both heads are made of the same material. However, if the 
two heads are made of differing materials, a specimen must be taken from 
each head.
    (iii) If due to welded attachments on the top head there is 
insufficient surface from which to take a specimen, it may be taken from 
a representative head of the same heat treatment as the test cylinder.
    (2) Specimens must conform to the following:
    (i) A gauge length of 8 inches with a width not over 1\1/2\ inches, 
a gauge length of 2 inches with a width not over 1\1/2\ inches, or a 
gauge length at least 24 times thickness with a width not over 6 times 
thickness is authorized when a cylinder wall is not over \3/16\ inch 
thick.
    (ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip ends, may not be flattened. 
Grip ends may be flattened to within 1 inch of each end of the reduced 
section.
    (iii) When size of the cylinder does not permit securing straight 
specimens, the specimens may be taken in any location or direction and 
may be straightened or flattened cold, by pressure only, not by blows 
when specimens are so taken and prepared, the inspector's report must 
show in connection with record of physical tests detailed information in 
regard to such specimens.
    (iv) Heating of a specimen for any purpose is not authorized.
    (3) The yield strength in tension must be the stress corresponding 
to a permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the gauge length. The following 
conditions apply:
    (i) The yield strength must be determined by either the ``off-set'' 
method or the ``extension under load'' method as prescribed in ASTM E 8 
(incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).
    (ii) In using the ``extension under load'' method, the total strain 
(or ``extension under load''), corresponding to the stress at which the 
0.2-percent permanent strain occurs may be determined with sufficient 
accuracy by calculating the elastic extension of the gauge length under 
appropriate load and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the gauge length. 
Elastic extension calculations must be based on an elastic modulus of 
30,000,000. In the event of controversy, the entire stress-strain 
diagram must be plotted and the yield

[[Page 828]]

strength determined from the 0.2-percent offset.
    (iii) For the purpose of strain measurement, the initial strain 
reference must be set while the specimen is under a stress of 12,000 psi 
and the strain indicator reading being set at the calculated 
corresponding strain.
    (iv) Cross-head speed of the testing machine may not exceed \1/8\ 
inch per minute during yield strength determination.
    (k) Elongation. Physical test specimens must show at least a 40 
percent elongation for a 2-inch gauge length or at least a 20 percent 
elongation in other cases. Except that these elongation percentages may 
be reduced numerically by 2 for 2-inch specimens and by 1 in other cases 
for each 7,500 psi increment of tensile strength above 50,000 psi to a 
maximum of four increments.
    (l) Tests of welds. Welds must be subjected to the following tests:
    (1) Tensile test. A specimen must be cut from one cylinder of each 
lot of 200 or less. The specimen must be taken from across the 
longitudinal seam and must be prepared and tested in accordance with and 
must meet the requirements of CGA Pamphlet C-3 (incorporated by 
reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).
    (2) Guided bend test. A root test specimen must be cut from the 
cylinder used for the tensile test specified in paragraph (l)(1) of this 
section. Specimens must be taken from across the longitudinal seam and 
must be prepared and tested in accordance with and must meet the 
requirements of CGA Pamphlet C-3 (incorporated by reference; see 
Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).
    (3) Alternate guided bend test. This test may be used and must be as 
required by CGA Pamphlet C-3 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 
of this subchapter). The specimen must be bent until the elongation at 
the outer surface, adjacent to the root of the weld, between the lightly 
scribed gauge lines a to b, must be at least 20 percent, except that 
this percentage may be reduced for steels having a tensile strength in 
excess of 50,000 psi, as provided in paragraph (k) of this section.
    (m) Radiographic examination. Welds of the cylinders must be 
subjected to a radiographic examination as follows:
    (1) Radiographic inspection must conform to the techniques and 
acceptability criteria set forth in CGA Pamphlet C-3 (incorporated by 
reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter). When fluoroscopic 
inspection is used, permanent film records need not be retained.
    (2) Should spot radiographic examination fail to meet the 
requirements of paragraph (m)(1) of this section, two additional welds 
from the same lot of 50 cylinders or less must be examined, and if 
either of these fail to meet the requirements, each cylinder must be 
examined as previously outlined; only those passing are acceptable.
    (n) Rejected cylinders. (1) Unless otherwise stated, if a sample 
cylinder or specimen taken from a lot of cylinders fails the prescribed 
test, then two additional specimens must be selected from the same lot 
and subjected to the prescribed test. If either of these fails the test, 
then the entire lot must be rejected.
    (2) Reheat treatment of rejected cylinders is authorized. Subsequent 
thereto, cylinders must pass all prescribed tests to be acceptable. 
Repair of welded seams by welding is authorized provided that all 
defective metal is cut away and the joint is rewelded as prescribed for 
original welded joints.
    (o) Markings. Markings must be stamped plainly and permanently in 
any of the following locations on the cylinder:
    (1) On shoulders and top heads when they are not less than 0.087-
inch thick.
    (2) On a metal plate attached to the top of the cylinder or 
permanent part thereof; sufficient space must be left on the plate to 
provide for stamping at least six retest dates; the plate must be at 
least \1/16\-inch thick and must be attached by welding, or by brazing. 
The brazing rod is to melt at a temperature of 1100  deg.F Welding or 
brazing must be along all the edges of the plate.
    (3) On the neck, valve boss, valve protection sleeve, or similar 
part permanently attached to the top of the cylinder.
    (4) On the footring permanently attached to the cylinder, provided 
the water capacity of the cylinder does not exceed 25 pounds.
    (p) Inspector's report. In addition to the information required by 
Sec. 178.35, the

[[Page 829]]

inspector's report must indicate the type and amount of radiography.

[Amdt. 178-114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as amended at 64 FR 51919, 
Sept. 27, 1999; 66 FR 45386, 45388, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51654, Aug. 6, 
2002; 67 FR 16016, Sept. 27, 2002]



Sec. 178.65  Specification 39 non-reusable (non-refillable) cylinders.

    (a) Type, size, service pressure, and test pressure. A DOT 39 
cylinder is a seamless, welded, or brazed cylinder with a service 
pressure not to exceed 80 percent of the test pressure. Spherical 
pressure vessels are authorized and covered by references to cylinders 
in this specification.
    (1) Size limitation. Maximum water capacity may not exceed: (i) 55 
pounds (1,526 cubic inches) for a service pressure of 500 p.s.i.g. or 
less, and (ii) 10 pounds (277 cubic inches) for a service pressure in 
excess of 500 p.s.i.g.
    (2) Test pressure. The minimum test pressure is the maximum pressure 
of contents at 130  deg.F or 180 p.s.i.g. whichever is greater.
    (3) Pressure of contents. The term ``pressure of contents'' as used 
in this specification means the total pressure of all the materials to 
be shipped in the cylinder.
    (b) Material; steel or aluminum. The cylinder must be constructed of 
either steel or aluminum conforming to the following requirements:
    (1) Steel. (i) The steel analysis must conform to the following:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                        Ladle     Check
                                                      analysis  analysis
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Carbon, maximum percent.............................      0.12      0.15
Phosphorus, maximum percent.........................       .04       .05
Sulfur, maximum percent.............................       .05       .06
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (ii) For a cylinder made of seamless steel tubing with integrally 
formed ends, hot drawn, and finished, content percent for the following 
may not exceed: Carbon, 0.55; phosphorous, 0.045; sulfur, 0.050.
    (iii) For non-heat treated welded steel cylinders, adequately killed 
deep drawing quality steel is required.
    (iv) Longitudinal or helical welded cylinders are not authorized for 
service pressures in excess of 500 p.s.i.g.
    (2) Aluminum. Aluminum is not authorized for service pressures in 
excess of 500 p.s.i.g. The analysis of the aluminum must conform to the 
Aluminum Association standard for alloys 1060, 1100, 1170, 3003, 5052, 
5086, 5154, 6061, and 6063 as specified in its publication entitled 
``Aluminum Standards and Data''.
    (3) Material with seams, cracks, laminations, or other injurious 
defects not permitted.
    (4) Material used must be identified by any suitable method.
    (c) Manufacture. (1) General manufacturing requirements are as 
follows:
    (i) The surface finish must be uniform and reasonably smooth.
    (ii) Inside surfaces must be clean, dry, and free of loose 
particles.
    (iii) No defect of any kind is permitted if it is likely to weaken a 
finished cylinder.
    (2) Requirements for seams:
    (i) Brazing is not authorized on aluminum cylinders.
    (ii) Brazing material must have a melting point of not lower than 
1,000  deg.F.
    (iii) Brazed seams must be assembled with proper fit to ensure 
complete penetration of the brazing material throughout the brazed 
joint.
    (iv) Minimum width of brazed joints must be at least four times the 
thickness of the shell wall.
    (v) Brazed seams must have design strength equal to or greater than 
1.5 times the minimum strength of the shell wall.
    (vi) Welded seams must be properly aligned and welded by a method 
that provides clean, uniform joints with adequate penetration.
    (vii) Welded joints must have a strength equal to or greater than 
the minimum strength of the shell material in the finished cylinder.
    (3) Attachments to the cylinder are permitted by any means which 
will not be detrimental to the integrity of the cylinder. Welding or 
brazing of attachments to the cylinder must be completed prior to all 
pressure tests.
    (4) Welding procedures and operators must be qualified in accordance 
with CGA Pamphlet C-3 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this 
subchapter).
    (d) Wall thickness. The minimum wall thickness must be such that the 
wall stress at test pressure does not exceed the yield strength of the 
material of the finished cylinder wall. Calculations

[[Page 830]]

must be made by the following formulas:
    (1) Calculation of the stress for cylinders must be made by the 
following formula:

S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 - 
    d2)

Where:

S = Wall stress, in psi;
P = Test pressure in psig;
D = Outside diameter, in inches;
d = Inside diameter, in inches.

    (2) Calculation of the stress for spheres must be made by the 
following formula:

S = PD / 4t

Where:

S = Wall stress, in psi;
P = Test pressure i psig;
D = Outside diameter, in inches;
t = Minimum wall thickness, in inches.

    (e) Openings and attachments. Openings and attachments must conform 
to the following:
    (1) Openings and attachments are permitted on heads only.
    (2) All openings and their reinforcements must be within an 
imaginary circle, concentric to the axis of the cylinder. The diameter 
of the circle may not exceed 80 percent of the outside diameter of the 
cylinder. The plane of the circle must be parallel to the plane of a 
circumferential weld and normal to the long axis of the cylinder.
    (3) Unless a head has adequate thickness, each opening must be 
reinforced by a securely attached fitting, boss, pad, collar, or other 
suitable means.
    (4) Material used for welded openings and attachments must be of 
weldable quality and compatible with the material of the cylinder.
    (f) Pressure tests. (1) Each cylinder must be tested at an internal 
pressure of at least the test pressure and must be held at that pressure 
for at least 30 seconds.
    (i) The leakage test must be conducted by submersion under water or 
by some other method that will be equally sensitive.
    (ii) If the cylinder leaks, evidences visible distortion, or any 
other defect, while under test, it must be rejected (see paragraph (h) 
of this section).
    (2) One cylinder taken from the beginning of each lot, and one from 
each 1,000 or less successively produced within the lot thereafter, must 
be hydrostatically tested to destruction. The entire lot must be 
rejected (see paragraph (h) of this section) if:
    (i) A failure occurs at a gage pressure less than 2.0 times the test 
pressure;
    (ii) A failure initiates in a braze or a weld or the heat affected 
zone thereof;
    (iii) A failure is other than in the sidewall of a cylinder 
longitudinal with its long axis; or
    (iv) In a sphere, a failure occurs in any opening, reinforcement, or 
at a point of attachment.
    (3) A ``lot'' is defined as the quantity of cylinders successively 
produced per production shift (not exceeding 10 hours) having identical 
size, design, construction, material, heat treatment, finish, and 
quality.
    (g) Flattening test. One cylinder must be taken from the beginning 
of production of each lot (as defined in paragraph (f)(3) of this 
section) and subjected to a flattening test as follows:
    (1) The flattening test must be made on a cylinder that has been 
tested at test pressure.
    (2) A ring taken from a cylinder may be flattened as an alternative 
to a test on a complete cylinder. The test ring may not include the heat 
affected zone or any weld. However, for a sphere, the test ring may 
include the circumferential weld if it is located at a 45 degree angle 
to the ring, 5 degrees.
    (3) The flattening must be between 60 degrees included-angle, wedge 
shaped knife edges, rounded to a 0.5 inch radius.
    (4) Cylinders and test rings may not crack when flattened so that 
their outer surfaces are not more than six times wall thickness apart 
when made of steel or not more than ten times wall thickness apart when 
made of aluminum.
    (5) If any cylinder or ring cracks when subjected to the specified 
flattening test, the lot of cylinders represented by the test must be 
rejected (see paragraph (h) of this section).
    (h) Rejected cylinders. Rejected cylinders must conform to the 
following requirements:

[[Page 831]]

    (1) If the cause for rejection of a lot is determinable, and if by 
test or inspection defective cylinders are eliminated from the lot, the 
remaining cylinders must be qualified as a new lot under paragraphs (f) 
and (g) of this section.
    (2) Repairs to welds are permitted. Following repair, a cylinder 
must pass the pressure test specified in paragraph (f) of this section.
    (3) If a cylinder made from seamless steel tubing fails the 
flattening test described in paragraph (g) of this section, suitable 
uniform heat treatment must be used on each cylinder in the lot. All 
prescribed tests must be performed subsequent to this heat treatment.
    (i) Markings. (1) The markings required by this section must be 
durable and waterproof. The requirements of Sec. 178.35(h) do not apply 
to this section.
    (2) Required markings are as follows:
    (i) DOT-39.
    (ii) NRC.
    (iii) The service pressure.
    (iv) The test pressure.
    (v) The registration number (M****) of the manufacturer.
    (vi) The lot number.
    (vii) The date of manufacture if the lot number does not establish 
the date of manufacture.
    (viii) With one of the following statements:
    (A) For cylinders manufactured prior to October 1, 1996: ``Federal 
law forbids transportation if refilled-penalty up to $25,000 fine and 5 
years imprisonment (49 U.S.C. 1809)'' or ``Federal law forbids 
transportation if refilled-penalty up to $500,000 fine and 5 years 
imprisonment (49 U.S.C. 5124).''
    (B) For cylinders manufactured on or after October 1, 1996: 
``Federal law forbids transportation if refilled-penalty up to $500,000 
fine and 5 years imprisonment (49 U.S.C. 5124).''
    (3) The markings required by paragraphs (i)(2)(i) through (i)(2)(v) 
of this section must be in numbers and letters at least \1/8\ inch high 
and displayed sequentially. For example:

DOT-39 NRC 250/500 M1001.

    (4) No person may mark any cylinder with the specification 
identification ``DOT-39'' unless it was manufactured in compliance with 
the requirements of this section and its manufacturer has a registration 
number (M****) from the Associate Administrator.

[Amdt. 178-114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as amended at 65 FR 58631, 
Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45389, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51654, Aug. 8, 2002]



Sec. 178.68  Specification 4E welded aluminum cylinders.

    (a) Type, size and service pressure. A DOT 4E cylinder is a welded 
aluminum cylinder with a water capacity (nominal) of not over 1,000 
pounds and a service pressure of at least 225 to not over 500 psig. The 
cylinder must be constructed of not more than two seamless drawn shells 
with no more than one circumferential weld. The circumferential weld may 
not be closer to the point of tangency of the cylindrical portion with 
the shoulder than 20 times the cylinder wall thickness. Cylinders or 
shells closed in by spinning process and cylinders with longitudinal 
seams are not authorized.
    (b) Authorized material. The cylinder must be constructed of 
aluminum of uniform quality. The following chemical analyses are 
authorized:

                      Table 1--Authorized Materials
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                            Chemical analysis--limits in
                Designation                       percent 5154 \1\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Iron plus silicon.........................  0.45 maximum.
Copper....................................  0.10 maximum.
Manganese.................................  0.10 maximum.
Magnesium.................................  3.10/3.90.
Chromium..................................  0.15/0.35.
Zinc......................................  0.20 maximum.
Titanium..................................  0.20 maximum.
Others, each..............................  0.05 maximum.
Others, total.............................  0.15 maximum.
Aluminum..................................  remainder.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Analysis must regularly be made only for the elements specifically
  mentioned in this table. If, however, the presence of other elements
  is indicated in the course of routine analysis, further analysis
  should be made to determine conformance with the limits specified for
  other elements.

    (c) Identification. Material must be identified by any suitable 
method that will identify the alloy and manufacturer's lot number.
    (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be manufactured using equipment and 
processes adequate to ensure that each cylinder produced conforms to the 
requirements of this subpart. No defect is permitted that is likely to 
weaken the finished cylinder appreciably. A reasonably smooth and 
uniform surface

[[Page 832]]

finish is required. All welding must be by the gas shielded arc process.
    (e) Welding. The attachment to the tops and bottoms only of 
cylinders by welding of neckrings or flanges, footrings, handles, bosses 
and pads and valve protection rings is authorized. However, such 
attachments and the portion of the cylinder to which it is attached must 
be made of weldable aluminum alloys.
    (f) Wall thickness. The wall thickness of the cylinder must conform 
to the following:
    (1) The minimum wall thickness of the cylinder must be 0.140 inch. 
In any case, the minimum wall thickness must be such that calculated 
wall stress at twice service pressure may not exceed the lesser value of 
either of the following:
    (i) 20,000 psi.
    (ii) One-half of the minimum tensile strength of the material as 
required in paragraph (j) of this section.
    (2) Calculation must be made by the following formula:

S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 - 
    d2)

Where:

S = wall stress in psi;
P = minimum test pressure prescribed for water jacket test;
D = outside diameter in inches;
d = inside diameter in inches.

    (3) Minimum thickness of heads and bottoms may not be less than the 
minimum required thickness of the side wall.
    (g) Opening in cylinder. Openings in cylinders must conform to the 
following:
    (1) All openings must be in the heads or bases.
    (2) Each opening in cylinders, except those for safety devices, must 
be provided with a fitting, boss, or pad, securely attached to cylinder 
by welding by inert gas shielded arc process or by threads. If threads 
are used, they must comply with the following:
    (i) Threads must be clean-cut, even, without checks and cut to 
gauge.
    (ii) Taper threads to be of length not less than as specified for 
American Standard taper pipe threads.
    (iii) Straight threads, having at least 4 engaged threads, to have 
tight fit and calculated shear strength at least 10 times the test 
pressure of the cylinder; gaskets required, adequate to prevent leakage.
    (3) Closure of a fitting, boss, or pad must be adequate to prevent 
leakage.
    (h) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder must successfully withstand a 
hydrostatic test, as follows:
    (1) The test must be by water jacket, or other suitable method, 
operated so as to obtain accurate data. The pressure gauge must permit 
reading to an accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion gauge must permit a 
reading of the total expansion to an accuracy either of 1 percent or 0.1 
cubic centimeter.
    (2) Pressure of 2 times service pressure must be maintained for at 
least 30 seconds and sufficiently longer to insure complete expansion. 
Any internal pressure applied previous to the official test may not 
exceed 90 percent of the test pressure. If, due to failure of the test 
apparatus, the test pressure cannot be maintained, the test may be 
repeated at a pressure increased by 10 percent over the pressure 
otherwise specified.
    (3) Permanent volumetric expansion may not exceed 12 percent of 
total volumetric expansion at test pressure.
    (4) Cylinders having a calculated wall stress of 18,000 psi or less 
at test pressure may be tested as follows:
    (i) At least one cylinder selected at random out of each lot of 200 
or less must be tested in accordance with paragraphs (h)(1), (h)(2), and 
(h)(3) of this section.
    (ii) All cylinders not tested as provided in paragraph (h)(4)(i) of 
this section must be examined under pressure of at least 2 times service 
pressure and show no defect.
    (5) One finished cylinder selected at random out of each lot of 
1,000 or less must be hydrostatically tested to 4 times the service 
pressure without bursting. Inability to meet this requirement must 
result in rejection of the lot.
    (i) Flattening test. After hydrostatic testing, a flattening test is 
required on one section of a cylinder, taken at random out of each lot 
of 200 or less as follows:
    (1) If the weld is not at midlength of the cylinder, the test 
section must be

[[Page 833]]

no less in width than 30 times the cylinder wall thickness. The weld 
must be in the center of the section. Weld reinforcement must be removed 
by machining or grinding so that the weld is flush with the exterior of 
the parent metal. There must be no evidence of cracking in the sample 
when it is flattened between flat plates to no more than 6 times the 
wall thickness.
    (2) If the weld is at midlength of the cylinder, the test may be 
made as specified in paragraph (i)(1)(i) of this section or must be made 
between wedge shaped knife edges (60 deg. angle) rounded to a \1/2\ inch 
radius. There must be no evidence of cracking in the sample when it is 
flattened to no more than 6 times the wall thickness.
    (j) Physical test. A physical test must be conducted to determine 
yield strength, tensile strength, elongation, and reduction of area of 
material as follows:
    (1) The test is required on 2 specimens cut from one cylinder or 
part thereof taken at random out of each lot of 200 or less.
    (2) Specimens must conform to the following:
    (i) A gauge length of 8 inches with a width not over 1\1/2\ inches, 
a gauge length of 2 inches with a width not over 1\1/2\ inches.
    (ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip ends, may not be flattened. 
Grip ends may be flattened to within 1 inch of each end of the reduced 
section.
    (iii) When size of cylinder does not permit securing straight 
specimens, the specimens may be taken in any location or direction and 
may be straightened or flattened cold, by pressure only, not by blows; 
when specimens are so taken and prepared, the inspector's report must 
show in connection with record of physical test detailed information in 
regard to such specimens.
    (iv) Heating of a specimen for any purpose is not authorized.
    (3) The yield strength in tension must be the stress corresponding 
to a permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the gauge length. The following 
conditions apply:
    (i) The yield strength must be determined by the ``offset'' method 
as prescribed in ASTM E 8 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of 
this subchapter).
    (ii) Cross-head speed of the testing machine may not exceed \1/8\ 
inch per minute during yield strength determination.
    (k) Acceptable results for physical tests. An acceptable result of 
the physical test requires an elongation to at least 7 percent and yield 
strength not over 80 percent of tensile strength.
    (l) Weld tests. Welds of the cylinder are required to successfully 
pass the following tests:
    (1) Reduced section tensile test. A specimen must be cut from the 
cylinder used for the physical tests specified in paragraph (j) of this 
section. The specimen must be taken from across the seam, edges must be 
parallel for a distance of approximately 2 inches on either side of the 
weld. The specimen must be fractured in tension. The apparent breaking 
stress calculated on the minimum wall thickness must be at least equal 
to 2 times the stress calculated under paragraph (f)(2) of this section, 
and in addition must have an actual breaking stress of at least 30,000 
psi. Should this specimen fail to meet the requirements, specimens may 
be taken from 2 additional cylinders from the same lot and tested. If 
either of the latter specimens fails to meet requirements, the entire 
lot represented must be rejected.
    (2) Guided bend test. A bend test specimen must be cut from the 
cylinder used for the physical tests specified in paragraph (j) of this 
section. Specimen must be taken across the seam, must be 1\1/2\ inches 
wide, edges must be parallel and rounded with a file, and back-up strip, 
if used, must be removed by machining. The specimen must be bent to 
refusal in the guided bend test jig illustrated in paragraph 6.10 of CGA 
Pamphlet C-3 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this 
subchapter). The root of the weld (inside surface of the cylinder) must 
be located away from the ram of the jig. No specimen must show a crack 
or other open defect exceeding \1/8\ inch in any direction upon 
completion of the test. Should this specimen fail to meet the 
requirements, specimens may be taken from each of 2 additional cylinders 
from the

[[Page 834]]

same lot and tested. If either of the latter specimens fail to meet 
requirements, the entire lot represented must be rejected.
    (m) Rejected cylinders. Repair of welded seams is authorized. 
Acceptable cylinders must pass all prescribed tests.
    (n) Inspector's report. In addition to the information required by 
Sec. 178.35, the record of chemical analyses must also include 
applicable information on iron, titanium, zinc, and magnesium used in 
the construction of the cylinder.

[Amdt. 178-114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as amended at 62 FR 51561, 
Oct. 1, 1997; 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51654, Aug. 8, 2002]

  Appendix A to Subpart C of Part 178--Illustrations: Cylinder Tensile 
                                 Sample

    The following figures illustrate the recommended locations for test 
specimens taken from welded cylinders:


[[Page 835]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR08AU02.013


[[Page 836]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR08AU02.014


[[Page 837]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR08AU02.015


[[Page 838]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR08AU02.016


[[Page 839]]


[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR08AU02.017

[67 FR 51654, Aug. 8, 2002]

[[Page 840]]

Subparts D-G [Reserved]



              Subpart H--Specifications for Portable Tanks

    Source: 29 FR 18972, Dec. 29, 1964, unless otherwise noted. 
Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967.



Sec. 178.245  Specification 51; steel portable tanks.



Sec. 178.245-1  Requirements for design and construction.

    (a) Tanks must be seamless or welded steel construction or 
combination of both and have a water capacity in excess of 454 kg (1,000 
pounds). Tanks must be designed, constructed, certified and stamped in 
accordance with the ASME Code.
    (b) Tanks must be postweld heat treated and radiographed as 
prescribed in the ASME Code except that each tank constructed in 
accordance with part UHT of the ASME Code must be postweld heat treated. 
Where postweld heat treatment is required, the tank must be treated as a 
unit after completion of all the welds in and/or to the shell and heads. 
The method must be as prescribed in the ASME Code. Welded attachments to 
pads may be made after postweld heat treatment is made. A tank used for 
anhydrous ammonia must be postweld heat treated. The postweld heat 
treatment must be as prescribed in the ASME Code, but in no event at 
less than 1050  deg.F tank metal temperature. Additionally, tanks 
constructed in accordance with part UHT of the ASME Code must conform to 
the following requirements:
    (1) Welding procedure and welder performance tests must be made 
annually in accordance with section IX of the ASME Code. In addition to 
the essential variables named therein, the following must be considered 
to be essential variables: number of passes, thickness of plate, heat 
input per pass, and manufacturer's identification of rod and flux. The 
number of passes, thickness of plate and heat input per pass may not 
vary more than 25 percent from the procedure qualification. Records of 
the qualification must be retained for at least 5 years by the tank 
manufacturer and made available to duly identified representatives of 
the Department of Transportation or the owner of the tank.
    (2) Impact tests must be made on a lot basis. A lot is defined as 
100 tons or less of the same heat and having a thickness variation no 
greater than plus or minus 25 percent. The minimum impact required for 
full-sized specimens shall be 20 foot-pounds (or 10 foot-pounds for 
half-sized specimens) at 0  deg.F Charpy V-Notch in both the 
longitudinal and transverse direction. If the lot test does not pass 
this requirement, individual plates may be accepted if they individually 
meet this impact requirement.
    (c) Except as provided in paragraph (d) of this section, all 
openings in the tank shall be grouped in one location, either at the top 
of the tank or at one end of the tank.
    (d) The following openings may be installed at locations other than 
on the top or end of the tank:
    (1) The openings for liquid level gauging devices, pressure gauges, 
or for safety devices, may be installed separately at the other location 
or in the side of the shell;
    (2) One plugged opening of 2-inch National Pipe Thread or less 
provided for maintenance purposes may be located elsewhere;
    (3) An opening of 3-inch National Pipe Size or less may be provided 
at another location, when necessary, to facilitate installation of 
condensing coils; or
    (4) Filling and discharge connections may be installed below the 
normal liquid level of the tank if the tank design conforms to the 
following requirements:
    (i) The tank must be permanently mounted in a full framework for 
containerized transport. For each tank design, a prototype tank, must 
fulfill the requirements of parts 450 through 453 of this title for 
compliance with the requirements of Annex II of the International 
Convention for Safe Containers.
    (ii) Each filling and discharge connection must be equipped with an 
internal self-closing stop-valve capable of closing within 30 seconds of 
actuation. Each internal self-closing stop-valve must be protected by a 
shear section or

[[Page 841]]

sacrificial device located outboard of the valve. The shear section or 
sacrificial device must break at no more than 70 percent of the load 
that would cause failure of the internal self-closing stop- valve.
    (iii) Each internal self-closing stop-valve must be provided with 
remote means of automatic closure, both thermal and mechanical. The 
thermal means of automatic closure must actuate at a temperature of not 
over 250  deg.F.
    (e) Each uninsulated tank used for the transportation of compressed 
gas, as defined in Sec. 173.300 of this subchapter, must have an 
exterior surface finish that is significantly reflective, such as a 
light reflecting color if painted, or a bright reflective metal or other 
material if unpainted.

[Amdt. 178-117, 61 FR 50627, Sept. 26, 1996]



Sec. 178.245-2  Material.

    (a) All material used for the construction of the tank and 
appurtenances shall be suitable for use with the commodity to be 
transported therein.
    (b) A material of thickness less than \3/16\ inch shall not be used 
for the shells and heads.



Sec. 178.245-3  Design pressure.

    (a) The design pressure of a tank authorized under this 
specification shall be not less than the vapor pressure of the commodity 
contained therein at 115  deg.F., or as prescribed for a particular 
commodity by part 173 of this chapter, except that in no case shall the 
design pressure of any container be less than 100 psig or more than 500 
psig. When corrosion factor is prescribed by these regulations, the wall 
thickness of the tank calculated in accordance with the ``Code'' (see 
Sec. 178.245-1(a)) shall be increased by 20 percent or 0.10 inch, 
whichever is less.

    Note 1: The term design pressure as used in this specification is 
identical to the term MAWP as used in the ``Code'' (see Sec. 178.245-
1(a)).

    (b) [Reserved]

[29 FR 18972, Dec. 29, 1964; Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, 
as amended by 66 FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.245-4  Tank mountings.

    (a) Tanks shall be designed and fabricated with mountings to provide 
a secure base in transit. ``Skids'' or similar devices shall be deemed 
to comply with this requirement.
    (b) All tank mountings such as skids, fastenings, brackets, cradles, 
lifting lugs, etc., intended to carry loadings shall be permanently 
secured to tanks in accordance with the requirements of the Code under 
which the tanks were fabricated and shall be designed to withstand 
static loadings in any direction equal to twice the weight of the tank 
and attachments when filled with the lading using a safety factor of not 
less than four, based on the ultimate strength of the material to be 
used. The specific gravity used in determining the static loadings shall 
be shown on the marking required by Sec. 178.245-6(a) and on the report 
required by Sec. 178.245-7(a).
    (c) Lifting lugs or hold-down lugs may be added to either the tank 
or tank mountings. If lifting lugs and hold-down lugs are added directly 
to the tank, they shall be secured to doubling plates welded to the tank 
and located at points of support, except that lifting lugs or hold-down 
lugs with integral bases serving as doubling plates may be welded 
directly to the tank. Each lifting lug and hold-down lug shall be 
designed to withstand static loadings in any direction equal to twice 
the weight of the tank and attachments when filled with the lading using 
a safety factor of not less than four, based on the ultimate strength of 
the material to be used.
    (d) All tank mountings shall be designed so as to prevent the 
concentration of excessive loads on the tank shell.
    (e) A DOT 51 portable tank that meets the definition of 
``container'' in Sec. 450.3(a)(2) of this title must meet the 
requirements of parts 450 through 453 of this title, in addition to the 
requirements of this subchapter.

[29 FR 18972, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, 
as amended by Amdt. 178-117, 61 FR 50628, Sept. 26, 1996; 64 FR 51919, 
Sept. 27, 1999]

[[Page 842]]



Sec. 178.245-5  Protection of valves and accessories.

    (a) All valves, fittings, accessories, safety devices, gaging 
devices, and the like shall be adequately protected against mechanical 
damage.
    (b) The protective device or housing shall conform to the 
requirements under which the tanks are fabricated with respect to design 
and construction, and shall be designed to withstand static loadings in 
any direction equal to twice the weight of the tank and attachments when 
filled with the lading using a safety factor of not less than four, 
based on the ultimate strength of the material to be used.
    (c) Requirements concerning types of valves, retesting, and 
qualification of portable tanks contained in Secs. 173.32 and 173.315 of 
this chapter must be observed.

[29 FR 18972, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, 
as amended by Amdt. 178-104, 59 FR 49135, Sept. 26, 1994]



Sec. 178.245-6  Name plate.

    (a) In addition to the markings required by the Code (see 
Sec. 178.245-1(a)) under which tanks were constructed, they shall have 
permanently affixed, in close proximity to the ASME ``U'' stamp 
certification, a metal plate. This plate shall be permanently affixed by 
means of soldering, brazing, or welding around its complete perimeter. 
Neither the plate itself nor the means of attachment to the tank shall 
be subject to destructive attack by the contents of tank. Upon such 
plate shall be plainly marked by stamping, embossing, or other means of 
forming letters into or onto the metal plate itself the following 
information in characters at least \1/8\-inch high:

Manufacturer's name_____________________________________________________
Serial No. ------ Owner's serial No.____________________________________
D.O.T. Specification No.________________________________________________
Water capacity (pounds)_________________________________________________
Tare weight (pounds)____________________________________________________
Design pressure (psig)__________________________________________________
Design specific gravity_________________________________________________
Original test date______________________________________________________
Tank retested at ------ (psig) on:______________________________________

    (b) All tank outlets and inlets, except safety relief valves, shall 
be marked to designate whether they communicate with vapor or liquid 
when the tank is filled to the maximum permitted filling density.

[29 FR 18972, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, 
and amended by Amdt. 178-67, 46 FR 49906, Oct. 8, 1981; Amdt. 178-117, 
61 FR 50628, Sept. 26, 1996]



Sec. 178.245-7  Report.

    (a) A copy of the manufacturer's data report required by the Code 
(See Sec. 178.245-1(a)) under which the tank is fabricated shall be 
furnished to the owner for each new tank.
    (b) [Reserved]

[Amdt. 178-76, 48 FR 28102, June 20, 1983]



Secs. 178.251--178.253-5  [Reserved]



Sec. 178.255  Specification 60; steel portable tanks.



Sec. 178.255-1  General requirements.

    (a) Tanks must be of fusion welded construction, cylindrical in 
shape with seamless heads concave to the pressure. Tank shells may be of 
seamless construction.
    (b) Tanks must be designed and constructed in accordance with and 
fulfill all the requirements of the ASME Code.
    (c) Tanks including all permanent attachments must be postweld heat 
treated as a unit.
    (d) Requirements concerning types of valves, retesting, and 
qualification of portable tanks contained in Secs. 173.32 and 173.315 of 
this chapter must be observed.

[29 FR 18972, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, 
and amended by Amdt. 178-7, 34 FR 18250, Nov. 14, 1969]



Sec. 178.255-2  Material.

    (a) Material used in the tank must be steel of good weldable quality 
and conform with the requirements of the ASME Code.
    (b) The minimum thickness of metal, exclusive of lining material, 
for shell and heads of tanks shall be as follows:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                Minimum
                        Tank capacity                          thickness
                                                                (inch)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Not more than 1,200 gallons.................................       \1/4\
Over 1,200 to 1,800 gallons.................................      \5/16\
Over 1,800 gallons..........................................       \3/8\
------------------------------------------------------------------------


[[Page 843]]


[29 FR 18972, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, 
and amended by Amdt. 178-7, 34 FR 18250, Nov. 14, 1969]



Sec. 178.255-3  Expansion domes.

    (a) Expansion domes, if applied, must have a minimum capacity of one 
percent of the combined capacity of the tank and dome.
    (b) [Reserved]



Sec. 178.255-4  Closures for manholes and domes.

    (a) The manhole cover shall be designed to provide a secure closure 
of the manhole. All covers, not hinged to the tanks, shall be attached 
to the outside of the dome by at least \1/8\ inch chain or its 
equivalent. Closures shall be made tight against leakage of vapor and 
liquid by use of gaskets of suitable material.
    (b) [Reserved]



Sec. 178.255-5  Bottom discharge outlets.

    (a) Bottom discharge outlets prohibited, except on tanks used for 
shipments of sludge acid and alkaline corrosive liquids.
    (b) If installed, bottom outlets or bottom washout chambers shall be 
of metal not subject to rapid deterioration by the lading, and each 
shall be provided with a valve or plug at its upper end and liquid-tight 
closure at it lower end. Each valve or plug shall be designed to insure 
against unseating due to stresses or shocks incident to transportation. 
Bottom outlets shall be adequately protected against handling damage and 
outlet equipment must not extend to within less than one inch of the 
bottom bearing surface of the skids or tank mounting.

[29 FR 18972, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, 
as amended by Amdt. 178-104, 59 FR 49135, Sept. 26, 1994]



Sec. 178.255-6  Loading and unloading accessories.

    (a) When installed, gauging, loading and air inlet devices, 
including their valves, shall be provided with adequate means for their 
secure closure; and means shall also be provided for the closing of pipe 
connections of valves.
    (b) Interior heater coils, if installed, must be of extra heavy pipe 
and so constructed that breaking off of exterior connections will not 
cause leakage of tanks.



Sec. 178.255-7  Protection of valves and accessories.

    (a) All valves, fittings, accessories, safety devices, gauging 
devices, and the like shall be adequately protected against mechanical 
damage by a housing closed with a cover plate.
    (b) Protective housing shall comply with the requirements under 
which the tanks are fabricated with respect to design and construction, 
and shall be designed with a minimum factor of safety of four to 
withstand loadings in any direction equal to two times the weight of the 
tank and attachments when filled with water.



Sec. 178.255-8  Safety devices.

    (a) See Sec. 173.315(i) of this subchapter.
    (b) [Reserved]

[Amdt. 178-83, 50 FR 11066, Mar. 19, 1985]



Sec. 178.255-9  Compartments.

    (a) When the interior of the tank is divided into compartments, each 
compartment shall be designed, constructed and tested as a separate 
tank. Thickness of shell and compartment heads shall be determined on 
the basis of total tank capacity.
    (b) [Reserved]



Sec. 178.255-10  Lining.

    (a) If a lining is required, the material used for lining the tank 
shall be homogeneous, nonporous, imperforate when applied, not less 
elastic than the metal of the tank proper. It shall be of substantially 
uniform thickness, not less than \1/32\ inch thick if metallic, and not 
less than \1/16\ inch thick if nonmetallic, and shall be directly bonded 
or attached by other equally satisfactory means. Rubber lining shall be 
not less than \3/16\ inch thick. Joints and seams in the lining shall be 
made by fusing the material together or by other equally satisfactory 
means. The interior of the tank shall be free from scale, oxidation, 
moisture and all foreign matter during the lining operation.
    (b) [Reserved]

[[Page 844]]



Sec. 178.255-11  Tank mountings.

    (a) Tanks shall be designed and fabricated with mountings to provide 
a secure base in transit. ``Skids'' or similar devices shall be deemed 
to comply with this requirement.
    (b) All tank mountings such as skids, fastenings, brackets, cradles, 
lifting lugs, etc., intended to carry loadings shall be permanently 
secured to tanks in accordance with the requirements under which the 
tanks are fabricated, and shall be designed with a factor of safety of 
four, and built to withstand loadings in any direction equal to two 
times the weight of the tanks and attachments when filled to the maximum 
permissible loaded weight.
    (c) Lifting lugs or side hold-down lugs shall be provided on the 
tank mountings in a manner suitable for attaching lifting gear and hold-
down devices. Lifting lugs and hold-down lugs welded directly to the 
tank shall be of the pad-eye type. Doubling plates welded to the tank 
and located at the points of support shall be deemed to comply with this 
requirement.
    (d) All tank mountings shall be so designed as to prevent the 
concentration of excessive loads on the tank shell.



Sec. 178.255-12  Pressure test.

    (a) Each completed portable tank prior to application of lining 
shall be tested before being put into transportation service by 
completely filling the tank with water or other liquid having a similar 
viscosity, the temperature of which shall not exceed 100  deg.F during 
the test, and applying a pressure of 60 psig. The tank shall be capable 
of holding the prescribed pressure for at least 10 minutes without 
leakage, evidence of impending failure, or failure. All closures shall 
be in place while the test is made and the pressure shall be gauged at 
the top of the tank. Safety devices and/or vents shall be plugged during 
this test.
    (b) [Reserved]

[29 FR 18972, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, 
as amended by Amdt. 178-104, 59 FR 49135, Sept. 26, 1994]



Sec. 178.255-13  Repair of tanks.

    (a) Tanks failing to meet the test may be repaired and retested, 
provided that repairs are made in complete compliance with the 
requirements of this specification.
    (b) [Reserved]



Sec. 178.255-14  Marking.

    (a) In addition to marking required by the American Society of 
Mechanical Engineers Code, every tank shall bear permanent marks at 
least \1/8\-inch high stamped into the metal near the center of one of 
the tank heads or stamped into a plate permanently attached to the tank 
by means of brazing or welding or other suitable means as follows:

Manufacturer's name ---- Serial No._____________________________________
DOT specification_______________________________________________________
Nominal capacity -------------- (gallons)
Tare weight -------------- (pounds)
Date of manufacture_____________________________________________________

    (b) [Reserved]

[29 FR 18972, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, 
and amended by Amdt. 178-67, 46 FR 49906, Oct. 8, 1981]



Sec. 178.255-15  Report.

    (a) A copy of the manufacturer's data report required by the Code 
(See Sec. 178.245-1(a)) under which the tank is fabricated must be 
furnished to the owner for each new tank.

        Place___________________________________________________________
        Date____________________________________________________________
      Portable tank
Manufactured for -------------- Company
Location________________________________________________________________
Manufactured by -------------- Company
Location________________________________________________________________
Consigned to ------------------ Company
Location________________________________________________________________
Size ------ feet outside diameter by ------long.
Marks on tank as prescribed by Sec. 178.255-14 of this specification are 
as follows:
Manufacturer's name_____________________________________________________
Serial number___________________________________________________________
Owner's serial number___________________________________________________
DOT specification_______________________________________________________
ASME Code Symbol (par U-201)____________________________________________
Date of manufacture_____________________________________________________
Nominal capacity -------------- gallons.
    It is hereby certified that this tank is in complete compliance with 
the requirements of DOT specification No. 60.
      (Signed)__________________________________________________________
                                                   Manufacturer or owner

    (b) [Reserved]

[29 FR 18972, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, 
and amended by Amdt. 178-83, 50 FR 11066, Mar. 19, 1985]

[[Page 845]]



Sec. 178.270  Specification IM 101 and IM 102 steel portable tanks; general design and construction requirements.



Sec. 178.270-1  Specification requirements for IM 101 and IM 102 steel portable tanks.

    (a) Each IM portable tank must meet the requirements of this section 
in addition to the requirements of Sec. 178.271 (IM 101) or Sec. 178.272 
(IM 102). These requirements apply to IM portable tanks of diameters no 
greater than 2438 mm (96 inches) that are designed to carry liquids 
having a vapor pressure of less than 2.97 bar-absolute (43 psia) at a 
temperature of 50  deg.C (122  deg.F).
    (b) [Reserved]

[Amdt. 178-65, 46 FR 9895, Jan. 29, 1981]



Sec. 178.270-2  General.

    (a) Each tank, including attachments and service and structural 
equipment, must be designed to withstand, without loss of contents, the 
maximum internal pressure that can be anticipated to result from the 
contents and the static and dynamic stresses incurred in normal handling 
and transportation.
    (b) For the purpose of this subchapter MAWP is the maximum pressure 
that an IM portable tank may experience during any normal operation 
(including loading and unloading). The only exception to this limitation 
is hydrostatic testing.
    (c) Each portable tank must have a cross-sectional design that is 
capable of being stress analyzed either mathematically or by the 
experimental method contained in UG-101 of the ASME Code, or other 
method acceptable to the Associate Administrator.
    (d) Each portable tank must be designed so that the center of 
gravity of the filled tank is approximately centered within the points 
of attachment for lifting devices.
    (e) When credit is taken for insulation to reduce the required 
emergency venting capacity of safety relief devices, the insulation must 
be jacketed or otherwise protected from the accumulation of moisture or 
foreign matter that would decrease its efficiency or corrode the tank.
    (f) Each portable tank that has a lining must have a lining material 
that meets the following requirements:
    (1) The material used to line the tank must be--
    (i) Substantially immune to attack by the hazardous material 
transported;
    (ii) Homogeneous;
    (iii) Nonporous;
    (iv) Imperforated when applied;
    (v) At least as elastic as the material of the tank shell; and
    (vi) Have thermal-expansion characteristics compatible with the tank 
shell.
    (2) The lining of the tank, tank fitting and piping must be--
    (i) Attached by bonding or other satisfactory means;
    (ii) Continuous; and
    (iii) Extended around the face of any flange.
    (3) Joints and seams in the lining must be made by fusing the 
material together or by other equally effective means.

[Amdt. 178-65, 46 FR 9895, Jan. 29, 1981, as amended by Amdt. 178-65, 46 
FR 24184, Apr. 30, 1981; Amdt. 178-97, 56 FR 66284 and 66287, Dec. 20, 
1991; 66 FR 45386, 45389, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.270-3  Materials of construction.

    (a) Each portable tank must be constructed of carbon or alloy 
steels. Materials included in part UHT of the ASME Code or equivalent 
materials are not authorized. Any materials used in the tank shell must 
conform to a recognized national standard and must be suitable for the 
external environments in which the tank will be carried. The minimum 
elongation for any material must be 20 percent or greater.
    (b) The maximum stress allowed for a material shall be determined 
using one of the following methods:
    (1) 1.5 times the specified values for the material at 93  deg.C 
(200  deg.F) in Section VIII, Division 1 of the ASME Code;
    (2) Derived by test for the actual yield and tensile strengths at 93 
 deg.C (200  deg.F) for the actual group of plates used to fabricate the 
tank using the methods described in Sec. 178.270-3(d); or
    (3) Derived from the minimum yield and tensile strengths at 93 
deg.C (200  deg.F) specified by the national standard to which the 
material is manufactured

[[Page 846]]

using the methods described in Sec. 178.270-3(d).
    (c) Maximum allowable stress values, derived for an actual group of 
plates, that are based on actual tensile and yield strengths of the 
material at 93  deg.C (200  deg.F) shall not be greater than 120 percent 
of the specified minimum yield and tensile strength specified in the 
national standard to which the material is manufactured.
    (d) The maximum allowable stress values must be derived from the 
following criteria:
    (1) For austenitic steels;
    (i) When the yield strength is determined using the 0.2 percent 
offset, 93.75 percent of the yield strength.
    (ii) When the yield strength is determined using the 1.0 percent 
offset, 75 percent of the yield strength.
    (2) For carbon and low alloy steels, the yield strength is 
determined using the 0.2 percent offset. The maximum allowable stress 
value is the lower of 93.75 percent of the yield strength or 37.5 
percent of the tensile strength.
    (e) For purposes of these specifications, tensile strength, yield 
strength and elongation must be determined using a specimen having a 
gauge length:

L0 = 5.65(S0)1/2

where:

L0 = the gauge length of the specimen--millimeters (inches); 
and
S0 = the cross sectional area of the specimen--square 
millimeters (square inches).


Tensile tests and analysis of results must be in accordance with ``ISO 
82 Steels-Tensile Testing.'' The yield strength in tension shall be the 
stress corresponding to a permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the gauge 
length, except that for high alloy austenitic steels the yield strength 
shall be the stress corresponding to a permanent strain of 0.2 or 1.0 
percent of the gauge length as appropriate. The elongation must be at 
least 20 percent.
    (f) If maximum allowable stress values or minimum tank wall 
thicknesses are based on the actual yield strength, the actual tensile 
strength, or the actual elongation for the material used to fabricate 
the tank, the test records or certification of test results by the 
material producer or tank manufacturer must be approved by the approval 
agency, retained by the tank manufacturer for a period not less than 15 
years, and made available to any duly identified representative of the 
Department or the owner of the tank.

[Amdt. 178-65, 46 FR 9895, Jan. 29, 1981, as amended at 64 FR 10782, 
Mar. 5, 1999]



Sec. 178.270-4  Structural integrity.

    (a) Maximum stress values. The maximum calculated stress value in a 
tank at the Test Pressure must be less than or equal to that specified 
for the material of construction at 93  deg.C. (200  deg.F.) in 
Sec. 178.270-3 of this part.
    (b) Tank shell loadings. Tank shells, heads, and their fastenings 
shall be designed to prevent stresses in excess of two thirds those 
specified in Sec. 178.270-3 of this part. The design calculations must 
include the forces imposed by each of the following loads:
    (1) An internal pressure equal to the MAWP less 1 bar (14.5 psig) in 
combination with the simultaneously applied loadings of 3W vertically 
downward, 2W longitudinally, and 1W laterally acting through the center 
of the tank (W is the maximum permissible weight of the loaded tank and 
its attachments), and the requirements of paragraphs (b) (4), (5) and 
(6) of this section;
    (2) An internal pressure equal to the MAWP less 1 bar (14.5 psig), 
in combination with the simultaneously applied loadings of 1W vertically 
upward, 2W longitudinally, and 1W laterally acting through the center of 
the tank (W is the maximum permissible weight of the loaded tank and its 
attachment), and the requirements of paragraphs (b) (4), (5) and (6) of 
this section;
    (3) The load on the tank head resulting from an internal pressure 
equal to the MAWP, less 1 bar (14.5 psig), in combination with the 
dynamic pressure resulting from a longitudinal deceleration of 2 ``g'', 
and the requirements of paragraphs (b) (4), (5) and (6) of this section;
    (4) Loads resulting from any discontinuities between tank shell and 
heads;
    (5) Superimposed loads such as operating equipment, insulation, 
linings and piping; and
    (6) Reactions of supporting lugs and saddles or other supports.

[[Page 847]]

    (c) The shell thickness used in calculating the resulting stress 
levels in a tank shall be exclusive of any corrosion allowance.

[Amdt. 178-65, 46 FR 9895, Jan. 29, 1981, as amended at 66 FR 45387, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.270-5  Minimum thickness of shells and heads.

    (a) For the purposes of this section, mild steel is steel with a 
guaranteed minimum tensile strength of 37 decanewtons per square 
millimeter (53,650 p.s.i.) and a guaranteed elongation of 27 percent or 
greater.
    (b) Except as otherwise provided in this subchapter, the shell and 
heads of each portable tank constructed of reference mild steel:
    (1) With a maximum cross-sectional dimension of 1.8 m (5.9 feet) or 
less, shall be at least 5 mm (0.197 inches) thick; or,
    (2) With a maximum cross-sectional dimension exceeding 1.8 m (5.9 
feet), shall be at least 6.35mm (0.250 inches) thick.
    (c) The minimum thickness of the shell and heads of each portable 
tank constructed of a steel other than the reference mild steel, shall 
be obtained from the following formula:

                        Formula for metric units

e1 = (10e0) / (Rm1 
    A1)1/3

                    Formula for nonmetric units

e1 = (112.3e0) / (Rm1 
    A1)1/3

where:

e0 = Required thickness of the reference steel from 
Sec. 178.270-5(b)--millimeters (inches);
e1 = Equivalent thickness of the steel used--millimeters 
(inches);
Rm1 = Specified minimum tensile strength of the steel used--
decanewtons per square millimeter (p.s.i.); and
A1 = Specified minimum percentage elongation of the steel 
used--percent times 100 (i.e., if 20% use 20.0).

    (d) When other than the standard minimum thickness for the reference 
mild steel is specified for a tank in this subchapter, the specified 
minimum shell and head thickness must be at least equal to the larger of 
the thicknesses calculated from the formula given in Sec. 178.270-5(c) 
and the following formula:

                        Formula for metric units

e1 = (10e0 d1) / 1.8(Rm1 
    A1)1/3

                    Formula for nonmetric units

e1 = (112.3e0 d1) / 5.9(Rm1 
    A1)1/3

where:

e1 = Equivalent thickness of the steel used--millimeters 
(inches);
e0 = The specified minimum shell and head thickness of the 
reference mild steel specified in the IM Tank Table--millimeters 
(inches);
d1 = Actual outside diameter of the tank--m (feet);
Rm1 = Specified minimum tensile strength of the steel used--
decanewtons per square millimeter (p.s.i.); and
A1 = Specified minimum percentage elongation of the steel 
used--percent times 100 (i.e., if 20% use 20.0).

    Note: For paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section the actual values 
for the tensile strength and percent elongation for the steel, as 
determined through tests on specimens from the group of plates to be 
used in the fabrication of the tank, may be substituted for the 
specified minimum values in the calculation prescribed in this paragraph 
(See Sec. 178.270-3 of this part). Test records or certification of test 
results by the material producer or tank manufacturer must be retained 
by the tank manufacturer for a period not less than 15 years and must be 
made available to the Department or the owner of the tank.

[Amdt. 178-65, 46 FR 9896, Jan. 29, 1981, as amended by Amdt. 178-97, 56 
FR 66284, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45465, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 178-99, 58 FR 
51534, Oct. 1, 1993; 66 FR 45387, 45389, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.270-6  Tank supports, frameworks and lifting attachments.

    (a) Each portable tank must be constructed with a permanent support 
structure that provides a secure base in transport. Skids, frameworks, 
cradles, or similar devices are acceptable. The calculated stress in 
tank supports, frameworks, and lifting attachments must not exceed 80 
percent of the specified minimum yield strength of the material of 
construction under the applicable loading conditions specified in 
Sec. 178.270-4(b).
    (b) An IM portable tank that meets the definition of ``container'' 
in Sec. 450.3(a)(3) must meet the requirements of parts 450 through 453 
of this

[[Page 848]]

title, in addition to the requirements of this subchapter.

[Amdt. 178-65, 46 FR 9896, Jan. 29, 1981]



Sec. 178.270-7  Joints in tank shells.

    Joints in tank shells must be made by fusion welding. Such joints 
and their efficiencies must be as required by the ASME Code. Weld 
procedures and welder performance must be ASME Code qualified or must be 
qualified by the approval agency in accordance with the procedures in 
the ASME Code, Section IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications. A record 
of each qualification must be retained by the manufacturer for the 
period prescribed in ASME Code, Section VIII, Pressure Vessels, and must 
be made available to any duly identified representative of the 
Department and the owner of the tank.

[Amdt. 178-65, 46 FR 9896, Jan. 29, 1981; 46 FR 24184, Apr. 30, 1981]



Sec. 178.270-8  Protection of valves and accessories.

    Each valve, fitting, accessory, safety device, gauging device, and 
other appurtenance shall be adequately protected against mechanical 
damage.

[Amdt. 178-65, 46 FR 9896, Jan. 29, 1981]



Sec. 178.270-9  Inspection openings.

    Each portable tank must be fitted with a manhole or other inspection 
opening sited above the maximum liquid level to allow for complete 
internal inspection and adequate access for maintenance and repair of 
the interior. Each portable tank with a capacity of more than 1894 L 
(500 gallons) must be fitted with an elliptical or round manhole at 
least 279 x 381 mm (11 x 15 inches), or 254 x 405 mm (10 x 16 inches), 
or with a circular manhole at least 381 mm (15 inches) in diameter. Any 
inspection opening and closure must be designed and reinforced as 
required by the ASME Code.

[Amdt. 178-65, 46 FR 9896, Jan. 29, 1981, as amended by Amdt. 178-104, 
59 FR 49135, Sept. 26, 1994; 66 FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.270-10  External design pressure.

    (a) Each portable tank not fitted with vacuum relief devices must be 
designed to withstand a positive external pressure differential of at 
least 0.4 bar (6 psig).
    (b) Each portable tank fitted with vacuum relief devices must be 
designed to withstand a positive external pressure differential not less 
than the set pressure of the vacuum relief device and in any case at 
least 0.21 bar (3 psig).

[Amdt. 178-65, 46 FR 9896, Jan. 29, 1981, as amended at 66 FR 45387, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.270-11  Pressure and vacuum relief devices.

    (a) Relief devices required. Each portable tank, or each independent 
compartment of a portable tank, must be fitted with pressure relief 
devices in accordance with the following:
    (1) Each portable tank, or each independent compartment of a 
portable tank, with a capacity of more than 1893 L (500 gallons), must 
be provided with a primary spring-loaded pressure relief device, and, in 
addition, may have one or more emergency pressure relief devices that 
may be a spring-loaded pressure relief valve, a rupture disc or fusible 
element in parallel with the primary pressure relief device.
    (2) Each portable tank, or each independent compartment of a 
portable tank, with a capacity of 1893 L (500 gallons) or less, must be 
fitted with a primary pressure relief device that may either be a non-
reclosing device or a spring-loaded pressure relief valve.
    (3) If a non-reclosing device is inserted in series with a required 
pressure relief valve, the space between them must have a suitable tell-
tale indicator to permit detection, prior to and during shipment, of 
disc rupture, pinholing, or leakage which could cause a malfunction of 
the pressure relief system. The frangible disc must rupture at a tank 
pressure within the range specified in paragraph (c)(1) of this section.
    (b) Location and construction of relief devices. (1) Pressure relief 
devices must be spring-loaded valves, rupture discs, or fusible 
elements. Vacuum relief devices must be capable of reclosing in any 
attitude. Each pressure relief device inlet must be situated in the 
vapor space of the tank. The discharge from any device must be 
unrestricted and directed to prevent impingement upon

[[Page 849]]

the tank shell or structural framework. Protective devices which deflect 
the flow of vapor are permissible provided the required vent capacity is 
maintained. Pressure and vacuum relief devices including their inlets 
must be sited on the top of the tank in a position as near as possible 
to the longitudinal and transversal center of the tank within the 
following limitation:
    (i) Longitudinally on the tank within 107 cm (3\1/2\ feet) or \1/6\ 
the tank length, whichever is less, from the top center of the tank; and
    (ii) Transversally within 12 degrees of the tank top.
    (2) Except for a relief device installed in a piping system, each 
relief device must provide unrestricted venting under all conditions. 
Each pressure relief system, including any piping, must provide a 
venting capacity at least equal to the venting capacity specified in 
Sec. 178.270-11(d) for the tank on which the system is installed.
    (3) Fusible elements, when installed, must not be protected from 
direct communication with external heat sources.
    (4) Spring-loaded pressure relief valves must be constructed in a 
manner to prevent unauthorized adjustment of the relief setting.
    (c) Pressure settings of relief devices--(1) Primary pressure relief 
devices. The primary relief device required by paragraph (a) of this 
section must be set to function in the range of--
    (i) No less than 67 percent and no greater than 83 percent of test 
pressure for tanks hydrostatically tested under Sec. 178.270-13(a) of 
this subpart at a gauge pressure below 455 kPa (66 psig). Spring-loaded 
pressure relief valves must close after discharge at a pressure not less 
than 80 percent of start-to-discharge pressure.
    (ii) No less than 67 percent and no greater than 74 percent of test 
pressure for tanks hydrostatically tested under Sec. 178.270-13(a) of 
this subpart at a gauge pressure of 455 kPa (66 psig) or higher. Spring-
loaded pressure relief valves must close after discharge at a pressure 
not less than 90 percent of start-to-discharge pressure.
    (2) Emergency pressure relief devices. Each rupture disc, other than 
one used as a primary relief device in accordance with paragraph (b)(2) 
of this section, must be designed to burst at a pressure greater than 83 
percent of and less than or equal to tank hydrostatic test pressure. 
Each spring-loaded pressure relief device must be set to operate at no 
less than 83 percent of hydrostatic test pressure and be fully open at 
test pressure.
    (3) Fusible elements. Fusible elements must have a nominal yield 
temperature greater than the highest tank operating temperature and less 
than or equal to 121  deg.C (250  deg.F). The pressure developed in the 
tank at the fusible element yield temperature must be below the test 
pressure of the tank.
    (4) Vacuum relief devices. Vacuum relief devices, when used, must be 
designed to provide total containment of product under normal and 
accident conditions and must be set to open at a nominal external 
overpressure of not less than 0.21 bar (3 psig) but not greater than the 
external pressure for which the tank is designed. Each vacuum relief 
device must have a minimum cross sectional flow area of 2.84 cm 2 
(0.44 square inches).
    (d) Venting capacity of pressure relief devices--(1) Pressure relief 
valves (spring-loaded). Each pressure relief valve must have a minimum 
vent capacity of at least 170 standard cubic meters per hour (SCMH) 
(6,000 standard cubic feet per hour (SCFH)). The minimum total pressure 
relief valve vent capacity for each tank shall be 340 SCMH (12,000 SCFH) 
per 32.5m\2\ (350 square feet) of exposed tank area, but in any case at 
least 340 SCMH (12,000 SCFH).
    (2) Total tank vent capacity. The total vent capacity of all 
pressure relief devices installed on each portable tank must be 
sufficient with all devices operating to limit the pressure in the tank 
to less than or equal to the test pressure. Except as provided in 
paragraph (d)(3) or (d)(4) of this section, the total vent capacity must 
be at least equal to that shown in the following table:

[[Page 850]]



                  Table I--Minimum Total Vent Capacity
   [Metric units table in cubic meters of air per hour at atmospheric
                         pressure and 15  deg.C]
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                        Cubic                    Cubic
                                       meters      Exposed      meters
     Exposed area square meters       free air   area square   free air
                                      per hour      meters     per hour
------------------------------------------------------------------------
2..................................         841      37.5          9.306
3..................................       1,172      40            9,810
4..................................       1,485      42.5         10,308
5..................................       1,783      45           10,806
6..................................       2,069      47.5         11,392
7..................................       2,348      50           11,778
8..................................       2,621      52.5         12,258
9..................................       2,821      55           12,732
10.................................       3,146      57.5         13,206
12.................................       3,655      60           13,674
14.................................       4,146      62.5         14,142
16.................................       4,625      65           14,604
18.................................       5,092      67.5         15,066
20.................................       5,556      70           15,516
22.5...............................       6,120      75           16,422
25.................................       6,672      80           17,316
27.5...............................       7,212      85           18,198
30.................................       7,746      90           19,074
32.5...............................       8,268      95           19,938
35.................................       8,790     100           20,790
------------------------------------------------------------------------


 [Nonmetric units in cubic feet of air per hour at atmospheric pressure
                             and 59  deg.F]
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                    Exposed
                                      Cubic feet     area     Cubic feet
      Exposed area square feet         free air     square     free air
                                       per hour      feet      per hour
------------------------------------------------------------------------
20..................................      27,600         275     237,000
30..................................      38,500         300     256,000
40..................................      48,600         350     289,500
50..................................      58,600         400     322,100
60..................................      67,700         450     355,900
70..................................      77,000         500     391,000
80..................................      85,500         550     417,500
90..................................      94,800         600     450,000
100.................................     104,000         650     479,000
120.................................     121,000         700     512,000
140.................................     136,200         750     540,000
160.................................     152,100         800     569,000
180.................................     168,200         850     597,000
200.................................     184,000         900     621,000
225.................................     199,000         950     656,000
250.................................     219,500       1,000     686,000
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note: Interpolate for intermediate sizes.

    (3) Notwithstanding the minimum total vent capacity shown in table 
I, of paragraph (d)(2), a tank in dedicated service may have a lesser 
total vent capacity provided the approval certificate required by 
Sec. 178.273(b)(7) specifies the hazardous materials for which the tank 
is suitable. The lesser total vent capacity must be determined in 
accordance with the following formula:

                        Formula for metric units

Q = 5,660,000 A 0.82 (ZT) 0.5 / (LC)(M 
    0.5)

                       Formula for nonmetric units

Q = 37,980,000 A 0.82 (ZT) 0.5 / (LC)(M 
    0.5)

where:

Q = The total required venting capacity, in cubic meters of air per hour 
at standard conditions of 15.6  deg.C and 1 atm (cubic feet of air per 
hour at standard conditions of 60  deg.F and 14.7 psia);
T = The absolute temperature of the vapor at the venting conditions--
degrees Kelvin (  deg.C+273) [degrees Rankine (  deg.F+460)];
A = The exposed surface area of tank shell--square meters (square feet);
L = The latent heat of vaporization of the lading--calories per gram 
(BTU/lb);
Z = The compressibiliy factor for the vapor (if this factor is unknown, 
let Z equal 1.0);
M = The molecular weight of vapor;
C = A constant derived from (K), the ratio of specific heats of the 
vapor. If (K) is unknown, let C = 315.

C = 520[K(2/(K+1)) [(K+1) / (K-1)]]\1/2\

where:

K = Cp / Cv
Cp = The specific heat at constant pressure, in -
calories per gram degree centigrade (BTU/lb  deg.F.); and
Cv = The specific heat at constant volume, in -calories per 
gram degree centigrade (BTU/lb  deg.F.).

    (4) The required total venting capacity determined by using table I 
or paragraph (d)(3) of this section may be reduced for insulated tanks 
to Qt by the following formula:

Qt = FQ1
where:

    Qt = The total required venting capacity of the insulated 
tank;
    Q1 = The total venting capacity required for an 
uninsulated tank according to table I or paragraph (d)(3) of this 
section;
    F = A coefficient with a value greater than or equal to 0.25 
according to the following formula:

                        Formula for metric units

F = 8U(649-t) / 93.5 x 10\6\

                       Formula for nonmetric units

F = 8U(1200-t) / 34,500

where:

U = The thermal conductance of the insulation system taken at 38  deg.C 
(100  deg.F), in gram calories per hour square meter  deg.C (BTU per 
hour square feet  deg.F); and
t = The actual temperature of the substance at loading, in  deg.C 
( deg.F).

    (5) Insulation systems, used for the purpose of reducing the venting 
capacity, must be approved by the approval agency. In all cases, 
insulation systems approved for this purpose must:

[[Page 851]]

    (i) Remain effective at all temperatures up to 649  deg.C (1200 
deg.F); and
    (ii) Be jacketed with a material having a melting point of 649 
deg.C (1200  deg.F) or greater.
    (6) The flow capacity rating of any pressure relief device must be 
certified by the manufacturer to be in accordance with the applicable 
provisions of the ASME Code with the following exceptions:
    (i) The ASME Code stamp is not required; and
    (ii) The flow capacity certification test for spring loaded pressure 
relief valves may be conducted at a pressure not to exceed 120% of the 
set pressure provided the stamped flow capacity rating is not greater 
than 83% of the average capacity of the valves tested.
    (e) Markings on pressure and vacuum relief devices. The following 
information shall be plainly displayed on each pressure relief device:
    (1) The pressure or, when appropriate, the temperature at which the 
device is set to function;
    (2) Except for vacuum relief devices, the rated flow capacity of air 
discharged per minute at 15  deg.C (59  deg.F) and atmospheric pressure, 
at:
    (i) The set pressure for rupture discs;
    (ii) No greater than 20% above the start-to-discharge pressure for 
spring-loaded relief devices; or
    (iii) The fusing temperature for fusible elements.
    (3) The manufacturer's name and catalog number; and
    (4) The allowable tolerances at the start-to-discharge pressure and 
the allowable tolerances at the discharge temperature.

[Amdt. 178-65, 46 FR 9897, Jan. 29, 1981; 46 FR 24184, Apr. 30, 1981, as 
amended by Amdt. 178-97, 55 FR 52716, Dec. 21, 1990; Amdt. 178-99, 58 FR 
51534, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 178-104, 59 FR 49135, Sept. 26, 1994; 66 FR 
45386, 45389, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 61016, Sept. 27, 2002]



Sec. 178.270-12  Valves, nozzles, piping, and gauging devices.

    (a) All tank nozzles, except those provided for filling and 
discharge connections below the normal liquid level of the tank, relief 
devices, thermometer wells, and inspection openings, must be fitted with 
manually operated stop valves located as near the shell as practicable 
either internal or external to the shell. Each filling and discharge 
connection located below the normal liquid level of the tank must be 
equipped with an internal discharge valve. A tank nozzle installed in 
the vapor space to provide a filling or cleaning opening, which is 
closed by a blank flange or other suitable means, need not be provided 
with a manually operated stop valve. A tank nozzle installed for a 
thermometer well or inspection opening need not be provided with a 
manually operated stop valve.
    (b) Each valve must be designed and constructed to a rated pressure 
not less than the MAWP of the tank. Each stop valve with a screwed 
spindle must be closed by a clockwise motion of the handwheel. All 
valves must be constructed to prevent unintentional opening.
    (c) Each internal discharge valve shall be self-closing, located 
inside the tank, within the welded flange or within its companion 
flange.
    (d) A shear section must be located outboard of each internal 
discharge valve seat and within 10.2 cm (4 inches) of the vessel. The 
shear section must break under strain without affecting the product 
retention capabilities of the tank and any attachments.
    (e) All piping must be of suitable material. Welded joints must be 
used wherever practicable. The bursting strength of all piping and pipe 
fittings must be at least 4 times the MAWP of the tank. Piping must be 
supported in such a manner as to prevent damage due to thermal stresses, 
jarring or vibration.
    (f) All nozzles and tank shell penetrations for nozzles shall be 
designed and constructed in accordance with the ASME Code.
    (g) Glass liquid level gauges, or gauges of other easily 
destructible material, which are in direct communication with the 
contents of the tank are prohibited.

[Amdt. 178-65, 46 FR 9898, Jan. 29, 1981; 46 FR 24184, Apr. 30, 1981, as 
amended by Amdt. 178-117, 61 FR 50628, Sept. 26, 1996; 66 FR 45386, Aug. 
28, 2001]



Sec. 178.270-13  Testing.

    (a) Hydrostatic test. Each portable tank and all piping, valves, and 
other

[[Page 852]]

attachments which are subject to the pressure of the contents of the 
tank, except pressure relief devices, must be hydrostatically tested by 
completely filling the tank (including domes, if any) with water or 
other liquid having a similar density and viscosity and applying a 
pressure of at least 150 percent of the MAWP. The pressure shall be 
maintained for at least 10 minutes. While under pressure, the tank shall 
be inspected for leakage, undue distortion, or other conditions which 
indicate weakness or which might render the tank unsafe for 
transportation service. Failure to successfully meet the test criteria 
shall be deemed evidence of failure to meet the requirements of this 
specification. Tanks failing to pass the test shall be suitably repaired 
and must successfully pass the prescribed tests prior to use for 
transporting any hazardous material.
    (b) Testing of internal coils. Internal coils, if installed, must be 
hydrostatically tested to an internal pressure of 13.8 bar (200 psig) or 
150 percent of the rated pressure of the coils, whichever is greater.
    (c) Tank container qualification test. For each tank design, a 
prototype tank, using a framework for containerized transport, must 
fulfill the requirements of parts 450-453 of this title for compliance 
with the requirements of Annex II of the International Convention for 
Safe Containers. In addition, the following tests must be completed 
without leakage or deformation that would render the tank unsuitable for 
use:
    (1) Longitudinal inertia. The tank loaded to its maximum gross 
weight must be positioned with its longitudinal axis vertical. It shall 
be held in this position for five minutes by support at the lower end of 
the base structure providing vertical and lateral restraint and by 
support at the upper end of the base structure providing lateral 
restraint only.
    (2) Lateral inertia. The tank loaded to its maximum gross weight 
must be positioned for five minutes with its transverse axis vertical. 
It shall be held in this position for five minutes by support at the 
lower side of the base structure providing vertical and lateral 
restraint and by support at the upper side of the base structure 
providing lateral restraint only.
    (d) Approval of smaller tanks of the same design. Design approval 
must include the prototype testing of at least one tank of each design 
and each size; however, a set of tests made on a tank of one size may 
serve for the approval of smaller tanks with equal or lesser diameter 
and length) made of the same material and thickness by the same 
fabrication technique and with identical supports and equivalent 
closures and other appurtenances.
    (e) Pressure and vacuum relief devices. Each spring loaded relief 
device must be tested for the accuracy of the setting prior to 
installation on a tank and must be effectively sealed to maintain the 
required setting.

[Amdt. 178-65, 46 FR 9898, Jan. 29, 1981; 46 FR 24184, Apr. 30, 1981, as 
amended by 66 FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.270-14  Marking of tanks.

    (a) General. Each tank must bear a corrosion resistant metal 
identification plate that is permanently attached to the portable tank 
and readily accessible for inspection. The information required in 
paragraph (b), and, when appropriate, paragraph (c) of this section must 
be stamped, embossed or otherwise marked by an equally durable method on 
the plate in characters at least 3 mm (0.118 inches) high. The plate 
must not be painted.
    (b) Required information. At least the following information must 
appear on the metal identification plate for each tank:
    (1) US DOT Specification number.
    (2) Country of manufacture.
    (3) Manufacturer's name.
    (4) Date of manufacture.
    (5) Manufacturer's serial number.
    (6) Identification of USA/DOT approval agency and approval number.
    (7) MAWP, in bar or psig.
    (8) Test pressure, in bar or psig.
    (9) Total measured water capacity at 20  deg.C (68  deg.F), in 
liters or gallons.
    (10) Maximum allowable gross weight, in kg or lbs.
    (11) Equivalent minimum shell thickness in mild steel, in mm or 
inches.
    (12) Tank material and specification number.

[[Page 853]]

    (13) Metallurgical design temperature range, in  deg.C or  deg.F.
    (c) Additional information. The following additional information 
must appear on the metal identification plate when applicable:
    (1) Lining material.
    (2) Heating coil MAWP in bar and psig.
    (3) Corrosion allowance, in mm or in.
    (d) In addition to the markings required above, each tank used in 
international transport must have a Safety Approval Plate containing the 
information required in Secs. 451.21 through 451.25 of this title.
    (e) Nothing in this section shall be deemed to preclude the display 
of other pertinent information on the required metal identification 
plate.

[Amdt. 178-65, 46 FR 9899, Jan. 29, 1981, as amended at 62 FR 51561, 
Oct. 1, 1997; 66 FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.271  Specification IM 101 steel portable tanks.



Sec. 178.271-1  General requirements.

    (a) Specification IM 101 portable tanks must conform to the general 
design and construction requirements in Sec. 178.270 of this subpart in 
addition to the specific design requirements contained in this section.
    (b) The MAWP of each tank shall be equal to or greater than 1.75 bar 
(25.4 psig) and less than 6.8 bar (100 psig).
    (c) Each tank shall be designed and constructed in accordance with 
the requirements of Section VIII, Division 1, of the ASME Code except as 
limited or modified in this section or in Sec. 178.270 of this subpart. 
ASME certification or stamp is not required.

[Amdt. 178-65, 46 FR 9899, Jan. 29, 1981, as amended by Amdt. 178-104, 
59 FR 49135, Sept. 26, 1994; 66 FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.272  Specification IM 102 steel portable tanks.



Sec. 178.272-1  General requirements.

    (a) Specification IM 102 portable tanks must conform to the general 
design and construction requirements in Sec. 178.270 of this subpart in 
addition to the specific design requirements contained in this section.
    (b) The MAWP of each tank shall be less than 1.75 bar (25.4 psig) 
but at least 1.0 bar (14.5 psig).
    (c) Each tank shall be designed and constructed in accordance with 
the requirements of Section VIII, Division 1, of the ASME Code except as 
limited or modified in this section or in Sec. 178.270 of this subpart. 
ASME certification or stamp is not required.

[Amdt. 178-65, 46 FR 9899, Jan. 29, 1981, as amended by Amdt. 178-104, 
59 FR 49135, Sept. 26, 1994; 66 FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.272-2  Minimum thickness of shells and heads.

    (a) The approval agency may authorize a minimum thickness less than 
that required by Sec. 178.270-5 of this subpart where additional 
protection against tank puncture provides equal integrity.
    (b) The shell and head thickness of a tank must be at least:
    (1) 3.18 mm (0.125 inches) for a tank with a maximum cross-sectional 
dimension of 1.8 m (5.9 feet) or less; or
    (2) 4 mm (0.157 inches) for a tank constructed of the reference mild 
steel having a maximum cross-sectional dimension exceeding 1.8 m (5.9 
feet). For tanks having a maximum cross-sectional dimension exceeding 
1.8 m (5.9 feet) constructed of other steels, an equivalent head and 
shell thickness calculated in accordance with Sec. 178.270-5(c) of this 
subpart may be used, subject to an absolute minimum of 3.18 mm (0.125 
inches).
    (c) The following additional puncture protection systems are 
authorized:
    (1) An overall external structural protection, such as a jacket, 
which is rigidly secured to the tank with a layer of cushioning material 
installed between the external structural protection and the tank; or
    (2) A complete framework surrounding the tank including both 
longitudinal and transverse structural members.

[Amdt. 178-65, 46 FR 9899, Jan. 29, 1981, as amended at 66 FR 45387, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.273  Approval of Specification IM portable tanks and UN portable tanks.

    (a) Application for approval. (1) An owner or manufacturer of a 
portable

[[Page 854]]

tank shall apply for approval to a designated approval agency authorized 
to approve the portable tank in accordance with the procedures in 
subpart E, part 107 of this subchapter.
    (2) Each application for approval must contain the following 
information:
    (i) Two complete copies of all engineering drawings, calculations, 
and test data necessary to ensure that the design meets the relevant 
specification.
    (ii) The manufacturer's serial number that will be assigned to each 
portable tank.
    (iii) A statement as to whether the design type has been examined by 
any approval agency previously and judged unacceptable. Affirmative 
statements must be documented with the name of the approval agency, 
reason for nonacceptance, and the nature of modifications made to the 
design type.
    (b) Action by approval agency. The approval agency must perform the 
following activities:
    (1) Review the application for approval to determine whether it is 
complete and conforms with the requirements of paragraph (a) of this 
section. If an application is incomplete, it will be returned to the 
applicant with an explanation as to why the application is incomplete.
    (2) Review all drawings and calculations to ensure that the design 
is in compliance with all requirements of the relevant specification. If 
the application is approved, one set of the approved drawings, 
calculations, and test data shall be returned to the applicant. The 
second (inspector's copy) set of approved drawings, calculations, and 
test data shall be retained by the approval agency. Maintain drawings 
and approval records for as long as the portable tank remains in 
service. The drawings and records must be provided to the Department of 
Transportation (DOT) upon request.
    (3) Witness all tests required for the approval of the portable tank 
specified in this section and part 180, subpart G of this subchapter.
    (4) Ensure, through appropriate inspection that each portable tank 
is fabricated in all respects in conformance with the approved drawings, 
calculations, and test data.
    (5) Determine and ensure that the portable tank is suitable for its 
intended use and that it conforms to the requirements of this 
subchapter.
    (6) For UN portable tanks intended for non-refrigerated and 
refrigerated liquefied gases and Division 6.1 liquids which meet the 
inhalation toxicity criteria (Zone A or B) as defined in Sec. 173.132 of 
this subchapter, or that are designated as toxic by inhalation materials 
in the Sec. 172.101 Table of this subchapter, the approval agency must 
ensure that:
    (i) The portable tank has been constructed in accordance with the 
ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 (see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter). 
ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 2 (see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter) 
or other design codes may be used if approved by the Associate 
Administrator (see Sec. 178.274(b)(1));
    (ii) All applicable provisions of the design and construction have 
been met to the satisfaction of the designated approval agency in 
accordance with the rules established in the ASME Code and that the 
portable tank meets the requirements of the ASME Code and all the 
applicable requirements specified in this subchapter;
    (iii) The inspector has carried out all the inspections specified by 
the rules established in the ASME Code; and
    (iv) The portable tank is marked with a U stamp code symbol under 
the authority of the authorized independent inspector.
    (7) Upon successful completion of all requirements of this subpart, 
the approval agency must:
    (i) Apply its name, identifying mark or identifying number, and the 
date upon which the approval was issued, to the metal identification 
marking plate attached to the portable tank. Any approvals for UN 
portable tanks authorizing design or construction alternatives 
(Alternate Arrangements) approved by the Associate Administrator (see 
Sec. 178.274(a)(2)) must be indicated on the plate as specified in 
Sec. 178.274(i).
    (ii) Issue an approval certificate for each portable tank or, in the 
case of a series of identical portable tanks manufactured to a single 
design type, for

[[Page 855]]

each series of portable tanks. The approval certificate must include all 
the information required to be displayed on the required metal 
identification plate required by Sec. 178.270-14 of this subchapter for 
IM portable tanks, Sec. 178.245-6 for Specification 51 steel portable 
tanks, or Sec. 178.274(i) for UN portable tanks. The approval 
certificate must certify that the approval agency designated to approve 
the portable tank has approved the portable tank in accordance with the 
procedures in subpart E of part 107 of this subchapter and that the 
portable tank is suitable for its intended purpose and meets the 
requirements of this subchapter. When a series of portable tanks is 
manufactured without change in the design type, the certificate may be 
valid for the entire series of portable tanks representing a single 
design type. For UN portable tanks, the certificate must refer to the 
prototype test report, the hazardous material or group of hazardous 
materials allowed to be transported, the materials of construction of 
the shell and lining (when applicable) and an approval number. The 
approval number must consist of the distinguishing sign or mark of the 
country (``USA'' for the United States of America) where the approval 
was granted and a registration number.
    (iii) Retain a copy of each approval certificate.
    (8) For UN portable tanks, the approval certificate must also 
include the following:
    (i) The results of the applicable framework and rail impact test 
specified in part 180, subpart G, of this subchapter; and
    (ii) The results of the initial inspection and test in 
Sec. 178.274(j).
    (9) The approval agency shall be independent from the manufacturer. 
The approval agency and the authorized inspector may be the same entity.
    (c) Manufacturers' responsibilities. The manufacturer is responsible 
for compliance with the applicable specifications for the design and 
construction of portable tanks. In addition to responsibility for 
compliance, manufacturers are responsible for ensuring that the 
contracted approval agency and authorized inspector, if applicable, are 
qualified, reputable and competent. The manufacturer of a portable tank 
shall--
    (1) Comply with all the applicable requirements of the ASME Code 
(see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter) and of this subpart including, but 
not limited to, ensuring that the quality control, design calculations 
and required tests are performed and that all aspects of the portable 
tank meet the applicable requirements.
    (2) Obtain and use a designated approval agency, if applicable, and 
obtain and use a DOT-designated approval agency to approve the design, 
construction and certification of the portable tank.
    (3) Provide a statement in the manufacturers' data report certifying 
that each portable tank that is manufactured complies with the relevant 
specification and all the applicable requirements of this subchapter.
    (4) Maintain records of the qualification of portable tanks for at 
least 5 years and provide copies to the approval agency, the owner or 
lessee of the tank. Upon request, provide these records to a 
representative of DOT.
    (d) Denial of application for approval. If an approval agency finds 
that a portable tank cannot be approved for any reason, it shall notify 
the applicant in writing and shall provide the applicant with the 
reasons for which the approval is denied. A copy of the notification 
letter shall be provided to the Associate Administrator. An applicant 
aggrieved by a decision of an approval agency may appeal the decision in 
writing, within 90 days of receipt, to the Associate Administrator.
    (e) Modifications to approved portable tanks. (1) Prior to 
modification of any approved portable tank which may affect conformance 
and the safe use of an IM or UN portable tank, which may involve a 
change to the design type or which may affect its ability to retain the 
hazardous material in transportation, the person desiring to make such 
modification shall inform the approval agency that issued the initial 
approval of the portable tank (or if unavailable another approval 
agency) of the nature of the modification and request approval of the 
modification. The person desiring to modify the tank must supply the 
approval agency with

[[Page 856]]

three sets of all revised drawings, calculations, and test data relative 
to the intended modification.
    (2) A statement as to whether the intended modification has been 
examined and determined to be unacceptable by any approval agency. The 
written statement must include the name of the approving agency, the 
reason for nonacceptance, and the nature of changes made to the 
modification since its original rejection.
    (3) The approval agency shall review the request for modification, 
and if it is determined that the proposed modification is in full 
compliance with the relevant DOT specification, including a UN portable 
tank, the request shall be approved and the approval agency shall 
perform the following activities:
    (i) Return one set of the approved revised drawings, calculations, 
and test data to the applicant. The second and third sets of the 
approved revised drawings, calculations, and data shall be retained by 
the approval agency as required in Sec. 107.404(a)(3) of this 
subchapter.
    (ii) Ensure through appropriate inspection that all modifications 
conform to the revised drawings, calculations, and test data.
    (iii) Determine the extent to which retesting of the modified tank 
is necessary based on the nature of the proposed modification, and 
ensure that all required retests are satisfactorily performed.
    (iv) If modification to an approved tank alters any information on 
the approval certificate, issue a new approval certificate for the 
modified tank and ensure that any necessary changes are made to the 
metal identification plate. A copy of each newly issued approval 
certificate shall be retained by the approval agency and by the owner of 
each portable tank.
    (4) If the approval agency determines that the proposed modification 
is not in compliance with the relevant DOT specification, the approval 
agency shall deny the request in accordance with paragraph (d) of this 
section.
    (f) Termination of Approval Certificate. (1) The Associate 
Administrator may terminate an approval issued under this section if he 
determines that--
    (i) Information upon which the approval was based is fraudulent or 
substantially erroneous; or
    (ii) Termination of the approval is necessary to adequately protect 
against risks to life and property; or
    (iii) The approval was not issued by the approval agency in good 
faith; or
    (iv) The portable tank does not meet the specification.
    (2) Before an approval is terminated, the Associate Administrator 
gives the interested party(ies):
    (i) Written notice of the facts or conduct believed to warrant the 
termination;
    (ii) Opportunity to submit oral and written evidence; and
    (iii) Opportunity to demonstrate or achieve compliance with the 
applicable requirements.
    (3) If the Associate Administrator determines that a certificate of 
approval must be terminated to preclude a significant and imminent 
adverse affect on public safety, he may terminate the certificate 
immediately. In such circumstances, the opportunities of paragraphs 
(f)(2) (ii) and (iii) of this section need not be provided prior to 
termination of the approval, but shall be provided as soon as 
practicable thereafter.

[66 FR 33439, June 21, 2001, as amended at 67 FR 61016, Sept. 27, 2002]



Sec. 178.274  Specifications for UN portable tanks.

    (a) General. (1) Each UN portable tank must meet the requirements of 
this section. In addition to the requirements of this section, 
requirements specific to UN portable tanks used for liquid and solid 
hazardous materials, non-refrigerated liquefied gases and refrigerated 
liquefied gases are provided in Secs. 178.275, 178.276 and 178.277, 
respectively. Requirements for approval, maintenance, inspection, 
testing and use are provided in Sec. 178.273 and part 180, subpart G, of 
this subchapter. Any portable tank which meets the definition of a 
``container'' within the terms of the International Convention for Safe 
Containers (CSC) must meet the requirements of the CSC as amended and 49 
CFR parts 450 through 453 and must have a CSC safety approval plate.

[[Page 857]]

    (2) In recognition of scientific and technological advances, the 
technical requirements applicable to UN portable tanks may be varied if 
approved by the Associate Administrator and the portable tank is shown 
to provide a level of safety equal to or exceeding the requirements of 
this subchapter. Portable tanks approved to alternative technical 
requirements must be marked ``Alternative Arrangement'' as specified in 
paragraph (i) of this section.
    (3) Definitions. The following definitions apply for the purposes of 
design and construction of UN portable tanks under this subpart:
    Alternate Arrangement portable tank means a UN portable tank that 
has been approved to alternative technical requirements or testing 
methods other than those specified for UN portable tanks in part 178 or 
part 180 of this subchapter.
    Approval agency means the designated approval agency authorized to 
approve the portable tank in accordance with the procedures in subpart E 
of part 107 of this subchapter.
    Design pressure is defined according to the hazardous materials 
intended to be transported in the portable tank. See Secs. 178.275, 
178.276 and 178.277, as applicable.
    Design type means a portable tank or series of portable tanks made 
of materials of the same material specifications and thicknesses, 
manufactured by a single manufacturer, using the same fabrication 
techniques (for example, welding procedures) and made with equivalent 
structural equipment, closures, and service equipment.
    Fine grain steel means steel which has a ferritic grain size of 6 or 
finer when determined in accordance with ASTM E 112-96 (see Sec. 171.7 
of this subchapter).
    Fusible element means a non-reclosing pressure relief device that is 
thermally activated and that provides protection against excessive 
pressure buildup in the portable tank developed by exposure to heat, 
such as from a fire (see Sec. 178.275(g)).
    Jacket means the outer insulation cover or cladding which may be 
part of the insulation system.
    Leakage test means a test using gas to subject the shell and its 
service equipment to an internal pressure.
    Maximum allowable working pressure (MAWP) is defined according to 
the hazardous materials intended to be transported in the portable tank. 
See Secs. 178.275, 178.276 and 178.277, as applicable.
    Maximum permissible gross mass (MPGM) means the sum of the tare mass 
of the portable tank and the heaviest hazardous material authorized for 
transportation.
    Mild steel means a steel with a guaranteed minimum tensile strength 
of 360 N/mm\2\ to 440 N/mm\2\ and a guaranteed minimum elongation at 
fracture as specified in paragraph (c)(10) of this section.
    Offshore portable tank means a portable tank specially designed for 
repeated use in the transportation of hazardous materials to, from and 
between offshore facilities. An offshore portable tank is designed and 
constructed in accordance with the Guidelines for the Approval of 
Containers Handled in Open Seas specified in the IMDG Code (see 
Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).
    Reference steel means a steel with a tensile strength of 370 N/mm\2\ 
and an elongation at fracture of 27%.
    Service equipment means measuring instruments and filling, 
discharge, venting, safety, heating, cooling and insulating devices.
    Shell means the part of the portable tank which retains the 
hazardous materials intended for transportation, including openings and 
closures, but does not include service equipment or external structural 
equipment.
    Structural equipment means the reinforcing, fastening, protective 
and stabilizing members external to the shell.
    Test pressure means the maximum gauge pressure at the top of the 
shell during the hydraulic pressure test equal to not less than 1.5 
times the design pressure for liquids and 1.3 for liquefied compressed 
gases and refrigerated liquefied gases. In some instances a pneumatic 
test is authorized as an alternative to the hydraulic test. The minimum 
test pressures for portable tanks intended for specific liquid and solid 
hazardous materials are specified in the applicable portable tank T

[[Page 858]]

codes (such as T1-T23) assigned to these hazardous materials in the 
Sec. 172.101 Table of this subchapter.
    (b) General design and construction requirements. (1) The design 
temperature range for the shell must be -40  deg.C to 50  deg.C (-40 
deg.F to 122  deg.F) for hazardous materials transported under normal 
conditions of transportation, except for portable tanks used for 
refrigerated liquefied gases where the minimum design temperature must 
not be higher than the lowest (coldest) temperature (for example, 
service temperature) of the contents during filling, discharge or 
transportation. For hazardous materials handled under elevated 
temperature conditions, the design temperature must not be less than the 
maximum temperature of the hazardous material during filling, discharge 
or transportation. More severe design temperatures must be considered 
for portable tanks subjected to severe climatic conditions (for example, 
portable tanks transported in arctic regions). Shells must be designed 
and constructed in accordance with the requirements of the ASME Code, 
Section VIII, Division 1 (see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter), except as 
limited or modified in this subchapter. For portable tanks used for 
liquid or solid hazardous materials, a design code other than the ASME 
Code may be used if approved by the Associate Administrator. Portable 
tanks used for non-refrigerated and refrigerated liquified compressed 
gases require an ASME certification and U stamp. Shells must be made of 
metallic materials suitable for forming. Non-metallic materials may be 
used for the attachments and supports between the shell and jacket, 
provided their material properties at the minimum and maximum design 
temperatures are proven to be sufficient. For welded shells, only a 
material whose weldability has been fully demonstrated may be used. 
Welds must be of high quality and conform to a level of integrity at 
least equivalent to the welding requirements specified in Section VIII 
of the ASME Code for the welding of pressure vessels. When the 
manufacturing process or the materials make it necessary, the shells 
must be suitably heat-treated to guarantee adequate toughness in the 
weld and in the heat-affected zones. In choosing the material, the 
design temperature range must be taken into account with respect to risk 
of brittle fracture, stress corrosion cracking, resistance to impact, 
and suitability for the hazardous materials intended for transportation 
in the portable tank. When fine grain steel is used, the guaranteed 
value of the yield strength must be not more than 460 N/mm\2\ and the 
guaranteed value of the upper limit of the tensile strength must be not 
more than 725 N/mm\2\ according to the material specification. Aluminum 
may not be used as a construction material for the shells of portable 
tanks intended for the transport of non-refrigerated liquefied gases. 
For portable tanks intended for the transport of liquid or solid 
hazardous materials, aluminum may only be used as a construction 
material for portable tank shells if approved by the Associate 
Administrator. Portable tank materials must be suitable for the external 
environment where they will be transported, taking into account the 
determined design temperature range. Portable tanks shall be designed to 
withstand, without loss of contents, at least the internal pressure due 
to the contents and the static, dynamic and thermal loads during normal 
conditions of handling and transportation. The design must take into 
account the effects of fatigue, caused by repeated application of these 
loads through the expected life of the portable tank.
    (2) Portable tank shells, fittings, and pipework shall be 
constructed from materials that are:
    (i) Compatible with the hazardous materials intended to be 
transported; or
    (ii) Properly passivated or neutralized by chemical reaction, if 
applicable; or
    (iii) For portable tanks used for liquid and solid materials, lined 
with corrosion-resistant material directly bonded to the shell or 
attached by equivalent means.
    (3) Gaskets and seals shall be made of materials that are compatible 
with the hazardous materials intended to be transported.
    (4) When shells are lined, the lining must be compatible with the 
hazardous materials intended to be transported,

[[Page 859]]

homogeneous, non-porous, free from perforations, sufficiently elastic 
and compatible with the thermal expansion characteristics of the shell. 
The lining of every shell, shell fittings and piping must be continuous 
and must extend around the face of any flange. Where external fittings 
are welded to the tank, the lining must be continuous through the 
fitting and around the face of external flanges. Joints and seams in the 
lining must be made by fusing the material together or by other equally 
effective means.
    (5) Contact between dissimilar metals which could result in damage 
by galvanic action must be prevented by appropriate measures.
    (6) The construction materials of the portable tank, including any 
devices, gaskets, linings and accessories, must not adversely affect or 
react with the hazardous materials intended to be transported in the 
portable tank.
    (7) Portable tanks must be designed and constructed with supports 
that provide a secure base during transportation and with suitable 
lifting and tie-down attachments.
    (c) Design criteria. (1) Portable tanks and their fastenings must, 
under the maximum permissible loads and maximum permissible working 
pressures, be capable of absorbing the following separately applied 
static forces (for calculation purposes, acceleration due to gravity (g) 
=9.81m/s\2\):
    (i) In the direction of travel: 2g (twice the MPGM multiplied by the 
acceleration due to gravity);
    (ii) Horizontally at right angles to the direction of travel: 1g 
(the MPGM multiplied by the acceleration due to gravity);
    (iii) Vertically upwards: 1g (the MPGM multiplied by the 
acceleration due to gravity); and
    (iv) Vertically downwards: 2g (twice the MPGM multiplied by the 
acceleration due to gravity).
    (2) Under each of the forces specified in paragraph (c)(1) of this 
section, the safety factor must be as follows:
    (i) For metals having a clearly defined yield point, a design margin 
of 1.5 in relation to the guaranteed yield strength; or
    (ii) For metals with no clearly defined yield point, a design margin 
of 1.5 in relation to the guaranteed 0.2% proof strength and, for 
austenitic steels, the 1% proof strength.
    (3) The values of yield strength or proof strength must be the 
values according to recognized material standards. When austenitic 
steels are used, the specified minimum values of yield strength or proof 
strength according to the material standards may be increased by up to 
15% for portable tanks used for liquid and solid hazardous materials, 
other than toxic by inhalation liquids meeting the criteria of Hazard 
Zone A or Hazard Zone B (see Sec. 173.133 of this subchapter), when 
these greater values are attested in the material inspection 
certificate.
    (4) Portable tanks must be capable of being electrically grounded to 
prevent dangerous electrostatic discharge when they are used for Class 2 
flammable gases or Class 3 flammable liquids, including elevated 
temperature materials transported at or above their flash point.
    (5) For shells of portable tanks used for liquefied compressed 
gases, the shell must consist of a circular cross section. Shells must 
be of a design capable of being stress-analysed mathematically or 
experimentally by resistance strain gauges as specified in UG-101, 
Section VIII of the ASME Code (see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter), or 
other methods approved by the Associate Administrator.
    (6) Shells must be designed and constructed to withstand a hydraulic 
test pressure of not less than 1.5 times the design pressure for 
portable tanks used for liquids and 1.3 times the design pressure for 
portable tanks used for liquefied compressed gases. Specific 
requirements are provided for each hazardous material in the applicable 
T Code or portable tank special provision specified in the Sec. 172.101 
Table of this subchapter. The minimum shell thickness requirements must 
also be taken into account.
    (7) For metals exhibiting a clearly defined yield point or 
characterized by a guaranteed proof strength (0.2% proof strength, 
generally, or 1% proof strength for austenitic steels), the primary 
membrane stress [sigma] (sigma) in the shell must not exceed 0.75 Re or 
0.50

[[Page 860]]

Rm, whichever is lower, at the test pressure, where:

Re = yield strength in N/mm2, or 0.2% proof strength or, for 
austenitic steels, 1% proof strength;
Rm = minimum tensile strength in N/mm\2\.

    (8) The values of Re and Rm to be used must be the specified minimum 
values according to recognized material standards. When austenitic 
steels are used, the specified minimum values for Re and Rm according to 
the material standards may be increased by up to 15% when greater values 
are attested in the material inspection certificate.
    (9) Steels which have a Re/Rm ratio of more than 0.85 are not 
allowed for the construction of welded shells. The values of Re and Rm 
to be used in determining this ratio must be the values specified in the 
material inspection certificate.
    (10) Steels used in the construction of shells must have an 
elongation at fracture, in percentage, of not less than 10,000/Rm with 
an absolute minimum of 16% for fine grain steels and 20% for other 
steels.
    (11) For the purpose of determining actual values for materials for 
sheet metal, the axis of the tensile test specimen must be at right 
angles (transversely) to the direction of rolling. The permanent 
elongation at fracture must be measured on test specimens of rectangular 
cross sections in accordance with ISO 6892 (see Sec. 171.7 of this 
subchapter), using a 50 mm gauge length.
    (d) Minimum shell thickness. (1) The minimum shell thickness must be 
the greatest thickness of the following:
    (i) the minimum thickness determined in accordance with the 
requirements of paragraphs (d)(2) through (d)(7) of this section;
    (ii) the minimum thickness determined in accordance with Section 
VIII of the ASME Code (see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter) or other 
approved pressure vessel code; or
    (iii) the minimum thickness specified in the applicable T code or 
portable tank special provision indicated for each hazardous material in 
the Sec. 172.101 Table of this subchapter.
    (2) Shells (cylindrical portions, heads and manhole covers) not more 
than 1.80 m in diameter may not be less than 5 mm thick in the reference 
steel or of equivalent thickness in the metal to be used. Shells more 
than 1.80 m in diameter may not be less than 6 mm (0.2 inches) thick in 
the reference steel or of equivalent thickness in the metal to be used. 
For portable tanks used only for the transportation of powdered or 
granular solid hazardous materials of Packing Group II or III, the 
minimum thickness requirement may be reduced to 5 mm in the reference 
steel or of equivalent thickness in the metal to be used regardless of 
the shell diameter. For vacuum-insulated tanks, the aggregate thickness 
of the jacket and the shell must correspond to the minimum thickness 
prescribed in this paragraph, with the thickness of the shell itself not 
less than the minimum thickness prescribed in paragraph (d)(3) of this 
section.
    (3) When additional protection against shell damage is provided in 
the case of portable tanks used for liquid and solid hazardous materials 
requiring test pressures less than 2.65 bar (265.0 kPa), subject to 
certain limitations specified in the UN Recommendations (see Sec. 171.7 
of this subchapter), the Associate Administrator may approve a reduced 
minimum shell thickness.
    (4) The cylindrical portions, heads and manhole covers of all shells 
must not be less than 3 mm (0.1 inch) thick regardless of the material 
of construction, except for portable tanks used for liquefied compressed 
gases where the cylindrical portions, ends (heads) and manhole covers of 
all shells must not be less than 4 mm (0.2 inch) thick regardless of the 
material of construction.
    (5) When steel is used, that has characteristics other than that of 
reference steel, the equivalent thickness of the shell and heads must be 
determined according to the following formula:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TN21JN01.005

Where:

e1 = required equivalent thickness (in mm) of the metal to be 
          used;
e0 = minimum thickness (in mm) of the reference steel 
          specified in the applicable T code or portable tank special 
          provision

[[Page 861]]

          indicated for each material in the Sec. 172.101 Table of this 
          subchapter;
d1 = 1.8m, unless the formula is used to determine the 
          equivalent minimum thickness for a portable tank shell that is 
          required to have a minimum thickness of 8mm or 10mm according 
          to the applicable T code indicated in the Sec. 172.101 Table 
          of this subchapter. When reference steel thicknesses of 8mm or 
          10mm are specified, d1 is equal to the actual 
          diameter of the shell but not less than 1.8m;
Rm1 = guaranteed minimum tensile strength (in N/mm \2\) of 
          the metal to be used;
A1 = guaranteed minimum elongation at fracture (in %) of the 
          metal to be used according to recognized material standards.

    (6) The wall and all parts of the shell may not have a thickness 
less than that prescribed in paragraphs (d)(2), (d)(3) and (d)(4) of 
this section. This thickness must be exclusive of any corrosion 
allowance.
    (7) There must be no sudden change of plate thickness at the 
attachment of the heads to the cylindrical portion of the shell.
    (e) Service equipment. (1) Service equipment must be arranged so 
that it is protected against the risk of mechanical damage by external 
forces during handling and transportation. When the connections between 
the frame and the shell allow relative movement between the sub-
assemblies, the equipment must be fastened to allow such movement 
without risk of damage to any working part. The external discharge 
fittings (pipe sockets, shut-off devices) and the internal stop-valve 
and its seating must be protected against mechanical damage by external 
forces (for example, by using shear sections). Each internal self-
closing stop-valve must be protected by a shear section or sacrificial 
device located outboard of the valve. The shear section or sacrificial 
device must break at no more than 70% of the load that would cause 
failure of the internal self-closing stop valve. The filling and 
discharge devices (including flanges or threaded plugs) and any 
protective caps must be capable of being secured against unintended 
opening.
    (2) Each filling or discharge opening of a portable tank must be 
clearly marked to indicate its function.
    (3) Each stop-valve or other means of closure must be designed and 
constructed to a rated pressure not less than the MAWP of the shell 
taking into account the temperatures expected during transport. All 
stop-valves with screwed spindles must close by a clockwise motion of 
the handwheel. For other stop-valves, the position (open and closed) and 
direction of closure must be clearly indicated. All stop-valves must be 
designed to prevent unintentional opening.
    (4) Piping must be designed, constructed and installed to avoid the 
risk of damage due to thermal expansion and contraction, mechanical 
shock and vibration. All piping must be of a suitable metallic material. 
Welded pipe joints must be used wherever possible.
    (5) Joints in copper tubing must be brazed or have an equally strong 
metal union. The melting point of brazing materials must be no lower 
than 525  deg.C (977  deg.F). The joints must not decrease the strength 
of the tubing, such as may happen when cutting threads. Brazed joints 
are not authorized for portable tanks intended for refrigerated 
liquefied gases.
    (6) The burst pressure of all piping and pipe fittings must be 
greater than the highest of four times the MAWP of the shell or four 
times the pressure to which it may be subjected in service by the action 
of a pump or other device (except pressure relief devices).
    (7) Ductile metals must be used in the construction of valves and 
accessories.
    (f) Pressure relief devices.--(1) Marking of pressure relief 
devices. Every pressure relief device must be clearly and permanently 
marked with the following:
    (i) the pressure (in bar or kPa) or temperature for fusible elements 
(in  deg.C) at which it is set to discharge;
    (ii) the allowable tolerance at the discharge pressure for reclosing 
devices;
    (iii) the reference temperature corresponding to the rated pressure 
for frangible discs;
    (iv) the allowable temperature tolerance for fusible elements;
    (v) the rated flow capacity of the device in standard cubic meters 
of air per second (m\3\/s)determined according to ISO 4126-1 (see 
Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter); and

[[Page 862]]

    (vi) when practicable, the device must show the manufacturer's name 
and product number.
    (2) Connections to pressure relief devices. Connections to pressure 
relief devices must be of sufficient size to enable the required 
discharge to pass unrestricted to the safety device. No stop-valve may 
be installed between the shell and the pressure relief devices except 
where duplicate devices are provided for maintenance or other reasons 
and the stop-valves serving the devices actually in use are locked open 
or the stop-valves are interlocked so that at least one of the devices 
is always in use. There must be no obstruction in an opening leading to 
a vent or pressure relief device which might restrict or cut-off the 
flow from the shell to that device. Vents or pipes from the pressure 
relief device outlets, when used, must deliver the relieved vapor or 
liquid to the atmosphere in conditions of minimum back-pressure on the 
relieving devices.
    (3) Location of pressure relief devices. (i) Each pressure relief 
device inlet must be situated on top of the shell in a position as near 
the longitudinal and transverse center of the shell as reasonably 
practicable. All pressure relief device inlets must, under maximum 
filling conditions, be situated in the vapor space of the shell and the 
devices must be so arranged as to ensure that any escaping vapor is not 
restricted in any manner. For flammable hazardous materials, the 
escaping vapor must be directed away from the shell in such a manner 
that it cannot impinge upon the shell. For refrigerated liquefied gases, 
the escaping vapor must be directed away from the tank and in such a 
manner that it cannot impinge upon the tank. Protective devices which 
deflect the flow of vapor are permissible provided the required relief-
device capacity is not reduced.
    (ii) Provisions must be implemented to prevent unauthorized persons 
from access to the pressure relief devices and to protect the devices 
from damage caused by the portable tank overturning.
    (g) Gauging devices. Unless a portable tank is intended to be filled 
by weight, it must be equipped with one or more gauging devices. Glass 
level-gauges and gauges made of other fragile material, which are in 
direct communication with the contents of the tank are prohibited. A 
connection for a vacuum gauge must be provided in the jacket of a 
vacuum-insulated portable tank.
    (h) Portable tank supports, frameworks, lifting and tie-down 
attachments. (1) Portable tanks must be designed and constructed with a 
support structure to provide a secure base during transport. The forces 
and safety factors specified in paragraphs (c)(1) and (c)(2) of this 
section, respectively, must be taken into account in this aspect of the 
design. Skids, frameworks, cradles or other similar structures are 
acceptable.
    (2) The combined stresses caused by portable tank mountings (for 
example, cradles, framework, etc.) and portable tank lifting and tie-
down attachments must not cause stress that would damage the shell in a 
manner that would compromise its lading retention capability. Permanent 
lifting and tie-down attachments must be fitted to all portable tanks. 
Preferably they should be fitted to the portable tank supports but may 
be secured to reinforcing plates located on the shell at the points of 
support. Each portable tank must be designed so that the center of 
gravity of the filled tank is approximately centered within the points 
of attachment for lifting devices.
    (3) In the design of supports and frameworks, the effects of 
environmental corrosion must be taken into account.
    (4) Forklift pockets must be capable of being closed off. The means 
of closing forklift pockets must be a permanent part of the framework or 
permanently attached to the framework. Single compartment portable tanks 
with a length less than 3.65 m (12 ft.) need not have forklift pockets 
that are capable of being closed off provided that:
    (i) The shell, including all the fittings, are well protected from 
being hit by the forklift blades; and
    (ii) The distance between forklift pockets (measured from the center 
of each pocket) is at least half of the maximum length of the portable 
tank.
    (5) During transport, portable tanks must be adequately protected 
against

[[Page 863]]

damage to the shell, and service equipment resulting from lateral and 
longitudinal impact and overturning, or the shell and service equipment 
must be constructed to withstand the forces resulting from impact or 
overturning. External fittings must be protected so as to preclude the 
release of the shell contents upon impact or overturning of the portable 
tank on its fittings. Examples of protection include:
    (i) Protection against lateral impact which may consist of 
longitudinal bars protecting the shell on both sides at the level of the 
median line;
    (ii) Protection of the portable tank against overturning which may 
consist of reinforcement rings or bars fixed across the frame;
    (iii) Protection against rear impact which may consist of a bumper 
or frame;
    (iv) Protection of the shell against damage from impact or 
overturning by use of an ISO frame in accordance with ISO 1496-3 (see 
Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter); and
    (v) Protection of the portable tank from impact or damage that may 
result from overturning by an insulation jacket.
    (i) Marking. (1) Every portable tank must be fitted with a corrosion 
resistant metal plate permanently attached to the portable tank in a 
conspicuous place and readily accessible for inspection. When the plate 
cannot be permanently attached to the shell, the shell must be marked 
with at least the information required by Section VIII of the ASME Code 
(see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter). At a minimum, the following 
information must be marked on the plate by stamping or by any other 
equivalent method:

Country of manufacture
U N
Approval Country
Approval Number
Alternative Arrangements (see Sec. 178.247(a)(2)) ``AA''
Manufacturer's name or mark
Manufacturer's serial number
Approval Agency (Authorized body for the design approval)
Owner's registration number
Year of manufacture
Pressure vessel code to which the shell is designed
Test pressure--------bar gauge.
MAWP--------bar gauge.
External design pressure (not required for portable tanks used for 
          refrigerated liquefied gases)--------bar gauge.
Design temperature range--------  deg.C to--------  deg.C. (For portable 
          tanks used for refrigerated liquefied gases, the minimum 
          design temperature must be marked.)
Water capacity at 20  deg.C/--------liters.
Water capacity of each compartment at 20  deg.C--------liters.
Initial pressure test date and witness identification.
MAWP for heating/cooling system--------bar gauge.
Shell material(s) and material standard reference(s).
Equivalent thickness in reference steel--------mm.
Lining material (when applicable).
Date and type of most recent periodic test(s).
Month--------Year--------Test pressure--------bar gauge.
Stamp of approval agency that performed or witnessed the most recent 
          test.

    For portable tanks used for refrigerated liquefied gases:

Either ``thermally insulated'' or ``vacuum insulated''--------.
Effectiveness of the insulation system (heat influx)--------Watts (W).
Reference holding time--------days or hours and initial pressure--------
          bar/kPa gauge and degree of filling--------in kg for each 
          refrigerated liquefied gas permitted for transportation.

    (2) The following information must be marked either on the portable 
tank itself or on a metal plate firmly secured to the portable tank:

Name of the operator.
Name of hazardous materials being transported and maximum mean bulk 
          temperature (except for refrigerated liquefied gases, the name 
          and temperature are only required when the maximum mean bulk 
          temperature is higher than 50  deg.C).
Maximum permissible gross mass (MPGM)--------kg.
Unladen (tare) mass--------kg.
    Note to Paragraph (i)(2): For the identification of the hazardous 
materials being transported refer to part 172 of this subchapter.
    (3) If a portable tank is designed and approved for open seas 
operations, such as offshore oil exploration, in accordance with the 
IMDG Code, the words ``OFFSHORE PORTABLE TANK'' must be marked on the 
identification plate.
    (j) Initial inspection and test. The initial inspection and test of 
a portable tank must include the following:

[[Page 864]]

    (1) A check of the design characteristics.
    (2) An internal and external examination of the portable tank and 
its fittings, taking into account the hazardous materials to be 
transported. For UN portable tanks used for refrigerated liquefied 
gases, a pressure test using an inert gas may be conducted instead of a 
hydrostatic test. An internal inspection is not required for a portable 
tank used for the dedicated transportation of refrigerated liquefied 
gases that are not filled with an inspection opening.
    (3) A pressure test as specified in paragraph (i) of this section.
    (4) A leakage test.
    (5) A test of the satisfactory operation of all service equipment 
including pressure relief devices must also be performed. When the shell 
and its fittings have been pressure-tested separately, they must be 
subjected to a leakage test after reassembly. All welds, subject to full 
stress level in the shell, must be inspected during the initial test by 
radiographic, ultrasonic, or another suitable non-destructive test 
method. This does not apply to the jacket.
    (6) A UN portable tank that meets the definition of ``container'' in 
the CSC (see 49 CFR 450.3(a)(2)) must be subjected to an impact test 
using a prototype representing each design type. The prototype portable 
tank must be shown to be capable of absorbing the forces resulting from 
an impact not less than 4 times (4 g) the maximum permissable gross mass 
of the fully loaded portable tank at a duration typical of the 
mechanical shocks experienced in rail transportation. A listing of 
standards describing methods acceptable for performing the impact test 
are provided in the UN Recommendations (see Sec. 171.7 of this 
subchapter). UN portable tanks used for the dedicated transportation of 
``Helium, refrigerated liquid,'' UN1963 and ``Hydrogen, refrigerated 
liquid,'' UN1966 that are marked ``NOT FOR RAIL TRANSPORT'' in letters 
of a minimum height of 20 cm (8 inches) on at least two sides of the 
portable tank are excepted from the 4 g impact test.
    (7) The following tests must be completed on a portable tank or a 
series of portable tanks designed and constructed to a single design 
type that is also a CSC container without leakage or deformation that 
would render the portable tank unsafe for transportation and use:
    (i) Longitudinal inertia. The portable tank loaded to its maximum 
gross weight must be positioned with its longitudinal axis vertical. It 
shall be held in this position for five minutes by support at the lower 
end of the base structure providing vertical and lateral restraint and 
by support at the upper end of the base structure providing lateral 
restraint only.
    (ii) Lateral inertia. The portable tank loaded to its maximum gross 
weight must be positioned for five minutes with its transverse axis 
vertical. It shall be held in this position for five minutes by support 
at the lower side of the base structure providing vertical and lateral 
restraint and by support at the upper side of the base structure 
providing lateral restraint only.

[66 FR 33440, June 21, 2001, as amended at 67 FR 15744, Apr. 3, 2002]



Sec. 178.275  Specification for UN Portable Tanks intended for the transportation of liquid and solid hazardous materials.

    (a) In addition to the requirements of Sec. 178.274, this section 
sets forth definitions and requirements that apply to UN portable tanks 
intended for the transportation of liquid and solid hazardous materials.
    (b) Definitions and requirements--(1) Design pressure means the 
pressure to be used in calculations required by the recognized pressure 
vessel code. The design pressure must not be less than the highest of 
the following pressures:
    (i) The maximum effective gauge pressure allowed in the shell during 
filling or discharge; or
    (ii) The sum of--
    (A) The absolute vapor pressure (in bar) of the hazardous material 
at 65  deg.C, minus 1 bar (149  deg.F, minus 100 kPa);
    (B) The partial pressure (in bar) of air or other gases in the 
ullage space, resulting from their compression during filling without 
pressure relief by a maximum ullage temperature of 65  deg.C (149 
deg.F) and a liquid expansion due to an increase in mean bulk 
temperature of 35  deg.C (95  deg.F); and

[[Page 865]]

    (C) A head pressure determined on the basis of the forces specified 
in Sec. 178.274(c) of this subchapter, but not less than 0.35 bar (35 
kPa).
    (2) Maximum allowable working pressure (MAWP) means a pressure that 
must not be less than the highest of the following pressures measured at 
the top of the shell while in operating position:
    (i) The maximum effective gauge pressure allowed in the shell during 
filling or discharge; or
    (ii) The maximum effective gauge pressure to which the shell is 
designed which must be not less than the design pressure.
    (c) Service equipment. (1) In addition to the requirements specified 
in Sec. 178.274, for service equipment, all openings in the shell, 
intended for filling or discharging the portable tank must be fitted 
with a manually operated stop-valve located as close to the shell as 
reasonably practicable. Other openings, except for openings leading to 
venting or pressure relief devices, must be equipped with either a stop-
valve or another suitable means of closure located as close to the shell 
as reasonably practicable.
    (2) All portable tanks must be fitted with a manhole or other 
inspection openings of a suitable size to allow for internal inspection 
and adequate access for maintenance and repair of the interior. 
Compartmented portable tanks must have a manhole or other inspection 
openings for each compartment.
    (3) For insulated portable tanks, top fittings must be surrounded by 
a spill collection reservoir with suitable drains.
    (4) Piping must be designed, constructed and installed to avoid the 
risk of damage due to thermal expansion and contraction, mechanical 
shock and vibration. All piping must be of a suitable metallic material. 
Welded pipe joints must be used wherever possible.
    (d) Bottom openings. (1) Certain hazardous materials may not be 
transported in portable tanks with bottom openings. When the applicable 
T code or portable tank special provision, as referenced for materials 
in the Sec. 172.101 Table of this subchapter, specifies that bottom 
openings are prohibited, there must be no openings below the liquid 
level of the shell when it is filled to its maximum permissible filling 
limit. When an existing opening is closed, it must be accomplished by 
internally and externally welding one plate to the shell.
    (2) Bottom discharge outlets for portable tanks carrying certain 
solid, crystallizable or highly viscous hazardous materials must be 
equipped with at least two serially fitted and mutually independent 
shut-off devices. Use of only two shut-off devices is only authorized 
when this paragraph is referenced in the applicable T Code indicated for 
each hazardous material in the Sec. 172.101 Table of this subchapter. 
The design of the equipment must be to the satisfaction of the approval 
agency and must include:
    (i) An external stop-valve fitted as close to the shell as 
reasonably practicable; and
    (ii) A liquid tight closure at the end of the discharge pipe, which 
may be a bolted blank flange or a screw cap.
    (3) Except as provided in paragraph (c)(2) of this section, every 
bottom discharge outlet must be equipped with three serially fitted and 
mutually independent shut-off devices. The design of the equipment must 
include:
    (i) A self-closing internal stop-valve, which is a stop-valve within 
the shell or within a welded flange or its companion flange, such that:
    (A) The control devices for the operation of the valve are designed 
to prevent any unintended opening through impact or other inadvertent 
act;
    (B) The valve is operable from above or below;
    (C) If possible, the setting of the valve (open or closed) must be 
capable of being verified from the ground;
    (D) Except for portable tanks having a capacity less than 1,000 
liters (264.2 gallons), it must be possible to close the valve from an 
accessible position on the portable tank that is remote from the valve 
itself within 30 seconds of actuation; and
    (E) The valve must continue to be effective in the event of damage 
to the external device for controlling the operation of the valve;

[[Page 866]]

    (ii) An external stop-valve fitted as close to the shell as 
reasonably practicable;
    (iii) A liquid tight closure at the end of the discharge pipe, which 
may be a bolted blank flange or a screw cap; and
    (iv) For portable tanks used for the transportation of liquid 
materials that are flammable, pyrophoric, oxidizing or toxic, the remote 
means of closure must be capable of thermal activation. The thermal 
means of activation must activate at a temperature of not more than 121 
deg.C (250  deg.F).
    (e) Pressure relief devices. All portable tanks must be fitted with 
at least one pressure relief device. All relief devices must be 
designed, constructed and marked in accordance with the requirements of 
this subchapter.
    (f) Vacuum-relief devices. (1) A shell which is to be equipped with 
a vacuum-relief device must be designed to withstand, without permanent 
deformation, an external pressure of not less than 0.21 bar (21.0 kPa). 
The vacuum-relief device must be set to relieve at a vacuum setting not 
greater than -0.21 bar (-21.0 kPa) unless the shell is designed for a 
higher external over pressure, in which case the vacuum-relief pressure 
of the device to be fitted must not be greater than the tank design 
vacuum pressure. A shell that is not fitted with a vacuum-relief device 
must be designed to withstand, without permanent deformation, an 
external pressure of not less than 0.4 bar (40.0 kPa).
    (2) Vacuum-relief devices used on portable tanks intended for the 
transportation of hazardous materials meeting the criteria of Class 3, 
including elevated temperature hazardous materials transported at or 
above their flash point, must prevent the immediate passage of flame 
into the shell or the portable tank must have a shell capable of 
withstanding, without leakage, an internal explosion resulting from the 
passage of flame into the shell.
    (g) Pressure relief devices. (1) Each portable tank with a capacity 
not less than 1,900 liters (501.9 gallons) and every independent 
compartment of a portable tank with a similar capacity, must be provided 
with one or more pressure relief devices of the reclosing type. Such 
portable tanks may, in addition, have a frangible disc or fusible 
element in parallel with the reclosing devices, except when the 
applicable T code assigned to a hazardous material requires that the 
frangible disc precede the pressure relief device, according to 
paragraph (g)(3) of this section, or when no bottom openings are 
allowed. The pressure relief devices must have sufficient capacity to 
prevent rupture of the shell due to over pressurization or vacuum 
resulting from filling, discharging, heating of the contents or fire.
    (2) Pressure relief devices must be designed to prevent the entry of 
foreign matter, the leakage of liquid and the development of any 
dangerous excess pressure.
    (3) When required for certain hazardous materials by the applicable 
T code or portable tank special provision specified for a hazardous 
material in the Sec. 172.101 Table of this subchapter, portable tanks 
must have a pressure relief device consistent with the requirements of 
this subchapter. Except for a portable tank in dedicated service that is 
fitted with an approved relief device constructed of materials 
compatible with the hazardous material, the relief device system must 
include a frangible disc preceding (such as, between the lading and the 
reclosing pressure relief device) a reclosing pressure relief device. A 
pressure gauge or suitable tell-tale indicator for the detection of disc 
rupture, pin-holing or leakage must be provided in the space between the 
frangible disc and the pressure relief device to allow the portable tank 
operator to check to determine if the disc is leak free. The frangible 
disc must rupture at a nominal pressure 10% above the start-to-discharge 
pressure of the reclosable pressure relief device.
    (4) Every portable tank with a capacity less than 1,900 liters 
(501.9 gallons) must be fitted with a pressure relief device which, 
except as provided in paragraph (g)(3) of this section, may be a 
frangible disc when this disc is set to rupture at a nominal pressure 
equal to the test pressure at any temperature within the design 
temperature range.
    (5) When the shell is fitted for pressure discharge, a suitable 
pressure relief device must provide the inlet line

[[Page 867]]

to the portable tank and set to operate at a pressure not higher than 
the MAWP of the shell, and a stop-valve must be fitted as close to the 
shell as practicable to minimize the potential for damage.
    (6) Setting of pressure relief devices. (i) Pressure relief devices 
must operate only in conditions of excessive rise in temperature. The 
shell must not be subject to undue fluctuations of pressure during 
normal conditions of transportation.
    (ii) The required pressure relief device must be set to start to 
discharge at a nominal pressure of five-sixths of the test pressure for 
shells having a test pressure of not more than 4.5 bar (450 kPa) and 
110% of two-thirds of the test pressure for shells having a test 
pressure of more than 4.5 bar (450 kPa). A self-closing relief device 
must close at a pressure not more than 10% below the pressure at which 
the discharge starts. The device must remain closed at all lower 
pressures. This requirement does not prevent the use of vacuum-relief or 
combination pressure relief and vacuum-relief devices.
    (h) Fusible elements. Fusible elements must operate at a temperature 
between 110  deg.C (230  deg.F) and 149  deg.C (300.2  deg.F) provided 
that the pressure in the shell at the fusing temperature will not exceed 
the test pressure. They must be placed at the top of the shell with 
their inlets in the vapor space and in no case may they be shielded from 
external heat. Fusible elements must not be utilized on portable tanks 
with a test pressure which exceeds 2.65 bar (265.0 kPa). Fusible 
elements used on portable tanks intended for the transport of elevated 
temperature hazardous materials must be designed to operate at a 
temperature higher than the maximum temperature that will be experienced 
during transport and must be designed to the satisfaction of the 
approval agency.
    (i) Capacity of pressure relief devices. (1) The reclosing pressure 
relief device required by paragraph (g)(1) of this section must have a 
minimum cross sectional flow area equivalent to an orifice of 31.75 mm 
(1.3 inches) diameter. Vacuum-relief devices, when used, must have a 
cross sectional flow area not less than 284 mm \2\ (11.2 inches \2\).
    (2) Under conditions of complete fire engulfment of the portable 
tank, the combined delivery capacity of the relief devices must be 
sufficient to limit the pressure in the shell to 20% above the start-to-
discharge pressure specified in paragraph (g)(6) of this section. 
Emergency pressure relief devices may be used to achieve the full relief 
capacity prescribed. The total required capacity of the relief devices 
may be determined using the formula in paragraph (i)(2)(i)(A) of this 
section or the table in paragraph (i)(2)(iii) of this section.
    (i)(A) To determine the total required capacity of the relief 
devices, which must be regarded as being the sum of the individual 
capacities of all the contributing devices, the following formula must 
be used:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TN21JN01.006

Where:

Q = minimum required rate of discharge in cubic meters of air per second 
          (m \3\/s) at standard conditions: 1 bar and 0  deg.C (273 K);
F = for uninsulated shells: 1; for insulated shells: U(649-t)/13.6 but 
          in no case is less than 0.25 where: U = thermal conductance of 
          the insulation, in kW[middot]m-\2\ 
          K-\1\, at 38  deg.C; and t = actual temperature of 
          the hazardous material during filling (in  deg.C) or when this 
          temperature is unknown, let t = 15  deg.C. The value of F 
          given in this paragraph (i)(2)(i)(A) for insulated shells may 
          only be used if the insulation is in conformance with 
          paragraph (i)(2)(iv) of this section;
A = total external surface area of shell in square meters;
Z = the gas compressibility factor in the accumulating condition (when 
          this factor is unknown, let Z equal 1.0);
T = absolute temperature in Kelvin (  deg.C + 273) above the pressure 
          relief devices in the accumulating condition;
L = the latent heat of vaporization of the liquid, in kJ/kg, in the 
          accumulating condition;
M = molecular weight of the hazardous material.

    (B) The constant C, as shown in the formula in paragraph 
(i)(2)(i)(A) of this section, is derived from one of the following 
formula as a function of the ratio k of specific heats:

[[Page 868]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TN21JN01.007

Where:

cp is the specific heat at constant pressure; and
cv is the specific heat at constant volume.

    (C) When k 1:
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TN21JN01.008
    
    (D) When k = 1 or k is unknown, a value of 0.607 may be used for the 
constant C. C may also be taken from the following table:

                                             C Constant Value Table
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
               k    C                                k    C                                k    C
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                1.00    0.607                         1.26    0.660                         1.52    0.704
                1.02    0.611                         1.28    0.664                         1.54    0.707
                1.04    0.615                         1.30    0.667                         1.56    0.710
                1.06    0.620                         1.32    0.671                         1.58    0.713
                1.08    0.624                         1.34    0.674                         1.60    0.716
                1.10    0.628                         1.36    0.678                         1.62    0.719
                1.12    0.633                         1.38    0.681                         1.64    0.722
                1.14    0.637                         1.40    0.685                         1.66    0.725
                1.16    0.641                         1.42    0.688                         1.68    0.728
                1.18    0.645                         1.44    0.691                         1.70    0.731
                1.20    0.649                         1.46    0.695                         2.00    0.770
                1.22    0.652                         1.48    0.698                         2.20    0.793
                1.24    0.656                         1.50    0.701
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (ii) As an alternative to the formula in paragraph (i)(2)(i)(A) of 
this section, relief devices for shells used for transporting liquids 
may be sized in accordance with the table in paragraph (i)(2)(iii) of 
this section. The table in paragraph (i)(2)(iii) of this section assumes 
an insulation value of F = 1 and must be adjusted accordingly when the 
shell is insulated. Other values used in determining the table in 
paragraph (i)(2)(iii) of this section are: L = 334.94 kJ/kg; M = 86.7; T 
= 394 K; Z = 1; and C = 0.607.
    (iii) Minimum emergency vent capacity, Q, in cubic meters per air 
per second at 1 bar and 0  deg.C (273 K) shown in the following table:

                                         Minimum Emergency Vent Capacity
                                                   [Q Values]
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    A  Exposed area       Q  (Cubic meters of       A  Exposed area       Q  (Cubic meters of
    (square meters)         air per second)         (square meters)         air per second)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                  2                   0.230                    37.5                   2.539
                  3                   0.320                      40                   2.677
                  4                   0.405                    42.5                   2.814
                  5                   0.487                      45                   2.949
                  6                   0.565                    47.5                   3.082
                  7                   0.641                      50                   3.215
                  8                   0.715                    52.5                   3.346
                  9                   0.788                      55                   3.476
                 10                   0.859                    57.5                   3.605
                 12                   0.998                      60                   3.733
                 14                   1.132                    62.5                   3.860
                 16                   1.263                      65                   3.987
                 18                   1.391                    67.5                   4.112
                 20                   1.517                      70                   4.236
               22.5                   1.670                      75                   4.483
                 25                   1.821                      80                   4.726
               27.5                   1.969                      85                   4.967
                 30                   2.115                      90                   5.206
               32.5                   2.258                      95                   5.442
                 35                   2.400                     100                   5.676
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


[[Page 869]]

    (iv) Insulation systems, used for the purpose of reducing venting 
capacity, must be specifically approved by the approval agency. In all 
cases, insulation systems approved for this purpose must--
    (A) Remain effective at all temperatures up to 649  deg.C (1200.2 
deg.F); and
    (B) Be jacketed with a material having a melting point of 700  deg.C 
(1292  deg.F) or greater.
    (j) Approval, inspection and testing. Approval procedures for UN 
portable tanks are specified in Sec. 178.273. Inspection and testing 
requirements are specified in Sec. 180.605 of this subchapter.

[66 FR 33445, June 21, 2001]



Sec. 178.276  Requirements for the design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks intended for the transportation of non-refrigerated liquefied 
          compressed gases.

    (a) In addition to the requirements of Sec. 178.274 applicable to UN 
portable tanks, the following requirements apply to UN portable tanks 
used for non-refrigerated liquefied compressed gases. In addition to the 
definitions in Sec. 178.274, the following definitions apply:
    (1) Design pressure means the pressure to be used in calculations 
required by the ASME Code, Section VIII (see Sec. 171.7 of this 
subchapter). The design pressure must be not less than the highest of 
the following pressures:
    (i) The maximum effective gauge pressure allowed in the shell during 
filling or discharge; or
    (ii) The sum of:
    (A) The maximum effective gauge pressure to which the shell is 
designed as defined in this paragraph under ``MAWP''; and
    (B) A head pressure determined on the basis of the dynamic forces 
specified in paragraph (h) of this section, but not less than 0.35 bar 
(35 kPa).
    (2) Design reference temperature means the temperature at which the 
vapor pressure of the contents is determined for the purpose of 
calculating the MAWP. The value for each portable tank type is as 
follows:
    (i) Shell with a diameter of 1.5 meters (4.9 ft.) or less: 65  deg.C 
(149  deg.F); or
    (ii) Shell with a diameter of more than 1.5 meters (4.9 ft.):
    (A) Without insulation or sun shield: 60  deg.C (140  deg.F);
    (B) With sun shield: 55  deg.C (131  deg.F); and
    (C) With insulation: 50  deg.C (122  deg.F).
    (3) Filling density means the average mass of liquefied compressed 
gas per liter of shell capacity (kg/l).
    (4) Maximum allowable working pressure (MAWP) means a pressure that 
must be not less than the highest of the following pressures measured at 
the top of the shell while in operating position, but in no case less 
than 7 bar (700 kPa):
    (i) The maximum effective gauge pressure allowed in the shell during 
filling or discharge; or
    (ii) The maximum effective gauge pressure to which the shell is 
designed, which must be:
    (A) Not less than the pressure specified for each liquefied 
compressed gas listed in portable tank special provision T50; and
    (B) Not less than the sum of:
    (1) The absolute vapor pressure (in bar) of the liquefied compressed 
gas at the design reference temperature minus 1 bar; and
    (2) The partial pressure (in bar) of air or other gases in the 
ullage space which is determined by the design reference temperature and 
the liquid phase expansion due to the increase of the mean bulk 
temperature of tr-tf (tf = filling 
temperature, usually 15  deg.C, tr = 50  deg.C maximum mean 
bulk temperature).
    (b) General design and construction requirements. (1) Shells must be 
of seamless or welded steel construction, or combination of both, and 
have a water capacity greater than 450 liters (118.9 gallons). Shells 
must be designed, constructed, certified and stamped in accordance with 
the ASME Code, Section VIII (see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).
    (2) Portable tanks must be postweld heat-treated and radiographed as 
prescribed in Section VIII of the ASME Code, except that each portable 
tank constructed in accordance with part UHT of the ASME Code must be 
postweld heat-treated. Where postweld heat treatment is required, the 
portable tank must be treated as a unit after completion of all the 
welds in and/or to the shell and heads. The method must be as prescribed 
in the

[[Page 870]]

ASME Code. Welded attachments to pads may be made after postweld heat 
treatment is made. A portable tank used for anhydrous ammonia must be 
postweld heat-treated. The postweld heat treatment must be as prescribed 
in the ASME Code, but in no event at less than 1050  deg.F tank metal 
temperature. Additionally, portable tanks constructed in accordance with 
part UHT of the ASME Code must conform to the following requirements:
    (i) Welding procedure and welder performance tests must be made 
annually in accordance with Section IX of the ASME Code (see Sec. 171.7 
of this subchapter). In addition to the essential variables named 
therein, the following must be considered to be essential variables: 
number of passes, thickness of plate, heat input per pass, and 
manufacturer's identification of rod and flux. The number of passes, 
thickness of plate and heat input per pass may not vary more than 25 
percent from the qualified procedure. Records of the qualification must 
be retained for at least 5 years by the portable tank manufacturer or 
his designated agent and, upon request, made available to a 
representative of the Department of Transportation or the owner of the 
tank.
    (ii) Impact tests must be made on a lot basis. A lot is defined as 
100 tons or less of the same heat and having a thickness variation no 
greater than plus or minus 25 percent. The minimum impact required for 
full-sized specimens shall be 20 foot-pounds (or 10 foot-pounds for 
half-sized specimens) at 0  deg.F (-17.8  deg.F) Charpy V-Notch in both 
the longitudinal and transverse direction. If the lot test does not pass 
this requirement, individual plates may be accepted if they individually 
meet this impact requirement.
    (3) When the shells intended for the transportation of non-
refrigerated liquefied compressed gases are equipped with thermal 
insulation, a device must be provided to prevent any dangerous pressure 
from developing in the insulating layer in the event of a leak, when the 
protective covering is closed it must be gas tight. The thermal 
insulation must not inhibit access to the fittings and discharge 
devices. In addition, the thermal insulation systems must satisfy the 
following requirements:
    (i) consist of a shield covering not less than the upper third, but 
not more than the upper half of the surface of the shell, and separated 
from the shell by an air space of approximately 40 mm (1.7 inches) 
across; or
    (ii) consist of a complete cladding of insulating materials. The 
insulation must be of adequate thickness and constructed to prevent the 
ingress of moisture and damage to the insulation. The insulation and 
cladding must have a thermal conductance of not more than 0.67 
(W[middot]m-2[middot]K-1) under normal conditions 
of transportation.
    (c) Service equipment. (1) Each opening with a diameter of more than 
1.5 mm (0.1 inch) in the shell of a portable tank, except openings for 
pressure-relief devices, inspection openings and closed bleed holes, 
must be fitted with at least three mutually independent shut-off devices 
in series: the first being an internal stop-valve, excess flow valve, 
integral excess flow valve, or excess flow feature (see Sec. 178.337-
1(g)), the second being an external stop-valve and the third being a 
blank flange, thread cap, plug or equivalent tight liquid closure 
device.
    (2) When a portable tank is fitted with an excess flow valve, the 
excess flow valve must be so fitted that its seating is inside the shell 
or inside a welded flange or, when fitted externally, its mountings must 
be designed so that in the event of impact it maintains its 
effectiveness. The excess flow valves must be selected and fitted so as 
to close automatically when the rated flow, specified by the 
manufacturer, is reached. Connections and accessories leading to or from 
such a valve must have a capacity for a flow more than the excess flow 
valve's rated flow.
    (3) For filling and discharge openings that are located below the 
liquid level, the first shut-off device must be an internal stop-valve 
and the second must be a stop-valve placed in an accessible position on 
each discharge and filling pipe.
    (4) For filling and discharge openings located below the liquid 
level of portable tanks intended for the transportation of flammable 
and/or toxic liquefied compressed gases, the internal

[[Page 871]]

stop-valve must be a self-closing safety device that fully closes 
automatically during filling or discharge in the event of fire 
engulfment. The device shall fully close within 30 seconds of actuation 
and the thermal means of closure must actuate at a temperature of not 
more than 121  deg.C (250  deg.F). Except for portable tanks having a 
capacity less than 1,000 liters (264.2 gallons), this device must be 
operable by remote control.
    (5) In addition to filling, discharge and gas pressure equalizing 
orifices, shells may have openings in which gauges, thermometers and 
manometers can be fitted. Connections for such instruments must be made 
by suitable welded nozzles or pockets and may not be connected by 
screwed connections through the shell.
    (6) All portable tanks must be fitted with manholes or other 
inspection openings of suitable size to allow for internal inspection 
and adequate access for maintenance and repair of the interior.
    (7) Inlets and discharge outlets on chlorine portable tanks. The 
inlet and discharge outlets on portable tanks used to transport chlorine 
must meet the requirements of Sec. 178.337-1(c)(2) and must be fitted 
with an internal excess flow valve. In addition to the internal excess 
flow valve, the inlet and discharge outlets must be equipped with an 
external stop valve (angle valve). Excess flow valves must conform to 
the standards of The Chlorine Institute, Inc. (see Sec. 171.7 of this 
subchapter) as follows:
    (i) A valve conforming to Drawing 101-7, dated July 1993, must be 
installed under each liquid angle valve.
    (ii) A valve conforming to Drawing 106-6, dated July 1993, must be 
installed under each gas angle valve. For portable tanks used to 
transport non-refrigerated liquefied gases.
    (8) External fittings must be grouped together as close as 
reasonably practicable. The following openings may be installed at 
locations other than on the top or end of the tank:
    (i) The openings for liquid level gauging devices, pressure gauges, 
or for safety devices, may be installed separately at the other location 
or in the side of the shell;
    (ii) One plugged opening of 2-inch National Pipe Thread or less 
provided for maintenance purposes may be located elsewhere;
    (iii) An opening of 3-inch National Pipe Size or less may be 
provided at another location, when necessary, to facilitate installation 
of condensing coils.
    (9) Filling and discharge connections are not required to be grouped 
and may be installed below the normal liquid level of the tank if:
    (i) The portable tank is permanently mounted in a full framework for 
containerized transport;
    (ii) For each portable tank design, a prototype portable tank, meets 
the requirements of parts 450 through 453 of this title for compliance 
with the requirements of Annex II of the International Convention for 
Safe Containers; and
    (iii) Each filling and discharge outlet meets the requirements of 
paragraph (c)(4) of this section.
    (d) Bottom openings. Bottom openings are prohibited on portable 
tanks when the portable tank special provision T50 in Sec. 172.102(c)(7) 
of this subchapter indicates that bottom openings are not allowed. In 
this case, there may be no openings located below the liquid level of 
the shell when it is filled to its maximum permissible filling limit.
    (e) Pressure relief devices. (1) Portable tanks must be provided 
with one or more reclosing pressure relief devices. The pressure relief 
devices must open automatically at a pressure not less than the MAWP and 
be fully open at a pressure equal to 110% of the MAWP. These devices 
must, after discharge, close at a pressure not less than 10% below the 
pressure at which discharge starts and must remain closed at all lower 
pressures. The pressure relief devices must be of a type that will 
resist dynamic forces including liquid surge. A frangible disc may only 
be used in series with a reclosing pressure relief device.
    (2) Pressure relief devices must be designed to prevent the entry of 
foreign matter, the leakage of gas and the development of any dangerous 
excess pressure.
    (3) A portable tank intended for the transportation of certain 
liquefied

[[Page 872]]

compressed gases identified in portable tank special provision T50 in 
Sec. 172.102 of this subchapter must have a pressure relief device which 
conforms to the requirements of this subchapter. Unless a portable tank, 
in dedicated service, is fitted with a relief device constructed of 
materials compatible with the hazardous material, the relief device must 
be comprised of a frangible disc preceded by a reclosing device. The 
space between the frangible disc and the device must be provided with a 
pressure gauge or a suitable tell-tale indicator. This arrangement must 
facilitate the detection of disc rupture, pinholing or leakage which 
could cause a malfunction of the pressure relief device. The frangible 
disc must rupture at a nominal pressure 10% above the start-to-discharge 
pressure of the relief device.
    (4) In the case of portable tanks used for more than one gas, the 
pressure relief devices must open at a pressure indicated in paragraph 
(e)(1) of this section for the gas having the highest maximum allowable 
pressure of the gases allowed to be transported in the portable tank.
    (f) Capacity of relief devices. The combined delivery capacity of 
the relief devices must be sufficient so that, in the event of total 
fire engulfment, the pressure inside the shell cannot exceed 120% of the 
MAWP. Reclosing relief devices must be used to achieve the full relief 
capacity prescribed. In the case of portable tanks used for more than 
gas, the combined delivery capacity of the pressure relief devices must 
be taken for the liquefied compressed gas which requires the highest 
delivery capacity of the liquefied compressed gases allowed to be 
transported in the portable tank. The total required capacity of the 
relief devices must be determined according to the requirements in 
Sec. 178.275(h). These requirements apply only to liquefied compressed 
gases which have critical temperatures well above the temperature at the 
accumulating condition. For gases which have critical temperatures near 
or below the temperature at the accumulating condition, the calculation 
of the pressure relief device delivery capacity must consider the 
additional thermodynamic properties of the gas (for example, CGA S-1.2-
1980 (see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).

[66 FR 33448, June 21, 2001]



Sec. 178.277  Requirements for the design, construction, inspection and testing of portable tanks intended for the transportation of refrigerated liquefied 
          gases.

    (a) In addition to the requirements of Sec. 178.274 applicable to UN 
portable tanks, the following requirements and definitions apply to UN 
portable tanks used for refrigerated liquefied gases:
    Design pressure For the purpose of this section the term ``design 
pressure'' is consistent with the definition for design pressure in the 
ASME Code, Section VIII (see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).
    Holding time is the time, as determined by testing, that will elapse 
from loading until the pressure of the contents, under equilibrium 
conditions, reaches the lowest set pressure of the pressure limiting 
device(s) (for example, pressure control valve or pressure relief 
device). Holding time must be determined as specified in Sec. 178.338-9.
    Maximum allowable working pressure (MAWP) means the maximum 
effective gauge pressure permissible at the top of the shell of a loaded 
portable tank in its operating position including the highest effective 
pressure during filling and discharge;
    Minimum design temperature means the temperature which is used for 
the design and construction of the shell not higher than the lowest 
(coldest) service temperature of the contents during normal conditions 
of filling, discharge and transportation.
    Shell means the part of the portable tank which retains the 
refrigerated liquefied gas intended for transport, including openings 
and their closures, but does not include service equipment or external 
structural equipment.
    Tank means a construction which normally consists of either:
    (1) A jacket and one or more inner shells where the space between 
the shell(s) and the jacket is exhausted of air (vacuum insulation) and 
may incorporate a thermal insulation system; or
    (2) A jacket and an inner shell with an intermediate layer of solid 
thermally insulating material (for example, solid foam).

[[Page 873]]

    (b) General design and construction requirements. (1) Portable tanks 
must be of seamless or welded steel construction and have a water 
capacity of more than 450 liters (118.9 gallons). Portable tanks must be 
designed, constructed, certified and stamped in accordance with Section 
VIII of the ASME Code (see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).
    (2 ) Portable tanks must be postweld heat treated and radiographed 
as prescribed in the ASME Code except that each tank constructed in 
accordance with part UHT of the ASME Code must be postweld heat treated. 
Where postweld heat treatment is required, the tank must be treated as a 
unit after completion of all the welds to the shell and heads. The 
method must be as prescribed in the ASME Code. Welded attachments to 
pads may be made after postweld heat treatment is made. The postweld 
heat treatment must be as prescribed in Section VIII of the ASME Code, 
but in no event at less than 1050  deg.F tank metal temperature.
    (3) Welding procedure and welder performance tests must be made 
annually in accordance with Section IX of the ASME Code (see Sec. 171.7 
of this subchapter). In addition to the essential variables named in the 
ASME Code, the following must be considered as essential variables: 
number of passes, thickness of plate, heat input per pass, and the 
specified rod and flux. The number of passes, thickness of plate and 
heat input per pass may not vary more than 25% from the procedure 
qualification. Records of the qualification must be retained for at 
least 5 years by the portable tank manufacturer and made available to 
the approval agency and the owner of the portable tank as specified in 
Sec. 178.273.
    (4) Shells and jackets must be made of metallic materials suitable 
for forming. Jackets must be made of steel. Non-metallic materials may 
be used for the attachments and supports between the shell and jacket, 
provided their material properties at the minimum design temperature are 
proven to be sufficient. In choosing the material, the minimum design 
temperature must be taken into account with respect to risk of brittle 
fracture, to hydrogen embrittlement, to stress corrosion cracking and to 
resistance to impact.
    (5) Any part of a portable tank, including fittings, gaskets and 
pipe-work, which can be expected normally to come into contact with the 
refrigerated liquefied gas transported must be compatible with that 
refrigerated liquefied gas.
    (6) The thermal insulation system must include a complete covering 
of the shell with effective insulating materials. External insulation 
must be protected by a jacket so as to prevent the ingress of moisture 
and other damage under normal transport conditions.
    (7) When a jacket is so closed as to be gas-tight, a device must be 
provided to prevent any dangerous pressure from developing in the 
insulation space.
    (8) Materials which may react with oxygen or oxygen enriched 
atmospheres in a dangerous manner may not be used in portable tanks 
intended for the transport of refrigerated liquefied gases having a 
boiling point below minus 182  deg.C at atmospheric pressure in 
locations with the thermal insulation where there is a risk of contact 
with oxygen or with oxygen enriched fluid.
    (9) Insulating materials must not deteriorate to an extent that the 
effectiveness of the insulation system, as determined in accordance with 
paragraph (b)(11) of this section, would be reduced in service.
    (10) A reference holding time must be determined for each 
refrigerated liquefied gas intended for transport in a portable tank. 
The reference holding time must be determined by testing in accordance 
with the requirements of Sec. 178.338-9, considering the following 
factors:
    (i) The effectiveness of the insulation system, determined in 
accordance with paragraph (b)(11) of this section;
    (ii) The lowest set pressure of the pressure limiting device;
    (iii) The initial filling conditions;
    (iv) An assumed ambient temperature of 30  deg.C (86  deg.F);
    (v) The physical properties of the individual refrigerated liquefied 
gas intended to be transported.
    (11) The effectiveness of the insulation system (heat influx in 
watts) may

[[Page 874]]

be determined by type testing the portable tank in accordance with a 
procedure specified in Sec. 178.338-9(c) or by using the holding time 
test in Sec. 178.338-9(b). This test must consist of either:
    (i) A constant pressure test (for example, at atmospheric pressure) 
when the loss of refrigerated liquefied gas is measured over a period of 
time; or
    (ii) A closed system test when the rise in pressure in the shell is 
measured over a period of time.
    (12) When performing the constant pressure test, variations in 
atmospheric pressure must be taken into account. When performing either 
test, corrections must be made for any variation of the ambient 
temperature from the assumed ambient temperature reference value of 30 
deg.C (86  deg.F).
    (13) The jacket of a vacuum-insulated double-wall tank must have 
either an external design pressure not less than 100 kPa (1 bar) gauge 
pressure calculated in accordance with the ASME Code or a calculated 
critical collapsing pressure of not less than 200 kPa (2 bar) gauge 
pressure. Internal and external reinforcements may be included in 
calculating the ability of the jacket to resist the external pressure.
    Note to Paragraph (b): For the determination of the actual holding 
time, as indicated by paragraphs (b)(10), (11), (12), and (13), before 
each journey, refer to Sec. 178.338-9(b).
    (c) Design criteria. For shells with vacuum insulation, the test 
pressure must not be less than 1.3 times the sum of the MAWP and 100 kPa 
(1 bar). In no case may the test pressure be less than 300 kPa (3 bar) 
gauge pressure.
    (d) Service equipment. (1) Each filling and discharge opening in 
portable tanks used for the transport of flammable refrigerated 
liquefied gases must be fitted with at least three mutually independent 
shut-off devices in series: the first being a stop-valve situated as 
close as reasonably practicable to the jacket, the second being a stop-
valve and the third being a blank flange or equivalent device. The shut-
off device closest to the jacket must be a self-closing device, which is 
capable of being closed from an accessible position on the portable tank 
that is remote from the valve within 30 seconds of actuation. This 
device must actuate at a temperature of not more than 121  deg.C (250 
deg.F).
    (2) Each filling and discharge opening in portable tanks used for 
the transport of non-flammable refrigerated liquefied gases must be 
fitted with at least two mutually independent shut-off devices in 
series: the first being a stop-valve situated as close as reasonably 
practicable to the jacket and the second a blank flange or equivalent 
device.
    (3) For sections of piping which can be closed at both ends and 
where liquid product can be trapped, a method of automatic pressure 
relief must be provided to prevent excess pressure build-up within the 
piping.
    (4) Each filling and discharge opening on a portable tank must be 
clearly marked to indicate its function.
    (5) When pressure-building units are used, the liquid and vapor 
connections to that unit must be provided with a valve as close to the 
jacket as reasonably practicable to prevent the loss of contents in case 
of damage to the pressure-building unit. A check valve may be used for 
this purpose if it is located on the vapor side of the pressure build-up 
coil.
    (6) The materials of construction of valves and accessories must 
have satisfactory properties at the lowest operating temperature of the 
portable tank.
    (7) Vacuum insulated portable tanks are not required to have an 
inspection opening.
    (e) Pressure relief devices. (1) Every shell must be provided with 
not less than two independent reclosing pressure relief devices. The 
pressure relief devices must open automatically at a pressure not less 
than the MAWP and be fully open at a pressure equal to 110% of the MAWP. 
These devices must, after discharge, close at a pressure not lower than 
10% below the pressure at which discharge starts and must remain closed 
at all lower pressures. The pressure relief devices must be of the type 
that will resist dynamic forces including surge.
    (2) Except for portable tanks used for oxygen, portable tanks for 
non-flammable refrigerated liquefied gases (except oxygen) and hydrogen 
may in addition have frangible discs in parallel

[[Page 875]]

with the reclosing devices as specified in paragraphs (e)(4)(ii) and 
(e)(4)(iii) of this section.
    (3) Pressure relief devices must be designed to prevent the entry of 
foreign matter, the leakage of gas and the development of any dangerous 
excess pressure.
    (4) Capacity and setting of pressure relief devices. (i) In the case 
of the loss of vacuum in a vacuum-insulated tank or of loss of 20% of 
the insulation of a portable tank insulated with solid materials, the 
combined capacity of all pressure relief devices installed must be 
sufficient so that the pressure (including accumulation) inside the 
shell does not exceed 120% of the MAWP.
    (ii) For non-flammable refrigerated liquefied gases (except oxygen) 
and hydrogen, this capacity may be achieved by the use of frangible 
discs in parallel with the required safety-relief devices. Frangible 
discs must rupture at nominal pressure equal to the test pressure of the 
shell.
    (iii) Under the circumstances described in paragraphs (e)(4)(i) and 
(e)(4)(ii) of this section, together with complete fire engulfment, the 
combined capacity of all pressure relief devices installed must be 
sufficient to limit the pressure in the shell to the test pressure.
    (iv) The required capacity of the relief devices must be calculated 
in accordance with CGA Pamphlet S-1.2 (see Sec. 171.7 of this 
subchapter).

[66 FR 33450, June 21, 2001]

Subpart I [Reserved]



       Subpart J--Specifications for Containers for Motor Vehicle 
                             Transportation

    Source: 29 FR 18975, Dec. 29, 1964, unless otherwise noted. 
Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967.



Sec. 178.318  Specification MC 201; container for detonators and percussion caps.



Sec. 178.318-1  Scope.

    (a) This specification pertains to a container to be used for the 
transportation of detonators and percussion caps in connection with the 
transportation of liquid nitroglycerin, desensitized liquid 
nitroglycerin or diethylene glycol dinitrate, where any or all of such 
types of caps may be used for the detonation of liquid nitroglycerin, 
desentitized liquid nitroglycerin or diethylene glycol dinitrate in 
blasting operations. This specification is not intended to take the 
place of any shipping or packing requirements of this Department where 
the caps in question are themselves articles of commerce.
    (b) [Reserved]

[29 FR 18975, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, 
and amended by Amdt. 178-60, 44 FR 70733, Dec. 10, 1979]



Sec. 178.318-2  Container.

    (a) Every container for detonators and percussion caps coming within 
the scope of this specification shall be constructed entirely of hard 
rubber, phenolresinous or other resinous material, or other nonmetallic, 
nonsparking material, except that metal parts may be used in such 
locations as not in any event to come in contact with any of the caps. 
Space shall be provided so that each detonator of whatever nature may be 
inserted in an individual cell in the body of the container, into which 
each such cap shall snugly fit. There shall be provided no more than 
twenty (20) such cellular spaces. Space may be provided into which a 
plurality of percussion caps may be carried, provided that such space 
may be closed with a screw cap, and further provided that each or any 
such space is entirely separate from any space provided for any 
detonator. Each cellular space into which a detonator is to be inserted 
and carried shall be capable of being covered by a rotary cover so 
arranged as to expose not more than one cell at any time, and capable of 
rotation to such a place that all cells will be covered at the same 
time, at which place means shall be provided to lock the cover in place. 
Means shall be provided to lock in place the cover for the cells 
provided for the carrying of detonators. The requirement that not more 
than one cell be exposed at one time need not apply in the case of 
detonators, although spaces for such caps and detonators shall be 
separate. Sufficient annular

[[Page 876]]

space shall be provided inside the cover for such detonators that, when 
the cover is closed, there will be sufficient space to accommodate the 
wires customarily attached to such caps. If the material is of such a 
nature as to require treatment to prevent the absorption of moisture, 
such treatment shall be applied as shall be necessary in order to 
provide against the penetration of water by permeation. A suitable 
carrying handle shall be provided, except for which handle no part of 
the container may project beyond the exterior of the body.
    (b) Exhibited in plates I and II are line drawings of a container 
for detonators and percussion caps, illustrative of the requirements set 
forth in Sec. 178.318-2(a). These plates shall not be construed as a 
part of this specification.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.076

[29 FR 18975, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, 
and amended by Amdt. 178-60, 44 FR 70733, Dec. 10, 1979]

[[Page 877]]



Sec. 178.318-3  Marking.

    Each container must be marked as prescribed in Sec. 178.2(b).

[Amdt. 178-40, 41 FR 38181, Sept. 9, 1976, as amended at 66 FR 45185, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.320  General requirements applicable to all DOT specification cargo tank motor vehicles.

    (a) Definitions. For the purposes of this subpart,
    Cargo tank, as defined in Sec. 171.8 of this subchapter, means a 
bulk packaging which:
    (1) Is a tank intended primarily for the carriage of liquids or 
gases (including appurtenances, reinforcements, fittings, and closures). 
(For definition of ``tank'', see Sec. 178.345-1(c), Sec. 178.337-1, or 
Sec. 178.338-1, as applicable);
    (2) Is permanently attached to or forms a part of a motor vehicle 
but which, by reason of its size, construction or attachment to a motor 
vehicle is loaded or unloaded without being removed from the motor 
vehicle; and
    (3) Is not fabricated under a specification for cylinders, portable 
tanks, tank cars, or multi-unit tank car tanks.
    Cargo tank motor vehicle, as defined in Sec. 171.8 of this 
subchapter, means a motor vehicle with one or more cargo tanks 
permanently attached to or forming an integral part of the motor 
vehicle.
    Cargo tank wall means those parts of the cargo tank which make up 
the primary lading retention structure including shell, bulkheads, and 
fittings which, when closed during transportation of lading, yields the 
minimum volume of the cargo tank assembly.
    Design type means one or more cargo tanks which are made--
    (1) To the same specification;
    (2) By the same manufacturer;
    (3) To the same engineering drawings and calculations, except for 
minor variations in piping which do not affect the lading retention 
capability of the cargo tank;
    (4) Of the same materials of construction;
    (5) To the same cross-sectional dimensions;
    (6) To a length varying by no more than five percent;
    (7) With the volume varying by no more than five percent (due to a 
change in length only); and
    (8) For the purposes of Sec. 178.338 only, with the same insulation 
system.
    Manufacturer means any person engaged in the manufacture of a DOT 
specification cargo tank, cargo tank motor vehicle or cargo tank 
equipment which forms part of the cargo tank wall. This term includes 
attaching a cargo tank to a motor vehicle or to a motor vehicle 
suspension component which involves welding on the cargo tank wall. A 
manufacturer shall register with the Department in accordance with 
subpart F of part 107 in subchapter A of this chapter.
    (b) Design certification. (1) Each cargo tank design type shall be 
certified in conformance with the specification requirements by a Design 
Certifying Engineer registered in accordance with subpart F of part 107.
    (2) The Design Certifying Engineer shall furnish to the manufacturer 
a certificate to indicate compliance with the specification 
requirements. The certificate must include the sketches, drawings, and 
calculations used for certification. Each certificate, including 
sketches, drawings, and calculations, shall be signed by the Design 
Certifying Engineer.
    (3) The manufacturer shall retain the design certificate at his 
principal place of business for as long as he manufactures DOT 
specification cargo tanks.
    (c) Exceptions to the ASME Code. Unless otherwise specified, when 
exceptions are provided in this subpart from compliance with certain 
paragraphs of the ASME Code, compliance with those paragraphs is not 
prohibited.

[Amdt. 178-89, 55 FR 37055, Sept. 7, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 178-98, 
58 FR 33306, June 16, 1993; Amdt. 178-118, 61 FR 51339, Oct. 1, 1996]



Sec. 178.337  Specification MC 331; cargo tank motor vehicle primarily for transportation of compressed gases as defined in subpart G of part 173 of this 
          subchapter.



Sec. 178.337-1  General requirements.

    (a) ASME Code construction. Tanks must be--
    (1) Seamless or welded construction, or a combination of both;

[[Page 878]]

    (2) Designed and constructed in accordance with the ASME Code;
    (3) Made of steel or aluminum; however, if aluminum is used, the 
cargo tank must be insulated and the hazardous material to be 
transported must be compatible with the aluminum (see Secs. 178.337-
1(e)(2), 173.315(a) table, and 178.337-2(a)(1) of this subchapter); and
    (4) Covered with a steel jacket if the cargo tank is insulated and 
used to transport a flammable gas (see Sec. 173.315(a) table Note 11 of 
this subchapter).
    (b) Design pressure. The design pressure of a cargo tank authorized 
under this specification shall be not less than the vapor pressure of 
the commodity contained therein at 115  deg.F. or as prescribed for a 
particular commodity in Sec. 173.315(a) of this subchapter, except that 
in no case shall the design pressure of any cargo tank be less than 100 
p.s.i.g. nor more than 500 p.s.i.g.

    Note 1: The term design pressure as used in this specification, is 
identical to the term MAWP as used in the ASME Code.

    (c) Openings. (1) Excess pressure relief valves shall be located in 
the top of the cargo tank or heads.
    (2) A chlorine cargo tank shall have only one opening. That opening 
shall be in the top of the cargo tank and shall be fitted with a nozzle 
that meets the following requirements:
    (i) On a cargo tank manufactured on or before December 31, 1974, the 
nozzle shall be protected by a dome cover plate which conforms to either 
the standard of The Chlorine Institute, Inc., Dwg. 103-3, dated January 
23, 1958, or to the standard specified in paragraph (c) (2) (ii) of this 
section.
    (ii) On a cargo tank manufactured on or after January 1, 1975, the 
nozzle shall be protected by a manway cover which conforms to the 
standard of The Chlorine Institute, Inc., Dwg. 103-4, dated September 1, 
1971.
    (d) Reflective design. Every uninsulated cargo tank permanently 
attached to a cargo tank motor vehicle shall, unless covered with a 
jacket made of aluminum, stainless steel, or other bright nontarnishing 
metal, be painted a white, aluminum or similar reflecting color on the 
upper two-thirds of area of the cargo tank.
    (e) Insulation. (1) Each cargo tank required to be insulated must 
conform with the use and performance requirements contained in 
Secs. 173.315(a) table and 178.337-1 (a)(3) and (e)(2) of this 
subchapter.
    (2) Each cargo tank intended for chlorine; carbon dioxide, 
refrigerated liquid; or nitrous oxide, refrigerated liquid service must 
have suitable insulation of such thickness that the overall thermal 
conductance is not more than 0.08 Btu per square foot per  deg.F 
differential per hour. The conductance must be determined at 60  deg.F. 
Insulation material used on cargo tanks for nitrous oxide, refrigerated 
liquid must be noncombustible. Insulating material used on cargo tanks 
for chlorine must be corkboard or polyurethane foam, with a minimum 
thickness of 4 inches, or 2 inches minimum thickness of ceramic fiber/
fiberglass of 4 pounds per cubic foot minimum density covered by 2 
inches minimum thickness of fiber.
    (f) Postweld heat treatment. Postweld heat treatment must be as 
prescribed in the ASME Code except that each cargo tank constructed in 
accordance with Part UHT of the ASME Code must be postweld heat treated. 
Each chlorine cargo tank must be fully radiographed and postweld heat 
treated in accordance with the provisions of the ASME Code under which 
it is constructed. Where postweld heat treatment is required, the cargo 
tank must be treated as a unit after completion of all the welds in and/
or to the shells and heads. The method must be as prescribed in the ASME 
Code. Welded attachments to pads may be made after postweld heat 
treatment. A cargo tank used for anhydrous ammonia must be postweld heat 
treated. The postweld heat treatment must be as prescribed in the ASME 
Code, but in no event at less than 1050  deg.F. cargo tank metal 
temperature.
    (g) Definitions. The following definitions apply to Secs. 178.337-1 
through 178.337-18:
    Emergency discharge control means the ability to stop a cargo tank 
unloading operation in the event of an unintentional release. Emergency 
discharge control can utilize passive or off-truck remote means to stop 
the unloading

[[Page 879]]

operation. A passive means of emergency discharge control automatically 
shuts off the flow of product without the need for human intervention 
within 20 seconds of an unintentional release caused by a complete 
separation of the liquid delivery hose. An off-truck remote means of 
emergency discharge control permits a qualified person attending the 
unloading operation to close the cargo tank's internal self-closing stop 
valve and shut off all motive and auxiliary power equipment at a 
distance from the cargo tank motor vehicle.
    Excess flow valve, integral excess flow valve, or excess flow 
feature means a component that will close automatically if the flow rate 
of a gas or liquid through the component reaches or exceeds the rated 
flow of gas or liquid specified by the original valve manufacturer when 
piping mounted directly on the valve is sheared off before the first 
valve, pump, or fitting downstream from the valve.
    Internal self-closing stop valve means a primary shut off valve 
installed in a product discharge outlet of a cargo tank and designed to 
be kept closed by self-stored energy.
    Primary discharge control system means a primary shut-off installed 
at a product discharge outlet of a cargo tank consisting of an internal 
self-closing stop valve that may include an integral excess flow valve 
or an excess flow feature, together with linkages that must be installed 
between the valve and remote actuator to provide manual and thermal on-
truck remote means of closure.

[Order 59-B, 30 FR 579, Jan. 16, 1965. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 
5, 1967]

    Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting 
Sec. 178.337-1, see the List of CFR Sections Affected which appears in 
the Finding Aids section of the printed volume and on GPO Access.



Sec. 178.337-2  Material.

    (a) General. (1) All material used for construction of the cargo 
tank and appurtenances must be suitable for use with the commodities to 
be transported therein and must conform to the requirements of the ASME 
Code and/or requirements of the American Society for Testing and 
Materials in all respects.
    (2) Impact tests are required on steel used in the fabrication of 
each cargo tank constructed in accordance with part UHT of the ASME 
Code. The tests must be made on a lot basis. A lot is defined as 100 
tons or less of the same heat treatment processing lot having a 
thickness variation no greater than plus or minus 25 percent. The 
minimum impact required for full size specimens must be 20 foot-pounds 
in the longitudinal direction at -30  deg.F., Charpy V-Notch and 15 
foot-pounds in the transverse direction at -30  deg.F., Charpy V-Notch. 
The required values for subsize specimens must be reduced in direct 
proportion to the cross-sectional area of the specimen beneath the 
notch. If a lot does not meet this requirement, individual plates may be 
accepted if they individually meet this requirement.
    (3) The fabricator shall record the heat, and slab numbers, and the 
certified Charpy impact values, where required, of each plate used in 
each cargo tank on a sketch showing the location of each plate in the 
shell and heads of the cargo tank. Copies of each sketch shall be 
provided to the owner and retained for at least five years by the 
fabricator and made available to duly identified representatives of the 
Department of Transportation.
    (4) The direction of final rolling of the shell material shall be 
the circumferential orientation of the cargo tank shell.
    (b) For a chlorine cargo tank. Plates, the manway nozzle, and 
anchorage shall be made of carbon steel which meets the following 
requirements:
    (1) For a cargo tank manufactured on or before December 31, 1974--
    (i) Material shall conform to ASTM Specification A-300 -58, titled 
``Steel Plates for Pressure Vessels for Service at Low Temperatures'';
    (ii) Material shall be Class 1, Grade A, flange or firebox quality;
    (iii) Plate impact test specimens, as required under paragraph (a) 
of this section, shall be of the Charpy keyhole notch type; and
    (iv) Plate impact test specimens shall meet the impact test 
requirements in paragraph (a) of this section in both the longitudinal 
and transverse

[[Page 880]]

directions of rolling at a temperature of minus 45.5 C. (-50  deg.F.).
    (2) For a cargo tank manufactured on or after January 1, 1975--
    (i) Material shall conform to ASTM Specification A-612-72a, Grade B 
or A 516, Grade 65 or 70;
    (ii) Material shall meet the Charpy V-notch test requirements of 
ASTM Specification A 20; and
    (iii) Plate impact test specimens shall meet the impact test 
requirements in paragraph (a) of this section in both the longitudinal 
and transverse directions of rolling at a temperature of minus 40 
deg.C. (-40  deg.F.).
    (c) A cargo tank in anhydrous ammonia service must be constructed of 
steel. The use of copper, silver, zinc or their alloys is prohibited. 
Baffles made from aluminum may be used only if joined to the cargo tank 
by a process not requiring postweld heat treatment of the cargo tank.

[Order 59-B, 30 FR 579, Jan. 16, 1965. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 
5, 1967]

    Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting 
Sec. 178.337-2, see the List of CFR Sections Affected which appears in 
the Finding Aids section of the printed volume and on GPO Access.



Sec. 178.337-3  Structural integrity.

    (a) General requirements and acceptance criteria. (1) Except as 
provided in paragraph (d) of this section, the maximum calculated design 
stress at any point in the cargo tank may not exceed the maximum 
allowable stress value prescribed in Section VIII of the ASME Code, or 
25 percent of the tensile strength of the material used.
    (2) The relevant physical properties of the materials used in each 
cargo tank may be established either by a certified test report from the 
material manufacturer or by testing in conformance with a recognized 
national standard. In either case, the ultimate tensile strength of the 
material used in the design may not exceed 120 percent of the ultimate 
tensile strength specified in either the ASME Code or the ASTM standard 
to which the material is manufactured.
    (3) The maximum design stress at any point in the cargo tank must be 
calculated separately for the loading conditions described in paragraphs 
(b), (c), and (d) of this section. Alternate test or analytical methods, 
or a combination thereof, may be used in place of the procedures 
described in paragraphs (b), (c), and (d) of this section, if the 
methods are accurate and verifiable.
    (4) Corrosion allowance material may not be included to satisfy any 
of the design calculation requirements of this section.
    (b) The static design and construction of each cargo tank must be in 
accordance with section VIII of the ASME Code. The cargo tank design 
must include calculation of stresses generated by design pressure, the 
weight of lading, the weight of structure supported by the cargo tank 
wall, and the effect of temperature gradients resulting from lading and 
ambient temperature extremes. When dissimilar materials are used, their 
thermal coefficients must be used in calculation of thermal stresses. 
Stress concentrations in tension, bending and torsion which occur at 
pads, cradles, or other supports must be considered in accordance with 
appendix G of the ASME Code.
    (c) Shell design. Shell stresses resulting from static or dynamic 
loadings, or combinations thereof, are not uniform throughout the cargo 
tank motor vehicle. The vertical, longitudinal, and lateral normal 
operating loadings can occur simultaneously and must be combined. The 
vertical, longitudinal and lateral extreme dynamic loadings occur 
separately and need not be combined.
    (1) Normal operating loadings. The following procedure addresses 
stress in the tank shell resulting from normal operating loadings. The 
effective stress (the maximum principal stress at any point) must be 
determined by the following formula:

S = 0.5(Sy + Sx)  [0.25(Sy 
    - Sx)2 + Ss2]0.5


Where:

    (i) S = effective stress at any given point under the combination of 
static and normal operating loadings that can occur at the same time, in 
psi.
    (ii) Sy = circumferential stress generated by the MAWP 
and external pressure, when applicable, plus static head, in psi.

[[Page 881]]

    (iii) Sx = The following net longitudinal stress 
generated by the following static and normal operating loading 
conditions, in psi:
    (A) The longitudinal stresses resulting from the MAWP and external 
pressure, when applicable, plus static head, in combination with the 
bending stress generated by the static weight of the fully loaded cargo 
tank motor vehicle, all structural elements, equipment and appurtenances 
supported by the cargo tank wall;
    (B) The tensile or compressive stress resulting from normal 
operating longitudinal acceleration or deceleration. In each case, the 
forces applied must be 0.35 times the vertical reaction at the 
suspension assembly, applied at the road surface, and as transmitted to 
the cargo tank wall through the suspension assembly of a trailer during 
deceleration; or the horizontal pivot of the truck tractor or converter 
dolly fifth wheel, or the drawbar hinge on the fixed dolly during 
acceleration; or anchoring and support members of a truck during 
acceleration and deceleration, as applicable. The vertical reaction must 
be calculated based on the static weight of the fully loaded cargo tank 
motor vehicle, all structural elements, equipment and appurtenances 
supported by the cargo tank wall. The following loadings must be 
included:
    (1) The axial load generated by a decelerative force;
    (2) The bending moment generated by a decelerative force;
    (3) The axial load generated by an accelerative force; and
    (4) The bending moment generated by an accelerative force; and
    (C) The tensile or compressive stress generated by the bending 
moment resulting from normal operating vertical accelerative force equal 
to 0.35 times the vertical reaction at the suspension assembly of a 
trailer; or the horizontal pivot of the upper coupler (fifth wheel) or 
turntable; or anchoring and support members of a truck, as applicable. 
The vertical reaction must be calculated based on the static weight of 
the fully loaded cargo tank motor vehicle, all structural elements, 
equipment and appurtenances supported by the cargo tank wall.
    (iv) Ss = The following shear stresses generated by the 
following static and normal operating loading conditions, in psi:
    (A) The static shear stress resulting from the vertical reaction at 
the suspension assembly of a trailer, and the horizontal pivot of the 
upper coupler (fifth wheel) or turntable; or anchoring and support 
members of a truck, as applicable. The vertical reaction must be 
calculated based on the static weight of the fully loaded cargo tank 
motor vehicle, all structural elements, equipment and appurtenances 
supported by the cargo tank wall;
    (B) The vertical shear stress generated by a normal operating 
accelerative force equal to 0.35 times the vertical reaction at the 
suspension assembly of a trailer; or the horizontal pivot of the upper 
coupler (fifth wheel) or turntable; or anchoring and support members of 
a truck, as applicable. The vertical reaction must be calculated based 
on the static weight of the fully loaded cargo tank motor vehicle, all 
structural elements, equipment and appurtenances supported by the cargo 
tank wall;
    (C) The lateral shear stress generated by a normal operating lateral 
accelerative force equal to 0.2 times the vertical reaction at each 
suspension assembly of a trailer, applied at the road surface, and as 
transmitted to the cargo tank wall through the suspension assembly of a 
trailer, and the horizontal pivot of the upper coupler (fifth wheel) or 
turntable; or anchoring and support members of a truck, as applicable. 
The vertical reaction must be calculated based on the static weight of 
the fully loaded cargo tank motor vehicle, all structural elements, 
equipment and appurtenances supported by the cargo tank wall; and
    (D) The torsional shear stress generated by the same lateral forces 
as described in paragraph (c)(1)(iv)(C) of this section.
    (2) Extreme dynamic loadings. The following procedure addresses 
stress in the tank shell resulting from extreme dynamic loadings. The 
effective stress (the maximum principal stress at any point) must be 
determined by the following formula:

S = 0.5(Sy + Sx)  [0.25(Sy 
    - Sx)2 + Ss2]0.5


[[Page 882]]



Where:

    (i) S = effective stress at any given point under a combination of 
static and extreme dynamic loadings that can occur at the same time, in 
psi.
    (ii) Sy = circumferential stress generated by MAWP and 
external pressure, when applicable, plus static head, in psi.
    (iii) Sx = the following net longitudinal stress 
generated by the following static and extreme dynamic loading 
conditions, in psi:
    (A) The longitudinal stresses resulting from the MAWP and external 
pressure, when applicable, plus static head, in combination with the 
bending stress generated by the static weight of the fully loaded cargo 
tank motor vehicle, all structural elements, equipment and appurtenances 
supported by the tank wall;
    (B) The tensile or compressive stress resulting from extreme 
longitudinal acceleration or deceleration. In each case the forces 
applied must be 0.7 times the vertical reaction at the suspension 
assembly, applied at the road surface, and as transmitted to the cargo 
tank wall through the suspension assembly of a trailer during 
deceleration; or the horizontal pivot of the truck tractor or converter 
dolly fifth wheel, or the drawbar hinge on the fixed dolly during 
acceleration; or the anchoring and support members of a truck during 
acceleration and deceleration, as applicable. The vertical reaction must 
be calculated based on the static weight of the fully loaded cargo tank 
motor vehicle, all structural elements, equipment and appurtenances 
supported by the cargo tank wall. The following loadings must be 
included:
    (1) The axial load generated by a decelerative force;
    (2) The bending moment generated by a decelerative force;
    (3) The axial load generated by an accelerative force; and
    (4) The bending moment generated by an accelerative force; and
    (C) The tensile or compressive stress generated by the bending 
moment resulting from an extreme vertical accelerative force equal to 
0.7 times the vertical reaction at the suspension assembly of a trailer, 
and the horizontal pivot of the upper coupler (fifth wheel) or 
turntable; or the anchoring and support members of a truck, as 
applicable. The vertical reaction must be calculated based on the static 
weight of the fully loaded cargo tank motor vehicle, all structural 
elements, equipment and appurtenances supported by the cargo tank wall.
    (iv) Ss = The following shear stresses generated by 
static and extreme dynamic loading conditions, in psi:
    (A) The static shear stress resulting from the vertical reaction at 
the suspension assembly of a trailer, and the horizontal pivot of the 
upper coupler (fifth wheel) or turntable; or anchoring and support 
members of a truck, as applicable. The vertical reaction must be 
calculated based on the static weight of the fully loaded cargo tank 
motor vehicle, all structural elements, equipment and appurtenances 
supported by the cargo tank wall;
    (B) The vertical shear stress generated by an extreme vertical 
accelerative force equal to 0.7 times the vertical reaction at the 
suspension assembly of a trailer, and the horizontal pivot of the upper 
coupler (fifth wheel) or turntable; or anchoring and support members of 
a truck, as applicable. The vertical reaction must be calculated based 
on the static weight of the fully loaded cargo tank motor vehicle, all 
structural elements, equipment and appurtenances supported by the cargo 
tank wall;
    (C) The lateral shear stress generated by an extreme lateral 
accelerative force equal to 0.4 times the vertical reaction at the 
suspension assembly of a trailer, applied at the road surface, and as 
transmitted to the cargo tank wall through the suspension assembly of a 
trailer, and the horizontal pivot of the upper coupler (fifth wheel) or 
turntable; or anchoring and support members of a truck, as applicable. 
The vertical reaction must be calculated based on the static weight of 
the fully loaded cargo tank motor vehicle, all structural elements, 
equipment and appurtenances supported by the cargo tank wall; and
    (D) The torsional shear stress generated by the same lateral forces 
as described in paragraph (c)(2)(iv)(C) of this section.

[[Page 883]]

    (d) In order to account for stresses due to impact in an accident, 
the design calculations for the cargo tank shell and heads must include 
the load resulting from the design pressure in combination with the 
dynamic pressure resulting from a longitudinal deceleration of ``2g''. 
For this loading condition the stress value used may not exceed the 
lesser of the yield strength or 75 percent of the ultimate tensile 
strength of the material of construction. For cargo tanks constructed of 
stainless steel the maximum design stress may not exceed 75 percent of 
the ultimate tensile strength of the type steel used.
    (e) The minimum metal thickness for the shell and heads must be 4.75 
mm (0.187 inch) for steel and 6.86 mm (0.270 inch) for aluminum, except 
for chlorine and sulfur dioxide tanks. For a cargo tank used in chlorine 
or sulfur dioxide service, the cargo tank must be made of steel. A 
corrosion allowance of 20 percent or 2.54 mm (0.10 inch), whichever is 
less, must be added to the thickness otherwise required for sulfur 
dioxide and chlorine tank material. In chlorine cargo tanks, the wall 
thickness must be at least 1.59 cm (0.625 inch), including corrosion 
allowance.
    (f) Where a cargo tank support is attached to any part of the cargo 
tank wall, the stresses imposed on the cargo tank wall must meet the 
requirements in paragraph (a) of this section.
    (g) The design, construction, and installation of an appurtenance to 
the cargo tank must be such that, in the event of its damage or failure, 
the lading retention integrity of the cargo tank will not be adversely 
affected.
    (1) A lightweight attachment, such as a conduit clip, brakeline clip 
or placard holder, must be constructed of a material of lesser strength 
than the cargo tank wall material and may not be more than 72 percent of 
the thickness of the material to which it is attached. The attachment 
may be secured directly to the cargo tank wall if the device is designed 
and installed in such a manner that, if damaged, it will not affect the 
lading retention integrity of the cargo tank. The lightweight attachment 
must be secured to the cargo tank wall by continuous weld or in such a 
manner as to preclude formation of pockets, which may become sites for 
incipient corrosion. Attachments meeting the requirements of this 
paragraph are not authorized for cargo tanks constructed under part UHT 
of the ASME Code.
    (2) Except as prescribed in Sec. 178.337-3(g)(1), the welding of any 
appurtenance of the cargo tank wall must be made by attachment of a 
mounting pad, so that there will be no adverse effect upon the lading 
retention integrity of the cargo tank if any force is applied to the 
appurtenance, from any direction. The thickness of the mounting pad may 
not be less than that of the shell or head to which it is attached, and 
not more than 1.5 times the shell or head thickness. However, a pad with 
a minimum thickness of 6.35 mm (0.250 inch) may be used when the shell 
or head thickness is over 6.35 mm (0.250 inch). If weep holes or tell-
tale holes are used, the pad must be drilled or punched at its lowest 
point before it is welded. Each pad must:
    (i) Extend at least 5.08 cm (2 inches) in each direction from any 
point of attachment of an appurtenance;
    (ii) Have rounded corners, or otherwise be shaped in a manner to 
minimize stress concentrations on the shell or head; and
    (iii) Be attached by a continuous weld around the pad, except for a 
small gap at the lowest point for draining, using filler material 
conforming to the recommendations of the manufacturer of the head or 
shell material.

[Amdt. 178-89, 55 FR 37056, Sept. 7, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 178-104, 
59 FR 49135, Sept. 26, 1994; Amdt. 178-105, 60 FR 17401, Apr. 5, 1995; 
Amdt. 178-118, 61 FR 51340, Oct. 1, 1996; 65 FR 58631, Sept. 29, 2000]



Sec. 178.337-4  Joints.

    (a) Joints shall be as required by the ASME Code, with all 
undercutting in shell and head material repaired as specified therein.
    (b) Welding procedure and welder performance must be in accordance 
with Section IX of the ASME Code. In addition to the essential variables 
named therein, the following must be considered as essential variables: 
Number of passes; thickness of plate; heat input

[[Page 884]]

per pass; and manufacturer's identification of rod and flux. When 
fabrication is done in accordance with part UHT of the ASME Code, filler 
material containing more than 0.08 percent vanadium must not be used. 
The number of passes, thickness of plate, and heat input per pass may 
not vary more than 25 percent from the procedure or welder 
qualifications. Records of the qualifications must be retained for at 
least 5 years by the cargo tank manufacturer and must be made available 
to duly identified representatives of the Department and the owner of 
the cargo tank.
    (c) All longitudinal shell welds shall be located in the upper half 
of the cargo tank.
    (d) Edge preparation of shell and head components may be by machine 
heat processes, provided such surfaces are remelted in the subsequent 
welding process. Where there will be no subsequent remelting of the 
prepared surface as in a tapered section, the final 0.050 inch of 
material shall be removed by mechanical means.
    (e) The maximum tolerance for misalignment and butting up shall be 
in accordance with the ASME Code.
    (f) Substructures shall be properly fitted before attachment, and 
the welding sequence shall be such as to minimize stresses due to 
shrinkage of welds.

[Order 59-B, 30 FR 580, Jan. 16, 1965. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 
5, 1967]

    Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting 
Sec. 178.337-4, see the List of CFR Sections Affected which appears in 
the Finding Aids section of the printed volume and on GPO Access.



Sec. 178.337-5  Bulkheads, baffles and ring stiffeners.

    (a) Not a specification requirement.
    (b) [Reserved]

[Order 59-B, 30 FR 580, Jan. 16, 1965. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 
5, 1967]



Sec. 178.337-6  Closure for manhole.

    (a) Each cargo tank marked or certified after April 21, 1994, must 
be provided with a manhole conforming to paragraph UG-46(g)(1) and other 
applicable requirements of the ASME Code, except that a cargo tank 
constructed of NQT steel having a capacity of 3500 water gallons or less 
may be provided with an inspection opening conforming to paragraph UG-46 
and other applicable requirements of the ASME Code instead of a manhole.
    (b) The manhole assembly of cargo tanks constructed after June 30, 
1979, may not be located on the front head of the cargo tank.

[Amdt. 178-7, 34 FR 18250, Nov. 14, 1969, as amended by Amdt. 178-52, 43 
FR 58820, Dec. 18, 1978; Amdt. 178-89, 54 FR 25017, June 12, 1989; 55 FR 
21038, May 22, 1990; 56 FR 27876, June 17, 1991; 58 FR 12905, March 8, 
1993; Amdt. 178-118, 61 FR 51340, Oct. 1, 1996]



Sec. 178.337-7  Overturn protection.

    (a) See Sec. 178.337-10.
    (b) [Reserved]

[Order 59-B, 30 FR 580, Jan. 16, 1965. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 
5, 1967]



Sec. 178.337-8  Openings, inlets, and outlets.

    (a) General. The requirements in this paragraph (a) apply to MC 331 
cargo tanks except for those used to transport chlorine. The 
requirements for inlets and outlets on chlorine cargo tanks are in 
paragraph (b) of this section.
    (1) An opening must be provided on each cargo tank used for the 
transportation of liquefied materials to permit complete drainage.
    (2) Except for gauging devices, thermometer wells, pressure relief 
valves, manhole openings, product inlet openings, and product discharge 
openings, each opening in a cargo tank must be closed with a plug, cap, 
or bolted flange.
    (3) Except as provided in paragraph (b) of this section, each 
product inlet opening, including vapor return lines, must be fitted with 
a back flow check valve or an internal self-closing stop valve located 
inside the cargo tank or inside a welded nozzle that is an integral part 
of the cargo tank. The valve seat must be located inside the cargo tank 
or within 2.54 cm (one inch) of the external face of the welded flange. 
Damage to parts exterior to the cargo tank or mating flange must not 
prevent effective seating of the valve. All parts of a valve inside a 
cargo tank or

[[Page 885]]

welded flange must be made of material that will not corrode or 
deteriorate in the presence of the lading.
    (4) Except as provided in paragraphs (a)(5), (b), and (c) of this 
section, each liquid or vapor discharge outlet must be fitted with a 
primary discharge control system as defined in Sec. 178.337-1(g). 
Thermal remote operators must activate at a temperature of 121.11 deg.C 
(250  deg.F) or less. Linkages between closures and remote operators 
must be corrosion resistant and effective in all types of environmental 
conditions incident to discharging of product.
    (i) On a cargo tank over 13,247.5 L (3,500 gallons) water capacity, 
thermal and mechanical means of remote closure must be installed at the 
ends of the cargo tank in at least two diagonally opposite locations. If 
the loading/unloading connection at the cargo tank is not in the general 
vicinity of one of the two locations specified in the first sentence of 
this paragraph (a)(4)(i), additional means of thermal remote closure 
must be installed so that heat from a fire in the loading/unloading 
connection area or the discharge pump will activate the primary 
discharge control system. The loading/unloading connection area is where 
hoses or hose reels are connected to the permanent metal piping.
    (ii) On a cargo tank of 13,247.5 L (3,500 gallons) water capacity or 
less, a thermal means of remote closure must be installed at or near the 
internal self-closing stop valve. A mechanical means of remote closure 
must be installed on the end of the cargo tank furthest away from the 
loading/unloading connection area. The loading/unloading connection area 
is where hoses or hose reels are connected to the permanent metal 
piping. Linkages between closures and remote operators must be corrosion 
resistant and effective in all types of environmental conditions 
incident to discharge of product.
    (iii) All parts of a valve inside a cargo tank or within a welded 
flange must be made of material that will not corrode or deteriorate in 
the presence of the lading.
    (iv) An excess flow valve, integral excess flow valve, or excess 
flow feature must close if the flow reaches the rated flow of a gas or 
liquid specified by the original valve manufacturer when piping mounted 
directly on the valve is sheared off before the first valve, pump, or 
fitting downstream from the excess flow valve, integral excess flow 
valve, or excess flow feature.
    (v) An integral excess flow valve or the excess flow feature of an 
internal self-closing stop valve may be designed with a bypass, not to 
exceed 0.1016 cm (0.040 inch) diameter opening, to allow equalization of 
pressure.
    (vi) The internal self-closing stop valve must be designed so that 
the self-stored energy source and the valve seat are located inside the 
cargo tank or within 2.54 cm (one inch) of the external face of the 
welded flange. Damage to parts exterior to the cargo tank or mating 
flange must not prevent effective seating of the valve.
    (5) A primary discharge control system is not required on the 
following:
    (i) A vapor or liquid discharge opening of less than 1\1/4\ NPT 
equipped with an excess flow valve together with a manually operated 
external stop valve in place of an internal self-closing stop valve.
    (ii) An engine fuel line on a truck-mounted cargo tank of not more 
than \3/4\ NPT equipped with a valve having an integral excess flow 
valve or excess flow feature.
    (iii) A cargo tank motor vehicle certified before January 1, 1995, 
unless intended for use to transport a flammable liquid, flammable gas, 
hydrogen chloride, refrigerated liquid, or anhydrous ammonia.
    (6) In addition to the internal self-closing stop valve, each 
filling and discharge line must be fitted with a stop valve located in 
the line between the internal self-closing stop valve and the hose 
connection. A back flow check valve or excess flow valve may not be used 
to satisfy this requirement.
    (7) An excess flow valve may be designed with a bypass, not to 
exceed a 0.1016 centimeter (0.040 inch) diameter opening, to allow 
equalization of pressure.
    (b) Inlets and discharge outlets on chlorine tanks. The inlet and 
discharge outlets on a cargo tank used to transport chlorine must meet 
the requirements of Sec. 178.337-1(c)(2) and must be fitted

[[Page 886]]

with an internal excess flow valve. In addition to the internal excess 
flow valve, the inlet and discharge outlets must be equipped with an 
external stop valve (angle valve). Excess flow valves must conform to 
the standards of The Chlorine Institute, Inc., as follows:
    (1) A valve conforming to Drawing 101-7, dated July 1993, must be 
installed under each liquid angle valve.
    (2) A valve conforming to Drawing 106-6, dated July 1993, must be 
installed under each gas angle valve.
    (c) Discharge outlets on carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid, cargo 
tanks. A discharge outlet on a cargo tank used to transport carbon 
dioxide, refrigerated liquid is not required to be fitted with an 
internal self-closing stop valve.

[64 FR 28049, May 24, 1999, as amended at 66 FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.337-9  Pressure relief devices, piping, valves, hoses, and fittings.

    (a) Pressure relief devices. (1) See Sec. 173.315(i) of this 
subchapter.
    (2) On cargo tanks for carbon dioxide or nitrous oxide see 
Sec. 173.315 (i) (9) and (10) of this subchapter.
    (3) Each valve must be designed, constructed, and marked for a rated 
pressure not less than the cargo tank design pressure at the temperature 
expected to be encountered.
    (b) Piping, valves, hose, and fittings. (1) The burst pressure of 
all piping, pipe fittings, hose and other pressure parts, except for 
pump seals and pressure relief devices, must be at least 4 times the 
design pressure of the cargo tank. Additionally, the burst pressure may 
not be less than 4 times any higher pressure to which each pipe, pipe 
fitting, hose or other pressure part may be subjected to in service. For 
chlorine service, see paragraph (b)(7) of this section.
    (2) Pipe joints must be threaded, welded or flanged. If threaded 
pipe is used, the pipe and fittings must be Schedule 80 weight or 
heavier. Malleable metals must be used in the construction of valves and 
fittings. Where copper tubing is permitted, joints shall be brazed or be 
of equally strong metal union type. The melting point of the brazing 
material may not be lower than 1000  deg.F. The method of joining tubing 
must not reduce the strength of the tubing, such as by the cutting of 
threads.
    (3) Each hose coupling must be designed for a pressure of at least 
120 percent of the hose design pressure and so that there will be no 
leakage when connected.
    (4) Piping must be protected from damage due to thermal expansion 
and contraction, jarring, and vibration. Slip joints are not authorized 
for this purpose.
    (5) Piping and fittings must be grouped in the smallest practicable 
space and protected from damage as required by Sec. 178.337-10.
    (6) Cargo tank manufacturers and fabricators must demonstrate that 
all piping, valves, and fittings on a cargo tank are free from leaks. To 
meet this requirement, the piping, valves, and fittings must be tested 
after installation at not less than 80 percent of the design pressure 
marked on the cargo tank.
    (7) A hose assembler must:
    (i) Permanently mark each hose assembly with a unique identification 
number.
    (ii) Demonstrate that each hose assembly is free from leaks by 
performing the tests and inspections in Sec. 180.416(f) of this 
subchapter.
    (iii) Mark each hose assembly with the month and year of its 
original pressure test.
    (8) Chlorine cargo tanks. Angle valves on cargo tanks intended for 
chlorine service must conform to Drawing 104-8, dated July 1993, in the 
standards of The Chlorine Institute. Before installation, each angle 
valve must be tested for leakage at not less than 225 psig using dry air 
or inert gas.
    (c) Marking inlets and outlets. Except for gauging devices, 
thermometer wells, and pressure relief valves, each cargo tank inlet and 
outlet must be marked ``liquid'' or ``vapor'' to designate whether it 
communicates with liquid or vapor when the cargo tank is filled to the 
maximum permitted filling density. A filling line that communicates with 
vapor may be marked ``spray-fill'' instead of ``vapor.''
    (d) Refrigeration and heating coils. (1) Refrigeration and heating 
coils must be securely anchored with provisions for thermal expansion. 
The coils must

[[Page 887]]

be pressure tested externally to at least the cargo tank test pressure, 
and internally to either the tank test pressure or twice the working 
pressure of the heating/refrigeration system, whichever is higher. A 
cargo tank may not be placed in service if any leakage occurs or other 
evidence of damage is found. The refrigerant or heating medium to be 
circulated through the coils must not be capable of causing any adverse 
chemical reaction with the cargo tank lading in the event of leakage. 
The unit furnishing refrigeration may be mounted on the motor vehicle.
    (2) Where any liquid susceptible to freezing, or the vapor of any 
such liquid, is used for heating or refrigeration, the heating or 
refrigeration system shall be arranged to permit complete drainage.

[Order 59-B, 30 FR 580, Jan. 16, 1965. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 
5, 1967]

    Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting 
Sec. 178.337-9, see the List of CFR Sections Affected which appears in 
the Finding Aids section of the printed volume and on GPO Access.



178.337-10  Protection of fittings.

    (a) All valves, fittings, safety relief devices, and other 
accessories to the tank proper shall be protected in accordance with 
paragraph (b) of this section against such damage as could be caused by 
collision with other vehicles or objects, jackknifing and overturning. 
In addition, safety relief valves shall be so protected that in the 
event of overturn of the vehicle on to a hard surface, their opening 
will not be prevented and their discharge will not be restricted.
    (b) The protective devices or housing must be designed to withstand 
static loading in any direction equal to twice the weight of the tank 
and attachments when filled with the lading, using a safety factor of 
not less than four, based on the ultimate strength of the material to be 
used, without damage to the fittings protected, and must be made of 
metal at least \3/16\-inch thick.
    (c) For chlorine tanks. There shall be a protective housing and 
manway cover to permit the use of standard emergency kits for 
controlling leaks in fittings on the dome cover plate. The housing and 
manway cover must conform to the Chlorine Institute's standards as 
follows:
    (1) Tanks manufactured on or before December 31, 1974: Dwg. 137-1, 
dated November 7, 1962, or Dwg. 137-2, dated September 1, 1971.
    (2) Tanks manufactured on or after January 1, 1975: Dwg. 137-2, 
dated September 1, 1971.
    (d) Each cargo tank shall be provided with at least one rear bumper 
designed to protect the tank and piping in the event of a rear end 
collision and minimize the possibility of any part of the colliding 
vehicle striking the tank. The design shall be such as to transmit the 
force of a rear end collision in a horizontal line to the chassis of the 
vehicle. The bumper shall be designed to withstand the impact of the 
fully loaded vehicle with a deceleration of 2 ``g'', using a safety 
factor of four based on the ultimate strength of the bumper material. 
The bumpers shall conform dimensionally to Sec. 393.86, chapter III of 
this title.

[Order 59-B, 30 FR 581, Jan. 16, 1965. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 
5, 1967]

    Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting 
Sec. 178.337-10, see the List of CFR Sections Affected which appears in 
the Finding Aids section of the printed volume and on GPO Access.



Sec. 178.337-11  Emergency discharge control.

    (a) Emergency discharge control equipment. Emergency discharge 
control equipment must be installed in a liquid discharge line as 
specified by product and service in Sec. 173.315(n) of this subchapter. 
The performance and certification requirements for emergency discharge 
control equipment are specified in Sec. 173.315(n) of this subchapter 
and are not a part of the cargo tank motor vehicle certification made 
under this specification.
    (b) Engine fuel lines. On a truck-mounted cargo tank, emergency 
discharge control equipment is not required on an engine fuel line of 
not more than \3/4\ NPT equipped with a valve having an integral excess 
flow valve or excess flow feature.

[64 FR 28050, May 24, 1999]

[[Page 888]]



Sec. 178.337-12  Shear section.

    (a) Design or installation of valves specified in Sec. 178.337-
8(a)(2) shall provide adjacent to and outboard of such valves a section 
which will break under undue strain.
    (b) [Reserved]

[Order 59-B, 30 FR 581, Jan. 16, 1965. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 
5, 1967]



Sec. 178.337-13  Supporting and anchoring.

    (a) A cargo tank that is not permanently attached to or integral 
with a vehicle chassis must be secured by turnbuckles or equally 
efficient securing devices for drawing the cargo tank down tight on the 
frame. Anchors, stops, or other means must be provided to prevent 
relative motion between the cargo tank and the vehicle chassis when the 
vehicle is in operation.
    (b) A cargo tank motor vehicle designed and constructed so that the 
cargo tank constitutes in whole or in part the stress member used in 
place of a frame must have the cargo tank supported by external cradles. 
A cargo tank mounted on a frame must be supported by external cradles or 
longitudinal members. The cradles, where used, must subtend at least 120 
degrees of the shell circumference. The design calculations for the 
supports must include beam stress, shear stress, torsion stress, bending 
moment, and acceleration stress, for the loaded cargo tank motor vehicle 
as a unit, using a factor of safety of 4, based on the ultimate strength 
of the material and on a 2 ``g'' longitudinal and lateral loading and 3 
times the static weight in vertical loading (see appendix G of the ASME 
Code).
    (c) Where any cargo tank support is attached to any part of a cargo 
tank head, the stresses imposed upon the head shall be provided for as 
required in paragraph (b) of this section.
    (d) No cargo tank support or bumper may be welded directly to the 
cargo tank. All supports and bumpers shall be attached by means of pads 
of the same material as the cargo tank. The pad thickness shall be no 
less than \1/4\ inch, or the thickness of the shell material if less, 
and no greater than the shell material. Each pad shall extend at least 4 
times its thickness, in each direction, beyond the weld attaching the 
support or bumper. Each pad shall be preformed to an inside radius no 
greater than the outside radius of the cargo tank at the place of 
attachment. Each pad corner shall be rounded to a radius at least one-
fourth the width of the pad, and no greater than one-half the width of 
the pad. Weep holes and telltale holes, if used shall be drilled or 
punched before the pads are attached to the cargo tank. Each pad shall 
be attached to the cargo tank by continuous fillet welding using filler 
material having properties conforming to the recommendations of the 
maker of the shell and head material.

[Order 59-B, 30 FR 581, Jan. 16, 1965. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 
5, 1967, and amended by Amdt. 178-29, 38 FR 27598, Oct. 5, 1973; Amdt. 
178-85, 51 FR 5977, Feb. 18, 1986; Amdt. 178-88, 52 FR 13046, Apr. 20, 
1987; Amdt. 178-118, 61 FR 51340, Oct. 1, 1996]



Sec. 178.337-14  Gauging devices.

    (a) Liquid level gauging devices. See Sec. 173.315(h) of this 
subchapter.
    (b) Pressure gauges. (1) See Sec. 173.315(h) of this subchapter.
    (2) Each cargo tank used in carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid or 
nitrous oxide, refrigerated liquid service must be provided with a 
suitable pressure gauge. A shut-off valve must be installed between the 
pressure gauge and the cargo tank.
    (c) Orifices. See Sec. 173.315(h) (3) and (4) of this subchapter.

[Amdt. 178-29, 38 FR 27599, Oct. 5, 1973, as amended by Amdt. 178-89, 54 
FR 25018, June 12, 1989; Amdt. 178-118, 61 FR 51340, Oct. 1, 1996]



Sec. 178.337-15  Pumps and compressors.

    (a) Liquid pumps or gas compressors, if used, must be of suitable 
design, adequately protected against breakage by collision, and kept in 
good condition. They may be driven by motor vehicle power take-off or 
other mechanical, electrical, or hydraulic means. Unless they are of the 
centrifugal type, they shall be equipped with suitable pressure actuated 
by-pass valves permitting flow from discharge to suction or to the cargo 
tank.

[[Page 889]]

    (b) A liquid chlorine pump may not be installed on a cargo tank 
intended for the transportation of chlorine.

[Amdt. 178-89, 54 FR 25018, June 12, 1989, as amended by Amdt. 178-118, 
61 FR 51340, Oct. 1, 1996]



Sec. 178.337-16  Testing.

    (a) Inspection and tests. Inspection of materials of construction of 
the cargo tank and its appurtenances and original test and inspection of 
the finished cargo tank and its appurtenances must be as required by the 
ASME Code and as further required by this specification except that for 
cargo tanks constructed in accordance with part UHT of the ASME Code the 
original test pressure must be at least twice the cargo tank design 
pressure.
    (b) Weld testing and inspection. (1) Each cargo tank constructed in 
accordance with part UHT of the ASME Code must be subjected, after 
postweld heat treatment and hydrostatic tests, to a wet fluorescent 
magnetic particle inspection to be made on all welds in or on the cargo 
tank shell and heads both inside and out. The method of inspection must 
conform to Appendix VI of the ASME Code, paragraph UA-70 through UA-72 
except that permanent magnets shall not be used.
    (2) On cargo tanks of over 3,500 gallons water capacity other than 
those described in paragraph (b)(1) of this section unless fully 
radiographed, a test must be made of all welds in or on the shell and 
heads both inside and outside by either the wet fluorescent magnetic 
particle method conforming to appendix VI of the ASME Code, liquid dye 
penetrant method, or ultrasonic testing in accordance with appendix U of 
the ASME Code. Permanent magnets must not be used to perform the 
magnetic particle inspection.
    (c) All defects found shall be repaired, the cargo tanks shall then 
again be postweld heat treated, if such heat treatment was previously 
performed, and the repaired areas shall again be tested.

[Order 59-B, 30 FR 582, Jan. 16, 1965. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 
5, 1967, and amended by Amdt. 178-7, 34 FR 18250, Nov. 14, 1969; Amdt. 
178-99, 58 FR 51534, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 178-118, 61 FR 51340, Oct. 1, 
1996]



Sec. 178.337-17  Marking.

    (a) Metal identification plate. Each cargo tank built after July 1, 
1985 shall have a corrosion resistant metal plate permanently affixed by 
brazing or welding around its perimeter, on the left side (on the right 
side prior to July 1, 1985) near the front, in a place readily 
accessible for inspection. It must be maintained in a legible condition. 
On multi-cargo tank motor vehicles plates shall be attached to each 
cargo tank at the front in a place readily accessible for inspection. 
Each insulated cargo tank shall have an additional plate, as described, 
affixed to the jacket in the location specified. Neither the plate 
itself nor the means of attachment to the cargo tank or jacket may be 
subject to attack by the cargo tank contents. If the plate is attached 
directly to the cargo tank by welding it shall be welded thereto before 
the cargo tank is postweld heat treated. The plate shall be plainly 
marked by stamping, embossing, or other means of forming letters into 
the metal of the plate, with the following information in addition to 
that required by the ASME Code, in characters at least \3/8\ inch high:

Vehicle manufacturer.
Vehicle manufacturer's serial number.
D.O.T. specification number MC-331.
Vessel material specification number.
Water capacity in pounds (see Note 1).
Original test date.

    Note 1: See Sec. 173.315(a) of this chapter regarding water 
capacity.

    (b) Each cargo tank must also be marked as required by Sec. 172.328 
of this subchapter.

[Order 59-B, 30 FR 582, Jan. 16, 1965. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 
5, 1967]

    Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting 
Sec. 178.337-17, see the List of CFR Sections Affected which appears in 
the Finding Aids section of the printed volume and on GPO Access.



Sec. 178.337-18  Certification.

    (a) At or before the time of delivery, the cargo tank motor vehicle 
manufacturer must supply and the owner must obtain, a cargo tank motor 
vehicle manufacturer's data report as required by the ASME Code, and a 
certificate stating that the completed cargo tank motor vehicle conforms 
in all respects

[[Page 890]]

to Specification MC 331 and the ASME Code. The registration numbers of 
the manufacturer, the Design Certifying Engineer, and the Registered 
Inspector, as appropriate, must appear on the certificates (see subpart 
F, part 107 in subchapter A of this chapter).
    (1) For each design type, the certificate must be signed by a 
responsible official of the manufacturer and a Design Certifying 
Engineer; and
    (2) For each cargo tank motor vehicle, the certificate must be 
signed by a responsible official of the manufacturer and a Registered 
Inspector.
    (3) The certificate must state whether or not it includes 
certification that all valves, piping, and protective devices conform to 
the requirements of the specification. If it does not so certify, the 
installer of any such valve, piping, or device shall supply and the 
owner shall obtain a certificate asserting complete compliance with 
these specifications for such devices. The certificate, or certificates, 
will include sufficient sketches, drawings, and other information to 
indicate the location, make, model, and size of each valve and the 
arrangement of all piping associated with the cargo tank.
    (4) The certificate must contain a statement indicating whether or 
not the cargo tank was postweld heat treated for anhydrous ammonia as 
specified in Sec. 178.337-1(f).
    (b) The owner shall retain the copy of the data report and 
certificates and related papers in his files throughout his ownership of 
the cargo tank motor vehicle and for at least one year thereafter; and 
in the event of change in ownership, retention by the prior owner of 
nonfading photographically reproduced copies will be deemed to satisfy 
this requirement. Each motor carrier using the cargo tank motor vehicle, 
if not the owner thereof, shall obtain a copy of the data report and 
certificate and retain them in his files during the time he uses the 
cargo tank motor vehicle and for at least one year thereafter.

[Order 59-B, 30 FR 583, Jan. 16, 1965. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 
5, 1967]

    Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting 
Sec. 178.337-18, see the List of CFR Sections Affected which appears in 
the Finding Aids section of the printed volume and on GPO Access.



Sec. 178.338  Specification MC-338; insulated cargo tank motor vehicle.



Sec. 178.338-1  General requirements.

    (a) For the purposes of this section--
    (1) Design pressure means the ``MAWP'' as used in the ASME Code, and 
is the gauge pressure at the top of the tank.
    (2) Design service temperature means the coldest temperature for 
which the tank is suitable (see Secs. 173.318 (a)(1) and (f) of this 
subchapter).
    (b) Each cargo tank must consist of a suitably supported welded 
inner vessel enclosed within an outer shell or jacket, with insulation 
between the inner vessel and outer shell or jacket, and having piping, 
valves, supports and other appurtenances as specified in this 
subchapter. For the purpose of this specification, tank means inner 
vessel and jacket means either the outer shell or insulation cover.
    (c) Each tank must be designed and constructed to meet the 
requirements of the ASME Code.
    (1) The design pressure of the tank must be at least 25.3 psig but 
not more than 500 psig. To determine the required thicknesses of the 
parts of the tank, the static head of the lading shall be added to the 
design pressure. If the jacket is evacuated, the tank must be designed 
for a pressure of 14.7 psi, plus the lading static head, higher than its 
design pressure. The jacket must be designed in accordance with 
paragraph (e) or (f) of this section, as appropriate.
    (2) The design service temperature of the tank, piping and valves 
may not be warmer than the liquefaction temperature at one atmosphere of 
the lading to be transported (see Secs. 173.318 (a)(1) and (f) of this 
subchapter).
    (3) Design and construction details of the tank interior may not 
allow collection and retention of cleaning materials or contaminants. To 
preclude the entrapment of foreign material, the design and construction 
of the tank must allow washing of all interior surfaces by the normal 
surging of the lading during transportation.
    (d) The exterior surface of the tank must be insulated with a 
material compatible with the lading.

[[Page 891]]

    (1) Each cargo tank must have an insulation system that will prevent 
the tank pressure from exceeding the pressure relief valve set pressure 
within the specified holding time when the tank is loaded with the 
specific cryogenic liquid at the design conditions of--
    (i) The specified temperature and pressure of the cryogenic liquid, 
and
    (ii) The exposure of the filled cargo tank to an average ambient 
temperature of 85  deg.F.
    (2) For a cargo tank used to transport oxygen, the insulation may 
not sustain combustion in a 99.5 percent oxygen atmosphere at 
atmospheric pressure when contacted with a continuously heated glowing 
platinum wire. The cargo tank must be marked in accordance with 
Sec. 178.338-18(b)(7).
    (3) Each vacuum-insulated cargo tank must be provided with a 
connection for a vacuum gauge to indicate the absolute pressure within 
the insulation space.
    (e) The insulation must be completely covered by a metal jacket. The 
jacket or the insulation must be so constructed and sealed as to prevent 
moisture from coming into contact with the insulation (see 
Sec. 173.318(a)(3) of this subchapter). Minimum metal thicknesses are as 
follows:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                             Jacket         Jacket not
                                            evacuated       evacuated
               Type metal               --------------------------------
                                          Gauge  Inches   Gauge   Inches
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Stainless steel........................      18  0.0428      22   0.0269
Low carbon mild steel..................      12  0.0946      14   0.0677
Aluminum...............................  ......  0.125   ......   0.1000
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (f) An evacuated jacket must be in compliance with the following 
requirements:
    (1) The jacket must be designed to sustain a minimum critical 
collapsing pressure of 30 psig.
    (2) If the jacket also supports additional loads, such as the weight 
of the tank and lading, the combined stress, computed according to the 
formula in Sec. 178.338-3(b), may not exceed 25 percent of the minimum 
specified tensile strength.

[Amdt. 178-77, 48 FR 27703, June 16, 1983, as amended at 49 FR 24316, 
June 12, 1984; Amdt. 178-104, 59 FR 49135, Sept. 26, 1994; 66 FR 45387, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.338-2  Material.

    (a) All material used in the construction of a tank and its 
appurtenances that may come in contact with the lading must be 
compatible with the lading to be transported. All material used for tank 
pressure parts must conform to the requirements of the ASME Code. All 
material used for evacuated jacket pressure parts must conform to the 
chemistry and steelmaking practices of one of the material 
specifications of Section II of the ASME Code or the following ASTM 
Specifications: A 242, A 441, A 514, A 572, A 588, A 606, A 607, A 633, 
A 715.
    (b) All tie-rods, mountings, and other appurtenances within the 
jacket and all piping, fittings and valves must be of material suitable 
for use at the lowest temperature to be encountered.
    (c) Impact tests are required on all tank materials, except 
aluminum, and must be performed using the procedure prescribed in the 
ASME Code.
    (d) The direction of final rolling of the shell material must be the 
circumferential orientation of the tank shell.
    (e) Each tank constructed in accordance with part UHT of the ASME 
Code must be postweld heat treated as a unit after completion of all 
welds to the shell and heads. Other tanks must be postweld heat treated 
as required by the ASME Code. For all tanks the method must be as 
prescribed in the ASME Code. Welded attachments to pads may be made 
after postweld heat treatment.
    (f) The fabricator shall record the heat and slab numbers and the 
certified Charpy impact values of each plate used in the tank on a 
sketch showing the location of each plate in the shell and heads of the 
tank. A copy of the sketch must be provided to the owner of the cargo 
tank and a copy must be retained by the fabricator for at least five 
years and made available, upon request, to any duly identified 
representative of the Department.

(Approved by the Office of Management and Budget under control number 
2137-0017)

[Amdt. 178-77, 48 FR 27703 and 27713, June 16, 1983, as amended at 49 FR 
24316, June 12, 1984]

[[Page 892]]



Sec. 178.338-3  Structural integrity.

    (a) General requirements and acceptance criteria. (1) Except as 
permitted in paragraph (d) of this section, the maximum calculated 
design stress at any point in the tank may not exceed the lesser of the 
maximum allowable stress value prescribed in section VIII of the ASME 
Code, or 25 percent of the tensile strength of the material used.
    (2) The relevant physical properties of the materials used in each 
tank may be established either by a certified test report from the 
material manufacturer or by testing in conformance with a recognized 
national standard. In either case, the ultimate tensile strength of the 
material used in the design may not exceed 120 percent of the minimum 
ultimate tensile strength specified in either the ASME Code or the ASTM 
standard to which the material is manufactured.
    (3) The maximum design stress at any point in the tank must be 
calculated separately for the loading conditions described in paragraphs 
(b), (c), and (d) of this section. Alternate test or analytical methods, 
or a combination thereof, may be used in lieu of the procedures 
described in paragraphs (b), (c), and (d) of this section, if the 
methods are accurate and verifiable.
    (4) Corrosion allowance material may not be included to satisfy any 
of the design calculation requirements of this section.
    (b) The static design and construction of each tank must be in 
accordance with section VIII of the ASME Code. The tank design must 
include calculation of stresses due to design pressure, the weight of 
lading, the weight of structures supported by the tank wall, and the 
effect of temperature gradients resulting from lading and ambient 
temperature extremes. When dissimilar materials are used, their thermal 
coefficients must be used in calculation of the thermal stresses. Stress 
concentrations in tension, bending and torsion which occur at pads, 
cradles, or other supports must be considered in accordance with 
appendix G of the ASME Code.
    (c) Stresses resulting from static and dynamic loadings, or a 
combination thereof, are not uniform throughout the cargo tank motor 
vehicle. The following is a simplified procedure for calculating the 
effective stress in the tank resulting from static and dynamic loadings. 
The effective stress (the maximum principal stress at any point) must be 
determined by the following formula:

S = 0.5 (Sy + Sx) (0.25(Sy 
    - Sx)2 + Ss2) 0.5


Where:

    (1) S = effective stress at any given point under the most severe 
combination of static and dynamic loadings that can occur at the same 
time, in psi.
    (2) Sy = circumferential stress generated by internal and 
external pressure when applicable, in psi.
    (3) Sx = the net longitudinal stress, in psi, generated 
by the following loading conditions:
    (i) The longitudinal tensile stress generated by internal pressure;
    (ii) The tensile or compressive stress generated by the axial load 
resulting from a decelerative force applied independently to each 
suspension assembly at the road surface using applicable static loadings 
specified in Sec. 178.338-13 (b) and (c);
    (iii) The tensile or compressive stress generated by the bending 
moment resulting from a decelerative force applied independently to each 
suspension assembly at the road surface using applicable static loadings 
specified in Sec. 178.338-13 (b) and (c);
    (iv) The tensile or compressive stress generated by the axial load 
resulting from an accelerative force applied to the horizontal pivot of 
the fifth wheel supporting the vehicle using applicable static loadings 
specified in Sec. 178.338-13 (b) and (c);
    (v) The tensile or compressive stress generated by the bending 
moment resulting from an accelerative force applied to the horizontal 
pivot of the fifth wheel supporting the vehicle using applicable static 
loadings specified in Sec. 178.338-13 (b) and (c); and
    (vi) The tensile or compressive stress generated by a bending moment 
produced by a vertical force using applicable static loadings specified 
in Sec. 178.338-13 (b) and (c).
    (4) Ss = The following shear stresses that apply, in 
psi,: The vectorial sum of the applicable shear stresses in the

[[Page 893]]

plane under consideration, including direct shear generated by the 
static vertical loading; direct lateral and torsional shear generated by 
a lateral accelerative force applied at the road surface, using 
applicable static loads specified in Sec. 178.338-13 (b) and (c)
    (d) In order to account for stresses due to impact in an accident, 
the design calculations for the tank shell and heads must include the 
load resulting from the design pressure in combination with the dynamic 
pressure resulting from a longitudinal deceleration of ``2g''. For this 
loading condition the stress value used may not exceed the lesser of the 
yield strength or 75 percent of the ultimate tensile strength of the 
material of construction. For a cargo tank constructed of stainless 
steel, the maximum design stress may not exceed 75 percent of the 
ultimate tensile strength of the type steel used.
    (e) The minimum thickness of the shell or heads of the tank must be 
0.187 inch for steel and 0.270 inch for aluminum. However, the minimum 
thickness for steel may be 0.110 inches provided the cargo tank is:
    (1) Vacuum insulated, or
    (2) Double walled with a load bearing jacket designed to carry a 
proportionate amount of structural loads prescribed in this section.
    (f) Where a tank support is attached to any part of the tank wall, 
the stresses imposed on the tank wall must meet the requirements in 
paragraph (a) of this section.
    (g) The design, construction, and installation of an appurtenance to 
the cargo tank or jacket must be such that, in the event of its damage 
or failure, the lading retention integrity of the tank will not be 
adversely affected.
    (1) A lightweight attachment, such as a conduit clip, brakeline clip 
or placard holder, must be constructed of a material of lesser strength 
than the cargo tank wall or jacket material and may not be more than 72 
percent of the thickness of the material to which it is attached. The 
attachment may be secured directly to the cargo tank wall or jacket if 
the device is designed and installed in such a manner that, if damaged, 
it will not affect the lading retention integrity of the tank. The 
lightweight attachment must be secured to the cargo tank wall or jacket 
by continuous weld or in such a manner as to preclude formation of 
pockets, which may become sites for incipient corrosion. Attachments 
conforming with this paragraph are not authorized for cargo tanks 
constructed under part UHT of the ASME Code.
    (2) Except as prescribed in Sec. 178.338-3(g)(1), the welding of any 
appurtenance to the cargo tank wall or jacket must be made by attachment 
of a mounting pad, so that there will be no adverse affect upon the 
lading retention integrity of the tank if any force is applied to the 
appurtenance, from any direction. The thickness of the mounting pad may 
not be less than that of the shell or head to which it is attached, and 
not more than 1.5 times the shell or head thickness. However, a pad with 
a minimum thickness of 0.187 inch may be used when the shell or head 
thickness is over 0.187 inch. If weep holes or tell tale holes are used, 
the pad must be drilled or punched at its lowest point before it is 
welded. Each pad must--
    (i) Extend at least 2 inches in each direction from any point of 
attachment of an appurtenance;
    (ii) Be attached by a continuous weld around the pad except for a 
small gap at the lowest point for draining.

[Amdt. 178-89, 55 FR 37057, Sept. 7, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 178-89, 
56 FR 27876, June 17, 1991; 56 FR 46354, Sept. 11, 1991]



Sec. 178.338-4  Joints.

    (a) All joints in the tank, and in the jacket if evacuated, must be 
as prescribed in the ASME Code, except that a butt weld with one plate 
edge offset is not authorized.
    (b) Welding procedure and welder performance tests must be made in 
accordance with Section IX of the ASME Code. Records of the 
qualification must be retained by the tank manufacturer for at least 
five years and must be made available, upon request, to any duly 
identified representative of the Department, or the owner of the cargo 
tank.
    (c) All longitudinal welds in tanks and load bearing jackets must be 
located so as not to intersect nozzles or supports other than load rings 
and stiffening rings.

[[Page 894]]

    (d) Substructures must be properly fitted before attachment and the 
welding sequence must minimize stresses due to shrinkage of welds.
    (e) Filler material containing more than 0.05 percent vanadium may 
not be used with quenched and tempered steel.
    (f) All tank nozzle-to-shell and nozzle-to-head welds must be full 
penetration welds.

(Approved by the Office of Management and Budget under control number 
2137-0017)

[Amdt. 178-77, 48 FR 27704 and 27713, June 16, 1983, as amended at 49 FR 
24316, June 12, 1984]



Sec. 178.338-5  Stiffening rings.

    (a) A tank is not required to be provided with stiffening rings, 
except as prescribed in the ASME Code.
    (b) If a jacket is evacuated, it must be constructed in compliance 
with Sec. 178.338-1(f). Stiffening rings may be used to meet these 
requirements.

[Amdt. 178-77, 48 FR 27704, June 16, 1983]



Sec. 178.338-6  Manholes.

    (a) Each tank in oxygen service must be provided with a manhole as 
prescribed in the ASME Code.
    (b) Each tank having a manhole must be provided with a means of 
entrance and exit through the jacket, or the jacket must be marked to 
indicate the manway location on the tank.
    (c) A manhole with a bolted closure may not be located on the front 
head of the tank.

[Amdt. 178-77, 48 FR 27704, June 16, 1983, as amended at 49 FR 24316, 
June 12, 1984]



Sec. 178.338-7  Openings.

    (a) The inlet to the liquid product discharge opening of each tank 
intended for flammable ladings must be at the bottom centerline of the 
tank.
    (b) If the leakage of a single valve, except a pressure relief 
valve, pressure control valve, full trycock or gas phase manual vent 
valve, would permit loss of flammable material, an additional closure 
that is leak tight at the tank design pressure must be provided outboard 
of such valve.

[Amdt. 178-77, 48 FR 27704, June 16, 1983]



Sec. 178.338-8  Pressure relief devices, piping, valves, and fittings.

    (a) Pressure relief devices. Each tank pressure relief device must 
be designed, constructed, and marked in accordance with Sec. 173.318(b) 
of this subchapter.
    (b) Piping, valves, and fittings. (1) The burst pressure of all 
piping, pipe fittings, hoses and other pressure parts, except for pump 
seals and pressure relief devices, must be at least 4 times the design 
pressure of the tank. Additionally, the burst pressure may not be less 
than 4 times any higher pressure to which each pipe, pipe fitting, hose 
or other pressure part may be subjected to in service.
    (2) Pipe joints must be threaded, welded or flanged. If threaded 
pipe is used, the pipe and fittings must be Schedule 80 weight or 
heavier. Malleable metals must be used in the construction of valves and 
fittings. Where copper tubing is permitted, joints shall be brazed or be 
of equally strong metal union type. The melting point of the brazing 
materials may not be lower than 1000  deg.F. The method of joining 
tubing may not reduce the strength of the tubing, such as by the cutting 
of threads.
    (3) Each hose coupling must be designed for a pressure of at least 
120 percent of the hose design pressure and so that there will be no 
leakage when connected.
    (4) Piping must be protected from damage due to thermal expansion 
and contraction, jarring, and vibration. Slip joints are not authorized 
for this purpose.
    (5) All piping, valves and fittings on a cargo tank must be proved 
free from leaks. This requirement is met when such piping, valves, and 
fittings have been tested after installation with gas or air and proved 
leak tight at not less than the design pressure marked on the cargo 
tank. This requirement is applicable to all hoses used in a cargo tank, 
except that hose may be tested before or after installation on the tank.
    (6) Each valve must be suitable for the tank design pressure at the 
tank design service temperature.
    (7) All fittings must be rated for the maximum tank pressure and 
suitable for the coldest temperature to which

[[Page 895]]

they will be subjected in actual service.
    (8) All piping, valves, and fittings must be grouped in the smallest 
practicable space and protected from damage as required by Sec. 178.338-
10.
    (9) When a pressure-building coil is used on a tank designed to 
handle oxygen or flammable ladings, the vapor connection to that coil 
must be provided with a valve or check valve as close to the tank shell 
as practicable to prevent the loss of vapor from the tank in case of 
damage to the coil. The liquid connection to that coil must also be 
provided with a valve.

[Amdt. 178-77, 48 FR 27704, June 16, 1983, as amended by Amdt. 178-89, 
54 FR 25019, June 12, 1989]



Sec. 178.338-9  Holding time.

    (a) ``Holding time'' is the time, as determined by testing, that 
will elapse from loading until the pressure of the contents, under 
equilibrium conditions, reaches the level of the lowest pressure control 
valve or pressure relief valve setting.
    (b) Holding time test. (1) The test to determine holding time must 
be performed by charging the tank with a cryogenic liquid having a 
boiling point, at a pressure of one atmosphere, absolute, no lower than 
the design service temperature of the tank. The tank must be charged to 
its maximum permitted filling density with that liquid and stabilized to 
the lowest practical pressure, which must be equal to or less than the 
pressure to be used for loading. The cargo tank together with its 
contents must then be exposed to ambient temperature.
    (2) The tank pressure and ambient temperature must be recorded at 3-
hour intervals until the pressure level of the contents reaches the set-
to-discharge pressure of the pressure control valve or pressure relief 
valve with the lowest setting. This total time lapse in hours represents 
the measured holding time at the actual average ambient temperature. 
This measured holding time for the test cryogenic liquid must be 
adjusted to an equivalent holding time for each cryogenic liquid that is 
to be identified on or adjacent to the specification plate, at an 
average ambient temperature of 85  deg.F. This is the rated holding time 
(RHT). The marked rated holding time (MRHT) displayed on or adjacent to 
the specification plate (see Sec. 178.338-18(b)(9)) may not exceed this 
RHT.
    (c) Optional test regimen. (1) If more than one cargo tank is made 
to the same design, only one cargo tank must be subjected to the full 
holding time test at the time of manufacture. However, each subsequent 
cargo tank made to the same design must be performance tested during its 
first trip. The holding time determined in this test may not be less 
than 90 percent of the marked rated holding time. This test must be 
performed in accordance with Secs. 173.318(g)(3) and 177.840(h) of this 
subchapter, regardless of the classification of the cryogenic liquid.
    (2) Same design. The term ``same design'' as used in this section 
means cargo tanks made to the same design type. See Sec. 178.320(a)(3) 
for definition of ``design type''.
    (3) For a cargo tank used in nonflammable cryogenic liquid service, 
in place of the holding time tests prescribed in paragraph (b) of this 
section, the marked rated holding time (MRHT) may be determined as 
follows:
    (i) While the cargo tank is stationary, the heat transfer rate must 
be determined by measuring the normal evaporation rate (NER) of the test 
cryogenic liquid (preferably the lading, where feasible) maintained at 
approximately one atmosphere. The calculated heat transfer rate must be 
determined from:

q = [n([Delta] h)(85-t1)] / [ts - tf]

Where:

q = calculated heat transfer rate to cargo tank with lading, Btu/hr.
n = normal evaporation rate (NER), which is the rate of evaporation, 
determined by the test of a test cryogenic liquid in a cargo tank 
maintained at a pressure of approximately one atmosphere, absolute, lb/
hr.
[Delta] h = latent heat of vaporization of test fluid at test pressure, 
Btu/lb.
ts = average temperature of outer shell during test,  deg.F.
t1 = equilibrium temperature of lading at maximum loading 
pressure,  deg.F.
tf = equilibrium temperature of test fluid at one atmosphere, 
 deg.F.

    (ii) The rated holding time (RHT) must be calculated as follows:


[[Page 896]]


RHT = [(U2 - U1) W] / q

Where:

RHT = rated holding time, in hours
U1 and U2 = internal energy for the combined 
liquid and vapor lading at the pressure offered for transportation, and 
the set pressure of the applicable pressure control valve or pressure 
relief valve, respectively, Btu/lb.
W = total weight of the combined liquid and vapor lading in the cargo 
tank, pounds.
q = calculated heat transfer rate to cargo tank with lading, Btu/hr.

    (iii) The MRHT (see Sec. 178.338-18(b)(9) of this subchapter) may 
not exceed the RHT.

[Amdt. 178-77, 48 FR 27704, June 16, 1983; 48 FR 50442, Nov. 1, 1983, as 
amended at 49 FR 24316, June 12, 1984; 49 FR 43965, Nov. 1, 1984; 59FR 
55173, Nov. 3, 1994; Amdt. 178-118, 61 FR 51340, Oct. 1, 1996]



Sec. 178.338-10  Collision damage protection.

    (a) All valves, fittings, pressure relief devices and other 
accessories to the tank proper, which are not isolated from the tank by 
closed intervening shut-off valves or check valves, must be installed 
within the motor vehicle framework or within a suitable collision 
resistant guard or housing, and appropriate ventilation must be 
provided. Each pressure relief device must be protected so that in the 
event of the upset of the vehicle onto a hard surface, the device's 
opening will not be prevented and its discharge will not be restricted.
    (b) Each protective device or housing, and its attachment to the 
vehicle structure, must be designed to withstand static loading in any 
direction that it may be loaded as a result of front, rear, side, or 
sideswipe collision, or the overturn of the vehicle. The static loading 
shall equal twice the loaded weight of the tank and attachments. A 
safety factor of four, based on the tensile strength of the material, 
shall be used. The protective device or the housing must be made of 
steel at least \3/16\-inch thick, or other material of equivalent 
strength.
    (c) Each tank motor vehicle must be provided with at least one rear 
bumper designed to protect the cargo tank and piping in the event of a 
rear end collision. The bumper design must transmit the force of the 
collision directly to the chasis of the vehicle. The rear bumper and its 
attachments to the chasis must be designed to withstand a load equal to 
twice the weight of the loaded cargo tank and attachments, using a 
safety factor of four based on the tensile strength of the materials 
used, with such load being applied horizontally and parallel to the 
major axis of the cargo tank, or within 30 horizontal degrees thereof. 
The rear bumper dimensions must meet the requirements of Sec. 393.86 of 
this title and extend vertically to a height adequate to protect all 
valves and fittings located at the rear of the cargo tank from damage 
that could result in loss of lading.
    (d) Every part of the loaded cargo tank, and any associated valve, 
pipe, enclosure, or protective device or structure (exclusive of wheel 
assemblies), must be at least 14 inches above level ground.

[Amdt. 178-77, 48 FR 27705, June 16, 1983, as amended at 49 FR 24316, 
June 12, 1984; Amdt. 178-99, 58 FR 51534, Oct. 1, 1993]



Sec. 178.338-11  Discharge control devices.

    (a) Excess-flow valves are not required.
    (b) Each liquid filling and liquid discharge line must be provided 
with a shut-off valve located as close to the tank as practicable. 
Unless this valve is manually operable at the valve, the line must also 
have a manual shut-off valve.
    (c) Except for a cargo tank used to transport the following 
refrigerated liquids: argon, carbon dioxide, helium, krypton, neon, 
nitrogen, and xenon; each liquid filling and liquid discharge line must 
be provided with a remotely controlled self-closing shut-off valve. This 
requirement does not apply to a cargo tank motor vehicle certified 
before January 1, 1995, unless intended for use to transport flammable 
ladings. If pressure from a reservoir or from an engine driven pump or 
compressor is used to open this valve, the control must be of fail-safe 
design, spring-biased to stop the admission of such pressure. If the 
jacket is not evacuated, the seat of the valve must be inside the tank, 
in the opening nozzle or flange, or in a companion flange bolted to the 
nozzle. If the jacket is evacuated, the

[[Page 897]]

remotely controlled valve must be located as close to the tank as 
practicable.
    (1) On a cargo tank with a capacity in excess of 3,500 gallons of 
water, each remotely controlled shut-off valve must be provided with 
remote means of automatic closure, both mechanical and thermal, 
installed at the ends of the cargo tank in at least two diagonally 
opposite locations. The thermal means shall consist of fusible elements 
actuated at a temperature not exceeding 250  deg.F., or equivalent 
devices. One means may be used to close more than one remotely 
controlled valve.
    (2) On a cargo tank with a capacity of 3,500 gallons of water or 
less, each remotely controlled shut-off valve must be provided with at 
least one remote control station on the end of the cargo tank opposite 
the main control station. The remote control station must contain a 
manual means of closure. In addition, it may contain fusible elements 
actuated at a temperature not exceeding 250  deg.F., or equivalent 
devices. One means may be used to close more than one remotely 
controlled valve.

[Amdt. 178-77, 48 FR 27705, June 16, 1983, as amended by Amdt. 178-105, 
59 FR 55173, Nov. 3, 1994; 60 FR 17402, Apr. 5, 1995]



Sec. 178.338-12  Shear section.

    Unless the valve is located in a rear cabinet forward of and 
protected by the bumper (see Sec. 178.338-10(c)), the design and 
installation of each valve, damage to which could result in loss of 
liquid or vapor, must incorporate a shear section or breakage groove 
adjacent to, and outboard of, the valve. The shear section or breakage 
groove must yield or break under strain without damage to the valve that 
would allow the loss of liquid or vapor. The protection specified in 
Sec. 178.338-10 is not a substitute for a shear section or breakage 
groove.

[Amdt. 178-77, 49 FR 24316, June 12, 1984]



Sec. 178.338-13  Supports and anchoring.

    (a) All attachments of supports and bumpers to tanks and to load-
bearing jackets must be made by means of pads of material similar to 
that of the tank or jacket, by load rings, or by bosses designed or 
gusseted to distribute the load. The pad must be at least \1/4\-inch 
thick, or as thick as the tank or jacket material, if less, but shall in 
no case be thicker than the tank or jacket material. Each pad must 
extend at least four times its thickness, in each direction, beyond the 
weld attaching the support or bumper. Each pad must be preformed to an 
inside radius no greater than the outside radius of the tank or jacket 
at the place of attachment. Each pad corner must be rounded to a radius 
at least one-fourth the width of the pad and no greater than one-half 
the width of the pad. If weep holes or telltale holes are used, they 
must be drilled or punched before the pads are attached. Each pad must 
be attached to the tank or jacket by continuous fillet welding using 
filler material having properties conforming to the recommendations of 
the manufacturer of the tank or jacket material. Any fillet weld 
discontinuity may only be for the purpose of preventing an intersection 
between the fillet weld and a tank or jacket seam weld.
    (b) A tank motor vehicle constructed so that the cargo tank 
constitutes in whole or in part the structural member used in place of a 
motor vehicle frame must have the tank or the jacket supported by 
external cradles or by load rings. A cargo tank mounted on a motor 
vehicle frame must have the tank or jacket supported by external 
cradles, load rings, or longitudinal members. If cradles are used, they 
must subtend at least 120 degrees of the cargo tank circumference. The 
design calculations for the supports and load bearing tank or jacket, 
and the support attachments must include beam stress, shear stress, 
torsion stress, bending moment, and acceleration stress for the loaded 
vehicle as a unit, using a safety factor of four, based on the tensile 
strength of the material, and static loadings that take into 
consideration the weight of the cargo tank and its attachments when 
filled to the design weight of the lading (see appendix G of the ASME 
Code). The effects of fatigue must also be considered in the 
calculations. Minimum static loadings must be as follows:
    (1) For a vacuum-insulated cargo tank--
    (i) Vertically downward of 2;
    (ii) Vertically upward of 2;

[[Page 898]]

    (iii) Longitudinally of 2; and
    (iv) Laterally of 2.
    (2) For a nonvacuum-insulated cargo tank--
    (i) Vertically downward of 3;
    (ii) Vertically upward of 2;
    (iii) Longitudinally of 2; and
    (iv) Laterally of 2.
    (c) When a loaded tank is supported within the vacuum jacket by 
structural members, the design calculations for the tank and its 
structural members must be based on a safety factor of four and the 
tensile strength of the material at ambient temperature. The enhanced 
tensile strength of the material at actual operating temperature may be 
substituted for the tensile strength at ambient temperature to the 
extent recognized in the ASME Code for static loadings. Static loadings 
must take into consideration the weight of the tank and the structural 
members when the tank is filled to the design weight of lading (see 
appendix G of the ASME Code). When load rings in the jacket are used for 
supporting the tank, they must be designed to carry the fully loaded 
tank at the specified static loadings, plus external pressure. Minimum 
static loadings must be as follows:
    (1) Vertically downward of 2;
    (2) Vertically upward of 1\1/2\;
    (3) Longitudinally of 1\1/2\; and,
    (4) Laterally of 1\1/2\.

[Amdt. 178-77, 48 FR 27705, June 16, 1983, as amended at 49 FR 24317, 
June 12, 1984]



Sec. 178.338-14  Gauging devices.

    (a) Liquid level gauging devices.
    (1) Unless a cargo tank is intended to be filled by weight, it must 
be equipped with one or more gauging devices, which accurately indicate 
the maximum permitted liquid level at the loading pressure, in order to 
provide a minimum of two percent outage below the inlet of the pressure 
control valve or pressure relief valve at the condition of incipient 
opening of that valve. A fixed-length dip tube, a fixed trycock line, or 
a differential pressure liquid level gauge must be used as the primary 
control for filling. Other gauging devices, except gauge glasses, may be 
used, but not as the primary control for filling.
    (2) The design pressure of each liquid level gauging device must be 
at least that of the tank.
    (3) If a fixed length dip tube or trycock line gauging device is 
used, it must consist of a pipe or tube of small diameter equipped with 
a valve at or near the jacket and extending into the cargo tank to a 
specified filling height. The fixed height at which the tube ends in the 
cargo tank must be such that the device will function when the liquid 
reaches the maximum level permitted in loading.
    (4) The liquid level gauging device used as a primary control for 
filling must be designed and installed to accurately indicate the 
maximum filling level at the point midway of the tank both 
longitudinally and laterally.
    (b) Pressure gauges. Each cargo tank must be provided with a 
suitable pressure gauge indicating the lading pressure and located on 
the front of the jacket so it can be read by the driver in the rear view 
mirror. Each gauge must have a reference mark at the cargo tank design 
pressure or the set pressure of the pressure relief valve or pressure 
control valve, whichever is lowest.
    (c) Orifices. All openings for dip tube gauging devices and pressure 
gauges in flammable cryogenic liquid service must be restricted at or 
inside the jacket by orifices no larger than 0.060-inch diameter. 
Trycock lines, if provided, may not be greater than \1/2\-inch nominal 
pipe size.

[Amdt. 178-77, 48 FR 27706, June 16, 1983, as amended at 49 FR 24317, 
June 12, 1984]



Sec. 178.338-15  Cleanliness.

    A cargo tank constructed for oxygen service must be thoroughly 
cleaned to remove all foreign material in accordance with CGA Pamphlet 
G-4.1. All loose particles from fabrication, such as weld beads, dirt, 
grinding wheel debris, and other loose materials, must be removed prior 
to the final closure of the manhole of the tank. Chemical or solvent 
cleaning with a material compatible with the intending lading must be 
performed to remove any contaminants likely to react with the lading.

[Amdt. 178-77, 48 FR 27706, June 16, 1983]

[[Page 899]]



Sec. 178.338-16  Inspection and testing.

    (a) General. The material of construction of a tank and its 
appurtenances must be inspected for conformance to the ASME Code. The 
tank must be subjected to either a hydrostatic or pneumatic test. The 
test pressure must be one and one-half times the sum of the design 
pressure, plus static head of lading, plus 14.7 psi if subjected to 
external vacuum, except that for tanks constructed in accordance with 
Part UHT of the ASME Code the test pressure must be twice the design 
pressure.
    (b) Additional requirements for pneumatic test. A pneumatic test may 
be used in place of the hydrostatic test. Due regard for protection of 
all personnel should be taken because of the potential hazard involved 
in a pneumatic test. The pneumatic test pressure in the tank must be 
reached by gradually increasing the pressure to one-half of the test 
pressure. Thereafter, the test pressure must be increased in steps of 
approximately one-tenth of the test pressure until the required test 
pressure has been reached. Then the pressure must be reduced to a value 
equal to four-fifths of the test pressure and held for a sufficient time 
to permit inspection of the cargo tank for leaks.
    (c) Weld inspection. All tank shell or head welds subject to 
pressure shall be radiographed in accordance with the ASME Code. A tank 
which has been subjected to inspection by the magnetic particle method, 
the liquid penetrant method, or any method involving a material deposit 
on the interior tank surface, must be cleaned to remove any such residue 
by scrubbing or equally effective means, and all such residue and 
cleaning solution must be removed from the tank prior to final closure 
of the tank.
    (d) Defect repair. All cracks and other defects must be repaired as 
prescribed by the ASME Code. The welder and the welding procedure must 
be qualified in accordance with the ASME Code. After repair, the tank 
must again be postweld heat-treated, if such heat treatment was 
previously performed, and the repaired areas must be retested.
    (e) Verification must be made of the interior cleanliness of a tank 
constructed for oxygen service by means that assure that all 
contaminants that are likely to react with the lading have been removed 
as required by Sec. 178.338-15.

[Amdt. 178-77, 48 FR 27706, June 16, 1983, as amended at 49 FR 24317, 
June 12, 1984; 49 FR 42736, Oct. 24, 1984]



Sec. 178.338-17  Pumps and compressors.

    (a) Liquid pumps and gas compressors, if used, must be of suitable 
design, adequately protected against breakage by collision, and kept in 
good condition. They may be driven by motor vehicle power take-off or 
other mechanical, electrical, or hydraulic means. Unless they are of the 
centrifugal type, they shall be equipped with suitable pressure actuated 
by-pass valves permitting flow from discharge to suction to the tank.
    (b) A valve or fitting made of aluminum with internal rubbing or 
abrading aluminum parts that may come in contact with oxygen, cryogenic 
liquid, may not be installed on any cargo tank used to transport oxygen, 
cryogenic liquid, unless the parts are anodized in accordance with ASTM 
Standard B 580 (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 171.7 of this 
subchapter).

[Amdt. 178-89, 54 FR 25020, June 12, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 37058, 
Sept. 7, 1990; 67 FR 61016, Sept. 27, 2002]



Sec. 178.338-18  Marking.

    (a) Nameplate. Each tank built after July 1, 1985 shall have a 
corrosion resistant metal plate permanently affixed by brazing or 
welding around its perimeter, on the left side (on the right side prior 
to July 1, 1985) near the front. If this nameplate is attached by 
welding, it must be welded before the tank is postweld heat-treated. The 
nameplate must be plainly marked by stamping, embossing, or other means 
of forming letters into the metal of the plate, in characters at least 
\3/8\-inches high. The following information, in addition to that 
required by the ASME Code, must be included (parenthetical abbreviations 
may be used):
    (1) DOT Specification number MC-338 (DOT MC-338);
    (2) Material specification number (Mat. Spec. No.);

[[Page 900]]

    (3) Maximum density of lading for which the tank is designed (Max. 
Dens. of Lading);
    (4) Water capacity, in pounds net at 60  deg.F., with the tank at 
its coldest operating temperature, after deduction for the volume above 
the inlet to the pressure relief device or pressure control valve, 
structural members, baffles, piping, and other appurtenances inside the 
tank (W. Cap.); and
    (5) Original test date (Orig. Test Date);
    (b) Specification plate. Each tank built after July 1, 1985 shall 
have an additional plate, in the form specified in paragraph (a) of this 
section. It must be welded, brazed, or riveted to the jacket on the left 
side (on the right side prior to July 1, 1985) near the front, or at the 
control station, in a position readily legible to operating personnel. 
It must be marked with the information specified in paragraph (a) of 
this section and in addition, in characters at least \3/8\-inches high, 
the following (parenthetical abbreviations may be used):
    (1) Vehicle manufacturer (Veh. Mfr.);
    (2) Manufacturer's vehicle serial number (Veh. No.);
    (3) Lining material, if any (Lining);
    (4) Date of manufacture (Date of Mfr.);
    (5) Certificate date (Cert. Date);
    (6) Design service temperature (Design Serv. Temp.);
    (7) ``Insulation for Oxygen Service'' or ``Not Authorized for Oxygen 
Service,'' as appropriate;
    (8) Maximum weight of lading for which the cargo tank is designed, 
in pounds (Max. Net Wt. ---- lbs.);
    (9) Marked rated holding time for at least one cryogenic liquid, in 
hours, and the name of that cryogenic liquid (MRHT ---- hrs, name of 
cryogenic liquid). MRHT markings for additional cryogenic liquids may be 
displayed on or adjacent to the specification plate.
    (c) The design weight of lading used in determining the loading in 
Secs. 178.338-3(b), 178.338-10 (b) and (c), and 178.338-13 (b) and (c) 
must be shown as the maximum weight of lading marking required by 
paragraph (b) of this section.

[Amdt. 178-77, 48 FR 27706, June 16, 1983, as amended at 49 FR 24317, 
June 12, 1984; Amdt. 178-83, 50 FR 11066, Mar. 19, 1985; Amdt. 178-85, 
51 FR 5976, Feb. 18, 1986]



Sec. 178.338-19  Certification.

    (a) At or before the time of delivery, the manufacturer of a cargo 
tank motor vehicle shall furnish to the owner of the completed vehicle 
the following:
    (1) The tank manufacturer's data report as required by the ASME 
Code, and a certificate bearing the manufacturer's vehicle serial number 
stating that the completed cargo tank motor vehicle conforms to all 
applicable requirements of Specification MC 338, including the ASME Code 
in effect on the date (month, year) of certification. The registration 
numbers of the manufacturer, the Design Certifying Engineer, and the 
Registered Inspector, as appropriate, must appear on the certificates 
(See subpart F, part 107 in subchapter B of this chapter).
    (i) For each design type, the certificate must be signed by a 
responsible official of the manufacturer and a Design Certifying 
Engineer; and
    (ii) For each cargo tank motor vehicle, the certificate must be 
signed by a responsible official of the manufacturer and a Design 
Certifying Engineer;
    (2) A photograph, pencil rub, or other facsimile of the plates 
required by paragraphs (a) and (b) of Sec. 178.338-18.
    (b) In the case of a cargo tank vehicle manufactured in two or more 
stages, each manufacturer who performs a manufacturing operation on the 
incomplete vehicle or portion thereof shall furnish to the succeeding 
manufacturer, at or before the time of delivery, a certificate covering 
the particular operation performed by that manufacturer, and any 
certificates received from previous manufacturers, Registered 
Inspectors, and Design Certifying Engineers. The certificates must 
include sufficient sketches, drawings, and other information to indicate 
the location, make, model and size of each valve and the arrangement of 
all piping

[[Page 901]]

associated with the tank. Each certificate must be signed by an official 
of the manufacturing firm responsible for the portion of the complete 
cargo tank vehicle represented thereby, such as basic tank fabrication, 
insulation, jacket, or piping. The final manufacturer shall furnish the 
owner with all certificates, as well as the documents required by 
paragraph (a) of this section.
    (c) The owner shall retain the data report, certificates, and 
related papers throughout his ownership of the cargo tank. In the event 
of change of ownership, the prior owner shall retain non-fading 
photographically reproduced copies of these documents for at least one 
year. Each operator using the cargo tank vehicle, if not the owner 
thereof, shall obtain a copy of the data report and the certificate or 
certificates and retain them during the time he uses the cargo tank and 
for at least one year thereafter.

(Approved by the Office of Management and Budget under control number 
2137-0017)

[Amdt. 178-77, 48 FR 27707 and 27713, June 16, 1983, as amended by Amdt. 
178-89, 55 FR 37058, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. 178-99, 58 FR 51534, Oct. 1, 
1993; 62 FR 51561, Oct. 1, 1997]



Secs. 178.340-178.343  [Reserved]



Sec. 178.345  General design and construction requirements applicable to Specification DOT 406 (Sec. 178.346), DOT 407 (Sec. 178.347), and DOT 412 
          (Sec. 178.348) cargo tank motor vehicles.



Sec. 178.345-1  General requirements.

    (a) Specification DOT 406, DOT 407 and DOT 412 cargo tank motor 
vehicles must conform to the requirements of this section in addition to 
the requirements of the applicable specification contained in 
Secs. 178.346, 178.347 or 178.348.
    (b) All specification requirements are minimum requirements.
    (c) Definitions. The following terms apply to Secs. 178.345, 
178.346, 178.347 and 178.348.
    Appurtenance means any cargo tank accessory attachment that has no 
lading retention or containment function and provides no structural 
support to the cargo tank.
    Baffle means a non-liquid-tight transverse partition device that 
deflects, checks or regulates fluid motion in a tank.
    Bulkhead means a liquid-tight transverse closure at the ends of or 
between cargo tanks.
    Charging line means a hose, tube, pipe, or similar device used to 
pressurize a tank with material other than the lading.
    Companion flange means one of two mating flanges where the flange 
faces are in contact or separated only by a thin leak sealing gasket and 
are secured to one another by bolts or clamps.
    Connecting structure means the structure joining two cargo tanks.
    Constructed and certified in conformance with the ASME Code means 
the cargo tank is constructed and stamped in accordance with the ASME 
Code, and is inspected and certified by an Authorized Inspector.
    Constructed in accordance with the ASME Code means the cargo tank is 
constructed in accordance with the ASME Code with the authorized 
exceptions (see Secs. 178.346, 178.347, and 178.348) and is inspected 
and certified by a Registered Inspector.
    External self-closing stop-valve means a self-closing stop-valve 
designed so that the self-stored energy source is located outside the 
cargo tank and the welded flange.
    Extreme dynamic loading means the maximum single-acting loading a 
cargo tank motor vehicle may experience during its expected life, 
excluding accident loadings.
    Flange means the structural ring for guiding or attachment of a pipe 
or fitting with another flange (companion flange), pipe, fitting or 
other attachment.
    Inspection pressure means the pressure used to determine leak 
tightness of the cargo tank when testing with pneumatic pressure.
    Internal self-closing stop-valve means a self-closing stop-valve 
designed so that the self-stored energy source is located inside the 
cargo tank or cargo tank sump, or within the welded flange, and the 
valve seat is located within the cargo tank or within one inch of the 
external face of the welded flange or sump of the cargo tank.

[[Page 902]]

    Lading means the hazardous material contained in a cargo tank.
    Loading/unloading connection means the fitting in the loading/
unloading line farthest from the loading/unloading outlet to which the 
loading/unloading hose or device is attached.
    Loading/unloading outlet means the cargo tank outlet used for normal 
loading/unloading operations.
    Loading/unloading stop-valve means the stop valve farthest from the 
cargo tank loading/unloading outlet to which the loading/unloading 
connection is attached.
    MAWP. See Sec. 178.345-1(k).
    Multi-specification cargo tank motor vehicle means a cargo tank 
motor vehicle equipped with two or more cargo tanks fabricated to more 
than one cargo tank specification.
    Normal operating loading means the loading a cargo tank motor 
vehicle may be expected to experience routinely in operation.
    Nozzle means the subassembly consisting of a pipe or tubular section 
with or without a welded or forged flange on one end.
    Outlet means any opening in the shell or head of a cargo tank, 
(including the means for attaching a closure), except that the following 
are not outlets: A threaded opening securely closed during 
transportation with a threaded plug or a threaded cap, a flanged opening 
securely closed during transportation with a bolted or welded blank 
flange, a manhole, or gauging devices, thermometer wells, and safety 
relief devices.
    Outlet stop-valve means the stop-valve at the cargo tank loading/
unloading outlet.
    Pipe coupling means a fitting with internal threads on both ends.
    Rear bumper means the structure designed to prevent a vehicle or 
object from under-riding the rear of a motor vehicle. See Sec. 393.86 of 
this title.
    Rear-end tank protection device means the structure designed to 
protect a cargo tank and any lading retention piping or devices in case 
of a rear end collision.
    Sacrificial Device means an element, such as a shear section, 
designed to fail under load in order to prevent damage to any lading 
retention part or device. The device must break under strain at no more 
than 70 percent of the strength of the weakest piping element between 
the cargo tank and the sacrificial device. Operation of the sacrificial 
device must leave the remaining piping and its attachment to the cargo 
tank intact and capable of retaining lading.
    Self-closing stop-valve means a stop-valve held in the closed 
position by means of self-stored energy, which opens only by application 
of an external force and which closes when the external force is 
removed.
    Shear section means a sacrificial device fabricated in such a manner 
as to abruptly reduce the wall thickness of the adjacent piping or valve 
material by at least 30 percent.
    Shell means the circumferential portion of a cargo tank defined by 
the basic design radius or radii excluding the closing heads.
    Stop-valve means a valve that stops the flow of lading.
    Sump means a protrusion from the bottom of a cargo tank shell 
designed to facilitate complete loading and unloading of lading.
    Tank means a container, consisting of a shell and heads, that forms 
a pressure tight vessel having openings designed to accept pressure 
tight fittings or closures, but excludes any appurtenances, 
reinforcements, fittings, or closures.
    Test pressure means the pressure to which a tank is subjected to 
determine pressure integrity.
    Toughness of material means the capability of a material to absorb 
the energy represented by the area under the stress strain curve 
(indicating the energy absorbed per unit volume of the material) up to 
the point of rupture.
    Vacuum cargo tank means a cargo tank that is loaded by reducing the 
pressure in the cargo tank to below atmospheric pressure.
    Variable specification cargo tank means a cargo tank that is 
constructed in accordance with one specification, but which may be 
altered to meet another specification by changing relief device, 
closures, lading discharge devices, and other lading retention devices.

[[Page 903]]

    Void means the space between tank heads or bulkheads and a 
connecting structure.
    Welded flange means a flange attached to the tank by a weld joining 
the tank shell to the cylindrical outer surface of the flange, or by a 
fillet weld joining the tank shell to a flange shaped to fit the shell 
contour.
    (d) A manufacturer of a cargo tank must hold a current ASME 
certificate of authorization and must be registered with the Department 
in accordance with part 107, subpart F of this chapter.
    (e) All construction must be certified by an Authorized Inspector or 
by a Registered Inspector as applicable to the cargo tank.
    (f) Each cargo tank must be designed and constructed in conformance 
with the requirements of the applicable cargo tank specification. Each 
DOT 412 cargo tank with a MAWP greater than 15 psig, and each DOT 407 
cargo tank with a MAWP greater than 35 psig must be ``constructed and 
certified in conformance with the ASME Code'' except as limited or 
modified by the applicable cargo tank specification. Other cargo tanks 
must be ``constructed in accordance with the ASME Code'', except as 
limited or modified by the applicable cargo tank specification.
    (g) Requirements relating to parts and accessories on motor 
vehicles, which are contained in part 393 of the Federal Motor Carrier 
Safety Regulations of this title, are incorporated into these 
specifications.
    (h) Any additional requirements prescribed in part 173 of this 
subchapter that pertain to the transportation of a specific lading are 
incorporated into these specifications.
    (i) Cargo tank motor vehicle composed of multiple cargo tanks.
    (1) A cargo tank motor vehicle composed of more than one cargo tank 
may be constructed with the cargo tanks made to the same specification 
or to different specifications. Each cargo tank must conform in all 
respects with the specification for which it is certified.
    (2) The strength of the connecting structure joining multiple cargo 
tanks in a cargo tank motor vehicle must meet the structural design 
requirements in Sec. 178.345-3. Any void within the connecting structure 
must be vented to the atmosphere and have a drain located on the bottom 
centerline. Each drain must be accessible and must be kept open at all 
times. The drain in any void within the connecting structure of a carbon 
steel, self-supporting cargo tank may be either a single drain of at 
least 1.0 inch diameter, or two or more drains of at least 0.5 inch 
diameter, 6.0 inches apart, one of which is located on the bottom 
centerline.
    (j) Variable specification cargo tank. A cargo tank that may be 
physically altered to conform to another cargo tank specification must 
have the required physical alterations to convert from one specification 
to another clearly indicated on the variable specification plate.
    (k) MAWP. The MAWP for each cargo tank must be greater than or equal 
to the largest of the following (the MAWP derived is the pressure to be 
used as prescribed in the ASME Code in the design of the tank):
    (1) The pressure prescribed for the lading in part 173;
    (2) Vapor pressure of the most volatile lading, at 115  deg.F 
(expressed in psig), plus the maximum static pressure exerted by the 
lading at the maximum lading density, plus any pressure exerted by a gas 
padding (including air in the ullage space or dome), if used; or
    (3) The maximum pressure in the tank during loading or unloading.

[Amdt. 178-89, 54 FR 25020, June 12, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 37058, 
Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. 178-105, 59 FR 55173, Nov. 3, 1994; Amdt. 178-118, 
61 FR 51340, Oct. 1, 1996; 66 FR 45387, 45389, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.345-2  Material and material thickness.

    (a) All material for shell, heads, bulkheads, and baffles must 
conform to section II, parts A and B, of the ASME Code except as 
follows:
    (1) The following steels are also authorized for cargo tanks 
``constructed in accordance with the ASME Code''.

ASTM A 569
ASTM A 570
ASTM A 572
ASTM A 607
ASTM A 622
ASTM A 656
ASTM A 715


[[Page 904]]


    (2) Aluminum alloys suitable for fusion welding and conforming with 
the 0, H32 or H34 tempers of one of the following ASTM specifications 
may be used for cargo tanks ``constructed in accordance with the ASME 
Code'':

ASTM B-209 Alloy 5052
ASTM B-209 Alloy 5086
ASTM B-209 Alloy 5154
ASTM B-209 Alloy 5254
ASTM B-209 Alloy 5454
ASTM B-209 Alloy 5652


All heads, bulkheads and baffles must be of 0 temper (annealed) or 
stronger tempers. All shell materials shall be of H 32 or H 34 tempers 
except that the lower ultimate strength tempers may be used if the 
minimum shell thicknesses in the tables are increased in inverse 
proportion to the lesser ultimate strength.
    (b) Minimum thickness. The minimum thickness for the shell and heads 
must be such that the maximum stress levels specified in Sec. 178.345-3 
of this subpart are not exceeded. In no case may the shell or head 
thickness be less than that specified in the applicable specification.
    (c) Corrosion or abrasion protection. When required by 49 CFR part 
173 for a particular lading, a cargo tank or a part thereof, subject to 
thinning by corrosion or mechanical abrasion due to the lading, must be 
protected by providing the tank or part of the tank with a suitable 
increase in thickness of material, a lining or some other suitable 
method of protection.
    (1) Corrosion allowance. Material added for corrosion allowance need 
not be of uniform thickness if different rates of attack can reasonably 
be expected for various areas of the cargo tank.
    (2) Lining. Lining material must consist of a nonporous, homogeneous 
material not less elastic than the parent metal and substantially immune 
to attack by the lading. The lining material must be bonded or attached 
by other appropriate means to the cargo tank wall and must be 
imperforate when applied. Any joint or seam in the lining must be made 
by fusing the materials together, or by other satisfactory means.

[Amdt. 178-89, 54 FR 25021, June 12, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 37059, 
Sept. 7, 1990; 56 FR 27876, June 17, 1991; Amdt. 178-97, 57 FR 45465, 
Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 178-118, 61 FR 51341, Oct. 1, 1996]



Sec. 178.345-3  Structural integrity.

    (a) General requirements and acceptance criteria. (1) The maximum 
calculated design stress at any point in the cargo tank wall may not 
exceed the maximum allowable stress value prescribed in section VIII of 
the ASME Code, or 25 percent of the tensile strength of the material 
used at design conditions.
    (2) The relevant physical properties of the materials used in each 
cargo tank may be established either by a certified test report from the 
material manufacturer or by testing in conformance with a recognized 
national standard. In either case, the ultimate tensile strength of the 
material used in the design may not exceed 120 percent of the minimum 
ultimate tensile strength specified in either the ASME Code or the ASTM 
standard to which the material is manufactured.
    (3) The maximum design stress at any point in the cargo tank must be 
calculated separately for the loading conditions described in paragraphs 
(b) and (c) of this section. Alternate test or analytical methods, or a 
combination thereof, may be used in place of the procedures described in 
paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section, if the methods are accurate and 
verifiable.
    (4) Corrosion allowance material may not be included to satisfy any 
of the design calculation requirements of this section.
    (b) ASME Code design and construction. The static design and 
construction of each cargo tank must be in accordance with Section VIII, 
Division 1 of the ASME Code. The cargo tank design must include 
calculation of stresses generated by the MAWP, the weight of the lading, 
the weight of structures supported by the cargo tank

[[Page 905]]

wall and the effect of temperature gradients resulting from lading and 
ambient temperature extremes. When dissimilar materials are used, their 
thermal coefficients must be used in the calculation of thermal 
stresses.
    (1) Stress concentrations in tension, bending and torsion which 
occur at pads, cradles, or other supports must be considered in 
accordance with Appendix G of Section VIII, Division 1 of the ASME Code.
    (2) Longitudinal compressive buckling stress for ASME certified 
vessels must be calculated using paragraph UG-23(b), Section VIII, 
Division 1 of the ASME Code. For cargo tanks not required to be 
certified in accordance with the ASME Code, compressive buckling stress 
may be calculated using alternative analysis methods which are accurate 
and verifiable. When alternative methods are used calculations must 
include both the static loads described in this paragraph and the 
dynamic loads described in paragraph (c) of this section.
    (c) Shell design. Shell stresses resulting from static or dynamic 
loadings, or combinations thereof, are not uniform throughout the cargo 
tank motor vehicle. The vertical, longitudinal, and lateral normal 
operating loadings can occur simultaneously and must be combined. The 
vertical, longitudinal and lateral extreme dynamic loadings occur 
separately and need not be combined.
    (1) Normal operating loadings. The following procedure addresses 
stress in the cargo tank shell resulting from normal operating loadings. 
The effective stress (the maximum principal stress at any point) must be 
determined by the following formula:

S = 0.5(Sy + Sx)  [0.25(Sy-
    Sx)\2\ + SS2]0.5


Where:

    (i) S = effective stress at any given point under the combination of 
static and normal operating loadings that can occur at the same time, in 
psi.
    (ii) Sy = circumferential stress generated by the MAWP 
and external pressure, when applicable, plus static head, in psi.
    (iii) Sx = The following net longitudinal stress 
generated by the following static and normal operating loading 
conditions, in psi:
    (A) The longitudinal stresses resulting from the MAWP and external 
pressure, when applicable, plus static head, in combination with the 
bending stress generated by the static weight of the fully loaded cargo 
tank motor vehicle, all structural elements, equipment and appurtenances 
supported by the cargo tank wall;
    (B) The tensile or compressive stress resulting from normal 
operating longitudinal acceleration or deceleration. In each case, the 
forces applied must be 0.35 times the vertical reaction at the 
suspension assembly, applied at the road surface, and as transmitted to 
the cargo tank wall through the suspension assembly of a trailer during 
deceleration; or the horizontal pivot of the truck tractor or converter 
dolly fifth wheel, or the drawbar hinge on the fixed dolly during 
acceleration; or anchoring and support members of a truck during 
acceleration and deceleration, as applicable. The vertical reaction must 
be calculated based on the static weight of the fully loaded cargo tank 
motor vehicle, all structural elements, equipment and appurtenances 
supported by the cargo tank wall. The following loadings must be 
included:
    (1) The axial load generated by a decelerative force;
    (2) The bending moment generated by a decelerative force;
    (3) The axial load generated by an accelerative force; and
    (4) The bending moment generated by an accelerative force; and
    (C) The tensile or compressive stress generated by the bending 
moment resulting from normal operating vertical accelerative force equal 
to 0.35 times the vertical reaction at the suspension assembly of a 
trailer; or the horizontal pivot of the upper coupler (fifth wheel) or 
turntable; or anchoring and support members of a truck, as applicable. 
The vertical reaction must be calculated based on the static weight of 
the fully loaded cargo tank motor vehicle, all structural elements, 
equipment and appurtenances supported by the cargo tank wall.
    (iv) SS = The following shear stresses generated by the 
following static and

[[Page 906]]

normal operating loading conditions, in psi:
    (A) The static shear stress resulting from the vertical reaction at 
the suspension assembly of a trailer, and the horizontal pivot of the 
upper coupler (fifth wheel) or turntable; or anchoring and support 
members of a truck, as applicable. The vertical reaction must be 
calculated based on the static weight of the fully loaded cargo tank 
motor vehicle, all structural elements, equipment and appurtenances 
supported by the cargo tank wall;
    (B) The vertical shear stress generated by a normal operating 
accelerative force equal to 0.35 times the vertical reaction at the 
suspension assembly of a trailer; or the horizontal pivot of the upper 
coupler (fifth wheel) or turntable; or anchoring and support members of 
a truck, as applicable. The vertical reaction must be calculated based 
on the static weight of the fully loaded cargo tank motor vehicle, all 
structural elements, equipment and appurtenances supported by the cargo 
tank wall;
    (C) The lateral shear stress generated by a normal operating lateral 
accelerative force equal to 0.2 times the vertical reaction at each 
suspension assembly of a trailer, applied at the road surface, and as 
transmitted to the cargo tank wall through the suspension assembly of a 
trailer, and the horizontal pivot of the upper coupler (fifth wheel) or 
turntable; or anchoring and support members of a truck, as applicable. 
The vertical reaction must be calculated based on the static weight of 
the fully loaded cargo tank motor vehicle, all structural elements, 
equipment and appurtenances supported by the cargo tank wall; and
    (D) The torsional shear stress generated by the same lateral forces 
as described in paragraph (c)(1)(iv)(C) of this section.
    (2) Extreme dynamic loadings. The following procedure addresses 
stress in the cargo tank shell resulting from extreme dynamic loadings. 
The effective stress (the maximum principal stress at any point) must be 
determined by the following formula:

S = 0.5(Sy + Sx)  [0.25(Sy 
    - Sx)\2\ + SS\2\]0.5


Where:

    (i) S = effective stress at any given point under a combination of 
static and extreme dynamic loadings that can occur at the same time, in 
psi.
    (ii) Sy = circumferential stress generated by MAWP and 
external pressure, when applicable, plus static head, in psi.
    (iii) Sx = the following net longitudinal stress 
generated by the following static and extreme dynamic loading 
conditions, in psi:
    (A) The longitudinal stresses resulting from the MAWP and external 
pressure, when applicable, plus static head, in combination with the 
bending stress generated by the static weight of the fully loaded cargo 
tank motor vehicle, all structural elements, equipment and appurtenances 
supported by the tank wall;
    (B) The tensile or compressive stress resulting from extreme 
longitudinal acceleration or deceleration. In each case the forces 
applied must be 0.7 times the vertical reaction at the suspension 
assembly, applied at the road surface, and as transmitted to the cargo 
tank wall through the suspension assembly of a trailer during 
deceleration; or the horizontal pivot of the truck tractor or converter 
dolly fifth wheel, or the drawbar hinge on the fixed dolly during 
acceleration; or the anchoring and support members of a truck during 
acceleration and deceleration, as applicable. The vertical reaction must 
be calculated based on the static weight of the fully loaded cargo tank 
motor vehicle, all structural elements, equipment and appurtenances 
supported by the cargo tank wall. The following loadings must be 
included:
    (1) The axial load generated by a decelerative force;
    (2) The bending moment generated by a decelerative force;
    (3) The axial load generated by an accelerative force; and
    (4) The bending moment generated by an accelerative force; and
    (C) The tensile or compressive stress generated by the bending 
moment resulting from an extreme vertical accelerative force equal to 
0.7 times the vertical reaction at the suspension assembly of a trailer, 
and the horizontal pivot of the upper coupler (fifth wheel)

[[Page 907]]

or turntable; or the anchoring and support members of a truck, as 
applicable. The vertical reaction must be calculated based on the static 
weight of the fully loaded cargo tank motor vehicle, all structural 
elements, equipment and appurtenances supported by the cargo tank wall.
    (iv) SS = The following shear stresses generated by 
static and extreme dynamic loading conditions, in psi:
    (A) The static shear stress resulting from the vertical reaction at 
the suspension assembly of a trailer, and the horizontal pivot of the 
upper coupler (fifth wheel) or turntable; or anchoring and support 
members of a truck, as applicable. The vertical reaction must be 
calculated based on the static weight of the fully loaded cargo tank 
motor vehicle, all structural elements, equipment and appurtenances 
supported by the cargo tank wall;
    (B) The vertical shear stress generated by an extreme vertical 
accelerative force equal to 0.7 times the vertical reaction at the 
suspension assembly of a trailer, and the horizontal pivot of the upper 
coupler (fifth wheel) or turntable; or anchoring and support members of 
a truck, as applicable. The vertical reaction must be calculated based 
on the static weight of the fully loaded cargo tank motor vehicle, all 
structural elements, equipment and appurtenances supported by the cargo 
tank wall;
    (C) The lateral shear stress generated by an extreme lateral 
accelerative force equal to 0.4 times the vertical reaction at the 
suspension assembly of a trailer, applied at the road surface, and as 
transmitted to the cargo tank wall through the suspension assembly of a 
trailer, and the horizontal pivot of the upper coupler (fifth wheel) or 
turntable; or anchoring and support members of a truck, as applicable. 
The vertical reaction must be calculated based on the static weight of 
the fully loaded cargo tank motor vehicle, all structural elements, 
equipment and appurtenances supported by the cargo tank wall; and
    (D) The torsional shear stress generated by the same lateral forces 
as described in paragraph (c)(2)(iv)(C) of this section.
    (d) In no case may the minimum thickness of the cargo tank shells 
and heads be less than that prescribed in Sec. 178.346-2, Sec. 178.347-
2, or Sec. 178.348-2, as applicable.
    (e) For a cargo tank mounted on a frame or built with integral 
structural supports, the calculation of effective stresses for the 
loading conditions in paragraph (c) of this section may include the 
structural contribution of the frame or the integral structural 
supports.
    (f) The design, construction, and installation of an appurtenance to 
the cargo tank must conform to the following requirements:
    (1) Structural members, the suspension subframe, accident protection 
and external rings must be used as sites for attachment of appurtenances 
and other accessories to the cargo tank, when practicable.
    (2) A lightweight attachment to the cargo tank wall, such as a 
conduit clip, brakeline clip, skirting structure, lamp mounting bracket, 
or placard holder, must be of a construction having lesser strength than 
the cargo tank wall materials and may not be more than 72 percent of the 
thickness of the material to which it is attached. The lightweight 
attachment may be secured directly to the cargo tank wall if the device 
is designed and installed in such a manner that, if damaged, it will not 
affect the lading retention integrity of the tank. A lightweight 
attachment must be secured to the cargo tank shell or head by continuous 
weld or in such a manner as to preclude formation of pockets, which may 
become sites for incipient corrosion.
    (3) Except as prescribed in paragraphs (f)(1) and (f)(2) of this 
section, the welding of any appurtenance to the cargo tank wall must be 
made by attachment of a mounting pad, so that there will be no adverse 
effect upon the lading retention integrity of the cargo tank if any 
force less than that prescribed in Sec. 178.345-8(b)(1) of this 
subchapter is applied from any direction. The thickness of the mounting 
pad may not be less than that of the shell or head to which it is 
attached, and not more than 1.5 times the shell or head thickness. 
However, a pad with a minimum thickness of 0.187 inch may be

[[Page 908]]

used when the shell or head thickness is over 0.187 inch. If weep holes 
or tell-tale holes are used, the pad must be drilled or punched at its 
lowest point before it is welded. Each pad must--
    (i) Extend at least 2 inches in each direction from any point of 
attachment of an appurtenance;
    (ii) Have rounded corners, or otherwise be shaped in a manner to 
minimize stress concentrations on the shell or head; and
    (iii) Be attached by a continuous weld around the pad except for a 
small gap at the lowest point for draining.

[Amdt. 178-89, 55 FR 37059, Sept. 7, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 178-89, 
56 FR 27876, June 17, 1991; Amdt. 178-104, 59 FR 49135, Sept. 26, 1994; 
Amdt. 178-105, 59 FR 55173, 55174 and 55175, Nov. 3, 1994; 60 FR 17402, 
Apr. 5, 1995; Amdt. 178-118, 61 FR 51341, Oct. 1, 1996; 65 FR 58631, 
Sept. 29, 2000]



Sec. 178.345-4  Joints.

    (a) All joints between the cargo tank shell, heads, baffles, baffle 
attaching rings, and bulkheads must be welded in conformance with the 
ASME Code welding procedures.
    (b) Where practical all welds must be easily accessible for 
inspection.

[Amdt. 178-89, 54 FR 25022, June 12, 1989, as amended by Amdt. 178-118, 
61 FR 51341, Oct. 1, 1996]



Sec. 178.345-5  Manhole assemblies.

    (a) Each cargo tank with capacity greater than 400 gallons must be 
accessible through a manhole at least 15 inches in diameter.
    (b) Each manhole, fill opening and washout assembly must be 
structurally capable of withstanding, without leakage or permanent 
deformation that would affect its structural integrity, a static 
internal fluid pressure of at least 36 psig, or cargo tank test 
pressure, whichever is greater. The manhole assembly manufacturer shall 
verify compliance with this requirement by hydrostatically testing at 
least one percent (or one manhole closure, whichever is greater) of all 
manhole closures of each type produced each 3 months, as follows:
    (1) The manhole, fill opening, or washout assembly must be tested 
with the venting devices blocked. Any leakage or deformation that would 
affect the product retention capability of the assembly shall constitute 
a failure.
    (2) If the manhole, fill opening, or washout assembly tested fails, 
then five more covers from the same lot must be tested. If one of these 
five covers fails, then all covers in the lot from which the tested 
covers were selected are to be 100% tested or rejected for service.
    (c) Each manhole, filler and washout cover must be fitted with a 
safety device that prevents the cover from opening fully when internal 
pressure is present.
    (d) Each manhole and fill cover must be secured with fastenings that 
will prevent opening of the covers as a result of vibration under normal 
transportation conditions or shock impact due to a rollover accident on 
the roadway or shoulder where the fill cover is not struck by a 
substantial obstacle.
    (e) Each manhole cover must be permanently marked by stamping or 
other means with:
    (1) Manufacturer's name;
    (2) Test pressure ---- psig;
    (3) A statement certifying that the manhole cover meets the 
requirements in Sec. 178.345-5.
    (f) All fittings and devices mounted on a manhole cover, coming in 
contact with the lading, must withstand the same static internal fluid 
pressure and contain the same permanent compliance markings as that 
required for the manhole cover. The fitting or device manufacturer shall 
verify compliance using the same test procedure and frequency of testing 
as specified in Sec. 178.345-5(b).

[Amdt. 178-89, 54 FR 25022, June 12, 1989, as amended by Amdt. 178-105, 
59 FR 55175, Nov. 3, 1994]



Sec. 178.345-6  Supports and anchoring.

    (a) A cargo tank with a frame not integral to the cargo tank must 
have the tank secured by restraining devices to eliminate any motion 
between the tank and frame that may abrade the tank shell due to the 
stopping, starting, or turning of the cargo tank motor vehicle. The 
design calculations of the support elements must include the stresses 
indicated in Sec. 178.345-3(b) and as generated by the loads described 
in Sec. 178.345-3(c). Such restraining devices

[[Page 909]]

must be readily accessible for inspection and maintenance, except that 
insulation and jacketing are permitted to cover the restraining devices.
    (b) A cargo tank designed and constructed so that it constitutes, in 
whole or in part, the structural member used in lieu of a frame must be 
supported in such a manner that the resulting stress levels in the cargo 
tank do not exceed those specified in Sec. 178.345-3(a). The design 
calculations of the support elements must include the stresses indicated 
in Sec. 178.345-3(b) and as generated by the loads described in 
Sec. 178.345-3(c).

[Amdt. 178-89, 54 FR 25023, June 12, 1989, as amended by Amdt. 178-105, 
59 FR 55175, Nov. 3, 1994; Amdt. 178-118, 61 FR 51341, Oct. 1, 1996]



Sec. 178.345-7  Circumferential reinforcements.

    (a) A cargo tank with a shell thickness of less than \3/8\ inch must 
be circumferentially reinforced with bulkheads, baffles, ring 
stiffeners, or any combination thereof, in addition to the cargo tank 
heads.
    (1) Circumferential reinforcement must be located so that the 
thickness and tensile strength of the shell material in combination with 
the frame and reinforcement produces structural integrity at least equal 
to that prescribed in Sec. 178.345-3 and in such a manner that the 
maximum unreinforced portion of the shell does not exceed 60 inches. For 
cargo tanks designed to be loaded by vacuum, spacing of circumferential 
reinforcement may exceed 60 inches provided the maximum unreinforced 
portion of the shell conforms with the requirements of Section VIII, 
Division 1 of the ASME Code.
    (2) Where circumferential joints are made between conical shell 
sections, or between conical and cylindrical shell sections, and the 
angle between adjacent sections is less than 160 degrees, 
circumferential reinforcement must be located within one inch of the 
shell joint, unless otherwise reinforced with structural members capable 
of maintaining shell stress levels authorized in Sec. 178.345-3. When 
the joint is formed by the large ends of adjacent conical shell 
sections, or by the large end of a conical shell and a cylindrical shell 
section, this angle is measured inside the shell; when the joint is 
formed by the small end of a conical shell section and a cylindrical 
shell section, it is measured outside the shell.
    (b) Except for doubler plates and knuckle pads, no reinforcement may 
cover any circumferential joint.
    (c) When a baffle or baffle attachment ring is used as a 
circumferential reinforcement member, it must produce structural 
integrity at least equal to that prescribed in Sec. 178.345-3 and must 
be circumferentially welded to the cargo tank shell. The welded portion 
may not be less than 50 percent of the total circumference of the cargo 
tank and the length of any unwelded space on the joint may not exceed 40 
times the shell thickness unless reinforced external to the cargo tank.
    (d) When a ring stiffener is used as a circumferential reinforcement 
member, whether internal or external, reinforcement must be continuous 
around the circumference of the cargo tank shell and must be in 
accordance with the following:
    (1) The section modulus about the neutral axis of the ring section 
parallel to the shell must be at least equal to that derived from the 
applicable formula:

I/C = 0.00027WL, for MS, HSLA and SS; or
I/C = 0.000467WL, for aluminum alloys;

Where:

I/C = Section modulus in inches 3
W = Tank width, or diameter, inches
L = Spacing of ring stiffener, inches; i.e., the maximum longitudinal 
distance from the midpoint of the unsupported shell on one side of the 
ring stiffener to the midpoint of the unsupported shell on the opposite 
side of the ring stiffener.

    (2) If a ring stiffener is welded to the cargo tank shell, a portion 
of the shell may be considered as part of the ring section for purposes 
of computing the ring section modulus. This portion of the shell may be 
used provided at least 50 percent of the total circumference of the 
cargo tank is welded and the length of any unwelded space on the joint 
does not exceed 40 times the shell thickness. The maximum portion of the 
shell to be used in these calculations is as follows:

[[Page 910]]



------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Number of circumferential ring
     stiffener-to-shell welds              J \1\          Shell section
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1................................  ....................  20t
2................................  Less than 20t.......  20t+J
2................................  20t or more.........  40t
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ where:
t=Shell thickness, inches;
J=Longitudinal distance between parallel circumferential ring stiffener-
  to-shell welds.

    (3) When used to meet the vacuum requirements of this section, ring 
stiffeners must be as prescribed in the ASME Code.
    (4) If configuration of internal or external ring stiffener encloses 
an air space, this air space must be arranged for venting and be 
equipped with drainage facilities which must be kept operative at all 
times.
    (5) Hat shaped or open channel ring stiffeners which prevent visual 
inspection of the cargo tank shell are prohibited on cargo tank motor 
vehicles constructed of carbon steel.

[Amdt. 178-89, 55 FR 37060, Sept. 7, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 178-89, 
56 FR 27876, June 17, 1991; 56 FR 46354, Sept. 11, 1991; Amdt. 178-104, 
59 FR 49135, Sept. 26, 1994; Amdt. 178-118, 61 FR 51341, Oct. 1, 1996]



Sec. 178.345-8  Accident damage protection.

    (a) General. Each cargo tank motor vehicle must be designed and 
constructed in accordance with the requirements of this section and the 
applicable individual specification to minimize the potential for the 
loss of lading due to an accident.
    (1) Any dome, sump, or washout cover plate projecting from the cargo 
tank wall that retains lading in any tank orientation, must be as strong 
and tough as the cargo tank wall and have a thickness at least equal to 
that specified by the appropriate cargo tank specification. Any such 
projection located in the lower \1/3\ of the tank circumference (or 
cross section perimeter for non-circular cargo tanks) that extends more 
than half its diameter at the point of attachment to the tank or more 
than 4 inches from the cargo tank wall, or located in the upper \2/3\ of 
the tank circumference (or cross section perimeter for non-circular 
cargo tanks) that extends more than \1/4\ its diameter or more than 2 
inches from the point of attachment to the tank must have accident 
damage protection devices that are:
    (i) As specified in this section;
    (ii) 125 percent as strong as the otherwise required accident damage 
protection device; or
    (iii) Attached to the cargo tank in accordance with the requirements 
of paragraph (a)(3) of this section.
    (2) Outlets, valves, closures, piping, or any devices that if 
damaged in an accident could result in a loss of lading from the cargo 
tank must be protected by accident damage protection devices as 
specified in this section.
    (3) Accident damage protection devices attached to the wall of a 
cargo tank must be able to withstand or deflect away from the cargo tank 
the loads specified in this section. They must be designed, constructed 
and installed so as to maximize the distribution of loads to the cargo 
tank wall and to minimize the possibility of adversely affecting the 
lading retention integrity of the cargo tank. Accident induced stresses 
resulting from the appropriate accident damage protection device 
requirements in combination with the stresses from the cargo tank 
operating at the MAWP may not result in a cargo tank wall stress greater 
than the ultimate strength of the material of construction using a 
safety factor of 1.3. Deformation of the protection device is acceptable 
provided the devices being protected are not damaged when loads 
specified in this section are applied.
    (4) Any piping that extends beyond an accident damage protection 
device must be equipped with a stop-valve and a sacrificial device such 
as a shear section. The sacrificial device must be located in the piping 
system outboard of the stop-valve and within the accident damage 
protection device to prevent any accidental loss of lading. The device 
must break at no more than 70 percent of the load that would be required 
to cause the failure of the protected lading retention device, part or 
cargo tank wall. The failure of the sacrificial device must leave the 
protected lading retention device and its attachment to the cargo tank 
wall intact and capable of retaining product.
    (5) Minimum road clearance. The minimum allowable road clearance of 
any

[[Page 911]]

cargo tank motor vehicle component or protection device located between 
any two adjacent axles on a vehicle or vehicle combination must be at 
least one-half inch for each foot separating such axles, and in no case 
less than 12 inches.
    (b) Each outlet, projection or piping located in the lower \1/3\ of 
the cargo tank circumference (or cross section perimeter for non-
circular cargo tanks) that could be damaged in an accident that may 
result in the loss of lading must be protected by a bottom damage 
protection device, except as provided by paragraph (a)(1) of this 
section and Sec. 173.33(e) of this subchapter. Outlets, projections and 
piping may be grouped or clustered together and protected by a single 
protection device.
    (1) Any bottom damage protection device must be able to withstand a 
force of 155,000 pounds (based on the ultimate strength of the material) 
from the front, side, or rear, uniformly distributed over each surface 
of the device, over an area not to exceed 6 square feet, and a width not 
to exceed 6 feet. Suspension components and structural mounting members 
may be used to provide all, or part, of this protection. The device must 
extend no less than 6 inches beyond any component that may contain 
lading in transit.
    (2) A lading discharge opening equipped with an internal self-
closing stop-valve need not conform to paragraph (b)(1) of this section 
provided it is protected so as to reasonably assure against the 
accidental loss of lading. This protection must be provided by a 
sacrificial device located outboard of each internal self-closing stop-
valve and within 4 inches of the major radius of the cargo tank shell or 
within 4 inches of a sump, but in no case more than 8 inches from the 
major radius of the tank shell. The device must break at no more than 70 
percent of the load that would be required to cause the failure of the 
protected lading retention device, part or cargo tank wall. The failure 
of the sacrificial device must leave the protected lading retention 
device or part and its attachment to the cargo tank wall intact and 
capable of retaining product.
    (c) Each closure for openings, including but not limited to the 
manhole, filling or inspection openings, and each valve, fitting, 
pressure relief device, vapor recovery stop valve or lading retaining 
fitting located in the upper \2/3\ of a cargo tank circumference (or 
cross section perimeter for non-circular tanks) must be protected by 
being located within or between adjacent rollover damage protection 
devices, or by being 125 percent of the strength that would be provided 
by the otherwise required damage protection device.
    (1) A rollover damage protection device on a cargo tank motor 
vehicle must be designed and installed to withstand loads equal to twice 
the weight of the loaded cargo tank motor vehicle applied as follows: 
normal to the cargo tank shell (perpendicular to the cargo tank 
surface); and tangential (perpendicular to the normal load) from any 
direction. The stresses shall not exceed the ultimate strength of the 
material of construction. These design loads may be considered to be 
uniformly distributed and independently applied. If more than one 
rollover protection device is used, each device must be capable of 
carrying its proportionate share of the required loads and in each case 
at least one-fourth the total tangential load. The design must be proven 
capable of carrying the required loads by calculations, tests or a 
combination of tests and calculations.
    (2) A rollover damage protection device that would otherwise allow 
the accumulation of liquid on the top of the cargo tank, must be 
provided with a drain that directs the liquid to a safe point of 
discharge away from any structural component of the cargo tank motor 
vehicle.
    (d) Rear-end protection. Each cargo tank motor vehicle must be 
provided with a rear-end protection device to protect the cargo tank and 
piping in the event of a rear-end collision and reduce the likelihood of 
damage which could result in the loss of lading. The rear-end tank 
protection device must conform to the following requirements (Nothing in 
this paragraph shall be construed to relieve a manufacturer of 
responsibility for complying with the requirements of Sec. 393.86 of 
this title):
    (1) The rear-end cargo tank protection device must be designed so 
that it

[[Page 912]]

can deflect at least 6 inches horizontally forward with no contact 
between any part of the cargo tank motor vehicle which contains lading 
during transit and with any part of the rear-end protection device, or 
with a vertical plane passing through the outboard surface of the 
protection device.
    (2) The dimensions of the rear-end cargo tank protection device 
shall conform to the following:
    (i) The bottom surface of the rear-end protection device must be at 
least 4 inches below the lower surface of any part at the rear of the 
cargo tank motor vehicle which contains lading during transit and not 
more than 60 inches from the ground when the vehicle is empty.
    (ii) The maximum width of a notch, indentation, or separation 
between sections of a rear-end cargo tank protection device may not 
exceed 24 inches. A notched, indented, or separated rear-end protection 
device may be used only when the piping at the rear of the cargo tank is 
equipped with a sacrificial device outboard of a shut-off valve.
    (iii) The widest part of the motor vehicle at the rear may not 
extend more than 18 inches beyond the outermost ends of the device or 
(if separated) devices on either side of the vehicle.
    (3) The structure of the rear-end protection device and its 
attachment to the vehicle must be designed to satisfy the conditions 
specified in paragraph (d)(1) of this section when subjected to an 
impact of the cargo tank motor vehicle at rated payload, at a 
deceleration of 2 ``g''. Such impact must be considered as being 
uniformly applied in the horizontal plane at an angle of 10 degrees or 
less to the longitudinal axis of the vehicle.
    (e) Longitudinal deceleration protection. In order to account for 
stresses due to longitudinal impact in an accident, the cargo tank shell 
and heads must be able to withstand the load resulting from the design 
pressure in combination with the dynamic pressure resulting from a 
longitudinal deceleration of 2 ``g''. For this loading condition, the 
allowable stress value used may not exceed the ultimate strength of the 
material of construction using a safety factor of 1.3. Performance 
testing, analytical methods, or a combination thereof, may be used to 
prove this capability provided the methods are accurate and verifiable. 
For cargo tanks with internal baffles, the decelerative force may be 
reduced by 0.25 ``g'' for each baffle assembly, but in no case may the 
total reduction in decelerative force exceed 1.0 ``g''.

[Amdt. 178-89, 54 FR 25023, June 12, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 37061, 
Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. 178-105, 59 FR 55175, Nov. 3, 1994; Amdt. 178-118, 
61 FR 51341, Oct. 1, 1996]



Sec. 178.345-9  Pumps, piping, hoses and connections.

    (a) Suitable means must be provided during loading or unloading 
operations to ensure that pressure within a cargo tank does not exceed 
test pressure.
    (b) Each hose, piping, stop-valve, lading retention fitting and 
closure must be designed for a bursting pressure of the greater of 100 
psig or four times the MAWP.
    (c) Each hose coupling must be designed for a bursting pressure of 
the greater of 120 psig or 4.8 times the MAWP of the cargo tank, and 
must be designed so that there will be no leakage when connected.
    (d) Suitable provision must be made to allow for and prevent damage 
due to expansion, contraction, jarring, and vibration. Slip joints may 
not be used for this purpose in the lading retention system.
    (e) Any heating device, when installed, must be so constructed that 
the breaking of its external connections will not cause leakage of the 
cargo tank lading.
    (f) Any gauging, loading or charging device, including associated 
valves, must be provided with an adequate means of secure closure to 
prevent leakage.
    (g) The attachment and construction of each loading/unloading or 
charging line must be of sufficient strength, or be protected by a 
sacrificial device, such that any load applied by loading/unloading or 
charging lines connected to the cargo tank cannot cause damage resulting 
in loss of lading from the cargo tank.
    (h) Use of a nonmetallic pipe, valve or connection that is not as 
strong and

[[Page 913]]

heat resistant as the cargo tank material is authorized only if such 
attachment is located outboard of the lading retention system.

[Amdt. 178-89, 54 FR 25025, June 12, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 37061, 
Sept. 7, 1990, Amdt. 178-89, 56 FR 27877, June 17, 1991; Amdt. 178-118, 
61 FR 51341, Oct. 1, 1996]



Sec. 178.345-10  Pressure relief.

    (a) Each cargo tank must be equipped to relieve pressure and vacuum 
conditions in conformance with this section and the applicable 
individual specification. The pressure and vacuum relief system must be 
designed to operate and have sufficient capacity to prevent cargo tank 
rupture or collapse due to over-pressurization or vacuum resulting from 
loading, unloading, or from heating and cooling of lading.
    (b) Type and construction of relief systems and devices. (1) Each 
cargo tank must be provided with a primary pressure relief system 
consisting of one or more reclosing pressure relief valves. A secondary 
pressure relief system consisting of another pressure relief valve in 
parallel with the primary pressure relief system may be used to augment 
the total venting capacity of the cargo tank. Non-reclosing pressure 
relief devices are not authorized in any cargo tank except when in 
series with a reclosing pressure relief device. Gravity actuated 
reclosing valves are not authorized on any cargo tank.
    (2) When provided by Sec. 173.33(c)(1)(iii) of this subchapter, 
cargo tanks may be equipped with a normal vent. Such vents must be set 
to open at not less than 1 psig and must be designed to prevent loss of 
lading through the device in case of vehicle overturn.
    (3) Each pressure relief system must be designed to withstand 
dynamic pressure surges in excess of the design set pressure as 
specified in paragraphs (b)(3) (i) and (ii) of this section. Set 
pressure is a function of MAWP as set forth in paragraph (d) of this 
section.
    (i) Each pressure relief device must be able to withstand dynamic 
pressure surge reaching 30 psig above the design set pressure and 
sustained above the set pressure for at least 60 milliseconds with a 
total volume of liquid released not exceeding one gallon before the 
relief device recloses to a leak-tight condition. This requirement must 
be met regardless of vehicle orientation. This capability must be 
demonstrated by testing. An acceptable test procedure is outlined in 
TTMA RP No. 81--``Performance of Spring Loaded Pressure Relief Valves on 
MC 306, MC 307, and MC 312 Tanks,'' May 24, 1989 edition.
    (ii) After August 31, 1995, each pressure relief device must be able 
to withstand a dynamic pressure surge reaching 30 psig above the design 
set pressure and sustained above the design set pressure for at least 60 
milliseconds with a total volume of liquid released not exceeding 1 L 
before the relief valve recloses to a leak-tight condition. This 
requirement must be met regardless of vehicle orientation. This 
capability must be demonstrated by testing. TTMA RP No. 81, cited in 
paragraph (b)(3)(i) of this section, is an acceptable test procedure.
    (4) Each reclosing pressure relief valve must be constructed and 
installed in such a manner as to prevent unauthorized adjustment of the 
relief valve setting.
    (5) No shut-off valve or other device that could prevent venting 
through the pressure relief system may be installed in a pressure relief 
system.
    (6) The pressure relief system must be mounted, shielded and 
drainable so as to minimize the accumulation of material that could 
impair the operation or discharge capability of the system by freezing, 
corrosion or blockage.
    (c) Location of relief devices. Each pressure relief device must 
communicate with the vapor space above the lading as near as practicable 
to the center of the vapor space. For example, on a cargo tank designed 
to operate in a level attitude, the device should be positioned at the 
horizontal and transverse center of the cargo tank; on cargo tanks 
sloped to the rear, the device should be located in the forward half of 
the cargo tank. The discharge from any device must be unrestricted. 
Protective devices which deflect the flow of vapor are permissible 
provided the required vent capacity is maintained.
    (d) Settings of pressure relief system. The set pressure of the 
pressure relief

[[Page 914]]

system is the pressure at which it starts to open, allowing discharge.
    (1) Primary pressure relief system. The set pressure of each primary 
relief valve must be no less than 120 percent of the MAWP, and no more 
than 132 percent of the MAWP. The valve must reclose at not less than 
108 percent of the MAWP and remain closed at lower pressures.
    (2) Secondary pressure relief system. The set pressure of each 
pressure relief valve used as a secondary relief device must be not less 
than 120 percent of the MAWP.
    (e) Venting capacity of pressure relief systems. The pressure relief 
system (primary and secondary, including piping) must have sufficient 
venting capacity to limit the cargo tank internal pressure to not more 
than the cargo tank test pressure. The total venting capacity, rated at 
not more than the cargo tank test pressure, must be at least that 
specified in table I, except as provided in Sec. 178.348-4.

                Table I--Minimum Emergency Vent Capacity
          [In cubic feet free air/hour at 60  deg.F and 1 atm.]
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                              Cubic feet
                Exposed area in square feet                    free air
                                                               per hour
------------------------------------------------------------------------
20.........................................................       15,800
30.........................................................       23,700
40.........................................................       31,600
50.........................................................       39,500
60.........................................................       47,400
70.........................................................       55,300
80.........................................................       63,300
90.........................................................       71,200
100........................................................       79,100
120........................................................       94,900
140........................................................      110,700
160........................................................      126,500
180........................................................      142,300
200........................................................      158,100
225........................................................      191,300
250........................................................      203,100
275........................................................      214,300
300........................................................      225,100
350........................................................      245,700
400........................................................      265,000
450........................................................      283,200
500........................................................      300,600
550........................................................      317,300
600........................................................      333,300
650........................................................      348,800
700........................................................      363,700
750........................................................      378,200
800........................................................      392,200
850........................................................      405,900
900........................................................      419,300
950........................................................      432,300
1,000......................................................      445,000
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note 1: Interpolate for intermediate sizes.

    (1) Primary pressure relief system. Unless otherwise specified in 
the applicable individual specification, the primary relief system must 
have a minimum venting capacity of 12,000 SCFH per 350 square feet of 
exposed cargo tank area, but in any case at least one fourth the 
required total venting capacity for the cargo tank.
    (2) Secondary pressure relief system. If the primary pressure relief 
system does not provide the required total venting capacity, additional 
capacity must be provided by a secondary pressure relief system.
    (f) Certification of pressure relief devices. The manufacturer of 
any pressure relief device, including valves, frangible (rupture) disks, 
vacuum vents and combination devices must certify that the device model 
was designed and tested in accordance with this section and the 
appropriate cargo tank specification. The certificate must contain 
sufficient information to describe the device and its performance. The 
certificate must be signed by a responsible official of the manufacturer 
who approved the flow capacity certification.
    (g) Rated flow capacity certification test. Each pressure relief 
device model must be successfully flow capacity certification tested 
prior to first use. Devices having one design, size and set pressure are 
considered to be one model. The testing requirements are as follows:
    (1) At least 3 devices of each specific model must be tested for 
flow capacity at a pressure not greater than the test pressure of the 
cargo tank. For a device model to be certified, the capacities of the 
devices tested must fall within a range of plus or minus 5 percent of 
the average for the devices tested.
    (2) The rated flow capacity of a device model may not be greater 
than 90 percent of the average value for the devices tested.
    (3) The rated flow capacity derived for each device model must be 
certified by a responsible official of the device manufacturer.
    (h) Marking of pressure relief devices. Each pressure relief device 
must be permanently marked with the following:
    (1) Manufacturer's name;

[[Page 915]]

    (2) Model number;
    (3) Set pressure, in psig; and
    (4) Rated flow capacity, in SCFH at the rating pressure, in psig.

[Amdt. 178-89, 54 FR 25025, June 12, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 21038, 
May 22, 1990; 55 FR 37062, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. 178-89, 56 FR 27877, 
June 17, 1991; Amdt. 178-105, 59 FR 55175, Nov. 3, 1994; Amdt. 178-118, 
61 FR 51341, Oct. 1, 1996; 65 FR 58631, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45389, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.345-11  Tank outlets.

    (a) General. As used in this section, ``loading/unloading outlet'' 
means any opening in the cargo tank wall used for loading or unloading 
of lading, as distinguished from outlets such as manhole covers, vents, 
vapor recovery devices, and similar closures. Cargo tank outlets, 
closures and associated piping must be protected in accordance with 
Sec. 178.345-8.
    (b) Each cargo tank loading/unloading outlet must be equipped with 
an internal self-closing stop-valve, or alternatively, with an external 
stop-valve located as close as practicable to the cargo tank wall. Each 
cargo tank loading/unloading outlet must be in accordance with the 
following provisions:
    (1) Each loading/unloading outlet must be fitted with a self-closing 
system capable of closing all such outlets in an emergency within 30 
seconds of actuation. During normal operations the outlets may be closed 
manually. The self-closing system must be designed according to the 
following:
    (i) Each self-closing system must include a remotely actuated means 
of closure located more than 10 feet from the loading/unloading outlet 
where vehicle length allows, or on the end of the cargo tank farthest 
away from the loading/unloading outlet. The actuating mechanism must be 
corrosion-resistant and effective in all types of environment and 
weather.
    (ii) If the actuating system is accidentally damaged or sheared off 
during transportation, each loading/unloading outlet must remain 
securely closed and capable of retaining lading.
    (iii) When required by part 173 of this subchapter for materials 
which are flammable, pyrophoric, oxidizing, or Division 6.1 (poisonous 
liquid) materials, the remote means of closure must be capable of 
thermal activation. The means by which the self-closing system is 
thermally activated must be located as close as practicable to the 
primary loading/unloading connection and must actuate the system at a 
temperature not over 250  deg.F. In addition, outlets on these cargo 
tanks must be capable of being remotely closed manually or mechanically.
    (2) Bottom loading outlets which discharge lading into the cargo 
tank through fixed internal piping above the maximum liquid level of the 
cargo tank need not be equipped with a self-closing system.
    (c) Any loading/unloading outlet extending beyond an internal self-
closing stop-valve, or beyond the innermost external stop-valve which is 
part of a self-closing system, must be fitted with another stop-valve or 
other leak-tight closure at the end of such connection.
    (d) Each cargo tank outlet that is not a loading/unloading outlet 
must be equipped with a stop-valve or other leak-tight closure located 
as close as practicable to the cargo tank outlet. Any connection 
extending beyond this closure must be fitted with another stop-valve or 
other leak-tight closure at the end of such connection.

[Amdt. 178-89, 56 FR 27877, June 17, 1991, as amended by Amdt. 178-97, 
57 FR 45465, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 178-118, 61 FR 51341, Oct. 1, 1996]



Sec. 178.345-12  Gauging devices.

    Each cargo tank, except a cargo tank intended to be filled by 
weight, must be equipped with a gauging device that indicates the 
maximum permitted liquid level to within 0.5 percent of the nominal 
capacity as measured by volume or liquid level. Gauge glasses are not 
permitted.

[Amdt. 178-89, 55 FR 37062, Sept. 7, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 178-118, 
61 FR 51342, Oct. 1, 1996]



Sec. 178.345-13  Pressure and leakage tests.

    (a) Each cargo tank must be pressure and leakage tested in 
accordance with this section.
    (b) Pressure test. Each cargo tank or cargo tank compartment must be 
tested hydrostatically or pneumatically. Each cargo tank of a multi-
cargo tank motor vehicle must be tested with the

[[Page 916]]

adjacent cargo tanks empty and at atmospheric pressure. Each closure, 
except pressure relief devices and loading/unloading venting devices 
rated at less than the prescribed test pressure, must be in place during 
the test. If the venting device is not removed during the test, such 
device must be rendered inoperative by a clamp, plug or other equally 
effective restraining device, which may not prevent the detection of 
leaks, or damage the device. Restraining devices must be removed 
immediately after the test is completed.
    (1) Hydrostatic method. Each cargo tank, including its domes, must 
be filled with water or other liquid having similar viscosity, the 
temperature of which may not exceed 100  deg.F. The cargo tank must then 
be pressurized as prescribed in the applicable specification. The 
pressure must be gauged at the top of the cargo tank. The prescribed 
test pressure must be maintained for at least 10 minutes during which 
time the cargo tank must be inspected for leakage, bulging, or other 
defect.
    (2) Pneumatic method. A pneumatic test may be used in place of the 
hydrostatic test. However, pneumatic pressure testing may involve higher 
risk than hydrostatic testing. Therefore, suitable safeguards must be 
provided to protect personnel and facilities should failure occur during 
the test. The cargo tank must be pressurized with air or an inert gas. 
Test pressure must be reached gradually by increasing the pressure to 
one half of test pressure. Thereafter, the pressure must be increased in 
steps of approximately one tenth of the test pressure until test 
pressure is reached. Test pressure must be held for at least 5 minutes. 
The pressure must then be reduced to the inspection pressure which must 
be maintained while the entire cargo tank surface is inspected for 
leakage and other sign of defects. The inspection method must consist of 
coating all joints and fittings with a solution of soap and water or 
other equally sensitive method.
    (c) Leakage test. The cargo tank with all its accessories in place 
and operable must be leak tested at not less than 80 percent of tank's 
MAWP with the pressure maintained for at least 5 minutes.
    (d) Any cargo tank that leaks, bulges or shows any other sign of 
defect must be rejected. Rejected cargo tanks must be suitably repaired 
and retested successfully prior to being returned to service. The retest 
after any repair must use the same method of test under which the cargo 
tank was originally rejected.

[Amdt. 178-89, 54 FR 25026, June 12, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 37063, 
Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. 178-105, 59 FR 55176, Nov. 3, 1994; Amdt. 178-118, 
61 FR 51342, Oct. 1, 1996; 65 FR 58631, Sept. 29, 2000]



Sec. 178.345-14  Marking.

    (a) General. The manufacturer shall certify that each cargo tank 
motor vehicle has been designed, constructed and tested in accordance 
with the applicable Specification DOT 406, DOT 407 or DOT 412 
(Secs. 178.345, 178.346, 178.347, 178.348) cargo tank requirements, and 
when applicable, with the ASME Code. The certification shall be 
accomplished by marking the cargo tank as prescribed in paragraphs (b) 
and (c) of this section, and by preparing the certificate prescribed in 
Sec. 178.345-15. Metal plates prescribed by paragraphs (b), (c), (d) and 
(e) of this section, must be permanently attached to the cargo tank or 
its integral supporting structure, by brazing, welding or other suitable 
means. These plates must be affixed on the left side of the vehicle near 
the front of the cargo tank (or the frontmost cargo tank of a multi-
cargo tank motor vehicle), in a place readily accessible for inspection. 
The plates must be permanently and plainly marked in English by 
stamping, embossing or other means in characters at least \3/16\ inch 
high. The information required by paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section 
may be combined on one specification plate.
    (b) Nameplate. Each cargo tank must have a corrosion resistant 
nameplate permanently attached to it. The following information, in 
addition to any applicable information required by the ASME Code, must 
be marked on the tank nameplate (parenthetical abbreviations may be 
used):
    (1) DOT Specification number DOT XXX (DOT XXX), where ``XXX'' is 
replaced with the applicable specification number.

[[Page 917]]

    (2) Original test date, month and year (Orig. Test Date).
    (3) Tank MAWP in psig.
    (4) Cargo tank test pressure (Test P), in psig.
    (5) Cargo tank design temperature range (Design temp. range),-- 
deg.F to --  deg.F.
    (6) Nominal capacity (Water cap.), in gallons.
    (7) Maximum design density of lading (Max. lading density), in 
pounds per gallon.
    (8) Material specification number--shell (Shell matl, yyy***), where 
``yyy'' is replaced by the alloy designation and ``***'' by the alloy 
type.
    (9) Material specification number--heads (Head matl, yyy***), where 
``yyy'' is replaced by the alloy designation and ``***'' by the alloy 
type.

    Note: When the shell and heads materials are the same thickness, 
they may be combined, (Shell&head matl, yyy***).

    (10) Weld material (Weld matl.).
    (11) Minimum thickness--shell (Min. shell-thick), in inches. When 
minimum shell thicknesses are not the same for different areas, show 
(top --, side --, bottom --, in inches).
    (12) Minimum thickness--heads (Min. heads thick.), in inches.
    (13) Manufactured thickness--shell (Mfd. shell thick.), top --, side 
--, bottom --, in inches. (Required when additional thickness is 
provided for corrosion allowance.)
    (14) Manufactured thickness--heads (Mfd. heads thick.), in inches. 
(Required when additional thickness is provided for corrosion 
allowance.)
    (15) Exposed surface area, in square feet.
    (c) Specification plate. Each cargo tank motor vehicle must have an 
additional corrosion resistant metal specification plate attached to it. 
The specification plate must contain the following information 
(parenthetical abbreviations may be used):
    (1) Cargo tank motor vehicle manufacturer (CTMV mfr.).
    (2) Cargo tank motor vehicle certification date (CTMV cert. date), 
if different from the cargo tank certification date.
    (3) Cargo tank manufacturer (CT mfr.).
    (4) Cargo tank date of manufacture (CT date of mfr.), month and 
year.
    (5) Maximum weight of lading (Max. payload), in pounds.
    (6) Maximum loading rate in gallons per minute (Max. load rate, GPM) 
at maximum loading pressure ---- psig.
    (7) Maximum unloading rate in gallons per minute (Max. unload rate, 
GPM), at maximum unloading pressure ---- psig.
    (8) Lining material (Lining), if applicable.
    (9) Heating system design pressure (Heating sys. press.), in psig, 
if applicable.
    (10) Heating system design temperature (Heating sys. temp.), in 
deg.F, if applicable.
    (d) Multi-cargo tank motor vehicle. For a multi-cargo tank motor 
vehicle having all its cargo tanks not separated by any void, the 
information required by paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section may be 
combined on one specification plate. When separated by a void, each 
cargo tank must have an individual nameplate as required in paragraph 
(b) of this section, unless all cargo tanks are made by the same 
manufacturer with the same materials, manufactured thickness, minimum 
thickness and to the same specification. The cargo tank motor vehicle 
may have a combined nameplate and specification plate. When only one 
plate is used, the plate must be visible and not covered by insulation. 
The required information must be listed on the plate from front to rear 
in the order of the corresponding cargo tank location.
    (e) Variable specification cargo tank. Each variable specification 
cargo tank must have a corrosion resistant metal variable specification 
plate attached to it. The mounting of this variable specification plate 
must be such that only the plate identifying the applicable 
specification under which the tank is being operated is legible.
    (1) The following information must be included (parenthetical 
abbreviations are authorized):

    Specification DOT XXX (DOT XXX), where ``XXX'' is replaced with the 
applicable specification number.

[[Page 918]]



 
            Equipment required                  Required rating \1\
 
Pressure relief devices:
    Pressure actuated type...............  ------------
    Frangible type.......................  ------------
    Lading discharge devices.............  ------------
    Top..................................  ------------
    Bottom...............................  ------------
    Pressure unloading fitting...........  ------------
Closures:
    Manhole..............................  ------------
    Fill openings........................  ------------
    Discharge openings...................  ------------
 
\1\ Required rating--to meet the applicable specification.

    (2) If no change of information in the specification plate is 
required, the letters ``NC'' must follow the rating required. If the 
cargo tank is not so equipped, the word ``None'' must be inserted.
    (3) Those parts to be changed or added must be stamped with the 
appropriate MC or DOT Specification markings.
    (4) The alterations that must be made in order for the tank to be 
modified from one specification to another must be clearly indicated on 
the manufacturer's certificate and on the variable specification plate.

[Amdt. 178-89, 54 FR 25027, June 12, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 37063, 
Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. 178-99, 58 FR 51534, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 178-104, 
59 FR 49135, Sept. 26, 1994; Amdt. 178-105, 59 FR 55176, Nov. 3, 1994; 
60 FR 17402, Apr. 5, 1995; Amdt. 178-118, 61 FR 51342, Oct. 1, 1996; 66 
FR 45389, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.345-15  Certification.

    (a) At or before the time of delivery, the manufacturer of a cargo 
tank motor vehicle must provide certification documents to the owner of 
the cargo tank motor vehicle. The registration numbers of the 
manufacturer, the Design Certifying Engineer, and the Registered 
Inspector, as appropriate, must appear on the certificates (see subpart 
F, part 107 in subchapter A of this chapter).
    (b) The manufacturer of a cargo tank motor vehicle made to any of 
these specifications must provide:
    (1) For each design type, a certificate signed by a responsible 
official of the manufacturer and a Design Certifying Engineer certifying 
that the cargo tank motor vehicle design meets the applicable 
specification; and
    (2) For each ASME cargo tank, a cargo tank manufacturer's data 
report as required by the ASME Code. For each cargo tank motor vehicle, 
a certificate signed by a responsible official of the manufacturer and a 
Registered Inspector certifying that the cargo tank motor vehicle is 
constructed, tested and completed in conformance with the applicable 
specification.
    (c) The manufacturer of a variable specification cargo tank motor 
vehicle must provide:
    (1) For each design type, a certificate signed by a responsible 
official of the manufacturer and a Design Certifying Engineer certifying 
that the cargo tank motor vehicle design meets the applicable 
specifications; and
    (2) For each variable specification cargo tank motor vehicle, a 
certificate signed by a responsible official of the manufacturer and a 
Registered Inspector certifying that the cargo tank motor vehicle is 
constructed, tested and completed in conformance with the applicable 
specifications. The certificate must include all the information 
required and marked on the variable specification plate.
    (d) In the case of a cargo tank motor vehicle manufactured in two or 
more stages, each manufacturer who performs a manufacturing operation on 
the incomplete vehicle or portion thereof shall provide to the 
succeeding manufacturer, at or before the time of delivery, a 
certificate covering the particular operation performed by that 
manufacturer, including any certificates received from previous 
manufacturers, Registered Inspectors, and Design Certifying Engineers. 
Each certificate must indicate the portion of the complete cargo tank 
motor vehicle represented thereby, such as basic cargo tank fabrication, 
insulation, jacket, lining, or piping. The final manufacturer shall 
provide all applicable certificates to the owner.
    (e) Specification shortages. If a cargo tank is manufactured which 
does not meet all applicable specification requirements, thereby 
requiring subsequent manufacturing involving the installation of 
additional components, parts, appurtenances or accessories, the cargo 
tank manufacturer may affix the name plate and specification plate,

[[Page 919]]

as required by Sec. 178.345-14 (b) and (c), without the original date of 
certification stamped on the specification plate. The manufacturer shall 
state the specification requirements not complied with on the 
manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance. When the cargo tank is brought 
into full compliance with the applicable specification, the Registered 
Inspector shall stamp the date of compliance on the specification plate. 
The Registered Inspector shall issue a Certificate of Compliance stating 
details of the particular operations performed on the cargo tank, and 
the date and person (manufacturer, carrier, or repair organization) 
accomplishing the compliance.

[Amdt. 178-89, 55 FR 37063, Sept. 7, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 178-98, 
58 FR 33306, June 16, 1993; Amdt. 178-105, 59 FR 55176, Nov. 3, 1994; 
Amdt. 178-118, 61 FR 51342, Oct. 1, 1996]



Sec. 178.346  Specification DOT 406; cargo tank motor vehicle.



Sec. 178.346-1  General requirements.

    (a) Each Specification DOT 406 cargo tank motor vehicle must meet 
the general design and construction requirements in Sec. 178.345, in 
addition to the specific requirements contained in this section.
    (b) MAWP: The MAWP of each cargo tank must be no lower than 2.65 
psig and no higher than 4 psig.
    (c) Vacuum loaded cargo tanks must not be constructed to this 
specification.
    (d) Each cargo tank must be ``constructed in accordance with the 
ASME Code'' except as modified herein:
    (1) The record-keeping requirements contained in the ASME Code 
Section VIII, Division I do not apply. Parts UG-90 thru 94 of Section 
VIII, Division I do not apply. Inspection and certification must be made 
by an inspector registered in accordance with subpart F of part 107.
    (2) Loadings must be as prescribed in Sec. 178.345-3.
    (3) The knuckle radius of flanged heads must be at least three times 
the material thickness, and in no case less than 0.5 inch. Stuffed 
(inserted) heads may be attached to the shell by a fillet weld. The 
knuckle radius and dish radius versus diameter limitations of UG-32 do 
not apply. Shell sections of cargo tanks designed with a non-circular 
cross section need not be given a preliminary curvature, as prescribed 
in UG-79(b).
    (4) Marking, certification, data reports, and nameplates must be as 
prescribed in Secs. 178.345-14 and 178.345-15.
    (5) Manhole closure assemblies must conform to Secs. 178.345-5 and 
178.346-5.
    (6) Pressure relief devices must be as prescribed in Sec. 178.345-
10.
    (7) The hydrostatic or pneumatic test must be as prescribed in 
Sec. 178.345-13.
    (8) The following paragraphs in parts UG and UW of the ASME Code, 
Section VIII, Division I do not apply: UG-11, UG-12, UG-22(g), UG-32(e), 
UG-34, UG-35, UG-44, UG-76, UG-77, UG-80, UG-81, UG-96, UG-97, UW-
13(b)(2), UW-13.1(f) and the dimensional requirements found in Figure 
UW-13.1.
    (9) Single full fillet lap joints without plug welds may be used for 
arc or gas welded longitudinal seams without radiographic examination 
under the following conditions:
    (i) For a truck-mounted cargo tank, no more than two such joints may 
be used on the top half of the tank and no more than two joints may be 
used on the bottom half. They may not be located farther from the top 
and bottom centerline than 16 percent of the shell's circumference.
    (ii) For a self-supporting cargo tank, no more than two such joints 
may be used on the top of the tank. They may not be located farther from 
the top centerline than 12.5 percent of the shell's circumference.
    (iii) Compliance test. Two test specimens of the material to be used 
in the manufacture of a cargo tank must be tested to failure in tension. 
The test specimens must be of the same thicknesses and joint 
configuration as the cargo tank, and joined by the same welding 
procedures. The test specimens may represent all the tanks that are made 
of the same materials and welding procedures, have the same joint 
configuration, and are made in the same facility within 6 months after 
the tests are completed. Before welding, the fit-up of the joints on the 
test specimens must represent production conditions that would result in 
the least joint strength. Evidence of joint

[[Page 920]]

fit-up and test results must be retained at the manufacturers' facility.
    (iv) Weld joint efficiency. The lower value of stress at failure 
attained in the two tensile test specimens shall be used to compute the 
efficiency of the joint as follows: Determine the failure ratio by 
dividing the stress at failure by the mechanical properties of the 
adjacent metal; this value, when multiplied by 0.75, is the design weld 
joint efficiency.
    (10) The requirements of paragraph UW-9(d), of Section VIII, 
Division 1, ASME Code do not apply.

[Amdt. 178-89, 54 FR 25028, June 12, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 37063, 
Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. 178-89, 56 FR 27877, June 17, 1991; Amdt. 178-105, 
59 FR 55176, Nov. 3, 1994; 65 FR 58631, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45387, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.346-2  Material and thickness of material.

    The type and thickness of material for DOT 406 cargo tank motor 
vehicles must conform to Sec. 178.345-2 of this part, but may in no case 
be less than that indicated in tables I and II below.

 Table I--Minimum Thickness of Heads (or Bulkheads and Baffles When Used as Tank Reinforcement) Using Mild Steel
   (MS), High Strength Low Alloy Steel (HSLA), Austenitic Stainless Steel (SS) or Aluminum (AL)--Expressed in
                                        Decimals of an Inch After Forming
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                  Volume capacity in gallons per inch of length
                                --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
            Material                     14 or less               Over 14 to 23                 Over 23
                                --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                    MS    HSLA SS     AL       MS    HSLA SS     AL       MS    HSLA SS     AL
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Thickness......................     .100     .100     .160     .115     .115     .173     .129     .129     .187
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


    Table II--Minimum Thickness of Shell Using Mild Steel (MS), High
   Strength Low Alloy Steel (HSLA), Austenitic Stainless Steel (SS) or
    Aluminum (AL)--Expressed in Decimals of an Inch After Forming \1\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 Cargo tank motor vehicle rated capacity
                (gallons)                     MS      SS/HSLA      AL
------------------------------------------------------------------------
More than 0 to at least 4,500............     0.100      0.100     0.151
More than 4,500 to at least 8,000........     0.115      0.100     0.160
More than 8,000 to at least 14,000.......     0.129      0.129     0.173
More than 14,000.........................     0.143      0.143     0.187
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Maximum distance between bulkheads, baffles, or ring stiffeners
  shall not exceed 60 inches.


[Amdt. 178-89, 54 FR 25028, June 12, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 37064, 
Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. 178-105, 59 FR 55176, Nov. 3, 1994]



Sec. 178.346-3  Pressure relief.

    (a) Each cargo tank must be equipped with a pressure relief system 
in accordance with Sec. 178.345-10 and this section.
    (b) Type and construction. In addition to the pressure relief 
devices required in Sec. 178.345-10:
    (1) Each cargo tank must be equipped with one or more vacuum relief 
devices;
    (2) When intended for use only for lading meeting the requirements 
of Sec. 173.33(c)(1)(iii) of this subchapter, the cargo tank may be 
equipped with a normal vent. Such vents must be set to open at not less 
than 1 psig and must be designed to prevent loss of lading through the 
device in case of vehicle upset; and
    (3) Notwithstanding the requirements in Sec. 178.345-10(b), after 
August 31, 1996, each pressure relief valve must be able to withstand a 
dynamic pressure surge reaching 30 psig above the design set pressure 
and sustained above the set pressure for at least 60 milliseconds with a 
total volume of liquid released not exceeding 1 L before the relief 
valve recloses to a leak-tight condition. This requirement must be met 
regardless of vehicle orientation. This capability must be demonstrated 
by testing. TTMA RP No. 81, cited at Sec. 178.345-10(b)(3)(i), is an 
acceptable test procedure.
    (c) Pressure settings of relief valves. (1) Notwithstanding the 
requirements in Sec. 178.345-10(d), the set pressure of each primary 
relief valve must be not less than 110 percent of the MAWP or 3.3 psig, 
whichever is greater, and not more than 138 percent of the MAWP. The 
valve must close at not less than

[[Page 921]]

the MAWP and remain closed at lower pressures.
    (2) Each vacuum relief device must be set to open at no more than 6 
ounces vacuum.
    (d) Venting capacities. (1) Notwithstanding the requirements in 
Sec. 178.345-10 (e) and (g), the primary pressure relief valve must have 
a venting capacity of at least 6,000 SCFH, rated at not greater than 125 
percent of the tank test pressure and not greater than 3 psig above the 
MAWP. The venting capacity required in Sec. 178.345-10(e) may be rated 
at these same pressures.
    (2) Each vacuum relief system must have sufficient capacity to limit 
the vacuum to 1 psig.
    (3) If pressure loading or unloading devices are provided, the 
relief system must have adequate vapor and liquid capacity to limit the 
tank pressure to the cargo tank test pressure at maximum loading or 
unloading rate. The maximum loading and unloading rates must be included 
on the metal specification plate.

[Amdt. 178-89, 54 FR 25029, June 12, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 37064, 
Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. 178-105, 59 FR 55176, Nov. 3, 1994. Redesignated by 
Amdt. 178-112, 61 FR 18934, Apr. 29, 1996; 66 FR 45389, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.346-4  Outlets.

    (a) All outlets on each tank must conform to Sec. 178.345-11 and 
this section.
    (b) External self-closing stop-valves are not authorized as an 
alternative to internal self-closing stop-valves on loading/unloading 
outlets.

[Amdt. 178-89, 54 FR 25029, June 12, 1989. Redesignated by Amdt. 178-
112, 61 FR 18934, Apr. 29, 1996]



Sec. 178.346-5  Pressure and leakage tests.

    (a) Each cargo tank must be tested in accordance with Sec. 178.345-
13 and this section.
    (b) Pressure test. Test pressure must be as follows:
    (1) Using the hydrostatic test method, the test pressure must be the 
greater of 5.0 psig or 1.5 times the cargo tank MAWP.
    (2) Using the pneumatic test method, the test pressure must be the 
greater of 5.0 psig or 1.5 times the cargo tank MAWP, and the inspection 
pressure must be the cargo tank MAWP.
    (c) Leakage test. Cargo tanks equipped with vapor collection 
equipment may be leakage tested in accordance with the Environmental 
Protection Agency's ``Method 27--Determination of Vapor Tightness of 
Gasoline Delivery Tank Using Pressure-Vacuum Test,'' as set forth in 40 
CFR part 60, appendix A. Acceptance criteria are found at 40 CFR 60.501 
and 60.601.

[Amdt. 178-89, 54 FR 25029, June 12, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 37064, 
Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. 178-105, 59 FR 55176, Nov. 3, 1994. Redesignated by 
Amdt. 178-112, 61 FR 18934, Apr. 29, 1996]



Sec. 178.347  Specification DOT 407; cargo tank motor vehicle.



Sec. 178.347-1  General requirements.

    (a) Each specification DOT 407 cargo tank motor vehicle must conform 
to the general design and construction requirements in Sec. 178.345 in 
addition to the specific requirements contained in this section.
    (b) Each tank must be of a circular cross-section and have an MAWP 
of at least 25 psig.
    (c) Any cargo tank built to this specification with a MAWP greater 
than 35 psig and each tank designed to be loaded by vacuum must be 
``constructed and certified in accordance with the ASME Code''. The 
external design pressure for a cargo tank loaded by vacuum must be at 
least 15 psig.
    (d) Each cargo tank built to this specification with MAWP of 35 psig 
or less must be ``constructed in accordance with the ASME Code'' except 
as modified herein:
    (1) The record-keeping requirements contained in the ASME Code, 
Section VIII, Division I, do not apply. The inspection requirements of 
parts UG-90 thru 94 do not apply. Inspection and certification must be 
made by an inspector registered in accordance with subpart F of part 
107.
    (2) Loadings must be as prescribed in Sec. 178.345-3.
    (3) The knuckle radius of flanged heads must be at least three times 
the material thickness, and in no case less than 0.5 inch. Stuffed 
(inserted) heads may be attached to the shell by a fillet weld. The 
knuckle radius and dish radius versus diameter limitations of

[[Page 922]]

UG-32 do not apply for cargo tank motor vehicles with a MAWP of 35 psig 
or less.
    (4) Marking, certification, data reports and nameplates must be as 
prescribed in Secs. 178.345-14 and 178.345-15.
    (5) Manhole closure assemblies must conform to Secs. 178.345-5 and 
178.347-5.
    (6) Pressure relief devices must be as prescribed in Sec. 178.345-
10.
    (7) The hydrostatic or pneumatic test must be as prescribed in 
Sec. 178.345-13.
    (8) The following paragraphs in parts UG and UW of the ASME Code, 
Section VIII, Division I do not apply: UG-11, UG-12, UG-22(g), UG-32(e), 
UG-34, UG-35, UG-44, UG-76, UG-77, UG-80, UG-81, UG-96, UG-97, UW-
13(b)(2), UW-13.1(f), and the dimensional requirements found in Figure 
UW-13.1.

[Amdt. 178-89, 54 FR 25029, June 12, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 37064, 
Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. 178-89, 56 FR 27877, June 17, 1991; 65 FR 58632, 
Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.347-2  Material and thickness of material.

    (a) The type and thickness of material for DOT 407 specification 
cargo tanks must conform to Sec. 178.345-2 and this section. In no case 
may the thickness be less than that indicated in tables I and II below.

 Table I--Minimum Thickness of Heads (or Bulkheads and Baffles When Used as Tank Reinforcement) Using Mild Steel
   (MS), High Strength Low Alloy Steel (HSLA), Austenitic Stainless Steel (SS) or Aluminum (AL)--Expressed in
                                        Decimals of an Inch After Forming
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                              10 or    Over 10   Over 14   Over 18   Over 22   Over 26
    Volume capacity in gallons per inch       less      to 14     to 18     to 22     to 26     to 30    Over 30
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Thickness (MS)............................     0.100     0.100     0.115     0.129     0.129     0.143     0.156
Thickness (HSLA)..........................     0.100     0.100     0.115     0.129     0.129     0.143     0.156
Thickness (SS)............................     0.100     0.100     0.115     0.129     0.129     0.143     0.156
Thickness (AL)............................     0.160     0.160     0.173     0.187     0.194     0.216     0.237
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


  Table II--Minimum Thickness of Shell Using Mild Steel (MS), High Strength Low Alloy Steel (HSLA), Austenitic
              Stainless Steel (SS) or Aluminum (AL)--Expressed in Decimals of an Inch After Forming
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                              10 or    Over 10   Over 14   Over 18   Over 22   Over 26
    Volume capacity in gallons per inch       less      to 14     to 18     to 22     to 26     to 30    Over 30
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Thickness (MS)............................     0.100     0.100     0.115     0.129     0.129     0.143     0.156
Thickness (HSLA)..........................     0.100     0.100     0.115     0.129     0.129     0.143     0.156
Thickness (SS)............................     0.100     0.100     0.115     0.129     0.129     0.143     0.156
Thickness (AL)............................     0.151     0.151     0.160     0.173     0.194     0.216     0.237
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

(b) [Reserved]
[Amdt. 178-89, 54 FR 25030, June 12, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 37064, 
Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. 178-104, 59 FR 49135, Sept. 26, 1994]



Sec. 178.347-3  Manhole assemblies.

    Each manhole assembly must conform to Sec. 178.345-5, except that 
each manhole assembly must be capable of withstanding internal fluid 
pressures of 40 psig or test pressure of the tank, whichever is greater.

[Amdt. 178-89, 54 FR 25030, June 12, 1989. Redesignated by Amdt. 178-
112, 61 FR 18934, Apr. 29, 1996]



Sec. 178.347-4  Pressure relief.

    (a) Each cargo tank must be equipped with a pressure and vacuum 
relief system in accordance with Sec. 178.345-10 and this section.
    (b) Type and Construction. Vacuum relief devices are not required 
for cargo tanks designed to be loaded by vacuum or built to withstand 
full vacuum.
    (c) Pressure settings of relief valves. The setting of pressure 
relief valves must be in accordance with Sec. 178.345-10(d).
    (d) Venting capacities. (1) The vacuum relief system must limit the 
vacuum to less than 80 percent of the design vacuum capability of the 
cargo tank.

[[Page 923]]

    (2) If pressure loading or unloading devices are provided, the 
relief system must have adequate vapor and liquid capacity to limit the 
tank pressure to the cargo tank test pressure at maximum loading or 
unloading rate. The maximum loading or unloading rate must be included 
on the metal specification plate.

[Amdt. 178-89, 54 FR 25030, June 12, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 37064, 
Sept. 7, 1990. Redesignated by Amdt. 178-112, 61 FR 18934, Apr. 29, 
1996]



Sec. 178.347-5  Pressure and leakage test.

    (a) Each cargo tank must be tested in accordance with Sec. 178.345-
13 and this section.
    (b) Pressure test. Test pressure must be as follows:
    (1) Using the hydrostatic test method, the test pressure must be at 
least 40 psig or 1.5 times tank MAWP, whichever is greater.
    (2) Using the pneumatic test method, the test pressure must be 40 
psig or 1.5 times tank MAWP, whichever is greater, and the inspection 
pressure is tank MAWP.

[Amdt. 178-89, 54 FR 25030, June 12, 1989. Redesignated by Amdt. 178-
112, 61 FR 18934, Apr. 29, 1996]



Sec. 178.348  Specification DOT 412; cargo tank motor vehicle.



Sec. 178.348-1  General requirements.

    (a) Each specification DOT 412 cargo tank motor vehicle must conform 
to the general design and construction requirements in Sec. 178.345 in 
addition to the specific requirements of this section.
    (b) The MAWP of each cargo tank must be at least 5 psig.
    (c) The MAWP for each cargo tank designed to be loaded by vacuum 
must be at least 25 psig internal and 15 psig external.
    (d) Each cargo tank having a MAWP greater than 15 psig must be of 
circular cross-section.
    (e) Each cargo tank having a--
    (1) MAWP greater than 15 psig must be ``constructed and certified in 
conformance with the ASME Code''; or
    (2) MAWP of 15 psig or less must be ``constructed in accordance with 
the ASME Code,'' except as modified herein:
    (i) The recordkeeping requirements contained in the ASME Code, 
Section VIII, Division I, do not apply. Parts UG-90 thru 94 of Section 
VIII, Division I do not apply. Inspection and certification must be made 
by an inspector registered in accordance with subpart F of part 107.
    (ii) Loadings must be as prescribed in Sec. 178.345-3.
    (iii) The knuckle radius of flanged heads must be at least three 
times the material thickness, and in no case less than 0.5 inch. Stuffed 
(inserted) heads may be attached to the shell by a fillet weld. The 
knuckle radius and dish radius versus diameter limitations of UG-32 do 
not apply for cargo tank motor vehicles with a MAWP of 15 psig or less. 
Shell sections of cargo tanks designed with a non-circular cross section 
need not be given a preliminary curvature, as prescribed in UG-79(b).
    (iv) Marking, certification, data reports, and nameplates must be as 
prescribed in Secs. 178.345-14 and 178.345-15.
    (v) Manhole closure assemblies must conform to Secs. 178.345-5 and 
178.348-5.
    (vi) Pressure relief devices must be as prescribed in Sec. 178.345-
10.
    (vii) The hydrostatic or pneumatic test must be as prescribed in 
Sec. 178.345-13.
    (viii) The following paragraphs in parts UG and UW of the ASME Code, 
Section VIII, Division I do not apply: UG-11, UG-12, UG-22(g), UG-32(e), 
UG-34, UG-35, UG-44, UG-76, UG-77, UG-80, UG-81, UG-96, UG-97, UW-
13(b)(2), UW-13.1(f), and the dimensional requirements found in Figure 
UW-13.1.

[Amdt. 178-89, 54 FR 25031, June 12, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 37065, 
Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. 178-89, 56 FR 27877, June 17, 1991; 65 FR 58632, 
Sept. 29, 2000]



Sec. 178.348-2  Material and thickness of material.

    (a) The type and thickness of material for DOT 412 cargo tanks must 
conform to Sec. 178.345-2 of this part, but in no case may the thickness 
be less than that indicated in tables I and II below.

[[Page 924]]



   Table I--Minimum Thickness of Heads (or Bulkheads and Baffles When Used as Tank Reinforcement) Using Mild Steel (MS), High Strength Low Alloy Steel
                        (HSLA), Austenitic Stainless Steel (SS) or Aluminum (AL)--Expressed in Decimals of an Inch After Forming
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
   Volume capacity (gallons per inch)               10 or less                     Over 10 to 14               Over 14 to 18            18 and over
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Lading density at 60  deg.F in pounds     10 lbs    Over    Over    Over  10 lbs    Over    Over    Over  10 lbs    Over    Over  10 lbs    Over    Over
 per gallon.............................     and   10 to   13 to  16 lbs     and   10 to   13 to  16 lbs     and   10 to   13 to     and   10 to   13 to
                                            less  13 lbs  16 lbs            less  13 lbs  16 lbs            less  13 lbs  16 lbs    less  13 lbs  16 lbs
Thickness (inch), steel.................    .100    .129    .157    .187    .129    .157    .187    .250    .157    .250    .250    .157    .250    .312
Thickness (inch), aluminum..............    .144    .187    .227    .270    .187    .227    .270    .360    .227    .360    .360    .227    .360    .450
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


 Table II--Minimum Thickness of Shell Using Mild Steel (MS), High Strength Low Alloy Steel (HSLA) or Austenitic Stainless Steel (SS) or Aluminum (AL)--
                                                     Expressed in Decimals of an Inch After Forming
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
   Volume capacity in gallons per inch              10 or less                     Over 10 to 14               Over 14 to 18            18 and over
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Lading density at 60  deg.F in pounds     10 lbs    Over    Over    Over  10 lbs    Over    Over    Over  10 lbs    Over    Over  10 lbs    Over    Over
 per gallon.............................     and   10 to   13 to  16 lbs     and   10 to   13 to  16 lbs     and   10 to   13 to     and   10 to   13 to
                                            less  13 lbs  16 lbs            less  13 lbs  16 lbs            less  13 lbs  16 lbs    less  13 lbs  16 lbs
Thickness (steel):
    Distances between heads (and
     bulkheads baffles and ring
     stiffeners when used as tank
     reinforcement):
        36 in. or less..................    .100    .129    .157    .187    .100    .129    .157    .187    .100    .129    .157    .129    .157    .187
        Over 36 in. to 54 inches........    .100    .129    .157    .187    .100    .129    .157    .187    .129    .157    .187    .157    .250    .250
        Over 54 in. to 60 inches........    .100    .129    .157    .187    .129    .157    .187    .250    .157    .250    .250    .187    .250    .312
Thickness (aluminum):
    Distances between heads (and
     bulkheads baffles and ring
     stiffeners when used as tank
     reinforcement):
        36 in. or less..................    .144    .187    .227    .270    .144    .187    .227    .270    .144    .187    .227    .187    .227    .270
        Over 36 in. to 54 inches........    .144    .187    .227    .270    .144    .187    .227    .270    .187    .227    .270    .157    .360    .360
        Over 54 in. to 60 inches........    .144    .187    .227    .270    .187    .227    .270    .360    .227    .360    .360    .270    .360    .450
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


[[Page 925]]

    (b) [Reserved]

[Amdt. 178-89, 54 FR 25031, June 12, 1989; 54 FR 28750, July 7, 1989, as 
amended at 55 FR 37065, Sept. 7, 1990]



Sec. 178.348-3  Pumps, piping, hoses and connections.

    Each pump and all piping, hoses and connections on each cargo tank 
motor vehicle must conform to Sec. 178.345-9, except that the use of 
nonmetallic pipes, valves, or connections are authorized on DOT 412 
cargo tanks.

[Amdt. 178-89, 55 FR 37065, Sept. 7, 1990. Redesignated by Amdt. 178-
112, 61 FR 18934, Apr. 29, 1996]



Sec. 178.348-4  Pressure relief.

    (a) Each cargo tank must be equipped with a pressure and vacuum 
relief system in accordance with Sec. 178.345-10 and this section.
    (b) Type and construction. Vacuum relief devices are not required 
for cargo tanks designed to be loaded by vacuum or built to withstand 
full vacuum.
    (c) Pressure settings of relief valves. The setting of the pressure 
relief devices must be in accordance with Sec. 178.345-10(d), except as 
provided in paragraph (d)(3) of this section.
    (d) Venting capacities. (1) The vacuum relief system must limit the 
vacuum to less than 80 percent of the design vacuum capability of the 
cargo tank.
    (2) If pressure loading or unloading devices are provided, the 
pressure relief system must have adequate vapor and liquid capacity to 
limit tank pressure to the cargo tank test pressure at the maximum 
loading or unloading rate. The maximum loading and unloading rates must 
be included on the metal specification plate.
    (3) Cargo tanks used in dedicated service for materials classed as 
corrosive material, with no secondary hazard, may have a total venting 
capacity which is less than required by Sec. 178.345-10(e). The minimum 
total venting capacity for these cargo tanks must be determined in 
accordance with the formula contained in Sec. 178.270-11(d)(3). Use of 
the approximate values given for the formula in Sec. 178.270-11(d)(3) is 
acceptable.

[Amdt. 178-89, 54 FR 25032, June 12, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 37065, 
Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. 178-104, 59 FR 49135, Sept. 26, 1994. Redesignated 
by Amdt. 178-112, 61 FR 18934, Apr. 29, 1996]



Sec. 178.348-5  Pressure and leakage test.

    (a) Each cargo tank must be tested in accordance with Sec. 178.345-
13 and this section.
    (b) Pressure test. Test pressure must be as follows:
    (1) Using the hydrostatic test method, the test pressure must be at 
least 1.5 times MAWP.
    (2) Using the pneumatic test method, the test pressure must be at 
least 1.5 times tank MAWP, and the inspection pressure is tank MAWP.

[Amdt. 178-89, 54 FR 25032, June 12, 1989. Redesignated by Amdt. 178-
112, 61 FR 18934, Apr. 29, 1996]



   Subpart K--Specifications for Packagings for Class 7 (Radioactive) 
                                Materials



Sec. 178.350  Specification 7A; general packaging, Type A.

    (a) Each packaging must meet all applicable requirements of subpart 
B of part 173 of this subchapter and be designed and constructed so that 
it meets the requirements of Secs. 173.403, 173.410, 173.412, 173.415 
and 173.465 of this subchapter for Type A packaging.
    (b) Each Specification 7A packaging must be marked on the outside 
``USA DOT 7A Type A'' and ``Radioactive Material.''

[Amdt. 178-109, 60 FR 50336, Sept. 28, 1995; 60 FR 54409, Oct. 23, 1995]



Sec. 178.352  Specification 6L; metal packaging.



Sec. 178.352-1  General requirements.

    Each packaging must meet the applicable requirements of Sec. 173.24 
of this subchapter.

[Amdt. 178-35, 39 FR 45246. Dec. 31, 1974. Redesignated by Amdt. 178-97, 
55 FR 52716, Dec. 21, 1990]

[[Page 926]]



Sec. 178.352-2  Rated capacity.

    (a) Rated capacity as marked (see Sec. 178.352-6). Not less than 55 
gallons nor more than 110 gallons for the outer steel drum. Not more 
than 17.74 L for the inner vessel.
    (b) The authorized maximum gross weight of the package is 160 kg 
(350 pounds) for sizes not over 210 L (55 gallons) or 220 kg (480 
pounds) for sizes over 210 L (55 gallons) but not over 420 L (110 
gallons).

[Amdt. 178-1, 33 FR 14934, Oct. 4, 1968, as amended by Amdt. 178-35, 39 
FR 45246, Dec. 31, 1974. Redesignated by Amdt. 178-97, 55 FR 52716, Dec. 
21, 1990, and amended by Amdt. 178-99, 58 FR 51534, Oct. 1, 1993; 66 FR 
45382, 45387, 45389, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.352-3  General construction requirements.

    (a) The outer shell must be of straight sided steel, with welded 
body seams and at least 18-gauge body and bottom head sheets, and 14-
gauge removable head sheets (unless there are one or more corrugations 
in the cover near the periphery, in which case 16-gauge is authorized). 
The shell may be either a single sheet of steel or may be fabricated by 
welding together two appropriate lengths of 210 L (55-gallon) drums, 
such as a DOT Specification 6J or 17H, with rolled or swedged in hoops 
as prescribed for either of those specifications. The head must be 
convex (crowned), not extending beyond the level of the chime, with a 
minimum convexity of 1 cm (\3/8\-inch). The inside diameter of the shell 
must be at least 57 cm (22.5 inches).
    (b) Inner containment vessel must conform to specification 2R 
(except that cast iron is not authorized), with a maximum usable inside 
dimension of 13.3 cm (5.25 inches) maximum height of 127 cm (50 inches) 
(with caps in place) and minimum wall thickness of 6 mm (0.25 inch).
    (c) Inner containment vessel must be fixed within the outer shell by 
one of the following types of centering devices:
    (1) At least 8 steel rod spacers, of at least 6 mm (0.25-inch) 
diameter (for packages of 210 L (55-gallon) capacity) or 1 cm of (0.375-
inch) diameter (for packages with greater than 210 L (55-gallon) 
capacity) cold rolled steel, welded to the vessel at each end by minimum 
5 cm (2-inch) continuous weld. Each rod must be welded to the vessel at 
radial positions not exceeding 45 degrees as not to interfere with 
closure of the inner vessel. Each spacer rod must extend at least 5.6 cm 
(2.25 inches) beyond the inner vessel at each end, then radially to the 
wall of the outer drum (to provide a springlike snug fit) and along the 
entire length of the wall of the outer drum. For a packaging of more 
than 210 L (55-gallon) capacity, each spacer rod must be braced by 
welding a 6 millimeter (0.25-inch) by 5 cm (2-inch) steel plate to the 
spacer rod and the pipe with a continuous weld at each joint, the joints 
being located approximately half way along the length of the drum. For 
containers manufactured prior to March 31, 1975, this requirement is 
effective December 31, 1975.
    (2) At least three steel ``spiders,'' not more than 24 inches apart, 
with each spider having at least four legs. Each leg must be constructed 
of materials having dimensions not less than those listed in this 
paragraph, welded by continuous weld at each joint to inner and outer 
steel bands of at least \1/4\-inch by 1-inch steel. The inner steel band 
must be welded to the inner vessel by at least six 2-inch welds on both 
edges of the band. The outer steel band must be welded to the outer drum 
by at least six 2-inch welds on both edges of the top outer band, such 
that the inner vessel is at least 2\1/4\ inches from the top and bottom 
of the drum. Authorized construction materials are:
    (i) 2.5 cm (1 inch) by 2.5 cm (1 inch) by 6 mm (\1/4\-inch) steel 
angle iron.
    (ii) 3 cm (1\1/4\ inches) by 3 cm (1\1/4\ inches) by 5 mm (\3/16\-
inch) steel angle iron.
    (iii) 2.5 cm (1 inch) schedule 40 steel pipe.
    (iv) 1\1/2\-inch diameter solid steel rods, with only two such 
spiders required instead of three.
    (3) There must not be less than 2 spacer mechanisms for a packaging 
of 210 L (55-gallon) capacity nor less than 3 spacer mechanisms for a 
packaging greater than 210 L (55-gallon) capacity. Each spacer mechanism 
must consist of not less than 6 steel angles, pipe, or rod radial 
supports of at least 2.7

[[Page 927]]

square cm (0.42 square inch) cross-section. Each radial support must be 
welded at one end to the containment vessel by a continuous weld or to 
an inner steel band of at least 6 mm (\1/4\-inch) by 2.5 cm (1 inch) by 
a continuous weld at radial positions not exceeding 60 degrees from the 
center of the package. The inner band, when used, must be welded to the 
inner containment vessel by at least 6 equally spaced 5 cm (2-inch) 
welds on each edge of the band. The opposite end of the radial support 
must be welded by a continuous weld to an outer steel band of at least 6 
mm (\1/4\-inch) by 2.5 cm (1 inch). The outer steel band must be welded 
to the outer shell by at least 6 equally spaced welds on each edge of 
the top band, such that the inner vessel is fixed at least 5.7 cm (2.25 
inches) from the top and bottom of the drum. The spacer mechanism must 
be welded as specified near each end of the containment vessel so as not 
to interfere with the vessel closure. For a packaging greater than 210 L 
(55-gallon) capacity, the additional spacer mechanism must be located at 
approximately midpoint along the length of the inner vessel.
    (d) The void between the inner containment vessel and the outer 
shell must be completely filled with bagged or tamped vermiculite 
(expanded mica), with a density of at least 0.072 g/cc (4.5 pounds per 
cubic foot). Loose, untamped vermiculite is not authorized.

[Amdt. 178-1, 33 FR 14934, Oct. 4, 1968, as amended by Amdt. 178-35, 39 
FR 45246, Dec. 31, 1974; 40 FR 2435, Jan. 13, 1975; 40 FR 44327, Sept. 
26, 1975. Redesignated by Amdt. 178-97,55 FR 52716, Dec. 21, 1990; 66 FR 
45387, 45389, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.352-4  Welding.

    Welding must be of material having a melting point in excess of 800 
deg.C (1475  deg.F) (except that for packages constructed prior to March 
31, 1975, this temperature may be 540  deg.C (1000  deg.F)), with a 
joint efficiency of at least 0.85. This requirement applies to welding 
used in adding spacer rods to comply with Sec. 178.352-3(c)(1).

[Amdt. 178-35, 39 FR 45246, Dec. 31, 1974. Redesignated by Amdt. 178-97, 
55 FR 52716, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 63 FR 37462, July 10, 1998]



Sec. 178.352-5  Closure.

    (a) The outer drum closure must be at least a 12-gauge bolted ring 
with drop forged lugs, one of which is threaded, and having at least a 
1.6 centimeter (\5/8\-inch) diameter steel bolt and a lock nut, or 
equivalent device.
    (b) The closure device must have a means for the attachment of a 
tamper-proof lock wire and seal, or equivalent.

[Amdt. 178-1, 33 FR 14935, Oct. 4, 1968, as amended by Amdt. 178-35, 39 
FR 45246, Dec. 31, 1974. Redesignated by Amdt. 178-97, 55 FR 52716, Dec. 
21, 1990]



Sec. 178.352-6  Markings.

    (a) Markings on each container, by die stamping on a metal plate 
attached to the outside of the outer container by spot welding, or other 
equally efficient method, in letters and figures of at least one-fourth 
inch in height, as follows:
    (1) ``DOT-6L''.
    (2) ``FISSILE RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL.''
    (3) Name or symbol of person making the marks specified in paragraph 
(a) (1) of this section. Symbol, if used, must be registered with the 
Associate Administrator.
    (4) Gauge of metal of the outer steel drum in the thinnest part, 
rated capacity of the outer steel drum in gallons, and the year of 
manufacture of the assembled package (e.g., 18-110-68). When the gauge 
of the metal in the drum wall differs from that in the head, both must 
be indicated with a slanting line between, and with the gauge of the 
body indicated first (e.g., 18/16-110-68 for 18-gauge body and 16-gauge 
head).
    (b) [Reserved]

[Order 70, 31 FR 6496, Apr. 29, 1966. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 
5, 1967. Redesignated by Amdt. 178-97, 55 FR 52716, Dec. 21, 1990; 66 FR 
45386, Aug. 28, 2001]

[[Page 928]]


    Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting 
Sec. 178.352-6, see the List of CFR Sections Affected in the Finding 
Aids section of the printed volume and on GPO Access.



Sec. 178.354  Specification 6M; metal packaging.



Sec. 178.354-1  General requirements.

    (a) Each package must meet the applicable requirements of 
Sec. 173.24 of this chapter.
    (b) [Reserved]

[Amdt. 178-1, 33 FR 14935, Oct. 4, 1968. Redesignated by Amdt. 178-97, 
55 FR 52716, Dec. 21, 1990]



Sec. 178.354-2  Rated capacity.

    (a) Rated capacity as marked (see Sec. 178.354-5). Not less than 10 
gallons nor more than 110 gallons for the outer steel drum. Not less 
than 1.24 L for the inner containment vessel.
    (b) [Reserved]

[Amdt. 178-1, 33 FR 14935, Oct. 4, 1968. Redesignated by Amdt. 178-97, 
55 FR 52716, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 63 FR 37462, July 10, 1998; 66 
FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.354-3  General construction requirements.

    (a) The outer shell must be of straight-sided steel, with welded 
body seams, and may be either a single sheet of steel, or may be 
fabricated by welding together two appropriate lengths of drums with 
each length to contain 3 swedged or rolled rolling hoops as prescribed 
for either of these specifications. A removable head for a packaging of 
210 L (55 gallons) or larger volume must have one or more corrugations 
in the cover near the periphery. For a packaging exceeding 57 L (15 
gallons) volume, the head must be crowned (convexed), not extending 
beyond the level of the chime, with a minimum convexity of 1 cm (\3/8\-
inch).
    (1) The maximum authorized gross weight, metal thickness, and 
minimum end insulation thickness for the marked volume is as follows:

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                Marked capacity                  Maximum authorized gross    Minimum      Minimum
------------------------------------------------          weight            thickness    thickness
                                                -------------------------- of uncoated     of end
                                                                            sheets and   insulation       Cm
         Gallons not over              Liters       Pounds     Kilograms      heads    -------------
                                                                             (gauge)       Inches
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
15................................           57          160           73           20         1.88          4.7
30................................          114          480          219           18         3.75          9.5
55................................          210          640          292           16         3.75          9.5
110...............................          420          640          292           16         3.75          9.5
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (2) Each drum must have at least four 1.2 centimeter (0.5-inch) 
diameter vents near the top, each covered with a weatherproof tape or 
fusible plug; or equivalent device. A layer of porous refractory fiber 
may be placed behind the pressure-relief vent holes.
    (b) Inner containment vessel must conform to specification 2R or 
equivalent (cast iron or brass are prohibited), with maximum usable 
inside diameter of 13.3 cm (5.25 inches), minimum usable inside diameter 
of 10 cm (4 inches), and minimum height of 15 cm (6 inches).
    (c) Inner containment vessel must be fixed within the outer shell by 
one of the following types of solid centering media, with the sides of 
the inner vessel protected by at least 9.5 cm (3.75 inches) of 
insulation media, and the ends with at least the thickness as prescribed 
in paragraph (a)(1) of this section.
    (1) Machined discs and rings made of solid industrial cane 
fiberboard having a density of at least 0.24 g/cc (15 pounds per cubic 
foot) fitted such that the radial clearances between the fiberboard, 
inner vessel, and shell do not exceed 6 mm (\1/4\-inch); or
    (2) Hardwood or plywood at least 1.2 centimeter (\1/2\-inch) thick, 
having a density of at least 0.45 g/cc (28 pounds per cubic foot). There 
must be no gap or direct heat path from the shell to the inner vessel.

[[Page 929]]

    (d) Any radiation shielding material used must be placed within the 
inner containment vessel or must be protected in all directions by at 
least the thickness of the thermal insulating material prescribed in 
paragraph (a) of this section.
    (e) For a packaging having an authorized gross weight in excess of 
219 kg (480 pounds), a steel bearing plate, at least 6 mm (0.25-inch) 
thick or a plywood disc, at least 2.5 cm (1-inch) thick, and at least 25 
cm (10 inches) in diameter must be provided at both ends and adjacent to 
the specification 2R inner containment vessel, to provide additional 
load-bearing surface against the insulation-centering medium.

[Amdt. 178-1, 33 FR 14935, Oct. 4, 1968, as amended by Amdt. 178-35, 39 
FR 45246, Dec. 31, 1974; 40 FR 44327, Sept. 26, 1975. Redesignated by 
Amdt. 178-97, 55 FR 52716, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 63 FR 37462, 
July 10, 1998; 66 FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 61016, Sept. 27, 2002]



Sec. 178.354-4  Closure.

    (a) The outer drum closure must be at least 16-gauge bolt-type 
locking ring having at least a \5/16\-inch steel bolt for drum sizes not 
over 15 gallons, or a 12-gauge bolted ring with drop-forged lugs, one of 
which is threaded, and a \5/8\-inch steel bolt for drum sizes over 15 
gallons. Each bolt must be provided with a lock nut or equivalent 
device.
    (b) The closure device must have means for the attachment of a 
temperproof lock wire and seal, or equivalent.

[Amdt. 178-1, 33 FR 14935, Oct. 4, 1968. Redesignated by Amdt. 178-97, 
55 FR 52716, Dec. 21, 1990]



Sec. 178.354-5  Markings.

    (a) Marking must be as prescribed in Sec. 178.3.
    (b) Marking on the outside of each package must be as follows: 
``DOT-6M Type B,'' ``Radioactive Materials,'' or ``Fissile Radioactive 
Materials,'' as appropriate; and the gauge of metal of the outer drum in 
the thinnest part, rated capacity of the outer drum in gallons, and year 
of manufacture (for example, 18-30-69). When the gauge of the metal in 
the drum wall differs from that in the head, both must be indicated with 
a slanting line between, and with the gauge of the body indicated first 
(e.g., 18/16-55-69 for 18-gauge body and 16-gauge head).

[Amdt. 178-1, 33 FR 14935, Oct. 4, 1968. Redesignated by Amdt. 178-97, 
55 FR 52716, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 63 FR 37462, July 10, 1998]



Sec. 178.356  Specification 20PF phenolic-foam insulated, metal overpack.



Sec. 178.356-1  General requirements.

    (a) Each overpack must meet all of the applicable requirements of 
Sec. 173.24 of this subchapter.
    (b) The maximum gross weight of the package, including the inner 
cylinder and its contents, must not exceed the following:
    (1) Specification 20PF-1--138 kg (300 pounds).
    (2) Specification 20PF-2--320 kg (700 pounds).
    (3) Specification 20PF-3--455 kg (1000 pounds).
    (c) The general configuration of the overpack must be a right 
cylinder, consisting of an insulated base section, a steel liner lid, 
and an insulated top section. The inner liner and outer shell must be at 
least 16-gauge and 18-gauge steel, respectively, with the intervening 
cavity filled with a molded-in-place, fire-resistant, phenolic-foam 
insulation interspersed with wooden members for bracing and support Wood 
pieces must be securely attached to both the liner and shell. No hole is 
permitted in the liner. Each joint between sections must be stepped a 
minimum of 5 cm (2 inches) and gaps between mating surfaces must not 
exceed 5 mm (0.2 inch). Gaps between foam surface of top section and 
liner lid must not exceed 1 cm (0.4 inch) or 5 cm (2 inches) where taper 
is required for mold stripping. For the specification 20PF-1, the top 
section may consist of a plug of foam insulation and a steel cover. The 
liner and shell closures must each be gasketed against moisture 
penetration. The liner must have a bolted flange closure. Shell closure 
must conform to paragraph (d) of this section.
    (d) Drums over 5 gallons capacity must be closed by means of 12-
gauge bolted ring with drop forged lugs, one of which is threaded, and 
having 3/8 inch bolt and nut for drums not over 30 gallons capacity and 
5/8 inch bolt and

[[Page 930]]

nut for drums over 30 gallons capacity. Five gallon drums must be of lug 
type closure with cover having at least 16 lugs.
    (e) Drawings in CAPE-1662, which include bills of material, are a 
part of this specification.

[Amdt. 178-35, 39 FR 45247, Dec. 31, 1974. Redesignated by Amdt. 178-97, 
55 FR 52716, Dec. 21, 1990; 65 FR 58632, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45386, 
45389, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.356-2  Materials of construction and other requirements.

    (a) Phenolic foam insulation must be fire-resistant and fabricated 
in accordance with USDOE Material and Equipment Specification SP-9, Rev. 
1 and Supplement, which is a part of this specification. (Note: 
Packagings manufactured under USAEC Specification SP-9 and Rev. 1 
thereto are authorized for continued manufacture and use.) A 5.4-inch 
(13.7 cm) minimum thickness of foam must be provided over the entire 
liner except:
    (1) Where wood spacers replace the foam; or
    (2) At protrusions of liner or shell, such as flanges, baffles, 
etc., where minimum insulation thickness is 9 cm (3.5 inches); or
    (3) Where alternate top section (specification 20PF-1) is used. Foam 
must not interfere with proper seating of screws in inner liner flange 
assembly. Average density of insulation must be 0.13 g/cc (8 pounds per 
cubic foot (pcf)) minimum for bottom section and 0.16 g/cc (10 pcf) 
minimum for top section, except 0.1 g/cc (6.5 pcf) for the specification 
20PF-1 top section.
    (b) Gaskets must be as follows:
    (1) Inner liner flange--Neoprene rubber of 30 to 60 type A durometer 
hardness or other equivalent gasket material which is compatible with 
the specific contents.
    (2) Outer shell--Synthetic rubber conforming to MIL-R-6855 
(available from the Naval Publications Forms Center, 5801 Tabor Avenue, 
Philadelphia, Pennsylvania 19120) class 2, grade 60.
    (3) Support and pressure pads for inner liner top and bottom must be 
sponge rubber or equivalent.
    (c) Alternate top section (specification 20PF-1 only). Average 
insulation density must be 0.16 g/cc (10 pcf minimum). Thickness of plug 
must be 11 cm (4.3 inches) minimum, except thickness may be reduced to 
10 cm (4 inches) to clear bolt heads. A flush mounted top lifting device 
must be securely fastened to a wood block encapsulated by the foam.
    (d) Vent holes 5 mm (0.2-inch) diameter must be drilled in the outer 
shell to provide pressure relief during the insulation foaming and in 
the event of a fire. These holes, which must be drilled in all areas of 
the shell which mate with the foam insulation, must be spaced in 
accordance with CAPE-1662.
    (e) Welding must be by a fusion welding process in accordance with 
American Welding Society Codes B-3.0 and D-1.0. Body seams and joints 
for the liner or shell must be continuous welds.
    (f) Waterproofing. Each screw hole in the outer shell must be sealed 
with appropriate resin-type sealing material, or equivalent, during 
installation of the screw. All exposed foam surfaces, including any vent 
hole, must be sealed with waterproofing material as prescribed in USDOE 
Material and Equipment Specification SP-9, Rev. 1 and Supplement, or 
equivalent.

[Amdt. 178-35, 39 FR 45247, Dec. 31, 1974, as amended by Amdt. 178-56, 
44 FR 49458, Aug. 23, 1979. Redesignated by Amdt. 178-97, 55 FR 52716, 
Dec. 21, 1990; 66 FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.356-3  Tests.

    (a) Leakage test--Each inner liner assembly must be tested for 
leakage prior to installation. Seam welds of the liner must be covered 
for a distance of at least 15 cm (6 inches) on either side of the seam 
with soapsuds, heavy oil, or equivalent material, and interior air 
pressure applied to at least 776 mm Hg (15 p.s.i.g.) above atmospheric 
pressure must be held for at least 30 seconds. Liners failing to pass 
this test may not be used until repairs are made, and retests 
successfully passed.
    (b) [Reserved]

[Amdt. 178-35, 39 FR 45247, Dec. 31, 1974. Redesignated by Amdt. 178-97, 
55 FR 52716, Dec. 21, 1990; 66 FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 61016, 
Sept. 27, 2002]

[[Page 931]]



Sec. 178.356-4  Required markings.

    (a) Marking must be as prescribed in Sec. 178.3.
    (b) Marking on the outside of each overpack must be as follows:
    (1) ``USA-DOT-20PF-1'' or ``-2,'' as appropriate, and if the entire 
liner is made of stainless steel, additional marking such as ``3041-SS'' 
to indicate the type of stainless steel used.
    (2) ``TARE WT: xxx lbs.'' where xxx is the tare weight of the 
assembled overpack without the inner container.
    (3) Year of manufacture.

[Amdt. 178-35, 39 FR 45247, Dec. 31, 1974. Redesignated by Amdt. 178-97, 
55 FR 52716, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 63 FR 37462, July 10, 1998]



Sec. 178.356-5  Typical assembly detail.

    (a) Specifications 20PF-1.
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.077
    
    (b) Specification 20PF-2.

[[Page 932]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.078

    (c) Specification 20PF-3.

[[Page 933]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.079

[Amdt. 178-35, 39 FR 45247, Dec. 31, 1974. Redesignated by Amdt. 178-97, 
55 FR 52716, Dec. 21, 1990]

[[Page 934]]



Sec. 178.358  Specification 21PF fire and shock resistant, phenolic-foam insulated, metal overpack.



Sec. 178.358-1  General requirements.

    (a) Each overpack must meet all of the applicable requirements of 
Secs. 173.24, 173.411, and 173.412 of this subchapter.
    (1) Specification 21PF-1 overpacks includes the series of 21PF-1, 
21PF-1A, and 21PF-1B models. Details of the three models are included in 
CAPE-1662, Revision 1 and Supplement 1.
    (2) Drawings in CAPE-1662, Revision 1 and Supplement 1, which 
include bills of materials, and K/SS-471, are a part of this 
specification.
    (b) Each overpack is authorized for use in applications where the 
maximum gross weight of the package, including the inner container and 
contents does not exceed 3725 kg (8200 pounds), (horizontally-loaded 
specification 21 PF-1 unit), or 3900 kg (8600 pounds), (end-loaded 
specification 21 PF-2 unit).
    (c) The general configuration of the overpack must be a right 
cylinder, consisting of a steel inner liner (at least 16-gauge) and 
steel outer shell (at least 14-gauge) with the intervening cavity filled 
with a molded-in-place, fire-resistant, phenolic foam insulation and 
interspersed wooden members for bracing and support. Two specific 
configurations are authorized; a horizontal loading unit (specification 
21PF-1) consisting of insulated base and top sections jointed in a 
longitudinal peripheral closure joint; or an end-loading unit 
(specification 21PF-2), consisting of an insulated main section, a steel 
plate liner lid, and an insulated end cap. For either type each joint 
between sections must be stepped at least 1.8 cm (0.75-inch) and gaps 
between mating surfaces may not exceed 5 mm (0.2-inch). Bolted closures, 
which must each be gasketed against moisture penetration, must be in 
accordance with CAPE-1662. Each bolt must be equipped with a locking 
device to prevent loosening from vibration. Outer steel bracing and 
support framework must be attached to the shell to facilitate normal 
handling.
    (d) Specification 21PF-1 overpacks in use or under construction 
before April 1, 1989, must be modified to Specification 21PF-1A before 
April 1, 1991. All new construction to Specification 21PF-1 beginning 
after March 31, 1989, must meet Specification 21PF-1B. Use of unmodified 
21PF-1 overpacks after March 31, 1991, is prohibited.

[Amdt. 178-35, 39 FR 45250, Dec. 31, 1974; 40 FR 2435, Jan. 13, 1975, as 
amended by Amdt. 178-90, 53 FR 36551, Sept. 20, 1988. Redesigntated by 
Amdt. 178-97, 55 FR 52716, Dec. 21, 1990; 66 FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.358-2  Materials of construction and other requirements.

    (a) Phenolic foam insulation must be fire resistant and fabricated 
in accordance with USDOE Material and Equipment Specification SP-9, Rev. 
1 and Supplement, which is a part of this specification. (Note: 
Packagings manufactured under USAEC Specification SP-9, and Rev. 1 
thereto are authorized for continued manufacture and use.) A 5.5-inch 
(14 cm) minimum thickness of foam must be provided over the entire liner 
except where:
    (1) Wood spacers replace the foam material; or
    (2) At protrusions of liner or shell, such as flanges, baffles, 
etc., where the minimum thickness of foam, wood, or a combination of 
these is 10 cm (4 inches).
    (3) Solid wood or laminated wood solidly glued may be used to 
replace the foam between liner and shell (i.e., in ends of overpack). In 
this case, minimum wood thickness is 10 cm (4 inches). Average density 
of insulation must be 0.1g/cc (6.75 pounds per cubic foot (pcf)) 
minimum, except that 0.13 g/cc (8 pcf) is required in the removable end 
cap of the specification 21PF-2, which must have a minimum foam 
thickness of 12.7 cm (5 inches).
    (b) Gaskets for inner liner, outer shell, or where otherwise 
specified in CAPE-1662, Revision 1, must be as specified in CAPE-1662, 
Revision 1.
    (c) Support and pressure pads for the inner liner must be of 
neoprene, sponge rubber, or equivalent.
    (d) Fire-retardant (intumescent) paint must be applied to any wood 
blocking which is located at any joint in the shell.
    (e) Vent holes 5 mm (0.2-inch) diameter must be drilled in the outer 
shell to

[[Page 935]]

provide pressure relief during the insulation foaming and in the event 
of a fire. These holes, which must be drilled in all areas of the shell 
which made with the foam insulation, must be spaced in accordance with 
CAPE-1662.
    (f) Welding must be by a fusion process in accordance with the 
American Welding Society Code. Body seams and joints for the liner and 
shell must be continuous welds.
    (g) Waterproofing. Each screw hole in the outer shell must be sealed 
with appropriate resin-type sealing material, or equivalent, during 
installation of the screw. All exposed foam surfaces, including any vent 
hole, must be sealed with either:
    (1) Waterproofing material as prescribed in USDOE Material and 
Equipment Specification SP-9, Rev. 1 and Supplement, or
    (2) As specified in CAPE-1662, Revision 1.

[Amdt. 178-35, 39 FR 45250, Dec. 31, 1974, as amended by Amdt. 178-56, 
44 FR 49459, Aug. 23, 1979; Amdt. 178-90, 53 FR 36551, Sept. 20, 1988. 
Redesigntated by Amdt. 178-97, 55 FR 52716, Dec. 21, 1990; 66 FR 45387, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.358-3  Modification of Specification 21PF-1 overpacks.

    (a) Each Specification 21PF-1 overpack for which construction began 
or was completed before April 1, 1989, in conformance with drawing E-S-
31536-J, Revision 11, of CAPE-1662 must be modified in conformance with 
drawing S1E-31536-J1-D of CAPE-1662, Revision 1, Supplement 1, before 
April 1, 1991.
    (b) Each such existing Specification 21PF-1 overpack must be dried 
and weighed in accordance with the following procedures:
    (1) Drill out or otherwise clean the plug material from the vent 
holes originally provided for foam expansion. See drawing S1E-31536-J1-D 
of CAPE-1662, Revision 1, Supplement 1, for locations.
    (2) Weigh each packaging element (top and bottom halves) separately 
to an accuracy of 2.3 kg (5 pounds) and record 
the weights. If this measured weight exceeds the initially measured 
weight at the time of fabrication by 11.3 kg (25 pounds) (indicating a 
significant retained water content), the packaging element must be 
dried.
    (3) Place overpack element in drying oven; maintain temperature 
between 87.8-98.9  deg.C (190 deg. and 210  deg.F) for a minimum of 72 
hours. The oven should have a provision for air exchange or other means 
of removing moisture driven from the foam structure.
    (4) Drying may be discontinued after 72 hours if the weight of the 
packaging element does not exceed the initially measured tare weight of 
that element at the time of fabrication by more than 11.3 kg (25 
pounds). If the weight of the packaging element exceeds the initial 
fabricated weight (indicating a significant remaining water content) by 
more than 11.3 kg (25 pounds), drying must be continued until the weight 
differential is not higher than 11.3 kg (25 pounds), or until the rate 
of weight loss is less than 1.1 kg (2.5 pounds) per day.
    (5) As an alternate moisture measurement, a calibrated moisture 
meter reading for 20 percent maximum water content may be used to 
indicate an end point in the drying cycle (see details in report 
``Renovation of DOT Specification 21PF-1 Protective Shipping Packages,'' 
Report No. K-2057, Revision 1, November 21, 1986, available from the 
USDOE and part of USDOE Report No. K/SS-471).
    (6) Following drying, each overpack element (top and bottom halves) 
must be weighed and the weight in both pounds and kilograms must be 
engraved on the identification plate required by Sec. 178.358-5(c).
    (c) After modification as provided for herein, each Specification 
21PF-1 overpack must be marked ``USA-DOT-21PF-1A''. See the marking 
requirements of Sec. 178.358-5.

[Amdt. 178-90, 53 FR 36551, Sept. 20, 1988. Redesigntated by Amdt. 178-
97, 55 FR 52716, Dec. 21, 1990; Amdt. 178-110, 60 FR 49111, Sept. 21, 
1995; 63 FR 37462, July 10, 1998; 66 FR 45389, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.358-4  Construction of Specification 21PF-1B overpacks.

    (a) Each Specification 21PF-1 overpack for which construction began 
after March 31, 1989, must meet the requirements of Specification 21PF-
1B, in conformance with drawings E-S-31536-J-P, and S1E-31536-J2-B of 
CAPE-1662, Revision 1, Supplement 1.

[[Page 936]]

    (b) With the exception of the closure nuts and bolts, all metal 
parts of the Specification 21PF-1B must be of stainless steel as shown 
on the drawings referred to in paragraph (a) of this section.

[Amdt. 178-90, 53 FR 36551, Sept. 20, 1988. Redesigntated by Amdt. 178-
97, 55 FR 52716, Dec. 21, 1990]



Sec. 178.358-5  Required markings.

    (a) Markings must be as prescribed in Sec. 178.3.
    (b) Specification marking on the outside of each overpack must be as 
follows: ``USA-DOT-21PF-1'', ``1A'', ``1B'', or ``2'', as appropriate.
    (1) For Specifications 21PF-1 and 21PF-2 only, if the inner shell is 
constructed of stainless steel, additional marking such as ``304L-SS'' 
are to be marked on the outside of the overpack to indicate the type of 
stainless steel used.
    (2) For Specification 21PF-1 and 21PF-2 only, ``TARE WT: * * * lbs. 
(* * *  kg)'' where * * * is the tare weight in pounds and kilograms, 
respectively, of the assembled overpack without the inner product 
container.
    (3) For Specification 21PF-1A and 21PF-1B only: ``TARE WT. of Cover: 
* * * lbs (* * * kg) TARE WT. of BOTTOM: * * * lbs (* * * kg)'' where * 
* * is the tare weight in pounds and kilograms, respectively, of the 
separate halves of the overpack without the inner product container. For 
Specification 21PF-1A overpacks, the previous tare weight must be 
changed to reflect the modified tare weight value or must be covered or 
removed.
    (4) Year of manufacture followed by the year of modification, if 
applicable.
    (5) The name or symbol of maker or party certifying compliance with 
specification requirements. A symbol, if used, must be registered with 
the Associate Administrator.
    (c) For Specification 21PF-1A and -1B only, the markings required by 
this section must be affixed to each overpack by inscription upon a 
metal identification plate 11 inches wide x 15 inches long (28 cm x 38 
cm), fabricated of 16 to 20 gauge stainless steel sheet, ASTM A 240/A 
240M (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.1 of this subchapter), 
Type 304L.

[Amdt. 178-90, 53 FR 36552, Sept. 20, 1988. Redesigntated by Amdt. 178-
97, 55 FR 52716, Dec. 21, 1990, and amended at Amdt. 178-97, 56 FR 
66287, Dec. 20, 1991; 63 FR 37462, July 10, 1998; 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 
2001; 67 FR 51660, Aug. 8, 2002]


Sec. 178.358-6    Typical assembly detail.

(a) Specification 21PF-1 (horizontal loading overpack).
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.080


[[Page 937]]


    (b) Specification 21PF-1A and 21PF-1B (horizontal loading overpack).
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.081
    
    (c) Specification 21PF-2 (end loading overpack).

[[Page 938]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.082

[Amdt. 178-90, 53 FR 36552, Sept. 20, 1988. Redesignated by Amdt. 178-
97, 55 FR 52716, Dec. 21, 1990]

[[Page 939]]



Sec. 178.360  Specification 2R; inside containment vessel.



Sec. 178.360-1  General requirements.

    (a) Each vessel must be made of stainless steel, malleable iron, or 
brass, or other material having equivalent physical strength and fire 
resistance.
    (b) Each vessel must meet all of the applicable requirements of 
Sec. 173.24 (c) and (d) of this subchapter. Letters and numerals at 
least 6 mm (\1/4\-inch) in height are authorized for the marking of a 
vessel not exceeding 5 cm (2 inches) inside diameter.

[Amdt. 178-35, 39 FR 45245, Dec. 31, 1974. Redesignated by Amdt. 178-97, 
55 FR 52716, Dec. 21, 1990; 66 FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.360-2  Manufacture.

    The ends of the vessel must be fitted with screw-type closures or 
flanges (see Sec. 178.360-4), except that one or both ends of the vessel 
may be permanently closed by a welded or brazed plate. Welded or brazed 
side seams are authorized.

[Amdt. 178-35, 39 FR 45245, Dec. 31, 1974. Redesignated by Amdt. 178-97, 
55 FR 52716, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 63 FR 37462, July 10, 1998]



Sec. 178.360-3  Dimensions.

    (a) The inside diameter of the vessel may not exceed 30 cm (12 
inches) exclusive of flanges for handling or fastening devices and must 
have wall thickness and length in accordance with the following:

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Inside diameter    Threaded closure                                                           Length maximum
      maximum      --------------------                                                      -------------------
-------------------                            Wall thickness minimum--Flanged closure
 Inches      Cm      Inches      Mm                                                            Inches      Cm
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
       2         5    \3/32\       2.5  Not less than that prescribed for schedule 40 pipe..        16        41
       6        15     \1/8\       3.2  ....................................................        72       183
      12        30     \1/4\       6.5  ....................................................        72       183
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (b) [Reserved]

[Amdt. 178-35, 39 FR 45245, Dec. 31, 1974. Redesignated by Amdt. 178-97, 
55 FR 52716, Dec. 21, 1990; 66 FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.360-4  Closure devices.

    (a) Each closure device must be as follows:
    (1) Screw-type cap or plug; number of threads per inch must not be 
less than United States standard pipe threads and must have sufficient 
length of thread to engage at least 5 threads when securely tightened. 
Pipe threads must be luted with an appropriate non-hardening compound 
which must be capable of withstanding up to 149  deg.C (300  deg.F) 
without loss of efficiency. Tightening torque must be adequate to 
maintain leak tightness with the specific luting compound.
    (2) An opening may be closed by a securely bolted flange and leak-
tight gasket. Each flange must be welded or brazed to the body of the 2R 
vessel per (ANSI) Standard B16.5 or (AWWA) Standard C207-55, section 10. 
A torque wrench must be used in securing the flange with a corresponding 
torque of no more than twice the force necessary to seal the selected 
gasket. Gasket material must be capable of withstanding up to 149  deg.C 
(300  deg.F) without loss of efficiency. The flange, whether of ferrous 
or nonferrous metal, must be constructed from the same metal as the 
vessel and must meet the dimensional and fabrication specifications for 
welded construction as follows:
    (i) Pipe flanges described in Tables 13, 14, 16, 17, 19, 20, 22, 23, 
25 and 26 of ANSI B16.5.
    (ii) For nominal pipe sizes, 6, 8, 10, and 12 inches, AWWA Standard 
C207-55, Table 1, class B, may be used in place of the tables prescribed 
by paragraph (a)(2)(i) of this section.
    (iii) Sizes under 6 inches, nominal pipe size, the following table 
with the same configuration as illustrated in AWWA C207-55, Table 1, 
class B, may be used in place of paragraph (a)(2)(i) of this section.

[[Page 940]]



----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Nominal pipe size        Flange O.D.                    Bolt circle      Diameter of bolts   Flange thickness
-------------------------------------------  Number        diameter      ---------------------------------------
                                            of bolts --------------------
  Inches       Cm       Inches       Cm                Inches      Cm      Inches      Cm      Inches      Cm
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
       2          5          6         15          4    4\3/4\      11.8     \1/2\       1.2     \5/8\       1.6
  2\1/2\        6.2          7       17.5          4    5\1/2\      13.8     \1/2\  ........     \5/8\  ........
       3        7.5     7\1/2\       18.8          4         6        15     \1/2\  ........     \5/8\  ........
  3\1/2\        8.8     8\1/2\       21.3          8         7      17.5     \1/2\  ........     \5/8\  ........
       4         10          9       22.5          8    7\1/2\      18.8     \1/2\  ........     \5/8\  ........
       5       12.6         10       25.4          8    8\1/2\      21.3     \1/2\  ........     \5/8\  ........
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (iv) Cast iron flanges prohibited.
    (b) [Reserved]

[Amdt. 178-35, 39 FR 45245, Dec. 31, 1974; 40 FR 2435, Jan. 13, 1975, as 
amended at 40 FR 44327, Sept. 26, 1975. Redesignated by Amdt. 178-97, 56 
FR 66284, Dec. 20, 1991]



Sec. 178.362  Specification 20WC wooden protective jacket.



Sec. 178.362-1  General requirements.

    (a) Each jacket must meet the applicable requirements of Sec. 173.24 
of this subchapter.
    (b) Maximum gross weight of the jacket plus the contents may not 
exceed the following:
    (1) Specification 20WC-1: 225 kg (500 pounds).
    (2) Specification 20WC-2: 225 kg (500 pounds).
    (3) Specification 20WC-3: 455 kg (1000 pounds).
    (4) Specification 20WC-4: 910 kg (2000 pounds).
    (5) Specification 20WC-5: 1820 kg (4000 pounds).
    (6) Specification 20WC-6: 2730 kg (6000 pounds).

[Amdt. 178-35, 39 FR 45252, Dec. 31, 1974. Redesignated by Amdt. 178-97, 
55 FR 52716, Dec. 21, 1990; 66 FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 61016, 
Sept. 27, 2002]



Sec. 178.362-2  Materials of construction.

    (a) The general configuration of the wooden protective jacket must 
be a hollow cylindrical shell constructed of one-piece discs and rings 
of plywood or solid hardwood reinforced with steel rods.
    (1) The specification 20WC-2 must be additionally completely 
encased, snugly fit, within an 18-gauge steel shell. The steel shell 
must be provided with at least four 6 millimeter (0.25-inch) diameter 
vent holes. Each hole must be covered with durable weatherproof tape, or 
equivalent device.
    (2) The specification 20WC-6 jacket must be additionally completely 
encased, snugly-fit, within a 12-gauge steel shell. The steel shell must 
be provided with at least twelve 1.2 cm (0.5-inch) diameter vent holes, 
located in 3 rows of 4 holes each, spaced at 90 degree intervals near 
the top, middle, and bottom of the drum. Each hole must be covered with 
durable weatherproof tape, or equivalent device.
    (b) Plywood must be exterior-grade, void-free, Douglas fir (or 
equivalent) not more than 2.5 cm (1 inch) thick. Solid hardwood is 
authorized for specification 20WC-2 only.
    (c) Discs and rings must be glued together with a strong, shock-
resistant adhesive, such as either of the following:
    (1) A resorcinol-formaldehyde adhesive, which has been bonded under 
both heat and pressure; or
    (2) A polyvinyl-acetate emulsion, which has been reinforced with 
cement-coated nails. The nails must be randomly spaced and must be at 
least 2.5 times as long as the minimum thickness of the plywood discs or 
rings.
    (d) Full-length steel rods are required for reinforcement and lid 
closure.
    (1) The minimum number of rods and the minimum rod diameter are as 
shown in the following table:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                        Minimum    Minimum rod diameter
            Specification              number or -----------------------
                                         rods       Inches        Mm
------------------------------------------------------------------------
20WC-1..............................           6        0.25         6.0
20WC-2..............................           6         .25         6.0
20WC-3..............................          12        .375         9.5
20WC-4..............................          16        .375         9.5
20WC-5..............................          16         .50        12.0
20WC-6..............................          16         .50        12.0
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (2) For specifications 20WC-1 and 20WC-2, steel rods must be equally 
spaced around the circumference to the rings and discs, midway between 
the O.D. and I.D. of the rings. For specifications 20WC-3 and 20WC-4, 
bolts may

[[Page 941]]

be staggered alternately in two rows, at 1.2 cm (0.5-inch) 
from the line midway between the O.D. and I.D. of the rings. For 
specifications 20WC-5 and 20WC-6, bolts may be staggered alternately in 
two rows at 2.5 cm (1 inch) from the line midway between the 
O.D. and I.D. of the rings.
    (3) Rod ends must be threaded and secured with lock nuts and steel 
washers, or equivalent device, to provide at least a 2.5 cm (1 inch) 
diameter bearing surface on each end. Ends of the rods must terminate 
1.4 cm (0.75-inch) below the surface of the plywood for specifications 
20WC-1 and 20WC-2. For specifications 20WC-3, 20WC-4, 20WC-5 and 20WC-6, 
the ends of the rods must terminate 3.7 cm (1.5 inches) below the 
surface of the plywood, and that portion of each end disc which extends 
beyond the rod ends must be further held in place with lag screws at 
least 10 cm (4 inches) long.
    (e) Thickness of wooden shell:
    (1) Specification 20WC-1: At least 10 cm (4 inches) thick.
    (2) Specification 20WC-2: At least 7.5 cm (3 inches) thick.
    (3) Specification 20WC-3: At least 13 cm (5 inches) thick for the 
jacket wall, and at least 15 cm (6 inches) thick for the end discs. In 
addition, at least 3 plywood chines, 5 cm (2 inches) wide and protruding 
5 cm (2 inches) beyond the outer surfaces, must be located at each end 
and midway along the length of the jacket.
    (4) Specification 20WC-4: At least 15 cm (6 inches) thick for the 
jacket wall, and at least 15 cm (6 inches) thick for the end discs. In 
addition, at least 3 plywood chines, 5 cm (2 inches) wide and protruding 
5 cm (2 inches) beyond the outer surfaces, must be located at each end 
and midway along the length of the jacket.
    (5) Specifications 20WC-5 and 20WC-6: At least 15 cm (6 inches) 
thick for the jacket wall, and at least 20 cm (8 inches) thick for the 
end discs. In addition, at least 5 plywood chimes, 5 cm (2 inches) wide 
and protruding 5 cm (2 inches) beyond the outer surfaces, must be 
located at each end and equally spaced along the length of the jacket.

[Amdt. 178-35, 39 FR 45252, Dec. 31, 1974. Redesignated by Amdt. 178-97, 
55 FR 52716, Dec. 21, 1990, and amended by Amdt. 178-99, 58 FR 51534, 
Oct. 1, 1993; 66 FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.362-3  Closure.

    (a) Closure for the wooden protective jacket is provided by the 
steel reinforcing rods. The end cap (lid) must fit tightly to the body 
of the jacket to prevent a heat path to the inside of the jacket. The 
lid joint for specifications 20WC-3, 20WC-4, 20WC-5, and 20WC-6, may not 
be coplanar with the end of the inner containment vessel.
    (b) Specifications 20WC-2 and 20WC-6. Locking ring closure, if used, 
must conform to Sec. 178.354-4. Flanged closure, if used, must have at 
least 8 steel bolts (at least 6 mm (0.25-inch) diameter for 20WC-2 or 
1.2 cm (0.50-inch) diameter for 20WC-6) and lock nuts (or equivalent 
device), spaced not more than 13 cm (5 inches) between centers.

[Amdt. 178-35, 39 FR 45252, Dec. 31, 1974. Redesignated by Amdt. 178-97, 
55 FR 52716, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 63 FR 37462, July 10, 1998; 66 
FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.362-4  Tests.

    Prior to each use, each jacket must be visually inspected for 
defects such as improper bonding, cracking, corrosion of steel rods, and 
improperly fitting closure lid, or other manufacturing defects. 
Particular attention must be given to any separation of the plywood 
discs and rings which would provide a heat path to the inside of the 
jacket.

[Amdt. 178-35, 39 FR 45252, Dec. 31, 1974. Redesignated by Amdt. 178-97, 
55 FR 52716, Dec. 21, 1990]



Sec. 178.362-5  Painting.

    Each jacket (other than 20WC-2 and 20WC-6) must be completely 
painted with a high quality exterior weather resistant paint.

[Amdt. 178-35, 39 FR 45252, Dec. 31, 1974. Redesignated by Amdt. 178-97, 
55 FR 52716, Dec. 21, 1990]

[[Page 942]]



Sec. 178.362-6  Marking.

    (a) Each jacket must be marked on the external surface as follows: 
``USA-DOT 20WC-(  ) TYPE B.'' The appropriate numeral must be inserted 
in the marking to indicate the appropriate specification 20WC category: 
e.g., ``20WC-2.''
    (b) Each jacket must also be marked with the name or symbol of 
person making the marks specified in paragraph (a) of this section. 
Symbol, if used, must be registered with the Associate Administrator.

[Amdt. 178-35, 39 FR 45252, Dec. 31, 1974, as amended by Amdt. 178-40, 
41 FR 38182, Sept. 9, 1976. Redesignated by Amdt. 178-97, 55 FR 52716, 
Dec. 21, 1990, and amended at Amdt. 178-97, 56 FR 66287, Dec. 20, 1991; 
66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.362-7  Typical assembly sketches.

    (a) Spec. 20WC-2.
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.083
    
    (b) Spec. 20WC-5.
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.084
    

[Amdt. 178-35, 39 FR 45253, Dec. 31, 1974; 40 FR 2435, Jan. 13, 1975. 
Redesignated by Amdt. 178-97, 55 FR 52716, Dec. 21, 1990]



Sec. 178.364  Specification 21WC wooden-steel protective overpack.



Sec. 178.364-1  General requirements.

    (a) Each jacket must meet all the applicable requirements of 
Sec. 173.24 of this subchapter.
    (b) The maximum authorized gross weight of the overpack, including 
its inner container and contents may not exceed 1360 kg (3000 pounds).

[Amdt. 178-35, 39 FR 45253, Dec. 31, 1974. Redesignated by Amdt. 178-97, 
55 FR 52716, Dec. 21, 1990; 66 FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.364-2  Materials of construction and other requirements.

    (a) The general configuration of the protective overpack must be a 
combination of two nested plywood boxes, each 2.5 cm (1 inch) thick, 
nested within a third wooden box of nominal 5 cm (2-inch) thickness 
solid hardwood. The three nested boxes must be enclosed within a welded 
framework 10 cement-coated nails spaced on nominally 1 centimeter (\3/
8\-inch) thick by 8-10 cm (3-4 inches) wide. All outer surfaces of each 
box must be coated with intumescent paint.
    (b) Plywood must be exterior-grade, void-free, Douglas fir, or 
equivalent, at least 2.5 cm (1 inch) thick. Solid hardwood must be 
maple, or equivalent.
    (c) All box joints and interior surfaces must be glued with a 
strong, shock-resistant adhesive such as

[[Page 943]]

polyvinylacetate emulsion, or equivalent.
    (d) All hardwood joints must be mitered, or equivalent, reinforced 
with No. 10 cement-coated nails space on nominal 15 cm (6-inch) centers.
    (e) All plywood joints must be butt-type, or equivalent, reinforced 
with No. 10 cement-coated nails spaced on nominal 15 cm (6-inch) 
centers.
    (f) The angles and strapping of the metal frame must be spaced such 
that separation distances do not exceed 15 cm (6 inches).
    (g) The lid must be of the same material as the box and fabricated 
in such a manner that closure forms a mitered joint with the hardwood 
box and 2 stepped-joints with the plywood boxes.

[Amdt. 178-35, 39 FR 45253, Dec. 31, 1974. Redesigntated by Amdt. 178-
97, 55 FR 52716, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by 66 FR 45387, Aug. 28, 
2001]



Sec. 178.364-3  Closure.

    Closure for the protective overpack must be provided by at least 4 
mild steel hinges formed from minimum 2.5 cm (1 inch) x 5 mm (\3/16\ 
inch) bar stock. Hinge pins must be minimum 6 mm (\1/4\ inch) diameter 
by 13.3 cm (5\1/4\ inches) long mild steel rod drilled at both ends for 
cotter pins.

[66 FR 45389, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.364-4  Tests.

    Prior to each use, each overpack must be visually inspected for 
defects such as wood checking or splintering weld cracking, corrosion of 
steel parts, improper joint bonding, or improperly fitting closure lid.

[Amdt. 178-35, 39 FR 45253, Dec. 31, 1974. Redesigntated by Amdt. 178-
97, 55 FR 52716, Dec. 21, 1990; 66 FR 45389, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.364-5  Required marking.

    (a) Marking must be as prescribed in Sec. 178.3.
    (b) Marking on the outside of each overpack must include the 
following:
    (1) ``USA-DOT 21WC'' and ``TYPE B'' as appropriate.
    (2) [Reserved]

[Amdt. 178-35, 39 FR 45253, Dec. 31, 1974. Redesigntated by Amdt. 178-
97, 55 FR 52716, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 63 FR 37462, July 10, 
1998]


Sec. 178.364-6    Typical assembly detail.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.085


[[Page 944]]


[Amdt. 178-35, 39 FR 45253, Dec. 31, 1974; 40 FR 2435, Jan. 31, 1975. 
Redesigntated by Amdt. 178-97, 55 FR 52716, Dec. 21, 1990]



      Subpart L--Non-bulk Performance-Oriented Packaging Standards

    Source: Amdt. 178-97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, unless otherwise 
noted.



Sec. 178.500  Purpose, scope and definitions.

    (a) This subpart prescribes certain requirements for non-bulk 
packagings for hazardous materials. Standards for these packagings are 
based on the UN Recommendations.
    (b) Terms used in this subpart are defined in Sec. 171.8 of this 
subchapter.



Sec. 178.502  Identification codes for packagings.

    (a) Identification codes for designating kinds of packagings consist 
of the following:
    (1) A numeral indicating the kind of packaging, as follows:
    (i) ``1'' means a drum.
    (ii) ``2'' means a wooden barrel.
    (iii) ``3'' means a jerrican.
    (iv) ``4'' means a box.
    (v) ``5'' means a bag.
    (vi) ``6'' means a composite packaging.
    (vii) ``7'' means a pressure receptacle.
    (2) A capital letter indicating the material of construction, as 
follows:
    (i) ``A'' means steel (all types and surface treatments).
    (ii) ``B'' means aluminum.
    (iii) ``C'' means natural wood.
    (iv) ``D'' means plywood.
    (v) ``F'' means reconstituted wood.
    (vi) ``G'' means fiberboard.
    (vii) ``H'' means plastic.
    (viii) ``L'' means textile.
    (ix) ``M'' means paper, multi-wall.
    (x) ``N'' means metal (other than steel or aluminum).
    (xi) ``P'' means glass, porcelain or stoneware.
    (3) A numeral indicating the category of packaging within the kind 
to which the packaging belongs. For example, for steel drums (``1A''), 
``1'' indicates a non-removable head drum (i.e., ``1A1'') and ``2'' 
indicates a removable head drum (i.e., ``1A2'').
    (b) For composite packagings, two capital letters are used in 
sequence in the second position of the code, the first indicating the 
material of the inner receptacle and the second, that of the outer 
packaging. For example, a plastic receptacle in a steel drum is 
designated ``6HA1''.
    (c) For combination packagings, only the code number for the outer 
packaging is used.
    (d) Identification codes are set forth in the standards for 
packagings in Secs. 178.504 through 178.523 of this subpart.

[Amdt. 178-97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 178-106, 
59 FR 67519, Dec. 29, 1994]



Sec. 178.503  Marking of packagings.

    (a) A manufacturer must mark every packaging that is represented as 
manufactured to meet a UN standard with the marks specified in this 
section. The markings must be durable, legible and placed in a location 
and of such a size relative to the packaging as to be readily visible, 
as specified in Sec. 178.3(a). Except as otherwise provided in this 
section, every reusable packaging liable to undergo a reconditioning 
process which might obliterate the packaging marks must bear the marks 
specified in paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(6) and (a)(9) of this section 
in a permanent form (e.g. embossed) able to withstand the reconditioning 
process. A marking may be applied in a single line or in multiple lines 
provided the correct sequence is used. As illustrated by the examples in 
paragraph (e) of this section, the following information must be 
presented in the correct sequence. Slash marks should be used to 
separate this information. A packaging conforming to a UN standard must 
be marked as follows:
    (1) The United Nations symbol as illustrated in paragraph (e)(1) of 
this section (for embossed metal receptacles, the letters UN may be 
applied in place of the symbol);
    (2) A packaging identification code designating the type of 
packaging, the

[[Page 945]]

material of construction and, when appropriate, the category of 
packaging under Secs. 178.504 through 178.523 of this subpart within the 
type to which the packaging belongs. The letter ``V'' must follow the 
packaging identification code on packagings tested in accordance with 
Sec. 178.601(g)(2); for example, ``4GV''. The letter ``W'' must follow 
the packaging identification code on packagings when required by an 
approval under the provisions of Sec. 178.601(h) of this part;
    (3) A letter identifying the performance standard under which the 
packaging design type has been successfully tested, as follows:
    (i) X--for packagings meeting Packing Group I, II and III tests;
    (ii) Y--for packagings meeting Packing Group II and III tests; or
    (iii) Z--for packagings only meeting Packing Group III tests;
    (4) A designation of the specific gravity or mass for which the 
packaging design type has been tested, as follows:
    (i) For packagings without inner packagings intended to contain 
liquids, the designation shall be the specific gravity rounded down to 
the first decimal but may be omitted when the specific gravity does not 
exceed 1.2; and
    (ii) For packagings intended to contain solids or inner packagings, 
the designation shall be the maximum gross mass in kilograms;
    (5)(i) For single and composite packagings intended to contain 
liquids, the test pressure in kilopascals rounded down to the nearest 10 
kPa of the hydrostatic pressure test that the packaging design type has 
successfully passed;
    (ii) For packagings intended to contain solids or inner packagings, 
the letter ``S'';
    (6) The last two digits of the year of manufacture. Packagings of 
types 1H and 3H shall also be marked with the month of manufacture in 
any appropriate manner; this may be marked on the packaging in a 
different place from the remainder of the markings;
    (7) The state authorizing allocation of the mark. The letters `USA' 
indicate that the packaging is manufactured and marked in the United 
States in compliance with the provisions of this subchapter;
    (8) The name and address or symbol of the manufacturer or the 
approval agency certifying compliance with subpart L and subpart M of 
this part. Symbols, if used, must be registered with the Associate 
Administrator;
    (9) For metal or plastic drums or jerricans intended for reuse or 
reconditioning as single packagings or the outer packagings of a 
composite packaging, the thickness of the packaging material, expressed 
in mm (rounded to the nearest 0.1 mm), as follows:
    (i) Metal drums or jerricans must be marked with the nominal 
thickness of the metal used in the body. The marked nominal thickness 
must not exceed the minimum thickness of the steel used by more than the 
thickness tolerance stated in ISO Standard 3574. (See appendix C of this 
part.) The unit of measure is not required to be marked. When the 
nominal thickness of either head of a metal drum is thinner than that of 
the body, the nominal thickness of the top head, body, and bottom head 
must be marked (eg., ``1.0-1.2-1.0'' or ``0.9-1.0-1.0'').
    (ii) Plastic drums or jerricans must be marked with the minimum 
thickness of the packaging material. Minimum thicknesses of plastic must 
be as determined in accordance with Sec. 173.28(b)(4). The unit of 
measure is not required to be marked;
    (10) In addition to the markings prescribed in paragraphs (a)(1) 
through (a)(9) of this section, every new metal drum having a capacity 
greater than 100 L must bear the marks described in paragraphs (a)(1) 
through (a)(6), and (a)(9)(i) of this section, in a permanent form, on 
the bottom. The markings on the top head or side of these packagings 
need not be permanent, and need not include the thickness mark described 
in paragraph (a)(9) of this section. This marking indicates a drum's 
characteristics at the time it was manufactured, and the information in 
paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(6) of this section that is marked on the 
top head or side must be the same as the information in paragraphs 
(a)(1) through (a)(6) of this section permanently marked by the original 
manufacturer on the bottom of the drum; and

[[Page 946]]

    (11) Rated capacity of the packaging expressed in liters may be 
marked.
    (b) For a packaging with a removable head, the markings may not be 
applied only to the removable head.
    (c) Marking of reconditioned packagings. (1) If a packaging is 
reconditioned, it shall be marked by the reconditioner near the marks 
required in paragraphs (a)(1) through (6) of this section with the 
following additional information:
    (i) The name of the country in which the reconditioning was 
performed (in the United States, use the letters ``USA'');
    (ii) The name and address or symbol of the reconditioner. Symbols, 
if used, must be registered with the Associate Administrator;
    (iii) The last two digits of the year of reconditioning;
    (iv) The letter ``R''; and
    (v) For every packaging successfully passing a leakproofness test, 
the additional letter ``L''.
    (2) When, after reconditioning, the markings required by paragraph 
(a)(1) through (a)(5) of this section no longer appear on the top head 
or the side of the metal drum, the reconditioner must apply them in a 
durable form followed by the markings in paragraph (c)(1) of this 
section. These markings may identify a different performance capability 
than that for which the original design type had been tested and marked, 
but may not identify a greater performance capability. The markings 
applied in accordance with this paragraph may be different from those 
which are permanently marked on the bottom of a drum in accordance with 
paragraph (a)(10) of this section.
    (d) Marking of remanufactured packagings. For remanufactured metal 
drums, if there is no change to the packaging type and no replacement or 
removal of integral structural components, the required markings need 
not be permanent (e.g., embossed). Every other remanufactured drum must 
bear the marks required in paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(6) of this 
section in a permanent form (e.g., embossed) on the top head or side. If 
the metal thickness marking required in paragraph (a)(9)(i) of this 
section does not appear on the bottom of the drum, or if it is no longer 
valid, the remanufacturer also must mark this information in permanent 
form.
    (e) The following are examples of symbols and required markings:
    (1) The United Nations symbol is:
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.086
    
    (2) Examples of markings for a new packaging are as follows:
    (i) For a fiberboard box designed to contain an inner packaging:
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.087
    

(as in Sec. 178.503 (a)(1) through (a)(9) of this subpart).
    (ii) For a steel drum designed to contain liquids:
    [GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.088
    

(as in Sec. 178.503 (a)(1) through (a)(10) of this subpart).
    (iii) For a steel drum to transport solids or inner packagings:

[[Page 947]]

[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.089


(as in Sec. 178.503 (a)(1) through (a)(8) of this subpart).
    (3) Examples of markings for reconditioned packagings are as 
follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC02MR91.090


(as in Sec. 178.503(c)(1)).

[Amdt. 178-97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66284, 
Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 178-102, 59 FR 28493, June 2, 1994; Amdt. 178-106, 
59 FR 67520, 67521, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 178-107, 60 FR 26806, May 18, 
1995; 62 FR 51561, Oct. 1, 1997; 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 
61016, Sept. 27, 2002]

    Effective Date Note: At 67 FR 53143, Aug. 14, 2002, Sec. 178.503 was 
amended by adding paragraph (f), effective Oct. 1, 2002. At 67 FR 54967, 
Aug. 27, 2002, the effective date was corrected to Feb. 14, 2003. For 
the convenience of the user, the added text is set forth as follows:

Sec. 178.503  Marking of packagings.

                                * * * * *

    (f) A manufacturer must mark every UN specification package 
represented as manufactured to meet the requirements of Sec. 178.609 for 
packaging of infectious substances with the marks specified in this 
section. The markings must be durable, legible, and must be readily 
visible, as specified in Sec. 178.3(a). An infectious substance 
packaging that successfully passes the tests conforming to the UN 
standard must be marked as follows:
    (1) The United Nations symbol as illustrated in paragraph (e) of 
this section.
    (2) The code designating the type of packaging and material of 
construction according to the identification codes for packagings 
specified in Sec. 178.502.
    (3) The text ``CLASS 6.2''.
    (4) The last two digits of the year of manufacture of the packaging.
    (5) The country authorizing the allocation of the mark. The letters 
``USA'' indicate the packaging is manufactured and marked in the United 
States in compliance with the provisions of this subchapter.
    (6) The name and address or symbol of the manufacturer or the 
approval agency certifying compliance with subparts L and M of this 
part. Symbols, if used, must be registered with the Associate 
Administrator for Hazardous Materials Safety.
    (7) For packagings meeting the requirements of Sec. 178.609(i)(3), 
the letter ``U'' must be inserted immediately following the marking 
designating the type of packaging and material required in paragraph 
(f)(2) of this section.



Sec. 178.504  Standards for steel drums.

    (a) The following are identification codes for steel drums:
    (1) 1A1 for a non-removable head steel drum; and
    (2) 1A2 for a removable head steel drum.
    (b) Construction requirements for steel drums are as follows:
    (1) Body and heads must be constructed of steel sheet of suitable 
type and adequate thickness in relation to the capacity and intended use 
of the drum. Minimum thickness and marking requirements in 
Secs. 173.28(b)(4) and 178.503(a)(9) of this subchapter apply to drums 
intended for reuse.
    (2) Body seams must be welded on drums designed to contain more than 
40 L (11 gallons) of liquids. Body seams must be mechanically seamed or 
welded on drums intended to contain only solids or 40 L (11 gallons) or 
less of liquids.
    (3) Chimes must be mechanically seamed or welded. Separate 
reinforcing rings may be applied.
    (4) The body of a drum of a capacity greater than 60 L (16 gallons) 
may have at least two expanded rolling hoops or two separate rolling 
hoops. If there are separate rolling hoops, they must be fitted tightly 
on the body and so secured that they cannot shift. Rolling hoops may not 
be spot-welded.
    (5) Openings for filling, emptying and venting in the bodies or 
heads of non-removable head (1A1) drums may not exceed 7.0 cm (3 inches) 
in diameter. Drums with larger openings are considered to be of the 
removable head type

[[Page 948]]

(1A2). Closures for openings in the bodies and heads of drums must be so 
designed and applied that they will remain secure and leakproof under 
normal conditions of transport. Closure flanges may be mechanically 
seamed or welded in place. Gaskets or other sealing elements must be 
used with closures unless the closure is inherently leakproof.
    (6) Closure devices for removable head drums must be so designed and 
applied that they will remain secure and drums will remain leakproof 
under normal conditions of transport. Gaskets or other sealing elements 
must be used with all removable heads.
    (7) If materials used for body, heads, closures, and fittings are 
not in themselves compatible with the contents to be transported, 
suitable internal protective coatings or treatments must be applied. 
These coatings or treatments must retain their protective properties 
under normal conditions of transport.
    (8) Maximum capacity of drum: 450 L (119 gallons).
    (9) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882 pounds).

[Amdt. 178-97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66284, 
Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 178-110, 60 FR 49111, Sept. 21, 1995]



Sec. 178.505  Standards for aluminum drums.

    (a) The following are the identification codes for aluminum drums:
    (1) 1B1 for a non-removable head aluminum drum; and
    (2) 1B2 for a removable head aluminum drum.
    (b) Construction requirements for aluminum drums are as follows:
    (1) Body and heads must be constructed of aluminum at least 99 
percent pure or an aluminum base alloy. Material must be of suitable 
type and adequate thickness in relation to the capacity and the intended 
use of the drum. Minimum thickness and marking requirements in 
Secs. 173.28(b)(4) and 178.503(a)(9) of this subchapter apply to drums 
intended for reuse.
    (2) All seams must be welded. Chime seams, if any, must be 
reinforced by the application of separate reinforcing rings.
    (3) The body of a drum of a capacity greater than 60 L (16 gallons) 
may have at least two expanded rolling hoops or two separate rolling 
hoops. If there are separate rolling hoops, the hoops must be fitted 
tightly on the body and so secured that they cannot shift. Rolling hoops 
may not be spot-welded.
    (4) Openings for filling, emptying, or venting in the bodies or 
heads of non-removable head (1B1) drums may not exceed 7.0 cm (3 inches) 
in diameter. Drums with larger openings are considered to be of the 
removable head type (1B2). Closures for openings in the bodies and heads 
of drums must be so designed and applied that they will remain secure 
and leakproof under normal conditions of transport. Closure flanges may 
be welded in place so that the weld provides a leakproof seam. Gaskets 
or other sealing elements must be used with closures unless the closure 
is inherently leakproof.
    (5) Closure devices for removable head drums must be so designed and 
applied that they remain secure and drums remain leakproof under normal 
conditions of transport. Gaskets or other sealing elements must be used 
with all removable heads.
    (6) Maximum capacity of drum: 450 L (119 gallons).
    (7) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882 pounds).

[Amdt. 178-97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66284, 
Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 178-102, 59 FR 28494, June 2, 1994]



Sec. 178.506  Standards for metal drums other than steel or aluminum.

    (a) The following are the identification codes for metal drums other 
than steel or aluminum:
    (1) 1N1 for a non-removable head metal drum; and
    (2) 1N2 for a removable head metal drum.
    (b) Construction requirements for metal drums other than steel or 
aluminum are as follows:
    (1) Body and heads must be constructed of metal (other than steel or 
aluminum) of suitable type and adequate thickness in relation to the 
capacity and the intended use of the drum. Minimum thickness and marking 
requirements in Secs. 173.28(b)(4) and 178.503(a)(9) of this subchapter 
apply to drums intended for reuse.

[[Page 949]]

    (2) All seams must be welded. Chime seams, if any, must be 
reinforced by the application of separate reinforcing rings.
    (3) The body of a drum of a capacity greater than 60 L (16 gallons) 
may have at least two expanded rolling hoops or two separate rolling 
hoops. If there are separate rolling hoops, the hoops must be fitted 
tightly on the body and so secured that they cannot shift. Rolling hoops 
may not be spot-welded.
    (4) Openings for filling, emptying, or venting in the bodies or 
heads of non-removable head (1N1) drums may not exceed 7.0 cm (3 inches) 
in diameter. Drums with larger openings are considered to be of the 
removable head type (1N2). Closures for openings in the bodies and heads 
of drums must be so designed and applied that they will remain secure 
and leakproof under normal conditions of transport. Closure flanges may 
be welded in place so that the weld provides a leakproof seam. Gaskets 
or other sealing elements must be used with closures unless the closure 
is inherently leakproof.
    (5) Closure devices for removable head drums must be so designed and 
applied that they remain secure and drums remain leakproof under normal 
conditions of transport. Gaskets or other sealing elements must be used 
with all removable heads.
    (6) Maximum capacity of drum: 450 L (119 gallons).
    (7) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882 pounds).

[Amdt. 178-97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66285, 
Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 178-102, 59 FR 28494, June 2, 1994]



Sec. 178.507  Standards for plywood drums.

    (a) The identification code for a plywood drum is 1D.
    (b) Construction requirements for plywood drums are as follows:
    (1) The wood used must be well-seasoned, commercially dry and free 
from any defect likely to lessen the effectiveness of the drum for the 
purpose intended. A material other than plywood, of at least equivalent 
strength and durability, may be used for the manufacture of the heads.
    (2) At least two-ply plywood must be used for the body and at least 
three-ply plywood for the heads; the plies must be firmly glued 
together, with their grains crosswise.
    (3) The body and heads of the drum and their joints must be of a 
design appropriate to the capacity of the drum and its intended use.
    (4) In order to prevent sifting of the contents, lids must be lined 
with kraft paper or some other equivalent material which must be 
securely fastened to the lid and extend to the outside along its full 
circumference.
    (5) Maximum capacity of drum: 250 L (66 gallons).
    (6) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882 pounds).

[Amdt. 178-97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 57 FR 45465, 
Oct. 1, 1992]



Sec. 178.508  Standards for fiber drums.

    (a) The identification code for a fiber drum is 1G.
    (b) Construction requirements for fiber drums are as follows:
    (1) The body of the drum must be constructed of multiple plies of 
heavy paper or fiberboard (without corrugations) firmly glued or 
laminated together and may include one or more protective layers of 
bitumen, waxed kraft paper, metal foil, plastic material, or similar 
materials.
    (2) Heads must be of natural wood, fiberboard, metal, plywood, 
plastics, or other suitable material and may include one or more 
protective layers of bitumen, waxed kraft paper, metal foil, plastic 
material, or similar material.
    (3) The body and heads of the drum and their joints must be of a 
design appropriate to the capacity and intended use of the drum.
    (4) The assembled packaging must be sufficiently water-resistant so 
as not to delaminate under normal conditions of transport.
    (5) Maximum capacity of drum: 450 L (119 gallons).
    (6) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882 pounds).

[Amdt. 178-97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 178-106, 
59 FR 67521, Dec. 29, 1994]



Sec. 178.509  Standards for plastic drums and jerricans.

    (a) The following are identification codes for plastic drums and 
jerricans:

[[Page 950]]

    (1) 1H1 for a non-removable head plastic drum;
    (2) 1H2 for a removable head plastic drum;
    (3) 3H1 for a non-removable head jerrican; and
    (4) 3H2 for a removable head jerrican.
    (b) Construction requirements for plastic drums and jerricans are as 
follows:
    (1) The packaging must be manufactured from suitable plastic 
material and be of adequate strength in relation to its capacity and 
intended use. No used material other than production residues or regrind 
from the same manufacturing process may be used unless approved by the 
Associate Administrator. The packaging must be adequately resistant to 
aging and to degradation caused either by the substance contained or by 
ultra-violet radiation. Any permeation of the substance contained may 
not constitute a danger under normal conditions of transport.
    (2) If protection against ultra-violet radiation is required, it 
must be provided by the addition of carbon black or other suitable 
pigments or inhibitors. These additives must be compatible with the 
contents and remain effective throughout the life of the packaging. 
Where use is made of carbon black, pigments or inhibitors other than 
those used in the manufacture of the design type, retesting may be 
omitted if the carbon black content does not exceed 2 percent by mass or 
if the pigment content does not exceed 3 percent by mass; the content of 
inhibitors of ultra-violet radiation is not limited.
    (3) Additives serving purposes other than protection against ultra-
violet radiation may be included in the composition of the plastic 
material provided they do not adversely affect the chemical and physical 
properties of the packaging material.
    (4) The wall thickness at every point of the packaging must be 
appropriate to its capacity and its intended use, taking into account 
the stresses to which each point is liable to be exposed. Minimum 
thickness and marking requirements in Secs. 173.28(b)(4) and 
178.503(a)(9) of this subchapter apply to drums intended for reuse.
    (5) Openings for filling, emptying and venting in the bodies or 
heads of non-removable head (1H1) drums and jerricans (3H1) may not 
exceed 7.0 cm (3 inches) in diameter. Drums and jerricans with larger 
openings are considered to be of the removable head type (1H2 and 3H2). 
Closures for openings in the bodies or heads of drums and jerricans must 
be so designed and applied that they remain secure and leakproof under 
normal conditions of transport. Gaskets or other sealing elements must 
be used with closures unless the closure is inherently leakproof.
    (6) Closure devices for removable head drums and jerricans must be 
so designed and applied that they remain secure and leakproof under 
normal conditions of transport. Gaskets must be used with all removable 
heads unless the drum or jerrican design is such that when the removable 
head is properly secured, the drum or jerrican is inherently leakproof.
    (7) Maximum capacity of drums and jerricans: 1H1, 1H2: 450 L (119 
gallons); 3H1, 3H2: 60 L (16 gallons).
    (8) Maximum net mass: 1H1, 1H2: 400 kg (882 pounds); 3H1, 3H2: 120 
kg (265 pounds).

[Amdt. 178-97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 178-102, 
59 FR 28494, June 2, 1994; 64 FR 10782, Mar. 5, 1999; 66 FR 45386, Aug. 
28, 2001]



Sec. 178.510  Standards for wooden barrels.

    (a) The following are identification codes for wooden barrels:
    (1) 2C1 for a bung type wooden barrel; and
    (2) 2C2 for a slack type (removable head) wooden barrel.
    (b) Construction requirements for wooden barrels are as follows:
    (1) The wood used must be of good quality, straight-grained, well-
seasoned and free from knots, bark, rotten wood, sapwood or other 
defects likely to lessen the effectiveness of the barrel for the purpose 
intended.
    (2) The body and heads must be of a design appropriate to the 
capacity and intended use of the barrel.
    (3) Staves and heads must be sawn or cleft with the grain so that no 
annual ring extends over more than half the thickness of a stave or 
head.

[[Page 951]]

    (4) Barrel hoops must be of steel or iron of good quality. The hoops 
of 2C2 barrels may be of a suitable hardwood.
    (5) For wooden barrels 2C1, the diameter of the bung-hole may not 
exceed half the width of the stave in which it is placed.
    (6) For wooden barrels 2C2, heads must fit tightly into crozes.
    (7) Maximum capacity of barrel: 250 L (66 gallons).
    (8) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882 pounds).



Sec. 178.511  Standards for aluminum and steel jerricans.

    (a) The following are identification codes for aluminum and steel 
jerricans:
    (1) 3A1 for a non-removable head steel jerrican;
    (2) 3A2 for a removable head steel jerrican;
    (3) 3B1 for a non-removable head aluminum jerrican; and
    (4) 3B2 for a removable head aluminum jerrican.
    (b) Construction requirements for aluminum and steel jerricans are 
as follows:
    (1) For steel jerricans the body and heads must be constructed of 
steel sheet of suitable type and adequate thickness in relation to the 
capacity of the jerrican and its intended use. Minimum thickness and 
marking requirements in Secs. 173.28(b)(4) and 178.503(a)(9) of this 
subchapter apply to jerricans intended for reuse.
    (2) For aluminum jerricans the body and heads must be constructed of 
aluminum at least 99% pure or of an aluminum base alloy. Material must 
be of a type and of adequate thickness in relation to the capacity of 
the jerrican and to its intended use.
    (3) Chimes of all jerricans must be mechanically seamed or welded. 
Body seams of jerricans intended to carry more than 40 L (11 gallons) of 
liquid must be welded. Body seams of jerricans intended to carry 40 L 
(11 gallons) or less must be mechanically seamed or welded.
    (4) Openings in jerricans (3A1) may not exceed 7.0 cm (3 inches) in 
diameter. Jerricans with larger openings are considered to be of the 
removable head type. Closures must be so designed that they remain 
secure and leakproof under normal conditions of transport. Gaskets or 
other sealing elements must be used with closures, unless the closure is 
inherently leakproof.
    (5) If materials used for body, heads, closures and fittings are not 
in themselves compatible with the contents to be transported, suitable 
internal protective coatings or treatments must be applied. These 
coatings or treatments must retain their protective properties under 
normal conditions of transport.
    (6) Maximum capacity of jerrican: 60 L (16 gallons).
    (7) Maximum net mass: 120 kg (265 pounds).

[Amdt. 178-97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 178-102, 
59 FR 28494, June 2, 1994; Amdt. 178-119, 62 FR 24742, May 6, 1997]



Sec. 178.512  Standards for steel or aluminum boxes.

    (a) The following are identification codes for steel or aluminum 
boxes:
    (1) 4A for a steel box; and
    (2) 4B for an aluminum box.
    (b) Construction requirements for steel or aluminum boxes are as 
follows:
    (1) The strength of the metal and the construction of the box must 
be appropriate to the capacity and intended use of the box.
    (2) Boxes must be lined with fiberboard or felt packing pieces or 
must have an inner liner or coating of suitable material in accordance 
with subpart C of part 173 of this subchapter. If a double seamed metal 
liner is used, steps must be taken to prevent the ingress of materials, 
particularly explosives, into the recesses of the seams.
    (3) Closures may be of any suitable type, and must remain secure 
under normal conditions of transport.
    (4) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882 pounds).

[Amdt. 178-97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 178-106, 
59 FR 67521, Dec. 29, 1994]



Sec. 178.513  Standards for boxes of natural wood.

    (a) The following are the identification codes for boxes of natural 
wood:
    (1) 4C1 for an ordinary box; and
    (2) 4C2 for a box with sift-proof walls.
    (b) Construction requirements for boxes of natural wood are as 
follows:

[[Page 952]]

    (1) The wood used must be well-seasoned, commercially dry and free 
from defects that would materially lessen the strength of any part of 
the box. The strength of the material used and the method of 
construction must be appropriate to the capacity and intended use of the 
box. The tops and bottoms may be made of water-resistant reconstituted 
wood such as hard board, particle board or other suitable type.
    (2) Fastenings must be resistant to vibration experienced under 
normal conditions of transportation. End grain nailing must be avoided 
whenever practicable. Joints which are likely to be highly stressed must 
be made using clenched or annular ring nails or equivalent fastenings.
    (3) Each part of the 4C2 box must be one piece or equivalent. Parts 
are considered equivalent to one piece when one of the following methods 
of glued assembly is used: Linderman joint, tongue and groove joint, 
ship lap or rabbet joint, or butt joint with at least two corrugated 
metal fasteners at each joint.
    (4) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882 pounds).

[Amdt. 178-97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 178-106, 
59 FR 67521, Dec. 29, 1994]



Sec. 178.514  Standards for plywood boxes.

    (a) The identification code for a plywood box is 4D.
    (b) Construction requirements for plywood boxes are as follows:
    (1) Plywood used must be at least 3 ply. It shall be made from well-
seasoned rotary cut, sliced or sawn veneer, commercially dry and free 
from defects that would materially lessen the strength of the box. The 
strength of the material used and the method of construction must be 
appropriate to the capacity and intended use of the box. All adjacent 
plies must be glued with water-resistant adhesive. Other suitable 
materials may be used together with plywood in the construction of 
boxes. Boxes must be nailed or secured to corner posts or ends or 
assembled with other equally suitable devices.
    (2) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882 pounds).



Sec. 178.515  Standards for reconstituted wood boxes.

    (a) The identification code for a reconstituted wood box is 4F.
    (b) Construction requirements for reconstituted wood boxes are as 
follows:
    (1) The walls of boxes must be made of water-resistant, 
reconstituted wood such as hardboard, particle board, or other suitable 
type. The strength of the material used and the method of construction 
must be appropriate to the capacity of the boxes and their intended use.
    (2) Other parts of the box may be made of other suitable materials.
    (3) Boxes must be securely assembled by means of suitable devices.
    (4) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882 pounds).



Sec. 178.516  Standards for fiberboard boxes.

    (a) The identification code for a fiberboard box is 4G.
    (b) Construction requirements for fiberboard boxes are as follows:
    (1) Strong, solid or double-faced corrugated fiberboard (single or 
multi-wall) must be used, appropriate to the capacity and intended use 
of the box. The water resistance of the outer surface must be such that 
the increase in mass, as determined in a test carried out over a period 
of 30 minutes by the Cobb method of determining water absorption, is not 
greater than 155 g per square meter (0.0316 pounds per square foot)--see 
ISO International Standard 535. Fiberboard must have proper bending 
qualities. Fiberboard must be cut, creased without cutting through any 
thickness of fiberboard, and slotted so as to permit assembly without 
cracking, surface breaks, or undue bending. The fluting of corrugated 
fiberboard must be firmly glued to the facings.
    (2) The ends of boxes may have a wooden frame or be entirely of wood 
or other suitable material. Reinforcements of wooden battens or other 
suitable material may be used.
    (3) Manufacturing joints. (i) Manufacturing joints in the bodies of 
boxes must be--
    (A) Taped;
    (B) Lapped and glued; or
    (C) Lapped and stitched with metal staples.

[[Page 953]]

    (ii) Lapped joints must have an appropriate overlap.
    (4) Where closing is effected by gluing or taping, a water resistant 
adhesive must be used.
    (5) Boxes must be designed so as to provide a snug fit to the 
contents.
    (6) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882 pounds).

[Amdt. 178-97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, and amended by Amdt. 178-99, 
58 FR 51534, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 178-106, 59 FR 67521, Dec. 29, 1994]



Sec. 178.517  Standards for plastic boxes.

    (a) The following are identification codes for plastic boxes:
    (1) 4H1 for an expanded plastic box; and
    (2) 4H2 for a solid plastic box.
    (b) Construction requirements for plastic boxes are as follows:
    (1) The box must be manufactured from suitable plastic material and 
be of adequate strength in relation to its capacity and intended use. 
The box must be adequately resistant to aging and to degradation caused 
either by the substance contained or by ultra-violet radiation.
    (2) An expanded plastic box must consist of two parts made of a 
molded expanded plastic material: a bottom section containing cavities 
for the inner receptacles, and a top section covering and interlocking 
with the bottom section. The top and bottom sections must be so designed 
that the inner receptacles fit snugly. The closure cap for any inner 
receptacle may not be in contact with the inside of the top section of 
the box.
    (3) For transportation, an expanded plastic box must be closed with 
a self-adhesive tape having sufficient tensile strength to prevent the 
box from opening. The adhesive tape must be weather-resistant and its 
adhesive compatible with the expanded plastic material of the box. Other 
closing devices at least equally effective may be used.
    (4) For solid plastic boxes, protection against ultra-violet 
radiation, if required, must be provided by the addition of carbon black 
or other suitable pigments or inhibitors. These additives must be 
compatible with the contents and remain effective throughout the life of 
the box. Where use is made of carbon black pigment or inhibitors other 
than those used in the manufacture of the tested design type, retesting 
may be waived if the carbon black content does not exceed 2 percent by 
mass or if the pigment content does not exceed 3 percent by mass; the 
content of inhibitors of ultra-violet radiation is not limited.
    (5) Additives serving purposes other than protection against ultra-
violet radiation may be included in the composition of the plastic 
material if they do not adversely affect the material of the box. 
Addition of these additives does not change the design type.
    (6) Solid plastic boxes must have closure devices made of a suitable 
material of adequate strength and so designed as to prevent the box from 
unintentionally opening.
    (7) Maximum net mass 4H1: 60 kg (132 pounds); 4H2: 400 kg (882 
pounds).



Sec. 178.518  Standards for woven plastic bags.

    (a) The following are identification codes for woven plastic bags:
    (1) 5H1 for an unlined or non-coated woven plastic bag;
    (2) 5H2 for a sift-proof woven plastic bag; and
    (3) 5H3 for a water-resistant woven plastic bag.
    (b) Construction requirements for woven plastic fabric bags are as 
follows:
    (1) Bags must be made from stretched tapes or monofilaments of a 
suitable plastic material. The strength of the material used and the 
construction of the bag must be appropriate to the capacity and intended 
use of the bag.
    (2) If the fabric is woven flat, the bags must be made by sewing or 
some other method ensuring closure of the bottom and one side. If the 
fabric is tubular, the bag must be closed by sewing, weaving, or some 
other equally strong method of closure.
    (3) Bags, sift-proof, 5H2 must be made sift-proof by appropriate 
means such as use of paper or a plastic film bonded to the inner surface 
of the bag or one or more separate inner liners made of paper or plastic 
material.
    (4) Bags, water-resistant, 5H3: To prevent the entry of moisture, 
the bag must be made waterproof by appropriate means, such as separate 
inner

[[Page 954]]

liners of water-resistant paper (e.g., waxed kraft paper, double-tarred 
kraft paper or plastic-coated kraft paper), or plastic film bonded to 
the inner or outer surface of the bag, or one or more inner plastic 
liners.
    (5) Maximum net mass: 50 kg (110 pounds).

[Amdt. 178-97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, and amended by Amdt. 178-99, 
58 FR 51534, Oct. 1, 1993]



Sec. 178.519  Standards for plastic film bags.

    (a) The identification code for a plastic film bag is 5H4.
    (b) Construction requirements for plastic film bags are as follows:
    (1) Bags must be made of a suitable plastic material. The strength 
of the material used and the construction of the bag must be appropriate 
to the capacity and the intended use of the bag. Joints and closures 
must be capable of withstanding pressures and impacts liable to occur 
under normal conditions of transportation.
    (2) Maximum net mass: 50 kg (110 pounds).



Sec. 178.520  Standards for textile bags.

    (a) The following are identification codes for textile bags:
    (1) 5L1 for an unlined or non-coated textile bag;
    (2) 5L2 for a sift-proof textile bag; and
    (3) 5L3 for a water-resistant textile bag.
    (b) Construction requirements for textile bags are as follows:
    (1) The textiles used must be of good quality. The strength of the 
fabric and the construction of the bag must be appropriate to the 
capacity and intended use of the bag.
    (2) Bags, sift-proof, 5L2: The bag must be made sift-proof, by 
appropriate means, such as by the use of paper bonded to the inner 
surface of the bag by a water-resistant adhesive such as bitumen, 
plastic film bonded to the inner surface of the bag, or one or more 
inner liners made of paper or plastic material.
    (3) Bags, water-resistant, 5L3: To prevent entry of moisture, the 
bag must be made waterproof by appropriate means, such as by the use of 
separate inner liners of water-resistant paper (e.g., waxed kraft paper, 
tarred paper, or plastic-coated kraft paper), or plastic film bonded to 
the inner surface of the bag, or one or more inner liners made of 
plastic material or metalized film or foil.
    (4) Maximum net mass: 50 kg (110 pounds).

[Amdt. 178-97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66285, 
Dec. 20, 1991]



Sec. 178.521  Standards for paper bags.

    (a) The following are identification codes for paper bags:
    (1) 5M1 for a multi-wall paper bag; and
    (2) 5M2 for a multi-wall water-resistant paper bag.
    (b) Construction requirements for paper bags are as follows:
    (1) Bags must be made of a suitable kraft paper, or of an equivalent 
paper with at least three plies. The strength of the paper and the 
construction of the bag must be appropriate to the capacity and intended 
use of the bag. Seams and closures must be sift-proof.
    (2) Paper bags 5M2: To prevent the entry of moisture, a bag of four 
plies or more must be made waterproof by the use of either a water-
resistant ply as one of the two outermost plies or a water-resistant 
barrier made of a suitable protective material between the two outermost 
plies. A 5M2 bag of three plies must be made waterproof by the use of a 
water-resistant ply as the outermost ply. When there is danger of the 
lading reacting with moisture, or when it is packed damp, a waterproof 
ply or barrier, such as double-tarred kraft paper, plastics-coated kraft 
paper, plastics film bonded to the inner surface of the bag, or one or 
more inner plastics liners, must also be placed next to the substance. 
Seams and closures must be waterproof.
    (3) Maximum net mass: 50 kg (110 pounds).

[Amdt. 178-97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66285, 
Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 178-106, 59 FR 67521, Dec. 29, 1994]

[[Page 955]]



Sec. 178.522  Standards for composite packagings with inner plastic receptacles.

    (a) The following are the identification codes for composite 
packagings with inner plastic receptacles:
    (1) 6HA1 for a plastic receptacle within a protective steel drum;
    (2) 6HA2 for a plastic receptacle within a protective steel crate or 
box;
    (3) 6HB1 for a plastic receptacle within a protective aluminum drum.
    (4) 6HB2 for a plastic receptacle within a protective aluminum crate 
or box.
    (5) 6HC for a plastic receptacle within a protective wooden box.
    (6) 6HD1 for a plastic receptacle within a protective plywood drum;
    (7) 6HD2 for a plastic receptacle within a protective plywood box;
    (8) 6HG1 for a plastic receptacle within a protective fiber drum;
    (9) 6HG2 for a plastic receptacle within a protective fiberboard 
box;
    (10) 6HH1 for a plastic receptacle within a protective plastic drum; 
and
    (11) 6HH2 for a plastic receptacle within a protective plastic box.
    (b) Construction requirements for composite packagings with inner 
receptacles of plastic are as follows:
    (1) Inner receptacles must be constructed under the applicable 
construction requirements prescribed in Sec. 178.509(b) (1) through (7) 
of this subpart.
    (2) The inner plastic receptacle must fit snugly inside the outer 
packaging, which must be free of any projections which may abrade the 
plastic material.
    (3) Outer packagings must be constructed as follows:
    (i) 6HA1 or 6HB1: Protective packaging must conform to the 
requirements for steel drums in Sec. 178.504(b) of this subpart, or 
aluminum drums in Sec. 178.505(b) of this subpart.
    (ii) 6HA2 or 6HB2: Protective packagings with steel or aluminum 
crate must conform to the requirements for steel or aluminum boxes found 
in Sec. 178.512(b) of this subpart.
    (iii) 6HC protective packaging must conform to the requirements for 
wooden boxes in Sec. 178.513(b) of this subpart.
    (iv) 6HD1: Protective packaging must conform to the requirements for 
plywood drums, in Sec. 178.507(b) of this subpart.
    (v) 6HD2: Protective packaging must conform to the requirements of 
plywood boxes, in Sec. 178.514(b) of this subpart.
    (vi) 6HG1: Protective packaging must conform to the requirements for 
fiber drums, in Sec. 178.508(b) of this subpart.
    (vii) 6HG2: protective packaging must conform to the requirements 
for fiberboard boxes, in Sec. 178.516(b) of this subpart.
    (viii) 6HH1: Protective packaging must conform to the requirements 
for plastic drums, in Sec. 178.509(b).
    (ix) 6HH2: Protective packaging must conform to the requirements for 
plastic boxes, in Sec. 178.517(b).
    (4) Maximum capacity of inner receptacles is as follows: 6HA1, 6HB1, 
6HD1, 6HG1, 6HH1--250 L (66 gallons); 6HA2, 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2, 6HH2-
-60 L (16 gallons).
    (5) Maximum net mass is as follows: 6HA1, 6HB1, 6HD1, 6HG1, 6HH1--
400kg (882 pounds); 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2, 6HH2--75 kg (165 pounds).

[Amdt. 178-97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 178-106, 
59 FR 67521, Dec. 29, 1994]



Sec. 178.523  Standards for composite packagings with inner glass, porcelain, or stoneware receptacles.

    (a) The following are identification codes for composite packagings 
with inner receptacles of glass, porcelain, or stoneware:
    (1) 6PA1 for glass, porcelain, or stoneware receptacles within a 
protective steel drum;
    (2) 6PA2 for glass, porcelain, or stoneware receptacles within a 
protective steel crate or box;
    (3) 6PB1 for glass, porcelain, or stoneware receptacles within a 
protective aluminum drum;
    (4) 6PB2 for glass, porcelain, or stoneware receptacles within a 
protective aluminum crate or box;
    (5) 6PC for glass, porcelain, or stoneware receptacles within a 
protective wooden box;
    (6) 6PD1 for glass, porcelain, or stoneware receptacles within a 
protective plywood drum;
    (7) 6PD2 for glass, porcelain, or stoneware receptacles within a 
protective wickerwork hamper;

[[Page 956]]

    (8) 6PG1 for glass, porcelain, or stoneware receptacles within a 
protective fiber drum;
    (9) 6PG2 for glass, porcelain, or stoneware receptacles within a 
protective fiberboard box;
    (10) 6PH1 for glass, porcelain, or stoneware receptacles within a 
protective expanded plastic packaging; and
    (11) 6PH2 for glass, porcelain, or stoneware receptacles within a 
protective solid plastic packaging.
    (b) Construction requirements for composite packagings with inner 
receptacles of glass, porcelain, or stoneware are as follows:
    (1) Inner receptacles must conform to the following requirements:
    (i) Receptacles must be of suitable form (cylindrical or pear-
shaped), be made of good quality materials free from any defect that 
could impair their strength, and be firmly secured in the outer 
packaging.
    (ii) Any part of a closure likely to come into contact with the 
contents of the receptacle must be resistant to those contents. Closures 
must be fitted so as to be leakproof and secured to prevent any 
loosening during transportation. Vented closures must conform to 
Sec. 173.24(f) of this subchapter.
    (2) Protective packagings must conform to the following 
requirements:
    (i) For receptacles with protective steel drum 6PAl, the drum must 
comply with Sec. 178.504(b) of this subpart. However, the removable lid 
required for this type of packaging may be in the form of a cap.
    (ii) For receptacles with protective packaging of steel crate or 
steel box 6PA2, the protective packaging must conform to the following:
    (A) Section 178.512(b) of this subpart.
    (B) In the case of cylindrical receptacles, the protective packaging 
must, when upright, rise above the receptacle and its closure; and
    (C) If the protective crate surrounds a pear-shaped receptacle and 
is of matching shape, the protective packaging must be fitted with a 
protective cover (cap).
    (iii) For receptacles with protective aluminum drum 6PB1, the 
requirements of Sec. 178.505(b) of this subpart apply to the protective 
packaging.
    (iv) For receptacles with protective aluminum box or crate 6PB2, the 
requirements of Sec. 178.512(b) of this subpart apply to the protective 
packaging.
    (v) For receptacles with protective wooden box 6PC, the requirements 
of Sec. 178.513(b) of this subpart apply to the protective packaging.
    (vi) For receptacles with protective plywood drum 6PD1, the 
requirements of Sec. 178.507(b) of this subpart apply to the protective 
packaging.
    (vii) For receptacles with protective wickerwork hamper 6PD2, the 
wickerwork hamper must be properly made with material of good quality. 
The hamper must be fitted with a protective cover (cap) so as to prevent 
damage to the receptacle.
    (viii) For receptacles with protective fiber drum 6PG1, the drum 
must conform to the requirements of Sec. 178.508(b) of this subpart.
    (ix) For receptacles with protective fiberboard box 6PG2, the 
requirements of Sec. 178.516(b) of this subpart apply to the protective 
packaging.
    (x) For receptacles with protective solid plastic or expanded 
plastic packaging 6PH1 or 6PH2, the requirements of Sec. 178.517(b) of 
this subpart apply to the protective packaging. Solid protective plastic 
packaging must be manufactured from high-density polyethylene from some 
other comparable plastic material. The removable lid required for this 
type of packaging may be a cap.
    (3) Quantity limitations are as follows:
    (i) Maximum net capacity for packaging for liquids: 60 L (16 
gallons).
    (ii) Maximum net mass for packagings for solids: 75 kg (165 pounds).



         Subpart M--Testing of Non-bulk Packagings and Packages

    Source: Amdt. 178-97, 55 FR 52723, Dec. 21, 1990, unless otherwise 
noted.

[[Page 957]]



Sec. 178.600  Purpose and scope.

    This subpart prescribes certain testing requirements for 
performance-oriented packagings identified in subpart L of this part.

[Amdt. 178-97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, and amended by Amdt. 178-99, 
58 FR 51534, Oct. 1, 1993]



Sec. 178.601  General requirements.

    (a) General. The test procedures prescribed in this subpart are 
intended to ensure that packages containing hazardous materials can 
withstand normal conditions of transportation and are considered minimum 
requirements. Each packaging must be manufactured and assembled so as to 
be capable of successfully passing the prescribed tests and of 
conforming to the requirements of Sec. 173.24 of this subchapter at all 
times while in transportation.
    (b) Responsibility. It is the responsibility of the packaging 
manufacturer to assure that each package is capable of passing the 
prescribed tests. To the extent that a package assembly function, 
including final closure, is performed by the person who offers a 
hazardous material for transportation, that person is responsible for 
performing the function in accordance with Secs. 173.22 and 178.2 of 
this subchapter.
    (c) Definitions. For the purpose of this subpart:
    (1) Design qualification testing is the performance of the drop, 
leakproofness, hydrostatic pressure, stacking, and cooperage tests, as 
applicable, prescribed in Secs. 178.603, 178.604, 178.605, 178.606, or 
Sec. 178.607, respectively, for each new or different packaging, at the 
start of production of that packaging.
    (2) Periodic retesting is the performance of the drop, 
leakproofness, hydrostatic pressure, and stacking tests, as applicable, 
prescribed in Secs. 178.603, 178.604, 178.605, or Sec. 178.606, 
respectively, at the frequency specified in Sec. 178.601(e) of this 
subpart.
    (3) Production testing is the performance of the leakproofness test 
prescribed in Sec. 178.604 of this subpart on each single or composite 
packaging intended to contain a liquid.
    (4) A different packaging is one that differs (i.e. is not 
identical) from a previously produced packaging in structural design, 
size, material of construction, wall thickness or manner of construction 
but does not include:
    (i) A packaging which differs only in surface treatment;
    (ii) A combination packaging which differs only in that the outer 
packaging has been successfully tested with different inner packagings. 
A variety of such inner packagings may be assembled in this outer 
packaging without further testing;
    (iii) A plastic packaging which differs only with regard to 
additives which conform to Sec. 178.509(b)(3) or Sec. 178.517(b) (4) or 
(5) of this part;
    (iv) A combination packaging with inner packagings conforming to the 
provisions of paragraph (g) of this section;
    (v) Packagings which differ from the design type only in their 
lesser design height; or
    (vi) For a steel drum, variations in design elements which do not 
constitute a different design type under the provisions of paragraph 
(g)(8) of this section.
    (d) Design qualification testing. The packaging manufacturer shall 
achieve successful test results for the design qualification testing at 
the start of production of each new or different packaging.
    (e) Periodic retesting. The packaging manufacturer shall achieve 
successful test results for the periodic retesting at intervals 
established by the manufacturer of sufficient frequency to ensure that 
each packaging produced by the manufacturer is capable of passing the 
design qualification tests. Changes in retest frequency are subject to 
the approval of the Associate Administrator. For single or composite 
packagings, the periodic retests must be conducted at least once every 
12 months. For combination packagings, the periodic retests must be 
conducted at least once every 24 months.
    (f) Test samples. The manufacturer shall conduct the design 
qualification and periodic tests prescribed in this subpart using random 
samples of packagings, in the numbers specified in the appropriate test 
section. In addition, the leakproofness test, when required, shall be 
performed on each packaging

[[Page 958]]

produced by the manufacturer, and each packaging prior to reuse under 
Sec. 173.28 of this subchapter, by the reconditioner.
    (g) Selective testing. The selective testing of packagings that 
differ only in minor respects from a tested type is permitted as 
described in this section. For air transport, packagings must comply 
with Sec. 173.27(c)(1) and (c)(2) of this subchapter.
    (1) Selective testing of combination packagings. Variation 1. 
Variations are permitted in inner packagings of a tested combination 
package, without further testing of the package, provided an equivalent 
level of performance is maintained, as follows:
    (i) Inner packagings of equivalent or smaller size may be used 
provided--
    (A) The inner packagings are of similar design to the tested inner 
packagings (i.e. shape--round, rectangular, etc.);
    (B) The material of construction of the inner packagings (glass, 
plastic, metal, etc.) offers resistance to impact and stacking forces 
equal to or greater than that of the originally tested inner packaging;
    (C) The inner packagings have the same or smaller openings and the 
closure is of similar design (e.g., screw cap, friction lid, etc.);
    (D) Sufficient additional cushioning material is used to take up 
void spaces and to prevent significant movement of the inner packagings;
    (E) Inner packagings are oriented within the outer packaging in the 
same manner as in the tested package; and,
    (F) The gross mass of the package does not exceed that originally 
tested.
    (ii) A lesser number of the tested inner packagings, or of the 
alternative types of inner packagings identified in paragraph (g)(1)(i) 
of this section, may be used provided sufficient cushioning is added to 
fill void space(s) and to prevent significant movement of the inner 
packagings.
    (2) Selective testing of combination packagings. Variation 2. 
Articles or inner packagings of any type, for solids or liquids, may be 
assembled and transported without testing in an outer packaging under 
the following conditions:
    (i) The outer packaging must have been successfully tested in 
accordance with Sec. 178.603 with fragile (e.g. glass) inner packagings 
containing liquids at the Packing Group I drop height;
    (ii) The total combined gross mass of inner packagings may not 
exceed one-half the gross mass of inner packagings used for the drop 
test;
    (iii) The thickness of cushioning material between inner packagings 
and between inner packagings and the outside of the packaging may not be 
reduced below the corresponding thickness in the originally tested 
packaging; and when a single inner packaging was used in the original 
test, the thickness of cushioning between inner packagings may not be 
less than the thickness of cushioning between the outside of the 
packaging and the inner packaging in the original test. When either 
fewer or smaller inner packagings are used (as compared to the inner 
packagings used in the drop test), sufficient additional cushioning 
material must be used to take up void spaces.
    (iv) The outer packaging must have successfully passed the stacking 
test set forth in Sec. 178.606 of this subpart when empty, i.e., without 
either inner packagings or cushioning materials. The total mass of 
identical packages must be based on the combined mass of inner 
packagings used for the drop test;
    (v) Inner packagings containing liquids must be completely 
surrounded with a sufficient quantity of absorbent material to absorb 
the entire liquid contents of the inner packagings;
    (vi) When the outer packaging is intended to contain inner 
packagings for liquids and is not leakproof, or is intended to contain 
inner packagings for solids and is not siftproof, a means of containing 
any liquid or solid contents in the event of leakage must be provided in 
the form of a leakproof liner, plastic bag, or other equally efficient 
means of containment. For packagings containing liquids, the absorbent 
material required in paragraph (g)(2)(v) of this section must be placed 
inside the means of containing liquid contents; and
    (vii) Packagings must be marked in accordance with Sec. 178.503 of 
this part as having been tested to Packing Group I

[[Page 959]]

performance for combination packagings. The marked maximum gross mass 
may not exceed the sum of the mass of the outer packaging plus one half 
the mass of the filled inner packagings of the tested combination 
packaging. In addition, the marking required by Sec. 178.503(a)(2) of 
this part must include the letter ``V''.
    (3) Variation 3. Packagings other than combination packagings which 
are produced with reductions in external dimensions (i.e., length, width 
or diameter) of up to 25 percent of the dimensions of a tested packaging 
may be used without further testing provided an equivalent level of 
performance is maintained. The packagings must, in all other respects 
(including wall thicknesses), be identical to the tested design-type. 
The marked gross mass (when required) must be reduced in proportion to 
the reduction in volume.
    (4) Variation 4. Variations are permitted in outer packagings of a 
tested design-type combination packaging, without further testing, 
provided an equivalent level of performance is maintained, as follows:
    (i) Each external dimension (length, width and height) is less than 
or equal to the corresponding dimension of the tested design-type;
    (ii) The structural design of the tested outer packaging (i.e. 
methods of construction, materials of construction, strength 
characteristics of materials of construction, method of closure and 
material thicknesses) is maintained;
    (iii) The inner packagings are identical to the inner packagings 
used in the tested design type except that their size and mass may be 
less; and they are oriented within the outer packaging in the same 
manner as in the tested packaging;
    (iv) The same type or design of absorbent materials, cushioning 
materials and any other components necessary to contain and protect 
inner packagings, as used in the tested design type, are maintained. The 
thickness of cushioning material between inner packagings and between 
inner packagings and the outside of the packaging may not be less than 
the thicknesses in the tested design type packaging; and
    (v) Sufficient additional cushioning material is used to take up 
void spaces and to prevent significant movement of the inner packagings.

An outer packaging qualifying for use in transport in accordance with 
all of the above conditions may also be used without testing to 
transport inner packagings substituted for the originally tested inner 
packagings in accordance with the conditions set out in Variation 1 in 
paragraph (g)(1) of this section.
    (5) Variation 5. Single packagings (i.e., non-bulk packagings other 
than combination packagings), that differ from a tested design type only 
to the extent that the closure device or gasketing differs from that 
used in the originally tested design type, may be used without further 
testing, provided an equivalent level of performance is maintained, 
subject to the following conditions (the qualifying tests):
    (i) A packaging with the replacement closure devices or gasketing 
must successfully pass the drop test specified in Sec. 178.603 in the 
orientation which most severely tests the integrity of the closure or 
gasket;
    (ii) When intended to contain liquids, a packaging with the 
replacement closure devices or gasketing must successfully pass the 
leakproofness test specified in Sec. 178.604, the hydrostatic pressure 
test specified in Sec. 178.605, and the stacking test specified in 
Sec. 178.606.

Replacement closures and gasketings qualified under the above test 
requirements are authorized without additional testing for packagings 
described in paragraph (g)(3) of this section. Replacement closures and 
gasketings qualified under the above test requirements also are 
authorized without additional testing for different tested design types 
packagings of the same type as the originally tested packaging, provided 
the original design type tests are more severe or comparable to tests 
which would otherwise be conducted on the packaging with the replacement 
closures or gasketings. (For example: The packaging used in the 
qualifying tests has a lesser packaging wall thickness than the 
packaging with replacement closure devices or gasketing; the gross mass 
of the packaging used in the qualifying drop test equals or exceeds

[[Page 960]]

the mass for which the packaging with replacement closure devices or 
gasketing was tested; the packaging used in the qualifying drop test was 
dropped from the same or greater height than the height from which the 
packaging with replacement closure devices or gasketing was dropped in 
design type tests; and the specific gravity of the substance used in the 
qualifying drop test was the same or greater than the specific gravity 
of the liquid used in the design type tests of the packaging with 
replacement closure devices or gasketing.)
    (6) The provisions in Variations 1, 2, and 4 in paragraphs (g)(1), 
(2) and (4) of this section for combination packagings may be applied to 
packagings containing articles, where the provisions for inner 
packagings are applied analogously to the articles. In this case, inner 
packagings need not comply with Sec. 173.27(c)(1) and (c)(2) of this 
subchapter.
    (7) Approval of selective testing. In addition to the provisions of 
Sec. 178.601(g)(1) through (g)(6) of this subpart, the Associate 
Administrator may approve the selective testing of packagings that 
differ only in minor respects from a tested type.
    (8) For a steel drum with a capacity greater than 50 L (13 gallons) 
manufactured from low carbon, cold-rolled sheet steel meeting ASTM 
designations A366/A366M or A568/A568M, variations in elements other than 
the following design elements are considered minor and do not constitute 
a different drum design type, or ``different packaging'' as defined in 
paragraph (c) of this section for which design qualification testing and 
periodic retesting are required. Minor variations authorized without 
further testing include changes in the identity of the supplier of 
component material made to the same specifications, or the original 
manufacturer of a DOT specification or UN standard drum to be 
remanufactured. A change in any one or more of the following design 
elements constitutes a different drum design type:
    (i) The packaging type and category of the original drum and the 
remanufactured drum, i.e., 1A1 or 1A2;
    (ii) The style, (i.e., straight-sided or tapered);
    (iii) Except as provided in paragraph (g)(3) of this section, the 
rated (marked) capacity and outside dimensions;
    (iv) The physical state for which the packaging was originally 
approved (e.g., tested for solids or liquids);
    (v) An increase in the marked level of performance of the original 
drum (i.e., to a higher packing group, hydrostatic test pressure, or 
specific gravity to which the packaging has been tested);
    (vi) Type of side seam welding;
    (vii) Type of steel;
    (viii) An increase greater than 10% or any decrease in the steel 
thickness of the head, body, or bottom;
    (ix) End seam type, (e.g., triple or double seam);
    (x) A reduction in the number of rolling hoops which equal or exceed 
the diameter over the chimes;
    (xi) The location, type or size, and material of closures (other 
than the cover of UN 1A2 drums); and
    (xii) For UN 1A2 drums:
    (A) Gasket material (e.g., plastic), or properties affecting the 
performance of the gasket;
    (B) Configuration or dimensions of the gasket;
    (C) Closure ring style including bolt size, (e.g., square or round 
back, 0.625'' bolt); and
    (D) Closure ring thickness.
    (h) Approval of equivalent packagings. A packaging having 
specifications different from those in Secs. 178.504-178.523 of this 
part, or which is tested using methods or test intervals, other than 
those specified in subpart M of this part, may be used if approved by 
the Associate Administrator. Such packagings must be shown to be equally 
effective, and testing methods used must be equivalent.
    (i) Proof of compliance. Notwithstanding the periodic retest 
intervals specified in paragraph (e) of this section, the Associate 
Administrator may at any time require demonstration of compliance by a 
manufacturer, through testing in accordance with this subpart, that 
packagings meet the requirements of this subpart. As required by the 
Associate Administrator, the manufacturer shall either--

[[Page 961]]

    (1) Conduct performance tests, or have tests conducted by an 
independent testing facility, in accordance with this subpart; or
    (2) Supply packagings, in quantities sufficient to conduct tests in 
accordance with this subpart, to the Associate Administrator or a 
designated representative of the Associate Administrator.
    (j) Coatings. If an inner treatment or coating of a packaging is 
required for safety reasons, the manufacturer shall design the packaging 
so that the treatment or coating retains its protective properties even 
after withstanding the tests prescribed by this subpart.
    (k) Number of test samples. Provided the validity of the test 
results is not affected and with the approval of the Associate 
Administrator, several tests may be performed on one sample.
    (l) Record retention. Following each design qualification test and 
each periodic retest on a packaging, a test report must be prepared. The 
test report must be maintained at each location where the packaging is 
manufactured and each location where the design qualification tests are 
conducted, for as long as the packaging is produced and for at least two 
years thereafter, and at each location where the periodic retests are 
conducted until such tests are successfully performed again and a new 
test report produced. In addition, a copy of the test report must be 
maintained by a person certifying compliance with this part. The test 
report must be made available to a user of a packaging or a 
representative of the Department upon request. The test report, at a 
minimum, must contain the following information:
    (1) Name and address of test facility;
    (2) Name and address of applicant (where appropriate);
    (3) A unique test report identification;
    (4) Date of the test report;
    (5) Manufacturer of the packaging;
    (6) Description of the packaging design type (e.g. dimensions, 
materials, closures, thickness, etc.), including methods of manufacture 
(e.g. blow molding) and which may include drawing(s) and/or 
photograph(s);
    (7) Maximum capacity;
    (8) Characteristics of test contents, e.g. viscosity and relative 
density for liquids and particle size for solids;
    (9) Test descriptions and results; and
    (10) Signed with the name and title of signatory.

[Amdt. 178-97, 55 FR 52723, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66285, 
Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45465, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 178-102, 59 FR 28494, 
June 2, 1994; Amdt. 178-106, 59 FR 67521, 67522, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 
178-117, 61 FR 50628, Sept. 26, 1996; 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001]

    Effective Date Note: At 67 FR 53143, Aug. 14, 2002, Sec. 178.601 was 
amended by revising paragraphs (c)(1), (c)(2), and (e), effective Oct. 
1, 2002. At 67 FR 54967, the effective date was corrected to Feb. 14, 
2003. For the convenience of the user, the added text is set forth as 
follows:

Sec. 178.601  General requirements.

                                * * * * *

    (c) * * *
    (1) Design qualification testing is the performance of the tests 
prescribed in Sec. 178.603, Sec. 178.604, Sec. 178.605, Sec. 178.606, 
Sec. 178.607, Sec. 178.608, or Sec. 178.609, as applicable, for each new 
or different packaging, at the start of production of that packaging.
    (2) Periodic retesting is the performance of the drop, 
leakproofness, hydrostatic pressure, and stacking tests, as applicable, 
as prescribed in Sec. 178.603, Sec. 178.604, Sec. 178.605, or 
Sec. 178.606, respectively, at the frequency specified in paragraph (e) 
of this section. For infectious substances packagings required to meet 
the requirements of Sec. 178.609, periodic retesting is the performance 
of the tests specified in Sec. 178.609 at the frequency specified in 
paragraph (e) of this section.

                                * * * * *

    (e) Periodic retesting. The packaging manufacturer must achieve 
successful test results for the periodic retesting at intervals 
established by the manufacturer of sufficient frequency to ensure that 
each packaging produced by the manufacturer is capable of passing the 
design qualification tests. Changes in retest frequency are subject to 
the approval of the Associate Administrator for Hazardous Materials 
Safety. For single or composite packagings, the periodic retests must be 
conducted at least once every 12 months. For combination packagings, the 
periodic retests must be conducted at least once every 24 months. For 
infectious substances packagings, the periodic retests must be conducted 
at least once every 24 months.

                                * * * * *

[[Page 962]]



Sec. 178.602  Preparation of packagings and packages for testing.

    (a) Except as otherwise provided in this subchapter, each packaging 
and package must be closed in preparation for testing and tests must be 
carried out in the same manner as if prepared for transportation, 
including inner packagings in the case of combination packagings.
    (b) For the drop and stacking test, inner and single-unit 
receptacles must be filled to not less than 95 percent of maximum 
capacity (see Sec. 171.8 of this subchapter) in the case of solids and 
not less than 98 percent of maximum capacity in the case of liquids. The 
material to be transported in the packagings may be replaced by a non-
hazardous material, except for chemical compatibility testing or where 
this would invalidate the results of the tests.
    (c) If the material to be transported is replaced for test purposes 
by a non-hazardous material, the material used must be of the same or 
higher specific gravity as the material to be carried, and its other 
physical properties (grain, size, viscosity) which might influence the 
results of the required tests must correspond as closely as possible to 
those of the hazardous material to be transported. Water may also be 
used for the liquid drop test under the conditions specified in 
Sec. 178.603(e) of this subpart. It is permissible to use additives, 
such as bags of lead shot, to achieve the requisite total package mass, 
so long as they are placed so that the test results are not affected.
    (d) Paper or fiberboard packagings must be conditioned for at least 
24 hours immediately prior to testing in an atmosphere maintained--
    (1) At 50 percent 2 percent relative humidity, and at a 
temperature of 23  deg.C2  deg.C (73  deg.F4 
deg.F). Average values should fall within these limits. Short-term 
fluctuations and measurement limitations may cause individual 
measurements to vary by up to  5 percent relative humidity 
without significant impairment of test reproducibility;
    (2) At 65 percent 2 percent relative humidity, and at a 
temperature of 20  deg.C2  deg.C (68  deg.F4 
deg.F), or 27  deg.C2  deg.C (81  deg.F4 
deg.F). Average values should fall within these limits. Short-term 
fluctuations and measurement limitations may cause individual 
measurements to vary by up to  5 percent relative humidity 
without significant impairment of test reproducibility; or
    (3) For testing at periodic intervals only (i.e., other than initial 
design qualification testing), at ambient conditions.
    (e) Except as otherwise provided, each packaging must be closed in 
preparation for testing in the same manner as if prepared for actual 
shipment. All closures must be installed using proper techniques and 
torques.
    (f) Bung-type barrels made of natural wood must be left filled with 
water for at least 24 hours before the tests.

[Amdt. 178-97, 55 FR 52723, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66286, 
Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 178-106, 59 FR 67522, Dec. 29, 1994]



Sec. 178.603  Drop test.

    (a) General. The drop test must be conducted for the qualification 
of all packaging design types and performed periodically as specified in 
Sec. 178.601(e). For other than flat drops, the center of gravity of the 
test packaging must be vertically over the point of impact. Where more 
than one orientation is possible for a given drop test, the orientation 
most likely to result in failure of the packaging must be used. The 
number of drops required and the packages' orientations are as follows:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                 No. of tests      Drop orientation of
          Packaging               (samples)              samples
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Steel drums, Aluminum drums,   Six--(three for  First drop (using three
 Metal drums (other than        each drop).      samples): The package
 steel or aluminum), Steel                       must strike the target
 Jerricans, Plywood drums,                       diagonally on the chime
 Wooden barrels, Fiber drums,                    or, if the packaging
 Plastic drums and Jerricans,                    has no chime, on a
 Composite packagings which                      circumferential seam or
 are in the shape of a drum.                     an edge. Second drop
                                                 (using the other three
                                                 samples): The package
                                                 must strike the target
                                                 on the weakest part not
                                                 tested by the first
                                                 drop, for example a
                                                 closure or, for some 7
                                                 cylindrical drums, the
                                                 welded longitudinal
                                                 seam of the drum body.

[[Page 963]]

 
Boxes of natural wood,         Five--(one for   First drop: Flat on the
 Plywood boxes, Reconstituted   each drop).      bottom (using the first
 wood boxes, Fiberboard                          sample). Second drop:
 boxes, Plastic boxes, Steel                     Flat on the top (using
 or aluminum boxes, Composite                    the second sample).
 packagings which are in the                     Third drop: Flat on the
 shape of a box.                                 long side (using the
                                                 third sample). Fourth
                                                 drop: Flat on the short
                                                 side (using the fourth
                                                 sample). Fifth drop: On
                                                 a corner (using the
                                                 fifth sample).
Bags--single-ply with a side   Three--(three    First drop: Flat on a
 seam.                          drops per bag).  wide face (using all
                                                 three samples). Second
                                                 drop: Flat on a narrow
                                                 face (using all three
                                                 samples). Third drop:
                                                 On an end of the bag
                                                 (using all three
                                                 samples).
Bags--single-ply without a     Three--(two      First drop: Flat on a
 side seam, or multi-ply.       drops per bag).  wide face (using all
                                                 three samples). Second
                                                 drop: On an end of the
                                                 bag (using all three
                                                 samples).
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (b) Exceptions. For testing of single or composite packagings 
constructed of stainless steel, nickel, or monel at periodic intervals 
only (i.e., other than design qualification testing), the drop test may 
be conducted with two samples, one sample each for the two drop 
orientations. These samples may have been previously used for the 
hydrostatic pressure or stacking test. Exceptions for the number of 
steel and aluminum packaging samples used for conducting the drop test 
are subject to the approval of the Associate Administrator.
    (c) Special preparation of test samples for the drop test. Testing 
of plastic drums, plastic jerricans, plastic boxes other than expanded 
polystyrene boxes, composite packagings (plastic material), and 
combination packagings with plastic inner packagings other than plastic 
bags intended to contain solids or articles must be carried out when the 
temperature of the test sample and its contents has been reduced to -18 
deg.C (0  deg.F) or lower. Test liquids shall be kept in the liquid 
state, if necessary, by the addition of anti-freeze. Test samples 
prepared in this way are not required to be conditioned in accordance 
with Sec. 178.602(d).
    (d) Target. The target must be a rigid, non-resilient, flat and 
horizontal surface.
    (e) Drop height. Drop heights, measured as the vertical distance 
from the target to the lowest point on the package, must be equal to or 
greater than the drop height determined as follows:
    (1) For solids and liquids, if the test is performed with the solid 
or liquid to be transported or with a non-hazardous material having 
essentially the same physical characteristic, the drop height must be 
determined according to packing group, as follows:
    (i) Packing Group I: 1.8 m (5.9 feet).
    (ii) Packing Group II: 1.2 m (3.9 feet).
    (iii) Packing Group III: 0.8 m (2.6 feet).
    (2) For liquids, if the test is performed with water--
    (i) Where the materials to be carried have a specific gravity not 
exceeding 1.2, drop height must be determined according to packing 
group, as follows:
    (A) Packing Group I: 1.8 m (5.9 feet).
    (B) Packing Group II: 1.2 m (3.9 feet).
    (C) Packing Group III: 0.8 m (2.6 feet).
    (ii) Where the materials to be transported have a specific gravity 
exceeding 1.2, the drop height must be calculated on the basis of the 
specific gravity (SG) of the material to be carried, rounded up to the 
first decimal, as follows:
    (A) Packing Group I: SG x 1.5 m (4.9 feet).
    (B) Packing Group II: SG x 1.0 m (3.3 feet).
    (C) Packing Group III: SG x 0.67 m (2.2 feet).
    (f) Criteria for passing the test. A package is considered to 
successfully pass the drop tests if for each sample tested--
    (1) For packagings containing liquid, each packaging does not leak 
when equilibrium has been reached between the internal and external 
pressures, except for inner packagings of combination packagings when it 
is not necessary that the pressures be equalized;
    (2) For removable head drums for solids, the entire contents are 
retained by an inner packaging (e.g., a plastic bag) even if the closure 
on the top head of the drum is no longer sift-proof;
    (3) For a bag, neither the outermost ply nor an outer packaging 
exhibits

[[Page 964]]

any damage likely to adversely affect safety during transport;
    (4) For a composite or combination packaging, there is no damage to 
the outer packaging likely to adversely affect safety during transport, 
and there is no leakage of the filling substance from the inner 
packaging;
    (5) Any discharge from a closure is slight and ceases immediately 
after impact with no further leakage; and
    (6) No rupture is permitted in packagings for materials in Class 1 
which would permit spillage of loose explosive substances or articles 
from the outer packaging.

[Amdt. 178-97, 55 FR 52723, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66286, 
Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45465, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 178-99, 58 FR 51534, 
Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 178-106, 59 FR 67522, Dec. 29, 1994; 65 FR 50462, 
Aug. 18, 2000; 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 61016, Sept. 27, 2002]



Sec. 178.604  Leakproofness test.

    (a) General. The leakproofness test must be performed with 
compressed air or other suitable gases on all packagings intended to 
contain liquids, except that:
    (1) The inner receptacle of a composite packaging may be tested 
without the outer packaging provided the test results are not affected; 
and
    (2) This test is not required for inner packagings of combination 
packagings.
    (b) Number of packagings to be tested--(1) Production testing. All 
packagings subject to the provisions of this section must be tested and 
must pass the leakproofness test:
    (i) Before they are first used in transportation; and
    (ii) Prior to reuse, when authorized for reuse by Sec. 173.28 of 
this subchapter.
    (2) Design qualification and periodic testing. Three samples of each 
different packaging must be tested and must pass the leakproofness test. 
Exceptions for the number of samples used in conducting the 
leakproofness test are subject to the approval of the Associate 
Administrator.
    (c) Special preparation--(1) For design qualification and periodic 
testing, packagings must be tested with closures in place. For 
production testing, packagings need not have their closures in place. 
Removable heads need not be installed during production testing.
    (2) For testing with closures in place, vented closures must either 
be replaced by similar non-vented closures or the vent must be sealed.
    (d) Test method. The packaging must be restrained under water while 
an internal air pressure is applied; the method of restraint must not 
affect the results of the test. The test must be conducted, for other 
than production testing, for a minimum time of five minutes. Other 
methods, at least equally effective, may be used in accordance with 
appendix B of this part.
    (e) Pressure applied. An internal air pressure (gauge) must be 
applied to the packaging as indicated for the following packing groups:
    (1) Packing Group I: Not less than 30 kPa (4 psi).
    (2) Packing Group II: Not less than 20 kPa (3 psi).
    (3) Packing Group III: Not less than 20 kPa (3 psi).
    (f) Criteria for passing the test. A packaging passes the test if 
there is no leakage of air from the packaging.

[Amdt. 178-97, 55 FR 52723, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66286, 
Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 178-106, 59 FR 67522, Dec. 29, 1994; 66 FR 45386, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.605  Hydrostatic pressure test.

    (a) General. The hydrostatic pressure test must be conducted for the 
qualification of all metal, plastic, and composite packaging design 
types intended to contain liquids and be performed periodically as 
specified in Sec. 178.601(e). This test is not required for inner 
packagings of combination packagings. For internal pressure requirements 
for inner packagings of combination packagings intended for 
transportation by aircraft, see Sec. 173.27(c) of this subchapter.
    (b) Number of test samples. Three test samples are required for each 
different packaging. For packagings constructed of stainless steel, 
monel, or nickel, only one sample is required for periodic retesting of 
packagings. Exceptions for the number of aluminum and steel sample 
packagings used in conducting the hydrostatic pressure test are subject 
to the approval of the Associate Administrator.

[[Page 965]]

    (c) Special preparation of receptacles for testings. Vented closures 
must either be replaced by similar non-vented closures or the vent must 
be sealed.
    (d) Test method and pressure to be applied. Metal packagings and 
composite packagings other than plastic (e.g., glass, porcelain or 
stoneware), including their closures, must be subjected to the test 
pressure for 5 minutes. Plastic packagings and composite packagings 
(plastic material), including their closures, must be subjected to the 
test pressure for 30 minutes. This pressure is the one to be marked as 
required in Sec. 178.503(a)(5) of this part. The receptacles must be 
supported in a manner that does not invalidate the test. The test 
pressure must be applied continuously and evenly, and it must be kept 
constant throughout the test period. The hydraulic pressure (gauge) 
applied, taken at the top of the receptacle, and determined by any one 
of the following methods must be:
    (1) Not less than the total gauge pressure measured in the packaging 
(i.e., the vapor pressure of the filling material and the partial 
pressure of the air or other inert gas minus 100 kPa (15 psi)) at 55 
deg.C (131  deg.F), multiplied by a safety factor of 1.5. This total 
gauge pressure must be determined on the basis of a maximum degree of 
filling in accordance with Sec. 173.24a(d) of this subchapter and a 
filling temperature of 15  deg.C (59  deg.F);
    (2) Not less than 1.75 times the vapor pressure at 50  deg.C (122 
deg.F) of the material to be transported minus 100 kPa (15 psi) but with 
a minimum test pressure of 100 kPa (15 psig); or
    (3) Not less than 1.5 times the vapor pressure at 55  deg.C (l3l 
deg.F) of the material to be transported minus 100 kPa (15 psi), but 
with a minimum test pressure of 100 kPa (15 psig).

Packagings intended to contain hazardous materials of Packing Group I 
must be tested to a minimum test pressure of 250 kPa (36 psig).
    (e) Criteria for passing the test. A package passes the hydrostatic 
test if, for each test sample, there is no leakage of liquid from the 
package.

[Amdt. 178-97, 55 FR 52723, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66286, 
Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. 178-99, 58 FR 51534, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 178-102, 
59 FR 28494, June 2, 1994; 65 FR 50462, Aug. 18, 2000; 66 FR 45386, 
45390, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.606  Stacking test.

    (a) General. All packaging design types other than bags must be 
subjected to a stacking test.
    (b) Number of test samples. Three test samples are required for each 
different packaging. For periodic retesting of packagings constructed of 
stainless steel, monel, or nickel, only one test sample is required. 
Exceptions for the number of aluminum and steel sample packagings used 
in conducting the stacking test are subject to the approval of the 
Associate Administrator. Notwithstanding the provisions of 
Sec. 178.602(a) of this subpart, combination packagings may be subjected 
to the stacking test without their inner packagings, except where this 
would invalidate the results of the test.
    (c) Test method--(1) Design qualification testing. The test sample 
must be subjected to a force applied to the top surface of the test 
sample equivalent to the total weight of identical packages which might 
be stacked on it during transport; where the contents of the test sample 
are non-hazardous liquids with specific gravities different from that of 
the liquid to be transported, the force must be calculated based on the 
specific gravity that will be marked on the packaging. The minimum 
height of the stack, including the test sample, must be 3.0 m (10 feet). 
The duration of the test must be 24 hours, except that plastic drums, 
jerricans, and composite packagings 6HH intended for liquids shall be 
subjected to the stacking test for a period of 28 days at a temperature 
of not less than 40 deg.C (104 deg.F). Alternative test methods which 
yield equivalent results may be used if approved by the Associate 
Administrator. In guided load tests, stacking stability must be assessed 
after completion of the test by placing two filled packagings of the 
same type on the test

[[Page 966]]

sample. The stacked packages must maintain their position for one hour. 
Plastic packagings must be cooled to ambient temperature before this 
stacking stability assessment.
    (2) Periodic retesting. The test sample must be tested in accordance 
with:
    (i) Section 178.606(c)(1) of this subpart; or
    (ii) The packaging may be tested using a dynamic compression testing 
machine. The test must be conducted at room temperature on an empty, 
unsealed packaging. The test sample must be centered on the bottom 
platen of the testing machine. The top platen must be lowered until it 
comes in contact with the test sample. Compression must be applied end 
to end. The speed of the compression tester must be one-half inch plus 
or minus one-fourth inch per minute. An initial preload of 50 pounds 
must be applied to ensure a definite contact between the test sample and 
the platens. The distance between the platens at this time must be 
recorded as zero deformation. The force A to then be applied must be 
calculated using the formula:

Liquids: A = (n - 1) [w + (s x v x 8.3 x .98)] x 1.5;

Solids: A = (n - 1) [w + (s x v x 8.3 x .95)] x 1.5

Where:

A = applied load in pounds.
n = minimum number of containers that, when stacked, reach a height of 3 
m.
s = specific gravity of lading.
w = maximum weight of one empty container in pounds.
v = actual capacity of container (rated capacity + outage) in gallons.

And:

8.3 corresponds to the weight in pounds of 1.0 gallon of water.
1.5 is a compensation factor that converts the static load of the 
stacking test into a load suitable for dynamic compression testing.

    (d) Criteria for passing the test. No test sample may leak. In 
composite packagings or combination packagings, there must be no leakage 
of the filling substance from the inner receptacle, or inner packaging. 
No test sample may show any deterioration which could adversely affect 
transportation safety or any distortion likely to reduce its strength, 
cause instability in stacks of packages, or cause damage to inner 
packagings likely to reduce safety in transportation. For the dynamic 
compression test, a container passes the test if, after application of 
the required load, there is no buckling of the sidewalls sufficient to 
cause damage to its expected contents; in no case may the maximum 
deflection exceed one inch.

[Amdt. 178-97, 55 FR 52723, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66286, 
Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45465, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 178-102, 59 FR 28494, 
June 2, 1994; Amdt. 178-106, 59 FR 67522, Dec. 29, 1994; 65 FR 58632, 
Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.607  Cooperage test for bung-type wooden barrels.

    (a) Number of samples. One barrel is required for each different 
packaging.
    (b) Method of testing. Remove all hoops above the bilge of an empty 
barrel at least two days old.
    (c) Criteria for passing the test. A packaging passes the cooperage 
test only if the diameter of the cross-section of the upper part of the 
barrel does not increase by more than 10 percent.



Sec. 178.608  Vibration standard.

    (a) Each packaging must be capable of withstanding, without rupture 
or leakage, the vibration test procedure outlined in this section.
    (b) Test method. (1) Three sample packagings, selected at random, 
must be filled and closed as for shipment.
    (2) The three samples must be placed on a vibrating platform that 
has a vertical or rotary double-amplitude (peak-to-peak displacement) of 
one inch. The packages should be constrained horizontally to prevent 
them from falling off the platform, but must be left free to move 
vertically, bounce and rotate.
    (3) The test must be performed for one hour at a frequency that 
causes the package to be raised from the vibrating platform to such a 
degree that a piece of material of approximately 1.6 mm (0.063 inch) 
thickness (such as steel strapping or paperboard) can be passed between 
the bottom of any package and the platform.
    (4) Immediately following the period of vibration, each package must 
be removed from the platform, turned on its

[[Page 967]]

side and observed for any evidence of leakage.
    (5) Other methods, at least equally effective, may be used, if 
approved by the Associate Administrator.
    (c) Criteria for passing the test. A packaging passes the vibration 
test if there is no rupture or leakage from any of the packages. No test 
sample should show any deterioration which could adversely affect 
transportation safety or any distortion liable to reduce packaging 
strength.

[Amdt. 178-97, 55 FR 52723, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66286, 
Dec. 20, 1991; 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.609  Test requirements for packagings for infectious substances (etiologic agents).

    (a) Samples of each packaging must be prepared for testing as 
described in paragraph (b) of this section and then subjected to the 
tests in paragraphs (d) through (i) of this section.
    (b) Samples of each packaging must be prepared as for transport 
except that a liquid or solid infectious substance should be replaced by 
water or, where conditioning at -18  deg.C (0  deg.F) is specified, by 
water/antifreeze. Each primary receptacle must be filled to 98 percent 
capacity. Packagings for live animals should be tested with the live 
animal being replaced by an appropriate dummy of similar mass.
    (c) Packagings prepared as for transport must be subjected to the 
tests in table I of this paragraph, which, for test purposes, 
categorizes packagings according to their material characteristics. For 
outer packagings, the headings in table I relate to fiberboard or 
similar materials whose performance may be rapidly affected by moisture; 
plastics, other than expanded plastics or film, which may embrittle at 
low temperature; and other materials such as metal whose performance is 
not significantly affected by moisture or temperature. Inner packagings 
may be of plastics, other than expanded plastics or film. Where a 
primary receptacle and a secondary packaging of an inner packaging are 
made of different materials, the material of the primary receptacle 
determines the appropriate test.

                                             Table I--Tests Required
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                             Material of                                            Tests required
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
             Outer packaging                    Inner packaging             Refer to para. (d)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------   Refer to
 Fiberboard     Plastics        Other       Plastics        Other      (d)   (e)   (f)      (g)       para. (h)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
X                                         X                                 X     X     When dry     X
                                                                                         ice is
                                                                                         used
X                                                       X                   X                        X
              X                           X                                       X                  X
              X                                         X                         X                  X
                            X             X                                       X                  X
                            X                           X             X                              X
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (d) Samples must be subjected to free-fall drops onto a rigid, 
nonresilient, flat, horizontal surface from a height of 9 m (30 feet).
    The drops must be performed as follows:
    (1) Where the samples are in the shape of a box, five must be 
dropped in sequence:
    (i) Flat on the bottom;
    (ii) Flat on the top;
    (iii) Flat on the long side;
    (iv) Flat on the short side; and
    (v) On a corner.
    (2) Where the samples are in the shape of a drum, three must be 
dropped in sequence:
    (i) Diagonally on the top chime, with the center of gravity directly 
above the point of impact;
    (ii) Diagonally on the base chime; and
    (iii) Flat on the side.
    (3) While the sample should be released in the required orientation, 
it is accepted that for aerodynamic reasons the impact may not take 
place in that orientation.

[[Page 968]]

    (4) Following the appropriate drop sequence, there must be no 
leakage from the primary receptacle(s) which should remain protected by 
absorbent material in the secondary packaging.
    (e) The sample must be fully immersed in water for a period of at 
least 5 minutes and then allowed to drain for not more than 30 minutes 
at 23  deg.C (73  deg.F) and 50  2 percent relative 
humidity. It should then be subjected to the test described in paragraph 
(d) of this section.
    (f) The sample must be conditioned in an atmosphere of -18  deg.C (0 
 deg.F) or less for a period of at least 24 hours and within 15 minutes 
of removal from that atmosphere be subjected to the test described in 
paragraph (d) of this section. Where the sample contains dry ice, the 
conditioning period may be reduced to 4 hours.
    (g) Where packaging is intended to contain dry ice, a test 
additional to that specified in paragraph (d) or (e) or (f) of this 
section must be carried out. One sample must be stored so that all the 
dry ice dissipates and then be subjected to the test described in 
paragraph (d) of this section.
    (h) Packagings with a gross mass of 7 kg (15 pounds) or less should 
be subjected to the tests described in paragraph (h)(1) of this section 
and packagings with a gross mass exceeding 7 kg (15 pounds) to the tests 
in paragraph (h)(2) of this section.
    (1) Samples must be placed on a level hard surface. A cylindrical 
steel rod with a mass of at least 7 kg (15 pounds), a diameter not 
exceeding 38 mm (1.5 inches) and the impact end edges a radius not 
exceeding 6 mm (0.2 inches), must be dropped in a vertical free fall 
from a height of 1 m (3 feet), measured from the impact end of the 
impact surface of the sample. One sample must be placed on its base. A 
second sample must be placed in an orientation perpendicular to that 
used for the first. In each instance the steel rod must be aimed to 
impact the primary receptacle. Following each impact, penetration of the 
secondary packaging is acceptable, provided that there is no leakage 
from the primary receptacle(s).
    (2) Samples must be dropped on to the end of a cylindrical steel 
rod. The rod must be set vertically in a level hard surface. It must 
have a diameter of 38 mm (1.5 inches) and the edges of the upper end a 
radius not exceeding 6 mm (0.2 inches). The rod must protrude from the 
surface a distance at least equal to that between the primary 
receptacle(s) and the outer surface of the outer packaging with a 
minimum of 200 mm (7.9 inches). One sample must be dropped in a vertical 
free fall from a height of 1 m (3 feet), measured from the top of the 
steel rod. A second sample must be dropped from the same height in an 
orientation perpendicular to that used for the first. In each instance 
the packaging should be so orientated that the steel rod must be aimed 
to impact the primary receptacle(s). Following each impact, penetration 
of the secondary packaging is acceptable, provided that there is not 
leakage from the primary receptacle(s).
    (i) Packagings subject to this section are not subject to 
Sec. 178.503 or any other requirements of this subpart, except 
Sec. 178.608.

[Amdt. 178-97, 55 FR 52723, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 178-111, 
60 FR 48787, Sept. 20, 1995]

    Effective Date Note: At 67 FR 53143, Aug. 14, 2002, Sec. 178.609 was 
amended by revising the section heading, the text of paragraph (c) 
preceding the table, the introductory text of paragraph (d)(1), 
paragraphs (d)(1)(i), (d)(1)(iii), (d)(1)(iv), (e), (h)(1), (h)(2), and 
(i), effective Oct. 1, 2002. At 67 FR 54967, Aug. 27, 2002, the 
effective date was corrected to Feb. 14, 2003. For the convenience of 
the user, the revised text is set forth as follows:

Sec. 178.609  Test requirements for packagings for infectious 
          substances.

                                * * * * *

    (c) Packagings prepared as for transport must be subjected to the 
tests in Table I of this paragraph (c), which, for test purposes, 
categorizes packagings according to their material characteristics. For 
outer packagings, the headings in Table I relate to fiberboard or 
similar materials whose performance may be rapidly affected by moisture; 
plastics that may embrittle at low temperature; and other materials, 
such as metal, for which performance is not significantly affected by 
moisture or temperature. Where a primary receptacle and a secondary 
packaging of an inner packaging are made of different materials, the 
material of the primary

[[Page 969]]

receptacle determines the appropriate test. In instances where a primary 
receptacle is made of more than one material, the material most likely 
to be damaged determines the appropriate test.

                                * * * * *

    (d) * * *
    (1) Where the samples are in the shape of a box, five must be 
dropped in sequence:
    (i) Flat on the base;

                                * * * * *

    (iii) Flat on the longest side;
    (iv) Flat on the shortest side; and

                                * * * * *

    (e) The samples must be subjected to a water spray to simulate 
exposure to rainfall of approximately 50 mm (2 inches) per hour for at 
least one hour. They must then be subjected to the test described in 
paragraph (d) of this section.

                                * * * * *

    (h) * * *
    (1) Samples must be placed on a level, hard surface. A cylindrical 
steel rod with a mass of at least 7 kg (15 pounds), a diameter not 
exceeding 38 mm (1.5 inches), and, at the impact end edges, a radius not 
exceeding 6 mm (0.2 inches), must be dropped in a vertical free fall 
from a height of 1 m (3 feet), measured from the impact end of the 
sample's impact surface. One sample must be placed on its base. A second 
sample must be placed in an orientation perpendicular to that used for 
the first. In each instance, the steel rod must be aimed to impact the 
primary receptacle(s). For a successful test, there must be no leakage 
from the primary receptacle(s) following each impact.
    (2) Samples must be dropped onto the end of a cylindrical steel rod. 
The rod must be set vertically in a level, hard surface. It must have a 
diameter of 38 mm (1.5 inches) and a radius not exceeding 6 mm (0.2 
inches) at the edges of the upper end. The rod must protrude from the 
surface a distance at least equal to that between the primary 
receptacle(s) and the outer surface of the outer packaging with a 
minimum of 200 mm (7.9 inches). One sample must be dropped in a vertical 
free fall from a height of 1 m (3 feet), measured from the top of the 
steel rod. A second sample must be dropped from the same height in an 
orientation perpendicular to that used for the first. In each instance, 
the packaging must be oriented so the steel rod will impact the primary 
receptacle(s). For a successful test, there must be no leakage from the 
primary receptacle(s) following each impact.
    (i) Variations. The following variations in the primary receptacles 
placed within the secondary packaging are allowed without additional 
testing of the completed package. An equivalent level of performance 
must be maintained.
    (1) Variation 1. Primary receptacles of equivalent or smaller size 
as compared to the tested primary receptacles may be used provided they 
meet all of the following conditions:
    (i) The primary receptacles are of similar design to the tested 
primary receptacle (e.g., shape: round, rectangular, etc.).
    (ii) The material of construction of the primary receptacle (glass, 
plastics, metal, etc.) offers resistance to impact and a stacking force 
equal to or greater than that of the originally tested primary 
receptacle.
    (iii) The primary receptacles have the same or smaller openings and 
the closure is of similar design (e.g., screw cap, friction lid, etc.).
    (iv) Sufficient additional cushioning material is used to fill void 
spaces and to prevent significant movement of the primary receptacles.
    (v) Primary receptacles are oriented within the intermediate 
packaging in the same manner as in the tested package.
    (2) Variation 2. A lesser number of the tested primary receptacles, 
or of the alternative types of primary receptacles identified in 
paragraph (i)(1) of this section, may be used provided sufficient 
cushioning is added to fill the void space(s) and to prevent significant 
movement of the primary receptacles.
    (3) Variation 3. Primary receptacles of any type may be placed 
within a secondary packaging and shipped without testing in the outer 
packaging provided all of the following conditions are met:
    (i) The secondary and outer packaging combination must be 
successfully tested in accordance with paragraphs (a) through (h) of 
this section with fragile (e.g., glass) inner receptacles.
    (ii) The total combined gross weight of inner receptacles may not 
exceed one-half the gross weight of inner receptacles used for the drop 
test in paragraph (d) of this section.
    (iii) The thickness of cushioning material between inner receptacles 
and between inner receptacles and the outside of the secondary packaging 
may not be reduced below the corresponding thicknesses in the originally 
tested packaging. If a single inner receptacle was used in the original 
test, the thickness of cushioning between the inner receptacles must be 
no less than the thickness of cushioning between the outside of the 
secondary packaging and the inner receptacle in the original test. When 
either fewer or smaller inner receptacles are used (as compared to the 
inner receptacles used in the drop test), sufficient additional 
cushioning material must be used to fill the void.

[[Page 970]]

    (iv) The outer packaging must pass the stacking test in Sec. 178.606 
while empty. The total weight of identical packages must be based on the 
combined mass of inner receptacles used in the drop test in paragraph 
(d) of this section.
    (v) For inner receptacles containing liquids, an adequate quantity 
of absorbent material must be present to absorb the entire liquid 
contents of the inner receptacles.
    (vi) If the outer packaging is intended to contain inner receptacles 
for liquids and is not leakproof, or is intended to contain inner 
receptacles for solids and is not sift proof, a means of containing any 
liquid or solid contents in the event of leakage must be provided. This 
can be a leakproof liner, plastic bag, or other equally effective means 
of containment.
    (vii) In addition, the marking required in Sec. 178.503(f) of this 
subchapter must be followed by the letter ``U''.



              Subpart N--IBC Performance-Oriented Standards

    Source: Amdt. 178-103, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994, unless otherwise 
noted; 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001.



Sec. 178.700  Purpose, scope and definitions.

    (a) This subpart prescribes requirements applying to IBCs intended 
for the transportation of hazardous materials. Standards for these 
packagings are based on the UN Recommendations.
    (b) Terms used in this subpart are defined in Sec. 171.8 of this 
subchapter and in paragraph (c) of this section.
    (c) The following definitions pertain to the IBC standards in this 
subpart.
    (1) Body means the receptacle proper (including openings and their 
closures, but not including service equipment), that has a volumetric 
capacity of not more than three cubic meters (3,000 L, 793 gallons, or 
106 cubic feet) and not less than 0.45 cubic meters (450 L, 119 gallons, 
or 15.9 cubic feet) or a maximum net mass of not less than 400 kg (882) 
pounds.
    (2) Service equipment means filling and discharge, pressure relief, 
safety, heating and heat-insulating devices and measuring instruments.
    (3) Structural equipment means the reinforcing, fastening, handling, 
protective or stabilizing members of the body or stacking load bearing 
structural members (such as metal cages).
    (4) Maximum permissible gross mass means the mass of the body, its 
service equipment, structural equipment and the maximum net mass (see 
Sec. 171.8 of this subchapter).

[Amdt. 178-103, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994, as amended by Amdt. 178-108, 
60 FR 40038, Aug. 4, 1995; 66 FR 45386, 45387, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.702  IBC codes.

    (a) Intermediate bulk container code designations consist of: two 
numerals specified in paragraph (a)(1) of this section; followed by the 
capital letter(s) specified in paragraph (a)(2) of this section; 
followed, when specified in an individual section, by a numeral 
indicating the category of intermediate bulk container.
    (1) IBC code number designations are as follows:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                    For solids, discharged
                                  --------------------------
                                                   Under
               Type                             pressure of  For liquids
                                    by gravity   more than
                                                   10 kPa
                                                (1.45 psig)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Rigid............................           11           21           31
Flexible.........................           13
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (2) Intermediate bulk container code letter designations are as 
follows:

``A'' means steel (all types and surface treatments).
``B'' means aluminum.
``C'' means natural wood.
``D'' means plywood.
``F'' means reconstituted wood.
``G'' means fiberboard.
``H'' means plastic.
``L'' means textile.
``M'' means paper, multiwall.
``N'' means metal (other than steel or aluminum).

    (b) For composite IBCs, two capital letters are used in sequence 
following the numeral indicating IBC design type. The first letter 
indicates the material of the IBC inner receptacle. The second letter 
indicates the material of the outer IBC. For example, 31HA1 is a 
composite IBC with a plastic inner receptacle and a steel outer 
packaging.

[Amdt. 178-103, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994, as amended at 66 FR 45386, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.703  Marking of IBCs.

    (a) The manufacturer shall:

[[Page 971]]

    (1) Mark every IBC in a durable and clearly visible manner. The 
marking may be applied in a single line or in multiple lines provided 
the correct sequence is followed with the information required by this 
section in letters, numerals and symbols of at least 12 mm in height. 
This minimum marking size applies only to IBCs manufactured after 
October 1, 2001). The following information is required in the sequence 
presented:
    (i) The United Nations symbol as illustrated in Sec. 178.503(e)(1). 
For metal IBCs on which the marking is stamped or embossed, the capital 
letters `UN' may be applied instead of the symbol.
    (ii) The code number designating IBC design type according to 
Sec. 178.702(a). The letter ``W'' must follow the IBC design type 
identification code on an IBC when the IBC differs from the requirements 
in subpart N of this part, or is tested using methods other than those 
specified in this subpart, and is approved by the Associate 
Administrator in accordance with the provisions in Sec. 178.801(i).
    (iii) A capital letter identifying the performance standard under 
which the design type has been successfully tested, as follows:
    (A) X--for IBCs meeting Packing Group I, II and III tests;
    (B) Y--for IBCs meeting Packing Group II and III tests; and
    (C) Z--for IBCs meeting only Packing Group III tests.
    (iv) The month (designated numerically) and year (last two digits) 
of manufacture.
    (v) The country authorizing the allocation of the mark. The letters 
`USA' indicate that the IBC is manufactured and marked in the United 
States in compliance with the provisions of this subchapter.
    (vi) The name and address or symbol of the manufacturer or the 
approval agency certifying compliance with subparts N and O of this 
part. Symbols, if used, must be registered with the Associate 
Administrator.
    (vii) The stacking test load in kilograms (kg). For IBCs not 
designed for stacking, the figure ``0'' must be shown.
    (viii) The maximum permissible gross mass or, for flexible IBCs, the 
maximum net mass, in kg.
    (2) The following are examples of symbols and required markings:
    (i) For a metal IBC containing solids discharged by gravity made 
from steel:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR26JY94.000

    (ii) For a flexible IBC containing solids discharged by gravity and 
made from woven plastic with a liner:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR26JY94.001


[[Page 972]]


    (iii) For a rigid plastic IBC containing liquids, made from plastic 
with structural equipment withstanding the stack load and with a 
manufacturer's symbol in place of the manufacturer's name and address:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR26JY94.002

    (iv) For a composite IBC containing liquids, with a rigid plastic 
inner receptacle and an outer steel body and with the symbol of a DOT 
approved third-party test laboratory:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR26JY94.003

    (b) Additional marking. In addition to markings required in 
paragraph (a) of this section, each IBC must be marked as follows in a 
place near the markings required in paragraph (a) of this section that 
is readily accessible for inspection. Where units of measure are used, 
the metric unit indicated (e.g., 450 L) must also appear.
    (1) For each rigid plastic and composite IBC, the following markings 
must be included:
    (i) Rated capacity in L of water at 20  deg.C (68  deg.F);
    (ii) Tare mass in kilograms;
    (iii) Gauge test pressure in kPa;
    (iv) Date of last leakproofness test, if applicable (month and 
year); and
    (v) Date of last inspection (month and year).
    (2) For each metal IBC, the following markings must be included on a 
metal corrosion-resistant plate:
    (i) Rated capacity in L of water at 20  deg.C (68  deg.F);
    (ii) Tare mass in kilograms;
    (iii) Date of last leakproofness test, if applicable (month and 
year);
    (iv) Date of last inspection (month and year);
    (v) Maximum loading/discharge pressure, in kPa, if applicable;
    (vi) Body material and its minimum thickness in mm; and
    (vii) Serial number assigned by the manufacturer.
    (3) Markings required by paragraph (b)(1) or (b)(2) of this section 
may be preceded by the narrative description of the marking, e.g. ``Tare 
Mass: * * *'' where the ``* * *'' are replaced with the tare mass in 
kilograms of the IBC.
    (4) For each fiberboard and wooden IBC, the tare mass in kg must be 
shown.
    (5) Each flexible IBC may be marked with a pictogram displaying 
recommended lifting methods.
    (6) For each composite IBC, the inner receptacle must be marked with 
at least the following information:
    (i) The code number designating the IBC design type, the name and 
address or symbol of the manufacturer, the date of manufacture and the 
country authorizing the allocation of the mark as specified in paragraph 
(a) of this section;
    (ii) When a composite IBC is designed in such a manner that the 
outer casing

[[Page 973]]

is intended to be dismantled for transport when empty (such as, for the 
return of the IBC for reuse to the original consignor), each of the 
parts intended to be detached when so dismantled must be marked with the 
month and year of manufacture and the name or symbol of the 
manufacturer.

[Amdt. 178-103, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994, as amended by Amdt. 178-119, 
62 FR 24743, May 6, 1997; 64 FR 10782, Mar. 5, 1999; 65 FR 50462, Aug. 
18, 2000; 65 FR 58632, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 33451, June 21, 2001; 66 FR 
45387, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.704  General IBC standards.

    (a) Each IBC must be resistant to, or protected from, deterioration 
due to exposure to the external environment. IBCs intended for solid 
hazardous materials must be sift-proof and water-resistant.
    (b) All service equipment must be so positioned or protected as to 
minimize potential loss of contents resulting from damage during IBC 
handling and transportation.
    (c) Each IBC, including attachments, and service and structural 
equipment, must be designed to withstand, without loss of hazardous 
materials, the internal pressure of the contents and the stresses of 
normal handling and transport. An IBC intended for stacking must be 
designed for stacking. Any lifting or securing features of an IBC must 
be of sufficient strength to withstand the normal conditions of handling 
and transportation without gross distortion or failure and must be 
positioned so as to cause no undue stress in any part of the IBC.
    (d) An IBC consisting of a packaging within a framework must be so 
constructed that:
    (1) The body is not damaged by the framework;
    (2) The body is retained within the framework at all times; and
    (3) The service and structural equipment are fixed in such a way 
that they cannot be damaged if the connections between body and frame 
allow relative expansion or movement.
    (e) Bottom discharge valves must be secured in the closed position 
and the discharge system suitably protected from damage. Valves having 
lever closures must be secured against accidental opening. The open or 
closed position of each valve must be readily apparent. For each IBC 
containing a liquid, a secondary means of sealing the discharge aperture 
must also be provided, e.g., by a blank flange or equivalent device.
    (f) IBC design types must be constructed in such a way as to be 
bottom-lifted or top-lifted as specified in Secs. 178.811 and 178.812.

[Amdt. 178-103, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994, as amended at 66 FR 45386, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.705  Standards for metal IBCs.

    (a) The provisions in this section apply to metal IBCs intended to 
contain liquids and solids. Metal IBC types are designated:
    (1) 11A, 11B, 11N for solids that are loaded or discharged by 
gravity.
    (2) 21A, 21B, 21N for solids that are loaded or discharged at a 
gauge pressure greater than 10 kPa (1.45 psig).
    (3) 31A, 31B, 31N for liquids or solids.
    (b) Definitions for metal IBCs:
    (1) Metal IBC means an IBC with a metal body, together with 
appropriate service and structural equipment.
    (2) Protected means providing the IBC body with additional external 
protection against impact and abrasion. For example, a multi-layer 
(sandwich) or double wall construction or a frame with a metal lattice-
work casing.
    (c) Construction requirements for metal IBCs are as follows:
    (1) Body. The body must be made of ductile metal materials. Welds 
must be made so as to maintain design type integrity of the receptacle 
under conditions normally incident to transportation.
    (i) The use of dissimilar metals must not result in deterioration 
that could affect the integrity of the body.
    (ii) Aluminum IBCs intended to contain flammable liquids must have 
no movable parts, such as covers and closures, made of unprotected steel 
liable to rust, which might cause a dangerous reaction from friction or 
percussive contact with the aluminum.
    (iii) Metals used in fabricating the body of a metal IBC must meet 
the following requirements:
    (A) For steel, the percentage elongation at fracture must not be 
less than 10,000/Rm with a minimum of 20 percent; where Rm = minimum 
tensile

[[Page 974]]

strength of the steel to be used, in N/mm\2\; if U.S. Standard units of 
psi are used for tensile strength then the ratio becomes 10,000 x (145/
Rm).
    (B) For aluminum, the percentage elongation at fracture must not be 
less than 10,000/(6Rm) with an absolute minimum of eight percent; if 
U.S. Standard units of psi are used for tensile strength then the ratio 
becomes 10,000 x 145 / (6Rm).
    (C) Specimens used to determine the elongation at fracture must be 
taken transversely to the direction of rolling and be so secured that:

Lo = 5d


or

Lo = 5.65 [radic]A

where:

Lo = gauge length of the specimen before the test
d = diameter
A = cross-sectional area of test specimen.

    (iv) Minimum wall thickness:
    (A) For a reference steel having a product of Rm X Ao = 10,000, 
where Ao is the minimum elongation (as a percentage) of the reference 
steel to be used on fracture under tensile stress, (Rm X Ao = 10,000 X 
145; if tensile strength is in U.S. Standard units of pounds per square 
inch) the wall thickness must not be less than:

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                   Wall thickness (T) in mm
                                  -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Capacity (C) in liters \1\                                                              Types 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B, 31N
                                       Types 11A, 11B, 11N    ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                       Unprotected                 Protected                 Unprotected         Protected
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -----------
C [le] 1000......................  2.0                         1.5                         2.5                        2.0
1000 < C [le] 2000...............  T=C/2000 + 1.5              T=C/2000 + 1.0              T=C/2000 + 2.0             T=C/2000 + 1.5
2000 < C [le] 3000...............  T=C/2000 + 1.5              T=C/2000 + 1.0              T=C/1000 + 1.0             T=C/2000 + 1.5
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Where: gallons = liters X 0.264.

    (B) For metals other than the reference steel described in paragraph 
(c)(1)(iii)(A) of this section, the minimum wall thickness is the 
greater of 1.5 mm (0.059 inches) or as determined by use of the 
following equivalence formula:

                        Formula for Metric Units
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TP26JN96.000

                     Formula for U.S. Standard Units
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TP26JN96.001

where:

e1 = required equivalent wall thickness of the metal to be 
used (in mm or if eo is in inches, use formula for U.S. 
Standard units).
eo = required minimum wall thickness for the reference steel 
(in mm or if eo is in inches, use formula for U.S. Standard 
units).
Rm1 = guaranteed minimum tensile strength of the metal to be 
used (in N/mm\2\ or for U.S. Standard units, use psi).
A1 = minimum elongation (as a percentage) of the metal to be 
used on fracture under tensile stress (see paragraph (c)(1) of this 
section).

    (C) For purposes of the calculation described in paragraph 
(c)(1)(iv)(B) of this section, the guaranteed minimum tensile strength 
of the metal to be used (Rm1) must be the minimum value 
according to material standards. However, for austenitic (stainless) 
steels, the specified minimum value for Rm, according to the material 
standards, may be increased by up to 15% when a greater value is 
provided in the material inspection certificate. When no material 
standard exists for the material in question, the value of Rm must be 
the minimum value indicated in the material inspection certificate.
    (2) Pressure relief. The following pressure relief requirements 
apply to IBCs intended for liquids:
    (i) IBCs must be capable of releasing a sufficient amount of vapor 
in the event of fire engulfment to ensure that no rupture of the body 
will occur due to pressure build-up. This can be

[[Page 975]]

achieved by spring-loaded or non-reclosing pressure relief devices or by 
other means of construction.
    (ii) The start-to-discharge pressure may not be higher than 65 kPa 
(9 psig) and no lower than the vapor pressure of the hazardous material 
plus the partial pressure of the air or other inert gases, measured in 
the IBC at 55  deg.C (131  deg.F), determined on the basis of a maximum 
degree of filling as specified in Sec. 173.35(d) of this subchapter. 
This does not apply to fusible devices unless such devices are the only 
source of pressure relief for the IBC. Pressure relief devices must be 
fitted in the vapor space.

[Amdt. 178-103, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994, as amended by Amdt. 178-108, 
60 FR 40038, Aug. 4, 1995; Amdt. 178-117, 61 FR 50629, Sept. 26, 1996; 
66 FR 33452, June 21, 2001; 66 FR 45386, 45387, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.706  Standards for rigid plastic IBCs.

    (a) The provisions in this section apply to rigid plastic IBCs 
intended to contain solids or liquids. Rigid plastic IBC types are 
designated:
    (1) 11H1 fitted with structural equipment designed to withstand the 
whole load when IBCs are stacked, for solids which are loaded or 
discharged by gravity.
    (2) 11H2 freestanding, for solids which are loaded or discharged by 
gravity.
    (3) 21H1 fitted with structural equipment designed to withstand the 
whole load when IBCs are stacked, for solids which are loaded or 
discharged under pressure.
    (4) 21H2 freestanding, for solids which are loaded or discharged 
under pressure.
    (5) 31H1 fitted with structural equipment designed to withstand the 
whole load when IBCs are stacked, for liquids.
    (6) 31H2 freestanding, for liquids.
    (b) Rigid plastic IBCs consist of a rigid plastic body, which may 
have structural equipment, together with appropriate service equipment.
    (c) Rigid plastic IBCs must be manufactured from plastic material of 
known specifications and be of a strength relative to its capacity and 
to the service it is required to perform. In addition to conformance to 
Sec. 173.24 of this subchapter, plastic materials must be resistant to 
aging and to degradation caused by ultraviolet radiation.
    (1) If protection against ultraviolet radiation is necessary, it 
must be provided by the addition of a pigment or inhibiter such as 
carbon black. These additives must be compatible with the contents and 
remain effective throughout the life of the IBC body. Where use is made 
of carbon black, pigments or inhibitors, other than those used in the 
manufacture of the tested design type, retesting may be omitted if 
changes in the carbon black content, the pigment content or the 
inhibitor content do not adversely affect the physical properties of the 
material of construction.
    (2) Additives may be included in the composition of the plastic 
material to improve the resistance to aging or to serve other purposes, 
provided they do not adversely affect the physical or chemical 
properties of the material of construction.
    (3) No used material other than production residues or regrind from 
the same manufacturing process may be used in the manufacture of rigid 
plastic IBCs.
    (4) Rigid plastic IBCs intended for the transportation of liquids 
must be capable of releasing a sufficient amount of vapor to prevent the 
body of the IBC from rupturing if it is subjected to an internal 
pressure in excess of that for which it was hydraulically tested. This 
may be achieved by spring-loaded or non-reclosing pressure relief 
devices or by other means of construction.

[Amdt. 178-103, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994, as amended at 66 FR 45386, 
45387, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.707  Standards for composite IBCs.

    (a) The provisions in this section apply to composite IBCs intended 
to contain solids and liquids. To complete the marking codes listed 
below, the letter ``Z'' must be replaced by a capital letter in 
accordance with Sec. 178.702(a)(2) to indicate the material used for the 
outer packaging. Composite IBC types are designated:
    (1) 11HZ1 Composite IBCs with a rigid plastic inner receptacle for 
solids loaded or discharged by gravity.
    (2) 11HZ2 Composite IBCs with a flexible plastic inner receptacle 
for solids loaded or discharged by gravity.

[[Page 976]]

    (3) 21HZ1 Composite IBCs with a rigid plastic inner receptacle for 
solids loaded or discharged under pressure.
    (4) 21HZ2 Composite IBCs with a flexible plastic inner receptacle 
for solids loaded or discharged under pressure.
    (5) 31HZ1 Composite IBCs with a rigid plastic inner receptacle for 
liquids.
    (6) 31HZ2 Composite IBCs with a flexible plastic inner receptacle 
for liquids.
    (b) Definitions for composite IBC types:
    (1) A composite IBC is an IBC which consists of a rigid outer 
packaging enclosing a plastic inner receptacle together with any service 
or other structural equipment. The outer packaging of a composite IBC is 
designed to bear the entire stacking load. The inner receptacle and 
outer packaging form an integral packaging and are filled, stored, 
transported, and emptied as a unit.
    (2) The term plastic means polymeric materials (i.e., plastic or 
rubber).
    (3) A ``rigid'' inner receptacle is an inner receptacle which 
retains its general shape when empty without closures in place and 
without benefit of the outer casing. Any inner receptacle that is not 
``rigid'' is considered to be ``flexible.''
    (c) Construction requirements for composite IBCs with plastic inner 
receptacles are as follows:
    (1) The outer packaging must consist of rigid material formed so as 
to protect the inner receptacle from physical damage during handling and 
transportation, but is not required to perform the secondary containment 
function. It includes the base pallet where appropriate. The inner 
receptacle is not intended to perform a containment function without the 
outer packaging.
    (2) A composite IBC with a fully enclosing outer packaging must be 
designed to permit assessment of the integrity of the inner container 
following the leakproofness and hydraulic tests. The outer packaging of 
31HZ2 composite IBCs must enclose the inner receptacles on all sides.
    (3) The inner receptacle must be manufactured from plastic material 
of known specifications and be of a strength relative to its capacity 
and to the service it is required to perform. In addition to conformance 
with the requirements of Sec. 173.24 of this subchapter, the material 
must be resistant to aging and to degradation caused by ultraviolet 
radiation. The inner receptacle of 31HZ2 composite IBCs must consist of 
at least three plies of film.
    (i) If necessary, protection against ultraviolet radiation must be 
provided by the addition of pigments or inhibitors such as carbon black. 
These additives must be compatible with the contents and remain 
effective throughout the life of the inner receptacle. Where use is made 
of carbon black, pigments, or inhibitors, other than those used in the 
manufacture of the tested design type, retesting may be omitted if the 
carbon black content, the pigment content, or the inhibitor content do 
not adversely affect the physical properties of the material of 
construction.
    (ii) Additives may be included in the composition of the plastic 
material of the inner receptacle to improve resistance to aging, 
provided they do not adversely affect the physical or chemical 
properties of the material.
    (iii) No used material other than production residues or regrind 
from the same manufacturing process may be used in the manufacture of 
inner receptacles.
    (iv) Composite INCs intended for the transportation of liquids must 
be capable of releasing a sufficient amount of vapor to prevent the body 
of the IBC from rupturing if it is subjected to an internal pressure in 
excess of that for which it was hydraulically tested. This may be 
achieved by spring-loaded or non-reclosing pressure relief devices or by 
other means of construction.
    (4) The strength of the construction material comprising the outer 
packaging and the manner of construction must be appropriate to the 
capacity of the composite IBC and its intended use. The outer packaging 
must be free of any projection that might damage the inner receptacle.
    (i) Outer packagings of natural wood must be constructed of well 
seasoned wood that is commercially dry and free from defects that would 
materially lessen the strength of any part of the outer packaging. The 
tops and bottoms

[[Page 977]]

may be made of water-resistant reconstituted wood such as hardboard or 
particle board. Materials other than natural wood may be used for 
construction of structural equipment of the outer packaging.
    (ii) Outer packagings of plywood must be made of well-seasoned, 
rotary cut, sliced, or sawn veneer, commercially dry and free from 
defects that would materially lessen the strength of the casing. All 
adjacent plies must be glued with water-resistant adhesive. Materials 
other than plywood may be used for construction of structural equipment 
of the outer packaging. Outer packagings must be firmly nailed or 
secured to corner posts or ends or be assembled by equally suitable 
devices.
    (iii) Outer packagings of reconstituted wood must be constructed of 
water-resistant reconstituted wood such as hardboard or particle board. 
Materials other than reconstituted wood may be used for the construction 
of structural equipment of reconstituted wood outer packaging.
    (iv) Fiberboard outer packagings must be constructed of strong, 
solid, or double-faced corrugated fiberboard (single or multiwall).
    (A) Water resistance of the outer surface must be such that the 
increase in mass, as determined in a test carried out over a period of 
30 minutes by the Cobb method of determining water absorption, is not 
greater than 155 grams per square meter (0.0316 pounds per square foot--
see ISO International Standard 535-1976 (E)). Fiberboard must have 
proper bending qualities. Fiberboard must be cut, creased without 
cutting through any thickness of fiberboard, and slotted so as to permit 
assembly without cracking, surface breaks, or undue bending. The fluting 
of corrugated fiberboard must be firmly glued to the facings.
    (B) The ends of fiberboard outer packagings may have a wooden frame 
or be constructed entirely of wood. Wooden battens may be used for 
reinforcements.
    (C) Manufacturers' joints in the bodies of outer packagings must be 
taped, lapped and glued, or lapped and stitched with metal staples.
    (D) Lapped joints must have an appropriate overlap.
    (E) Where closing is effected by gluing or taping, a water-resistant 
adhesive must be used.
    (F) All closures must be sift-proof.
    (v) Outer packagings of plastic materials must be constructed in 
accordance with the relevant provisions of paragraph (c)(3) of this 
section.
    (5) Any integral pallet base forming part of an IBC, or any 
detachable pallet, must be suitable for the mechanical handling of an 
IBC filled to its maximum permissible gross mass.
    (i) The pallet or integral base must be designed to avoid 
protrusions that may cause damage to the IBC in handling.
    (ii) The outer packaging must be secured to any detachable pallet to 
ensure stability in handling and transportation. Where a detachable 
pallet is used, its top surface must be free from sharp protrusions that 
might damage the IBC.
    (iii) Strengthening devices, such as timber supports to increase 
stacking performance, may be used but must be external to the inner 
receptacle.
    (iv) The load-bearing surfaces of IBCs intended for stacking must be 
designed to distribute loads in a stable manner. An IBC intended for 
stacking must be designed so that loads are not supported by the inner 
receptacle.
    (6) Intermediate IBCs of type 31HZ2 must be limited to a capacity of 
not more than 1,250 L.

[Amdt. 178-103, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994, as amended by Amdt. 178-119, 
62 FR 24743, May 6, 1997; 66 FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 61016, Sept. 
27, 2002]



Sec. 178.708  Standards for fiberboard IBCs.

    (a) The provisions of this section apply to fiberboard IBCs intended 
to contain solids that are loaded or discharged by gravity. Fiberboard 
IBCs are designated: 11G.
    (b) Definitions for fiberboard IBC types:
    (1) Fiberboard IBCs consist of a fiberboard body with or without 
separate top and bottom caps, appropriate service and structural 
equipment, and if necessary an inner liner (but no inner packaging).

[[Page 978]]

    (2) Liner means a separate tube or bag, including the closures of 
its openings, inserted in the body but not forming an integral part of 
it.
    (c) Construction requirements for fiberboard IBCs are as follows:
    (1) Top lifting devices are prohibited in fiberboard IBCs.
    (2) Fiberboard IBCs must be constructed of strong, solid or double-
faced corrugated fiberboard (single or multiwall) that is appropriate to 
the capacity of the outer packaging and its intended use. Water 
resistance of the outer surface must be such that the increase in mass, 
as determined in a test carried out over a period of 30 minutes by the 
Cobb method of determining water absorption, is not greater than 155 
grams per square meter (0.0316 pounds per square foot see ISO 535-
1976(E)). Fiberboard must have proper bending qualities. Fiberboard must 
be cut, creased without cutting through any thickness of fiberboard, and 
slotted so as to permit assembly without cracking, surface breaks, or 
undue bending. The fluting of corrugated fiberboard must be firmly glued 
to the facings.
    (i) The walls, including top and bottom, must have a minimum 
puncture resistance of 15 Joules (11 foot-pounds of energy) measured 
according to ISO 3036, incorporated by reference in Sec. 171.7 of this 
subchapter.
    (ii) Manufacturers' joints in the bodies of IBCs must be made with 
an appropriate overlap and be taped, glued, stitched with metal staples 
or fastened by other means at least equally effective. Where joints are 
made by gluing or taping, a water-resistant adhesive must be used. Metal 
staples must pass completely through all pieces to be fastened and be 
formed or protected so that any inner liner cannot be abraded or 
punctured by them.
    (3) The strength of the material used and the construction of the 
liner must be appropriate to the capacity of the IBC and the intended 
use. Joints and closures must be sift-proof and capable of withstanding 
pressures and impacts liable to occur under normal conditions of 
handling and transport.
    (4) Any integral pallet base forming part of an IBC, or any 
detachable pallet, must be suitable for the mechanical handling of an 
IBC filled to its maximum permissible gross mass.
    (i) The pallet or integral base must be designed to avoid 
protrusions that may cause damage to the IBC in handling.
    (ii) The outer packaging must be secured to any detachable pallet to 
ensure stability in handling and transport. Where a detachable pallet is 
used, its top surface must be free from sharp protrusions that might 
damage the IBC.
    (iii) Strengthening devices, such as timber supports to increase 
stacking performance, may be used but must be external to the inner 
liner.
    (iv) The load-bearing surfaces of IBCs intended for stacking must be 
designed to distribute loads in a stable manner.

[Amdt. 178-103, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994, as amended at 66 FR 45386, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.709  Standards for wooden IBCs.

    (a) The provisions in this section apply to wooden IBCs intended to 
contain solids that are loaded or discharged by gravity. Wooden IBC 
types are designated:
    (1) 11C Natural wood with inner liner.
    (2) 11D Plywood with inner liner.
    (3) 11F Reconstituted wood with inner liner.
    (b) Definitions for wooden IBCs:
    (1) Wooden IBCs consist of a rigid or collapsible wooden body 
together with an inner liner (but no inner packaging) and appropriate 
service and structural equipment.
    (2) Liner means a separate tube or bag, including the closures of 
its openings, inserted in the body but not forming an integral part of 
it.
    (c) Construction requirements for wooden IBCs are as follows:
    (1) Top lifting devices are prohibited in wooden IBCs.
    (2) The strength of the materials used and the method of 
construction must be appropriate to the capacity and intended use of the 
IBC.
    (i) Natural wood used in the construction of an IBC must be well-
seasoned, commercially dry, and free from defects that would materially 
lessen the strength of any part of the IBC. Each IBC part must consist 
of uncut wood or a piece equivalent in strength and integrity. IBC parts 
are equivalent

[[Page 979]]

to one piece when a suitable method of glued assembly is used (i.e., a 
Lindermann joint, tongue and groove joint, ship lap or rabbet joint, or 
butt joint with at least two corrugated metal fasteners at each joint, 
or when other methods at least equally effective are used). Materials 
other than natural wood may be used for the construction of structural 
equipment of the outer packaging.
    (ii) Plywood used in construction of bodies must be at least 3-ply. 
Plywood must be made of well-seasoned, rotary-cut, sliced or sawn 
veneer, commercially dry, and free from defects that would materially 
lessen the strength of the body. All adjacent plies must be glued with 
water-resistant adhesive. Materials other than plywood may be used for 
the construction of structural equipment of the outer packaging.
    (iii) Reconstituted wood used in construction of bodies must be 
water resistant reconstituted wood such as hardboard or particle board. 
Materials other than reconstituted wood may be used for the construction 
of structural equipment of the outer packaging.
    (iv) Wooden IBCs must be firmly nailed or secured to corner posts or 
ends or be assembled by similar devices.
    (3) The strength of the material used and the construction of the 
liner must be appropriate to the capacity of the IBC and its intended 
use. Joints and closures must be sift-proof and capable of withstanding 
pressures and impacts liable to occur under normal conditions of 
handling and transportation.
    (4) Any integral pallet base forming part of an IBC, or any 
detachable pallet, must be suitable for the mechanical handling of an 
IBC filled to its maximum permissible gross mass.
    (i) The pallet or integral base must be designed to avoid 
protrusions that may cause damage to the IBC in handling.
    (ii) The outer packaging must be secured to any detachable pallet to 
ensure stability in handling and transportation. Where a detachable 
pallet is used, its top surface must be free from sharp protrusions that 
might damage the IBC.
    (iii) Strengthening devices, such as timber supports to increase 
stacking performance, may be used but must be external to the inner 
liner.
    (iv) The load-bearing surfaces of IBCs intended for stacking must be 
designed to distribute loads in a stable manner.

[Amdt. 178-103, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994, as amended at 66 FR 45386, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.710  Standards for flexible IBCs.

    (a) The provisions of this section apply to flexible IBCs intended 
to contain solid hazardous materials. Flexible IBC types are designated:
    (1) 13H1 woven plastic without coating or liner.
    (2) 13H2 woven plastic, coated.
    (3) 13H3 woven plastic with liner.
    (4) 13H4 woven plastic, coated and with liner.
    (5) 13H5 plastic film.
    (6) 13L1 textile without coating or liner.
    (7) 13L2 textile, coated.
    (8) 13L3 textile with liner.
    (9) 13L4 textile, coated and with liner.
    (10) 13M1 paper, multiwall.
    (11) 13M2 paper, multiwall, water resistant.
    (b) Definitions for flexible IBCs:
    (1) Flexible IBCs consist of a body constructed of film, woven 
plastic, woven fabric, paper, or combination thereof, together with any 
appropriate service equipment and handling devices, and if necessary, an 
inner coating or liner.
    (2) Woven plastic means a material made from stretched tapes or 
monofilaments.
    (3) Handling device means any sling, loop, eye, or frame attached to 
the body of the IBC or formed from a continuation of the IBC body 
material.
    (c) Construction requirements for flexible IBCs are as follows:
    (1) The strength of the material and the construction of the 
flexible IBC must be appropriate to its capacity and its intended use.
    (2) All materials used in the construction of flexible IBCs of types 
13M1 and 13M2 must, after complete immersion in water for not less than 
24 hours, retain at least 85 percent of the tensile strength as measured 
originally on the material conditioned to equilibrium at 67 percent 
relative humidity or less.

[[Page 980]]

    (3) Seams must be stitched or formed by heat sealing, gluing or any 
equivalent method. All stitched seam-ends must be secured.
    (4) In addition to conformance with the requirements of Sec. 173.24 
of this subchapter, flexible IBCs must be resistant to aging and 
degradation caused by ultraviolet radiation.
    (5) For plastic flexible IBCs, if necessary, protection against 
ultraviolet radiation must be provided by the addition of pigments or 
inhibitors such as carbon black. These additives must be compatible with 
the contents and remain effective throughout the life of the container. 
Where use is made of carbon black, pigments, or inhibitors, other than 
those used in the manufacture of the tested design type, retesting may 
be omitted if the carbon black content, the pigment content or the 
inhibitor content does not adversely affect the physical properties of 
the material of construction. Additives may be included in the 
composition of the plastic material to improve resistance to aging, 
provided they do not adversely affect the physical or chemical 
properties of the material.
    (6) No used material other than production residues or regrind from 
the same manufacturing process may be used in the manufacture of plastic 
flexible IBCs. This does not preclude the re-use of component parts such 
as fittings and pallet bases, provided such components have not in any 
way been damaged in previous use.
    (7) When flexible IBCs are filled, the ratio of height to width may 
not be more than 2:1.

[Amdt. 178-103, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994, as amended by Amdt. 178-108, 
60 FR 40038, Aug. 4, 1995; 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001]



                       Subpart O--Testing of IBCs

    Source: Amdt. 178-103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, unless otherwise 
noted.



Sec. 178.800  Purpose and scope.

    This subpart prescribes certain testing requirements for IBCs 
identified in subpart N of this part.

[Amdt. 178-103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as amended by 66 FR 45386, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.801  General requirements.

    (a) General. The test procedures prescribed in this subpart are 
intended to ensure that IBCs containing hazardous materials can 
withstand normal conditions of transportation and are considered minimum 
requirements. Each packaging must be manufactured and assembled so as to 
be capable of successfully passing the prescribed tests and of 
conforming to the requirements of Sec. 173.24 of this subchapter at all 
times while in transportation.
    (b) Responsibility. It is the responsibility of the IBC manufacturer 
to assure that each IBC is capable of passing the prescribed tests. To 
the extent that an IBC assembly function, including final closure, is 
performed by the person who offers a hazardous material for 
transportation, that person is responsible for performing the function 
in accordance with Secs. 173.22 and 178.2 of this subchapter.
    (c) Definitions. For the purpose of this subpart:
    (1) IBC design type refers to IBC which does not differ in 
structural design, size, material of construction, wall thickness, 
manner of construction and representative service equipment.
    (2) Design qualification testing is the performance of the drop, 
leakproofness, hydrostatic pressure, stacking, bottom-lift or top-lift, 
tear, topple, righting and vibration tests, as applicable, prescribed in 
this subpart, for each different IBC design type, at the start of 
production of that packaging.
    (3) Periodic design requalification test is the performance of the 
applicable tests specified in paragraph (c)(2) of this section on an IBC 
design type, in order to requalify the design for continued production 
at the frequency specified in paragraph (e) of this section.
    (4) Production inspection is the inspection that must initially be 
conducted on each newly manufactured IBC.
    (5) Production testing is the performance of the leakproofness test 
in accordance with paragraph (f) of this section on each IBC intended to 
contain solids discharged by pressure or intended to contain liquids.
    (6) Periodic retest and inspection is performance of the applicable 
test and inspections on each IBC at the frequency specified in 
Sec. 180.352 of this subchapter.

[[Page 981]]

    (7) Different IBC design type is one that differs from a previously 
qualified IBC design type in structural design, size, material of 
construction, wall thickness, or manner of construction, but does not 
include:
    (i) A packaging which differs in surface treatment;
    (ii) A rigid plastic IBC or composite IBC which differs with regard 
to additives used to comply with Secs. 178.706(c), 178.707(c) or 
178.710(c);
    (iii) A packaging which differs only in its lesser external 
dimensions (i.e., height, width, length) provided materials of 
construction and material thicknesses or fabric weight remain the same;
    (iv) A packaging which differs in service equipment.
    (d) Design qualification testing. The packaging manufacturer shall 
achieve successful test results for the design qualification testing at 
the start of production of each new or different IBC design type. The 
service equipment selected for this design qualification testing shall 
be representative of the type of service equipment that will be fitted 
to any finished IBC body under the design. Application of the 
certification mark by the manufacturer shall constitute certification 
that the IBC design type passed the prescribed tests in this subpart.
    (e) Periodic design requalification testing. (1) Periodic design 
requalification must be conducted on each qualified IBC design type if 
the manufacturer is to maintain authorization for continued production. 
The IBC manufacturer shall achieve successful test results for the 
periodic design requalification at sufficient frequency to ensure each 
packaging produced by the manufacturer is capable of passing the design 
qualification tests. Design requalification tests must be conducted at 
least once every 12 months.
    (2) Changes in the frequency of design requalification testing 
specified in paragraph (e)(1) of this section are authorized if approved 
by the Associate Administrator. These requests must be based on:
    (i) Detailed quality assurance programs that assure that proposed 
decreases in test frequency maintain the integrity of originally tested 
IBC design types; and
    (ii) Demonstrations that each IBC produced is capable of 
withstanding higher standards (e.g., increased drop height, hydrostatic 
pressure, wall thickness, fabric weight).
    (f) Production testing and inspection. (1) Production testing 
consists of the leakproofness test prescribed in Sec. 178.813 of this 
subpart and must be performed on each IBC intended to contain solids 
discharged by pressure or intended to contain liquids. For this test:
    (i) The IBC need not have its closures fitted.
    (ii) The inner receptacle of a composite IBC may be tested without 
the outer IBC body, provided the test results are not affected.
    (2) Applicable inspection requirements in Sec. 180.352 of this 
subchapter must be performed on each IBC initially after production.
    (g) Test samples. The IBC manufacturer shall conduct the design 
qualification and periodic design requalification tests prescribed in 
this subpart using random samples of IBCs, according to the appropriate 
test section.
    (h) Selective testing of IBCs. Variation of a tested IBC design type 
is permitted without further testing, provided selective testing 
demonstrates an equivalent or greater level of safety than the design 
type tested and which has been approved by the Associate Administrator.
    (i) Approval of equivalent packagings. An IBC which differs from the 
standards in subpart N of this part, or which is tested using methods 
other than those specified in this subpart, may be used if approved by 
the Associate Administrator. Such IBCs must be shown to be equally 
effective, and testing methods used must be equivalent. A large 
packaging, as defined in Sec. 171.8 of this subchapter, may be used if 
approved by the Associate Administrator. The large packaging must 
conform to the construction standards, performance testing and packaging 
marking requirements specified in the UN Recommendations.
    (j) Proof of compliance. Notwithstanding the periodic design 
requalification testing intervals specified in

[[Page 982]]

paragraph (e) of this section, the Associate Administrator, or a 
designated representative, may at any time require demonstration of 
compliance by a manufacturer, through testing in accordance with this 
subpart, that packagings meet the requirements of this subpart. As 
required by the Associate Administrator, or a designated representative, 
the manufacturer shall either:
    (1) Conduct performance tests or have tests conducted by an 
independent testing facility, in accordance with this subpart; or
    (2) Make a sample IBC available to the Associate Administrator, or a 
designated representative, for testing in accordance with this subpart.
    (k) Coatings. If an inner treatment or coating of an IBC is required 
for safety reasons, the manufacturer shall design the IBC so that the 
treatment or coating retains its protective properties even after 
withstanding the tests prescribed by this subpart.
    (l) Record retention. (1) The person who certifies an IBC design 
type shall keep records of design qualification tests for each IBC 
design type and for each periodic design requalification as specified in 
this part. These records must be maintained at each location where the 
IBC is manufactured and at each location where design qualification and 
periodic design requalification testing is performed. These records must 
be maintained for as long as IBCs are manufactured in accordance with 
each qualified design type and for at least 2.5 years thereafter. These 
records must include the following information: name and address of test 
facility; name and address of the person certifying the IBC; a unique 
test report identification; date of test report; manufacturer of the 
IBC; description of the IBC design type (e.g., dimensions, materials, 
closures, thickness, representative service equipment, etc.); maximum 
IBC capacity; characteristics of test contents; test descriptions and 
results (including drop heights, hydrostatic pressures, tear propagation 
length, etc.). Each test report must be signed with the name of the 
person conducting the test, and name of the person responsible for 
testing.
    (2) The person who certifies each IBC must make all records of 
design qualification tests and periodic design requalification tests 
available for inspection by a representative of the Department upon 
request.

[Amdt. 178-103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as amended by Amdt. 178-108, 
60 FR 40038, Aug. 4, 1995; 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 66 FR 33452, June 
21, 2001]



Sec. 178.802  Preparation of fiberboard IBCs for testing.

    (a) Fiberboard IBCs and composite IBCs with fiberboard outer 
packagings must be conditioned for at least 24 hours in an atmosphere 
maintained:
    (1) At 50 percent  2 percent relative humidity, and at a 
temperature of 23 deg.  2  deg.C (73  deg.F  4 
deg.F); or
    (2) At 65 percent  2 percent relative humidity, and at a 
temperature of 20 deg.  2  deg.C (68  deg.F  4 
deg.F), or 27  deg.C  2  deg.C (81  deg.F  4 
deg.F).
    (b) Average values for temperature and humidity must fall within the 
limits in paragraph (a) of this section. Short-term fluctuations and 
measurement limitations may cause individual measurements to vary by up 
to  5 percent relative humidity without significant 
impairment of test reproducibility.
    (c) For purposes of periodic design requalification only, fiberboard 
IBCs or composite IBCs with fiberboard outer packagings may be at 
ambient conditions.

[Amdt. 178-103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as amended at 66 FR 45386, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.803  Testing and certification of IBCs.

    Tests required for the certification of each IBC design type are 
specified in the following table. The letter X indicates that one IBC 
(except where noted) of each design type must be subjected to the tests 
in the order presented:

[[Page 983]]



--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                          IBC type
         Performance test         ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                       Metal IBCs      Rigid plastic IBCs    Composite IBCs     Fiber-board IBCs       Wooden IBCs       Flexible IBCs
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Vibration........................  6 X                 6 X                 6 X                 6 X                 6 X                 1.5 X
Bottom lift......................  2 X                 X                   X                   X                   X                   .................
Top lift.........................  2 X                 2 X                 2 X                 ..................  ..................  2,5 X
Stacking.........................  7 X                 7 X                 7 X                 7 X                 7 X                 5 X
Leakproofness....................  3 X                 3 X                 3 X                 ..................  ..................  .................
Hydrostatic......................  3 X                 3 X                 3 X                 ..................  ..................  .................
Drop.............................  4 X                 4 X                 4 X                 4 X                 4 X                 5 X
Topple...........................  ..................  ..................  ..................  ..................  ..................  5 X
Righting.........................  ..................  ..................  ..................  ..................  ..................  2,5 X
Tear.............................  ..................  ..................  ..................  ..................  ..................  5 X
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Flexible IBCs must be capable of withstanding the vibration test.
\2\ This test must be performed only if IBCs are designed to be handled this way. For metal IBCs, at least one of the bottom lift or top lift tests must
  be performed.
\3\ The leakproofness and hydrostatic pressure tests are required only for IBCs intended to contain liquids or intended to contain solids loaded or
  discharged under pressure.
\4\ Another IBC of the same design type may be used for the drop test set forth in Sec.  178.810 of this subchapter.
\5\ Another different flexible IBC of the same design type may be used for each test.
\6\ The vibration test may be performed in another order for IBCs manufactured and tested under provisions of an exemption before October 1, 1994 and
  for non-DOT specification portable tanks tested before October 1, 1994, intended for export.
\7\ This test must be performed only if the IBC is designed to be stacked.


[Amdt. 178-108, 60 FR 40039, Aug. 4, 1995, as amended at 64 FR 51919, 
Sept. 27, 1999; 66 FR 45386, 45390, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.810  Drop test.

    (a) General. The drop test must be conducted for the qualification 
of all IBC design types and performed periodically as specified in 
Sec. 178.801(e) of this subpart.
    (b) Special preparation for the drop test. (1) Metal, rigid plastic, 
and composite IBCs intended to contain solids must be filled to not less 
than 95 percent of their capacity, or if intended to contain liquids, to 
not less than 98 percent of their capacity. Pressure relief devices must 
be removed and their apertures plugged or rendered inoperative.
    (2) Fiberboard, wooden, and flexible IBCs must be filled with a 
solid material to not less than 95 percent of their capacity.
    (3) Rigid plastic IBCs and composite IBCs with plastic inner 
receptacles must be conditioned for testing by reducing the temperature 
of the packaging and its contents to -18  deg.C (0  deg.F) or lower. 
Test liquids must be kept in the liquid state. Anti-freeze should be 
used, if necessary.
    (c) Test method. Samples of all IBC design types must be dropped 
onto a rigid, non-resilient, smooth, flat and horizontal surface. The 
point of impact must be the most vulnerable part of the base of the IBC 
being tested. Following the drop, the IBC must be restored to the 
upright position for observation.
    (d) Drop height. (1) For all IBCs, drop heights are specified as 
follows:
    (i) Packing Group I: 1.8 m (5.9 feet).
    (ii) Packing Group II: 1.2 m (3.9 feet).
    (iii) Packing Group III: 0.8 m (2.6 feet).
    (2) Drop tests are to be performed with the solid or liquid to be 
transported or with a non-hazardous material having essentially the same 
physical characteristics.
    (3) The specific gravity and viscosity of a substituted non-
hazardous material used in the drop test for liquids must be similar to 
the hazardous material intended for transportation. Water also may be 
used for the liquid drop test under the following conditions:
    (i) Where the substances to be carried have a specific gravity not 
exceeding 1.2, the drop heights must be those specified in paragraph 
(d)(1) of this section for each IBC design type; and
    (ii) Where the substances to be carried have a specific gravity 
exceeding 1.2, the drop heights must be as follows:
    (A) Packing Group I: SG x 1.5 m (4.9 feet).
    (B) Packing Group II: SG x 1.0 m (3.3 feet).
    (C) Packing Group III: SG x 0.67 m (2.2 feet).
    (e) Criteria for passing the test. For all IBC design types there 
may be no loss of contents. A slight discharge from a

[[Page 984]]

closure upon impact is not considered to be a failure of the IBC 
provided that no further leakage occurs. A slight discharge (e.g., from 
closures or stitch holes) upon impact is not considered a failure of the 
flexible IBC provided that no further leakage occurs after the IBC has 
been raised clear of the ground.

[Amdt. 178-103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as amended at 66 FR 45386, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.811  Bottom lift test.

    (a) General. The bottom lift test must be conducted for the 
qualification of all IBC design types designed to be lifted from the 
base.
    (b) Special preparation for the bottom lift test. The IBC must be 
loaded to 1.25 times its maximum permissible gross mass, the load being 
evenly distributed.
    (c) Test method. All IBC design types must be raised and lowered 
twice by a lift truck with the forks centrally positioned and spaced at 
three quarters of the dimension of the side of entry (unless the points 
of entry are fixed). The forks must penetrate to three quarters of the 
direction of entry. The test must be repeated from each possible 
direction of entry.
    (d) Criteria for passing the test. For all IBC design types designed 
to be lifted from the base, there may be no permanent deformation which 
renders the IBC unsafe for transportation and no loss of contents.

[Amdt. 178-103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as amended at 66 FR 45386, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.812  Top lift test.

    (a) General. The top lift test must be conducted for the 
qualification of all IBC design types designed to be lifted from the top 
or, for flexible IBCs, from the side.
    (b) Special preparation for the top lift test. (1) Metal, rigid 
plastic, and composite IBC design types must be loaded to twice the 
maximum permissible gross mass.
    (2) Flexible IBC design types must be filled to six times the 
maximum net mass, the load being evenly distributed.
    (c) Test method. (1) A metal or flexible IBC must be lifted in the 
manner for which it is designed until clear of the floor and maintained 
in that position for a period of five minutes.
    (2) Rigid plastic and composite IBC design types must be:
    (i) Lifted by each pair of diagonally opposite lifting devices, so 
that the hoisting forces are applied vertically, for a period of five 
minutes; and
    (ii) Lifted by each pair of diagonally opposite lifting devices, so 
that the hoisting forces are applied towards the center at 45 deg. to 
the vertical, for a period of five minutes.
    (3) If not tested as indicated in paragraph (c)(1) of this section, 
a flexible IBC design type must be tested as follows:
    (i) Fill the flexible IBC to 95% full with a material representative 
of the product to be shipped.
    (ii) Suspend the flexible IBC by its lifting devices.
    (iii) Apply a constant downward force through a specially designed 
platen. The platen will be a minimum of 60% and a maximum of 80% of the 
cross sectional surface area of the flexible IBC.
    (iv) The combination of the mass of the filled flexible IBC and the 
force applied through the platen must be a minimum of six times the 
maximum net mass of the flexible IBC. The test must be conducted for a 
period of five minutes.
    (v) Other equally effective methods of top lift testing and 
preparation may be used with approval of the Associate Administrator.
    (d) Criteria for passing the test. For all IBC design types designed 
to be lifted from the top, there may be no permanent deformation which 
renders the IBC, including the base pallets when applicable, unsafe for 
transportation, and no loss of contents.

[Amdt. 178-103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as amended at 66 FR 33452, 
June 21, 2001; 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.813  Leakproofness test.

    (a) General. The leakproofness test must be conducted for the 
qualification of all IBC design types and on all production units 
intended to contain solids that are loaded or discharged under pressure 
or intended to contain liquids.
    (b) Special preparation for the leakproofness test. Vented closures 
must

[[Page 985]]

either be replaced by similar non-vented closures or the vent must be 
sealed. For metal IBC design types, the initial test must be carried out 
before the fitting of any thermal insulation equipment. The inner 
receptacle of a composite IBC may be tested without the outer packaging 
provided the test results are not affected.
    (c) Test method and pressure applied. The leakproofness test must be 
carried out for a suitable length of time using air at a gauge pressure 
of not less than 20 kPa (2.9 psig). Leakproofness of IBC design types 
must be determined by coating the seams and joints with a heavy oil, a 
soap solution and water, or other methods suitable for the purpose of 
detecting leaks. Other methods, if at least equally effective, may be 
used in accordance with appendix B of this part, or if approved by the 
Associate Administrator, as provided in Sec. 178.801(i)).
    (d) Criterion for passing the test. For all IBC design types 
intended to contain solids that are loaded or discharged under pressure 
or intended to contain liquids, there may be no leakage of air from the 
IBC.

[Amdt. 178-103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as amended at 64 FR 10782, 
Mar. 5, 1999; 66 FR 45185, 45386, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.814  Hydrostatic pressure test.

    (a) General. The hydrostatic pressure test must be conducted for the 
qualification of all metal, rigid plastic, and composite IBC design 
types intended to contain solids that are loaded or discharged under 
pressure or intended to contain liquids.
    (b) Special preparation for the hydrostatic pressure test. For metal 
IBCs, the test must be carried out before the fitting of any thermal 
insulation equipment. For all IBCs, pressure relief devices and vented 
closures must be removed and their apertures plugged or rendered 
inoperative.
    (c) Test method. Hydrostatic gauge pressure must be measured at the 
top of the IBC. The test must be carried out for a period of at least 10 
minutes applying a hydrostatic gauge pressure not less than that 
indicated in paragraph (d) of this section. The IBCs may not be 
mechanically restrained during the test.
    (d) Hydrostatic gauge pressure applied. (1) For metal IBC design 
types, 31A, 31B, 31N: 65 kPa gauge pressure (9.4 psig).
    (2) For metal IBC design types 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B, 31N: 200 kPa 
(29 psig). For metal IBC design types 31A, 31B and 31N, the tests in 
paragraphs (d)(1) and (d)(2) of this section must be conducted 
consecutively.
    (3) For metal IBCs design types 21A, 21B, and 21N, for Packing Group 
I solids: 250 kPa (36 psig) gauge pressure.
    (4) For rigid plastic IBC design types 21H1 and 21H2 and composite 
IBC design types 21HZ1 and 21HZ2: 75 kPa (11 psig).
    (5) For rigid plastic IBC design types 31H1 and 31H2 and composite 
IBC design types 31HZ1 and 31HZ2: whichever is the greater of:
    (i) The pressure determined by any one of the following methods:
    (A) The gauge pressure (pressure in the IBC above ambient 
atmospheric pressure) measured in the IBC at 55  deg.C (131  deg.F) 
multiplied by a safety factor of 1.5. This pressure must be determined 
on the basis of the IBC being filled and closed to no more than 98 
percent capacity at 15  deg.C (60  deg.F);
    (B) If absolute pressure (vapor pressure of the hazardous material 
plus atmospheric pressure) is used, 1.5 multiplied by the vapor pressure 
of the hazardous material at 55  deg.C (131  deg.F) minus 100 kPa (14.5 
psi). If this method is chosen, the hydrostatic test pressure applied 
must be at least 100 kPa gauge pressure (14.5 psig); or
    (C) If absolute pressure (vapor pressure of the hazardous material 
plus atmospheric pressure) is used, 1.75 multiplied by the vapor 
pressure of the hazardous material at 50  deg.C (122  deg.F) minus 100 
kPa (14.5 psi). If this method is chosen, the hydrostatic test pressure 
applied must be at least 100 kPa gauge pressure (14.5 psig); or
    (ii) Twice the greater of: (A) The static pressure of the hazardous 
material on the bottom of the IBC filled to 98 percent capacity; or
    (B) The static pressure of water on the bottom of the IBC filled to 
98 percent capacity.
    (e) Criteria for passing the test(s). (1) For metal IBCs, subjected 
to the 65 kPa (9.4 psig) test pressure specified in

[[Page 986]]

paragraph (d)(1) of this section, there may be no leakage or permanent 
deformation that would make the IBC unsafe for transportation.
    (2) For metal IBCs intended to contain liquids, when subjected to 
the 200 kPa (29 psig) and the 250 kPa (36 psig) test pressures specified 
in paragraphs (d)(2) and (d)(3) of this section, respectively, there may 
be no leakage.
    (3) For rigid plastic IBC types 21H1, 21H2, 31H1, and 31H2, and 
composite IBC types 21HZ1, 21HZ2, 31HZ1, and 31HZ2, there may be no 
leakage and no permanent deformation which renders the IBC unsafe for 
transportation.

[Amdt. 178-103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as amended at 66 FR 45185, 
45386, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.815  Stacking test.

    (a) General. The stacking test must be conducted for the 
qualification of all IBC design types intended to be stacked.
    (b) Special preparation for the stacking test. (1) All IBCs except 
flexible IBC design types must be loaded to their maximum permissible 
gross mass.
    (2) The flexible IBC must be filled to not less than 95 percent of 
its capacity and to its maximum net mass, with the load being evenly 
distributed.
    (c) Test method. (1) All IBCs must be placed on their base on level, 
hard ground and subjected to a uniformly distributed superimposed test 
load for a period of at least five minutes (see paragraph (d) of this 
section).
    (2) Fiberboard, wooden, and composite IBCs with outer packagings 
constructed of other than plastic materials must be subjected to the 
test for 24 hours.
    (3) Rigid plastic IBC types and composite IBC types with plastic 
outer packagings (11HH1, 11HH2, 21HH1, 21HH2, 31HH1 and 31HH2) which 
bear the stacking load must be subjected to the test for 28 days at 40 
deg.C (104  deg.F).
    (4) For all IBCs, the load must be applied by one of the following 
methods:
    (i) One or more IBCs of the same type loaded to their maximum 
permissible gross mass and stacked on the test IBC;
    (ii) The calculated superimposed test load weight loaded on either a 
flat plate or a reproduction of the base of the IBC, which is stacked on 
the test IBC; or
    (iii) The packaging may be tested using a dynamic compression 
testing machine. The test must be conducted at room temperature on an 
empty, unsealed packaging. The test sample must be centered on the 
bottom platen of the testing machine. The top platen must be lowered 
until it comes in contact with the test sample. Compression must be 
applied end to end. The speed of the compression tester must be one-half 
inch plus or minus one-fourth inch per minute. An initial preload of 50 
pounds must be applied to ensure a definite contact between the test 
sample and the platens. The distance between the platens at this time 
must be recorded as zero deformation. The force ``A'' to then be applied 
must be calculated using the applicable formula:

Liquids: A = (n-1) [w+ (s x v x 8.3 x .98)] x 1.5;
        or
Solids: A = (n-1) [w+ (s x v x 8.3 x .95)] x 1.5

Where:

A = applied load in pounds.
n = minimum number of containers that, when stacked, reach a height of 3 
          m.
s = specific gravity of lading.
w = maximum weight of one empty container in pounds.
v = actual capacity of container (rated capacity + outage) in gallons.

And:

8.3  corresponds to the weight in pounds of 1.0 gallon of water.
1.5   is a compensation factor that converts the static load of the 
          stacking test into a load suitable for dynamic compression 
          testing.
    (d) Calculation of superimposed test load. For all IBCs, the load to 
be placed on the IBC must be 1.8 times the combined maximum permissible 
gross mass of the number of similar IBCs that may be stacked on top of 
the IBC during transportation.
    (e) Criteria for passing the test. (1) For metal, rigid plastic, and 
composite IBCs there may be no permanent deformation which renders the 
IBC unsafe for transportation and no loss of contents.
    (2) For fiberboard and wooden IBCs there may be no loss of contents 
and no permanent deformation which renders

[[Page 987]]

the whole IBC, including the base pallet, unsafe for transportation.
    (3) For flexible IBCs, there may be no deterioration which renders 
the IBC unsafe for transportation and no loss of contents.

[Amdt. 178-103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as amended by Amdt. 178-119, 
62 FR 24743, May 6, 1997; 65 FR 50462, 50463, Aug. 18, 2000; 66 FR 
45386, Aug. 28, 2001]]



Sec. 178.816  Topple test.

    (a) General. The topple test must be conducted for the qualification 
of all flexible IBC design types.
    (b) Special preparation for the topple test. The flexible IBC must 
be filled to not less than 95 percent of its capacity and to its maximum 
net mass, with the load being evenly distributed.
    (c) Test method. A flexible IBC must be toppled onto any part of its 
top upon a rigid, non-resilient, smooth, flat, and horizontal surface.
    (d) Topple height. For all flexible IBCs, the topple height is 
specified as follows:
    (1) Packing Group I: 1.8 m (5.9 feet).
    (2) Packing Group II: 1.2 m (3.9 feet).
    (3) Packing Group III: 0.8 m (2.6 feet).
    (e) Criteria for passing the test. For all flexible IBCs, there may 
be no loss of contents. A slight discharge (e.g., from closures or 
stitch holes) upon impact is not considered to be a failure, provided no 
further leakage occurs.

[Amdt. 178-103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as amended at 66 FR 45386, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.817  Righting test.

    (a) General. The righting test must be conducted for the 
qualification of all flexible IBCs designed to be lifted from the top or 
side.
    (b) Special preparation for the righting test. The flexible IBC must 
be filled to not less than 95 percent of its capacity and to its maximum 
net mass, with the load being evenly distributed.
    (c) Test method. The flexible IBC, lying on its side, must be lifted 
at a speed of at least 0.1 m/second (0.33 ft/s) to an upright position, 
clear of the floor, by one lifting device, or by two lifting devices 
when four are provided.
    (d) Criterion for passing the test. For all flexible IBCs, there may 
be no damage to the IBC or its lifting devices which renders the IBC 
unsafe for transportation or handling.

[Amdt. 178-103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as amended at 66 FR 45386, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.818  Tear test.

    (a) General. The tear test must be conducted for the qualification 
of all flexible IBC design types.
    (b) Special preparation for the tear test. The flexible IBC must be 
filled to not less than 95 percent of its capacity and to its maximum 
net mass, the load being evenly distributed.
    (c) Test method. Once the IBC is placed on the ground, a 100-mm (4-
inch) knife score, completely penetrating the wall of a wide face, is 
made at a 45 deg. angle to the principal axis of the IBC, halfway 
between the bottom surface and the top level of the contents. The IBC 
must then be subjected to a uniformly distributed superimposed load 
equivalent to twice the maximum net mass. The load must be applied for 
at least five minutes. An IBC which is designed to be lifted from the 
top or the side must, after removal of the superimposed load, be lifted 
clear of the floor and maintained in that position for a period of five 
minutes.
    (d) Criterion for passing the test. The IBC passes the tear test if 
the cut does not propagate more than 25 percent of its original length.

[Amdt. 178-103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as amended at 66 FR 45386, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 178.819  Vibration test.

    (a) General. The vibration test must be conducted for the 
qualification of all rigid IBC design types. Flexible IBC design types 
must be capable of withstanding the vibration test.
    (b) Test method. (1) A sample IBC, selected at random, must be 
filled and closed as for shipment.
    (2) The sample IBC must be placed on a vibrating platform that has a 
vertical double-amplitude (peak-to-peak displacement) of one inch. The 
IBC must be constrained horizontally to prevent it from falling off the 
platform, but must be left free to move vertically and bounce.
    (3) The test must be performed for one hour at a frequency that 
causes the package to be raised from the vibrating

[[Page 988]]

platform to such a degree that a piece of material of approximately 1.6-
mm (0.063-inch) thickness (such as steel strapping or paperboard) can be 
passed between the bottom of the IBC and the platform. Other methods at 
least equally effective may be used (see Sec. 178.801(i)).
    (c) Criteria for passing the test. An IBC passes the vibration test 
if there is no rupture or leakage.

[Amdt. 178-103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as amended by Amdt. 178-108, 
60 FR 40038, Aug. 4, 1995; Amdt. 178-110, 60 FR 49111, Sept. 21, 1995; 
66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001]
            Appendix A to Part 178--Specifications for Steel

                                                     Table 1
 [Open-hearth, basic oxygen, or electric steel of uniform quality. The following chemical composition limits are
                                            based on ladle analysis:]
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                      Chemical composition, percent-ladle analysis
             Designation              --------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                             Grade 1 \1\            Grade 2 \1\ \2\        Grade 3 \2\ \4\ \5\
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Carbon...............................  0.10/0.20..............  0.24 maximum...........  0.22 maximum.
Manganese............................  1.10/1.60..............  0.50/1.00..............  1.25 maximum.
Phosphorus, maximum..................  0.04...................  0.04...................  0.045.\6\
Sulfur, maximum......................  0.05...................  0.05...................  0.05.
Silicon..............................  0.15/0.30..............  0.30 maximum...........  .......................
Copper, maximum......................  0.40...................  .......................  .......................
Columbium............................  .......................  0.01/0.04..............  .......................
Heat treatment authorized............  (\3\)..................  (\3\)..................  (\3\).
Maximum stress (p.s.i.)..............  35,000.................  35,000.................  35,000.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Addition of other elements to obtain alloying effect is not authorized.
\2\ Ferritic grain size 6 or finer according to ASTM E112-63.
\3\ Any suitable heat treatment in excess of 1,100  deg.F., except that liquid quenching is not permitted.
\4\ Other alloying elements may be added and shall be reported.
\5\ For compositions with a maximum carbon content of 0.15 percent of ladle analysis, the maximum limit for
  manganese on ladle analysis may be 1.40 percent.
\6\ Rephosphorized Grade 3 steels containing no more than 0.15 percent phosphorus are permitted if carbon
  content does not exceed 0.15 percent and manganese does not exceed 1 percent.


                                            Check Analysis Tolerances
     [A heat of steel made under any of the above grades, the ladle analysis of which is slightly out of the
            specified range is acceptable if the check analysis is within the following variations:]
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                           Tolerance (percent)
                                                                                          over the maximum limit
                                                                                           or under the minimum
                                                                                                  limit
                    Element                       Limit or maximum specified (percent)  ------------------------
                                                                                            Under        Over
                                                                                           minimum      maximum
                                                                                            limit        limit
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Carbon.........................................  To 0.15 inclusive.....................        0.02         0.03
                                                 Over 0.15 to 0.40 inclusive...........        0.03         0.04
Manganese......................................  To 0.60 inclusive.....................        0.03         0.03
                                                 Over 0.60 to 1.15 inclusive...........        0.04         0.04
                                                 Over 1.15 to 2.50 inclusive...........        0.05         0.05
Phosphorus \7\.................................  All ranges............................  ...........        0.01
Sulfur.........................................  All ranges............................  ...........        0.01
Silicon........................................  To 0.30 inclusive.....................        0.02         0.03
                                                 Over 0.30 to 1.00 inclusive...........        0.05         0.05
Copper.........................................  To 1.00 inclusive.....................        0.03         0.03
                                                 Over 1.00 to 2.00 inclusive...........        0.05         0.05
Nickel.........................................  To 1.00 inclusive.....................        0.03         0.03
                                                 Over 1.00 to 2.00 inclusive...........        0.05         0.05
Chromium.......................................  To 0.90 inclusive.....................        0.03         0.03
                                                 Over 0.90 to 2.10 inclusive...........        0.05         0.05
Molybdenum.....................................  To 0.20 inclusive.....................        0.01         0.01
                                                 Over 0.20 to 0.40 inclusive...........        0.02         0.02
Zirconium......................................  All ranges............................        0.01         0.05
Columbium......................................  To 0.04 inclusive.....................        0.005        0.01
Aluminum.......................................  Over 0.10 to 0.20 inclusive...........        0.04         0.04
                                                 Over 0.20 to 0.30 inclusive...........        0.05         0.05
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\7\ Rephosphorized steels not subject to check analysis for phosphorus.

[Amdt. 178-3, 34 FR 12283, July 25, 1969; 34 FR 12593, Aug. 1, 1969, as 
amended by Amdt. 178-64, 45 FR 81573, Dec. 11, 1980; Amdt. 178-97, 55 FR 
52728, Dec. 21, 1990]

[[Page 989]]

     Appendix B to Part 178--Alternative Leakproofness Test Methods

    In addition to the method prescribed in Sec. 178.604 of this 
subchapter, the following leakproofness test methods are authorized:
    (1) Helium test. The packaging must be filled with at least 1 L 
inert helium gas, air tight closed, and placed in a testing chamber. The 
testing chamber must be evacuated down to a pressure of 5 kPa which 
equals an over-pressure inside the packaging of 95 kPa. The air in the 
testing chamber must be analyzed for traces of helium gas by means of a 
mass spectrograph. The test must be conducted for a period of time 
sufficient to evacuate the chamber and to determine if there is leakage 
into or out of the packaging. If helium gas is detected, the leaking 
packaging must be automatically separated from non-leaking drums and the 
leaking area determined according to the method prescribed in 
Sec. 178.604(d) of this subchapter. A packaging passes the test if there 
is no leakage of helium.
    (2) Pressure differential test. The packaging shall be restrained 
while either pressure or a vacuum is applied internally. The packaging 
must be pressurized to the pressure required by Sec. 178.604(e) of this 
subchapter for the appropriate packing group. The method of restraint 
must not affect the results of the test. The test must be conducted for 
a period of time sufficient to appropriately pressurize or evacuate the 
interior of the packaging and to determine if there is leakage into or 
out of the packaging. A packaging passes the pressure differential test 
if there is no change in measured internal pressure.
    (3) Solution over seams. The packaging must be restrained while an 
internal air pressure is applied; the method of restraint may not affect 
the results of the test. The exterior surface of all seams and welds 
must be coated with a solution of soap suds or a water and oil mixture. 
The test must be conducted for a period of time sufficient to pressurize 
the interior of the packaging to the specified air pressure and to 
determine if there is leakage of air from the packaging. A packaging 
passes the test if there is no leakage of air from the packaging.
    (4) Solution over partial seams test. For other than design 
qualification testing, the following test may be used for metal drums: 
The packaging must be restrained while an internal air pressure of 48 
kPa (7.0 psig) is applied; the method of restraint may not affect the 
results of the test. The packaging must be coated with a soap solution 
over the entire side seam and a distance of not less than eight inches 
on each side of the side seam along the chime seam(s). The test must be 
conducted for a period of time sufficient to pressurize the interior of 
the packaging to the specified air pressure and to determine if there is 
leakage of air from the packaging. A packaging passes the test if there 
is no leakage of air from the packaging. Chime cuts must be made on the 
initial drum at the beginning of each production run and on the initial 
drum after any adjustment to the chime seamer. Chime cuts must be 
maintained on file in date order for not less than six months and be 
made available to a representative of the Department of Transportation 
on request.

[Amdt. 178-97, 55 FR 52728, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66287, 
Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45466, Oct. 1, 1992]

 Appendix C to Part 178--Nominal and Minimum Thicknesses of Steel Drums 
                              and Jerricans

    For each listed packaging capacity, the following table compares the 
ISO Standard 3574 nominal thickness with the corresponding ISO Standard 
3574 minimum thickness.

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                   ISO     Corresponding
             Maximum capacity (L)                nominal    ISO minimum
                                                  (mm)          (mm)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
20...........................................         0.7          0.63
30...........................................         0.8          0.73
40...........................................         0.8          0.73
60...........................................         1.0          0.92
120..........................................         1.0          0.92
220..........................................         1.0          0.92
450..........................................         1.9          1.77
------------------------------------------------------------------------


[Amdt. 178-106, 59 FR 67522, Dec. 29, 1994]



PART 179--SPECIFICATIONS FOR TANK CARS--Table of Contents




             Subpart A--Introduction, Approvals and Reports

Sec.
179.1  General.
179.2  Definitions and abbreviations.
179.3  Procedure for securing approval.
179.4  Changes in specifications for tank cars.
179.5  Certificate of construction.
179.6  Repairs and alterations.
179.7  Quality assurance program.

                 Subpart B--General Design Requirements

179.10  Tank mounting.
179.11  Welding certification.
179.12  Interior heater systems.
179.13  Tank car capacity and gross weight limitation.
179.14  Coupler vertical restraint system.
179.15  Pressure relief devices.
179.16  Tank-head puncture-resistance systems.

[[Page 990]]

179.18  Thermal protection systems.
179.20  Service equipment; protection systems.
179.22  Marking.

Subpart C--Specifications for Pressure Tank Car Tanks (Classes DOT-105, 
                         109, 112, 114, and 120)

179.100  General specifications applicable to pressure tank car tanks.
179.100-1  Tanks built under these specifications shall comply with the 
          requirements of Secs. 179.100, 179.101 and when applicable, 
          Secs. 179.102 and 179.103.
179.100-3  Type.
179.100-4  Insulation.
179.100-6  Thickness of plates.
179.100-7  Materials.
179.100-8  Tank heads.
179.100-9  Welding.
179.100-10  Postweld heat treatment.
179.100-12  Manway nozzle, cover and protective housing.
179.100-13  Venting, loading and unloading valves, measuring and 
          sampling devices.
179.100-14  Bottom outlets.
179.100-16  Attachments.
179.100-17  Closures for openings.
179.100-18  Tests of tanks.
179.100-19  Tests of safety relief valves.
179.100-20  Stamping.
179.101  Individual specification requirements applicable to pressure 
          tank car tanks.
179.101-1  Individual specification requirements.
179.102  Special commodity requirements for pressure tank car tanks.
179.102-1  Carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid.
179.102-2  Chlorine.
179.102-4  Vinyl fluoride, inhibited.
179.102-17  Hydrogen chloride, refrigerated liquid.
179.103  Special requirements for class 114A * * * tank car tanks.
179.103-1  Type.
179.103-2  Manway cover.
179.103-3  Venting, loading and unloading valves, measuring and sampling 
          devices.
179.103-4  Safety relief devices and pressure regulators.
179.103-5  Bottom outlets.

 Subpart D--Specifications for Nonpressure Tank Car Tanks (Classes DOT-
                   103, 104, 111AF, 111AW, and 115AW)

179.200  General specifications applicable to non-pressure tank car 
          tanks (Classes DOT-103, 104, and 111).
179.200-1  Tank built under these specifications must meet the 
          requirements of Secs. 179.200, and 179.201.
179.200-3  Type.
179.200-4  Insulation.
179.200-6  Thickness of plates.
179.200-7  Materials.
179.200-8  Tank heads.
179.200-9  Compartment tanks.
179.200-10  Welding.
179.200-11  Postweld heat treatment.
179.200-13  Manway ring or flange, pressure relief device flange, bottom 
          outlet nozzle flange, bottom washout nozzle flange and other 
          attachments and openings.
179.200-14  Expansion capacity.
179.200-15  Closures for manways.
179.200-16  Gauging devices, top loading and unloading devices, venting 
          and air inlet devices.
179.200-17  Bottom outlets.
179.200-19  Reinforcements, when used, and appurtenances not otherwise 
          specified.
179.200-21  Closures for openings.
179.200-22  Test of tanks.
179.200-23  Tests of safety relief valves.
179.200-24  Stamping.
179.201  Individual specification requirements applicable to non-
          pressure tank car tanks.
179.201-1  Individual specification requirements.
179.201-2  Minimum plate thickness.
179.201-3  Lined tanks.
179.201-4  Material.
179.201-5  Postweld heat treatment and corrosion resistance.
179.201-6  Manways and manway closures.
179.201-8  Sampling device and thermometer well.
179.201-9  Gauging device.
179.201-10  Water capacity marking.
179.201-11  Insulation.
179.202--179.202-22  [Reserved]
179.220  General specifications applicable to nonpressure tank car tanks 
          consisting of an inner container supported within an outer 
          shell (class DOT-115).
179.220-1  Tanks built under these specifications must meet the 
          requirements of Secs. 179.220 and 179.221.
179.220-3  Type.
179.220-4  Insulation.
179.220-6  Thickness of plates.
179.220-7  Materials.
179.220-8  Tank heads.
179.220-9  Compartment tanks.
179.220-10  Welding.
179.220-11  Postweld heat treatment.
179.220-13  Inner container manway nozzle and cover.
179.220-14  Openings in the tanks.
179.220-15  Support system for inner container.
179.220-16  Expansion capacity.
179.220-17  Gauging devices, top loading and unloading devices, venting 
          and air inlet devices.
179.220-18  Bottom outlets.
179.220-20  Reinforcements, when used, and appurtenances not otherwise 
          specified.
179.220-22  Closure for openings.
179.220-23  Test of tanks.

[[Page 991]]

179.220-24  Tests of pressure relief valves.
179.220-25  Stamping.
179.220-26  Stenciling.
179.221  Individual specification requirements applicable to tank car 
          tanks consisting of an inner container supported within an 
          outer shell.
179.221-1  Individual specification requirements.

  Subpart E--Specifications for Multi-Unit Tank Car Tanks (Classes DOT-
                             106A and 110AW)

179.300  General specifications applicable to multi-unit tank car tanks 
          designed to be removed from car structure for filling and 
          emptying (Classes DOT-106A and 110AW).
179.300-1  Tanks built under these specifications shall meet the 
          requirements of Sec. 179.300, Sec. 179.301 and when 
          applicable, Sec. 179.302.
179.300-3  Type and general requirements.
179.300-4  Insulation.
179.300-6  Thickness of plates.
179.300-7  Materials.
179.300-8  Tank heads.
179.300-9  Welding.
179.300-10  Postweld heat treatment.
179.300-12  Protection of fittings.
179.300-13  Venting, loading and unloading valves.
179.300-14  Attachments not otherwise specified.
179.300-15  Pressure relief devices.
179.300-16  Tests of tanks.
179.300-17  Tests of pressure relief devices.
179.300-18  Stamping.
179.300-19  Inspection.
179.300-20  Reports.
179.301  Individual specification requirements for multi-unit tank car 
          tanks.
179.302  [Reserved]

    Subpart F--Specification for Cryogenic Liquid Tank Car Tanks and 
             Seamless Steel Tanks (Classes DOT-113 and 107A)

179.400  General specification applicable to cryogenic liquid tank car 
          tanks.
179.400-1  General.
179.400-3  Type.
179.400-4  Insulation system and performance standard.
179.400-5  Materials.
179.400-6  Bursting and buckling pressure.
179.400-7  Tank heads.
179.400-8  Thickness of plates.
179.400-9  Stiffening rings.
179.400-10  Sump or siphon bowl.
179.400-11  Welding.
179.400-12  Postweld heat treatment.
179.400-13  Support system for inner tank.
179.400-14  Cleaning of inner tank.
179.400-15  Radioscopy.
179.400-16  Access to inner tank.
179.400-17  Inner tank piping.
179.400-18  Test of inner tank.
179.400-19  Valves and gages.
179.400-20  Pressure relief devices.
179.400-21  Test of pressure relief valves.
179.400-22  Protective housings.
179.400-23  Operating instructions.
179.400-24  Stamping.
179.400-25  Stenciling.
179.401  Individual specification requirements applicable to inner tanks 
          for cryogenic liquid tank car tanks.
179.401-1  Individual specification requirements.
179.500  Specification DOT-107A * * * *, seamless steel tank car tanks.
179.500-1  Tanks built under these specifications shall meet the 
          requirements of Sec. 179.500.
179.500-3  Type and general requirements.
179.500-4  Thickness of wall.
179.500-5  Material.
179.500-6  Heat treatment.
179.500-7  Physical tests.
179.500-8  Openings in tanks.
179.500-10  Protective housing.
179.500-11  Loading and unloading valves.
179.500-12  Pressure relief devices.
179.500-13  Fixtures.
179.500-14  Test of tanks.
179.500-15  Handling of tanks failing in tests.
179.500-16  Tests of pressure relief devices.
179.500-17  Marking.
179.500-18  Inspection and reports.

Appendix A to Part 179--Procedures for Tank-Head Puncture-Resistance 
          Test
Appendix B to Part 179--Procedures for Simulated Pool and Torch-Fire 
          Testing

    Authority: 49 U.S.C. 5101-5127; 49 CFR part 1.53.

    Source: 29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964, unless otherwise noted. 
Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967.



             Subpart A--Introduction, Approvals and Reports



Sec. 179.1  General.

    (a) This part prescribes the specifications for tanks that are to be 
mounted on or form part of a tank car and which are used for the 
transportation of hazardous materials in commerce.
    (b) Except as provided in paragraph (c) of this section, tanks to 
which this part is applicable, must be built to the specifications 
prescribed in this part.
    (c) Tanks built to specifications predating those in this part may 
continue in use as provided in Sec. 180.507 of this subchapter.

[[Page 992]]

    (d) Any person who performs a function prescribed in this part, 
shall perform that function in accordance with this part.
    (e) When this part requires a tank to be marked with a DOT 
specification (for example, DOT-105A100W), compliance with that 
requirement is the responsibility of the tank builder. Marking the tank 
with the DOT specification shall be understood to certify compliance by 
the builder that the functions performed by the builder, as prescribed 
in this part, have been performed in compliance with this part.
    (f) The tank builder should inform each person to whom that tank is 
transferred of any specification requirements which have not been met at 
time of transfer.

[Amdt. 179-17, 41 FR 38183, Sept. 9, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 179-50, 
60 FR 49076, Sept. 21, 1995]



Sec. 179.2  Definitions and abbreviations.

    (a) The following apply in part 179:
    (1) AAR means Association of American Railroads.
    (2) Approved means approval by the AAR Tank Car Committee.
    (3) ASTM means American Society for Testing and Materials.
    (4) [Reserved]
    (5) Definitions in part 173 of this chapter also apply.
    (6) F means degrees Fahrenheit.
    (7) NGT means National Gas Taper Threads.
    (8) NPT means American Standard Taper Pipe Thread.
    (9) [Reserved]
    (10) Tank car facility means an entity that manufactures, repairs, 
inspects, tests, qualifies, or maintains a tank car to ensure that the 
tank car conforms to this part and subpart F of part 180 of this 
subchapter, that alters the certificate of construction of the tank car, 
that ensures the continuing qualification of a tank car by performing a 
function prescribed in parts 179 or 180 of this subchapter, or that 
makes any representation indicating compliance with one or more of the 
requirements of parts 179 or 180 of this subchapter.
    (11) Tanks means tank car tanks.
    (b) [Reserved]

[29 FR 18995, Dec. 20, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, 
and amended by Amdt. 179-10, 36 FR 21344, Nov. 6, 1971; Amdt. 179-50, 60 
FR 49076, Sept. 21, 1995; Amdt. 179-50, 61 FR 33255, June 26, 1996; 63 
FR 52850, Oct. 1, 1998; 66 FR 45186, 45390, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 179.3  Procedure for securing approval.

    (a) Application for approval of designs, materials and construction, 
conversion or alteration of tank car tanks under these specifications, 
complete with detailed prints, must be submitted in prescribed form to 
the Executive Director--Tank Car Safety, AAR, for consideration by its 
Tank Car Committee and other appropriate committees. Approval or 
rejections of applications based on appropriate committee action will be 
issued by the executive director.
    (b) When, in the opinion of the Committee, such tanks or equipment 
therefor are in compliance with effective regulations and specifications 
of the Department, the application will be approved.
    (c) When, in the opinion of the Committee, such tanks or equipment 
therefor are not in compliance with effective regulations and 
specifications of the Department, the Committee may recommend service 
trials to determine the merits of a change in specifications. Such 
service trials may be authorized by the Department under the terms of 
exemptions.

[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967 
and amended by Amdt. 179-41, 52 FR 36672, Sept. 30, 1987; 63 FR 52850, 
Oct. 1, 1998]



Sec. 179.4  Changes in specifications for tank cars.

    (a) Proposed changes in or additions to specifications for tanks 
must be submitted to the Executive Director--Tank Car Safety, AAR, for 
consideration by its Tank Car Committee. An application for construction 
of tanks to any new specification may be submitted with proposed 
specification. Construction should not be started until the 
specification has been approved or an exemption has been

[[Page 993]]

issued. When proposing a new specification, the applicant shall furnish 
information to justify a new specification. This data should include the 
properties of the lading and the method of loading and unloading.
    (b) The Tank Car Committee will review the proposed specifications 
at its earliest convenience and report its recommendations through the 
Executive Director--Tank Car Safety to the Department. The 
recommendation will be considered by the Department in determining 
appropriate action.

[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967 
and amended by Amdt. 179-41, 52 FR 36672, Sept. 30, 1987; 63 FR 52850, 
Oct. 1, 1998]



Sec. 179.5  Certificate of construction.

    (a) Before a tank car is placed in service, the party assembling the 
completed car shall furnish a Certificate of Construction, Form AAR 4-2 
to the owner, the Department, and the Executive Director--Tank Car 
Safety, AAR, certifying that the tank, equipment, and car fully conforms 
to all requirements of the specification.
    (b) When cars or tanks are covered in one application and are 
identical in all details are built in series, one certificate will 
suffice for each series when submitted to the Executive Director--Tank 
Car Safety, AAR. One copy of the Certificate of Construction must be 
furnished to the Department for each car number of consecutively 
numbered group or groups covered by the original application.
    (c) If the owner elects to furnish the appurtenances such as valves 
and safety devices, the owner shall furnish to the Bureau of Explosives, 
and to the Secretary, Mechanical Division, AAR, a report in prescribed 
form, certifying that the appurtenances comply with all the requirements 
of the specifications.
    (d) When cars or tanks which are covered on one application and are 
identical in all details are built in series, one certificate shall 
suffice for each series when submitted to the Secretary. One copy of the 
Certificate of Construction must be furnished to the Bureau of 
Explosives for each car number of consecutively numbered group or groups 
covered by the original application.

[Amdt. 179-10, 36 FR 21344, Nov. 6, 1971, as amended at 63 FR 52850, 
Oct. 1, 1998]



Sec. 179.6  Repairs and alterations.

    For procedure to be followed in making repairs or alterations, see 
appendix R of the AAR Specifications for Tank Cars.

[Amdt. 179-10, 36 FR 21344, Nov. 6, 1971]



Sec. 179.7  Quality assurance program.

    (a) At a minimum, each tank car facility shall have a quality 
assurance program, approved by AAR, that--
    (1) Ensures the finished product conforms to the requirements of the 
applicable specification and regulations of this subchapter;
    (2) Has the means to detect any nonconformity in the manufacturing, 
repair, inspection, testing, and qualification or maintenance program of 
the tank car; and
    (3) Prevents non-conformities from recurring.
    (b) At a minimum, the quality assurance program must have the 
following elements
    (1) Statement of authority and responsibility for those persons in 
charge of the quality assurance program.
    (2) An organizational chart showing the interrelationship between 
managers, engineers, purchasing, construction, inspection, testing, and 
quality control personnel.
    (3) Procedures to ensure that the latest applicable drawings, design 
calculations, specifications, and instructions are used in manufacture, 
inspection, testing, and repair.
    (4) Procedures to ensure that the fabrication and construction 
materials received are properly identified and documented.
    (5) A description of the manufacturing, repair, inspection, testing, 
and qualification or maintenance program, including the acceptance 
criteria, so that an inspector can identify the characteristics of the 
tank car and the elements to inspect, examine, and test at each point.
    (6) Monitoring and control of processes and product characteristics 
during production.

[[Page 994]]

    (7) Procedures for correction of nonconformities.
    (8) Provisions indicating that the requirements of the AAR 
Specifications for Tank Cars, Specification M-1002, apply.
    (9) Qualification requirements of personnel performing non-
destructive inspections and tests.
    (10) Procedures for evaluating the inspection and test technique 
employed, including the accessibility of the area and the sensitivity 
and reliability of the inspection and test technique and minimum 
detectable crack length.
    (11) Procedures for the periodic calibration and measurement of 
inspection and test equipment.
    (12) A system for the maintenance of records, inspections, tests, 
and the interpretation of inspection and test results.
    (c) Each tank car facility shall ensure that only personnel 
qualified for each non-destructive inspection and test perform that 
particular operation.
    (d) Each tank car facility shall provide written procedures to its 
employees to ensure that the work on the tank car conforms to the 
specification, AAR approval, and owner's acceptance criteria.
    (e) Each tank car facility shall train its employees in accordance 
with subpart H of part 172 of this subchapter on the program and 
procedures specified in paragraph (b) of this section to ensure quality.
    (f) Date of conformance. After July 1, 1998, no tank car facility 
may manufacture, repair, inspect, test, qualify or maintain tank cars 
subject to requirements of this subchapter, unless it is operating in 
conformance with a quality assurance program and written procedures 
required by paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section.

[Amdt. 179-50, 60 FR 49076, Sept. 21, 1995, as amended by Amdt. 179-50, 
61 FR 33255, June 26, 1996]



                 Subpart B--General Design Requirements



Sec. 179.10  Tank mounting.

    (a) The manner in which tanks are attached to the car structure 
shall be approved. The use of rivets to secure anchors to tanks 
prohibited.
    (b) [Reserved]



Sec. 179.11  Welding certification.

    (a) Welding procedures, welders and fabricators shall be approved.
    (b) [Reserved]



Sec. 179.12  Interior heater systems.

    (a) Interior heater systems shall be of approved design and 
materials. If a tank is divided into compartments, a separate system 
shall be provided for each compartment.
    (b) Each interior heater system shall be hydrostatically tested at 
not less than 13.79 bar (200 psig) and shall hold the pressure for 10 
minutes without leakage or evidence of distress.

[Amdt. 179-52, 61 FR 28678, June 5, 1996, as amended by 66 FR 45390, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 179.13  Tank car capacity and gross weight limitation.

    Tank cars built after November 30, 1970, must not exceed 34,500 
gallons capacity or 263,000 pounds gross weight on rail. Existing tank 
cars may not be converted to exceed 34,500 gallons capacity or 263,000 
pounds gross weight on rail.

[Amdt. 179-4, 35 FR 14217, Sept. 9, 1970]



Sec. 179.14  Coupler vertical restraint system.

    (a) Performance standard. Each tank car shall be equipped with 
couplers capable of sustaining, without disengagement or material 
failure, vertical loads of at least 200,000 pounds (90,718.5 kg) applied 
in upward and downward directions in combination with buff loads of 
2,000 pounds (907.2 kg), when coupled to cars which may or may not be 
equipped with couplers having this vertical restraint capability.
    (b) Test verification. Except as provided in paragraph (d) of this 
section, compliance with the requirements of paragraph (a) of this 
section shall be achieved by verification testing of the coupler 
vertical restraint system in accordance with paragraph (c) of this 
section.
    (c) Coupler vertical restraint tests. A coupler vertical restraint 
system shall be tested under the following conditions:

[[Page 995]]

    (1) The test coupler shall be tested with a mating coupler (or 
simulated coupler) having only frictional vertical force resistance at 
the mating interface; or a mating coupler (or simulated coupler) having 
the capabilities described in paragraph (a) of this section;
    (2) The testing apparatus shall simulate the vertical coupler 
performance at the mating interface and may not interfere with coupler 
failure or otherwise inhibit failure due to force applications and 
reactions; and
    (3) The test shall be conducted as follows:
    (i) A minimum of 200,000 pounds (90,718.5 kg) vertical downward load 
shall be applied continuously for at least 5 minutes to the test coupler 
head simultaneously with the application of a nominal 2,000 pounds 
(907.2 kg) buff load;
    (ii) The procedures prescribed in paragraph (c)(3)(i) of this 
section, shall be repeated with a minimum vertical upward load of 
200,000 pounds (90,718.5 kg); and
    (iii) A minimum of three consecutive successful tests shall be 
performed for each load combination prescribed in paragraphs (c)(3) (i) 
and (ii) of this section. A test is successful when a vertical 
disengagement or material failure does not occur during the application 
of any of the loads prescribed in this paragraph.
    (d) Authorized couplers. As an alternative to the test verifications 
in paragraph (c) of this section, the following couplers are authorized:
    (1) E double shelf couplers designated by the Association of 
American Railroads' Catalog Nos., SE60CHT, SE60CC, SE60CHTE, SE60CE, 
SE60DC, SE60DE, SE67CC, SE67CE, SE67BHT, SE67BC, SE67BHTE, SE67BE, 
SE68BHT, SE68BC, SE68BHTE, SE68BE, SE69AHTE, and SE69AE.
    (2) F double shelf couplers designated by the Association of 
American Railroads' Catalog Nos., SF70CHT, SF70CC, SF70CHTE, SF70CE, 
SF73AC, SF73AE, SF73AHT, SF73AHTE, SF79CHT, SF79CC, SF79CHTE, and 
SF79CE.

[Amdt. 179-42, 54 FR 38797, Sept. 20, 1989]



Sec. 179.15  Pressure relief devices.

    Except for DOT Class 106, 107, 110, and 113 tank cars, tanks must 
have a pressure relief device, made of material compatible with the 
lading, that conforms to the following requirements:
    (a) Performance standard. Each tank must have a pressure relief 
device, made of material compatible with the lading having sufficient 
flow capacity to prevent pressure build-up in the tank to no more than 
the flow rating pressure of the pressure relief device in fire 
conditions as defined in Appendix A of the Association of American 
Railroads Specifications for Tank Cars.
    (b) Settings for reclosing pressure relief devices. (1) Except as 
provided in paragraph (b)(2) of this section, a reclosing pressure 
relief valve must have a minimum start-to-discharge pressure equal to 
the sum of the static head and gas padding pressure and the lading vapor 
pressure at the following reference temperatures:
    (i) 46  deg.C (115  deg.F) for noninsulated tanks;
    (ii) 43  deg.C (110  deg.F) for tanks having a thermal protection 
system incorporating a metal jacket that provides an overall thermal 
conductance at 15.5  deg.C (60  deg.F) of no more than 10.22 kilojoules 
per hour per square meter per degree Celsius (0.5 Btu per hour/per 
square foot/per degree F) temperature differential; and
    (iii) 41  deg.C (105  deg.F) for insulated tanks.
    (2)(i) The start-to-discharge pressure of a pressure relief device 
may not be lower than 5.17 Bar (75 psig) or exceed 33 percent of the 
minimum tank burst pressure.
    (ii) Tanks built prior to October 1, 1997 having a minimum tank 
burst pressure of 34.47 Bar (500 psig) or less may be equipped with a 
reclosing pressure relief valve having a start-to-discharge pressure of 
not less than 14.5 percent of the minimum tank burst pressure but no 
more than 33 percent of the minimum tank burst pressure.
    (3) The vapor tight pressure of a reclosing pressure relief valve 
must be at least 80 percent of the start-to-discharge pressure.
    (4) The flow rating pressure must be 110 percent of the start-to-
discharge pressure for tanks having a minimum tank burst pressure 
greater than 34.47 Bar (500 psig) and from 110 percent to

[[Page 996]]

130 percent for tanks having a minimum tank burst pressure less than or 
equal to 34.47 Bar (500 psig).
    (5) The tolerance for a reclosing pressure relief valve is 
3 psi for valves with a start-to-discharge pressure of 6.89 
Bar (100 psig) or less and 3 percent for valves with a 
start-to-discharge pressure greater than 6.89 Bar (100 psig).
    (c) Flow capacity of pressure relief devices. The total flow 
capacity of each reclosing and nonreclosing pressure relief device must 
conform to Appendix A of the Association of American Railroads 
Specifications for Tank Cars.
    (d) Flow capacity tests. The manufacturer of any reclosing or 
nonreclosing pressure relief device must design and test the device in 
accordance with Appendix A of the Association of American Railroads 
Specifications for Tank Cars.
    (e) Combination pressure relief systems. A non-reclosing pressure 
relief device may be used in series with a reclosing pressure relief 
valve. The pressure relief valve must be located outboard of the non-
reclosing pressure relief device.
    (1) When a breaking pin device is used in combination with a 
reclosing pressure relief valve, the breaking pin must be designed to 
fail at the start-to-discharge pressure specified in paragraph (b) of 
this section, and the reclosing pressure relief valve must be designed 
to discharge at not greater than 95 percent of the start-to-discharge 
pressure.
    (2) When a rupture disc is used in combination with a reclosing 
pressure relief valve, the rupture disc must be designed to burst at the 
pressure specified in paragraph (b) of this section, and the reclosing 
pressure relief valve must be designed to discharge at not greater than 
95 percent of the pressure. A device must be installed to detect any 
accumulation of pressure between the rupture disc and the reclosing 
pressure relief valve. The detection device must be a needle valve, 
trycock, or tell-tale indicator. The detection device must be closed 
during transportation.
    (3) The vapor tight pressure and the start-to-discharge tolerance is 
based on the discharge setting of the reclosing pressure relief device.
    (f) Nonreclosing pressure relief device. In addition to paragraphs 
(a), (b)(4), (c), and (d) of this section, a nonreclosing pressure 
relief device must conform to the following requirements:
    (1) A non-reclosing pressure relief device must incorporate a 
rupture disc designed to burst at a pressure equal to the greater of 
100% of the tank test pressure, or 33% of the tank burst pressure.
    (2) The approach channel and the discharge channel may not reduce 
the required minimum flow capacity of the pressure relief device.
    (3) The non-reclosing pressure relief device must be designed to 
prevent interchange with other fittings installed on the tank car, must 
have a structure that encloses and clamps the rupture disc in position 
(preventing any distortion or damage to the rupture disc when properly 
applied), and must have a cover, with suitable means of preventing 
misplacement, designed to direct any discharge of the lading downward.
    (4) The non-reclosing pressure relief device must be closed with a 
rupture disc that is compatible with the lading and manufactured in 
accordance with Appendix A of the AAR Specifications for Tank Cars. The 
tolerance for a rupture disc is +0 to -15 percent of the burst pressure 
marked on the disc.
    (g) Location of relief devices. Each pressure relief device must 
communicate with the vapor space above the lading as near as practicable 
on the longitudinal center line and center of the tank.
    (h) Marking of pressure relief devices. Each pressure relief device 
and rupture disc must be permanently marked in accordance with the 
Appendix A of the Association of American Railroads Specifications for 
Tank Cars.

[Amdt. 179-52, 61 FR 28678, June 5, 1996, as amended by Amdt. 179-52, 61 
FR 50255, Sept. 25, 1996; 62 FR 51561, Oct. 1, 1997; 64 FR 51919, Sept. 
27, 1999; 66 FR 45390, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 179.16  Tank-head puncture-resistance systems.

    (a) Performance standard. When the regulations in this subchapter 
require

[[Page 997]]

a tank-head puncture-resistance system, the system shall be capable of 
sustaining, without any loss of lading, coupler-to-tank-head impacts at 
relative car speeds of 29 km/hour (18 mph) when:
    (1) The weight of the impact car is at least 119,295 kg (263,000 
pounds);
    (2) The impacted tank car is coupled to one or more backup cars that 
have a total weight of at least 217,724 kg (480,000 pounds) and the hand 
brake is applied on the last ``backup'' car; and
    (3) The impacted tank car is pressurized to at least 6.9 Bar (100 
psig).
    (b) Verification by testing. Compliance with the requirements of 
paragraph (a) of this section shall be verified by full-scale testing 
according to appendix A of this part.
    (c) Alternative compliance by other than testing. As an alternative 
to requirements prescribed in paragraph (b) of this section, compliance 
with the requirements of paragraph (a) of this section may be met by 
installing full-head protection (shields) or full tank-head jackets on 
each end of the tank car conforming to the following:
    (1) The full-head protection (shields) or full tank-head jackets 
must be at least 1.27 cm (0.5 inch) thick, shaped to the contour of the 
tank head and made from steel having a tensile strength greater than 
379.21 N/mm2 (55,000 psi).
    (2) The design and test requirements of the full-head protection 
(shields) or full tank-head jackets must meet the impact test 
requirements of Section 5.3 of the AAR Specifications for Tank Cars.
    (3) The workmanship must meet the requirements of Section C, Part 
II, Chapter 5 of the AAR Specifications for Design, Fabrication, and 
Construction of Freight Cars.

[Amdt. 179-50, 60 FR 49077, Sept. 21, 1995, as amended by Amdt. 179-50, 
61 FR 33255, June 26, 1996; 66 FR 45390, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 179.18  Thermal protection systems.

    (a) Performance standard. When the regulations in this subchapter 
require thermal protection on a tank car, the tank car must have 
sufficient thermal resistance so that there will be no release of any 
lading within the tank car, except release through the pressure release 
device, when subjected to:
    (1) A pool fire for 100 minutes; and
    (2) A torch fire for 30 minutes.
    (b) Thermal analysis. (1) Compliance with the requirements of 
paragraph (a) of this section shall be verified by analyzing the fire 
effects on the entire surface of the tank car. The analysis must 
consider the fire effects on and heat flux through tank discontinuities, 
protective housings, underframes, metal jackets, insulation, and thermal 
protection. A complete record of each analysis shall be made, retained, 
and upon request, made available for inspection and copying by an 
authorized representative of the Department. The procedures outlined in 
``Temperatures, Pressures, and Liquid Levels of Tank Cars Engulfed in 
Fires,'' DOT/FRA/OR&D-84/08.11, (1984), Federal Railroad Administration, 
Washington, DC (available from the National Technical Information 
Service, Springfield, VA) shall be deemed acceptable for analyzing the 
fire effects on the entire surface of the tank car.
    (2) When the analysis shows the thermal resistance of the tank car 
does not conform to paragraph (a) of this section, the thermal 
resistance of the tank car must be increased by using a system listed by 
the Department under paragraph (c) of this section or by testing a new 
or untried system and verifying it according to appendix B of this part.
    (c) Systems that no longer require test verification. The Department 
maintains a list of thermal protection systems that comply with the 
requirements of appendix B of this part and that no longer require test 
verification. Information necessary to equip tank cars with one of these 
systems is available in the RSPA Records Center, Research and Special 
Programs Administration, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590-
0001.

[Amdt. 179-50, 60 FR 49077, Sept. 21, 1995, as amended by Amdt. 179-50, 
61 FR 33256, June 26, 1996; 66 FR 45390, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 179.20  Service equipment; protection systems.

    If an applicable tank car specification authorizes location of 
filling or discharge connections in the bottom

[[Page 998]]

shell, the connections must be designed, constructed, and protected 
according to paragraphs E9.00 and E10.00 of the AAR Specifications for 
Tank Cars, M-1002.

[Amdt. 179-50, 60 FR 49077, Sept. 21, 1995]



Sec. 179.22  Marking.

    In addition to any other marking requirement in this subchapter, the 
following marking requirements apply:
    (a) Each tank car must be marked according to the requirements in 
Appendix C of the AAR Specifications for Tank Cars.
    (b) Each tank car that requires a tank-head puncture-resistance 
system must have the letter ``S'' substituted for the letter ``A'' in 
the specification marking.
    (c) Each tank car that requires a tank-head puncture-resistance 
system, a thermal protection system, and a metal jacket must have the 
letter ``J'' substituted for the letter ``A'' or ``S'' in the 
specification marking.
    (d) Each tank car that requires a tank-head puncture-resistance 
system, a thermal protection system, and no metal jacket must have the 
letter ``T'' substituted for the letter ``A'' or ``S'' in the 
specification marking.

[Amdt. 179-50, 60 FR 49077, Sept. 21, 1995, as amended by Amdt. 179-50, 
61 FR 33256, June 26, 1996]



Subpart C--Specifications for Pressure Tank Car Tanks (Classes DOT-105, 
                         109, 112, 114 and 120)



Sec. 179.100  General specifications applicable to pressure tank car tanks.



Sec. 179.100-1  Tanks built under these specifications shall comply with the requirements of Secs. 179.100, 179.101 and when applicable, Secs. 179.102 and 
          179.103.



Sec. 179.100-3  Type.

    (a) Tanks built under this specification shall be fusion-welded with 
heads designed convex outward. Except as provided in Sec. 179.103 they 
shall be circular in cross section, shall be provided with a manway 
nozzle on top of the tank of sufficient size to permit access to the 
interior, a manway cover to provide for the mounting of all valves, 
measuring and sampling devices, and a protective housing. Other openings 
in the tank are prohibited, except as provided in part 173 of this 
chapter, Secs. 179.100-14, 179.101-1, 179.102 or Sec. 179.103.
    (b) [Reserved]

[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, 
and amended by Amdt. 179-10, 36 FR 21344, Nov. 6, 1971; 65 FR 58632, 
Sept. 29, 2000]



Sec. 179.100-4  Insulation.

    (a) If insulation is applied, the tank shell and manway nozzle must 
be insulated with an approved material. The entire insulation must be 
covered with a metal jacket of a thickness not less than 11 gauge 
(0.1196 inch) nominal (Manufacturers' Standard Gauge) and flashed around 
all openings so as to be weather-tight. The exterior surface of a carbon 
steel tank, and the inside surface of a carbon steel jacket must be 
given a protective coating.
    (b) If insulation is a specification requirement, it shall be of 
sufficient thickness so that the thermal conductance at 60  deg.F is not 
more than 0.075 Btu per hour, per square foot, per degree F temperature 
differential. If exterior heaters are attached to tank, the thickness of 
the insulation over each heater element may be reduced to one-half that 
required for the shell.

[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, 
and amended by Amdt. 179-10, 36 FR 21344, Nov. 6, 1971; Amdt. 179-50, 60 
FR 49077, Sept. 21, 1995]



Sec. 179.100-6  Thickness of plates.

    (a) The wall thickness after forming of the tank shell and heads 
must not be less than that specified in Sec. 179.101, nor that 
calculated by the following formula:

t = Pd / 2SE

Where:

d = Inside diameter in inches;
E = 1.0 welded joint efficiency; except for heads with seams=0.9;
P = Minimum required bursting pressure in p.s.i.;
S = Minimum tensile strength of plate material in p.s.i., as prescribed 
in Sec. 179.100-7;
t = Minimum thickness of plate in inches after forming.


[[Page 999]]


    (b) If plates are clad with material having tensile strength 
properties at least equal to the base plate, the cladding may be 
considered a part of the base plate when determining thickness. If 
cladding material does not have tensile strength at least equal to the 
base plate, the base plate alone shall meet the thickness requirement.
    (c) When aluminum plate is used, the minimum width of bottom sheet 
of tank shall be 60 inches, measured on the arc, but in all cases the 
width shall be sufficient to bring the entire width of the longitudinal 
welded joint, including welds, above the bolster.

[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, 
and amended by Amdt. 179-10, 36 FR 21344, Nov. 6, 1971]



Sec. 179.100-7  Materials.

    (a) Steel plate: Steel plate materials used to fabricate tank shell 
and manway nozzle must comply with one of the following specifications 
with the indicated minimum tensile strength and elongation in the welded 
condition. The maximum allowable carbon content must be 0.31 percent 
when the individual specification allows carbon greater than this 
amount. The plates may be clad with other approved materials.

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                             Minimum
                                                         elongation in 2
                                        Minimum tensile       inches
            Specifications                  strength        (percent)
                                        (p.s.i.) welded       welded
                                          condition\1\      condition
                                                          (longitudinal)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
AAR TC128, Gr. B......................           81,000               19
ASTM A 302, Gr. B.....................           80,000               20
ASTM A 516............................           70,000               20
ASTM A 537, Class 1...................           70,000               23
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Maximum stresses to be used in calculations.

    (b) Aluminum alloy plate: Aluminum alloy plate material used to 
fabricate tank shell and manway nozzle must be suitable for fusion 
welding and must comply with one of the following specifications with 
its indicated minimum tensile strength and elongation in the welded 
condition.

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                              Minimum
                                                           elongation in
                                        Minimum tensile      2 inches
            Specifications             strength (p.s.i.)    (percent) 0
                                        0 temper, welded  temper, welded
                                       condition \3\ \4\     condition
                                                          (longitudinal)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
ASTM B 209, Alloy 5052 \1\...........            25,000               18
ASTM B 209, Alloy 5083 \2\...........            38,000               16
ASTM B 209, Alloy 5086 \1\...........            35,000               14
ASTM B 209, Alloy 5154 \1\...........            30,000               18
ASTM B 209, Alloy 5254 \1\...........            30,000               18
ASTM B 209, Alloy 5454 \1\...........            31,000               18
ASTM B 209, Alloy 5652 \1\...........            25,000               18
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ For fabrication, the parent plate material may be 0, H112, or H32
  temper, but design calculations must be based on minimum tensile
  strength shown.
\2\ 0 temper only.
\3\ Weld filler metal 5556 must not be used.
\4\ Maximum stress to be used in calculations.

    (c) High alloy steel plate. (1) High alloy steel plate must conform 
to the following specifications:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                             Minimum
                                        Minimum tensile  elongation in 2
                                            strength          inches
            Specifications              (p.s.i.) welded   (percent) weld
                                          condition\1\        metal
                                                          (longitudinal)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
ASTM A 240/A 240M (incorporated by               70,000               30
 reference; see Sec.  171.7 of this
 subchapter), Type 304L...............
ASTM A 240/A 240M (incorporated by               70,000               30
 reference; see Sec.  171.7 of this
 subchapter), Type 316L...............
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Maximum stresses to be used in calculations.

    (2)(i) High alloy steels used to fabricate tank must be tested in 
accordance with the following procedures in ASTM Specification A262 
titled, ``Standard Practices for Detecting Susceptibility to 
Intergranular Attack in Austenitic Stainless Steel,'' and must exhibit 
corrosion rates not exceeding the following:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                              Corrosion
          Test procedures                   Material         rate i.p.m.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Practice B.........................  Types 304L and 316L...       0.0040
Practice C.........................  Type 304L.............       0.0020
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (ii) Type 304L and 316L test specimens must be given a sensitizing 
treatment prior to testing.
    (d) All attachments welded to tank shell must be of approved 
material which is suitable for welding to the tank.

[Amdt. 179-10, 36 FR 21344, Nov. 6, 1971, as amended by Amdt. 179-32, 48 
FR 27707, June 16, 1983; Amdt. 179-47, 58 FR 50237, Sept. 24, 1993; 
Amdt. 179-52, 61 FR 28679, June 5, 1996; Amdt 179-52, 61 FR 50255, Sept. 
25, 1996; 66 FR 45186, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51660, Aug. 8, 2002]

[[Page 1000]]



Sec. 179.100-8  Tank heads.

    (a) The tank head shape shall be an ellipsoid of revolution in which 
the major axis shall equal the diameter of the shell adjacent to the 
head and the minor axis shall be one-half the major axis.
    (b) Each tank head made from steel which is required to be ``fine 
grain'' by the material specification, which is hot formed at a 
temperature exceeding 1700  deg.F., must be normalized after forming by 
heating to a temperature between 1550 deg. and 1700  deg.F., by holding 
at that temperature for at least 1 hour per inch of thickness (30-minute 
minimum), and then by cooling in air. If the material specification 
requires quenching and tempering, the treatment specified in that 
specification must be used instead of the one specified above.

[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated, 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967 and 
amended by Amdt. 179-12, 39 FR 15038, Apr. 30, 1974]



Sec. 179.100-9  Welding.

    (a) All joints shall be fusion-welded in compliance with the 
requirements of AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, appendix W. Welding 
procedures, welders and fabricators shall be approved.
    (b) [Reserved]

[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964, as amended at 65 FR 58632, Sept. 29, 2000]



Sec. 179.100-10  Postweld heat treatment.

    (a) After welding is complete, steel tanks and all attachments 
welded thereto must be postweld heat treated as a unit in compliance 
with the requirements of AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, appendix W.
    (b) For aluminum tanks, postweld heat treatment is prohibited.
    (c) Tank and welded attachments, fabricated from ASTM A 240/A 240M 
(incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter), Type 
304L or Type 316L materials do not require postweld heat treatment, but 
these materials do require a corrosion resistance test as specified in 
Sec. 179.100-7(c)(2).

[Amdt. 179-10, 36 FR 21345, Nov. 6, 1971, as amended by Amdt. 179-47, 58 
FR 50238, Sept. 24, 1993; Amdt. 179-52, 61 FR 28679, June 5, 1996; 67 FR 
51660, Aug. 8, 2002]



Sec. 179.100-12  Manway nozzle, cover and protective housing.

    (a) Manway nozzles must be of approved design of forged or rolled 
steel for steel tanks or of fabricated aluminum alloy for aluminum 
tanks, with access opening at least 18 inches inside diameter, or at 
least 14 inches by 18 inches around or oval. Nozzle must be welded to 
the tank and the opening reinforced in an approved manner in compliance 
with the requirements of AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, appendix E, 
Figure E10.
    (b) Manway cover shall be machined to approved dimensions and be of 
forged or rolled carbon or alloy steel, rolled aluminum alloy or nickel 
when required by the lading. Minimum thickness is listed in 
Sec. 179.101. Manway cover shall be attached to manway nozzle by through 
or stud bolts not entering tank, except as provided in Sec. 179.103-
2(a).
    (c) Except as provided in Sec. 179.103, protective housing of cast, 
forged or fabricated approved materials must be bolted to manway cover 
with not less than twenty \3/4\-inch studs. The shearing value of the 
bolts attaching protective housing to manway cover must not exceed 70 
percent of the shearing value of bolts attaching manway cover to manway 
nozzle. Housing must have steel sidewalls not less than three-fourths 
inch in thickness and must be equipped with a metal cover not less than 
one-fourth inch in thickness that can be securely closed. Housing cover 
must have suitable stop to prevent cover striking loading and unloading 
connections and be hinged on one side only with approved riveted pin or 
rod with nuts and cotters. Openings in wall of housing must be equipped 
with screw plugs or other closures.

[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, 
and amended by Amdt. 179-10, 36 FR 21345, Nov. 6, 1971]



Sec. 179.100-13  Venting, loading and unloading valves, measuring and sampling devices.

    (a) Venting, loading and unloading valves must be of approved 
design, made of metal not subject to rapid deterioration by the lading, 
and must withstand the tank test pressure without leakage. The valves 
shall be bolted

[[Page 1001]]

to seatings on the manway cover, except as provided in Sec. 179.103. 
Valve outlets shall be closed with approved screw plugs or other 
closures fastened to prevent misplacement.
    (b) The interior pipes of the loading and unloading valves shall be 
anchored and, except as prescribed in Sec. 179.102 or Sec. 179.103, may 
be equipped with excess flow valves of approved design.
    (c) Gauging device, sampling valve and thermometer well are not 
specification requirements. When used, they shall be of approved design, 
made of metal not subject to rapid deterioration by the lading, and 
shall withstand the tank test pressure without leakage. Interior pipes 
of the gauging device and sampling valve, except as prescribed in 
Sec. 179.102 or Sec. 179.103, may be equipped with excess flow valves of 
approved design. Interior pipe of the thermometer well shall be anchored 
in an approved manner to prevent breakage due to vibration. The 
thermometer well shall be closed by an approved valve attached close to 
the manway cover, or other approved location, and closed by a screw 
plug. Other approved arrangements that permit testing thermometer well 
for leaks without complete removal of the closure may be used.
    (d) An excess flow valve as referred to in this specification, is a 
device which closes automatically against the outward flow of the 
contents of the tank in case the external closure valve is broken off or 
removed during transit. Excess flow valves may be designed with a by-
pass to allow the equalization of pressures.
    (e) Bottom of tank shell may be equipped with a sump or siphon bowl, 
or both, welded or pressed into the shell. Such sumps or siphon bowls, 
if applied, are not limited in size and must be made of cast, forged or 
fabricated metal. Each sump or siphon bowl must be of good welding 
quality in conjunction with the metal of the tank shell. When the sump 
or siphon bowl is pressed in the bottom of the tank shell, the wall 
thickness of the pressed section must not be less than that specified 
for the shell. The section of a circular cross section tank to which a 
sump or siphon bowl is attached need not comply with the out-of-
roundness requirement specified in AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, 
appendix W, W14.06. Any portion of a sump or siphon bowl not forming a 
part of cylinder of revolution must have walls of such thickness and be 
so reinforced that the stresses in the walls caused by a given internal 
pressure are no greater than the circumferential stress which would 
exist under the same internal pressure in the wall of a tank of circular 
cross section designed in accordance with Sec. 179.100-6(a). In no case 
less than that specified in Sec. 179.101-1.

[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, 
and amended by Amdt. 179-10, 36 FR 21345, Nov. 6, 1971; Amdt. 179-40, 52 
FR 13046, Apr. 20, 1987; Amdt. 179-42, 54 FR 38798, Sept. 20, 1989; 65 
FR 58632, Sept. 29, 2000]



Sec. 179.100-14  Bottom outlets.

    (a) Bottom outlets for discharge of lading is prohibited, except as 
provided in Sec. 179.103-3. If indicated in Sec. 179.101, tank may be 
equipped with a bottom washout of approved construction. If applied, 
bottom washout shall be in accordance with the following requirements;
    (1) The extreme projection of the bottom washout equipment may not 
be more than that allowed by appendix E of the AAR Specifications for 
Tank Cars.
    (2) Bottom washout shall be of cast, forged or fabricated metal and 
shall be fusion-welded to the tank. It shall be of good weldable quality 
in conjunction with metal of tank.
    (3) If the bottom washout nozzle extends 6 inches or more from shell 
of tank, a V-shaped breakage groove shall be cut (not cast) in the upper 
part of the outlet nozzle at a point immediately below the lowest part 
of the inside closure seat or plug. In no case may the nozzle wall 
thickness at the root of the ``V'' be more than \1/4\-inch. Where the 
nozzle is not a single piece, provision shall be made for the equivalent 
of the breakage groove. The nozzle must be of a thickness to insure that 
accidental breakage will occur at or below the ``V'' groove or its 
equivalent. On cars without continuous center sills, the breakage groove 
or its equivalent may not be more than 15 inches

[[Page 1002]]

below the tank shell. On cars with continuous center sills, the breakage 
groove or its equivalent must be above the bottom of the center sill 
construction.
    (4) The closure plug and seat shall be readily accessible or 
removable for repairs.
    (5) The closure of the washout nozzle must be equipped with a \3/4\-
inch solid screw plug. Plug must be attached by at least a \1/4\-inch 
chain.
    (6) Joints between closures and their seats may be gasketed with 
suitable material.
    (b) [Reserved]

[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, 
and amended by Amdt. 179-10, 36 FR 21345, Nov. 6, 1971; Amdt. 179-40, 52 
FR 13046, Apr. 20, 1987; 66 FR 45186, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 179.100-16  Attachments.

    (a) Reinforcing pads must be used between external brackets and 
shells if the attachment welds exceed 6 linear inches of \1/4\-inch 
fillet or equivalent weld per bracket or bracket leg. When reinforcing 
pads are used, they must not be less than one-fourth inch in thickness, 
have each corner rounded to a 1-inch minimum radius, and be attached to 
the tank by continuous fillet welds except for venting provisions. The 
ultimate shear strength of the bracket-to-reinforcing pad weld must not 
exceed 85 percent of the ultimate shear strength of the reinforcing pad-
to-tank weld.
    (b) Attachments not otherwise specified shall be applied by approved 
means.

[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, 
and amended by Amdt. 179-10, 36 FR 21346, Nov. 6, 1971]



Sec. 179.100-17  Closures for openings.

    (a) Closures shall be of approved design and made of metal not 
subject to rapid deterioration by the lading. Plugs, if used, shall be 
solid, with NPT threads, and shall be of a length which will screw at 
least six threads inside the face of fitting or tank.
    (b) [Reserved]



Sec. 179.100-18  Tests of tanks.

    (a) Each tank shall be tested by completely filling tank and manway 
nozzle with water or other liquid having similar viscosity, at a 
temperature which shall not exceed 100  deg.F during the test; and 
applying the pressure prescribed in Sec. 179.101. The tank shall hold 
the prescribed pressure for at least 10 minutes without leakage or 
evidence of distress.
    (b) Insulated tanks shall be tested before insulation is applied.
    (c) Caulking of welded joints to stop leaks developed during the 
foregoing test is prohibited. Repairs in welded joints shall be made as 
prescribed in AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, appendix W (see 
Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).
    (d) Testing of exterior heaters is not a specification requirement.

[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967; 
66 FR 45186, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 179.100-19  Tests of safety relief valves.

    (a) Each valve shall be tested by air or gas for compliance with 
Sec. 179.15 before being put into service.
    (b) [Reserved]

[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, 
as amended at 62 FR 51561, Oct. 1, 1997]



Sec. 179.100-20  Stamping.

    (a) To certify that the tank complies with all specification 
requirements, each tank shall be plainly and permanently stamped in 
letters and figures at least \3/8\ inch high into the metal near the 
center of both outside heads as follows:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                            Example of required stamping
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Specification.............................  DOT-105A100W
Material..................................  ASTM A 516
Cladding material (if any)................  ASTM A240-304
Tank builder's initials...................  Clad
Date of original test.....................  ABC
Car assembler (if other than tanker         00-0000
 builder).                                  DEF
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (b) [Reserved]

[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, 
and amended by Amdt. 179-10, 36 FR 21346, Nov. 6, 1971; Amdt. 179-52, 61 
FR 28679, June 5, 1996; 65 FR 50463, Aug. 18, 2000]

[[Page 1003]]



Sec. 179.101  Individual specification requirements applicable to pressure tank car tanks.

    Editorial Note: At 66 FR 45186, Aug. 28, 2001, an amendment 
published amending a table in Sec. 179.101. No text or table appears in 
Sec. 179.101.



Sec. 179.101-1  Individual specification requirements.

    In addition to Sec. 179.100, the individual specification 
requirements are as follows:

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                               Minimum
                                                    Bursting    plate       Test      Manway                                            Reference
        DOT specification            Insulation     pressure  thickness   pressure    cover     Bottom outlet   Bottom washout    (179.[ast][ast][ast])
                                                     (psig)    (inches)    (psig)   thickness
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
105A100ALW......................  Yes............        500        5/8        100  \2\ 2 1/2  No.............  No............
105A200ALW......................  Yes............        500        5/8        200  \2\ 2 1/2  No.............  No............
105A300ALW......................  Yes............        750        5/8        300  \2\ 2 5/8  No.............  No............
105A100W........................  Yes............        500   \3\ 9/16        100      2 1/4  No.............  No............
105A200W........................  Yes............        500   \3\ 9/16        200      2 1/4  No.............  No............
105A300W........................  Yes............        750  \1\ 11/16        300  \7\ 2 1/4  No.............  No............
105A400W........................  Yes............      1,000  \1\ 11/16        400  \7\ 2 1/4  No.............  No............
105A500W........................  Yes............      1,250  \1\ 11/16        500      2 1/4  No.............  No............  102-1, 102-2
105A600W........................  Yes............      1,500  \1\ 11/16        600      2 1/4  No.............  No............  102-4, 102-17
109A100ALW......................  Optional.......        500        5/8        100  \2\ 2 1/2  No.............  Optional......
109A200ALW......................  Optional.......        500        5/8        200  \2\ 2 1/2  No.............  Optional......
109A300ALW......................  Optional.......        750        5/8        300  \2\ 2 5/8  No.............  Optional......
109A300W........................  Optional.......        500  \1\ 11/16        300      2 1/4  No.............  Optional......
112A200W........................  Optional \4\...        500  \3\ \5\ 9/       200      2 1/4  No.............  No............
                                                                     16
112A340W........................  Optional \4\...        850  \1\ 11/16        340      2 1/4  No.............  No............
112A400W........................  Optional \4\...      1,000  \1\ 11/16        400      2 1/4  No.............  No............
112A500W........................  Optional \4\...      1,250  \1\ 11/16        500      2 1/4  No.............  No............
114A340W........................  Optional \4\...        850  \1\ 11/16        340        \6\  Optional.......  Optional......  103
114A400W........................  Optional \4\...      1,000  \1\ 11/16        400        \6\  Optional.......  Optional......  103
120A200ALW......................  Yes............        500        5/8        200  \2\ 2 1/2  Optional.......  Optional......  103
120A100W........................  Yes............        500   \3\ 9/16        100      2 1/4  Optional.......  Optional......  103
120A200W........................  Yes............        500   \3\ 9/16        200      2 1/4  Optional.......  Optional......  103
120A300W........................  Yes............        750  \1\ 11/16        300      2 1/4  Optional.......  Optional......  103
120A400W........................  Yes............      1,000  \1\ 11/16        400      2 1/4  Optional.......  Optional......  103
120A500W........................  Yes............      1,250  \1\ 11/16        500      2 1/4  Optional.......  Optional......  103
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ When steel of 65,000 to 81,000 p.s.i. minimum tensile strength is used, the thickness of plates shall be not less than 5/8 inch, and when steel of
  81,000 p.s.i. minimum tensile strength is used, the minimum thickness of plate shall be not less than 9/16 inch.
\2\ When approved material other than aluminum alloys are used, the thickness shall be not less than 2 1/4 inches.
\3\ When steel of 65,000 p.s.i. minimum tensile strength is used, minimum thickness of plates shall be not less than 1/2 inch.
\4\ Tank cars not equipped with a thermal protection or an insulation system used for the transportation of a Class 2 (compressed gas) material must
  have at least the upper two-thirds of the exterior of the tank, including manway nozzle and all appurtenances in contact with this area, finished with
  a reflective coat of white paint.
\5\ For inside diameter of 87 inches or less, the thickness of plates shall be not less than 1/2 inch.
\6\ See AAR specifications for tank cars, Appendix E, E4.01 and Sec.  179.103-2.
\7\ When the use of nickel is required by the lading, the thickness shall not be less than two inches.

[Amdt. 179-52, 61 FR 28679, June 5, 1996 as amended at 66 FR 45390, Aug. 
28, 2001]



Sec. 179.102  Special commodity requirements for pressure tank car tanks.

    (a) In addition to Secs. 179.100 and 179.101 the following 
requirements are applicable:
    (b) [Reserved]



Sec. 179.102-1  Carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid.

    (a) Tank cars used to transport carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid 
must comply with the following special requirements:
    (1) All plates for tank, manway nozzle and anchorage of tanks must 
be made of carbon steel complying with ASTM Specification A 516, Grades 
55, 60, 65, or 70, or AAR Specification TC128-78, Grade B. The ASTM A516 
plate must also meet the Charpy V-Notch test requirements of ASTM A20-
79b (see table 16) in the longitudinal direction of rolling. The TC128 
plate must also meet the Charpy V-Notch energy absorption requirements 
of 15 ft-lb minimum average for 3 specimens and 10 ft-lb minimum for one 
specimen at minus 50  deg.F in the longitudinal direction of rolling in 
accord with ASTM Specification A 370. Production-welded test plates 
prepared as required by W4.00 of AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, 
appendix W, must include impact

[[Page 1004]]

test specimens of weld metal and heat-affected zone. As an alternate, 
anchor legs may be fabricated of stainless steel, ASTM A 240/A 240M 
(incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter) Types 
304, 304L, 316 or 316L for which impact tests are not required.
    (2)-(6) [Reserved]
    (b) [Reserved]

[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, 
and amended by Amdt. 179-10, 36 FR 21347, Nov. 6, 1971; Amdt. 179-28, 46 
FR 49906, Oct. 8, 1981; 46 FR 55266, Nov. 9, 1981; Amdt. 179-32, 48 FR 
50440, 50441, Nov. 1, 1983; 49 FR 42736, Oct. 24, 1984; Amdt. 179-45, 55 
FR 52728, Dec. 21, 1990; Amdt. 179-52, 61 FR 28680, June 5, 1996; 67 FR 
51660, Aug. 8, 2002]



Sec. 179.102-2  Chlorine.

    (a) Each tank car used to transport chlorine must comply with all of 
the following:
    (1) Tanks must be fabricated from carbon steel complying with ASTM 
Specification A 516, Grade 70, or AAR Specification TC-128, Grade A or 
B.
    (2)-(3) [Reserved]
    (b) [Reserved]

[Amdt. 179-7, 36 FR 14697, Aug. 10, 1971; Amdt. 179-10, 36 FR 21346, 
Nov. 6, 1971, as amended by Amdt. 179-25, 44 FR 20433, Apr. 5, 1979; 
Amdt. 179-40, 52 FR 13046, Apr. 20, 1987; Amdt. 179-45, 55 FR 52728, 
Dec. 21, 1990; Amdt. 179-52, 61 FR 28680, June 5, 1996]



Sec. 179.102-4  Vinyl fluoride, inhibited.

    Each tank used to transport vinyl fluoride, stabilized, must comply 
with the following special requirements:
    (a) All plates for the tank must be fabricated of material listed in 
paragraph (a)(2) of this section, and appurtenances must be fabricated 
of material listed in paragraph (a)(1) or (a)(2) of this section.
    (1) Stainless steel, ASTM A 240/A 240M (incorporated by reference; 
see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter), Type 304, 304L, 316 or 316L, in 
which case impact tests are not required; or
    (2) Steel complying with ASTM Specification A516; Grade 70; ASTM 
Specification A537, Class 1; or AAR Specification TC128, Grade B, in 
which case impact tests must be performed as follows:
    (i) ASTM Specification A516 and A537 material must meet the Charpy 
V-notch test requirements, in longitudinal direction of rolling, of ASTM 
Specification A20.
    (ii) AAR Specification TC128 material must meet the Charpy V-notch 
test requirements, in longitudinal direction of rolling, of 15 ft.-lb. 
minimum average for 3 specimens, with a 10 ft.-lb. minimum for any one 
specimen, at minus 50  deg.F. or colder, in accordance with ASTM 
Specification A 370.
    (iii) Production welded test plates must--
    (A) Be prepared in accordance with AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, 
appendix W, W4.00;
    (B) Include impact specimens of weld metal and heat affected zone 
prepared and tested in accordance with AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, 
appendix W, W9.00; and
    (C) Meet the same impact requirements as the plate material.
    (b) Insulation must be of approved material.
    (c) Excess flow valves must be installed under all liquid and vapor 
valves, except safety relief valves.
    (d) A thermometer well may be installed.
    (e) Only an approved gaging device may be installed.
    (f) A pressure gage may be installed.
    (g) Aluminum, copper, silver, zinc, or an alloy containing any of 
these metals may not be used in the tank construction, or in fittings in 
contact with the lading.
    (h) The jacket must be stenciled, adjacent to the water capacity 
stencil,

MINIMUM OPERATING TEMPERATURE --  deg.F.
    (i) The tank car and insulation must be designed to prevent the 
vapor pressure of the lading from increasing from the pressure at the 
maximum allowable filling density to the start-to-discharge pressure of 
the reclosing pressure relief valve within 30 days, at an ambient 
temperature of 90  deg.F.

[Amdt. 179-32, 48 FR 27707, June 16, 1983, as amended at 49 FR 24317, 
June 12, 1984; 49 FR 42736, Oct. 24, 1984; Amdt. 179-45, 55 FR 52728, 
Dec. 21, 1990; Amdt. 179-52, 61 FR 28680, June 5, 1996; 65 FR 58632, 
Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 33452, June 21, 2001; 66 FR 45186, 45390, Aug. 28, 
2001; 67 FR 51660, Aug. 8, 2002]

[[Page 1005]]



Sec. 179.102-17  Hydrogen chloride, refrigerated liquid.

    Each tank car used to transport hydrogen chloride, refrigerated 
liquid must comply with the following special requirements:
    (a) The tank car must comply with Specification DOT-105J600W and be 
designed for loading at minus 50  deg.F. or colder.
    (b) All plates for the tank must be fabricated of material listed in 
paragraph (b)(2) of this section, and appurtenances must be fabricated 
of material listed in paragraph (b)(1) or (b)(2) of this section.
    (1) Stainless steel, ASTM A 240/A 240M (incorporated by reference; 
see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter), Type 304, 304L, 316, or 316L, in 
which case impact tests are not required; or
    (2) Steel complying with ASTM Specification A516, Grade 70; ASTM 
Specification A537, Class 1; or AAR Specification TC128, Grade B, in 
which case impact tests must be performed as follows:
    (i) ASTM Specification A516 and A537 material must meet the Charpy 
V-notch test requirements, in longitudinal direction of rolling, of ASTM 
Specification A20.
    (ii) AAR Specification TC128 material must meet the Charpy V-notch 
test requirements, in longitudinal direction of rolling of 15 ft.-lb. 
minimum average for 3 specimens, with a 10 ft.-lb. minimum for any one 
specimen, at minus 50  deg.F. or colder, in accordance with ASTM 
Specification A 370.
    (iii) Production welded test plates must--
    (A) Be prepared in accordance with AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, 
appendix W, W4.00;
    (B) include impact test specimens of weld metal and heat affected 
zone prepared and tested in accordance with AAR Specifications for Tank 
Cars, appendix W, W9.00; and
    (C) meet the same impact requirements as the plate material.
    (c) Insulation must be of approved material.
    (d) Pressure relief valves must be trimmed with monel or other 
approved material and equipped with a rupture disc of silver, 
polytetrafluoroethylene coated monel, or tantalum. Each pressure relief 
device shall have the space between the rupture disc and the valve 
vented with a suitable auxiliary valve. The discharge from each pressure 
relief valve must be directed outside the protective housing.
    (e) Loading and unloading valves must be trimmed with Hastelloy B or 
C, monel, or other approved material, and identified as ``Vapor'' or 
``Liquid''. Excess flow valves must be installed under all liquid and 
vapor valves, except safety relief valves.
    (f) A thermometer well may be installed.
    (g) Only an approved gaging device may be installed.
    (h) A sump must be installed in the bottom of the tank under the 
liquid pipes.
    (i) All gaskets must be made of, or coated with, 
polytetrafluoroethylene or other approved material.
    (j) The tank car tank may be equipped with exterior cooling coils on 
top of the tank car shell.
    (k) The jacket must be stenciled, adjacent to the water capacity 
stencil,

MINIMUM OPERATING TEMPERATURE --  deg.F.

    (l) The tank car and insulation must be designed to prevent the 
pressure of the lading from increasing from the pressure at the maximum 
allowable filling density to the start-to-discharge pressure of the 
pressure relief valve within 30 days, at an ambient temperature of 
90 deg. F.

[Amdt. 179-32, 48 FR 27708, June 16, 1983, as amended at 48 FR 50441, 
Nov. 1, 1983; 49 FR 24317, June 12, 1984; 49 FR 42736, Oct. 24, 1984; 
Amdt. 179-45, 55 FR 52728, Dec. 21, 1990; 66 FR 45390, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 
FR 51660, Aug. 8, 2002]



Sec. 179.103  Special requirements for class 114A * * * tank car tanks.

    (a) In addition to the applicable requirements of Secs. 179.100 and 
179.101 the following requirements shall be complied with:
    (b) [Reserved]



Sec. 179.103-1  Type.

    (a) Tanks built under this section may be of any approved cross 
section.
    (b) Any portion of the tank shell not circular in cross section 
shall have

[[Page 1006]]

walls of such thickness and be so reinforced that the stresses in the 
walls caused by a given internal pressure are no greater than the 
circumferential stresses which would exist under the same internal 
pressure in the wall of a tank of circular cross section designed in 
accordance with paragraphs Sec. 179.100-6 (a) and (b), but in no case 
shall the wall thickness be less than that specified in Sec. 179.101.
    (c) [Reserved]
    (d) Valves and fittings need not be mounted on the manway cover.
    (e) One opening may be provided in each head for use in purging the 
tank interior.

[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, 
and amended by Amdt. 179-50, 60 FR 49077, Sept. 21, 1995]



Sec. 179.103-2  Manway cover.

    (a) The manway cover must be an approved design.
    (b) If no valves or measuring and sampling devices are mounted on 
manway cover, no protective housing is required.

[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, 
and amended by Amdt. 179-50, 60 FR 49077, Sept. 21, 1995]



Sec. 179.103-3  Venting, loading and unloading valves, measuring and sampling devices.

    (a) Venting, loading and unloading valves, measuring and sampling 
devices, when used, shall be attached to a nozzle or nozzles on the tank 
shell or heads.
    (b) These valves and appurtenances must be grouped in one location 
and, except as provided in Sec. 179.103-5, must be equipped with a 
protective housing with cover, or may be recessed into tank shell with 
cover. An additional set grouped in another location may be provided. 
Protective housing with cover, when used, must have steel sidewalls not 
less than three-fourths inch in thickness and a metal cover not less 
than one-fourth inch in thickness that can be securely closed. 
Underframe sills are an acceptable alternate to the protective housing 
cover, provided the arrangement is of approved design. For fittings 
recessed into tank shell, protective cover must be metal and not less 
than one-fourth inch in thickness.
    (c) When tank car is used to transport liquefied flammable gases, 
the interior pipes of the loading, unloading, and sampling valves must 
be equipped with excess flow valves of approved design except when quick 
closing internal valves of approved design are used. When the interior 
pipe of the gaging device provides a means for the passage of lading 
from the interior to the exterior of the tank, it must be equipped with 
an excess flow valve of approved design or with an orifice not exceeding 
0.060 inch.

[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, 
and amended by Amdt. 179-10, 36 FR 21348, Nov. 6, 1971]



Sec. 179.103-4  Safety relief devices and pressure regulators.

    (a) Safety relief devices and pressure regulators must be located on 
top of the tank near the center of the car on a nozzle, mounting plate 
or recess in the shell. Through or stud bolts, if used, must not enter 
the tank.
    (b) Metal guard of approved design must be provided to protect 
safety relief devices and pressure regulators from damage.

[Amdt. 179-10, 36 FR 21348, Nov. 6, 1971]



Sec. 179.103-5  Bottom outlets.

    (a) In addition to or in place of the venting, loading and unloading 
valves, measuring and sampling devices as prescribed in Sec. 179.103-3, 
tanks may be equipped with approved bottom outlet valves. If applied, 
bottom outlet valves must meet the following requirements:
    (1) On cars with center sills, a ball valve may be welded to the 
outside bottom of the tank or mounted on a pad or nozzle with a tongue 
and groove or male and female flange attachment, but in no case shall 
the breakage groove or equivalent extend below the bottom flange of the 
center sill. On cars without continuous center sills, a ball valve may 
be welded to the outside bottom of the tank or mounted with a tongue and 
groove or male and female flange attachment on a pad attached to the 
outside bottom of the tank. The mounting pad must have a maximum 
thickness of 2\1/2\ inches measured on the longitudinal centerline of 
the tank. The valve operating mechanism must

[[Page 1007]]

be provided with a suitable locking arrangement to insure positive 
closure during transit.
    (2) When internal bottom outlet valve is used in liquefied flammable 
gas service, the outlet of the valve must be equipped with an excess 
flow valve of approved design, except when a quick-closing internal 
valve of approved design is used. Protective housing is not required.
    (3) Bottom outlet must be equipped with a liquid tight closure at 
its lower end.
    (b) Bottom outlet equipment must be of approved design and must meet 
the following requirements:
    (1) The extreme projection of the bottom outlet equipment may not be 
more than allowed by appendix E of the AAR Specifications for Tank Cars. 
All bottom outlet reducers and closures and their attachments shall be 
secured to car by at least \3/8\-inch chain, or its equivalent, except 
that bottom outlet closure plugs may be attached by \1/4\-inch chain. 
When the bottom outlet closure is of the combination cap and valve type, 
the pipe connection to the valve shall be closed by a plug, cap, or 
approved quick coupling device. The bottom outlet equipment should 
include only the valve, reducers and closures that are necessary for the 
attachment of unloading fixtures. The permanent attachment of 
supplementary exterior fittings must be approved by the AAR Committee on 
Tank Cars.
    (2) To provide for the attachment of unloading connections, the 
discharge end of the bottom outlet nozzle or reducer, the valve body of 
the exterior valve, or some fixed attachment thereto, shall be provided 
with one of the following arrangements or an approved modification 
thereof. (See appendix E. Fig. E17 of the AAR Specifications for Tank 
Cars for illustrations of some of the possible arrangements.)
    (i) A bolted flange closure arrangement including a minimum 1-inch 
NPT pipe plug (see Fig. E17.1) or including an auxiliary valve with a 
threaded closure.
    (ii) A threaded cap closure arrangement including a minimum 1-inch 
NPT pipe plug (see Fig. E17.2) or including an auxiliary valve with a 
threaded closure.
    (iii) A quick-coupling device using a threaded plug closure of at 
least 1-inch NPT or having a threaded cap closure with a minimum 1-inch 
NPT pipe plug (see Fig. E17.3 through E17.5). A minimum 1-inch auxiliary 
test valve with a threaded closure may be substituted for the 1-inch 
pipe plug (see Fig E17.6). If the threaded cap closure does not have a 
pipe plug or integral auxiliary test valve, a minimum 1-inch NPT pipe 
plug shall be installed in the outlet nozzle above the closure (see Fig. 
E17.7).
    (iv) A two-piece quick-coupling device using a clamped dust cap must 
include an in-line auxiliary valve, either integral with the quick-
coupling device or located between the primary bottom outlet valve and 
the quick-coupling device. The quick-coupling device closure dust cap or 
outlet nozzle shall be fitted with a minimum 1-inch NPT closure (see 
Fig. E17.8 and E17.9).
    (3) The valve operating mechanism must be provided with a suitable 
locking arrangement to insure positive closure during transit.
    (4) If the outlet nozzle extends 6 inches or more from shell of 
tank, a V-shaped breakage groove shall be cut (not cast) in the upper 
part to the outlet nozzle at a point immediately below the lowest part 
of value closest to the tank. In no case may the nozzle wall thickness 
at the roof of the ``V'' be more than \1/4\-inch. On cars without 
continuous center sills, the breakage groove or its equivalent may not 
be more than 15 inches below the tank shell. On cars with continuous 
center sills, the breakage groove or its equivalent must be above the 
bottom of the center sill construction.
    (5) The valve body must be of a thickness which will insure that 
accidental breakage of the outlet nozzle will occur at or below the 
``V'' groove, or its equivalent, and will not cause distortion of the 
valve seat or valve.

[Amdt. 179-10, 36 FR 21348, Nov. 6, 1971, as amended by Amdt. 179-40, 52 
FR 13046, Apr. 20, 1987; Amdt. 179-41, 52 FR 36672, Sept. 30, 1987; 
Amdt. 179-50, 60 FR 49077, Sept. 21, 1995; Amdt. 179-52, 61 FR 28680, 
June 5, 1996; Amdt. 179-53, 61 FR 51342, Oct. 1, 1996; 66 FR 45186, Aug. 
28, 2001]

[[Page 1008]]



 Subpart D--Specifications for Non-Pressure Tank Car Tanks (Classes DOT-
                   103, 104, 111AF, 111AW, and 115AW)



Sec. 179.200  General specifications applicable to non-pressure tank car tanks (Classes DOT-103, 104, and 111).



Sec. 179.200-1  Tank built under these specifications must meet the requirements of Secs. 179.200, and 179.201.



Sec. 179.200-3  Type.

    Tank built under these specifications must be circular in cross 
section, with formed heads designed convex outward. When specified in 
Sec. 179.201-1, the tank must have at least one manway or one expansion 
dome with manway, and such other external projections as are prescribed 
herein. When the tank is divided into compartments, each compartment 
must be treated as a separate tank.

[Amdt. 179-10, 36 FR 21348, Nov. 6, 1971]



Sec. 179.200-4  Insulation.

    (a) If insulation is applied, the tank shell and expansion dome when 
used must be insulated with an approved material. The entire insulation 
must be covered with a metal jacket of a thickness not less than 11 
gauge (0.1196 inch) nominal (Manufacturer's Standard Gauge) and flashed 
around all openings so as to be weather tight. The exterior surface of a 
carbon steel tank and the inside surface of a carbon steel jacket must 
be given a protection coating.
    (b) If insulation is a specification requirement, it shall be of 
sufficient thickness so that the thermal conductance at 60  deg.F is not 
more than 0.225 Btu per hour, per square foot, per degree F temperature 
differential, unless otherwise provided in Sec. 179.201-1. If exterior 
heaters are attached to tank, the thickness of the insulation over each 
heater element may be reduced to one-half that required for the shell.

[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, 
and amended by Amdt. 179-10, 36 FR 21349, Nov. 6, 1971; Amdt. 179-50, 60 
FR 49078, Sept. 21, 1995]



Sec. 179.200-6  Thickness of plates.

    (a) The wall thickness after forming of the tank shell, dome shell, 
and of 2:1 ellipsoidal heads must be not less than specified in 
Sec. 179.201-1, nor that calculated by the following formula:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC13NO91.032

Where:

d = Inside diameter in inches;
E = 0.9 Welded joint efficiency; except E=1.0 for seamless heads;
P = Minimum required bursting pressure in psig;
S = Minimum tensile strength of plate material in p.s.i. as prescribed 
in Sec. 179.200-7;
t = Minimum thickness of plate in inches after forming.

    (b) The wall thickness after forming of 3:1 ellipsoidal heads must 
be not less than specified in Sec. 179.201-1, nor that calculated by the 
following formula:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC13NO91.033

Where:

d = Inside diameter in inches;
E = 0.9 Welded joint efficiency; except E=1.0 for seamless heads;
P = Minimum required bursting pressure in psig;
S = Minimum tensile strength of plate material in p.s.i. as prescribed 
in Sec. 179.200-7;
t = Minimum thickness of plate in inches after forming.

    (c) The wall thickness after forming of a flanged and dished head 
must be not less than specified in Sec. 179.201-1, nor that calculated 
by the following formula:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC13NO91.034

Where:

E = 0.9 Welded joint efficiency; except E=1.0 for seamless heads;
L = Main inside radius to which head is dished, measured on concave side 
in inches;
P = Minimum required bursting pressure in psig;
S = Minimum tensile strength of plate material in p.s.i. as prescribed 
in Sec. 179.200-7;
t = Minimum thickness of plate in inches after forming.

    (d) If plates are clad with material having tensile strength 
properties at

[[Page 1009]]

least equal to the base plate, the cladding may be considered a part of 
the base plate when determining thickness. If cladding material does not 
have tensile strength at least equal to the base plate, the base plate 
alone must meet the thickness requirements.
    (e) For a tank constructed of longitudinal sections, the minimum 
width of bottom sheet of the tank must be 60 inches measured on the arc, 
but in all cases the width must be sufficient to bring the entire width 
of the longitudinal welded joint, including welds, above the bolster.
    (f) For a tank built of one piece cylindrical sections, the 
thickness specified for bottom sheet must apply to the entire 
cylindrical section.
    (g) See Sec. 179.200-9 for thickness requirements for a 
compartmented tank.

[Amdt. 179-10, 36 FR 21349, Nov. 6, 1971, as amended at 66 FR 45390, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 179.200-7  Materials.

    (a) Plate material used to fabricate the tank and, when used, 
expansion dome or manway nozzle material, must meet one of the following 
specifications with the indicated minimum tensile strength and 
elongation in the welded condition.
    (b) Carbon steel plate: The maximum allowable carbon content must be 
0.31 percent when the individual specification allows carbon content 
greater than this amount. The plates may be clad with other approved 
materials:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                              Minimum         Minimum
                                              tensile      elongation in
                                             strength        2 inches
             Specifications                  (p.s.i.)     (percent) weld
                                              welded           metal
                                           condition \1\  (longitudinal)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
AAR TC 128, Gr. B.......................          81,000              19
ASTM A 516, Gr. 70......................          70,000              20
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Maximum stresses to be used in calculations.

    (c) Aluminum alloy plate: Aluminum alloy plate must be suitable for 
welding and comply with one of the following specifications:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                              Minimum
                                                           elongation in
                                        Minimum tensile      2 inches
            Specifications             strength (p.s.i.)    (percent) 0
                                        welded condition    temper weld
                                            \3\ \4\            metal
                                                          (longitudinal)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
ASTM B 209, Alloy 5052 \1\...........           25,000               18
ASTM B 209, Alloy 5083 \2\...........           38,000               16
ASTM B 209, Alloy 5086 \1\...........           35,000               14
ASTM B 209, Alloy 5154 \1\...........           30,000               18
ASTM B 209, Alloy 5254 \1\...........           30,000               18
ASTM B 209, Alloy 5454 \1\...........           31,000               18
ASTM B 209, Alloy 5652 \1\...........           25,000               18
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ For fabrication, the parent plate material may be 0, H112, or H32
  temper, but design calculations must be based on minimum tensile
  strength shown.
\2\ 0 temper only.
\3\ Weld filler metal 5556 must not be used.
\4\ Maximum stresses to be used in calculations.

    (d) High alloy steel plate: High alloy steel plate must comply with 
one of the following specifications:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                              Minimum         Minimum
                                              tensile      elongation in
                                              strength       2 inches
              Specifications                  (p.s.i.)    (percent) weld
                                               welded          metal
                                           condition \1\  (longitudinal)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
ASTM A 240/A 240M (incorporated by                75,000             30
 reference; see Sec.  171.7 of this
 subchapter), Type 304...................
ASTM A 240/A 240M (incorporated by                70,000             30
 reference; see Sec.  171.7 of this
 subchapter), Type 304L..................
ASTM A 240/A 240M (incorporated by                75,000             30
 reference; see Sec.  171.7 of this
 subchapter), Type 316...................
ASTM A 240/A 240M (incorporated by                70,000             30
 reference; see Sec.  171.7 of this
 subchapter), Type 316L..................
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Maximum stresses to be used in calculations.
\2\ High alloy steel materials used to fabricate tank and expansion
  dome, when used, must be tested in accordance with Practice A of ASTM
  Specification A 262 titled, 'Standard Practices for Detecting
  Susceptibility to Intergranular Attack in Austenitic Stainless
  Steels.' If the specimen does not pass Practice A, Practice B or C
  must be used and the corrosion rates may not exceed the following:


------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                               Corrosion
           Test procedure                    Material            rate
                                                                i.p.m.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Practice B..........................  Types 304, 304L, 316,       0.0040
                                       and 316L.
Practice C..........................  Type 304L.............       .0020
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Type 304L and Type 316L test specimens must be given a sensitizing
  treatment prior to testing. (A typical sensitizing treatment is 1 hour
  at 1250 F.)


[[Page 1010]]

    (e) Nickel plate: Nickel plate must comply with the following 
specification:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                              Minimum         Minimum
                                              tensile      elongation in
                                              strength       2 inches
              Specifications                  (p.s.i.)    (percent) weld
                                               welded          metal
                                           condition \1\  (longitudinal)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
ASTM B 1622 \2\..........................        40,000             20
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Maximum stresses to be used in calculations.
\2\ When used as cladding for carbon steel plate, low-carbon nickel is
  required.

    (f) Manganese-molybdenum steel plate: Manganese-molybdenum steel 
plate must be suitable for fusion welding and comply with the following 
specification:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                              Minimum         Minimum
                                              tensile      elongation in
                                              strength       2 inches
              Specifications                  (p.s.i.)    (percent) weld
                                               welded          metal
                                           condition \1\  (longitudinal)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
ASTM A 302, Gr. B........................        80,000             20
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Maximum stresses to be used in calculations.

    (g) All parts and items of construction in contact with the lading 
must be made of material compatible with plate material and not subject 
to rapid deterioration by the lading, or be coated or lined with 
suitable corrosion resistant material.
    (h) All external projections which may be in contact with the lading 
and all castings, forgings, or fabrications used for fittings or 
attachments to tank and expansion dome, when used, in contact with 
lading must be made of material to an approved specification. See AAR 
Specifications for Tank Cars, appendix M, M4.05 (See Sec. 171.7 of this 
subchapter) for approved material specifications for castings for 
fittings.

[Amdt. 179-10, 36 FR 21349, Nov. 9, 1971; 36 FR 21893, Nov. 17, 1971, as 
amended by Amdt.179-28, 46 FR 49906, Oct. 8, 1981; Amdt. 179-40, 52 FR 
13046, Apr. 20, 1987; Amdt. 179-52, 61 FR 28680, June 5, 1996; 66 FR 
45186, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51660, Aug. 8, 2002]



Sec. 179.200-8  Tank heads.

    (a) All external tank heads must be an ellipsoid of revolution in 
which the major axis must equal the diameter of the shell and the minor 
axis must be one-half the major axis.
    (b) Internal compartment tank heads may be 2:1 ellipsoidal, 3:1 
ellipsoidal, or flanged and dished to thicknesses as specified in 
Sec. 179.200-6. Flanged and dished heads must have main inside radius 
not exceeding 10 feet, and inside knuckle radius must not be less than 
3\3/4\ inches for steel, alloy steel, or nickel tanks, and not less than 
5 inches for aluminum alloy tanks.

[Amdt. 179-10, 36 FR 21350, Nov. 6, 1971]



Sec. 179.200-9  Compartment tanks.

    (a) When a tank is divided into compartments, by inserting interior 
heads, interior heads must be inserted in accordance with AAR 
Specifications for Tank Cars, appendix E, E7.00, and must comply with 
the requirements specified in Sec. 179.201-1. Voids between compartment 
heads must be provided with at least one tapped drain hole at their 
lowest point, and a tapped hole at the top of the tank. Top hole must be 
closed, and the bottom hole may be closed, with not less than three-
fourths inch nor more than 1\1/2\-inches solid pipe plugs having NPT 
threads.
    (b) When the tank is divided into compartments by constructing each 
compartment as a separate tank, these tanks shall be joined together by 
a cylinder made of plate, having a thickness not less than that required 
for the tank shell and applied to the outside surface of tank head 
flanges. The cylinder shall fit the straight flange portion of the 
compartment tank head tightly. The cylinder shall contact the head 
flange for a distance of at least two times the plate thickness, or a 
minimum of 1 inch, whichever is greater. The cylinder shall be joined to 
the head flange by a full fillet weld. Distance from head seam to 
cylinder shall not be less than 1\1/2\ inches or three times the plate 
thickness, whichever is greater. Voids created by the space between 
heads of tanks joined together to form a compartment tank shall be 
provided with a tapped drain hole at their lowest point and a tapped 
hole at top of tank. The top hole shall be closed and the bottom hole 
may be closed with solid pipe

[[Page 1011]]

plugs not less than \3/4\ inch nor more than 1\1/2\ inches having NPT 
threads.

[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, 
and amended by Amdt. 179-10, 36 FR 21350, Nov. 6, 1971; 66 FR 45186, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 179.200-10  Welding.

    (a) All joints shall be fusion-welded in compliance with the 
requirements of AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, appendix W. Welding 
procedures, welders and fabricators shall be approved.
    (b) Welding is not permitted on or to ductile iron or malleable iron 
fittings.

[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, 
and amended by Amdt. 179-10, 36 FR 21350, Nov. 6, 1971]



Sec. 179.200-11  Postweld heat treatment.

    After welding is complete, postweld heat treatment must be in 
compliance with the requirements of AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, 
appendix W, when specified in Sec. 179.201-1.

[Amdt. 179-10, 36 FR 21350, Nov. 6, 1971, as amended at 66 FR 45186, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 179.200-13  Manway ring or flange, pressure relief device flange, bottom outlet nozzle flange, bottom washout nozzle flange and other attachments and 
          openings.

    (a) These attachments shall be fusion welded to the tank and 
reinforced in an approved manner in compliance with the requirements of 
appendix E, figure 10, of the AAR Specifications for Tank Cars.
    (b) The opening in the manway ring must be at least 16 inches in 
diameter except that acid resistant lined manways must be at least 18 
inches in diameter before lining.
    (c) The manway ring or flange, shall be made of cast, forged or 
fabricated metal. The metal of the dome, tank, or nozzle must be 
compatible with the manway ring or flange, so that they may be welded 
together.
    (d) The openings for the manway or other fittings shall be 
reinforced in an approved manner.

[Amdt. 179-40, 52 FR 13047, Apr. 20, 1987]



Sec. 179.200-14  Expansion capacity.

    (a) Tanks shall have expansion capacity as prescribed in this 
subchapter. This capacity shall be provided in the tank for Class DOT-
111A cars, or in a dome for Class DOT-103 and 104 type cars.
    (b) For tank cars having an expansion dome, the expansion capacity 
is the total capacity of the tank and dome combined. The capacity of the 
dome shall be measured from the inside top of shell of tank to the 
inside top of dome or bottom of any vent pipe projecting inside of dome, 
except that when a pressure relief device is applied to side of dome, 
the effective capacity of the dome shall be measured from top of the 
pressure relief device opening inside of dome to inside top of shell of 
tank.
    (c) The opening in the tank shell within the dome shall be at least 
29 inches in diameter. When the opening in the tank shell exceeds 30 
inches in diameter, the opening shall be reinforced in an approved 
manner. This additional reinforcement may be accomplished by the use of 
a dome opening of the flued-type as shown in appendix E, Figure E 10C of 
the AAR Specifications for Tank Cars or by the use of reinforcing as 
outlined in Appendix E, E3.04 and Figures E10K and E10L. When the 
opening in the tank shell is less than the inside diameter of the dome, 
and the dome pocket is not closed off in an approved manner, dome pocket 
drain holes shall be provided in the tank shell with nipples projecting 
inside the tank at least 1 inch.
    (d) The dome head shall be of approved contour and shall be designed 
for pressure on concave side.
    (e) Aluminum alloy domes: (1) The dome shell thickness shall be 
calculated by the formula in Sec. 179.200-6(a).
    (2) The dome head may be an ellipsoid of revolution in which the 
major axis shall be equal to the diameter of the dome shell and the 
minor axis shall be one-half the major axis. The thickness in this case 
shall be determined by using formula in Sec. 179.200-6(a).
    (3) The dome head, if dished, must be dished to a radius not 
exceeding 96 inches. Thickness of dished dome head must be calculated by 
the formula in Sec. 179.200-6(c).
    (4) Tank shell shall be reinforced by the addition of a plate equal 
to or greater than shell in thickness and the

[[Page 1012]]

cross sectional area shall exceed metal removed for dome opening, or 
tank shell shall be reinforced by a seamless saddle plate equal to or 
greater than shell in thickness and butt welded to tank shell. The 
reinforcing saddle plate shall be provided with a fluid opening having a 
vertical flange of the diameter of the dome for butt welding shell of 
dome to the flange. The reinforcing saddle plate shall extend about the 
dome a distance measured along shell of tank at least equal to the 
extension at top of tank. Other approved designs may be used.
    (f) For thickness of carbon or alloy steel domes, see Sec. 179.201-
2.

[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, 
and amended by Amdt. 179-10, 36 FR 21350, Nov. 6, 1971; Amdt. 179-28, 46 
FR 49906, Oct. 8, 1981; Amdt. 179-52, 61 FR 28680, June 5, 1996; 66 FR 
45186, 45390, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 179.200-15  Closures for manways.

    (a) Manway covers must be of approved type.
    (b) Manway covers shall be designed to provide a secure closure of 
the manway.
    (c) Manway covers must be of approved cast, forged, or fabricated 
metals. Malleable iron, if used, must comply with ASTM A47-68, Grade 
35018. Cast iron manway covers must not be used.
    (d) All joints between manway covers and their seats shall be made 
tight against leakage of vapor and liquid by use of gaskets of suitable 
material.
    (e) For other manway cover requirements see Sec. 179.201-1.

[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, 
and amended by Amdt. 179-10, 36 FR 21350, Nov. 6, 1971; Amdt. 179-37, 50 
FR 11066, Mar. 19, 1985]



Sec. 179.200-16  Gauging devices, top loading and unloading devices, venting and air inlet devices.

    (a) When installed, these devices shall be of an approved design 
which will prevent interchange with any other fixture, and be tightly 
closed. Unloading pipes shall be securely anchored within the tank. Each 
tank or compartment may be equipped with one separate air connection.
    (b) When the characteristics of the commodity for which the car is 
authorized are such that these devices must be equipped with valves or 
fittings to permit the loading and unloading of the contents, these 
devices, including valves, shall be of an approved design, and be 
provided with a protective housing except when plug or ball type valves 
with operating handles removed are used. Provision shall be made for 
closing pipe connections of valves.
    (c) A tank may be equipped with a vacuum relief valve of an approved 
design. Protective housing is not required.
    (d) When using a visual gauging device on a car with a hinged manway 
cover, an outage scale visible through the manway opening shall be 
provided. If loading devices are applied to permit tank loading with 
cover closed, a telltale pipe may be provided. Telltale pipe shall be 
capable of determining that required outage is provided. Pipe shall be 
equipped with \1/4\ inch minimum NPT control valve mounted outside tank 
and enclosed within a housing. Other approved devices may be used in 
lieu of outage scale or telltale pipe.
    (e) Bottom of tank shell may be equipped with a sump or siphon bowl, 
or both, welded or pressed into the shell. Such sumps or siphon bowls, 
if applied are not limited in size and must be made of cast, forged, or 
fabricated metal. Each sump or siphon bowl must be of good welding 
quality in conjunction with the metal of the tank shell. When sump or 
siphon bowl is pressed in the bottom of the tank shell, the wall 
thickness of the pressed section must not be less than that specified 
for the shell. The section of a circular cross section tank to which a 
sump or siphon bowl is attached need not comply with the out-of-
roundness requirement specified in appendix W, W14.06, of the AAR 
Specifications for Tank Cars. Any portion of a sump or siphon bowl not 
forming a part of a cylinder of revolution must have walls of such 
thickness and be so reinforced that the stresses in the walls caused by 
a given internal pressure are not greater than the circumferential 
stress which would exist under the same internal pressure in the wall of 
a tank of

[[Page 1013]]

circular cross section designed in accordance with Sec. 179.200-6 (a) 
and (d). In no case shall the wall thickness be less than that specified 
in Sec. 179.201-1(a).
    (f) When top loading and discharge devices, or venting and air inlet 
devices are installed with exposed piping to a removed location, shutoff 
valves must be applied directly to reinforcing pads or nozzles at their 
communication through the tank shell, and must be enclosed in a 
protective housing with provision for a seal. The piping must include 
breakage grooves, and suitable bracing. Relief valves must be applied to 
liquid lines for protection in case lading is trapped. Provision must be 
made to insure closure of the valves while the car is in transit.
    (g) Protective housing, when required, must be fabricated of 
approved material and have cover and sidewalls not less than 0.119 inch 
in thickness.

[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, 
and amended by Amdt. 179-10, 36 FR 21350, Nov. 6, 1971; Amdt. 179-52, 61 
FR 28680, June 5, 1996]



Sec. 179.200-17  Bottom outlets.

    (a) If indicated in Sec. 179.201-1, tank may be equipped with bottom 
outlet. Bottom outlet, if applied, must comply with the following 
requirements:
    (1) The extreme projection of the bottom outlet equipment may not be 
more than that allowed by appendix E of the AAR Specifications for Tank 
Cars. All bottom outlet reducers and closures and their attachments 
shall be secured to the car by at least \3/8\-inch chain, or its 
equivalent, except that the bottom outlet closure plugs may be attached 
by \1/4\-inch chain. When the bottom outlet closure is of the 
combination cap and valve type, the pipe connection to the valve shall 
be closed by a plug, cap, or approved quick coupling device. The bottom 
outlet equipment should include only the valve, reducers and closures 
that are necessary for the attachment of unloading fixtures. The 
permanent attachment of supplementary exterior fittings shall be 
approved by the AAR Committee on Tank Cars.
    (2) Bottom outlet must be of approved construction, and be provided 
with a liquid-tight closure at its lower end.
    (3) On cars with center sills, a ball valve may be welded to the 
outside bottom of the tank or mounted on a pad or nozzle with a tongue 
and groove or male and female flange attachment. In no case shall the 
breakage groove or equivalent extend below the bottom flange of the 
center sill. On cars without continuous center sills, a ball valve may 
be welded to the outside bottom of the tank or mounted with a tongue and 
groove or male and female flange attachment on a pad attached to the 
outside bottom of the tank. The mounting pad must have a maximum 
thickness of 2\1/2\ inches measured on the longitudinal centerline of 
the tank. The valve operating mechanism must be provided with a suitable 
locking arrangement to insure positive closure during transit.
    (4) The valve operating mechanism for valves applied to the interior 
of the tank, and outlet nozzle construction, must insure against the 
unseating of the valve due to stresses or shocks incident to 
transportation.
    (5) Bottom outlet nozzle of interior valves and the valve body of 
exterior valves, must be of cast, fabricated, or forged metal. If welded 
to tank, they must be of good weldable quality in conjunction with metal 
of tank.
    (6) To provide for the attachment of unloading connections, the 
discharge end of the bottom outlet nozzle or reducer, the valve body of 
the exterior valve, or some fixed attachment thereto, shall be provided 
with one of the following arrangements or an approved modification 
thereof. (See appendix E. Fig. E17 of the AAR Specifications for Tank 
Cars for illustrations of some of the possible arrangements.)
    (i) A bolted flange closure arrangement including a minimum 1-inch 
NPT pipe plug (see Fig. E17.1) or including an auxiliary valve with a 
threaded closure.
    (ii) A threaded cap closure arrangement including a minimum 1-inch 
NPT pipe plug (see Fig. E17.2) or including an auxiliary valve with a 
threaded closure.
    (iii) A quick-coupling device using a threaded plug closure of at 
least 1-inch NPT or having a threaded cap closure with a minimum 1-inch 
NPT pipe plug (see Fig. E17.3 through E17.5). A minimum 1-inch auxiliary 
test valve with a

[[Page 1014]]

threaded closure may be substituted for the 1-inch pipe plug (see Fig. 
E17.6). If the threaded cap closure does not have a pipe plug or 
integral auxiliary test valve, a minimum 1-inch NPT pipe plug shall be 
installed in the outlet nozzle above the closure (see Fig. E17.7).
    (iv) A two-piece quick-coupling device using a clamped dust cap must 
include an in-line auxiliary valve, either integral with the quick-
coupling device or located between the primary bottom outlet valve and 
the quick-coupling device. The quick-coupling device closure dust cap or 
outlet nozzle shall be fitted with a minimum 1-inch NPT closure (see 
Fig. E17.8 and E17.9).
    (7) If the outlet nozzle extends 6 inches or more from the shell of 
the tank, a V-shaped breakage groove shall be cut (not cast) in the 
upper part of the outlet nozzle at a point immediately below the lowest 
part of valve closest to the tank. In no case may the nozzle wall 
thickness at the root of the ``V'' be more than \1/4\ inch. The outlet 
nozzle on interior valves or the valve body on exterior valves may be 
steam jacketed, in which case the breakage groove or its equivalent must 
be below the steam chamber but above the bottom of center sill 
construction. If the outlet nozzle is not a single piece, or if exterior 
valves are applied, provisions shall be made for the equivalent of the 
breakage groove. On cars without continuous center sills, the breakage 
groove or its equivalent must be no more than 15 inches below the tank 
shell. On cars with continuous center sills, the breakage groove or its 
equivalent must be above the bottom of the center sill construction.
    (8) The flange on the outlet nozzle or the valve body of exterior 
valves must be of a thickness which will prevent distortion of the valve 
seat or valve by any change in contour of the shell resulting from 
expansion of lading, or other causes, and which will insure that 
accidental breakage of the outlet nozzle will occur at or below the 
``V'' groove, or its equivalent.
    (9) The valve must have no wings or stem projecting below the ``V'' 
groove or its equivalent. The valve and seat must be readily accessible 
or removable for repairs, including grinding.
    (10) The valve operating mechanism on interior valves must have 
means for compensating for variation in the vertical diameter of the 
tank produced by expansion, weight of the liquid contents, or other 
causes, and may operate from the interior of the tank, but in the event 
the rod is carried through the dome, or tank shell, leakage must be 
prevented by packing in stuffing box or other suitable seals and a cap.
    (b) If indicated in Sec. 179.201-1, tank may be equipped with bottom 
washout of approved construction. If applied, bottom washout shall be in 
accordance with the following requirements:
    (1) The extreme projection of the bottom washout equipment may not 
be more than that allowed by appendix E of the AAR Specifications for 
Tank Cars.
    (2) Bottom washout shall be of cast, forged or fabricated metal. If 
welded to tank, they shall be of good weldable quality in conjunction 
with metal of tank.
    (3) If the washout nozzle extends 6 inches or more from the shell of 
the tank, a V-shaped breakage groove shall be cut (not cast) in the 
upper part of the nozzle at a point immediately below the lowest part of 
the inside closure seat or plug. In no case may the nozzle wall 
thickness at the root of the ``V'' be more than \1/4\ inch. Where the 
nozzle is not a single piece, provisions shall be made for the 
equivalent of the breakage groove. The nozzle must be of a thickness to 
insure that accidental breakage will occur at or below the ``V'' groove 
or its equivalent. On cars without continuous center sills, the breakage 
groove or its equivalent may not be more than 15 inches below the outer 
shell. On cars with continuous center sills, the breakage groove or its 
equivalent must be above the bottom of the center sill construction.
    (4) The closure plug and seat must be readily accessible or 
removable for repairs, including grinding.
    (5) The closure of the washout nozzle must be equipped with a \3/4\-
inch solid screw plug. Plug must be attached by at least a \1/4\-inch 
chain.

[[Page 1015]]

    (6) Joints between closures and their seats may be gasketed with 
suitable material.

[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, 
and amended by Amdt. 179-10, 36 FR 21351, Nov. 6, 1971; Amdt. 179-40, 52 
FR 13047, Apr. 20, 1987]



Sec. 179.200-19  Reinforcements, when used, and appurtenances not otherwise specified.

    (a) All attachments to tank and dome shall be applied by approved 
means. Rivets if used shall be caulked inside and outside.
    (b) Reinforcing pads must be used between external brackets and 
shells if the attachment welds exceed 6 lineal inches of \1/4\-inch 
fillet or equivalent weld per bracket or bracket leg. When reinforcing 
pads are used, they must not be less than one-fourth inch in thickness, 
have each corner rounded to a 1 inch minimum radius, and be attached to 
the tank by continuous fillet welds except for venting provisions. The 
ultimate shear strength of the bracket to reinforcing pad weld must not 
exceed 85 percent of the ultimate shear strength of the reinforcing pad 
to tank weld.

[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, 
and amended by Amdt. 179-10, 36 FR 21351, Nov. 6, 1971]



Sec. 179.200-21  Closures for openings.

    (a) All plugs shall be solid, with NPT threads, and shall be of a 
length which will screw at least 6 threads inside the face of fitting or 
tank. Plugs, when inserted from the outside of tank heads, shall have 
the letter ``S'' at least \3/8\ inch in size stamped with steel stamp or 
cast on the outside surface to indicate the plug is solid.
    (b) [Reserved]



Sec. 179.200-22  Test of tanks.

    (a) Each tank shall be tested by completely filling the tank and 
dome or nozzles with water, or other liquid having similar viscosity, of 
a temperature which shall not exceed 100  deg.F. during the test; and 
applying the pressure prescribed in Sec. 179.201-1. Tank shall hold the 
prescribed pressure for at least 10 minutes without leakage or evidence 
of distress. All rivets and closures, except safety relief valves or 
safety vents, shall be in place when test is made.
    (b) Insulated tanks shall be tested before insulation is applied.
    (c) Rubber-lined tanks shall be tested before rubber lining is 
applied.
    (d) Caulking of welded joints to stop leaks developed during the 
foregoing tests is prohibited. Repairs in welded joints shall be made as 
prescribed in AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, appendix W.



Sec. 179.200-23  Tests of safety relief valves.

    (a) Each valve shall be tested by air or gas for compliance with 
Sec. 179.15 before being put into service.
    (b) [Reserved]

[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, 
as amended at 62 FR 51561, Oct. 1, 1997]



Sec. 179.200-24  Stamping.

    (a) To certify that the tank complies with all specification 
requirements, each tank shall be plainly and permanently stamped in 
letters and figures at least \3/8\ inch high into the metal near the 
center of both outside heads as follows:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                            Example of required stamping
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Specification.............................  DOT-103-W
Material..................................  ASTM A 516-GR 70
Cladding material (if any)................  ASTM A240-304 Clad
Tank builder's initials...................  ABC
Date of original test.....................  00-0000
Car assembler (if other than tank builder)  DEF
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (b) On Class DOT-111 tank cars, the last numeral of the 
specification number may be omitted from the stamping; for example, DOT-
111A100W.

[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, 
and amended by Amdt. 179-10, 36 FR 21351, Nov. 6, 1971; Amdt. 179-52, 61 
FR 28680, June 5, 1996]



Sec. 179.201  Individual specification requirements applicable to non-pressure tank car tanks.



Sec. 179.201-1  Individual specification requirements.

    In addition to Sec. 179.200, the individual specification 
requirements are as follows:

[[Page 1016]]



--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                    Minimum
                                                        Bursting     plate      Test                                               References (179.201 -
      DOT Specification \1\             Insulation      pressure   thickness  pressure     Bottom outlet        Bottom washout             ***)
                                                         (psig)    (inches)    (psig)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
103A-ALW.........................  Optional...........       240       \1/2\        60  No.................  Optional.
103AW............................  Optional...........       240   179.201-2        60  No.................  Optional.
103ALW...........................  Optional...........       240       \1/2\        60  Optional...........  Optional...........  6(a).
103ANW...........................  Optional...........       240   179.201-2        60  No.................  Optional...........  6(d).
103BW............................  Optional...........       240   179.201-2        60  No.................  No.................  6(b), 3.
103CW............................  Optional...........       240   179.201-2        60  No.................  No.................  6(c), 4,5.
103DW............................  Optional...........       240   179.201-2        60  Optional...........  Optional...........  6(a), 6(c), 4, 5.
103EW............................  Optional...........       240   179.201-2        60  No.................  Optional...........  6(c), 4, 5.
103W.............................  Optional...........       240   179.201-2        60  Optional...........  Optional...........  6(a).
104W.............................  Yes................       240   179.201-2        60  Optional...........  Optional...........  6(a).
111A60ALW1.......................  Optional...........       240       \1/2\        60  Optional...........  Optional...........  6(a).
111A60ALW2.......................  Optional...........       240       \1/2\        60  No.................  Optional.
111A60W1.........................  Optional...........       240      \7/16\        60  Optional...........  Optional...........  6(a).
111A60W2.........................  Optional...........       240      \7/16\        60  No.................  Optional.
111A60W5.........................  Optional...........       240      \7/16\        60  No.................  No.................  3, 6(b).
111A60W6.........................  Optional...........       240      \7/16\        60  Optional...........  Optional...........  4, 5, 6(a), 6(c).
111A60W7.........................  Optional...........       240      \7/16\        60  No.................  No.................  4, 5, 6(a).
111A100ALW1......................  Optional...........       500       \5/8\       100  Optional...........  Optional...........  6(a).
111A100ALW2......................  Optional...........       500       \5/8\       100  No.................  Optional.
111A100W1........................  Optional...........       500      \7/16\       100  Optional...........  Optional...........  6(a).
111A100W2........................  Optional...........       500      \7/16\       100  No.................  Optional.
111A100W3........................  Yes................       500      \7/16\       100  Optional...........  Optional...........  6(a).
111A100W4........................  Yes (see 179.201-         500      \7/16\       100  No.................  No.................  6(a), 8, 10.
                                    11).
111A100W5........................  Optional...........       500      \7/16\       100  No.................  No.................  3.
111A100W6........................  Optional...........       500      \7/16\       100  Optional...........  Optional...........  4, 5, 6(a) and 6(c).
111A100W7........................  Optional...........       500      \7/16\       100  No.................  No.................  4, 5, 6(c).
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Tanks marked ``ALW'' are constructed from aluminum alloy plate; ``AN'' nickel plate; ``CW,'' ``DW,'' ``EW,'' ``W6,'' and ``W7'' high alloy steel or
  manganese-molybdenum steel plate; and those marked ``BW'' or ``W5'' must have an interior lining that conforms to Sec.  179.201-3.

[Amdt. 179-52, 61 FR 28680, June 5, 1996, as amended by 66 FR 45390, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 179.201-2  Minimum plate thickness.

    (a) The minimum plate thickness, after forming, must be as follows:

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                                 3:1
                                  Bottom     Shell   Expansion      2:1      ellipsoidal  Expansion    Interior
    Inside diameter of tanks      sheets    sheets      dome    ellipsoidal   and dished     dome    compartment
                                                       sheets      heads      tank heads    heads       heads
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                      Inches
 
                                --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
60 inches or under.............    \7/16\     \1/4\     \5/16\      \7/16\        \1/2\      \5/16\      \5/16\
Over 60 to 78 inches...........    \7/16\    \5/16\     \5/16\      \7/16\        \1/2\      \5/16\      \5/16\
Over 78 to 96 inches...........     \1/2\     \3/8\     \5/16\      \7/16\        \1/2\      \5/16\       \3/8\
                                      (1)
Over 96 to 112 inches..........     \1/2\    \7/16\     \5/16\      \7/16\       \9/16\      \5/16\      \7/16\
                                      (1)
Over 112 to 122 inches.........     \1/2\     \1/2\     \5/16\       \1/2\        \5/8\      \5/16\       \1/2\
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ May be reduced to \7/16\ inch when approved steels having tensile strength of 65,000 psi or higher are used.

(b) [Reserved]
[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, 
and amended by Amdt. 179-10, 36 FR 21352, Nov. 6, 1971; 67 FR 61016, 
Sept. 27, 2002]



Sec. 179.201-3  Lined tanks.

    (a) Rubber-lined tanks. (1) Each tank or each compartment thereof 
must be lined with acid-resistant rubber or other approved rubber 
compound vulcanized or bonded directly to the metal tank, to provide a 
nonporous laminated lining, at least \5/32\-inch thick, except overall 
rivets and seams formed by riveted attachments in the lining must be 
double thickness. The rubber lining must overlap at least 1\1/2\ inches 
at all edges which must be straight and be

[[Page 1017]]

beveled to an angle of approximately 45 deg., or butted edges of lining 
must be sealed with a 3-inch minimum strip of lining having 45 deg. 
beveled edges.
    (2) As an alternate method, the lining may be joined with a skived 
butt seam then capped with a separate strip of lining 3 inches wide 
having 45 deg. beveled edges. An additional rubber reinforcing pad at 
least 4\1/2\ feet square and at least \1/2\-inch thick must be applied 
by vulcanizing to the lining on bottom of tank directly under the manway 
opening. The edges of the rubber pad must be beveled to an angle of 
approximately 45 deg.. An opening in this pad for sump is permitted. No 
lining must be under tension when applied except due to conformation 
over rivet heads. Interior of tank must be free from scale, oxidation, 
moisture, and all foreign matter during the lining operation.
    (3) Other approved lining materials may be used provided the 
material is resistant to the corrosive or solvent action of the lading 
in the liquid or gas phase and is suitable for the service temperatures.
    (b) Before a tank car tank is lined with rubber, or other rubber 
compound, a report certifying that the tank and its equipment have been 
brought into compliance with spec. DOT-103B, 103BW, 111A60W5, or 
111A100W5 must be furnished by car owner to the party who is to apply 
the lining. A copy of this report in approved form, certifying that tank 
has been lined in compliance with all requirements of one of the above 
specifications, must be furnished by party lining tank to car owner. 
Reports of the latest lining application must be retained by the car 
owner until the next relining has been accomplished and recorded.
    (c) All rivet heads on inside of tank must be buttonhead, or similar 
shape, and of uniform size. The under surface of heads must be driven 
tight against the plate. All plates, castings and rivet heads on the 
inside of the tank must be calked. All projecting edges of plates, 
castings and rivet heads on the inside of the tank must be rounded and 
free from fins and other irregular projections. Castings must be free 
from porosity.
    (d) All surfaces of attachments or fittings and their closures 
exposed to the lading must be covered with at least \1/8\-inch acid 
resistant material. Attachments made of metal not affected by the lading 
need not be covered with rubber or other acid resistant material.
    (e) Hard rubber or polyvinyl chloride may be used for pressure 
retaining parts of safety vents provided the material is resistant to 
the corrosive or solvent action of the lading in the liquid or gas phase 
and is suitable for the service temperatures.
    (f) Polyvinyl chloride lined tanks. Tank car tanks or each 
compartment thereof may be lined with elastomeric polyvinyl chloride 
having a minimum lining thickness of three thirty-seconds inch.
    (g) Polyurethane lined tanks. Tank car tanks or each compartment 
thereof may be lined with elastomeric polyurethane having a minimum 
lining thickness of one-sixteenth inch.

[Amdt. 179-10, 36 FR 21352, Nov. 6, 1971, as amended at 66 FR 45186, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 179.201-4  Material.

    All fittings, tubes, and castings and all projections and their 
closures, except for protective housing, must also meet the requirements 
specified in ASTM Specification A 262, except that when preparing the 
specimen for testing the carburized surface may be finished by grinding 
or machining.

[Amdt. 179-10, 36 FR 21353, Nov. 6, 1971, as amended by Amdt. 179-52, 61 
FR 28681, June 5, 1996; Amdt. 179-52, 61 FR 50255, Sept. 25, 1996; 66 FR 
45186, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 179.201-5  Postweld heat treatment and corrosion resistance.

    (a) Tanks and attachments welded directly thereto must be postweld 
heat treated as a unit at the proper temperature except as indicated 
below. Tanks and attachments welded directly thereto fabricated from 
ASTM A 240/A 240M (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this 
subchapter) Type 430A, Type 304 and Type 316 materials must be postweld 
heat treated as a unit and must be tested to demonstrate that they 
possess the corrosion resistance specified in Sec. 179.200-7(d), 
Footnote 2. Tanks and attachments welded directly thereto, fabricated 
from ASTM A 240/A 240M (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of 
this subchapter) Type 304L or

[[Page 1018]]

Type 316L materials are not required to be postweld heat treated.
    (b) Tanks and attachments welded directly thereto, fabricated from 
ASTM A 240/A 240M (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this 
subchapter) Type 304L and Type 316 materials must be tested to 
demonstrate that they possess the corrosion resistance specified in 
Sec. 179.200-7(d), Footnote 2.

[Amdt. 179-10, 36 FR 21353, Nov. 6, 1971, as amended by Amdt. 179-52, 61 
FR 28681, June 5, 1996; 67 FR 51660, Aug. 8, 2002]



Sec. 179.201-6  Manways and manway closures.

    (a) The manway cover for spec. DOT 103ALW, 103DW, 103W, 104W, 
111A60-ALW1, 111A60W1, 111A100ALW1, 111A-100W1, 111A100W3, or 111A100W6 
must be designed to make it impossible to remove the cover while the 
interior of the tank is subjected to pressure.
    (b) The manway cover for spec. DOT 103BW, 11A60W5, or 111A100W5 must 
be made of a suitable metal. The top, bottom and edge of manway cover 
must be acid resistant material covered as prescribed in Sec. 179.201-3. 
Through-bolt holes must be lined with acid resistant material at least 
one-eighth inch in thickness. Cover made of metal not affected by the 
lading need not be acid resistant material covered.
    (c) The manway ring and cover for spec. DOT-103CW, 103DW, 103EW, 
111360W7, or 11A100W6 must be made of the metal and have the same 
inspection procedures specified in AAR Specifications for Tanks Cars 
Appendix M, M3.03.
    (d) The manway ring for DOT-103 ANW must be made of cast, forged or 
fabricated nickel and be a good weldable quality in conjunction with the 
metal of the dome. Manway cover must be made of nickel.

[Amdt. 179-10, 36 FR 21353, Nov. 6, 1971; 66 FR 45186, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 179.201-8  Sampling device and thermometer well.

    (a) Sampling valve and thermometer well are not specification 
requirements. When used, they must be of approved design, made of metal 
not subject to rapid deterioration by lading, and must withstand a 
pressure of 100 psig without leakage. Interior pipes of the sampling 
valve must be equipped with excess flow valves of an approved design. 
Interior pipe of thermometer well must be closed by an approved valve 
attached close to fitting where it passes through the tank and closed by 
a screw plug. Other approved arrangements that permit testing 
thermometer well for leaks without complete removal of the closure may 
be used.
    (b) [Reserved]

[Amdt. 179-10, 36 FR 21348, Nov. 6, 1971, as amended at 66 FR 45390, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 179.201-9  Gauging device.

    A gauging device of an approved design must be applied to permit 
determining the liquid level of the lading. The gauging device must be 
made of materials not subject to rapid deterioration by the lading. When 
the interior pipe of the gauging device provides a means for passage of 
the lading from the interior to the exterior of the tank, it must be 
equipped with an excess flow valve of an approved design. If the opening 
for passage of lading through the gauging device is not more than 0.060 
inch diameter an excess flow valve is not required. The gauging device 
must be provided with a protective housing.

[Amdt. 179-10, 36 FR 21353, Nov. 6, 1971]



Sec. 179.201-10  Water capacity marking.

    (a) Water capacity of the tank in pounds stamped plainly and 
permanently in letters and figures at least \3/8\ inch high into the 
metal of the tank immediately below the stamped marks specified in 
Sec. 179.200-24(a). This mark shall also be stenciled on the jacket 
immediately below the dome platform and directly behind or within 3 feet 
of the right or left side of the ladder, or ladders, if there is a 
ladder on each side of the tank, in letters and figures at least 1\1/2\ 
inches high as follows:

                             water capacity

                              000000 Pounds

    (b) [Reserved]



Sec. 179.201-11  Insulation.

    (a) Insulation shall be of sufficient thickness so that the thermal 
conductance at 60  deg.F. is not more than 0.075

[[Page 1019]]

Btu per hour, per square foot, per degree F. temperature differential.
    (b) [Reserved]



Secs. 179.202--179.202-22  [Reserved]



Sec. 179.220  General specifications applicable to nonpressure tank car tanks consisting of an inner container supported within an outer shell (class DOT-115).



Sec. 179.220-1  Tanks built under these specifications must meet the requirements of Secs. 179.220 and 179.221.



Sec. 179.220-3  Type.

    (a) Tanks built under these specifications must consist of an inner 
container, a support system for the inner container, and an outer shell.
    (b) The inner container must be a fusion welded tank of circular 
cross section with formed heads designed convex outward and must have a 
manway on top of the tank as prescribed herein. When the inner container 
is divided into compartments, each compartment must be considered a 
separate container.
    (c) The outer shell must be a fusion welded tank with formed heads 
designed convex outward.

[Amdt. 179-9, 36 FR 21340, Nov. 6, 1971]



Sec. 179.220-4  Insulation.

    The annular space between the inner container and the outer shell 
must contain an approved insulation material.

[Amdt. 179-9, 36 FR 21340, Nov. 6, 1971]



Sec. 179.220-6  Thickness of plates.

    (a) The wall thickness, after forming of the inner container shell 
and 2:1 ellipsoidal heads must be not less than specified in 
Sec. 179.221-1, or not less than that calculated by the following 
formula:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC13NO91.035

Where:

d = Inside diameter in inches;
E = 0.9 welded joint efficiency; except E=1.0 for seamless heads;
P = Minimum required bursting pressure in psig;
S = Minimum tensile strength of plate material in p.s.i. as prescribed 
in AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, appendix M, Table M1;
t = Minimum thickness of plate in inches after forming.

    (b) The wall thickness after forming of the inner container heads, 
if flanged and dished, must be not less than specified in Sec. 179.221-
1, or not less than that calculated by the following formula:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC13NO91.036

Where:

E = 0.9 welded joint efficiency; except E=1.0 for seamless heads;
L = Main inside radius to which head is dished, measured on concave side 
in inches;
P = Minimum required bursting pressure in psig;
S = Minimum tensile strength of plate material in p.s.i. as prescribed 
in AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, appendix M., Table M1;
t = Minimum thickness of plate in inches after forming.

    (c) The wall thickness after forming of the cylindrical section and 
heads of the outer shell must be not less than seven-sixteenths of an 
inch.
    (d) See Sec. 179.220-9 for plate thickness requirements for inner 
container when divided into compartments.

[Amdt. 179-9, 36 FR 21340, Nov. 6, 1971, as amended at 66 FR 45390, Aug. 
28, 2001]



Sec. 179.220-7  Materials.

    (a) The plate material used to fabricate the inner container and 
nozzles must meet one of the following specifications and with the 
indicated minimum tensile strength and elongation in the welded 
condition.
    (b) Carbon steel plate: The maximum allowable carbon content must be 
0.31 percent when the individual specification allows carbon content 
greater than this amount. The plates may be clad with other approved 
materials.

[[Page 1020]]



------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                              Minimum         Minimum
                                              tensile      elongation in
                                              strength       2 inches
              Specifications                  (p.s.i.)    (percent) weld
                                               welded          metal
                                           condition \1\  (longitudinal)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
AAR TC 128, Gr. B........................       81,000             19
ASTM A 516, Gr. 70.......................       70,000             20
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Maximum stresses to be used in calculations.

    (c) Aluminum alloy plate: Aluminum alloy plate must be suitable for 
welding and comply with one of the following specifications:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                              Minimum
                                         Minimum tensile   elongation in
                                            strength         2 inches
            Specifications               (p.s.i.) welded  (percent) weld
                                        condition\3\ \4\       metal
                                                          (longitudinal)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
ASTM B 209, Alloy 5052 \1\............         25,000               18
ASTM B 209, Alloy 5083 \2\............         38,000               16
ASTM B 209, Alloy 5086 \1\............         35,000               14
ASTM B 209, Alloy 5154 \1\............         30,000               18
ASTM B 209, Alloy 5254 \1\............         30,000               18
ASTM B 209, Alloy 5454 \1\............         31,000               18
ASTM B 209, Alloy 5652 \1\............         25,000               18
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ For fabrication, the parent plate material may be 0 H112, or H32
  temper, but design calculations must be based on the minimum tensile
  strength shown.
\2\ 0 temper only.
\3\ Weld filler metal 5556 must not be used.
\4\ Maximum stresses to be used in calculations.

    (d) High alloy steel plate: High alloy steel plate must comply with 
one of the following specifications:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                               Minimum        Minimum
                                               tensile     elongation in
                                              strength       2 inches
              Specifications                  (p.s.i.)    (percent) weld
                                               welded          metal
                                            condition\1\  (longitudinal)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
ASTM A 240/A 240M (incorporated by               75,000             30
 reference; see Sec.  171.7 of this
 subchapter), Type 304....................
ASTM A 240/A 240M (incorporated by               70,000             30
 reference; see Sec.  171.7 of this
 subchapter), Type 304L...................
ASTM A 240/A 240M (incorporated by               74,000             30
 reference; see Sec.  171.7 of this
 subchapter), Type 316....................
ASTM A 240/A 240M (incorporated by               70,000             30
 reference; see Sec.  171.7 of this
 subchapter), Type 316L...................
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Maximum stresses to be used in calculations.

    (e) Manganese-molybdenum steel plate: Manganese-molybdenum steel 
plate must be suitable for fusion welding and must comply with the 
following specification:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                              Minimum         Minimum
                                              tensile      elongation in
                                              strength       2 inches
              Specifications                  (p.s.i.)    (percent) weld
                                               welded          metal
                                           condition \1\  (longitudinal)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
ASTM A 302, Gr. B........................        80,000             20
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Maximum stresses to be used in calculations.

    (f) Plate materials used to fabricate the outer shell and heads must 
be those listed in paragraphs (b), (c), (d), or (e) of this section. The 
maximum allowable carbon content must be 0.31 percent when the 
individual specification allows carbon content greater than this amount. 
The plates may be clad with other approved materials.
    (g) All appurtenances on the inner container in contact with the 
lading must be made of approved material compatible with the plate 
material of the inner container. These appurtenances must not be subject 
to rapid deterioration by the lading, or must be coated or lined with 
suitable corrosion resistant material. See AAR Specifications for Tank 
Cars, appendix M, M4.05 for approved material specifications for 
castings for fittings.

[Amdt. 179-9, 36 FR 21340, Nov. 6, 1971, as amended by Amdt. 179-28, 46 
FR 49906, Oct. 8, 1981; Amdt. 179-40, 52 FR 13048, Apr. 20, 1987; Amdt. 
179-52, 61 FR 28681, June 5, 1996; 66 FR 45186, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 
51660, Aug. 8, 2002]



Sec. 179.220-8  Tank heads.

    (a) Tank heads of the inner container, inner container compartments 
and outer shell must be of approved contour, and may be flanged and 
dished or ellipsoidal for pressure on concave side.
    (b) Flanged and dished heads must have main inside radius not 
exceeding 10 feet and inside knuckle radius must be not less than 3\3/4\ 
inches for steel and alloy steel tanks nor less than 5 inches for 
aluminum alloy tanks.
    (c) Ellipsoidal heads must be an ellipsoid of revolution in which 
the major axis must equal the diameter of the shell and the minor axis 
must be one-half the major axis.

[Amdt. 179-9, 36 FR 21341, Nov. 6, 1971]

[[Page 1021]]



Sec. 179.220-9  Compartment tanks.

    (a) The inner container may be divided into compartments by 
inserting interior heads, or by fabricating each compartment as a 
separate container and joining with a cylinder, or by fabricating each 
compartment as a separate tank without a joining cylinder. Each 
compartment must be capable of withstanding, without evidence of 
yielding or leakage, the required test pressure applied in each 
compartment separately, or in any combination of compartments.
    (b) When the inner container is divided into compartments by 
fabricating each compartment as a separate container and joining with a 
cylinder, the cylinder must have a plate thickness not less than that 
required for the inner container shell and must be applied to the 
outside surface of the straight flange portion of the container head. 
The cylinder must fit the straight flange tightly for a distance of at 
least two times the plate thickness, or 1 inch, whichever is greater and 
must be joined to the straight flange by a full fillet weld. Distance 
from fillet weld seam to container head seam must be not less than 1\1/
2\ inches or three times the plate thickness, whichever is greater.

[Amdt. 179-9, 36 FR 21341, Nov. 6, 1971]



Sec. 179.220-10  Welding.

    (a) All joints must be fusion-welded in compliance with AAR 
Specifications for Tank Cars, appendix W. Welding procedures, welders, 
and fabricators shall be approved.
    (b) Radioscopy of the outer shell is not a specification 
requirement.
    (c) Welding is not permitted on or to ductile iron or malleable iron 
fittings.

[Amdt. 179-9, 36 FR 21341, Nov. 6, 1971]



Sec. 179.220-11  Postweld heat treatment.

    (a) Postweld heat treatment of the inner container is not a 
specification requirement.
    (b) Postweld heat treatment of the cylindrical portions of the outer 
shell to which the anchorage or draft sills are attached must comply 
with AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, appendix W.
    (c) When cold formed heads are used on the outer shell they must be 
heat treated before welding to shell if postweld heat treatment is not 
practicable due to assembly procedures.

[Amdt. 179-9, 36 FR 21341, Nov. 6, 1971]



Sec. 179.220-13  Inner container manway nozzle and cover.

    (a) Inner container manway nozzle must be of approved design with 
access opening at least 18 inches inside diameter, or at least 14 inches 
by 18 inches obround or oval.
    (b) Manway covers must be of approved type. Design must provide a 
secure closure of the manway and must make it impossible to remove the 
cover while the tank interior is under pressure.
    (c) All joints between manway covers and their seats must be made 
tight against leakage of vapor and liquid by use of suitable gaskets.
    (d) Manway covers must be cast, forged, or fabricated metal 
complying with subsection Sec. 179.220-7(g) of this section.
    (e) A seal must be provided between the inner container manway 
nozzle and the opening in the outer shell.

[Amdt. 179-9, 36 FR 21341, Nov. 6, 1971]



Sec. 179.220-14  Openings in the tanks.

    Openings in the inner container and the outer shell must be 
reinforced in compliance with AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, appendix 
E. In determining the required reinforcement area for openings in the 
outer shell, t shall be one-fourth inch.

[Amdt. 179-9, 36 FR 21341, Nov. 6, 1971]



Sec. 179.220-15  Support system for inner container.

    (a) The inner container must be supported within the outer shell by 
a support system of adequate strength and ductility at its operating 
temperature to support the inner container when filled with liquid 
lading to any level. The support system must be designed to support, 
without yielding, impact loads producing accelerations of the following 
magnitudes and directions when the inner container is loaded so that the 
car is at its rail load limit,

[[Page 1022]]

and the car is equipped with a conventional AAR Specification M-901 
draft gear.
Longitudinal..........................................................7G
Transverse............................................................3G
Vertical..............................................................3G
    (b) The longitudinal acceleration may be reduced to 3G where a 
cushioning device of approved design, which has been tested to 
demonstrate its ability to limit body forces to 400,000 pounds maximum 
at a 10 miles per hour impact, is used between the coupler and the tank 
structure. The support system must be of approved design and the inner 
container must be thermally isolated from the outer shell to the best 
practical extent. The inner container and outer shell must be 
permanently bonded to each other electrically either by the support 
system used, piping, or by a separate electrical connection of approved 
design.

[Amdt. 179-9, 36 FR 21341, Nov. 6, 1971, as amended by Amdt. 179-28, 46 
FR 49906, Oct. 8, 1981]



Sec. 179.220-16  Expansion capacity.

    Expansion capacity must be provided in the shell of the inner 
container as prescribed in Sec. 179.221-1.

[Amdt. 179-9, 36 FR 21341, Nov. 6, 1971]



Sec. 179.220-17  Gauging devices, top loading and unloading devices, venting and air inlet devices.

    (a) When installed, each device must be of approved design which 
will prevent interchange with any other fixture and must be tightly 
closed. Each unloading pipe must be securely anchored within the inner 
container. Each inner container or compartment thereof may be equipped 
with one separate air connection.
    (b) When the characteristics of the commodity for which the car is 
authorized require these devices to be equipped with valves or fittings 
to permit the loading and unloading of the contents, these devices 
including valves, shall be provided with a protective housing except 
when plug or ball-type valves with operating handles removed are used. 
Provision must be made for closing pipe connections of valves.
    (c) Inner container may be equipped with a vacuum relief valve of 
approved design. Protective housing is not required.
    (d) When a gauging device is required in Sec. 179.221-1, an outage 
scale visible through the manway opening must be provided. If loading 
devices are applied to permit tank loading with cover closed, a telltale 
pipe may be provided. The telltail pipe must be capable of determining 
that required outage is provided. The pipe must be equipped with \1/4\-
inch maximum, NPT control valve mounted outside tank and enclosed within 
a protective housing. Other approved devices may be used in place of an 
outage scale or a telltale pipe.
    (e) The bottom of the tank shell may be equipped with a sump or 
siphon bowl, or both, welded or pressed into the shell. These sumps or 
siphon bowls, if applied, are not limited in size and must be made of 
cast, forged, or fabricated metal. Each sump or siphon bowl must be of 
good welding quality in conjunction with the metal of the tank shell. 
When the sump or siphon bowl is pressed in the bottom of the tank shell, 
the wall thickness of the pressed section must not be less than that 
specified for the shell. The section of a circular cross section tank to 
which a sump or siphon bowl is attached need not comply with the out-of-
roundness requirement specified in appendix W, W14.06 of the AAR 
Specifications for Tank Cars. Any portion of a sump or siphon bowl not 
forming a part of a cylinder of revolution must have walls of such 
thickness and must be so reinforced that the stresses in the walls 
caused by a given internal pressure are not greater than the 
circumferential stress which would exist under the same internal 
pressure in the wall of a tank of circular cross section designed in 
accordance with Secs. 179.220-6(a) and 179.220-9. In no case shall the 
wall thickness be less than that specified in Sec. 179.221-1(a).
    (f) Protective housing, when required, must be of approved material 
and must have cover and sidewalls not less than 0.119 inch in thickness.

[Amdt. 179-9, 36 FR 21341, Nov. 6, 1971]



Sec. 179.220-18  Bottom outlets.

    (a) The inner container may be equipped with a bottom outlet of 
approved design and an opening provided

[[Page 1023]]

in the outer shell of its access. If applied, the bottom outlet must 
comply with the following requirements:
    (1) The extreme projection of the bottom outlet equipment may not be 
more than that allowed by appendix E of the AAR Specifications for Tank 
Cars. All bottom outlet reducers and closures and their attachments 
shall be secured to car by at at least \3/8\-inch chain, or its 
equivalent, except that bottom outlet closure plugs may be attached by 
\1/4\-inch chain. When the bottom outlet closure is of the combination 
cap and valve type, the pipe connection to the valve shall be closed by 
a plug, or cap. The bottom outlet equipment should include only the 
valve, reducers and closures that are necessary for the attachment of 
unloading fixtures. The permanent attachment of supplementary exterior 
fittings shall be approved by the AAR Committee on Tank Cars.
    (2) Each bottom outlet must be provided with a liquid tight closure 
at its lower end.
    (3) The valve and its operating mechanism must be applied to the 
outside bottom of the inner container. The valve operating mechanism 
must be provided with a suitable locking arrangement to insure positive 
closure during transportation.
    (4) Valve outlet nozzle and valve body must be of cast, fabricated 
or forged metal. If welded to inner container, they must be of good 
weldable quality in conjunction with metal of tank.
    (5) To provide for the attachment of unloading connections, the 
bottom of the main portion of the outlet nozzle or valve body, or some 
fixed attachment thereto, must be provided with threaded cap closure 
arrangement or bolted flange closure arrangement having minimum 1-inch 
threaded pipe plug.
    (6) If outlet nozzle and its closure extends below the bottom of the 
outer shell, a V-shaped breakage groove shall be cut (not cast) in the 
upper part of the outlet nozzle at a point immediately below the lowest 
part of the valve closest to the tank. In no case may the nozzle wall 
thickness at the root of the ``V'' be more than \1/4\-inch. The outlet 
nozzle or the valve body may be steam jacketed, in which case the 
breakage groove or its equivalent must be below the steam chamber but 
above the bottom of the center sill construction. If the outlet nozzle 
is not a single piece or its exterior valves are applied, provision 
shall be made for the equivalent of the breakage groove. On cars without 
continuous center sills, the breakage groove or its equivalent may not 
be more than 15 inches below the outer shell. On cars with continuous 
center sills, the breakage groove or its equivalent must be above the 
bottom of the center sill construction.
    (7) The valve body must be of a thickness which will prevent 
distortion of the valve seat or valve by any change in contour of the 
shell resulting from expansion of lading, or other causes, and which 
will insure that accidental breakage of the outlet nozzle will occur at 
or below the ``V'' groove, or its equivalent.
    (8) The valve must have no wings or stem projection below the ``V'' 
groove or its equivalent. The valve and seat must be readily accessible 
or removable for repairs, including grinding.
    (b) Inner container may be equipped with bottom washout of approved 
design. If applied, bottom washout must comply with the following 
requirements:
    (1) The extreme projection of the bottom washout equipment may not 
be more than that allowed by appendix E of the AAR Specifications for 
Tank Cars.
    (2) Bottom washout must be of cast, forged or fabricated metals. If 
it is welded to the inner container, it must be of good weldable quality 
in conjunction with metal of tank.
    (3) If washout nozzle extends below the bottom of the outer shell, a 
V-shaped breakage groove shall be cut (not cast) in the upper part of 
the nozzle at a point immediately below the lowest part of the inside 
closure seat or plug. In no case may the nozzle wall thickness at the 
root of the ``V'' be more than \1/4\-inch. Where the nozzle is not a 
single piece, provisions shall be made for the equivalent of the 
breakage groove. The nozzle must be of a thickness to insure that 
accidental breakage will occur at or below the ``V'' groove or its 
equivalent. On cars without a continuous center sill, the breakage 
groove or its equivalent may

[[Page 1024]]

not be more than 15 inches below the outer shell. On cars with 
continuous center sills, the breakage groove or its equivalent must be 
above the bottom of the center sill construction.
    (4) The closure plug and seat must be readily accessible or 
removable for repairs.
    (5) The closure of the washout nozzle must be equipped with a \3/4\-
inch solid screw plug. Plug must be attached by at least a \1/4\-inch 
chain.
    (6) Joints between closures and their seats may be gasketed with 
suitable material.

[Amdt. 179-9, 36 FR 21342, Nov. 6, 1971, as amended by Amdt. 179-40, 52 
FR 13048, Apr. 20, 1987]



Sec. 179.220-20  Reinforcements, when used, and appurtenances not otherwise specified.

    All attachments to inner container and outer shell must be applied 
by approved means.

[Amdt. 179-9, 36 FR 21342, Nov. 6, 1971]



Sec. 179.220-22  Closure for openings.

    (a) All plugs must be solid, with NPT threads, and must be of a 
length which will screw at least six threads inside the face of fitting 
or tank. Plugs, when inserted from the outside of the outer shell tank 
heads, must have the letter ``S'' at least three-eighths inch in size 
stamped with steel stamp or cast on the outside surface to indicate the 
plug is solid.
    (b) Openings in the outer shell used during construction for 
installation must be closed in an approved manner.

[Amdt. 179-9, 36 FR 21343, Nov. 6, 1971]



Sec. 179.220-23  Test of tanks.

    (a) Each inner container or compartment must be tested 
hydrostatically to the pressure specified in Sec. 179.221-1. The 
temperature of the pressurizing medium must not exceed 100  deg.F. 
during the test. The container must hold the prescribed pressure for at 
least 10 minutes without leakage or evidence of distress. Safety relief 
devices must not be in place when the test is made.
    (b) The inner container must be pressure tested before installation 
within the outer shell. Items which, because of assembly sequence, must 
be welded to inner container after its installation within outer shell 
must have their attachment welds thoroughly inspected by a 
nondestructive dye penetrant method or its equivalent.
    (c) Pressure testing of outer shell is not a specification 
requirement.

[Amdt. 179-9, 36 FR 21343, Nov. 6, 1971]



Sec. 179.220-24  Tests of pressure relief valves.

    Each safety relief valve must be tested by air or gas for compliance 
with Sec. 179.15 before being put into service.

[Amdt. 179-9, 36 FR 21343, Nov. 6, 1971, as amended at 62 FR 51561, Oct. 
1, 1997]



Sec. 179.220-25  Stamping.

    To certify that the tank complies with all specification 
requirements, each outer shell must be plainly and permanently stamped 
in letters and figures at least \3/8\-inch high into the metal near the 
center of both outside heads as follows:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                Examples of required
                                                      stamping
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Specifications............................  DOT-115A60W6.
Inner container:
  Material................................  ASTM A240-316L.
  Shell thickness.........................  Shell 0.167 in.
  Head thickness..........................  Head 0.150 in.
  Tank builders initials..................  ABC.
  Date of original test...................  00-0000.
Outer shell:
  Material................................  ASTM A285-C.
  Tank builders initials..................  WYZ.
Car assembler (if other than inner          DEF.
 container or outer shell builders).
------------------------------------------------------------------------


[Amdt. 179-9, 36 FR 21343, Nov. 6, 1971]



Sec. 179.220-26  Stenciling.

    (a) The outer shell, or the jacket if the outer shell is insulated, 
must be stenciled in compliance with AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, 
appendix C.
    (b) Stenciling must be applied on both sides of the outer shell or 
jacket near the center in letters and figures at least 1\1/2\ inches 
high to indicate the safe upper temperature limit, if applicable, for 
the inner tank, insulation, and the support system.

[Amdt. 179-9, 36 FR 21343, Nov. 6, 1971]

[[Page 1025]]



Sec. 179.221  Individual specification requirements applicable to tank car tanks consisting of an inner container supported within an outer shell.



Sec. 179.221-1  Individual specification requirements.

    In addition to Sec. 179.220, the individual specification 
requirements are as follows:

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                     Minimum
                                                         Bursting     plate      Test                                                Reference (179.221-
        DOT specification               Insulation       pressure   thickness  pressure      Bottom outlet        Bottom washout             ***)
                                                          (psig)    (inches)    (psig)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
115A60ALW........................  Yes.................       240      \3/16\        60  Optional.             Optional............
115A60W1.........................  Yes.................       240       \1/8\        60  Optional............  Optional............  1
115A60W6.........................  Yes.................       240       \1/8\        60  Optional............  Optional............  1
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

[Amdt. 170-52, 61 FR 28681, June 5, 1996, as amended at 62 FR 51561, 
Oct. 1, 1997; 66 FR 45390, Aug. 28, 2001]



  Subpart E--Specifications for Multi-Unit Tank Car Tanks (Classes DOT-
                             106A and 110AW)



Sec. 179.300  General specifications applicable to multi-unit tank car tanks designed to be removed from car structure for filling and emptying (Classes DOT-
          106A and 110AW).



Sec. 179.300-1  Tanks built under these specifications shall meet the requirements of Sec. 179.300, Sec. 179.301 and when applicable, Sec. 179.302.



Sec. 179.300-3  Type and general requirements.

    (a) Tanks built under this specification shall be cylindrical, 
circular in cross section, and shall have heads of approved design. All 
openings shall be located in the heads.
    (b) Each tank shall have a water capacity of at least 1500 pounds 
and not more than 2600 pounds.
    (c) For tanks made in foreign countries, a chemical analysis of 
materials and all tests as specified shall be carried out within the 
limits of the United States under the supervision of a competent and 
impartial inspector.



Sec. 179.300-4  Insulation.

    (a) Tanks shall not be insulated.
    (b) [Reserved]



Sec. 179.300-6  Thickness of plates.

    (a) For class DOT-110A tanks, the wall thickness after forming of 
the cylindrical portion of the tank must not be less than that specified 
in Sec. 179.301 nor that calculated by the following formula:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC13NO91.037

Where:

d = inside diameter in inches;
E = 1.0 welded joint efficiency;
P = minimum required bursting pressure in psig;
S = minimum tensile strength of plate material in p.s.i. as prescribed 
in Sec. 179.300-7;
t = minimum thickness of plate material in inches after forming.

    (b) For class DOT-106A tanks, the wall thickness of the cylindrical 
portion of the tank shall not be less than that specified in 
Sec. 179.301 and shall be such that at the tank test pressure the 
maximum fiber stress in the wall of the tank will not exceed 15,750 
p.s.i. as calculated by the following formula:
s = [p(1.3D 2 + 0.4d 2)] / (D 2 - d 
2)
where:

d = inside diameter in inches;
D = outside diameter in inches;
p = tank test pressure in psig;
s = wall stress in psig

    (c) If plates are clad with material having tensile strength at 
least equal to the base plate, the cladding may be

[[Page 1026]]

considered a part of the base plate when determining the thickness. If 
cladding material does not have tensile strength at least equal to the 
base plate, the base plate alone shall meet the thickness requirements.

[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964, as amended by Order 71, 31 FR 9083, July 1, 
1966. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967; 66 FR 45186, 45390, Aug. 
28, 2001]



Sec. 179.300-7  Materials.

    (a) Steel plate material used to fabricate tanks must conform with 
the following specifications with the indicated minimum tensile strength 
and elongation in the welded condition. However, the maximum allowable 
carbon content for carbon steel must not exceed 0.31 percent, although 
the individual ASTM specification may allow for a greater amount of 
carbon. The plates may be clad with other approved materials:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                           Elongation in
                                              Tensile        2 inches
                                              strength       (percent)
              Specifications                (psi) welded      welded
                                           condition \1\   condition \1\
                                             (minimum)    (longitudinal)
                                                             (minimum)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
ASTM A 240 type 304......................        75,000              25
ASTM A 240 type 304L.....................        70,000              25
ASTM A 240 type 316......................        75,000              25
ASTM A 240 type 316L.....................        70,000              25
ASTM A 240 type 321......................        75,000              25
ASTM A285 Gr. A..........................        45,000              29
ASTM A285 Gr. B..........................        50,000              20
ASTM A285 Gr. C..........................        55,000              20
ASTM A515 Gr. 65.........................        65,000              20
ASTM A515 Gr. 70.........................        70,000              20
ASTM A516 Gr. 70.........................        70,000              20
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Maximum stresses to be used in calculations.

    (b) [Reserved]
    (c) All plates must have their heat number and the name or brand of 
the manufacturer legibly stamped on them at the rolling mill.

[Amdt. 179-10, 36 FR 21355, Nov. 6, 1971, as amended by Amdt. 179-42, 54 
FR 38798, Sept. 20, 1989; Amdt. 179-43, 55 FR 27642, July 5, 1990; Amdt. 
179-52, 61 FR 28682, June 5, 1996; Amdt. 179-52, 61 FR 50255, Sept. 25, 
1996; Amdt. 179-53, 61 FR 51342, Oct. 1, 1996]



Sec. 179.300-8  Tank heads.

    (a) Class DOT-110A tanks shall have fusion-welded heads formed 
concave to pressure. Heads for fusion welding shall be an ellipsoid of 
revolution 2:1 ratio of major to minor axis. They shall be one piece, 
hot formed in one heat so as to provide a straight flange at least 1\1/
2\ inches long. The thickness shall not be less than that calculated by 
the following formula:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC13NO91.038


where symbols are as defined in Sec. 179.300-6(a).
    (b) Class DOT-106A tanks must have forged-welded heads, formed 
convex to pressure. Heads for forge welding must be torispherical with 
an inside radius not greater than the inside diameter of the shell. They 
must be one piece, hot formed in one heat so as to provide a straight 
flange at least 4 inches long. They must have snug drive fit into the 
shell for forge welding. The wall thickness after forming must be 
sufficient to meet the test requirements of Sec. 179.300-16 and to 
provide for adequate threading of openings.

[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, 
and amended by Amdt. 179-10, 36 FR 21355, Nov. 6, 1971]



Sec. 179.300-9  Welding.

    (a) Longitudinal joints must be fusion welded. Head-to-shell joints 
must be forge welded on class DOT-106A tanks and fusion welded on class 
DOT-110A tanks. Welding procedures, welders and fabricators must be 
approved in accordance with AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, appendix 
W.
    (b) Fusion-welded joints must be in compliance with the requirements 
of AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, appendix W, except that 
circumferential welds in tanks less than 36 inches inside diameter need 
not be radiotaped.
    (c) Forge-welded joints shall be thoroughly hammered or rolled to 
insure sound welds. The flanges of the heads shall be forge lapwelded to 
the shell and then crimped inwardly toward the center line at least one 
inch on the radius. Welding and crimping must be accomplished in one 
heat.

[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, 
and as amended by Amdt. 179-10, 36 FR 21355, Nov. 6, 1971]



Sec. 179.300-10  Postweld heat treatment.

    After welding is complete, steel tanks and all attachments welded 
thereto, must be postweld heat treated

[[Page 1027]]

as a unit in compliance with the requirements of AAR Specifications for 
Tank Cars, appendix W.

[Amdt. 179-10, 36 FR 21355, Nov. 6, 1971]



Sec. 179.300-12  Protection of fittings.

    (a) Tanks shall be of such design as will afford maximum protection 
to any fittings or attachment to the head including the housing referred 
to in Sec. 179.300-12(b). Tank ends shall slope or curve inward toward 
the axis so that the diameter at each end is at least 2 inches less than 
the maximum diameter.
    (b) Loading and unloading valves shall be protected by a detachable 
protective housing of approved design which shall not project beyond the 
end of the tank and shall be securely fastened to the tank head. Safety 
relief devices shall not be covered by the housing.



Sec. 179.300-13  Venting, loading and unloading valves.

    (a) Valves shall be of approved type, made of metal not subject to 
rapid deterioration by lading, and shall withstand tank test pressure 
without leakage. The valves shall be screwed directly into or attached 
by other approved methods to one tank head. Provision shall be made for 
closing outlet connections of the valves.
    (b) Threads for openings shall be National Gas Taper Threads (NGT) 
tapped to gage, clean cut, even and without checks.



Sec. 179.300-14  Attachments not otherwise specified.

    Siphon pipes and their couplings on the inside of the tank head and 
lugs on the outside of the tank head for attaching the valve protective 
housing must be fusion-welded in place prior to postweld heat treatment. 
All other fixtures and appurtenances, except as specifically provided 
for, are prohibited.

[Amdt. 179-10, 36 FR 21355, Nov. 6, 1971]



Sec. 179.300-15  Pressure relief devices.

    (a) Unless prohibited in part 173 of this chapter, tanks shall be 
equipped with one or more safety relief devices of approved type, made 
of metal not subject to rapid deterioration by the lading and screwed 
directly into tank heads or attached to tank heads by other approved 
methods. The total discharge capacity shall be sufficient to prevent 
building up pressure in tank in excess of 82.5 percent of the tank test 
pressure. When safety relief devices of the fusible plug type are used, 
the required discharge capacity shall be available in each head. See AAR 
Specifications for Tank Cars, appendix A, for formula for calculating 
discharge capacity.
    (b) Threads for openings shall be National Gas Taper Threads (NGT) 
tapped to gage, clean cut, even and without checks.
    (c) Pressure relief devices shall be set for start-to-discharge and 
rupture discs shall burst at a pressure not exceeding that specified in 
Sec. 179.301.
    (d) Fusible plugs shall function at a temperature not exceeding 175 
deg.F. and shall be vapor-tight at a temperature of not less than 130 
deg.F.

[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964, as amended at 64 FR 51920, Sept. 27, 1999; 
66 FR 45390, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 179.300-16  Tests of tanks.

    (a) After postweld heat treatment, tanks shall be subjected to 
hydrostatic expansion test in a water jacket, or by other approved 
methods. No tank shall have been subjected previously to internal 
pressure within 100 pounds of the test pressure. Each tank shall be 
tested to the pressure prescribed in Sec. 179.301. Pressure shall be 
maintained for 30 seconds and sufficiently longer to insure complete 
expansion of tank. Pressure gage shall permit reading to accuracy of one 
percent. Expansion gage shall permit reading of total expansion to 
accuracy of one percent. Expansion shall be recorded in cubic cm.
    (1) No leaks shall appear and permanent volumetric expansion shall 
not exceed 10 percent of total volumetric expansion at test pressure.
    (2) [Reserved]
    (b) After all fittings have been installed, each tank shall be 
subjected to interior air pressure test of at least 100 psig under 
conditions favorable to detection of any leakage. No leaks shall appear.
    (c) Repairs of leaks detected in manufacture or in foregoing tests 
shall be

[[Page 1028]]

made by the same process as employed in manufacture of tank. Caulking, 
soldering, or similar repairing is prohibited.

[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, 
and amended by Amdt. 179-10, 36 FR 21355, Nov. 6, 1971; 66 FR 45390, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 179.300-17  Tests of pressure relief devices.

    (a) Each valve shall be tested by air or gas before being put into 
service. The valve shall open and be vapor-tight at the pressure 
prescribed in Sec. 179.301.
    (b) Rupture discs of non-reclosing pressure relief devices must be 
tested as prescribed in Appendix A, A5.03 of the AAR Manual of Standards 
and Recommended Practices, Section C--Part III, Specifications for Tank 
Cars, Specification M-1002, January 1996 (see Sec. 171.7 of this 
subchapter).
    (c) For pressure relief devices of the fusible plug type, a sample 
of the plug used shall function at the temperatures prescribed in 
Sec. 179.300-15.
    (d) The start-to-discharge and vapor-tight pressures shall not be 
affected by any auxiliary closure or other combination.

[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, 
and amended by Amdt. 179-10, 36 FR 21355, Nov. 6, 1971; 66 FR 45390, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 179.300-18  Stamping.

    (a) To certify that the tank complies with all specification 
requirements, each tank shall be plainly and permanently stamped in 
letters and figures \3/8\ inch high into the metal of valve end chime as 
follows:
    (1) DOT Specification number.
    (2) Material and cladding material if any (immediately below the 
specification number).
    (3) Owner's or builder's identifying symbol and serial number 
(immediately below the material identification). The symbol shall be 
registered with the Bureau of Explosives, duplications are not 
authorized.
    (4) Inspector's official mark (immediately below the owner's or 
builder's symbol).
    (5) Date of original tank test (month and year, such as 1-64 for 
January 1964). This should be so placed that dates of subsequent tests 
may easily be added thereto.
    (6) Water capacity--0000 pounds.
    (b) A copy of the above stamping in letters and figures of the 
prescribed size stamped on a brass plate secured to one of the tank 
heads is authorized.



Sec. 179.300-19  Inspection.

    (a) Tank shall be inspected within the United States and Canada by a 
competent and impartial inspector acceptable to the Bureau of 
Explosives. For tanks made outside the United States and Canada, the 
specified inspection shall be made within the United States.
    (b) The inspector shall carefully inspect all plates from which 
tanks are to be made and secure records certifying that plates comply 
with the specification. Plates which do not comply with Sec. 179.300-7 
shall be rejected.
    (c) The inspector shall make such inspection as may be necessary to 
see that all the requirements of this specification, including markings, 
are fully complied with; shall see that the finished tanks are properly 
stress relieved and tested.
    (d) The inspector shall stamp his official mark on each accepted 
tank as required in Sec. 179.300-18, and render the report required in 
Sec. 179.300-20.



Sec. 179.300-20  Reports.

    (a) Before a tank is placed in service, the inspector shall furnish 
to the builder, tank owner, Bureau of Explosives and the Secretary, 
Mechanical Division, Association of American Railroads, a report in 
approved form certifying that the tank and its equipment comply with all 
the requirements of this specification.
    (b) For builder's Certificate of Construction, see Sec. 179.5 (b), 
(c), and (d).

[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, 
and amended by Amdt. 179-10, 36 FR 21355, Nov. 5, 1971]



Sec. 179.301  Individual specification requirements for multi-unit tank car tanks.

    (a) In addition to Sec. 179.300 the individual specification 
requirements are as follows:

[[Page 1029]]



----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
       DOT specification          106A500-X    106A800-X    110A500-W    110A600-W    110A800-W     110A1000-W
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Minimum required bursting              (\1\)        (\1\)         1250         1500         2000            2500
 pressure, psig................
Minimum thickness shell, inches      \13/32\      \11/16\      \11/32\        \3/8\      \15/32\         \19/32\
Test pressure, psig (see Sec.            500          800          500          600          800            1000
 179.300-16)...................
Safety relief devices, psig      ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ...........  ..............
 (see Sec.  179.300-15)........
Start-to-discharge, or burst             375          600          375          450          600             700
 maximum, p.s.i................
Vapor-tight, minimum psig......          300          480          300          360          480             650
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ None specified.

    (b) [Reserved]

[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, 
and amended by Amdt. 179-10, 36 FR 21355, Nov. 6, 1971; Amdt. 179-40, 52 
FR 13049, Apr. 20, 1987; 65 FR 58632, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45390, Aug. 
28, 2001]



Sec. 179.302  [Reserved]



    Subpart F--Specification for Cryogenic Liquid Tank Car Tanks and 
             Seamless Steel Tanks (Classes DOT-113 and 107A)

    Source: Sections 179.400 through 179.401-1 appear at 48 FR 27708, 
June 16, 1983 (Amdt. 179-32), unless otherwise noted.
    Sections 179.500 through 179.500-18 appear at 29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 
1964, unless otherwise noted. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967.



Sec. 179.400  General specification applicable to cryogenic liquid tank car tanks.



Sec. 179.400-1  General.

    A tank built to this specification must comply with Secs. 179.400 
and 179.401.



Sec. 179.400-3  Type.

    (a) A tank built to this specification must--
    (1) Consist of an inner tank of circular cross section supported 
essentially concentric within an outer jacket of circular cross section, 
with the out of roundness of both the inner tank and outer jacket 
limited in accordance with Section VIII, Division I, Paragraph UG-80 of 
the ASME Code;
    (2) Have the annular space evacuated after filling the annular space 
with an approved insulating material;
    (3) Have the inner tank heads designed concave to pressure; and
    (4) Have the outer jacket heads designed convex to pressure.
    (b) The tank must be equipped with piping systems for vapor venting 
and transfer of lading, and with pressure relief devices, controls, 
gages and valves, as prescribed herein.



Sec. 179.400-4  Insulation system and performance standard.

    (a) For the purposes of this specification--
    (1) Standard Heat Transfer Rate (SHTR), expressed in Btu/day/lb of 
water capacity, means the rate of heat transfer used for determining the 
satisfactory performance of the insulation system of a cryogenic tank 
car tank in cryogenic liquid service (see Sec. 179.401-1 table).
    (2) Test cryogenic liquid means the cryogenic liquid, which may be 
different from the lading intended to be shipped in the tank, being used 
during the performance tests of the insulation system.
    (3) Normal evaporation rate (NER), expressed in lbs. (of the 
cryogenic liquid)/day, means the rate of evaporation, determined by test 
of a test cryogenic liquid in a tank maintained at a pressure of 
approximately one atmosphere, absolute. This determination of the NER is 
the NER test.
    (4) Stabilization period means the elapsed time after a tank car 
tank is filled with the test cryogenic liquid until the NER has 
stabilized, or 24 hours has passed, whichever is greater.
    (5) Calculated heat transfer rate. The calculated heat transfer rate 
(CHTR) is determined by the use of test data obtained during the NER 
test in the formula:

q = [N([Delta] h)(90-tl)] / [V(8.32828)(ts-
    tf)]

Where:


[[Page 1030]]


q = CHTR, in Btu/day/lb., of water capacity;
N = NER, determined by NER test, in lbs./day;
[Delta]h = latent heat of vaporization of the test cryogenic liquid at 
the NER test pressure of approximately one atmosphere, absolute, in Btu/
lb.;
90 = ambient temperature at 90  deg.F.;
V = gross water volume at 60  deg.F. of the inner tank, in gallons;
tl = equilibrium temperature of intended lading at maximum 
shipping pressure, in  deg. F.;
8.32828 = constant for converting gallons of water at 60  deg.F. to lbs. 
of water at 60  deg.F., in lbs./gallon;
ts = average temperature of outer jacket, determined by 
averaging jacket temperatures at various locations on the jacket at 
regular intervals during the NER test, in  deg.F.;
tf = equilibrium temperature of the test cryogenic liquid at 
the NER test pressure of approximately, one atmosphere, absolute, in 
deg.F.

    (b) DOT-113A60W tank cars must--
    (1) Be filled with hydrogen, cryogenic liquid to the maximum 
permitted fill density specified in Sec. 173.319(d)(2) table of this 
subchapter prior to performing the NER test; and
    (2) Have a CHTR equal to or less than the SHTR specified in 
Sec. 179.401-1 table for a DOT-113A60W tank car.
    (c) DOT-113C120W tank cars must--
    (1) Be filled with ethylene, cryogenic liquid to the maximum 
permitted fill density specified in Sec. 173.319(d)(2) table of this 
subchapter prior to performing the NER test, or be filled with nitrogen, 
cryogenic liquid to 90 percent of the volumetric capacity of the inner 
tank prior to performing the NER test; and
    (2) Have a CHTR equal to or less than 75 percent of the SHTR 
specified in Sec. 179.401-1 table for a DOT-113C120W tank car.
    (d) Insulating materials must be approved.
    (e) If the insulation consists of a powder having a tendency to 
settle, the entire top of the cylindrical portion of the inner tank must 
be insulated with a layer of glass fiber insulation at least one-inch 
nominal thickness, or equivalent, suitably held in position and covering 
an area extending 25 degrees to each side of the top center line of the 
inner tank.
    (f) The outer jacket must be provided with fittings to permit 
effective evacuation of the annular space between the outer jacket and 
the inner tank.
    (g) A device to measure the absolute pressure in the annular space 
must be provided. The device must be portable with an easily accessible 
connection or permanently positioned where it is readily visible to the 
operator.

[Amdt. 179-32, 48 FR 27708, June 16, 1983, as amended at 49 FR 24318, 
June 12, 1984; 66 FR 45186, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 179.400-5  Materials.

    (a) Stainless steel of ASTM A 240/A 240M (incorporated by reference; 
see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter), Type 304 or 304L must be used for 
the inner tank and its appurtenances, as specified in AAR Specifications 
for Tank Cars, appendix M, and must be--
    (1) In the annealed condition prior to fabrication, forming and 
fusion welding;
    (2) Suitable for use at the temperature of the lading; and
    (3) Compatible with the lading.
    (b) Any steel casting, steel forging, steel structural shape or 
carbon steel plate used to fabricate the outer jacket or heads must be 
as specified in AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, appendix M.
    (c) Impact tests must be--
    (1) Conducted in accordance with AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, 
appendix W, W9.01;
    (2) Performed on longitudinal specimens of the material;
    (3) Conducted at the tank design service temperature or colder; and
    (4) Performed on test plate welds and materials used for inner tanks 
and appurtenances and which will be subjected to cryogenic temperatures.
    (d) Impact test values must be equal to or greater than those 
specified in AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, appendix W. The report of 
impact tests must include the test values and lateral expansion data.

[Amdt. 179-32, 48 FR 27708, June 16, 1983, as amended at 67 FR 51660, 
Aug. 8, 2002]



Sec. 179.400-6  Bursting and buckling pressure.

    (a) [Reserved]
    (b) The outer jacket of the required evacuated insulation system 
must be designed in accordance with Sec. 179.400-

[[Page 1031]]

8(d) and in addition must comply with the design loads specified in 
Section 6.2 of the AAR Specifications for Tank Cars. The designs and 
calculations must provide for the loadings transferred to the outer 
jacket through the support system.

[Amdt. 179-32, 48 FR 27708, June 16, 1983, as amended by Amdt. 179-51, 
61 FR 18934, Apr. 29, 1996; 65 FR 58632, Sept. 29, 2000]



Sec. 179.400-7  Tank heads.

    (a) Tank heads of the inner tank and outer jacket must be flanged 
and dished, or ellipsoidal.
    (b) Flanged and dished heads must have--
    (1) A main inside dish radius not greater than the outside diameter 
of the straight flange;
    (2) An inside knuckle radius of not less than 6 percent of the 
outside diameter of the straight flange; and
    (3) An inside knuckle radius of at least three times the head 
thickness.



Sec. 179.400-8  Thickness of plates.

    (a) The minimum wall thickness, after forming, of the inner shell 
and any 2:1 ellipsoidal head for the inner tank must be that specified 
in Sec. 179.401-1, or that calculated by the following formula, 
whichever is greater:

t = Pd / 2SE

Where:

t = minimum thickness of plate, after forming, in inches;
P = minimum required bursting pressure in psig;
d = inside diameter, in inches;
S = minimum tensile strength of the plate material, as prescribed in AAR 
Specifications for Tank Cars, appendix M, table M1, in psi;
E = 0.9, a factor representing the efficiency of welded joints, except 
that for seamless heads, E = 1.0.

    (b) The minimum wall thickness, after forming, of any 3:1 
ellipsoidal head for the inner tank must be that specified in 
Sec. 179.401-1, or that calculated by the following formula, whichever 
is greater:

t = 1.83 Pd / 2SE

Where:

t = minimum thickness of plate, after forming, in inches;
P = minimum required bursting pressure in psig;
d = inside diameter, in inches;
S = minimum tensile strength of the plate material, as prescribed in AAR 
Specifications for Tank Cars, Appendix M, Table M1, in psi;
E = 0.9, a factor representing the efficiency of welded joints, except 
that for seamless heads, E=1.0.

    (c) The minimum wall thickness, after forming, of a flanged and 
dished head for the inner tank must be that specified in Sec. 179.401-1, 
or that calculated by the following formula, whichever is greater:

t = [PL(3 + [radic](L/r))] / (8SE)

Where:

t = minimum thickness of plate, after forming, in inches;
P = minimum required bursting pressure in psig;
L = main inside radius of dished head, in inches;
r = inside knuckle radius, in inches;
S = minimum tensile strength of plate material, as prescribed in AAR 
Specifications for Tank Cars, appendix M, table M1, in psi;
E = 0.9, a factor representing the efficiency of welded joints, except 
that for seamless heads, E = 1.0.

    (d) The minimum wall thickness, after forming, of the outer jacket 
shell may not be less than \7/16\ inch. The minimum wall thickness, 
after forming, of the outer jacket heads may not be less than \1/2\ inch 
and they must be made from steel specified in Sec. 179.16(c). The 
annular space is to be evacuated, and the cylindrical portion of the 
outer jacket between heads, or between stiffening rings if used, must be 
designed to withstand an external pressure of 37.5 psig (critical 
collapsing pressure), as determined by the following formula:

Pc = [2.6E(t/D)2.5] / [(L/D) - 0.45(t/
    D)0.5]

Where:

Pc = Critical collapsing pressure (37.5 psig minimum) in 
psig;
E = modulus of elasticity of jacket material, in psi;
t = minimum thickness of jacket material, after forming, in inches;
D = outside diameter of jacket, in inches;
L = distance between stiffening ring centers in inches. (The heads may 
be considered as

[[Page 1032]]

stiffening rings located \1/3\ of the head depth from the head tangent 
line.)

[Amdt. 179-32, 48 FR 27708, June 16, 1983; 49 FR 42736, Oct. 24, 1984; 
64 FR 51920, Sept. 27, 1999, as amended at 66 FR 45390, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 179.400-9  Stiffening rings.

    (a) If stiffening rings are used in designing the cylindrical 
portion of the outer jacket for external pressure, they must be attached 
to the jacket by means of fillet welds. Outside stiffening ring 
attachment welds must be continuous on each side of the ring. Inside 
stiffening ring attachment welds may be intermittent welds on each side 
of the ring with the total length of weld on each side not less than 
one-third of the circumference of the tank. The maximum space between 
welds may not exceed eight times the outer jacket wall thickness.
    (b) A portion of the outer jacket may be included when calculating 
the moment of inertia of the ring. The effective width of jacket plate 
on each side of the attachment of the stiffening ring is given by the 
following formula:

W = 0.78(Rt)0.5

Where:

W = width of jacket effective on each side of the stiffening ring, in 
inches;
R = outside radius of the outer jacket, in inches;
t = plate thickness of the outer jacket, after forming, in inches.

    (c) Where a stiffening ring is used that consists of a closed 
section having two webs attached to the outer jacket, the jacket plate 
between the webs may be included up to the limit of twice the value of 
``W'', as defined in paragraph (b) of this section. The outer flange of 
the closed section, if not a steel structural shape, is subject to the 
same limitations with ``W'' based on the ``R'' and ``t'' values of the 
flange. Where two separate members such as two angles, are located less 
than ``2W'' apart they may be treated as a single stiffening ring 
member. (The maximum length of plate which may be considered effective 
is 4W.) The closed section between an external ring and the outer jacket 
must be provided with a drain opening.
    (d) The stiffening ring must have a moment of inertia large enough 
to support the critical collapsing pressure, as determined by either of 
the following formulas:

I = [0.035D3 LPc] / E,


or

I' = [0.046D3 LPc] / E

Where:

I = required moment of inertia of stiffening ring about the centroidal 
axis parallel to the vessel axis, in inches to the fourth power;
I' = required moment of inertia of combined section of stiffening ring 
and effective width of jacket plate about the centroidal axis parallel 
to the vessel axis, in inches to the fourth power;
D = outside diameter of the outer jacket, in inches;
L = one-half of the distance from the centerline of the stiffening ring 
to the next line of support on one side, plus one-half of the distance 
from the centerline to the next line of support on the other side of 
stiffening ring. Both distances are measured parallel to the axis of the 
vessel, in inches. (A line of support is:

(1) A stiffening ring which meets the requirements of this paragraph, or
(2) A circumferential line of a head at one-third the depth of the head 
from the tangent line);

Pc = critical collapsing pressure (37.5 psig minimum) in 
psig;
E = modulus of elasticity of stiffening ring material, in psi.

    (e) Where loads are applied to the outer jacket or to stiffening 
rings from the system used to support the inner tank within the outer 
jacket, additional stiffening rings, or an increased moment of inertia 
of the stiffening rings designed for the external pressure, must be 
provided to carry the support loads.

[Amdt. 179-32, 48 FR 27708, June 16, 1983, as amended at 66 FR 45391, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 179.400-10  Sump or siphon bowl.

A sump or siphon bowl may be in the bottom of the inner tank shell if--
    (a) It is formed directly into the inner tank shell, or is formed 
and welded to the inner tank shell and is of weldable quality metal that 
is compatible with the inner tank shell;
    (b) The stress in any orientation under any condition does not 
exceed the circumferential stress in the inner tank shell; and

[[Page 1033]]

    (c) The wall thickness is not less than that specified in 
Sec. 179.401-1.



Sec. 179.400-11  Welding.

    (a) Except for closure of openings and a maximum of two 
circumferential closing joints in the cylindrical portion of the outer 
jacket, each joint of an inner tank and the outer jacket must be a 
fusion double welded butt joint.
    (b) The closure for openings and the circumferential closing joints 
in the cylindrical portion of the outer jacket, including head to shell 
joints, may be a single welded butt joint using a backing strip on the 
inside of the joint.
    (c) Each joint must be welded in accordance with the requirements of 
AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, appendix W.
    (d) Each welding procedure, welder, and fabricator must be approved.



Sec. 179.400-12  Postweld heat treatment.

    (a) Postweld heat treatment of the inner tank is not required.
    (b) The cylindrical portion of the outer jacket, with the exception 
of the circumferential closing seams, must be postweld heat treated as 
prescribed in AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, appendix W. Any item to 
be welded to this portion of the outer jacket must be attached before 
postweld heat treatment. Welds securing the following need not be 
postweld heat treated when it is not practical due to final assembly 
procedures:
    (1) the inner tank support system to the outer jacket,
    (2) connections at piping penetrations,
    (3) closures for access openings, and
    (4) circumferential closing joints of head to shell joints.
    (c) When cold formed heads are used on the outer jacket they must be 
heat treated before welding to the jacket shell if postweld heat 
treatment is not practical due to assembly procedures.



Sec. 179.400-13  Support system for inner tank.

    (a) The inner tank must be supported within the outer jacket by a 
support system of approved design. The system and its areas of 
attachment to the outer jacket must have adequate strength and ductility 
at operating temperatures to support the inner tank when filled with the 
lading to any level incident to transportation.
    (b) The support system must be designed to support, without 
yielding, impact loads producing accelerations of the following 
magnitudes and directions when the inner tank is fully loaded and the 
car is equipped with a conventional draft gear:
Longitudinal......................................................7``g''
Transverse........................................................3``g''
Vertical..........................................................3``g''

The longitudinal acceleration may be reduced to 3``g'' where a 
cushioning device of approved design, which has been tested to 
demonstrate its ability to limit body forces to 400,000 pounds maximum 
at 10 miles per hour, is used between the coupler and the tank 
structure.
    (c) The inner tank and outer jacket must be permanently bonded to 
each other electrically, by either the support system, piping, or a 
separate electrical connection of approved design.



Sec. 179.400-14  Cleaning of inner tank.

    The interior of the inner tank and all connecting lines must be 
thoroughly cleaned and dried prior to use. Proper precautions must be 
taken to avoid contamination of the system after cleaning.



Sec. 179.400-15  Radioscopy.

    Each longitudinal and circumferential joint of the inner tank, and 
each longitudinal and circumferential double welded butt joint of the 
outer jacket, must be examined along its entire length in accordance 
with the requirements of AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, appendix W.



Sec. 179.400-16  Access to inner tank.

    (a) The inner tank must be provided with a means of access having a 
minimum inside diameter of 16 inches. Reinforcement of the access 
opening must be made of the same material used in the inner tank. The 
access closure must be of an approved material and design.
    (b) If a welded closure is used, it must be designed to allow it to 
be reopened by grinding or chipping and to

[[Page 1034]]

be closed again by rewelding, preferably without a need for new parts. A 
cutting torch may not be used.



Sec. 179.400-17  Inner tank piping.

    (a) Product lines. The piping system for vapor and liquid phase 
transfer and venting must be made for material compatible with the 
product and having satisfactory properties at the lading temperature. 
The outlets of all vapor phase and liquid phase lines must be located so 
that accidental discharge from these lines will not impinge on any metal 
of the outer jacket, car structures, trucks or safety appliances. 
Suitable provison must be made to allow for thermal expansion and 
contraction.
    (1) Loading and unloading line. A liquid phase transfer line must be 
provided and it must have a manually operated shut-off valve located as 
close as practicable to the outer jacket, plus a secondary closure that 
is liquid and gas tight. This secondary closure must permit any trapped 
pressure to bleed off before the closure can be removed completely. A 
vapor trap must be incorporated in the line and located as close as 
practicable to the inner tank. On a DOT-113A60W tank car, any loading 
and unloading line must be vacuum jacketed between the outer jacket and 
the shut-off valve and the shut-off valve must also be vacuum jacketed.
    (2) Vapor phase line. A vapor phase line must connect to the inner 
tank and must be of sufficient size to permit the pressure relief 
devices specified in Sec. 179.400-20 and connected to this line to 
operate at their design capacity without excessive pressure build-up in 
the tank. The vapor phase line must have a manually operated shut-off 
valve located as close as practicable to the outer jacket, plus a 
secondary closure that is liquid and gas tight. This secondary closure 
must permit any trapped pressure to bleed off before the closure can be 
removed completely.
    (3) Vapor phase blowdown line. A blowdown line must be provided. It 
must be attached to the vapor phase line specified in paragraph (a)(2) 
of this section, upstream of the shut-off valve in that line. A by-pass 
line with a manually operated shut-off valve must be provided to permit 
reduction of the inner tank pressure when the vapor phase line is 
connected to a closed system. The discharge from this line must be 
outside the housing and must be directed upward and away from operating 
personnel.
    (b) Any pressure building system provided for the purpose of 
pressurizing the vapor space of the inner tank to facilitate unloading 
the liquid lading must be approved.

[Amdt. 179-32, 48 FR 27708, June 16, 1983, as amended at 66 FR 45391, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 179.400-18  Test of inner tank.

    (a) After all items to be welded to the inner tank have been welded 
in place, the inner tank must be pressure tested at the test pressure 
prescribed in Sec. 179.401-1. The temperature of the pressurizing medium 
may not exceed 100  deg.F. during the test. The inner tank must hold the 
prescribed pressure for a period of not less than ten minutes without 
leakage or distortion. In a pneumatic test, due regard for the 
protection of all personnel should be taken because of the potential 
hazard involved. After a hydrostatic test the container and piping must 
be emptied of all water and purged of all water vapor.
    (b) Caulking of welded joints to stop leaks developed during the 
test is prohibited. Repairs to welded joints must be made as prescribed 
in AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, appendix W.



Sec. 179.400-19  Valves and gages.

    (a) Valves. Manually operated shut-off valves and control valves 
must be provided wherever needed for control of vapor phase pressure, 
vapor phase venting, liquid transfer and liquid flow rates. All valves 
must be made from approved materials compatible with the lading and 
having satisfactory properties at the lading temperature.
    (1) Liquid control valves must be of extended stem design.
    (2) Packing, if used, must be satisfactory for use in contact with 
the lading and of approved materials that will effectively seal the 
valve stem without causing difficulty of operation.
    (3) Each control valve and shut-off valve must be readily operable. 
These valves must be mounted so that their

[[Page 1035]]

operation will not transmit excessive forces to the piping system.
    (b) Gages. Gages, except portable units, must be securely mounted 
within suitable protective housings. A liquid level gage and a vapor 
phase pressure gage must be provided as follows:
    (1) Liquid level gage. (i) A gage of approved design to indicate the 
quantity of liquefied lading within the inner tank, mounted where it 
will be readily visible to an operator during transfer operations or 
storage, or a portable gage with a readily accessible connection, or
    (ii) A fixed length dip tube, with a manually operated shut-off 
valve located as close as practicable to the outer jacket. The dip tube 
must indicate the maximum liquid level for the allowable filling 
density. The inner end of the dip tube must be located on the 
longitudinal centerline of the inner tank and within four feet of the 
transverse centerline of the inner tank.
    (2) Vapor phase pressure gage. A vapor phase pressure gage of 
approved design, with a manually operated shut-off valve located as 
close as practicable to the outer jacket. The gage must indicate the 
vapor pressure within the inner tank and must be mounted where it will 
be readily visible to an operator. An additional fitting for use of a 
test gage must be provided.



Sec. 179.400-20  Pressure relief devices.

    (a) The tank must be provided with pressure relief devices for the 
protection of the tank assembly and piping system. The discharge from 
these devices must be directed away from operating personnel, principal 
load bearing members of the outer jacket, car structure, trucks and 
safety appliances. Vent or weep holes in pressure relief devices are 
prohibited. All main pressure relief devices must discharge to the 
outside of the protective housings in which they are located, except 
that this requirement does not apply to pressure relief valves installed 
to protect isolated sections of lines between the final valve and end 
closure.
    (b) Materials. Materials used in pressure relief devices must be 
suitable for use at the temperature of the lading and otherwise 
compatible with the lading in both the liquid and vapor phases.
    (c) Inner tank. Pressure relief devices for the inner tank must be 
attached to vapor phase piping and mounted so as to remain at ambient 
temperature prior to operation. The inner tank must be equipped with one 
or more pressure relief valves and one or more safety vents (except as 
noted in paragraph (c)(3)(iv) of this section), and installed without an 
intervening shut-off valve (except as noted in paragraph (c)(3)(iii) of 
this section). Additional requirements are as follows:
    (1) Safety vent. The safety vent shall function at the pressure 
specified in Sec. 179.401-1. The safety vent must be flow rated in 
accordance with the applicable provisions of AAR Specifications for Tank 
Cars, appendix A, and provide sufficient capacity to meet the 
requirements of AAR Specifications for Tanks Cars, appendix A, A8.07(a).
    (2) Pressure relief valve. The pressure relief valve must:
    (i) be set to start-to-discharge at the pressure specified in 
Sec. 179.401-1, and
    (ii) meet the requirements of AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, 
appendix A, A8.07(b).
    (3) Installation of safety vent and pressure relief valve.--(i) 
Inlet piping. (A) The opening through all piping and fittings between 
the inner tank and its pressure relief devices must have a cross-
sectional area at least equal to that of the pressure relief device 
inlet, and the flow characteristics of this upstream system must be such 
that the pressure drop will not adversely affect the relieving capacity 
or the proper operation of the pressure relief device.
    (B) When the required relief capacity is met by the use of multiple 
pressure relief device placed on one connection, the inlet internal 
cross-sectional area of this connection must be sufficient to provide 
the required flow capacity for the proper operation of the pressure 
relief device system.
    (ii) Outlet piping. (A) The opening through the discharge lines must 
have a cross-sectional area at least equal to that of the pressure 
relief device outlet and may not reduce the relieving capacity below 
that required to properly protect the inner tank.
    (B) When the required relieving capacity is met by use of multiple 
pressure relief devices placed on a common

[[Page 1036]]

discharge manifold, the manifold outlet internal cross-sectional area 
must be at least equal to the combined outlet areas of the pressure 
relief devices.
    (iii) Duplicate pressure relief devices may be used when an approved 
3-way selector valve is installed to provide for relief through either 
duplicate pressure relief device. The 3-way valve must be included in 
the mounting prescribed by AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, appendix A, 
A6.02(g), when conducting the flow capacity test on the safety vent 
prescribed by AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, appendix A, A6.01. Flow 
capacity tests must be performed with the 3-way valve at both of the 
extreme positions as well as at the mid-position and the flow capacity 
must be in accordance with AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, appendix A, 
A8.07(a).
    (iv) An alternate pressure relief valve, set as required in 
Sec. 179.401-1, may be used in lieu of the safety vent, provided it 
meets the flow capacity prescribed in AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, 
appendix A at a flow rating pressure of 110 percent of its start-to-
discharge pressure. Installation must--
    (A) Prevent moisture accumulation at the seat by providing drainage 
away from that area,
    (B) Permit periodic drainage of the vent piping, and
    (C) Prevent accumulation of foreign material in the vent system.
    (4) Evaporation control. The routine release of vaporized lading may 
be controlled with a pressure controlling and mixing device, except that 
a pressure controlling and mixing device is required on each DOT-113A60W 
car. Any pressure controlling and mixing device must--
    (i) Be set to start-to-discharge at a pressure not greater than that 
specified in Sec. 179.401-1;
    (ii) Have sufficient capacity to limit the pressure within the inner 
tank to that pressure specified in Sec. 179.401-1, when the discharge is 
equal to twice the normal venting rate during transportation, with 
normal vacuum and the outer shell at 130  deg.F; and
    (iii) Prevent the discharge of a gas mixture exceeding 50% of the 
lower flammability limit to the atmosphere under normal conditions of 
storage or transportation.
    (5) Safety interlock. If a safety interlock is provided for the 
purpose of allowing transfer of lading at a pressure higher than the 
pressure control valve setting but less than the pressure relief valve 
setting, the design must be such that the safety interlock will not 
affect the discharge path of the pressure relief value or safety vent at 
any time. The safety interlock must automatically provide an 
unrestricted discharge path for the pressure control device at all times 
when the tank car is in transport service.
    (d) Outer jacket. The outer jacket must be provided with a suitable 
system to prevent buildup of annular space pressure in excess of 16 psig 
or the external pressure for which the inner tank was designed, 
whichever is less. The total relief area provided by the system must be 
a minimum of 25 square inches, and means must be provided to prevent 
clogging of any system opening, as well as to ensure adequate 
communication to all areas of the insulation space. If a safety vent is 
a part of the system, it must be designed to prevent distortion of the 
rupture disc when the annular space is evacuated.
    (e) Piping system. Where a piping circuit can be isolated by closing 
a valve, means for pressure relief must be provided.

[Amdt. 179-32, 48 FR 27708, June 16, 1983, as amended at 66 FR 45391, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 179.400-21  Test of pressure relief valves.

    Each valve must be tested with air or gas for compliance with 
Sec. 179.401-1 before being put into service.



Sec. 179.400-22  Protective housings.

    Each valve, gage, closure and pressure relief device, with the 
exception of secondary relief valves for the protection of isolated 
piping, must be enclosed within a protective housing. The protective 
housing must be adequate to protect the enclosed components from direct 
solar radiation, mud, sand, adverse environmental exposure and 
mechanical damage incident to normal operation of the tank car. It must 
be designed to provide reasonable access

[[Page 1037]]

to the enclosed components for operation, inspection and maintenance and 
so that vapor concentrations cannot build up to a dangerous level inside 
the housing in the event of valve leakage or pressure relief valve 
operation. All equipment within the protective housing must be operable 
by personnel wearing heavy gloves and must incorporate provisions for 
locks or seals. A protective housing and its cover must be constructed 
of metal not less than 0.119 inch thick.



Sec. 179.400-23  Operating instructions.

    All valves and gages must be clearly identified with corrosion-
resistant nameplates. A plate of corrosion-resistant material bearing 
precautionary instructions for the safe operation of the equipment 
during storage and transfer operations must be securely mounted so as to 
be readily visible to an operator. The instruction plate must be mounted 
in each housing containing operating equipment and controls for product 
handling. These instructions must include a diagram of the tank and its 
piping system with the various gages, control valves and pressure relief 
devices clearly identified and located.



Sec. 179.400-24  Stamping.

    (a) A tank that complies with all specification requirements must 
have the following information plainly and permanently stamped into the 
metal near the center of the head of the outer jacket at the ``B'' end 
of the car, in letters and figures at least \3/8\-inch high, in the 
following order:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                            Example of required stamping
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Specification............................  DOT-113A60W.
Design service temperature...............  Minus 423 deg. F.
Inner tank...............................  Inner Tank.
  Material...............................  ASTM A240-304.
  Shell thickness........................  Shell \3/16\ inch.
  Head thickness.........................  Head \3/16\ inch.
  Inside diameter........................  ID 107 inch.
  Inner tank builder's initials..........  ABC.
  Date of original test (month and year)   00-0000GHK.
   and initials of person conducting
   original test.
  Water capacity.........................  00000 lbs.
Outer jacket.............................  Outer jacket.
  Material...............................  ASTM A515-70.
  Outer jacket builder's initials........  DEF.
Car assembler's initials (if other than    XYZ.
 inner tank or outer jacket builder).
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (b) Any stamping on the shell or heads of the inner tank is 
prohibited.
    (c) In lieu of the stamping required by paragraph (a) of this 
section, the specified markings may be incorporated on a data plate of 
corrosion-resistant metal, fillet welded in place on the head of the 
outer jacket at the ``B'' end of the car.



Sec. 179.400-25  Stenciling.

    Each tank car must be stenciled in compliance with the provisions of 
the AAR Specifications for Tank Cars, appendix C. The stenciling must 
also include the following:
    (a) The date on which the rupture disc was last replaced and the 
initials of the person making the replacement, on the outer jacket in 
letters and figures at least 1\1/2\ inches high.
    (b) The design service temperature and maximum lading weight, in 
letters and figures at least 1\1/2\ inches high adjacent to the 
hazardous material stencil.
    (c) The water capacity, in pounds net at 60  deg.F., with the tank 
at its coldest operating temperature, after deduction for the volume 
above the inlet to the pressure relief device or pressure control valve, 
structural members, baffles, piping, and other appurtenances inside the 
tank, in letters and figures at least 1\1/2\ inches high.
    (d) Both sides of the tank car, in letters at least 1\1/2\ inches 
high, with the statement ``Do Not Hump or Cut Off While in Motion.''
    (e) The outer jacket, below the tank classification stencil, in 
letters at least 1\1/2\ inches high, with the statement, ``vacuum 
jacketed.''

[Amdt. 179-32, 48 FR 27708, June 16, 1983, as amended at 66 FR 45391, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 179.401  Individual specification requirements applicable to inner tanks for cryogenic liquid tank car tanks.



Sec. 179.401-1  Individual specification requirements.

    In addition to Sec. 179.400, the individual specification 
requirements for the inner tank and its appurtenances are as follows:

[[Page 1038]]



------------------------------------------------------------------------
        DOT specification               113A60W            113C120W
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Design service temperature,       -423..............  -260.
 deg.F.
Material........................  Sec.  179.400-5...  Sec.  179.400-5.
Impact test (weld and plate       Sec.  179.400-5(c)  Sec.  179.400-
 material).                                            5(c).
Impact test values..............  Sec.  179.400-5(d)  Sec.  179.400-
                                                       5(d).
Standard heat transfer rate.
  (Btu per day per lb. of water   0.097.............  0.4121.
   capacity, max.) (see Sec.
   179.400-4).
Bursting pressure, min. psig....  240...............  300.
Minimum plate thickness shell,    \3/16\............  \3/16\.
 inches (see Sec.  179.400-7(a)).
Minimum head thickness, inches    \3/16\............  \3/16\.
 (see Sec.  179.400-8 (a), (b),
 and (c)).
Test pressure, psig (see Sec.     60................  120.
 179.400-16).
Safety vent bursting pressure,    60................  120.
 max. psig.
Pressure relief valve start-to-   30................  75.
 discharge pressure, psig ( 3 psi).
Pressure relief valve vapor       24................  60.
 tight pressure, min. psig.
Pressure relief valve flow        40................  85.
 rating pressure, max. psig.
Alternate pressure relief valve   ..................  90.
 start to-discharge pressure,
 psig ( 3 psi).
Alternate pressure relief valve   ..................  72.
 vapor tight pressure, min. psig.
Alternate pressure relief valve   ..................  100.
 flow rating pressure, max. psig.
Pressure control valve Start-to-  17................  Not required.
 vent, max. psig (see Sec.
 179.400-20(c)(4)).
Relief device discharge           Sec.  179.400-20..  179.400-20.
 restrictions.
Transfer line insulation........  Sec.  179.400-17..  Not required.
------------------------------------------------------------------------


[Amdt. 179-32, 48 FR 27708, June 16, 1983, as amended at 49 FR 24318, 
June 12, 1984; 65 FR 58632, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45390, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 179.500  Specification DOT-107A * * * * seamless steel tank car tanks.



Sec. 179.500-1  Tanks built under these specifications shall meet the requirements of Sec. 179.500.



Sec. 179.500-3  Type and general requirements.

    (a) Tanks built under this specification shall be hollow forged or 
drawn in one piece. Forged tanks shall be machined inside and outside 
before ends are necked-down and, after necking-down, the ends shall be 
machined to size on the ends and outside diameter. Machining not 
necessary on inside or outside of seamless steel tubing, but required on 
ends after necking-down.
    (b) For tanks made in foreign countries, chemical analysis of 
material and all tests as specified must be carried out within the 
limits of the United States under supervision of a competent and 
disinterested inspector; in addition to which, provisions in 
Sec. 179.500-18 (b) and (c) shall be carried out at the point of 
manufacture by a recognized inspection bureau with principal office in 
the United States.
    (c) The term ``marked end'' and ``marked test pressure'' used 
throughout this specification are defined as follows:
    (1) ``Marked end'' is that end of the tank on which marks prescribed 
in Sec. 179.500-17 are stamped.
    (2) ``Marked test pressure'' is that pressure in psig which is 
indicated by the figures substituted for the **** in the marking DOT-
107A **** stamped on the marked end of tank.
    (d) The gas pressure at 130 deg.F in the tank shall not exceed \7/
10\ of the marked test pressure of the tank.

[Amdt. 179-32, 48 FR 27708, June 16, 1983, as amended at 66 FR 45186, 
45391, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 179.500-4  Thickness of wall.

    (a) Minimum thickness of wall of each finished tank shall be such 
that at a pressure equal to \7/10\ of the marked test pressure of the 
tank, the calculated fiber stress in psi at inner wall of tank 
multiplied by 3.0 will not exceed the tensile strength of any specimen 
taken from the tank and tested as prescribed in Sec. 179.500-7(b). 
Minimum wall thickness shall be \1/4\ inch.
    (b) Calculations to determine the maximum marked test pressure 
permitted to be marked on the tank shall be made by the formula:

P = [10S(D 2 - d 2)] / [7(D 2+d 
    2)]
Where:

P = Maximum marked test pressure permitted;

S = U / 3.0

Where:

U = Tensile strength of that specimen which shows the lower tensile 
strength of the two

[[Page 1039]]

specimens taken from the tank and tested as prescribed in Sec. 179.500-
7(b).
3 = Factor of safety.

(D 2 - d 2/(D 2 + d 2) = The 
smaller value obtained for this factor by the operations specified in 
Sec. 179.500-4(c).

    (c) Measure at one end, in a plane perpendicular to the longitudinal 
axis of the tank and at least 18 inches from that end before necking-
down:

d = Maximum inside diameter (inches) for the location under 
consideration; to be determined by direct measurement to an accuracy of 
0.05 inch.
t = Minimum thickness of wall for the location under consideration; to 
be determined by direct measurement to an accuracy of 0.001 inch.
Take D = d + 2t.
Calculate the value of (D 2-d 2)/(D 2 + 
d 2)

    (1) Make similar measurements and calculation for a corresponding 
location at the other end of the tank.
    (2) Use the smaller result obtained, from the foregoing, in making 
calculations prescribed in paragraph (b) of this section.

[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, 
and amended by Amdt. 179-31, 47 FR 43067, Sept. 30, 1982; 66 FR 45391, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 179.500-5  Material.

    (a) Tanks shall be made from open-hearth or electric steel of 
uniform quality. Material shall be free from seams, cracks, laminations, 
or other defects injurious to finished tank. If not free from such 
defects, the surface may be machined or ground to eliminate these 
defects. Forgings and seamless tubing for bodies of tanks shall be 
stamped with heat numbers.
    (b) Steel (see Note 1) must conform to the following requirements as 
to chemical composition:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                          Class I    Class II  Class III
              Designation                (percent)  (percent)  (percent)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Carbon, maximum........................       0.50       0.50       0.53
Manganese, maximum.....................       1.65       1.65       1.85
Phosphorus, maximum....................        .05        .05        .05
Sulphur, maximum.......................        .06        .05        .05
Silicon, maximum.......................        .35        .30        .37
Molybdenum, maximum....................  .........        .25        .30
Chromium, maximum......................  .........        .30        .30
Sum of manganese and carbon not over...       2.10       2.10  .........
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note 1: Alternate steel containing other alloying elements may be used
  if approved.

    (1) For instructions as to the obtaining and checking of chemical 
analysis, see Sec. 179.500-18(b)(3).
    (2) [Reserved]



Sec. 179.500-6  Heat treatment.

    (a) Each necked-down tank shall be uniformly heat treated. Heat 
treatment shall consist of annealing or normalizing and tempering for 
Class I, Class II and Class III steel or oil quenching and tempering for 
Class III steel. Tempering temperatures shall not be less than 1000 
deg.F. Heat treatment of alternate steels shall be approved. All scale 
shall be removed from outside of tank to an extent sufficient to allow 
proper inspection.
    (b) To check uniformity of heat treatment, Brinnel hardness tests 
shall be made at 18 inch intervals on the entire longitudinal axis. The 
hardness shall not vary more than 35 points in the length of the tank. 
No hardness tests need be taken within 12 inches from point of head to 
shell tangency.
    (c) A magnetic particle inspection shall be performed after heat 
treatment on all tanks subjected to a quench and temper treatment to 
detect the presence of quenching cracks. Cracks shall be removed to 
sound metal by grinding and the surface exposed shall be blended 
smoothly into the surrounding area. A wall thickness check shall then be 
made of the affected area by ultrasonic equipment or other suitable 
means acceptable to the inspector and if the remaining wall thickness is 
less than the minimum recorded thickness as determined by Sec. 179.500-
4(b) it shall be used for making the calculation prescribed in paragraph 
(b) of this section.



Sec. 179.500-7  Physical tests.

    (a) Physical tests shall be made on two test specimens 0.505 inch in 
diameter within 2-inch gauge length, taken 180 degrees apart, one from 
each ring section cut from each end of each forged or drawn tube before 
necking-down, or one from each prolongation at each end of each necked-
down tank. These test specimen ring sections or prolongations shall be 
heat treated, with the necked-down tank which they represent. The width 
of the test specimen ring section must be at least its

[[Page 1040]]

wall thickness. Only when diameters and wall thickness will not permit 
removal of 0.505 by 2-inch tensile test bar, laid in the transverse 
direction, may test bar cut in the longitudinal direction be 
substituted. When the thickness will not permit obtaining a 0.505 
specimen, then the largest diameter specimen obtainable in the 
longitudinal direction shall be used. Specimens shall have bright 
surface and a reduced section. When 0.505 specimen is not used the gauge 
length shall be a ratio of 4 to 1 length to diameter.
    (b) Elastic limit as determined by extensometer, shall not exceed 70 
percent of tensile strength for class I steel or 85 percent of tensile 
strength for class II and class III steel. Determination shall be made 
at cross head speed of not more than 0.125 inch per minute with an 
extensometer reading to 0.0002 inch. The extensometer shall be read at 
increments of stress not exceeding 5,000 psi. The stress at which the 
strain first exceeds

         stress (psi) /30,000,000 (psi) +0.005 (inches per inch)

shall be recorded as the elastic limit.
    (1) Elongation shall be at least 18 percent and reduction of area at 
least 35 percent.

    Note 1: Upon approval, the ratio of elastic limit to ultimate 
strength may be raised to permit use of special alloy steels of definite 
composition that will give equal or better physical properties than 
steels herein specified.

    (2) [Reserved]

[Amdt. 179-8, 36 FR 18470, Sept. 15, 1971, as amended at 66 FR 45391, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 179.500-8  Openings in tanks.

    (a) Each end shall be closed by a cover made of forged steel. Covers 
shall be secured to ends of tank by through bolts or studs not entering 
interior of tank. Covers shall be of a thickness sufficient to meet test 
requirements of Sec. 179.500-12 and to compensate for the openings 
closed by attachments prescribed herein.
    (1) It is also provided that each end may be closed by internal 
threading to accommodate an approved fitting. The internal threads as 
well as the threads on fittings for these openings shall be clean cut, 
even, without checks, and tapped to gauge. Taper threads are required 
and shall be of a length not less than as specified for American 
Standard taper pipe threads. External threading of an approved type 
shall be permissible on the internal threaded ends.
    (b) Joints between covers and ends and between cover and attachments 
shall be of approved form and made tight against vapor or liquid leakage 
by means of a confined gasket of suitable material.



Sec. 179.500-10  Protective housing.

    (a) Safety devices, and loading and unloading valves on tanks shall 
be protected from accidental damage by approved metal housing, arranged 
so it may be readily opened to permit inspection and adjustment of 
safety relief devices and valves, and securely locked in closed 
position. Housing shall be provided with opening having an opening equal 
to twice the total discharge area of pressure relief device enclosed.
    (b) [Reserved]

[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, 
and amended at 66 FR 45390, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 61016, Sept. 27, 2002]



Sec. 179.500-11  Loading and unloading valves.

    (a) Loading and unloading valve or valves shall be mounted on the 
cover or threaded into the marked end of tank. These valves shall be of 
approved type, made of metal not subject to rapid deterioration by 
lading or in service, and shall withstand without leakage a pressure 
equal to the marked test pressure of tank. Provision shall be made for 
closing service outlet of valves.
    (b) [Reserved]



Sec. 179.500-12  Pressure relief devices.

    (a) Tank shall be equipped with one or more pressure relief devices 
of approved type and discharge area, mounted on the cover or threaded 
into the non-marked end of the tank. If fittings are mounted on a cover, 
they shall be of the flanged type, made of metal not subject to rapid 
deterioration by lading or in service. Total flow capacity shall be such 
that, with tank filled with air at pressure equal to 70 percent of the

[[Page 1041]]

marked test pressure of tank, flow capacity will be sufficient to reduce 
air pressure to 30 percent of the marked test pressure within 3 minutes 
after pressure relief device opens.
    (b) Safety relief devices shall open at pressure not exceeding the 
marked test pressure of tank and not less than \7/10\ of marked test 
pressure. (For tolerance for safety relief valves, see Sec. 179.500-
16(a).)
    (c) Cars used for the transportation of flammable gases shall have 
the safety devices equipped with an approved ignition device.

[Amdt. 179-32, 48 FR 27708, June 16, 1983, as amended at 66 FR 45391, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 179.500-13  Fixtures.

    (a) Attachments, other than those mounted on tank covers or serving 
as threaded closures for the ends of the tank, are prohibited.
    (b) [Reserved]



Sec. 179.500-14  Test of tanks.

    (a) After heat-treatment, tanks shall be subjected to hydrostatic 
tests in a water jacket, or by other accurate method, operated so as to 
obtain reliable data. No tank shall have been subjected previously to 
internal pressure greater than 90 percent of the marked test pressure. 
Each tank shall be tested to a pressure at least equal to the marked 
test pressure of the tank. Pressure shall be maintained for 30 seconds, 
and sufficiently longer to insure complete expansion of tank. Pressure 
gauge shall permit reading to accuracy of one percent. Expansion gauge 
shall permit reading of total expansion to accuracy of one percent. 
Expansion shall be recorded in cubic cm.
    (b) No leaks shall appear and permanent volumetric expansion shall 
not exceed 10 percent of the total volumetric expansion at test 
pressure.



Sec. 179.500-15  Handling of tanks failing in tests.

    (a) Tanks rejected for failure in any of the tests prescribed may be 
reheat-treated, and will be acceptable if subsequent to reheat-treatment 
they are subjected to and pass all of the tests.
    (b) [Reserved]



Sec. 179.500-16  Tests of pressure relief devices.

    (a) Pressure relief valves shall be tested by air or gas before 
being put into service. Valve shall open at pressure not exceeding the 
marked test pressure of tank and shall be vapor-tight at 80 percent of 
the marked test pressure. These limiting pressures shall not be affected 
by any auxiliary closure or other combination.
    (b) For pressure relief devices that incorporate a rupture disc, 
samples of the discs used shall burst at a pressure not exceeding the 
marked test pressure of tank and not less than \7/10\ of marked test 
pressure.

[Amdt. 179-32, 48 FR 27708, June 16, 1983, as amended at 66 FR 45391, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 179.500-17  Marking.

    (a) Each tank shall be plainly and permanently marked, thus 
certifying that tank complies with all requirements of this 
specification. These marks shall be stamped into the metal of necked-
down section of tank at marked end, in letters and figures at least \1/
4\ inch high, as follows:
    (1) Spec. DOT-107A * * * *, the * * * * to be replaced by figures 
indicating marked test pressure of the tank. This pressure shall not 
exceed the calculated maximum marked test pressure permitted, as 
determined by the formula in Sec. 179.500-4(b).
    (2) Serial number immediately below the stamped mark specified in 
paragraph (a)(1) of this section.
    (3) Inspector's official mark immediately below the stamped mark 
specified in paragraph (a)(1) of this section.
    (4) Name, mark (other than trademark), or initials of company or 
person for whose use tank is being made, which shall be recorded with 
the Bureau of Explosives.
    (5) Date (such as 1-01, for January 2001) of tank test, so placed 
that dates of subsequent tests may easily be added.
    (6) Date (such as 1-01, for January 2001) of latest test of pressure 
relief device or of the rupture disc, required only when tank is used 
for transportation of flammable gases.

[[Page 1042]]

    (b) [Reserved]

[29 FR 18995, Dec. 29, 1964, as amended by Amdt. 179-52, 61 FR 28682, 
June 5, 1996; 66 FR 45391, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 179.500-18  Inspection and reports.

    (a) Before a tank car is placed in service, the party assembling the 
completed car shall furnish to car owner, Bureau of Explosives, and the 
Secretary, Mechanical Division, Association of American Railroads, a 
report in proper form certifying that tanks and their equipment comply 
with all the requirements of this specification and including 
information as to serial numbers, dates of tests, and ownership marks on 
tanks mounted on car structure.
    (b) Purchaser of tanks shall provide for inspection by a competent 
inspector as follows:
    (1) Inspector shall carefully inspect all material and reject that 
not complying with Sec. 179.500-5.
    (2) Inspector shall stamp his official mark on each forging or 
seamless tube accepted by him for use in making tanks, and shall verify 
proper application of heat number to such material by occasional 
inspections at steel manufacturer's plant.
    (3) Inspector shall obtain certified chemical analysis of each heat 
of material.
    (4) Inspector shall make inspection of inside surface of tanks 
before necking-down, to insure that no seams, cracks, laminations, or 
other defects exist.
    (5) Inspector shall fully verify compliance with specification, 
verify heat treatment of tank as proper; obtain samples for all tests 
and check chemical analyses; witness all tests; and report minimum 
thickness of tank wall, maximum inside diameter, and calculated value of 
D, for each end of each tank as prescribed in Sec. 179.500-4(c).
    (6) Inspector shall stamp his official mark on each accepted tank 
immediately below serial number, and make certified report (see 
paragraph (c) of this section) to builder, to company or person for 
whose use tanks are being made, to builder of car structure on which 
tanks are to be mounted, to the Bureau of Explosives, and to the 
Secretary, Mechanical Division, Association of American Railroads.
    (c) Inspector's report required herein shall be in the following 
form:

        (Place)_________________________________________________________
        (Date)__________________________________________________________

                               Steel Tanks

    It is hereby certified that drawings were submitted for these tanks 
under AAR Application for Approval ------------ and approved by the AAR 
Committee on Tank Cars under date of ------------.
Built for ------------------------ Company
Location at_____________________________________________________________
Built by ------------------------ Company
Location at_____________________________________________________________
Consigned to ------------------ Company
Location at_____________________________________________________________
Quantity________________________________________________________________
Length (inches)_________________________________________________________
Outside diameter (inches)_______________________________________________
Marks stamped into tank as required in Sec. 179.500-17 are:

                             DOT-107A* * * *

    Note 1: The marked test pressure substituted for the * * * * on each 
tank is shown on Record of General Data on Tanks attached hereto.

Serial numbers ---- to ---- inclusive
Inspector's mark________________________________________________________
Owner's mark____________________________________________________________
Test date_______________________________________________________________
Water capacity (see Record of Hydrostatic Tests).
Tare weights (yes or no) (see Record of Hydrostatic Tests).
These tanks were made by process of_____________________________________
    Steel used was identified as indicated by the attached list showing 
the serial number of each tank, followed by the heat number.
    Steel used was verified as to chemical analysis and record thereof 
is attached hereto. Heat numbers were stamped into metal. All material 
was inspected and each tank was inspected both before and after closing 
in ends; all material accepted was found free from seams, cracks, 
laminations, and other defects which might prove injurious to strength 
of tank. Processes of manufacture and heat-treatment of tanks were 
witnessed and found to be efficient and satisfactory.
    Before necking-down ends, each tank was measured at each location 
prescribed in Sec. 179.500-4(c) and minimum wall thickness in inches at 
each location was recorded; maximum inside diameter in inches at each 
location was recorded; value of D in inches at each location was 
calculated and recorded; maximum fiber stress in wall at location 
showing larger value for

     (D 2+d 2)/(D 2-d 2)

was calculated for \7/10\ the marked test pressure and recorded. 
Calculations were made by the formula:

[[Page 1043]]

 S=[0.7P(D 2-d 2)/(D 2+d 2)]

    Hydrostatic tests, tensile test of material, and other tests as 
prescribed in this specification, were made in the presence of the 
inspector, and all material and tanks accepted were found to be in 
compliance with the requirements of this specification. Records thereof 
are attached hereto.
    I hereby certify that all of these tanks proved satisfactory in 
every way and comply with the requirements of Department of 
Transportation Specification No. 107A* * * *.

        (Signed)________________________________________________________
                                                             (Inspector)
        (Place)_________________________________________________________
        (Date)__________________________________________________________

             Record of Chemical Analysis of Steel for Tanks

Numbered -------- to -------- inclusive
Size -- inches outside diameter by -- inches long
Built by ------------------------ Company
For ------------------------------ Company

------------------------------------------------------------------------
              Tanks                     Chemical analysis
  Heat     represented  ------------------------------------------------
  No.     (serial Nos.)    C     Mn     P     S    Si    Ni    Cr    Mo
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------

These analyses were made by
        (Signed)________________________________________________________
        (Place)_________________________________________________________
        (Date)__________________________________________________________

              Record of Chemical Analysis of Steel in Tanks

Numbered -------- to -------- inclusive
Size ---- inches outside by ---- inches long
Built by ------------------------ Company
For ------------------------------ Company

------------------------------------------------------------------------
             Tanks
  Heat    represented    Elastic     Tensile    Elongation    Reduction
  No.       by test       limit     strength    (percent in    of area
         (serial Nos.)    (psi)       (psi)      2 inches)    (percent)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
 
------------------------------------------------------------------------

        (Signed)________________________________________________________
                                                                          
        (Place).........................................................
                                                                          
          (Date)........................................................

                                      Record of Hydrostatic Tests on Tanks
Numbered.................................  to...........................  inclusive
Size.....................................  inches outside by............  .........  inches long
Built by...........................................................................  Company
For................................................................................  Company
 


----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                Percent ratio of
                  Actual test        Total         Permanent        permanent                       Capacity in
Serial Nos. of     pressure        expansion       expansion      expansion to      Tare weight      pounds of
     tanks          (psig)        (cubic cm)      (cubic cm)     total expansion    (pounds) \2\    water at 60
                                                                       \1\                             deg.F
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
 
 
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ If tests are made by method involving measurement of amount of liquid forced into tank by test pressure,
  then the basic data on which calculations are made, such as pump factors, temperature of liquid, coefficient
  of compressibility of liquid, etc., must also be given.
\2\ Do not include protective housing, but state whether with or without valves.

                                                                          
      (Signed)..........................................................
                                                                          
        (Place).........................................................
                                                                          
          (Date)........................................................

                                         Record of General Data on Tanks
Numbered.................................  to...........................  inclusive
Built by...........................................................................  Company
For................................................................................  Company
 


[[Page 1044]]


--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                         Data obtained as prescribed in Sec.  179.500-4(c)
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------                   (S)                      Minimum
                   Marked end of tank                                Other end of tank                 Larger      Calculated   Marked test    tensile
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------   value of    fiber stress  pressure in  strength of
               (t) Min.      (d) Max.                     (t) Minimum  (d) Maximum                   the factor  in psi at \7/      psig     material in
Serial No.   thickness of     inside     (D) Calculated  thickness of     inside    (D) calculated  D 2+d 2/D 2-   10\ marked    stamped in      psi
  of tank      wall in      diameter in   value of D in     wall in    diameter in   value of D in      d 2      test pressure      tank       recorded
                inches        inches       inches=d+2t      inches        inches      inches=d+2t
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
 
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

                                                                          
      (Signed)..........................................................

[Amdt. 179-32, 48 FR 27708, June 16, 1983, as amended by 66 FR 45391, 
Aug. 28, 2001]

  Appendix A to Part 179--Procedures for Tank-Head Puncture-Resistance 
                                  Test

    1. This test procedure is designed to verify the integrity of new or 
untried tank-head puncture-resistance systems and to test for system 
survivability after coupler-to-tank-head impacts at relative speeds of 
29 km/hour (18 mph). Tank-head puncture-resistance is a function of one 
or more of the following: Head thickness, jacket thickness, insulation 
thickness, and material of construction.
    2. Tank-head puncture-resistance test. A tank-head puncture-
resistance system must be tested under the following conditions:
    a. The ram car used must weigh at least 119,295 kg (263,000 pounds), 
be equipped with a coupler, and duplicate the condition of a 
conventional draft sill including the draft yoke and draft gear. The 
coupler must protrude from the end of the ram car so that it is the 
leading location of perpendicular contact with the impacted test car.
    b. The impacted test car must be loaded with water at six percent 
outage with internal pressure of at least 6.9 Bar (100 psig) and coupled 
to one or more ``backup'' cars which have a total weight of 217,724 kg 
(480,000 pounds) with hand brakes applied on the last ``backup'' car.
    c. At least two separate tests must be conducted with the coupler on 
the vertical centerline of the ram car. One test must be conducted with 
the coupler at a height of 53.3 cm (21 inches), plus-or-minus 2.5 cm (1 
inch), above the top of the sill; the other test must be conducted with 
the coupler height at 79 cm (31 inches), plus-or-minus 2.5 cm (1 inch), 
above the top of the sill. If the combined thickness of the tank head 
and any additional shielding material is less than the combined 
thickness on the vertical centerline of the car, a third test must be 
conducted with the coupler positioned so as to strike the thinnest point 
of the tank head.
    3. One of the following test conditions must be applied:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                   Minimum velocity
 Minimum weight of attached ram    of impact in km/      Restrictions
       cars in kg (pounds)            hour (mph)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
119,295 (263,000)...............  29 (18)..........  One ram car only.
155,582 (343,000)...............  25.5 (16)........  One ram car or one
                                                      car plus one
                                                      rigidly attached
                                                      car.
311,164 (686,000)...............  22.5 (14)........  One ram car plus
                                                      one or more
                                                      rigidly attached
                                                      cars.
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    4. A test is successful if there is no visible leak from the 
standing tank car for at least one hour after impact.

[Amdt. 179-50, 60 FR 49078, Sept. 21, 1995, as amended by Amdt. 179-50, 
61 FR 33256, June 26, 1996; 66 FR 45390-45391, Aug. 28, 2001]

  Appendix B to Part 179--Procedures for Simulated Pool and Torch-Fire 
                                 Testing

    1. This test procedure is designed to measure the thermal effects of 
new or untried thermal protection systems and to test for system 
survivability when exposed to a 100-minute pool fire and a 30-minute 
torch fire.
    2. Simulated pool fire test.
    a. A pool-fire environment must be simulated in the following 
manner:
    (1) The source of the simulated pool fire must be hydrocarbon fuel 
with a flame temperature of 871  deg.C (1,600  deg.F), plus-or-minus 
37.8  deg.C (100  deg.F), throughout the duration of the test.
    (2) A square bare plate with thermal properties equivalent to the 
material of construction of the tank car must be used. The plate 
dimensions must be not less than one foot by one foot by nominal 1.6 cm 
(0.625 inch) thick. The bare plate must be instrumented with not less 
than nine thermocouples to record the thermal response of the bare 
plate. The thermocouples must be attached to the surface not exposed to 
the simulated pool fire and must be divided into nine equal squares with 
a thermocouple placed in the center of each square.

[[Page 1045]]

    (3) The pool-fire simulator must be constructed in a manner that 
results in total flame engulfment of the front surface of the bare 
plate. The apex of the flame must be directed at the center of the 
plate.
    (4) The bare plate holder must be constructed in such a manner that 
the only heat transfer to the back side of the bare plate is by heat 
conduction through the plate and not by other heat paths.
    (5) Before the bare plate is exposed to the simulated pool fire, 
none of the temperature recording devices may indicate a plate 
temperature in excess of 37.8  deg.C (100  deg.F) nor less than 0  deg.C 
(32  deg.F).
    (6) A minimum of two thermocouple devices must indicate 427  deg.C 
(800  deg.F) after 13 minutes, plus-or-minus one minute, of simulated 
pool-fire exposure.
    b. A thermal protection system must be tested in the simulated pool-
fire environment described in paragraph 2a of this appendix in the 
following manner:
    (1) The thermal protection system must cover one side of a bare 
plate as described in paragraph 2a(2) of this appendix.
    (2) The non-protected side of the bare plate must be instrumented 
with not less than nine thermocouples placed as described in paragraph 
2a(2) of this appendix to record the thermal response of the plate.
    (3) Before exposure to the pool-fire simulation, none of the 
thermocouples on the thermal protection system configuration may 
indicate a plate temperature in excess of 37.8  deg.C (100  deg.F) nor 
less than 0  deg.C (32  deg.F).
    (4) The entire surface of the thermal protection system must be 
exposed to the simulated pool fire.
    (5) A pool-fire simulation test must run for a minimum of 100 
minutes. The thermal protection system must retard the heat flow to the 
plate so that none of the thermocouples on the non-protected side of the 
plate indicate a plate temperature in excess of 427  deg.C (800  deg.F).
    (6) A minimum of three consecutive successful simulation fire tests 
must be performed for each thermal protection system.
    3. Simulated torch fire test.
    a. A torch-fire environment must be simulated in the following 
manner:
    (1) The source of the simulated torch must be a hydrocarbon fuel 
with a flame temperature of 1,204  deg.C (2,200  deg.F), plus-or-minus 
37.8  deg.C (100  deg.F), throughout the duration of the test. 
Furthermore, torch velocities must be 64.4 km/h  16 km/h (40 
mph  10 mph) throughout the duration of the test.
    (2) A square bare plate with thermal properties equivalent to the 
material of construction of the tank car must be used. The plate 
dimensions must be at least four feet by four feet by nominal 1.6 cm 
(0.625 inch) thick. The bare plate must be instrumented with not less 
than nine thermocouples to record the thermal response of the plate. The 
thermocouples must be attached to the surface not exposed to the 
simulated torch and must be divided into nine equal squares with a 
thermocouple placed in the center of each square.
    (3) The bare plate holder must be constructed in such a manner that 
the only heat transfer to the back side of the plate is by heat 
conduction through the plate and not by other heat paths. The apex of 
the flame must be directed at the center of the plate.
    (4) Before exposure to the simulated torch, none of the temperature 
recording devices may indicate a plate temperature in excess of 37.8 
deg.C (100  deg.F) or less than 0  deg.C (32  deg.F).
    (5) A minimum of two thermocouples must indicate 427  deg.C (800 
deg.F) in four minutes, plus-or-minus 30 seconds, of torch simulation 
exposure.
    b. A thermal protection system must be tested in the simulated 
torch-fire environment described in paragraph 3a of this appendix in the 
following manner:
    (1) The thermal protection system must cover one side of the bare 
plate identical to that used to simulate a torch fire under paragraph 
3a(2) of this appendix.
    (2) The back of the bare plate must be instrumented with not less 
than nine thermocouples placed as described in paragraph 3a(2) of this 
appendix to record the thermal response of the material.
    (3) Before exposure to the simulated torch, none of the 
thermocouples on the back side of the thermal protection system 
configuration may indicate a plate temperature in excess of 37.8  deg.C 
(100  deg.F) nor less than 0  deg.C (32  deg.F).
    (4) The entire outside surface of the thermal protection system must 
be exposed to the simulated torch-fire environment.
    (5) A torch-simulation test must be run for a minimum of 30 minutes. 
The thermal protection system must retard the heat flow to the plate so 
that none of the thermocouples on the backside of the bare plate 
indicate a plate temperature in excess of 427  deg.C (800  deg.F).
    (6) A minimum of two consecutive successful torch-simulation tests 
must be performed for each thermal protection system.

[Amdt. 179-50, 60 FR 49078, Sept. 21, 1995]



PART 180--CONTINUING QUALIFICATION AND MAINTENANCE OF PACKAGINGS--Table of Contents




                           Subpart A--General

Sec.
180.1  Purpose and scope.
180.2  Applicability.
180.3  General requirements.

Subpart B [Reserved]

[[Page 1046]]

       Subpart C--Qualification, Maintenance and Use of Cylinders

180.201  Applicability.
180.203  Definitions.
180.205  General requirements for requalification of cylinders.
180.207  [Reserved]
180.209  Requirements for requalification of specification cylinders.
180.211  Repair, rebuilding and reheat treatment of DOT-4 series 
          specification cylinders.
180.213  Requalification markings.
180.215  Reporting and record retention requirements.

            Subpart D--Qualification and Maintenance of IBCs

180.350  Applicability.
180.351  Qualification of IBCs.
180.352  Requirements for retest and inspection of IBCs.

         Subpart E--Qualification and Maintenance of Cargo Tanks

180.401  Applicability.
180.403  Definitions.
180.405  Qualification of cargo tanks.
180.407  Requirements for test and inspection of specification cargo 
          tanks.
180.409  Minimum qualifications for inspectors and testers.
180.411  Acceptable results of tests and inspections.
180.413  Repair, modification, stretching, or rebarrelling of cargo 
          tanks.
180.415  Test and inspection markings.
180.416  Discharge system inspection and maintenance program for cargo 
          tanks transporting liquefied compressed gases.
180.417  Reporting and record retention requirements.

          Subpart F--Qualification and Maintenance of Tank Cars

180.501  Applicability.
180.503  Definitions.
180.505  Quality assurance program.
180.507  Qualification of tank cars.
180.509  Requirements for inspection and test of specification tank 
          cars.
180.511  Acceptable results of inspections and tests.
180.513  Repairs, alterations, conversions, and modifications.
180.515  Markings.
180.517  Reporting and record retention requirements.
180.519  Periodic retest and inspection of tank cars other than single-
          unit tank car tanks.

       Subpart G--Qualification and Maintenance of Portable Tanks

180.601   Applicability.
180.603   Qualification of portable tanks.
180.605   Requirements for periodic testing, inspection and repair of 
          portable tanks.

Appendix A to Part 180--Internal Self-closing Stop Valve Emergency 
          Closure Test for Liquefied Compressed Gases
Appendix B to Part 180--Acceptable Internal Self-closing Stop Valve 
          Leakage Tests for Cargo Tanks Transporting Liquefied 
          Compressed Gases

    Authority: 49 U.S.C. 5101-5127; 49 CFR 1.53.

    Source: Amdt. 180-2, 54 FR 25032, June 12, 1989, unless otherwise 
noted.



                           Subpart A--General



Sec. 180.1  Purpose and scope.

    This part prescribes requirements pertaining to the maintenance, 
reconditioning, repair, inspection and testing of packagings, and any 
other function having an effect on the continuing qualification and use 
of a packaging under the requirements of this subchapter.



Sec. 180.2  Applicability.

    (a) Any person who performs a function prescribed in this part shall 
perform that function in accordance with this part.
    (b) Any person who performs a function prescribed in this part is 
considered subject to the regulations of this subchapter when that 
person--
    (1) Makes any representation indicating compliance with one or more 
of the requirements of this part; or
    (2) Reintroduces into commerce a packaging that bears markings 
indicating compliance with this part.

[Amdt. 180-2, 54 FR 25032, June 12, 1989, as amended by Amdt. 180-2, 56 
FR 27877, June 17, 1991]



Sec. 180.3  General requirements.

    (a) No person may represent, mark, certify, sell, or offer a 
packaging or container as meeting the requirements of this part, or an 
exemption pertaining to this part issued under subchapter A of this 
chapter, whether or

[[Page 1047]]

not the packaging or container is intended to be used for the 
transportation of a hazardous material, unless it is marked, maintained, 
reconditioned, repaired, or retested, as appropriate, in accordance with 
this part, an approval issued thereunder, or an exemption issued under 
subchapter A of this chapter.
    (b) The representations, markings, and certifications subject to the 
prohibitions of paragraph (a) of this section include:
    (1) Identifications that include the letters ``DOT'', ``MC'', 
``ICC'', or ``UN'';
    (2) Exemption, approval, and registration numbers that include the 
letters ``DOT'';
    (3) Test dates displayed in association with specification, 
registration, approval, or exemption markings indicating conformance to 
a test or retest requirement of this subchapter, an approval issued 
thereunder, or an exemption issued under subchapter A of this chapter;
    (4) Documents indicating conformance to the testing, inspection, 
maintenance or other continuing qualification requirements of this part; 
and
    (5) Sales literature, including advertising, indicating that the 
packaging or container represented therein conforms to requirements 
contained in subchapter A or C of this chapter.

[Amdt. 180-2, 54 FR 25032, June 12, 1989, as amended by Amdt. 180-3, 58 
FR 33306, June 16, 1993]

Subpart B [Reserved]



       Subpart C--Qualification, Maintenance and Use of Cylinders

    Source: 67 FR 51660, Aug. 8, 2002, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 180.201  Applicability.

    This subpart prescribes requirements, in addition to those contained 
in parts 107, 171, 172, 173, and 178 of this chapter, applicable to any 
person responsible for the continuing qualification, maintenance, or 
periodic requalification of DOT specification and exemption cylinders.



Sec. 180.203  Definitions.

    In addition to the definitions contained in Sec. 171.8 of this 
subchapter, the following definitions apply to this subpart:
    Commercially free of corrosive components means a hazardous material 
having a dew point at or below minus 46.7  deg.C (minus 52  deg.F) at 
101kPa (1 atmosphere) and free of components that will adversely react 
with the cylinder (e.g. chemical stress corrosion).
    Condemn means a determination that a cylinder is unserviceable for 
the continued transportation of hazardous materials in commerce and that 
the cylinder may not be restored by repair, rebuilding, requalification, 
or any other procedure.
    Defect means an imperfection requiring removal of a cylinder from 
service.
    Elastic expansion means a temporary increase in a cylinder's volume, 
due to application of pressure, that is lost when pressure is released 
(elastic expansion = total expansion minus permanent expansion).
    Filled or charged means an introduction or presence of a hazardous 
material in a cylinder.
    Non-corrosive service means a hazardous material that, in the 
presence of moisture, is not corrosive to the materials of construction 
of a cylinder (including valve, pressure relief device, etc.).
    Over-heated means a condition in which the temperature of any 
portion of an aluminum cylinder has reached 176  deg.C (350  deg.F) or 
higher, or in which the temperature of any portion of a steel or nickel 
cylinder has reached 343  deg.C (650  deg.F) or higher.
    Permanent expansion means a permanent increase in a cylinder's 
volume after the test pressure is released.
    Proof pressure test means a pressure test by interior pressurization 
without the determination of a cylinder's expansion.
    Rebuild means the replacement of a pressure part (e.g. a wall, head, 
or pressure fitting) by welding.
    Rejected cylinder means a cylinder that cannot be used for the 
transportation of a hazardous material in commerce without repair, 
rebuilding, and requalification.

[[Page 1048]]

    Repair means a procedure for correction of a rejected cylinder that 
may involve welding.
    Requalification means the completion of a visual inspection and/or 
the test(s) required to be performed on a cylinder to determine its 
suitability for continued service.
    Requalification identification number or RIN means a code assigned 
by DOT to uniquely identify a cylinder requalification, repair, or 
rebuilding facility.
    Test pressure means the pressure used for the requalification of a 
cylinder.
    Total expansion means the total increase in a cylinder's volume due 
to application of the test pressure.
    Visual inspection means an internal or external visual examination, 
or both, performed as part of the cylinder requalification process.
    Volumetric expansion test means a pressure test to determine the 
total and permanent expansion of a cylinder at a given pressure. The 
volumetric expansion test is conducted using the water jacket or direct 
expansion methods:
    (1) Water jacket method means a volumetric expansion test to 
determine a cylinder's total and permanent expansion by measuring the 
difference between the volume of water the cylinder externally displaces 
at test pressure and the volume of water the cylinder externally 
displaces at ambient pressure.
    (2) Direct expansion method means a volumetric expansion test to 
calculate a cylinder's total and permanent expansion by measuring the 
amount of water forced into a cylinder at test pressure, adjusted for 
the compressibility of water, as a means of determining the expansion.



Sec. 180.205  General requirements for requalification of cylinders.

    (a) General. Each cylinder used for the transportation of hazardous 
materials must be an authorized packaging. To qualify as an authorized 
packaging, each cylinder must conform to this subpart, the applicable 
requirements specified in part 173 of this subchapter, and the 
applicable requirements of subpart C of part 178 of this subchapter.
    (b) Persons performing requalification functions. No person may 
represent that a repair or requalification of a cylinder has been 
performed in accordance with the requirements in this subchapter unless 
that person holds a current approval issued under the procedural 
requirements prescribed in subpart I of part 107 of this chapter. No 
person may mark a cylinder with a RIN and a requalification date or 
otherwise represent that a DOT specification or exemption cylinder has 
been requalified unless all applicable requirements of this subpart have 
been met. A person who requalifies cylinders must maintain the records 
prescribed in Sec. 180.215 at each location at which it inspects, tests, 
or marks cylinders.
    (c) Periodic requalification of cylinders. Each cylinder bearing a 
DOT specification marking must be requalified and marked as specified in 
the Requalification Table in this subpart. Each cylinder bearing a DOT 
exemption number must be requalified and marked in conformance with this 
section and the terms of the applicable exemption. No cylinder may be 
filled with a hazardous material and offered for transportation in 
commerce unless that cylinder has been successfully requalified and 
marked in accordance with this subpart. A cylinder may be requalified at 
any time during or before the month and year that the requalification is 
due. However, a cylinder filled before the requalification becomes due 
may remain in service until it is emptied. A cylinder with a specified 
service life may not be refilled and offered for transportation after 
its authorized service life has expired.
    (1) Each cylinder that is requalified in accordance with the 
requirements specified in this section must be marked in accordance with 
Sec. 180.213.
    (2) Each cylinder that fails requalification must be:
    (i) Rejected and may be requalified in accordance with Sec. 180.211; 
or
    (ii) Condemned in accordance with paragraph (i) of this section.
    (3) For DOT specification cylinders, the marked service pressure may 
be changed upon approval of the Associate Administrator and in 
accordance with written procedures specified in the approval.
    (4) For a DOT-3 series cylinder,at the first requalification due on 
and after

[[Page 1049]]

October 1, 2002, the set pressure of a pressure relief device must be 
set at test pressure with a tolerance of plus zero and minus 10%.
    (d) Conditions requiring test and inspection of cylinders. Without 
regard to any other periodic requalification requirements, a cylinder 
must be tested and inspected in accordance with this section prior to 
further use if--
    (1) The cylinder shows evidence of dents, corrosion, cracked or 
abraded areas, leakage, thermal damage, or any other condition that 
might render it unsafe for use in transportation;
    (2) The cylinder has been in an accident and has been damaged to an 
extent that may adversely affect its lading retention capability;
    (3) The cylinder shows evidence of or is known to have been over-
heated; or
    (4) The Associate Administrator determines that the cylinder may be 
in an unsafe condition.
    (e) Cylinders containing Class 8 (corrosive) liquids. A cylinder 
previously containing a Class 8 (corrosive) liquid may not be used to 
transport a Class 2 material in commerce unless the cylinder is--
    (1) Visually inspected, internally and externally, in accordance 
with paragraph (f) of this section and the inspection is recorded as 
prescribed in Sec. 180.215;
    (2) Requalified in accordance with this section, regardless of the 
date of the previous requalification;
    (3) Marked in accordance with Sec. 180.213; and
    (4) Decontaminated to remove all significant residue or impregnation 
of the Class 8 material.
    (f) Visual inspection. Except as otherwise provided in this subpart, 
each time a cylinder is pressure tested, it must be given an internal 
and external visual inspection.
    (1) The visual inspection must be performed in accordance with the 
following CGA Pamphlets: C-6 for steel and nickel cylinders 
(incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter); C-6.1 
for seamless aluminum cylinders (incorporated by reference; see 
Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter); C-6.2 for fiber reinforced composite 
exemption cylinders (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this 
subchapter); C-6.3 for low pressure aluminum cylinders (incorporated by 
reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter); C-8 for DOT 3HT cylinders 
(incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter); and C-13 
for DOT 8 series cylinders (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of 
this subchapter).
    (2) For each cylinder with a coating or attachments that would 
inhibit inspection of the cylinder, the coating or attachments must be 
removed before performing the visual inspection.
    (3) Each cylinder subject to visual inspection must be approved, 
rejected, or condemned according to the criteria in the applicable CGA 
pamphlet.
    (4) In addition to other requirements prescribed in this paragraph 
(f), a DOT specification or exemption cylinder made of aluminum alloy 
6351-T6 must be inspected for evidence of sustained load cracking in the 
neck and shoulder area in accordance with the cylinder manufacturer's 
written recommendations, which must be approved in writing by the 
Associate Administrator.
    (g) Pressure test. (1) Unless otherwise provided, each cylinder 
required to be retested under this subpart must be retested by means 
suitable for measuring the expansion of the cylinder under pressure. 
Bands and other removable attachments must be loosened or removed before 
testing so that the cylinder is free to expand in all directions.
    (2) The pressure indicating device of the testing apparatus must 
permit reading of pressures to within 1% of the minimum prescribed test 
pressure of each cylinder tested, except that for an analog device, 
interpolation to \1/2\ of the marked gauge divisions is acceptable. The 
expansion-indicating device of the testing apparatus must also permit 
incremental reading of the cylinder expansion to 1% of the total 
expansion of each cylinder tested or 0.1 cm3, whichever is 
larger. Midpoint visual interpolation is permitted.
    (3) Each day before retesting, the retester shall confirm, by using 
a calibrated cylinder or other method authorized in writing by the 
Associate Administrator, that:
    (i) The pressure-indicating device, as part of the retest apparatus, 
is accurate within 1.0% of the prescribed test pressure of 
any cylinder tested that day. The pressure indicating device,

[[Page 1050]]

itself, must be certified as having an accuracy of 0.5%, or 
better, of its full range, and must permit readings of pressure from 
90%-110% of the minimum prescribed test pressure of the cylinder to be 
tested. The accuracy of the pressure indicating device within the test 
system can be demonstrated at any point within 500 psig of the actual 
test pressure for test pressures at or above 3000 psig, or 10% of the 
actual test pressure for test pressures below 3000 psig.
    (ii) The expansion-indicating device, as part of the retest 
apparatus, gives a stable reading of expansion and is accurate to 
1.0% of the total expansion of any cylinder tested or 0.1 
cubic centimeter, whichever is larger. The expansion-indicating device 
itself must have an accuracy of 0.5%, or better, of its full 
scale.
    (4) The test equipment must be verified to be accurate within 
1.0% of the calibrated cylinder's pressure and corresponding 
expansion values. This may be accomplished by bringing the pressure to a 
value shown on the calibration certificate for the calibrated cylinder 
used and verifying that the resulting total expansion is within 
1.0% of the total expansion shown on the calibration 
certificate. Alternatively, calibration may be demonstrated by bringing 
the total expansion to a known value on the calibration certificate for 
the calibrated cylinder used and verifying that the resulting pressure 
is within 1.0% of the pressure shown on the calibration 
certificate. The calibrated cylinder must show no permanent expansion. 
The retester must demonstrate calibration in conformance with this 
paragraph (g) to an authorized inspector on any day that it retests 
cylinders. A retester must maintain calibrated cylinder certificates in 
conformance with Sec. 180.215(b)(4).
    (5) Minimum test pressure must be maintained for at least 30 
seconds, and as long as necessary for complete expansion of the 
cylinder. A system check may be performed at or below 90% of test 
pressure prior to the retest. In the case of a malfunction of the test 
equipment, the test may be repeated at a pressure increased by 10% or 
100 psig, whichever is less. This paragraph (g) does not authorize 
retest of a cylinder otherwise required to be condemned under paragraph 
(i) of this section.
    (h) Cylinder rejection. A cylinder must be rejected when, after a 
visual inspection, it meets a condition for rejection under the visual 
inspection requirements of paragraph (f) of this section.
    (1) Except as provided in paragraphs (h)(3) and (h)(4) of this 
section, a cylinder that is rejected may not be marked as meeting the 
requirements of this section.
    (2) The requalifier must notify the cylinder owner, in writing, that 
the cylinder has been rejected.
    (3) Unless the cylinder is requalified in conformance with 
requirements in Sec. 180.211, it may not be filled with a hazardous 
material and offered for transportation in commerce where use of a 
specification packaging is required.
    (4) A rejected cylinder with a service pressure of less than 900 
psig may be requalified and marked if the cylinder is repaired or 
rebuilt and subsequently inspected and tested in conformance with--
    (i) The visual inspection requirements of paragraph (f) of this 
section;
    (ii) Part 178 of this subchapter and this part;
    (iii) Any exemption covering the manufacture, requalification, and/
or use of that cylinder; and
    (iv) Any approval required under Sec. 180.211.
    (i) Cylinder condemnation. (1) A cylinder must be condemned when--
    (i) The cylinder meets a condition for condemnation under the visual 
inspection requirements of paragraph (f) of this section.
    (ii) The cylinder leaks through its wall.
    (iii) Evidence of cracking exists to the extent that the cylinder is 
likely to be weakened appreciably.
    (iv) For a DOT specification cylinder, other than a DOT 4E aluminum 
cylinder or an exemption cylinder, permanent expansion exceeds 10 
percent of total expansion.
    (v) For a DOT 3HT cylinder--
    (A) The pressure test yields an elastic expansion exceeding the 
marked rejection elastic expansion (REE) value.

[[Page 1051]]

    (B) The cylinder shows evidence of denting or bulging.
    (C) The cylinder bears a manufacture or an original test date older 
than twenty-four years or after 4380 pressurizations, whichever occurs 
first. If a cylinder is refilled, on average, more than once every other 
day, an accurate record of the number of rechargings must be maintained 
by the cylinder owner or the owner's agent.
    (vi) For a DOT 4E aluminum cylinder, permanent expansion exceeds 12 
percent of total expansion.
    (vii) For a DOT exemption cylinder, permanent expansion exceeds the 
limit in the applicable exemption, or the cylinder meets another 
criterion for condemnation in the applicable exemption.
    (viii) For an aluminum or an aluminum-lined composite exemption 
cylinder, the cylinder is known to have been or shows evidence of having 
been over-heated.
    (2) When a cylinder must be condemned, the requalifier must stamp a 
series of X's over the DOT specification number and the marked pressure 
or stamp ``CONDEMNED'' on the shoulder, top head, or neck using a steel 
stamp. Alternatively, at the direction of the owner, the requalifier may 
render the cylinder incapable of holding pressure. In addition, the 
requalifier must notify the cylinder owner, in writing, that the 
cylinder is condemned and may not be filled with hazardous material and 
offered for transportation in commerce where use of a specification 
packaging is required.
    (3) No person may remove or obliterate the ``CONDEMNED'' marking.



Sec. 180.207  [Reserved]



Sec. 180.209  Requirements for requalification of specification cylinders.

    (a) Periodic qualification of cylinders. (1) Each specification 
cylinder that becomes due for periodic requalification, as specified in 
the following table, must be requalified and marked in conformance with 
the requirements of this subpart. Requalification records must be 
maintained in accordance with Sec. 180.215. Table 1 follows:

               Table 1.--Requalification of Cylinders \1\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
  Specification under which       Minimum test
      cylinder was made       pressure  (psig) \2\  Test period  (years)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
DOT 3.......................  3000 psig...........  5
DOT 3A, 3AA.................  5/3 times service     5, 10, or 12 (see
                               pressure, except      Sec.  180.209(b),
                               noncorrosive          (f), (h), and (j)
                               service (see Sec.
                               180.209(g)).
DOT 3AL.....................  5/3 times service     5 or 12 (see Sec.
                               pressure.             180.209(j))
DOT 3AX, 3AAX...............  5/3 times service     5
                               pressure.
3B, 3BN.....................  2 times service       5 or 10 (see Sec.
                               pressure (see Sec.    180.209(f))
                               180.209(g)).
3E..........................  Test not required...
3HT.........................  5/3 times service     3 (see Secs.
                               pressure.             180.209(i) and
                                                     180.213(c))
3T..........................  5/3 times service     5
                               pressure.
4AA480......................  2 times service       5 or 10 (see Sec.
                               pressure (see Sec.    180.209(e)(14)
                               180.209(g)).
4B, 4BA, 4BW, 4B-240ET......  2 times service       5, 10, or 12 (see
                               pressure, except      Sec.  180.209(e),
                               non-corrosive         (f), and (j))
                               service (see Sec.
                               180.209(g)).
4D, 4DA, 4DS................  2 times service.....  5
DOT 4E......................  2 times service       5
                               pressure, except
                               non-corrosive (see
                               Sec.  180.209(g)).
4L..........................  Test not required...
8, 8AL......................  ....................  10 or 20 (see Sec.
                                                     180.209(i))
Exemption cylinder..........  See current           See current
                               exemption.            exemption
Foreign cylinder (see Sec.    As marked on          5 (see Secs.
 173.301(j) of this            cylinder, but not     180.209(k) and
 subchapter for restrictions   less than 5/3 of      180.213(d)(iii))
 on use).                      any service or
                               working pressure
                               marking.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Any cylinder not exceeding 2 inches outside diameter and less than 2
  feet in length is excepted from volumetric expansion test.
\2\ For cylinders not marked with a service pressure, see Sec.
  173.301(e)(1) of this subchapter.

    (b) DOT 3A or 3AA cylinders. (1) A cylinder conforming to 
specification DOT 3A or 3AA with a water capacity of 56.7 kg (125 lb) or 
less that is removed from

[[Page 1052]]

any cluster, bank, group, rack, or vehicle each time it is filled, may 
be requalified every ten years instead of every five years, provided the 
cylinder conforms to all of the following conditions:
    (i) The cylinder was manufactured after December 31, 1945.
    (ii) The cylinder is used exclusively for air; argon; cyclopropane; 
ethylene; helium; hydrogen; krypton; neon; nitrogen; nitrous oxide; 
oxygen; sulfur hexafluoride; xenon; fluorinated hydrocarbons, liquefied 
hydrocarbons, and mixtures thereof that are commercially free from 
corroding components; permitted mixtures of these gases (see 
Sec. 173.301(d) of this subchapter); and permitted mixtures of these 
gases with up to 30 percent by volume of carbon dioxide, provided the 
gas has a dew point at or below minus (52  deg.F) at 1 atmosphere.
    (iii) Before each refill, the cylinder is removed from any cluster, 
bank, group, rack or vehicle and passes the hammer test specified in CGA 
Pamphlet C-6 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this 
subchapter).
    (iv) The cylinder is dried immediately after hydrostatic testing to 
remove all traces of water.
    (v) The cylinder is not used for underwater breathing.
    (vi) Each cylinder is stamped with a five-pointed star at least one-
fourth of an inch high immediately following the test date.
    (2) If, since the last required requalification, a cylinder has not 
been used exclusively for the gases specifically identified in paragraph 
(b)(1)(ii) of this section, but currently conforms with all other 
provisions of paragraph (b)(1) of this section, it may be requalified 
every 10 years instead of every five years, provided it is first 
requalified and examined as prescribed by Sec. 173.302a(b) (2), (3) and 
(4) of this subchapter.
    (3) Except as specified in paragraph (b)(2) of this section, if a 
cylinder, marked with a star, is filled with a compressed gas other than 
as specified in paragraph (b)(1)(ii) of this section, the star following 
the most recent test date must be obliterated. The cylinder must be 
requalified five years from the marked test date, or prior to the first 
filling with a compressed gas, if the required five-year requalification 
period has passed.
    (c) DOT 4-series cylinders. A DOT 4-series cylinder, except a 4L 
cylinder, that at any time shows evidence of a leak or of internal or 
external corrosion, denting, bulging or rough usage to the extent that 
it is likely to be weakened appreciably, or that has lost five percent 
or more of its official tare weight must be requalified before being 
refilled and offered for transportation. (Refer to CGA Pamphlet C-6 or 
C-6.3, as applicable, regarding cylinder weakening.) After testing, the 
actual tare weight must be recorded as the new tare weight.
    (d) Cylinders 5.44 kg (12 lb) or less with service pressures of 300 
psig or less. A cylinder of 5.44 (12 lb) or less water capacity 
authorized for service pressure of 300 psig or less must be given a 
complete external visual inspection at the time periodic requalification 
becomes due. External visual inspection must be in accordance with CGA 
Pamphlet C-6 or C-6.1 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this 
subchapter). The cylinder may be proof pressure tested. The test is 
successful if the cylinder, when examined under test pressure, does not 
display a defect described in Sec. 180.205(i)(1) (ii) or (iii). Upon 
successful completion of the test and inspection, the cylinder must be 
marked in accordance with Sec. 180.213.
    (e) Proof pressure test. A cylinder made in conformance with 
specifications DOT 4B, 4BA, 4BW, or 4E used exclusively for: liquefied 
petroleum gas that meets the requirements in Table I of ASTM D 1835, 
Standard Specification for Liquefied Petroleum (LP) Gases (incorporated 
by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter); anhydrous 
dimethylamine; anhydrous methylamine; anhydrous trimethylamine; methyl 
chloride; methylacetylene-propadiene stabilized; or 
dichlorodifluoromethane, difluoroethane, difluorochloroethane, 
chlorodifluoromethane, chlorotetrafluoroethane, trifluorochloroethylene, 
or mixture thereof, or mixtures of one or more with 
trichlorofluoromethane; and commercially free from corroding components 
and protected externally by a suitable corrosion-resistant coating

[[Page 1053]]

(such as galvanizing or painting) may be requalified by volumetric 
expansion testing every 12 years instead of every five years. As an 
alternative, the cylinder may be subjected to a proof pressure test at 
least two times the marked service pressure, but this latter type of 
test must be repeated every seven years after expiration of the first 
12-year period. When subjected to a proof pressure test, the cylinder 
must be carefully examined under test pressure and removed from service 
if a leak or defect is found.
    (f) Poisonous materials. A cylinder conforming to specification DOT 
3A, 3AA, 3B, 4BA, or 4BW having a service pressure of 300 psig or less 
and used exclusively for methyl bromide, liquid; mixtures of methyl 
bromide and ethylene dibromide, liquid; mixtures of methyl bromide and 
chlorpicrin, liquid; mixtures of methyl bromide and petroleum solvents, 
liquid; or methyl bromide and nonflammable, nonliquefied compressed gas 
mixtures, liquid; commercially free of corroding components, and 
protected externally by a suitable corrosion resistant coating (such as 
galvanizing or painting) and internally by a suitable corrosion 
resistant lining (such as galvanizing) may be tested every 10 years 
instead of every five years, provided a visual internal and external 
examination of the cylinder is conducted every five years in accordance 
with CGA Pamphlet C-6 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this 
subchapter). The cylinder must be examined at each filling, and rejected 
if a dent, corroded area, leak or other condition indicates possible 
weakness.
    (g) Visual inspections. A cylinder conforming to a specification 
listed in the table in this paragraph and used exclusively in the 
service indicated may, instead of a periodic hydrostatic test, be given 
a complete external visual inspection at the time periodic 
requalification becomes due. External visual inspection must be in 
accordance with CGA Pamphlet C-6 or C-6.3, as applicable (incorporated 
by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter). When this inspection 
is used instead of hydrostatic pressure testing, subsequent inspections 
are required at five-year intervals after the first inspection. After 
September 30, 2003, inspections must be made only by persons holding a 
current RIN and the results recorded and maintained in accordance with 
Sec. 180.215. Records must include: date of inspection (month and year); 
DOT specification number; cylinder identification (registered symbol and 
serial number, date of manufacture, and owner); type of cylinder 
protective coating (including statement as to need of refinishing or 
recoating); conditions checked (e.g., leakage, corrosion, gouges, dents 
or digs in shell or heads, broken or damaged footring or protective ring 
or fire damage); disposition of cylinder (returned to service, returned 
to cylinder manufacturer for repairs or condemned). A cylinder passing 
requalification by the external visual inspection must be marked in 
accordance with Sec. 180.213. Specification cylinders must be in 
exclusive service as shown in the following table:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
       Cylinders conforming to--              Used exclusively for--
------------------------------------------------------------------------
DOT 3A, DOT 3AA, DOT 3A480X, DOT 4AA480  Anhydrous ammonia of at least
                                          99.95% purity.
DOT 3A, DOT 3AA, DOT 3A480X, DOT 3B,     Butadiene, inhibited, that is
 DOT 4B, DOT 4BA, DOT 4BW.                commercially free from
                                          corroding components.
DOT 3A, DOT 3A480X, DOT 3AA, DOT 3B,     Cyclopropane that is
 DOT 4AA480, DOT 4B, DOT 4BA, DOT 4BW.    commercially free from
                                          corroding components.
DOT 3A, DOT 3AA, DOT 3A480X, DOT 4B,     Fluorinated hydrocarbons and
 DOT 4BA, DOT 4BW, DOT 4E.                mixtures thereof that are
                                          commercially free from
                                          corroding components.
DOT 3A, DOT 3AA, DOT 3A480X, DOT 3B,     Liquefied hydrocarbon gas that
 DOT 4B, DOT 4BA, DOT 4BW, DOT 4E.        is commercially free from
                                          corroding components.
DOT 3A, DOT 3AA, DOT 3A480X, DOT 3B,     Liquefied petroleum gas that
 DOT 4B, DOT 4BA, DOT 4BW, DOT 4E.        meets the requirements in
                                          Table I of ASTM D 1835,
                                          Standard Specification for
                                          Liquefied Petroleum (LP) Gases
                                          (incorporated by reference;
                                          see Sec.  171.7 of this
                                          subchapter).
DOT 3A, DOT 3AA, DOT 3B, DOT 4B, DOT     Methylacetylene-propadiene,
 4BA, DOT 4BW, DOT 4E.                    stabilized, that is
                                          commercially free from
                                          corroding components.
DOT 3A, DOT 3AA, DOT 3B, DOT 4B, DOT     Anhydrous mono,
 4BA, DOT 4BW.                            di,trimethylamines that are
                                          commercially free from
                                          corroding components.
DOT 4B240, DOT 4BW240..................  Ethyleneimine, inhibited.
------------------------------------------------------------------------


[[Page 1054]]

    (h) Cylinders containing anhydrous ammonia. A cylinder conforming to 
specification DOT 3A, 3A480X, or 4AA480 used exclusively for anhydrous 
ammonia, commercially free from corroding components, and protected 
externally by a suitable corrosion-resistant coating (such as paint) may 
be requalified every 10 years instead of every five years.
    (i) Requalification of DOT-8 series cylinders. (1) Each owner of a 
DOT-8 series cylinder used to transport acetylene must have the cylinder 
shell and the porous filler requalified in accordance with CGA Pamphlet 
C-13 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter). 
Requalification must be performed in accordance with the following 
schedule:

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                         Shell (visual inspection)             Porous filler requalification
                                              requalification            ---------------------------------------
  Date of cylinder manufacture   ----------------------------------------
                                        Initial           Subsequent            Initial           Subsequent
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Before January 1, 1991..........  Before January 1,   10 years..........  Before January 1,   Not required.
                                   2001.                                   2011.
On or after January 1, 1991.....  10 years \1\......  10 years..........  3 to 20 years \2\.  Not required.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Years from date of cylinder manufacture.
\2\ For a cylinder manufactured on or after January 1, 1991, requalification of the porous filler must be
  performed no sooner than 3 years, and no later than 20 years, from the date of manufacture.

    (2) Unless requalified and marked in accordance with CGA Pamphlet C-
13 (incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter) before 
October 1, 1994, an acetylene cylinder must be requalified by a person 
who holds a current RIN.
    (3) If a cylinder valve is replaced, a cylinder valve of the same 
weight must be used or the tare weight of the cylinder must be adjusted 
to compensate for valve weight differential.
    (4) The person performing a visual inspection or requalification 
must record the results as specified in Sec. 180.215.
    (5) The person performing a visual inspection or requalification 
must mark the cylinder as specified in Sec. 180.213.
    (j) Cylinder used as a fire extinguisher. Only a DOT specification 
cylinder used as a fire extinguisher and meeting Special Provision 18 in 
Sec. 172.102(c)(1) of this subchapter may be requalified in accordance 
with this paragraph (j).
    (1) A DOT 4B, 4BA, 4B240ET or 4BW cylinder may be tested as follows:
    (i) For a cylinder with a water capacity of 5.44 kg (12 lb) or less, 
by volumetric expansion test using the water jacket method or by proof 
pressure test. A requalification must be performed by the end of 12 
years after the original test date and at 12-year intervals thereafter.
    (ii) For a cylinder having a water capacity over 5.44 kg (12 lb)--
    (A) By proof pressure test. A requalification must be performed by 
the end of 12 years after the original test date and at 7-year 
intervals; or
    (B) By volumetric expansion test using the water jacket method. A 
requalification must be performed 12 years after the original test date 
and at 12-year intervals thereafter.
    (2) A DOT 3A, 3AA, or 3AL cylinder must be requalified by volumetric 
expansion test using the water jacket method. A requalification must be 
performed 12 years after the original test date and at 12-year intervals 
thereafter.
    (k) Requalification of foreign cylinders filled for export. A 
cylinder manufactured outside the United States, other than as provided 
in Sec. 171.12a of this subchapter, that has not been manufactured, 
inspected, tested and marked in accordance with part 178 of this 
subchapter may be filled with compressed gas in the United States, and 
shipped solely for export if it meets the following requirements, in 
addition to other requirements of this subchapter:
    (1) It has been inspected, tested and marked (with only the month 
and year of test) in conformance with the procedures and requirements of 
this subpart or the Associate Administrator has authorized the filling 
company to fill foreign cylinders under an alternative method of 
qualification; and
    (2) It is offered for transportation in conformance with the 
requirements of Sec. 173.301(l) of this subchapter.

[[Page 1055]]



Sec. 180.211  Repair, rebuilding and reheat treatment of DOT-4 series specification cylinders.

    (a) General requirements for repair and rebuilding. Any repair or 
rebuilding of a DOT 4-series cylinder must be performed by a person 
holding an approval as specified in Sec. 107.805 of this chapter. A 
person performing a rebuild function is considered a manufacturer 
subject to the requirements of Sec. 178.2(a)(2) and subpart C of part 
178 of this subchapter. The person performing a repair, rebuild, or 
reheat treatment must record the test results as specified in 
Sec. 180.215. Each cylinder that is successfully repaired or rebuilt 
must be marked in accordance with Sec. 180.213.
    (b) General repair requirements. Each repair of a DOT 4-series 
cylinder must be made in accordance with the following conditions:
    (1) The repair and the inspection of the work performed must be made 
in accordance with the requirements of the cylinder specification.
    (2) The person performing the repair must use the procedure, 
equipment, and filler metal or brazing material as authorized by the 
approval issued under Sec. 107.805 of this chapter.
    (3) Welding and brazing must be performed on an area free from 
contaminants.
    (4) A weld defect, such as porosity in a pressure retaining seam, 
must be completely removed before re-welding. Puddling may be used to 
remove a weld defect only by the tungsten inert gas shielded arc 
process.
    (5) After removal of a non-pressure attachment and before its 
replacement, the cylinder must be given a visual inspection in 
accordance with Sec. 180.205(f).
    (6) Reheat treatment of DOT 4B, 4BA or 4BW specification cylinders 
after replacement of non-pressure attachments is not required when the 
total weld material does not exceed 20.3 cm (8 inches). Individual welds 
must be at least 7.6 cm (3 inches) apart.
    (7) After repair of a DOT 4B, 4BA or 4BW cylinder, the weld area 
must be leak tested at the service pressure of the cylinder.
    (8) Repair of weld defects must be free of cracks.
    (9) When a non-pressure attachment with the original cylinder 
specification markings is replaced, all markings must be transferred to 
the attachment on the repaired cylinder.
    (10) Walls, heads or bottoms of cylinders with defects or leaks in 
base metal may not be repaired, but may be replaced as provided for in 
paragraph (d) of this section.
    (c) Additional repair requirements for 4L cylinders. (1) Repairs to 
a DOT 4L cylinder must be performed in accordance with paragraphs (a) 
and (b) of this section and are limited to the following:
    (i) The removal of either end of the insulation jacket to permit 
access to the cylinder, piping system, or neck tube.
    (ii) The replacement of the neck tube. At least a 13 mm (0.51 inch) 
piece of the original neck tube must be protruding above the cylinder's 
top end. The original weld attaching the neck tube to the cylinder must 
be sound and the replacement neck tube must be welded to this remaining 
piece of the original neck tube.
    (iii) The replacement of material such as, but not limited to, the 
insulating material and the piping system within the insulation space is 
authorized. The replacement material must be equivalent to that used at 
the time of original manufacture.
    (iv) Other welding procedures that are permitted by CGA Pamphlet C-3 
(incorporated by reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter), and not 
excluded by the definition of ``rebuild,'' are authorized.
    (2) After repair, the cylinder must be--
    (i) Pressure tested in accordance with the specifications under 
which the cylinder was originally manufactured;
    (ii) Leak tested before and after assembly of the insulation jacket 
using a mass spectrometer detection system; and
    (iii) Tested for heat conductivity requirements.
    (d) General rebuilding requirements. (1) The rebuilding of a DOT 4-
series cylinder must be made in accordance with the following 
requirements:
    (i) The person rebuilding the cylinder must use the procedures and 
equipment as authorized by the approval issued under Sec. 107.805 of 
this chapter.

[[Page 1056]]

    (ii) After removal of a non-pressure component and before 
replacement of any non-pressure component, the cylinder must be visually 
inspected in accordance with CGA Pamphlet C-6 (incorporated by 
reference; see Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter).
    (iii) The rebuilder may rebuild a DOT 4B, 4BA or 4BW cylinder having 
a water capacity of 9.07 kg (20 lb) or greater by replacing a head of 
the cylinder using a circumferential joint. When this weld joint is 
located at other than an original welded joint, a notation of this 
modification must be shown on the Manufacturer's Report of Rebuilding in 
Sec. 180.215(d)(2). The weld joint must be on the cylindrical section of 
the cylinder.
    (iv) Any welding and the inspection of the rebuilt cylinder must be 
in accordance with the requirements of the applicable cylinder 
specification and the following requirements:
    (A) Rebuilding of any cylinder involving a joint subject to internal 
pressure may only be performed by fusion welding;
    (B) Welding must be performed on an area free from contaminants; and
    (C) A weld defect, such as porosity in a pressure retaining seam, 
must be completely removed before re-welding. Puddling may be used to 
remove a weld defect only by using the tungsten inert gas shielded arc 
process.
    (2) Any rebuilt cylinder must be--
    (i) Heat treated in accordance with paragraph (f) of this section;
    (ii) Subjected to a volumetric expansion test on each cylinder. The 
results of the tests must conform to the applicable cylinder 
specification;
    (iii) Inspected and have test data reviewed to determine conformance 
with the applicable cylinder specification; and
    (iv) Made of material conforming to the specification. Determination 
of conformance shall include chemical analysis, verification, inspection 
and tensile testing of the replaced part. Tensile tests must be 
performed on the replaced part after heat treatment by lots defined in 
the applicable specification.
    (3) For each rebuilt cylinder, an inspector's report must be 
prepared to include the information listed in Sec. 180.215(d).
    (4) Rebuilding a cylinder with brazed seams is prohibited.
    (5) When an end with the original cylinder specification markings is 
replaced, all markings must be transferred to the rebuilt cylinder.
    (e) Additional rebuilding requirements for DOT 4L cylinders. (1) The 
rebuilding of a DOT 4L cylinder must be performed in accordance with 
paragraph (d) of this section. Rebuilding of a DOT 4L cylinder is:
    (i) Substituting or adding material in the insulation space not 
identical to that used in the original manufacture of that cylinder;
    (ii) Making a weld repair not to exceed 150 mm (5.9 inches) in 
length on the longitudinal seam of the cylinder or 300 mm (11.8 inches) 
in length on a circumferential weld joint of the cylinder; or
    (iii) Replacing the outer jacket.
    (2) Reheat treatment of cylinders is prohibited.
    (3) After rebuilding, each inner containment vessel must be proof 
pressure tested at 2 times its service pressure. Each completed assembly 
must be leak-tested using a mass spectrometer detection system.
    (f) Reheat treatment. (1) Prior to reheat treatment, each cylinder 
must be given a visual inspection, internally and externally, in 
accordance with Sec. 180.205(f).
    (2) Cylinders must be segregated in lots for reheat treatment. The 
reheat treatment and visual inspection must be performed in accordance 
with the specification for the cylinders except as provided in paragraph 
(f)(4) of this section.
    (3) After reheat treatment, each cylinder in the lot must be 
subjected to a volumetric expansion test and meet the acceptance 
criteria in the applicable specification or be scrapped.
    (4) After all welding and heat treatment, a test of the new weld 
must be performed as required by the original specification. The test 
results must be recorded in accordance with Sec. 180.215.



Sec. 180.213  Requalification markings.

    (a) General. Each cylinder requalified in accordance with this 
subpart with

[[Page 1057]]

acceptable results must be marked as specified in this section. Required 
specification markings may not be altered or removed.
    (b) Placement of markings. Each cylinder must be plainly and 
permanently marked on the metal of the cylinder as permitted by the 
applicable specification. Unless authorized by the cylinder 
specification, marking on the cylinder sidewall is prohibited.
    (1) Requalification and required specification markings must be 
legible so as to be readily visible at all times. Illegible 
specification markings may be remarked on the cylinder as provided by 
the original specification. Requalification markings may be placed on 
any portion of the upper end of the cylinder excluding the sidewall, as 
provided in this section. Requalification and required specification 
markings that are illegible may be reproduced on a metal plate and 
attached as provided by the original specification.
    (2) Previous requalification markings may not be obliterated, except 
that, when the space originally provided for requalification dates 
becomes filled, additional dates may be added as follows:
    (i) All preceding requalification dates may be removed by peening 
provided that--
    (A) Permission is obtained from the cylinder owner;
    (B) The minimum wall thickness is maintained in accordance with 
manufacturing specifications for the cylinder; and
    (C) The original manufacturing test date is not removed.
    (ii) When the cylinder is fitted with a footring, additional dates 
may be marked on the external surface of the footring.
    (c) Requalification marking method. The depth of requalification 
markings may not be greater than specified in the applicable 
specification. The markings must be made by stamping, engraving, 
scribing or other method that produces a legible, durable mark.
    (1) A cylinder used as a fire extinguisher (Sec. 180.209(j)) may be 
marked by using a pressure sensitive label.
    (2) For a DOT 3HT cylinder, the test date and RIN must be applied by 
low-stress steel stamps to a depth no greater than that prescribed at 
the time of manufacture. Stamping on the sidewall is not authorized.
    (d) Requalification markings. Each cylinder that has successfully 
passed requalification must be marked with the RIN set in a square 
pattern, between the month and year of the requalification date. The 
first character of the RIN must appear in the upper left corner of the 
square pattern; the second in the upper right; the third in the lower 
right, and the fourth in the lower left. Example: A cylinder requalified 
in September 1998, and approved by a person who has been issued RIN 
``A123'', would be marked plainly and permanently into the metal of the 
cylinder in accordance with location requirements of the cylinder 
specification or on a metal plate permanently secured to the cylinder in 
accordance with paragraph (b) of this section. An example of the 
markings prescribed in this paragraph (d) is as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR08AU02.018

Where:

``9'' is the month of requalification,
``A123'' is the RIN,
``98'' is the year of requalification, and
``X'' represents the symbols described in paragraphs (f)(2) through 
    (f)(7) of this section.

    (1) Upon a written request, variation from the marking requirement 
may be approved by the Associate Administrator.
    (2) Exception. A cylinder subject to the requirements of 
Sec. 173.301(l) of this subchapter may not be marked with a RIN.
    (e) Size of markings. The size of the markings must be at least 6.35 
mm (\1/4\ in.) high, except RIN characters must be at least 3.18 mm (\1/
8\ in.) high.
    (f) Marking illustrations. Examples of required requalification 
markings for DOT specification and exemption cylinders are illustrated 
as follows:
    (1) For designation of the 5-year volumetric expansion test, 10-year 
volumetric expansion test for cylinders conforming to Sec. 180.209(f) 
and (h), or 12-year volumetric expansion test for fire

[[Page 1058]]

extinguishers conforming to Sec. 173.309(b) of this subchapter and 
cylinders conforming to Sec. 180.209(e) and Sec. 180.209(g), the marking 
is as illustrated in paragraph (d) of this section.
    (2) For designation of the 10-year volumetric expansion test for 
cylinders conforming to Sec. 180.209(b), the marking is as illustrated 
in paragraph (d) of this section, except that the ``X'' is replaced with 
a five-point star.
    (3) For designation of special filling limits up to 10% in excess of 
the marked service pressure for cylinders conforming to Sec. 173.302a(b) 
of this subchapter, the marking is as illustrated in paragraph (d) of 
this section, except that the ``X'' is replaced with a plus sign ``+''.
    (4) For designation of the proof pressure test, the marking is as 
illustrated in paragraph (d) of this section, except that the ``X'' is 
replaced with the letter ``S''.
    (5) For designation of the 5-year external visual inspection for 
cylinders conforming to Sec. 180.209(g), the marking is as illustrated 
in paragraph (d) of this section, except that the ``X'' is replaced with 
the letter ``E''.
    (6) For designation of DOT 8 series cylinder shell requalification 
only, the marking is as illustrated in paragraph (d) of this section, 
except that the ``X'' is replaced with the letter ``S''.
    (7) For designation of DOT 8 series cylinder shell and porous filler 
requalification, the marking is as illustrated in paragraph (d) of this 
section, except that the ``X'' is replaced with the letters ``FS''.



Sec. 180.215  Reporting and record retention requirements.

    (a) Facility records. A person who requalifies, repairs or rebuilds 
cylinders must maintain the following records where the requalification 
is performed:
    (1) Current RIN issuance letter;
    (2) If the RIN has expired and renewal is pending, a copy of the 
renewal request;
    (3) Copies of notifications to Associate Administrator required 
under Sec. 107.805 of this chapter;
    (4) Current copies of those portions of this subchapter applicable 
to its cylinder requalification and marking activities at that location;
    (5) Current copies of all exemptions governing exemption cylinders 
requalified or marked by the requalifier at that location; and
    (6) The information contained in each applicable CGA or ASTM 
standard incorporated by reference in Sec. 171.7 of this subchapter 
applicable to the requalifier's activities. This information must be the 
same as contained in the edition incorporated by reference in Sec. 171.7 
of this subchapter.
    (b) Requalification records. Daily records of visual inspection, 
pressure test, and ultrasonic examination if permitted under an 
exemption, as applicable, must be maintained by the person who performs 
the requalification until either the expiration of the requalification 
period or until the cylinder is again requalified, whichever occurs 
first. A single date may be used for each test sheet, provided each test 
on the sheet was conducted on that date. Ditto marks or a solid vertical 
line may be used to indicate repetition of the preceding entry for the 
following entries only: date; actual dimensions; manufacturer's name or 
symbol, if present; owner's name or symbol, if present; and test 
operator. Blank spaces may not be used to indicate repetition of a prior 
entry. The records must include the following information:
    (1) Pressure test records. For each test to demonstrate calibration, 
the date; serial number of the calibrated cylinder; calibration test 
pressure; total, elastic and permanent expansions; and legible 
identification of test operator. The test operator must be able to 
demonstrate that the results of the daily calibration verification 
correspond to the hydrostatic tests performed on that day. The daily 
verification of calibration(s) may be recorded on the same sheets as, 
and with, test records for that date.
    (2) Pressure test and visual inspection records. The date of 
requalification; serial number; DOT specification or exemption number; 
marked pressure; actual dimensions; manufacturer's name or symbol; 
owner's name or symbol, if present; result of visual inspection; actual 
test pressure; total, elastic and

[[Page 1059]]

permanent expansions; percent permanent expansion; disposition, with 
reason for any repeated test, rejection or condemnation; and legible 
identification of test operator. For each cylinder marked pursuant to 
Sec. 173.302a(b)(5) of this subchapter, the test sheet must indicate the 
method by which any average or maximum wall stress was computed. Records 
must be kept for all completed, as well as unsuccessful tests. The entry 
for a second test after a failure to hold test pressure must indicate 
the date of the earlier test.
    (3) Wall stress. Calculations of average and maximum wall stress 
pursuant to Sec. 173.302a(b)(3) of this subchapter, if performed.
    (4) Calibration certificates. The most recent certificate of 
calibration must be maintained for each calibrated cylinder.
    (c) Repair, rebuilding or reheat treatment records. (1) Records 
covering welding or brazing repairs, rebuilding or reheat treating shall 
be retained for a minimum of fifteen years by the approved facility.
    (2) A record of rebuilding, in accordance with Sec. 180.211(d), must 
be completed for each cylinder rebuilt. The record must be clear, 
legible, and contain the following information:
    (i) Name and address of test facility, date of test report, and name 
of original manufacturer;
    (ii) Marks stamped on cylinder to include specification number, 
service pressure, serial number, symbol of manufacturer, inspector's 
mark, and other marks, if any;
    (iii) Cylinder outside diameter and length in inches;
    (iv) Rebuild process (welded, brazed, type seams, etc.);
    (v) Description of assembly and any attachments replaced (e.g., 
neckrings, footrings);
    (vi) Chemical analysis of material for the cylinder, including seat 
and Code No., type of analysis (ladle, check), chemical components 
(Carbon (C), Phosphorous (P), Sulfur (S), Silicon (Si), Manganese (Mn), 
Nickel (Ni), Chromium (Cr), Molybdenum (Mo), Copper (Cu), Aluminum (Al), 
Zinc (Zn)), material manufacturer, name of person performing the 
analysis, results of physical tests of material for cylinder (yield 
strength (psi), tensile strength (psi), elongation percentage (inches), 
reduction in area percentage, weld bend, tensile bend, name of 
inspector);
    (vii) Results of proof pressure test on cylinder, including test 
method, test pressure, total expansion, permanent expansion, elastic 
expansion, percent permanent expansion (permanent expansion may not 
exceed ten percent (10%) of total expansion), and volumetric capacity 
(volumetric capacity of a rebuilt cylinder must be within  
3% of the calculated capacity);
    (viii) Each report must include the following certification 
statement: ``I certify that this rebuilt cylinder is accurately 
represented by the data above and conforms to all of the requirements in 
Subchapter C of Chapter I of Title 49 of the Code of Federal 
Regulations.''. The certification must be signed by the rebuild 
technician and principal, officer, or partner of the rebuild facility.



            Subpart D--Qualification and Maintenance of IBCs

    Source: Amdt. 180-5, 59 FR 38079, July 26, 1994, unless otherwise 
noted.



Sec. 180.350  Applicability.

    This subpart prescribes requirements, in addition to those contained 
in parts 107, 171, 172, 173, and 178 of this chapter, applicable to any 
person responsible for the continuing qualification, maintenance, or 
periodic retesting of an IBC.

[Amdt. 180-5, 59 FR 38079, July 26, 1994, as amended at 66 FR 45391, 
Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 180.351  Qualification of IBCs.

    (a) General. Each IBC used for the transportation of hazardous 
materials must be an authorized packaging.
    (b) IBC specifications. To qualify as an authorized packaging, each 
IBC must conform to this subpart, the applicable requirements specified 
in part 173 of this subchapter, and the applicable requirements of 
subparts N and O of part 178 of this subchapter.

[Amdt. 180-5, 59 FR 38079, July 26, 1994, as amended at 66 FR 45391, 
Aug. 28, 2001]

[[Page 1060]]



Sec. 180.352  Requirements for retest and inspection of IBCs.

    (a) General. Each IBC constructed in accordance with a UN standard 
for which a test or inspection specified in paragraphs (b)(1), (b)(2) 
and (b)(3) of this section is required may not be filled and offered for 
transportation or transported until the test or inspection has been 
successfully completed. This paragraph does not apply to any IBC filled 
prior to the test or inspection due date. The requirements in this 
section do not apply to DOT 56 and 57 portable tanks.
    (b) Test and inspections for metal, rigid plastic, and composite 
IBCs. Each IBC is subject to the following test and inspections:
    (1) Each IBC intended to contain solids that are loaded or 
discharged under pressure or intended to contain liquids must be tested 
in accordance with the leakproofness test prescribed in Sec. 178.813 of 
this subchapter every 2.5 years, starting from the date of manufacture 
or the date of a repair conforming to paragraph (d)(1) of this section.
    (2) An external visual inspection must be conducted initially after 
production and every 2.5 years starting from the date of manufacture or 
the date of a repair conforming to paragraph (d)(1) of this section to 
ensure that:
    (i) The IBC is marked in accordance with requirements in 
Sec. 178.703 of this subchapter. Missing or damaged markings, or 
markings difficult to read must be restored or returned to original 
condition.
    (ii) Service equipment is fully functional and free from damage 
which may cause failure. Missing, broken, or damaged parts must be 
repaired or replaced.
    (iii) The IBC is capable of withstanding the applicable design 
qualification tests. The IBC must be externally inspected for cracks, 
warpage, corrosion or any other damage which might render the IBC unsafe 
for transportation. An IBC found with such defects must be removed from 
service or repaired in accordance with paragraph (d) of this section. 
The inner receptacle of a composite IBC must be removed from the outer 
IBC body for inspection unless the inner receptacle is bonded to the 
outer body or unless the outer body is constructed in such a way (e.g., 
a welded or riveted cage) that removal of the inner receptacle is not 
possible without impairing the integrity of the outer body. Defective 
inner receptacles must be replaced in accordance with paragraph (d) of 
this section or the entire IBC must be removed from service. For metal 
IBCs, thermal insulation must be removed to the extent necessary for 
proper examination of the IBC body.
    (3) Each metal, rigid plastic and composite IBC must be internally 
inspected at least every five years to ensure that the IBC is free from 
damage and to ensure that the IBC is capable of withstanding the 
applicable design qualification tests.
    (i) The IBC must be internally inspected for cracks, warpage, and 
corrosion or any other defect that might render the IBC unsafe for 
transportation. An IBC found with such defects must be removed from 
hazardous materials service until restored to the original design type 
of the IBC.
    (ii) Metal IBCs must be inspected to ensure the minimum wall 
thickness requirements in Sec. 178.705(c)(1)(iv) of this subchapter are 
met. Metal IBCs not conforming to minimum wall thickness requirements 
must be removed from hazardous materials service.
    (c) Visual inspection for flexible, fiberboard, or wooden IBCs. Each 
IBC must be visually inspected prior to first use and permitted reuse, 
by the person who places hazardous materials in the IBC, to ensure that:
    (1) The IBC is marked in accordance with requirements in 
Sec. 178.703 of this subchapter. Additional marking allowed for each 
design type may be present. Required markings that are missing, damaged 
or difficult to read must be restored or returned to original condition.
    (2) Proper construction and design specifications have been met.
    (i) Each flexible IBC must be inspected to ensure that:
    (A) Lifting straps if used, are securely fastened to the IBC in 
accordance with the design type.
    (B) Seams are free from defects in stitching, heat sealing or gluing 
which

[[Page 1061]]

would render the IBC unsafe for transportation of hazardous materials. 
All stitched seam-ends must be secure.
    (C) Fabric used to construct the IBC is free from cuts, tears and 
punctures. Additionally, fabric must be free from scoring which may 
render the IBC unsafe for transport.
    (ii) Each fiberboard IBC must be inspected to ensure that:
    (A) Fluting or corrugated fiberboard is firmly glued to facings.
    (B) Seams are creased and free from scoring, cuts, and scratches.
    (C) Joints are appropriately overlapped and glued, stitched, taped 
or stapled as prescribed by the design. Where staples are used, the 
joints must be inspected for protruding staple-ends which could puncture 
or abrade the inner liner. All such ends must be protected before the 
IBC is authorized for hazardous materials service.
    (iii) Each wooden IBC must be inspected to ensure that:
    (A) End joints are secured in the manner prescribed by the design.
    (B) IBC walls are free from defects in wood. Inner protrusions which 
could puncture or abrade the liner must be covered.
    (d) Requirements applicable to repair of IBCs. (1) Except for 
flexible and fiberboard IBCs and the bodies of rigid plastic and 
composite IBCs, damaged IBCs may be repaired and the inner receptacles 
of composite packagings may be replaced and returned to service 
provided:
    (i) The repaired IBC conforms to the original design type and is 
capable of withstanding the applicable design qualification tests;
    (ii) An IBC intended to contain liquids or solids that are loaded or 
discharged under pressure is subjected to a leakproofness test as 
specified in Sec. 178.813 of this subchapter and is marked with the date 
of the test; and
    (iii) The IBC is subjected to the internal and external inspection 
requirements as specified in paragraph (b) of this section.
    (2) Except for flexible and fiberboard IBCs, the structural 
equipment of an IBC may be repaired and returned to service provided:
    (i) The repaired IBC conforms to the original design type and is 
capable of withstanding the applicable design qualification tests; and
    (ii) The IBC is subjected to the internal and external inspection 
requirements as specified in paragraph (b) of this section.
    (3) Service equipment may be replaced provided:
    (i) The repaired IBC conforms to the original design type and is 
capable of withstanding the applicable design qualification tests;
    (ii) The IBC is subjected to the external visual inspection 
requirements as specified in paragraph (b) of this section; and
    (iii) The proper functioning and leak tightness of the service 
equipment, if applicable, is verified.
    (e) Retest date. The date of the most recent periodic retest must be 
marked as provided in Sec. 178.703(b) of this subchapter.
    (f) Record retention. The IBC owner or lessee shall keep records of 
periodic retests and initial and periodic inspections. Records must 
include design types and packaging specifications, test and inspection 
dates, name and address of test and inspection facilities, names or name 
of any persons conducting tests or inspections, and test or inspection 
specifics and results. Records must be kept for each packaging at each 
location where periodic tests are conducted, until such tests are 
successfully performed again or for at least 2.5 years from the date of 
the last test. These records must be made available for inspection by a 
representative of the Department on request.

[Amdt. 180-5, 59 FR 38079, July 26, 1994, as amended at 64 FR 10782, 
Mar. 5, 1999; 65 FR 58632, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45186, 45391, Aug. 28, 
2001]



         Subpart E--Qualification and Maintenance of Cargo Tanks



Sec. 180.401  Applicability.

    This subpart prescribes requirements, in addition to those contained 
in parts 107, 171, 172, 173 and 178 of this subchapter, applicable to 
any person

[[Page 1062]]

responsible for the continuing qualification, maintenance or periodic 
testing of a cargo tank.

[Amdt. 180-2, 54 FR 25032, June 12, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 37065, 
Sept. 7, 1990]



Sec. 180.403  Definitions.

    In addition to the definitions contained in Secs. 171.8, 178.320(a) 
and 178.345-1 of this subchapter, the following definitions apply to 
this subpart:
    Corrosive to the tank/valve means a lading meets the criteria for 
corrosivity specified in Sec. 173.136 of this subchapter, for the 
material of construction of the tank or valve; or the lading has been 
shown through experience to be corrosive to the tank or valve.
    Delivery hose assembly means a liquid delivery hose and its attached 
couplings.
    Modification means any change to the original design and 
construction of a cargo tank or a cargo tank motor vehicle that affects 
its structural integrity or lading retention capability including 
changes to equipment certified as part of an emergency discharge control 
system required by Sec. 173.315(n)(2) of this subchapter. Any 
modification that involves welding on the cargo tank wall must also meet 
all requirements for ``Repair'' as defined in this section. Excluded 
from this category are the following:
    (1) A change to motor vehicle equipment such as lights, truck or 
tractor power train components, steering and brake systems, and 
suspension parts, and changes to appurtenances, such as fender 
attachments, lighting brackets, ladder brackets; and
    (2) Replacement of components such as valves, vents, and fittings 
with a component of a similar design and of the same size.
    Owner means the person who owns a cargo tank motor vehicle used for 
the transportation of hazardous materials, or that person's authorized 
agent.
    Piping system means any component of a cargo tank delivery system, 
other than a delivery hose assembly, that contains product during 
loading or unloading.
    Rebarrelling means replacing more than 50 percent of the combined 
shell and head material of a cargo tank.
    Repair means any welding on a cargo tank wall done to return a cargo 
tank or a cargo tank motor vehicle to its original design and 
construction specification, or to a condition prescribed for a later 
equivalent specification in effect at the time of the repair. Excluded 
from this category are the following:
    (1) A change to motor vehicle equipment such as lights, truck or 
tractor power train components, steering and brake systems, and 
suspension parts, and changes to appurtenances, such as fender 
attachments, lighting brackets, ladder brackets; and
    (2) Replacement of components such as valves, vents, and fittings 
with a component of a similar design and of the same size.
    (3) Replacement of an appurtenance by welding to a mounting pad.
    Replacement of a barrel means to replace the existing tank on a 
motor vehicle chassis with an unused (new) tank. For the definition of 
tank, see Sec. 178.345-1(c), Sec. 178.337-1, or Sec. 178.338-1 of this 
subchapter, as applicable.
    Stretching means any change in length, width or diameter of the 
cargo tank, or any change to a cargo tank motor vehicle's undercarriage 
that may affect the cargo tank's structural integrity.

[Amdt. 180-2, 54 FR 25032, June 12, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 37065, 
Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. 180-3, 57 FR 45466, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 180-7, 59 
FR 55177, Nov. 3, 1994; 60 FR 17402, Apr. 5, 1995; Amdt. 180-10, 61 FR 
51342, Oct. 1, 1996; 63 FR 52850, Oct. 1, 1998; 64 FR 28050, May 24, 
1999]



Sec. 180.405  Qualification of cargo tanks.

    (a) General. Unless otherwise provided in this subpart, each cargo 
tank used for the transportation of hazardous material must be an 
authorized packaging.
    (b) Cargo tank specifications. To qualify as an authorized 
packaging, each cargo tank must conform to this subpart, the applicable 
requirements specified in part 173 of this subchapter for the specific 
lading and, where a DOT specification cargo tank is required, an 
applicable specification in effect on the date the initial construction 
began: MC 300, MC 301, MC 302, MC 303, MC 304, MC 305, MC 306, MC 307, 
MC 310, MC 311, MC

[[Page 1063]]

312, MC 330, MC 331, MC 338, DOT 406, DOT 407, or DOT 412 (Sec. 178.337, 
Sec. 178.338, Sec. 178.345, Sec. 178.346, Sec. 178.347, Sec. 178.348 of 
this subchapter). However, no cargo tank may be marked or certified 
after August 31, 1995, to the applicable MC 306, MC 307, MC 312, MC 331 
or MC 338 specification in effect on December 30, 1990.
    (c) Cargo tank specifications no longer authorized for construction. 
(1) A cargo tank made to a specification listed in column 1 of table 1 
or table 2 of this paragraph (c)(1) may be used when authorized in this 
part, provided--
    (i) The cargo tank initial construction began on or before the date 
listed in table 1, column 2, as follows:

                                 Table 1
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                  Column 1                             Column 2
------------------------------------------------------------------------
MC 300.....................................  Sept. 2, 1967
MC 301.....................................  June 12, 1961
MC 302, MC 303, MC 304, MC 305, MC 310, MC   Sept. 2, 1967
 311.
MC 330.....................................  May 15, 1967
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (ii) The cargo tank was marked or certified before the date listed 
in table 2, column 2, as follows:

                                 Table 2
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                  Column 1                             Column 2
------------------------------------------------------------------------
MC 306, MC 307, MC 312.....................  Sept. 1, 1995
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (2) A cargo tank of a specification listed in paragraph (c)(1) of 
this section may have its pressure relief devices and outlets modified 
as follows:
    (i) A Specification MC 300, MC 301, MC 302, MC 303, or MC 305 cargo 
tank, to conform with a Specification MC 306 or DOT 406 cargo tank (See 
Secs. 178.346-3 and 178.346-4 of this subchapter).
    (ii) A Specification MC 306 cargo tank to conform to a Specification 
DOT 406 cargo tank (See Secs. 178.346-3 and 178.346-4 of this 
subchapter).
    (iii) A Specification MC 304 cargo tank, to conform with a 
Specification MC 307 or DOT 407 cargo tank (See Secs. 178.347-4 and 
178.345-11 of this subchapter).
    (iv) A Specification MC 307 cargo tank, to conform with a 
Specification DOT 407 cargo tank (See Secs. 178.347-4 and 178.345-11 of 
this subchapter).
    (v) A Specification MC 310 or MC 311 cargo tank, to conform with a 
Specification MC 312 or DOT 412 cargo tank (See Secs. 178.348-4 and 
178.345-11 of this subchapter).
    (vi) A Specification MC 312 cargo tank, to conform with a 
Specification DOT 412 cargo tank (See Secs. 178.348-4 and 178.345-11 of 
this subchapter).
    (vii) A Specification MC 330 cargo tank, to conform with a 
Specification MC 331 cargo tank, except as specifically required by 
Sec. 173.315 of this subchapter (see Secs. 178.337-8 and 178.337-9 of 
this subchapter).
    (d) MC 338 cargo tank. The owner of a cargo tank that conforms to 
and was used under the terms of an exemption issued before October 1, 
1984, that authorizes the transportation of a cryogenic liquid shall 
remove the exemption number stenciled on the cargo tank and stamp the 
specification plate (or a plate placed adjacent to the specification 
plate) ``DOT MC 338'' followed by the exemption number, for example, 
``DOT MC 338-E * * * *''. (Asterisks to be replaced by the exemption 
number). The cargo tank must be remarked prior to the expiration date of 
the exemption. During the period the cargo tank is in service, the owner 
of a cargo tank that is remarked in this manner must retain at its 
principal place of business a copy of the last exemption in effect. No 
new construction of cargo tanks pursuant to such exemption is 
authorized.
    (1) The holding time must be determined, as required in 
Sec. 178.338-9 of this subchapter, on each cargo tank or on at least one 
cargo tank of each design. Any subsequent cargo tank manufactured to the 
same design type (see Sec. 178.320), if not individually tested, must 
have the optional test regimen performed during the first shipment (see 
Sec. 178.338-9 (b) and (c) of this subchapter).
    (2) The holding time determined by test for one authorized cryogenic 
liquid may be used as the basis for establishing the holding time for 
other authorized cryogenic liquids.
    (e) MC 331 cargo tanks. The owner of a MC 331 (Sec. 178.337 of this 
subchapter) cargo tank that conforms to and was used under an exemption 
issued before October 1, 1984, that authorizes the transportation of 
ethane, refrigerated

[[Page 1064]]

liquid; ethane-propane mixture, refrigerated liquid; or hydrogen 
chloride, refrigerated liquid shall remove the exemption number 
stenciled on the cargo tank and stamp the exemption number on the 
specification plate (or a plate placed adjacent to the specification 
plate), immediately after the DOT Specification, for example, ``DOT MC 
331-E * * * *''. (Asterisks to be replaced by the exemption number.) The 
cargo tank must be remarked prior to the expiration date of the 
exemption. During the period the cargo tank is in service, the owner of 
a cargo tank that is remarked in this manner must retain at the owner's 
principal place of business a copy of the last exemption in effect.
    (f) MC 306, MC 307, MC 312 cargo tanks. Either a Registered 
Inspector or a Design Certifying Engineer and the owner of a MC 306, MC 
307 or MC 312 cargo tank motor vehicle constructed in accordance with 
and used under an exemption issued before December 31, 1990, that 
authorizes a condition specified in this paragraph shall examine the 
cargo tank motor vehicle and its design to determine if it meets the 
requirements of the applicable MC 306, MC 307 or MC 312 specification in 
effect at the time of manufacture, except as specified herein.
    (1) A cargo tank motor vehicle constructed after August 1, 1981, or 
the date specified in the applicable exemption, in conformance with the 
following conditions that apply, may be remarked and certified in 
accordance with paragraphs (f) (5) and (6) of this section:
    (i) A vacuum-loaded cargo tank must have an ASME Code stamped 
specification plate marked with a minimum internal design pressure of 25 
psig, and be designed for a minimum external design pressure of 15 psig.
    (ii) An outlet equipped with a self-closing system which includes an 
external stop-valve must have the stop valve and associated piping 
protected within the vehicle's rear-end tank protection device, vehicle 
frame or an equally adequate accident damage protection device (See 
Sec. 178.345-8 of this subchapter.) The self-closing system (See 
Sec. 178.345-11 of this subchapter) must be equipped with a remotely 
actuated means of closure as follows:
    (A) For a cargo tank used in other than corrosive service, the 
remote means of closure must be activated for closure by manual or 
mechanical means and, in case of fire, by an automatic heat activated 
means.
    (B) For a cargo tank used in corrosive service, the remote means of 
closure may be actuated by manual or mechanical means only.
    (iii) A cargo tank having an unreinforced portion of the shell 
exceeding 60 inches must have the circumferential reinforcement located 
so that the thickness and tensile strength of shell material in 
combination with the frame and circumferential reinforcement produces a 
structural integrity at least equal to that prescribed in Sec. 178.345-3 
of this subchapter or the specification in effect at time of 
manufacture.
    (iv) A cargo tank having a projection from the tank shell or head 
that may contain lading in any tank position is authorized, provided 
such projection is as strong as the tank shell or head and is located 
within the motor vehicle's rear-end tank protection or other appropriate 
accident damage protection device.
    (v) A cargo tank may be constructed of nickel, titanium, or other 
ASME sheet or plate materials in accordance with an exemption.
    (2) A vacuum-loaded cargo tank constructed after August 1, 1981, or 
the date specified in the applicable exemption, in conformance with 
paragraph (f)(1) of this section, except that an outlet equipped with an 
external valve which is not part of a self-closing system:
    (i) Must be equipped with a self-closing system prior to September 
1, 1993.
    (ii) May be remarked and certified in accordance with paragraphs 
(f)(5) and (6) of this section after the cargo tank motor vehicle has 
been equipped with the self-closing system.
    (3) A vacuum-loaded cargo tank constructed prior to August 1, 1981, 
in conformance with paragraph (f)(1) of this section, except for 
paragraph (f)(1)(i), may be remarked and certified in accordance with 
paragraphs (f) (5) and (6) of this section.

[[Page 1065]]

    (4) A vacuum-loaded cargo tank constructed prior to August 1, 1981, 
in conformance with paragraph (f)(1) of this section, except for 
paragraph (f)(1)(i) of this section, and except that an outlet is 
equipped with an external valve which is not part of a self-closing 
system:
    (i) Must be equipped with a self-closing system prior to September 
1, 1993.
    (ii) May be remarked and certified in accordance with paragraphs 
(f)(5) and (6) of this section after the cargo tank motor vehicle has 
been equipped with the self-closing system.
    (5) The owner of a cargo tank for which a determination has been 
made that the cargo tank is in conformance with paragraph (f) (1), (2), 
(3), or (4) of this section shall complete a written certification, in 
English, signed by the owner and containing at least the following 
information:
    (i) A statement certifying that each cargo tank conforms to 
Sec. 180.405 (f) (1), (2), (3), or (4);
    (ii) The applicable DOT exemption number, the applicable 
specification number and the owner's and manufacturer's serial number 
for the cargo tank;
    (iii) A statement setting forth any modifications made to bring the 
cargo tank into conformance with Sec. 180.405(f) (1), (2), (3), or (4), 
or the applicable specification;
    (iv) A statement identifying the person certifying the cargo tank 
and the date of certification.
    (6) The owner of a certified cargo tank shall remove the exemption 
number stenciled on the cargo tank and shall durably mark the 
specification plate (or a plate placed adjacent to the specification 
plate) ``MC +++-E ****'' (where 
``+++'' is to be replaced by the applicable specification number, ``* * 
* *'' by the exemption number and ``   
'' by the alloy.)
    (7) A cargo tank remarked and certified in conformance with this 
paragraph (f) is excepted from the provisions of Sec. 180.405(c).
    (8) During the period the cargo tank is in service, and for one year 
thereafter, the owner of a cargo tank that is certified and remarked in 
this manner must retain on file at its principal place of business a 
copy of the certificate and the last exemption in effect.
    (g) Cargo tank manhole assemblies. (1) MC 306, MC 307, and MC 312 
cargo tanks marked or certified after December 30, 1990, and DOT 406, 
DOT 407, and DOT 412 cargo tank motor vehicles must be equipped with 
manhole assemblies conforming with Sec. 178.345-5 of this subchapter.
    (2) On or before August 31, 1995, each owner of a cargo tank marked 
or certified before December 31, 1990, authorized for the transportation 
of a hazardous material, must have the cargo tank equipped with manhole 
assemblies conforming with Sec. 178.345-5, except for the dimensional 
requirements in Sec. 178.345-5(a), the hydrostatic testing requirements 
in Sec. 178.345-5(b), and the marking requirements in Sec. 178.345-5(e) 
of this subchapter. A manhole assembly meeting one of the following 
provisions is considered to be in compliance with this paragraph:
    (i) Manhole assemblies on MC 300, MC 301, MC 302, MC 303, MC 305, MC 
306, MC 310, MC 311 and MC 312 cargo tanks which are marked or certified 
in writing as conforming to Sec. 178.345-5 of this subchapter or TTMA RP 
No. 61, or are tested and certified in accordance with TTMA TB No. 107.
    (ii) Manhole assemblies on MC 304 and MC 307 cargo tanks.
    (iii) Manhole assemblies on MC 310, MC 311, and MC 312 cargo tanks 
with a test pressure of 36 psig or greater.
    (3) The owner of five or more DOT specification cargo tanks 
requiring retrofit or certification of the manhole closure must retrofit 
or certify at least 20 percent of the affected cargo tanks each year 
beginning in 1991 until all affected manhole closures on cargo tanks 
have been retrofitted or certified. The owner of fewer than 5 DOT 
specification cargo tanks has until August 31, 1995 to retrofit or 
certify the manhole closures.
    (h) Pressure relief system. Properly functioning reclosing pressure 
relief valves and frangible or fusible vents need not be replaced. 
However, replacement of reclosing pressure relief valves on MC-
specification cargo tanks is authorized subject to the following 
requirements:

[[Page 1066]]

    (1) Until August 31, 1998, the owner of a cargo tank may replace a 
reclosing pressure relief device with a device which is in compliance 
with the requirements for pressure relief devices in effect at the time 
the cargo tank specification became superseded. If the pressure relief 
device is installed as an integral part of a manhole cover assembly, the 
manhole cover must comply with the requirements of paragraph (g) of this 
section.
    (2) After August 31, 1998, replacement for any reclosing pressure 
relief valve must be capable of reseating to a leak-tight condition 
after a pressure surge, and the volume of lading released may not exceed 
1 L. Specific performance requirements for these pressure relief valves 
are set forth in Sec. 178.345-10(b)(3) of this subchapter.
    (3) As provided in paragraph (c)(2) of this section, the owner of a 
cargo tank may elect to modify reclosing pressure relief devices to more 
recent cargo tank specifications. However, replacement devices 
constructed to the requirements of Sec. 178.345-10 of this subchapter 
must provide the minimum venting capacity required by the original 
specification to which the cargo tank was designed and constructed.
    (i) Flammable cryogenic liquids. Each cargo tank used to transport a 
flammable cryogenic liquid must be examined after each shipment to 
determine its actual holding time (See Sec. 173.318(g)(3) of this 
subchapter.)
    (j) Withdrawal of certification. A specification cargo tank that for 
any reason no longer meets the applicable specification may not be used 
to transport hazardous materials unless the cargo tank is repaired and 
retested in accordance with Secs. 180.413 and 180.407 prior to being 
returned to hazardous materials service. If the cargo tank is not in 
conformance with the applicable specification requirements, the 
specification plate on the cargo tank must be removed, obliterated or 
securely covered. The details of the conditions necessitating withdrawal 
of the certification must be recorded and signed on the written 
certificate for that cargo tank. The vehicle owner shall retain the 
certificate for at least 1 year after withdrawal of the certification.
    (k) DOT specification cargo tank with no marked design pressure or a 
marked design pressure of less than 3 psig. The owner of an MC 300, MC 
301, MC 302, MC 303, MC 305, MC 306 or MC 312 cargo tank, which has a 
pressure relief system set at 3 psig, may mark or remark the cargo tank 
with an MAWP or design pressure of not greater than 3 psig.
    (l) MC 300, MC 301, MC 302, MC 303, MC 305, MC 306 cargo tank--Rear 
accident damage protection. (1) Notwithstanding the requirements in 
Sec. 180.405(b), the applicable specification requirement for a rear 
bumper or rear-end tank protection device on MC 300, MC 301, MC 302, MC 
303, MC 305, and MC 306 cargo tanks does not apply to a cargo tank truck 
(power unit) until July 1, 1992, if the cargo tank truck--
    (i) Was manufactured before July 1, 1989;
    (ii) Is used to transport gasoline or any other petroleum distillate 
product; and
    (iii) Is operated in combination with a cargo tank full trailer. 
However, an empty cargo tank truck, without a cargo tank full trailer 
attached, may be operated without the required rear bumper or rear-end 
tank protection device on a one-time basis while being transported to a 
repair facility for installation of a rear bumper or rear-end protection 
device.
    (2) Each cargo tank shall be provided with a rear accident damage 
protection device to protect the tank and piping in the event of a rear-
end collision and reduce the likelihood of damage which could result in 
the loss of lading. The rear-end protection device must be in the form 
of a rear-end tank protection device meeting the requirements of 
Sec. 178.345-8(d) or a rear bumper meeting the following:
    (i) The bumper shall be located at least 6 inches to the rear of any 
vehicle component used for loading or unloading or that may contain 
lading while the vehicle is in transit.
    (ii) The dimensions of the bumper shall conform to Sec. 393.86 of 
this title.
    (iii) The structure of the bumper shall be designed to withstand, 
without leakage of lading, the impact of the vehicle with rated payload, 
at a deceleration of 2 ``g'' using a safety factor of two based on the 
ultimate strength of

[[Page 1067]]

the bumper material. Such impact shall be considered uniformly 
distributed and applied horizontally (parallel to the ground) from any 
direction at an angle not exceeding 30 degrees to the longitudinal axis 
of the vehicle.
    (m) Specification MC 330, MC 331 cargo tank motor vehicles, and 
nonspecification cargo tank motor vehicles conforming to Sec. 173.315(k) 
of this subchapter, intended for use in the transportation of liquefied 
compressed gases. (1) No later than the date of its first scheduled 
pressure test after July 1, 2001, each specification MC 330 and MC 331 
cargo tank motor vehicle, and each nonspecification cargo tank motor 
vehicle conforming to Sec. 173.315(k) of this subchapter, marked and 
certified before July 1, 2001, that is used to transport a Division 2.1 
material, a Division 2.2 material with a subsidiary hazard, a Division 
2.3 material, or anhydrous ammonia must have an emergency discharge 
control capability as specified in Sec. 173.315(n) of this subchapter. 
Each passive shut-off system installed prior to July 1, 2001, must be 
certified by a Design Certifying Engineer that it meets the requirements 
of Sec. 173.315(n)(2) of this subchapter.
    (2) The requirement in paragraph (m)(1) of this section does not 
apply to a cargo tank equal to or less than 13,247.5 L (3,500 gallons) 
water capacity transporting in metered delivery service a Division 2.1 
material, a Division 2.2 material with a subsidiary hazard, or anhydrous 
ammonia equipped with an off-truck remote shut-off device that was 
installed prior to July 1, 2000. The device must be capable of stopping 
the transfer of lading by operation of a transmitter carried by a 
qualified person attending unloading of the cargo tank. The device is 
subject to the requirement in Sec. 177.840(o) of this subchapter for a 
daily test at 45.72 meters (150 feet).
    (3) Each specification MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tank in metered 
delivery service of greater than 13,247.5 L (3,500 gallons) water 
capacity transporting a Division 2.1 material, a Division 2.2 material 
with a subsidiary hazard, or anhydrous ammonia, marked and certified 
before July 1, 1999, must have an emergency discharge control capability 
as specified in Secs. 173.315(n) and 177.840 of this subchapter no later 
than the date of its first scheduled pressure test after July 1, 2001, 
or July 1, 2003, whichever is earlier.
    (n) Thermal activation. No later than the date of its first 
scheduled leakage test after July 1, 1999, each specification MC 330 or 
MC 331 cargo tank motor vehicle and each nonspecification cargo tank 
motor vehicle conforming to Sec. 173.315(k) of this subchapter, marked 
and certified before July 1, 1999, that is used to transport a liquefied 
compressed gas, other than carbon dioxide and chlorine, that has a water 
capacity of 13,247.5 L (3,500 gallons) or less must be equipped with a 
means of thermal activation for the internal self-closing stop valve as 
specified in Sec. 178.337-8(a)(4) of this subchapter.

[Amdt. 180-2, 54 FR 25032, June 12, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 21038, May 
22, 1990; 55 FR 37066, Sept. 7, 1990; 56 FR 27877, 27878, June 17, 1991; 
Amdt. 180-3, 57 FR 45466, Oct. 1, 1992; 58 FR 12905, Mar. 8, 1993; Amdt. 
180-4, 58 FR 51534, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 180-2, 59 FR 1786, Jan. 12, 
1994; Amdt. 180-6, 59 FR 49135, Sept. 26, 1994; Amdt. 180-7, 59 FR 
55177, Nov. 3, 1994; 63 FR 37463, July 10, 1998; 64 FR 28051, May 24, 
1999; 65 FR 58632, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45391, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 180.407  Requirements for test and inspection of specification cargo tanks.

    (a) General. (1) A cargo tank constructed in accordance with a DOT 
specification for which a test or inspection specified in this section 
has become due, may not be filled and offered for transportation or 
transported until the test or inspection has been successfully 
completed. This paragraph does not apply to any cargo tank filled prior 
to the test or inspection due date.
    (2) Except during a pressure test or during loading or unloading, a 
cargo tank may not be subjected to a pressure greater than its design 
pressure or MAWP.
    (3) A person witnessing or performing a test or inspection specified 
in this section must meet the minimum qualifications prescribed in 
Sec. 180.409.
    (4) Each cargo tank must be evaluated in accordance with the 
acceptable results of tests and inspections prescribed in Sec. 180.411.

[[Page 1068]]

    (5) Each cargo tank which has successfully passed a test or 
inspection specified in this section must be marked in accordance with 
Sec. 180.415.
    (6) A cargo tank which fails a prescribed test or inspection must:
    (i) Be repaired and retested in accordance with Sec. 180.413; or
    (ii) Be removed from hazardous materials service and the 
specification plate removed, obliterated or covered in a secure manner.
    (b) Conditions requiring test and inspection of cargo tanks. Without 
regard to any other test or inspection requirements, a specification 
cargo tank must be tested and inspected in accordance with this section 
prior to further use if:
    (1) The cargo tank shows evidence of bad dents, corroded or abraded 
areas, leakage, or any other condition that might render it unsafe for 
transportation service.
    (2) The cargo tank has been in an accident and has been damaged to 
an extent that may adversely affect its lading retention capability.
    (3) The cargo tank has been out of hazardous materials 
transportation service for a period of one year or more. Each cargo tank 
that has been out of hazardous materials transportation service for a 
period of one year or more must be pressure tested in accordance with 
Sec. 180.407(g) prior to further use.
    (4) The cargo tank has been modified from its original design 
specification.
    (5) The Department so requires based on the existence of probable 
cause that the cargo tank is in an unsafe operating condition.
    (c) Periodic test and inspection. Each specification cargo tank must 
be tested and inspected as specified in the following table by an 
inspector meeting the qualifications in Sec. 180.409.

      Compliance Dates--Inspections and Test Under Sec.  180.407(C)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                         Date by which
   Test or inspection (cargo tank     first test must be     Interval
  specification, configuration, and     completed (see     period after
              service)                      note 1)         first test
------------------------------------------------------------------------
External Visual Inspection:
    All cargo tanks designed to be    September 1, 1991.  6 months.
     loaded by vacuum with full
     opening rear heads.
    All other cargo tanks...........  September 1, 1991.  1 year.
Internal Visual Inspection:
    All insulated cargo tanks,        September 1, 1991.  1 year.
     except MC 330, MC 331, MC 338.
    All cargo tanks transporting      September 1, 1991.  1 year.
     lading corrosive to the tank.
    All other cargo tanks, except MC  September 1, 1995.  5 years.
     338.
Lining Inspection:
    All lined cargo tanks             September 1, 1991.  1 year.
     transporting lading corrosive
     to the tank.
Leakage Test:
    MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tanks in  September 1, 1991.  2 years.
     chlorine service.
    All other cargo tanks except MC   September 1, 1991.  1 year.
     338.
Pressure Test:
    (Hydrostatic or pneumatic) (See   ..................  ..............
     Notes 2 and 3).
    All cargo tanks which are         September 1, 1991.  1 year.
     insulated with no manhole or
     insulated and lined, except MC
     338.
    All cargo tanks designed to be    September 1, 1992.  2 years.
     loaded by vacuum with full
     opening rear heads.
    MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tanks in  September 1, 1992.  2 years.
     chlorine service.
    All other cargo tanks...........  September 1, 1995.  5 years.
Thickness Test:
    All unlined cargo tanks           September 1, 1992.  2 years.
     transporting material corrosive
     to the tank, except MC 338.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note 1: If a cargo tank is subject to an applicable inspection or test
  requirement under the regulations in effect on December 30, 1990, and
  the due date (as specified by a requirement in effect on December 30,
  1990) for completing the required inspection or test occurs before the
  compliance date listed in table I, the earlier date applies.
Note 2: Pressure testing is not required for MC 330 and MC 331 cargo
  tanks in dedicated sodium metal service.
Note 3: Pressure testing is not required for uninsulated lined cargo
  tanks, with a design pressure or MAWP 15 psig or less, which receive
  an external visual inspection and lining inspection at least once each
  year.

    (d) External visual inspection and testing. (1) Where insulation 
precludes external visual inspection, the cargo tank, other than an MC 
330 or MC 331 cargo tank, must be given a visual internal inspection in 
accordance with Sec. 180.407(e). The tank must be

[[Page 1069]]

hydrostatically or pneumatically tested in accordance with 
Sec. 180.407(c) and (g) where:
    (i) Visual inspection is precluded by internal lining or coating, or
    (ii) The cargo tank is not equipped with a manhole or inspection 
opening.
    (2) The external visual inspection and testing must include as a 
minimum the following:
    (i) The tank shell and heads must be inspected for corroded or 
abraded areas, dents, distortions, defects in welds and any other 
conditions, including leakage, that might render the tank unsafe for 
transportation service;
    (ii) The piping, valves, and gaskets must be carefully inspected for 
corroded areas, defects in welds, and other conditions, including 
leakage, that might render the tank unsafe for transportation service;
    (iii) All devices for tightening manhole covers must be operative 
and there must be no evidence of leakage at manhole covers or gaskets;
    (iv) All emergency devices and valves including self-closing stop 
valves, excess flow valves and remote closure devices must be free from 
corrosion, distortion, erosion and any external damage that will prevent 
safe operation. Remote closure devices and self-closing stop valves must 
be functioned to demonstrate proper operation;
    (v) Missing bolts, nuts and fusible links or elements must be 
replaced, and loose bolts and nuts must be tightened;
    (vi) All markings on the cargo tank required by parts 172, 178 and 
180 of this subchapter must be legible;
    (vii) [Reserved]
    (viii) All major appurtenances and structural attachments on the 
cargo tank including, but not limited to, suspension system attachments, 
connecting structures, and those elements of the upper coupler (fifth 
wheel) assembly that can be inspected without dismantling the upper 
coupler (fifth wheel) assembly must be inspected for any corrosion or 
damage which might prevent safe operation;
    (ix) For cargo tanks transporting lading corrosive to the tank, 
areas covered by the upper coupler (fifth wheel) assembly must be 
inspected at least once in each two year period for corroded and abraded 
areas, dents, distortions, defects in welds, and any other condition 
that might render the tank unsafe for transportation service. The upper 
coupler (fifth wheel) assembly must be removed from the cargo tank for 
this inspection.
    (3) All reclosing pressure relief valves must be externally 
inspected for any corrosion or damage which might prevent safe 
operation. All reclosing pressure relief valves on cargo tanks carrying 
lading corrosive to the valve must be removed from the cargo tank for 
inspection and testing. Each reclosing pressure relief valve required to 
be removed and tested must open at the required set pressure and reseat 
to a leak-tight condition at 90 percent of the set-to-discharge pressure 
or the pressure prescribed for the applicable cargo tank specification.
    (4) Corroded or abraded areas of the cargo tank wall must be 
thickness tested in accordance with the procedures set forth in 
paragraphs (i)(2), (i)(3), (i)(5) and (i)(6) of this section.
    (5) The gaskets on any full opening rear head must be:
    (i) Visually inspected for cracks or splits caused by weather or 
wear; and
    (ii) Replaced if cuts or cracks which are likely to cause leakage, 
or are of a depth one-half inch or more, are found.
    (6) The inspector must record the results of the external visual 
examination as specified in Sec. 180.417(b).
    (e) Internal visual inspection. (1) When the cargo tank is not 
equipped with a manhole or inspection opening, or the cargo tank design 
precludes an internal inspection, the tank shall be hydrostatically or 
pneumatically tested in accordance with 180.407(c) and (g).
    (2) The internal visual inspection must include as a minimum the 
following:
    (i) The tank shell and heads must be inspected for corroded and 
abraded areas, dents, distortions, defects in welds, and any other 
condition that might render the tank unsafe for transportation service.
    (ii) Tank liners must be inspected as specified in Sec. 180.407(f).
    (3) Corroded or abraded areas of the cargo tank wall must be 
thickness tested in accordance with paragraphs

[[Page 1070]]

(i)(2), (i)(3), (i)(5) and (i)(6) of this section.
    (4) The inspector must record the results of the internal visual 
inspection as specified in Sec. 180.417(b).
    (f) Lining inspection. The integrity of the lining on all lined 
cargo tanks, when lining is required by this subchapter, must be 
verified at least once each year as follows:
    (1) Rubber (elastomeric) lining must be tested for holes as follows:
    (i) Equipment must consist of:
    (A) A high frequency spark tester capable of producing sufficient 
voltage to ensure proper calibration;
    (B) A probe with an ``L'' shaped 2.4 mm (0.09 inch) diameter wire 
with up to a 30.5 cm (12-inch) bottom leg (end bent to a 12.7 mm (0.5 
inch) radius), or equally sensitive probe; and
    (C) A steel calibration coupon 30.5 cm x 30.5 cm (12 inches x 12 
inches) covered with the same material and thickness as that to be 
tested. The material on the coupon shall have a test hole to the metal 
substrate made by puncturing the material with a 22 gauge hypodermic 
needle or comparable piercing tool.
    (ii) The probe must be passed over the surface of the calibration 
coupon in a constant uninterrupted manner until the hole is found. The 
hole is detected by the white or light blue spark formed. (A sound 
lining causes a dark blue or purple spark.) The voltage must be adjusted 
to the lowest setting that will produce a minimum 12.7 mm (0.5 inch) 
spark measured from the top of the lining to the probe. To assure that 
the setting on the probe has not changed, the spark tester must be 
calibrated periodically using the test calibration coupon, and the same 
power source, probe, and cable length.
    (iii) After calibration, the probe must be passed over the lining in 
an uninterrupted stroke.
    (iv) Holes that are found must be repaired using equipment and 
procedures prescribed by the lining manufacturer or lining installer.
    (2) Linings made of other than rubber (elastomeric material) must be 
tested using equipment and procedures prescribed by the lining 
manufacturer or lining installer.
    (3) Degraded or defective areas of the cargo tank liner must be 
removed and the cargo tank wall below the defect must be inspected. 
Corroded areas of the tank wall must be thickness tested in accordance 
with paragraphs (i)(2), (i)(3), (i)(5) and (i)(6) of this section.
    (4) The inspector must record the results of the lining inspection 
as specified in Sec. 180.417(b).
    (g) Pressure test. All components of the cargo tank wall, as defined 
in Sec. 178.320(a) of this subchapter, must be pressure tested as 
prescribed by this paragraph.
    (1) Test Procedure--(i) As part of the pressure test, the inspector 
must perform an external and internal visual inspection, except that on 
an MC 338 cargo tank, or a cargo tank not equipped with a manhole or 
inspection opening, an internal inspection is not required.
    (ii) All reclosing pressure relief valves must be:
    (A) Removed from the cargo tank for inspection and testing. Each 
reclosing pressure relief valve must open at the required set pressure 
and reseat to a leak-tight condition at 90 percent of the set-to-
discharge pressure or the pressure prescribed for the applicable cargo 
tank specification; or,
    (B) Replaced.
    (iii) Except for cargo tanks carrying lading corrosive to the tank, 
areas covered by the upper coupler (fifth wheel) assembly must be 
inspected for corroded and abraded areas, dents, distortions, defects in 
welds, and any other condition that might render the tank unsafe for 
transportation service. The upper coupler (fifth wheel) assembly must be 
removed from the cargo tank for this inspection.
    (iv) Each cargo tank must be tested hydrostatically or pneumatically 
to the internal pressure specified in the following table:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
             Specification                        Test pressure
------------------------------------------------------------------------
MC 300, 301, 302, 303, 305, 306........  20.7 kPa (3 psig) or design
                                          pressure, whichever is
                                          greater.

[[Page 1071]]

 
MC 304, 307............................  275.8 kPa (40 psig) or 1.5
                                          times the design pressure,
                                          whichever is greater.
MC 310, 311, 312.......................  20.7 kPa (3 psig) or 1.5 times
                                          the design pressure, whichever
                                          is greater.
MC 330, 331............................  1.5 times either the MAWP or
                                          the re-rated pressure,
                                          whichever is applicable.
MC 338.................................  1.25 times either the MAWP or
                                          the re-rated pressure,
                                          whichever is applicable.
DOT 406................................  34.5 kPa (5 psig) or 1.5 times
                                          the MAWP, whichever is
                                          greater.
DOT 407................................  275.8 kPa (40 psig) or 1.5
                                          times the MAWP, whichever is
                                          greater.
DOT 412................................  1.5 times the MAWP.
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (v) Each owner of 5 or more MC 300, MC 301, MC 302, MC 303, MC 304, 
MC 305, MC 306, MC 307, MC 310, MC 311, or MC 312 cargo tanks must 
pressure test at least 20 percent of the cargo tanks in his ownership 
each year beginning in 1991. The owner of fewer than five MC 
specification cargo tanks has until August 31, 1995, to pressure test 
these units.
    (vi) Each cargo tank of a multi-tank cargo tank motor vehicle must 
be tested with the adjacent cargo tanks empty and at atmospheric 
pressure.
    (vii) All closures except pressure relief devices must be in place 
during the test. All prescribed loading and unloading venting devices 
rated at less than test pressure may be removed during the test. If 
retained, the devices must be rendered inoperative by clamps, plugs, or 
other equally effective restraining devices. Restraining devices may not 
prevent detection of leaks or damage the venting devices and must be 
removed immediately after the test is completed.
    (viii) Hydrostatic test method. Each cargo tank, including its 
domes, must be filled with water or other liquid having similar 
viscosity, at a temperature not exceeding 100  deg.F. The cargo tank 
must then be pressurized to not less than the pressure specified in 
paragraph (g)(1)(iv) of this section. The cargo tank, including its 
closures, must hold the prescribed test pressure for at least 10 minutes 
during which time it shall be inspected for leakage, bulging or any 
other defect.
    (ix) Pneumatic test method. Pneumatic testing may involve higher 
risk than hydrostatic testing. Therefore, suitable safeguards must be 
provided to protect personnel and facilities should failure occur during 
the test. The cargo tank must be pressurized with air or an inert gas. 
The pneumatic test pressure in the cargo tank must be reached by 
gradually increasing the pressure to one-half of the test pressure. 
Thereafter, the pressure must be increased in steps of approximately 
one-tenth of the test pressure until the required test pressure has been 
reached. The test pressure must be held for at least 5 minutes. The 
pressure must then be reduced to the MAWP, which must be maintained 
during the time the entire cargo tank surface is inspected. During the 
inspection, a suitable method must be used for detecting the existence 
of leaks. This method must consist either of coating the entire surface 
of all joints under pressure with a solution of soap and water, or using 
other equally sensitive methods.
    (2) When testing an insulated cargo tank, the insulation and 
jacketing need not be removed unless it is otherwise impossible to reach 
test pressure and maintain a condition of pressure equilibrium after 
test pressure is reached, or the vacuum integrity cannot be maintained 
in the insulation space. If an MC 338 cargo tank used for the 
transportation of a flammable gas or oxygen, refrigerated liquid is 
opened for any reason, the cleanliness must be verified prior to closure 
using the procedures contained in Sec. 178.338-15 of this subchapter.
    (3) Each MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tank constructed of quenched and 
tempered steel (Part UHT of the ASME Code), or constructed of other than 
quenched and tempered steel but without postweld heat treatment, used 
for the transportation of anhydrous ammonia, or any other hazardous 
materials that may cause corrosion stress cracking, must be internally 
inspected by the wet fluorescent magnetic particle method immediately 
prior to and in conjunction with the performance of the pressure test 
prescribed in this section. Each MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tank 
constructed of quenched and tempered steel (Part UHT of the ASME Code) 
used for the transportation of

[[Page 1072]]

liquefied petroleum gas must be internally inspected by the wet 
fluorescent magnetic particle method immediately prior to and in 
conjunction with the performance of the pressure test prescribed in this 
section. The wet fluorescent magnetic particle inspection must be in 
accordance with Section V of the ASME Code and CGA Technical Bulletin 
TB-2. This paragraph does not apply to cargo tanks that do not have 
manholes. (See Sec. 180.417(c) for reporting requirements.)
    (4) All pressure bearing portions of a cargo tank heating system 
employing a medium such as, but not limited to, steam or hot water for 
heating the lading must be hydrostatically pressure tested at least once 
every 5 years. The test pressure must be at least 1.5 times the heating 
system design pressure and must be maintained for five minutes. A 
heating system employing flues for heating the lading must be tested to 
ensure against lading leakage into the flues or into the atmosphere.
    (5) Exceptions. (i) Pressure testing is not required for MC 330 and 
MC 331 cargo tanks in dedicated sodium metal service.
    (ii) Pressure testing is not required for uninsulated lined cargo 
tanks, with a design pressure or MAWP of 15 psig or less, which receive 
an external visual inspection and a lining inspection at least once each 
year.
    (6) Acceptance criteria. A cargo tank that leaks, fails to retain 
test pressure or pneumatic inspection pressure, shows distortion, 
excessive permanent expansion, or other evidence of weakness that might 
render the cargo tank unsafe for transportation service, may not be 
returned to service, except as follows: A cargo tank with a heating 
system which does not hold pressure may remain in service as an unheated 
cargo tank if:
    (i) The heating system remains in place and is structurally sound 
and no lading may leak into the heating system, and
    (ii) The specification plate heating system information is changed 
to indicate that the cargo tank has no working heating system.
    (7) The inspector must record the results of the pressure test as 
specified in Sec. 180.417(b).
    (h) Leakage test. (1) Each cargo tank must be tested for leaks in 
accordance with Sec. 180.407(c). The leakage test must include product 
piping with all valves and accessories in place and operative, except 
that any venting devices set to discharge at less than the leakage test 
pressure must be removed or rendered inoperative during the test. Test 
pressure must be maintained at least 5 minutes. Suitable safeguards must 
be provided to protect personnel should a failure occur. MC 330 and MC 
331 cargo tanks may be leakage tested with the hazardous materials 
contained in the tank during the test. Leakage test pressure must be not 
less than 80 percent of the tank design pressure or MAWP, whichever is 
marked on the certification or specification plate, except as follows:
    (i) A cargo tank with an MAWP of 690 kPa (100 psig) or more may be 
leakage tested at its maximum normal operating pressure provided it is 
in dedicated service or services; or
    (ii) An MC 330 or MC 331 cargo tank in dedicated liquified petroleum 
gas service may be leakage tested at not less than 414 kPa (60 psig).
    (iii) An operator of a specification MC 330 or MC 331 cargo tank, 
and a nonspecification cargo tank authorized under Sec. 173.315(k) of 
this subchapter, equipped with a meter may check leak tightness of the 
internal self-closing stop valve by conducting a meter creep test. (See 
appendix B to this part.)
    (2) Cargo tanks equipped with vapor collection equipment may be 
leakage tested in accordance with the Environmental Protection Agency's 
``Method 27--Determination of Vapor Tightness of Gasoline Delivery Tank 
Using Pressure-Vacuum Test,'' as set forth in 40 CFR part 60, appendix 
A. Acceptance criteria are found at 40 CFR 60.501.
    (3) A cargo tank that fails to retain leakage test pressure may not 
be returned to service as a specification cargo tank, except under 
conditions specified in Sec. 180.411(d).
    (4) After July 1, 2000, Registered Inspectors of specification MC 
330 and MC 331 cargo tanks, and nonspecification cargo tanks authorized 
under

[[Page 1073]]

Sec. 173.315(k) of this subchapter must visually inspect the delivery 
hose assembly and piping system while the assembly is under leakage test 
pressure utilizing the rejection criteria listed in Sec. 180.416(g). 
Delivery hose assemblies not permanently attached to the cargo tank 
motor vehicle may be inspected separately from the cargo tank motor 
vehicle. In addition to a written record of the inspection prepared in 
accordance with Sec. 180.417(b), the Registered Inspector conducting the 
test must note the hose identification number, the date of the test, and 
the condition of the hose assembly and piping system tested.
    (5) The inspector must record the results of the leakage test as 
specified in Sec. 180.417(b).
    (i) Thickness testing. (1) The shell and head thickness of all 
unlined cargo tanks used for the transportation of materials corrosive 
to the tank must be measured at least once every 2 years, except that 
cargo tanks measuring less than the sum of the minimum prescribed 
thickness, plus one-fifth of the original corrosion allowance, must be 
tested annually.
    (2) Measurements must be made using a device capable of accurately 
measuring thickness to within 0.002 of an inch.
    (3) Any person performing thickness testing must be trained in the 
proper use of the thickness testing device used in accordance with the 
manufacturer's instruction.
    (4) Thickness testing must be performed in the following areas of 
the cargo tank wall, as a minimum:
    (i) Areas of the tank shell and heads and shell and head area around 
any piping that retains lading;
    (ii) Areas of high shell stress such as the bottom center of the 
tank;
    (iii) Areas near openings;
    (iv) Areas around weld joints;
    (v) Areas around shell reinforcements;
    (vi) Areas around appurtenance attachments;
    (vii) Areas near upper coupler (fifth wheel) assembly attachments;
    (viii) Areas near suspension system attachments and connecting 
structures;
    (ix) Known thin areas in the tank shell and nominal liquid level 
lines; and
    (x) Connecting structures joining multiple cargo tanks of carbon 
steel in a self-supporting cargo tank motor vehicle.
    (5) Minimum thicknesses for MC 300, MC 301, MC 302, MC 303, MC 304, 
MC 305, MC 306, MC 307, MC 310, MC 311, and MC 312 cargo tanks are shown 
in the tables below. The columns headed ``Specified Manufactured 
Thickness'' tabulate the minimum values required for new construction, 
generally found in Tables I and II of each specification. ``In-Service 
Minimum Thicknesses'' are based on 90 percent of the manufactured 
thickness as specified in the DOT specification, rounded to three 
places.

 Table I--Minimum Thickness for MC 300, MC 303, MC 304, MC 306, MC 307,
MC 310, MC 311 and MC 312 Specification Cargo Tanks Constructed of Steel
                            and Steel Alloys
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                     Nominal
                                                     decimal      In-
  Specified manufactured thickness (US gauge or    equivalent   service
                     inches)                           for      minimum
                                                    reference  thickness
                                                    (inches)    (inches)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
19...............................................      0.0418      0.038
18...............................................      0.0478      0.043
17...............................................      0.0538      0.048
16...............................................      0.0598      0.054
15...............................................      0.0673      0.061
14...............................................      0.0747      0.067
13...............................................      0.0897      0.081
12...............................................      0.1046      0.094
11...............................................      0.1196      0.108
10...............................................      0.1345      0.121
9................................................      0.1495      0.135
8................................................      0.1644      0.148
7................................................      0.1793      0.161
3/16.............................................      0.1875      0.169
1/4..............................................      0.2500      0.225
5/16.............................................      0.3125      0.281
3/8..............................................      0.3750      0.338
------------------------------------------------------------------------


 Table II--Minimum Thickness for MC 301, MC 302, MC 304, MC 305, MC 306,
   MC 307, MC 311 and MC 312 Specification Cargo Tanks Constructed of
                      Aluminum and Aluminum Alloys
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                  In-
                                                                service
          Specified manufactured thickness (inches)             minimum
                                                               thickness
                                                                (inches)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
0.078........................................................      0.070
0.087........................................................      0.078
0.096........................................................      0.086
0.109........................................................      0.098
0.130........................................................      0.117

[[Page 1074]]

 
0.141........................................................      0.127
0.151........................................................      0.136
0.172........................................................      0.155
0.173........................................................      0.156
0.194........................................................      0.175
0.216........................................................      0.194
0.237........................................................      0.213
0.270........................................................      0.243
0.360........................................................      0.324
0.450........................................................      0.405
0.540........................................................      0.486
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    (6) An owner of a cargo tank that no longer conforms with the 
minimum thickness prescribed for the maximum lading density marked on 
the specification plate may use the cargo tank to carry lading of lower 
density under the following conditions:
    (i) A Design Certifying Engineer must certify that the cargo tank 
design and thickness is appropriate for the lower density lading, by 
issuance of a new manufacturer's certificate, and
    (ii) The tank's nameplate must be changed to reflect the new service 
limits (maximum density of lading).
    (7) An owner of a cargo tank that no longer conforms with the 
minimum thickness prescribed for the specification may not return the 
cargo tank to hazardous materials service. The tank's specification 
plate must be removed, obliterated or covered in a secure manner.
    (8) The inspector must record the results of the thickness test as 
specified in Sec. 180.417(b).

[Amdt. 180-2, 54 FR 25032, June 12, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 21038, May 
22, 1990; 55 FR 37067, Sept. 7, 1990; 56 FR 27878, June 17, 1991; Amdt 
180-3, 57 FR 45466, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 180-4, 58 FR 51534, Oct. 1, 
1993; Amdt. 180-6, 59 FR 49135, Sept. 26, 1994; Amdt. 180-7, 59 FR 
55177, 55178, Nov. 3, 1994; 60 FR 17402, Apr. 5, 1995; Amdt. 180-9, 61 
FR 27176, May 30, 1996; Amdt. 180-10, 61 FR 51342, Oct. 1, 1996; 64 FR 
28051, May 24, 1999; 65 FR 58632, Sept. 29, 2000]



Sec. 180.409  Minimum qualifications for inspectors and testers.

    (a) Except as otherwise provided in this section, any person 
performing or witnessing the inspections and tests specified in 
Sec. 180.407(c) must--
    (1) Be registered with the Department in accordance with part 107, 
subpart F of this chapter, and
    (2) Be familiar with DOT specification cargo tanks and must be 
trained and experienced in use of the inspection and testing equipment 
needed.
    (b) A person who only performs annual external visual inspections 
and leakage tests on a cargo tank motor vehicle, owned or operated by 
that person, with a capacity of less than 13,250 L (3,500 gallons) used 
exclusively for flammable liquid petroleum fuels, is not required to 
meet the educational and years of experience requirements set forth in 
the definition of ``Registered Inspector'' in Sec. 171.8 of this 
subchapter. Although not required to meet the educational and years of 
experience requirements, a person who performs visual inspections or 
leakage tests or signs the inspection reports must have the knowledge 
and ability to perform such inspections and tests and must perform them 
as required by this subchapter, and must register with the Department as 
required by subpart F of part 107 of this chapter.
    (c) A person who performs only annual external visual inspections 
and leakage tests on a permanently mounted non-bulk tank, owned or 
operated by that person, for petroleum products as authorized by 
Sec. 173.8(c) of this subchapter, is not required to be registered in 
accordance with subpart F of part 107 of this chapter. In addition the 
person who signs the inspection report required by Sec. 180.417(b) of 
this subpart for such non-bulk tanks is not required to be registered. 
Although not required to register, a person who performs visual 
inspections or leakage tests or signs the inspection reports must have 
the knowledge and ability to perform such inspections and tests and must 
perform them as required by this subchapter.
    (d) A motor carrier or cargo tank owner who meets the requirements 
of paragraph (a) of this section may use an employee who is not a 
Registered Inspector to perform a portion of the pressure retest 
required by Sec. 180.407(g).

[[Page 1075]]

External and internal visual inspections must be accomplished by a 
Registered Inspector, but the hydrostatic or pneumatic pressure test, as 
set forth in Sec. 180.407(g)(1)(viii) and (ix), respectively, may be 
done by an employee who is not a Registered Inspector provided that--
    (1) The employee is familiar with the cargo tank and is trained and 
experienced in the use of the inspection and testing equipment used;
    (2) The employer submits certification that such employee meets the 
qualification requirements to the Associate Administrator, Attn: (DHM-
32), Research and Special Programs Administration, Department of 
Transportation, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590; and
    (3) The employer retains a copy of the tester's qualifications with 
the documents required by Sec. 180.417(b).

[Amdt. 180-2, 55 FR 37069, Sept. 7, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 180-3, 56 
FR 66287, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45466, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 180-11, 62 FR 
1217, Jan. 8, 1997; 66 FR 45391, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 180.411  Acceptable results of tests and inspections.

    (a) Corroded or abraded areas. The minimum thickness may not be less 
than that prescribed in the applicable specification.
    (b) Dents, cuts, digs and gouges. (See CGA Pamphlet C-6 for 
evaluation procedures.)
    (1) For dents at welds or that include a weld, the maximum allowable 
depth is \1/2\ inch. For dents away from welds, the maximum allowable 
depth is \1/10\ of the greatest dimension of the dent, but in no case 
may the depth exceed one inch.
    (2) The minimum thickness remaining beneath a cut, dig, or gouge may 
not be less than that prescribed in the applicable specification.
    (c) Weld or structural defects. Any cargo tank with a weld defect 
such as a crack, pinhole, or incomplete fusion, or a structural defect 
must be taken out of hazardous materials service until repaired.
    (d) Leakage. All sources of leakage must be properly repaired prior 
to returning a tank to hazardous materials service.
    (e) Relief valves. Any pressure relief valve that fails to open and 
reclose at the prescribed pressure must be repaired or replaced.
    (f) Liner integrity. Any defect shown by the test must be properly 
repaired.
    (g) Pressure test. Any tank that fails to meet the acceptance 
criteria found in the individual specification that applies must be 
properly repaired.



Sec. 180.413  Repair, modification, stretching, or rebarrelling of cargo tanks.

    (a) General. For purposes of this section, ``stretching'' is not 
considered a ``modification'' and ``rebarrelling'' is not considered a 
``repair.'' Any repair, modification, stretching, or rebarrelling of a 
cargo tank must be performed in conformance with the requirements of 
this section.
    (b) Repair--(1) Non-ASME Code stamped cargo tanks. Any work 
involving repair on an MC 300, MC 301, MC 302, MC 303, MC 304, MC 305, 
MC 306, MC 307, MC 310, MC 311, or MC 312 cargo tank that is not ASME 
Code stamped must be performed by:
    (i) A cargo tank manufacturer holding a valid ASME Certificate of 
Authorization for the use of the ASME ``U'' stamp and registered with 
DOT; or
    (ii) A repair facility holding a valid National Board Certificate of 
Authorization for the use of the National Board ``R'' stamp and 
registered with DOT.
    (2) ASME Code stamped cargo tanks. Any work involving repair on any 
ASME Code stamped cargo tank must be performed by a repair facility 
holding a valid National Board Certificate of Authorization for the use 
of the National Board ``R'' stamp and registered in accordance with 
subpart F of part 107 of subchapter B of this chapter.
    (3) The following provisions apply to cargo tank repairs:
    (i) DOT 406, DOT 407, and DOT 412 cargo tanks must be repaired in 
accordance with the specification requirements in effect either at the 
time of manufacture or at the time of repair;
    (ii) MC 300, MC 301, MC 302, MC 303, MC 305, and MC 306 cargo tanks 
must be repaired in accordance with either the original specification or 
with the

[[Page 1076]]

DOT 406 specification in effect at the time of repair;
    (iii) MC 304 and MC 307 cargo tanks must be repaired in accordance 
with either the original specification or with the DOT 407 specification 
in effect at the time of repair;
    (iv) MC 310, MC 311, and MC 312 cargo tanks must be repaired in 
accordance with either the original specification or with the DOT 412 
specification in effect at the time of the repair;
    (v) MC 338 cargo tanks must be repaired in accordance with the 
specification requirements in effect either at the time of manufacture 
or at the time of repair; and
    (vi) MC 330 and MC 331 cargo tanks must be repaired in accordance 
with the repair procedures described in CGA Technical Bulletin TB-2 and 
the National Board Inspection Code--Provisions for Repair of Pressure 
Vessels. Each cargo tank having cracks or other defects requiring welded 
repairs must meet all of the requirements of Sec. 178.337-16 of this 
subchapter (in effect at the time of the repair), except that postweld 
heat treatment after minor weld repairs is not required. When any repair 
is made of defects revealed by the wet fluorescent magnetic particle 
inspection, including those by grinding, the affected area of the cargo 
tank must again be examined by the wet fluorescent magnetic particle 
method after hydrostatic testing to assure that all defects have been 
removed.
    (4) Prior to any repair work, the cargo tank must be emptied of any 
hazardous material lading. Cargo tanks containing flammable or toxic 
lading must be purged.
    (5) Any repair of a cargo tank involving welding on the shell or 
head must be certified by a Registered Inspector. Any repair of an ASME 
Code ``U'' stamped cargo tank must be in accordance with the National 
Board Inspection Code.
    (6) The suitability of any repair affecting the structural integrity 
of the cargo tank must be determined by the testing required either in 
the applicable manufacturing specification, or in 
Sec. 180.407(g)(1)(iv).
    (c) Maintenance or replacement of piping, valves, hoses or fittings. 
In the event of repair, maintenance or replacement, any piping, valve, 
or fitting must be properly installed in accordance with the provisions 
of the applicable specification before the cargo tank is returned to 
hazardous materials service. After maintenance or replacement which does 
not involve welding on the cargo tank wall, the repaired piping, valves 
or fittings, the replaced segment of the piping must be leak tested. 
After repair or replacement of piping, valves or fittings which involves 
welding on the cargo tank wall, the entire cargo tank, including the 
repaired or replaced piping, valve or fitting, must be pressure tested 
in accordance with the applicable specification. Hoses permanently 
attached to the cargo tank must be tested either before or after 
installation.
    (d) Modification, stretching, or rebarrelling. Modification, 
stretching or rebarrelling of a cargo tank must conform to the following 
provisions:
    (1) Non-ASME Code stamped cargo tanks. If the modification, 
stretching, or rebarrelling will result in a design type change, then it 
must be approved by a Design Certifying Engineer. Any work involving 
modification, stretching, or rebarrelling on an MC 300, MC 301, MC 302, 
MC 303, MC 304, MC 305, MC 306, MC 307, MC 310, MC 311, or MC 312 cargo 
tank that is not ASME stamped must be performed by:
    (i) A cargo tank manufacturer holding a valid ASME Certificate of 
Authorization for the use of the ASME ``U'' stamp and registered with 
DOT; or
    (ii) A repair facility holding a valid National Board Certificate of 
Authorization for the use of the National Board ``R'' stamp and 
registered with DOT.
    (2) ASME Code stamped cargo tanks. The modification, stretching, or 
rebarrelling on any ASME Code stamped cargo tank must be performed by a 
repair facility holding a valid National Board Certificate of 
Authorization for the use of the National Board ``R'' stamp and 
registered in accordance with subpart F of part 107 of subchapter B of 
this chapter. If the modification, stretching, or rebarrelling will 
result in a design type change, then it must be approved by a Design 
Certifying Engineer.

[[Page 1077]]

    (3) Except as provided in paragraph (d)(3)(v) in this section, all 
new material and equipment, and equipment affected by modification, 
stretching or rebarrelling must meet the requirements of the 
specification in effect at the time such work is performed, and must 
meet the applicable structural integrity requirements (Secs. 178.337-3, 
178.338-3, or 178.345-3 of this subchapter). The work must conform to 
the requirements of the applicable specification as follows:
    (i) For specification MC 300, MC 301, MC 302, MC 303, MC 305 and MC 
306 cargo tanks, the provisions of either specification MC 306 or DOT 
406 until August 31, 1995 and, thereafter to specification DOT 406 only;
    (ii) For specification MC 304 and MC 307 cargo tanks, the provisions 
of either specification MC 307 or DOT 407 until August 31, 1995 and, 
thereafter to specification DOT 407 only;
    (iii) For specification MC 310, MC 311, and MC 312 cargo tanks, the 
provisions of either specification MC 312 or DOT 412 until August 31, 
1995 and, thereafter to specification DOT 412 only;
    (iv) For specification MC 330 cargo tanks, the provisions of 
specification MC 331; and
    (v) For Specification MC 338 cargo tanks, the provisions of 
specification MC 338. However, structural modifications to MC 338 cargo 
tanks authorized under Sec. 180.405(d) may conform to applicable 
provisions of the ASME Code instead of specification MC 338, provided 
the structural integrity of the modified cargo tank is at least 
equivalent to that of the original cargo tank.
    (4) The person performing the modification, stretching, or 
rebarrelling must:
    (i) Have knowledge of the original design concept, particularly with 
respect to structural design analysis, material and welding procedures;
    (ii) Assure compliance with the rebuilt cargo tank's structural 
integrity, venting, and accident damage protection requirements;
    (iii) Assure compliance with all applicable Federal Motor Carrier 
Safety Regulations for any newly installed safety equipment;
    (iv) Perform all retest procedures on each cargo tank in accordance 
with the applicable specification and Sec. 180.407;
    (v) Change the existing specification plate to reflect the cargo 
tank as modified, stretched or rebarrelled. This must include the name 
of the person doing the work, his DOT registration number, date, retest 
information, etc. A supplemental specification plate may be installed 
immediately adjacent to the existing plate(s), or the existing 
specification plate may be removed and replaced with a new plate; and
    (vi) On a variable specification cargo tank, install a supplemental 
or new variable specification plate, and replace the specification 
listed on the original specification plate with the words ``see variable 
specification plate''.
    (5) The design of the modified, stretched, or rebarrelled cargo tank 
must be approved by a Design Certifying Engineer registered in 
accordance with subpart F of part 107 of subchapter B of this chapter. 
The Design Certifying Engineer must certify that the modified, 
stretched, or rebarrelled cargo tank meets the structural integrity 
requirements of the applicable specification. The person performing the 
modifying, stretching or rebarrelling and a Registered Inspector must 
certify that the cargo tank is in compliance with this section and the 
applicable specification by issuing a supplemental manufacturer's 
certificate. The registration number of the Registered Inspector and the 
person performing the modification, stretching, or rebarrelling must be 
entered on the certificate. When a cargo tank is rebarrelled, it must be 
designed, constructed and certified in accordance with a cargo tank 
specification currently authorized for construction in part 178 of this 
subchapter.
    (6) If the mounting of the cargo tank on the cargo tank motor 
vehicle involves welding on the cargo tank head or shell, then the 
mounting must be performed as follows:
    (i) Non-ASME Code stamped cargo tanks. For a non-ASME Code stamped 
cargo tank--

[[Page 1078]]

    (A) By a cargo tank manufacturer holding an ASME ``U'' stamp, 
registered with DOT, and under the direction of a Design Certifying 
Engineer; or
    (B) By a repair facility holding an ASME ``U'' stamp or a National 
Board ``R'' stamp, registered with DOT, and under the direction of a 
Design Certifying Engineer.
    (ii) ASME Code stamped cargo tank. For an ASME Code stamped cargo 
tank, by a repair facility holding a National Board ``R'' stamp, 
registered in accordance with subpart F of part 107 of subchapter B of 
this chapter, and approved by a Design Certifying Engineer.
    (7) If the mounting of a cargo tank on a cargo tank motor vehicle 
does not involve welding on the cargo tank head or shell, or a change or 
modification of the methods of attachment, then the mounting shall be in 
accordance with the original specification or with the specification in 
effect at the time of the mounting. If the mounting involves any change 
or modification of the methods of attachment, then the mounting must be 
approved by a Design Certifying Engineer.
    (8) Prior to any modification, stretching, or rebarrelling a cargo 
tank must be emptied of any hazardous material lading. Cargo tanks 
containing flammable or toxic lading must be purged.
    (9) Any modification, stretching, or rebarrelling on the cargo tank 
involving welding on the shell or head must be certified by a Registered 
Inspector. Any repair of an ASME Code ``U'' stamped cargo tank must be 
in accordance with the National Board Inspection Code.
    (10) The suitability of any modification affecting the structural 
integrity of the cargo tank, with respect to pressure, must be 
determined by the testing required either in the applicable 
manufacturing specification, or in Sec. 180.407(g)(1)(iv).
    (e) Records. Each owner of a cargo tank must retain at its principal 
place of business all records of repair, modification, stretching, or 
rebarrelling made to each cargo tank during the time the cargo tank is 
in service and for one year thereafter. Copies of these records must be 
retained by a motor carrier, who is not the owner of the cargo tank, at 
its principal place of business during the period the cargo tank is in 
the carrier's service. The seller of a specification cargo tank shall 
provide the purchaser a copy of the cargo tank Certificate of 
Compliance, and all repair, inspection and test reports upon sale as an 
MC or DOT cargo tank.

[Amdt. 180-7, 59 FR 55178, Nov. 3, 1994; 60 FR 17402, Apr. 5, 1995, as 
amended by Amdt. 180-10, 61 FR 51342, Oct. 1, 1996]



Sec. 180.415  Test and inspection markings.

    (a) Each cargo tank successfully completing the test and inspection 
requirements contained in Sec. 180.407 must be marked as specified in 
this section.
    (b) Each cargo tank must be durably and legibly marked, in English, 
with the date (month and year) and the type of test or inspection 
performed. The date must be readily identifiable with the applicable 
test or inspection. The marking must be in letters and numbers at least 
32 mm (1.25 inches) high, on the tank shell near the specification plate 
or anywhere on the front head. The type of test or inspection may be 
abbreviated as follows: V for external visual inspection and test; I for 
internal visual inspection; P for pressure test; L for lining 
inspection, K for leakage test; and T for thickness test. For example, 
the markings ``10-95 P, V, L'' would indicate that in October 1995 the 
cargo tank received and passed the prescribed pressure test, external 
visual inspection and test, and the lining inspection.
    (c) For a cargo tank motor vehicle composed of multiple cargo tanks 
constructed to the same specification, which are tested and inspected at 
the same time, one set of test and inspection markings may be used to 
satisfy the requirements of this section. For a cargo tank motor vehicle 
composed of multiple cargo tanks constructed to different 
specifications, which are tested and inspected at different intervals, 
the test and inspection markings must appear in the order of the cargo 
tank's

[[Page 1079]]

corresponding location, from front to rear.

[Amdt. 180-2, 56 FR 27879, June 17, 1991, as amended by Amdt. 180-3, 56 
FR 66287, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR 45466, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 180-6, 59 FR 
49135, Sept. 26, 1994; Amdt. 180-10, 61 FR 51343, Oct. 1, 1996]



Sec. 180.416  Discharge system inspection and maintenance program for cargo tanks transporting liquefied compressed gases.

    (a) Applicability. This section is applicable to an operator using 
specification MC 330, MC 331, and nonspecification cargo tanks 
authorized under Sec. 173.315(k) of this subchapter for transportation 
of liquefied compressed gases other than carbon dioxide. Paragraphs (b), 
(c), (d)(1), (d)(5), (e), (f), and (g)(1) of this section, applicable to 
delivery hose assemblies, apply only to hose assemblies installed or 
carried on the cargo tank.
    (b) Hose identification. By July 1, 2000, the operator must assure 
that each delivery hose assembly is permanently marked with a unique 
identification number and maximum working pressure.
    (c) Post-delivery hose check. After each unloading, the operator 
must visually check that portion of the delivery hose assembly deployed 
during the unloading.
    (d) Monthly inspections and tests. (1) The operator must visually 
inspect each delivery hose assembly at least once each calendar month 
the delivery hose assembly is in service.
    (2) The operator must visually inspect the piping system at least 
once each calendar month the cargo tank is in service. The inspection 
must include fusible elements and all components of the piping system, 
including bolts, connections, and seals.
    (3) At least once each calendar month a cargo tank is in service, 
the operator must actuate all emergency discharge control devices 
designed to close the internal self-closing stop valve to assure that 
all linkages operate as designed. appendix A to this part outlines 
acceptable procedures that may be used for this test.
    (4) The operator of a cargo tank must check the internal self-
closing stop valve in the liquid discharge opening for leakage through 
the valve at least once each calendar month the cargo tank is in 
service. On cargo tanks equipped with a meter, the meter creep test as 
outlined in appendix B to this part or a test providing equivalent 
accuracy is acceptable. For cargo tanks that are not equipped with a 
meter, appendix B to this part outlines one acceptable method that may 
be used to check internal self-closing stop valves for closure.
    (5) After July 1, 2000, the operator must note each inspection in a 
record. That record must include the inspection date, the name of the 
person performing the inspection, the hose assembly identification 
number, the company name, the date the hose was assembled and tested, 
and an indication that the delivery hose assembly and piping system 
passed or failed the tests and inspections. A copy of each test and 
inspection record must be retained by the operator at its principal 
place of business or where the vehicle is housed or maintained until the 
next test of the same type is successfully completed.
    (e) Annual hose leakage test. The owner of a delivery hose assembly 
that is not permanently attached to a cargo tank motor vehicle must 
ensure that the hose assembly is annually tested in accordance with 
Sec. 180.407(h)(4).
    (f) New or repaired delivery hose assemblies. Each operator of a 
cargo tank must ensure each new and repaired delivery hose assembly is 
tested at a minimum of 120 percent of the hose maximum working pressure.
    (1) The operator must visually examine the delivery hose assembly 
while it is under pressure.
    (2) Upon successful completion of the pressure test and inspection, 
the operator must assure that the delivery hose assembly is permanently 
marked with the month and year of the test.
    (3) After July 1, 2000, the operator must complete a record 
documenting the test and inspection, including the date, the signature 
of the inspector, the hose owner, the hose identification number, the 
date of original delivery hose assembly and test, notes of any defects 
observed and repairs made, and an indication that the delivery hose 
assembly passed or failed the tests and

[[Page 1080]]

inspections. A copy of each test and inspection record must be retained 
by the operator at its principal place of business or where the vehicle 
is housed or maintained until the next test of the same type is 
successfully completed.
    (g) Rejection criteria. (1) No operator may use a delivery hose 
assembly determined to have any condition identified below for unloading 
liquefied compressed gases. An operator may remove and replace damaged 
sections or correct defects discovered. Repaired hose assemblies may be 
placed back in service if retested successfully in accordance with 
paragraph (f) of this section.
    (i) Damage to the hose cover that exposes the reinforcement.
    (ii) Wire braid reinforcement that has been kinked or flattened so 
as to permanently deform the wire braid.
    (iii) Soft spots when not under pressure, bulging under pressure, or 
loose outer covering.
    (iv) Damaged, slipping, or excessively worn hose couplings.
    (v) Loose or missing bolts or fastenings on bolted hose coupling 
assemblies.
    (2) No operator may use a cargo tank with a piping system found to 
have any condition identified in this paragraph (g)(2) for unloading 
liquefied compressed gases.
    (i) Any external leak identifiable without the use of instruments.
    (ii) Bolts that are loose, missing, or severely corroded.
    (iii) Manual stop valves that will not actuate.
    (iv) Rubber hose flexible connectors with any condition outlined in 
paragraph (g)(1) of this section.
    (v) Stainless steel flexible connectors with damaged reinforcement 
braid.
    (vi) Internal self-closing stop valves that fail to close or that 
permit leakage through the valve detectable without the use of 
instruments.
    (vii) Pipes or joints that are severely corroded.

[64 FR 28051, May 24, 1999]



Sec. 180.417  Reporting and record retention requirements.

    (a) Vehicle certification. (1) Each owner of a specification cargo 
tank must retain the manufacturer's certificate, the manufacturer's ASME 
U1A data report, where applicable, and related papers certifying that 
the specification cargo tank identified in the documents was 
manufactured and tested in accordance with the applicable specification. 
This would include any certification of emergency discharge control 
systems required by Sec. 173.315(n) of this subchapter or 
Sec. 180.405(m). The owner must retain the documents throughout his 
ownership of the specification cargo tank and for one year thereafter. 
In the event of a change in ownership, the prior owner must retain non-
fading photo copies of these documents for one year.
    (2) Each motor carrier who uses a specification cargo tank motor 
vehicle must obtain a copy of the manufacturer's certificate and related 
papers or the alternative report authorized by paragraph (a)(3)(i) or 
(ii) of this section and retain the documents as specified in this 
paragraph (a)(2). A motor carrier who is not the owner of a cargo tank 
motor vehicle must also retain a copy of the vehicle certification 
report for as long as the cargo tank motor vehicle is used by that 
carrier and for one year thereafter. The information required by this 
section must be maintained at the company's principal place of business 
or at the location where the vehicle is housed or maintained. The 
provisions of this section do not apply to a motor carrier who leases a 
cargo tank for less than 30 days.
    (3) DOT Specification cargo tanks manufactured before September 1, 
1995--(i) Non-ASME Code stamped cargo tanks-- If an owner does not have 
a manufacturer's certificate for a cargo tank and he wishes to certify 
it as a specification cargo tank, the owner must perform appropriate 
tests and inspections, under the direct supervision of a Registered 
Inspector, to determine if the cargo tank conforms with the applicable 
specification. Both the owner and the Registered Inspector must certify 
that the cargo tank fully conforms to the applicable specification. The 
owner must retain the certificate, as specified in this section.
    (ii) ASME Code Stamped cargo tanks. If the owner does not have the 
manufacturer's certificate required by the specification and the 
manufacturer's data report required by the ASME, the

[[Page 1081]]

owner may contact the National Board for a copy of the manufacturer's 
data report, if the cargo tank was registered with the National Board, 
or copy the information contained on the cargo tank's identification and 
ASME Code plates. Additionally, both the owner and the Registered 
Inspector must certify that the cargo tank fully conforms to the 
specification. The owner must retain such documents, as specified in 
this section.
    (b) Test or inspection reporting. Each cargo tank which is tested or 
reinspected as specified in Sec. 180.407 must have a written report, in 
English, prepared in accordance with this paragraph.
    (1) The test or inspection report must include the following:
    (i) Type of test or inspection performed and a listing of all items 
either tested or inspected (a checklist is acceptable);
    (ii) Owner's and manufacturer's serial numbers;
    (iii) DOT Specification;
    (iv) Test Date (Month and year);
    (v) Location of defects found and method used to repair each defect;
    (vi) Name and address of person performing the test, the DOT 
registration number of the facility or the person performing the test;
    (vii) Disposition statement, such as ``Cargo tank returned to 
service'' or ``Cargo tank withdrawn from service''; and
    (viii) DOT registration number of the inspector, and dated signature 
of inspector and owner.
    (2) The owner and the motor carrier, if not the owner, must each 
retain a copy of the test and inspection reports until the next test or 
inspection of the same type is successfully completed. This requirement 
does not apply to a motor carrier leasing a cargo tank for less than 30 
days.
    (c) Additional requirements for Specification MC 330 and MC 331 
cargo tanks. (1) After completion of the pressure test specified in 
Sec. 180.407(g)(3), each motor carrier operating a Specification MC 330 
or MC 331 cargo tank in anhydrous ammonia, liquefied petroleum gas, or 
any other service that may cause stress corrosion cracking, must make a 
written report containing the following information:
    (i) Carrier's name, address of principal place of business, and 
telephone number;
    (ii) Complete identification plate data required by Specification MC 
330 or MC 331, including data required by ASME Code;
    (iii) Carrier's equipment number;
    (iv) A statement indicating whether or not the tank was stress 
relieved after fabrication;
    (v) Name and address of the person performing the test and the date 
of the test;
    (vi) A statement of the nature and severity of any defects found. In 
particular, information must be furnished to indicate the location of 
defects detected, such as in weld, heat-affected zone, the liquid phase, 
the vapor phase, or the head-to-shell seam. If no defect or damage was 
discovered, that fact must be reported;
    (vii) A statement indicating the methods employed to make repairs, 
who made the repairs, and the date they were completed. Also, a 
statement of whether or not the tank was stress relieved after repairs 
and, if so, whether full or local stress relieving was performed;
    (viii) A statement of the disposition of the cargo tank, such as 
``cargo tank scrapped'' or ``cargo tank returned to service''; and
    (ix) A statement of whether or not the cargo tank is used in 
anhydrous ammonia, liquefied petroleum gas, or any other service that 
may cause stress corrosion cracking. Also, if the cargo tank has been 
used in anhydrous ammonia service since the last report, a statement 
indicating whether each shipment of ammonia was certified by its shipper 
as containing 0.2 percent water by weight.
    (2) A copy of the report must be retained by the carrier at its 
principal place of business during the period the cargo tank is in the 
carrier's service and for one year thereafter. Upon a written request 
to, and with the approval of, the Field Administrator, Regional Service 
Center, Federal Motor Carrier Safety Administration for the region in 
which a motor carrier has its principal place of business, the carrier

[[Page 1082]]

may maintain the reports at a regional or terminal office.
    (3) The requirement in paragraph (c)(1) of this section does not 
apply to a motor carrier leasing a cargo tank for less than 30 days.
    (d) Supplying reports. Each carrier offering a DOT Specification 
cargo tank for sale or lease must make available for inspection a copy 
of the most recent report made under this section to each purchaser or 
lessee. Copies of such reports must be provided to the purchaser, or the 
lessee if the cargo tank is leased for more than 30 days.

[Amdt. 180-2, 54 FR 25032, June 12, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 21038, May 
22, 1990; 55 FR 37069, Sept. 7, 1990; 56 FR 27879, June 17, 1991; 58 FR 
12905, Mar. 8, 1993; Amdt. 180-2, 59 FR 1786, Jan. 12, 1994; Amdt. 180-
10, 61 FR 51343, Oct. 1, 1996; 63 FR 52850, Oct. 1, 1998; 64 FR 28052, 
May 24, 1999; 65 FR 50463, Aug. 18, 2000; 67 FR 61016, Sept. 27, 2002]



          Subpart F--Qualification and Maintenance of Tank Cars

    Source: Amdt. 180-8, 60 FR 49079, Sept. 21, 1995, unless otherwise 
noted.



Sec. 180.501  Applicability.

    (a) This subpart prescribes requirements, in addition to those 
contained in parts 107, 171, 172, 173, and 179 of this subchapter, 
applicable to any person who manufactures, fabricates, marks, maintains, 
repairs, inspects, or services tank cars to ensure continuing 
qualification.
    (b) Any person who performs a function prescribed in this part shall 
perform that function in accordance with this part.

[Amdt. 180-8, 60 FR 49079, Sept. 21, 1995, as amended by Amdt. 179-50, 
61 FR 33256, June 26, 1996]



Sec. 180.503  Definitions.

    The definitions contained in Secs. 171.8 and 179.2 of this 
subchapter apply.



Sec. 180.505  Quality assurance program.

    The quality assurance program requirements of Sec. 179.7 of this 
subchapter apply.



Sec. 180.507  Qualification of tank cars.

    (a) Each tank car marked as meeting a ``DOT'' specification or any 
other tank car used for the transportation of a hazardous material must 
meet the requirements of this subchapter or the applicable specification 
to which the tank was constructed.
    (b) Tank car specifications no longer authorized for construction. 
(1) Tank cars prescribed in the following table are authorized for 
service provided they conform to all applicable safety requirements of 
this subchapter:

------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Specification prescribed in the        Other specifications
          current regulations                   permitted          Notes
------------------------------------------------------------------------
105A200W..............................  105A100W.................      1
105A200ALW............................  105A100ALW...............      1
105A300W..............................  ICC-105, 105A300.........
105A400W..............................  105A400..................
105A500W..............................  105A500..................
105A600W..............................  105A600..................
106A500X..............................  ICC-27, BE-27, 106A500...
106A800X..............................  106A800..................
107A * * * *..........................  .........................      2
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note 1: Tanks built as Specification DOT 105A100W or DOT 105A100ALW may
  be altered and converted to DOT 105A200W and DOT 105A200ALW,
  respectively.
Note 2: The test pressures of tanks built in the United States between
  January 1, 1941 and December 31, 1955, may be increased to conform to
  Specification 107A. Original and revised test pressure markings must
  be indicated and may be shown on the tank or on a plate attached to
  the bulkhead of the car. Tanks built before 1941 are not authorized.

    (2) For each tank car conforming to and used under an exemption 
issued before October 1, 1984, which authorized the transportation of a 
cryogenic liquid in a tank car, the owner or operator shall remove the 
exemption number stenciled on the tank car and stamp the tank car with 
the appropriate Class DOT-113 specification followed by the applicable 
exemption number. For example: DOT-113D60W-E * * * * (asterisks to be 
replaced by the exemption number). The owner or operator marking a tank 
car in this manner shall retain on file a copy of the last exemption in 
effect during the period the tank car is in service. No person may 
modify a tank car marked under this paragraph unless the modification is 
in compliance with an applicable requirement or provision of this 
subchapter.
    (3) Specification DOT-113A175W, DOT-113C60W, DOT-113D60W, and DOT-
113D120W tank cars may continue in use, but new construction is not 
authorized.

[[Page 1083]]

    (4) Class DOT 105A and 105S tank cars used to transport hydrogen 
chloride, refrigerated liquid under the terms of DOT-E 3992 may continue 
in service, but new construction is not authorized.



Sec. 180.509  Requirements for inspection and test of specification tank cars.

    (a) General. (1) Each tank car facility shall evaluate a tank car 
according to the requirements specified in Sec. 180.511.
    (2) Each tank car that successfully passes a periodic inspection and 
test must be marked as prescribed in Sec. 180.515.
    (3) A written report as specified in Sec. 180.517(b) must be 
prepared for each tank car that is inspected and tested under this 
section.
    (b) Conditions requiring inspection and test of tank cars. Without 
regard to any other periodic inspection and test requirements, a tank 
car must have an appropriate inspection and test according to the type 
of defect and the type of maintenance or repair performed if:
    (1) The tank car shows evidence of abrasion, corrosion, cracks, 
dents, distortions, defects in welds, or any other condition that makes 
the tank car unsafe for transportation. An example is if maintenance is 
performed to replace a fitting, then only a leakage pressure test needs 
to be performed.
    (2) The tank car was in an accident and damaged to an extent that 
may adversely affect its capability to retain its contents.
    (3) The tank bears evidence of damage caused by fire.
    (4) The Associate Administrator for Safety, FRA, requires it based 
on the existence of probable cause that a tank car or a class or design 
of tank cars may be in an unsafe operating condition.
    (c) Frequency of inspection and tests. Each tank car shall have an 
inspection and test according to the requirements of this paragraph.
    (1) For Class 107 tank cars and tank cars of riveted construction, 
the tank car must have a hydrostatic pressure test and visual inspection 
conforming to the requirements in effect prior to July 1, 1996, for the 
tank specification.
    (2) For Class DOT 113 tank cars, see Sec. 173.319(e) of this 
subchapter.
    (3) For fusion welded tank cars, each tank car must have an 
inspection and test in accordance with paragraphs (d) through (k) of 
this section.
    (i) For cars transporting materials not corrosive to the tank, every 
10 years for the tank and service equipment (i.e., filling and 
discharge, venting, safety, heating, and measuring devices).
    (ii) For non-lined or non-coated tank cars transporting materials 
corrosive to the tank, an interval based on the following formula, but 
in no case shall the interval exceed 10 years for the tank and 5 years 
for service equipment:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC13NO91.039

Where:

i is the inspection and test interval.
t1 is the actual thickness.
t2 is the allowable minimum thickness under paragraph (g) of 
this section.
r is the corrosion rate per year.

    (iii) For lined or coated tank cars transporting a material 
corrosive to the tank, every 10 years for the tank, 5 years for the 
service equipment.
    (A) When a lining or coating is applied to protect the tank shell 
from the lading, the owner of the lining or coating shall determine the 
periodic inspection interval, test technique, and acceptance criteria 
for the lining or coating. The owner must maintain at its principal 
place of business all supporting documentation used to make such a 
determination, such as the lining or coating manufacturer's recommended 
inspection interval, test technique, and acceptance criteria. The 
supporting documentation must be made available to FRA upon request.
    (B) The owner of the lining or coating shall provide the periodic 
inspection interval, test technique, and acceptance criteria for the 
lining or coating to the person responsible for qualifying the lining 
and coating.
    (d) Visual inspection. At a minimum, each tank car facility must 
visually inspect the tank externally and internally as follows:
    (1) An internal inspection of the tank shell and heads for abrasion, 
corrosion, cracks, dents, distortions, defects in welds, or any other 
condition that

[[Page 1084]]

makes the tank car unsafe for transportation, and except in the areas 
where insulation or a thermal protection system precludes it, an 
external inspection of the tank shell and heads for abrasion, corrosion, 
cracks, dents, distortions, defects in welds, or any other condition 
that makes the tank car unsafe for transportation;
    (2) An inspection of the piping, valves, fittings, and gaskets for 
indications of corrosion and other conditions that make the tank car 
unsafe for transportation;
    (3) An inspection for missing or loose bolts, nuts, or elements that 
make the tank car unsafe for transportation;
    (4) An inspection of all closures on the tank car for proper 
securement in a tool tight condition and an inspection of the protective 
housings for proper securement;
    (5) An inspection of excess flow valves having threaded seats for 
tightness; and
    (6) An inspection of the required markings on the tank car for 
legibility.
    (e) Structural integrity inspections and tests. At a minimum, each 
tank car facility shall inspect the tank car for structural integrity as 
specified in this section. The structural integrity inspection and test 
shall include all transverse fillet welds greater than 0.64 cm (0.25 
inch) within 121.92 cm (4 feet) of the bottom longitudinal center line; 
the termination of longitudinal fillet welds greater than 0.64 cm (0.25 
inch) within 121.92 cm (4 feet) of the bottom longitudinal center line; 
and all tank shell butt welds within 60.96 cm (2 feet) of the bottom 
longitudinal center line by one or more of the following inspection and 
test methods to determine that the welds are in proper condition:
    (1) Dye penetrant test;
    (2) Radiography test;
    (3) Magnetic particle test;
    (4) Ultrasonic test; or
    (5) Optically-aided visual inspection (e.g., magnifiers, 
fiberscopes, borescopes, and machine vision technology).
    (f) Thickness tests. (1) Each tank car facility shall measure the 
thickness of the tank car shell, heads, sumps, domes, and nozzles on 
each tank car by using a device capable of accurately measuring the 
thickness to within 0.05 mm (0.002 inch).
    (2) After repairs, alterations, conversions or modifications of a 
tank car that result in a reduction to the tank car shell thickness, the 
tank car facility shall measure the thickness of the tank car shell in 
the area of reduced shell thickness to ensure that the shell thickness 
conforms to paragraph (g) of this section.
    (g) Service life shell thickness allowance. (1) A tank car found 
with a shell thickness below the required minimum thickness after 
forming for its specification, as stated in part 179 of this subchapter, 
may continue in service if:
    (i) Construction of the tank car shell and heads is from carbon 
steel, stainless steel, aluminum, nickel, or manganese-molybdenum steel; 
and
    (ii) Any reduction in the required minimum thickness of the tank 
shell or head is not more than that provided in the following table:

                                      Allowable Shell Thickness Reductions
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                   Class DOT 103, 104, 111, and 115 tank   Class DOT 105, 109, 112, and 114 tank
                                                   cars                                    cars
           Damage type           -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                  Top shell and tank                      Top shell and tank
                                         head            Bottom shell            head            Bottom shell
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Corrosion.......................  3.17 mm (0.125      1.58 mm (0.063      0.79 mm (0.031      0.79 mm (0.031
                                   inch).              inch).              inch).              inch).
Corrosion and mechanical........  3.17 mm (0.125      1.58 mm (0.063      0.79 mm (0.031      0.79 mm (0.031
                                   inch).              inch).              inch).              inch).
Corrosion, local................  4.76 mm (0.188      3.17 mm (0.125      1.58 mm (0.063      1.58 mm (0.063
                                   inch).              inch).              inch).              inch).
Mechanical, local...............  3.17 mm (0.125      1.58 mm (0.063      1.58 mm (0.063      1.58 mm (0.063
                                   inch).              inch).              inch).              inch).
Corrosion and mechanical, local.  4.76 mm (0.188      3.17 mm (0.125      1.58 mm (0.063      1.58 mm (0.063
                                   inch).              inch).              inch).              inch).
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Notes:
1. The perimeter for a local reduction may not exceed a 60.96 cm (24 inch) perimeter. Local reductions in the
  top shell must be separated from other reductions in the top shell by at least 40.64 cm (16 inches). The
  cumulative perimeter for local reductions in the bottom shell may not exceed 182.88 cm (72 inches).
2. Any reduction in the tank car shell may not affect the structural strength of the tank car so that the tank
  car shell no longer conforms to Section 6.2 of the AAR Specifications for Tank Cars.
3. Any reduction applies only to the outer shell for Class DOT 115 tank cars.
4. For Class DOT 103 and 104 tank cars, the inside diameter may not exceed 243.84 cm (96 inches).


[[Page 1085]]

    (h) Safety system inspections. At a minimum, each tank car facility 
must inspect:
    (1) Tank car thermal protection systems, tank head puncture 
resistance systems, coupler vertical restraint systems, and systems used 
to protect discontinuities (i.e., skid protection and protective 
housings) to ensure their integrity.
    (2) Reclosing pressure relief devices by:
    (i) Removing the reclosing pressure relief device from the tank car 
for inspection; and
    (ii) Testing the reclosing pressure relief device with air or 
another gas to ensure that it conforms to the start-to-discharge 
pressure for the specification or hazardous material in this subchapter.
    (i) Lining and coating inspection and test. When this subchapter 
requires a lining or coating, at a minimum, each tank car facility must 
inspect the lining or coating installed on the tank car according to the 
inspection interval test technique, and acceptance criteria established 
by the owner of the lining or coating in accordance with paragraph 
(c)(3)(iii) of this section.
    (j) Leakage pressure test. (1) After reassembly of a tank car or 
service equipment, a tank car facility must perform a leak test on the 
tank or service equipment to detect leakage, if any, between manway 
covers, cover plates, and service equipment. The test may be conducted 
with the hazardous material in the tank. When the test pressure exceeds 
the start-to-discharge or burst pressure of a pressure relief device, 
the device must be rendered inoperative. The written procedures and test 
method for leak testing must ensure for the sensitivity and reliability 
of the test method and for the serviceability of components to prevent 
premature failure.
    (2) Interior heater systems must be tested hydrostatically at 13.87 
Bar (200 psig) and must show no signs of leakage.
    (k) Alternative inspection and test procedures. In lieu of the other 
requirements of this section, a person may use an alternative inspection 
and test procedure or interval based on a damage-tolerance fatigue 
evaluation (that includes a determination of the probable locations and 
modes of damage due to fatigue, corrosion, or accidental damage), when 
the evaluation is examined by the Association of American Railroads Tank 
Car Committee and approved by the Associate Administrator for Safety, 
FRA.
    (l) Inspection and test compliance date for tank cars. After July 1, 
2000, each tank car with a metal jacket or with a thermal protection 
system shall have an inspection and test conforming to this section no 
later than the date the tank car requires a periodic hydrostatic 
pressure test (i.e., the marked due date on the tank car for the 
hydrostatic test).
    (2) After July 1, 1998, each tank car without a metal jacket shall 
have an inspection and test conforming to this section no later than the 
date the tank car requires a periodic hydrostatic pressure test (i.e., 
the marked due date on the tank car for the hydrostatic test).
    (3) For tank cars on a 20-year periodic hydrostatic pressure test 
interval (i.e., Class DOT 103W, 104W, 111A60W1, 111A100W1, and 111A100W3 
tank cars), the next inspection and test date is the midpoint between 
the compliance date in paragraph (l)(1) or (2) of this section and the 
remaining years until the tank would have had a hydrostatic pressure 
test.

[Amdt. 180-8, 60 FR 49079, Sept. 21, 1995, as amended by Amdt. 179-50, 
61 FR 33256, June 26, 1996; 62 FR 51561, Oct. 1, 1997; 63 FR 52851, Oct. 
1, 1998; 66 FR 45391, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 180.511  Acceptable results of inspections and tests.

    Provided it conforms with other applicable requirements of this 
subchapter, a tank car is qualified for use if it successfully passes 
the following inspections and tests conducted in accordance with this 
subpart:
    (a) Visual inspection. A tank car successfully passes the visual 
inspection when the inspection shows no structural defect that may cause 
leakage from or failure of the tank before the next inspection and test 
interval.
    (b) Structural integrity inspection and test. A tank car 
successfully passes the structural integrity inspection and test when it 
shows no structural defect that

[[Page 1086]]

may initiate cracks or propagate cracks and cause failure of the tank 
before the next inspection and test interval.
    (c) Service life shell thickness. A tank car successfully passes the 
service life shell thickness inspection when the tank shell and heads 
show no thickness reduction below that allowed in Sec. 180.509(g).
    (d) Safety system inspection. A tank car successfully passes the 
safety system inspection when each thermal protection system, tank head 
puncture resistance system, coupler vertical restraint system, and 
system used to protect discontinuities (e.g., breakage grooves on bottom 
outlets and protective housings) on the tank car conform to this 
subchapter.
    (e) Lining and coating inspection. A tank car successfully passes 
the lining and coating inspection and test when the lining or coating 
conforms to the owner's acceptance criteria.
    (f) Leakage pressure test. A tank car successfully passes the 
leakage pressure test when all product piping, fittings and closures 
show no indication of leakage.
    (g) Hydrostatic test. A Class 107 tank car or a riveted tank car 
successfully passes the hydrostatic test when it shows no leakage, 
distortion, excessive permanent expansion, or other evidence of weakness 
that might render the tank car unsafe for transportation service.

[Amdt. 180-8, 60 FR 49079, Sept. 21, 1995, as amended by Amdt. 179-50, 
61 FR 33256, June 26, 1996; 66 FR 45187, Aug. 28, 2001]



Sec. 180.513  Repairs, alterations, conversions, and modifications.

    (a) In order to repair tank cars, the tank car facility must comply 
with the requirements of appendix R of the AAR Specifications for Tank 
Cars.
    (b) Unless the exterior tank car shell or interior tank car jacket 
has a protective coating, after a repair that requires the complete 
removal of the tank car jacket, the exterior tank car shell and the 
interior tank car jacket must have a protective coating applied to 
prevent the deterioration of the tank shell and tank jacket.



Sec. 180.515  Markings.

    (a) When a tank car passes the required inspection and test with 
acceptable results, the tank car facility shall mark the date of the 
inspection and test and the due date of the next inspection and test on 
the tank car in accordance with appendix C of the AAR Specifications for 
Tank Cars. When a tank car facility performs multiple inspection and 
test at the same time, one date may be used to satisfy the requirements 
of this section. One date also may be shown when multiple inspection and 
test have the same due date.
    (b) Pressure converted tank cars must have the new specification and 
conversion date permanently marked in letters and figures at least 0.95 
cm (0.375 inch) high on the outside of the manway nozzle or the edge of 
the manway nozzle flange on the left side of the car. The marking may 
have the last numeral of the specification number omitted (e.g., ``DOT 
111A100W'' instead of ``DOT 111A100W1'').
    (c) When pressure tested within six months of installation and 
protected from deterioration, the test date marking of a reclosing 
pressure relief device is the installation date on the tank car.

[Amdt. 180-8, 60 FR 49079, Sept. 21, 1995, as amended by Amdt. 179-50, 
61 FR 33256, June 26, 1996; 63 FR 52851, Oct. 1, 1998; 66 FR 45391, Aug. 
28, 2001]



Sec. 180.517  Reporting and record retention requirements.

    (a) Certification and representation. Each owner of a specification 
tank car shall retain the certificate of construction (AAR Form 4-2) and 
related papers certifying that the manufacture of the specification tank 
car identified in the documents is in accordance with the applicable 
specification. The owner shall retain the documents throughout the 
period of ownership of the specification tank car and for one year 
thereafter. Upon a change of ownership, the requirements of Section 
1.3.15 of the AAR Specifications for Tank Cars apply.
    (b) Inspection and test reporting. Each tank car that is inspected 
as specified in Sec. 180.509 must have a written report, in English, 
prepared according to this

[[Page 1087]]

paragraph. The owner must retain a copy of the inspection and test 
reports until successfully completing the next inspection and test of 
the same type. The inspection and test report must include the 
following:
    (1) Type of inspection and test performed (a checklist is 
acceptable);
    (2) The results of each inspection and test performed;
    (3) Owner's reporting mark;
    (4) DOT Specification;
    (5) Inspection and test date (month and year);
    (6) Location and description of defects found and method used to 
repair each defect;
    (7) The name and address of the tank car facility and the signature 
of inspector.



Sec. 180.519  Periodic retest and inspection of tank cars other than single-unit tank car tanks.

    (a) General. Unless otherwise provided in this subpart, tanks 
designed to be removed from cars for filling and emptying and tanks 
built to a Class DOT 107A specification and their safety relief devices 
must be retested periodically as specified in Retest Table 1 of 
paragraph (b)(5) of this section. Retests may be made at any time during 
the calendar year the retest falls due.
    (b) Pressure test. (1) Each tank must be subjected to the specified 
hydrostatic pressure and its permanent expansion determined. Pressure 
must be maintained for 30 seconds and for as long as necessary to secure 
complete expansion of the tank. Before testing, the pressure gauge must 
be shown to be accurate within 1 percent at test measure. The expansion 
gauge must be shown to be accurate, at test pressure, to within 1 
percent. Expansion must be recorded in cubic cm. Permanent volumetric 
expansion may not exceed 10 percent of total volumetric expansion at 
test pressure and the tank must not leak or show evidence of distress.
    (2) Each tank, except tanks built to specification DOT 107A, must 
also be subjected to interior air pressure test of at least 100 psig 
under conditions favorable to detection of any leakage. No leaks may 
appear.
    (3) Safety relief valves must be retested by air or gas, must start-
to-discharge at or below the prescribed pressure and must be vapor tight 
at or above the prescribed pressure.
    (4) Rupture discs and fusible plugs must be removed from the tank 
and visually inspected.
    (5) Tanks must be retested as specified in Retest Table 1 of this 
paragraph (b)(5), and before returning to service after repairs 
involving welding or heat treatment:

                                                 Retest Table 1
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                     Retest interval--years   Minimum Retest pressure--   Pressure relief valve
                                   --------------------------           psig                 pressure--psig
                                                             ---------------------------------------------------
           Specification                           Pressure       Tank
                                        Tank        relief    hydrostatic    Tank air    Start-to-   Vapor tight
                                                  devices d   expansion c      test      discharge
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DOT 27............................            5            2          500          100          375          300
106A500...........................            5            2          500          100          375          300
106A500X..........................            5            2          500          100          375          300
106A800...........................            5            2          800          100          600          480
106A800X..........................            5            2          800          100          600          480
106A800NCI........................            5            2          800          100          600          480
107A * * * *......................           d5           a2          (b)         None         None         None
110A500-W.........................            5            2          500          100          375          300
110A600-W.........................            5            2          600          100          500          360
110A800-W.........................            5            2          800          100          600          480
110A1000-W........................            5            2        1,000          100          750          600
BE-27.............................            5            2          500          100          375          300
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Notes:
a If DOT 107A * * * * tanks are used for transportation of flammable gases, one rupture disc from each car must
  be burst at the interval prescribed. The sample disc must burst at a pressure not exceeding the marked test
  pressure of the tank and not less than 70 percent of the marked test pressure. If the sample disc does not
  burst within the prescribed limits, all discs on the car must be replaced.
b The hydrostatic expansion test pressure must at least equal the marked test pressure.
c See Sec.  180.519(b)(1).
d Safety relief valves of the spring-loaded type on tanks used exclusively for fluorinated hydrocarbons and
  mixtures thereof which are free from corroding components may be retested every 5 years.


[[Page 1088]]

    (6) The month and year of test, followed by a ``V'' if visually 
inspected as described in paragraph (c) of this section, must be plainly 
and permanently stamped into the metal of one head or chime of each tank 
with successful test results; for example, 01-90 for January 1990. On 
DOT 107A**** tanks, the date must be stamped into the metal of the 
marked end, except that if all tanks mounted on a car have been tested, 
the date may be stamped into the metal of a plate permanently applied to 
the bulkhead on the ``A'' end of the car. Dates of previous tests and 
all prescribed markings must be kept legible.
    (c) Visual inspection. Tanks of Class DOT 106A and DOT 110A-W 
specifications (Secs. 179.300 and 179.301 of this subchapter) used 
exclusively for transporting fluorinated hydrocarbons and mixtures 
thereof, and that are free from corroding components, may be given a 
periodic complete internal and external visual inspection in place of 
the periodic hydrostatic retest. Visual inspections shall be made only 
by competent persons. The tank must be accepted or rejected in 
accordance with the criteria in CGA Pamphlet C-6.
    (d) Written records. The results of the pressure test and visual 
inspection must be recorded on a suitable data sheet. Completed copies 
of these reports must be retained by the owner and by the person 
performing the pressure test and visual inspection as long as the tank 
is in service. The information to be recorded and checked on these data 
sheets are: Date of test and inspection; DOT specification number; tank 
identification (registered symbol and serial number, date of manufacture 
and ownership symbol); type of protective coating (painted, etc., and 
statement as to need for refinishing or recoating); conditions checked 
(leakage, corrosion, gouges, dents or digs, broken or damaged chime or 
protective ring, fire, fire damage, internal condition); test pressure; 
results of tests; and disposition of tank (returned to service, returned 
to manufacturer for repair, or scrapped); and identification of the 
person conducting the retest or inspection.

[Amdt. 180-8, 60 FR 49079, Sept. 21, 1995, as amended by Amdt. 179-50, 
61 FR 33257, June 26, 1996; 65 FR 58633, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45187, 
45392, Aug. 28, 2001]



       Subpart G--Qualification and Maintenance of Portable Tanks

    Source: 66 FR 33453, June 21, 2001, unless otherwise noted.



Sec. 180.601  Applicability.

    This subpart prescribes requirements, in addition to those contained 
in parts 107, 171, 172, 173, and 178 of this subchapter, applicable to 
any person responsible for the continuing qualification, maintenance or 
periodic retesting of a portable tank.



Sec. 180.603  Qualification of portable tanks.

    (a) Each portable tank used for the transportation of hazardous 
materials must be an authorized packaging.
    (b) To qualify as an authorized packaging, each portable tank must 
conform to the requirements of this subchapter and the applicable design 
specification to which the portable tank was constructed.
    (c) The following portable tanks are authorized for use provided 
they conform to all applicable safety requirements of this subchapter: 
51, 56, 57, 60, IM 101, IM 102 and UN portable tanks.
    (d) A portable tank that also meets the definition of ``container'' 
in 49 CFR 450.3(a)(3) must conform to the requirements in parts 450 
through 453 of this title for compliance with Annex II of the Convention 
for Safe Containers (CSC).
    (e) Exemption portable tanks based on DOT 51 portable tanks. The 
owner of a portable tank constructed in accordance with and used under 
an exemption issued prior to August 31, 1996, which was in conformance 
with the requirements for Specification DOT 51 portable tanks with the 
exception of the location of fill and discharge outlets, shall examine 
the portable tank and its design to determine if it meets the

[[Page 1089]]

outletrequirements in effect on October 1, 1996. If the owner determines 
that the portable tank is in compliance with all requirements of the DOT 
51 specification, the exemption number stenciled on the portable tank 
shall be removed and the specification plate (or a plate placed adjacent 
to the specification plate) shall be durably marked ``DOT 51-E*****'' 
(where ***** is to be replaced by the exemption number). During the 
period the portable tank is in service, and for one year thereafter, the 
owner of the portable tank must retain on file, at its principal place 
of business, a copy of the last exemption in effect.



Sec. 180.605  Requirements for periodic testing, inspection and repair of portable tanks.

    (a) A portable tank constructed in accordance with a DOT 
specification for which a test or inspection specified in this subpart 
has become due, must be tested or inspected prior to being returned for 
transportation.
    (b) Conditions requiring test and inspection of portable tanks. 
Without regard to any other test or inspection requirements, a 
Specification or UN portable tank must be tested and inspected in 
accordance with this section prior to further use if any of the 
following conditions exist:
    (1) The portable tank shows evidence of dents, corroded or abraded 
areas, leakage, or any other condition that might render it unsafe for 
transportation service.
    (2) The portable tank has been in an accident and has been damaged 
to an extent that may adversely affect its ability to retain the 
hazardous material.
    (3) The portable tank has been out of hazardous materials 
transportation service for a period of one year or more.
    (4) The portable tank has been modified from its original design 
specification.
    (5) The portable tank is in an unsafe operating condition based on 
the existence of probable cause.
    (c) Schedule for periodic inspections and tests. Each Specification 
portable tank must be tested and inspected in accordance with the 
following schedule:
    (1) Each IM or UN portable tank must be given an initial inspection 
and test before being placed into service, a periodic inspection and 
test at least once every 5 years, and an intermediate periodic 
inspection and test at least every 2.5 years following the initial 
inspection and the last 5 year periodic inspection and test.
    (2) Each Specification 51 portable tank must be given a periodic 
inspection and test at least once every five years.
    (3) Each Specification 56 or 57 portable tank must be given a 
periodic inspection and test at least once every 2.5 years.
    (4) Each Specification 60 portable tank must be given a periodic 
inspection and test at the end of the first 4-year period after the 
original test; at least once every 2 years thereafter up to a total of 
12 years of service; and at least once annually thereafter. Retesting is 
not required on a rubber-lined tank except before each relining.
    (d) Intermediate periodic inspection and test. For IM and UN 
portable tanks the intermediate 2.5 year periodic inspection and test 
must include at least an internal and external examination of the 
portable tank and its fittings taking into account the hazardous 
materials intended to be transported; a leakage test; and a test of the 
satisfactory operation of all service equipment. Sheathing, thermal 
insulation, etc. need only be removed to the extent required for 
reliable appraisal of the condition of the portable tank. For portable 
tanks intended for the transportation of a single hazardous material, 
the internal examination may be waived if it is leakage tested in 
accordance with the procedures in paragraph (h) of this section prior to 
each filling, or if approved by the Associate Administrator. Portable 
tanks used for dedicated transportation of refrigerated liquefied gases 
that are not fitted with inspection openings are excepted from the 
internal inspection requirement.
    (e) Periodic inspection and test. The 5 year periodic inspection and 
test must include an internal and external examination and, unless 
excepted, a pressure test as specified in this section.

[[Page 1090]]

Sheathing, thermal insulation, etc. need only to be removed to the 
extent required for reliable appraisal of the condition of the portable 
tank. Except for DOT Specification 56 and 57 portable tanks, reclosing 
pressure relief devices must be removed from the tank and tested 
separately unless they can be tested while installed on the portable 
tank. For portable tanks where the shell and equipment have been 
pressure-tested separately, after assembly they must be subjected 
together to a leakage test and effectively tested and inspected for 
corrosion. Portable tanks used for the transportation of refrigerated, 
liquefied gases are excepted from the requirement for internal 
inspection and the hydraulic pressure test during the 5-year periodic 
inspection and test, if the portable tanks were pressure tested to a 
minimum test pressure of 1.3 times the design pressure using an inert 
gas as prescribed in Sec. 178.338-16(a) and (b) of this subchapter 
before putting the portable tank into service initially and after any 
exceptional inspections and tests specified in paragraph (f) of this 
section.
    (f) Exceptional inspection and test. The exceptional inspection and 
test is necessary when a portable tank shows evidence of damaged or 
corroded areas, or leakage, or other conditions that indicate a 
deficiency that could affect the integrity of the portable tank. The 
extent of the exceptional inspection and test must depend on the amount 
of damage or deterioration of the portable tank. It must include at 
least the inspection and a pressure test according to paragraph (e) of 
this section. Pressure relief devices need not be tested or replaced 
unless there is reason to believe the relief devices have been affected 
by the damage or deterioration.
    (g) Internal and external examination. The internal and external 
examinations must ensure that:
    (1) The shell is inspected for pitting, corrosion, or abrasions, 
dents, distortions, defects in welds or any other conditions, including 
leakage, that might render the portable tank unsafe for transportation;
    (2) The piping, valves, and gaskets are inspected for corroded 
areas, defects, and other conditions, including leakage, that might 
render the portable tank unsafe for filling, discharge or 
transportation;
    (3) Devices for tightening manhole covers are operative and there is 
no leakage at manhole covers or gaskets;
    (4) Missing or loose bolts or nuts on any flanged connection or 
blank flange are replaced or tightened;
    (5) All emergency devices and valves are free from corrosion, 
distortion and any damage or defect that could prevent their normal 
operation. Remote closure devices and self-closing stop-valves must be 
operated to demonstrate proper operation;
    (6) Required markings on the portable tank are legible and in 
accordance with the applicable requirements; and
    (7) The framework, the supports and the arrangements for lifting the 
portable tank are in satisfactory condition.
    (h) Pressure test procedures for specification 51, 57, 60, IM or UN 
portable tanks. (1) Each Specification 57 portable tank must be leak 
tested by a minimum sustained air pressure of at least 3 psig applied to 
the entire tank. Each Specification 51 or 56 portable tank must be 
tested by a minimum pressure (air or hydrostatic) of at least 2 psig or 
at least one and one-half times the design pressure (maximum allowable 
working pressure, or re-rated pressure) of the tank, whichever is 
greater. The leakage test for portable tanks used for refrigerated 
liquefied gas must be performed at 90% of MAWP. Leakage tests for all 
other portable tanks must be at a pressure of at least 25% of MAWP. 
During each air pressure test, the entire surface of all joints under 
pressure must be coated with or immersed in a solution of soap and 
water, heavy oil, or other material suitable for the purpose of 
detecting leaks. The pressure must be held for a period of time 
sufficiently long to assure detection of leaks, but in no case less than 
five minutes. During the air or hydrostatic test, relief devices may be 
removed, but all the closure fittings must be in place and the relief 
device openings plugged. Lagging need not be removed from a lagged tank 
if it is possible to maintain the required test pressure at constant 
temperature with the tank disconnected from the source of pressure.

[[Page 1091]]

    (2) Each Specification 60 portable tank must be retested by 
completely filling the tank with water or other liquid having a similar 
viscosity, the temperature of the liquid must not exceed 37.7  deg.C 
(100  deg.F) during the test, and applying a pressure of 60 psig. The 
portable tank must be capable of holding the prescribed pressure for at 
least 10 minutes without leakage, evidence of impending failure, or 
failure. All closures shall be in place while the test is made and the 
pressure shall be gauged at the top of the tank. Safety devices and/or 
vents shall be plugged during this test.
    (3) Each Specification IM or UN portable tank, except for UN 
portable tanks used for non-refrigerated and refrigerated liquefied 
gases, and all piping, valves and accessories, except pressure relief 
devices, must be hydrostatically tested with water, or other liquid of 
similar density and viscosity, to a pressure not less than 150% of its 
maximum allowable working pressure. UN portable tanks used for the 
transportation of non-refrigerated liquefied gases must be 
hydrostatically tested with water, or other liquid of similar density 
and viscosity, to a pressure not less than 130% of its maximum allowable 
working pressure. UN portable tanks used for the transportation of 
refrigerated liquefied gases may be tested hydrostatically or 
pneumatically using an inert gas to a pressure not less than 1.3 times 
the design pressure. For pneumatic testing, due regard for protection of 
all personnel must be taken because of the potential hazard involved in 
such a test. The pneumatic test pressure in the portable tank must be 
reached by gradually increasing the pressure to one-half of the test 
pressure. Thereafter, the test pressure must be increased in steps of 
approximately one-tenth of the test pressure until the required test 
pressure has been reached. The pressure must then be reduced to a value 
equal to four-fifths of the test pressure and held for a sufficient time 
to permit inspection of the portable tank for leaks. The minimum test 
pressure for a portable tank is determined on the basis of the hazardous 
materials that are intended to be transported in the portable tanks. For 
liquid, solid and non-refrigerated liquefied gases, the minimum test 
pressure for specific hazardous materials are specified in the 
applicable T Codes assigned to a particular hazardous material in the 
Sec. 172.101 Table of this subchapter. While under pressure the tank 
shall be inspected for leakage, distortion, or any other condition which 
might render the tank unsafe for service. A portable tank fails to meet 
the requirements of the pressure test if, during the test, there is 
permanent distortion of the tank exceeding that permitted by the 
applicable specification; if there is any leakage; or if there are any 
deficiencies that would render the portable tank unsafe for 
transportation. Any portable tank that fails must be rejected and may 
not be used again for the transportation of a hazardous material unless 
the tank is adequately repaired, and, thereafter, a successful test is 
conducted in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph. An 
approval agency shall witness the hydrostatic or pneumatic test. Any 
damage or deficiency that might render the portable tank unsafe for 
service shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the witnessing approval 
agency. The repaired tank must be retested to the original pressure test 
requirements. Upon successful completion of the hydrostatic or pneumatic 
test, as applicable, the witnessing approval agency shall apply its 
name, identifying mark or identifying number in accordance with 
paragraph (k) of this section.
    (i) Rejection criteria. When evidence of any unsafe condition is 
discovered, the portable tank may not be returned to service until it 
has been repaired and the pressure test is repeated and passed.
    (j) Repair. The repair of a portable tank is authorized, provided 
such repairs are made in accordance with the requirements prescribed in 
the specification for the tank's original design and construction. In 
addition to any other provisions of the specification, no portable tank 
may be repaired so as to cause leakage or cracks or so as to increase 
the likelihood of leakage or cracks near areas of stress concentration 
due to cooling metal shrinkage in welding operations, sharp fillets, 
reversal of stresses, or otherwise. No field

[[Page 1092]]

welding may be done except to non-pressure parts. Any cutting, burning 
or welding operations on the shell of an IM or UN portable tank must be 
done with the approval of the approval agency and be done in accordance 
with the requirements of this subchapter, taking into account the 
pressure vessel code used for the construction of the shell. A pressure 
test to the original test pressure must be performed after the work is 
completed.
    (k) Inspection and test markings. Each IM or UN portable tank must 
be durably and legibly marked, in English, with the date (month and 
year) of the last pressure test, the identification markings of the 
approval agency witnessing the test, when required, and the date of the 
last visual inspection. The marking must be placed on or near the metal 
identification plate, in letters not less than 3 mm (0.118 inches) high 
when on the metal identification plate, and 12 mm (0.5 inches) high when 
on the portable tank.
    (l) Record retention. The owner of each portable tank or his 
authorized agent shall retain a written record of the date and results 
of all required inspections and tests, including an ASME manufacturer's 
date report, if applicable, and the name and address of the person 
performing the inspection or test, in accordance with the applicable 
specification. The manufacturer's data report, including a 
certificate(s) signed by the manufacturer, and the authorized design 
approval agency, as applicable, indicating compliance with the 
applicable specification of the portable tank, must be retained in the 
files of the owner, or his authorized agent, during the time that such 
portable tank is used for such service, except for Specifications 56 and 
57 portable tanks.

[Amdt. 180-2, 54 FR 25032, June 12, 1989, as amended at 67 FR 15744, 
Apr. 3, 2002]

   Appendix A to Part 180--Internal Self-closing Stop Valve Emergency 
               Closure Test for Liquefied Compressed Gases

    1. In performing this test, all internal self-closing stop valves 
must be opened. Each emergency discharge control remote actuator (on-
truck and off-truck) must be operated to ensure that each internal self-
closingstop valve's lever, piston, or other valve indicator has moved to 
the closed position.
    2. On pump-actuated pressure differential internal valves, the 
three-way toggle valve handle or its cable attachment must be activated 
to verify that the toggle handle moves to the closed position.

[64 FR 28052, May 24, 1999, as amended at 67 FR 15744, Apr. 3, 2002]

  Appendix B to Part 180--Acceptable Internal Self-closing Stop Valve 
  Leakage Tests for Cargo Tanks Transporting Liquefied Compressed Gases

    For internal self-closing stop valve leakage testing, leakage is 
defined as any leakage through the internal self-closing valve or to the 
atmosphere that is detectable when the valve is in the closed position. 
On some valves this will require the closure of the pressure by-pass 
port.

                          (a) Meter Creep Test.

    1. An operator of a cargo tank equipped with a calibrated meter may 
check the internal self-closing stop valve for leakage through the valve 
seat using the meter as a flow measurement indicator. The test is 
initiated by starting the delivery process or returning product to the 
cargo tank through the delivery system. This may be performed at an 
idle. After the flow is established, the operator closes the internal 
self-closing stop valve and monitors the meter flow. The meter flow must 
stop within 30 seconds with no meter creep within 5 seconds after the 
meter stops.
    2. On pump-actuated pressure differential internal self-closing stop 
valves, the valve must be closed with the remote actuator to assure that 
it is functioning. On other types of internal self-closing stop valves, 
the valve(s) may be closed using either the normal valve control or the 
discharge control system (e.g., remote).
    3. Rejection criteria: Any detectable meter creep within the first 
five seconds after initial meter stoppage.

               (b) Internal Self-Closing Stop Valve Test.

    An operator of a cargo tank that is not equipped with a meter may 
check the internal self-closing stop valve(s) for leakage as follows:
    1. The internal self-closing stop valve must be in the closed 
position.
    2. All of the material in the downstream piping must be evacuated, 
and the piping must be returned to atmospheric temperature and pressure.
    3. The outlet must be monitored for 30 seconds for detectable 
leakage.

[[Page 1093]]

    4. Rejection criteria. Any detectable leakage is considered 
unacceptable.

[64 FR 28052, May 24, 1999]



PARTS 181-185  [RESERVED]


[[Page 1095]]



                              FINDING AIDS




  --------------------------------------------------------------------

  A list of CFR titles, subtitles, chapters, subchapters and parts and 
an alphabetical list of agencies publishing in the CFR are included in 
the CFR Index and Finding Aids volume to the Code of Federal Regulations 
which is published separately and revised annually.

  Material Approved for Incorporation by Reference
  Table of CFR Titles and Chapters
  Alphabetical List of Agencies Appearing in the CFR
  List of CFR Sections Affected

[[Page 1097]]

            Material Approved for Incorporation by Reference

                     (Revised as of October 1, 2002)

  The Director of the Federal Register has approved under 5 U.S.C. 
552(a) and 1 CFR part 51 the incorporation by reference of the following 
publications. This list contains only those incorporations by reference 
effective as of the revision date of this volume. Incorporations by 
reference found within a regulation are effective upon the effective 
date of that regulation. For more information on incorporation by 
reference, see the preliminary pages of this volume.


49 CFR (PARTS 100-185)

RESEARCH AND SPECIAL PROGRAMS ADMINISTRATION, DEPARTMENT OF 
TRANSPORTATION (HAZARDOUS MATERIALS REGULATIONS)
                                                                  49 CFR


Air Transport Association of America

  1301 Pennsylvania Avenue NW., Wasington, DC 
  20004-1707
ATA Specification No. 300, Packaging of Airline           171.7; 172.102
  Supplies, Revision 19, July 31, 1996.


Aluminum Association

  420 Lexington Ave., New York, NY 10017
Aluminum Standards and Data, Seventh Edition, June      171.7; 172.102; 
  1982.                                                   178.46; 178.65


American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

  25 West 43rd Street, Fourth floor, New York, NY 
  10036 Telephone: (212) 642-4900
ANSI B9.1-89, Safety Code for Mechanical                         173.306
  Refrigeration.
ANSI B16.5-77 Steel Pipe Flanges, Flanged Fittings      178.345; 178.360
ANSI N14.1 American National Standard for Nuclear       171.7; 173.417; 
  Materials--Uranium Hexafluoride--Packaging for                 173.420
  Transport (1971, 1982, 1987, 1990, 1995 and 2001 
  Editions).
ANSI/ASHRAE 15-1994, Safety Code for Mechanical           171.7; 173.306
  Refrigeration.


American Pyrotechnics Association

  P.O. Box 213, Chestertown, MD 21620
APA Standard 87-1 Standards for Construction and                  173.56
  Approval for Transportation of Fireworks and 
  Novelties, April 1993 edition.
APA Standard 87-1 Standard for Construction and                    171.7
  Approval for Transportation of Fireworks, 
  Novelties, and Theatrical Pyrotechnics, January 
  23, 1998 edition.


American Society of Mechanical Engineers

  ASME International, 22 Law Drive, P.O. Box 2900, 
  Fairfield, New Jersey 07007-2900
ASME Code:
  Sections II (Parts A and B), V, VIII and IX of       173.32; 173.306; 
  1986 Ed. of American Society of Mechanical          173.315; 173.318; 
  Engineers Boiler and Pressure Code and Addenda        173.420; 177.814
through June 30, 1985
[[Page 1098]]

  Section II (Parts A and B) (1992 and Addenda          171.1; 178.245; 
  through December 31, 1993)                          178.255; 178.270; 
                                                      178.271; 178.272; 
                                                      178.337; 178.338; 
                                                      178.345; 178.346; 
                                                      178.347; 178.348; 
                                                      179.400; 180.407; 
                                                                 180.417
  Section V (FR Nondestructive Examination) (1992       171.1; 178.245; 
  and Addenda through December 31, 1993)              178.255; 178.270; 
                                                      178.271; 178.272; 
                                                      178.337; 178.338; 
                                                      178.345; 178.346; 
                                                      178.347; 178.348; 
                                                      179.400; 180.407; 
                                                                 180.417
  Section VIII, Division 1 Pressure Vessels (1992       171.1; 178.245; 
  with Interpretations, Volume 30, 1992 and           178.255; 178.270; 
  Addenda through December 31, 1993)                  178.271; 178.272; 
                                                      178.337; 178.338; 
                                                      178.345; 178.346; 
                                                      178.347; 178.348; 
                                                      179.400; 180.407; 
                                                                 180.417
  ASME Code, Section V (FR Nondestructive                         173.33
  examination, 1977)
ASME Code:
  Sections II (Parts A and B), V, VIII (Division                   171.7
  1), and IX of the 1998 Edition of the American 
  Society of Mechanical Engineers Boiler and 
  Pressure Vessel Code


American Society for Testing and Materials

  100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA, 
  19428-2959, Telephone (610) 832-9585, FAX (610) 
  832-9555
  Noncurrent ASTM standards are available from: 
  Engineering Societies Library, 354 E. 47th St., 
  New York, NY 10017.
ASTM A 20/A 20M-93a Standard Specification for        171.7; 178.337-2; 
  General Requirements for Steel Plates for        179.102-4; 179.102-17
  Pressure Vessels.
ASTM A 47-68 Malleable Iron Castings..............               179.200
ASTM A 53-69a Welded Seamless Steel Pipe..........              179.12-2
ASTM A 178-70 Electric Resistance Welded Carbon                   179.12
  Steel Boiler Tubes.
ASTM A 192-69 Seamless Carbon Steel Boiler Tubes                  179.12
  for High Pressure Service.
ASTM A 240-82 Standard Specification for Heat-                     171.7
Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless 
[[Page 1099]] Sheet and Strip for Fusion-Welded 
  Unfired Pressure Vessels, Revision A.
ASTM A 240/A 240M-99b Standard Specification for         171.7; 178.57; 
  Heat-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel      178.358-5; 179.100-7; 
  Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip for        179.100-10; 179.102-
  Pressure Vessels.                                       1; 179.102-4; 
                                                    179.102-17; 179.200-
                                                          7; 179.201-5; 
                                                    179.220-7; 179.400-5
ASTM A 242-81 High-Strength Low Alloy Structural                 179.100
  Steel.
ASTM A 262-93a Standard Practices for Detecting       171.7; 179.100-7; 
  Susceptibility to Intergranular Attack in         179.200-7; 179.201-4
  Austenitic Stainless Steels.
ASTM A 269-69 Seamless and Welded Austenitic                    179.12-2
  Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service.
ASTM A 285-78 Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon          179.100; 179.200; 
  Steel, Low- and Intermediate-Tensile Strength.        179.220; 179.300
ASTM A 300-58 Steel Plates for Pressure Vessels                  178.337
  for Service at Low Temperatures.
ASTM A 302/A 302M-93 Standard Specification for       171.7; 179.100-7; 
  Pressure Vessel Plates, Alloy Steel, Manganese-   179.200-7; 179.220-7
  Molybdenum and Manganese-Molybdenum Nickel.
ASTM A 312-70a Seamless and Welded Austenitic                     179.12
  Stainless Steel Pipe.
ASTM A 333-67 Seamless and Welded Steel Pipe for                  178.45
  Low-Temperature Service.
ASTM A 366/A 366M-91 (1993)e1 Standard                           178.601
  Specification for Steel: Sheet, Carbon, Cold-
  Rolled, Commercial Quality.
ASTM A 370-94 Standard Test Methods and               171.7; 179.102-1; 
  Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel      179.102-4; 179.102-17
  Products.
ASTM A 441-81 High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural                 178.338
  Manganese Vanadium Steel.
ASTM A 514-81 High-Yield-Strength, Quenched and                  178.338
  Tempered Alloy Steel Plate, Suitable for 
  Welding.
ASTM A 515-69 Carbon Steel Plates for Pressure        179.100; 179.200; 
  Vessels for Intermediate and Higher Temperature       179.220; 179.300
  Service.
ASTM A 516/A 516M-90 Standard Specification for       171.7; 178.337-2; 
  Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for        179.100-7; 179.102-1; 
  Moderate and Lower-Temperature Service.          179.102-2; 179.102-4; 
                                                    179.102-17; 179.200-
                                                         7; 179.200-20; 
                                                               179.220-7
ASTM A 537/A 537M-91 Standard for Pressure Vessel     171.7; 179.100-7; 
  Plates, Heat-Treated, Carbon-Manganese-Silicon   179.102-4; 179.102-17
Steel.
[[Page 1100]]

ASTM A 568/A 568M-95 Standard Specification for                  178.601
  Steel: Sheet, Carbon, and High-Strength, Low-
  Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General 
  Requirements.
ASTM A 572-82 High-Strength Low Alloy Columbium-        178.338; 179.100
  Vanadium Steels of Structural Quality.
ASTM A 588-81 High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural        178.338; 179.100
  Steel with 50 ksi Minimum Yield Point to 4 in. 
  Thick.
ASTM A 606-75 Steel Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled                  178.338
  and Cold-Rolled, High Strength, Low Alloy, with 
  Improved Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance 
  (reapproved 1981).
ASTM A 612-72a High-Strength Steel Plates for                    178.337
  Pressure Vessels for Moderate and Lower 
  Temperature Service.
ASTM A 633-79a Normalized High-Strength Low Alloy                178.338
  Structural Steel.
ASTM A 715-81 Steel Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled,                 179.200
  High-Strength, Low-Alloy, with Improved 
  Formability.
ASTM B 161-70 Nickel Seamless Pipe and Tube, 1970.                179.12
ASTM B 162-93a Standard Specification for Nickel        171.7; 179.200-7
  Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
ASTM B 209-93 Standard Specification for Aluminum     171.7; 179.100-7; 
  and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.               179.200-7; 179.220-7
ASTM B 210-70 Aluminum Alloy Drawn Stainless                      179.12
  Tables (FR B210-68 (78)).
ASTM B 221-76 Aluminum Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,                 179.12
  Shapes, and Tubes.
ASTM B 241-76 Aluminum-Alloy Seamless Pipe and                  179.12-2
  Seamless Extruded Tube.
ASTM B 557-84 Tension Testing Wrought and Cast             171.7; 178.46
  Aluminum and Magnesium-Alloy Products.
ASTM B 580-79 (Reapproved 2000) Standard                171.7; 173.316; 
  Specification for Anodic Oxide Coatings on         173.318; 178.338-17
  Aluminium.
ASTM D 56-93 Flash Point by Tag Closed Tester.....               173.120
ASTM D 56-97a Standard Test Method for Flash Point                 171.7
  by Tag Closed Tester (1997 edition).
ASTM D 93-90 Flash Point by Pensky Martens Closed                173.120
  Tester.
ASTM D 93-94 Standard Test Methods for Flash-Point        171.7; 173.120
  by Pensky-Martens Closed-Cup Tester.
ASTM D 93-97 Standard Test Methods for Flash-Point                 171.7
  by Pensky-Martens Closed Cup Tester (1997 
  edition).
ASTM D 445-88 Kinematic Viscosity of Transparent                   171.8
  and Opaque Liquids (and the Calculation of 
  Dynamic Voscosity).
ASTM D 1200-88 Viscosity by Ford Viscosity Cup....                 171.8
ASTM D 1238-90b Standard Test Method for Flow             171.7; 173.225
  Rates of Thermoplastics for Extrusion 
  Plastometer.
ASTM D 1709-01, Standard Test Methods for Impact          171.7; 173.197
  Resistance of Plastic Film by the Free-falling 
  Dart Method.
ASTM D 1835-97, Standard Specification for                171.7; 180.209
  Liquefied Petroleum (LP) Gases.
ASTM D 1838-64 Copper Strip Corrosion by Liquefied               173.315
Petroleum (LP) Gases.
[[Page 1101]]

ASTM D 1922-00a Standard Test Method for                  171.7; 173.197
  Propagation Tear Resistance of Plastic Film and 
  Thin Sheeting by Pendulum Method.
ASTM D 3278-89 Flash Point of Liquids by Setaflash               173.120
  Closed Tester.
ASTM D 3278-95 Standard Test Methods for Flash            171.7; 173.120
  Point of Liquids by Setaflash Closed-Cup 
  Apparatus.
ASTM D 3278-96 Standard Test Methods for Flash                     171.7
  Point of Liquids by Small Scale Closed-Cup 
  Apparatus (1996 edition).
ASTM 3828-93 Standard Test Methods for Flash Point               173.120
  by Small Scale Closed Tester.
ASTM 3828-97 Standard Test Methods for Flash Point                 171.7
  by Small Scale Closed Tester (1997 edition).
ASTM D 4206-96 Standard Test Method for Sustained                173.120
  Burning of Liquid Measures Using the Small Scale 
  Open-Cup Apparatus.
ASTM D 4359-90 Standard Test Method for                     130.5; 171.8
  Determining Whether a Material is a Liquid or a 
  Solid.
ASTM E 8-99 Tension Testing of Metallic Materials.       171.7; 178.36; 
                                                        178.37; 178.38; 
                                                        178.39; 178.44; 
                                                        178.45; 178.50; 
                                                        178.51; 178.53; 
                                                        178.55; 178.56; 
                                                        178.57; 178.58; 
                                                        178.59; 178.60; 
                                                          178.61; 178.68
ASTM E 23-98 Standard Test Methods for Notched Bar         171.7; 178.57
  Impact Testing of Metallic Materials.
ASTM E 112-96 Standard Test Methods for                   171.7; 178.274
  Determining Average Grain Size.
ASTM E 213-98 Standard Practice for Ultrasonic             171.7; 178.45
  Examination of Metal Pipe and Tubing.
ASTM E 290-92 Standard Test Method for Semi-Guided         171.7; 178.46
  Bend Test for Ductility of Metallic Materials.
ASTM E 681-85 Standard Test Method for                           173.115
  Concentration Limits of Flammability of 
  Chemicals.
ASTM G 23-69 Standard Recommended Practice for          172.407; 172.519
  Operating Light-and-Water Exposure Apparatus 
  (Carbon-Arc Type) for Exposure of Nonmetallic 
  Materials.
ASTM G 26-70 Standard Recommended Practice for          172.407; 172.519
  Operating Light-and-Water-Exposure Apparatus 
  (Xenon-Arc-Type) for Exposure of Nonmetallic 
  Materials.
ASTM G 31-72 (Reapproved 1990) Standard Practice          171.7; 173.137
  for Laboratory Immersion Corrosion Testing of 
  Metals.
ASTM G 31-72 (Reapproved 1995) Standard Practice          171.7; 173.137
  for Laboratory Immersion Corrosion Testing of 
  Metals.


American Water Works Association (AWWA)

  1010 Vermont Avenue NW., Suite 810, Washington, 
  DC 20005
AWWA Standard C207-55, Steel Pipe Flanges; 1955...               178.360


American Welding Society (AWS)

  550 N.W. Le Jeune Road, Miami, FL 33126
AWS Code B 3.0; Standard Qualification Procedure;                178.356
1972 (FRB 3.0-41 rev. May 73).
[[Page 1102]]

AWS Code D1.0; Code for Welding in Building                      178.356
  Construction, (FR D1.0-66).


Association of American Railroads (AAR)

  American Railroads Building, 50 F St. NW., 
  Washington, DC 20001
AAR Manual of Standards and Recommended Practices, 171.7; 174.55; 174.63
  Section I, Specially Equipped Freight Car and 
  Intermodal Equipment, 1988.
AAR Manual of Standards and Recommended Practices,                173.31
  Section C--Part III, Specification for Tank 
  Cars, Specification M-1002, September 1992.
AAR Manual of Standards and Recommended Practices,  171.7(a)(3);174.63; 
  Section C--Part III, Specification for Tank      179.6; 179.7; 179.15; 
  Cars, Specification M-1002, January 1996.             179.16; 179.20; 
                                                       179.22; 179.100; 
                                                      179.101; 179.102; 
                                                      179.103; 179.200; 
                                                      179.201; 179.220; 
                                                      179.300; 179.400; 
                                                      180.509; 180.513; 
                                                        180.515; 180.517
AAR Specification for Design, Fabrication and                 179.100-23
  Construction of Freight Cars; Volume 1, 1988.


Centers for Disease Control and Prevention/National Institutes of Health

  Superintendent of Documents, U.S. Government 
  Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402, Telephone 
  202-512-1800
Biosafety in Microbiological and Biomedical                      173.134
  Laboratories, Third Edition, May 1993.


Chlorine Institute, Inc.

  2001 L Street NW., Suite 506, Washington, DC 
  20036
Type 1-1/2 JQ 225, Dwg. H51970, Revision D, April                173.315
  5, 1989; or Type 1-1/2 JQ 225, Dwg. H50155, 
  Revision F, April 4, 1989.
Standard Chlorine Angle Valve Assembly, Dwg. 104-              178.337-9
  6, December 1, 1982.
Standard Chlorine Angel Valve Assembly, Dwg. 104-              178.337-9
  8, July 1993.
Excess Flow Valve with Removable Seat, Dwg. 101-6,            178.337-11
  September 1, 1973.
Excess Flow Valve with Removable Seat, Dwg. 101-7,             178.337-8
  July 1993.
Excess Flow Valve with Removable Baskets, 106-5,              178.337-11
  September 1, 1973.
Excess Flow Valve with Removable Basket, Dwg. 106-             178.337-8
  6, July 1993.
Section 3, Pamphlet 57, Emergency Shut-Off Systems               177.840
  for Bulk Transfer of Chlorine, 3d edition, 
  October 1997.
Standards for Housing and Manway Covers for Steel             178.337-10
  Cargo Tanks, Dwg. 137-3, September 1, 1982.


Compressed Gas Association, Inc. (CGA)

  1725 Jefferson Davis Highway, Suite 1004, 
  Arlington, VA 22202
CGA Pamphlet C-3 Standards for Welding Thinned-          171.7; 178.47; 
  Walled Steel Containers.                              178.50; 178.51; 
                                                        178.53; 178.56; 
                                                        178.57; 178.58; 
                                                        178.59; 178.60; 
                                                        178.61; 178.65; 
                                                         178.68; 180.211

[[Page 1103]]

CGA Pamphlet C-5 Cylinder Service Life-Seamless          171.7; 173.302a
  Steel High Pressure Cylinders, 1991.
CGA Pamphlet C-6 Standards for Visual Inspection        171.7; 173.198; 
  of Steel Compressed Gas Cylinders, 1993.            180.205; 180.209; 
                                                        180.211; 180.519
CGA Pamphlet C-6.1 Standards for Visual Inspection      171.7; 180.205; 
  of High Pressure Aluminum Compressed Gas                       180.209
  Cylinders, 1995.
CGA Pamphlet C-6.2 Guidelines for Visual                  171.7; 180.205
  Inspection and Requalification of Fiber 
  Reinforced High-pressure Cylinders, 1988.
CGA Pamphlet C-6.3 Guidelines for Visual                171.7; 180.205; 
  Inspection and Requalification of Low Pressure                 180.209
  Aluminum Compressed Gas Cylinders, 1991.
CGA Pamphlet C-7 A Guide for the Preparation of                 172.400a
  Precautionary Markings for Compressed Gas 
  Containers, Appendix A, issued 1992 (6th 
  Edition).
CGA Pamphlet C-8 Standard for Requalification of          171.7; 180.205
  DOT-3HT Cylinder Design, 1985.
CGA Pamphlet C-11 Recommended Practices for                171.7; 178.35
  Inspection of Compressed Gas Cylinders at Time 
  of Manufacture, 1993.
CGA Pamphlet C-12 Qualification Procedure for           171.7; 173.301; 
  Acetylene Cylinder Design, 1994.                     173.303; 178.59; 
                                                                  178.60
CGA Pamphlet C-13, Guidelines for Periodic Visual       171.7; 173.303; 
  Inspection and Requalification of Acetylene           180.205; 180.209
  Cylinders, 1992.
CGA Pamphlet C-14, Procedures for Fire Testing of         171.7; 173.301
  DOT Cylinder Pressure Relief Device Systems, 
  1979.
CGA Pamphlet G-2.2 Guideline Method for                          173.315
  Determining Minimum of 0.2% Water in Anhydrous 
  Ammonia, 1985.
CGA Pamphlet G-4.1 Cleaning Equipment for Oxygen                 178.338
  Service, 1985.
CGA Pamphlet P-20 Standard for Classification of          171.7; 173.115
  Toxic Gas Mixtures, 1995.
CGA Pamphlet S-1.1 Pressure Relief Device               171.7; 173.301; 
  Standards Part 1--Cylinders for Compressed                    173.304a
  Gases, 1994.
CGA Pamphlet S-1.2 Safety Relief Device Standards       173.315; 173.318
  Part 2--Cargo and Portable Tanks for Compressed 
  Gases, 1980.
CGA Pamphlet S-7 Method for Selecting Pressure            171.7; 173.301
  Relief Devices for Compressed Gas Mixtures in 
  Cylinders, 1996.
CGA Technical Bulletin TB-2 Guidelines for                       180.413
  Inspection and Repair of MC-330 and MC-331 Cargo 
  Tanks, 1980.


Department of Defense

  2461 Eisenhower Ave., Alexandria, VA 22331
TB 700-2 Explosives Hazard Classification                         173.56
  Procedures, December 1989.
DOD TB 700-2 Ammunition and Explosives Hazard                      171.7
  Classification Procedures, January 1998.


Department of Energy (USDOE)

  Office of Scientific and Technical Information, 
  P.O. Box 62, Oak Ridge, TN 37831
USDOE, CAPE--1622, Revision 1, and Supp. 1,             178.356; 178.358
  Civilian Application Program Engineering 
  Drawings.
USDOE, Material and Equipment Specification No.         178.356; 178.358
SP--9 Rev. 1, and Supp., Fire Resistant Phenolic 
[[Page 1104]]

USDOE, ORO-651--Uranium Hexafluoride Handling           178.356; 178.358
  Procedures and Container Criteria, Revision 3, 
  1972.
USDOE, ORO-651--Uranium Hexafluoride: A Manual of         171.7; 173.417
  Good Handling Practices, Rev. 6, 1991 ed.
USDOE KSS-471, November 30, 1986--Proposal for                   178.358
  Modifications to U.S. Department of 
  Transportation Specification 21PF-1 Fire and 
  Shock Resistant Phenolic Foam--Insulated Metal 
  Overpack.


General Services Administration

  Specification Office, Rm. 6662, 7th and D St. 
  SW., Washington, DC 20407
Federal Specification RR-C-901C, Cylinders,             171.7; 173.302; 
  Compressed Gas: High Pressure Steel DOT 3AA, and      173.336; 173.337
  Aluminum Applications, January 15, 1981.


Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)

  Service Center, 445 Hoes Lane, Piscataway, NJ 
  08855 Telephone: (800) 678-4333
IEEE Std. 45-1983, Recommended Practice for            111.05-7; 111.15-
  Electric Installations on Shipboard, 1983.            2(b); 111.30-1; 
                                                    111,30-5(a); 111.30-
                                                    19(a); 111.33-3(a); 
                                                    111.33-5(a); 111.40-
                                                        1; 111.60-1(a); 
                                                    111.60-2; 111.60-3; 
                                                    111.60-5(a); 111.60-
                                                    6(a); 111.60-11(c); 
                                                   111.60-13(a); 111.60-
                                                      19(b); 111.60-21; 
                                                   111.75-5(b); 111.105-
                                                      3; 111.105-31(e); 
                                                    111.105-41; 111.107-
                                                          1(c); 113.65-5


Institute of Makers of Explosives (IME)

  1420 Lexington Avenue, New York, NY 10017
IME Safety Library Publication No. 22 (IME               173.63; 177.835
  Standard 22), Recommendation for the Safe 
  Transportation of Detonators in a Vehicle with 
  Certain Other Explosive Materials, May 1993.


International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA)

  Wagramerstrasse 5, P.O. Box 100, A-1400, Vienna, 
  Austria. Also available from: Bernan Associates, 
  4611-F Assembly Drive; Lanham, Maryland 20706-
  4391, USA; or Renouf Publishing Company, Ltd., 
  812 Proctor Avenue, Ogdensburg, New York 13669, 
  USA
IAEA, Regulations for the Safe Transport of              171.7; 171.12; 
  Radioactive Material, Safety Series No. 6, 1985     173.415; 173.416; 
  Edition (as amended 1990).                            173.417; 173.473
IAEA No. TS-R-1, (ST-1, Revised) Regulations for           171.7; 171.12
the Safe Transport of Radioactive Material, 1996 
[[Page 1105]]

International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO)

  P.O. Box 400, Place de l'Aviation 
  Internationale, 1000 Sherbrooke Street West, 
  Montreal, Quebec, Canada H3A 2R2. ICAO Technical 
  Instructions also available from INTEREG, P.O. 
  Box 60105, Chicago, IL 60660
ICAO Technical Instructions for the Safe Transport       171.7; 171.11; 
  of Dangerous Goods by Air, DOC 9284-AN/905,         172.202; 172.401; 
  2001-2002 Edition.                                    172.512; 172.602


International Maritime Organization

  4 Albert Embankment, London SE1 7SR, England 
  Telephone: 0171-587 3210; FAX: 0171-587 3210; 
  Telex: 23588. Purchase from: IMO Sales, New York 
  Nautical Instrument and Service Corp., 140 W. 
  Broadway, New York, NY 10013. Telephone: (212) 
  962-4522; FAX: (212) 406-8420
IMO International Maritime Dangerous Goods (IMDG)      171.12; 172.401; 
  Code, 1990 Consolidated Edition as amended by        172.407; 173.21; 
  Amendment 27 (1994) (English edition).           176.2; 176.5; 176.11; 
                                                          176.27; 176.30
IMO International Maritime Dangerous Goods (IMDG)      171.12; 172.401; 
  Code, 1994 Consolidated Edition, as amended by        172.407; 176.2; 
  Amendment 28 (1996) (English edition).                 176.5; 176.11; 
                                                          176.27; 176.30
IMO International Maritime Dangerous Goods (IMDG)        171.7; 171.12; 
  Code, 1994 Consolidated Edition, as amended by      172.401; 172.407; 
  Amendment 29 (1997) (English edition).           173.21; 176.2; 176.5; 
                                                        176.11; 176.27; 
                                                                  176.30
IMO International Maritime Dangerous Goods (IMDG)        171.7; 171.12; 
  Code, 2000 Edition, including Amendment 30-00       172.401; 172.502; 
  (English edition).                               173.21; 176.2; 176.5; 
                                                        176.11; 176.27; 
                                                         176.30; 176.720


International Organization for Standardization (ISO)

  Case Postale 56, CH-1211, Geneve 20, Switzerland
  Also available from ANSI, 1430 Broadway, New 
  York, NY 10018.
ISO TR 4826-1979(E), Sealed Radioactive Sources--                173.469
  Leak Test Methods.
ISO 82-1974(E) Steel Tensile Testing..............             178.270-3
ISO 535-1991(E) Paper and Board--Determination of         171.7; 178.516
  Water Absorptiveness--Cobb Method.
ISO 1496-3: 1995(E), Series 1 Freight Containers--      171.7; 173.411; 
  Specification and Testing--Part 3, Tank                        178.274
  Containers for Liquids, Gases and Pressurized 
  Dry Bulk, March 1, 1995, Fourth Edition.
ISO 2431-84(E) Standard Cup Method................               173.121
ISO 2592-1973(E) Petroleum products--Determination        171.7; 173.120
  of flash and fire points--Cleveland open cup 
  method.
ISO 2919-1980(E), Sealed Radioactive Sources--                   173.469
  Classification.
ISO 3036-1975(E), Board-Determination of Puncture         171.7; 178.708
  Resistance.
ISO 3574-1986(E) Cold-reduced carbon steel sheet          171.7; 178.503
of commercial and drawing qualities.
[[Page 1106]]

ISO 4126-1, Safety Valves, Part 1: General                171.7; 178.274
  Requirements, First Edition, December 15, 1991.
ISO 6892, Metallic Materials--Tensile Testing,            171.7; 178.274
  First Edition, July 15, 1984.
ISO 8115 1986(E), Cotton bales--Dimensions and                     171.7
  density.
ISO 9328-1-1991(E) Steel plates and strips for            171.7; 173.137
  pressure purposes--Technical delivery 
  conditions--Part 1; General requirements.


National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors

  1055 Crupper Avenue, Columbus, OH 43229
National Board Inspection Code, A Manual for              171.1; 180.413
  Boiler and Pressure Inspectors, NB-23, 1992 
  Edition.


National Fire Protection Agency

  1 Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269-9101, 
  Telephone: (800) 344-3555
NFPA Pamphlet No. 58--Standard for the Storage and               173.315
  Handling of Liquefied Petroleum Gases, 1979.


National Motor Freight Traffic Association, Inc.

  Agent, 1616 P Street NW., Washington, DC 20036
National Motor Freight Classification NMF 100-I,                 177.841
  1982.


National Technical Information Service (NTIS), Department of Commerce

  5285 Port Royal Rd., Springfield, VA 22161
NSB Handbook H-28 (1957), 1957 Handbook of Screw-  171.1; 178.45; 178.46
  Thread Standards for Federal Services, Part II, 
  December 1966 Ed.


Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development (OECD)

  OECD Publications and Information Center, 2001 L 
  Street, Suite 700, Washington, DC 20036
OECD Guideline for Testing of Chemicals, No. 404,         171.7; 173.137
  ``Acute Dermal Irritation/Corrosion,'' 1992.


Transport Canada

  TDG Canadian Government Publishing Center, 
  Supply and Services, Canada, Ottawa, Ontario, 
  Canada K1A0S9
Transportation of Dangerous Goods Regulations, as       171.7; 171.12a; 
  of July 1, 1985, including Registration Numbers       172.401; 172.502
  SOR/85-314, SOR/85-585, SOR/85-609, SOR/86-526, 
  SOR/88-635, SOR/87-335, SOR/87-186, SOR/89-39, 
  SOR/89-294, SOR/90-847, SOR/91-711, SOR/91-712, 
  SOR/92-447, SOR/92-600, SOR/93-203, SOR/93-274, 
  SOR/93-525, SOR/94-146, and SOR/94-264, SOR/95-
  241 and SOR/95-547 (English edition).


Truck Trailer Manufacturers Association

  1020 Princess Street, Alexandria, VA 22314
TTMA RP No. 61-94, Performance of Manhole and/or                   171.7
  Fill Opening Assemblies on MC 306 and DOT 406 
  Cargo Tanks, December 28, 1994 edition.
TTMA RP No. 81, Performance of Spring Loaded           171.7; 178.345-10
  Pressure Relief Valves on MC 306, MC 307, and MC 
  312 Tanks, 1989 Edition.
TTMA Technical Bulletin No. 107-89 Procedure for                 180.405
  Testing In-Service, Unmarked, and/or Uncertified 
  MC 306 Type Cargo Tank Manhole Covers, May 24, 
  1989 edition.


United Nations

  United Nations Sales Section, New York, NY 10017
UN Recommendations of the Transport of Dangerous                 172.519
Goods, Sixth Revised Edition (1989).
[[Page 1107]]

UN Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous                 172.519
  Goods, Eighth Revised Edition (1993).
UN Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous                 172.519
  Goods, Ninth Revised Edition (1995).
UN Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous        171.7; 172.401; 
  Goods, Eleventh Revised Edition (1999).             172.407; 172.502; 
                                                                  173.24
UN Recommendations on the Transport of Dangerous        171.7; 172.102; 
  Goods, Manual of Tests and Criteria, Third            173.21; 173.56; 
  Revised Edition (1999).                              173.57; 173.124; 
                                                      173.128; 173.166; 
                                                                 173.185



[[Page 1109]]



                    Table of CFR Titles and Chapters




                     (Revised as of October 1, 2002)

                      Title 1--General Provisions

         I  Administrative Committee of the Federal Register 
                (Parts 1--49)
        II  Office of the Federal Register (Parts 50--299)
        IV  Miscellaneous Agencies (Parts 400--500)

                          Title 2  [Reserved]

                        Title 3--The President

         I  Executive Office of the President (Parts 100--199)

                           Title 4--Accounts

         I  General Accounting Office (Parts 1--99)

                   Title 5--Administrative Personnel

         I  Office of Personnel Management (Parts 1--1199)
        II  Merit Systems Protection Board (Parts 1200--1299)
       III  Office of Management and Budget (Parts 1300--1399)
         V  The International Organizations Employees Loyalty 
                Board (Parts 1500--1599)
        VI  Federal Retirement Thrift Investment Board (Parts 
                1600--1699)
      VIII  Office of Special Counsel (Parts 1800--1899)
        IX  Appalachian Regional Commission (Parts 1900--1999)
        XI  Armed Forces Retirement Home (Part 2100)
       XIV  Federal Labor Relations Authority, General Counsel of 
                the Federal Labor Relations Authority and Federal 
                Service Impasses Panel (Parts 2400--2499)
        XV  Office of Administration, Executive Office of the 
                President (Parts 2500--2599)
       XVI  Office of Government Ethics (Parts 2600--2699)
       XXI  Department of the Treasury (Parts 3100--3199)
      XXII  Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (Part 3201)
     XXIII  Department of Energy (Part 3301)
      XXIV  Federal Energy Regulatory Commission (Part 3401)
       XXV  Department of the Interior (Part 3501)
      XXVI  Department of Defense (Part 3601)

[[Page 1110]]

    XXVIII  Department of Justice (Part 3801)
      XXIX  Federal Communications Commission (Parts 3900--3999)
       XXX  Farm Credit System Insurance Corporation (Parts 4000--
                4099)
      XXXI  Farm Credit Administration (Parts 4100--4199)
    XXXIII  Overseas Private Investment Corporation (Part 4301)
      XXXV  Office of Personnel Management (Part 4501)
        XL  Interstate Commerce Commission (Part 5001)
       XLI  Commodity Futures Trading Commission (Part 5101)
      XLII  Department of Labor (Part 5201)
     XLIII  National Science Foundation (Part 5301)
       XLV  Department of Health and Human Services (Part 5501)
      XLVI  Postal Rate Commission (Part 5601)
     XLVII  Federal Trade Commission (Part 5701)
    XLVIII  Nuclear Regulatory Commission (Part 5801)
         L  Department of Transportation (Part 6001)
       LII  Export-Import Bank of the United States (Part 6201)
      LIII  Department of Education (Parts 6300--6399)
       LIV  Environmental Protection Agency (Part 6401)
      LVII  General Services Administration (Part 6701)
     LVIII  Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System (Part 
                6801)
       LIX  National Aeronautics and Space Administration (Part 
                6901)
        LX  United States Postal Service (Part 7001)
       LXI  National Labor Relations Board (Part 7101)
      LXII  Equal Employment Opportunity Commission (Part 7201)
     LXIII  Inter-American Foundation (Part 7301)
       LXV  Department of Housing and Urban Development (Part 
                7501)
      LXVI  National Archives and Records Administration (Part 
                7601)
      LXIX  Tennessee Valley Authority (Part 7901)
      LXXI  Consumer Product Safety Commission (Part 8101)
    LXXIII  Department of Agriculture (Part 8301)
     LXXIV  Federal Mine Safety and Health Review Commission (Part 
                8401)
     LXXVI  Federal Retirement Thrift Investment Board (Part 8601)
    LXXVII  Office of Management and Budget (Part 8701)

                          Title 6  [Reserved]

              

                         Title 7--Agriculture

            Subtitle A--Office of the Secretary of Agriculture 
                (Parts 0--26)
            Subtitle B--Regulations of the Department of 
                Agriculture
         I  Agricultural Marketing Service (Standards, 
                Inspections, Marketing Practices), Department of 
                Agriculture (Parts 27--209)

[[Page 1111]]

        II  Food and Nutrition Service, Department of Agriculture 
                (Parts 210--299)
       III  Animal and Plant Health Inspection Service, Department 
                of Agriculture (Parts 300--399)
        IV  Federal Crop Insurance Corporation, Department of 
                Agriculture (Parts 400--499)
         V  Agricultural Research Service, Department of 
                Agriculture (Parts 500--599)
        VI  Natural Resources Conservation Service, Department of 
                Agriculture (Parts 600--699)
       VII  Farm Service Agency, Department of Agriculture (Parts 
                700--799)
      VIII  Grain Inspection, Packers and Stockyards 
                Administration (Federal Grain Inspection Service), 
                Department of Agriculture (Parts 800--899)
        IX  Agricultural Marketing Service (Marketing Agreements 
                and Orders; Fruits, Vegetables, Nuts), Department 
                of Agriculture (Parts 900--999)
         X  Agricultural Marketing Service (Marketing Agreements 
                and Orders; Milk), Department of Agriculture 
                (Parts 1000--1199)
        XI  Agricultural Marketing Service (Marketing Agreements 
                and Orders; Miscellaneous Commodities), Department 
                of Agriculture (Parts 1200--1299)
       XIV  Commodity Credit Corporation, Department of 
                Agriculture (Parts 1400--1499)
        XV  Foreign Agricultural Service, Department of 
                Agriculture (Parts 1500--1599)
       XVI  Rural Telephone Bank, Department of Agriculture (Parts 
                1600--1699)
      XVII  Rural Utilities Service, Department of Agriculture 
                (Parts 1700--1799)
     XVIII  Rural Housing Service, Rural Business-Cooperative 
                Service, Rural Utilities Service, and Farm Service 
                Agency, Department of Agriculture (Parts 1800--
                2099)
      XXVI  Office of Inspector General, Department of Agriculture 
                (Parts 2600--2699)
     XXVII  Office of Information Resources Management, Department 
                of Agriculture (Parts 2700--2799)
    XXVIII  Office of Operations, Department of Agriculture (Parts 
                2800--2899)
      XXIX  Office of Energy, Department of Agriculture (Parts 
                2900--2999)
       XXX  Office of the Chief Financial Officer, Department of 
                Agriculture (Parts 3000--3099)
      XXXI  Office of Environmental Quality, Department of 
                Agriculture (Parts 3100--3199)
     XXXII  Office of Procurement and Property Management, 
                Department of Agriculture (Parts 3200--3299)
    XXXIII  Office of Transportation, Department of Agriculture 
                (Parts 3300--3399)
     XXXIV  Cooperative State Research, Education, and Extension 
                Service, Department of Agriculture (Parts 3400--
                3499)

[[Page 1112]]

      XXXV  Rural Housing Service, Department of Agriculture 
                (Parts 3500--3599)
     XXXVI  National Agricultural Statistics Service, Department 
                of Agriculture (Parts 3600--3699)
    XXXVII  Economic Research Service, Department of Agriculture 
                (Parts 3700--3799)
   XXXVIII  World Agricultural Outlook Board, Department of 
                Agriculture (Parts 3800--3899)
       XLI  [Reserved]
      XLII  Rural Business-Cooperative Service and Rural Utilities 
                Service, Department of Agriculture (Parts 4200--
                4299)

                    Title 8--Aliens and Nationality

         I  Immigration and Naturalization Service, Department of 
                Justice (Parts 1--599)

                 Title 9--Animals and Animal Products

         I  Animal and Plant Health Inspection Service, Department 
                of Agriculture (Parts 1--199)
        II  Grain Inspection, Packers and Stockyards 
                Administration (Packers and Stockyards Programs), 
                Department of Agriculture (Parts 200--299)
       III  Food Safety and Inspection Service, Department of 
                Agriculture (Parts 300--599)

                           Title 10--Energy

         I  Nuclear Regulatory Commission (Parts 0--199)
        II  Department of Energy (Parts 200--699)
       III  Department of Energy (Parts 700--999)
         X  Department of Energy (General Provisions) (Parts 1000-
                -1099)
      XVII  Defense Nuclear Facilities Safety Board (Parts 1700--
                1799)
     XVIII  Northeast Interstate Low-Level Radioactive Waste 
                Commission (Part 1800)

                      Title 11--Federal Elections

         I  Federal Election Commission (Parts 1--9099)

                      Title 12--Banks and Banking

         I  Comptroller of the Currency, Department of the 
                Treasury (Parts 1--199)
        II  Federal Reserve System (Parts 200--299)
       III  Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (Parts 300--399)
        IV  Export-Import Bank of the United States (Parts 400--
                499)

[[Page 1113]]

         V  Office of Thrift Supervision, Department of the 
                Treasury (Parts 500--599)
        VI  Farm Credit Administration (Parts 600--699)
       VII  National Credit Union Administration (Parts 700--799)
      VIII  Federal Financing Bank (Parts 800--899)
        IX  Federal Housing Finance Board (Parts 900--999)
        XI  Federal Financial Institutions Examination Council 
                (Parts 1100--1199)
       XIV  Farm Credit System Insurance Corporation (Parts 1400--
                1499)
        XV  Department of the Treasury (Parts 1500--1599)
      XVII  Office of Federal Housing Enterprise Oversight, 
                Department of Housing and Urban Development (Parts 
                1700--1799)
     XVIII  Community Development Financial Institutions Fund, 
                Department of the Treasury (Parts 1800--1899)

               Title 13--Business Credit and Assistance

         I  Small Business Administration (Parts 1--199)
       III  Economic Development Administration, Department of 
                Commerce (Parts 300--399)
        IV  Emergency Steel Guarantee Loan Board (Parts 400--499)
         V  Emergency Oil and Gas Guaranteed Loan Board (Parts 
                500--599)

                    Title 14--Aeronautics and Space

         I  Federal Aviation Administration, Department of 
                Transportation (Parts 1--199)
        II  Office of the Secretary, Department of Transportation 
                (Aviation Proceedings) (Parts 200--399)
       III  Commercial Space Transportation, Federal Aviation 
                Administration, Department of Transportation 
                (Parts 400--499)
         V  National Aeronautics and Space Administration (Parts 
                1200--1299)
        VI  Air Transportation System Stabilization (Parts 1300--
                1399)

                 Title 15--Commerce and Foreign Trade

            Subtitle A--Office of the Secretary of Commerce (Parts 
                0--29)
            Subtitle B--Regulations Relating to Commerce and 
                Foreign Trade
         I  Bureau of the Census, Department of Commerce (Parts 
                30--199)
        II  National Institute of Standards and Technology, 
                Department of Commerce (Parts 200--299)
       III  International Trade Administration, Department of 
                Commerce (Parts 300--399)
        IV  Foreign-Trade Zones Board, Department of Commerce 
                (Parts 400--499)

[[Page 1114]]

       VII  Bureau of Industry and Security, Department of 
                Commerce (Parts 700--799)
      VIII  Bureau of Economic Analysis, Department of Commerce 
                (Parts 800--899)
        IX  National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration, 
                Department of Commerce (Parts 900--999)
        XI  Technology Administration, Department of Commerce 
                (Parts 1100--1199)
      XIII  East-West Foreign Trade Board (Parts 1300--1399)
       XIV  Minority Business Development Agency (Parts 1400--
                1499)
            Subtitle C--Regulations Relating to Foreign Trade 
                Agreements
        XX  Office of the United States Trade Representative 
                (Parts 2000--2099)
            Subtitle D--Regulations Relating to Telecommunications 
                and Information
     XXIII  National Telecommunications and Information 
                Administration, Department of Commerce (Parts 
                2300--2399)

                    Title 16--Commercial Practices

         I  Federal Trade Commission (Parts 0--999)
        II  Consumer Product Safety Commission (Parts 1000--1799)

             Title 17--Commodity and Securities Exchanges

         I  Commodity Futures Trading Commission (Parts 1--199)
        II  Securities and Exchange Commission (Parts 200--399)
        IV  Department of the Treasury (Parts 400--499)

          Title 18--Conservation of Power and Water Resources

         I  Federal Energy Regulatory Commission, Department of 
                Energy (Parts 1--399)
       III  Delaware River Basin Commission (Parts 400--499)
        VI  Water Resources Council (Parts 700--799)
      VIII  Susquehanna River Basin Commission (Parts 800--899)
      XIII  Tennessee Valley Authority (Parts 1300--1399)

                       Title 19--Customs Duties

         I  United States Customs Service, Department of the 
                Treasury (Parts 1--199)
        II  United States International Trade Commission (Parts 
                200--299)
       III  International Trade Administration, Department of 
                Commerce (Parts 300--399)

[[Page 1115]]

                     Title 20--Employees' Benefits

         I  Office of Workers' Compensation Programs, Department 
                of Labor (Parts 1--199)
        II  Railroad Retirement Board (Parts 200--399)
       III  Social Security Administration (Parts 400--499)
        IV  Employees' Compensation Appeals Board, Department of 
                Labor (Parts 500--599)
         V  Employment and Training Administration, Department of 
                Labor (Parts 600--699)
        VI  Employment Standards Administration, Department of 
                Labor (Parts 700--799)
       VII  Benefits Review Board, Department of Labor (Parts 800-
                -899)
      VIII  Joint Board for the Enrollment of Actuaries (Parts 
                900--999)
        IX  Office of the Assistant Secretary for Veterans' 
                Employment and Training, Department of Labor 
                (Parts 1000--1099)

                       Title 21--Food and Drugs

         I  Food and Drug Administration, Department of Health and 
                Human Services (Parts 1--1299)
        II  Drug Enforcement Administration, Department of Justice 
                (Parts 1300--1399)
       III  Office of National Drug Control Policy (Parts 1400--
                1499)

                      Title 22--Foreign Relations

         I  Department of State (Parts 1--199)
        II  Agency for International Development (Parts 200--299)
       III  Peace Corps (Parts 300--399)
        IV  International Joint Commission, United States and 
                Canada (Parts 400--499)
         V  Broadcasting Board of Governors (Parts 500--599)
       VII  Overseas Private Investment Corporation (Parts 700--
                799)
        IX  Foreign Service Grievance Board (Parts 900--999)
         X  Inter-American Foundation (Parts 1000--1099)
        XI  International Boundary and Water Commission, United 
                States and Mexico, United States Section (Parts 
                1100--1199)
       XII  United States International Development Cooperation 
                Agency (Parts 1200--1299)
       XIV  Foreign Service Labor Relations Board; Federal Labor 
                Relations Authority; General Counsel of the 
                Federal Labor Relations Authority; and the Foreign 
                Service Impasse Disputes Panel (Parts 1400--1499)
        XV  African Development Foundation (Parts 1500--1599)
       XVI  Japan-United States Friendship Commission (Parts 1600-
                -1699)
      XVII  United States Institute of Peace (Parts 1700--1799)

[[Page 1116]]

                          Title 23--Highways

         I  Federal Highway Administration, Department of 
                Transportation (Parts 1--999)
        II  National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and 
                Federal Highway Administration, Department of 
                Transportation (Parts 1200--1299)
       III  National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 
                Department of Transportation (Parts 1300--1399)

                Title 24--Housing and Urban Development

            Subtitle A--Office of the Secretary, Department of 
                Housing and Urban Development (Parts 0--99)
            Subtitle B--Regulations Relating to Housing and Urban 
                Development
         I  Office of Assistant Secretary for Equal Opportunity, 
                Department of Housing and Urban Development (Parts 
                100--199)
        II  Office of Assistant Secretary for Housing-Federal 
                Housing Commissioner, Department of Housing and 
                Urban Development (Parts 200--299)
       III  Government National Mortgage Association, Department 
                of Housing and Urban Development (Parts 300--399)
        IV  Office of Housing and Office of Multifamily Housing 
                Assistance Restructuring, Department of Housing 
                and Urban Development (Parts 400--499)
         V  Office of Assistant Secretary for Community Planning 
                and Development, Department of Housing and Urban 
                Development (Parts 500--599)
        VI  Office of Assistant Secretary for Community Planning 
                and Development, Department of Housing and Urban 
                Development (Parts 600--699) [Reserved]
       VII  Office of the Secretary, Department of Housing and 
                Urban Development (Housing Assistance Programs and 
                Public and Indian Housing Programs) (Parts 700--
                799)
      VIII  Office of the Assistant Secretary for Housing--Federal 
                Housing Commissioner, Department of Housing and 
                Urban Development (Section 8 Housing Assistance 
                Programs, Section 202 Direct Loan Program, Section 
                202 Supportive Housing for the Elderly Program and 
                Section 811 Supportive Housing for Persons With 
                Disabilities Program) (Parts 800--899)
        IX  Office of Assistant Secretary for Public and Indian 
                Housing, Department of Housing and Urban 
                Development (Parts 900--1699)
         X  Office of Assistant Secretary for Housing--Federal 
                Housing Commissioner, Department of Housing and 
                Urban Development (Interstate Land Sales 
                Registration Program) (Parts 1700--1799)
       XII  Office of Inspector General, Department of Housing and 
                Urban Development (Parts 2000--2099)
        XX  Office of Assistant Secretary for Housing--Federal 
                Housing Commissioner, Department of Housing and 
                Urban Development (Parts 3200--3899)
       XXV  Neighborhood Reinvestment Corporation (Parts 4100--
                4199)

[[Page 1117]]

                           Title 25--Indians

         I  Bureau of Indian Affairs, Department of the Interior 
                (Parts 1--299)
        II  Indian Arts and Crafts Board, Department of the 
                Interior (Parts 300--399)
       III  National Indian Gaming Commission, Department of the 
                Interior (Parts 500--599)
        IV  Office of Navajo and Hopi Indian Relocation (Parts 
                700--799)
         V  Bureau of Indian Affairs, Department of the Interior, 
                and Indian Health Service, Department of Health 
                and Human Services (Part 900)
        VI  Office of the Assistant Secretary-Indian Affairs, 
                Department of the Interior (Parts 1000--1199)
       VII  Office of the Special Trustee for American Indians, 
                Department of the Interior (Part 1200)

                      Title 26--Internal Revenue

         I  Internal Revenue Service, Department of the Treasury 
                (Parts 1--899)

           Title 27--Alcohol, Tobacco Products and Firearms

         I  Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco and Firearms, Department of 
                the Treasury (Parts 1--299)

                   Title 28--Judicial Administration

         I  Department of Justice (Parts 0--199)
       III  Federal Prison Industries, Inc., Department of Justice 
                (Parts 300--399)
         V  Bureau of Prisons, Department of Justice (Parts 500--
                599)
        VI  Offices of Independent Counsel, Department of Justice 
                (Parts 600--699)
       VII  Office of Independent Counsel (Parts 700--799)
      VIII  Court Services and Offender Supervision Agency for the 
                District of Columbia (Parts 800--899)
        IX  National Crime Prevention and Privacy Compact Council 
                (Parts 900--999)
        XI  Department of Justice and Department of State (Parts 
                1100--1199)

                            Title 29--Labor

            Subtitle A--Office of the Secretary of Labor (Parts 0-
                -99)
            Subtitle B--Regulations Relating to Labor
         I  National Labor Relations Board (Parts 100--199)
        II  Office of Labor-Management Standards, Department of 
                Labor (Parts 200--299)
       III  National Railroad Adjustment Board (Parts 300--399)

[[Page 1118]]

        IV  Office of Labor-Management Standards, Department of 
                Labor (Parts 400--499)
         V  Wage and Hour Division, Department of Labor (Parts 
                500--899)
        IX  Construction Industry Collective Bargaining Commission 
                (Parts 900--999)
         X  National Mediation Board (Parts 1200--1299)
       XII  Federal Mediation and Conciliation Service (Parts 
                1400--1499)
       XIV  Equal Employment Opportunity Commission (Parts 1600--
                1699)
      XVII  Occupational Safety and Health Administration, 
                Department of Labor (Parts 1900--1999)
        XX  Occupational Safety and Health Review Commission 
                (Parts 2200--2499)
       XXV  Pension and Welfare Benefits Administration, 
                Department of Labor (Parts 2500--2599)
     XXVII  Federal Mine Safety and Health Review Commission 
                (Parts 2700--2799)
        XL  Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation (Parts 4000--
                4999)

                      Title 30--Mineral Resources

         I  Mine Safety and Health Administration, Department of 
                Labor (Parts 1--199)
        II  Minerals Management Service, Department of the 
                Interior (Parts 200--299)
       III  Board of Surface Mining and Reclamation Appeals, 
                Department of the Interior (Parts 300--399)
        IV  Geological Survey, Department of the Interior (Parts 
                400--499)
       VII  Office of Surface Mining Reclamation and Enforcement, 
                Department of the Interior (Parts 700--999)

                 Title 31--Money and Finance: Treasury

            Subtitle A--Office of the Secretary of the Treasury 
                (Parts 0--50)
            Subtitle B--Regulations Relating to Money and Finance
         I  Monetary Offices, Department of the Treasury (Parts 
                51--199)
        II  Fiscal Service, Department of the Treasury (Parts 200-
                -399)
        IV  Secret Service, Department of the Treasury (Parts 400-
                -499)
         V  Office of Foreign Assets Control, Department of the 
                Treasury (Parts 500--599)
        VI  Bureau of Engraving and Printing, Department of the 
                Treasury (Parts 600--699)
       VII  Federal Law Enforcement Training Center, Department of 
                the Treasury (Parts 700--799)
      VIII  Office of International Investment, Department of the 
                Treasury (Parts 800--899)
        IX  Federal Claims Collection Standards (Department of the 
                Treasury--Department of Justice) (Parts 900--999)

[[Page 1119]]

                      Title 32--National Defense

            Subtitle A--Department of Defense
         I  Office of the Secretary of Defense (Parts 1--399)
         V  Department of the Army (Parts 400--699)
        VI  Department of the Navy (Parts 700--799)
       VII  Department of the Air Force (Parts 800--1099)
            Subtitle B--Other Regulations Relating to National 
                Defense
       XII  Defense Logistics Agency (Parts 1200--1299)
       XVI  Selective Service System (Parts 1600--1699)
     XVIII  National Counterintelligence Center (Parts 1800--1899)
       XIX  Central Intelligence Agency (Parts 1900--1999)
        XX  Information Security Oversight Office, National 
                Archives and Records Administration (Parts 2000--
                2099)
       XXI  National Security Council (Parts 2100--2199)
      XXIV  Office of Science and Technology Policy (Parts 2400--
                2499)
     XXVII  Office for Micronesian Status Negotiations (Parts 
                2700--2799)
    XXVIII  Office of the Vice President of the United States 
                (Parts 2800--2899)

               Title 33--Navigation and Navigable Waters

         I  Coast Guard, Department of Transportation (Parts 1--
                199)
        II  Corps of Engineers, Department of the Army (Parts 200-
                -399)
        IV  Saint Lawrence Seaway Development Corporation, 
                Department of Transportation (Parts 400--499)

                          Title 34--Education

            Subtitle A--Office of the Secretary, Department of 
                Education (Parts 1--99)
            Subtitle B--Regulations of the Offices of the 
                Department of Education
         I  Office for Civil Rights, Department of Education 
                (Parts 100--199)
        II  Office of Elementary and Secondary Education, 
                Department of Education (Parts 200--299)
       III  Office of Special Education and Rehabilitative 
                Services, Department of Education (Parts 300--399)
        IV  Office of Vocational and Adult Education, Department 
                of Education (Parts 400--499)
         V  Office of Bilingual Education and Minority Languages 
                Affairs, Department of Education (Parts 500--599)
        VI  Office of Postsecondary Education, Department of 
                Education (Parts 600--699)
       VII  Office of Educational Research and Improvement, 
                Department of Education (Parts 700--799)
        XI  National Institute for Literacy (Parts 1100--1199)
            Subtitle C--Regulations Relating to Education
       XII  National Council on Disability (Parts 1200--1299)

[[Page 1120]]

                        Title 35--Panama Canal

         I  Panama Canal Regulations (Parts 1--299)

             Title 36--Parks, Forests, and Public Property

         I  National Park Service, Department of the Interior 
                (Parts 1--199)
        II  Forest Service, Department of Agriculture (Parts 200--
                299)
       III  Corps of Engineers, Department of the Army (Parts 300-
                -399)
        IV  American Battle Monuments Commission (Parts 400--499)
         V  Smithsonian Institution (Parts 500--599)
       VII  Library of Congress (Parts 700--799)
      VIII  Advisory Council on Historic Preservation (Parts 800--
                899)
        IX  Pennsylvania Avenue Development Corporation (Parts 
                900--999)
         X  Presidio Trust (Parts 1000--1099)
        XI  Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance 
                Board (Parts 1100--1199)
       XII  National Archives and Records Administration (Parts 
                1200--1299)
        XV  Oklahoma City National Memorial Trust (Part 1501)
       XVI  Morris K. Udall Scholarship and Excellence in National 
                Environmental Policy Foundation (Parts 1600--1699)

             Title 37--Patents, Trademarks, and Copyrights

         I  United States Patent and Trademark Office, Department 
                of Commerce (Parts 1--199)
        II  Copyright Office, Library of Congress (Parts 200--299)
        IV  Assistant Secretary for Technology Policy, Department 
                of Commerce (Parts 400--499)
         V  Under Secretary for Technology, Department of Commerce 
                (Parts 500--599)

           Title 38--Pensions, Bonuses, and Veterans' Relief

         I  Department of Veterans Affairs (Parts 0--99)

                       Title 39--Postal Service

         I  United States Postal Service (Parts 1--999)
       III  Postal Rate Commission (Parts 3000--3099)

                  Title 40--Protection of Environment

         I  Environmental Protection Agency (Parts 1--799)
        IV  Environmental Protection Agency and Department of 
                Justice (Parts 1400--1499)
         V  Council on Environmental Quality (Parts 1500--1599)
        VI  Chemical Safety and Hazard Investigation Board (Parts 
                1600--1699)

[[Page 1121]]

       VII  Environmental Protection Agency and Department of 
                Defense; Uniform National Discharge Standards for 
                Vessels of the Armed Forces (Parts 1700--1799)

          Title 41--Public Contracts and Property Management

            Subtitle B--Other Provisions Relating to Public 
                Contracts
        50  Public Contracts, Department of Labor (Parts 50-1--50-
                999)
        51  Committee for Purchase From People Who Are Blind or 
                Severely Disabled (Parts 51-1--51-99)
        60  Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs, Equal 
                Employment Opportunity, Department of Labor (Parts 
                60-1--60-999)
        61  Office of the Assistant Secretary for Veterans' 
                Employment and Training Service, Department of 
                Labor (Parts 61-1--61-999)
            Subtitle C--Federal Property Management Regulations 
                System
       101  Federal Property Management Regulations (Parts 101-1--
                101-99)
       102  Federal Management Regulation (Parts 102-1--102-299)
       105  General Services Administration (Parts 105-1--105-999)
       109  Department of Energy Property Management Regulations 
                (Parts 109-1--109-99)
       114  Department of the Interior (Parts 114-1--114-99)
       115  Environmental Protection Agency (Parts 115-1--115-99)
       128  Department of Justice (Parts 128-1--128-99)
            Subtitle D--Other Provisions Relating to Property 
                Management [Reserved]
            Subtitle E--Federal Information Resources Management 
                Regulations System
       201  Federal Information Resources Management Regulation 
                (Parts 201-1--201-99) [Reserved]
            Subtitle F--Federal Travel Regulation System
       300  General (Parts 300-1--300-99)
       301  Temporary Duty (TDY) Travel Allowances (Parts 301-1--
                301-99)
       302  Relocation Allowances (Parts 302-1--302-99)
       303  Payment of Expenses Connected with the Death of 
                Certain Employees (Part 303-70)
       304  Payment from a Non-Federal Source for Travel Expenses 
                (Parts 304-1--304-99)

                        Title 42--Public Health

         I  Public Health Service, Department of Health and Human 
                Services (Parts 1--199)
        IV  Centers for Medicare & Medicaid Services, Department 
                of Health and Human Services (Parts 400--499)
         V  Office of Inspector General-Health Care, Department of 
                Health and Human Services (Parts 1000--1999)

[[Page 1122]]

                   Title 43--Public Lands: Interior

            Subtitle A--Office of the Secretary of the Interior 
                (Parts 1--199)
            Subtitle B--Regulations Relating to Public Lands
         I  Bureau of Reclamation, Department of the Interior 
                (Parts 200--499)
        II  Bureau of Land Management, Department of the Interior 
                (Parts 1000--9999)
       III  Utah Reclamation Mitigation and Conservation 
                Commission (Parts 10000--10005)

             Title 44--Emergency Management and Assistance

         I  Federal Emergency Management Agency (Parts 0--399)
        IV  Department of Commerce and Department of 
                Transportation (Parts 400--499)

                       Title 45--Public Welfare

            Subtitle A--Department of Health and Human Services 
                (Parts 1--199)
            Subtitle B--Regulations Relating to Public Welfare
        II  Office of Family Assistance (Assistance Programs), 
                Administration for Children and Families, 
                Department of Health and Human Services (Parts 
                200--299)
       III  Office of Child Support Enforcement (Child Support 
                Enforcement Program), Administration for Children 
                and Families, Department of Health and Human 
                Services (Parts 300--399)
        IV  Office of Refugee Resettlement, Administration for 
                Children and Families Department of Health and 
                Human Services (Parts 400--499)
         V  Foreign Claims Settlement Commission of the United 
                States, Department of Justice (Parts 500--599)
        VI  National Science Foundation (Parts 600--699)
       VII  Commission on Civil Rights (Parts 700--799)
      VIII  Office of Personnel Management (Parts 800--899)
         X  Office of Community Services, Administration for 
                Children and Families, Department of Health and 
                Human Services (Parts 1000--1099)
        XI  National Foundation on the Arts and the Humanities 
                (Parts 1100--1199)
       XII  Corporation for National and Community Service (Parts 
                1200--1299)
      XIII  Office of Human Development Services, Department of 
                Health and Human Services (Parts 1300--1399)
       XVI  Legal Services Corporation (Parts 1600--1699)
      XVII  National Commission on Libraries and Information 
                Science (Parts 1700--1799)
     XVIII  Harry S. Truman Scholarship Foundation (Parts 1800--
                1899)
       XXI  Commission on Fine Arts (Parts 2100--2199)

[[Page 1123]]

     XXIII  Arctic Research Commission (Part 2301)
      XXIV  James Madison Memorial Fellowship Foundation (Parts 
                2400--2499)
       XXV  Corporation for National and Community Service (Parts 
                2500--2599)

                          Title 46--Shipping

         I  Coast Guard, Department of Transportation (Parts 1--
                199)
        II  Maritime Administration, Department of Transportation 
                (Parts 200--399)
       III  Coast Guard (Great Lakes Pilotage), Department of 
                Transportation (Parts 400--499)
        IV  Federal Maritime Commission (Parts 500--599)

                      Title 47--Telecommunication

         I  Federal Communications Commission (Parts 0--199)
        II  Office of Science and Technology Policy and National 
                Security Council (Parts 200--299)
       III  National Telecommunications and Information 
                Administration, Department of Commerce (Parts 300-
                -399)

           Title 48--Federal Acquisition Regulations System

         1  Federal Acquisition Regulation (Parts 1--99)
         2  Department of Defense (Parts 200--299)
         3  Department of Health and Human Services (Parts 300--
                399)
         4  Department of Agriculture (Parts 400--499)
         5  General Services Administration (Parts 500--599)
         6  Department of State (Parts 600--699)
         7  United States Agency for International Development 
                (Parts 700--799)
         8  Department of Veterans Affairs (Parts 800--899)
         9  Department of Energy (Parts 900--999)
        10  Department of the Treasury (Parts 1000--1099)
        12  Department of Transportation (Parts 1200--1299)
        13  Department of Commerce (Parts 1300--1399)
        14  Department of the Interior (Parts 1400--1499)
        15  Environmental Protection Agency (Parts 1500--1599)
        16  Office of Personnel Management Federal Employees 
                Health Benefits Acquisition Regulation (Parts 
                1600--1699)
        17  Office of Personnel Management (Parts 1700--1799)
        18  National Aeronautics and Space Administration (Parts 
                1800--1899)
        19  Broadcasting Board of Governors (Parts 1900--1999)
        20  Nuclear Regulatory Commission (Parts 2000--2099)

[[Page 1124]]

        21  Office of Personnel Management, Federal Employees 
                Group Life Insurance Federal Acquisition 
                Regulation (Parts 2100--2199)
        23  Social Security Administration (Parts 2300--2399)
        24  Department of Housing and Urban Development (Parts 
                2400--2499)
        25  National Science Foundation (Parts 2500--2599)
        28  Department of Justice (Parts 2800--2899)
        29  Department of Labor (Parts 2900--2999)
        34  Department of Education Acquisition Regulation (Parts 
                3400--3499)
        35  Panama Canal Commission (Parts 3500--3599)
        44  Federal Emergency Management Agency (Parts 4400--4499)
        51  Department of the Army Acquisition Regulations (Parts 
                5100--5199)
        52  Department of the Navy Acquisition Regulations (Parts 
                5200--5299)
        53  Department of the Air Force Federal Acquisition 
                Regulation Supplement (Parts 5300--5399)
        54  Defense Logistics Agency, Department of Defense (Part 
                5452)
        57  African Development Foundation (Parts 5700--5799)
        61  General Services Administration Board of Contract 
                Appeals (Parts 6100--6199)
        63  Department of Transportation Board of Contract Appeals 
                (Parts 6300--6399)
        99  Cost Accounting Standards Board, Office of Federal 
                Procurement Policy, Office of Management and 
                Budget (Parts 9900--9999)

                       Title 49--Transportation

            Subtitle A--Office of the Secretary of Transportation 
                (Parts 1--99)
            Subtitle B--Other Regulations Relating to 
                Transportation
         I  Research and Special Programs Administration, 
                Department of Transportation (Parts 100--199)
        II  Federal Railroad Administration, Department of 
                Transportation (Parts 200--299)
       III  Federal Motor Carrier Safety Administration, 
                Department of Transportation (Parts 300--399)
        IV  Coast Guard, Department of Transportation (Parts 400--
                499)
         V  National Highway Traffic Safety Administration, 
                Department of Transportation (Parts 500--599)
        VI  Federal Transit Administration, Department of 
                Transportation (Parts 600--699)
       VII  National Railroad Passenger Corporation (AMTRAK) 
                (Parts 700--799)
      VIII  National Transportation Safety Board (Parts 800--999)
         X  Surface Transportation Board, Department of 
                Transportation (Parts 1000--1399)

[[Page 1125]]

        XI  Bureau of Transportation Statistics, Department of 
                Transportation (Parts 1400--1499)
       XII  Transportation Security Administration, Department of 
                Transportation (Parts 1500--1599)

                   Title 50--Wildlife and Fisheries

         I  United States Fish and Wildlife Service, Department of 
                the Interior (Parts 1--199)
        II  National Marine Fisheries Service, National Oceanic 
                and Atmospheric Administration, Department of 
                Commerce (Parts 200--299)
       III  International Fishing and Related Activities (Parts 
                300--399)
        IV  Joint Regulations (United States Fish and Wildlife 
                Service, Department of the Interior and National 
                Marine Fisheries Service, National Oceanic and 
                Atmospheric Administration, Department of 
                Commerce); Endangered Species Committee 
                Regulations (Parts 400--499)
         V  Marine Mammal Commission (Parts 500--599)
        VI  Fishery Conservation and Management, National Oceanic 
                and Atmospheric Administration, Department of 
                Commerce (Parts 600--699)

                      CFR Index and Finding Aids

            Subject/Agency Index
            List of Agency Prepared Indexes
            Parallel Tables of Statutory Authorities and Rules
            List of CFR Titles, Chapters, Subchapters, and Parts
            Alphabetical List of Agencies Appearing in the CFR



[[Page 1127]]





           Alphabetical List of Agencies Appearing in the CFR




                     (Revised as of October 1, 2002)

                                                  CFR Title, Subtitle or 
                     Agency                               Chapter

Administrative Committee of the Federal Register  1, I
Advanced Research Projects Agency                 32, I
Advisory Council on Historic Preservation         36, VIII
African Development Foundation                    22, XV
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 57
Agency for International Development, United      22, II
     States
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 7
Agricultural Marketing Service                    7, I, IX, X, XI
Agricultural Research Service                     7, V
Agriculture Department                            5, LXXIII
  Agricultural Marketing Service                  7, I, IX, X, XI
  Agricultural Research Service                   7, V
  Animal and Plant Health Inspection Service      7, III; 9, I
  Chief Financial Officer, Office of              7, XXX
  Commodity Credit Corporation                    7, XIV
  Cooperative State Research, Education, and      7, XXXIV
       Extension Service
  Economic Research Service                       7, XXXVII
  Energy, Office of                               7, XXIX
  Environmental Quality, Office of                7, XXXI
  Farm Service Agency                             7, VII, XVIII
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 4
  Federal Crop Insurance Corporation              7, IV
  Food and Nutrition Service                      7, II
  Food Safety and Inspection Service              9, III
  Foreign Agricultural Service                    7, XV
  Forest Service                                  36, II
  Grain Inspection, Packers and Stockyards        7, VIII; 9, II
       Administration
  Information Resources Management, Office of     7, XXVII
  Inspector General, Office of                    7, XXVI
  National Agricultural Library                   7, XLI
  National Agricultural Statistics Service        7, XXXVI
  Natural Resources Conservation Service          7, VI
  Operations, Office of                           7, XXVIII
  Procurement and Property Management, Office of  7, XXXII
  Rural Business-Cooperative Service              7, XVIII, XLII
  Rural Development Administration                7, XLII
  Rural Housing Service                           7, XVIII, XXXV
  Rural Telephone Bank                            7, XVI
  Rural Utilities Service                         7, XVII, XVIII, XLII
  Secretary of Agriculture, Office of             7, Subtitle A
  Transportation, Office of                       7, XXXIII
  World Agricultural Outlook Board                7, XXXVIII
Air Force Department                              32, VII
  Federal Acquisition Regulation Supplement       48, 53
Alcohol, Tobacco and Firearms, Bureau of          27, I
AMTRAK                                            49, VII
American Battle Monuments Commission              36, IV
American Indians, Office of the Special Trustee   25, VII
Animal and Plant Health Inspection Service        7, III; 9, I
Appalachian Regional Commission                   5, IX
Architectural and Transportation Barriers         36, XI
     Compliance Board
Arctic Research Commission                        45, XXIII

[[Page 1128]]

Armed Forces Retirement Home                      5, XI
Army Department                                   32, V
  Engineers, Corps of                             33, II; 36, III
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 51
Benefits Review Board                             20, VII
Bilingual Education and Minority Languages        34, V
     Affairs, Office of
Blind or Severely Disabled, Committee for         41, 51
     Purchase From People Who Are
Broadcasting Board of Governors                   22, V
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 19
Census Bureau                                     15, I
Centers for Medicare & Medicaid Services          42, IV
Central Intelligence Agency                       32, XIX
Chief Financial Officer, Office of                7, XXX
Child Support Enforcement, Office of              45, III
Children and Families, Administration for         45, II, III, IV, X
Civil Rights, Commission on                       45, VII
Civil Rights, Office for                          34, I
Coast Guard                                       33, I; 46, I; 49, IV
Coast Guard (Great Lakes Pilotage)                46, III
Commerce Department                               44, IV
  Census Bureau                                   15, I
  Economic Affairs, Under Secretary               37, V
  Economic Analysis, Bureau of                    15, VIII
  Economic Development Administration             13, III
  Emergency Management and Assistance             44, IV
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 13
  Fishery Conservation and Management             50, VI
  Foreign-Trade Zones Board                       15, IV
  Industry and Security, Bureau of                15, VII
  International Trade Administration              15, III; 19, III
  National Institute of Standards and Technology  15, II
  National Marine Fisheries Service               50, II, IV, VI
  National Oceanic and Atmospheric                15, IX; 50, II, III, IV, 
       Administration                             VI
  National Telecommunications and Information     15, XXIII; 47, III
       Administration
  National Weather Service                        15, IX
  Patent and Trademark Office, United States      37, I
  Productivity, Technology and Innovation,        37, IV
       Assistant Secretary for
  Secretary of Commerce, Office of                15, Subtitle A
  Technology, Under Secretary for                 37, V
  Technology Administration                       15, XI
  Technology Policy, Assistant Secretary for      37, IV
Commercial Space Transportation                   14, III
Commodity Credit Corporation                      7, XIV
Commodity Futures Trading Commission              5, XLI; 17, I
Community Planning and Development, Office of     24, V, VI
     Assistant Secretary for
Community Services, Office of                     45, X
Comptroller of the Currency                       12, I
Construction Industry Collective Bargaining       29, IX
     Commission
Consumer Product Safety Commission                5, LXXI; 16, II
Cooperative State Research, Education, and        7, XXXIV
     Extension Service
Copyright Office                                  37, II
Corporation for National and Community Service    45, XII, XXV
Cost Accounting Standards Board                   48, 99
Council on Environmental Quality                  40, V
Court Services and Offender Supervision Agency    28, VIII
     for the District of Columbia
Customs Service, United States                    19, I
Defense Contract Audit Agency                     32, I
Defense Department                                5, XXVI; 32, Subtitle A; 
                                                  40, VII
  Advanced Research Projects Agency               32, I
  Air Force Department                            32, VII

[[Page 1129]]

  Army Department                                 32, V; 33, II; 36, III, 
                                                  48, 51
  Defense Intelligence Agency                     32, I
  Defense Logistics Agency                        32, I, XII; 48, 54
  Engineers, Corps of                             33, II; 36, III
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 2
  National Imagery and Mapping Agency             32, I
  Navy Department                                 32, VI; 48, 52
  Secretary of Defense, Office of                 32, I
Defense Contract Audit Agency                     32, I
Defense Intelligence Agency                       32, I
Defense Logistics Agency                          32, XII; 48, 54
Defense Nuclear Facilities Safety Board           10, XVII
Delaware River Basin Commission                   18, III
District of Columbia, Court Services and          28, VIII
     Offender Supervision Agency for the
Drug Enforcement Administration                   21, II
East-West Foreign Trade Board                     15, XIII
Economic Affairs, Under Secretary                 37, V
Economic Analysis, Bureau of                      15, VIII
Economic Development Administration               13, III
Economic Research Service                         7, XXXVII
Education, Department of                          5, LIII
  Bilingual Education and Minority Languages      34, V
       Affairs, Office of
  Civil Rights, Office for                        34, I
  Educational Research and Improvement, Office    34, VII
       of
  Elementary and Secondary Education, Office of   34, II
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 34
  Postsecondary Education, Office of              34, VI
  Secretary of Education, Office of               34, Subtitle A
  Special Education and Rehabilitative Services,  34, III
       Office of
  Vocational and Adult Education, Office of       34, IV
Educational Research and Improvement, Office of   34, VII
Elementary and Secondary Education, Office of     34, II
Emergency Oil and Gas Guaranteed Loan Board       13, V
Emergency Steel Guarantee Loan Board              13, IV
Employees' Compensation Appeals Board             20, IV
Employees Loyalty Board                           5, V
Employment and Training Administration            20, V
Employment Standards Administration               20, VI
Endangered Species Committee                      50, IV
Energy, Department of                             5, XXIII; 10, II, III, X
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 9
  Federal Energy Regulatory Commission            5, XXIV; 18, I
  Property Management Regulations                 41, 109
Energy, Office of                                 7, XXIX
Engineers, Corps of                               33, II; 36, III
Engraving and Printing, Bureau of                 31, VI
Environmental Protection Agency                   5, LIV; 40, I, IV, VII
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 15
  Property Management Regulations                 41, 115
Environmental Quality, Office of                  7, XXXI
Equal Employment Opportunity Commission           5, LXII; 29, XIV
Equal Opportunity, Office of Assistant Secretary  24, I
     for
Executive Office of the President                 3, I
  Administration, Office of                       5, XV
  Environmental Quality, Council on               40, V
  Management and Budget, Office of                5, III, LXXVII; 14, VI; 
                                                  48, 99
  National Drug Control Policy, Office of         21, III
  National Security Council                       32, XXI; 47, 2
  Presidential Documents                          3
  Science and Technology Policy, Office of        32, XXIV; 47, II
  Trade Representative, Office of the United      15, XX
       States
Export-Import Bank of the United States           5, LII; 12, IV
Family Assistance, Office of                      45, II

[[Page 1130]]

Farm Credit Administration                        5, XXXI; 12, VI
Farm Credit System Insurance Corporation          5, XXX; 12, XIV
Farm Service Agency                               7, VII, XVIII
Federal Acquisition Regulation                    48, 1
Federal Aviation Administration                   14, I
  Commercial Space Transportation                 14, III
Federal Claims Collection Standards               31, IX
Federal Communications Commission                 5, XXIX; 47, I
Federal Contract Compliance Programs, Office of   41, 60
Federal Crop Insurance Corporation                7, IV
Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation             5, XXII; 12, III
Federal Election Commission                       11, I
Federal Emergency Management Agency               44, I
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 44
Federal Employees Group Life Insurance Federal    48, 21
     Acquisition Regulation
Federal Employees Health Benefits Acquisition     48, 16
     Regulation
Federal Energy Regulatory Commission              5, XXIV; 18, I
Federal Financial Institutions Examination        12, XI
     Council
Federal Financing Bank                            12, VIII
Federal Highway Administration                    23, I, II
Federal Home Loan Mortgage Corporation            1, IV
Federal Housing Enterprise Oversight Office       12, XVII
Federal Housing Finance Board                     12, IX
Federal Labor Relations Authority, and General    5, XIV; 22, XIV
     Counsel of the Federal Labor Relations 
     Authority
Federal Law Enforcement Training Center           31, VII
Federal Management Regulation                     41, 102
Federal Maritime Commission                       46, IV
Federal Mediation and Conciliation Service        29, XII
Federal Mine Safety and Health Review Commission  5, LXXIV; 29, XXVII
Federal Motor Carrier Safety Administration       49, III
Federal Prison Industries, Inc.                   28, III
Federal Procurement Policy Office                 48, 99
Federal Property Management Regulations           41, 101
Federal Railroad Administration                   49, II
Federal Register, Administrative Committee of     1, I
Federal Register, Office of                       1, II
Federal Reserve System                            12, II
  Board of Governors                              5, LVIII
Federal Retirement Thrift Investment Board        5, VI, LXXVI
Federal Service Impasses Panel                    5, XIV
Federal Trade Commission                          5, XLVII; 16, I
Federal Transit Administration                    49, VI
Federal Travel Regulation System                  41, Subtitle F
Fine Arts, Commission on                          45, XXI
Fiscal Service                                    31, II
Fish and Wildlife Service, United States          50, I, IV
Fishery Conservation and Management               50, VI
Food and Drug Administration                      21, I
Food and Nutrition Service                        7, II
Food Safety and Inspection Service                9, III
Foreign Agricultural Service                      7, XV
Foreign Assets Control, Office of                 31, V
Foreign Claims Settlement Commission of the       45, V
     United States
Foreign Service Grievance Board                   22, IX
Foreign Service Impasse Disputes Panel            22, XIV
Foreign Service Labor Relations Board             22, XIV
Foreign-Trade Zones Board                         15, IV
Forest Service                                    36, II
General Accounting Office                         4, I
General Services Administration                   5, LVII; 41, 105
  Contract Appeals, Board of                      48, 61
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 5
  Federal Management Regulation                   41, 102
  Federal Property Management Regulation          41, 101
  Federal Travel Regulation System                41, Subtitle F

[[Page 1131]]

  General                                         41, 300
  Payment From a Non-Federal Source for Travel    41, 304
       Expenses
  Payment of Expenses Connected With the Death    41, 303
       of Certain Employees
  Relocation Allowances                           41, 302
  Temporary Duty (TDY) Travel Allowances          41, 301
Geological Survey                                 30, IV
Government Ethics, Office of                      5, XVI
Government National Mortgage Association          24, III
Grain Inspection, Packers and Stockyards          7, VIII; 9, II
     Administration
Harry S. Truman Scholarship Foundation            45, XVIII
Health and Human Services, Department of          5, XLV; 45, Subtitle A
  Centers for Medicare & Medicaid Services        42, IV
  Child Support Enforcement, Office of            45, III
  Children and Families, Administration for       45, II, III, IV, X
  Community Services, Office of                   45, X
  Family Assistance, Office of                    45, II
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 3
  Food and Drug Administration                    21, I
  Human Development Services, Office of           45, XIII
  Indian Health Service                           25, V
  Inspector General (Health Care), Office of      42, V
  Public Health Service                           42, I
  Refugee Resettlement, Office of                 45, IV
Housing and Urban Development, Department of      5, LXV; 24, Subtitle B
  Community Planning and Development, Office of   24, V, VI
       Assistant Secretary for
  Equal Opportunity, Office of Assistant          24, I
       Secretary for
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 24
  Federal Housing Enterprise Oversight, Office    12, XVII
       of
  Government National Mortgage Association        24, III
  Housing--Federal Housing Commissioner, Office   24, II, VIII, X, XX
       of Assistant Secretary for
  Housing, Office of, and Multifamily Housing     24, IV
       Assistance Restructuring, Office of
  Inspector General, Office of                    24, XII
  Public and Indian Housing, Office of Assistant  24, IX
       Secretary for
  Secretary, Office of                            24, Subtitle A, VII
Housing--Federal Housing Commissioner, Office of  24, II, VIII, X, XX
     Assistant Secretary for
Housing, Office of, and Multifamily Housing       24, IV
     Assistance Restructuring, Office of
Human Development Services, Office of             45, XIII
Immigration and Naturalization Service            8, I
Independent Counsel, Office of                    28, VII
Indian Affairs, Bureau of                         25, I, V
Indian Affairs, Office of the Assistant           25, VI
     Secretary
Indian Arts and Crafts Board                      25, II
Indian Health Service                             25, V
Industry and Security, Bureau of                  15, VII
Information Resources Management, Office of       7, XXVII
Information Security Oversight Office, National   32, XX
     Archives and Records Administration
Inspector General
  Agriculture Department                          7, XXVI
  Health and Human Services Department            42, V
  Housing and Urban Development Department        24, XII
Institute of Peace, United States                 22, XVII
Inter-American Foundation                         5, LXIII; 22, X
Interior Department
  American Indians, Office of the Special         25, VII
       Trustee
  Endangered Species Committee                    50, IV
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 14
  Federal Property Management Regulations System  41, 114
  Fish and Wildlife Service, United States        50, I, IV
  Geological Survey                               30, IV
  Indian Affairs, Bureau of                       25, I, V

[[Page 1132]]

  Indian Affairs, Office of the Assistant         25, VI
       Secretary
  Indian Arts and Crafts Board                    25, II
  Land Management, Bureau of                      43, II
  Minerals Management Service                     30, II
  National Indian Gaming Commission               25, III
  National Park Service                           36, I
  Reclamation, Bureau of                          43, I
  Secretary of the Interior, Office of            43, Subtitle A
  Surface Mining and Reclamation Appeals, Board   30, III
       of
  Surface Mining Reclamation and Enforcement,     30, VII
       Office of
Internal Revenue Service                          26, I
International Boundary and Water Commission,      22, XI
     United States and Mexico, United States 
     Section
International Development, United States Agency   22, II
     for
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 7
International Development Cooperation Agency,     22, XII
     United States
International Fishing and Related Activities      50, III
International Investment, Office of               31, VIII
International Joint Commission, United States     22, IV
     and Canada
International Organizations Employees Loyalty     5, V
     Board
International Trade Administration                15, III; 19, III
International Trade Commission, United States     19, II
Interstate Commerce Commission                    5, XL
James Madison Memorial Fellowship Foundation      45, XXIV
Japan-United States Friendship Commission         22, XVI
Joint Board for the Enrollment of Actuaries       20, VIII
Justice Department                                5, XXVIII; 28, I, XI; 40, 
                                                  IV
  Drug Enforcement Administration                 21, II
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 28
  Federal Claims Collection Standards             31, IX
  Federal Prison Industries, Inc.                 28, III
  Foreign Claims Settlement Commission of the     45, V
       United States
  Immigration and Naturalization Service          8, I
  Offices of Independent Counsel                  28, VI
  Prisons, Bureau of                              28, V
  Property Management Regulations                 41, 128
Labor Department                                  5, XLII
  Benefits Review Board                           20, VII
  Employees' Compensation Appeals Board           20, IV
  Employment and Training Administration          20, V
  Employment Standards Administration             20, VI
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 29
  Federal Contract Compliance Programs, Office    41, 60
       of
  Federal Procurement Regulations System          41, 50
  Labor-Management Standards, Office of           29, II, IV
  Mine Safety and Health Administration           30, I
  Occupational Safety and Health Administration   29, XVII
  Pension and Welfare Benefits Administration     29, XXV
  Public Contracts                                41, 50
  Secretary of Labor, Office of                   29, Subtitle A
  Veterans' Employment and Training Service,      41, 61; 20, IX
       Office of the Assistant Secretary for
  Wage and Hour Division                          29, V
  Workers' Compensation Programs, Office of       20, I
Labor-Management Standards, Office of             29, II, IV
Land Management, Bureau of                        43, II
Legal Services Corporation                        45, XVI
Library of Congress                               36, VII
  Copyright Office                                37, II
Management and Budget, Office of                  5, III, LXXVII; 14, VI; 
                                                  48, 99
Marine Mammal Commission                          50, V
Maritime Administration                           46, II
Merit Systems Protection Board                    5, II

[[Page 1133]]

Micronesian Status Negotiations, Office for       32, XXVII
Mine Safety and Health Administration             30, I
Minerals Management Service                       30, II
Minority Business Development Agency              15, XIV
Miscellaneous Agencies                            1, IV
Monetary Offices                                  31, I
Morris K. Udall Scholarship and Excellence in     36, XVI
     National Environmental Policy Foundation
National Aeronautics and Space Administration     5, LIX; 14, V
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 18
National Agricultural Library                     7, XLI
National Agricultural Statistics Service          7, XXXVI
National and Community Service, Corporation for   45, XII, XXV
National Archives and Records Administration      5, LXVI; 36, XII
  Information Security Oversight Office           32, XX
National Bureau of Standards                      15, II
National Capital Planning Commission              1, IV
National Commission for Employment Policy         1, IV
National Commission on Libraries and Information  45, XVII
     Science
National Council on Disability                    34, XII
National Counterintelligence Center               32, XVIII
National Credit Union Administration              12, VII
National Crime Prevention and Privacy Compact     28, IX
     Council
National Drug Control Policy, Office of           21, III
National Foundation on the Arts and the           45, XI
     Humanities
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration    23, II, III; 49, V
National Imagery and Mapping Agency               32, I
National Indian Gaming Commission                 25, III
National Institute for Literacy                   34, XI
National Institute of Standards and Technology    15, II
National Labor Relations Board                    5, LXI; 29, I
National Marine Fisheries Service                 50, II, IV, VI
National Mediation Board                          29, X
National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration   15, IX; 50, II, III, IV, 
                                                  VI
National Park Service                             36, I
National Railroad Adjustment Board                29, III
National Railroad Passenger Corporation (AMTRAK)  49, VII
National Science Foundation                       5, XLIII; 45, VI
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 25
National Security Council                         32, XXI
National Security Council and Office of Science   47, II
     and Technology Policy
National Telecommunications and Information       15, XXIII; 47, III
     Administration
National Transportation Safety Board              49, VIII
National Weather Service                          15, IX
Natural Resources Conservation Service            7, VI
Navajo and Hopi Indian Relocation, Office of      25, IV
Navy Department                                   32, VI
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 52
Neighborhood Reinvestment Corporation             24, XXV
Northeast Interstate Low-Level Radioactive Waste  10, XVIII
     Commission
Nuclear Regulatory Commission                     5, XLVIII; 10, I
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 20
Occupational Safety and Health Administration     29, XVII
Occupational Safety and Health Review Commission  29, XX
Offices of Independent Counsel                    28, VI
Oklahoma City National Memorial Trust             36, XV
Operations Office                                 7, XXVIII
Overseas Private Investment Corporation           5, XXXIII; 22, VII
Panama Canal Commission                           48, 35
Panama Canal Regulations                          35, I
Patent and Trademark Office, United States        37, I
Payment From a Non-Federal Source for Travel      41, 304
     Expenses
Payment of Expenses Connected With the Death of   41, 303
   Certain Employees
[[Page 1134]]

Peace Corps                                       22, III
Pennsylvania Avenue Development Corporation       36, IX
Pension and Welfare Benefits Administration       29, XXV
Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation              29, XL
Personnel Management, Office of                   5, I, XXXV; 45, VIII
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 17
  Federal Employees Group Life Insurance Federal  48, 21
       Acquisition Regulation
  Federal Employees Health Benefits Acquisition   48, 16
       Regulation
Postal Rate Commission                            5, XLVI; 39, III
Postal Service, United States                     5, LX; 39, I
Postsecondary Education, Office of                34, VI
President's Commission on White House             1, IV
     Fellowships
Presidential Documents                            3
Presidio Trust                                    36, X
Prisons, Bureau of                                28, V
Procurement and Property Management, Office of    7, XXXII
Productivity, Technology and Innovation,          37, IV
     Assistant Secretary
Public Contracts, Department of Labor             41, 50
Public and Indian Housing, Office of Assistant    24, IX
     Secretary for
Public Health Service                             42, I
Railroad Retirement Board                         20, II
Reclamation, Bureau of                            43, I
Refugee Resettlement, Office of                   45, IV
Regional Action Planning Commissions              13, V
Relocation Allowances                             41, 302
Research and Special Programs Administration      49, I
Rural Business-Cooperative Service                7, XVIII, XLII
Rural Development Administration                  7, XLII
Rural Housing Service                             7, XVIII, XXXV
Rural Telephone Bank                              7, XVI
Rural Utilities Service                           7, XVII, XVIII, XLII
Saint Lawrence Seaway Development Corporation     33, IV
Science and Technology Policy, Office of          32, XXIV
Science and Technology Policy, Office of, and     47, II
     National Security Council
Secret Service                                    31, IV
Securities and Exchange Commission                17, II
Selective Service System                          32, XVI
Small Business Administration                     13, I
Smithsonian Institution                           36, V
Social Security Administration                    20, III; 48, 23
Soldiers' and Airmen's Home, United States        5, XI
Special Counsel, Office of                        5, VIII
Special Education and Rehabilitative Services,    34, III
     Office of
State Department                                  22, I; 28, XI
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 6
Surface Mining and Reclamation Appeals, Board of  30, III
Surface Mining Reclamation and Enforcement,       30, VII
     Office of
Surface Transportation Board                      49, X
Susquehanna River Basin Commission                18, VIII
Technology Administration                         15, XI
Technology Policy, Assistant Secretary for        37, IV
Technology, Under Secretary for                   37, V
Tennessee Valley Authority                        5, LXIX; 18, XIII
Thrift Supervision Office, Department of the      12, V
     Treasury
Trade Representative, United States, Office of    15, XX
Transportation, Department of                     5, L
  Coast Guard                                     33, I; 46, I; 49, IV
  Coast Guard (Great Lakes Pilotage)              46, III
  Commercial Space Transportation                 14, III
  Contract Appeals, Board of                      48, 63
  Emergency Management and Assistance             44, IV
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 12
  Federal Aviation Administration                 14, I
  Federal Highway Administration                  23, I, II

[[Page 1135]]

  Federal Motor Carrier Safety Administration     49, III
  Federal Railroad Administration                 49, II
  Federal Transit Administration                  49, VI
  Maritime Administration                         46, II
  National Highway Traffic Safety Administration  23, II, III; 49, V
  Research and Special Programs Administration    49, I
  Saint Lawrence Seaway Development Corporation   33, IV
  Secretary of Transportation, Office of          14, II; 49, Subtitle A
  Surface Transportation Board                    49, X
  Transportation Security Administration          49, XII
  Transportation Statistics Bureau                49, XI
Transportation, Office of                         7, XXXIII
Transportation Security Administration            49, XII
Transportation Statistics Bureau                  49, XI
Travel Allowances, Temporary Duty (TDY)           41, 301
Treasury Department                               5, XXI; 12, XV; 17, IV; 
                                                  31, IX
  Alcohol, Tobacco and Firearms, Bureau of        27, I
  Community Development Financial Institutions    12, XVIII
       Fund
  Comptroller of the Currency                     12, I
  Customs Service, United States                  19, I
  Engraving and Printing, Bureau of               31, VI
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 10
  Federal Law Enforcement Training Center         31, VII
  Fiscal Service                                  31, II
  Foreign Assets Control, Office of               31, V
  Internal Revenue Service                        26, I
  International Investment, Office of             31, VIII
  Monetary Offices                                31, I
  Secret Service                                  31, IV
  Secretary of the Treasury, Office of            31, Subtitle A
  Thrift Supervision, Office of                   12, V
Truman, Harry S. Scholarship Foundation           45, XVIII
United States and Canada, International Joint     22, IV
     Commission
United States and Mexico, International Boundary  22, XI
     and Water Commission, United States Section
Utah Reclamation Mitigation and Conservation      43, III
     Commission
Veterans Affairs Department                       38, I
  Federal Acquisition Regulation                  48, 8
Veterans' Employment and Training Service,        41, 61; 20, IX
     Office of the Assistant Secretary for
Vice President of the United States, Office of    32, XXVIII
Vocational and Adult Education, Office of         34, IV
Wage and Hour Division                            29, V
Water Resources Council                           18, VI
Workers' Compensation Programs, Office of         20, I
World Agricultural Outlook Board                  7, XXXVIII

[[Page 1137]]



List of CFR Sections Affected



All changes in this volume of the Code of Federal Regulations which were 
made by documents published in the Federal Register since January 1, 
2001, are enumerated in the following list. Entries indicate the nature 
of the changes effected. Page numbers refer to Federal Register pages. 
The user should consult the entries for chapters and parts as well as 
sections for revisions.

For the period before January 1, 2001, see the ``List of Sections 
Affected, 1949-1963, 1964-1972, 1973-1985, and 1986-2000'' published in 
11 separate volumes.

                                  2001

49 CFR
                                                                   66 FR
                                                                    Page
107.1  (a) amended.................................................45377
107.3  Amended.....................................................45377
107.7  (a) and (c) amended.........................................45377
107.117  (d) introductory text and (e) amended.....................45377
107.127  (a) amended...............................................45377
107.305  (a), (c) and (d) amended..................................45377
107.307  (a) introductory text and (b) amended.....................45377
107.309  (a) and (b)(1) amended....................................45377
107.310  (a), (b) introductory text and (c) amended................45377
107.317  (c) amended...............................................45377
107.327  (a)(1) introductory text amended..........................45377
107.335  Amended...................................................45377
107.301--107.339 (Subpart D)  Appendix A amended...................45180
107.401  (b) amended...............................................45377
107.402  (b)(6) and (c) amended....................................45377
107.403  (a), (b) and (c) amended..................................45377
107.404  (a)(3) and (b) amended....................................45377
107.405  (a) introductory text and (b) introductory text amended 
                                                                   45377
110.20  Amended....................................................45377
110.40  (a)(7) and (b)(6) amended..................................45377
110.60  (a)(4) amended.............................................45377
110.70  (c) introductory text and (d) amended......................45377
110.100  Amended...................................................45377
110.110  Amended...................................................45377
110.120  Amended...................................................45377
130.5  Amended.....................................................45378
171.1  (a) introductory text amended...............................45378
171.7  (a)(3) table amended.........................................8646
    (a)(1) and (3) table amended...................................33334
    (a)(2)(i) and (3) table amended................................45378
171.8  Amended.....................................................33335
    Amended.................................................45182, 45378
171.10  (c)(2) table amended.......................................33335
    (c)(2) table amended...........................................45378
171.11  Introductory text revised; (d)(6)(i), (ii) and (iv) 
        amended; (d)(6)(vi) and (17) added.........................33336
    (d)(13) amended................................................45182
171.12  (b) heading revised; (b)(3) amended.........................8646
    (b)(5), (d) heading, introductory text and (4) revised; 
(b)(20) and (d)(7) added; (d)(5) and (6) amended...................33336
     (b)(8)(iii) and (iv) revised; (b)(8)(v), (vi) and (e) added 
                                                                   44254
171.12a  (b)(18) added.............................................33336
     (b)(5)(iii) and (iv) revised; new (b)(5)(v) and (vi) added....44255
171.14  (d) introductory text, (1) and (2) introductory text 
        revised; (d)(4) and (5) added..............................33336
    (c) amended....................................................45378
171.15  (b) introductory text amended..............................45182
171.20  (a) and (c) amended........................................45378
171.21  (a) and (b) amended........................................45378
172.1  Amended.....................................................45379
172.101  (b)(1), (c)(11) and table revised; (c)(16) and (k)(6) 
        through (20) added.........................................33337
    Appendix B amended.............................................33413
    Appendix A amended.............................................45182

[[Page 1138]]

    (b)(1), (d)(2), (f), (k)(2)(i), (4), (5), (l)(2) and Appendix 
B amended..........................................................45379
172.102  (c)(1) amended.............................................8647
    (c)(1), (2), (3) and (8) amended; (c)(4) and (7) revised.......33414
    (c)(1) and (3) amended.........................................45182
    (c)(1), (2), (3), (5), and (7)(ii) amended.....................45379
172.202  (a)(4) and (e) revised....................................33425
172.203  (d)(11) and (n) revised; (i)(5) and (6) added.............33425
    (k) introductory text, (o)(3) amended..........................45182
    (d)(7)(ii) amended.............................................45379
172.301  (a)(3) introductory text and (b) heading amended..........45182
172.302  (b)(2) amended............................................45379
172.310  (a) amended...............................................45379
172.312  (c)(2) and (3) amended....................................45379
172.322  (d)(1)(i), (ii), (2)(i), (ii) amended.....................45379
172.330  (a)(1)(ii) amended........................................33425
172.400a  (d) added................................................44255
172.401  (c)(1) and (2) revised.....................................8647
    (c)(1) through (4) revised.....................................45379
172.402  (b) revised...............................................33425
172.405  (a) introductory text amended; (a)(1) and (2) removed.....33425
172.407  (f) revised................................................8647
     (f) revised...................................................44255
172.411  Heading and (d) revised; (c) amended......................33425
172.502  (b)(1) revised.............................................8647
    (b)(1) revised.................................................33426
172.504  (g) existing text amended; (g)(1) through (4) added.......33426
172.512  (a)(3) amended............................................33426
    (b) heading amended............................................45182
172.514  (c)(4) amended............................................45379
172.519  (b)(4) revised............................................33426
    (f) revised....................................................44255
172.602  (a)(1) amended............................................45379
172.604  (c)(2) amended............................................45182
173.2a  (b) table amended...................................33426, 45183
    (c)(4) amended.................................................45379
173.3  (c)(1) amended..............................................45380
173.4  (a)(1) introductory text revised............................33426
    (a)(6) amended.................................................45183
    (c) amended....................................................45379
    (a)(1)(i) amended..............................................45381
173.6  (a)(3) amended..............................................45381
173.7  (c) amended.................................................45381
173.8  (b) and (c) amended.........................................45380
173.13  (c)(1)(i) amended..........................................45381
173.21  (f) introductory text and (3)(ii) amended...................8647
    (f)(3) introductory text and (i) amended.......................45379
    (f)(3)(ii) revised.............................................45381
173.22  (c)(2) amended.............................................45379
    (a)(3)(i) amended..............................................45380
    (a)(2)(iii) revised............................................45381
173.22a  (b) amended...............................................45381
173.24  (d)(2) introductory text amended............................8647
    (e)(3)(iii) amended............................................45379
    (d)(2) introductory text and (i) revised.......................45381
173.24a  (b)(4)(i), (ii), (iii) amended............................45380
173.24b  (e) added.................................................33426
173.27  (c)(2)(i), (ii)(A), (B), (C) and (3)(ii) amended...........45380
173.28  (b)(7)(iv)(C) amended......................................45183
    (b)(2)(ii) and (7)(iv)(C) amended..............................45379
    (b)(2)(i) and (4)(ii) amended..................................45380
173.31  (b)(2)(ii) amended.........................................33427
    (c)(3), (e)(2) introductory text, (f)(1) introductory text and 
(i)(A) amended.....................................................45380
    (b)(2)(ii) revised; (d)(1)(vi) amended.........................45381
173.32  Revised....................................................33427
173.32a  Removed...................................................33429
173.32b  Removed...................................................33429
173.32c  Removed...................................................33429
173.33  (c)(1)(iii) amended........................................45183
173.34  (e)(13) table amended......................................33429
    (d)(6) and (e)(13) table amended...............................45183
    (c)(3), (d)(1)(ii), (iii), (2), (e) Table, (2)(i), (ii) 
introductory text, (A), (B), (iii), (4)(iii) introductory text, 
(A), (v), (7)(ii), (8)(i)(C), (10), (12), (i) introductory text, 
(4)(i), (l) introductory text, (2) and (3) amended.................45380
173.35  (a), (c), (d), (f)(1), (2), (g), (h) introductory text, 
        (h)(1) introductory text, (i) through (iv), (2) 
        introductory text, (j), (k), (l) heading, (1), (2), (3) 
        and (4) amended............................................45380
    Heading and (k) amended........................................45381
173.50  (b)(6) amended.............................................45183
173.51  (a) and (b) amended........................................45379
173.52  (a) amended................................................45379

[[Page 1139]]

173.56  (a)(2), (b)(1) introductory text, (4), (c) introductory 
        text, (f), (g), (i), (j) introductory text and (3) amended
                                                                   45379
173.58  (d) and (e) amended........................................45379
173.59  Amended....................................................45183
    Amended........................................................45379
173.61  (e)(3) revised; (e)(8) added...............................33429
    (e)(2) revised.................................................45381
173.62  (b) table and (c) table amended............................33429
    (c) table amended..............................................45382
    (a) revised; (c) table amended.................................45183
    (c)(5) amended.................................................45380
173.115  (a) introductory text, (1), (2), (c) introductory text, 
        (i) and (j) amended........................................45380
    (c)(2) amended.................................................45381
    (g) amended....................................................45382
173.120  (d) amended...............................................45379
    (c)(3) amended.................................................45381
173.121  (b)(2)(ii) amended........................................45381
173.124  (a)(2)(iii)(C) amended.....................................8647
    (a)(1)(ii) introductory text, (2)(i)(E), (iii)(D) and (c) 
amended............................................................45379
173.125  (c)(2)(ii)(B), (C), (d)(1), (2) and (3) amended...........45379
173.128  (e) amended................................................8647
    (a)(3), (d)(1) introductory text amended.......................45380
173.132  (d) amended...............................................45380
    (a)(1)(iii)(B) revised.........................................45382
173.133  (a)(2)(i) table amended...................................45183
    (b)(1)(i), (iv) Table, (2)(i)(A), (ii)(A), (iii)(A), (iv)(A) 
and (B) amended....................................................45381
    Corrected......................................................49556
173.150  (d)(2) revised............................................33430
    (d)(2) amended.................................................45382
173.152  (b)(3)(i), (ii) and (4)(i) amended........................45381
173.153  (c)(2) amended............................................45381
173.159  (f) amended...............................................45379
    (d)(3)(ii) amended.............................................45380
173.161  (b) amended...............................................45381
173.162  (a) introductory text and (1) revised.....................33430
173.166  (b)(2) amended.............................................8647
    (a) amended....................................................45183
    (b)(1), (3)(ii), (c) and (d)(1) amended........................45379
173.171  (d) amended...............................................45379
173.172  (a) and (b) amended.......................................45380
173.181  (a)(2) amended............................................45183
    (a) amended....................................................45380
173.185  (c)(3) amended.............................................8647
    Revised........................................................33430
    (i) amended....................................................45379
173.189  (d)(4)(iii) amended.......................................45380
173.194  (b)(1) amended............................................45183
    (a), (b)(1) and (2) amended....................................45381
173.196  (f) amended...............................................45380
173.214  Amended...................................................45379
173.220  (b)(1) and (4) amended....................................45381
173.222  (b)(3) amended............................................45379
173.224  (b)(4) revised; (b)(7) table amended; (d) removed.........33431
    (c)(1) amended.................................................45379
173.225  (b) table amended; (e) introductory text, (3) and (5) 
        revised....................................................33431
    (b)(4) introductory text, (8) table, (c)(1), (d)(3) and (e)(5) 
heading and introductory text amended..............................45380
    (e)(3)(i)(B) amended...........................................45382
173.226  (b) introductory text amended.............................45380
173.227  (b) introductory text amended.............................45380
173.240  (c) and (d) revised.......................................33435
    (d) heading and introductory text, (1)(i), (2) introductory 
text, (i) and (ii) amended.........................................45380
    (d)(1)(vi) amended.............................................45382
173.241  (c) and (d) revised.......................................33435
    (d) heading, (1) introductory text, (2) introductory text, 
(i)(A), (ii) and (iii) amended.....................................45380
173.242  (c) introductory text and (d) revised.....................33435
    (d) heading, (1) introductory text, (i)(A), (ii)(A), (2) 
introductory text and (i) through (iv) amended.....................45380
    (d)(1)(ii)(F) revised..........................................45382
173.243  (c) and (d) revised.......................................33435
    (d)(1), (2)(i), (ii) and (iii) amended.........................45380
173.245  (a) and (b) amended.......................................45379
173.247  (c) revised...............................................33436
    (g)(1)(iii)(C) and (iv) amended................................45382
173.249  Introductory text and (a) amended.........................45183
173.300a  (c), (d), (e), (g), (h) and (i) amended..................45379
    (a)(2) amended.................................................45382
173.300b  (c) through (g) amended..................................45379
173.300c  (a) introductory text and (b) amended....................45379
173.301  (d)(2) amended............................................33436

[[Page 1140]]

    (j)(1)(i) amended..............................................45380
    (d)(3) amended.................................................45183
    (g)(5) amended.................................................45380
173.302  (c)(3) amended............................................45382
173.303  (b) amended...............................................45380
173.304  (a)(2) table and (b) amended..............................33436
    (a)(2) table, (e)(1) and (f)(1) amended........................45382
173.305  (c)(1) amended............................................45379
173.306  (a)(4)(iii) revised.......................................33436
    (a)(3)(i), (b)(1) introductory text, (f)(4)(i), (ii), (5) and 
(g)(3) amended.....................................................45380
    (b) heading amended............................................45382
173.308  (a)(1) amended............................................45381
173.309  (a)(3)(i) amended..................................45380, 45381
173.314  (c) table and (g) introductory text amended...............33436
    (c) table and (o) amended......................................45380
    (c) table, (j), (l), (n) and (o) amended.......................45381
    (g)(4), (l) and (o) amended....................................45382
173.315  (a) introductory text, (i)(1)(iii), (3), (4) and (8) 
        revised; (a) table, (b) introductory text and (h) table 
        amended; (i)(7) removed....................................33436
    (l)(6) amended.................................................45184
    (i)(12), (k)(2), (n)(1) table, (3) introductory text, (i) and 
(n)(5)(iii) amended................................................45380
    (i)(2), (3), (5) through (9), (11), (13), (k)(5), (n) heading, 
(1) introductory text, (2)(ii), (3) heading, (ii), (o) heading, 
(2) and (3) amended................................................45381
    (i)(10), (13), (n)(1)(v) table, (i) introductory text and (4) 
amended............................................................45382
173.316  (d) amended...............................................45379
173.318  (f)(4) amended............................................45379
173.319  (d)(2) amended............................................45184
    (a)(4)(iii), (c), (e)(1) and (2)(i) amended....................45380
    (e)(4) amended.................................................45383
173.320  (c) revised...............................................33436
173.323  (c)(1) amended............................................45380
    (i) amended....................................................45383
173.334  (d) amended...............................................45379
173.335  (a) amended...............................................45380
173.337  Introductory text amended.................................45380
173.340  (a), (b) and (c)(4) amended...............................45379
173.403  Amended............................................45184, 45380
    Amended........................................................45383
173.411  (c) amended...............................................45379
    (b)(4)(ii) revised.............................................45383
173.412  (f) amended...............................................45380
    (b) amended....................................................45381
173.416  (f) amended...............................................45380
173.417  (a)(6)(viii), (b)(1) Table 4, (2)(i) and (ii) Table 5 
        amended....................................................45380
    (a)(6)(iv), (b)(2)(ii) and Table 5 amended.....................45381
173.419  (c) amended...............................................45380
173.425  Table 7 amended...........................................45383
173.427  (a)(1) amended............................................45380
173.433  (b) amended...............................................45184
    (b) amended....................................................45380
173.435  Table amended.............................................45184
173.441  (b)(3) amended............................................45380
173.443  (d)(1) amended............................................45380
173.447  (a) amended...............................................45380
173.453  (d) amended...............................................45380
    (a), (b)(2), (3), (d) and (e) amended..........................45383
173.457  (b)(4) amended............................................45379
173.459  (b) introductory text amended.............................45380
173.465  (c)(2), (3), (4), (d)(1)(ii), (e)(1) and (2) amended......45380
    (b) and (e)(1) amended.........................................45381
173.466  (a)(1) and (2) amended....................................45380
173.469  (c)(1)(v), (d)(1) and (2) amended.........................45184
    (b)(2)(i) and (3)(iv) amended..................................45380
    (b)(2)(ii), (3)(i) and (v) amended.............................45381
    (b)(1) amended.................................................45381
173.471  (e) amended...............................................45379
173.472  (f) amended...............................................45379
173.473  (a)(1) amended............................................45379
173.476  (a) and (c) introductory text amended.....................45379
173  Appendix H amended............................................45381
174.16  (b)(1), (2) and (3) amended................................45383
174.63  Heading and (a) amended....................................45383
174.81  (e)(5), (g)(3)(iv), (v), (h) and (i) amended...............45383
174.83  (f) amended................................................45383
174.84  Amended....................................................45383
174.85  (d) table amended..........................................45383
174.101  (a), (b), (c), (d) (h), (l), (n) and (o) introductory 
        text amended...............................................45383
174.102  (a) and (b) amended.......................................45383
174.103  (a) amended...............................................45383

[[Page 1141]]

174.104  Heading, (a), (b) introductory text, (c), (d), (e) and 
        (f) amended................................................45383
174.105  Amended...................................................45383
174.106  Heading, (a), (b) and (c) amended.........................45383
174.110  Amended...................................................45383
174.112  Heading, (a), (b), (c) introductory text and (3) amended 
                                                                   45383
174.115  Heading, (a), (b) and (3) amended.........................45383
174.700  (c) and (d) amended.......................................45383
174.715  (b) amended...............................................45383
175.10  (a)(10) and (16) revised; (a)(17) added....................33436
    (a)(2), (4)(ii), (iv), (15) and (b)(2) amended.................45383
175.30  (d)(1) and (2) revised.....................................45184
175.31  (b)(1) amended.............................................45184
175.33  (a) introductory text revised..............................33437
175.75  (a)(1) amended.............................................45184
175.78  Revised....................................................33437
    (a) Table 1 amended............................................45383
175.85  (a) revised................................................33438
    (i)(3) amended.................................................45383
    (c)(1)(iv) amended.............................................45384
175.90  (d)(2) amended.............................................45184
175.310  Introductory text, (c)(1), (2) and (3) amended............45383
175.320  (a) table amended..................................45383, 45384
175.701  (b)(3) and (c) introductory text amended..................45383
175.702  (b)(2)(i)(A) and (B) amended..............................45383
176.2  Amended........................................8647, 33438, 45184
176.4  (b) introductory text and (c) amended.......................45384
176.5  (b)(8) amended...............................................8647
176.9  Introductory text amended...................................45384
176.11  (a) introductory text amended...............................8647
176.27  (b) amended.................................................8647
176.30  (a) introductory text amended...............................8647
    (a)(5) introductory text amended...............................45184
    (a)(5)(ii) revised.............................................45384
176.36  (b) amended................................................45384
176.63  (e) added..................................................33438
    (b) amended....................................................45184
176.74  (c) amended................................................45184
176.76  (d) and (f)(2) amended.....................................45184
    (h)(5) and (i) amended.........................................45384
176.80  Heading revised............................................45184
176.83  (a)(6), (7) introductory text, (b) introductory text, 
        (c)(2)(iii) and (iv) amended...............................45184
    (a)(6), (c)(2)(ii) through (v), (f)(4) table and (g)(3) tables 
amended; (b), (f) and (g) revised..................................45384
176.84  (b) table amended; (c)(1) and (2) table revised; (c)(3) 
        removed....................................................33438
    (a) and (c)(2) amended.........................................45185
    (b) table amended..............................................45384
176.88  Heading revised............................................45185
176.95  Heading revised............................................45185
176.99  Amended....................................................45384
176.100  Amended...................................................45385
176.104  (h) introductory text and (j) introductory text amended 
                                                                   45384
    (i) amended....................................................45385
176.112  Heading revised...........................................45185
    Amended........................................................45384
176.116  (e)(3) amended............................................45384
    (e)(2) amended.................................................45385
176.128  (c) amended...............................................33438
    (c) amended....................................................45384
176.133  Amended...................................................45185
176.136  (e) amended...............................................33438
    (b) and (c) amended............................................45185
176.137  (c) amended...............................................45185
176.142  (a) revised...............................................33438
    (b)(1) amended.................................................45384
176.144  (c) amended...............................................45384
    (a) table amended..............................................45385
176.145  (b) amended...............................................45384
176.150  (a) and (b) amended.......................................45384
176.164  (c) amended...............................................45384
176.166  (a)(1) and (b) table amended..............................45384
    (b) table amended..............................................45385
176.168  (d) amended...............................................45384
176.172  (c) amended...............................................45384
176.192  (a) amended...............................................45384
176.194  (f) amended...............................................45185
    (c) amended.............................................45384, 45385
176.210  Amended...................................................45185
176.315  (a) amended........................................45384, 45385
176.340  (c) amended...............................................45185
    (b)(2), (7) and (8) amended....................................45384
176.400--176.415 (Subpart J)  Heading amended......................45385
176.400  Heading, (c) and (d) amended..............................45384
176.410  Heading, (a)(1) and (c) introductory text amended.........45384
176.415  (c)(4) amended............................................45185
    Heading, (b)(5), (c)(1) and (5) amended........................45384

[[Page 1142]]

    (a)(1) amended.................................................45385
176.700  (c) amended...............................................45385
176.704  (e)(2) amended............................................45384
    (b) and (d) amended............................................45385
176.720  Added.....................................................33439
176.905  (a)(5), (i)(2) and (5) amended............................45384
    (i)(1) and (2) amended.........................................45385
177.834  (i)(3) amended............................................45385
177.835  (c) introductory text, (f) and (j) amended................45385
177.840  (e) amended...............................................45185
    (d), (e) (g), (h) introductory text, (i), (m), (o), (p)(1), 
(2) introductory text, (q)(1), (r)(2), (t) and (u) amended.........45385
177.842  (b)(2) and (f) amended....................................45385
177.848  (g)(3)(vi) revised........................................33439
    (g)(3)(iv) amended.............................................45185
    (e)(5), (g)(3)(v), (h) and (i) amended.........................45385
177.854  (f)(1) and (g)(2)(iv) amended.............................45385
177.870  (d) amended...............................................45385
178.3  (a)(2) and (b)(2) amended...................................45386
178.33-8  (a) amended..............................................45387
178.33-9  (a)(2) amended...........................................45386
178.33a-2  (b) amended.............................................45387
178.33a-8  (a) amended.............................................45386
178.33a-9  (a)(2) amended..........................................45386
178.35  (f)(1)(iv) amended.........................................45185
178.36  (j) amended................................................45185
    (a)(1), (2), (e)(1), (f), (i)(2) and (k)(3)(iii) amended.......45386
    (a)(2)(iii) and (f) amended....................................45387
178.37  (a)(1), (2) introductory text, (e)(1), (i)(2) and 
        (k)(3)(iii) amended........................................45386
    (a)(2)(iii) and (f)(1) amended; (f)(2) and (3) revised.........45387
178.38  (j) amended................................................45185
    (a), (e)(1), (f), (i)(2) and (k)(3)(iii) amended...............45386
    (o) introductory text amended..................................45387
    (f) amended....................................................45388
178.39  (j) amended................................................45185
    (a)(1), (i)(2) and (k)(3)(iii) amended.........................45386
    (f) amended....................................................35288
178.42  (a), (f)(1), (2) and (3) amended...........................45386
178.44  (l) amended................................................45185
    (a), (f)(2), (i)(2) and (m)(3)(iii) amended....................45386
178.45  (j)(4) amended.............................................45185
    (d)(1) and (2)(ii) amended.....................................45386
    (a) and (g)(4) amended.........................................45387
    (d)(2)(iii) amended............................................35288
178.46  (c)(5)(ii), (g)(2), (3)(i), (ii) and (iii) amended.........45387
    (d) amended....................................................35288
178.47  (a) and (j)(2) amended.....................................45386
    (f) introductory text amended..................................45387
    (f)(1) and (2) amended.........................................35288
178.50  (d) introductory text amended..............................45185
    (a), (f)(1)(i), (ii), (iii), (i)(2) and (k)(3)(iii) amended....45386
    (f)(2) amended.................................................35288
178.51  (g)(1) amended.............................................45185
    (a) introductory text, (f)(1)(iii), (2), (3), (j)(3)(iii), (k) 
and (l)(3) amended.................................................45386
178.53  (a), (h)(2) and (j)(5)(iii) amended........................45386
    (e) introductory text, (1) and (2) amended.....................45388
178.55  (a) and (i)(2) amended.....................................45386
    (f) and (k)(3)(iii) amended....................................45387
178.56  (a) and (i)(2) amended.....................................45386
    (f)(1)(ii), (2), (j)(3)(iii), (k) and (l)(3) amended...........45387
178.57  (a) introductory text amended..............................45386
    (d)(3), (f)(1), (j)(3)(iii), (k) and (l)(3) amended............45387
    (f)(6) amended.................................................45388
178.58  (a) and (i)(2) amended.....................................45386
    (m)(5)(iii) amended............................................45387
    (f)(1) and (2) amended.........................................35288
178.59  (a) introductory text and (h)(4) amended...................45386
    (j)(3)(iii) amended............................................45387
178.60  (a) and (j)(4) amended.....................................45386
    (g)(1) introductory text, (l)(3)(iii), (m) and (n)(3) amended 
                                                                   45387
    (g)(1)(i) amended..............................................45388
178.61  (a), (f)(3), (j)(3)(iii), (k) and (l)(3) amended...........45387
    (f)(4) amended.................................................35288
178.65  (d)(1) and (2) amended.....................................45389
178.68  (a) amended................................................45386
    (f)(1)(i), (2), (h)(4) introductory text and (l)(1) amended....45387
178.245-3  Note 1 amended..........................................45387
178.270-2  (c) amended.............................................45386
    (b) amended....................................................45389
178.270-4  (b)(1), (2) and (3) amended.............................45387
178.270-5  (d).....................................................45387
    (b)(1) and (2) amended.........................................45389
178.270-9  Amended.................................................45387

[[Page 1143]]

178.270-10  (a) and (b) amended....................................45387
178.270-11  (c)(4) amended.........................................45386
    (a)(2), (c)(1)(i) and (ii) amended.............................45387
    (a)(1) revised; (a)(2), (3), (b)(1), (c)(2), (d)(4), 
(e)(2)(i), (ii), (4) amended.......................................45389
178.270-12  (b) and (e) amended....................................45387
178.270-13  (a) amended............................................45387
178.270-14  (b)(7) and (c)(2) amended..............................45387
178.271-1  (b) amended.............................................45387
    (b) amended....................................................45387
178.272-2  (b)(1) and (2) amended..................................45387
178.273  Added.....................................................33439
178.274  Added.....................................................33440
178.275  Added.....................................................33445
178.276  Added.....................................................33448
178.277  Added.....................................................33450
178.318-3  Amended.................................................45185
178.337-1  (b) Note 1 amended......................................45387
178.337-8  (a)(3), (4)(i), (ii), (v) and (vi) amended..............45387
178.338-1  (a)(1) and (f)(1) amended...............................45387
178.345-1  (f) amended.............................................45387
    (c) and (k) introductory text amended..........................45389
178.345-10  (b)(3)(ii) amended.....................................45389
178.345-14  (b)(3) amended.........................................45389
178.346-1  (b) amended.............................................45387
178.346-3  (b)(3) amended..........................................45389
178.347-1  (c) amended.............................................45387
178.352-2  (a) amended.............................................45387
    (b) revised....................................................45389
178.352-3  (a), (b), (c)(1), (2)(i), (ii), (iii) and (3) amended 
                                                                   45387
    (a) and (c)(3) amended.........................................45389
178.352-6  (a)(3) amended..........................................45386
178.354-2  (a) amended.............................................45387
178.354-3  (a) introductory text, (b), (c) introductory text and 
        (e) amended................................................45387
178.356-1  (b)(1), (2) and (3) amended.............................45387
    (c) amended....................................................45389
178.356-2  (a)(2) and (c) amended..................................45387
178.356-3  (a) amended.............................................45387
178.358-1  (b) and (c) amended.....................................45387
178.358-2  (a) introductory text, (2) and (3) amended..............45387
178.358-3  (b)(2) and (4) revised; (b)(3) amended..................45389
178.358-5  (b)(5) amended..........................................45386
178.360-1  (b) amended.............................................45387
178.360-3  (a) amended.............................................45387
178.362-1  (b)(1) through (6) amended..............................45387
178.362-2  (a)(1), (2), (b), (d)(2), (3) and (e)(1) through (5)....45387
178.362-3  (b) amended.............................................45387
178.362-6  (b) amended.............................................45386
178.364-1  (b) amended.............................................45387
178.364-2  (a), (b), (d), (e) and (f) amended......................45387
178.364-3  Revised.................................................45389
    Amended........................................................45387
178.503  (a)(8) and (c)(1)(ii) amended.............................45386
178.509  (b)(1) amended............................................45386
178.601  (e), (g)(7), (h), (i) introductory text, (2) and (k) 
        amended....................................................45386
178.603  (b) amended...............................................45386
178.604  (b)(2) amended............................................45386
178.605  (b) amended...............................................45386
    (d)(2), (3) and concluding text revised........................45390
178.606  (b) and (c)(1) amended....................................45386
178.608  (b)(5) amended............................................45386
178.700  (a) and (c) introductory text amended.....................45386
     (c)(1) amended................................................45387
178.702  Heading, (a) introductory text, (1), (2) and (b) amended 
                                                                   45386
    (a)(1) table amended...........................................45387
178.703  Heading and (a)(1) introductory text revised; (a)(1)(ii) 
        amended....................................................33451
    Heading, (a)(1) introductory text, (i), (ii), (iii)(A), (B), 
(C), (v), (vi), (vii), (viii), (2)(i) through (iv), (b) 
introductory text, (1) introductory text, (i), (2) introductory 
text, (i), (3), (4), (5), (6) introductory text, (i) and (ii) 
amended............................................................45386
178.704  Heading, (a), (b), (c) (d) introductory text, (e) and (f) 
        amended....................................................45386
178.705  Heading and (c)(1)(iv)(A) revised; (c)(1)(iv)(C) added....33452
    Heading, (a) introductory text, (b) introductory text, (1), 
(2), (c) introductory text, (1)(ii), (iii) introductory text, 
(ii), (2) introductory text and (i) amended........................45386
    (c)(1)(iii)(A), (B), (c)(1)(iv)(A), (B) (2)(i) amended.........45387

[[Page 1144]]

178.706  Heading, (a) introductory text, (1), (3), (5), (b), (c) 
        introductory text, (1), (3) and (4) amended................45386
    (c)(4) amended.................................................45387
178.707  Heading, (a)(1) introductory text, (i) through (vi), (b) 
        introductory text, (1), (c) introductory text, (2), (3) 
        introductory text, (iv), (4) introductory text, (5) 
        introductory text, (i), (ii), (iv) and (6) amended.........45386
     (c)(3)(iv) and (6) amended....................................45387
178.708  Heading, (a), (b) introductory text, (1), (c) 
        introductory text, (1), (2) introductory text, (ii), (3), 
        (4) introductory text, (4)(i), (ii) and (iv) amended.......45386
178.709  Heading, (a) introductory text, (b) introductory text, 
        (1), (c) introductory text, (1), (2) introductory text, 
        (i), (iv), (3), (4) introductory text, (i), (ii) and (iv) 
        amended....................................................45386
178.710  Heading, (a) introductory text, (b) introductory text, 
        (1), (3), (c) introductory text, (1), (2) and (4) through 
        (7) amended................................................45386
178.800--178.819 (Subpart O)  Heading revised......................45386
178.801  (i) amended...............................................33452
    (a), (b), (c)(1), through (6), (7) introductory text, (ii), 
(d), (e)(1), (2) introductory text, (i), (ii), (f)(1), 
introductory text, (i), (ii), (2), (g), (h), (i), (j) introductory 
text, (2), (k), (l)(1) and (2) amended.............................45386
178.802  Heading, (a) introductory text and (c) amended............45386
178.803  Heading, introductory text and table amended..............45386
    Table amended..................................................45390
178.810  (a), (b)(1), (2), (3), (c), (d)(1) introductory text, 
        (3)(i) and (e) amended.....................................45386
178.811  (a) through (d) amended...................................45386
178.812  (c)(1) revised; (c)(3) added..............................33452
    (a), (b)(1), (2), (c)(1), (2) introductory text and (d) 
amended............................................................45386
178.813  (a) and (d) amended.......................................45185
    (a) through (d) amended........................................45386
178.814  (a) amended...............................................45185
     (a), (b), (c), (d)(1) through (4), (5) introductory text, 
(i)(A), (ii)(A), (B), (e)(1), (2) and (3) amended..................45386
178.815  (a), (b)(1), (2), (c)(1), (2), (3), (4) introductory 
        text, (i), (ii), (d), (e)(1), (2) and (3) amended..........45386
178.816  (a), (b), (c), (d) introductory text and (e) amended......45186
178.817  (a) through (d) amended...................................45386
178.818  (a) through (d) amended...................................45386
178.819  (a) , (b)(1), (2), (3) and (c) amended....................45186
179.2  Amended.....................................................45386
    (a)(4) and (9) removed.........................................45390
179.12  (b) amended................................................45390
179.15  (e) introductory text, (2), (f)(1), (3) and (4) amended....45390
179.16  (a)(3) amended.............................................45390
179.18  (c) amended................................................45390
179.100  Heading amended; second 179.100 redesignated as 179.101 
                                                                   45186
179.100-7  (b) table amended.......................................45186
179.100-14  (a) introductory text amended..........................45186
179.100-18  (c) amended............................................45186
179.101  Redesignated from second 179.100..........................45186
179.101-1  Table amended...........................................45390
179.102-4  Introductory text amended...............................33452
    (a) introductory text amended..................................45186
    (i) amended....................................................45390
179.102-17  (d) revised; (l) amended...............................45390
179.103-5  (b)(4) amended..........................................45186
179.200-1  Heading amended.........................................45186
179.200-6  (a), (b) and (c) amended................................45390
179.200-7  (c) table and (h) amended...............................45186
179.200-9  (a) and (b) amended.....................................45186
179.200-11  Amended................................................45186
179.200-13  Heading amended........................................45390
179.200-14  (c) and (e)(2) amended.................................45186
    (b) amended....................................................45390
179.201-1  Table amended...........................................45390
179.201-3  (a)(1) and (2) amended..................................45186
179.201-4  Amended.................................................45186
179.201-6  (d) amended.............................................45186
179.201-8  (a) amended.............................................45390

[[Page 1145]]

179.220-6  (a) and (b) amended.....................................45390
179.220-7  (c) table amended.......................................45186
179.220-24  Heading amended........................................45390
    Corrected......................................................49556
179.221-1  Table amended...........................................45390
179.300-6  (a) amended.............................................45186
    (a) and (b) amended............................................45390
179.300-15  Heading and (c) revised................................45390
179.300-16  (b) amended............................................45390
179.300-17  Heading and (b) revised; (c) amended...................45390
179.301  (a) table amended.........................................45390
179.400-4  (a)(5) amended..........................................45186
179.400-8  (a) through (d) amended.................................45391
179.400-9  (d) amended.............................................45391
179.400-17  (a)(1) amended.........................................45186
179.400-20  (d) amended............................................45391
179.400-25  (a) amended............................................45391
179.401-1  Table amended...........................................45390
179.500-3  (d) amended.............................................45186
    (c)(2) amended.................................................45391
179.500-4  (a) amended.............................................45391
179.500-7  (b) amended.............................................45391
179.500-10  (a) amended............................................45390
179.500-12  (a) amended............................................45391
    Heading amended................................................45391
179.500-16  Heading and (b) revised; (a) amended...................45391
179.500-17  (a)(5) and (6) revised.................................45391
179.500-18  (c) table amended......................................45391
    Appendix A amended.............................................45390
180.350  Amended...................................................45391
180.351  Heading, (a) and (b) amended..............................45391
180.352  (b)(1) amended............................................45186
    (a), (b) heading, introductory text, (3)(i), (ii), (c)(1), 
(2)(i) introductory text, (A), (B), (C), (ii) introductory text, 
(C), (iii) introductory text, (B) and (f) amended..................45391
180.405  (h)(2), (m)(2), (3) and (n) amended.......................45391
180.409  (b) amended...............................................45391
180.415  (b) amended...............................................45187
180.419  (b)(1) amended............................................45187
180.509  (h)(2)(i), (ii) and (j)(2) amended........................45391
180.511  (e) amended...............................................45187
180.515  (c) amended...............................................45391
180.519  (b)(1) amended............................................45187
    (b)(2), (3), (4) and (5) table amended.........................45391
    (b)(3), (4) and (5) table......................................45392
180.601--180.605 (Subpart G)  Added................................33452

                                  2002

  (Regulations published from January 1, 2002, through October 1, 2002)

49 CFR
                                                                   67 FR
                                                                    Page
Chapter I
105  Added.........................................................42951
105.25  (a)(2) amended; (b) removed; (c) redesignated as new (b); 
        (b)(2)(iv) redesignated as (b)(2)(v); new (b)(2)(iv) added
                                                                   61010
106  Revised.......................................................42954
107.1--107.14 (Subpart A)  Heading revised.........................42957
107.1  Removed; new 107.1 redesignated from 107.3 and amended......42958
    Amended........................................................51639
107.3  Redesignated as 107.1.......................................42958
107.5  Removed.....................................................42958
107.7  Removed.....................................................42958
107.9  Removed.....................................................42958
107.11  Removed....................................................42958
107.13  Removed....................................................42958
107.14  Removed....................................................42958
107.105  (a)(1) revised............................................61010
    (a)(3) and (b) amended.........................................61011
107.107  (b)(1) revised............................................61010
    (b)(4) amended.................................................61011
107.109  (a)(1) revised............................................61011
107.111  Amended...................................................61011
107.117  (d)(3), (4) and (5) revised...............................61011
107.127  (a) and (b) amended.......................................61011
107.305  (a) and (b)(4) amended....................................61011
107.321  (b)(2) amended............................................61011
107.402  (a) and (b)(1) amended....................................61011
107.502  (d) revised...............................................61011
107.503  (a)(7) amended............................................61011
107.601  (a)(2) amended............................................61011
107.608  (e) amended...............................................61011
107.612  (b)(1) amended; eff. 1-6-03...............................58345
107.616  (a) and (b) revised; eff. 1-6-03..........................58345
107.705  (a)(1) revised; (a)(5) and (d) amended....................61011
107.711  Amended...................................................61011
107.801--107.807 (Subpart I)  Added................................51639
130.5  Amended.....................................................61011
171.2  (d)(3) revised..............................................51640

[[Page 1146]]

171.6  (b)(2) table amended (OMB numbers)...................51640, 61012
171.7  (a)(3) table amended.................................51640, 53132
    Regulation at 67 FR 53132 effective date corrected to 2-14-03 
                                                                   54967
    (a)(2)(i) revised; (a)(3) table amended........................61012
171.8  Corrected; CFR correction...................................13095
    Amended...................................42958, 51641, 53133, 61012
    Regulation at 67 FR 53133 effective date corrected to 2-14-03 
                                                                   54967
171.11  Introductory text amended..................................61012
171.12  (b)(5) and (e)(4) amended..................................15739
    (b)(15) revised................................................51641
    (d) introductory text amended..................................61012
171.14  (d)(4) amended.............................................15739
    (e) added......................................................53133
    Regulation at 67 FR 53133, effective date corrected to 2-14-03
                                                                   54967
171.15  (a)(3) and (b) introductory text amended...................53133
    Regulation at 67 FR 53133 effective date corrected to 2-14-03 
                                                                   54967
172.101  Appendix A amended.........................................9927
    Appendix A corrected...........................................13680
    (c)(11)(iv)(A) revised; table amended..........................15739
    Appendix B amended.............................................15743
    Table amended...........................................51641, 53133
    Regulation at 67 FR 53133 effective date corrected to 2-14-03 
                                                                   54967
    Corrected......................................................57635
    (j)(5) added; table and Appendix B amended.....................61013
172.102  (c)(1), (4), (7)(i) and (iv) table amended................15743
    Amended........................................................53135
    Regulation at 67 FR 53135 effective date corrected to 2-14-03 
                                                                   54967
    (c)(1) amended; (c)(4) introductory text revised...............61013
172.201  Heading revised; (e) added................................46127
172.203  (k) introductory text amended.............................61013
172.323  Added.....................................................53135
    Regulation at 67 FR 53135 effective date corrected to 2-14-03 
                                                                   54967
172.407  (d)(4)(ii) amended........................................61013
172.432  Amended...................................................53136
    Regulation at 67 FR 53136 effective date corrected to 2-14-03 
                                                                   54967
172.502  (b)(2) revised............................................53137
    Regulation at 67 FR 53137 effective date corrected to 2-14-03 
                                                                   54967
172.519  (b)(4) amended............................................15743
172  Appendix A corrected..........................................13680
173.4  (a)(1)(ii) amended..........................................61013
173.6  (a)(4) redesignated as (a)(5); new (a)(4) added.............53137
    Regulation at 67 FR 53137 effective date corrected to 2-14-03 
                                                                   54967
173.10  (e) Note 2 amended.........................................61013
173.21  (k) amended................................................61013
173.24b  (e)(2) introductory text amended..........................15743
173.28  (f) added..................................................53138
    Regulation at 67 FR 53138 effective date corrected to 2-14-03 
                                                                   54967
173.32  (c)(2) amended.............................................15743
173.34  Removed....................................................51642
173.40  Revised....................................................51642
    (b) revised....................................................61289
173.54  (f) amended................................................61013
173.115  (c)(2) amended; (j) revised...............................51642
    (j) amended....................................................61013
173.150  (d)(2) amended............................................15743
    (e)(1) amended.................................................61013
173.134  Revised...................................................53138
    Regulation at 67 FR 53138 effective date corrected to 2-14-03 
                                                                   54967
173.163  Revised...................................................51643
173.185  (a) amended; (e)(3) revised...............................15743
173.192  Revised...................................................51643
173.196  Revised...................................................53140
    Regulation at 67 FR 53140 effective date corrected to 2-14-03 
                                                                   54967
173.197  Revised...................................................53140
    Regulation at 67 FR 53140 effective date corrected to 2-14-03 
                                                                   54967
173.198  (a) amended...............................................51643
173.199  Added.....................................................53142

[[Page 1147]]

    Regulation at 67 FR 53142 effective date corrected to 2-14-03 
                                                                   54967
173.225  (b)(3) amended............................................61013
173.226  (a) revised........................................51643, 61289
173.227  Heading and (a) revised...................................51643
173.228  Revised...................................................51643
    (b) revised....................................................61289
173.242  (c) introductory text amended.............................15743
173.243  (c) amended...............................................15743
173.247  Heading revised...........................................61013
173.300a  Removed..................................................51643
173.300b  Removed..................................................51643
173.300c  Removed..................................................51643
173.301  Revised...................................................51643
    (f)(2), (3) and (h)(1)(vii) revised; (h)(2)(ii) and (iii) 
amended; (h)(2)(iv) added..........................................61289
173.301a  Added....................................................51645
    (d)(3) revised.................................................61289
173.301b  Added....................................................51646
173.302  Revised...................................................51646
    (b)(1) revised.................................................61289
173.302a  Added....................................................51646
173.304  Revised...................................................51647
173.304a  Added....................................................51647
173.305  (b) amended...............................................51651
    (c)(1) amended.................................................61013
173.306  (g)(5) revised............................................51651
173.315  (a) table Note 2 amended; (q) added.......................51651
    (i)(1)(iv) and (j)(3) amended..................................61013
173.316  (a)(4) amended............................................61013
173.318  (a)(4) amended............................................61013
173.320  (c) amended...............................................61014
173.334  Revised...................................................51651
    (f) amended....................................................61014
173.336  Revised...................................................51651
173.337  Revised...................................................51651
    (a) and (b) amended............................................61014
173.415  (d) amended...............................................61014
173.416  (b) amended...............................................61014
173.417  (a)(5), (8)(i) and (b)(4) amended.........................61014
173.420  (a)(2)(i), (iii), (b) and (c) revised.....................61014
173.471  (d) and (e) revised.......................................61014
173.472  (f) revised...............................................61014
173.473  (a)(1) and (2) revised....................................61015
173.476  (c) introductory text revised.............................61015
174.24  Revised....................................................46128
174.81  (e)(6) and (g)(3)(vi) amended..............................15743
175.10  (a)(5) amended.............................................61015
175.30  (a)(2) revised.............................................46128
175.320  (b)(5) amended............................................61015
176.2  Amended.....................................................61015
176.24  Revised....................................................46128
176.84  (c)(2) amended.............................................15744
176.128  (c) revised...............................................61015
176.340  (b)(9) and (10) amended...................................61015
177.817  (a) revised; (f) added....................................46128
177.834  (a) and (g) revised.......................................53142
177.840  (a)(1) revised............................................51652
    (l) revised....................................................61015
    (a)(1) amended.................................................61289
177.843  (d) added.................................................53142
178.3  (b) introductory text, (1) amended..........................61015
178.35--178.68 (Subpart C)  Appendix A added.......................51654
178.35  (b) introductory text, (1), (c)(3)(iv), (d), (e) and 
        (f)(3) revised.............................................51652
178.36  (k)(3)(i) amended..........................................51652
178.37  (k)(3)(i) amended..........................................51652
178.38  (k)(3)(i) amended..........................................51652
178.39  (k)(3)(i) amended..........................................51652
178.44  (m)(3)(i) amended..........................................51652
178.45  (h) and (j)(3)(i) revised..................................51652
178.46  (b)(4) Table 1 revised; (b)(4) Table 2 amended.............51652
178.47  (d) amended................................................51653
178.50  (d) introductory text and (k)(3)(i) amended................51653
178.51  (d)(2), (j)(3)(i), (l)(1),(2) and (3) amended..............51653
    (f)(1)(i) amended..............................................61015
178.53  (d) and (j)(5)(i) amended..................................51653
178.55  (k)(3)(i) amended..........................................51653
178.56  (j)(3)(i), (l)(1), (2) and (3) amended.....................51653
178.57  (d)(5), (e)(3), (j)(3)(i), (l)(1), (2), (3), (4)(v), (vi), 
        (m)(1) and (o)(1) amended..................................51653
178.58  (d)(1) and (m)(5)(i) amended...............................51654
    (k)(2)(ii) revised.............................................61015
178.59  (d) and (j)(3)(i) amended..................................51654
    (j)(3)(iv) amended.............................................61016
178.60  (d), (l)(3)(i), (n)(1), (2) and (3) amended................51654
178.61  (d)(4), (j)(3)(i), (l)(1), (2), (3) and (m)(1) amended.....51654
    (b)(1) and (2) amended.........................................61016
178.65  (c)(4) amended.............................................51654
178.68  (j)(3)(i) and (l)(2) amended...............................51654
178.270-11  (d)(3) amended.........................................61016
178.273  (b)(8)(ii) amended........................................61016

[[Page 1148]]

178.274  (a)(3) and (d)(1)(i) amended..............................15744
178.338-17  (b) amended............................................61016
178.354-3  (a) introductory text amended...........................61016
178.356-3  (a) amended.............................................61016
178.358-5  (c) amended.............................................51660
178.362-1  (b)(6) amended..........................................61016
178.503  (f) added.................................................53143
    (e)(3) amended.................................................61016
178.601  (c)(1), (2) and (e) revised...............................53143
178.603  (e) introductory text revised.............................61016
178.609  Heading, (c) introductory text, (d)(1) introductory text, 
        (i), (iii), (iv), (e), (h)(1), (2) and (i) revised.........53143
    Regulation at 67 FR 53143 effective date corrected to 2-14-03 
                                                                   54967
178.707  (a) revised...............................................61016
179.100-7  (c)(1) table amended....................................51660
179.100-10  (c) amended............................................51660
179.102-1  (a)(1) amended..........................................51660
179.102-4  (a)(1) amended..........................................51660
179.102-17  (b)(1) amended.........................................51660
179.200-7  (d) table amended.......................................51660
179.201-2  (a) amended.............................................61016
179.201-5  (a) and (b) amended.....................................51660
179.220-7  (d) table amended.......................................51660
179.400-5  (a) introductory text amended...........................51660
179.500-10  (a) amended............................................61016
180.201--180.215 (Subpart C)  Added................................51660
180.417  (c)(2) amended............................................61016
180.605  (d), (e) and (h)(3) amended...............................15744


                      []